From eb9ec1c794a0d3b8522375c7a87ac3ee999c8a66 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Christian Lohmaier Date: Tue, 9 May 2017 16:11:32 +0200 Subject: remove obsolete oldref attribute (removes one context line in pot) also remove obsolete l10n attribute (doesn't affect translations/pot) Change-Id: I809866ea7b16cb1cacad9efacb6fdeebae38ea9f --- source/text/sbasic/guide/access2base.xhp | 64 +- source/text/sbasic/guide/control_properties.xhp | 6 +- source/text/sbasic/guide/create_dialog.xhp | 12 +- source/text/sbasic/guide/insert_control.xhp | 10 +- source/text/sbasic/guide/sample_code.xhp | 16 +- source/text/sbasic/guide/show_dialog.xhp | 10 +- source/text/sbasic/guide/translation.xhp | 64 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/00000002.xhp | 32 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/00000003.xhp | 320 ++++----- source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130000.xhp | 86 +-- source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130100.xhp | 20 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130500.xhp | 18 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/01000000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/01010210.xhp | 32 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/01020000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/01020200.xhp | 10 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/01020500.xhp | 20 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/01030000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/01030100.xhp | 12 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/01030200.xhp | 44 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/01030300.xhp | 40 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/01030400.xhp | 110 +-- source/text/sbasic/shared/01040000.xhp | 106 ++- source/text/sbasic/shared/01050000.xhp | 34 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/01050100.xhp | 20 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/01050200.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/01050300.xhp | 24 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/01170100.xhp | 36 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/01170101.xhp | 388 +++++------ source/text/sbasic/shared/01170103.xhp | 60 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11010000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11020000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11030000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11040000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11050000.xhp | 12 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11060000.xhp | 12 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11070000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11080000.xhp | 12 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11090000.xhp | 14 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11100000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11110000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11120000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11140000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11150000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11160000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11170000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11180000.xhp | 20 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11190000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/02/20000000.xhp | 174 ++--- source/text/sbasic/shared/03000000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03010000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03010100.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03010200.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03010300.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03020000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03020100.xhp | 2 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03020200.xhp | 2 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03020302.xhp | 20 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03020303.xhp | 34 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03020304.xhp | 22 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03020305.xhp | 20 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03020400.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03030000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03030100.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03030101.xhp | 30 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03030102.xhp | 22 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03030103.xhp | 24 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03030104.xhp | 24 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03030105.xhp | 38 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03030106.xhp | 24 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03030108.xhp | 20 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03030200.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03030201.xhp | 33 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03030202.xhp | 33 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03030300.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03050000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03050200.xhp | 24 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03050300.xhp | 18 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03060000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03070000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03080000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03080100.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03080200.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03080300.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03080400.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03080500.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03080600.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03080700.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03080800.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03090000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03090100.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03090103.xhp | 14 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03090200.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03090203.xhp | 36 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03090300.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03090302.xhp | 40 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03090400.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03090401.xhp | 18 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03090411.xhp | 12 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03100000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03100050.xhp | 14 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03100060.xhp | 14 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03100070.xhp | 14 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03100080.xhp | 14 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03101110.xhp | 18 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03101700.xhp | 38 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03102450.xhp | 14 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03102800.xhp | 16 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03103800.xhp | 40 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03103900.xhp | 42 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03104000.xhp | 18 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03104100.xhp | 20 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03104200.xhp | 24 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03104300.xhp | 22 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03104400.xhp | 26 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03104600.xhp | 32 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03104700.xhp | 10 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03110000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03120000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03120100.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03120105.xhp | 16 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03120200.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03120300.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03120312.xhp | 30 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03120313.xhp | 30 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03120315.xhp | 20 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03120400.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03120402.xhp | 20 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03130000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03130100.xhp | 10 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03130600.xhp | 16 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03131500.xhp | 18 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03131700.xhp | 22 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03131800.xhp | 28 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03131900.xhp | 36 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03132100.xhp | 23 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03132300.xhp | 22 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/03132500.xhp | 6 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/05060700.xhp | 156 ++--- source/text/sbasic/shared/keys.xhp | 38 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/main0211.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sbasic/shared/main0601.xhp | 10 +- source/text/scalc/00/00000004.xhp | 8 +- source/text/scalc/00/00000404.xhp | 80 +-- source/text/scalc/00/00000405.xhp | 56 +- source/text/scalc/00/00000412.xhp | 104 +-- source/text/scalc/01/01120000.xhp | 14 +- source/text/scalc/01/02110000.xhp | 102 +-- source/text/scalc/01/02120100.xhp | 82 ++- source/text/scalc/01/02140000.xhp | 18 +- source/text/scalc/01/02140100.xhp | 6 +- source/text/scalc/01/02140200.xhp | 6 +- source/text/scalc/01/02140300.xhp | 6 +- source/text/scalc/01/02140400.xhp | 6 +- source/text/scalc/01/02140500.xhp | 18 +- source/text/scalc/01/02140600.xhp | 84 +-- source/text/scalc/01/02150000.xhp | 46 +- source/text/scalc/01/02160000.xhp | 26 +- source/text/scalc/01/02170000.xhp | 14 +- source/text/scalc/01/02180000.xhp | 18 +- source/text/scalc/01/02190100.xhp | 4 +- source/text/scalc/01/02190200.xhp | 4 +- source/text/scalc/01/02210000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/scalc/01/04010000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/scalc/01/04010100.xhp | 6 +- source/text/scalc/01/04010200.xhp | 6 +- source/text/scalc/01/04020000.xhp | 24 +- source/text/scalc/01/04050000.xhp | 48 +- source/text/scalc/01/04050100.xhp | 8 +- source/text/scalc/01/04060000.xhp | 84 +-- source/text/scalc/01/04060100.xhp | 34 +- source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp | 310 ++++----- source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp | 497 +++++++------- source/text/scalc/01/04060105.xhp | 125 ++-- source/text/scalc/01/04060108.xhp | 62 +- source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp | 580 ++++++++-------- source/text/scalc/01/04060111.xhp | 132 ++-- source/text/scalc/01/04060112.xhp | 436 ++++++------ source/text/scalc/01/04060116.xhp | 429 ++++++------ source/text/scalc/01/04060119.xhp | 564 ++++++++-------- source/text/scalc/01/04060120.xhp | 74 +- source/text/scalc/01/04060182.xhp | 452 ++++++------- source/text/scalc/01/04060183.xhp | 260 +++---- source/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp | 568 +++++++--------- source/text/scalc/01/04060185.xhp | 747 ++++++++++----------- source/text/scalc/01/04060199.xhp | 152 ++--- source/text/scalc/01/04070000.xhp | 12 +- source/text/scalc/01/04070100.xhp | 48 +- source/text/scalc/01/04070200.xhp | 4 +- source/text/scalc/01/04070300.xhp | 26 +- source/text/scalc/01/04070400.xhp | 28 +- source/text/scalc/01/04090000.xhp | 22 +- source/text/scalc/01/05020000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/scalc/01/05020600.xhp | 26 +- source/text/scalc/01/05030000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/scalc/01/05030200.xhp | 12 +- source/text/scalc/01/05030300.xhp | 16 +- source/text/scalc/01/05030400.xhp | 10 +- source/text/scalc/01/05040000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/scalc/01/05040200.xhp | 12 +- source/text/scalc/01/05050000.xhp | 14 +- source/text/scalc/01/05050100.xhp | 12 +- source/text/scalc/01/05050300.xhp | 8 +- source/text/scalc/01/05060000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/scalc/01/05070000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp | 100 +-- source/text/scalc/01/05080000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/scalc/01/05080100.xhp | 4 +- source/text/scalc/01/05080200.xhp | 4 +- source/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp | 26 +- source/text/scalc/01/05080400.xhp | 4 +- source/text/scalc/01/05110000.xhp | 52 +- source/text/scalc/01/05120000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/scalc/01/06020000.xhp | 24 +- source/text/scalc/01/06030000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/scalc/01/06030100.xhp | 8 +- source/text/scalc/01/06030200.xhp | 4 +- source/text/scalc/01/06030300.xhp | 8 +- source/text/scalc/01/06030400.xhp | 4 +- source/text/scalc/01/06030500.xhp | 4 +- source/text/scalc/01/06030600.xhp | 4 +- source/text/scalc/01/06030700.xhp | 6 +- source/text/scalc/01/06030800.xhp | 6 +- source/text/scalc/01/06030900.xhp | 10 +- source/text/scalc/01/06031000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/scalc/01/06040000.xhp | 20 +- source/text/scalc/01/06050000.xhp | 40 +- source/text/scalc/01/06060000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/scalc/01/06060100.xhp | 18 +- source/text/scalc/01/06060200.xhp | 6 +- source/text/scalc/01/06070000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/scalc/01/06080000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/scalc/01/06130000.xhp | 18 +- source/text/scalc/01/12010000.xhp | 22 +- source/text/scalc/01/12010100.xhp | 26 +- source/text/scalc/01/12020000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/scalc/01/12030000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp | 36 +- source/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp | 66 +- source/text/scalc/01/12040000.xhp | 12 +- source/text/scalc/01/12040100.xhp | 6 +- source/text/scalc/01/12040201.xhp | 36 +- source/text/scalc/01/12040300.xhp | 12 +- source/text/scalc/01/12040400.xhp | 4 +- source/text/scalc/01/12040500.xhp | 4 +- source/text/scalc/01/12050000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/scalc/01/12050100.xhp | 30 +- source/text/scalc/01/12050200.xhp | 34 +- source/text/scalc/01/12060000.xhp | 22 +- source/text/scalc/01/12070000.xhp | 26 +- source/text/scalc/01/12070100.xhp | 22 +- source/text/scalc/01/12080000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/scalc/01/12080100.xhp | 6 +- source/text/scalc/01/12080200.xhp | 8 +- source/text/scalc/01/12080300.xhp | 16 +- source/text/scalc/01/12080400.xhp | 14 +- source/text/scalc/01/12080500.xhp | 44 +- source/text/scalc/01/12080600.xhp | 4 +- source/text/scalc/01/12080700.xhp | 6 +- source/text/scalc/01/12090000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/scalc/01/12090100.xhp | 24 +- source/text/scalc/01/12090101.xhp | 22 +- source/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp | 78 +-- source/text/scalc/01/12090103.xhp | 52 +- source/text/scalc/01/12090104.xhp | 20 +- source/text/scalc/01/12090105.xhp | 110 +-- source/text/scalc/01/12090106.xhp | 60 +- source/text/scalc/01/12090200.xhp | 6 +- source/text/scalc/01/12090300.xhp | 4 +- source/text/scalc/01/12090400.xhp | 42 +- source/text/scalc/01/12100000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/scalc/01/12120000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/scalc/01/12120100.xhp | 84 +-- source/text/scalc/01/12120200.xhp | 20 +- source/text/scalc/01/12120300.xhp | 34 +- source/text/scalc/01/format_graphic.xhp | 12 +- source/text/scalc/01/func_date.xhp | 22 +- source/text/scalc/01/func_datevalue.xhp | 21 +- source/text/scalc/01/func_day.xhp | 18 +- source/text/scalc/01/func_days.xhp | 16 +- source/text/scalc/01/func_days360.xhp | 16 +- source/text/scalc/01/func_eastersunday.xhp | 24 +- source/text/scalc/01/func_edate.xhp | 18 +- source/text/scalc/01/func_eomonth.xhp | 20 +- source/text/scalc/01/func_hour.xhp | 18 +- source/text/scalc/01/func_isoweeknum.xhp | 18 +- source/text/scalc/01/func_minute.xhp | 18 +- source/text/scalc/01/func_month.xhp | 16 +- source/text/scalc/01/func_now.xhp | 14 +- source/text/scalc/01/func_numbervalue.xhp | 20 +- source/text/scalc/01/func_second.xhp | 16 +- source/text/scalc/01/func_time.xhp | 20 +- source/text/scalc/01/func_today.xhp | 14 +- source/text/scalc/01/func_webservice.xhp | 30 +- source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknum.xhp | 50 +- source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknum_ooo.xhp | 26 +- source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknumadd.xhp | 20 +- source/text/scalc/01/func_workday.xhp | 20 +- source/text/scalc/01/func_year.xhp | 18 +- source/text/scalc/01/func_yearfrac.xhp | 42 +- source/text/scalc/01/text2columns.xhp | 24 +- source/text/scalc/02/02130000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/scalc/02/02140000.xhp | 18 +- source/text/scalc/02/02150000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/scalc/02/02160000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/scalc/02/02170000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/scalc/02/06010000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/scalc/02/06030000.xhp | 12 +- source/text/scalc/02/06040000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/scalc/02/06050000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/scalc/02/06060000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/scalc/02/06070000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/scalc/02/06080000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/scalc/02/08010000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/scalc/02/08080000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/scalc/02/10050000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/scalc/02/10060000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/scalc/02/18010000.xhp | 24 +- source/text/scalc/02/18020000.xhp | 16 +- source/text/scalc/04/01020000.xhp | 370 +++++----- source/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp | 160 ++--- source/text/scalc/05/OpenCL_options.xhp | 54 +- source/text/scalc/05/empty_cells.xhp | 74 +- source/text/scalc/guide/autofilter.xhp | 26 +- source/text/scalc/guide/autoformat.xhp | 38 +- source/text/scalc/guide/background.xhp | 28 +- source/text/scalc/guide/borders.xhp | 114 ++-- source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp | 40 +- source/text/scalc/guide/calc_timevalues.xhp | 10 +- source/text/scalc/guide/cell_enter.xhp | 28 +- source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp | 36 +- source/text/scalc/guide/cell_unprotect.xhp | 9 +- source/text/scalc/guide/cellcopy.xhp | 22 +- source/text/scalc/guide/cellreference_dragdrop.xhp | 21 +- source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences.xhp | 37 +- source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp | 21 +- source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp | 80 +-- source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_minusvalue.xhp | 11 +- source/text/scalc/guide/consolidate.xhp | 44 +- source/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp | 60 +- source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp | 43 +- source/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp | 17 +- source/text/scalc/guide/database_define.xhp | 21 +- source/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp | 42 +- source/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp | 17 +- source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot.xhp | 6 +- source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp | 24 +- source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp | 4 +- source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp | 16 +- source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_grouping.xhp | 14 +- source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_tipps.xhp | 10 +- source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_updatetable.xhp | 4 +- source/text/scalc/guide/dbase_files.xhp | 52 +- source/text/scalc/guide/design.xhp | 24 +- source/text/scalc/guide/edit_multitables.xhp | 10 +- source/text/scalc/guide/filters.xhp | 17 +- source/text/scalc/guide/finding.xhp | 44 +- source/text/scalc/guide/format_table.xhp | 26 +- source/text/scalc/guide/format_value.xhp | 14 +- source/text/scalc/guide/format_value_userdef.xhp | 53 +- source/text/scalc/guide/formula_copy.xhp | 24 +- source/text/scalc/guide/formula_enter.xhp | 28 +- source/text/scalc/guide/formula_value.xhp | 12 +- source/text/scalc/guide/formulas.xhp | 44 +- source/text/scalc/guide/fraction_enter.xhp | 8 +- source/text/scalc/guide/goalseek.xhp | 26 +- source/text/scalc/guide/html_doc.xhp | 26 +- source/text/scalc/guide/keyboard.xhp | 42 +- source/text/scalc/guide/main.xhp | 18 +- source/text/scalc/guide/mark_cells.xhp | 44 +- source/text/scalc/guide/matrixformula.xhp | 22 +- source/text/scalc/guide/move_dragdrop.xhp | 50 +- source/text/scalc/guide/multi_tables.xhp | 10 +- source/text/scalc/guide/multioperation.xhp | 70 +- source/text/scalc/guide/multitables.xhp | 30 +- source/text/scalc/guide/note_insert.xhp | 19 +- source/text/scalc/guide/numbers_text.xhp | 44 +- source/text/scalc/guide/print_details.xhp | 30 +- source/text/scalc/guide/print_exact.xhp | 10 +- source/text/scalc/guide/print_landscape.xhp | 34 +- source/text/scalc/guide/print_title_row.xhp | 36 +- source/text/scalc/guide/printranges.xhp | 48 +- source/text/scalc/guide/relativ_absolut_ref.xhp | 26 +- source/text/scalc/guide/rename_table.xhp | 41 +- source/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp | 30 +- source/text/scalc/guide/row_height.xhp | 28 +- source/text/scalc/guide/scenario.xhp | 34 +- source/text/scalc/guide/sorted_list.xhp | 12 +- source/text/scalc/guide/specialfilter.xhp | 102 +-- source/text/scalc/guide/super_subscript.xhp | 14 +- source/text/scalc/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp | 18 +- source/text/scalc/guide/table_rotate.xhp | 18 +- source/text/scalc/guide/table_view.xhp | 8 +- source/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp | 11 +- source/text/scalc/guide/text_rotate.xhp | 14 +- source/text/scalc/guide/text_wrap.xhp | 12 +- source/text/scalc/guide/userdefined_function.xhp | 54 +- source/text/scalc/guide/validity.xhp | 42 +- source/text/scalc/guide/value_with_name.xhp | 42 +- source/text/scalc/guide/webquery.xhp | 46 +- source/text/scalc/guide/year2000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/scalc/main0000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/scalc/main0100.xhp | 4 +- source/text/scalc/main0112.xhp | 22 +- source/text/scalc/main0200.xhp | 4 +- source/text/scalc/main0202.xhp | 52 +- source/text/scalc/main0203.xhp | 12 +- source/text/scalc/main0205.xhp | 28 +- source/text/scalc/main0206.xhp | 4 +- source/text/scalc/main0208.xhp | 8 +- source/text/scalc/main0210.xhp | 20 +- source/text/scalc/main0214.xhp | 4 +- source/text/scalc/main0218.xhp | 18 +- source/text/scalc/main0503.xhp | 32 +- source/text/schart/00/00000004.xhp | 116 ++-- source/text/schart/01/03010000.xhp | 46 +- source/text/schart/01/04010000.xhp | 24 +- source/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp | 42 +- source/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp | 52 +- source/text/schart/01/04040000.xhp | 32 +- source/text/schart/01/04050000.xhp | 74 +- source/text/schart/01/04060000.xhp | 75 +-- source/text/schart/01/05010000.xhp | 20 +- source/text/schart/01/05010100.xhp | 6 +- source/text/schart/01/05010200.xhp | 8 +- source/text/schart/01/05020000.xhp | 16 +- source/text/schart/01/05020100.xhp | 6 +- source/text/schart/01/05020101.xhp | 8 +- source/text/schart/01/05020200.xhp | 6 +- source/text/schart/01/05020201.xhp | 70 +- source/text/schart/01/05030000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/schart/01/05040000.xhp | 22 +- source/text/schart/01/05040100.xhp | 10 +- source/text/schart/01/05040200.xhp | 8 +- source/text/schart/01/05040201.xhp | 60 +- source/text/schart/01/05040202.xhp | 48 +- source/text/schart/01/05050000.xhp | 18 +- source/text/schart/01/05050100.xhp | 4 +- source/text/schart/01/05060000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/schart/01/05070000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/schart/01/05080000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/schart/01/05120000.xhp | 16 +- source/text/schart/01/choose_chart_type.xhp | 46 +- source/text/schart/01/smooth_line_properties.xhp | 20 +- source/text/schart/01/stepped_line_properties.xhp | 14 +- source/text/schart/01/three_d_view.xhp | 104 +-- source/text/schart/01/type_area.xhp | 14 +- source/text/schart/01/type_bubble.xhp | 10 +- source/text/schart/01/type_column_bar.xhp | 24 +- source/text/schart/01/type_column_line.xhp | 82 +-- source/text/schart/01/type_line.xhp | 20 +- source/text/schart/01/type_net.xhp | 10 +- source/text/schart/01/type_pie.xhp | 16 +- source/text/schart/01/type_stock.xhp | 198 +++--- source/text/schart/01/type_xy.xhp | 78 +-- source/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_elements.xhp | 80 +-- source/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_type.xhp | 50 +- source/text/schart/01/wiz_data_range.xhp | 38 +- source/text/schart/01/wiz_data_series.xhp | 58 +- source/text/schart/02/01190000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/schart/02/01200000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/schart/02/01210000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/schart/02/01220000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/schart/02/02020000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/schart/04/01020000.xhp | 60 +- source/text/schart/main0000.xhp | 133 ++-- source/text/schart/main0202.xhp | 38 +- source/text/schart/main0503.xhp | 14 +- source/text/sdraw/00/00000004.xhp | 2 +- source/text/sdraw/01/04010000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp | 202 +++--- source/text/sdraw/guide/align_arrange.xhp | 54 +- source/text/sdraw/guide/color_define.xhp | 30 +- source/text/sdraw/guide/combine_etc.xhp | 64 +- source/text/sdraw/guide/cross_fading.xhp | 24 +- source/text/sdraw/guide/draw_sector.xhp | 24 +- source/text/sdraw/guide/duplicate_object.xhp | 20 +- source/text/sdraw/guide/eyedropper.xhp | 32 +- source/text/sdraw/guide/gradient.xhp | 44 +- source/text/sdraw/guide/graphic_insert.xhp | 10 +- source/text/sdraw/guide/groups.xhp | 30 +- source/text/sdraw/guide/join_objects.xhp | 14 +- source/text/sdraw/guide/join_objects3d.xhp | 24 +- source/text/sdraw/guide/keyboard.xhp | 26 +- source/text/sdraw/guide/main.xhp | 12 +- source/text/sdraw/guide/rotate_object.xhp | 20 +- source/text/sdraw/guide/text_enter.xhp | 72 +- source/text/sdraw/main0000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/sdraw/main0100.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sdraw/main0101.xhp | 18 +- source/text/sdraw/main0102.xhp | 28 +- source/text/sdraw/main0104.xhp | 29 +- source/text/sdraw/main0105.xhp | 22 +- source/text/sdraw/main0106.xhp | 8 +- source/text/sdraw/main0200.xhp | 4 +- source/text/sdraw/main0202.xhp | 14 +- source/text/sdraw/main0210.xhp | 36 +- source/text/sdraw/main0213.xhp | 22 +- source/text/sdraw/main0503.xhp | 32 +- source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp | 133 ++-- source/text/shared/00/00000003.xhp | 42 +- source/text/shared/00/00000004.xhp | 104 +-- source/text/shared/00/00000005.xhp | 156 ++--- source/text/shared/00/00000007.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/00/00000010.xhp | 52 +- source/text/shared/00/00000011.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp | 122 ++-- source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp | 139 ++-- source/text/shared/00/00000099.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/00/00000200.xhp | 76 +-- source/text/shared/00/00000206.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp | 44 +- source/text/shared/00/00000208.xhp | 156 ++--- source/text/shared/00/00000215.xhp | 36 +- source/text/shared/00/00000401.xhp | 266 ++++---- source/text/shared/00/00000402.xhp | 126 ++-- source/text/shared/00/00000403.xhp | 56 +- source/text/shared/00/00000404.xhp | 110 +-- source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp | 232 +++---- source/text/shared/00/00000407.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/00/00000408.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/00/00000409.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/00/00000450.xhp | 76 +-- source/text/shared/00/00040501.xhp | 264 ++++---- source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp | 256 +++---- source/text/shared/00/00040503.xhp | 50 +- source/text/shared/00/01000000.xhp | 18 +- source/text/shared/00/01010000.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/00/01020000.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/01/01010000.xhp | 114 ++-- source/text/shared/01/01010001.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/01010100.xhp | 66 +- source/text/shared/01/01010200.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp | 56 +- source/text/shared/01/01010202.xhp | 50 +- source/text/shared/01/01010203.xhp | 38 +- source/text/shared/01/01010300.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/01010301.xhp | 28 +- source/text/shared/01/01010302.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/01/01010303.xhp | 40 +- source/text/shared/01/01010304.xhp | 34 +- source/text/shared/01/01020101.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/01/01020103.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/01/01050000.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/01/01060000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp | 52 +- source/text/shared/01/01070001.xhp | 18 +- source/text/shared/01/01100000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/01/01100100.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp | 56 +- source/text/shared/01/01100300.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp | 42 +- source/text/shared/01/01100600.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/01/01110000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/01110101.xhp | 30 +- source/text/shared/01/01110300.xhp | 28 +- source/text/shared/01/01110400.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/01130000.xhp | 166 ++--- source/text/shared/01/01160000.xhp | 40 +- source/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/01160300.xhp | 23 +- source/text/shared/01/01170000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/01180000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/01190000.xhp | 44 +- source/text/shared/01/01990000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/02010000.xhp | 18 +- source/text/shared/01/02020000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/02030000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/02040000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/02050000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/01/02060000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/01/02070000.xhp | 114 ++-- source/text/shared/01/02090000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp | 66 +- source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp | 169 +++-- source/text/shared/01/02100100.xhp | 24 +- source/text/shared/01/02100200.xhp | 136 ++-- source/text/shared/01/02100300.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/01/02110000.xhp | 121 ++-- source/text/shared/01/02180100.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/01/02200100.xhp | 2 +- source/text/shared/01/02200200.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp | 29 +- source/text/shared/01/02230100.xhp | 36 +- source/text/shared/01/02230150.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/02230200.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/01/02230300.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/01/02230400.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/02230401.xhp | 126 ++-- source/text/shared/01/02230402.xhp | 46 +- source/text/shared/01/02230500.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/02240000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/02250000.xhp | 78 +-- source/text/shared/01/03020000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/03050000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/03150100.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/01/03170000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/01/04060000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/01/04060100.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/04060200.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/04150100.xhp | 38 +- source/text/shared/01/04160300.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/04160500.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/01/05010000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/01/05020000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp | 44 +- source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp | 112 ++- source/text/shared/01/05020300.xhp | 80 +-- source/text/shared/01/05020400.xhp | 76 +-- source/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp | 66 +- source/text/shared/01/05020600.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/01/05030000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp | 106 ++- source/text/shared/01/05030300.xhp | 72 +- source/text/shared/01/05030500.xhp | 76 +-- source/text/shared/01/05030600.xhp | 73 +- source/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp | 46 +- source/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp | 60 +- source/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp | 40 +- source/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp | 126 ++-- source/text/shared/01/05040300.xhp | 75 +-- source/text/shared/01/05040400.xhp | 71 +- source/text/shared/01/05050000.xhp | 40 +- source/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp | 32 +- source/text/shared/01/05070000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/01/05070100.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/01/05070200.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/05070300.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/05070400.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/05070500.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05070600.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/05080000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05080100.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05080200.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05080300.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05080400.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05090000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05100000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05100100.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/01/05100200.xhp | 30 +- source/text/shared/01/05100500.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/05100600.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/05100700.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/05110000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/05110100.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/05110200.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/05110300.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/01/05110400.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05110500.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05110600m.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/01/05110700.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05110800.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05120000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/05120100.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05120200.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05120300.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05120600.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/01/05140100.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/01/05150101.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/05190000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/01/05190100.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/01/05200000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05200100.xhp | 74 +- source/text/shared/01/05200200.xhp | 50 +- source/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp | 32 +- source/text/shared/01/05210000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp | 32 +- source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp | 49 +- source/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp | 36 +- source/text/shared/01/05210500.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/01/05210600.xhp | 36 +- source/text/shared/01/05210700.xhp | 56 +- source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp | 74 +- source/text/shared/01/05230000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05230100.xhp | 58 +- source/text/shared/01/05230300.xhp | 34 +- source/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/01/05230500.xhp | 28 +- source/text/shared/01/05240000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05240100.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05240200.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05250000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/01/05250100.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/05250200.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/05250300.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/05250400.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/05250500.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/05250600.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/05260000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/05260100.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/01/05260200.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/05260300.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/01/05260400.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05260500.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05260600.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05270000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/01/05280000.xhp | 140 ++-- source/text/shared/01/05290000.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/01/05290100.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/05290200.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/05290300.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/01/05290400.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp | 90 +-- source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp | 15 +- source/text/shared/01/05340200.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp | 106 +-- source/text/shared/01/05340400.xhp | 112 +-- source/text/shared/01/05340402.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05340404.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/05340405.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/05340500.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05340600.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05350000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp | 88 +-- source/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp | 36 +- source/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp | 38 +- source/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp | 116 ++-- source/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp | 38 +- source/text/shared/01/05360000.xhp | 54 +- source/text/shared/01/05990000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/06010000.xhp | 72 +- source/text/shared/01/06010101.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/06010500.xhp | 32 +- source/text/shared/01/06010600.xhp | 28 +- source/text/shared/01/06010601.xhp | 42 +- source/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp | 27 +- source/text/shared/01/06030000.xhp | 48 +- source/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp | 167 +++-- source/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp | 28 +- source/text/shared/01/06040300.xhp | 30 +- source/text/shared/01/06040400.xhp | 36 +- source/text/shared/01/06040500.xhp | 30 +- source/text/shared/01/06040600.xhp | 59 +- source/text/shared/01/06040700.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/01/06050000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/01/06050100.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/01/06050200.xhp | 13 +- source/text/shared/01/06050300.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/01/06050400.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp | 145 ++-- source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp | 54 +- source/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp | 146 ++-- source/text/shared/01/06130001.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/01/06130010.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/01/06130100.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/01/06130200.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/01/06130500.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/01/06140000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp | 106 +-- source/text/shared/01/06140101.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/01/06140102.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp | 54 +- source/text/shared/01/06140400.xhp | 88 +-- source/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp | 24 +- source/text/shared/01/06150000.xhp | 72 +- source/text/shared/01/06150100.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/06150110.xhp | 24 +- source/text/shared/01/06150120.xhp | 28 +- source/text/shared/01/06150200.xhp | 48 +- source/text/shared/01/06150210.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp | 92 +-- source/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp | 40 +- source/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp | 24 +- source/text/shared/01/06990000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/07010000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/01/07080000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/about_meta_tags.xhp | 44 +- source/text/shared/01/digitalsignatures.xhp | 32 +- source/text/shared/01/gallery_files.xhp | 32 +- source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp | 46 +- source/text/shared/01/moviesound.xhp | 34 +- source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp | 36 +- source/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp | 24 +- source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp | 23 +- source/text/shared/01/password_main.xhp | 24 +- source/text/shared/01/prop_font_embed.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_send_as.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/01/securitywarning.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/01/selectcertificate.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/01/webhtml.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/01/xformsdata.xhp | 78 +-- source/text/shared/01/xformsdataadd.xhp | 58 +- source/text/shared/01/xformsdataaddcon.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/01/xformsdatachange.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/01/xformsdataname.xhp | 24 +- source/text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp | 96 +-- source/text/shared/02/01110000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/01140000.xhp | 134 ++-- source/text/shared/02/01170000.xhp | 268 ++++---- source/text/shared/02/01170001.xhp | 72 +- source/text/shared/02/01170002.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/02/01170003.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp | 66 +- source/text/shared/02/01170100.xhp | 38 +- source/text/shared/02/01170101.xhp | 638 ++++++++---------- source/text/shared/02/01170102.xhp | 422 ++++++------ source/text/shared/02/01170103.xhp | 82 +-- source/text/shared/02/01170200.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/02/01170201.xhp | 62 +- source/text/shared/02/01170202.xhp | 115 ++-- source/text/shared/02/01170203.xhp | 130 ++-- source/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp | 26 +- source/text/shared/02/01170400.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/02/01170500.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/01170600.xhp | 48 +- source/text/shared/02/01170700.xhp | 28 +- source/text/shared/02/01170800.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/02/01170801.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/02/01170802.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/01170900.xhp | 26 +- source/text/shared/02/01170901.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/02/01170902.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/02/01170903.xhp | 18 +- source/text/shared/02/01170904.xhp | 24 +- source/text/shared/02/01171000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/02/01171100.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/02/01171200.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/02/01171300.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/01220000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/02/01230000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/02/02020000.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/02/02030000.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/02/02040000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/02050000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/02130000.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/02/02140000.xhp | 34 +- source/text/shared/02/02160000.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/02/02170000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/03110000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/02/03120000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/02/03130000.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/02/03140000.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/02/03150000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/02/03200000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/02/04210000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/02/05020000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/02/05090000.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/02/05110000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/06050000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/02/06060000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/02/06100000.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/02/06110000.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/02/06120000.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/02/07010000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/02/07060000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/02/07070000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/02/07070100.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/02/07070200.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/02/07080000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/02/07090000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/02/08010000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/02/08020000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/02/09070000.xhp | 36 +- source/text/shared/02/10010000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/10020000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/10030000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/10040000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/10100000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/02/12010000.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/02/12020000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/12030000.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/02/12040000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/12050000.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/02/12070000.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/02/12070100.xhp | 70 +- source/text/shared/02/12070200.xhp | 28 +- source/text/shared/02/12070300.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/02/12080000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/12090000.xhp | 17 +- source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp | 34 +- source/text/shared/02/12090101.xhp | 48 +- source/text/shared/02/12100000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/02/12100100.xhp | 26 +- source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp | 225 +++---- source/text/shared/02/12110000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/02/12120000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/02/12130000.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/02/12140000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/02/13010000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/02/13020000.xhp | 38 +- source/text/shared/02/14010000.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/02/14020000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp | 26 +- source/text/shared/02/14020200.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/14030000.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/02/14040000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/14050000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/14060000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/14070000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/18010000.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/02/18030000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/02/20030000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/20040000.xhp | 18 +- source/text/shared/02/20050000.xhp | 28 +- source/text/shared/02/20060000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/02/20090000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/02/20100000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp | 132 ++-- source/text/shared/02/24020000.xhp | 24 +- source/text/shared/02/24030000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/24040000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/24050000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/24060000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/24070000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/24080000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/24090000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/24100000.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/02/basicshapes.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/blockarrows.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/callouts.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/colortoolbar.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/02/flowcharts.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/02/more_controls.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/02/paintbrush.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/02/stars.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/02/symbolshapes.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp | 481 +++++++------ source/text/shared/04/01020000.xhp | 124 ++-- source/text/shared/05/00000002.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/05/00000100.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/05/00000110.xhp | 96 +-- source/text/shared/05/00000120.xhp | 21 +- source/text/shared/05/00000130.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/05/00000140.xhp | 30 +- source/text/shared/05/00000150.xhp | 24 +- source/text/shared/05/00000160.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/05/err_html.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/07/09000000.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/3dsettings_toolbar.xhp | 58 +- source/text/shared/autokorr/01000000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/autokorr/02000000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/autokorr/03000000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/autokorr/04000000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/autokorr/05000000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/autokorr/06000000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/autokorr/07000000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/autokorr/08000000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/autokorr/09000000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/autokorr/10000000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/autokorr/12000000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/autokorr/13000000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01000000.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01010000.xhp | 24 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01010100.xhp | 30 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01010200.xhp | 44 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01010300.xhp | 38 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp | 42 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01010500.xhp | 18 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01010600.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01020000.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01020100.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01020200.xhp | 34 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01020300.xhp | 26 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01020400.xhp | 18 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01020500.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01040000.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01040100.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01040200.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01040300.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01040400.xhp | 34 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01040500.xhp | 26 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01040600.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01090000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp | 42 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01090200.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01090210.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01090220.xhp | 38 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01090300.xhp | 52 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01090400.xhp | 26 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01090500.xhp | 26 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01090600.xhp | 18 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01100000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01100100.xhp | 34 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01100150.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01100200.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01100300.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01100400.xhp | 24 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01100500.xhp | 24 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01110000.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01110100.xhp | 28 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp | 140 ++-- source/text/shared/autopi/01110300.xhp | 44 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01110400.xhp | 28 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01110500.xhp | 18 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01110600.xhp | 42 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01120000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01120100.xhp | 26 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01120200.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01120300.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01120400.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01120500.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01130000.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01130100.xhp | 26 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01130200.xhp | 42 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01150000.xhp | 108 +-- source/text/shared/autopi/01170000.xhp | 50 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01170200.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01170300.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01170400.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/autopi/01170500.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/02000000.xhp | 44 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/02000002.xhp | 26 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/02010101.xhp | 43 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/04000000.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/04030000.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/05000000.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/05000001.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/05000003.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/05010000.xhp | 76 +-- source/text/shared/explorer/database/05010100.xhp | 52 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/05020000.xhp | 30 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/05020100.xhp | 60 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030000.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030100.xhp | 44 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030200.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030300.xhp | 42 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030400.xhp | 28 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/05040000.xhp | 2 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/05040100.xhp | 46 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/05040200.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/11000002.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/11020000.xhp | 50 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/11030000.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/11030100.xhp | 32 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/11080000.xhp | 32 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/11090000.xhp | 8 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvprop.xhp | 6 +- .../shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropdat.xhp | 86 +-- .../shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropgen.xhp | 26 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabadoc.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaprop.xhp | 6 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropadd.xhp | 82 +-- .../text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropcon.xhp | 14 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropgen.xhp | 78 +-- source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz00.xhp | 32 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz01.xhp | 52 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02.xhp | 20 +- .../shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02access.xhp | 16 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02ado.xhp | 36 +- .../shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02dbase.xhp | 12 +- .../shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp | 56 +- .../shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02ldap.xhp | 24 +- .../shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02mysql.xhp | 22 +- .../shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02odbc.xhp | 28 +- .../shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02oracle.xhp | 46 +- .../explorer/database/dabawiz02spreadsheet.xhp | 16 +- .../shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02text.xhp | 44 +- .../shared/explorer/database/dabawiz03auth.xhp | 18 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/main.xhp | 46 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/menubar.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/menuedit.xhp | 66 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/menufile.xhp | 32 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/menufilesave.xhp | 20 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/menuinsert.xhp | 36 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/menutools.xhp | 26 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/menuview.xhp | 56 +- .../shared/explorer/database/migrate_macros.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/password.xhp | 14 +- .../shared/explorer/database/querywizard00.xhp | 6 +- .../shared/explorer/database/querywizard01.xhp | 14 +- .../shared/explorer/database/querywizard02.xhp | 22 +- .../shared/explorer/database/querywizard03.xhp | 26 +- .../shared/explorer/database/querywizard04.xhp | 34 +- .../shared/explorer/database/querywizard05.xhp | 10 +- .../shared/explorer/database/querywizard06.xhp | 26 +- .../shared/explorer/database/querywizard07.xhp | 10 +- .../shared/explorer/database/querywizard08.xhp | 22 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/rep_datetime.xhp | 18 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_main.xhp | 154 ++--- .../shared/explorer/database/rep_navigator.xhp | 48 +- .../shared/explorer/database/rep_pagenumbers.xhp | 26 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_prop.xhp | 70 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_sort.xhp | 46 +- .../shared/explorer/database/tablewizard00.xhp | 6 +- .../shared/explorer/database/tablewizard01.xhp | 22 +- .../shared/explorer/database/tablewizard02.xhp | 56 +- .../shared/explorer/database/tablewizard03.xhp | 38 +- .../shared/explorer/database/tablewizard04.xhp | 30 +- source/text/shared/explorer/database/toolbars.xhp | 76 +-- source/text/shared/fontwork_toolbar.xhp | 40 +- source/text/shared/guide/aaa_start.xhp | 24 +- source/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/guide/activex.xhp | 36 +- source/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/guide/autocorr_url.xhp | 24 +- source/text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/guide/background.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/guide/border_paragraph.xhp | 30 +- source/text/shared/guide/border_table.xhp | 28 +- source/text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp | 26 +- source/text/shared/guide/change_title.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/guide/chart_axis.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/guide/chart_barformat.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/guide/chart_insert.xhp | 46 +- source/text/shared/guide/chart_legend.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/guide/chart_title.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/guide/configure_overview.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/guide/contextmenu.xhp | 2 +- source/text/shared/guide/copy_drawfunctions.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/guide/copytable2application.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/guide/copytext2application.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp | 28 +- source/text/shared/guide/data_addressbook.xhp | 32 +- source/text/shared/guide/data_dbase2office.xhp | 30 +- source/text/shared/guide/data_enter_sql.xhp | 25 +- source/text/shared/guide/data_forms.xhp | 26 +- source/text/shared/guide/data_im_export.xhp | 52 +- source/text/shared/guide/data_new.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/guide/data_queries.xhp | 28 +- source/text/shared/guide/data_register.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/guide/data_report.xhp | 34 +- source/text/shared/guide/data_reports.xhp | 58 +- source/text/shared/guide/data_search.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/guide/data_search2.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/guide/data_tabledefine.xhp | 33 +- source/text/shared/guide/data_tables.xhp | 40 +- source/text/shared/guide/data_view.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/guide/database_main.xhp | 44 +- source/text/shared/guide/digital_signatures.xhp | 76 +-- source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp | 42 +- source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp | 58 +- source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp | 30 +- source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp | 52 +- source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop.xhp | 32 +- source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_beamer.xhp | 32 +- source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_fromgallery.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_gallery.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_graphic.xhp | 18 +- source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_table.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/guide/edit_symbolbar.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/guide/email.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp | 32 +- source/text/shared/guide/filternavigator.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/guide/find_attributes.xhp | 30 +- source/text/shared/guide/flat_icons.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/guide/fontwork.xhp | 50 +- source/text/shared/guide/formfields.xhp | 32 +- source/text/shared/guide/gallery_insert.xhp | 44 +- source/text/shared/guide/groups.xhp | 52 +- source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_edit.xhp | 32 +- source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_insert.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/guide/imagemap.xhp | 28 +- source/text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp | 32 +- source/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp | 62 +- source/text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp | 29 +- source/text/shared/guide/insert_specialchar.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/guide/integratinguno.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp | 318 ++++----- source/text/shared/guide/labels.xhp | 32 +- source/text/shared/guide/labels_database.xhp | 23 +- source/text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp | 116 ++-- source/text/shared/guide/line_intext.xhp | 48 +- source/text/shared/guide/lineend_define.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/guide/linestyle_define.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/guide/linestyles.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/guide/macro_recording.xhp | 46 +- source/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/guide/microsoft_terms.xhp | 86 +-- source/text/shared/guide/ms_doctypes.xhp | 6 +- .../shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp | 102 +-- source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp | 62 +- source/text/shared/guide/navigator.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/guide/navigator_setcursor.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/guide/navpane_on.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp | 25 +- source/text/shared/guide/pageformat_max.xhp | 18 +- source/text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp | 60 +- source/text/shared/guide/pasting.xhp | 32 +- source/text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp | 42 +- source/text/shared/guide/print_faster.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/guide/protection.xhp | 63 +- source/text/shared/guide/redlining.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/guide/redlining_accept.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/guide/redlining_doccompare.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/guide/redlining_docmerge.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp | 28 +- source/text/shared/guide/redlining_protect.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/guide/redlining_versions.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/guide/round_corner.xhp | 8 +- source/text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp | 122 ++-- source/text/shared/guide/space_hyphen.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp | 32 +- source/text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp | 30 +- source/text/shared/guide/start_parameters.xhp | 2 +- source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp | 32 +- source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp | 66 +- source/text/shared/guide/text_color.xhp | 17 +- source/text/shared/guide/textmode_change.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/guide/undo_formatting.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/guide/version_number.xhp | 6 +- .../text/shared/guide/viewing_file_properties.xhp | 18 +- source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp | 15 +- source/text/shared/guide/xforms.xhp | 44 +- source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter.xhp | 24 +- source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_create.xhp | 76 +-- source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_distribute.xhp | 28 +- source/text/shared/main0201.xhp | 48 +- source/text/shared/main0204.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/main0208.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/main0212.xhp | 23 +- source/text/shared/main0213.xhp | 72 +- source/text/shared/main0214.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/main0226.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/main0227.xhp | 102 +-- source/text/shared/main0400.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/main0500.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/main0600.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/main0650.xhp | 14 +- source/text/shared/main0800.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp | 44 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01010100.xhp | 68 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp | 118 ++-- source/text/shared/optionen/01010300.xhp | 74 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01010301.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp | 124 ++-- source/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp | 36 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp | 72 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp | 42 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp | 86 +-- source/text/shared/optionen/01010900.xhp | 74 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01011000.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01012000.xhp | 36 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01013000.xhp | 40 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01020000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp | 46 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01020300.xhp | 10 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01030000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp | 46 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp | 48 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01040000.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp | 62 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp | 36 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01040301.xhp | 2 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01040400.xhp | 74 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp | 84 +-- source/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp | 74 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp | 45 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp | 92 +-- source/text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp | 46 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01050000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp | 67 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01050300.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01060000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp | 125 ++-- source/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp | 48 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp | 28 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01060401.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp | 162 ++--- source/text/shared/optionen/01060600.xhp | 24 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp | 18 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01070000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01070100.xhp | 26 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp | 69 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp | 72 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp | 74 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01080000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp | 42 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01110000.xhp | 2 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01110100.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01130100.xhp | 50 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01130200.xhp | 26 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01140000.xhp | 77 +-- source/text/shared/optionen/01150000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01150100.xhp | 50 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01150200.xhp | 12 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp | 44 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01160000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01160100.xhp | 28 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp | 20 +- source/text/shared/optionen/01160201.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/optionen/javaclasspath.xhp | 22 +- source/text/shared/optionen/javaparameters.xhp | 32 +- source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_sl.xhp | 28 +- source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_ts.xhp | 28 +- source/text/shared/optionen/mailmerge.xhp | 48 +- source/text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp | 38 +- .../text/shared/optionen/securityoptionsdialog.xhp | 30 +- .../text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp | 48 +- source/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp | 16 +- source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_c.xhp | 4 +- source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_d.xhp | 6 +- source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_g.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/00/00000004.xhp | 24 +- source/text/simpress/00/00000401.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp | 16 +- source/text/simpress/00/00000404.xhp | 34 +- source/text/simpress/00/00000405.xhp | 20 +- source/text/simpress/00/00000406.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/00/00000407.xhp | 26 +- source/text/simpress/00/00000413.xhp | 96 +-- source/text/simpress/01/01170000.xhp | 16 +- source/text/simpress/01/01180000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/01/01180001.xhp | 60 +- source/text/simpress/01/01180002.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/01/02110000.xhp | 88 +-- source/text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp | 62 +- source/text/simpress/01/02130000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/simpress/01/02140000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/01/02150000.xhp | 22 +- source/text/simpress/01/03050000.xhp | 2 +- source/text/simpress/01/03070000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/simpress/01/03130000.xhp | 16 +- source/text/simpress/01/03150000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/01/03151100.xhp | 22 +- source/text/simpress/01/03151200.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/01/03152000.xhp | 66 +- source/text/simpress/01/03180000.xhp | 16 +- source/text/simpress/01/04010000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/01/04020000.xhp | 26 +- source/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp | 40 +- source/text/simpress/01/04030000m.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/01/04030100.xhp | 8 +- source/text/simpress/01/04040000m.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/01/04080100.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/01/04110000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/01/04110100.xhp | 22 +- source/text/simpress/01/04110200.xhp | 14 +- source/text/simpress/01/04120000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/01/04130000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/simpress/01/04140000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/01/04990000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/01/04990100.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/01/04990200.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/01/04990300.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/01/04990400.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/01/04990500.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/01/04990600.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/01/04990700.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/01/05090000m.xhp | 8 +- source/text/simpress/01/05110500m.xhp | 10 +- source/text/simpress/01/05120000.xhp | 20 +- source/text/simpress/01/05120100.xhp | 20 +- source/text/simpress/01/05120500m.xhp | 12 +- source/text/simpress/01/05130000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/01/05140000.xhp | 30 +- source/text/simpress/01/05150000.xhp | 66 +- source/text/simpress/01/05170000.xhp | 48 +- source/text/simpress/01/05250000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/01/05250500.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/01/05250600.xhp | 8 +- source/text/simpress/01/05250700.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/01/06030000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/01/06040000.xhp | 50 +- source/text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp | 128 ++-- source/text/simpress/01/06060000.xhp | 68 +- source/text/simpress/01/06070000.xhp | 122 ++-- source/text/simpress/01/06100000.xhp | 34 +- source/text/simpress/01/06100100.xhp | 20 +- source/text/simpress/01/13050000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/01/13050100.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/01/13050200.xhp | 44 +- source/text/simpress/01/13050300.xhp | 18 +- source/text/simpress/01/13050400.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/01/13050500.xhp | 8 +- source/text/simpress/01/13050600.xhp | 8 +- source/text/simpress/01/13050700.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/01/13140000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/01/13150000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/01/13160000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/01/13170000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/01/13180000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/01/13180100.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/01/13180200.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/01/13180300.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/01/animationeffect.xhp | 32 +- source/text/simpress/01/effectoptions.xhp | 14 +- source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionseffect.xhp | 68 +- source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstext.xhp | 28 +- source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstiming.xhp | 46 +- source/text/simpress/01/slidesorter.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/02/04010000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/simpress/02/04020000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/02/04030000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/02/04060000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/02/04070000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/simpress/02/08020000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/02/08060000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/02/10020000.xhp | 94 +-- source/text/simpress/02/10030000.xhp | 88 +-- source/text/simpress/02/10030200.xhp | 100 +-- source/text/simpress/02/10050000.xhp | 36 +- source/text/simpress/02/10060000.xhp | 66 +- source/text/simpress/02/10070000.xhp | 114 ++-- source/text/simpress/02/10080000.xhp | 68 +- source/text/simpress/02/10090000.xhp | 76 +-- source/text/simpress/02/10100000.xhp | 246 +++---- source/text/simpress/02/10110000.xhp | 24 +- source/text/simpress/02/10120000.xhp | 90 +-- source/text/simpress/02/10130000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/02/11060000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/simpress/02/11070000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/simpress/02/11080000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/simpress/02/11090000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/simpress/02/11100000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/simpress/02/11110000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/simpress/02/13010000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/simpress/02/13020000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/simpress/02/13030000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/simpress/02/13040000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/simpress/02/13050000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/simpress/02/13060000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/simpress/02/13090000.xhp | 9 +- source/text/simpress/02/13100000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/simpress/02/13140000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/02/13150000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/02/13160000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/02/13170000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/02/13180000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/02/13190000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/04/01020000.xhp | 386 +++++------ source/text/simpress/guide/3d_create.xhp | 56 +- source/text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_create.xhp | 34 +- source/text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_save.xhp | 12 +- source/text/simpress/guide/animated_objects.xhp | 34 +- .../text/simpress/guide/animated_slidechange.xhp | 34 +- source/text/simpress/guide/arrange_slides.xhp | 12 +- source/text/simpress/guide/background.xhp | 56 +- source/text/simpress/guide/change_scale.xhp | 12 +- source/text/simpress/guide/footer.xhp | 42 +- source/text/simpress/guide/gluepoints.xhp | 26 +- source/text/simpress/guide/html_export.xhp | 16 +- source/text/simpress/guide/html_import.xhp | 20 +- source/text/simpress/guide/individual.xhp | 50 +- source/text/simpress/guide/keyboard.xhp | 56 +- source/text/simpress/guide/layer_move.xhp | 10 +- source/text/simpress/guide/layer_new.xhp | 18 +- source/text/simpress/guide/layer_tipps.xhp | 48 +- source/text/simpress/guide/layers.xhp | 28 +- source/text/simpress/guide/line_arrow_styles.xhp | 29 +- source/text/simpress/guide/line_draw.xhp | 46 +- source/text/simpress/guide/line_edit.xhp | 66 +- source/text/simpress/guide/main.xhp | 10 +- source/text/simpress/guide/masterpage.xhp | 34 +- source/text/simpress/guide/move_object.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/guide/orgchart.xhp | 46 +- source/text/simpress/guide/page_copy.xhp | 30 +- source/text/simpress/guide/palette_files.xhp | 38 +- source/text/simpress/guide/print_tofit.xhp | 14 +- source/text/simpress/guide/printing.xhp | 61 +- source/text/simpress/guide/rehearse_timings.xhp | 18 +- source/text/simpress/guide/select_object.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/guide/show.xhp | 42 +- source/text/simpress/guide/table_insert.xhp | 98 +-- source/text/simpress/guide/text2curve.xhp | 16 +- source/text/simpress/guide/vectorize.xhp | 16 +- source/text/simpress/main0000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/simpress/main0113.xhp | 20 +- source/text/simpress/main0200.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/main0202.xhp | 14 +- source/text/simpress/main0203.xhp | 21 +- source/text/simpress/main0204.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/main0206.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/main0209.xhp | 18 +- source/text/simpress/main0210.xhp | 54 +- source/text/simpress/main0211.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/main0212.xhp | 6 +- source/text/simpress/main0213.xhp | 22 +- source/text/simpress/main0214.xhp | 4 +- source/text/simpress/main0503.xhp | 30 +- source/text/simpress/presenter.xhp | 72 +- source/text/smath/00/00000004.xhp | 112 +-- source/text/smath/01/02080000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/smath/01/02090000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/smath/01/02100000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/smath/01/02110000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/smath/01/03040000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/smath/01/03050000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/smath/01/03060000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/smath/01/03070000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/smath/01/03080000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/smath/01/03090000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/smath/01/03090100.xhp | 122 ++-- source/text/smath/01/03090200.xhp | 194 +++--- source/text/smath/01/03090300.xhp | 94 +-- source/text/smath/01/03090400.xhp | 160 ++--- source/text/smath/01/03090500.xhp | 150 ++--- source/text/smath/01/03090600.xhp | 158 ++--- source/text/smath/01/03090700.xhp | 138 ++-- source/text/smath/01/03090800.xhp | 142 ++-- source/text/smath/01/03090900.xhp | 4 +- source/text/smath/01/03090901.xhp | 8 +- source/text/smath/01/03090902.xhp | 8 +- source/text/smath/01/03090903.xhp | 8 +- source/text/smath/01/03090904.xhp | 8 +- source/text/smath/01/03090905.xhp | 8 +- source/text/smath/01/03090906.xhp | 8 +- source/text/smath/01/03090907.xhp | 8 +- source/text/smath/01/03090908.xhp | 8 +- source/text/smath/01/03090909.xhp | 8 +- source/text/smath/01/03090910.xhp | 8 +- source/text/smath/01/03091100.xhp | 110 +-- source/text/smath/01/03091200.xhp | 40 +- source/text/smath/01/03091300.xhp | 10 +- source/text/smath/01/03091400.xhp | 14 +- source/text/smath/01/03091500.xhp | 4 +- source/text/smath/01/03091501.xhp | 160 ++--- source/text/smath/01/03091502.xhp | 200 +++--- source/text/smath/01/03091503.xhp | 138 ++-- source/text/smath/01/03091504.xhp | 164 ++--- source/text/smath/01/03091505.xhp | 96 +-- source/text/smath/01/03091506.xhp | 144 ++-- source/text/smath/01/03091507.xhp | 130 ++-- source/text/smath/01/03091509.xhp | 100 +-- source/text/smath/01/03091600.xhp | 130 ++-- source/text/smath/01/05010000.xhp | 54 +- source/text/smath/01/05010100.xhp | 24 +- source/text/smath/01/05020000.xhp | 38 +- source/text/smath/01/05030000.xhp | 154 ++--- source/text/smath/01/05040000.xhp | 26 +- source/text/smath/01/05050000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp | 62 +- source/text/smath/02/03010000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/smath/04/01020000.xhp | 46 +- source/text/smath/guide/align.xhp | 14 +- source/text/smath/guide/attributes.xhp | 14 +- source/text/smath/guide/brackets.xhp | 14 +- source/text/smath/guide/comment.xhp | 10 +- source/text/smath/guide/keyboard.xhp | 20 +- source/text/smath/guide/limits.xhp | 36 +- source/text/smath/guide/main.xhp | 4 +- source/text/smath/guide/newline.xhp | 6 +- source/text/smath/guide/parentheses.xhp | 12 +- source/text/smath/guide/text.xhp | 22 +- source/text/smath/main0000.xhp | 12 +- source/text/smath/main0100.xhp | 4 +- source/text/smath/main0101.xhp | 20 +- source/text/smath/main0102.xhp | 4 +- source/text/smath/main0103.xhp | 4 +- source/text/smath/main0105.xhp | 12 +- source/text/smath/main0107.xhp | 4 +- source/text/smath/main0200.xhp | 4 +- source/text/smath/main0202.xhp | 4 +- source/text/smath/main0203.xhp | 6 +- source/text/smath/main0503.xhp | 26 +- source/text/swriter/00/00000004.xhp | 22 +- source/text/swriter/00/00000401.xhp | 20 +- source/text/swriter/00/00000402.xhp | 26 +- source/text/swriter/00/00000404.xhp | 96 +-- source/text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp | 182 ++--- source/text/swriter/00/00000406.xhp | 48 +- source/text/swriter/01/01150000.xhp | 56 +- source/text/swriter/01/01160100.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/01/01160200.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/01/01160300.xhp | 12 +- source/text/swriter/01/01160400.xhp | 12 +- source/text/swriter/01/01160500.xhp | 18 +- source/text/swriter/01/02110000.xhp | 172 ++--- source/text/swriter/01/02110100.xhp | 66 +- source/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp | 120 ++-- source/text/swriter/01/02120100.xhp | 16 +- source/text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp | 20 +- source/text/swriter/01/04020000.xhp | 14 +- source/text/swriter/01/04020100.xhp | 68 +- source/text/swriter/01/04020200.xhp | 14 +- source/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp | 34 +- source/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp | 26 +- source/text/swriter/01/04070000.xhp | 26 +- source/text/swriter/01/04070100.xhp | 24 +- source/text/swriter/01/04070200.xhp | 76 +-- source/text/swriter/01/04070300.xhp | 54 +- source/text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp | 125 ++-- source/text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp | 128 ++-- source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp | 138 ++-- source/text/swriter/01/04090004.xhp | 64 +- source/text/swriter/01/04090005.xhp | 104 +-- source/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp | 76 +-- source/text/swriter/01/04090007.xhp | 62 +- source/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp | 14 +- source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp | 275 ++++---- source/text/swriter/01/04120100.xhp | 72 +- source/text/swriter/01/04120200.xhp | 10 +- source/text/swriter/01/04120201.xhp | 26 +- source/text/swriter/01/04120210.xhp | 20 +- source/text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp | 48 +- source/text/swriter/01/04120212.xhp | 54 +- source/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp | 42 +- source/text/swriter/01/04120214.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp | 32 +- source/text/swriter/01/04120216.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp | 14 +- source/text/swriter/01/04120219.xhp | 18 +- source/text/swriter/01/04120220.xhp | 16 +- source/text/swriter/01/04120221.xhp | 70 +- source/text/swriter/01/04120222.xhp | 30 +- source/text/swriter/01/04120223.xhp | 6 +- source/text/swriter/01/04120224.xhp | 6 +- source/text/swriter/01/04120225.xhp | 6 +- source/text/swriter/01/04120226.xhp | 6 +- source/text/swriter/01/04120227.xhp | 46 +- source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp | 20 +- source/text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp | 42 +- source/text/swriter/01/04130000.xhp | 16 +- source/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp | 10 +- source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp | 62 +- source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp | 34 +- source/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp | 74 +- source/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp | 36 +- source/text/swriter/01/05040000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp | 91 ++- source/text/swriter/01/05040501.xhp | 10 +- source/text/swriter/01/05040700.xhp | 64 +- source/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp | 34 +- source/text/swriter/01/05060000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp | 116 ++-- source/text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp | 96 +-- source/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp | 122 ++-- source/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp | 38 +- source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp | 154 ++--- source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp | 42 +- source/text/swriter/01/05060900.xhp | 66 +- source/text/swriter/01/05080000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/01/05090000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/01/05090100.xhp | 66 +- source/text/swriter/01/05090200.xhp | 32 +- source/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp | 28 +- source/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp | 72 +- source/text/swriter/01/05100000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/01/05100300.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/01/05100400.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/01/05110000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp | 14 +- source/text/swriter/01/05110200.xhp | 6 +- source/text/swriter/01/05110300.xhp | 6 +- source/text/swriter/01/05110500.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/01/05120000.xhp | 10 +- source/text/swriter/01/05120100.xhp | 14 +- source/text/swriter/01/05120200.xhp | 6 +- source/text/swriter/01/05120300.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/01/05120400.xhp | 24 +- source/text/swriter/01/05120500.xhp | 6 +- source/text/swriter/01/05130000.xhp | 88 +-- source/text/swriter/01/05130002.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp | 6 +- source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp | 50 +- source/text/swriter/01/05150000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/swriter/01/05150100.xhp | 10 +- source/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp | 65 +- source/text/swriter/01/05150104.xhp | 6 +- source/text/swriter/01/05150200.xhp | 35 +- source/text/swriter/01/05150300.xhp | 18 +- source/text/swriter/01/05170000.xhp | 38 +- source/text/swriter/01/05190000.xhp | 24 +- source/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/swriter/01/05990000.xhp | 2 +- source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp | 50 +- source/text/swriter/01/06040000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp | 28 +- source/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp | 76 +-- source/text/swriter/01/06080000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/01/06080100.xhp | 122 ++-- source/text/swriter/01/06080200.xhp | 42 +- source/text/swriter/01/06090000.xhp | 60 +- source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp | 72 +- source/text/swriter/01/06110000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/01/06120000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/swriter/01/06160000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/01/06170000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/01/06180000.xhp | 64 +- source/text/swriter/01/06190000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/01/06200000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/01/06210000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/01/06220000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/01/06990000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/01/format_object.xhp | 12 +- source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge01.xhp | 36 +- source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge02.xhp | 14 +- source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp | 38 +- source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp | 54 +- source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp | 34 +- source/text/swriter/01/mm_copyto.xhp | 12 +- source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusaddlis.xhp | 20 +- source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp | 32 +- source/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp | 44 +- source/text/swriter/01/mm_finent.xhp | 18 +- source/text/swriter/01/mm_matfie.xhp | 12 +- source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddblo.xhp | 28 +- source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddlis.xhp | 28 +- source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdblo.xhp | 34 +- source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdlis.xhp | 24 +- source/text/swriter/01/mm_seltab.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/01/selection_mode.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/02/02110000.xhp | 12 +- source/text/swriter/02/03210000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/02/03220000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/02/04090000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/02/04100000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/02/04220000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/02/04230000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/02/04240000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/02/04250000.xhp | 12 +- source/text/swriter/02/06040000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/02/06070000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/02/06080000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/02/06090000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/02/06120000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/02/06130000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/02/06140000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/02/08010000.xhp | 12 +- source/text/swriter/02/08080000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/02/10010000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/02/10020000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/02/10030000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/02/10050000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/02/10070000.xhp | 18 +- source/text/swriter/02/10080000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/02/10090000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/02/14010000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp | 320 ++++----- source/text/swriter/02/14030000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/02/14040000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/02/14050000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/02/18010000.xhp | 52 +- source/text/swriter/02/18030000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/02/18030100.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/02/18030200.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/02/18030400.xhp | 6 +- source/text/swriter/02/18030500.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/02/18030600.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp | 12 +- source/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/02/19030000.xhp | 24 +- source/text/swriter/02/19040000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/02/19050000.xhp | 6 +- source/text/swriter/02/word_count_stb.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp | 506 +++++++------- source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp | 25 +- source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp | 44 +- source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp | 27 +- source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp | 13 +- source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp | 43 +- source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp | 29 +- source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp | 31 +- source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp | 106 +-- source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp | 11 +- source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp | 16 +- source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp | 19 +- source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp | 17 +- source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp | 27 +- source/text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp | 11 +- source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp | 12 +- source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp | 45 +- source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp | 76 +-- source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp | 12 +- source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp | 31 +- source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp | 30 +- source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp | 65 +- source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp | 14 +- source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp | 29 +- source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp | 20 +- source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp | 7 +- source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp | 28 +- source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp | 33 +- source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp | 9 +- source/text/swriter/guide/insert_beforetable.xhp | 6 +- source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp | 4 +- .../text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp | 10 +- .../swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp | 14 +- .../text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp | 12 +- .../text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp | 6 +- source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp | 12 +- .../text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp | 7 +- source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp | 34 +- source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp | 17 +- source/text/swriter/guide/main.xhp | 28 +- source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp | 10 +- source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp | 14 +- source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp | 12 +- source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp | 29 +- source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp | 25 +- source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp | 72 +- source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp | 70 +- source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp | 26 +- source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp | 12 +- source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp | 17 +- source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp | 12 +- source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp | 20 +- source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp | 17 +- source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp | 7 +- source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp | 18 +- source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp | 32 +- source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp | 21 +- source/text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp | 28 +- source/text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp | 30 +- source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp | 28 +- source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp | 15 +- source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp | 15 +- source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp | 14 +- source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp | 18 +- source/text/swriter/guide/table_cells.xhp | 17 +- source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp | 85 ++- source/text/swriter/guide/table_select.xhp | 10 +- source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp | 14 +- source/text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp | 23 +- source/text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp | 9 +- source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp | 21 +- source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp | 18 +- source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp | 15 +- source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp | 60 +- source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp | 67 +- source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp | 30 +- source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp | 58 +- .../text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp | 18 +- source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp | 38 +- source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp | 29 +- source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp | 18 +- .../text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp | 50 +- source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp | 22 +- source/text/swriter/main0000.xhp | 8 +- source/text/swriter/main0100.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/main0107.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/main0200.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/main0202.xhp | 34 +- source/text/swriter/main0204.xhp | 16 +- source/text/swriter/main0205.xhp | 12 +- source/text/swriter/main0206.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/main0210.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/main0213.xhp | 6 +- source/text/swriter/main0214.xhp | 4 +- source/text/swriter/main0215.xhp | 20 +- source/text/swriter/main0216.xhp | 18 +- source/text/swriter/main0220.xhp | 16 +- source/text/swriter/main0503.xhp | 44 +- 1841 files changed, 30820 insertions(+), 31907 deletions(-) (limited to 'source') diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/guide/access2base.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/guide/access2base.xhp index 9bed65339a..b0ed3ae09a 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/guide/access2base.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/guide/access2base.xhp @@ -37,59 +37,59 @@ Access2Base - Access2Base - What is Access2Base ? - Access2Base is a LibreOffice Basic library of macros for (business or personal) application developers and advanced users. It is one of the libraries stored in "LibreOffice macros and dialogs". - The provided macros implement functionalities, all directly inspired by Microsoft Access. The macros are callable from a LibreOffice Base application only. - The API provided by Access2Base is intended to be more concise, intuitive and easy to learn than the standard UNO API (API = Application Programming Interface). - The library is documented online on http://www.access2base.com - The implemented macros include: + Access2Base + What is Access2Base ? + Access2Base is a LibreOffice Basic library of macros for (business or personal) application developers and advanced users. It is one of the libraries stored in "LibreOffice macros and dialogs". + The provided macros implement functionalities, all directly inspired by Microsoft Access. The macros are callable from a LibreOffice Base application only. + The API provided by Access2Base is intended to be more concise, intuitive and easy to learn than the standard UNO API (API = Application Programming Interface). + The library is documented online on http://www.access2base.com + The implemented macros include: - a simplified and extensible API for forms, dialogs and controls manipulations similar with the MSAccess object model + a simplified and extensible API for forms, dialogs and controls manipulations similar with the MSAccess object model - an API for database access with the table, query, recordset and field objects + an API for database access with the table, query, recordset and field objects - a number of actions with a syntax identical to their corresponding MSAccess macros/actions + a number of actions with a syntax identical to their corresponding MSAccess macros/actions - the DLookup, DSum, ... database functions + the DLookup, DSum, ... database functions - the support of the shortcut notations like Forms!myForm!myControl + the support of the shortcut notations like Forms!myForm!myControl - + + + - a consistent errors and exceptions handler + a consistent errors and exceptions handler - facilities for programming form, dialog and control events + facilities for programming form, dialog and control events - the support of both embedded forms and standalone (Writer) forms + the support of both embedded forms and standalone (Writer) forms - Compare Access2Base with MSAccess VBA + Compare Access2Base with MSAccess VBA - REM Open a form ... - OpenForm("myForm") - REM Move a form to new left-top coordinates ... - Dim ofForm As Object ' In VBA => Dim ofForm As Form - Set ofForm = Forms("myForm") - ofForm.Move(100, 200) - REM Get the value of a control ... - Dim ocControl As Object - ocControl = ofForm.Controls("myControl") - MsgBox ocControl.Value - REM Hide a control ... - ocControl.Visible = False - REM ... or alternatively ... - setValue("Forms!myForm!myControl.Visible", False) ' Shortcut notation - ' In VBA => Forms!myForm!myControl.Visible = False + REM Open a form ... + OpenForm("myForm") + REM Move a form to new left-top coordinates ... + Dim ofForm As Object ' In VBA => Dim ofForm As Form + Set ofForm = Forms("myForm") + ofForm.Move(100, 200) + REM Get the value of a control ... + Dim ocControl As Object + ocControl = ofForm.Controls("myControl") + MsgBox ocControl.Value + REM Hide a control ... + ocControl.Visible = False + REM ... or alternatively ... + setValue("Forms!myForm!myControl.Visible", False) ' Shortcut notation + ' In VBA => Forms!myForm!myControl.Visible = False diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/guide/control_properties.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/guide/control_properties.xhp index 1b45627c4c..7d8ff2c3eb 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/guide/control_properties.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/guide/control_properties.xhp @@ -35,10 +35,10 @@ controls;changing properties dialog editor;changing control properties -Changing the Properties of Controls in the Dialog Editor +Changing the Properties of Controls in the Dialog Editor -You can set the properties of control that you add to a dialog. For example, you can change the color, name, and size of a button that you added. You can change most control properties when you create or edit a dialog. However, you can only change some properties at runtime. -To change the properties of a control in design mode, right-click the control, and then choose Properties. +You can set the properties of control that you add to a dialog. For example, you can change the color, name, and size of a button that you added. You can change most control properties when you create or edit a dialog. However, you can only change some properties at runtime. +To change the properties of a control in design mode, right-click the control, and then choose Properties.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/guide/create_dialog.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/guide/create_dialog.xhp index f204ecc679..4789e59b14 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/guide/create_dialog.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/guide/create_dialog.xhp @@ -30,23 +30,23 @@ dialogs;creating Basic dialogs -Creating a Basic Dialog +Creating a Basic Dialog -Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Dialogs, and then click New. +Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Dialogs, and then click New. -Enter a name for the dialog, and click OK. To rename the dialog later, right-click the name on the tab, and choose Rename. UFI: issue #i51589# +Enter a name for the dialog, and click OK. To rename the dialog later, right-click the name on the tab, and choose Rename. UFI: issue #i51589# -Click Edit. The Basic dialog editor opens and contains a blank dialog. +Click Edit. The Basic dialog editor opens and contains a blank dialog. -If you do not see the Toolbox bar, click the arrow next to the Insert Controls icon to open the Toolbox bar. +If you do not see the Toolbox bar, click the arrow next to the Insert Controls icon to open the Toolbox bar. -Click a tool and then drag in the dialog to create the control. +Click a tool and then drag in the dialog to create the control.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/guide/insert_control.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/guide/insert_control.xhp index e2a7c69233..cbc6fdbdbd 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/guide/insert_control.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/guide/insert_control.xhp @@ -33,18 +33,18 @@ controls; creating in the dialog editor dialog editor;creating controls -Creating Controls in the Dialog Editor +Creating Controls in the Dialog Editor -Use the tools on the Toolbox of the BASIC dialog editor to add controls to your dialog. +Use the tools on the Toolbox of the BASIC dialog editor to add controls to your dialog. -To open the Toolbox, click the arrow next to the Insert Controls icon on the Macro toolbar. +To open the Toolbox, click the arrow next to the Insert Controls icon on the Macro toolbar. -Click a tool on the toolbar, for example, Button. +Click a tool on the toolbar, for example, Button. -On the dialog, drag the button to the size you want. +On the dialog, drag the button to the size you want.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/guide/sample_code.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/guide/sample_code.xhp index 06938e60ff..a5141068d7 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/guide/sample_code.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/guide/sample_code.xhp @@ -39,11 +39,11 @@ examples; programming controls dialog editor;programming examples for controls -Programming Examples for Controls in the Dialog Editor +Programming Examples for Controls in the Dialog Editor -The following examples are for a new dialog called "Dialog1". Use the tools on the Toolbox bar in the dialog editor to create the dialog and add the following controls: a Check Box called "CheckBox1", a Label Field called "Label1", a Button called "CommandButton1", and a List Box called "ListBox1". -Be consistent with uppercase and lowercase letter when you attach a control to an object variable. -Global Function for Loading Dialogs +The following examples are for a new dialog called "Dialog1". Use the tools on the Toolbox bar in the dialog editor to create the dialog and add the following controls: a Check Box called "CheckBox1", a Label Field called "Label1", a Button called "CommandButton1", and a List Box called "ListBox1". +Be consistent with uppercase and lowercase letter when you attach a control to an object variable. +Global Function for Loading Dialogs Function LoadDialog(Libname as String, DialogName as String, Optional oLibContainer) Dim oLib as Object @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ LoadDialog() = oRuntimeDialog End Function -Displaying a Dialog +Displaying a Dialog REM global definition of variables Dim oDialog1 AS Object @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ oDialog1.Execute() End Sub -Read or Edit Properties of Controls in the Program +Read or Edit Properties of Controls in the Program Sub Sample1 BasicLibraries.LoadLibrary("Tools") @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ oDialog1.Execute() End Sub -Add an Entry to a ListBox +Add an Entry to a ListBox Sub AddEntry BasicLibraries.LoadLibrary("Tools") @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ oListbox.additem("New Item" & iCount,0) End Sub -Remove an Entry from a ListBox +Remove an Entry from a ListBox Sub RemoveEntry BasicLibraries.LoadLibrary("Tools") diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/guide/show_dialog.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/guide/show_dialog.xhp index 6ff3151ea3..ee65960625 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/guide/show_dialog.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/guide/show_dialog.xhp @@ -32,10 +32,10 @@ module/dialog toggle dialogs;using program code to show (example) examples; showing a dialog using program code -Opening a Dialog With Program Code +Opening a Dialog With Program Code -In the %PRODUCTNAME BASIC window for a dialog that you created, leave the dialog editor by clicking the name tab of the Module that the dialog is assigned to. The name tab is at the bottom of the window. -Enter the following code for a subroutine called Dialog1Show. In this example, the name of the dialog that you created is "Dialog1": +In the %PRODUCTNAME BASIC window for a dialog that you created, leave the dialog editor by clicking the name tab of the Module that the dialog is assigned to. The name tab is at the bottom of the window. +Enter the following code for a subroutine called Dialog1Show. In this example, the name of the dialog that you created is "Dialog1": Sub Dialog1Show BasicLibraries.LoadLibrary("Tools") @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ oDialog1.Execute() End Sub -Without using "LoadDialog" you can call the code as follows: +Without using "LoadDialog" you can call the code as follows: Sub Dialog1Show DialogLibraries.LoadLibrary("Standard") @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ oDialog1.Execute() End Sub -When you execute this code, "Dialog1" opens. To close the dialog, click the close button (x) on its title bar. +When you execute this code, "Dialog1" opens. To close the dialog, click the close button (x) on its title bar.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/guide/translation.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/guide/translation.xhp index c7a64ef814..cfc81244ca 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/guide/translation.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/guide/translation.xhp @@ -33,69 +33,69 @@ localizing dialogs translating dialogs -Translation of Controls in the Dialog Editor +Translation of Controls in the Dialog Editor -The Language toolbar in the Basic IDE dialog editor shows controls to enable and manage localizable dialogs. -By default, any dialog that you create only contains string resources for one language. You may want to create dialogs that automatically show localized strings according to the user's language settings. -Select the language for the strings that you want to edit. Click the Manage Languages icon to add languages.Manage Language icon is in sbasic/shared/02/20000000.xhp +The Language toolbar in the Basic IDE dialog editor shows controls to enable and manage localizable dialogs. +By default, any dialog that you create only contains string resources for one language. You may want to create dialogs that automatically show localized strings according to the user's language settings. +Select the language for the strings that you want to edit. Click the Manage Languages icon to add languages.Manage Language icon is in sbasic/shared/02/20000000.xhp -Click a language, then click Default to set the language as default, or click Delete to remove the language from the list. -Opens a dialog where you can add a language to the list. -Select a language in the list and click Delete to remove that language. When you remove all languages, the string resources for localizable dialogs are removed from all dialogs in the current library. -Select a language in the list and click Default to set the language as default language. +Click a language, then click Default to set the language as default, or click Delete to remove the language from the list. +Opens a dialog where you can add a language to the list. +Select a language in the list and click Delete to remove that language. When you remove all languages, the string resources for localizable dialogs are removed from all dialogs in the current library. +Select a language in the list and click Default to set the language as default language. -The default language will be used as a source for all other language strings. -Add UI languages for your dialog strings. -To enable localizable dialogs +The default language will be used as a source for all other language strings. +Add UI languages for your dialog strings. +To enable localizable dialogs -In the Basic IDE dialog editor, open the Language toolbar choosing View - Toolbars - Language. -If the current library already contains a localizable dialog, the Language toolbar is shown automatically. +In the Basic IDE dialog editor, open the Language toolbar choosing View - Toolbars - Language. +If the current library already contains a localizable dialog, the Language toolbar is shown automatically. -Click the Manage Languages icon +Click the Manage Languages icon Manage Language icon on the Language toolbar or on the Toolbox bar. -You see the Manage User Interface Language dialog. The dialog manages languages for the current library. The name of the current library is shown on the title bar. +You see the Manage User Interface Language dialog. The dialog manages languages for the current library. The name of the current library is shown on the title bar. -Click Add in the dialog to add a language entry. -This step enables all new dialogs to contain localizable string resources. +Click Add in the dialog to add a language entry. +This step enables all new dialogs to contain localizable string resources. -The first time you click Add, you see the Set Default User Interface Language dialog. The following times you click Add, this dialog has the name Add User Interface Language. -You can also change the default language in the Manage User Interface Language dialog. +The first time you click Add, you see the Set Default User Interface Language dialog. The following times you click Add, this dialog has the name Add User Interface Language. +You can also change the default language in the Manage User Interface Language dialog. -Select a language. -This adds string resources to contain the translated versions of all strings to the dialog properties. The set of dialog strings of the default language is copied to the new set of strings. Later, you can switch to the new language and then translate the strings. +Select a language. +This adds string resources to contain the translated versions of all strings to the dialog properties. The set of dialog strings of the default language is copied to the new set of strings. Later, you can switch to the new language and then translate the strings. -Close the dialog or add additional languages. +Close the dialog or add additional languages. -To edit localizable controls in your dialog -Once you have added the resources for localizable strings in your dialogs, you can select the current language from the Current Language listbox on the Language toolbar. +To edit localizable controls in your dialog +Once you have added the resources for localizable strings in your dialogs, you can select the current language from the Current Language listbox on the Language toolbar. -Switch the Current Language listbox to display the default language. +Switch the Current Language listbox to display the default language. -Insert any number of controls to your dialog and enter all strings you want. +Insert any number of controls to your dialog and enter all strings you want. -Select another language in the Current Language listbox. +Select another language in the Current Language listbox. -Using the control's property dialogs, edit all strings to the other language. +Using the control's property dialogs, edit all strings to the other language. -Repeat for all languages that you added. +Repeat for all languages that you added. -The user of your dialog will see the strings of the user interface language of the user's version of %PRODUCTNAME, if you did provide strings in that language. -If no language matches the user's version, the user will see the default language strings. -If the user has an older version of %PRODUCTNAME that does not know localizable string resources for Basic dialogs, the user will see the default language strings. +The user of your dialog will see the strings of the user interface language of the user's version of %PRODUCTNAME, if you did provide strings in that language. +If no language matches the user's version, the user will see the default language strings. +If the user has an older version of %PRODUCTNAME that does not know localizable string resources for Basic dialogs, the user will see the default language strings.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000002.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000002.xhp index 224f06aa72..d54d6985f9 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000002.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000002.xhp @@ -30,36 +30,36 @@ -$[officename] Basic Glossary -This glossary explains some technical terms that you may come across when working with $[officename] Basic. +$[officename] Basic Glossary +This glossary explains some technical terms that you may come across when working with $[officename] Basic.
-Decimal Point -When converting numbers, $[officename] Basic uses the locale settings of the system for determining the type of decimal and thousand separator. -The behavior has an effect on both the implicit conversion ( 1 + "2.3" = 3.3 ) as well as the runtime function IsNumeric. +Decimal Point +When converting numbers, $[officename] Basic uses the locale settings of the system for determining the type of decimal and thousand separator. +The behavior has an effect on both the implicit conversion ( 1 + "2.3" = 3.3 ) as well as the runtime function IsNumeric.
-Colors -In $[officename] Basic, colors are treated as long integer value. The return value of color queries is also always a long integer value. When defining properties, colors can be specified using their RGB code that is converted to a long integer value using the RGB function. +Colors +In $[officename] Basic, colors are treated as long integer value. The return value of color queries is also always a long integer value. When defining properties, colors can be specified using their RGB code that is converted to a long integer value using the RGB function.
-Measurement Units -In $[officename] Basic, a method parameter or a property expecting unit information can be specified either as integer or long integer expression without a unit, or as a character string containing a unit. If no unit is passed to the method the default unit defined for the active document type will be used. If the parameter is passed as a character string containing a measurement unit, the default setting will be ignored. The default measurement unit for a document type can be set under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - (Document Type) - General. +Measurement Units +In $[officename] Basic, a method parameter or a property expecting unit information can be specified either as integer or long integer expression without a unit, or as a character string containing a unit. If no unit is passed to the method the default unit defined for the active document type will be used. If the parameter is passed as a character string containing a measurement unit, the default setting will be ignored. The default measurement unit for a document type can be set under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - (Document Type) - General.
twips; definition -Twips -A twip is a screen-independent unit which is used to define the uniform position and size of screen elements on all display systems. A twip is 1/1440th of an inch or 1/20 of a printer's point. There are 1440 twips to an inch or about 567 twips to a centimeter. +Twips +A twip is a screen-independent unit which is used to define the uniform position and size of screen elements on all display systems. A twip is 1/1440th of an inch or 1/20 of a printer's point. There are 1440 twips to an inch or about 567 twips to a centimeter.
-URL Notation -URLs (Uniform Resource Locators) are used to determine the location of a resource like a file in a file system, typically inside a network environment. A URL consists of a protocol specifier, a host specifier and a file and path specifier: - +URL Notation +URLs (Uniform Resource Locators) are used to determine the location of a resource like a file in a file system, typically inside a network environment. A URL consists of a protocol specifier, a host specifier and a file and path specifier: + protocol://host.name/path/to/the/file.html -The most common usage of URLs is on the internet when specifying web pages. Example for protocols are http, ftp, or file. The file protocol specifier is used when referring to a file on the local file system. -URL notation does not allow certain special characters to be used. These are either replaced by other characters or encoded. A slash (/) is used as a path separator. For example, a file referred to as C:\My File.odt on the local host in "Windows notation" becomes file:///C|/My%20File.odt in URL notation. +The most common usage of URLs is on the internet when specifying web pages. Example for protocols are http, ftp, or file. The file protocol specifier is used when referring to a file on the local file system. +URL notation does not allow certain special characters to be used. These are either replaced by other characters or encoded. A slash (/) is used as a path separator. For example, a file referred to as C:\My File.odt on the local host in "Windows notation" becomes file:///C|/My%20File.odt in URL notation.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000003.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000003.xhp index 0007edade8..0035ea6609 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000003.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000003.xhp @@ -30,403 +30,403 @@ -Information +Information
-You can set the locale used for controlling the formatting numbers, dates and currencies in $[officename] Basic in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. In Basic format codes, the decimal point (.) is always used as placeholder for the decimal separator defined in your locale and will be replaced by the corresponding character. -The same applies to the locale settings for date, time and currency formats. The Basic format code will be interpreted and displayed according to your locale setting. +You can set the locale used for controlling the formatting numbers, dates and currencies in $[officename] Basic in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. In Basic format codes, the decimal point (.) is always used as placeholder for the decimal separator defined in your locale and will be replaced by the corresponding character. +The same applies to the locale settings for date, time and currency formats. The Basic format code will be interpreted and displayed according to your locale setting.
-The color values of the 16 basic colors are as follows: +The color values of the 16 basic colors are as follows: - + Color Value - + Color Name -0 +0 -Black +Black -128 +128 -Blue +Blue -32768 +32768 -Green +Green -32896 +32896 -Cyan +Cyan -8388608 +8388608 -Red +Red -8388736 +8388736 -Magenta +Magenta -8421376 +8421376 -Yellow +Yellow -8421504 +8421504 -White +White -12632256 +12632256 -Gray +Gray -255 +255 -Light blue +Light blue -65280 +65280 -Light green +Light green -65535 +65535 -Light cyan +Light cyan -16711680 +16711680 -Light red +Light red -16711935 +16711935 -Light magenta +Light magenta -16776960 +16776960 -Light yellow +Light yellow -16777215 +16777215 -Transparent white +Transparent white
-Error Codes +Error Codes
-1 An exception occurred +1 An exception occurred -2 Syntax error +2 Syntax error -3 Return without Gosub +3 Return without Gosub -4 Incorrect entry; please retry +4 Incorrect entry; please retry -5 Invalid procedure call +5 Invalid procedure call -6 Overflow +6 Overflow -7 Not enough memory +7 Not enough memory -8 Array already dimensioned +8 Array already dimensioned -9 Index out of defined range +9 Index out of defined range -10 Duplicate definition +10 Duplicate definition -11 Division by zero +11 Division by zero -12 Variable not defined +12 Variable not defined -13 Data type mismatch +13 Data type mismatch -14 Invalid parameter +14 Invalid parameter -18 Process interrupted by user +18 Process interrupted by user -20 Resume without error +20 Resume without error -28 Not enough stack memory +28 Not enough stack memory -35 Sub-procedure or function procedure not defined +35 Sub-procedure or function procedure not defined -48 Error loading DLL file +48 Error loading DLL file -49 Wrong DLL call convention +49 Wrong DLL call convention -51 Internal error +51 Internal error -52 Invalid file name or file number +52 Invalid file name or file number -53 File not found +53 File not found -54 Incorrect file mode +54 Incorrect file mode -55 File already open +55 File already open -57 Device I/O error +57 Device I/O error -58 File already exists +58 File already exists -59 Incorrect record length +59 Incorrect record length -61 Disk or hard drive full +61 Disk or hard drive full -62 Reading exceeds EOF +62 Reading exceeds EOF -63 Incorrect record number +63 Incorrect record number -67 Too many files +67 Too many files -68 Device not available +68 Device not available -70 Access denied +70 Access denied -71 Disk not ready +71 Disk not ready -73 Not implemented +73 Not implemented -74 Renaming on different drives impossible +74 Renaming on different drives impossible -75 Path/file access error +75 Path/file access error -76 Path not found +76 Path not found -91 Object variable not set +91 Object variable not set -93 Invalid string pattern +93 Invalid string pattern -94 Use of zero not permitted +94 Use of zero not permitted -250 DDE Error +250 DDE Error -280 Awaiting response to DDE connection +280 Awaiting response to DDE connection -281 No DDE channels available +281 No DDE channels available -282 No application responded to DDE connect initiation +282 No application responded to DDE connect initiation -283 Too many applications responded to DDE connect initiation +283 Too many applications responded to DDE connect initiation -284 DDE channel locked +284 DDE channel locked -285 External application cannot execute DDE operation +285 External application cannot execute DDE operation -286 Timeout while waiting for DDE response +286 Timeout while waiting for DDE response -287 user pressed ESCAPE during DDE operation +287 user pressed ESCAPE during DDE operation -288 External application busy +288 External application busy -289 DDE operation without data +289 DDE operation without data -290 Data are in wrong format +290 Data are in wrong format -291 External application has been terminated +291 External application has been terminated -292 DDE connection interrupted or modified +292 DDE connection interrupted or modified -293 DDE method invoked with no channel open +293 DDE method invoked with no channel open -294 Invalid DDE link format +294 Invalid DDE link format -295 DDE message has been lost +295 DDE message has been lost -296 Paste link already performed +296 Paste link already performed -297 Link mode cannot be set due to invalid link topic +297 Link mode cannot be set due to invalid link topic -298 DDE requires the DDEML.DLL file +298 DDE requires the DDEML.DLL file -323 Module cannot be loaded; invalid format +323 Module cannot be loaded; invalid format -341 Invalid object index +341 Invalid object index -366 Object is not available +366 Object is not available -380 Incorrect property value +380 Incorrect property value -382 This property is read-only +382 This property is read-only -394 This property is write-only +394 This property is write-only -420 Invalid object reference +420 Invalid object reference -423 Property or method not found +423 Property or method not found -424 Object required +424 Object required -425 Invalid use of an object +425 Invalid use of an object -430 OLE Automation is not supported by this object +430 OLE Automation is not supported by this object -438 This property or method is not supported by the object +438 This property or method is not supported by the object -440 OLE automation error +440 OLE automation error -445 This action is not supported by given object +445 This action is not supported by given object -446 Named arguments are not supported by given object +446 Named arguments are not supported by given object -447 The current locale setting is not supported by the given object +447 The current locale setting is not supported by the given object -448 Named argument not found +448 Named argument not found -449 Argument is not optional +449 Argument is not optional -450 Invalid number of arguments +450 Invalid number of arguments -451 Object is not a list +451 Object is not a list -452 Invalid ordinal number +452 Invalid ordinal number -453 Specified DLL function not found +453 Specified DLL function not found -460 Invalid clipboard format +460 Invalid clipboard format -951 Unexpected symbol: +951 Unexpected symbol: -952 Expected: +952 Expected: -953 Symbol expected +953 Symbol expected -954 Variable expected +954 Variable expected -955 Label expected +955 Label expected -956 Value cannot be applied +956 Value cannot be applied -957 Variable already defined +957 Variable already defined -958 Sub procedure or function procedure already defined +958 Sub procedure or function procedure already defined -959 Label already defined +959 Label already defined -960 Variable not found +960 Variable not found -961 Array or procedure not found +961 Array or procedure not found -962 Procedure not found +962 Procedure not found -963 Label undefined +963 Label undefined -964 Unknown data type +964 Unknown data type -965 Exit expected +965 Exit expected -966 Statement block still open: missing +966 Statement block still open: missing -967 Parentheses do not match +967 Parentheses do not match -968 Symbol already defined differently +968 Symbol already defined differently -969 Parameters do not correspond to procedure +969 Parameters do not correspond to procedure -970 Invalid character in number +970 Invalid character in number -971 Array must be dimensioned +971 Array must be dimensioned -972 Else/Endif without If +972 Else/Endif without If -973 not allowed within a procedure +973 not allowed within a procedure -974 not allowed outside a procedure +974 not allowed outside a procedure -975 Dimension specifications do not match +975 Dimension specifications do not match -976 Unknown option: +976 Unknown option: -977 Constant redefined +977 Constant redefined -978 Program too large +978 Program too large -979 Strings or arrays not permitted +979 Strings or arrays not permitted -1000 Object does not have this property +1000 Object does not have this property -1001 Object does not have this method +1001 Object does not have this method -1002 Required argument lacking +1002 Required argument lacking -1003 Invalid number of arguments +1003 Invalid number of arguments -1004 Error executing a method +1004 Error executing a method -1005 Unable to set property +1005 Unable to set property -1006 Unable to determine property +1006 Unable to determine property
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130000.xhp index fcd47bc929..e919f307be 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130000.xhp @@ -33,49 +33,49 @@ macros; Basic IDE Basic IDE; macros this file needs more work, see i62546 -Macro -Opens the Macro dialog, where you can create, edit, organize, and run $[officename] Basic macros. +Macro +Opens the Macro dialog, where you can create, edit, organize, and run $[officename] Basic macros. -Macro name -Displays the name of the selected macro. To create or to change the name of a macro, enter a name here. -Macro from / Save macro in -Lists the libraries and the modules where you can open or save your macros. To save a macro with a particular document, open the document, and then open this dialog. -Run / Save -Runs or saves the current macro. -Assign -Opens the Customize dialog, where you can assign the selected macro to a menu command, a toolbar, or an event. -Edit -Starts the $[officename] Basic editor and opens the selected macro for editing. -New/Delete -Creates a new macro, or deletes the selected macro. -To create a new macro, select the "Standard" module in the Macro from list, and then click New. -To delete a macro, select it, and then click Delete. -Organizer -Opens the Macro Organizer dialog, where you can add, edit, or delete existing macro modules, dialogs, and libraries. -Module/Dialog -Lists the existing macros and dialogs. -You can drag-and-drop a module or a dialog between libraries. -To copy a dialog or a module, hold down the CommandCtrl key while you drag-and-drop. -Edit -Opens the selected macro or dialog for editing. -New -Creates a new module. -Creates a new dialog. -Libraries tab page -Lets you manage the macro libraries. -Location -Select the location containing the macro libraries that you want to organize. -Library -Lists the macro libraries in the chosen location. -Edit -Opens the $[officename] Basic editor so that you can modify the selected library. -Password -Assigns or edits the password for the selected library. "Standard" libraries cannot have a password. -New -Creates a new library. -Name -Enter a name for the new module, dialog, or library. -Append -Locate that $[officename] Basic library that you want to add to the current list, and then click Open. +Macro name +Displays the name of the selected macro. To create or to change the name of a macro, enter a name here. +Macro from / Save macro in +Lists the libraries and the modules where you can open or save your macros. To save a macro with a particular document, open the document, and then open this dialog. +Run / Save +Runs or saves the current macro. +Assign +Opens the Customize dialog, where you can assign the selected macro to a menu command, a toolbar, or an event. +Edit +Starts the $[officename] Basic editor and opens the selected macro for editing. +New/Delete +Creates a new macro, or deletes the selected macro. +To create a new macro, select the "Standard" module in the Macro from list, and then click New. +To delete a macro, select it, and then click Delete. +Organizer +Opens the Macro Organizer dialog, where you can add, edit, or delete existing macro modules, dialogs, and libraries. +Module/Dialog +Lists the existing macros and dialogs. +You can drag-and-drop a module or a dialog between libraries. +To copy a dialog or a module, hold down the CommandCtrl key while you drag-and-drop. +Edit +Opens the selected macro or dialog for editing. +New +Creates a new module. +Creates a new dialog. +Libraries tab page +Lets you manage the macro libraries. +Location +Select the location containing the macro libraries that you want to organize. +Library +Lists the macro libraries in the chosen location. +Edit +Opens the $[officename] Basic editor so that you can modify the selected library. +Password +Assigns or edits the password for the selected library. "Standard" libraries cannot have a password. +New +Creates a new library. +Name +Enter a name for the new module, dialog, or library. +Append +Locate that $[officename] Basic library that you want to add to the current list, and then click Open. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130100.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130100.xhp index f5f1649225..d781334410 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130100.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130100.xhp @@ -28,15 +28,15 @@ /text/sbasic/shared/01/06130100.xhp -Change Password -Protects the selected library with a password. You can enter a new password, or change the current password. -Old password -Password -Enter the current password for the selected library. -New password -Password -Enter a new password for the selected library. -Confirm -Repeat the new password for the selected library.i66515 +Change Password +Protects the selected library with a password. You can enter a new password, or change the current password. +Old password +Password +Enter the current password for the selected library. +New password +Password +Enter a new password for the selected library. +Confirm +Repeat the new password for the selected library.i66515 diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130500.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130500.xhp index 9fb0a7bfba..377fd631ef 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130500.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130500.xhp @@ -35,16 +35,16 @@ libraries; adding inserting;Basic libraries - Append libraries - Locate that %PRODUCTNAME Basic library that you want to add to the current list, and then click Open. + Append libraries + Locate that %PRODUCTNAME Basic library that you want to add to the current list, and then click Open. - File name: - Enter a name or the path to the library that you want to append. You can also select a library from the list. - Options - Insert as reference (read-only) - Adds the selected library as a read-only file. The library is reloaded each time you start %PRODUCTNAME. - Replace existing libraries - Replaces a library that has the same name with the current library. + File name: + Enter a name or the path to the library that you want to append. You can also select a library from the list. + Options + Insert as reference (read-only) + Adds the selected library as a read-only file. The library is reloaded each time you start %PRODUCTNAME. + Replace existing libraries + Replaces a library that has the same name with the current library. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01000000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01000000.xhp index b92e260206..1e436a2b11 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01000000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01000000.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Programming with $[officename] Basic - This is where you find general information about working with macros and $[officename] Basic. + Programming with $[officename] Basic + This is where you find general information about working with macros and $[officename] Basic.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01010210.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01010210.xhp index 2e5c6cfac4..e60bdab227 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01010210.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01010210.xhp @@ -34,25 +34,25 @@ subroutines variables;global and local modules;subroutines and functions -Basics -This section provides the fundamentals for working with $[officename] Basic. +Basics +This section provides the fundamentals for working with $[officename] Basic.
-$[officename] Basic code is based on subroutines and functions that are specified between sub...end sub and function...end function sections. Each Sub or Function can call other Subs and Functions. If you take care to write generic code for a Sub or Function, you can probably re-use it in other programs. See also Procedures and Functions. +$[officename] Basic code is based on subroutines and functions that are specified between sub...end sub and function...end function sections. Each Sub or Function can call other Subs and Functions. If you take care to write generic code for a Sub or Function, you can probably re-use it in other programs. See also Procedures and Functions. -Some restrictions apply for the names of your public variables, subs, and functions. You must not use the same name as one of the modules of the same library. +Some restrictions apply for the names of your public variables, subs, and functions. You must not use the same name as one of the modules of the same library. -What is a Sub? - +What is a Sub? + Sub is the short form of subroutine, that is used to handle a certain task within a program. Subs are used to split a task into individual procedures. Splitting a program into procedures and sub-procedures enhances readability and reduces the error-proneness. A sub possibly takes some arguments as parameters but does not return any values back to the calling sub or function, for example: -DoSomethingWithTheValues(MyFirstValue,MySecondValue) -What is a Function? -A function is essentially a sub, which returns a value. You may use a function at the right side of a variable declaration, or at other places where you normally use values, for example: -MySecondValue = myFunction(MyFirstValue) -Global and local variables -Global variables are valid for all subs and functions inside a module. They are declared at the beginning of a module before the first sub or function starts. -Variables that you declare within a sub or function are valid only inside this sub or function. These variables override global variables with the same name and local variables with the same name coming from superordinate subs or functions. -Structuring -After separating your program into procedures and functions (Subs and Functions), you can save these procedures and functions as files for reuse in other projects. $[officename] Basic supports Modules and Libraries. Subs and functions are always contained in modules. You can define modules to be global or part of a document. Multiple modules can be combined to a library. -You can copy or move subs, functions, modules and libraries from one file to another by using the Macro dialog. +DoSomethingWithTheValues(MyFirstValue,MySecondValue) +What is a Function? +A function is essentially a sub, which returns a value. You may use a function at the right side of a variable declaration, or at other places where you normally use values, for example: +MySecondValue = myFunction(MyFirstValue) +Global and local variables +Global variables are valid for all subs and functions inside a module. They are declared at the beginning of a module before the first sub or function starts. +Variables that you declare within a sub or function are valid only inside this sub or function. These variables override global variables with the same name and local variables with the same name coming from superordinate subs or functions. +Structuring +After separating your program into procedures and functions (Subs and Functions), you can save these procedures and functions as files for reuse in other projects. $[officename] Basic supports Modules and Libraries. Subs and functions are always contained in modules. You can define modules to be global or part of a document. Multiple modules can be combined to a library. +You can copy or move subs, functions, modules and libraries from one file to another by using the Macro dialog. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020000.xhp index bc65a67bf3..24b1d81659 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020000.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Syntax - This section describes the basic syntax elements of $[officename] Basic. For a detailed description please refer to the $[officename] Basic Guide which is available separately. + Syntax + This section describes the basic syntax elements of $[officename] Basic. For a detailed description please refer to the $[officename] Basic Guide which is available separately.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020200.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020200.xhp index 10dbdb4bfd..aa69b267c3 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020200.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020200.xhp @@ -31,16 +31,16 @@
-Using the Object Catalog +Using the Object Catalog -The object catalog provides an overview of all modules and dialogs you have created in $[officename]. +The object catalog provides an overview of all modules and dialogs you have created in $[officename].
-Click the Object Catalog icon +Click the Object Catalog icon Icon in the Macro toolbar to display the object catalog. -The dialog shows a list of all existing objects in a hierarchical representation. Double-clicking a list entry opens its subordinate objects. -To display a certain module in the Editor or to position the cursor in a selected SUB or FUNCTION, double click on the corresponding entry. +The dialog shows a list of all existing objects in a hierarchical representation. Double-clicking a list entry opens its subordinate objects. +To display a certain module in the Editor or to position the cursor in a selected SUB or FUNCTION, double click on the corresponding entry.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020500.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020500.xhp index f9d4675736..297dfaab76 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020500.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020500.xhp @@ -31,17 +31,17 @@
-Libraries, Modules and Dialogs -The following describes the basic use of libraries, modules and dialogs in $[officename] Basic. +Libraries, Modules and Dialogs +The following describes the basic use of libraries, modules and dialogs in $[officename] Basic.
-$[officename] Basic provides tools to help you structuring your projects. It supports various "units" which enable you to group individual SUBS and FUNCTIONS in a Basic project. -Libraries -Libraries serve as a tool for organizing modules, and can either be attached to a document or a template. When the document or a template is saved, all modules contained in the library are automatically saved as well. -A library can contain up to 16,000 modules. -Modules -A module contains SUBS and FUNCTIONS along with variable declarations. The length of the program that can be saved in a module is limited to 64 KB. If more space is required you can divide a $[officename] Basic project among several modules, and then save them in a single library. -Dialog Modules -Dialog modules contain dialog definitions, including the dialog box properties, the properties of each dialog element and the events assigned. Since a dialog module can only contain a single dialog, they are often referred to as "dialogs". +$[officename] Basic provides tools to help you structuring your projects. It supports various "units" which enable you to group individual SUBS and FUNCTIONS in a Basic project. +Libraries +Libraries serve as a tool for organizing modules, and can either be attached to a document or a template. When the document or a template is saved, all modules contained in the library are automatically saved as well. +A library can contain up to 16,000 modules. +Modules +A module contains SUBS and FUNCTIONS along with variable declarations. The length of the program that can be saved in a module is limited to 64 KB. If more space is required you can divide a $[officename] Basic project among several modules, and then save them in a single library. +Dialog Modules +Dialog modules contain dialog definitions, including the dialog box properties, the properties of each dialog element and the events assigned. Since a dialog module can only contain a single dialog, they are often referred to as "dialogs".
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030000.xhp index e03c975d03..bfc4c77c01 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ Basic IDE;Integrated Development Environment IDE;Integrated Development Environment -Integrated Development Environment (IDE) -This section describes the Integrated Development Environment for $[officename] Basic. +Integrated Development Environment (IDE) +This section describes the Integrated Development Environment for $[officename] Basic.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030100.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030100.xhp index 3bf70887e2..102ba799f8 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030100.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030100.xhp @@ -32,14 +32,14 @@
-IDE Overview +IDE Overview
-The Macro Toolbar in the IDE provides various icons for editing and testing programs. -In the Editor window, directly below the Macro toolbar, you can edit the Basic program code. The column on the left side is used to set breakpoints in the program code. -The Watch window (observer) is located below the Editor window at the left, and displays the contents of variables or arrays during a single step process. -The Call Stack window to the right provides information about the call stack of SUBS and FUNCTIONS when a program runs. +The Macro Toolbar in the IDE provides various icons for editing and testing programs. +In the Editor window, directly below the Macro toolbar, you can edit the Basic program code. The column on the left side is used to set breakpoints in the program code. +The Watch window (observer) is located below the Editor window at the left, and displays the contents of variables or arrays during a single step process. +The Call Stack window to the right provides information about the call stack of SUBS and FUNCTIONS when a program runs.
-Basic IDE +Basic IDE
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030200.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030200.xhp index ca3ca722c6..3045d3a853 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030200.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030200.xhp @@ -37,49 +37,49 @@ long lines;in Basic editor lines of text;in Basic editor continuation;long lines in editor -The Basic Editor +The Basic Editor
-The Basic Editor provides the standard editing functions you are familiar with when working in a text document. It supports the functions of the Edit menu (Cut, Delete, Paste), the ability to select text with the Shift key, as well as cursor positioning functions (for example, moving from word to word with CommandCtrl and the arrow keys). -Long lines can be split into several parts by inserting a space and an underline character _ as the last two characters of a line. This connects the line with the following line to one logical line. (If "Option Compatible" is used in the same Basic module, the line continuation feature is also valid for comment lines.) -If you press the Run BASIC icon on the Macro bar, program execution starts at the first line of the Basic editor. The program executes the first Sub or Function and then program execution stops. The "Sub Main" does not take precedence on program execution. -Insert your Basic code between the Sub Main and End Sub lines that you see when you first open the IDE. Alternatively, delete all lines and then enter your own Basic code. -Navigating in a Project -The Library List -Select a library from the Library list at the left of the toolbar to load the library in the editor. The first module of the selected library will be displayed. -The Object Catalog +The Basic Editor provides the standard editing functions you are familiar with when working in a text document. It supports the functions of the Edit menu (Cut, Delete, Paste), the ability to select text with the Shift key, as well as cursor positioning functions (for example, moving from word to word with CommandCtrl and the arrow keys). +Long lines can be split into several parts by inserting a space and an underline character _ as the last two characters of a line. This connects the line with the following line to one logical line. (If "Option Compatible" is used in the same Basic module, the line continuation feature is also valid for comment lines.) +If you press the Run BASIC icon on the Macro bar, program execution starts at the first line of the Basic editor. The program executes the first Sub or Function and then program execution stops. The "Sub Main" does not take precedence on program execution. +Insert your Basic code between the Sub Main and End Sub lines that you see when you first open the IDE. Alternatively, delete all lines and then enter your own Basic code. +Navigating in a Project +The Library List +Select a library from the Library list at the left of the toolbar to load the library in the editor. The first module of the selected library will be displayed. +The Object Catalog -Saving and Loading Basic Source Code -You can save Basic code in a text file for saving and importing in other programming systems. -You cannot save Basic dialogs to a text file. -Saving Source Code to a Text File +Saving and Loading Basic Source Code +You can save Basic code in a text file for saving and importing in other programming systems. +You cannot save Basic dialogs to a text file. +Saving Source Code to a Text File -Select the module that you want to export as text from the object catalog. +Select the module that you want to export as text from the object catalog. -Click the Save Source As icon in the Macro toolbar. +Click the Save Source As icon in the Macro toolbar. -Select a file name and click OK to save the file. +Select a file name and click OK to save the file. -Loading Source Code From a Text File +Loading Source Code From a Text File -Select the module where you want to import the source code from the object catalog. +Select the module where you want to import the source code from the object catalog. -Position the cursor where you want to insert the program code. +Position the cursor where you want to insert the program code. -Click the Insert Source Text icon in the Macro toolbar. +Click the Insert Source Text icon in the Macro toolbar. -Select the text file containing the source code and click OK. +Select the text file containing the source code and click OK.
-Basic IDE +Basic IDE
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030300.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030300.xhp index 5a092e30db..71eabb8486 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030300.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030300.xhp @@ -37,27 +37,27 @@ error codes in Basic breakpoints Call Stack window -Debugging a Basic Program +Debugging a Basic Program
-Breakpoints and Single Step Execution -You can check each line in your Basic program for errors using single step execution. Errors are easily traced since you can immediately see the result of each step. A pointer in the breakpoint column of the Editor indicates the current line. You can also set a breakpoint if you want to force the program to be interrupted at a specific position. -Double-click in the breakpoint column at the left of the Editor window to toggle a breakpoint at the corresponding line. When the program reaches a breakpoint, the program execution is interrupted. -The single step execution using the Single Step icon causes the program to branch into procedures and functions. -The procedure step execution using the Procedure Step icon causes the program to skip over procedures and functions as a single step. -Properties of a Breakpoint -The properties of a breakpoint are available through its context menu by right-clicking the breakpoint in the breakpoint column. -You can activate and deactivate a breakpoint by selecting Active from its context menu. When a breakpoint is deactivated, it does not interrupt the program execution. -Select Properties from the context menu of a breakpoint or select Breakpoints from the context menu of the breakpoint column to call the Breakpoints dialog where you can specify other breakpoint options. -The list displays all breakpoints with the corresponding line number in the source code. You can activate or deactivate a selected breakpoint by checking or clearing the Active box. -The Pass Count specifies the number of times the breakpoint can be passed over before the program is interrupted. If you enter 0 (default setting) the program is always interrupted as soon as a breakpoint is encountered. -Click Delete to remove the breakpoint from the program. -Observing the Value of Variables -You can monitor the values of a variable by adding it to the Watch window. To add a variable to the list of watched variables, type the variable name in the Watch text box and press Enter. -The values of variables are only displayed if they are in scope. Variables that are not defined at the current source code location display ("Out of Scope") instead of a value. -You can also include arrays in the Watch window. If you enter the name of an array variable without an index value in the Watch text box, the content of the entire array is displayed. -If you rest the mouse over a predefined variable in the Editor at run-time, the content of the variable is displayed in a pop-up box.The Call Stack Window -Provides an overview of the call hierarchy of procedures and functions. You can determine which procedures and functions called which other procedures and functions at the current point in the source code. -List of Run-Time Errors +Breakpoints and Single Step Execution +You can check each line in your Basic program for errors using single step execution. Errors are easily traced since you can immediately see the result of each step. A pointer in the breakpoint column of the Editor indicates the current line. You can also set a breakpoint if you want to force the program to be interrupted at a specific position. +Double-click in the breakpoint column at the left of the Editor window to toggle a breakpoint at the corresponding line. When the program reaches a breakpoint, the program execution is interrupted. +The single step execution using the Single Step icon causes the program to branch into procedures and functions. +The procedure step execution using the Procedure Step icon causes the program to skip over procedures and functions as a single step. +Properties of a Breakpoint +The properties of a breakpoint are available through its context menu by right-clicking the breakpoint in the breakpoint column. +You can activate and deactivate a breakpoint by selecting Active from its context menu. When a breakpoint is deactivated, it does not interrupt the program execution. +Select Properties from the context menu of a breakpoint or select Breakpoints from the context menu of the breakpoint column to call the Breakpoints dialog where you can specify other breakpoint options. +The list displays all breakpoints with the corresponding line number in the source code. You can activate or deactivate a selected breakpoint by checking or clearing the Active box. +The Pass Count specifies the number of times the breakpoint can be passed over before the program is interrupted. If you enter 0 (default setting) the program is always interrupted as soon as a breakpoint is encountered. +Click Delete to remove the breakpoint from the program. +Observing the Value of Variables +You can monitor the values of a variable by adding it to the Watch window. To add a variable to the list of watched variables, type the variable name in the Watch text box and press Enter. +The values of variables are only displayed if they are in scope. Variables that are not defined at the current source code location display ("Out of Scope") instead of a value. +You can also include arrays in the Watch window. If you enter the name of an array variable without an index value in the Watch text box, the content of the entire array is displayed. +If you rest the mouse over a predefined variable in the Editor at run-time, the content of the variable is displayed in a pop-up box.The Call Stack Window +Provides an overview of the call hierarchy of procedures and functions. You can determine which procedures and functions called which other procedures and functions at the current point in the source code. +List of Run-Time Errors diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030400.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030400.xhp index af0054d479..de3a08d8ec 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030400.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030400.xhp @@ -39,161 +39,161 @@ moving;modules organizing;modules/libraries/dialogs renaming modules and dialogs -Organizing Libraries and Modules +Organizing Libraries and Modules
-Organizing Libraries -Creating a New Library +Organizing Libraries +Creating a New Library -Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic and click Organizer or click the Select Module icon in the Basic IDE to open the Macro Organizer dialog. +Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic and click Organizer or click the Select Module icon in the Basic IDE to open the Macro Organizer dialog. -Click the Libraries tab. +Click the Libraries tab. -Select to where you want to attach the library in the Location list. If you select %PRODUCTNAME Macros & Dialogs, the library will belong to the $[officename] application and will be available for all documents. If you select a document the library will be attached to this document and only available from there. +Select to where you want to attach the library in the Location list. If you select %PRODUCTNAME Macros & Dialogs, the library will belong to the $[officename] application and will be available for all documents. If you select a document the library will be attached to this document and only available from there. -Click New and insert a name to create a new library. +Click New and insert a name to create a new library. -Import a Library +Import a Library -Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic and click Organizer or click the Select Module icon in the Basic IDE to open the Macro Organizer dialog. +Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic and click Organizer or click the Select Module icon in the Basic IDE to open the Macro Organizer dialog. -Click the Libraries tab. +Click the Libraries tab. -Select to where you want to import the library in the Location list. If you select %PRODUCTNAME Macros & Dialogs, the library will belong to the $[officename] application and will be available for all documents. If you select a document the library will be imported to this document and only available from there. +Select to where you want to import the library in the Location list. If you select %PRODUCTNAME Macros & Dialogs, the library will belong to the $[officename] application and will be available for all documents. If you select a document the library will be imported to this document and only available from there. -Click Import... and select an external library to import. +Click Import... and select an external library to import. -Select all libraries to be imported in the Import Libraries dialog. The dialog displays all libraries that are contained in the selected file. +Select all libraries to be imported in the Import Libraries dialog. The dialog displays all libraries that are contained in the selected file. -If you want to insert the library as a reference only check the Insert as reference (read-only) box. Read-only libraries are fully functional but cannot be modified in the Basic IDE. +If you want to insert the library as a reference only check the Insert as reference (read-only) box. Read-only libraries are fully functional but cannot be modified in the Basic IDE. -Check the Replace existing libraries box if you want existing libraries of the same name to be overwritten. +Check the Replace existing libraries box if you want existing libraries of the same name to be overwritten. -Click OK to import the library. +Click OK to import the library. -Export a Library +Export a Library -Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic and click Organizer or click the Select Module icon in the Basic IDE to open the Macro Organizer dialog. +Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic and click Organizer or click the Select Module icon in the Basic IDE to open the Macro Organizer dialog. -Click the Libraries tab. +Click the Libraries tab. -In the Location list you specify where your library is stored. Select the library that you want to export. Note that you cannot export the Standard library. +In the Location list you specify where your library is stored. Select the library that you want to export. Note that you cannot export the Standard library. -Click Export... +Click Export... -Choose whether you want to export the library as an extension or as a basic library. +Choose whether you want to export the library as an extension or as a basic library. -Click OK. +Click OK. -Select where you want your library exported. +Select where you want your library exported. -Click Save to export the library. +Click Save to export the library. -Deleting a Library +Deleting a Library -Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic and click Organizer or click the Select Module icon in the Basic IDE to open the Macro Organizer dialog. +Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic and click Organizer or click the Select Module icon in the Basic IDE to open the Macro Organizer dialog. -Click the Libraries tab. +Click the Libraries tab. -Select the library to be deleted from the list. +Select the library to be deleted from the list. -Click Delete. +Click Delete. -Deleting a library permanently deletes all existing modules and corresponding procedures and functions. +Deleting a library permanently deletes all existing modules and corresponding procedures and functions. -You cannot delete the default library named "Standard". +You cannot delete the default library named "Standard". -If you delete a library that was inserted as reference only the reference is deleted but not the library itself. +If you delete a library that was inserted as reference only the reference is deleted but not the library itself. -Organizing Modules and Dialogs -Creating a New Module or Dialog +Organizing Modules and Dialogs +Creating a New Module or Dialog -Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic and click Organizer or click the Select Module icon in the Basic IDE to open the Macro Organizer dialog. +Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic and click Organizer or click the Select Module icon in the Basic IDE to open the Macro Organizer dialog. -Click the Modules tab or the Dialogs tab. +Click the Modules tab or the Dialogs tab. -Select the library where the module will be inserted and click New. +Select the library where the module will be inserted and click New. -Enter a name for the module or the dialog and click OK. +Enter a name for the module or the dialog and click OK. -Renaming a Module or Dialog +Renaming a Module or Dialog -Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic and click Organizer or click the Select Module icon in the Basic IDE to open the Macro Organizer dialog. +Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic and click Organizer or click the Select Module icon in the Basic IDE to open the Macro Organizer dialog. -Click the module to be renamed twice, with a pause between the clicks. Enter the new name. -In the Basic IDE, right-click the name of the module or dialog in the tabs at the bottom of the screen, choose Rename and type in the new name. +Click the module to be renamed twice, with a pause between the clicks. Enter the new name. +In the Basic IDE, right-click the name of the module or dialog in the tabs at the bottom of the screen, choose Rename and type in the new name. -Press Enter to confirm your changes. +Press Enter to confirm your changes. -Deleting a Module or Dialog +Deleting a Module or Dialog -Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic and click Organizer or click the Select Module icon in the Basic IDE to open the Macro Organizer dialog. +Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic and click Organizer or click the Select Module icon in the Basic IDE to open the Macro Organizer dialog. -Click the Modules tab or the Dialogs tab. +Click the Modules tab or the Dialogs tab. -Select the module or dialog to be deleted from the list. Double-click an entry to reveal sub-entries, if required. +Select the module or dialog to be deleted from the list. Double-click an entry to reveal sub-entries, if required. -Click Delete. +Click Delete. -Deleting a module permanently deletes all existing procedures and functions in that module. -Organizing Projects among Documents or Templates -Moving or copying modules between documents, templates and the application. +Deleting a module permanently deletes all existing procedures and functions in that module. +Organizing Projects among Documents or Templates +Moving or copying modules between documents, templates and the application. -Open all documents or templates among which you want to move or copy the modules or dialogs. +Open all documents or templates among which you want to move or copy the modules or dialogs. -Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic and click Organizer or click the Select Module icon in the Basic IDE to open the Macro Organizer dialog. +Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic and click Organizer or click the Select Module icon in the Basic IDE to open the Macro Organizer dialog. -To move a module or dialog to another document, click the corresponding object in the list and drag it to the desired position. A horizontal line indicates the target position of the current object while dragging. Hold the CommandCtrl key while dragging to copy the object instead of moving it. +To move a module or dialog to another document, click the corresponding object in the list and drag it to the desired position. A horizontal line indicates the target position of the current object while dragging. Hold the CommandCtrl key while dragging to copy the object instead of moving it. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01040000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01040000.xhp index 08a098b776..d49a62b802 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01040000.xhp @@ -33,196 +33,194 @@ assigning macros to events events; assigning macros -Event-Driven Macros - This section describes how to assign Basic programs to program events. +Event-Driven Macros + This section describes how to assign Basic programs to program events. - You can automatically execute a macro when a specified software event occurs by assigning the desired macro to the event. The following table provides an overview of program events and at what point an assigned macro is executed. + You can automatically execute a macro when a specified software event occurs by assigning the desired macro to the event. The following table provides an overview of program events and at what point an assigned macro is executed. - Event + Event - An assigned macro is executed... + An assigned macro is executed... - Program Start + Program Start - ... after a $[officename] application is started. + ... after a $[officename] application is started. - Program End + Program End - ...before a $[officename] application is terminated. + ...before a $[officename] application is terminated. - Create Document + Create Document - ...after a new document is created with File - New or with the New icon. + ...after a new document is created with File - New or with the New icon. - Open Document + Open Document - ...after a document is opened with File - Open or with the Open icon. + ...after a document is opened with File - Open or with the Open icon. - Save Document As + Save Document As - ...before a document is saved under a specified name (with File - Save As, or with File - Save or the Save icon, if a document name has not yet been specified). + ...before a document is saved under a specified name (with File - Save As, or with File - Save or the Save icon, if a document name has not yet been specified). - Document has been saved as + Document has been saved as - ... after a document was saved under a specified name (with File - Save As, or with File - Save or with the Save icon, if a document name has not yet been specified). + ... after a document was saved under a specified name (with File - Save As, or with File - Save or with the Save icon, if a document name has not yet been specified). - Save Document + Save Document - ...before a document is saved with File - Save or the Save icon, provided that a document name has already been specified. + ...before a document is saved with File - Save or the Save icon, provided that a document name has already been specified. - Document has been saved + Document has been saved - ...after a document is saved with File - Save or the Save icon, provided that a document name has already been specified. + ...after a document is saved with File - Save or the Save icon, provided that a document name has already been specified. - Document is closingi104852 + Document is closingi104852 - ...before a document is closed. + ...before a document is closed. - Document closed + Document closed - ...after a document was closed. Note that the "Save Document" event may also occur when the document is saved before closing. + ...after a document was closed. Note that the "Save Document" event may also occur when the document is saved before closing. - Activate Document + Activate Document - ...after a document is brought to the foreground. + ...after a document is brought to the foreground. - Deactivate Document + Deactivate Document - ...after another document is brought to the foreground. + ...after another document is brought to the foreground. - Print Document + Print Document - ...after the Print dialog is closed, but before the actual print process begins. + ...after the Print dialog is closed, but before the actual print process begins. - JavaScript run-time error + JavaScript run-time error - ...when a JavaScript run-time error occurs. + ...when a JavaScript run-time error occurs. - Print Mail Merge + Print Mail Merge - ...after the Print dialog is closed, but before the actual print process begins. This event occurs for each copy printed. + ...after the Print dialog is closed, but before the actual print process begins. This event occurs for each copy printed. - Change of the page count + Change of the page count - ...when the page count changes. + ...when the page count changes. - Message received + Message received - ...if a message was received. + ...if a message was received.
- Assigning a Macro to an Event + Assigning a Macro to an Event - Choose Tools - Customize and click the Events tab. + Choose Tools - Customize and click the Events tab. - Select whether you want the assignment to be globally valid or just valid in the current document in the Save In listbox. + Select whether you want the assignment to be globally valid or just valid in the current document in the Save In listbox. - Select the event from the Event list. + Select the event from the Event list. - Click Macro and select the macro to be assigned to the selected event. + Click Macro and select the macro to be assigned to the selected event. - Click OK to assign the macro. + Click OK to assign the macro. - Click OK to close the dialog. + Click OK to close the dialog. - Removing the Assignment of a Macro to an Event + Removing the Assignment of a Macro to an Event - Choose Tools - Customize and click the Events tab. + Choose Tools - Customize and click the Events tab. - Select whether you want to remove a global assignment or an assignment that is just valid in the current document by selecting the option in the Save In listbox. + Select whether you want to remove a global assignment or an assignment that is just valid in the current document by selecting the option in the Save In listbox. - Select the event that contains the assignment to be removed from the Event list. + Select the event that contains the assignment to be removed from the Event list. - Click Remove. + Click Remove. - Click OK to close the dialog. + Click OK to close the dialog. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050000.xhp index 5bd8d7af4b..3bcb9fb44c 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050000.xhp @@ -31,40 +31,40 @@
-$[officename] Basic IDE +$[officename] Basic IDE -This section describes the structure of the Basic IDE. +This section describes the structure of the Basic IDE. -Opens the Basic IDE where you can write and edit macros. +Opens the Basic IDE where you can write and edit macros.
-Commands From the Context menu of the Module Tabs -Insert +Commands From the Context menu of the Module Tabs +Insert -Module -Inserts a new module into the current library. +Module +Inserts a new module into the current library. -Dialog -Inserts a new dialog into the current library. +Dialog +Inserts a new dialog into the current library. -Delete -Deletes the selected module. +Delete +Deletes the selected module. -Rename -Renames the current module in place. +Rename +Renames the current module in place. -Hide -Hides the current module. -Modules -Opens the Macro Organizer dialog. +Hide +Hides the current module. +Modules +Opens the Macro Organizer dialog. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050100.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050100.xhp index 740fbef6c9..acbd67cb9d 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050100.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050100.xhp @@ -31,30 +31,30 @@
-Watch Window -The Watch window allows you to observe the value of variables during the execution of a program. Define the variable in the Watch text box. Click on Enable Watch to add the variable to the list box and to display its values. +Watch Window +The Watch window allows you to observe the value of variables during the execution of a program. Define the variable in the Watch text box. Click on Enable Watch to add the variable to the list box and to display its values.
-Watch -Enter the name of the variable whose value is to be monitored. +Watch +Enter the name of the variable whose value is to be monitored. -Remove Watch -Removes the selected variable from the list of watched variables. +Remove Watch +Removes the selected variable from the list of watched variables. - + Icon -Remove Watch +Remove Watch
-Editing the Value of a Watched Variable -Displays the list of watched variables. Click twice with a short pause in between on an entry to edit its value. The new value will be taken as the variable's value for the program. +Editing the Value of a Watched Variable +Displays the list of watched variables. Click twice with a short pause in between on an entry to edit its value. The new value will be taken as the variable's value for the program. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050200.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050200.xhp index 0ccc7e1d8b..be23744548 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050200.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050200.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@
-Call Stack Window (Calls) -Displays the sequence of procedures and functions during the execution of a program. The Call Stack allows you to monitor the sequence of procedures and functions during the execution of a program. The procedures are functions are displayed bottom to top with the most recent function or procedure call at the top of the list. +Call Stack Window (Calls) +Displays the sequence of procedures and functions during the execution of a program. The Call Stack allows you to monitor the sequence of procedures and functions during the execution of a program. The procedures are functions are displayed bottom to top with the most recent function or procedure call at the top of the list.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050300.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050300.xhp index 2dacbc127c..cc957d5aec 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050300.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050300.xhp @@ -34,24 +34,24 @@ -Manage Breakpoints -Specifies the options for breakpoints. +Manage Breakpoints +Specifies the options for breakpoints. -Breakpoints -Enter the line number for a new breakpoint, then click New. +Breakpoints +Enter the line number for a new breakpoint, then click New. -Active -Activates or deactivates the current breakpoint. +Active +Activates or deactivates the current breakpoint. -Pass Count -Specify the number of loops to perform before the breakpoint takes effect. +Pass Count +Specify the number of loops to perform before the breakpoint takes effect. -New -Creates a breakpoint on the line number specified. +New +Creates a breakpoint on the line number specified. -Delete -Deletes the selected breakpoint. +Delete +Deletes the selected breakpoint. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170100.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170100.xhp index 8eee057bf5..05153753d4 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170100.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170100.xhp @@ -35,66 +35,66 @@ properties; controls and dialogs dialogs; properties -Control and Dialog Properties +Control and Dialog Properties -Specifies the properties of the selected dialog or control. You must be in the design mode to be able to use this command. -Entering Data in the Properties Dialog -The following key combinations apply to enter data in multiline fields or combo boxes of the Properties dialog: +Specifies the properties of the selected dialog or control. You must be in the design mode to be able to use this command. +Entering Data in the Properties Dialog +The following key combinations apply to enter data in multiline fields or combo boxes of the Properties dialog: -Keys +Keys -Effects +Effects -Alt+Down Arrow +Alt+Down Arrow -Opens a combo box +Opens a combo box -Alt+Up Arrow +Alt+Up Arrow -Closes a combo box +Closes a combo box -Shift+Enter +Shift+Enter -Inserts a line break in multiline fields. +Inserts a line break in multiline fields. -(UpArrow) +(UpArrow) -Goes to the previous line. +Goes to the previous line. -(DownArrow) +(DownArrow) -Goes to the next line. +Goes to the next line. -Enter +Enter -Applies the changes made to a field and places the cursor into the next field. +Applies the changes made to a field and places the cursor into the next field.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170101.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170101.xhp index f52cb3292d..9abd523223 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170101.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170101.xhp @@ -30,415 +30,415 @@
-General -Define the properties for the selected control or dialog. The available properties depend on the type of control selected. The following properties therefore are not available for every type of control. +General +Define the properties for the selected control or dialog. The available properties depend on the type of control selected. The following properties therefore are not available for every type of control.
-Alignment -Specify the alignment option for the selected control. +Alignment +Specify the alignment option for the selected control.
-AutoFill -Select "Yes" to enable the AutoFill function for the selected control. +AutoFill +Select "Yes" to enable the AutoFill function for the selected control.
-
Background color -Specify the background color for the current control. +
Background color +Specify the background color for the current control.
-Large change -Specify the number of units to scroll when a user clicks in the area between the slider and the arrows on a scrollbar. +Large change +Specify the number of units to scroll when a user clicks in the area between the slider and the arrows on a scrollbar.
-
Border -Specify the border type for the current control. +
Border +Specify the border type for the current control.
-Button type -Select a button type. Button types determine what type of action is initiated. +Button type +Select a button type. Button types determine what type of action is initiated.
-
Character set -Select the font to be used for displaying the contents of the current control. +
Character set +Select the font to be used for displaying the contents of the current control.
-Currency symbol -Enter the currency symbol to be used for currency controls. +Currency symbol +Enter the currency symbol to be used for currency controls.
-Date -Specify the default date to be shown in the Date control. +Date +Specify the default date to be shown in the Date control.
-Date format -Specify the desired format for a date control. A date control interprets the user input depending on this format setting. +Date format +Specify the desired format for a date control. A date control interprets the user input depending on this format setting.
-Date max. -Specify the upper limit for a date control. +Date max. +Specify the upper limit for a date control.
-Date min. -Specify the lower limit for a date control. +Date min. +Specify the lower limit for a date control.
-Decimal accuracy -Specify the number of decimal places displayed for a numerical or currency control. +Decimal accuracy +Specify the number of decimal places displayed for a numerical or currency control.
-Default button -Select "Yes" to make the current button control the default selection. Pressing Return in the dialog activates the default button. +Default button +Select "Yes" to make the current button control the default selection. Pressing Return in the dialog activates the default button.
-Delay -Specifies the delay in milliseconds between scrollbar trigger events. A trigger event occurs when you click a scrollbar arrow or click the background area in a scrollbar. Repeated trigger events occur if you keep the mouse button pressed when you click a scrollbar arrow or background area in a scrollbar. If you want, you can include valid time units with the number that you enter, for example, 2 s or 500 ms. +Delay +Specifies the delay in milliseconds between scrollbar trigger events. A trigger event occurs when you click a scrollbar arrow or click the background area in a scrollbar. Repeated trigger events occur if you keep the mouse button pressed when you click a scrollbar arrow or background area in a scrollbar. If you want, you can include valid time units with the number that you enter, for example, 2 s or 500 ms.
-
Dropdown -Select "Yes" to enable the dropdown option for list or combo box controls. A dropdown control field has an arrow button which you can click to open a list of the existing form entries. +
Dropdown +Select "Yes" to enable the dropdown option for list or combo box controls. A dropdown control field has an arrow button which you can click to open a list of the existing form entries.
-Enabled -Select "Yes" to enable the control. If the control is disabled, it is grayed out in the dialog. +Enabled +Select "Yes" to enable the control. If the control is disabled, it is grayed out in the dialog.
-Edit mask -Specify the edit mask for a pattern control. This is a character code that defines the input format for the control. -You need to specify a masking character for each input character of the edit mask to restrict the input to the values that are listed in the following table: +Edit mask +Specify the edit mask for a pattern control. This is a character code that defines the input format for the control. +You need to specify a masking character for each input character of the edit mask to restrict the input to the values that are listed in the following table: - Character + Character -Meaning +Meaning -L +L -A text constant. This character cannot be modified by the user. +A text constant. This character cannot be modified by the user. -a +a -The characters a-z can be entered here. If a capital letter is entered, it is automatically converted to a lowercase letter. +The characters a-z can be entered here. If a capital letter is entered, it is automatically converted to a lowercase letter. -A +A -The characters A-Z can be entered here. If a lowercase letter is entered, it is automatically converted to a capital letter +The characters A-Z can be entered here. If a lowercase letter is entered, it is automatically converted to a capital letter -c +c -The characters a-z and 0-9 can be entered here. If a capital letter is entered, it is automatically converted to a lowercase letter. +The characters a-z and 0-9 can be entered here. If a capital letter is entered, it is automatically converted to a lowercase letter. -C +C -The characters a-z and 0-9 can be entered here. If a lowercase letter is entered, it is automatically converted to a capital letter +The characters a-z and 0-9 can be entered here. If a lowercase letter is entered, it is automatically converted to a capital letter -N +N -Only the characters 0-9 can be entered. +Only the characters 0-9 can be entered. -x +x -All printable characters can be entered. +All printable characters can be entered. -X +X -All printable characters can be entered. If a lowercase letter is used, it is automatically converted to a capital letter. +All printable characters can be entered. If a lowercase letter is used, it is automatically converted to a capital letter.
-Editable -Specifies whether the nodes of the tree control are editable. -The default value is FALSE. +Editable +Specifies whether the nodes of the tree control are editable. +The default value is FALSE.
-
Graphics -Specify the source of the graphics for a button or an image control. Click "..." to select a file. +
Graphics +Specify the source of the graphics for a button or an image control. Click "..." to select a file.
-Height -Specify the height of the current control or the dialog. +Height +Specify the height of the current control or the dialog.
-Help text -Enter a help text that is displayed as a tip (bubble help) when the mouse rests over the control. +Help text +Enter a help text that is displayed as a tip (bubble help) when the mouse rests over the control.
-Help URL -Specify the help URL that is called when you press F1 while the focus is on a particular control. For example, use the format HID:1234 to call the Help-ID with the number 1234. -Set the environment variable HELP_DEBUG to 1 to view the Help-IDs as extended help tips. +Help URL +Specify the help URL that is called when you press F1 while the focus is on a particular control. For example, use the format HID:1234 to call the Help-ID with the number 1234. +Set the environment variable HELP_DEBUG to 1 to view the Help-IDs as extended help tips.
-Incr./decrement value -Specify the increment and decrement interval for spin button controls. +Incr./decrement value +Specify the increment and decrement interval for spin button controls.
-Invokes stop mode editing -Specifies what happens when editing is interrupted by selecting another node in the tree, a change in the tree's data, or by some other means. -Setting this property to TRUE causes the changes to be automatically saved when editing is interrupted. FALSE means that editing is canceled and changes are lost. -The default value is FALSE. +Invokes stop mode editing +Specifies what happens when editing is interrupted by selecting another node in the tree, a change in the tree's data, or by some other means. +Setting this property to TRUE causes the changes to be automatically saved when editing is interrupted. FALSE means that editing is canceled and changes are lost. +The default value is FALSE.
-
Label -Specifies the label of the current control. The label is displayed along with the control. -You can create multi-line labels by inserting manual line breaks in the label using Shift+Enter. +
Label +Specifies the label of the current control. The label is displayed along with the control. +You can create multi-line labels by inserting manual line breaks in the label using Shift+Enter.
-Line Count -Enter the number of lines to be displayed for a list control. For combo boxes, this setting is only active if the dropdown option is enabled. +Line Count +Enter the number of lines to be displayed for a list control. For combo boxes, this setting is only active if the dropdown option is enabled.
-Scrollbar -Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box. +Scrollbar +Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box.
-Small change -Specify the number of units to scroll when a user clicks an arrow on a scrollbar. +Small change +Specify the number of units to scroll when a user clicks an arrow on a scrollbar.
-
List entries -Specify the entries for a list control. One line takes one list entry. Press Shift+Enter to insert a new line. +
List entries +Specify the entries for a list control. One line takes one list entry. Press Shift+Enter to insert a new line.
-Literal mask -Specify the initial values to be displayed in a pattern control. This helps the user to identify which values are allowed in a pattern control. The literal mask is restricted by the format specified by the edit mask. +Literal mask +Specify the initial values to be displayed in a pattern control. This helps the user to identify which values are allowed in a pattern control. The literal mask is restricted by the format specified by the edit mask.
-Manual line break -Select "Yes" to allow manual line breaks inside multiline controls. +Manual line break +Select "Yes" to allow manual line breaks inside multiline controls.
-Max. text length -Specify the maximum number of characters that the user can enter. +Max. text length +Specify the maximum number of characters that the user can enter.
-
Multiline Input -Select "Yes" to allow the input of multiple lines in the control. Press Enter to insert a manual line break in the control. +
Multiline Input +Select "Yes" to allow the input of multiple lines in the control. Press Enter to insert a manual line break in the control.
-Multiselection -Select "Yes" to allow the selection of multiple entries in list controls. +Multiselection +Select "Yes" to allow the selection of multiple entries in list controls.
-
Name -Insert a name for the current control. This name is used to identify the control. +
Name +Insert a name for the current control. This name is used to identify the control.
-
Order -Specify the order in which the controls receive the focus when the Tab key is pressed in the dialog. On entering a dialog, the control with the lowest order (0) receives the focus. Pressing the Tab key the successively focusses the other controls as specified by their order number. -Initially, the controls receive numbers in the order they are added to the dialog. You can change the order numbers for controls. $[officename] Basic updates the order numbers automatically to avoid duplicate numbers. Controls that cannot be focused are also assigned a value but these controls are skipped when using the Tab key. +
Order +Specify the order in which the controls receive the focus when the Tab key is pressed in the dialog. On entering a dialog, the control with the lowest order (0) receives the focus. Pressing the Tab key the successively focusses the other controls as specified by their order number. +Initially, the controls receive numbers in the order they are added to the dialog. You can change the order numbers for controls. $[officename] Basic updates the order numbers automatically to avoid duplicate numbers. Controls that cannot be focused are also assigned a value but these controls are skipped when using the Tab key.
-Orientation -Specify the orientation for a scrollbar control. +Orientation +Specify the orientation for a scrollbar control.
-Page (step) -Specify the number of the dialog page to which the current control is assigned or the page number of the dialog you want to edit. If a dialog has only one page set its Page (Step) value to 0. -Select Page (Step) = 0 to make a control visible on every dialog page. -To switch between dialog pages at run time, you need to create a macro that changes the value of Page (Step). +Page (step) +Specify the number of the dialog page to which the current control is assigned or the page number of the dialog you want to edit. If a dialog has only one page set its Page (Step) value to 0. +Select Page (Step) = 0 to make a control visible on every dialog page. +To switch between dialog pages at run time, you need to create a macro that changes the value of Page (Step).
-Password characters -Enter a character to be displayed instead of the characters that are typed. This can be used for entering passwords in text controls. +Password characters +Enter a character to be displayed instead of the characters that are typed. This can be used for entering passwords in text controls.
-PositionXSpecify the distance of the current control from the left side of the dialog. +PositionXSpecify the distance of the current control from the left side of the dialog.
-PositionY -Specify the distance of the current control from the top of the dialog. +PositionY +Specify the distance of the current control from the top of the dialog.
-Prefix symbol -Select "Yes" to display the currency symbol prefix in currency controls when a number was entered. +Prefix symbol +Select "Yes" to display the currency symbol prefix in currency controls when a number was entered.
-Print -Select "Yes" to include the current control in a document's printout. +Print +Select "Yes" to include the current control in a document's printout.
-Progress value -Specify a progress value for a progress bar control. +Progress value +Specify a progress value for a progress bar control.
-Progress value max. -Specify the maximum value of a progress bar control. +Progress value max. +Specify the maximum value of a progress bar control.
-Progress value min. -Specify the minimum value of a progress bar control. +Progress value min. +Specify the minimum value of a progress bar control.
-
Read-only -Select "Yes" to prevent the user from editing the value of the current control. The control is enabled and can be focussed but not modified. +
Read-only +Select "Yes" to prevent the user from editing the value of the current control. The control is enabled and can be focussed but not modified.
-RepeatUFI: see spec spinbutton_form_control.sxw -Repeats trigger events when you keep the mouse button pressed on a control such as a spin button. +RepeatUFI: see spec spinbutton_form_control.sxw +Repeats trigger events when you keep the mouse button pressed on a control such as a spin button.
-Root displayedsee http://specs.openoffice.org/appwide/dialog_ide/New_Tree_Control_in_IDE.odt -Specifies if the root node of the tree control is displayed. -If Root displayed is set to FALSE, the root node of a model is no longer a valid node for the tree control and can't be used with any method of XTreeControl. -The default value is TRUE. +Root displayedsee http://specs.openoffice.org/appwide/dialog_ide/New_Tree_Control_in_IDE.odt +Specifies if the root node of the tree control is displayed. +If Root displayed is set to FALSE, the root node of a model is no longer a valid node for the tree control and can't be used with any method of XTreeControl. +The default value is TRUE.
-Row height -Specifies the height of each row of a tree control, in pixels. -If the specified value is less than or equal to zero, the row height is the maximum height of all rows. -The default value is 0. +Row height +Specifies the height of each row of a tree control, in pixels. +If the specified value is less than or equal to zero, the row height is the maximum height of all rows. +The default value is 0.
-Scale -Scales the image to fit the control size. +Scale +Scales the image to fit the control size.
-Scrollbar -Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box. +Scrollbar +Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box.
-Scroll value -Specify the initial value of a scrollbar control. This determines the position of the scrollbar slider. +Scroll value +Specify the initial value of a scrollbar control. This determines the position of the scrollbar slider.
-Scroll value max. -Specify the maximum value of a scrollbar control. +Scroll value max. +Specify the maximum value of a scrollbar control.
-Scroll value min. -Specify the minimum value of a scrollbar control. +Scroll value min. +Specify the minimum value of a scrollbar control.
-Show handles -Specifies whether the handles of the nodes should be displayed. -The handles are dotted lines that visualize the hierarchy of the tree control. -The default value is TRUE. +Show handles +Specifies whether the handles of the nodes should be displayed. +The handles are dotted lines that visualize the hierarchy of the tree control. +The default value is TRUE.
-Show root handles -Specifies whether the handles of the nodes should also be displayed at root level. -The default value is TRUE. +Show root handles +Specifies whether the handles of the nodes should also be displayed at root level. +The default value is TRUE.
-SelectionUFI: udk.features "New property and help ID for property browser in Basic IDE" -Specifies the sequence of the selected items, where "0" corresponds to the first item. To select more than one item, Multiselection must be enabled. -Click the ... button to open the Selection dialog. -Click the item or items that you want to select. To select more than one item, ensure that the Multiselection option is selected. +SelectionUFI: udk.features "New property and help ID for property browser in Basic IDE" +Specifies the sequence of the selected items, where "0" corresponds to the first item. To select more than one item, Multiselection must be enabled. +Click the ... button to open the Selection dialog. +Click the item or items that you want to select. To select more than one item, ensure that the Multiselection option is selected.
-Selection typesee http://specs.openoffice.org/appwide/dialog_ide/New_Tree_Control_in_IDE.odt -Specifies the selection mode that is enabled for this tree control. +Selection typesee http://specs.openoffice.org/appwide/dialog_ide/New_Tree_Control_in_IDE.odt +Specifies the selection mode that is enabled for this tree control.
-
Spin Button -Select "Yes" to add spin buttons to a numerical, currency, date, or time control to allow increasing and decreasing the input value using arrow buttons. +
Spin Button +Select "Yes" to add spin buttons to a numerical, currency, date, or time control to allow increasing and decreasing the input value using arrow buttons.
-State -Select the selection state of the current control. +State +Select the selection state of the current control.
-Strict format -Select "Yes" to only allow valid characters to be entered in a numerical, currency, date, or time control. +Strict format +Select "Yes" to only allow valid characters to be entered in a numerical, currency, date, or time control.
-
Tabstop -Select the focus behavior of the current control when using the Tab key. +
Tabstop +Select the focus behavior of the current control when using the Tab key. -Default +Default -Only input controls receive the focus when using the Tab key. Controls without input like caption controls are omitted. +Only input controls receive the focus when using the Tab key. Controls without input like caption controls are omitted. -No +No -When using the tab key focusing skips the control. +When using the tab key focusing skips the control. -Yes +Yes -The control can be selected with the Tab key. +The control can be selected with the Tab key.
-Thousands Separator -Select "Yes" to display thousands separator characters in numerical and currency controls. +Thousands Separator +Select "Yes" to display thousands separator characters in numerical and currency controls.
-Time Format -Select the format to be used for time controls. +Time Format +Select the format to be used for time controls.
-Time max. -Specify the maximum time value for a time control. +Time max. +Specify the maximum time value for a time control.
-Time min. -Specify the minimum time value for a time control. +Time min. +Specify the minimum time value for a time control.
-Title -Specify the title of the dialog. Click the border of the dialog to select the dialog. - +Title +Specify the title of the dialog. Click the border of the dialog to select the dialog. + Titles are only used for labeling a dialog and can only contain one line. Please note that if you work with macros, controls are only called through their Name property.
-Tristate -Select "Yes" to allow a check box to have three states (checked, unchecked, and grayed out) instead of two (checked and unchecked). +Tristate +Select "Yes" to allow a check box to have three states (checked, unchecked, and grayed out) instead of two (checked and unchecked).
-Value -Specify the value for the current control. +Value +Specify the value for the current control.
-Value max. -Specify the maximum value for the current control. +Value max. +Specify the maximum value for the current control.
-Value min. -Specify the minimum value for the current control. +Value min. +Specify the minimum value for the current control.
-Visible size -Specify the length of the slider of a scrollbar control. +Visible size +Specify the length of the slider of a scrollbar control.
-
Width -Specify the width of the current control or dialog. +
Width +Specify the width of the current control or dialog.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170103.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170103.xhp index 74c5e33914..f08026f8bc 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170103.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170103.xhp @@ -31,36 +31,36 @@
-Events -Define event assignments for the selected control or dialog. The available events depend on the type of control selected. +Events +Define event assignments for the selected control or dialog. The available events depend on the type of control selected.
-When receiving focus -This event takes place if a control receives the focus. -When losing focus -This event takes place if a control loses the focus. -Key pressed -This event occurs when the user presses any key while the control has the focus. -Key released -This event occurs when the user releases a key while the control has the focus. -Modified -This event takes place, when the control loses the focus and the contents of the control were changed since it lost the focus. -Text modified -This event takes place if you enter or modify a text in an input field. -Item status changed -This event takes place if the status of the control field is changed, for example, from checked to unchecked. -Mouse inside -This event takes place when the mouse enters the control. -Mouse moved while key pressed -This event takes place when the mouse is dragged while a key is pressed. -Mouse moved -This event takes place when the mouse moves over the control. -Mouse button pressed -This event takes place when the mouse button is pressed while the mouse pointer is on the control. -Mouse button released -This event takes place when the mouse button is released while the mouse pointer is on the control. -Mouse outside -This event takes place when the mouse leaves the control. -While adjusting -This event takes place when a scrollbar is being dragged. +When receiving focus +This event takes place if a control receives the focus. +When losing focus +This event takes place if a control loses the focus. +Key pressed +This event occurs when the user presses any key while the control has the focus. +Key released +This event occurs when the user releases a key while the control has the focus. +Modified +This event takes place, when the control loses the focus and the contents of the control were changed since it lost the focus. +Text modified +This event takes place if you enter or modify a text in an input field. +Item status changed +This event takes place if the status of the control field is changed, for example, from checked to unchecked. +Mouse inside +This event takes place when the mouse enters the control. +Mouse moved while key pressed +This event takes place when the mouse is dragged while a key is pressed. +Mouse moved +This event takes place when the mouse moves over the control. +Mouse button pressed +This event takes place when the mouse button is pressed while the mouse pointer is on the control. +Mouse button released +This event takes place when the mouse button is released while the mouse pointer is on the control. +Mouse outside +This event takes place when the mouse leaves the control. +While adjusting +This event takes place when a scrollbar is being dragged. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11010000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11010000.xhp index 0309aa96b3..ff477c4e3c 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11010000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Library - Select the library that you want to edit. The first module of the library that you select is displayed in the Basic IDE. +Library + Select the library that you want to edit. The first module of the library that you select is displayed in the Basic IDE.
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ - List box Library + List box Library - Library List Box + Library List Box diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11020000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11020000.xhp index 34b7cfeed8..c38b6e9399 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11020000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Compile - Compiles the Basic macro. You need to compile a macro after you make changes to it, or if the macro uses single or procedure steps. +Compile + Compiles the Basic macro. You need to compile a macro after you make changes to it, or if the macro uses single or procedure steps.
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Compile + Compile diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11030000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11030000.xhp index 4bdeb14e54..430c41e463 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11030000.xhp @@ -33,19 +33,19 @@
-Run -Runs the first macro of the current module. +Run +Runs the first macro of the current module.
- + Icon -Run +Run
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11040000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11040000.xhp index d820ad1ad7..771694d9f6 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11040000.xhp @@ -35,20 +35,20 @@ stopping macros -Stop -Stops running the current macro. +Stop +Stops running the current macro. You can also press Shift+Ctrl+Q.
- + Icon -Stop +Stop
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11050000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11050000.xhp index a1a14b41c3..225289e7a3 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11050000.xhp @@ -33,27 +33,27 @@
-Single Step -Runs the macro and stops it after the next command. +Single Step +Runs the macro and stops it after the next command.
-You can use this command in conjunction with the Watch command to troubleshoot errors. +You can use this command in conjunction with the Watch command to troubleshoot errors.
- + Icon -Single Step +Single Step
-Procedure Step function +Procedure Step function
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11060000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11060000.xhp index 297cc67c4b..6fb0fbda6a 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11060000.xhp @@ -33,27 +33,27 @@
-Procedure Step -Runs the macro and stops it after the next procedure. +Procedure Step +Runs the macro and stops it after the next procedure.
-You can use this command in conjunction with the Watch command to troubleshoot errors. +You can use this command in conjunction with the Watch command to troubleshoot errors.
- + Icon -Procedure Step +Procedure Step
-Single Step function +Single Step function
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11070000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11070000.xhp index 48915c73e0..c816bf9c40 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11070000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11070000.xhp @@ -31,20 +31,20 @@
-Breakpoint -Inserts a breakpoint in the program line. +Breakpoint +Inserts a breakpoint in the program line.
-The breakpoint is inserted at the cursor position. Use a breakpoint to interrupt a program just before an error occurs. You can then troubleshoot the program by running it in Single Step mode until the error occurs. You can also use the Watch icon to check the content of the relevant variables. +The breakpoint is inserted at the cursor position. Use a breakpoint to interrupt a program just before an error occurs. You can then troubleshoot the program by running it in Single Step mode until the error occurs. You can also use the Watch icon to check the content of the relevant variables.
- + Icon -Breakpoint +Breakpoint
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11080000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11080000.xhp index 134d0d913c..abde3f9a90 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11080000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11080000.xhp @@ -33,25 +33,25 @@
-Enable Watch -Click this icon to view the variables in a macro. The contents of the variable are displayed in a separate window. +Enable Watch +Click this icon to view the variables in a macro. The contents of the variable are displayed in a separate window.
-Click the name of a variable to select it, then click the Enable Watch icon. The value that is assigned to the variable is displayed next to its name. This value is constantly updated. +Click the name of a variable to select it, then click the Enable Watch icon. The value that is assigned to the variable is displayed next to its name. This value is constantly updated.
- + Icon -Enable Watch +Enable Watch
-To remove the variable watch, select the variable in the Watch window, and then click on the Remove Watch icon. +To remove the variable watch, select the variable in the Watch window, and then click on the Remove Watch icon. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11090000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11090000.xhp index bacd269eca..9cd08b7093 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11090000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11090000.xhp @@ -35,20 +35,20 @@
-Object Catalog -Opens the Objects pane, where you can view Basic objects. +Object Catalog +Opens the Objects pane, where you can view Basic objects.
-Double click the name of a function or sub to load the module that contains that function or sub, and to position the cursor. Double click the name of a module or dialog to load and display that module or dialog. +Double click the name of a function or sub to load the module that contains that function or sub, and to position the cursor. Double click the name of a module or dialog to load and display that module or dialog.
- + Icon -Object Catalog +Object Catalog
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@
-Window Area -Displays a hierarchical view of the current $[officename] macro libraries, modules, and dialogs. To display the contents of an item in the window, double click its name. +Window Area +Displays a hierarchical view of the current $[officename] macro libraries, modules, and dialogs. To display the contents of an item in the window, double click its name. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11100000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11100000.xhp index 7b25109a95..ba17e84f89 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11100000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11100000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Macros - Opens the Macro dialog. +Macros + Opens the Macro dialog.
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Macros + Macros diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11110000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11110000.xhp index 667bd33e8a..da0beafa69 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11110000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11110000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Modules - Click here to open the Macro Organizer dialog. +Modules + Click here to open the Macro Organizer dialog.
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Modules + Modules diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11120000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11120000.xhp index 98936f59d5..d76c37eaf8 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11120000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11120000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Find Parentheses - Highlights the text that is enclosed by two corresponding brackets. Place the text cursor in front of an opening or closing bracket, and then click this icon. +Find Parentheses + Highlights the text that is enclosed by two corresponding brackets. Place the text cursor in front of an opening or closing bracket, and then click this icon.
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Find Parentheses + Find Parentheses diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11140000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11140000.xhp index cfbcd87ba1..9536dfe19c 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11140000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11140000.xhp @@ -33,20 +33,20 @@
-Insert Source Text -Opens the Basic source text in the Basic IDE window. +Insert Source Text +Opens the Basic source text in the Basic IDE window.
-Place the cursor in the code where you want to insert the source text, and then click the Insert source text icon. Locate the file that contains the Basic source text that you want to insert, and then click Open. +Place the cursor in the code where you want to insert the source text, and then click the Insert source text icon. Locate the file that contains the Basic source text that you want to insert, and then click Open.
- + Icon -Insert source text +Insert source text
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11150000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11150000.xhp index ee34eafd6b..ed289cbd79 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11150000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11150000.xhp @@ -33,19 +33,19 @@
-Save Source As -Saves the source code of the selected Basic macro. +Save Source As +Saves the source code of the selected Basic macro.
- + Icon -Save Source As +Save Source As
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11160000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11160000.xhp index e02ad636be..039c5fe03d 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11160000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11160000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Step Out - Jumps back to the previous routine in the current macro. +Step Out + Jumps back to the previous routine in the current macro.
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Step Out + Step Out diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11170000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11170000.xhp index 91c086abeb..f944e2aba8 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11170000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11170000.xhp @@ -29,26 +29,26 @@
-Manage Breakpoints - Calls a dialog to manage breakpoints. +Manage Breakpoints + Calls a dialog to manage breakpoints.
- + Icon - Manage Breakpoints + Manage Breakpoints
- Manage Breakpoints dialog + Manage Breakpoints dialog
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11180000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11180000.xhp index 8f954b72bd..594c3cc165 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11180000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11180000.xhp @@ -29,18 +29,18 @@
-Import Dialog - Calls an "Open" dialog to import a BASIC dialog file. - If the imported dialog has a name that already exists in the library, you see a message box where you can decide to rename the imported dialog. In this case the dialog will be renamed to the next free "automatic" name like when creating a new dialog. Or you can replace the existing dialog by the imported dialog. If you click Cancel the dialog is not imported. - Dialogs can contain localization data. When importing a dialog, a mismatch of the dialogs' localization status can occur. - If the library contains additional languages compared to the imported dialog, or if the imported dialog is not localized at all, then the additional languages will silently be added to the imported dialog using the strings of the dialog's default locale. - If the imported dialog contains additional languages compared to the library, or if the library is not localized at all, then you see a message box with Add, Omit, and Cancel buttons. +Import Dialog + Calls an "Open" dialog to import a BASIC dialog file. + If the imported dialog has a name that already exists in the library, you see a message box where you can decide to rename the imported dialog. In this case the dialog will be renamed to the next free "automatic" name like when creating a new dialog. Or you can replace the existing dialog by the imported dialog. If you click Cancel the dialog is not imported. + Dialogs can contain localization data. When importing a dialog, a mismatch of the dialogs' localization status can occur. + If the library contains additional languages compared to the imported dialog, or if the imported dialog is not localized at all, then the additional languages will silently be added to the imported dialog using the strings of the dialog's default locale. + If the imported dialog contains additional languages compared to the library, or if the library is not localized at all, then you see a message box with Add, Omit, and Cancel buttons. - Add: The additional languages from the imported dialog will be added to the already existing dialog. The resources from the library's default language will be used for the new languages. This is the same as if you add these languages manually. + Add: The additional languages from the imported dialog will be added to the already existing dialog. The resources from the library's default language will be used for the new languages. This is the same as if you add these languages manually. - Omit: The library's language settings will stay unchanged. The imported dialog's resources for the omitted languages are not copied into the library, but they remain in the imported dialog's source files. + Omit: The library's language settings will stay unchanged. The imported dialog's resources for the omitted languages are not copied into the library, but they remain in the imported dialog's source files.
@@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ - + Icon - Import Dialog + Import Dialog
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11190000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11190000.xhp index 7b6701c0cb..dc39139a68 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11190000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11190000.xhp @@ -29,19 +29,19 @@
-Export Dialog - In the dialog editor, this command calls a "Save as" dialog to export the current BASIC dialog. +Export Dialog + In the dialog editor, this command calls a "Save as" dialog to export the current BASIC dialog.
- + Icon - Export Dialog + Export Dialog
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/20000000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/20000000.xhp index 0e39e507fb..e274b76012 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/20000000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/20000000.xhp @@ -65,368 +65,368 @@ test mode control -Insert Controls -Opens the Toolbox bar.
+Insert Controls +Opens the Toolbox bar.
- + Icon -Insert Controls +Insert Controls
-In edit mode, double-click a control to open the properties dialog. +In edit mode, double-click a control to open the properties dialog. -In edit mode, you can also right-click a control and choose the cut, copy, and paste command. +In edit mode, you can also right-click a control and choose the cut, copy, and paste command. -Button +Button - + Icon -Adds a command button. You can use a command button to execute a command for a defined event, such as a mouse click. -If you want, you can add text or a graphic to the button. +Adds a command button. You can use a command button to execute a command for a defined event, such as a mouse click. +If you want, you can add text or a graphic to the button.
-Image Control +Image Control - + Icon -Adds a control that displays a graphic. +Adds a control that displays a graphic.
-Check Box +Check Box - + Icon -Adds a check box that you can use to turn a function on or off. +Adds a check box that you can use to turn a function on or off.
-Option Button +Option Button - + Icon -Adds a button that allows a user to select from a number of options. Grouped option buttons must have consecutive tab indices. They are commonly encircled by a group box. If you have two groups of option buttons, you must insert a tab index between the tab indices of the two groups on the group frame. +Adds a button that allows a user to select from a number of options. Grouped option buttons must have consecutive tab indices. They are commonly encircled by a group box. If you have two groups of option buttons, you must insert a tab index between the tab indices of the two groups on the group frame.
-Label Field +Label Field - + Icon -Adds a field for displaying text labels. These labels are only for displaying predefined text, and not for entering text. +Adds a field for displaying text labels. These labels are only for displaying predefined text, and not for entering text.
-Text Box +Text Box - + Icon -Adds an input box where you can enter and edit text. +Adds an input box where you can enter and edit text.
-List Box +List Box - + Icon -Adds a box where you can click an entry on a list. +Adds a box where you can click an entry on a list.
-Combo Box +Combo Box - + Icon -Adds a combo box. A combo box is a one line list box that a user can click, and then choose an entry from the list. If you want, you can make the entries in the combo box "read only". +Adds a combo box. A combo box is a one line list box that a user can click, and then choose an entry from the list. If you want, you can make the entries in the combo box "read only".
-Horizontal Scrollbar +Horizontal Scrollbar - + Icon -Adds a horizontal scrollbar to the dialog. +Adds a horizontal scrollbar to the dialog.
-Vertical Scrollbar +Vertical Scrollbar - + Icon -Adds a vertical scrollbar to the dialog. +Adds a vertical scrollbar to the dialog.
-Group Box +Group Box - + Icon -Adds a frame that you can use to visually group similar controls, such as option buttons. +Adds a frame that you can use to visually group similar controls, such as option buttons.
-To define two different groups of option buttons, ensure that the tab index of the group frame is between the tab indices of the two groups. -Progress Bar +To define two different groups of option buttons, ensure that the tab index of the group frame is between the tab indices of the two groups. +Progress Bar - + Icon -Adds a progress bar to the dialog. +Adds a progress bar to the dialog.
-Horizontal Line +Horizontal Line - + Icon -Adds a horizontal line to the dialog. +Adds a horizontal line to the dialog.
-Vertical Line +Vertical Line - + Icon -Adds a vertical line to the dialog. +Adds a vertical line to the dialog.
-Date Field +Date Field - + Icon -Adds a date field. +Adds a date field.
-If you assign the "dropdown" property to the date field, a user can drop down a calendar to select a date. -Time Field +If you assign the "dropdown" property to the date field, a user can drop down a calendar to select a date. +Time Field - + Icon -Adds a time field. +Adds a time field.
-Numeric Field +Numeric Field - + Icon -Adds a numeric field. +Adds a numeric field.
-Currency Field +Currency Field - + Icon -Adds a currency field. +Adds a currency field.
-Formatted Field +Formatted Field - + Icon -Adds a text box where you can define the formatting for text that is inputted or outputted as well as any limiting values. +Adds a text box where you can define the formatting for text that is inputted or outputted as well as any limiting values.
-Pattern Field +Pattern Field - + Icon -Adds a masked field. A masked field consists of an input mask and a literal mask. The input mask determines which user data can be entered. The literal mask determines the state of the masked field when the form is loaded. +Adds a masked field. A masked field consists of an input mask and a literal mask. The input mask determines which user data can be entered. The literal mask determines the state of the masked field when the form is loaded.
-File Selection +File Selection - + Icon -Adds a button that opens a file selection dialog. +Adds a button that opens a file selection dialog.
-Select +Select - + Icon -Activates or deactivates the Selection mode. In this mode, you can select the controls in a dialog so that you can edit them. +Activates or deactivates the Selection mode. In this mode, you can select the controls in a dialog so that you can edit them.
-Properties +Properties - + Icon -Opens a dialog where you can edit the properties of the selected control. +Opens a dialog where you can edit the properties of the selected control.
-Activate Test Mode +Activate Test Mode - + Icon -Starts test mode. Click the dialog closer icon to end test mode. +Starts test mode. Click the dialog closer icon to end test mode.
-Manage Language +Manage Language - + Manage Language icon -Opens a dialog to enable or manage multiple sets of dialog resources for multiple languages. +Opens a dialog to enable or manage multiple sets of dialog resources for multiple languages.
-Tree Control +Tree Control - + Manage Language icon -Adds a tree control that can show a hierarchical list. You can populate the list by your program, using API calls (XtreeControl). +Adds a tree control that can show a hierarchical list. You can populate the list by your program, using API calls (XtreeControl).
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03000000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03000000.xhp index 11aa5e8221..27cb476658 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03000000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03000000.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Run-Time Functions - This section describes the Runtime Functions of %PRODUCTNAME Basic. + Run-Time Functions + This section describes the Runtime Functions of %PRODUCTNAME Basic.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010000.xhp index c3b2954e4a..bd9fae4df7 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010000.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Screen I/O Functions - This section describes the Runtime Functions used to call dialogs for the input and output of user entries. + Screen I/O Functions + This section describes the Runtime Functions used to call dialogs for the input and output of user entries.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010100.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010100.xhp index 96ccc38d87..f9fb1bb0fe 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010100.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010100.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Display Functions - This section describes Runtime functions used to output information to the screen display. + Display Functions + This section describes Runtime functions used to output information to the screen display.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010200.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010200.xhp index 6a72534c22..5464dbaf05 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010200.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010200.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Functions for Screen Input - This section describes Runtime functions used to control screen input. + Functions for Screen Input + This section describes Runtime functions used to control screen input.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010300.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010300.xhp index 82a24af6fd..0e06f5dc3c 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010300.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010300.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Color Functions - This section describes Runtime functions used to define colors. + Color Functions + This section describes Runtime functions used to define colors.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020000.xhp index a273955ef3..f4d1cb2852 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020000.xhp @@ -31,10 +31,10 @@
-File I/O Functions -Use File I/O functions to create and manage user-defined (data) files. +File I/O Functions +Use File I/O functions to create and manage user-defined (data) files.
-You can use these functions to support the creation of "relative" files, so that you can save and reload certain records by specifying their record number. File I/O functions can also help you manage your files by providing you with information such as file size, current path settings, or the creation date of a file or a directory. +You can use these functions to support the creation of "relative" files, so that you can save and reload certain records by specifying their record number. File I/O functions can also help you manage your files by providing you with information such as file size, current path settings, or the creation date of a file or a directory. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020100.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020100.xhp index 1c76411891..a23a1242e5 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020100.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020100.xhp @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@
-Opening and Closing Files +Opening and Closing Files
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020200.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020200.xhp index 33bebf8564..e2a2303767 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020200.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020200.xhp @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@
-File Input/Output Functions +File Input/Output Functions
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020302.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020302.xhp index c2220d5f7e..0e88e47179 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020302.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020302.xhp @@ -33,20 +33,20 @@
Loc function -Loc Function [Runtime] -Returns the current position in an open file. +Loc Function [Runtime] +Returns the current position in an open file.
-Syntax: +Syntax: -Loc(FileNumber) +Loc(FileNumber) -Return value: -Long -Parameters: - +Return value: +Long +Parameters: + FileNumber: Any numeric expression that contains the file number that is set by the Open statement for the respective file. -If the Loc function is used for an open random access file, it returns the number of the last record that was last read or written. -For a sequential file, the Loc function returns the position in a file divided by 128. For binary files, the position of the last read or written byte is returned. +If the Loc function is used for an open random access file, it returns the number of the last record that was last read or written. +For a sequential file, the Loc function returns the position in a file divided by 128. For binary files, the position of the last read or written byte is returned. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020303.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020303.xhp index da225f8542..e2bd5f230e 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020303.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020303.xhp @@ -33,35 +33,35 @@
Lof function -Lof Function [Runtime] -Returns the size of an open file in bytes. +Lof Function [Runtime] +Returns the size of an open file in bytes.
-Syntax: +Syntax: -Lof (FileNumber) +Lof (FileNumber) -Return value: -Long -Parameters: - +Return value: +Long +Parameters: + FileNumber: Any numeric expression that contains the file number that is specified in the Open statement. -To obtain the length of a file that is not open, use the FileLen function. +To obtain the length of a file that is not open, use the FileLen function. -Example: +Example: Sub ExampleRandomAccess Dim iNumber As Integer -Dim sText As Variant REM must be a Variant +Dim sText As Variant REM must be a Variant Dim aFile As String aFile = "c:\data.txt" iNumber = Freefile Open aFile For Random As #iNumber Len=32 - Seek #iNumber,1 REM Position at start - Put #iNumber,, "This is the first line of text" REM Fill with text - Put #iNumber,, "This is the second line of text" - Put #iNumber,, "This is the third line of text" + Seek #iNumber,1 REM Position at start + Put #iNumber,, "This is the first line of text" REM Fill with text + Put #iNumber,, "This is the second line of text" + Put #iNumber,, "This is the third line of text" Seek #iNumber,2 Get #iNumber,,sText Print sText @@ -69,10 +69,10 @@ iNumber = Freefile Open aFile For Random As #iNumber Len=32 Get #iNumber,2,sText - Put #iNumber,,"This is a new line of text" + Put #iNumber,,"This is a new line of text" Get #iNumber,1,sText Get #iNumber,2,sText - Put #iNumber,20,"This is the text in record 20" + Put #iNumber,20,"This is the text in record 20" Print Lof(#iNumber) Close #iNumber End Sub diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020304.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020304.xhp index 32b99d53b4..4796543443 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020304.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020304.xhp @@ -33,20 +33,20 @@
Seek function -Seek Function [Runtime] -Returns the position for the next writing or reading in a file that was opened with the open statement. +Seek Function [Runtime] +Returns the position for the next writing or reading in a file that was opened with the open statement.
-For random access files, the Seek function returns the number of the next record to be read. -For all other files, the function returns the byte position at which the next operation is to occur. -See also: Open, Seek. -Syntax: +For random access files, the Seek function returns the number of the next record to be read. +For all other files, the function returns the byte position at which the next operation is to occur. +See also: Open, Seek. +Syntax: -Seek (FileNumber) +Seek (FileNumber) -Return value: -Long -Parameters: - +Return value: +Long +Parameters: + FileNumber: The data channel number used in the Open statement. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020305.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020305.xhp index 45214fa055..970e905538 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020305.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020305.xhp @@ -32,19 +32,19 @@ Seek statement -Seek Statement [Runtime] -Sets the position for the next writing or reading in a file that was opened with the Open statement.see #61751 -For random access files, the Seek statement sets the number of the next record to be accessed. -For all other files, the Seek statement sets the byte position at which the next operation is to occur. -See also: Open, Seek. -Syntax: +Seek Statement [Runtime] +Sets the position for the next writing or reading in a file that was opened with the Open statement.see #61751 +For random access files, the Seek statement sets the number of the next record to be accessed. +For all other files, the Seek statement sets the byte position at which the next operation is to occur. +See also: Open, Seek. +Syntax: -Seek[#FileNumber], Position (As Long) +Seek[#FileNumber], Position (As Long) -Parameters: - +Parameters: + FileNumber: The data channel number used in the Open statement. - + Position: Position for the next writing or reading. Position can be a number between 1 and 2,147,483,647. According to the file type, the position indicates the number of the record (files in the Random mode) or the byte position (files in the Binary, Output, Append or Input mode). The first byte in a file is position 1, the second byte is position 2, and so on. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020400.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020400.xhp index 739ac7c5bd..d7df5e8486 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020400.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020400.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Managing Files - The functions and statements for managing files are described here. + Managing Files + The functions and statements for managing files are described here.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030000.xhp index 1456bf9135..318f489251 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030000.xhp @@ -32,11 +32,11 @@
- Date and Time Functions - Use the statements and functions described here to perform date and time calculations. + Date and Time Functions + Use the statements and functions described here to perform date and time calculations.
- %PRODUCTNAME Basic lets you calculate time or date differences by converting the time and date values to continuous numeric values. After the difference is calculated, special functions are used to reconvert the values to the standard time or date formats. - You can combine date and time values into a single floating-decimal number. Dates are converted to integers, and times to decimal values. %PRODUCTNAME Basic also supports the variable type Date, which can contain a time specification consisting of both a date and time. + %PRODUCTNAME Basic lets you calculate time or date differences by converting the time and date values to continuous numeric values. After the difference is calculated, special functions are used to reconvert the values to the standard time or date formats. + You can combine date and time values into a single floating-decimal number. Dates are converted to integers, and times to decimal values. %PRODUCTNAME Basic also supports the variable type Date, which can contain a time specification consisting of both a date and time. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030100.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030100.xhp index e4f89bd4ef..4ef4ed9e72 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030100.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030100.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
-Converting Date Values -The following functions convert date values to calculable numbers and back. +Converting Date Values +The following functions convert date values to calculable numbers and back.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030101.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030101.xhp index eaa589f82f..2714a1c2a9 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030101.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030101.xhp @@ -32,29 +32,29 @@
DateSerial function -DateSerial Function [Runtime] -Returns a Date value for a specified year, month, or day. +DateSerial Function [Runtime] +Returns a Date value for a specified year, month, or day.
-Syntax: +Syntax: -DateSerial (year, month, day) +DateSerial (year, month, day) -Return value: -Date -Parameters: - +Return value: +Date +Parameters: + Year: Integer expression that indicates a year. All values between 0 and 99 are interpreted as the years 1900-1999. For years that fall outside this range, you must enter all four digits. - + Month: Integer expression that indicates the month of the specified year. The accepted range is from 1-12. - + Day: Integer expression that indicates the day of the specified month. The accepted range is from 1-31. No error is returned when you enter a non-existing day for a month shorter than 31 days.see i69463 -The DateSerial function returns the number of days between December 30,1899 and the given date. You can use this function to calculate the difference between two dates. -The DateSerial function returns the data type Variant with VarType 7 (Date). Internally, this value is stored as a Double value, so that when the given date is 1.1.1900, the returned value is 2. Negative values correspond to dates before December 30, 1899 (not inclusive). -If a date is defined that lies outside of the accepted range, $[officename] Basic returns an error message. -Whereas you define the DateValue function as a string that contains the date, the DateSerial function evaluates each of the parameters (year, month, day) as separate numeric expressions. +The DateSerial function returns the number of days between December 30,1899 and the given date. You can use this function to calculate the difference between two dates. +The DateSerial function returns the data type Variant with VarType 7 (Date). Internally, this value is stored as a Double value, so that when the given date is 1.1.1900, the returned value is 2. Negative values correspond to dates before December 30, 1899 (not inclusive). +If a date is defined that lies outside of the accepted range, $[officename] Basic returns an error message. +Whereas you define the DateValue function as a string that contains the date, the DateSerial function evaluates each of the parameters (year, month, day) as separate numeric expressions. -Example: +Example: Sub ExampleDateSerial Dim lDate As Long diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030102.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030102.xhp index c84b257468..8308ce5278 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030102.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030102.xhp @@ -32,24 +32,24 @@
DateValue function -DateValue Function [Runtime] -Returns a date value from a date string. The date string is a complete date in a single numeric value. You can also use this serial number to determine the difference between two dates. +DateValue Function [Runtime] +Returns a date value from a date string. The date string is a complete date in a single numeric value. You can also use this serial number to determine the difference between two dates.
-Syntax: +Syntax: -DateValue [(date)] +DateValue [(date)] -Return value: -Datei66764 -Parameters: - +Return value: +Datei66764 +Parameters: + Date: String expression that contains the date that you want to calculate. The date can be specified in almost any format. -You can use this function to convert a date that occurs between December 1, 1582 and December 31, 9999 into a single integer value. You can then use this value to calculate the difference between two dates. If the date argument lies outside the acceptable range, $[officename] Basic returns an error message. -In contrast to the DateSerial function that passes years, months, and days as separate numeric values, the DateValue function passes the date using the format "month.[,]day.[,]year". +You can use this function to convert a date that occurs between December 1, 1582 and December 31, 9999 into a single integer value. You can then use this value to calculate the difference between two dates. If the date argument lies outside the acceptable range, $[officename] Basic returns an error message. +In contrast to the DateSerial function that passes years, months, and days as separate numeric values, the DateValue function passes the date using the format "month.[,]day.[,]year". -Example: +Example: Sub ExampleDateValue MsgBox DateValue("12/02/2011") diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030103.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030103.xhp index 4ba4cb06dc..0d31a2e46d 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030103.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030103.xhp @@ -32,29 +32,29 @@
Day function -Day Function [Runtime] -Returns a value that represents the day of the month based on a serial date number generated by DateSerial or DateValue. +Day Function [Runtime] +Returns a value that represents the day of the month based on a serial date number generated by DateSerial or DateValue.
-Syntax: +Syntax: -Day (Number) +Day (Number) -Return value: -Integer -Parameters: - +Return value: +Integer +Parameters: + Number: A numeric expression that contains a serial date number from which you can determine the day of the month. -This function is basically the opposite of the DateSerial function, returning the day of the month from a serial date number generated by the DateSerial or the DateValue function. For example, the expression +This function is basically the opposite of the DateSerial function, returning the day of the month from a serial date number generated by the DateSerial or the DateValue function. For example, the expression Print Day (DateSerial(1994, 12, 20)) -returns the value 20. +returns the value 20. -Example: +Example: Sub ExampleDay - Print "Day " & Day(DateSerial(1994, 12, 20)) & " of the month" + Print "Day " & Day(DateSerial(1994, 12, 20)) & " of the month" End Sub diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030104.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030104.xhp index 58c81a9b3b..157da69f91 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030104.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030104.xhp @@ -32,29 +32,29 @@
Month function -Month Function [Runtime] -Returns the month of a year from a serial date that is generated by the DateSerial or the DateValue function. +Month Function [Runtime] +Returns the month of a year from a serial date that is generated by the DateSerial or the DateValue function.
-Syntax: +Syntax: -Month (Number) +Month (Number) -Return value: -Integer -Parameters: - +Return value: +Integer +Parameters: + Number: Numeric expression that contains the serial date number that is used to determine the month of the year. -This function is the opposite of the DateSerial function. It returns the month in the year that corresponds to the serial date that is generated by DateSerial or DateValue. For example, the expression +This function is the opposite of the DateSerial function. It returns the month in the year that corresponds to the serial date that is generated by DateSerial or DateValue. For example, the expression Print Month(DateSerial(1994, 12, 20)) -returns the value 12. +returns the value 12. -Example: +Example: Sub ExampleMonth - MsgBox "" & Month(Now) ,64,"The current month" + MsgBox "" & Month(Now) ,64,"The current month" End Sub diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030105.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030105.xhp index 5fe29f1e8d..7f7377adba 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030105.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030105.xhp @@ -32,43 +32,43 @@
WeekDay function -WeekDay Function [Runtime] -Returns the number corresponding to the weekday represented by a serial date number that is generated by the DateSerial or the DateValue function. +WeekDay Function [Runtime] +Returns the number corresponding to the weekday represented by a serial date number that is generated by the DateSerial or the DateValue function.
-Syntax: +Syntax: -WeekDay (Number) +WeekDay (Number) -Return value: -Integer -Parameters: - +Return value: +Integer +Parameters: + Number: Integer expression that contains the serial date number that is used to calculate the day of the week (1-7). -The following example determines the day of the week using the WeekDay function when you enter a date. +The following example determines the day of the week using the WeekDay function when you enter a date. -Example: +Example: Sub ExampleWeekDay Dim sDay As String -' Return And display the day of the week +' Return And display the day of the week Select Case WeekDay( Now ) Case 1 - sDay="Sunday" + sDay="Sunday" Case 2 - sDay="Monday" + sDay="Monday" Case 3 - sDay="Tuesday" + sDay="Tuesday" Case 4 - sDay="Wednesday" + sDay="Wednesday" Case 5 - sDay="Thursday" + sDay="Thursday" Case 6 - sDay="Friday" + sDay="Friday" Case 7 - sDay="Saturday" + sDay="Saturday" End Select - MsgBox "" + sDay,64,"Today Is" + MsgBox "" + sDay,64,"Today Is" End Sub diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030106.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030106.xhp index eff0c7dcb3..a49e77c0ab 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030106.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030106.xhp @@ -32,29 +32,29 @@
Year function -Year Function [Runtime] -Returns the year from a serial date number that is generated by the DateSerial or the DateValue function. +Year Function [Runtime] +Returns the year from a serial date number that is generated by the DateSerial or the DateValue function.
-Syntax: +Syntax: -Year (Number) +Year (Number) -Return value: -Integer -Parameters: - +Return value: +Integer +Parameters: + Number: Integer expression that contains the serial date number that is used to calculate the year. -This function is the opposite of the DateSerial function, and returns the year of a serial date. For example, the expression: +This function is the opposite of the DateSerial function, and returns the year of a serial date. For example, the expression: Print Year(DateSerial(1994, 12, 20)) -returns the value 1994. +returns the value 1994. -Example: +Example: Sub ExampleYear - MsgBox "" & Year(Now) ,64,"Current year" + MsgBox "" & Year(Now) ,64,"Current year" End Sub diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030108.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030108.xhp index d8ed26a570..3e0a8f8843 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030108.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030108.xhp @@ -33,25 +33,25 @@
CdateFromIso function -CDateFromIso Function [Runtime] -Returns the internal date number from a string that contains a date in ISO format (YYYYMMDD or YYYY-MM-DD). +CDateFromIso Function [Runtime] +Returns the internal date number from a string that contains a date in ISO format (YYYYMMDD or YYYY-MM-DD). The year part must consist of either two (supported only in YYMMDD format without separators for compatibility) or at least four digits. With four digits leading zeros must be given if the absolute value is less than 1000, it can be negative with a leading minus sign if the date passed denotes a year before the common era (BCE) and it can have more than four digits if the absolute value is greater than 9999. The formatted string can be in the range "-327680101" to "327671231", or "-32768-01-01" to "32767-12-31". An invalid date results in an error. Year 0 is not accepted, the last day BCE is -0001-12-31 and the next day CE is 0001-01-01. Dates before 1582-10-15 are in the proleptic Gregorian calendar. When converting a date serial number to a printable string, for example for the Print or MsgBox command, the locale's default calendar is used and at that 1582-10-15 cutover date may switch to the Julian calendar, which can result in a different date being displayed than expected. Use the CDateToIso Function [Runtime] to convert such date number to a string representation in the proleptic Gregorian calendar. The YYYY-MM-DD format with separators is supported since %PRODUCTNAME 5.3.4. Years less than 100 or greater than 9999 are accepted since %PRODUCTNAME 5.4 if not in VBA compatibility mode.
-Syntax: - -CDateFromIso(String) +Syntax: + +CDateFromIso(String) -Return value: -Internal date number -Parameters: - +Return value: +Internal date number +Parameters: + String: A string that contains a date in ISO format. -Example: +Example: dateval = CDateFromIso("20021231") dateval = CDateFromIso("2002-12-31") return both 12/31/2002 in the date format of your system diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030200.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030200.xhp index 0f46c76802..4bdce62925 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030200.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030200.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Converting Time Values - The following functions convert time values to calculable numbers. + Converting Time Values + The following functions convert time values to calculable numbers.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030201.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030201.xhp index cdc0a5fc30..de076c5f68 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030201.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030201.xhp @@ -30,27 +30,26 @@
Hour function -Hour Function [Runtime] - Returns the hour from a time value that is generated by the TimeSerial or the TimeValue function. +Hour Function [Runtime] + Returns the hour from a time value that is generated by the TimeSerial or the TimeValue function.
- Syntax: - -Hour (Number) + Syntax: + +Hour (Number) - Return value: - Integer - Parameters: - + Return value: + Integer + Parameters: + Number: Numeric expression that contains the serial time value that is used to return the hour value. - This function is the opposite of the TimeSerial function. It returns an integer value that represents the hour from a time value that is generated by the TimeSerial or the TimeValue function. For example, the expression - Print Hour(TimeSerial(12,30,41)) - returns the value 12. + This function is the opposite of the TimeSerial function. It returns an integer value that represents the hour from a time value that is generated by the TimeSerial or the TimeValue function. For example, the expression + Print Hour(TimeSerial(12,30,41)) + returns the value 12. - Example: - Sub ExampleHour - Print "The current hour is " & Hour( Now ) - End Sub + Example: + Sub ExampleHour + Print "The current hour is " & Hour( Now ) + End Sub \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030202.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030202.xhp index a6130050ea..385e6c4761 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030202.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030202.xhp @@ -30,27 +30,26 @@
Minute function -Minute Function [Runtime] - Returns the minute of the hour that corresponds to the serial time value that is generated by the TimeSerial or the TimeValue function. +Minute Function [Runtime] + Returns the minute of the hour that corresponds to the serial time value that is generated by the TimeSerial or the TimeValue function.
- Syntax: - -Minute (Number) + Syntax: + +Minute (Number) - Return value: - Integer - Parameters: - + Return value: + Integer + Parameters: + Number: Numeric expression that contains the serial time value that is used to return the minute value. - This function is the opposite of the TimeSerial function. It returns the minute of the serial time value that is generated by the TimeSerial or the TimeValue function. For example, the expression: - Print Minute(TimeSerial(12,30,41)) - returns the value 30. + This function is the opposite of the TimeSerial function. It returns the minute of the serial time value that is generated by the TimeSerial or the TimeValue function. For example, the expression: + Print Minute(TimeSerial(12,30,41)) + returns the value 30. - Example: - Sub ExampleMinute - MsgBox "The current minute is "& Minute(Now)& "." - end sub + Example: + Sub ExampleMinute + MsgBox "The current minute is "& Minute(Now)& "." + end sub \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030300.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030300.xhp index 3dbb1c3c29..6c79c4ea21 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030300.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030300.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- System Date and Time - The following functions and statements set or return the system date and time. + System Date and Time + The following functions and statements set or return the system date and time.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050000.xhp index 0f8206eb76..870a734f6a 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050000.xhp @@ -33,10 +33,10 @@
- Error-Handling Functions - Use the following statements and functions to define the way $[officename] Basic reacts to run-time errors. + Error-Handling Functions + Use the following statements and functions to define the way $[officename] Basic reacts to run-time errors.
- $[officename] Basic offers several methods to prevent the termination of a program when a run-time error occurs. + $[officename] Basic offers several methods to prevent the termination of a program when a run-time error occurs. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050200.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050200.xhp index 83bab52102..2dcec63806 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050200.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050200.xhp @@ -32,31 +32,31 @@
Err function -Err Function [Runtime] -Returns an error code that identifies the error that occurred during program execution. +Err Function [Runtime] +Returns an error code that identifies the error that occurred during program execution.
-Syntax: +Syntax: -Err +Err -Return value: -Integer -Parameters: -The Err function is used in error-handling routines to determine the error and the corrective action. -Example: +Return value: +Integer +Parameters: +The Err function is used in error-handling routines to determine the error and the corrective action. +Example: Sub ExampleError -On Error Goto ErrorHandler REM Set up error handler +On Error Goto ErrorHandler REM Set up error handler Dim iVar as Integer Dim sVar As String -REM Error occurs due to non-existent file +REM Error occurs due to non-existent file iVar = Freefile Open "\file9879.txt" for Input as #iVar Line Input #iVar, sVar Close #iVar Exit Sub ErrorHandler: - MsgBox "Error " & Err & ": " & Error$ + chr(13) + "At line : " + Erl + chr(13) + Now , 16 ,"an error occurred" + MsgBox "Error " & Err & ": " & Error$ + chr(13) + "At line : " + Erl + chr(13) + Now , 16 ,"an error occurred" End Sub diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050300.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050300.xhp index 46d56b809d..417cc32dad 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050300.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050300.xhp @@ -32,19 +32,19 @@
Error function -Error Function [Runtime] -Returns the error message that corresponds to a given error code. +Error Function [Runtime] +Returns the error message that corresponds to a given error code.
-Syntax: +Syntax: -Error (Expression) +Error (Expression) -Return value: -String -Parameters: - +Return value: +String +Parameters: + Expression: Any numeric expression that contains the error code of the error message that you want to return. -If no parameters are passed, the Error function returns the error message of the most recent error that occurred during program execution. +If no parameters are passed, the Error function returns the error message of the most recent error that occurred during program execution. fixed i60953 diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060000.xhp index 432ffaa50d..18b196b223 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060000.xhp @@ -33,10 +33,10 @@
- Logical Operators - The following logical operators are supported by $[officename] Basic. + Logical Operators + The following logical operators are supported by $[officename] Basic.
- Logical operators combine (bitwise) the contents of two expressions or variables, for example, to test if specific bits are set or not. + Logical operators combine (bitwise) the contents of two expressions or variables, for example, to test if specific bits are set or not. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070000.xhp index 79b79e7a39..ecf4df3bd1 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070000.xhp @@ -33,10 +33,10 @@
- Mathematical Operators - The following mathematical operators are supported in $[officename] Basic. + Mathematical Operators + The following mathematical operators are supported in $[officename] Basic.
- This chapter provides a short overview of all of the arithmetical operators that you may need for calculations within a program. + This chapter provides a short overview of all of the arithmetical operators that you may need for calculations within a program. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080000.xhp index 55e2988ef3..38e89ffa8e 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080000.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Numeric Functions - The following numeric functions perform calculations. Mathematical and Boolean operators are described in a separate section. Functions differ from operators in that functions pass arguments and return a result, instead of operators that return a result by combining two numeric expressions. + Numeric Functions + The following numeric functions perform calculations. Mathematical and Boolean operators are described in a separate section. Functions differ from operators in that functions pass arguments and return a result, instead of operators that return a result by combining two numeric expressions.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080100.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080100.xhp index ee56f99c8a..9e50eae349 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080100.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080100.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Trigonometric Functions - The following are the trigonometric functions that are supported in $[officename] Basic. + Trigonometric Functions + The following are the trigonometric functions that are supported in $[officename] Basic.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080200.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080200.xhp index 8a61b1a44f..66b019353f 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080200.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080200.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Exponential and Logarithmic Functions - $[officename] Basic supports the following exponential and logarithmic functions. + Exponential and Logarithmic Functions + $[officename] Basic supports the following exponential and logarithmic functions.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080300.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080300.xhp index dc6680d6bd..0bc433da51 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080300.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080300.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Generating Random Numbers - The following statements and functions generate random numbers. + Generating Random Numbers + The following statements and functions generate random numbers.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080400.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080400.xhp index 13de967013..3a8aef25b2 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080400.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080400.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Square Root Calculation - Use this function to calculate square roots. + Square Root Calculation + Use this function to calculate square roots.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080500.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080500.xhp index 1980c25d3c..7e3bdda9d9 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080500.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080500.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Integers - The following functions round values to integers. + Integers + The following functions round values to integers.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080600.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080600.xhp index feac48dedd..416e2964dd 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080600.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080600.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Absolute Values - This function returns absolute values. + Absolute Values + This function returns absolute values.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080700.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080700.xhp index c14cbdc634..789135e9b2 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080700.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080700.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Expression Signs - This function returns the algebraic sign of a numeric expression. + Expression Signs + This function returns the algebraic sign of a numeric expression.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080800.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080800.xhp index 8723bcdc69..cfb91e92ce 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080800.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080800.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Converting Numbers - The following functions convert numbers from one number format to another. + Converting Numbers + The following functions convert numbers from one number format to another.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090000.xhp index 16c6f4578b..410059905b 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090000.xhp @@ -33,10 +33,10 @@
- Controlling Program Execution - The following statements control the execution of a program. + Controlling Program Execution + The following statements control the execution of a program.
- A program generally executes from the first line of code to the last line of code. You can also execute certain procedures within the program according to specific conditions, or repeat a section of the program within a sub-procedure or function. You can use loops to repeat parts of a program as many times as necessary, or until a certain condition is met. These type of control statements are classified as Condition, Loop, or Jump statements. + A program generally executes from the first line of code to the last line of code. You can also execute certain procedures within the program according to specific conditions, or repeat a section of the program within a sub-procedure or function. You can use loops to repeat parts of a program as many times as necessary, or until a certain condition is met. These type of control statements are classified as Condition, Loop, or Jump statements. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090100.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090100.xhp index 196af16fd2..a27d2a66ca 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090100.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090100.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Condition Statements - The following statements are based on conditions. + Condition Statements + The following statements are based on conditions.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090103.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090103.xhp index f8c7fc1d26..2d5110632b 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090103.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090103.xhp @@ -32,17 +32,17 @@
IIf statement -IIf Statement [Runtime] -Returns one of two possible function results, depending on the logical value of the evaluated expression. +IIf Statement [Runtime] +Returns one of two possible function results, depending on the logical value of the evaluated expression.
-Syntax: +Syntax: -IIf (Expression, ExpressionTrue, ExpressionFalse) +IIf (Expression, ExpressionTrue, ExpressionFalse) -Parameters: - +Parameters: + Expression: Any expression that you want to evaluate. If the expression evaluates to True, the function returns the result of ExpressionTrue, otherwise it returns the result of ExpressionFalse. - + ExpressionTrue, ExpressionFalse: Any expression, one of which will be returned as the function result, depending on the logical evaluation. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090200.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090200.xhp index 4dc56ac5b5..4f91a47152 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090200.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090200.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Loops - The following statements execute loops. + Loops + The following statements execute loops.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090203.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090203.xhp index 524eaea72a..8d51d8d426 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090203.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090203.xhp @@ -31,28 +31,28 @@
- While;While...Wend loopWhile...Wend Statement[Runtime] - When a program encounters a While statement, it tests the condition. If the condition is False, the program continues directly following the Wend statement. If the condition is True, the loop is executed until the program finds Wend and then jumps back to the While statement. If the condition is still True, the loop is executed again. + While;While...Wend loopWhile...Wend Statement[Runtime] + When a program encounters a While statement, it tests the condition. If the condition is False, the program continues directly following the Wend statement. If the condition is True, the loop is executed until the program finds Wend and then jumps back to the While statement. If the condition is still True, the loop is executed again.
- Unlike the Do...Loop statement, you cannot cancel a While...Wend loop with Exit. Never exit a While...Wend loop with GoTo, since this can cause a run-time error. - A Do...Loop is more flexible than a While...Wend. - Syntax: + Unlike the Do...Loop statement, you cannot cancel a While...Wend loop with Exit. Never exit a While...Wend loop with GoTo, since this can cause a run-time error. + A Do...Loop is more flexible than a While...Wend. + Syntax: -While Condition [Statement] Wend +While Condition [Statement] Wend - Example: + Example: - Sub ExampleWhileWend - Dim stext As String - Dim iRun As Integer - sText ="This Is a short text" - iRun = 1 - While iRun < Len(sText) - If Mid(sText,iRun,1 )<> " " Then Mid( sText ,iRun, 1, Chr( 1 + Asc( Mid(sText,iRun,1 )) ) - iRun = iRun + 1 - Wend - MsgBox sText,0,"Text encoded" - End Sub + Sub ExampleWhileWend + Dim stext As String + Dim iRun As Integer + sText ="This Is a short text" + iRun = 1 + While iRun < Len(sText) + If Mid(sText,iRun,1 )<> " " Then Mid( sText ,iRun, 1, Chr( 1 + Asc( Mid(sText,iRun,1 )) ) + iRun = iRun + 1 + Wend + MsgBox sText,0,"Text encoded" + End Sub diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090300.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090300.xhp index 31d1f96e83..c0d96aa8d7 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090300.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090300.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Jumps - The following statements execute jumps. + Jumps + The following statements execute jumps.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090302.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090302.xhp index c93fc3aad1..7fb24ce863 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090302.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090302.xhp @@ -33,31 +33,31 @@
GoTo statement -GoTo Statement [Runtime] -Continues program execution within a Sub or Function at the procedure line indicated by a label. +GoTo Statement [Runtime] +Continues program execution within a Sub or Function at the procedure line indicated by a label.
-Syntax: - -see Parameters +Syntax: + +see Parameters -Parameters: -Sub/Function -statement block - Label1 - +Parameters: +Sub/Function +statement block + Label1 + Label2: -statement block -Exit Sub - +statement block +Exit Sub + Label1: -statement block -GoTo Label2 -End Sub/Function -Use the GoTo statement to instruct $[officename] Basic to continue program execution at another place within the procedure. The position must be indicated by a label. To set a label, assign a name, and then and end it with a colon (":"). -You cannot use the GoTo statement to jump out of a Sub or Function. -Example: -see Parameters +statement block +GoTo Label2 +End Sub/Function +Use the GoTo statement to instruct $[officename] Basic to continue program execution at another place within the procedure. The position must be indicated by a label. To set a label, assign a name, and then and end it with a colon (":"). +You cannot use the GoTo statement to jump out of a Sub or Function. +Example: +see Parameters diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090400.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090400.xhp index f4c935b55f..c420483bb4 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090400.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090400.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Further Statements - Statements that do not belong to any of the other runtime categories are described here. + Further Statements + Statements that do not belong to any of the other runtime categories are described here.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090401.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090401.xhp index 05d0e2da8f..4db990adb6 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090401.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090401.xhp @@ -32,20 +32,20 @@
Call statement -Call Statement [Runtime] -Transfers the control of the program to a subroutine, a function, or a DLL procedure. +Call Statement [Runtime] +Transfers the control of the program to a subroutine, a function, or a DLL procedure.
-Syntax: +Syntax: -[Call] Name [Parameter] +[Call] Name [Parameter] -Parameters: - +Parameters: + Name: Name of the subroutine, the function, or the DLL that you want to call - + Parameter: Parameters to pass to the procedure. The type and number of parameters is dependent on the routine that is executing. -A keyword is optional when you call a procedure. If a function is executed as an expression, the parameters must be enclosed by brackets in the statement. If a DLL is called, it must first be specified in the Declare-Statement. -Example: +A keyword is optional when you call a procedure. If a function is executed as an expression, the parameters must be enclosed by brackets in the statement. If a DLL is called, it must first be specified in the Declare-Statement. +Example: Sub ExampleCall Dim sVar As String diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090411.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090411.xhp index b193f435bc..6dcf9f92e8 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090411.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090411.xhp @@ -32,15 +32,15 @@
With statement -With Statement [Runtime] -Sets an object as the default object. Unless another object name is declared, all properties and methods refer to the default object until the End With statement is reached. +With Statement [Runtime] +Sets an object as the default object. Unless another object name is declared, all properties and methods refer to the default object until the End With statement is reached.
-Syntax: +Syntax: -With Object Statement block End With +With Object Statement block End With -Parameters: -Use With and End With if you have several properties or methods for a single object. +Parameters: +Use With and End With if you have several properties or methods for a single object. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100000.xhp index f6a5339a64..0c0d2711d4 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100000.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
-Variables -The following statements and functions are for working with variables. You can use these functions to declare or define variables, convert variables from one type to another, or determine the variable type. +Variables +The following statements and functions are for working with variables. You can use these functions to declare or define variables, convert variables from one type to another, or determine the variable type.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100050.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100050.xhp index 9e2b0f8f39..0a9ae96750 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100050.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100050.xhp @@ -32,17 +32,17 @@
CCur function -CCur Function [Runtime] -Converts a string expression or numeric expression to a currency expression. The locale settings are used for decimal separators and currency symbols. +CCur Function [Runtime] +Converts a string expression or numeric expression to a currency expression. The locale settings are used for decimal separators and currency symbols.
-Syntax: +Syntax: CCur(Expression) -Return value: -Currency -Parameter: -Expression: Any string or numeric expression that you want to convert. +Return value: +Currency +Parameter: +Expression: Any string or numeric expression that you want to convert. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100060.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100060.xhp index 9a4ef50752..4e5862f2f3 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100060.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100060.xhp @@ -32,17 +32,17 @@
CDec function -CDec Function [Runtime] -Converts a string expression or numeric expression to a decimal expression. +CDec Function [Runtime] +Converts a string expression or numeric expression to a decimal expression.
-Syntax: +Syntax: CDec(Expression) -Return value: -Decimal number. -Parameter: -Expression: Any string or numeric expression that you want to convert. +Return value: +Decimal number. +Parameter: +Expression: Any string or numeric expression that you want to convert. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100070.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100070.xhp index 9a1449c0e6..26b00dfaac 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100070.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100070.xhp @@ -32,17 +32,17 @@
CVar function -CVar Function [Runtime] -Converts a string expression or numeric expression to a variant expression. +CVar Function [Runtime] +Converts a string expression or numeric expression to a variant expression.
-Syntax: +Syntax: CVar(Expression) -Return value: -Variant. -Parameter: -Expression: Any string or numeric expression that you want to convert. +Return value: +Variant. +Parameter: +Expression: Any string or numeric expression that you want to convert. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100080.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100080.xhp index 60eb0ae180..aa985b91db 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100080.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100080.xhp @@ -32,17 +32,17 @@
CVErr function -CVErr Function [Runtime] -Converts a string expression or numeric expression to a variant expression of the sub type "Error". +CVErr Function [Runtime] +Converts a string expression or numeric expression to a variant expression of the sub type "Error".
-Syntax: +Syntax: CVErr(Expression) -Return value: -Variant. -Parameter: -Expression: Any string or numeric expression that you want to convert. +Return value: +Variant. +Parameter: +Expression: Any string or numeric expression that you want to convert. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101110.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101110.xhp index 43f93b062a..71248ee41f 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101110.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101110.xhp @@ -32,23 +32,23 @@
DefCur statement -DefCur Statement [Runtime] -If no type-declaration character or keyword is specified, the DefCur statement sets the default variable type, according to a letter range. +DefCur Statement [Runtime] +If no type-declaration character or keyword is specified, the DefCur statement sets the default variable type, according to a letter range.
-Syntax: +Syntax: Defxxx Characterrange1[, Characterrange2[,...]] -Parameters: - +Parameters: + Characterrange: Letters that specify the range of variables that you want to set a default data type for. - + xxx: Keyword that defines the default variable type: - + Keyword: Default variable type - + DefCur: Currency -Example: +Example: REM Prefix definitions for variable types: DefBool b diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101700.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101700.xhp index c62fd49d19..aa55a51881 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101700.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101700.xhp @@ -33,30 +33,30 @@
DefObj statement -DefObj Statement [Runtime] -Sets the default variable type, according to a letter range, if no type-declaration character or keyword is specified. +DefObj Statement [Runtime] +Sets the default variable type, according to a letter range, if no type-declaration character or keyword is specified.
-Syntax: - -Defxxx Characterrange1[, Characterrange2[,...]] +Syntax: + +Defxxx Characterrange1[, Characterrange2[,...]] -Parameters: - +Parameters: + Characterrange: Letters that specify the range of variables that you want to set the default data type for. - + xxx: Keyword that defines the default variable type: - + Keyword: Default variable type - + DefObj: Object -Example: -REM Prefix definitions for variable types: -DefBool b -DefDate t -DefDbL d -DefInt i -DefLng l -DefObj o -DefVar v +Example: +REM Prefix definitions for variable types: +DefBool b +DefDate t +DefDbL d +DefInt i +DefLng l +DefObj o +DefVar v diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102450.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102450.xhp index 00ae3479d9..04758ccf01 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102450.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102450.xhp @@ -32,17 +32,17 @@
IsError function -IsError Function [Runtime] -Tests if a variable contains an error value. +IsError Function [Runtime] +Tests if a variable contains an error value.
-Syntax: +Syntax: IsError (Var) -Return value: -Bool -Parameters: - +Return value: +Bool +Parameters: + Var: Any variable that you want to test. If the variable contains an error value, the function returns True, otherwise the function returns False. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102800.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102800.xhp index 3ac6244b41..abe2d8bc93 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102800.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102800.xhp @@ -32,17 +32,17 @@
IsObject function -IsObject Function [Runtime] -Tests if an object variable is an OLE object. The function returns True if the variable is an OLE object, otherwise it returns False. +IsObject Function [Runtime] +Tests if an object variable is an OLE object. The function returns True if the variable is an OLE object, otherwise it returns False.
-Syntax: +Syntax: -IsObject (ObjectVar) +IsObject (ObjectVar) -Return value: -Bool -Parameters: - +Return value: +Bool +Parameters: + ObjectVar: Any variable that you want to test. If the Object variable contains an OLE object, the function returns True. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103800.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103800.xhp index cd7846db74..baea53fc49 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103800.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103800.xhp @@ -33,28 +33,28 @@
FindObject function -FindObject Function [Runtime] -Enables an object to be addressed at run-time as a string parameter through the object name. +FindObject Function [Runtime] +Enables an object to be addressed at run-time as a string parameter through the object name.
-For example, the following command: -MyObj.Prop1.Command = 5 -corresponds to the command block: -Dim ObjVar as Object -Dim ObjProp as Object -ObjName As String = "MyObj" -ObjVar = FindObject( ObjName As String ) -PropName As String = "Prop1" -ObjProp = FindPropertyObject( ObjVar, PropName As String ) -ObjProp.Command = 5 -This allows names to be dynamically created at run-time. For example: -"TextEdit1" to TextEdit5" in a loop to create five control names. -See also: FindPropertyObject -Syntax: - -FindObject( ObjName As String ) +For example, the following command: +MyObj.Prop1.Command = 5 +corresponds to the command block: +Dim ObjVar as Object +Dim ObjProp as Object +ObjName As String = "MyObj" +ObjVar = FindObject( ObjName As String ) +PropName As String = "Prop1" +ObjProp = FindPropertyObject( ObjVar, PropName As String ) +ObjProp.Command = 5 +This allows names to be dynamically created at run-time. For example: +"TextEdit1" to TextEdit5" in a loop to create five control names. +See also: FindPropertyObject +Syntax: + +FindObject( ObjName As String ) -Parameters: - +Parameters: + ObjName: String that specifies the name of the object that you want to address at run-time. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103900.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103900.xhp index dbee091967..f3fd1d339c 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103900.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103900.xhp @@ -33,30 +33,30 @@
FindPropertyObject function -FindPropertyObject Function [Runtime] -Enables objects to be addressed at run-time as a string parameter using the object name. +FindPropertyObject Function [Runtime] +Enables objects to be addressed at run-time as a string parameter using the object name.
-For instance, the command: -MyObj.Prop1.Command = 5 -corresponds to the following command block: -Dim ObjVar as Object -Dim ObjProp as Object -ObjName As String = "MyObj" -ObjVar = FindObject( ObjName As String ) -PropName As String = "Prop1" -ObjProp = FindPropertyObject( ObjVar, PropName As String ) -ObjProp.Command = 5 -To dynamically create Names at run-time, use: -"TextEdit1" to TextEdit5" in a loop to create five names. -See also: FindObject -Syntax: - -FindPropertyObject( ObjVar, PropName As String ) +For instance, the command: +MyObj.Prop1.Command = 5 +corresponds to the following command block: +Dim ObjVar as Object +Dim ObjProp as Object +ObjName As String = "MyObj" +ObjVar = FindObject( ObjName As String ) +PropName As String = "Prop1" +ObjProp = FindPropertyObject( ObjVar, PropName As String ) +ObjProp.Command = 5 +To dynamically create Names at run-time, use: +"TextEdit1" to TextEdit5" in a loop to create five names. +See also: FindObject +Syntax: + +FindPropertyObject( ObjVar, PropName As String ) -Parameters: - +Parameters: + ObjVar: Object variable that you want to dynamically define at run-time. - + PropName: String that specifies the name of the property that you want to address at run-time. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104000.xhp index f383dd7e42..e250cbdb82 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104000.xhp @@ -32,19 +32,19 @@
IsMissing function -IsMissing function [Runtime] -Tests if a function is called with an optional parameter. +IsMissing function [Runtime] +Tests if a function is called with an optional parameter.
-See also: Optional -Syntax: +See also: Optional +Syntax: -IsMissing( ArgumentName ) +IsMissing( ArgumentName ) -Parameters: - +Parameters: + ArgumentName: the name of an optional argument. -If the IsMissing function is called by the ArgumentName, then True is returned. -See also Examples. +If the IsMissing function is called by the ArgumentName, then True is returned. +See also Examples. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104100.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104100.xhp index bc762c5dd8..af7d3e0624 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104100.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104100.xhp @@ -33,17 +33,17 @@
Optional function -Optional (in Function Statement) [Runtime] -Allows you to define parameters that are passed to a function as optional. +Optional (in Function Statement) [Runtime] +Allows you to define parameters that are passed to a function as optional.
-See also: IsMissing -Syntax: - -Function MyFunction(Text1 As String, Optional Arg2, Optional Arg3) +See also: IsMissing +Syntax: + +Function MyFunction(Text1 As String, Optional Arg2, Optional Arg3) -Examples: -Result = MyFunction("Here", 1, "There") ' all arguments are passed. -Result = MyFunction("Test", ,1) ' second argument is missing. -See also Examples. +Examples: +Result = MyFunction("Here", 1, "There") ' all arguments are passed. +Result = MyFunction("Test", ,1) ' second argument is missing. +See also Examples. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104200.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104200.xhp index 8c28ffaa13..8aebedecde 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104200.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104200.xhp @@ -33,20 +33,20 @@
Array function -Array Function [Runtime] -Returns the type Variant with a data field. +Array Function [Runtime] +Returns the type Variant with a data field.
-Syntax: - -Array ( Argument list) +Syntax: + +Array ( Argument list) -See also DimArray -Parameters: - +See also DimArray +Parameters: + Argument list: A list of any number of arguments that are separated by commas. -Example: -Dim A As Variant -A = Array("Fred","Tom","Bill") -Msgbox A(2) +Example: +Dim A As Variant +A = Array("Fred","Tom","Bill") +Msgbox A(2) diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104300.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104300.xhp index d59137bd7c..348048cc48 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104300.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104300.xhp @@ -33,21 +33,21 @@
DimArray function -DimArray Function [Runtime] -Returns a Variant array. +DimArray Function [Runtime] +Returns a Variant array.
-Syntax: - -DimArray ( Argument list) +Syntax: + +DimArray ( Argument list) -See also Array -If no parameters are passed, an empty array is created (like Dim A() that is the same as a sequence of length 0 in Uno). If parameters are specified, a dimension is created for each parameter. -Parameters: - +See also Array +If no parameters are passed, an empty array is created (like Dim A() that is the same as a sequence of length 0 in Uno). If parameters are specified, a dimension is created for each parameter. +Parameters: + Argument list: A list of any number of arguments that are separated by commas. -Example: -a = DimArray( 2, 2, 4 ) is the same as DIM a( 2, 2, 4 ) +Example: +a = DimArray( 2, 2, 4 ) is the same as DIM a( 2, 2, 4 ) diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104400.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104400.xhp index 7b494e73df..de99f743be 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104400.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104400.xhp @@ -33,22 +33,22 @@
HasUnoInterfaces function -HasUnoInterfaces Function [Runtime] -Tests if a Basic Uno object supports certain Uno interfaces. +HasUnoInterfaces Function [Runtime] +Tests if a Basic Uno object supports certain Uno interfaces.
-Returns True, if all stated Uno interfaces are supported, otherwise False is returned. -Syntax: - -HasUnoInterfaces( oTest, Uno-Interface-Name 1 [, Uno-Interface-Name 2, ...]) +Returns True, if all stated Uno interfaces are supported, otherwise False is returned. +Syntax: + +HasUnoInterfaces( oTest, Uno-Interface-Name 1 [, Uno-Interface-Name 2, ...]) -Return value: -Bool -Parameters: - +Return value: +Bool +Parameters: + oTest: the Basic Uno object that you want to test. - + Uno-Interface-Name: list of Uno interface names. -Example: -bHas = HasUnoInterfaces( oTest, "com.sun.star.beans.XIntrospection" ) +Example: +bHas = HasUnoInterfaces( oTest, "com.sun.star.beans.XIntrospection" ) diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104600.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104600.xhp index e7835cddac..e01a096070 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104600.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104600.xhp @@ -33,23 +33,23 @@
EqualUnoObjects function -EqualUnoObjects Function [Runtime] -Returns True if the two specified Basic Uno objects represent the same Uno object instance. +EqualUnoObjects Function [Runtime] +Returns True if the two specified Basic Uno objects represent the same Uno object instance.
-Syntax: - -EqualUnoObjects( oObj1, oObj2 ) +Syntax: + +EqualUnoObjects( oObj1, oObj2 ) -Return value: -Bool -Example: -// Copy of objects -> same instance -oIntrospection = CreateUnoService( "com.sun.star.beans.Introspection" ) -oIntro2 = oIntrospection -print EqualUnoObjects( oIntrospection, oIntro2 ) -// Copy of structs as value -> new instance -Dim Struct1 as new com.sun.star.beans.Property -Struct2 = Struct1 -print EqualUnoObjects( Struct1, Struct2 ) +Return value: +Bool +Example: +// Copy of objects -> same instance +oIntrospection = CreateUnoService( "com.sun.star.beans.Introspection" ) +oIntro2 = oIntrospection +print EqualUnoObjects( oIntrospection, oIntro2 ) +// Copy of structs as value -> new instance +Dim Struct1 as new com.sun.star.beans.Property +Struct2 = Struct1 +print EqualUnoObjects( Struct1, Struct2 ) diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104700.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104700.xhp index 1cdc34e887..8fb61a205b 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104700.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104700.xhp @@ -32,15 +32,15 @@
Erase function -Erase Function [Runtime] -Erases the contents of array elements of fixed size arrays, and releases the memory used by arrays of variable size. +Erase Function [Runtime] +Erases the contents of array elements of fixed size arrays, and releases the memory used by arrays of variable size.
-Syntax: +Syntax: Erase Arraylist -Parameters: - +Parameters: + Arraylist - The list of arrays to be erased. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03110000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03110000.xhp index 0ed88d6e69..57de37d1ec 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03110000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03110000.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Comparison Operators - The available comparison operators are described here. + Comparison Operators + The available comparison operators are described here.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120000.xhp index cd86dd965e..16c686713e 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120000.xhp @@ -33,10 +33,10 @@
- Strings - The following functions and statements validate and return strings. + Strings + The following functions and statements validate and return strings.
- You can use strings to edit text within $[officename] Basic programs. + You can use strings to edit text within $[officename] Basic programs. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120100.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120100.xhp index 697eef3156..dccf9aeb66 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120100.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120100.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- ASCII/ANSI Conversion in Strings - The following functions convert strings to and from ASCII or ANSI code. + ASCII/ANSI Conversion in Strings + The following functions convert strings to and from ASCII or ANSI code.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120105.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120105.xhp index 009ca66fb0..21f35f2842 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120105.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120105.xhp @@ -32,17 +32,17 @@
CByte function -CByte Function [Runtime] -Converts a string or a numeric expression to the type Byte. +CByte Function [Runtime] +Converts a string or a numeric expression to the type Byte.
-Syntax: +Syntax: -Cbyte( expression ) +Cbyte( expression ) -Return value: -Byte -Parameters: - +Return value: +Byte +Parameters: + Expression: A string or a numeric expression. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120200.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120200.xhp index 9a4cca6f9f..5d58edee16 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120200.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120200.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Repeating Contents - The following functions repeat the contents of strings. + Repeating Contents + The following functions repeat the contents of strings.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120300.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120300.xhp index 53e11befbc..3d42c64853 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120300.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120300.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
ampersand symbol in StarBasic -Editing String Contents -The following functions edit, format, and align the contents of strings. Use the & operator to concatenate strings. +Editing String Contents +The following functions edit, format, and align the contents of strings. Use the & operator to concatenate strings.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120312.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120312.xhp index f2cae43c4a..cfe64d3bf2 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120312.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120312.xhp @@ -33,25 +33,25 @@
ConvertToURL function -ConvertToURL Function [Runtime] -Converts a system file name to a file URL. +ConvertToURL Function [Runtime] +Converts a system file name to a file URL.
-Syntax: - -ConvertToURL(filename) +Syntax: + +ConvertToURL(filename) -Return value: -String -Parameters: - +Return value: +String +Parameters: + Filename: A file name as string. -Example: -systemFile$ = "c:\folder\mytext.txt" -url$ = ConvertToURL( systemFile$ ) -print url$ -systemFileAgain$ = ConvertFromURL( url$ ) -print systemFileAgain$ +Example: +systemFile$ = "c:\folder\mytext.txt" +url$ = ConvertToURL( systemFile$ ) +print url$ +systemFileAgain$ = ConvertFromURL( url$ ) +print systemFileAgain$ diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120313.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120313.xhp index 09f3def8dc..e33dcf2f2a 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120313.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120313.xhp @@ -33,25 +33,25 @@
ConvertFromURL function -ConvertFromURL Function [Runtime] -Converts a file URL to a system file name. +ConvertFromURL Function [Runtime] +Converts a file URL to a system file name.
-Syntax: - -ConvertFromURL(filename) +Syntax: + +ConvertFromURL(filename) -Return value: -String -Parameters: - +Return value: +String +Parameters: + Filename: A file name as a string. -Example: -systemFile$ = "c:\folder\mytext.txt" -url$ = ConvertToURL( systemFile$ ) -print url$ -systemFileAgain$ = ConvertFromURL( url$ ) -print systemFileAgain$ +Example: +systemFile$ = "c:\folder\mytext.txt" +url$ = ConvertToURL( systemFile$ ) +print url$ +systemFileAgain$ = ConvertFromURL( url$ ) +print systemFileAgain$ diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120315.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120315.xhp index 39683bb8ec..01a666a359 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120315.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120315.xhp @@ -32,21 +32,21 @@
Join function -Join Function [Runtime] -Returns a string from a number of substrings in a string array. +Join Function [Runtime] +Returns a string from a number of substrings in a string array.
-Syntax: +Syntax: -Join (Text As String Array, delimiter) +Join (Text As String Array, delimiter) -Return value: -String -Parameters: - +Return value: +String +Parameters: + Text: A string array. - + delimiter (optional): A string character that is used to separate the substrings in the resulting string. The default delimiter is the space character. If delimiter is a string of length zero "", the substrings are joined without separator. -Example: +Example: diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120400.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120400.xhp index de0b0b4ff2..3250f77187 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120400.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120400.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Editing String Length - The following functions determine string lengths and compare strings. + Editing String Length + The following functions determine string lengths and compare strings.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120402.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120402.xhp index ec759dce7b..0b1a8c497d 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120402.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120402.xhp @@ -32,26 +32,26 @@
Len function -Len Function [Runtime] -Returns the number of characters in a string, or the number of bytes that are required to store a variable. +Len Function [Runtime] +Returns the number of characters in a string, or the number of bytes that are required to store a variable.
-Syntax: +Syntax: -Len (Text As String) +Len (Text As String) -Return value: -Long -Parameters: - +Return value: +Long +Parameters: + Text: Any string expression or a variable of another type. -Example: +Example: Sub ExampleLen Dim sText as String sText = "Las Vegas" - MsgBox Len(sText) REM Returns 9 + MsgBox Len(sText) REM Returns 9 End Sub diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130000.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130000.xhp index 6398e83193..578b685ab8 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130000.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
-Other Commands -This is a list of the functions and the statements that are not included in the other categories. +Other Commands +This is a list of the functions and the statements that are not included in the other categories.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130100.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130100.xhp index 9286989353..ac08a46392 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130100.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130100.xhp @@ -32,16 +32,16 @@
Beep statement -Beep Statement [Runtime] -Plays a tone through the computer's speaker. The tone is system-dependent and you cannot modify its volume or pitch. +Beep Statement [Runtime] +Plays a tone through the computer's speaker. The tone is system-dependent and you cannot modify its volume or pitch.
-Syntax: +Syntax: -Beep +Beep -Example: +Example: Sub ExampleBeep Beep diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130600.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130600.xhp index c37271c74f..f9647c32a1 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130600.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130600.xhp @@ -32,26 +32,26 @@
Wait statement -Wait Statement [Runtime] -Interrupts the program execution for the amount of time that you specify in milliseconds. +Wait Statement [Runtime] +Interrupts the program execution for the amount of time that you specify in milliseconds.
-Syntax: +Syntax: -Wait millisec +Wait millisec -Parameters: - +Parameters: + millisec: Numeric expression that contains the amount of time (in milliseconds) to wait before the program is executed. -Example: +Example: Sub ExampleWait Dim lTick As Long lTick = GetSystemTicks() Wait 2000 lTick = (GetSystemTicks() - lTick) - MsgBox "" & lTick & " Ticks" ,0,"The pause lasted" + MsgBox "" & lTick & " Ticks" ,0,"The pause lasted" End Sub diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131500.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131500.xhp index fb06c1da5e..9e767ceefd 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131500.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131500.xhp @@ -33,16 +33,16 @@
CreateUnoStruct function -CreateUnoStruct Function [Runtime] -Creates an instance of a Uno structure type. +CreateUnoStruct Function [Runtime] +Creates an instance of a Uno structure type.
-Use the following structure for your statement: -Dim oStruct as new com.sun.star.beans.Property -Syntax: - -oStruct = CreateUnoStruct( Uno type name ) +Use the following structure for your statement: +Dim oStruct as new com.sun.star.beans.Property +Syntax: + +oStruct = CreateUnoStruct( Uno type name ) -Example: -oStruct = CreateUnoStruct( "com.sun.star.beans.Property" ) +Example: +oStruct = CreateUnoStruct( "com.sun.star.beans.Property" ) diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131700.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131700.xhp index 800fde25b0..1ee4a8d0ae 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131700.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131700.xhp @@ -34,18 +34,18 @@ GetProcessServiceManager function ProcessServiceManager -GetProcessServiceManager Function [Runtime] -Returns the ProcessServiceManager (central Uno ServiceManager). +GetProcessServiceManager Function [Runtime] +Returns the ProcessServiceManager (central Uno ServiceManager).
-This function is required when you want to instantiate a service using CreateInstanceWithArguments. -Syntax: - -oServiceManager = GetProcessServiceManager() +This function is required when you want to instantiate a service using CreateInstanceWithArguments. +Syntax: + +oServiceManager = GetProcessServiceManager() -Example: -oServiceManager = GetProcessServiceManager() -oIntrospection = oServiceManager.createInstance("com.sun.star.beans.Introspection"); -this is the same as the following statement: -oIntrospection = CreateUnoService("com.sun.star.beans.Introspection") +Example: +oServiceManager = GetProcessServiceManager() +oIntrospection = oServiceManager.createInstance("com.sun.star.beans.Introspection"); +this is the same as the following statement: +oIntrospection = CreateUnoService("com.sun.star.beans.Introspection") diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131800.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131800.xhp index 610d6231dc..8b142268a1 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131800.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131800.xhp @@ -33,21 +33,21 @@
CreateUnoDialog function -CreateUnoDialog Function [Runtime] -Creates a Basic Uno object that represents a Uno dialog control during Basic runtime. +CreateUnoDialog Function [Runtime] +Creates a Basic Uno object that represents a Uno dialog control during Basic runtime.
-Dialogs are defined in the dialog libraries. To display a dialog, a "live" dialog must be created from the library. -See Examples. -Syntax: - -CreateUnoDialog( oDlgDesc ) +Dialogs are defined in the dialog libraries. To display a dialog, a "live" dialog must be created from the library. +See Examples. +Syntax: + +CreateUnoDialog( oDlgDesc ) -Example: -' Get dialog description from the dialog library -oDlgDesc = DialogLibraries.Standard.Dialog1 -' generate "live" dialog -oDlgControl = CreateUnoDialog( oDlgDesc ) -' display "live" dialog -oDlgControl.execute +Example: +' Get dialog description from the dialog library +oDlgDesc = DialogLibraries.Standard.Dialog1 +' generate "live" dialog +oDlgControl = CreateUnoDialog( oDlgDesc ) +' display "live" dialog +oDlgControl.execute diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131900.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131900.xhp index 1022464ad6..1a025eb31b 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131900.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131900.xhp @@ -37,39 +37,39 @@ BasicLibraries (LibraryContainer) DialogLibraries (LibraryContainer) -GlobalScope [Runtime] -Basic source code and dialogs are organized in a library system. +GlobalScope [Runtime] +Basic source code and dialogs are organized in a library system.
-The LibraryContainer contains libraries +The LibraryContainer contains libraries -Libraries can contain modules and dialogs +Libraries can contain modules and dialogs -In Basic: +In Basic: -The LibraryContainer is called BasicLibraries. +The LibraryContainer is called BasicLibraries. -In dialogs: +In dialogs: -The LibraryContainer is called DialogLibraries. +The LibraryContainer is called DialogLibraries. -Both LibraryContainers exist in an application level and within every document. In the document Basic, the document's LibraryContainers are called automatically. If you want to call the global LibraryContainers from within a document, you must use the keyword GlobalScope. -Syntax: - -GlobalScope +Both LibraryContainers exist in an application level and within every document. In the document Basic, the document's LibraryContainers are called automatically. If you want to call the global LibraryContainers from within a document, you must use the keyword GlobalScope. +Syntax: + +GlobalScope -Example: -Example in the document Basic -' calling Dialog1 in the document library Standard -oDlgDesc = DialogLibraries.Standard.Dialog1 -' calling Dialog2 in the application library Library1 -oDlgDesc = GlobalScope.DialogLibraries.Library1.Dialog2 +Example: +Example in the document Basic +' calling Dialog1 in the document library Standard +oDlgDesc = DialogLibraries.Standard.Dialog1 +' calling Dialog2 in the application library Library1 +oDlgDesc = GlobalScope.DialogLibraries.Library1.Dialog2 diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132100.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132100.xhp index cd7cec3677..4f9203cda0 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132100.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132100.xhp @@ -29,21 +29,20 @@
GetGuiType function -GetGuiType Function [Runtime] - Returns a numerical value that specifies the graphical user interface. +GetGuiType Function [Runtime] + Returns a numerical value that specifies the graphical user interface.
- This runtime function is only provided for downward compatibility to previous versions. The return value is not defined in client-server environments. - Syntax: + This runtime function is only provided for downward compatibility to previous versions. The return value is not defined in client-server environments. + Syntax: -GetGUIType() +GetGUIType() - Return value: - Integer - Return values: - 1: Windowsremoved 3: Mac OS, see i95717 -4: UNIX - Example: + Return value: + Integer + Return values: + 1: Windowsremoved 3: Mac OS, see i95717 +4: UNIX + Example: Sub ExampleEnvironment MsgBox GetGUIType diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132300.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132300.xhp index c6d04c0782..6dbb70a9d9 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132300.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132300.xhp @@ -35,18 +35,18 @@
CreateUnoValue function -CreateUnoValue Function [Runtime] -Returns an object that represents a strictly typed value referring to the Uno type system. +CreateUnoValue Function [Runtime] +Returns an object that represents a strictly typed value referring to the Uno type system.
-This object is automatically converted to an Any of the corresponding type when passed to Uno. The type must be specified by its fully qualified Uno type name. -The $[officename] API frequently uses the Any type. It is the counterpart of the Variant type known from other environments. The Any type holds one arbitrary Uno type and is used in generic Uno interfaces. -Syntax: - -oUnoValue = CreateUnoValue( "[]byte", MyBasicValue ) to get a byte sequence. +This object is automatically converted to an Any of the corresponding type when passed to Uno. The type must be specified by its fully qualified Uno type name. +The $[officename] API frequently uses the Any type. It is the counterpart of the Variant type known from other environments. The Any type holds one arbitrary Uno type and is used in generic Uno interfaces. +Syntax: + +oUnoValue = CreateUnoValue( "[]byte", MyBasicValue ) to get a byte sequence. -If CreateUnoValue cannot be converted to the specified Uno type, and error occurs. For the conversion, the TypeConverter service is used. -This function is intended for use in situations where the default Basic to Uno type converting mechanism is insufficient. This can happen when you try to access generic Any based interfaces, such as XPropertySet::setPropertyValue( Name, Value ) or X???Container::insertBy???( ???, Value ), from $[officename] Basic. The Basic runtime does not recognize these types as they are only defined in the corresponding service. -In this type of situation, $[officename] Basic chooses the best matching type for the Basic type that you want to convert. However, if the wrong type is selected, an error occurs. You use the CreateUnoValue() function to create a value for the unknown Uno type. -You can also use this function to pass non-Any values, but this is not recommend. If Basic already knows the target type, using the CreateUnoValue() function will only lead to additional converting operations that slow down the Basic execution. +If CreateUnoValue cannot be converted to the specified Uno type, and error occurs. For the conversion, the TypeConverter service is used. +This function is intended for use in situations where the default Basic to Uno type converting mechanism is insufficient. This can happen when you try to access generic Any based interfaces, such as XPropertySet::setPropertyValue( Name, Value ) or X???Container::insertBy???( ???, Value ), from $[officename] Basic. The Basic runtime does not recognize these types as they are only defined in the corresponding service. +In this type of situation, $[officename] Basic chooses the best matching type for the Basic type that you want to convert. However, if the wrong type is selected, an error occurs. You use the CreateUnoValue() function to create a value for the unknown Uno type. +You can also use this function to pass non-Any values, but this is not recommend. If Basic already knows the target type, using the CreateUnoValue() function will only lead to additional converting operations that slow down the Basic execution. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132500.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132500.xhp index 48d2e55830..dda07d717c 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132500.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132500.xhp @@ -33,9 +33,9 @@
GetDefaultContext function -GetDefaultContext Function [Runtime] -Returns the default context of the process service factory, if existent, else returns a null reference. +GetDefaultContext Function [Runtime] +Returns the default context of the process service factory, if existent, else returns a null reference.
-This runtime function returns the default component context to be used, if instantiating services via XmultiServiceFactory. See the Professional UNO chapter in the Developer's Guide on api.libreoffice.org for more information. +This runtime function returns the default component context to be used, if instantiating services via XmultiServiceFactory. See the Professional UNO chapter in the Developer's Guide on api.libreoffice.org for more information. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/05060700.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/05060700.xhp index f6c427ca08..7f6f51bcc1 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/05060700.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/05060700.xhp @@ -33,54 +33,54 @@
events;linked to objects -Macro -Choose the macro that you want to execute when the selected graphic, frame, or OLE object is selected. Depending on the object that is selected, the function is either found on the Macro tab of the Object dialog, or in the Assign Macro dialog. +Macro +Choose the macro that you want to execute when the selected graphic, frame, or OLE object is selected. Depending on the object that is selected, the function is either found on the Macro tab of the Object dialog, or in the Assign Macro dialog.
-Event -Lists the events that are relevant to the macros that are currently assigned to the selected object. -The following table describes the macros and the events that can by linked to objects in your document: +Event +Lists the events that are relevant to the macros that are currently assigned to the selected object. +The following table describes the macros and the events that can by linked to objects in your document: -Event +Event -Event trigger +Event trigger -OLE object +OLE object -Graphics +Graphics -Frame +Frame -AutoText +AutoText -ImageMap area +ImageMap area -Hyperlink +Hyperlink -Click object +Click object -Object is selected. +Object is selected. -x +x -x +x -x +x @@ -91,89 +91,89 @@ -Mouse over object +Mouse over object -Mouse moves over the object. +Mouse moves over the object. -x +x -x +x -x +x -x +x -x +x -Trigger Hyperlink +Trigger Hyperlink -Hyperlink assigned to the object is clicked. +Hyperlink assigned to the object is clicked. -x +x -x +x -x +x -x +x -Mouse leaves object +Mouse leaves object -Mouse moves off of the object. +Mouse moves off of the object. -x +x -x +x -x +x -x +x -x +x -Graphics load successful +Graphics load successful -Graphics are loaded successfully. +Graphics are loaded successfully. -x +x @@ -186,15 +186,15 @@ -Graphics load terminated +Graphics load terminated -Loading of graphics is stopped by the user (for example, when downloading the page). +Loading of graphics is stopped by the user (for example, when downloading the page). -x +x @@ -207,15 +207,15 @@ -Graphics load faulty +Graphics load faulty -Graphics not successfully loaded, for example, if a graphic was not found. +Graphics not successfully loaded, for example, if a graphic was not found. -x +x @@ -228,17 +228,17 @@ -Input of alpha characters +Input of alpha characters -Text is entered from the keyboard. +Text is entered from the keyboard. -x +x @@ -249,17 +249,17 @@ -Input of non-alpha characters +Input of non-alpha characters -Nonprinting characters are entered from the keyboard, for example, tabs and line breaks. +Nonprinting characters are entered from the keyboard, for example, tabs and line breaks. -x +x @@ -270,17 +270,17 @@ -Resize frame +Resize frame -Frame is resized with the mouse. +Frame is resized with the mouse. -x +x @@ -291,17 +291,17 @@ -Move frame +Move frame -Frame is moved with the mouse. +Frame is moved with the mouse. -x +x @@ -312,10 +312,10 @@ -Before inserting AutoText +Before inserting AutoText -Before a text block is inserted. +Before a text block is inserted. @@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ -x +x @@ -333,10 +333,10 @@ -After inserting AutoText +After inserting AutoText -After a text block is inserted. +After a text block is inserted. @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ -x +x @@ -354,19 +354,19 @@
-Macros -Choose the macro that you want to execute when the selected event occurs. -Frames allow you to link events to a function, so that the function can determine if it processes the event or $[officename] Writer. -Category -Lists the open $[officename] documents and applications. Click the name of the location where you want to save the macros. -Macro name -Lists the available macros. Click the macro that you want to assign to the selected object. -Assign -Assigns the selected macro to the specified event. The assigned macro's entries are set after the event. -Remove -Removes the macro that is assigned to the selected item. +Macros +Choose the macro that you want to execute when the selected event occurs. +Frames allow you to link events to a function, so that the function can determine if it processes the event or $[officename] Writer. +Category +Lists the open $[officename] documents and applications. Click the name of the location where you want to save the macros. +Macro name +Lists the available macros. Click the macro that you want to assign to the selected object. +Assign +Assigns the selected macro to the specified event. The assigned macro's entries are set after the event. +Remove +Removes the macro that is assigned to the selected item. -Macro selection -Select the macro that you want to assign. +Macro selection +Select the macro that you want to assign. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/keys.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/keys.xhp index 2f9cc9d3c8..56d8498c61 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/keys.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/keys.xhp @@ -35,76 +35,76 @@ shortcut keys;Basic IDE IDE;keyboard shortcuts -Keyboard Shortcuts in the Basic IDE +Keyboard Shortcuts in the Basic IDE
-In the Basic IDE you can use the following keyboard shortcuts: +In the Basic IDE you can use the following keyboard shortcuts: -Action +Action -Keyboard shortcut +Keyboard shortcut -Run code starting from the first line, or from the current breakpoint, if the program stopped there before +Run code starting from the first line, or from the current breakpoint, if the program stopped there before -F5 +F5 -Stop +Stop -Shift+F5 +Shift+F5 -Add watch for the variable at the cursor +Add watch for the variable at the cursor -F7 +F7 -Single step through each statement, starting at the first line or at that statement where the program execution stopped before. +Single step through each statement, starting at the first line or at that statement where the program execution stopped before. -F8 +F8 -Single step as with F8, but a function call is considered to be only one statement +Single step as with F8, but a function call is considered to be only one statement -Shift+F8 +Shift+F8 -Set or remove a breakpoint at the current line or all breakpoints in the current selection +Set or remove a breakpoint at the current line or all breakpoints in the current selection -F9 +F9 -Enable/disable the breakpoint at the current line or all breakpoints in the current selection +Enable/disable the breakpoint at the current line or all breakpoints in the current selection -Shift+F9 +Shift+F9
-A running macro can be aborted with Shift+CommandCtrl+Q, also from outside of the Basic IDE. If you are inside the Basic IDE and the macro halts at a breakpoint, Shift+CommandCtrl+Q stops execution of the macro, but you can recognize this only after the next F5, F8, or Shift+F8. +A running macro can be aborted with Shift+CommandCtrl+Q, also from outside of the Basic IDE. If you are inside the Basic IDE and the macro halts at a breakpoint, Shift+CommandCtrl+Q stops execution of the macro, but you can recognize this only after the next F5, F8, or Shift+F8. diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/main0211.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/main0211.xhp index aeec69b0a9..ab262d6859 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/main0211.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/main0211.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- toolbars; Basic IDEmacro toolbarMacro Toolbar - The Macro Toolbar contains commands to create, edit, and run macros. + toolbars; Basic IDEmacro toolbarMacro Toolbar + The Macro Toolbar contains commands to create, edit, and run macros.
diff --git a/source/text/sbasic/shared/main0601.xhp b/source/text/sbasic/shared/main0601.xhp index 155faed86b..45324adca4 100644 --- a/source/text/sbasic/shared/main0601.xhp +++ b/source/text/sbasic/shared/main0601.xhp @@ -32,12 +32,12 @@ -%PRODUCTNAME Basic Help +%PRODUCTNAME Basic Help
-%PRODUCTNAME provides an Application Programming Interface (API) that allows controlling the $[officename] components with different programming languages by using the $[officename] Software Development Kit (SDK). For more information about the $[officename] API and the Software Development Kit, visit http://api.libreoffice.org -This help section explains the most common runtime functions of %PRODUCTNAME Basic. For more in-depth information please refer to the OpenOffice.org BASIC Programming Guide on the Wiki. +%PRODUCTNAME provides an Application Programming Interface (API) that allows controlling the $[officename] components with different programming languages by using the $[officename] Software Development Kit (SDK). For more information about the $[officename] API and the Software Development Kit, visit http://api.libreoffice.org +This help section explains the most common runtime functions of %PRODUCTNAME Basic. For more in-depth information please refer to the OpenOffice.org BASIC Programming Guide on the Wiki.
-Working with %PRODUCTNAME Basic +Working with %PRODUCTNAME Basic @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ -Help about the Help +Help about the Help diff --git a/source/text/scalc/00/00000004.xhp b/source/text/scalc/00/00000004.xhp index 83ae993ef6..49b75e74e9 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/00/00000004.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/00/00000004.xhp @@ -29,13 +29,13 @@ -To access this function... +To access this function... -More explanations on top of this page. +More explanations on top of this page. -In the %PRODUCTNAME Calc functions, parameters marked as "optional" can be left out only when no parameter follows. For example, in a function with four parameters, where the last two parameters are marked as "optional", you can leave out parameter 4 or parameters 3 and 4, but you cannot leave out parameter 3 alone. +In the %PRODUCTNAME Calc functions, parameters marked as "optional" can be left out only when no parameter follows. For example, in a function with four parameters, where the last two parameters are marked as "optional", you can leave out parameter 4 or parameters 3 and 4, but you cannot leave out parameter 3 alone. UFI: see #i43239# and #i3879# -Codes greater than 127 may depend on your system's character mapping (for example iso-8859-1, iso-8859-2, Windows-1252, Windows-1250), and hence may not be portable. +Codes greater than 127 may depend on your system's character mapping (for example iso-8859-1, iso-8859-2, Windows-1252, Windows-1250), and hence may not be portable. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/00/00000404.xhp b/source/text/scalc/00/00000404.xhp index 60fe25f2d8..55ca30218f 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/00/00000404.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/00/00000404.xhp @@ -32,21 +32,21 @@ -Insert Menu +Insert Menu
-Choose Insert - Cells +Choose Insert - Cells -Open Insert Cells toolbar from Tools bar: +Open Insert Cells toolbar from Tools bar:
- + Icon -Insert Cells +Insert Cells
@@ -57,12 +57,12 @@ - + Icon -Insert Cells Down +Insert Cells Down
@@ -72,12 +72,12 @@ - + Icon -Insert Cells Right +Insert Cells Right
@@ -87,12 +87,12 @@ - + Icon -Insert Rows +Insert Rows
@@ -102,82 +102,82 @@ - + Icon -Insert Columns +Insert Columns
-Choose Sheet - Insert Sheet +Choose Sheet - Insert Sheet -Choose Sheet - Insert Sheet from File +Choose Sheet - Insert Sheet from File
-Choose Insert - Function +Choose Insert - Function -CommandCtrl+F2 -On Formula Bar, click +CommandCtrl+F2 +On Formula Bar, click
- + Icon -Function Wizard +Function Wizard
-Insert - Function - Category Database +Insert - Function - Category Database -Insert - Function - Category Date&Time +Insert - Function - Category Date&Time -Insert - Function - Category Financial +Insert - Function - Category Financial -Insert - Function - Category Information +Insert - Function - Category Information -Insert - Function - Category Logical +Insert - Function - Category Logical -Insert - Function - Category Mathematical +Insert - Function - Category Mathematical -Insert - Function - Category Array +Insert - Function - Category Array -Insert - Function - Category Statistical +Insert - Function - Category Statistical -Insert - Function - Category Text +Insert - Function - Category Text -Insert - Function - Category Spreadsheet +Insert - Function - Category Spreadsheet -Insert - Function - Category Add-In +Insert - Function - Category Add-In -Insert - Function - Category Add-In +Insert - Function - Category Add-In -Choose Insert - Function List +Choose Insert - Function List -Choose Insert - Named Ranges and Expressions +Choose Insert - Named Ranges and Expressions -Choose Sheet - Link to External data +Choose Sheet - Link to External data
-Choose Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Define +Choose Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Define -CommandCtrl+F3 +CommandCtrl+F3
-Choose Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Insert +Choose Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Insert -Choose Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Create +Choose Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Create -Choose Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Labels +Choose Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Labels diff --git a/source/text/scalc/00/00000405.xhp b/source/text/scalc/00/00000405.xhp index c83afb1fc7..9ba544c2be 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/00/00000405.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/00/00000405.xhp @@ -30,77 +30,77 @@ -Format Menu -Choose Format - Cells +Format Menu +Choose Format - Cells -Choose Format - Cells - Cell Protection tab +Choose Format - Cells - Cell Protection tab -Choose Format - Row +Choose Format - Row -Choose Format - Row - Optimal Height +Choose Format - Row - Optimal Height
-Choose Format - Row - Hide +Choose Format - Row - Hide -Choose Format - Column - Hide +Choose Format - Column - Hide -Choose Format - Sheet - Hide +Choose Format - Sheet - Hide
-Choose Format - Row - Show +Choose Format - Row - Show -Choose Format - Column - Show +Choose Format - Column - Show
-Choose Format - Column +Choose Format - Column
-Choose Format - Column - Optimal Width +Choose Format - Column - Optimal Width -Double-click right column separator in column headers +Double-click right column separator in column headers
-Choose Format - Sheet +Choose Format - Sheet -Choose Format - Sheet - Rename +Choose Format - Sheet - Rename -Choose Format - Sheet - Show +Choose Format - Sheet - Show -Choose Format - Page +Choose Format - Page -Choose Format - Page - Sheet tab +Choose Format - Page - Sheet tab -Choose Format - Print Ranges +Choose Format - Print Ranges -Choose Format - Print Ranges - Define +Choose Format - Print Ranges - Define -Choose Format - Print Ranges - Add +Choose Format - Print Ranges - Add -Choose Format - Print Ranges - Clear +Choose Format - Print Ranges - Clear -Choose Format - Print Ranges - Edit +Choose Format - Print Ranges - Edit
-Choose Format - AutoFormat +Choose Format - AutoFormat -On the Tools bar, click +On the Tools bar, click
- + Icon -AutoFormat +AutoFormat
-Choose Format - Conditional Formatting +Choose Format - Conditional Formatting diff --git a/source/text/scalc/00/00000412.xhp b/source/text/scalc/00/00000412.xhp index f7af3bfa4d..ef5b522522 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/00/00000412.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/00/00000412.xhp @@ -29,61 +29,61 @@ -Data Menu -Choose Data - Text to Columns +Data Menu +Choose Data - Text to Columns -Choose Data - Define Range +Choose Data - Define Range -Choose Data - Select Range +Choose Data - Select Range Choose Data - Sort...
-Choose Data - Sort - Sort Criteria tab -On Standard bar, click +Choose Data - Sort - Sort Criteria tab +On Standard bar, click
- + Icon -Sort Ascending +Sort Ascending - + Icon -Sort Descending +Sort Descending
-Choose Data - Sort - Options tab +Choose Data - Sort - Options tab -Choose Data - Filter +Choose Data - Filter
Choose Data - AutoFilter -On Tools bar or Table Data bar, click +On Tools bar or Table Data bar, click
- + Icon -AutoFilter +AutoFilter
@@ -98,110 +98,110 @@
Choose Data - More Filters - Reset Filter -On Table Data bar, click Reset Filter/Sort +On Table Data bar, click Reset Filter/Sort - + Icon -Reset Filter/Sort +Reset Filter/Sort
Choose Data - More Filter - Hide AutoFilter -Choose Data - Subtotals +Choose Data - Subtotals -Choose Data - Subtotals - 1st, 2nd, 3rd Group tabs +Choose Data - Subtotals - 1st, 2nd, 3rd Group tabs -Choose Data - Subtotals - Options tab +Choose Data - Subtotals - Options tab -Choose Data - Validity +Choose Data - Validity -Menu Data - Validity - Criteria tab +Menu Data - Validity - Criteria tab -Choose Data - Validity - Input Help tab +Choose Data - Validity - Input Help tab -Choose Data - Validity - Error Alert tab +Choose Data - Validity - Error Alert tab -Choose Data - Multiple Operations +Choose Data - Multiple Operations -Choose Data - Consolidate +Choose Data - Consolidate -Choose Data - Group and Outline +Choose Data - Group and Outline -Choose Data - Group and Outline - Hide Details +Choose Data - Group and Outline - Hide Details -Choose Data - Group and Outline - Show Details +Choose Data - Group and Outline - Show Details
-Choose Data - Group and Outline - Group +Choose Data - Group and Outline - Group -F12 -On Tools bar, click +F12 +On Tools bar, click
- + Icon -Group +Group
-Choose Data - Group and Outline - Ungroup +Choose Data - Group and Outline - Ungroup -CommandCtrl+F12 -On Tools bar, click +CommandCtrl+F12 +On Tools bar, click
- + Icon -Ungroup +Ungroup
-Choose Data - Group and Outline - AutoOutline +Choose Data - Group and Outline - AutoOutline -Choose Data - Group and Outline - Remove +Choose Data - Group and Outline - Remove -Choose Data - Group and Outline - Show Details (for some pivot tables) +Choose Data - Group and Outline - Show Details (for some pivot tables) -Choose Data - Pivot Table +Choose Data - Pivot Table -Choose Insert - Pivot Table +Choose Insert - Pivot Table -Choose Insert - Pivot Table, in the Select Source dialog choose the option Data source registered in $[officename]. +Choose Insert - Pivot Table, in the Select Source dialog choose the option Data source registered in $[officename].
-Choose Insert - Pivot Table, in the Select Source dialog choose the option Current selection. -Choose Insert - Pivot Table, in the Select Source dialog choose the option Data source registered in $[officename], click OK to see Select Data Source dialog. +Choose Insert - Pivot Table, in the Select Source dialog choose the option Current selection. +Choose Insert - Pivot Table, in the Select Source dialog choose the option Data source registered in $[officename], click OK to see Select Data Source dialog.
-Choose Data - Pivot Table - Refresh +Choose Data - Pivot Table - Refresh -Choose Data - Pivot Table - Delete +Choose Data - Pivot Table - Delete -Choose Data - Refresh Range +Choose Data - Refresh Range -Choose Data - Group and Outline - Group +Choose Data - Group and Outline - Group diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/01120000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/01120000.xhp index b776ef04f8..0e6a97a9dd 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/01120000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/01120000.xhp @@ -32,20 +32,20 @@
-Print Preview -Displays a preview of the printed page or closes the preview. +Print Preview +Displays a preview of the printed page or closes the preview.
-Use the icons on the Print Preview Bar to scroll through the pages of the document or to print the document. -You can also press CommandCtrl+Page Up and CommandCtrl+Page Down keys to scroll through the pages. -You cannot edit your document while you are in the print preview. +Use the icons on the Print Preview Bar to scroll through the pages of the document or to print the document. +You can also press CommandCtrl+Page Up and CommandCtrl+Page Down keys to scroll through the pages. +You cannot edit your document while you are in the print preview. -To exit the print preview, click the Close Preview button. +To exit the print preview, click the Close Preview button.
-Page View Object Bar +Page View Object Bar
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/02110000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/02110000.xhp index 0d96ea1b17..cc90bc05ab 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/02110000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/02110000.xhp @@ -35,154 +35,154 @@ mw made "navigating..." a two level entry and deleted "navigating;data range" -Navigator -Activates and deactivates the Navigator. The Navigator is a dockable window. +Navigator +Activates and deactivates the Navigator. The Navigator is a dockable window.
-Choose View - Navigator to display the Navigator. +Choose View - Navigator to display the Navigator. -Column -Enter the column letter. Press Enter to reposition the cell cursor to the specified column in the same row. +Column +Enter the column letter. Press Enter to reposition the cell cursor to the specified column in the same row. -Row -Enter a row number. Press Enter to reposition the cell cursor to the specified row in the same column. +Row +Enter a row number. Press Enter to reposition the cell cursor to the specified row in the same column. -Data Range -Specifies the current data range denoted by the position of the cell cursor. +Data Range +Specifies the current data range denoted by the position of the cell cursor. - + Icon -Data Range +Data Range
-Start -Moves to the cell at the beginning of the current data range, which you can highlight using the Data Range button. +Start +Moves to the cell at the beginning of the current data range, which you can highlight using the Data Range button. - + Icon -Start +Start
-End -Moves to the cell at the end of the current data range, which you can highlight using the Data Range button. +End +Moves to the cell at the end of the current data range, which you can highlight using the Data Range button. - + Icon -End +End
-Toggle -Toggles the content view. Only the selected Navigator element and its subelements are displayed. Click the icon again to restore all elements for viewing. +Toggle +Toggles the content view. Only the selected Navigator element and its subelements are displayed. Click the icon again to restore all elements for viewing. - + Icon -Toggle +Toggle
-Contents -Allows you to hide/show the contents. +Contents +Allows you to hide/show the contents. - + Icon -Contents +Contents
-Scenarios -Displays all available scenarios. Double-click a name to apply that scenario. The result is shown in the sheet. For more information, choose Tools - Scenarios. +Scenarios +Displays all available scenarios. Double-click a name to apply that scenario. The result is shown in the sheet. For more information, choose Tools - Scenarios. - + Icon -Scenarios +Scenarios
-If the Navigator displays scenarios, you can access the following commands when you right-click a scenario entry: +If the Navigator displays scenarios, you can access the following commands when you right-click a scenario entry: -Delete -Deletes the selected scenario. +Delete +Deletes the selected scenario. -Properties -Opens the Edit scenario dialog, where you can edit the scenario properties. +Properties +Opens the Edit scenario dialog, where you can edit the scenario properties. -Drag Mode -Opens a submenu for selecting the drag mode. You decide which action is performed when dragging and dropping an object from the Navigator into a document. Depending on the mode you select, the icon indicates whether a hyperlink, link or a copy is created. +Drag Mode +Opens a submenu for selecting the drag mode. You decide which action is performed when dragging and dropping an object from the Navigator into a document. Depending on the mode you select, the icon indicates whether a hyperlink, link or a copy is created. - + Icon -Drag Mode +Drag Mode
-Insert as Hyperlink -Inserts a hyperlink when you drag-and-drop an object from the Navigator into a document. You can later click the created hyperlink to set the cursor and the view to the respective object. -If you insert a hyperlink that links to an open document, you need to save the document before you can use the hyperlink.UFI: fixes bugtraq 5009354 +Insert as Hyperlink +Inserts a hyperlink when you drag-and-drop an object from the Navigator into a document. You can later click the created hyperlink to set the cursor and the view to the respective object. +If you insert a hyperlink that links to an open document, you need to save the document before you can use the hyperlink.UFI: fixes bugtraq 5009354 -Insert as Link -Creates a link when you drag-and-drop an object from the Navigator into a document. +Insert as Link +Creates a link when you drag-and-drop an object from the Navigator into a document. -Insert as Copy -Generates a copy when you drag-and-drop an object from the Navigator into a document. +Insert as Copy +Generates a copy when you drag-and-drop an object from the Navigator into a document. -Objects -Displays all objects in your document. +Objects +Displays all objects in your document. -Documents -Displays the names of all open documents. To switch to another open document in the Navigator, click the document name. The status (active, inactive) of the document is shown in brackets after the name. You can switch the active document in the Window menu. +Documents +Displays the names of all open documents. To switch to another open document in the Navigator, click the document name. The status (active, inactive) of the document is shown in brackets after the name. You can switch the active document in the Window menu. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/02120100.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/02120100.xhp index ce5d6eeb7e..5e726a6755 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/02120100.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/02120100.xhp @@ -38,138 +38,132 @@ automatic date updates -Header/Footer - Defines or formats a header or footer for a Page Style. +Header/Footer + Defines or formats a header or footer for a Page Style.
-Left Area - Enter the text to be displayed at the left side of the header or footer. +Left Area + Enter the text to be displayed at the left side of the header or footer. -Center Area - Enter the text to be displayed at the center of the header or footer. +Center Area + Enter the text to be displayed at the center of the header or footer. -Right Area - Enter the text to be displayed at the right side of the header or footer. +Right Area + Enter the text to be displayed at the right side of the header or footer. -Header/Footer - Select a predefined header or footer from the list. +Header/Footer + Select a predefined header or footer from the list. -Text attributes - Opens a dialog to assign formats to new or selected text. The Text Attributes dialog contains the tab pages Font, Font Effects and Font Position. +Text attributes + Opens a dialog to assign formats to new or selected text. The Text Attributes dialog contains the tab pages Font, Font Effects and Font Position. - + Icon - Text Attributes + Text Attributes
-File Name - Inserts a file name placeholder in the selected area. Click to insert the title. Long-click UFI: this is still a long-clickto select either title, file name or path/file name from the submenu. If a title has not be assigned (see File - Properties), the file name will be inserted instead. +File Name + Inserts a file name placeholder in the selected area. Click to insert the title. Long-click UFI: this is still a long-clickto select either title, file name or path/file name from the submenu. If a title has not be assigned (see File - Properties), the file name will be inserted instead. - + Icon - File Name + File Name
-Sheet Name - Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by the sheet name in the header/footer of the actual document. +Sheet Name + Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by the sheet name in the header/footer of the actual document. - + Icon - Sheet Name + Sheet Name
-Page - Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by page numbering. This allows continuous page numbering in a document. +Page + Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by page numbering. This allows continuous page numbering in a document. - + Icon - Page + Page
-Pages - Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by the total number of pages in the document. +Pages + Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by the total number of pages in the document. - + Icon - Pages + Pages
-Date - Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by the current date which will be repeated in the header/footer on each page of the document. +Date + Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by the current date which will be repeated in the header/footer on each page of the document. - + Icon - Date + Date
-Time - Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by the current time in the header/footer on each page of the document. +Time + Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by the current time in the header/footer on each page of the document. - + Icon - Time + Time
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/02140000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/02140000.xhp index 3190caf371..8e8d49afaa 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/02140000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/02140000.xhp @@ -33,36 +33,36 @@ filling;selection lists selection lists;filling cells MW inserted 2 index entries -Fill - Automatically fills cells with content. +Fill + Automatically fills cells with content.
- The $[officename] Calc context menus have additional options for filling the cells. + The $[officename] Calc context menus have additional options for filling the cells. - Sheet + Sheet - Series + Series - + Filling cells using context menus: - Call the context menu when positioned in a cell and choose Selection List. + Call the context menu when positioned in a cell and choose Selection List. -A list box containing all text found in the current column is displayed. The text is sorted alphabetically and multiple entries are listed only once. +A list box containing all text found in the current column is displayed. The text is sorted alphabetically and multiple entries are listed only once. - Click one of the listed entries to copy it to the cell. + Click one of the listed entries to copy it to the cell. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/02140100.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/02140100.xhp index 7a6d7ea29b..08857cfe2e 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/02140100.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/02140100.xhp @@ -34,12 +34,12 @@
-Down - Fills a selected range of at least two rows with the contents of the top cell of the range. +Down + Fills a selected range of at least two rows with the contents of the top cell of the range.
- If a selected range has only one column, the contents of the top cell are copied to all others. If several columns are selected, the contents of the corresponding top cell will be copied down. + If a selected range has only one column, the contents of the top cell are copied to all others. If several columns are selected, the contents of the corresponding top cell will be copied down. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/02140200.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/02140200.xhp index e0b03adc02..93a2b9c1ff 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/02140200.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/02140200.xhp @@ -34,12 +34,12 @@
-Right - Fills a selected range of at least two columns with the contents of the left most cell. +Right + Fills a selected range of at least two columns with the contents of the left most cell.
- If a range of only one row is selected, the contents of the far left cell are copied to all the other selected cells. If you have selected several rows, each of the far left cells is copied into those cells to the right. + If a range of only one row is selected, the contents of the far left cell are copied to all the other selected cells. If you have selected several rows, each of the far left cells is copied into those cells to the right. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/02140300.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/02140300.xhp index b6010daead..fe10904608 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/02140300.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/02140300.xhp @@ -34,12 +34,12 @@
-Up - Fills a selected range of at least two rows with the contents of the bottom most cell. +Up + Fills a selected range of at least two rows with the contents of the bottom most cell.
- If a selected range has only one column, the content of the bottom most cell is copied into the selected cells. If several columns are selected, the contents of the bottom most cells are copied into those selected above. + If a selected range has only one column, the content of the bottom most cell is copied into the selected cells. If several columns are selected, the contents of the bottom most cells are copied into those selected above. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/02140400.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/02140400.xhp index ea14009e29..58836abb07 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/02140400.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/02140400.xhp @@ -34,12 +34,12 @@
- If a selected range has only one row, the content of the far right cell is copied into all other cells of the range. If several rows are selected, the far right cells are copied into the cells to the left. + If a selected range has only one row, the content of the far right cell is copied into all other cells of the range. If several rows are selected, the far right cells are copied into the cells to the left. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/02140500.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/02140500.xhp index 92a92f1880..f6cde812cc 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/02140500.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/02140500.xhp @@ -29,27 +29,27 @@ -Fill Sheet - Specifies the options for transferring sheets or ranges of a certain sheet. +Fill Sheet + Specifies the options for transferring sheets or ranges of a certain sheet.
- In contrast to copying an area to the clipboard, you can filter certain information and calculate values. This command is only visible if you have selected two sheets in the document. To select multiple sheets, click each sheet tab while pressing Command Ctrl or Shift. - Filling a Sheet + In contrast to copying an area to the clipboard, you can filter certain information and calculate values. This command is only visible if you have selected two sheets in the document. To select multiple sheets, click each sheet tab while pressing Command Ctrl or Shift. + Filling a Sheet - Select the entire sheet by clicking the empty gray box in the upper left of the sheet. You can also select an area of the sheet to be copied. + Select the entire sheet by clicking the empty gray box in the upper left of the sheet. You can also select an area of the sheet to be copied. - Press CommandCtrl and click the tab of the sheet where you want to insert the contents. + Press CommandCtrl and click the tab of the sheet where you want to insert the contents. - Select the command Edit - Fill - Sheet. In the dialog which appears, the check box Numbers must be selected (or Paste All) if you want to combine operations with the values. You can also choose the desired operation here. + Select the command Edit - Fill - Sheet. In the dialog which appears, the check box Numbers must be selected (or Paste All) if you want to combine operations with the values. You can also choose the desired operation here. - Click OK. + Click OK. - This dialog is similar to the Paste Contents dialog, where you can find additional tips. + This dialog is similar to the Paste Contents dialog, where you can find additional tips. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/02140600.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/02140600.xhp index 5c49590aab..50e591670d 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/02140600.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/02140600.xhp @@ -32,68 +32,68 @@ -Fill Series -Automatically generate series with the options in this dialog. Determine direction, increment, time unit and series type. +Fill Series +Automatically generate series with the options in this dialog. Determine direction, increment, time unit and series type. -Before filling a series, first select the cell range. +Before filling a series, first select the cell range.
-To automatically continue a series using the assumed completion rules, choose the AutoFill option after opening the Fill Series dialog. -Direction -Determines the direction of series creation. +To automatically continue a series using the assumed completion rules, choose the AutoFill option after opening the Fill Series dialog. +Direction +Determines the direction of series creation. -Down -Creates a downward series in the selected cell range for the column using the defined increment to the end value. +Down +Creates a downward series in the selected cell range for the column using the defined increment to the end value. -Right -Creates a series running from left to right within the selected cell range using the defined increment to the end value. +Right +Creates a series running from left to right within the selected cell range using the defined increment to the end value. -Up -Creates an upward series in the cell range of the column using the defined increment to the end value. +Up +Creates an upward series in the cell range of the column using the defined increment to the end value. -Left -Creates a series running from right to left in the selected cell range using the defined increment to the end value. -Series Type -Defines the series type. Choose between Linear, Growth, Date and AutoFill. +Left +Creates a series running from right to left in the selected cell range using the defined increment to the end value. +Series Type +Defines the series type. Choose between Linear, Growth, Date and AutoFill. -Linear -Creates a linear number series using the defined increment and end value. +Linear +Creates a linear number series using the defined increment and end value. -Growth -Creates a growth series using the defined increment and end value. +Growth +Creates a growth series using the defined increment and end value. -Date -Creates a date series using the defined increment and end date. +Date +Creates a date series using the defined increment and end date. -AutoFill -Forms a series directly in the sheet. The AutoFill function takes account of customized lists. For example, by entering January in the first cell, the series is completed using the list defined under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. -AutoFill tries to complete a value series by using a defined pattern. The series 1,3,5 is automatically completed with 7,9,11,13, and so on. Date and time series are completed accordingly; for example, after 01.01.99 and 15.01.99, an interval of 14 days is used. - +AutoFill +Forms a series directly in the sheet. The AutoFill function takes account of customized lists. For example, by entering January in the first cell, the series is completed using the list defined under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. +AutoFill tries to complete a value series by using a defined pattern. The series 1,3,5 is automatically completed with 7,9,11,13, and so on. Date and time series are completed accordingly; for example, after 01.01.99 and 15.01.99, an interval of 14 days is used. + -Unit of Time -In this area you can specify the desired unit of time. This area is only active if the Date option has been chosen in the Series type area. +Unit of Time +In this area you can specify the desired unit of time. This area is only active if the Date option has been chosen in the Series type area. -Day -Use the Date series type and this option to create a series using seven days. +Day +Use the Date series type and this option to create a series using seven days. -Weekday -Use the Date series type and this option to create a series of five day sets. +Weekday +Use the Date series type and this option to create a series of five day sets. -Month -Use the Date series type and this option to form a series from the names or abbreviations of the months. +Month +Use the Date series type and this option to form a series from the names or abbreviations of the months. -Year -Use the Date series type and this option to create a series of years. +Year +Use the Date series type and this option to create a series of years. -Start Value -Determines the start value for the series. Use numbers, dates or times. +Start Value +Determines the start value for the series. Use numbers, dates or times. -End Value -Determines the end value for the series. Use numbers, dates or times. +End Value +Determines the end value for the series. Use numbers, dates or times. -Increment -The term "increment" denotes the amount by which a given value increases. Determines the value by which the series of the selected type increases by each step. Entries can only be made if the linear, growth or date series types have been selected. +Increment +The term "increment" denotes the amount by which a given value increases. Determines the value by which the series of the selected type increases by each step. Entries can only be made if the linear, growth or date series types have been selected. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/02150000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/02150000.xhp index 48ab11766a..89786fe5ae 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/02150000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/02150000.xhp @@ -36,33 +36,33 @@ cell contents; deleting -Deleting Contents -Specifies the contents to be deleted from the active cell or from a selected cell range. +Deleting Contents +Specifies the contents to be deleted from the active cell or from a selected cell range. If several sheets are selected, all selected sheets will be affected.
-This dialog is also called by pressing Backspace after the cell cursor has been activated on the sheet. -Pressing Delete deletes content without calling the dialog or changing formats. -Use Cut on the Standard bar to delete contents and formats without the dialog. -Selection -This area lists the options for deleting contents. -Delete All -Deletes all content from the selected cell range. -Texti50439 -Deletes text only. Formats, formulas, numbers and dates are not affected. -Numbers -Deletes numbers only. Formats and formulas remain unchanged. -Date & time -Deletes date and time values. Formats, text, numbers and formulas remain unchanged. -Formulas -Deletes formulas. Text, numbers, formats, dates and times remain unchanged. -Comments -Deletes comments added to cells. All other elements remain unchanged. -Formats -Deletes format attributes applied to cells. All cell content remains unchanged. -Objects -Deletes objects. All cell content remains unchanged. +This dialog is also called by pressing Backspace after the cell cursor has been activated on the sheet. +Pressing Delete deletes content without calling the dialog or changing formats. +Use Cut on the Standard bar to delete contents and formats without the dialog. +Selection +This area lists the options for deleting contents. +Delete All +Deletes all content from the selected cell range. +Texti50439 +Deletes text only. Formats, formulas, numbers and dates are not affected. +Numbers +Deletes numbers only. Formats and formulas remain unchanged. +Date & time +Deletes date and time values. Formats, text, numbers and formulas remain unchanged. +Formulas +Deletes formulas. Text, numbers, formats, dates and times remain unchanged. +Comments +Deletes comments added to cells. All other elements remain unchanged. +Formats +Deletes format attributes applied to cells. All cell content remains unchanged. +Objects +Deletes objects. All cell content remains unchanged. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/02160000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/02160000.xhp index 7b13670ce0..017655fb7b 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/02160000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/02160000.xhp @@ -42,8 +42,8 @@ - Delete Cells - Completely deletes selected cells, columns or rows. The cells below or to the right of the deleted cells will fill the space. + Delete Cells + Completely deletes selected cells, columns or rows. The cells below or to the right of the deleted cells will fill the space. Note that the selected delete option is stored and reloaded when the dialog is next called.
@@ -52,29 +52,29 @@
Delete cells dialog - Selection - This area contains options for specifying how sheets are displayed after deleting cells. + Selection + This area contains options for specifying how sheets are displayed after deleting cells. - Shift cells up - Fills the space produced by the deleted cells with the cells underneath it. + Shift cells up + Fills the space produced by the deleted cells with the cells underneath it. - Shift cells left - Fills the resulting space by the cells to the right of the deleted cells. + Shift cells left + Fills the resulting space by the cells to the right of the deleted cells. - Delete entire row(s) - After selecting at least one cell, deletes the entire row from the sheet. + Delete entire row(s) + After selecting at least one cell, deletes the entire row from the sheet. - Delete entire column(s) - After selecting at least one cell, deletes the entire column from the sheet. + Delete entire column(s) + After selecting at least one cell, deletes the entire column from the sheet.
- Deleting Contents + Deleting Contents
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/02170000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/02170000.xhp index 4e2dd4ccde..b9af2e0238 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/02170000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/02170000.xhp @@ -36,16 +36,16 @@ - Delete Sheet -Deletes the current sheet after query confirmation. + Delete Sheet +Deletes the current sheet after query confirmation.
-You cannot delete a sheet while Edit - Track Changes - Record Changes is activated. -Yes -Deletes the current sheet. -No -Cancels the dialog. No delete is performed. +You cannot delete a sheet while Edit - Track Changes - Record Changes is activated. +Yes +Deletes the current sheet. +No +Cancels the dialog. No delete is performed. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/02180000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/02180000.xhp index ca130689b9..79c5dcb406 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/02180000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/02180000.xhp @@ -37,21 +37,21 @@ -Move or Copy a Sheet -Moves or copies a sheet to a new location in the document or to a different document. +Move or Copy a Sheet +Moves or copies a sheet to a new location in the document or to a different document.
-When you copy and paste cells containing date values between different spreadsheets, both spreadsheet documents must be set to the same date base. If date bases differ, the displayed date values will change! +When you copy and paste cells containing date values between different spreadsheets, both spreadsheet documents must be set to the same date base. If date bases differ, the displayed date values will change! -To Document -Indicates where the current sheet is to be moved or copied to. Select - new document - if you want to create a new location for the sheet to be moved or copied. +To Document +Indicates where the current sheet is to be moved or copied to. Select - new document - if you want to create a new location for the sheet to be moved or copied. -Insert Before -The current sheet is moved or copied in front of the selected sheet. The - move to end position - option places the current sheet at the end. +Insert Before +The current sheet is moved or copied in front of the selected sheet. The - move to end position - option places the current sheet at the end. -Copy -Specifies that the sheet is to be copied. If the option is unmarked, the sheet is moved. Moving sheets is the default. +Copy +Specifies that the sheet is to be copied. If the option is unmarked, the sheet is moved. Moving sheets is the default. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/02190100.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/02190100.xhp index 1550f3efc0..4cc79bd050 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/02190100.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/02190100.xhp @@ -37,8 +37,8 @@ MW deleted "removing;..." and changed "deleting;...! -Row Break -Removes the manual row break above the active cell. +Row Break +Removes the manual row break above the active cell.
Position the cursor in a cell directly below the row break indicated by a horizontal line and choose Sheet - Delete Page Break - Row Break. The manual row break is removed.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/02190200.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/02190200.xhp index d29e828089..8eb1045370 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/02190200.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/02190200.xhp @@ -43,8 +43,8 @@ - Column Break - Removes a manual column break to the left of the active cell. + Column Break + Removes a manual column break to the left of the active cell.
Position the cursor in the cell to the right of the column break indicated by a vertical line and choose Sheet - Delete Page Break - Column Break. The manual column break is removed. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/02210000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/02210000.xhp index 0c7577129a..99a6082300 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/02210000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/02210000.xhp @@ -33,9 +33,9 @@ -Selecting Sheets - Selects multiple sheets. - Selected Sheets - Lists the sheets in the current document. To select a sheet, press the up or down arrow keys to move to a sheet in the list. To add a sheet to the selection, hold down CommandCtrl while pressing the arrow keys and then press Spacebar. To select a range of sheets, hold down Shift and press the arrow keys. +Selecting Sheets + Selects multiple sheets. + Selected Sheets + Lists the sheets in the current document. To select a sheet, press the up or down arrow keys to move to a sheet in the list. To add a sheet to the selection, hold down CommandCtrl while pressing the arrow keys and then press Spacebar. To select a range of sheets, hold down Shift and press the arrow keys. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04010000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04010000.xhp index f709e1878a..231578860f 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04010000.xhp @@ -36,8 +36,8 @@ page breaks; inserting in spreadsheets mw changed "page breaks;..." -Insert Page Break -This command inserts manual row or column breaks to ensure that your data prints properly. You can insert a horizontal page break above, or a vertical page break to the left of, the active cell. +Insert Page Break +This command inserts manual row or column breaks to ensure that your data prints properly. You can insert a horizontal page break above, or a vertical page break to the left of, the active cell.
Choose Sheet - Delete Page Break to remove breaks created manually.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04010100.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04010100.xhp index 01334e6329..d24625e948 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04010100.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04010100.xhp @@ -38,10 +38,10 @@ -Row Break -Inserts a row break (horizontal page break) above the selected cell. +Row Break +Inserts a row break (horizontal page break) above the selected cell.
-The manual row break is indicated by a dark blue horizontal line. +The manual row break is indicated by a dark blue horizontal line.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04010200.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04010200.xhp index 514cf7e16a..1c2ad551d1 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04010200.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04010200.xhp @@ -38,10 +38,10 @@ -Column Break -Inserts a column break (vertical page break) to the left of the active cell. +Column Break +Inserts a column break (vertical page break) to the left of the active cell.
-The manual column break is indicated by a dark blue vertical line. +The manual column break is indicated by a dark blue vertical line.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04020000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04020000.xhp index 8983be823c..93d88384dd 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04020000.xhp @@ -35,32 +35,32 @@ - Insert Cells -Opens the Insert Cells dialog, in which you can insert new cells according to the options that you specify. + Insert Cells +Opens the Insert Cells dialog, in which you can insert new cells according to the options that you specify. You can delete cells by choosing Edit - Delete Cells.
-Selection -This area contains the options available for inserting cells into a sheet. The cell quantity and position is defined by selecting a cell range in the sheet beforehand. +Selection +This area contains the options available for inserting cells into a sheet. The cell quantity and position is defined by selecting a cell range in the sheet beforehand. -Shift cells down -Moves the contents of the selected range downward when cells are inserted. +Shift cells down +Moves the contents of the selected range downward when cells are inserted. -Shift cells right -Moves the contents of the selected range to the right when cells are inserted. +Shift cells right +Moves the contents of the selected range to the right when cells are inserted. -Entire row -Inserts an entire row. The position of the row is determined by the selection on the sheet. +Entire row +Inserts an entire row. The position of the row is determined by the selection on the sheet. The number of rows inserted depends on how many rows are selected. The contents of the original rows are moved downward. -Entire column -Inserts an entire column. The number of columns to be inserted is determined by the selected number of columns. +Entire column +Inserts an entire column. The number of columns to be inserted is determined by the selected number of columns. The contents of the original columns are shifted to the right. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04050000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04050000.xhp index b352849626..1a1e68f9f4 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04050000.xhp @@ -31,43 +31,43 @@ -Insert Sheet -Defines the options to be used to insert a new sheet. You can create a new sheet, or insert an existing sheet from a file. +Insert Sheet +Defines the options to be used to insert a new sheet. You can create a new sheet, or insert an existing sheet from a file.
-Position -Specifies where the new sheet is to be inserted into your document. +Position +Specifies where the new sheet is to be inserted into your document. -Before current sheet -Inserts a new sheet directly before the current sheet. +Before current sheet +Inserts a new sheet directly before the current sheet. -After current sheet -Inserts a new sheet directly after the current sheet. -Sheet -Specifies whether a new sheet or an existing sheet is inserted into the document. +After current sheet +Inserts a new sheet directly after the current sheet. +Sheet +Specifies whether a new sheet or an existing sheet is inserted into the document. -New sheet -Creates a new sheet. Enter a sheet name in the Name field. Allowed characters are letters, numbers, spaces, and the underline character. +New sheet +Creates a new sheet. Enter a sheet name in the Name field. Allowed characters are letters, numbers, spaces, and the underline character. -No. of sheets -Specifies the number of sheets to be created. +No. of sheets +Specifies the number of sheets to be created. -Name -Specifies the name of the new sheet. +Name +Specifies the name of the new sheet. -From File -Inserts a sheet from an existing file into the current document. +From File +Inserts a sheet from an existing file into the current document. -Browse -Opens a dialog for selecting a file. +Browse +Opens a dialog for selecting a file. -Available Sheets -If you selected a file by using the Browse button, the sheets contained in it are displayed in the list box. The file path is displayed below this box. Select the sheet to be inserted from the list box. +Available Sheets +If you selected a file by using the Browse button, the sheets contained in it are displayed in the list box. The file path is displayed below this box. Select the sheet to be inserted from the list box. -Link -Select to insert the sheet as a link instead as a copy. The links can be updated to show the current contents. +Link +Select to insert the sheet as a link instead as a copy. The links can be updated to show the current contents. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04050100.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04050100.xhp index 87467c5781..0d120c7681 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04050100.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04050100.xhp @@ -31,18 +31,18 @@
-Sheet from file -Inserts a sheet from a different spreadsheet file. +Sheet from file +Inserts a sheet from a different spreadsheet file.
-Use the File - Open dialog to locate the spreadsheet. +Use the File - Open dialog to locate the spreadsheet. -In the Insert Sheet dialog, select the sheet that you want to insert. +In the Insert Sheet dialog, select the sheet that you want to insert. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04060000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04060000.xhp index a2825fa6cd..e0fcfad2df 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04060000.xhp @@ -35,73 +35,73 @@ -Function Wizard +Function Wizard
-Opens the Function Wizard, which helps you to interactively create formulas. +Opens the Function Wizard, which helps you to interactively create formulas. Before you start the Wizard, select a cell or a range of cells from the current sheet, in order to determine the position at which the formula will be inserted.
-You can download the complete ODFF (OpenDocument Format Formula) specification from the OASIS web site. -The Function Wizard has two tabs: Functions is used to create formulas, and Structure is used to check the formula build. -Functions Tab +You can download the complete ODFF (OpenDocument Format Formula) specification from the OASIS web site. +The Function Wizard has two tabs: Functions is used to create formulas, and Structure is used to check the formula build. +Functions Tab Search Search for a part of the function name. -Category -Lists all the categories to which the different functions are assigned. Select a category to view the appropriate functions in the list field below. Select "All" to view all functions in alphabetical order, irrespective of category. "Last Used" lists the functions you have most recently used. +Category +Lists all the categories to which the different functions are assigned. Select a category to view the appropriate functions in the list field below. Select "All" to view all functions in alphabetical order, irrespective of category. "Last Used" lists the functions you have most recently used. You can browse the full List of Categories and Functions -Function -Displays the functions found under the selected category. Double-click to select a function. A single-click displays a short function description. +Function +Displays the functions found under the selected category. Double-click to select a function. A single-click displays a short function description. -Array -Specifies that the selected function is inserted into the selected cell range as an array formula. Array formulas operate on multiple cells. Each cell in the array contains the formula, not as a copy but as a common formula shared by all matrix cells. -The Array option is identical to the CommandCtrl+Shift+Enter command, which is used to enter and confirm formulas in the sheet. The formula is inserted as a matrix formula indicated by two braces { }. -The maximum size of an array range is 128 by 128 cells. -Argument Input Fields -When you double-click a function, the argument input field(s) appear on the right side of the dialog. To select a cell reference as an argument, click directly into the cell, or drag across the required range on the sheet while holding down the mouse button. You can also enter numerical and other values or references directly into the corresponding fields in the dialog. When using date entries, make sure you use the correct format. Click OK to insert the result into the spreadsheet. +Array +Specifies that the selected function is inserted into the selected cell range as an array formula. Array formulas operate on multiple cells. Each cell in the array contains the formula, not as a copy but as a common formula shared by all matrix cells. +The Array option is identical to the CommandCtrl+Shift+Enter command, which is used to enter and confirm formulas in the sheet. The formula is inserted as a matrix formula indicated by two braces { }. +The maximum size of an array range is 128 by 128 cells. +Argument Input Fields +When you double-click a function, the argument input field(s) appear on the right side of the dialog. To select a cell reference as an argument, click directly into the cell, or drag across the required range on the sheet while holding down the mouse button. You can also enter numerical and other values or references directly into the corresponding fields in the dialog. When using date entries, make sure you use the correct format. Click OK to insert the result into the spreadsheet. -Function Result -As soon you enter arguments in the function, the result is calculated. This preview informs you if the calculation can be carried out with the arguments given. If the arguments result in an error, the corresponding error code is displayed. -The required arguments are indicated by names in bold print. +Function Result +As soon you enter arguments in the function, the result is calculated. This preview informs you if the calculation can be carried out with the arguments given. If the arguments result in an error, the corresponding error code is displayed. +The required arguments are indicated by names in bold print. -f(x) (depending on the selected function) -Allows you to access a subordinate level of the Function Wizard in order to nest another function within the function, instead of a value or reference. -Argument/Parameter/Cell Reference (depending on the selected function) -The number of visible text fields depends on the function. Enter arguments either directly into the argument fields or by clicking a cell in the table. +f(x) (depending on the selected function) +Allows you to access a subordinate level of the Function Wizard in order to nest another function within the function, instead of a value or reference. +Argument/Parameter/Cell Reference (depending on the selected function) +The number of visible text fields depends on the function. Enter arguments either directly into the argument fields or by clicking a cell in the table. -Result -Displays the calculation result or an error message. +Result +Displays the calculation result or an error message. -Formula -Displays the created formula. Type your entries directly, or create the formula using the wizard. +Formula +Displays the created formula. Type your entries directly, or create the formula using the wizard. -Back -Moves the focus back through the formula components, marking them as it does so. -To select a single function from a complex formula consisting of several functions, double-click the function in the formula window. +Back +Moves the focus back through the formula components, marking them as it does so. +To select a single function from a complex formula consisting of several functions, double-click the function in the formula window. -Next -Moves forward through the formula components in the formula window. This button can also be used to assign functions to the formula. If you select a function and click the Next button, the selection appears in the formula window. -Double-click a function in the selection window to transfer it to the formula window. +Next +Moves forward through the formula components in the formula window. This button can also be used to assign functions to the formula. If you select a function and click the Next button, the selection appears in the formula window. +Double-click a function in the selection window to transfer it to the formula window. -OK -Ends the Function Wizard, and transfers the formula to the selected cells. +OK +Ends the Function Wizard, and transfers the formula to the selected cells. -Cancel -Closes the dialog without implementing the formula. -Structure tab -On this page, you can view the structure of the function. -If you start the Function Wizard while the cell cursor is positioned in a cell that already contains a function, the Structure tab is opened and shows the composition of the current formula. +Cancel +Closes the dialog without implementing the formula. +Structure tab +On this page, you can view the structure of the function. +If you start the Function Wizard while the cell cursor is positioned in a cell that already contains a function, the Structure tab is opened and shows the composition of the current formula. -Structure -Displays a hierarchical representation of the current function. You can hide or show the arguments by a click on the plus or minus sign in front. -Blue dots denote correctly entered arguments. Red dots indicate incorrect data types. For example: if the SUM function has one argument entered as text, this is highlighted in red as SUM only permits number entries. +Structure +Displays a hierarchical representation of the current function. You can hide or show the arguments by a click on the plus or minus sign in front. +Blue dots denote correctly entered arguments. Red dots indicate incorrect data types. For example: if the SUM function has one argument entered as text, this is highlighted in red as SUM only permits number entries. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04060100.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04060100.xhp index a5945399cc..995cfe114c 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04060100.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04060100.xhp @@ -31,38 +31,32 @@ categories of functions list of functions MW deleted "Calc functions" -Functions by Category - This section describes the functions of $[officename] Calc. The various functions are divided into categories in the Function Wizard. - Database +Functions by Category + This section describes the functions of $[officename] Calc. The various functions are divided into categories in the Function Wizard. + Database - Date & Time + Date & Time - Financial + Financial - Information + Information - Logical + Logical - Mathematical + Mathematical - Array + Array - Statistical + Statistical - Spreadsheet + Spreadsheet - Text + Text - Add-in + Add-in
- Operators + Operators
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp index 2777a13699..4f8e42f47b 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp @@ -31,59 +31,58 @@ functions; database functions databases; functions in $[officename] Calc -Database Functions +Database Functions This section deals with functions used with data organized as one row of data for one record. - The Database category may be confused with a database integrated in $[officename]. However, there is no connection between a database in $[officename] and the Database category in $[officename] Calc. - Example Data: - The following data will be used in some of the function description examples: - The range A1:E10 lists the children invited to Joe's birthday party. The following information is given for each entry: column A shows the name, B the grade, then age in years, distance to school in meters and weight in kilograms. + The Database category may be confused with a database integrated in $[officename]. However, there is no connection between a database in $[officename] and the Database category in $[officename] Calc. + Example Data: + The following data will be used in some of the function description examples: + The range A1:E10 lists the children invited to Joe's birthday party. The following information is given for each entry: column A shows the name, B the grade, then age in years, distance to school in meters and weight in kilograms. - A + A - B + B - C + C - D + D - E + E - 1 + 1 - + Name - + Grade - + Age - + Distance to School - + Weight @@ -93,7 +92,7 @@ 2 - + Andy @@ -115,7 +114,7 @@ 3 - + Betty @@ -137,7 +136,7 @@ 4 - + Charles @@ -159,7 +158,7 @@ 5 - + Daniel @@ -181,7 +180,7 @@ 6 - + Eva @@ -203,7 +202,7 @@ 7 - + Frank @@ -225,7 +224,7 @@ 8 - + Greta @@ -247,7 +246,7 @@ 9 - + Harry @@ -269,7 +268,7 @@ 10 - + Irene @@ -321,27 +320,27 @@ 13 - + Name - + Grade - + Age - + Distance to School - + Weight @@ -382,7 +381,7 @@ 16 - + DCOUNT @@ -398,39 +397,35 @@
- The formula in cell B16 is =DCOUNT(A1:E10;D1;A13:E14) - Database Function Parameters: - The following items are the parameter definitions for all database functions: - + The formula in cell B16 is =DCOUNT(A1:E10;D1;A13:E14) + Database Function Parameters: + The following items are the parameter definitions for all database functions: + Database is the cell range defining the database. - + DatabaseField specifies the column where the function operates on after the search criteria of the first parameter is applied and the data rows are selected. It is not related to the search criteria itself. For the DatabaseField parameter you can enter a reference to a header cell or a number to specify the column within the Database area, starting with 1. To reference a column by means of the literal column header name, place quotation marks around the header name. - + SearchCriteria is the cell range containing search criteria. If you write several criteria in one row they are connected by AND. If you write the criteria in different rows they are connected by OR. Empty cells in the search criteria range will be ignored. - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate to define how $[officename] Calc acts when searching for identical entries. - See also the Wiki page about Conditional Counting and Summation. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate to define how $[officename] Calc acts when searching for identical entries. + See also the Wiki page about Conditional Counting and Summation.
DCOUNT function counting rows;with numeric values mw added "counting rows;" -DCOUNT - DCOUNT counts the number of rows (records) in a database that match the specified search criteria and contain numerical values in the DatabaseField column. +DCOUNT + DCOUNT counts the number of rows (records) in a database that match the specified search criteria and contain numerical values in the DatabaseField column. - Syntax - DCOUNT(Database; [DatabaseField]; SearchCriteria) - If the DatabaseField argument is omitted, DCOUNT returns the count of all records that satisfy Criteria. - Example - In the example above (scroll up, please), we want to know how many children have to travel more than 600 meters to school. The result is to be stored in cell B16. Set the cursor in cell B16. Enter the formula =DCOUNT(A1:E10;D1;A13:E14) in B16. The Function Wizard helps you to input ranges. - + Syntax + DCOUNT(Database; [DatabaseField]; SearchCriteria) + If the DatabaseField argument is omitted, DCOUNT returns the count of all records that satisfy Criteria. + Example + In the example above (scroll up, please), we want to know how many children have to travel more than 600 meters to school. The result is to be stored in cell B16. Set the cursor in cell B16. Enter the formula =DCOUNT(A1:E10;D1;A13:E14) in B16. The Function Wizard helps you to input ranges. + Database is the range of data to be evaluated, including its headers: in this case A1:E10. DatabaseField specifies the column for the search criteria: in this case, the column with the numerical distance values. SearchCriteria is the range where you can enter the search parameters: in this case, A13:E14. - To learn how many children in second grade are over 7 years of age, delete the entry >600 in cell D14 and enter 2 in cell B14 under Grade, and enter >7 in cell C14 to the right. The result is 2. Two children are in second grade and over 7 years of age. As both criteria are in the same row, they are connected by AND. + To learn how many children in second grade are over 7 years of age, delete the entry >600 in cell D14 and enter 2 in cell B14 under Grade, and enter >7 in cell C14 to the right. The result is 2. Two children are in second grade and over 7 years of age. As both criteria are in the same row, they are connected by AND.
DCOUNTA function @@ -438,17 +433,14 @@ counting rows;with numeric or alphanumeric values mw added "records;" and "counting rows;" -DCOUNTA - DCOUNTA counts the number of rows (records) in a database that match the specified search conditions, and contain numeric or alphanumeric values. +DCOUNTA + DCOUNTA counts the number of rows (records) in a database that match the specified search conditions, and contain numeric or alphanumeric values. - Syntax - DCOUNTA(Database; [DatabaseField]; SearchCriteria) - If the DatabaseField argument is omitted, DCOUNTA returns the count of all records that satisfy Criteria. - Example - In the example above (scroll up, please), you can search for the number of children whose name starts with an E or a subsequent letter. Edit the formula in B16 to read =DCOUNTA(A1:E10;"Name";A13:E14). Delete the old search criteria and enter >=E under Name in field A14. The result is 5. If you now delete all number values for Greta in row 8, the result changes to 4. Row 8 is no longer included in the count because it does not contain any values. The name Greta is text, not a value. Note that the DatabaseField parameter must point to a column that can contain values.see i25407 + Syntax + DCOUNTA(Database; [DatabaseField]; SearchCriteria) + If the DatabaseField argument is omitted, DCOUNTA returns the count of all records that satisfy Criteria. + Example + In the example above (scroll up, please), you can search for the number of children whose name starts with an E or a subsequent letter. Edit the formula in B16 to read =DCOUNTA(A1:E10;"Name";A13:E14). Delete the old search criteria and enter >=E under Name in field A14. The result is 5. If you now delete all number values for Greta in row 8, the result changes to 4. Row 8 is no longer included in the count because it does not contain any values. The name Greta is text, not a value. Note that the DatabaseField parameter must point to a column that can contain values.see i25407
DGET function @@ -456,26 +448,23 @@ searching;cell contents in Calc databases mw added "cell contents;" and "searching;" -DGET - DGET returns the contents of the referenced cell in a database which matches the specified search criteria. In case of an error, the function returns either #VALUE! for no row found, or Err502 for more than one cell found. +DGET + DGET returns the contents of the referenced cell in a database which matches the specified search criteria. In case of an error, the function returns either #VALUE! for no row found, or Err502 for more than one cell found. - Syntax - DGET(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + Syntax + DGET(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) - Example - In the above example (scroll up, please), we want to determine what grade a child is in, whose name was entered in cell A14. The formula is entered in cell B16 and differs slightly from the earlier examples because only one column (one database field) can be entered for DatabaseField. Enter the following formula: - + Example + In the above example (scroll up, please), we want to determine what grade a child is in, whose name was entered in cell A14. The formula is entered in cell B16 and differs slightly from the earlier examples because only one column (one database field) can be entered for DatabaseField. Enter the following formula: + =DGET(A1:E10;"Grade";A13:E14) - Enter the name Frank in A14, and you see the result 2. Frank is in second grade. Enter "Age" instead of "Grade" and you will get Frank's age. - Or enter the value 11 in cell C14 only, and delete the other entries in this row. Edit the formula in B16 as follows: - + Enter the name Frank in A14, and you see the result 2. Frank is in second grade. Enter "Age" instead of "Grade" and you will get Frank's age. + Or enter the value 11 in cell C14 only, and delete the other entries in this row. Edit the formula in B16 as follows: + =DGET(A1:E10;"Name";A13:E14) - Instead of the grade, the name is queried. The answer appears at once: Daniel is the only child aged 11. + Instead of the grade, the name is queried. The answer appears at once: Daniel is the only child aged 11.
DMAX function @@ -483,21 +472,18 @@ searching;maximum values in columns mw added "maximum..." and "searching;" -DMAX - DMAX returns the maximum content of a cell (field) in a database (all records) that matches the specified search conditions. +DMAX + DMAX returns the maximum content of a cell (field) in a database (all records) that matches the specified search conditions. - Syntax - DMAX(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + Syntax + DMAX(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) - Example - To find out how much the heaviest child in each grade weighed in the above example (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: - + Example + To find out how much the heaviest child in each grade weighed in the above example (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: + =DMAX(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) - Under Grade, enter 1, 2, 3, and so on, one after the other. After entering a grade number, the weight of the heaviest child in that grade appears. + Under Grade, enter 1, 2, 3, and so on, one after the other. After entering a grade number, the weight of the heaviest child in that grade appears.
DMIN function @@ -505,21 +491,18 @@ searching;minimum values in columns mw added "minimum..." and "searching;" -DMIN - DMIN returns the minimum content of a cell (field) in a database that matches the specified search criteria. +DMIN + DMIN returns the minimum content of a cell (field) in a database that matches the specified search criteria. - Syntax - DMIN(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + Syntax + DMIN(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) - Example - To find the shortest distance to school for the children in each grade in the above example (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: - + Example + To find the shortest distance to school for the children in each grade in the above example (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: + =DMIN(A1:E10;"Distance to School";A13:E14) - In row 14, under Grade, enter 1, 2, 3, and so on, one after the other. The shortest distance to school for each grade appears. + In row 14, under Grade, enter 1, 2, 3, and so on, one after the other. The shortest distance to school for each grade appears.
DAVERAGE function @@ -527,80 +510,68 @@ calculating;averages in Calc databases mw added "averages;..." and "calculating;" -DAVERAGE - DAVERAGE returns the average of the values of all cells (fields) in all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria. +DAVERAGE + DAVERAGE returns the average of the values of all cells (fields) in all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria. - Syntax - DAVERAGE(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + Syntax + DAVERAGE(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) - Example - To find the average weight of all children of the same age in the above example (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: - + Example + To find the average weight of all children of the same age in the above example (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: + =DAVERAGE(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) - In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The average weight of all children of the same age appears. + In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The average weight of all children of the same age appears.
DPRODUCT function multiplying;cell contents in Calc databases mw added "multiplying..." -DPRODUCT - DPRODUCT multiplies all cells of a data range where the cell contents match the search criteria. +DPRODUCT + DPRODUCT multiplies all cells of a data range where the cell contents match the search criteria. - Syntax - DPRODUCT(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + Syntax + DPRODUCT(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) - Example - With the birthday party example above (scroll up, please), there is no meaningful application of this function. + Example + With the birthday party example above (scroll up, please), there is no meaningful application of this function.
DSTDEV function standard deviations in databases;based on a sample mw added "standard deviations...;" -DSTDEV - DSTDEV calculates the standard deviation of a population based on a sample, using the numbers in a database column that match the given conditions. The records are treated as a sample of data. That means that the children in the example represent a cross section of all children. Note that a representative result can not be obtained from a sample of less than one thousand. +DSTDEV + DSTDEV calculates the standard deviation of a population based on a sample, using the numbers in a database column that match the given conditions. The records are treated as a sample of data. That means that the children in the example represent a cross section of all children. Note that a representative result can not be obtained from a sample of less than one thousand. - Syntax - DSTDEV(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + Syntax + DSTDEV(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) - Example - To find the standard deviation of the weight for all children of the same age in the example (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: - + Example + To find the standard deviation of the weight for all children of the same age in the example (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: + =DSTDEV(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) - In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The result shown is the standard deviation of the weight of all children of this age. + In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The result shown is the standard deviation of the weight of all children of this age.
DSTDEVP function standard deviations in databases;based on populations mw added "standard deviations...;" -DSTDEVP - DSTDEVP calculates the standard deviation of a population based on all cells of a data range which match the search criteria. The records from the example are treated as the whole population. +DSTDEVP + DSTDEVP calculates the standard deviation of a population based on all cells of a data range which match the search criteria. The records from the example are treated as the whole population. - Syntax - DSTDEVP(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + Syntax + DSTDEVP(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) - Example - To find the standard deviation of the weight for all children of the same age at Joe's birthday party (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: - + Example + To find the standard deviation of the weight for all children of the same age at Joe's birthday party (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: + =DSTDEVP(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) - In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The result is the standard deviation of the weight for all same-aged children whose weight was checked. + In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The result is the standard deviation of the weight for all same-aged children whose weight was checked.
DSUM function @@ -608,63 +579,54 @@ sums;cells in Calc databases mw added "calculating;" and "sums;" -DSUM - DSUM returns the total of all cells in a database field in all rows (records) that match the specified search criteria. +DSUM + DSUM returns the total of all cells in a database field in all rows (records) that match the specified search criteria. - Syntax - DSUM(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + Syntax + DSUM(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) - Example - To find the length of the combined distance to school of all children at Joe's birthday party (scroll up, please) who are in second grade, enter the following formula in B16: - + Example + To find the length of the combined distance to school of all children at Joe's birthday party (scroll up, please) who are in second grade, enter the following formula in B16: + =DSUM(A1:E10;"Distance to School";A13:E14) - Enter 2 in row 14 under Grade. The sum (1950) of the distances to school of all the children who are in second grade is displayed. + Enter 2 in row 14 under Grade. The sum (1950) of the distances to school of all the children who are in second grade is displayed.
DVAR function variances;based on samples mw added "variances;" -DVAR - DVAR returns the variance of all cells of a database field in all records that match the specified search criteria. The records from the example are treated as a sample of data. A representative result cannot be obtained from a sample population of less than one thousand. +DVAR + DVAR returns the variance of all cells of a database field in all records that match the specified search criteria. The records from the example are treated as a sample of data. A representative result cannot be obtained from a sample population of less than one thousand. - Syntax - DVAR(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + Syntax + DVAR(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) - Example - To find the variance of the weight of all children of the same age of the above example (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: - + Example + To find the variance of the weight of all children of the same age of the above example (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: + =DVAR(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) - In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. You will see as a result the variance of the weight values for all children of this age. + In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. You will see as a result the variance of the weight values for all children of this age.
DVARP function variances;based on populations mw added "variances;" -DVARP - DVARP calculates the variance of all cell values in a database field in all records that match the specified search criteria. The records are from the example are treated as an entire population. +DVARP + DVARP calculates the variance of all cell values in a database field in all records that match the specified search criteria. The records are from the example are treated as an entire population. - Syntax - DVARP(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + Syntax + DVARP(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) - Example - To find the variance of the weight for all children of the same age at Joe's birthday party (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: - + Example + To find the variance of the weight for all children of the same age at Joe's birthday party (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: + =DVARP(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) - In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The variance of the weight values for all children of this age attending Joe's birthday party appears. + In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The variance of the weight values for all children of this age attending Joe's birthday party appears.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp index 4550c4b6c5..8a6837d23c 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@ Function Wizard; financial amortizations, see also depreciations mw added one entry -Financial Functions Part One - This category contains the mathematical finance functions of %PRODUCTNAME Calc. +Financial Functions Part One + This category contains the mathematical finance functions of %PRODUCTNAME Calc.
@@ -41,23 +41,21 @@ depreciations;degressive amortizations mw added one entry -AMORDEGRC - Calculates the amount of depreciation for a settlement period as degressive amortization. Unlike AMORLINC, a depreciation coefficient that is independent of the depreciable life is used here. - Syntax - AMORDEGRC(Cost; DatePurchased; FirstPeriod; Salvage; Period; Rate; Basis) - +AMORDEGRC + Calculates the amount of depreciation for a settlement period as degressive amortization. Unlike AMORLINC, a depreciation coefficient that is independent of the depreciable life is used here. + Syntax + AMORDEGRC(Cost; DatePurchased; FirstPeriod; Salvage; Period; Rate; Basis) + Cost is the acquisition costs. - + DatePurchased is the date of acquisition. - + FirstPeriod is the end date of the first settlement period. - + Salvage is the salvage value of the capital asset at the end of the depreciable life. - + Period is the settlement period to be considered. - + Rate is the rate of depreciation.
@@ -66,23 +64,21 @@ depreciations;linear amortizations mw added "depreciations;..." -AMORLINC - Calculates the amount of depreciation for a settlement period as linear amortization. If the capital asset is purchased during the settlement period, the proportional amount of depreciation is considered. - Syntax - AMORLINC(Cost; DatePurchased; FirstPeriod; Salvage; Period; Rate; Basis) - +AMORLINC + Calculates the amount of depreciation for a settlement period as linear amortization. If the capital asset is purchased during the settlement period, the proportional amount of depreciation is considered. + Syntax + AMORLINC(Cost; DatePurchased; FirstPeriod; Salvage; Period; Rate; Basis) + Cost means the acquisition costs. - + DatePurchased is the date of acquisition. - + FirstPeriod is the end date of the first settlement period. - + Salvage is the salvage value of the capital asset at the end of the depreciable life. - + Period is the settlement period to be considered. - + Rate is the rate of depreciation.
@@ -90,31 +86,28 @@ ACCRINT function -ACCRINT +ACCRINT accrued interests;periodic payments mw changed "accrued interests" -Calculates the accrued interest of a security in the case of periodic payments. - Syntax - ACCRINT(Issue; FirstInterest; Settlement; Rate; Par; Frequency; Basis) - +Calculates the accrued interest of a security in the case of periodic payments. + Syntax + ACCRINT(Issue; FirstInterest; Settlement; Rate; Par; Frequency; Basis) + Issue (required) is the issue date of the security. - + FirstInterest (required) is the first interest date of the security. - + Settlement (required) is the date at which the interest accrued up until then is to be calculated. - + Rate (required) is the annual nominal rate of interest (coupon interest rate) - + Par (optional) is the par value of the security. - + Frequency (required) is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). - Example - A security is issued on 2001-02-28. First interest is set for 2001-08-31. The settlement date is 2001-05-01. The Rate is 0.1 or 10% and Par is 1000 currency units. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). The basis is the US method (0). How much interest has accrued? - + Example + A security is issued on 2001-02-28. First interest is set for 2001-08-31. The settlement date is 2001-05-01. The Rate is 0.1 or 10% and Par is 1000 currency units. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). The basis is the US method (0). How much interest has accrued? + =ACCRINT("2001-02-28";"2001-08-31";"2001-05-01";0.1;1000;2;0) returns 16.94444.
@@ -122,25 +115,22 @@ accrued interests;one-off payments mw added one index entry -ACCRINTM - Calculates the accrued interest of a security in the case of one-off payment at the settlement date. - Syntax - ACCRINTM(Issue; Settlement; Rate; Par; Basis) - +ACCRINTM + Calculates the accrued interest of a security in the case of one-off payment at the settlement date. + Syntax + ACCRINTM(Issue; Settlement; Rate; Par; Basis) + Issue (required) is the issue date of the security. - + Settlement (required) is the date at which the interest accrued up until then is to be calculated. - + Rate (required) is the annual nominal rate of interest (coupon interest rate). - + Par (optional) is the par value of the security. - Example - A security is issued on 2001-04-01. The maturity date is set for 2001-06-15. The Rate is 0.1 or 10% and Par is 1000 currency units. The basis of the daily/annual calculation is the daily balance (3). How much interest has accrued? - + Example + A security is issued on 2001-04-01. The maturity date is set for 2001-06-15. The Rate is 0.1 or 10% and Par is 1000 currency units. The basis of the daily/annual calculation is the daily balance (3). How much interest has accrued? + =ACCRINTM("2001-04-01";"2001-06-15";0.1;1000;3) returns 20.54795.
@@ -148,26 +138,23 @@ amount received for fixed-interest securities mw added one entry -RECEIVED - Calculates the amount received that is paid for a fixed-interest security at a given point in time. - Syntax - RECEIVED("Settlement"; "Maturity"; Investment; Discount; Basis) - +RECEIVED + Calculates the amount received that is paid for a fixed-interest security at a given point in time. + Syntax + RECEIVED("Settlement"; "Maturity"; Investment; Discount; Basis) + Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - + Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - + Investment is the purchase sum. - + Discount is the percentage discount on acquisition of the security. - Example - Settlement date: February 15 1999, maturity date: May 15 1999, investment sum: 1000 currency units, discount: 5.75 per cent, basis: Daily balance/360 = 2. - The amount received on the maturity date is calculated as follows: - + Example + Settlement date: February 15 1999, maturity date: May 15 1999, investment sum: 1000 currency units, discount: 5.75 per cent, basis: Daily balance/360 = 2. + The amount received on the maturity date is calculated as follows: + =RECEIVED("1999-02-15";"1999-05-15";1000;0.0575;2) returns 1014.420266.
@@ -176,31 +163,30 @@ calculating; present values -PV - Returns the present value of an investment resulting from a series of regular payments. - Use this function to calculate the amount of money needed to be invested at a fixed rate today, to receive a specific amount, an annuity, over a specified number of periods. You can also determine how much money is to remain after the elapse of the period. Specify as well if the amount is to be paid out at the beginning or at the end of each period. - Enter these values either as numbers, expressions or references. If, for example, interest is paid annually at 8%, but you want to use month as your period, enter 8%/12 under Rate and %PRODUCTNAME Calc with automatically calculate the correct factor. - Syntax - PV(Rate; NPer; Pmt; FV; Type) - +PV + Returns the present value of an investment resulting from a series of regular payments. + Use this function to calculate the amount of money needed to be invested at a fixed rate today, to receive a specific amount, an annuity, over a specified number of periods. You can also determine how much money is to remain after the elapse of the period. Specify as well if the amount is to be paid out at the beginning or at the end of each period. + Enter these values either as numbers, expressions or references. If, for example, interest is paid annually at 8%, but you want to use month as your period, enter 8%/12 under Rate and %PRODUCTNAME Calc with automatically calculate the correct factor. + Syntax + PV(Rate; NPer; Pmt; FV; Type) + Rate defines the interest rate per period. - + NPer is the total number of periods (payment period). - + Pmt is the regular payment made per period. - + FV (optional) defines the future value remaining after the final installment has been made. - + Type (optional) denotes due date for payments. Type = 1 means due at the beginning of a period and Type = 0 (default) means due at the end of the period. - + - Example - What is the present value of an investment, if 500 currency units are paid out monthly and the annual interest rate is 8%? The payment period is 48 months and 20,000 currency units are to remain at the end of the payment period. - + Example + What is the present value of an investment, if 500 currency units are paid out monthly and the annual interest rate is 8%? The payment period is 48 months and 20,000 currency units are to remain at the end of the payment period. + =PV(8%/12;48;500;20000) = -35,019.37 currency units. Under the named conditions, you must deposit 35,019.37 currency units today, if you want to receive 500 currency units per month for 48 months and have 20,000 currency units left over at the end. Cross-checking shows that 48 x 500 currency units + 20,000 currency units = 44,000 currency units. The difference between this amount and the 35,000 currency units deposited represents the interest paid. - If you enter references instead of these values into the formula, you can calculate any number of "If-then" scenarios. Please note: references to constants must be defined as absolute references. Examples of this type of application are found under the depreciation functions. + If you enter references instead of these values into the formula, you can calculate any number of "If-then" scenarios. Please note: references to constants must be defined as absolute references. Examples of this type of application are found under the depreciation functions.
calculating; depreciations @@ -209,120 +195,117 @@ arithmetic declining depreciations -SYD - Returns the arithmetic-declining depreciation rate. - Use this function to calculate the depreciation amount for one period of the total depreciation span of an object. Arithmetic declining depreciation reduces the depreciation amount from period to period by a fixed sum. - Syntax - SYD(Cost; Salvage; Life; Period) - +SYD + Returns the arithmetic-declining depreciation rate. + Use this function to calculate the depreciation amount for one period of the total depreciation span of an object. Arithmetic declining depreciation reduces the depreciation amount from period to period by a fixed sum. + Syntax + SYD(Cost; Salvage; Life; Period) + Cost is the initial cost of an asset. - + Salvage is the value of an asset after depreciation. - + Life is the period fixing the time span over which an asset is depreciated. - + Period defines the period for which the depreciation is to be calculated. - Example - A video system initially costing 50,000 currency units is to be depreciated annually for the next 5 years. The salvage value is to be 10,000 currency units. You want to calculate depreciation for the first year. - + Example + A video system initially costing 50,000 currency units is to be depreciated annually for the next 5 years. The salvage value is to be 10,000 currency units. You want to calculate depreciation for the first year. + =SYD(50000;10000;5;1)=13,333.33 currency units. The depreciation amount for the first year is 13,333.33 currency units. - To have an overview of depreciation rates per period, it is best to define a depreciation table. By entering the different depreciation formulas available in %PRODUCTNAME Calc next to each other, you can see which depreciation form is the most appropriate. Enter the table as follows: + To have an overview of depreciation rates per period, it is best to define a depreciation table. By entering the different depreciation formulas available in %PRODUCTNAME Calc next to each other, you can see which depreciation form is the most appropriate. Enter the table as follows: - + A - + B - + C - + D - + E - 1 + 1 - + Initial Cost - + Salvage Value - + Useful Life - + Time Period - + Deprec. SYD - 2 + 2 - + 50,000 currency units - + 10,000 currency units - + 5 - + 1 - + 13,333.33 currency units - 3 + 3 @@ -331,19 +314,19 @@ - + 2 - + 10,666.67 currency units - 4 + 4 @@ -352,19 +335,19 @@ - + 3 - + 8,000.00 currency units - 5 + 5 @@ -373,19 +356,19 @@ - + 4 - + 5,333.33 currency units - 6 + 6 @@ -394,19 +377,19 @@ - + 5 - + 2,666.67 currency units - 7 + 7 @@ -415,19 +398,19 @@ - + 6 - + 0.00 currency units - 8 + 8 @@ -436,7 +419,7 @@ - + 7 @@ -445,7 +428,7 @@ - 9 + 9 @@ -454,7 +437,7 @@ - + 8 @@ -463,7 +446,7 @@ - 10 + 10 @@ -472,7 +455,7 @@ - + 9 @@ -481,7 +464,7 @@ - 11 + 11 @@ -490,7 +473,7 @@ - + 10 @@ -499,7 +482,7 @@ - 12 + 12 @@ -514,10 +497,10 @@ - 13 + 13 - + >0 @@ -526,28 +509,28 @@ - + Total - + 40,000.00 currency units
- The formula in E2 is as follows: - + The formula in E2 is as follows: + =SYD($A$2;$B$2;$C$2;D2) - This formula is duplicated in column E down to E11 (select E2, then drag down the lower right corner with the mouse). - Cell E13 contains the formula used to check the total of the depreciation amounts. It uses the SUMIF function as the negative values in E8:E11 must not be considered. The condition >0 is contained in cell A13. The formula in E13 is as follows: - + This formula is duplicated in column E down to E11 (select E2, then drag down the lower right corner with the mouse). + Cell E13 contains the formula used to check the total of the depreciation amounts. It uses the SUMIF function as the negative values in E8:E11 must not be considered. The condition >0 is contained in cell A13. The formula in E13 is as follows: + =SUMIF(E2:E11;A13) - Now view the depreciation for a 10 year period, or at a salvage value of 1 currency unit, or enter a different initial cost, and so on. + Now view the depreciation for a 10 year period, or at a salvage value of 1 currency unit, or enter a different initial cost, and so on.
DISC function @@ -555,25 +538,22 @@ discounts mw added "discounts" and "allowances" -DISC - Calculates the allowance (discount) of a security as a percentage. - Syntax - DISC("Settlement"; "Maturity"; Price; Redemption; Basis) - +DISC + Calculates the allowance (discount) of a security as a percentage. + Syntax + DISC("Settlement"; "Maturity"; Price; Redemption; Basis) + Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - + Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - + Price is the price of the security per 100 currency units of par value. - + Redemption is the redemption value of the security per 100 currency units of par value. - Example - A security is purchased on 2001-01-25; the maturity date is 2001-11-15. The price (purchase price) is 97, the redemption value is 100. Using daily balance calculation (basis 3) how high is the settlement (discount)? - + Example + A security is purchased on 2001-01-25; the maturity date is 2001-11-15. The price (purchase price) is 97, the redemption value is 100. Using daily balance calculation (basis 3) how high is the settlement (discount)? + =DISC("2001-01-25";"2001-11-15";97;100;3) returns about 0.0372 or 3.72 per cent.
@@ -582,28 +562,25 @@ durations;fixed interest securities mw added two entries -DURATION_ADD - Calculates the duration of a fixed interest security in years. +DURATION_ADD + Calculates the duration of a fixed interest security in years. - Syntax - DURATION_ADD("Settlement"; "Maturity"; Coupon; Yield; Frequency; Basis) - + Syntax + DURATION_ADD("Settlement"; "Maturity"; Coupon; Yield; Frequency; Basis) + Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - + Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - + Coupon is the annual coupon interest rate (nominal rate of interest) - + Yield is the annual yield of the security. - + Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). - Example - A security is purchased on 2001-01-01; the maturity date is 2006-01-01. The Coupon rate of interest is 8%. The yield is 9.0%. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) how long is the duration? - + Example + A security is purchased on 2001-01-01; the maturity date is 2006-01-01. The Coupon rate of interest is 8%. The yield is 9.0%. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) how long is the duration? + =DURATION_ADD("2001-01-01";"2006-01-01";0.08;0.09;2;3)
@@ -614,21 +591,18 @@ EFFECTIVE function mw added one entry -EFFECTIVE - Returns the net annual interest rate for a nominal interest rate. - Nominal interest refers to the amount of interest due at the end of a calculation period. Effective interest increases with the number of payments made. In other words, interest is often paid in installments (for example, monthly or quarterly) before the end of the calculation period. - Syntax - EFFECTIVE(Nom; P) - +EFFECTIVE + Returns the net annual interest rate for a nominal interest rate. + Nominal interest refers to the amount of interest due at the end of a calculation period. Effective interest increases with the number of payments made. In other words, interest is often paid in installments (for example, monthly or quarterly) before the end of the calculation period. + Syntax + EFFECTIVE(Nom; P) + Nom is the nominal interest. - + P is the number of interest payment periods per year. - Example - If the annual nominal interest rate is 9.75% and four interest calculation periods are defined, what is the actual interest rate (effective rate)? - + Example + If the annual nominal interest rate is 9.75% and four interest calculation periods are defined, what is the actual interest rate (effective rate)? + =EFFECTIVE(9.75%;4) = 10.11% The annual effective rate is therefore 10.11%.
@@ -636,21 +610,18 @@ EFFECT_ADD function mw changed "effective rates" -EFFECT_ADD - Calculates the effective annual rate of interest on the basis of the nominal interest rate and the number of interest payments per annum. +EFFECT_ADD + Calculates the effective annual rate of interest on the basis of the nominal interest rate and the number of interest payments per annum. - Syntax - EFFECT_ADD(NominalRate; NPerY) - + Syntax + EFFECT_ADD(NominalRate; NPerY) + NominalRate is the annual nominal rate of interest. - + NPerY is the number of interest payments per year. - Example - What is the effective annual rate of interest for a 5.25% nominal rate and quarterly payment. - + Example + What is the effective annual rate of interest for a 5.25% nominal rate and quarterly payment. + =EFFECT_ADD(0.0525;4) returns 0.053543 or 5.3543%.
@@ -660,27 +631,24 @@ DDB function mw corrected two typos and added "depreciations;..." -DDB - Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the arithmetic-declining method. - Use this form of depreciation if you require a higher initial depreciation value as opposed to linear depreciation. The depreciation value gets less with each period and is usually used for assets whose value loss is higher shortly after purchase (for example, vehicles, computers). Please note that the book value will never reach zero under this calculation type. - Syntax - DDB(Cost; Salvage; Life; Period; Factor) - +DDB + Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the arithmetic-declining method. + Use this form of depreciation if you require a higher initial depreciation value as opposed to linear depreciation. The depreciation value gets less with each period and is usually used for assets whose value loss is higher shortly after purchase (for example, vehicles, computers). Please note that the book value will never reach zero under this calculation type. + Syntax + DDB(Cost; Salvage; Life; Period; Factor) + Cost fixes the initial cost of an asset. - + Salvage fixes the value of an asset at the end of its life. - + Life is the number of periods (for example, years or months) defining how long the asset is to be used. - + Period states the period for which the value is to be calculated. - + Factor (optional) is the factor by which depreciation decreases. If a value is not entered, the default is factor 2. - Example - A computer system with an initial cost of 75,000 currency units is to be depreciated monthly over 5 years. The value at the end of the depreciation is to be 1 currency unit. The factor is 2. - + Example + A computer system with an initial cost of 75,000 currency units is to be depreciated monthly over 5 years. The value at the end of the depreciation is to be 1 currency unit. The factor is 2. + =DDB(75000;1;60;12;2) = 1,721.81 currency units. Therefore, the double-declining depreciation in the twelfth month after purchase is 1,721.81 currency units.
@@ -690,29 +658,26 @@ DB function mw added "depreciations;.." -DB - Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the fixed-declining balance method. - This form of depreciation is used if you want to get a higher depreciation value at the beginning of the depreciation (as opposed to linear depreciation). The depreciation value is reduced with every depreciation period by the depreciation already deducted from the initial cost. - Syntax - DB(Cost; Salvage; Life; Period; Month) - +DB + Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the fixed-declining balance method. + This form of depreciation is used if you want to get a higher depreciation value at the beginning of the depreciation (as opposed to linear depreciation). The depreciation value is reduced with every depreciation period by the depreciation already deducted from the initial cost. + Syntax + DB(Cost; Salvage; Life; Period; Month) + Cost is the initial cost of an asset. - + Salvage is the value of an asset at the end of the depreciation. - + Life defines the period over which an asset is depreciated. - + Period is the length of each period. The length must be entered in the same date unit as the depreciation period. - + Month (optional) denotes the number of months for the first year of depreciation. If an entry is not defined, 12 is used as the default. - Example - A computer system with an initial cost of 25,000 currency units is to be depreciated over a three year period. The salvage value is to be 1,000 currency units. One period is 30 days. - + Example + A computer system with an initial cost of 25,000 currency units is to be depreciated over a three year period. The salvage value is to be 1,000 currency units. One period is 30 days. + =DB(25000;1000;36;1;6) = 1,075.00 currency units - The fixed-declining depreciation of the computer system is 1,075.00 currency units. + The fixed-declining depreciation of the computer system is 1,075.00 currency units.
IRR function @@ -720,20 +685,17 @@ internal rates of return;regular payments mw changed "calculating;..." and "internal rates" -IRR - Calculates the internal rate of return for an investment. The values represent cash flow values at regular intervals, at least one value must be negative (payments), and at least one value must be positive (income). +IRR + Calculates the internal rate of return for an investment. The values represent cash flow values at regular intervals, at least one value must be negative (payments), and at least one value must be positive (income). If the payments take place at irregular intervals, use the XIRR function. - Syntax - IRR(Values; Guess) - + Syntax + IRR(Values; Guess) + Values represents an array containing the values. - + Guess (optional) is the estimated value. An iterative method is used to calculate the internal rate of return. If you can provide only few values, you should provide an initial guess to enable the iteration. - Example - Under the assumption that cell contents are A1=-10000, A2=3500, A3=7600 and A4=1000, the formula =IRR(A1:A4) gives a result of 11,33%. + Example + Under the assumption that cell contents are A1=-10000, A2=3500, A3=7600 and A4=1000, the formula =IRR(A1:A4) gives a result of 11,33%.
calculating; interests for unchanged amortization installments @@ -741,29 +703,26 @@ ISPMT function -ISPMT - Calculates the level of interest for unchanged amortization installments. - Syntax - ISPMT(Rate; Period; TotalPeriods; Invest) - +ISPMT + Calculates the level of interest for unchanged amortization installments. + Syntax + ISPMT(Rate; Period; TotalPeriods; Invest) + Rate sets the periodic interest rate. - + Period is the number of installments for calculation of interest. - + TotalPeriods is the total number of installment periods. - + Invest is the amount of the investment. - Example - For a credit amount of 120,000 currency units with a two-year term and monthly installments, at a yearly interest rate of 12% the level of interest after 1.5 years is required. - + Example + For a credit amount of 120,000 currency units with a two-year term and monthly installments, at a yearly interest rate of 12% the level of interest after 1.5 years is required. + =ISPMT(1%;18;24;120000) = -300 currency units. The monthly interest after 1.5 years amounts to 300 currency units.
-Financial Functions Part Two - Financial Functions Part Three +Financial Functions Part Two + Financial Functions Part Three diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04060105.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04060105.xhp index 662c049048..0a9a1ae53e 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04060105.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04060105.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@ Function Wizard; logical functions; logical functions -Logical Functions - This category contains the Logical functions. +Logical Functions + This category contains the Logical functions.
@@ -42,117 +42,102 @@ AND function -AND - Returns TRUE if all arguments are TRUE. If one of the elements is FALSE, this function returns the FALSE value. - The arguments are either logical expressions themselves (TRUE, 1<5, 2+3=7, B8<10) that return logical values, or arrays (A1:C3) containing logical values. - Syntax - AND(LogicalValue1; LogicalValue2 ...LogicalValue30) - +AND + Returns TRUE if all arguments are TRUE. If one of the elements is FALSE, this function returns the FALSE value. + The arguments are either logical expressions themselves (TRUE, 1<5, 2+3=7, B8<10) that return logical values, or arrays (A1:C3) containing logical values. + Syntax + AND(LogicalValue1; LogicalValue2 ...LogicalValue30) + LogicalValue1; LogicalValue2 ...LogicalValue30 are conditions to be checked. All conditions can be either TRUE or FALSE. If a range is entered as a parameter, the function uses the value from the range that is in the current column or row. The result is TRUE if the logical value in all cells within the cell range is TRUE. - Example - The logical values of entries 12<13; 14>12, and 7<6 are to be checked: - + Example + The logical values of entries 12<13; 14>12, and 7<6 are to be checked: + =AND(12<13;14>12;7<6) returns FALSE. - + =AND (FALSE;TRUE) returns FALSE.
FALSE function -FALSE - Returns the logical value FALSE. The FALSE() function does not require any arguments, and always returns the logical value FALSE. - Syntax - FALSE() - Example - +FALSE + Returns the logical value FALSE. The FALSE() function does not require any arguments, and always returns the logical value FALSE. + Syntax + FALSE() + Example + =FALSE() returns FALSE - + =NOT(FALSE()) returns TRUE
IF function -IF - Specifies a logical test to be performed. - Syntax - IF(Test; ThenValue; OtherwiseValue) - +IF + Specifies a logical test to be performed. + Syntax + IF(Test; ThenValue; OtherwiseValue) + Test is any value or expression that can be TRUE or FALSE. - + ThenValue (optional) is the value that is returned if the logical test is TRUE. - + OtherwiseValue (optional) is the value that is returned if the logical test is FALSE. - + - Examples - + Examples + =IF(A1>5;100;"too small") If the value in A1 is higher than 5, the value 100 is entered in the current cell; otherwise, the text “too small” (without quotes) is entered.
NOT function -NOT - Complements (inverts) a logical value. - Syntax - NOT(LogicalValue) - +NOT + Complements (inverts) a logical value. + Syntax + NOT(LogicalValue) + LogicalValue is any value to be complemented. - Example - + Example + =NOT(A). If A=TRUE then NOT(A) will evaluate FALSE.
OR function -OR - Returns TRUE if at least one argument is TRUE. This function returns the value FALSE, if all the arguments have the logical value FALSE. - The arguments are either logical expressions themselves (TRUE, 1<5, 2+3=7, B8<10) that return logical values, or arrays (A1:C3) containing logical values. - Syntax - OR(LogicalValue1; LogicalValue2 ...LogicalValue30) - +OR + Returns TRUE if at least one argument is TRUE. This function returns the value FALSE, if all the arguments have the logical value FALSE. + The arguments are either logical expressions themselves (TRUE, 1<5, 2+3=7, B8<10) that return logical values, or arrays (A1:C3) containing logical values. + Syntax + OR(LogicalValue1; LogicalValue2 ...LogicalValue30) + LogicalValue1; LogicalValue2 ...LogicalValue30 are conditions to be checked. All conditions can be either TRUE or FALSE. If a range is entered as a parameter, the function uses the value from the range that is in the current column or row.UFI: first try to fix bugtraq 4905779 - Example - The logical values of entries 12<11; 13>22, and 45=45 are to be checked. - + Example + The logical values of entries 12<11; 13>22, and 45=45 are to be checked. + =OR(12<11;13>22;45=45) returns TRUE. - + =OR(FALSE;TRUE) returns TRUE.
TRUE function -TRUE - The logical value is set to TRUE. The TRUE() function does not require any arguments, and always returns the logical value TRUE. - Syntax - TRUE() - Example - If A=TRUE and B=FALSE the following examples appear: - +TRUE + The logical value is set to TRUE. The TRUE() function does not require any arguments, and always returns the logical value TRUE. + Syntax + TRUE() + Example + If A=TRUE and B=FALSE the following examples appear: + =AND(A;B) returns FALSE - + =OR(A;B) returns TRUE - + =NOT(AND(A;B)) returns TRUE
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04060108.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04060108.xhp index 4394377894..82ac7bd9c6 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04060108.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04060108.xhp @@ -31,122 +31,122 @@ Function Wizard; statistics functions; statistics functions -Statistics Functions -This category contains the Statistics functions. +Statistics Functions +This category contains the Statistics functions.
-Some of the examples use the following data table: +Some of the examples use the following data table: -C +C -D +D -2 +2 -x value +x value -y value +y value -3 +3 --5 +-5 --3 +-3 -4 +4 --2 +-2 -0 +0 -5 +5 --1 +-1 -1 +1 -6 +6 -0 +0 -3 +3 -7 +7 -2 +2 -4 +4 -8 +8 -4 +4 -6 +6 -9 +9 -6 +6 -8 +8
-The statistical functions are described in the following subsections. +The statistical functions are described in the following subsections.
- +
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp index 2006c2dcee..bfd4086d79 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@ Function Wizard; spreadsheets functions; spreadsheets -Spreadsheet Functions - This section contains descriptions of the Spreadsheet functions together with an example. +Spreadsheet Functions + This section contains descriptions of the Spreadsheet functions together with an example.
@@ -42,141 +42,131 @@ ADDRESS function -ADDRESS - Returns a cell address (reference) as text, according to the specified row and column numbers. You can determine whether the address is interpreted as an absolute address (for example, $A$1) or as a relative address (as A1) or in a mixed form (A$1 or $A1). You can also specify the name of the sheet. +ADDRESS + Returns a cell address (reference) as text, according to the specified row and column numbers. You can determine whether the address is interpreted as an absolute address (for example, $A$1) or as a relative address (as A1) or in a mixed form (A$1 or $A1). You can also specify the name of the sheet.
- For interoperability the ADDRESS and INDIRECT functions support an optional parameter to specify whether the R1C1 address notation instead of the usual A1 notation should be used. - In ADDRESS, the parameter is inserted as the fourth parameter, shifting the optional sheet name parameter to the fifth position. - In INDIRECT, the parameter is appended as the second parameter. - In both functions, if the argument is inserted with the value 0, then the R1C1 notation is used. If the argument is not given or has a value other than 0, then the A1 notation is used. - In case of R1C1 notation, ADDRESS returns address strings using the exclamation mark '!' as the sheet name separator, and INDIRECT expects the exclamation mark as sheet name separator. Both functions still use the dot '.' sheet name separator with A1 notation. - When opening documents from ODF 1.0/1.1 format, the ADDRESS functions that show a sheet name as the fourth paramater will shift that sheet name to become the fifth parameter. A new fourth parameter with the value 1 will be inserted. - When storing a document in ODF 1.0/1.1 format, if ADDRESS functions have a fourth parameter, that parameter will be removed. - Do not save a spreadsheet in the old ODF 1.0/1.1 format if the ADDRESS function's new fourth parameter was used with a value of 0. - The INDIRECT function is saved without conversion to ODF 1.0/1.1 format. If the second parameter was present, an older version of Calc will return an error for that function. + For interoperability the ADDRESS and INDIRECT functions support an optional parameter to specify whether the R1C1 address notation instead of the usual A1 notation should be used. + In ADDRESS, the parameter is inserted as the fourth parameter, shifting the optional sheet name parameter to the fifth position. + In INDIRECT, the parameter is appended as the second parameter. + In both functions, if the argument is inserted with the value 0, then the R1C1 notation is used. If the argument is not given or has a value other than 0, then the A1 notation is used. + In case of R1C1 notation, ADDRESS returns address strings using the exclamation mark '!' as the sheet name separator, and INDIRECT expects the exclamation mark as sheet name separator. Both functions still use the dot '.' sheet name separator with A1 notation. + When opening documents from ODF 1.0/1.1 format, the ADDRESS functions that show a sheet name as the fourth paramater will shift that sheet name to become the fifth parameter. A new fourth parameter with the value 1 will be inserted. + When storing a document in ODF 1.0/1.1 format, if ADDRESS functions have a fourth parameter, that parameter will be removed. + Do not save a spreadsheet in the old ODF 1.0/1.1 format if the ADDRESS function's new fourth parameter was used with a value of 0. + The INDIRECT function is saved without conversion to ODF 1.0/1.1 format. If the second parameter was present, an older version of Calc will return an error for that function.
- Syntax - ADDRESS(Row; Column; Abs; A1; "Sheet") - + Syntax + ADDRESS(Row; Column; Abs; A1; "Sheet") + Row represents the row number for the cell reference - + Column represents the column number for the cell reference (the number, not the letter) - + Abs determines the type of reference: - 1: absolute ($A$1) - 2: row reference type is absolute; column reference is relative (A$1) - 3: row (relative); column (absolute) ($A1) - 4: relative (A1) - + 1: absolute ($A$1) + 2: row reference type is absolute; column reference is relative (A$1) + 3: row (relative); column (absolute) ($A1) + 4: relative (A1) + A1 (optional) - if set to 0, the R1C1 notation is used. If this parameter is absent or set to another value than 0, the A1 notation is used. - + Sheet represents the name of the sheet. It must be placed in double quotes. - Example: - + Example: + =ADDRESS(1;1;2;;"Sheet2") returns the following: Sheet2.A$1i 101187 - If the cell A1 in sheet 2 contains the value -6, you can refer indirectly to the referenced cell using a function in B2 by entering =ABS(INDIRECT(B2)). The result is the absolute value of the cell reference specified in B2, which in this case is 6. + If the cell A1 in sheet 2 contains the value -6, you can refer indirectly to the referenced cell using a function in B2 by entering =ABS(INDIRECT(B2)). The result is the absolute value of the cell reference specified in B2, which in this case is 6.
AREAS function -AREAS - Returns the number of individual ranges that belong to a multiple range. A range can consist of contiguous cells or a single cell. - The function expects a single argument. If you state multiple ranges, you must enclose them into additional parentheses. Multiple ranges can be entered using the semicolon (;) as divider, but this gets automatically converted to the tilde (~) operator. The tilde is used to join ranges. - Syntax - AREAS(Reference) - Reference represents the reference to a cell or cell range. - Example - +AREAS + Returns the number of individual ranges that belong to a multiple range. A range can consist of contiguous cells or a single cell. + The function expects a single argument. If you state multiple ranges, you must enclose them into additional parentheses. Multiple ranges can be entered using the semicolon (;) as divider, but this gets automatically converted to the tilde (~) operator. The tilde is used to join ranges. + Syntax + AREAS(Reference) + Reference represents the reference to a cell or cell range. + Example + =AREAS((A1:B3;F2;G1)) returns 3, as it is a reference to three cells and/or areas. After entry this gets converted to =AREAS((A1:B3~F2~G1)). - + =AREAS(All) returns 1 if you have defined an area named All under Data - Define Range.
DDE function -DDE - Returns the result of a DDE-based link. If the contents of the linked range or section changes, the returned value will also change. You must reload the spreadsheet or choose Edit - Links to see the updated links. Cross-platform links, for example from a %PRODUCTNAME installation running on a Windows machine to a document created on a Linux machine, are not allowed. - Syntax - DDE("Server"; "File"; "Range"; Mode) - +DDE + Returns the result of a DDE-based link. If the contents of the linked range or section changes, the returned value will also change. You must reload the spreadsheet or choose Edit - Links to see the updated links. Cross-platform links, for example from a %PRODUCTNAME installation running on a Windows machine to a document created on a Linux machine, are not allowed. + Syntax + DDE("Server"; "File"; "Range"; Mode) + Server is the name of a server application. %PRODUCTNAME applications have the server name "soffice". - + File is the complete file name, including path specification. - + Range is the area containing the data to be evaluated. - + Mode is an optional parameter that controls the method by which the DDE server converts its data into numbers. - + Mode - + Effect - 0 or missing + 0 or missing - Number format from the "Default" cell style + Number format from the "Default" cell style - 1 + 1 - Data are always interpreted in the standard format for US English + Data are always interpreted in the standard format for US English - 2 + 2 - Data are retrieved as text; no conversion to numbers + Data are retrieved as text; no conversion to numbers
- Example - + Example + =DDE("soffice";"c:\office\document\data1.ods";"sheet1.A1") reads the contents of cell A1 in sheet1 of the %PRODUCTNAME Calc spreadsheet data1.ods. - + =DDE("soffice";"c:\office\document\motto.odt";"Today's motto") returns a motto in the cell containing this formula. First, you must enter a line in the motto.odt document containing the motto text and define it as the first line of a section named Today's Motto (in %PRODUCTNAME Writer under Insert - Section). If the motto is modified (and saved) in the %PRODUCTNAME Writer document, the motto is updated in all %PRODUCTNAME Calc cells in which this DDE link is defined.
ERRORTYPE function -ERRORTYPE - Returns the number corresponding to an error value occurring in a different cell. With the aid of this number, you can generate an error message text. +ERRORTYPE + Returns the number corresponding to an error value occurring in a different cell. With the aid of this number, you can generate an error message text. - The Status Bar displays the predefined error code from %PRODUCTNAME if you click the cell containing the error. - Syntax - ERRORTYPE(Reference) - + The Status Bar displays the predefined error code from %PRODUCTNAME if you click the cell containing the error. + Syntax + ERRORTYPE(Reference) + Reference contains the address of the cell in which the error occurs. - Example - If cell A1 displays Err:518, the function =ERRORTYPE(A1) returns the number 518. + Example + If cell A1 displays Err:518, the function =ERRORTYPE(A1) returns the number 518.
@@ -186,107 +176,95 @@ INDEX function -INDEX - INDEX returns a sub range, specified by row and column number, or an optional range index. Depending on context, INDEX returns a reference or content.UFI: will change with i4904; see http://so-web.germany.sun.com/iBIS/servlet/edit.ControlPanel?tid=i57108changed by i83070 - Syntax - INDEX(Reference; Row; Column; Range) - +INDEX + INDEX returns a sub range, specified by row and column number, or an optional range index. Depending on context, INDEX returns a reference or content.UFI: will change with i4904; see http://so-web.germany.sun.com/iBIS/servlet/edit.ControlPanel?tid=i57108changed by i83070 + Syntax + INDEX(Reference; Row; Column; Range) + Reference is a reference, entered either directly or by specifying a range name. If the reference consists of multiple ranges, you must enclose the reference or range name in parentheses. - + Row (optional) represents the row index of the reference range, for which to return a value. In case of zero (no specific row) all referenced rows are returned. - + Column (optional) represents the column index of the reference range, for which to return a value. In case of zero (no specific column) all referenced columns are returned. - + Range (optional) represents the index of the subrange if referring to a multiple range. - Example - + Example + =INDEX(Prices;4;1) returns the value from row 4 and column 1 of the database range defined in Data - Define as Prices. - + =INDEX(SumX;4;1) returns the value from the range SumX in row 4 and column 1 as defined in Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Define. - + =INDEX(A1:B6;1) returns a reference to the first row of A1:B6. - + =INDEX(A1:B6;0;1) returns a reference to the first column of A1:B6. - + =INDEX((multi);4;1) indicates the value contained in row 4 and column 1 of the (multiple) range, which you named under Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Define as multi. The multiple range may consist of several rectangular ranges, each with a row 4 and column 1. If you now want to call the second block of this multiple range enter the number 2 as the range parameter. - + =INDEX(A1:B6;1;1) indicates the value in the upper-left of the A1:B6 range. - + =INDEX((multi);0;0;2) returns a reference to the second range of the multiple range.
INDIRECT function -INDIRECT - Returns the reference specified by a text string. This function can also be used to return the area of a corresponding string. +INDIRECT + Returns the reference specified by a text string. This function can also be used to return the area of a corresponding string. - Syntax - INDIRECT(Ref; A1) - + Syntax + INDIRECT(Ref; A1) + Ref represents a reference to a cell or an area (in text form) for which to return the contents. - + A1 (optional) - if set to 0, the R1C1 notation is used. If this parameter is absent or set to another value than 0, the A1 notation is used. - If you open an Excel spreadsheet that uses indirect addresses calculated from string functions, the sheet addresses will not be translated automatically. For example, the Excel address in INDIRECT("filename!sheetname"&B1) is not converted into the Calc address in INDIRECT("filename.sheetname"&B1).UFI: for #i34465# - Example - + If you open an Excel spreadsheet that uses indirect addresses calculated from string functions, the sheet addresses will not be translated automatically. For example, the Excel address in INDIRECT("filename!sheetname"&B1) is not converted into the Calc address in INDIRECT("filename.sheetname"&B1).UFI: for #i34465# + Example + =INDIRECT(A1) equals 100 if A1 contains C108 as a reference and cell C108 contains a value of 100. - + =SUM(INDIRECT("a1:" & ADDRESS(1;3))) totals the cells in the area of A1 up to the cell with the address defined by row 1 and column 3. This means that area A1:C1 is totaled.
COLUMN function -COLUMN - Returns the column number of a cell reference. If the reference is a cell the column number of the cell is returned; if the parameter is a cell area, the corresponding column numbers are returned in a single-row array if the formula is entered as an array formula. If the COLUMN function with an area reference parameter is not used for an array formula, only the column number of the first cell within the area is determined. - Syntax - COLUMN(Reference) - +COLUMN + Returns the column number of a cell reference. If the reference is a cell the column number of the cell is returned; if the parameter is a cell area, the corresponding column numbers are returned in a single-row array if the formula is entered as an array formula. If the COLUMN function with an area reference parameter is not used for an array formula, only the column number of the first cell within the area is determined. + Syntax + COLUMN(Reference) + Reference is the reference to a cell or cell area whose first column number is to be found. - If no reference is entered, the column number of the cell in which the formula is entered is found. %PRODUCTNAME Calc automatically sets the reference to the current cell. - Example - + If no reference is entered, the column number of the cell in which the formula is entered is found. %PRODUCTNAME Calc automatically sets the reference to the current cell. + Example + =COLUMN(A1) equals 1. Column A is the first column in the table. - + =COLUMN(C3:E3) equals 3. Column C is the third column in the table. - + =COLUMN(D3:G10) returns 4 because column D is the fourth column in the table and the COLUMN function is not used as an array formula. (In this case, the first value of the array is always used as the result.) - + {=COLUMN(B2:B7)} and =COLUMN(B2:B7) both return 2 because the reference only contains column B as the second column in the table. Because single-column areas have only one column number, it does not make a difference whether or not the formula is used as an array formula. - + =COLUMN() returns 3 if the formula was entered in column C. - + {=COLUMN(Rabbit)} returns the single-row array (3, 4) if "Rabbit" is the named area (C1:D3).
COLUMNS function -COLUMNS - Returns the number of columns in the given reference. - Syntax - COLUMNS(Array) - +COLUMNS + Returns the number of columns in the given reference. + Syntax + COLUMNS(Array) + Array is the reference to a cell range whose total number of columns is to be found. The argument can also be a single cell. - Example - + Example + =COLUMNS(B5) returns 1 because a cell only contains one column. - + =COLUMNS(A1:C5) equals 3. The reference comprises three columns. - + =COLUMNS(Rabbit) returns 2 if Rabbit is the named range (C1:D3).
@@ -294,47 +272,41 @@ VLOOKUP function -VLOOKUP - Vertical search with reference to adjacent cells to the right. This function checks if a specific value is contained in the first column of an array. The function then returns the value in the same row of the column named by Index. If the Sorted parameter is omitted or set to TRUE or one, it is assumed that the data is sorted in ascending order. In this case, if the exact SearchCriterion is not found, the last value that is smaller than the criterion will be returned. If Sorted is set to FALSE or zero, an exact match must be found, otherwise the error Error: Value Not Available will be the result. Thus with a value of zero the data does not need to be sorted in ascending order. +VLOOKUP + Vertical search with reference to adjacent cells to the right. This function checks if a specific value is contained in the first column of an array. The function then returns the value in the same row of the column named by Index. If the Sorted parameter is omitted or set to TRUE or one, it is assumed that the data is sorted in ascending order. In this case, if the exact SearchCriterion is not found, the last value that is smaller than the criterion will be returned. If Sorted is set to FALSE or zero, an exact match must be found, otherwise the error Error: Value Not Available will be the result. Thus with a value of zero the data does not need to be sorted in ascending order. - Syntax - =VLOOKUP(SearchCriterion; Array; Index; Sorted) - + Syntax + =VLOOKUP(SearchCriterion; Array; Index; Sorted) + SearchCriterion is the value searched for in the first column of the array. - + Array is the reference, which is to comprise at least two columns. - + Index is the number of the column in the array that contains the value to be returned. The first column has the number 1. - + Sorted is an optional parameter that indicates whether the first column in the array is sorted in ascending order. Enter the Boolean value FALSE or zero if the first column is not sorted in ascending order. Sorted columns can be searched much faster and the function always returns a value, even if the search value was not matched exactly, if it is between the lowest and highest value of the sorted list. In unsorted lists, the search value must be matched exactly. Otherwise the function will return this message: Error: Value Not Available. - Example - You want to enter the number of a dish on the menu in cell A1, and the name of the dish is to appear as text in the neighboring cell (B1) immediately. The Number to Name assignment is contained in the D1:E100 array. D1 contains 100, E1 contains the name Vegetable Soup, and so forth, for 100 menu items. The numbers in column D are sorted in ascending order; thus, the optional Sorted parameter is not necessary. - Enter the following formula in B1: - + Example + You want to enter the number of a dish on the menu in cell A1, and the name of the dish is to appear as text in the neighboring cell (B1) immediately. The Number to Name assignment is contained in the D1:E100 array. D1 contains 100, E1 contains the name Vegetable Soup, and so forth, for 100 menu items. The numbers in column D are sorted in ascending order; thus, the optional Sorted parameter is not necessary. + Enter the following formula in B1: + =VLOOKUP(A1;D1:E100;2) - As soon as you enter a number in A1 B1 will show the corresponding text contained in the second column of reference D1:E100. Entering a nonexistent number displays the text with the next number down. To prevent this, enter FALSE as the last parameter in the formula so that an error message is generated when a nonexistent number is entered. + As soon as you enter a number in A1 B1 will show the corresponding text contained in the second column of reference D1:E100. Entering a nonexistent number displays the text with the next number down. To prevent this, enter FALSE as the last parameter in the formula so that an error message is generated when a nonexistent number is entered.
sheet numbers; looking up SHEET function -SHEET - Returns the sheet number of a reference or a string representing a sheet name. If you do not enter any parameters, the result is the sheet number of the spreadsheet containing the formula. - Syntax - SHEET(Reference) - +SHEET + Returns the sheet number of a reference or a string representing a sheet name. If you do not enter any parameters, the result is the sheet number of the spreadsheet containing the formula. + Syntax + SHEET(Reference) + Reference is optional and is the reference to a cell, an area, or a sheet name string. - Example - + Example + =SHEET(Sheet2.A1) returns 2 if Sheet2 is the second sheet in the spreadsheet document.
@@ -342,81 +314,72 @@ SHEETS function -SHEETS - Determines the number of sheets in a reference. If you do not enter any parameters, it returns the number of sheets in the current document. - Syntax - SHEETS(Reference) - +SHEETS + Determines the number of sheets in a reference. If you do not enter any parameters, it returns the number of sheets in the current document. + Syntax + SHEETS(Reference) + Reference is the reference to a sheet or an area. This parameter is optional. - Example - + Example + =SHEETS(Sheet1.A1:Sheet3.G12) returns 3 if Sheet1, Sheet2, and Sheet3 exist in the sequence indicated.
MATCH function -MATCH - Returns the relative position of an item in an array that matches a specified value. The function returns the position of the value found in the lookup_array as a number. - Syntax - MATCH(SearchCriterion; LookupArray; Type) - +MATCH + Returns the relative position of an item in an array that matches a specified value. The function returns the position of the value found in the lookup_array as a number. + Syntax + MATCH(SearchCriterion; LookupArray; Type) + SearchCriterion is the value which is to be searched for in the single-row or single-column array. - + LookupArray is the reference searched. A lookup array can be a single row or column, or part of a single row or column. - + Type may take the values 1, 0, or -1. If Type = 1 or if this optional parameter is missing, it is assumed that the first column of the search array is sorted in ascending order. If Type = -1 it is assumed that the column in sorted in descending order. This corresponds to the same function in Microsoft Excel. - If Type = 0, only exact matches are found. If the search criterion is found more than once, the function returns the index of the first matching value. Only if Type = 0 can you search for regular expressions (if enabled in calculation options) or wildcards (if enabled in calculation options). - If Type = 1 or the third parameter is missing, the index of the last value that is smaller or equal to the search criterion is returned. This applies even when the search array is not sorted. For Type = -1, the first value that is larger or equal is returned. + If Type = 0, only exact matches are found. If the search criterion is found more than once, the function returns the index of the first matching value. Only if Type = 0 can you search for regular expressions (if enabled in calculation options) or wildcards (if enabled in calculation options). + If Type = 1 or the third parameter is missing, the index of the last value that is smaller or equal to the search criterion is returned. This applies even when the search array is not sorted. For Type = -1, the first value that is larger or equal is returned. - Example - + Example + =MATCH(200;D1:D100) searches the area D1:D100, which is sorted by column D, for the value 200. As soon as this value is reached, the number of the row in which it was found is returned. If a higher value is found during the search in the column, the number of the previous row is returned.
OFFSET function -OFFSET - Returns the value of a cell offset by a certain number of rows and columns from a given reference point. - Syntax - OFFSET(Reference; Rows; Columns; Height; Width) - +OFFSET + Returns the value of a cell offset by a certain number of rows and columns from a given reference point. + Syntax + OFFSET(Reference; Rows; Columns; Height; Width) + Reference is the reference from which the function searches for the new reference. - + Rows is the number of rows by which the reference was corrected up (negative value) or down. Use 0 to stay in the same row. - + Columns is the number of columns by which the reference was corrected to the left (negative value) or to the right. Use 0 to stay in the same column - + Height (optional) is the vertical height for an area that starts at the new reference position. - + Width (optional) is the horizontal width for an area that starts at the new reference position. - Arguments Rows and Columns must not lead to zero or negative start row or column. - Arguments Height and Width must not lead to zero or negative count of rows or columns. - + Arguments Rows and Columns must not lead to zero or negative start row or column. + Arguments Height and Width must not lead to zero or negative count of rows or columns. + - Example - + Example + =OFFSET(A1;2;2) returns the value in cell C3 (A1 moved by two rows and two columns down). If C3 contains the value 100 this function returns the value 100. - + =OFFSET(B2:C3;1;1) returns a reference to B2:C3 moved down by 1 row and one column to the right (C3:D4). - + =OFFSET(B2:C3;-1;-1) returns a reference to B2:C3 moved up by 1 row and one column to the left (A1:B2). - + =OFFSET(B2:C3;0;0;3;4) returns a reference to B2:C3 resized to 3 rows and 4 columns (B2:E4). - + =OFFSET(B2:C3;1;0;3;4) returns a reference to B2:C3 moved down by one row resized to 3 rows and 4 columns (B3:E5). - + =SUM(OFFSET(A1;2;2;5;6)) determines the total of the area that starts in cell C3 and has a height of 5 rows and a width of 6 columns (area=C3:H7). If the width or height is included, the OFFSET function returns a range and thus must be entered as an array formula. If both the width and height are missing, a cell reference is returned.
@@ -424,194 +387,177 @@ LOOKUP function -LOOKUP - Returns the contents of a cell either from a one-row or one-column range. Optionally, the assigned value (of the same index) is returned in a different column and row. As opposed to VLOOKUP and HLOOKUP, search and result vector may be at different positions; they do not have to be adjacent. Additionally, the search vector for the LOOKUP must be sorted ascending, otherwise the search will not return any usable results. - If LOOKUP cannot find the search criterion, it matches the largest value in the search vector that is less than or equal to the search criterion. +LOOKUP + Returns the contents of a cell either from a one-row or one-column range. Optionally, the assigned value (of the same index) is returned in a different column and row. As opposed to VLOOKUP and HLOOKUP, search and result vector may be at different positions; they do not have to be adjacent. Additionally, the search vector for the LOOKUP must be sorted ascending, otherwise the search will not return any usable results. + If LOOKUP cannot find the search criterion, it matches the largest value in the search vector that is less than or equal to the search criterion. - Syntax - LOOKUP(SearchCriterion; SearchVector; ResultVector) - + Syntax + LOOKUP(SearchCriterion; SearchVector; ResultVector) + SearchCriterion is the value to be searched for; entered either directly or as a reference. - + SearchVector is the single-row or single-column area to be searched. - + ResultVector is another single-row or single-column range from which the result of the function is taken. The result is the cell of the result vector with the same index as the instance found in the search vector. - Example - + Example + =LOOKUP(A1;D1:D100;F1:F100) searches the corresponding cell in range D1:D100 for the number you entered in A1. For the instance found, the index is determined, for example, the 12th cell in this range. Then, the contents of the 12th cell are returned as the value of the function (in the result vector).
STYLE function -STYLE - Applies a style to the cell containing the formula. After a set amount of time, another style can be applied. This function always returns the value 0, allowing you to add it to another function without changing the value. Together with the CURRENT function you can apply a color to a cell regardless of the value. For example: =...+STYLE(IF(CURRENT()>3;"red";"green")) applies the style "red" to the cell if the value is greater than 3, otherwise the style "green" is applied. Both cell formats have to be defined beforehand. - Syntax - STYLE("Style"; Time; "Style2") - +STYLE + Applies a style to the cell containing the formula. After a set amount of time, another style can be applied. This function always returns the value 0, allowing you to add it to another function without changing the value. Together with the CURRENT function you can apply a color to a cell regardless of the value. For example: =...+STYLE(IF(CURRENT()>3;"red";"green")) applies the style "red" to the cell if the value is greater than 3, otherwise the style "green" is applied. Both cell formats have to be defined beforehand. + Syntax + STYLE("Style"; Time; "Style2") + Style is the name of a cell style assigned to the cell. Style names must be entered in quotation marks. - + Time is an optional time range in seconds. If this parameter is missing the style will not be changed after a certain amount of time has passed. - + Style2 is the optional name of a cell style assigned to the cell after a certain amount of time has passed. If this parameter is missing "Default" is assumed. - + - Example - + Example + =STYLE("Invisible";60;"Default") formats the cell in transparent format for 60 seconds after the document was recalculated or loaded, then the Default format is assigned. Both cell formats have to be defined beforehand. - Since STYLE() has a numeric return value of zero, this return value gets appended to a string. This can be avoided using T() as in the following example - + Since STYLE() has a numeric return value of zero, this return value gets appended to a string. This can be avoided using T() as in the following example + ="Text"&T(STYLE("myStyle")) - See also CURRENT() for another example. + See also CURRENT() for another example.
CHOOSE function -CHOOSE - Uses an index to return a value from a list of up to 30 values. - Syntax - CHOOSE(Index; Value1; ...; Value30) - +CHOOSE + Uses an index to return a value from a list of up to 30 values. + Syntax + CHOOSE(Index; Value1; ...; Value30) + Index is a reference or number between 1 and 30 indicating which value is to be taken from the list. - + Value1...Value30 is the list of values entered as a reference to a cell or as individual values. - Example - + Example + =CHOOSE(A1;B1;B2;B3;"Today";"Yesterday";"Tomorrow"), for example, returns the contents of cell B2 for A1 = 2; for A1 = 4, the function returns the text "Today".
HLOOKUP function -HLOOKUP - Searches for a value and reference to the cells below the selected area. This function verifies if the first row of an array contains a certain value. The function returns then the value in a row of the array, named in the Index, in the same column. +HLOOKUP + Searches for a value and reference to the cells below the selected area. This function verifies if the first row of an array contains a certain value. The function returns then the value in a row of the array, named in the Index, in the same column. - Syntax - HLOOKUP(SearchCriterion; Array; Index; Sorted) - See also: VLOOKUP (columns and rows are exchanged) + Syntax + HLOOKUP(SearchCriterion; Array; Index; Sorted) + See also: VLOOKUP (columns and rows are exchanged)
ROW function -ROW - Returns the row number of a cell reference. If the reference is a cell, it returns the row number of the cell. If the reference is a cell range, it returns the corresponding row numbers in a one-column Array if the formula is entered as an array formula. If the ROW function with a range reference is not used in an array formula, only the row number of the first range cell will be returned. - Syntax - ROW(Reference) - +ROW + Returns the row number of a cell reference. If the reference is a cell, it returns the row number of the cell. If the reference is a cell range, it returns the corresponding row numbers in a one-column Array if the formula is entered as an array formula. If the ROW function with a range reference is not used in an array formula, only the row number of the first range cell will be returned. + Syntax + ROW(Reference) + Reference is a cell, an area, or the name of an area. - If you do not indicate a reference, the row number of the cell in which the formula is entered will be found. %PRODUCTNAME Calc automatically sets the reference to the current cell. - Example - + If you do not indicate a reference, the row number of the cell in which the formula is entered will be found. %PRODUCTNAME Calc automatically sets the reference to the current cell. + Example + =ROW(B3) returns 3 because the reference refers to the third row in the table. - + {=ROW(D5:D8)} returns the single-column array (5, 6, 7, 8) because the reference specified contains rows 5 through 8. - + =ROW(D5:D8) returns 5 because the ROW function is not used as array formula and only the number of the first row of the reference is returned. - + {=ROW(A1:E1)} and =ROW(A1:E1) both return 1 because the reference only contains row 1 as the first row in the table. (Because single-row areas only have one row number it does not make any difference whether or not the formula is used as an array formula.) - + =ROW() returns 3 if the formula was entered in row 3. - + {=ROW(Rabbit)} returns the single-column array (1, 2, 3) if "Rabbit" is the named area (C1:D3).
ROWS function -ROWS - Returns the number of rows in a reference or array. - Syntax - ROWS(Array) - +ROWS + Returns the number of rows in a reference or array. + Syntax + ROWS(Array) + Array is the reference or named area whose total number of rows is to be determined. - Example - + Example + =Rows(B5) returns 1 because a cell only contains one row. - + =ROWS(A10:B12) returns 3. - + =ROWS(Rabbit) returns 3 if "Rabbit" is the named area (C1:D3).
HYPERLINK function -HYPERLINK - When you click a cell that contains the HYPERLINK function, the hyperlink opens. - If you use the optional CellText parameter, the formula locates the URL, and then displays the text or number. - To open a hyperlinked cell with the keyboard, select the cell, press F2 to enter the Edit mode, move the cursor in front of the hyperlink, press Shift+F10, and then choose Open Hyperlink. - Syntax - HYPERLINK("URL") or HYPERLINK("URL"; "CellText") - +HYPERLINK + When you click a cell that contains the HYPERLINK function, the hyperlink opens. + If you use the optional CellText parameter, the formula locates the URL, and then displays the text or number. + To open a hyperlinked cell with the keyboard, select the cell, press F2 to enter the Edit mode, move the cursor in front of the hyperlink, press Shift+F10, and then choose Open Hyperlink. + Syntax + HYPERLINK("URL") or HYPERLINK("URL"; "CellText") + URL specifies the link target. The optional CellText parameter is the text or a number that is displayed in the cell and will be returned as the result. If the CellText parameter is not specified, the URL is displayed in the cell text and will be returned as the result. - The number 0 is returned for empty cells and matrix elements. - Example - + The number 0 is returned for empty cells and matrix elements. + Example + =HYPERLINK("http://www.example.org") displays the text "http://www.example.org" in the cell and executes the hyperlink http://www.example.org when clicked. - + =HYPERLINK("http://www.example.org";"Click here") displays the text "Click here" in the cell and executes the hyperlink http://www.example.org when clicked. - =HYPERLINK("http://www.example.org";12345) displays the number 12345 and executes the hyperlink http://www.example.org when clicked. - + =HYPERLINK("http://www.example.org";12345) displays the number 12345 and executes the hyperlink http://www.example.org when clicked. + =HYPERLINK($B4) where cell B4 contains http://www.example.org. The function adds http://www.example.org to the URL of the hyperlink cell and returns the same text which is used as formula result. - + =HYPERLINK("http://www.";"Click ") & "example.org" displays the text Click example.org in the cell and executes the hyperlink http://www.example.org when clicked. - + =HYPERLINK("#Sheet1.A1";"Go to top") displays the text Go to top and jumps to cell Sheet1.A1 in this document. - + =HYPERLINK("file:///C:/writer.odt#Specification";"Go to Writer bookmark")displays the text Go to Writer bookmark, loads the specified text document and jumps to bookmark "Specification".
GETPIVOTDATA function -GETPIVOTDATA - The GETPIVOTDATA function returns a result value from a pivot table. The value is addressed using field and item names, so it remains valid if the layout of the pivot table changes. - Syntax - Two different syntax definitions can be used: - GETPIVOTDATA(TargetField; pivot table; [ Field 1; Item 1; ... ]) - GETPIVOTDATA(pivot table; Constraints) - The second syntax is assumed if exactly two parameters are given, of which the first parameter is a cell or cell range reference. The first syntax is assumed in all other cases. The Function Wizard shows the first syntax. - First Syntax - +GETPIVOTDATA + The GETPIVOTDATA function returns a result value from a pivot table. The value is addressed using field and item names, so it remains valid if the layout of the pivot table changes. + Syntax + Two different syntax definitions can be used: + GETPIVOTDATA(TargetField; pivot table; [ Field 1; Item 1; ... ]) + GETPIVOTDATA(pivot table; Constraints) + The second syntax is assumed if exactly two parameters are given, of which the first parameter is a cell or cell range reference. The first syntax is assumed in all other cases. The Function Wizard shows the first syntax. + First Syntax + TargetField is a string that selects one of the pivot table's data fields. The string can be the name of the source column, or the data field name as shown in the table (like "Sum - Sales"). - + pivot table is a reference to a cell or cell range that is positioned within a pivot table or contains a pivot table. If the cell range contains several pivot tables, the table that was created last is used. - If no Field n / Item n pairs are given, the grand total is returned. Otherwise, each pair adds a constraint that the result must satisfy. Field n is the name of a field from the pivot table. Item n is the name of an item from that field. - If the pivot table contains only a single result value that fulfills all of the constraints, or a subtotal result that summarizes all matching values, that result is returned. If there is no matching result, or several ones without a subtotal for them, an error is returned. These conditions apply to results that are included in the pivot table. - If the source data contains entries that are hidden by settings of the pivot table, they are ignored. The order of the Field/Item pairs is not significant. Field and item names are not case-sensitive. - If no constraint for a page field is given, the field's selected value is implicitly used. If a constraint for a page field is given, it must match the field's selected value, or an error is returned. Page fields are the fields at the top left of a pivot table, populated using the "Page Fields" area of the pivot table layout dialog. From each page field, an item (value) can be selected, which means only that item is included in the calculation. - Subtotal values from the pivot table are only used if they use the function "auto" (except when specified in the constraint, see Second Syntax below). - Second Syntax - + If no Field n / Item n pairs are given, the grand total is returned. Otherwise, each pair adds a constraint that the result must satisfy. Field n is the name of a field from the pivot table. Item n is the name of an item from that field. + If the pivot table contains only a single result value that fulfills all of the constraints, or a subtotal result that summarizes all matching values, that result is returned. If there is no matching result, or several ones without a subtotal for them, an error is returned. These conditions apply to results that are included in the pivot table. + If the source data contains entries that are hidden by settings of the pivot table, they are ignored. The order of the Field/Item pairs is not significant. Field and item names are not case-sensitive. + If no constraint for a page field is given, the field's selected value is implicitly used. If a constraint for a page field is given, it must match the field's selected value, or an error is returned. Page fields are the fields at the top left of a pivot table, populated using the "Page Fields" area of the pivot table layout dialog. From each page field, an item (value) can be selected, which means only that item is included in the calculation. + Subtotal values from the pivot table are only used if they use the function "auto" (except when specified in the constraint, see Second Syntax below). + Second Syntax + pivot table has the same meaning as in the first syntax. - + Constraints is a space-separated list. Entries can be quoted (single quotes). The whole string must be enclosed in quotes (double quotes), unless you reference the string from another cell. - One of the entries can be the data field name. The data field name can be left out if the pivot table contains only one data field, otherwise it must be present. - Each of the other entries specifies a constraint in the form Field[Item] (with literal characters [ and ]), or only Item if the item name is unique within all fields that are used in the pivot table.i82342 - A function name can be added in the form Field[Item;Function], which will cause the constraint to match only subtotal values which use that function. The possible function names are Sum, Count, Average, Max, Min, Product, Count (Numbers only), StDev (Sample), StDevP (Population), Var (Sample), and VarP (Population), case-insensitive.UFI: Example from spec doc is quite difficult to localize. Try to find other one + One of the entries can be the data field name. The data field name can be left out if the pivot table contains only one data field, otherwise it must be present. + Each of the other entries specifies a constraint in the form Field[Item] (with literal characters [ and ]), or only Item if the item name is unique within all fields that are used in the pivot table.i82342 + A function name can be added in the form Field[Item;Function], which will cause the constraint to match only subtotal values which use that function. The possible function names are Sum, Count, Average, Max, Min, Product, Count (Numbers only), StDev (Sample), StDevP (Population), Var (Sample), and VarP (Population), case-insensitive.UFI: Example from spec doc is quite difficult to localize. Try to find other one
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04060111.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04060111.xhp index 6a302b9980..cea355cbf5 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04060111.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04060111.xhp @@ -31,46 +31,46 @@ functions; add-in functions Function Wizard; add-ins -Add-in Functions -The following describes and lists some of the available add-in functions. +Add-in Functions +The following describes and lists some of the available add-in functions. -Add-in concept -You will also find a description of the $[officename] Calc add-in interface in the Help. In addition, important functions and their parameters are described in the Help for the Shared Library +Add-in concept +You will also find a description of the $[officename] Calc add-in interface in the Help. In addition, important functions and their parameters are described in the Help for the Shared Library $[officename] Calc add-in DLL. -Add-ins supplied -$[officename] contains examples for the add-in interface of $[officename] Calc. -Analysis Functions Part One -Analysis Functions Part Two +Add-ins supplied +$[officename] contains examples for the add-in interface of $[officename] Calc. +Analysis Functions Part One +Analysis Functions Part Two
ISLEAPYEAR function leap year determination mw added one entry -ISLEAPYEAR -Determines whether a year is a leap year. If yes, the function will return the value 1 (TRUE); if not, it will return 0 (FALSE). -Syntax -ISLEAPYEAR(Date) - +ISLEAPYEAR +Determines whether a year is a leap year. If yes, the function will return the value 1 (TRUE); if not, it will return 0 (FALSE). +Syntax +ISLEAPYEAR(Date) + Date specifies whether a given date falls within a leap year. The Date parameter must be a valid date. -Example -=ISLEAPYEAR(A1) returns 1, if A1 contains 1968-02-29, the valid date 29th of February 1968 in your locale setting. -You may also use =ISLEAPYEAR(DATE(1968;2;29)) or =ISLEAPYEAR("1968-02-29") giving the date string in the ISO 8601 notation. -Never use =ISLEAPYEAR(2/29/68), because this would first evaluate 2 divided by 29 divided by 68, and then calculate the ISLEAPYEAR function from this small number as a serial date number. +Example +=ISLEAPYEAR(A1) returns 1, if A1 contains 1968-02-29, the valid date 29th of February 1968 in your locale setting. +You may also use =ISLEAPYEAR(DATE(1968;2;29)) or =ISLEAPYEAR("1968-02-29") giving the date string in the ISO 8601 notation. +Never use =ISLEAPYEAR(2/29/68), because this would first evaluate 2 divided by 29 divided by 68, and then calculate the ISLEAPYEAR function from this small number as a serial date number.
YEARS function number of years between two dates mw added one entry -YEARS -Calculates the difference in years between two dates. -Syntax -YEARS(StartDate; EndDate; Type) - +YEARS +Calculates the difference in years between two dates. +Syntax +YEARS(StartDate; EndDate; Type) + StartDate is the first date - + EndDate is the second date - + Type calculates the type of difference. Possible values are 0 (interval) and 1 (in calendar years).
@@ -78,15 +78,15 @@ number of months between two dates mw added one entry -MONTHS -Calculates the difference in months between two dates. -Syntax -MONTHS(StartDate; EndDate; Type) - +MONTHS +Calculates the difference in months between two dates. +Syntax +MONTHS(StartDate; EndDate; Type) + StartDate is the first date - + EndDate is the second date - + Type calculates the type of difference. Possible values include 0 (interval) and 1 (in calendar months).
@@ -94,11 +94,11 @@ encrypting text mw added one entry -ROT13 -Encrypts a character string by moving the characters 13 positions in the alphabet. After the letter Z, the alphabet begins again (Rotation). By applying the encryption function again to the resulting code, you can decrypt the text. -Syntax -ROT13(Text) - +ROT13 +Encrypts a character string by moving the characters 13 positions in the alphabet. After the letter Z, the alphabet begins again (Rotation). By applying the encryption function again to the resulting code, you can decrypt the text. +Syntax +ROT13(Text) + Text is the character string to be encrypted. ROT13(ROT13(Text)) decrypts the code.
@@ -106,43 +106,43 @@ number of days; in a specific year mw added one entry -DAYSINYEAR -Calculates the number of days of the year in which the date entered occurs. -Syntax -DAYSINYEAR(Date) - +DAYSINYEAR +Calculates the number of days of the year in which the date entered occurs. +Syntax +DAYSINYEAR(Date) + Date is any date in the respective year. The Date parameter must be a valid date according to the locale settings of %PRODUCTNAME. -Example -=DAYSINYEAR(A1) returns 366 days if A1 contains 1968-02-29, a valid date for the year 1968. +Example +=DAYSINYEAR(A1) returns 366 days if A1 contains 1968-02-29, a valid date for the year 1968.
DAYSINMONTH function number of days;in a specific month of a year mw added one entry -DAYSINMONTH -Calculates the number of days of the month in which the date entered occurs. -Syntax -DAYSINMONTH(Date) - +DAYSINMONTH +Calculates the number of days of the month in which the date entered occurs. +Syntax +DAYSINMONTH(Date) + Date is any date in the respective month of the desired year. The Date parameter must be a valid date according to the locale settings of %PRODUCTNAME. -Example -=DAYSINMONTH(A1) returns 29 days if A1 contains 1968-02-17, a valid date for February 1968. +Example +=DAYSINMONTH(A1) returns 29 days if A1 contains 1968-02-17, a valid date for February 1968.
WEEKS function number of weeks;between two dates mw added one entry -WEEKS -Calculates the difference in weeks between two dates. -Syntax -WEEKS(StartDate; EndDate; Type) - +WEEKS +Calculates the difference in weeks between two dates. +Syntax +WEEKS(StartDate; EndDate; Type) + StartDate is the first date - + EndDate is the second date - + Type calculates the type of difference. The possible values are 0 (interval) and 1 (in numbers of weeks).
@@ -150,18 +150,18 @@ number of weeks;in a specific year mw added one entry -WEEKSINYEAR -Calculates the number of weeks of the year in which the date entered occurs. The number of weeks is defined as follows: a week that spans two years is added to the year in which most days of that week occur. -Syntax -WEEKSINYEAR(Date) - +WEEKSINYEAR +Calculates the number of weeks of the year in which the date entered occurs. The number of weeks is defined as follows: a week that spans two years is added to the year in which most days of that week occur. +Syntax +WEEKSINYEAR(Date) + Date is any date in the respective year. The Date parameter must be a valid date according to the locale settings of %PRODUCTNAME. -Example -WEEKSINYEAR(A1) returns 53 if A1 contains 1970-02-17, a valid date for the year 1970. +Example +WEEKSINYEAR(A1) returns 53 if A1 contains 1970-02-17, a valid date for the year 1970.
-Add-ins through %PRODUCTNAME API -Add-ins can also be implemented through the %PRODUCTNAME API. +Add-ins through %PRODUCTNAME API +Add-ins can also be implemented through the %PRODUCTNAME API.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04060112.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04060112.xhp index 2052e56c9b..f2a37c0b57 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04060112.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04060112.xhp @@ -36,666 +36,666 @@ functions; $[officename] Calc add-in DLL add-ins; for programming mw made "external..." a one level entry and deleted one "functions;..." entry -Add-in for Programming in $[officename] Calc -The method of extending Calc by Add-Ins that is described in the following is outdated. The interfaces are still valid and supported, to ensure compatibility with existing Add-Ins, but for programming new Add-Ins you should use the new API functions. -$[officename] Calc can be expanded by Add-Ins, which are external programming modules providing additional functions for working with spreadsheets. These are listed in the Function Wizard in the Add-In category. If you would like to program an Add-In yourself, you can learn here which functions must be exported by the shared library +Add-in for Programming in $[officename] Calc +The method of extending Calc by Add-Ins that is described in the following is outdated. The interfaces are still valid and supported, to ensure compatibility with existing Add-Ins, but for programming new Add-Ins you should use the new API functions. +$[officename] Calc can be expanded by Add-Ins, which are external programming modules providing additional functions for working with spreadsheets. These are listed in the Function Wizard in the Add-In category. If you would like to program an Add-In yourself, you can learn here which functions must be exported by the shared library external DLL so that the Add-In can be successfully attached. -$[officename] searches the Add-in folder defined in the configuration for a suitable shared library +$[officename] searches the Add-in folder defined in the configuration for a suitable shared library DLL. To be recognized by $[officename], the shared library DLL must have certain properties, as explained in the following. This information allows you to program your own Add-In for Function Wizard of $[officename] Calc.
-The Add-In Concept -Each Add-In library provides several functions. Some functions are used for administrative purposes. You can choose almost any name for your own functions. However, they must also follow certain rules regarding parameter passing. The exact naming and calling conventions vary for different platforms. +The Add-In Concept +Each Add-In library provides several functions. Some functions are used for administrative purposes. You can choose almost any name for your own functions. However, they must also follow certain rules regarding parameter passing. The exact naming and calling conventions vary for different platforms.
-Functions of Shared Library +Functions of Shared Library AddIn DLL -At a minimum, the administrative functions GetFunctionCount and GetFunctionData must exist. Using these, the functions as well as parameter types and return values can be determined. As return values, the Double and String types are supported. As parameters, additionally the cell areas Double Array, String Array, and Cell Array are supported. -Parameters are passed using references. Therefore, a change of these values is basically possible. However, this is not supported in $[officename] Calc because it does not make sense within spreadsheets. -Libraries can be reloaded during runtime and their contents can be analyzed by the administrative functions. For each function, information is available about count and type of parameters, internal and external function names and an administrative number. -The functions are called synchronously and return their results immediately. Real time functions (asynchronous functions) are also possible; however, they are not explained in detail because of their complexity. -General information about the interface -The maximum number of parameters in an Add-In function attached to $[officename] Calc is 16: one return value and a maximum of 15 function input parameters. -The data types are defined as follows: +At a minimum, the administrative functions GetFunctionCount and GetFunctionData must exist. Using these, the functions as well as parameter types and return values can be determined. As return values, the Double and String types are supported. As parameters, additionally the cell areas Double Array, String Array, and Cell Array are supported. +Parameters are passed using references. Therefore, a change of these values is basically possible. However, this is not supported in $[officename] Calc because it does not make sense within spreadsheets. +Libraries can be reloaded during runtime and their contents can be analyzed by the administrative functions. For each function, information is available about count and type of parameters, internal and external function names and an administrative number. +The functions are called synchronously and return their results immediately. Real time functions (asynchronous functions) are also possible; however, they are not explained in detail because of their complexity. +General information about the interface +The maximum number of parameters in an Add-In function attached to $[officename] Calc is 16: one return value and a maximum of 15 function input parameters. +The data types are defined as follows: - + Data types - + Definition -CALLTYPE +CALLTYPE -Under Windows: FAR PASCAL (_far _pascal) -Other: default (operating system specific default) +Under Windows: FAR PASCAL (_far _pascal) +Other: default (operating system specific default) -USHORT +USHORT -2 Byte unsigned Integer +2 Byte unsigned Integer -DOUBLE +DOUBLE -8 byte platform-dependent format +8 byte platform-dependent format -Paramtype +Paramtype -Platform-dependent like int -PTR_DOUBLE =0 pointer to a double -PTR_STRING =1 pointer to a zero-terminated string -PTR_DOUBLE_ARR =2 pointer to a double array -PTR_STRING_ARR =3 pointer to a string array -PTR_CELL_ARR =4 pointer to a cell array -NONE =5 +Platform-dependent like int +PTR_DOUBLE =0 pointer to a double +PTR_STRING =1 pointer to a zero-terminated string +PTR_DOUBLE_ARR =2 pointer to a double array +PTR_STRING_ARR =3 pointer to a string array +PTR_CELL_ARR =4 pointer to a cell array +NONE =5
-Shared Library +Shared Library DLL functions -Following you will find a description of those functions, which are called at the Shared Library +Following you will find a description of those functions, which are called at the Shared Library external DLL. -For all Shared Library +For all Shared Library DLL functions, the following applies: -void CALLTYPE fn(out, in1, in2, ...) -Output: Resulting value -Input: Any number of types (double&, char*, double*, char**, Cell area), where the Cell area is an array of types double array, string array, or cell array. -GetFunctionCount() -Returns the number of functions without the management functions of the reference parameter. Each function has a unique number between 0 and nCount-1. This number will be needed for the GetFunctionData and GetParameterDescription functions later. - +void CALLTYPE fn(out, in1, in2, ...) +Output: Resulting value +Input: Any number of types (double&, char*, double*, char**, Cell area), where the Cell area is an array of types double array, string array, or cell array. +GetFunctionCount() +Returns the number of functions without the management functions of the reference parameter. Each function has a unique number between 0 and nCount-1. This number will be needed for the GetFunctionData and GetParameterDescription functions later. + Syntax -void CALLTYPE GetFunctionCount(USHORT& nCount) - +void CALLTYPE GetFunctionCount(USHORT& nCount) + Parameter -USHORT &nCount: -Output: Reference to a variable, which is supposed to contain the number of Add-In functions. For example: If the Add-In provides 5 functions for $[officename] Calc, then nCount=5. -GetFunctionData() -Determines all the important information about an Add-In function. - +USHORT &nCount: +Output: Reference to a variable, which is supposed to contain the number of Add-In functions. For example: If the Add-In provides 5 functions for $[officename] Calc, then nCount=5. +GetFunctionData() +Determines all the important information about an Add-In function. + Syntax -void CALLTYPE GetFunctionData(USHORT& nNo, char* pFuncName, USHORT& nParamCount, Paramtype* peType, char* pInternalName) - +void CALLTYPE GetFunctionData(USHORT& nNo, char* pFuncName, USHORT& nParamCount, Paramtype* peType, char* pInternalName) + Parameter -USHORT& nNo: -Input: Function number between 0 and nCount-1, inclusively. -char* pFuncName: -Output: Function name as seen by the programmer, as it is named in the Shared Library +USHORT& nNo: +Input: Function number between 0 and nCount-1, inclusively. +char* pFuncName: +Output: Function name as seen by the programmer, as it is named in the Shared Library DLL. This name does not determine the name used in the Function Wizard. -USHORT& nParamCount: -Output: Number of parameters in AddIn function. This number must be greater than 0, because there is always a result value; the maximum value is 16. -Paramtype* peType: -Output: Pointer to an array of exactly 16 variables of type Paramtype. The first nParamCount entries are filled with the suitable type of parameter. -char* pInternalName: -Output: Function name as seen by the user, as it appears in the Function Wizard. May contain umlauts. -The pFuncName and pInternalName parameters are char arrays, which are implemented with size 256 in $[officename] Calc. -GetParameterDescription() -Provides a brief description of the Add-In function and its parameters. As an option, this function can be used to show a function and parameter description in the Function Wizard. - +USHORT& nParamCount: +Output: Number of parameters in AddIn function. This number must be greater than 0, because there is always a result value; the maximum value is 16. +Paramtype* peType: +Output: Pointer to an array of exactly 16 variables of type Paramtype. The first nParamCount entries are filled with the suitable type of parameter. +char* pInternalName: +Output: Function name as seen by the user, as it appears in the Function Wizard. May contain umlauts. +The pFuncName and pInternalName parameters are char arrays, which are implemented with size 256 in $[officename] Calc. +GetParameterDescription() +Provides a brief description of the Add-In function and its parameters. As an option, this function can be used to show a function and parameter description in the Function Wizard. + Syntax -void CALLTYPE GetParameterDescription(USHORT& nNo, USHORT& nParam, char* pName, char* pDesc) - +void CALLTYPE GetParameterDescription(USHORT& nNo, USHORT& nParam, char* pName, char* pDesc) + Parameter -USHORT& nNo: -Input: Number of the function in the library; between 0 and nCount-1. -USHORT& nParam: -Input: Indicates, for which parameter the description is provided; parameters start at 1. If nParam is 0, the description itself is supposed to be provided in pDesc; in this case, pName does not have any meaning. -char* pName: -Output: Takes up the parameter name or type, for example, the word "Number" or "String" or "Date", and so on. Implemented in $[officename] Calc as char[256]. -char* pDesc: -Output: Takes up the description of the parameter, for example, "Value, at which the universe is to be calculated." Implemented in $[officename] Calc as char[256]. -pName and pDesc are char arrays; implemented in $[officename] Calc with size 256. Please note that the space available in the Function Wizard is limited and that the 256 characters cannot be fully used. -Cell areas -The following tables contain information about which data structures must be provided by an external program module in order to pass cell areas. $[officename] Calc distinguishes between three different arrays, depending on the data type. -Double Array -As a parameter, a cell area with values of the Number/Double type can be passed. A double array in $[officename] Calc is defined as follows: +USHORT& nNo: +Input: Number of the function in the library; between 0 and nCount-1. +USHORT& nParam: +Input: Indicates, for which parameter the description is provided; parameters start at 1. If nParam is 0, the description itself is supposed to be provided in pDesc; in this case, pName does not have any meaning. +char* pName: +Output: Takes up the parameter name or type, for example, the word "Number" or "String" or "Date", and so on. Implemented in $[officename] Calc as char[256]. +char* pDesc: +Output: Takes up the description of the parameter, for example, "Value, at which the universe is to be calculated." Implemented in $[officename] Calc as char[256]. +pName and pDesc are char arrays; implemented in $[officename] Calc with size 256. Please note that the space available in the Function Wizard is limited and that the 256 characters cannot be fully used. +Cell areas +The following tables contain information about which data structures must be provided by an external program module in order to pass cell areas. $[officename] Calc distinguishes between three different arrays, depending on the data type. +Double Array +As a parameter, a cell area with values of the Number/Double type can be passed. A double array in $[officename] Calc is defined as follows: - + Offset - + Name - + Description -0 +0 -Col1 +Col1 -Column number in the upper-left corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. +Column number in the upper-left corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. -2 +2 -Row1 +Row1 -Row number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. +Row number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. -4 +4 -Tab1 +Tab1 -Table number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. +Table number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. -6 +6 -Col2 +Col2 -Column number in the lower-right corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. +Column number in the lower-right corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. -8 +8 -Row2 +Row2 -Row number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. +Row number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. -10 +10 -Tab2 +Tab2 -Table number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. +Table number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. -12 +12 -Count +Count -Number of the following elements. Empty cells are not counted or passed. +Number of the following elements. Empty cells are not counted or passed. -14 +14 -Col +Col -Column number of the element. Numbering starts at 0. +Column number of the element. Numbering starts at 0. -16 +16 -Row +Row -Row number of the element; numbering starts at 0. +Row number of the element; numbering starts at 0. -18 +18 -Tab +Tab -Table number of the element; numbering starts at 0. +Table number of the element; numbering starts at 0. -20 +20 -Error +Error -Error number, where the value 0 is defined as "no error." If the element comes from a formula cell the error value is determined by the formula. +Error number, where the value 0 is defined as "no error." If the element comes from a formula cell the error value is determined by the formula. -22 +22 -Value +Value -8 byte IEEE variable of type double/floating point +8 byte IEEE variable of type double/floating point -30 +30 -... +... -Next element +Next element
-String Array -A cell area, which contains values of data type Text and is passed as a string array. A string array in $[officename] Calc is defined as follows: +String Array +A cell area, which contains values of data type Text and is passed as a string array. A string array in $[officename] Calc is defined as follows: - + Offset - + Name - + Description -0 +0 -Col1 +Col1 -Column number in the upper-left corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. +Column number in the upper-left corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. -2 +2 -Row1 +Row1 -Row number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. +Row number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. -4 +4 -Tab1 +Tab1 -Table number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. +Table number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. -6 +6 -Col2 +Col2 -Column number in the lower-right corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. +Column number in the lower-right corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. -8 +8 -Row2 +Row2 -Row number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. +Row number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. -10 +10 -Tab2 +Tab2 -Table number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. +Table number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. -12 +12 -Count +Count -Number of the following elements. Empty cells are not counted or passed. +Number of the following elements. Empty cells are not counted or passed. -14 +14 -Col +Col -Column number of the element. Numbering starts at 0. +Column number of the element. Numbering starts at 0. -16 +16 -Row +Row -Row number of the element; numbering starts at 0. +Row number of the element; numbering starts at 0. -18 +18 -Tab +Tab -Table number of the element; numbering starts at 0. +Table number of the element; numbering starts at 0. -20 +20 -Error +Error -Error number, where the value 0 is defined as "no error." If the element comes from a formula cell the error value is determined by the formula. +Error number, where the value 0 is defined as "no error." If the element comes from a formula cell the error value is determined by the formula. -22 +22 -Len +Len -Length of the following string, including closing zero byte. If the length including closing zero byte equals an odd value a second zero byte is added to the string so that an even value is achieved. Therefore, Len is calculated using ((StrLen+2)&~1). +Length of the following string, including closing zero byte. If the length including closing zero byte equals an odd value a second zero byte is added to the string so that an even value is achieved. Therefore, Len is calculated using ((StrLen+2)&~1). -24 +24 -String +String -String with closing zero byte +String with closing zero byte -24+Len +24+Len -... +... -Next element +Next element
-Cell Array -Cell arrays are used to call cell areas containing text as well as numbers. A cell array in $[officename] Calc is defined as follows: +Cell Array +Cell arrays are used to call cell areas containing text as well as numbers. A cell array in $[officename] Calc is defined as follows: - + Offset - + Name - + Description -0 +0 -Col1 +Col1 -Column number in the upper-left corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. +Column number in the upper-left corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. -2 +2 -Row1 +Row1 -Row number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. +Row number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. -4 +4 -Tab1 +Tab1 -Table number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. +Table number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. -6 +6 -Col2 +Col2 -Column number in the lower-right corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. +Column number in the lower-right corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. -8 +8 -Row2 +Row2 -Row number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. +Row number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. -10 +10 -Tab2 +Tab2 -Table number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. +Table number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. -12 +12 -Count +Count -Number of the following elements. Empty cells are not counted or passed. +Number of the following elements. Empty cells are not counted or passed. -14 +14 -Col +Col -Column number of the element. Numbering starts at 0. +Column number of the element. Numbering starts at 0. -16 +16 -Row +Row -Row number of the element; numbering starts at 0. +Row number of the element; numbering starts at 0. -18 +18 -Tab +Tab -Table number of the element; numbering starts at 0. +Table number of the element; numbering starts at 0. -20 +20 -Error +Error -Error number, where the value 0 is defined as "no error." If the element comes from a formula cell the error value is determined by the formula. +Error number, where the value 0 is defined as "no error." If the element comes from a formula cell the error value is determined by the formula. -22 +22 -Type +Type -Type of cell content, 0 == Double, 1 == String +Type of cell content, 0 == Double, 1 == String -24 +24 -Value or Len +Value or Len -If type == 0: 8 byte IEEE variable of type double/floating point -If type == 1: Length of the following string, including closing zero byte. If the length including closing zero byte equals an odd value a second zero byte is added to the string so that an even value is achieved. Therefore, Len is calculated using ((StrLen+2)&~1). +If type == 0: 8 byte IEEE variable of type double/floating point +If type == 1: Length of the following string, including closing zero byte. If the length including closing zero byte equals an odd value a second zero byte is added to the string so that an even value is achieved. Therefore, Len is calculated using ((StrLen+2)&~1). -26 if type==1 +26 if type==1 -String +String -If type == 1: String with closing zero byte +If type == 1: String with closing zero byte -32 or 26+Len +32 or 26+Len -... +... -Next element +Next element
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04060116.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04060116.xhp index 18d692f83f..768b77efd6 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04060116.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04060116.xhp @@ -30,74 +30,65 @@ imaginary numbers in analysis functions complex numbers in analysis functions -Add-in Functions, List of Analysis Functions Part Two +Add-in Functions, List of Analysis Functions Part Two
- + IMABS function -IMABS - The result is the absolute value of a complex number. - Syntax - IMABS("ComplexNumber") - ComplexNumber is a complex number that is entered in the form "x+yi" or "x+yj". +IMABS + The result is the absolute value of a complex number. + Syntax + IMABS("ComplexNumber") + ComplexNumber is a complex number that is entered in the form "x+yi" or "x+yj". no blanks allowed, see i82522 - Example - + Example + =IMABS("5+12j") returns 13.
IMAGINARY function -IMAGINARY - The result is the imaginary coefficient of a complex number. - Syntax - IMAGINARY("ComplexNumber") +IMAGINARY + The result is the imaginary coefficient of a complex number. + Syntax + IMAGINARY("ComplexNumber") - Example - + Example + =IMAGINARY("4+3j") returns 3.
IMPOWER function -IMPOWER - The result is the ComplexNumber raised to the power of Number. - Syntax - IMPOWER("ComplexNumber"; Number) +IMPOWER + The result is the ComplexNumber raised to the power of Number. + Syntax + IMPOWER("ComplexNumber"; Number) - + Number is the exponent. - Example - + Example + =IMPOWER("2+3i";2) returns -5+12i.
IMARGUMENT function -IMARGUMENT - The result is the argument (the phi angle) of a complex number. - Syntax - IMARGUMENT("ComplexNumber") +IMARGUMENT + The result is the argument (the phi angle) of a complex number. + Syntax + IMARGUMENT("ComplexNumber") - Example - + Example + =IMARGUMENT("3+4j") returns 0.927295.
@@ -144,121 +135,105 @@ IMDIV function -IMDIV - The result is the division of two complex numbers. - Syntax - IMDIV("Numerator"; "Denominator") - +IMDIV + The result is the division of two complex numbers. + Syntax + IMDIV("Numerator"; "Denominator") + Numerator, Denominator are complex numbers that are entered in the form "x+yi" or "x+yj". - Example - + Example + =IMDIV("-238+240i";"10+24i") returns 5+12i.
IMEXP function -IMEXP - The result is the power of e and the complex number. The constant e has a value of approximately 2.71828182845904. - Syntax - IMEXP("ComplexNumber") +IMEXP + The result is the power of e and the complex number. The constant e has a value of approximately 2.71828182845904. + Syntax + IMEXP("ComplexNumber") - Example - + Example + =IMEXP("1+j") returns 1.47+2.29j (rounded).
IMCONJUGATE function -IMCONJUGATE - The result is the conjugated complex complement to a complex number. - Syntax - IMCONJUGATE("ComplexNumber") +IMCONJUGATE + The result is the conjugated complex complement to a complex number. + Syntax + IMCONJUGATE("ComplexNumber") - Example - + Example + =IMCONJUGATE("1+j") returns 1-j.
IMLN function -IMLN - The result is the natural logarithm (to the base e) of a complex number. The constant e has a value of approximately 2.71828182845904. - Syntax - IMLN("ComplexNumber") +IMLN + The result is the natural logarithm (to the base e) of a complex number. The constant e has a value of approximately 2.71828182845904. + Syntax + IMLN("ComplexNumber") - Example - + Example + =IMLN("1+j") returns 0.35+0.79j (rounded).
IMLOG10 function -IMLOG10 - The result is the common logarithm (to the base 10) of a complex number. - Syntax - IMLOG10("ComplexNumber") +IMLOG10 + The result is the common logarithm (to the base 10) of a complex number. + Syntax + IMLOG10("ComplexNumber") - Example - + Example + =IMLOG10("1+j") returns 0.15+0.34j (rounded).
IMLOG2 function -IMLOG2 - The result is the binary logarithm of a complex number. - Syntax - IMLOG2("ComplexNumber") +IMLOG2 + The result is the binary logarithm of a complex number. + Syntax + IMLOG2("ComplexNumber") - Example - + Example + =IMLOG2("1+j") returns 0.50+1.13j (rounded).
IMPRODUCT function -IMPRODUCT - The result is the product of up to 29 complex numbers. - Syntax - IMPRODUCT("ComplexNumber"; "ComplexNumber1"; ...) +IMPRODUCT + The result is the product of up to 29 complex numbers. + Syntax + IMPRODUCT("ComplexNumber"; "ComplexNumber1"; ...) - Example - + Example + =IMPRODUCT("3+4j";"5-3j") returns 27+11j.
IMREAL function -IMREAL - The result is the real coefficient of a complex number. - Syntax - IMREAL("ComplexNumber") +IMREAL + The result is the real coefficient of a complex number. + Syntax + IMREAL("ComplexNumber") - Example - + Example + =IMREAL("1+3j") returns 1.
@@ -305,65 +280,57 @@ IMSUB function -IMSUB - The result is the subtraction of two complex numbers. - Syntax - IMSUB("ComplexNumber1"; "ComplexNumber2") +IMSUB + The result is the subtraction of two complex numbers. + Syntax + IMSUB("ComplexNumber1"; "ComplexNumber2") - Example - + Example + =IMSUB("13+4j";"5+3j") returns 8+j.
IMSUM function -IMSUM - The result is the sum of up to 29 complex numbers. - Syntax - IMSUM("ComplexNumber1"; "ComplexNumber2"; ...) +IMSUM + The result is the sum of up to 29 complex numbers. + Syntax + IMSUM("ComplexNumber1"; "ComplexNumber2"; ...) - Example - + Example + =IMSUM("13+4j";"5+3j") returns 18+7j.
IMSQRT function -IMSQRT - The result is the square root of a complex number. - Syntax - IMSQRT("ComplexNumber") +IMSQRT + The result is the square root of a complex number. + Syntax + IMSQRT("ComplexNumber") - Example - + Example + =IMSQRT("3+4i") returns 2+1i.
COMPLEX function -COMPLEX - The result is a complex number which is returned from a real coefficient and an imaginary coefficient. - Syntax - COMPLEX(RealNum; INum; Suffix) - +COMPLEX + The result is a complex number which is returned from a real coefficient and an imaginary coefficient. + Syntax + COMPLEX(RealNum; INum; Suffix) + RealNum is the real coefficient of the complex number. - + INum is the imaginary coefficient of the complex number. - + Suffix is a list of options, "i" or "j". - Example - + Example + =COMPLEX(3;4;"j") returns 3+4j.
@@ -371,19 +338,16 @@ converting;octal numbers, into binary numbers mw added one entry -OCT2BIN - The result is the binary number for the octal number entered. - Syntax - OCT2BIN(Number; Places) - +OCT2BIN + The result is the binary number for the octal number entered. + Syntax + OCT2BIN(Number; Places) + Number is the octal number. The number can have a maximum of 10 places. The most significant bit is the sign bit, the following bits return the value. Negative numbers are entered as two's complement. - + Places is the number of places to be output. - Example - + Example + =OCT2BIN(3;3) returns 011.
@@ -391,16 +355,14 @@ converting;octal numbers, into decimal numbers mw added one entry -OCT2DEC - The result is the decimal number for the octal number entered. - Syntax - OCT2DEC(Number) - +OCT2DEC + The result is the decimal number for the octal number entered. + Syntax + OCT2DEC(Number) + Number is the octal number. The number can have a maximum of 10 places. The most significant bit is the sign bit, the following bits return the value. Negative numbers are entered as two's complement. - Example - + Example + =OCT2DEC(144) returns 100.
@@ -408,147 +370,144 @@ converting;octal numbers, into hexadecimal numbers mw added one entry -OCT2HEX - The result is the hexadecimal number for the octal number entered. - Syntax - OCT2HEX(Number; Places) - +OCT2HEX + The result is the hexadecimal number for the octal number entered. + Syntax + OCT2HEX(Number; Places) + Number is the octal number. The number can have a maximum of 10 places. The most significant bit is the sign bit, the following bits return the value. Negative numbers are entered as two's complement. - + Places is the number of places to be output. - Example - + Example + =OCT2HEX(144;4) returns 0064.
CONVERT_ADD function -CONVERT_ADD - Converts a value from one unit of measure to the corresponding value in another unit of measure. Enter the units of measures directly as text in quotation marks or as a reference. If you enter the units of measure in cells, they must correspond exactly with the following list which is case sensitive: For example, in order to enter a lower case l (for liter) in a cell, enter the apostrophe ' immediately followed by l. +CONVERT_ADD + Converts a value from one unit of measure to the corresponding value in another unit of measure. Enter the units of measures directly as text in quotation marks or as a reference. If you enter the units of measure in cells, they must correspond exactly with the following list which is case sensitive: For example, in order to enter a lower case l (for liter) in a cell, enter the apostrophe ' immediately followed by l. - Property + Property - Units + Units - Weight + Weight - g, sg, lbm, u, ozm, stone, ton, grain, pweight, hweight, shweight, brton + g, sg, lbm, u, ozm, stone, ton, grain, pweight, hweight, shweight, brton - Length + Length - m, mi, Nmi, in, ft, yd, ang, Pica, ell, parsec, lightyear, survey_mi + m, mi, Nmi, in, ft, yd, ang, Pica, ell, parsec, lightyear, survey_mi - Time + Time - yr, day, hr, mn, sec, s + yr, day, hr, mn, sec, s - Pressure + Pressure - Pa, atm, at, mmHg, Torr, psi + Pa, atm, at, mmHg, Torr, psi - Force + Force - N, dyn, dy, lbf, pond + N, dyn, dy, lbf, pond - Energy + Energy - J, e, c, cal, eV, ev, HPh, Wh, wh, flb, BTU, btu + J, e, c, cal, eV, ev, HPh, Wh, wh, flb, BTU, btu - Power + Power - W, w, HP, PS + W, w, HP, PS - Field strength + Field strength - T, ga + T, ga - Temperature + Temperature - C, F, K, kel, Reau, Rank + C, F, K, kel, Reau, Rank - Volume + Volume - l, L, lt, tsp, tbs, oz, cup, pt, us_pt, qt, gal, m3, mi3, Nmi3, in3, ft3, yd3, ang3, Pica3, barrel, bushel, regton, Schooner, Middy, Glass + l, L, lt, tsp, tbs, oz, cup, pt, us_pt, qt, gal, m3, mi3, Nmi3, in3, ft3, yd3, ang3, Pica3, barrel, bushel, regton, Schooner, Middy, Glass - Area + Area - m2, mi2, Nmi2, in2, ft2, yd2, ang2, Pica2, Morgen, ar, acre, ha + m2, mi2, Nmi2, in2, ft2, yd2, ang2, Pica2, Morgen, ar, acre, ha - Speed + Speed - m/s, m/sec, m/h, mph, kn, admkn + m/s, m/sec, m/h, mph, kn, admkn - Information + Information - bit, byte + bit, byte
- Units of measure in bold can be preceded by a prefix character from the following list: + Units of measure in bold can be preceded by a prefix character from the following list: - Prefix + Prefix Multiplier @@ -719,32 +678,30 @@
- ki kibi 1024 - Mi mebi 1048576 - Gi gibi 1073741824 - Ti tebi 1099511627776 - Pi pebi 1125899906842620 - Ei exbi 1152921504606850000 - Zi zebi 1180591620717410000000 - Yi yobi 1208925819614630000000000 + ki kibi 1024 + Mi mebi 1048576 + Gi gibi 1073741824 + Ti tebi 1099511627776 + Pi pebi 1125899906842620 + Ei exbi 1152921504606850000 + Zi zebi 1180591620717410000000 + Yi yobi 1208925819614630000000000
- Syntax - CONVERT_ADD(Number; "FromUnit"; "ToUnit") - + Syntax + CONVERT_ADD(Number; "FromUnit"; "ToUnit") + Number is the number to be converted. - + FromUnit is the unit from which conversion is taking place. - + ToUnit is the unit to which conversion is taking place. Both units must be of the same type. - Examples - + Examples + =CONVERT_ADD(10;"HP";"PS") returns, rounded to two decimal places, 10.14. 10 HP equal 10.14 PS. - + =CONVERT_ADD(10;"km";"mi") returns, rounded to two decimal places, 6.21. 10 kilometers equal 6.21 miles. The k is the permitted prefix character for the factor 10^3.
@@ -752,32 +709,30 @@ factorials;numbers with increments of two mw added one entry -FACTDOUBLE - Returns the double factorial of a number. - Syntax - FACTDOUBLE(Number) - Returns Number +FACTDOUBLE + Returns the double factorial of a number. + Syntax + FACTDOUBLE(Number) + Returns Number !!, the double factorial of Number, where Number is an integer greater than or equal to zero. - For even numbers FACTDOUBLE(n) returns: - 2*4*6*8* ... *n - For odd numbers FACTDOUBLE(n) returns: - 1*3*5*7* ... *n - FACTDOUBLE(0) returns 1 by definition. - Example - + For even numbers FACTDOUBLE(n) returns: + 2*4*6*8* ... *n + For odd numbers FACTDOUBLE(n) returns: + 1*3*5*7* ... *n + FACTDOUBLE(0) returns 1 by definition. + Example + =FACTDOUBLE(5) returns 15. - + =FACTDOUBLE(6) returns 48. - + =FACTDOUBLE(0) returns 1.see also FACT, MULTINOMIAL, PRODUCT
- - - + + +
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04060119.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04060119.xhp index 743c2389b0..1652a7126b 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04060119.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04060119.xhp @@ -27,39 +27,39 @@ -Financial Functions Part Two +Financial Functions Part Two
-Back to Financial Functions Part One -Forward to Financial Functions Part Three +Back to Financial Functions Part One +Forward to Financial Functions Part Three
PPMT function -PPMT -Returns for a given period the payment on the principal for an investment that is based on periodic and constant payments and a constant interest rate. -Syntax -PPMT(Rate; Period; NPer; PV; FV; Type) - +PPMT +Returns for a given period the payment on the principal for an investment that is based on periodic and constant payments and a constant interest rate. +Syntax +PPMT(Rate; Period; NPer; PV; FV; Type) + Rate is the periodic interest rate. - + Period is the amortizement period. P = 1 for the first and P = NPer for the last period. - + NPer is the total number of periods during which annuity is paid. - + PV is the present value in the sequence of payments. - + FV (optional) is the desired (future) value. - + Type (optional) defines the due date. F = 1 for payment at the beginning of a period and F = 0 for payment at the end of a period. - + -Example -How high is the periodic monthly payment at an annual interest rate of 8.75% over a period of 3 years? The cash value is 5,000 currency units and is always paid at the beginning of a period. The future value is 8,000 currency units. - +Example +How high is the periodic monthly payment at an annual interest rate of 8.75% over a period of 3 years? The cash value is 5,000 currency units and is always paid at the beginning of a period. The future value is 8,000 currency units. + =PPMT(8.75%/12;1;36;5000;8000;1) = -350.99 currency units.
@@ -70,56 +70,56 @@ CUMPRINC function mw added two entries -CUMPRINC -Returns the cumulative interest paid for an investment period with a constant interest rate. -Syntax -CUMPRINC(Rate; NPer; PV; S; E; Type) - +CUMPRINC +Returns the cumulative interest paid for an investment period with a constant interest rate. +Syntax +CUMPRINC(Rate; NPer; PV; S; E; Type) + Rate is the periodic interest rate. - + NPer is the payment period with the total number of periods. NPER can also be a non-integer value. - + PV is the current value in the sequence of payments. - + S is the first period. - + E is the last period. - + Type is the due date of the payment at the beginning or end of each period. -Example -What are the payoff amounts if the yearly interest rate is 5.5% for 36 months? The cash value is 15,000 currency units. The payoff amount is calculated between the 10th and 18th period. The due date is at the end of the period. - +Example +What are the payoff amounts if the yearly interest rate is 5.5% for 36 months? The cash value is 15,000 currency units. The payoff amount is calculated between the 10th and 18th period. The due date is at the end of the period. + =CUMPRINC(5.5%/12;36;15000;10;18;0) = -3669.74 currency units. The payoff amount between the 10th and 18th period is 3669.74 currency units.
CUMPRINC_ADD function -CUMPRINC_ADD - Calculates the cumulative redemption of a loan in a period. +CUMPRINC_ADD + Calculates the cumulative redemption of a loan in a period. -Syntax -CUMPRINC_ADD(Rate; NPer; PV; StartPeriod; EndPeriod; Type) - +Syntax +CUMPRINC_ADD(Rate; NPer; PV; StartPeriod; EndPeriod; Type) + Rate is the interest rate for each period. - + NPer is the total number of payment periods. The rate and NPER must refer to the same unit, and thus both be calculated annually or monthly. - + PV is the current value. - + StartPeriod is the first payment period for the calculation. - + EndPeriod is the last payment period for the calculation. - + Type is the maturity of a payment at the end of each period (Type = 0) or at the start of the period (Type = 1). -Example -The following mortgage loan is taken out on a house: -Rate: 9.00 per cent per annum (9% / 12 = 0.0075), Duration: 30 years (payment periods = 30 * 12 = 360), NPV: 125000 currency units. -How much will you repay in the second year of the mortgage (thus from periods 13 to 24)? - +Example +The following mortgage loan is taken out on a house: +Rate: 9.00 per cent per annum (9% / 12 = 0.0075), Duration: 30 years (payment periods = 30 * 12 = 360), NPV: 125000 currency units. +How much will you repay in the second year of the mortgage (thus from periods 13 to 24)? + =CUMPRINC_ADD(0.0075;360;125000;13;24;0) returns -934.1071 -In the first month you will be repaying the following amount: - +In the first month you will be repaying the following amount: + =CUMPRINC_ADD(0.0075;360;125000;1;1;0) returns -68.27827
@@ -128,56 +128,56 @@ CUMIPMT function -CUMIPMT -Calculates the cumulative interest payments, that is, the total interest, for an investment based on a constant interest rate. -Syntax -CUMIPMT(Rate; NPer; PV; S; E; Type) - +CUMIPMT +Calculates the cumulative interest payments, that is, the total interest, for an investment based on a constant interest rate. +Syntax +CUMIPMT(Rate; NPer; PV; S; E; Type) + Rate is the periodic interest rate. - + NPer is the payment period with the total number of periods. NPER can also be a non-integer value. - + PV is the current value in the sequence of payments. - + S is the first period. - + E is the last period. - + Type is the due date of the payment at the beginning or end of each period. -Example -What are the interest payments at a yearly interest rate of 5.5 %, a payment period of monthly payments for 2 years and a current cash value of 5,000 currency units? The start period is the 4th and the end period is the 6th period. The payment is due at the beginning of each period. - +Example +What are the interest payments at a yearly interest rate of 5.5 %, a payment period of monthly payments for 2 years and a current cash value of 5,000 currency units? The start period is the 4th and the end period is the 6th period. The payment is due at the beginning of each period. + =CUMIPMT(5.5%/12;24;5000;4;6;1) = -57.54 currency units. The interest payments for between the 4th and 6th period are 57.54 currency units.
CUMIPMT_ADD function -CUMIPMT_ADD -Calculates the accumulated interest for a period. +CUMIPMT_ADD +Calculates the accumulated interest for a period. -Syntax -CUMIPMT_ADD(Rate; NPer; PV; StartPeriod; EndPeriod; Type) - +Syntax +CUMIPMT_ADD(Rate; NPer; PV; StartPeriod; EndPeriod; Type) + Rate is the interest rate for each period. - + NPer is the total number of payment periods. The rate and NPER must refer to the same unit, and thus both be calculated annually or monthly. - + PV is the current value. - + StartPeriod is the first payment period for the calculation. - + EndPeriod is the last payment period for the calculation. - + Type is the maturity of a payment at the end of each period (Type = 0) or at the start of the period (Type = 1). -Example -The following mortgage loan is taken out on a house: -Rate: 9.00 per cent per annum (9% / 12 = 0.0075), Duration: 30 years (NPER = 30 * 12 = 360), Pv: 125000 currency units. -How much interest must you pay in the second year of the mortgage (thus from periods 13 to 24)? - +Example +The following mortgage loan is taken out on a house: +Rate: 9.00 per cent per annum (9% / 12 = 0.0075), Duration: 30 years (NPER = 30 * 12 = 360), Pv: 125000 currency units. +How much interest must you pay in the second year of the mortgage (thus from periods 13 to 24)? + =CUMIPMT_ADD(0.0075;360;125000;13;24;0) returns -11135.23. -How much interest must you pay in the first month? - +How much interest must you pay in the first month? + =CUMIPMT_ADD(0.0075;360;125000;1;1;0) returns -937.50.
@@ -186,26 +186,26 @@ sales values;fixed interest securities mw added two entries -PRICE -Calculates the market value of a fixed interest security with a par value of 100 currency units as a function of the forecast yield. -Syntax -PRICE(Settlement; Maturity; Rate; Yield; Redemption; Frequency; Basis) - +PRICE +Calculates the market value of a fixed interest security with a par value of 100 currency units as a function of the forecast yield. +Syntax +PRICE(Settlement; Maturity; Rate; Yield; Redemption; Frequency; Basis) + Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - + Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - + Rate is the annual nominal rate of interest (coupon interest rate) - + Yield is the annual yield of the security. - + Redemption is the redemption value per 100 currency units of par value. - + Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). -Example -A security is purchased on 1999-02-15; the maturity date is 2007-11-15. The nominal rate of interest is 5.75%. The yield is 6.5%. The redemption value is 100 currency units. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). With calculation on basis 0, the price is as follows: -=PRICE("1999-02-15"; "2007-11-15"; 0.0575; 0.065; 100; 2; 0) returns 95.04287. +Example +A security is purchased on 1999-02-15; the maturity date is 2007-11-15. The nominal rate of interest is 5.75%. The yield is 6.5%. The redemption value is 100 currency units. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). With calculation on basis 0, the price is as follows: +=PRICE("1999-02-15"; "2007-11-15"; 0.0575; 0.065; 100; 2; 0) returns 95.04287.
PRICEDISC function @@ -213,47 +213,47 @@ sales values;non-interest-bearing securities mw added two entries -PRICEDISC -Calculates the price per 100 currency units of par value of a non-interest- bearing security. -Syntax -PRICEDISC(Settlement; Maturity; Discount; Redemption; Basis) - +PRICEDISC +Calculates the price per 100 currency units of par value of a non-interest- bearing security. +Syntax +PRICEDISC(Settlement; Maturity; Discount; Redemption; Basis) + Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - + Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - + Discount is the discount of a security as a percentage. - + Redemption is the redemption value per 100 currency units of par value. -Example -A security is purchased on 1999-02-15; the maturity date is 1999-03-01. Discount in per cent is 5.25%. The redemption value is 100. When calculating on basis 2 the price discount is as follows: -=PRICEDISC("1999-02-15"; "1999-03-01"; 0.0525; 100; 2) returns 99.79583. +Example +A security is purchased on 1999-02-15; the maturity date is 1999-03-01. Discount in per cent is 5.25%. The redemption value is 100. When calculating on basis 2 the price discount is as follows: +=PRICEDISC("1999-02-15"; "1999-03-01"; 0.0525; 100; 2) returns 99.79583.
PRICEMAT function prices;interest-bearing securities mw added one entry -PRICEMAT -Calculates the price per 100 currency units of par value of a security, that pays interest on the maturity date. -Syntax -PRICEMAT(Settlement; Maturity; Issue; Rate; Yield; Basis) - +PRICEMAT +Calculates the price per 100 currency units of par value of a security, that pays interest on the maturity date. +Syntax +PRICEMAT(Settlement; Maturity; Issue; Rate; Yield; Basis) + Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - + Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - + Issue is the date of issue of the security. - + Rate is the interest rate of the security on the issue date. - + Yield is the annual yield of the security. -Example -Settlement date: February 15 1999, maturity date: April 13 1999, issue date: November 11 1998. Interest rate: 6.1 per cent, yield: 6.1 per cent, basis: 30/360 = 0. -The price is calculated as follows: -=PRICEMAT("1999-02-15";"1999-04-13";"1998-11-11"; 0.061; 0.061;0) returns 99.98449888. +Example +Settlement date: February 15 1999, maturity date: April 13 1999, issue date: November 11 1998. Interest rate: 6.1 per cent, yield: 6.1 per cent, basis: 30/360 = 0. +The price is calculated as follows: +=PRICEMAT("1999-02-15";"1999-04-13";"1998-11-11"; 0.061; 0.061;0) returns 99.98449888.
calculating; durations @@ -261,18 +261,18 @@ DURATION function -DURATION -Calculates the number of periods required by an investment to attain the desired value. -Syntax -DURATION(Rate; PV; FV) - +DURATION +Calculates the number of periods required by an investment to attain the desired value. +Syntax +DURATION(Rate; PV; FV) + Rate is a constant. The interest rate is to be calculated for the entire duration (duration period). The interest rate per period is calculated by dividing the interest rate by the calculated duration. The internal rate for an annuity is to be entered as Rate/12. - + PV is the present (current) value. The cash value is the deposit of cash or the current cash value of an allowance in kind. As a deposit value a positive value must be entered; the deposit must not be 0 or <0. - + FV is the expected value. The future value determines the desired (future) value of the deposit. -Example -At an interest rate of 4.75%, a cash value of 25,000 currency units and a future value of 1,000,000 currency units, a duration of 79.49 payment periods is returned. The periodic payment is the resulting quotient from the future value and the duration, in this case 1,000,000/79.49=12,850.20. +Example +At an interest rate of 4.75%, a cash value of 25,000 currency units and a future value of 1,000,000 currency units, a duration of 79.49 payment periods is returned. The periodic payment is the resulting quotient from the future value and the duration, in this case 1,000,000/79.49=12,850.20.
calculating;linear depreciations @@ -282,19 +282,19 @@ SLN function mw added one entry -SLN -Returns the straight-line depreciation of an asset for one period. The amount of the depreciation is constant during the depreciation period. -Syntax -SLN(Cost; Salvage; Life) - +SLN +Returns the straight-line depreciation of an asset for one period. The amount of the depreciation is constant during the depreciation period. +Syntax +SLN(Cost; Salvage; Life) + Cost is the initial cost of an asset. - + Salvage is the value of an asset at the end of the depreciation. - + Life is the depreciation period determining the number of periods in the depreciation of the asset. -Example -Office equipment with an initial cost of 50,000 currency units is to be depreciated over 7 years. The value at the end of the depreciation is to be 3,500 currency units. - +Example +Office equipment with an initial cost of 50,000 currency units is to be depreciated over 7 years. The value at the end of the depreciation is to be 3,500 currency units. + =SLN(50000;3,500;84) = 553.57 currency units. The periodic monthly depreciation of the office equipment is 553.57 currency units.
@@ -302,24 +302,24 @@ Macauley duration mw added one entry -MDURATION -Calculates the modified Macauley duration of a fixed interest security in years. -Syntax -MDURATION(Settlement; Maturity; Coupon; Yield; Frequency; Basis) - +MDURATION +Calculates the modified Macauley duration of a fixed interest security in years. +Syntax +MDURATION(Settlement; Maturity; Coupon; Yield; Frequency; Basis) + Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - + Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - + Coupon is the annual nominal rate of interest (coupon interest rate) - + Yield is the annual yield of the security. - + Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). -Example -A security is purchased on 2001-01-01; the maturity date is 2006-01-01. The nominal rate of interest is 8%. The yield is 9.0%. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) how long is the modified duration? -=MDURATION("2001-01-01"; "2006-01-01"; 0.08; 0.09; 2; 3) returns 4.02 years. +Example +A security is purchased on 2001-01-01; the maturity date is 2006-01-01. The nominal rate of interest is 8%. The yield is 9.0%. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) how long is the modified duration? +=MDURATION("2001-01-01"; "2006-01-01"; 0.08; 0.09; 2; 3) returns 4.02 years.
calculating;net present values @@ -327,19 +327,19 @@ NPV function -NPV +NPV Returns the present value of an investment based on a series of periodic cash flows and a discount rate. To get the net present value, subtract the cost of the project (the initial cash flow at time zero) from the returned value. If the payments take place at irregular intervals, use the XNPV function. -Syntax -NPV(Rate; Value1; Value2; ...) - +Syntax +NPV(Rate; Value1; Value2; ...) + Rate is the discount rate for a period. - + Value1;... are up to 30 values, which represent deposits or withdrawals. -Example -What is the net present value of periodic payments of 10, 20 and 30 currency units with a discount rate of 8.75%. At time zero the costs were payed as -40 currency units. - +Example +What is the net present value of periodic payments of 10, 20 and 30 currency units with a discount rate of 8.75%. At time zero the costs were payed as -40 currency units. + =NPV(8.75%;10;20;30) = 49.43 currency units. The net present value is the returned value minus the initial costs of 40 currency units, therefore 9.43 currency units.
@@ -348,35 +348,35 @@ NOMINAL function mw made "nominal interest rates;..." a one level entry -NOMINAL -Calculates the yearly nominal interest rate, given the effective rate and the number of compounding periods per year. -Syntax -NOMINAL(EffectiveRate; NPerY) - +NOMINAL +Calculates the yearly nominal interest rate, given the effective rate and the number of compounding periods per year. +Syntax +NOMINAL(EffectiveRate; NPerY) + EffectiveRate is the effective interest rate - + NPerY is the number of periodic interest payments per year. -Example -What is the nominal interest per year for an effective interest rate of 13.5% if twelve payments are made per year. - +Example +What is the nominal interest per year for an effective interest rate of 13.5% if twelve payments are made per year. + =NOMINAL(13.5%;12) = 12.73%. The nominal interest rate per year is 12.73%.
NOMINAL_ADD function -NOMINAL_ADD -Calculates the annual nominal rate of interest on the basis of the effective rate and the number of interest payments per annum. +NOMINAL_ADD +Calculates the annual nominal rate of interest on the basis of the effective rate and the number of interest payments per annum. -Syntax -NOMINAL_ADD(EffectiveRate; NPerY) - +Syntax +NOMINAL_ADD(EffectiveRate; NPerY) + EffectiveRate is the effective annual rate of interest. - + NPerY the number of interest payments per year. -Example -What is the nominal rate of interest for a 5.3543% effective rate of interest and quarterly payment. - +Example +What is the nominal rate of interest for a 5.3543% effective rate of interest and quarterly payment. + =NOMINAL_ADD(5.3543%;4) returns 0.0525 or 5.25%.
@@ -384,18 +384,18 @@ converting;decimal fractions, into mixed decimal fractions mw added one entry -DOLLARFR -Converts a quotation that has been given as a decimal number into a mixed decimal fraction. -Syntax -DOLLARFR(DecimalDollar; Fraction) - +DOLLARFR +Converts a quotation that has been given as a decimal number into a mixed decimal fraction. +Syntax +DOLLARFR(DecimalDollar; Fraction) + DecimalDollar is a decimal number. - + Fraction is a whole number that is used as the denominator of the decimal fraction. -Example - +Example + =DOLLARFR(1.125;16) converts into sixteenths. The result is 1.02 for 1 plus 2/16. - + =DOLLARFR(1.125;8) converts into eighths. The result is 1.1 for 1 plus 1/8.
@@ -404,18 +404,18 @@ DOLLARDE function mw added one entry -DOLLARDE -Converts a quotation that has been given as a decimal fraction into a decimal number. -Syntax -DOLLARDE(FractionalDollar; Fraction) - +DOLLARDE +Converts a quotation that has been given as a decimal fraction into a decimal number. +Syntax +DOLLARDE(FractionalDollar; Fraction) + FractionalDollar is a number given as a decimal fraction. - + Fraction is a whole number that is used as the denominator of the decimal fraction. -Example - +Example + =DOLLARDE(1.02;16) stands for 1 and 2/16. This returns 1.125. - + =DOLLARDE(1.1;8) stands for 1 and 1/8. This returns 1.125.
@@ -425,18 +425,18 @@ internal rates of return;modified mw added "internal rates of return;..." -MIRR -Calculates the modified internal rate of return of a series of investments. -Syntax -MIRR(Values; Investment; ReinvestRate) - +MIRR +Calculates the modified internal rate of return of a series of investments. +Syntax +MIRR(Values; Investment; ReinvestRate) + Values corresponds to the array or the cell reference for cells whose content corresponds to the payments. - + Investment is the rate of interest of the investments (the negative values of the array) - + ReinvestRate:the rate of interest of the reinvestment (the positive values of the array) -Example -Assuming a cell content of A1 = -5, A2 = 10, A3 = 15, and A4 = 8, and an investment value of 0.5 and a reinvestment value of 0.1, the result is 94.16%. +Example +Assuming a cell content of A1 = -5, A2 = 10, A3 = 15, and A4 = 8, and an investment value of 0.5 and a reinvestment value of 0.1, the result is 94.16%.
YIELD function @@ -444,72 +444,72 @@ yields, see also rates of return mw added two entries -YIELD -Calculates the yield of a security. -Syntax -YIELD(Settlement; Maturity; Rate; Price; Redemption; Frequency; Basis) - +YIELD +Calculates the yield of a security. +Syntax +YIELD(Settlement; Maturity; Rate; Price; Redemption; Frequency; Basis) + Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - + Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - + Rate is the annual rate of interest. - + Price is the price (purchase price) of the security per 100 currency units of par value. - + Redemption is the redemption value per 100 currency units of par value. - + Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). -Example -A security is purchased on 1999-02-15. It matures on 2007-11-15. The rate of interest is 5.75%. The price is 95.04287 currency units per 100 units of par value, the redemption value is 100 units. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency = 2) and the basis is 0. How high is the yield? -=YIELD("1999-02-15"; "2007-11-15"; 0.0575 ;95.04287; 100; 2; 0) returns 0.065 or 6.50 per cent. +Example +A security is purchased on 1999-02-15. It matures on 2007-11-15. The rate of interest is 5.75%. The price is 95.04287 currency units per 100 units of par value, the redemption value is 100 units. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency = 2) and the basis is 0. How high is the yield? +=YIELD("1999-02-15"; "2007-11-15"; 0.0575 ;95.04287; 100; 2; 0) returns 0.065 or 6.50 per cent.
YIELDDISC function rates of return;non-interest-bearing securities mw added one entry -YIELDDISC -Calculates the annual yield of a non-interest-bearing security. -Syntax -YIELDDISC(Settlement; Maturity; Price; Redemption; Basis) - +YIELDDISC +Calculates the annual yield of a non-interest-bearing security. +Syntax +YIELDDISC(Settlement; Maturity; Price; Redemption; Basis) + Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - + Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - + Price is the price (purchase price) of the security per 100 currency units of par value. - + Redemption is the redemption value per 100 currency units of par value. -Example -A non-interest-bearing security is purchased on 1999-02-15. It matures on 1999-03-01. The price is 99.795 currency units per 100 units of par value, the redemption value is 100 units. The basis is 2. How high is the yield? -=YIELDDISC("1999-02-15"; "1999-03-01"; 99.795; 100; 2) returns 0.052823 or 5.2823 per cent. +Example +A non-interest-bearing security is purchased on 1999-02-15. It matures on 1999-03-01. The price is 99.795 currency units per 100 units of par value, the redemption value is 100 units. The basis is 2. How high is the yield? +=YIELDDISC("1999-02-15"; "1999-03-01"; 99.795; 100; 2) returns 0.052823 or 5.2823 per cent.
YIELDMAT function rates of return;securities with interest paid on maturity mw added one entry -YIELDMAT -Calculates the annual yield of a security, the interest of which is paid on the date of maturity. -Syntax -YIELDMAT(Settlement; Maturity; Issue; Rate; Price; Basis) - +YIELDMAT +Calculates the annual yield of a security, the interest of which is paid on the date of maturity. +Syntax +YIELDMAT(Settlement; Maturity; Issue; Rate; Price; Basis) + Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - + Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - + Issue is the date of issue of the security. - + Rate is the interest rate of the security on the issue date. - + Price is the price (purchase price) of the security per 100 currency units of par value. -Example -A security is purchased on 1999-03-15. It matures on 1999-11-03. The issue date was 1998-11-08. The rate of interest is 6.25%, the price is 100.0123 units. The basis is 0. How high is the yield? -=YIELDMAT("1999-03-15"; "1999-11-03"; "1998-11-08"; 0.0625; 100.0123; 0) returns 0.060954 or 6.0954 per cent. +Example +A security is purchased on 1999-03-15. It matures on 1999-11-03. The issue date was 1998-11-08. The rate of interest is 6.25%, the price is 100.0123 units. The basis is 0. How high is the yield? +=YIELDMAT("1999-03-15"; "1999-11-03"; "1998-11-08"; 0.0625; 100.0123; 0) returns 0.060954 or 6.0954 per cent.
calculating;annuities @@ -517,26 +517,26 @@ PMT function -PMT -Returns the periodic payment for an annuity with constant interest rates. -Syntax -PMT(Rate; NPer; PV; FV; Type) - +PMT +Returns the periodic payment for an annuity with constant interest rates. +Syntax +PMT(Rate; NPer; PV; FV; Type) + Rate is the periodic interest rate. - + NPer is the number of periods in which annuity is paid. - + PV is the present value (cash value) in a sequence of payments. - + FV (optional) is the desired value (future value) to be reached at the end of the periodic payments. - + Type (optional) is the due date for the periodic payments. Type=1 is payment at the beginning and Type=0 is payment at the end of each period. - + -Example -What are the periodic payments at a yearly interest rate of 1.99% if the payment time is 3 years and the cash value is 25,000 currency units. There are 36 months as 36 payment periods, and the interest rate per payment period is 1.99%/12. - +Example +What are the periodic payments at a yearly interest rate of 1.99% if the payment time is 3 years and the cash value is 25,000 currency units. There are 36 months as 36 payment periods, and the interest rate per payment period is 1.99%/12. + =PMT(1.99%/12;36;25000) = -715.96 currency units. The periodic monthly payment is therefore 715.96 currency units.
@@ -545,20 +545,20 @@ annual return on treasury bills mw changed "treasury bills;..." and aded one entry -TBILLEQ -Calculates the annual return on a treasury bill. A treasury bill is purchased on the settlement date and sold at the full par value on the maturity date, that must fall within the same year. A discount is deducted from the purchase price. -Syntax -TBILLEQ(Settlement; Maturity; Discount) - +TBILLEQ +Calculates the annual return on a treasury bill. A treasury bill is purchased on the settlement date and sold at the full par value on the maturity date, that must fall within the same year. A discount is deducted from the purchase price. +Syntax +TBILLEQ(Settlement; Maturity; Discount) + Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - + Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - + Discount is the percentage discount on acquisition of the security. -Example -Settlement date: March 31 1999, maturity date: June 1 1999, discount: 9.14 per cent. -The return on the treasury bill corresponding to a security is worked out as follows: -=TBILLEQ("1999-03-31";"1999-06-01"; 0.0914) returns 0.094151 or 9.4151 per cent. +Example +Settlement date: March 31 1999, maturity date: June 1 1999, discount: 9.14 per cent. +The return on the treasury bill corresponding to a security is worked out as follows: +=TBILLEQ("1999-03-31";"1999-06-01"; 0.0914) returns 0.094151 or 9.4151 per cent.
TBILLPRICE function @@ -566,20 +566,20 @@ prices;treasury bills mw added two entries -TBILLPRICE -Calculates the price of a treasury bill per 100 currency units. -Syntax -TBILLPRICE(Settlement; Maturity; Discount) - +TBILLPRICE +Calculates the price of a treasury bill per 100 currency units. +Syntax +TBILLPRICE(Settlement; Maturity; Discount) + Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - + Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - + Discount is the percentage discount upon acquisition of the security. -Example -Settlement date: March 31 1999, maturity date: June 1 1999, discount: 9 per cent. -The price of the treasury bill is worked out as follows: -=TBILLPRICE("1999-03-31";"1999-06-01"; 0.09) returns 98.45. +Example +Settlement date: March 31 1999, maturity date: June 1 1999, discount: 9 per cent. +The price of the treasury bill is worked out as follows: +=TBILLPRICE("1999-03-31";"1999-06-01"; 0.09) returns 98.45.
TBILLYIELD function @@ -587,24 +587,24 @@ rates of return of treasury bills mw added two entries -TBILLYIELD -Calculates the yield of a treasury bill. -Syntax -TBILLYIELD(Settlement; Maturity; Price) - +TBILLYIELD +Calculates the yield of a treasury bill. +Syntax +TBILLYIELD(Settlement; Maturity; Price) + Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - + Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - + Price is the price (purchase price) of the treasury bill per 100 currency units of par value. -Example -Settlement date: March 31 1999, maturity date: June 1 1999, price: 98.45 currency units. -The yield of the treasury bill is worked out as follows: -=TBILLYIELD("1999-03-31";"1999-06-01"; 98.45) returns 0.091417 or 9.1417 per cent. +Example +Settlement date: March 31 1999, maturity date: June 1 1999, price: 98.45 currency units. +The yield of the treasury bill is worked out as follows: +=TBILLYIELD("1999-03-31";"1999-06-01"; 98.45) returns 0.091417 or 9.1417 per cent.
-Back to Financial Functions Part One -Forward to Financial Functions Part Three +Back to Financial Functions Part One +Forward to Financial Functions Part Three diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04060120.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04060120.xhp index 5bd5b01e07..da5870de07 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04060120.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04060120.xhp @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ -Bit Operation Functions +Bit Operation Functions
@@ -47,73 +47,73 @@ BITAND function -BITAND -Returns a bitwise logical "and" of the parameters. -Syntax -BITAND(number1; number2) - +BITAND +Returns a bitwise logical "and" of the parameters. +Syntax +BITAND(number1; number2) + Number1 and number2 are positive integers less than 2 ^ 48 (281 474 976 710 656). -Example - +Example + =BITAND(6;10) returns 2 (0110 & 1010 = 0010).
BITOR function -BITOR -Returns a bitwise logical "or" of the parameters. -Syntax -BITOR(number1; number2) - +BITOR +Returns a bitwise logical "or" of the parameters. +Syntax +BITOR(number1; number2) + Number1 and number2 are positive integers less than 2 ^ 48 (281 474 976 710 656). - + =BITOR(6;10) returns 14 (0110 | 1010 = 1110).
BITXOR function -BITXOR -Returns a bitwise logical "exclusive or" of the parameters. -Syntax -BITXOR(number1; number2) - +BITXOR +Returns a bitwise logical "exclusive or" of the parameters. +Syntax +BITXOR(number1; number2) + Number1 and number2 are positive integers less than 2 ^ 48 (281 474 976 710 656). -Example - +Example + =BITXOR(6;10) returns 12 (0110 ^ 1010 = 1100)
BITLSHIFT function -BITLSHIFT -Shifts a number left by n bits. -Syntax -BITLSHIFT(number; shift) - +BITLSHIFT +Shifts a number left by n bits. +Syntax +BITLSHIFT(number; shift) + Number is a positive integer less than 2 ^ 48 (281 474 976 710 656). - + Shift is the number of positions the bits will be moved to the left. If shift is negative, it is synonymous with BITRSHIFT (number; -shift). -Example - +Example + =BITLSHIFT(6;1) returns 12 (0110 << 1 = 1100).
BITRSHIFT function -BITRSHIFT -Shifts a number right by n bits. -Syntax -BITRSHIFT(number; shift) - +BITRSHIFT +Shifts a number right by n bits. +Syntax +BITRSHIFT(number; shift) + Number is a positive integer less than 2 ^ 48 (281 474 976 710 656). - + Shift is the number of positions the bits will be moved to the right. If shift is negative, it is synonymous with BITLSHIFT (number; -shift). -Example - +Example + =BITRSHIFT(6;1) returns 3 (0110 >> 1 = 0011).
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04060182.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04060182.xhp index 31ec00552b..c1a7813e89 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04060182.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04060182.xhp @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ - Statistical Functions Part Two + Statistical Functions Part Two
@@ -35,18 +35,18 @@ inverse F probability distribution mw added one entry -FINV - Returns the inverse of the F probability distribution. The F distribution is used for F tests in order to set the relation between two differing data sets. - Syntax - FINV(Number; DegreesFreedom1; DegreesFreedom2) - +FINV + Returns the inverse of the F probability distribution. The F distribution is used for F tests in order to set the relation between two differing data sets. + Syntax + FINV(Number; DegreesFreedom1; DegreesFreedom2) + Number is probability value for which the inverse F distribution is to be calculated. - + DegreesFreedom1 is the number of degrees of freedom in the numerator of the F distribution. - + DegreesFreedom2 is the number of degrees of freedom in the denominator of the F distribution. - Example - + Example + =FINV(0.5;5;10) yields 0.93.
@@ -56,15 +56,15 @@ mw added one entry - F.INV - Returns the inverse of the cumulative F distribution. The F distribution is used for F tests in order to set the relation between two differing data sets. - Syntax - F.INV(Number; DegreesFreedom1; DegreesFreedom2) - Number is probability value for which the inverse F distribution is to be calculated. - DegreesFreedom1 is the number of degrees of freedom in the numerator of the F distribution. - DegreesFreedom2 is the number of degrees of freedom in the denominator of the F distribution. - Example - =F.INV(0.5;5;10) yields 0.9319331609. + F.INV + Returns the inverse of the cumulative F distribution. The F distribution is used for F tests in order to set the relation between two differing data sets. + Syntax + F.INV(Number; DegreesFreedom1; DegreesFreedom2) + Number is probability value for which the inverse F distribution is to be calculated. + DegreesFreedom1 is the number of degrees of freedom in the numerator of the F distribution. + DegreesFreedom2 is the number of degrees of freedom in the denominator of the F distribution. + Example + =F.INV(0.5;5;10) yields 0.9319331609.
@@ -73,31 +73,28 @@ mw added one entry - F.INV.RT - Returns the inverse right tail of the F distribution. - Syntax - F.INV.RT(Number; DegreesFreedom1; DegreesFreedom2) - Number is probability value for which the inverse F distribution is to be calculated. - DegreesFreedom1 is the number of degrees of freedom in the numerator of the F distribution. - DegreesFreedom2 is the number of degrees of freedom in the denominator of the F distribution. - Example - =F.INV.RT(0.5;5;10) yields 0.9319331609. + F.INV.RT + Returns the inverse right tail of the F distribution. + Syntax + F.INV.RT(Number; DegreesFreedom1; DegreesFreedom2) + Number is probability value for which the inverse F distribution is to be calculated. + DegreesFreedom1 is the number of degrees of freedom in the numerator of the F distribution. + DegreesFreedom2 is the number of degrees of freedom in the denominator of the F distribution. + Example + =F.INV.RT(0.5;5;10) yields 0.9319331609.
FISHER function -FISHER - Returns the Fisher transformation for x and creates a function close to a normal distribution. - Syntax - FISHER(Number) - +FISHER + Returns the Fisher transformation for x and creates a function close to a normal distribution. + Syntax + FISHER(Number) + Number is the value to be transformed. - Example - + Example + =FISHER(0.5) yields 0.55.
@@ -105,36 +102,30 @@ inverse of Fisher transformation mw added one entry -FISHERINV - Returns the inverse of the Fisher transformation for x and creates a function close to a normal distribution. - Syntax - FISHERINV(Number) - +FISHERINV + Returns the inverse of the Fisher transformation for x and creates a function close to a normal distribution. + Syntax + FISHERINV(Number) + Number is the value that is to undergo reverse-transformation. - Example - + Example + =FISHERINV(0.5) yields 0.46.
FTEST function -FTEST - Returns the result of an F test. - Syntax - FTEST(Data1; Data2) - +FTEST + Returns the result of an F test. + Syntax + FTEST(Data1; Data2) + Data1 is the first record array. - + Data2 is the second record array. - Example - + Example + =FTEST(A1:A30;B1:B12) calculates whether the two data sets are different in their variance and returns the probability that both sets could have come from the same total population.
@@ -142,34 +133,31 @@ F.TEST function - F.TEST - Returns the result of an F test. - Syntax - F.TEST(Data1; Data2) - Data1 is the first record array. - Data2 is the second record array. - Example - =F.TEST(A1:A30;B1:B12) calculates whether the two data sets are different in their variance and returns the probability that both sets could have come from the same total population. + F.TEST + Returns the result of an F test. + Syntax + F.TEST(Data1; Data2) + Data1 is the first record array. + Data2 is the second record array. + Example + =F.TEST(A1:A30;B1:B12) calculates whether the two data sets are different in their variance and returns the probability that both sets could have come from the same total population.
FDIST function -FDIST - Calculates the values of an F distribution. - Syntax - FDIST(Number; DegreesFreedom1; DegreesFreedom2) - +FDIST + Calculates the values of an F distribution. + Syntax + FDIST(Number; DegreesFreedom1; DegreesFreedom2) + Number is the value for which the F distribution is to be calculated. - + degreesFreedom1 is the degrees of freedom in the numerator in the F distribution. - + degreesFreedom2 is the degrees of freedom in the denominator in the F distribution. - Example - + Example + =FDIST(0.8;8;12) yields 0.61.
@@ -177,84 +165,78 @@ F.DIST function - F.DIST - Calculates the values of the left tail of the F distribution. - Syntax - F.DIST(Number; DegreesFreedom1; DegreesFreedom2; Cumulative) - Number is the value for which the F distribution is to be calculated. - degreesFreedom1 is the degrees of freedom in the numerator in the F distribution. - degreesFreedom2 is the degrees of freedom in the denominator in the F distribution. - Cumulative = 0 or False calculates the density function Cumulative = 1 or True calculates the distribution. - Example - =F.DIST(0.8;8;12;0) yields 0.7095282499. - =F.DIST(0.8;8;12;1) yields 0.3856603563. + F.DIST + Calculates the values of the left tail of the F distribution. + Syntax + F.DIST(Number; DegreesFreedom1; DegreesFreedom2; Cumulative) + Number is the value for which the F distribution is to be calculated. + degreesFreedom1 is the degrees of freedom in the numerator in the F distribution. + degreesFreedom2 is the degrees of freedom in the denominator in the F distribution. + Cumulative = 0 or False calculates the density function Cumulative = 1 or True calculates the distribution. + Example + =F.DIST(0.8;8;12;0) yields 0.7095282499. + =F.DIST(0.8;8;12;1) yields 0.3856603563.
F.DIST.RT function - F.DIST.RT - Calculates the values of the right tail of the F distribution. - Syntax - F.DIST.RT(Number; DegreesFreedom1; DegreesFreedom2) - Number is the value for which the F distribution is to be calculated. - degreesFreedom1 is the degrees of freedom in the numerator in the F distribution. - degreesFreedom2 is the degrees of freedom in the denominator in the F distribution. - Example - =F.DIST.RT(0.8;8;12) yields 0.6143396437. + F.DIST.RT + Calculates the values of the right tail of the F distribution. + Syntax + F.DIST.RT(Number; DegreesFreedom1; DegreesFreedom2) + Number is the value for which the F distribution is to be calculated. + degreesFreedom1 is the degrees of freedom in the numerator in the F distribution. + degreesFreedom2 is the degrees of freedom in the denominator in the F distribution. + Example + =F.DIST.RT(0.8;8;12) yields 0.6143396437.
GAMMA function -GAMMA - Returns the Gamma function value. Note that GAMMAINV is not the inverse of GAMMA, but of GAMMADIST. - Syntax - +GAMMA + Returns the Gamma function value. Note that GAMMAINV is not the inverse of GAMMA, but of GAMMADIST. + Syntax + Number is the number for which the Gamma function value is to be calculated.
GAMMAINV function -GAMMAINV - Returns the inverse of the Gamma cumulative distribution GAMMADIST. This function allows you to search for variables with different distribution. - Syntax - GAMMAINV(Number; Alpha; Beta) - +GAMMAINV + Returns the inverse of the Gamma cumulative distribution GAMMADIST. This function allows you to search for variables with different distribution. + Syntax + GAMMAINV(Number; Alpha; Beta) + Number is the probability value for which the inverse Gamma distribution is to be calculated. - + Alpha is the parameter Alpha of the Gamma distribution. - + Beta is the parameter Beta of the Gamma distribution. - Example - + Example + =GAMMAINV(0.8;1;1) yields 1.61.
GAMMA.INV function -GAMMA.INV - Returns the inverse of the Gamma cumulative distribution GAMMADIST. This function allows you to search for variables with different distribution. +GAMMA.INV + Returns the inverse of the Gamma cumulative distribution GAMMADIST. This function allows you to search for variables with different distribution. This function is identical to GAMMAINV and was introduced for interoperability with other office suites. - Syntax - GAMMA.INV(Number; Alpha; Beta) - + Syntax + GAMMA.INV(Number; Alpha; Beta) + Number is the probability value for which the inverse Gamma distribution is to be calculated. - + Alpha is the parameter Alpha of the Gamma distribution. - + Beta is the parameter Beta of the Gamma distribution. - Example - + Example + =GAMMA.INV(0.8;1;1) yields 1.61.
@@ -262,17 +244,14 @@ natural logarithm of Gamma function mw added one entry -GAMMALN - Returns the natural logarithm of the Gamma function: G(x). - Syntax - GAMMALN(Number) - +GAMMALN + Returns the natural logarithm of the Gamma function: G(x). + Syntax + GAMMALN(Number) + Number is the value for which the natural logarithm of the Gamma function is to be calculated. - Example - + Example + =GAMMALN(2) yields 0.
@@ -280,41 +259,35 @@ natural logarithm of Gamma function mw added one entry -GAMMALN.PRECISE - Returns the natural logarithm of the Gamma function: G(x). - Syntax - GAMMALN.PRECISE(Number) - +GAMMALN.PRECISE + Returns the natural logarithm of the Gamma function: G(x). + Syntax + GAMMALN.PRECISE(Number) + Number is the value for which the natural logarithm of the Gamma function is to be calculated. - Example - + Example + =GAMMALN.PRECISE(2) yields 0.
GAMMADIST function -GAMMADIST - Returns the values of a Gamma distribution. - The inverse function is GAMMAINV. - Syntax - GAMMADIST(Number; Alpha; Beta; C) - +GAMMADIST + Returns the values of a Gamma distribution. + The inverse function is GAMMAINV. + Syntax + GAMMADIST(Number; Alpha; Beta; C) + Number is the value for which the Gamma distribution is to be calculated. - + Alpha is the parameter Alpha of the Gamma distribution. - + Beta is the parameter Beta of the Gamma distribution - + C (optional) = 0 or False calculates the density function C = 1 or True calculates the distribution. - Example - + Example + =GAMMADIST(2;1;1;1) yields 0.86.
@@ -340,20 +313,17 @@ normal distribution; standard mw added one entry -GAUSS - Returns the standard normal cumulative distribution. - It is GAUSS(x)=NORMSDIST(x)-0.5 - Syntax - GAUSS(Number) - +GAUSS + Returns the standard normal cumulative distribution. + It is GAUSS(x)=NORMSDIST(x)-0.5 + Syntax + GAUSS(Number) + Number is the value for which the value of the standard normal distribution is to be calculated. - Example - + Example + =GAUSS(0.19) = 0.08 - + =GAUSS(0.0375) = 0.01
@@ -361,17 +331,14 @@ means;geometric mw added one entry -GEOMEAN - Returns the geometric mean of a sample. - Syntax - GEOMEAN(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) - +GEOMEAN + Returns the geometric mean of a sample. + Syntax + GEOMEAN(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) + Number1, Number2,...Number30 are numeric arguments or ranges that represent a random sample. - Example - + Example + =GEOMEAN(23;46;69) = 41.79. The geometric mean value of this random sample is therefore 41.79.
@@ -379,69 +346,61 @@ means;of data set without margin data mw added one entry -TRIMMEAN - Returns the mean of a data set without the Alpha percent of data at the margins. - Syntax - TRIMMEAN(Data; Alpha) - +TRIMMEAN + Returns the mean of a data set without the Alpha percent of data at the margins. + Syntax + TRIMMEAN(Data; Alpha) + Data is the array of data in the sample. - + Alpha is the percentage of the marginal data that will not be taken into consideration. - Example - + Example + =TRIMMEAN(A1:A50; 0.1) calculates the mean value of numbers in A1:A50, without taking into consideration the 5 percent of the values representing the highest values and the 5 percent of the values representing the lowest ones. The percentage numbers refer to the amount of the untrimmed mean value, not to the number of summands.
ZTEST function -ZTEST - Calculates the probability of observing a z-statistic greater than the one computed based on a sample. - Syntax - ZTEST(Data; mu; Sigma) - +ZTEST + Calculates the probability of observing a z-statistic greater than the one computed based on a sample. + Syntax + ZTEST(Data; mu; Sigma) + Data is the given sample, drawn from a normally distributed population. - + mu is the known mean of the population. - + Sigma (optional) is the known standard deviation of the population. If omitted, the standard deviation of the given sample is used. - See also the Wiki page. + See also the Wiki page.
Z.TEST function -Z.TEST -Calculates the probability of observing a z-statistic greater than the one computed based on a sample. -Syntax -Z.TEST(Data; mu; Sigma) -Data is the given sample, drawn from a normally distributed population. -mu is the known mean of the population. -Sigma (optional) is the known standard deviation of the population. If omitted, the standard deviation of the given sample is used. -Example -=Z.TEST(A2:A20; 9; 2) returns the result of a z-test on a sample A2:A20 drawn from a population with known mean 9 and known standard deviation 2. +Z.TEST +Calculates the probability of observing a z-statistic greater than the one computed based on a sample. +Syntax +Z.TEST(Data; mu; Sigma) +Data is the given sample, drawn from a normally distributed population. +mu is the known mean of the population. +Sigma (optional) is the known standard deviation of the population. If omitted, the standard deviation of the given sample is used. +Example +=Z.TEST(A2:A20; 9; 2) returns the result of a z-test on a sample A2:A20 drawn from a population with known mean 9 and known standard deviation 2.
HARMEAN function means;harmonic mw added one entry -HARMEAN - Returns the harmonic mean of a data set. - Syntax - HARMEAN(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) - +HARMEAN + Returns the harmonic mean of a data set. + Syntax + HARMEAN(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) + Number1,Number2,...Number30 are up to 30 values or ranges, that can be used to calculate the harmonic mean. - Example - + Example + =HARMEAN(23;46;69) = 37.64. The harmonic mean of this random sample is thus 37.64
@@ -449,23 +408,20 @@ sampling without replacement mw added one entry -HYPGEOMDIST - Returns the hypergeometric distribution. - Syntax - HYPGEOMDIST(X; NSample; Successes; NPopulation) - +HYPGEOMDIST + Returns the hypergeometric distribution. + Syntax + HYPGEOMDIST(X; NSample; Successes; NPopulation) + X is the number of results achieved in the random sample. - + NSample is the size of the random sample. - + Successes is the number of possible results in the total population. - + NPopulation is the size of the total population. - Example - + Example + =HYPGEOMDIST(2;2;90;100) yields 0.81. If 90 out of 100 pieces of buttered toast fall from the table and hit the floor with the buttered side first, then if 2 pieces of buttered toast are dropped from the table, the probability is 81%, that both will strike buttered side first.
@@ -475,18 +431,18 @@ mw added one entry - HYPGEOM.DIST - Returns the hypergeometric distribution. - Syntax - HYPGEOM.DIST(X; NSample; Successes; NPopulation; Cumulative) - X is the number of results achieved in the random sample. - NSample is the size of the random sample. - Successes is the number of possible results in the total population. - NPopulation is the size of the total population. - Cumulative : 0 or False calculates the probability density function. Other values or True calculates the cumulative distribution function. - Examples - =HYPGEOM.DIST(2;2;90;100;0) yields 0.8090909091. If 90 out of 100 pieces of buttered toast fall from the table and hit the floor with the buttered side first, then if 2 pieces of buttered toast are dropped from the table, the probability is 81%, that both will strike buttered side first. - =HYPGEOM.DIST(2;2;90;100;1) yields 1. + HYPGEOM.DIST + Returns the hypergeometric distribution. + Syntax + HYPGEOM.DIST(X; NSample; Successes; NPopulation; Cumulative) + X is the number of results achieved in the random sample. + NSample is the size of the random sample. + Successes is the number of possible results in the total population. + NPopulation is the size of the total population. + Cumulative : 0 or False calculates the probability density function. Other values or True calculates the cumulative distribution function. + Examples + =HYPGEOM.DIST(2;2;90;100;0) yields 0.8090909091. If 90 out of 100 pieces of buttered toast fall from the table and hit the floor with the buttered side first, then if 2 pieces of buttered toast are dropped from the table, the probability is 81%, that both will strike buttered side first. + =HYPGEOM.DIST(2;2;90;100;1) yields 1.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04060183.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04060183.xhp index 84be734981..73ce3af89d 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04060183.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04060183.xhp @@ -27,95 +27,95 @@ -Statistical Functions Part Three +Statistical Functions Part Three
LARGE function -LARGE -Returns the Rank_c-th largest value in a data set. -Syntax -LARGE(Data; RankC) - +LARGE +Returns the Rank_c-th largest value in a data set. +Syntax +LARGE(Data; RankC) + Data is the cell range of data. - + RankC is the ranking of the value. -Example - +Example + =LARGE(A1:C50;2) gives the second largest value in A1:C50.
SMALL function -SMALL -Returns the Rank_c-th smallest value in a data set. -Syntax -SMALL(Data; RankC) - +SMALL +Returns the Rank_c-th smallest value in a data set. +Syntax +SMALL(Data; RankC) + Data is the cell range of data. - + RankC is the rank of the value. -Example - +Example + =SMALL(A1:C50;2) gives the second smallest value in A1:C50.
CONFIDENCE function -CONFIDENCE -Returns the (1-alpha) confidence interval for a normal distribution. -Syntax -CONFIDENCE(Alpha; StDev; Size) - +CONFIDENCE +Returns the (1-alpha) confidence interval for a normal distribution. +Syntax +CONFIDENCE(Alpha; StDev; Size) + Alpha is the level of the confidence interval. - + StDev is the standard deviation for the total population. - + Size is the size of the total population. -Example - +Example + =CONFIDENCE(0.05;1.5;100) gives 0.29.
CONFIDENCE.T function -CONFIDENCE.T - +CONFIDENCE.T + Returns the (1-alpha) confidence interval for a Student's t distribution. -Syntax -CONFIDENCE.T(Alpha; StDev; Size) - +Syntax +CONFIDENCE.T(Alpha; StDev; Size) + Alpha is the level of the confidence interval. - + StDev is the standard deviation for the total population. - + Size is the size of the total population. -Example - +Example + =CONFIDENCE.T(0.05;1.5;100) gives 0.2976325427.
CONFIDENCE.NORM function -CONFIDENCE.NORM - +CONFIDENCE.NORM + Returns the (1-alpha) confidence interval for a normal distribution. -Syntax -CONFIDENCE.NORM(Alpha; StDev; Size) - +Syntax +CONFIDENCE.NORM(Alpha; StDev; Size) + Alpha is the level of the confidence interval. - + StDev is the standard deviation for the total population. - + Size is the size of the total population. -Example - +Example + =CONFIDENCE.NORM(0.05;1.5;100) gives 0.2939945977.
@@ -123,32 +123,32 @@ coefficient of correlation mw added one entry -CORREL -Returns the correlation coefficient between two data sets. -Syntax -CORREL(Data1; Data2) - +CORREL +Returns the correlation coefficient between two data sets. +Syntax +CORREL(Data1; Data2) + Data1 is the first data set. - + Data2 is the second data set. -Example - +Example + =CORREL(A1:A50;B1:B50) calculates the correlation coefficient as a measure of the linear correlation of the two data sets.
COVAR function -COVAR -Returns the covariance of the product of paired deviations. -Syntax -COVAR(Data1; Data2) - +COVAR +Returns the covariance of the product of paired deviations. +Syntax +COVAR(Data1; Data2) + Data1 is the first data set. - + Data2 is the second data set. -Example - +Example + =COVAR(A1:A30;B1:B30)
@@ -157,59 +157,59 @@ COVARIANCE.P function - COVARIANCE.P - Returns the covariance of the product of paired deviations, for the entire population. - Syntax - COVARIANCE.P(Data1; Data2) - Data1 is the first data set. - Data2 is the second data set. - Example - =COVARIANCE.P(A1:A30;B1:B30) + COVARIANCE.P + Returns the covariance of the product of paired deviations, for the entire population. + Syntax + COVARIANCE.P(Data1; Data2) + Data1 is the first data set. + Data2 is the second data set. + Example + =COVARIANCE.P(A1:A30;B1:B30)
COVARIANCE.S function - COVARIANCE.S - Returns the covariance of the product of paired deviations, for a sample of the population. - Syntax - COVARIANCE.S(Data1; Data2) - Data1 is the first data set. - Data2 is the second data set. - Example - =COVARIANCE.S(A1:A30;B1:B30) + COVARIANCE.S + Returns the covariance of the product of paired deviations, for a sample of the population. + Syntax + COVARIANCE.S(Data1; Data2) + Data1 is the first data set. + Data2 is the second data set. + Example + =COVARIANCE.S(A1:A30;B1:B30)
CRITBINOM function -CRITBINOM -Returns the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is greater than or equal to a criterion value. -Syntax -CRITBINOM(Trials; SP; Alpha) - +CRITBINOM +Returns the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is greater than or equal to a criterion value. +Syntax +CRITBINOM(Trials; SP; Alpha) + Trials is the total number of trials. - + SP is the probability of success for one trial. - + Alpha is the threshold probability to be reached or exceeded. -Example - +Example + =CRITBINOM(100;0.5;0.1) yields 44.
KURT function -KURT -Returns the kurtosis of a data set (at least 4 values required). -Syntax -KURT(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) - +KURT +Returns the kurtosis of a data set (at least 4 values required). +Syntax +KURT(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) + Number1,Number2,...Number30 are numeric arguments or ranges representing a random sample of distribution. -Example - +Example + =KURT(A1;A2;A3;A4;A5;A6)
@@ -218,18 +218,18 @@ inverse of lognormal distribution mw added one entry -LOGINV -Returns the inverse of the lognormal distribution. -Syntax -LOGINV(Number; Mean; StDev) - +LOGINV +Returns the inverse of the lognormal distribution. +Syntax +LOGINV(Number; Mean; StDev) + Number is the probability value for which the inverse standard logarithmic distribution is to be calculated. - + Mean is the arithmetic mean of the standard logarithmic distribution. - + StDev is the standard deviation of the standard logarithmic distribution. -Example - +Example + =LOGINV(0.05;0;1) returns 0.1930408167.
@@ -237,19 +237,19 @@ inverse of lognormal distribution mw added one entry -LOGNORM.INV -Returns the inverse of the lognormal distribution. +LOGNORM.INV +Returns the inverse of the lognormal distribution. This function is identical to LOGINV and was introduced for interoperability with other office suites. -Syntax -LOGNORM.INV(Number; Mean; StDev) - +Syntax +LOGNORM.INV(Number; Mean; StDev) + Number (required) is the probability value for which the inverse standard logarithmic distribution is to be calculated. - + Mean (required) is the arithmetic mean of the standard logarithmic distribution. - + StDev (required) is the standard deviation of the standard logarithmic distribution. -Example - +Example + =LOGNORM.INV(0.05;0;1) returns 0.1930408167.
@@ -257,20 +257,20 @@ lognormal distribution mw added one entry -LOGNORMDIST -Returns the values of a lognormal distribution. -Syntax -LOGNORMDIST(Number; Mean; StDev; Cumulative) - +LOGNORMDIST +Returns the values of a lognormal distribution. +Syntax +LOGNORMDIST(Number; Mean; StDev; Cumulative) + Number is the probability value for which the standard logarithmic distribution is to be calculated. - + Mean (optional) is the mean value of the standard logarithmic distribution. - + StDev (optional) is the standard deviation of the standard logarithmic distribution. - + Cumulative (optional) = 0 calculates the density function, Cumulative = 1 calculates the distribution. -Example - +Example + =LOGNORMDIST(0.1;0;1) returns 0.01.
@@ -278,20 +278,20 @@ lognormal distribution mw added one entry -LOGNORM.DIST -Returns the values of a lognormal distribution. -Syntax -LOGNORM.DIST(Number; Mean; StDev; Cumulative) - +LOGNORM.DIST +Returns the values of a lognormal distribution. +Syntax +LOGNORM.DIST(Number; Mean; StDev; Cumulative) + Number (required) is the probability value for which the standard logarithmic distribution is to be calculated. - + Mean (required) is the mean value of the standard logarithmic distribution. - + StDev (required) is the standard deviation of the standard logarithmic distribution. - + Cumulative (required) = 0 calculates the density function, Cumulative = 1 calculates the distribution. -Example - +Example + =LOGNORM.DIST(0.1;0;1;1) returns 0.0106510993.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp index 09d6b6243f..0530440de6 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp @@ -27,94 +27,82 @@ -Statistical Functions Part Four +Statistical Functions Part Four
MAX function -MAX -Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments. -Returns 0 if no numeric value and no error was encountered in the cell range(s) passed as cell reference(s). Text cells are ignored by MIN() and MAX(). The functions MINA() and MAXA() return 0 if no value (numeric or text) and no error was encountered. Passing a literal string argument to MIN() or MAX(), e.g. MIN("string"), still results in an error. -Syntax -MAX(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) -Number1; Number2;...Number30 are numerical values or ranges. -Example - +MAX +Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments. +Returns 0 if no numeric value and no error was encountered in the cell range(s) passed as cell reference(s). Text cells are ignored by MIN() and MAX(). The functions MINA() and MAXA() return 0 if no value (numeric or text) and no error was encountered. Passing a literal string argument to MIN() or MAX(), e.g. MIN("string"), still results in an error. +Syntax +MAX(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) +Number1; Number2;...Number30 are numerical values or ranges. +Example + =MAX(A1;A2;A3;50;100;200) returns the largest value from the list. - + =MAX(A1:B100) returns the largest value from the list.
MAXA function -MAXA -Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments. In opposite to MAX, here you can enter text. The value of the text is 0. -The functions MINA() and MAXA() return 0 if no value (numeric or text) and no error was encountered. -Syntax -MAXA(Value1; Value2; ... Value30) -Value1; Value2;...Value30 are values or ranges. Text has the value of 0. -Example - +MAXA +Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments. In opposite to MAX, here you can enter text. The value of the text is 0. +The functions MINA() and MAXA() return 0 if no value (numeric or text) and no error was encountered. +Syntax +MAXA(Value1; Value2; ... Value30) +Value1; Value2;...Value30 are values or ranges. Text has the value of 0. +Example + =MAXA(A1;A2;A3;50;100;200;"Text") returns the largest value from the list. - + =MAXA(A1:B100) returns the largest value from the list.
MEDIAN function -MEDIAN -Returns the median of a set of numbers. In a set containing an uneven number of values, the median will be the number in the middle of the set and in a set containing an even number of values, it will be the mean of the two values in the middle of the set. -Syntax -MEDIAN(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) -Number1; Number2;...Number30 are values or ranges, which represent a sample. Each number can also be replaced by a reference. -Example -for an odd number: =MEDIAN(1;5;9;20;21) returns 9 as the median value. -for an even number: =MEDIAN(1;5;9;20) returns the average of the two middle values 5 and 9, thus 7. +MEDIAN +Returns the median of a set of numbers. In a set containing an uneven number of values, the median will be the number in the middle of the set and in a set containing an even number of values, it will be the mean of the two values in the middle of the set. +Syntax +MEDIAN(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) +Number1; Number2;...Number30 are values or ranges, which represent a sample. Each number can also be replaced by a reference. +Example +for an odd number: =MEDIAN(1;5;9;20;21) returns 9 as the median value. +for an even number: =MEDIAN(1;5;9;20) returns the average of the two middle values 5 and 9, thus 7.
MIN function -MIN -Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments. -Returns 0 if no numeric value and no error was encountered in the cell range(s) passed as cell reference(s). Text cells are ignored by MIN() and MAX(). The functions MINA() and MAXA() return 0 if no value (numeric or text) and no error was encountered. Passing a literal string argument to MIN() or MAX(), e.g. MIN("string"), still results in an error. -Syntax -MIN(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) -Number1; Number2;...Number30 are numerical values or ranges. -Example - +MIN +Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments. +Returns 0 if no numeric value and no error was encountered in the cell range(s) passed as cell reference(s). Text cells are ignored by MIN() and MAX(). The functions MINA() and MAXA() return 0 if no value (numeric or text) and no error was encountered. Passing a literal string argument to MIN() or MAX(), e.g. MIN("string"), still results in an error. +Syntax +MIN(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) +Number1; Number2;...Number30 are numerical values or ranges. +Example + =MIN(A1:B100) returns the smallest value in the list.
MINA function -MINA -Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments. Here you can also enter text. The value of the text is 0. -The functions MINA() and MAXA() return 0 if no value (numeric or text) and no error was encountered. -Syntax -MINA(Value1; Value2; ... Value30) -Value1; Value2;...Value30 are values or ranges. Text has the value of 0. -Example - +MINA +Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments. Here you can also enter text. The value of the text is 0. +The functions MINA() and MAXA() return 0 if no value (numeric or text) and no error was encountered. +Syntax +MINA(Value1; Value2; ... Value30) +Value1; Value2;...Value30 are values or ranges. Text has the value of 0. +Example + =MINA(1;"Text";20) returns 0. - + =MINA(A1:B100) returns the smallest value in the list.
@@ -122,13 +110,13 @@ oldref="153">Example averages;statistical functions mw added "averages;" -AVEDEV -Returns the average of the absolute deviations of data points from their mean. Displays the diffusion in a data set. -Syntax -AVEDEV(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) -Number1, Number2,...Number30 are values or ranges that represent a sample. Each number can also be replaced by a reference. -Example - +AVEDEV +Returns the average of the absolute deviations of data points from their mean. Displays the diffusion in a data set. +Syntax +AVEDEV(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) +Number1, Number2,...Number30 are values or ranges that represent a sample. Each number can also be replaced by a reference. +Example + =AVEDEV(A1:A50)
@@ -136,16 +124,13 @@ oldref="153">Example AVERAGE function -AVERAGE -Returns the average of the arguments. -Syntax -AVERAGE(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) -Number1; Number2;...Number30 are numerical values or ranges. -Example - +AVERAGE +Returns the average of the arguments. +Syntax +AVERAGE(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) +Number1; Number2;...Number30 are numerical values or ranges. +Example + =AVERAGE(A1:A50)
@@ -153,16 +138,13 @@ oldref="40">Example AVERAGEA function -AVERAGEA -Returns the average of the arguments. The value of a text is 0. -Syntax -AVERAGEA(Value1; Value2; ... Value30) -Value1; Value2;...Value30 are values or ranges. Text has the value of 0. -Example - +AVERAGEA +Returns the average of the arguments. The value of a text is 0. +Syntax +AVERAGEA(Value1; Value2; ... Value30) +Value1; Value2;...Value30 are values or ranges. Text has the value of 0. +Example + =AVERAGEA(A1:A50)
@@ -179,16 +161,13 @@ oldref="162">Example most common value mw added one entry -MODE -Returns the most common value in a data set. If there are several values with the same frequency, it returns the smallest value. An error occurs when a value doesn't appear twice. -Syntax -MODE(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) -Number1; Number2;...Number30 are numerical values or ranges. -Example - +MODE +Returns the most common value in a data set. If there are several values with the same frequency, it returns the smallest value. An error occurs when a value doesn't appear twice. +Syntax +MODE(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) +Number1; Number2;...Number30 are numerical values or ranges. +Example + =MODE(A1:A50)
@@ -198,46 +177,43 @@ oldref="48">Example most common value mw added one entry -MODE.SNGL -Returns the most frequently occurring, or repetitive, value in an array or range of data. If there are several values with the same frequency, it returns the smallest value. An error occurs when a value doesn't appear twice. -Syntax -MODE.SNGL(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) -Number1; Number2;...Number30 are numerical values or ranges. -If the data set contains no duplicate data points, MODE.SNGL returns the #VALUE! error value. -Example -=MODE.SNGL(A1:A50) +MODE.SNGL +Returns the most frequently occurring, or repetitive, value in an array or range of data. If there are several values with the same frequency, it returns the smallest value. An error occurs when a value doesn't appear twice. +Syntax +MODE.SNGL(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) +Number1; Number2;...Number30 are numerical values or ranges. +If the data set contains no duplicate data points, MODE.SNGL returns the #VALUE! error value. +Example +=MODE.SNGL(A1:A50)
MODE.MULT function most common value mw added one entry -MODE.MULT -Returns a vertical array of the statistical modes (the most frequently occurring values) within a list of supplied numbers. -Syntax -MODE.MULT(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) -Number1; Number2;...Number30 are numerical values or ranges. -As the MODE.MULT function returns an array of values, it must be entered as an array formula. If the function is not entered as an array formula, only the first mode is returned, which is the same as using the MODE.SNGL function. -Example -=MODE.MULT(A1:A50) +MODE.MULT +Returns a vertical array of the statistical modes (the most frequently occurring values) within a list of supplied numbers. +Syntax +MODE.MULT(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) +Number1; Number2;...Number30 are numerical values or ranges. +As the MODE.MULT function returns an array of values, it must be entered as an array formula. If the function is not entered as an array formula, only the first mode is returned, which is the same as using the MODE.SNGL function. +Example +=MODE.MULT(A1:A50)
NEGBINOMDIST function negative binomial distribution mw added one entry -NEGBINOMDIST -Returns the negative binomial distribution. -Syntax -NEGBINOMDIST(X; R; SP) -X represents the value returned for unsuccessful tests. -R represents the value returned for successful tests. -SP is the probability of the success of an attempt. -Example - +NEGBINOMDIST +Returns the negative binomial distribution. +Syntax +NEGBINOMDIST(X; R; SP) +X represents the value returned for unsuccessful tests. +R represents the value returned for successful tests. +SP is the probability of the success of an attempt. +Example + =NEGBINOMDIST(1;1;0.5) returns 0.25.
@@ -245,36 +221,32 @@ oldref="58">Example negative binomial distribution mw added one entry -NEGBINOM.DIST -Returns the negative binomial density or distribution function. -Syntax -NEGBINOM.DIST(X; R; SP; Cumulative) -X represents the value returned for unsuccessful tests. -R represents the value returned for successful tests. -SP is the probability of the success of an attempt. -Cumulative = 0 calculates the density function, Cumulative = 1 calculates the distribution. -Example -=NEGBINOM.DIST(1;1;0.5;0) returns 0.25. -=NEGBINOM.DIST(1;1;0.5;1) returns 0.75. +NEGBINOM.DIST +Returns the negative binomial density or distribution function. +Syntax +NEGBINOM.DIST(X; R; SP; Cumulative) +X represents the value returned for unsuccessful tests. +R represents the value returned for successful tests. +SP is the probability of the success of an attempt. +Cumulative = 0 calculates the density function, Cumulative = 1 calculates the distribution. +Example +=NEGBINOM.DIST(1;1;0.5;0) returns 0.25. +=NEGBINOM.DIST(1;1;0.5;1) returns 0.75.
NORMINV function normal distribution;inverse of mw added one entry -NORMINV -Returns the inverse of the normal cumulative distribution. -Syntax -NORMINV(Number; Mean; StDev) -Number represents the probability value used to determine the inverse normal distribution. -Mean represents the mean value in the normal distribution. -StDev represents the standard deviation of the normal distribution. -Example - +NORMINV +Returns the inverse of the normal cumulative distribution. +Syntax +NORMINV(Number; Mean; StDev) +Number represents the probability value used to determine the inverse normal distribution. +Mean represents the mean value in the normal distribution. +StDev represents the standard deviation of the normal distribution. +Example + =NORMINV(0.9;63;5) returns 69.41. If the average egg weighs 63 grams with a standard deviation of 5, then there will be 90% probability that the egg will not be heavier than 69.41g grams.
@@ -282,17 +254,15 @@ oldref="68">Example normal distribution;inverse of mw added one entry -NORM.INV -Returns the inverse of the normal cumulative distribution. -Syntax -NORM.INV(Number; Mean; StDev) -Number represents the probability value used to determine the inverse normal distribution. -Mean represents the mean value in the normal distribution. -StDev represents the standard deviation of the normal distribution. -Example - +NORM.INV +Returns the inverse of the normal cumulative distribution. +Syntax +NORM.INV(Number; Mean; StDev) +Number represents the probability value used to determine the inverse normal distribution. +Mean represents the mean value in the normal distribution. +StDev represents the standard deviation of the normal distribution. +Example + =NORM.INV(0.9;63;5) returns 69.4077578277. If the average egg weighs 63 grams with a standard deviation of 5, then there will be 90% probability that the egg will not be heavier than 69.41g grams.
@@ -300,21 +270,18 @@ oldref="68">Example density function mw added one entry -NORMDIST -Returns the density function or the normal cumulative distribution. -Syntax -NORMDIST(Number; Mean; StDev; C) -Number is the value of the distribution based on which the normal distribution is to be calculated. -Mean is the mean value of the distribution. -StDev is the standard deviation of the distribution. -C is optional. C = 0 calculates the density function, C = 1 calculates the distribution. -Example - +NORMDIST +Returns the density function or the normal cumulative distribution. +Syntax +NORMDIST(Number; Mean; StDev; C) +Number is the value of the distribution based on which the normal distribution is to be calculated. +Mean is the mean value of the distribution. +StDev is the standard deviation of the distribution. +C is optional. C = 0 calculates the density function, C = 1 calculates the distribution. +Example + =NORMDIST(70;63;5;0) returns 0.03. - + =NORMDIST(70;63;5;1) returns 0.92.
@@ -322,74 +289,64 @@ oldref="79">Example density function mw added one entry -NORM.DIST -Returns the density function or the normal cumulative distribution. -Syntax -NORM.DIST(Number; Mean; StDev; C) -Number is the value of the distribution based on which the normal distribution is to be calculated. -Mean is the mean value of the distribution. -StDev is the standard deviation of the distribution. -C = 0 calculates the density function, C = 1 calculates the distribution. -Example - +NORM.DIST +Returns the density function or the normal cumulative distribution. +Syntax +NORM.DIST(Number; Mean; StDev; C) +Number is the value of the distribution based on which the normal distribution is to be calculated. +Mean is the mean value of the distribution. +StDev is the standard deviation of the distribution. +C = 0 calculates the density function, C = 1 calculates the distribution. +Example + =NORM.DIST(70;63;5;0) returns 0.029945493. - + =NORM.DIST(70;63;5;1) returns 0.9192433408.
PEARSON function -PEARSON -Returns the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient r. -Syntax -PEARSON(Data1; Data2) -Data1 represents the array of the first data set. -Data2 represents the array of the second data set. -Example - +PEARSON +Returns the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient r. +Syntax +PEARSON(Data1; Data2) +Data1 represents the array of the first data set. +Data2 represents the array of the second data set. +Example + =PEARSON(A1:A30;B1:B30) returns the Pearson correlation coefficient of both data sets.
PHI function -PHI -Returns the values of the distribution function for a standard normal distribution. -Syntax -PHI(Number) -Number represents the value based on which the standard normal distribution is calculated. -Example - +PHI +Returns the values of the distribution function for a standard normal distribution. +Syntax +PHI(Number) +Number represents the value based on which the standard normal distribution is calculated. +Example + =PHI(2.25) = 0.03 - + =PHI(-2.25) = 0.03 - + =PHI(0) = 0.4
POISSON function -POISSON -Returns the Poisson distribution. -Syntax -POISSON(Number; Mean; C) -Number represents the value based on which the Poisson distribution is calculated. -Mean represents the middle value of the Poisson distribution. -C (optional) = 0 or False calculates the density function; C = 1 or True calculates the distribution. When omitted, the default value True is inserted when you save the document, for best compatibility with other programs and older versions of %PRODUCTNAME. -Example - +POISSON +Returns the Poisson distribution. +Syntax +POISSON(Number; Mean; C) +Number represents the value based on which the Poisson distribution is calculated. +Mean represents the middle value of the Poisson distribution. +C (optional) = 0 or False calculates the density function; C = 1 or True calculates the distribution. When omitted, the default value True is inserted when you save the document, for best compatibility with other programs and older versions of %PRODUCTNAME. +Example + =POISSON(60;50;1) returns 0.93.
@@ -397,153 +354,144 @@ oldref="109">Example POISSON.DIST function - POISSON.DIST - Returns the Poisson distribution. - Syntax - POISSON.DIST(Number; Mean; C) - Number represents the value based on which the Poisson distribution is calculated. - Mean represents the middle value of the Poisson distribution. - C (optional) = 0 or False calculates the density function; C = 1 or True calculates the distribution. When omitted, the default value True is inserted when you save the document, for best compatibility with other programs and older versions of %PRODUCTNAME. - Example - =POISSON.DIST(60;50;1) returns 0.9278398202. + POISSON.DIST + Returns the Poisson distribution. + Syntax + POISSON.DIST(Number; Mean; C) + Number represents the value based on which the Poisson distribution is calculated. + Mean represents the middle value of the Poisson distribution. + C (optional) = 0 or False calculates the density function; C = 1 or True calculates the distribution. When omitted, the default value True is inserted when you save the document, for best compatibility with other programs and older versions of %PRODUCTNAME. + Example + =POISSON.DIST(60;50;1) returns 0.9278398202.
PERCENTILE function -PERCENTILE -Returns the alpha-percentile of data values in an array. A percentile returns the scale value for a data series which goes from the smallest (Alpha=0) to the largest value (alpha=1) of a data series. For Alpha = 25%, the percentile means the first quartile; Alpha = 50% is the MEDIAN. -Syntax -PERCENTILE(Data; Alpha) -Data represents the array of data. -Alpha represents the percentage of the scale between 0 and 1. -Example - +PERCENTILE +Returns the alpha-percentile of data values in an array. A percentile returns the scale value for a data series which goes from the smallest (Alpha=0) to the largest value (alpha=1) of a data series. For Alpha = 25%, the percentile means the first quartile; Alpha = 50% is the MEDIAN. +Syntax +PERCENTILE(Data; Alpha) +Data represents the array of data. +Alpha represents the percentage of the scale between 0 and 1. +Example + =PERCENTILE(A1:A50;0.1) represents the value in the data set, which equals 10% of the total data scale in A1:A50.
PERCENTILE.EXC function -PERCENTILE.EXC -Returns the Alpha'th percentile of a supplied range of values for a given value of Alpha, within the range 0 to 1 (exclusive). A percentile returns the scale value for a data series which goes from the smallest (Alpha=0) to the largest value (Alpha=1) of a data series. For Alpha = 25%, the percentile means the first quartile; Alpha = 50% is the MEDIAN. -If Alpha is not a multiple of 1/(n+1), (where n is the number of values in the supplied array), the function interpolates between the values in the supplied array, to calculate the percentile value. However, if Alpha is less than 1/(n+1) or Alpha is greater than n/(n+1), the function is unable to interpolate, and so returns an error. +PERCENTILE.EXC +Returns the Alpha'th percentile of a supplied range of values for a given value of Alpha, within the range 0 to 1 (exclusive). A percentile returns the scale value for a data series which goes from the smallest (Alpha=0) to the largest value (Alpha=1) of a data series. For Alpha = 25%, the percentile means the first quartile; Alpha = 50% is the MEDIAN. +If Alpha is not a multiple of 1/(n+1), (where n is the number of values in the supplied array), the function interpolates between the values in the supplied array, to calculate the percentile value. However, if Alpha is less than 1/(n+1) or Alpha is greater than n/(n+1), the function is unable to interpolate, and so returns an error. The difference between PERCENTILE.INC and PERCENTILE.EXC is that, in the PERCENTILE.INC function the value of alpha is is within the range 0 to 1 inclusive, and in the PERCENTILE.EXC function, the value of alpha is within the range 0 to 1 exclusive. -Syntax -PERCENTILE.EXC(Data; Alpha) -Data represents the array of data. -Alpha represents the percentage of the scale between 0 and 1. -Example -=PERCENTILE.EXC(A1:A50;10%) represents the value in the data set, which equals 10% of the total data scale in A1:A50. +Syntax +PERCENTILE.EXC(Data; Alpha) +Data represents the array of data. +Alpha represents the percentage of the scale between 0 and 1. +Example +=PERCENTILE.EXC(A1:A50;10%) represents the value in the data set, which equals 10% of the total data scale in A1:A50.
PERCENTILE.INC function -PERCENTILE.INC -Returns the alpha-percentile of data values in an array. A percentile returns the scale value for a data series which goes from the smallest (Alpha=0) to the largest value (alpha=1) of a data series. For Alpha = 25%, the percentile means the first quartile; Alpha = 50% is the MEDIAN. +PERCENTILE.INC +Returns the alpha-percentile of data values in an array. A percentile returns the scale value for a data series which goes from the smallest (Alpha=0) to the largest value (alpha=1) of a data series. For Alpha = 25%, the percentile means the first quartile; Alpha = 50% is the MEDIAN. The difference between PERCENTILE.INC and PERCENTILE.EXC is that, in the PERCENTILE.INC function the value of alpha is is within the range 0 to 1 inclusive, and in the PERCENTILE.EXC function, the value of alpha is within the range 0 to 1 exclusive. -Syntax -PERCENTILE.INC(Data; Alpha) -Data represents the array of data. -Alpha represents the percentage of the scale between 0 and 1. -Example -=PERCENTILE.INC(A1:A50;0.1) represents the value in the data set, which equals 10% of the total data scale in A1:A50. +Syntax +PERCENTILE.INC(Data; Alpha) +Data represents the array of data. +Alpha represents the percentage of the scale between 0 and 1. +Example +=PERCENTILE.INC(A1:A50;0.1) represents the value in the data set, which equals 10% of the total data scale in A1:A50.
PERCENTRANK function -PERCENTRANK -Returns the percentage rank of a value in a sample. -Syntax -PERCENTRANK(Data; Value; Significance) -Data represents the array of data in the sample. -Value represents the value whose percentile rank must be determined. +PERCENTRANK +Returns the percentage rank of a value in a sample. +Syntax +PERCENTRANK(Data; Value; Significance) +Data represents the array of data in the sample. +Value represents the value whose percentile rank must be determined. Significance An optional argument that specifies the number of significant digits that the returned percentage value is rounded to. If omitted, a value of 3 is used. -Example - +Example + =PERCENTRANK(A1:A50;50) returns the percentage rank of the value 50 from the total range of all values found in A1:A50. If 50 falls outside the total range, an error message will appear.
PERCENTRANK.EXC function -PERCENTRANK.EXC - Returns the relative position, between 0 and 1 (exclusive), of a specified value within a supplied array. +PERCENTRANK.EXC + Returns the relative position, between 0 and 1 (exclusive), of a specified value within a supplied array. The difference between PERCENTRANK.INC and PERCENTRANK.EXC is that PERCENTRANK.INC calculates a value in the range 0 to 1 inclusive, whereas the PERCENTRANK.EXC function calculates a value in the range 0 to 1 exclusive. -Syntax -PERCENTRANK.EXC(Data; Value; Significance) -Data represents the array of data in the sample. -Value represents the value whose percentile rank must be determined. -Significance An optional argument that specifies the number of significant digits that the returned percentage value is rounded to. -Example -=PERCENTRANK.EXC(A1:A50;50) returns the percentage rank of the value 50 from the total range of all values found in A1:A50. If 50 falls outside the total range, an error message will appear. +Syntax +PERCENTRANK.EXC(Data; Value; Significance) +Data represents the array of data in the sample. +Value represents the value whose percentile rank must be determined. +Significance An optional argument that specifies the number of significant digits that the returned percentage value is rounded to. +Example +=PERCENTRANK.EXC(A1:A50;50) returns the percentage rank of the value 50 from the total range of all values found in A1:A50. If 50 falls outside the total range, an error message will appear.
PERCENTRANK.INC function -PERCENTRANK.INC -Returns the relative position, between 0 and 1 (inclusive), of a specified value within a supplied array. +PERCENTRANK.INC +Returns the relative position, between 0 and 1 (inclusive), of a specified value within a supplied array. The difference between PERCENTRANK.INC and PERCENTRANK.EXC is that PERCENTRANK.INC calculates a value in the range 0 to 1 inclusive, whereas the PERCENTRANK.EXC function calculates a value in the range 0 to 1 exclusive. -Syntax -PERCENTRANK.INC(Data; Value; Significance) -Data represents the array of data in the sample. -Value represents the value whose percentile rank must be determined. -Significance An optional argument that specifies the number of significant digits that the returned percentage value is rounded to. -Example -=PERCENTRANK.INC(A1:A50;50) returns the percentage rank of the value 50 from the total range of all values found in A1:A50. If 50 falls outside the total range, an error message will appear. +Syntax +PERCENTRANK.INC(Data; Value; Significance) +Data represents the array of data in the sample. +Value represents the value whose percentile rank must be determined. +Significance An optional argument that specifies the number of significant digits that the returned percentage value is rounded to. +Example +=PERCENTRANK.INC(A1:A50;50) returns the percentage rank of the value 50 from the total range of all values found in A1:A50. If 50 falls outside the total range, an error message will appear.
QUARTILE function -QUARTILE -Returns the quartile of a data set. -Syntax -QUARTILE(Data; Type) -Data represents the array of data in the sample. -Type represents the type of quartile. (0 = MIN, 1 = 25%, 2 = 50% (MEDIAN), 3 = 75% and 4 = MAX.) -Example - +QUARTILE +Returns the quartile of a data set. +Syntax +QUARTILE(Data; Type) +Data represents the array of data in the sample. +Type represents the type of quartile. (0 = MIN, 1 = 25%, 2 = 50% (MEDIAN), 3 = 75% and 4 = MAX.) +Example + =QUARTILE(A1:A50;2) returns the value of which 50% of the scale corresponds to the lowest to highest values in the range A1:A50.
QUARTILE.EXC function -QUARTILE.EXC -Returns a requested quartile of a supplied range of values, based on a percentile range of 0 to 1 exclusive. +QUARTILE.EXC +Returns a requested quartile of a supplied range of values, based on a percentile range of 0 to 1 exclusive. The difference between QUARTILE.INC and QUARTILE.EXC is that the QUARTILE.INC function bases its calculation on a percentile range of 0 to 1 inclusive, whereas the QUARTILE.EXC function bases its calculation on a percentile range of 0 to 1 exclusive. -Syntax -QUARTILE.EXC(Data; Type) -Data represents the range of data values for which you want to calculate the specified quartile. -Type An integer between 1 and 3, representing the required quartile. (if type = 1 or 3, the supplied array must contain more than 2 values) -Example - +Syntax +QUARTILE.EXC(Data; Type) +Data represents the range of data values for which you want to calculate the specified quartile. +Type An integer between 1 and 3, representing the required quartile. (if type = 1 or 3, the supplied array must contain more than 2 values) +Example + =QUARTILE.EXC(A1:A50;2) returns the value of which 50% of the scale corresponds to the lowest to highest values in the range A1:A50.
QUARTILE.INC function -QUARTILE.INC -Returns the quartile of a data set. +QUARTILE.INC +Returns the quartile of a data set. The difference between QUARTILE.INC and QUARTILE.EXC is that the QUARTILE.INC function bases its calculation on a percentile range of 0 to 1 inclusive, whereas the QUARTILE.EXC function bases its calculation on a percentile range of 0 to 1 exclusive. -Syntax -QUARTILE.INC(Data; Type) -Data represents the array of data in the sample. -Type represents the type of quartile. (0 = MIN, 1 = 25%, 2 = 50% (MEDIAN), 3 = 75% and 4 = MAX.) -Example - +Syntax +QUARTILE.INC(Data; Type) +Data represents the array of data in the sample. +Type represents the type of quartile. (0 = MIN, 1 = 25%, 2 = 50% (MEDIAN), 3 = 75% and 4 = MAX.) +Example + =QUARTILE.INC(A1:A50;2) returns the value of which 50% of the scale corresponds to the lowest to highest values in the range A1:A50.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04060185.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04060185.xhp index a442033a4f..4648d91728 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04060185.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04060185.xhp @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ - Statistical Functions Part Five + Statistical Functions Part Five
@@ -35,20 +35,20 @@ numbers;determining ranks -RANK - Returns the rank of a number in a sample. - Syntax - RANK(Value; Data; Type) - +RANK + Returns the rank of a number in a sample. + Syntax + RANK(Value; Data; Type) + Value is the value, whose rank is to be determined. - + Data is the array or range of data in the sample. - + Type (optional) is the sequence order. - Type = 0 means descending from the last item of the array to the first (this is the default), - Type = 1 means ascending from the first item of the range to the last. - Example - + Type = 0 means descending from the last item of the array to the first (this is the default), + Type = 1 means ascending from the first item of the range to the last. + Example + =RANK(A10;A1:A50) returns the ranking of the value in A10 in value range A1:A50. If Value does not exist within the range an error message is displayed.
@@ -57,18 +57,18 @@ numbers;determining ranks -RANK.AVG -Returns the statistical rank of a given value, within a supplied array of values. If there are duplicate values in the list, the average rank is returned. +RANK.AVG +Returns the statistical rank of a given value, within a supplied array of values. If there are duplicate values in the list, the average rank is returned. The difference between RANK.AVG and RANK.EQ occurs when there are duplicates in the list of values. The RANK.EQ function returns the lower rank, whereas the RANK.AVG function returns the average rank. -Syntax -RANK.AVG(Value; Data; Type) -Value is the value, whose rank is to be determined. -Data is the array or range of data in the sample. -Type (optional) is the sequence order. -Type = 0 means descending from the last item of the array to the first (this is the default), -Type = 1 means ascending from the first item of the range to the last. -Example -=RANK.AVG(A10;A1:A50) returns the ranking of the value in A10 in value range A1:A50. If Value does not exist within the range an error message is displayed. +Syntax +RANK.AVG(Value; Data; Type) +Value is the value, whose rank is to be determined. +Data is the array or range of data in the sample. +Type (optional) is the sequence order. +Type = 0 means descending from the last item of the array to the first (this is the default), +Type = 1 means ascending from the first item of the range to the last. +Example +=RANK.AVG(A10;A1:A50) returns the ranking of the value in A10 in value range A1:A50. If Value does not exist within the range an error message is displayed.
@@ -76,34 +76,31 @@ numbers;determining ranks -RANK.EQ -Returns the statistical rank of a given value, within a supplied array of values. If there are duplicate values in the list, these are given the same rank. +RANK.EQ +Returns the statistical rank of a given value, within a supplied array of values. If there are duplicate values in the list, these are given the same rank. The difference between RANK.AVG and RANK.EQ occurs when there are duplicates in the list of values. The RANK.EQ function returns the lower rank, whereas the RANK.AVG function returns the average rank. -Syntax -RANK.EQ(Value; Data; Type) -Value is the value, whose rank is to be determined. -Data is the array or range of data in the sample. -Type (optional) is the sequence order. -Type = 0 means descending from the last item of the array to the first (this is the default), -Type = 1 means ascending from the first item of the range to the last. -Example -=RANK.EQ(A10;A1:A50) returns the ranking of the value in A10 in value range A1:A50. If Value does not exist within the range an error message is displayed. +Syntax +RANK.EQ(Value; Data; Type) +Value is the value, whose rank is to be determined. +Data is the array or range of data in the sample. +Type (optional) is the sequence order. +Type = 0 means descending from the last item of the array to the first (this is the default), +Type = 1 means ascending from the first item of the range to the last. +Example +=RANK.EQ(A10;A1:A50) returns the ranking of the value in A10 in value range A1:A50. If Value does not exist within the range an error message is displayed.
SKEW function -SKEW - Returns the skewness of a distribution. - Syntax - SKEW(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) - +SKEW + Returns the skewness of a distribution. + Syntax + SKEW(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) + Number1, Number2...Number30 are numerical values or ranges. - Example - + Example + =SKEW(A1:A50) calculates the value of skew for the data referenced.
@@ -116,21 +113,18 @@ FORECAST function mw made "regression lines" a two level entry -FORECAST - Extrapolates future values based on existing x and y values. - Syntax - FORECAST(Value; DataY; DataX) - +FORECAST + Extrapolates future values based on existing x and y values. + Syntax + FORECAST(Value; DataY; DataX) + Value is the x value, for which the y value on the linear regression is to be returned. - + DataY is the array or range of known y's. - + DataX is the array or range of known x's. - Example - + Example + =FORECAST(50;A1:A50;B1;B50) returns the Y value expected for the X value of 50 if the X and Y values in both references are linked by a linear trend.
@@ -140,19 +134,17 @@ FORECAST.LINEAR - Extrapolates future values based on existing x and y values. - Syntax + Extrapolates future values based on existing x and y values. + Syntax FORECAST.LINEAR(Value; DataY; DataX) - + Value is the x value, for which the y value on the linear regression is to be returned. - + DataY is the array or range of known y's. - + DataX is the array or range of known x's. - Example - + Example + =FORECAST.LINEAR(50;A1:A50;B1;B50) returns the Y value expected for the X value of 50 if the X and Y values in both references are linked by a linear trend.
@@ -160,34 +152,28 @@ standard deviations in statistics;based on a sample -STDEV - Estimates the standard deviation based on a sample. - Syntax - STDEV(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) - +STDEV + Estimates the standard deviation based on a sample. + Syntax + STDEV(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) + Number1, Number2, ... Number30 are numerical values or ranges representing a sample based on an entire population. - Example - + Example + =STDEV(A1:A50) returns the estimated standard deviation based on the data referenced.
STDEVA function -STDEVA - Calculates the standard deviation of an estimation based on a sample. - Syntax - STDEVA(Value1;Value2;...Value30) - +STDEVA + Calculates the standard deviation of an estimation based on a sample. + Syntax + STDEVA(Value1;Value2;...Value30) + Value1, Value2, ...Value30 are values or ranges representing a sample derived from an entire population. Text has the value 0. - Example - + Example + =STDEVA(A1:A50) returns the estimated standard deviation based on the data referenced.
@@ -195,17 +181,14 @@ standard deviations in statistics;based on a population -STDEVP - Calculates the standard deviation based on the entire population. - Syntax - STDEVP(Number1;Number2;...Number30) - +STDEVP + Calculates the standard deviation based on the entire population. + Syntax + STDEVP(Number1;Number2;...Number30) + Number 1,Number 2,...Number 30 are numerical values or ranges representing an entire population. - Example - + Example + =STDEVP(A1:A50) returns a standard deviation of the data referenced.
@@ -214,13 +197,13 @@ standard deviations in statistics;based on a population - STDEV.P - Calculates the standard deviation based on the entire population. - Syntax - STDEV.P(Number1;Number2;...Number30) - Number 1,Number 2,...Number 30 are numerical values or ranges representing an entire population. - Example - =STDEV.P(A1:A50) returns a standard deviation of the data referenced. + STDEV.P + Calculates the standard deviation based on the entire population. + Syntax + STDEV.P(Number1;Number2;...Number30) + Number 1,Number 2,...Number 30 are numerical values or ranges representing an entire population. + Example + =STDEV.P(A1:A50) returns a standard deviation of the data referenced.
@@ -228,29 +211,26 @@ standard deviations in statistics;based on a sample - STDEV.S - Calculates the standard deviation based on sample of the population. - Syntax - STDEV.S(Number1;Number2;...Number30) - Number 1,Number 2,...Number 30 are numerical values or ranges representing a sample of the population. - Example - =STDEV.S(A1:A50) returns a standard deviation of the data referenced. + STDEV.S + Calculates the standard deviation based on sample of the population. + Syntax + STDEV.S(Number1;Number2;...Number30) + Number 1,Number 2,...Number 30 are numerical values or ranges representing a sample of the population. + Example + =STDEV.S(A1:A50) returns a standard deviation of the data referenced.
STDEVPA function -STDEVPA - Calculates the standard deviation based on the entire population. - Syntax - STDEVPA(Value1;Value2;...Value30) - +STDEVPA + Calculates the standard deviation based on the entire population. + Syntax + STDEVPA(Value1;Value2;...Value30) + Value1,value2,...value30 are values or ranges representing an entire population. Text has the value 0. - Example - + Example + =STDEVPA(A1:A50) returns the standard deviation of the data referenced.
@@ -258,21 +238,18 @@ converting;random variables, into normalized values -STANDARDIZE - Converts a random variable to a normalized value. - Syntax - STANDARDIZE(Number; Mean; StDev) - +STANDARDIZE + Converts a random variable to a normalized value. + Syntax + STANDARDIZE(Number; Mean; StDev) + Number is the value to be standardized. - + Mean is the arithmetic mean of the distribution. - + StDev is the standard deviation of the distribution. - Example - + Example + =STANDARDIZE(11;10;1) returns 1. The value 11 in a normal distribution with a mean of 10 and a standard deviation of 1 is as much above the mean of 10, as the value 1 is above the mean of the standard normal distribution.
@@ -280,17 +257,14 @@ normal distribution;inverse of standard -NORMSINV - Returns the inverse of the standard normal cumulative distribution. - Syntax - NORMSINV(Number) - +NORMSINV + Returns the inverse of the standard normal cumulative distribution. + Syntax + NORMSINV(Number) + Number is the probability to which the inverse standard normal distribution is calculated. - Example - + Example + =NORMSINV(0.908789) returns 1.3333.
@@ -298,14 +272,14 @@ normal distribution;inverse of standard -NORM.S.INV - Returns the inverse of the standard normal cumulative distribution. - Syntax - NORM.S.INV(Number) - +NORM.S.INV + Returns the inverse of the standard normal cumulative distribution. + Syntax + NORM.S.INV(Number) + Number is the probability to which the inverse standard normal distribution is calculated. - Example - + Example + =NORM.S.INV(0.908789) returns 1.333334673.
@@ -313,18 +287,15 @@ normal distribution;statistics -NORMSDIST - Returns the standard normal cumulative distribution function. The distribution has a mean of zero and a standard deviation of one. - It is GAUSS(x)=NORMSDIST(x)-0.5 - Syntax - NORMSDIST(Number) - +NORMSDIST + Returns the standard normal cumulative distribution function. The distribution has a mean of zero and a standard deviation of one. + It is GAUSS(x)=NORMSDIST(x)-0.5 + Syntax + NORMSDIST(Number) + Number is the value to which the standard normal cumulative distribution is calculated. - Example - + Example + =NORMSDIST(1) returns 0.84. The area below the standard normal distribution curve to the left of X value 1 is 84% of the total area.
@@ -332,37 +303,34 @@ normal distribution;statistics -NORM.S.DIST - Returns the standard normal cumulative distribution function. The distribution has a mean of zero and a standard deviation of one. - Syntax - NORM.S.DIST(Number; Cumulative) - +NORM.S.DIST + Returns the standard normal cumulative distribution function. The distribution has a mean of zero and a standard deviation of one. + Syntax + NORM.S.DIST(Number; Cumulative) + Number is the value to which the standard normal cumulative distribution is calculated. - + Cumulative 0 or FALSE calculates the probability density function. Any other value or TRUE calculates the cumulative distribution function. - Examples - + Examples + =NORM.S.DIST(1;0) returns 0.2419707245. - + =NORM.S.DIST(1;1) returns 0.8413447461. The area below the standard normal distribution curve to the left of X value 1 is 84% of the total area.
SLOPE function -SLOPE - Returns the slope of the linear regression line. The slope is adapted to the data points set in the y and x values. - Syntax - SLOPE(DataY; DataX) - +SLOPE + Returns the slope of the linear regression line. The slope is adapted to the data points set in the y and x values. + Syntax + SLOPE(DataY; DataX) + DataY is the array or matrix of Y data. - + DataX is the array or matrix of X data. - Example - + Example + =SLOPE(A1:A50;B1:B50)
@@ -371,19 +339,16 @@ standard errors;statistical functions mw changed "standard errors" -STEYX - Returns the standard error of the predicted y value for each x in the regression. - Syntax - STEYX(DataY; DataX) - +STEYX + Returns the standard error of the predicted y value for each x in the regression. + Syntax + STEYX(DataY; DataX) + DataY is the array or matrix of Y data. - + DataX is the array or matrix of X data. - Example - + Example + =STEYX(A1:A50;B1:B50) @@ -392,17 +357,14 @@ sums;of squares of deviations -DEVSQ - Returns the sum of squares of deviations based on a sample mean. - Syntax - DEVSQ(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) - +DEVSQ + Returns the sum of squares of deviations based on a sample mean. + Syntax + DEVSQ(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) + Number1, Number2, ...Number30 numerical values or ranges representing a sample. - Example - + Example + =DEVSQ(A1:A50) @@ -411,19 +373,16 @@ inverse of t-distribution -TINV - Returns the inverse of the t-distribution. - Syntax - TINV(Number; DegreesFreedom) - +TINV + Returns the inverse of the t-distribution. + Syntax + TINV(Number; DegreesFreedom) + Number is the probability associated with the two-tailed t-distribution. - + DegreesFreedom is the number of degrees of freedom for the t-distribution. - Example - + Example + =TINV(0.1;6) returns 1.94
@@ -432,14 +391,14 @@ one tailed inverse of t-distribution - T.INV - Returns the one tailed inverse of the t-distribution. - Syntax - T.INV(Number; DegreesFreedom) - Number is the probability associated with the one-tailed t-distribution. - DegreesFreedom is the number of degrees of freedom for the t-distribution. - Example - =T.INV(0.1;6) returns -1.4397557473. + T.INV + Returns the one tailed inverse of the t-distribution. + Syntax + T.INV(Number; DegreesFreedom) + Number is the probability associated with the one-tailed t-distribution. + DegreesFreedom is the number of degrees of freedom for the t-distribution. + Example + =T.INV(0.1;6) returns -1.4397557473.
@@ -447,36 +406,33 @@ inverse of two tailed t-distribution - T.INV.2T - Calculates the inverse of the two-tailed Student's T Distribution , which is a continuous probability distribution that is frequently used for testing hypotheses on small sample data sets. - Syntax - T.INV.2T(Number; DegreesFreedom) - Number is the probability associated with the two-tailed t-distribution. - DegreesFreedom is the number of degrees of freedom for the t-distribution. - Example - =T.INV.2T(0.25; 10) returns 1.221255395. + T.INV.2T + Calculates the inverse of the two-tailed Student's T Distribution , which is a continuous probability distribution that is frequently used for testing hypotheses on small sample data sets. + Syntax + T.INV.2T(Number; DegreesFreedom) + Number is the probability associated with the two-tailed t-distribution. + DegreesFreedom is the number of degrees of freedom for the t-distribution. + Example + =T.INV.2T(0.25; 10) returns 1.221255395.
TTEST function -TTEST - Returns the probability associated with a Student's t-Test. - Syntax - TTEST(Data1; Data2; Mode; Type) - +TTEST + Returns the probability associated with a Student's t-Test. + Syntax + TTEST(Data1; Data2; Mode; Type) + Data1 is the dependent array or range of data for the first record. - + Data2 is the dependent array or range of data for the second record. - + Mode = 1 calculates the one-tailed test, Mode = 2 the two- tailed test. - + Type is the kind of t-test to perform. Type 1 means paired. Type 2 means two samples, equal variance (homoscedastic). Type 3 means two samples, unequal variance (heteroscedastic). - Example - + Example + =TTEST(A1:A50;B1:B50;2;2)
@@ -485,37 +441,34 @@ T.TEST function - T.TEST - Returns the probability associated with a Student's t-Test. - Syntax - T.TEST(Data1; Data2; Mode; Type) - Data1 is the dependent array or range of data for the first record. - Data2 is the dependent array or range of data for the second record. - Mode = 1 calculates the one-tailed test, Mode = 2 the two- tailed test. - Type is the kind of t-test to perform. Type 1 means paired. Type 2 means two samples, equal variance (homoscedastic). Type 3 means two samples, unequal variance (heteroscedastic). - Example - =T.TEST(A1:A50;B1:B50;2;2) + T.TEST + Returns the probability associated with a Student's t-Test. + Syntax + T.TEST(Data1; Data2; Mode; Type) + Data1 is the dependent array or range of data for the first record. + Data2 is the dependent array or range of data for the second record. + Mode = 1 calculates the one-tailed test, Mode = 2 the two- tailed test. + Type is the kind of t-test to perform. Type 1 means paired. Type 2 means two samples, equal variance (homoscedastic). Type 3 means two samples, unequal variance (heteroscedastic). + Example + =T.TEST(A1:A50;B1:B50;2;2)
TDIST function t-distribution -TDIST - Returns the t-distribution. - Syntax - TDIST(Number; DegreesFreedom; Mode) - +TDIST + Returns the t-distribution. + Syntax + TDIST(Number; DegreesFreedom; Mode) + Number is the value for which the t-distribution is calculated. - + DegreesFreedom is the number of degrees of freedom for the t-distribution. - + Mode = 1 returns the one-tailed test, Mode = 2 returns the two-tailed test. - Example - + Example + =TDIST(12;5;1)
@@ -525,15 +478,15 @@ t-distribution - T.DIST - Returns the t-distribution. - Syntax - T.DIST(Number; DegreesFreedom; Cumulative) - Number is the value for which the t-distribution is calculated. - DegreesFreedom is the number of degrees of freedom for the t-distribution. - Cumulative = 0 or FALSE returns the probability density function, 1 or TRUE returns the cumulative distribution function. - Example - =T.DIST(1; 10; TRUE) returns 0.8295534338 + T.DIST + Returns the t-distribution. + Syntax + T.DIST(Number; DegreesFreedom; Cumulative) + Number is the value for which the t-distribution is calculated. + DegreesFreedom is the number of degrees of freedom for the t-distribution. + Cumulative = 0 or FALSE returns the probability density function, 1 or TRUE returns the cumulative distribution function. + Example + =T.DIST(1; 10; TRUE) returns 0.8295534338
@@ -541,14 +494,14 @@ two tailed t-distribution - T.DIST.2T - Calculates the two-tailed Student's T Distribution, which is a continuous probability distribution that is frequently used for testing hypotheses on small sample data sets. - Syntax - T.DIST.2T(Number; DegreesFreedom) - Number is the value for which the t-distribution is calculated. - DegreesFreedom is the number of degrees of freedom for the t-distribution. - Example - =T.DIST.2T(1; 10) returns 0.3408931323. + T.DIST.2T + Calculates the two-tailed Student's T Distribution, which is a continuous probability distribution that is frequently used for testing hypotheses on small sample data sets. + Syntax + T.DIST.2T(Number; DegreesFreedom) + Number is the value for which the t-distribution is calculated. + DegreesFreedom is the number of degrees of freedom for the t-distribution. + Example + =T.DIST.2T(1; 10) returns 0.3408931323.
@@ -556,31 +509,28 @@ right tailed t-distribution - T.DIST.RT - Calculates the right-tailed Student's T Distribution, which is a continuous probability distribution that is frequently used for testing hypotheses on small sample data sets. - Syntax - T.DIST.RT(Number; DegreesFreedom) - Number is the value for which the t-distribution is calculated. - DegreesFreedom is the number of degrees of freedom for the t-distribution. - Example - =T.DIST.RT(1; 10) returns 0.1704465662. + T.DIST.RT + Calculates the right-tailed Student's T Distribution, which is a continuous probability distribution that is frequently used for testing hypotheses on small sample data sets. + Syntax + T.DIST.RT(Number; DegreesFreedom) + Number is the value for which the t-distribution is calculated. + DegreesFreedom is the number of degrees of freedom for the t-distribution. + Example + =T.DIST.RT(1; 10) returns 0.1704465662.
VAR function variances -VAR - Estimates the variance based on a sample. - Syntax - VAR(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) - +VAR + Estimates the variance based on a sample. + Syntax + VAR(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) + Number1, Number2, ...Number30 are numerical values or ranges representing a sample based on an entire population. - Example - + Example + =VAR(A1:A50)
@@ -590,29 +540,26 @@ variances - VAR.S - Estimates the variance based on a sample. - Syntax - VAR.S(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) - Number1, Number2, ...Number30 are numerical values or ranges representing a sample based on an entire population. - Example - =VAR.S(A1:A50) + VAR.S + Estimates the variance based on a sample. + Syntax + VAR.S(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) + Number1, Number2, ...Number30 are numerical values or ranges representing a sample based on an entire population. + Example + =VAR.S(A1:A50)
VARA function -VARA - Estimates a variance based on a sample. The value of text is 0. - Syntax - VARA(Value1; Value2; ...Value30) - +VARA + Estimates a variance based on a sample. The value of text is 0. + Syntax + VARA(Value1; Value2; ...Value30) + Value1, Value2,...Value30 are values or ranges representing a sample derived from an entire population. Text has the value 0. - Example - + Example + =VARA(A1:A50)
@@ -620,17 +567,14 @@ VARP function -VARP - Calculates a variance based on the entire population. - Syntax - VARP(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) - +VARP + Calculates a variance based on the entire population. + Syntax + VARP(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) + Number1, Number2, ...Number30 are numerical values or ranges representing an entire population. - Example - + Example + =VARP(A1:A50) @@ -639,29 +583,26 @@ VAR.P function - VAR.P - Calculates a variance based on the entire population. - Syntax - VAR.P(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) - Number1, Number2, ...Number30 are numerical values or ranges representing an entire population. - Example - =VAR.P(A1:A50) + VAR.P + Calculates a variance based on the entire population. + Syntax + VAR.P(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) + Number1, Number2, ...Number30 are numerical values or ranges representing an entire population. + Example + =VAR.P(A1:A50)
VARPA function -VARPA - Calculates the variance based on the entire population. The value of text is 0. - Syntax - VARPA(Value1; Value2; ...Value30) - +VARPA + Calculates the variance based on the entire population. The value of text is 0. + Syntax + VARPA(Value1; Value2; ...Value30) + Value1,value2,...Value30 are values or ranges representing an entire population. - Example - + Example + =VARPA(A1:A50)
@@ -670,112 +611,100 @@ number of permutations -PERMUT - Returns the number of permutations for a given number of objects. - Syntax - PERMUT(Count1; Count2) - +PERMUT + Returns the number of permutations for a given number of objects. + Syntax + PERMUT(Count1; Count2) + Count1 is the total number of objects. - + Count2 is the number of objects in each permutation. - Example - + Example + =PERMUT(6;3) returns 120. There are 120 different possibilities, to pick a sequence of 3 playing cards out of 6 playing cards.
PERMUTATIONA function -PERMUTATIONA - Returns the number of permutations for a given number of objects (repetition allowed). - Syntax - PERMUTATIONA(Count1; Count2) - +PERMUTATIONA + Returns the number of permutations for a given number of objects (repetition allowed). + Syntax + PERMUTATIONA(Count1; Count2) + Count1 is the total number of objects. - + Count2 is the number of objects in each permutation. - Example - How often can 2 objects be selected from a total of 11 objects? - + Example + How often can 2 objects be selected from a total of 11 objects? + =PERMUTATIONA(11;2) returns 121. - + =PERMUTATIONA(6;3) returns 216. There are 216 different possibilities to put a sequence of 3 playing cards together out of six playing cards if every card is returned before the next one is drawn.
PROB function -PROB - Returns the probability that values in a range are between two limits. If there is no End value, this function calculates the probability based on the principle that the Data values are equal to the value of Start. - Syntax - PROB(Data; Probability; Start; End) - +PROB + Returns the probability that values in a range are between two limits. If there is no End value, this function calculates the probability based on the principle that the Data values are equal to the value of Start. + Syntax + PROB(Data; Probability; Start; End) + Data is the array or range of data in the sample. - + Probability is the array or range of the corresponding probabilities. - + Start is the start value of the interval whose probabilities are to be summed. - + End (optional) is the end value of the interval whose probabilities are to be summed. If this parameter is missing, the probability for the Start value is calculated. - Example - + Example + =PROB(A1:A50;B1:B50;50;60) returns the probability with which a value within the range of A1:A50 is also within the limits between 50 and 60. Every value within the range of A1:A50 has a probability within the range of B1:B50.
WEIBULL function -WEIBULL - Returns the values of the Weibull distribution. - The Weibull distribution is a continuous probability distribution, with parameters Alpha > 0 (shape) and Beta > 0 (scale). - If C is 0, WEIBULL calculates the probability density function. - If C is 1, WEIBULL calculates the cumulative distribution function. - Syntax - WEIBULL(Number; Alpha; Beta; C) - +WEIBULL + Returns the values of the Weibull distribution. + The Weibull distribution is a continuous probability distribution, with parameters Alpha > 0 (shape) and Beta > 0 (scale). + If C is 0, WEIBULL calculates the probability density function. + If C is 1, WEIBULL calculates the cumulative distribution function. + Syntax + WEIBULL(Number; Alpha; Beta; C) + Number is the value at which to calculate the Weibull distribution. - + Alpha is the shape parameter of the Weibull distribution. - + Beta is the scale parameter of the Weibull distribution. - + C indicates the type of function. - Example - + Example + =WEIBULL(2;1;1;1) returns 0.86. - See also the Wiki page. + See also the Wiki page.
WEIBULL.DIST function - WEIBULL.DIST - Returns the values of the Weibull distribution. - The Weibull distribution is a continuous probability distribution, with parameters Alpha > 0 (shape) and Beta > 0 (scale). - If C is 0, WEIBULL.DIST calculates the probability density function. - If C is 1, WEIBULL.DIST calculates the cumulative distribution function. - Syntax - WEIBULL.DIST(Number; Alpha; Beta; C) - Number is the value at which to calculate the Weibull distribution. - Alpha is the shape parameter of the Weibull distribution. - Beta is the scale parameter of the Weibull distribution. - C indicates the type of function. - Example - =WEIBULL.DIST(2;1;1;1) returns 0.8646647168. - See also the Wiki page. + WEIBULL.DIST + Returns the values of the Weibull distribution. + The Weibull distribution is a continuous probability distribution, with parameters Alpha > 0 (shape) and Beta > 0 (scale). + If C is 0, WEIBULL.DIST calculates the probability density function. + If C is 1, WEIBULL.DIST calculates the cumulative distribution function. + Syntax + WEIBULL.DIST(Number; Alpha; Beta; C) + Number is the value at which to calculate the Weibull distribution. + Alpha is the shape parameter of the Weibull distribution. + Beta is the scale parameter of the Weibull distribution. + C indicates the type of function. + Example + =WEIBULL.DIST(2;1;1;1) returns 0.8646647168. + See also the Wiki page.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04060199.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04060199.xhp index 042dadf329..0e27de883e 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04060199.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04060199.xhp @@ -39,261 +39,261 @@ comparisons;operators in Calc arithmetical operators reference operators -mw added 7 new index entriesOperators in $[officename] Calc -You can use the following operators in $[officename] Calc: -Arithmetical Operators -These operators return numerical results. +mw added 7 new index entriesOperators in $[officename] Calc +You can use the following operators in $[officename] Calc: +Arithmetical Operators +These operators return numerical results. -Operator +Operator -Name +Name -Example +Example -+ (Plus) ++ (Plus) -Addition +Addition -1+1 +1+1 -- (Minus) +- (Minus) -Subtraction +Subtraction -2-1 +2-1 -- (Minus) +- (Minus) -Negation +Negation --5 +-5 -* (asterisk) +* (asterisk) -Multiplication +Multiplication -2*2 +2*2 -/ (Slash) +/ (Slash) -Division +Division -9/3 +9/3 -% (Percent) +% (Percent) -Percent +Percent -15% +15% -^ (Caret) +^ (Caret) -Exponentiation +Exponentiation -3^2 +3^2
-Comparative operators -These operators return either true or false. +Comparative operators +These operators return either true or false. -Operator +Operator -Name +Name -Example +Example -= (equal sign) += (equal sign) -Equal +Equal -A1=B1 +A1=B1 -> (Greater than) +> (Greater than) -Greater than +Greater than -A1>B1 +A1>B1 -< (Less than) +< (Less than) -Less than +Less than -A1<B1 +A1<B1 ->= (Greater than or equal to) +>= (Greater than or equal to) -Greater than or equal to +Greater than or equal to -A1>=B1 +A1>=B1 -<= (Less than or equal to) +<= (Less than or equal to) -Less than or equal to +Less than or equal to -A1<=B1 +A1<=B1 -<> (Inequality) +<> (Inequality) -Inequality +Inequality -A1<>B1 +A1<>B1
-Text operators -The operator combines separate texts into one text. +Text operators +The operator combines separate texts into one text. -Operator +Operator -Name +Name -Example +Example -& (And) +& (And) text concatenation AND -text concatenation AND +text concatenation AND -"Sun" & "day" is "Sunday" +"Sun" & "day" is "Sunday"
-Reference operators -These operators return a cell range of zero, one or more cells. -Range has the highest precedence, then intersection, and then finally union. +Reference operators +These operators return a cell range of zero, one or more cells. +Range has the highest precedence, then intersection, and then finally union. -Operator +Operator -Name +Name -Example +Example -: (Colon) +: (Colon) -Range +Range -A1:C108 +A1:C108 -! (Exclamation point) +! (Exclamation point) intersection operator -Intersection +Intersection -SUM(A1:B6!B5:C12) -Calculates the sum of all cells in the intersection; in this example, the result yields the sum of cells B5 and B6. +SUM(A1:B6!B5:C12) +Calculates the sum of all cells in the intersection; in this example, the result yields the sum of cells B5 and B6. -~ (Tilde) +~ (Tilde) -Concatenation or union +Concatenation or union -Takes two references and returns a reference list, which is a concatenation of the left reference followed by the right reference. Double entries are referenced twice. See note below this table. +Takes two references and returns a reference list, which is a concatenation of the left reference followed by the right reference. Double entries are referenced twice. See note below this table.
-Reference concatenation using a tilde character was implemented lately. When a formula with the tilde operator exists in a document that is opened in old versions of the software, an error is returned. A reference list is not allowed inside an array expression. +Reference concatenation using a tilde character was implemented lately. When a formula with the tilde operator exists in a document that is opened in old versions of the software, an error is returned. A reference list is not allowed inside an array expression. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04070000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04070000.xhp index 5df801c505..ff28812af4 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04070000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04070000.xhp @@ -32,19 +32,19 @@
-Named Ranges and Expressions -Allows you to name the different sections of your spreadsheet document. By naming the different sections, you can easily navigate through the spreadsheet documents and find specific information. +Named Ranges and Expressions +Allows you to name the different sections of your spreadsheet document. By naming the different sections, you can easily navigate through the spreadsheet documents and find specific information.
-Define +Define -Insert +Insert -Apply +Apply -Labels +Labels diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04070100.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04070100.xhp index 6c1ccbb34f..26b7980381 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04070100.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04070100.xhp @@ -30,53 +30,53 @@ -Define Names -Opens a dialog where you can specify a name for a selected area or a name for a formula expression. +Define Names +Opens a dialog where you can specify a name for a selected area or a name for a formula expression. -Use the mouse to define ranges or type the reference into the Define Name dialog fields. +Use the mouse to define ranges or type the reference into the Define Name dialog fields.
-The Sheet Area box on the Formula bar contains a list of defined names for the ranges or formula expressions and their scope between parenthesis. Click a name from this box to highlight the corresponding reference on the spreadsheet. Names given formulas or parts of a formula are not listed here. +The Sheet Area box on the Formula bar contains a list of defined names for the ranges or formula expressions and their scope between parenthesis. Click a name from this box to highlight the corresponding reference on the spreadsheet. Names given formulas or parts of a formula are not listed here. -Name -Enter the name of the area for which you want to define a reference or a formula expression. All area names already defined in the spreadsheet are listed in the text field above. If you click a name on the list, the corresponding reference in the document will be shown with a blue frame. If multiple cell ranges belong to the same area name, they are displayed with different colored frames. +Name +Enter the name of the area for which you want to define a reference or a formula expression. All area names already defined in the spreadsheet are listed in the text field above. If you click a name on the list, the corresponding reference in the document will be shown with a blue frame. If multiple cell ranges belong to the same area name, they are displayed with different colored frames. -Range or formula expression -The reference of the selected area name is shown here as an absolute value. -To insert a new area reference, place the cursor in this field and use your mouse to select the desired area in any sheet of your spreadsheet document. To insert a new named formula, type the formula expression. +Range or formula expression +The reference of the selected area name is shown here as an absolute value. +To insert a new area reference, place the cursor in this field and use your mouse to select the desired area in any sheet of your spreadsheet document. To insert a new named formula, type the formula expression. -Scope -Select the scope of the named range or named formula. Document (Global) means the name is valid for the whole document. Any other sheet name selected will restrict the scope of the named range or formula expression to that sheet. +Scope +Select the scope of the named range or named formula. Document (Global) means the name is valid for the whole document. Any other sheet name selected will restrict the scope of the named range or formula expression to that sheet. -Range options -Allows you to specify the Area type (optional) for the reference. -Defines additional options related to the type of reference area. +Range options +Allows you to specify the Area type (optional) for the reference. +Defines additional options related to the type of reference area. -Print range -Defines the area as a print range. +Print range +Defines the area as a print range. -Filter -Defines the selected area to be used in an advanced filter. +Filter +Defines the selected area to be used in an advanced filter. -Repeat column -Defines the area as a repeating column. +Repeat column +Defines the area as a repeating column. -Repeat row -Defines the area as a repeating row. +Repeat row +Defines the area as a repeating row. -Add -Click the Add button to add a new defined name. +Add +Click the Add button to add a new defined name. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04070200.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04070200.xhp index 3684cb966f..71fa8061f0 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04070200.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04070200.xhp @@ -36,9 +36,9 @@ Paste Names -Inserts a defined named cell range at the current cursor's position. +Inserts a defined named cell range at the current cursor's position. -You can only insert a cell area after having defined a name for the area. +You can only insert a cell area after having defined a name for the area.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04070300.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04070300.xhp index 6e259a53bd..0cf9e2a505 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04070300.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04070300.xhp @@ -35,26 +35,26 @@ -Creating Names -Allows you to automatically name multiple cell ranges. +Creating Names +Allows you to automatically name multiple cell ranges.
-Select the area containing all the ranges that you want to name. Then choose Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Create. This opens the Create Names dialog, from which you can select the naming options that you want. -Create names from -Defines which part of the spreadsheet is to be used for creating the name. +Select the area containing all the ranges that you want to name. Then choose Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Create. This opens the Create Names dialog, from which you can select the naming options that you want. +Create names from +Defines which part of the spreadsheet is to be used for creating the name. -Top row -Creates the range names from the header row of the selected range. Each column receives a separated name and cell reference. +Top row +Creates the range names from the header row of the selected range. Each column receives a separated name and cell reference. -Left Column -Creates the range names from the entries in the first column of the selected sheet range. Each row receives a separated name and cell reference. +Left Column +Creates the range names from the entries in the first column of the selected sheet range. Each row receives a separated name and cell reference. -Bottom row -Creates the range names from the entries in the last row of the selected sheet range. Each column receives a separated name and cell reference. +Bottom row +Creates the range names from the entries in the last row of the selected sheet range. Each column receives a separated name and cell reference. -Right Column -Creates the range names from the entries in the last column of the selected sheet range. Each row receives a separated name and cell reference. +Right Column +Creates the range names from the entries in the last column of the selected sheet range. Each row receives a separated name and cell reference. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04070400.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04070400.xhp index e9d76b9442..3d434abc68 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04070400.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04070400.xhp @@ -32,34 +32,34 @@ -Define Label Range +Define Label Range -Opens a dialog in which you can define a label range. +Opens a dialog in which you can define a label range.
-The cell contents of a label range can be used like names in formulas - $[officename] recognizes these names in the same manner that it does the predefined names of the weekdays and months. These names are automatically completed when typed into a formula. In addition, the names defined by label ranges will have priority over names defined by automatically generated ranges. -You can set label ranges that contain the same labels on different sheets. $[officename] first searches the label ranges of the current sheet and, following a failed search, the ranges of other sheets. +The cell contents of a label range can be used like names in formulas - $[officename] recognizes these names in the same manner that it does the predefined names of the weekdays and months. These names are automatically completed when typed into a formula. In addition, the names defined by label ranges will have priority over names defined by automatically generated ranges. +You can set label ranges that contain the same labels on different sheets. $[officename] first searches the label ranges of the current sheet and, following a failed search, the ranges of other sheets. -Range -Displays the cell reference of each label range. In order to remove a label range from the list box, select it and then click Delete. +Range +Displays the cell reference of each label range. In order to remove a label range from the list box, select it and then click Delete. -Contains column labels -Includes column labels in the current label range. +Contains column labels +Includes column labels in the current label range. -Contains row labels -Includes row labels in the current label range. +Contains row labels +Includes row labels in the current label range. -For data range -Sets the data range for which the selected label range is valid. To modify it, click in the sheet and select another range with the mouse. +For data range +Sets the data range for which the selected label range is valid. To modify it, click in the sheet and select another range with the mouse. -Add -Adds the current label range to the list. +Add +Adds the current label range to the list.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04090000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04090000.xhp index 091bb0b43c..d84533f2b0 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04090000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04090000.xhp @@ -28,29 +28,27 @@
- + -Locate the file containing the data you want to insert. +Locate the file containing the data you want to insert. -Link to External Data - Inserts data from an HTML, Calc, or Excel file into the current sheet as a link. The data must be located within a named range. +Link to External Data + Inserts data from an HTML, Calc, or Excel file into the current sheet as a link. The data must be located within a named range.
-URL of external data source. - Enter the URL or the file name that contains the data that you want to insert, and then press Enter.only after Enter the URL will be requested from the net. +URL of external data source. + Enter the URL or the file name that contains the data that you want to insert, and then press Enter.only after Enter the URL will be requested from the net. -Available tables/ranges - Select the table or the data range that you want to insert. +Available tables/ranges + Select the table or the data range that you want to insert. -Update every - Enter the number of seconds to wait before the external data are reloaded into the current document. +Update every + Enter the number of seconds to wait before the external data are reloaded into the current document. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/05020000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/05020000.xhp index ba031d6d13..14a141c4da 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/05020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/05020000.xhp @@ -37,15 +37,15 @@ -Format Cells -Allows you to specify a variety of formatting options and to apply attributes to the selected cells. +Format Cells +Allows you to specify a variety of formatting options and to apply attributes to the selected cells.
-Numbers +Numbers -Font +Font diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/05020600.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/05020600.xhp index cc9617ae23..527fe7eb05 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/05020600.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/05020600.xhp @@ -32,27 +32,27 @@
-Cell Protection -Defines protection options for selected cells. +Cell Protection +Defines protection options for selected cells.
-Protection +Protection -Hide all -Hides formulas and contents of the selected cells. +Hide all +Hides formulas and contents of the selected cells. -Protected -Prevents the selected cells from being modified. +Protected +Prevents the selected cells from being modified. This cell protection only takes effect if you also protect the sheet (Tools - Protect Sheet). -Hide formula -Hides formulas in the selected cells. -Print -Defines print options for the sheet. +Hide formula +Hides formulas in the selected cells. +Print +Defines print options for the sheet. -Hide when printing -Keeps the selected cells from being printed. +Hide when printing +Keeps the selected cells from being printed. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/05030000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/05030000.xhp index 41a68b36f8..f56b056f37 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/05030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/05030000.xhp @@ -32,15 +32,15 @@
-Row -Sets the row height and hides or shows selected rows. +Row +Sets the row height and hides or shows selected rows.
-Height +Height -Optimal Height +Optimal Height diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/05030200.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/05030200.xhp index b00734ad9f..0de781c072 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/05030200.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/05030200.xhp @@ -36,17 +36,17 @@ -Optimal Row Heights -Determines the optimal row height for the selected rows. +Optimal Row Heights +Determines the optimal row height for the selected rows. The optimal row height depends on the font size of the largest character in the row. You can use various units of measure.
-Add -Sets additional spacing between the largest character in a row and the cell boundaries. +Add +Sets additional spacing between the largest character in a row and the cell boundaries. -Default value -Restores the default value for the optimal row height. +Default value +Restores the default value for the optimal row height. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/05030300.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/05030300.xhp index 8d400ad102..429fe813b2 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/05030300.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/05030300.xhp @@ -45,22 +45,22 @@ -Hide -Hides selected rows, columns or individual sheets. +Hide +Hides selected rows, columns or individual sheets.
-Select the rows or columns that you want to hide, and then choose Format - Row - Hide or Format - Column - Hide. -You can hide a sheet by selecting the sheet tab and then choosing Format - Sheet - Hide. Hidden sheets are not printed unless they occur within a print range. -A break in the row or column header indicates whether the row or column is hidden. -To display hidden rows, columns or sheets +Select the rows or columns that you want to hide, and then choose Format - Row - Hide or Format - Column - Hide. +You can hide a sheet by selecting the sheet tab and then choosing Format - Sheet - Hide. Hidden sheets are not printed unless they occur within a print range. +A break in the row or column header indicates whether the row or column is hidden. +To display hidden rows, columns or sheets -Select the range that includes the hidden objects. You can also use the box in the corner above row 1 and beside column A. For sheets, this step is not necessary.UFI: fixes #i18582# +Select the range that includes the hidden objects. You can also use the box in the corner above row 1 and beside column A. For sheets, this step is not necessary.UFI: fixes #i18582# -Choose Format - Row/Column - Show or Format - Sheet - Show. +Choose Format - Row/Column - Show or Format - Sheet - Show. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/05030400.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/05030400.xhp index f366a5b638..a81d7aede8 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/05030400.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/05030400.xhp @@ -39,14 +39,14 @@ -Show -Choose this command to show previously hidden rows or columns. +Show +Choose this command to show previously hidden rows or columns.
-To show a column or row, select the range of rows or columns containing the hidden elements, then choose Format - Row - Show or Format - Column - Show. -For example, to show the column B, click on the header of the column A, expand the selection to the column C, then chose Format - Column - Show. To show the column A previously hidden, click on the header of the column B, keep the mouse button pressed and drag on the left. The selected range displayed in the name area changes from B1:B1048576 to A1:B1048576. Choose Format - Column - Show. Proceed the same way with rows. -To show all hidden cells, first click in the field in the upper left corner. This selects all cells of the table. +To show a column or row, select the range of rows or columns containing the hidden elements, then choose Format - Row - Show or Format - Column - Show. +For example, to show the column B, click on the header of the column A, expand the selection to the column C, then chose Format - Column - Show. To show the column A previously hidden, click on the header of the column B, keep the mouse button pressed and drag on the left. The selected range displayed in the name area changes from B1:B1048576 to A1:B1048576. Choose Format - Column - Show. Proceed the same way with rows. +To show all hidden cells, first click in the field in the upper left corner. This selects all cells of the table. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/05040000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/05040000.xhp index cae33f29a5..504038d839 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/05040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/05040000.xhp @@ -32,15 +32,15 @@
-Column -Sets the column width and hides or shows selected columns. +Column +Sets the column width and hides or shows selected columns.
-Width +Width -Optimal Width +Optimal Width diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/05040200.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/05040200.xhp index 132ad50eaf..6864b3e8de 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/05040200.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/05040200.xhp @@ -37,17 +37,17 @@ -Optimal Column Width -Defines the optimal column width for selected columns. +Optimal Column Width +Defines the optimal column width for selected columns. The optimal column width depends on the longest entry within a column. You can choose from the available measurement units.
-Add -Defines additional spacing between the longest entry in a column and the vertical column borders. +Add +Defines additional spacing between the longest entry in a column and the vertical column borders. -Default value -Defines the optimal column width in order to display the entire contents of the column. The additional spacing for the optimal column width is preset to 0.1 in. +Default value +Defines the optimal column width in order to display the entire contents of the column. The additional spacing for the optimal column width is preset to 0.1 in. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/05050000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/05050000.xhp index 732ea4cf34..ad067479b6 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/05050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/05050000.xhp @@ -36,21 +36,21 @@ right-to-left text;spreadsheets mw changed "right-to-left;..." -Sheet -Sets the sheet name and hides or shows selected sheets. +Sheet +Sets the sheet name and hides or shows selected sheets.
-Rename +Rename -Show +Show -If a sheet has been hidden, the Show Sheet dialog opens, which allows you to select a sheet to be shown again. +If a sheet has been hidden, the Show Sheet dialog opens, which allows you to select a sheet to be shown again. -Right-To-Left -Changes the orientation of the current sheet to Right-To-Left if CTL support is enabled. +Right-To-Left +Changes the orientation of the current sheet to Right-To-Left if CTL support is enabled. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/05050100.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/05050100.xhp index 9590200e4a..c8f81e24d9 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/05050100.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/05050100.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ -Rename Sheet -This command opens a dialog where you can assign a different name to the current sheet. +Rename Sheet +This command opens a dialog where you can assign a different name to the current sheet.
@@ -43,10 +43,10 @@ -Name -Enter a new name for the sheet here. -You can also open the Rename Sheet dialog through the context menu by positioning the mouse pointer over a sheet tab at the bottom of the window and clicking while pressing Controlclicking the right mouse button. -Alternatively, click the sheet tab while pressing the CommandAlt key. Now you can change the name directly. +Name +Enter a new name for the sheet here. +You can also open the Rename Sheet dialog through the context menu by positioning the mouse pointer over a sheet tab at the bottom of the window and clicking while pressing Controlclicking the right mouse button. +Alternatively, click the sheet tab while pressing the CommandAlt key. Now you can change the name directly.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/05050300.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/05050300.xhp index 3dd9d0f29b..59ce80a81d 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/05050300.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/05050300.xhp @@ -33,12 +33,12 @@ sheets; displayingdisplaying; sheets -Show Sheet - Displays sheets that were previously hidden with the Hide Sheets command. Select one sheet only to call the command. The current sheet is always selected. If a sheet other than the current sheet is selected, you can deselect it by pressing Command Ctrl while clicking the corresponding sheet tab at the bottom of the window. +Show Sheet + Displays sheets that were previously hidden with the Hide Sheets command. Select one sheet only to call the command. The current sheet is always selected. If a sheet other than the current sheet is selected, you can deselect it by pressing Command Ctrl while clicking the corresponding sheet tab at the bottom of the window.
- Hidden sheets - Displays a list of all hidden sheets in your spreadsheet document. To show a certain sheet, click the corresponding entry on the list and confirm with OK. + Hidden sheets + Displays a list of all hidden sheets in your spreadsheet document. To show a certain sheet, click the corresponding entry on the list and confirm with OK. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/05060000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/05060000.xhp index 567626e3bd..a3dc7f611e 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/05060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/05060000.xhp @@ -33,15 +33,15 @@
-Merge and Center Cells -Combines the selected cells into a single cell or splits merged cells. Aligns cell content centered. +Merge and Center Cells +Combines the selected cells into a single cell or splits merged cells. Aligns cell content centered.
-Choose Format - Merge Cells - Merge and Center Cells +Choose Format - Merge Cells - Merge and Center Cells
-The merged cell receives the name of the first cell of the original cell range. Merged cells cannot be merged a second time with other cells. The range must form a rectangle, multiple selection is not supported. -If the cells to be merged have any contents, a security dialog is shown. +The merged cell receives the name of the first cell of the original cell range. Merged cells cannot be merged a second time with other cells. The range must form a rectangle, multiple selection is not supported. +If the cells to be merged have any contents, a security dialog is shown. Three options are available: diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/05070000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/05070000.xhp index c9b1e95b87..d66ec93ef3 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/05070000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/05070000.xhp @@ -30,8 +30,8 @@ -Page Style - Opens a dialog where you can define the appearance of all pages in your document. +Page Style + Opens a dialog where you can define the appearance of all pages in your document.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp index 4da829d5d6..09b35e8606 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp @@ -33,67 +33,67 @@ pages; order when printing printing; page order -mw deletes three "printing;..." entries and copies 4 index entries to Calc guide print_details.xhpSheet -Specifies the elements to be included in the printout of all sheets with the current Page Style. Additionally, you can set the print order, the first page number, and the page scale. +mw deletes three "printing;..." entries and copies 4 index entries to Calc guide print_details.xhpSheet +Specifies the elements to be included in the printout of all sheets with the current Page Style. Additionally, you can set the print order, the first page number, and the page scale.
-Print -Defines which elements of the spreadsheet are to be printed. -Column and row headers -Specifies whether you want the column and row headers to be printed. -Grid -Prints out the borders of the individual cells as a grid. For the view on screen, make your choice under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View - Grid lines. -Comments -Prints the comments defined in your spreadsheet. They will be printed on a separate page, along with the corresponding cell reference. -Objects/images -Includes all inserted objects (if printable) and graphics with the printed document. -Charts -Prints the charts that have been inserted into your spreadsheet. -Drawing Objects -Includes all drawing objects in the printed document. -Formulas -Prints the formulas contained in the cells, instead of the results. -Zero Values -Specifies that cells with a zero value are printed. -Page Order -Defines the order in which data in a sheet is numbered and printed when it does not fit on one printed page. -Top to bottom, then right -Prints vertically from the left column to the bottom of the sheet. -Left to right, then down -Prints horizontally from the top row of the sheet to the right column. -First page number -Select this option if you want the first page to start with a number other than 1. -Enter the number of the first page. -Scale -Defines a page scale for the printed spreadsheet. -Scaling mode -Select a scaling mode from the list box. Appropriate controls will be shown below the list box. -Reduce/enlarge printout -Specifies a scaling factor to scale all printed pages. -Scaling factor -Enter a scaling factor. Factors less than 100 reduce the pages, higher factors enlarge the pages. -Fit print range(s) to width/height -Specifies the maximum number of pages horizontally (width) and vertically (height) on which every sheet with the current Page Style is to be printed. +Print +Defines which elements of the spreadsheet are to be printed. +Column and row headers +Specifies whether you want the column and row headers to be printed. +Grid +Prints out the borders of the individual cells as a grid. For the view on screen, make your choice under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View - Grid lines. +Comments +Prints the comments defined in your spreadsheet. They will be printed on a separate page, along with the corresponding cell reference. +Objects/images +Includes all inserted objects (if printable) and graphics with the printed document. +Charts +Prints the charts that have been inserted into your spreadsheet. +Drawing Objects +Includes all drawing objects in the printed document. +Formulas +Prints the formulas contained in the cells, instead of the results. +Zero Values +Specifies that cells with a zero value are printed. +Page Order +Defines the order in which data in a sheet is numbered and printed when it does not fit on one printed page. +Top to bottom, then right +Prints vertically from the left column to the bottom of the sheet. +Left to right, then down +Prints horizontally from the top row of the sheet to the right column. +First page number +Select this option if you want the first page to start with a number other than 1. +Enter the number of the first page. +Scale +Defines a page scale for the printed spreadsheet. +Scaling mode +Select a scaling mode from the list box. Appropriate controls will be shown below the list box. +Reduce/enlarge printout +Specifies a scaling factor to scale all printed pages. +Scaling factor +Enter a scaling factor. Factors less than 100 reduce the pages, higher factors enlarge the pages. +Fit print range(s) to width/height +Specifies the maximum number of pages horizontally (width) and vertically (height) on which every sheet with the current Page Style is to be printed. -The print ranges are always scaled proportionally, so the resulting number of pages may be less than specified. +The print ranges are always scaled proportionally, so the resulting number of pages may be less than specified. -You may clear one of the boxes, then the unspecified dimension will use as many pages as necessary. +You may clear one of the boxes, then the unspecified dimension will use as many pages as necessary. -If you clear both boxes, this will result in a scaling factor of 100%. +If you clear both boxes, this will result in a scaling factor of 100%. -Width in pages -Enter the maximum number of pages to be printed horizontally across. -Height in pages -Enter the maximum number of pages to be printed vertically stacked. -Fit print range(s) on number of pages -Specifies the maximum number of pages on which every sheet with the current Page Style is to be printed. The scale will be reduced as necessary to fit the defined number of pages.UFI: fixes #112585# -Number of pages -Enter the maximum number of pages to be printed. +Width in pages +Enter the maximum number of pages to be printed horizontally across. +Height in pages +Enter the maximum number of pages to be printed vertically stacked. +Fit print range(s) on number of pages +Specifies the maximum number of pages on which every sheet with the current Page Style is to be printed. The scale will be reduced as necessary to fit the defined number of pages.UFI: fixes #112585# +Number of pages +Enter the maximum number of pages to be printed. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/05080000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/05080000.xhp index c91587462d..ee762b84b3 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/05080000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/05080000.xhp @@ -32,17 +32,17 @@
-Print Ranges -Manages print ranges. Only cells within the print ranges will be printed. +Print Ranges +Manages print ranges. Only cells within the print ranges will be printed.
-If you do not define any print range manually, Calc assigns an automatic print range to include all the cells that are not empty. +If you do not define any print range manually, Calc assigns an automatic print range to include all the cells that are not empty. -Edit +Edit diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/05080100.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/05080100.xhp index e43de003ce..7a0169ee1e 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/05080100.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/05080100.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
-Define -Defines an active cell or selected cell area as the print range. +Define +Defines an active cell or selected cell area as the print range.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/05080200.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/05080200.xhp index 1b24f6d66d..76dbf0641e 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/05080200.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/05080200.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
-Clear -Removes the defined print area. +Clear +Removes the defined print area.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp index 31c964d140..5dc189c17a 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp @@ -29,34 +29,34 @@ -Edit Print Ranges -Opens a dialog where you can specify the print range. +Edit Print Ranges +Opens a dialog where you can specify the print range. You can also set the rows or columns which are to be repeated in every page.
- + -Print range -Allows you to modify a defined print range. -Select -none- to remove a print range definition for the current spreadsheet. Select -entire sheet- to set the current sheet as a print range. Select -selection- to define the selected area of a spreadsheet as the print range. By selecting -user-defined-, you can define a print range that you have already defined using the Format - Print Ranges - Define command. If you have given a name to a range using the Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Define command, this name will be displayed and can be selected from the list box. -In the right-hand text box, you can enter a print range by reference or by name. If the cursor is in the Print range text box, you can also select the print range in the spreadsheet with your mouse. +Print range +Allows you to modify a defined print range. +Select -none- to remove a print range definition for the current spreadsheet. Select -entire sheet- to set the current sheet as a print range. Select -selection- to define the selected area of a spreadsheet as the print range. By selecting -user-defined-, you can define a print range that you have already defined using the Format - Print Ranges - Define command. If you have given a name to a range using the Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Define command, this name will be displayed and can be selected from the list box. +In the right-hand text box, you can enter a print range by reference or by name. If the cursor is in the Print range text box, you can also select the print range in the spreadsheet with your mouse. -Rows to repeat -Choose one or more rows to print on every page. In the right text box enter the row reference, for example, "1" or "$1" or "$2:$3". The list box displays -user defined-. You can also select -none- to remove a defined repeating row. -You can also define repeating rows by dragging the mouse in the spreadsheet, if the cursor is in the Rows to repeat text field in the dialog. +Rows to repeat +Choose one or more rows to print on every page. In the right text box enter the row reference, for example, "1" or "$1" or "$2:$3". The list box displays -user defined-. You can also select -none- to remove a defined repeating row. +You can also define repeating rows by dragging the mouse in the spreadsheet, if the cursor is in the Rows to repeat text field in the dialog. -Columns to repeat -Choose one or more columns to print on every page. In the right text box enter the column reference, for example, "A" or "AB" or "$C:$E". The list box then displays -user defined-. You can also select -none- to remove a defined repeating column. -You can also define repeating columns by dragging the mouse in the spreadsheet, if the cursor is in the Columns to repeat text field in the dialog. +Columns to repeat +Choose one or more columns to print on every page. In the right text box enter the column reference, for example, "A" or "AB" or "$C:$E". The list box then displays -user defined-. You can also select -none- to remove a defined repeating column. +You can also define repeating columns by dragging the mouse in the spreadsheet, if the cursor is in the Columns to repeat text field in the dialog. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/05080400.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/05080400.xhp index f814a9f7a5..ad6e6a9411 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/05080400.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/05080400.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
-Add -Adds the current selection to the defined print areas. +Add +Adds the current selection to the defined print areas.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/05110000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/05110000.xhp index 381656f607..9b68618526 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/05110000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/05110000.xhp @@ -29,49 +29,49 @@ -AutoFormat +AutoFormat -Use this command to apply an AutoFormat to a selected sheet area or to define your own AutoFormats. +Use this command to apply an AutoFormat to a selected sheet area or to define your own AutoFormats.
-Format -Choose a predefined AutoFormat to apply to a selected area in your sheet. +Format +Choose a predefined AutoFormat to apply to a selected area in your sheet. -Add -Allows you to add the current formatting of a range of at least 4 x 4 cells to the list of predefined AutoFormats. The Add AutoFormat dialog then appears. +Add +Allows you to add the current formatting of a range of at least 4 x 4 cells to the list of predefined AutoFormats. The Add AutoFormat dialog then appears. -Enter a name and click OK. +Enter a name and click OK. -Formatting -In this section you can select or deselect the available formatting options. If you want to keep any of the settings currently in your spreadsheet, deselect the corresponding option. +Formatting +In this section you can select or deselect the available formatting options. If you want to keep any of the settings currently in your spreadsheet, deselect the corresponding option. -Number format -When marked, specifies that you want to retain the number format of the selected format. +Number format +When marked, specifies that you want to retain the number format of the selected format. -Borders -When marked, specifies that you want to retain the border of the selected format. +Borders +When marked, specifies that you want to retain the border of the selected format. -Font -When marked, specifies that you want to retain the font of the selected format. +Font +When marked, specifies that you want to retain the font of the selected format. -Pattern -When marked, specifies that you want to retain the pattern of the selected format. +Pattern +When marked, specifies that you want to retain the pattern of the selected format. -Alignment -When marked, specifies that you want to retain the alignment of the selected format. +Alignment +When marked, specifies that you want to retain the alignment of the selected format. -AutoFit width and height -When marked, specifies that you want to retain the width and height of the selected cells of the selected format. +AutoFit width and height +When marked, specifies that you want to retain the width and height of the selected cells of the selected format. -Rename -Opens a dialog where you can change the specification of the selected AutoFormat. The button is only visible if you clicked the More button. +Rename +Opens a dialog where you can change the specification of the selected AutoFormat. The button is only visible if you clicked the More button. -The Rename AutoFormat dialog opens. Enter the new name of the AutoFormat here. -More -Closes the Formatting options section, if it is currently open. +The Rename AutoFormat dialog opens. Enter the new name of the AutoFormat here. +More +Closes the Formatting options section, if it is currently open. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/05120000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/05120000.xhp index 49faa3ab41..83856237ef 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/05120000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/05120000.xhp @@ -29,8 +29,8 @@ -Conditional Formatting - Choose Conditional Formatting to define format styles depending on certain conditions. +Conditional Formatting + Choose Conditional Formatting to define format styles depending on certain conditions. If a style was already assigned to a cell, it remains unchanged. The style entered here is then evaluated. There are several types of conditional formatting that can be used. You can enter several conditions that query the contents of cell values or formulas. The conditions are evaluated from the first to the last. If the condition 1 matches the condition, the defined style will be used. Otherwise, condition 2 is evaluated, and its defined style is used. If this style does not match, then the next condition is evaluated and so on.
@@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Apply a color scale to a range consist of displaying a bicolor or tricolor gradi If you have defined a conditional formatting on a cell range and you try now to define a new conditional formatting on a part of this range, a warning message will be displayed, asking if you want to edit the existing conditional formatting (on the whole range) or define a new conditional formatting overlapping it (on the selected range).
- +
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/06020000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/06020000.xhp index e82a21d25c..0f4f20b196 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/06020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/06020000.xhp @@ -34,38 +34,38 @@ mw made "hyphenation..." a two level entry -Hyphenation -The Hyphenation command calls the dialog for setting the hyphenation in $[officename] Calc. +Hyphenation +The Hyphenation command calls the dialog for setting the hyphenation in $[officename] Calc.
-You can only turn on the automatic hyphenation in $[officename] Calc when the row break feature is active. -Hyphenation for selected cells. +You can only turn on the automatic hyphenation in $[officename] Calc when the row break feature is active. +Hyphenation for selected cells. -Select the cells for which you want to change the hyphenation. +Select the cells for which you want to change the hyphenation. -Choose Tools - Language - Hyphenation. +Choose Tools - Language - Hyphenation. -The Format Cells dialog appears with the Alignment tab page open. +The Format Cells dialog appears with the Alignment tab page open. -Mark the Wrap text automatically and Hyphenation active check boxes. +Mark the Wrap text automatically and Hyphenation active check boxes. -Hyphenation for Drawing Objects +Hyphenation for Drawing Objects -Select a drawing object. +Select a drawing object. -Choose Tools - Language - Hyphenation. +Choose Tools - Language - Hyphenation. -Each time you call the command you turn the hyphenation for the drawing object on or off. A check mark shows the current status. +Each time you call the command you turn the hyphenation for the drawing object on or off. A check mark shows the current status. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/06030000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/06030000.xhp index 43530fc901..a32c2d1746 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/06030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/06030000.xhp @@ -34,13 +34,13 @@ Formula Auditing,see Detective Detective MW added "Detective" and a cross-reference -Detective - This command activates the Spreadsheet Detective. With the Detective, you can trace the dependencies from the current formula cell to the cells in the spreadsheet. +Detective + This command activates the Spreadsheet Detective. With the Detective, you can trace the dependencies from the current formula cell to the cells in the spreadsheet.
- Once you have defined a trace, you can point with the mouse cursor to the trace. The mouse cursor will change its shape. Double-click the trace with this cursor to select the referenced cell at the end of the trace. If you define an icon in the spreadsheet, you can put your cursor on it. It will change into a magnifying glass with reference arrows. Double-click the visible icon to select the cell at the furthest end of the icon. + Once you have defined a trace, you can point with the mouse cursor to the trace. The mouse cursor will change its shape. Double-click the trace with this cursor to select the referenced cell at the end of the trace. If you define an icon in the spreadsheet, you can put your cursor on it. It will change into a magnifying glass with reference arrows. Double-click the visible icon to select the cell at the furthest end of the icon. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/06030100.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/06030100.xhp index 6146cca928..d7f4e2470d 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/06030100.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/06030100.xhp @@ -36,13 +36,13 @@ -Trace Precedents -This function shows the relationship between the current cell containing a formula and the cells used in the formula. +Trace Precedents +This function shows the relationship between the current cell containing a formula and the cells used in the formula.
-Traces are displayed in the sheet with marking arrows. At the same time, the range of all the cells contained in the formula of the current cell is highlighted with a blue frame. +Traces are displayed in the sheet with marking arrows. At the same time, the range of all the cells contained in the formula of the current cell is highlighted with a blue frame.
-This function is based on a principle of layers. For example, if the precedent cell to a formula is already indicated with a tracer arrow, when you repeat this command, the tracer arrows are drawn to the precedent cells of this cell. +This function is based on a principle of layers. For example, if the precedent cell to a formula is already indicated with a tracer arrow, when you repeat this command, the tracer arrows are drawn to the precedent cells of this cell. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/06030200.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/06030200.xhp index 21d2aac68e..e78c5fa9ed 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/06030200.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/06030200.xhp @@ -36,8 +36,8 @@ mw changed "formula..." entry -Remove Precedents -Deletes one level of the trace arrows that were inserted with the Trace Precedents command. +Remove Precedents +Deletes one level of the trace arrows that were inserted with the Trace Precedents command.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/06030300.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/06030300.xhp index cab18cd354..0885160644 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/06030300.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/06030300.xhp @@ -33,14 +33,14 @@
cells; tracing dependents -Trace Dependents - Draws tracer arrows to the active cell from formulas that depend on values in the active cell. +Trace Dependents + Draws tracer arrows to the active cell from formulas that depend on values in the active cell.
- The area of all cells that are used together with the active cell in a formula is highlighted by a blue frame. + The area of all cells that are used together with the active cell in a formula is highlighted by a blue frame.
- This function works per level. For instance, if one level of traces has already been activated to show the precedents (or dependents), then you would see the next dependency level by activating the Trace function again. + This function works per level. For instance, if one level of traces has already been activated to show the precedents (or dependents), then you would see the next dependency level by activating the Trace function again. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/06030400.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/06030400.xhp index f49e9293bd..75e4b6d622 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/06030400.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/06030400.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
cells; removing dependents -Remove Dependents - Deletes one level of tracer arrows created with Trace Dependents. +Remove Dependents + Deletes one level of tracer arrows created with Trace Dependents.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/06030500.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/06030500.xhp index dae1773965..9a3d9decca 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/06030500.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/06030500.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
cells; removing traces -Remove All Traces - Removes all tracer arrows from the spreadsheet. +Remove All Traces + Removes all tracer arrows from the spreadsheet.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/06030600.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/06030600.xhp index ea2c89500e..90538e90bd 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/06030600.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/06030600.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
cells; tracing errorstracing errorserror tracing -Trace Error - Draws tracer arrows to all precedent cells which cause an error value in a selected cell. +Trace Error + Draws tracer arrows to all precedent cells which cause an error value in a selected cell.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/06030700.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/06030700.xhp index facf91626b..44adfa90da 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/06030700.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/06030700.xhp @@ -36,12 +36,12 @@ -Fill Mode -Activates the Fill Mode in the Detective. The mouse pointer changes to a special symbol, and you can click any cell to see a trace to the precedent cell. To exit this mode, press Escape or click the End Fill Mode command in the context menu. +Fill Mode +Activates the Fill Mode in the Detective. The mouse pointer changes to a special symbol, and you can click any cell to see a trace to the precedent cell. To exit this mode, press Escape or click the End Fill Mode command in the context menu.
-The Fill Mode function is identical to the Trace Precedent command if you call this mode for the first time. Use the context menu to select further options for the Fill Mode and to exit this mode. +The Fill Mode function is identical to the Trace Precedent command if you call this mode for the first time. Use the context menu to select further options for the Fill Mode and to exit this mode. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/06030800.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/06030800.xhp index 78a23f0c18..c817e2b371 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/06030800.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/06030800.xhp @@ -34,12 +34,12 @@
cells; invalid datadata; showing invalid datainvalid data;marking -Mark Invalid Data - Marks all cells in the sheet that contain values outside the validation rules. +Mark Invalid Data + Marks all cells in the sheet that contain values outside the validation rules.
- The validity rules restrict the input of numbers, dates, time values and text to certain values. However, it is possible to enter invalid values or copy invalid values into the cells if the Stop option is not selected. When you assign a validity rule, existing values in a cell will not be modified. + The validity rules restrict the input of numbers, dates, time values and text to certain values. However, it is possible to enter invalid values or copy invalid values into the cells if the Stop option is not selected. When you assign a validity rule, existing values in a cell will not be modified. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/06030900.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/06030900.xhp index a528b0a99a..15faaddb2f 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/06030900.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/06030900.xhp @@ -37,21 +37,21 @@ mw made "updating..." a two level entry -Refresh Traces -Redraws all traces in the sheet. Formulas modified when traces are redrawn are taken into account. +Refresh Traces +Redraws all traces in the sheet. Formulas modified when traces are redrawn are taken into account.
-Detective arrows in the document are updated under the following circumstances: +Detective arrows in the document are updated under the following circumstances: -Starting Tools - Detective - Update Refresh Traces +Starting Tools - Detective - Update Refresh Traces -If Tools - Detective - Update Automatically is turned on, every time formulas are changed in the document. +If Tools - Detective - Update Automatically is turned on, every time formulas are changed in the document.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/06031000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/06031000.xhp index b331dd3cff..4f30d46fa2 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/06031000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/06031000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
cells; autorefreshing tracestraces; autorefreshing -AutoRefresh - Automatically refreshes all the traces in the sheet whenever you modify a formula. +AutoRefresh + Automatically refreshes all the traces in the sheet whenever you modify a formula.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/06040000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/06040000.xhp index 12e960f9a6..f24ae52e76 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/06040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/06040000.xhp @@ -29,23 +29,23 @@ -Goal Seek -Opens a dialog where you can solve an equation with a variable. +Goal Seek +Opens a dialog where you can solve an equation with a variable. After a successful search, a dialog with the results opens, allowing you to apply the result and the target value directly to the cell.
-Default -In this section, you can define the variables in your formula. +Default +In this section, you can define the variables in your formula. -Formula cell -In the formula cell, enter the reference of the cell which contains the formula. It contains the current cell reference. Click another cell in the sheet to apply its reference to the text box. +Formula cell +In the formula cell, enter the reference of the cell which contains the formula. It contains the current cell reference. Click another cell in the sheet to apply its reference to the text box. -Target value -Specifies the value you want to achieve as a new result. +Target value +Specifies the value you want to achieve as a new result. -Variable cell -Specifies the reference for the cell that contains the value you want to adjust in order to reach the target. +Variable cell +Specifies the reference for the cell that contains the value you want to adjust in order to reach the target. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/06050000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/06050000.xhp index 5ef2ee28ec..9722dd9b27 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/06050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/06050000.xhp @@ -32,47 +32,47 @@ -Create Scenario -Defines a scenario for the selected sheet area. +Create Scenario +Defines a scenario for the selected sheet area.
- + -Name of scenario -Defines the name for the scenario. Use a clear and unique name so you can easily identify the scenario. You can also modify a scenario name in the Navigator through the Properties context menu command. +Name of scenario +Defines the name for the scenario. Use a clear and unique name so you can easily identify the scenario. You can also modify a scenario name in the Navigator through the Properties context menu command. -Comment -Specifies additional information about the scenario. This information will be displayed in the Navigator when you click the Scenarios icon and select the desired scenario. You can also modify this information in the Navigator through the Properties context menu command. -Settings -This section is used to define some of the settings used in the scenario display. +Comment +Specifies additional information about the scenario. This information will be displayed in the Navigator when you click the Scenarios icon and select the desired scenario. You can also modify this information in the Navigator through the Properties context menu command. +Settings +This section is used to define some of the settings used in the scenario display. -Display borderUFI: #i38688# -Highlights the scenario in your table with a border. The color for the border is specified in the field to the right of this option. The border will have a title bar displaying the name of the last scenario. The button on the right of the scenario border offers you an overview of all the scenarios in this area, if several have been defined. You can choose any of the scenarios from this list without restrictions. +Display borderUFI: #i38688# +Highlights the scenario in your table with a border. The color for the border is specified in the field to the right of this option. The border will have a title bar displaying the name of the last scenario. The button on the right of the scenario border offers you an overview of all the scenarios in this area, if several have been defined. You can choose any of the scenarios from this list without restrictions. -Copy back -Copies the values of cells that you change into the active scenario. If you do not select this option, the scenario is not changed when you change cell values. The behavior of the Copy back setting depends on the cell protection, the sheet protection, and the Prevent changes settings. +Copy back +Copies the values of cells that you change into the active scenario. If you do not select this option, the scenario is not changed when you change cell values. The behavior of the Copy back setting depends on the cell protection, the sheet protection, and the Prevent changes settings. -Copy entire sheet -Copies the entire sheet into an additional scenario sheet. +Copy entire sheet +Copies the entire sheet into an additional scenario sheet. -Prevent changes -Prevents changes to the active scenario. The behavior of the Copy back setting depends on the cell protection, the sheet protection, and the Prevent changes settings. +Prevent changes +Prevents changes to the active scenario. The behavior of the Copy back setting depends on the cell protection, the sheet protection, and the Prevent changes settings. -You can only change the scenario properties if the Prevent changes option is not selected and if the sheet is not protected. +You can only change the scenario properties if the Prevent changes option is not selected and if the sheet is not protected. -You can only edit cell values if the Prevent changes option is selected, if the Copy back is option is not selected, and if the cells are not protected. +You can only edit cell values if the Prevent changes option is selected, if the Copy back is option is not selected, and if the cells are not protected. -You can only change scenario cell values and write them back into the scenario if the Prevent changes option is not selected, if the Copy back option is selected, and if the cells are not protected. +You can only change scenario cell values and write them back into the scenario if the Prevent changes option is not selected, if the Copy back option is selected, and if the cells are not protected. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/06060000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/06060000.xhp index dae16b6c03..242fcf074f 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/06060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/06060000.xhp @@ -31,19 +31,19 @@
-Protect Document +Protect Document The Protect Sheet or Protect Spreadsheet commands prevent changes from being made to cells in the sheets or to sheets in a document. As an option, you can define a password. If a password is defined, removal of the protection is only possible if the user enters the correct password.
-Sheets +Sheets -Documents +Documents
- +
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/06060100.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/06060100.xhp index 2905f06588..972344f7fd 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/06060100.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/06060100.xhp @@ -29,23 +29,23 @@ -Protecting Sheet +Protecting Sheet Protects the cells in the current sheet from being modified. Choose Tools - Protect Sheet to open the Protect Sheet dialog in which you then specify sheet protection with or without a password.
-To protect cells from further editing, the Protected check box must be checked on the Format - Cells - Cell Protection tab page or on the Format Cells context menu. +To protect cells from further editing, the Protected check box must be checked on the Format - Cells - Cell Protection tab page or on the Format Cells context menu. Unprotected cells or cell ranges can be set up on a protected sheet by using the Tools - Protect Sheet and Format - Cells - Cell Protection menus: -Select the cells that will be unprotected -Select Format - Cells - Cell Protection. Unmark the Protected box and click OK. +Select the cells that will be unprotected +Select Format - Cells - Cell Protection. Unmark the Protected box and click OK. On the Tools - Protect Sheet menu, activate protection for the sheet. Effective immediately, only the cell range you selected in step 1 can be edited. To later change an unprotected area to a protected area, select the range. Next, on the Format - Cells - Cell Protection tab page, check the Protected box. Finally, choose the Tools - Protect Sheet menu. The previously editable range is now protected. -Sheet protection also affects the context menu of the sheet tabs at the bottom of the screen. The Delete and Rename commands cannot be selected. -If a sheet is protected, you will not be able to modify or delete any Cell Styles. +Sheet protection also affects the context menu of the sheet tabs at the bottom of the screen. The Delete and Rename commands cannot be selected. +If a sheet is protected, you will not be able to modify or delete any Cell Styles. A protected sheet or cell range can no longer be modified until this protection is disabled. To disable the protection, choose the Tools - Protect Sheet command. If no password was set, the sheet protection is immediately disabled. If the sheet was password protected, the Remove Protection dialog opens, where you must enter the password. -Once saved, protected sheets can only be saved again by using the File - Save As command. -Password (optional) -Allows you to enter a password to protect the sheet from unauthorized changes. +Once saved, protected sheets can only be saved again by using the File - Save As command. +Password (optional) +Allows you to enter a password to protect the sheet from unauthorized changes. Complete protection of your work can be achieved by combining the options Tools - Protect Sheet and Tools - Protect Spreadsheet, including password protection. To prohibit opening the document altogether, in the Save dialog mark the Save with password box before you click the Save button. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/06060200.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/06060200.xhp index c01967c783..41cbe1bed4 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/06060200.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/06060200.xhp @@ -32,16 +32,16 @@ -Protecting document +Protecting document Protects the sheet structure of your document from modifications. It is impossible to insert, delete, rename, move or copy sheets. Open the Protect document dialog with Tools - Protect Spreadsheet. Optionally enter a password and click OK.
The structure of protected spreadsheet documents can be changed only if the Protect option is disabled. On the context menus for the spreadsheet tabs at the lower graphic border, only the menu item Select All Sheets can be activated. All other menu items are deactivated. To remove the protection, call up the command Tools - Protect Spreadsheet again. If no password is assigned, protection is immediately removed. If you were assigned a password, the Remove Spreadsheet Protection dialog appears, in which you must enter the password. Only then can you remove the check mark specifying that protection is active. -A protected document, once saved, can only be saved again with the File - Save As menu command. +A protected document, once saved, can only be saved again with the File - Save As menu command. -Password (optional) +Password (optional) You can create a password to protect your document against unauthorized or accidental modifications. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/06070000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/06070000.xhp index 187d788cd0..41679363a9 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/06070000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/06070000.xhp @@ -37,10 +37,10 @@ mw added "recalculating;..." -AutoCalculate -Automatically recalculates all formulas in the document. +AutoCalculate +Automatically recalculates all formulas in the document.
-All cells are recalculated after a sheet cell has been modified. Any charts in the sheet will also be refreshed. +All cells are recalculated after a sheet cell has been modified. Any charts in the sheet will also be refreshed.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/06080000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/06080000.xhp index 96ee0623cf..ba7b6eebc3 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/06080000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/06080000.xhp @@ -34,17 +34,17 @@ mw changed "recalculating;...", "formulas;..." and "cell..." entries and deleted "recalculating formulas" -Recalculate -Recalculates all changed formulas. If AutoCalculate is enabled, the Recalculate command applies only to formulas like RAND or NOW. +Recalculate +Recalculates all changed formulas. If AutoCalculate is enabled, the Recalculate command applies only to formulas like RAND or NOW.
-Press F9 to recalculate. Press Shift+CommandCtrl+F9 to recalculate all formulas in the document. +Press F9 to recalculate. Press Shift+CommandCtrl+F9 to recalculate all formulas in the document. -After the document has been recalculated, the display is refreshed. All charts are also refreshed. +After the document has been recalculated, the display is refreshed. All charts are also refreshed. -The Add-In functions like RANDBETWEEN currently cannot respond to the Recalculate command or F9. Press Shift+CommandCtrl+F9 to recalculate all formulas, including the Add-In functions. +The Add-In functions like RANDBETWEEN currently cannot respond to the Recalculate command or F9. Press Shift+CommandCtrl+F9 to recalculate all formulas, including the Add-In functions. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/06130000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/06130000.xhp index 89a4a8e245..0b6c80d5f0 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/06130000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/06130000.xhp @@ -36,29 +36,29 @@ mw made "entering..." a one level entry -AutoInput -Switches the AutoInput function on and off, which automatically completes entries, based on other entries in the same column. The column is scanned up to a maximum of 2000 cells or 200 different strings. +AutoInput +Switches the AutoInput function on and off, which automatically completes entries, based on other entries in the same column. The column is scanned up to a maximum of 2000 cells or 200 different strings.
-The completion text is highlighted. +The completion text is highlighted. -To accept the completion, press Enter or a cursor key. +To accept the completion, press Enter or a cursor key. -To append text or to edit the completion, press F2. +To append text or to edit the completion, press F2. -To view more completions, press CommandCtrl+Tab to scroll forward, or CommandCtrl+Shift+Tab to scroll backward. +To view more completions, press CommandCtrl+Tab to scroll forward, or CommandCtrl+Shift+Tab to scroll backward. - To see a list of all available AutoInput text items for the current column, press OptionAlt+Down Arrow. + To see a list of all available AutoInput text items for the current column, press OptionAlt+Down Arrow. -When typing formulas using characters that match previous entries, a Help tip will appear listing the last ten functions used from Function Wizard, from all defined range names, from all database range names, and from the content of all label ranges. -AutoInput is case-sensitive. If, for example, you have written "Total" in a cell, you cannot enter "total" in another cell of the same column without first deactivating AutoInput. +When typing formulas using characters that match previous entries, a Help tip will appear listing the last ten functions used from Function Wizard, from all defined range names, from all database range names, and from the content of all label ranges. +AutoInput is case-sensitive. If, for example, you have written "Total" in a cell, you cannot enter "total" in another cell of the same column without first deactivating AutoInput. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12010000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12010000.xhp index 806c2268ad..11f53503f3 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12010000.xhp @@ -29,26 +29,26 @@ -Define Database Range -Defines a database range based on the selected cells in your sheet. +Define Database Range +Defines a database range based on the selected cells in your sheet. -You can only select a rectangular cell range. +You can only select a rectangular cell range.
-Name -Enter a name for the database range that you want to define, or select an existing name from the list. +Name +Enter a name for the database range that you want to define, or select an existing name from the list. -Range -Displays the selected cell range. +Range +Displays the selected cell range. -Add/Modify -Adds the selected cell range to the database range list, or modifies an existing database range. +Add/Modify +Adds the selected cell range to the database range list, or modifies an existing database range. -More >> -Shows additional options. +More >> +Shows additional options. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12010100.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12010100.xhp index 8e6b537a07..c41bd360f1 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12010100.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12010100.xhp @@ -32,18 +32,18 @@ - Options - Contains column labels - Selected cell ranges contains labels. - Insert or delete cells - Automatically inserts new rows and columns into the database range in your document when new records are added to the database. To manually update the database range, choose Data - Refresh Range. - Keep formatting - Applies the existing cell format of headers and first data row to the whole database range. - Don't save imported data - Only saves a reference to the database, and not the contents of the cells. - Source: - Displays information about the current database source and any existing operators. - More << - Hides the additional options. + Options + Contains column labels + Selected cell ranges contains labels. + Insert or delete cells + Automatically inserts new rows and columns into the database range in your document when new records are added to the database. To manually update the database range, choose Data - Refresh Range. + Keep formatting + Applies the existing cell format of headers and first data row to the whole database range. + Don't save imported data + Only saves a reference to the database, and not the contents of the cells. + Source: + Displays information about the current database source and any existing operators. + More << + Hides the additional options. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12020000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12020000.xhp index a6ee8f9373..d372d18b88 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12020000.xhp @@ -34,14 +34,14 @@ -Select Database Range -Selects a database range that you defined under Data - Define Range. +Select Database Range +Selects a database range that you defined under Data - Define Range.
-Ranges -Lists the available database ranges. To select a database range, click its name, and then click OK. +Ranges +Lists the available database ranges. To select a database range, click its name, and then click OK. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12030000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12030000.xhp index f81dbea300..6ff8e7dcb9 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12030000.xhp @@ -32,10 +32,10 @@ -Sort -Sorts the selected rows according to the conditions that you specify. +Sort +Sorts the selected rows according to the conditions that you specify. $[officename] automatically recognizes and selects database ranges. -You cannot sort data if the Record changes options is enabled. +You cannot sort data if the Record changes options is enabled.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp index 23cb6bdbf6..ec7fa8aa9f 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp @@ -32,31 +32,31 @@
sorting; sort criteria for database ranges -Sort Criteria -Specify the sorting options for the selected range. +Sort Criteria +Specify the sorting options for the selected range.
-Ensure that you include any row and column titles in the selection. +Ensure that you include any row and column titles in the selection.
-Sort by -Select the column that you want to use as the primary sort key. -Ascending -Sorts the selection from the lowest value to the highest value. The sorting rules are given by the locale. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. -Descending -Sorts the selection from the highest value to the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. -Then by -Select the column that you want to use as the secondary sort key. -Ascending -Sorts the selection from the lowest value to the highest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. -Descending -Sorts the selection from the highest value to the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. +Sort by +Select the column that you want to use as the primary sort key. +Ascending +Sorts the selection from the lowest value to the highest value. The sorting rules are given by the locale. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +Descending +Sorts the selection from the highest value to the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +Then by +Select the column that you want to use as the secondary sort key. +Ascending +Sorts the selection from the lowest value to the highest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. +Descending +Sorts the selection from the highest value to the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. -Sort Ascending/Descending -Sorts the selection from the highest to the lowest value, or from the lowest to the highest value. Number fields are sorted by size and text fields by the order of the characters. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. -Icons on the Standard toolbar +Sort Ascending/Descending +Sorts the selection from the highest to the lowest value, or from the lowest to the highest value. Number fields are sorted by size and text fields by the order of the characters. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. +Icons on the Standard toolbar diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp index 5ba9fccfe6..eef52aec74 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp @@ -38,55 +38,55 @@ natural sort algorithm - Options - Sets additional sorting options. + Options + Sets additional sorting options.
- Case Sensitivity - Sorts first by uppercase letters and then by lowercase letters. For Asian languages, special handling applies. - Note for Asian languages: Check Case Sensitivity to apply multi-level collation. With multi-level collation, entries are first compared in their primitive forms with their cases and diacritics ignored. If they evaluate as the same, their diacritics are taken into account for the second-level comparison. If they still evaluate as the same, their cases, character widths, and Japanese Kana difference are considered for the third-level comparison.UFI: see #112590# and #112507# + Case Sensitivity + Sorts first by uppercase letters and then by lowercase letters. For Asian languages, special handling applies. + Note for Asian languages: Check Case Sensitivity to apply multi-level collation. With multi-level collation, entries are first compared in their primitive forms with their cases and diacritics ignored. If they evaluate as the same, their diacritics are taken into account for the second-level comparison. If they still evaluate as the same, their cases, character widths, and Japanese Kana difference are considered for the third-level comparison.UFI: see #112590# and #112507# - Range contains column/row labels - Omits the first row or the first column in the selection from the sort. The Direction setting at the bottom of the dialog defines the name and function of this check box. + Range contains column/row labels + Omits the first row or the first column in the selection from the sort. The Direction setting at the bottom of the dialog defines the name and function of this check box. - Include formats - Preserves the current cell formatting. + Include formats + Preserves the current cell formatting. -Enable natural sort -Natural sort is a sort algorithm that sorts string-prefixed numbers based on the value of the numerical element in each sorted number, instead of the traditional way of sorting them as ordinary strings. For instance, let's assume you have a series of values such as, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, A6, ..., A19, A20, A21. When you put these values into a range of cells and run the sort, it will become A1, A11, A12, A13, ..., A19, A2, A20, A21, A3, A4, A5, ..., A9. While this sorting behavior may make sense to those who understand the underlying sorting mechanism, to the rest of the population it seems completely bizarre, if not outright inconvenient. With the natural sort feature enabled, values such as the ones in the above example get sorted "properly", which improves the convenience of sorting operations in general. +Enable natural sort +Natural sort is a sort algorithm that sorts string-prefixed numbers based on the value of the numerical element in each sorted number, instead of the traditional way of sorting them as ordinary strings. For instance, let's assume you have a series of values such as, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, A6, ..., A19, A20, A21. When you put these values into a range of cells and run the sort, it will become A1, A11, A12, A13, ..., A19, A2, A20, A21, A3, A4, A5, ..., A9. While this sorting behavior may make sense to those who understand the underlying sorting mechanism, to the rest of the population it seems completely bizarre, if not outright inconvenient. With the natural sort feature enabled, values such as the ones in the above example get sorted "properly", which improves the convenience of sorting operations in general. - Copy sort results to: - Copies the sorted list to the cell range that you specify. + Copy sort results to: + Copies the sorted list to the cell range that you specify. - Sort results - Select a named cell range where you want to display the sorted list, or enter a cell range in the input box. + Sort results + Select a named cell range where you want to display the sorted list, or enter a cell range in the input box. - Sort results - Enter the cell range where you want to display the sorted list, or select a named range from the list. + Sort results + Enter the cell range where you want to display the sorted list, or select a named range from the list. - Custom sort order - Click here and then select the custom sort order that you want. + Custom sort order + Click here and then select the custom sort order that you want. - Custom sort order - Select the custom sort order that you want to apply. To define a custom sort order, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists . - Language + Custom sort order + Select the custom sort order that you want to apply. To define a custom sort order, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists . + Language - Language - Select the language for the sorting rules. + Language + Select the language for the sorting rules. - Options - Select a sorting option for the language. For example, select the "phonebook" option for German to include the umlaut special character in the sorting. - Direction + Options + Select a sorting option for the language. For example, select the "phonebook" option for German to include the umlaut special character in the sorting. + Direction - Top to Bottom (Sort Rows) - Sorts rows by the values in the active columns of the selected range. + Top to Bottom (Sort Rows) + Sorts rows by the values in the active columns of the selected range. - Left to Right (Sort Columns) - Sorts columns by the values in the active rows of the selected range. - Data area - Displays the cell range that you want to sort. + Left to Right (Sort Columns) + Sorts columns by the values in the active rows of the selected range. + Data area + Displays the cell range that you want to sort. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12040000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12040000.xhp index 95613b14d9..b58ccb5717 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12040000.xhp @@ -29,18 +29,18 @@
-Filter -Shows commands to filter your data. +Filter +Shows commands to filter your data.
-$[officename] automatically recognizes predefined database ranges. +$[officename] automatically recognizes predefined database ranges.
-The following filtering options are available: +The following filtering options are available: -Standard filter +Standard filter -Advanced filter +Advanced filter diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12040100.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12040100.xhp index 2a9b1a9f3c..3c09134d73 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12040100.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12040100.xhp @@ -31,15 +31,15 @@
-AutoFilter -Automatically filters the selected cell range, and creates one-row list boxes where you can choose the items that you want to display. +AutoFilter +Automatically filters the selected cell range, and creates one-row list boxes where you can choose the items that you want to display.
-Default filter +Default filter
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12040201.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12040201.xhp index 0130165739..91a4ae2bf4 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12040201.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12040201.xhp @@ -27,47 +27,47 @@ -More +More -Shows additional filter options. +Shows additional filter options.
-Options +Options -Case sensitive -Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters when filtering the data. +Case sensitive +Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters when filtering the data. -Range contains column labels -Includes the column labels in the first row of a cell range. +Range contains column labels +Includes the column labels in the first row of a cell range. -Copy results to -Select the check box, and then select the cell range where you want to display the filter results. You can also select a named range from the list. +Copy results to +Select the check box, and then select the cell range where you want to display the filter results. You can also select a named range from the list. -Regular expression -Allows you to use regular expressions in the filter definition. For a list of the regular expressions that $[officename] supports, click here. -If the Regular Expressions check box is selected, you can use regular expressions in the Value field if the Condition list box is set to '=' EQUAL or '<>' UNEQUAL. This also applies to the respective cells that you reference for an advanced filter. +Regular expression +Allows you to use regular expressions in the filter definition. For a list of the regular expressions that $[officename] supports, click here. +If the Regular Expressions check box is selected, you can use regular expressions in the Value field if the Condition list box is set to '=' EQUAL or '<>' UNEQUAL. This also applies to the respective cells that you reference for an advanced filter. -No duplication -Excludes duplicate rows in the list of filtered data. +No duplication +Excludes duplicate rows in the list of filtered data. -Keep filter criteria -Select the Copy results to check box, and then specify the destination range where you want to display the filtered data. If this box is checked, the destination range remains linked to the source range. You must have defined the source range under Data - Define range as a database range. Following this, you can reapply the defined filter at any time as follows: click into the source range, then choose Data - Refresh Range. -Data range -Displays the cell range or the name of the cell range that you want to filter. +Keep filter criteria +Select the Copy results to check box, and then specify the destination range where you want to display the filtered data. If this box is checked, the destination range remains linked to the source range. You must have defined the source range under Data - Define range as a database range. Following this, you can reapply the defined filter at any time as follows: click into the source range, then choose Data - Refresh Range. +Data range +Displays the cell range or the name of the cell range that you want to filter. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12040300.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12040300.xhp index 9b9b38a2d4..f4833ffe20 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12040300.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12040300.xhp @@ -29,21 +29,21 @@ -Advanced Filter -Defines an advanced filter. +Advanced Filter +Defines an advanced filter.
- + -Read filter criteria from -Select the named range, or enter the cell range that contains the filter criteria that you want to use. +Read filter criteria from +Select the named range, or enter the cell range that contains the filter criteria that you want to use. -More +More diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12040400.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12040400.xhp index 006db25227..db14f5d67d 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12040400.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12040400.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
-Reset Filter -Removes the filter from the selected cell range. To enable this command, click inside the cell area where the filter was applied. +Reset Filter +Removes the filter from the selected cell range. To enable this command, click inside the cell area where the filter was applied.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12040500.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12040500.xhp index 7a651dcd7b..cd66c511c8 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12040500.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12040500.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
database ranges; hiding AutoFilter -Hide AutoFilter - Hides the AutoFilter buttons in the selected cell range. +Hide AutoFilter + Hides the AutoFilter buttons in the selected cell range.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12050000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12050000.xhp index 7d92219f93..fa400ceb93 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12050000.xhp @@ -33,17 +33,17 @@ -Subtotals - Calculates subtotals for the columns that you select. $[officename] uses the SUM function to automatically calculate the subtotal and grand total values in a labeled range. You can also use other functions to perform the calculation. $[officename] automatically recognizes a defined database area when you place the cursor in it. +Subtotals + Calculates subtotals for the columns that you select. $[officename] uses the SUM function to automatically calculate the subtotal and grand total values in a labeled range. You can also use other functions to perform the calculation. $[officename] automatically recognizes a defined database area when you place the cursor in it.
- For example, you can generate a sales summary for a certain postal code based on data from a client database. + For example, you can generate a sales summary for a certain postal code based on data from a client database. - Delete - Deletes the subtotal rows in the selected area. + Delete + Deletes the subtotal rows in the selected area. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12050100.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12050100.xhp index 44a1e99815..805c0abf9b 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12050100.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12050100.xhp @@ -32,41 +32,41 @@
-1st, 2nd, 3rd Group -Specify the settings for up to three subtotal groups. Each tab has the same layout. +1st, 2nd, 3rd Group +Specify the settings for up to three subtotal groups. Each tab has the same layout.
-To insert subtotal values into a table: +To insert subtotal values into a table: -Ensure that the columns of the table have labels. +Ensure that the columns of the table have labels. -Select the table or the area in the table that you want to calculate subtotals for, and then choose Data – Subtotals. +Select the table or the area in the table that you want to calculate subtotals for, and then choose Data – Subtotals. -In the Group By box, select the column that you want to add the subtotals to. +In the Group By box, select the column that you want to add the subtotals to. -In the Calculate subtotals for box, select the check boxes for the columns containing the values that you want to subtotal. +In the Calculate subtotals for box, select the check boxes for the columns containing the values that you want to subtotal. -In the Use function box, select the function that you want to use to calculate the subtotals. +In the Use function box, select the function that you want to use to calculate the subtotals. -Click OK. +Click OK. -Group by -Select the column that you want to control the subtotal calculation process. If the contents of the selected column change, the subtotals are automatically recalculated. +Group by +Select the column that you want to control the subtotal calculation process. If the contents of the selected column change, the subtotals are automatically recalculated. -Calculate subtotals for -Select the column(s) containing the values that you want to subtotal. +Calculate subtotals for +Select the column(s) containing the values that you want to subtotal. -Use function -Select the mathematical function that you want to use to calculate the subtotals. +Use function +Select the mathematical function that you want to use to calculate the subtotals. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12050200.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12050200.xhp index 2458889d2a..8b93de3cc5 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12050200.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12050200.xhp @@ -32,27 +32,27 @@
subtotals; sorting options -Options -Specify the settings for calculating and presenting subtotals. +Options +Specify the settings for calculating and presenting subtotals.
-Page break between groups -Inserts a new page after each group of subtotaled data. -Case sensitive -Recalculates subtotals when you change the case of a data label. -Pre-sort area according to groups -Sorts the area that you selected in the Group by box of the Group tabs according to the columns that you selected. -Sort -Include formats -Considers formatting attributes when sorting. +Page break between groups +Inserts a new page after each group of subtotaled data. +Case sensitive +Recalculates subtotals when you change the case of a data label. +Pre-sort area according to groups +Sorts the area that you selected in the Group by box of the Group tabs according to the columns that you selected. +Sort +Include formats +Considers formatting attributes when sorting. -Custom sort order -Uses a custom sorting order that you defined in the Options dialog box at %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. -Ascending -Sorts beginning with the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on Tools - Options - Language settings - Languages. -Descending -Sorts beginning with the highest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on Tools - Options - Language settings - Languages. +Custom sort order +Uses a custom sorting order that you defined in the Options dialog box at %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. +Ascending +Sorts beginning with the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on Tools - Options - Language settings - Languages. +Descending +Sorts beginning with the highest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on Tools - Options - Language settings - Languages. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12060000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12060000.xhp index 5c6705a044..c9f3b36d6b 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12060000.xhp @@ -29,25 +29,25 @@ -Multiple Operations -Applies the same formula to different cells, but with different parameter values. +Multiple Operations +Applies the same formula to different cells, but with different parameter values.
-The Row or Column box must contain a reference to the first cell of the selected range. -If you export a spreadsheet containing multiple operations to Microsoft Excel, the location of the cells containing the formula must be fully defined relative to the data range. -Defaults +The Row or Column box must contain a reference to the first cell of the selected range. +If you export a spreadsheet containing multiple operations to Microsoft Excel, the location of the cells containing the formula must be fully defined relative to the data range. +Defaults -Formulas -Enter the cell references for the cells containing the formulas that you want to use in the multiple operation. +Formulas +Enter the cell references for the cells containing the formulas that you want to use in the multiple operation. -Row -Enter the input cell reference that you want to use as a variable for the rows in the data table. +Row +Enter the input cell reference that you want to use as a variable for the rows in the data table. -Column -Enter the input cell reference that you want to use as a variable for the columns in the data table. +Column +Enter the input cell reference that you want to use as a variable for the columns in the data table. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12070000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12070000.xhp index 89413f069c..6c9706cdbf 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12070000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12070000.xhp @@ -29,33 +29,33 @@ -Consolidate -Combines data from one or more independent cell ranges and calculates a new range using the function that you specify. +Consolidate +Combines data from one or more independent cell ranges and calculates a new range using the function that you specify.
-Function -Select the function that you want to use to consolidate the data. +Function +Select the function that you want to use to consolidate the data. -Consolidation ranges -Displays the cell ranges that you want to consolidate. +Consolidation ranges +Displays the cell ranges that you want to consolidate. -Source data range -Specifies the cell range that you want to consolidate with the cell ranges listed in the Consolidation ranges box. Select a cell range in a sheet, and then click Add. You can also select a the name of a predefined cell from the Source data range list. +Source data range +Specifies the cell range that you want to consolidate with the cell ranges listed in the Consolidation ranges box. Select a cell range in a sheet, and then click Add. You can also select a the name of a predefined cell from the Source data range list. -Copy results to -Displays the first cell in the range where the consolidation results will be displayed. +Copy results to +Displays the first cell in the range where the consolidation results will be displayed. -Add -Adds the cell range specified in the Source data range box to the Consolidation ranges box. +Add +Adds the cell range specified in the Source data range box to the Consolidation ranges box. Options -Shows additional options. +Shows additional options. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12070100.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12070100.xhp index 975fe29bea..ef860a2145 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12070100.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12070100.xhp @@ -32,18 +32,18 @@ - Consolidate by - Consolidate by - Use this section if the cell ranges that you want to consolidate contain labels. You only need to select these options if the consolidation ranges contain similar labels and the data arranged is arranged differently. - Row labels - Uses the row labels to arrange the consolidated data. - Column labels - Uses the column labels to arrange the consolidated data. - Options - Link to source data - Links the data in the consolidation range to the source data, and automatically updates the results of the consolidation when the source data is changed. + Consolidate by + Consolidate by + Use this section if the cell ranges that you want to consolidate contain labels. You only need to select these options if the consolidation ranges contain similar labels and the data arranged is arranged differently. + Row labels + Uses the row labels to arrange the consolidated data. + Column labels + Uses the column labels to arrange the consolidated data. + Options + Link to source data + Links the data in the consolidation range to the source data, and automatically updates the results of the consolidation when the source data is changed. Options - Hides the additional options. + Hides the additional options. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12080000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12080000.xhp index 427dcb0f32..729e4bc193 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12080000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12080000.xhp @@ -37,17 +37,17 @@ showing; sheet details grouping;cells -Group and Outline -You can create an outline of your data and group rows and columns together so that you can collapse and expand the groups with a single click. +Group and Outline +You can create an outline of your data and group rows and columns together so that you can collapse and expand the groups with a single click.
-Group +Group -Ungroup +Ungroup diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12080100.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12080100.xhp index e4b4e29091..6935395716 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12080100.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12080100.xhp @@ -34,10 +34,10 @@
sheets; hiding details -Hide Details - Hides the details of the grouped row or column that contains the cursor. To hide all of the grouped rows or columns, select the outlined table, and then choose this command. +Hide Details + Hides the details of the grouped row or column that contains the cursor. To hide all of the grouped rows or columns, select the outlined table, and then choose this command.
- To show all hidden groups, select the outlined table, and then choose Data - Group and Outline – Show Details. + To show all hidden groups, select the outlined table, and then choose Data - Group and Outline – Show Details.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12080200.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12080200.xhp index fa1a611bb5..83473ea489 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12080200.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12080200.xhp @@ -33,15 +33,15 @@ tables; showing details -Show Details -Shows the details of the grouped row or column that contains the cursor. To show the details of all of the grouped rows or columns, select the outlined table, and then choose this command. +Show Details +Shows the details of the grouped row or column that contains the cursor. To show the details of all of the grouped rows or columns, select the outlined table, and then choose this command.
-To hide a selected group, choose Data - Group and Outline – Hide Details. +To hide a selected group, choose Data - Group and Outline – Hide Details.
-Show Details command in pivot tables +Show Details command in pivot tables
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12080300.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12080300.xhp index 7ef1f050ed..ee22238458 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12080300.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12080300.xhp @@ -35,17 +35,17 @@
-Group +Group
- Defines the selected cell range as a group of rows or columns. + Defines the selected cell range as a group of rows or columns.
- When you group a cell range, and outline icon appears in the margins next to the group. To hide or show the group, click the icon. To ungroup the selection, choose Data – Group and Outline - Ungroup. - Include - Rows - Groups the selected rows. - Columns - Groups the selected columns. + When you group a cell range, and outline icon appears in the margins next to the group. To hide or show the group, click the icon. To ungroup the selection, choose Data – Group and Outline - Ungroup. + Include + Rows + Groups the selected rows. + Columns + Groups the selected columns. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12080400.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12080400.xhp index def44a82f7..68340340af 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12080400.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12080400.xhp @@ -34,16 +34,16 @@
-Ungroup +Ungroup
- Ungroups the selection. In a nested group, the last rows or columns that were added are removed from the group. + Ungroups the selection. In a nested group, the last rows or columns that were added are removed from the group.
- Deactivate for - Rows - Removes selected rows from a group. - Columns - Removes selected columns from a group. + Deactivate for + Rows + Removes selected rows from a group. + Columns + Removes selected columns from a group. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12080500.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12080500.xhp index f8589fc7c8..2d79451c87 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12080500.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12080500.xhp @@ -30,66 +30,66 @@
-AutoOutline -If the selected cell range contains formulas or references, $[officename] automatically outlines the selection. +AutoOutline +If the selected cell range contains formulas or references, $[officename] automatically outlines the selection.
- -For example, consider the following table: + +For example, consider the following table: -January +January -February +February -March +March -1st Quarter +1st Quarter -April +April -May +May -June +June -2nd Quarter +2nd Quarter -100 +100 -120 +120 -130 +130 -350 +350 -100 +100 -100 +100 -200 +200 -400 +400
-The cells for the 1st and 2nd quarters each contain a sum formula for the three cells to their left. If you apply the AutoOutline command, the table is grouped into two quarters. -To remove the outline, select the table, and then choose Data - Group and Outline - Remove. +The cells for the 1st and 2nd quarters each contain a sum formula for the three cells to their left. If you apply the AutoOutline command, the table is grouped into two quarters. +To remove the outline, select the table, and then choose Data - Group and Outline - Remove. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12080600.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12080600.xhp index 54c43316ee..d887850fde 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12080600.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12080600.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Remove - Removes the outline from the selected cell range. +Remove + Removes the outline from the selected cell range.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12080700.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12080700.xhp index 148d9e563f..b3ccd7df7a 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12080700.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12080700.xhp @@ -30,11 +30,11 @@
-Show Details (Pivot Table) -Inserts a new "drill-down" sheet with more information about the current pivot table cell. You can also double-click a pivot table cell to insert the "drill-down" sheet. The new sheet shows a subset of rows from the original data source that constitutes the result data displayed in the current cell. +Show Details (Pivot Table) +Inserts a new "drill-down" sheet with more information about the current pivot table cell. You can also double-click a pivot table cell to insert the "drill-down" sheet. The new sheet shows a subset of rows from the original data source that constitutes the result data displayed in the current cell.
-
Hidden items are not evaluated, the rows for the hidden items are included. Show Details is available only for pivot tables that are based on cell ranges or database data. +
Hidden items are not evaluated, the rows for the hidden items are included. Show Details is available only for pivot tables that are based on cell ranges or database data. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12090000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12090000.xhp index c1ddc841e6..5a648893bc 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12090000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12090000.xhp @@ -28,17 +28,17 @@
-Pivot Table -A pivot table provides a summary of large amounts of data. You can then rearrange the pivot table to view different summaries of the data. +Pivot Table +A pivot table provides a summary of large amounts of data. You can then rearrange the pivot table to view different summaries of the data.
-Create +Create -Pivot table dialog +Pivot table dialog diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12090100.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12090100.xhp index 02dc728d98..4e489a534b 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12090100.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12090100.xhp @@ -29,25 +29,25 @@ -Select Source +Select Source
-Opens a dialog where you can select the source for your pivot table, and then create your table. +Opens a dialog where you can select the source for your pivot table, and then create your table.
-Selection -Select a data source for the pivot table. +Selection +Select a data source for the pivot table. -Current Selection -Uses the selected cells as the data source for the pivot table. -The data columns in the pivot table use the same number format as the first data row in the current selection. +Current Selection +Uses the selected cells as the data source for the pivot table. +The data columns in the pivot table use the same number format as the first data row in the current selection. -Data source registered in $[officename] -Uses a table or query in a database that is registered in $[officename] as the data source for the pivot table. +Data source registered in $[officename] +Uses a table or query in a database that is registered in $[officename] as the data source for the pivot table. -External source/interface -Opens the External Source dialog where you can select the OLAP data source for the pivot table. -Pivot table dialog +External source/interface +Opens the External Source dialog where you can select the OLAP data source for the pivot table. +Pivot table dialog diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12090101.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12090101.xhp index da75500efb..d95a7c7677 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12090101.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12090101.xhp @@ -33,24 +33,24 @@ -Select Data Source -Select the database and the table or query containing the data that you want to use. +Select Data Source +Select the database and the table or query containing the data that you want to use.
-Selection -You can only select databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME. To register a data source, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases. +Selection +You can only select databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME. To register a data source, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases. -Database -Select the database that contains the data source that you want to use. +Database +Select the database that contains the data source that you want to use. -Data source -Select the data source that you want to use. +Data source +Select the data source that you want to use. -Type -Click the source type of for the selected data source. You can choose from four source types: "Table", "Query" and "SQL" or SQL (Native). +Type +Click the source type of for the selected data source. You can choose from four source types: "Table", "Query" and "SQL" or SQL (Native).
-Pivot table dialog +Pivot table dialog
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp index ec5e8790f8..7032c3a108 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp @@ -32,77 +32,73 @@ -Pivot Table - Specify the layout of the table that is generated by the pivot table. +Pivot Table + Specify the layout of the table that is generated by the pivot table.
- The pivot table displays data fields as buttons which you can drag and drop to define the pivot table. + The pivot table displays data fields as buttons which you can drag and drop to define the pivot table. UFI: changed help id from 59001 to dply_page -Layout - To define the layout of a pivot table, drag and drop data field buttons onto the Page Fields, Row Fields, Column Fields, and Data Fields areas. You can also use drag and drop to rearrange the data fields on a pivot table. - $[officename] automatically adds a caption to buttons that are dragged into the Data Fields area. The caption contains the name of the data field as well as the formula that created the data. - To change the function that is used by a data field, double-click a button in the Data Fields area to open the Data Field dialog. You can also double-click buttons in the Row Fields or Column Fields areas. +Layout + To define the layout of a pivot table, drag and drop data field buttons onto the Page Fields, Row Fields, Column Fields, and Data Fields areas. You can also use drag and drop to rearrange the data fields on a pivot table. + $[officename] automatically adds a caption to buttons that are dragged into the Data Fields area. The caption contains the name of the data field as well as the formula that created the data. + To change the function that is used by a data field, double-click a button in the Data Fields area to open the Data Field dialog. You can also double-click buttons in the Row Fields or Column Fields areas. -More - Displays or hides additional options for defining the pivot table. - Result - Specify the settings for displaying the results of the pivot table. +More + Displays or hides additional options for defining the pivot table. + Result + Specify the settings for displaying the results of the pivot table. -Selection from - Select the area that contains the data for the current pivot table. +Selection from + Select the area that contains the data for the current pivot table. -Results to - Select the area where you want to display the results of the pivot table. +Results to + Select the area where you want to display the results of the pivot table. - If the selected area contains data, the pivot table overwrites the data. To prevent the loss of existing data, let the pivot table automatically select the area to display the results. + If the selected area contains data, the pivot table overwrites the data. To prevent the loss of existing data, let the pivot table automatically select the area to display the results. -Ignore empty rows - Ignores empty fields in the data source. +Ignore empty rows + Ignores empty fields in the data source. -Identify categories - Automatically assigns rows without labels to the category of the row above.i93137 +Identify categories + Automatically assigns rows without labels to the category of the row above.i93137 -Total columns - Calculates and displays the grand total of the column calculation. +Total columns + Calculates and displays the grand total of the column calculation. -Total rows - Calculates and displays the grand total of the row calculation. +Total rows + Calculates and displays the grand total of the row calculation. -Add filter - Adds a Filter button to pivot tables that are based on spreadsheet data. +Add filter + Adds a Filter button to pivot tables that are based on spreadsheet data. -Opens the Filter dialog. +Opens the Filter dialog. -Enable drill to details - Select this check box and double-click an item label in the table to show or hide details for the item. Clear this check box and double-click a cell in the table to edit the contents of the cell. - To examine details inside a pivot table - Do one of the following: +Enable drill to details + Select this check box and double-click an item label in the table to show or hide details for the item. Clear this check box and double-click a cell in the table to edit the contents of the cell. + To examine details inside a pivot table + Do one of the following: - Select a range of cells and choose Data - Group and Outline - Show Details. + Select a range of cells and choose Data - Group and Outline - Show Details. - Double-click a field in the table. + Double-click a field in the table. - If you double-click a field which has adjacent fields at the same level, the Show Detail dialog opens: + If you double-click a field which has adjacent fields at the same level, the Show Detail dialog opens: -Show Detail - Choose the field that you want to view the details for. +Show Detail + Choose the field that you want to view the details for.
- Pivot table shortcut keys + Pivot table shortcut keys
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12090103.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12090103.xhp index 2267fbe2f4..71690d2887 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12090103.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12090103.xhp @@ -32,24 +32,24 @@ - Filter - Set the filtering options for the data. - Filter Criteria - You can define a default filter for the data by filtering, for example, field names, using a combination of logical expressions arguments. - Operator - Select a logical operator for the filter. - Field name - Select the field that you want to use in the filter. If field names are not available, the column labels are listed. - Condition - Select an operator to compare the Field name and Value entries. - The following operators are available: + Filter + Set the filtering options for the data. + Filter Criteria + You can define a default filter for the data by filtering, for example, field names, using a combination of logical expressions arguments. + Operator + Select a logical operator for the filter. + Field name + Select the field that you want to use in the filter. If field names are not available, the column labels are listed. + Condition + Select an operator to compare the Field name and Value entries. + The following operators are available: - Conditions: + Conditions: @@ -58,55 +58,55 @@ - = + = - equal + equal - < + < - less than + less than - > + > - greater than + greater than - <= + <= - less than or equal to + less than or equal to - >= + >= - greater than or equal to + greater than or equal to - <> + <> - not equal to + not equal to
- Value - Select the value that you want to compare to the selected field. + Value + Select the value that you want to compare to the selected field. Options diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12090104.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12090104.xhp index 2518868a0e..d1cb4888d1 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12090104.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12090104.xhp @@ -33,20 +33,20 @@ - Options - Displays or hides additional filtering options. - Options - Case sensitive - Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters. - Regular Expression - Allows you to use regular expressions in the filter definition. - If the Regular Expression check box is selected, you can use EQUAL (=) and NOT EQUAL (<>) also in comparisons. You can also use the following functions: DCOUNTA, DGET, MATCH, COUNTIF, SUMIF, LOOKUP, VLOOKUP and HLOOKUP. + Options + Displays or hides additional filtering options. + Options + Case sensitive + Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters. + Regular Expression + Allows you to use regular expressions in the filter definition. + If the Regular Expression check box is selected, you can use EQUAL (=) and NOT EQUAL (<>) also in comparisons. You can also use the following functions: DCOUNTA, DGET, MATCH, COUNTIF, SUMIF, LOOKUP, VLOOKUP and HLOOKUP. No duplications - Excludes duplicate rows in the list of filtered data. + Excludes duplicate rows in the list of filtered data. Data range Displays the name of the filtered data range in the table.
- List of Regular Expressions + List of Regular Expressions
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12090105.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12090105.xhp index 6d10a7c3a6..1c5be1ce6f 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12090105.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12090105.xhp @@ -31,136 +31,136 @@ calculating;pivot table -Data field -The contents of this dialog is different for data fields in the Data area, and data fields in the Row or Column area of the Pivot Table dialog. -Subtotals -Specify the subtotals that you want to calculate. -None -Does not calculate subtotals. -Automatic -Automatically calculates subtotals. -User-defined -Select this option, and then click the type of subtotal that you want to calculate in the list. +Data field +The contents of this dialog is different for data fields in the Data area, and data fields in the Row or Column area of the Pivot Table dialog. +Subtotals +Specify the subtotals that you want to calculate. +None +Does not calculate subtotals. +Automatic +Automatically calculates subtotals. +User-defined +Select this option, and then click the type of subtotal that you want to calculate in the list. -Function -Click the type of subtotal that you want to calculate. This option is only available if the User-defined option is selected. +Function +Click the type of subtotal that you want to calculate. This option is only available if the User-defined option is selected. -Show items without data -Includes empty columns and rows in the results table. -Name: -Lists the name of the selected data field. +Show items without data +Includes empty columns and rows in the results table. +Name: +Lists the name of the selected data field. -More -Expands or reduces the dialog. The More button is visible for data fields only. +More +Expands or reduces the dialog. The More button is visible for data fields only. -Options -Opens the Data Field Options dialog. The Options button is visible for column, row, or page fields only. -If the dialog is expanded by the More button, the following items are added to the dialog: -Displayed value -For each data field, you can select the type of display. For some types you can select additional information for a base field and a base item. +Options +Opens the Data Field Options dialog. The Options button is visible for column, row, or page fields only. +If the dialog is expanded by the More button, the following items are added to the dialog: +Displayed value +For each data field, you can select the type of display. For some types you can select additional information for a base field and a base item. -Type -Select the type of calculating of the displayed value for the data field. +Type +Select the type of calculating of the displayed value for the data field. -Type +Type -Displayed value +Displayed value -Normal +Normal -Results are shown unchanged +Results are shown unchanged -Difference from +Difference from -From each result, its reference value (see below) is subtracted, and the difference is shown. Totals outside of the base field are shown as empty results. - +From each result, its reference value (see below) is subtracted, and the difference is shown. Totals outside of the base field are shown as empty results. + Named item -If a base item name is specified, the reference value for a combination of field items is the result where the item in the base field is replaced by the specified base item. - +If a base item name is specified, the reference value for a combination of field items is the result where the item in the base field is replaced by the specified base item. + Previous item or Next item -If "previous item" or "next item" is specified as the base item, the reference value is the result for the next visible member of the base field, in the base field's sort order. +If "previous item" or "next item" is specified as the base item, the reference value is the result for the next visible member of the base field, in the base field's sort order. -% Of +% Of -Each result is divided by its reference value. The reference value is determined in the same way as for "Difference from". Totals outside of the base field are shown as empty results. +Each result is divided by its reference value. The reference value is determined in the same way as for "Difference from". Totals outside of the base field are shown as empty results. -% Difference from +% Difference from -From each result, its reference value is subtracted, and the difference is divided by the reference value. The reference value is determined in the same way as for "Difference from". Totals outside of the base field are shown as empty results. +From each result, its reference value is subtracted, and the difference is divided by the reference value. The reference value is determined in the same way as for "Difference from". Totals outside of the base field are shown as empty results. -Running total in +Running total in -Each result is added to the sum of the results for preceding items in the base field, in the base field's sort order, and the total sum is shown. -Results are always summed, even if a different summary function was used to get each result. +Each result is added to the sum of the results for preceding items in the base field, in the base field's sort order, and the total sum is shown. +Results are always summed, even if a different summary function was used to get each result. -% of row +% of row -Each result is divided by the total result for its row in the pivot table. If there are several data fields, the total for the result's data field is used. If there are subtotals with manually selected summary functions, the total with the data field's summary function is still used. +Each result is divided by the total result for its row in the pivot table. If there are several data fields, the total for the result's data field is used. If there are subtotals with manually selected summary functions, the total with the data field's summary function is still used. -% of column +% of column -Same as "% of row", but the total for the result's column is used. +Same as "% of row", but the total for the result's column is used. -% of total +% of total -Same as "% of row", but the grand total for the result's data field is used. +Same as "% of row", but the grand total for the result's data field is used. -Index +Index -The row and column totals and the grand total, following the same rules as above, are used to calculate the following expression: -( original result * grand total ) / ( row total * column total ) +The row and column totals and the grand total, following the same rules as above, are used to calculate the following expression: +( original result * grand total ) / ( row total * column total )
-Base field -Select the field from which the respective value is taken as base for the calculation. +Base field +Select the field from which the respective value is taken as base for the calculation. -Base item -Select the item of the base field from which the respective value is taken as base for the calculation. +Base item +Select the item of the base field from which the respective value is taken as base for the calculation. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12090106.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12090106.xhp index e7abbb8e51..ccfa2a6576 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12090106.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12090106.xhp @@ -33,35 +33,35 @@ display options in pivot table sorting;options in pivot table data field options for pivot table -mw changed "hiding..." entryData Field Options -You can specify additional options for column, row, and page data fields in the pivot table. -Sort by -Select the data field that you want to sort columns or rows by. -Ascending -Sorts the values from the lowest value to the highest value. If the selected field is the field for which the dialog was opened, the items are sorted by name. If a data field was selected, the items are sorted by the resultant value of the selected data field. -Descending -Sorts the values descending from the highest value to the lowest value. If the selected field is the field for which the dialog was opened, the items are sorted by name. If a data field was selected, the items are sorted by the resultant value of the selected data field. -Manual -Sorts values alphabetically.UFI: see spec doc. Currently set to alphabetically. -Display options -You can specify the display options for all row fields except for the last, innermost row field. -Layout -Select the layout mode for the field in the list box. -Empty line after each item -Adds an empty row after the data for each item in the pivot table. -Show automatically -Displays the top or bottom nn items when you sort by a specified field. -Show -Turns on the automatic show feature. -items -Enter the maximum number of items that you want to show automatically. -From -Shows the top or bottom items in the specified sort order. -Using field -Select the data field that you want to sort the data by. -Hide items -Select the items that you want to hide from the calculations. -Hierarchy -Select the hierarchy that you want to use. The pivot table must be based on an external source data that contains data hierarchies. +mw changed "hiding..." entryData Field Options +You can specify additional options for column, row, and page data fields in the pivot table. +Sort by +Select the data field that you want to sort columns or rows by. +Ascending +Sorts the values from the lowest value to the highest value. If the selected field is the field for which the dialog was opened, the items are sorted by name. If a data field was selected, the items are sorted by the resultant value of the selected data field. +Descending +Sorts the values descending from the highest value to the lowest value. If the selected field is the field for which the dialog was opened, the items are sorted by name. If a data field was selected, the items are sorted by the resultant value of the selected data field. +Manual +Sorts values alphabetically.UFI: see spec doc. Currently set to alphabetically. +Display options +You can specify the display options for all row fields except for the last, innermost row field. +Layout +Select the layout mode for the field in the list box. +Empty line after each item +Adds an empty row after the data for each item in the pivot table. +Show automatically +Displays the top or bottom nn items when you sort by a specified field. +Show +Turns on the automatic show feature. +items +Enter the maximum number of items that you want to show automatically. +From +Shows the top or bottom items in the specified sort order. +Using field +Select the data field that you want to sort the data by. +Hide items +Select the items that you want to hide from the calculations. +Hierarchy +Select the hierarchy that you want to use. The pivot table must be based on an external source data that contains data hierarchies. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12090200.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12090200.xhp index d41831da9a..65fba017ed 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12090200.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12090200.xhp @@ -33,10 +33,10 @@
-Refresh -Updates the pivot table. +Refresh +Updates the pivot table.
-After you import an Excel spreadsheet that contains a pivot table, click in the table, and then choose Data - Pivot Table - Refresh. +After you import an Excel spreadsheet that contains a pivot table, click in the table, and then choose Data - Pivot Table - Refresh.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12090300.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12090300.xhp index fab8e14674..7ec8ad87be 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12090300.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12090300.xhp @@ -29,8 +29,8 @@
-Delete -Deletes the selected pivot table. +Delete +Deletes the selected pivot table.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12090400.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12090400.xhp index e649edc2c7..edfe2f08a7 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12090400.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12090400.xhp @@ -27,31 +27,31 @@ -Grouping -Grouping pivot tables displays the Grouping dialog for either values or dates. +Grouping +Grouping pivot tables displays the Grouping dialog for either values or dates.
-Start -Specifies the start of the grouping. -Automatically -Specifies whether to start grouping at the smallest value. -Manually at -Specifies whether to enter the start value for grouping yourself. -End -Specifies the end of the grouping. -Automatically -Specifies whether to end grouping at the largest value. -Manually at -Specifies whether to enter the end value for grouping yourself. -Group by -Specifies the value range by which every group's limits are calculated. -Number of days -In the case of grouping date values, specifies the number of days to group by. -Intervals -In the case of grouping date values, specifies the intervals to group by. +Start +Specifies the start of the grouping. +Automatically +Specifies whether to start grouping at the smallest value. +Manually at +Specifies whether to enter the start value for grouping yourself. +End +Specifies the end of the grouping. +Automatically +Specifies whether to end grouping at the largest value. +Manually at +Specifies whether to enter the end value for grouping yourself. +Group by +Specifies the value range by which every group's limits are calculated. +Number of days +In the case of grouping date values, specifies the number of days to group by. +Intervals +In the case of grouping date values, specifies the intervals to group by.
- +
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12100000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12100000.xhp index 6991274970..f513fb9c15 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12100000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12100000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ database ranges; refreshing -Refresh Range - Updates a data range that was inserted from an external database. The data in the sheet is updated to match the data in the external database. +Refresh Range + Updates a data range that was inserted from an external database. The data in the sheet is updated to match the data in the external database.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12120000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12120000.xhp index 5f9f8d0791..867fcfd4a8 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12120000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12120000.xhp @@ -32,13 +32,13 @@ -Validity -Defines what data is valid for a selected cell or cell range. +Validity +Defines what data is valid for a selected cell or cell range.
-You can also insert a list box from the Controls toolbar and link the list box to a cell. This way you can specify the valid values on the Data page of the list box properties window. +You can also insert a list box from the Controls toolbar and link the list box to a cell. This way you can specify the valid values on the Data page of the list box properties window. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12120100.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12120100.xhp index 30d82baada..77821390ae 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12120100.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12120100.xhp @@ -34,116 +34,116 @@ selection lists;validity UFI added index entry for new list feature. Guide needed. MW changed index entry -Criteria -Specify the validation rules for the selected cell(s). +Criteria +Specify the validation rules for the selected cell(s).
-For example, you can define criteria such as: "Numbers between 1 and 10" or "Texts that are no more than 20 characters". +For example, you can define criteria such as: "Numbers between 1 and 10" or "Texts that are no more than 20 characters". -Allow -Click a validation option for the selected cell(s). -The following conditions are available: +Allow +Click a validation option for the selected cell(s). +The following conditions are available: -Condition +Condition -Effect +Effect -All values +All values -No limitation. +No limitation. -Whole number +Whole number -Only whole numbers corresponding to the condition. +Only whole numbers corresponding to the condition. -Decimal +Decimal -All numbers corresponding to the condition. +All numbers corresponding to the condition. -Date +Date -All numbers corresponding to the condition. The entered values are formatted accordingly the next time the dialog is called up. +All numbers corresponding to the condition. The entered values are formatted accordingly the next time the dialog is called up. -Time +Time -All numbers corresponding to the condition. The entered values are formatted accordingly the next time the dialog is called up. +All numbers corresponding to the condition. The entered values are formatted accordingly the next time the dialog is called up. -Cell range +Cell range -Allow only values that are given in a cell range. The cell range can be specified explicitly, or as a named database range, or as a named range. The range may consist of one column or one row of cells. If you specify a range of columns and rows, only the first column is used. +Allow only values that are given in a cell range. The cell range can be specified explicitly, or as a named database range, or as a named range. The range may consist of one column or one row of cells. If you specify a range of columns and rows, only the first column is used. -List +List -Allow only values or strings specified in a list. Strings and values can be mixed. Numbers evaluate to their value, so if you enter the number 1 in the list, the entry 100% is also valid. +Allow only values or strings specified in a list. Strings and values can be mixed. Numbers evaluate to their value, so if you enter the number 1 in the list, the entry 100% is also valid. -Text length +Text length -Entries whose length corresponds to the condition. +Entries whose length corresponds to the condition.
-Allow blank cells -In conjunction with Tools - Detective - Mark invalid Data, this defines that blank cells are shown as invalid data (disabled) or not (enabled). +Allow blank cells +In conjunction with Tools - Detective - Mark invalid Data, this defines that blank cells are shown as invalid data (disabled) or not (enabled). -Show selection list -Shows a list of all valid strings or values to select from. The list can also be opened by selecting the cell and pressing CommandCtrl+D. +Show selection list +Shows a list of all valid strings or values to select from. The list can also be opened by selecting the cell and pressing CommandCtrl+D. -Sort entries ascending -Sorts the selection list in ascending order and filters duplicates from the list. If not checked, the order from the data source is taken. -Source -Enter the cell range that contains the valid values or text. +Sort entries ascending +Sorts the selection list in ascending order and filters duplicates from the list. If not checked, the order from the data source is taken. +Source +Enter the cell range that contains the valid values or text. -Entries -Enter the entries that will be valid values or text strings. +Entries +Enter the entries that will be valid values or text strings. -Data -Select the comparative operator that you want to use. The available operators depend on what you selected in the Allow box. If you select "between" or "not between", the Minimum and Maximum input boxes appear. Otherwise, only the Minimum, the Maximum, or the Value input boxes appear. -Value -Enter the value for the data validation option that you selected in the Allow box. +Data +Select the comparative operator that you want to use. The available operators depend on what you selected in the Allow box. If you select "between" or "not between", the Minimum and Maximum input boxes appear. Otherwise, only the Minimum, the Maximum, or the Value input boxes appear. +Value +Enter the value for the data validation option that you selected in the Allow box. -Minimum -Enter the minimum value for the data validation option that you selected in the Allow box. +Minimum +Enter the minimum value for the data validation option that you selected in the Allow box. -Maximum -Enter the maximum value for the data validation option that you selected in the Allow box. +Maximum +Enter the maximum value for the data validation option that you selected in the Allow box. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12120200.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12120200.xhp index 94515de3cc..8d2aa64c8c 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12120200.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12120200.xhp @@ -32,22 +32,22 @@
-Input Help -Enter the message that you want to display when the cell or cell range is selected in the sheet. +Input Help +Enter the message that you want to display when the cell or cell range is selected in the sheet.
-Show input help when cell is selected -Displays the message that you enter in the Contents box when the cell or cell range is selected in the sheet. -If you enter text in the Contents box of this dialog, and then select and clear this check box, the text will be lost. -Contents +Show input help when cell is selected +Displays the message that you enter in the Contents box when the cell or cell range is selected in the sheet. +If you enter text in the Contents box of this dialog, and then select and clear this check box, the text will be lost. +Contents -Title -Enter the title that you want to display when the cell or cell range is selected. +Title +Enter the title that you want to display when the cell or cell range is selected. -Input help -Enter the message that you want to display when the cell or cell range is selected. +Input help +Enter the message that you want to display when the cell or cell range is selected. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/12120300.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/12120300.xhp index bfd4ba124c..cf618b74d4 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/12120300.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/12120300.xhp @@ -32,35 +32,35 @@
-Error Alert -Define the error message that is displayed when invalid data is entered in a cell. +Error Alert +Define the error message that is displayed when invalid data is entered in a cell.
-You can also start a macro with an error message. A sample macro is provided at the end of this page. +You can also start a macro with an error message. A sample macro is provided at the end of this page.
-Show error message when invalid values are entered. -Displays the error message that you enter in the Contents area when invalid data is entered in a cell. If enabled, the message is displayed to prevent an invalid entry. -In both cases, if you select "Stop", the invalid entry is deleted and the previous value is reentered in the cell. The same applies if you close the "Warning" and "Information" dialogs by clicking the Cancel button. If you close the dialogs with the OK button, the invalid entry is not deleted. -Contents +Show error message when invalid values are entered. +Displays the error message that you enter in the Contents area when invalid data is entered in a cell. If enabled, the message is displayed to prevent an invalid entry. +In both cases, if you select "Stop", the invalid entry is deleted and the previous value is reentered in the cell. The same applies if you close the "Warning" and "Information" dialogs by clicking the Cancel button. If you close the dialogs with the OK button, the invalid entry is not deleted. +Contents -Action -Select the action that you want to occur when invalid data is entered in a cell. The "Stop" action rejects the invalid entry and displays a dialog that you have to close by clicking OK. The "Warning" and "Information" actions display a dialog that can be closed by clicking OK or Cancel. The invalid entry is only rejected when you click Cancel. +Action +Select the action that you want to occur when invalid data is entered in a cell. The "Stop" action rejects the invalid entry and displays a dialog that you have to close by clicking OK. The "Warning" and "Information" actions display a dialog that can be closed by clicking OK or Cancel. The invalid entry is only rejected when you click Cancel. -Browse -Opens the Macro dialog where you can select the macro that is executed when invalid data is entered in a cell. The macro is executed after the error message is displayed. +Browse +Opens the Macro dialog where you can select the macro that is executed when invalid data is entered in a cell. The macro is executed after the error message is displayed. -Title -Enter the title of the macro or the error message that you want to display when invalid data is entered in a cell. +Title +Enter the title of the macro or the error message that you want to display when invalid data is entered in a cell. -Error message -Enter the message that you want to display when invalid data is entered in a cell. +Error message +Enter the message that you want to display when invalid data is entered in a cell.
- + Sample macro: -Function ExampleValidity(CellValue as String, TableCell as String)
Dim msg as string
msg = "Invalid value: " & "'" & CellValue & "'"
msg = msg & " in table: " & "'" & TableCell & "'"
MsgBox msg ,16,"Error message"
End Function +Function ExampleValidity(CellValue as String, TableCell as String)
Dim msg as string
msg = "Invalid value: " & "'" & CellValue & "'"
msg = msg & " in table: " & "'" & TableCell & "'"
MsgBox msg ,16,"Error message"
End Function
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/format_graphic.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/format_graphic.xhp index d15c3f3fd9..d07f0a6469 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/format_graphic.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/format_graphic.xhp @@ -32,15 +32,15 @@
-Graphic -Opens a submenu to edit the properties of the selected object. +Graphic +Opens a submenu to edit the properties of the selected object.
-Define Text Attributes -Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object. -Points -Switches Edit Points mode for an inserted freeform line on and off. +Define Text Attributes +Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object. +Points +Switches Edit Points mode for an inserted freeform line on and off. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/func_date.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/func_date.xhp index aa318ebd34..14e389a2cc 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/func_date.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/func_date.xhp @@ -31,21 +31,21 @@ DATE function -DATE +DATE -This function calculates a date specified by year, month, day and displays it in the cell's formatting. The default format of a cell containing the DATE function is the date format, but you can format the cells with any other number format. -Syntax -DATE(Year; Month; Day) - +This function calculates a date specified by year, month, day and displays it in the cell's formatting. The default format of a cell containing the DATE function is the date format, but you can format the cells with any other number format. +Syntax +DATE(Year; Month; Day) + Year is an integer between 1583 and 9957 or between 0 and 99. -In %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - General you can set from which year a two-digit number entry is recognized as 20xx. - +In %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - General you can set from which year a two-digit number entry is recognized as 20xx. + Month is an integer indicating the month. - + Day is an integer indicating the day of the month. -If the values for month and day are out of bounds, they are carried over to the next digit. If you enter =DATE(00;12;31) the result will be 2000-12-31. If, on the other hand, you enter =DATE(00;13;31) the result will be 2001-01-31. -Example - +If the values for month and day are out of bounds, they are carried over to the next digit. If you enter =DATE(00;12;31) the result will be 2000-12-31. If, on the other hand, you enter =DATE(00;13;31) the result will be 2001-01-31. +Example + =DATE(00;1;31) yields 1/31/00 if the cell format setting is MM/DD/YY. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/func_datevalue.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/func_datevalue.xhp index 680b41eac0..279687ff7e 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/func_datevalue.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/func_datevalue.xhp @@ -30,20 +30,17 @@ DATEVALUE function -DATEVALUE +DATEVALUE - Returns the internal date number for text in quotes. - The internal date number is returned as a number. The number is determined by the date system that is used by $[officename] to calculate dates. - If the text string also includes a time value, DATEVALUE only returns the integer part of the conversion. - Syntax - DATEVALUE("Text") - + Returns the internal date number for text in quotes. + The internal date number is returned as a number. The number is determined by the date system that is used by $[officename] to calculate dates. + If the text string also includes a time value, DATEVALUE only returns the integer part of the conversion. + Syntax + DATEVALUE("Text") + Text is a valid date expression and must be entered with quotation marks. - Example - + Example + =DATEVALUE("1954-07-20") yields 19925. \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/func_day.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/func_day.xhp index 6959b0244e..cfd64cb1b9 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/func_day.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/func_day.xhp @@ -31,16 +31,16 @@ DAY function -DAY +DAY -Returns the day of given date value. The day is returned as an integer between 1 and 31. You can also enter a negative date/time value. -Syntax -DAY(Number) - +Returns the day of given date value. The day is returned as an integer between 1 and 31. You can also enter a negative date/time value. +Syntax +DAY(Number) + Number, as a time value, is a decimal, for which the day is to be returned. -Examples -DAY(1) returns 31 (since $[officename] starts counting at zero from December 30, 1899) -DAY(NOW()) returns the current day. -=DAY(C4) returns 5 if you enter 1901-08-05 in cell C4 (the date value might get formatted differently after you press Enter). +Examples +DAY(1) returns 31 (since $[officename] starts counting at zero from December 30, 1899) +DAY(NOW()) returns the current day. +=DAY(C4) returns 5 if you enter 1901-08-05 in cell C4 (the date value might get formatted differently after you press Enter). diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/func_days.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/func_days.xhp index 5e1a357af8..5a16aa042b 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/func_days.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/func_days.xhp @@ -31,15 +31,15 @@ DAYS function -DAYS +DAYS -Calculates the difference between two date values. The result returns the number of days between the two days. -Syntax -DAYS(Date2; Date1) - +Calculates the difference between two date values. The result returns the number of days between the two days. +Syntax +DAYS(Date2; Date1) + Date1 is the start date, Date2 is the end date. If Date2 is an earlier date than Date1 the result is a negative number. -Examples -=DAYS("2010-01-01"; NOW()) returns the number of days from today until January 1, 2010. -=DAYS("1990-10-10";"1980-10-10") returns 3652 days. +Examples +=DAYS("2010-01-01"; NOW()) returns the number of days from today until January 1, 2010. +=DAYS("1990-10-10";"1980-10-10") returns 3652 days. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/func_days360.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/func_days360.xhp index d303f66273..d99a8e0e3b 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/func_days360.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/func_days360.xhp @@ -31,14 +31,14 @@ DAYS360 function -DAYS360 +DAYS360 -Returns the difference between two dates based on the 360 day year used in interest calculations. -Syntax -DAYS360("Date1"; "Date2"; Type) -If Date2 is earlier than Date1, the function will return a negative number. -The optional argument Type determines the type of difference calculation. If Type = 0 or if the argument is missing, the US method (NASD, National Association of Securities Dealers) is used. If Type <> 0, the European method is used. -Examples -=DAYS360("2000-01-01";NOW()) returns the number of interest days from January 1, 2000 until today. +Returns the difference between two dates based on the 360 day year used in interest calculations. +Syntax +DAYS360("Date1"; "Date2"; Type) +If Date2 is earlier than Date1, the function will return a negative number. +The optional argument Type determines the type of difference calculation. If Type = 0 or if the argument is missing, the US method (NASD, National Association of Securities Dealers) is used. If Type <> 0, the European method is used. +Examples +=DAYS360("2000-01-01";NOW()) returns the number of interest days from January 1, 2000 until today. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/func_eastersunday.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/func_eastersunday.xhp index 77691d7b57..b582e1d1d8 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/func_eastersunday.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/func_eastersunday.xhp @@ -31,19 +31,19 @@ EASTERSUNDAY function -EASTERSUNDAY +EASTERSUNDAY -Returns the date of Easter Sunday for the entered year. -Syntax -EASTERSUNDAY(Year) - +Returns the date of Easter Sunday for the entered year. +Syntax +EASTERSUNDAY(Year) + Year is an integer between 1583 and 9956 or 0 and 99. You can also calculate other holidays by simple addition with this date. -Easter Monday = EASTERSUNDAY(Year) + 1 -Good Friday = EASTERSUNDAY(Year) - 2 -Pentecost Sunday = EASTERSUNDAY(Year) + 49 -Pentecost Monday = EASTERSUNDAY(Year) + 50 -Examples -=EASTERSUNDAY(2000) returns 2000-04-23. -EASTERSUNDAY(2000)+49 returns the internal serial number 36688. The result is 2000-06-11. Format the serial date number as a date, for example in the format YYYY-MM-DD. +Easter Monday = EASTERSUNDAY(Year) + 1 +Good Friday = EASTERSUNDAY(Year) - 2 +Pentecost Sunday = EASTERSUNDAY(Year) + 49 +Pentecost Monday = EASTERSUNDAY(Year) + 50 +Examples +=EASTERSUNDAY(2000) returns 2000-04-23. +EASTERSUNDAY(2000)+49 returns the internal serial number 36688. The result is 2000-06-11. Format the serial date number as a date, for example in the format YYYY-MM-DD. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/func_edate.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/func_edate.xhp index 176438f3df..9a1c8e85b2 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/func_edate.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/func_edate.xhp @@ -31,18 +31,18 @@ EDATE function -EDATE +EDATE -The result is a date which is a number of months away from the start date. Only months are considered; days are not used for calculation. -Syntax -EDATE(StartDate; Months) - +The result is a date which is a number of months away from the start date. Only months are considered; days are not used for calculation. +Syntax +EDATE(StartDate; Months) + StartDate is a date. - + Months is the number of months before (negative) or after (positive) the start date. -Example -What date is one month prior to 2001-03-31? - +Example +What date is one month prior to 2001-03-31? + =EDATE("2001-03-31";-1) returns the serial number 36950. Formatted as a date, this is 2001-02-28. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/func_eomonth.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/func_eomonth.xhp index 388bfbb058..f48ddf57ce 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/func_eomonth.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/func_eomonth.xhp @@ -31,20 +31,20 @@ EOMONTH function -EOMONTH +EOMONTH -Returns the date of the last day of a month which falls months away from the start date. -Syntax -EOMONTH(StartDate; Months) - +Returns the date of the last day of a month which falls months away from the start date. +Syntax +EOMONTH(StartDate; Months) + StartDate is a date (the starting point of the calculation). - + Months is the number of months before (negative) or after (positive) the start date. -Example -What is the last day of the month that falls 6 months after September 14 2001? +Example +What is the last day of the month that falls 6 months after September 14 2001? -=EOMONTH(DATE(2001;9;14);6) returns the serial number 37346. Formatted as a date, this is 2002-03-31. -=EOMONTH("2001-09-14";6) works as well. If the date is given as string, it has to be in ISO format. +=EOMONTH(DATE(2001;9;14);6) returns the serial number 37346. Formatted as a date, this is 2002-03-31. +=EOMONTH("2001-09-14";6) works as well. If the date is given as string, it has to be in ISO format. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/func_hour.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/func_hour.xhp index 5e6fbc499b..1b6a48c2bb 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/func_hour.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/func_hour.xhp @@ -31,19 +31,19 @@ HOUR function -HOUR +HOUR -Returns the hour for a given time value. The hour is returned as an integer between 0 and 23. -Syntax -HOUR(Number) - +Returns the hour for a given time value. The hour is returned as an integer between 0 and 23. +Syntax +HOUR(Number) + Number, as a time value, is a decimal, for which the hour is to be returned. -Examples - +Examples + =HOUR(NOW()) returns the current hour - + =HOUR(C4) returns 17 if the contents of C4 = 17:20:00. -YEAR, NOW, MINUTE, MONTH, DAY, WEEKDAY. +YEAR, NOW, MINUTE, MONTH, DAY, WEEKDAY. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/func_isoweeknum.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/func_isoweeknum.xhp index 3e283be911..e65bfa88f6 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/func_isoweeknum.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/func_isoweeknum.xhp @@ -31,16 +31,16 @@ ISOWEEKNUM function -ISOWEEKNUM +ISOWEEKNUM -ISOWEEKNUM calculates the week number of the year for the internal date value. -The International Standard ISO 8601 has decreed that Monday shall be the first day of the week. A week that lies partly in one year and partly in another is assigned a number in the year in which most of its days lie. That means that week number 1 of any year is the week that contains the January 4th. -Syntax -ISOWEEKNUM(Number) - +ISOWEEKNUM calculates the week number of the year for the internal date value. +The International Standard ISO 8601 has decreed that Monday shall be the first day of the week. A week that lies partly in one year and partly in another is assigned a number in the year in which most of its days lie. That means that week number 1 of any year is the week that contains the January 4th. +Syntax +ISOWEEKNUM(Number) + Number is the internal date number. -Examples -=ISOWEEKNUM(DATE(1995;1;1)) returns 52. Week 1 starts on Monday, 1995-01-02. -=ISOWEEKNUM(DATE(1999;1;1)) returns 53. Week 1 starts on Monday, 1999-01-04. +Examples +=ISOWEEKNUM(DATE(1995;1;1)) returns 52. Week 1 starts on Monday, 1995-01-02. +=ISOWEEKNUM(DATE(1999;1;1)) returns 53. Week 1 starts on Monday, 1999-01-04. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/func_minute.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/func_minute.xhp index 4470b53484..6d21596ec8 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/func_minute.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/func_minute.xhp @@ -31,19 +31,19 @@ MINUTE function -MINUTE +MINUTE -Calculates the minute for an internal time value. The minute is returned as a number between 0 and 59. -Syntax -MINUTE(Number) - +Calculates the minute for an internal time value. The minute is returned as a number between 0 and 59. +Syntax +MINUTE(Number) + Number, as a time value, is a decimal number where the number of the minute is to be returned. -Examples - +Examples + =MINUTE(8.999) returns 58 - + =MINUTE(8.9999) returns 59 - + =MINUTE(NOW()) returns the current minute value. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/func_month.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/func_month.xhp index 6bcd71e60b..00ee244f96 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/func_month.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/func_month.xhp @@ -31,15 +31,15 @@ MONTH function -MONTH +MONTH -Returns the month for the given date value. The month is returned as an integer between 1 and 12. -Syntax -MONTH(Number) - +Returns the month for the given date value. The month is returned as an integer between 1 and 12. +Syntax +MONTH(Number) + Number, as a time value, is a decimal for which the month is to be returned. -Examples -=MONTH(NOW()) returns the current month. -=MONTH(C4) returns 7 if you enter 2000-07-07 to cell C4 (that date value might get formatted differently after you press Enter). +Examples +=MONTH(NOW()) returns the current month. +=MONTH(C4) returns 7 if you enter 2000-07-07 to cell C4 (that date value might get formatted differently after you press Enter). diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/func_now.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/func_now.xhp index 9e10e25e92..1ffc8c1fb4 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/func_now.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/func_now.xhp @@ -31,14 +31,14 @@ NOW function -NOW +NOW -Returns the computer system date and time. The value is updated when you recalculate the document or each time a cell value is modified. -Syntax -NOW() -NOW is a function without arguments. -Example - +Returns the computer system date and time. The value is updated when you recalculate the document or each time a cell value is modified. +Syntax +NOW() +NOW is a function without arguments. +Example + =NOW()-A1 returns the difference between the date in A1 and now. Format the result as a number. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/func_numbervalue.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/func_numbervalue.xhp index 45006a95ba..ee82d4a83f 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/func_numbervalue.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/func_numbervalue.xhp @@ -28,21 +28,21 @@ NUMBERVALUE function - + NUMBERVALUE - + Convert text to number, in a locale-independent way. - Constraints: LEN(decimal_separator) = 1, decimal_separator shall not appear in group_separator - Syntax - NUMBERVALUE("Text";decimal_separator;group_separator) - Text is a valid number expression and must be entered with quotation marks. - decimal_separator (optional) defines the character used as the decimal separator. - group_separator (optional) defines the character(s) used as the group separator. - Example - =NUMBERVALUE("123.456";".";",") yields 123.456 + Constraints: LEN(decimal_separator) = 1, decimal_separator shall not appear in group_separator + Syntax + NUMBERVALUE("Text";decimal_separator;group_separator) + Text is a valid number expression and must be entered with quotation marks. + decimal_separator (optional) defines the character used as the decimal separator. + group_separator (optional) defines the character(s) used as the group separator. + Example + =NUMBERVALUE("123.456";".";",") yields 123.456 diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/func_second.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/func_second.xhp index 01eef38c74..23ca52a2b1 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/func_second.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/func_second.xhp @@ -31,17 +31,17 @@ SECOND function -SECOND +SECOND -Returns the second for the given time value. The second is given as an integer between 0 and 59. -Syntax -SECOND(Number) - +Returns the second for the given time value. The second is given as an integer between 0 and 59. +Syntax +SECOND(Number) + Number, as a time value, is a decimal, for which the second is to be returned. -Examples - +Examples + =SECOND(NOW()) returns the current second - + =SECOND(C4) returns 17 if contents of C4 = 12:20:17. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/func_time.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/func_time.xhp index afbc09a6e9..ad55bb91c4 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/func_time.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/func_time.xhp @@ -31,18 +31,18 @@ TIME function -TIME +TIME -TIME returns the current time value from values for hours, minutes and seconds. This function can be used to convert a time based on these three elements to a decimal time value. -Syntax -TIME(Hour; Minute; Second) -Use an integer to set the Hour. -Use an integer to set the Minute. -Use an integer to set the Second. -Examples - +TIME returns the current time value from values for hours, minutes and seconds. This function can be used to convert a time based on these three elements to a decimal time value. +Syntax +TIME(Hour; Minute; Second) +Use an integer to set the Hour. +Use an integer to set the Minute. +Use an integer to set the Second. +Examples + =TIME(0;0;0) returns 00:00:00 - + =TIME(4;20;4) returns 04:20:04 diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/func_today.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/func_today.xhp index 4e5ee8fba9..4fb24ab4aa 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/func_today.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/func_today.xhp @@ -31,14 +31,14 @@ TODAY function -TODAY +TODAY -Returns the current computer system date. The value is updated when you reopen the document or modify the values of the document. -Syntax -TODAY() - TODAY is a function without arguments. -Example - +Returns the current computer system date. The value is updated when you reopen the document or modify the values of the document. +Syntax +TODAY() + TODAY is a function without arguments. +Example + TODAY() returns the current computer system date. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/func_webservice.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/func_webservice.xhp index 03a06926c0..dec173775e 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/func_webservice.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/func_webservice.xhp @@ -19,13 +19,13 @@ WEBSERVICE function - WEBSERVICE - Get some web content from a URI. - Syntax - WEBSERVICE(URI) - URI: URI text of the web service. - Example - =WEBSERVICE("http://api.openweathermap.org/data/2.5/forecast?q=Copenhagen,dk&mode=xml&units=metric") + WEBSERVICE + Get some web content from a URI. + Syntax + WEBSERVICE(URI) + URI: URI text of the web service. + Example + =WEBSERVICE("http://api.openweathermap.org/data/2.5/forecast?q=Copenhagen,dk&mode=xml&units=metric") Returns the web page content of "http://api.openweathermap.org/data/2.5/forecast?q=Copenhagen,dk&mode=xml&units=metric"
@@ -33,14 +33,14 @@ FILTERXML function - FILTERXML - Apply a XPath expression to a XML document. - Syntax - FILTERXML(XML Document; XPath expression) - XML Document (required): String containing a valid XML stream. - XPath expression (required): String containing a valid XPath expression. - Example - =FILTERXML(WEBSERVICE("http://api.openweathermap.org/data/2.5/forecast?q=Copenhagen,dk&mode=xml&units=metric");"number(/weatherdata/forecast/time[2]/temperature/@value)") + FILTERXML + Apply a XPath expression to a XML document. + Syntax + FILTERXML(XML Document; XPath expression) + XML Document (required): String containing a valid XML stream. + XPath expression (required): String containing a valid XPath expression. + Example + =FILTERXML(WEBSERVICE("http://api.openweathermap.org/data/2.5/forecast?q=Copenhagen,dk&mode=xml&units=metric");"number(/weatherdata/forecast/time[2]/temperature/@value)") Returns information on Copenhagen weather temperature.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknum.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknum.xhp index a19848ff15..76ff5ac2c2 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknum.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknum.xhp @@ -31,33 +31,33 @@ WEEKNUM function -WEEKNUM +WEEKNUM -WEEKNUM calculates the week number of the year for the internal date value as defined in ODF OpenFormula and compatible with other spreadsheet applications. -Supported are two week numbering systems: -System 1: The week containing January 1 is the first week of the year, and is numbered week 1. -System 2: The week containing the first Thursday of the year is the first week of the year, and is numbered week 1. That means that week number 1 of any year is the week that contains January 4th. ISO 8601 defines this system and that the week starts on Monday. -Syntax -WEEKNUM(Number [; Mode]) - +WEEKNUM calculates the week number of the year for the internal date value as defined in ODF OpenFormula and compatible with other spreadsheet applications. +Supported are two week numbering systems: +System 1: The week containing January 1 is the first week of the year, and is numbered week 1. +System 2: The week containing the first Thursday of the year is the first week of the year, and is numbered week 1. That means that week number 1 of any year is the week that contains January 4th. ISO 8601 defines this system and that the week starts on Monday. +Syntax +WEEKNUM(Number [; Mode]) + Number is the internal date number. - + Mode sets the start of the week and the week numbering system. This parameter is optional, if omitted the default value is 1. -1 = Sunday, system 1 -2 = Monday, system 1 -11 = Monday, system 1 -12 = Tuesday, system 1 -13 = Wednesday, system 1 -14 = Thursday, system 1 -15 = Friday, system 1 -16 = Saturday, system 1 -17 = Sunday, system 1 -21 = Monday, system 2 (ISO 8601) -150 = Monday, system 2 (ISO 8601, for interoperability with Gnumeric) -Examples -=WEEKNUM(DATE(1995;1;1);1) returns 1 -=WEEKNUM(DATE(1995;1;1);2) returns 52. If the week starts on Monday, Sunday belongs to the last week of the previous year. -=WEEKNUM(DATE(1995;1;1);21) returns 52. Week 1 starts on Monday, 1995-01-02. -=WEEKNUM(DATE(1999;1;1);21) returns 53. Week 1 starts on Monday, 1999-01-04. +1 = Sunday, system 1 +2 = Monday, system 1 +11 = Monday, system 1 +12 = Tuesday, system 1 +13 = Wednesday, system 1 +14 = Thursday, system 1 +15 = Friday, system 1 +16 = Saturday, system 1 +17 = Sunday, system 1 +21 = Monday, system 2 (ISO 8601) +150 = Monday, system 2 (ISO 8601, for interoperability with Gnumeric) +Examples +=WEEKNUM(DATE(1995;1;1);1) returns 1 +=WEEKNUM(DATE(1995;1;1);2) returns 52. If the week starts on Monday, Sunday belongs to the last week of the previous year. +=WEEKNUM(DATE(1995;1;1);21) returns 52. Week 1 starts on Monday, 1995-01-02. +=WEEKNUM(DATE(1999;1;1);21) returns 53. Week 1 starts on Monday, 1999-01-04. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknum_ooo.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknum_ooo.xhp index 75c718e985..8beea9ca9c 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknum_ooo.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknum_ooo.xhp @@ -31,21 +31,21 @@ WEEKNUM_OOO function -WEEKNUM_OOO +WEEKNUM_OOO -WEEKNUM_OOO calculates the week number of the year for the internal date value. -This function exists for interoperability with %PRODUCTNAME releases older than 5.1.0 and OpenOffice.org. It calculates week numbers for a week numbering system in that week number 1 is the week that contains the January 4th. This function does not provide interoperability with other spreadsheet applications. For new documents use the WEEKNUM or ISOWEEKNUM function instead. -Syntax -WEEKNUM_OOO(Number; Mode) - +WEEKNUM_OOO calculates the week number of the year for the internal date value. +This function exists for interoperability with %PRODUCTNAME releases older than 5.1.0 and OpenOffice.org. It calculates week numbers for a week numbering system in that week number 1 is the week that contains the January 4th. This function does not provide interoperability with other spreadsheet applications. For new documents use the WEEKNUM or ISOWEEKNUM function instead. +Syntax +WEEKNUM_OOO(Number; Mode) + Number is the internal date number. - + Mode sets the start of the week and the calculation type. -1 = Sunday -2 = Monday (ISO 8601) -any other value = Monday (ISO 8601) -Examples -=WEEKNUM_OOO(DATE(1995;1;1);1) returns 1 -=WEEKNUM_OOO(DATE(1995;1;1);2) returns 52. Week 1 starts on Monday, 1995-01-02. +1 = Sunday +2 = Monday (ISO 8601) +any other value = Monday (ISO 8601) +Examples +=WEEKNUM_OOO(DATE(1995;1;1);1) returns 1 +=WEEKNUM_OOO(DATE(1995;1;1);2) returns 52. Week 1 starts on Monday, 1995-01-02. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknumadd.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknumadd.xhp index 4f0a9a11b5..70b34e1bc0 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknumadd.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknumadd.xhp @@ -31,19 +31,19 @@ WEEKNUM_EXCEL2003 function -WEEKNUM_EXCEL2003 +WEEKNUM_EXCEL2003 -The result indicates the number of the calendar week for a date. -The WEEKNUM_EXCEL2003 function is designed to calculate week numbers exactly as Microsoft Excel 2003 did. Use the WEEKNUM function for ODF OpenFormula and Excel 2010 compatibility, or ISOWEEKNUM function when you just need ISO 8601 week numbers. In releases prior to $[officename] 5.1 WEEKNUM_EXCEL2003 was named WEEKNUM_ADD. -Syntax -WEEKNUM_EXCEL2003(Date; ReturnType) - +The result indicates the number of the calendar week for a date. +The WEEKNUM_EXCEL2003 function is designed to calculate week numbers exactly as Microsoft Excel 2003 did. Use the WEEKNUM function for ODF OpenFormula and Excel 2010 compatibility, or ISOWEEKNUM function when you just need ISO 8601 week numbers. In releases prior to $[officename] 5.1 WEEKNUM_EXCEL2003 was named WEEKNUM_ADD. +Syntax +WEEKNUM_EXCEL2003(Date; ReturnType) + Date is the date within the calendar week. - + ReturnType is 1 for week beginning on a Sunday, 2 for week beginning on a Monday. -Example -In which week number does 2001-12-24 fall? - +Example +In which week number does 2001-12-24 fall? + =WEEKNUM_EXCEL2003(DATE(2001;12;24);1) returns 52. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/func_workday.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/func_workday.xhp index 15224c15cb..e8dc7e2d2e 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/func_workday.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/func_workday.xhp @@ -31,20 +31,20 @@ WORKDAY function -WORKDAY +WORKDAY - The result is a date number that can be formatted as a date. You then see the date of a day that is a certain number of workdays away from the start date. -Syntax -WORKDAY(StartDate; Days; Holidays) - + The result is a date number that can be formatted as a date. You then see the date of a day that is a certain number of workdays away from the start date. +Syntax +WORKDAY(StartDate; Days; Holidays) + StartDate is the date from when the calculation is carried out. If the start date is a workday, the day is included in the calculation. - + Days is the number of workdays. Positive value for a result after the start date, negative value for a result before the start date. - + Holidays is a list of optional holidays. These are non-working days. Enter a cell range in which the holidays are listed individually. -Example -What date came 17 workdays after 1 December 2001? Enter the start date "2001-12-01" in C3 and the number of workdays in D3. Cells F3 to J3 contain the following Christmas and New Year holidays: "2001-12-24", "2001-12-25", "2001-12-26", "2001-12-31", "2002-01-01". -=WORKDAY(C3;D3;F3:J3) returns 2001-12-28. Format the serial date number as a date, for example in the format YYYY-MM-DD.UFI: fixed #i30213# +Example +What date came 17 workdays after 1 December 2001? Enter the start date "2001-12-01" in C3 and the number of workdays in D3. Cells F3 to J3 contain the following Christmas and New Year holidays: "2001-12-24", "2001-12-25", "2001-12-26", "2001-12-31", "2002-01-01". +=WORKDAY(C3;D3;F3:J3) returns 2001-12-28. Format the serial date number as a date, for example in the format YYYY-MM-DD.UFI: fixed #i30213#
NETWORKDAYS NETWORKDAYS.INTL diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/func_year.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/func_year.xhp index ac712204dc..7703540284 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/func_year.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/func_year.xhp @@ -31,19 +31,19 @@ YEAR function -YEAR +YEAR -Returns the year as a number according to the internal calculation rules. -Syntax -YEAR(Number) - +Returns the year as a number according to the internal calculation rules. +Syntax +YEAR(Number) + Number shows the internal date value for which the year is to be returned. -Examples - +Examples + =YEAR(1) returns 1899 - + =YEAR(2) returns 1900 - + =YEAR(33333.33) returns 1991 diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/func_yearfrac.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/func_yearfrac.xhp index 86736582fa..fc84af4941 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/func_yearfrac.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/func_yearfrac.xhp @@ -31,69 +31,69 @@ YEARFRAC function -YEARFRAC +YEARFRAC -The result is the number of the years (including fractional part) between StartDate and EndDate. -Syntax -YEARFRAC(StartDate; EndDate; Basis) - +The result is the number of the years (including fractional part) between StartDate and EndDate. +Syntax +YEARFRAC(StartDate; EndDate; Basis) + StartDate and EndDate are two date values.
- + Basis (optional) is chosen from a list of options and indicates how the year is to be calculated. -Basis +Basis -Calculation +Calculation -0 or missing +0 or missing -US method (NASD), 12 months of 30 days each +US method (NASD), 12 months of 30 days each -1 +1 -Exact number of days in months, exact number of days in year +Exact number of days in months, exact number of days in year -2 +2 -Exact number of days in month, year has 360 days +Exact number of days in month, year has 360 days -3 +3 -Exact number of days in month, year has 365 days +Exact number of days in month, year has 365 days -4 +4 -European method, 12 months of 30 days each +European method, 12 months of 30 days each
-Example -What fraction of the year 2008 lies between 2008-01-01 and 2008-07-01? -=YEARFRAC("2008-01-01"; "2008-07-01";0) returns 0.50. +Example +What fraction of the year 2008 lies between 2008-01-01 and 2008-07-01? +=YEARFRAC("2008-01-01"; "2008-07-01";0) returns 0.50. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/text2columns.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/text2columns.xhp index 87052e730a..40195960d3 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/text2columns.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/text2columns.xhp @@ -30,30 +30,30 @@ text to columns -Text to Columns - Opens the Text to Columns dialog, where you enter settings to expand the contents of selected cells to multiple cells. +Text to Columns + Opens the Text to Columns dialog, where you enter settings to expand the contents of selected cells to multiple cells.
- To expand cell contents to multiple cells - You can expand cells that contain comma separated values (CSV) into multiple cells in the same row. - For example, cell A1 contains the comma separated values 1,2,3,4, and cell A2 contains the text A,B,C,D. + To expand cell contents to multiple cells + You can expand cells that contain comma separated values (CSV) into multiple cells in the same row. + For example, cell A1 contains the comma separated values 1,2,3,4, and cell A2 contains the text A,B,C,D. - Select the cell or cells that you want to expand. + Select the cell or cells that you want to expand. - Choose Data - Text to Columns. - You see the Text to Columns dialog. + Choose Data - Text to Columns. + You see the Text to Columns dialog. - Select the separator options. The preview shows how the current cell contents will be transformed into multiple cells. + Select the separator options. The preview shows how the current cell contents will be transformed into multiple cells. - You can select a fixed width and then click the ruler on the preview to set cell breakup positions. - You can select or enter separator characters to define the positions of breaking points. The separator characters are removed from the resulting cell contents. - In the example, you select the comma as a delimiter character. Cells A1 and A2 will be expanded to four columns each. A1 contains 1, B1 contains 2, and so on. + You can select a fixed width and then click the ruler on the preview to set cell breakup positions. + You can select or enter separator characters to define the positions of breaking points. The separator characters are removed from the resulting cell contents. + In the example, you select the comma as a delimiter character. Cells A1 and A2 will be expanded to four columns each. A1 contains 1, B1 contains 2, and so on.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/02/02130000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/02/02130000.xhp index 9954ef2c06..a034a204f1 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/02/02130000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/02/02130000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Number format: Currency - Applies the default currency format to the selected cells. +Number format: Currency + Applies the default currency format to the selected cells.
@@ -44,17 +44,17 @@ - Icon + Icon - Number Format: Currency + Number Format: Currency
- Format - Cell - Numbers. + Format - Cell - Numbers.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/02/02140000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/02/02140000.xhp index 174b9d2f27..516f0cca4d 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/02/02140000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/02/02140000.xhp @@ -33,19 +33,19 @@
-Number format: Percent -Applies the percentage format to the selected cells. +Number format: Percent +Applies the percentage format to the selected cells.
- + Icon -Number Format: Percent +Number Format: Percent
@@ -53,12 +53,12 @@
percentage calculations -You can also enter a percentage sign (%) after a number in a cell: -1% corresponds to 0.01 -1 + 16% corresponds to 116% or 1.16 -1%% corresponds to 0.0001 +You can also enter a percentage sign (%) after a number in a cell: +1% corresponds to 0.01 +1 + 16% corresponds to 116% or 1.16 +1%% corresponds to 0.0001
-Format - Cell - Numbers +Format - Cell - Numbers
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/02/02150000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/02/02150000.xhp index 74d4a89eb5..21b5d139c8 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/02/02150000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/02/02150000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Number format: Default - Applies the default number format to the selected cells. +Number format: Default + Applies the default number format to the selected cells.
@@ -44,17 +44,17 @@ - Icon + Icon - Number Format: Standard + Number Format: Standard
- Format - Cell - Numbers. + Format - Cell - Numbers.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/02/02160000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/02/02160000.xhp index 1b2158e83a..531ccf3d26 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/02/02160000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/02/02160000.xhp @@ -33,19 +33,19 @@
mw copied three index entries to Calc guide format_value.xhp -Number Format: Add Decimal Place -Adds one decimal place to the numbers in the selected cells. +Number Format: Add Decimal Place +Adds one decimal place to the numbers in the selected cells.
- + Icon -Number Format: Add Decimal Place +Number Format: Add Decimal Place
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/02/02170000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/02/02170000.xhp index 59cf36ae50..31b91c827a 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/02/02170000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/02/02170000.xhp @@ -33,19 +33,19 @@
mw copied three index entries to Calc guide format_value.xhp -Number Format: Delete Decimal Place -Removes one decimal place from the numbers in the selected cells. +Number Format: Delete Decimal Place +Removes one decimal place from the numbers in the selected cells.
- + Icon -Number Format: Delete Decimal Place +Number Format: Delete Decimal Place
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/02/06010000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/02/06010000.xhp index 8167e5365a..af34ad8c03 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/02/06010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/02/06010000.xhp @@ -38,24 +38,24 @@ -Name Box -Displays the reference for the current cell, the range of the selected cells, or the name of the area. You can also select a range of cells, and then type a name for that range into the Name Box.UFI: fixes #i28238# +Name Box +Displays the reference for the current cell, the range of the selected cells, or the name of the area. You can also select a range of cells, and then type a name for that range into the Name Box.UFI: fixes #i28238#
- + Combo box sheet area -Name Box +Name Box
-To jump to a particular cell, or to select a cell range, type the cell reference, or cell range reference in this box, for example, F1, or A1:C4. +To jump to a particular cell, or to select a cell range, type the cell reference, or cell range reference in this box, for example, F1, or A1:C4. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/02/06030000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/02/06030000.xhp index 1622deb419..e648f3359e 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/02/06030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/02/06030000.xhp @@ -34,25 +34,25 @@ AutoSum button, see sum icon MW inserted a cross-reference -Sum - Inserts the sum of a cell range into the current cell, or inserts sum values into selected cells. Click in a cell, click this icon, and optionally adjust the cell range. Or select some cells into which the sum values will be inserted, then click the icon. +Sum + Inserts the sum of a cell range into the current cell, or inserts sum values into selected cells. Click in a cell, click this icon, and optionally adjust the cell range. Or select some cells into which the sum values will be inserted, then click the icon.
- + Icon - Sum + Sum
- $[officename] automatically suggests a cell range, provided that the spreadsheet contains data. If the cell range already contains a sum function, you can combine it with the new one to yield the total sum of the range. If the range contains filters, the Subtotal function is inserted instead of the Sum function. - Click the Accept icon (green check mark) to use the formula displayed in the input line. + $[officename] automatically suggests a cell range, provided that the spreadsheet contains data. If the cell range already contains a sum function, you can combine it with the new one to yield the total sum of the range. If the range contains filters, the Subtotal function is inserted instead of the Sum function. + Click the Accept icon (green check mark) to use the formula displayed in the input line. \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/scalc/02/06040000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/02/06040000.xhp index 03c7098e31..67f0bf9146 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/02/06040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/02/06040000.xhp @@ -32,20 +32,20 @@ functions; formula bar icon -Function -Adds a formula to the current cell. Click this icon, and then enter the formula in the Input line. +Function +Adds a formula to the current cell. Click this icon, and then enter the formula in the Input line.
-This icon is only available when the Input line box is not active. +This icon is only available when the Input line box is not active.
- + Icon -Function +Function
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/02/06050000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/02/06050000.xhp index 47bee73557..b924fac0ad 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/02/06050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/02/06050000.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@
-Input line -Enter the formula that you want to add to the current cell. You can also click the Function Wizard icon to insert a predefined function into the formula. +Input line +Enter the formula that you want to add to the current cell. You can also click the Function Wizard icon to insert a predefined function into the formula.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/02/06060000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/02/06060000.xhp index a7f867a94d..881427a8f6 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/02/06060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/02/06060000.xhp @@ -35,19 +35,19 @@ functions; canceling input icon -Cancel -Clears the contents of the Input line, or cancels the changes that you made to an existing formula. +Cancel +Clears the contents of the Input line, or cancels the changes that you made to an existing formula.
- + Icon -Cancel +Cancel
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/02/06070000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/02/06070000.xhp index a1c9b8af1d..6af45d9e8d 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/02/06070000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/02/06070000.xhp @@ -35,19 +35,19 @@ functions; accepting input icon -Accept -Accepts the contents of the Input line, and then inserts the contents into the current cell. +Accept +Accepts the contents of the Input line, and then inserts the contents into the current cell.
- + Icon -Accept +Accept
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/02/06080000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/02/06080000.xhp index 7acdce9241..109521fb7b 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/02/06080000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/02/06080000.xhp @@ -32,26 +32,26 @@ -Theme Selection -Applies a formatting style to the selected cells. +Theme Selection +Applies a formatting style to the selected cells. The styles include font, border, and background color information.
- + Icon -Choose Themes +Choose Themes
-Click the formatting theme that you want to apply, and then click OK. +Click the formatting theme that you want to apply, and then click OK. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/02/08010000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/02/08010000.xhp index 98938746d6..d19821b791 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/02/08010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/02/08010000.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
-Position in document -Displays the number of the current sheet and the total number of sheets in the spreadsheet. +Position in document +Displays the number of the current sheet and the total number of sheets in the spreadsheet.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/02/08080000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/02/08080000.xhp index 4dbd3b41dd..d9b8c85f3f 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/02/08080000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/02/08080000.xhp @@ -42,12 +42,12 @@ -Standard Formula, Date/Time, Error Warning -Displays information about the current document. By default, the SUM of the contents of the selected cells is displayed. +Standard Formula, Date/Time, Error Warning +Displays information about the current document. By default, the SUM of the contents of the selected cells is displayed.
-To change the default formula that is displayed, right-click the field, and then choose the formula that you want. The available formulas are: Average, count of values (COUNTA), count of numbers (COUNT), Maximum, Minimum, Sum, or None. +To change the default formula that is displayed, right-click the field, and then choose the formula that you want. The available formulas are: Average, count of values (COUNTA), count of numbers (COUNT), Maximum, Minimum, Sum, or None.
-Error codes +Error codes
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/02/10050000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/02/10050000.xhp index 84055235e6..d2480646ef 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/02/10050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/02/10050000.xhp @@ -37,20 +37,20 @@ mw deleted "scaling;" -Zoom In -Enlarges the screen display of the current document. The current zoom factor is displayed on the Status Bar. +Zoom In +Enlarges the screen display of the current document. The current zoom factor is displayed on the Status Bar.
-The maximum zoom factor is 400%. +The maximum zoom factor is 400%.
- + Icon -Zoom In +Zoom In
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/02/10060000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/02/10060000.xhp index c65b52211d..1ce9f40c35 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/02/10060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/02/10060000.xhp @@ -36,20 +36,20 @@ mw deleted "scaling;" -Zoom Out -Reduces the screen display of the current document. The current zoom factor is displayed on the Status Bar. +Zoom Out +Reduces the screen display of the current document. The current zoom factor is displayed on the Status Bar.
-The minimum zoom factor is 20%. +The minimum zoom factor is 20%.
- + Icon -Zooming Out +Zooming Out
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/02/18010000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/02/18010000.xhp index f1ec14a88b..a38ebf2d49 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/02/18010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/02/18010000.xhp @@ -33,42 +33,42 @@ inserting; objects, toolbar icon -Insert -Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Insert toolbar, where you can add graphics and special characters to the current sheet. +Insert +Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Insert toolbar, where you can add graphics and special characters to the current sheet.
-Tools bar icon: +Tools bar icon:
- + Icon -Insert +Insert
-You can select the following icons: -Floating Frame +You can select the following icons: +Floating Frame -Special Character +Special Character -From File +From File -Formula +Formula -Chart +Chart -OLE Object +OLE Object diff --git a/source/text/scalc/02/18020000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/02/18020000.xhp index ca0168dad8..c7c6f6f57f 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/02/18020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/02/18020000.xhp @@ -35,22 +35,22 @@ -Insert Cells -Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Insert Cells toolbar, where you can insert cells, rows, and columns into the current sheet. +Insert Cells +Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Insert Cells toolbar, where you can insert cells, rows, and columns into the current sheet.
-Tools bar icon: +Tools bar icon: -You can select the following icons: -Insert Cells Down +You can select the following icons: +Insert Cells Down -Insert Cells Right +Insert Cells Right -Rows +Rows -Columns +Columns diff --git a/source/text/scalc/04/01020000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/04/01020000.xhp index 22667d8c4d..d11bc26756 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/04/01020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/04/01020000.xhp @@ -33,711 +33,711 @@ spreadsheets; shortcut keys in shortcut keys; spreadsheets sheet ranges; filling -mw deleted "matrices;..."Shortcut Keys for Spreadsheets +mw deleted "matrices;..."Shortcut Keys for Spreadsheets -To fill a selected cell range with the formula that you entered on the Input line, press Option +To fill a selected cell range with the formula that you entered on the Input line, press Option Alt+Enter. Hold down Option Alt+Enter+Shift to apply the cell format of the input cell to the entire cell range. -To create a matrix in which all the cells contain the same information as what you entered on the Input line, press Shift+CommandCtrl+Enter. You cannot edit the components of the matrix. -To select multiple cells in different areas of a sheet, hold down CommandCtrl and drag in the different areas. -To select multiple sheets in a spreadsheet, hold down CommandCtrl, and then click the name tabs at the lower edge of the workspace. To select only one sheet in a selection, hold down Shift, and then click the name tab of the sheet. -To insert a manual line break in a cell, click in the cell, and then press CommandCtrl+Enter. -To delete the contents of selected cells, press Backspace. This opens the Delete Contents dialog, where you choose which contents of the cell you want to delete. To delete the contents of selected cells without a dialog, press the Delete key. -Navigating in Spreadsheets +To create a matrix in which all the cells contain the same information as what you entered on the Input line, press Shift+CommandCtrl+Enter. You cannot edit the components of the matrix. +To select multiple cells in different areas of a sheet, hold down CommandCtrl and drag in the different areas. +To select multiple sheets in a spreadsheet, hold down CommandCtrl, and then click the name tabs at the lower edge of the workspace. To select only one sheet in a selection, hold down Shift, and then click the name tab of the sheet. +To insert a manual line break in a cell, click in the cell, and then press CommandCtrl+Enter. +To delete the contents of selected cells, press Backspace. This opens the Delete Contents dialog, where you choose which contents of the cell you want to delete. To delete the contents of selected cells without a dialog, press the Delete key. +Navigating in Spreadsheets -Shortcut Keys +Shortcut Keys - + Effect -CommandCtrl+Home +CommandCtrl+Home -Moves the cursor to the first cell in the sheet (A1). +Moves the cursor to the first cell in the sheet (A1). -CommandCtrl+End +CommandCtrl+End -Moves the cursor to the last cell on the sheet that contains data. +Moves the cursor to the last cell on the sheet that contains data. -Home +Home -Moves the cursor to the first cell of the current row. +Moves the cursor to the first cell of the current row. -End +End -Moves the cursor to the last cell of the current row. +Moves the cursor to the last cell of the current row. -Shift+Home +Shift+Home -Selects cells from the current cell to the first cell of the current row. +Selects cells from the current cell to the first cell of the current row. -Shift+End +Shift+End -Selects cells from the current cell to the last cell of the current row. +Selects cells from the current cell to the last cell of the current row. -Shift+Page Up +Shift+Page Up -Selects cells from the current cell up to one page in the current column or extends the existing selection one page up. +Selects cells from the current cell up to one page in the current column or extends the existing selection one page up. -Shift+Page Down +Shift+Page Down -Selects cells from the current cell down to one page in the current column or extends the existing selection one page down. +Selects cells from the current cell down to one page in the current column or extends the existing selection one page down. -CommandCtrl+Left Arrow +CommandCtrl+Left Arrow -Moves the cursor to the left edge of the current data range. If the column to the left of the cell that contains the cursor is empty, the cursor moves to the next column to the left that contains data. +Moves the cursor to the left edge of the current data range. If the column to the left of the cell that contains the cursor is empty, the cursor moves to the next column to the left that contains data. -CommandCtrl+Right Arrow +CommandCtrl+Right Arrow -Moves the cursor to the right edge of the current data range. If the column to the right of the cell that contains the cursor is empty, the cursor moves to the next column to the right that contains data. +Moves the cursor to the right edge of the current data range. If the column to the right of the cell that contains the cursor is empty, the cursor moves to the next column to the right that contains data. -CommandCtrl+Up Arrow +CommandCtrl+Up Arrow -Moves the cursor to the top edge of the current data range. If the row above the cell that contains the cursor is empty, the cursor moves up to the next row that contains data. +Moves the cursor to the top edge of the current data range. If the row above the cell that contains the cursor is empty, the cursor moves up to the next row that contains data. -CommandCtrl+Down Arrow +CommandCtrl+Down Arrow -Moves the cursor to the bottom edge of the current data range. If the row below the cell that contains the cursor is empty, the cursor moves down to the next row that contains data. +Moves the cursor to the bottom edge of the current data range. If the row below the cell that contains the cursor is empty, the cursor moves down to the next row that contains data. -CommandCtrl+Shift+Arrow +CommandCtrl+Shift+Arrow -Selects all cells containing data from the current cell to the end of the continuous range of data cells, in the direction of the arrow pressed. If used to select rows and columns together, a rectangular cell range is selected. +Selects all cells containing data from the current cell to the end of the continuous range of data cells, in the direction of the arrow pressed. If used to select rows and columns together, a rectangular cell range is selected. -CommandCtrl+Page Up +CommandCtrl+Page Up -Moves one sheet to the left. -In the print preview: Moves to the previous print page. +Moves one sheet to the left. +In the print preview: Moves to the previous print page. -CommandCtrl+Page Down +CommandCtrl+Page Down -Moves one sheet to the right. -In the print preview: Moves to the next print page. +Moves one sheet to the right. +In the print preview: Moves to the next print page. -Option +Option Alt+Page Up -Moves one screen to the left. +Moves one screen to the left. -Option +Option Alt+Page Down -Moves one screen page to the right. +Moves one screen page to the right. -Shift+CommandCtrl+Page Up +Shift+CommandCtrl+Page Up -Adds the previous sheet to the current selection of sheets. If all the sheets in a spreadsheet are selected, this shortcut key combination only selects the previous sheet. Makes the previous sheet the current sheet. +Adds the previous sheet to the current selection of sheets. If all the sheets in a spreadsheet are selected, this shortcut key combination only selects the previous sheet. Makes the previous sheet the current sheet. -Shift+CommandCtrl+Page Down +Shift+CommandCtrl+Page Down -Adds the next sheet to the current selection of sheets. If all the sheets in a spreadsheet are selected, this shortcut key combination only selects the next sheet. Makes the next sheet the current sheet. +Adds the next sheet to the current selection of sheets. If all the sheets in a spreadsheet are selected, this shortcut key combination only selects the next sheet. Makes the next sheet the current sheet. -CommandCtrl+ * +CommandCtrl+ * -where (*) is the multiplication sign on the numeric key pad -Selects the data range that contains the cursor. A range is a contiguous cell range that contains data and is bounded by empty row and columns. +where (*) is the multiplication sign on the numeric key pad +Selects the data range that contains the cursor. A range is a contiguous cell range that contains data and is bounded by empty row and columns. -CommandCtrl+ / +CommandCtrl+ / -where (/) is the division sign on the numeric key pad -Selects the matrix formula range that contains the cursor. +where (/) is the division sign on the numeric key pad +Selects the matrix formula range that contains the cursor. -CommandCtrl+Plus key +CommandCtrl+Plus key -Insert cells (as in menu Insert - Cells)[sc-features] of 8.June07 +Insert cells (as in menu Insert - Cells)[sc-features] of 8.June07 -CommandCtrl+Minus key +CommandCtrl+Minus key -Delete cells (as in menu Edit - Delete Cells) +Delete cells (as in menu Edit - Delete Cells) -Enter (in a selected range)see i80051 +Enter (in a selected range)see i80051 -Moves the cursor down one cell in a selected range. To specify the direction that the cursor moves, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General. +Moves the cursor down one cell in a selected range. To specify the direction that the cursor moves, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General. -CommandCtrl+ ` (see note below this table) +CommandCtrl+ ` (see note below this table) -Displays or hides the formulas instead of the values in all cells.i56202 +Displays or hides the formulas instead of the values in all cells.i56202
-The ` key is located next to the "1" key on most English keyboards. If your keyboard does not show this key, you can assign another key: Choose Tools - Customize, click the Keyboard tab. Select the "View" category and the "Toggle Formula" function. -Function Keys Used in Spreadsheets +The ` key is located next to the "1" key on most English keyboards. If your keyboard does not show this key, you can assign another key: Choose Tools - Customize, click the Keyboard tab. Select the "View" category and the "Toggle Formula" function. +Function Keys Used in Spreadsheets -Shortcut Keys +Shortcut Keys - + Effect -CommandCtrl+F1 +CommandCtrl+F1 -Displays the comment that is attached to the current cell +Displays the comment that is attached to the current cell -F2 +F2 -Switches to Edit mode and places the cursor at the end of the contents of the current cell. Press again to exit Edit mode. -If the cursor is in an input box in a dialog that has a Minimize button, the dialog is hidden and the input box remains visible. Press F2 again to show the whole dialog. +Switches to Edit mode and places the cursor at the end of the contents of the current cell. Press again to exit Edit mode. +If the cursor is in an input box in a dialog that has a Minimize button, the dialog is hidden and the input box remains visible. Press F2 again to show the whole dialog. -CommandCtrl+F2 +CommandCtrl+F2 -Opens the Function Wizard. +Opens the Function Wizard. -Shift+CommandCtrl+F2 +Shift+CommandCtrl+F2 -Moves the cursor to the Input line where you can enter a formula for the current cell. +Moves the cursor to the Input line where you can enter a formula for the current cell. -CommandCtrl+F3 +CommandCtrl+F3 -Opens the Define Names dialog. +Opens the Define Names dialog. -Shift+CommandCtrl+F4 +Shift+CommandCtrl+F4 -Shows or Hides the Database explorer. +Shows or Hides the Database explorer. -F4 +F4 -Rearranges the relative or absolute references (for example, A1, $A$1, $A1, A$1) in the input field. +Rearranges the relative or absolute references (for example, A1, $A$1, $A1, A$1) in the input field. -F5 +F5 -Shows or hides the Navigator. +Shows or hides the Navigator. -Shift+F5 +Shift+F5 -Traces dependents. +Traces dependents. -Shift+F7 +Shift+F7 -Traces precedents. +Traces precedents. -Shift+CommandCtrl+F5 +Shift+CommandCtrl+F5 -Moves the cursor from the Input line to the Sheet area box. +Moves the cursor from the Input line to the Sheet area box. -F7 +F7 -Checks spelling in the current sheet. +Checks spelling in the current sheet. -CommandCtrl+F7 +CommandCtrl+F7 -Opens the Thesaurus if the current cell contains text. +Opens the Thesaurus if the current cell contains text. -F8 +F8 -Turns additional selection mode on or off. In this mode, you can use the arrow keys to extend the selection. You can also click in another cell to extend the selection. +Turns additional selection mode on or off. In this mode, you can use the arrow keys to extend the selection. You can also click in another cell to extend the selection. -CommandCtrl+F8 +CommandCtrl+F8 -Highlights cells containing values. +Highlights cells containing values. -F9 +F9 -Recalculates changed formulas in the current sheet. +Recalculates changed formulas in the current sheet. -CommandCtrl+Shift+F9 +CommandCtrl+Shift+F9 -Recalculates all formulas in all sheets. +Recalculates all formulas in all sheets. -CommandCtrl+F9 +CommandCtrl+F9 -Updates the selected chart. +Updates the selected chart. -Command+TF11 +Command+TF11 -Opens the Styles and Formatting window where you can apply a formatting style to the contents of the cell or to the current sheet. +Opens the Styles and Formatting window where you can apply a formatting style to the contents of the cell or to the current sheet. -Shift+F11 +Shift+F11 -Creates a document template. +Creates a document template. -Shift+Command+Ctrl+F11 +Shift+Command+Ctrl+F11 -Updates the templates. +Updates the templates. -F12 +F12 -Groups the selected data range. +Groups the selected data range. -CommandCtrl+F12 +CommandCtrl+F12 -Ungroups the selected data range. +Ungroups the selected data range. -Option +Option Alt+Down Arrow -Increases the height of current row (only in OpenOffice.org legacy compatibility mode). +Increases the height of current row (only in OpenOffice.org legacy compatibility mode). -Option +Option Alt+Up Arrow -Decreases the height of current row (only in OpenOffice.org legacy compatibility mode). +Decreases the height of current row (only in OpenOffice.org legacy compatibility mode). -Option +Option Alt+Right Arrow -Increases the width of the current column. +Increases the width of the current column. -Option +Option Alt+Left Arrow -Decreases the width of the current column. +Decreases the width of the current column. -OptionAlt+Shift+Arrow Key +OptionAlt+Shift+Arrow Key -Optimizes the column width or row height based on the current cell. +Optimizes the column width or row height based on the current cell.
-Formatting Cells Using Shortcut Keys -The following cell formats can be applied with the keyboard: +Formatting Cells Using Shortcut Keys +The following cell formats can be applied with the keyboard: -Shortcut Keys +Shortcut Keys - + Effect -CommandCtrl+1 (not on the number pad) +CommandCtrl+1 (not on the number pad) -Open Format Cells dialog +Open Format Cells dialog -CommandCtrl+Shift+1 (not on the number pad) +CommandCtrl+Shift+1 (not on the number pad) -Two decimal places, thousands separator +Two decimal places, thousands separator -CommandCtrl+Shift+2 (not on the number pad) +CommandCtrl+Shift+2 (not on the number pad) -Standard exponential format +Standard exponential format -CommandCtrl+Shift+3 (not on the number pad) +CommandCtrl+Shift+3 (not on the number pad) -Standard date format +Standard date format -CommandCtrl+Shift+4 (not on the number pad) +CommandCtrl+Shift+4 (not on the number pad) -Standard currency format +Standard currency format -CommandCtrl+Shift+5 (not on the number pad) +CommandCtrl+Shift+5 (not on the number pad) -Standard percentage format (two decimal places) +Standard percentage format (two decimal places) -CommandCtrl+Shift+6 (not on the number pad) +CommandCtrl+Shift+6 (not on the number pad) -Standard format +Standard format
-Using the pivot table +Using the pivot table -Keys +Keys -Effect +Effect -Tab +Tab -Changes the focus by moving forwards through the areas and buttons of the dialog. +Changes the focus by moving forwards through the areas and buttons of the dialog. -Shift+Tab +Shift+Tab -Changes the focus by moving backwards through the areas and buttons of the dialog. +Changes the focus by moving backwards through the areas and buttons of the dialog. -Up Arrow +Up Arrow -Moves the focus up one item in the current dialog area. +Moves the focus up one item in the current dialog area. -Down Arrow +Down Arrow -Moves the focus down one item in the current dialog area. +Moves the focus down one item in the current dialog area. -Left Arrow +Left Arrow -Moves the focus one item to the left in the current dialog area. +Moves the focus one item to the left in the current dialog area. -Right Arrow +Right Arrow -Moves the focus one item to the right in the current dialog area. +Moves the focus one item to the right in the current dialog area. -Home +Home -Selects the first item in the current dialog area. +Selects the first item in the current dialog area. -End +End -Selects the last item in the current dialog area. +Selects the last item in the current dialog area. -OptionAlt and the underlined character in the word "Row" +OptionAlt and the underlined character in the word "Row" -Copies or moves the current field into the "Row" area. +Copies or moves the current field into the "Row" area. -OptionAlt and the underlined character in the word "Column" +OptionAlt and the underlined character in the word "Column" -Copies or moves the current field into the "Column" area. +Copies or moves the current field into the "Column" area. -OptionAlt and the underlined character in the word "Data" +OptionAlt and the underlined character in the word "Data" -Copies or moves the current field into the "Data" area. +Copies or moves the current field into the "Data" area. -CommandCtrl+Up Arrow +CommandCtrl+Up Arrow -Moves the current field up one place. +Moves the current field up one place. -CommandCtrl+Down Arrow +CommandCtrl+Down Arrow -Moves the current field down one place. +Moves the current field down one place. -CommandCtrl+Left Arrow +CommandCtrl+Left Arrow -Moves the current field one place to the left. +Moves the current field one place to the left. -CommandCtrl+Right Arrow +CommandCtrl+Right Arrow -Moves the current field one place to the right. +Moves the current field one place to the right. -CommandCtrl+Home +CommandCtrl+Home -Moves the current field to the first place. +Moves the current field to the first place. -CommandCtrl+End +CommandCtrl+End -Moves the current field to the last place. +Moves the current field to the last place. -OptionAlt+O +OptionAlt+O -Displays the options for the current field. +Displays the options for the current field. -Delete +Delete -Removes the current field from the area. +Removes the current field from the area.
@@ -745,7 +745,7 @@
-Shortcut keys in $[officename] +Shortcut keys in $[officename]
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp index 3e6789c667..459462fb6f 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp @@ -29,8 +29,8 @@ error codes;list of mw deleted "%PRODUCTNAME Calc;error codes" -Error Codes in %PRODUCTNAME Calc - The following table is an overview of the error messages for %PRODUCTNAME Calc. If the error occurs in the cell that contains the cursor, the error message is displayed on the Status Bar. +Error Codes in %PRODUCTNAME Calc + The following table is an overview of the error messages for %PRODUCTNAME Calc. If the error occurs in the cell that contains the cursor, the error message is displayed on the Status Bar. ### error message invalid references; error messages error messages;invalid references @@ -42,293 +42,293 @@ - Error Code + Error Code - Message + Message - Explanation + Explanation - ### + ### -none +none - The cell is not wide enough to display the contents. + The cell is not wide enough to display the contents. - 501 + 501 - Invalid character + Invalid character - Character in a formula is not valid. + Character in a formula is not valid. - 502 + 502 - Invalid argument + Invalid argument - Function argument is not valid. For example, a negative number for the SQRT() function, for this please use IMSQRT(). + Function argument is not valid. For example, a negative number for the SQRT() function, for this please use IMSQRT(). - 503
#NUM! + 503
#NUM! - Invalid floating point operation + Invalid floating point operation - A calculation results in an overflow of the defined value range. + A calculation results in an overflow of the defined value range. - 504 + 504 - Parameter list error + Parameter list error - Function parameter is not valid, for example, text instead of a number, or a domain reference instead of cell reference. + Function parameter is not valid, for example, text instead of a number, or a domain reference instead of cell reference. - 508 + 508 - Error: Pair missing + Error: Pair missing - Missing bracket, for example, closing brackets, but no opening brackets + Missing bracket, for example, closing brackets, but no opening brackets - 509 + 509 - Missing operator + Missing operator - Operator is missing, for example, "=2(3+4) * ", where the operator between "2" and "(" is missing. + Operator is missing, for example, "=2(3+4) * ", where the operator between "2" and "(" is missing. - 510 + 510 - Missing variable + Missing variable - Variable is missing, for example when two operators are together "=1+*2". + Variable is missing, for example when two operators are together "=1+*2". - 511 + 511 - Missing variable + Missing variable - Function requires more variables than are provided, for example, AND() and OR(). + Function requires more variables than are provided, for example, AND() and OR(). - 512 + 512 - Formula overflow + Formula overflow - + Compiler: the total number of internal tokens, (that is, operators, variables, brackets) in the formula exceeds 8192. - 513 + 513 - String overflow + String overflow - + Compiler: an identifier in the formula exceeds 64 KB in size. Interpreter: a result of a string operation exceeds 64 KB in size. - 514 + 514 - Internal overflow + Internal overflow - Sort operation attempted on too much numerical data (max. 100000) or a calculation stack overflow. + Sort operation attempted on too much numerical data (max. 100000) or a calculation stack overflow. - 516 + 516 - Internal syntax error + Internal syntax error - Matrix is expected on the calculation stack, but is not available. + Matrix is expected on the calculation stack, but is not available. - 517 + 517 - Internal syntax error + Internal syntax error - Unknown code, for example, a document with a newer function is loaded in an older version that does not contain the function. + Unknown code, for example, a document with a newer function is loaded in an older version that does not contain the function. - 518 + 518 - Internal syntax error + Internal syntax error - Variable is not available + Variable is not available - 519
#VALUE + 519
#VALUE - No result (#VALUE is in the cell rather than Err:519!) + No result (#VALUE is in the cell rather than Err:519!) - The formula yields a value that does not correspond to the definition; or a cell that is referenced in the formula contains text instead of a number.i63264 + The formula yields a value that does not correspond to the definition; or a cell that is referenced in the formula contains text instead of a number.i63264 - 520 + 520 - Internal syntax error + Internal syntax error - Compiler creates an unknown compiler code. + Compiler creates an unknown compiler code. - 521 + 521 - Internal syntax error + Internal syntax error - No result. + No result. - 522 + 522 - Circular reference + Circular reference - Formula refers directly or indirectly to itself and the Iterations option is not set under %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences + Formula refers directly or indirectly to itself and the Iterations option is not set under %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate.UFI: fixes #i23854# - 523 + 523 - The calculation procedure does not converge + The calculation procedure does not converge - Function missed a targeted value, or iterative references do not reach the minimum change within the maximum steps that are set.UFI: see #33769# + Function missed a targeted value, or iterative references do not reach the minimum change within the maximum steps that are set.UFI: see #33769# - 524
#REF + 524
#REF -invalid references (instead of Err:524 cell contains #REF) +invalid references (instead of Err:524 cell contains #REF) - + Compiler: a column or row description name could not be resolved. Interpreter: in a formula, the column, row, or sheet that contains a referenced cell is missing. - 525
#NAME? + 525
#NAME? -invalid names (instead of Err:525 cell contains #NAME?) +invalid names (instead of Err:525 cell contains #NAME?) - An identifier could not be evaluated, for example, no valid reference, no valid domain name, no column/row label, no macro, incorrect decimal divider, add-in not found. + An identifier could not be evaluated, for example, no valid reference, no valid domain name, no column/row label, no macro, incorrect decimal divider, add-in not found. - 526 + 526 - Internal syntax error + Internal syntax error - Obsolete, no longer used, but could come from old documents if the result is a formula from a domain. + Obsolete, no longer used, but could come from old documents if the result is a formula from a domain. - 527 + 527 - Internal overflow + Internal overflow - + Interpreter: References, such as when a cell references a cell, are too encapsulated. - 532
#DIV/0! + 532
#DIV/0! - Division by zero + Division by zero - Division operator / if the denominator is 0
Some more functions return this error, for example:
VARP with less than 1 argument
STDEVP with less than 1 argument
VAR with less than 2 arguments
STDEV with less than 2 arguments
STANDARDIZE with stdev=0
NORMDIST with stdev=0 + Division operator / if the denominator is 0
Some more functions return this error, for example:
VARP with less than 1 argument
STDEVP with less than 1 argument
VAR with less than 2 arguments
STDEV with less than 2 arguments
STANDARDIZE with stdev=0
NORMDIST with stdev=0
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/05/OpenCL_options.xhp b/source/text/scalc/05/OpenCL_options.xhp index 39d3ea241d..19a096f30a 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/05/OpenCL_options.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/05/OpenCL_options.xhp @@ -20,40 +20,40 @@ OpenCl;options -OpenCL Options +OpenCL Options -This page is under construction -OpenCL: the open standard for parallel programming of heterogeneous systems. +This page is under construction +OpenCL: the open standard for parallel programming of heterogeneous systems.
- + Menu Tools - Options - LibreOffice Calc - Formula, and in section Detailed Calculation Settings press Details... button
- + OpenCL™ is the first open, royalty-free standard for cross-platform, parallel programming of modern processors found in personal computers, servers and handheld/embedded devices. OpenCL (Open Computing Language) greatly improves speed and responsiveness for a wide spectrum of applications in numerous market categories from gaming and entertainment to scientific and medical software -for more information on OpenCL, visit the OpenCL site +for more information on OpenCL, visit the OpenCL site Contents to Numbers -Conversion from text to number -How to treat text when encountered as operand in an arithmetic operation or as argument to a function that expects a number instead. Unambiguous conversion is possible for integer numbers including exponents and ISO 8601 dates and times in their extended formats with separators. Fractional numeric values with decimal separators or dates other than ISO 8601 are locale dependent. Note that in locale dependent conversions the resulting numeric value may differ between locales! -Generate #VALUE! error: Text found where numeric data is expected will generate #VALUE! error. Example: "123.45" will generate a #VALUE! error, while 123.45 not. -Treat as zero: Any text found where numeric data is expected will be considered as a number of value zero. Example: "123.45" will map to zero, while 123.45 not. -Convert only if unambiguous: If the text represents a valid and unambiguous numeric value, convert it. Example: "123.456" will generate a #VALUE! error because the text contains a separator, while "123456" will not. -Convert also locale dependent: convert values valid in the locale representation. Example: "123,45" is a valid number in some locales because the comma is the decimal separator there. -Treat empty string as zero -This option determines how an empty string is treated when used in arithmetic operations. If you have set "Conversion from text to number" to either "Generate #VALUE! error" or "Treat as zero", you cannot choose (here) if conversion of an empty string to a number will generate an error or if it will treat empty strings as zero. Otherwise this option determines how empty strings are treated. -Reference syntax for string reference -Formula syntax to use when parsing references given in string parameters. This affects built-in functions such as INDIRECT that takes a reference as a string value. -Use formula syntax: -Calc A1: -Excel A1: -Excel R1C1: -OpenCL Settings -Use OpenCL only for a subset of operations -Use OpenCL only for some of the operations that spreadsheet formulas are translated to. -Minimum data size for OpenCL use: -An approximate lower limit on the number of data cells a spreadsheet formula should use for OpenCL to be considered. -Subset of OpCodes for which OpenCL is used -The list of operators and function opcodes for which to use OpenCL. If a formula contains only these operators and functions, it might be calculated using OpenCL. +Conversion from text to number +How to treat text when encountered as operand in an arithmetic operation or as argument to a function that expects a number instead. Unambiguous conversion is possible for integer numbers including exponents and ISO 8601 dates and times in their extended formats with separators. Fractional numeric values with decimal separators or dates other than ISO 8601 are locale dependent. Note that in locale dependent conversions the resulting numeric value may differ between locales! +Generate #VALUE! error: Text found where numeric data is expected will generate #VALUE! error. Example: "123.45" will generate a #VALUE! error, while 123.45 not. +Treat as zero: Any text found where numeric data is expected will be considered as a number of value zero. Example: "123.45" will map to zero, while 123.45 not. +Convert only if unambiguous: If the text represents a valid and unambiguous numeric value, convert it. Example: "123.456" will generate a #VALUE! error because the text contains a separator, while "123456" will not. +Convert also locale dependent: convert values valid in the locale representation. Example: "123,45" is a valid number in some locales because the comma is the decimal separator there. +Treat empty string as zero +This option determines how an empty string is treated when used in arithmetic operations. If you have set "Conversion from text to number" to either "Generate #VALUE! error" or "Treat as zero", you cannot choose (here) if conversion of an empty string to a number will generate an error or if it will treat empty strings as zero. Otherwise this option determines how empty strings are treated. +Reference syntax for string reference +Formula syntax to use when parsing references given in string parameters. This affects built-in functions such as INDIRECT that takes a reference as a string value. +Use formula syntax: +Calc A1: +Excel A1: +Excel R1C1: +OpenCL Settings +Use OpenCL only for a subset of operations +Use OpenCL only for some of the operations that spreadsheet formulas are translated to. +Minimum data size for OpenCL use: +An approximate lower limit on the number of data cells a spreadsheet formula should use for OpenCL to be considered. +Subset of OpCodes for which OpenCL is used +The list of operators and function opcodes for which to use OpenCL. If a formula contains only these operators and functions, it might be calculated using OpenCL. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/05/empty_cells.xhp b/source/text/scalc/05/empty_cells.xhp index d9ad6c0048..f443018d2b 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/05/empty_cells.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/05/empty_cells.xhp @@ -30,44 +30,44 @@ empty cells;handling of -i86303Handling of Empty Cells +i86303Handling of Empty Cells -In older versions of the software, empty cells were forced to numeric 0 in some contexts and to empty string in others, except in direct comparison where =A1=0 and =A1="" both resulted in TRUE if A1 was empty. Emptiness now is inherited until used, so both =VLOOKUP(...)=0 and =VLOOKUP(...)="" give TRUE if the lookup resulted in an empty cell being returned. -A simple reference to an empty cell is still displayed as numeric 0 but is not necessarily of type numeric anymore, so also comparisons with the referencing cell work as expected. -For the following examples, A1 contains a number, B1 is empty, C1 contains the reference to B1: -A1: 1 B1: <Empty> C1: =B1 (displays 0) -=B1=0 => TRUE -=B1="" => TRUE -=C1=0 => TRUE -=C1="" => TRUE (previously was FALSE) -=ISNUMBER(B1) => FALSE -=ISNUMBER(C1) => FALSE (previously was TRUE) -=ISNUMBER(VLOOKUP(1;A1:C1;2)) => FALSE (B1) -=ISNUMBER(VLOOKUP(1;A1:C1;3)) => FALSE (C1, previously was TRUE) -=ISTEXT(B1) => FALSE -=ISTEXT(C1) => FALSE -=ISTEXT(VLOOKUP(1;A1:C1;2)) => FALSE (B1, previously was TRUE) -=ISTEXT(VLOOKUP(1;A1:C1;3)) => FALSE (C1) -=ISBLANK(B1) => TRUE -=ISBLANK(C1) => FALSE -=ISBLANK(VLOOKUP(1;A1:C1;2)) => TRUE (B1, previously was FALSE) -=ISBLANK(VLOOKUP(1;A1:C1;3)) => FALSE (C1) -Note that Microsoft Excel behaves different and always returns a number as the result of a reference to an empty cell or a formula cell with the result of an empty cell. For example: -A1: <Empty> -B1: =A1 => displays 0, but is just a reference to an empty cell -=ISNUMBER(A1) => FALSE -=ISTEXT(A1) => FALSE -=A1=0 => TRUE -=A1="" => TRUE -=ISNUMBER(B1) => FALSE (MS-Excel: TRUE) -=ISTEXT(B1) => FALSE -=B1=0 => TRUE -=B1="" => TRUE (MS-Excel: FALSE) -C1: =VLOOKUP(...) with empty cell result => displays empty (MS-Excel: displays 0) -=ISNUMBER(VLOOKUP(...)) => FALSE -=ISTEXT(VLOOKUP(...)) => FALSE -=ISNUMBER(C1) => FALSE (MS-Excel: TRUE) -=ISTEXT(C1) => FALSE +In older versions of the software, empty cells were forced to numeric 0 in some contexts and to empty string in others, except in direct comparison where =A1=0 and =A1="" both resulted in TRUE if A1 was empty. Emptiness now is inherited until used, so both =VLOOKUP(...)=0 and =VLOOKUP(...)="" give TRUE if the lookup resulted in an empty cell being returned. +A simple reference to an empty cell is still displayed as numeric 0 but is not necessarily of type numeric anymore, so also comparisons with the referencing cell work as expected. +For the following examples, A1 contains a number, B1 is empty, C1 contains the reference to B1: +A1: 1 B1: <Empty> C1: =B1 (displays 0) +=B1=0 => TRUE +=B1="" => TRUE +=C1=0 => TRUE +=C1="" => TRUE (previously was FALSE) +=ISNUMBER(B1) => FALSE +=ISNUMBER(C1) => FALSE (previously was TRUE) +=ISNUMBER(VLOOKUP(1;A1:C1;2)) => FALSE (B1) +=ISNUMBER(VLOOKUP(1;A1:C1;3)) => FALSE (C1, previously was TRUE) +=ISTEXT(B1) => FALSE +=ISTEXT(C1) => FALSE +=ISTEXT(VLOOKUP(1;A1:C1;2)) => FALSE (B1, previously was TRUE) +=ISTEXT(VLOOKUP(1;A1:C1;3)) => FALSE (C1) +=ISBLANK(B1) => TRUE +=ISBLANK(C1) => FALSE +=ISBLANK(VLOOKUP(1;A1:C1;2)) => TRUE (B1, previously was FALSE) +=ISBLANK(VLOOKUP(1;A1:C1;3)) => FALSE (C1) +Note that Microsoft Excel behaves different and always returns a number as the result of a reference to an empty cell or a formula cell with the result of an empty cell. For example: +A1: <Empty> +B1: =A1 => displays 0, but is just a reference to an empty cell +=ISNUMBER(A1) => FALSE +=ISTEXT(A1) => FALSE +=A1=0 => TRUE +=A1="" => TRUE +=ISNUMBER(B1) => FALSE (MS-Excel: TRUE) +=ISTEXT(B1) => FALSE +=B1=0 => TRUE +=B1="" => TRUE (MS-Excel: FALSE) +C1: =VLOOKUP(...) with empty cell result => displays empty (MS-Excel: displays 0) +=ISNUMBER(VLOOKUP(...)) => FALSE +=ISTEXT(VLOOKUP(...)) => FALSE +=ISNUMBER(C1) => FALSE (MS-Excel: TRUE) +=ISTEXT(C1) => FALSE diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/autofilter.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/autofilter.xhp index 8beeaea86c..16daf9ee7b 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/autofilter.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/autofilter.xhp @@ -35,34 +35,34 @@ drop-down menus in sheet columns database ranges; AutoFilter function mw made "drop-down..." a one level entry and added a "see also" reference -Applying AutoFilter +Applying AutoFilter - The AutoFilter function inserts a combo box on one or more data columns that lets you select the records (rows) to be displayed. + The AutoFilter function inserts a combo box on one or more data columns that lets you select the records (rows) to be displayed.
- Select the columns you want to use AutoFilter on. + Select the columns you want to use AutoFilter on. - Choose Data - Filter - AutoFilter. The combo box arrows are visible in the first row of the range selected. + Choose Data - Filter - AutoFilter. The combo box arrows are visible in the first row of the range selected. - Run the filter by clicking the drop-down arrow in the column heading and choosing an item. - Only those rows whose contents meet the filter criteria are displayed. The other rows are filteredUFI: we must distinguish manually hidden cells from filtered cells, because they behave differently. So don't use the word "hidden" when a filter is applied.. You can see if rows have been filtered from the discontinuous row numbers. The column that has been used for the filter is identified by a different color for the arrow button. + Run the filter by clicking the drop-down arrow in the column heading and choosing an item. + Only those rows whose contents meet the filter criteria are displayed. The other rows are filteredUFI: we must distinguish manually hidden cells from filtered cells, because they behave differently. So don't use the word "hidden" when a filter is applied.. You can see if rows have been filtered from the discontinuous row numbers. The column that has been used for the filter is identified by a different color for the arrow button. - When you apply an additional AutoFilter on another column of a filtered data range, then the other combo boxes list only the filtered data. - To display all records again, select the "all" entry in the AutoFilter combo box. If you choose "Standard", the Standard Filter dialog appears, allowing you to set up a standard filter. Choose "Top 10" to display the highest 10 values only. - To stop using AutoFilter, reselect all cells selected in step 1 and once again choose Data - Filter - AutoFilter. - To assign different AutoFilters to different sheets, you must first define a database range on each sheet. - The arithmetic functions also take account of the cells that are not visible due to an applied filter. For example, a sum of an entire column will also total the values in the filtered cells. Apply the SUBTOTAL function if only the cells visible after the application of a filter are to be taken into account. + When you apply an additional AutoFilter on another column of a filtered data range, then the other combo boxes list only the filtered data. + To display all records again, select the "all" entry in the AutoFilter combo box. If you choose "Standard", the Standard Filter dialog appears, allowing you to set up a standard filter. Choose "Top 10" to display the highest 10 values only. + To stop using AutoFilter, reselect all cells selected in step 1 and once again choose Data - Filter - AutoFilter. + To assign different AutoFilters to different sheets, you must first define a database range on each sheet. + The arithmetic functions also take account of the cells that are not visible due to an applied filter. For example, a sum of an entire column will also total the values in the filtered cells. Apply the SUBTOTAL function if only the cells visible after the application of a filter are to be taken into account.
- Data - Filter - AutoFilter - SUBTOTAL + Data - Filter - AutoFilter + SUBTOTAL
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/autoformat.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/autoformat.xhp index 237e926ea3..1b01d8db7b 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/autoformat.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/autoformat.xhp @@ -34,52 +34,50 @@ automatic formatting in spreadsheets sheets;AutoFormat function MW deleted "applying;"MW made "AutoFormat function;" a one level entry -Applying Automatic Formatting to a Selected Cell Range +Applying Automatic Formatting to a Selected Cell Range - You can use the AutoFormat feature to quickly apply a format to a sheet or a selected cell range. - To Apply an AutoFormat to a Sheet or Selected Cell Range + You can use the AutoFormat feature to quickly apply a format to a sheet or a selected cell range. + To Apply an AutoFormat to a Sheet or Selected Cell Range - Select the cells, including the column and row headers, that you want to format. + Select the cells, including the column and row headers, that you want to format. - Choose Format - AutoFormat. + Choose Format - AutoFormat. - To select which properties to include in an AutoFormat, click More. + To select which properties to include in an AutoFormat, click More. - Click OK. - The format is applied to the selected range of cells. + Click OK. + The format is applied to the selected range of cells. - If you do not see any change in color of the cell contents, choose View - Value Highlighting. - To Define an AutoFormat for Spreadsheets - You can define a new AutoFormat that is available to all spreadsheets. + If you do not see any change in color of the cell contents, choose View - Value Highlighting. + To Define an AutoFormat for Spreadsheets + You can define a new AutoFormat that is available to all spreadsheets. - Format a sheet. + Format a sheet. - Choose Edit - Select All. + Choose Edit - Select All. - Choose Format - AutoFormat. + Choose Format - AutoFormat. - Click Add. + Click Add. - In the Name box of the Add AutoFormat dialog, enter a name for the format. + In the Name box of the Add AutoFormat dialog, enter a name for the format. - Click OK. + Click OK.
- Format - AutoFormat + Format - AutoFormat
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/background.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/background.xhp index 0e63a44379..6dc777f748 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/background.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/background.xhp @@ -34,38 +34,36 @@ rows, see also cells columns, see also cells -Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics +Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics MW created this file from splitting shared/guide/background.xhp -You can define a background color or use a graphic as a background for cell ranges in $[officename] Calc. - Applying a Background Color to a $[officename] Calc Spreadsheet +You can define a background color or use a graphic as a background for cell ranges in $[officename] Calc. + Applying a Background Color to a $[officename] Calc Spreadsheet - Select the cells. + Select the cells. - Choose Format - Cells (or Format Cells from the context menu). + Choose Format - Cells (or Format Cells from the context menu). - On the Background tab page, select the background color. + On the Background tab page, select the background color. - Graphics in the Background of Cells + Graphics in the Background of Cells - Choose Insert - Image - From File. + Choose Insert - Image - From File. - Select the graphic and click Open. - The graphic is inserted anchored to the current cell. You can move and scale the graphic as you want. In your context menu you can use the Arrange - To Background command to place this in the background. To select a graphic that has been placed in the background, use the Navigator + Select the graphic and click Open. + The graphic is inserted anchored to the current cell. You can move and scale the graphic as you want. In your context menu you can use the Arrange - To Background command to place this in the background. To select a graphic that has been placed in the background, use the Navigator Navigator.
- Watermarks - Background tab page - Formatting Spreadsheets + Watermarks + Background tab page + Formatting Spreadsheets
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/borders.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/borders.xhp index d3fb0f1bd7..4e805ddbe1 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/borders.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/borders.xhp @@ -31,180 +31,180 @@ line arrangements with cells borders;cells MW made "line arrangement;" a one level entry -User Defined Borders in Cells +User Defined Borders in Cells - You can apply a variety of different lines to selected cells. + You can apply a variety of different lines to selected cells. - Select the cell or a block of cells. + Select the cell or a block of cells. - Choose Format - Cells. + Choose Format - Cells. - In the dialog, click the Borders tab. + In the dialog, click the Borders tab. - Choose the border options you want to apply and click OK. + Choose the border options you want to apply and click OK. - The options in the Line arrangement area can be used to apply multiple border styles. - Selection of cells - Depending on the selection of cells, the area looks different. + The options in the Line arrangement area can be used to apply multiple border styles. + Selection of cells + Depending on the selection of cells, the area looks different. - Selection + Selection - Line arrangement area + Line arrangement area - One cell + One cell - + borders with one cell selected - Cells in a column + Cells in a column - + borders with a column selected - Cells in a row + Cells in a row - + borders with a row selected - Cells in a block of 2x2 or more + Cells in a block of 2x2 or more - + borders with a block selected
- You cannot apply borders to multiple selections. - Default Settings - Click one of the Default icons to set or reset multiple borders. + You cannot apply borders to multiple selections. + Default Settings + Click one of the Default icons to set or reset multiple borders. - The thin gray lines inside an icon show the borders that will be reset or cleared. + The thin gray lines inside an icon show the borders that will be reset or cleared. - The dark lines inside an icon show the lines that will be set using the selected line style and color. + The dark lines inside an icon show the lines that will be set using the selected line style and color. - The thick gray lines inside an icon show the lines that will not be changed. + The thick gray lines inside an icon show the lines that will not be changed. - Examples - Select a block of about 8x8 cells, then choose Format - Cells - Borders. - + Examples + Select a block of about 8x8 cells, then choose Format - Cells - Borders. + default icon row of Borders tab page - Click the left icon to clear all lines. This removes all outer borders, all inner lines, and all diagonal lines. + Click the left icon to clear all lines. This removes all outer borders, all inner lines, and all diagonal lines. - Click the second icon from the left to set an outer border and to remove all other lines. + Click the second icon from the left to set an outer border and to remove all other lines. - Click the rightmost icon to set an outer border. The inner lines are not changed, except the diagonal lines, which will be removed.is this a bug? + Click the rightmost icon to set an outer border. The inner lines are not changed, except the diagonal lines, which will be removed.is this a bug? - Now you can continue to see which lines the other icons will set or remove. - User Defined Settings - In the User defined area, you can click to set or remove individual lines. The preview shows lines in three different states. - Repeatedly click an edge or a corner to switch through the three different states. + Now you can continue to see which lines the other icons will set or remove. + User Defined Settings + In the User defined area, you can click to set or remove individual lines. The preview shows lines in three different states. + Repeatedly click an edge or a corner to switch through the three different states. - Line types + Line types - Image + Image - Meaning + Meaning - A black line + A black line - + solid line for user defined border - A black line sets the corresponding line of the selected cells. The line is shown as a dotted line when you choose the 0.05 pt line style. Double lines are shown when you select a double line style. + A black line sets the corresponding line of the selected cells. The line is shown as a dotted line when you choose the 0.05 pt line style. Double lines are shown when you select a double line style. - A gray line + A gray line - + gray line for user defined border - A gray line is shown when the corresponding line of the selected cells will not be changed. No line will be set or removed at this position. + A gray line is shown when the corresponding line of the selected cells will not be changed. No line will be set or removed at this position. - A white line + A white line - + white line for user defined border - A white line is shown when the corresponding line of the selected cells will be removed. + A white line is shown when the corresponding line of the selected cells will be removed.
- Examples - Select a single cell, then choose Format - Cells - Borders. - Click the lower edge to set a very thin line as a lower border. All other lines will be removed from the cell. - + Examples + Select a single cell, then choose Format - Cells - Borders. + Click the lower edge to set a very thin line as a lower border. All other lines will be removed from the cell. + setting a thin lower border - Choose a thicker line style and click the lower edge. This sets a thicker line as a lower border. - + Choose a thicker line style and click the lower edge. This sets a thicker line as a lower border. + setting a thick line as a border - Click the second Default icon from the left to set all four borders. Then repeatedly click the lower edge until a white line is shown. This removes the lower border. - + Click the second Default icon from the left to set all four borders. Then repeatedly click the lower edge until a white line is shown. This removes the lower border. + removing lower border - You can combine several line types and styles. The last image shows how to set thick outer borders (the thick black lines), while any diagonal lines inside the cell will not be touched (gray lines). - + You can combine several line types and styles. The last image shows how to set thick outer borders (the thick black lines), while any diagonal lines inside the cell will not be touched (gray lines). + advanced example for cell borders
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp index 41b182fa40..3e89fff538 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp @@ -38,46 +38,46 @@ AutoFill function filling;cells, automatically mw made "powers of 2;..." a one level entry and changed "AutoFill" entryMW changed "auto filling cells" -Automatically Filling in Data Based on Adjacent Cells +Automatically Filling in Data Based on Adjacent Cells - You can automatically fill cells with data with the AutoFill command or the Series command. - Using AutoFill - AutoFill automatically generates a data series based on a defined pattern. + You can automatically fill cells with data with the AutoFill command or the Series command. + Using AutoFill + AutoFill automatically generates a data series based on a defined pattern. - On a sheet, click in a cell, and type a number. + On a sheet, click in a cell, and type a number. - Click in another cell and then click back in the cell where you typed the number. + Click in another cell and then click back in the cell where you typed the number. - Drag the fill handle in the bottom right corner of the cell across the cells that you want to fill, and release the mouse button. - The cells are filled with ascending numbers. + Drag the fill handle in the bottom right corner of the cell across the cells that you want to fill, and release the mouse button. + The cells are filled with ascending numbers. - To quickly create a list of consecutive days, enter Monday in a cell, and drag the fill handle. - Hold down Command + To quickly create a list of consecutive days, enter Monday in a cell, and drag the fill handle. + Hold down Command Ctrl if you do not want to fill the cells with different values. - If you select two or more adjacent cells that contain different numbers, and drag, the remaining cells are filled with the arithmetic pattern that is recognized in the numbers. The AutoFill function also recognizes customized lists that are defined under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. - You can double-click the fill handle to automatically fill all empty columns of the current data block. For example, first enter Jan into A1 and drag the fill handle down to A12 to get the twelve months in the first column. Now enter some values into B1 and C1. Select those two cells, and double-click the fill handle. This fills automatically the data block B1:C12. - Using a Defined Series + If you select two or more adjacent cells that contain different numbers, and drag, the remaining cells are filled with the arithmetic pattern that is recognized in the numbers. The AutoFill function also recognizes customized lists that are defined under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. + You can double-click the fill handle to automatically fill all empty columns of the current data block. For example, first enter Jan into A1 and drag the fill handle down to A12 to get the twelve months in the first column. Now enter some values into B1 and C1. Select those two cells, and double-click the fill handle. This fills automatically the data block B1:C12. + Using a Defined Series - Select the cell range in the sheet that you want to fill. + Select the cell range in the sheet that you want to fill. - Choose Sheet - Fill Cells - Series. + Choose Sheet - Fill Cells - Series. - Select the parameters for the series. - If you select a linear series, the increment that you enter is added to each consecutive number in the series to create the next value. - If you select a growth series, the increment that you enter is multiplied by each consecutive number to create the next value. - If you select a date series, the increment that you enter is added to the time unit that you specify. + Select the parameters for the series. + If you select a linear series, the increment that you enter is added to each consecutive number in the series to create the next value. + If you select a growth series, the increment that you enter is multiplied by each consecutive number to create the next value. + If you select a date series, the increment that you enter is added to the time unit that you specify.
- Sort lists + Sort lists
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_timevalues.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_timevalues.xhp index 8d3c1403de..e79700198a 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_timevalues.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_timevalues.xhp @@ -33,12 +33,12 @@ calculating;time differences time differences -Calculating Time Differences +Calculating Time Differences -If you want to calculate time differences, for example, the time between 23:30 and 01:10 in the same night, use the following formula: -=(B2<A2)+B2-A2 -The later time is B2 and the earlier time is A2. The result of the example is 01:40 or 1 hour and 40 minutes. -In the formula, an entire 24-hour day has a value of 1 and one hour has a value of 1/24. The logical value in parentheses is 0 or 1, corresponding to 0 or 24 hours. The result returned by the formula is automatically issued in time format due to the sequence of the operands. +If you want to calculate time differences, for example, the time between 23:30 and 01:10 in the same night, use the following formula: +=(B2<A2)+B2-A2 +The later time is B2 and the earlier time is A2. The result of the example is 01:40 or 1 hour and 40 minutes. +In the formula, an entire 24-hour day has a value of 1 and one hour has a value of 1/24. The logical value in parentheses is 0 or 1, corresponding to 0 or 24 hours. The result returned by the formula is automatically issued in time format due to the sequence of the operands.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_enter.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_enter.xhp index 1a9409cec2..48b1fbd896 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_enter.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_enter.xhp @@ -32,25 +32,25 @@ cell ranges;selecting for data entries areas, see also cell ranges -Entering Values +Entering Values - Calc can simplify entering data and values into multiple cells. You can change some settings to conform to your preferences. - To Enter Values Into a Range of Cells Manually - There are two features that assist you when you enter a block of data manually. - Area Detection for New Rows - In the row below a heading row, you can advance from one cell to the next with the Tab key. After you enter the value into the last cell in the current row, press Enter. Calc positions the cursor below the first cell of the current block. - + Calc can simplify entering data and values into multiple cells. You can change some settings to conform to your preferences. + To Enter Values Into a Range of Cells Manually + There are two features that assist you when you enter a block of data manually. + Area Detection for New Rows + In the row below a heading row, you can advance from one cell to the next with the Tab key. After you enter the value into the last cell in the current row, press Enter. Calc positions the cursor below the first cell of the current block. + area detection - In row 3, press Tab to advance from cell B3 to C3, D3, and E3. Then press Enter to advance to B4. - Area Selection - Use drag-and-drop to select the area where you want to input values. But start dragging from the last cell of the area and release the mouse button when you have selected the first cell. Now you can start to input values. Always press the Tab key to advance to the next cell. You will not leave the selected area. - + In row 3, press Tab to advance from cell B3 to C3, D3, and E3. Then press Enter to advance to B4. + Area Selection + Use drag-and-drop to select the area where you want to input values. But start dragging from the last cell of the area and release the mouse button when you have selected the first cell. Now you can start to input values. Always press the Tab key to advance to the next cell. You will not leave the selected area. + area selection - Select the area from E7 to B3. Now B3 is waiting for your input. Press Tab to advance to the next cell within the selected area. - To Enter Values to a Range of Cells Automatically - See Automatically Filling in Data Based on Adjacent Cells. + Select the area from E7 to B3. Now B3 is waiting for your input. Press Tab to advance to the next cell within the selected area. + To Enter Values to a Range of Cells Automatically + See Automatically Filling in Data Based on Adjacent Cells.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp index aa8d5fb2a5..a5b0161edc 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp @@ -38,46 +38,46 @@ formulas;hiding -Protecting Cells from Changes +Protecting Cells from Changes - In %PRODUCTNAME Calc you can protect sheets and the document as a whole. You can choose whether the cells are protected against accidental changes, whether the formulas can be viewed from within Calc, whether the cells are visible or whether the cells can be printed. - Protection can be provided by means of a password, but it does not have to be. If you have assigned a password, protection can only be removed once the correct password has been entered. - Note that the cell protection for cells with the Protected attribute is only effective when you protect the whole sheet. In the default condition, every cell has the Protected attribute. Therefore you must remove the attribute selectively for those cells where the user may make changes. You then protect the whole sheet and save the document. - These protection features are just switches to prevent accidental action. The features are not intended to provide any secure protection. For example, by exporting a sheet to another file format, a user may be able to surpass the protection features. There is only one secure protection: the password that you can apply when saving an OpenDocument file. A file that has been saved with a password can be opened only with the same password. + In %PRODUCTNAME Calc you can protect sheets and the document as a whole. You can choose whether the cells are protected against accidental changes, whether the formulas can be viewed from within Calc, whether the cells are visible or whether the cells can be printed. + Protection can be provided by means of a password, but it does not have to be. If you have assigned a password, protection can only be removed once the correct password has been entered. + Note that the cell protection for cells with the Protected attribute is only effective when you protect the whole sheet. In the default condition, every cell has the Protected attribute. Therefore you must remove the attribute selectively for those cells where the user may make changes. You then protect the whole sheet and save the document. + These protection features are just switches to prevent accidental action. The features are not intended to provide any secure protection. For example, by exporting a sheet to another file format, a user may be able to surpass the protection features. There is only one secure protection: the password that you can apply when saving an OpenDocument file. A file that has been saved with a password can be opened only with the same password. - Select the cells that you want to specify the cell protection options for. + Select the cells that you want to specify the cell protection options for. - Choose Format - Cells and click the Cell Protection tab. + Choose Format - Cells and click the Cell Protection tab. - Select the protection options that you want. All options will be applied only after you protect the sheet from the Tools menu - see below. - Uncheck Protected to allow the user to change the currently selected cells. - Select Protected to prevent changes to the contents and the format of a cell. - Select Hide formula to hide and to protect formulas from changes. - Select Hide when printing to hide protected cells in the printed document. The cells are not hidden onscreen. + Select the protection options that you want. All options will be applied only after you protect the sheet from the Tools menu - see below. + Uncheck Protected to allow the user to change the currently selected cells. + Select Protected to prevent changes to the contents and the format of a cell. + Select Hide formula to hide and to protect formulas from changes. + Select Hide when printing to hide protected cells in the printed document. The cells are not hidden onscreen. - Click OK. + Click OK. - Apply the protection options. + Apply the protection options. To protect the cells from being changed / viewed / printed according to your settings in the Format - Cells dialog, choose Tools - Protect Sheet. To protect the structure of the document, for example the count, names, and order of the sheets, from being changed, choose Tools - Protect Spreadsheet. - (Optional) Enter a password. - If you forget your password, you cannot deactivate the protection. If you only want to protect cells from accidental changes, set the sheet protection, but do not enter a password. + (Optional) Enter a password. + If you forget your password, you cannot deactivate the protection. If you only want to protect cells from accidental changes, set the sheet protection, but do not enter a password. - Click OK. + Click OK.
- +
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_unprotect.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_unprotect.xhp index cfd6bcfc5c..e5f74cb67e 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_unprotect.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_unprotect.xhp @@ -31,21 +31,20 @@ protecting; unprotecting cells unprotecting cells -Unprotecting Cells +Unprotecting Cells - Click the sheet for which you want to cancel the protection. + Click the sheet for which you want to cancel the protection. Select Tools - Protect Sheet or Tools - Protect Spreadsheet to remove the check mark indicating the protected status. - If you have assigned a password, enter it in this dialog and click OK. + If you have assigned a password, enter it in this dialog and click OK. - The cells can now be edited, the formulas can be viewed, and all cells can be printed until you reactivate the protection for the sheet or document. + The cells can now be edited, the formulas can be viewed, and all cells can be printed until you reactivate the protection for the sheet or document.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/cellcopy.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/cellcopy.xhp index c700eb91a0..0e1a78d5de 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/cellcopy.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/cellcopy.xhp @@ -37,35 +37,35 @@ filters;copying visible cells only hidden cells mw changed "cells;" -Only Copy Visible Cells +Only Copy Visible Cells - Assume you have hidden a few rows in a cell range. Now you want to copy, delete, or format only the remaining visible rows. - $[officename] behavior depends on how the cells were made invisible, by a filter or manually. + Assume you have hidden a few rows in a cell range. Now you want to copy, delete, or format only the remaining visible rows. + $[officename] behavior depends on how the cells were made invisible, by a filter or manually. - Method and Action + Method and Action - Result + Result - Cells were filtered by AutoFilters, standard filters or advanced filters. - Copy, delete, move, or format a selection of currently visible cells. + Cells were filtered by AutoFilters, standard filters or advanced filters. + Copy, delete, move, or format a selection of currently visible cells. - Only the visible cells of the selection are copied, deleted, moved, or formatted. + Only the visible cells of the selection are copied, deleted, moved, or formatted. - Cells were hidden using the Hide command in the context menu of the row or column headers, or through an outline. - Copy, delete, move, or format a selection of currently visible cells. + Cells were hidden using the Hide command in the context menu of the row or column headers, or through an outline. + Copy, delete, move, or format a selection of currently visible cells. - All cells of the selection, including the hidden cells, are copied, deleted, moved, or formatted. + All cells of the selection, including the hidden cells, are copied, deleted, moved, or formatted.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreference_dragdrop.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreference_dragdrop.xhp index c4a8396390..b66b21fede 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreference_dragdrop.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreference_dragdrop.xhp @@ -32,34 +32,33 @@ references;inserting by drag and drop inserting;references, by drag and drop -Referencing Cells by Drag-and-Drop +Referencing Cells by Drag-and-Drop - With the help of the Navigator you can reference cells from one sheet to another sheet in the same document or in a different document. The cells can be inserted as a copy, link, or hyperlink. The range to be inserted must be defined with a name in the original file so that it can be inserted in the target file. + With the help of the Navigator you can reference cells from one sheet to another sheet in the same document or in a different document. The cells can be inserted as a copy, link, or hyperlink. The range to be inserted must be defined with a name in the original file so that it can be inserted in the target file. - Open the document that contains the source cells. + Open the document that contains the source cells. - To set the source range as the range, select the cells and choose Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Define. Save the source document, and do not close it. + To set the source range as the range, select the cells and choose Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Define. Save the source document, and do not close it. - Open the sheet in which you want to insert something. + Open the sheet in which you want to insert something. - Open the Navigator. In the lower box of the Navigator select the source file. + Open the Navigator. In the lower box of the Navigator select the source file. - In the Navigator, the source file object appears under "Range names". + In the Navigator, the source file object appears under "Range names". - Using the Drag Mode icon in Navigator, choose whether you want the reference to be a hyperlink, link, or copy. + Using the Drag Mode icon in Navigator, choose whether you want the reference to be a hyperlink, link, or copy. - Click the name under "Range names" in the Navigator, and drag into the cell of the current sheet where you want to insert the reference. + Click the name under "Range names" in the Navigator, and drag into the cell of the current sheet where you want to insert the reference. - This method can also be used to insert a range from another sheet of the same document into the current sheet. Select the active document as source in step 4 above. + This method can also be used to insert a range from another sheet of the same document into the current sheet. Select the active document as source in step 4 above.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences.xhp index 5d52102211..b16c2f7c1e 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences.xhp @@ -32,52 +32,51 @@ cells; operating in another document documents;references mw made "sheet references;" a one level entryMW changed "references;" and added "documents;" -Referencing Other Sheets +Referencing Other Sheets - In a sheet cell you can show a reference to a cell in another sheet. - In the same way, a reference can also be made to a cell from another document provided that this document has already been saved as a file. - To Reference a Cell in the Same Document + In a sheet cell you can show a reference to a cell in another sheet. + In the same way, a reference can also be made to a cell from another document provided that this document has already been saved as a file. + To Reference a Cell in the Same Document - Open a new, empty spreadsheet. + Open a new, empty spreadsheet. - By way of example, enter the following formula in cell A1 of Sheet1: - + By way of example, enter the following formula in cell A1 of Sheet1: + =Sheet2.A1 - Click the Sheet 2 tab at the bottom of the spreadsheet. Set the cursor in cell A1 there and enter text or a number. + Click the Sheet 2 tab at the bottom of the spreadsheet. Set the cursor in cell A1 there and enter text or a number. - If you switch back to Sheet1, you will see the same content in cell A1 there. If the contents of Sheet2.A1 change, then the contents of Sheet1.A1 also change. + If you switch back to Sheet1, you will see the same content in cell A1 there. If the contents of Sheet2.A1 change, then the contents of Sheet1.A1 also change. - To Reference a Cell in Another Document + To Reference a Cell in Another Document - Choose File - Open, to load an existing spreadsheet document. + Choose File - Open, to load an existing spreadsheet document. - Choose File - New, to open a new spreadsheet document. Set the cursor in the cell where you want to insert the external data and enter an equals sign to indicate that you want to begin a formula. + Choose File - New, to open a new spreadsheet document. Set the cursor in the cell where you want to insert the external data and enter an equals sign to indicate that you want to begin a formula. - Now switch to the document you have just loaded. Click the cell with the data that you want to insert in the new document. + Now switch to the document you have just loaded. Click the cell with the data that you want to insert in the new document. - Switch back to the new spreadsheet. In the input line you will now see how $[officename] Calc has added the reference to the formula for you. - The reference to a cell of another document contains the name of the other document in single inverted commas, then a hash #, then the name of the sheet of the other document, followed by a point and the name of the cell. + Switch back to the new spreadsheet. In the input line you will now see how $[officename] Calc has added the reference to the formula for you. + The reference to a cell of another document contains the name of the other document in single inverted commas, then a hash #, then the name of the sheet of the other document, followed by a point and the name of the cell. - Confirm the formula by clicking the green check mark. + Confirm the formula by clicking the green check mark. - If you drag the box in the lower right corner of the active cell to select a range of cells, $[officename] automatically inserts the corresponding references in the adjacent cells. As a result, the sheet name is preceded with a "$" sign to designate it as an absolute reference. + If you drag the box in the lower right corner of the active cell to select a range of cells, $[officename] automatically inserts the corresponding references in the adjacent cells. As a result, the sheet name is preceded with a "$" sign to designate it as an absolute reference. - If you examine the name of the other document in this formula, you will notice that it is written as a URL. This means that you can also enter a URL from the Internet. + If you examine the name of the other document in this formula, you will notice that it is written as a URL. This means that you can also enter a URL from the Internet.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp index f34d34d7b2..6db21a0ecd 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp @@ -32,30 +32,29 @@ cells; Internet references URL; in Calc mw deleted "sheet references;" -Referencing URLs +Referencing URLs -For example, if you found an Internet page containing current stock exchange information in spreadsheet cells, you can load this page in $[officename] Calc by using the following procedure: +For example, if you found an Internet page containing current stock exchange information in spreadsheet cells, you can load this page in $[officename] Calc by using the following procedure: -In a $[officename] Calc document, position the cursor in the cell into which you want to insert the external data. +In a $[officename] Calc document, position the cursor in the cell into which you want to insert the external data. -Choose Sheet - Link to External Data. The External Data dialog appears. +Choose Sheet - Link to External Data. The External Data dialog appears. -Enter the URL of the document or Web page in the dialog. The URL must be in the format: http://www.my-bank.com/table.html. The URL for local or local area network files is the path seen in the File - Open dialog. -$[officename] loads the Web page or file in the "background", that is, without displaying it. In the large list box of the External Data dialog, you can see the name of all the sheets or named ranges you can choose from. +Enter the URL of the document or Web page in the dialog. The URL must be in the format: http://www.my-bank.com/table.html. The URL for local or local area network files is the path seen in the File - Open dialog. +$[officename] loads the Web page or file in the "background", that is, without displaying it. In the large list box of the External Data dialog, you can see the name of all the sheets or named ranges you can choose from. -Select one or more sheets or named ranges. You can also activate the automatic update function every "n" seconds and click OK. -The contents will be inserted as a link in the $[officename] Calc document. +Select one or more sheets or named ranges. You can also activate the automatic update function every "n" seconds and click OK. +The contents will be inserted as a link in the $[officename] Calc document. -Save your spreadsheet. When you open it again later, $[officename] Calc will update the linked cells following an inquiry. +Save your spreadsheet. When you open it again later, $[officename] Calc will update the linked cells following an inquiry. -Under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General you can choose to have the update, when opened, automatically carried out either always, upon request or never. The update can be started manually in the dialog under Edit - Links. +Under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General you can choose to have the update, when opened, automatically carried out either always, upon request or never. The update can be started manually in the dialog under Edit - Links.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp index 68e2519c7e..d867c21380 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp @@ -37,109 +37,103 @@ copying; cell styles tables; copying cell styles mw deleted "formats;" -Applying Conditional Formatting +Applying Conditional Formatting Using the menu command Format - Conditional formatting, the dialog allows you to define conditions per cell, which must be met in order for the selected cells to have a particular format. To apply conditional formatting, AutoCalculate must be enabled. Choose Data - Calculate - AutoCalculate (you see a check mark next to the command when AutoCalculate is enabled). - With conditional formatting, you can, for example, highlight the totals that exceed the average value of all totals. If the totals change, the formatting changes correspondingly, without having to apply other styles manually. - To Define the Conditions + With conditional formatting, you can, for example, highlight the totals that exceed the average value of all totals. If the totals change, the formatting changes correspondingly, without having to apply other styles manually. + To Define the Conditions - Select the cells to which you want to apply a conditional style. + Select the cells to which you want to apply a conditional style. - Choose Format - Conditional Formatting. + Choose Format - Conditional Formatting. - Enter the condition(s) into the dialog box. The dialog is described in detail in $[officename] Help, and an example is provided below: + Enter the condition(s) into the dialog box. The dialog is described in detail in $[officename] Help, and an example is provided below: - Example of Conditional Formatting: Highlighting Totals Above/Under the Average Value - Step1: Generate Number Values - You want to give certain values in your tables particular emphasis. For example, in a table of turnovers, you can show all the values above the average in green and all those below the average in red. This is possible with conditional formatting. + Example of Conditional Formatting: Highlighting Totals Above/Under the Average Value + Step1: Generate Number Values + You want to give certain values in your tables particular emphasis. For example, in a table of turnovers, you can show all the values above the average in green and all those below the average in red. This is possible with conditional formatting. - First of all, write a table in which a few different values occur. For your test you can create tables with any random numbers: - In one of the cells enter the formula =RAND(), and you will obtain a random number between 0 and 1. If you want integers of between 0 and 50, enter the formula =INT(RAND()*50). + First of all, write a table in which a few different values occur. For your test you can create tables with any random numbers: + In one of the cells enter the formula =RAND(), and you will obtain a random number between 0 and 1. If you want integers of between 0 and 50, enter the formula =INT(RAND()*50). - Copy the formula to create a row of random numbers. Click the bottom right corner of the selected cell, and drag to the right until the desired cell range is selected. + Copy the formula to create a row of random numbers. Click the bottom right corner of the selected cell, and drag to the right until the desired cell range is selected. - In the same way as described above, drag down the corner of the rightmost cell in order to create more rows of random numbers. + In the same way as described above, drag down the corner of the rightmost cell in order to create more rows of random numbers. - Step 2: Define Cell Styles - The next step is to apply a cell style to all values that represent above-average turnover, and one to those that are below the average. Ensure that the Styles and Formatting window is visible before proceeding. + Step 2: Define Cell Styles + The next step is to apply a cell style to all values that represent above-average turnover, and one to those that are below the average. Ensure that the Styles and Formatting window is visible before proceeding. - Click in a blank cell and select the command Format Cells in the context menu. + Click in a blank cell and select the command Format Cells in the context menu. - In the Format Cells dialog on the Background tab, select a background color. Click OK. + In the Format Cells dialog on the Background tab, select a background color. Click OK. - In the Styles and Formatting window, click the New Style from Selection icon. Enter the name of the new style. For this example, name the style "Above". + In the Styles and Formatting window, click the New Style from Selection icon. Enter the name of the new style. For this example, name the style "Above". - To define a second style, click again in a blank cell and proceed as described above. Assign a different background color for the cell and assign a name (for this example, "Below"). + To define a second style, click again in a blank cell and proceed as described above. Assign a different background color for the cell and assign a name (for this example, "Below"). - Step 3: Calculate Average - In our particular example, we are calculating the average of the random values. The result is placed in a cell: + Step 3: Calculate Average + In our particular example, we are calculating the average of the random values. The result is placed in a cell: - Set the cursor in a blank cell, for example, J14, and choose Insert - Function. + Set the cursor in a blank cell, for example, J14, and choose Insert - Function. - Select the AVERAGE function. Use the mouse to select all your random numbers. If you cannot see the entire range, because the Function Wizard is obscuring it, you can temporarily shrink the dialog using the Shrink / Maximize icon. + Select the AVERAGE function. Use the mouse to select all your random numbers. If you cannot see the entire range, because the Function Wizard is obscuring it, you can temporarily shrink the dialog using the Shrink / Maximize icon. - Close the Function Wizard with OK. + Close the Function Wizard with OK. - Step 4: Apply Cell Styles - Now you can apply the conditional formatting to the sheet: + Step 4: Apply Cell Styles + Now you can apply the conditional formatting to the sheet: - Select all cells with the random numbers. + Select all cells with the random numbers. - Choose the Format - Conditional Formatting command to open the corresponding dialog. + Choose the Format - Conditional Formatting command to open the corresponding dialog. - Define the condition as follows: If cell value is less than J14, format with cell style "Below", and if cell value is greater than or equal to J14, format with cell style "Above". + Define the condition as follows: If cell value is less than J14, format with cell style "Below", and if cell value is greater than or equal to J14, format with cell style "Above". - Step 5: Copy Cell Style - To apply the conditional formatting to other cells later: + Step 5: Copy Cell Style + To apply the conditional formatting to other cells later: - Click one of the cells that has been assigned conditional formatting. + Click one of the cells that has been assigned conditional formatting. - Copy the cell to the clipboard. + Copy the cell to the clipboard. - Select the cells that are to receive this same formatting. + Select the cells that are to receive this same formatting. - Choose Edit - Paste Special. The Paste Special dialog appears. + Choose Edit - Paste Special. The Paste Special dialog appears. - In the Selection area, check only the Formats box. All other boxes must be unchecked. Click OK. + In the Selection area, check only the Formats box. All other boxes must be unchecked. Click OK.
- Format - Conditional formatting + Format - Conditional formatting
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_minusvalue.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_minusvalue.xhp index f1b630b1a6..618e6f7220 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_minusvalue.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_minusvalue.xhp @@ -33,19 +33,18 @@ colors;negative numbers number formats;colors for negative numbers MW made "negative numbers;" a one level entryMW changed "numbers formats;" and "colors;" -Highlighting Negative Numbers +Highlighting Negative Numbers - You can format cells with a number format that highlights negative numbers in red. Alternatively, you can define your own number format in which negative numbers are highlighted in other colors. + You can format cells with a number format that highlights negative numbers in red. Alternatively, you can define your own number format in which negative numbers are highlighted in other colors. - Select the cells and choose Format - Cells. + Select the cells and choose Format - Cells. - On the Numbers tab, select a number format and mark Negative numbers red check box. Click OK. + On the Numbers tab, select a number format and mark Negative numbers red check box. Click OK. - The cell number format is defined in two parts. The format for positive numbers and zero is defined in front of the semicolon; after the semicolon the formula for negative numbers is defined. You can change the code (RED) under Format code. For example, instead of RED, enter YELLOW. If the new code appears in the list after clicking the Add icon, this is a valid entry. + The cell number format is defined in two parts. The format for positive numbers and zero is defined in front of the semicolon; after the semicolon the formula for negative numbers is defined. You can change the code (RED) under Format code. For example, instead of RED, enter YELLOW. If the new code appears in the list after clicking the Add icon, this is a valid entry.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/consolidate.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/consolidate.xhp index d297e06270..d33d464859 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/consolidate.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/consolidate.xhp @@ -34,56 +34,56 @@ data; merging cell ranges merging;data ranges mw deleted "values;" -Consolidating Data +Consolidating Data - During consolidation, the contents of the cells from several sheets will be combined in one place. - To Combine Cell Contents + During consolidation, the contents of the cells from several sheets will be combined in one place. + To Combine Cell Contents - Open the document that contains the cell ranges to be consolidated. + Open the document that contains the cell ranges to be consolidated. - Choose Data - Consolidate to open the Consolidate dialog. + Choose Data - Consolidate to open the Consolidate dialog. - From the Source data area box select a source cell range to consolidate with other areas. - If the range is not named, click in the field next to the Source data area. A blinking text cursor appears. Type a reference for the first source data range or select the range with the mouse. + From the Source data area box select a source cell range to consolidate with other areas. + If the range is not named, click in the field next to the Source data area. A blinking text cursor appears. Type a reference for the first source data range or select the range with the mouse. - Click Add to insert the selected range in the Consolidation areas field. + Click Add to insert the selected range in the Consolidation areas field. - Select additional ranges and click Add after each selection. + Select additional ranges and click Add after each selection. - Specify where you want to display the result by selecting a target range from the Copy results to box. - If the target range is not named, click in the field next to Copy results to and enter the reference of the target range. Alternatively, you can select the range using the mouse or position the cursor in the top left cell of the target range. + Specify where you want to display the result by selecting a target range from the Copy results to box. + If the target range is not named, click in the field next to Copy results to and enter the reference of the target range. Alternatively, you can select the range using the mouse or position the cursor in the top left cell of the target range. - Select a function from the Function box. The function specifies how the values of the consolidation ranges are linked. The "Sum" function is the default setting. + Select a function from the Function box. The function specifies how the values of the consolidation ranges are linked. The "Sum" function is the default setting. - Click OK to consolidate the ranges. + Click OK to consolidate the ranges. - Additional Settings - Click More in the Consolidate dialog to display additional settings: + Additional Settings + Click More in the Consolidate dialog to display additional settings: - Select Link to source data to insert the formulas that generate the results in the target range, rather than the actual results. If you link the data, any values modified in the source range are automatically updated in the target range. - The corresponding cell references in the target range are inserted in consecutive rows, which are automatically ordered and then hidden from view. Only the final result, based on the selected function, is displayed. + Select Link to source data to insert the formulas that generate the results in the target range, rather than the actual results. If you link the data, any values modified in the source range are automatically updated in the target range. + The corresponding cell references in the target range are inserted in consecutive rows, which are automatically ordered and then hidden from view. Only the final result, based on the selected function, is displayed. - Under Consolidate by, select either Row labels or Column labels if the cells of the source data range are not to be consolidated corresponding to the identical position of the cell in the range, but instead according to a matching row label or column label. - To consolidate by row labels or column labels, the label must be contained in the selected source ranges. - The text in the labels must be identical, so that rows or columns can be accurately matched. If the row or column label does not match any that exist in the target range, it will be appended as a new row or column. + Under Consolidate by, select either Row labels or Column labels if the cells of the source data range are not to be consolidated corresponding to the identical position of the cell in the range, but instead according to a matching row label or column label. + To consolidate by row labels or column labels, the label must be contained in the selected source ranges. + The text in the labels must be identical, so that rows or columns can be accurately matched. If the row or column label does not match any that exist in the target range, it will be appended as a new row or column. - The data from the consolidation ranges and target range will be saved when you save the document. If you later open a document in which consolidation has been defined, this data will again be available. + The data from the consolidation ranges and target range will be saved when you save the document. If you later open a document in which consolidation has been defined, this data will again be available.
- Data - Consolidate + Data - Consolidate
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp index 543e3b2ca8..bb87760fc8 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp @@ -39,66 +39,66 @@ opening;text csv files saving;as text csv MW deleted "importing;text data bases" and copied 4 index entries from scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhpmw added "saving;" and "opening;" -Opening and Saving Text CSV Files +Opening and Saving Text CSV Files -Comma Separated Values (CSV) is a text file format that you can use to exchange data from a database or a spreadsheet between applications. Each line in a Text CSV file represents a record in the database, or a row in a spreadsheet. Each field in a database record or cell in a spreadsheet row is usually separated by a comma. However, you can use other characters to delimit a field, such as a tabulator character. -If the field or cell contains a comma, the field or cell must be enclosed by single quotes (') or double quotes ("). -To Open a Text CSV File in Calc +Comma Separated Values (CSV) is a text file format that you can use to exchange data from a database or a spreadsheet between applications. Each line in a Text CSV file represents a record in the database, or a row in a spreadsheet. Each field in a database record or cell in a spreadsheet row is usually separated by a comma. However, you can use other characters to delimit a field, such as a tabulator character. +If the field or cell contains a comma, the field or cell must be enclosed by single quotes (') or double quotes ("). +To Open a Text CSV File in Calc -Choose File - Open. +Choose File - Open. -Locate the CSV file that you want to open. -If the file has a *.csv extension, select the file. -If the CSV file has another extension, select the file, and then select "Text CSV" in the File type box +Locate the CSV file that you want to open. +If the file has a *.csv extension, select the file. +If the CSV file has another extension, select the file, and then select "Text CSV" in the File type box -Click Open. -The Text Import dialog opens. +Click Open. +The Text Import dialog opens. -Specify the options to divide the text in the file into columns. -You can preview the layout of the imported data at the bottom of the Text Import dialog. -Right-click a column in the preview to set the format or to hide the column. -Check the text delimiter box that matches the character used as text delimiter in the file. In case of an unlisted delimiter, type the character into the input box. +Specify the options to divide the text in the file into columns. +You can preview the layout of the imported data at the bottom of the Text Import dialog. +Right-click a column in the preview to set the format or to hide the column. +Check the text delimiter box that matches the character used as text delimiter in the file. In case of an unlisted delimiter, type the character into the input box. -Click OK. +Click OK. -To Save a Sheet as a Text CSV File -When you export a spreadsheet to CSV format, only the data on the current sheet is saved. All other information, including formulas and formatting, is lost. +To Save a Sheet as a Text CSV File +When you export a spreadsheet to CSV format, only the data on the current sheet is saved. All other information, including formulas and formatting, is lost. -Open the Calc sheet that you want to save as a Text CSV file. -Only the current sheet can be exported. +Open the Calc sheet that you want to save as a Text CSV file. +Only the current sheet can be exported. -Choose File - Save as. +Choose File - Save as. -In the File name box, enter a name for the file. +In the File name box, enter a name for the file. -In the File type box, select "Text CSV". +In the File type box, select "Text CSV". -(Optional) Set the field options for the Text CSV file. -Select Edit filter settings. -In the Export of text files dialog, select the options that you want. -Click OK. +(Optional) Set the field options for the Text CSV file. +Select Edit filter settings. +In the Export of text files dialog, select the options that you want. +Click OK. -Click Save. +Click Save.
-%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View -Export text files -Import text files +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View +Export text files +Import text files
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp index f73ef9b01d..7fe9bf6906 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp @@ -32,56 +32,55 @@ exporting;formulas as csv files importing;csv files with formulas mw deleted "inserting;", copied 4 index entries to scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp, changed "csv files;" and "formulas;" and added 2 index entries -Importing and Exporting CSV Text Files with Formulas +Importing and Exporting CSV Text Files with Formulas - Comma separated values (CSV) files are text files that contain the cell contents of a single sheet. Commas, semicolons, or other characters can be used as the field delimiters between the cells. Text strings are put in quotation marks, numbers are written without quotation marks. - To Import a CSV File + Comma separated values (CSV) files are text files that contain the cell contents of a single sheet. Commas, semicolons, or other characters can be used as the field delimiters between the cells. Text strings are put in quotation marks, numbers are written without quotation marks. + To Import a CSV File - Choose File - Open. + Choose File - Open. - In the File type field, select the format "Text CSV". Select the file and click Open. When a file has the .csv extension, the file type is automatically recognized. + In the File type field, select the format "Text CSV". Select the file and click Open. When a file has the .csv extension, the file type is automatically recognized. - You will see the Text Import dialog. Click OK. + You will see the Text Import dialog. Click OK. - If the csv file contains formulas, but you want to import the results of those formulas, then choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View and clear the Formulas check box. - To Export Formulas and Values as CSV Files + If the csv file contains formulas, but you want to import the results of those formulas, then choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View and clear the Formulas check box. + To Export Formulas and Values as CSV Files - Click the sheet to be written as a csv file. + Click the sheet to be written as a csv file. - If you want to export the formulas as formulas, for example, in the form =SUM(A1:B5), proceed as follows: - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. - Under Display, mark the Formulas check box. Click OK. - If you want to export the calculation results instead of the formulas, do not mark Formulas. + If you want to export the formulas as formulas, for example, in the form =SUM(A1:B5), proceed as follows: + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. + Under Display, mark the Formulas check box. Click OK. + If you want to export the calculation results instead of the formulas, do not mark Formulas. - Choose File - Save as. You will see the Save as dialog. + Choose File - Save as. You will see the Save as dialog. - In the + In the File type field select the format "Text CSV". - Enter a name and click Save. + Enter a name and click Save. - From the Export of text files dialog that appears, select the character set and the field and text delimiters for the data to be exported, and confirm with OK. + From the Export of text files dialog that appears, select the character set and the field and text delimiters for the data to be exported, and confirm with OK. - If necessary, after you have saved, clear the Formulas check box to see the calculated results in the table again. + If necessary, after you have saved, clear the Formulas check box to see the calculated results in the table again.
- %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View - Export text files - Import text files + %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View + Export text files + Import text files
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp index 687011fff6..f0b2f0cb92 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp @@ -35,26 +35,25 @@ defaults;currency formats changing;currency formats mw changed one index entry -Cells in Currency Format +Cells in Currency Format -In %PRODUCTNAME Calc you can give numbers any currency format. When you click the Currency icon +In %PRODUCTNAME Calc you can give numbers any currency format. When you click the Currency icon Icon in the Formatting bar to format a number, the cell is given the default currency format set under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. -Exchanging of %PRODUCTNAME Calc documents can lead to misunderstandings, if your %PRODUCTNAME Calc document is loaded by a user who uses a different default currency format. -In %PRODUCTNAME Calc you can define that a number that you have formatted as "1,234.50 €", still remains in euros in another country and does not become dollars. -You can change the currency format in the Format Cells dialog (choose Format - Cells - Numbers tab) by two country settings. In the Language combo box select the basic setting for decimal and thousands separators. In the Format list box you can select the currency symbol and its position. +Exchanging of %PRODUCTNAME Calc documents can lead to misunderstandings, if your %PRODUCTNAME Calc document is loaded by a user who uses a different default currency format. +In %PRODUCTNAME Calc you can define that a number that you have formatted as "1,234.50 €", still remains in euros in another country and does not become dollars. +You can change the currency format in the Format Cells dialog (choose Format - Cells - Numbers tab) by two country settings. In the Language combo box select the basic setting for decimal and thousands separators. In the Format list box you can select the currency symbol and its position. -For example, if the language is set to "Default" and you are using a german locale setting, the currency format will be "1.234,00 €". A point is used before the thousand digits and a comma before the decimal places. If you now select the subordinate currency format "$ English (US)" from the Format list box , you will get the following format: "$ 1.234,00". As you can see, the separators have remained the same. Only the currency symbol has been changed and converted, but the underlying format of the notation remains the same as in the locale setting. +For example, if the language is set to "Default" and you are using a german locale setting, the currency format will be "1.234,00 €". A point is used before the thousand digits and a comma before the decimal places. If you now select the subordinate currency format "$ English (US)" from the Format list box , you will get the following format: "$ 1.234,00". As you can see, the separators have remained the same. Only the currency symbol has been changed and converted, but the underlying format of the notation remains the same as in the locale setting. -If, under Language, you convert the cells to "English (US)", the English-language locale setting is also transferred and the default currency format is now "$ 1,234.00". +If, under Language, you convert the cells to "English (US)", the English-language locale setting is also transferred and the default currency format is now "$ 1,234.00".
-Format - Cells - Numbers +Format - Cells - Numbers
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/database_define.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/database_define.xhp index c301c53a5c..0a9f0e6ff3 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/database_define.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/database_define.xhp @@ -32,30 +32,29 @@ ranges; defining database ranges defining;database ranges -Defining a Database Range +Defining a Database Range - You can define a range of cells in a spreadsheet to use as a database. Each row in this database range corresponds to a database record and each cell in a row corresponds to a database field. You can sort, group, search, and perform calculations on the range as you would in a database. - You can only edit and access a database range in the spreadsheet that contains the range. You cannot access the database range in the %PRODUCTNAME Data Sources view. - To define a database range + You can define a range of cells in a spreadsheet to use as a database. Each row in this database range corresponds to a database record and each cell in a row corresponds to a database field. You can sort, group, search, and perform calculations on the range as you would in a database. + You can only edit and access a database range in the spreadsheet that contains the range. You cannot access the database range in the %PRODUCTNAME Data Sources view. + To define a database range - Select the range of cells that you want to define as a database range. + Select the range of cells that you want to define as a database range. - Choose Data - Define Range. + Choose Data - Define Range. - In the Name box, enter a name for the database range. + In the Name box, enter a name for the database range. - Click More. + Click More. - Specify the options for the database range. + Specify the options for the database range. - Click OK. + Click OK.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp index 137528cf57..70811148c2 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp @@ -32,52 +32,50 @@ database ranges;applying/removing filters removing;cell range filters MW changed "cell ranges," added "removing;" and made one "database ranges;" entry out of two. Same for "filtering;" -Filtering Cell Ranges +Filtering Cell Ranges - You can use several filters to filter cell ranges in spreadsheets. A standard filter uses the options that you specify to filter the data. An AutoFilter filters data according to a specific value or string. An advanced filter uses filter criteria from specified cells. - To Apply a Standard Filter to a Cell Range + You can use several filters to filter cell ranges in spreadsheets. A standard filter uses the options that you specify to filter the data. An AutoFilter filters data according to a specific value or string. An advanced filter uses filter criteria from specified cells. + To Apply a Standard Filter to a Cell Range - Click in a cell range. + Click in a cell range. - Choose Data - Filter - Standard Filter. + Choose Data - Filter - Standard Filter. - In the Standard Filter dialog, specify the filter options that you want. + In the Standard Filter dialog, specify the filter options that you want. - Click OK. - The records that match the filter options that you specified are shown. + Click OK. + The records that match the filter options that you specified are shown. - To Apply an AutoFilter to a Cell Range + To Apply an AutoFilter to a Cell Range - Click in a cell range or a database range. - If you want to apply multiple AutoFilters to the same sheet, you must first define database ranges, then apply the AutoFilters to the database ranges. + Click in a cell range or a database range. + If you want to apply multiple AutoFilters to the same sheet, you must first define database ranges, then apply the AutoFilters to the database ranges. - Choose Data - Filter - AutoFilter. - An arrow button is added to the head of each column in the database range. + Choose Data - Filter - AutoFilter. + An arrow button is added to the head of each column in the database range. - Click the arrow button in the column that contains the value or string that you want to set as the filter criteria. + Click the arrow button in the column that contains the value or string that you want to set as the filter criteria. - Select the value or string that you want to use as the filter criteria. - The records that match the filter criteria that you selected are shown. + Select the value or string that you want to use as the filter criteria. + The records that match the filter criteria that you selected are shown. - To Remove a Filter From a Cell Range + To Remove a Filter From a Cell Range - Click in a filtered cell range. + Click in a filtered cell range. - Choose Data - Filter - Reset Filter. + Choose Data - Filter - Reset Filter.
@@ -85,7 +83,7 @@ - Wiki page about defining a data range + Wiki page about defining a data range
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp index 822a0c7389..a3d83f091a 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp @@ -31,29 +31,28 @@ sorting; database ranges data;sorting in databases -Sorting Data +Sorting Data - Click in a database range. - If you select a range of cells, only these cells will get sorted. If you just click one cell without selecting, then the whole database range will get sorted. + Click in a database range. + If you select a range of cells, only these cells will get sorted. If you just click one cell without selecting, then the whole database range will get sorted. - Choose Data - Sort. - The range of cells that will get sorted is shown in inverted colors. + Choose Data - Sort. + The range of cells that will get sorted is shown in inverted colors. - Select the sort options that you want. + Select the sort options that you want. - Click OK. + Click OK.
- Wiki page about defining a data range + Wiki page about defining a data range
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot.xhp index 7d1ccb9671..d42eab56fe 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot.xhp @@ -30,10 +30,10 @@ pivot table function; introduction DataPilot, see pivot table function -Pivot Table +Pivot Table -The pivot table (formerly known as DataPilot) allows you to combine, compare, and analyze large amounts of data. You can view different summaries of the source data, you can display the details of areas of interest, and you can create reports. -A table that has been created as a pivot table is an interactive table. Data can be arranged, rearranged or summarized according to different points of view. +The pivot table (formerly known as DataPilot) allows you to combine, compare, and analyze large amounts of data. You can view different summaries of the source data, you can display the details of areas of interest, and you can create reports. +A table that has been created as a pivot table is an interactive table. Data can be arranged, rearranged or summarized according to different points of view.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp index 89c692f484..3e15c4306b 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp @@ -30,41 +30,41 @@ pivot tables pivot table function; calling up and applying -Creating Pivot Tables +Creating Pivot Tables - Position the cursor within a range of cells containing values, row and column headings. + Position the cursor within a range of cells containing values, row and column headings. - Choose Insert - Pivot Table. The Select Source dialog appears. Choose Current selection and confirm with OK. The table headings are shown as buttons in the Pivot Table dialog. Drag these buttons as required and drop them into the layout areas "Page Fields", "Column Fields", "Row Fields" and "Data Fields". + Choose Insert - Pivot Table. The Select Source dialog appears. Choose Current selection and confirm with OK. The table headings are shown as buttons in the Pivot Table dialog. Drag these buttons as required and drop them into the layout areas "Page Fields", "Column Fields", "Row Fields" and "Data Fields". - Drag the desired buttons into one of the four areas. + Drag the desired buttons into one of the four areas. - Drag a button to the Page Fields area to create a button and a listbox on top of the generated pivot table. The listbox can be used to filter the pivot table by the contents of the selected item. You can use drag-and-drop within the generated pivot table to use another page field as a filter. - If the button is dropped in the Data Fields area it will be given a caption that also shows the formula that will be used to calculate the data. + Drag a button to the Page Fields area to create a button and a listbox on top of the generated pivot table. The listbox can be used to filter the pivot table by the contents of the selected item. You can use drag-and-drop within the generated pivot table to use another page field as a filter. + If the button is dropped in the Data Fields area it will be given a caption that also shows the formula that will be used to calculate the data. - By double-clicking on one of the fields in the Data Fields area you can call up the Data Field dialog. + By double-clicking on one of the fields in the Data Fields area you can call up the Data Field dialog. - Use the Data Field dialog to select the calculations to be used for the data. To make a multiple selection, press the CommandCtrl key while clicking the desired calculation. + Use the Data Field dialog to select the calculations to be used for the data. To make a multiple selection, press the CommandCtrl key while clicking the desired calculation. - The order of the buttons can be changed at any time by moving them to a different position in the area with the mouse. + The order of the buttons can be changed at any time by moving them to a different position in the area with the mouse. - Remove a button by dragging it back to the area of the other buttons at the right of the dialog. + Remove a button by dragging it back to the area of the other buttons at the right of the dialog. - To open the Data Field dialog, double-click one of the buttons in the Row Fields or Column Fields area. Use the dialog to select if and to what extent %PRODUCTNAME calculates display subtotals. + To open the Data Field dialog, double-click one of the buttons in the Row Fields or Column Fields area. Use the dialog to select if and to what extent %PRODUCTNAME calculates display subtotals. - Exit the Pivot Table dialog by pressing OK. A Filter button will now be inserted, or a page button for every data field that you dropped in the Page Fields area. The pivot table is inserted further down. + Exit the Pivot Table dialog by pressing OK. A Filter button will now be inserted, or a page button for every data field that you dropped in the Page Fields area. The pivot table is inserted further down.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp index 43af0f77de..15d42f6e42 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp @@ -30,9 +30,9 @@ pivot table function; deleting tables deleting;pivot tables -Deleting Pivot Tables +Deleting Pivot Tables - In order to delete a pivot table, click any cell in the pivot table, then choose Delete in the context menu. + In order to delete a pivot table, click any cell in the pivot table, then choose Delete in the context menu.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp index b5d2bfc989..b70c7edf00 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp @@ -30,15 +30,15 @@ pivot table function; editing tables editing;pivot tables -Editing Pivot Tables +Editing Pivot Tables - Click one of the buttons in the pivot table and hold the mouse button down. A special symbol will appear next to the mouse pointer. - By dragging the button to a different position in the same row you can alter the order of the columns. If you drag a button to the left edge of the table into the row headings area, you can change a column into a row. - In the Pivot Table dialog, you can drag a button to the Page Fields area to create a button and a listbox on top of the pivot table. The listbox can be used to filter the pivot table by the contents of the selected item. You can use drag-and-drop within the pivot table to use another page field as a filter. - To remove a button from the table, just drag it out of the pivot table. Release the mouse button when the mouse pointer positioned within the sheet has become a 'not allowed' icon. The button is deleted. - To edit the pivot table, click a cell inside the pivot table and open the context menu. In the context menu you find the command Edit Layout, which displays the Pivot Table dialog for the current pivot table. - In the pivot table, you can use drag-and-drop or cut/paste commands to rearrange the order of data fields. - You can assign custom display names to fields, field members, subtotals (with some restrictions), and grand totals inside pivot tables. A custom display name is assigned to an item by overwriting the original name with another name. + Click one of the buttons in the pivot table and hold the mouse button down. A special symbol will appear next to the mouse pointer. + By dragging the button to a different position in the same row you can alter the order of the columns. If you drag a button to the left edge of the table into the row headings area, you can change a column into a row. + In the Pivot Table dialog, you can drag a button to the Page Fields area to create a button and a listbox on top of the pivot table. The listbox can be used to filter the pivot table by the contents of the selected item. You can use drag-and-drop within the pivot table to use another page field as a filter. + To remove a button from the table, just drag it out of the pivot table. Release the mouse button when the mouse pointer positioned within the sheet has become a 'not allowed' icon. The button is deleted. + To edit the pivot table, click a cell inside the pivot table and open the context menu. In the context menu you find the command Edit Layout, which displays the Pivot Table dialog for the current pivot table. + In the pivot table, you can use drag-and-drop or cut/paste commands to rearrange the order of data fields. + You can assign custom display names to fields, field members, subtotals (with some restrictions), and grand totals inside pivot tables. A custom display name is assigned to an item by overwriting the original name with another name.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_grouping.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_grouping.xhp index c7c475aba1..a12b979541 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_grouping.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_grouping.xhp @@ -33,21 +33,21 @@ pivot table function;grouping table entries ungrouping entries in pivot tables -Grouping Pivot Tables -see http://specs.openoffice.org/calc/compatibility/grouping.sxwThe resulting pivot table can contain many different entries. By grouping the entries, you can improve the visible result. +Grouping Pivot Tables +see http://specs.openoffice.org/calc/compatibility/grouping.sxwThe resulting pivot table can contain many different entries. By grouping the entries, you can improve the visible result. -Select a cell or range of cells in the pivot table. +Select a cell or range of cells in the pivot table. -Choose Data - Group and Outline - Group. +Choose Data - Group and Outline - Group. -Depending on the format of the selected cells, either a new group field is added to the pivot table, or you see one of the two Grouping dialogs, either for numeric values, or for date values. -The pivot table must be organized in a way that grouping can be applied. +Depending on the format of the selected cells, either a new group field is added to the pivot table, or you see one of the two Grouping dialogs, either for numeric values, or for date values. +The pivot table must be organized in a way that grouping can be applied. -To remove a grouping, click inside the group, then choose Data - Group and Outline - Ungroup. +To remove a grouping, click inside the group, then choose Data - Group and Outline - Ungroup.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_tipps.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_tipps.xhp index 7c1d24a868..1239b3ff6d 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_tipps.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_tipps.xhp @@ -30,12 +30,12 @@ pivot table function; preventing data overwriting output ranges of pivot tables -Selecting Pivot Table Output Ranges +Selecting Pivot Table Output Ranges -Click the button More in the Pivot Table dialog. The dialog will be extended. -You can select a named range in which the pivot table is to be created, from the Results to box. If the results range does not have a name, enter the coordinates of the upper left cell of the range into the field to the right of the Results to box. You can also click on the appropriate cell to have the coordinates entered accordingly. -If you mark the Ignore empty rows check box, they will not be taken into account when the pivot table is created. -If the Identify categories check box is marked, the categories will be identified by their headings and assigned accordingly when the pivot table is created. +Click the button More in the Pivot Table dialog. The dialog will be extended. +You can select a named range in which the pivot table is to be created, from the Results to box. If the results range does not have a name, enter the coordinates of the upper left cell of the range into the field to the right of the Results to box. You can also click on the appropriate cell to have the coordinates entered accordingly. +If you mark the Ignore empty rows check box, they will not be taken into account when the pivot table is created. +If the Identify categories check box is marked, the categories will be identified by their headings and assigned accordingly when the pivot table is created.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_updatetable.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_updatetable.xhp index 5d3e842a80..d94e17cde1 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_updatetable.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_updatetable.xhp @@ -32,9 +32,9 @@ recalculating;pivot tables updating;pivot tables -Updating Pivot Tables +Updating Pivot Tables -If the data of the source sheet has been changed, $[officename] recalculates the pivot table. To recalculate the table, choose Data - Pivot Table - Refresh. Do the same after you have imported an Excel pivot table into $[officename] Calc. +If the data of the source sheet has been changed, $[officename] recalculates the pivot table. To recalculate the table, choose Data - Pivot Table - Refresh. Do the same after you have imported an Excel pivot table into $[officename] Calc.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/dbase_files.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/dbase_files.xhp index f2bc274b58..79f3c98029 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/dbase_files.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/dbase_files.xhp @@ -33,71 +33,71 @@ spreadsheets; importing from/exporting to dBASE files tables in databases;importing dBASE files mw changed "database tables;" to "tables in databases;" and reduced "spreadsheets;" from two to one entry -Importing and Exporting dBASE Files +Importing and Exporting dBASE Files - You can open and save data in the dBASE file format (*.dbf file extension) in $[officename] Base or a spreadsheet. In %PRODUCTNAME Base, a dBASE database is a folder that contains files with the .dbf file extension. Each file corresponds to a table in the database. Formulas and formatting are lost when you open and save a dBASE file from %PRODUCTNAME. - To Import a dBASE File Into a Spreadsheet + You can open and save data in the dBASE file format (*.dbf file extension) in $[officename] Base or a spreadsheet. In %PRODUCTNAME Base, a dBASE database is a folder that contains files with the .dbf file extension. Each file corresponds to a table in the database. Formulas and formatting are lost when you open and save a dBASE file from %PRODUCTNAME. + To Import a dBASE File Into a Spreadsheet - Choose File - Open. + Choose File - Open. - Locate the *.dbf file that you want to import. + Locate the *.dbf file that you want to import. - Click Open. - The Import dBASE files dialog opens. + Click Open. + The Import dBASE files dialog opens. - Click OK. - The dBASE file opens as a new Calc spreadsheet. - If you want to save the spreadsheet as a dBASE file, do not alter or delete the first row in the imported file. This row contains information that is required by a dBASE database. + Click OK. + The dBASE file opens as a new Calc spreadsheet. + If you want to save the spreadsheet as a dBASE file, do not alter or delete the first row in the imported file. This row contains information that is required by a dBASE database. - To Import a dBASE File Into a Database Table - A %PRODUCTNAME Base database table is actually a link to an existing database. + To Import a dBASE File Into a Database Table + A %PRODUCTNAME Base database table is actually a link to an existing database. - Choose File - New - Database. + Choose File - New - Database. - In the File name box of the Save As dialog, enter a name for the database. + In the File name box of the Save As dialog, enter a name for the database. - Click Save. + Click Save. - In the Database type box of the Database Properties dialog, select "dBASE". + In the Database type box of the Database Properties dialog, select "dBASE". - Click Next. + Click Next. - Click Browse. + Click Browse. - Locate the directory that contains the dBASE file, and click OK. + Locate the directory that contains the dBASE file, and click OK. - Click Create. + Click Create. - To Save a Spreadsheet as a dBASE File + To Save a Spreadsheet as a dBASE File - Choose File - Save As. + Choose File - Save As. - In the File format box, select "dBASE file". + In the File format box, select "dBASE file". - In the File name box, type a name for the dBASE file. + In the File name box, type a name for the dBASE file. - Click Save. + Click Save. - Only the data on the current sheet is exported. + Only the data on the current sheet is exported.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/design.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/design.xhp index 2d37fe006c..a350f46f2e 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/design.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/design.xhp @@ -41,31 +41,31 @@ formatting;themes for sheets mw deleted "applying;" - Selecting Themes for Sheets + Selecting Themes for Sheets - $[officename] Calc comes with a predefined set of formatting themes that you can apply to your spreadsheets. - It is not possible to add themes to Calc, and they cannot be modified. However, you can modify their styles after you apply them to a spreadsheet. - Before you format a sheet with a theme, you have to apply at least one custom cell style to the cells on the sheet. You can then change the cell formatting by selecting and applying a theme in the Theme Selection dialog. - To apply a custom cell style to a cell, you can open the Styles and Formatting window and, in its lower list box, set the Custom Styles view. A list of the existing custom defined cell styles will be displayed. Double click a name from the Styles and Formatting window to apply this style to the selected cells. - To apply a theme to a spreadsheet: + $[officename] Calc comes with a predefined set of formatting themes that you can apply to your spreadsheets. + It is not possible to add themes to Calc, and they cannot be modified. However, you can modify their styles after you apply them to a spreadsheet. + Before you format a sheet with a theme, you have to apply at least one custom cell style to the cells on the sheet. You can then change the cell formatting by selecting and applying a theme in the Theme Selection dialog. + To apply a custom cell style to a cell, you can open the Styles and Formatting window and, in its lower list box, set the Custom Styles view. A list of the existing custom defined cell styles will be displayed. Double click a name from the Styles and Formatting window to apply this style to the selected cells. + To apply a theme to a spreadsheet: - Click the Choose Themes icon in the Tools bar. + Click the Choose Themes icon in the Tools bar. - The Theme Selection dialog appears. This dialog lists the available themes for the whole spreadsheet and the Styles and Formatting window lists the custom styles for specific cells. + The Theme Selection dialog appears. This dialog lists the available themes for the whole spreadsheet and the Styles and Formatting window lists the custom styles for specific cells. - In the Theme Selection dialog, select the theme that you want to apply to the spreadsheet. + In the Theme Selection dialog, select the theme that you want to apply to the spreadsheet. - Click OK - As soon as you select another theme in the Theme Selection dialog, some of the properties of the custom style will be applied to the current spreadsheet. The modifications will be immediately visible in your spreadsheet. + Click OK + As soon as you select another theme in the Theme Selection dialog, some of the properties of the custom style will be applied to the current spreadsheet. The modifications will be immediately visible in your spreadsheet.
- Theme selection + Theme selection
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/edit_multitables.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/edit_multitables.xhp index 8dfe54085c..b787b8ceff 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/edit_multitables.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/edit_multitables.xhp @@ -37,16 +37,16 @@ data;inserting in multiple sheets sheets; simultaneous multiple filling mw moved "multiple sheets" and "selecting;" to multitables.xhp, transferred "sheets;" from there and deleted "sheets;transferring.." - Copying to Multiple Sheets + Copying to Multiple Sheets - In $[officename] Calc, you can insert values, text or formulas that are simultaneously copied to other selected sheets of your document. + In $[officename] Calc, you can insert values, text or formulas that are simultaneously copied to other selected sheets of your document. - Select all desired sheets by holding down the CommandCtrl key and clicking the corresponding register tabs that are still gray at the bottom margin of the workspace. All selected register tabs are now white. - You can use Shift+CommandCtrl+Page Up or Page Down to select multiple sheets using the keyboard. + Select all desired sheets by holding down the CommandCtrl key and clicking the corresponding register tabs that are still gray at the bottom margin of the workspace. All selected register tabs are now white. + You can use Shift+CommandCtrl+Page Up or Page Down to select multiple sheets using the keyboard. - Now when you insert values, text or formulas into the active sheet, they will also appear in the identical positions in the other selected sheets. For example, data entered in cell A1 of the active sheet is automatically entered into cell A1 of any other seleted sheet. + Now when you insert values, text or formulas into the active sheet, they will also appear in the identical positions in the other selected sheets. For example, data entered in cell A1 of the active sheet is automatically entered into cell A1 of any other seleted sheet.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/filters.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/filters.xhp index e4f6a12f38..3347d2f84e 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/filters.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/filters.xhp @@ -31,24 +31,23 @@ rows;removing/redisplaying with filters removing;filters -Applying Filters +Applying Filters - Filters and advanced filters allow you to work on certain filtered rows (records) of a data range. In the spreadsheets in $[officename] there are various possibilities for applying filters. + Filters and advanced filters allow you to work on certain filtered rows (records) of a data range. In the spreadsheets in $[officename] there are various possibilities for applying filters. - One use for the AutoFilter function is to quickly restrict the display to records with identical entries in a data field. + One use for the AutoFilter function is to quickly restrict the display to records with identical entries in a data field. - In the Standard Filter dialog, you can also define ranges which contain the values in particular data fields. You can use the standard filter to connect the conditions with either a logical AND or a logical OR operator. + In the Standard Filter dialog, you can also define ranges which contain the values in particular data fields. You can use the standard filter to connect the conditions with either a logical AND or a logical OR operator. - The Advanced filter allows up to a total of eight filter conditions. With advanced filters you enter the conditions directly into the sheet. + The Advanced filter allows up to a total of eight filter conditions. With advanced filters you enter the conditions directly into the sheet. - To remove a filter, so that you see all cells again, click inside the area where the filter was applied, then choose Data - Filter - Reset Filter. - When you select multiple rows from an area where a filter was applied, then this selection can include rows that are visible and rows that are hidden by the filter. If you then apply formatting, or delete the selected rows, this action then applies only to the visible rows. The hidden rows are not affected. - This is the opposite to rows that you have hidden manually by the Format - Rows - Hide Rows command. Manually hidden rows are deleted when you delete a selection that contains them. + To remove a filter, so that you see all cells again, click inside the area where the filter was applied, then choose Data - Filter - Reset Filter. + When you select multiple rows from an area where a filter was applied, then this selection can include rows that are visible and rows that are hidden by the filter. If you then apply formatting, or delete the selected rows, this action then applies only to the visible rows. The hidden rows are not affected. + This is the opposite to rows that you have hidden manually by the Format - Rows - Hide Rows command. Manually hidden rows are deleted when you delete a selection that contains them.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/finding.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/finding.xhp index 734f040f19..5aca05cbc0 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/finding.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/finding.xhp @@ -33,58 +33,58 @@ replacing; cell contents formatting;multiple cell texts 2. mw deleted 2 entries, changed "finding;" and added "formatting;"1. mw copied 5 entries from shared/01/02100000.xhp and changed then "finding," and "replacing;" -Finding and Replacing in Calc +Finding and Replacing in Calc -In spreadsheet documents you can find words, formulas, and styles. You can navigate from one result to the next, or you can highlight all matching cells at once, then apply another format or replace the cell content by other content. +In spreadsheet documents you can find words, formulas, and styles. You can navigate from one result to the next, or you can highlight all matching cells at once, then apply another format or replace the cell content by other content.
-The Find & Replace dialog -Cells can contain text or numbers that were entered directly as in a text document. But cells can also contain text or numbers as the result of a calculation. For example, if a cell contains the formula =1+2 it displays the result 3. You must decide whether to search for the 1 respective 2, or to search the 3. -To find formulas or values -You can specify in the Find & Replace dialog either to find the parts of a formula or the results of a calculation. +The Find & Replace dialog +Cells can contain text or numbers that were entered directly as in a text document. But cells can also contain text or numbers as the result of a calculation. For example, if a cell contains the formula =1+2 it displays the result 3. You must decide whether to search for the 1 respective 2, or to search the 3. +To find formulas or values +You can specify in the Find & Replace dialog either to find the parts of a formula or the results of a calculation. -Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. +Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. -Click More Options to expand the dialog. +Click More Options to expand the dialog. -Select "Formulas" or "Values" in the Search in list box. +Select "Formulas" or "Values" in the Search in list box. -With "Formulas" you will find all parts of the formulas. -With "Values" you will find the results of the calculations. -Cell contents can be formatted in different ways. For example, a number can be formatted as a currency, to be displayed with a currency symbol. You see the currency symbol in the cell, but you cannot search for it. -Finding text +With "Formulas" you will find all parts of the formulas. +With "Values" you will find the results of the calculations. +Cell contents can be formatted in different ways. For example, a number can be formatted as a currency, to be displayed with a currency symbol. You see the currency symbol in the cell, but you cannot search for it. +Finding text -Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. +Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. Enter the text to find in the Find text box. -Either click Find Next or Find All. +Either click Find Next or Find All. -When you click Find Next, Calc will select the next cell that contains your text. You can watch and edit the text, then click Find Next again to advance to the next found cell. +When you click Find Next, Calc will select the next cell that contains your text. You can watch and edit the text, then click Find Next again to advance to the next found cell. -If you closed the dialog, you can press a key combination (CommandCtrl+Shift+F) to find the next cell without opening the dialog. +If you closed the dialog, you can press a key combination (CommandCtrl+Shift+F) to find the next cell without opening the dialog. By default, Calc searches the current sheet. Check the All sheets box to search through all sheets of the document. -When you click Find All, Calc selects all cells that contain your entry. Now you can for example set all found cells to bold, or apply a Cell Style to all at once. -The Navigator +When you click Find All, Calc selects all cells that contain your entry. Now you can for example set all found cells to bold, or apply a Cell Style to all at once. +The Navigator -Choose View - Navigator to open the Navigator window. +Choose View - Navigator to open the Navigator window. -The Navigator is the main tool for finding and selecting objects. -Use the Navigator for inserting objects and links within the same document or from other open documents. +The Navigator is the main tool for finding and selecting objects. +Use the Navigator for inserting objects and links within the same document or from other open documents.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/format_table.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/format_table.xhp index 54fb37d1ea..607faf3c81 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/format_table.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/format_table.xhp @@ -37,40 +37,40 @@ cells; number formats currencies;formats mw transferred 2 entries from shared/01/05020300.xhp and added 2 new entriesmw deleted "defaults;" -Formatting Spreadsheets +Formatting Spreadsheets -Formatting Text in a Spreadsheet +Formatting Text in a Spreadsheet -Select the text you want to format. +Select the text you want to format. -Choose the desired text attributes from the Formatting Bar. You can also choose Format - Cells. The Format Cells dialog will appear in which you can choose various text attributes on the Font tab page. +Choose the desired text attributes from the Formatting Bar. You can also choose Format - Cells. The Format Cells dialog will appear in which you can choose various text attributes on the Font tab page. -Formatting Numbers in a Spreadsheet +Formatting Numbers in a Spreadsheet -Select the cells containing the numbers you want to format. +Select the cells containing the numbers you want to format. -To format numbers in the default currency format or as percentages, use the icons on the Formatting Bar. For other formats, choose Format - Cells. You can choose from the preset formats or define your own on the Numbers tab page. +To format numbers in the default currency format or as percentages, use the icons on the Formatting Bar. For other formats, choose Format - Cells. You can choose from the preset formats or define your own on the Numbers tab page. -Formatting Borders and Backgrounds for Cells and Pages +Formatting Borders and Backgrounds for Cells and Pages -You can assign a format to any group of cells by first selecting the cells (for multiple selection, hold down the CommandCtrl key when clicking), and then activating the Format Cells dialog in Format - Cell. In this dialog, you can select attributes such as shadows and backgrounds. +You can assign a format to any group of cells by first selecting the cells (for multiple selection, hold down the CommandCtrl key when clicking), and then activating the Format Cells dialog in Format - Cell. In this dialog, you can select attributes such as shadows and backgrounds. -To apply formatting attributes to an entire sheet, choose Format - Page. You can define headers and footers, for example, to appear on each printed page. +To apply formatting attributes to an entire sheet, choose Format - Page. You can define headers and footers, for example, to appear on each printed page. -An image that you have loaded with Format - Page - Background is only visible in print or in the print preview. To display a background image on screen as well, insert the graphic image by choosing Insert - Image - From File and arrange the image behind the cells by choosing Format - Arrange - To Background. Use the Navigator to select the background image. +An image that you have loaded with Format - Page - Background is only visible in print or in the print preview. To display a background image on screen as well, insert the graphic image by choosing Insert - Image - From File and arrange the image behind the cells by choosing Format - Arrange - To Background. Use the Navigator to select the background image.
-Number Formatting Options -Backgrounds for Cells +Number Formatting Options +Backgrounds for Cells
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value.xhp index 4b22b2e174..852f4b26a1 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value.xhp @@ -38,27 +38,27 @@ deleting; decimal places decimal places; adding/deleting mw changed "numbers;" -Formatting Numbers With Decimals +Formatting Numbers With Decimals - Enter a number into the sheet, for example, 1234.5678. This number will be displayed in the default number format, with two decimal places. You will see 1234.57 when you confirm the entry. Only the display in the document will be rounded off; internally, the number retains all four decimal places after the decimal point. - To format numbers with decimals: + Enter a number into the sheet, for example, 1234.5678. This number will be displayed in the default number format, with two decimal places. You will see 1234.57 when you confirm the entry. Only the display in the document will be rounded off; internally, the number retains all four decimal places after the decimal point. + To format numbers with decimals: - Set the cursor at the number and choose Format - Cells to start the Format Cells dialog. + Set the cursor at the number and choose Format - Cells to start the Format Cells dialog. - On the Numbers tab you will see a selection of predefined number formats. In the bottom right in the dialog you will see a preview of how your current number would look if you were to give it a particular format. + On the Numbers tab you will see a selection of predefined number formats. In the bottom right in the dialog you will see a preview of how your current number would look if you were to give it a particular format. - + Icon - If you only want to modify the number of the decimal places displayed, the easiest method is to use the Number Format: Add Decimal Place or Number Format: Delete Decimal Place icons on the Formatting Bar. + If you only want to modify the number of the decimal places displayed, the easiest method is to use the Number Format: Add Decimal Place or Number Format: Delete Decimal Place icons on the Formatting Bar.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value_userdef.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value_userdef.xhp index c5364d7feb..e035ac1b4e 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value_userdef.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value_userdef.xhp @@ -32,85 +32,84 @@ number formats; millions format codes; user-defined number formats mw changed "numbers;" -User-defined Number Formats +User-defined Number Formats - You can define your own number formats to display numbers in %PRODUCTNAME Calc. - As an example, to display the number 10,200,000 as 10.2 Million: + You can define your own number formats to display numbers in %PRODUCTNAME Calc. + As an example, to display the number 10,200,000 as 10.2 Million: - Select the cells to which you want to apply a new, user-defined format. + Select the cells to which you want to apply a new, user-defined format. - Choose Format - Cells - Numbers. + Choose Format - Cells - Numbers. - In the Categories list box select "User-defined". + In the Categories list box select "User-defined". - In the Format code text box enter the following code: - 0.0,, "Million" + In the Format code text box enter the following code: + 0.0,, "Million" - Click OK. + Click OK. - The following table shows the effects of rounding, thousands delimiters (,), decimal delimiters (.) and the placeholders # and 0. + The following table shows the effects of rounding, thousands delimiters (,), decimal delimiters (.) and the placeholders # and 0. - Number + Number - .#,, "Million" + .#,, "Million" - 0.0,, "Million" + 0.0,, "Million" - #,, "Million" + #,, "Million" - 10200000 + 10200000 - 10.2 Million + 10.2 Million - 10.2 Million + 10.2 Million - 10 Million + 10 Million - 500000 + 500000 - .5 Million + .5 Million - 0.5 Million + 0.5 Million - 1 Million + 1 Million - 100000000 + 100000000 - 100. Million + 100. Million - 100.0 Million + 100.0 Million - 100 Million + 100 Million
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_copy.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_copy.xhp index 0c0002a42b..0a1fe693d8 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_copy.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_copy.xhp @@ -34,40 +34,40 @@ copying; formulas pasting;formulas mw added "pasting;" and changed "formulas;" -Copying Formulas +Copying Formulas
-There are various ways to copy a formula. One suggested method is: +There are various ways to copy a formula. One suggested method is: -Select the cell containing the formula. +Select the cell containing the formula. -Choose Edit - Copy, or press CommandCtrl+C to copy it. +Choose Edit - Copy, or press CommandCtrl+C to copy it. -Select the cell into which you want the formula to be copied. +Select the cell into which you want the formula to be copied. -Choose Edit - Paste, or press CommandCtrl+V. The formula will be positioned in the new cell. +Choose Edit - Paste, or press CommandCtrl+V. The formula will be positioned in the new cell. -If you want to copy a formula into multiple cells, there is a quick and easy way to copy into adjacent cell areas: +If you want to copy a formula into multiple cells, there is a quick and easy way to copy into adjacent cell areas: -Select the cell containing the formula. +Select the cell containing the formula. -Position the mouse on the bottom right of the highlighted border of the cell, and continue holding down the mouse button until the pointer changes to a cross-hair symbol. +Position the mouse on the bottom right of the highlighted border of the cell, and continue holding down the mouse button until the pointer changes to a cross-hair symbol. -With the mouse button pressed, drag it down or to the right over all the cells into which you want to copy the formula. +With the mouse button pressed, drag it down or to the right over all the cells into which you want to copy the formula. -When you release the mouse button, the formula will be copied into the cells and automatically adjusted. +When you release the mouse button, the formula will be copied into the cells and automatically adjusted. -If you do not want values and texts to be automatically adjusted, then hold down the CommandCtrl key when dragging. Formulas, however, are always adjusted accordingly. +If you do not want values and texts to be automatically adjusted, then hold down the CommandCtrl key when dragging. Formulas, however, are always adjusted accordingly.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_enter.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_enter.xhp index b12a7dedd2..1ea5acb80d 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_enter.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_enter.xhp @@ -34,32 +34,32 @@ formulas; inputting inserting;formulas -Entering Formulas +Entering Formulas -You can enter formulas in several ways: using the icons, or by typing on the keyboard, or by a mixture of both methods. +You can enter formulas in several ways: using the icons, or by typing on the keyboard, or by a mixture of both methods. -Click the cell in which you want to enter the formula. +Click the cell in which you want to enter the formula. -Click the Function icon on the Formula Bar. -You will now see an equals sign in the input line and you can begin to input the formula. +Click the Function icon on the Formula Bar. +You will now see an equals sign in the input line and you can begin to input the formula. -After entering the required values, press Enter or click Accept to insert the result in the active cell. If you want to clear your entry in the input line, press Escape or click Cancel. +After entering the required values, press Enter or click Accept to insert the result in the active cell. If you want to clear your entry in the input line, press Escape or click Cancel. -You can also enter the values and the formulas directly into the cells, even if you cannot see an input cursor. Formulas must always begin with an equals sign. -You can also press the + or - key on the numerical keyboard to start a formula. NumLock must be "on". For example, press the following keys in succession: -+ 5 0 - 8 Enter -You see the result 42 in the cell. The cell contains the formula =+50-8. -If you are editing a formula with references, the references and the associated cells will be highlighted with the same color. You can now resize the reference border using the mouse, and the reference in the formula displayed in the input line also changes. Show references in color can be deactivated under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. -If you would like to view the calculation of individual elements of a formula, select the respective elements and press F9. For example, in the formula =SUM(A1:B12)*SUM(C1:D12) select the section SUM(C1:D12) and press F9 to view the subtotal for this area. +You can also enter the values and the formulas directly into the cells, even if you cannot see an input cursor. Formulas must always begin with an equals sign. +You can also press the + or - key on the numerical keyboard to start a formula. NumLock must be "on". For example, press the following keys in succession: ++ 5 0 - 8 Enter +You see the result 42 in the cell. The cell contains the formula =+50-8. +If you are editing a formula with references, the references and the associated cells will be highlighted with the same color. You can now resize the reference border using the mouse, and the reference in the formula displayed in the input line also changes. Show references in color can be deactivated under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. +If you would like to view the calculation of individual elements of a formula, select the respective elements and press F9. For example, in the formula =SUM(A1:B12)*SUM(C1:D12) select the section SUM(C1:D12) and press F9 to view the subtotal for this area. -If an error occurs when creating the formula, an error message appears in the active cell. +If an error occurs when creating the formula, an error message appears in the active cell.
-Formula bar +Formula bar diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_value.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_value.xhp index bb7832dd66..e125921f0d 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_value.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_value.xhp @@ -36,20 +36,20 @@ results display vs. formulas display displaying; formulas instead of results mw inserted "displaying;..." entry from shared/optionen/01060100.xhp. Adding (Calc) is no longer necessary in this file. mw made "results;..." a two level entry. -Displaying Formulas or Values +Displaying Formulas or Values -If you want to display the formulas in the cells, for example in the form =SUM(A1:B5), proceed as follows: +If you want to display the formulas in the cells, for example in the form =SUM(A1:B5), proceed as follows: -Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. -In the Display area mark the Formulas box. Click OK. +In the Display area mark the Formulas box. Click OK. -If you want to view the calculation results instead of the formula, do not mark the Formulas box. +If you want to view the calculation results instead of the formula, do not mark the Formulas box.
-%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/formulas.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/formulas.xhp index 3c87fb15bb..ee71644ac3 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/formulas.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/formulas.xhp @@ -32,75 +32,75 @@ formulas;calculating with calculating; with formulas examples;formula calculation -mw changed "formulas;..." entry and addes "examples;..." entryCalculating With Formulas +mw changed "formulas;..." entry and addes "examples;..." entryCalculating With Formulas -All formulas begin with an equals sign. The formulas can contain numbers, text, arithmetic operators, logic operators, or functions. -Remember that the basic arithmetic operators (+, -, *, /) can be used in formulas using the "Multiplication and Division before Addition and Subtraction" rule. Instead of writing =SUM(A1:B1) you can write =A1+B1. -Parentheses can also be used. The result of the formula =(1+2)*3 produces a different result than =1+2*3. -Here are a few examples of $[officename] Calc formulas: +All formulas begin with an equals sign. The formulas can contain numbers, text, arithmetic operators, logic operators, or functions. +Remember that the basic arithmetic operators (+, -, *, /) can be used in formulas using the "Multiplication and Division before Addition and Subtraction" rule. Instead of writing =SUM(A1:B1) you can write =A1+B1. +Parentheses can also be used. The result of the formula =(1+2)*3 produces a different result than =1+2*3. +Here are a few examples of $[officename] Calc formulas: -=A1+10 +=A1+10 -Displays the contents of cell A1 plus 10. +Displays the contents of cell A1 plus 10. -=A1*16% +=A1*16% -Displays 16% of the contents of A1. +Displays 16% of the contents of A1. -=A1 * A2 +=A1 * A2 -Displays the result of the multiplication of A1 and A2. +Displays the result of the multiplication of A1 and A2. -=ROUND(A1;1) +=ROUND(A1;1) -Displays the contents of cell A1 rounded to one decimal place. +Displays the contents of cell A1 rounded to one decimal place. -=EFFECTIVE(5%;12) +=EFFECTIVE(5%;12) -Calculates the effective interest for 5% annual nominal interest with 12 payments a year. +Calculates the effective interest for 5% annual nominal interest with 12 payments a year. -=B8-SUM(B10:B14) +=B8-SUM(B10:B14) -Calculates B8 minus the sum of the cells B10 to B14. +Calculates B8 minus the sum of the cells B10 to B14. -=SUM(B8;SUM(B10:B14)) +=SUM(B8;SUM(B10:B14)) -Calculates the sum of cells B10 to B14 and adds the value to B8. +Calculates the sum of cells B10 to B14 and adds the value to B8.
-It is also possible to nest functions in formulas, as shown in the example. You can also nest functions within functions. The Function Wizard assists you with nested functions. +It is also possible to nest functions in formulas, as shown in the example. You can also nest functions within functions. The Function Wizard assists you with nested functions.
-Functions list -Function Wizard +Functions list +Function Wizard
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/fraction_enter.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/fraction_enter.xhp index c2cd7ab0e4..b3917bafb0 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/fraction_enter.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/fraction_enter.xhp @@ -34,17 +34,17 @@ numbers; entering fractions inserting;fractions -Entering Fractions +Entering Fractions
-You can enter a fractional number in a cell and use it for calculation: +You can enter a fractional number in a cell and use it for calculation: -Enter "0 1/5" in a cell (without the quotation marks) and press the input key. In the input line above the spreadsheet you will see the value 0.2, which is used for the calculation. +Enter "0 1/5" in a cell (without the quotation marks) and press the input key. In the input line above the spreadsheet you will see the value 0.2, which is used for the calculation. If you enter “0 1/2” AutoCorrect causes the three characters 1, / and 2 to be replaced by a single character, ½. The same applies to 1/4 and 3/4. This replacement is defined in Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Options tab. -If you want to see multi-digit fractions such as "1/10", you must change the cell format to the multi-digit fraction view. Open the context menu of the cell, and choose Format cells. Select "Fraction" from the Category field, and then select "-1234 10/81". You can then enter fractions such as 12/31 or 12/32 - the fractions are, however, automatically reduced, so that in the last example you would see 3/8. +If you want to see multi-digit fractions such as "1/10", you must change the cell format to the multi-digit fraction view. Open the context menu of the cell, and choose Format cells. Select "Fraction" from the Category field, and then select "-1234 10/81". You can then enter fractions such as 12/31 or 12/32 - the fractions are, however, automatically reduced, so that in the last example you would see 3/8.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/goalseek.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/goalseek.xhp index 5437043322..69a77fb339 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/goalseek.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/goalseek.xhp @@ -34,33 +34,33 @@ variables;calculating equations examples;goal seek mw changed "goal seek example" to "goal seeking;" -Applying Goal Seek +Applying Goal Seek -With the help of Goal Seek you can calculate a value that, as part of a formula, leads to the result you specify for the formula. You thus define the formula with several fixed values and one variable value and the result of the formula. -Goal Seek Example -To calculate annual interest (I), create a table with the values for the capital (C), number of years (n), and interest rate (i). The formula is: -I = C * n* i -Let us assume that the interest rate i of 7.5% and the number of years n (1) will remain constant. However, you want to know how much the investment capital C would have to be modified in order to attain a particular return I. For this example, calculate how much capital C would be required if you want an annual return of $15,000. -Enter each of the values for Capital C (an arbitrary value like $100,000), number of years n (1), and interest rate i (7.5%) in one cell each. Enter the formula to calculate the interest I in another cell. Instead of C, n, and i use the reference to the cell with the corresponding value. +With the help of Goal Seek you can calculate a value that, as part of a formula, leads to the result you specify for the formula. You thus define the formula with several fixed values and one variable value and the result of the formula. +Goal Seek Example +To calculate annual interest (I), create a table with the values for the capital (C), number of years (n), and interest rate (i). The formula is: +I = C * n* i +Let us assume that the interest rate i of 7.5% and the number of years n (1) will remain constant. However, you want to know how much the investment capital C would have to be modified in order to attain a particular return I. For this example, calculate how much capital C would be required if you want an annual return of $15,000. +Enter each of the values for Capital C (an arbitrary value like $100,000), number of years n (1), and interest rate i (7.5%) in one cell each. Enter the formula to calculate the interest I in another cell. Instead of C, n, and i use the reference to the cell with the corresponding value. -Place the cursor in the cell containing the interest I, and choose Tools - Goal Seek. The Goal Seek dialog appears. +Place the cursor in the cell containing the interest I, and choose Tools - Goal Seek. The Goal Seek dialog appears. -The correct cell is already entered in the field Formula Cell. +The correct cell is already entered in the field Formula Cell. -Place the cursor in the field Variable Cell. In the sheet, click in the cell that contains the value to be changed, in this example it is the cell with the capital value C. +Place the cursor in the field Variable Cell. In the sheet, click in the cell that contains the value to be changed, in this example it is the cell with the capital value C. -Enter the expected result of the formula in the Target Value text box. In this example, the value is 15,000. Click OK. +Enter the expected result of the formula in the Target Value text box. In this example, the value is 15,000. Click OK. -A dialog appears informing you that the Goal Seek was successful. Click Yes to enter the result in the cell with the variable value. +A dialog appears informing you that the Goal Seek was successful. Click Yes to enter the result in the cell with the variable value.
-Goal Seek +Goal Seek
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/html_doc.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/html_doc.xhp index 638d1c7ed9..2a98b9e9ee 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/html_doc.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/html_doc.xhp @@ -34,38 +34,38 @@ saving; sheets in HTML opening; sheets in HTML -Saving and Opening Sheets in HTML +Saving and Opening Sheets in HTML -Saving Sheets in HTML - +Saving Sheets in HTML + %PRODUCTNAME Calc saves all the sheets of a Calc document together as an HTML document. At the beginning of the HTML document, a heading and a list of hyperlinks are automatically added which lead to the individual sheets within the document. -Numbers are shown as written. In addition, in the <SDVAL> HTML tag, the exact internal number value is written so that after opening the HTML document with %PRODUCTNAME you know you have the exact values. +Numbers are shown as written. In addition, in the <SDVAL> HTML tag, the exact internal number value is written so that after opening the HTML document with %PRODUCTNAME you know you have the exact values. -To save the current Calc document as HTML, choose File - Save As. +To save the current Calc document as HTML, choose File - Save As. -In the File type list box, in the area with the other %PRODUCTNAME Calc filters, choose the file type "HTML Document (%PRODUCTNAME Calc)". +In the File type list box, in the area with the other %PRODUCTNAME Calc filters, choose the file type "HTML Document (%PRODUCTNAME Calc)". -Enter a File name and click Save. +Enter a File name and click Save. -Opening Sheets in HTML - +Opening Sheets in HTML + %PRODUCTNAME offers various filters for opening HTML files, which you can select under File - Open in the Files of type list box: -Choose the file type "HTML Document (%PRODUCTNAME Calc)" to open in %PRODUCTNAME Calc. -All %PRODUCTNAME Calc options are now available to you. However, not all options that %PRODUCTNAME Calc offers for editing can be saved in HTML format. +Choose the file type "HTML Document (%PRODUCTNAME Calc)" to open in %PRODUCTNAME Calc. +All %PRODUCTNAME Calc options are now available to you. However, not all options that %PRODUCTNAME Calc offers for editing can be saved in HTML format.
-File - Open -File - Save As +File - Open +File - Save As
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/keyboard.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/keyboard.xhp index 7fd6884640..e827a77a97 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/keyboard.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/keyboard.xhp @@ -33,67 +33,67 @@ accessibility; %PRODUCTNAME Calc shortcuts shortcut keys;%PRODUCTNAME Calc accessibility -Shortcut Keys (%PRODUCTNAME Calc Accessibility) +Shortcut Keys (%PRODUCTNAME Calc Accessibility) -Refer also to the lists of shortcut keys for %PRODUCTNAME Calc and %PRODUCTNAME in general. +Refer also to the lists of shortcut keys for %PRODUCTNAME Calc and %PRODUCTNAME in general. -Cell Selection Mode +Cell Selection Mode - + Icon -In a text box that has a button to minimize the dialog, press F2 to enter the cell selection mode. Select any number of cells, then press F2 again to show the dialog. +In a text box that has a button to minimize the dialog, press F2 to enter the cell selection mode. Select any number of cells, then press F2 again to show the dialog.
-In the cell selection mode, you can use the common navigation keys to select cells. -Controlling the Outline -You can use the keyboard in Outline: +In the cell selection mode, you can use the common navigation keys to select cells. +Controlling the Outline +You can use the keyboard in Outline: -Press F6 or Shift+F6 until the vertical or horizontal outline window has the focus. +Press F6 or Shift+F6 until the vertical or horizontal outline window has the focus. - + Tab - cycle through all visible buttons from top to bottom or from left to right. - + Shift+Tab - cycle through all visible buttons in the opposite direction. - + Command+1 to Command+8Ctrl+1 to Ctrl+8 - show all levels up to the specified number; hide all higher levels. -Use + or - to show or hide the focused outline group. +Use + or - to show or hide the focused outline group. -Press Enter to activate the focused button. +Press Enter to activate the focused button. -Use Up, Down, Left, or Right arrow to cycle through all buttons in the current level. +Use Up, Down, Left, or Right arrow to cycle through all buttons in the current level. -Selecting a Drawing Object or a Graphic +Selecting a Drawing Object or a Graphic -Choose View - Toolbars - Drawing to open the Drawing toolbar. +Choose View - Toolbars - Drawing to open the Drawing toolbar. -Press F6 until the Drawing toolbar is selected. +Press F6 until the Drawing toolbar is selected. -If the selection tool is active, press CommandCtrl+Enter. This selects the first drawing object or graphic in the sheet. +If the selection tool is active, press CommandCtrl+Enter. This selects the first drawing object or graphic in the sheet. -With CommandCtrl+F6 you set the focus to the document. -Now you can use Tab to select the next drawing object or graphic and Shift+Tab to select the previous one. +With CommandCtrl+F6 you set the focus to the document. +Now you can use Tab to select the next drawing object or graphic and Shift+Tab to select the previous one.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/main.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/main.xhp index 0d52fbddd1..771a35c2b6 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/main.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/main.xhp @@ -31,10 +31,10 @@ HowTos for Calc instructions; $[officename] Calc -MWdeleted one entry and added oneInstructions for Using $[officename] Calc +MWdeleted one entry and added oneInstructions for Using $[officename] Calc -Formatting Tables and Cells +Formatting Tables and Cells @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ -Entering Values and Formulas +Entering Values and Formulas @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ -Entering Referencesmw deleted link to Calc guide address_byname.xhp +Entering Referencesmw deleted link to Calc guide address_byname.xhp @@ -99,11 +99,11 @@ -Database Ranges in Tables +Database Ranges in Tables -Advanced Calculations +Advanced Calculations @@ -116,14 +116,14 @@ -Printing and Print Preview +Printing and Print Preview -Importing and Exporting Documents +Importing and Exporting Documents @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ -Miscellaneous +Miscellaneous diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/mark_cells.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/mark_cells.xhp index fc11ad904e..ab777c706e 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/mark_cells.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/mark_cells.xhp @@ -34,71 +34,71 @@ selection modes in spreadsheets tables; selecting ranges mw changed "selection modes..." -Selecting Multiple Cells +Selecting Multiple Cells - Select a rectangular range - With the mouse button pressed, drag from one corner to the diagonally opposed corner of the range. - Mark a single cell - Do one of the following: + Select a rectangular range + With the mouse button pressed, drag from one corner to the diagonally opposed corner of the range. + Mark a single cell + Do one of the following: - Click, then Shift-click the cell. + Click, then Shift-click the cell. - Pressing the mouse button, drag a range across two cells, do not release the mouse button, and then drag back to the first cell. Release the mouse button. You can now move the individual cell by drag and drop. + Pressing the mouse button, drag a range across two cells, do not release the mouse button, and then drag back to the first cell. Release the mouse button. You can now move the individual cell by drag and drop. - Select various dispersed cells - Do one of the following: + Select various dispersed cells + Do one of the following: - Mark at least one cell. Then while pressing Command + Mark at least one cell. Then while pressing Command Ctrl, click each of the additional cells. - Click the STD / EXT / ADD area in the status bar until it shows ADD. Now click all cells that you want to select. + Click the STD / EXT / ADD area in the status bar until it shows ADD. Now click all cells that you want to select. - Switch marking mode - On the status bar, click the box with the legend STD / EXT / ADD to switch the marking mode: + Switch marking mode + On the status bar, click the box with the legend STD / EXT / ADD to switch the marking mode: - Field contents + Field contents - Effect of clicking the mouse + Effect of clicking the mouse - STD + STD - A mouse click selects the cell you have clicked on. Unmarks all marked cells. + A mouse click selects the cell you have clicked on. Unmarks all marked cells. - EXT + EXT - A mouse click marks a rectangular range from the current cell to the cell you clicked. Alternatively, Shift-click a cell. + A mouse click marks a rectangular range from the current cell to the cell you clicked. Alternatively, Shift-click a cell. - ADD + ADD - A mouse click in a cell adds it to the already marked cells. A mouse click in a marked cell unmarks it. Alternatively, Command + A mouse click in a cell adds it to the already marked cells. A mouse click in a marked cell unmarks it. Alternatively, Command Ctrl-click the cells.
- Status bar + Status bar
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/matrixformula.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/matrixformula.xhp index 77c96f3059..8766483f14 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/matrixformula.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/matrixformula.xhp @@ -34,34 +34,34 @@ formulas; matrix formulas inserting;matrix formulas -Entering Matrix Formulas +Entering Matrix Formulas -The following is an example of how you can enter a matrix formula, without going into the details of matrix functions. -Assume you have entered 10 numbers in Columns A and B (A1:A10 and B1:B10), and would like to calculate the sum of each row in Column C. +The following is an example of how you can enter a matrix formula, without going into the details of matrix functions. +Assume you have entered 10 numbers in Columns A and B (A1:A10 and B1:B10), and would like to calculate the sum of each row in Column C. -Using the mouse, select the range C1:C10, in which the results are to be displayed. +Using the mouse, select the range C1:C10, in which the results are to be displayed. -Press F2, or click in the input line of the Formula bar. +Press F2, or click in the input line of the Formula bar. -Enter an equal sign (=). +Enter an equal sign (=). -Select the range A1:A10, which contains the first values for the sum formula. +Select the range A1:A10, which contains the first values for the sum formula. -Press the (+) key from the numerical keypad. +Press the (+) key from the numerical keypad. -Select the numbers in the second column in cells B1:B10. +Select the numbers in the second column in cells B1:B10. -End the input with the matrix key combination: Shift+CommandCtrl+Enter. +End the input with the matrix key combination: Shift+CommandCtrl+Enter. -The matrix area is automatically protected against modifications, such as deleting rows or columns. It is, however, possible to edit any formatting, such as the cell background. +The matrix area is automatically protected against modifications, such as deleting rows or columns. It is, however, possible to edit any formatting, such as the cell background.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/move_dragdrop.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/move_dragdrop.xhp index a311413389..a89af20967 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/move_dragdrop.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/move_dragdrop.xhp @@ -34,81 +34,81 @@ moving;cells, rows and columns by drag and drop inserting;cells, by drag and drop mw added "columns;" -Moving Cells by Drag-and-Drop +Moving Cells by Drag-and-Drop -When you drag-and-drop a selection of cells, rows or columns on a Calc sheet, the cells (including the ones in selected rows or columns) normally overwrite the existing cells in the area where you drop. This is the normal overwrite mode. -Note that to drag-and-drop entire rows or columns, you must select the rows or columns you want to move (or copy) first, then start dragging from selected cells, not from the row or column headers (cells would be deselected by this). -When you hold down the OptionAlt key while releasing the mouse button, you enter the insert mode. +When you drag-and-drop a selection of cells, rows or columns on a Calc sheet, the cells (including the ones in selected rows or columns) normally overwrite the existing cells in the area where you drop. This is the normal overwrite mode. +Note that to drag-and-drop entire rows or columns, you must select the rows or columns you want to move (or copy) first, then start dragging from selected cells, not from the row or column headers (cells would be deselected by this). +When you hold down the OptionAlt key while releasing the mouse button, you enter the insert mode. -In insert mode, the existing cells where you drop will be shifted to the right or to the bottom, and the dropped cells are inserted into the now empty positions without overwriting. +In insert mode, the existing cells where you drop will be shifted to the right or to the bottom, and the dropped cells are inserted into the now empty positions without overwriting. -The surrounding box of the moved cells looks different in insert mode. -In overwrite mode you see all four borders around the selected area. In insert mode you see only the left border when target cells will be shifted to the right. You see only the upper border when target cells will be shifted down. -Whether the target area will be shifted to the right or to the bottom depends on the distance between source and target cells, if you move within the same sheet. It depends on the number of horizontal or vertical cells in the moved area, if you move to a different sheet. +The surrounding box of the moved cells looks different in insert mode. +In overwrite mode you see all four borders around the selected area. In insert mode you see only the left border when target cells will be shifted to the right. You see only the upper border when target cells will be shifted down. +Whether the target area will be shifted to the right or to the bottom depends on the distance between source and target cells, if you move within the same sheet. It depends on the number of horizontal or vertical cells in the moved area, if you move to a different sheet. -If you move cells in insert mode within the same row (only horizontally), then after insertion of the cells, all cells will be shifted to the left to fill the source area. +If you move cells in insert mode within the same row (only horizontally), then after insertion of the cells, all cells will be shifted to the left to fill the source area. -In both modes, you can hold down the CommandCtrl key, or CommandCtrl+Shift keys while you release the mouse button to insert a copy or a link, respectively. +In both modes, you can hold down the CommandCtrl key, or CommandCtrl+Shift keys while you release the mouse button to insert a copy or a link, respectively. -Keys pressed while releasing the mouse button +Keys pressed while releasing the mouse button -Result +Result -No key +No key -Cells are moved and overwrite the cells in the target area. Source cells are emptied. +Cells are moved and overwrite the cells in the target area. Source cells are emptied. -CommandCtrl key +CommandCtrl key -Cells are copied and overwrite the cells in the target area. Source cells stay as they are. +Cells are copied and overwrite the cells in the target area. Source cells stay as they are. -CommandCtrl+Shift keys +CommandCtrl+Shift keys -Links to the source cells are inserted and overwrite the cells in the target area. Source cells stay as they are. +Links to the source cells are inserted and overwrite the cells in the target area. Source cells stay as they are. -OptionAlt key +OptionAlt key -Cells are moved and shift the cells in the target area to the right or to the bottom. Source cells are emptied, except if you move within the same rows on the same sheet. -If you move within the same rows on the same sheet, the cells in the target area shift to the right, and then the whole row shifts to fill the source area. +Cells are moved and shift the cells in the target area to the right or to the bottom. Source cells are emptied, except if you move within the same rows on the same sheet. +If you move within the same rows on the same sheet, the cells in the target area shift to the right, and then the whole row shifts to fill the source area. -Option+Command Alt+Ctrl keys +Option+Command Alt+Ctrl keys -Cells are copied and shift the cells in the target area to the right or to the bottom. Source cells stay as they are. +Cells are copied and shift the cells in the target area to the right or to the bottom. Source cells stay as they are. -Option+CommandAlt+Ctrl+Shift keys +Option+CommandAlt+Ctrl+Shift keys -Links to the source cells are inserted and shift the cells in the target area to the right or to the bottom. Source cells stay as they are. +Links to the source cells are inserted and shift the cells in the target area to the right or to the bottom. Source cells stay as they are.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/multi_tables.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/multi_tables.xhp index b353819394..b1d021f77b 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/multi_tables.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/multi_tables.xhp @@ -36,10 +36,10 @@ sheet tabs;using views;multiple sheets - Navigating Through Sheet Tabs + Navigating Through Sheet Tabs - By default $[officename] displays three sheets "Sheet1" to "Sheet3", in each new spreadsheet. You can switch between sheets in a spreadsheet using the sheet tabs at the bottom of the screen. - + By default $[officename] displays three sheets "Sheet1" to "Sheet3", in each new spreadsheet. You can switch between sheets in a spreadsheet using the sheet tabs at the bottom of the screen. + Sheet Tabs @@ -47,12 +47,12 @@ - + Icon - Use the navigation buttons to display all the sheets belonging to your document. Clicking the button on the far left or the far right displays, respectively, the first or last sheet tab. The middle buttons allow the user to scroll forward and backward through all sheet tabs. To display the sheet itself click on the sheet tab. + Use the navigation buttons to display all the sheets belonging to your document. Clicking the button on the far left or the far right displays, respectively, the first or last sheet tab. The middle buttons allow the user to scroll forward and backward through all sheet tabs. To display the sheet itself click on the sheet tab.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/multioperation.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/multioperation.xhp index 7a0d6e178e..9f1eb62af3 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/multioperation.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/multioperation.xhp @@ -34,92 +34,92 @@ data tables; multiple operations in cross-classified tables mw made "what if operations" a two level entry -Applying Multiple Operations +Applying Multiple Operations -Multiple Operations in Columns or Rows -The Data - Multiple Operations command provides a planning tool for "what if" questions. In your spreadsheet, you enter a formula to calculate a result from values that are stored in other cells. Then, you set up a cell range where you enter some fixed values, and the Multiple Operations command will calculate the results depending on the formula. -In the Formulas field, enter the cell reference to the formula that applies to the data range. In the Column input cell/Row input cell field, enter the cell reference to the corresponding cell that is part of the formula. This can be explained best by examples: -Examples -You produce toys which you sell for $10 each. Each toy costs $2 to make, in addition to which you have fixed costs of $10,000 per year. How much profit will you make in a year if you sell a particular number of toys? - +Multiple Operations in Columns or Rows +The Data - Multiple Operations command provides a planning tool for "what if" questions. In your spreadsheet, you enter a formula to calculate a result from values that are stored in other cells. Then, you set up a cell range where you enter some fixed values, and the Multiple Operations command will calculate the results depending on the formula. +In the Formulas field, enter the cell reference to the formula that applies to the data range. In the Column input cell/Row input cell field, enter the cell reference to the corresponding cell that is part of the formula. This can be explained best by examples: +Examples +You produce toys which you sell for $10 each. Each toy costs $2 to make, in addition to which you have fixed costs of $10,000 per year. How much profit will you make in a year if you sell a particular number of toys? + what-if sheet area -Calculating With One Formula and One Variable +Calculating With One Formula and One Variable -To calculate the profit, first enter any number as the quantity (items sold) - in this example 2000. The profit is found from the formula Profit=Quantity * (Selling price - Direct costs) - Fixed costs. Enter this formula in B5. +To calculate the profit, first enter any number as the quantity (items sold) - in this example 2000. The profit is found from the formula Profit=Quantity * (Selling price - Direct costs) - Fixed costs. Enter this formula in B5. -In column D enter given annual sales, one below the other; for example, 500 to 5000, in steps of 500. +In column D enter given annual sales, one below the other; for example, 500 to 5000, in steps of 500. -Select the range D2:E11, and thus the values in column D and the empty cells alongside in column E. +Select the range D2:E11, and thus the values in column D and the empty cells alongside in column E. -Choose Data - Multiple operations. +Choose Data - Multiple operations. -With the cursor in the Formulas field, click cell B5. +With the cursor in the Formulas field, click cell B5. -Set the cursor in the Column input cell field and click cell B4. This means that B4, the quantity, is the variable in the formula, which is replaced by the selected column values. +Set the cursor in the Column input cell field and click cell B4. This means that B4, the quantity, is the variable in the formula, which is replaced by the selected column values. -Close the dialog with OK. You see the profits for the different quantities in column E. +Close the dialog with OK. You see the profits for the different quantities in column E. -Calculating with Several Formulas Simultaneously +Calculating with Several Formulas Simultaneously -Delete column E. +Delete column E. -Enter the following formula in C5: = B5 / B4. You are now calculating the annual profit per item sold. +Enter the following formula in C5: = B5 / B4. You are now calculating the annual profit per item sold. -Select the range D2:F11, thus three columns. +Select the range D2:F11, thus three columns. -Choose Data - Multiple Operations. +Choose Data - Multiple Operations. -With the cursor in the Formulas field, select cells B5 thru C5. +With the cursor in the Formulas field, select cells B5 thru C5. -Set the cursor in the Column input cell field and click cell B4. +Set the cursor in the Column input cell field and click cell B4. -Close the dialog with OK. You will now see the profits in column E and the annual profit per item in column F. +Close the dialog with OK. You will now see the profits in column E and the annual profit per item in column F. -Multiple Operations Across Rows and Columns - +Multiple Operations Across Rows and Columns + %PRODUCTNAME allows you to carry out joint multiple operations for columns and rows in so-called cross-tables. The formula cell has to refer to both the data range arranged in rows and the one arranged in columns. Select the range defined by both data ranges and call the multiple operation dialog. Enter the reference to the formula in the Formulas field. The Row input cell and the Column input cell fields are used to enter the reference to the corresponding cells of the formula. -Calculating with Two Variables -Consider columns A and B of the sample table above. You now want to vary not just the quantity produced annually, but also the selling price, and you are interested in the profit in each case. -Expand the table shown above. D2 thru D11 contain the numbers 500, 1000 and so on, up to 5000. In E1 through H1 enter the numbers 8, 10, 15 and 20. +Calculating with Two Variables +Consider columns A and B of the sample table above. You now want to vary not just the quantity produced annually, but also the selling price, and you are interested in the profit in each case. +Expand the table shown above. D2 thru D11 contain the numbers 500, 1000 and so on, up to 5000. In E1 through H1 enter the numbers 8, 10, 15 and 20. -Select the range D1:H11. +Select the range D1:H11. -Choose Data - Multiple Operations. +Choose Data - Multiple Operations. -With the cursor in the Formulas field, click cell B5. +With the cursor in the Formulas field, click cell B5. -Set the cursor in the Row input cell field and click cell B1. This means that B1, the selling price, is the horizontally entered variable (with the values 8, 10, 15 and 20). +Set the cursor in the Row input cell field and click cell B1. This means that B1, the selling price, is the horizontally entered variable (with the values 8, 10, 15 and 20). -Set the cursor in the Column input cell field and click in B4. This means that B4, the quantity, is the vertically entered variable. +Set the cursor in the Column input cell field and click in B4. This means that B4, the quantity, is the vertically entered variable. -Close the dialog with OK. You see the profits for the different selling prices in the range E2:H11. +Close the dialog with OK. You see the profits for the different selling prices in the range E2:H11.
-Multiple operations +Multiple operations
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/multitables.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/multitables.xhp index 8d43929893..1c24ec0d16 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/multitables.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/multitables.xhp @@ -35,38 +35,34 @@ multiple sheets calculating;multiple sheets MW moved "sheets;simultaneous.." to edit_multitables.xhp, transferred 2 entries from there and added "calculating;" -Applying Multiple Sheets +Applying Multiple Sheets - Inserting a Sheet + Inserting a Sheet - Choose Insert - Sheet to insert a new sheet or an existing sheet from another file. + Choose Insert - Sheet to insert a new sheet or an existing sheet from another file. Sheet Events -Opens a dialog box where you can assign macros to sheet events. +Opens a dialog box where you can assign macros to sheet events. Tab Color Opens a window where you can assign a color to the sheet tab. -Click to select all sheets in the document. +Click to select all sheets in the document. -Click to deselect all sheets in the document, except the current sheet. - Selecting Multiple Sheets - The sheet tab of the current sheet is always visible in white in front of the other sheet tabs. The other sheet tabs are gray when they are not selected. By clicking other sheet tabs while pressing CommandCtrl you can select multiple sheets. - You can use Shift+Command +Click to deselect all sheets in the document, except the current sheet. + Selecting Multiple Sheets + The sheet tab of the current sheet is always visible in white in front of the other sheet tabs. The other sheet tabs are gray when they are not selected. By clicking other sheet tabs while pressing CommandCtrl you can select multiple sheets. + You can use Shift+Command Ctrl+Page Up or Page Down to select multiple sheets using the keyboard. - Undoing a Selection - To undo the selection of a sheet, click its sheet tab again while pressing the CommandCtrl key. The sheet that is currently visible cannot be removed from the selection. - Calculating Across Multiple Sheets - You can refer to a range of sheets in a formula by specifying the first and last sheet of the range, for example, =SUM(Sheet1.A1:Sheet3.A1) sums up all A1 cells on Sheet1 through Sheet3. + Undoing a Selection + To undo the selection of a sheet, click its sheet tab again while pressing the CommandCtrl key. The sheet that is currently visible cannot be removed from the selection. + Calculating Across Multiple Sheets + You can refer to a range of sheets in a formula by specifying the first and last sheet of the range, for example, =SUM(Sheet1.A1:Sheet3.A1) sums up all A1 cells on Sheet1 through Sheet3.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/note_insert.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/note_insert.xhp index 77eaf5f11b..8b7b623ac7 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/note_insert.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/note_insert.xhp @@ -34,33 +34,32 @@ viewing;comments on cells displaying; comments MW deleted double index "comments;on cells" and copied "displaying;comments" from shared/optionen/01060100.xhp -Inserting and Editing Comments +Inserting and Editing Comments -You can assign a comment to each cell by choosing Insert - Comment. The comment is indicated by a small red square, the comment indicator, in the cell. +You can assign a comment to each cell by choosing Insert - Comment. The comment is indicated by a small red square, the comment indicator, in the cell. The comment is visible whenever the mouse pointer is over the cell. -When you select the cell, you can choose Show Comment from the context menu of the cell. Doing so keeps the comment visible until you deactivate the Show Comment command from the same context menu. +When you select the cell, you can choose Show Comment from the context menu of the cell. Doing so keeps the comment visible until you deactivate the Show Comment command from the same context menu. -To edit a permanently visible comment, just click in it. If you delete the entire text of the comment, the comment itself is deleted. +To edit a permanently visible comment, just click in it. If you delete the entire text of the comment, the comment itself is deleted. -Move or resize each comment as you like. +Move or resize each comment as you like. -Format each comment by specifying background color, transparency, border style, and text alignment. Choose the commands from the context menu of the comment. +Format each comment by specifying background color, transparency, border style, and text alignment. Choose the commands from the context menu of the comment. -To show or hide the comment indicator, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View and mark or unmark the Comment indicator check box. +To show or hide the comment indicator, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View and mark or unmark the Comment indicator check box. -To display a help tip for a selected cell, use Data - Validity - Input Help. +To display a help tip for a selected cell, use Data - Validity - Input Help.
-Insert - Comment +Insert - Comment
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/numbers_text.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/numbers_text.xhp index c1405b5044..8d46c4d46b 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/numbers_text.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/numbers_text.xhp @@ -32,54 +32,54 @@ date formats;conversion converting;text, into numbers mw changed "converting;" and added two index entries -Converting Text to Numbers +Converting Text to Numbers
- Calc converts text inside cells to the respective numeric values if an unambiguous conversion is possible. If no conversion is possible, Calc returns a #VALUE! error. - Only integer numbers including exponent are converted, and ISO 8601 dates and times in their extended formats with separators. Anything else, like fractional numbers with decimal separators or dates other than ISO 8601, is not converted, as the text string would be locale dependent. Leading and trailing blanks are ignored. - The following ISO 8601 formats are converted: + Calc converts text inside cells to the respective numeric values if an unambiguous conversion is possible. If no conversion is possible, Calc returns a #VALUE! error. + Only integer numbers including exponent are converted, and ISO 8601 dates and times in their extended formats with separators. Anything else, like fractional numbers with decimal separators or dates other than ISO 8601, is not converted, as the text string would be locale dependent. Leading and trailing blanks are ignored. + The following ISO 8601 formats are converted: - CCYY-MM-DD + CCYY-MM-DD - CCYY-MM-DDThh:mm + CCYY-MM-DDThh:mm - CCYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ss + CCYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ss - CCYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ss,s + CCYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ss,s - CCYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ss.s + CCYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ss.s - hh:mm + hh:mm - hh:mm:ss + hh:mm:ss - hh:mm:ss,s + hh:mm:ss,s - hh:mm:ss.s + hh:mm:ss.s - The century code CC may not be omitted. Instead of the T date and time separator, exactly one space character may be used. - If a date is given, it must be a valid Gregorian calendar date. In this case the optional time must be in the range 00:00 to 23:59:59.99999... - If only a time string is given, it may have an hours value of more than 24, while minutes and seconds can have a maximum value of 59. - The conversion is done for single arguments only, as in =A1+A2, or ="1E2"+1. Cell range arguments are not affected, so SUM(A1:A2) differs from A1+A2 if at least one of the two cells contain a convertible string. - Strings inside formulas are also converted, such as in ="1999-11-22"+42, which returns the date 42 days after November 22nd, 1999. Calculations involving localized dates as strings inside the formula return an error. For example, the localized date string "11/22/1999" or "22.11.1999" cannot be used for the automatic conversion. - Example - In A1 enter the text '1e2 (which is converted to the number 100 internally). - In A2 enter =A1+1 (which correctly results in 101). + The century code CC may not be omitted. Instead of the T date and time separator, exactly one space character may be used. + If a date is given, it must be a valid Gregorian calendar date. In this case the optional time must be in the range 00:00 to 23:59:59.99999... + If only a time string is given, it may have an hours value of more than 24, while minutes and seconds can have a maximum value of 59. + The conversion is done for single arguments only, as in =A1+A2, or ="1E2"+1. Cell range arguments are not affected, so SUM(A1:A2) differs from A1+A2 if at least one of the two cells contain a convertible string. + Strings inside formulas are also converted, such as in ="1999-11-22"+42, which returns the date 42 days after November 22nd, 1999. Calculations involving localized dates as strings inside the formula return an error. For example, the localized date string "11/22/1999" or "22.11.1999" cannot be used for the automatic conversion. + Example + In A1 enter the text '1e2 (which is converted to the number 100 internally). + In A2 enter =A1+1 (which correctly results in 101).
- Format - Cells - Numbers + Format - Cells - Numbers
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/print_details.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/print_details.xhp index c5645ec3ab..8b419dfc61 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/print_details.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/print_details.xhp @@ -43,46 +43,46 @@ null values; printing draw objects;printing mw inserted 4 index entries from text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp. Added "draw objects;..." entry and changed "formulas;..." entry -Printing Sheet Details +Printing Sheet Details -When printing a sheet you can select which details are to be printed: +When printing a sheet you can select which details are to be printed: -Row and column headers +Row and column headers -Sheet grid +Sheet grid -Comments +Comments -Objects and images +Objects and images -Charts +Charts -Drawing objects +Drawing objects -Formulas +Formulas -To choose the details proceed as follows: +To choose the details proceed as follows: -Select the sheet you want to print. +Select the sheet you want to print. -Choose Format - Page. -The command is not visible if the sheet was opened with write protection on. In that case, click the Edit File icon on the Standard Bar. +Choose Format - Page. +The command is not visible if the sheet was opened with write protection on. In that case, click the Edit File icon on the Standard Bar. -Select the Sheet tab. In the Print area mark the details to be printed and click OK. +Select the Sheet tab. In the Print area mark the details to be printed and click OK. -Print the document. +Print the document.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/print_exact.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/print_exact.xhp index 11ae1654a5..5e6715cd7f 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/print_exact.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/print_exact.xhp @@ -37,21 +37,21 @@ viewing;print ranges previews;page breaks for printing -Defining Number of Pages for Printing +Defining Number of Pages for Printing -If a sheet is too large for a single printed page, $[officename] Calc will print the current sheet evenly divided over several pages. Since the automatic page break does not always take place in the optimal position, you can define the page distribution yourself. +If a sheet is too large for a single printed page, $[officename] Calc will print the current sheet evenly divided over several pages. Since the automatic page break does not always take place in the optimal position, you can define the page distribution yourself. -Go to the sheet to be printed. +Go to the sheet to be printed. Choose View - Page Break. -You will see the automatic distribution of the sheet across the print pages. The automatically created print ranges are indicated by dark blue lines, and the user-defined ones by light blue lines. The page breaks (line breaks and column breaks) are marked as black lines. +You will see the automatic distribution of the sheet across the print pages. The automatically created print ranges are indicated by dark blue lines, and the user-defined ones by light blue lines. The page breaks (line breaks and column breaks) are marked as black lines. -You can move the blue lines with the mouse. You will find further options in the Context menu, including adding an additional print range, removing the scaling and inserting additional manual line and column breaks. +You can move the blue lines with the mouse. You will find further options in the Context menu, including adding an additional print range, removing the scaling and inserting additional manual line and column breaks.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/print_landscape.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/print_landscape.xhp index d20455917a..542e2d9dc7 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/print_landscape.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/print_landscape.xhp @@ -32,47 +32,47 @@ printing; landscape landscape printing mw corrected a typo in "printing; sheet..." -Printing Sheets in Landscape Format +Printing Sheets in Landscape Format In order to print a sheet you have a number of interactive options available under View - Page Break. Drag the delimiter lines to define the range of printed cells on each page. - To print in landscape format, proceed as follows: + To print in landscape format, proceed as follows: - Go to the sheet to be printed. + Go to the sheet to be printed. - Choose Format - Page. - The command is not visible if the sheet has been opened with write protection on. In that case, click the Edit File icon on the Standard bar. + Choose Format - Page. + The command is not visible if the sheet has been opened with write protection on. In that case, click the Edit File icon on the Standard bar. - Select the Page tab. Select the Landscape paper format and click OK. + Select the Page tab. Select the Landscape paper format and click OK. - Choose File - Print. You will see the Print dialog. - Depending on the printer driver and the operating system, it may be necessary to click the Properties button and to change your printer to landscape format there. + Choose File - Print. You will see the Print dialog. + Depending on the printer driver and the operating system, it may be necessary to click the Properties button and to change your printer to landscape format there. - In the Print dialog in the General tab page, select the contents to be printed: - + In the Print dialog in the General tab page, select the contents to be printed: + All sheets - All sheets will be printed. - + Selected sheets - Only the selected sheets will be printed. All sheets whose names (at the bottom on the sheet tabs) are selected will be printed. By pressing Command Ctrl while clicking a sheet name you can change this selection. - + Selected cells - All selected cells are printed. - From all the paper pages that result from the above selection, you can select the range of paper pages to be printed: - + From all the paper pages that result from the above selection, you can select the range of paper pages to be printed: + All pages - Print all resulting pages. - + Pages - Enter the pages to be printed. The pages will also be numbered from the first sheet onwards. If you see in the Page Break Preview that Sheet1 will be printed on 4 pages and you want to print the first two pages of Sheet2, enter 5-6 here. - If under Format - Print ranges you have defined one or more print ranges, only the contents of these print ranges will be printed. + If under Format - Print ranges you have defined one or more print ranges, only the contents of these print ranges will be printed.
View - Page Break - Defining Print Ranges on a Sheet + Defining Print Ranges on a Sheet
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/print_title_row.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/print_title_row.xhp index 8347dd7ac4..afb716eea2 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/print_title_row.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/print_title_row.xhp @@ -41,45 +41,45 @@ printing; rows/columns as table headings headings;repeating rows/columns as mw deleted one index entry ("fixed...") and added "headings;..." entry - -Printing Rows or Columns on Every Page + +Printing Rows or Columns on Every Page -If you have a sheet that is so large that it will be printed multiple pages, you can set up rows or columns to repeat on each printed page. -As an example, If you want to print the top two rows of the sheet as well as the first column (A) on all pages, do the following: +If you have a sheet that is so large that it will be printed multiple pages, you can set up rows or columns to repeat on each printed page. +As an example, If you want to print the top two rows of the sheet as well as the first column (A) on all pages, do the following: -Choose Format - Print Ranges - Edit. The Edit Print Ranges dialog appears. +Choose Format - Print Ranges - Edit. The Edit Print Ranges dialog appears. -Click the icon at the far right of the Rows to repeat area. -The dialog shrinks so that you can see more of the sheet. +Click the icon at the far right of the Rows to repeat area. +The dialog shrinks so that you can see more of the sheet. -Select the first two rows and, for this example, click cell A1 and drag to A2. -In the shrunk dialog you will see $1:$2. Rows 1 and 2 are now rows to repeat. +Select the first two rows and, for this example, click cell A1 and drag to A2. +In the shrunk dialog you will see $1:$2. Rows 1 and 2 are now rows to repeat. -Click the icon at the far right of the Rows to repeat area. The dialog is restored again. +Click the icon at the far right of the Rows to repeat area. The dialog is restored again. -If you also want column A as a column to repeat, click the icon at the far right of the Columns to repeat area. +If you also want column A as a column to repeat, click the icon at the far right of the Columns to repeat area. -Click column A (not in the column header). +Click column A (not in the column header). -Click the icon again at the far right of the Columns to repeat area. +Click the icon again at the far right of the Columns to repeat area. -Rows to repeat are rows from the sheet. You can define headers and footers to be printed on each print page independently of this in Format - Page. +Rows to repeat are rows from the sheet. You can define headers and footers to be printed on each print page independently of this in Format - Page.
- + -View - Page Break Preview +View - Page Break Preview -Format - Print ranges - Edit -Format - Page - (Header / Footer) +Format - Print ranges - Edit +Format - Page - (Header / Footer)
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/printranges.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/printranges.xhp index 371399e6ff..54211ba362 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/printranges.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/printranges.xhp @@ -46,59 +46,59 @@ mw deleted "adding;" and corrected two typos in "defining;" and "extending.." MW changed "clearing," - Defining Print Ranges on a Sheet + Defining Print Ranges on a Sheet - You can define which range of cells on a spreadsheet to print. - The cells on the sheet that are not part of the defined print range are not printed or exported. Sheets without a defined print range are not printed and not exported to a PDF file, unless the document uses the Excel file format. - For files opened in Excel format, all sheets that do not contain a defined print range are printed. The same behavior occurs when you export the Excel formatted spreadsheet to a PDF file.UFI: New, see spec "Calc Print Settings Sheet Property "Print Entire Sheet"" - To Define a Print Range + You can define which range of cells on a spreadsheet to print. + The cells on the sheet that are not part of the defined print range are not printed or exported. Sheets without a defined print range are not printed and not exported to a PDF file, unless the document uses the Excel file format. + For files opened in Excel format, all sheets that do not contain a defined print range are printed. The same behavior occurs when you export the Excel formatted spreadsheet to a PDF file.UFI: New, see spec "Calc Print Settings Sheet Property "Print Entire Sheet"" + To Define a Print Range - Select the cells that you want to print. + Select the cells that you want to print. - Choose Format - Print Ranges - Define. + Choose Format - Print Ranges - Define. - To Add Cells to a Print Range + To Add Cells to a Print Range - Select the cells that you want to add to the existing print range. + Select the cells that you want to add to the existing print range. - Choose Format - Print Ranges - Add. + Choose Format - Print Ranges - Add. - To Clear a Print Range + To Clear a Print Range - Choose Format - Print Ranges - Clear. + Choose Format - Print Ranges - Clear. - Using the Page Break Preview to Edit Print Ranges - In the Page Break Preview, print ranges as well as page break regions are outlined by a blue border and contain a centered page number in gray. Nonprinting areas have a gray background. - To define a new page break region, drag the border to a new location. When you define a new page break region, an automatic page break is replaced by a manual page break. - To View and Edit Print Ranges + Using the Page Break Preview to Edit Print Ranges + In the Page Break Preview, print ranges as well as page break regions are outlined by a blue border and contain a centered page number in gray. Nonprinting areas have a gray background. + To define a new page break region, drag the border to a new location. When you define a new page break region, an automatic page break is replaced by a manual page break. + To View and Edit Print Ranges - Choose View - Page Break Preview. - To change the default zoom factor of the Page Break Preview, double click the percentage value on the Status bar, and select a new zoom factor. + Choose View - Page Break Preview. + To change the default zoom factor of the Page Break Preview, double click the percentage value on the Status bar, and select a new zoom factor. - Edit the print range. - To change the size of a print range, drag a border of the range to a new location. - To delete a manual page break that is contained in a print range, drag the border of the page break outside of the print range. - To clear a print range, drag a border of the range onto the opposite border of the range. + Edit the print range. + To change the size of a print range, drag a border of the range to a new location. + To delete a manual page break that is contained in a print range, drag the border of the page break outside of the print range. + To clear a print range, drag a border of the range onto the opposite border of the range. - To exit the Page Break Preview, choose View - Normal. + To exit the Page Break Preview, choose View - Normal.
- Editing Print Ranges + Editing Print Ranges
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/relativ_absolut_ref.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/relativ_absolut_ref.xhp index 2b9a3822a0..d952248208 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/relativ_absolut_ref.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/relativ_absolut_ref.xhp @@ -39,20 +39,20 @@ references; to cells cells; references -Addresses and References, Absolute and Relative +Addresses and References, Absolute and Relative -Relative Addressing -The cell in column A, row 1 is addressed as A1. You can address a range of adjacent cells by first entering the coordinates of the upper left cell of the area, then a colon followed by the coordinates of the lower right cell. For example, the square formed by the first four cells in the upper left corner is addressed as A1:B2. -By addressing an area in this way, you are making a relative reference to A1:B2. Relative here means that the reference to this area will be adjusted automatically when you copy the formulas. -Absolute Addressing -Absolute references are the opposite of relative addressing. A dollar sign is placed before each letter and number in an absolute reference, for example, $A$1:$B$2. -$[officename] can convert the current reference, in which the cursor is positioned in the input line, from relative to absolute and vice versa by pressing Shift +F4. If you start with a relative address such as A1, the first time you press this key combination, both row and column are set to absolute references ($A$1). The second time, only the row (A$1), and the third time, only the column ($A1). If you press the key combination once more, both column and row references are switched back to relative (A1) -$[officename] Calc shows the references to a formula. If, for example you click the formula =SUM(A1:C5;D15:D24) in a cell, the two referenced areas in the sheet will be highlighted in color. For example, the formula component "A1:C5" may be in blue and the cell range in question bordered in the same shade of blue. The next formula component "D15:D24" can be marked in red in the same way. -When to Use Relative and Absolute References -What distinguishes a relative reference? Assume you want to calculate in cell E1 the sum of the cells in range A1:B2. The formula to enter into E1 would be: =SUM(A1:B2). If you later decide to insert a new column in front of column A, the elements you want to add would then be in B1:C2 and the formula would be in F1, not in E1. After inserting the new column, you would therefore have to check and correct all formulas in the sheet, and possibly in other sheets. -Fortunately, $[officename] does this work for you. After having inserted a new column A, the formula =SUM(A1:B2) will be automatically updated to =SUM(B1:C2). Row numbers will also be automatically adjusted when a new row 1 is inserted. Absolute and relative references are always adjusted in $[officename] Calc whenever the referenced area is moved. But be careful if you are copying a formula since in that case only the relative references will be adjusted, not the absolute references. -Absolute references are used when a calculation refers to one specific cell in your sheet. If a formula that refers to exactly this cell is copied relatively to a cell below the original cell, the reference will also be moved down if you did not define the cell coordinates as absolute. -Aside from when new rows and columns are inserted, references can also change when an existing formula referring to particular cells is copied to another area of the sheet. Assume you entered the formula =SUM(A1:A9) in row 10. If you want to calculate the sum for the adjacent column to the right, simply copy this formula to the cell to the right. The copy of the formula in column B will be automatically adjusted to =SUM(B1:B9). +Relative Addressing +The cell in column A, row 1 is addressed as A1. You can address a range of adjacent cells by first entering the coordinates of the upper left cell of the area, then a colon followed by the coordinates of the lower right cell. For example, the square formed by the first four cells in the upper left corner is addressed as A1:B2. +By addressing an area in this way, you are making a relative reference to A1:B2. Relative here means that the reference to this area will be adjusted automatically when you copy the formulas. +Absolute Addressing +Absolute references are the opposite of relative addressing. A dollar sign is placed before each letter and number in an absolute reference, for example, $A$1:$B$2. +$[officename] can convert the current reference, in which the cursor is positioned in the input line, from relative to absolute and vice versa by pressing Shift +F4. If you start with a relative address such as A1, the first time you press this key combination, both row and column are set to absolute references ($A$1). The second time, only the row (A$1), and the third time, only the column ($A1). If you press the key combination once more, both column and row references are switched back to relative (A1) +$[officename] Calc shows the references to a formula. If, for example you click the formula =SUM(A1:C5;D15:D24) in a cell, the two referenced areas in the sheet will be highlighted in color. For example, the formula component "A1:C5" may be in blue and the cell range in question bordered in the same shade of blue. The next formula component "D15:D24" can be marked in red in the same way. +When to Use Relative and Absolute References +What distinguishes a relative reference? Assume you want to calculate in cell E1 the sum of the cells in range A1:B2. The formula to enter into E1 would be: =SUM(A1:B2). If you later decide to insert a new column in front of column A, the elements you want to add would then be in B1:C2 and the formula would be in F1, not in E1. After inserting the new column, you would therefore have to check and correct all formulas in the sheet, and possibly in other sheets. +Fortunately, $[officename] does this work for you. After having inserted a new column A, the formula =SUM(A1:B2) will be automatically updated to =SUM(B1:C2). Row numbers will also be automatically adjusted when a new row 1 is inserted. Absolute and relative references are always adjusted in $[officename] Calc whenever the referenced area is moved. But be careful if you are copying a formula since in that case only the relative references will be adjusted, not the absolute references. +Absolute references are used when a calculation refers to one specific cell in your sheet. If a formula that refers to exactly this cell is copied relatively to a cell below the original cell, the reference will also be moved down if you did not define the cell coordinates as absolute. +Aside from when new rows and columns are inserted, references can also change when an existing formula referring to particular cells is copied to another area of the sheet. Assume you entered the formula =SUM(A1:A9) in row 10. If you want to calculate the sum for the adjacent column to the right, simply copy this formula to the cell to the right. The copy of the formula in column B will be automatically adjusted to =SUM(B1:B9).
mw changed link target from "address_byname" to "value_with_name"
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/rename_table.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/rename_table.xhp index 577048273c..3d47571650 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/rename_table.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/rename_table.xhp @@ -32,58 +32,57 @@ tables;renaming names; sheets mw made "renaming sheets" a two level entry. -Renaming Sheets +Renaming Sheets - Click the name of the sheet that you want to change. + Click the name of the sheet that you want to change. - Open the context menu and choose the Rename Sheet command. A dialog box appears where you can enter a new name. + Open the context menu and choose the Rename Sheet command. A dialog box appears where you can enter a new name. - Enter a new name for the sheet and click OK. + Enter a new name for the sheet and click OK. - Alternatively, hold down the Option key + Alternatively, hold down the Option key Alt key and click on any sheet name and enter the new name directly. - Sheet names can contain almost any character. Some naming restrictions apply when you want to save the spreadsheet to Microsoft Excel format. - When saving to Microsoft Excel format, the following characters are not allowed in sheet names: + Sheet names can contain almost any character. Some naming restrictions apply when you want to save the spreadsheet to Microsoft Excel format. + When saving to Microsoft Excel format, the following characters are not allowed in sheet names: - colon : + colon : - back slash \ + back slash \ - forward slash / + forward slash / - question mark ? + question mark ? - asterisk * + asterisk * - left square bracket [ + left square bracket [ - right square bracket ] + right square bracket ] - single quote ' as the first or last character of the name + single quote ' as the first or last character of the name - In cell references, a sheet name has to be enclosed in single quotes ' if the name contains other characters than alphanumeric or underscore. A single quote contained within a name has to be escaped by doubling it (two single quotes). For example, you want to reference the cell A1 on a sheet with the following name: - This year's sheet - The reference must be enclosed in single quotes, and the one single quote inside the name must be doubled: - 'This year''s sheet'.A1 - The name of a sheet is independent of the name of the spreadsheet. You enter the spreadsheet name when you save it for the first time as a file. The document can contain up to 256 individual sheets, which can have different names. + In cell references, a sheet name has to be enclosed in single quotes ' if the name contains other characters than alphanumeric or underscore. A single quote contained within a name has to be escaped by doubling it (two single quotes). For example, you want to reference the cell A1 on a sheet with the following name: + This year's sheet + The reference must be enclosed in single quotes, and the one single quote inside the name must be doubled: + 'This year''s sheet'.A1 + The name of a sheet is independent of the name of the spreadsheet. You enter the spreadsheet name when you save it for the first time as a file. The document can contain up to 256 individual sheets, which can have different names.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp index 731fc70d5c..b9ebc4ac7f 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp @@ -42,43 +42,43 @@ rounding precision spreadsheets; values as shown mw reduced "tables in spreadsheets;" to "tables;" - -Using Rounded Off Numbers + +Using Rounded Off Numbers -In $[officename] Calc, all decimal numbers are displayed rounded off to two decimal places. -To change this for selected cells +In $[officename] Calc, all decimal numbers are displayed rounded off to two decimal places. +To change this for selected cells -Mark all the cells you want to modify. +Mark all the cells you want to modify. -Choose Format - Cells and go to the Numbers tab page. +Choose Format - Cells and go to the Numbers tab page. -In the Category field, select Number. Under Options, change the number of Decimal places and exit the dialog with OK. +In the Category field, select Number. Under Options, change the number of Decimal places and exit the dialog with OK. -To change this everywhere +To change this everywhere -Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc. -Go to the Calculate page. Modify the number of Decimal places and exit the dialog with OK. +Go to the Calculate page. Modify the number of Decimal places and exit the dialog with OK. -To calculate with the rounded off numbers instead of the internal exact values +To calculate with the rounded off numbers instead of the internal exact values -Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc. -Go to the Calculate page. Mark the Precision as shown field and exit the dialog with OK. +Go to the Calculate page. Mark the Precision as shown field and exit the dialog with OK.
-Numbers -Calculate +Numbers +Calculate
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/row_height.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/row_height.xhp index 8a0890cc6f..0275f52dcf 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/row_height.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/row_height.xhp @@ -40,34 +40,34 @@ columns; widths changing;row heights/column widths -Changing Row Height or Column Width +Changing Row Height or Column Width -You can change the height of the rows with the mouse or through the dialog. -What is described here for rows and row height applies accordingly for columns and column width. -Using the mouse to change the row height or column width +You can change the height of the rows with the mouse or through the dialog. +What is described here for rows and row height applies accordingly for columns and column width. +Using the mouse to change the row height or column width -Click the area of the headers on the separator below the current row, keep the mouse button pressed and drag up or down in order to change the row height. +Click the area of the headers on the separator below the current row, keep the mouse button pressed and drag up or down in order to change the row height. -Select the optimal row height by double-clicking the separator below the row. +Select the optimal row height by double-clicking the separator below the row. -Using the dialog to change the row height or column width +Using the dialog to change the row height or column width -Click the row so that you achieve the focus. +Click the row so that you achieve the focus. -Start the context menu on the header at the left-hand side. -You will see the commands Row Height and Optimal row height. Choosing either opens a dialog. +Start the context menu on the header at the left-hand side. +You will see the commands Row Height and Optimal row height. Choosing either opens a dialog.
-Row height -Optimal row height -Column width -Optimal column width +Row height +Optimal row height +Column width +Optimal column width
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/scenario.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/scenario.xhp index 6255959389..a6cdd29792 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/scenario.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/scenario.xhp @@ -32,53 +32,53 @@ scenarios; creating/editing/deleting opening;scenarios selecting;scenarios in Navigator -UFI: removed "sample" from index term: no sample in OOoMW changed "scenarios;"Using Scenarios +UFI: removed "sample" from index term: no sample in OOoMW changed "scenarios;"Using Scenarios -A $[officename] Calc scenario is a set of cell values that can be used within your calculations. You assign a name to every scenario on your sheet. Define several scenarios on the same sheet, each with some different values in the cells. Then you can easily switch the sets of cell values by their name and immediately observe the results. Scenarios are a tool to test out "what-if" questions. -Creating Your Own Scenarios -To create a scenario, select all the cells that provide the data for the scenario. +A $[officename] Calc scenario is a set of cell values that can be used within your calculations. You assign a name to every scenario on your sheet. Define several scenarios on the same sheet, each with some different values in the cells. Then you can easily switch the sets of cell values by their name and immediately observe the results. Scenarios are a tool to test out "what-if" questions. +Creating Your Own Scenarios +To create a scenario, select all the cells that provide the data for the scenario. -Select the cells that contain the values that will change between scenarios. To select multiple cells, hold down the CommandCtrl key as you click each cell. +Select the cells that contain the values that will change between scenarios. To select multiple cells, hold down the CommandCtrl key as you click each cell. -Choose Tools - Scenarios. The Create Scenario dialog appears. +Choose Tools - Scenarios. The Create Scenario dialog appears. -Enter a name for the new scenario and leave the other fields unchanged with their default values. Close the dialog with OK. Your new scenario is automatically activated. +Enter a name for the new scenario and leave the other fields unchanged with their default values. Close the dialog with OK. Your new scenario is automatically activated. -Using Scenariosremoved "commercial" switched contentsScenarios can be selected in the Navigator: +Using Scenariosremoved "commercial" switched contentsScenarios can be selected in the Navigator: -Open the Navigator with the Navigator icon +Open the Navigator with the Navigator icon Navigator icon on the Standard bar. -Click the Scenarios icon +Click the Scenarios icon Scenarios icon in the Navigator. -In the Navigator, you see the defined scenarios with the comments that were entered when the scenarios were created. +In the Navigator, you see the defined scenarios with the comments that were entered when the scenarios were created. -Double-click a scenario name in the Navigator to apply that scenario to the current sheet. +Double-click a scenario name in the Navigator to apply that scenario to the current sheet. -To delete a scenario, right-click the name in the Navigator and choose Delete. +To delete a scenario, right-click the name in the Navigator and choose Delete. -To edit a scenario, right-click the name in the Navigator and choose Properties. +To edit a scenario, right-click the name in the Navigator and choose Properties. -To hide the border of a set of cells that are part of a scenario, open the Properties dialog for each scenario that affects the cells and clear the Display border checkbox. Hiding the border also removes the listbox on the sheet where you can choose the scenarios. +To hide the border of a set of cells that are part of a scenario, open the Properties dialog for each scenario that affects the cells and clear the Display border checkbox. Hiding the border also removes the listbox on the sheet where you can choose the scenarios. -If you want to know which values in the scenario affect other values, choose Tools - Detective - Trace Dependents. You see arrows to the cells that are directly dependent on the current cell. +If you want to know which values in the scenario affect other values, choose Tools - Detective - Trace Dependents. You see arrows to the cells that are directly dependent on the current cell.
-Creating Scenarios +Creating Scenarios
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/sorted_list.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/sorted_list.xhp index df455f3ad4..26a27df953 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/sorted_list.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/sorted_list.xhp @@ -42,16 +42,16 @@ customized lists mw deleted "applying;" - Applying Sort Lists + Applying Sort Lists - Sort lists allow you to type one piece of information in a cell, then drag it to fill in a consecutive list of items. - For example, enter the text "Jan" or "January" in an empty cell. Select the cell and click the mouse on the lower right corner of the cell border. Then drag the selected cell a few cells to the right or downwards. When you release the mouse button, the highlighted cells will be filled with the names of the months. - Hold down CommandCtrl if you do not want to fill the cells with different values. - The predefined series can be found under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. You can also create your own lists of text strings tailored to your needs, such as a list of your company's branch offices. When you use the information in these lists later (for example, as headings), just enter the first name in the list and expand the entry by dragging it with your mouse. + Sort lists allow you to type one piece of information in a cell, then drag it to fill in a consecutive list of items. + For example, enter the text "Jan" or "January" in an empty cell. Select the cell and click the mouse on the lower right corner of the cell border. Then drag the selected cell a few cells to the right or downwards. When you release the mouse button, the highlighted cells will be filled with the names of the months. + Hold down CommandCtrl if you do not want to fill the cells with different values. + The predefined series can be found under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. You can also create your own lists of text strings tailored to your needs, such as a list of your company's branch offices. When you use the information in these lists later (for example, as headings), just enter the first name in the list and expand the entry by dragging it with your mouse.
- Sort lists + Sort lists
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/specialfilter.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/specialfilter.xhp index b3b1fe1873..e4ad7a9fb1 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/specialfilter.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/specialfilter.xhp @@ -38,21 +38,21 @@ database ranges; advanced filters MW made "applying;advanced filters" a one level entry - Filter: Applying Advanced Filters + Filter: Applying Advanced Filters - Copy the column headers of the sheet ranges to be filtered into an empty area of the sheet, and then enter the criteria for the filter in a row beneath the headers. Horizontally arranged data in a row will always be logically connected with AND, and vertically arranged data in a column will always be logically connected with OR. + Copy the column headers of the sheet ranges to be filtered into an empty area of the sheet, and then enter the criteria for the filter in a row beneath the headers. Horizontally arranged data in a row will always be logically connected with AND, and vertically arranged data in a column will always be logically connected with OR. - Once you have created a filter matrix, select the sheet ranges to be filtered. Open the Advanced Filter dialog by choosing Data - Filter - Advanced Filter, and define the filter conditions. + Once you have created a filter matrix, select the sheet ranges to be filtered. Open the Advanced Filter dialog by choosing Data - Filter - Advanced Filter, and define the filter conditions. - Then click OK, and you will see that only the rows from the original sheet whose contents have met the search criteria are still visible. All other rows are temporarily hidden and can be made to reappear with the Format - Row - Show command. + Then click OK, and you will see that only the rows from the original sheet whose contents have met the search criteria are still visible. All other rows are temporarily hidden and can be made to reappear with the Format - Row - Show command. - Example - Load a spreadsheet with a large number of records. We are using a fictional Turnover document, but you can just as easily use any other document. The document has the following layout: + Example + Load a spreadsheet with a large number of records. We are using a fictional Turnover document, but you can just as easily use any other document. The document has the following layout: @@ -61,90 +61,90 @@ - A + A - B + B - C + C - D + D - E + E - 1 + 1 - Month + Month - Standard + Standard - Business + Business - Luxury + Luxury - Suite + Suite - 2 + 2 - January + January - 125600 + 125600 - 200500 + 200500 - 240000 + 240000 - 170000 + 170000 - 3 + 3 - February + February - 160000 + 160000 - 180300 + 180300 - 362000 + 362000 - 220000 + 220000 - 4 + 4 - March + March - 170000 + 170000 @@ -153,11 +153,11 @@ - and so on... + and so on...
- Copy row 1 with the row headers (field names), to row 20, for example. Enter the filter conditions linked with OR in rows 21, 22, and so on. + Copy row 1 with the row headers (field names), to row 20, for example. Enter the filter conditions linked with OR in rows 21, 22, and so on. @@ -166,47 +166,47 @@ - A + A - B + B - C + C - D + D - E + E - 20 + 20 - Month + Month - Standard + Standard - Business + Business - Luxury + Luxury - Suite + Suite - 21 + 21 - January + January @@ -223,13 +223,13 @@ - 22 + 22 - <160000 + <160000 @@ -242,8 +242,8 @@
- Specify that only rows which either have the value January in the Month cells OR a value of under 160000 in the Standardstandard not default, look at U59!!! cells will be displayed. - Choose Data - Filter - Advanced Filter, and then select the range A20:E22. After you click OK, only the filtered rows will be displayed. The other rows will be hidden from view. + Specify that only rows which either have the value January in the Month cells OR a value of under 160000 in the Standardstandard not default, look at U59!!! cells will be displayed. + Choose Data - Filter - Advanced Filter, and then select the range A20:E22. After you click OK, only the filtered rows will be displayed. The other rows will be hidden from view.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/super_subscript.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/super_subscript.xhp index 42cf74e8b1..d700476394 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/super_subscript.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/super_subscript.xhp @@ -35,25 +35,25 @@ cells; text super/sub characters;superscript/subscript -Text Superscript / Subscript +Text Superscript / Subscript -In the cell, select the character that you want to put in superscript or subscript. -If, for example, you want to write H20 with a subscript 2, select the 2 in the cell (not in the input line). +In the cell, select the character that you want to put in superscript or subscript. +If, for example, you want to write H20 with a subscript 2, select the 2 in the cell (not in the input line). -Open the context menu for the selected character and choose Character. You will see the Character dialog. +Open the context menu for the selected character and choose Character. You will see the Character dialog. -Click the Font Position tab. +Click the Font Position tab. -Select the Subscript option and click OK. +Select the Subscript option and click OK.
-Context menu - Character - Font Position +Context menu - Character - Font Position
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp index 2b38d3249a..3abdea93a3 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp @@ -34,26 +34,26 @@ splitting cells merging;cells -Merging and Unmerging Cells +Merging and Unmerging Cells - You can select adjacent cells, then merge them into a single cell. Conversely, you can take a large cell that has been created by merging single cells, and divide it back into individual cells. - When you copy cells into a target range containing merged cells, the target range gets unmerged first, then the copied cells are pasted in. If the copied cells are merged cells, they retain their merge state. - Merging Cells + You can select adjacent cells, then merge them into a single cell. Conversely, you can take a large cell that has been created by merging single cells, and divide it back into individual cells. + When you copy cells into a target range containing merged cells, the target range gets unmerged first, then the copied cells are pasted in. If the copied cells are merged cells, they retain their merge state. + Merging Cells - Select the adjacent cells. + Select the adjacent cells. - Choose Format - Merge Cells - Merge Cells. If you choose Format - Merge Cells - Merge and Center Cells, the cell content will be centered in the merged cell. + Choose Format - Merge Cells - Merge Cells. If you choose Format - Merge Cells - Merge and Center Cells, the cell content will be centered in the merged cell. - Splitting Cells + Splitting Cells - Place the cursor in the cell to be split. + Place the cursor in the cell to be split. - Choose Format - Merge Cells - Split Cells. + Choose Format - Merge Cells - Split Cells. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/table_rotate.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/table_rotate.xhp index 34dadbf795..2593105f7d 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/table_rotate.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/table_rotate.xhp @@ -39,29 +39,29 @@ tables; rotating rotating; tables -Rotating Tables (Transposing) +Rotating Tables (Transposing) -In $[officename] Calc, there is a way to "rotate" a spreadsheet so that rows become columns and columns become rows. +In $[officename] Calc, there is a way to "rotate" a spreadsheet so that rows become columns and columns become rows. -Select the cell range that you want to transpose. +Select the cell range that you want to transpose. -Choose Edit - Cut. +Choose Edit - Cut. -Click the cell that is to be the top left cell in the result. +Click the cell that is to be the top left cell in the result. -Choose Edit - Paste Special. +Choose Edit - Paste Special. -In the dialog, mark Paste all and Transpose. -If you now click OK the columns and rows are transposed. +In the dialog, mark Paste all and Transpose. +If you now click OK the columns and rows are transposed.
-Paste Special +Paste Special
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/table_view.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/table_view.xhp index b73f297b6d..b36cee5f5a 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/table_view.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/table_view.xhp @@ -38,15 +38,15 @@ hiding;headers/grid lines changing;table views -Changing Table Views +Changing Table Views -To hide column and line headers in a table: +To hide column and line headers in a table: -Under the menu item %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc, go to the View tab page. Unmark Column/row headers. Confirm with OK. +Under the menu item %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc, go to the View tab page. Unmark Column/row headers. Confirm with OK. -To hide grid lines: +To hide grid lines: Under the menu item %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc, go to the View tab page. Choose Hide in the Grid lines dropdown. Confirm with OK. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp index d28d6f2e95..aaeb908c2c 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp @@ -33,18 +33,17 @@ cell formats; text/numbers formatting;numbers as text mw deleted "numbers; entering without..." and changed "numbers;as text" -Formatting Numbers as Text +Formatting Numbers as Text
- You can format numbers as text in $[officename] Calc. Open the context menu of a cell or range of cells and choose Format Cells - Numbers, then select "Text" from the Category list. Any numbers subsequently entered into the formatted range are interpreted as text. The display of these "numbers" is left-justified, just as with other text. - If you have already entered normal numbers in cells and have afterwards changed the format of the cells to "Text", the numbers will remain normal numbers. They will not be converted. Only numbers entered afterwards, or numbers which are then edited, will become text numbers. - If you decide to enter a number directly as text, enter an apostrophe (') first. For example, for years in column headings, you can enter '1999, '2000 and '2001. The apostrophe is not visible in the cell, it only indicates that the entry is to be recognized as a text. This is useful if, for example, you enter a telephone number or postal code that begins with a zero (0), because a zero (0) at the start of a sequence of digits is removed in normal number formats. + You can format numbers as text in $[officename] Calc. Open the context menu of a cell or range of cells and choose Format Cells - Numbers, then select "Text" from the Category list. Any numbers subsequently entered into the formatted range are interpreted as text. The display of these "numbers" is left-justified, just as with other text. + If you have already entered normal numbers in cells and have afterwards changed the format of the cells to "Text", the numbers will remain normal numbers. They will not be converted. Only numbers entered afterwards, or numbers which are then edited, will become text numbers. + If you decide to enter a number directly as text, enter an apostrophe (') first. For example, for years in column headings, you can enter '1999, '2000 and '2001. The apostrophe is not visible in the cell, it only indicates that the entry is to be recognized as a text. This is useful if, for example, you enter a telephone number or postal code that begins with a zero (0), because a zero (0) at the start of a sequence of digits is removed in normal number formats.
- Format - Cells - Numbers + Format - Cells - Numbers
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/text_rotate.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/text_rotate.xhp index 107835bdf8..2c8b1bbaa2 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/text_rotate.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/text_rotate.xhp @@ -31,25 +31,25 @@ rotating; text in cells text in cells; writing vertically -Rotating Text +Rotating Text - Select the cells whose text you want to rotate. + Select the cells whose text you want to rotate. - Choose Format - Cells. You will see the Format Cells dialog. + Choose Format - Cells. You will see the Format Cells dialog. - Click the Alignment tab. + Click the Alignment tab. - In the Text orientation area use the mouse to select in the preview wheel the direction in which the text is to be rotated. Click OK. + In the Text orientation area use the mouse to select in the preview wheel the direction in which the text is to be rotated. Click OK. removed a wrong para, i104207
- Format - Cells - Format - Cells - Alignment + Format - Cells + Format - Cells - Alignment
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/text_wrap.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/text_wrap.xhp index 440bd8db93..10569c4f64 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/text_wrap.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/text_wrap.xhp @@ -33,26 +33,26 @@ breaks in cells multi-line text in cells -Writing Multi-line Text +Writing Multi-line Text
-Pressing the CommandCtrl+Enter keys inserts a manual line break. This shortcut works directly in the cell or in the input line. The input line can be expanded to the multi-line by the Down arrow button on the right. +Pressing the CommandCtrl+Enter keys inserts a manual line break. This shortcut works directly in the cell or in the input line. The input line can be expanded to the multi-line by the Down arrow button on the right. -If you want the text to automatically break at the right border of the cell, proceed as follows: +If you want the text to automatically break at the right border of the cell, proceed as follows: -Select all the cells where you want the text to break at the right border. +Select all the cells where you want the text to break at the right border. -In Format - Cells - Alignment, mark the Wrap text automatically option and click OK. +In Format - Cells - Alignment, mark the Wrap text automatically option and click OK.
-Format - Cell +Format - Cell
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/userdefined_function.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/userdefined_function.xhp index 9d2a72d681..6edae964a5 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/userdefined_function.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/userdefined_function.xhp @@ -36,72 +36,72 @@ IDE; Basic IDE programming;functions -User-Defined Functions +User-Defined Functions -You can apply user-defined functions in $[officename] Calc in the following ways: +You can apply user-defined functions in $[officename] Calc in the following ways: -You can define your own functions using the Basic-IDE. This method requires a basic knowledge of programming. +You can define your own functions using the Basic-IDE. This method requires a basic knowledge of programming. -You can program functions as add-ins. This method requires an advanced knowledge of programming. +You can program functions as add-ins. This method requires an advanced knowledge of programming. -Defining A Function Using %PRODUCTNAME Basic +Defining A Function Using %PRODUCTNAME Basic -Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic. +Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic. -Click the Edit button. You will now see the Basic IDE. +Click the Edit button. You will now see the Basic IDE. -Enter the function code. In this example, we define a VOL(a; b; c) function that calculates the volume of a rectangular solid with side lengths a, b and c: -Function VOL(a, b, c)
VOL = a*b*c
End Function +Enter the function code. In this example, we define a VOL(a; b; c) function that calculates the volume of a rectangular solid with side lengths a, b and c: +Function VOL(a, b, c)
VOL = a*b*c
End Function -Close the Basic-IDE window. -Your function is automatically saved in the default module and is now available. If you apply the function in a Calc document that is to be used on another computer, you can copy the function to the Calc document as described in the next section. +Close the Basic-IDE window. +Your function is automatically saved in the default module and is now available. If you apply the function in a Calc document that is to be used on another computer, you can copy the function to the Calc document as described in the next section. -Copying a Function To a Document -In stage 2 of "Defining A Function Using %PRODUCTNAME Basic", in the Macro dialog you clicked on Edit . As the default, in the Macro from field the My Macros - Standard - Module1 module is selected. The Standard library resides locally in your user directory. -If you want to copy the user-defined function to a Calc document: +Copying a Function To a Document +In stage 2 of "Defining A Function Using %PRODUCTNAME Basic", in the Macro dialog you clicked on Edit . As the default, in the Macro from field the My Macros - Standard - Module1 module is selected. The Standard library resides locally in your user directory. +If you want to copy the user-defined function to a Calc document: -Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic . +Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic . -In the Macro from field select My Macros - Standard - Module1 and click Edit. +In the Macro from field select My Macros - Standard - Module1 and click Edit. -In the Basic-IDE, select the source of your user-defined function and copy it to the clipboard. +In the Basic-IDE, select the source of your user-defined function and copy it to the clipboard. -Close the Basic-IDE. +Close the Basic-IDE. -Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic . +Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic . -In the Macro from field select (Name of the Calc document) - Standard - Module1. Click Edit. +In the Macro from field select (Name of the Calc document) - Standard - Module1. Click Edit. -Paste the clipboard contents in the Basic-IDE of the document. +Paste the clipboard contents in the Basic-IDE of the document. -Applying a User-defined Function in $[officename] Calc -Once you have defined the function VOL(a; b; c) in the Basic-IDE, you can apply it the same way as the built-in functions of $[officename] Calc. +Applying a User-defined Function in $[officename] Calc +Once you have defined the function VOL(a; b; c) in the Basic-IDE, you can apply it the same way as the built-in functions of $[officename] Calc. -Open a Calc document and enter numbers for the function parameters a, b, and c in cells A1, B1, and C1. +Open a Calc document and enter numbers for the function parameters a, b, and c in cells A1, B1, and C1. -Set the cursor in another cell and enter the following: -=VOL(A1;B1;C1) +Set the cursor in another cell and enter the following: +=VOL(A1;B1;C1) -The function is evaluated and you will see the result in the selected cell. +The function is evaluated and you will see the result in the selected cell.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/validity.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/validity.xhp index 0fb3ddf915..979086778c 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/validity.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/validity.xhp @@ -45,50 +45,50 @@ macros; running when incorrect input data; validity check mw changed "limit...;" -Validity of Cell Contents +Validity of Cell Contents -For each cell, you can define entries to be valid. Invalid entries to a cell will be rejected. -The validity rule is activated when a new value is entered. If an invalid value has already been inserted into the cell, or if you insert a value in the cell either with drag-and-drop or by copying and pasting, the validity rule will not take effect. -You can choose Tools - Detective at any time and choose the command Mark Invalid Data to display which cells contain invalid values. -Using Cell Contents Validity +For each cell, you can define entries to be valid. Invalid entries to a cell will be rejected. +The validity rule is activated when a new value is entered. If an invalid value has already been inserted into the cell, or if you insert a value in the cell either with drag-and-drop or by copying and pasting, the validity rule will not take effect. +You can choose Tools - Detective at any time and choose the command Mark Invalid Data to display which cells contain invalid values. +Using Cell Contents Validity -Select the cells for which you want to define a new validity rule. +Select the cells for which you want to define a new validity rule. -Choose Data - Validity. +Choose Data - Validity. -On the Criteria tab page, enter the conditions for new values entered into cells. +On the Criteria tab page, enter the conditions for new values entered into cells. -In the Allow field, select an option. +In the Allow field, select an option. -If you select "Whole Numbers", values such as "12.5" are not allowed. Choosing "Date" allows date information both in the local date format as well as in the form of a serial date. Similarly, the "Time" condition permits time values such as "12:00" or serial time numbers. "Text Length" stipulates that cells are allowed to contain text only. -Select "List" to enter a list of valid entries. +If you select "Whole Numbers", values such as "12.5" are not allowed. Choosing "Date" allows date information both in the local date format as well as in the form of a serial date. Similarly, the "Time" condition permits time values such as "12:00" or serial time numbers. "Text Length" stipulates that cells are allowed to contain text only. +Select "List" to enter a list of valid entries. -Select the next condition under Data. According to what you choose, additional options will be selectable. +Select the next condition under Data. According to what you choose, additional options will be selectable. -After you have determined the conditions for cell validity, you can use the other two tab pages to create message boxes: +After you have determined the conditions for cell validity, you can use the other two tab pages to create message boxes: -On the Input Help tab page, enter the title and the text of the tip, which will then be displayed if the cell is selected. +On the Input Help tab page, enter the title and the text of the tip, which will then be displayed if the cell is selected. -On the Error Alert tab page, select the action to be carried out in the event of an error. -If you select "Stop" as the action, invalid entries are not accepted, and the previous cell contents are retained. -Select "Warning" or "Information" to display a dialog in which the entry can either be canceled or accepted. -If you select "Macro", then by using the Browse button you can specify a macro to be run in the event of an error. +On the Error Alert tab page, select the action to be carried out in the event of an error. +If you select "Stop" as the action, invalid entries are not accepted, and the previous cell contents are retained. +Select "Warning" or "Information" to display a dialog in which the entry can either be canceled or accepted. +If you select "Macro", then by using the Browse button you can specify a macro to be run in the event of an error. -To display the error message, select Show error message when invalid values are entered. +To display the error message, select Show error message when invalid values are entered. -After changing the action for a cell on the Error Alert tab page and closing the dialog with OK, you must first select another cell before the change takes effect. +After changing the action for a cell on the Error Alert tab page and closing the dialog with OK, you must first select another cell before the change takes effect.
-Data - Validity +Data - Validity
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/value_with_name.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/value_with_name.xhp index 4a340e4e00..ac210a8470 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/value_with_name.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/value_with_name.xhp @@ -41,49 +41,49 @@ allowed cell names renaming;cells mw changed "names;...", "addressing;..." and "references,..." entries.mw added "renaming;" -Naming Cells +Naming Cells - Allowed names - Names in Calc can contain letters, numeric characters, and some special characters. Names must start with a letter or an underline character. - Allowed special characters: + Allowed names + Names in Calc can contain letters, numeric characters, and some special characters. Names must start with a letter or an underline character. + Allowed special characters: - underline (_) + underline (_) - period (.) - allowed within a name, but not as first or last character + period (.) - allowed within a name, but not as first or last character - blank ( ) - allowed within a name, but not as first or last character, and not for a cell range + blank ( ) - allowed within a name, but not as first or last character, and not for a cell range - Names must not be the same as cell references. For example, the name A1 is invalid because A1 is a cell reference to the top left cell. - Names must not start with the letter R followed by a number. See the ADDRESS function for more information. - Names for cell ranges must not include blanks. Blanks are allowed within names for single cells, sheets and documents. - Naming cells and formulas - A good way of making the references to cells and cell ranges in formulas legible is to give the ranges names. For example, you can name the range A1:B2 Start. You can then write a formula such as "=SUM(Start)". Even after you insert or delete rows or columns, $[officename] still correctly assigns the ranges identified by name. Range names must not contain any spaces. - For example, it is much easier to read a formula for sales tax if you can write "= Amount * Tax_rate" instead of "= A5 * B12". In this case, you would name cell A5 "Amount" and cell B12 "Tax_rate." - Use the Define Names dialog to define names for formulas or parts of formulas you need more often. In order to specify range names, + Names must not be the same as cell references. For example, the name A1 is invalid because A1 is a cell reference to the top left cell. + Names must not start with the letter R followed by a number. See the ADDRESS function for more information. + Names for cell ranges must not include blanks. Blanks are allowed within names for single cells, sheets and documents. + Naming cells and formulas + A good way of making the references to cells and cell ranges in formulas legible is to give the ranges names. For example, you can name the range A1:B2 Start. You can then write a formula such as "=SUM(Start)". Even after you insert or delete rows or columns, $[officename] still correctly assigns the ranges identified by name. Range names must not contain any spaces. + For example, it is much easier to read a formula for sales tax if you can write "= Amount * Tax_rate" instead of "= A5 * B12". In this case, you would name cell A5 "Amount" and cell B12 "Tax_rate." + Use the Define Names dialog to define names for formulas or parts of formulas you need more often. In order to specify range names, - Select a cell or range of cells, then choose Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Define. The Define Names dialog appears. + Select a cell or range of cells, then choose Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Define. The Define Names dialog appears. - Type the name of the selected area in the Name field. Click Add. The newly defined name appears in the list below. Click OK to close the dialog. + Type the name of the selected area in the Name field. Click Add. The newly defined name appears in the list below. Click OK to close the dialog. - You can also name other cell ranges in this dialog by entering the name in the field and then selecting the respective cells. - If you type the name in a formula, after the first few characters entered you will see the entire name as a tip. + You can also name other cell ranges in this dialog by entering the name in the field and then selecting the respective cells. + If you type the name in a formula, after the first few characters entered you will see the entire name as a tip. - Press the Enter key in order to accept the name from the tip. + Press the Enter key in order to accept the name from the tip. - If more than one name starts with the same characters, you can scroll through all the names using the Tab key.mw copied contents from Calc guide address_byname.xhp + If more than one name starts with the same characters, you can scroll through all the names using the Tab key.mw copied contents from Calc guide address_byname.xhp
- Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Define + Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Define mw deleted one EMBED paragraph and copied two EMBED paragraphs from Calc guide address_byname.xhp diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/webquery.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/webquery.xhp index b9b036c308..9b729728d5 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/webquery.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/webquery.xhp @@ -37,70 +37,70 @@ WebQuery filter inserting; external data data sources; external data -UFI: removed "external data;WebQuery" because both index entries "external data" led to this page. -Inserting External Data in Table (WebQuery) +UFI: removed "external data;WebQuery" because both index entries "external data" led to this page. +Inserting External Data in Table (WebQuery) -With the help of the Web Page Query ($[officename] Calc) import filter, you can insert tables from HTML documents in a Calc spreadsheet. -You can use the same method to insert ranges defined by name from a Calc or Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. -The following insert methods are available: -Inserting by Dialog +With the help of the Web Page Query ($[officename] Calc) import filter, you can insert tables from HTML documents in a Calc spreadsheet. +You can use the same method to insert ranges defined by name from a Calc or Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. +The following insert methods are available: +Inserting by Dialog -Set the cell cursor at the cell where the new content will be inserted. +Set the cell cursor at the cell where the new content will be inserted. -Choose Sheet - Link to External Data. This opens the External Data dialog. +Choose Sheet - Link to External Data. This opens the External Data dialog. Enter the URL of the HTML document or the name of the spreadsheet. Press Enter when finished. Click the Browse button to open a file selection dialog.only after Enter the URL will be requested from the net. -In the large list box of the dialog, select the named ranges or tables you want to insert. +In the large list box of the dialog, select the named ranges or tables you want to insert. -You can also specify that the ranges or tables are updated every n seconds. +You can also specify that the ranges or tables are updated every n seconds. -The import filter can create names for cell ranges on the fly. As much formatting as possible is retained, while the filter intentionally does not load any images. -Inserting by Navigator +The import filter can create names for cell ranges on the fly. As much formatting as possible is retained, while the filter intentionally does not load any images. +Inserting by Navigator -Open two documents: the $[officename] Calc spreadsheet in which the external data is to be inserted (target document) and the document from which the external data derives (source document). +Open two documents: the $[officename] Calc spreadsheet in which the external data is to be inserted (target document) and the document from which the external data derives (source document). -In the target document open the Navigator. +In the target document open the Navigator. -In the lower combo box of the Navigator select the source document. The Navigator now shows the range names and database ranges or the tables contained in the source document. +In the lower combo box of the Navigator select the source document. The Navigator now shows the range names and database ranges or the tables contained in the source document. -In the Navigator select the Insert as link drag mode +In the Navigator select the Insert as link drag mode Icon . -Drag the desired external data from the Navigator into the target document. +Drag the desired external data from the Navigator into the target document. -If you have loaded an HTML document with the Web Page Query filter as the source document, you will find the tables in the Navigator, named continuously from "HTML_table1" onwards, and also two range names that have been created: +If you have loaded an HTML document with the Web Page Query filter as the source document, you will find the tables in the Navigator, named continuously from "HTML_table1" onwards, and also two range names that have been created: - + HTML_all - designates the entire document - + HTML_tables - designates all HTML tables in the document -Editing the external data +Editing the external data -Open Edit - Links. Here you can edit the link to the external data. +Open Edit - Links. Here you can edit the link to the external data.
-External data dialog +External data dialog
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/year2000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/year2000.xhp index 99e9fe4e4f..8ff336c552 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/year2000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/year2000.xhp @@ -33,16 +33,16 @@ years; 2-digits dates; 19xx/20xx -19xx/20xx Years +19xx/20xx Years
-The year in a date entry is often entered as two digits. Internally, the year is managed by $[officename] as four digits, so that in the calculation of the difference from 1/1/99 to 1/1/01, the result will correctly be two years. +The year in a date entry is often entered as two digits. Internally, the year is managed by $[officename] as four digits, so that in the calculation of the difference from 1/1/99 to 1/1/01, the result will correctly be two years. -Under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - General you can define the century that is used when you enter a year with only two digits. The default is 1930 to 2029. +Under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - General you can define the century that is used when you enter a year with only two digits. The default is 1930 to 2029. -This means that if you enter a date of 1/1/30 or higher, it will be treated internally as 1/1/1930 or higher. All lower two-digit years apply to the 20xx century. So, for example, 1/1/20 is converted into 1/1/2020. +This means that if you enter a date of 1/1/30 or higher, it will be treated internally as 1/1/1930 or higher. All lower two-digit years apply to the 20xx century. So, for example, 1/1/20 is converted into 1/1/2020.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/main0000.xhp b/source/text/scalc/main0000.xhp index 262e90090d..eda9ccda3f 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/main0000.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/main0000.xhp @@ -30,17 +30,17 @@ -Welcome to the $[officename] Calc Help -How to Work With $[officename] Calc +Welcome to the $[officename] Calc Help +How to Work With $[officename] Calc -List of Functions by Category +List of Functions by Category -$[officename] Calc Menus, Toolbars, and Keys +$[officename] Calc Menus, Toolbars, and Keys -Help about the Help +Help about the Help diff --git a/source/text/scalc/main0100.xhp b/source/text/scalc/main0100.xhp index 5bc2cf20f8..89b4718999 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/main0100.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/main0100.xhp @@ -31,9 +31,9 @@ diff --git a/source/text/scalc/main0112.xhp b/source/text/scalc/main0112.xhp index c19c02c02d..37a6a54b85 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/main0112.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/main0112.xhp @@ -30,29 +30,29 @@
-Data -Use the Data menu commands to edit the data in the current sheet. You can define ranges, sort and filter the data, calculate results, outline data, and create a pivot table. +Data +Use the Data menu commands to edit the data in the current sheet. You can define ranges, sort and filter the data, calculate results, outline data, and create a pivot table.
-Define Range +Define Range -Select Range +Select Range -Sort +Sort -Subtotals +Subtotals -Validity +Validity -Multiple Operations +Multiple Operations -Text to Columns +Text to Columns -Consolidate +Consolidate -Refresh Range +Refresh Range diff --git a/source/text/scalc/main0200.xhp b/source/text/scalc/main0200.xhp index 39df23c461..9f667a47b5 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/main0200.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/main0200.xhp @@ -31,9 +31,9 @@
-Toolbars +Toolbars -This submenu lists the toolbars that are available in spreadsheets. +This submenu lists the toolbars that are available in spreadsheets.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/main0202.xhp b/source/text/scalc/main0202.xhp index a6b2146e0e..937b3db85a 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/main0202.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/main0202.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@
-Formatting Bar -The Formatting bar contains basic commands for applying manually formatting. +Formatting Bar +The Formatting bar contains basic commands for applying manually formatting.
@@ -47,19 +47,19 @@ -Font Color +Font Color -Align Left +Align Left -Align Center Horizontally +Align Center Horizontally -Align Right +Align Right -Justify +Justify @@ -80,60 +80,60 @@ -Align Top +Align Top -Align Center Vertically +Align Center Vertically -Align Bottom +Align Bottom -Number Format : Date -Applies the date format to the selected cells. +Number Format : Date +Applies the date format to the selected cells. -Number Format: Exponential -Applies the exponential format to the selected cells. -Additional icons -If CTL support is enabled, two additional icons are visible. +Number Format: Exponential +Applies the exponential format to the selected cells. +Additional icons +If CTL support is enabled, two additional icons are visible. -Left-To-Right +Left-To-Right - + left to right icon -The text is entered from left to right. +The text is entered from left to right.
-Right-To-Left +Right-To-Left - + right to left icon -The text formatted in a complex text layout language is entered from right to left. +The text formatted in a complex text layout language is entered from right to left.
UFI: inserted .uno:Align... help ids here, had to be removed from shared/01/05340300.xhp -Aligns the contents of the cell to the left. +Aligns the contents of the cell to the left. -Aligns the contents of the cell to the right. +Aligns the contents of the cell to the right. -Horizontally centers the contents of the cell. +Horizontally centers the contents of the cell. -Aligns the contents of the cell to the left and right cell borders. +Aligns the contents of the cell to the left and right cell borders. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/main0203.xhp b/source/text/scalc/main0203.xhp index d946f6581a..fca4212351 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/main0203.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/main0203.xhp @@ -32,25 +32,25 @@
-Drawing Object Properties Bar -The Drawing Object Properties Bar for objects that you select in the sheet contains formatting and alignment commands. +Drawing Object Properties Bar +The Drawing Object Properties Bar for objects that you select in the sheet contains formatting and alignment commands.
-Line Style +Line Style -Line Width +Line Width -Line Color +Line Color -Background Color +Background Color diff --git a/source/text/scalc/main0205.xhp b/source/text/scalc/main0205.xhp index 0b32b82a6b..935acbddc3 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/main0205.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/main0205.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@
-Text Formatting Bar -The Text Formatting Bar that is displayed when the cursor is in a text object, such as a text frame or a drawing object, contains formatting and alignment commands. +Text Formatting Bar +The Text Formatting Bar that is displayed when the cursor is in a text object, such as a text frame or a drawing object, contains formatting and alignment commands.
@@ -45,40 +45,40 @@ -Font Color +Font Color -Line Spacing: 1 +Line Spacing: 1 -Line Spacing: 1.5 +Line Spacing: 1.5 -Line Spacing: 2 +Line Spacing: 2 -Align Left +Align Left -Centered +Centered -Align Right +Align Right -Justify +Justify -Superscript +Superscript -Subscript +Subscript -Character +Character -Paragraph +Paragraph diff --git a/source/text/scalc/main0206.xhp b/source/text/scalc/main0206.xhp index 40f7b2812a..7ee3f816fb 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/main0206.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/main0206.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
-Formula Bar -Use this bar to enter formulas. +Formula Bar +Use this bar to enter formulas.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/main0208.xhp b/source/text/scalc/main0208.xhp index f65829ea2c..3cbef21c30 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/main0208.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/main0208.xhp @@ -28,8 +28,8 @@
- Status Bar - The Status Bar displays information about the current sheet. + Status Bar + The Status Bar displays information about the current sheet.
@@ -37,8 +37,8 @@ - Digital Signature - See also Digital Signatures. + Digital Signature + See also Digital Signatures. \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/scalc/main0210.xhp b/source/text/scalc/main0210.xhp index c25cc9d29e..33ddf3fd4b 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/main0210.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/main0210.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
-Print Preview Bar -The Print Preview Bar is displayed when you choose File - Print Preview. +Print Preview Bar +The Print Preview Bar is displayed when you choose File - Print Preview.
@@ -48,15 +48,15 @@ -Full Screen +Full Screen Hides the menus and toolbars. To exit the full screen mode, click the Full Screen button. -Format Page +Format Page -Margins -Shows or hides margins of the page. Margins can be dragged by the mouse, and also can be set on Page tab of Page Style dialog. -Scaling Factor -This slide defines a page scale for the printed spreadsheet. Scaling factor can be set on Sheet tab of Page Style dialog, too. -Close Preview -To exit the print preview, click the Close Preview button. +Margins +Shows or hides margins of the page. Margins can be dragged by the mouse, and also can be set on Page tab of Page Style dialog. +Scaling Factor +This slide defines a page scale for the printed spreadsheet. Scaling factor can be set on Sheet tab of Page Style dialog, too. +Close Preview +To exit the print preview, click the Close Preview button. diff --git a/source/text/scalc/main0214.xhp b/source/text/scalc/main0214.xhp index 755d72603b..7ae41425f5 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/main0214.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/main0214.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
-Image Bar -The Image bar is displayed when you insert or select an image in a sheet. +Image Bar +The Image bar is displayed when you insert or select an image in a sheet.
diff --git a/source/text/scalc/main0218.xhp b/source/text/scalc/main0218.xhp index b1f2f80eef..0583a64185 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/main0218.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/main0218.xhp @@ -32,36 +32,36 @@
-Tools Bar -Use the Tools bar to access commonly used commands. +Tools Bar +Use the Tools bar to access commonly used commands.
-Controls +Controls -Choose Themes +Choose Themes -Advanced Filter +Advanced Filter -Start +Start -Euro Converter +Euro Converter -Define +Define -Goal Seek +Goal Seek diff --git a/source/text/scalc/main0503.xhp b/source/text/scalc/main0503.xhp index 5dd35b3644..ef83999ecf 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/main0503.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/main0503.xhp @@ -33,22 +33,22 @@
- $[officename] Calc Features - $[officename] Calc is a spreadsheet application that you can use to calculate, analyze, and manage your data. You can also import and modify Microsoft Excel spreadsheets. + $[officename] Calc Features + $[officename] Calc is a spreadsheet application that you can use to calculate, analyze, and manage your data. You can also import and modify Microsoft Excel spreadsheets.
- Calculations - $[officename] Calc provides you with functions, including statistical and banking functions, that you can use to create formulas to perform complex calculations on your data. - You can also use the Function Wizard to help you create your formulas. - What-If Calculations - An interesting feature is to be able to immediately view the results of changes made to one factor of calculations that are composed of several factors. For instance, you can see how changing the time period in a loan calculation affects the interest rates or repayment amounts. Furthermore, you can manage larger tables by using different predefined scenarios. - Database Functions - Use spreadsheets to arrange, store, and filter your data. - $[officename] Calc lets you drag-and-drop tables from databases, or lets you use a spreadsheet as a data source for creating form letters in $[officename] Writer. - Arranging Data - With a few mouse-clicks, you can reorganize your spreadsheet to show or hide certain data ranges, or to format ranges according to special conditions, or to quickly calculate subtotals and totals. - Dynamic Charts - $[officename] Calc lets you present spreadsheet data in dynamic charts that update automatically when the data changes. - Opening and Saving Microsoft Files - Use the $[officename] filters to convert Excel files, or to open and save in a variety of other formats. + Calculations + $[officename] Calc provides you with functions, including statistical and banking functions, that you can use to create formulas to perform complex calculations on your data. + You can also use the Function Wizard to help you create your formulas. + What-If Calculations + An interesting feature is to be able to immediately view the results of changes made to one factor of calculations that are composed of several factors. For instance, you can see how changing the time period in a loan calculation affects the interest rates or repayment amounts. Furthermore, you can manage larger tables by using different predefined scenarios. + Database Functions + Use spreadsheets to arrange, store, and filter your data. + $[officename] Calc lets you drag-and-drop tables from databases, or lets you use a spreadsheet as a data source for creating form letters in $[officename] Writer. + Arranging Data + With a few mouse-clicks, you can reorganize your spreadsheet to show or hide certain data ranges, or to format ranges according to special conditions, or to quickly calculate subtotals and totals. + Dynamic Charts + $[officename] Calc lets you present spreadsheet data in dynamic charts that update automatically when the data changes. + Opening and Saving Microsoft Files + Use the $[officename] filters to convert Excel files, or to open and save in a variety of other formats. diff --git a/source/text/schart/00/00000004.xhp b/source/text/schart/00/00000004.xhp index f2a9bce9de..2f105d1e6f 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/00/00000004.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/00/00000004.xhp @@ -27,148 +27,148 @@ -To access this function... +To access this function...
-Choose View - Chart Data Table (Charts) -On Formatting bar, click +Choose View - Chart Data Table (Charts) +On Formatting bar, click
- + Icon -Chart Data +Chart Data
-Choose Insert - Title (Charts) +Choose Insert - Title (Charts)
-Choose Insert - Legend (Charts) -Choose Format - Legend - Position tab (Charts) +Choose Insert - Legend (Charts) +Choose Format - Legend - Position tab (Charts)
-Choose Insert - Data Labels (Charts) -Choose Format - Format Selection - Data Point/Data Series - Data Labels tab (for data series and data point) (Charts) +Choose Insert - Data Labels (Charts) +Choose Format - Format Selection - Data Point/Data Series - Data Labels tab (for data series and data point) (Charts)
-Choose Insert - Axes (Charts) +Choose Insert - Axes (Charts)
-Choose Insert - Grids (Charts) -On Formatting bar, click +Choose Insert - Grids (Charts) +On Formatting bar, click - + Icon -Horizontal Grids +Horizontal Grids - + Icon -Vertical Grids +Vertical Grids
-Choose Insert - X Error Bars or Insert - Y Error Bars (Charts) +Choose Insert - X Error Bars or Insert - Y Error Bars (Charts) -Choose Insert - Trend Lines (Charts) +Choose Insert - Trend Lines (Charts) -Choose Insert - Special Character (Charts) +Choose Insert - Special Character (Charts) -Choose Format - Format Selection (Charts) +Choose Format - Format Selection (Charts) -Choose Format - Format Selection - Data Point dialog (Charts) +Choose Format - Format Selection - Data Point dialog (Charts) -Choose Format - Format Selection - Data Series dialog (Charts) +Choose Format - Format Selection - Data Series dialog (Charts) -Choose Format - Format Selection - Data Series - Options tab (Charts) +Choose Format - Format Selection - Data Series - Options tab (Charts) -Choose Format - Title (Charts) +Choose Format - Title (Charts) -Choose Format - Format Selection - Title dialog (Charts) +Choose Format - Format Selection - Title dialog (Charts) -Choose Format - Format Selection - Title dialog (Charts) +Choose Format - Format Selection - Title dialog (Charts) -Choose Format - Title (Charts) +Choose Format - Title (Charts) -Choose Format - Axis (Charts) +Choose Format - Axis (Charts) -Choose Format - Legend, or Format - Format Selection - Legend (Charts) +Choose Format - Legend, or Format - Format Selection - Legend (Charts) -Choose Format - Axis - X Axis/Secondary X Axis/Z Axis/All Axes (Charts) +Choose Format - Axis - X Axis/Secondary X Axis/Z Axis/All Axes (Charts) -Choose Format - Axis - Y Axis/Secondary Y Axis (Charts) +Choose Format - Axis - Y Axis/Secondary Y Axis (Charts) -Choose Format - Axis - Y Axis - Scale tab (Charts) +Choose Format - Axis - Y Axis - Scale tab (Charts) -Choose Format - Axis - X Axis - Positioning tab (Charts) +Choose Format - Axis - X Axis - Positioning tab (Charts) -Choose Format - Axis - Y Axis - Positioning tab (Charts) +Choose Format - Axis - Y Axis - Positioning tab (Charts) -Choose Format - Grid (Charts) +Choose Format - Grid (Charts) -Choose Format - Grid - X, Y, Z Axis Major Grid/ X, Y, Z Minor Grid/ All Axis Grids (Charts) +Choose Format - Grid - X, Y, Z Axis Major Grid/ X, Y, Z Minor Grid/ All Axis Grids (Charts) -Choose Format - Chart Wall - Chart dialog (Charts) +Choose Format - Chart Wall - Chart dialog (Charts) -Choose Format - Chart Floor(Charts) +Choose Format - Chart Floor(Charts) -Choose Format - Chart Area(Charts) +Choose Format - Chart Area(Charts)
-Choose Format - Chart Type (Charts) -On Formatting bar, click +Choose Format - Chart Type (Charts) +On Formatting bar, click
- + Icon -Edit Chart Type +Edit Chart Type
removed frtaft autoformat section -Choose Format - 3D View(Charts) +Choose Format - 3D View(Charts)
-Choose Format - Arrangement (Charts) -Open context menu - choose Arrangement (Charts) +Choose Format - Arrangement (Charts) +Open context menu - choose Arrangement (Charts)
- + Icon -Horizontal Grids +Horizontal Grids
@@ -178,12 +178,12 @@ - + Icon -Show/Hide Axis Descriptions +Show/Hide Axis Descriptions
@@ -193,29 +193,29 @@ - + Icon -Vertical Grids +Vertical Grids
-Choose Insert - Object - +Choose Insert - Object - Chart
-Choose Insert - Object - +Choose Insert - Object - Chart -Double-click a chart, then choose Format - Data Ranges +Double-click a chart, then choose Format - Data Ranges
-In the Chart Type dialog of a Line chart or XY chart that displays lines, choose Smooth in the Lines type dropdown, then click the Properties button. +In the Chart Type dialog of a Line chart or XY chart that displays lines, choose Smooth in the Lines type dropdown, then click the Properties button. -In the Chart Type dialog of a Line chart or XY chart that displays lines, choose Stepped in the Lines type dropdown, then click the Properties button. +In the Chart Type dialog of a Line chart or XY chart that displays lines, choose Stepped in the Lines type dropdown, then click the Properties button. diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/03010000.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/03010000.xhp index 5831faa6c7..bb23efd324 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/03010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/03010000.xhp @@ -32,52 +32,52 @@
-Data Table -Opens the Data Table dialog where you can edit the chart data. +Data Table +Opens the Data Table dialog where you can edit the chart data.
-The Data Table dialog is not available if you insert a chart that is based on a Calc sheet or on a Writer table.UFI: fixes #i31208# +The Data Table dialog is not available if you insert a chart that is based on a Calc sheet or on a Writer table.UFI: fixes #i31208# -To update a chart manually when a Writer table got changedi81240 +To update a chart manually when a Writer table got changedi81240 -Some changes will become visible only after you close and reopen the dialog.UFI: fixes #i22854#still so? +Some changes will become visible only after you close and reopen the dialog.UFI: fixes #i22854#still so?
-To change chart data -When you create a chart that is based on default data, or when you copy a chart into your document, you can open the Data Table dialog to enter your own data. The chart responds to the data in a live preview. -Close the Chart Data dialog to apply all changes to the chart. Choose Edit - Undo to cancel the changes. +To change chart data +When you create a chart that is based on default data, or when you copy a chart into your document, you can open the Data Table dialog to enter your own data. The chart responds to the data in a live preview. +Close the Chart Data dialog to apply all changes to the chart. Choose Edit - Undo to cancel the changes. -Insert or select a chart that is not based on existing cell data. +Insert or select a chart that is not based on existing cell data. -Choose View - Chart Data Table to open the Data Table dialog. -The data series are organized in columns. The role of the left most column is set to categories or data labels respectively. The contents of the left most column are always formatted as text. You can insert more text columns to be used as hierarchical labels. +Choose View - Chart Data Table to open the Data Table dialog. +The data series are organized in columns. The role of the left most column is set to categories or data labels respectively. The contents of the left most column are always formatted as text. You can insert more text columns to be used as hierarchical labels. -Click a cell in the dialog and change the contents. Click another cell to see the changed contents in the preview. +Click a cell in the dialog and change the contents. Click another cell to see the changed contents in the preview. -Enter the name of the data series in the text box above the column. +Enter the name of the data series in the text box above the column. -Use the icons above the table to insert or delete rows and columns. For data series with multiple columns, only whole data series can be inserted or deleted. Regina: see issue 72901 +Use the icons above the table to insert or delete rows and columns. For data series with multiple columns, only whole data series can be inserted or deleted. Regina: see issue 72901 -The order of the data series in the chart is the same as in the data table. Use the Move Series Right icon to switch the current column with its neighbor on the right.changed names, see i79863 +The order of the data series in the chart is the same as in the data table. Use the Move Series Right icon to switch the current column with its neighbor on the right.changed names, see i79863 -The order of the categories or data points in the chart is the same as in the data table. Use the Move Row Down icon to switch the current row with its neighbor below. +The order of the categories or data points in the chart is the same as in the data table. Use the Move Row Down icon to switch the current row with its neighbor below. -insert rowInserts a new row below the current row. -insert seriesInserts a new data series after the current column. +insert rowInserts a new row below the current row. +insert seriesInserts a new data series after the current column. insert text columnInserts a new text column after the current column for hierarchical axes descriptions. -delete rowDeletes the current row. It is not possible to delete the label row. -delete seriesDeletes the current series or text column. It is not possible to delete the first text column. -move series rightSwitches the current column with its neighbor at the right. -move row downSwitches the current row with its neighbor below.edit fields, see i72361 -Enter names for the data series. +delete rowDeletes the current row. It is not possible to delete the label row. +delete seriesDeletes the current series or text column. It is not possible to delete the first text column. +move series rightSwitches the current column with its neighbor at the right. +move row downSwitches the current row with its neighbor below.edit fields, see i72361 +Enter names for the data series. diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/04010000.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/04010000.xhp index f83691ea44..715ebe7891 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/04010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/04010000.xhp @@ -31,32 +31,32 @@ -Titles -Opens a dialog to enter or modify the titles in a chart. +Titles +Opens a dialog to enter or modify the titles in a chart. You can define the text for the main title, subtitle and the axis labels, and specify if they are displayed.
-Title -Enter the desired title for the chart. This will be displayed at the top of the chart. +Title +Enter the desired title for the chart. This will be displayed at the top of the chart. X -Subtitle -Enter the desired subtitle for the chart. This will be displayed under the title set in the Title field. +Subtitle +Enter the desired subtitle for the chart. This will be displayed under the title set in the Title field. Axes -X axis -Enter the desired title for the X axis of the chart. +X axis +Enter the desired title for the X axis of the chart. -Y axis -Enter the desired title for the Y axis of the chart. +Y axis +Enter the desired title for the Y axis of the chart. -Z axis -Enter the desired title for the Z axis of the chart. This option is only available for 3-D charts. +Z axis +Enter the desired title for the Z axis of the chart. This option is only available for 3-D charts. Secondary Axes X axis diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp index b8ebeaefd4..506095d915 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp @@ -31,55 +31,55 @@ hiding;chart legends -Legend -Opens the Legend dialog, which allows you to change the position of legends in the chart, and to specify whether the legend is displayed. +Legend +Opens the Legend dialog, which allows you to change the position of legends in the chart, and to specify whether the legend is displayed.
-To show or hide a legend, click Legend On/Off on the Formatting bar. +To show or hide a legend, click Legend On/Off on the Formatting bar.
- + Icon -Legend On/Off +Legend On/Off
-Display -Specifies whether to display a legend for the chart. This option is only visible if you call the dialog by choosing Insert - Legend. -Position -Select the position for the legend: +Display +Specifies whether to display a legend for the chart. This option is only visible if you call the dialog by choosing Insert - Legend. +Position +Select the position for the legend: -Left -Positions the legend at the left of the chart. +Left +Positions the legend at the left of the chart. -Top -Positions the legend at the top of the chart. +Top +Positions the legend at the top of the chart. -Right -Positions the legend at the right of the chart. +Right +Positions the legend at the right of the chart. -Bottom -Positions the legend at the bottom of the chart. -Text Orientation -This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. +Bottom +Positions the legend at the bottom of the chart. +Text Orientation +This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. -Text Direction -Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled. +Text Direction +Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled. diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp index b5977f8316..071342e891 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp @@ -37,63 +37,59 @@
- Data Labels + Data Labels - Opens the Data Labels dialog, which enables you to set the data labels. + Opens the Data Labels dialog, which enables you to set the data labels.
- If an element of a data series is selected, this command works on that data series only. If no element is selected, this command works on all data series. + If an element of a data series is selected, this command works on that data series only. If no element is selected, this command works on all data series.
-Show value as number - Displays the absolute values of the data points. +Show value as number + Displays the absolute values of the data points. -Number format - Opens a dialog to select the number format. +Number format + Opens a dialog to select the number format. -Show value as percentage - Displays the percentage of the data points in each column. +Show value as percentage + Displays the percentage of the data points in each column. -Percentage format - Opens a dialog to select the percentage format. +Percentage format + Opens a dialog to select the percentage format. -Show category - Shows the data point text labels. +Show category + Shows the data point text labels. -Show legend key - Displays the legend icons next to each data point label. +Show legend key + Displays the legend icons next to each data point label. -Separator - Selects the separator between multiple text strings for the same object. +Separator + Selects the separator between multiple text strings for the same object. -Placement - Selects the placement of data labels relative to the objects. +Placement + Selects the placement of data labels relative to the objects. -Text Direction - Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled. +Text Direction + Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled. -Rotate Text - Click in the dial to set the text orientation for the data labels. +Rotate Text + Click in the dial to set the text orientation for the data labels. -Enter the counterclockwise rotation angle for the data labels. +Enter the counterclockwise rotation angle for the data labels. diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/04040000.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/04040000.xhp index 80a58ccc4e..ff6a328387 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/04040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/04040000.xhp @@ -39,25 +39,25 @@ mw made "secondary axes;" a one level entry, deleted "charts; showing secondary axes" and generated one "axes;" enry out of two "axes;showing..." entries -Axes -Specifies the axes to be displayed in the chart. +Axes +Specifies the axes to be displayed in the chart.
-Major axis -X axis -Displays the X axis as a line with subdivisions. -Y axis -Displays the Y axis as a line with subdivisions. -Z axis -Displays the Z axis as a line with subdivisions. This axis can only be displayed in 3D charts. -Secondary axis -Use this area to assign a second axis to your chart. If a data series is already assigned to this axis, $[officename] automatically displays the axis and the label. You can turn off these settings later on. If no data has been assigned to this axis and you activate this area, the values of the primary Y axis are applied to the secondary axis. -X axis -Displays a secondary X axis in the chart. -Y axis -Displays a secondary Y axis in the chart. -The major axis and the secondary axis can have different scaling. For example, you can scale one axis to 2 in. and the other to 1.5 in. +Major axis +X axis +Displays the X axis as a line with subdivisions. +Y axis +Displays the Y axis as a line with subdivisions. +Z axis +Displays the Z axis as a line with subdivisions. This axis can only be displayed in 3D charts. +Secondary axis +Use this area to assign a second axis to your chart. If a data series is already assigned to this axis, $[officename] automatically displays the axis and the label. You can turn off these settings later on. If no data has been assigned to this axis and you activate this area, the values of the primary Y axis are applied to the secondary axis. +X axis +Displays a secondary X axis in the chart. +Y axis +Displays a secondary Y axis in the chart. +The major axis and the secondary axis can have different scaling. For example, you can scale one axis to 2 in. and the other to 1.5 in. diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/04050000.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/04050000.xhp index 09c638dcc8..d8097cbaf8 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/04050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/04050000.xhp @@ -30,68 +30,68 @@ -X/Y Error Barsi85330 -Use the X or Y Error Bars dialog to display error bars for 2D charts. +X/Y Error Barsi85330 +Use the X or Y Error Bars dialog to display error bars for 2D charts.
-An error bar is an indicator line that spans over a range from x/y - NegativeErrorValue to x/y + PositiveErrorValue. In this term, x or y is the value of the data point. When "standard deviation" is selected, x or y is the mean value of the data series. NegativeErrorValue and PositiveErrorValue are the amounts calculated by the error bar function or given explicitly. -The Insert - X/Y Error Bars menu command is only available for 2D charts. -Error category -In the Error category area, you can choose different ways to display the error category. +An error bar is an indicator line that spans over a range from x/y - NegativeErrorValue to x/y + PositiveErrorValue. In this term, x or y is the value of the data point. When "standard deviation" is selected, x or y is the mean value of the data series. NegativeErrorValue and PositiveErrorValue are the amounts calculated by the error bar function or given explicitly. +The Insert - X/Y Error Bars menu command is only available for 2D charts. +Error category +In the Error category area, you can choose different ways to display the error category. -None -Does not show any error bars. +None +Does not show any error bars. -Constant value -Displays constant values that you specify in the Parameters area. +Constant value +Displays constant values that you specify in the Parameters area. -Percentage -Displays a percentage. The display refers to the corresponding data point. Set the percentage in the Parameters area. +Percentage +Displays a percentage. The display refers to the corresponding data point. Set the percentage in the Parameters area. -Functions -Select a function to calculate the error bars. -Standard Error: Displays the standard error. -Variance: Displays the variance calculated from the number of data points and respective values. -Standard Deviation: Displays the standard deviation (square root of the variance). Unlike other functions, error bars are centered on the mean. -Error Margin: Displays the highest error margin in percent according to the highest value of the data group. Set the percentage in the Parameters area. -Cell Range -Click Cell Range and then specify a cell range from which to take the positive and negative error bar values. -Click a button to shrink the dialog, then use the mouse to select the cell range in the spreadsheet. Click the button again to restore the dialog to full size. -From Data Table -For a chart with its own data, the error bar values can be entered in the chart data table. The Data Table dialog shows additional columns titled Positive X or Y-Error-Bars and Negative X or Y-Error-Bars.Positive (+) -Enter the value to add to the displayed value as the positive error value.Negative (-) -Enter the value to subtract from the displayed value as the negative error value.Positive (+) when Cell Range is selected -Enter the address range from where to get the positive error values. Use the Shrink button to select the range from a sheet.Negative (-) when Cell Range is selected -Enter the address range from where to get the negative error values. Use the Shrink button to select the range from a sheet. -Same value for both -Enable to use the positive error values also as negative error values. You can only change the value of the "Positve (+)" box. That value gets copied to the "Negative (-)" box automatically. -Error indicator -Specifies the error indicator. +Functions +Select a function to calculate the error bars. +Standard Error: Displays the standard error. +Variance: Displays the variance calculated from the number of data points and respective values. +Standard Deviation: Displays the standard deviation (square root of the variance). Unlike other functions, error bars are centered on the mean. +Error Margin: Displays the highest error margin in percent according to the highest value of the data group. Set the percentage in the Parameters area. +Cell Range +Click Cell Range and then specify a cell range from which to take the positive and negative error bar values. +Click a button to shrink the dialog, then use the mouse to select the cell range in the spreadsheet. Click the button again to restore the dialog to full size. +From Data Table +For a chart with its own data, the error bar values can be entered in the chart data table. The Data Table dialog shows additional columns titled Positive X or Y-Error-Bars and Negative X or Y-Error-Bars.Positive (+) +Enter the value to add to the displayed value as the positive error value.Negative (-) +Enter the value to subtract from the displayed value as the negative error value.Positive (+) when Cell Range is selected +Enter the address range from where to get the positive error values. Use the Shrink button to select the range from a sheet.Negative (-) when Cell Range is selected +Enter the address range from where to get the negative error values. Use the Shrink button to select the range from a sheet. +Same value for both +Enable to use the positive error values also as negative error values. You can only change the value of the "Positve (+)" box. That value gets copied to the "Negative (-)" box automatically. +Error indicator +Specifies the error indicator. -Positive and Negative -Shows positive and negative error bars. +Positive and Negative +Shows positive and negative error bars. -Positive -Shows only positive error bars. +Positive +Shows only positive error bars. -Negative -Shows only negative error bars. +Negative +Shows only negative error bars.
diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/04060000.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/04060000.xhp index d278b28b38..c8e049b83d 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/04060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/04060000.xhp @@ -33,60 +33,59 @@ pie charts;options -Options - Use this dialog to define some options that are available for specific chart types. The contents of the Options dialog vary with the chart type. +Options + Use this dialog to define some options that are available for specific chart types. The contents of the Options dialog vary with the chart type.
- Align data series to: - In this area you can choose between two Y axis scaling modes. The axes can only be scaled and given properties separately. + Align data series to: + In this area you can choose between two Y axis scaling modes. The axes can only be scaled and given properties separately. -Primary Y axis - This option is active as default. All data series are aligned to the primary Y axis. +Primary Y axis + This option is active as default. All data series are aligned to the primary Y axis. -Secondary Y axis - Changes the scaling of the Y axis. This axis is only visible when at least one data series is assigned to it and the axis view is active. - Settings - Define the settings for a bar chart in this area. Any changes apply to all data series of the chart, not to the selected data only. +Secondary Y axis + Changes the scaling of the Y axis. This axis is only visible when at least one data series is assigned to it and the axis view is active. + Settings + Define the settings for a bar chart in this area. Any changes apply to all data series of the chart, not to the selected data only. -Spacing - Defines the spacing between the columns in percent. The maximal spacing is 600%. +Spacing + Defines the spacing between the columns in percent. The maximal spacing is 600%. -Overlap - Defines the necessary settings for overlapping data series. You can choose between -100 and +100%. +Overlap + Defines the necessary settings for overlapping data series. You can choose between -100 and +100%. -Connection Lines - For "stacked" and "percent" column (vertical bar) charts, mark this check box to connect the column layers that belong together with lines. +Connection Lines + For "stacked" and "percent" column (vertical bar) charts, mark this check box to connect the column layers that belong together with lines. -Show bars side by side - If two axes are shown in a bar chart, and some data series are attached to the first axis, while some other data series are attached to the second axis, then both sets of data series are shown independently, overlapping each other. - As a result, bars attached to the first y-axis are partly or completely hidden by bars attached to the second y-axis. To avoid this, enable the option to display bars side by side. The bars from different data series are shown as if they were attached only to one axis. +Show bars side by side + If two axes are shown in a bar chart, and some data series are attached to the first axis, while some other data series are attached to the second axis, then both sets of data series are shown independently, overlapping each other. + As a result, bars attached to the first y-axis are partly or completely hidden by bars attached to the second y-axis. To avoid this, enable the option to display bars side by side. The bars from different data series are shown as if they were attached only to one axis. -Clockwise direction - Available for pie and donut charts. The default direction in which the pieces of a pie chart are ordered is counterclockwise. Enable the Clockwise direction checkbox to draw the pieces in opposite direction. +Clockwise direction + Available for pie and donut charts. The default direction in which the pieces of a pie chart are ordered is counterclockwise. Enable the Clockwise direction checkbox to draw the pieces in opposite direction. -Starting angle - Drag the small dot along the circle or click any position on the circle to set the starting angle of a pie or donut chart. The starting angle is the mathematical angle position where the first piece is drawn. The value of 90 degrees draws the first piece at the 12 o'clock position. A value of 0 degrees starts at the 3 o'clock position. - In 3D pie and donut charts that were created with older versions of the software, the starting angle is 0 degrees instead of 90 degrees. For old and new 2D charts the default starting angle is 90 degrees. - When you change the starting angle or the direction, only current versions of the software show the changed values. Older versions of the software display the same document using the default values: Always counterclockwise direction and a starting value of 90 degrees (2D pie charts) or 0 degrees (3D pie charts). +Starting angle + Drag the small dot along the circle or click any position on the circle to set the starting angle of a pie or donut chart. The starting angle is the mathematical angle position where the first piece is drawn. The value of 90 degrees draws the first piece at the 12 o'clock position. A value of 0 degrees starts at the 3 o'clock position. + In 3D pie and donut charts that were created with older versions of the software, the starting angle is 0 degrees instead of 90 degrees. For old and new 2D charts the default starting angle is 90 degrees. + When you change the starting angle or the direction, only current versions of the software show the changed values. Older versions of the software display the same document using the default values: Always counterclockwise direction and a starting value of 90 degrees (2D pie charts) or 0 degrees (3D pie charts). -Degrees - Enter the starting angle between 0 and 359 degrees. You can also click the arrows to change the displayed value. - Plot missing values - Sometimes values are missing in a data series that is shown in a chart. You can select from different options how to plot the missing values. The options are available for some chart types only. +Degrees + Enter the starting angle between 0 and 359 degrees. You can also click the arrows to change the displayed value. + Plot missing values + Sometimes values are missing in a data series that is shown in a chart. You can select from different options how to plot the missing values. The options are available for some chart types only. -Leave gap - For a missing value, no data will be shown. This is the default for chart types Column, Bar, Line, Net. +Leave gap + For a missing value, no data will be shown. This is the default for chart types Column, Bar, Line, Net. -Assume zero - For a missing value, the y-value will be shown as zero. This is the default for chart type Area. +Assume zero + For a missing value, the y-value will be shown as zero. This is the default for chart type Area. -Continue line - For a missing value, the interpolation from the neighbor values will be shown. This is the default for chart type XY. +Continue line + For a missing value, the interpolation from the neighbor values will be shown. This is the default for chart type XY. -Include values from hidden cells - Check to also show values of currently hidden cells within the source cell range. +Include values from hidden cells + Check to also show values of currently hidden cells within the source cell range. diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/05010000.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/05010000.xhp index be0b822ab5..c0e3489d91 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/05010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/05010000.xhp @@ -32,27 +32,27 @@ properties;charts mw changed "properties;" -Format Selection -Formats the selected object. +Format Selection +Formats the selected object. Depending on the object selected, the command opens dialogs that you can also open by choosing the following commands from the Format menu:
-Chart Wall +Chart Wall -Chart Area +Chart Area -Chart Floor +Chart Floor -Title +Title -Legend +Legend -X Axis +X Axis -Y Axis +Y Axis -Grid +Grid diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/05010100.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/05010100.xhp index fded99b490..e629e91fe9 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/05010100.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/05010100.xhp @@ -32,10 +32,10 @@
- Data Point - This dialog allows you to change the properties of a selected data point. The dialog appears when there is only one data point selected when you choose Format - Format Selection. Some of the menu entries are only available for 2D or 3D charts. + Data Point + This dialog allows you to change the properties of a selected data point. The dialog appears when there is only one data point selected when you choose Format - Format Selection. Some of the menu entries are only available for 2D or 3D charts.
- Any changes made only affect this one data point. For example, if you edit the color of a bar, only the color of that bar will be different. + Any changes made only affect this one data point. For example, if you edit the color of a bar, only the color of that bar will be different.
diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/05010200.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/05010200.xhp index 6642acbf1b..13d1cc41dd 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/05010200.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/05010200.xhp @@ -30,10 +30,10 @@
-Data Series -Use this to change the properties of a selected data series. This dialog appears when one data series is selected when you choose Format - Format Selection. Some of the menu entries are only available for 2D or 3D charts. +Data Series +Use this to change the properties of a selected data series. This dialog appears when one data series is selected when you choose Format - Format Selection. Some of the menu entries are only available for 2D or 3D charts.
-Any changes made here affect the entire data series. For example, if you change the color, all elements belonging to this data series will change color. +Any changes made here affect the entire data series. For example, if you change the color, all elements belonging to this data series will change color.
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ -Y Error Bars +Y Error Bars diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/05020000.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/05020000.xhp index 37412ab97b..ea9fb24e5b 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/05020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/05020000.xhp @@ -33,23 +33,23 @@
- titles; formatting chartsformatting; chart titlesTitle - The Title menu command opens a submenu for editing the properties of the titles in the chart. + titles; formatting chartsformatting; chart titlesTitle + The Title menu command opens a submenu for editing the properties of the titles in the chart.
- Main title + Main title - Subtitle + Subtitle - X-axis title + X-axis title - Y-axis title + Y-axis title - Z-axis title + Z-axis title - All titles + All titles diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/05020100.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/05020100.xhp index 70a64de2c3..fa841dba45 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/05020100.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/05020100.xhp @@ -35,8 +35,8 @@ moved the subtitle bookmark here from 0502020 -Title - Modifies the properties of the selected title. +Title + Modifies the properties of the selected title.
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ - Character + Character diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/05020101.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/05020101.xhp index 305dee7146..2a252d473d 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/05020101.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/05020101.xhp @@ -34,14 +34,14 @@ aligning;titles in charts titles;alignment (charts) -Alignment -Modifies the alignment of the chart title. +Alignment +Modifies the alignment of the chart title.
-Some of the options are not available for all types of labels. For example, there are different options for 2D and 3D object labels. +Some of the options are not available for all types of labels. For example, there are different options for 2D and 3D object labels.
-Please note that problems may arise in displaying labels if the size of your chart is too small. You can avoid this by either enlarging the view or decreasing the font size. +Please note that problems may arise in displaying labels if the size of your chart is too small. You can avoid this by either enlarging the view or decreasing the font size. diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/05020200.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/05020200.xhp index cdf6543d76..e875e473f3 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/05020200.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/05020200.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@ -Title -Modifies the properties of the selected title or the properties of all titles together. +Title +Modifies the properties of the selected title or the properties of all titles together.
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ -Character +Character diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/05020201.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/05020201.xhp index 6a122502be..f0fa57a7d8 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/05020201.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/05020201.xhp @@ -30,64 +30,64 @@
-Alignmentnew name: Label -Modifies the alignment of axes or title labels. +Alignmentnew name: Label +Modifies the alignment of axes or title labels.
-Some of the options listed here are not available for all labels. For example, there are different options for 2D and 3D object labels. +Some of the options listed here are not available for all labels. For example, there are different options for 2D and 3D object labels.
-Show labels -Specifies whether to show or hide the axis labels. +Show labels +Specifies whether to show or hide the axis labels. -The AxesTitle On/Off icon on the Formatting bar switches the labeling of all axes on or off. +The AxesTitle On/Off icon on the Formatting bar switches the labeling of all axes on or off.
-Rotate text -Defines the text direction of cell contents. Click one of the ABCD buttons to assign the required direction. +Rotate text +Defines the text direction of cell contents. Click one of the ABCD buttons to assign the required direction. -ABCD wheel -Clicking anywhere on the wheel defines the variable text orientation. The letters "ABCD" on the button correspond to the new setting. +ABCD wheel +Clicking anywhere on the wheel defines the variable text orientation. The letters "ABCD" on the button correspond to the new setting. -ABCD button -Assigns vertical text orientation for cell contents. -If you define a vertical x-axis label, the text may be cut off by the line of the x-axis. +ABCD button +Assigns vertical text orientation for cell contents. +If you define a vertical x-axis label, the text may be cut off by the line of the x-axis. -Degrees -Allows you to manually enter the orientation angle. +Degrees +Allows you to manually enter the orientation angle.
-Text flow -Determines the text flow of the data label. +Text flow +Determines the text flow of the data label. -Overlap -Specifies that the text in cells may overlap other cells. This can be especially useful if there is a lack of space. This option is not available with different title directions. +Overlap +Specifies that the text in cells may overlap other cells. This can be especially useful if there is a lack of space. This option is not available with different title directions. -Break -Allows a text break. -The following options are not available for all chart types: -Order -The options on this tab are only available for a 2D chart, under Format - Axis - Y Axis or X Axis. In this area, you can define the alignment of the number labels on the X or Y axis. +Break +Allows a text break. +The following options are not available for all chart types: +Order +The options on this tab are only available for a 2D chart, under Format - Axis - Y Axis or X Axis. In this area, you can define the alignment of the number labels on the X or Y axis. -Tile -Arranges numbers on the axis side by side. +Tile +Arranges numbers on the axis side by side. -Stagger odd -Staggers numbers on the axis, even numbers lower than odd numbers. +Stagger odd +Staggers numbers on the axis, even numbers lower than odd numbers. -Stagger even -Stagger numbers on the axes, odd numbers lower than even numbers. +Stagger even +Stagger numbers on the axes, odd numbers lower than even numbers. -Automatic -Automatically arranges numbers on the axis. -Problems may arise in displaying labels if the size of your chart is too small. You can avoid this by either enlarging the view or decreasing the font size. +Automatic +Automatically arranges numbers on the axis. +Problems may arise in displaying labels if the size of your chart is too small. You can avoid this by either enlarging the view or decreasing the font size. need to create a new Equation dialog box main page with links to sub pages later. This page then contains only the Text Direction control. -Text Direction -Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled. +Text Direction +Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled. diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/05030000.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/05030000.xhp index a55df2ee0e..845a71b28f 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/05030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/05030000.xhp @@ -29,8 +29,8 @@ -Legend -Defines the border, area and character attributes for a legend. +Legend +Defines the border, area and character attributes for a legend.
@@ -38,9 +38,9 @@ -Character +Character -Display +Display diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/05040000.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/05040000.xhp index fd699f0ed9..c581b334c2 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/05040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/05040000.xhp @@ -30,24 +30,24 @@
-Axis -This opens a submenu to edit axial properties. +Axis +This opens a submenu to edit axial properties.
-The tabs in the dialogs depend on the chart type selected. +The tabs in the dialogs depend on the chart type selected.
-X axis +X axis -Y axis +Y axis -Secondary X Axis -Opens a dialog where you can edit the properties of the secondary X axis. To insert a secondary X axis, choose Insert - Axes and select X axis. -Secondary Y Axis -Opens a dialog where you can edit the properties of the secondary Y axis. To insert a secondary Y axis, choose Insert - Axes and select Y axis. -Z axis +Secondary X Axis +Opens a dialog where you can edit the properties of the secondary X axis. To insert a secondary X axis, choose Insert - Axes and select X axis. +Secondary Y Axis +Opens a dialog where you can edit the properties of the secondary Y axis. To insert a secondary Y axis, choose Insert - Axes and select Y axis. +Z axis -All axes +All axes diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/05040100.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/05040100.xhp index b02d043aab..7f9ca238f7 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/05040100.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/05040100.xhp @@ -33,16 +33,16 @@ mw changed "X axes;" to "axes;" -Axes -Opens a dialog, where you can edit the properties of the selected axis. +Axes +Opens a dialog, where you can edit the properties of the selected axis. The name of the dialog depends on the selected axis.
-The Y axis has an enhanced dialog. For X-Y charts, the X axis chart is also enhanced by the Scaling tab. -Scaling the X axis is only possible in the X-Y chart type. +The Y axis has an enhanced dialog. For X-Y charts, the X axis chart is also enhanced by the Scaling tab. +Scaling the X axis is only possible in the X-Y chart type. -Character +Character diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/05040200.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/05040200.xhp index e9f7d95716..a81a157b13 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/05040200.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/05040200.xhp @@ -30,18 +30,18 @@ Y axes; formatting -Y Axis -Opens the Y Axis dialog, to change properties of the Y axis. +Y Axis +Opens the Y Axis dialog, to change properties of the Y axis.
-Character +Character -Numbers +Numbers diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/05040201.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/05040201.xhp index e35cf72fb0..a1eeb49aaf 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/05040201.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/05040201.xhp @@ -34,61 +34,61 @@ X axes;scaling Y axes; scaling mw changed "axes;scaling" to "Y axes, scaling" -Scale -Controls the scaling of the X or Y axis. +Scale +Controls the scaling of the X or Y axis.
-The axes are automatically scaled by $[officename] so that all values are optimally displayed. -To achieve specific results, you can manually change the axis scaling. For example, you can display only the top areas of the columns by shifting the zero line upwards. -Scale -You can enter values for subdividing axes in this area. You can automatically set the properties Minimum, Maximum, Major interval, Minor interval count and Reference value. +The axes are automatically scaled by $[officename] so that all values are optimally displayed. +To achieve specific results, you can manually change the axis scaling. For example, you can display only the top areas of the columns by shifting the zero line upwards. +Scale +You can enter values for subdividing axes in this area. You can automatically set the properties Minimum, Maximum, Major interval, Minor interval count and Reference value. -Minimum -Defines the minimum value for the beginning of the axis. +Minimum +Defines the minimum value for the beginning of the axis. -Maximum -Defines the maximum value for the end of the axis. +Maximum +Defines the maximum value for the end of the axis. -Major interval -Defines the interval for the main division of the axes. The main interval cannot be larger than the value area. +Major interval +Defines the interval for the main division of the axes. The main interval cannot be larger than the value area. -Minor interval count -Defines the interval for the subdivision of the axes. +Minor interval count +Defines the interval for the subdivision of the axes. -Reference value -Specifies at which position to display the values along the axis. +Reference value +Specifies at which position to display the values along the axis. -Automatic -You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values. -Disable this feature if you are working with "fixed" values, as it does not permit automatic scaling. +Automatic +You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values. +Disable this feature if you are working with "fixed" values, as it does not permit automatic scaling. -Logarithmic scale -Specifies that you want the axis to be subdivided logarithmically. -Use this feature if you are working with values that differ sharply from each other. You can use logarithmic scaling to make the grid lines of the axis equidistant but have values that may increase or decrease. +Logarithmic scale +Specifies that you want the axis to be subdivided logarithmically. +Use this feature if you are working with values that differ sharply from each other. You can use logarithmic scaling to make the grid lines of the axis equidistant but have values that may increase or decrease. -Reverse direction -Defines where the lower and where the higher values are displayed at the axis. The unchecked state is the mathematical direction. That means for Cartesian coordinate systems that the x-axis shows the lower values on the left and the y-axis shows the lower values at the bottom. For polar coordinate systems the mathematical angle axis direction is counterclockwise and the radial axis is from inner to outer. +Reverse direction +Defines where the lower and where the higher values are displayed at the axis. The unchecked state is the mathematical direction. That means for Cartesian coordinate systems that the x-axis shows the lower values on the left and the y-axis shows the lower values at the bottom. For polar coordinate systems the mathematical angle axis direction is counterclockwise and the radial axis is from inner to outer. -Type -For some types of axes, you can select to format an axis as text or date, or to detect the type automatically. For the axis type "Date" you can set the following options. -Minimum and maximum value to be shown on the ends of the scale. +Type +For some types of axes, you can select to format an axis as text or date, or to detect the type automatically. For the axis type "Date" you can set the following options. +Minimum and maximum value to be shown on the ends of the scale. -Resolution can be set to show days, months, or years as interval steps. +Resolution can be set to show days, months, or years as interval steps. -Major interval can be set to show a certain number of days, months, or years. +Major interval can be set to show a certain number of days, months, or years. -Minor interval can be set to show a certain number of days, months, or years. +Minor interval can be set to show a certain number of days, months, or years. diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/05040202.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/05040202.xhp index afa05ac81c..fa9c9cb38f 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/05040202.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/05040202.xhp @@ -34,42 +34,42 @@ Y axes;positioning axes;interval marks -Positioning -Controls the positioning of the axis. +Positioning +Controls the positioning of the axis.
-Axis line +Axis line -Select where to cross the other axis: at start, at end, at a specified value, or at a category. +Select where to cross the other axis: at start, at end, at a specified value, or at a category. value selected -Enter the value where the axis line should cross the other axis. +Enter the value where the axis line should cross the other axis. category selected -Select the category where the axis line should cross the other axis. -Labels +Select the category where the axis line should cross the other axis. +Labels -Place labels -Select where to place the labels: near axis, near axis (other side), outside start, or outside end. -Interval marks -Major: -Specifies whether the marks are to be on the inner or outer side of the axis. It is possible to combine both: you will then see marks on both sides. +Place labels +Select where to place the labels: near axis, near axis (other side), outside start, or outside end. +Interval marks +Major: +Specifies whether the marks are to be on the inner or outer side of the axis. It is possible to combine both: you will then see marks on both sides. -Inner -Specifies that marks are placed on the inner side of the axis. +Inner +Specifies that marks are placed on the inner side of the axis. -Outer -Specifies that marks are placed on the outer side of the axis. -Minor: -This area is used to define the marking dashes between the axis marks. It is possible to activate both fields. This will result in a marking line running from the outside to the inside. +Outer +Specifies that marks are placed on the outer side of the axis. +Minor: +This area is used to define the marking dashes between the axis marks. It is possible to activate both fields. This will result in a marking line running from the outside to the inside. -Inner -Specifies that minor interval marks are placed on the inner side of the axis. +Inner +Specifies that minor interval marks are placed on the inner side of the axis. -Outer -Specifies that minor interval marks are placed on the outer side of the axis. +Outer +Specifies that minor interval marks are placed on the outer side of the axis. -Place marks -Select where to place the marks: at labels, at axis, or at axis and labels. +Place marks +Select where to place the marks: at labels, at axis, or at axis and labels. diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/05050000.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/05050000.xhp index ffb507c6f4..7cf0eb4c88 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/05050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/05050000.xhp @@ -33,25 +33,25 @@
- grids; formatting axesaxes; formatting gridsGrid - Opens a submenu, where you select the grid you want to format. + grids; formatting axesaxes; formatting gridsGrid + Opens a submenu, where you select the grid you want to format.
- X Axis Major Grid + X Axis Major Grid - Y Axis Major Grid + Y Axis Major Grid - Z Axis Major Grid + Z Axis Major Grid - X Axis Minor Grid + X Axis Minor Grid - Y Axis Minor Grid + Y Axis Minor Grid - Z Axis minor Grid + Z Axis minor Grid - All Axis Grids + All Axis Grids diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/05050100.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/05050100.xhp index 4fc5d057ca..2265812601 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/05050100.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/05050100.xhp @@ -41,8 +41,8 @@ -Grid -Opens the Grid dialog for defining grid properties. +Grid +Opens the Grid dialog for defining grid properties.
diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/05060000.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/05060000.xhp index 4eba7f478b..f8469c0fff 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/05060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/05060000.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@ - charts; formatting wallsformatting;chart wallsChart Wall - Opens the Chart Wall dialog, where you can modify the properties of the chart wall. The chart wall is the "vertical" background behind the data area of the chart. + charts; formatting wallsformatting;chart wallsChart Wall + Opens the Chart Wall dialog, where you can modify the properties of the chart wall. The chart wall is the "vertical" background behind the data area of the chart.
diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/05070000.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/05070000.xhp index 01f2db096b..b47f3f6346 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/05070000.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/05070000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ formatting; chart floors -Chart Floor -Opens the Chart Floor dialog, where you can modify the properties of the chart floor. The chart floor is the lower area in 3D charts. This function is only available for 3D charts. +Chart Floor +Opens the Chart Floor dialog, where you can modify the properties of the chart floor. The chart floor is the lower area in 3D charts. This function is only available for 3D charts.
diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/05080000.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/05080000.xhp index 90a96d1c3f..a7aef11049 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/05080000.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/05080000.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@ - charts; formatting areasformatting; chart areasChart Area - Opens the Chart Area dialog, where you can modify the properties of the chart area. The chart area is the background behind all elements of the chart. + charts; formatting areasformatting; chart areasChart Area + Opens the Chart Area dialog, where you can modify the properties of the chart area. The chart area is the background behind all elements of the chart.
diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/05120000.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/05120000.xhp index ae079270a5..cad327f24a 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/05120000.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/05120000.xhp @@ -31,17 +31,17 @@
-Arrangement -Allows you to modify the order of the data series already set in the chart. +Arrangement +Allows you to modify the order of the data series already set in the chart.
-The position of the data in the data table remains unchanged. You can only choose the commands after inserting a chart in $[officename] Calc. +The position of the data in the data table remains unchanged. You can only choose the commands after inserting a chart in $[officename] Calc.
-This function is only available if you have data displayed in columns. It is not possible to switch to data display in rows. -Bring Forward -Brings the selected data series forward (to the right). -Send Backward -Sends the selected data series backward (to the left). +This function is only available if you have data displayed in columns. It is not possible to switch to data display in rows. +Bring Forward +Brings the selected data series forward (to the right). +Send Backward +Sends the selected data series backward (to the left). diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/choose_chart_type.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/choose_chart_type.xhp index 06d1264ea0..8833dff6f7 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/choose_chart_type.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/choose_chart_type.xhp @@ -27,110 +27,110 @@ - Choosing a Chart Type + Choosing a Chart Type - On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type. + On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type.
- The available chart types - Choose from the following chart types, depending on data type and intended presentation effect. + The available chart types + Choose from the following chart types, depending on data type and intended presentation effect. - + Icon and Icon - Column or Bar + Column or Bar - + Icon - Pie + Pie - + Icon - Area + Area - + Icon - Line + Line - + Icon - XY (scatter) + XY (scatter) - + Icon - Bubble + Bubble - + Icon - Net + Net - + Icon - Stock + Stock - + Icon - Column and Line + Column and Line
-   +  
diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/smooth_line_properties.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/smooth_line_properties.xhp index decb6f5117..daab52a466 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/smooth_line_properties.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/smooth_line_properties.xhp @@ -34,30 +34,30 @@ curves;properties in line charts/XY charts properties;smooth lines in line charts/XY charts -Smooth Line Properties -In a chart that displays lines (Line type or XY type), you can choose to show curves instead of straight lines. Some options control the properties of those curves.most possibly these curves are not Bezier curves. +Smooth Line Properties +In a chart that displays lines (Line type or XY type), you can choose to show curves instead of straight lines. Some options control the properties of those curves.most possibly these curves are not Bezier curves.
-To change line properties +To change line properties -Select Cubic Spline or B-Spline. -These are mathematical models that influence the display of the curves. The curves are created by joining together segments of polynomials. +Select Cubic Spline or B-Spline. +These are mathematical models that influence the display of the curves. The curves are created by joining together segments of polynomials. -Optionally set the resolution. A higher value leads to a smoother line. +Optionally set the resolution. A higher value leads to a smoother line. -For B-spline lines optionally set the degree of the polynomials. +For B-spline lines optionally set the degree of the polynomials. -Apply a line curve model. +Apply a line curve model. -Set the resolution. +Set the resolution. -Set the degree of the polynomials. +Set the degree of the polynomials. diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/stepped_line_properties.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/stepped_line_properties.xhp index efa3fbbbfd..e532f7926e 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/stepped_line_properties.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/stepped_line_properties.xhp @@ -24,28 +24,28 @@ curves;properties in line charts/XY charts properties;stepped lines in line charts/XY charts -Stepped Line Properties -In a chart that displays lines (Line type or XY type), you can choose to connect the points with steps instead of straight lines. Some options control the properties of those steps. +Stepped Line Properties +In a chart that displays lines (Line type or XY type), you can choose to connect the points with steps instead of straight lines. Some options control the properties of those steps.
-Different step types +Different step types Start step icon -Start with horizontal line and step up vertically at the end. +Start with horizontal line and step up vertically at the end. End step icon -Start to step up vertically and end with horizontal line. +Start to step up vertically and end with horizontal line. Center X icon -Start with horizontal line, step up vertically in the middle of the X values and end with horizontal line. +Start with horizontal line, step up vertically in the middle of the X values and end with horizontal line. Center Y icon -Start to step up vertically to the middle of the Y values, draw a horizontal line and finish by stepping vertically to the end. +Start to step up vertically to the middle of the Y values, draw a horizontal line and finish by stepping vertically to the end. diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/three_d_view.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/three_d_view.xhp index ce510ef228..48c8f693ec 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/three_d_view.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/three_d_view.xhp @@ -32,114 +32,114 @@ illumination; 3D charts mw made "3D charts;" a one level entry -3D View +3D View - On the first page of the Chart Wizard or in the context menu of a chart you can choose a chart type. Opens a dialog to edit the properties of a three dimensional view for Column, Bar, Pie, and Area charts. For Line and XY (Scatter) charts you can see 3D lines.must be AHID, see i80656 + On the first page of the Chart Wizard or in the context menu of a chart you can choose a chart type. Opens a dialog to edit the properties of a three dimensional view for Column, Bar, Pie, and Area charts. For Line and XY (Scatter) charts you can see 3D lines.must be AHID, see i80656
- The chart preview responds to the new settings that you enter in the dialog. + The chart preview responds to the new settings that you enter in the dialog. - When you leave the dialog with OK, the settings are applied permanently. + When you leave the dialog with OK, the settings are applied permanently. - When you leave the dialog with Cancel or Escape, the chart returns to the state when you opened the dialog. + When you leave the dialog with Cancel or Escape, the chart returns to the state when you opened the dialog. - For a 3D chart you can choose Format - 3D View to set perspective, appearance and illumination. - Perspective + For a 3D chart you can choose Format - 3D View to set perspective, appearance and illumination. + Perspective - Enter the values for rotation of the chart on the three axes and for a perspective view. + Enter the values for rotation of the chart on the three axes and for a perspective view. - Set all angles to 0 for a front view of the chart. Pie charts and donut charts are shown as circles. - With Right-angled axes enabled, you can rotate the chart contents only in X and Y direction, that is, parallel to the chart borders. - An x value of 90, with y and z set to 0, provides a view from top down to the chart. With x set to -90, you see the bottom of the chart. - The rotations are applied in the order first x, then y, last z. - When shading is enabled and you rotate a chart, the lights are rotated as if they are fixed to the chart. - The rotation axes always relate to the page, not to the chart's axes. This is different from some other chart programs. - Select the Perspective check box to view the chart in central perspective as through a camera lens instead of using a parallel projection. - Set the focus length with the spin button. 100% gives a perspective view where a far edge in the chart looks approximately half as big as a near edge. - Older versions of %PRODUCTNAME cannot display the percentage of perspective the same way as the current version.Right-angled axes + Set all angles to 0 for a front view of the chart. Pie charts and donut charts are shown as circles. + With Right-angled axes enabled, you can rotate the chart contents only in X and Y direction, that is, parallel to the chart borders. + An x value of 90, with y and z set to 0, provides a view from top down to the chart. With x set to -90, you see the bottom of the chart. + The rotations are applied in the order first x, then y, last z. + When shading is enabled and you rotate a chart, the lights are rotated as if they are fixed to the chart. + The rotation axes always relate to the page, not to the chart's axes. This is different from some other chart programs. + Select the Perspective check box to view the chart in central perspective as through a camera lens instead of using a parallel projection. + Set the focus length with the spin button. 100% gives a perspective view where a far edge in the chart looks approximately half as big as a near edge. + Older versions of %PRODUCTNAME cannot display the percentage of perspective the same way as the current version.Right-angled axes -If Right-angled axes is enabled, you can rotate the chart contents only in X and Y direction, that is, parallel to the chart borders. Right-angled axes is enabled by default for newly created 3D charts. Pie and Donut charts do not support right-angled axes.X rotation +If Right-angled axes is enabled, you can rotate the chart contents only in X and Y direction, that is, parallel to the chart borders. Right-angled axes is enabled by default for newly created 3D charts. Pie and Donut charts do not support right-angled axes.X rotation -Sets the rotation of the chart on the x axis. The preview responds to the new settings.Y rotation +Sets the rotation of the chart on the x axis. The preview responds to the new settings.Y rotation -Sets the rotation of the chart on the y axis. The preview responds to the new settings.z rotation +Sets the rotation of the chart on the y axis. The preview responds to the new settings.z rotation -Sets the rotation of the chart on the z axis. The preview responds to the new settings.perspective +Sets the rotation of the chart on the z axis. The preview responds to the new settings.perspective -Mark the Perspective box to view the chart as through a camera lens. Use the spin button to set the percentage. With a high percentage nearer objects look bigger than more distant objects. - Appearance +Mark the Perspective box to view the chart as through a camera lens. Use the spin button to set the percentage. With a high percentage nearer objects look bigger than more distant objects. + Appearance - Select a scheme from the list box. + Select a scheme from the list box. - By selecting a scheme, the check boxes and the light sources are set accordingly. + By selecting a scheme, the check boxes and the light sources are set accordingly. - If you mark or unmark a combination of check boxes that is not given by the Realistic or Simple scheme, you create a Custom scheme. + If you mark or unmark a combination of check boxes that is not given by the Realistic or Simple scheme, you create a Custom scheme. - Mark Shading to use the Gouraud method for rendering the surface, otherwise a flat method is used. - The flat method sets a single color and brightness for each polygon. The edges are visible, soft gradients and spot lights are not possible. - The Gouraud method applies gradients for a smoother, more realistic look.Regina: Need an external article on web, which describes the 3D engine in detail. Till that, the user should get some information on Gouraud and Flat. + Mark Shading to use the Gouraud method for rendering the surface, otherwise a flat method is used. + The flat method sets a single color and brightness for each polygon. The edges are visible, soft gradients and spot lights are not possible. + The Gouraud method applies gradients for a smoother, more realistic look.Regina: Need an external article on web, which describes the 3D engine in detail. Till that, the user should get some information on Gouraud and Flat. - Mark Object Borders to draw lines along the edges. + Mark Object Borders to draw lines along the edges. - Mark Rounded Edges to smooth the edges of box shapes. + Mark Rounded Edges to smooth the edges of box shapes. Scheme -Select a scheme from the list box, or click any of the check boxes below.Shading +Select a scheme from the list box, or click any of the check boxes below.Shading -Applies Gouraud shading if marked, or flat shading if unmarked.Object borders +Applies Gouraud shading if marked, or flat shading if unmarked.Object borders -Shows borders around the areas by setting the line style to Solid.Rounded Edges +Shows borders around the areas by setting the line style to Solid.Rounded Edges -Edges are rounded by 5%. +Edges are rounded by 5%. - Illumination - Set the light sources for the 3D view. + Illumination + Set the light sources for the 3D view. - Click any of the eight buttons to switch a directed light source on or off. - By default, the second light source is switched on. It is the first of seven "normal", uniform light sources. The light source number one projects a specular light with highlights. + Click any of the eight buttons to switch a directed light source on or off. + By default, the second light source is switched on. It is the first of seven "normal", uniform light sources. The light source number one projects a specular light with highlights. - For the selected light source, you can then choose a color and intensity in the list box just below the eight buttons. The brightness values of all lights are added, so use dark colors when you enable multiple lights. + For the selected light source, you can then choose a color and intensity in the list box just below the eight buttons. The brightness values of all lights are added, so use dark colors when you enable multiple lights. - The small preview inside this tab page has two sliders to set the vertical and horizontal position of the selected light source. The light source always aims to the middle of the object. + The small preview inside this tab page has two sliders to set the vertical and horizontal position of the selected light source. The light source always aims to the middle of the object. - The button in the corner of the small preview switches the internal illumination model between a sphere and a cube.Regina: Are you sure? I thought, that it only toggles the preview in the dialog. + The button in the corner of the small preview switches the internal illumination model between a sphere and a cube.Regina: Are you sure? I thought, that it only toggles the preview in the dialog. - Use the Ambient light list box to define the ambient light which shines with a uniform intensity from all directions. + Use the Ambient light list box to define the ambient light which shines with a uniform intensity from all directions. preview right bar -Drag the right slider to set the vertical height and direction of the selected light source.preview bottom bar +Drag the right slider to set the vertical height and direction of the selected light source.preview bottom bar -Drag the bottom slider to set the horizontal position and direction of the selected light source.preview right bottom button +Drag the bottom slider to set the horizontal position and direction of the selected light source.preview right bottom button -Click to switch between an illumination model of a sphere or a cube.Light source +Click to switch between an illumination model of a sphere or a cube.Light source -Click to enable or disable the specular light source with highlights. +Click to enable or disable the specular light source with highlights. @@ -147,15 +147,15 @@ -Click to enable or disable the uniform light source. +Click to enable or disable the uniform light source. -Select a color for the selected light source. +Select a color for the selected light source. -Select a color using the color dialog.Ambient light +Select a color using the color dialog.Ambient light -Select a color for the ambient light. +Select a color for the ambient light. -Select a color using the color dialog. +Select a color using the color dialog.
diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/type_area.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/type_area.xhp index bd98428ff8..8e54065723 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/type_area.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/type_area.xhp @@ -32,17 +32,17 @@ area charts chart types;area -Chart Type Area +Chart Type Area -On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type. +On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type.
-Area -An area chart shows values as points on the y axis. The x axis shows categories. The y values of each data series are connected by a line. The area between each two lines is filled with a color. The area chart's focus is to emphasize the changes from one category to the next. -Normal - this subtype plots all values as absolute y values. It first plots the area of the last column in the data range, then the next to last, and so on, and finally the first column of data is drawn. Thus, if the values in the first column are higher than other values, the last drawn area will hide the other areas. -Stacked - this subtypes plots values cumulatively stacked on each other. It ensures that all values are visible, and no data set is hidden by others. However, the y values no longer represent absolute values, except for the last column which is drawn at the bottom of the stacked areas. -Percent - this subtype plots values cumulatively stacked on each other and scaled as percentage of the category total. +Area +An area chart shows values as points on the y axis. The x axis shows categories. The y values of each data series are connected by a line. The area between each two lines is filled with a color. The area chart's focus is to emphasize the changes from one category to the next. +Normal - this subtype plots all values as absolute y values. It first plots the area of the last column in the data range, then the next to last, and so on, and finally the first column of data is drawn. Thus, if the values in the first column are higher than other values, the last drawn area will hide the other areas. +Stacked - this subtypes plots values cumulatively stacked on each other. It ensures that all values are visible, and no data set is hidden by others. However, the y values no longer represent absolute values, except for the last column which is drawn at the bottom of the stacked areas. +Percent - this subtype plots values cumulatively stacked on each other and scaled as percentage of the category total.
diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/type_bubble.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/type_bubble.xhp index 8fd8852469..b4723ca34e 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/type_bubble.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/type_bubble.xhp @@ -30,15 +30,15 @@ bubble charts chart types;bubble -Chart Type Bubble +Chart Type Bubble - On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type. + On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type.
- Bubble - A bubble chart shows the relations of three variables. Two variables are used for the position on the X-axis and Y-axis, while the third variable is shown as the relative size of each bubble. - The data series dialog for a bubble chart has an entry to define the data range for the Bubble Sizes. + Bubble + A bubble chart shows the relations of three variables. Two variables are used for the position on the X-axis and Y-axis, while the third variable is shown as the relative size of each bubble. + The data series dialog for a bubble chart has an entry to define the data range for the Bubble Sizes.
diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/type_column_bar.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/type_column_bar.xhp index 90bc53796b..c854e779a1 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/type_column_bar.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/type_column_bar.xhp @@ -34,22 +34,22 @@ bar charts chart types;column and bar mw made one entry out of two "charts types;" -Chart Type Column and Bar +Chart Type Column and Bar -On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type. +On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type.
-Column -This type shows a bar chart or bar graph with vertical bars. The height of each bar is proportional to its value. The x axis shows categories. The y axis shows the value for each category. -Normal - this subtype shows all data values belonging to a category next to each other. Main focus is on the individual absolute values, compared to every other value. -Stacked - this subtype shows the data values of each category on top of each other. Main focus is the overall category value and the individual contribution of each value within its category. -Percent - this subtype shows the relative percentage of each data value with regard to the total of its category. Main focus is the relative contribution of each value to the category's total. -You can enable a 3D view of the data values. The "realistic" scheme tries to give the best 3D look. The "simple" scheme tries to mimic the chart view of other Office products. -For 3D charts, you can select the shape of each data value from Box, Cylinder, Cone, and Pyramid. -Bar -This type shows a bar chart or bar graph with horizontal bars. The length of each bar is proportional to its value. The y axis shows categories. The x axis shows the value for each category. -The subtypes are the same as for the Column type. +Column +This type shows a bar chart or bar graph with vertical bars. The height of each bar is proportional to its value. The x axis shows categories. The y axis shows the value for each category. +Normal - this subtype shows all data values belonging to a category next to each other. Main focus is on the individual absolute values, compared to every other value. +Stacked - this subtype shows the data values of each category on top of each other. Main focus is the overall category value and the individual contribution of each value within its category. +Percent - this subtype shows the relative percentage of each data value with regard to the total of its category. Main focus is the relative contribution of each value to the category's total. +You can enable a 3D view of the data values. The "realistic" scheme tries to give the best 3D look. The "simple" scheme tries to mimic the chart view of other Office products. +For 3D charts, you can select the shape of each data value from Box, Cylinder, Cone, and Pyramid. +Bar +This type shows a bar chart or bar graph with horizontal bars. The length of each bar is proportional to its value. The y axis shows categories. The x axis shows the value for each category. +The subtypes are the same as for the Column type.
diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/type_column_line.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/type_column_line.xhp index 89d2e90d71..d757b24ebd 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/type_column_line.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/type_column_line.xhp @@ -33,105 +33,105 @@ chart types;column and line combination charts -Chart Type Column and Line +Chart Type Column and Line -On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type. +On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type.
-Column and Line -A Column and Line chart is a combination of a Column chart with a Line chart. -Select one of the variants +Column and Line +A Column and Line chart is a combination of a Column chart with a Line chart. +Select one of the variants -Columns and Lines. The rectangles of the column data series are drawn side by side so that you can easily compare their values. +Columns and Lines. The rectangles of the column data series are drawn side by side so that you can easily compare their values. -Stacked Columns and Lines. The rectangles of the column data series are drawn stacked above each other, so that the height of a column visualizes the sum of the data values. +Stacked Columns and Lines. The rectangles of the column data series are drawn stacked above each other, so that the height of a column visualizes the sum of the data values. -You can insert a second y-axis with Insert - Axes after you finish the wizard. -To specify a data range -The leftmost columns (or the top rows) of the selected data range provide the data that are shown as Columns objects. The other columns or rows of the data range provide the data for the Lines objects. You can change this assignment in the Data Series dialog. +You can insert a second y-axis with Insert - Axes after you finish the wizard. +To specify a data range +The leftmost columns (or the top rows) of the selected data range provide the data that are shown as Columns objects. The other columns or rows of the data range provide the data for the Lines objects. You can change this assignment in the Data Series dialog. -Select the data range. +Select the data range. -Click one of the options for data series in rows or in columns. +Click one of the options for data series in rows or in columns. -Check whether the data range has labels in the first row or in the first column or both. +Check whether the data range has labels in the first row or in the first column or both. -Organizing data series -In the Data Series list box you see a list of all data series in the current chart. -The column data series are positioned at the top of the list, the line data series at the bottom of the list. +Organizing data series +In the Data Series list box you see a list of all data series in the current chart. +The column data series are positioned at the top of the list, the line data series at the bottom of the list. -To organize the data series, select an entry in the list. +To organize the data series, select an entry in the list. -Click Add to add another data series below the selected entry. The new data series has the same type as the selected entry. +Click Add to add another data series below the selected entry. The new data series has the same type as the selected entry. -Click Remove to remove the selected entry from the Data Series list. +Click Remove to remove the selected entry from the Data Series list. -Use the Up and Down arrow buttons to move the selected entry in the list up or down. This way you can convert a Column data series to a List data series and back. This does not change the order in the data source table, but changes only the arrangement in the chart. +Use the Up and Down arrow buttons to move the selected entry in the list up or down. This way you can convert a Column data series to a List data series and back. This does not change the order in the data source table, but changes only the arrangement in the chart. -Editing data series +Editing data series -Click an entry in the list to view and edit the properties for that entry. -In the Data Ranges list box you see the role names and cell ranges of the data series components. +Click an entry in the list to view and edit the properties for that entry. +In the Data Ranges list box you see the role names and cell ranges of the data series components. -Click an entry, then edit the contents in the text box below. -The label next to the text box states the currently selected role. +Click an entry, then edit the contents in the text box below. +The label next to the text box states the currently selected role. -Enter the range or click Select data range to minimize the dialog and select the range with the mouse. +Enter the range or click Select data range to minimize the dialog and select the range with the mouse. -The range for a data role, like Y-Values, must not include a label cell. -Editing categories or data labels +The range for a data role, like Y-Values, must not include a label cell. +Editing categories or data labels -Enter or select a cell range that will be used as text for categories or data labels. +Enter or select a cell range that will be used as text for categories or data labels. -The values in the Categories range will be shown as labels on the x axis. -Inserting chart elements -Use the Chart Elements page of the Chart Wizard to insert any of the following elements: +The values in the Categories range will be shown as labels on the x axis. +Inserting chart elements +Use the Chart Elements page of the Chart Wizard to insert any of the following elements: -Chart titles +Chart titles -Legend +Legend -Visible grid lines +Visible grid lines -For additional elements use the Insert menu of the chart in edit mode. There you can define the following elements: +For additional elements use the Insert menu of the chart in edit mode. There you can define the following elements: -Secondary axes +Secondary axes -Minor grids +Minor grids -Data labels +Data labels -Statistics, for example mean values, y error bars and trend lines +Statistics, for example mean values, y error bars and trend lines -To set different data labels for each data series, use the properties dialog of the data series. +To set different data labels for each data series, use the properties dialog of the data series.
diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/type_line.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/type_line.xhp index 7673ef08b5..39737c2409 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/type_line.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/type_line.xhp @@ -33,20 +33,20 @@ line charts chart types;line -Chart Type Line +Chart Type Line -On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type. +On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type.
-Line -A line chart shows values as points on the y axis. The x axis shows categories. The y values of each data series can be connected by a line. -Points only - this subtype plots only points. -Points and lines - this subtype plots points and connects points of the same data series by a line. -Lines only - this subtype plots only lines. -3D lines - this subtype connects points of the same data series by a 3D line. -Mark Stack series to arrange the points' y values cumulative above each other. The y values no longer represent absolute values, except for the first column which is drawn at the bottom of the stacked points. If you select Percent, the y values are scaled as percentage of the category total. -Choose the Line type from the dropdown to select how the points will be connected. You can choose either Straight lines, Smooth lines to draw curves through the points or Stepped lines to draw lines which step from point to point. Click Properties to change the properties for the smooth or stepped lines. +Line +A line chart shows values as points on the y axis. The x axis shows categories. The y values of each data series can be connected by a line. +Points only - this subtype plots only points. +Points and lines - this subtype plots points and connects points of the same data series by a line. +Lines only - this subtype plots only lines. +3D lines - this subtype connects points of the same data series by a 3D line. +Mark Stack series to arrange the points' y values cumulative above each other. The y values no longer represent absolute values, except for the first column which is drawn at the bottom of the stacked points. If you select Percent, the y values are scaled as percentage of the category total. +Choose the Line type from the dropdown to select how the points will be connected. You can choose either Straight lines, Smooth lines to draw curves through the points or Stepped lines to draw lines which step from point to point. Click Properties to change the properties for the smooth or stepped lines.
diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/type_net.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/type_net.xhp index cf1212a49e..ff5411e75f 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/type_net.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/type_net.xhp @@ -34,15 +34,15 @@ chart types;net radar charts, see net charts -Chart Type Net +Chart Type Net -On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type. +On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type.
-Net -A Net chart displays data values as points connected by some lines, in a grid net that resembles a spider net or a radar tube display. -For each row of chart data, a radial is shown on which the data is plotted. All data values are shown with the same scale, so all data values should have about the same magnitude. +Net +A Net chart displays data values as points connected by some lines, in a grid net that resembles a spider net or a radar tube display. +For each row of chart data, a radial is shown on which the data is plotted. All data values are shown with the same scale, so all data values should have about the same magnitude.
diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/type_pie.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/type_pie.xhp index d6b817de44..16b652a457 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/type_pie.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/type_pie.xhp @@ -31,18 +31,18 @@ pie charts;types chart types;pie/donut mw made one index entry out of two "chart types;"mw made "pie charts" a two level entry -Chart Type Pie +Chart Type Pie - On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type. + On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type.
- Pie - A pie chart shows values as circular sectors of the total circle. The length of the arc, or the area of each sector, is proportional to its value. - Pie - this subtype shows sectors as colored areas of the total pie, for one data column only. In the created chart, you can click and drag any sector to separate that sector from the remaining pie or to join it back. - Exploded pie - this subtype shows the sectors already separated from each other. In the created chart, you can click and drag any sector to move it along a radial from the pie's center. - Donut - this subtype can show multiple data columns. Each data column is shown as one donut shape with a hole inside, where the next data column can be shown. In the created chart, you can click and drag an outer sector to move it along a radial from the donut's center. - Exploded donut - this subtype shows the outer sectors already separated from the remaining donut. In the created chart, you can click and drag an outer sector to move it along a radial from the donut's center. + Pie + A pie chart shows values as circular sectors of the total circle. The length of the arc, or the area of each sector, is proportional to its value. + Pie - this subtype shows sectors as colored areas of the total pie, for one data column only. In the created chart, you can click and drag any sector to separate that sector from the remaining pie or to join it back. + Exploded pie - this subtype shows the sectors already separated from each other. In the created chart, you can click and drag any sector to move it along a radial from the pie's center. + Donut - this subtype can show multiple data columns. Each data column is shown as one donut shape with a hole inside, where the next data column can be shown. In the created chart, you can click and drag an outer sector to move it along a radial from the donut's center. + Exploded donut - this subtype shows the outer sectors already separated from the remaining donut. In the created chart, you can click and drag an outer sector to move it along a radial from the donut's center.
diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/type_stock.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/type_stock.xhp index 1dd00be0dd..e5808ffd2f 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/type_stock.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/type_stock.xhp @@ -31,234 +31,234 @@ chart types;stock data sources;setting for stock charts mw added one entry -Chart Type Stock +Chart Type Stock - On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type. + On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type.
- Stock - A Stock chart illustrates the market trend given by opening price, bottom price, top price and closing price. The transaction volume can also be shown.UFI: should we show example charts for every type? - For a Stock chart the order of the data series is important. The data should be arranged as shown in the example table below. + Stock + A Stock chart illustrates the market trend given by opening price, bottom price, top price and closing price. The transaction volume can also be shown.UFI: should we show example charts for every type? + For a Stock chart the order of the data series is important. The data should be arranged as shown in the example table below. - A + A - B + B - C + C - D + D - E + E - F + F - 1 + 1 - Transaction volume + Transaction volume - Opening price + Opening price - Low (bottom price) + Low (bottom price) - High (top price) + High (top price) - Closing price + Closing price - 2 + 2 - Monday + Monday - 2500 + 2500 - 20 + 20 - 15 + 15 - 25 + 25 - 17 + 17 - 3 + 3 - Tuesday + Tuesday - 3500 + 3500 - 32 + 32 - 22 + 22 - 37 + 37 - 30 + 30 - 4 + 4 - Wednesday + Wednesday - 1000 + 1000 - 15 + 15 - 15 + 15 - 17 + 17 - 17 + 17 - 5 + 5 - Thursday + Thursday - 2200 + 2200 - 40 + 40 - 30 + 30 - 47 + 47 - 35 + 35 - 6 + 6 - Friday + Friday - 4600 + 4600 - 27 + 27 - 20 + 20 - 32 + 32 - 31 + 31
- The open, low, high, and closing values of a row build together one data unit in the chart. A stock price data series consists of several rows containing such data units. The column containing the transaction volume builds an optional second data series. - Depending on the chosen variant, you do not need all columns. - Stock Chart Variants - Choose the Stock chart type on the first page of the Chart wizard. Then select one of the four variants. - Type 1 - Based on low + The open, low, high, and closing values of a row build together one data unit in the chart. A stock price data series consists of several rows containing such data units. The column containing the transaction volume builds an optional second data series. + Depending on the chosen variant, you do not need all columns. + Stock Chart Variants + Choose the Stock chart type on the first page of the Chart wizard. Then select one of the four variants. + Type 1 + Based on low and high column the Type 1 shows the distance between bottom price (low) and top price (high) by a vertical line. - Based on low, high, and close column Type 1 shows an additional horizontal mark for the closing price. - Type 2 - Based on open, low, high, and close column Type 2 generates the traditional "candle stick" chart. Type 2 draws the vertical line between the bottom and top price and adds a rectangle in front, which visualizes the range between the opening and closing price. If you click on the rectangle you see more information in the status bar. %PRODUCTNAME uses different fill colors for rising values (the opening price is lower than the closing price) and falling values. - Type 3 - Based on volume, low, high, and close column chart Type 3 draws a chart like Type 1, with additional columns for the transaction volume.i80596 - Type 4 - Based on all five data columns volume, open, low, high, and close, Type 4 combines a chart of Type 2 with a column chart for the transaction volume. - Because measurement for transaction volume might be "units", a second y axis is introduced in chart Type 3 and Type 4. The price axis is shown on the right side and the volume axis on the left side. - Setting the Data Source - Charts based on its own data - To change the data series of a chart having its own data, choose Chart Data Table from the View menu or from the context menu of the chart in edit mode. - In an embedded chart data table, the data series are always organized in columns. - For a new stock chart first use a column chart. Add the columns you need and enter your data in the order which is shown in the example, omitting any columns not required for the desired variant. Use Move Series Right to change the column order. Close the chart data table. Now use the Chart Type dialog to change to the stock chart variant. - If you have already got a stock chart and you want to change the variant, then first change the chart type to a column chart, add or remove columns so that it fits to the variant, and then change the chart type back to a stock chart.Watch issue 72433 to see whether a change in the handling is done. - Do not write the name of a data series in a row. Write the name into the field above the role name. - The order of the rows determines how the categories are arranged in the chart. Use Move Row Down to change the order. - Charts based on Calc or Writer tables - You can choose or alter a data range on the second page of the Chart wizard or in the Data Range dialog. For fine tuning use the Data Series dialog. - To specify a data range do one of the following: + Based on low, high, and close column Type 1 shows an additional horizontal mark for the closing price. + Type 2 + Based on open, low, high, and close column Type 2 generates the traditional "candle stick" chart. Type 2 draws the vertical line between the bottom and top price and adds a rectangle in front, which visualizes the range between the opening and closing price. If you click on the rectangle you see more information in the status bar. %PRODUCTNAME uses different fill colors for rising values (the opening price is lower than the closing price) and falling values. + Type 3 + Based on volume, low, high, and close column chart Type 3 draws a chart like Type 1, with additional columns for the transaction volume.i80596 + Type 4 + Based on all five data columns volume, open, low, high, and close, Type 4 combines a chart of Type 2 with a column chart for the transaction volume. + Because measurement for transaction volume might be "units", a second y axis is introduced in chart Type 3 and Type 4. The price axis is shown on the right side and the volume axis on the left side. + Setting the Data Source + Charts based on its own data + To change the data series of a chart having its own data, choose Chart Data Table from the View menu or from the context menu of the chart in edit mode. + In an embedded chart data table, the data series are always organized in columns. + For a new stock chart first use a column chart. Add the columns you need and enter your data in the order which is shown in the example, omitting any columns not required for the desired variant. Use Move Series Right to change the column order. Close the chart data table. Now use the Chart Type dialog to change to the stock chart variant. + If you have already got a stock chart and you want to change the variant, then first change the chart type to a column chart, add or remove columns so that it fits to the variant, and then change the chart type back to a stock chart.Watch issue 72433 to see whether a change in the handling is done. + Do not write the name of a data series in a row. Write the name into the field above the role name. + The order of the rows determines how the categories are arranged in the chart. Use Move Row Down to change the order. + Charts based on Calc or Writer tables + You can choose or alter a data range on the second page of the Chart wizard or in the Data Range dialog. For fine tuning use the Data Series dialog. + To specify a data range do one of the following: - Enter the data range in the text box. - In Calc, an example data range would be "$Sheet1.$B$3:$B$14". Note that a data range may consist of more than one region in a spreadsheet, e.g. "$Sheet1.A1:A5;$Sheet1.D1:D5" is also a valid data range. In Writer, an example data range would be "Table1.A1:E4". - As long as the syntax is not correct, %PRODUCTNAME shows the text in red. + Enter the data range in the text box. + In Calc, an example data range would be "$Sheet1.$B$3:$B$14". Note that a data range may consist of more than one region in a spreadsheet, e.g. "$Sheet1.A1:A5;$Sheet1.D1:D5" is also a valid data range. In Writer, an example data range would be "Table1.A1:E4". + As long as the syntax is not correct, %PRODUCTNAME shows the text in red. - In Calc, click Select data range to minimize the dialog, then drag to select the data range. When you release the mouse, the data are entered. Click Select + In Calc, click Select data range to minimize the dialog, then drag to select the data range. When you release the mouse, the data are entered. Click Select data range again to add a data range. In the input field of the minimized dialog, click after the entry and type a semicolon. Then drag to select the next range. - Click one of the options for data series in rows or in columns. - Your stock chart data are "in columns", if the information in a row belongs to the same "candle stick".I don't know whether copying a table based chart to draw or impress needs chart data arranged in columns, and I cannot test it, because the clipboard is broken. - Fine Tuning the Data Ranges of Table Based Stock Charts - You can organize data series and edit the source for parts of single data series on the third page of the Chart wizard or on the page Data Series in the Data Range dialog. - Organize Data Series - In the data series area on the left side of the dialog, you can organize the data series of the actual chart. A stock chart has at least one data series containing the prices. It might have a second data series for transaction volume. - If you have got more than one price data series, use the Up and Down arrow buttons to order them. The order determines the arrangement in the chart. Do the same for volume data series. You cannot switch price and volume data series. - To remove a data series, select the data series in the list and click Remove. - To add a data series, select one of the existing data series and click Add. You get an empty entry below the selected one, which has the same type. If you have no price data series or no volume data series, you must first select a range for these series in the Data Range dialog.Regina: The behavior is odd, but I don't know a better solution. Therefore I have not written an issue. - Setting Data Ranges - In the Data Ranges dialog you can set or change the data range of each component of the selected data series. - In the upper list you see the role name of the components and the current values. When you have selected a role, you can change the value in the text box below the list. The label shows the selected role.deleted a para, see i80596 -Enter the range into the text box or click on Select data range to minimize the dialog and select the range with the mouse. - Select Open Values, Close Values, High Values, and Low Values in any order. Specify only the ranges for those roles which you need for the chosen variant of the stock chart. The ranges need not be next to each other in the table. - Legend - The legend displays the labels from the first row or column or from the special range that you have set in the Data Series dialog. If your chart does not contain labels, the legend displays text like "Row 1, Row 2, ...", or "Column A, Column B, ..." according to the row number or column letter of the chart data.deleted 3 paras -The legend shows the value from the range, which you entered in the Range for Name field in the Data Range dialog. The default entry is the column header of the closing price column. - Select one of the position options. When the chart is finished, you can specify other positions using the Format menu. + Click one of the options for data series in rows or in columns. + Your stock chart data are "in columns", if the information in a row belongs to the same "candle stick".I don't know whether copying a table based chart to draw or impress needs chart data arranged in columns, and I cannot test it, because the clipboard is broken. + Fine Tuning the Data Ranges of Table Based Stock Charts + You can organize data series and edit the source for parts of single data series on the third page of the Chart wizard or on the page Data Series in the Data Range dialog. + Organize Data Series + In the data series area on the left side of the dialog, you can organize the data series of the actual chart. A stock chart has at least one data series containing the prices. It might have a second data series for transaction volume. + If you have got more than one price data series, use the Up and Down arrow buttons to order them. The order determines the arrangement in the chart. Do the same for volume data series. You cannot switch price and volume data series. + To remove a data series, select the data series in the list and click Remove. + To add a data series, select one of the existing data series and click Add. You get an empty entry below the selected one, which has the same type. If you have no price data series or no volume data series, you must first select a range for these series in the Data Range dialog.Regina: The behavior is odd, but I don't know a better solution. Therefore I have not written an issue. + Setting Data Ranges + In the Data Ranges dialog you can set or change the data range of each component of the selected data series. + In the upper list you see the role name of the components and the current values. When you have selected a role, you can change the value in the text box below the list. The label shows the selected role.deleted a para, see i80596 +Enter the range into the text box or click on Select data range to minimize the dialog and select the range with the mouse. + Select Open Values, Close Values, High Values, and Low Values in any order. Specify only the ranges for those roles which you need for the chosen variant of the stock chart. The ranges need not be next to each other in the table. + Legend + The legend displays the labels from the first row or column or from the special range that you have set in the Data Series dialog. If your chart does not contain labels, the legend displays text like "Row 1, Row 2, ...", or "Column A, Column B, ..." according to the row number or column letter of the chart data.deleted 3 paras +The legend shows the value from the range, which you entered in the Range for Name field in the Data Range dialog. The default entry is the column header of the closing price column. + Select one of the position options. When the chart is finished, you can specify other positions using the Format menu.
diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/type_xy.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/type_xy.xhp index ba1d4d3b7e..d720adb350 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/type_xy.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/type_xy.xhp @@ -37,73 +37,73 @@ variances in charts standard deviation in charts mw changed xy to XY (2x) -Chart Type XY (Scatter) +Chart Type XY (Scatter) -On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type. +On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type.
-XY (Scatter) -An XY chart in its basic form is based on one data series consisting of a name, a list of x‑values, and a list of y‑values. Each value pair (x|y) is shown as a point in a coordinate system. The name of the data series is associated with the y‑values and shown in the legend. -Choose an XY chart for the following example tasks: +XY (Scatter) +An XY chart in its basic form is based on one data series consisting of a name, a list of x‑values, and a list of y‑values. Each value pair (x|y) is shown as a point in a coordinate system. The name of the data series is associated with the y‑values and shown in the legend. +Choose an XY chart for the following example tasks: -scale the x‑axis +scale the x‑axis -generate a parameter curve, for example a spiral +generate a parameter curve, for example a spiral -draw the graph of a function +draw the graph of a function -explore the statistical association of quantitative variables +explore the statistical association of quantitative variables -Your XY chart may have more than one data series. -XY Chart Variants -You can choose an XY chart variant on the first page of the Chart Wizard, or by choosing Format - Chart Type for a chart in edit mode. -The chart is created with default settings. After the chart is finished, you can edit its properties to change the appearance. Line styles and icons can be changed on the Line tab page of the data series properties dialog. -Double-click any data point to open the Data Series dialog. In this dialog, you can change many properties of the data series. -For 2D charts, you can choose Insert - Y Error Bars to enable the display of error bars. -You can enable the display of mean value lines and trend lines using commands on the Insert menu. -Points only -Each data point is shown by an icon. %PRODUCTNAME uses default icons with different forms and colors for each data series. The default colors are set in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Charts - Default Colors. -Lines Only -This variant draws straight lines from one data point to the next. The data points are not shown by icons. -The drawing order is the same as the order in the data series. Mark Sort by X Values to draw the lines in the order of the x values. This sorting applies only to the chart, not to the data in the table. -Points and Lines -This variant shows points and lines at the same time. -3D Lines -The lines are shown like tapes. The data points are not shown by icons. In the finished chart choose 3D View to set properties like illumination and angle of view. -Smooth Lines -Choose Smooth from the Line type dropdown to draw curves instead of straight line segments.i80587 -Click Properties to set details for the curves. - +Your XY chart may have more than one data series. +XY Chart Variants +You can choose an XY chart variant on the first page of the Chart Wizard, or by choosing Format - Chart Type for a chart in edit mode. +The chart is created with default settings. After the chart is finished, you can edit its properties to change the appearance. Line styles and icons can be changed on the Line tab page of the data series properties dialog. +Double-click any data point to open the Data Series dialog. In this dialog, you can change many properties of the data series. +For 2D charts, you can choose Insert - Y Error Bars to enable the display of error bars. +You can enable the display of mean value lines and trend lines using commands on the Insert menu. +Points only +Each data point is shown by an icon. %PRODUCTNAME uses default icons with different forms and colors for each data series. The default colors are set in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Charts - Default Colors. +Lines Only +This variant draws straight lines from one data point to the next. The data points are not shown by icons. +The drawing order is the same as the order in the data series. Mark Sort by X Values to draw the lines in the order of the x values. This sorting applies only to the chart, not to the data in the table. +Points and Lines +This variant shows points and lines at the same time. +3D Lines +The lines are shown like tapes. The data points are not shown by icons. In the finished chart choose 3D View to set properties like illumination and angle of view. +Smooth Lines +Choose Smooth from the Line type dropdown to draw curves instead of straight line segments.i80587 +Click Properties to set details for the curves. + Cubic Spline interpolates your data points with polynomials of degree 3. The transitions between the polynomial pieces are smooth, having the same slope and curvature. -The Resolution determines how many line segments are calculated to draw a piece of polynomial between two data points. You can see the intermediate points if you click any data point. - +The Resolution determines how many line segments are calculated to draw a piece of polynomial between two data points. You can see the intermediate points if you click any data point. + B-Spline uses a parametric, interpolating B-spline curve. Those curves are built piecewise from polynomials. The Degree of polynomials sets the degree of these polynomials. -Stepped Lines -Choose Stepped from the Line type dropdown to draw lines which step from point to point instead of straight line segments. -Click Properties to set details for the curves. -There are 4 different step types: +Stepped Lines +Choose Stepped from the Line type dropdown to draw lines which step from point to point instead of straight line segments. +Click Properties to set details for the curves. +There are 4 different step types: Start step icon -Start with horizontal line and step up vertically at the end. +Start with horizontal line and step up vertically at the end. End step icon -Start to step up vertically and end with horizontal line. +Start to step up vertically and end with horizontal line. Center X icon -Start with horizontal line, step up vertically in the middle of the X values and end with horizontal line. +Start with horizontal line, step up vertically in the middle of the X values and end with horizontal line. Center Y icon -Start to step up vertically to the middle of the Y values, draw a horizontal line and finish by stepping vertically to the end. +Start to step up vertically to the middle of the Y values, draw a horizontal line and finish by stepping vertically to the end.
diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_elements.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_elements.xhp index 23e4966d76..f1735bbf96 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_elements.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_elements.xhp @@ -27,74 +27,74 @@ - Chart Wizard - Chart Elements + Chart Wizard - Chart Elements - On this page of the Chart Wizard you can choose the chart elements to be shown. + On this page of the Chart Wizard you can choose the chart elements to be shown.
titles title -Enter a title for your chart. +Enter a title for your chart. subtitle -Enter a subtitle for your chart. +Enter a subtitle for your chart. x axis -Enter a label for the x-axis (horizontal). +Enter a label for the x-axis (horizontal). y axisx axis -Enter a label for the y-axis (vertical). +Enter a label for the y-axis (vertical). z axis -Enter a label for the z-axis. This option is only available for three-dimensional charts. +Enter a label for the z-axis. This option is only available for three-dimensional charts. legend -Displays a legend in your chart. +Displays a legend in your chart. legend left -Positions the legend to the left of the chart. +Positions the legend to the left of the chart. top -Positions the legend to the top of the chart. +Positions the legend to the top of the chart. right -Positions the legend to the right of the chart. +Positions the legend to the right of the chart. bottom -Positions the legend to the bottom of the chart. +Positions the legend to the bottom of the chart. grid x axis -Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the x-axis. +Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the x-axis. y axis -Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the y-axis. +Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the y-axis. z axis -Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the z-axis. This option is only available for three-dimensional charts. +Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the z-axis. This option is only available for three-dimensional charts. secondary x axis ("2nd x axis" in spec doc) -Enter a label for the secondary x-axis. This option is only available for charts that support a secondary x-axis. +Enter a label for the secondary x-axis. This option is only available for charts that support a secondary x-axis. secondary y axis ("2nd y axis" in spec doc) -Enter a label for the secondary y-axis. This option is only available for charts that support a secondary y-axis. +Enter a label for the secondary y-axis. This option is only available for charts that support a secondary y-axis. - To enter chart elements - Enter titles or click the elements that you want to be shown on the current chart. - Titles - If you enter text for a title, subtitle, or any axis, the necessary space will be reserved to display the text next to the chart. If you do not enter a text, no space will be reserved, leaving more space to display the chart. - It is not possible to link the title text to a cell. You must enter the text directly.Regina: See wishlist and issues 8099, 64825 - When the chart is finished, you can change the position and other properties by the Format menu. - Legend - The legend displays the labels from the first row or column, or from the range that you have set in the Data Series dialog. If your chart does not contain labels, the legend displays text like "Row 1, Row 2, ...", or "Column A, Column B, ..." according to the row number or column letter of the chart data. - You cannot enter the text directly, it is automatically generated from the Name cell range. - Select one of the position options. When the chart is finished, you can specify other positions using the Format menu. - Grids -Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the x-axis. -Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the y-axis. -Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the z-axis. This option is only available for three-dimensional charts. - The visible grid lines can help to estimate the data values in the chart. - The distance of the grid lines corresponds to the interval settings in the Scale tab of the axis properties. - Grid lines are not available for pie charts. - Additional elements - For additional elements use the Insert menu of the chart in edit mode. There you can define the following elements: + To enter chart elements + Enter titles or click the elements that you want to be shown on the current chart. + Titles + If you enter text for a title, subtitle, or any axis, the necessary space will be reserved to display the text next to the chart. If you do not enter a text, no space will be reserved, leaving more space to display the chart. + It is not possible to link the title text to a cell. You must enter the text directly.Regina: See wishlist and issues 8099, 64825 + When the chart is finished, you can change the position and other properties by the Format menu. + Legend + The legend displays the labels from the first row or column, or from the range that you have set in the Data Series dialog. If your chart does not contain labels, the legend displays text like "Row 1, Row 2, ...", or "Column A, Column B, ..." according to the row number or column letter of the chart data. + You cannot enter the text directly, it is automatically generated from the Name cell range. + Select one of the position options. When the chart is finished, you can specify other positions using the Format menu. + Grids +Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the x-axis. +Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the y-axis. +Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the z-axis. This option is only available for three-dimensional charts. + The visible grid lines can help to estimate the data values in the chart. + The distance of the grid lines corresponds to the interval settings in the Scale tab of the axis properties. + Grid lines are not available for pie charts. + Additional elements + For additional elements use the Insert menu of the chart in edit mode. There you can define the following elements: - Secondary axes + Secondary axes - Minor grids + Minor grids - Data labels + Data labels - Statistics, for example mean values, y error bars and trend lines + Statistics, for example mean values, y error bars and trend lines
diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_type.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_type.xhp index 8c5486a7a3..1cf0434daf 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_type.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_type.xhp @@ -33,56 +33,56 @@ charts;choosing chart types -Chart Wizard - Chart Type +Chart Wizard - Chart Type -On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type. +On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type.
-To choose a chart type +To choose a chart type -Choose a basic chart type: click any of the entries labeled Column, Bar, Pie, and so on. -The contents on the right side will change to offer more options depending on the basic chart type. +Choose a basic chart type: click any of the entries labeled Column, Bar, Pie, and so on. +The contents on the right side will change to offer more options depending on the basic chart type. -Optionally, click any of the options. While you change the settings in the wizard, watch the preview in the document to see how the chart will look. +Optionally, click any of the options. While you change the settings in the wizard, watch the preview in the document to see how the chart will look. -Press Shift+F1 and point to a control to see an extended help text. -Click Finish on any wizard page to close the wizard and create the chart using the current settings. -Click Next to see the next wizard page, or click the entries on the left side of the wizard to go to that page. -Click Back to see the previous wizard page. -Click Cancel to close the wizard without creating a chart.63365 roadmap +Press Shift+F1 and point to a control to see an extended help text. +Click Finish on any wizard page to close the wizard and create the chart using the current settings. +Click Next to see the next wizard page, or click the entries on the left side of the wizard to go to that page. +Click Back to see the previous wizard page. +Click Cancel to close the wizard without creating a chart.63365 roadmap -Click to go to the named wizard page.63293 basic chart types +Click to go to the named wizard page.63293 basic chart types -Select a basic chart type.63294 options +Select a basic chart type.63294 options -Select a sub type of the basic chart type.551781378 3D look checkbox +Select a sub type of the basic chart type.551781378 3D look checkbox -Enables a 3D look for the data values.551783937 3D dropdown +Enables a 3D look for the data values.551783937 3D dropdown -Select the type of 3D look.63325 bar column shape listbox +Select the type of 3D look.63325 bar column shape listbox -Select a shape from the list.551781379 stack series (for Line) +Select a shape from the list.551781379 stack series (for Line) -Displays stacked series for Line charts.551780866 stack series on top +Displays stacked series for Line charts.551780866 stack series on top -Stack series display values on top of each other.551780867 stack series percent +Stack series display values on top of each other.551780867 stack series percent -Stack series display values as percent.551781380 smooth lines +Stack series display values as percent.551781380 smooth lines -Choose the type of line to draw.551784961 properties +Choose the type of line to draw.551784961 properties -Opens a dialog to set the line or curve properties.551781381 sort by x values (for XY (scatter)) +Opens a dialog to set the line or curve properties.551781381 sort by x values (for XY (scatter)) -Connects points by ascending X values, even if the order of values is different, in an XY scatter diagram.63323 number of lines (Column + line) +Connects points by ascending X values, even if the order of values is different, in an XY scatter diagram.63323 number of lines (Column + line) -Set the number of lines for the Column and Line chart type.Toolbar icon Chart Type +Set the number of lines for the Column and Line chart type.Toolbar icon Chart Type -Opens the Chart Type dialog. +Opens the Chart Type dialog.
diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/wiz_data_range.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/wiz_data_range.xhp index b186ed89ca..ae41c803b0 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/wiz_data_range.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/wiz_data_range.xhp @@ -29,45 +29,45 @@ data ranges in charts mw added one entry -Chart Wizard - Data Range +Chart Wizard - Data Range - On this page of the Chart Wizard you can select one single source of data range. This range may consist of more than one rectangular range of cells.context menu Data Ranges + On this page of the Chart Wizard you can select one single source of data range. This range may consist of more than one rectangular range of cells.context menu Data Ranges -Opens the Data Ranges dialog where you can edit Data Range and Data Series. - Use the Chart Wizard - Data Series page if you need more control over the data ranges. +Opens the Data Ranges dialog where you can edit Data Range and Data Series. + Use the Chart Wizard - Data Series page if you need more control over the data ranges.
- This dialog is only available for charts based on a Calc or Writer table. + This dialog is only available for charts based on a Calc or Writer table. - To specify a data range + To specify a data range - Select the data range. Do one of the following: - Enter the data range in the text box. - In Calc, an example data range would be "$Sheet1.$B$3:$B$14". Note that a data range may consist of more than one region in a spreadsheet, e.g. "$Sheet1.A1:A5;$Sheet1.D1:D5" is also a valid data range. In Writer, an example data range would be "Table1.A1:E4". - In Calc, click Select data range to minimize the dialog, then drag over a cell area to select the data range.Hold down the Ctrl key and drag to select multiple ranges. --- see issue 71894 - If you want a data range of multiple cell areas that are not next to each other, enter the first range, then manually add a semicolon at the end of the text box, then enter the other ranges. Use a semicolon as delimiter between ranges. + Select the data range. Do one of the following: + Enter the data range in the text box. + In Calc, an example data range would be "$Sheet1.$B$3:$B$14". Note that a data range may consist of more than one region in a spreadsheet, e.g. "$Sheet1.A1:A5;$Sheet1.D1:D5" is also a valid data range. In Writer, an example data range would be "Table1.A1:E4". + In Calc, click Select data range to minimize the dialog, then drag over a cell area to select the data range.Hold down the Ctrl key and drag to select multiple ranges. --- see issue 71894 + If you want a data range of multiple cell areas that are not next to each other, enter the first range, then manually add a semicolon at the end of the text box, then enter the other ranges. Use a semicolon as delimiter between ranges. - Click one of the options for data series in rows or in columns. + Click one of the options for data series in rows or in columns. - Check whether the data range has labels in the first row or in the first column or both. + Check whether the data range has labels in the first row or in the first column or both. - In the preview you can see how the final chart will look.data range text box & shrinky + In the preview you can see how the final chart will look.data range text box & shrinky -Enter the data range that you want to include in your chart. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.data series in rows +Enter the data range that you want to include in your chart. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.data series in rows -Data series get their data from consecutive rows in the selected range. For scatter charts, the first data series will contain x-values for all series. All other data series are used as y-values, one for each series.data series in columns +Data series get their data from consecutive rows in the selected range. For scatter charts, the first data series will contain x-values for all series. All other data series are used as y-values, one for each series.data series in columns -Data series get their data from consecutive columns in the selected range. For scatter charts, the first data column will contain x-values for all series. All other data columns are used as y-values, one for each series.first row as label +Data series get their data from consecutive columns in the selected range. For scatter charts, the first data column will contain x-values for all series. All other data columns are used as y-values, one for each series.first row as label -For data series in columns: The first row in the range is used as names for data series. For data series in rows: The first row in the range is used as categories. The remaining rows comprise the data series. If this check box is not selected, all rows are data series.first column as label +For data series in columns: The first row in the range is used as names for data series. For data series in rows: The first row in the range is used as categories. The remaining rows comprise the data series. If this check box is not selected, all rows are data series.first column as label -For data series in columns: The first column in the range is used as names for data series. For data series in rows: The first column in the range is used as categories. The remaining columns comprise the data columns. If this check box is not selected, all columns are data columns. +For data series in columns: The first column in the range is used as names for data series. For data series in rows: The first column in the range is used as categories. The remaining columns comprise the data columns. If this check box is not selected, all columns are data columns.
diff --git a/source/text/schart/01/wiz_data_series.xhp b/source/text/schart/01/wiz_data_series.xhp index 7559fd11e9..8de5e50e51 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/01/wiz_data_series.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/01/wiz_data_series.xhp @@ -32,65 +32,65 @@ order of chart data data series -Chart Wizard - Data Series +Chart Wizard - Data Series -On this page of the Chart Wizard you can change the source range of all data series separately, including their labels. You can also change the range of the categories. You can first select the data range on the Data Range page and then remove unnecessary data series or add data series from other cells here. -If there seem to be too many options on this page, just define the data range on the Chart Wizard - Data Range page and skip this page. +On this page of the Chart Wizard you can change the source range of all data series separately, including their labels. You can also change the range of the categories. You can first select the data range on the Data Range page and then remove unnecessary data series or add data series from other cells here. +If there seem to be too many options on this page, just define the data range on the Chart Wizard - Data Range page and skip this page.
-This dialog is only available for charts based on a Calc or Writer table. +This dialog is only available for charts based on a Calc or Writer table. -Organizing data series -In the Data Series list box you see a list of all data series in the current chart. +Organizing data series +In the Data Series list box you see a list of all data series in the current chart. -To organize the data series, select an entry in the list. +To organize the data series, select an entry in the list. -Click Add to add another data series below the selected entry. The new data series has the same type as the selected entry. +Click Add to add another data series below the selected entry. The new data series has the same type as the selected entry. -Click Remove to remove the selected entry from the Data Series list. +Click Remove to remove the selected entry from the Data Series list. -Use the Up and Down arrow buttons to move the selected entry in the list up or down. This does not change the order in the data source table, but changes only the arrangement in the chart. +Use the Up and Down arrow buttons to move the selected entry in the list up or down. This does not change the order in the data source table, but changes only the arrangement in the chart. -Editing data series +Editing data series -Click an entry in the list to view and edit the properties for that entry. -In the Data Ranges list box you see the role names and cell ranges of the data series components. +Click an entry in the list to view and edit the properties for that entry. +In the Data Ranges list box you see the role names and cell ranges of the data series components. -Click an entry, then edit the contents in the text box below. -The label next to the text box states the currently selected role. +Click an entry, then edit the contents in the text box below. +The label next to the text box states the currently selected role. -Enter the range or click Select data range to minimize the dialog and select the range with the mouse. -If you want a data range of multiple cell areas that are not next to each other, enter the first range, then manually add a semicolon at the end of the text box, then enter the other ranges. Use a semicolon as delimiter between ranges. +Enter the range or click Select data range to minimize the dialog and select the range with the mouse. +If you want a data range of multiple cell areas that are not next to each other, enter the first range, then manually add a semicolon at the end of the text box, then enter the other ranges. Use a semicolon as delimiter between ranges. -The range for a data role, like Y-Values, must not include a label cell. -Editing categories or data labels +The range for a data role, like Y-Values, must not include a label cell. +Editing categories or data labels -Enter or select a cell range that will be used as text for categories or data labels. UFI: red text means what? +Enter or select a cell range that will be used as text for categories or data labels. UFI: red text means what? -Depending on the chart type, the texts are shown on the X axis or as data labels. Regina: If you enter a range here, the check box "First column as label" (assumed data series in columns) on the Data Range page of the dialog is marked automatically and if you erase the entry in the input field, it is unchecked automatically.data series list box -Shows a list of all data series in the chart. Click an entry to view and edit that data series. Click Add to insert a new series into the list after the selected entry.data ranges list box -Shows all the data ranges used by the data series that is selected in the Data Series list box. Each data range shows the role name and the source range address.range for ... & shrinky +Depending on the chart type, the texts are shown on the X axis or as data labels. Regina: If you enter a range here, the check box "First column as label" (assumed data series in columns) on the Data Range page of the dialog is marked automatically and if you erase the entry in the input field, it is unchecked automatically.data series list box +Shows a list of all data series in the chart. Click an entry to view and edit that data series. Click Add to insert a new series into the list after the selected entry.data ranges list box +Shows all the data ranges used by the data series that is selected in the Data Series list box. Each data range shows the role name and the source range address.range for ... & shrinky -Shows the source range address from the second column of the Data Range list box. You can change the range in the text box or by dragging in the document. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.categories & shrinky +Shows the source range address from the second column of the Data Range list box. You can change the range in the text box or by dragging in the document. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.categories & shrinky -Shows the source range address of the categories (the texts you can see on the x-axis of a category chart). For an XY-chart, the text box contains the source range of the data labels which are displayed for the data points. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.add button -Adds a new entry below the current entry in the Data Series list. If an entry is selected, the new data series gets the same chart type.Remove button -Removes the selected entry from the Data Series list.^ up button -Moves up the selected entry in the Data Series list.v down button -Moves down the selected entry in the Data Series list. +Shows the source range address of the categories (the texts you can see on the x-axis of a category chart). For an XY-chart, the text box contains the source range of the data labels which are displayed for the data points. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.add button +Adds a new entry below the current entry in the Data Series list. If an entry is selected, the new data series gets the same chart type.Remove button +Removes the selected entry from the Data Series list.^ up button +Moves up the selected entry in the Data Series list.v down button +Moves down the selected entry in the Data Series list.
diff --git a/source/text/schart/02/01190000.xhp b/source/text/schart/02/01190000.xhp index 07f9b71db0..2437c17f30 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/02/01190000.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/02/01190000.xhp @@ -32,19 +32,19 @@
-Data in Rows -Changes the arrangement of the chart data. +Data in Rows +Changes the arrangement of the chart data.
- + Icon -Data in Rows +Data in Rows
diff --git a/source/text/schart/02/01200000.xhp b/source/text/schart/02/01200000.xhp index 3221b15e75..14ad80f7d6 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/02/01200000.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/02/01200000.xhp @@ -32,19 +32,19 @@
-Data in Columns -Changes the arrangement of the chart data. +Data in Columns +Changes the arrangement of the chart data.
- + Icon -Data in Columns +Data in Columns
diff --git a/source/text/schart/02/01210000.xhp b/source/text/schart/02/01210000.xhp index 0915feaa6b..03b92791b4 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/02/01210000.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/02/01210000.xhp @@ -36,19 +36,19 @@ charts;scaling text mw made "text scaling;" a one level entry and added "charts," -Scale Text -Rescales the text in the chart when you change the size of the chart. +Scale Text +Rescales the text in the chart when you change the size of the chart.
- + Icon -Scale Text +Scale Text
diff --git a/source/text/schart/02/01220000.xhp b/source/text/schart/02/01220000.xhp index e30059efda..ac1b6187ff 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/02/01220000.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/02/01220000.xhp @@ -35,19 +35,19 @@ charts; reorganizing -Automatic Layout -Moves all chart elements to their default positions inside the current chart. This function does not alter the chart type or any other attributes other than the position of elements. +Automatic Layout +Moves all chart elements to their default positions inside the current chart. This function does not alter the chart type or any other attributes other than the position of elements.
- + Icon -Automatic Layout +Automatic Layout
diff --git a/source/text/schart/02/02020000.xhp b/source/text/schart/02/02020000.xhp index e9f52c1510..97062b29a2 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/02/02020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/02/02020000.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Current Chart Type - Displays the name of the current chart type. + Current Chart Type + Displays the name of the current chart type.
diff --git a/source/text/schart/04/01020000.xhp b/source/text/schart/04/01020000.xhp index 5a55ec395a..c9a6861412 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/04/01020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/04/01020000.xhp @@ -34,64 +34,64 @@ shortcut keys; charts charts; shortcuts -Shortcuts for Charts +Shortcuts for Charts -You can use the following shortcut keys in charts. -You can also use the general shortcut keys for $[officename]. +You can use the following shortcut keys in charts. +You can also use the general shortcut keys for $[officename].
-Shortcuts in Charts +Shortcuts in Charts
-Shortcut Keys -Results +Shortcut Keys +Results
-Tab -Select next object. +Tab +Select next object.
-Shift+Tab -Select previous object. +Shift+Tab +Select previous object.
-Home -Select first object. +Home +Select first object.
-End -Select last object. +End +Select last object.
-Esc -Cancel selection +Esc +Cancel selection
-up/down/left/right arrow -Move the object in the direction of the arrow. +up/down/left/right arrow +Move the object in the direction of the arrow.
-up/down/left/right arrow in pie charts -Moves the selected pie segment in the direction of the arrow. +up/down/left/right arrow in pie charts +Moves the selected pie segment in the direction of the arrow.
-F2 in titles -Enter text input mode. +F2 in titles +Enter text input mode.
-F3 -Open group so that you can edit the individual components (in legend and data series). +F3 +Open group so that you can edit the individual components (in legend and data series).
-CommandCtrl+F3 -Exit group (in legend and data series). +CommandCtrl+F3 +Exit group (in legend and data series).
-+/- -Reduce or enlarge the chart ++/- +Reduce or enlarge the chart
-+/- in pie charts -Moves the selected pie segment off or into the pie chart. ++/- in pie charts +Moves the selected pie segment off or into the pie chart.
diff --git a/source/text/schart/main0000.xhp b/source/text/schart/main0000.xhp index af44575ece..541fbed7c3 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/main0000.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/main0000.xhp @@ -30,22 +30,21 @@ charts; overview HowTos for charts MW added one entry -Using Charts in %PRODUCTNAME +Using Charts in %PRODUCTNAME - $[officename] lets you present data graphically in a chart, so that you can visually compare data series and view trends in the data. You can insert charts into spreadsheets, text documents, drawings, and presentations. + $[officename] lets you present data graphically in a chart, so that you can visually compare data series and view trends in the data. You can insert charts into spreadsheets, text documents, drawings, and presentations. - Chart Data - Charts can be based on the following data: + Chart Data + Charts can be based on the following data: - Spreadsheet values from Calc cell rangesalso Excel... + Spreadsheet values from Calc cell rangesalso Excel... - Cell values from a Writer table + Cell values from a Writer table - Values that you enter in the Chart Data Table dialog (you can create these charts in Writer, Draw, or Impress, and you can copy and paste them also to Calc) + Values that you enter in the Chart Data Table dialog (you can create these charts in Writer, Draw, or Impress, and you can copy and paste them also to Calc) command line Insert - (Object -) Chart, moved here from deleted shared/01/04160100.xhp @@ -55,117 +54,117 @@ -Creates a chart in the current document. To use a continuous range of cells as the data source for your chart, click inside the cell range, and then choose this command. Alternatively, select some cells and choose this command to create a chart of the selected cells. - To insert a chart +Creates a chart in the current document. To use a continuous range of cells as the data source for your chart, click inside the cell range, and then choose this command. Alternatively, select some cells and choose this command to create a chart of the selected cells. + To insert a chart - To edit a chart + To edit a chart - Click a chart to edit the object properties: - Size and position on the current page. - Alignment, text wrap, outer borders, and more. + Click a chart to edit the object properties: + Size and position on the current page. + Alignment, text wrap, outer borders, and more. - Double-click a chart to enter the chart edit mode: - Chart data values (for charts with own data). - Chart type, axes, titles, walls, grid, and more. + Double-click a chart to enter the chart edit mode: + Chart data values (for charts with own data). + Chart type, axes, titles, walls, grid, and more. - Double-click a chart element in chart edit mode: - Double-click an axis to edit the scale, type, color, and more. - Double-click a data point to select and edit the data series to which the data point belongs. - With a data series selected, click, then double-click a single data point to edit the properties of this data point (for example, a single bar in a bar chart). - Double-click the legend to select and edit the legend. Click, then double-click a symbol in the selected legend to edit the associated data series. - Double-click any other chart element, or click the element and open the Format menu, to edit the properties. + Double-click a chart element in chart edit mode: + Double-click an axis to edit the scale, type, color, and more. + Double-click a data point to select and edit the data series to which the data point belongs. + With a data series selected, click, then double-click a single data point to edit the properties of this data point (for example, a single bar in a bar chart). + Double-click the legend to select and edit the legend. Click, then double-click a symbol in the selected legend to edit the associated data series. + Double-click any other chart element, or click the element and open the Format menu, to edit the properties. - Click outside the chart to leave the current edit mode. + Click outside the chart to leave the current edit mode. - To print a chart in high quality, you can export the chart to a PDF file and print that file. - In chart edit mode, you see the Formatting Bar for charts near the upper border of the document. The Drawing Bar for charts appears near the lower border of the document. The Drawing Bar shows a subset of the icons from the Drawing toolbar of Draw and Impress. - You can right-click an element of a chart to open the context menu. The context menu offers many commands to format the selected element. + To print a chart in high quality, you can export the chart to a PDF file and print that file. + In chart edit mode, you see the Formatting Bar for charts near the upper border of the document. The Drawing Bar for charts appears near the lower border of the document. The Drawing Bar shows a subset of the icons from the Drawing toolbar of Draw and Impress. + You can right-click an element of a chart to open the context menu. The context menu offers many commands to format the selected element. -Formats the selected title. +Formats the selected title. -Formats the chart area. +Formats the chart area. -Formats the chart wall. +Formats the chart wall. -Formats the chart floor. +Formats the chart floor. -Formats the chart legend. +Formats the chart legend. -Formats the selected axis. +Formats the selected axis. -Formats the selected data point. +Formats the selected data point. -Formats the major grid. +Formats the major grid. -Formats the minor grid. +Formats the minor grid. -Formats the data series. +Formats the data series. -Formats the stock loss indicators. +Formats the stock loss indicators. -Formats the stock gain indicators. +Formats the stock gain indicators. -Formats the data labels. +Formats the data labels. -Formats the Y error bars. +Formats the Y error bars. -Formats the mean value line. +Formats the mean value line. -Formats the trendline. +Formats the trendline. -Formats the trendline equation. +Formats the trendline equation. -Formats the selected data label. +Formats the selected data label. -Opens a dialog to insert chart titles. +Opens a dialog to insert chart titles. -Opens a dialog to insert or delete axes. +Opens a dialog to insert or delete axes. -Opens a dialog to insert an axis. +Opens a dialog to insert an axis. -Opens a dialog to insert an axis title. +Opens a dialog to insert an axis title. -Inserts a major grid. +Inserts a major grid. -Inserts a minor grid. +Inserts a minor grid. -Inserts data labels. +Inserts data labels. -Inserts the trendline equation and the coefficient of determination R². +Inserts the trendline equation and the coefficient of determination R². -Inserts the coefficient of determination R² value. +Inserts the coefficient of determination R² value. -Inserts a single data label. +Inserts a single data label. -Deletes the chart legend. +Deletes the chart legend. -Deletes the selected axis. +Deletes the selected axis. -Deletes the major grid. +Deletes the major grid. -Deletes the minor grid. +Deletes the minor grid. -Deletes all data labels. +Deletes all data labels. -Deletes the trendline equation. +Deletes the trendline equation. -Deletes the R² value. +Deletes the R² value. -Deletes the selected data label. +Deletes the selected data label. -Deletes the mean value line. +Deletes the mean value line. -Deletes the Y error bars. +Deletes the Y error bars. -Resets the selected data point to default format. +Resets the selected data point to default format. -Resets all data points to default format.how to update chart data (drag&drop vs chart data dialog) +Resets all data points to default format.how to update chart data (drag&drop vs chart data dialog) diff --git a/source/text/schart/main0202.xhp b/source/text/schart/main0202.xhp index 386cd10ac4..410f434ff8 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/main0202.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/main0202.xhp @@ -28,26 +28,26 @@
- Formatting Bar - The Formatting Bar is shown when a chart is set to edit mode. Double-click a chart to enter edit mode. Click outside the chart to leave edit mode. + Formatting Bar + The Formatting Bar is shown when a chart is set to edit mode. Double-click a chart to enter edit mode. Click outside the chart to leave edit mode.
- You can edit the formatting of a chart using the controls and icons on the Formatting Bar. + You can edit the formatting of a chart using the controls and icons on the Formatting Bar. -Select Chart Element - Select the element from the chart that you want to format. The element gets selected in the chart preview. Click Format Selection to open the properties dialog for the selected element. - Format Selection - Opens the properties dialog for the selected element. - Chart Type - Opens the Chart Type dialog. - Chart Data Table - Opens the Data Table dialog where you can edit the chart data. - Horizontal Grids - The Horizontal Grids icon on the Formatting bar toggles the visibility of the grid display for the Y axis. - Legend On/Off - To show or hide a legend, click Legend On/Off on the Formatting bar. - Scale Text - Rescales the text in the chart when you change the size of the chart. - Automatic Layout - Moves all chart elements to their default positions inside the current chart. This function does not alter the chart type or any other attributes other than the position of elements. +Select Chart Element + Select the element from the chart that you want to format. The element gets selected in the chart preview. Click Format Selection to open the properties dialog for the selected element. + Format Selection + Opens the properties dialog for the selected element. + Chart Type + Opens the Chart Type dialog. + Chart Data Table + Opens the Data Table dialog where you can edit the chart data. + Horizontal Grids + The Horizontal Grids icon on the Formatting bar toggles the visibility of the grid display for the Y axis. + Legend On/Off + To show or hide a legend, click Legend On/Off on the Formatting bar. + Scale Text + Rescales the text in the chart when you change the size of the chart. + Automatic Layout + Moves all chart elements to their default positions inside the current chart. This function does not alter the chart type or any other attributes other than the position of elements. \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/schart/main0503.xhp b/source/text/schart/main0503.xhp index 6168e502b7..8b66e6c3b2 100644 --- a/source/text/schart/main0503.xhp +++ b/source/text/schart/main0503.xhp @@ -33,13 +33,13 @@
- $[officename] Chart Features - Charts allow you to present data so that it is easy to visualize. + $[officename] Chart Features + Charts allow you to present data so that it is easy to visualize.
- You can create a chart from source data in a Calc spreadsheet or a Writer table. When the chart is embedded in the same document as the data, it stays linked to the data, so that the chart automatically updates when you change the source data. - Chart Types - Choose from a variety of 3D charts and 2D charts, such as bar charts, line charts, stock charts. You can change chart types with a few clicks of the mouse. - Individual Formatting - You can customize individual chart elements, such as axes, data labels, and legends, by right-clicking them in the chart, or with toolbar icons and menu commands. + You can create a chart from source data in a Calc spreadsheet or a Writer table. When the chart is embedded in the same document as the data, it stays linked to the data, so that the chart automatically updates when you change the source data. + Chart Types + Choose from a variety of 3D charts and 2D charts, such as bar charts, line charts, stock charts. You can change chart types with a few clicks of the mouse. + Individual Formatting + You can customize individual chart elements, such as axes, data labels, and legends, by right-clicking them in the chart, or with toolbar icons and menu commands. diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/00/00000004.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/00/00000004.xhp index 347acb7e5b..2852dd2b19 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/00/00000004.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/00/00000004.xhp @@ -32,6 +32,6 @@ - To access this command... + To access this command... diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/01/04010000.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/01/04010000.xhp index 6f68d13202..58cd1bb73e 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/01/04010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/01/04010000.xhp @@ -30,8 +30,8 @@ -Insert Page -Inserts a blank page after the selected page. +Insert Page +Inserts a blank page after the selected page.
diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp index acbd7bb632..f0d6961fc8 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp @@ -31,113 +31,113 @@ shortcut keys;in drawings drawings; shortcut keys -Shortcut Keys for Drawings +Shortcut Keys for Drawings - The following is a list of shortcut keys specific to Drawing documents. - You can also use the general shortcut keys for $[officename]. + The following is a list of shortcut keys specific to Drawing documents. + You can also use the general shortcut keys for $[officename].
- Function Keys for Drawings + Function Keys for Drawings - Shortcut Keys + Shortcut Keys - + Effect - F2 + F2 - Add or edit text. + Add or edit text. - F3 + F3 - Opens group to edit individual objects. + Opens group to edit individual objects. - Command + Command Ctrl+F3 - Close group editor. + Close group editor. - Shift+F3 + Shift+F3 - Opens the Duplicate dialog. + Opens the Duplicate dialog. - F4 + F4 - Opens the Position and Size dialog. + Opens the Position and Size dialog. - F5 + F5 - Opens the Navigator. + Opens the Navigator. - F7 + F7 - Checks spelling. + Checks spelling. - Command + Command Ctrl+F7 - Opens the Thesaurus. + Opens the Thesaurus. - F8 + F8 - Edit points on/off. + Edit points on/off. - Command + Command Ctrl+Shift+F8 - Fits to frame. + Fits to frame. - Command+TF11 + Command+TF11 - Opens Styles and Formatting window. + Opens Styles and Formatting window.
@@ -145,314 +145,312 @@ zooming;shortcut keys drawings; zoom function in -Shortcut Keys for Drawings +Shortcut Keys for Drawings - Shortcut Keys + Shortcut Keys - + Effect - Plus(+) Key + Plus(+) Key - Zooms in. + Zooms in. - Minus(-) Key + Minus(-) Key - Zooms out. + Zooms out. - Multiple(×) Key (number pad) + Multiple(×) Key (number pad) - Zooms to fit entire page in screen. + Zooms to fit entire page in screen. - Divide (÷) Key (number pad) + Divide (÷) Key (number pad) - Zooms in on the current selection. + Zooms in on the current selection. - Command + Command Ctrl+Shift+G - Groups selected objects. + Groups selected objects. - Shift+Command+Option + Shift+Command+Option Ctrl+Alt+A - Ungroups selected group. + Ungroups selected group. - Command + Command Ctrl+Shift+K - Combines selected objects. + Combines selected objects. - Command+Option + Command+Option Ctrl+Alt+Shift+K - Uncombines selected objects. + Uncombines selected objects. - Command + Command Ctrl+Shift+ + - Bring to front. + Bring to front. - Command + Command Ctrl+ + - Bring forward. + Bring forward. - Command + Command Ctrl+ - - Send backward. + Send backward. - Command + Command Ctrl+Shift+ - - Send to back. + Send to back.
- Shortcut Keys Specific to Drawings + Shortcut Keys Specific to Drawings - Shortcut Keys + Shortcut Keys - + Effect - Page Up + Page Up - Switch to previous page + Switch to previous page - Page Down + Page Down - Switch to next page + Switch to next page - Command + Command Ctrl+Page Up - Switch to previous layer + Switch to previous layer - Command + Command Ctrl+Page Down - Switch to next layer + Switch to next layer - Arrow Key + Arrow Key - Moves the selected object in the direction of the arrow key. + Moves the selected object in the direction of the arrow key. - Command + Command Ctrl+Arrow Key - Moves the page view in the direction of the arrow key. + Moves the page view in the direction of the arrow key. - Command + Command Ctrl-click while dragging an object. Note: this shortcut key works only when the Copy when moving option in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw - General is enabled (it is enabled by default). - Creates a copy of the dragged object when mouse button is released. + Creates a copy of the dragged object when mouse button is released. - Command + Command Ctrl+Enter with keyboard focus (F6) on a drawing object icon on Tools bar - Inserts a drawing object of default size into the center of the current view. + Inserts a drawing object of default size into the center of the current view. - Shift+F10 + Shift+F10 - Opens the context menu for the selected object. + Opens the context menu for the selected object. - F2 + F2 - Enters text mode. + Enters text mode. - Enter + Enter - Enters text mode if a text object is selected. + Enters text mode if a text object is selected. - Command + Command Ctrl+Enter - Enters text mode if a text object is selected. If there are no text objects or if you have cycled through all of the text objects on the page, a new page is inserted. + Enters text mode if a text object is selected. If there are no text objects or if you have cycled through all of the text objects on the page, a new page is inserted. - Option + Option Alt - Press the Option + Press the Option Alt key and drag with the mouse to draw or resize an object from the center of the object outward. - Option + Option Alt+ click on an object - Selects the object behind the currently selected object. + Selects the object behind the currently selected object. - Option + Option Alt+Shift+click an object - Selects the object in front of the currently selected object. + Selects the object in front of the currently selected object. - Shift key while selecting an object + Shift key while selecting an object - Adds or removes object to or from the selection. + Adds or removes object to or from the selection. - Shift+ drag while moving an object + Shift+ drag while moving an object - The movement of the selected object is constrained by multiples of 45 degrees. + The movement of the selected object is constrained by multiples of 45 degrees. - Shift+drag while creating or resizing an object + Shift+drag while creating or resizing an object - Constrains the size to keep the object's aspect ratio. + Constrains the size to keep the object's aspect ratio. - Tab + Tab - Cycles through the objects on the page in the order in which they were created. + Cycles through the objects on the page in the order in which they were created. - Shift+Tab + Shift+Tab - Cycles through the objects on the page in the reverse-order in which they were created. + Cycles through the objects on the page in the reverse-order in which they were created. - Esc + Esc - Exits current mode. + Exits current mode.
diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/guide/align_arrange.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/guide/align_arrange.xhp index 3f63f49f27..b0a2df7271 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/guide/align_arrange.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/guide/align_arrange.xhp @@ -29,78 +29,78 @@ -Arranging, Aligning and Distributing Objects +Arranging, Aligning and Distributing Objects arranging; objects (guide) objects;aligning distributing draw objects aligning;draw objects -Arranging Objects -Each object that you place in your document is successively stacked on the preceding object. To re-arrange the stacking order of a selected object, proceed as follows. +Arranging Objects +Each object that you place in your document is successively stacked on the preceding object. To re-arrange the stacking order of a selected object, proceed as follows. -Click the object whose position you want to change. +Click the object whose position you want to change. -Choose Modify - Arrange to bring up the context menu and choose one of the arrange options: - +Choose Modify - Arrange to bring up the context menu and choose one of the arrange options: + Bring to Front places the object on top of all other objects - + Bring Forward places the object one place forward in the stack of objects - + Send Backward places the object one place back in the stack of objects - + Send to Back places the object behind all other objects - + Behind Object places the object behind another object that you select -Arranging an Object Behind Another Object +Arranging an Object Behind Another Object -Click the object whose position you want to change. +Click the object whose position you want to change. -Choose Modify - Arrange to open the context menu and choose Behind Object. The mouse pointer changes to a hand. +Choose Modify - Arrange to open the context menu and choose Behind Object. The mouse pointer changes to a hand. -Click the object behind which you want to place the selected object. +Click the object behind which you want to place the selected object. -Reversing The Stacking Order of Two Objects +Reversing The Stacking Order of Two Objects -Shift-click both objects to select them. +Shift-click both objects to select them. -Choose Modify - Arrange to open the context menu and choose Reverse. +Choose Modify - Arrange to open the context menu and choose Reverse. -Aligning Objects -The Alignment function enables you to align objects relative to each other or relative to the page. +Aligning Objects +The Alignment function enables you to align objects relative to each other or relative to the page. -Select an object to align it to the page or select multiple objects to align them relative to each other. +Select an object to align it to the page or select multiple objects to align them relative to each other. -Choose Modify - Alignment and select one of the alignment options. +Choose Modify - Alignment and select one of the alignment options. -Distributing Objects -If you select three or more objects in Draw, you can also use the Distribution command to distribute the vertical and horizontal spacing evenly between the objects. +Distributing Objects +If you select three or more objects in Draw, you can also use the Distribution command to distribute the vertical and horizontal spacing evenly between the objects. -Select three or more objects to be distributed. +Select three or more objects to be distributed. -Choose Modify - Distribution. +Choose Modify - Distribution. -Select the horizontal and vertical distribution option and click OK. +Select the horizontal and vertical distribution option and click OK. -Selected objects are distributed evenly along the horizontal or vertical axis. The two outermost objects are used as reference points and do not move when the Distribution command is applied. +Selected objects are distributed evenly along the horizontal or vertical axis. The two outermost objects are used as reference points and do not move when the Distribution command is applied.
diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/guide/color_define.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/guide/color_define.xhp index f4bc6dc0d2..808ff16ed0 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/guide/color_define.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/guide/color_define.xhp @@ -31,43 +31,43 @@ user-defined colors custom colors -Defining Custom Colors +Defining Custom Colors - If you want, you can mix a custom color and add it to a color table. - To define a custom color + If you want, you can mix a custom color and add it to a color table. + To define a custom color - Choose Format - Area and click the Colors tab. A table of the predefined colors is displayed. - Changes made to the standard color table are permanent and are saved automatically. + Choose Format - Area and click the Colors tab. A table of the predefined colors is displayed. + Changes made to the standard color table are permanent and are saved automatically. - Click a color in the table that is similar to the one you want to mix. The color appears in the upper preview box to the right of the table. + Click a color in the table that is similar to the one you want to mix. The color appears in the upper preview box to the right of the table. - Select the RGB or CMYK color model in the box below the preview boxes. - %PRODUCTNAME uses only the RGB color model for printing in color. The CMYK controls are provided only to ease the input of color values using CMYK notation. - The RGB color model mixes red, green and blue light to create colors on a computer screen. In the RGB model, the three color components are additive and can have values ranging from 0 (black) to 255 (white). The CMYK color model combines Cyan (C), Magenta (M), Yellow (Y), and blacK (K, also used for "Key") to create colors for printing. The four colors of the CMYK models are subtractive and are defined as percentages. Black corresponds to 100 % and white to 0 %. + Select the RGB or CMYK color model in the box below the preview boxes. + %PRODUCTNAME uses only the RGB color model for printing in color. The CMYK controls are provided only to ease the input of color values using CMYK notation. + The RGB color model mixes red, green and blue light to create colors on a computer screen. In the RGB model, the three color components are additive and can have values ranging from 0 (black) to 255 (white). The CMYK color model combines Cyan (C), Magenta (M), Yellow (Y), and blacK (K, also used for "Key") to create colors for printing. The four colors of the CMYK models are subtractive and are defined as percentages. Black corresponds to 100 % and white to 0 %. - Enter a numeric value in the boxes next to the color components. The new color appears in the preview box directly above the color model box. - You can also create a color using a color spectrum. Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog. Click a color. Use the Hue, Saturation, and Brightness boxes to adjust your color selection. + Enter a numeric value in the boxes next to the color components. The new color appears in the preview box directly above the color model box. + You can also create a color using a color spectrum. Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog. Click a color. Use the Hue, Saturation, and Brightness boxes to adjust your color selection. - Do one of the following: + Do one of the following: - If you want to replace the color in the standard color table that your custom color is based on, click Modify. + If you want to replace the color in the standard color table that your custom color is based on, click Modify. - If you want to add your custom color to the standard color table, enter a name in the Name text box and click Add. + If you want to add your custom color to the standard color table, enter a name in the Name text box and click Add.
- Color bar + Color bar
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/guide/combine_etc.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/guide/combine_etc.xhp index d47419670c..82537a942c 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/guide/combine_etc.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/guide/combine_etc.xhp @@ -41,95 +41,95 @@ subtracting polygons constructing shapes - Combining Objects and Constructing Shapes + Combining Objects and Constructing Shapes - Combined drawing objects act as grouped objects, except that you cannot enter the group to edit the individual objects. - You can only combine 2D objects. - To combine 2D objects: + Combined drawing objects act as grouped objects, except that you cannot enter the group to edit the individual objects. + You can only combine 2D objects. + To combine 2D objects: - Select two or more 2D objects. + Select two or more 2D objects. - Choose Modify - Combine. + Choose Modify - Combine. - Unlike groups, a combined object takes on the properties of the lowermost object in the stacking order. You can split apart combined objects, but the original object properties are lost. - When you combine objects, holes appear where the objects overlap. + Unlike groups, a combined object takes on the properties of the lowermost object in the stacking order. You can split apart combined objects, but the original object properties are lost. + When you combine objects, holes appear where the objects overlap. - + Illustration for combining objects
- In the illustration, the uncombined objects are on the left and the combined objects on the right. - Constructing Shapes - You can construct shapes by applying the Shapes - Merge, Subtract and Intersect commands to two or more drawing objects. - Shape commands only work on 2D objects. - Constructed shapes take on the properties of the lowermost object in the stacking order. - To construct a shape: + In the illustration, the uncombined objects are on the left and the combined objects on the right. + Constructing Shapes + You can construct shapes by applying the Shapes - Merge, Subtract and Intersect commands to two or more drawing objects. + Shape commands only work on 2D objects. + Constructed shapes take on the properties of the lowermost object in the stacking order. + To construct a shape: - Select two or more 2D objects. + Select two or more 2D objects. - Choose Modify - Shapes and one of the following: + Choose Modify - Shapes and one of the following: - Merge + Merge - Subtract + Subtract - Intersect. + Intersect. - Shape Commands - In the following illustrations, the original objects are on the left and the modified shapes on the right. - Shapes - Merge + Shape Commands + In the following illustrations, the original objects are on the left and the modified shapes on the right. + Shapes - Merge - + Illustration for merging shapes
- Adds the area of the selected objects to the area of the lowermost object in the stacking order. - Shapes - Subtract + Adds the area of the selected objects to the area of the lowermost object in the stacking order. + Shapes - Subtract - + Illustration for subtracting shapes
- Subtracts the area of the selected objects from the area of the lowermost object in the stacking order. - Shapes - Intersect + Subtracts the area of the selected objects from the area of the lowermost object in the stacking order. + Shapes - Intersect - + Illustration for intersecting shapes
- The overlapping area of the selected objects creates the new shape. - The area outside the overlap is removed. + The overlapping area of the selected objects creates the new shape. + The area outside the overlap is removed.
diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/guide/cross_fading.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/guide/cross_fading.xhp index 2e8c5e923a..1755a327b1 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/guide/cross_fading.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/guide/cross_fading.xhp @@ -33,40 +33,40 @@ draw objects; cross-fading two objects cross-fading; two draw objects -Cross-Fading Two Objects +Cross-Fading Two Objects -Cross-fading creates shapes and distributes them by uniform increments between two drawing objects. -The cross-fading command is only available in $[officename] Draw. You can, however, copy and paste cross-faded objects into $[officename] Impress. -To cross-fade two objects: +Cross-fading creates shapes and distributes them by uniform increments between two drawing objects. +The cross-fading command is only available in $[officename] Draw. You can, however, copy and paste cross-faded objects into $[officename] Impress. +To cross-fade two objects: -Hold down Shift and click each object. +Hold down Shift and click each object. -Choose Edit - Cross-fading. +Choose Edit - Cross-fading. -Enter a value to specify the number of objects between the start and end of the cross-fade in the Increments box. +Enter a value to specify the number of objects between the start and end of the cross-fade in the Increments box. -Click OK. +Click OK. -A group containing the two original objects and the specified number (increments) of cross-faded objects is displayed. +A group containing the two original objects and the specified number (increments) of cross-faded objects is displayed. - + Illustration for crossfading -You can edit the individual objects of a group by selecting the group and pressing F3. Press CommandCtrl+F3 to exit the group editing mode. +You can edit the individual objects of a group by selecting the group and pressing F3. Press CommandCtrl+F3 to exit the group editing mode.
-Editing - Cross-fading +Editing - Cross-fading
diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/guide/draw_sector.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/guide/draw_sector.xhp index 351819ece2..a80eba1525 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/guide/draw_sector.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/guide/draw_sector.xhp @@ -38,33 +38,33 @@ ellipses; segments drawing; sectors and segments -Drawing Sectors and Segments +Drawing Sectors and Segments -The Ellipse toolbar contains tools for drawing ellipses and circles. You can also draw segments and sectors of circles and ellipses. -To draw a sector of a circle or an ellipse: +The Ellipse toolbar contains tools for drawing ellipses and circles. You can also draw segments and sectors of circles and ellipses. +To draw a sector of a circle or an ellipse: -Open the Ellipses toolbar and click one of the Circle Pie or Ellipse Pie icons +Open the Ellipses toolbar and click one of the Circle Pie or Ellipse Pie icons Icon . The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair with a small icon of a sector. -Position the pointer at the edge of the circle you want to draw and drag to create the circle. -To create a circle by dragging from the center, press OptionAlt while dragging. +Position the pointer at the edge of the circle you want to draw and drag to create the circle. +To create a circle by dragging from the center, press OptionAlt while dragging. -Release the mouse button when the circle has reached the size you want. A line corresponding to the circle radius appears in the circle. +Release the mouse button when the circle has reached the size you want. A line corresponding to the circle radius appears in the circle. -Position the pointer where you want to place the first boundary of the sector and click. -As the radius line that follows the pointer is constrained to the circle boundaries, you can click anywhere in the document. +Position the pointer where you want to place the first boundary of the sector and click. +As the radius line that follows the pointer is constrained to the circle boundaries, you can click anywhere in the document. -Position the pointer where you want to place the second boundary of the sector and click. The completed sector is displayed. +Position the pointer where you want to place the second boundary of the sector and click. The completed sector is displayed. -To draw a segment of a circle or ellipse, follow the steps for creating a sector based on a circle. -To draw an arc based on an ellipse, choose one of the arc icons and follow the same steps for creating a sector based on a circle. +To draw a segment of a circle or ellipse, follow the steps for creating a sector based on a circle. +To draw an arc based on an ellipse, choose one of the arc icons and follow the same steps for creating a sector based on a circle.
diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/guide/duplicate_object.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/guide/duplicate_object.xhp index d0dcc4d5d5..b68b363475 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/guide/duplicate_object.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/guide/duplicate_object.xhp @@ -35,33 +35,33 @@ duplicating draw objects multiplying draw objects -Duplicating Objects +Duplicating Objects -You can create duplicate or multiple copies of an object. The copies can be identical or can differ in size, color, orientation and location. -The following example creates a stack of coins by making multiple copies of a single ellipse. +You can create duplicate or multiple copies of an object. The copies can be identical or can differ in size, color, orientation and location. +The following example creates a stack of coins by making multiple copies of a single ellipse. -Use the Ellipse tool to draw a solid yellow ellipse. +Use the Ellipse tool to draw a solid yellow ellipse. -Select the ellipse and choose Edit - Duplicate. +Select the ellipse and choose Edit - Duplicate. -Enter 12 as Number of copies. +Enter 12 as Number of copies. -Enter a negative value for the Width and Height so that the coins decrease in size as you go up the stack. +Enter a negative value for the Width and Height so that the coins decrease in size as you go up the stack. -To define a color transition for the coins, select different colors in the Start and End boxes. The Start color is applied to the object that you are duplicating. +To define a color transition for the coins, select different colors in the Start and End boxes. The Start color is applied to the object that you are duplicating. -Click OK to create the duplicates. +Click OK to create the duplicates.
-Edit - Duplicate +Edit - Duplicate diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/guide/eyedropper.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/guide/eyedropper.xhp index 607da32bac..057503c269 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/guide/eyedropper.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/guide/eyedropper.xhp @@ -34,41 +34,41 @@ bitmaps;replacing colors GIF images;replacing colors -Replacing Colors +Replacing Colors -You can replace colors in bitmaps with the Color Replacer tool. -Up to four colors can be replaced at once. -You can also use the Transparency option to replace the transparent areas of an image with a color. -Similarly, you can use the Color Replacer to make a color on your image transparent. -To replace colors with the Color Replacer tool -Ensure that the image you are using is a bitmap (for example, BMP, GIF, JPG, or PNG) or a metafile (for example, WMF). +You can replace colors in bitmaps with the Color Replacer tool. +Up to four colors can be replaced at once. +You can also use the Transparency option to replace the transparent areas of an image with a color. +Similarly, you can use the Color Replacer to make a color on your image transparent. +To replace colors with the Color Replacer tool +Ensure that the image you are using is a bitmap (for example, BMP, GIF, JPG, or PNG) or a metafile (for example, WMF). -Choose Tools - Color Replacer. +Choose Tools - Color Replacer. -Click the Color Replacer icon and position the mouse pointer over the color you want to replace in the image. The color appears in the box next to the icon. +Click the Color Replacer icon and position the mouse pointer over the color you want to replace in the image. The color appears in the box next to the icon. -Click the color in the image. The color appears in the first Source color box and the check box next to the color is selected. +Click the color in the image. The color appears in the first Source color box and the check box next to the color is selected. -In the Replace with box, select the new color. -This replaces all occurrences of the Source color in the image. +In the Replace with box, select the new color. +This replaces all occurrences of the Source color in the image. -If you want to replace another color while the dialog is open, select the check box in front of Source color in the next row and repeat steps 3 to 5. +If you want to replace another color while the dialog is open, select the check box in front of Source color in the next row and repeat steps 3 to 5. -Click Replace. +Click Replace. -If you want to expand or contract the color selection area, increase or decrease the tolerance of the Color Replacer tool and repeat your selection. +If you want to expand or contract the color selection area, increase or decrease the tolerance of the Color Replacer tool and repeat your selection.
-Color Replacer +Color Replacer
diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/guide/gradient.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/guide/gradient.xhp index d82f92c3b1..d9709abcdf 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/guide/gradient.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/guide/gradient.xhp @@ -39,57 +39,57 @@ transparency;adjusting mw deleted "applying;" - Creating Gradient Fills + Creating Gradient Fills - A gradient fill is an incremental blend of two different colors, or shades of the same color, that you can apply to a drawing object. - To apply a gradient: + A gradient fill is an incremental blend of two different colors, or shades of the same color, that you can apply to a drawing object. + To apply a gradient: - Select a drawing object. + Select a drawing object. - Choose Format - Area and select Gradient as the Fill type. + Choose Format - Area and select Gradient as the Fill type. - Select a gradient style from the list and click OK. + Select a gradient style from the list and click OK. - Creating Custom Gradients - You can define your own gradients and modify existing gradients, as well as save and load a list of gradient files. - To create a custom gradient: + Creating Custom Gradients + You can define your own gradients and modify existing gradients, as well as save and load a list of gradient files. + To create a custom gradient: - Choose Format - Area and click the Gradients tab. + Choose Format - Area and click the Gradients tab. - Select a gradient from the list to use as the basis for your new gradient and click Add. + Select a gradient from the list to use as the basis for your new gradient and click Add. - Type a name for the gradient in the text box and click OK. - The name appears at the end of the gradient list and is selected for editing. + Type a name for the gradient in the text box and click OK. + The name appears at the end of the gradient list and is selected for editing. - Set the gradient properties and click Modify to save the gradient. + Set the gradient properties and click Modify to save the gradient. - Click OK. + Click OK. - Using Gradients and Transparency - You can adjust the properties of a gradient as well as the transparency of a drawing object with your mouse. - To adjust the gradient of a drawing object: + Using Gradients and Transparency + You can adjust the properties of a gradient as well as the transparency of a drawing object with your mouse. + To adjust the gradient of a drawing object: - Select a drawing object with the gradient that you want to modify. + Select a drawing object with the gradient that you want to modify. - Choose Format - Area and click the Gradients tab. + Choose Format - Area and click the Gradients tab. - Adjust the values for the gradient to suit your needs and click OK. + Adjust the values for the gradient to suit your needs and click OK. - To adjust the transparency of an object, select the object, choose Format - Area and click the Transparency tab. + To adjust the transparency of an object, select the object, choose Format - Area and click the Transparency tab.
diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/guide/graphic_insert.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/guide/graphic_insert.xhp index 1f97d16d5d..e7e56e3377 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/guide/graphic_insert.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/guide/graphic_insert.xhp @@ -34,18 +34,18 @@ files; inserting pictures inserting;pictures -Inserting Pictures +Inserting Pictures -Choose Insert - Image. +Choose Insert - Image. -Locate the image you want to insert. Select the Link check box to insert only a link to the image. If you want to see the image before you insert it, select Preview. -After you insert a linked image, do not change the name of the source image or move the source image to another directory. +Locate the image you want to insert. Select the Link check box to insert only a link to the image. If you want to see the image before you insert it, select Preview. +After you insert a linked image, do not change the name of the source image or move the source image to another directory. -Click Open to insert the image. +Click Open to insert the image.
diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/guide/groups.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/guide/groups.xhp index 9937bd59e7..0f58e29355 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/guide/groups.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/guide/groups.xhp @@ -31,55 +31,55 @@ grouping; draw objects draw objects; grouping -mw delelted "groups;entering" and copied "selecting;group objects" to the new shared guide groups.xhp.Grouping Objects +mw delelted "groups;entering" and copied "selecting;group objects" to the new shared guide groups.xhp.Grouping Objects -You can combine several objects into a group so that they act as a single object. You can move and transform all objects in a group as a single unit. You can also change the properties (for example, line size, fill color) of all objects in a group as a whole or for individual objects in a group. Groups can be temporary or assigned: +You can combine several objects into a group so that they act as a single object. You can move and transform all objects in a group as a single unit. You can also change the properties (for example, line size, fill color) of all objects in a group as a whole or for individual objects in a group. Groups can be temporary or assigned: -Temporary - group only lasts as long as all of the combined objects are selected. +Temporary - group only lasts as long as all of the combined objects are selected. -Assigned - group lasts until it is ungrouped through a menu command. +Assigned - group lasts until it is ungrouped through a menu command. -Groups can also be grouped in other groups. Actions applied to a group do not affect the relative position of the individual objects to each other in the group. -To group objects: +Groups can also be grouped in other groups. Actions applied to a group do not affect the relative position of the individual objects to each other in the group. +To group objects: - + Icon -Select the objects you want to group and choose Modify - Group. +Select the objects you want to group and choose Modify - Group.
-For example, you can group all of the objects in a company logo to move and resize the logo as a single object. -After you have grouped objects, selecting any part of the group selects the entire group. -Selecting Objects in a Group +For example, you can group all of the objects in a company logo to move and resize the logo as a single object. +After you have grouped objects, selecting any part of the group selects the entire group. +Selecting Objects in a Group - + Icon -You can select single objects in a group by entering the group. Double-click a group to enter it and click on the object to select it. You can also add or delete objects to and from a group in this mode. The objects that are not part of the group are grayed out. +You can select single objects in a group by entering the group. Double-click a group to enter it and click on the object to select it. You can also add or delete objects to and from a group in this mode. The objects that are not part of the group are grayed out.
- + Icon -To exit a group, double-click anywhere outside it. +To exit a group, double-click anywhere outside it.
diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/guide/join_objects.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/guide/join_objects.xhp index ac117b0602..fc3b7e76ea 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/guide/join_objects.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/guide/join_objects.xhp @@ -35,20 +35,20 @@ lines; connecting objects areas; from connected lines -Connecting Lines +Connecting Lines -When you connect lines, lines are drawn between neighboring endpoints. -To connect lines: +When you connect lines, lines are drawn between neighboring endpoints. +To connect lines: -Select two or more lines. +Select two or more lines. -Right-click and choose Modify - Connect. +Right-click and choose Modify - Connect. -To create a closed object, right-click a line and choose Close Object. -You can only use the Close Object command on connected lines, Freeform Lines and unfilled Curves. +To create a closed object, right-click a line and choose Close Object. +You can only use the Close Object command on connected lines, Freeform Lines and unfilled Curves.
diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/guide/join_objects3d.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/guide/join_objects3d.xhp index 2c7d482340..c1fe37eaf1 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/guide/join_objects3d.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/guide/join_objects3d.xhp @@ -32,34 +32,34 @@ combining;3D objects joining;3D objects - -Assembling 3D Objects + +Assembling 3D Objects -3D objects that each form a 3D scene can be combined into a single 3D scene. -To combine 3D objects: +3D objects that each form a 3D scene can be combined into a single 3D scene. +To combine 3D objects: -Insert a 3D object from the 3D Objects toolbar (for example, a cube). +Insert a 3D object from the 3D Objects toolbar (for example, a cube). -Insert a second slightly larger 3D object (for example, a sphere). +Insert a second slightly larger 3D object (for example, a sphere). -Select the second 3D object (sphere) and choose Edit - Cut. +Select the second 3D object (sphere) and choose Edit - Cut. -Double-click the first object (cube) to enter its group. +Double-click the first object (cube) to enter its group. -Choose Edit - Paste. Both objects are now part of the same group. If you want, you can edit the individual objects or change their position within the group. +Choose Edit - Paste. Both objects are now part of the same group. If you want, you can edit the individual objects or change their position within the group. -Double-click outside the group to exit the group. +Double-click outside the group to exit the group. -You cannot intersect or subtract 3D objects. +You cannot intersect or subtract 3D objects.
-Objects in 3D +Objects in 3D
diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/guide/keyboard.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/guide/keyboard.xhp index c341921825..eb162bbfb1 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/guide/keyboard.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/guide/keyboard.xhp @@ -34,38 +34,38 @@ draw objects; text entry mode text entry mode for draw objects -Shortcut Keys for Drawing Objects +Shortcut Keys for Drawing Objects -You can create and edit drawing objects using the keyboard. +You can create and edit drawing objects using the keyboard.
-To Create and Edit a Drawing Object +To Create and Edit a Drawing Object -Press F6 to navigate to the Drawing bar. +Press F6 to navigate to the Drawing bar. -Press the Right arrow key until you reach the toolbar icon of a drawing tool. +Press the Right arrow key until you reach the toolbar icon of a drawing tool. -If there is an arrow next to the icon, the drawing tool opens a sub toolbar. Press the Up or Down arrow key to open the sub toolbar, then press the Right or Left key to select an icon. +If there is an arrow next to the icon, the drawing tool opens a sub toolbar. Press the Up or Down arrow key to open the sub toolbar, then press the Right or Left key to select an icon. -Press CommandCtrl+Enter. -The object is created at the center of the current document. +Press CommandCtrl+Enter. +The object is created at the center of the current document. -To return to the document, press CommandCtrl+F6. -You can use the arrow keys to position the object where you want. To choose a command from the context menu for the object, press Shift+F10. +To return to the document, press CommandCtrl+F6. +You can use the arrow keys to position the object where you want. To choose a command from the context menu for the object, press Shift+F10. -To Select an Object +To Select an Object -Press CommandCtrl+F6 to enter the document. +Press CommandCtrl+F6 to enter the document. -Press Tab until you reach the object you want to select. +Press Tab until you reach the object you want to select.
diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/guide/main.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/guide/main.xhp index c7b21d0473..f3e1ff4cdc 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/guide/main.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/guide/main.xhp @@ -31,10 +31,10 @@ instructions; $[officename] Draw Howtos for Draw MW added an entry -Instructions for Using $[officename] Draw +Instructions for Using $[officename] Draw -Editing and Grouping Objects +Editing and Grouping Objects @@ -44,14 +44,14 @@ -Editing Colors and Textures +Editing Colors and Textures -Editing Text +Editing Text -Working with Layers +Working with Layers @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ -Miscellaneous +Miscellaneous diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/guide/rotate_object.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/guide/rotate_object.xhp index 49be515252..9ad316c37d 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/guide/rotate_object.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/guide/rotate_object.xhp @@ -32,37 +32,37 @@ pivot points of draw objects skewing draw objects -Rotating Objects +Rotating Objects -You can rotate an object around its default pivot point (center point) or a pivot point that you designate. +You can rotate an object around its default pivot point (center point) or a pivot point that you designate. - + Icon -Select the object you want to rotate. On the Mode toolbar in $[officename] Draw or on the Drawing bar in $[officename] Impress, click the Rotate icon. +Select the object you want to rotate. On the Mode toolbar in $[officename] Draw or on the Drawing bar in $[officename] Impress, click the Rotate icon.
-Move the pointer to a corner handle so that the pointer changes to a rotate symbol. Drag the handle to rotate the object. -Hold down the Shift key to restrict the rotation to multiples of 15 degrees. -Right-click the object to open the context menu. Choose Position and Size - Rotation to enter an exact rotation value. +Move the pointer to a corner handle so that the pointer changes to a rotate symbol. Drag the handle to rotate the object. +Hold down the Shift key to restrict the rotation to multiples of 15 degrees. +Right-click the object to open the context menu. Choose Position and Size - Rotation to enter an exact rotation value. - + Icon
-To change the pivot point, drag the small circle in the center of the object to a new location. -To skew the object vertically or horizontally, drag one of the side handles. +To change the pivot point, drag the small circle in the center of the object to a new location. +To skew the object vertically or horizontally, drag one of the side handles.
diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/guide/text_enter.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/guide/text_enter.xhp index dbae30512b..39a32a90e9 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/guide/text_enter.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/guide/text_enter.xhp @@ -33,105 +33,101 @@ pasting;text from other documents legends; drawings mw changed "adding;" to "inserting;" -Adding Text +Adding Text - There are several types of text you can add to a drawing or presentation: + There are several types of text you can add to a drawing or presentation: - Text in a text box + Text in a text box - Text that changes character size to fill the frame size + Text that changes character size to fill the frame size - Text that is added to any drawing object by double-clicking the object + Text that is added to any drawing object by double-clicking the object - Text that is copied from a Writer document + Text that is copied from a Writer document - Text that is inserted from a text document or HTML document + Text that is inserted from a text document or HTML document - Adding a Text Box + Adding a Text Box - Click the Text icon + Click the Text icon Icon and move the mouse pointer to where you want to enter the text box. - Drag a text box to the size you want in your document. + Drag a text box to the size you want in your document. - Type or paste your text into the text box. + Type or paste your text into the text box. - Double-click the text to edit it or to format text properties, such as font size or font color. Click the border of the text box to edit the object properties, such as border color or arranging in front or behind other objects. - Fitting Text to Frames + Double-click the text to edit it or to format text properties, such as font size or font color. Click the border of the text box to edit the object properties, such as border color or arranging in front or behind other objects. + Fitting Text to Frames - Create a text box as described in the steps above. + Create a text box as described in the steps above. - With the text object selected, choose Format - Text. The Text dialog opens. + With the text object selected, choose Format - Text. The Text dialog opens. - On the Text tab page, clear the Fit height to text checkbox, then select the Fit to frame checkbox. Click OK. + On the Text tab page, clear the Fit height to text checkbox, then select the Fit to frame checkbox. Click OK. - Now you can resize the text box to change the size and shape of the text characters. + Now you can resize the text box to change the size and shape of the text characters. - Text Tied to a Graphic - You can add text to any graphic after double-clicking the graphic. - To determine the position of the text, use the settings in Format - Text.this is the Draw command. In Writer it is Format - Object - Text attributes. + Text Tied to a Graphic + You can add text to any graphic after double-clicking the graphic. + To determine the position of the text, use the settings in Format - Text.this is the Draw command. In Writer it is Format - Object - Text attributes. - For example, click the arrow next to the Callouts icon + For example, click the arrow next to the Callouts icon Icon to open the Callouts toolbar. - Select a callout and move the mouse pointer to where you want the callout to start. + Select a callout and move the mouse pointer to where you want the callout to start. - Drag to draw the callout. + Drag to draw the callout. - Enter the text. + Enter the text. - Copying Text + Copying Text - Select the text in your Writer document. + Select the text in your Writer document. - Copy the text to the clipboard (Edit - Copy). + Copy the text to the clipboard (Edit - Copy). - Click the page or slide where you want to paste the text. + Click the page or slide where you want to paste the text. - Paste the text using Edit - Paste or Edit - Paste special. - Using Paste special, you can choose the text format to be pasted. Depending on formats, you can copy different text attributes.UFI: added an emph tag, see #60923 + Paste the text using Edit - Paste or Edit - Paste special. + Using Paste special, you can choose the text format to be pasted. Depending on formats, you can copy different text attributes.UFI: added an emph tag, see #60923 - Importing Text + Importing Text - Click the page or slide where you want to import the text. + Click the page or slide where you want to import the text. - Choose Insert - File. + Choose Insert - File. - Select a text file (*.txt) or an HTML file and click Insert. The Insert Text dialog opens. Click OK to insert the text. + Select a text file (*.txt) or an HTML file and click Insert. The Insert Text dialog opens. Click OK to insert the text.
diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/main0000.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/main0000.xhp index e60d80bd60..7405e92e8f 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/main0000.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/main0000.xhp @@ -33,14 +33,14 @@ Welcome to the $[officename] Draw Help - How to Work With $[officename] Draw + How to Work With $[officename] Draw - $[officename] Draw Menus, Toolbars, and Keys + $[officename] Draw Menus, Toolbars, and Keys - Help about the Help + Help about the Help diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/main0100.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/main0100.xhp index ea98bdb128..09c2f1d46d 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/main0100.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/main0100.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/main0101.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/main0101.xhp index 110d427d89..fdf152803d 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/main0101.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/main0101.xhp @@ -30,33 +30,33 @@
-File -This menu contains general commands for working with Draw documents, such as open, close and print. To close $[officename] Draw, click Exit. +File +This menu contains general commands for working with Draw documents, such as open, close and print. To close $[officename] Draw, click Exit.
-Open +Open -Save As +Save As -Export +Export -Versions +Versions -Properties +Properties -Print +Print -Printer Settings +Printer Settings diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/main0102.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/main0102.xhp index 5a9492723a..dd244613d3 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/main0102.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/main0102.xhp @@ -28,36 +28,36 @@
-Edit -The commands in this menu are used to edit Draw documents (for example, copying and pasting). +Edit +The commands in this menu are used to edit Draw documents (for example, copying and pasting).
-Paste Special +Paste Special -Find & Replace +Find & Replace -Points -Enables you to edit points on your drawing. -Glue points -Enables you to edit glue points on your drawing. -Duplicate +Points +Enables you to edit points on your drawing. +Glue points +Enables you to edit glue points on your drawing. +Duplicate -Cross-fading +Cross-fading -Fields +Fields UFI removed Layer command (as I did in zillion CWSs before...) -Links +Links -ImageMap +ImageMap -Hyperlink +Hyperlink diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/main0104.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/main0104.xhp index f45fe67591..0be8e73543 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/main0104.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/main0104.xhp @@ -28,37 +28,34 @@
- Insert - This menu allows you to insert elements, such as graphics and guides, into Draw documents. + Insert + This menu allows you to insert elements, such as graphics and guides, into Draw documents.
- Slide + Slide - Layer + Layer - Insert Snap Point/Line + Insert Snap Point/Line - Comment + Comment - Special Character + Special Character - Hyperlink + Hyperlink - Table + Table - Chart - Inserts a chart. - Floating Frame + Chart + Inserts a chart. + Floating Frame - File + File \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/main0105.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/main0105.xhp index 35add95027..6c36781b54 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/main0105.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/main0105.xhp @@ -31,28 +31,28 @@
-Format -Contains commands for formatting the layout and the contents of your document. +Format +Contains commands for formatting the layout and the contents of your document.
-Character +Character -Paragraph +Paragraph -Bullets and Numbering +Bullets and Numbering -Page +Page -Position and Size +Position and Size -Line +Line -Area +Area -Text +Text -Layer +Layer diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/main0106.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/main0106.xhp index b0af98efd1..88823cc91f 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/main0106.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/main0106.xhp @@ -28,8 +28,8 @@
-Tools -This menu provides tools for $[officename] Draw as well as access to language and system settings. +Tools +This menu provides tools for $[officename] Draw as well as access to language and system settings.
@@ -39,9 +39,9 @@ -AutoCorrect Options +AutoCorrect Options -Customize +Customize diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/main0200.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/main0200.xhp index 8d68f5278e..928a7f35a0 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/main0200.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/main0200.xhp @@ -28,9 +28,9 @@
-Toolbars +Toolbars -This section provides an overview of the toolbars available in $[officename] Draw. +This section provides an overview of the toolbars available in $[officename] Draw.
diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/main0202.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/main0202.xhp index 09e6af2735..cc0418edaf 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/main0202.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/main0202.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@
-Line and Filling Bar -The Line and Filling bar contains commands for the current editing mode. +Line and Filling Bar +The Line and Filling bar contains commands for the current editing mode.
@@ -41,21 +41,21 @@ -Line Style +Line Style -Line Width +Line Width -Line Color +Line Color -Area Style / Filling +Area Style / Filling -ShadowUFI: inserted Shadow header and link +ShadowUFI: inserted Shadow header and link diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/main0210.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/main0210.xhp index 6650d4409c..55b33aa1b1 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/main0210.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/main0210.xhp @@ -28,25 +28,25 @@
-Drawing Bar -The Drawing bar holds the main drawing tools. +Drawing Bar +The Drawing bar holds the main drawing tools.
-Rectangle -Draws a filled rectangle where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rectangle, and drag to the size you want. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag. +Rectangle +Draws a filled rectangle where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rectangle, and drag to the size you want. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag. -Ellipse -Draws a filled oval where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to draw the oval, and drag to the size you want. To draw a circle, hold down Shift while you drag. +Ellipse +Draws a filled oval where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to draw the oval, and drag to the size you want. To draw a circle, hold down Shift while you drag. -Text -Draws a text box where you click or drag in the current document. Click anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. +Text +Draws a text box where you click or drag in the current document. Click anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. -Lines and Arrows -Opens the Arrows toolbar to insert lines and arrows. +Lines and Arrows +Opens the Arrows toolbar to insert lines and arrows. @@ -61,10 +61,10 @@ -Points -Enables you to edit points on your drawing. -Glue Points -Enables you to edit glue points on your drawing. +Points +Enables you to edit points on your drawing. +Glue Points +Enables you to edit glue points on your drawing. @@ -73,15 +73,15 @@ -From File +From File -Form Controls +Form Controls -Extrusion On/Off -Switches the 3D effects on and off for the selected objects. +Extrusion On/Off +Switches the 3D effects on and off for the selected objects. diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/main0213.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/main0213.xhp index ba9d60fab2..db66e074a4 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/main0213.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/main0213.xhp @@ -30,40 +30,40 @@
-Options Bar -The Options bar can be displayed by choosing View - Toolbars - Options. +Options Bar +The Options bar can be displayed by choosing View - Toolbars - Options.
UFI: changed some links, see #i52549 -Display Grid +Display Grid -Helplines While Moving +Helplines While Moving -Snap to Grid +Snap to Grid -Snap to Snap Lines +Snap to Snap Lines -Snap to Page Margins +Snap to Page Margins -Snap to Object Border +Snap to Object Border -Snap to Object Points +Snap to Object Points -Allow Quick Editing +Allow Quick Editing -Select Text Area Only +Select Text Area Only diff --git a/source/text/sdraw/main0503.xhp b/source/text/sdraw/main0503.xhp index aad6c05e35..71b9ff0c88 100644 --- a/source/text/sdraw/main0503.xhp +++ b/source/text/sdraw/main0503.xhp @@ -33,22 +33,22 @@
- $[officename] Draw Features - $[officename] Draw lets you create simple and complex drawings and export them in a number of common image formats. You can also insert tables, charts, formulas and other items created in $[officename] programs into your drawings. + $[officename] Draw Features + $[officename] Draw lets you create simple and complex drawings and export them in a number of common image formats. You can also insert tables, charts, formulas and other items created in $[officename] programs into your drawings.
- Vector Graphics - $[officename] Draw creates vector graphics using lines and curves defined by mathematical vectors. Vectors describe lines, ellipses, and polygons according to their geometry. - Creating 3D Objects - You can create simple 3D objects such as cubes, spheres, and cylinders in $[officename] Draw and even modify the light source of the objects. - Grids and Snap Lines - Grids and snap lines provide a visual cue to help you align objects in your drawing. You can also choose to snap an object to a grid line, snap line or to the edge of another object. - Connecting Objects to Show Relationships - You can connect objects in $[officename] Draw with special lines called "connectors" to show the relationship between objects. Connectors attach to glue points on drawing objects and remain attached when the connected objects are moved. Connectors are useful for creating organization charts and technical diagrams. - Displaying Dimensions - Technical diagrams often show the dimensions of objects in the drawing. In $[officename] Draw, you can use dimension lines to calculate and display linear dimensions. - Gallery - The Gallery contains images, animations, sounds and other items that you can insert and use in your drawings as well as other $[officename] programs. - Graphic File Formats - $[officename] Draw can export to many common graphic file formats, such as BMP, GIF, JPG, and PNG. + Vector Graphics + $[officename] Draw creates vector graphics using lines and curves defined by mathematical vectors. Vectors describe lines, ellipses, and polygons according to their geometry. + Creating 3D Objects + You can create simple 3D objects such as cubes, spheres, and cylinders in $[officename] Draw and even modify the light source of the objects. + Grids and Snap Lines + Grids and snap lines provide a visual cue to help you align objects in your drawing. You can also choose to snap an object to a grid line, snap line or to the edge of another object. + Connecting Objects to Show Relationships + You can connect objects in $[officename] Draw with special lines called "connectors" to show the relationship between objects. Connectors attach to glue points on drawing objects and remain attached when the connected objects are moved. Connectors are useful for creating organization charts and technical diagrams. + Displaying Dimensions + Technical diagrams often show the dimensions of objects in the drawing. In $[officename] Draw, you can use dimension lines to calculate and display linear dimensions. + Gallery + The Gallery contains images, animations, sounds and other items that you can insert and use in your drawings as well as other $[officename] programs. + Graphic File Formats + $[officename] Draw can export to many common graphic file formats, such as BMP, GIF, JPG, and PNG. diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp index 526895f03a..b5ad52f3d4 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ - Frequently-Used Buttons + Frequently-Used Buttons
@@ -38,46 +38,42 @@ -Cancel - Clicking Cancel closes a dialog without saving any changes made. +Cancel + Clicking Cancel closes a dialog without saving any changes made.
-Finish - Applies all changes and closes the wizard. +Finish + Applies all changes and closes the wizard.
- Toolbars - By clicking the arrow next to some icons you open a toolbar. To move a toolbar, drag the title bar. As soon as you release the mouse button, the toolbar remains at the new position. Drag the title bar to another position, or drag to an edge of the window, where the toolbar will dock. Close a toolbar by clicking the Close Window icon. Make the toolbar visible again by choosing View - Toolbars - (toolbar name). + Toolbars + By clicking the arrow next to some icons you open a toolbar. To move a toolbar, drag the title bar. As soon as you release the mouse button, the toolbar remains at the new position. Drag the title bar to another position, or drag to an edge of the window, where the toolbar will dock. Close a toolbar by clicking the Close Window icon. Make the toolbar visible again by choosing View - Toolbars - (toolbar name).
- Spin button + Spin button
- In form controls, a spin button is a property of a numerical field, currency field, date field, or time field. If the property "Spin button" is enabled, the field shows a pair of symbols with arrows pointing to opposing directions, either vertically or horizontally. + In form controls, a spin button is a property of a numerical field, currency field, date field, or time field. If the property "Spin button" is enabled, the field shows a pair of symbols with arrows pointing to opposing directions, either vertically or horizontally. - In the Basic IDE, a spin button is the name used for the numerical field together with the two arrow symbols. + In the Basic IDE, a spin button is the name used for the numerical field together with the two arrow symbols. - You can type a numerical value into the field next to the spin button, or select the value with the up-arrow or down-arrow symbols on the spin button. On the keyboard you can press the up arrow and down arrow keys to increase or reduce the value. You can press the Page Up and Page Down keys to set the maximum and minimum value. - If the field next to the spin button defines numerical values, you can also define a measurement unit, for example, 1 cm or 5 mm, 12 pt or 2". + You can type a numerical value into the field next to the spin button, or select the value with the up-arrow or down-arrow symbols on the spin button. On the keyboard you can press the up arrow and down arrow keys to increase or reduce the value. You can press the Page Up and Page Down keys to set the maximum and minimum value. + If the field next to the spin button defines numerical values, you can also define a measurement unit, for example, 1 cm or 5 mm, 12 pt or 2".
- Convert - If you click forward through the dialog, this button is called Next. On the last page the button has the name Convert. The conversion is then performed by clicking the button. + Convert + If you click forward through the dialog, this button is called Next. On the last page the button has the name Convert. The conversion is then performed by clicking the button.
- Context Menu + Context Menu
- To activate the context menu of an object, first click the object with the + To activate the context menu of an object, first click the object with the left mouse button to select it, and then, while holding down the Ctrl key or the Command and Option keys, click the mouse button again click the right mouse button. Some context menus can be called even if the object has not been selected. Context menus are found just about everywhere in $[officename]. @@ -100,9 +96,8 @@ -Delete - Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation. +Delete + Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
@@ -113,29 +108,25 @@ -Delete - Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation. +Delete + Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
- Metrics - You can enter values in the input fields in different units of measurement. The default unit is inches. However, if you want a space of exactly 1cm, then type "1cm". Additional units are available according to the context, for example, 12 pt for a 12 point spacing. If the value of the new unit is unrealistic, the program uses a predefined maximum or minimum value. + Metrics + You can enter values in the input fields in different units of measurement. The default unit is inches. However, if you want a space of exactly 1cm, then type "1cm". Additional units are available according to the context, for example, 12 pt for a 12 point spacing. If the value of the new unit is unrealistic, the program uses a predefined maximum or minimum value.
- Close - Closes the dialog and saves all changes. + Close + Closes the dialog and saves all changes.
- Close - Closes the dialog. + Close + Closes the dialog.
-Apply - Applies the modified or selected values without closing the dialog. +Apply + Applies the modified or selected values without closing the dialog.
@@ -157,29 +148,28 @@ -Shrink / Maximize - Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size. - The dialog is automatically minimized when you click into a sheet with the mouse. As soon as you release the mouse button, the dialog is restored and the reference range defined with the mouse is highlighted in the document by a blue frame. +Shrink / Maximize + Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size. + The dialog is automatically minimized when you click into a sheet with the mouse. As soon as you release the mouse button, the dialog is restored and the reference range defined with the mouse is highlighted in the document by a blue frame. - + Icon - Shrink + Shrink - + Icon - Maximize + Maximize
@@ -188,9 +178,8 @@
-Preview Field - Displays a preview of the current selection. +Preview Field + Displays a preview of the current selection.
@@ -202,9 +191,8 @@ -Next - Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create. +Next + Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
@@ -220,30 +208,26 @@
-Backin Tools - Options - Resets modified values back to the $[officename] default values. +Backin Tools - Options + Resets modified values back to the $[officename] default values.
-Resetall tab dialogs - Resets changes made to the current tab to those applicable when this dialog was opened. A confirmation query does not appear when you close the dialog. +Resetall tab dialogs + Resets changes made to the current tab to those applicable when this dialog was opened. A confirmation query does not appear when you close the dialog.
- Resetwhats this? - Resets modified values back to the default values. - A confirmation query does not appear. If you confirm the dialog with OK all settings in this dialog are reset. + Resetwhats this? + Resets modified values back to the default values. + A confirmation query does not appear. If you confirm the dialog with OK all settings in this dialog are reset.
-Standarde.g. in Format - Para StyleUFI: Name is Default on Tools-Options-Writer-Basic Fonts - Resets the values visible in the dialog back to the default installation values. - A confirmation does not appear before the defaults are reloaded. +Standarde.g. in Format - Para StyleUFI: Name is Default on Tools-Options-Writer-Basic Fonts + Resets the values visible in the dialog back to the default installation values. + A confirmation does not appear before the defaults are reloaded.
@@ -254,25 +238,24 @@ -Back - View the selections in the dialog made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged. This button can only be activated from page two on. +Back + View the selections in the dialog made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged. This button can only be activated from page two on.
Options - Click the Options label to expand the dialog to show further options. Click again to restore the dialog. + Click the Options label to expand the dialog to show further options. Click again to restore the dialog.
- See also the following functions: + See also the following functions: - The search supports regular expressions. You can enter "all.*", for example to find the first location of "all" followed by any characters. If you want to search for a text that is also a regular expression, you must precede every character with a \ character. You can switch the automatic evaluation of regular expression on and off in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate. + The search supports regular expressions. You can enter "all.*", for example to find the first location of "all" followed by any characters. If you want to search for a text that is also a regular expression, you must precede every character with a \ character. You can switch the automatic evaluation of regular expression on and off in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate. - If an error occurs, the function returns a logical or numerical value. + If an error occurs, the function returns a logical or numerical value. - (This command is only accessible through the context menu). + (This command is only accessible through the context menu). - By double-clicking a tool, you can use it for multiple tasks. If you call the tool with a single-click, it reverts back to the last selection after completing the task. + By double-clicking a tool, you can use it for multiple tasks. If you call the tool with a single-click, it reverts back to the last selection after completing the task. - Press Shift+F1 and point to a control to learn more about that control. + Press Shift+F1 and point to a control to learn more about that control. diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00000003.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00000003.xhp index 02d9cfbf89..9d248bdcf6 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00000003.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00000003.xhp @@ -36,33 +36,33 @@ converting;metrics metrics;converting -Conversion of measurement units -In some dialogs, you can enter measurement values into input boxes. If you just enter a numerical value, the default measurement unit is used. -You define the default measurement unit for Writer text documents in the dialog that you get by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General. For Calc, Draw, and Impress, you open a document of that type and then open the appropriate General page as for Writer. -In input boxes for length units you can also add the unit abbreviation according to the following list: +Conversion of measurement units +In some dialogs, you can enter measurement values into input boxes. If you just enter a numerical value, the default measurement unit is used. +You define the default measurement unit for Writer text documents in the dialog that you get by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General. For Calc, Draw, and Impress, you open a document of that type and then open the appropriate General page as for Writer. +In input boxes for length units you can also add the unit abbreviation according to the following list: -Unit abbreviation +Unit abbreviation -Explanation +Explanation -mm +mm -Millimeter +Millimeter -cm +cm -Centimeter +Centimeter @@ -70,41 +70,41 @@ in or ″ -Inch +Inch -pi +pi -Pica +Pica -pt +pt -Point +Point
-The following formulas convert the units: +The following formulas convert the units: -1 cm = 10 mm +1 cm = 10 mm -1 inch = 2.54 cm +1 inch = 2.54 cm -1 inch = 6 Pica = 72 Point +1 inch = 6 Pica = 72 Point -For example, in a text document, open Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing. To indent the current paragraph by one inch, enter 1 in or 1" into the "Before text" box. To indent the paragraph by 1 cm, enter 1 cm into the input box. -To input the maximum or minimum allowed value respectively, click the current value and then press the Page Up or Page Down key. +For example, in a text document, open Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing. To indent the current paragraph by one inch, enter 1 in or 1" into the "Before text" box. To indent the paragraph by 1 cm, enter 1 cm into the input box. +To input the maximum or minimum allowed value respectively, click the current value and then press the Page Up or Page Down key.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00000004.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00000004.xhp index 051c5ddad7..6596754e74 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00000004.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00000004.xhp @@ -32,10 +32,10 @@ -To access this command... +To access this command... @@ -43,12 +43,12 @@ - + Icon -Font Color +Font Color
@@ -58,12 +58,12 @@ - + Icon -Font Color +Font Color
@@ -73,12 +73,12 @@ - + Icon -Line spacing: 1 +Line spacing: 1
@@ -88,12 +88,12 @@ - + Icon -Line spacing: 1.5 +Line spacing: 1.5
@@ -103,12 +103,12 @@ - + Icon -Line spacing: 2 +Line spacing: 2
@@ -118,12 +118,12 @@ - + Icon -Superscript +Superscript
@@ -133,12 +133,12 @@ - + Icon -Subscript +Subscript
@@ -148,12 +148,12 @@ - + Icon -Line Style +Line Style
@@ -163,12 +163,12 @@ - + Icon -Line Color +Line Color
@@ -178,12 +178,12 @@ - + Icon -Line Width +Line Width
@@ -193,12 +193,12 @@ - + Icon -Area Style / Filling +Area Style / Filling
@@ -208,12 +208,12 @@ - + Icon -Align Top +Align Top
@@ -223,12 +223,12 @@ - + Icon -Align Bottom +Align Bottom
@@ -238,12 +238,12 @@ - + Icon -Align Center Vertically +Align Center Vertically
@@ -253,12 +253,12 @@ - + Icon -Apply +Apply
@@ -268,12 +268,12 @@ - + Icon -Cancel +Cancel
@@ -282,12 +282,12 @@ - + Icon -Up One Level +Up One Level
@@ -295,12 +295,12 @@ - + Icon -Create New Directory +Create New Directory
@@ -309,12 +309,12 @@ - + Icon -Up One Level +Up One Level
@@ -324,12 +324,12 @@ - + Icon -Create New Folder +Create New Folder
@@ -339,12 +339,12 @@ - + Icon -Go to the previous comment +Go to the previous comment
@@ -354,12 +354,12 @@ - + Icon -Go to the next comment +Go to the next comment
@@ -369,12 +369,12 @@ - + Icon -Open File +Open File
@@ -384,12 +384,12 @@ - + Icon -Save As +Save As
@@ -399,12 +399,12 @@ - + Icon -Export Directly as PDF +Export Directly as PDF
diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00000005.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00000005.xhp index c5f2d8cfd9..4944817e91 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00000005.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00000005.xhp @@ -39,11 +39,11 @@ terminology;general glossary mw changed "terminology;glossaries" and deleted one entry - General Glossary - This glossary includes explanations of some of the most important terms you will come across in $[officename]. + General Glossary + This glossary includes explanations of some of the most important terms you will come across in $[officename].
- Use the glossary to look up unfamiliar terms found in any $[officename] application. + Use the glossary to look up unfamiliar terms found in any $[officename] application.
@@ -51,15 +51,15 @@ ASCII; definition - ASCII - Abbreviation for American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII is a character set for displaying fonts on personal computers. It consists of 128 characters including letters, numbers, punctuation and symbols. The extended ASCII character set contains 256 characters. Each character has been assigned a unique number, also referred to as ASCII Code. - In HTML pages, only characters from the 7 Bit ASCII character set should appear. Other characters, such as German umlauts, are distinguished by way of a separate code. You can input extended ASCII code characters: the $[officename] export filter performs the necessary conversion. + ASCII + Abbreviation for American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII is a character set for displaying fonts on personal computers. It consists of 128 characters including letters, numbers, punctuation and symbols. The extended ASCII character set contains 256 characters. Each character has been assigned a unique number, also referred to as ASCII Code. + In HTML pages, only characters from the 7 Bit ASCII character set should appear. Other characters, such as German umlauts, are distinguished by way of a separate code. You can input extended ASCII code characters: the $[officename] export filter performs the necessary conversion.
- Bézier Object - Developed by the French mathematician Pierre Bézier, a Bézier curve is a mathematically defined curve used in two-dimensional graphic applications. The curve is defined by four points: the initial position and the terminating position, and two separate middle points. Bézier objects can be modified by moving these points with the mouse. + Bézier Object + Developed by the French mathematician Pierre Bézier, a Bézier curve is a mathematically defined curve used in two-dimensional graphic applications. The curve is defined by four points: the initial position and the terminating position, and two separate middle points. Bézier objects can be modified by moving these points with the mouse.
@@ -70,22 +70,22 @@ complex text layout, see CTL MW added a cross reference - Complex Text Layout (CTL) - Languages with complex text layout may have some or all of the following features: + Complex Text Layout (CTL) + Languages with complex text layout may have some or all of the following features: - The language is written with characters or glyphs that are composed of several parts + The language is written with characters or glyphs that are composed of several parts - The text direction is from right to left. + The text direction is from right to left. - Currently, $[officename] supports Hindi, Thai, Hebrew, and Arabic as CTL languages. - Enable CTL support using %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. + Currently, $[officename] supports Hindi, Thai, Hebrew, and Arabic as CTL languages. + Enable CTL support using %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages.
- Context Menu + Context Menu
@@ -93,39 +93,39 @@ DDE; definition - DDE - DDE stands for "Dynamic Data Exchange," which is a predecessor of OLE, "Object Linking and Embedding". With DDE, objects are linked through file reference, but not embedded. - You can create a DDE link using the following procedure: Select cells from a Calc spreadsheet, copy them into the clipboard and switch to another spreadsheet and select the Edit - Paste Special dialog. Select the Link option to insert the contents as a DDE link. When activating a link, the inserted cell area will be read from its original file. + DDE + DDE stands for "Dynamic Data Exchange," which is a predecessor of OLE, "Object Linking and Embedding". With DDE, objects are linked through file reference, but not embedded. + You can create a DDE link using the following procedure: Select cells from a Calc spreadsheet, copy them into the clipboard and switch to another spreadsheet and select the Edit - Paste Special dialog. Select the Link option to insert the contents as a DDE link. When activating a link, the inserted cell area will be read from its original file.
- Direct and Style Formatting - If you format a document without Styles, it is referred to as "direct" formatting. This means modifying text or other objects, such as frames or tables, by applying various attributes directly. The format applies only to the selected area and all changes must be made separately. Styles, on the other hand, are not applied to the text directly, but rather are defined in the Styles and Formatting window and then applied. One advantage is that when you change a Style, all parts of the document to which that Style is assigned are modified at the same time. - You can remove direct formatting from your document by selecting the entire text with the shortcut keys CommandCtrl+A and then choosing Format - Clear Direct Formatting. + Direct and Style Formatting + If you format a document without Styles, it is referred to as "direct" formatting. This means modifying text or other objects, such as frames or tables, by applying various attributes directly. The format applies only to the selected area and all changes must be made separately. Styles, on the other hand, are not applied to the text directly, but rather are defined in the Styles and Formatting window and then applied. One advantage is that when you change a Style, all parts of the document to which that Style is assigned are modified at the same time. + You can remove direct formatting from your document by selecting the entire text with the shortcut keys CommandCtrl+A and then choosing Format - Clear Direct Formatting.
windows; docking definition docking; definition - Docking - Some windows in $[officename], for example the Styles and Formatting window and the Navigator, are "dockable" windows. You can move these windows, re-size them or dock them to an edge. On each edge you can dock several windows on top of, or alongside each other; then, by moving the border lines, you can change the relative proportions of the windows. + Docking + Some windows in $[officename], for example the Styles and Formatting window and the Navigator, are "dockable" windows. You can move these windows, re-size them or dock them to an edge. On each edge you can dock several windows on top of, or alongside each other; then, by moving the border lines, you can change the relative proportions of the windows. - To undock and re-dock, holding down the CommandCtrl key, double-click a vacant area in the window. In the Styles and Formatting window, you can also double-click a gray part of the window next to the icons, while you hold down the CommandCtrl key. + To undock and re-dock, holding down the CommandCtrl key, double-click a vacant area in the window. In the Styles and Formatting window, you can also double-click a gray part of the window next to the icons, while you hold down the CommandCtrl key.
- Docking (AutoHide) - On any window edge where another window is docked you will see a button which allows you to show or hide the window.UFI: fix button removed, see spec "Window Splitter" + Docking (AutoHide) + On any window edge where another window is docked you will see a button which allows you to show or hide the window.UFI: fix button removed, see spec "Window Splitter" - If you click the button on the window edge to show the window, the window will remain visible until you manually hide it again (with the same button). + If you click the button on the window edge to show the window, the window will remain visible until you manually hide it again (with the same button). - If you show the window by clicking the window border, but not the button, you activate the AutoHide function. The AutoHide function allows you to temporarily show a hidden window by clicking on its edge. When you click in the document, the docked window hides again. + If you show the window by clicking the window border, but not the button, you activate the AutoHide function. The AutoHide function allows you to temporarily show a hidden window by clicking on its edge. When you click in the document, the docked window hides again. @@ -135,8 +135,8 @@ formatting; definition - Formatting - Formatting refers to the visual layout of text using a word-processing or DTP program. This includes defining the paper format, page borders, fonts and font effects, as well as indents and spacing. You can format text directly or with Styles provided by $[officename]. + Formatting + Formatting refers to the visual layout of text using a word-processing or DTP program. This includes defining the paper format, page borders, fonts and font effects, as well as indents and spacing. You can format text directly or with Styles provided by $[officename].
@@ -144,8 +144,8 @@ IME; definition - IME - IME stands for Input Method Editor. A program that allows the user to enter complex characters from non-western character sets using a standard keyboard. + IME + IME stands for Input Method Editor. A program that allows the user to enter complex characters from non-western character sets using a standard keyboard.
@@ -153,8 +153,8 @@ JDBC; definition - JDBC - You can use the Java Database Connectivity (JDBC) API to connect to a database from %PRODUCTNAME. JDBC drivers are written in the Java programming language and are platform independent. + JDBC + You can use the Java Database Connectivity (JDBC) API to connect to a database from %PRODUCTNAME. JDBC drivers are written in the Java programming language and are platform independent.
@@ -162,9 +162,9 @@ kerning; definition - Kerning - Kerning means increasing or decreasing the amount of space between pairs of letters to improve the overall appearance of the text. - The kerning tables contain information on which pairs of letters require more spacing. These tables are generally a component of a font. + Kerning + Kerning means increasing or decreasing the amount of space between pairs of letters to improve the overall appearance of the text. + The kerning tables contain information on which pairs of letters require more spacing. These tables are generally a component of a font.
@@ -172,17 +172,17 @@ links; definition - Link - The Links command is found in the Edit menu. The command can only be activated when at least one link is contained in the current document. When you insert a picture, for example, you can either insert the picture directly into the document or insert the picture as a link. - When an object is inserted directly into a document, the document size increases by (at least) the size in bytes of the object. You can save the document and open it on another computer, and the inserted object will still be in the same position in the document. - If you insert the object as a link, only a reference to the file name is inserted. The file size of the document increases only by the path and file reference. If you open your document on another computer, however, the linked file must be in exactly the same position as given by the reference in order to view the object in the document. - Use Edit - Links to see which files are inserted as links. The links can be removed if required. This will break the link and insert the object directly. + Link + The Links command is found in the Edit menu. The command can only be activated when at least one link is contained in the current document. When you insert a picture, for example, you can either insert the picture directly into the document or insert the picture as a link. + When an object is inserted directly into a document, the document size increases by (at least) the size in bytes of the object. You can save the document and open it on another computer, and the inserted object will still be in the same position in the document. + If you insert the object as a link, only a reference to the file name is inserted. The file size of the document increases only by the path and file reference. If you open your document on another computer, however, the linked file must be in exactly the same position as given by the reference in order to view the object in the document. + Use Edit - Links to see which files are inserted as links. The links can be removed if required. This will break the link and insert the object directly.
- Number System - A number system is determined by the number of characters available for representing numbers. The decimal system, for instance is based on the ten numbers (0..9), the binary system is based on the two numbers 0 and 1, the hexadecimal system is based on 16 characters (0...9 and A...F). + Number System + A number system is determined by the number of characters available for representing numbers. The decimal system, for instance is based on the ten numbers (0..9), the binary system is based on the two numbers 0 and 1, the hexadecimal system is based on 16 characters (0...9 and A...F).
@@ -190,9 +190,9 @@ objects; definition - Object - An object is a screen element containing data. It can refer to application data, such as text or graphics. - Objects are independent and do not influence each other. Any object containing data can be assigned certain commands. For example, a graphic object has commands for image editing and a spreadsheet contains calculation commands. + Object + An object is a screen element containing data. It can refer to application data, such as text or graphics. + Objects are independent and do not influence each other. Any object containing data can be assigned certain commands. For example, a graphic object has commands for image editing and a spreadsheet contains calculation commands.
@@ -200,9 +200,9 @@ ODBC; definition - ODBC - Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) is a protocol norm with which applications can access database systems. The query language used is Structured Query Language (SQL). In $[officename], you can determine for each database whether to use SQL commands to run queries. Alternatively, you can use the interactive help to define your query by mouseclick and have it automatically translated into SQL by $[officename]. - The 32bit ODBC functions required here can be installed on your system at any time with the help of the setup program supplied with your database. You can then amend the properties through the Control Panel. + ODBC + Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) is a protocol norm with which applications can access database systems. The query language used is Structured Query Language (SQL). In $[officename], you can determine for each database whether to use SQL commands to run queries. Alternatively, you can use the interactive help to define your query by mouseclick and have it automatically translated into SQL by $[officename]. + The 32bit ODBC functions required here can be installed on your system at any time with the help of the setup program supplied with your database. You can then amend the properties through the Control Panel.
@@ -211,8 +211,8 @@ OLE; definition - OLE - Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) objects can be linked to a target document or may also be embedded. Embedding inserts a copy of the object and details of the source program in the target document. If you want to edit the object, simply activate the source program by double-clicking on the object. + OLE + Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) objects can be linked to a target document or may also be embedded. Embedding inserts a copy of the object and details of the source program in the target document. If you want to edit the object, simply activate the source program by double-clicking on the object.
@@ -220,29 +220,29 @@ OpenGL; definition - OpenGL - OpenGL represents a 3D graphics language, initially developed by SGI (Silicon Graphics Inc). Two dialects of this language are commonly used: Microsoft OpenGL, developed for use under Windows NT, and Cosmo OpenGL made by SGI. The latter represents an independent graphics language for all platforms and all kind of computers, even usable on machines without special 3-D graphics hardware. + OpenGL + OpenGL represents a 3D graphics language, initially developed by SGI (Silicon Graphics Inc). Two dialects of this language are commonly used: Microsoft OpenGL, developed for use under Windows NT, and Cosmo OpenGL made by SGI. The latter represents an independent graphics language for all platforms and all kind of computers, even usable on machines without special 3-D graphics hardware.
- PNG - Portable Network Graphics (PNG) is a graphic file format. The files are compressed with a selectable compression factor, and, as opposed to the JPG format, PNG files are always compressed without any information loss. + PNG + Portable Network Graphics (PNG) is a graphic file format. The files are compressed with a selectable compression factor, and, as opposed to the JPG format, PNG files are always compressed without any information loss.
- Primary key - A primary key serves as a unique identifier of database fields. The unique identification of database fields is used in relational databases, to access data in other tables. If reference is made to a primary key from another table, this is termed a foreign key. - In $[officename], you define the primary key in the design view of a table, by choosing the relevant command from the context menu of a row header for the selected field. + Primary key + A primary key serves as a unique identifier of database fields. The unique identification of database fields is used in relational databases, to access data in other tables. If reference is made to a primary key from another table, this is termed a foreign key. + In $[officename], you define the primary key in the design view of a table, by choosing the relevant command from the context menu of a row header for the selected field.
- Relational Database - A relational database is a collection of data items organized as a set of formally described tables from which data can be accessed or reassembled in many different ways without having to reorganize the database tables. - A relational database management system (RDBMS) is a program that lets you create, update, and administer a relational database. An RDBMS takes Structured Query Language (SQL) statements entered by a user or contained in an application program and creates, updates, or provides access to the database. - A good example of a relational database can be given with a database containing Customer, Purchase, and Invoice tables. In the Invoice table, there is no actual customer or purchasing data; however, the table contains references through a relational link, or a relation, to the respective customer and purchasing table's fields (for example, the customer ID field from the customer table). + Relational Database + A relational database is a collection of data items organized as a set of formally described tables from which data can be accessed or reassembled in many different ways without having to reorganize the database tables. + A relational database management system (RDBMS) is a program that lets you create, update, and administer a relational database. An RDBMS takes Structured Query Language (SQL) statements entered by a user or contained in an application program and creates, updates, or provides access to the database. + A good example of a relational database can be given with a database containing Customer, Purchase, and Invoice tables. In the Invoice table, there is no actual customer or purchasing data; however, the table contains references through a relational link, or a relation, to the respective customer and purchasing table's fields (for example, the customer ID field from the customer table).
@@ -250,23 +250,23 @@ register-true; definition - Register-true - Register-true is a typography term that is used in printing. This term refers to the congruent imprint of the lines within a type area on the front and the back side of book pages, newspaper pages and magazine pages. The register-true feature make these pages easier to read by preventing gray shadows from shining through between the lines of text. The register-true term also refers to lines in adjacent text columns that are of the same height. - When you define a paragraph, Paragraph Style, or a Page Style as register-true, the base lines of the affected characters are aligned to a vertical page grid, regardless of font size or of the presence of graphics. If you want, you can specify the setting for this grid as a Page Style property. + Register-true + Register-true is a typography term that is used in printing. This term refers to the congruent imprint of the lines within a type area on the front and the back side of book pages, newspaper pages and magazine pages. The register-true feature make these pages easier to read by preventing gray shadows from shining through between the lines of text. The register-true term also refers to lines in adjacent text columns that are of the same height. + When you define a paragraph, Paragraph Style, or a Page Style as register-true, the base lines of the affected characters are aligned to a vertical page grid, regardless of font size or of the presence of graphics. If you want, you can specify the setting for this grid as a Page Style property.
- RTF - Rich Text Format (RTF) is a file format developed for the exchange of text files. A special feature is that the formatting is converted into directly readable text information. Unfortunately, in comparison to other file formats, this creates relatively large files. + RTF + Rich Text Format (RTF) is a file format developed for the exchange of text files. A special feature is that the formatting is converted into directly readable text information. Unfortunately, in comparison to other file formats, this creates relatively large files.
- Saving Relatively and Absolutely + Saving Relatively and Absolutely In various dialogs (for example, Tools - AutoText) you can select whether you want to save files relatively or absolutely. - If you choose to save relatively, the references to embedded graphics or other objects in your document will be saved relative to the location in the file system. In this case, it does not matter where the referenced directory structure is recorded. The files will be found regardless of location, as long as the reference remains on the same drive or volume. This is important if you want to make the document available to other computers that may have a completely different directory structure, drive or volume names. It is also recommended to save relatively if you want to create a directory structure on an Internet server. - If you prefer absolute saving, all references to other files will also be defined as absolute, based on the respective drive, volume or root directory. The advantage is that the document containing the references can be moved to other directories or folders, and the references remain valid. + If you choose to save relatively, the references to embedded graphics or other objects in your document will be saved relative to the location in the file system. In this case, it does not matter where the referenced directory structure is recorded. The files will be found regardless of location, as long as the reference remains on the same drive or volume. This is important if you want to make the document available to other computers that may have a completely different directory structure, drive or volume names. It is also recommended to save relatively if you want to create a directory structure on an Internet server. + If you prefer absolute saving, all references to other files will also be defined as absolute, based on the respective drive, volume or root directory. The advantage is that the document containing the references can be moved to other directories or folders, and the references remain valid.
@@ -278,21 +278,21 @@ SQL;definition - SQL - Structured Query Language (SQL) is a language used for database queries. In $[officename] you can formulate queries either in SQL or interactively with the mouse. + SQL + Structured Query Language (SQL) is a language used for database queries. In $[officename] you can formulate queries either in SQL or interactively with the mouse.
- SQL Database / SQL Server - An SQL database is a database system which offers an SQL interface. SQL databases are often used in client/server networks in which different clients access a central server (for example, an SQL server), hence they are also called SQL server databases, or SQL servers for short. - In $[officename], you can integrate external SQL databases. These may be located on your local hard disk as well as on the network. Access is achieved through ODBC, JDBC, or a native driver integrated into $[officename]. + SQL Database / SQL Server + An SQL database is a database system which offers an SQL interface. SQL databases are often used in client/server networks in which different clients access a central server (for example, an SQL server), hence they are also called SQL server databases, or SQL servers for short. + In $[officename], you can integrate external SQL databases. These may be located on your local hard disk as well as on the network. Access is achieved through ODBC, JDBC, or a native driver integrated into $[officename].
- Widows and Orphans - Widows and orphans are historical typography terms, which have been in use for many years. A widow refers to a short line at the end of a paragraph, which when printed, appears alone at the top of the next page. An orphan is, in contrast, the first line of a paragraph printed alone at the bottom of the previous page. In a $[officename] text document you can automatically prevent such occurrences in the desired Paragraph Style. When doing so, you can determine the minimum amount of lines to be kept together on a page. + Widows and Orphans + Widows and orphans are historical typography terms, which have been in use for many years. A widow refers to a short line at the end of a paragraph, which when printed, appears alone at the top of the next page. An orphan is, in contrast, the first line of a paragraph printed alone at the bottom of the previous page. In a $[officename] text document you can automatically prevent such occurrences in the desired Paragraph Style. When doing so, you can determine the minimum amount of lines to be kept together on a page.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00000007.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00000007.xhp index 7ab20bba3a..5ff03b9e9d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00000007.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00000007.xhp @@ -31,21 +31,21 @@ -Toolbars -Icon on the Tools bar: +Toolbars +Icon on the Tools bar: -Icon on the Formatting Bar: +Icon on the Formatting Bar: -Icon on the Formatting Bar: +Icon on the Formatting Bar: -Icon on the Slide View Bar: +Icon on the Slide View Bar: -This overview describes the default toolbar configuration for $[officename]. +This overview describes the default toolbar configuration for $[officename].
-Asian Language Support +Asian Language Support
-These commands can only be accessed after you enable support for Asian languages in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +These commands can only be accessed after you enable support for Asian languages in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00000010.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00000010.xhp index 945cf3bc03..1d13d1e6da 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00000010.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00000010.xhp @@ -31,53 +31,53 @@ - Context Menus + Context Menus
- Cut - Cuts out the selected object and stores it on the clipboard. The object can be reinserted from the clipboard by using Paste. + Cut + Cuts out the selected object and stores it on the clipboard. The object can be reinserted from the clipboard by using Paste.
- Paste - Inserts the element that you moved to the clipboard into the document. This command can only be called if the contents of the clipboard can be inserted at the current cursor position. + Paste + Inserts the element that you moved to the clipboard into the document. This command can only be called if the contents of the clipboard can be inserted at the current cursor position.
- Insert - Opens a submenu in the Gallery where you can choose between Copy and Link. The selected Gallery object is either copied into the current document or a link is created. - If you have selected an object in your document, then a new insertion will replace the selected object. + Insert + Opens a submenu in the Gallery where you can choose between Copy and Link. The selected Gallery object is either copied into the current document or a link is created. + If you have selected an object in your document, then a new insertion will replace the selected object.
- Background - Inserts the selected picture as a background graphic. Use the submenu commands Page or Paragraph to define whether the graphic should cover the entire page or only the current paragraph. + Background + Inserts the selected picture as a background graphic. Use the submenu commands Page or Paragraph to define whether the graphic should cover the entire page or only the current paragraph.
- Copy - Copies the selected element to the clipboard. + Copy + Copies the selected element to the clipboard.
- Delete - Deletes the current selection. If multiple objects are selected, all will be deleted. In most cases, a security query appears before objects are deleted. - The object is either physically deleted from the data carrier or the object display is removed, depending on context. + Delete + Deletes the current selection. If multiple objects are selected, all will be deleted. In most cases, a security query appears before objects are deleted. + The object is either physically deleted from the data carrier or the object display is removed, depending on context.
- If you choose Delete while in the Gallery, the entry will be deleted from the Gallery, but the file itself will remain untouched. + If you choose Delete while in the Gallery, the entry will be deleted from the Gallery, but the file itself will remain untouched.
- Open - Use the Open command to open the selected object in a new task. + Open + Use the Open command to open the selected object in a new task.
- Rename - Enables a selected object to be renamed. After selecting Rename the name is selected and a new one can be entered directly. Use the arrow keys to set the cursor at the beginning or end of the name to delete or add to part of the name or to reposition the cursor. + Rename + Enables a selected object to be renamed. After selecting Rename the name is selected and a new one can be entered directly. Use the arrow keys to set the cursor at the beginning or end of the name to delete or add to part of the name or to reposition the cursor.
- Update - Updates the view in the window or in the selected object. + Update + Updates the view in the window or in the selected object.
- Preview - The element selected is displayed in the Gallery at maximum size. Double-click the preview to switch back to the normal Gallery view. + Preview + The element selected is displayed in the Gallery at maximum size. Double-click the preview to switch back to the normal Gallery view.
- Create Link - This command can be activated if an object is selected. A link named "Link to xxx" (xxx represents the name of the object) will be created directly in the same directory as that of the selected object. + Create Link + This command can be activated if an object is selected. A link named "Link to xxx" (xxx represents the name of the object) will be created directly in the same directory as that of the selected object.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00000011.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00000011.xhp index 85e7dcf552..b49c3b5747 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00000011.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00000011.xhp @@ -29,11 +29,11 @@ -Menu Commands +Menu Commands
-The window containing the document you want to work on must be selected in order to use the menu commands. Similarly, you must select an object in the document to use the menu commands associated with the object. -The menus are context sensitive. This means that those menu items are available that are relevant to the work currently being carried out. If the cursor is located in a text, then all of those menu items are available that are needed to edit the text. If you have selected graphics in a document, then you will see all of the menu items that can be used to edit graphics.removed a para
+The window containing the document you want to work on must be selected in order to use the menu commands. Similarly, you must select an object in the document to use the menu commands associated with the object. +The menus are context sensitive. This means that those menu items are available that are relevant to the work currently being carried out. If the cursor is located in a text, then all of those menu items are available that are needed to edit the text. If you have selected graphics in a document, then you will see all of the menu items that can be used to edit graphics.removed a para
diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp index b8e84820da..db92e06db7 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp @@ -43,147 +43,147 @@ PostScript; creating files exporting;to PostScript format -About Import and Export Filters -In $[officename], apart from its own XML formats you can also open and save many foreign XML formats. -In UNIX, certain file formats cannot be recognized automatically. +About Import and Export Filters +In $[officename], apart from its own XML formats you can also open and save many foreign XML formats. +In UNIX, certain file formats cannot be recognized automatically. $[officename] normally recognizes the correct file type automatically on opening a file. There may be cases where you have to select the file type yourself in the Open dialog. For example, if you have a database table in text format that you want to open as a database table, you need to specify the file type "Text CSV" after selecting the file. -Basic Macros in MS Office Documents -In %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties you can specify the settings for the VBA macro codes in MS Office documents. VBA macros are unable to run in $[officename]; they must first be converted and adapted. Often you only want to use $[officename] to change the visible content of a Word, Excel or PowerPoint file and then save the file again in Microsoft Office format without changing the macros they contain. You can set the behavior of $[officename] as desired: Either the VBA macros are saved in commented form as a subroutine of $[officename] and when the document is saved in MS Office format are written back correctly again, or you can select the Microsoft Office macros to be removed when loading. The last option is an effective protection against viruses within the Microsoft Office documents. -Notes regarding external formats and file types -Even if they are not installed, some filters can be selected in the Open and Save dialogs. If you select such a filter, a message will appear saying that you can still install the filter if you require. -If you want to install additional filters or remove individual filters from the installation, close %PRODUCTNAME, start the Setup program and select the Modify option. Then you will see a dialog in which you can add or remove individual components of %PRODUCTNAME. Graphic filters can be found in "Optional Components". +Basic Macros in MS Office Documents +In %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties you can specify the settings for the VBA macro codes in MS Office documents. VBA macros are unable to run in $[officename]; they must first be converted and adapted. Often you only want to use $[officename] to change the visible content of a Word, Excel or PowerPoint file and then save the file again in Microsoft Office format without changing the macros they contain. You can set the behavior of $[officename] as desired: Either the VBA macros are saved in commented form as a subroutine of $[officename] and when the document is saved in MS Office format are written back correctly again, or you can select the Microsoft Office macros to be removed when loading. The last option is an effective protection against viruses within the Microsoft Office documents. +Notes regarding external formats and file types +Even if they are not installed, some filters can be selected in the Open and Save dialogs. If you select such a filter, a message will appear saying that you can still install the filter if you require. +If you want to install additional filters or remove individual filters from the installation, close %PRODUCTNAME, start the Setup program and select the Modify option. Then you will see a dialog in which you can add or remove individual components of %PRODUCTNAME. Graphic filters can be found in "Optional Components". - + Importing and Exporting Text Documents - + $[officename] Writer can read various versions of the Microsoft Word text format. You also can save your own texts in Word format. However, not everything available with $[officename] Writer can be transferred to MS Word, and not everything can be imported. - + Importing is normally not problematic. Even redlining information and controls are imported (and exported) so that $[officename] recognizes inserted or deleted text in Word documents as well as font attributes that have been modified. Different coloring for each author and the time of such changes is also included. When graphic text boxes and labels are imported from templates, most of the attributes are also imported as direct paragraph and drawing attributes. However, some of the attributes may be lost during the import procedure. - + It is also possible to import and export RTF files. This file format can be used to exchange formatted texts across various applications and platforms. In this way, many formats read by most programs will be transferred without a problem. The clipboard uses RTF format when you insert part of a spreadsheet from $[officename] Calc through DDE into $[officename] Writer. -The filter Text Encoded helps you open and save text documents with another encoding font. The filter opens a dialog that enables you to select character set, default fonts, language and paragraph break. -Importing and Exporting in HTML Format -With $[officename] Writer, you can insert footnotes and endnotes in your HTML document. They are exported as meta tags. The footnote and endnote characters are exported as hyperlinks. -Comments are used to include unknown characters in an HTML document. Every note that begins with "HTML:..." and ends with ">" is treated as an HTML code, but is exported without these designations. Several tags around text can be included after "HTML:..." Accented characters are converted into the ANSI character set. Comments are created during import (for example, for meta tags that have no room in the file properties or unknown tags). -The HTML import of $[officename] Writer is able to read files that have UTF-8 or UCS2 character coding. All characters that are contained in the ANSI character set or in the system's character set can be displayed. -When exporting to HTML, the character set selected in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility is used. Characters not present there are written in a substitute form, which is displayed correctly in modern web browsers. When exporting such characters, you will receive an appropriate warning. -If, in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility, you select Mozilla Firefox, MS Internet Explorer, or $[officename] Writer as the export option, upon export all important font attributes are exported as direct attributes (for example, text color, font size, bold, italic, and so on) in CSS1 styles. (CSS stands for Cascading Style Sheets.) Importing is also carried out according to this standard. -The "font" property corresponds to Mozilla Firefox; that is, before the font size you can specify optional values for "font-style" (italic, none), "font-variant" (normal, small-caps) and "font-weight" (normal, bold). +The filter Text Encoded helps you open and save text documents with another encoding font. The filter opens a dialog that enables you to select character set, default fonts, language and paragraph break. +Importing and Exporting in HTML Format +With $[officename] Writer, you can insert footnotes and endnotes in your HTML document. They are exported as meta tags. The footnote and endnote characters are exported as hyperlinks. +Comments are used to include unknown characters in an HTML document. Every note that begins with "HTML:..." and ends with ">" is treated as an HTML code, but is exported without these designations. Several tags around text can be included after "HTML:..." Accented characters are converted into the ANSI character set. Comments are created during import (for example, for meta tags that have no room in the file properties or unknown tags). +The HTML import of $[officename] Writer is able to read files that have UTF-8 or UCS2 character coding. All characters that are contained in the ANSI character set or in the system's character set can be displayed. +When exporting to HTML, the character set selected in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility is used. Characters not present there are written in a substitute form, which is displayed correctly in modern web browsers. When exporting such characters, you will receive an appropriate warning. +If, in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility, you select Mozilla Firefox, MS Internet Explorer, or $[officename] Writer as the export option, upon export all important font attributes are exported as direct attributes (for example, text color, font size, bold, italic, and so on) in CSS1 styles. (CSS stands for Cascading Style Sheets.) Importing is also carried out according to this standard. +The "font" property corresponds to Mozilla Firefox; that is, before the font size you can specify optional values for "font-style" (italic, none), "font-variant" (normal, small-caps) and "font-weight" (normal, bold). -For example, "Font: bold italic small-caps 12pt/200% Arial, Helvetica" switches to bold, italic, small caps, double-space with the font family Arial or Helvetica, if Arial doesn't exist. +For example, "Font: bold italic small-caps 12pt/200% Arial, Helvetica" switches to bold, italic, small caps, double-space with the font family Arial or Helvetica, if Arial doesn't exist. -"Font: 10pt" switches to a 10pt font, with bold, italic, small caps off. +"Font: 10pt" switches to a 10pt font, with bold, italic, small caps off. -If MS Internet Explorer or $[officename] Writer are set as the export option, the sizes of the control field and their internal margins are exported as styles (print formats). CSS1 size properties are based on "width" and "height" values. The "Margin" property is used to set equal margins on all sides of the page. To allow different margins, the "Margin-Left", "Margin-Right", "Margin-Top" and "Margin-Bottom" properties are used. -The distances of graphics and Plug-Ins to the content can be set individually for export to $[officename] Writer and MS Internet Explorer. If the top/bottom or right/left margin is set differently, the distances are exported in a "STYLE" option for the corresponding tag as CSS1 size properties "Margin-Top", "Margin-Bottom", "Margin-Left" and "Margin-Right". -Text frames are supported with the use of CSS1 extensions for absolute positioned objects. This applies only to the export options Mozilla Firefox, MS Internet Explorer, and $[officename] Writer. Text frames can be aligned as graphics, Plug-Ins, +If MS Internet Explorer or $[officename] Writer are set as the export option, the sizes of the control field and their internal margins are exported as styles (print formats). CSS1 size properties are based on "width" and "height" values. The "Margin" property is used to set equal margins on all sides of the page. To allow different margins, the "Margin-Left", "Margin-Right", "Margin-Top" and "Margin-Bottom" properties are used. +The distances of graphics and Plug-Ins to the content can be set individually for export to $[officename] Writer and MS Internet Explorer. If the top/bottom or right/left margin is set differently, the distances are exported in a "STYLE" option for the corresponding tag as CSS1 size properties "Margin-Top", "Margin-Bottom", "Margin-Left" and "Margin-Right". +Text frames are supported with the use of CSS1 extensions for absolute positioned objects. This applies only to the export options Mozilla Firefox, MS Internet Explorer, and $[officename] Writer. Text frames can be aligned as graphics, Plug-Ins, and Floating Frames, but character-linked frames are not possible. -Text frames are exported as "<SPAN>" or "<DIV>" tags if they do not contain columns. If they do contain columns then they are exported as "<MULTICOL>". -The measurement unit set in $[officename] is used for HTML export of CSS1 properties. The unit can be set separately for text and HTML documents under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General or %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - View. The number of exported decimal places depends on the unit. +Text frames are exported as "<SPAN>" or "<DIV>" tags if they do not contain columns. If they do contain columns then they are exported as "<MULTICOL>". +The measurement unit set in $[officename] is used for HTML export of CSS1 properties. The unit can be set separately for text and HTML documents under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General or %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - View. The number of exported decimal places depends on the unit. -Measurement Unit +Measurement Unit -Measurement Unit Name in CSS1 +Measurement Unit Name in CSS1 -Maximum Number of Decimal Places +Maximum Number of Decimal Places -Millimeter +Millimeter -mm +mm -2 +2 -Centimeter +Centimeter -cm +cm -2 +2 -Inch +Inch -in +in -2 +2 -Pica +Pica -pc +pc -2 +2 -Point +Point -pt +pt -1 +1
-The $[officename] Web page filter supports certain capabilities of CSS2. However, to use it, print layout export must be activated in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility. Then, in HTML documents, besides the HTML Page Style, you can also use the styles "First page", "Left page" and "Right page". These styles should enable you to set different page sizes and margins for the first page and for right and left pages when printing. -Importing and Exporting Numbering -If, in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility, the export option "$[officename] Writer" or "Internet Explorer" is selected, the indents of numberings are exported as "margin-left" CSS1 property in the STYLE attribute of the <OL> and <UL> tags. The property indicates the difference relative to the indent of the next higher level. -A left paragraph indent in numbering is indicated as "margin-left" CSS1 property. First-line indents are ignored in numbering and not exported. -Importing and Exporting Spreadsheet Files -$[officename] imports and exports references to deleted sections such as, for example, a referenced column. The whole formula can be viewed during the export process and the deleted reference contains an indication (#REF!) to the reference. A #REF! will be correspondingly created for the reference during the import. -Importing and Exporting Graphics Files -As with HTML documents, you can choose to use a filter with or without the element ($[officename] Impress) in the name to open a $[officename] graphics file. If without, the file will be opened as a $[officename] Draw document. Otherwise, the file saved by an old program version is now opened in $[officename] Impress. -When you import an EPS file, a preview of the graphic is displayed in the document. If a preview is not available, a placeholder corresponding to the size of the graphic is displayed in the document. Under Unix and Microsoft Windows you can print the imported file by using a PostScript printer. +The $[officename] Web page filter supports certain capabilities of CSS2. However, to use it, print layout export must be activated in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility. Then, in HTML documents, besides the HTML Page Style, you can also use the styles "First page", "Left page" and "Right page". These styles should enable you to set different page sizes and margins for the first page and for right and left pages when printing. +Importing and Exporting Numbering +If, in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility, the export option "$[officename] Writer" or "Internet Explorer" is selected, the indents of numberings are exported as "margin-left" CSS1 property in the STYLE attribute of the <OL> and <UL> tags. The property indicates the difference relative to the indent of the next higher level. +A left paragraph indent in numbering is indicated as "margin-left" CSS1 property. First-line indents are ignored in numbering and not exported. +Importing and Exporting Spreadsheet Files +$[officename] imports and exports references to deleted sections such as, for example, a referenced column. The whole formula can be viewed during the export process and the deleted reference contains an indication (#REF!) to the reference. A #REF! will be correspondingly created for the reference during the import. +Importing and Exporting Graphics Files +As with HTML documents, you can choose to use a filter with or without the element ($[officename] Impress) in the name to open a $[officename] graphics file. If without, the file will be opened as a $[officename] Draw document. Otherwise, the file saved by an old program version is now opened in $[officename] Impress. +When you import an EPS file, a preview of the graphic is displayed in the document. If a preview is not available, a placeholder corresponding to the size of the graphic is displayed in the document. Under Unix and Microsoft Windows you can print the imported file by using a PostScript printer. If a different printer is used the preview will be printed. When exporting EPS graphics, a preview is created and has the TIFF or EPSI format. If an EPS graphic together with other graphics is exported in the EPS format then this file will be embedded unchanged in the new file. -Multipage-TIFFs are allowed when graphics are imported or exported in TIFF format. The graphics are retrieved as a set of individual pictures in a single file, for example, the individual pages of a fax. -Some $[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress options can be accessed through File - Export. See Graphics Export Options for more information. -PostScript -To export a document or graphic in PostScript format: +Multipage-TIFFs are allowed when graphics are imported or exported in TIFF format. The graphics are retrieved as a set of individual pictures in a single file, for example, the individual pages of a fax. +Some $[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress options can be accessed through File - Export. See Graphics Export Options for more information. +PostScript +To export a document or graphic in PostScript format: -If you have not yet done so, install a PostScript printer driver, such as the Apple LaserWriter driver. +If you have not yet done so, install a PostScript printer driver, such as the Apple LaserWriter driver. -Print the document with the File - Print menu command. +Print the document with the File - Print menu command. -Select the PostScript printer in the dialog and mark the Print to file check box. A PostScript file will be created. +Select the PostScript printer in the dialog and mark the Print to file check box. A PostScript file will be created. diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp index 1eb9f7df4e..11c25086dd 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp @@ -39,229 +39,228 @@ ODF file formats mw changed "file formats;OpenDocument." entry and deleted "file formats;XML". MW made "document types;..." a one level entrymw changed "defaults;..." -XML File Formats +XML File Formats - By default, $[officename] loads and saves files in the OpenDocument file format. - The OpenDocument file format (ODF) is a standardized file format used by many software applications. You can find more information at the Wikipedia site: wikipedia.org/wiki/OpenDocument. - OpenDocument file format names - %PRODUCTNAME uses the following file formats: + By default, $[officename] loads and saves files in the OpenDocument file format. + The OpenDocument file format (ODF) is a standardized file format used by many software applications. You can find more information at the Wikipedia site: wikipedia.org/wiki/OpenDocument. + OpenDocument file format names + %PRODUCTNAME uses the following file formats: - Document format + Document format - File extension + File extension - ODF Text + ODF Text - *.odt + *.odt - ODF Text Template + ODF Text Template - *.ott + *.ott - ODF Master Document + ODF Master Document - *.odm + *.odm - HTML Document + HTML Document - *.html + *.html - HTML Document Template + HTML Document Template - *.oth + *.oth - ODF Spreadsheet + ODF Spreadsheet - *.ods + *.ods - ODF Spreadsheet Template + ODF Spreadsheet Template - *.ots + *.ots - ODF Drawing + ODF Drawing - *.odg + *.odg - ODF Drawing Template + ODF Drawing Template - *.otg + *.otg - ODF Presentation + ODF Presentation - *.odp + *.odp - ODF Presentation Template + ODF Presentation Template - *.otp + *.otp - ODF Formula + ODF Formula - *.odf + *.odf - ODF Database + ODF Database - *.odb + *.odb - %PRODUCTNAME Extension + %PRODUCTNAME Extension - *.oxt + *.oxt
- The HTML format is not an OpenDocument format. - ODF Chart is the name of the file format for stand alone charts. This format with the extension *.odc is currently not in use. - Evolution of the OpenDocument format - The OpenDocument format evolves over time. + The HTML format is not an OpenDocument format. + ODF Chart is the name of the file format for stand alone charts. This format with the extension *.odc is currently not in use. + Evolution of the OpenDocument format + The OpenDocument format evolves over time. - ODF version + ODF version - Date of standard approval by OASISintl. community wants intl iso standard date formats + Date of standard approval by OASISintl. community wants intl iso standard date formats - First supporting version of the software + First supporting version of the software - ODF 1.0 + ODF 1.0 - 2005-05-01 + 2005-05-01 - OpenOffice.org 1.1.5 or StarOffice 7 + OpenOffice.org 1.1.5 or StarOffice 7 - ODF 1.1 + ODF 1.1 - 2007-02-02 + 2007-02-02 - OpenOffice.org 2.2 or StarOffice 8 Update 4 + OpenOffice.org 2.2 or StarOffice 8 Update 4 - ODF 1.2 + ODF 1.2 - 2011-09-30 + 2011-09-30 - OpenOffice.org 3, StarOffice 9, Oracle Open Office + OpenOffice.org 3, StarOffice 9, Oracle Open Office - ODF 1.2 (Extended) + ODF 1.2 (Extended) - - + - - OpenOffice.org 3.2 or StarOffice 9.2 + OpenOffice.org 3.2 or StarOffice 9.2
-In current versions, you can select to save your documents using ODF 1.2 (default) or ODF 1.0/1.1 (for backward compatibility). Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - General and select the ODF format version. -If you want to exchange documents with users that still use OpenOffice.org 1 or StarOffice 7, save the document using the respectively named filter in the File type listbox. -If you want to define another file format as the default, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General to find alternative file formats for each $[officename] document type. -XML file structure -Documents in OpenDocument file format are stored as compressed zip archives that contain XML files. To view these XML files, you can open the OpenDocument file with an unzip program. The following files and directories are contained within the OpenDocument files: +In current versions, you can select to save your documents using ODF 1.2 (default) or ODF 1.0/1.1 (for backward compatibility). Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - General and select the ODF format version. +If you want to exchange documents with users that still use OpenOffice.org 1 or StarOffice 7, save the document using the respectively named filter in the File type listbox. +If you want to define another file format as the default, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General to find alternative file formats for each $[officename] document type. +XML file structure +Documents in OpenDocument file format are stored as compressed zip archives that contain XML files. To view these XML files, you can open the OpenDocument file with an unzip program. The following files and directories are contained within the OpenDocument files: -The text content of the document is located in content.xml. +The text content of the document is located in content.xml. By default, content.xml is stored without formatting elements like indentation or line breaks to minimize the time for saving and opening the document. The use of indentations and line breaks can be activated in the Expert configuration by setting the property /org.openoffice.Office.Common/Save/Document PrettyPrinting to true. -The file meta.xml contains the meta information of the document, which you can enter under File - Properties. -If you save a document with a password, meta.xml will not be encrypted. +The file meta.xml contains the meta information of the document, which you can enter under File - Properties. +If you save a document with a password, meta.xml will not be encrypted. -The file settings.xml contains further information about the settings for this document. +The file settings.xml contains further information about the settings for this document. -In styles.xml, you find the styles applied to the document that can be seen in the Styles and Formatting window. +In styles.xml, you find the styles applied to the document that can be seen in the Styles and Formatting window. -The meta-inf/manifest.xml file describes the structure of the XML file. +The meta-inf/manifest.xml file describes the structure of the XML file. -Additional files and folders can be contained in the packed file format. -Definition of the XML formats -The schema for the OpenDocument formats can be found on the www.oasis-open.org web site. +Additional files and folders can be contained in the packed file format. +Definition of the XML formats +The schema for the OpenDocument formats can be found on the www.oasis-open.org web site.
-Document Converter Wizard +Document Converter Wizard
diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00000099.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00000099.xhp index 1352504650..1740170a65 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00000099.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00000099.xhp @@ -30,28 +30,28 @@ -See also... +See also... -Tools Menu - Scenarios +Tools Menu - Scenarios
-On the help page for $[officename] general you can find instructions that are applicable to all modules, such as working with windows and menus, customizing $[officename], data sources, Gallery, and drag and drop. -If you want help with another module, switch to the help for that module with the combo box in the navigation area. +On the help page for $[officename] general you can find instructions that are applicable to all modules, such as working with windows and menus, customizing $[officename], data sources, Gallery, and drag and drop. +If you want help with another module, switch to the help for that module with the combo box in the navigation area.
-The availability of this function depends on your X Window Manager. +The availability of this function depends on your X Window Manager. -Enables the display of icon names at the mouse pointer and other Help contents. +Enables the display of icon names at the mouse pointer and other Help contents. -Enables the display of a brief description of menus and icons at the mouse pointer. +Enables the display of a brief description of menus and icons at the mouse pointer.
-Some of the shortcut keys may be assigned to your desktop system. Keys that are assigned to the desktop system are not available to %PRODUCTNAME. Try to assign different keys either for %PRODUCTNAME, in Tools - Customize - Keyboard, or in your desktop system. +Some of the shortcut keys may be assigned to your desktop system. Keys that are assigned to the desktop system are not available to %PRODUCTNAME. Try to assign different keys either for %PRODUCTNAME, in Tools - Customize - Keyboard, or in your desktop system.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00000200.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00000200.xhp index 3517d57a26..0bd8b9f371 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00000200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00000200.xhp @@ -27,91 +27,91 @@ -Graphics Export Options -Defines graphics export options. +Graphics Export Options +Defines graphics export options.
-When you export graphical elements to a file, you can select the file type. For most supported file types a dialog opens where you can setup export options. -The following file types do not show an options dialog: PWP, RAS, SVG, TIFF, XPM. -The other file types show options dialogs where you can set the width and height of the exported image. -Depending on the file type, you can specify some more options. Press Shift+F1 and hover over the control to see an extended help text. +When you export graphical elements to a file, you can select the file type. For most supported file types a dialog opens where you can setup export options. +The following file types do not show an options dialog: PWP, RAS, SVG, TIFF, XPM. +The other file types show options dialogs where you can set the width and height of the exported image. +Depending on the file type, you can specify some more options. Press Shift+F1 and hover over the control to see an extended help text. Common controls -Specifies the measurement units. -Width -Specifies the width. -Height -Specifies the height. +Specifies the measurement units. +Width +Specifies the width. +Height +Specifies the height. Resolution controls -Resolution -Enter the image resolution. Select the measurement units from the list box. +Resolution +Enter the image resolution. Select the measurement units from the list box. -More options +More options JPEG controls -For JPEG files you can set the color depth and the quality. +For JPEG files you can set the color depth and the quality. -Select the color depth from 8 bit grayscale or 24 bit true color. +Select the color depth from 8 bit grayscale or 24 bit true color. -Sets the compression for the export. A high compression means a smaller, but slower to load image. +Sets the compression for the export. A high compression means a smaller, but slower to load image. -Sets the quality for the export. Choose from a low quality with minimal file size, up to a high quality and big file size +Sets the quality for the export. Choose from a low quality with minimal file size, up to a high quality and big file size BMP controls -For BMP files you can set the compression and the RLE encoding. +For BMP files you can set the compression and the RLE encoding. -Applies RLE (Run Length Encoding) to the BMP graphics. +Applies RLE (Run Length Encoding) to the BMP graphics. PBM PGM PPM controls -For PBM, PGM, and PPM files you can set the encoding. +For PBM, PGM, and PPM files you can set the encoding. -Exports the file in binary format. The resulting file is smaller than a text file. +Exports the file in binary format. The resulting file is smaller than a text file. -Exports the file in ASCII text format. The resulting file is larger than a binary file. +Exports the file in ASCII text format. The resulting file is larger than a binary file. PNG controls -For PNG files you can set the compression and the interlaced mode. +For PNG files you can set the compression and the interlaced mode. -Specifies whether the graphic is to be saved in interlaced mode. +Specifies whether the graphic is to be saved in interlaced mode. GIF controls -For GIF files you can set the transparency and the interlaced mode. +For GIF files you can set the transparency and the interlaced mode. -Specifies whether to save the background of the picture as transparent. Only objects will be visible in the GIF image. Use the Color Replacer to set the transparent color in the picture. +Specifies whether to save the background of the picture as transparent. Only objects will be visible in the GIF image. Use the Color Replacer to set the transparent color in the picture. EPS controls -For EPS files you can set the preview, the color format, the compression, and the version. - +For EPS files you can set the preview, the color format, the compression, and the version. + You must print an EPS file with a PostScript printer. Other printers will only print the embedded preview. -Specifies whether a preview image is exported in the TIFF format together with the actual PostScript file. +Specifies whether a preview image is exported in the TIFF format together with the actual PostScript file. -Specifies whether a monochrome preview graphic in EPSI format is exported together with the PostScript file. This format only contains printable characters from the 7-bit ASCII code. +Specifies whether a monochrome preview graphic in EPSI format is exported together with the PostScript file. This format only contains printable characters from the 7-bit ASCII code. -Compression is not available at this level. Select the Level 1 option if your PostScript printer does not offer the capabilities of Level 2. +Compression is not available at this level. Select the Level 1 option if your PostScript printer does not offer the capabilities of Level 2. -Select the Level 2 option if your output device supports colored bitmaps, palette graphics and compressed graphics. +Select the Level 2 option if your output device supports colored bitmaps, palette graphics and compressed graphics. -Exports the file in color. +Exports the file in color. -Exports the file in grayscale tones. +Exports the file in grayscale tones. -LZW compression is the compression of a file into a smaller file using a table-based lookup algorithm. +LZW compression is the compression of a file into a smaller file using a table-based lookup algorithm. -Specifies that you do not wish to use compression. +Specifies that you do not wish to use compression. -See Import and Export Filter Information for more information about filters. +See Import and Export Filter Information for more information about filters. diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00000206.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00000206.xhp index aecc7adb9f..f118801dae 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00000206.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00000206.xhp @@ -29,10 +29,10 @@ -Dif Import/Export/ Lotus import/ dBASE import -Defines the options for import/export. These dialogs will be automatically shown if the corresponding file type is selected. -Character set -Select the character set from the options used for import/export. -For further information regarding filters, refer to the topic: Information about Import and Export Filters. +Dif Import/Export/ Lotus import/ dBASE import +Defines the options for import/export. These dialogs will be automatically shown if the corresponding file type is selected. +Character set +Select the character set from the options used for import/export. +For further information regarding filters, refer to the topic: Information about Import and Export Filters. diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp index 267db045b7..8dbc73412b 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp @@ -30,40 +30,40 @@ -Export text files -The Export text files dialog allows you to define the export options for text files. The dialog will be displayed if you save spreadsheet data as file type "Text CSV", and if the Edit filter settings check box is marked in the Save As dialog. -Field options -Defines the field separator, text separator and character set that is used for the text export. -Character set -Specifies the character set for text export. -Field delimiter -Choose or enter the field delimiter, which separates data fields. -Text delimiter -Choose or enter the text delimiter, which encloses every data field. +Export text files +The Export text files dialog allows you to define the export options for text files. The dialog will be displayed if you save spreadsheet data as file type "Text CSV", and if the Edit filter settings check box is marked in the Save As dialog. +Field options +Defines the field separator, text separator and character set that is used for the text export. +Character set +Specifies the character set for text export. +Field delimiter +Choose or enter the field delimiter, which separates data fields. +Text delimiter +Choose or enter the text delimiter, which encloses every data field. -Quote all text cells -Exports all text cells with leading and trailing quote characters as set in the Text delimiter box. If not checked, only those text cells get quoted that contain the Field delimiter character. +Quote all text cells +Exports all text cells with leading and trailing quote characters as set in the Text delimiter box. If not checked, only those text cells get quoted that contain the Field delimiter character. -Save cell content as shown -Enabled by default, data will be saved as displayed, including applied number formats. If this checkbox is not marked, raw data content will be saved, as in older versions of the software. -Depending on the number format, saving cell content as shown may write values that during an import cannot be interpreted as numerical values anymore. -Fixed column width -Exports all data fields with a fixed width. +Save cell content as shown +Enabled by default, data will be saved as displayed, including applied number formats. If this checkbox is not marked, raw data content will be saved, as in older versions of the software. +Depending on the number format, saving cell content as shown may write values that during an import cannot be interpreted as numerical values anymore. +Fixed column width +Exports all data fields with a fixed width. -The width of a data field in the exported text file is set to the current width of the corresponding column. +The width of a data field in the exported text file is set to the current width of the corresponding column. -Values are exported in the format as currently seen in the cell. +Values are exported in the format as currently seen in the cell. -If a value is longer than the fixed column width, it will be exported as a ### string. +If a value is longer than the fixed column width, it will be exported as a ### string. -If a text string is longer than the fixed column width, it will be truncated at the end. +If a text string is longer than the fixed column width, it will be truncated at the end. -The alignment Left, Centered, and Right will be simulated by inserted blanks. +The alignment Left, Centered, and Right will be simulated by inserted blanks.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00000208.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00000208.xhp index daa51b74a7..3ede289ea6 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00000208.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00000208.xhp @@ -29,8 +29,8 @@ -Text Import -Sets the import options for delimited data. +Text Import +Sets the import options for delimited data.
@@ -39,167 +39,167 @@ -Import -Character Set -Specifies the character set to be used in the imported file. - - -Language -Determines how the number strings are imported. -If Language is set to Default (for CSV import) or Automatic (for HTML import), Calc will use the globally set language. If Language is set to a specific language, that language will be used when importing numbers. -When importing an HTML document, the Language selection can conflict with the global HTML option Use 'English (USA)' locale for numbers. The global HTML option is effective only when the Automatic language option is selected. If you select a specific language in the HTML Import Options dialog, the global HTML option is ignored. - - -From Row -Specifies the row where you want to start the import. The rows are visible in the preview window at the bottom of the dialog. -Separator Options -Specifies whether your data uses separators or fixed widths as delimiters. -Fixed width -Separates fixed-width data (equal number of characters) into columns. Click on the ruler in the preview window to set the width. -Separated by -Select the separator used in your data. -Tab -Separates data delimited by tabs into columns. -Semicolon -Separates data delimited by semicolons into columns. -Comma -Separates data delimited by commas into columns. -Space -Separates data delimited by spaces into columns. +Import +Character Set +Specifies the character set to be used in the imported file. + + +Language +Determines how the number strings are imported. +If Language is set to Default (for CSV import) or Automatic (for HTML import), Calc will use the globally set language. If Language is set to a specific language, that language will be used when importing numbers. +When importing an HTML document, the Language selection can conflict with the global HTML option Use 'English (USA)' locale for numbers. The global HTML option is effective only when the Automatic language option is selected. If you select a specific language in the HTML Import Options dialog, the global HTML option is ignored. + + +From Row +Specifies the row where you want to start the import. The rows are visible in the preview window at the bottom of the dialog. +Separator Options +Specifies whether your data uses separators or fixed widths as delimiters. +Fixed width +Separates fixed-width data (equal number of characters) into columns. Click on the ruler in the preview window to set the width. +Separated by +Select the separator used in your data. +Tab +Separates data delimited by tabs into columns. +Semicolon +Separates data delimited by semicolons into columns. +Comma +Separates data delimited by commas into columns. +Space +Separates data delimited by spaces into columns. -Other -Separates data into columns using the custom separator that you specify. Note: The custom separator must also be contained in your data. -Merge delimiters -Combines consecutive delimiters and removes blank data fields. -Text delimiter -Select a character to delimit text data. You can can also enter a character in the text box. +Other +Separates data into columns using the custom separator that you specify. Note: The custom separator must also be contained in your data. +Merge delimiters +Combines consecutive delimiters and removes blank data fields. +Text delimiter +Select a character to delimit text data. You can can also enter a character in the text box. -Other options -Sets some other import options. +Other options +Sets some other import options. -Quoted fields as text -When this option is enabled, fields or cells whose values are quoted in their entirety (the first and last characters of the value equal the text delimiter) are imported as text. +Quoted fields as text +When this option is enabled, fields or cells whose values are quoted in their entirety (the first and last characters of the value equal the text delimiter) are imported as text. -Detect special numbers -When this option is enabled, Calc will automatically detect all number formats, including special number formats such as dates, time, and scientific notation. -The selected language influences how such special numbers are detected, since different languages and regions many have different conventions for such special numbers. -When this option is disabled, Calc will detect and convert only decimal numbers. The rest, including numbers formatted in scientific notation, will be imported as text. A decimal number string can have digits 0-9, thousands separators, and a decimal separator. Thousands separators and decimal separators may vary with the selected language and region. +Detect special numbers +When this option is enabled, Calc will automatically detect all number formats, including special number formats such as dates, time, and scientific notation. +The selected language influences how such special numbers are detected, since different languages and regions many have different conventions for such special numbers. +When this option is disabled, Calc will detect and convert only decimal numbers. The rest, including numbers formatted in scientific notation, will be imported as text. A decimal number string can have digits 0-9, thousands separators, and a decimal separator. Thousands separators and decimal separators may vary with the selected language and region. -Fields -Shows how your data will look when it is separated into columns. -Column type -Choose a column in the preview window and select the data type to be applied the imported data. You can select one of the following options: +Fields +Shows how your data will look when it is separated into columns. +Column type +Choose a column in the preview window and select the data type to be applied the imported data. You can select one of the following options: -Type +Type -Function +Function -Standard +Standard -$[officename] determines the type. +$[officename] determines the type. -Text +Text -Imported data are treated as text. +Imported data are treated as text. -Date (DMY) +Date (DMY) -Applies a date format (Day, Month, Year) to the imported data in a column. +Applies a date format (Day, Month, Year) to the imported data in a column. -Date (MDY) +Date (MDY) -Applies a date format (Month, Day, Year) to the imported data in a column. +Applies a date format (Month, Day, Year) to the imported data in a column. -Date (YMD) +Date (YMD) -Applies a date format (Year, Month, Day) to the imported data in a column. +Applies a date format (Year, Month, Day) to the imported data in a column. -US English +US English -Numbers formatted in US English are searched for and included regardless of the system language. A number format is not applied. If there are no US English entries, the Standard format is applied. +Numbers formatted in US English are searched for and included regardless of the system language. A number format is not applied. If there are no US English entries, the Standard format is applied. -Hide +Hide -The data in the column are not imported. +The data in the column are not imported.
-If you selected one of the date formats (DMY), (MDY), or (YMD) and you enter numbers without date delimiters, the numbers are interpreted as follows: +If you selected one of the date formats (DMY), (MDY), or (YMD) and you enter numbers without date delimiters, the numbers are interpreted as follows: -Number of characters +Number of characters -Date format +Date format -6 +6 -Two characters each are taken for day, month, and year in the selected order. +Two characters each are taken for day, month, and year in the selected order. -8 +8 -Four characters are taken for the year, two each for month and day, in the selected order. +Four characters are taken for the year, two each for month and day, in the selected order. -5 or 7 +5 or 7 -As with 6 or 8 characters, but the first part of the sequence has one character less. This will suppress a leading zero for month and day. +As with 6 or 8 characters, but the first part of the sequence has one character less. This will suppress a leading zero for month and day.
-If you want to include the leading zero in the data you import, in telephone numbers for example, apply the "Text" format to the column. -Preview -Shows how the imported text will look after it is separated into columns. To apply a format to a column when it is imported, click a column and select a Column type. When you select a Column type, the column heading displays the applied format. -If you want to use a fixed width to separate the imported data into columns, click in the ruler to set the width boundaries. -Navigating Without the Mouse -For more information, see Information about Import and Export Filters. +If you want to include the leading zero in the data you import, in telephone numbers for example, apply the "Text" format to the column. +Preview +Shows how the imported text will look after it is separated into columns. To apply a format to a column when it is imported, click a column and select a Column type. When you select a Column type, the column heading displays the applied format. +If you want to use a fixed width to separate the imported data into columns, click in the ruler to set the width boundaries. +Navigating Without the Mouse +For more information, see Information about Import and Export Filters. diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00000215.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00000215.xhp index d1789bbe37..9e67875f27 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00000215.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00000215.xhp @@ -31,32 +31,32 @@ -ASCII Filter Options -You can specify which options, such as basic font, language, character set, or break, are imported or exported with a text document. The dialog appears when you load an ASCII file with the filter "Text Encoded" or when you save the document the first time, or when you "save as" with another name. +ASCII Filter Options +You can specify which options, such as basic font, language, character set, or break, are imported or exported with a text document. The dialog appears when you load an ASCII file with the filter "Text Encoded" or when you save the document the first time, or when you "save as" with another name.
-Properties -Defines the settings for importing or exporting your file. When exporting, only the character set and paragraph break can be defined. +Properties +Defines the settings for importing or exporting your file. When exporting, only the character set and paragraph break can be defined. -Character set -Specifies the character set of the file for export or import. +Character set +Specifies the character set of the file for export or import. -Default fonts -By setting a default font, you specify that the text should be displayed in a specific font. The default fonts can only be selected when importing. +Default fonts +By setting a default font, you specify that the text should be displayed in a specific font. The default fonts can only be selected when importing. -Language -Specifies the language of the text, if this has not already been defined. This setting is only available when importing. -Paragraph break -Defines the type of paragraph break for a text line. +Language +Specifies the language of the text, if this has not already been defined. This setting is only available when importing. +Paragraph break +Defines the type of paragraph break for a text line. -CR & LF -Produces a "Carriage Return" and a "Linefeed". This option is the default. +CR & LF +Produces a "Carriage Return" and a "Linefeed". This option is the default. -CR -Produces a "Carriage Return" as the paragraph break. +CR +Produces a "Carriage Return" as the paragraph break. -LF -Produces a "Linefeed" as the paragraph break. +LF +Produces a "Linefeed" as the paragraph break. diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00000401.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00000401.xhp index 022f796d0f..da34376898 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00000401.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00000401.xhp @@ -27,73 +27,73 @@ -File Menu -Choose File - Preview in Web Browser +File Menu +Choose File - Preview in Web Browser
-Choose File - New +Choose File - New - + New icon on the Standard Bar (the icon shows the type of the new document)
- + Icon -New +New
-Key CommandCtrl+N +Key CommandCtrl+N
-Menu File - New +Menu File - New - Templates. -Key Shift+CommandCtrl+N +Key Shift+CommandCtrl+N
-Choose File - New - Labels +Choose File - New - Labels -Choose File - New - Labels - Labels tab +Choose File - New - Labels - Labels tab
-Choose File - New - Labels - Format tab -Choose File - New - Business Cards - Format tab +Choose File - New - Labels - Format tab +Choose File - New - Business Cards - Format tab
-Choose File - New - Labels - Options tab -Choose File - New - Business Cards - Options tab +Choose File - New - Labels - Options tab +Choose File - New - Business Cards - Options tab
-Choose File - New - Business Cards +Choose File - New - Business Cards -Choose File - New - Business Cards - Medium tab +Choose File - New - Business Cards - Medium tab -Choose File - New - Business Cards - Business cards tab +Choose File - New - Business Cards - Business cards tab -Choose File - New - Business Cards - Private tab +Choose File - New - Business Cards - Private tab -Choose File - New - Business Cards - Business tab +Choose File - New - Business Cards - Business tab
-Choose File - Open +Choose File - Open -CommandCtrl+O -On the Standard Bar, click +CommandCtrl+O +On the Standard Bar, click
- + Icon -Open File +Open File
@@ -101,118 +101,118 @@
-Menu File - Open, File type Text Encoded selected -Menu File - Save As, File type Text Encoded selected +Menu File - Open, File type Text Encoded selected +Menu File - Save As, File type Text Encoded selected
-Choose File - Wizards +Choose File - Wizards -Choose File - Wizards - Letter +Choose File - Wizards - Letter -Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Page design +Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Page design -Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Letterhead layout +Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Letterhead layout -Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Printed items +Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Printed items -Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Recipient and sender +Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Recipient and sender -Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Footer +Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Footer -Choose File - Wizards - Letter - +Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Name and Location -Choose File - Wizards - Fax +Choose File - Wizards - Fax -Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Page Design +Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Page Design -Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Items to include +Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Items to include -Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Sender and Recipient +Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Sender and Recipient -Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Footer +Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Footer -Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Name and location +Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Name and location -Choose File - Wizards - Agenda +Choose File - Wizards - Agenda -Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - Page Design +Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - Page Design -Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - General Attributes +Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - General Attributes -Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - Headings +Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - Headings -Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - Names +Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - Names -Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - Topics +Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - Topics -Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - Title and Location +Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - Title and Location -Choose File - Wizards - Presentation +Choose File - Wizards - Presentation -Choose File - Wizards - Presentation - Page 1 +Choose File - Wizards - Presentation - Page 1 -Choose File - Wizards - Presentation - Page 2 +Choose File - Wizards - Presentation - Page 2 -Choose File - Wizards - Presentation - Page 3 +Choose File - Wizards - Presentation - Page 3 -Choose File - Wizards - Presentation - Page 4 +Choose File - Wizards - Presentation - Page 4 -Choose File - Wizards - Presentation - Page 5 +Choose File - Wizards - Presentation - Page 5 -Click Use Wizard to Create Form in a database file window. +Click Use Wizard to Create Form in a database file window. -Click Use Wizard to Create Report in a database file window. +Click Use Wizard to Create Report in a database file window. -In form design, click the Group Box icon on the toolbar and use the mouse to create a frame. +In form design, click the Group Box icon on the toolbar and use the mouse to create a frame. -In form design, click the Group Box icon on the toolbar and use the mouse to create a frame - Wizards page 1 +In form design, click the Group Box icon on the toolbar and use the mouse to create a frame - Wizards page 1 -In form design, click the Group Box icon on the toolbar and use the mouse to create a frame - Wizards page 2 +In form design, click the Group Box icon on the toolbar and use the mouse to create a frame - Wizards page 2 -In form design, click the Group Box icon on the toolbar and use the mouse to create a frame - Wizards page 3 +In form design, click the Group Box icon on the toolbar and use the mouse to create a frame - Wizards page 3 -In form design, click the Group Box icon on the toolbar and use the mouse to create a frame - Wizards page 4, there must be a database connection. +In form design, click the Group Box icon on the toolbar and use the mouse to create a frame - Wizards page 4, there must be a database connection. -In form design, click the Group Box icon on the toolbar and use the mouse to create a frame - last page of Wizards +In form design, click the Group Box icon on the toolbar and use the mouse to create a frame - last page of Wizards -Choose File - Wizards - Document Converter +Choose File - Wizards - Document Converter -Choose File - Wizards - Document Converter +Choose File - Wizards - Document Converter -Choose File - Wizards - Document Converter +Choose File - Wizards - Document Converter -Choose File - Wizards - Euro Converter +Choose File - Wizards - Euro Converter
-Menu File - Wizards - Address Data Source +Menu File - Wizards - Address Data Source
-Address Data Source Wizards - Additional settings +Address Data Source Wizards - Additional settings -Address Data Source Wizards - Select table +Address Data Source Wizards - Select table -Address Data Source Wizards +Address Data Source Wizards - Data source title -Address Data Source Wizards - Field assignment +Address Data Source Wizards - Field assignment -Choose File - Close +Choose File - Close
-Choose File - Save +Choose File - Save -CommandCtrl+S -On Standard or Table Data Bar, click +CommandCtrl+S +On Standard or Table Data Bar, click
- + Icon -Save +Save
@@ -223,79 +223,79 @@ - + Icon -Save As +Save As
-$[officename] Draw or $[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select "HTML Document" file type, this dialog opens automatically +$[officename] Draw or $[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select "HTML Document" file type, this dialog opens automatically -$[officename] Draw/$[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 1 of the wizard +$[officename] Draw/$[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 1 of the wizard -$[officename] Draw/$[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 2 of the wizard +$[officename] Draw/$[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 2 of the wizard -$[officename] Draw/$[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 3 of the wizard +$[officename] Draw/$[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 3 of the wizard -$[officename] Draw/$[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 4 of the wizard +$[officename] Draw/$[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 4 of the wizard -$[officename] Draw/$[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 5 of the wizard +$[officename] Draw/$[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 5 of the wizard -$[officename] Draw/$[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 6 of the wizard +$[officename] Draw/$[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 6 of the wizard -Choose File - Export, select a graphics file type, dialog opens automatically +Choose File - Export, select a graphics file type, dialog opens automatically -Choose File - Save All +Choose File - Save All -Choose File - Save As +Choose File - Save As
-Choose File - Reload +Choose File - Reload
-Choose File - Properties +Choose File - Properties -Choose File - Properties - General tab +Choose File - Properties - General tab
-Choose File - Digital Signatures - Digital Signatures +Choose File - Digital Signatures - Digital Signatures -Choose Tools - Macros - Digital Signature +Choose Tools - Macros - Digital Signature -Choose File - Properties - General tab, click Digital Signatures button -Double-click the Signature field on the Status Bar. +Choose File - Properties - General tab, click Digital Signatures button +Double-click the Signature field on the Status Bar.
-Choose File - Properties - General tab, click Digital Signatures button, then click Add button +Choose File - Properties - General tab, click Digital Signatures button, then click Add button -Choose File - Properties - Description tab +Choose File - Properties - Description tab -Choose File - Properties - Custom Properties tab +Choose File - Properties - Custom Properties tab -Choose File - Properties - Statistics tab +Choose File - Properties - Statistics tab -Choose File - Properties - Security tab +Choose File - Properties - Security tab -Choose File - Properties - Internet tab +Choose File - Properties - Internet tab -Choose File - Properties - Font tab +Choose File - Properties - Font tab
-Menu File - Print Preview +Menu File - Print Preview
- + Icon -Print Preview +Print Preview
@@ -303,45 +303,45 @@
-Choose File - Printer Settings +Choose File - Printer Settings
-Menu File - Send +Menu File - Send
-Choose File - Send - E-mail Document +Choose File - Send - E-mail Document
- + Icon -E-mail Document +E-mail Document
-Choose File - Export +Choose File - Export
-Choose File - Export as PDF +Choose File - Export as PDF
- + Icon -Export Directly as PDF +Export Directly as PDF
@@ -349,26 +349,26 @@
-Choose File - Send - E-mail as PDF +Choose File - Send - E-mail as PDF
-Choose File - Send - Create Master Document +Choose File - Send - Create Master Document
-Choose File - Print +Choose File - Print -CommandCtrl+P -On Standard Bar, click +CommandCtrl+P +On Standard Bar, click
- + Icon -Print File Directly +Print File Directly
@@ -376,17 +376,17 @@
-On the Print Preview +On the Print Preview Bar of a text document, click - + Icon -Print Page Preview +Print Page Preview
@@ -395,21 +395,21 @@
-Choose File - Exit +Choose File - Exit -CommandCtrl+Q +CommandCtrl+Q
-Choose File - New - Master Document +Choose File - New - Master Document
-Choose File - Open - select under "File type": "Text CSV" -Choose Data - Text to Columns (Calc) +Choose File - Open - select under "File type": "Text CSV" +Choose Data - Text to Columns (Calc)
-Choose File - Export, if EPS is selected as file type, this dialog opens automatically +Choose File - Export, if EPS is selected as file type, this dialog opens automatically -Choose File - Export, if PBM, PPM or PGM is selected as file type, the dialog opens automatically +Choose File - Export, if PBM, PPM or PGM is selected as file type, the dialog opens automatically -Choose File - Versions +Choose File - Versions diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00000402.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00000402.xhp index f43dba2bd0..9525c01e80 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00000402.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00000402.xhp @@ -27,22 +27,22 @@ -Edit Menu +Edit Menu
-Choose Edit - Undo +Choose Edit - Undo -CommandCtrl+Z -On the Standard Bar or Table Data bar, click +CommandCtrl+Z +On the Standard Bar or Table Data bar, click
- + Icon -Undo +Undo
@@ -50,42 +50,42 @@
-Choose Edit - Redo +Choose Edit - Redo -On the Standard Bar, click +On the Standard Bar, click
- + Icon -Redo +Redo
-Choose Edit - Repeat +Choose Edit - Repeat
-Choose Edit - Cut +Choose Edit - Cut -CommandCtrl+X -On the Standard Bar, click +CommandCtrl+X +On the Standard Bar, click
- + Icon -Cut +Cut
@@ -93,20 +93,20 @@
-Choose Edit - Copy +Choose Edit - Copy -CommandCtrl+C -On the Standard Bar, click +CommandCtrl+C +On the Standard Bar, click
- + Icon -Copy +Copy
@@ -114,72 +114,72 @@
-Choose Edit - Paste +Choose Edit - Paste -CommandCtrl+V -On the Standard Bar, click +CommandCtrl+V +On the Standard Bar, click
- + Icon -Paste +Paste
-Choose Edit - Paste Special +Choose Edit - Paste Special
-Choose Edit - Select All +Choose Edit - Select All -CommandCtrl+A +CommandCtrl+A
- + Icon -Select All +Select All
-Choose Edit - Track Changes +Choose Edit - Track Changes -Choose Edit - Track Changes - Record Changes +Choose Edit - Track Changes - Record Changes -Choose Edit - Track Changes - Show Changes +Choose Edit - Track Changes - Show Changes Choose Edit - Track Changes - Show Changes -Choose Edit - Track Changes - Manage Changes +Choose Edit - Track Changes - Manage Changes
-Choose Edit - Track Changes - Manage Changes - List tab -Choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply and Edit Changes. AutoCorrect dialog appears, click Edit Changes button, see List tab page +Choose Edit - Track Changes - Manage Changes - List tab +Choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply and Edit Changes. AutoCorrect dialog appears, click Edit Changes button, see List tab page
-Choose Edit - Track Changes - Manage Changes - Filter tab +Choose Edit - Track Changes - Manage Changes - Filter tab -Choose Edit - Track Changes - Merge Document +Choose Edit - Track Changes - Merge Document -Choose Edit - Track Changes - Compare Document +Choose Edit - Track Changes - Compare Document
-Choose Edit - Track Changes - Comment on Change +Choose Edit - Track Changes - Comment on Change -Choose Edit - Track Changes - Manage Changes - List tab. Click an entry in the list and open the context menu. Choose Edit Comment +Choose Edit - Track Changes - Manage Changes - List tab. Click an entry in the list and open the context menu. Choose Edit Comment
@@ -188,29 +188,29 @@ CommandCtrl+F
-Choose Edit - Find & Replace +Choose Edit - Find & Replace -CommandCtrl+H -On Standard bar, click +CommandCtrl+H +On Standard bar, click
- + Icon -Find & Replace +Find & Replace
-Choose Edit - Find & Replace - Attributes +Choose Edit - Find & Replace - Attributes -Choose Edit - Find & Replace - Format button +Choose Edit - Find & Replace - Format button
Choose Edit - Find & Replace - Similarity search check box and Similarities button. @@ -218,44 +218,44 @@ On Form Design Bar, click Record Search - Similarity search check box - Similarities button (form view)
-Choose Tools - Bibliography Database +Choose Tools - Bibliography Database -Choose Edit - Links +Choose Edit - Links -Choose Edit - Links - Modify Link (DDE links only) +Choose Edit - Links - Modify Link (DDE links only)
-Select a frame, then choose Edit - Object - Properties +Select a frame, then choose Edit - Object - Properties -Open context menu of selected frame - choose Properties +Open context menu of selected frame - choose Properties
-Choose Edit - ImageMap (also in context menu of selected object) +Choose Edit - ImageMap (also in context menu of selected object) -Choose Edit - ImageMap, then select a section of the ImageMap and click Properties - Description +Choose Edit - ImageMap, then select a section of the ImageMap and click Properties - Description -Choose Edit - Object +Choose Edit - Object -Choose Edit - Object - Edit, also in the context menu of selected object +Choose Edit - Object - Edit, also in the context menu of selected object -Choose Edit - Object - Open +Choose Edit - Object - Open diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00000403.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00000403.xhp index 70b7384d52..dee857af06 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00000403.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00000403.xhp @@ -32,52 +32,52 @@ -View Menu +View Menu
-Choose View - Zoom +Choose View - Zoom -Zoom also with (+) (-) (×) and (÷) on the number keypad +Zoom also with (+) (-) (×) and (÷) on the number keypad Zoom also with (+) (-) (×) and (÷) on the number keypad -Double-click or right-click the field on the Status Bar +Double-click or right-click the field on the Status Bar
-Choose View - Toolbars +Choose View - Toolbars
-Choose View - Toolbars - Standard +Choose View - Toolbars - Standard -Choose View - Toolbars - Tools +Choose View - Toolbars - Tools -Choose View - Status Bar +Choose View - Status Bar -Choose View - Toolbars - Color Bar +Choose View - Toolbars - Color Bar -Choose View - Input Method Status +Choose View - Input Method Status
-Click Hyperlink icon on Standard bar, click Internet +Click Hyperlink icon on Standard bar, click Internet -Choose Insert - Hyperlink +Choose Insert - Hyperlink
Click Hyperlink icon on Standard bar, click Mail -Click Hyperlink icon on Standard bar, click Document +Click Hyperlink icon on Standard bar, click Document -Click Hyperlink icon on Standard bar, click New Document +Click Hyperlink icon on Standard bar, click New Document
-Choose View - Full Screen +Choose View - Full Screen -Shift+CommandCtrl+J +Shift+CommandCtrl+J
- + Icon @@ -92,20 +92,20 @@
-If a text document or spreadsheet is open: -Menu View - Data Sources +If a text document or spreadsheet is open: +Menu View - Data Sources -F4 key +F4 key
- + Icon -Data Sources +Data Sources
@@ -113,28 +113,28 @@
-Choose View - HTML Source +Choose View - HTML Source -Open context menu in an HTML document +Open context menu in an HTML document
- + Icon -HTML Source +HTML Source
-Choose View - Grid (Impress or Draw) +Choose View - Grid (Impress or Draw) -Choose View - Snap Lines (Impress or Draw) +Choose View - Snap Lines (Impress or Draw) diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00000404.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00000404.xhp index 4a72540ae7..227a88766b 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00000404.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00000404.xhp @@ -29,185 +29,185 @@ -Insert Menu -Choose Insert - Comment +Insert Menu +Choose Insert - Comment
-Choose Insert - Media - Scan +Choose Insert - Media - Scan
-Choose Insert - Media - Scan - Select Source +Choose Insert - Media - Scan - Select Source
-Choose Insert - Media - Scan - Request +Choose Insert - Media - Scan - Request
-Choose Insert - Special Character +Choose Insert - Special Character -Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - Customize - Character button +Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - Customize - Character button -Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - Customize - Character button +Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - Customize - Character button -On the Standard or the Insert toolbar, click +On the Standard or the Insert toolbar, click
- + Icon -Special Character +Special Character
-Choose Insert - Media - Audio or Video +Choose Insert - Media - Audio or Video
-Audio or Video +Audio or Video
-Choose Insert - Object +Choose Insert - Object
-Choose Insert - Object - OLE Object +Choose Insert - Object - OLE Object -Open the Insert toolbar, click +Open the Insert toolbar, click
- + Icon -OLE Object +OLE Object
-Choose Insert - Object - Formula +Choose Insert - Object - Formula -Open the Insert toolbar, clickUFI: shortened the para +Open the Insert toolbar, clickUFI: shortened the para
- + Icon -Formula +Formula
-Choose Format - Chart Type +Choose Format - Chart Type -Choose Insert - Object - Chart +Choose Insert - Object - Chart
-Choose Format - Chart Type +Choose Format - Chart Type -Choose Insert - Object - Chart +Choose Insert - Object - Chart
-Choose Format - Chart Type +Choose Format - Chart Type -Choose Insert - Object - Chart +Choose Insert - Object - Chart
-Choose Insert - Object - Chart +Choose Insert - Object - Chart -Open the Insert toolbar, click +Open the Insert toolbar, click
- + Icon -Chart +Chart
-Choose Insert - Image +Choose Insert - Image -On the Standard toolbar, click +On the Standard toolbar, click
- + Icon -Image +Image
-Choose Insert - Floating Frame +Choose Insert - Floating Frame -Open the Insert toolbar, clickUFI: shortened the para +Open the Insert toolbar, clickUFI: shortened the para
- + Icon -Floating Frame +Floating Frame
-Open a file of a type that is unknown to %PRODUCTNAME and that is no text file +Open a file of a type that is unknown to %PRODUCTNAME and that is no text file
- + Icon -Fontwork Gallery +Fontwork Gallery
@@ -216,12 +216,12 @@ - + Icon -Basic Shapes +Basic Shapes
@@ -230,12 +230,12 @@ - + Icon -Symbol Shapes +Symbol Shapes
@@ -244,12 +244,12 @@ - + Icon -Block Arrows +Block Arrows
@@ -258,12 +258,12 @@ - + Icon -Flowcharts +Flowcharts
@@ -272,12 +272,12 @@ - + Icon -Callouts +Callouts
@@ -286,12 +286,12 @@ - + Icon -Stars +Stars
diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp index 072d8e3a54..4ab5879f04 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp @@ -27,101 +27,101 @@ -Tools Menu +Tools Menu - Choose Tools - Gallery or click the Gallery icon on the Standard Bar - New Theme button - Files tab + Choose Tools - Gallery or click the Gallery icon on the Standard Bar - New Theme button - Files tab
-Choose Tools - Spelling and Grammar +Choose Tools - Spelling and Grammar -F7 key -On Standard bar, click +F7 key +On Standard bar, click
- + Icon - Spelling and Grammar + Spelling and Grammar
- Choose Tools - Language - Hangul/Hanja Conversion (Asian language support must be enabled) + Choose Tools - Language - Hangul/Hanja Conversion (Asian language support must be enabled) - Choose Tools - Language - Chinese Conversion (Asian language support must be enabled) + Choose Tools - Language - Chinese Conversion (Asian language support must be enabled) - Choose Tools - Language - Chinese Conversion (Asian language support must be enabled) - Edit terms button + Choose Tools - Language - Chinese Conversion (Asian language support must be enabled) - Edit terms button - Choose Tools - Spelling and Grammar + Choose Tools - Spelling and Grammar - Choose Tools - Spelling and Grammar, then click Options + Choose Tools - Spelling and Grammar, then click Options
- Choose Tools - Language - Thesaurus + Choose Tools - Language - Thesaurus - Command + Command Ctrl+F7
- Choose Tools - Color Replacer ($[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress) + Choose Tools - Color Replacer ($[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress)
- Choose Tools - Media Player + Choose Tools - Media Player - Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic, or press Option + Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic, or press Option Alt+F11 (if not assigned by your system)
- Choose Tools - Macros - Record Macro + Choose Tools - Macros - Record Macro
- Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic, click the Organizer button, click the Libraries tab, and then click the Password button + Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic, click the Organizer button, click the Libraries tab, and then click the Password button - Choose Tools - Extension Manager + Choose Tools - Extension Manager - Choose Tools - Extension Manager, click Updates button + Choose Tools - Extension Manager, click Updates button - Choose Tools - XML Filter Settings + Choose Tools - XML Filter Settings - Choose Tools - XML Filter Settings, then click New or Edit + Choose Tools - XML Filter Settings, then click New or Edit - Choose Tools - XML Filter Settings, then click Test XSLTs + Choose Tools - XML Filter Settings, then click Test XSLTs - Choose Tools - Customize + Choose Tools - Customize - Choose Tools - Customize - Menus tab + Choose Tools - Customize - Menus tab - Choose Tools - Customize - Menus tab, click New + Choose Tools - Customize - Menus tab, click New - Choose Tools - Customize - Menus tab, click Menu - Move + Choose Tools - Customize - Menus tab, click Menu - Move - Choose Tools - Customize - Keyboard tab (a document must be opened) + Choose Tools - Customize - Keyboard tab (a document must be opened) - Choose Tools - Customize - Toolbars tab + Choose Tools - Customize - Toolbars tab - Choose Tools - Customize - Events tab + Choose Tools - Customize - Events tab Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options @@ -137,189 +137,189 @@ Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Word Completion tab - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - View + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - View - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw - General + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw - General
- Path selection button in various wizards - Click Edit button for a few entries under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths + Path selection button in various wizards + Click Edit button for a few entries under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths
- Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - General + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - General - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Memory + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Memory - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - View + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - View - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Print + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Print
-Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths Choose Tools - AutoText - Path
-Choose Format - Area - Colors tab +Choose Format - Area - Colors tab
-Choose Format - Area - Colors tab - Edit button -Choose Format - 3D Effects icon on the Illumination tab +Choose Format - Area - Colors tab - Edit button +Choose Format - 3D Effects icon on the Illumination tab
- + Icon - Select color on the Color tab page + Select color on the Color tab page
- Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Fonts + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Fonts - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Security + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Security - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Advanced + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Advanced - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Personalization + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Personalization - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Open CL + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Open CL - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Basic IDE Options + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Basic IDE Options - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Online Update + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Online Update - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Accessibility + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Accessibility - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Application Colors + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Application Colors - - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - Microsoft Office + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - Microsoft Office - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages - Complex Text Layout + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages - Complex Text Layout
- Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages
- Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids, in the Available language modules list, select one of the language modules and then click Edit. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids, in the Available language modules list, select one of the language modules and then click Edit.
- Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids
- Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Searching in Japanese + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Searching in Japanese - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Asian Layout + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Asian Layout - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Proxy + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Proxy - Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Compatibility + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Compatibility - Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General - Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Mail Merge E-mail + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Mail Merge E-mail - Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption - Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - View + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - View - Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Formatting Aids + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Formatting Aids - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Calc/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Grid + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Calc/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Grid
- Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Basic Fonts (Western) + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Basic Fonts (Western) - Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Basic Fonts (Asian) (only available if Asian language support is enabled) + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Basic Fonts (Asian) (only available if Asian language support is enabled)
- Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/ %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Print + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/ %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Print - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Print + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Print - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Table + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Table - Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes - Open an HTML document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web + Open an HTML document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Open an HTML document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Background + Open an HTML document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Background - Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General - Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View - Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate - Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Compatibility + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Compatibility - Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists - Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Formula + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Formula - Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Defaults + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Defaults - Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists - Copy button + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists - Copy button - Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes - Open a presentation document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress + Open a presentation document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Open a presentation document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - General + Open a presentation document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - General - Open a presentation document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - View + Open a presentation document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - View - Open a presentation document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - Grid + Open a presentation document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - Grid - Open a presentation document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - Print + Open a presentation document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - Print - Open a drawing document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw + Open a drawing document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw - Open a Math document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Math + Open a Math document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Math - Open a Math document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Math - Settings + Open a Math document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Math - Settings - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Charts + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Charts - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Charts - Default Colors + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Charts - Default Colors - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Connections + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Connections - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00000407.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00000407.xhp index 3bfaf2dd3b..2d4ee132df 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00000407.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00000407.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@ - Window Menu - Choose Window - New Window - Choose Window - List of open documents + Window Menu + Choose Window - New Window + Choose Window - List of open documents diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00000408.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00000408.xhp index 841a4f27ea..cf7943f2a3 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00000408.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00000408.xhp @@ -30,15 +30,15 @@ -Help Menu -Choose Help - %PRODUCTNAME Help +Help Menu +Choose Help - %PRODUCTNAME Help -Choose Help - About +Choose Help - About %PRODUCTNAME
-Automatically after %PRODUCTNAME is first started. -Choose Help - Registration (this is a direct link to an external website) +Automatically after %PRODUCTNAME is first started. +Choose Help - Registration (this is a direct link to an external website)
diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00000409.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00000409.xhp index 8037c65cb5..2ff2c22417 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00000409.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00000409.xhp @@ -32,21 +32,21 @@ - Toolbars + Toolbars
- Choose Data - Filter - Standard Filter - Database table view: Standard Filter icon in the Database Toolbar - Form view: Standard Filter icon in the Form Bar + Choose Data - Filter - Standard Filter + Database table view: Standard Filter icon in the Database Toolbar + Form view: Standard Filter icon in the Form Bar - Icon + Icon - Standard Filter + Standard Filter diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00000450.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00000450.xhp index 99d13d8b97..c2d3a93b21 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00000450.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00000450.xhp @@ -29,64 +29,64 @@ -Database -In a database file window, choose Tools - Table Filter +Database +In a database file window, choose Tools - Table Filter -View - Database Objects - Queries +View - Database Objects - Queries -In a database file window, choose Edit - Database - Properties - Advanced Settings tab +In a database file window, choose Edit - Database - Properties - Advanced Settings tab -In a database file window of type ODBC or Address book, choose Edit - Database - Connection Type +In a database file window of type ODBC or Address book, choose Edit - Database - Connection Type -Path selection button in various Wizards / Edit Buttons for some entries in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths +Path selection button in various Wizards / Edit Buttons for some entries in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths -In a database file window of type ODBC, choose Edit - Database - Connection Type +In a database file window of type ODBC, choose Edit - Database - Connection Type see #i56356 -In a database file window of type Address book - LDAP, choose Edit - Database - Properties +In a database file window of type Address book - LDAP, choose Edit - Database - Properties -In a database file window of type JDBC, choose Edit - Database - Properties +In a database file window of type JDBC, choose Edit - Database - Properties -In a database file window of type MySQL, choose Edit - Database - Properties +In a database file window of type MySQL, choose Edit - Database - Properties -In a database file window of type dBASE, choose Edit - Database - Properties +In a database file window of type dBASE, choose Edit - Database - Properties -In a database file window of type dBASE, choose Edit - Database - Properties, click Indexes +In a database file window of type dBASE, choose Edit - Database - Properties, click Indexes -In a database file window of type Text, choose Edit - Database - Properties +In a database file window of type Text, choose Edit - Database - Properties -In a database file window of type MS ADO, choose Edit - Database - Properties +In a database file window of type MS ADO, choose Edit - Database - Properties -In a database file window, choose Tools - SQL +In a database file window, choose Tools - SQL -In a database file window, click the Queries icon +In a database file window, click the Queries icon -In a database file window, click the Tables icon +In a database file window, click the Tables icon
-In a database file window, click the Tables icon. Choose Insert - Table Design or Edit - Edit +In a database file window, click the Tables icon. Choose Insert - Table Design or Edit - Edit
-In a database file window, click the Tables icon. Choose Insert - Table Design or Edit - Edit +In a database file window, click the Tables icon. Choose Insert - Table Design or Edit - Edit UFI: was: "... , then Tools - Index Design or Index Design button" (don't know where that is now) -In a database file window, choose Insert - Query (Design view) +In a database file window, choose Insert - Query (Design view) -In a database file window, click the Queries icon, then choose Edit - Edit +In a database file window, click the Queries icon, then choose Edit - Edit -In a database file window, click the Queries icon, then choose Edit - Edit. When referenced fields no longer exist, you see this dialog +In a database file window, click the Queries icon, then choose Edit - Edit. When referenced fields no longer exist, you see this dialog -Open query design and choose Insert - New Relation, or double-click on a connection line between two tables. +Open query design and choose Insert - New Relation, or double-click on a connection line between two tables.
- + Icon -Insert Tables +Insert Tables
@@ -95,61 +95,61 @@ - + Icon -New Relation +New Relation
- + Find Record icon on the Table Data bar and Form Design bar
- + Icon -Find Record +Find Record
- + Sort Order icon on the Table Data bar and Form Design bar
- + Icon -Sort Order +Sort Order
-In a database file window, choose Edit - Database - Properties +In a database file window, choose Edit - Database - Properties -Drag and drop a table or a query into the table part of another database file window +Drag and drop a table or a query into the table part of another database file window -In a database file window, choose Insert - Form +In a database file window, choose Insert - Form -In a database file window, choose Edit - Database - Properties +In a database file window, choose Edit - Database - Properties -In a database file window, choose Tools - Relationships +In a database file window, choose Tools - Relationships diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00040501.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00040501.xhp index badb059782..ca30723e06 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00040501.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00040501.xhp @@ -27,52 +27,52 @@ -Format Menu -Open Form Controls toolbar, click More Controls icon, click Table Control icon and drag mouse to generate field. +Format Menu +Open Form Controls toolbar, click More Controls icon, click Table Control icon and drag mouse to generate field. -Open Form Controls toolbar, click More Controls icon, click Table Control icon and drag mouse to generate field. No database connection in current form is allowed. +Open Form Controls toolbar, click More Controls icon, click Table Control icon and drag mouse to generate field. No database connection in current form is allowed. -Open Form Controls toolbar, click More Controls icon, click Table Control icon and drag mouse to generate field. Database connection must exist. +Open Form Controls toolbar, click More Controls icon, click Table Control icon and drag mouse to generate field. Database connection must exist. -Open Form Controls toolbar, click Combo Box or List Box icon and drag mouse to generate field. Database connection must exist in the form. +Open Form Controls toolbar, click Combo Box or List Box icon and drag mouse to generate field. Database connection must exist in the form. -Open Form Controls toolbar, click Combo Box or List Box icon and drag mouse to generate field. Database connection must exist in the form: Wizard - Page 1. +Open Form Controls toolbar, click Combo Box or List Box icon and drag mouse to generate field. Database connection must exist in the form: Wizard - Page 1. -Open Form Controls toolbar, click Combo Box or List Box icon and drag mouse to generate field. Database connection must exist in the form: Wizard - Page 2. +Open Form Controls toolbar, click Combo Box or List Box icon and drag mouse to generate field. Database connection must exist in the form: Wizard - Page 2. -Open Form Controls toolbar, click List Box icon and drag mouse to generate field. Database connection must exist in the form: Wizard - Page 3. +Open Form Controls toolbar, click List Box icon and drag mouse to generate field. Database connection must exist in the form: Wizard - Page 3. -Open Form Controls toolbar, click Combo Box icon and drag mouse to generate field. Database connection must exist in the form: Wizard - Page 3. +Open Form Controls toolbar, click Combo Box icon and drag mouse to generate field. Database connection must exist in the form: Wizard - Page 3.
-Open Toolbox bar in Basic dialog editor, click +Open Toolbox bar in Basic dialog editor, click - + Icon -Properties +Properties
-Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Form +Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Form
- + Icon -Form +Form
@@ -80,34 +80,34 @@
-Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Form - General tab -Open Form Controls toolbar or Form Design toolbar, click Form icon - General tab +Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Form - General tab +Open Form Controls toolbar or Form Design toolbar, click Form icon - General tab
-Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Form - Data tab -Open Form Controls toolbar or Form Design toolbar, click Form icon - Data tab +Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Form - Data tab +Open Form Controls toolbar or Form Design toolbar, click Form icon - Data tab
-Open context menu of a selected control on an XML Form document, choose Control - Data tab -Open Form Controls toolbar of an XML Form document, click Control icon - Data tab +Open context menu of a selected control on an XML Form document, choose Control - Data tab +Open Form Controls toolbar of an XML Form document, click Control icon - Data tab
-Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Form - Events tab -Open Form Controls toolbar or Form Design toolbar, click Form icon - Events tab +Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Form - Events tab +Open Form Controls toolbar or Form Design toolbar, click Form icon - Events tab
-Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Control +Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Control
- + Icon -Control +Control
@@ -115,29 +115,29 @@
-Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Control - General tab -Open Form Controls toolbar or Form Design toolbar, click Control icon - General tab +Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Control - General tab +Open Form Controls toolbar or Form Design toolbar, click Control icon - General tab
-Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Control - Data tab -Open Form Controls toolbar or Form Design toolbar, click Control icon - Data tab +Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Control - Data tab +Open Form Controls toolbar or Form Design toolbar, click Control icon - Data tab
-Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Control - Events tab -Open Form Controls toolbar or Form Design toolbar, click Control icon - Events tab +Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Control - Events tab +Open Form Controls toolbar or Form Design toolbar, click Control icon - Events tab
-Open Form Design toolbar, click +Open Form Design toolbar, click
- + Icon -Activation Order +Activation Order
@@ -145,17 +145,17 @@
-Open Form Design toolbar, click +Open Form Design toolbar, click
- + Icon -Add Field +Add Field
@@ -163,17 +163,17 @@
-Open Form Design toolbar, click +Open Form Design toolbar, click
- + Icon -Form Navigator +Form Navigator
@@ -181,17 +181,17 @@
-Open Form Controls toolbar or Form Design toolbar, click +Open Form Controls toolbar or Form Design toolbar, click
- + Icon -Design Mode on/off +Design Mode on/off
@@ -199,19 +199,19 @@
-Open Form Navigator - select form - open context menu - choose Open in design mode +Open Form Navigator - select form - open context menu - choose Open in design mode -Open Form Design toolbar, click +Open Form Design toolbar, click
- + Icon -Open in Design Mode +Open in Design Mode
@@ -219,17 +219,17 @@
-Open Form Control toolbar, click +Open Form Control toolbar, click
- + Icon -Wizards On/Off +Wizards On/Off
@@ -237,38 +237,38 @@
-Choose Format - Arrange ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc) -Open context menu - choose Arrange ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw) -Choose Modify - Arrange ($[officename] Draw) +Choose Format - Arrange ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc) +Open context menu - choose Arrange ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw) +Choose Modify - Arrange ($[officename] Draw) - + Icon -Arrange +Arrange
-Choose Format - Arrange - Bring to Front ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc) -Choose Modify - Arrange - Bring to Front ($[officename] Draw) -Shift+CommandCtrl+plus sign ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw) -Open context menu - choose Arrange - Bring to Front ($[officename] Impress) +Choose Format - Arrange - Bring to Front ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc) +Choose Modify - Arrange - Bring to Front ($[officename] Draw) +Shift+CommandCtrl+plus sign ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw) +Open context menu - choose Arrange - Bring to Front ($[officename] Impress)
- + Icon -Bring to Front +Bring to Front
@@ -276,58 +276,58 @@
-Choose Format - Arrange - Bring Forward ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc) -Choose Modify - Arrange - Bring Forward ($[officename] Draw) -CommandCtrl+plus sign ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw) -Open context menu - choose Arrange - Bring Forward ($[officename] Impress) +Choose Format - Arrange - Bring Forward ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc) +Choose Modify - Arrange - Bring Forward ($[officename] Draw) +CommandCtrl+plus sign ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw) +Open context menu - choose Arrange - Bring Forward ($[officename] Impress) - + Icon -Bring Forward +Bring Forward
-Choose Format - Arrange - Send Backward ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc) -Choose Modify - Arrange - Send Backward ($[officename] Draw) -CommandCtrl+minus sign ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw) -Open context menu - choose Arrange - Send Backward ($[officename] Impress) +Choose Format - Arrange - Send Backward ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc) +Choose Modify - Arrange - Send Backward ($[officename] Draw) +CommandCtrl+minus sign ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw) +Open context menu - choose Arrange - Send Backward ($[officename] Impress) - + Icon -Send Backward +Send Backward
-Choose Format - Arrange - Send to Back ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc) -Choose Modify - Arrange - Send to Back ($[officename] Draw) -Shift+CommandCtrl+minus sign ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw) -Open context menu - choose Arrange - Send to Back ($[officename] Impress) +Choose Format - Arrange - Send to Back ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc) +Choose Modify - Arrange - Send to Back ($[officename] Draw) +Shift+CommandCtrl+minus sign ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw) +Open context menu - choose Arrange - Send to Back ($[officename] Impress)
- + Icon -Send to Back +Send to Back
@@ -335,18 +335,18 @@
-Choose Format - Arrange - To Foreground +Choose Format - Arrange - To Foreground
- + Icon -To Foreground +To Foreground
@@ -354,18 +354,18 @@
-Choose Format - Arrange - To Background +Choose Format - Arrange - To Background
- + Icon -To Background +To Background
@@ -373,25 +373,25 @@
-Choose Format - Alignment ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc) -Choose Modify - Alignment (objects selected) ($[officename] Draw) -Open context menu - choose Alignment (objects selected) ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw) +Choose Format - Alignment ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc) +Choose Modify - Alignment (objects selected) ($[officename] Draw) +Open context menu - choose Alignment (objects selected) ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw)
-Choose Format - Alignment - Centered ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc) -Choose Modify - Alignment - Centered (objects selected) ($[officename] Draw) -On Align toolbar ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw), click +Choose Format - Alignment - Centered ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc) +Choose Modify - Alignment - Centered (objects selected) ($[officename] Draw) +On Align toolbar ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw), click
- + Icon -Centered +Centered
@@ -419,20 +419,20 @@
-Choose Format - Alignment - Right +Choose Format - Alignment - Right -Choose Modify - Alignment - Right (objects selected) ($[officename] Draw) -On Align toolbar ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw), click +Choose Modify - Alignment - Right (objects selected) ($[officename] Draw) +On Align toolbar ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw), click
- + Icon -Right +Right
@@ -440,20 +440,20 @@
-Choose Format - Alignment - Top ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc) -Choose Modify - Alignment - Top (objects selected) ($[officename] Draw) -Open context menu - choose Alignment - Top (objects selected) ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw) -On Align toolbar ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw), click +Choose Format - Alignment - Top ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc) +Choose Modify - Alignment - Top (objects selected) ($[officename] Draw) +Open context menu - choose Alignment - Top (objects selected) ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw) +On Align toolbar ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw), click
- + Icon -Top +Top
@@ -461,20 +461,20 @@
-Choose Format - Alignment - Centered ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc) -Choose Modify - Alignment - Centered (objects selected) ($[officename] Draw) -Open context menu - choose Alignment - Centered (objects selected) ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw) -On Align toolbar ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw), click +Choose Format - Alignment - Centered ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc) +Choose Modify - Alignment - Centered (objects selected) ($[officename] Draw) +Open context menu - choose Alignment - Centered (objects selected) ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw) +On Align toolbar ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw), click
- + Icon -Centered +Centered
@@ -482,19 +482,19 @@
-Choose Format - Alignment - Bottom ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc) -Choose Modify - Alignment - Bottom (objects selected) ($[officename] Draw) -On Align toolbar ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw), click +Choose Format - Alignment - Bottom ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc) +Choose Modify - Alignment - Bottom (objects selected) ($[officename] Draw) +On Align toolbar ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw), click
- + Icon -Bottom +Bottom
@@ -502,20 +502,20 @@
-Choose Format - Anchor +Choose Format - Anchor
-Open Form Design toolbar, click +Open Form Design toolbar, click
- + Icon -Change Anchor +Change Anchor
@@ -523,17 +523,17 @@
-Choose Format - Anchor - To Page +Choose Format - Anchor - To Page -Choose Format - Anchor - To Paragraph +Choose Format - Anchor - To Paragraph -Choose Format - Anchor - To Character +Choose Format - Anchor - To Character -Choose Format - Anchor - As Character +Choose Format - Anchor - As Character -Choose Format - Anchor - To Frame +Choose Format - Anchor - To Frame -Choose Format - Anchor - To Cell +Choose Format - Anchor - To Cell diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp index fc946f3f1e..be09fd6437 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp @@ -27,22 +27,22 @@ - Format Menu + Format Menu
- Choose Format - Line (Impress and Draw)i64150 - Choose Format - Object - Line (Writer) - Choose Format - Graphic - Line (Calc) - On Line and Filling Bar, click + Choose Format - Line (Impress and Draw)i64150 + Choose Format - Object - Line (Writer) + Choose Format - Graphic - Line (Calc) + On Line and Filling Bar, click
- + Icon - Line + Line
@@ -50,42 +50,42 @@
- Choose Format - Object - + Choose Format - Object - Graphic - Line - Line tab Choose View - Styles and Formatting - open context menu and choose Modify/New - Line tab (presentation documents) - Choose Format - Title - Borders tab (charts) - Choose Format - Legend - Borders tab (charts) - Choose Format - Axis - Line tab (charts) - Choose Format - Grid - Line tab (charts) - Choose Format - Chart Wall - Borders tab (charts) - Choose Format - Chart Floor - Borders tab (charts) - Choose Format - Chart Area - Borders tab (charts) -
- Choose Format - Object - + Choose Format - Title - Borders tab (charts) + Choose Format - Legend - Borders tab (charts) + Choose Format - Axis - Line tab (charts) + Choose Format - Grid - Line tab (charts) + Choose Format - Chart Wall - Borders tab (charts) + Choose Format - Chart Floor - Borders tab (charts) + Choose Format - Chart Area - Borders tab (charts) +
+ Choose Format - Object - Graphic - Line - Line Styles tab - Choose Format - Object - + Choose Format - Object - Graphic - Line - Arrow Styles tab
- Choose Format - Object - + Choose Format - Object - Graphic - Area - On Line and Filling Bar, click + On Line and Filling Bar, click
- + Icon - Area + Area
@@ -93,66 +93,66 @@
- Choose Format - Object - + Choose Format - Object - Graphic - Area - Area tab Choose View - Styles and Formatting - open context menu and choose Modify/New - Area tab (presentation documents) - Choose Format - Title - Area tab (chart documents) - Choose Format - Legend - Area tab (chart documents) - Choose Format - Chart Wall - Area tab (chart documents) - Choose Format - Chart Floor - Area tab (chart documents) - Choose Format - Chart Area - Area tab (chart documents) - Choose Format - Page - Background tab (in $[officename] Impress and $[officename] Draw) + Choose Format - Title - Area tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Legend - Area tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Chart Wall - Area tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Chart Floor - Area tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Chart Area - Area tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Page - Background tab (in $[officename] Impress and $[officename] Draw)
- Choose Format - Area - Transparency tab (drawing documents) - Choose Format - Area - Transparency tab (presentation documents) - Choose Format - Chart Wall - Transparency tab (chart documents) - Choose Format - Chart Area - Transparency tab (chart documents) - Choose Format - Chart Floor - Transparency tab (chart documents) - Choose Format - Title - All Titles - Transparency tab (chart documents) - Choose Format - Title - Main Title - Transparency tab (chart documents) - Choose Format - Title - Subtitle - Transparency tab (chart documents) - Choose Format - Title - Title (X Axis) - Transparency tab (chart documents) - Choose Format - Title - Title (Y Axis) - Transparency tab (chart documents) - Choose Format - Title - Title (Z Axis) - Transparency tab (chart documents) - Choose Format - Object Properties - Data Point - Transparency - tab (chart documents) - Choose Format - Object Properties - Data Series - Transparency tab (chart documents) -
- Choose Format - Object - + Choose Format - Area - Transparency tab (drawing documents) + Choose Format - Area - Transparency tab (presentation documents) + Choose Format - Chart Wall - Transparency tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Chart Area - Transparency tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Chart Floor - Transparency tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Title - All Titles - Transparency tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Title - Main Title - Transparency tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Title - Subtitle - Transparency tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Title - Title (X Axis) - Transparency tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Title - Title (Y Axis) - Transparency tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Title - Title (Z Axis) - Transparency tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Object Properties - Data Point - Transparency - tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Object Properties - Data Series - Transparency tab (chart documents) +
+ Choose Format - Object - Graphic - Area - Shadow tab - Choose Format - Object - + Choose Format - Object - Graphic - Area - Gradients tab - Choose Format - Object - + Choose Format - Object - Graphic - Area - Hatching tab - Choose Format - Object - + Choose Format - Object - Graphic - Area - Bitmaps tab - Choose Format - Object - Text Attributes + Choose Format - Object - Text Attributes Graphic - Define Text Attributes Text - Choose Format - Object - Text Attributes + Choose Format - Object - Text Attributes Graphic - Define Text Attributes Text - Text tab - Choose Format - Object - Text Attributes + Choose Format - Object - Text Attributes Graphic - Define Text Attributes Text - Text Animation tab
- Choose Format - Object - + Choose Format - Object - Graphic - Position and Size - F4 key + F4 key F4 key
@@ -160,74 +160,74 @@ - + Icon - Position and SizeUFI: in Form Design toolbar + Position and SizeUFI: in Form Design toolbar
- Open the context menu for the object - choose Name + Open the context menu for the object - choose Name
- Open the context menu for the object - choose Description + Open the context menu for the object - choose Description
- Choose Format - Object - + Choose Format - Object - Graphic - Position and Size - Position and Size tab
- Choose Format - Object - + Choose Format - Object - Graphic - Position and Size - Rotation tab - + Icon - Rotate + Rotate
- Choose Format - Object - + Choose Format - Object - Graphic - Position and Size - Slant & Corner Radius tab - Choose Format - Object - + Choose Format - Object - Graphic - Position and Size - Callout tab (only for textbox callouts, not for custom shapes callouts)
- Choose Edit - Points + Choose Edit - Points - Open context menu - choose Edit Points + Open context menu - choose Edit Points Open context menu - choose Edit Points - F8 key + F8 key F8 key
- + Icon - Edit Points + Edit Points
@@ -235,31 +235,31 @@
- Choose Format - Character (drawing functions) - Open context menu - choose Character + Choose Format - Character (drawing functions) + Open context menu - choose Character
- Open context menu - choose Size + Open context menu - choose Size
- Open context menu - choose Style + Open context menu - choose Style
- Open context menu - choose Style - Bold + Open context menu - choose Style - Bold
- + Icon - Bold + Bold
@@ -267,18 +267,18 @@
- Open context menu - choose Style - Italic + Open context menu - choose Style - Italic
- + Icon - Italic + Italic
@@ -286,18 +286,18 @@
- Open context menu - choose Style - Underline + Open context menu - choose Style - Underline
- + Icon - Underline + Underline
@@ -305,55 +305,55 @@
- Open context menu - choose Style - Strikethrough + Open context menu - choose Style - Strikethrough
- Open context menu - choose Style - Shadow + Open context menu - choose Style - Shadow
- Open context menu - choose Style - Contour + Open context menu - choose Style - Contour
- Open context menu - choose Style - Superscript + Open context menu - choose Style - Superscript
- Open context menu - choose Style - Subscript + Open context menu - choose Style - Subscript
- Open context menu - choose Line Spacing + Open context menu - choose Line Spacing
- Open context menu - choose Line Spacing - Single + Open context menu - choose Line Spacing - Single
- Open context menu - choose Line Spacing - 1.5 Lines + Open context menu - choose Line Spacing - 1.5 Lines
- Open context menu - choose Line Spacing - Double + Open context menu - choose Line Spacing - Double
- Choose Format - Alignment - Left (drawing functions) - Open context menu - choose Alignment - Left + Choose Format - Alignment - Left (drawing functions) + Open context menu - choose Alignment - Left
- + Icon - Align Left + Align Left
@@ -361,19 +361,19 @@
- Choose Format - Alignment - Right (drawing functions) - Open context menu - choose Alignment - Right + Choose Format - Alignment - Right (drawing functions) + Open context menu - choose Alignment - Right
- + Icon - Align Right + Align Right
@@ -381,19 +381,19 @@
- Choose Format - Alignment - Centered (drawing functions) - Open context menu - choose Alignment - Center + Choose Format - Alignment - Centered (drawing functions) + Open context menu - choose Alignment - Center
- + Icon - Align Center Horizontally + Align Center Horizontally Centered @@ -402,47 +402,47 @@
- Choose Format - Alignment - Justified (drawing functions) - Open context menu - choose Alignment - Justified + Choose Format - Alignment - Justified (drawing functions) + Open context menu - choose Alignment - Justified
- + Icon - Justified + Justified
- Click Fontwork icon on Drawing bar + Click Fontwork icon on Drawing bar
- Choose Format - Group + Choose Format - Group - Open context menu - choose Group + Open context menu - choose Group
- Choose Format - Group - Group (text documents, spreadsheets) - Choose Modify - Group (drawing documents) - Open context menu - choose Group - Group (form objects) + Choose Format - Group - Group (text documents, spreadsheets) + Choose Modify - Group (drawing documents) + Open context menu - choose Group - Group (form objects)
- + Icon - Group + Group
@@ -450,20 +450,20 @@
- Choose Format - Group - Ungroup (text documents, spreadsheets) - Choose Modify - Ungroup (drawing documents) - Open context menu - choose Ungroup + Choose Format - Group - Ungroup (text documents, spreadsheets) + Choose Modify - Ungroup (drawing documents) + Open context menu - choose Ungroup
- + Icon - Ungroup + Ungroup
@@ -471,20 +471,20 @@
- Choose Format - Group - Exit Group (text documents, spreadsheets) - Choose Modify - Exit Group (drawing documents) - Open context menu - choose Exit Group + Choose Format - Group - Exit Group (text documents, spreadsheets) + Choose Modify - Exit Group (drawing documents) + Open context menu - choose Exit Group
- + Icon - Exit Group + Exit Group
@@ -492,20 +492,20 @@
- Choose Format - Group - Enter Group (text documents, spreadsheets) - Choose Modify - Enter Group (drawing documents) - Open context menu - choose Enter Group + Choose Format - Group - Enter Group (text documents, spreadsheets) + Choose Modify - Enter Group (drawing documents) + Open context menu - choose Enter Group
- + Icon - Enter Group + Enter Group
diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/00040503.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/00040503.xhp index 69d1d0b5cd..40b9a76374 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/00040503.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/00040503.xhp @@ -30,60 +30,60 @@ -Format Menu +Format Menu
-Choose Format - Row - Height +Choose Format - Row - Height -Open context menu of a row header in an open database table - choose Row Height +Open context menu of a row header in an open database table - choose Row Height
-Choose Format - Column - Width +Choose Format - Column - Width -Open context menu of a column header in a database table - choose Column Width +Open context menu of a column header in a database table - choose Column Width
-Choose Format - Cells - Numbers tab +Choose Format - Cells - Numbers tab Choose View - Styles and Formatting - open context menu and choose Modify/New - Numbers tab -Open context menu for a column header in an open database table - choose Column Format - Format tab -Choose Format - Axis - Y Axis - Numbers tab (Chart Documents) +Open context menu for a column header in an open database table - choose Column Format - Format tab +Choose Format - Axis - Y Axis - Numbers tab (Chart Documents) Also as Number Format dialog for tables and fields in text documents: Choose Format - Number Format, or choose Insert - Field - More Fields - Variables tab and select "Additional formats" in the Format list.
-Choose Format - Title - Main Title - Alignment tab +Choose Format - Title - Main Title - Alignment tab Choose Format - Cells - Alignment tab - + Open context menu of a column header in a database table - choose Column Format - Alignment tab
-Open context menu of a row header in a database table - choose Table Format +Open context menu of a row header in a database table - choose Table Format -Open context menu of a column header in a database table - choose Column Format +Open context menu of a column header in a database table - choose Column Format -Context menu for a row header in an open database table - Delete Rows +Context menu for a row header in an open database table - Delete Rows
-Choose Modify - Flip ($[officename] Draw) -Choose Format - Image - Image tab -Open context menu - choose Flip (presentation documents) +Choose Modify - Flip ($[officename] Draw) +Choose Format - Image - Image tab +Open context menu - choose Flip (presentation documents)
-Choose Modify - Flip - Vertically ($[officename] Draw) -Choose Format - Image - Image tab -Open context menu - choose Flip - Vertically (presentation documents) +Choose Modify - Flip - Vertically ($[officename] Draw) +Choose Format - Image - Image tab +Open context menu - choose Flip - Vertically (presentation documents)
-Choose Modify - Flip - Horizontally ($[officename] Draw) -Choose Format - Image, and then click the Image tab -Choose Format - Flip - Horizontally +Choose Modify - Flip - Horizontally ($[officename] Draw) +Choose Format - Image, and then click the Image tab +Choose Format - Flip - Horizontally -Right-click a selected object, and then choose Flip - Horizontally ($[officename] Impress) +Right-click a selected object, and then choose Flip - Horizontally ($[officename] Impress)
-Choose Modify - Distribution ($[officename] Draw) -Open context menu - choose Distribution ($[officename] Impress) +Choose Modify - Distribution ($[officename] Draw) +Open context menu - choose Distribution ($[officename] Impress)
diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/01000000.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/01000000.xhp index f6043b8acc..00bbb91c3d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/01000000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/01000000.xhp @@ -30,16 +30,16 @@ -Showing and Hiding Docked Windows -Every docked window has an icon to control the display properties of the window. +Showing and Hiding Docked Windows +Every docked window has an icon to control the display properties of the window.
-To show or hide a docked window, click the icon. +To show or hide a docked window, click the icon.
-AutoShow and AutoHide Docked Windows -You can click the edge of a hidden docked window to open the window. -The docked window closes automatically when you move the mouse pointer outside of the window. -Multiple docked windows act as a single window in AutoShow/AutoHide mode. -Drag and Drop -If you drag an object over the edge of a hidden docked window, the window opens in AutoShow mode. +AutoShow and AutoHide Docked Windows +You can click the edge of a hidden docked window to open the window. +The docked window closes automatically when you move the mouse pointer outside of the window. +Multiple docked windows act as a single window in AutoShow/AutoHide mode. +Drag and Drop +If you drag an object over the edge of a hidden docked window, the window opens in AutoShow mode. diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/01010000.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/01010000.xhp index 55e9887d30..b086893aac 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/01010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/01010000.xhp @@ -30,19 +30,19 @@ -Gallery context menu +Gallery context menu -Defines how a selected graphic object is inserted into a document. +Defines how a selected graphic object is inserted into a document. -Inserts a copy of the selected graphic object directly into the document. +Inserts a copy of the selected graphic object directly into the document. -Inserts the selected graphic as a link. +Inserts the selected graphic as a link. -The Preview command displays the selected graphic. +The Preview command displays the selected graphic. -Assigns a title to a selected Gallery object. +Assigns a title to a selected Gallery object. -Deletes the selected graphic after confirmation. +Deletes the selected graphic after confirmation. diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/01020000.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/01020000.xhp index d26d1e93d1..892ab1c073 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/01020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/01020000.xhp @@ -30,18 +30,18 @@ -Context Menu of Web Pages in Read-Only Mode +Context Menu of Web Pages in Read-Only Mode -Opens a dialog where you can save the selected graphics. +Opens a dialog where you can save the selected graphics. -Copies the link at the mouse pointer to the clipboard. +Copies the link at the mouse pointer to the clipboard. -Copies a selected graphic to the clipboard. +Copies a selected graphic to the clipboard. -If you have deactivated the graphics display, choose the Load Graphics command to make them visible. +If you have deactivated the graphics display, choose the Load Graphics command to make them visible. -Sets all graphics in the document to be invisible. +Sets all graphics in the document to be invisible. -Allows you to save the background of a Web page. +Allows you to save the background of a Web page. diff --git a/source/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp b/source/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp index 0f0e36d72c..b6b2fe5397 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp @@ -28,15 +28,15 @@
-GeneralUFI: this is a tab page of the Gallery. Deleted everything else -The General tab page lists the general properties of the current theme. +GeneralUFI: this is a tab page of the Gallery. Deleted everything else +The General tab page lists the general properties of the current theme.
-Name -Displays the name of the theme. If no name has been assigned, you can type a new name in the text box. -Type -Specifies the object type. -Location -Specifies the complete object path. +Name +Displays the name of the theme. If no name has been assigned, you can type a new name in the text box. +Type +Specifies the object type. +Location +Specifies the complete object path. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01010000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01010000.xhp index d2be7af215..876037a217 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01010000.xhp @@ -34,221 +34,221 @@
-New -Creates a new $[officename] document. +New +Creates a new $[officename] document.
-Creates a new $[officename] document. Click the arrow to select the document type. +Creates a new $[officename] document. Click the arrow to select the document type.
-If you want to create a document from a template, choose New - Templates. -A template is a file that contains the design elements for a document, including formatting styles, backgrounds, frames, graphics, fields, page layout, and text. +If you want to create a document from a template, choose New - Templates. +A template is a file that contains the design elements for a document, including formatting styles, backgrounds, frames, graphics, fields, page layout, and text. - + Icon - + Name - + Function - + Icon -Text Document +Text Document -Creates a new text document ($[officename] Writer). +Creates a new text document ($[officename] Writer). - + Icon -Spreadsheet +Spreadsheet -Creates a new spreadsheet document ($[officename] Calc). +Creates a new spreadsheet document ($[officename] Calc). - + Icon -Presentation +Presentation -Creates a new presentation document ($[officename] Impress). +Creates a new presentation document ($[officename] Impress). - + Icon -Drawing +Drawing -Creates a new drawing document ($[officename] Draw). +Creates a new drawing document ($[officename] Draw). - + Icon -Database +Database -Opens the Database Wizard to create a database file. +Opens the Database Wizard to create a database file. - + Icon -HTML Document +HTML Document -Creates a new HTML document. +Creates a new HTML document. - + Icon -XML Form Document +XML Form Document -Creates a new XForms document. +Creates a new XForms document. - + Icon -Master Document +Master Document -Creates a new master document. +Creates a new master document. - + Icon -Formula +Formula -Creates a new formula document ($[officename] Math). +Creates a new formula document ($[officename] Math). - + Icon -Labels +Labels -Opens the Labels dialog where you can set the options for your labels, and then creates a new text document for the labels ($[officename] Writer). +Opens the Labels dialog where you can set the options for your labels, and then creates a new text document for the labels ($[officename] Writer). - + Icon -Business Cards +Business Cards -Opens the Business Cards dialog where you can set the options for your business cards, and then creates a new text document ($[officename] Writer). +Opens the Business Cards dialog where you can set the options for your business cards, and then creates a new text document ($[officename] Writer). - + Icon -Templates +Templates -Creates a new document using an existing template. +Creates a new document using an existing template.
-Opening documents +Opening documents
-Creates a new text document ($[officename] Writer). +Creates a new text document ($[officename] Writer). -Creates a new spreadsheet document ($[officename] Calc). +Creates a new spreadsheet document ($[officename] Calc). -Creates a new presentation document ($[officename] Impress). +Creates a new presentation document ($[officename] Impress). -Creates a new drawing document ($[officename] Draw). +Creates a new drawing document ($[officename] Draw). -Opens the Database Wizard to create a database file. +Opens the Database Wizard to create a database file. -Creates a new HTML document. +Creates a new HTML document. -Creates a new XForms document. +Creates a new XForms document. -Creates a new master document. +Creates a new master document. -Creates a new formula document ($[officename] Math). +Creates a new formula document ($[officename] Math). -Opens the Labels dialog where you can set the options for your labels, and then creates a new text document for the labels ($[officename] Writer). +Opens the Labels dialog where you can set the options for your labels, and then creates a new text document for the labels ($[officename] Writer). -Opens the Business Cards dialog where you can set the options for your business cards, and then creates a new text document ($[officename] Writer). +Opens the Business Cards dialog where you can set the options for your business cards, and then creates a new text document ($[officename] Writer). -Creates a new document using an existing template or opens a sample document. +Creates a new document using an existing template or opens a sample document. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01010001.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01010001.xhp index 38d8513fe5..8ca69cde63 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01010001.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01010001.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@ -Master Document -Use a Master Document to organize complex projects, such as a book. A Master Document can contain the individual files for each chapter of a book, as well as a table of contents, and an index. +Master Document +Use a Master Document to organize complex projects, such as a book. A Master Document can contain the individual files for each chapter of a book, as well as a table of contents, and an index.
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@
-Navigator for Master Documents +Navigator for Master Documents
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01010100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01010100.xhp index c86793f239..002aebfcab 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01010100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01010100.xhp @@ -30,113 +30,113 @@
-The Templates Manager dialog allows you to manage your templates. -To open the Templates Manager dialog, do one of the following: +The Templates Manager dialog allows you to manage your templates. +To open the Templates Manager dialog, do one of the following: -Choose File - New - Templates +Choose File - New - Templates -Press Shift+CommandCtrl+N. +Press Shift+CommandCtrl+N.
-Categories -Categories are shown in the box on the left side of the Templates and Documents dialog. Click a category to display the files associated with that category in the Title box. +Categories +Categories are shown in the box on the left side of the Templates and Documents dialog. Click a category to display the files associated with that category in the Title box. -Title Box -Lists the available templates or documents for the selected category. Select a template or document and, then click Open. To preview the document, click the Preview button above the box on the right. +Title Box +Lists the available templates or documents for the selected category. Select a template or document and, then click Open. To preview the document, click the Preview button above the box on the right. -Back +Back - + Icon -Moves back to the previous window in the dialog. +Moves back to the previous window in the dialog.
-Up One Level +Up One Level - + Icon -Moves up one folder level, if available. +Moves up one folder level, if available.
-Print +Print - + Icon -Prints the selected template or document. +Prints the selected template or document.
-Preview -Allows you to preview the template or document, as well as view the document properties. To preview the template or document, click the Preview icon at the top of the Preview box on the right side of the dialog. To view the properties of the document, click the Document Properties icon at the top of the Preview box. +Preview +Allows you to preview the template or document, as well as view the document properties. To preview the template or document, click the Preview icon at the top of the Preview box on the right side of the dialog. To view the properties of the document, click the Document Properties icon at the top of the Preview box. -Preview +Preview - + Icon -Allows you to preview the selected template or document. +Allows you to preview the selected template or document.
-Document Properties +Document Properties - + Icon -Displays the properties for the selected template or document. +Displays the properties for the selected template or document.
-Organize -Adds, removes, or rearranges templates or sample documents. +Organize +Adds, removes, or rearranges templates or sample documents. -Edit -Opens the selected template for editing. -Open -Opens the selected document or creates a document based on the selected template. -To add another folder to the template path, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths, and then enter the path. +Edit +Opens the selected template for editing. +Open +Opens the selected document or creates a document based on the selected template. +To add another folder to the template path, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths, and then enter the path.
-File properties +File properties
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01010200.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01010200.xhp index f18b74b4cb..9ca72b9775 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01010200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01010200.xhp @@ -32,10 +32,10 @@ -Labels -Allows you to create labels. Labels are created in a text document. You can print labels using a pre-defined or a custom paper format. +Labels +Allows you to create labels. Labels are created in a text document. You can print labels using a pre-defined or a custom paper format. -You can also print a single label or an entire sheet of labels. +You can also print a single label or an entire sheet of labels.
@@ -43,11 +43,11 @@ -New Document -Creates a new document for editing. +New Document +Creates a new document for editing.
-Creating labels +Creating labels
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp index 21ad612adc..638e32f6ac 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp @@ -31,47 +31,47 @@
-Labels -Specify the label text and choose the paper size for the label. +Labels +Specify the label text and choose the paper size for the label.
-Inscription -Enter or insert the text that you want to appear on the label(s). +Inscription +Enter or insert the text that you want to appear on the label(s). -Label text -Enter the text that you want to appear on the label. You can also insert a database field. +Label text +Enter the text that you want to appear on the label. You can also insert a database field. -Address -Creates a label with your return address. Text that is currently in the Label text box is overwritten. -To change your return address, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME, and then click on the User Data tab. +Address +Creates a label with your return address. Text that is currently in the Label text box is overwritten. +To change your return address, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME, and then click on the User Data tab. -Database -Select the database that you want to use as the data source for your label. +Database +Select the database that you want to use as the data source for your label. -Table -Select the database table containing the field(s) that you want to use in your label. +Table +Select the database table containing the field(s) that you want to use in your label. -Database field -Select the database field that you want, and then click the arrow to the left of this box to insert the field into the Label text box. -The name of the database field is bounded by brackets in the Label text box. If you want, you can separate database fields with spaces. Press Enter to insert a database field on a new line. -Format -You can select a pre-defined size format for your label or a size format that you specify on the Format tab.. +Database field +Select the database field that you want, and then click the arrow to the left of this box to insert the field into the Label text box. +The name of the database field is bounded by brackets in the Label text box. If you want, you can separate database fields with spaces. Press Enter to insert a database field on a new line. +Format +You can select a pre-defined size format for your label or a size format that you specify on the Format tab.. -Continuous -Prints labels on continuous paper. +Continuous +Prints labels on continuous paper. -Sheet -Prints labels on individual sheets. +Sheet +Prints labels on individual sheets. -Brand -Select the brand of paper that you want to use. Each brand has its own size formats. +Brand +Select the brand of paper that you want to use. Each brand has its own size formats. -Type -Select the size format that you want to use. The available formats depend on the brand on what you selected in the Brand list. If you want to use a custom label format, select [User], and then click the Format tab to define the format. -Info -The paper type and the dimensions of the label are displayed at the bottom of the Format area. +Type +Select the size format that you want to use. The available formats depend on the brand on what you selected in the Brand list. If you want to use a custom label format, select [User], and then click the Format tab to define the format. +Info +The paper type and the dimensions of the label are displayed at the bottom of the Format area. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01010202.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01010202.xhp index 749e36655d..3f4837eb82 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01010202.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01010202.xhp @@ -32,47 +32,47 @@
-Format -Set paper formatting options. +Format +Set paper formatting options.
-Horizontal pitch -Displays the distance between the left edges of adjacent labels or business cards. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. +Horizontal pitch +Displays the distance between the left edges of adjacent labels or business cards. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. -Vertical pitch -Displays the distance between the upper edge of a label or a business card and the upper edge of the label or the business card directly below. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. +Vertical pitch +Displays the distance between the upper edge of a label or a business card and the upper edge of the label or the business card directly below. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. -Width -Displays the width for the label or the business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. +Width +Displays the width for the label or the business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. -Height -Displays the height for the label or business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. +Height +Displays the height for the label or business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. -Left margin -Displays the distance from the left edge of the page to the left edge of the first label or business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. +Left margin +Displays the distance from the left edge of the page to the left edge of the first label or business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. -Upper margin -Displays distance from the top edge of the page to the top of the first label or business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. +Upper margin +Displays distance from the top edge of the page to the top of the first label or business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. -Columns -Enter the number of labels or business cards that you want to span the width of the page. +Columns +Enter the number of labels or business cards that you want to span the width of the page. -Rows -Enter the number of labels or business cards that you want to span the height of the page. +Rows +Enter the number of labels or business cards that you want to span the height of the page. -Save -Saves the current label or business card format. +Save +Saves the current label or business card format. -Save Label Format +Save Label Format -Brand -Enter or select the desired brand. +Brand +Enter or select the desired brand. -Type -Enter or select a label type. +Type +Enter or select a label type. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01010203.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01010203.xhp index 122791bcca..94a09a682a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01010203.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01010203.xhp @@ -33,28 +33,28 @@
- Options - Sets additional options for your labels or business cards, including text synchronization and printer settings. + Options + Sets additional options for your labels or business cards, including text synchronization and printer settings.
- Entire Page - Creates a full page of labels or business cards. - Single Label - Prints a single label or business card on a page. - Column - Enter the number of labels or business cards that you want to have in a row on your page. - Row - Enter the number of rows of labels or business cards that you want to have on your page. - Synchronize contents - Allows you to edit a single label or business card and updates the contents of the remaining labels or business cards on the page when you click the Synchronize Labels button. - Synchronize Labels - The Synchronize labels button only appears in your document if you selected the Synchronize contents on the Options tab when you created the labels or business cards. - Copies the contents of the top left label or business card to the remaining labels or business cards on the page. - Printer - Displays the name of the currently selected printer. - Setup - Opens the Printer Setup dialog. + Entire Page + Creates a full page of labels or business cards. + Single Label + Prints a single label or business card on a page. + Column + Enter the number of labels or business cards that you want to have in a row on your page. + Row + Enter the number of rows of labels or business cards that you want to have on your page. + Synchronize contents + Allows you to edit a single label or business card and updates the contents of the remaining labels or business cards on the page when you click the Synchronize Labels button. + Synchronize Labels + The Synchronize labels button only appears in your document if you selected the Synchronize contents on the Options tab when you created the labels or business cards. + Copies the contents of the top left label or business card to the remaining labels or business cards on the page. + Printer + Displays the name of the currently selected printer. + Setup + Opens the Printer Setup dialog. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01010300.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01010300.xhp index 24e179237d..f247087591 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01010300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01010300.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@ -Business cards -Design and create your own business cards. You can choose from a number of pre-defined size formats or create your own. +Business cards +Design and create your own business cards. You can choose from a number of pre-defined size formats or create your own.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01010301.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01010301.xhp index 5640190c27..deb2837ed1 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01010301.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01010301.xhp @@ -33,27 +33,27 @@
-Medium -Select the size of your business card from a number of pre-defined size formats, or a size format that you specify on the Format tab. +Medium +Select the size of your business card from a number of pre-defined size formats, or a size format that you specify on the Format tab.
-Format -Select a size format for your business card. +Format +Select a size format for your business card. -Continuous -Prints business cards on continuous paper. +Continuous +Prints business cards on continuous paper. -Sheet -Prints business cards on individual sheets. +Sheet +Prints business cards on individual sheets. -Brand -Select the brand of paper that you want to use. Each brand has its own size formats. +Brand +Select the brand of paper that you want to use. Each brand has its own size formats. -Type -Select the size format that you want to use. The available formats depend on what you selected in the Brand list. If you want to use a custom size format, select [User], and then click the Format tab to define the format. -Info -The paper type and the dimensions of the business card are displayed at the bottom of the Format area. +Type +Select the size format that you want to use. The available formats depend on what you selected in the Brand list. If you want to use a custom size format, select [User], and then click the Format tab to define the format. +Info +The paper type and the dimensions of the business card are displayed at the bottom of the Format area. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01010302.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01010302.xhp index 3614bddc13..f89188854c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01010302.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01010302.xhp @@ -32,17 +32,17 @@
- Business Cards - Define the appearance of your business cards. + Business Cards + Define the appearance of your business cards.
- Content - Select a design layout for your business card. - Select a business card category in AutoText - Section box, and then click a layout in the Content list. - AutoText - Section - Select a business card category, and then click a layout in the Content list. + Content + Select a design layout for your business card. + Select a business card category in AutoText - Section box, and then click a layout in the Content list. + AutoText - Section + Select a business card category, and then click a layout in the Content list. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01010303.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01010303.xhp index 2d9079598d..5f468f4adb 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01010303.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01010303.xhp @@ -30,33 +30,33 @@
-Private -Contains personal contact information for business cards. Business card layouts are selected on the Business Cards tab.removed switched note about autotext not supplied with OOo
+Private +Contains personal contact information for business cards. Business card layouts are selected on the Business Cards tab.removed switched note about autotext not supplied with OOo
-Private data -Enter the contact information that you want to include on your business card. You can also modify or update these entries by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. +Private data +Enter the contact information that you want to include on your business card. You can also modify or update these entries by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. -First name 2 -Enter the first name of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact. -Last name 2 -Enter the last name of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact. -Initials 2 -Enter the initials of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact. +First name 2 +Enter the first name of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact. +Last name 2 +Enter the last name of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact. +Initials 2 +Enter the initials of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact. -Country -Enter the name of the country in which you live. +Country +Enter the name of the country in which you live. -Profession -Enter the title of your profession. -Phone -Enter your home telephone number. -Mobile -Enter your mobile telephone number. +Profession +Enter the title of your profession. +Phone +Enter your home telephone number. +Mobile +Enter your mobile telephone number. -Homepage -Enter the address of your internet homepage. +Homepage +Enter the address of your internet homepage. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01010304.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01010304.xhp index f834079135..26b07751a2 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01010304.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01010304.xhp @@ -32,37 +32,37 @@
-Business -Contains contact information for business cards that use a layout from a 'Business Card, Work' category. Business card layouts are selected on the Business Cards tab. +Business +Contains contact information for business cards that use a layout from a 'Business Card, Work' category. Business card layouts are selected on the Business Cards tab.
-Business data -Enter the contact information that you want to include on your business card. -If you want to include your name on a business card, enter your name on the Private tab. Then choose a layout on the Business Cards tab that includes a name placeholder. +Business data +Enter the contact information that you want to include on your business card. +If you want to include your name on a business card, enter your name on the Private tab. Then choose a layout on the Business Cards tab that includes a name placeholder. -Company 2nd line -Enter additional company details. +Company 2nd line +Enter additional company details. -Slogan -Enter the slogan of your company. +Slogan +Enter the slogan of your company. -Country -Enter the name of the country where your business is located. +Country +Enter the name of the country where your business is located. -Phone -Enter your business telephone number. +Phone +Enter your business telephone number. -Mobile -Enter your mobile telephone number. +Mobile +Enter your mobile telephone number. -Homepage -Enter the address of your company's internet homepage. +Homepage +Enter the address of your company's internet homepage. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01020101.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01020101.xhp index 865d8dbed2..d643736c42 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01020101.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01020101.xhp @@ -32,16 +32,16 @@ - Select Path - Sets file paths. + Select Path + Sets file paths.
- Select - Selects the indicated path. - Path: - Enter or select the path from the list. + Select + Selects the indicated path. + Path: + Enter or select the path from the list.
- Open Dialog + Open Dialog
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01020103.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01020103.xhp index 486482c592..4f803974f8 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01020103.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01020103.xhp @@ -30,28 +30,28 @@ -Filter Selection -Allows you to select an import filter. +Filter Selection +Allows you to select an import filter.
-Filter list -Select the import filter for the file that you want to open. -If $[officename] does not recognize the file type of the document that your want to open, try any of the following: +Filter list +Select the import filter for the file that you want to open. +If $[officename] does not recognize the file type of the document that your want to open, try any of the following: -Select the import filter from the list. +Select the import filter from the list. -Ensure that the file extension corresponds to the file type of the document. For example, a Microsoft Word document must have a (*.doc) extension for $[officename] to use the appropriate filter. +Ensure that the file extension corresponds to the file type of the document. For example, a Microsoft Word document must have a (*.doc) extension for $[officename] to use the appropriate filter. -Install a missing import filter with the $[officename] Setup program. +Install a missing import filter with the $[officename] Setup program. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01050000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01050000.xhp index 86144e3acd..2e58b8d41d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01050000.xhp @@ -34,21 +34,21 @@ mw deleted "backing window" -Close -Closes the current document without exiting the program. +Close +Closes the current document without exiting the program.
-The Close command closes all of the open windows for the current document. -If you have made changes to the current document, you are prompted if you want to save your changes.no longer the default +The Close command closes all of the open windows for the current document. +If you have made changes to the current document, you are prompted if you want to save your changes.no longer the default -id="par_id3159399" l10n="U" oldref="5"If you open a document for printing, and do not make any changes, you are still prompted to save your changes when you close the document. This is because $[officename] keeps track of when a document is printed. -When you close the last open document window, you see the Start Center. +id="par_id3159399" If you open a document for printing, and do not make any changes, you are still prompted to save your changes when you close the document. This is because $[officename] keeps track of when a document is printed. +When you close the last open document window, you see the Start Center.
-Close the current window -Exit $[officename] +Close the current window +Exit $[officename]
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01060000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01060000.xhp index b5fb301cdc..3891ea5a4c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01060000.xhp @@ -34,14 +34,14 @@
-Save -Saves the current document. +Save +Saves the current document.
-When you edit an AutoText entry, this command changes to Save AutoText. +When you edit an AutoText entry, this command changes to Save AutoText.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp index 5e44eabb8a..6419e17fee 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp @@ -34,29 +34,29 @@ -Save As -Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type. +Save As +Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type.
-The following sections describe the %PRODUCTNAME Save as dialog. To activate the %PRODUCTNAME Open and Save dialog boxes, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME- General, and then select the Use %PRODUCTNAME dialogs in the Open/Save dialogs area. -To save a document as a template, use the command File - Templates - Save As Template. +The following sections describe the %PRODUCTNAME Save as dialog. To activate the %PRODUCTNAME Open and Save dialog boxes, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME- General, and then select the Use %PRODUCTNAME dialogs in the Open/Save dialogs area. +To save a document as a template, use the command File - Templates - Save As Template.
Connect To Server Opens a dialog where you can set up connection to various types of servers, including WebDAV, FTP, SSH, Windows Share and CMIS.
-Up One Level +Up One Level
-Move up one folder in the folder hierarchy. Long-click to see the higher level folders.UFI: still a long-click +Move up one folder in the folder hierarchy. Long-click to see the higher level folders.UFI: still a long-click
-Create New Folder +Create New Folder
-Creates a new folder. +Creates a new folder.
@@ -65,38 +65,38 @@ Places area Displays "favourite" places, i.e. shortcuts to local or remote locations.
-Display area +Display area
-Displays the files and folders in the folder that you are in. +Displays the files and folders in the folder that you are in.
-File name +File name
-Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL +Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL
-File type +File type
-Select the file format for the document that you are saving. In the display area, only the documents with this file type are displayed. File types are described in Information on Import and Export Filters. +Select the file format for the document that you are saving. In the display area, only the documents with this file type are displayed. File types are described in Information on Import and Export Filters.
-Always save your document in a %PRODUCTNAME file type before saving it to an external file type. When you export to an external file type, some formatting features may be lost. -Save +Always save your document in a %PRODUCTNAME file type before saving it to an external file type. When you export to an external file type, some formatting features may be lost. +Save
-Saves the file. +Saves the file.
-Save with password +Save with password
-Protects the file with a password that must be entered before a user can open the file. -Only documents using the %PRODUCTNAME XML-based format can be saved with a password. +Protects the file with a password that must be entered before a user can open the file. +Only documents using the %PRODUCTNAME XML-based format can be saved with a password.
removed autoextension, i82752 -Edit filter settings -Allows you to set the spreadsheet saving options for some types of data files.UFI: had to change text and remove Calc switch because switch did not work correctly -Selection -Exports only the selected graphic objects in %PRODUCTNAME Draw and Impress to another format. If this box is not checked, the entire document is exported. -If you are exporting to any document file type, the entire document is exported. +Edit filter settings +Allows you to set the spreadsheet saving options for some types of data files.UFI: had to change text and remove Calc switch because switch did not work correctly +Selection +Exports only the selected graphic objects in %PRODUCTNAME Draw and Impress to another format. If this box is not checked, the entire document is exported. +If you are exporting to any document file type, the entire document is exported.
-Export of Text Files +Export of Text Files
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01070001.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01070001.xhp index 28e39ae15c..5a0e332e42 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01070001.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01070001.xhp @@ -35,25 +35,25 @@ exporting;to foreign formats MW deleted "document types;..." -Export -Saves the current document with a different name and format to a location that you specify. +Export +Saves the current document with a different name and format to a location that you specify.
-The following sections describe the $[officename] Export dialog box. To activate the $[officename] Open and Save dialog boxes, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - General, and then select the Use $[officename] dialogs in the Open/Save dialogs area. -Up One Level +The following sections describe the $[officename] Export dialog box. To activate the $[officename] Open and Save dialog boxes, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - General, and then select the Use $[officename] dialogs in the Open/Save dialogs area. +Up One Level -Create New Directory +Create New Directory -Display area +Display area -File Name +File Name -File Type +File Type -Export +Export removed autoextension, i82752 diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01100000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01100000.xhp index 99a53daae3..7362119199 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01100000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01100000.xhp @@ -30,15 +30,15 @@
-Document Properties +Document Properties -Displays the properties for the current file, including statistics such as word count and the date the file was created. +Displays the properties for the current file, including statistics such as word count and the date the file was created. UFI: removed a note
-The Properties dialog contains the following tab pages: +The Properties dialog contains the following tab pages: @@ -50,6 +50,6 @@ -Depending on your access rights to the file, you might not see all of the tabs in the Properties dialog. +Depending on your access rights to the file, you might not see all of the tabs in the Properties dialog. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01100100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01100100.xhp index f5c4ff4d70..7e81832803 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01100100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01100100.xhp @@ -29,23 +29,23 @@
-Description -Contains descriptive information about the document. +Description +Contains descriptive information about the document.
-Title -Enter a title for the document. +Title +Enter a title for the document. -Subject -Enter a subject for the document. You can use a subject to group documents with similar contents. +Subject +Enter a subject for the document. You can use a subject to group documents with similar contents. -Keywords -Enter the words that you want to use to index the content of your document. Keywords must be separated by commas. A keyword can contain white space characters or semicolons. +Keywords +Enter the words that you want to use to index the content of your document. Keywords must be separated by commas. A keyword can contain white space characters or semicolons. -Comments -Enter comments to help identify the document. +Comments +Enter comments to help identify the document. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp index 98b1278306..98063692f8 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp @@ -35,49 +35,43 @@ documents; editing time -General - Contains basic information about the current file. +General + Contains basic information about the current file.
-File - Displays the file name. - Type: - Displays the file type for the current document. - Location: - Displays the path and the name of the directory where the file is stored. - Size: - Displays the size of the current document in bytes. - Created: - Displays the date and time and author when the file was first saved. - Modified: - Displays the date and time and author when the file was last saved in a $[officename] file format. +File + Displays the file name. + Type: + Displays the file type for the current document. + Location: + Displays the path and the name of the directory where the file is stored. + Size: + Displays the size of the current document in bytes. + Created: + Displays the date and time and author when the file was first saved. + Modified: + Displays the date and time and author when the file was last saved in a $[officename] file format. Template: Displays the template that was used to create the file. - Digitally signed: - Displays the date and the time when the file was last signed as well as the name of the author who signed the document. - Digital Signature - Opens the Digital Signatures dialog where you can manage digital signatures for the current document. - Last printed: - Displays the date and time and user name when the file was last printed. + Digitally signed: + Displays the date and the time when the file was last signed as well as the name of the author who signed the document. + Digital Signature + Opens the Digital Signatures dialog where you can manage digital signatures for the current document. + Last printed: + Displays the date and time and user name when the file was last printed. Total editing time: Displays the amount of time that the file has been open for editing since the file was created. The editing time is updated when you save the file. - Revision number: - Displays the number of times that the file has been saved. + Revision number: + Displays the number of times that the file has been saved. -Apply User Data - Saves the user's full name with the file. You can edit the name by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. +Apply User Data + Saves the user's full name with the file. You can edit the name by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. Reset Properties - Resets the editing time to zero, the creation date to the current date and time, and the version number to 1. The modification and printing dates are also deleted. + Resets the editing time to zero, the creation date to the current date and time, and the version number to 1. The modification and printing dates are also deleted. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01100300.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01100300.xhp index 4b67a61a15..755f12b565 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01100300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01100300.xhp @@ -29,17 +29,17 @@
-Custom Properties -Allows you to assign custom information fields to your document. +Custom Properties +Allows you to assign custom information fields to your document.
-Properties -Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type, and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats. +Properties +Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type, and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats. -Add -Click to add a new row to the Properties list. +Add +Click to add a new row to the Properties list. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp index 6b843df000..c45e3ad562 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp @@ -43,51 +43,51 @@ -Statistics -Displays statistics for the current file. +Statistics +Displays statistics for the current file.
-Some statistic values can be used as variables in formulas. +Some statistic values can be used as variables in formulas. -Pages: -Number of pages in the file. +Pages: +Number of pages in the file. Tables:Sheets: -Number of tables in the file. +Number of tables in the file. Number of sheets in the file. This statistic does not include tables that were inserted as OLE objects. Cells: -Number of cells with content in the file. +Number of cells with content in the file. -Images: +Images: -Number of images in the file. This statistic does not include images that were inserted as OLE objects. +Number of images in the file. This statistic does not include images that were inserted as OLE objects. -OLE Objects: +OLE Objects: -Number of OLE objects in the file, including tables and graphics that were inserted as OLE objects. +Number of OLE objects in the file, including tables and graphics that were inserted as OLE objects. -Paragraphs: +Paragraphs: -Number of paragraphs (including blank paragraphs) in the file. +Number of paragraphs (including blank paragraphs) in the file. -Words: +Words: -Number of words (including words consisting of a single character) in the file. +Number of words (including words consisting of a single character) in the file. -Characters: +Characters: -Number of characters (including spaces) in the file. Non-printable characters are not included. +Number of characters (including spaces) in the file. Non-printable characters are not included. -Lines: +Lines: -Number of lines in the file. +Number of lines in the file. -Update +Update -Updates the statistics. +Updates the statistics. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01100600.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01100600.xhp index af97cb3936..362299b3e0 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01100600.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01100600.xhp @@ -38,26 +38,26 @@ -Security -Sets password options for the current document. +Security +Sets password options for the current document.
-Open file read-only -Select to allow this document to be opened in read-only mode only. -This file sharing option protects the document against accidental changes. It is still possible to edit a copy of the document and save that copy with the same name as the original. +Open file read-only +Select to allow this document to be opened in read-only mode only. +This file sharing option protects the document against accidental changes. It is still possible to edit a copy of the document and save that copy with the same name as the original. -Record changes -Select to enable recording changes. This is the same as Edit - Track Changes - Record Changes. -To protect the recording state with a password, click Protect and enter a password. Other users of this document can apply their changes, but they cannot disable change recording without knowing the password. +Record changes +Select to enable recording changes. This is the same as Edit - Track Changes - Record Changes. +To protect the recording state with a password, click Protect and enter a password. Other users of this document can apply their changes, but they cannot disable change recording without knowing the password. -Protect / Unprotect -Protects the change recording state with a password. If change recording is protected for the current document, the button is named Unprotect. Click Unprotect and type the correct password to disable the protection. +Protect / Unprotect +Protects the change recording state with a password. If change recording is protected for the current document, the button is named Unprotect. Click Unprotect and type the correct password to disable the protection. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01110000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01110000.xhp index a89c04836c..4c7549a5af 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01110000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01110000.xhp @@ -33,14 +33,14 @@
-Templates -Lets you organize and edit your templates, as well as save the current file as a template. +Templates +Lets you organize and edit your templates, as well as save the current file as a template.
-Address Book Source +Address Book Source diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01110101.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01110101.xhp index 3d10acc4a8..46735fb815 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01110101.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01110101.xhp @@ -30,32 +30,32 @@ - + -Address Book Assignment +Address Book Assignment
-Edit the field assignments and the data source for your address book. +Edit the field assignments and the data source for your address book.
Choose Tools - Address Book Source
-Address Book Source -Set the data source and data table for your address book. +Address Book Source +Set the data source and data table for your address book. -Data Source -Select the data source for your address book. +Data Source +Select the data source for your address book. -Table -Select the data table for your address book. +Table +Select the data table for your address book. -Configure -Add a new data source to the Address Book Source list. -Field assignment -Define the field assignments for your address book. +Configure +Add a new data source to the Address Book Source list. +Field assignment +Define the field assignments for your address book. -(Field name) -Select the field in the data table that corresponds to the address book entry. +(Field name) +Select the field in the data table that corresponds to the address book entry.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01110300.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01110300.xhp index dfeeff458d..6caa2527b9 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01110300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01110300.xhp @@ -33,28 +33,28 @@
-Saving (Templates) -Saves the current document as a template. +Saving (Templates) +Saves the current document as a template.
-New Template -Enter a name for the template. -Templates -Lists templates and template categories. +New Template +Enter a name for the template. +Templates +Lists templates and template categories. -Categories -Select a category in which to save the new template. +Categories +Select a category in which to save the new template. -Templates -Lists the available template categories. +Templates +Lists the available template categories. -Edit -Opens the selected template for editing. +Edit +Opens the selected template for editing. -Organize -Opens the Template Management dialog where you can organize or create new templates. +Organize +Opens the Template Management dialog where you can organize or create new templates. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01110400.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01110400.xhp index 3e8510b9cc..416bfb24a5 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01110400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01110400.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
-Edit -Opens a dialog where you can select a template for editing. +Edit +Opens a dialog where you can select a template for editing.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01130000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01130000.xhp index 937ad7b238..b68cac64d0 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01130000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01130000.xhp @@ -46,108 +46,108 @@ -Print -Prints the current document, selection, or the pages that you specify. You can also set the print options for the current document. +Print +Prints the current document, selection, or the pages that you specify. You can also set the print options for the current document. The printing options can vary according to the printer and the operating system that you use.
-The Print dialog consists of three main parts: A preview with navigation buttons, several tab pages with control elements specific to the current document type, and the Print, Cancel, and Help buttons. -If you just want to know how to print your document, click any of the following links. -Printing text documents: +The Print dialog consists of three main parts: A preview with navigation buttons, several tab pages with control elements specific to the current document type, and the Print, Cancel, and Help buttons. +If you just want to know how to print your document, click any of the following links. +Printing text documents: -Printing spreadsheets: +Printing spreadsheets: -Printing presentations: +Printing presentations: -General printing: +General printing: -The settings that you define in the Print dialog are valid only for the current print job that you start by clicking the Print button. is this true for Printer Settings, too?If you want to change some options permanently, open Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME (application name) - Print. -To set the default %PRODUCTNAME printer options for text documents, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. +The settings that you define in the Print dialog are valid only for the current print job that you start by clicking the Print button. is this true for Printer Settings, too?If you want to change some options permanently, open Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME (application name) - Print. +To set the default %PRODUCTNAME printer options for text documents, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. -To set the default %PRODUCTNAME printer options for spreadsheet documents, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Print. +To set the default %PRODUCTNAME printer options for spreadsheet documents, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Print. -To set the default %PRODUCTNAME printer options for presentation documents, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Print. +To set the default %PRODUCTNAME printer options for presentation documents, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Print. -Press Shift+F1 or choose Help - What's This? and point to any control element in the Print dialog to see an extended help text. -Preview -The preview shows how each sheet of paper will look. You can browse through all sheets of paper with the buttons below the preview.insert controls with hidden help here -General -On the General tab page, you find the most important control elements for printing. You can define which contents of your document are to be printed. You can select the printer and open the printer settings dialog. +Press Shift+F1 or choose Help - What's This? and point to any control element in the Print dialog to see an extended help text. +Preview +The preview shows how each sheet of paper will look. You can browse through all sheets of paper with the buttons below the preview.insert controls with hidden help here +General +On the General tab page, you find the most important control elements for printing. You can define which contents of your document are to be printed. You can select the printer and open the printer settings dialog. Writer: -Specifies whether to print colors and objects that are inserted to the background of the page (Format - Page - Background). +Specifies whether to print colors and objects that are inserted to the background of the page (Format - Page - Background). -Specifies whether the graphics and drawings or OLE objects of your text document are printed. +Specifies whether the graphics and drawings or OLE objects of your text document are printed. -Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden. +Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden. -Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout. +Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout. -Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed. +Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed. -Specifies whether to always print text in black. +Specifies whether to always print text in black. -If this option is enabled automatically inserted blank pages are printed. This is best if you are printing double-sided. For example, in a book, a "chapter" paragraph style has been set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to print that even numbered page. +If this option is enabled automatically inserted blank pages are printed. This is best if you are printing double-sided. For example, in a book, a "chapter" paragraph style has been set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to print that even numbered page. -Specify where to print comments (if any). +Specify where to print comments (if any). -Specify where to print comments (if any). +Specify where to print comments (if any). Math: -Specifies whether you want the name of the document to be included in the printout. +Specifies whether you want the name of the document to be included in the printout. -Specifies whether to include the contents of the Commands window at the bottom of the printout. +Specifies whether to include the contents of the Commands window at the bottom of the printout. -Applies a thin border to the formula area in the printout. +Applies a thin border to the formula area in the printout. -Prints the formula without adjusting the current font size. +Prints the formula without adjusting the current font size. -Adjusts the formula to the page format used in the printout. +Adjusts the formula to the page format used in the printout. -Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified factor. +Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified factor. -Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified factor. +Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified factor. Calc: -If checked empty pages that have no cell contents or draw objects are not printed. +If checked empty pages that have no cell contents or draw objects are not printed. @@ -158,134 +158,134 @@ Moved all DRAW and IMPRESS to default section. General and Basic and Draw and Impress (at end of default case) -For printers with multiple trays this option specifies whether the paper tray used is specified by the system settings of the printer. +For printers with multiple trays this option specifies whether the paper tray used is specified by the system settings of the printer. -Prints the entire document. +Prints the entire document. -Prints only the pages or slides that you specify in the Pages box. +Prints only the pages or slides that you specify in the Pages box. -Prints only the selected area(s) or object(s) in the current document. +Prints only the selected area(s) or object(s) in the current document. -To print a range of pages, use a format like 3-6. To print single pages, use a format like 7;9;11. You can print a combination of page ranges and single pages, by using a format like 3-6;8;10;12. +To print a range of pages, use a format like 3-6. To print single pages, use a format like 7;9;11. You can print a combination of page ranges and single pages, by using a format like 3-6;8;10;12. -Prints to a file instead of to a printer. +Prints to a file instead of to a printer. -Check to not rely on the printer to create collated copies but create a print job for each copy instead. +Check to not rely on the printer to create collated copies but create a print job for each copy instead. -Check to print pages in reverse order. +Check to print pages in reverse order. -Enter the number of copies that you want to print. +Enter the number of copies that you want to print. -Preserves the page order of the original document. +Preserves the page order of the original document. -Opens the printer properties dialog. The printer properties vary according to the printer that you select. +Opens the printer properties dialog. The printer properties vary according to the printer that you select. -Show/Hide detailed information of the selected printer. +Show/Hide detailed information of the selected printer. -The list box shows the installed printers. Click the printer to use for the current print job. Click the Printer details button to see some information about the selected printer. Click the Properties button to change some of the printer properties. +The list box shows the installed printers. Click the printer to use for the current print job. Click the Printer details button to see some information about the selected printer. Click the Properties button to change some of the printer properties. -Specify which pages to include in the output. +Specify which pages to include in the output. -Select the Brochure option to print the document in brochure format. +Select the Brochure option to print the document in brochure format. -Select which pages of a brochure to print. +Select which pages of a brochure to print. -For brochure printing, you can select a left-to-right order of pages or a right-to-left order. +For brochure printing, you can select a left-to-right order of pages or a right-to-left order. -Check to draw a border around each page. +Check to draw a border around each page. -Select order in which pages are to be printed. +Select order in which pages are to be printed. -Select the orientation of the paper. +Select the orientation of the paper. -Select margin between the printed pages and paper edge. +Select margin between the printed pages and paper edge. -Select margin between individual pages on each sheet of paper. +Select margin between individual pages on each sheet of paper. -Select number of rows. +Select number of rows. -Select number of columns. +Select number of columns. -Select how many pages to print per sheet of paper. +Select how many pages to print per sheet of paper. -Print multiple pages per sheet of paper. +Print multiple pages per sheet of paper. Impress: -Select which parts of the document should be printed. +Select which parts of the document should be printed. -Select how many slides to print per page. +Select how many slides to print per page. -Specify how to arrange slides on the printed page. +Specify how to arrange slides on the printed page. -Specifies whether to print the page name of a document. +Specifies whether to print the page name of a document. -Specifies whether to print the current date and time. +Specifies whether to print the current date and time. -Specifies whether to print the pages that are currently hidden. +Specifies whether to print the pages that are currently hidden. -Specifies to print in original colors. +Specifies to print in original colors. -Specifies to print colors as grayscale. +Specifies to print colors as grayscale. -Specifies to print colors as black and white. +Specifies to print colors as black and white. -Specify how to scale slides in the printout. +Specify how to scale slides in the printout. -Specifies that you do not want to further scale pages when printing. +Specifies that you do not want to further scale pages when printing. -Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer so they fit on the paper in the printer. +Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer so they fit on the paper in the printer. -Specifies that pages are to be printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than the paper, several pages or slides will be printed on one page of paper. +Specifies that pages are to be printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than the paper, several pages or slides will be printed on one page of paper. -%PRODUCTNAME Writer / Calc / Impress / Draw / Math -The tab page with the same name as the current application can be used to define the contents, color, size, and pages to be printed. You define settings that are specific to the current document type. -Page Layout -The Page Layout tab page can be used to save some sheets of paper by printing several pages onto each sheet of paper. You define the arrangement and size of output pages on the physical paper. -Change the arrangement of pages to be printed on every sheet of paper. The preview shows how every final sheet of paper will look. -For some document types, you can choose to print a brochure. +%PRODUCTNAME Writer / Calc / Impress / Draw / Math +The tab page with the same name as the current application can be used to define the contents, color, size, and pages to be printed. You define settings that are specific to the current document type. +Page Layout +The Page Layout tab page can be used to save some sheets of paper by printing several pages onto each sheet of paper. You define the arrangement and size of output pages on the physical paper. +Change the arrangement of pages to be printed on every sheet of paper. The preview shows how every final sheet of paper will look. +For some document types, you can choose to print a brochure. -Options -On the Options tab page you can set some additional options for the current print job. Here you can specify to print to a file instead of printing on a printer. +Options +On the Options tab page you can set some additional options for the current print job. Here you can specify to print to a file instead of printing on a printer. -Unix hints +Unix hints -You can also use the printer settings to specify additional printer options. +You can also use the printer settings to specify additional printer options. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01160000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01160000.xhp index 101aadb826..f5cb08f500 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01160000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01160000.xhp @@ -33,50 +33,50 @@
-Send -Sends a copy of the current document to different applications. +Send +Sends a copy of the current document to different applications.
-E-mail Document +E-mail Document New menu commands, see #i46895 and #i63793UFI: New commands all have the same Help IDs, but different names -Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The OpenDocument file format is used. +Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The OpenDocument file format is used. -Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The Microsoft file format is used. +Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The Microsoft file format is used. -E-mail as OpenDocument Spreadsheet -Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The OpenDocument file format is used. -E-mail as Microsoft Excel -Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The Microsoft Excel file format is used. +E-mail as OpenDocument Spreadsheet +Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The OpenDocument file format is used. +E-mail as Microsoft Excel +Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The Microsoft Excel file format is used. -E-mail as OpenDocument Presentation -Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The OpenDocument file format is used. -E-mail as Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation -Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The Microsoft PowerPoint file format is used. +E-mail as OpenDocument Presentation +Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The OpenDocument file format is used. +E-mail as Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation +Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The Microsoft PowerPoint file format is used. -E-mail as OpenDocument Text -Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The OpenDocument file format is used. -E-mail as Microsoft Word -Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The Microsoft Word file format is used. +E-mail as OpenDocument Text +Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The OpenDocument file format is used. +E-mail as Microsoft Word +Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The Microsoft Word file format is used. UFI: removed 2 help ids -Create Master Document +Create Master Document -Create HTML Document +Create HTML Document -Create AutoAbstract +Create AutoAbstract diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp index 364d4aad98..7d469cd6bf 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp @@ -30,12 +30,12 @@
-E-mail Document -Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The current file format is used. If the document is new and unsaved, the format specified in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General is used. +E-mail Document +Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The current file format is used. If the document is new and unsaved, the format specified in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General is used.
-If the document is in HTML format, any embedded or linked images will not be sent with the e-mail. +If the document is in HTML format, any embedded or linked images will not be sent with the e-mail. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01160300.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01160300.xhp index 6676bac1b4..aa86cfa72b 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01160300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01160300.xhp @@ -29,33 +29,28 @@ -Create Master Document - Creates a master document from the current Writer document. A new sub-document is created at each occurrence of a chosen paragraph style or outline level in the source document. +Create Master Document + Creates a master document from the current Writer document. A new sub-document is created at each occurrence of a chosen paragraph style or outline level in the source document.
- The Navigator appears after you create a master document. To edit a sub-document, double-click the name of a sub-document in the Navigator. + The Navigator appears after you create a master document. To edit a sub-document, double-click the name of a sub-document in the Navigator. -Display area +Display area -File name +File name -separated by - Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents. By default a new document is created for every outline level 1. +separated by + Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents. By default a new document is created for every outline level 1. -File type +File type -Save +Save removed autoextension diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01170000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01170000.xhp index e992d9c748..74fd9aef43 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01170000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01170000.xhp @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
exiting;$[officename] mw made "exiting..." a two level entry -Exit +Exit Closes all $[officename] programs and prompts you to save your changes. This command does not exist on macOS systems.
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
-Close the current document +Close the current document
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01180000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01180000.xhp index df88167cef..02f66a3dea 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01180000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01180000.xhp @@ -31,13 +31,13 @@
-Save All - Saves all modified $[officename] documents. +Save All + Saves all modified $[officename] documents.
- If you are saving a new file or a copy of a read-only file, the Save As dialog appears. + If you are saving a new file or a copy of a read-only file, the Save As dialog appears. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01190000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01190000.xhp index 8d751967be..10c6aef4a1 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01190000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01190000.xhp @@ -34,41 +34,41 @@ -Versions -Saves and organizes multiple versions of the current document in the same file. You can also open, delete, and compare previous versions. +Versions +Saves and organizes multiple versions of the current document in the same file. You can also open, delete, and compare previous versions.
-If you save a copy of a file that contains version information (by choosing File - Save As), the version information is not saved with the file. -New versions -Set the options for saving a new version of the document. +If you save a copy of a file that contains version information (by choosing File - Save As), the version information is not saved with the file. +New versions +Set the options for saving a new version of the document. -Save New Version -Saves the current state of the document as a new version. If you want, you can also enter comments in the Insert Version Comment dialog before you save the new version. +Save New Version +Saves the current state of the document as a new version. If you want, you can also enter comments in the Insert Version Comment dialog before you save the new version. -Insert Version Comment -Enter a comment here when you are saving a new version. If you clicked Show to open this dialog, you cannot edit the comment. +Insert Version Comment +Enter a comment here when you are saving a new version. If you clicked Show to open this dialog, you cannot edit the comment. -Always save version when closing -If you have made changes to your document, $[officename] automatically saves a new version when you close the document. -If you save the document manually, do not change the document after saving, and then close, no new version will be created.issue 12653 +Always save version when closing +If you have made changes to your document, $[officename] automatically saves a new version when you close the document. +If you save the document manually, do not change the document after saving, and then close, no new version will be created.issue 12653 -Existing versions -Lists the existing versions of the current document, the date and the time they were created, the author and the associated comments. +Existing versions +Lists the existing versions of the current document, the date and the time they were created, the author and the associated comments. -Open -Opens the selected version in a read-only window. +Open +Opens the selected version in a read-only window. -Show -Displays the entire comment for the selected version. +Show +Displays the entire comment for the selected version. -Delete -Deletes the selected version. +Delete +Deletes the selected version. -Compare -Compare the changes that were made in each version. If you want, you can Manage Changes. +Compare +Compare the changes that were made in each version. If you want, you can Manage Changes. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/01990000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/01990000.xhp index 912984875d..b39a3f94a3 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/01990000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/01990000.xhp @@ -32,12 +32,12 @@
-Recent Documents +Recent Documents -Lists the most recently opened files. To open a file in the list, click its name. +Lists the most recently opened files. To open a file in the list, click its name.
The number of files that are listed can be changed in the Expert configuration by setting the property /org.openoffice.Office.Common/History PickListSize. -The file is opened by the %PRODUCTNAME module that saved it. +The file is opened by the %PRODUCTNAME module that saved it. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02010000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02010000.xhp index bffdcda8c2..bfb5b285b1 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02010000.xhp @@ -37,20 +37,20 @@ -Undo -Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed. To select the command that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar. +Undo +Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed. To select the command that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar.
To change the number of commands that you can undo, go to the Expert configuration and set a new value of the property /org.openoffice.Office.Common/Undo Steps. -Some commands (for example, editing Styles) cannot be undone. -You can cancel the Undo command by choosing Edit - Redo. -About the Undo command in database tables -When you are working with database tables, you can only undo the last command. -If you change the content of a record in a database table that has not been saved, and then use the Undo command, the record is erased. -About the Undo command in presentations -The Undo list is cleared when you apply a new layout to a slide. +Some commands (for example, editing Styles) cannot be undone. +You can cancel the Undo command by choosing Edit - Redo. +About the Undo command in database tables +When you are working with database tables, you can only undo the last command. +If you change the content of a record in a database table that has not been saved, and then use the Undo command, the record is erased. +About the Undo command in presentations +The Undo list is cleared when you apply a new layout to a slide. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02020000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02020000.xhp index 31fac12eba..223bd13adb 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02020000.xhp @@ -35,8 +35,8 @@ mw made "restoring..." a two level entry -Redo -Reverses the action of the last Undo command. To select the Undo step that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar. +Redo +Reverses the action of the last Undo command. To select the Undo step that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02030000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02030000.xhp index 1660a9c0e8..99f5912d51 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02030000.xhp @@ -35,8 +35,8 @@ commands; repeating -Repeat -Repeats the last command. This command is available in Writer and Calc. +Repeat +Repeats the last command. This command is available in Writer and Calc.
UFI: had to remove switch construct because help-ids don't work any more inside switches, see i47727 diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02040000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02040000.xhp index e4f2c556c3..2e3caa2a03 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02040000.xhp @@ -37,8 +37,8 @@ -Cut -Removes and copies the selection to the clipboard. +Cut +Removes and copies the selection to the clipboard.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02050000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02050000.xhp index f52b54f635..c34a862ef7 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02050000.xhp @@ -36,16 +36,16 @@ -Copy -Copies the selection to the clipboard. +Copy +Copies the selection to the clipboard.
-Each time you copy, the existing content of the clipboard is overwritten. +Each time you copy, the existing content of the clipboard is overwritten.
- + $[officename] also supports the clipboard under Unix; however, you must use the $[officename] commands, such as Ctrl+C. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02060000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02060000.xhp index 40771fb9e6..ff369ea62c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02060000.xhp @@ -39,19 +39,19 @@ -overwrite dialog in Calc if target is not empty +overwrite dialog in Calc if target is not empty -Paste -Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor, and replaces any selected text or objects.UFI: text used for icon and menu +Paste +Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor, and replaces any selected text or objects.UFI: text used for icon and menu
-In a spreadsheet, when you paste a range of cells from the clipboard, the result depends on the current selection: If only one cell is selected, the cell range will be pasted started from that cell. If you mark a cell range wider than the cell range in the clipboard, the cell range will be pasted repeatedly to fill the selected cell range. +In a spreadsheet, when you paste a range of cells from the clipboard, the result depends on the current selection: If only one cell is selected, the cell range will be pasted started from that cell. If you mark a cell range wider than the cell range in the clipboard, the cell range will be pasted repeatedly to fill the selected cell range. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02070000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02070000.xhp index 4756b6986c..cb9de2b150 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02070000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02070000.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@ -Paste Special -Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify. +Paste Special +Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify.
@@ -65,135 +65,135 @@ -Source -Displays the source of the clipboard contents. +Source +Displays the source of the clipboard contents. -Selection -Select a format for the clipboard contents that you want to paste. -When you paste HTML data into a text document, you can choose "HTML format" or "HTML format without comments". The second choice is the default; it pastes all HTML data, but no comments. +Selection +Select a format for the clipboard contents that you want to paste. +When you paste HTML data into a text document, you can choose "HTML format" or "HTML format without comments". The second choice is the default; it pastes all HTML data, but no comments. -Paste Special +Paste Special -This dialog appears in Calc if the clipboard contains spreadsheet cells. +This dialog appears in Calc if the clipboard contains spreadsheet cells. -Selection +Selection -Select a format for the clipboard contents that you want to paste. +Select a format for the clipboard contents that you want to paste. -Paste all +Paste all -Pastes all cell contents, comments, formats, and objects into the current document. +Pastes all cell contents, comments, formats, and objects into the current document. -Text +Text i50436 -Inserts cells containing text. +Inserts cells containing text. -Numbers +Numbers -Inserts cells containing numbers. +Inserts cells containing numbers. -Date & Time +Date & Time -Inserts cells containing date and time values. +Inserts cells containing date and time values. -Formulas +Formulas -Inserts cells containing formulae. +Inserts cells containing formulae. -Comments +Comments -Inserts comments that are attached to cells. If you want to add the comments to the existing cell content, select the "Add" operation. +Inserts comments that are attached to cells. If you want to add the comments to the existing cell content, select the "Add" operation. -Formats +Formats -Inserts cell format attributes. +Inserts cell format attributes. -Objects +Objects -Inserts objects contained within the selected cell range. These can be OLE objects, chart objects, or drawing objects. +Inserts objects contained within the selected cell range. These can be OLE objects, chart objects, or drawing objects. -Operations +Operations -Select the operation to apply when you paste cells into your sheet. +Select the operation to apply when you paste cells into your sheet. -None +None -Does not apply an operation when you insert the cell range from the clipboard. The contents of the clipboard will replace existing cell contents. +Does not apply an operation when you insert the cell range from the clipboard. The contents of the clipboard will replace existing cell contents. -Add +Add -Adds the values in the clipboard cells to the values in the target cells. Also, if the clipboard only contains comments, adds the comments to the target cells. +Adds the values in the clipboard cells to the values in the target cells. Also, if the clipboard only contains comments, adds the comments to the target cells. -Subtract +Subtract -Subtracts the values in the clipboard cells from the values in the target cells. +Subtracts the values in the clipboard cells from the values in the target cells. -Multiply +Multiply -Multiplies the values in the clipboard cells with the values in the target cells. +Multiplies the values in the clipboard cells with the values in the target cells. -Divide +Divide -Divides the values in the target cells by the values in the clipboard cells. +Divides the values in the target cells by the values in the clipboard cells. UFI: fixes #i14796# -Options +Options -Sets the paste options for the clipboard contents. +Sets the paste options for the clipboard contents. -Skip empty cells +Skip empty cells -Empty cells from the clipboard do not replace target cells. If you use this option in conjunction with the Multiply or the Divide operation, the operation is not applied to the target cell of an empty cell in the clipboard. +Empty cells from the clipboard do not replace target cells. If you use this option in conjunction with the Multiply or the Divide operation, the operation is not applied to the target cell of an empty cell in the clipboard. -If you select a mathematical operation and clear the Skip empty cells box, empty cells in the clipboard are treated as zeroes. For example, if you apply the Multiply operation, the target cells are filled with zeroes. +If you select a mathematical operation and clear the Skip empty cells box, empty cells in the clipboard are treated as zeroes. For example, if you apply the Multiply operation, the target cells are filled with zeroes. -Transpose +Transpose -The rows of the range in the clipboard are pasted to become columns of the output range. The columns of the range in the clipboard are pasted to become rows. +The rows of the range in the clipboard are pasted to become columns of the output range. The columns of the range in the clipboard are pasted to become rows. i59261 -Link +Link -Inserts the cell range as a link, so that changes made to the cells in the source file are updated in the target file. To ensure that changes made to empty cells in the source file are updated in the target file, ensure that the Insert All option is also selected. +Inserts the cell range as a link, so that changes made to the cells in the source file are updated in the target file. To ensure that changes made to empty cells in the source file are updated in the target file, ensure that the Insert All option is also selected. -You can also link sheets within the same spreadsheet. When you link to other files, a DDE link is automatically created. A DDE link is inserted as a matrix formula and can only be modified as a whole. +You can also link sheets within the same spreadsheet. When you link to other files, a DDE link is automatically created. A DDE link is inserted as a matrix formula and can only be modified as a whole. -Shift Cells +Shift Cells -Set the shift options for the target cells when the clipboard content is inserted. +Set the shift options for the target cells when the clipboard content is inserted. -Don't shift +Don't shift -Inserted cells replace the target cells. +Inserted cells replace the target cells. -Down +Down -Target cells are shifted downward when you insert cells from the clipboard. +Target cells are shifted downward when you insert cells from the clipboard. -Right +Right -Target cells are shifted to the right when you insert cells from the clipboard. +Target cells are shifted to the right when you insert cells from the clipboard. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02090000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02090000.xhp index f6568b1d6b..218bd8eaee 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02090000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02090000.xhp @@ -36,15 +36,15 @@
-Select All - Selects the entire content of the current file, frame, or text object. +Select All + Selects the entire content of the current file, frame, or text object.
- To select all of the cells on a sheet, click the button at the intersection of the column and row header in the top left corner of the sheet. + To select all of the cells on a sheet, click the button at the intersection of the column and row header in the top left corner of the sheet.
- To select all of the sheets in a spreadsheet file, right-click the name tab of a sheet, and then choose Select All Sheets.Selects all of the sheets in the current spreadsheet. + To select all of the sheets in a spreadsheet file, right-click the name tab of a sheet, and then choose Select All Sheets.Selects all of the sheets in the current spreadsheet. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp index b9d42d1dd8..fb4ae4f4db 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ -Find & Replace +Find & Replace Finds or replaces text or formats in the current document. @@ -44,13 +44,13 @@ Find Toolbar -Type the text to search in the current document. Press Enter to search the text. +Type the text to search in the current document. Press Enter to search the text. -Click to search the next occurrence in downward direction. +Click to search the next occurrence in downward direction. -Click to search the next occurrence in upward direction. +Click to search the next occurrence in upward direction. Find @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Replace - Enter the replacement text, or select a recent replacement text or style from the list. + Enter the replacement text, or select a recent replacement text or style from the list. Replacement options are listed under the Replace box and in the Other options area of the dialog. @@ -83,13 +83,13 @@ -Find All -Finds and selects all instances of the text or the format that you are searching for in the document (only in Writer and Calc documents). +Find All +Finds and selects all instances of the text or the format that you are searching for in the document (only in Writer and Calc documents). copied text as hidden help, see issue 115137 -Finds and selects all instances of the text or the format that you are searching for in the document (only in Writer and Calc documents). +Finds and selects all instances of the text or the format that you are searching for in the document (only in Writer and Calc documents). Find Previous Finds and selects the previous occurrence of the text or format that you are searching for in the document. @@ -97,13 +97,11 @@ Find Next Finds and selects the next occurrence of the text or format that you are searching for in the document. -Replace - Replaces the selected text or format that you searched for, and then searches for the next occurrence. +Replace + Replaces the selected text or format that you searched for, and then searches for the next occurrence. -Replace All - Replaces all of the occurrences of the text or format that you want to replace. Repeat this command until all replacements on your slide have been made. +Replace All + Replaces all of the occurrences of the text or format that you want to replace. Repeat this command until all replacements on your slide have been made. Other options @@ -115,17 +113,16 @@ Searches only the selected text or cells. Replace backwards - Search starts at the current cursor position and goes backwards to the beginning of the file. + Search starts at the current cursor position and goes backwards to the beginning of the file. - + Regular expressions - + Allows you to use wildcards in your search.i72448 Ext help text not found within switches. Solution: Keep switched text for normal display, add hidden help text as "fall through". -Allows you to use wildcards in your search. +Allows you to use wildcards in your search. @@ -136,7 +133,7 @@ Ext help text not found within switches. Solution: Keep switched text for normal had to copy extended help to outside of switch construct - see issue 72448 -Searches for text formatted with the style that you specify. Select this checkbox, and then select a style from the Find list. To specify a replacement style, select a style from the Replace list. +Searches for text formatted with the style that you specify. Select this checkbox, and then select a style from the Find list. To specify a replacement style, select a style from the Replace list. @@ -156,23 +153,21 @@ Ext help text not found within switches. Solution: Keep switched text for normal -Match character width (only if Asian languages are enabled) +Match character width (only if Asian languages are enabled) - Distinguishes between half-width and full-width character forms. + Distinguishes between half-width and full-width character forms. -Sounds like (Japanese) (only if Asian languages are enabled) +Sounds like (Japanese) (only if Asian languages are enabled) Lets you specify the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text. Select this checkbox, and then click the Sounds button to specify the search options. -Sets the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text. +Sets the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text. - Searching in Japanese + Searching in Japanese @@ -190,7 +185,7 @@ Ext help text not found within switches. Solution: Keep switched text for normal Format -Finds specific text formatting features, such as font types, font effects, and text flow characteristics. +Finds specific text formatting features, such as font types, font effects, and text flow characteristics. @@ -203,7 +198,7 @@ Ext help text not found within switches. Solution: Keep switched text for normal Direction - Determines the order for searching the cells. + Determines the order for searching the cells. Rows @@ -215,23 +210,22 @@ Ext help text not found within switches. Solution: Keep switched text for normal Searches from top to bottom through the columns. Searches from top to bottom through the columns. - Search in + Search in Formulas Searches for the characters that you specify in formulas and in fixed (not calculated) values. For example, you could look for formulas that contain 'SUM'. Searches for the characters that you specify in formulas and in fixed (not calculated) values. For example, you could look for formulas that contain 'SUM'. Values - Searches for the characters that you specify in values and in the results of formulas. + Searches for the characters that you specify in values and in the results of formulas. - Searches for the characters that you specify in values and in the results of formulas. + Searches for the characters that you specify in values and in the results of formulas. Notes - Searches for the characters that you specify in the comments that are attached to the cells. + Searches for the characters that you specify in the comments that are attached to the cells. - Searches for the characters that you specify in the comments that are attached to the cells. + Searches for the characters that you specify in the comments that are attached to the cells. - After you close the Find & Replace dialog, you can still search using the last search criteria that you entered, by pressing Shift+Command + After you close the Find & Replace dialog, you can still search using the last search criteria that you entered, by pressing Shift+Command Ctrl+F.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp index 9289b00037..3e1c9954bc 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp @@ -34,87 +34,86 @@ concatenation, see ampersand symbol ampersand symbol, see also operators mw added "replacing;" and "tab stops;" -List of Regular Expressions +List of Regular Expressions - Character + Character - Result/Use + Result/Use - Any character + Any character - Represents the given character unless otherwise specified. + Represents the given character unless otherwise specified. - . + . - Represents any single character except for a line break or paragraph break. For example, the search term "sh.rt" returns both "shirt" and "short". + Represents any single character except for a line break or paragraph break. For example, the search term "sh.rt" returns both "shirt" and "short". - ^ + ^ - Only finds the search term if the term is at the beginning of a paragraph. Special objects such as empty fields or character-anchored frames, at the beginning of a paragraph are ignored. Example: "^Peter". + Only finds the search term if the term is at the beginning of a paragraph. Special objects such as empty fields or character-anchored frames, at the beginning of a paragraph are ignored. Example: "^Peter". - $ + $ - Only finds the search term if the term appears at the end of a paragraph. Special objects such as empty fields or character-anchored frames at the end of a paragraph are ignored. Example: "Peter$". + Only finds the search term if the term appears at the end of a paragraph. Special objects such as empty fields or character-anchored frames at the end of a paragraph are ignored. Example: "Peter$". $ on its own matches the end of a paragraph. This way it is possible to search and replace paragraph breaks. - * + * - Finds zero or more of the characters in front of the "*". For example, "Ab*c" finds "Ac", "Abc", "Abbc", "Abbbc", and so on. + Finds zero or more of the characters in front of the "*". For example, "Ab*c" finds "Ac", "Abc", "Abbc", "Abbbc", and so on. - + + + - Finds one or more of the characters in front of the "+". For example, "AX.+4" finds "AXx4", but not "AX4". - The longest possible string that matches this search pattern in a paragraph is always found. If the paragraph contains the string "AX 4 AX4", the entire passage is highlighted. + Finds one or more of the characters in front of the "+". For example, "AX.+4" finds "AXx4", but not "AX4". + The longest possible string that matches this search pattern in a paragraph is always found. If the paragraph contains the string "AX 4 AX4", the entire passage is highlighted. - ? + ? - Finds zero or one of the characters in front of the "?". For example, "Texts?" finds "Text" and "Texts" and "x(ab|c)?y" finds "xy", "xaby", or "xcy". + Finds zero or one of the characters in front of the "?". For example, "Texts?" finds "Text" and "Texts" and "x(ab|c)?y" finds "xy", "xaby", or "xcy". - \ + \ - Search interprets the special character that follows the "\" as a normal character and not as a regular expression (except for the combinations \n, \t, \>, and \<). For example, "tree\." finds "tree.", not "treed" or "trees". + Search interprets the special character that follows the "\" as a normal character and not as a regular expression (except for the combinations \n, \t, \>, and \<). For example, "tree\." finds "tree.", not "treed" or "trees". - \n + \n Represents a line break that was inserted with the Shift+Enter key combination. To change a line break into a paragraph break, enter \n in the Find and Replace boxes, and then perform a search and replace. @@ -124,7 +123,7 @@ - \t + \t Represents a tab. You can also use this expression in the Replace box. @@ -132,31 +131,31 @@ - \b + \b - Match a word boundary. For example, "\bbook" finds "bookmark" but not "checkbook" whereas "book\b" finds "checkbook" but not "bookmark". The discrete word "book" is found by both search terms. + Match a word boundary. For example, "\bbook" finds "bookmark" but not "checkbook" whereas "book\b" finds "checkbook" but not "bookmark". The discrete word "book" is found by both search terms. - ^$ + ^$ - Finds an empty paragraph. + Finds an empty paragraph. - ^. + ^. - Finds the first character of a paragraph. + Finds the first character of a paragraph. - & or $0 + & or $0 Adds the string that was found by the search criteria in the Find box to the term in the Replace box when you make a replacement. @@ -166,173 +165,173 @@ - [abc123] + [abc123] - Represents one of the characters that are between the brackets. + Represents one of the characters that are between the brackets. - [a-e] + [a-e] - Represents any of the characters that are between a and e, including both start and end characters - The characters are ordered by their code numbers. + Represents any of the characters that are between a and e, including both start and end characters + The characters are ordered by their code numbers. - [a-eh-x] + [a-eh-x] - Represents any of the characters that are between a-e and h-x. + Represents any of the characters that are between a-e and h-x. - [^a-s] + [^a-s] - Represents everything that is not between a and s. + Represents everything that is not between a and s. - \uXXXX - \UXXXXXXXX + \uXXXX + \UXXXXXXXX - Represents a character based on its four-digit hexadecimal Unicode code (XXXX). - For obscure characters there is a separate variant with capital U and eight hexadecimal digits (XXXXXXXX). - For certain symbol fonts the code for special characters may depend on the used font. You can view the codes by choosing Insert - Special Character. + Represents a character based on its four-digit hexadecimal Unicode code (XXXX). + For obscure characters there is a separate variant with capital U and eight hexadecimal digits (XXXXXXXX). + For certain symbol fonts the code for special characters may depend on the used font. You can view the codes by choosing Insert - Special Character. - | + | - Finds the terms that occur before the "|" and also finds the terms that occur after the "|". For example, "this|that" finds "this" and "that". + Finds the terms that occur before the "|" and also finds the terms that occur after the "|". For example, "this|that" finds "this" and "that". - {2} + {2} - Defines the number of times that the character in front of the opening bracket occurs. For example, "tre{2}" finds and selects "tree". + Defines the number of times that the character in front of the opening bracket occurs. For example, "tre{2}" finds and selects "tree". - {1,2} + {1,2} - Defines the minimum and maximum number of times that the character in front of the opening bracket can occur. For example, "tre{1,2}" finds and selects "tre" and "tree". + Defines the minimum and maximum number of times that the character in front of the opening bracket can occur. For example, "tre{1,2}" finds and selects "tre" and "tree". - {1,} + {1,} - Defines the minimum number of times that the character in front of the opening bracket can occur. For example, "tre{2,}" finds "tree", "treee", and "treeeee". + Defines the minimum number of times that the character in front of the opening bracket can occur. For example, "tre{2,}" finds "tree", "treee", and "treeeee". - ( ) + ( ) In the Find box: - Defines the characters inside the parentheses as a reference. You can then refer to the first reference in the current expression with "\1", to the second reference with "\2", and so on. - For example, if your text contains the number 13487889 and you search using the regular expression (8)7\1\1, "8788" is found. - You can also use () to group terms, for example, "a(bc)?d" finds "ad" or "abcd". + Defines the characters inside the parentheses as a reference. You can then refer to the first reference in the current expression with "\1", to the second reference with "\2", and so on. + For example, if your text contains the number 13487889 and you search using the regular expression (8)7\1\1, "8788" is found. + You can also use () to group terms, for example, "a(bc)?d" finds "ad" or "abcd". In the Replace box:i83322 - Use $ (dollar) instead of \ (backslash) to replace references. Use $0 to replace the whole found string. + Use $ (dollar) instead of \ (backslash) to replace references. Use $0 to replace the whole found string. - [:alpha:] + [:alpha:] - Represents an alphabetic character. Use [:alpha:]+ to find one of them. + Represents an alphabetic character. Use [:alpha:]+ to find one of them. - [:digit:] + [:digit:] - Represents a decimal digit. Use [:digit:]+ to find one of them. + Represents a decimal digit. Use [:digit:]+ to find one of them. - [:alnum:] + [:alnum:] - Represents an alphanumeric character ([:alpha:] and [:digit:]). + Represents an alphanumeric character ([:alpha:] and [:digit:]). - [:space:] + [:space:] - Represents a space character (but not other whitespace characters).UFI: see #i41706# + Represents a space character (but not other whitespace characters).UFI: see #i41706# - [:print:] + [:print:] - Represents a printable character. + Represents a printable character. - [:cntrl:] + [:cntrl:] - Represents a nonprinting character. + Represents a nonprinting character. - [:lower:] + [:lower:] - Represents a lowercase character if Match case is selected in Options. + Represents a lowercase character if Match case is selected in Options. - [:upper:] + [:upper:] - Represents an uppercase character if Match case is selected in Options. + Represents an uppercase character if Match case is selected in Options.
- Examples + Examples -e([:digit:])? -- finds 'e' followed by zero or one digit. Note that currently all named character classes like [:digit:] must be enclosed in parentheses.issue 64368 and 113035 -^([:digit:])$ -- finds lines or cells with exactly one digit. +e([:digit:])? -- finds 'e' followed by zero or one digit. Note that currently all named character classes like [:digit:] must be enclosed in parentheses.issue 64368 and 113035 +^([:digit:])$ -- finds lines or cells with exactly one digit. - You can combine the search terms to form complex searches. - To find three-digit numbers alone in a paragraph - ^[:digit:]{3}$ - ^ means the match has to be at the start of a paragraph, - [:digit:] matches any decimal digit, - {3} means there must be exactly 3 copies of "digit", - $ means the match must end a paragraph. + You can combine the search terms to form complex searches. + To find three-digit numbers alone in a paragraph + ^[:digit:]{3}$ + ^ means the match has to be at the start of a paragraph, + [:digit:] matches any decimal digit, + {3} means there must be exactly 3 copies of "digit", + $ means the match must end a paragraph.
@@ -340,8 +339,8 @@ -Wiki page about regular expressions in Writer - Wiki page about regular expressions in Calc +Wiki page about regular expressions in Writer + Wiki page about regular expressions in Calc
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02100100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02100100.xhp index 3118324244..a7d6ad440c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02100100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02100100.xhp @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ -Similarity Search +Similarity Search Find terms that are similar to the Find text. Select this checkbox, and then click the Similarities button to define the similarity options.
For example, a similarity search can find words that differ from the Find text by two characters. @@ -44,20 +44,20 @@
Similarities -Set the options for the similarity search. -Settings -Define the criteria for determining if a word is similar to the search term. +Set the options for the similarity search. +Settings +Define the criteria for determining if a word is similar to the search term. -Exchange characters -Enter the number of characters in the search term that can be exchanged. For example, if you specify 2 exchanged characters, "sweep" and "creep" are considered similar. +Exchange characters +Enter the number of characters in the search term that can be exchanged. For example, if you specify 2 exchanged characters, "sweep" and "creep" are considered similar. -Add characters -Enter the maximum number of characters by which a word can exceed the number of characters in the search term. +Add characters +Enter the maximum number of characters by which a word can exceed the number of characters in the search term. -Remove characters -Enter the number of characters by which a word can be shorter than the search term. +Remove characters +Enter the number of characters by which a word can be shorter than the search term. -Combine -Searches for a term that matches any combination of the similarity search settings. +Combine +Searches for a term that matches any combination of the similarity search settings. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02100200.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02100200.xhp index beb47a832e..f8a3c65888 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02100200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02100200.xhp @@ -30,139 +30,139 @@ -Attributes -Choose the text attributes that you want to search for. For example, if you search for the Font attribute, all instances of text that do not use the default font are found. All text that has a directly coded font attribute, and all text where a style switches the font attribute, are found. +Attributes +Choose the text attributes that you want to search for. For example, if you search for the Font attribute, all instances of text that do not use the default font are found. All text that has a directly coded font attribute, and all text where a style switches the font attribute, are found. -Options -Select the attributes that you want to search for. +Options +Select the attributes that you want to search for.
-Keep with Next Paragraph -Finds the Keep With Next Paragraph attribute. +Keep with Next Paragraph +Finds the Keep With Next Paragraph attribute.
-Split Paragraph -Finds the Do not split paragraph attribute. +Split Paragraph +Finds the Do not split paragraph attribute.
-Spacing -Finds the Spacing (top, bottom) attribute. +Spacing +Finds the Spacing (top, bottom) attribute.
-Alignment -Finds the Alignment (left, right, centered, justified) attribute. +Alignment +Finds the Alignment (left, right, centered, justified) attribute.
-Effects -Finds characters that use the Capital, Lowercase, Small capitals, and Title character attributes. +Effects +Finds characters that use the Capital, Lowercase, Small capitals, and Title character attributes.
-Blinking -Finds characters use the Blinking attribute. +Blinking +Finds characters use the Blinking attribute.
-Strikethrough -Finds characters that use the Strikethrough (single or double) attribute. +Strikethrough +Finds characters that use the Strikethrough (single or double) attribute.
-Indent -Finds the Indent (from left, from right, first line) attribute. +Indent +Finds the Indent (from left, from right, first line) attribute.
-Widows -Finds the Widow Control attribute. +Widows +Finds the Widow Control attribute.
-Kerning -Finds Spacing (standard, expanded, condensed) attributes and Pair Kerning. +Kerning +Finds Spacing (standard, expanded, condensed) attributes and Pair Kerning.
-Outline -Finds the Outline attribute. +Outline +Finds the Outline attribute.
-Position -Finds characters using the Normal, Superscript or Subscript attributes. +Position +Finds characters using the Normal, Superscript or Subscript attributes.
-Register-true -Finds the Register-true attribute. +Register-true +Finds the Register-true attribute.
-Relief -Finds the Relief attribute. +Relief +Finds the Relief attribute.
-Rotation -Finds the Rotation attribute. +Rotation +Finds the Rotation attribute.
-Shadowed -Finds the Shadowed attribute. +Shadowed +Finds the Shadowed attribute.
-Font -Finds any instance where the default font was changed. +Font +Finds any instance where the default font was changed.
-Font Color -Finds any instance where the default font color was changed. +Font Color +Finds any instance where the default font color was changed.
-Font Size -Finds the Font size/Font height attribute. +Font Size +Finds the Font size/Font height attribute.
-Font Weight -Finds the Bold or the Bold and Italic attribute. +Font Weight +Finds the Bold or the Bold and Italic attribute.
-Font Posture -Finds the Italic or the Bold and Italic attribute. +Font Posture +Finds the Italic or the Bold and Italic attribute.
-Orphans -Finds the Orphan Control attribute. +Orphans +Finds the Orphan Control attribute.
-Page Style -Finds the Break With Page Style attribute. +Page Style +Finds the Break With Page Style attribute.
-Hyphenation -Finds the Hyphenation attribute. +Hyphenation +Finds the Hyphenation attribute.
-Scale -Finds the Scale attribute. +Scale +Finds the Scale attribute.
-Language -Finds the Language attribute (for spelling). +Language +Finds the Language attribute (for spelling).
-Tab Stops -Finds paragraphs that use an additional tab set. +Tab Stops +Finds paragraphs that use an additional tab set.
-Underline -Finds characters that use the Underlined attribute (single, double, or dotted). +Underline +Finds characters that use the Underlined attribute (single, double, or dotted).
-Vertical text alignment -Finds the Vertical text alignment attribute. +Vertical text alignment +Finds the Vertical text alignment attribute.
-Individual Words -Finds individual words that use the underlined or the strikethrough attribute. +Individual Words +Finds individual words that use the underlined or the strikethrough attribute.
-Character background -Finds characters that use the Background attribute. +Character background +Finds characters that use the Background attribute.
-Line Spacing -Finds the Line spacing (single line, 1.5 lines, double, proportional, at least, lead) attribute. +Line Spacing +Finds the Line spacing (single line, 1.5 lines, double, proportional, at least, lead) attribute.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02100300.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02100300.xhp index f5065e37c6..386c49a83e 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02100300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02100300.xhp @@ -30,8 +30,8 @@ -Text Format (Search) -Finds specific text formatting features, such as font types, font effects, and text flow characteristics. +Text Format (Search) +Finds specific text formatting features, such as font types, font effects, and text flow characteristics.
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ The search criteria for attributes are listed below the Find box. You do not need to specify a search text in the Find box when you search and replace formatting. To define a replacement format, click in the Replace box, and then click the Format button. -Use the Text Format (Search) or the Text Format (Replace) to define your formatting search criteria. These dialogs contain the following tab pages: +Use the Text Format (Search) or the Text Format (Replace) to define your formatting search criteria. These dialogs contain the following tab pages: @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@
-Attributes +Attributes
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02110000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02110000.xhp index 5f8d75863f..d2da347bad 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02110000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02110000.xhp @@ -27,171 +27,156 @@ - Navigator for Master Documents - In a master document, you can switch the Navigator between normal view and master view. + Navigator for Master Documents + In a master document, you can switch the Navigator between normal view and master view. -The Navigator lists the main components of the master document. If you rest the mouse pointer over a name of a sub-document in the list, the full path of the sub-document is displayed. - The master view in the Navigator displays the following icons: - Toggle Master View - Switches between master view and normal view. +The Navigator lists the main components of the master document. If you rest the mouse pointer over a name of a sub-document in the list, the full path of the sub-document is displayed. + The master view in the Navigator displays the following icons: + Toggle Master View + Switches between master view and normal view. - + Icon - Toggle Master View + Toggle Master View
-Edit - Edit the contents of the component selected in the Navigator list. If the selection is a file, the file is opened for editing. If the selection is an index, the index dialog is opened. +Edit + Edit the contents of the component selected in the Navigator list. If the selection is a file, the file is opened for editing. If the selection is an index, the index dialog is opened. - + Icon - Edit + Edit
-Update - Click and choose the contents that you want to update. +Update + Click and choose the contents that you want to update. - + Icon - Update + Update
-Selection - Updates the contents of the selection. +Selection + Updates the contents of the selection. -Indexes - Updates all indexes. +Indexes + Updates all indexes. -Links - Updates all links. +Links + Updates all links. -All - Updates all contents. +All + Updates all contents. -Edit link - This command is found by right-clicking an inserted file in the Navigator.Changes the link properties for the selected file. +Edit link + This command is found by right-clicking an inserted file in the Navigator.Changes the link properties for the selected file. -Insert - Inserts a file, an index, or a new document into the master document. - You can also insert files into the master document by dragging a file from your desktop and dropping on the master view of the Navigator. +Insert + Inserts a file, an index, or a new document into the master document. + You can also insert files into the master document by dragging a file from your desktop and dropping on the master view of the Navigator. - + Icon - Insert + Insert
-Index - Inserts an index or a table of contents into the master document. +Index + Inserts an index or a table of contents into the master document. -File - Inserts one or more existing files into the master document. +File + Inserts one or more existing files into the master document. -New Document - Creates and inserts a new sub-document. When you create a new document, you are prompted to enter the file name and the location where you want to save the document. +New Document + Creates and inserts a new sub-document. When you create a new document, you are prompted to enter the file name and the location where you want to save the document. -Text - Inserts a new paragraph in the master document where you can enter text. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.i81372 +Text + Inserts a new paragraph in the master document where you can enter text. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.i81372 -Save Contents as well - Saves a copy of the contents of the linked files in the master document. This ensures that the current contents are available when the linked files cannot be accessed. +Save Contents as well + Saves a copy of the contents of the linked files in the master document. This ensures that the current contents are available when the linked files cannot be accessed. - + Icon - Save Contents as well + Save Contents as well
-Move Down - Moves the selection down one position in the Navigator list. You can also move entries by dragging and dropping them in the list. If you move a text section onto another text section, the text sections are merged. +Move Down + Moves the selection down one position in the Navigator list. You can also move entries by dragging and dropping them in the list. If you move a text section onto another text section, the text sections are merged. - + Icon - Move Down + Move Down
-Move Up - Moves the selection up one position in the Navigator list. You can also move entries by dragging and dropping them in the list. If you move a text section onto another text section, the text sections are merged. +Move Up + Moves the selection up one position in the Navigator list. You can also move entries by dragging and dropping them in the list. If you move a text section onto another text section, the text sections are merged. - + Icon - Move Up + Move Up
-Delete - Deletes the selection from the Navigator list. +Delete + Deletes the selection from the Navigator list. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02180100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02180100.xhp index 6a5445b6aa..d2723ad2ab 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02180100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02180100.xhp @@ -34,18 +34,18 @@ links; modifying changing; links MW changed "modifying;..." to "changing;..." -Modify Links -Change the properties for the selected DDE link. +Modify Links +Change the properties for the selected DDE link.
-Edit Links -Lets you set the properties for the selected link. -Application: -Lists the application that last saved the source file. -File: -Lists the path to the source file. -Section -Lists the section that the link refers to in the source file. If you want, you can enter a new section here. +Edit Links +Lets you set the properties for the selected link. +Application: +Lists the application that last saved the source file. +File: +Lists the path to the source file. +Section +Lists the section that the link refers to in the source file. If you want, you can enter a new section here. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02200100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02200100.xhp index e735b13369..c3ca513d87 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02200100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02200100.xhp @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
- objects; editingediting; objectsEdit + objects; editingediting; objectsEdit Lets you edit a selected object in your file that you inserted with the Insert – Object command.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02200200.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02200200.xhp index bb61444ad9..a04bc37362 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02200200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02200200.xhp @@ -34,13 +34,13 @@ objects; opening opening; objects -Open -Opens the selected OLE object with the program that the object was created in. +Open +Opens the selected OLE object with the program that the object was created in.
-This menu command is inserted into Edit – Objects submenu by the application that created the linked object. Depending on the application, the “Open” command for the OLE object might have a different name. -After you have completed your changes, close the source file for the OLE object. The OLE object is then updated in the container document. +This menu command is inserted into Edit – Objects submenu by the application that created the linked object. Depending on the application, the “Open” command for the OLE object might have a different name. +After you have completed your changes, close the source file for the OLE object. The OLE object is then updated in the container document. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp index 7aa48ebe99..9e03fa2afa 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp @@ -32,28 +32,27 @@ ImageMap;hotspot properties MW inserted index entries -Description - Lists the properties for the selected hotspot. +Description + Lists the properties for the selected hotspot.
- Hyperlink - Lists the properties of the URL that is attached to the hotspot. + Hyperlink + Lists the properties of the URL that is attached to the hotspot. -URL: - Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot. If you want to jump to a named anchor within the current document, the address should be of the form "file:///C/[current_document_name]#anchor_name". +URL: + Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot. If you want to jump to a named anchor within the current document, the address should be of the form "file:///C/[current_document_name]#anchor_name". -Alternative text: - Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser. If you do not enter any text, the Address is displayed. +Alternative text: + Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser. If you do not enter any text, the Address is displayed. -Frame: - Enter the name of the target frame that you want to open the URL in. You can also select a standard frame name that is recognized by all browsers from the list. +Frame: + Enter the name of the target frame that you want to open the URL in. You can also select a standard frame name that is recognized by all browsers from the list. -Name: - Enter a name for the image. +Name: + Enter a name for the image. -Description - Enter a description for the hotspot. +Description + Enter a description for the hotspot. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02230100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02230100.xhp index 3ad803e11d..804dd40576 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02230100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02230100.xhp @@ -35,71 +35,71 @@ Record Changes -Tracks each change that is made in the current document by author and date. +Tracks each change that is made in the current document by author and date.
If you choose Edit - Track Changes - Show Changes, the lines containing changed text passages are indicated by a vertical line in the left page margin. You can set the properties of the vertical line and the other markup elements by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes in the Options dialog box. - + You can set the properties of the markup elements by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes in the Options dialog box. -The following changes are tracked when the record changes command is active: +The following changes are tracked when the record changes command is active: -Paste and delete text +Paste and delete text -Move paragraphs +Move paragraphs -Sort text +Sort text -Find and replace text +Find and replace text -Insert attributes that are one character wide, for example, fields and footnotes. +Insert attributes that are one character wide, for example, fields and footnotes. -Insert sheets, ranges +Insert sheets, ranges -Insert document +Insert document -Insert AutoText +Insert AutoText -Insert from clipboard +Insert from clipboard -Change cell contents by insertions and deletions +Change cell contents by insertions and deletions -Insert or delete columns and rows +Insert or delete columns and rows -Insert sheets +Insert sheets -Cut, copy and paste through the clipboard +Cut, copy and paste through the clipboard -Move by dragging and dropping +Move by dragging and dropping -When the record changes command is active, you cannot delete, move, merge, split, or copy cells or delete sheets. +When the record changes command is active, you cannot delete, move, merge, split, or copy cells or delete sheets. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02230150.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02230150.xhp index 09d22ba6fe..919c32420f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02230150.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02230150.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ -Protect Changes -Prevents a user from deactivating the record changes feature, or from accepting or rejecting changes unless the user enters a password. +Protect Changes +Prevents a user from deactivating the record changes feature, or from accepting or rejecting changes unless the user enters a password.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02230200.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02230200.xhp index bc18bcea4b..cc86b27c43 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02230200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02230200.xhp @@ -37,34 +37,34 @@ -Show Changes -Shows or hides recorded changes. +Show Changes +Shows or hides recorded changes.
-You can change the display properties of the markup elements by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes in the Options dialog box.%PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes in the Options dialog box. -When you rest the mouse pointer over a change markup in the document, a Tip displays the author and the date and time that the change was made. If the Extended Tips are activated, the type of change and any attached comments are also displayed. +You can change the display properties of the markup elements by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes in the Options dialog box.%PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes in the Options dialog box. +When you rest the mouse pointer over a change markup in the document, a Tip displays the author and the date and time that the change was made. If the Extended Tips are activated, the type of change and any attached comments are also displayed. -Show changes in spreadsheet -Shows or hides recorded changes. +Show changes in spreadsheet +Shows or hides recorded changes. -Show accepted changes -Shows or hides the changes that were accepted. +Show accepted changes +Shows or hides the changes that were accepted. -Show rejected changes +Show rejected changes -Shows or hides the changes that were rejected. +Shows or hides the changes that were rejected.
-Comments +Comments
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02230300.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02230300.xhp index d21a688fa8..2ba1564fb6 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02230300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02230300.xhp @@ -33,16 +33,16 @@ -Comment -Enter a comment for the recorded change. +Comment +Enter a comment for the recorded change.
-You can attach a comment when the cursor is in a changed text passage +You can attach a comment when the cursor is in a changed text passage the changed cell is selected , or in the Manage Changes dialog. -Comments are displayed as callouts in the sheet when you rest your mouse pointer over a cell with a recorded change. You can also view comments that are attached to a changed cell in the changes list in the Manage Changes dialog. +Comments are displayed as callouts in the sheet when you rest your mouse pointer over a cell with a recorded change. You can also view comments that are attached to a changed cell in the changes list in the Manage Changes dialog. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02230400.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02230400.xhp index 47e5d959d6..ba1057a28b 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02230400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02230400.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ -Manage changes - Accept or reject recorded changes. +Manage changes + Accept or reject recorded changes.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02230401.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02230401.xhp index 6ffca38bcf..9ca500b566 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02230401.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02230401.xhp @@ -29,146 +29,132 @@
-List -Accept or reject individual changes. +List +Accept or reject individual changes.
-The List tab displays all of the changes that were recorded in the current document. If you want to filter this list, click the Filter tab, and then select your filter criteria. If the list contains nested changes, the dependencies are shown regardless of the filter. +The List tab displays all of the changes that were recorded in the current document. If you want to filter this list, click the Filter tab, and then select your filter criteria. If the list contains nested changes, the dependencies are shown regardless of the filter. -Nested changes occur where changes made by different authors overlap. +Nested changes occur where changes made by different authors overlap. -Click the plus sign beside an entry in the list to view all of the changes that were recorded for a cell. +Click the plus sign beside an entry in the list to view all of the changes that were recorded for a cell. -If one of the nested changes for a cell matches a filter criterion, all of the changes for the cell are displayed. When you filter the change list, the entries in the list appear in different colors according to the following table: +If one of the nested changes for a cell matches a filter criterion, all of the changes for the cell are displayed. When you filter the change list, the entries in the list appear in different colors according to the following table: -Color +Color -Meaning +Meaning -black +black -The entry matches a filter criterion. +The entry matches a filter criterion. -blue +blue -One or more subentries matches a filter criterion. +One or more subentries matches a filter criterion. -gray +gray -The subentry does not match a filter criterion. +The subentry does not match a filter criterion. -green +green -The subentry matches a filter criterion. +The subentry matches a filter criterion.
-Selection field -Lists the changes that were recorded in the document. When you select an entry in the list, the change is highlighted in the document. To sort the list, click a column heading. Hold down CommandCtrl while you click to select multiple entries in the list. -To edit the comment for an entry in the list, right-click the entry, and then choose Edit - Comment. -After you accept or reject a change, the entries of the list are re-ordered according to "Accepted" or "Rejected" status. +Selection field +Lists the changes that were recorded in the document. When you select an entry in the list, the change is highlighted in the document. To sort the list, click a column heading. Hold down CommandCtrl while you click to select multiple entries in the list. +To edit the comment for an entry in the list, right-click the entry, and then choose Edit - Comment. +After you accept or reject a change, the entries of the list are re-ordered according to "Accepted" or "Rejected" status. -Action -Lists the changes that were made in the document. -Position +Action +Lists the changes that were made in the document. +Position -Lists the cells with contents that were changed. +Lists the cells with contents that were changed. -Author - Lists the user who made the change. +Author + Lists the user who made the change. -Date - Lists the date and time that the change was made. +Date + Lists the date and time that the change was made. -Comment - Lists the comments that are attached to the change. +Comment + Lists the comments that are attached to the change. -Accept - Accepts the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document. +Accept + Accepts the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document. -Reject - Rejects the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document. +Reject + Rejects the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document. -Accept All - Accepts all of the changes and removes the highlighting from the document. +Accept All + Accepts all of the changes and removes the highlighting from the document. -Reject All - Rejects all of the changes and removes the highlighting from the document. +Reject All + Rejects all of the changes and removes the highlighting from the document. -To reverse the acceptance or rejection of a change, choose Undo on the Edit menu. +To reverse the acceptance or rejection of a change, choose Undo on the Edit menu. -Undo +Undo -If you made changes by choosing Format - AutoCorrect - Apply and Edit Changes, the Undo button appears in the dialog. Reverse the last Accept or Reject command. +If you made changes by choosing Format - AutoCorrect - Apply and Edit Changes, the Undo button appears in the dialog. Reverse the last Accept or Reject command. - There are additional commands in the context menu of the list: + There are additional commands in the context menu of the list: -Edit comment - Edit the comment for the selected change. - Sort - Sorts the list according to the column headings. +Edit comment + Edit the comment for the selected change. + Sort + Sorts the list according to the column headings. -Action - Sorts the list according to the type of change. +Action + Sorts the list according to the type of change. -Author - Sorts the list according to the Author. +Author + Sorts the list according to the Author. -Date - Sorts the list according to the date and time. +Date + Sorts the list according to the date and time. -Comment - Sorts the list according to the comments that are attached to the changes. +Comment + Sorts the list according to the comments that are attached to the changes. -Document Position - Sorts the list in a descending order according to the position of the changes in the document. This is the default sorting method. +Document Position + Sorts the list in a descending order according to the position of the changes in the document. This is the default sorting method. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02230402.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02230402.xhp index 2f99a16ec0..e5411a13de 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02230402.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02230402.xhp @@ -30,8 +30,8 @@
-Filter -Set the criteria for filtering the list of changes on the List tab. +Filter +Set the criteria for filtering the list of changes on the List tab.
@@ -43,74 +43,74 @@ -Date -Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify. +Date +Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify. -Set Date/Time +Set Date/Time - + Icon -Enters the current date and time into the corresponding boxes. +Enters the current date and time into the corresponding boxes.
-Author -Filters the list of changes according to the name of the author that you select from the list. +Author +Filters the list of changes according to the name of the author that you select from the list. -Range +Range -Filters the list of changes according to the range of cells that you specify. To select a range of cells in your sheet, click the Set Reference button (...). +Filters the list of changes according to the range of cells that you specify. To select a range of cells in your sheet, click the Set Reference button (...). -Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter. -Set Reference +Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter. +Set Reference - + Icon -Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter. +Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter.
-Shrink/Max +Shrink/Max - + Icon -Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter, and then click this button to return to the filter list. +Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter, and then click this button to return to the filter list.
-Action +Action -Filters the list of changes according to the type of change that you select in the Action box. +Filters the list of changes according to the type of change that you select in the Action box. -Comment -Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter. -You can also use regular expressions (wildcards) when you filter the comments. +Comment +Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter. +You can also use regular expressions (wildcards) when you filter the comments.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02230500.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02230500.xhp index 2cd529592b..b9a264666e 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02230500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02230500.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Merge Document - Imports changes made to copies of the same document into the original document. Changes made to footnotes, headers, frames and fields are ignored. Identical changes are merged automatically. +Merge Document + Imports changes made to copies of the same document into the original document. Changes made to footnotes, headers, frames and fields are ignored. Identical changes are merged automatically.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02240000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02240000.xhp index 26e516e86f..11d19f0cb7 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02240000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02240000.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@
-Compare Document - +Compare Document + Compares the current document with a document that you select. The contents of the selected document are marked as deletions in the dialog that opens. If you want, you can insert the contents of the selected file into the current document by selecting the relevant deleted entries, clicking Reject, and then clicking Insert.
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ -The contents of footnotes, headers, frames and fields are ignored. +The contents of footnotes, headers, frames and fields are ignored. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/02250000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/02250000.xhp index fe85275b7c..cc3066ef1a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/02250000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/02250000.xhp @@ -31,35 +31,35 @@ -Bibliography Database +Bibliography Database
- Insert, delete, edit, and organize records in the bibliography database. + Insert, delete, edit, and organize records in the bibliography database.
- If the fields in your database are read-only, ensure that the data source view is closed. - The supplied bibliography database contains sample records of books. - Use the toolbar to select a table in the bibliography database, to search for records, or to sort the records using filters. + If the fields in your database are read-only, ensure that the data source view is closed. + The supplied bibliography database contains sample records of books. + Use the toolbar to select a table in the bibliography database, to search for records, or to sort the records using filters. -Lists the available tables in the current database. Click a name in the list to display the records for that table.removed icons; converted to hidden help text +Lists the available tables in the current database. Click a name in the list to display the records for that table.removed icons; converted to hidden help text -Go to the first record in the table. +Go to the first record in the table. -Go to the previous record in the table. +Go to the previous record in the table. -Go to the next record in the table. +Go to the next record in the table. -Go to the last record in the table. +Go to the last record in the table. -Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter. +Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter. -Inserting a New Record - Inserts a new record into the current table. To create a record, click the asterisk (*) button at the bottom of the table view. An empty row is added at the end of the table. +Inserting a New Record + Inserts a new record into the current table. To create a record, click the asterisk (*) button at the bottom of the table view. An empty row is added at the end of the table. -Select the type of record that you want to create. $[officename] inserts a number in the Type column of the record that corresponds to the type that you select here. +Select the type of record that you want to create. $[officename] inserts a number in the Type column of the record that corresponds to the type that you select here. -Enter a short name for the record. The short name appears in the Identifier column in the list of records. +Enter a short name for the record. The short name appears in the Identifier column in the list of records. @@ -84,44 +84,38 @@ -Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table. - Finding and Filtering Records - You can search for records by matching a keyword to a field entry. +Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table. + Finding and Filtering Records + You can search for records by matching a keyword to a field entry. -Entering Search key - Type the information that you want to search for, and then press Enter. To change the filter options for the search, long-click the AutoFilter icon, and then select a different data field. You can use wildcards such as % or * for any number of characters, and _ or ? for one character in your search. To display all of the records in the table, clear this box, and then press Enter. +Entering Search key + Type the information that you want to search for, and then press Enter. To change the filter options for the search, long-click the AutoFilter icon, and then select a different data field. You can use wildcards such as % or * for any number of characters, and _ or ? for one character in your search. To display all of the records in the table, clear this box, and then press Enter. -AutoFilter - Long-click to select the data field that you want to search using the term that you entered in the Search Key box. You can only search one data field. - The list of table records is automatically updated to match the new filter settings. +AutoFilter + Long-click to select the data field that you want to search using the term that you entered in the Search Key box. You can only search one data field. + The list of table records is automatically updated to match the new filter settings. -Use the Standard Filter to refine and to combine AutoFilter search options. +Use the Standard Filter to refine and to combine AutoFilter search options. -To display all of the records in a table, click the Reset Filter icon. +To display all of the records in a table, click the Reset Filter icon. -Deleting a Record - To delete a record in the current table, right-click the row header of the record, and then select Delete. Deletes the selected record. - Changing the data source +Deleting a Record + To delete a record in the current table, right-click the row header of the record, and then select Delete. Deletes the selected record. + Changing the data source -Data Source - Select the data source for the bibliography database. +Data Source + Select the data source for the bibliography database. -Column Arrangement - Lets you map the column headings to data fields from a different data source. To define a different data source for your bibliography, click the Data Source button on the record Object Bar. -Select the data field that you want to map to the current Column name. To change the available data fields, select a different data source for your bibliography. +Column Arrangement + Lets you map the column headings to data fields from a different data source. To define a different data source for your bibliography, click the Data Source button on the record Object Bar. +Select the data field that you want to map to the current Column name. To change the available data fields, select a different data source for your bibliography. -Deletes the current record. - Lets you choose a different data source for your bibliography. +Deletes the current record. + Lets you choose a different data source for your bibliography. -Inserts a new record into the current table. +Inserts a new record into the current table. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/03020000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/03020000.xhp index 9fa59b820b..2b0f4ff3a9 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/03020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/03020000.xhp @@ -35,8 +35,8 @@ standard bar on/off mw made "standard bar;..." a one level entry -Standard Bar -Shows or hides the Standard Bar. +Standard Bar +Shows or hides the Standard Bar.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/03050000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/03050000.xhp index 424e9d6e96..d3c9afa14e 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/03050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/03050000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ tools bar -Tools Bar -Shows or hides the Tools bar. +Tools Bar +Shows or hides the Tools bar.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/03150100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/03150100.xhp index 744a1047ea..241ca35ffc 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/03150100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/03150100.xhp @@ -32,15 +32,15 @@ - Confirm Delete - Confirms or cancels the deletion. - Delete - Performs the deletion in the current file. - Delete All - Performs the deletion in all selected files. - Do Not Delete - Rejects the deletion for the current file. - Cancel - Cancels the deletion in the current file and any other selected files. + Confirm Delete + Confirms or cancels the deletion. + Delete + Performs the deletion in the current file. + Delete All + Performs the deletion in all selected files. + Do Not Delete + Rejects the deletion for the current file. + Cancel + Cancels the deletion in the current file and any other selected files. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/03170000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/03170000.xhp index 5e5a1573af..e1b7204761 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/03170000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/03170000.xhp @@ -36,15 +36,15 @@ -Color Bar -Show or hides the Color Bar. To modify or change the color table that is displayed, choose Format - Area, and then click on the Colors tab. +Color Bar +Show or hides the Color Bar. To modify or change the color table that is displayed, choose Format - Area, and then click on the Colors tab.
-Click the color that you want to use. To change the fill color of an object in the current file, select the object and then click a color. To change the line color of the selected object, right-click a color. To change the color of text in a text object, double-click the text-object, select the text, and then click a color. -You can also drag a color from the Color Bar and drop it on a draw object on your slide. -To detach the Color Bar, click on a gray area of the toolbar and then drag. To reattach the Color Bar, drag the title bar of the toolbar to the edge of the window. +Click the color that you want to use. To change the fill color of an object in the current file, select the object and then click a color. To change the line color of the selected object, right-click a color. To change the color of text in a text object, double-click the text-object, select the text, and then click a color. +You can also drag a color from the Color Bar and drop it on a draw object on your slide. +To detach the Color Bar, click on a gray area of the toolbar and then drag. To reattach the Color Bar, drag the title bar of the toolbar to the edge of the window. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/04060000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/04060000.xhp index 0502b5a27f..150ebc1351 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/04060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/04060000.xhp @@ -33,18 +33,18 @@
-Scan -Inserts a scanned image into your document. +Scan +Inserts a scanned image into your document.
-To insert a scanned image, the driver for your scanner must be installed. Under UNIX systems, install the SANE package found at http://www.mostang.com/sane/. The SANE package must use the same libc as $[officename]. +To insert a scanned image, the driver for your scanner must be installed. Under UNIX systems, install the SANE package found at http://www.mostang.com/sane/. The SANE package must use the same libc as $[officename].
-Select Source +Select Source -Request +Request
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/04060100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/04060100.xhp index fab7f396f3..0054935f97 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/04060100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/04060100.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ -Select Source - Selects the scanner that you want to use. +Select Source + Selects the scanner that you want to use.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/04060200.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/04060200.xhp index 9c9e672c48..2724eb090b 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/04060200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/04060200.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ -Request - Scans an image, and then inserts the result into the document. The scanning dialog is provided by the manufacturer of the scanner. For an explanation of the dialog please refer to the documentation on your scanner. +Request + Scans an image, and then inserts the result into the document. The scanning dialog is provided by the manufacturer of the scanner. For an explanation of the dialog please refer to the documentation on your scanner.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/04150100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/04150100.xhp index 73b56cc5c7..647636f3da 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/04150100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/04150100.xhp @@ -34,28 +34,28 @@ objects; inserting OLE objects -Insert OLE Object -Inserts an OLE object into the current document. The OLE object is inserted as a link or an embedded object. +Insert OLE Object +Inserts an OLE object into the current document. The OLE object is inserted as a link or an embedded object.
-To speed up the display of the document, OLE objects are kept in the program cache. If you want to change the cache settings, choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Memory. -You cannot use the clipboard or drag and drop to move OLE objects to other files. -Empty and inactive OLE objects are transparent. -Create new -Creates a new OLE object based on the object type that you select. -Object type -Select the type of document that you want to create. -Create from file -Creates an OLE object from an existing file. -File -Choose the file that you want to insert as an OLE object. -File -Enter the name of the file that you want to link or embed, or click Search, to locate the file. -Search... -Locate the file that you want to insert, and then click Open. -Link to file -Enable this checkbox to insert the OLE object as a link to the original file. If this checkbox is not enabled, the OLE object will be embedded into your document.which consequences? cannot find featuremail or spec doc +To speed up the display of the document, OLE objects are kept in the program cache. If you want to change the cache settings, choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Memory. +You cannot use the clipboard or drag and drop to move OLE objects to other files. +Empty and inactive OLE objects are transparent. +Create new +Creates a new OLE object based on the object type that you select. +Object type +Select the type of document that you want to create. +Create from file +Creates an OLE object from an existing file. +File +Choose the file that you want to insert as an OLE object. +File +Enter the name of the file that you want to link or embed, or click Search, to locate the file. +Search... +Locate the file that you want to insert, and then click Open. +Link to file +Enable this checkbox to insert the OLE object as a link to the original file. If this checkbox is not enabled, the OLE object will be embedded into your document.which consequences? cannot find featuremail or spec doc diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/04160300.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/04160300.xhp index 21a929fa51..f88c43825c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/04160300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/04160300.xhp @@ -42,8 +42,8 @@ -Formula -Inserts a formula into the current document. +Formula +Inserts a formula into the current document. For more information open the $[officename] Math Help.
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@
-Formulas +Formulas
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/04160500.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/04160500.xhp index b8b1270010..bb881f64e8 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/04160500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/04160500.xhp @@ -34,14 +34,14 @@ inserting; floating frames -Insert Floating Frame -Inserts a floating frame into the current document. Floating frames are used in HTML documents to display the contents of another file. +Insert Floating Frame +Inserts a floating frame into the current document. Floating frames are used in HTML documents to display the contents of another file.
-If you want to create HTML pages that use floating frames, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML compatibility, and then select the "MS Internet Explorer" option. The floating frame is bounded by <IFRAME> and </IFRAME> tags. +If you want to create HTML pages that use floating frames, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML compatibility, and then select the "MS Internet Explorer" option. The floating frame is bounded by <IFRAME> and </IFRAME> tags.
-Floating frame properties +Floating frame properties
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05010000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05010000.xhp index 8a5c16a996..46e25b0972 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05010000.xhp @@ -42,16 +42,16 @@ -Clear Direct Formatting -Removes direct formatting and formatting by character styles from the selection. +Clear Direct Formatting +Removes direct formatting and formatting by character styles from the selection.
- + Direct formatting is formatting that you applied without using styles, such as setting bold typeface by clicking the Bold icon.
-To stop applying a direct format, such as underlining, while you type new text at the end of a line, press Shift+Ctrl+X. +To stop applying a direct format, such as underlining, while you type new text at the end of a line, press Shift+Ctrl+X. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05020000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05020000.xhp index ffd3a93b89..9371392201 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05020000.xhp @@ -32,13 +32,13 @@ -Character -Changes the font and the font formatting for the selected characters. +Character +Changes the font and the font formatting for the selected characters.
-Font +Font @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ -Hyperlink +Hyperlink diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp index 07e343c677..6b4d800770 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp @@ -43,37 +43,37 @@ characters; enabling CTL and Asian characters -Characters +Characters Font
-Specify the formatting and the font that you want to apply. +Specify the formatting and the font that you want to apply.
-The changes are applied to the current selection, to the entire word that contains the cursor, or to the new text that you type. +The changes are applied to the current selection, to the entire word that contains the cursor, or to the new text that you type.
-Depending on your language settings, you can change the formatting for the following font types: +Depending on your language settings, you can change the formatting for the following font types: -Western text font - Latin character sets. +Western text font - Latin character sets. -Asian text font - Chinese, Japanese, or Korean character sets +Asian text font - Chinese, Japanese, or Korean character sets -Complex text layout font - right-to-left text direction +Complex text layout font - right-to-left text direction -To enable support for complex text layout and Asian character sets, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, and then select the Enabled box in the corresponding area. +To enable support for complex text layout and Asian character sets, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, and then select the Enabled box in the corresponding area. Font dialog -Font -Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list. +Font +Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list. @@ -81,8 +81,8 @@ -Typeface -Select the formatting that you want to apply. +Typeface +Select the formatting that you want to apply. @@ -90,29 +90,29 @@ -Size -Enter or select the font size that you want to apply. For scalable fonts, you can also enter decimal values. -If you are creating a Style that is based on another Style, you can enter a percentage value or a point value (for example, -2pt or +5pt). +Size +Enter or select the font size that you want to apply. For scalable fonts, you can also enter decimal values. +If you are creating a Style that is based on another Style, you can enter a percentage value or a point value (for example, -2pt or +5pt). -Language -Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them. -If the language list consists of an editable combo box, you can enter a valid BCP 47 language tag if the language you want to assign is not available from the selectable list. -For language tag details please see the For users section on the langtag.net web site. +Language +Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them. +If the language list consists of an editable combo box, you can enter a valid BCP 47 language tag if the language you want to assign is not available from the selectable list. +For language tag details please see the For users section on the langtag.net web site. -You can also change the locale setting for cells (choose Format - Cells – Numbers). +You can also change the locale setting for cells (choose Format - Cells – Numbers).
-Asian languages support -Complex text layout support +Asian languages support +Complex text layout support
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp index 2238be805e..ba8bd9bc8a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp @@ -49,140 +49,128 @@ colors;ignored text color ufi inserted "fonts;colors"MW copied two entries about font colors to text/shared/guide/text_colormw added 3 index entries about ignored font colors -Font Effects - Specify the font effects that you want to use. +Font Effects + Specify the font effects that you want to use.
-Font Color - Sets the color for the selected text. If you select Automatic, the text color is set to black for light backgrounds and to white for dark backgrounds. +Font Color + Sets the color for the selected text. If you select Automatic, the text color is set to black for light backgrounds and to white for dark backgrounds. - To change the color of a text selection, select the text that you want to change, and click the Font Color icon. To apply a different color, click the arrow next to the Font Color icon, and then select the color that you want to use. + To change the color of a text selection, select the text that you want to change, and click the Font Color icon. To apply a different color, click the arrow next to the Font Color icon, and then select the color that you want to use. - If you click the Font Color icon before you select text, the paint can cursor appears. To change the color of text, select the text with the paint can cursor. To change the color of a single word, double-click in a word. To apply a different color, click the arrow next to the Font Color icon, and then select the color that you want to use. + If you click the Font Color icon before you select text, the paint can cursor appears. To change the color of text, select the text with the paint can cursor. To change the color of a single word, double-click in a word. To apply a different color, click the arrow next to the Font Color icon, and then select the color that you want to use. - To undo the last change, right-click. + To undo the last change, right-click. - To exit the paint can mode, click once, or press the Escape key. + To exit the paint can mode, click once, or press the Escape key. -The text color is ignored when printing, if the Print black check box is selected in %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print in the Options dialog box. +The text color is ignored when printing, if the Print black check box is selected in %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print in the Options dialog box. -The text color is ignored on screen, if the Use automatic font color for screen display check box is selected in %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +The text color is ignored on screen, if the Use automatic font color for screen display check box is selected in %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Accessibility. -Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text color. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font color toolbar. +Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text color. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font color toolbar. -Effects - Select the font effects that you want to apply. - Effects - The following capitalization effects are available: +Effects + Select the font effects that you want to apply. + Effects + The following capitalization effects are available: - Without - no effect is applied + Without - no effect is applied - Capitals - changes the selected lowercase characters to uppercase characters + Capitals - changes the selected lowercase characters to uppercase characters - Lowercase - changes the selected uppercase characters to lower characters + Lowercase - changes the selected uppercase characters to lower characters - Title font - changes the first character of each selected word to an uppercase character + Title font - changes the first character of each selected word to an uppercase character - Small capitals - changes the selected lowercase characters to uppercase characters, and then reduces their size + Small capitals - changes the selected lowercase characters to uppercase characters, and then reduces their size -Relief - Select a relief effect to apply to the selected text. The embossed relief makes the characters appear as if they are raised above the page. The engraved relief makes the characters appear as if they are pressed into the page. +Relief + Select a relief effect to apply to the selected text. The embossed relief makes the characters appear as if they are raised above the page. The engraved relief makes the characters appear as if they are pressed into the page. -Outline - Displays the outline of the selected characters. This effect does not work with every font. +Outline + Displays the outline of the selected characters. This effect does not work with every font. -Shadow - Adds a shadow that casts below and to the right of the selected characters. +Shadow + Adds a shadow that casts below and to the right of the selected characters. blinking fonts flashing fonts -Blinking - Makes the selected characters blink. You cannot change the blink frequency. +Blinking + Makes the selected characters blink. You cannot change the blink frequency. -Hidden - Hides the selected characters. To display the hidden text, ensure that Non-printing Characters is selected in the View menu. You can also choose %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Hidden + Hides the selected characters. To display the hidden text, ensure that Non-printing Characters is selected in the View menu. You can also choose %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and select Hidden text. -Overlines or removes overlining from the selected text. If the cursor is not in a word, the new text that you enter is overlined. +Overlines or removes overlining from the selected text. If the cursor is not in a word, the new text that you enter is overlined. -Overlining - Select the overlining style that you want to apply. To apply the overlining to words only, select the Individual Words box. +Overlining + Select the overlining style that you want to apply. To apply the overlining to words only, select the Individual Words box. -Overline color - Select the color for the overlining. +Overline color + Select the color for the overlining. -Strikethrough - Select a strikethrough style for the selected text. - If you save your document in MS Word format, all of the strikethrough styles are converted to the single line style. +Strikethrough + Select a strikethrough style for the selected text. + If you save your document in MS Word format, all of the strikethrough styles are converted to the single line style. -Underlining - Select the underlining style that you want to apply. To apply the underlining to words only, select the Individual Words box. - If you apply underlining to a superscript text, the underlining is raised to the level of the superscript. If the superscript is contained in a word with normal text, the underlining is not raised. +Underlining + Select the underlining style that you want to apply. To apply the underlining to words only, select the Individual Words box. + If you apply underlining to a superscript text, the underlining is raised to the level of the superscript. If the superscript is contained in a word with normal text, the underlining is not raised. -Underline color - Select the color for the underlining. +Underline color + Select the color for the underlining. -Individual words - Applies the selected effect only to words and ignores spaces. +Individual words + Applies the selected effect only to words and ignores spaces. -Emphasis mark - Select a character to display over or below the entire length of the selected text. +Emphasis mark + Select a character to display over or below the entire length of the selected text. -Position - Specify where to display the emphasis marks. +Position + Specify where to display the emphasis marks.
- $[officename] color tables + $[officename] color tables
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05020300.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05020300.xhp index df1e95ce8d..992e2bd081 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05020300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05020300.xhp @@ -43,96 +43,96 @@ - Numbers / Format - Specify the formatting options for the selected cell(s). + Numbers / Format + Specify the formatting options for the selected cell(s).
- Category - Select a category from the list, and then select a formatting style in the Format box. + Category + Select a category from the list, and then select a formatting style in the Format box. - The default currency format for a cell is determined by the regional settings of your operating system. + The default currency format for a cell is determined by the regional settings of your operating system. - Format - Select how you want the contents of the selected cell(s) to be displayed. The code for the selected option is displayed in the Format Code box. + Format + Select how you want the contents of the selected cell(s) to be displayed. The code for the selected option is displayed in the Format Code box. - Currency category list boxes - Select a currency, and then scroll to the top of the Format list to view the formatting options for the currency. + Currency category list boxes + Select a currency, and then scroll to the top of the Format list to view the formatting options for the currency.
- The format code for currencies uses the form [$xxx-nnn], where xxx is the currency symbol, and nnn the country code. Special banking symbols, such as EUR (for Euro), do not require the country code. The currency format is not dependent on the language that you select in the Language box. + The format code for currencies uses the form [$xxx-nnn], where xxx is the currency symbol, and nnn the country code. Special banking symbols, such as EUR (for Euro), do not require the country code. The currency format is not dependent on the language that you select in the Language box.
- Language - Specifies the language setting for the selected cells fields. With the language set to Automatic, $[officename] automatically applies the number formats associated with the system default language. Select any language to fix the settings for the selected cells fields. - The language setting ensures that date and currency formats, as well as decimal and thousands separators, are preserved even when the document is opened in an operating system that uses a different default language setting. + Language + Specifies the language setting for the selected cells fields. With the language set to Automatic, $[officename] automatically applies the number formats associated with the system default language. Select any language to fix the settings for the selected cells fields. + The language setting ensures that date and currency formats, as well as decimal and thousands separators, are preserved even when the document is opened in an operating system that uses a different default language setting. - Source format - Uses the same number format as the cells containing the data for the chart. - Options - Specify the options for the selected format. + Source format + Uses the same number format as the cells containing the data for the chart. + Options + Specify the options for the selected format. - Decimal places - Enter the number of decimal places that you want to display. + Decimal places + Enter the number of decimal places that you want to display. - Denominator places - With fraction format, enter the number of places for the denominator that you want to display. + Denominator places + With fraction format, enter the number of places for the denominator that you want to display. - Leading zeroes - Enter the maximum number of zeroes to display in front of the decimal point. + Leading zeroes + Enter the maximum number of zeroes to display in front of the decimal point. - Negative numbers in red - Changes the font color of negative numbers to red. + Negative numbers in red + Changes the font color of negative numbers to red. - Use thousands separator - Inserts a separator between thousands. The type of separator that is used depends on your language settings. + Use thousands separator + Inserts a separator between thousands. The type of separator that is used depends on your language settings. - Engineering notation - With scientific format, Engineering notation ensures that exponent is a multiple of 3. + Engineering notation + With scientific format, Engineering notation ensures that exponent is a multiple of 3. - Format code - Displays the number format code for the selected format. You can also enter a custom format. The following options are only available for user-defined number formats. + Format code + Displays the number format code for the selected format. You can also enter a custom format. The following options are only available for user-defined number formats. - Add - Adds the number format code that you entered to the user-defined category. + Add + Adds the number format code that you entered to the user-defined category. - Delete - Deletes the selected number format. The changes are effective after you restart $[officename]. + Delete + Deletes the selected number format. The changes are effective after you restart $[officename]. - Edit Comment - Adds a comment to the selected number format. + Edit Comment + Adds a comment to the selected number format. - Name line - Enter a comment for the selected number format, and then click outside this box. + Name line + Enter a comment for the selected number format, and then click outside this box.
- Number format codes: custom format codes defined by user. + Number format codes: custom format codes defined by user.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05020400.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05020400.xhp index 773c0e5352..937589e590 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05020400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05020400.xhp @@ -38,107 +38,107 @@ -Hyperlink -Assigns a new hyperlink or edits the selected hyperlink. +Hyperlink +Assigns a new hyperlink or edits the selected hyperlink. A hyperlink is a link to a file on the Internet or on your local system. -You can also assign or edit a named HTML anchor, or Bookmark, that refers to a specific place in a document. +You can also assign or edit a named HTML anchor, or Bookmark, that refers to a specific place in a document.
-Hyperlink -Specify the properties for the hyperlink. +Hyperlink +Specify the properties for the hyperlink. -URL -Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame. +URL +Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame. -Browse -Locate the file that you want to link to, and then click Open. +Browse +Locate the file that you want to link to, and then click Open. -Reference -Enter the text that you want to display for the hyperlink. +Reference +Enter the text that you want to display for the hyperlink. -Events -Specify an event that triggers when you click the hyperlink. +Events +Specify an event that triggers when you click the hyperlink. -Name +Name
-Enter a name for the hyperlink. $[officename] inserts a NAME tag in the hyperlink: -<A HREF="http://www.example.com/" NAME="Nametext" TARGET="_blank">Note</A> +Enter a name for the hyperlink. $[officename] inserts a NAME tag in the hyperlink: +<A HREF="http://www.example.com/" NAME="Nametext" TARGET="_blank">Note</A>
-Frame +Frame
-Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window. +Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
-Name of Frame +Name of Frame -Definition +Definition -Named entries +Named entries -File opens in a named frame in the current HTML document. +File opens in a named frame in the current HTML document. -_self +_self -File opens in the current frame. +File opens in the current frame. -_blank +_blank -File opens in a new page. +File opens in a new page. -_parent +_parent -File opens in the parent frame of the current frame. If there is no parent frame, the current frame is used. +File opens in the parent frame of the current frame. If there is no parent frame, the current frame is used. -_top +_top -File opens in the topmost frame in the hierarchy. +File opens in the topmost frame in the hierarchy.
-Character Styles -Specify the formatting options for the hyperlink. +Character Styles +Specify the formatting options for the hyperlink. -Visited links -Select a formatting style to use for visited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialog, and click the Styles and Formatting icon on the Formatting toolbar. +Visited links +Select a formatting style to use for visited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialog, and click the Styles and Formatting icon on the Formatting toolbar. -Unvisited links -Select a formatting style to use for unvisited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialog, and click the Styles and Formatting icon on the Formatting toolbar. +Unvisited links +Select a formatting style to use for unvisited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialog, and click the Styles and Formatting icon on the Formatting toolbar.
-Hyperlink dialog -Assign macro +Hyperlink dialog +Assign macro
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp index 1db70016a8..16e8fb1fb2 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp @@ -44,9 +44,9 @@ text; kerning -Font Position +Font Position Position -Specify the position, scaling, rotation, and spacing for characters. +Specify the position, scaling, rotation, and spacing for characters.
@@ -56,61 +56,61 @@ -Position -Set the subscript or superscript options for a character. +Position +Set the subscript or superscript options for a character. -Superscript -Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline. +Superscript +Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline. -Normal -Removes superscript or subscript formatting. +Normal +Removes superscript or subscript formatting. -Subscript -Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline. +Subscript +Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline. -Raise/lower by -Enter the amount by which you want to raise or to lower the selected text in relation to the baseline. One hundred percent is equal to the height of the font. +Raise/lower by +Enter the amount by which you want to raise or to lower the selected text in relation to the baseline. One hundred percent is equal to the height of the font. -Relative font size -Enter the amount by which you want to reduce the font size of the selected text. +Relative font size +Enter the amount by which you want to reduce the font size of the selected text. -Automatic -Automatically sets the amount by which the selected text is raised or lowered in relation to the baseline. -Rotation / scaling +Automatic +Automatically sets the amount by which the selected text is raised or lowered in relation to the baseline. +Rotation / scaling -Set the rotation and the scaling options for the selected text. +Set the rotation and the scaling options for the selected text. -0 degrees -Does not rotate the selected text. +0 degrees +Does not rotate the selected text. -90 degrees -Rotates the selected text to the left by 90 degrees. +90 degrees +Rotates the selected text to the left by 90 degrees. -270 degrees -Rotates the selected text to the right by 90 degrees. +270 degrees +Rotates the selected text to the right by 90 degrees. -Fit to line -Stretches or compresses the selected text so that it fits between the line that is above the text and the line that is below the text. +Fit to line +Stretches or compresses the selected text so that it fits between the line that is above the text and the line that is below the text. -Scale width -Enter the percentage of the font width by which to horizontally stretch or compress the selected text. -Spacing -Specify the spacing between individual characters. +Scale width +Enter the percentage of the font width by which to horizontally stretch or compress the selected text. +Spacing +Specify the spacing between individual characters. Spacing Specifies the spacing between the characters of the selected text. Enter the amount by which you want to expand or condense the text in the spin button. To increase the spacing, set a positive value; to reduce it, set a negative value. -Pair kerning -Automatically adjust the character spacing for specific letter combinations. -Kerning is only available for certain font types and requires that your printer support this option. +Pair kerning +Automatically adjust the character spacing for specific letter combinations. +Kerning is only available for certain font types and requires that your printer support this option. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05020600.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05020600.xhp index bb93abc05a..ec274b2ed3 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05020600.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05020600.xhp @@ -38,26 +38,26 @@ text; Asian layout -Asian Layout +Asian Layout Sets the options for double-line writing for Asian languages. Select the characters in your text, and then choose this command.
-Double-lined -Set the double-line options for the selected text. +Double-lined +Set the double-line options for the selected text. -Write in double lines -Allows you to write in double lines in the area that you selected in the current document. -Enclosing characters -Specify the characters to enclose the double-lined area. +Write in double lines +Allows you to write in double lines in the area that you selected in the current document. +Enclosing characters +Specify the characters to enclose the double-lined area. -Initial character -Select the character to define the start of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters. +Initial character +Select the character to define the start of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters. -Final character -Select the character to define the end of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters. +Final character +Select the character to define the end of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp index 1b7951b861..e97210b9a0 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp @@ -36,24 +36,24 @@ typography; Asian -Asian Typography -Set the typographic options for cells or paragraphs in Asian language files. To enable Asian language support, choose Language Settings - Languages in the Options dialog box, and then select the Enabled box in the Asian language support area. The Asian typography options are ignored in HTML documents. +Asian Typography +Set the typographic options for cells or paragraphs in Asian language files. To enable Asian language support, choose Language Settings - Languages in the Options dialog box, and then select the Enabled box in the Asian language support area. The Asian typography options are ignored in HTML documents.
-Line change -Set the options for line breaks in Asian language documents. -Apply list of forbidden characters to the beginning and end of line -Prevents the characters in the list from starting or ending a line. The characters are relocated to either the previous or the next line. To edit the list of restricted characters, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Asian Layout. -Allow hanging punctuation -Prevents commas and periods from breaking the line. Instead, these characters are added to the end of the line, even in the page margin. - +Line change +Set the options for line breaks in Asian language documents. +Apply list of forbidden characters to the beginning and end of line +Prevents the characters in the list from starting or ending a line. The characters are relocated to either the previous or the next line. To edit the list of restricted characters, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Asian Layout. +Allow hanging punctuation +Prevents commas and periods from breaking the line. Instead, these characters are added to the end of the line, even in the page margin. + Apply spacing between Asian, Latin and Complex text -Inserts a space between Asian, Latin and complex characters. +Inserts a space between Asian, Latin and complex characters.
-Enabling Asian language support +Enabling Asian language support
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05030000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05030000.xhp index 0def4a4284..be39aa3dcb 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05030000.xhp @@ -33,13 +33,13 @@ -Paragraph -Modifies the format of the current paragraph, such as indents and alignment. +Paragraph +Modifies the format of the current paragraph, such as indents and alignment. To modify the font of the current paragraph, select the entire paragraph, choose Format - Character, and then click on the Font tab.
-The paragraph style for the current paragraph is displayed at the Formatting toolbar, and is highlighted in the Styles and Formatting window. +The paragraph style for the current paragraph is displayed at the Formatting toolbar, and is highlighted in the Styles and Formatting window. UFI: changed name of bar diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp index 7abc9f8003..b5e2b4bb11 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp @@ -38,42 +38,39 @@ paragraphs;spacing mw deleted "footnote spacings" and added "paragraphs;spacing" -Indents and Spacing - Sets the indenting and the spacing options for the paragraph. +Indents and Spacing + Sets the indenting and the spacing options for the paragraph.
- To change the measurement units used in this dialog, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General, and then select a new measurement unit in the Settings area. + To change the measurement units used in this dialog, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General, and then select a new measurement unit in the Settings area. -You can also set indents using the ruler. To display the ruler, choose View - Ruler. +You can also set indents using the ruler. To display the ruler, choose View - Ruler.
- Indent - Specify the amount of space to leave between the left and the right page margins and the paragraph. + Indent + Specify the amount of space to leave between the left and the right page margins and the paragraph. -Before text - Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. +Before text + Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. -After text - Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. +After text + Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. -First line - Indents the first line of a paragraph by the amount that you enter. To create a hanging indent enter a positive value for "Before text" and a negative value for "First line". To indent the first line of a paragraph that uses numbering or bullets, choose "Format - Bullets and Numbering - Position". +First line + Indents the first line of a paragraph by the amount that you enter. To create a hanging indent enter a positive value for "Before text" and a negative value for "First line". To indent the first line of a paragraph that uses numbering or bullets, choose "Format - Bullets and Numbering - Position". -Automatic +Automatic - Automatically indents a paragraph according to the font size and the line spacing. The setting in the First Line box is ignored. + Automatically indents a paragraph according to the font size and the line spacing. The setting in the First Line box is ignored. - Spacing - Specify the amount of space to leave between selected paragraphs. + Spacing + Specify the amount of space to leave between selected paragraphs. -Above paragraph - Enter the amount of space that you want to leave above the selected paragraph(s). +Above paragraph + Enter the amount of space that you want to leave above the selected paragraph(s). @@ -99,64 +96,51 @@ -Below paragraph - Enter the amount of space that you want to leave below the selected paragraph(s). +Below paragraph + Enter the amount of space that you want to leave below the selected paragraph(s). -Don't add space between paragraphs of the same style - Makes any space specified before or after this paragraph not be applied when the preceding and following paragraphs are of the same paragraph style. +Don't add space between paragraphs of the same style + Makes any space specified before or after this paragraph not be applied when the preceding and following paragraphs are of the same paragraph style. -Line spacing - Specify the amount of space to leave between lines of text in a paragraph. - Single - Applies single line spacing to the current paragraph. This is the default setting. +Line spacing + Specify the amount of space to leave between lines of text in a paragraph. + Single + Applies single line spacing to the current paragraph. This is the default setting. - 1.5 lines - Sets the line spacing to 1.5 lines. + 1.5 lines + Sets the line spacing to 1.5 lines. - Double - Sets the line spacing to two lines. + Double + Sets the line spacing to two lines. - Proportional - Select this option and then enter a percentage value in the box, where 100% corresponds to single line spacing. - At Least - Sets the minimum line spacing to the value that you enter in the box. - If you use different font sizes within a paragraph, the line spacing is automatically adjusted to the largest font size. If you prefer to have identical spacing for all lines, specify a value in At least that corresponds to the largest font size. - Leading - Sets the height of the vertical space that is inserted between two lines. - Fixed + Proportional + Select this option and then enter a percentage value in the box, where 100% corresponds to single line spacing. + At Least + Sets the minimum line spacing to the value that you enter in the box. + If you use different font sizes within a paragraph, the line spacing is automatically adjusted to the largest font size. If you prefer to have identical spacing for all lines, specify a value in At least that corresponds to the largest font size. + Leading + Sets the height of the vertical space that is inserted between two lines. + Fixed - Sets the line spacing to exactly match the value that you enter in the box. This can result in cropped characters. + Sets the line spacing to exactly match the value that you enter in the box. This can result in cropped characters. -of - Enter the value to use for the line spacing. +of + Enter the value to use for the line spacing. - Register-true + Register-true -Activate +Activate - Aligns the baseline of each line of text to a vertical document grid, so that each line is the same height. To use this feature, you must first activate the Register-true option for the current page style. To do this, choose Format - Page, click on the Page tab, and then select the Register-true box in the Layout settings area. + Aligns the baseline of each line of text to a vertical document grid, so that each line is the same height. To use this feature, you must first activate the Register-true option for the current page style. To do this, choose Format - Page, click on the Page tab, and then select the Register-true box in the Layout settings area.
- Writing Register-true + Writing Register-true
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05030300.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05030300.xhp index 652058c239..8d30ab38c8 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05030300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05030300.xhp @@ -33,63 +33,63 @@ tab stops;settings -Tabs -Set the position of a tab stop in a paragraph. +Tabs +Set the position of a tab stop in a paragraph.
-If you want, you can also use the ruler to set the tab positions. +If you want, you can also use the ruler to set the tab positions.
-Position -Select a tab stop type, enter a new measurement, and then click New. If you want, you can also specify the measurement units to use for the tab (cm for centimeter, or " for inches). Existing tabs to the left of the first tab that you set are removed. -Type -Select the type of tab stop that you want to modify. +Position +Select a tab stop type, enter a new measurement, and then click New. If you want, you can also specify the measurement units to use for the tab (cm for centimeter, or " for inches). Existing tabs to the left of the first tab that you set are removed. +Type +Select the type of tab stop that you want to modify. -Left -The name of this tab stop is Left/Top if Asian language support is enabled. -Aligns the left edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the right. +Left +The name of this tab stop is Left/Top if Asian language support is enabled. +Aligns the left edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the right. -Right -This name of this tab stop is Right/Bottom if Asian language support is enabled. -Aligns the right edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the left of the tab stop. +Right +This name of this tab stop is Right/Bottom if Asian language support is enabled. +Aligns the right edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the left of the tab stop. -Center -Aligns the center of the text to the tab stop. +Center +Aligns the center of the text to the tab stop. -Decimal -Aligns the decimal separator of a number to the center of the tab stop and text to the left of the tab. -The character that is used as a decimal separator depends on the regional setting of your operating system. +Decimal +Aligns the decimal separator of a number to the center of the tab stop and text to the left of the tab. +The character that is used as a decimal separator depends on the regional setting of your operating system. -Character -Enter a character that you want the decimal tab to use as a decimal separator. -Fill Character -Specify the characters to use as leader to the left of the tab stop. +Character +Enter a character that you want the decimal tab to use as a decimal separator. +Fill Character +Specify the characters to use as leader to the left of the tab stop. -None -Inserts no fill characters, or removes existing fill characters to the left of the tab stop. +None +Inserts no fill characters, or removes existing fill characters to the left of the tab stop. -....... -Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dots. +....... +Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dots. ------- -Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dashes. +------ +Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dashes. -______ -Draws a line to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop. +______ +Draws a line to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop. -Character -Allows you to specify a character to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop. +Character +Allows you to specify a character to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop. -New -Adds the tab stop that you defined to the current paragraph. +New +Adds the tab stop that you defined to the current paragraph. -Clear All -Removes all of the tab stops that you defined under Position. Sets Left tab stops at regular intervals as the default tab stops. +Clear All +Removes all of the tab stops that you defined under Position. Sets Left tab stops at regular intervals as the default tab stops. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05030500.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05030500.xhp index c5c7fc4181..f7389150cc 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05030500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05030500.xhp @@ -30,64 +30,64 @@
-Borders -Sets the border options for the selected objects in Writer or Calc. +Borders +Sets the border options for the selected objects in Writer or Calc.
-You can specify the border position, size, and style in Writer or Calc. In $[officename] Writer, you can add borders to pages, frames, graphics, tables, paragraphs, characters and to embedded objects. +You can specify the border position, size, and style in Writer or Calc. In $[officename] Writer, you can add borders to pages, frames, graphics, tables, paragraphs, characters and to embedded objects.
-To modify the border of an entire table, place the cursor in a table cell, right-click, choose Table, and then click the Borders tab. To modify the border of a table cell, select the cell, right-click, choose Table, and then click the Borders tab. +To modify the border of an entire table, place the cursor in a table cell, right-click, choose Table, and then click the Borders tab. To modify the border of a table cell, select the cell, right-click, choose Table, and then click the Borders tab. -Line arrangement -Select a predefined border style to apply. -If you are in a table or spreadsheet, you can also add or remove predefined borders. Use the Borders icon on the Table Bar. +Line arrangement +Select a predefined border style to apply. +If you are in a table or spreadsheet, you can also add or remove predefined borders. Use the Borders icon on the Table Bar. -Line -Click the border style that you want to apply. The style is applied to the borders selected in the preview. +Line +Click the border style that you want to apply. The style is applied to the borders selected in the preview. -Select the line color that you want to use for the selected border(s). -Spacing to contents -Specify the amount of space that you want to leave between the border and the contents of the selection. -Left -Enter the distance that you want to have between the left border and the contents of the selection. -Right -Enter the distance that you want to have between the right border and the contents of the selection. -Top -Enter the distance that you want to have between the top border and the contents of the selection. -Bottom -Enter the distance that you want to have between the bottom border and the contents of the selection. -Synchronize -Applies the same spacing to contents setting to all four borders when you enter a new distance. +Select the line color that you want to use for the selected border(s). +Spacing to contents +Specify the amount of space that you want to leave between the border and the contents of the selection. +Left +Enter the distance that you want to have between the left border and the contents of the selection. +Right +Enter the distance that you want to have between the right border and the contents of the selection. +Top +Enter the distance that you want to have between the top border and the contents of the selection. +Bottom +Enter the distance that you want to have between the bottom border and the contents of the selection. +Synchronize +Applies the same spacing to contents setting to all four borders when you enter a new distance. shadows; borders borders; shadows margins; shadows -Shadow style -You can also apply a shadow effect to borders. For the best results, only apply this effect when all four borders are visible. -Graphics or objects that are anchored to a frame in the document cannot exceed the size of the frame. If you apply a shadow to the borders of an object that fills an entire frame, the size of the object is reduced to display the shadows. -Position -Click a shadow style for the selected borders. -Distance -Enter the width of the shadow. -Color -Select a color for the shadow. +Shadow style +You can also apply a shadow effect to borders. For the best results, only apply this effect when all four borders are visible. +Graphics or objects that are anchored to a frame in the document cannot exceed the size of the frame. If you apply a shadow to the borders of an object that fills an entire frame, the size of the object is reduced to display the shadows. +Position +Click a shadow style for the selected borders. +Distance +Enter the width of the shadow. +Color +Select a color for the shadow. -Properties -Specifies the properties for the current paragraph or the selected paragraphs. -Merge with next paragraph -Merges the border style and the shadow style of the current paragraph with the next paragraph. These styles are only merged if the indent, border, and shadow styles of the next paragraph are the same as the current paragraph. This option is also available for Paragraph Styles.UFI: see spec "spec-merge-borders-and-shadow" -Merge adjacent line styles -Merges two different border styles of adjacent cells in a Writer table into one border style. This property is valid for a whole table in a Writer document. -The rules can be condensed to the statement that the stronger attribute wins. If, for example, one cell has a red border of 2 point width, and the adjacent cell has a blue border of 3 point width, then the common border between these two cells will be blue with 3 point width.UFI: see spec "collapsing_table_borders" +Properties +Specifies the properties for the current paragraph or the selected paragraphs. +Merge with next paragraph +Merges the border style and the shadow style of the current paragraph with the next paragraph. These styles are only merged if the indent, border, and shadow styles of the next paragraph are the same as the current paragraph. This option is also available for Paragraph Styles.UFI: see spec "spec-merge-borders-and-shadow" +Merge adjacent line styles +Merges two different border styles of adjacent cells in a Writer table into one border style. This property is valid for a whole table in a Writer document. +The rules can be condensed to the statement that the stronger attribute wins. If, for example, one cell has a red border of 2 point width, and the adjacent cell has a blue border of 3 point width, then the common border between these two cells will be blue with 3 point width.UFI: see spec "collapsing_table_borders"
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05030600.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05030600.xhp index 1414190c1d..8b3bf474e8 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05030600.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05030600.xhp @@ -36,10 +36,10 @@ headers;backgrounds -Background - Set the background color or graphic. +Background + Set the background color or graphic.
- You can specify the background for paragraphs, pages, headers, footers, text frames, tables, table cells, sections, and indexes. + You can specify the background for paragraphs, pages, headers, footers, text frames, tables, table cells, sections, and indexes. cells and pages.
@@ -47,12 +47,12 @@
-As - Select the type of background that you want to apply. - Using a Color as a Background +As + Select the type of background that you want to apply. + Using a Color as a Background -Color Background - Click the color that you want to use as a background. To remove a background color, click No Fill. +Color Background + Click the color that you want to use as a background. To remove a background color, click No Fill. @@ -60,54 +60,43 @@ -For +For - Select the area that you want to apply the background color to. For example, when you define the background color for a table, you can choose to apply it to the table, the active cell, the row, or the column. + Select the area that you want to apply the background color to. For example, when you define the background color for a table, you can choose to apply it to the table, the active cell, the row, or the column. -This option is only available when you edit the background of a table or a paragraph style. +This option is only available when you edit the background of a table or a paragraph style. -Using a Graphic as a Background - File - Contains information about the graphic file. - Display field - Shows the path for the graphic file. +Using a Graphic as a Background + File + Contains information about the graphic file. + Display field + Shows the path for the graphic file. -Link - Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file. +Link + Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file. -Preview - Displays or hides a preview of the selected graphic. +Preview + Displays or hides a preview of the selected graphic. -Browse - Locate the graphic file that you want to use as a background, and then click Open. - Type - Specify the way that you want to display the background graphic. +Browse + Locate the graphic file that you want to use as a background, and then click Open. + Type + Specify the way that you want to display the background graphic. -Position - Select this option, and then click a location in the position grid. +Position + Select this option, and then click a location in the position grid. -Area - Stretches the graphic to fill the entire background of the selected object. +Area + Stretches the graphic to fill the entire background of the selected object. -Tile - Repeats the graphic so that it covers the entire background of the selected object. +Tile + Repeats the graphic so that it covers the entire background of the selected object. -Click a color. Click No Fill to remove a background or highlighting color. Click Automatic to reset a font color. +Click a color. Click No Fill to remove a background or highlighting color. Click Automatic to reset a font color. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp index bc0d519f92..b87e6f465a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp @@ -37,65 +37,65 @@ justifying text MW deleted "text;" -Alignment -Sets the alignment of the paragraph relative to the margins of page. +Alignment +Sets the alignment of the paragraph relative to the margins of page.
-Alignment -Set the alignment options for the current paragraph. +Alignment +Set the alignment options for the current paragraph. -Left -Aligns the paragraph to the left page margin. +Left +Aligns the paragraph to the left page margin. If Asian language support is enabled, this option is named Left/Top. -Right -Aligns the paragraph to the right page margin. +Right +Aligns the paragraph to the right page margin. If Asian language support is enabled, this option is named Right/Bottom. -Centered -Centers the contents of the paragraph on the page. +Centered +Centers the contents of the paragraph on the page. -Justify -Aligns the paragraph to the left and to the right page margins. +Justify +Aligns the paragraph to the left and to the right page margins. -Last Line +Last Line -Specify the alignment for the last line in the paragraph. +Specify the alignment for the last line in the paragraph. -Expand single word +Expand single word -If the last line of a justified paragraph consists of one word, the word is stretched to the width of the paragraph. +If the last line of a justified paragraph consists of one word, the word is stretched to the width of the paragraph. -Snap to text grid (if active)UFI: asian enabled -Aligns the paragraph to a text grid. To activate the text grid, choose Format - Page - Text Grid. +Snap to text grid (if active)UFI: asian enabled +Aligns the paragraph to a text grid. To activate the text grid, choose Format - Page - Text Grid. -Text-to-text - Alignment -Select an alignment option for oversized or undersized characters in the paragraph relative to the rest of the text in the paragraph. +Text-to-text - Alignment +Select an alignment option for oversized or undersized characters in the paragraph relative to the rest of the text in the paragraph.
-Properties +Properties -Text direction -Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled. +Text direction +Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp index 2cdd3c14ac..942a75157e 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp @@ -39,53 +39,53 @@ original size;restoring after cropping -Crop -Trims or scales the selected graphic. You can also restore the graphic to its original size. +Crop +Trims or scales the selected graphic. You can also restore the graphic to its original size.
-Crop -Use this area to trim or scale the selected graphic, or to add white space around the graphic. +Crop +Use this area to trim or scale the selected graphic, or to add white space around the graphic. -Keep scale -Maintains the original scale of the graphic when you crop, so that only the size of the graphic changes. +Keep scale +Maintains the original scale of the graphic when you crop, so that only the size of the graphic changes. -Keep image size -Maintains the original size of the graphic when you crop, so that only the scale of the graphic changes. To reduce the scale of the graphic, select this option and enter negative values in the cropping boxes. To increase the scale of the graphic, enter positive values in the cropping boxes. +Keep image size +Maintains the original size of the graphic when you crop, so that only the scale of the graphic changes. To reduce the scale of the graphic, select this option and enter negative values in the cropping boxes. To increase the scale of the graphic, enter positive values in the cropping boxes. -Left -If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the left edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the left of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic. +Left +If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the left edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the left of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic. -Right -If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the right edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the right of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic. +Right +If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the right edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the right of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic. -Top -If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the top of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space above the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic. +Top +If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the top of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space above the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic. -Bottom -If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the bottom of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space below the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic. -Scale -Changes the scale of the selected graphic. +Bottom +If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the bottom of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space below the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic. +Scale +Changes the scale of the selected graphic. -Width -Enter the width for the selected graphic as a percentage. +Width +Enter the width for the selected graphic as a percentage. -Height -Enter the height of the selected graphic as a percentage. -Image size -Changes the size of the selected graphic. +Height +Enter the height of the selected graphic as a percentage. +Image size +Changes the size of the selected graphic. -Width -Enter a width for the selected graphic. +Width +Enter a width for the selected graphic. -Height -Enter a height for the selected graphic. +Height +Enter a height for the selected graphic. -Original Size -Returns the selected graphic to its original size. +Original Size +Returns the selected graphic to its original size.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp index dd7ff71c04..680e452458 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp @@ -32,41 +32,39 @@ styles; organizing -Organizer - Set the options for the selected style. +Organizer + Set the options for the selected style.
-Name - Displays the name of the selected style. If you are creating or modifying a custom style, enter a name for the style. You cannot change the name of a predefined style. +Name + Displays the name of the selected style. If you are creating or modifying a custom style, enter a name for the style. You cannot change the name of a predefined style. -AutoUpdate +AutoUpdate - Updates the style when you apply direct formatting to a paragraph using this style in your document. The formatting of all paragraphs using this style is automatically updated. + Updates the style when you apply direct formatting to a paragraph using this style in your document. The formatting of all paragraphs using this style is automatically updated. - Updates the style when you apply direct formatting to a paragraph using this style in your document. The formatting of all paragraphs using this style is automatically updated. + Updates the style when you apply direct formatting to a paragraph using this style in your document. The formatting of all paragraphs using this style is automatically updated. -Next Style - Select an existing style that you want to follow the current style in your document. For paragraph styles, the next style is applied to the paragraph that is created when you press Enter. For page styles, the next style is applied when a new page is created. +Next Style + Select an existing style that you want to follow the current style in your document. For paragraph styles, the next style is applied to the paragraph that is created when you press Enter. For page styles, the next style is applied when a new page is created. -Linked with - Select an existing style that you want to base the new style on, or select none to define your own style. +Linked with + Select an existing style that you want to base the new style on, or select none to define your own style. -Category - Displays the category for the current style. If you are creating or modifying a new style, select 'Custom Style' from the list. - You cannot change the category for a predefined style. +Category + Displays the category for the current style. If you are creating or modifying a new style, select 'Custom Style' from the list. + You cannot change the category for a predefined style. -Contains - Describes the relevant formatting used in the current style. - Assign Shortcut Key - Opens the Tools - Customize - Keyboard tab page where you can assign a shortcut key to the current Style. +Contains + Describes the relevant formatting used in the current style. + Assign Shortcut Key + Opens the Tools - Customize - Keyboard tab page where you can assign a shortcut key to the current Style.
- Update Style + Update Style
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp index b91e3a8b70..6996888995 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp @@ -40,8 +40,8 @@ gutter mw made "binding space;" a one level entry and added "gutter" and "margins;pages" -Page -Allows you to define page layouts for single and multiple-page documents, as well as a numbering and paper formats. +Page +Allows you to define page layouts for single and multiple-page documents, as well as a numbering and paper formats.
@@ -49,127 +49,127 @@ Page format tab page -Paper format -Select from a list of predefined paper sizes, or define a custom paper format. +Paper format +Select from a list of predefined paper sizes, or define a custom paper format. -Format -Select a predefined paper size, or create a custom format by entering the dimensions for the paper in the Height and Width boxes. +Format +Select a predefined paper size, or create a custom format by entering the dimensions for the paper in the Height and Width boxes. -Width -Displays the width of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a width here. +Width +Displays the width of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a width here. -Height -Displays the height of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a height here. +Height +Displays the height of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a height here. -Portrait -Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented vertically. +Portrait +Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented vertically. -Landscape -Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented horizontally. +Landscape +Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented horizontally. -Text direction -Select the text direction that you want to use in your document. The "right-to-left (vertical)" text flow direction rotates all layout settings to the right by 90 degrees, except for the header and footer. +Text direction +Select the text direction that you want to use in your document. The "right-to-left (vertical)" text flow direction rotates all layout settings to the right by 90 degrees, except for the header and footer. -Paper tray -Select the paper source for your printer. If you want, you can assign different paper trays to different page styles. For example, assign a different tray to the First Page style and load the tray with your company's letterhead paper.UFI: #i31234# +Paper tray +Select the paper source for your printer. If you want, you can assign different paper trays to different page styles. For example, assign a different tray to the First Page style and load the tray with your company's letterhead paper.UFI: #i31234# -Margins -Specify the amount of space to leave between the edges of the page and the document text. +Margins +Specify the amount of space to leave between the edges of the page and the document text. -Left / Inner -Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the inner text margin and the inner edge of the page. +Left / Inner +Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the inner text margin and the inner edge of the page. -Right / Outer -Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the outer text margin and the outer edge of the page. +Right / Outer +Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the outer text margin and the outer edge of the page. -Top -Enter the amount of space to leave between the upper edge of the page and the document text. +Top +Enter the amount of space to leave between the upper edge of the page and the document text. -Bottom -Enter the amount of space to leave between the lower edge of the page and the document text. +Bottom +Enter the amount of space to leave between the lower edge of the page and the document text. -Aligns the text on the selected Page Style to a vertical page grid. -Register-true +Aligns the text on the selected Page Style to a vertical page grid. +Register-true -Aligns the text on the selected Page Style to a vertical page grid. The spacing of the grid is defined by the Reference Style. +Aligns the text on the selected Page Style to a vertical page grid. The spacing of the grid is defined by the Reference Style. -Select the Paragraph Style that you want to use as a reference for lining up the text on the selected Page style. The height of the font that is specified in the reference style sets the spacing of the vertical page grid. -Reference Style +Select the Paragraph Style that you want to use as a reference for lining up the text on the selected Page style. The height of the font that is specified in the reference style sets the spacing of the vertical page grid. +Reference Style -Select the Paragraph Style that you want to use as a reference for lining up the text on the selected Page style. The height of the font that is specified in the reference style sets the spacing of the vertical page grid. +Select the Paragraph Style that you want to use as a reference for lining up the text on the selected Page style. The height of the font that is specified in the reference style sets the spacing of the vertical page grid. -Table alignment +Table alignment -Specify the alignment options for the cells on a printed page. +Specify the alignment options for the cells on a printed page. -Centers the cells horizontally on the printed page. -Horizontal +Centers the cells horizontally on the printed page. +Horizontal -Centers the cells horizontally on the printed page. +Centers the cells horizontally on the printed page. -Centers the cells vertically on the printed page. -Vertical +Centers the cells vertically on the printed page. +Vertical -Centers the cells vertically on the printed page. +Centers the cells vertically on the printed page. -Layout settings +Layout settings - + Page Layout - + Select the page layout style to use in the current document. - + Page layout - + Specify whether the current style should show odd pages, even pages, or both odd and even pages. - + Right and left - + The current page style shows both odd and even pages with left and right margins as specified. - + Mirrored - + The current page style shows both odd and even pages with inner and outer margins as specified. Use this layout if you want to bind the printed pages like a book. Enter the binding space as the "Inner" margin. - + Only right - + The current page style shows only odd (right) pages. Even pages are shown as blank pages. - + Only left - + The current page style shows only even (left) pages. Odd pages are shown as blank pages. -Register-true +Register-true -Format -Select the page numbering format that you want to use for the current page style. +Format +Select the page numbering format that you want to use for the current page style. -Resizes the drawing objects so that they fit on the paper format that you select. The arrangement of the drawing objects is preserved. - +Resizes the drawing objects so that they fit on the paper format that you select. The arrangement of the drawing objects is preserved. + AutoFit object to page format - + @@ -177,10 +177,10 @@ width="8.6457in" height="5.9063in"> Resizes the drawing objects so that they fit on the paper format that you select. The arrangement of the drawing objects is preserved.
-Changing measurement units +Changing measurement units -Writing Register-true +Writing Register-true
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05040300.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05040300.xhp index 4181acdb70..d4d52125e9 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05040300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05040300.xhp @@ -29,10 +29,10 @@
-Header - Adds a header to the current page style. A header is an area in the top page margin, where you can add text or graphics. +Header + Adds a header to the current page style. A header is an area in the top page margin, where you can add text or graphics.
- If you want, you can also add borders or a background fill to a header. + If you want, you can also add borders or a background fill to a header. @@ -40,69 +40,60 @@
- To add a header to the current page style, select Header on, and then click OK. + To add a header to the current page style, select Header on, and then click OK. - If you want to extend a header into the page margins, insert a frame into the header. + If you want to extend a header into the page margins, insert a frame into the header. -To quickly move the text cursor from the document text to the header or footer, press Command +To quickly move the text cursor from the document text to the header or footer, press Command Ctrl+Page Up or Page Down. Press the same key again to move the text cursor back into the document text. -Header - Set the properties of the header. +Header + Set the properties of the header. -Header on - Adds a header to the current page style. +Header on + Adds a header to the current page style. -Same content left/righti80087 - Even and odd pages share the same content. To assign a different header to even and odd pages, clear this option, and then click Edit. +Same content left/righti80087 + Even and odd pages share the same content. To assign a different header to even and odd pages, clear this option, and then click Edit. -Same content on first page -First and even/odd pages share the same content. +Same content on first page +First and even/odd pages share the same content. -Left margin +Left margin Enter the amount of space to leave between the left page margin and the left edge of the header. -Right margin +Right margin Enter the amount of space to leave between the right page margin and the right edge of the header. -Spacing - Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the header and the top edge of the document text. +Spacing + Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the header and the top edge of the document text. -Use dynamic spacing - Overrides the Spacing setting, and allows the header to expand into the area between the header and the document text. +Use dynamic spacing + Overrides the Spacing setting, and allows the header to expand into the area between the header and the document text. -Height - Enter the height that you want for the header. +Height + Enter the height that you want for the header. -AutoFit height - Automatically adjusts the height of the header to fit the content that you enter. +AutoFit height + Automatically adjusts the height of the header to fit the content that you enter. -More - Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the header. +More + Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the header. -Edit +Edit - Add or edit header text. - Add or edit header text. + Add or edit header text. + Add or edit header text.
- Headers - Changing measurement units - Borders - Backgrounds + Headers + Changing measurement units + Borders + Backgrounds
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05040400.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05040400.xhp index 1a9aa1ca6b..0af1c057b6 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05040400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05040400.xhp @@ -29,10 +29,10 @@
-Footer - Adds a footer to the current page style. A footer is an area in the bottom page margin, where you can add text or graphics. +Footer + Adds a footer to the current page style. A footer is an area in the bottom page margin, where you can add text or graphics.
- If you want, you can also add borders or a background fill to a footer. + If you want, you can also add borders or a background fill to a footer. @@ -40,73 +40,72 @@
- To insert a footer into the current document, select Footer on, and then click OK. + To insert a footer into the current document, select Footer on, and then click OK. - If you want to extend a footer into the page margins, insert a frame into the footer. + If you want to extend a footer into the page margins, insert a frame into the footer. -To quickly move the text cursor from the document text to the header or footer, press Command +To quickly move the text cursor from the document text to the header or footer, press Command Ctrl+Page Up or Page Down. Press the same key again to move the text cursor back into the document text. -Footer - Set the properties of the footer. +Footer + Set the properties of the footer. -Footer on - Adds a footer to the current page style. +Footer on + Adds a footer to the current page style. -Same content left/right - Even and odd pages share the same content. To assign a different footer to even and odd pages, clear this option, and then click Edit. +Same content left/right + Even and odd pages share the same content. To assign a different footer to even and odd pages, clear this option, and then click Edit. -Same content on first page -First and even/odd pages share the same content. +Same content on first page +First and even/odd pages share the same content. -Left margin - Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the footer. +Left margin + Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the footer. -Right margin - Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the footer. +Right margin + Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the footer. -Spacing - Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the document text and the top edge of the footer. +Spacing + Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the document text and the top edge of the footer. -Use dynamic spacing - Overrides the Spacing setting and allows the footer to expand into the area between the footer and document text. +Use dynamic spacing + Overrides the Spacing setting and allows the footer to expand into the area between the footer and document text. -Height - Enter the height you want for the footer. +Height + Enter the height you want for the footer. -AutoFit height - Automatically adjusts the height of the footer to fit the content you enter. +AutoFit height + Automatically adjusts the height of the footer to fit the content you enter. -More - Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the footer. +More + Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the footer. -Edit +Edit - Add or edit footer text. - Add or edit footer text. + Add or edit footer text. + Add or edit footer text.
- Footers - Changing measurement units - Borders - Backgrounds + Footers + Changing measurement units + Borders + Backgrounds
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05050000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05050000.xhp index f333f7ba1a..c4ea1f94d4 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05050000.xhp @@ -29,8 +29,8 @@
-Change Case -Changes the case of characters in the selection. If the cursor is within a word and no text is selected, then the word is the selection. +Change Case +Changes the case of characters in the selection. If the cursor is within a word and no text is selected, then the word is the selection.
@@ -38,45 +38,45 @@ -Sentence case -Changes the first letter of the selected western characters to an uppercase character. +Sentence case +Changes the first letter of the selected western characters to an uppercase character. -lowercase -Changes the selected western characters to lowercase characters. +lowercase +Changes the selected western characters to lowercase characters. -UPPERCASE -Changes the selected western characters to uppercase characters. +UPPERCASE +Changes the selected western characters to uppercase characters. -Capitalize Every Word -Changes the first character of every word of the selected western characters to an uppercase character. +Capitalize Every Word +Changes the first character of every word of the selected western characters to an uppercase character. -tOGGLE cASE -Toggles case of all selected western characters. +tOGGLE cASE +Toggles case of all selected western characters. -Half-width -Changes the selected Asian characters to half-width characters. +Half-width +Changes the selected Asian characters to half-width characters. -Full Width -Changes the selected Asian characters to full width characters. +Full Width +Changes the selected Asian characters to full width characters. -Hiragana -Changes the selected Asian characters to Hiragana characters. +Hiragana +Changes the selected Asian characters to Hiragana characters. -Katakana -Changes the selected Asian characters to Katakana characters. +Katakana +Changes the selected Asian characters to Katakana characters. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp index 0795153b9e..61c4f05921 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ phonetic guide -Asian Phonetic Guide -Allows you to add comments above Asian characters to serve as a pronunciation guide. +Asian Phonetic Guide +Allows you to add comments above Asian characters to serve as a pronunciation guide.
@@ -43,32 +43,32 @@
-Select one or more words in the document. +Select one or more words in the document. -Choose Format - Asian Phonetic Guide. +Choose Format - Asian Phonetic Guide. -Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide in the Ruby text box. +Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide in the Ruby text box. -Base text -Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here. +Base text +Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here. -Ruby text -Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text. -Alignment -Select the horizontal alignment for the Ruby text. -Position -Select where you want to place the ruby text. -Character Style for ruby text -Select a character style for the ruby text. -Styles +Ruby text +Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text. +Alignment +Select the horizontal alignment for the Ruby text. +Position +Select where you want to place the ruby text. +Character Style for ruby text +Select a character style for the ruby text. +Styles Opens the Styles and Formatting deck of the Sidebar Styles and Formatting deck of the Sidebar where you can select a character style for the ruby text. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05070000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05070000.xhp index 6d1e2940f6..00bc38da4f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05070000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05070000.xhp @@ -33,14 +33,14 @@ ordering; objects -Alignment (Objects) -Aligns selected objects with respect to one another. +Alignment (Objects) +Aligns selected objects with respect to one another.
-If one of the selected objects is anchored as a character, some of the alignment options do not work. +If one of the selected objects is anchored as a character, some of the alignment options do not work.
-Not all types of objects can be selected together. Not all modules (Writer, Calc, Impress, Draw) support all types of alignment. +Not all types of objects can be selected together. Not all modules (Writer, Calc, Impress, Draw) support all types of alignment. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05070100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05070100.xhp index 46d9c42c24..b4f40a6c66 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05070100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05070100.xhp @@ -33,14 +33,14 @@ -Align Left -Aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the left edge of the object is aligned to the left page margin.UFI: this help id .uno:alignleft is also called from Calc, where it has a different function +Align Left +Aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the left edge of the object is aligned to the left page margin.UFI: this help id .uno:alignleft is also called from Calc, where it has a different function
-Objects are aligned to the left edge of the leftmost object in the selection. -To align the individual objects in a group, choose Format - Group - Enter Group +Objects are aligned to the left edge of the leftmost object in the selection. +To align the individual objects in a group, choose Format - Group - Enter Group double-click to enter the group, select the objects, right-click, and then choose an alignment option. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05070200.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05070200.xhp index 9ff4662ed5..e014faffa0 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05070200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05070200.xhp @@ -32,13 +32,13 @@ -Center Horizontal -Horizontally centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the horizontal center of the page. +Center Horizontal +Horizontally centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the horizontal center of the page.
-The vertical position of the selected objects is not affected by this command. +The vertical position of the selected objects is not affected by this command. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05070300.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05070300.xhp index f8d506249c..b17bbd6f7b 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05070300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05070300.xhp @@ -32,13 +32,13 @@ -Align Right -Aligns the right edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Impress or Draw, the right edge of the object is aligned to the right page margin. +Align Right +Aligns the right edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Impress or Draw, the right edge of the object is aligned to the right page margin.
-Objects are aligned to the right edge of the rightmost object in the selection. +Objects are aligned to the right edge of the rightmost object in the selection. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05070400.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05070400.xhp index 4b6e2b8aac..d3e441081d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05070400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05070400.xhp @@ -32,13 +32,13 @@ -Align Top -Vertically aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page margin. +Align Top +Vertically aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page margin.
-Objects are aligned to the top edge of the topmost object in the selection. +Objects are aligned to the top edge of the topmost object in the selection. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05070500.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05070500.xhp index a88a47ef73..63e57ff53a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05070500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05070500.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@ -Align Vertical Center -Vertically centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the vertical center of the page. +Align Vertical Center +Vertically centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the vertical center of the page.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05070600.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05070600.xhp index c9eab0af49..db08e316e1 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05070600.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05070600.xhp @@ -32,13 +32,13 @@ -Align Bottom -Vertically aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page margin. +Align Bottom +Vertically aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page margin.
-Objects are aligned to the bottom edge of the bottom most object in the selection. +Objects are aligned to the bottom edge of the bottom most object in the selection. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05080000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05080000.xhp index e6f9b83166..e185245cee 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05080000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05080000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ aligning; text objects text objects; alignment -Alignment (Text Objects) -Set the alignment options for the current selection. +Alignment (Text Objects) +Set the alignment options for the current selection.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05080100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05080100.xhp index d9fabc9972..dd5a04ec48 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05080100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05080100.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05080200.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05080200.xhp index 7073fc1535..f5bd68a123 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05080200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05080200.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Right - Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the right page margin. +Right + Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the right page margin.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05080300.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05080300.xhp index bea73d8bec..456492b169 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05080300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05080300.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Center - Centers the selected paragraph(s) on the page. +Center + Centers the selected paragraph(s) on the page.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05080400.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05080400.xhp index f7209088c0..33a267afce 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05080400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05080400.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
-Justify -Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left and the right page margins. If you want, you can also specify the alignment options for the last line of a paragraph by choosing Format - Paragraph - Alignment. +Justify +Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left and the right page margins. If you want, you can also specify the alignment options for the last line of a paragraph by choosing Format - Paragraph - Alignment. removed link, see i62789
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05090000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05090000.xhp index badcc68f67..ca9694f770 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05090000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05090000.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- fonts; text objectstext objects; fontsFont - Set the font options for the selected text. + fonts; text objectstext objects; fontsFont + Set the font options for the selected text.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05100000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05100000.xhp index 2cbec13101..46506c9281 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05100000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05100000.xhp @@ -36,8 +36,8 @@ text; font sizes font sizes; text -Size -Set the font size for the selected text. +Size +Set the font size for the selected text.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05100100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05100100.xhp index f0473687db..ee1f180be5 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05100100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05100100.xhp @@ -30,34 +30,34 @@
-Merge -Combines the contents of the selected table cells into a single cell. +Merge +Combines the contents of the selected table cells into a single cell. moved from swriter/01/05100100.xhp, see i86644
-Choose Table - Merge Cells +Choose Table - Merge Cells -On the Table Bar, click +On the Table Bar, click
- + icon -Merge Cells +Merge Cells
-Merging cells can lead to calculation errors in formulas in the table. +Merging cells can lead to calculation errors in formulas in the table. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05100200.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05100200.xhp index e9717359b6..86a3d60b9d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05100200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05100200.xhp @@ -30,28 +30,28 @@
-Split Cells -Splits the cell or group of cells horizontally or vertically into the number of cells that you enter. +Split Cells +Splits the cell or group of cells horizontally or vertically into the number of cells that you enter.
-Choose Table - Split Cells +Choose Table - Split Cells -On the Table Bar, click +On the Table Bar, click
- + Icon -Split Cells +Split Cells
@@ -59,17 +59,17 @@
-Split cell into -Enter the number of rows or columns that you want to split the selected cell(s) into. -Direction +Split cell into +Enter the number of rows or columns that you want to split the selected cell(s) into. +Direction -Horizontally -Splits the selected cell(s) into the number of rows that you specify in the Split cell into box. +Horizontally +Splits the selected cell(s) into the number of rows that you specify in the Split cell into box. -Into equal proportions -Splits cells into rows of equal height. +Into equal proportions +Splits cells into rows of equal height. -Vertically -Splits the selected cell(s) into the number of columns that you specify in the Split cell into box. +Vertically +Splits the selected cell(s) into the number of columns that you specify in the Split cell into box. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05100500.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05100500.xhp index 3cb70694d3..84bb0c263a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05100500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05100500.xhp @@ -29,11 +29,11 @@
-Top -Aligns the contents of the cell to the top edge of the cell. +Top +Aligns the contents of the cell to the top edge of the cell.
-In the context menu of a cell, choose Cell - Top +In the context menu of a cell, choose Cell - Top
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05100600.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05100600.xhp index 5c9707ade7..3b606d69e2 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05100600.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05100600.xhp @@ -29,11 +29,11 @@
-Center (vertical) -Centers the contents of the cell between top and bottom of the cell. +Center (vertical) +Centers the contents of the cell between top and bottom of the cell.
-In the context menu of a cell, choose Cell - Center +In the context menu of a cell, choose Cell - Center
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05100700.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05100700.xhp index 97a8e57ebb..9158db8fbf 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05100700.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05100700.xhp @@ -29,11 +29,11 @@
-Bottom -Aligns the contents of the cell to the bottom edge of the cell. +Bottom +Aligns the contents of the cell to the bottom edge of the cell.
-In the context menu of a cell, choose Cell - Bottom +In the context menu of a cell, choose Cell - Bottom
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05110000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05110000.xhp index b8c9d2430b..64c856d703 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05110000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05110000.xhp @@ -36,13 +36,13 @@ text; font styles fonts; styles -Style -Use this command to quickly apply font styles to a text selection. +Style +Use this command to quickly apply font styles to a text selection.
-If you place the cursor in a word and do not make a selection, the font style is applied to the entire word. If the cursor is not inside a word, and no text is selected, then the font style is applied to the text that you type. +If you place the cursor in a word and do not make a selection, the font style is applied to the entire word. If the cursor is not inside a word, and no text is selected, then the font style is applied to the text that you type. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05110100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05110100.xhp index 312afd522e..7f67cbb575 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05110100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05110100.xhp @@ -37,10 +37,10 @@ -Bold -Makes the selected text bold. If the cursor is in a word, the entire word is made bold. If the selection or word is already bold, the formatting is removed. +Bold +Makes the selected text bold. If the cursor is in a word, the entire word is made bold. If the selection or word is already bold, the formatting is removed.
-If the cursor is not inside a word, and no text is selected, then the font style is applied to the text that you type. +If the cursor is not inside a word, and no text is selected, then the font style is applied to the text that you type.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05110200.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05110200.xhp index 35dde67d13..8ea497b3d7 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05110200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05110200.xhp @@ -39,10 +39,10 @@ -Italic -Makes the selected text italic. If the cursor is in a word, the entire word is made italic. If the selection or word is already italic, the formatting is removed. +Italic +Makes the selected text italic. If the cursor is in a word, the entire word is made italic. If the selection or word is already italic, the formatting is removed.
-If the cursor is not inside a word, and no text is selected, then the font style is applied to the text that you type. +If the cursor is not inside a word, and no text is selected, then the font style is applied to the text that you type.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05110300.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05110300.xhp index 02d4864f07..39e29e3a81 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05110300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05110300.xhp @@ -34,12 +34,12 @@
characters;underliningunderlining;characters -Underline - Underlines or removes underlining from the selected text. +Underline + Underlines or removes underlining from the selected text.
- If the cursor is not in a word, the new text that you enter is underlined. + If the cursor is not in a word, the new text that you enter is underlined. -Underlines the selected text with two lines. +Underlines the selected text with two lines.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05110400.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05110400.xhp index fbbe6dd81a..d01f6b9484 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05110400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05110400.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
strikethrough;characters -Strikethrough - Draws a line through the selected text, or if the cursor is in a word, the entire word. +Strikethrough + Draws a line through the selected text, or if the cursor is in a word, the entire word.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05110500.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05110500.xhp index efca236a98..41baf5c08a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05110500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05110500.xhp @@ -39,8 +39,8 @@ -Shadows -Adds a shadow to the selected text, or if the cursor is in a word, to the entire word. +Shadows +Adds a shadow to the selected text, or if the cursor is in a word, to the entire word.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05110600m.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05110600m.xhp index 4e2ad048ec..8e284d4bd6 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05110600m.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05110600m.xhp @@ -30,14 +30,14 @@
-Space Rows Equally -Adjusts the height of the selected rows to match the height of the tallest row in the selection. +Space Rows Equally +Adjusts the height of the selected rows to match the height of the tallest row in the selection.
-Choose Table - Autofit - Distribute Rows Equally +Choose Table - Autofit - Distribute Rows Equally @@ -46,12 +46,12 @@ - + Icon -Distribute Rows Equally +Distribute Rows Equally
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05110700.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05110700.xhp index 5f57954393..14c97dcad5 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05110700.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05110700.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
UFI. removed 2 help ids -Superscript -Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline. +Superscript +Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05110800.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05110800.xhp index 67882c8a24..cc0b0b918b 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05110800.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05110800.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
UFI: removed help ids -Subscript -Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline. +Subscript +Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05120000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05120000.xhp index e69461c4e0..6b1fa8bc88 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05120000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05120000.xhp @@ -36,8 +36,8 @@ line spacing; context menu in paragraphs text; line spacing -Line Spacing -Specify the amount of space to leave between lines of text in a paragraph. +Line Spacing +Specify the amount of space to leave between lines of text in a paragraph.
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
-Indents and Spacing +Indents and Spacing
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05120100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05120100.xhp index 14c7931757..121ec303bd 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05120100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05120100.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Single Line - Applies single line spacing to the current paragraph. This is the default setting. +Single Line + Applies single line spacing to the current paragraph. This is the default setting.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05120200.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05120200.xhp index 4ed7158c54..6855491c2c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05120200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05120200.xhp @@ -35,8 +35,8 @@
-1.5 Lines -Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to one and half lines. +1.5 Lines +Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to one and half lines.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05120300.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05120300.xhp index 2ae1114fcb..aac4abe04e 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05120300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05120300.xhp @@ -35,8 +35,8 @@
-Double (Line) -Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to two lines. +Double (Line) +Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to two lines.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05120600.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05120600.xhp index ce594ccb71..abf14e806e 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05120600.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05120600.xhp @@ -30,14 +30,14 @@
-Space Columns Equally -Adjusts the width of the selected columns to match the width of the widest column in the selection. The total width of the table cannot exceed the width of the page. +Space Columns Equally +Adjusts the width of the selected columns to match the width of the widest column in the selection. The total width of the table cannot exceed the width of the page.
-Choose Table - Autofit - Distribute Columns Equally +Choose Table - Autofit - Distribute Columns Equally @@ -46,12 +46,12 @@ - + Icon -Space Columns Equally +Space Columns Equally
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05140100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05140100.xhp index 0c85394288..6dff5f4199 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05140100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05140100.xhp @@ -33,11 +33,11 @@ -Create Style +Create Style This command is a Styl_ist icon - Style name - Enter a name for the new Style. - List of Custom Styles - Lists the user-defined styles that are attached to the current document. + Style name + Enter a name for the new Style. + List of Custom Styles + Lists the user-defined styles that are attached to the current document. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05150101.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05150101.xhp index bc13ed3614..7c88d38d8d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05150101.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05150101.xhp @@ -30,8 +30,8 @@ - Add AutoFormat - Name - Enter a name for the new AutoFormat, and then click OK. + Add AutoFormat + Name + Enter a name for the new AutoFormat, and then click OK. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05190000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05190000.xhp index 6d33068c39..dfef0e8d7d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05190000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05190000.xhp @@ -39,18 +39,18 @@ -Name -Assigns a name to the selected object, so that you can quickly find the object in the Navigator. +Name +Assigns a name to the selected object, so that you can quickly find the object in the Navigator. UFI: #i63800
- + The name is also displayed in the Status Bar when you select the object. -Name -Enter a name for the selected object. The name will be visible in the Navigator. +Name +Enter a name for the selected object. The name will be visible in the Navigator. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05190100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05190100.xhp index a67b017f97..257841a6a9 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05190100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05190100.xhp @@ -32,14 +32,14 @@ titles;objects mw made one index entry out of two "objects;" entries and made "descriptions;" a one level entry -Description -Assigns a title and a description to the selected object. These are accessible for accessibility tools and as alternative tags when you export the document. +Description +Assigns a title and a description to the selected object. These are accessible for accessibility tools and as alternative tags when you export the document.
-Title -Enter a title text. This short name is visible as an alternative tag in HTML format. Accessibility tools can read this text. -Description -Enter a description text. The long description text can be entered to describe a complex object or group of objects to users with screen reader software. The description is visible as an alternative tag for accessibility tools. +Title +Enter a title text. This short name is visible as an alternative tag in HTML format. Accessibility tools can read this text. +Description +Enter a description text. The long description text can be entered to describe a complex object or group of objects to users with screen reader software. The description is visible as an alternative tag for accessibility tools. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05200000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05200000.xhp index fe3b79b391..ee7d727f7a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05200000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05200000.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
-Line - +Line + Sets the formatting options for the selected line.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05200100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05200100.xhp index 493b8aecb8..a0627e26c6 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05200100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05200100.xhp @@ -30,64 +30,64 @@
-Line -Set the formatting options for the selected line or the line that you want to draw. You can also add arrowheads to a line, or change chart symbols. +Line +Set the formatting options for the selected line or the line that you want to draw. You can also add arrowheads to a line, or change chart symbols.
-Line properties +Line properties -Styles -Select the line style that you want to use. +Styles +Select the line style that you want to use. -Colors -Select a color for the line. +Colors +Select a color for the line. -Widths -Select the width for the line. You can append a measurement unit. A zero line width results in a hairline with a width of one pixel of the output medium. +Widths +Select the width for the line. You can append a measurement unit. A zero line width results in a hairline with a width of one pixel of the output medium. -Transparency -Enter the transparency of the line, where 100% corresponds to completely transparent and 0% to completely opaque. - +Transparency +Enter the transparency of the line, where 100% corresponds to completely transparent and 0% to completely opaque. + The Line tab of the Data Series dialog is only available if you select an XY Chart type. -Icon -Set the options for the data point symbols in your chart. -Select -Select the symbol style that you want to use in your chart. If you select Automatic, $[officename] uses the default symbols for the selected chart type. -Width -Enter a width for the symbol. -Height -Enter a height for the symbol. -Keep ratio -Maintains the proportions of the symbol when you enter a new height or width value. -Arrow styles -You can add arrowheads to one end, or both ends of the selected line. To add a custom arrow style to the list, select the arrow in your document, and then click on the Arrow Styles tab of this dialog. +Icon +Set the options for the data point symbols in your chart. +Select +Select the symbol style that you want to use in your chart. If you select Automatic, $[officename] uses the default symbols for the selected chart type. +Width +Enter a width for the symbol. +Height +Enter a height for the symbol. +Keep ratio +Maintains the proportions of the symbol when you enter a new height or width value. +Arrow styles +You can add arrowheads to one end, or both ends of the selected line. To add a custom arrow style to the list, select the arrow in your document, and then click on the Arrow Styles tab of this dialog. -Style -Select the arrowhead that you want to apply to the selected line. +Style +Select the arrowhead that you want to apply to the selected line. -Width -Enter a width for the arrowhead. +Width +Enter a width for the arrowhead. -Center -Places the center of the arrowhead(s) on the endpoint(s) of the selected line. -Synchronize ends -Automatically updates both arrowhead settings when you enter a different width, select a different arrowhead style,or center an arrowhead. -Corner and cap styles +Center +Places the center of the arrowhead(s) on the endpoint(s) of the selected line. +Synchronize ends +Automatically updates both arrowhead settings when you enter a different width, select a different arrowhead style,or center an arrowhead. +Corner and cap styles -Corner style -Select the shape to be used at the corners of the line. In case of a small angle between lines, a mitered shape is replaced with a beveled shape. +Corner style +Select the shape to be used at the corners of the line. In case of a small angle between lines, a mitered shape is replaced with a beveled shape. -Cap style -Select the style of the line end caps. The caps are added to inner dashes as well. +Cap style +Select the style of the line end caps. The caps are added to inner dashes as well. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05200200.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05200200.xhp index 77df05dd05..41a4e17059 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05200200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05200200.xhp @@ -29,50 +29,50 @@
-Line Styles -Edit or create dashed or dotted line styles. +Line Styles +Edit or create dashed or dotted line styles.
-Properties +Properties -Line style -Select the style of line that you want to create. +Line style +Select the style of line that you want to create. -Type -Select the combination of dashes and dots that you want. +Type +Select the combination of dashes and dots that you want. -Number -Enter the number of times that you want a dot or a dash to appear in a sequence. +Number +Enter the number of times that you want a dot or a dash to appear in a sequence. -Length -Enter the length of the dash. +Length +Enter the length of the dash. -Spacing -Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between dots or dashes. +Spacing +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between dots or dashes. -Fit to line width -Automatically adjusts the entries relative to the length of the line. +Fit to line width +Automatically adjusts the entries relative to the length of the line. -Add -Creates a new line style using the current settings. +Add +Creates a new line style using the current settings. -Name -Enter a name. +Name +Enter a name. -Modify -Updates the selected line style using the current settings. To change the name of the selected line style, enter a new name when prompted. +Modify +Updates the selected line style using the current settings. To change the name of the selected line style, enter a new name when prompted. -Load line style table -Imports a list of line styles. +Load line style table +Imports a list of line styles. -Save line style table -Saves the current list of line styles, so that you can load it again later. +Save line style table +Saves the current list of line styles, so that you can load it again later. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp index c752ae21b3..9405509e36 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp @@ -29,33 +29,33 @@
-Arrow Styles -Edit or create arrow styles. +Arrow Styles +Edit or create arrow styles.
-Organize arrow styles -Lets you organize the current list of arrow styles. +Organize arrow styles +Lets you organize the current list of arrow styles. -Title -Displays the name of the selected arrow style. +Title +Displays the name of the selected arrow style. -Arrow style -Choose a predefined arrow style symbol from the list box. +Arrow style +Choose a predefined arrow style symbol from the list box. -Add -To define a custom arrow style, select a drawing object in the document, and then click here. +Add +To define a custom arrow style, select a drawing object in the document, and then click here. -Modify -Changes the name of the selected arrow style. +Modify +Changes the name of the selected arrow style. -Load Arrow Styles -Imports a list of arrow styles. +Load Arrow Styles +Imports a list of arrow styles. -Save Arrow Styles -Saves the current list of arrow styles, so that you can load it later. +Save Arrow Styles +Saves the current list of arrow styles, so that you can load it later. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05210000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05210000.xhp index 895d85f511..9bbd2bc8fb 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05210000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05210000.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
-Area - +Area + Sets the fill properties of the selected drawing object.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp index a114440adf..61e6b457fe 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp @@ -36,46 +36,46 @@ invisible areas -Area -Set the fill options for the selected drawing object. +Area +Set the fill options for the selected drawing object. This is not only for drawing objects, but pages, paragraphs and others too. Need better wording
-You can add custom colors, gradients, hatchings, two color patterns and bitmap patterns to the default lists for later use. +You can add custom colors, gradients, hatchings, two color patterns and bitmap patterns to the default lists for later use.
-None +None Do not fill the selected object. -Color -Fills the object with a color selected on this page. +Color +Fills the object with a color selected on this page. -Gradient -Fills the object with a gradient selected on this page. +Gradient +Fills the object with a gradient selected on this page. -Bitmap -Fills the object with a bitmap pattern selected on this page. To add a bitmap to the list, open this dialog, click the Bitmaps tab, and then click Add / Import. +Bitmap +Fills the object with a bitmap pattern selected on this page. To add a bitmap to the list, open this dialog, click the Bitmaps tab, and then click Add / Import. TODO: write a page about the Pattern tab -Pattern -Fills the object with a simple two color pattern selected on this page. +Pattern +Fills the object with a simple two color pattern selected on this page. -Hatch -Fills the object with a hatching pattern selected on this page. To apply a background color to the hatching pattern, select the Background color box, and then click a color in the list. +Hatch +Fills the object with a hatching pattern selected on this page. To apply a background color to the hatching pattern, select the Background color box, and then click a color in the list. -You can quickly select fill options from the list boxes on the Drawing Object Properties toolbar. +You can quickly select fill options from the list boxes on the Drawing Object Properties toolbar. TODO: This para doesn't belong here anymore, but as several places include it, can't remove yet. Find a better place for it in a later commit. -Select the type of fill that you want to apply to the selected drawing object. +Select the type of fill that you want to apply to the selected drawing object. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp index 301ed13247..9a8b51ce8c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp @@ -29,48 +29,43 @@
-Gradients - Set the properties of a gradient, or save and load gradient lists. +Gradients + Set the properties of a gradient, or save and load gradient lists.
-Type - Select the gradient that you want to apply. +Type + Select the gradient that you want to apply. -Center X - Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current horizontal location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box. +Center X + Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current horizontal location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box. -Center Y - Enter the vertical offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current vertical location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box. +Center Y + Enter the vertical offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current vertical location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box. -Angle - Enter a rotation angle for the selected gradient. +Angle + Enter a rotation angle for the selected gradient. -Border - Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the area of the endpoint color on the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box. - From +Border + Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the area of the endpoint color on the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box. + From -Select a color for the beginning point of the gradient. +Select a color for the beginning point of the gradient. -Enter the intensity for the color in the From box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color. - To +Enter the intensity for the color in the From box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color. + To -Select a color for the endpoint of the gradient. +Select a color for the endpoint of the gradient. -Enter the intensity for the color in the To box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color. +Enter the intensity for the color in the To box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color. -Add - Adds a custom gradient to the current list. Specify the properties of your gradient, and then click this button +Add + Adds a custom gradient to the current list. Specify the properties of your gradient, and then click this button -Modify - Applies the current gradient properties to the selected gradient. If you want, you can save the gradient under a different name. +Modify + Applies the current gradient properties to the selected gradient. If you want, you can save the gradient under a different name. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp index f2b5a86b10..418a6afeff 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp @@ -33,34 +33,34 @@ dotted areas -Hatching -Set the properties of a hatching pattern, or save and load hatching lists. +Hatching +Set the properties of a hatching pattern, or save and load hatching lists.
-Properties -Define or modify a hatching pattern. +Properties +Define or modify a hatching pattern. -Spacing -Enter the amount of space that you want to have between the hatch lines. +Spacing +Enter the amount of space that you want to have between the hatch lines. -Angle -Enter the rotation angle for the hatch lines, or click a position in the angle grid. +Angle +Enter the rotation angle for the hatch lines, or click a position in the angle grid. -Line type -Select the type of hatch lines that you want to use. +Line type +Select the type of hatch lines that you want to use. -Line color -Select the color of the hatch lines. -Hatches List -Lists the available hatching patterns. You can also modify or create your own hatching pattern. +Line color +Select the color of the hatch lines. +Hatches List +Lists the available hatching patterns. You can also modify or create your own hatching pattern. -Add -Adds a custom hatching pattern to the current list. Specify the properties of your hatching pattern, and then click this button. +Add +Adds a custom hatching pattern to the current list. Specify the properties of your hatching pattern, and then click this button. -Modify -Applies the current hatching properties to the selected hatching pattern. If you want, you can save the pattern under a different name. +Modify +Applies the current hatching properties to the selected hatching pattern. If you want, you can save the pattern under a different name. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05210500.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05210500.xhp index d1f5dfaa13..8cf3a91e59 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05210500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05210500.xhp @@ -35,19 +35,19 @@ pattern editor -Bitmap -Select a bitmap that you want to use as a fill pattern, or create your own pixel pattern. You can also import bitmaps, and save or load bitmap lists. +Bitmap +Select a bitmap that you want to use as a fill pattern, or create your own pixel pattern. You can also import bitmaps, and save or load bitmap lists.
-Pattern Editor -Use this editor to create a simple, two-color, 8x8 pixel bitmap pattern. -Grid -To enable this editor, select the Blank bitmap in the bitmap list. +Pattern Editor +Use this editor to create a simple, two-color, 8x8 pixel bitmap pattern. +Grid +To enable this editor, select the Blank bitmap in the bitmap list. -Import -Locate the bitmap that you want to import, and then click Open. The bitmap is added to the end of the list of available bitmaps. +Import +Locate the bitmap that you want to import, and then click Open. The bitmap is added to the end of the list of available bitmaps. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05210600.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05210600.xhp index af30cbf47c..067dd74435 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05210600.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05210600.xhp @@ -37,43 +37,43 @@ shadows; areas -Shadow -Add a shadow to the selected drawing object, and define the properties of the shadow. +Shadow +Add a shadow to the selected drawing object, and define the properties of the shadow.
-Properties -Set the properties of the shadow that you want to apply. +Properties +Set the properties of the shadow that you want to apply. -Use shadow -Adds a shadow to the selected drawing object. +Use shadow +Adds a shadow to the selected drawing object. -Position -Click where you want to cast the shadow. +Position +Click where you want to cast the shadow. -Distance -Enter the distance that you want the shadow to be offset from the selected object. +Distance +Enter the distance that you want the shadow to be offset from the selected object. -Color -Select a color for the shadow. +Color +Select a color for the shadow. -Transparency -Enter a percentage from 0% (opaque) to 100% (transparent) to specify the transparency of the shadow. +Transparency +Enter a percentage from 0% (opaque) to 100% (transparent) to specify the transparency of the shadow.
-Shadow -Adds a shadow to the selected object. If the object already has a shadow, the shadow is removed. If you click this icon when no object is selected, the shadow is added to the next object that you draw. +Shadow +Adds a shadow to the selected object. If the object already has a shadow, the shadow is removed. If you click this icon when no object is selected, the shadow is added to the next object that you draw. - + Icon -Shadow +Shadow
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05210700.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05210700.xhp index f91189e5cc..afcc3522a0 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05210700.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05210700.xhp @@ -35,48 +35,48 @@ areas; transparency -Transparency -Set the transparency options for the fill that you apply to the selected object. +Transparency +Set the transparency options for the fill that you apply to the selected object.
-Transparency mode -Specify the type of transparency that you want to apply. +Transparency mode +Specify the type of transparency that you want to apply. -No transparency -Turns off color transparency. This is the default setting. +No transparency +Turns off color transparency. This is the default setting. -Transparency -Turns on color transparency. Select this option, and then enter a number in the box, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent. +Transparency +Turns on color transparency. Select this option, and then enter a number in the box, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent. -Transparency spin button -Adjusts the transparency of the current fill color. Enter a number between 0% (opaque) and 100% (transparent). +Transparency spin button +Adjusts the transparency of the current fill color. Enter a number between 0% (opaque) and 100% (transparent). -Gradient -Applies a transparency gradient to the current fill color. Select this option, and then set the gradient properties. +Gradient +Applies a transparency gradient to the current fill color. Select this option, and then set the gradient properties. -Type -Select the type of transparency gradient that you want to apply. +Type +Select the type of transparency gradient that you want to apply. -Center X -Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient. +Center X +Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient. -Center Y -Enter the vertical offset for the gradient. +Center Y +Enter the vertical offset for the gradient. -Angle -Enter a rotation angle for the gradient. +Angle +Enter a rotation angle for the gradient. -Border -Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the transparent area of the gradient. The default value is 0%. +Border +Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the transparent area of the gradient. The default value is 0%. -Start value -Enter a transparency value for the beginning point of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent. +Start value +Enter a transparency value for the beginning point of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent. -End value -Enter a transparency value for the endpoint of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent. -Preview -Use the preview to view your changes before you apply the transparency effect to the color fill of the selected object. +End value +Enter a transparency value for the endpoint of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent. +Preview +Use the preview to view your changes before you apply the transparency effect to the color fill of the selected object. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp index 2548d26665..7ebf2cf982 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp @@ -34,63 +34,53 @@ -Text - Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object. +Text + Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object.
- The text is positioned relative to the edges of the drawing or text object. - Text + The text is positioned relative to the edges of the drawing or text object. + Text -Fit width to text - Expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object is smaller than the text. +Fit width to text + Expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object is smaller than the text. -Fit height to text - Expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if the object is smaller than the text. +Fit height to text + Expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if the object is smaller than the text. -Fit to frame - Resizes the text to fit the entire area of the drawing or text object. +Fit to frame + Resizes the text to fit the entire area of the drawing or text object. -Adjust to contour - Adapts the text flow so that it matches the contours of the selected drawing object. +Adjust to contour + Adapts the text flow so that it matches the contours of the selected drawing object. -Word wrap text in shape - Wraps the text that you add after double-clicking a custom shape to fit inside the shape. +Word wrap text in shape + Wraps the text that you add after double-clicking a custom shape to fit inside the shape. -Resize shape to fit text - Resizes a custom shape to fit the text that you enter after double-clicking the shape. - Spacing to borders - Specify the amount of space to leave between the edges of the drawing or text object and the borders of the text. +Resize shape to fit text + Resizes a custom shape to fit the text that you enter after double-clicking the shape. + Spacing to borders + Specify the amount of space to leave between the edges of the drawing or text object and the borders of the text. -Left - Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the drawing or text object and the left border of the text. +Left + Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the drawing or text object and the left border of the text. -Right - Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the drawing or text object and the right border of the text. +Right + Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the drawing or text object and the right border of the text. -Top - Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the drawing or text object and the upper border of the text. +Top + Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the drawing or text object and the upper border of the text. -Bottom - Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom edge of the drawing or text object and the lower border of the text. - Text anchor - Set the anchor type and the anchor position. +Bottom + Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom edge of the drawing or text object and the lower border of the text. + Text anchor + Set the anchor type and the anchor position. -Graphic field - Click where you want to place the anchor for the text. +Graphic field + Click where you want to place the anchor for the text. -Full width - Anchors the text to the full width of the drawing object or text object. +Full width + Anchors the text to the full width of the drawing object or text object. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05230000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05230000.xhp index 4f224bd6f1..93d5749ad2 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05230000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05230000.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
-Position and Size -Resizes, moves, rotates, or slants the selected object. +Position and Size +Resizes, moves, rotates, or slants the selected object.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05230100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05230100.xhp index a705a4dba7..cdf48e257e 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05230100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05230100.xhp @@ -39,54 +39,54 @@ draw objects; anchoring -Position and Size -Resizes or moves the selected object. +Position and Size +Resizes or moves the selected object.
-Position -Specify the location of the selected object on the page. +Position +Specify the location of the selected object on the page. -Position X -Enter the horizontal distance that you want to move the object relative to the base point selected in the grid. +Position X +Enter the horizontal distance that you want to move the object relative to the base point selected in the grid. -Position Y -Enter the vertical distance that you want to move the object relative to the base point selected in the grid. +Position Y +Enter the vertical distance that you want to move the object relative to the base point selected in the grid. -Base point -Click a base point in the grid, and then enter the amount that you want to shift the object relative to the base point that you selected in the Position Y and Position X boxes. The base points correspond to the selection handles on an object. -Size -Specify the amount by which you want to resize the selected object with respect to the selected base point . +Base point +Click a base point in the grid, and then enter the amount that you want to shift the object relative to the base point that you selected in the Position Y and Position X boxes. The base points correspond to the selection handles on an object. +Size +Specify the amount by which you want to resize the selected object with respect to the selected base point . -Width -Enter a width for the selected object. +Width +Enter a width for the selected object. -Height -Enter a height for the selected object. +Height +Enter a height for the selected object. -Keep ratio -Maintains proportions when you resize the selected object. +Keep ratio +Maintains proportions when you resize the selected object. -Base point -Click a base point in the grid, and then enter the new size dimensions for the selected object in the Width and Height boxes. -Protect +Base point +Click a base point in the grid, and then enter the new size dimensions for the selected object in the Width and Height boxes. +Protect -Position -Prevents changes to the position or the size of the selected object. +Position +Prevents changes to the position or the size of the selected object. -Size -Prevents you from resizing the object. -Adapt +Size +Prevents you from resizing the object. +Adapt Specifies, if the size of a drawing object should be adjusted to fit the size of entered text. -Fit width to text +Fit width to text Expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object is smaller than the text. -Fit height to text +Fit height to text Expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
-Anchor types +Anchor types
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05230300.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05230300.xhp index 1da3b369aa..78ca9295c0 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05230300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05230300.xhp @@ -31,32 +31,32 @@
-Rotation -Rotates the selected object. +Rotation +Rotates the selected object.
-Pivot point -The selected object is rotated around a pivot point that you specify. The default pivot point is at the center of the object. -If you set a pivot point too far outside of the object boundaries, the object could be rotated off of the page. +Pivot point +The selected object is rotated around a pivot point that you specify. The default pivot point is at the center of the object. +If you set a pivot point too far outside of the object boundaries, the object could be rotated off of the page. -X Position -Enter the horizontal distance from the left edge of the page to the pivot point. +X Position +Enter the horizontal distance from the left edge of the page to the pivot point. -Y Position -Enter the vertical distance from the top edge of the page to the pivot point. +Y Position +Enter the vertical distance from the top edge of the page to the pivot point. -Defaults -Click where you want to place the pivot point. -Rotation angle -Specify the number of degrees that you want to rotate the selected object, or click in the rotation grid. +Defaults +Click where you want to place the pivot point. +Rotation angle +Specify the number of degrees that you want to rotate the selected object, or click in the rotation grid. -Angle -Enter the number of degrees that you want to rotate the selected object. +Angle +Enter the number of degrees that you want to rotate the selected object. -Defaults -Click to specify the rotation angle in multiples of 45 degrees. +Defaults +Click to specify the rotation angle in multiples of 45 degrees. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp index b789529fd8..7449872642 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp @@ -37,21 +37,21 @@ areas; slanting mw made "slanting;..." a one level entry -Slant & Corner Radius -Slants the selected object, or rounds the corners of a rectangular object. +Slant & Corner Radius +Slants the selected object, or rounds the corners of a rectangular object.
-Corner Radius -You can only round the corners of a rectangular object. +Corner Radius +You can only round the corners of a rectangular object. -Radius -Enter the radius of the circle that you want to use to round the corners. -Slant -Slants the selected object along an axis that you specify. +Radius +Enter the radius of the circle that you want to use to round the corners. +Slant +Slants the selected object along an axis that you specify. -Angle -Enter the angle of the slant axis. +Angle +Enter the angle of the slant axis. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05230500.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05230500.xhp index 3699075782..78388a4255 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05230500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05230500.xhp @@ -38,33 +38,33 @@ captions, see also labels/callouts names, see also labels/callouts mw made "labeling..." a two level entry and added 3 "see also" references -Callout -Specify the properties of the selected callout. +Callout +Specify the properties of the selected callout.
-These callouts are a legacy of the first versions of %PRODUCTNAME. You must customize a toolbar or menu to insert these callouts. The newer custom shape callouts offer more features, for example a Callouts toolbar +These callouts are a legacy of the first versions of %PRODUCTNAME. You must customize a toolbar or menu to insert these callouts. The newer custom shape callouts offer more features, for example a Callouts toolbar Icon where you can select the shape. -Callout Styles -Click the Callout style that you want to apply to the selected callout. +Callout Styles +Click the Callout style that you want to apply to the selected callout. -Spacing -Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the end of the callout line, and the callout box. +Spacing +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the end of the callout line, and the callout box. -Extension -Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box. +Extension +Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box. -Length -Enter the length of the callout line segment that extends from the callout box to the inflection point of the line. -The Length box is only available if you select the Angled connector line callout style, and leave the Optimal checkbox cleared. +Length +Enter the length of the callout line segment that extends from the callout box to the inflection point of the line. +The Length box is only available if you select the Angled connector line callout style, and leave the Optimal checkbox cleared. -Optimal -Click here to display a single-angled line in an optimal way. +Optimal +Click here to display a single-angled line in an optimal way. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05240000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05240000.xhp index b5a2b8a374..750ecc861b 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05240000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05240000.xhp @@ -37,8 +37,8 @@ flipping draw objects -Flip -Flips the selected object horizontally, or vertically. +Flip +Flips the selected object horizontally, or vertically.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05240100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05240100.xhp index 7bafbf02fa..96f53cf651 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05240100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05240100.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ -Vertically -Flips the selected object(s) vertically from top to bottom. +Vertically +Flips the selected object(s) vertically from top to bottom.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05240200.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05240200.xhp index 1db4e826dc..55def2c155 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05240200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05240200.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ -Horizontally -Flips the selected object(s) horizontally from left to right. +Horizontally +Flips the selected object(s) horizontally from left to right.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05250000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05250000.xhp index bd6fb7a60a..99e5f373bc 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05250000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05250000.xhp @@ -44,14 +44,14 @@ -Arrange -Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s). +Arrange +Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
-Layer for text and graphics -Each object that you place in your document is successively stacked on the preceding object. Use the arrange commands to change the stacking order of objects in your document. You cannot change the stacking order of text. +Layer for text and graphics +Each object that you place in your document is successively stacked on the preceding object. Use the arrange commands to change the stacking order of objects in your document. You cannot change the stacking order of text. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05250100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05250100.xhp index 12473e3309..1e405bea34 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05250100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05250100.xhp @@ -34,14 +34,14 @@
-Bring to Front - Moves the selected object to the top of the stacking order, so that it is in front of other objects. +Bring to Front + Moves the selected object to the top of the stacking order, so that it is in front of other objects.
- Layer + Layer
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05250200.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05250200.xhp index 2cd32afa45..29f67cdb24 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05250200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05250200.xhp @@ -32,14 +32,14 @@ -Bring Forward -Moves the selected object up one level, so that it is closer to top of the stacking order. +Bring Forward +Moves the selected object up one level, so that it is closer to top of the stacking order.
-Layer +Layer
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05250300.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05250300.xhp index e0932af2c9..6d78e32be4 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05250300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05250300.xhp @@ -32,14 +32,14 @@ -Send Backward -Moves the selected object down one level, so that it is closer to the bottom of the stacking order. +Send Backward +Moves the selected object down one level, so that it is closer to the bottom of the stacking order.
-Layer +Layer
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05250400.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05250400.xhp index 130ff04a72..cabbf94aa3 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05250400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05250400.xhp @@ -34,14 +34,14 @@
-Send to Back - Moves the selected object to the bottom of the stacking order, so that it is behind the other objects. +Send to Back + Moves the selected object to the bottom of the stacking order, so that it is behind the other objects.
- Layer + Layer
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05250500.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05250500.xhp index 7b7c4f8441..b059bc6506 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05250500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05250500.xhp @@ -33,16 +33,16 @@
- + To Foreground -Moves the selected object in front of text. +Moves the selected object in front of text.
-Layer +Layer
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05250600.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05250600.xhp index 83eba2feb5..cd3efb41ba 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05250600.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05250600.xhp @@ -33,17 +33,17 @@
- + To Background -Moves the selected object behind text. +Moves the selected object behind text.
-Layer +Layer
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05260000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05260000.xhp index 02b1a16cd6..ffe6331565 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05260000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05260000.xhp @@ -29,12 +29,12 @@
-Anchor -Sets the anchoring options for the selected object. +Anchor +Sets the anchoring options for the selected object.
-If the selected object is in a frame, you can also anchor the object to the frame. +If the selected object is in a frame, you can also anchor the object to the frame.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05260100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05260100.xhp index 52942d7f18..6fe0213830 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05260100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05260100.xhp @@ -31,13 +31,13 @@ -To Page -Anchors the selected item to the current page. +To Page +Anchors the selected item to the current page.
-The anchored item remains on the current page even if you insert or delete text. +The anchored item remains on the current page even if you insert or delete text.
-The anchor icon is displayed at the top left corner of the page. +The anchor icon is displayed at the top left corner of the page. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05260200.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05260200.xhp index c2cb8070b2..3a502a1b8c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05260200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05260200.xhp @@ -34,12 +34,12 @@
-To Paragraph - Anchors the selected item to the current paragraph. +To Paragraph + Anchors the selected item to the current paragraph.
- The anchor icon is displayed at the left page margin at the beginning of the paragraph. + The anchor icon is displayed at the left page margin at the beginning of the paragraph. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05260300.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05260300.xhp index 858b2a3786..97e7517d71 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05260300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05260300.xhp @@ -33,14 +33,14 @@ -To Character -Anchors the selected item to a character. This command is only available for graphic objects. +To Character +Anchors the selected item to a character. This command is only available for graphic objects.
-The anchor is displayed in front of the character. -To align a graphic relative to the character that it is anchored to, right-click the graphic, and then choose Image. Click the Type tab, and in the Position area, select Character in the to boxes. +The anchor is displayed in front of the character. +To align a graphic relative to the character that it is anchored to, right-click the graphic, and then choose Image. Click the Type tab, and in the Position area, select Character in the to boxes. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05260400.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05260400.xhp index 3e7610be14..0e2bd542be 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05260400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05260400.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-To Cell - Anchors the selected item to a cell. The anchor icon is displayed in the upper left corner of the cell. +To Cell + Anchors the selected item to a cell. The anchor icon is displayed in the upper left corner of the cell.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05260500.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05260500.xhp index 944881c8e7..8143d4d69e 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05260500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05260500.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-To Frame - Anchors the selected item to the surrounding frame. +To Frame + Anchors the selected item to the surrounding frame.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05260600.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05260600.xhp index 31078fd5ce..c4dbf1ac37 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05260600.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05260600.xhp @@ -30,8 +30,8 @@
-As Character -Anchors the selected item as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected item is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the item is increased. +As Character +Anchors the selected item as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected item is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the item is increased.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05270000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05270000.xhp index 36bce20dd1..59f803033c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05270000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05270000.xhp @@ -33,16 +33,16 @@
-Edit Points -Lets you change the shape of the selected drawing object. +Edit Points +Lets you change the shape of the selected drawing object.
-To edit the shape of a selected drawing object, click the Points icon on the Drawing Bar, and then drag one of the points on the object. +To edit the shape of a selected drawing object, click the Points icon on the Drawing Bar, and then drag one of the points on the object.
-Edit Points Bar +Edit Points Bar
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05280000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05280000.xhp index 300aa11dca..3448d0aef8 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05280000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05280000.xhp @@ -33,307 +33,307 @@
-Fontwork Dialog (Previous Version) -Edits Fontwork effects of the selected object that has been created with the previous Fontwork dialog.UFI: this old dialog is still available to edit old docs containing old Fontwork objects. See "Fontwork_ui" spec doc. -This Fontwork dialog is only available for Fontwork in old Writer text documents that were created prior to OpenOffice.org 2.0. You must first call Tools - Customize to add a menu command or an icon to open this dialog.UFI: the command is in Customize dialog at Format-Fontwork +Fontwork Dialog (Previous Version) +Edits Fontwork effects of the selected object that has been created with the previous Fontwork dialog.UFI: this old dialog is still available to edit old docs containing old Fontwork objects. See "Fontwork_ui" spec doc. +This Fontwork dialog is only available for Fontwork in old Writer text documents that were created prior to OpenOffice.org 2.0. You must first call Tools - Customize to add a menu command or an icon to open this dialog.UFI: the command is in Customize dialog at Format-Fontwork
-You can change the shape of the text baseline to match semicircles, arcs, circles, and freeform lines. -Alignment icons +You can change the shape of the text baseline to match semicircles, arcs, circles, and freeform lines. +Alignment icons -Click the shape of the baseline that you want to use for the text. -The top row contains the following baseline shapes: Upper Semicircle, Lower Semicircle, Left Semicircle and Right Semicircle. -The middle row contains the following baseline shapes: Upper Arc, Lower Arc, Left Arc and Right Arc. -The bottom row contains the following baseline shapes: Open Circle, Closed Circle, Closed Circle II, and Open Circle Vertical. For the best results, the drawing object must contain more than two lines of text. +Click the shape of the baseline that you want to use for the text. +The top row contains the following baseline shapes: Upper Semicircle, Lower Semicircle, Left Semicircle and Right Semicircle. +The middle row contains the following baseline shapes: Upper Arc, Lower Arc, Left Arc and Right Arc. +The bottom row contains the following baseline shapes: Open Circle, Closed Circle, Closed Circle II, and Open Circle Vertical. For the best results, the drawing object must contain more than two lines of text. -Removes baseline formatting. +Removes baseline formatting. - + Icon -Off +Off
-Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline. +Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline. - + Icon -Rotate +Rotate
-Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline and preserves the original vertical alignment of the individual characters. +Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline and preserves the original vertical alignment of the individual characters. - + Icon -Upright +Upright
-Horizontally slants the characters in the text object. +Horizontally slants the characters in the text object. - + Icon -Slant Horizontal +Slant Horizontal
-Vertically slants the characters in the text object. +Vertically slants the characters in the text object. - + Icon -Slant Vertical +Slant Vertical
-Reverses the text flow direction, and flips the text horizontally or vertically. To use this command, you must first apply a different baseline to the text. +Reverses the text flow direction, and flips the text horizontally or vertically. To use this command, you must first apply a different baseline to the text. - + Icon -Orientation +Orientation
-Aligns the text to the left end of the text baseline. +Aligns the text to the left end of the text baseline. - + Icon -Align Left +Align Left
-Centers the text on the text baseline. +Centers the text on the text baseline. - + Icon -Center +Center
-Aligns the text to the right end of the text baseline. +Aligns the text to the right end of the text baseline. - + Icon -Align Right +Align Right
-Resizes the text to fit the length of the text baseline. +Resizes the text to fit the length of the text baseline. - + Icon -AutoSize Text +AutoSize Text
-Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the text baseline and the base of the individual characters. +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the text baseline and the base of the individual characters. - + Icon -Distance +Distance
-Enter the amount of space to leave between the beginning of the text baseline, and the beginning of the text. +Enter the amount of space to leave between the beginning of the text baseline, and the beginning of the text. - + Icon -Indent +Indent
-Shows or hides the text baseline, or the edges of the selected object. +Shows or hides the text baseline, or the edges of the selected object. - + Icon -Contour +Contour
-Shows or hides the borders of the individual characters in the text. +Shows or hides the borders of the individual characters in the text. - + Icon -Text Contour +Text Contour
-Removes the shadow effects that you applied to the text. +Removes the shadow effects that you applied to the text. - + Icon -No Shadow +No Shadow
-Adds a shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes. +Adds a shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes. - + Icon -Vertical +Vertical
-Adds a slant shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes. +Adds a slant shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes. - + Icon -Slant +Slant
-Horizontal Distance -Enter the horizontal distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow. +Horizontal Distance +Enter the horizontal distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow. - + Icon -X Distance +X Distance
-Vertical Distance -Enter the vertical distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow. +Vertical Distance +Enter the vertical distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow. - + Icon -Y Distance +Y Distance
-Shadow Color -Select a color for the text shadow. +Shadow Color +Select a color for the text shadow.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05290000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05290000.xhp index ecbb24fde3..f4e6553b29 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05290000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05290000.xhp @@ -32,28 +32,28 @@
-Group -Groups keep together selected objects, so that they can be moved or formatted as a single object. +Group +Groups keep together selected objects, so that they can be moved or formatted as a single object.
-Working with groups -To edit the individual objects of a group, select the group, right-click, and then choose Enter Group +Working with groups +To edit the individual objects of a group, select the group, right-click, and then choose Enter Group Group - Enter Group -When you are editing a group, the objects that are not part of the group are faded. -Use Tab and Shift+Tab to move forwards and backwards through the objects in a group. -To exit a group, right-click, and then choose Exit Group +When you are editing a group, the objects that are not part of the group are faded. +Use Tab and Shift+Tab to move forwards and backwards through the objects in a group. +To exit a group, right-click, and then choose Exit Group Group - Exit Group -Group +Group -Ungroup +Ungroup -Enter Group +Enter Group -Exit Group +Exit Group diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05290100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05290100.xhp index d86bcb0348..f1b7f4f4be 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05290100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05290100.xhp @@ -33,11 +33,11 @@ -Group - Groups the selected objects, so that they can be moved as a single object. +Group + Groups the selected objects, so that they can be moved as a single object.
- The properties of individual objects are maintained even after you group the objects. You can nest groups, that is, you can have a group within a group. + The properties of individual objects are maintained even after you group the objects. You can nest groups, that is, you can have a group within a group. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05290200.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05290200.xhp index fd940974f0..ef5f8af577 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05290200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05290200.xhp @@ -33,11 +33,11 @@ -Ungroup - Breaks apart the selected group into individual objects. +Ungroup + Breaks apart the selected group into individual objects.
- To break apart the nested groups within a group, you must repeat this command on each subgroup. + To break apart the nested groups within a group, you must repeat this command on each subgroup. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05290300.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05290300.xhp index ce66f8827a..de0c5fc234 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05290300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05290300.xhp @@ -32,15 +32,15 @@ -Enter Group - Opens the selected group, so that you can edit the individual objects. If the selected group contains nested group, you can repeat this command on the subgroups. This command does not permanently ungroup the objects. +Enter Group + Opens the selected group, so that you can edit the individual objects. If the selected group contains nested group, you can repeat this command on the subgroups. This command does not permanently ungroup the objects.
- To select an individual object in a group, hold down Command Ctrl , and then click the object. + To select an individual object in a group, hold down Command Ctrl , and then click the object.
- Groups - Exit Group + Groups + Exit Group
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05290400.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05290400.xhp index 9b405a5f5f..637c281cb1 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05290400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05290400.xhp @@ -33,14 +33,14 @@ -Exit Group - Exits the group, so that you can no longer edit the individual objects in the group. If you are in a nested group, only the nested group is closed. +Exit Group + Exits the group, so that you can no longer edit the individual objects in the group. If you are in a nested group, only the nested group is closed.
- Groups - Enter Group + Groups + Enter Group
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp index dcf92fceeb..7a81c86288 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp @@ -30,94 +30,94 @@
-Text Animation -Adds an animation effect to the text in the selected drawing object. +Text Animation +Adds an animation effect to the text in the selected drawing object.
-Text animation effects -Select the effect that you want to apply, and then set the properties of the effect. -Effects -Select the animation effect that you want to apply to the text in the selected drawing object. To remove an animation effect, select No Effect. -To the Left -Scrolls text from right to left. +Text animation effects +Select the effect that you want to apply, and then set the properties of the effect. +Effects +Select the animation effect that you want to apply to the text in the selected drawing object. To remove an animation effect, select No Effect. +To the Left +Scrolls text from right to left. - + Icon -Left arrow +Left arrow
-To the Right -Scrolls text from left to right. +To the Right +Scrolls text from left to right. - + Icon -Right arrow +Right arrow
-To the Top -Scrolls text from bottom to top. +To the Top +Scrolls text from bottom to top. - + Icon -Up arrow +Up arrow
-To the Bottom -Scrolls text from top to bottom. +To the Bottom +Scrolls text from top to bottom. - + Icon -Down arrow +Down arrow
-Properties -Start Inside -Text is visible and inside the drawing object when the effect is applied. -Text visible when exitingi60202 -Text remains visible after the effect is applied. -Animation effects -Set the looping options for the animation effect. -Continuous -Plays the animation effect continuously. To specify the number of times to play the effect, clear this checkbox, and enter a number in the Continuous box. -Continuous box -Enter the number of times that you want the animation effect to repeat. -Increment -Specify the increment value for scrolling the text. -Pixels -Measures increment value in pixels. -Increment box -Enter the number of increments by which to scroll the text. -Delay -Specify the amount time to wait before repeating the effect. -Automatic -$[officename] automatically determines the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect. To manually assign the delay period, clear this checkbox, and then enter a value in the Automatic box. -Automatic box -Enter the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect. +Properties +Start Inside +Text is visible and inside the drawing object when the effect is applied. +Text visible when exitingi60202 +Text remains visible after the effect is applied. +Animation effects +Set the looping options for the animation effect. +Continuous +Plays the animation effect continuously. To specify the number of times to play the effect, clear this checkbox, and enter a number in the Continuous box. +Continuous box +Enter the number of times that you want the animation effect to repeat. +Increment +Specify the increment value for scrolling the text. +Pixels +Measures increment value in pixels. +Increment box +Enter the number of increments by which to scroll the text. +Delay +Specify the amount time to wait before repeating the effect. +Automatic +$[officename] automatically determines the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect. To manually assign the delay period, clear this checkbox, and then enter a value in the Automatic box. +Automatic box +Enter the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp index ad1db73507..fcba24a0b6 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp @@ -30,22 +30,21 @@ -Row Height - Changes the height of the current row, or the selected rows. +Row Height + Changes the height of the current row, or the selected rows. - You can also change the height of a row by dragging the divider below the row header. To fit the row height to the cell contents, double-click the divider. + You can also change the height of a row by dragging the divider below the row header. To fit the row height to the cell contents, double-click the divider.
-Height - Enter the row height that you want to use. +Height + Enter the row height that you want to use. -Default value - Adjusts the row height to the size based on the default template. Existing contents may be shown vertically cropped. The height no longer increases automatically when you enter larger contents. +Default value + Adjusts the row height to the size based on the default template. Existing contents may be shown vertically cropped. The height no longer increases automatically when you enter larger contents. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05340200.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05340200.xhp index 450a068f64..b186f019b2 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05340200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05340200.xhp @@ -33,15 +33,15 @@ -Column width - Changes the width of the current column, or the selected columns. +Column width + Changes the width of the current column, or the selected columns.
- You can also change the width of a column by dragging the divider beside the column header. To fit the column width to the cell contents, double-click the divider. - Width - Enter the column width that you want to use. - Default value Automatic - Automatically adjusts the column width based on the current font. + You can also change the width of a column by dragging the divider beside the column header. To fit the column width to the cell contents, double-click the divider. + Width + Enter the column width that you want to use. + Default value Automatic + Automatically adjusts the column width based on the current font. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp index 8869f344ad..703b7a3c3b 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp @@ -32,52 +32,52 @@ cells; aligning -Alignment -Sets the alignment options for the contents of the current cell, or the selected cells. +Alignment +Sets the alignment options for the contents of the current cell, or the selected cells.
-Horizontal -Select the horizontal alignment option that you want to apply to the cell contents. -Default -Aligns numbers to the right, and text to the left. -If the Default option is selected, numbers will be aligned to the right and text will be left-justified.UFI: removed two help idsUFI: reason: Help IDs .uno:AlignLeft, AlignRight, AlignBlock, AlignHorizontalCenter are the same for Objects in Draw/Impress and for text alignment in Calc. Unfortunately both sets of files are located in shared folder... Must create a special file in scalc or add those as hidden texts to a file in scalc. -Left -Aligns the contents of the cell to the left. +Horizontal +Select the horizontal alignment option that you want to apply to the cell contents. +Default +Aligns numbers to the right, and text to the left. +If the Default option is selected, numbers will be aligned to the right and text will be left-justified.UFI: removed two help idsUFI: reason: Help IDs .uno:AlignLeft, AlignRight, AlignBlock, AlignHorizontalCenter are the same for Objects in Draw/Impress and for text alignment in Calc. Unfortunately both sets of files are located in shared folder... Must create a special file in scalc or add those as hidden texts to a file in scalc. +Left +Aligns the contents of the cell to the left. UFI: removed two help ids -Right -Aligns the contents of the cell to the right. +Right +Aligns the contents of the cell to the right. UFI: removed two help ids -Center -Horizontally centers the contents of the cell. +Center +Horizontally centers the contents of the cell. UFI: removed two help ids -Justified -Aligns the contents of the cell to the left and to the right cell borders. +Justified +Aligns the contents of the cell to the left and to the right cell borders. -Filled -Repeats the cell contents (number and text) until the visible area of the cell is filled. This feature does not work on text that contains line breaks. -Distributed -Aligns contents evenly across the whole cell. Unlike Justified, it justifies the very last line of text, too. +Filled +Repeats the cell contents (number and text) until the visible area of the cell is filled. This feature does not work on text that contains line breaks. +Distributed +Aligns contents evenly across the whole cell. Unlike Justified, it justifies the very last line of text, too. -Indent -Indents from the left edge of the cell by the amount that you enter. +Indent +Indents from the left edge of the cell by the amount that you enter. -Vertical -Select the vertical alignment option that you want to apply to the cell contents. -Default -Aligns the cell contents to the bottom of the cell.UFI: removed two help ids -Top -Aligns the contents of the cell to the upper edge of the cell. +Vertical +Select the vertical alignment option that you want to apply to the cell contents. +Default +Aligns the cell contents to the bottom of the cell.UFI: removed two help ids +Top +Aligns the contents of the cell to the upper edge of the cell. @@ -86,13 +86,13 @@ UFI: removed two help ids -Bottom -Aligns the contents of the cell to the lower edge of the cell. +Bottom +Aligns the contents of the cell to the lower edge of the cell. UFI: removed two help ids -Middle -Vertically centers the contents of the cell. +Middle +Vertically centers the contents of the cell. @@ -100,53 +100,53 @@ Aligns the contents of the cell to the top and to the bottom cell borders. Distributed Same as Justified, unless the text orientation is vertical. Then it behaves similarly, than horizontal Distributed setting, i.e. the very last line is justified, too. -Text orientation -Sets the text orientation of the cell contents. +Text orientation +Sets the text orientation of the cell contents. -Click in the dial to set the text orientation. +Click in the dial to set the text orientation. -Degrees -Enter the rotation angle for the text in the selected cell(s). A positive number rotates the text to the left and a negative number rotates the text to the right. +Degrees +Enter the rotation angle for the text in the selected cell(s). A positive number rotates the text to the left and a negative number rotates the text to the right. -Reference edge -Specify the cell edge from which to write the rotated text. +Reference edge +Specify the cell edge from which to write the rotated text. - + Text Extension From Lower Cell Border: Writes the rotated text from the bottom cell edge outwards. - + Text Extension From Upper Cell Border: Writes the rotated text from the top cell edge outwards. - + Text Extension Inside Cells: Writes the rotated text only within the cell. -Vertically stacked -Aligns text vertically.UFI: see spec "Shrink to fit" +Vertically stacked +Aligns text vertically.UFI: see spec "Shrink to fit" -Asian layout mode -This checkbox is only available if Asian language support is enabled and the text direction is set to vertical. Aligns Asian characters one below the other in the selected cell(s). If the cell contains more than one line of text, the lines are converted to text columns that are arranged from right to left. Western characters in the converted text are rotated 90 degrees to the right. Asian characters are not rotated. -Properties -Determine the text flow in a cell. +Asian layout mode +This checkbox is only available if Asian language support is enabled and the text direction is set to vertical. Aligns Asian characters one below the other in the selected cell(s). If the cell contains more than one line of text, the lines are converted to text columns that are arranged from right to left. Western characters in the converted text are rotated 90 degrees to the right. Asian characters are not rotated. +Properties +Determine the text flow in a cell. -Wrap text automatically -Wraps text onto another line at the cell border. The number of lines depends on the width of the cell. To enter a manual line break, press Command +Wrap text automatically +Wraps text onto another line at the cell border. The number of lines depends on the width of the cell. To enter a manual line break, press Command Ctrl+Enter in the cell.conditional switches inside AVIS do not work -Hyphenation active -Enables word hyphenation for text wrapping to the next line. +Hyphenation active +Enables word hyphenation for text wrapping to the next line. -Shrink to fit cell size -Reduces the apparent size of the font so that the contents of the cell fit into the current cell width. You cannot apply this command to a cell that contains line breaks. +Shrink to fit cell size +Reduces the apparent size of the font so that the contents of the cell fit into the current cell width. You cannot apply this command to a cell that contains line breaks. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05340400.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05340400.xhp index b240e92cbf..2e061e894f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05340400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05340400.xhp @@ -35,174 +35,174 @@ databases; editing tables editing; database tables and queries queries; editing in data source view -mw deleted "database tables," and changed "tables in databases;" -Data Sources -This section contains information on browsing and editing database tables. +mw deleted "database tables," and changed "tables in databases;" +Data Sources +This section contains information on browsing and editing database tables.
-You cannot use the data source browser on a database table that is open in Design view. -Data source browser -The commands for the data source browser are found on the Table Data bar and in context menus. -Selecting records -To select a record in a database table, click the row header, or click a row header, and then use the Up or Down arrow keys. -Select database records. Drag-and-drop rows or cells to the document to insert contents. Drag-and-drop column headers to insert fields. -The following table describes how to select individual elements in the data source browser: +You cannot use the data source browser on a database table that is open in Design view. +Data source browser +The commands for the data source browser are found on the Table Data bar and in context menus. +Selecting records +To select a record in a database table, click the row header, or click a row header, and then use the Up or Down arrow keys. +Select database records. Drag-and-drop rows or cells to the document to insert contents. Drag-and-drop column headers to insert fields. +The following table describes how to select individual elements in the data source browser: -Selection +Selection -Action +Action -Record +Record -Click the row header +Click the row header -Several records or removing a selection +Several records or removing a selection -Hold down CommandCtrl and click the row header +Hold down CommandCtrl and click the row header -Column +Column -Click the column header +Click the column header -Data field +Data field -Click in the data field +Click in the data field -Entire table +Entire table -Click the row header of the column headings +Click the row header of the column headings
-Table Data toolbar (editing table data) +Table Data toolbar (editing table data) - + Icon -Allows you to edit, add, or delete records from the database table.removed 3 ancient paras +Allows you to edit, add, or delete records from the database table.removed 3 ancient paras
-Cutting, copying and pasting data -You can cut, copy, and paste records in Data Source view. The Data Source browser also supports the dragging and dropping of records, or text and numbers from other $[officename] files. -You cannot drag and drop to Yes/No, binary, image, or counting table fields. -Drag and drop only works in Edit mode. +Cutting, copying and pasting data +You can cut, copy, and paste records in Data Source view. The Data Source browser also supports the dragging and dropping of records, or text and numbers from other $[officename] files. +You cannot drag and drop to Yes/No, binary, image, or counting table fields. +Drag and drop only works in Edit mode. -Navigating in the Data Source Browser -Use the Form Navigation bar at the bottom of the Data Source view to navigate between different records. -First record +Navigating in the Data Source Browser +Use the Form Navigation bar at the bottom of the Data Source view to navigate between different records. +First record - + Icon -Go to the first record in the table. +Go to the first record in the table.
-Previous record +Previous record - + Icon -Go to the previous record in the table. +Go to the previous record in the table.
-Record number +Record number -Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter. -Next record +Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter. +Next record - + Icon -Go to the next record in the table. +Go to the next record in the table.
-Last record +Last record - + Icon -Go to the last record in the table. +Go to the last record in the table.
-New record +New record - + Icon -Inserts a new record into the current table. To create a record, click the asterisk (*) button at the bottom of the table view. An empty row is added at the end of the table. +Inserts a new record into the current table. To create a record, click the asterisk (*) button at the bottom of the table view. An empty row is added at the end of the table.
-Number of records +Number of records -Displays the number of records. For example, "Record 7 of 9(2)" indicates that two records (2) are selected in a table containing 9 records, and that the cursor is in record number 7. -Organizing tables -To access the commands for formatting the table, right-click a column header, or a row header. -Table Format +Displays the number of records. For example, "Record 7 of 9(2)" indicates that two records (2) are selected in a table containing 9 records, and that the cursor is in record number 7. +Organizing tables +To access the commands for formatting the table, right-click a column header, or a row header. +Table Format -Row Height +Row Height -Column Format +Column Format -Column Width +Column Width diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05340402.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05340402.xhp index baf5bb0d24..3d727e47a2 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05340402.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05340402.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ - Table format - Formats the selected row(s). + Table format + Formats the selected row(s).
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05340404.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05340404.xhp index a36762128e..3b41db8f18 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05340404.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05340404.xhp @@ -31,12 +31,12 @@
-Delete Rows -Deletes the selected row(s). +Delete Rows +Deletes the selected row(s).
-This command can be activated only when you select the Edit icon on the Table Data bar or Standard bar. +This command can be activated only when you select the Edit icon on the Table Data bar or Standard bar. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05340405.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05340405.xhp index 2f0e771c20..bfdd80c4fc 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05340405.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05340405.xhp @@ -32,12 +32,12 @@ - Column format - Formats the selected column(s). + Column format + Formats the selected column(s).
- Format + Format diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05340500.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05340500.xhp index c0e03ea972..ee2166a6fc 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05340500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05340500.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
-Hide Columns -Hides the selected column(s). To display hidden columns, right-click any column header, and then choose Show Columns. +Hide Columns +Hides the selected column(s). To display hidden columns, right-click any column header, and then choose Show Columns.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05340600.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05340600.xhp index 5b2c2e6934..7213169443 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05340600.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05340600.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
-Show Columns -Displays hidden columns. Choose the column that you want to display from the list, or click All to display all of the hidden columns. +Show Columns +Displays hidden columns. Choose the column that you want to display from the list, or click All to display all of the hidden columns.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05350000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05350000.xhp index 9f66a2e337..5d797f16af 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05350000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05350000.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
-3D Effects -Specifies the properties of 3D object(s) in the current document. +3D Effects +Specifies the properties of 3D object(s) in the current document.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp index fccb983571..9280de54ce 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp @@ -30,111 +30,111 @@
-Geometry -Adjusts the shape of the selected 3D object. You can only modify the shape of a 3D object that was created by converting a 2D object. To convert a 2D object to 3D, select the object, right-click, and then choose Convert - To 3D, or Convert - To 3D Rotation Object. +Geometry +Adjusts the shape of the selected 3D object. You can only modify the shape of a 3D object that was created by converting a 2D object. To convert a 2D object to 3D, select the object, right-click, and then choose Convert - To 3D, or Convert - To 3D Rotation Object.
-Geometry -Define the shape properties for the selected 3D object. -Rounded edges -Enter the amount by which you want to round the corners of the selected 3D object. -Scaled depth -Enter the amount by which to increase or decrease the area of the front side of the selected 3D object. -Rotation angle -Enter the angle in degrees to rotate the selected 3D rotation object. -Depth -Enter the extrusion depth for the selected 3D object. This option is not valid for 3D rotation objects. -Segments -You can change the number of segments that are used to draw a 3D rotation object. -Horizontal -Enter the number of horizontal segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object. -Vertical -Enter the number of vertical segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object -Normals -Allows you to modify the rendering style of the 3D surface. -Object-Specific -Renders the 3D surface according to the shape of the object. For example, a circular shape is rendered with a spherical surface. +Geometry +Define the shape properties for the selected 3D object. +Rounded edges +Enter the amount by which you want to round the corners of the selected 3D object. +Scaled depth +Enter the amount by which to increase or decrease the area of the front side of the selected 3D object. +Rotation angle +Enter the angle in degrees to rotate the selected 3D rotation object. +Depth +Enter the extrusion depth for the selected 3D object. This option is not valid for 3D rotation objects. +Segments +You can change the number of segments that are used to draw a 3D rotation object. +Horizontal +Enter the number of horizontal segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object. +Vertical +Enter the number of vertical segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object +Normals +Allows you to modify the rendering style of the 3D surface. +Object-Specific +Renders the 3D surface according to the shape of the object. For example, a circular shape is rendered with a spherical surface. - + Icon -Object-Specific +Object-Specific
-Flat -Renders the 3D surface as polygons. +Flat +Renders the 3D surface as polygons. - + Icon -Flat +Flat
-Spherical -Renders a smooth 3D surface. +Spherical +Renders a smooth 3D surface. - + Icon -Spherical +Spherical
-Invert Normals -Inverts the light source. +Invert Normals +Inverts the light source. - + Icon -Invert Normals +Invert Normals
-Double-sided Illumination -Lights the object from the outside and the inside. To use an ambient light source, click this button, and then click the Invert Normals button. +Double-sided Illumination +Lights the object from the outside and the inside. To use an ambient light source, click this button, and then click the Invert Normals button. - + Icon -Double-sided illumination +Double-sided illumination
-Double-Sided -Closes the shape of a 3D object that was created by extruding a freeform line (Convert - To 3D). +Double-Sided +Closes the shape of a 3D object that was created by extruding a freeform line (Convert - To 3D). - + Icon -Double-Sided +Double-Sided
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp index f0907b971f..85c948e0d0 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp @@ -32,43 +32,43 @@
-Shading -Sets the shading and shadow options for the selected 3D object. +Shading +Sets the shading and shadow options for the selected 3D object.
-Shading -Specify the type of shading to apply to the selected 3D object. +Shading +Specify the type of shading to apply to the selected 3D object. -Mode -Select the shading method that you want to use. Flat shading assigns a single color to a single polygon on the surface of the object. Gouraud shading blends colors across the polygons. Phong shading averages the color of each pixel based on the pixels that surround it, and requires the most processing power. +Mode +Select the shading method that you want to use. Flat shading assigns a single color to a single polygon on the surface of the object. Gouraud shading blends colors across the polygons. Phong shading averages the color of each pixel based on the pixels that surround it, and requires the most processing power. -Shadow -Adds or removes a shadow from the selected 3D object. +Shadow +Adds or removes a shadow from the selected 3D object. - + Icon -3D Shadowing On/Off +3D Shadowing On/Off
-Surface angle -Enter an angle from 0 to 90 degrees for casting the shadow. -Camera -Set the camera options for the selected 3D object. +Surface angle +Enter an angle from 0 to 90 degrees for casting the shadow. +Camera +Set the camera options for the selected 3D object. -Distance -Enter the distance to leave between the camera and the center of the selected object. +Distance +Enter the distance to leave between the camera and the center of the selected object. -Focal length -Enter the focal length of the camera, where a small value corresponds to a "fisheye" lens, and a large value to a telephoto lens. +Focal length +Enter the focal length of the camera, where a small value corresponds to a "fisheye" lens, and a large value to a telephoto lens. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp index 7b09ed40cb..579d59519c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp @@ -32,14 +32,14 @@
-Illumination -Define the light source for the selected 3D object. +Illumination +Define the light source for the selected 3D object.
-Illumination -Specify the light source for the object, as well as the color of the light source and of the ambient light. You can define up to eight different light sources. +Illumination +Specify the light source for the object, as well as the color of the light source and of the ambient light. You can define up to eight different light sources. @@ -48,17 +48,17 @@ -Light source -Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box. You can also press the Spacebar to turn the light source on or off. +Light source +Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box. You can also press the Spacebar to turn the light source on or off. - + Icon -Light is on +Light is on
@@ -66,32 +66,32 @@ - + Icon -Light is off +Light is off
-Color Selection -Select a color for the current light source. +Color Selection +Select a color for the current light source. -Select Color in the color dialog +Select Color in the color dialog -Ambient light +Ambient light -Color Selection -Select a color for the ambient light. +Color Selection +Select a color for the ambient light. -Select Color Through the Color Dialog +Select Color Through the Color Dialog -Preview -Displays a preview of the light source changes. +Preview +Displays a preview of the light source changes. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp index 2e7e44eaf6..93e3e7faa1 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp @@ -32,196 +32,196 @@
-Textures -Sets the properties of the surface texture for the selected 3D object. This feature is only available after you apply a surface texture to the selected object. To quickly apply a surface texture, open the Gallery, hold down Shift+CommandCtrl, and then drag an image onto the selected 3D object. +Textures +Sets the properties of the surface texture for the selected 3D object. This feature is only available after you apply a surface texture to the selected object. To quickly apply a surface texture, open the Gallery, hold down Shift+CommandCtrl, and then drag an image onto the selected 3D object.
-Textures -Sets the texture properties. -Type -Set the color properties of the texture. +Textures +Sets the texture properties. +Type +Set the color properties of the texture. -Black & White -Converts the texture to black and white. +Black & White +Converts the texture to black and white. - + Icon -Black & White +Black & White
-Color -Converts the texture to color. +Color +Converts the texture to color. - + Icon -Color +Color
-Mode -Show or hide shading. +Mode +Show or hide shading. -Only Texture -Applies the texture without shading. +Only Texture +Applies the texture without shading. - + Icon -Only Texture +Only Texture
-Texture and Shading -Applies the texture with shading. To define the shading options for the texture, click the Shading button in this dialog. +Texture and Shading +Applies the texture with shading. To define the shading options for the texture, click the Shading button in this dialog. - + Icon -Texture and Shading +Texture and Shading
-Projection X -Set the options for displaying the texture. +Projection X +Set the options for displaying the texture. -Object-specific -Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object. +Object-specific +Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object. - + Icon -Object-specific +Object-specific
-Parallel -Applies the texture parallel to the horizontal axis. +Parallel +Applies the texture parallel to the horizontal axis. - + Icon -Parallel +Parallel
-Circular -Wraps the horizontal axis of the texture pattern around a sphere. +Circular +Wraps the horizontal axis of the texture pattern around a sphere. - + Icon -Circular +Circular
-Projection Y -Click the respective buttons to define the texture for the object Y axis. +Projection Y +Click the respective buttons to define the texture for the object Y axis. -Object-specific -Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object. +Object-specific +Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object. - + Icon -Object-specific +Object-specific
-Parallel -Applies the texture parallel to the vertical axis. +Parallel +Applies the texture parallel to the vertical axis. - + Icon -Parallel +Parallel
-Circular -Wraps the vertical axis of the texture pattern around a sphere. +Circular +Wraps the vertical axis of the texture pattern around a sphere. - + Icon -Circular +Circular
-Filter -Filters out some of the 'noise' that can occur when you apply a texture to a 3D object. +Filter +Filters out some of the 'noise' that can occur when you apply a texture to a 3D object. -Filtering On/Off -Blurs the texture slightly to remove unwanted speckles. +Filtering On/Off +Blurs the texture slightly to remove unwanted speckles. - + Icon -Filtering On/Off +Filtering On/Off
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp index eec291ab56..6586af0ece 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp @@ -32,42 +32,42 @@
-Material -Changes the coloring of the selected 3D object. +Material +Changes the coloring of the selected 3D object.
-Material -Assigns a predefined color scheme or lets you create your own color scheme. +Material +Assigns a predefined color scheme or lets you create your own color scheme. -Favorites -Select a predefined color scheme, or select User-defined to define a custom color scheme. +Favorites +Select a predefined color scheme, or select User-defined to define a custom color scheme. -Object color -Select the color that you want to apply to the object. +Object color +Select the color that you want to apply to the object. -Select Color Through the Color Dialog +Select Color Through the Color Dialog -Illumination color -Select the color to illuminate the object. +Illumination color +Select the color to illuminate the object. -Select Color Through the Color Dialog +Select Color Through the Color Dialog -Specular -Sets the light reflection properties for the selected object. +Specular +Sets the light reflection properties for the selected object. -Color -Select the color that you want the object to reflect. +Color +Select the color that you want the object to reflect. -Select Color Through the Color Dialog +Select Color Through the Color Dialog -Intensity -Enter the intensity of the specular effect. +Intensity +Enter the intensity of the specular effect. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05360000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05360000.xhp index 150c117e0a..c6ebb60ddc 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05360000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05360000.xhp @@ -32,47 +32,47 @@ -Distribution - +Distribution + Distributes three or more selected objects evenly along the horizontal axis or the vertical axis. You can also evenly distribute the spacing between objects.
-Objects are distributed with respect to the outermost objects in the selection. -Horizontally -Specify the horizontal distribution for the selected objects. +Objects are distributed with respect to the outermost objects in the selection. +Horizontally +Specify the horizontal distribution for the selected objects. -None -Does not distribute the objects horizontally. +None +Does not distribute the objects horizontally. -Left -Distributes the selected objects, so that the left edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. +Left +Distributes the selected objects, so that the left edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. -Center -Distributes the selected objects, so that the horizontal centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. +Center +Distributes the selected objects, so that the horizontal centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. -Spacing -Distributes the selected objects horizontally, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another. +Spacing +Distributes the selected objects horizontally, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another. -Right -Distributes the selected objects, so that the right edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. -Vertically -Specify the vertical distribution for the selected objects. +Right +Distributes the selected objects, so that the right edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. +Vertically +Specify the vertical distribution for the selected objects. -None -Does not distribute the objects vertically. +None +Does not distribute the objects vertically. -Top -Distributes the selected objects, so that the top edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. +Top +Distributes the selected objects, so that the top edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. -Center -Distributes the selected objects, so that the vertical centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. +Center +Distributes the selected objects, so that the vertical centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. -Spacing -Distributes the selected objects vertically, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another. +Spacing +Distributes the selected objects vertically, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another. -Bottom -Distributes the selected objects, so that the bottom edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. +Bottom +Distributes the selected objects, so that the bottom edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/05990000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/05990000.xhp index 3205a63428..b6b2d5d5ff 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/05990000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/05990000.xhp @@ -29,14 +29,14 @@ -
UFI: removed 2 help idsText -Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object. +
UFI: removed 2 help idsText +Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object.
-This command is only available for drawing objects that can contain text, for example for rectangles, but not for lines. +This command is only available for drawing objects that can contain text, for example for rectangles, but not for lines. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06010000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06010000.xhp index d62b643687..5630073e29 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06010000.xhp @@ -35,71 +35,61 @@ -Spelling and Grammar - Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors. If a grammar checking extension is installed, the dialog also checks for grammar errors. +Spelling and Grammar + Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors. If a grammar checking extension is installed, the dialog also checks for grammar errors.
- The spellcheck starts at the current cursor position and advances to the end of the document or selection. You can then choose to continue the spellcheck from the beginning of the document. - Spellcheck looks for misspelled words and gives you the option of adding an unknown word to a user dictionary. When the first misspelled word is found, the Spellcheck dialog opens. - If a grammar checking extension is installed, this dialog is called Spelling and Grammar. Spelling errors are underlined in red, grammar errors in blue. First the dialog presents all spelling errors, then all grammar errors. + The spellcheck starts at the current cursor position and advances to the end of the document or selection. You can then choose to continue the spellcheck from the beginning of the document. + Spellcheck looks for misspelled words and gives you the option of adding an unknown word to a user dictionary. When the first misspelled word is found, the Spellcheck dialog opens. + If a grammar checking extension is installed, this dialog is called Spelling and Grammar. Spelling errors are underlined in red, grammar errors in blue. First the dialog presents all spelling errors, then all grammar errors. -Enable Check grammar to work first on all spellcheck errors, then on all grammar errors. +Enable Check grammar to work first on all spellcheck errors, then on all grammar errors. -Not in dictionary - Displays the sentence with the misspelled word highlighted. Edit the word or the sentence, or click one of the suggestions in the text box below. +Not in dictionary + Displays the sentence with the misspelled word highlighted. Edit the word or the sentence, or click one of the suggestions in the text box below. -Suggestions - Lists suggested words to replace the misspelled word. Select the word that you want to use, and then click Correct or Correct All. +Suggestions + Lists suggested words to replace the misspelled word. Select the word that you want to use, and then click Correct or Correct All. -Text Languagespec doc Spelling_and_Grammar.odt - Specifies the language to use to check the spelling. +Text Languagespec doc Spelling_and_Grammar.odt + Specifies the language to use to check the spelling. -AutoCorrect +AutoCorrect - Adds the current combination of the incorrect word and the replacement word to the AutoCorrect replacements table. + Adds the current combination of the incorrect word and the replacement word to the AutoCorrect replacements table. -Options - Opens a dialog, where you can select the user-defined dictionaries, and set the rules for the spellchecking.UFI: dialog has no name at all in 680m104 +Options + Opens a dialog, where you can select the user-defined dictionaries, and set the rules for the spellchecking.UFI: dialog has no name at all in 680m104 -Add to Dictionary - Adds the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary. +Add to Dictionary + Adds the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary. -Ignore Once - Skips the unknown word and continues with the spellcheck. - This label of this button changes to Resume if you leave the Spellcheck dialog open when you return to your document. To continue the spellcheck from the current position of the cursor, click Resume.Ignore Rule button +Ignore Once + Skips the unknown word and continues with the spellcheck. + This label of this button changes to Resume if you leave the Spellcheck dialog open when you return to your document. To continue the spellcheck from the current position of the cursor, click Resume.Ignore Rule button -While performing a grammar check, click Ignore Rule to ignore the rule that is currently flagged as a grammar error. +While performing a grammar check, click Ignore Rule to ignore the rule that is currently flagged as a grammar error. -Ignore All - Skips all occurrences of the unknown word until the end of the current %PRODUCTNAME session and continues with the spellcheck. +Ignore All + Skips all occurrences of the unknown word until the end of the current %PRODUCTNAME session and continues with the spellcheck. -Correct - Replaces the unknown word with the current suggestion. If you changed more than just the misspelled word, the entire sentence is replaced. +Correct + Replaces the unknown word with the current suggestion. If you changed more than just the misspelled word, the entire sentence is replaced. -Correct All - Replaces all occurrences of the unknown word with the current suggestion. +Correct All + Replaces all occurrences of the unknown word with the current suggestion. -Undo - Click to undo the last change in the current sentence. Click again to undo the previous change in the same sentence. +Undo + Click to undo the last change in the current sentence. Click again to undo the previous change in the same sentence.
- Thesaurus + Thesaurus
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06010101.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06010101.xhp index e2d6844644..12d704f271 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06010101.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06010101.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@ - Writing aids - Select the user-defined dictionaries and set the rules for the spellchecking. + Writing aids + Select the user-defined dictionaries and set the rules for the spellchecking.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06010500.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06010500.xhp index dc00b52b0d..2092271b6f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06010500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06010500.xhp @@ -29,20 +29,20 @@
-Language -Opens a submenu where you can choose language specific commands. +Language +Opens a submenu where you can choose language specific commands.
Writer menu commands, i80434 -For Selection -Opens a submenu. Choose a language for the selected text.
Choose None to exclude the selected text from spellchecking and hyphenation.
Choose More to open a dialog with more options. +For Selection +Opens a submenu. Choose a language for the selected text.
Choose None to exclude the selected text from spellchecking and hyphenation.
Choose More to open a dialog with more options. -For Paragraph -Opens a submenu. Choose a language for the current paragraph.
Choose None to exclude the current paragraph from spellchecking and hyphenation.
Choose More to open a dialog with more options. +For Paragraph +Opens a submenu. Choose a language for the current paragraph.
Choose None to exclude the current paragraph from spellchecking and hyphenation.
Choose More to open a dialog with more options. -For all Text -Opens a submenu. Choose a language for all text.
Choose None to exclude all text from spellchecking and hyphenation.
Choose More to open a dialog with more options. +For all Text +Opens a submenu. Choose a language for all text.
Choose None to exclude all text from spellchecking and hyphenation.
Choose More to open a dialog with more options. @@ -52,20 +52,20 @@ -Hyphenation -Opens the Format - Cells - Alignment tab page. +Hyphenation +Opens the Format - Cells - Alignment tab page. -Hyphenation -Turns hyphenation on and off. +Hyphenation +Turns hyphenation on and off. -Hyphenation -Turns hyphenation on and off. +Hyphenation +Turns hyphenation on and off. -More Dictionaries Online -Opens the default browser on the dictionaries extension page. +More Dictionaries Online +Opens the default browser on the dictionaries extension page. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06010600.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06010600.xhp index 80197602ba..656a53fbf0 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06010600.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06010600.xhp @@ -37,23 +37,23 @@ -Chinese Conversion -Converts the selected Chinese text from one Chinese writing system to the other. If no text is selected, the entire document is converted. You can only use this command if you enable Asian language support in Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +Chinese Conversion +Converts the selected Chinese text from one Chinese writing system to the other. If no text is selected, the entire document is converted. You can only use this command if you enable Asian language support in Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages.
-Conversion direction -Select the conversion direction. -Traditional Chinese to Simplified Chinese -Converts traditional Chinese text characters to simplified Chinese text characters. Click OK to convert the selected text. If no text is selected, the whole document is converted. -Simplified Chinese to Traditional Chinese -Converts simplified Chinese text characters to traditional Chinese text characters. Click OK to convert the selected text. If no text is selected, the whole document is converted. -Common terms -Common terms are words that have the same meaning in traditional and simplified Chinese but are written with different characters. -Convert Common Terms -Converts words with two or more characters that are in the list of common terms. After the list is scanned, the remaining text is converted character by character. -Edit terms -Opens the Edit Dictionary dialog where you can edit the list of conversion terms. +Conversion direction +Select the conversion direction. +Traditional Chinese to Simplified Chinese +Converts traditional Chinese text characters to simplified Chinese text characters. Click OK to convert the selected text. If no text is selected, the whole document is converted. +Simplified Chinese to Traditional Chinese +Converts simplified Chinese text characters to traditional Chinese text characters. Click OK to convert the selected text. If no text is selected, the whole document is converted. +Common terms +Common terms are words that have the same meaning in traditional and simplified Chinese but are written with different characters. +Convert Common Terms +Converts words with two or more characters that are in the list of common terms. After the list is scanned, the remaining text is converted character by character. +Edit terms +Opens the Edit Dictionary dialog where you can edit the list of conversion terms. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06010601.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06010601.xhp index 768eb2d266..a9c9cf77a3 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06010601.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06010601.xhp @@ -34,29 +34,29 @@ dictionaries;common terms in simplified and traditional chinese -Edit Dictionary -Edit the Chinese conversion terms. +Edit Dictionary +Edit the Chinese conversion terms.
-You can use this dialog to edit, to add, or to delete entries from the conversion dictionary. The file path name for the conversion dictionary is user/wordbook/commonterms.ctd. You cannot delete the default entries in this file. -Traditional Chinese to Simplified Chinese -Converts traditional Chinese to simplified Chinese. -Simplified Chinese to Traditional Chinese -Converts simplified Chinese to traditional Chinese. -Reverse Mapping -Automatically adds the reverse mapping direction to the list for each modification that you enter. -Term -Enter the text that you want to replace with the Mapping term. -Mapping -Enter the text that you want to replace the Term with. -Property -Defines the class of the selected term. -Add -Adds the term to the conversion dictionary. If the term is already in the dictionary, the new term receives precedence. -Modify -Saves the modified entry to the database file. -Delete -Removes the selected user-defined entry from the dictionary. +You can use this dialog to edit, to add, or to delete entries from the conversion dictionary. The file path name for the conversion dictionary is user/wordbook/commonterms.ctd. You cannot delete the default entries in this file. +Traditional Chinese to Simplified Chinese +Converts traditional Chinese to simplified Chinese. +Simplified Chinese to Traditional Chinese +Converts simplified Chinese to traditional Chinese. +Reverse Mapping +Automatically adds the reverse mapping direction to the list for each modification that you enter. +Term +Enter the text that you want to replace with the Mapping term. +Mapping +Enter the text that you want to replace the Term with. +Property +Defines the class of the selected term. +Add +Adds the term to the conversion dictionary. If the term is already in the dictionary, the new term receives precedence. +Modify +Saves the modified entry to the database file. +Delete +Removes the selected user-defined entry from the dictionary. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp index 060f500150..40c4905df1 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
-Thesaurus -Opens a dialog box to replace the current word with a synonym, or a related term. +Thesaurus +Opens a dialog box to replace the current word with a synonym, or a related term.
@@ -41,27 +41,16 @@ -Thesaurus support is not available for all languages. - +Thesaurus support is not available for all languages. -Current word -Displays the current word, or the related term that you selected by double-clicking a line in the Alternatives list. You can also type text directly in this box to look up your text. - +Current wordDisplays the current word, or the related term that you selected by double-clicking a line in the Alternatives list. You can also type text directly in this box to look up your text. -Arrow left -Recalls the previous contents of the "Current word" text box. - +Arrow leftRecalls the previous contents of the "Current word" text box. -Alternatives -Click an entry in the Alternatives list to copy the related term to the "Replace with" text box. Double-click an entry to copy the related term to the "Current word" text box and to look up that term. - +AlternativesClick an entry in the Alternatives list to copy the related term to the "Replace with" text box. Double-click an entry to copy the related term to the "Current word" text box and to look up that term. -Replace with -The word or words in the "Replace with" text box will replace the original word in the document when you click the Replace button. You can also type text directly in this box. - +Replace withThe word or words in the "Replace with" text box will replace the original word in the document when you click the Replace button. You can also type text directly in this box. -Language -Select a language for the thesaurus. You can install languages with a thesaurus library from the Extensions web page. - +LanguageSelect a language for the thesaurus. You can install languages with a thesaurus library from the Extensions web page. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06030000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06030000.xhp index 4162738f78..abdd2e65c5 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06030000.xhp @@ -30,10 +30,10 @@
-Color Replacer -Opens the Color Replacer dialog, where you can replace colors in bitmap and meta file graphics. +Color Replacer +Opens the Color Replacer dialog, where you can replace colors in bitmap and meta file graphics.
-You can replace up to four different colors at one time. +You can replace up to four different colors at one time.
@@ -46,52 +46,52 @@ - + Icon -Color Replacer +Color Replacer
-Select one of the four source color boxes. Move the mouse pointer over the selected image, and then click the color that you want to replace. +Select one of the four source color boxes. Move the mouse pointer over the selected image, and then click the color that you want to replace. -Color Replacer color -Displays the color in the selected image that directly underlies the current mouse pointer position. This features only works if the Color Replacer tool is selected. +Color Replacer color +Displays the color in the selected image that directly underlies the current mouse pointer position. This features only works if the Color Replacer tool is selected. -Replace -Replaces the selected source colors in the current image with the colors that you specify in the Replace with boxes. -Colors -Lists the source colors and the replacement colors. +Replace +Replaces the selected source colors in the current image with the colors that you specify in the Replace with boxes. +Colors +Lists the source colors and the replacement colors. -Source color checkbox -Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box. +Source color checkbox +Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box. -Source color -Displays the color in the selected image that you want to replace. To set the source color, click here, click the Color Replacer, and then click a color in the selected image. +Source color +Displays the color in the selected image that you want to replace. To set the source color, click here, click the Color Replacer, and then click a color in the selected image. -Tolerance -Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value. +Tolerance +Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value. -Replace with -Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab. +Replace with +Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab. -Transparency -Replaces transparent areas in the current image with the color that you select. +Transparency +Replaces transparent areas in the current image with the color that you select. -Transparency -Select the color to replace the transparent areas in the current image. +Transparency +Select the color to replace the transparent areas in the current image. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp index 9dfe37c7f5..70da9d8e26 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp @@ -50,225 +50,210 @@ removed two bookmarks "automatic..." and two more entries about quotes and 1/2 replacementMW removed "numbering;paragraphs" -Options - Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK. +Options + Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK.
-In text documents, you can choose to apply the AutoCorrect corrections while you type [T], or only when you modify existing text [M] with Format - AutoCorrect - Apply. - When you choose to modify existing text with all options deselected, still all "Default" paragraph styles will be converted to "Text body" styles. see i72339Don't use inline switches for notes, tips and warnings. The icon will still show up. +In text documents, you can choose to apply the AutoCorrect corrections while you type [T], or only when you modify existing text [M] with Format - AutoCorrect - Apply. + When you choose to modify existing text with all options deselected, still all "Default" paragraph styles will be converted to "Text body" styles. see i72339Don't use inline switches for notes, tips and warnings. The icon will still show up. -Use replacement table - If you type a letter combination that matches a shortcut in the replacement table, the letter combination is replaced with the replacement text. - Correct TWo INitial CApitals - If you type two uppercase letters at the beginning of a "WOrd", the second uppercase letter is automatically replaced with a lowercase letter. - Capitalize first letter of every sentence. - Capitalizes the first letter of every sentence. +Use replacement table + If you type a letter combination that matches a shortcut in the replacement table, the letter combination is replaced with the replacement text. + Correct TWo INitial CApitals + If you type two uppercase letters at the beginning of a "WOrd", the second uppercase letter is automatically replaced with a lowercase letter. + Capitalize first letter of every sentence. + Capitalizes the first letter of every sentence. -The first letter in a Calc cell will never be capitalized automatically.see i78661 +The first letter in a Calc cell will never be capitalized automatically.see i78661 -Automatic *bold* and _underline_ - Automatically applies bold formatting to text enclosed by asterisks (*), and underline to text enclosed by underscores ( _ ), for example, *bold*. The asterisks and underscores are not displayed after the formatting is applied. - This feature does not work if the formatting characters * or _ are entered with an Input Method Editor. - URL Recognition - Automatically creates a hyperlink when you type a URL. +Automatic *bold* and _underline_ + Automatically applies bold formatting to text enclosed by asterisks (*), and underline to text enclosed by underscores ( _ ), for example, *bold*. The asterisks and underscores are not displayed after the formatting is applied. + This feature does not work if the formatting characters * or _ are entered with an Input Method Editor. + URL Recognition + Automatically creates a hyperlink when you type a URL. UFI: moved "replace 1st" to Localized Options tab page, cws cbosdo01 - Replace DashesUFI: changed switches, added table, #61325#UFI: see i73558 for name: not the dashes are replaced but the hyphens (or even better the minus signs) -Replaces one or two hyphens with a long dash (see the following table). - Text will be replaced after you type a trailing white space (space, tab, or return). In the following table, the A and B represent text consisting of letters A to z or digits 0 to 9. + Replace DashesUFI: changed switches, added table, #61325#UFI: see i73558 for name: not the dashes are replaced but the hyphens (or even better the minus signs) +Replaces one or two hyphens with a long dash (see the following table). + Text will be replaced after you type a trailing white space (space, tab, or return). In the following table, the A and B represent text consisting of letters A to z or digits 0 to 9. - Text that you type: + Text that you type: - Result that you get: + Result that you get: - A - B (A, space, minus, space, B) + A - B (A, space, minus, space, B) - A – B (A, space, en-dash, space, B) + A – B (A, space, en-dash, space, B) - A -- B (A, space, minus, minus, space, B) + A -- B (A, space, minus, minus, space, B) - A – B (A, space, en-dash, space, B) + A – B (A, space, en-dash, space, B) - A--B (A, minus, minus, B) + A--B (A, minus, minus, B) - A—B (A, em-dash, B)
(see note below the table) + A—B (A, em-dash, B)
(see note below the table) - A-B (A, minus, B) + A-B (A, minus, B) - A-B (unchanged) + A-B (unchanged) - A -B (A, space, minus, B) + A -B (A, space, minus, B) - A -B (unchanged) + A -B (unchanged) - A --B (A, space, minus, minus, B) + A --B (A, space, minus, minus, B) - A –B (A, space, en-dash, B) + A –B (A, space, en-dash, B)
- If the hyphens are there between digits or the text has the Hungarian or Finnish language attribute, then two hyphens in the sequence A--B are replaced by an en-dash instead of an em-dash.i71908 - Delete spaces and tabs at beginning and end of paragraph + If the hyphens are there between digits or the text has the Hungarian or Finnish language attribute, then two hyphens in the sequence A--B are replaced by an en-dash instead of an em-dash.i71908 + Delete spaces and tabs at beginning and end of paragraph - Removes spaces and tabs at the beginning of a paragraph. To use this option, the Apply Styles option must also be selected. + Removes spaces and tabs at the beginning of a paragraph. To use this option, the Apply Styles option must also be selected. - Delete blanks and tabs at end and start of lines + Delete blanks and tabs at end and start of lines - Removes spaces and tabs at the beginning of each line. To use this option, the Apply Styles option must also be selected. + Removes spaces and tabs at the beginning of each line. To use this option, the Apply Styles option must also be selected. - Ignore double spaces - Replaces two or more consecutive spaces with a single space. - Apply numbering - symbol + Ignore double spaces + Replaces two or more consecutive spaces with a single space. + Apply numbering - symbol - Automatically creates a numbered list when you press Enter at the end of a line that starts with a number followed by a period, a space, and text. If a line starts with a hyphen (-), a plus sign (+), or an asterisk (*), followed by a space, and text, a bulleted list is created when you press Enter. + Automatically creates a numbered list when you press Enter at the end of a line that starts with a number followed by a period, a space, and text. If a line starts with a hyphen (-), a plus sign (+), or an asterisk (*), followed by a space, and text, a bulleted list is created when you press Enter. - To cancel automatic numbering when you press Enter at the end of a line that starts with a numbering symbol, press Enter again. + To cancel automatic numbering when you press Enter at the end of a line that starts with a numbering symbol, press Enter again. -The automatic numbering option is only applied to paragraphs that are formatted with the "Default", "Text body", or "Text body indent" paragraph style. +The automatic numbering option is only applied to paragraphs that are formatted with the "Default", "Text body", or "Text body indent" paragraph style. -Apply border - Automatically applies a border at the base of the preceding paragraph when you type three or more specific characters, and then press Enter. To create a single line, type three or more hyphens (-), or underscores ( _ ), and then press Enter. To create a double line, type three or more equal signs (=), asterisks (*), tildes (~), or hash marks (#), and then press Enter. - To delete the created line, click the paragraph above the line, choose Format - Paragraph - Borders, delete the bottom border. - The following table summarizes the line thickness for the different characters: +Apply border + Automatically applies a border at the base of the preceding paragraph when you type three or more specific characters, and then press Enter. To create a single line, type three or more hyphens (-), or underscores ( _ ), and then press Enter. To create a double line, type three or more equal signs (=), asterisks (*), tildes (~), or hash marks (#), and then press Enter. + To delete the created line, click the paragraph above the line, choose Format - Paragraph - Borders, delete the bottom border. + The following table summarizes the line thickness for the different characters: - --- + --- - 0.5pt single underline + 0.5pt single underline - ___ + ___ - 1.0pt single underline + 1.0pt single underline - === + === - 1.1pt double underline + 1.1pt double underline - *** + *** - 4.5pt double underline + 4.5pt double underline - ~~~ + ~~~ - 6.0pt double underline + 6.0pt double underline - ### + ### - 9.0pt double underline + 9.0pt double underline
-Create table +Create table - Creates a table when you press Enter after typing a series of hyphens (-) or tabs separated by plus signs, that is, +------+---+. Plus signs indicate column dividers, while hyphens and tabs indicate the width of a column. + Creates a table when you press Enter after typing a series of hyphens (-) or tabs separated by plus signs, that is, +------+---+. Plus signs indicate column dividers, while hyphens and tabs indicate the width of a column. - +-----------------+---------------+------+ + +-----------------+---------------+------+ - Apply Styles + Apply Styles - Automatically replaces the "Default" paragraph style with the Heading 1 to Heading 8 paragraph styles. To apply the Heading 1 paragraph style, type the text that you want to use as a heading (without a period), and then press Enter twice. To apply a sub-heading, press Tab one or more times, type the text (without a period), and then press Enter. + Automatically replaces the "Default" paragraph style with the Heading 1 to Heading 8 paragraph styles. To apply the Heading 1 paragraph style, type the text that you want to use as a heading (without a period), and then press Enter twice. To apply a sub-heading, press Tab one or more times, type the text (without a period), and then press Enter. - Remove blank paragraphs + Remove blank paragraphs -Removes empty paragraphs from the current document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply. +Removes empty paragraphs from the current document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply. - Replace Custom Styles + Replace Custom Styles - Replaces the custom paragraph styles in the current document with the "Default", the "Text Body", or the "Text Body Indent" paragraph style. + Replaces the custom paragraph styles in the current document with the "Default", the "Text Body", or the "Text Body Indent" paragraph style. - Replace bullets with + Replace bullets with - Converts paragraphs that start with a hyphen (-), a plus sign (+), or an asterisk (*) directly followed by a space or a tab, to bulleted lists. This option only works on paragraphs that are formatted with the "Default", "Text Body", or "Text Body Indent" paragraph styles. To change the bullet style that is used, select this option, and then click Edit. + Converts paragraphs that start with a hyphen (-), a plus sign (+), or an asterisk (*) directly followed by a space or a tab, to bulleted lists. This option only works on paragraphs that are formatted with the "Default", "Text Body", or "Text Body Indent" paragraph styles. To change the bullet style that is used, select this option, and then click Edit. removed "replace standard quotes..." cws cbosdo01 -Combine single line paragraphs if length greater than ... +Combine single line paragraphs if length greater than ... - Combines consecutive single-line paragraphs into a single paragraph. This option only works on paragraphs that use the "Default" paragraph style. If a paragraph is longer than the specified length value, the paragraph is combined with the next paragraph. To enter a different length value, select the option, and then click Edit. + Combines consecutive single-line paragraphs into a single paragraph. This option only works on paragraphs that use the "Default" paragraph style. If a paragraph is longer than the specified length value, the paragraph is combined with the next paragraph. To enter a different length value, select the option, and then click Edit. -Modifies the selected AutoCorrect option. - Edit +Modifies the selected AutoCorrect option. + Edit - Modifies the selected AutoCorrect option. + Modifies the selected AutoCorrect option. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp index f8f94e3e91..ef4821d7b1 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp @@ -37,8 +37,8 @@ AutoCorrect function; pictures and frames -Replace -Edits the replacement table for automatically correcting or replacing words or abbreviations in your document. +Replace +Edits the replacement table for automatically correcting or replacing words or abbreviations in your document.
To enable the replacement table, choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options, click the Options tab, and then select Use replacement table. To use the replacement table while you type, check Tools - AutoCorrect - While Typing. @@ -47,25 +47,25 @@
-Replacement table -Lists the entries for automatically replacing words, abbreviations or word parts while you type. To add an entry, enter text in the Replace and With boxes, and then click New. To edit an entry, select it, change the text in the With box, and then click Replace. To delete an entry, select it, and then click Delete. -You can use the AutoCorrect feature to apply a specific character format to a word, abbreviation or a word part. Select the formatted text in your document, open this dialog, clear the Text only box, and then enter the text that you want to replace in the Replace box. -You can also include frames, graphics, and OLE objects in an AutoCorrect entry, so long as they are anchored as characters in the text. Select the frame, graphic or OLE object and at least one text character in front of and behind the object. Open this dialog, type a name for this AutoCorrect entry in the Replace box, and then click New. +Replacement table +Lists the entries for automatically replacing words, abbreviations or word parts while you type. To add an entry, enter text in the Replace and With boxes, and then click New. To edit an entry, select it, change the text in the With box, and then click Replace. To delete an entry, select it, and then click Delete. +You can use the AutoCorrect feature to apply a specific character format to a word, abbreviation or a word part. Select the formatted text in your document, open this dialog, clear the Text only box, and then enter the text that you want to replace in the Replace box. +You can also include frames, graphics, and OLE objects in an AutoCorrect entry, so long as they are anchored as characters in the text. Select the frame, graphic or OLE object and at least one text character in front of and behind the object. Open this dialog, type a name for this AutoCorrect entry in the Replace box, and then click New. -Replace -Enter the word, abbreviation or word part that you want to replace while you type. Wildcard character sequence .* in the end of word results the replacement of the word before arbitrary suffixes, too. Wildcard character sequence .* before the word results the replacement after arbitrary prefixes, too. For example, the pattern "i18n.*" with the replacement text "internationalization" finds and replaces "i18ns" with "internationalizations", or the pattern ".*..." with the replacement text "…" finds and replaces three dots in "word..." with the typographically correct precomposed Unicode horizontal ellipsis ("word…"). +Replace +Enter the word, abbreviation or word part that you want to replace while you type. Wildcard character sequence .* in the end of word results the replacement of the word before arbitrary suffixes, too. Wildcard character sequence .* before the word results the replacement after arbitrary prefixes, too. For example, the pattern "i18n.*" with the replacement text "internationalization" finds and replaces "i18ns" with "internationalizations", or the pattern ".*..." with the replacement text "…" finds and replaces three dots in "word..." with the typographically correct precomposed Unicode horizontal ellipsis ("word…"). To replace word parts or characters within words, you can use starting and terminating wildcard character sequences in the same pattern. For example, entering time values can be faster using only numerical keys, and double decimal separators as colons in the following way: set the pattern ".*...*" or ".*,,.*" (double dots or commas within words) and the replacement text ":", and entering "10..30" or "10,,30" results "10:30" automatically. -With: -Enter the replacement text, graphic, frame, or OLE object that you want to replace the text in the Replace box. If you have selected text, a graphic, a frame, or an OLE object in your document, the relevant information is already entered here. +With: +Enter the replacement text, graphic, frame, or OLE object that you want to replace the text in the Replace box. If you have selected text, a graphic, a frame, or an OLE object in your document, the relevant information is already entered here. -Text only -Saves the entry in the With box without formatting. When the replacement is made, the text uses the same format as the document text. +Text only +Saves the entry in the With box without formatting. When the replacement is made, the text uses the same format as the document text. -New -Adds or replaces an entry in the replacement table. +New +Adds or replaces an entry in the replacement table. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06040300.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06040300.xhp index edb17cd312..14ebd2fa72 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06040300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06040300.xhp @@ -29,37 +29,37 @@
-Exceptions -Specify the abbreviations or letter combinations that you do not want $[officename] to correct automatically. +Exceptions +Specify the abbreviations or letter combinations that you do not want $[officename] to correct automatically.
-The exceptions that you define depend on the current language setting. If you want, you can change the language setting by selecting a different language in the Replacements and exceptions for language box. +The exceptions that you define depend on the current language setting. If you want, you can change the language setting by selecting a different language in the Replacements and exceptions for language box.
-Replacements and exceptions for language: -Select the language for which you want to create or edit the replacement rules. $[officename] first searches for exceptions that are defined for the language at the current cursor position in the document, and then searches the remaining languages. +Replacements and exceptions for language: +Select the language for which you want to create or edit the replacement rules. $[officename] first searches for exceptions that are defined for the language at the current cursor position in the document, and then searches the remaining languages.
-Abbreviations (no subsequent capital) -Type an abbreviation followed by a period, and then click New. This prevents $[officename] from automatically capitalizing the first letter of the word that comes after the period at the end of the abbreviation. +Abbreviations (no subsequent capital) +Type an abbreviation followed by a period, and then click New. This prevents $[officename] from automatically capitalizing the first letter of the word that comes after the period at the end of the abbreviation. -Lists the abbreviations that are not automatically corrected. To remove an item from the list, select the item, and then click Delete. +Lists the abbreviations that are not automatically corrected. To remove an item from the list, select the item, and then click Delete. -Words with TWo INitial CApitals -Type the word or abbreviation that starts with two capital letters that you do not want $[officename] to change to one initial capital. For example, enter PC to prevent $[officename] from changing PC to Pc. +Words with TWo INitial CApitals +Type the word or abbreviation that starts with two capital letters that you do not want $[officename] to change to one initial capital. For example, enter PC to prevent $[officename] from changing PC to Pc. -Lists the words or abbreviations that start with two initial capitals that are not automatically corrected. All words which start with two capital letters are listed in the field. To remove an item from the list, select the item, and then click Delete. +Lists the words or abbreviations that start with two initial capitals that are not automatically corrected. All words which start with two capital letters are listed in the field. To remove an item from the list, select the item, and then click Delete. -New -Adds the current entry to the list of exceptions. +New +Adds the current entry to the list of exceptions. -AutoInclude -Automatically adds abbreviations or words that start with two capital letters to the corresponding list of exceptions. This feature only works if the Correct TWo INitial CApitals option or the Capitalize first letter of every sentence option are selected in the [T] column onOptions tab of this dialog. +AutoInclude +Automatically adds abbreviations or words that start with two capital letters to the corresponding list of exceptions. This feature only works if the Correct TWo INitial CApitals option or the Capitalize first letter of every sentence option are selected in the [T] column onOptions tab of this dialog. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06040400.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06040400.xhp index 68ff763991..d442962cf8 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06040400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06040400.xhp @@ -35,43 +35,43 @@ ordinal numbers;replacing -Localized Options -Specify the AutoCorrect options for quotation marks and for options that are specific to the language of the text. +Localized Options +Specify the AutoCorrect options for quotation marks and for options that are specific to the language of the text.
-Select to apply the replacements while you type [T], or when you modify existing text [M]. +Select to apply the replacements while you type [T], or when you modify existing text [M]. new feature, cws cbosdo01. http://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Non_Breaking_Spaces_Before_Punctuation_In_French_(espaces_ins%C3%A9cables) -Add non-breaking space before specific punctuation marks in French text -Inserts a non breaking space before ";", "!", "?", ":" and "%" when the character language is set to French (France, Belgium, Luxembourg, Monaco, or Switzerland) and before ":" only when the character language is set to French (Canada). +Add non-breaking space before specific punctuation marks in French text +Inserts a non breaking space before ";", "!", "?", ":" and "%" when the character language is set to French (France, Belgium, Luxembourg, Monaco, or Switzerland) and before ":" only when the character language is set to French (Canada). moved two paras from 06040100.xhp, cws cbosdo01 -Format ordinal number suffixes (1st ... 1st) -Formats the text characters of ordinals, such as 1st, 2nd, or 3rd, as superscripts. For example, in English text, 1st will be converted to 1st. -Note that this only applies to languages that have the convention of formatting ordinal numbers as superscript. +Format ordinal number suffixes (1st ... 1st) +Formats the text characters of ordinals, such as 1st, 2nd, or 3rd, as superscripts. For example, in English text, 1st will be converted to 1st. +Note that this only applies to languages that have the convention of formatting ordinal numbers as superscript. -Single Quotes / Double Quotes -Specify the replacement characters to use for single or double quotation marks. +Single Quotes / Double Quotes +Specify the replacement characters to use for single or double quotation marks. -Replace -Automatically replaces the default system symbol for the given type of quotation marks with the special character that you specify. +Replace +Automatically replaces the default system symbol for the given type of quotation marks with the special character that you specify. -Start quote -Select the special character that will automatically replace the current opening quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply. +Start quote +Select the special character that will automatically replace the current opening quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply. -End quote -Select the special character that will automatically replace the current closing quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply. +End quote +Select the special character that will automatically replace the current closing quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply. -Default -Resets the quotation marks to the default symbols. +Default +Resets the quotation marks to the default symbols. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06040500.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06040500.xhp index 1a938b794c..2fe9431eae 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06040500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06040500.xhp @@ -30,36 +30,36 @@ AutoCorrect function; context menu spellcheck; context menus -AutoCorrect context menu -To access this menu, right-click a misspelled word in your document. To view the misspelled words in your document, choose Tools - Automatic Spell Checking. +AutoCorrect context menu +To access this menu, right-click a misspelled word in your document. To view the misspelled words in your document, choose Tools - Automatic Spell Checking. -<Replacement Suggestions> -Click the word to replace the highlighted word. Use the AutoCorrect submenu for permanent replacement.UFI: see i60431 +<Replacement Suggestions> +Click the word to replace the highlighted word. Use the AutoCorrect submenu for permanent replacement.UFI: see i60431 -Spellcheck -Opens the Spellcheck dialog. +Spellcheck +Opens the Spellcheck dialog. -Add -Adds the highlighted word to a user-defined dictionary. +Add +Adds the highlighted word to a user-defined dictionary. -Ignore all -Ignores all instances of the highlighted word in the current document. +Ignore all +Ignores all instances of the highlighted word in the current document. -AutoCorrect +AutoCorrect To always replace the highlighted word, click a word in the list. The word pair is stored in the replacement table under Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Replace. -Word is <name of language> -Changes the language settings for the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary. +Word is <name of language> +Changes the language settings for the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary. -Paragraph is <name of language> -Changes the language setting for the paragraph that contains the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary. +Paragraph is <name of language> +Changes the language setting for the paragraph that contains the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06040600.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06040600.xhp index 76e6ed9abf..ad161084cf 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06040600.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06040600.xhp @@ -28,9 +28,8 @@
- Word Completion - Set the options for completing frequently occurring words while you type. + Word Completion + Set the options for completing frequently occurring words while you type.
@@ -41,47 +40,37 @@ -Enable word completion - Stores frequently used words, and automatically completes a word after you type three letters that match the first three letters of a stored word. +Enable word completion + Stores frequently used words, and automatically completes a word after you type three letters that match the first three letters of a stored word. -Append space - If you do not add punctuation after the word, $[officename] adds a space. The space is added as soon as you begin typing the next word. +Append space + If you do not add punctuation after the word, $[officename] adds a space. The space is added as soon as you begin typing the next word. -Show as tip - Displays the completed word as a Help Tip. +Show as tip + Displays the completed word as a Help Tip. -Collect words - Adds the frequently used words to a list. To remove a word from the Word Completion list, select the word, and then click Delete Entry. +Collect words + Adds the frequently used words to a list. To remove a word from the Word Completion list, select the word, and then click Delete Entry. -When closing a document, remove the words collected from it from the list - When enabled, the list gets cleared when closing the current document. When disabled, makes the current Word Completion list available to other documents after you close the current document. The list remains available until you exit %PRODUCTNAME. +When closing a document, remove the words collected from it from the list + When enabled, the list gets cleared when closing the current document. When disabled, makes the current Word Completion list available to other documents after you close the current document. The list remains available until you exit %PRODUCTNAME. -Accept with - Select the key that you want to use to accept the automatic word completion. - Press Esc to decline the word completion. +Accept with + Select the key that you want to use to accept the automatic word completion. + Press Esc to decline the word completion. -Min. word length - Enter the minimum word length for a word to become eligible for the word completion feature.UFI: changed due to BH phone call. +Min. word length + Enter the minimum word length for a word to become eligible for the word completion feature.UFI: changed due to BH phone call. -Max. entries - Enter the maximum number of words that you want to store in the Word Completion list. +Max. entries + Enter the maximum number of words that you want to store in the Word Completion list. -Word Completion list - Lists the collected words. The list is valid until you close the current document. To make the list available to other documents in the current session, disable "When closing a document, remove the words collected from it from the list". - If the automatic spellcheck option is enabled, only the words that are recognized by the spellcheck are collected. +Word Completion list + Lists the collected words. The list is valid until you close the current document. To make the list available to other documents in the current session, disable "When closing a document, remove the words collected from it from the list". + If the automatic spellcheck option is enabled, only the words that are recognized by the spellcheck are collected. -Delete Entry - Removes the selected word or words from the Word Completion list. +Delete Entry + Removes the selected word or words from the Word Completion list. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06040700.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06040700.xhp index ad246c1fea..4b40641545 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06040700.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06040700.xhp @@ -32,18 +32,18 @@
smart tag configuration -MW moved 2 index entries to the Writer guide smarttags.xhp and added a new oneSmart Tags -When you have installed at least one Smart Tag extension, you see the Smart Tags page. +MW moved 2 index entries to the Writer guide smarttags.xhp and added a new oneSmart Tags +When you have installed at least one Smart Tag extension, you see the Smart Tags page.
-Label text with smart tags -Enables Smart Tags to be evaluated and shown in your text document. -Currently installed smart tags -Displays all installed Smart Tags. To configure a Smart Tag, select the name of the Smart Tag, then click Properties. Not all Smart Tags can be configured. -Properties -To configure a Smart Tag, select the name of the Smart Tag, then click Properties. Not all Smart Tags can be configured. +Label text with smart tags +Enables Smart Tags to be evaluated and shown in your text document. +Currently installed smart tags +Displays all installed Smart Tags. To configure a Smart Tag, select the name of the Smart Tag, then click Properties. Not all Smart Tags can be configured. +Properties +To configure a Smart Tag, select the name of the Smart Tag, then click Properties. Not all Smart Tags can be configured. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06050000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06050000.xhp index 481b1dfece..d740d0d57a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06050000.xhp @@ -35,8 +35,8 @@ -Bullets and Numbering -Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph, and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets. +Bullets and Numbering +Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph, and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets.
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
-The Bullets and Numbering dialog has the following tabs: +The Bullets and Numbering dialog has the following tabs: @@ -52,9 +52,9 @@ -Remove +Remove -Removes the numbering or bullets from the current paragraph or from the selected paragraphs. +Removes the numbering or bullets from the current paragraph or from the selected paragraphs. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06050100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06050100.xhp index 5d9fa62ed4..337a122486 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06050100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06050100.xhp @@ -33,19 +33,19 @@ inserting; paragraph bullets -Bullets - Displays the different bullet styles that you can apply. - Bullets and Numbering of paragraphs is supported only in Writer, Impress and Draw. +Bullets + Displays the different bullet styles that you can apply. + Bullets and Numbering of paragraphs is supported only in Writer, Impress and Draw.
-Selection - Click the bullet style that you want to use. +Selection + Click the bullet style that you want to use.
- Position tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) - Options tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) + Position tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) + Options tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog)
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06050200.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06050200.xhp index 18cbe6399b..976b4ce9ae 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06050200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06050200.xhp @@ -29,19 +29,18 @@
- Numbering - Displays the different numbering styles that you can apply. + Numbering + Displays the different numbering styles that you can apply.
-Selection - Click the numbering style that you want to use. +Selection + Click the numbering style that you want to use.
- Position tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) - Options tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) + Position tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) + Options tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog)
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06050300.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06050300.xhp index 366c5d0aa1..3f0ae53145 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06050300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06050300.xhp @@ -32,18 +32,18 @@
-Outline -Displays the different styles that you can apply to a hierarchical list. $[officename] supports up to nine outline levels in a list hierarchy. +Outline +Displays the different styles that you can apply to a hierarchical list. $[officename] supports up to nine outline levels in a list hierarchy.
-Selection -Click the outline style that you want to use. +Selection +Click the outline style that you want to use.
-Position tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) -Options tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) +Position tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) +Options tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog)
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06050400.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06050400.xhp index 42b86e38b0..0ef53b8714 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06050400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06050400.xhp @@ -29,21 +29,21 @@
- Graphics - Displays the different graphics that you can use as bullets in a bulleted list. + Graphics + Displays the different graphics that you can use as bullets in a bulleted list.
-Selection - Click the graphics that you want to use as bullets. +Selection + Click the graphics that you want to use as bullets. -Link graphics - If enabled, the graphics are inserted as links. If not enabled, the graphics are embedded into the document. +Link graphics + If enabled, the graphics are inserted as links. If not enabled, the graphics are embedded into the document.
- Position tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) - Options tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) + Position tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) + Options tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog)
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp index 394a10d455..41877a43f0 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp @@ -33,199 +33,184 @@ font sizes;bullets -OptionsUFI: new name Customize Bullets and Numbering, tab page Options - Sets the formatting options for numbered or bulleted lists. If you want, you can apply formatting to individual levels in the list hierarchy. +OptionsUFI: new name Customize Bullets and Numbering, tab page Options + Sets the formatting options for numbered or bulleted lists. If you want, you can apply formatting to individual levels in the list hierarchy.
- Format - Select the level(s) that you want to modify, and then specify the formatting that you want to use. + Format + Select the level(s) that you want to modify, and then specify the formatting that you want to use. -Level - Select the level(s) that you want to define the formatting options for. The selected level is highlighted in the preview. +Level + Select the level(s) that you want to define the formatting options for. The selected level is highlighted in the preview. -Numbering - Select a numbering style for the selected levels. +Numbering + Select a numbering style for the selected levels. - Selection + Selection - Description + Description - 1, 2, 3, ... + 1, 2, 3, ... - Arabic numerals + Arabic numerals - A, B, C, ... + A, B, C, ... - Capital letters + Capital letters - a, b, c, ... + a, b, c, ... - Lowercase letters + Lowercase letters - I, II, III, ... + I, II, III, ... - Roman numerals (uppercase) + Roman numerals (uppercase) - i, ii, iii, ... + i, ii, iii, ... - Roman numerals (lowercase) + Roman numerals (lowercase) - A,... AA,... AAA,... + A,... AA,... AAA,... - Alphabetical numbering with uppercase letters + Alphabetical numbering with uppercase letters - a,... aa,... aaa,... + a,... aa,... aaa,... - Alphabetical numbering with lowercase letters + Alphabetical numbering with lowercase letters - Bullet + Bullet - Adds a bullet to the beginning of a line. Select this option, and then click the Character button to choose a bullet style. - Bullets are resized to fit the current line height. If you want, you can define a Character Style that uses a different font size for bullets. + Adds a bullet to the beginning of a line. Select this option, and then click the Character button to choose a bullet style. + Bullets are resized to fit the current line height. If you want, you can define a Character Style that uses a different font size for bullets. - Image + Image - Displays an image for the bullet. Select this option, and then click Select to locate the image file that you want to use. The image gets embedded into the document. + Displays an image for the bullet. Select this option, and then click Select to locate the image file that you want to use. The image gets embedded into the document. - Linked graphics + Linked graphics - Displays an image for the bullet. Select this option, and then click Select to locate the image file that you want to use. The image gets inserted as a link to the image file. + Displays an image for the bullet. Select this option, and then click Select to locate the image file that you want to use. The image gets inserted as a link to the image file. - None + None - Does not apply a numbering style. + Does not apply a numbering style.
- The availability of the following fields depends on the style that you select in the Numbering box. + The availability of the following fields depends on the style that you select in the Numbering box. -Before - Enter a character or the text to display in front of the number in the list. +Before + Enter a character or the text to display in front of the number in the list. -After - Enter a character or the text to display behind the number in the list. If you want to create a numbered list that uses the style "1.)", enter ".)" in this box. +After + Enter a character or the text to display behind the number in the list. If you want to create a numbered list that uses the style "1.)", enter ".)" in this box. -Character Styles +Character Styles - Select the Character Style that you want to use in the numbered list. To create or edit a Character Style, open the Styles and Formatting window, click the Character Styles icon, right-click a style, and then choose New. + Select the Character Style that you want to use in the numbered list. To create or edit a Character Style, open the Styles and Formatting window, click the Character Styles icon, right-click a style, and then choose New. -Show sublevels +Show sublevels - Enter the number of previous levels to include in the numbering style. For example, if you enter "2" and the previous level uses the "A, B, C..." numbering style, the numbering scheme for the current level becomes: "A.1". + Enter the number of previous levels to include in the numbering style. For example, if you enter "2" and the previous level uses the "A, B, C..." numbering style, the numbering scheme for the current level becomes: "A.1". -Start at - Enter a new starting number for the current level. +Start at + Enter a new starting number for the current level. -Color +Color Color - + Select a color for the current numbering style. -Relative size +Relative size Relative size - + Enter the amount by which you want to resize the bullet character with respect to the font height of the current paragraph. -Character - Opens the Special Characters dialog, where you can select a bullet symbol. - Options for graphics: +Character + Opens the Special Characters dialog, where you can select a bullet symbol. + Options for graphics: -Select... - Select the graphic, or locate the graphic file that you want to use as a bullet. +Select... + Select the graphic, or locate the graphic file that you want to use as a bullet. -Width - Enter a width for the graphic. +Width + Enter a width for the graphic. -Height - Enter a height for the graphic. +Height + Enter a height for the graphic. -Keep ratio - Maintains the size proportions of the graphic. +Keep ratio + Maintains the size proportions of the graphic. -Alignment - Select the alignment option for the graphic. - All levels +Alignment + Select the alignment option for the graphic. + All levels - Set the numbering options for all of the levels. + Set the numbering options for all of the levels. -Consecutive numbering +Consecutive numbering - Increases the numbering by one as you go down each level in the list hierarchy. + Increases the numbering by one as you go down each level in the list hierarchy. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp index 23102f2ec0..7640f1c1e3 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp @@ -30,61 +30,61 @@
-Position -Sets the indent, spacing, and alignment options for the numbered or bulleted list. +Position +Sets the indent, spacing, and alignment options for the numbered or bulleted list.
do we have a how-to for numbering/bullets/outlines with/without styles? seems we really need one
-The Position tab page looks different for documents using the new position and spacing attributes introduced with OpenOffice.org 3.0 (and used in all versions of LibreOffice), or documents using the old attributes from versions before 3.0. The new version of this tab page shows the controls "Numbering followed by", "Numbering alignment", "Aligned at", and "Indent at". The old version of this tab page that can be seen in an old numbered or bulleted list shows the controls "Indent", "Width of numbering", "Minimum space between numbering and text", and "Numbering alignment".see http://specs.openoffice.org/writer/numbering/NewListLevelAttrs.odt +The Position tab page looks different for documents using the new position and spacing attributes introduced with OpenOffice.org 3.0 (and used in all versions of LibreOffice), or documents using the old attributes from versions before 3.0. The new version of this tab page shows the controls "Numbering followed by", "Numbering alignment", "Aligned at", and "Indent at". The old version of this tab page that can be seen in an old numbered or bulleted list shows the controls "Indent", "Width of numbering", "Minimum space between numbering and text", and "Numbering alignment".see http://specs.openoffice.org/writer/numbering/NewListLevelAttrs.odt -Level -Select the level(s) that you want to modify. +Level +Select the level(s) that you want to modify. -Numbering followed by -Select the element that will follow the numbering: a tab stop, a space, or nothing. +Numbering followed by +Select the element that will follow the numbering: a tab stop, a space, or nothing. -at -If you select a tab stop to follow the numbering, you can enter a non-negative value as the tab stop position. +at +If you select a tab stop to follow the numbering, you can enter a non-negative value as the tab stop position. -Numbering alignment -Set the alignment of the numbering symbols. Select "Left" to align the numbering symbol to start directly at the "Aligned at" position. Select "Right" to align the symbol to end directly before the "Aligned at" position. Select "Centered" to center the symbol around the "Aligned at" position. -The Numbering alignment option does not set the alignment of the paragraph. +Numbering alignment +Set the alignment of the numbering symbols. Select "Left" to align the numbering symbol to start directly at the "Aligned at" position. Select "Right" to align the symbol to end directly before the "Aligned at" position. Select "Centered" to center the symbol around the "Aligned at" position. +The Numbering alignment option does not set the alignment of the paragraph. -Aligned at -Enter the distance from the left page margin at which the numbering symbol will be aligned. +Aligned at +Enter the distance from the left page margin at which the numbering symbol will be aligned. -Indent at -Enter the distance from the left page margin to the start of all lines in the numbered paragraph that follow the first line. +Indent at +Enter the distance from the left page margin to the start of all lines in the numbered paragraph that follow the first line. -Indent -Enter the amount of space to leave between the left page margin (or the left edge of the text object) and the left edge of the numbering symbol. If the current paragraph style uses an indent, the amount you enter here is added to the indent. +Indent +Enter the amount of space to leave between the left page margin (or the left edge of the text object) and the left edge of the numbering symbol. If the current paragraph style uses an indent, the amount you enter here is added to the indent. -Relative -Indents the current level relative to the previous level in the list hierarchy. +Relative +Indents the current level relative to the previous level in the list hierarchy. -Width of numberingi85347 -Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the numbering symbol and the left edge of the text.UFI: fixed #i31282# +Width of numberingi85347 +Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the numbering symbol and the left edge of the text.UFI: fixed #i31282# -Minimum space between numbering and text +Minimum space between numbering and text -Enter the minimum amount of space to leave between the right edge of the numbering symbol and the left edge of the text. +Enter the minimum amount of space to leave between the right edge of the numbering symbol and the left edge of the text. -Default -Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values. +Default +Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
-Paragraph alignment +Paragraph alignment
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp index 5543d28990..eb21ca8414 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp @@ -29,120 +29,120 @@ -Macro -Opens a dialog to organize macros. +Macro +Opens a dialog to organize macros. UFI: it is not the dialog to run a macro
-Macro name -Displays the name of the selected macro. To create or to change the name of a macro, enter a name here. +Macro name +Displays the name of the selected macro. To create or to change the name of a macro, enter a name here. -Lists the macros that are contained in the module selected in the Macro from list. -UFI: Important: do not add Help IDS for SELECTOR_COMMANDS and SELECTOR_CATEGORIES, because they are reused for Customize dialog and will lead to display errors there if assigned. See #i51556# +Lists the macros that are contained in the module selected in the Macro from list. +UFI: Important: do not add Help IDS for SELECTOR_COMMANDS and SELECTOR_CATEGORIES, because they are reused for Customize dialog and will lead to display errors there if assigned. See #i51556# -Macro from / Save macro in -Lists the libraries and the modules where you can open or save your macros. To save a macro with a particular document, open the document, and then open this dialog. +Macro from / Save macro in +Lists the libraries and the modules where you can open or save your macros. To save a macro with a particular document, open the document, and then open this dialog. -Run / Saveunfortunately both have the same Help ID -Runs or saves the current macro. +Run / Saveunfortunately both have the same Help ID +Runs or saves the current macro. -Assign -Opens the Customize dialog, where you can assign the selected macro to a menu command, a toolbar, or an event. +Assign +Opens the Customize dialog, where you can assign the selected macro to a menu command, a toolbar, or an event. -Edit -Starts the $[officename] Basic editor and opens the selected macro or dialog for editing. +Edit +Starts the $[officename] Basic editor and opens the selected macro or dialog for editing. -New / Delete -Creates a new macro, or deletes the selected macro. -To create a new macro, select the "Standard" module in the Macro from list, and then click New. -To delete a macro, select it, and then click Delete. +New / Delete +Creates a new macro, or deletes the selected macro. +To create a new macro, select the "Standard" module in the Macro from list, and then click New. +To delete a macro, select it, and then click Delete. -New Library -Saves the recorded macro in a new library. +New Library +Saves the recorded macro in a new library. -New Module -Saves the recorded macro in a new module. +New Module +Saves the recorded macro in a new module. -Organizer -Opens the Macro Organizer dialog, where you can add, edit, or delete existing macro modules, dialogs, and libraries. -Module/Dialog tab page -Lets you manage modules or dialog boxes. +Organizer +Opens the Macro Organizer dialog, where you can add, edit, or delete existing macro modules, dialogs, and libraries. +Module/Dialog tab page +Lets you manage modules or dialog boxes. -Module/Dialog -Lists the existing macros and dialogs. +Module/Dialog +Lists the existing macros and dialogs. -Edit -Opens the selected macro or dialog for editing. +Edit +Opens the selected macro or dialog for editing. -NewUFI: i40875 -Opens the editor and creates a new module. +NewUFI: i40875 +Opens the editor and creates a new module. -New -Opens the editor and creates a new dialog. +New +Opens the editor and creates a new dialog. -Libraries tab pagethe three tab pages have no Help button, so no need to have three help pages -Lets you manage the macro libraries for the current application and any open documents. +Libraries tab pagethe three tab pages have no Help button, so no need to have three help pages +Lets you manage the macro libraries for the current application and any open documents. -Location -Select the application or the document containing the macro libraries that you want to organize. +Location +Select the application or the document containing the macro libraries that you want to organize. -Library -Lists the existing macro libraries for the current application and any open documents. +Library +Lists the existing macro libraries for the current application and any open documents. -Edit -Opens the $[officename] Basic editor so that you can modify the selected library. +Edit +Opens the $[officename] Basic editor so that you can modify the selected library. -Password -Assigns or edits the password for the selected library. +Password +Assigns or edits the password for the selected library. -New -Creates a new library. +New +Creates a new library. -Name -Enter a name for the new library or module. +Name +Enter a name for the new library or module. -Importchanged in #i64102 -Locate that $[officename] Basic library that you want to add to the current list, and then click Open. +Importchanged in #i64102 +Locate that $[officename] Basic library that you want to add to the current list, and then click Open. -Scripts +Scripts -To open the BeanShell Macros dialog box, choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - BeanShell. To open the JavaScript dialog box, choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - JavaScript. -Export -Opens a dialog to export the selected library either as an extension or as a Basic library. +To open the BeanShell Macros dialog box, choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - BeanShell. To open the JavaScript dialog box, choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - JavaScript. +Export +Opens a dialog to export the selected library either as an extension or as a Basic library. -Macros -Select a macro or script from "user", "share", or an open document. To view the available macros or scripts, double-click an entry. +Macros +Select a macro or script from "user", "share", or an open document. To view the available macros or scripts, double-click an entry. -Run -To run a script, select a script in the list, and then click Run. +Run +To run a script, select a script in the list, and then click Run. -Create -Creates a new script. The default script editor opens after you enter a name for the script. -Enter a name for the script.UFI: called from Create and from Rename +Create +Creates a new script. The default script editor opens after you enter a name for the script. +Enter a name for the script.UFI: called from Create and from Rename -Edit -Opens the default script editor for your operating system. +Edit +Opens the default script editor for your operating system. -Rename -Opens a dialog where you can change the name of the selected script. +Rename +Opens a dialog where you can change the name of the selected script. -Delete -Prompts you to delete the selected script. -The Macro Selector dialog contains two list boxes, namely the Library list box and the Macro name list box. -Library -Select a macro or script from "user", "share", or an open document. To view the contents of a library, double-click an entry in the list. -Macro name -Click a script, and then click a command button. +Delete +Prompts you to delete the selected script. +The Macro Selector dialog contains two list boxes, namely the Library list box and the Macro name list box. +Library +Select a macro or script from "user", "share", or an open document. To view the contents of a library, double-click an entry in the list. +Macro name +Click a script, and then click a command button.
-Macro programming in $[officename] +Macro programming in $[officename]
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06130001.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06130001.xhp index 249e746b1f..7908073305 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06130001.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06130001.xhp @@ -31,21 +31,21 @@
-Macros -Lets you record or organize and edit macros. +Macros +Lets you record or organize and edit macros.
-Run Macro -Opens a dialog where you can start a macro. +Run Macro +Opens a dialog where you can start a macro. -Digital Signature -Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your macros. You can also use the dialog to view certificates. +Digital Signature +Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your macros. You can also use the dialog to view certificates. -Organize Dialogs -Opens the Dialogs tab page of the Macro Organizer. +Organize Dialogs +Opens the Dialogs tab page of the Macro Organizer. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06130010.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06130010.xhp index 28eb9c8b22..de95e8bd81 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06130010.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06130010.xhp @@ -30,16 +30,16 @@
-Record Macro -Records a new macro. Only available, if macro recording feature is enabled in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced. +Record Macro +Records a new macro. Only available, if macro recording feature is enabled in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced.
-Stop Recording -Stops recording a macro. +Stop Recording +Stops recording a macro.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06130100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06130100.xhp index 88efadde42..4bbbf5a228 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06130100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06130100.xhp @@ -33,21 +33,21 @@ -Change Password -Protects the selected library with a password. You can enter a new password, or change the current password. +Change Password +Protects the selected library with a password. You can enter a new password, or change the current password.
-Old password +Old password -Password -Enter the current password for the selected library. -New password +Password +Enter the current password for the selected library. +New password -Password -Enter a new password for the selected library. +Password +Enter a new password for the selected library. -Confirm -Reenter the new password for the selected library. +Confirm +Reenter the new password for the selected library. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06130200.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06130200.xhp index 4ca569a69f..bc6dc89059 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06130200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06130200.xhp @@ -37,22 +37,22 @@ -Organize Macros +Organize Macros -Opens a submenu with links to dialogs where you can organize macros and scripts. +Opens a submenu with links to dialogs where you can organize macros and scripts.
-%PRODUCTNAME Basic -Opens a dialog where you can organize %PRODUCTNAME Basic macros. +%PRODUCTNAME Basic +Opens a dialog where you can organize %PRODUCTNAME Basic macros. -JavaScript -Opens a dialog where you can organize scripts. - +JavaScript +Opens a dialog where you can organize scripts. + -BeanShell -Opens a dialog where you can organize scripts. - +BeanShell +Opens a dialog where you can organize scripts. + diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06130500.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06130500.xhp index 884a0320ee..0421a0aaa7 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06130500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06130500.xhp @@ -32,17 +32,17 @@ -Append libraries +Append libraries Locate the %PRODUCTNAME Basic library that you want to add to the current list, and then click Open. -File name: -Enter a name or the path to the library that you want to append. You can also select a library from the list. -Options +File name: +Enter a name or the path to the library that you want to append. You can also select a library from the list. +Options -Insert as reference (read-only) -Adds the selected library as a read-only file. The library is reloaded each time you start %PRODUCTNAME. +Insert as reference (read-only) +Adds the selected library as a read-only file. The library is reloaded each time you start %PRODUCTNAME. -Replace existing libraries -Replaces a library that has the same name with the current library. +Replace existing libraries +Replaces a library that has the same name with the current library. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06140000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06140000.xhp index 881c1b3924..e78da43aee 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06140000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06140000.xhp @@ -32,14 +32,14 @@ -Customize -Customizes $[officename] menus, shortcut keys, toolbars, and macro assignments to events. +Customize +Customizes $[officename] menus, shortcut keys, toolbars, and macro assignments to events.
-You can customize shortcut keys and macro assignments for the current application, or for all $[officename] applications. -You can also save and load individual menu, shortcut key, and toolbar custom settings. +You can customize shortcut keys and macro assignments for the current application, or for all $[officename] applications. +You can also save and load individual menu, shortcut key, and toolbar custom settings. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp index 68f43635a2..d884cc3d98 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp @@ -35,103 +35,103 @@ menus;customizing mw deleted "modifying;..." entryMw deleted "changing;" -Menu -Customizes and saves current menu layouts as well as creates new menus. +Menu +Customizes and saves current menu layouts as well as creates new menus.
-You can add new commands, modify existing commands, or rearrange the menu items. +You can add new commands, modify existing commands, or rearrange the menu items.
-Menu -Select the menu and submenu that you want to edit. -New -Opens the New Menu dialog where you can enter the name of a new menu as well as select the location for the menu. -Menu -Opens a submenu with additional commands. +Menu +Select the menu and submenu that you want to edit. +New +Opens the New Menu dialog where you can enter the name of a new menu as well as select the location for the menu. +Menu +Opens a submenu with additional commands. -Move -Opens the Move Menu dialog where you can specify the location of the selected menu. +Move +Opens the Move Menu dialog where you can specify the location of the selected menu. -Rename -Opens a dialog where you can change the name of the selected menu. +Rename +Opens a dialog where you can change the name of the selected menu. -New name -Enter the new name for the selected menu. -To specify the keyboard accelerator for a menu -A keyboard accelerator allows you to select a menu command when you press Alt+ an underlined letter in a menu command. For example, to select the Save All command by pressing Alt+V, enter Sa~ve All. +New name +Enter the new name for the selected menu. +To specify the keyboard accelerator for a menu +A keyboard accelerator allows you to select a menu command when you press Alt+ an underlined letter in a menu command. For example, to select the Save All command by pressing Alt+V, enter Sa~ve All. -Select a menu or menu entry. +Select a menu or menu entry. -Click the Menu button and select Rename. +Click the Menu button and select Rename. -Add a tilde (~) in front of the letter that you want to use as an accelerator. Currently you cannot rename or delete any top-level menu entries. This is a bug +Add a tilde (~) in front of the letter that you want to use as an accelerator. Currently you cannot rename or delete any top-level menu entries. This is a bug -Delete -Deletes the selected menu or menu entry. -You can only delete custom menus and custom menu entries. -Entries -Displays a list of the available menu commands for the selected menu in the current application or document. +Delete +Deletes the selected menu or menu entry. +You can only delete custom menus and custom menu entries. +Entries +Displays a list of the available menu commands for the selected menu in the current application or document.
-To rearrange the order of menu entries, select an entry, and then click the up or down arrow button. +To rearrange the order of menu entries, select an entry, and then click the up or down arrow button. -Arrow Up -Moves the selected item up one position. +Arrow Up +Moves the selected item up one position. - + Icon -Arrow Up +Arrow Up
-Arrow Down -Moves the selected item down one position. +Arrow Down +Moves the selected item down one position. - + Icon -Arrow Down +Arrow Down
-Add Commands -Opens the Add Commands dialog. Select any command, then click Add or drag-and-drop the command into the Customize dialog box. +Add Commands +Opens the Add Commands dialog. Select any command, then click Add or drag-and-drop the command into the Customize dialog box. -Command -Opens a menu that contains additional commands. -Add Submenu -Opens the Add Submenu dialog, where you enter the name of a submenu. -Add Separator -Inserts a separator line under the current menu entry. -Rename -Opens the Rename dialog, where you enter a new name for the selected command. -New name -Enter the new name for the selected command. -Delete -Deletes the selected command. -Save In -UFI: Load and Save did not make it into SO8. There seems to be no work-around!!! -Select the application or open document where you want to add the menu. A separate menu configuration is saved for the item that you select. -To edit a menu configuration that is associated with an item in the list, select the item, make the changes that you want, and then click the OK button. -You cannot load a menu configuration from one location and save the configuration to another location. +Command +Opens a menu that contains additional commands. +Add Submenu +Opens the Add Submenu dialog, where you enter the name of a submenu. +Add Separator +Inserts a separator line under the current menu entry. +Rename +Opens the Rename dialog, where you enter a new name for the selected command. +New name +Enter the new name for the selected command. +Delete +Deletes the selected command. +Save In +UFI: Load and Save did not make it into SO8. There seems to be no work-around!!! +Select the application or open document where you want to add the menu. A separate menu configuration is saved for the item that you select. +To edit a menu configuration that is associated with an item in the list, select the item, make the changes that you want, and then click the OK button. +You cannot load a menu configuration from one location and save the configuration to another location.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06140101.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06140101.xhp index 4fdab2e8d3..985427eb4b 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06140101.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06140101.xhp @@ -27,16 +27,16 @@ -New Menu +New Menu
-Menu name -Enter a name for the menu. To specify a letter in the name as an accelerator key, enter a tilde (~) before the letter. +Menu name +Enter a name for the menu. To specify a letter in the name as an accelerator key, enter a tilde (~) before the letter. -Menu position -Moves the selected menu entry up one position or down one position in the menu when you click the arrow buttons. +Menu position +Moves the selected menu entry up one position or down one position in the menu when you click the arrow buttons. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06140102.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06140102.xhp index f2c9d2026c..477db5ed53 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06140102.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06140102.xhp @@ -27,15 +27,15 @@ -Move Menu +Move Menu
-Menu position -Moves the selected menu entry up one position or down one position in the menu when you click an arrow button. +Menu position +Moves the selected menu entry up one position or down one position in the menu when you click an arrow button. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp index eff3efff24..aca6226664 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp @@ -34,55 +34,55 @@ styles;keyboard shortcuts MW deleted "modifying;..." -Keyboard -Assigns or edits the shortcut keys for $[officename] commands, or $[officename] Basic macros. +Keyboard +Assigns or edits the shortcut keys for $[officename] commands, or $[officename] Basic macros.
-You can assign or edit shortcut keys for the current application or for all $[officename] applications. +You can assign or edit shortcut keys for the current application or for all $[officename] applications.
-Avoid assigning shortcut keys that are currently used by your operating system. +Avoid assigning shortcut keys that are currently used by your operating system.
-$[officename] -Displays shortcut keys that are common to all $[officename] applications. +$[officename] +Displays shortcut keys that are common to all $[officename] applications. -Writer +Writer Calc Impress Draw Math -Displays shortcut keys for the current $[officename] application. +Displays shortcut keys for the current $[officename] application. -Shortcut keys -Lists the shortcut keys and the associated commands. To assign or modify the shortcut key for the command selected in the Function list, click a shortcut in this list, and then click Modify. -Functions -Lists the function categories and the $[officename] functions that you can assign shortcut keys to. +Shortcut keys +Lists the shortcut keys and the associated commands. To assign or modify the shortcut key for the command selected in the Function list, click a shortcut in this list, and then click Modify. +Functions +Lists the function categories and the $[officename] functions that you can assign shortcut keys to. -Category -Lists the available function categories. To assign shortcuts to Styles, open the "Styles" category. +Category +Lists the available function categories. To assign shortcuts to Styles, open the "Styles" category. -Function -Select a function that you want to assign a shortcut key to, click a key combination in the Shortcut keys list, and then click Modify. If the selected function already has a shortcut key, it is displayed in the Keys list. +Function +Select a function that you want to assign a shortcut key to, click a key combination in the Shortcut keys list, and then click Modify. If the selected function already has a shortcut key, it is displayed in the Keys list. -Keys -Displays the shortcut keys that are assigned to the selected function. +Keys +Displays the shortcut keys that are assigned to the selected function. -Modify -Assigns the key combination selected in the Shortcut keys list to the command selected in the Function list. +Modify +Assigns the key combination selected in the Shortcut keys list to the command selected in the Function list. -Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation. +Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation. -Load -Replaces the shortcut key configuration with one that was previously saved. +Load +Replaces the shortcut key configuration with one that was previously saved. -Save -Saves the current shortcut key configuration, so that you can load it later. +Save +Saves the current shortcut key configuration, so that you can load it later. -Reset -Resets modified values back to the default values.i48946 +Reset +Resets modified values back to the default values.i48946
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06140400.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06140400.xhp index cdd7a17665..bb0aac8378 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06140400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06140400.xhp @@ -31,18 +31,18 @@
-Toolbars -Lets you customize $[officename] toolbars. +Toolbars +Lets you customize $[officename] toolbars.
-Toolbar -Select the toolbar you want to edit. +Toolbar +Select the toolbar you want to edit. -Style +Style Select the toolbar style you want to use. Icons @@ -57,74 +57,74 @@ Shows text only. -New -Opens the Name dialog, where you can enter the name of a new toolbar and select the location of the new toolbar. +New +Opens the Name dialog, where you can enter the name of a new toolbar and select the location of the new toolbar. -Enter the name of a new toolbar. +Enter the name of a new toolbar. -Select the location of the new toolbar. +Select the location of the new toolbar. -Toolbar -The Toolbar button opens a submenu with the following commands: -Rename -Opens the Rename Toolbar dialog, where you enter a new name for the selected toolbar. -New name -Enter the new name for the selected toolbar. +Toolbar +The Toolbar button opens a submenu with the following commands: +Rename +Opens the Rename Toolbar dialog, where you enter a new name for the selected toolbar. +New name +Enter the new name for the selected toolbar. -Delete -Deletes the selected toolbar without any further question. You can only delete custom toolbars, not the built-in toolbars. +Delete +Deletes the selected toolbar without any further question. You can only delete custom toolbars, not the built-in toolbars. -Restore Default Settings -Restores the default settings. +Restore Default Settings +Restores the default settings. -Moves the selected item up in the list. +Moves the selected item up in the list. -Moves the selected item down in the list. +Moves the selected item down in the list. -Commands -Displays a list of commands for the selected toolbar of the current application or document. +Commands +Displays a list of commands for the selected toolbar of the current application or document. -Add Command -Opens the Add Commands dialog. Select any command, then click Add to insert the command into the Customize dialog. +Add Command +Opens the Add Commands dialog. Select any command, then click Add to insert the command into the Customize dialog. Add Separator -Inserts a separator line under the current toolbar entry. +Inserts a separator line under the current toolbar entry. -Modify -The Modify button opens a submenu with the following commands: -Rename -Opens the Rename dialog, where you enter a new name for the selected command. -New name -Enter the new name for the selected command. - -Restore Default Settings -Restores the default settings. -Change Icon -Opens the Change Icon dialog, where you can assign a different icon to the current command. -Reset Icon -Resets the icon to the default icon. +Modify +The Modify button opens a submenu with the following commands: +Rename +Opens the Rename dialog, where you enter a new name for the selected command. +New name +Enter the new name for the selected command. + +Restore Default Settings +Restores the default settings. +Change Icon +Opens the Change Icon dialog, where you can assign a different icon to the current command. +Reset Icon +Resets the icon to the default icon. Remove -Deletes the selected command without any further question. +Deletes the selected command without any further question. Reset Restores the selected toolbar to its original state after you agree to the question. -Save In -Select the location where to load the configuration and where to save it. -For every entry in the list box, an own configuration is maintained. Select one of the open documents or select the application to load and edit the associated configuration. Edit the configuration and save it back to the location from where you loaded it. Editing the configuration in one location does not change the configuration in any other location. -It is not possible to load a configuration from one location and save it to another location. +Save In +Select the location where to load the configuration and where to save it. +For every entry in the list box, an own configuration is maintained. Select one of the open documents or select the application to load and edit the associated configuration. Edit the configuration and save it back to the location from where you loaded it. Editing the configuration in one location does not change the configuration in any other location. +It is not possible to load a configuration from one location and save it to another location. Description diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp index 7129b1d64a..576c5c3cfb 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp @@ -30,14 +30,14 @@ -Change Icon -Icons -Displays the available icons in %PRODUCTNAME. To replace the icon that you selected in the Customize dialog, click an icon, then click the OK button. +Change Icon +Icons +Displays the available icons in %PRODUCTNAME. To replace the icon that you selected in the Customize dialog, click an icon, then click the OK button. -Import -Adds new icons to the list of icons. You see a file open dialog that imports the selected icon or icons into the internal icon directory of %PRODUCTNAME. -You can only import icons that are in the PNG file format and that are 16x16 or 26x26 pixels in size. +Import +Adds new icons to the list of icons. You see a file open dialog that imports the selected icon or icons into the internal icon directory of %PRODUCTNAME. +You can only import icons that are in the PNG file format and that are 16x16 or 26x26 pixels in size. -Click to remove the selected icon from the list. Only user-defined icons can be removed. +Click to remove the selected icon from the list. Only user-defined icons can be removed. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp index 5f49ad8f2e..9da62f0750 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp @@ -36,8 +36,8 @@ -Events -Assigns macros to program events. The assigned macro runs automatically every time the selected event occurs. +Events +Assigns macros to program events. The assigned macro runs automatically every time the selected event occurs.
@@ -45,29 +45,29 @@ -The dialog box has reduced functionality when called from the Edit-Sheet menu of a spreadsheet. +The dialog box has reduced functionality when called from the Edit-Sheet menu of a spreadsheet. -Save In -Select first where to save the event binding, in the current document or in %PRODUCTNAME. -A macro that is saved with a document can only be run when that document is opened. +Save In +Select first where to save the event binding, in the current document or in %PRODUCTNAME. +A macro that is saved with a document can only be run when that document is opened. -The big list box lists the events and the assigned macros. After you selected the location in the Save In list box, select an event in the big list box. Then click Assign Macro. +The big list box lists the events and the assigned macros. After you selected the location in the Save In list box, select an event in the big list box. Then click Assign Macro. -Assign Macro -Opens the Macro Selector to assign a macro to the selected event. +Assign Macro +Opens the Macro Selector to assign a macro to the selected event. -Remove Macro -Deletes the macro assignment for the selected event. +Remove Macro +Deletes the macro assignment for the selected event.
-List of events +List of events
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06150000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06150000.xhp index d67d6c4876..6ace293b3c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06150000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06150000.xhp @@ -34,92 +34,92 @@ mw deleted "XSLT based filters;" -XML Filter Settings -Opens the XML Filter Settings dialog, where you can create, edit, delete, and test filters to import and to export XML files. +XML Filter Settings +Opens the XML Filter Settings dialog, where you can create, edit, delete, and test filters to import and to export XML files.
-Some filters are only available as optional components during the %PRODUCTNAME installation. To install an optional filter, run the %PRODUCTNAME Setup application, select "Modify", and then select the filter that you want in the list of modules. -The term XML filter is used in the following as a shortcut for the more exact description as an XSLT based filter. +Some filters are only available as optional components during the %PRODUCTNAME installation. To install an optional filter, run the %PRODUCTNAME Setup application, select "Modify", and then select the filter that you want in the list of modules. +The term XML filter is used in the following as a shortcut for the more exact description as an XSLT based filter. -Term +Term -Description +Description -XML +XML -Extensible Markup Language +Extensible Markup Language -XSL +XSL -Extensible Stylesheet Language +Extensible Stylesheet Language -XSLT +XSLT -Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformation. XSLT files are also called XSLT stylesheets. +Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformation. XSLT files are also called XSLT stylesheets.
-The XHTML export filter produces valid "XHTML 1.0 Strict" output for Writer, Calc, Draw, and Impress documents. +The XHTML export filter produces valid "XHTML 1.0 Strict" output for Writer, Calc, Draw, and Impress documents. -Filter list -Select one or more filters, then click one of the buttons. -Some filters are only available as optional components during the %PRODUCTNAME installation. To install an optional filter, run the %PRODUCTNAME Setup application, select "Modify", and then select the filter that you want in the list of modules. -The lists shows the name and the type of the installed filters. +Filter list +Select one or more filters, then click one of the buttons. +Some filters are only available as optional components during the %PRODUCTNAME installation. To install an optional filter, run the %PRODUCTNAME Setup application, select "Modify", and then select the filter that you want in the list of modules. +The lists shows the name and the type of the installed filters. -Click a filter to select it. +Click a filter to select it. -Shift-click or CommandCtrl-click to select several filters. +Shift-click or CommandCtrl-click to select several filters. -Double-click a name to edit the filter. +Double-click a name to edit the filter. -New -Opens a dialog with the name of a new filter. +New +Opens a dialog with the name of a new filter. -Edit -Opens a dialog with the name of the selected file. +Edit +Opens a dialog with the name of the selected file. -Test XSLTs -Opens a dialog with the name of the selected file. +Test XSLTs +Opens a dialog with the name of the selected file. -Delete -Deletes the selected file after you confirm the dialog that follows. +Delete +Deletes the selected file after you confirm the dialog that follows. -Save as Package -Displays a Save as dialog to save the selected file as an XSLT filter package (*.jar). +Save as Package +Displays a Save as dialog to save the selected file as an XSLT filter package (*.jar). -Open Package -Displays an Open dialog to open a filter from an XSLT filter package (*.jar). +Open Package +Displays an Open dialog to open a filter from an XSLT filter package (*.jar). -Help -Displays the help page for this dialog. +Help +Displays the help page for this dialog. -Close -Closes the dialog. +Close +Closes the dialog.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06150100.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06150100.xhp index bb1c14218d..864128d691 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06150100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06150100.xhp @@ -30,9 +30,9 @@ -XML Filter +XML Filter -View and edit the settings of an XML filter. +View and edit the settings of an XML filter.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06150110.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06150110.xhp index d2301bd4b8..0c6a4bf971 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06150110.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06150110.xhp @@ -31,26 +31,26 @@ -General +General -Enter or edit general information for an XML filter. +Enter or edit general information for an XML filter.
-Filter name -Enter the name that you want to display in the list box of the XML Filter Settings dialog. You must enter a unique name. +Filter name +Enter the name that you want to display in the list box of the XML Filter Settings dialog. You must enter a unique name. -Application -Select the application that you want to use with the filter. +Application +Select the application that you want to use with the filter. -Name of file type -Enter the name that you want to display in the File type box in file dialogs. You must enter a unique name. For import filters, the name appears in the File type box of Open dialogs. For export filters, the name appears in the File format box of Export dialogs. +Name of file type +Enter the name that you want to display in the File type box in file dialogs. You must enter a unique name. For import filters, the name appears in the File type box of Open dialogs. For export filters, the name appears in the File format box of Export dialogs. -File extension -Enter the file extension to use when you open a file without specifying a filter. $[officename] uses the file extension to determine which filter to use. +File extension +Enter the file extension to use when you open a file without specifying a filter. $[officename] uses the file extension to determine which filter to use. -Comments -Enter a comment (optional). +Comments +Enter a comment (optional). diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06150120.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06150120.xhp index 4c9d46a2e2..b2d6a61470 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06150120.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06150120.xhp @@ -31,22 +31,22 @@ - Transformation - Enter or edit file information for an XML filter. + Transformation + Enter or edit file information for an XML filter.
- DocType - Enter the DOCTYPE of the XML file. - The public identifier is used to detect the filter when you open a file without specifying a filter. - Browse - Opens a file selection dialog. - XSLT for export - If this is an export filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for exporting. - XSLT for import - If this is an import filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for importing. - Template for import - Enter the name of the template that you want to use for importing. In the template, styles are defined to display XML tags. - The path to the directory that contains the template must be included in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. When you open an XML file whose filter uses the template, the template opens first. In the template, you can map $[officename] styles to display XML tags in the XML document. + DocType + Enter the DOCTYPE of the XML file. + The public identifier is used to detect the filter when you open a file without specifying a filter. + Browse + Opens a file selection dialog. + XSLT for export + If this is an export filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for exporting. + XSLT for import + If this is an import filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for importing. + Template for import + Enter the name of the template that you want to use for importing. In the template, styles are defined to display XML tags. + The path to the directory that contains the template must be included in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. When you open an XML file whose filter uses the template, the template opens first. In the template, you can map $[officename] styles to display XML tags in the XML document. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06150200.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06150200.xhp index 164a9f6fd8..131dd2a513 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06150200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06150200.xhp @@ -30,42 +30,42 @@ -Test XML Filter +Test XML Filter -Tests the XSLT stylesheets used by the selected XML filter. - +Tests the XSLT stylesheets used by the selected XML filter. +
-Export +Export -XSLT for export -Displays the file name of the XSLT filter that you entered on the Transformation tab page. -Transform document -Displays the file name of the document that you want to use to test the XSLT filter. +XSLT for export +Displays the file name of the XSLT filter that you entered on the Transformation tab page. +Transform document +Displays the file name of the document that you want to use to test the XSLT filter. -Browse -Locate the file that you want to apply the XML export filter to. The XML code of the transformed file is opened in your default XML editor after transformation. +Browse +Locate the file that you want to apply the XML export filter to. The XML code of the transformed file is opened in your default XML editor after transformation. -Current Document -The front-most open file that matches the XML filter criteria will be used to test the filter. The current XML export filter transforms the file and the resulting XML code is displayed in the XML Filter output window. -Import +Current Document +The front-most open file that matches the XML filter criteria will be used to test the filter. The current XML export filter transforms the file and the resulting XML code is displayed in the XML Filter output window. +Import -XSLT for import -Displays the file name of the XSLT filter that you entered on the Transformation tab page. +XSLT for import +Displays the file name of the XSLT filter that you entered on the Transformation tab page. -Template for import -Displays the file name of the template that you entered on the Transformation tab page. -Transform file +Template for import +Displays the file name of the template that you entered on the Transformation tab page. +Transform file -Display source -Opens the XML source of the selected document in your default XML editor after importing. +Display source +Opens the XML source of the selected document in your default XML editor after importing. -Browse -Opens a file selection dialog. The selected file is opened using the current XML import filter. +Browse +Opens a file selection dialog. The selected file is opened using the current XML import filter. -Recent File -Re-opens the document that was last opened with this dialog. +Recent File +Re-opens the document that was last opened with this dialog. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06150210.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06150210.xhp index 5b6670adec..ca6b7f7ed7 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06150210.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06150210.xhp @@ -32,14 +32,14 @@ - XML Filter output - Lists the test results of an XML filter. + XML Filter output + Lists the test results of an XML filter.
- The test results of an import or export XSLT stylesheet are displayed in the XML Filter output window. If you want, you can also validate the filter output. - Validate - Validates the contents of the XML Filter output window. - The window splits into two areas and the results of the validation are displayed in the lower area. + The test results of an import or export XSLT stylesheet are displayed in the XML Filter output window. If you want, you can also validate the filter output. + Validate + Validates the contents of the XML Filter output window. + The window splits into two areas and the results of the validation are displayed in the lower area. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp index 3c1ed59a32..7063074860 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp @@ -36,77 +36,77 @@ -Hangul/Hanja Conversion -Converts the selected Korean text from Hangul to Hanja or from Hanja to Hangul. The menu command can only be called if you enable Asian language support under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, and if a text formatted in Korean language is selected. +Hangul/Hanja Conversion +Converts the selected Korean text from Hangul to Hanja or from Hanja to Hangul. The menu command can only be called if you enable Asian language support under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, and if a text formatted in Korean language is selected.
-Original -Displays the current selection. +Original +Displays the current selection. -Word -Displays the first replacement suggestion from the dictionary. You can edit the suggested word or enter another word. Click the Find button to replace your original word with the corresponding replacement word. +Word +Displays the first replacement suggestion from the dictionary. You can edit the suggested word or enter another word. Click the Find button to replace your original word with the corresponding replacement word. -Find -Finds your Hangul input in the dictionary and replaces it with the corresponding Hanja. Click Ignore to cancel the find function. +Find +Finds your Hangul input in the dictionary and replaces it with the corresponding Hanja. Click Ignore to cancel the find function. -Suggestions -Displays all available replacements in the dictionary. If the Replace by character box is enabled, you see a grid of characters. If the Replace by character box is not checked, you see a list of words. -Format -Click the format to display the replacements. +Suggestions +Displays all available replacements in the dictionary. If the Replace by character box is enabled, you see a grid of characters. If the Replace by character box is not checked, you see a list of words. +Format +Click the format to display the replacements. -Hangul/Hanja -The original characters are replaced by the suggested characters. +Hangul/Hanja +The original characters are replaced by the suggested characters. -Hanja (Hangul) -The Hangul part will be displayed in brackets after the Hanja part. +Hanja (Hangul) +The Hangul part will be displayed in brackets after the Hanja part. -Hangul (Hanja) -The Hanja part will be displayed in brackets after the Hangul part. +Hangul (Hanja) +The Hanja part will be displayed in brackets after the Hangul part. -Hanja as ruby text aboveTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources -The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hangul part. +Hanja as ruby text aboveTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources +The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hangul part. -Hanja as ruby text belowTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources -The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hangul part. +Hanja as ruby text belowTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources +The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hangul part. -Hangul as ruby text aboveTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources -The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hanja part. +Hangul as ruby text aboveTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources +The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hanja part. -Hangul as ruby text belowTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources -The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hanja part. -Conversion -Normally in a mixed text selection made of Hangul and Hanja characters, all Hangul characters will be converted to Hanja and all Hanja characters will be converted to Hangul. If you want to convert a mixed text selection only in one direction, use the following conversion options. +Hangul as ruby text belowTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources +The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hanja part. +Conversion +Normally in a mixed text selection made of Hangul and Hanja characters, all Hangul characters will be converted to Hanja and all Hanja characters will be converted to Hangul. If you want to convert a mixed text selection only in one direction, use the following conversion options. -Hangul only -Check to convert only Hangul. Do not convert Hanja. +Hangul only +Check to convert only Hangul. Do not convert Hanja. -Hanja only -Check to convert only Hanja. Do not convert Hangul. +Hanja only +Check to convert only Hanja. Do not convert Hangul. -Ignore -No changes will be made to the current selection. The next word or character will be selected for conversion. +Ignore +No changes will be made to the current selection. The next word or character will be selected for conversion. -Always Ignore -No changes will be made to the current selection, and every time the same selection is detected it will be skipped automatically. The next word or character will be selected for conversion. The list of ignored text is valid for the current $[officename] session. +Always Ignore +No changes will be made to the current selection, and every time the same selection is detected it will be skipped automatically. The next word or character will be selected for conversion. The list of ignored text is valid for the current $[officename] session. -Replace -Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options. The next word or character will be selected for conversion. +Replace +Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options. The next word or character will be selected for conversion. -Always Replace -Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options. Every time the same selection is detected it will be replaced automatically. The next word or character will be selected for conversion. The list of replacement text is valid for the current $[officename] session. +Always Replace +Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options. Every time the same selection is detected it will be replaced automatically. The next word or character will be selected for conversion. The list of replacement text is valid for the current $[officename] session. -Replace by character -Check to move character-by-character through the selected text. If not checked, full words are replaced. +Replace by character +Check to move character-by-character through the selected text. If not checked, full words are replaced. -Options -Opens the Hangul/Hanja Options dialog. +Options +Opens the Hangul/Hanja Options dialog. -Close -Closes the dialog. +Close +Closes the dialog. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp index 71dac2c4ce..067007614b 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp @@ -30,33 +30,33 @@ -Hangul/Hanja Options -Define options for the Hangul/Hanja conversion. +Hangul/Hanja Options +Define options for the Hangul/Hanja conversion. -User-defined dictionaries -Lists all user-defined dictionaries. Select the check box next to the dictionary that you want to use. Clear the check box next to the dictionary that you do not want to use. +User-defined dictionaries +Lists all user-defined dictionaries. Select the check box next to the dictionary that you want to use. Clear the check box next to the dictionary that you do not want to use. -New -Opens the New dictionary dialog box, where you can create a new dictionary. +New +Opens the New dictionary dialog box, where you can create a new dictionary. -Name -Enter a name for the dictionary. To display the new dictionary in the User-defined dictionaries list box, click OK. +Name +Enter a name for the dictionary. To display the new dictionary in the User-defined dictionaries list box, click OK. -Edit -Opens the Edit Custom Dictionary dialog where you can edit any user-defined dictionary. +Edit +Opens the Edit Custom Dictionary dialog where you can edit any user-defined dictionary. -Delete -Deletes the selected user-defined dictionary. -Options -Specifies additional options for all dictionaries. +Delete +Deletes the selected user-defined dictionary. +Options +Specifies additional options for all dictionaries. -Ignore post-positional word -Ignores positional characters at the end of Korean words when you search a dictionary. +Ignore post-positional word +Ignores positional characters at the end of Korean words when you search a dictionary. -Show entries recently used first -Shows the replacement suggestion that you selected the last time as the first entry on the list. +Show entries recently used first +Shows the replacement suggestion that you selected the last time as the first entry on the list. -Replace all unique entries automatically -Automatically replaces words that only have one suggested word replacement. +Replace all unique entries automatically +Automatically replaces words that only have one suggested word replacement. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp index 6f15c96b01..4793d10479 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp @@ -30,20 +30,20 @@ -Edit Custom Dictionary -Add and delete entries that are used for the Hangul/Hanja Conversion. -Book -Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit. -Original -Select the entry in the current dictionary that you want to edit. If you want, you can also type a new entry in this box. To move from the Original box to the first text box in the Suggestions area, press Enter. +Edit Custom Dictionary +Add and delete entries that are used for the Hangul/Hanja Conversion. +Book +Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit. +Original +Select the entry in the current dictionary that you want to edit. If you want, you can also type a new entry in this box. To move from the Original box to the first text box in the Suggestions area, press Enter. -Suggestions (max. 8) -Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacement word can contain a maximum of eight characters. -New -Adds the current replacement definition to the dictionary. -Delete -Deletes the selected entry. +Suggestions (max. 8) +Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacement word can contain a maximum of eight characters. +New +Adds the current replacement definition to the dictionary. +Delete +Deletes the selected entry. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/06990000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/06990000.xhp index 7f44adde1b..d068b1177d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/06990000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/06990000.xhp @@ -33,14 +33,14 @@
-Spellcheck -Checks spelling manually. +Spellcheck +Checks spelling manually.
-Spellcheck dialog +Spellcheck dialog
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/07010000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/07010000.xhp index c0ef0c5aa7..d0b591d353 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/07010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/07010000.xhp @@ -36,12 +36,12 @@ -New Window -Opens a new window that displays the contents of the current window. You can now view different parts of the same document at the same time. +New Window +Opens a new window that displays the contents of the current window. You can now view different parts of the same document at the same time.
-Changes made to a document in one window are automatically applied to all of the windows that are open for that document. +Changes made to a document in one window are automatically applied to all of the windows that are open for that document. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/07080000.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/07080000.xhp index 72c800f4cb..fb04354790 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/07080000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/07080000.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Document List - Lists the currently open documents. Select the name of a document in the list to switch to that document. + Document List + Lists the currently open documents. Select the name of a document in the list to switch to that document.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/about_meta_tags.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/about_meta_tags.xhp index a34ffe3202..77cf44d8cd 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/about_meta_tags.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/about_meta_tags.xhp @@ -34,60 +34,60 @@ META tags tags; META tags -HTML import and export -When you export a file to an HTML document, the description and the user-defined file properties are included as META tags between the HEAD tags of the exported document. META tags are not displayed in a Web browser, and are used to include information, such as keywords for search engines on your Web page. To set the properties of the current document, choose File - Properties, click the Description or User Defined tabs, and then type the information you want. -The following file properties are converted to META tags when you export a file as an HTML document: +HTML import and export +When you export a file to an HTML document, the description and the user-defined file properties are included as META tags between the HEAD tags of the exported document. META tags are not displayed in a Web browser, and are used to include information, such as keywords for search engines on your Web page. To set the properties of the current document, choose File - Properties, click the Description or User Defined tabs, and then type the information you want. +The following file properties are converted to META tags when you export a file as an HTML document: -File Property +File Property -<TITLE> +<TITLE> -Subject +Subject -<META NAME="CLASSIFICATION" CONTENT="Field Content"> +<META NAME="CLASSIFICATION" CONTENT="Field Content"> -Keywords +Keywords -<META NAME="KEYWORDS" CONTENT="Field Content"> +<META NAME="KEYWORDS" CONTENT="Field Content"> -Description +Description -<META NAME="DESCRIPTION" CONTENT="Field Content"> +<META NAME="DESCRIPTION" CONTENT="Field Content"> -Info fields 1...4 +Info fields 1...4 -<META NAME="Info field name" CONTENT="Field Content"> +<META NAME="Info field name" CONTENT="Field Content">
-When you import an HTML containing these META tags, the contents of the tags are added to the corresponding $[officename] file property box. -Keywords must be separated by commas. A keyword can contain white space characters or semicolons. -Import Tips -When you import an HTML document, following META tags are automatically converted to $[officename] fields: <META HTTP-EQUIV="REFRESH"...> and <META NAME="..." ...> , where NAME equals to AUTHOR, CREATED, CHANGED, CHANGEDBY, DESCRIPTION, KEYWORDS or CLASSIFICATION. -Scripts, comments, and META tags that are positioned directly before a TABLE tag are inserted in the first cell of the table. -Scripts and META tags in the header of an HTML document are imported and anchored to the first paragraph in the document. -To set the options for importing HTML tags, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility. A known META tag contains either "HTTP-EQUIV" or "NAME", and are imported as $[officename] comments. The only exception is <META NAME="GENERATOR"...>, which is ignored. -Export Tips -Comments and script fields at the beginning of the first paragraph in a document are exported to the header of an HTML document. If the document begins with a table, the first paragraph in the first cell of the table is exported to the header of the HTML document. +When you import an HTML containing these META tags, the contents of the tags are added to the corresponding $[officename] file property box. +Keywords must be separated by commas. A keyword can contain white space characters or semicolons. +Import Tips +When you import an HTML document, following META tags are automatically converted to $[officename] fields: <META HTTP-EQUIV="REFRESH"...> and <META NAME="..." ...> , where NAME equals to AUTHOR, CREATED, CHANGED, CHANGEDBY, DESCRIPTION, KEYWORDS or CLASSIFICATION. +Scripts, comments, and META tags that are positioned directly before a TABLE tag are inserted in the first cell of the table. +Scripts and META tags in the header of an HTML document are imported and anchored to the first paragraph in the document. +To set the options for importing HTML tags, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility. A known META tag contains either "HTTP-EQUIV" or "NAME", and are imported as $[officename] comments. The only exception is <META NAME="GENERATOR"...>, which is ignored. +Export Tips +Comments and script fields at the beginning of the first paragraph in a document are exported to the header of an HTML document. If the document begins with a table, the first paragraph in the first cell of the table is exported to the header of the HTML document. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/digitalsignatures.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/digitalsignatures.xhp index 0a4ee693fb..6ed7881ace 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/digitalsignatures.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/digitalsignatures.xhp @@ -32,35 +32,35 @@ -Digital Signatures - Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your document. You can also use the dialog to view certificates. +Digital Signatures + Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your document. You can also use the dialog to view certificates.
-You must save a file before you can apply a digital signature to the file. -You must save a file in OpenDocument format before you can apply a digital signature to the file. +You must save a file before you can apply a digital signature to the file. +You must save a file in OpenDocument format before you can apply a digital signature to the file. -List - Lists the digital signatures for the current document. - The Signed icon +List + Lists the digital signatures for the current document. + The Signed icon Icon indicates a valid digital signature, while the Exclamation mark icon Icon indicates an invalid digital signature. - See also Digital Signatures. + See also Digital Signatures. -Use AdES-compliant signature when there is a choice - Prefers creating XAdES signatures for ODF and OOXML, PAdES signatures for PDF. +Use AdES-compliant signature when there is a choice + Prefers creating XAdES signatures for ODF and OOXML, PAdES signatures for PDF. -View Certificate - Opens the View Certificate dialog. +View Certificate + Opens the View Certificate dialog. -Sign Document - Opens the Select Certificate dialog. +Sign Document + Opens the Select Certificate dialog. -Remove - Removes the selected signature from the list. Removes all subsequent signatures as well, in case of PDF. +Remove + Removes the selected signature from the list. Removes all subsequent signatures as well, in case of PDF. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/gallery_files.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/gallery_files.xhp index 4037caa241..91823b1c7a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/gallery_files.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/gallery_files.xhp @@ -31,31 +31,31 @@ -Files -Adds new files to the selected theme. +Files +Adds new files to the selected theme.
-File Type -Select the type of file that you want to add. +File Type +Select the type of file that you want to add. -Files found -Lists the available files. Select the file(s) that you want to add, and then click Add. To add all of the files in the list, click Add All. +Files found +Lists the available files. Select the file(s) that you want to add, and then click Add. To add all of the files in the list, click Add All. -Find files -Locate the directory containing the files that you want to add, and then click OK. +Find files +Locate the directory containing the files that you want to add, and then click OK. -Add -Adds the selected file(s) to the current theme. +Add +Adds the selected file(s) to the current theme. -Add all -Adds all of the files in the list to the current theme. +Add all +Adds all of the files in the list to the current theme. -Preview -Displays or hides a preview of the selected file.UFI: removed help id -Preview box -Displays a preview of the selected file. +Preview +Displays or hides a preview of the selected file.UFI: removed help id +Preview box +Displays a preview of the selected file. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp index ce68a0319b..7fded963a4 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp @@ -32,34 +32,34 @@ -Media Player +Media Player - Opens the Media Player window where you can preview movie and sound files as well as insert these files into the current document. + Opens the Media Player window where you can preview movie and sound files as well as insert these files into the current document.
- The Media Player supports many different media formats. You can also insert media files from the Media Player into your document. -Open - Opens a movie file or a sound file that you want to preview. - Apply - Inserts the current movie file or sound file as a media object into the current document. - Play - Plays the current file. - Pause - Pauses or resumes the playback of the current file. - Stop - Stops the playback of the current file. - Repeat - Plays the file repeatedly. - Mute - Turns sound off and on. - Volume slider - Adjusts the volume. - View - Adjusts the size of the movie playback. - Position slider - Moves to a different position in the file. + The Media Player supports many different media formats. You can also insert media files from the Media Player into your document. +Open + Opens a movie file or a sound file that you want to preview. + Apply + Inserts the current movie file or sound file as a media object into the current document. + Play + Plays the current file. + Pause + Pauses or resumes the playback of the current file. + Stop + Stops the playback of the current file. + Repeat + Plays the file repeatedly. + Mute + Turns sound off and on. + Volume slider + Adjusts the volume. + View + Adjusts the size of the movie playback. + Position slider + Moves to a different position in the file.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/moviesound.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/moviesound.xhp index a1d22a90d2..cf0b723cbc 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/moviesound.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/moviesound.xhp @@ -38,46 +38,46 @@ UFI: added "music;inserting"MW made "sounds;", "audio;", "music;" one level entries and added "movies" -Audio or Video +Audio or Video - Inserts a video or audio file into your document. + Inserts a video or audio file into your document.
- To insert a movie or sound file into your document + To insert a movie or sound file into your document - Click where you want to insert the file. + Click where you want to insert the file. - Choose Insert - Media - Audio or Video. + Choose Insert - Media - Audio or Video. - In the File Open dialog, select the file that you want to insert. - The file types that are listed in this dialog are not supported by all operating systems. + In the File Open dialog, select the file that you want to insert. + The file types that are listed in this dialog are not supported by all operating systems. - Click the Link box if you want a link to the original file. If it is not checked, the media file will be embedded (not supported with all file formats). + Click the Link box if you want a link to the original file. If it is not checked, the media file will be embedded (not supported with all file formats). - Click Open. + Click Open. - Alternatively, you can choose Tools - Media Player to open the Media Player. Use the Media Player to preview all supported media files. Click the Apply button in the Media Player window to insert the current media file into your document. - To play a movie or sound file + Alternatively, you can choose Tools - Media Player to open the Media Player. Use the Media Player to preview all supported media files. Click the Apply button in the Media Player window to insert the current media file into your document. + To play a movie or sound file - Click the object icon for the movie or sound file in your document. - If the icon is arranged on the background, hold down Ctrl while you click. - The Media Playback toolbar is shown. + Click the object icon for the movie or sound file in your document. + If the icon is arranged on the background, hold down Ctrl while you click. + The Media Playback toolbar is shown. - Click Play on the Media Playback toolbar. + Click Play on the Media Playback toolbar. - When you show an Impress presentation, the embedded sound or video on the current slide plays automatically until it's over or until you leave the slide. - You can also use the Media Playback Bar to pause, to stop, to loop, as well as to adjust the volume or to mute the playback of the file. The current playback position in the file is indicated on the left slider. Use the right slider to adjust the playback volume. For movie files, the bar also contains a list box where you can select the zoom factor for the playback. + When you show an Impress presentation, the embedded sound or video on the current slide plays automatically until it's over or until you leave the slide. + You can also use the Media Playback Bar to pause, to stop, to loop, as well as to adjust the volume or to mute the playback of the file. The current playback position in the file is indicated on the left slider. Use the right slider to adjust the playback volume. For movie files, the bar also contains a list box where you can select the zoom factor for the playback.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp index c8cfb1d09b..5f40ab3975 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp @@ -30,44 +30,44 @@ updates;checking manually online updates;checking manually -Check for Updates +Check for Updates UFI: changed name of page, see i76016Next time start download automatically -You can check for updates manually or automatically. - Checking for updates will also look for updates of all installed extensions. - Choose Help - Check for Updates to check manually. - You can disable or enable the automatic check in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update. +You can check for updates manually or automatically. + Checking for updates will also look for updates of all installed extensions. + Choose Help - Check for Updates to check manually. + You can disable or enable the automatic check in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update. - If an update is available, an icon + If an update is available, an icon Icon on the menu bar will notify you of the update. Click the icon to open a dialog with more information. - You will see the Check for Updates dialog with some information about the online update of %PRODUCTNAME. + You will see the Check for Updates dialog with some information about the online update of %PRODUCTNAME. - Enable an Internet connection for %PRODUCTNAME. - If you need a proxy server, enter the proxy settings in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Proxy. + Enable an Internet connection for %PRODUCTNAME. + If you need a proxy server, enter the proxy settings in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Proxy. - Choose Check for Updates to check for the availability of a newer version of your office suite. + Choose Check for Updates to check for the availability of a newer version of your office suite. - If a newer version is available and %PRODUCTNAME is not set up for automatic downloading, then you can select any of the following actions: + If a newer version is available and %PRODUCTNAME is not set up for automatic downloading, then you can select any of the following actions: - Download the new version. + Download the new version. - Install the downloaded files. + Install the downloaded files. - Abort this check for updates for now. + Abort this check for updates for now. - If %PRODUCTNAME is configured to download the files automatically, the download starts immediately. A download continues even when you minimize the dialog. - If automatic downloads are disabled, start the download manually. - If no update was found, you can close the dialog. - You need Administrator rights to update %PRODUCTNAME. + If %PRODUCTNAME is configured to download the files automatically, the download starts immediately. A download continues even when you minimize the dialog. + If automatic downloads are disabled, start the download manually. + If no update was found, you can close the dialog. + You need Administrator rights to update %PRODUCTNAME. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp index e8e9070a1c..0bd298a4b8 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp @@ -30,20 +30,20 @@ -Check for UpdatesUFI: this is the dialogChecks for available updates to your version of %PRODUCTNAME. If a newer version is available, you can choose to download the update. After downloading, if you have write permissions for the installation directory, you can install the update. -Once the download starts, you see a progress bar and three buttons on the dialog. You can pause and resume the download by clicking the Pause and Resume buttons. Click Cancel to abort the download and delete the partly downloaded file. -By default, downloads will be stored to your desktop. You can change the folder where the downloaded file will be stored in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update. -After the download is complete, you can click Install to start the installation of the update. You see a confirmation dialog, where you can choose to close %PRODUCTNAME. -Under some operation systems, it may be required to manually go to the download folder, unzip the download file, and start the setup script. -After installation of the update you can delete the download file to save space.Download +Check for UpdatesUFI: this is the dialogChecks for available updates to your version of %PRODUCTNAME. If a newer version is available, you can choose to download the update. After downloading, if you have write permissions for the installation directory, you can install the update. +Once the download starts, you see a progress bar and three buttons on the dialog. You can pause and resume the download by clicking the Pause and Resume buttons. Click Cancel to abort the download and delete the partly downloaded file. +By default, downloads will be stored to your desktop. You can change the folder where the downloaded file will be stored in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update. +After the download is complete, you can click Install to start the installation of the update. You see a confirmation dialog, where you can choose to close %PRODUCTNAME. +Under some operation systems, it may be required to manually go to the download folder, unzip the download file, and start the setup script. +After installation of the update you can delete the download file to save space.Download -Downloads and saves the update files to the desktop or a folder of your choice. Select the folder in %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box.Install -Installs the downloaded update.Pause -Pauses the download. Later click Resume to continue downloading.Resume -Continues a paused download.Cancel -Aborts the download and deletes the partly downloaded file. +Downloads and saves the update files to the desktop or a folder of your choice. Select the folder in %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box.Install +Installs the downloaded update.Pause +Pauses the download. Later click Resume to continue downloading.Resume +Continues a paused download.Cancel +Aborts the download and deletes the partly downloaded file.
-Starting online updates +Starting online updates
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp index 22d483136a..f9c9393da8 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp @@ -29,13 +29,12 @@
- Password - Assigns a password to prevent users from making unauthorized changes. + Password + Assigns a password to prevent users from making unauthorized changes. - The open password must be entered to open the file. - The permission password must be entered to edit the document. + The open password must be entered to open the file. + The permission password must be entered to edit the document. @@ -43,18 +42,18 @@ -Password - Type a password. A password is case sensitive. +Password + Type a password. A password is case sensitive. -Confirm - Re-enter the password. - Undoing password protection - To remove a password, open the document, then save without password. +Confirm + Re-enter the password. + Undoing password protection + To remove a password, open the document, then save without password. - Click to show or hide the file sharing password options. + Click to show or hide the file sharing password options.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/password_main.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/password_main.xhp index d08c0536aa..901ae40970 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/password_main.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/password_main.xhp @@ -30,32 +30,32 @@
Set Master Password - Assign a master password to protect the access to a saved password. + Assign a master password to protect the access to a saved password.
- You can save some passwords for the duration of a session, or permanently to a file protected by a master password. For example, passwords for accessing WebDAV or FTP servers are stored permanently if you enter a master password when prompted. Otherwise, they are only stored for the current session.removed text see i71792 - You must enter the master password to access a file or service that is protected by a saved password. You only need to enter the master password once during a session. + You can save some passwords for the duration of a session, or permanently to a file protected by a master password. For example, passwords for accessing WebDAV or FTP servers are stored permanently if you enter a master password when prompted. Otherwise, they are only stored for the current session.removed text see i71792 + You must enter the master password to access a file or service that is protected by a saved password. You only need to enter the master password once during a session.
- You should only use passwords that are hard to find by other persons or programs. A password should follow these rules: + You should only use passwords that are hard to find by other persons or programs. A password should follow these rules: - Length of eight or more characters. + Length of eight or more characters. - Contains a mix of lower case and upper case letters, numbers, and special characters. + Contains a mix of lower case and upper case letters, numbers, and special characters. - Cannot be found in any wordbook or encyclopedia. + Cannot be found in any wordbook or encyclopedia. - Has no direct relation to your personal data, e.g., date of birth or car plate. + Has no direct relation to your personal data, e.g., date of birth or car plate.
-Master password - Type a master password to prevent unauthorized users from accessing stored passwords. -Confirm master password - Re-enter the master password. +Master password + Type a master password to prevent unauthorized users from accessing stored passwords. +Confirm master password + Re-enter the master password.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/prop_font_embed.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/prop_font_embed.xhp index 7ae4905c98..b5119dbdd9 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/prop_font_embed.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/prop_font_embed.xhp @@ -25,15 +25,15 @@ embedding; fonts - Font - Embed document fonts in the current file. + Font + Embed document fonts in the current file.
- Fonts embedding - Mark this box to embed document fonts into the document file, for portability between different computer systems. The document with embedded fonts has a larger size and the fonts are used on the target computer for better rendering of the document layout. + Fonts embedding + Mark this box to embed document fonts into the document file, for portability between different computer systems. The document with embedded fonts has a larger size and the fonts are used on the target computer for better rendering of the document layout. Consider embedding fonts when your document use rare or custom fonts not generally available in other computers. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_send_as.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_send_as.xhp index 6688d8f1dc..aab0fc3877 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_send_as.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_send_as.xhp @@ -32,9 +32,9 @@ -E-mail as PDF +E-mail as PDF UFI: name changed with #i46895 -Shows the Export as PDF dialog, exports the current document to Portable Document Format (PDF), and then opens an e-mail sending window with the PDF as an attachment. +Shows the Export as PDF dialog, exports the current document to Portable Document Format (PDF), and then opens an e-mail sending window with the PDF as an attachment. see i70482
diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/securitywarning.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/securitywarning.xhp index 3ead84dee6..7f0cdc5b81 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/securitywarning.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/securitywarning.xhp @@ -37,17 +37,17 @@ -Security Warning +Security Warning -When you open a document that contains an unsigned macro, or a signed macro from an unknown source, the Security Warning dialog opens. -Enable or disable the macros. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Security in the Options dialog box to set the options. -View Signature -Opens a dialog where you can view the signature. -Always trust macros from this source -Adds the current macro source to the list of trusted sources. -Enable Macros -Allows macros in the document to run. -Disable Macros -Does not allow macros in the document to run. +When you open a document that contains an unsigned macro, or a signed macro from an unknown source, the Security Warning dialog opens. +Enable or disable the macros. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Security in the Options dialog box to set the options. +View Signature +Opens a dialog where you can view the signature. +Always trust macros from this source +Adds the current macro source to the list of trusted sources. +Enable Macros +Allows macros in the document to run. +Disable Macros +Does not allow macros in the document to run. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/selectcertificate.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/selectcertificate.xhp index 328e8f6fa8..b2a855e641 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/selectcertificate.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/selectcertificate.xhp @@ -28,20 +28,20 @@ -Select Certificate -Select the certificate that you want to digitally sign the current document with. +Select Certificate +Select the certificate that you want to digitally sign the current document with.
-List -Select the certificate that you want to digitally sign the current document with. +List +Select the certificate that you want to digitally sign the current document with. -View Certificate -Opens the View Certificate dialog where you can examine the selected certificate. +View Certificate +Opens the View Certificate dialog where you can examine the selected certificate. -Description -Type a purpose for the signature. +Description +Type a purpose for the signature. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/webhtml.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/webhtml.xhp index c21681b2f8..a5f55e678d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/webhtml.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/webhtml.xhp @@ -31,14 +31,14 @@
-Preview in Web Browser -Creates a temporary copy of the current document in HTML format, opens the system default Web browser, and displays the HTML file in the Web browser. +Preview in Web Browser +Creates a temporary copy of the current document in HTML format, opens the system default Web browser, and displays the HTML file in the Web browser.
-The HTML formatted copy is written to the temporary files folder that you can select in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths. When you quit %PRODUCTNAME, the HTML file will be deleted. -You can set the HTML export filter options by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility. +The HTML formatted copy is written to the temporary files folder that you can select in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths. When you quit %PRODUCTNAME, the HTML file will be deleted. +You can set the HTML export filter options by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/xformsdata.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/xformsdata.xhp index 248cf45bff..2a34df1acf 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/xformsdata.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/xformsdata.xhp @@ -36,69 +36,69 @@ -Data Navigator +Data Navigator - Specifies the data structure of the current XForms document. + Specifies the data structure of the current XForms document.
-Model name - Selects the XForms model that you want to use. +Model name + Selects the XForms model that you want to use. -Models - Adds, renames, and removes XForms models. +Models + Adds, renames, and removes XForms models. -Add - Opens the Add Model dialog where you can add an XForm model. +Add + Opens the Add Model dialog where you can add an XForm model. -Enter the name. +Enter the name. -Model data updates change document's modification status - When enabled, the document status will be set to "modified" when you change any form control that is bound to any data in the model. When not enabled, such a change does not set the document status to "modified". +Model data updates change document's modification status + When enabled, the document status will be set to "modified" when you change any form control that is bound to any data in the model. When not enabled, such a change does not set the document status to "modified". -Remove - Deletes the selected XForm model. You cannot delete the last model. +Remove + Deletes the selected XForm model. You cannot delete the last model. -Rename - Renames the selected Xform model. +Rename + Renames the selected Xform model. -Show Details - Switches the display to show or hide details.UFI: not explained in spec +Show Details + Switches the display to show or hide details.UFI: not explained in spec -Instance - Lists the items that belong to the current instance. -Submissions - Lists the submissions.UFI. it's not in the spec - Bindings - Lists the bindings for the XForm.UFI. it's not in the spec +Instance + Lists the items that belong to the current instance. +Submissions + Lists the submissions.UFI. it's not in the spec + Bindings + Lists the bindings for the XForm.UFI. it's not in the spec -Instances - This button has submenus to add, edit or remove instances. +Instances + This button has submenus to add, edit or remove instances. -Add - Opens a dialog where you can add a new instance. +Add + Opens a dialog where you can add a new instance. -Edit - Opens a dialog where you can modify the current instance. +Edit + Opens a dialog where you can modify the current instance. -Remove - Deletes the current instance. You cannot delete the last instance. - Show data types - Switches the display to show more or less details.UFI: not explained in spec +Remove + Deletes the current instance. You cannot delete the last instance. + Show data types + Switches the display to show more or less details.UFI: not explained in spec -Add - Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item. +Add + Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item. -Edit - Opens a dialog to edit the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding). +Edit + Opens a dialog to edit the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding). -Delete - Deletes the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding). +Delete + Deletes the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding). diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataadd.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataadd.xhp index 727f3bf914..fa587bca37 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataadd.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataadd.xhp @@ -37,70 +37,70 @@ Data Navigator;adding/editing items MW added a new entry and deleted "editing;" and "adding;" - Add / Edit - Adds a new item or edits the selected item in the XForms Data Navigator. Items can be elements, attributes, submissions, or bindings. - %PRODUCTNAME inserts a new item directly after the currently selected item in the Data Navigator. A new attribute is added to the currently selected element. + Add / Edit + Adds a new item or edits the selected item in the XForms Data Navigator. Items can be elements, attributes, submissions, or bindings. + %PRODUCTNAME inserts a new item directly after the currently selected item in the Data Navigator. A new attribute is added to the currently selected element. - Name - Enter the name of the item. - The attribute names must be unique within the same group. - Type - Select the type of a new item. You cannot change the type of an edited item. + Name + Enter the name of the item. + The attribute names must be unique within the same group. + Type + Select the type of a new item. You cannot change the type of an edited item. - Default value - Enter a default value for the selected item. - Settings - Specifies the properties of the selected item. + Default value + Enter a default value for the selected item. + Settings + Specifies the properties of the selected item. - Data type - Select the data type for the selected item. + Data type + Select the data type for the selected item. - Required - Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm. + Required + Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm. - The Condition button opens the Add Condition dialog where you can enter used namespaces and full XPath expressions. + The Condition button opens the Add Condition dialog where you can enter used namespaces and full XPath expressions. - Relevant - Declares the item as relevant. + Relevant + Declares the item as relevant. - The Condition button opens the Add Condition dialog where you can enter used namespaces and full XPath expressions. + The Condition button opens the Add Condition dialog where you can enter used namespaces and full XPath expressions. - Constraint - Declares the item as a constraint. + Constraint + Declares the item as a constraint. - The Condition button opens the Add Condition dialog where you can specify the constraint condition. + The Condition button opens the Add Condition dialog where you can specify the constraint condition. - Read-only - Declares the item as read-only. + Read-only + Declares the item as read-only. - The Condition button opens the Add Condition dialog where you can enter used namespaces and full XPath expressions. + The Condition button opens the Add Condition dialog where you can enter used namespaces and full XPath expressions. - Calculate / CalculationUFI: inconsistent use of name - Declares that the item is calculated. + Calculate / CalculationUFI: inconsistent use of name + Declares that the item is calculated. - The Condition button opens the Add Condition dialog where you can enter the calculation. + The Condition button opens the Add Condition dialog where you can enter the calculation. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataaddcon.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataaddcon.xhp index 08b20cfa68..cf0ece18da 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataaddcon.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataaddcon.xhp @@ -36,17 +36,17 @@ XForms;conditions - Add Condition - Add a condition in this subdialog of the Add Item / Edit Item dialog of the Data Navigator. + Add Condition + Add a condition in this subdialog of the Add Item / Edit Item dialog of the Data Navigator. - Condition - Enter a condition.examples? - Result - Displays a preview of the result. + Condition + Enter a condition.examples? + Result + Displays a preview of the result. - Edit Namespaces - Opens the Form Namespaces dialog where you can add, edit, or delete namespaces. + Edit Namespaces + Opens the Form Namespaces dialog where you can add, edit, or delete namespaces. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatachange.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatachange.xhp index a1b91f738e..58ce03d0e0 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatachange.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatachange.xhp @@ -31,11 +31,11 @@ editing;data binding of XForms data binding change in XForms -MW deleted "changing;"Change Data Binding -Edit the data binding in the XForms Data Navigator.UFI: called from the control's context menuUFI: cannot find it in m145 -Model -Select the name of the XForms model.UFI: ?? not in spec -Item list -Displays the data binding for the selected form control. To change the data binding, select another item in the list click OK. To access the Add and Properties commands for an item, right-click the item. +MW deleted "changing;"Change Data Binding +Edit the data binding in the XForms Data Navigator.UFI: called from the control's context menuUFI: cannot find it in m145 +Model +Select the name of the XForms model.UFI: ?? not in spec +Item list +Displays the data binding for the selected form control. To change the data binding, select another item in the list click OK. To access the Add and Properties commands for an item, right-click the item. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataname.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataname.xhp index 072664ffa7..38534c8a9c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataname.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataname.xhp @@ -38,25 +38,25 @@ XForms;adding/editing/deleting/organizing namespaces MW deleted "editing;" and "adding;" and added "XForms;" - Form Namespaces - Use this dialog to organize namespaces. You can access this dialog through the Add Condition dialog of the Data Navigator. + Form Namespaces + Use this dialog to organize namespaces. You can access this dialog through the Add Condition dialog of the Data Navigator. - Namespaces - Lists the currently defined namespaces for the form. + Namespaces + Lists the currently defined namespaces for the form. - Add - Adds a new namespace to the list. - Use the Add Namespace dialog to enter the Prefix and URL. + Add + Adds a new namespace to the list. + Use the Add Namespace dialog to enter the Prefix and URL. - Edit - Edits the selected namespace. - Use the Edit Namespace dialog to edit the Prefix and URL. + Edit + Edits the selected namespace. + Use the Edit Namespace dialog to edit the Prefix and URL. - Delete - Deletes the selected namespace. + Delete + Deletes the selected namespace. diff --git a/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp b/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp index 6ee214e1b1..6975a9dd8d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp @@ -28,79 +28,79 @@
- Data (for XML Form Documents) - The Data tab page of the Properties dialog for an XML Form document offers some XML forms settings. + Data (for XML Form Documents) + The Data tab page of the Properties dialog for an XML Form document offers some XML forms settings.
- The possible settings of the Data tab page of a control depend on the respective control. You will only see the options that are available for the current control and context. The following fields are available: + The possible settings of the Data tab page of a control depend on the respective control. You will only see the options that are available for the current control and context. The following fields are available: -XML data model - Select a model from the list of all models in the current document. +XML data model + Select a model from the list of all models in the current document. -Binding - Select or enter the name of a binding. Selecting the name of an existing binding associates the binding with the form control. Entering a new name creates a new binding and associates it with the form control. +Binding + Select or enter the name of a binding. Selecting the name of an existing binding associates the binding with the form control. Entering a new name creates a new binding and associates it with the form control. -Binding expression - Enter the DOM node what's a DOM node? spec doesn't tellto bind the control model towhat's a control model? spec doesn't tell. may be a typo in spec: control's model?. Click the ... button for a dialog to enter the XPath expression. +Binding expression + Enter the DOM node what's a DOM node? spec doesn't tellto bind the control model towhat's a control model? spec doesn't tell. may be a typo in spec: control's model?. Click the ... button for a dialog to enter the XPath expression. -Required - Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm. +Required + Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm. -Relevant - Declares the item as relevant. +Relevant + Declares the item as relevant. -Read-only - Declares the item as read-only. +Read-only + Declares the item as read-only. -Constraint - Declares the item as a constraint. +Constraint + Declares the item as a constraint. -Calculation - Declares that the item is calculated. +Calculation + Declares that the item is calculated. -Data type - Select a data type which the control should be validated against. +Data type + Select a data type which the control should be validated against. -x - Select a user-defined data type and click the button to delete the user-defined data type. +x + Select a user-defined data type and click the button to delete the user-defined data type. -+ - Click the button to open a dialog where you can enter the name of a new user-defined data type. The new data type inherits all facets from the currently selected data type. - The following lists all facets that are valid for data types. Some facets are only available for some data types. ++ + Click the button to open a dialog where you can enter the name of a new user-defined data type. The new data type inherits all facets from the currently selected data type. + The following lists all facets that are valid for data types. Some facets are only available for some data types. -Whitespaces - Specifies how whitespaces are to be handled when a string of the current data type is being processed. Possible values are Preserve, Replace, and Collapse. The semantics follow the definition at http://www.w3.org/TR/xmlschema-2/#rf-whiteSpace. +Whitespaces + Specifies how whitespaces are to be handled when a string of the current data type is being processed. Possible values are Preserve, Replace, and Collapse. The semantics follow the definition at http://www.w3.org/TR/xmlschema-2/#rf-whiteSpace. -Pattern - Specifies a regular expression pattern. Strings validated against the data type must conform to this pattern to be valid. The XSD data type syntax for regular expressions is different from the regular expression syntax used elseswhere in %PRODUCTNAME, for example in the Find & Replace dialog. +Pattern + Specifies a regular expression pattern. Strings validated against the data type must conform to this pattern to be valid. The XSD data type syntax for regular expressions is different from the regular expression syntax used elseswhere in %PRODUCTNAME, for example in the Find & Replace dialog. -Digits (total) - Specifies the maximum total number of digits that values of the decimal data type can have. +Digits (total) + Specifies the maximum total number of digits that values of the decimal data type can have. -Digits (fraction) - Specifies the maximum total number of fractional digits that values of the decimal data type can have. +Digits (fraction) + Specifies the maximum total number of fractional digits that values of the decimal data type can have. -Max. (inclusive) - Specifies an inclusive upper bound for values. +Max. (inclusive) + Specifies an inclusive upper bound for values. -Max. (exclusive) - Specifies an exclusive upper bound for values. +Max. (exclusive) + Specifies an exclusive upper bound for values. -Min. (inclusive) - Specifies an inclusive lower bound for values. +Min. (inclusive) + Specifies an inclusive lower bound for values. -Min. (exclusive) - Specifies an exclusive lower bound for values. +Min. (exclusive) + Specifies an exclusive lower bound for values. -Length - Specifies the number of characters for a string. +Length + Specifies the number of characters for a string. UFI: found 37998 which is already in use -Length (at least) - Specifies the minimum number of characters for a string. +Length (at least) + Specifies the minimum number of characters for a string. -Length (at most) - Specifies the maximum number of characters for a string. +Length (at most) + Specifies the maximum number of characters for a string. \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01110000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01110000.xhp index 88fe640ce7..882c1751f7 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01110000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01110000.xhp @@ -35,15 +35,15 @@ -Print File Directly -Click the Print File Directly icon to print the active document with the current default print settings. These can be found in the Printer Setup dialog, which you can call with the Printer Settings menu command. +Print File Directly +Click the Print File Directly icon to print the active document with the current default print settings. These can be found in the Printer Setup dialog, which you can call with the Printer Settings menu command. -If you select text or a graphic and click the Print File Direct icon, you are prompted to print the selection or the document. +If you select text or a graphic and click the Print File Direct icon, you are prompted to print the selection or the document. -If the current document uses a printer that is not the default printer for your operating system, the Print File Direct icon opens the Print dialog. +If the current document uses a printer that is not the default printer for your operating system, the Print File Direct icon opens the Print dialog. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01140000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01140000.xhp index 7840648fc2..fd9fc51c7f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01140000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01140000.xhp @@ -44,26 +44,25 @@ rectangle drawing shapes MW moved "frames;" and "selecting;" to the shared guide groups.xhpMW added 5 entries - +
-Show Draw Functions - Click to open or close the Drawing bar, where you can add shapes, lines, text, and callouts to the current document. +Show Draw Functions + Click to open or close the Drawing bar, where you can add shapes, lines, text, and callouts to the current document.
- You can switch on and off the Drawing toolbar of Writer and Calc documents using an icon on the Standard toolbar. + You can switch on and off the Drawing toolbar of Writer and Calc documents using an icon on the Standard toolbar.
- + Icon - Show Draw Functions + Show Draw Functions
@@ -71,88 +70,84 @@
You can change which buttons are visible in the toolbars. Right-click a toolbar to access the Visible Buttons command. - Selection + Selection - + Icon - Lets you select objects in the current document. To select an object, click the object with the arrow. To select more than one object, drag a selection frame around the objects. To add an object to a selection, press Shift, and then click the object. + Lets you select objects in the current document. To select an object, click the object with the arrow. To select more than one object, drag a selection frame around the objects. To add an object to a selection, press Shift, and then click the object.
-Line +Line - + Icon - Draws a straight line where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. + Draws a straight line where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag.
- To enter text on a line, double-click the line and type or paste your text. The text direction corresponds to the direction you dragged to draw the line. To hide the line, select Invisible in the Line Style box on the Drawing Object Properties bar. + To enter text on a line, double-click the line and type or paste your text. The text direction corresponds to the direction you dragged to draw the line. To hide the line, select Invisible in the Line Style box on the Drawing Object Properties bar. -Rectangle +Rectangle - + Icon - Draws a rectangle where you drag in the current document. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag. Click where you want to place a corner of the rectangle, and drag to the size you want. + Draws a rectangle where you drag in the current document. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag. Click where you want to place a corner of the rectangle, and drag to the size you want.
-Ellipse +Ellipse - + Icon - Draws an oval where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to draw the oval, and drag to the size you want. To draw a circle, hold down Shift while you drag. + Draws an oval where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to draw the oval, and drag to the size you want. To draw a circle, hold down Shift while you drag.
-Polygon +Polygon
- + Icon
- Draws a line composed of a series of straight line segments. Drag to draw a line segment, click to define the endpoint of the line segment, and then drag to draw a new line segment. Double-click to finish drawing the line. To create a closed shape, double-click the starting point of the line. - Hold the Shift key while drawing a polygon to position new points at 45 degree angles. - The Edit Points mode enables you to interactively modify the individual points of the polygon. + Draws a line composed of a series of straight line segments. Drag to draw a line segment, click to define the endpoint of the line segment, and then drag to draw a new line segment. Double-click to finish drawing the line. To create a closed shape, double-click the starting point of the line. + Hold the Shift key while drawing a polygon to position new points at 45 degree angles. + The Edit Points mode enables you to interactively modify the individual points of the polygon.
@@ -161,17 +156,16 @@ -Curve +Curve
- + Icon - Draws a smooth Bezier curve. Click where you want the curve to start, drag, release, and then move the pointer to where you want the curve to end and click. Move the pointer and click again to add a straight line segment to the curve. Double-click to finish drawing the curve. To create a closed shape, double click the starting point of the curve. The arc of the curve is determined by the distance you drag. + Draws a smooth Bezier curve. Click where you want the curve to start, drag, release, and then move the pointer to where you want the curve to end and click. Move the pointer and click again to add a straight line segment to the curve. Double-click to finish drawing the curve. To create a closed shape, double click the starting point of the curve. The arc of the curve is determined by the distance you drag. @@ -179,17 +173,16 @@ -Freeform Line +Freeform Line
- + Icon - Draws a freeform line where you drag in the current document. To end the line, release the mouse button. To draw a closed shape, release the mouse button near the starting point of the line. + Draws a freeform line where you drag in the current document. To end the line, release the mouse button. To draw a closed shape, release the mouse button near the starting point of the line. @@ -197,83 +190,79 @@ -Arc +Arc
- + Icon - Draws an arc in the current document. To draw an arc, drag an oval to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the arc. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint and click. You do not need to click on the oval. To draw an arc that is based on a circle, hold down Shift while you drag. + Draws an arc in the current document. To draw an arc, drag an oval to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the arc. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint and click. You do not need to click on the oval. To draw an arc that is based on a circle, hold down Shift while you drag.
-Ellipse Pie +Ellipse Pie - + Icon - Draws a filled shape that is defined by the arc of an oval and two radius lines in the current document. To draw an ellipse pie, drag an oval to the size you want, and then click to define the first radius line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the second radius line and click. You do not need to click on the oval. To draw a circle pie, hold down Shift while you drag. + Draws a filled shape that is defined by the arc of an oval and two radius lines in the current document. To draw an ellipse pie, drag an oval to the size you want, and then click to define the first radius line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the second radius line and click. You do not need to click on the oval. To draw a circle pie, hold down Shift while you drag.
-Circle Segment +Circle Segment - + Icon - Draws a filled shape that is defined by the arc of a circle and a diameter line in the current document. To draw a circle segment, drag a circle to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the diameter line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint of the diameter line and click. You do not need to click on the circle. To draw an ellipse segment, hold down Shift while you drag. + Draws a filled shape that is defined by the arc of a circle and a diameter line in the current document. To draw a circle segment, drag a circle to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the diameter line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint of the diameter line and click. You do not need to click on the circle. To draw an ellipse segment, hold down Shift while you drag.
-Text Box +Text Box - + Icon - Draws a text box with horizontal text direction where you drag in the current document. Drag a text box to the size you want anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. Rotate the text box to get rotated text. + Draws a text box with horizontal text direction where you drag in the current document. Drag a text box to the size you want anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. Rotate the text box to get rotated text.
-Text Animation +Text Animation - + Icon - Inserts animated text with horizontal text direction into the current document. Drag a text box, and then type or paste your text. To assign an animation effect, choose Format - Text - Text Animation.Inserts animated text with horizontal text direction into the current document. + Inserts animated text with horizontal text direction into the current document. Drag a text box, and then type or paste your text. To assign an animation effect, choose Format - Text - Text Animation.Inserts animated text with horizontal text direction into the current document. @@ -281,17 +270,16 @@ -Callouts +Callouts
- + Icon - Draws a line that ends in a rectangular callout with horizontal text direction from where you drag in the current document. Drag a handle of the callout to resize the callout. To add text, click the edge of the callout, and then type or paste your text. To change a rectangular callout to a rounded callout, drag the largest corner handle when the pointer changes to a hand. + Draws a line that ends in a rectangular callout with horizontal text direction from where you drag in the current document. Drag a handle of the callout to resize the callout. To add text, click the edge of the callout, and then type or paste your text. To change a rectangular callout to a rounded callout, drag the largest corner handle when the pointer changes to a hand.
@@ -307,30 +295,29 @@ - Points - Enables you to edit points on your drawing. + Points + Enables you to edit points on your drawing. - From File + From File - Extrusion On/Off - Switches the 3D effects on and off for the selected objects. + Extrusion On/Off + Switches the 3D effects on and off for the selected objects.
-Vertical Callouts +Vertical Callouts - + Icon - Draws a line that ends in a rectangular callout with vertical text direction from where you drag in the current document. Drag a handle of the callout to resize the callout. To add text, click the edge of the callout, and then type or paste your text. To change a rectangular callout to a rounded callout, drag the largest corner handle when the pointer changes to a hand. Only available when Asian language support is enabled. + Draws a line that ends in a rectangular callout with vertical text direction from where you drag in the current document. Drag a handle of the callout to resize the callout. To add text, click the edge of the callout, and then type or paste your text. To change a rectangular callout to a rounded callout, drag the largest corner handle when the pointer changes to a hand. Only available when Asian language support is enabled.
@@ -339,24 +326,23 @@
-Vertical Text +Vertical Text - + Icon - Draws a text box with vertical text direction where you click or drag in the current document. Click anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. You can also move the cursor to where you want to add the text, drag a text box, and then type or paste your text. Only available when Asian language support is enabled. + Draws a text box with vertical text direction where you click or drag in the current document. Click anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. You can also move the cursor to where you want to add the text, drag a text box, and then type or paste your text. Only available when Asian language support is enabled.
- Tips for working with the Drawing bar. + Tips for working with the Drawing bar.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01170000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01170000.xhp index 6380137032..9bfda64006 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01170000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01170000.xhp @@ -49,65 +49,65 @@ MW deleted "option field creation", changed "option button" to "push button" and "selections;" to "selecting;" -Form Controls -The Form Controls toolbar contains tools that you need to create an interactive form. +Form Controls +The Form Controls toolbar contains tools that you need to create an interactive form. You can use the toolbar to add controls to a form in a text, spreadsheet, presentation, or HTML document, for example a button that runs a macro.
-Choose View - Toolbars - Form Controls. -Icon on the Insert toolbar (you may need to enable this initially invisible icon): +Choose View - Toolbars - Form Controls. +Icon on the Insert toolbar (you may need to enable this initially invisible icon):
- + Icon -Form Controls +Form Controls
-XML Form documents (XForms) use the same controls. -To create a form, open a document and use the Form Controls toolbar to add and define the form controls. If you want, you can also link the form to a database, so that you can use the controls to manipulate a database. -When you create a form in an HTML document, you can use the form to send data over the Internet. -%PRODUCTNAME only exports the form properties that are supported by the HTML version that you export to. To specify the HTML version, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility. -To add a control to a document +XML Form documents (XForms) use the same controls. +To create a form, open a document and use the Form Controls toolbar to add and define the form controls. If you want, you can also link the form to a database, so that you can use the controls to manipulate a database. +When you create a form in an HTML document, you can use the form to send data over the Internet. +%PRODUCTNAME only exports the form properties that are supported by the HTML version that you export to. To specify the HTML version, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility. +To add a control to a document -On the Form Controls toolbar, click the icon of the control that you want to add. +On the Form Controls toolbar, click the icon of the control that you want to add. -In the document, drag to create the control. -To create a square control field, hold down the Shift key while you drag. +In the document, drag to create the control. +To create a square control field, hold down the Shift key while you drag. -To add a field from the field list of a table or query to a form, drag a cell into the form. In a text document, you can also drag a column header to add a field to a form. To include a label for the field, hold down the Command +To add a field from the field list of a table or query to a form, drag a cell into the form. In a text document, you can also drag a column header to add a field to a form. To include a label for the field, hold down the Command Ctrl+Shift key down when you drag a column head. -Modifying a Control +Modifying a Control -Right-click the control and choose Control. A dialog opens where you can define the properties of the control. +Right-click the control and choose Control. A dialog opens where you can define the properties of the control. -To specify a accelerator key for a control, add a tilde (~) in front of the character in the label for the control. +To specify a accelerator key for a control, add a tilde (~) in front of the character in the label for the control. -You can drag and drop controls from one document to another document. You can also copy and paste controls between documents. When you insert a control from another document, $[officename] analyzes the data source, content type, and content properties of the control so that the control fits the logical structure in the target document. For example, a control that displays contents from an address book continues to display the same contents after you copy the control to a different document. You can view these properties on the Data tab page of the Form properties dialog. +You can drag and drop controls from one document to another document. You can also copy and paste controls between documents. When you insert a control from another document, $[officename] analyzes the data source, content type, and content properties of the control so that the control fits the logical structure in the target document. For example, a control that displays contents from an address book continues to display the same contents after you copy the control to a different document. You can view these properties on the Data tab page of the Form properties dialog.
-Selectcontrols and design bars +Selectcontrols and design bars - + Icon -This icon switches the mouse pointer to the select mode, or deactivates this mode. The select mode is used to select the controls of the current form. +This icon switches the mouse pointer to the select mode, or deactivates this mode. The select mode is used to select the controls of the current form.
@@ -121,15 +121,15 @@
-Check Boxcontrols bar +Check Boxcontrols bar - + Icon -Creates a check box. Check boxes allow you to activate or deactivate a function in a form. +Creates a check box. Check boxes allow you to activate or deactivate a function in a form.
@@ -137,15 +137,15 @@
-Text Boxcontrols bar +Text Boxcontrols bar - + Icon -Creates a text box. Text boxes are fields in which the user can enter text. In a form, text boxes display data or allow for new data input. +Creates a text box. Text boxes are fields in which the user can enter text. In a form, text boxes display data or allow for new data input.
@@ -153,36 +153,36 @@
-Formatted Fieldcontrols bar +Formatted Fieldcontrols bar - + Icon -Creates a formatted field. A formatted field is a text box in which you can define how the inputs and outputs are formatted, and which limiting values apply. +Creates a formatted field. A formatted field is a text box in which you can define how the inputs and outputs are formatted, and which limiting values apply.
-A formatted field has special control properties (choose Format - Control). +A formatted field has special control properties (choose Format - Control).
-Push Buttoncontrols bar +Push Buttoncontrols bar - + Icon -Creates a push button. This function can be used to execute a command for a defined event, such as a mouse click. -You can apply text and graphics to these buttons. +Creates a push button. This function can be used to execute a command for a defined event, such as a mouse click. +You can apply text and graphics to these buttons.
@@ -191,16 +191,16 @@
-Option Buttoncontrols bar +Option Buttoncontrols bar - + Icon -Creates an option button. Option buttons enable the user to choose one of several options. Option buttons with the same functionality are given the same name (Name +Creates an option button. Option buttons enable the user to choose one of several options. Option buttons with the same functionality are given the same name (Name property). Normally, they are given a group box. @@ -210,16 +210,16 @@
-List Boxcontrols bar +List Boxcontrols bar
- + Icon -Creates a list box. A list box lets users select an entry from a list. If the form is linked to a database and the database connection is active, the List Box Wizard will automatically appear after the list box is inserted in the document. This wizard helps you create the list box. +Creates a list box. A list box lets users select an entry from a list. If the form is linked to a database and the database connection is active, the List Box Wizard will automatically appear after the list box is inserted in the document. This wizard helps you create the list box.
@@ -228,16 +228,16 @@
-Combo Boxcontrols bar +Combo Boxcontrols bar - + Icon -Creates a combo box. A combo box is a single-line list box with a drop-down list from which users choose an option. You can assign the "read-only" property to the combo box so that users cannot enter other entries than those found in the list. If the form is bound to a database and the database connection is active, the Combo Box Wizard will automatically appear after you insert the combo box in the document. +Creates a combo box. A combo box is a single-line list box with a drop-down list from which users choose an option. You can assign the "read-only" property to the combo box so that users cannot enter other entries than those found in the list. If the form is bound to a database and the database connection is active, the Combo Box Wizard will automatically appear after you insert the combo box in the document.
@@ -246,16 +246,16 @@
-Label Fieldcontrols bar +Label Fieldcontrols bar - + Icon -Creates a field for displaying text. These labels are only for displaying predefined text. Entries cannot be made in these fields. +Creates a field for displaying text. These labels are only for displaying predefined text. Entries cannot be made in these fields.
@@ -263,169 +263,169 @@
-More ControlsControls bar -Opens the More Controls toolbar. +More ControlsControls bar +Opens the More Controls toolbar. -Form DesignControls bar -Opens the Form Design toolbar. +Form DesignControls bar +Opens the Form Design toolbar.
-Wizards On/OffControls bar +Wizards On/OffControls bar - + Icon -Turns on and turns off the automatic form controls wizards. -These wizards help you to enter the properties of list boxes, table controls, and other controls. +Turns on and turns off the automatic form controls wizards. +These wizards help you to enter the properties of list boxes, table controls, and other controls.
-Context Menu Commandsend of visible part of FORM CONTROLS file +Context Menu Commandsend of visible part of FORM CONTROLS file now the MORE CONTROLS
-Spin Buttonmore controls bar +Spin Buttonmore controls bar - + Icon -Creates a spin button. +Creates a spin button.
-If you add a spin button to a Calc spreadsheet, you can use the Data tab page to create a two-way link between the spin button and a cell. As a result, when you change the contents of a cell, the contents of the spin button are updated. Conversely, if you change the value of the spin button, the contents of the cell are updated.UFI: see spec doc spinbutton_form_control.sxw +If you add a spin button to a Calc spreadsheet, you can use the Data tab page to create a two-way link between the spin button and a cell. As a result, when you change the contents of a cell, the contents of the spin button are updated. Conversely, if you change the value of the spin button, the contents of the cell are updated.UFI: see spec doc spinbutton_form_control.sxw
-Scrollbarmore controls bar +Scrollbarmore controls bar - + Icon -Creates a scrollbar. +Creates a scrollbar.
-You can specify the following properties for a scrollbar: +You can specify the following properties for a scrollbar: -UI name +UI name -Semantics +Semantics -Scroll value min +Scroll value min -Specifies the minimum height or the minimum width of a scrollbar. +Specifies the minimum height or the minimum width of a scrollbar. -Scroll value max +Scroll value max -Specifies the maximum height or the maximum width of a scrollbar. +Specifies the maximum height or the maximum width of a scrollbar. -Default scroll value +Default scroll value -Specifies the default value of a scrollbar, used when the form is reset. +Specifies the default value of a scrollbar, used when the form is reset. -Orientation +Orientation -Specifies the orientation of a scrollbar, that is, horizontal or vertical. +Specifies the orientation of a scrollbar, that is, horizontal or vertical. -Small change +Small change -Specifies the minimum amount by which you can scroll a scrollbar, for example, by clicking an arrow. +Specifies the minimum amount by which you can scroll a scrollbar, for example, by clicking an arrow. -Large change +Large change -Specifies the amount that a large step scrolls a scrollbar, for example, when you click between the scrollbar thumb and a scrollbar arrow. +Specifies the amount that a large step scrolls a scrollbar, for example, when you click between the scrollbar thumb and a scrollbar arrow. -Delay +Delay -Specifies the delay in milliseconds between scrollbar trigger events. For example, the delay that occurs when you click an arrow button on the scrollbar and hold down the mouse button. +Specifies the delay in milliseconds between scrollbar trigger events. For example, the delay that occurs when you click an arrow button on the scrollbar and hold down the mouse button. -Symbol color +Symbol color -Specifies the color of the arrows on the scrollbar. +Specifies the color of the arrows on the scrollbar. -Visible Size +Visible Size -Specifies the size of the scrollbar thumb in "value units". For example, a value of ("Scroll value max." minus "Scroll value min.") / 2 results in a scrollbar thumb that occupies half of the scrollbar. -To make the width of the scrollbar equal to the height of the scrollbar, set the Visible Size to zero. +Specifies the size of the scrollbar thumb in "value units". For example, a value of ("Scroll value max." minus "Scroll value min.") / 2 results in a scrollbar thumb that occupies half of the scrollbar. +To make the width of the scrollbar equal to the height of the scrollbar, set the Visible Size to zero.
-In a Calc spreadsheet, you can use the Data tab page to create a two-way link between a scrollbar and a cell.UFI: see spec doc scrollbar_form_control.sxw +In a Calc spreadsheet, you can use the Data tab page to create a two-way link between a scrollbar and a cell.UFI: see spec doc scrollbar_form_control.sxw
-Image Buttonmore controls bar +Image Buttonmore controls bar - + Icon -Creates a button displayed as an image. Aside from the graphic representation, an image button has the same properties as a "normal" button. +Creates a button displayed as an image. Aside from the graphic representation, an image button has the same properties as a "normal" button.
@@ -434,17 +434,17 @@
-Image Controlmore controls bar +Image Controlmore controls bar - + Icon -Creates an image control. It can only be used to add images from a database. In the form document, double-click one of these controls to open the Insert Graphic dialog to insert the image. There is also a context menu (not in design mode) with commands for inserting and deleting the image. -Images from a database can be displayed in a form, and new images can be inserted in the database as long as the image control is not write-protected. The control must refer to a database field of the image type. Therefore, enter the data field into the properties window on the Data tab page. +Creates an image control. It can only be used to add images from a database. In the form document, double-click one of these controls to open the Insert Graphic dialog to insert the image. There is also a context menu (not in design mode) with commands for inserting and deleting the image. +Images from a database can be displayed in a form, and new images can be inserted in the database as long as the image control is not write-protected. The control must refer to a database field of the image type. Therefore, enter the data field into the properties window on the Data tab page.
@@ -453,56 +453,56 @@
-Date Fieldmore controls bar +Date Fieldmore controls bar - + Icon -Creates a date field. If the form is linked to a database, the date values can be adopted from the database. +Creates a date field. If the form is linked to a database, the date values can be adopted from the database.
-If you assign the "Dropdown" property to the date field, the user can open a calendar to select a date under the date field. This also applies to a date field within a Table Control field. -Date fields can be easily edited by the user with the up arrow and down arrow keys. Depending on the cursor position, the day, month, or the year is can be increased or decreased using the arrow keys. -Specific Remarks on Date Fields. +If you assign the "Dropdown" property to the date field, the user can open a calendar to select a date under the date field. This also applies to a date field within a Table Control field. +Date fields can be easily edited by the user with the up arrow and down arrow keys. Depending on the cursor position, the day, month, or the year is can be increased or decreased using the arrow keys. +Specific Remarks on Date Fields.
-Time Fieldmore controls bar +Time Fieldmore controls bar - + Icon -Creates a time field. If the form is linked to a database, the time values for the form can be adopted from the database. +Creates a time field. If the form is linked to a database, the time values for the form can be adopted from the database.
-Time fields can be easily edited by the user with the up and down arrow keys. Depending on the cursor position, the hours, minutes, or the seconds are increased or decreased using the arrow keys. +Time fields can be easily edited by the user with the up and down arrow keys. Depending on the cursor position, the hours, minutes, or the seconds are increased or decreased using the arrow keys.
-File Selectionmore controls bar +File Selectionmore controls bar - + Icon -Creates a button that enables file selection. +Creates a button that enables file selection.
@@ -511,16 +511,16 @@
-Numerical Fieldmore controls bar +Numerical Fieldmore controls bar - + Icon -Creates a numerical field. If the form is linked to a database, the numerical values in the form can be adopted from the database. +Creates a numerical field. If the form is linked to a database, the numerical values in the form can be adopted from the database.
@@ -529,16 +529,16 @@
-Currency Fieldmore controls bar +Currency Fieldmore controls bar - + Icon -Creates a currency field. If the form is linked to a database, the currency field contents for in the form can be adopted from the database. +Creates a currency field. If the form is linked to a database, the currency field contents for in the form can be adopted from the database.
@@ -547,82 +547,82 @@
-Pattern Fieldmore controls bar +Pattern Fieldmore controls bar - + Icon -Creates a pattern field. Pattern fields consist of an edit mask and a literal mask. The edit mask determines which data can be entered. The literal mask determines the contents of the pattern field when loading the form. +Creates a pattern field. Pattern fields consist of an edit mask and a literal mask. The edit mask determines which data can be entered. The literal mask determines the contents of the pattern field when loading the form.
-Please note that pattern fields are not exported into HTML format. +Please note that pattern fields are not exported into HTML format.
-Group Boxmore controls bar +Group Boxmore controls bar - + Icon -Creates a frame to visually group several controls. Group boxes allow you to group option buttons in a frame. -If you insert a group frame into the document, the Group Element Wizard starts, which allows you to easily create an option group. +Creates a frame to visually group several controls. Group boxes allow you to group option buttons in a frame. +If you insert a group frame into the document, the Group Element Wizard starts, which allows you to easily create an option group.
- + Note: When you drag a group box over already existing controls and then want to select a control, you have to first open the context menu of the group box and choose Arrange - Send to Back. Then select the control while pressing Command Ctrl. -Group boxes are used only for a visual effect. A functional grouping of option fields can be made through the name definition: under the Name properties of all option fields, enter the same name in order to group them. +Group boxes are used only for a visual effect. A functional grouping of option fields can be made through the name definition: under the Name properties of all option fields, enter the same name in order to group them.
-Table Controlmore controls bar +Table Controlmore controls bar - + Icon -Creates a table control to display a database table. If you create a new table control, the Table Element Wizard appears. +Creates a table control to display a database table. If you create a new table control, the Table Element Wizard appears.
-Special information about Table Controls. +Special information about Table Controls.
-Navigation barmore controls bar +Navigation barmore controls bar - + Icon -Creates a navigation bar. +Creates a navigation bar.
-The navigation bar allows you to move through the records of a database or a database form. The controls on this navigation bar work the same way as the controls on the default navigation bar in $[officename]. +The navigation bar allows you to move through the records of a database or a database form. The controls on this navigation bar work the same way as the controls on the default navigation bar in $[officename].
end of MORE CONTROLS bar @@ -632,16 +632,16 @@
-Automatic Control Focusdesign bar +Automatic Control Focusdesign bar - + Icon -If Automatic Control Focus is activated, the first form control will be selected when you open the document. If the button is not activated, the text will be selected after opening. The Tab Order that you have specified determines which is the first form control. +If Automatic Control Focus is activated, the first form control will be selected when you open the document. If the button is not activated, the text will be selected after opening. The Tab Order that you have specified determines which is the first form control.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01170001.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01170001.xhp index 1b3fcd9124..31eaac1d75 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01170001.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01170001.xhp @@ -32,58 +32,58 @@ - Context Menu of a Control Field - The context menu of a control field has the following commands. + Context Menu of a Control Field + The context menu of a control field has the following commands. -Replace with - Calls a submenu where you can select a control type to replace the control selected in the document. As many properties as possible are adopted. +Replace with + Calls a submenu where you can select a control type to replace the control selected in the document. As many properties as possible are adopted. -Text box - The selected control is transformed into a text box. +Text box + The selected control is transformed into a text box. -Button - The selected control is transformed into a button. +Button + The selected control is transformed into a button. -Label field - The selected control is transformed into a label. +Label field + The selected control is transformed into a label. -List Box - The selected control is transformed into a list box. +List Box + The selected control is transformed into a list box. -Check Box - The selected control is transformed into a check box. +Check Box + The selected control is transformed into a check box. -Radio Button - The selected control is transformed into an option button. +Radio Button + The selected control is transformed into an option button. -Combo Box - The selected control is transformed into a combo box. +Combo Box + The selected control is transformed into a combo box. -Image Button - The selected control is transformed into an image button. +Image Button + The selected control is transformed into an image button. -File Selection - The selected control is transformed into a file selection. +File Selection + The selected control is transformed into a file selection. -Date Field - The selected control is transformed into a date field. +Date Field + The selected control is transformed into a date field. -Time Field - The selected control is transformed into a time field. +Time Field + The selected control is transformed into a time field. -Numerical Field - The selected control is transformed into a numerical field. +Numerical Field + The selected control is transformed into a numerical field. -Currency Field - The selected control is transformed into a currency field. +Currency Field + The selected control is transformed into a currency field. -Pattern Field - The selected control is transformed into a pattern field. +Pattern Field + The selected control is transformed into a pattern field. -Image Control - The selected control is transformed into an image control. +Image Control + The selected control is transformed into an image control. -Formatted Field - The selected control is transformed into a formatted field. +Formatted Field + The selected control is transformed into a formatted field. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01170002.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01170002.xhp index bc8e0444ba..460be17993 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01170002.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01170002.xhp @@ -34,13 +34,13 @@ fields; formatted fields controls; formatted fields -Special properties of a formatted field - +Special properties of a formatted field + Formatting: You can set the Formatting property by clicking the ... button in the Formatting line of the Properties: Formatted Field dialog. The Number Format dialog appears. -If the formatted field is connected to the text field of a database, the entries in this field will be treated as text. If the formatted field is connected to a field of the database that can be displayed as a number, the input is treated as numbers. The date and time are also handled internally as numbers. - +If the formatted field is connected to the text field of a database, the entries in this field will be treated as text. If the formatted field is connected to a field of the database that can be displayed as a number, the input is treated as numbers. The date and time are also handled internally as numbers. + Min. value and Max. value: You can enter the minimum and maximum numeric value for a formatted field. The min and max values determine the output of existing data (Example: Min. value is 5, the connected database field contains the integer value 3. The output is 5, but the value in the database is not modified) and the input of new data (Example: Max. value is 10 and you enter 20. The input is corrected and 10 is written in the database). If the fields are not filled in for Min. value and Max. value, no limits will be applied. For formatted fields that are connected to a database text field, these two values and the Default value do not apply. - + Default value: This value is set for new records as the default value. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01170003.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01170003.xhp index 87ee82ac19..3e5e6079dd 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01170003.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01170003.xhp @@ -27,9 +27,9 @@ -date fields; propertiesSpecial Tips for Date Fields -When you enter a year using two digits, the corresponding four digit value is determined by a setting in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - General. For example, if 1935 is set as the lower limiting value and you enter 34 as a date value, then the result is 2034 instead of 1934. - The pre-set limit value will be saved for each document. +date fields; propertiesSpecial Tips for Date Fields +When you enter a year using two digits, the corresponding four digit value is determined by a setting in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - General. For example, if 1935 is set as the lower limiting value and you enter 34 as a date value, then the result is 2034 instead of 1934. + The pre-set limit value will be saved for each document. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp index 31df640394..e01f41d195 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp @@ -33,51 +33,51 @@ controls; properties of table controls table controls;keyboard-only edit mode -Special Tips for Table Controls -You can define a table control to display the records as you like. In other words you can define data fields for displaying or editing data like in a database form. -The following fields are possible in a table control: text, date, time and currency field, numeric field, pattern field, check box and combo box. In the case of combined date/time fields, two columns are created automatically. -The number of selected lines, if any are selected, is in parentheses after the total number of records. -To insert columns into the table control, click in the column heads and bring up the context menu. The following commands are available: -Insert Column -Calls a submenu to select a data field to adopt it in the table control. -Configure the table control using drag and drop: Open the data source browser and drag the desired fields out of the data source browser and on to the column heads of the table control. A pre-configured column is created. -Replace with -Opens a submenu to select a data field to replace the data field selected in the table control. -Delete Column -Deletes the currently selected column. -Column -Opens the properties dialog of the selected column. -Hide Columns -Hides the selected column. Its properties are not changed. -Show columns -Calls a submenu where you can select the columns to show again. To show only one column, click the column name. You see only the first 16 hidden columns. If there are more hidden columns, choose the More command to call the Show Columns dialog. -More -Calls the Show Columns dialog. -In the Show Columns dialog you can select the columns to be shown. Hold down the Shift or CommandCtrl key to select multiple entries. -All -Click All if you want to show all columns. -Keyboard-only control of Table Controls -If you use the keyboard only to travel through controls in your document, you will find one difference to the other types of controls: the Tab key does not move the cursor to the next control, but moves to the next column inside the table control. Press CommandCtrl+Tab to move to the next control, or press Shift+CommandCtrl+Tab to move to the previous control. -To enter the special keyboard-only edit mode for Table Controls: -The form document must be in design mode. +Special Tips for Table Controls +You can define a table control to display the records as you like. In other words you can define data fields for displaying or editing data like in a database form. +The following fields are possible in a table control: text, date, time and currency field, numeric field, pattern field, check box and combo box. In the case of combined date/time fields, two columns are created automatically. +The number of selected lines, if any are selected, is in parentheses after the total number of records. +To insert columns into the table control, click in the column heads and bring up the context menu. The following commands are available: +Insert Column +Calls a submenu to select a data field to adopt it in the table control. +Configure the table control using drag and drop: Open the data source browser and drag the desired fields out of the data source browser and on to the column heads of the table control. A pre-configured column is created. +Replace with +Opens a submenu to select a data field to replace the data field selected in the table control. +Delete Column +Deletes the currently selected column. +Column +Opens the properties dialog of the selected column. +Hide Columns +Hides the selected column. Its properties are not changed. +Show columns +Calls a submenu where you can select the columns to show again. To show only one column, click the column name. You see only the first 16 hidden columns. If there are more hidden columns, choose the More command to call the Show Columns dialog. +More +Calls the Show Columns dialog. +In the Show Columns dialog you can select the columns to be shown. Hold down the Shift or CommandCtrl key to select multiple entries. +All +Click All if you want to show all columns. +Keyboard-only control of Table Controls +If you use the keyboard only to travel through controls in your document, you will find one difference to the other types of controls: the Tab key does not move the cursor to the next control, but moves to the next column inside the table control. Press CommandCtrl+Tab to move to the next control, or press Shift+CommandCtrl+Tab to move to the previous control. +To enter the special keyboard-only edit mode for Table Controls: +The form document must be in design mode. -Press CommandCtrl+F6 to select the document. +Press CommandCtrl+F6 to select the document. -Press Shift+F4 to select the first control. If the Table Control is not the first control, press Tab until it is selected. +Press Shift+F4 to select the first control. If the Table Control is not the first control, press Tab until it is selected. -Press Enter to enter the edit mode. The handles are shown farther out from the control border. +Press Enter to enter the edit mode. The handles are shown farther out from the control border. -In the edit mode, you can open the edit mode context menu by pressing Shift+F10. +In the edit mode, you can open the edit mode context menu by pressing Shift+F10. -If you want to edit columns, press Shift+Space to enter column edit mode. Now you can rearrange the order of columns with CommandCtrl+Arrow keys. The Delete key deletes the current column. +If you want to edit columns, press Shift+Space to enter column edit mode. Now you can rearrange the order of columns with CommandCtrl+Arrow keys. The Delete key deletes the current column. -Press the Escape key to exit the edit mode. +Press the Escape key to exit the edit mode. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01170100.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01170100.xhp index a0c1b1bf7e..c08b3886ea 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01170100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01170100.xhp @@ -37,77 +37,77 @@ -Control Properties -Opens a dialog for editing the properties of a selected control. +Control Properties +Opens a dialog for editing the properties of a selected control.
-You can only call the Properties dialog when in the Design mode with a control selected. +You can only call the Properties dialog when in the Design mode with a control selected.
-If you enter data in the Properties dialog, note that multiline input is possible for certain drop-down combo boxes. This concerns all fields in which an SQL statement can be entered, as well as the properties of text boxes or label fields. You can open these fields and enter text in the opened list. The following shortcut keys are valid: +If you enter data in the Properties dialog, note that multiline input is possible for certain drop-down combo boxes. This concerns all fields in which an SQL statement can be entered, as well as the properties of text boxes or label fields. You can open these fields and enter text in the opened list. The following shortcut keys are valid: -Keys +Keys -Effects +Effects -OptionAlt+Down Arrow +OptionAlt+Down Arrow -Opens the combo box +Opens the combo box -OptionAlt+Up Arrow +OptionAlt+Up Arrow -Closes the combo box +Closes the combo box -Shift+Enter +Shift+Enter -Inserts a new line. +Inserts a new line. -Up Arrow +Up Arrow -Places the cursor into the previous line. +Places the cursor into the previous line. -Down Arrow +Down Arrow -Places the cursor into the next line. +Places the cursor into the next line. -Enter +Enter -Completes the input in the field and places the cursor into the next field. +Completes the input in the field and places the cursor into the next field.
-As with list boxes or combo boxes, you can open or close the list with a mouse click at the arrow on the right end of the field. However, the input here can be entered either in the opened list or in the top text field. An exception is the properties that expect a list representation, for example, the property List Entries, which can be set for the control fields List Box and Combo Box. Here, you can only edit the entries when the field is opened. +As with list boxes or combo boxes, you can open or close the list with a mouse click at the arrow on the right end of the field. However, the input here can be entered either in the opened list or in the top text field. An exception is the properties that expect a list representation, for example, the property List Entries, which can be set for the control fields List Box and Combo Box. Here, you can only edit the entries when the field is opened.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01170101.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01170101.xhp index 7651243899..a1410b242f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01170101.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01170101.xhp @@ -28,144 +28,141 @@
- GeneralUFI: had to remove all internal links to this file because all the targets vanished and no time to reinsert them all -This General tab enables you to define the general properties of a form control. These properties differ, depending on the control type. Not all of the following properties are available for every control. + GeneralUFI: had to remove all internal links to this file because all the targets vanished and no time to reinsert them all +This General tab enables you to define the general properties of a form control. These properties differ, depending on the control type. Not all of the following properties are available for every control.
- If you export the current form document to HTML format, the default control values are exported, not the current control values. Default values are determined - depending on the type of control - by the properties' Default value (for example, in text fields), Default status (for check boxes and option fields), and Default selection (for list boxes). + If you export the current form document to HTML format, the default control values are exported, not the current control values. Default values are determined - depending on the type of control - by the properties' Default value (for example, in text fields), Default status (for check boxes and option fields), and Default selection (for list boxes).
-Enabled - If a control field has the property "Enabled" (Yes), the form user will be able to use the control field. If the property is disabled, it will not be enabled (No) and will be displayed in a gray color. +Enabled + If a control field has the property "Enabled" (Yes), the form user will be able to use the control field. If the property is disabled, it will not be enabled (No) and will be displayed in a gray color.
-Line count - Specifies how many lines should be displayed in the dropdown list. This setting is only active if you chose "Yes" in the "Dropdown" option. For combo boxes with the Dropdown property, you can specify how many lines should be displayed in the dropdown list. With control fields which do not have the Dropdown option, the line's display will be specified by the size of the control field and the font size. +Line count + Specifies how many lines should be displayed in the dropdown list. This setting is only active if you chose "Yes" in the "Dropdown" option. For combo boxes with the Dropdown property, you can specify how many lines should be displayed in the dropdown list. With control fields which do not have the Dropdown option, the line's display will be specified by the size of the control field and the font size.
-ActionUFI: renamed from Button type to Action, see dba.features: Form navigation functionality for command buttons - The Action property determines the action that occurs when you activate a button. You can use navigation actions to design your own database navigation buttons. - The following table describes the actions that you can assign to a button. +ActionUFI: renamed from Button type to Action, see dba.features: Form navigation functionality for command buttons + The Action property determines the action that occurs when you activate a button. You can use navigation actions to design your own database navigation buttons. + The following table describes the actions that you can assign to a button. - Action + Action - Description + Description - None + None - No action occurs. + No action occurs. - Submit form + Submit form - Sends the data that is entered in other control fields of the current form to the address that is specified in Form Properties under URL. - Enter the URL into the form's data property "URL" text box when you export to a PDF file.UFI: see #i36574# + Sends the data that is entered in other control fields of the current form to the address that is specified in Form Properties under URL. + Enter the URL into the form's data property "URL" text box when you export to a PDF file.UFI: see #i36574# - Reset form + Reset form - Resets the settings in other control fields to the predefined defaults (Default Status, Default Selection, Default Value). + Resets the settings in other control fields to the predefined defaults (Default Status, Default Selection, Default Value). - Open document / web page + Open document / web page - Opens the URL that is specified under URL. You can use Frame to specify the target frame. + Opens the URL that is specified under URL. You can use Frame to specify the target frame. - First record + First record - Moves the current form to the first record. + Moves the current form to the first record. - Previous record + Previous record - Moves the current form to the previous record. + Moves the current form to the previous record. - Next record + Next record - Moves the current form to the next record. + Moves the current form to the next record. - Last record + Last record - Moves the current form to the last record. + Moves the current form to the last record. - Save record + Save record - Saves the current record, if necessary. + Saves the current record, if necessary. - Undo data entry + Undo data entry - Reverses the changes in the current record. + Reverses the changes in the current record. - New record + New record - Moves the current form to the insert row. + Moves the current form to the insert row. - Delete record + Delete record - Deletes the current record. + Deletes the current record. - Refresh form + Refresh form - Reloads the most recently saved version of the current form. + Reloads the most recently saved version of the current form.
@@ -173,350 +170,326 @@
-Dropdown - Specifies whether the combo box should dropdown (Yes) or not (No). A control field with the dropdown property has an additional arrow button which opens the list of the existing form entries per mouse click. Under Line count, you can specify how many lines (or rows) should be displayed in the dropdown state. Combination fields can have the dropdown property. - Combo boxes that were inserted as columns in a table control are always dropdown as the default. +Dropdown + Specifies whether the combo box should dropdown (Yes) or not (No). A control field with the dropdown property has an additional arrow button which opens the list of the existing form entries per mouse click. Under Line count, you can specify how many lines (or rows) should be displayed in the dropdown state. Combination fields can have the dropdown property. + Combo boxes that were inserted as columns in a table control are always dropdown as the default.
-Alignment / Graphics alignment - Specifies the alignment option for text or graphics that are used on a control. The alignment options are left-aligned, right-aligned, and centered. These options are available for the following elements: +Alignment / Graphics alignment + Specifies the alignment option for text or graphics that are used on a control. The alignment options are left-aligned, right-aligned, and centered. These options are available for the following elements: - Title of Label fields + Title of Label fields - Content of text fields + Content of text fields - Content of table fields in the columns of a table control + Content of table fields in the columns of a table control - Graphics or text that are used in buttons - The Alignment option for buttons is called Graphics alignment. + Graphics or text that are used in buttons + The Alignment option for buttons is called Graphics alignment.
-AutoFill - Assigns the AutoFill function to a combo box. The AutoFill function displays a list of previous entries after you start to type an entry.UFI: changed AutoComplete to AutoFill (got changed by error in the UI, so we stay with it now, according to FS) +AutoFill + Assigns the AutoFill function to a combo box. The AutoFill function displays a list of previous entries after you start to type an entry.UFI: changed AutoComplete to AutoFill (got changed by error in the UI, so we stay with it now, according to FS)
-Label field - Specifies the source for the label of the control. The text of the label field will be used instead of the name of a database field. For example, in the Filter Navigator, Search dialog, and as a column name in the table view. - To define one character of the label as a mnemonic, so that the user can access this control by pressing the character on the keyboard, insert a tilde (~) character in front of the character in the label. - Only the text of a group frame can be used as the label field when using radio buttons. This text applies to all of the radio buttons of the same group. - If you click on the ... button next to the text field, you will see the Label Field Selection dialog. Select a label from the list. -Check the No assignment box to remove the link between a control and the assigned label field. +Label field + Specifies the source for the label of the control. The text of the label field will be used instead of the name of a database field. For example, in the Filter Navigator, Search dialog, and as a column name in the table view. + To define one character of the label as a mnemonic, so that the user can access this control by pressing the character on the keyboard, insert a tilde (~) character in front of the character in the label. + Only the text of a group frame can be used as the label field when using radio buttons. This text applies to all of the radio buttons of the same group. + If you click on the ... button next to the text field, you will see the Label Field Selection dialog. Select a label from the list. +Check the No assignment box to remove the link between a control and the assigned label field.
-Width - Sets the column width in the table control field. Sets the column width in the table control field in the units that are specified in the %PRODUCTNAME module options. If you want, you can enter a value followed by a valid measurement unit, for example, 2 cm. +Width + Sets the column width in the table control field. Sets the column width in the table control field in the units that are specified in the %PRODUCTNAME module options. If you want, you can enter a value followed by a valid measurement unit, for example, 2 cm.
-RepeatUFI: see spec spinbutton_form_control.sxw - Specifies if the action of a control such as a spin button repeats when you click the control and hold the mouse button down. +RepeatUFI: see spec spinbutton_form_control.sxw + Specifies if the action of a control such as a spin button repeats when you click the control and hold the mouse button down.
-Delay - Specifies the delay in milliseconds between repeating events. A repeating event occurs when you click an arrow button or the background of a scrollbar, or one of the record navigation buttons of a Navigation Bar, and you keep the mouse button pressed for some time. You can enter a value followed by a valid time unit, for example, 2 s or 500 ms. +Delay + Specifies the delay in milliseconds between repeating events. A repeating event occurs when you click an arrow button or the background of a scrollbar, or one of the record navigation buttons of a Navigation Bar, and you keep the mouse button pressed for some time. You can enter a value followed by a valid time unit, for example, 2 s or 500 ms.
-Record marker - Specifies whether the first column is displayed with row labels, in which the current record is marked by an arrow. +Record marker + Specifies whether the first column is displayed with row labels, in which the current record is marked by an arrow.
-Date format - Here, you can determine the format you want for the date readout. With date fields you can determine the format for the date readout. - All format fields (date, time, currency, numeric) are formatted automatically in the selected format as soon as you leave them regardless of how you entered the input. +Date format + Here, you can determine the format you want for the date readout. With date fields you can determine the format for the date readout. + All format fields (date, time, currency, numeric) are formatted automatically in the selected format as soon as you leave them regardless of how you entered the input.
-Spin Button - The "Yes" option transforms the control field into a spin button, where corresponding arrow buttons are added. Numerical fields, currency fields, date and time fields can be introduced as spin buttons in the form. +Spin Button + The "Yes" option transforms the control field into a spin button, where corresponding arrow buttons are added. Numerical fields, currency fields, date and time fields can be introduced as spin buttons in the form.
-Tristate - Specifies whether a check box can also represent ZERO values of a linked database apart from the TRUE and FALSE values. This function is only available if the database accepts three states: TRUE, FALSE and ZERO. - The Tristate property is only defined for database forms, not for HTML forms. +Tristate + Specifies whether a check box can also represent ZERO values of a linked database apart from the TRUE and FALSE values. This function is only available if the database accepts three states: TRUE, FALSE and ZERO. + The Tristate property is only defined for database forms, not for HTML forms.
-Printable - Specifies whether you want the control field to appear in a document's printout. +Printable + Specifies whether you want the control field to appear in a document's printout.
-PositionX - Defines the X position of the control, relative to the anchor. +PositionX + Defines the X position of the control, relative to the anchor.
-PositionY - Defines the Y position of the control, relative to the anchor. +PositionY + Defines the Y position of the control, relative to the anchor.
-Anchor - Defines where the control will be anchored. +Anchor + Defines where the control will be anchored.
-Width - Defines the width of the control. +Width + Defines the width of the control.
-Height - Defines the height of the control. +Height + Defines the height of the control.
-Edit mask - Defines the edit mask. By specifying a character code you can determine what the user can enter in the control field. By specifying the character code in pattern fields, you can determine what the user can enter in the pattern field. - The length of the edit mask determines the number of the possible input positions. If the user enters characters that do not correspond to the edit mask, the input is rejected when the user leaves the field. You can enter the following characters to define the edit mask: +Edit mask + Defines the edit mask. By specifying a character code you can determine what the user can enter in the control field. By specifying the character code in pattern fields, you can determine what the user can enter in the pattern field. + The length of the edit mask determines the number of the possible input positions. If the user enters characters that do not correspond to the edit mask, the input is rejected when the user leaves the field. You can enter the following characters to define the edit mask: - Character + Character - Meaning + Meaning - L + L - A text constant. This position cannot be edited. The character is displayed at the corresponding position of the Literal Mask. + A text constant. This position cannot be edited. The character is displayed at the corresponding position of the Literal Mask. - a + a - The characters a-z and A-Z can be entered. Capital characters are not converted to lowercase characters. + The characters a-z and A-Z can be entered. Capital characters are not converted to lowercase characters. - A + A - The characters A-Z can be entered. If a lowercase letter is entered, it is automatically converted to a capital letter + The characters A-Z can be entered. If a lowercase letter is entered, it is automatically converted to a capital letter - c + c - The characters a-z, A-Z, and 0-9 can be entered. Capital characters are not converted to lowercase characters. + The characters a-z, A-Z, and 0-9 can be entered. Capital characters are not converted to lowercase characters. - C + C - The characters A-Z and 0-9 can be entered. If a lowercase letter is entered, it is automatically converted to a capital letter + The characters A-Z and 0-9 can be entered. If a lowercase letter is entered, it is automatically converted to a capital letter - N + N - Only the characters 0-9 can be entered. + Only the characters 0-9 can be entered. - x + x - All printable characters can be entered. + All printable characters can be entered. - X + X - All printable characters can be entered. If a lowercase letter is used, it is automatically converted to a capital letter. + All printable characters can be entered. If a lowercase letter is used, it is automatically converted to a capital letter.
- For the literal mask "__.__.2000", for example, define the "NNLNNLLLLL" edit mask so that the user can only enter four digits when entering a date. + For the literal mask "__.__.2000", for example, define the "NNLNNLLLLL" edit mask so that the user can only enter four digits when entering a date.
-Strict format - You can have a format check with control fields that accept formatted contents (date, time, and so on). If the strict format function is activated (Yes), only the allowed characters are accepted. For example, in a date field, only numbers or date delimiters are accepted; all alphabet entries typed with your keyboard are ignored. +Strict format + You can have a format check with control fields that accept formatted contents (date, time, and so on). If the strict format function is activated (Yes), only the allowed characters are accepted. For example, in a date field, only numbers or date delimiters are accepted; all alphabet entries typed with your keyboard are ignored.
-Frame - Specifies the target frame to display the document that is opened by the "Open document / web page" action. You can also specify the target frame to display a URL that you open when you click a button that has been assigned the Open document or web page action). +Frame + Specifies the target frame to display the document that is opened by the "Open document / web page" action. You can also specify the target frame to display a URL that you open when you click a button that has been assigned the Open document or web page action).
- If you click the field, you can select an option from the list that specifies into which frame the next document should be loaded. The following possibilities exist: + If you click the field, you can select an option from the list that specifies into which frame the next document should be loaded. The following possibilities exist: - Entry + Entry - Meaning + Meaning - _blank + _blank - The next document is created in a new empty frame. + The next document is created in a new empty frame. - _parent + _parent - The next document is created in a parent frame. If no parent exists, the document is created in the same frame. + The next document is created in a parent frame. If no parent exists, the document is created in the same frame. - _self + _self - The next document is created in the same frame. + The next document is created in the same frame. - _top + _top - The next document is created in a top-level window, that is, in the highest frame of the hierarchy; if the current frame is already a top window, the document is created in the current frame. + The next document is created in a top-level window, that is, in the highest frame of the hierarchy; if the current frame is already a top window, the document is created in the current frame.
- The Frame property is relevant for HTML forms, but not for database forms. + The Frame property is relevant for HTML forms, but not for database forms.
-Graphics - An image button has a Graphics property. The Graphics property specifies the graphic's path and file name that you want to have displayed on the button. If you select the graphic file with the ... button, the path and file name will be automatically included in the text box. +Graphics + An image button has a Graphics property. The Graphics property specifies the graphic's path and file name that you want to have displayed on the button. If you select the graphic file with the ... button, the path and file name will be automatically included in the text box.
-Help text - Provides the option of entering a help text that will be displayed as a tip on the control. The tip shows the text in user mode when the mouse is moved over the control. - For URL type buttons, the help text appears as the extended tip instead of the URL address entered under URL. +Help text + Provides the option of entering a help text that will be displayed as a tip on the control. The tip shows the text in user mode when the mouse is moved over the control. + For URL type buttons, the help text appears as the extended tip instead of the URL address entered under URL.
-Help URL - Specifies a batch label in URL spelling which refers to a help document and which can be called with the help of the control field. The help for the control field help can be opened if the focus is positioned on the control field and the user presses F1. +Help URL + Specifies a batch label in URL spelling which refers to a help document and which can be called with the help of the control field. The help for the control field help can be opened if the focus is positioned on the control field and the user presses F1.
-Background color - Sets the background color of the control field. A background color is available for most control fields. If you click on Background color, a list will open which enables you to select among various colors. The "Standard" option adopts the system setting. If the desired color is not listed, click the ... button to define a color in the Color dialog. +Background color + Sets the background color of the control field. A background color is available for most control fields. If you click on Background color, a list will open which enables you to select among various colors. The "Standard" option adopts the system setting. If the desired color is not listed, click the ... button to define a color in the Color dialog.
-Scrollbar - Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box. Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box. +Scrollbar + Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box. Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box.
-Incr./decrement value - Determines intervals to add or subtract with each activation of the spin button control. +Incr./decrement value + Determines intervals to add or subtract with each activation of the spin button control.
-Value step - Determines spin button intervals. You can preset the value intervals for numerical and currency spin buttons. Use the up and down arrows of the spin button to increase or decrease the value. +Value step + Determines spin button intervals. You can preset the value intervals for numerical and currency spin buttons. Use the up and down arrows of the spin button to increase or decrease the value.
-List entries - Defines the list entries visible in the document. Open this list and type your text. Use Shift+Enter for a new line. With list and combo boxes, you can define the list entries that will be visible in the document. Open the List entries field and type your text. Please note the tips referring to the keyboard controls. - The predefined default list entry is entered into the Default selection combo box. - Note that the list entries entered here are only incorporated into the form if, on the Data tab under List Content Type, the option "Value List" is selected. - If you do not want the list entries to be written to the database or transmitted to the recipient of the Web form, but rather assigned values that are not visible in the form, you can assign the list entries to other values in a value list. The value list is determined on the Data tab. Under Type of List Contents, select the option "Value List". Then enter the values under List Contents that are to be assigned to the corresponding visible list entries of the form. For the correct assignment, the order in the value list is relevant. - For HTML documents, a list entry entered on the General tab corresponds to the HTML tag <OPTION>; an entry of the value list entered on the Data tab under List Contents corresponds to the <OPTION VALUE=...> tag. +List entries + Defines the list entries visible in the document. Open this list and type your text. Use Shift+Enter for a new line. With list and combo boxes, you can define the list entries that will be visible in the document. Open the List entries field and type your text. Please note the tips referring to the keyboard controls. + The predefined default list entry is entered into the Default selection combo box. + Note that the list entries entered here are only incorporated into the form if, on the Data tab under List Content Type, the option "Value List" is selected. + If you do not want the list entries to be written to the database or transmitted to the recipient of the Web form, but rather assigned values that are not visible in the form, you can assign the list entries to other values in a value list. The value list is determined on the Data tab. Under Type of List Contents, select the option "Value List". Then enter the values under List Contents that are to be assigned to the corresponding visible list entries of the form. For the correct assignment, the order in the value list is relevant. + For HTML documents, a list entry entered on the General tab corresponds to the HTML tag <OPTION>; an entry of the value list entered on the Data tab under List Contents corresponds to the <OPTION VALUE=...> tag.
-Date max - Determines a date which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user. Determines a date which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user. +Date max + Determines a date which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user. Determines a date which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
-Max text length - Defines the maximum number of characters that the user can enter. For text and combo boxes, you can define the maximum number of characters that the user can enter. If this control field property is uncertain, the default setting will be zero. - If the control is linked to a database and the text length is to be accepted from the field definition of the database, you must not enter the text length here. The settings are only accepted from the database if the control property was not defined ("Not Defined" state). +Max text length + Defines the maximum number of characters that the user can enter. For text and combo boxes, you can define the maximum number of characters that the user can enter. If this control field property is uncertain, the default setting will be zero. + If the control is linked to a database and the text length is to be accepted from the field definition of the database, you must not enter the text length here. The settings are only accepted from the database if the control property was not defined ("Not Defined" state).
-Value max - Defines a value for the control field which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user. For numerical and currency fields, you can determine the maximum value that the user can enter. +Value max + Defines a value for the control field which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user. For numerical and currency fields, you can determine the maximum value that the user can enter.
-Time max - Determines a time which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user. Determines a time which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user. +Time max + Determines a time which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user. Determines a time which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
-Multiselection - Allows you to select more than one item in a list box. Allows you to select more than one item in a list box. +Multiselection + Allows you to select more than one item in a list box. Allows you to select more than one item in a list box.
rich text control @@ -524,217 +497,201 @@ -Text typeUFI: now renamed to Text Type, see #i24386#UFI: see dba spec prop_browser_enhancements.sxw - Allows you to use line breaks and formatting in a control field, such as a text box or label. To manually enter a line break, press the Enter key. Select "Multi-line with formatting" to enter formatted text. - If you select the text type "Multi-line with formatting", you cannot bind this control to a database field. - This control is named "Multiline input" for a text column inside a table control. +Text typeUFI: now renamed to Text Type, see #i24386#UFI: see dba spec prop_browser_enhancements.sxw + Allows you to use line breaks and formatting in a control field, such as a text box or label. To manually enter a line break, press the Enter key. Select "Multi-line with formatting" to enter formatted text. + If you select the text type "Multi-line with formatting", you cannot bind this control to a database field. + This control is named "Multiline input" for a text column inside a table control.
-Word breakUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw - Displays text on more than one line. Allows you to use line breaks in a text box, so that you can enter more than one line of text. To manually enter a line break, press the Enter key. +Word breakUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw + Displays text on more than one line. Allows you to use line breaks in a text box, so that you can enter more than one line of text. To manually enter a line break, press the Enter key.
-ToggleUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw - Specifies if a Push Button behaves as a Toggle Button. If you set Toggle to "Yes", you can switch between the "selected" and "not selected" control states when you click the button or press the spacebar while the control has the focus. A button in the "selected" state appears "pressed in". +ToggleUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw + Specifies if a Push Button behaves as a Toggle Button. If you set Toggle to "Yes", you can switch between the "selected" and "not selected" control states when you click the button or press the spacebar while the control has the focus. A button in the "selected" state appears "pressed in".
-Take Focus on ClickUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw - If you set this option to "Yes", the Push Button receives the focus when you click the button. +Take Focus on ClickUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw + If you set this option to "Yes", the Push Button receives the focus when you click the button.
-Hide selectionUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw - Specifies whether a text selection on a control remains selected when a the focus is no longer on a control. If you set Hide selection to "No", the selected text remains selected when the focus is no longer on the control that contains the text. +Hide selectionUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw + Specifies whether a text selection on a control remains selected when a the focus is no longer on a control. If you set Hide selection to "No", the selected text remains selected when the focus is no longer on the control that contains the text.
-StyleUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw - Specifies whether Check boxes and Option buttons are displayed in a 3D look (default) or a flat look. +StyleUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw + Specifies whether Check boxes and Option buttons are displayed in a 3D look (default) or a flat look.
-Border colorUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw - Specifies the border color for controls that have the Border property set to "flat". +Border colorUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw + Specifies the border color for controls that have the Border property set to "flat".
-Symbol color - Specifies the color for symbols on controls, for example the arrows on a scrollbar. +Symbol color + Specifies the color for symbols on controls, for example the arrows on a scrollbar.
-Date min - Determines the earliest date that a user can enter. Determines the earliest date that a user can enter. +Date min + Determines the earliest date that a user can enter. Determines the earliest date that a user can enter.
-Value min - You can determine here a value for the control field to prevent the user from entering a smaller value. For numerical and currency fields you can determine a minimum value to prevent the user from entering a smaller value. +Value min + You can determine here a value for the control field to prevent the user from entering a smaller value. For numerical and currency fields you can determine a minimum value to prevent the user from entering a smaller value.
-Time min - Determines the minimum time that a user can enter. Determines the minimum time that a user can enter. +Time min + Determines the minimum time that a user can enter. Determines the minimum time that a user can enter.
-Decimal accuracy - Determines the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point. With numerical and currency fields you can determine the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point. +Decimal accuracy + Determines the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point. With numerical and currency fields you can determine the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point.
-Name - On the Properties tab page, this option specifies the name for the control field. On the Form Properties tab page, this option specifies the name for the form. Each control field and each form has a Name property through which it can be identified. The name will appear in the Form Navigator and, using the name, the control field can be referred to from a macro. The default settings already specify a name which is constructed from using the field's label and number. - If you work with macros, make sure that the names of the controls are unique. +Name + On the Properties tab page, this option specifies the name for the control field. On the Form Properties tab page, this option specifies the name for the form. Each control field and each form has a Name property through which it can be identified. The name will appear in the Form Navigator and, using the name, the control field can be referred to from a macro. The default settings already specify a name which is constructed from using the field's label and number. + If you work with macros, make sure that the names of the controls are unique. controls; grouping groups;of controls forms; grouping controls mw changed "grouping;" to "groups;" -The name is also used to group different controls that belong together functionally, such as radio buttons. To do so, give the same name to all members of the group: controls with identical names form a group. Grouped controls can be represented visually by using a Group Box. +The name is also used to group different controls that belong together functionally, such as radio buttons. To do so, give the same name to all members of the group: controls with identical names form a group. Grouped controls can be represented visually by using a Group Box.
-Navigation bar - Specifies whether to display the navigation bar on the lower border of the table control. Specifies whether to display the navigation bar on the lower border of table controls. +Navigation bar + Specifies whether to display the navigation bar on the lower border of the table control. Specifies whether to display the navigation bar on the lower border of table controls.
-Read-only - Determines if the control is read-only (Yes) or if it can be edited (No). The Read-only property can be assigned to all controls in which the user can enter text. If you assign the read-only property to an image field which uses graphics from a database, the user will not be able to insert new graphics into the database. +Read-only + Determines if the control is read-only (Yes) or if it can be edited (No). The Read-only property can be assigned to all controls in which the user can enter text. If you assign the read-only property to an image field which uses graphics from a database, the user will not be able to insert new graphics into the database.
-Border - Determines if the field's border should be displayed "Without frame", with a "3-D look" or "Flat". With control fields that have a frame, you can determine the border display on the form using the Border property. You can select among the "Without frame", "3-D look" or "Flat" options. +Border + Determines if the field's border should be displayed "Without frame", with a "3-D look" or "Flat". With control fields that have a frame, you can determine the border display on the form using the Border property. You can select among the "Without frame", "3-D look" or "Flat" options.
-Tab order - The Tab order property determines the order in which the controls are focused in the form when you press the Tab key. In a form that contains more than one control, the focus moves to the next control when you press the Tab key. You can specify the order in which the focus changes with an index under Tab order. - The Tab order property is not available to Hidden Controls. If you want, you can also set this property for image buttons and image controls, so that you can select these controls with the Tab key. - When creating a form, an index is automatically assigned to the control fields that are added to this form; every control field added is assigned an index increased by 1. If you change the index of a control, the indices of the other controls are updated automatically. Elements that cannot be focused (Tabstop = No) are also assigned a value. However, these controls are skipped when using the Tab key. - You can also easily define the indices of the different controls in the Tab Order dialog. +Tab order + The Tab order property determines the order in which the controls are focused in the form when you press the Tab key. In a form that contains more than one control, the focus moves to the next control when you press the Tab key. You can specify the order in which the focus changes with an index under Tab order. + The Tab order property is not available to Hidden Controls. If you want, you can also set this property for image buttons and image controls, so that you can select these controls with the Tab key. + When creating a form, an index is automatically assigned to the control fields that are added to this form; every control field added is assigned an index increased by 1. If you change the index of a control, the indices of the other controls are updated automatically. Elements that cannot be focused (Tabstop = No) are also assigned a value. However, these controls are skipped when using the Tab key. + You can also easily define the indices of the different controls in the Tab Order dialog.
-Mouse wheel scroll - Sets whether the value changes when the user scrolls a mouse wheel. Never: No change of the value. When focused: (default) The value changes when the control has the focus and the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled. Always: The value changes when the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled, no matter which control has the focus. +Mouse wheel scroll + Sets whether the value changes when the user scrolls a mouse wheel. Never: No change of the value. When focused: (default) The value changes when the control has the focus and the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled. Always: The value changes when the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled, no matter which control has the focus.
-Default status - Specifies whether an option or a check box is selected by default. - For a reset type button, you can define the status of the control if the reset button is activated by the user. - For grouped option fields, the status of the group corresponding to the default setting is defined by the Default Status property.UFI: what does this mean? Cannot understand that sentence. +Default status + Specifies whether an option or a check box is selected by default. + For a reset type button, you can define the status of the control if the reset button is activated by the user. + For grouped option fields, the status of the group corresponding to the default setting is defined by the Default Status property.UFI: what does this mean? Cannot understand that sentence.
-Default selection - Specifies the list box entry to mark as the default entry. Specifies the list box entry to mark as the default entry. - For a Reset type button, the Default selection entry defines the status of the list box if the reset button is activated by the user. - For a List box that contains a value list, you can click the ... button to open the Default selection dialog. - In the Default selection dialog, select the entries that you want to mark as selected when you open the form that contains the list box. +Default selection + Specifies the list box entry to mark as the default entry. Specifies the list box entry to mark as the default entry. + For a Reset type button, the Default selection entry defines the status of the list box if the reset button is activated by the user. + For a List box that contains a value list, you can click the ... button to open the Default selection dialog. + In the Default selection dialog, select the entries that you want to mark as selected when you open the form that contains the list box.
-Default value - Sets the default value for the control field. For example, the default value will be entered when a form is opened. - For a Reset type button, the Default value entry defines the status of the control if the reset button is activated by the user. +Default value + Sets the default value for the control field. For example, the default value will be entered when a form is opened. + For a Reset type button, the Default value entry defines the status of the control if the reset button is activated by the user.
-Default scroll value - Sets the default value for the scrollbar. +Default scroll value + Sets the default value for the scrollbar.
-Scroll value max. - Specify the maximum value of a scrollbar control. +Scroll value max. + Specify the maximum value of a scrollbar control.
-Scroll value min. - Specify the minimum value of a scrollbar control. +Scroll value min. + Specify the minimum value of a scrollbar control.
-Small change - Specify the value to add or subtract when the user clicks the arrow icon on the scrollbar. +Small change + Specify the value to add or subtract when the user clicks the arrow icon on the scrollbar.
-Large change - Specify the value to add or subtract when the user clicks next to the slider on the scrollbar. +Large change + Specify the value to add or subtract when the user clicks next to the slider on the scrollbar.
-Default time - Sets the default time. +Default time + Sets the default time.
-Default date - Sets the default date. +Default date + Sets the default date.
-Default text - Sets the default text for a text box or a combo box. +Default text + Sets the default text for a text box or a combo box.
-Default button - The Default button property specifies that the corresponding button will be operated when you press the Return key. The Default button property specifies that the corresponding button will be operated when you press the Return key. If you open the dialog or form and do not carry out any further action, the button with this property is the default button. - This property should be assigned only to a single button within the document. - When using Web page forms, you might come across this property in search masks. These are edit masks that contain a text field and a Submit type button. The search term is entered in the text field and the search is started by activating the button. If the button is defined as the default button, however, simply hit Enter after entering the search term in order to start the search. +Default button + The Default button property specifies that the corresponding button will be operated when you press the Return key. The Default button property specifies that the corresponding button will be operated when you press the Return key. If you open the dialog or form and do not carry out any further action, the button with this property is the default button. + This property should be assigned only to a single button within the document. + When using Web page forms, you might come across this property in search masks. These are edit masks that contain a text field and a Submit type button. The search term is entered in the text field and the search is started by activating the button. If the button is defined as the default button, however, simply hit Enter after entering the search term in order to start the search.
-Prefix symbol - Determines if the currency symbol is displayed before or after the number when using currency fields. The default setting is currency symbols are not prefixed. +Prefix symbol + Determines if the currency symbol is displayed before or after the number when using currency fields. The default setting is currency symbols are not prefixed.
-Tabstop - The Tabstop property determines if a control field can be selected with the tab key. The following options are available:UFI: Default entry row deleted from table +Tabstop + The Tabstop property determines if a control field can be selected with the tab key. The following options are available:UFI: Default entry row deleted from table - No + No - When using the tab key, focusing skips the control. + When using the tab key, focusing skips the control. - Yes + Yes - The control can be selected with the Tab key. + The control can be selected with the Tab key.
@@ -742,139 +699,128 @@
-Thousands separator - Inserts a thousands separator. With numerical and currency fields you can determine whether thousands separators are used. +Thousands separator + Inserts a thousands separator. With numerical and currency fields you can determine whether thousands separators are used.
-Label - The Label property sets the label of the control field that is displayed in the form. The Label property sets the label of the control field that is displayed in the form. This property determines the visible label or the column header of the data field in table control forms. - When you create a new control, the description predefined in the Name property is used as the default for labeling the control. The label consists of the control field name and an integer numbering the control (for example, CommandButton1). With the Title property, you can assign another description to the control so that the label reflects the function of the control. Change this entry in order to assign an expressive label to the control that is visible to the user. +Label + The Label property sets the label of the control field that is displayed in the form. The Label property sets the label of the control field that is displayed in the form. This property determines the visible label or the column header of the data field in table control forms. + When you create a new control, the description predefined in the Name property is used as the default for labeling the control. The label consists of the control field name and an integer numbering the control (for example, CommandButton1). With the Title property, you can assign another description to the control so that the label reflects the function of the control. Change this entry in order to assign an expressive label to the control that is visible to the user. multi-line titles in forms names; multi-line titles controls; multi-line titles -To create a multi-line title, open the combo box using the arrow button. You can enter a line break by pressing Shift+Command +To create a multi-line title, open the combo box using the arrow button. You can enter a line break by pressing Shift+Command Ctrl+Enter. - The Title property is only used for labeling a form element in the interface visible to the user. If you work with macros, note that at runtime, a control is always addressed through the Name property. + The Title property is only used for labeling a form element in the interface visible to the user. If you work with macros, note that at runtime, a control is always addressed through the Name property.
-URL - Specifies the URL address that opens when you click an "Open document / web page" button. Enter the URL address for a Open document or web page button type in the URL box. The address opens when you click the button. - If you move the mouse over the button in User mode, the URL appears as the extended tip, provided that no other Help text was entered. +URL + Specifies the URL address that opens when you click an "Open document / web page" button. Enter the URL address for a Open document or web page button type in the URL box. The address opens when you click the button. + If you move the mouse over the button in User mode, the URL appears as the extended tip, provided that no other Help text was entered.
-Currency symbol - You can enter a character or a string for the currency symbol. In a currency field, you can pre-define the currency symbol by entering the character or string in the Currency symbol property. +Currency symbol + You can enter a character or a string for the currency symbol. In a currency field, you can pre-define the currency symbol by entering the character or string in the Currency symbol property.
-Value - You can enter the data that is inherited by the hidden control. In a hidden control, under Value, you can enter the data which is inherited by the hidden control. This data will be transferred when sending the form. +Value + You can enter the data that is inherited by the hidden control. In a hidden control, under Value, you can enter the data which is inherited by the hidden control. This data will be transferred when sending the form.
-Password characters - If the text box is used as a password input, enter the ASCII-code of the display character. This character is displayed instead of the characters typed by the user for the password. If the user enters a password, you can determine the characters that will be displayed instead of the characters typed by the user. Under Password character, enter the ASCII code of the desired character. You can use the values from 0 to 255. - The characters and their ASCII codes can be seen in the Special Characters dialog (Insert - Special Character). +Password characters + If the text box is used as a password input, enter the ASCII-code of the display character. This character is displayed instead of the characters typed by the user for the password. If the user enters a password, you can determine the characters that will be displayed instead of the characters typed by the user. Under Password character, enter the ASCII code of the desired character. You can use the values from 0 to 255. + The characters and their ASCII codes can be seen in the Special Characters dialog (Insert - Special Character).
-Literal mask - Defines the literal mask. The literal mask contains the initial values and is always visible after downloading a form. With masked fields you can specify a literal mask. A literal mask contains the initial values of a form, and is always visible after downloading a form. Using a character code for the Edit mask, you can determine the entries that the user can type into the masked field. - The length of the literal mask should always correspond to the length of the edit mask. If this is not the case, the edit mask is either cut off or filled with blanks up to the length of the edit mask. +Literal mask + Defines the literal mask. The literal mask contains the initial values and is always visible after downloading a form. With masked fields you can specify a literal mask. A literal mask contains the initial values of a form, and is always visible after downloading a form. Using a character code for the Edit mask, you can determine the entries that the user can type into the masked field. + The length of the literal mask should always correspond to the length of the edit mask. If this is not the case, the edit mask is either cut off or filled with blanks up to the length of the edit mask.
-FontUFI: dba.features "Character set property renamed to Font" - Select the font for the text that is in the control field. For control fields which have visible text or titles, select the display font that you want to use. To open the Font dialog, click the ... button. The selected font is used in control fields names and to display data in table control fields. +FontUFI: dba.features "Character set property renamed to Font" + Select the font for the text that is in the control field. For control fields which have visible text or titles, select the display font that you want to use. To open the Font dialog, click the ... button. The selected font is used in control fields names and to display data in table control fields.
-Row height - Specifies the row height of a table control field. In table controls, enter a value for the row height. If you want, you can enter a value followed by valid measurement unit, for example, 2 cm. +Row height + Specifies the row height of a table control field. In table controls, enter a value for the row height. If you want, you can enter a value followed by valid measurement unit, for example, 2 cm.
-Text lines end with - For text fields, select the line end code to be used when writing text into a database column.UFI: spec dba-features: "form text fields: New property Text lines end with" +Text lines end with + For text fields, select the line end code to be used when writing text into a database column.UFI: spec dba-features: "form text fields: New property Text lines end with"
-Time format - You can define the desired format for the time display. You can define the desired format for the time display. +Time format + You can define the desired format for the time display. You can define the desired format for the time display.
-Help text - Specifies additional information or a descriptive text for the control field. In each control field you can specify additional information or a descriptive text for the control field. This property helps the programmer to save additional information that can be used in the program code. This field can be used, for example, for variables or other evaluation parameters. +Help text + Specifies additional information or a descriptive text for the control field. In each control field you can specify additional information or a descriptive text for the control field. This property helps the programmer to save additional information that can be used in the program code. This field can be used, for example, for variables or other evaluation parameters.
-Formatting - Specifies the format code for the control. Click the ... button to select the format code. +Formatting + Specifies the format code for the control. Click the ... button to select the format code.
-Scale - Resizes the image to fit the size of the control. +Scale + Resizes the image to fit the size of the control.
-Acting on a record - Specifies to show or hide the action items in a selected Navigation Bar control. Action items are the following: Save record, Undo, New record, Delete record, Refresh. +Acting on a record + Specifies to show or hide the action items in a selected Navigation Bar control. Action items are the following: Save record, Undo, New record, Delete record, Refresh.
-Positioning - Specifies to show or hide the positioning items in a selected Navigation Bar control. Positioning items are the following: Record label, Record position, Record count label, Record count. +Positioning + Specifies to show or hide the positioning items in a selected Navigation Bar control. Positioning items are the following: Record label, Record position, Record count label, Record count.
-Navigation - Specifies to show or hide the navigation items in a selected Navigation Bar control. Navigation items are the following: First record, Previous record, Next record, Last record. +Navigation + Specifies to show or hide the navigation items in a selected Navigation Bar control. Navigation items are the following: First record, Previous record, Next record, Last record.
-Filtering / Sorting - Specifies to show or hide the filtering and sorting items in a selected Navigation Bar control. Filtering and sorting items are the following: Sort ascending, Sort descending, Sort, Automatic filter, Default filter, Apply filter, Reset filter/sort. +Filtering / Sorting + Specifies to show or hide the filtering and sorting items in a selected Navigation Bar control. Filtering and sorting items are the following: Sort ascending, Sort descending, Sort, Automatic filter, Default filter, Apply filter, Reset filter/sort.
-Icon Size - Specifies whether the icons in a selected Navigation Bar should be small or large. +Icon Size + Specifies whether the icons in a selected Navigation Bar should be small or large.
-Visible - Defines whether the control will be visible in live mode. In design mode, the control is always visible. - Note that if this property is set to "Yes" (the default), this does not necessarily mean the control will really appear on the screen. Additional constraints are applied when calculating a control's effective visibility. For instance, a control placed in a hidden section in Writer will never be visible at all, until at least the section itself becomes visible. - If the property is set to "No", then the control will always be hidden in live mode. - Older OpenOffice.org versions up to 3.1 will silently ignore this property when reading documents which make use of it. +Visible + Defines whether the control will be visible in live mode. In design mode, the control is always visible. + Note that if this property is set to "Yes" (the default), this does not necessarily mean the control will really appear on the screen. Additional constraints are applied when calculating a control's effective visibility. For instance, a control placed in a hidden section in Writer will never be visible at all, until at least the section itself becomes visible. + If the property is set to "No", then the control will always be hidden in live mode. + Older OpenOffice.org versions up to 3.1 will silently ignore this property when reading documents which make use of it.
-Visible size - Specifies the size of scrollbar thumb in "value units". A value of ("Scroll value max." minus "Scroll value min." ) / 2 would result in a thumb which occupies half of the background area. - If set to 0, then the thumb's width will equal its height. +Visible size + Specifies the size of scrollbar thumb in "value units". A value of ("Scroll value max." minus "Scroll value min." ) / 2 would result in a thumb which occupies half of the background area. + If set to 0, then the thumb's width will equal its height.
-Orientation - Specifies the horizontal or vertical orientation for a scrollbar or spin button. +Orientation + Specifies the horizontal or vertical orientation for a scrollbar or spin button.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01170102.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01170102.xhp index 6e6bdcffd6..b61695a467 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01170102.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01170102.xhp @@ -36,158 +36,158 @@ links;between cells and controls controls;assigning data sources MW made "cells..." a two level entry, changed "linked cells;" to "links;" and "list contents" to "lists;" -Data -The Data tab page allows you to assign a data source to the selected control. +Data +The Data tab page allows you to assign a data source to the selected control.
-For forms with database links, the associated database is defined in the Form Properties. You will find the functions for this on the Data tab page. -The possible settings of the Data tab page of a control depend on the respective control. You will only see the options that are available for the current control and context. The following fields are available: +For forms with database links, the associated database is defined in the Form Properties. You will find the functions for this on the Data tab page. +The possible settings of the Data tab page of a control depend on the respective control. You will only see the options that are available for the current control and context. The following fields are available:
-Reference value (off) -Check boxes and radio buttons in spreadsheets can be bound to cells in the current document. If the control is enabled, the value you enter in Reference value (on) is copied to the cell. If the control is disabled, the value from Reference value (off) is copied to the cell. +Reference value (off) +Check boxes and radio buttons in spreadsheets can be bound to cells in the current document. If the control is enabled, the value you enter in Reference value (on) is copied to the cell. If the control is disabled, the value from Reference value (off) is copied to the cell.
-Reference value (on)UFI: moved section from 01170101, changed name -You can enter a reference value for the web form, which will be remitted to a server when sending the form. With database forms, the value entered is written in the database field, assigned to the control field. You can assign a reference value to option buttons and check boxes. The reference value will be remitted to a server when sending the web form. With database forms the value entered here will be written in the database assigned to the control field. - +Reference value (on)UFI: moved section from 01170101, changed name +You can enter a reference value for the web form, which will be remitted to a server when sending the form. With database forms, the value entered is written in the database field, assigned to the control field. You can assign a reference value to option buttons and check boxes. The reference value will be remitted to a server when sending the web form. With database forms the value entered here will be written in the database assigned to the control field. + Reference values for web forms -Reference values are useful if you design a web form and the information on the status of the control is to be transmitted to a server. If the control is clicked by the user, the corresponding reference value is sent to the server. -For example, if you have two control fields for the options "feminine" and "masculine", and assign a reference value of 1 to the field "feminine" and the value 2 to the "masculine" field, the value 1 is transmitted to the server if a user clicks the "feminine" field and value 2 is sent if the "masculine" field is clicked. - +Reference values are useful if you design a web form and the information on the status of the control is to be transmitted to a server. If the control is clicked by the user, the corresponding reference value is sent to the server. +For example, if you have two control fields for the options "feminine" and "masculine", and assign a reference value of 1 to the field "feminine" and the value 2 to the "masculine" field, the value 1 is transmitted to the server if a user clicks the "feminine" field and value 2 is sent if the "masculine" field is clicked. + Reference values for database forms -For database forms, you can also characterize the status of an option or a check box by a reference value, storing it in the database. If you have a set of three options, for example "in progress", "completed", and "resubmission", with the respective reference values, "ToDo", "OK", and "RS", these reference values appear in the database if the respective option is clicked. +For database forms, you can also characterize the status of an option or a check box by a reference value, storing it in the database. If you have a set of three options, for example "in progress", "completed", and "resubmission", with the respective reference values, "ToDo", "OK", and "RS", these reference values appear in the database if the respective option is clicked.
-Data field -Specifies the field of the data source table to which the control refers. With database forms, you can link controls with the data fields. -You have several possibilities: +Data field +Specifies the field of the data source table to which the control refers. With database forms, you can link controls with the data fields. +You have several possibilities: -First case: There is only one table in the form. -Under Data field, specify the field of the data source table whose contents you want to be displayed. +First case: There is only one table in the form. +Under Data field, specify the field of the data source table whose contents you want to be displayed. -Second case: The control belongs to a subform that is created by an SQL query. -Under Data field, specify the field of the SQL statement whose contents you want to be displayed. +Second case: The control belongs to a subform that is created by an SQL query. +Under Data field, specify the field of the SQL statement whose contents you want to be displayed. -Third case: Combo Boxes -For combo boxes, the field of the data source table in which the values entered or selected by the user should be stored is specified under Data field. The values displayed in the list of the combo box are based on an SQL statement, which is entered under List content. +Third case: Combo Boxes +For combo boxes, the field of the data source table in which the values entered or selected by the user should be stored is specified under Data field. The values displayed in the list of the combo box are based on an SQL statement, which is entered under List content. -Fourth case: List Boxes -The data source table does not contain the data to be displayed, but rather a table linked to the data source table through a common data field. -If you want a list box to display data from a table that is linked to the current data source table, under Data field specify the field of the data source table to which the content of the list box refers. Or you can specify the database field that controls the display of the data in the form. This data field provides the link to the other table if both tables can be linked through a common data field. It is usually a data field in which unique identification numbers are stored. The data field whose contents are displayed in the form is specified by an SQL statement under List content. +Fourth case: List Boxes +The data source table does not contain the data to be displayed, but rather a table linked to the data source table through a common data field. +If you want a list box to display data from a table that is linked to the current data source table, under Data field specify the field of the data source table to which the content of the list box refers. Or you can specify the database field that controls the display of the data in the form. This data field provides the link to the other table if both tables can be linked through a common data field. It is usually a data field in which unique identification numbers are stored. The data field whose contents are displayed in the form is specified by an SQL statement under List content. -List boxes work with references. They can either be implemented with linked tables by SQL statements (fourth case) or through value lists: - +List boxes work with references. They can either be implemented with linked tables by SQL statements (fourth case) or through value lists: + References through linked tables (SQL statements) -If you want a list box to display data from a database table that is linked by a common data field to the table on which the form is based, the link field of the form table is specified under Data field. -The link is created with an SQL Select, which, if you selected "SQL" or "Native SQL", is specified under Type of list contents in the field List content. As an example, a table "Orders" is linked to the current form control, and in the database a table "Customers" is linked to the "Orders" table. You can use an SQL statement as follows: -SELECT CustomerName, CustomerNo FROM Customers, -where "CustomerName" is the data field from the linked table "Customers", and "CustomerNo" is the field of the table "Customers" that is linked to a field of the form table "Orders" specified under Data field. - +If you want a list box to display data from a database table that is linked by a common data field to the table on which the form is based, the link field of the form table is specified under Data field. +The link is created with an SQL Select, which, if you selected "SQL" or "Native SQL", is specified under Type of list contents in the field List content. As an example, a table "Orders" is linked to the current form control, and in the database a table "Customers" is linked to the "Orders" table. You can use an SQL statement as follows: +SELECT CustomerName, CustomerNo FROM Customers, +where "CustomerName" is the data field from the linked table "Customers", and "CustomerNo" is the field of the table "Customers" that is linked to a field of the form table "Orders" specified under Data field. + References Using Value Lists -For list boxes, you can use value lists. Value lists are lists that define reference values. In this way, the control in the form does not directly display the content of a database field, but rather values assigned in the value list. -If you work with reference values of a value list, the contents of the data field that you specified under Data Field in the form are not visible, but rather the assigned values. If you chose "Valuelist" on the Data tab under Type of list contents and assigned a reference value to the visible list entries in the form under List entries (entered in the General tab), then the reference values are compared with the data content of the given data field. If a reference value corresponds to the content of a data field, the associated list entries are displayed in the form. +For list boxes, you can use value lists. Value lists are lists that define reference values. In this way, the control in the form does not directly display the content of a database field, but rather values assigned in the value list. +If you work with reference values of a value list, the contents of the data field that you specified under Data Field in the form are not visible, but rather the assigned values. If you chose "Valuelist" on the Data tab under Type of list contents and assigned a reference value to the visible list entries in the form under List entries (entered in the General tab), then the reference values are compared with the data content of the given data field. If a reference value corresponds to the content of a data field, the associated list entries are displayed in the form.
-Bound field -Use an index to specify the table field or table SQL query to link to the field that is provided under Data field. Valid values for this property are 1, 2, 3, and so on.UFI: issue #i32749# -If you delete the contents of the Bound field cell in the property browser, the first field of the result set is used to display and to exchange data.UFI: issue #i32749# -This property for list boxes defines which data field of a linked table is displayed in the form. -If a list box in the form is to display contents of a table linked to the form table, then define in the Type of list contents field if the display is determined by an SQL command or the (linked) table is accessed. With the Bound field property, you use an index to specify to which data field of the query or of the table the list field is linked. -The property Bound field is only for forms that are used to access more than one table. If the form is based on only one table, the field to be displayed in the form is specified directly under Data field. However, if you want the list box to display data from a table that is linked to the current table over a common data field, the linked data field is defined by the property Bound field. -If you selected "SQL" under Type of list contents, the SQL command determines the index to be specified. Example: If you specify an SQL command such as "SELECT Field1, Field2 FROM tablename" under List content, refer to the following table: +Bound field +Use an index to specify the table field or table SQL query to link to the field that is provided under Data field. Valid values for this property are 1, 2, 3, and so on.UFI: issue #i32749# +If you delete the contents of the Bound field cell in the property browser, the first field of the result set is used to display and to exchange data.UFI: issue #i32749# +This property for list boxes defines which data field of a linked table is displayed in the form. +If a list box in the form is to display contents of a table linked to the form table, then define in the Type of list contents field if the display is determined by an SQL command or the (linked) table is accessed. With the Bound field property, you use an index to specify to which data field of the query or of the table the list field is linked. +The property Bound field is only for forms that are used to access more than one table. If the form is based on only one table, the field to be displayed in the form is specified directly under Data field. However, if you want the list box to display data from a table that is linked to the current table over a common data field, the linked data field is defined by the property Bound field. +If you selected "SQL" under Type of list contents, the SQL command determines the index to be specified. Example: If you specify an SQL command such as "SELECT Field1, Field2 FROM tablename" under List content, refer to the following table: -Bound field +Bound field -Link +Link --1since LibreOffice 4.1 +-1since LibreOffice 4.1 -The index of the selected entry in the list is linked to the field specified under Data field. +The index of the selected entry in the list is linked to the field specified under Data field. -{empty} or 0 +{empty} or 0 -The database field "Field1" is linked to the field specified under Data field. +The database field "Field1" is linked to the field specified under Data field. -1 +1 -The database field "Field2" is linked to the field specified under Data field. +The database field "Field2" is linked to the field specified under Data field.
-If you selected "Table" under Type of list contents, the table structure defines the index to be specified. Example: If a database table is selected under List content, refer to the following table: +If you selected "Table" under Type of list contents, the table structure defines the index to be specified. Example: If a database table is selected under List content, refer to the following table: -Bound field +Bound field -Link +Link --1since LibreOffice 4.1 +-1since LibreOffice 4.1 -The index of the selected entry in the list is linked to the field specified under Data field. +The index of the selected entry in the list is linked to the field specified under Data field. -{empty} or 0 +{empty} or 0 -The 1st column of the table is linked to the field specified under Data field. +The 1st column of the table is linked to the field specified under Data field. -1 +1 -The 2nd column of the table is linked to the field specified under Data field. +The 2nd column of the table is linked to the field specified under Data field. -2 +2 -The 3rd column of the table is linked to the field specified under Data field. +The 3rd column of the table is linked to the field specified under Data field.
@@ -195,93 +195,93 @@
-Type of list contents -Determines the data to fill the lists in list and combo boxes. Determines the data to fill the lists in list and combo boxes. -With the "Valuelist" option, all entries entered in the List entries field of the General tab appear in the control. For database forms, you can use reference values (see the References Using Value Lists section). -If the content of the control is read from a database, you can determine the type of the data source with the other options. For example, you can choose between tables and queries. +Type of list contents +Determines the data to fill the lists in list and combo boxes. Determines the data to fill the lists in list and combo boxes. +With the "Valuelist" option, all entries entered in the List entries field of the General tab appear in the control. For database forms, you can use reference values (see the References Using Value Lists section). +If the content of the control is read from a database, you can determine the type of the data source with the other options. For example, you can choose between tables and queries.
-List content -With database forms, specifies the data source for the list content of the form-element. This field can be used to define a value list for documents without a database connection. -In the case of database forms, the data source determines the entries of the list or combo box. Depending on the selected type, you have a choice between different data sources under List content, provided that these objects exist in your database. All available database objects of the type selected under Type of list contents are offered here. If you have selected the "Value List" option as the type, you can use references for database forms. If the display of the control is controlled by an SQL command, the SQL statement is entered here. -Examples of SQL statements: -For list boxes, an SQL statement may have the following form: -SELECT field1, field2 FROM table, -Here "table" is the table whose data is displayed in the list of the control (list table). "field1" is the data field that defines the visible entries in the form; its content is displayed in the list box. "field2" is the field of the list table that is linked to the form table (value table) through the field specified under Data field if Bound field = 1 was selected. -For combo boxes, an SQL statement may take the following form: -SELECT DISTINCT field FROM table, -Here "field" is a data field from the list table "table" whose content is displayed in the list of the combo box. - +List content +With database forms, specifies the data source for the list content of the form-element. This field can be used to define a value list for documents without a database connection. +In the case of database forms, the data source determines the entries of the list or combo box. Depending on the selected type, you have a choice between different data sources under List content, provided that these objects exist in your database. All available database objects of the type selected under Type of list contents are offered here. If you have selected the "Value List" option as the type, you can use references for database forms. If the display of the control is controlled by an SQL command, the SQL statement is entered here. +Examples of SQL statements: +For list boxes, an SQL statement may have the following form: +SELECT field1, field2 FROM table, +Here "table" is the table whose data is displayed in the list of the control (list table). "field1" is the data field that defines the visible entries in the form; its content is displayed in the list box. "field2" is the field of the list table that is linked to the form table (value table) through the field specified under Data field if Bound field = 1 was selected. +For combo boxes, an SQL statement may take the following form: +SELECT DISTINCT field FROM table, +Here "field" is a data field from the list table "table" whose content is displayed in the list of the combo box. + Value lists for HTML documents -For HTML forms, you can enter a value list under List content. Select the option "Valuelist" under Type of list contents. The values entered here will not be visible in the form, and are used to assign values to the visible entries. The entries made under List content correspond to the HTML tag <OPTION VALUE=...>. -In the data transfer of a selected entry from a list box or a combo box, both the list of the values displayed in the form, which was entered on the General tab under List entries, and the value list entered on the Data tab under List content, are taken into consideration: If a (non-empty) text is at the selected position in the value list (<OPTION VALUE=...>), it will be transmitted. Otherwise, the text displayed in the (<OPTION>) control is sent. -If the value list is to contain an empty string, enter the value "$$$empty$$$" under List content at the corresponding position (note uppercase/lowercase). $[officename] interprets this input as an empty string and assigns it to the respective list entry. -The following table shows the connections between HTML, JavaScript, and the $[officename] field List content using an example list box named "ListBox1". In this case, "Item" designates a list entry visible in the form: +For HTML forms, you can enter a value list under List content. Select the option "Valuelist" under Type of list contents. The values entered here will not be visible in the form, and are used to assign values to the visible entries. The entries made under List content correspond to the HTML tag <OPTION VALUE=...>. +In the data transfer of a selected entry from a list box or a combo box, both the list of the values displayed in the form, which was entered on the General tab under List entries, and the value list entered on the Data tab under List content, are taken into consideration: If a (non-empty) text is at the selected position in the value list (<OPTION VALUE=...>), it will be transmitted. Otherwise, the text displayed in the (<OPTION>) control is sent. +If the value list is to contain an empty string, enter the value "$$$empty$$$" under List content at the corresponding position (note uppercase/lowercase). $[officename] interprets this input as an empty string and assigns it to the respective list entry. +The following table shows the connections between HTML, JavaScript, and the $[officename] field List content using an example list box named "ListBox1". In this case, "Item" designates a list entry visible in the form: - + HTML Tag - + JavaScript - + Entry in value list of the control (List content) - + Transmitted data -<OPTION>Item +<OPTION>Item -Not possible +Not possible -"" +"" -the visible list entry ("ListBox1=Item") +the visible list entry ("ListBox1=Item") -<OPTION VALUE="Value">Item +<OPTION VALUE="Value">Item -ListBox1.options[0].value="Value" +ListBox1.options[0].value="Value" -"Value" +"Value" -The value assigned to the list entry ("ListBox1=Value") +The value assigned to the list entry ("ListBox1=Value") -<OPTION VALUE="">Item +<OPTION VALUE="">Item -ListBox1.options[0].value="" +ListBox1.options[0].value="" -"$$$empty$$$" +"$$$empty$$$" -An empty string ("ListBox1=") +An empty string ("ListBox1=")
@@ -289,413 +289,413 @@
-Empty string is NULL -Defines how an empty string input should be handled. If set to Yes, an input string of length zero will be treated as a value NULL. If set to No, any input will be treated as-is without any conversion. -An empty string is a string of length zero (""). Normally, a value NULL is not the same as an empty string. In general, a term NULL is used to denote an undefined value, an unknown value, or "no value has been entered yet." -Database systems vary and they might handle a value NULL differently. Refer to documentations of the database that you are using. +Empty string is NULL +Defines how an empty string input should be handled. If set to Yes, an input string of length zero will be treated as a value NULL. If set to No, any input will be treated as-is without any conversion. +An empty string is a string of length zero (""). Normally, a value NULL is not the same as an empty string. In general, a term NULL is used to denote an undefined value, an unknown value, or "no value has been entered yet." +Database systems vary and they might handle a value NULL differently. Refer to documentations of the database that you are using.
-Filter proposal -While designing your form, you can set the "Filter proposal" property for each text box in the Data tab of the corresponding Properties dialog. In subsequent searches in the filter mode, you can select from all information contained in these fields. The field content can then be selected using the AutoComplete function. Note, however, that this function requires a greater amount of memory space and time, especially when used in large databases and should therefore be used sparingly. +Filter proposal +While designing your form, you can set the "Filter proposal" property for each text box in the Data tab of the corresponding Properties dialog. In subsequent searches in the filter mode, you can select from all information contained in these fields. The field content can then be selected using the AutoComplete function. Note, however, that this function requires a greater amount of memory space and time, especially when used in large databases and should therefore be used sparingly.
-Linked cell -Specifies the reference to a linked cell on a spreadsheet. The live state or contents of the control are linked to the cell contents. The following tables list the controls and their corresponding link type: -Check box with linked cell +Linked cell +Specifies the reference to a linked cell on a spreadsheet. The live state or contents of the control are linked to the cell contents. The following tables list the controls and their corresponding link type: +Check box with linked cell -Action +Action -Result +Result -Select the check box +Select the check box -TRUE is entered into the linked cell +TRUE is entered into the linked cell -Deselect the check box +Deselect the check box -FALSE is entered into the linked cell +FALSE is entered into the linked cell -Tri-state check box is set to "undetermined" state +Tri-state check box is set to "undetermined" state -#NV is entered into the linked cell +#NV is entered into the linked cell -Enter a number or a formula that returns a number in the linked cell +Enter a number or a formula that returns a number in the linked cell -If entered value is TRUE or not 0: Check box is selected
If entered value is FALSE or 0: Check box is deselected +If entered value is TRUE or not 0: Check box is selected
If entered value is FALSE or 0: Check box is deselected -Clear the linked cell, or enter text, or enter a formula that returns text or an error +Clear the linked cell, or enter text, or enter a formula that returns text or an error -Check box is set to "undetermined" state if it is a tri-state check box, else check box is deselected. +Check box is set to "undetermined" state if it is a tri-state check box, else check box is deselected. -Select the box. The Reference value box contains text.UFI: sc.features "eforms2 option buttons check boxes now also exchanging text" +Select the box. The Reference value box contains text.UFI: sc.features "eforms2 option buttons check boxes now also exchanging text" -The text from the Reference value box is copied to the cell. +The text from the Reference value box is copied to the cell. -Deselect the box. The Reference value box contains text. +Deselect the box. The Reference value box contains text. -An empty string is copied to the cell. +An empty string is copied to the cell. -The Reference value box contains text. Enter the same text into the cell. +The Reference value box contains text. Enter the same text into the cell. -The check box is selected. +The check box is selected. -The Reference value box contains text. Enter another text into the cell. +The Reference value box contains text. Enter another text into the cell. -The check box is deselected. +The check box is deselected.
-Option button (radio button) with linked cell +Option button (radio button) with linked cell -Action +Action -Result +Result -Select the option button +Select the option button -TRUE is entered into the linked cell +TRUE is entered into the linked cell -Option button is deselected by selecting another option button +Option button is deselected by selecting another option button -FALSE is entered into the linked cell +FALSE is entered into the linked cell -Enter a number or a formula that returns a number in the linked cell +Enter a number or a formula that returns a number in the linked cell -If entered value is TRUE or not 0: Option button is selected
If entered value is FALSE or 0: Option button is deselected +If entered value is TRUE or not 0: Option button is selected
If entered value is FALSE or 0: Option button is deselected -Clear the linked cell, or enter text, or enter a formula that returns text or an error +Clear the linked cell, or enter text, or enter a formula that returns text or an error -Option button is deselected +Option button is deselected -Click the option button. The Reference value box contains text. +Click the option button. The Reference value box contains text. -The text from the Reference value box is copied to the cell. +The text from the Reference value box is copied to the cell. -Click another option button of the same group. The Reference value box contains text. +Click another option button of the same group. The Reference value box contains text. -An empty string is copied to the cell. +An empty string is copied to the cell. -The Reference value box contains text. Enter the same text into the cell. +The Reference value box contains text. Enter the same text into the cell. -The option button is selected. +The option button is selected. -The Reference value box contains text. Enter another text into the cell. +The Reference value box contains text. Enter another text into the cell. -The option button is cleared. +The option button is cleared.
-Text box with linked cell +Text box with linked cell -Action +Action -Result +Result -Enter text into the text box +Enter text into the text box -Text is copied into the linked cell +Text is copied into the linked cell -Clear the text box +Clear the text box -Linked cell is cleared +Linked cell is cleared -Enter text or a number in the linked cell +Enter text or a number in the linked cell -Text or number is copied into the text box +Text or number is copied into the text box -Enter a formula into the linked cell +Enter a formula into the linked cell -Formula result is copied into the text box +Formula result is copied into the text box -Clear the linked cell +Clear the linked cell -Text box is cleared +Text box is cleared
-Numerical field and formatted field with linked cell +Numerical field and formatted field with linked cell -Action +Action -Result +Result -Enter a number into the field +Enter a number into the field -Number is copied into the linked cell +Number is copied into the linked cell -Clear the field +Clear the field -Value 0 is set in the linked cell +Value 0 is set in the linked cell -Enter a number or a formula that returns a number in the linked cell +Enter a number or a formula that returns a number in the linked cell -Number is copied into the field +Number is copied into the field -Clear the linked cell, or enter text, or enter a formula that returns text or an error +Clear the linked cell, or enter text, or enter a formula that returns text or an error -Value 0 is set in the field +Value 0 is set in the field
-List box with linked cell -List boxes support two different linking modes, see the property "Contents of the linked cell". +List box with linked cell +List boxes support two different linking modes, see the property "Contents of the linked cell". -Linked contents: Synchronize the text contents of the selected list box entry with the cell contents. +Linked contents: Synchronize the text contents of the selected list box entry with the cell contents. -Linked selection position: The position of the single selected item in the list box is synchronized with the numerical value in the cell. +Linked selection position: The position of the single selected item in the list box is synchronized with the numerical value in the cell. -Action +Action -Result +Result -Select a single list item +Select a single list item -Contents are linked: Text of the item is copied into the linked cell. -Selection is linked: Position of the selected item is copied into the linked cell. For example, if the third item is selected, the number 3 will be copied. +Contents are linked: Text of the item is copied into the linked cell. +Selection is linked: Position of the selected item is copied into the linked cell. For example, if the third item is selected, the number 3 will be copied. -Select several list items +Select several list items -#NV is entered into the linked cell +#NV is entered into the linked cell -Deselect all list items +Deselect all list items -Contents are linked: Linked cell is cleared -Selection is linked: Value 0 is entered in the linked cell +Contents are linked: Linked cell is cleared +Selection is linked: Value 0 is entered in the linked cell -Enter text or a number into the linked cell +Enter text or a number into the linked cell -Contents are linked: Find and select an equal list item -Selection is linked: The list item at the specified position (starting with 1 for the first item) is selected. If not found, all items are deselected. +Contents are linked: Find and select an equal list item +Selection is linked: The list item at the specified position (starting with 1 for the first item) is selected. If not found, all items are deselected. -Enter a formula into the linked cell +Enter a formula into the linked cell -Find and select a list item that matches the formula result and link mode +Find and select a list item that matches the formula result and link mode -Clear the linked cell +Clear the linked cell -Deselect all items in the list box +Deselect all items in the list box -Change the contents of the list source range +Change the contents of the list source range -List box items are updated according to the change. The selection is preserved. This may cause an update to the linked cell. +List box items are updated according to the change. The selection is preserved. This may cause an update to the linked cell.
-Combo box with linked cell +Combo box with linked cell -Action +Action -Result +Result -Enter text into the edit field of the combo box, or select an entry from the drop-down list +Enter text into the edit field of the combo box, or select an entry from the drop-down list -Text is copied into the linked cell +Text is copied into the linked cell -Clear the edit field of the combo box +Clear the edit field of the combo box -Linked cell is cleared +Linked cell is cleared -Enter text or a number into the linked cell +Enter text or a number into the linked cell -Text or number is copied into the edit field of the combo box +Text or number is copied into the edit field of the combo box -Enter a formula into the linked cell +Enter a formula into the linked cell -Formula result is copied into the edit field of the combo box +Formula result is copied into the edit field of the combo box -Clear the linked cell +Clear the linked cell -Edit field of the combo box is cleared +Edit field of the combo box is cleared -Change the contents of the list source range +Change the contents of the list source range -Drop-down list items are updated according to the change. The edit field of the combo box and the linked cell are not changed. +Drop-down list items are updated according to the change. The edit field of the combo box and the linked cell are not changed.
@@ -703,21 +703,21 @@
-Contents of the linked cell -Select the mode of linking a list box with a linked cell on a spreadsheet. +Contents of the linked cell +Select the mode of linking a list box with a linked cell on a spreadsheet. -Linked contents: Synchronize the text contents of the selected list box entry with the cell contents. Select "The selected entry" +Linked contents: Synchronize the text contents of the selected list box entry with the cell contents. Select "The selected entry" -Linked selection position: The position of the single selected item in the list box is synchronized with the numerical value in the cell. Select "Position of the selected entry" +Linked selection position: The position of the single selected item in the list box is synchronized with the numerical value in the cell. Select "Position of the selected entry"
-Source cell rangeUFI: in the spec, this is "Source range of the list". Named it as seen in 680m38 -Enter a cell range that contains the entries for a list box or combo box on a spreadsheet. If you enter a multi-column range, only the contents of the leftmost column are used to fill the control. +Source cell rangeUFI: in the spec, this is "Source range of the list". Named it as seen in 680m38 +Enter a cell range that contains the entries for a list box or combo box on a spreadsheet. If you enter a multi-column range, only the contents of the leftmost column are used to fill the control.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01170103.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01170103.xhp index 6fbbb319e6..56c877ad86 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01170103.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01170103.xhp @@ -32,74 +32,60 @@ events; controls macros; assigning to events in forms -Events - On the Events tab page you can link macros to events that occur in a form's control fields. +Events + On the Events tab page you can link macros to events that occur in a form's control fields.
- When the event occurs, the linked macro will be called. To assign a macro to an event, press the ... button. The Assign Action dialog opens. + When the event occurs, the linked macro will be called. To assign a macro to an event, press the ... button. The Assign Action dialog opens.
- Depending on the control, different events are available. Only the available events for the selected control and context are listed on the Events tab page. The following events are defined: + Depending on the control, different events are available. Only the available events for the selected control and context are listed on the Events tab page. The following events are defined: -Approve actionrenamed from Before commencing, issue 97356 - This event takes place before an action is triggered by clicking the control. For example, clicking a "Submit" button initiates a send action; however, the actual "send" process is started only when the When initiating event occurs. The Approve action event allows you to kill the process. If the linked method sends back FALSE, When initiating will not be executed. +Approve actionrenamed from Before commencing, issue 97356 + This event takes place before an action is triggered by clicking the control. For example, clicking a "Submit" button initiates a send action; however, the actual "send" process is started only when the When initiating event occurs. The Approve action event allows you to kill the process. If the linked method sends back FALSE, When initiating will not be executed. -Execute actionrenamed from When initiated, issue 97356 - The Execute action event occurs when an action is started. For example, if you have a "Submit" button in your form, the send process represents the action to be initiated. +Execute actionrenamed from When initiated, issue 97356 + The Execute action event occurs when an action is started. For example, if you have a "Submit" button in your form, the send process represents the action to be initiated. -Changed - The Changed event takes place when the control loses the focus and the content of the control has changed since it lost the focus. +Changed + The Changed event takes place when the control loses the focus and the content of the control has changed since it lost the focus. -Text modified - The Text modified event takes place if you enter or modify a text in an input field. +Text modified + The Text modified event takes place if you enter or modify a text in an input field. -Item status changed - The Item status changed event takes place if the status of the control field has changed. The Item status changed event takes place if the status of the control field has changed. +Item status changed + The Item status changed event takes place if the status of the control field has changed. The Item status changed event takes place if the status of the control field has changed. -When receiving focus - The When receiving focus event takes place if a control field receives the focus. +When receiving focus + The When receiving focus event takes place if a control field receives the focus. -When losing focus +When losing focus The When losing focus event takes place if a control field loses the focus. -Key pressed - The Key pressed event occurs when the user presses any key while the control has the focus. This event may be linked to a macro for checking entries. +Key pressed + The Key pressed event occurs when the user presses any key while the control has the focus. This event may be linked to a macro for checking entries. -Key released - The Key released event occurs when the user releases any key while the control has the focus. +Key released + The Key released event occurs when the user releases any key while the control has the focus. -Mouse inside - The Mouse inside event takes place if the mouse is inside the control field. +Mouse inside + The Mouse inside event takes place if the mouse is inside the control field. -Mouse moved while key pressed - The Mouse moved while key pressed event takes place when the mouse is dragged while a key is pressed. An example is when, during drag-and-drop, an additional key determines the mode (move or copy). +Mouse moved while key pressed + The Mouse moved while key pressed event takes place when the mouse is dragged while a key is pressed. An example is when, during drag-and-drop, an additional key determines the mode (move or copy). -Mouse moved - The Mouse moved event occurs if the mouse moves over the control. +Mouse moved + The Mouse moved event occurs if the mouse moves over the control. -Mouse button pressed - The Mouse button pressed event occurs if the mouse button is pressed while the mouse pointer is on the control. - Note that this event is also used for notifying requests for a popup context menu on the control. +Mouse button pressed + The Mouse button pressed event occurs if the mouse button is pressed while the mouse pointer is on the control. + Note that this event is also used for notifying requests for a popup context menu on the control. -Mouse button released - The Mouse button released event occurs if the mouse button is released while the mouse pointer is on the control. +Mouse button released + The Mouse button released event occurs if the mouse button is released while the mouse pointer is on the control. -Mouse outside - The Mouse outside event takes place when the mouse is outside the control field. +Mouse outside + The Mouse outside event takes place when the mouse is outside the control field. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01170200.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01170200.xhp index 54e62fa56c..090dad50c0 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01170200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01170200.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
forms; propertiesproperties; forms -Form Properties - In this dialog you can specify, among others, the data source and the events for the whole form. +Form Properties + In this dialog you can specify, among others, the data source and the events for the whole form.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01170201.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01170201.xhp index e3600a6700..d37e218e57 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01170201.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01170201.xhp @@ -35,79 +35,79 @@ get method for form transmissions post method for form transmissions -General +General
-A form is a text document or spreadsheet with different form controls. If you create a form for a Web page, the user can enter data into it to send over the Internet. The data from the form controls of a form is transmitted to a server by specifying a URL and can be processed on the server. -Name -Specifies a name for the form. This name is used to identify the form in the Form Navigator. -URL -Specifies the URL to which the data of the completed form is to be transmitted. -Frame -Defines the target frame in which the loaded URL is to appear. +A form is a text document or spreadsheet with different form controls. If you create a form for a Web page, the user can enter data into it to send over the Internet. The data from the form controls of a form is transmitted to a server by specifying a URL and can be processed on the server. +Name +Specifies a name for the form. This name is used to identify the form in the Form Navigator. +URL +Specifies the URL to which the data of the completed form is to be transmitted. +Frame +Defines the target frame in which the loaded URL is to appear. -Type of submission -Specifies the method to transfer the completed form information. -Using the "Get" method, the data of every control is transmitted as an environment variable. They are appended to the URL in the form "?Control1=Content1&Control2=Content2&..."; the character string is analyzed by a program on the recipient's server. -Using the "Post" method, a document is created from the content of the form that is sent to the specified URL. +Type of submission +Specifies the method to transfer the completed form information. +Using the "Get" method, the data of every control is transmitted as an environment variable. They are appended to the URL in the form "?Control1=Content1&Control2=Content2&..."; the character string is analyzed by a program on the recipient's server. +Using the "Post" method, a document is created from the content of the form that is sent to the specified URL. -Submission encoding -Specifies the type for encoding the data transfer. -Data transfer of control information -When sending a form, all controls available in $[officename] are taken into consideration. The name of the control and the corresponding value, if available, are transmitted. -Which values are transmitted in each case depends on the respective control. For text fields, the visible entries are transmitted; for list boxes, the selected entries are transmitted; for check boxes and option fields, the associated reference values are transmitted if these fields were activated. -How this information is transmitted depends on the selected transfer method (Get or Post) and the coding (URL or Multipart). If the Get method and URL encoding are selected, for example, value pairs in the form <Name>=<Value> are sent. -In addition to the controls that are recognized in HTML, $[officename] offers other controls. It should be noted that, for fields with a specific numerical format, the visible values are not transmitted but rather fixed default formats. The following table shows how the data of the $[officename]-specific controls is transmitted: +Submission encoding +Specifies the type for encoding the data transfer. +Data transfer of control information +When sending a form, all controls available in $[officename] are taken into consideration. The name of the control and the corresponding value, if available, are transmitted. +Which values are transmitted in each case depends on the respective control. For text fields, the visible entries are transmitted; for list boxes, the selected entries are transmitted; for check boxes and option fields, the associated reference values are transmitted if these fields were activated. +How this information is transmitted depends on the selected transfer method (Get or Post) and the coding (URL or Multipart). If the Get method and URL encoding are selected, for example, value pairs in the form <Name>=<Value> are sent. +In addition to the controls that are recognized in HTML, $[officename] offers other controls. It should be noted that, for fields with a specific numerical format, the visible values are not transmitted but rather fixed default formats. The following table shows how the data of the $[officename]-specific controls is transmitted: -Control +Control -Value Pair +Value Pair -Numeric field, currency field +Numeric field, currency field -A decimal separator is always displayed as a period. +A decimal separator is always displayed as a period. -Date field +Date field -The date format is sent in a fixed format (MM-DD-YYYY), regardless of the user's local settings. +The date format is sent in a fixed format (MM-DD-YYYY), regardless of the user's local settings. -Time field +Time field -The time format is sent in a fixed format (HH:MM:SS), regardless of the user's local settings. +The time format is sent in a fixed format (HH:MM:SS), regardless of the user's local settings. -Pattern field +Pattern field -The values of pattern fields are sent as text fields, that is, the value visible in the form is sent. +The values of pattern fields are sent as text fields, that is, the value visible in the form is sent. -Table control +Table control -From the table control, the individual columns are always transmitted. The name of the control, the name of the column, and the value of the column are sent. Using the Get method with URL encoding, the transmission is done in the form <Name of the table control>.<Name of the column>=<Value>, for example, with the value being dependent on the column. +From the table control, the individual columns are always transmitted. The name of the control, the name of the column, and the value of the column are sent. Using the Get method with URL encoding, the transmission is done in the form <Name of the table control>.<Name of the column>=<Value>, for example, with the value being dependent on the column.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01170202.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01170202.xhp index 2fd860eef9..30135f43da 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01170202.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01170202.xhp @@ -31,141 +31,126 @@ forms; events events;in forms -Events - The Events tab page, allows you to assign a macro to certain events which occur in a form. +Events + The Events tab page, allows you to assign a macro to certain events which occur in a form.
- To link an event with a macro, first write a macro that contains all the commands to be executed when the event happens. Then assign this macro to the respective event by clicking the ... button beside the corresponding event. The Assign Macro dialog opens, where you can select the macro. - The following actions can be configured individually, meaning that you can use your own dialogs to depict an action: + To link an event with a macro, first write a macro that contains all the commands to be executed when the event happens. Then assign this macro to the respective event by clicking the ... button beside the corresponding event. The Assign Macro dialog opens, where you can select the macro. + The following actions can be configured individually, meaning that you can use your own dialogs to depict an action: - Displaying an error message, + Displaying an error message, - Confirming a delete process (for data records), + Confirming a delete process (for data records), - Querying parameters, + Querying parameters, - Checking input when saving a data record. + Checking input when saving a data record. - For example, you can issue a "confirm deletion" request such as "Really delete customer xyz?" when deleting a data record. - The events that are shown in the Events dialog cannot be edited directly. You can delete an event from the list by pressing the Del key. - The following lists and describes all events in a form that can be linked to a macro: + For example, you can issue a "confirm deletion" request such as "Really delete customer xyz?" when deleting a data record. + The events that are shown in the Events dialog cannot be edited directly. You can delete an event from the list by pressing the Del key. + The following lists and describes all events in a form that can be linked to a macro:
- Before update - The Before update event occurs before the control content changed by the user is written into the data source. The linked macro can, for example, prevent this action by returning "FALSE". + Before update + The Before update event occurs before the control content changed by the user is written into the data source. The linked macro can, for example, prevent this action by returning "FALSE". -After update - The After update event occurs after the control content changed by the user has been written into the data source. +After update + The After update event occurs after the control content changed by the user has been written into the data source. -Prior to reset - The Prior to reset event occurs before a form is reset. The linked macro can, for example, prevent this action by returning "FALSE". - A form is reset if one of the following conditions is met: +Prior to reset + The Prior to reset event occurs before a form is reset. The linked macro can, for example, prevent this action by returning "FALSE". + A form is reset if one of the following conditions is met: - The user presses an (HTML) button that is defined as a reset button. + The user presses an (HTML) button that is defined as a reset button. - A new and empty record is created in a form that is linked to a data source. For example, in the last record, the Next Record button may be pressed. + A new and empty record is created in a form that is linked to a data source. For example, in the last record, the Next Record button may be pressed. -After resetting - The After resetting event occurs after a form has been reset. +After resetting + The After resetting event occurs after a form has been reset.
-Before submitting - The Before submitting event occurs before the form data is sent. +Before submitting + The Before submitting event occurs before the form data is sent.
-When loading - The When loading event occurs directly after the form has been loaded. +When loading + The When loading event occurs directly after the form has been loaded.
-Before reloading - The Before reloading event occurs before the form is reloaded. The data content has not yet been refreshed. +Before reloading + The Before reloading event occurs before the form is reloaded. The data content has not yet been refreshed.
-When reloading - The When reloading event occurs directly after the form has been reloaded. The data content has already been refreshed. +When reloading + The When reloading event occurs directly after the form has been reloaded. The data content has already been refreshed.
-Before unloading - The Before unloading event occurs before the form is unloaded; that is, separated from its data source. +Before unloading + The Before unloading event occurs before the form is unloaded; that is, separated from its data source.
-When unloading - The When unloading event occurs directly after the form has been unloaded; that is, separated from its data source. +When unloading + The When unloading event occurs directly after the form has been unloaded; that is, separated from its data source.
-Confirm deletion - The Confirm deletion event occurs as soon as data has been deleted from the form. For example, the linked macro can request confirmation in a dialog. +Confirm deletion + The Confirm deletion event occurs as soon as data has been deleted from the form. For example, the linked macro can request confirmation in a dialog.
-Before record action - The Before record action event occurs before the current record is changed. For example, the linked macro can request confirmation in a dialog. +Before record action + The Before record action event occurs before the current record is changed. For example, the linked macro can request confirmation in a dialog.
-After record action - The After record action event occurs directly after the current record has been changed. +After record action + The After record action event occurs directly after the current record has been changed.
-Before record change - The Before record change event occurs before the current record pointer is changed. For example, the linked macro can prevent this action by returning "FALSE". +Before record change + The Before record change event occurs before the current record pointer is changed. For example, the linked macro can prevent this action by returning "FALSE".
-After record change - The After record change event occurs directly after the current record pointer has been changed. +After record change + The After record change event occurs directly after the current record pointer has been changed.
-Fill parameters - The Fill parameters event occurs when the form to be loaded has parameters that must be filled out. For example, the data source of the form can be the following SQL command: - SELECT * FROM address WHERE name=:name - Here :name is a parameter that must be filled out when loading. The parameter is automatically filled out from the parent form if possible. If the parameter cannot be filled out, this event is called and a linked macro can fill out the parameter. +Fill parameters + The Fill parameters event occurs when the form to be loaded has parameters that must be filled out. For example, the data source of the form can be the following SQL command: + SELECT * FROM address WHERE name=:name + Here :name is a parameter that must be filled out when loading. The parameter is automatically filled out from the parent form if possible. If the parameter cannot be filled out, this event is called and a linked macro can fill out the parameter.
-Error occurred - The Error occurred event is activated if an error occurs when accessing the data source. This applies to forms, list boxes and combo boxes. +Error occurred + The Error occurred event is activated if an error occurs when accessing the data source. This applies to forms, list boxes and combo boxes.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01170203.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01170203.xhp index b503eb6703..8415984054 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01170203.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01170203.xhp @@ -35,137 +35,137 @@ forms; subforms subforms; description -Data -The Data tab page defines the form properties that refer to the database that is linked to the form. +Data +The Data tab page defines the form properties that refer to the database that is linked to the form.
-Defines the data source on which the form is based, or specifies whether the data can be edited by the user. Apart from the sort and filter functions, you will also find all the necessary properties to create a subform. +Defines the data source on which the form is based, or specifies whether the data can be edited by the user. Apart from the sort and filter functions, you will also find all the necessary properties to create a subform.
-Data sourceUFI: was Database -Defines the data source to which the form should refer. If you click the ... button, you call the Open dialog, where you can choose a data source. +Data sourceUFI: was Database +Defines the data source to which the form should refer. If you click the ... button, you call the Open dialog, where you can choose a data source.
-ContentUFI: was Data source -Determines the content to be used for the form. The content can be an existing table or a query (previously created in the database), or it can be defined by an SQL-statement. Before you enter a content you have to define the exact type in Content type. -If you have selected either "Table" or "Query" in Content type, the box lists all the tables and queries set up in the selected database. +ContentUFI: was Data source +Determines the content to be used for the form. The content can be an existing table or a query (previously created in the database), or it can be defined by an SQL-statement. Before you enter a content you have to define the exact type in Content type. +If you have selected either "Table" or "Query" in Content type, the box lists all the tables and queries set up in the selected database.
-Content type -Defines whether the data source is to be an existing database table or query, or if the form is to be generated based on an SQL statement. -If you choose "Table" or "Query", the form will refer to the table or query that you specify under Content. If you want to create a new query or a subform, then you have to choose the "SQL" option. You can then enter the statement for the SQL query or the subform directly in the List content box on the Control properties Data tab page. +Content type +Defines whether the data source is to be an existing database table or query, or if the form is to be generated based on an SQL statement. +If you choose "Table" or "Query", the form will refer to the table or query that you specify under Content. If you want to create a new query or a subform, then you have to choose the "SQL" option. You can then enter the statement for the SQL query or the subform directly in the List content box on the Control properties Data tab page.
-Analyze SQL command -Specifies whether the SQL statement is to be analyzed by %PRODUCTNAME. If set to Yes, you can click the ... button next to the Content list box. This will open a window where you can graphically create a database query. When you close that window, the SQL statement for the created query will be inserted in the Content list box. +Analyze SQL command +Specifies whether the SQL statement is to be analyzed by %PRODUCTNAME. If set to Yes, you can click the ... button next to the Content list box. This will open a window where you can graphically create a database query. When you close that window, the SQL statement for the created query will be inserted in the Content list box.
-Filter -Enter the required conditions for filtering the data in the form. The filter specifications follow SQL rules without using the WHERE clause. For example, if you want to display all records with the "Mike" forename, type into the data field: Forename = 'Mike'. You can also combine conditions: Forename = 'Mike' OR Forename = 'Peter'. All records matching either of these two conditions will be displayed. -The filter function is available in user mode through the AutoFilter and Default Filter icons on the Form Navigation Bar. +Filter +Enter the required conditions for filtering the data in the form. The filter specifications follow SQL rules without using the WHERE clause. For example, if you want to display all records with the "Mike" forename, type into the data field: Forename = 'Mike'. You can also combine conditions: Forename = 'Mike' OR Forename = 'Peter'. All records matching either of these two conditions will be displayed. +The filter function is available in user mode through the AutoFilter and Default Filter icons on the Form Navigation Bar.
-Sort -Specifies the conditions to sort the data in the form. The specification of the sorting conditions follows SQL rules without the use of the ORDER BY clause. For example, if you want all records of a database to be sorted in one field in an ascending order and in another field in a descending order, enter Forename ASC, Name DESC (presuming Forename and Name are the names of the data fields). -The appropriate icons on the Form Navigation Bar can be used in User mode to sort: Sort Ascending, Sort Descending, Sort. +Sort +Specifies the conditions to sort the data in the form. The specification of the sorting conditions follows SQL rules without the use of the ORDER BY clause. For example, if you want all records of a database to be sorted in one field in an ascending order and in another field in a descending order, enter Forename ASC, Name DESC (presuming Forename and Name are the names of the data fields). +The appropriate icons on the Form Navigation Bar can be used in User mode to sort: Sort Ascending, Sort Descending, Sort.
-Add data only -Determines if the form only allows the addition of new data (Yes) or if it allows other properties as well (No). -If Add data only is set to "Yes", changing or deleting data is not possible. +Add data only +Determines if the form only allows the addition of new data (Yes) or if it allows other properties as well (No). +If Add data only is set to "Yes", changing or deleting data is not possible.
-Navigation bar -Specifies whether the navigation functions in the lower form bar can be used. -The "Parent Form" option is used for subforms. If you choose this option for a subform, you can navigate using the records of the main form if the cursor is placed in the subform. A subform is linked to the parent form by a 1:1 relationship, so navigation is always performed in the parent form. +Navigation bar +Specifies whether the navigation functions in the lower form bar can be used. +The "Parent Form" option is used for subforms. If you choose this option for a subform, you can navigate using the records of the main form if the cursor is placed in the subform. A subform is linked to the parent form by a 1:1 relationship, so navigation is always performed in the parent form.
-Cycle -Determines how the navigation should be done using the tab key. Using the tab key, you can move forward in the form. If you simultaneously press the Shift key, the navigation will follow the opposite direction. If you reach the last (or the first) field and press the tab key again, it can have various effects. Define the key control with the following options: +Cycle +Determines how the navigation should be done using the tab key. Using the tab key, you can move forward in the form. If you simultaneously press the Shift key, the navigation will follow the opposite direction. If you reach the last (or the first) field and press the tab key again, it can have various effects. Define the key control with the following options: -Option +Option -Meaning +Meaning -Default +Default -This setting automatically defines a cycle which follows an existing database link: If the form contains a database link, the Tab key will, by default, initiate a change to the next or previous record on exit from the last field (see All Records). If there is no database link the next/previous form is shown (see Current Page). +This setting automatically defines a cycle which follows an existing database link: If the form contains a database link, the Tab key will, by default, initiate a change to the next or previous record on exit from the last field (see All Records). If there is no database link the next/previous form is shown (see Current Page). -All records +All records -This option applies to database forms only and is used to navigate through all records. If you use the Tab key to exit from the last field of a form, the current record is changed. +This option applies to database forms only and is used to navigate through all records. If you use the Tab key to exit from the last field of a form, the current record is changed. -Active record +Active record -This option applies to database forms only, and is used to navigate within the current record. If you use the Tab key to exit from the last field of a form, the current record is changed. +This option applies to database forms only, and is used to navigate within the current record. If you use the Tab key to exit from the last field of a form, the current record is changed. -Current page +Current page -On exit from the last field of a form, the cursor skips to the first field in the next form. This is standard for HTML forms; therefore, this option is especially relevant for HTML forms. +On exit from the last field of a form, the cursor skips to the first field in the next form. This is standard for HTML forms; therefore, this option is especially relevant for HTML forms.
-Allow additions -Determines if data can be added. +Allow additions +Determines if data can be added.
-Allow modifications - Determines if the data can be modified. +Allow modifications + Determines if the data can be modified.
-Allow deletions -Determines if the data can be deleted. +Allow deletions +Determines if the data can be deleted.
-Link master fields -If you create a subform, enter the data field of the parent form responsible for the synchronization between parent and subform. To enter multiple values, press Shift + Enter after each input line.UFI: fixes #i22439# -The subform is based on an SQL query; more specifically, on a Parameter Query. If a field name is entered in the Link master fields box, the data contained in that field in the main form is read to a variable that you must enter in Link slave fields. In an appropriate SQL statement, this variable is compared to the table data that the subform refers to. Alternatively, you can enter the column name in the Link master fields box. -Consider the following example: -The database table on which the form is based is, for example, a customer database ("Customer"), where every customer has been given a unique number in a data field named "Cust_ID". A customer's orders are maintained in another database table. You now want to see each customer's orders after entering them into the form. In order to do this you should create a subform. Under Link master fields enter the data field from the customer database which clearly identifies the customer, that is, Cust_ID. Under Link slave fields enter the name of a variable which is to accept the data of the field Cust_ID, for example, x. -The subform should show the appropriate data from the orders table ("Orders") for each customer ID (Customer_ID -> x). This is only possible if each order is uniquely assigned to one customer in the orders table. Alternatively, you can use another field called Customer_ID; however, to make sure that this field is not confused with the same field from the main form, the field is called Customer_Number. -Now compare the Customer_Number in the "Orders" table with the Customer_ID from the "Customers" table, which can be done, for example, using the x variable with the following SQL statement: -SELECT * FROM Orders WHERE Customer_Number =: x (if you want the subform to show all data from the orders table) -or: -SELECT Item FROM Orders WHERE Customer_Number =: x (if you want the subform from the orders table to show only the data contained in the "Item" field) -The SQL statement can either be entered in the Data source field, or you can create an appropriate parameter query, which can be used to create the subform. +Link master fields +If you create a subform, enter the data field of the parent form responsible for the synchronization between parent and subform. To enter multiple values, press Shift + Enter after each input line.UFI: fixes #i22439# +The subform is based on an SQL query; more specifically, on a Parameter Query. If a field name is entered in the Link master fields box, the data contained in that field in the main form is read to a variable that you must enter in Link slave fields. In an appropriate SQL statement, this variable is compared to the table data that the subform refers to. Alternatively, you can enter the column name in the Link master fields box. +Consider the following example: +The database table on which the form is based is, for example, a customer database ("Customer"), where every customer has been given a unique number in a data field named "Cust_ID". A customer's orders are maintained in another database table. You now want to see each customer's orders after entering them into the form. In order to do this you should create a subform. Under Link master fields enter the data field from the customer database which clearly identifies the customer, that is, Cust_ID. Under Link slave fields enter the name of a variable which is to accept the data of the field Cust_ID, for example, x. +The subform should show the appropriate data from the orders table ("Orders") for each customer ID (Customer_ID -> x). This is only possible if each order is uniquely assigned to one customer in the orders table. Alternatively, you can use another field called Customer_ID; however, to make sure that this field is not confused with the same field from the main form, the field is called Customer_Number. +Now compare the Customer_Number in the "Orders" table with the Customer_ID from the "Customers" table, which can be done, for example, using the x variable with the following SQL statement: +SELECT * FROM Orders WHERE Customer_Number =: x (if you want the subform to show all data from the orders table) +or: +SELECT Item FROM Orders WHERE Customer_Number =: x (if you want the subform from the orders table to show only the data contained in the "Item" field) +The SQL statement can either be entered in the Data source field, or you can create an appropriate parameter query, which can be used to create the subform.
-Link slave fields -If you create a subform, enter the variable where possible values from the parent form field can be stored. If a subform is based on a query, enter the variable that you defined in the query. If you create a form using an SQL statement entered in the Data source field, enter the variable you used in the statement. You can choose any variable name. If you want to enter multiple values, press Shift + Enter. -If, for example, you specified the Customer_ID database field as a parent field under Link master fields, then you can define under Link slave fields the name of the variable in which the values of the Customer_ID database field are to be stored. If you now specify an SQL statement in the Data source box using this variable, the relevant values are displayed in the subform. +Link slave fields +If you create a subform, enter the variable where possible values from the parent form field can be stored. If a subform is based on a query, enter the variable that you defined in the query. If you create a form using an SQL statement entered in the Data source field, enter the variable you used in the statement. You can choose any variable name. If you want to enter multiple values, press Shift + Enter. +If, for example, you specified the Customer_ID database field as a parent field under Link master fields, then you can define under Link slave fields the name of the variable in which the values of the Customer_ID database field are to be stored. If you now specify an SQL statement in the Data source box using this variable, the relevant values are displayed in the subform.
-What is a subform? -Forms are created based on a database table or database query. They display the data in a visually pleasant fashion and can be used to enter data or edit data. -If you require a form that can refer to the data in a table or query and can additionally display data from another table, you should create a subform. +What is a subform? +Forms are created based on a database table or database query. They display the data in a visually pleasant fashion and can be used to enter data or edit data. +If you require a form that can refer to the data in a table or query and can additionally display data from another table, you should create a subform. For example, this subform can be a text box that displays the data of another database table. -A subform is an additional component of the main form. The main form can be called the "parent form" or "master". Subforms are needed as soon as you want to access more than one table from a form. Each additional table requires its own subform. -After creating a form, it can be changed into a subform. To do this, enter Design Mode, and open the Form Navigator. In the Form Navigator, drag a form (that will become a subform) onto any other form (that will become a master). -The user of your document will not see that a form has subforms. The user only sees a document in which data is entered or where existing data is displayed. -Specify the Link master field from the data fields in the master form. In the subform, the Link slave field can be set as a field which will be matched to the contents of the Link master field. -When the user navigates through the data, the form always displays the current data record. If there are subforms defined, the contents of the subforms will be displayed after a short delay of approximate 200 ms. This delay enables you to quickly browse through the data records of the master form. If you navigate to the next master data record within the delay limit, the subform data need not be retrieved and displayed. +A subform is an additional component of the main form. The main form can be called the "parent form" or "master". Subforms are needed as soon as you want to access more than one table from a form. Each additional table requires its own subform. +After creating a form, it can be changed into a subform. To do this, enter Design Mode, and open the Form Navigator. In the Form Navigator, drag a form (that will become a subform) onto any other form (that will become a master). +The user of your document will not see that a form has subforms. The user only sees a document in which data is entered or where existing data is displayed. +Specify the Link master field from the data fields in the master form. In the subform, the Link slave field can be set as a field which will be matched to the contents of the Link master field. +When the user navigates through the data, the form always displays the current data record. If there are subforms defined, the contents of the subforms will be displayed after a short delay of approximate 200 ms. This delay enables you to quickly browse through the data records of the master form. If you navigate to the next master data record within the delay limit, the subform data need not be retrieved and displayed. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp index cbc977173a..a8954bedc7 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp @@ -31,23 +31,23 @@
-Tab Order -In the Tab Order dialog you can modify the order in which control fields get the focus when the user presses the tab key. +Tab Order +In the Tab Order dialog you can modify the order in which control fields get the focus when the user presses the tab key. the button Activation Order on Form Design toolbar opens the Tab Order dialog
-If form elements are inserted into a document, %PRODUCTNAME automatically determines in which order to move from one control to the next when using the Tab key. Every new control added is automatically placed at the end of this series. In the Tab Order dialog, you can adapt the order of this series to your individual needs. -You can also define the index of a control through its specific properties by entering the desired value under Order in the Properties dialog of the control. -A radio button inside a group can only be accessed by the Tab key when one of the radio buttons is set to "selected". If you have designed a group of radio buttons where no button is set to "selected", then the user will not be able to access the group or any of the radio buttons by keyboard. -Controls -Lists all controls in the form. These controls can be selected with the tab key in the given order from top to bottom. Select a control from the Controls list to assign the desired position in the tab order. -Move Up -Click the Move Up button to shift the selected control one position higher in the tab order. -Move Down -Click the Move Down button to shift the selected control one position lower in the tab order. -Automatic Sort -Click the Automatic Sort button to automatically sort the controls according to their position in the document. +If form elements are inserted into a document, %PRODUCTNAME automatically determines in which order to move from one control to the next when using the Tab key. Every new control added is automatically placed at the end of this series. In the Tab Order dialog, you can adapt the order of this series to your individual needs. +You can also define the index of a control through its specific properties by entering the desired value under Order in the Properties dialog of the control. +A radio button inside a group can only be accessed by the Tab key when one of the radio buttons is set to "selected". If you have designed a group of radio buttons where no button is set to "selected", then the user will not be able to access the group or any of the radio buttons by keyboard. +Controls +Lists all controls in the form. These controls can be selected with the tab key in the given order from top to bottom. Select a control from the Controls list to assign the desired position in the tab order. +Move Up +Click the Move Up button to shift the selected control one position higher in the tab order. +Move Down +Click the Move Down button to shift the selected control one position lower in the tab order. +Automatic Sort +Click the Automatic Sort button to automatically sort the controls according to their position in the document. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01170400.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01170400.xhp index d0bdd4871d..34492de700 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01170400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01170400.xhp @@ -30,14 +30,14 @@ -Add Field -Opens a window where you can select a database field to add to the form or report. +Add Field +Opens a window where you can select a database field to add to the form or report. same help id used for forms and reports
-The field selection window lists all database fields of the table or query that was specified as the data source in the Form Properties. -You can insert a field into the current document by dragging and dropping. A field is then inserted which contains a link to the database. -If you add fields to a form and you switch off the Design Mode, you can see that $[officename] adds a labeled input field for every inserted database field.may be different for reports +The field selection window lists all database fields of the table or query that was specified as the data source in the Form Properties. +You can insert a field into the current document by dragging and dropping. A field is then inserted which contains a link to the database. +If you add fields to a form and you switch off the Design Mode, you can see that $[officename] adds a labeled input field for every inserted database field.may be different for reports diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01170500.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01170500.xhp index 19c7fe42a6..79e9385a8f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01170500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01170500.xhp @@ -35,13 +35,13 @@ -Design Mode On/Off -Toggles the Design mode on or off. This function is used to switch quickly between Design and User mode. Activate to edit the form controls, deactivate to use the form controls. +Design Mode On/Off +Toggles the Design mode on or off. This function is used to switch quickly between Design and User mode. Activate to edit the form controls, deactivate to use the form controls.
-Please note the Open in Design Mode function. If Open in Design Mode is activated, the document is always opened in Design mode, regardless of the state in which it is saved. -If your form is linked to a database and you turn off the Design mode, the Form Bar is displayed at the lower margin of the document window. You can edit the link to the database in the Form Properties. +Please note the Open in Design Mode function. If Open in Design Mode is activated, the document is always opened in Design mode, regardless of the state in which it is saved. +If your form is linked to a database and you turn off the Design mode, the Form Bar is displayed at the lower margin of the document window. You can edit the link to the database in the Form Properties. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01170600.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01170600.xhp index 4ac044666f..ceaff4a61f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01170600.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01170600.xhp @@ -38,35 +38,35 @@ hidden controls in Form Navigator -Form Navigator -Opens the Form Navigator. The Form Navigator displays all forms and subforms of the current document with their respective controls. +Form Navigator +Opens the Form Navigator. The Form Navigator displays all forms and subforms of the current document with their respective controls.
-When using several forms, the Form Navigator gives an overview of all forms, and also provides various functions for editing them. +When using several forms, the Form Navigator gives an overview of all forms, and also provides various functions for editing them.
-The Form Navigator contains a list of all created (logical) forms with the corresponding control fields. You can see whether a form contains control fields by the plus sign displayed before the entry. Click the plus sign to open the list of the form elements. -You can change how the different controls are arranged by dragging and dropping them in the Form Navigator. Select one or more controls and drag them into another form. Alternatively use CommandCtrl+X or the context menu command Cut to move a control to the clipboard and CommandCtrl+V or the command Insert to insert the control into another position. -To edit the name in the Form Navigator, click on the name and enter a new name, or use the command in the context menu. -If you select a control in the Form Navigator, the corresponding element is selected in the document. -If you call the context menu of a selected entry, the Form Navigator offers the following functions: -New -Adds new elements to the form. The Add function can only be called if a form is selected in the Form Navigator. -Form -Creates a new form in the document. To create a subform, add the new form under the desired parent form. -Hidden Control -Creates a hidden control in the selected form that is not displayed on the screen. A hidden control serves to include data that is transmitted together with the form. It contains additional information or clarifying text that you can specify when creating the form through the Special Properties of the control. Select the entry of the hidden control in the Form Navigator and select the Properties command. -You can copy controls in the document through the clipboard (shortcut keys CommandCtrl+C for copying and CommandCtrl+V for inserting). You can copy hidden controls in the Form Navigator by using drag-and-drop while keeping the CommandCtrl key pressed. -Drag and drop to copy controls within the same document or between documents. Open another form document and drag the hidden control from the Form Navigator into the Form Navigator of the target document. Click a visible control directly in the document, rest the mouse for a moment so that a copy of the control is added to the drag-and-drop clipboard, then drag the copy into the other document. If you want a copy in the same document, press CommandCtrl while dragging. -Delete -Deletes the selected entry. This allows you to delete individual form components as well as whole forms with one mouse click. -Tab order -When a form is selected, it opens the Tab Order dialog, where the indices for focusing the control elements on the Tab key are defined. -Rename -Renames the selected object. +The Form Navigator contains a list of all created (logical) forms with the corresponding control fields. You can see whether a form contains control fields by the plus sign displayed before the entry. Click the plus sign to open the list of the form elements. +You can change how the different controls are arranged by dragging and dropping them in the Form Navigator. Select one or more controls and drag them into another form. Alternatively use CommandCtrl+X or the context menu command Cut to move a control to the clipboard and CommandCtrl+V or the command Insert to insert the control into another position. +To edit the name in the Form Navigator, click on the name and enter a new name, or use the command in the context menu. +If you select a control in the Form Navigator, the corresponding element is selected in the document. +If you call the context menu of a selected entry, the Form Navigator offers the following functions: +New +Adds new elements to the form. The Add function can only be called if a form is selected in the Form Navigator. +Form +Creates a new form in the document. To create a subform, add the new form under the desired parent form. +Hidden Control +Creates a hidden control in the selected form that is not displayed on the screen. A hidden control serves to include data that is transmitted together with the form. It contains additional information or clarifying text that you can specify when creating the form through the Special Properties of the control. Select the entry of the hidden control in the Form Navigator and select the Properties command. +You can copy controls in the document through the clipboard (shortcut keys CommandCtrl+C for copying and CommandCtrl+V for inserting). You can copy hidden controls in the Form Navigator by using drag-and-drop while keeping the CommandCtrl key pressed. +Drag and drop to copy controls within the same document or between documents. Open another form document and drag the hidden control from the Form Navigator into the Form Navigator of the target document. Click a visible control directly in the document, rest the mouse for a moment so that a copy of the control is added to the drag-and-drop clipboard, then drag the copy into the other document. If you want a copy in the same document, press CommandCtrl while dragging. +Delete +Deletes the selected entry. This allows you to delete individual form components as well as whole forms with one mouse click. +Tab order +When a form is selected, it opens the Tab Order dialog, where the indices for focusing the control elements on the Tab key are defined. +Rename +Renames the selected object. -Properties -Starts the Properties dialog for the selected entry. If a form is selected, the Form Properties dialog opens. If a control is selected, the Control Properties dialog opens. +Properties +Starts the Properties dialog for the selected entry. If a form is selected, the Form Properties dialog opens. If a control is selected, the Control Properties dialog opens. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01170700.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01170700.xhp index 4054082c67..5c988d37c9 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01170700.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01170700.xhp @@ -31,19 +31,19 @@ forms; HTML filters -HTML Filters and Forms -You can use all control elements and form events in HTML documents. There have been numerous events to date (for example, focus events), which have not been changed. They will continue to be imported and exported as ONFOCUS, ONBLUR, and so on for JavaScript and as SDONFOCUS, SDONBLUR, and so on for $[officename] Basic. -Generic names that consist of the Listener interface and the method name of the event are used for all other events: An event registered as XListener::method is exported as -SDEvent-XListener-method = "/* event-code */" -Note that the XListener- and method components of this option are case sensitive. -Event handling of controls is performed using the $[officename] API. If you assign an event to a control, an object registers itself internally as a "Listener" for a specific control event. To do this, the object must use a specific interface, for example the XFocusListener Interface, so that it can react to focus events. When the event occurs, the control then invokes a special method of the Listener interface when the control receives the focus. The internally registered object then invokes the JavaScript or $[officename] Basic code, which was assigned to the event. -The HTML filter now uses precisely these listener interfaces and method names so that it can import and export events as desired. You can register a focus event through -<INPUT TYPE=text ONFOCUS="/* code */" -rather than through the -<INPUT TYPE=text SDEvent-XFocusListener-focusGained="/* code */" -register. Events can therefore be registered as desired, including those not offered in the list boxes. To define the script language of events, you can write the following line in the document header: -<META HTTP-EQUIV="content-script-type" CONTENT="..."> -As CONTENT you can, for example, use "text/x-StarBasic" for $[officename] Basic or a "text/JavaScript" for JavaScript. If no entry is made, JavaScript is assumed. -During exporting, the default script language will be defined based on the first module found in macro management. For events, only one language can be used per document. +HTML Filters and Forms +You can use all control elements and form events in HTML documents. There have been numerous events to date (for example, focus events), which have not been changed. They will continue to be imported and exported as ONFOCUS, ONBLUR, and so on for JavaScript and as SDONFOCUS, SDONBLUR, and so on for $[officename] Basic. +Generic names that consist of the Listener interface and the method name of the event are used for all other events: An event registered as XListener::method is exported as +SDEvent-XListener-method = "/* event-code */" +Note that the XListener- and method components of this option are case sensitive. +Event handling of controls is performed using the $[officename] API. If you assign an event to a control, an object registers itself internally as a "Listener" for a specific control event. To do this, the object must use a specific interface, for example the XFocusListener Interface, so that it can react to focus events. When the event occurs, the control then invokes a special method of the Listener interface when the control receives the focus. The internally registered object then invokes the JavaScript or $[officename] Basic code, which was assigned to the event. +The HTML filter now uses precisely these listener interfaces and method names so that it can import and export events as desired. You can register a focus event through +<INPUT TYPE=text ONFOCUS="/* code */" +rather than through the +<INPUT TYPE=text SDEvent-XFocusListener-focusGained="/* code */" +register. Events can therefore be registered as desired, including those not offered in the list boxes. To define the script language of events, you can write the following line in the document header: +<META HTTP-EQUIV="content-script-type" CONTENT="..."> +As CONTENT you can, for example, use "text/x-StarBasic" for $[officename] Basic or a "text/JavaScript" for JavaScript. If no entry is made, JavaScript is assumed. +During exporting, the default script language will be defined based on the first module found in macro management. For events, only one language can be used per document. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01170800.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01170800.xhp index bea3aafe2f..d6e9f34acf 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01170800.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01170800.xhp @@ -30,12 +30,12 @@ -Table Element Wizard -If you insert a table control in a document, the Table Element Wizard starts automatically. In this wizard, you can interactively specify which information is displayed in the table control. +Table Element Wizard +If you insert a table control in a document, the Table Element Wizard starts automatically. In this wizard, you can interactively specify which information is displayed in the table control.
-You can use the Wizards On/Off icon to keep the wizard from starting automatically. +You can use the Wizards On/Off icon to keep the wizard from starting automatically. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01170801.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01170801.xhp index d23d27cf97..6fae9517d6 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01170801.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01170801.xhp @@ -32,15 +32,15 @@
-Table Element / List Box / Combo Box Wizard: Data -Select the data source and table to which the form field corresponds. If you insert the form field in a document that is already linked to a data source, this page becomes invisible. +Table Element / List Box / Combo Box Wizard: Data +Select the data source and table to which the form field corresponds. If you insert the form field in a document that is already linked to a data source, this page becomes invisible.
-Data source -Specifies the data source that contains the desired table. -Table -Specifies the desired table. +Data source +Specifies the data source that contains the desired table. +Table +Specifies the desired table. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01170802.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01170802.xhp index 6a2b00b9c5..f6f4ee61fb 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01170802.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01170802.xhp @@ -29,8 +29,8 @@
-Table Element Wizard: Field Selection -Specifies which fields in the table control field should be displayed. +Table Element Wizard: Field Selection +Specifies which fields in the table control field should be displayed.
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ -Selected Fields -Displays the data fields that are accepted into the form field. +Selected Fields +Displays the data fields that are accepted into the form field. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01170900.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01170900.xhp index c0a1bfef94..b612db84d2 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01170900.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01170900.xhp @@ -29,26 +29,26 @@ forms; Combo Box/List Box Wizard -Combo Box/List Box Wizard -If you insert a combo box or a list box in a document, a wizard starts automatically. This wizard allows you to interactively specify which information is shown. +Combo Box/List Box Wizard +If you insert a combo box or a list box in a document, a wizard starts automatically. This wizard allows you to interactively specify which information is shown.
-You can use the Wizards On/Off icon to keep the wizard from starting automatically. -The wizards for combo boxes and list boxes differ from each other in their final step. This is because the nature of control fields: - +You can use the Wizards On/Off icon to keep the wizard from starting automatically. +The wizards for combo boxes and list boxes differ from each other in their final step. This is because the nature of control fields: + List Boxes -In the case of a list box, the user selects one entry from a list of entries. These entries are saved in a database table and cannot be modified through the list box. -As a general rule, the database table that contains the visible list entries in the form is not the table on which the form is based. The list boxes in a form work by using references; that is, references to the visible list entries are located in the form table (values table) and are also entered as such in the values table if the user selects an entry from the list and saves it. Through reference values, list boxes can display data from a table linked to the current form table. Thus the List Box Wizard allows two tables of a database to be linked, so that the control field can display a detailed list of a database field that is located in a different table from the one to which the form refers. -In the other tables the required field is searched for by using the field names (ControlSource) and then the fields will be completed accordingly. If the field name is not found, the list will remain empty. When list fields contain linked columns, the first column of the other table will be used without a query being shown first. -If an article table contains, for example, the number of a supplier, the list box can use the "Supplier number" link to display the name of the supplier from the supplier table. On the Field links page the Wizard will ask you about all the settings required for this link. - +In the case of a list box, the user selects one entry from a list of entries. These entries are saved in a database table and cannot be modified through the list box. +As a general rule, the database table that contains the visible list entries in the form is not the table on which the form is based. The list boxes in a form work by using references; that is, references to the visible list entries are located in the form table (values table) and are also entered as such in the values table if the user selects an entry from the list and saves it. Through reference values, list boxes can display data from a table linked to the current form table. Thus the List Box Wizard allows two tables of a database to be linked, so that the control field can display a detailed list of a database field that is located in a different table from the one to which the form refers. +In the other tables the required field is searched for by using the field names (ControlSource) and then the fields will be completed accordingly. If the field name is not found, the list will remain empty. When list fields contain linked columns, the first column of the other table will be used without a query being shown first. +If an article table contains, for example, the number of a supplier, the list box can use the "Supplier number" link to display the name of the supplier from the supplier table. On the Field links page the Wizard will ask you about all the settings required for this link. + Combo Boxes -In the case of combo boxes, users can select one entry from the list entries or enter text themselves. The entries, which are offered as a list from which users can select, may originate from any database table. The entries that users select or enter so that they can be saved can be saved either in the form only, or in a database. If they are saved in a database, they will be written to the database table on which the form is based. -Combo boxes can display the data of any table. A direct link between the current form table and the table whose values are to be displayed in the combo box (list table) is not required. Combo boxes do not work with references. If the user enters or selects a value and saves it, the value actually displayed will be entered in the form table. As there is no link between the form table and the list table, the Field Link table does not appear here. -In the case of a list box, you select entries from the list, and these are saved in the list table. In the case of a combo box, you can add additional text that can be written to the current database table of the form (values table) and stored there as desired. For this function, the Combo Box Wizard has the Data Processing page as the last page, whereas in the case of list boxes this page does not exist. Here you can enter whether and where text that has been entered is to be saved in the values table. +In the case of combo boxes, users can select one entry from the list entries or enter text themselves. The entries, which are offered as a list from which users can select, may originate from any database table. The entries that users select or enter so that they can be saved can be saved either in the form only, or in a database. If they are saved in a database, they will be written to the database table on which the form is based. +Combo boxes can display the data of any table. A direct link between the current form table and the table whose values are to be displayed in the combo box (list table) is not required. Combo boxes do not work with references. If the user enters or selects a value and saves it, the value actually displayed will be entered in the form table. As there is no link between the form table and the list table, the Field Link table does not appear here. +In the case of a list box, you select entries from the list, and these are saved in the list table. In the case of a combo box, you can add additional text that can be written to the current database table of the form (values table) and stored there as desired. For this function, the Combo Box Wizard has the Data Processing page as the last page, whereas in the case of list boxes this page does not exist. Here you can enter whether and where text that has been entered is to be saved in the values table. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01170901.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01170901.xhp index 18b95bc9a4..6d70be80b4 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01170901.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01170901.xhp @@ -32,16 +32,16 @@
-Combo Box / List Box Wizard: Table Selection -Specifies a table from the available database tables that contains the data field whose content should be displayed as a list entry. +Combo Box / List Box Wizard: Table Selection +Specifies a table from the available database tables that contains the data field whose content should be displayed as a list entry.
-For list boxes, a table that can be linked with the current form table is indicated. The link table must have at least one field in common with the table of the current form. This makes it possible to establish an unambiguous reference. -For combo boxes, there must be a relationship between the form table and the table containing the data to be displayed in the combo box. -Table -In the Table field, select the table containing the data field whose content should be displayed in the control field. -The table given here appears in the Control properties as an element of an SQL statement in the List Contents field. +For list boxes, a table that can be linked with the current form table is indicated. The link table must have at least one field in common with the table of the current form. This makes it possible to establish an unambiguous reference. +For combo boxes, there must be a relationship between the form table and the table containing the data to be displayed in the combo box. +Table +In the Table field, select the table containing the data field whose content should be displayed in the control field. +The table given here appears in the Control properties as an element of an SQL statement in the List Contents field. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01170902.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01170902.xhp index 2e8f622d73..e17c8ab985 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01170902.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01170902.xhp @@ -30,16 +30,16 @@
-Combo/List Box Wizard: Field Selection -Select the data field specified in the table on the previous page, whose contents should be displayed in the list or combo box. +Combo/List Box Wizard: Field Selection +Select the data field specified in the table on the previous page, whose contents should be displayed in the list or combo box.
-Available Fields -Displays all table fields chosen on the previous Wizard page. -Display Field -Specifies the field whose data are to be shown in the combo or list boxes. -The field name given here appears in the Control properties as an element of an SQL statement in the List Contents field. +Available Fields +Displays all table fields chosen on the previous Wizard page. +Display Field +Specifies the field whose data are to be shown in the combo or list boxes. +The field name given here appears in the Control properties as an element of an SQL statement in the List Contents field. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01170903.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01170903.xhp index 7eb914ea89..85396a4205 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01170903.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01170903.xhp @@ -31,18 +31,18 @@
-List Box Wizard: Field Link -Indicates through which fields tables of values and list tables are linked. +List Box Wizard: Field Link +Indicates through which fields tables of values and list tables are linked.
-The value table is the table of the current form where the list field is inserted. The list table is the table whose data is to be shown in the list field. Both tables must be linked over a mutual data field. These links are to be entered on this page of the wizard. The field names must not necessarily be the same (this depends upon how the field names are defined in both tables), but both fields must have the same field type. +The value table is the table of the current form where the list field is inserted. The list table is the table whose data is to be shown in the list field. Both tables must be linked over a mutual data field. These links are to be entered on this page of the wizard. The field names must not necessarily be the same (this depends upon how the field names are defined in both tables), but both fields must have the same field type.
-Value table field -Specifies the current form data field which should be related to a field in the linked table. In addition, click the desired data field in the list field below. -In Control - Properties, the specified field will appear as an entry in the Data tab page under Data field. -List table field -Specifies the linked table data field, which is related to the specified value table field. In addition, click the data field in the lower list field. -In Control - Properties, the specified field will appear in the Data tab page of a SQL statement under List Contents. +Value table field +Specifies the current form data field which should be related to a field in the linked table. In addition, click the desired data field in the list field below. +In Control - Properties, the specified field will appear as an entry in the Data tab page under Data field. +List table field +Specifies the linked table data field, which is related to the specified value table field. In addition, click the data field in the lower list field. +In Control - Properties, the specified field will appear in the Data tab page of a SQL statement under List Contents. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01170904.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01170904.xhp index 029116abe6..2d185e053b 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01170904.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01170904.xhp @@ -31,21 +31,21 @@
-Combo Box Wizard: Database Field -With the combination fields, you can either save the value of a field in a database or display this value in a form. +Combo Box Wizard: Database Field +With the combination fields, you can either save the value of a field in a database or display this value in a form.
-The user values entered in the combination field or selected in the list can be saved in the database table that is accessed in the form. Note that the saving of values in another table is not possible. If the values are not to be saved in a database, they will be saved only in the form. This is especially helpful in HTML forms, where the user's entered or selected values are to be assigned to a server. +The user values entered in the combination field or selected in the list can be saved in the database table that is accessed in the form. Note that the saving of values in another table is not possible. If the values are not to be saved in a database, they will be saved only in the form. This is especially helpful in HTML forms, where the user's entered or selected values are to be assigned to a server.
-Do you want to save the value in a database field? -Two options are available for this question: -Yes, I want to save it in the following database field -Specifies whether the user's entered or selected combination field value should be saved in a database field. Several database table fields are offered which can be accessed in the current form. -In Control - Properties the selected field appears as an entry in the Data tab page under Data field. -List field -Specifies the data field where the combination field value should be saved. -No, I only want to save the value in the form -Specifies that the value of this combination field will not be written in the database and will only be saved in the form. +Do you want to save the value in a database field? +Two options are available for this question: +Yes, I want to save it in the following database field +Specifies whether the user's entered or selected combination field value should be saved in a database field. Several database table fields are offered which can be accessed in the current form. +In Control - Properties the selected field appears as an entry in the Data tab page under Data field. +List field +Specifies the data field where the combination field value should be saved. +No, I only want to save the value in the form +Specifies that the value of this combination field will not be written in the database and will only be saved in the form. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01171000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01171000.xhp index cd9cb9bd7a..7089ddbe73 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01171000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01171000.xhp @@ -39,14 +39,14 @@ -Open in Design Mode -Opens forms in Design Mode so that the form can be edited. +Open in Design Mode +Opens forms in Design Mode so that the form can be edited.
-You cannot activate the controls of the form or edit contents of database records in Design Mode. However, you can change the position and size of the controls, edit other properties, and add or delete controls in Design Mode. +You cannot activate the controls of the form or edit contents of database records in Design Mode. However, you can change the position and size of the controls, edit other properties, and add or delete controls in Design Mode.
-After you have finished editing your form, right-click "Forms" in the Form Navigator and deselect Open in Design Mode. Save your form when you are finished. -If the form document is write-protected, the Open in Design Mode command is ignored. +After you have finished editing your form, right-click "Forms" in the Form Navigator and deselect Open in Design Mode. Save your form when you are finished. +If the form document is write-protected, the Open in Design Mode command is ignored. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01171100.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01171100.xhp index ae2ec3e267..9d67d4bd48 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01171100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01171100.xhp @@ -33,12 +33,12 @@
-Wizards On/Off -Specifies whether to start the wizard automatically when inserting a new control. This setting applies globally to all documents. +Wizards On/Off +Specifies whether to start the wizard automatically when inserting a new control. This setting applies globally to all documents.
-There are wizards for inserting a list box or combo box, a table element and group boxes. +There are wizards for inserting a list box or combo box, a table element and group boxes. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01171200.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01171200.xhp index a7320bec6c..21da0066f6 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01171200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01171200.xhp @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ UFI: removed help ids -Display Grid +Display Grid @@ -44,12 +44,12 @@ - + Icon -Display Grid +Display Grid
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01171300.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01171300.xhp index e52a5bf672..2f8619e9c3 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01171300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01171300.xhp @@ -27,18 +27,18 @@ -Snap to Grid -Specifies whether to move frames, drawing elements, and controls only between grid points. +Snap to Grid +Specifies whether to move frames, drawing elements, and controls only between grid points.
- + Icon -Snap to Grid +Snap to Grid
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01220000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01220000.xhp index 4fa49ccb7b..18cde8253a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01220000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01220000.xhp @@ -28,10 +28,10 @@ -You can also call the Navigator by selecting View - Navigator +You can also call the Navigator by selecting View - Navigator View - Navigator View - Navigator View - Navigator @@ -40,12 +40,12 @@ - + Icon -Navigator On/Off +Navigator On/Off
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/01230000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/01230000.xhp index 805ac6bc10..2cb85cbd40 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/01230000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/01230000.xhp @@ -33,10 +33,10 @@
-Styles and Formatting -Specifies whether to show or hide the Styles and Formatting window, which is where you can assign and organize Styles. +Styles and Formatting +Specifies whether to show or hide the Styles and Formatting window, which is where you can assign and organize Styles.
-Each $[officename] application has its own Styles and Formatting window. Hence there are separate windows for text documents +Each $[officename] application has its own Styles and Formatting window. Hence there are separate windows for text documents text documents, for spreadsheets spreadsheets and for presentations/drawing documents presentations/drawing documents @@ -45,12 +45,12 @@ - + Icon -Styles and Formatting +Styles and Formatting
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/02020000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/02020000.xhp index 696c7861bb..fcf99bd336 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/02020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/02020000.xhp @@ -31,34 +31,34 @@ alternative fonts characters; alternative fonts - + -Font Name -Allows you to select a font name from the list or enter a font name directly. -You can enter several fonts, separated by semicolons. $[officename] uses each named font in succession if the previous fonts are not available. +Font Name +Allows you to select a font name from the list or enter a font name directly. +You can enter several fonts, separated by semicolons. $[officename] uses each named font in succession if the previous fonts are not available.
-Any font changes apply to the selected text or word in which the cursor is positioned. If no text has been selected, the font applies to text typed afterwards. +Any font changes apply to the selected text or word in which the cursor is positioned. If no text has been selected, the font applies to text typed afterwards. The last five font names that have been selected are shown in the top part of the combo box.
- + Icon - Font Name + Font Name
- In $[officename] you see the available fonts only if a printer is installed as the default printer in your system. In order to install a printer as the default printer please refer to your operating system documentation. -You can see the name of the fonts formatted in their respective font if you mark the Preview in fonts lists field in $[officename] - View in the Options dialog box. + In $[officename] you see the available fonts only if a printer is installed as the default printer in your system. In order to install a printer as the default printer please refer to your operating system documentation. +You can see the name of the fonts formatted in their respective font if you mark the Preview in fonts lists field in $[officename] - View in the Options dialog box. -If you receive an error message that states that certain fonts have not been found, you can install them with $[officename] Setup in the Repair mode if it is a $[officename] font. +If you receive an error message that states that certain fonts have not been found, you can install them with $[officename] Setup in the Repair mode if it is a $[officename] font. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/02030000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/02030000.xhp index 333d156ad2..f3452b9329 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/02030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/02030000.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Font Size - Allows you to choose between different font sizes from the list, or to enter a size manually. + Font Size + Allows you to choose between different font sizes from the list, or to enter a size manually.
@@ -44,11 +44,11 @@ - Icon + Icon - Font Size + Font Size @@ -60,11 +60,11 @@ - Icon + Icon - Font Size + Font Size diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/02040000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/02040000.xhp index 46e1a478e3..24e89fe698 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/02040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/02040000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Text running from left to right - Specifies the horizontal direction of the text. +Text running from left to right + Specifies the horizontal direction of the text.
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Text direction from left to right + Text direction from left to right diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/02050000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/02050000.xhp index 7ff360d5a2..64132ba1f8 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/02050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/02050000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Text running from top to bottom - Specifies the vertical direction of the text. +Text running from top to bottom + Specifies the vertical direction of the text.
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Text direction from top to bottom + Text direction from top to bottom diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/02130000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/02130000.xhp index 55c58c08f0..4ca591ef81 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/02130000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/02130000.xhp @@ -31,25 +31,25 @@
-Decrease Indent -Click the Decrease Indent icon to reduce the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and set it to the previous default tab position. +Decrease Indent +Click the Decrease Indent icon to reduce the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and set it to the previous default tab position.
-If you previously increased the indentation for several collectively selected paragraphs, this command can decrease the indentation for all of the selected paragraphs. +If you previously increased the indentation for several collectively selected paragraphs, this command can decrease the indentation for all of the selected paragraphs. The cell content refers to the current value under Format - Cell - Alignment.
- + Icon -Decrease Indent +Decrease Indent
-If you click the Decrease Indent icon while holding down the CommandCtrl key, the indent for the selected paragraph is moved by the default tab stop that has been set under %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General in the Options dialog box. +If you click the Decrease Indent icon while holding down the CommandCtrl key, the indent for the selected paragraph is moved by the default tab stop that has been set under %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General in the Options dialog box. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/02140000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/02140000.xhp index 046d4d6334..3da3e8314c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/02140000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/02140000.xhp @@ -31,62 +31,62 @@ paragraphs; increasing indents of -Increase Indent - Click the Increase Indent icon to increase the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and set it to the next default tab position. +Increase Indent + Click the Increase Indent icon to increase the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and set it to the next default tab position.
- If several paragraphs are selected, the indentation of all selected paragraphs is increased. + If several paragraphs are selected, the indentation of all selected paragraphs is increased. The cell content refers to the current value under Format - Cell - Alignment.
- + Icon - Increase Indent + Increase Indent
- Click the Increase Indent icon while holding down the CommandCtrl key to move the indenting of the selected paragraph by the default tab distance set under %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General in the Options dialog box. - Example: - The indents of two paragraphs are moved with the Increase Indent function to a standard tab distance of 2 cm: + Click the Increase Indent icon while holding down the CommandCtrl key to move the indenting of the selected paragraph by the default tab distance set under %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General in the Options dialog box. + Example: + The indents of two paragraphs are moved with the Increase Indent function to a standard tab distance of 2 cm: - Original indent + Original indent - Indent increased + Indent increased - Indent increased by the amount with the Command keyCtrl key + Indent increased by the amount with the Command keyCtrl key - 0.25 cm + 0.25 cm - 2 cm + 2 cm - 2.25 cm + 2.25 cm - 0.5 cm + 0.5 cm - 2 cm + 2 cm - 2.5 cm + 2.5 cm
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/02160000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/02160000.xhp index 33aee49c2f..2963e57b8d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/02160000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/02160000.xhp @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ - + Icon @@ -52,24 +52,24 @@
-To Apply HighlightingUFI: see #112387# +To Apply HighlightingUFI: see #112387# On the Formatting bar, click the Highlight Color icon. To change the highlighting color, click the arrow next to the Highlight Color icon, and then click the color that you want. -Select the text that you want to highlight. -To apply highlighting to a single word, double-click the word. +Select the text that you want to highlight. +To apply highlighting to a single word, double-click the word. -To turn off highlighting, press Esc. +To turn off highlighting, press Esc. -To Remove Highlighting +To Remove Highlighting -Select the highlighted text. +Select the highlighted text. On the Formatting bar, click the arrow next to the Highlight Color icon, and then click No Fill. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/02170000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/02170000.xhp index 7d413d335a..88710ccc43 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/02170000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/02170000.xhp @@ -29,8 +29,8 @@
-Background Color -Click to open a toolbar where you can click a background color for a paragraph. The color is applied to the background of the current paragraph or the selected paragraphs. +Background Color +Click to open a toolbar where you can click a background color for a paragraph. The color is applied to the background of the current paragraph or the selected paragraphs.
@@ -38,12 +38,12 @@ - + Icon -Background Color +Background Color
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/03110000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/03110000.xhp index da28c63b05..f5b033b29e 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/03110000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/03110000.xhp @@ -33,24 +33,24 @@
-Increase Spacing -Click the Increase Spacing icon to increase the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph. +Increase Spacing +Click the Increase Spacing icon to increase the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph.
- + Icon -Increase Spacing +Increase Spacing
-You can make additional adjustments to the spacing by selecting Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing +You can make additional adjustments to the spacing by selecting Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/03120000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/03120000.xhp index 0b34157112..9301f28da6 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/03120000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/03120000.xhp @@ -33,24 +33,24 @@
-Decrease Spacing -Click the Decrease Spacing icon to decrease the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph. +Decrease Spacing +Click the Decrease Spacing icon to decrease the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph.
- + Icon -Decrease Spacing +Decrease Spacing
-You can make additional adjustments to the spacing by selecting Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing +You can make additional adjustments to the spacing by selecting Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/03130000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/03130000.xhp index 3e672d9ef8..d37990a46e 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/03130000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/03130000.xhp @@ -33,29 +33,29 @@
-Borders -Click the Borders icon to open the Borders toolbar, where you can modify the border of a sheet area or an object. +Borders +Click the Borders icon to open the Borders toolbar, where you can modify the border of a sheet area or an object.
- + This object can be the border of a text frame, a graphic or a table. The icon will only be visible if a graphic, table, object or frame has been selected. -To apply a particular type of border to a single cell, position the cursor in the cell, open the Border toolbar and select a border. +To apply a particular type of border to a single cell, position the cursor in the cell, open the Border toolbar and select a border. Whenever you insert graphics or tables, they already have a complete border. To remove that border, select the graphic object or the entire table and click the "no border" icon on the Border toolbar.
- + Icon -Borders +Borders
-Further information can be found in the Help in Borders. You can also find information on how to format a text table with the Borders icon. +Further information can be found in the Help in Borders. You can also find information on how to format a text table with the Borders icon.
UFI: moved border_object into Writer switch diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/03140000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/03140000.xhp index 8babbea8d0..56666f4d10 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/03140000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/03140000.xhp @@ -30,25 +30,25 @@
-Line Style -Click this icon to open the Line Style toolbar, where you can modify the border line style. +Line Style +Click this icon to open the Line Style toolbar, where you can modify the border line style.
-This border can be the border of a frame, graphic or table. The Line Style icon will only be visible if a graphic, table, chart object or frame has been selected. +This border can be the border of a frame, graphic or table. The Line Style icon will only be visible if a graphic, table, chart object or frame has been selected.
- + Icon -Line Style +Line Style
-For more information, see the Borders section of the Help. +For more information, see the Borders section of the Help. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/03150000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/03150000.xhp index 462ab69fad..9e5635ae92 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/03150000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/03150000.xhp @@ -29,24 +29,24 @@
-Border Color -Click the Line Color (of the border) icon to open the Border Color toolbar, which enables you to change the border color of an object. +Border Color +Click the Line Color (of the border) icon to open the Border Color toolbar, which enables you to change the border color of an object.
- + Icon -Line Color (of the border) +Line Color (of the border)
-For more information, see the Borders section in the Help. +For more information, see the Borders section in the Help. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/03200000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/03200000.xhp index ac193345eb..fd32b6d562 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/03200000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/03200000.xhp @@ -32,12 +32,12 @@ -Change Anchor +Change Anchor
-Allows you to switch between anchoring options. +Allows you to switch between anchoring options. The Change Anchor icon is only visible when an object such as a graphic or control field or frame is selected. -Further information about the anchoring is contained in the Anchoring Help section. +Further information about the anchoring is contained in the Anchoring Help section. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/04210000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/04210000.xhp index 04bfb8603e..52d7048d88 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/04210000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/04210000.xhp @@ -31,13 +31,13 @@ Optimize Size -Opens a toolbar that contains functions for optimizing the rows and columns in a table. +Opens a toolbar that contains functions for optimizing the rows and columns in a table.
- + Icon @@ -48,17 +48,17 @@
-You can select from the following functions: +You can select from the following functions: -Optimal Height +Optimal Height -Optimal Column Width +Optimal Column Width diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/05020000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/05020000.xhp index 8bf5afaad8..c0c1e56eed 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/05020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/05020000.xhp @@ -33,20 +33,20 @@
-Arrow Style -Opens the Arrowheads toolbar. Use the symbols shown to define the style for the end of the selected line. +Arrow Style +Opens the Arrowheads toolbar. Use the symbols shown to define the style for the end of the selected line.
-The Arrow Style icon is only displayed when you create a drawing with the drawing functions. For more information, see the Line Styles section of the Help. +The Arrow Style icon is only displayed when you create a drawing with the drawing functions. For more information, see the Line Styles section of the Help.
- + Icon -Arrow Style +Arrow Style
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/05090000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/05090000.xhp index 65f5b1f186..dad3cb4ab4 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/05090000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/05090000.xhp @@ -33,29 +33,29 @@
-Rotate -Rotates the selected object. +Rotate +Rotates the selected object.
-Select an object and click the Rotate icon on the Drawing toolbar. +Select an object and click the Rotate icon on the Drawing toolbar. Select an object and click the Rotate icon on the Drawing toolbar. Select an object and click the Rotate icon on the Drawing Object Properties toolbar. Drag a corner handle of the object in the direction you want to rotate it.
- + Icon -Rotate +Rotate
-Format - Position and Size - Rotate. +Format - Position and Size - Rotate.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/05110000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/05110000.xhp index 06809287a5..16ea07fcfa 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/05110000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/05110000.xhp @@ -33,20 +33,20 @@
-Alignment -Modifies the alignment of selected objects. +Alignment +Modifies the alignment of selected objects.
- + Icon -Alignment +Alignment
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/06050000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/06050000.xhp index ab9d31fb4e..2d3bab9cc0 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/06050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/06050000.xhp @@ -35,23 +35,23 @@ -Demote One Level +Demote One Level Demote -Moves the selected paragraph down one level in a numbering or bullets hierarchy.UFI: need two files for numbering and outline, also for 06060000.xhp +Moves the selected paragraph down one level in a numbering or bullets hierarchy.UFI: need two files for numbering and outline, also for 06060000.xhp
-The Demote One Level icon is on the Bullets and Numbering bar, which appears when the cursor is positioned on a numbering or bullets item. +The Demote One Level icon is on the Bullets and Numbering bar, which appears when the cursor is positioned on a numbering or bullets item. The Demote icon is on the Text Formatting bar, which appears when working in the outline view.
- + Icon -Demote One Level +Demote One Level Demote diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/06060000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/06060000.xhp index 1ad69a20c6..563337d0b7 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/06060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/06060000.xhp @@ -35,23 +35,23 @@ -Promote One Level +Promote One Level Promote -Moves the selected paragraph up one level in the numbering or bullets hierarchy. +Moves the selected paragraph up one level in the numbering or bullets hierarchy. -The Promote One Level icon is on the Bullets and Numbering bar, which appears when the cursor is positioned on a numbering or bullets item. +The Promote One Level icon is on the Bullets and Numbering bar, which appears when the cursor is positioned on a numbering or bullets item. The Promote icon is on the Text Formatting bar, which appears when working in the outline view.
- + Icon -Promote One Level +Promote One Level Promote diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/06100000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/06100000.xhp index ac8a0e5494..68d1a57dcb 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/06100000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/06100000.xhp @@ -35,23 +35,23 @@ -Move Up -Positions the selected paragraph before the one above it. +Move Up +Positions the selected paragraph before the one above it. -If you have numbered paragraphs and click the Move Up icon, the numbers will be adjusted to the current order. The Move Up icon is only visible when the cursor is positioned in a bulleted or numbered list. +If you have numbered paragraphs and click the Move Up icon, the numbers will be adjusted to the current order. The Move Up icon is only visible when the cursor is positioned in a bulleted or numbered list. The Move Up icon appears on the Text Formatting Bar when you use the outline view. -This function can be called by pressing CommandCtrl+Up Arrow. +This function can be called by pressing CommandCtrl+Up Arrow.
- + Icon -Move Up +Move Up
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/06110000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/06110000.xhp index df18818e8d..33c92833f4 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/06110000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/06110000.xhp @@ -35,23 +35,23 @@ -Move Down -Positions the selected paragraph after the one below it. +Move Down +Positions the selected paragraph after the one below it.
-If you have numbered paragraphs and click the Move Down icon, the numbers will be adjusted to the current order. The Move Down icon is only visible when the cursor is positioned in a bulleted or numbered list. +If you have numbered paragraphs and click the Move Down icon, the numbers will be adjusted to the current order. The Move Down icon is only visible when the cursor is positioned in a bulleted or numbered list. The Move Down icon appears on the Text Formatting Bar when you use the outline view. -This function can be called by pressing CommandCtrl+Down Arrow. +This function can be called by pressing CommandCtrl+Down Arrow.
- + Icon -Move Down +Move Down
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/06120000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/06120000.xhp index d968d6f19e..2fc743b93c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/06120000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/06120000.xhp @@ -33,27 +33,27 @@
-Bullets On/Off -Assigns bullet points to the selected paragraphs, or removes them from bulleted paragraphs. +Bullets On/Off +Assigns bullet points to the selected paragraphs, or removes them from bulleted paragraphs.
-Bullet options such as type and position are defined in the Bullets and Numbering dialog. To open this dialog, click the Bullets and Numbering icon on the Bullets and Numbering Bar +Bullet options such as type and position are defined in the Bullets and Numbering dialog. To open this dialog, click the Bullets and Numbering icon on the Bullets and Numbering Bar -Bullet options such as type and position are defined in the Bullets and Numbering dialog. To open this dialog, click the Bullets and Numbering icon on the Text Formatting Bar. +Bullet options such as type and position are defined in the Bullets and Numbering dialog. To open this dialog, click the Bullets and Numbering icon on the Text Formatting Bar. -In the Web Layout, some numbering/bullet options are not available. +In the Web Layout, some numbering/bullet options are not available. -The distance between the text and the left text frame and the position of the bullets can be determined in the dialog under Format - Paragraph by entering the left indent and the first-line indent. +The distance between the text and the left text frame and the position of the bullets can be determined in the dialog under Format - Paragraph by entering the left indent and the first-line indent.
- + Icon -Bullets On/Off +Bullets On/Off
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/07010000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/07010000.xhp index dd47f95822..837e823880 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/07010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/07010000.xhp @@ -29,8 +29,8 @@
-Load URL -Loads a document specified by an entered URL. You can type a new URL, edit an URL, or select one from the list. Displays the full path of the current document. +Load URL +Loads a document specified by an entered URL. You can type a new URL, edit an URL, or select one from the list. Displays the full path of the current document. Enable Load URL with the Visible Buttons command (right-click the toolbar).i73505
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/07060000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/07060000.xhp index 479b86bc15..44dfa504ec 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/07060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/07060000.xhp @@ -34,11 +34,11 @@
reloading; documentsdocuments; reloadingloading; reloading -Reload - Replaces the current document with the last saved version. +Reload + Replaces the current document with the last saved version.
- Any changes made after the last save will be lost. + Any changes made after the last save will be lost.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/07070000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/07070000.xhp index 8c174d5189..43d3e46017 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/07070000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/07070000.xhp @@ -43,20 +43,20 @@ mw inserted "Edit File icon" entry -Edit File -Enables you to edit a read-only document or database table. Use the Edit File icon to activate or deactivate the edit mode. +Edit File +Enables you to edit a read-only document or database table. Use the Edit File icon to activate or deactivate the edit mode.
- + Icon -Edit File +Edit File
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ -You can enable a selection cursor in a read-only text document or in the Help. Choose Edit - Select Text or open the context menu of a read-only document and choose Select Text. The selection cursor does not blink. +You can enable a selection cursor in a read-only text document or in the Help. Choose Edit - Select Text or open the context menu of a read-only document and choose Select Text. The selection cursor does not blink.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/07070100.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/07070100.xhp index 78934d6a19..3aab6011c4 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/07070100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/07070100.xhp @@ -32,29 +32,29 @@
-Edit Data +Edit Data read-only documents; database tables on/off protected database tables data; read-only -Turns the edit mode for the current database table on or off. +Turns the edit mode for the current database table on or off.
- + Icon -Edit Data +Edit Data
-Editing Databases in Networks -To make changes in a database used by more than one person, you must have the appropriate access rights. When you edit an external database, there is no intermediate storage by $[officename] of the changes made. They are sent directly to the database. +Editing Databases in Networks +To make changes in a database used by more than one person, you must have the appropriate access rights. When you edit an external database, there is no intermediate storage by $[officename] of the changes made. They are sent directly to the database. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/07070200.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/07070200.xhp index a3d7f45418..338911f1f4 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/07070200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/07070200.xhp @@ -31,12 +31,12 @@
-Save Record +Save Record records; saving -Saves the current database table record. The Save Record icon is found on the Table Data bar +Saves the current database table record. The Save Record icon is found on the Table Data bar
-Changes to the contents of a record are automatically saved as soon as you select another record. To save changes without selecting another record, click the Save Record icon. +Changes to the contents of a record are automatically saved as soon as you select another record. To save changes without selecting another record, click the Save Record icon. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/07080000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/07080000.xhp index 3769e32484..72118bf3ba 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/07080000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/07080000.xhp @@ -30,8 +30,8 @@
-Stop Loading -Click to interrupt the current loading process, CommandCtrl-click to interrupt all loading processes. +Stop Loading +Click to interrupt the current loading process, CommandCtrl-click to interrupt all loading processes.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/07090000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/07090000.xhp index fbcb719704..3aa101deca 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/07090000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/07090000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Export Directly as PDF - Exports the current document directly as PDF. No settings dialog is shown. +Export Directly as PDF + Exports the current document directly as PDF. No settings dialog is shown.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/08010000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/08010000.xhp index 962f4725f4..d201ccbd73 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/08010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/08010000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Document Information - Displays information about the active %PRODUCTNAME Basic document. The names of the document, the library, and the module are displayed, separated by dots. +Document Information + Displays information about the active %PRODUCTNAME Basic document. The names of the document, the library, and the module are displayed, separated by dots.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/08020000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/08020000.xhp index e67a6bf33e..6871e0094d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/08020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/08020000.xhp @@ -35,8 +35,8 @@
-Position in Document -Displays the current cursor position in the %PRODUCTNAME Basic document. The row number is specified, then the column number. +Position in Document +Displays the current cursor position in the %PRODUCTNAME Basic document. The row number is specified, then the column number.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/09070000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/09070000.xhp index 9a0a99df32..058cee1ae4 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/09070000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/09070000.xhp @@ -32,55 +32,53 @@ -Hyperlink +Hyperlink - Opens a dialog that enables you to create and edit hyperlinks. + Opens a dialog that enables you to create and edit hyperlinks.
- + Icon - Hyperlink Dialog + Hyperlink Dialog
-Select the type of hyperlink to be inserted. +Select the type of hyperlink to be inserted. -Opens the hyperlink in your default web browser. +Opens the hyperlink in your default web browser. -Opens the Hyperlink dialog. +Opens the Hyperlink dialog. -Copies the URL to the clipboard. +Copies the URL to the clipboard. -Removes the hyperlink, leaving plain text. +Removes the hyperlink, leaving plain text. -Apply - Applies the data to your document. +Apply + Applies the data to your document. -Close - Closes the dialog without saving. - Help - Opens the Help. +Close + Closes the dialog without saving. + Help + Opens the Help. -Reset - Resets the entries in the dialog to their original state. +Reset + Resets the entries in the dialog to their original state.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/10010000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/10010000.xhp index 928e4ff902..6fd0913e0b 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/10010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/10010000.xhp @@ -35,8 +35,8 @@
-Previous Page - Moves back to the previous page in the document. This function is only active when you select the Print Preview function on the File menu. +Previous Page + Moves back to the previous page in the document. This function is only active when you select the Print Preview function on the File menu.
@@ -45,10 +45,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Previous Page + Previous Page diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/10020000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/10020000.xhp index 6dfb4d43da..5ab7031ccc 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/10020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/10020000.xhp @@ -35,8 +35,8 @@
-Next Page - Moves forward to the next page in the document. This function is only active when you select the Print Preview function on the File menu. +Next Page + Moves forward to the next page in the document. This function is only active when you select the Print Preview function on the File menu.
@@ -45,10 +45,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Next Page + Next Page diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/10030000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/10030000.xhp index 1ed44a2fba..24cc0a67ac 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/10030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/10030000.xhp @@ -35,8 +35,8 @@
- To Document Begin First Page - Moves to the first page of the document. This function is only active when you select the Print Preview function on the File menu. + To Document Begin First Page + Moves to the first page of the document. This function is only active when you select the Print Preview function on the File menu.
@@ -45,10 +45,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - To Document Begin First Page + To Document Begin First Page diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/10040000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/10040000.xhp index 07a4e028b5..a3b7abb25f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/10040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/10040000.xhp @@ -35,8 +35,8 @@
- To Document End Last Page - Moves to the last page of the document. This function is only active when you select the Print Preview function on the File menu. + To Document End Last Page + Moves to the last page of the document. This function is only active when you select the Print Preview function on the File menu.
@@ -45,10 +45,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - To Document End Last Page + To Document End Last Page diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/10100000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/10100000.xhp index cc37c1214b..efbdcac207 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/10100000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/10100000.xhp @@ -30,12 +30,12 @@
-Close Window -Closes the current window. Choose Window - Close Window, or press CommandCtrl+F4. In the print preview of $[officename] Writer and Calc, you can close the current window by clicking the Close Preview button. +Close Window +Closes the current window. Choose Window - Close Window, or press CommandCtrl+F4. In the print preview of $[officename] Writer and Calc, you can close the current window by clicking the Close Preview button.
-If additional views of the current document were opened by Window - New Window, this command will close only the current view. +If additional views of the current document were opened by Window - New Window, this command will close only the current view.
-Close the current document +Close the current document
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp index 3faa4e3ad7..383ddcd42f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp @@ -30,37 +30,37 @@
-Explorer On/Off -Turns on and off the view of the data source explorer. The Explorer On/Off icon is visible on the Table Data bar. +Explorer On/Off +Turns on and off the view of the data source explorer. The Explorer On/Off icon is visible on the Table Data bar.
- + Icon -Explorer On/Off +Explorer On/Off
-In the data source explorer you see the data sources registered in $[officename] with their queries and tables. - +In the data source explorer you see the data sources registered in $[officename] with their queries and tables. + Establishing a connection - As soon as you select an individual table or query, a connection to the data source is established. Once the connection is opened, the name of the data source, the Queries or Tables entry, and the name of the query or table selected is shown in bold type.
-Closes the connection to the data source. See %PRODUCTNAME Base - Connections in the Options dialog box. +Closes the connection to the data source. See %PRODUCTNAME Base - Connections in the Options dialog box. -To rename an entry, call this command and enter the new name. You can also do this by selecting the entry and pressing F2. The database must support renaming, otherwise this command is not enabled. +To rename an entry, call this command and enter the new name. You can also do this by selecting the entry and pressing F2. The database must support renaming, otherwise this command is not enabled. -Opens the selected database file for editing.i66574 new command "Database Registrations" / but name in UI is "Registered databases" +Opens the selected database file for editing.i66574 new command "Database Registrations" / but name in UI is "Registered databases" -Opens a dialog to add/edit/remove a database file from the list of registered databases. The same dialog opens by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases in the Options dialog box. +Opens a dialog to add/edit/remove a database file from the list of registered databases. The same dialog opens by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases in the Options dialog box.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/12010000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/12010000.xhp index cadb784062..083e427d35 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/12010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/12010000.xhp @@ -30,26 +30,26 @@
-Sort Ascending -Sorts the data of the selected field in ascending order. Text fields are sorted alphabetically, numerical fields are sorted by number.UFI: Help ID .uno:Sortup is found in text/shared/explorer/database/11090000.xhp so I deleted it here +Sort Ascending +Sorts the data of the selected field in ascending order. Text fields are sorted alphabetically, numerical fields are sorted by number.UFI: Help ID .uno:Sortup is found in text/shared/explorer/database/11090000.xhp so I deleted it here
- + Icon -Sort Ascending +Sort Ascending
-Data of the currently selected field are always sorted. A field is always selected as soon as you place the cursor in the field. To sort within tables, you can also click the corresponding column header. +Data of the currently selected field are always sorted. A field is always selected as soon as you place the cursor in the field. To sort within tables, you can also click the corresponding column header. -To sort more than one data field, choose Data - Sort, then choose the Sort Criteria tab, where you can combine several sort criteria. +To sort more than one data field, choose Data - Sort, then choose the Sort Criteria tab, where you can combine several sort criteria. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/12020000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/12020000.xhp index 03f222a055..8e17b06a6a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/12020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/12020000.xhp @@ -31,19 +31,19 @@
-Sort Descending -Sorts the data of the selected field in descending order. Text fields are sorted alphabetically, number fields are sorted by number. +Sort Descending +Sorts the data of the selected field in descending order. Text fields are sorted alphabetically, number fields are sorted by number.
- + Icon -Sort Descending +Sort Descending
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/12030000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/12030000.xhp index b390b01442..f821135247 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/12030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/12030000.xhp @@ -31,26 +31,26 @@
-AutoFilter -Filters the records, based on the content of the currently selected data field. +AutoFilter +Filters the records, based on the content of the currently selected data field.
- + Icon -AutoFilter +AutoFilter
-Place the cursor in a field name whose content you want to filter and then click the AutoFilter icon. Only those records with content identical to the selected field name are visible. -For example, to view all the customers from New York, click a field name with the entry "New York". AutoFilter then filters all customers from New York from the database. -You can remove the current AutoFilter with the Reset Filter/Sorting icon or with Data - Filter - Reset Filter. -To filter with several field names simultaneously, click the Default Filter icon. The Default Filter dialog appears, in which you can combine several filter criteria. +Place the cursor in a field name whose content you want to filter and then click the AutoFilter icon. Only those records with content identical to the selected field name are visible. +For example, to view all the customers from New York, click a field name with the entry "New York". AutoFilter then filters all customers from New York from the database. +You can remove the current AutoFilter with the Reset Filter/Sorting icon or with Data - Filter - Reset Filter. +To filter with several field names simultaneously, click the Default Filter icon. The Default Filter dialog appears, in which you can combine several filter criteria. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/12040000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/12040000.xhp index dfa21cf676..f6fe1b2a09 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/12040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/12040000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Reset Filter/Sorting - Cancels the filter settings and displays all of the records in the current table. +Reset Filter/Sorting + Cancels the filter settings and displays all of the records in the current table.
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Reset Filter/Sorting + Reset Filter/Sorting diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/12050000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/12050000.xhp index ec414ee093..cb064b73dd 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/12050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/12050000.xhp @@ -33,33 +33,33 @@
-Refresh -Refreshes the displayed data. In a multi-user environment, refreshing the data ensures that it remains current. +Refresh +Refreshes the displayed data. In a multi-user environment, refreshing the data ensures that it remains current.
- + Icon -Refresh +Refresh
-Click the arrow next to the Refresh icon to open a submenu with the following commands: +Click the arrow next to the Refresh icon to open a submenu with the following commands: - + Refresh - Displays the refreshed contents of the database table. - + Rebuild - Rebuilds the view of the database table. Use this command when you have changed the structure of the table. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/12070000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/12070000.xhp index f5575017de..84002e6584 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/12070000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/12070000.xhp @@ -32,31 +32,31 @@ -Insert Database Columns -Inserts all fields of the marked record into the current document at the cursor position. +Insert Database Columns +Inserts all fields of the marked record into the current document at the cursor position. The icon is only visible if the current document is a text document or a spreadsheet.
- + Icon -Data to Text +Data to Text
-In the data source browser, select the record that you want to insert into the document and then click the Data to Text icon. The record is inserted in the document at the cursor position, with the contents of each individual field of the record copied to a table column. You can also select multiple records and transfer them into the document by clicking the Data to Text icon. Each individual record is then written to a new row. +In the data source browser, select the record that you want to insert into the document and then click the Data to Text icon. The record is inserted in the document at the cursor position, with the contents of each individual field of the record copied to a table column. You can also select multiple records and transfer them into the document by clicking the Data to Text icon. Each individual record is then written to a new row. -In the data source browser, select the records that you want to insert into the document and then click the Data to Text icon, or drag-and-drop data from the data source browser into the document. This opens the Insert Database Columns dialog. Select whether the data should be inserted as a table, as fields or as text. +In the data source browser, select the records that you want to insert into the document and then click the Data to Text icon, or drag-and-drop data from the data source browser into the document. This opens the Insert Database Columns dialog. Select whether the data should be inserted as a table, as fields or as text. -The preferences you set in the Insert Database Columns dialog are saved and will be active the next time the dialog is called. This save process is independent of the database and can record the preferences for a maximum of 5 databases. +The preferences you set in the Insert Database Columns dialog are saved and will be active the next time the dialog is called. This save process is independent of the database and can record the preferences for a maximum of 5 databases. -If data is inserted into the document as a table, the table properties are not saved along with the data in the document. If you select the AutoFormat function for formatting the table, $[officename] will note the name of the format template. This template will then be used automatically if you insert data as a table again, unless the preferences have been changed. +If data is inserted into the document as a table, the table properties are not saved along with the data in the document. If you select the AutoFormat function for formatting the table, $[officename] will note the name of the format template. This template will then be used automatically if you insert data as a table again, unless the preferences have been changed. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/12070100.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/12070100.xhp index a86627e698..55358498ce 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/12070100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/12070100.xhp @@ -29,48 +29,48 @@ -Table +Table database contents; inserting as tables -Inserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as a table. In the Insert Database Columns dialog, select the Table option to insert the selected data into the document as a table. In the dialog, you can decide which database fields or columns are transferred, and how the text table is formatted. -Table -In the Table area, use the arrow keys to select the columns of the database table that you want to apply to the text table. -Database columns -Specifies the database columns to be inserted into the text table. All database table columns that have not been accepted in the Table column(s) list box are listed here. The entries are sorted alphabetically. -Table column(s) -Lists all database columns to be inserted into the document. A column will be assigned to each corresponding entry in the table. The entry order in the Table column(s) list box determines the data order in the text table. ->> -Moves all listed database fields into the Table column(s) list box. All fields listed in the Table column(s) list box are inserted into the document. -> -Moves the selected database field into the Table column(s) list box. You can also double click an entry to move it to the Table column(s) list box. All fields listed in the Table column(s) list box are inserted into the document. -< -Removes the selected database field from the Table column(s) list box The removed field is not inserted into the document. -<< -Removes all database fields from the Table column(s) list box. +Inserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as a table. In the Insert Database Columns dialog, select the Table option to insert the selected data into the document as a table. In the dialog, you can decide which database fields or columns are transferred, and how the text table is formatted. +Table +In the Table area, use the arrow keys to select the columns of the database table that you want to apply to the text table. +Database columns +Specifies the database columns to be inserted into the text table. All database table columns that have not been accepted in the Table column(s) list box are listed here. The entries are sorted alphabetically. +Table column(s) +Lists all database columns to be inserted into the document. A column will be assigned to each corresponding entry in the table. The entry order in the Table column(s) list box determines the data order in the text table. +>> +Moves all listed database fields into the Table column(s) list box. All fields listed in the Table column(s) list box are inserted into the document. +> +Moves the selected database field into the Table column(s) list box. You can also double click an entry to move it to the Table column(s) list box. All fields listed in the Table column(s) list box are inserted into the document. +< +Removes the selected database field from the Table column(s) list box The removed field is not inserted into the document. +<< +Removes all database fields from the Table column(s) list box.
-Format -Specifies the format for inserting the database fields into the document. -From database -Accepts the database formats. +Format +Specifies the format for inserting the database fields into the document. +From database +Accepts the database formats. -Select -Specifies a format from the list, if the format information of certain data fields is not accepted. The formats supplied here are only available for certain database fields, such as numeric or Boolean fields. If you select a database field in text format, you will not be able to select any format from the selection list, since the text format will be automatically maintained. -If the format you want is not listed, select "Other Formats..." and define the desired format in the Number Format dialog. -The number format assigned using the selection list always refers to the database field selected in the Database columns list box. +Select +Specifies a format from the list, if the format information of certain data fields is not accepted. The formats supplied here are only available for certain database fields, such as numeric or Boolean fields. If you select a database field in text format, you will not be able to select any format from the selection list, since the text format will be automatically maintained. +If the format you want is not listed, select "Other Formats..." and define the desired format in the Number Format dialog. +The number format assigned using the selection list always refers to the database field selected in the Database columns list box.
-To insert the data into the document in the form of a table, the correct Table option must be active. You can then select a database field from the Table column(s) list box to define the formatting of the database field. The changes to the number formats will be applied to the last selection. It does not matter whether the database field was selected from the Database columns list box or from the Table column(s) list box. -Insert table heading -Specifies whether to insert a heading line for the columns in the text table. -Apply column name -Uses the field names of the database table as headings for each of the text table columns. -Create row only -Inserts an empty heading line into the text table. Using the Create row only option, you can define headings in the document, which do not correspond to the database field names. -Properties -Opens the Table Format +To insert the data into the document in the form of a table, the correct Table option must be active. You can then select a database field from the Table column(s) list box to define the formatting of the database field. The changes to the number formats will be applied to the last selection. It does not matter whether the database field was selected from the Database columns list box or from the Table column(s) list box. +Insert table heading +Specifies whether to insert a heading line for the columns in the text table. +Apply column name +Uses the field names of the database table as headings for each of the text table columns. +Create row only +Inserts an empty heading line into the text table. Using the Create row only option, you can define headings in the document, which do not correspond to the database field names. +Properties +Opens the Table Format Table Format dialog, which enables you to define the table properties such as borders, background, and column width. -AutoFormat -Opens the AutoFormat +AutoFormat +Opens the AutoFormat AutoFormat dialog, in which you can select format styles that are immediately applied when inserting the table. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/12070200.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/12070200.xhp index 27e1a053fa..9972a9e821 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/12070200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/12070200.xhp @@ -32,22 +32,22 @@ - Fields - database contents; inserting as fieldsInserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as fields. In the Insert Database Columns dialog, select the Fields to insert the selected data into the document as fields. These database fields work as wildcards for the individual database columns and can be used for form letters. Click the Data to Fields icon to match the contents of the fields to the currently selected record. - If several records are selected when you choose the Data to Text function, the mail merge fields will be inserted according to the number of records. Also, a field command such as "Next record" will be inserted automatically between individual field command blocks. - The Insert Database Columns dialog lets you define which database fields to insert into the document and how to format the paragraphs. - Fields - In the Fields area, use the arrow button to select the database table columns into which you want to insert field contents. + Fields + database contents; inserting as fieldsInserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as fields. In the Insert Database Columns dialog, select the Fields to insert the selected data into the document as fields. These database fields work as wildcards for the individual database columns and can be used for form letters. Click the Data to Fields icon to match the contents of the fields to the currently selected record. + If several records are selected when you choose the Data to Text function, the mail merge fields will be inserted according to the number of records. Also, a field command such as "Next record" will be inserted automatically between individual field command blocks. + The Insert Database Columns dialog lets you define which database fields to insert into the document and how to format the paragraphs. + Fields + In the Fields area, use the arrow button to select the database table columns into which you want to insert field contents.
- Database columns - Lists all columns of the database table, which can be accepted in the selection list box to insert them into the document. Select the database columns that you want to insert it in the document. - > - Moves the fields that you selected in the Database columns list box into the selection field. You can also double-click the entry to select it. - Select - Lists the database columns that you selected to be inserted into the document. You can also enter text here. This text will be also inserted into the document. The entries' order in the selection field corresponds to the data order in the document. + Database columns + Lists all columns of the database table, which can be accepted in the selection list box to insert them into the document. Select the database columns that you want to insert it in the document. + > + Moves the fields that you selected in the Database columns list box into the selection field. You can also double-click the entry to select it. + Select + Lists the database columns that you selected to be inserted into the document. You can also enter text here. This text will be also inserted into the document. The entries' order in the selection field corresponds to the data order in the document. - Paragraph Style - By default, the inserted paragraphs are formatted with the current Paragraph Styles. This format corresponds to the "none" entry in the Paragraph Style list box. This is where you can select other Paragraph Styles to apply to the paragraph you want to insert into the document. The list box displays the available Paragraph Styles defined in %PRODUCTNAME and managed in the Style Catalog. + Paragraph Style + By default, the inserted paragraphs are formatted with the current Paragraph Styles. This format corresponds to the "none" entry in the Paragraph Style list box. This is where you can select other Paragraph Styles to apply to the paragraph you want to insert into the document. The list box displays the available Paragraph Styles defined in %PRODUCTNAME and managed in the Style Catalog.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/12070300.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/12070300.xhp index 2a2691225d..61cb3b862c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/12070300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/12070300.xhp @@ -32,11 +32,11 @@ - Text - database contents; inserting as textInserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as text. If you select the Text option in the Insert Database Columns dialog, the content of the data selected in the data source browser is inserted into the document as text. In the dialog, you can decide which database fields or columns are transferred, and how the text is formatted. - If several records are selected when you choose the Data to Text function, the mail merge fields will be inserted according to the number of records. - Text - In the Text area, use the arrow button to select the database table columns into which you want to insert field contents. + Text + database contents; inserting as textInserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as text. If you select the Text option in the Insert Database Columns dialog, the content of the data selected in the data source browser is inserted into the document as text. In the dialog, you can decide which database fields or columns are transferred, and how the text is formatted. + If several records are selected when you choose the Data to Text function, the mail merge fields will be inserted according to the number of records. + Text + In the Text area, use the arrow button to select the database table columns into which you want to insert field contents. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/12080000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/12080000.xhp index 4682a1e917..dff3bcbabf 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/12080000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/12080000.xhp @@ -33,19 +33,19 @@
-Data to Fields -Updates the contents of the existing database fields by the marked records. The Data to Fields icon is only available if the current document is a text document. +Data to Fields +Updates the contents of the existing database fields by the marked records. The Data to Fields icon is only available if the current document is a text document.
- + Icon -Data to Fields +Data to Fields
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/12090000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/12090000.xhp index 19e253abbd..c5ed752a65 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/12090000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/12090000.xhp @@ -34,33 +34,32 @@ mw converted "standard filters..." into a two level entry and "default filters;" into a cross reference -Standard Filter - Allows you to set the filtering options. +Standard Filter + Allows you to set the filtering options.
- Use the Standard Filter to refine and to combine AutoFilter search options. + Use the Standard Filter to refine and to combine AutoFilter search options.
- + Icon - Standard Filter + Standard Filter
- $[officename] saves the current filter settings for the next time that you open this dialog. + $[officename] saves the current filter settings for the next time that you open this dialog.
- To remove the current filter, click Reset Filter/Sorting icon. + To remove the current filter, click Reset Filter/Sorting icon.
- AutoFilter + AutoFilter
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp index 4e2833962e..0db5c15507 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp @@ -30,57 +30,55 @@ -Standard Filter - Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data. This dialog is available for spreadsheet documents, database tables and database forms. The dialog for databases does not contain the More Options button. +Standard Filter + Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data. This dialog is available for spreadsheet documents, database tables and database forms. The dialog for databases does not contain the More Options button.
- + -Filter criteria - You can define a filter by indicating the type of line, the name of the field, a logical condition and a value or a combination of arguments. +Filter criteria + You can define a filter by indicating the type of line, the name of the field, a logical condition and a value or a combination of arguments. -Operator - For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR. +Operator + For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR. -Field name - Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument. You will see the column identifiers if no text is available for the field names. +Field name + Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument. You will see the column identifiers if no text is available for the field names. -Condition - Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked. +Condition + Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked. -Value - Specifies a value to filter the field. - The Value list box contains all possible values for the specified Field name . Choose the value to be used in the filter. You can also choose the - empty - or -not empty - entries.. - If you use the filter function in database tables or forms, then type the value in the Value text box to be used for filtering. +Value + Specifies a value to filter the field. + The Value list box contains all possible values for the specified Field name . Choose the value to be used in the filter. You can also choose the - empty - or -not empty - entries.. + If you use the filter function in database tables or forms, then type the value in the Value text box to be used for filtering. -More Options +More Options diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/12090101.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/12090101.xhp index 8925dd8e26..3f0914e16b 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/12090101.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/12090101.xhp @@ -33,99 +33,99 @@ filters; comparison operators equal sign, see also operators mw added "equal sign,..."MW changed "default filters;" into "standard filters;"mw changed "comparisons;" and "operators;" -Comparison Operators - The following comparative operators can be set under Condition in the Standard Filter dialog. +Comparison Operators + The following comparative operators can be set under Condition in the Standard Filter dialog. - + Comparative operator - + Effect - Equal (=) + Equal (=) - Shows values equal to the condition. + Shows values equal to the condition. - Less than (<) + Less than (<) - Shows values less than the condition. + Shows values less than the condition. - Greater than (>) + Greater than (>) - Shows values greater than the condition. + Shows values greater than the condition. - Less than or equal to (< =) + Less than or equal to (< =) - Shows values that are less than or equal to the condition. + Shows values that are less than or equal to the condition. - Greater than or equal to (> =) + Greater than or equal to (> =) - Shows values that are greater than or equal to the condition. + Shows values that are greater than or equal to the condition. - Not equal (< >) + Not equal (< >) - Shows the values not equal to the condition. + Shows the values not equal to the condition. - Largest + Largest - Shows the N (numeric value as parameter) largest values. + Shows the N (numeric value as parameter) largest values. - Smallest + Smallest - Shows the N (numeric value as parameter) smallest values. + Shows the N (numeric value as parameter) smallest values. - Largest % + Largest % - Shows the largest N% (numeric value as parameter) of the total values. + Shows the largest N% (numeric value as parameter) of the total values. - Smallest % + Smallest % - Shows the smallest N% (numeric value as parameter) of the entire values. + Shows the smallest N% (numeric value as parameter) of the entire values.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/12100000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/12100000.xhp index 1a5f286bb6..bad6436358 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/12100000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/12100000.xhp @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ - Sort Order + Sort Order @@ -40,10 +40,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Sort Order + Sort Order diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/12100100.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/12100100.xhp index 528504e95c..9a7dc3c054 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/12100100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/12100100.xhp @@ -34,24 +34,24 @@
-Sort Order +Sort Order -Specifies the sort criteria for the data display. +Specifies the sort criteria for the data display.
-While the functions Sort in Ascending Order and Sort in Descending Order sort by one criterion only, you can combine several criteria in the Sort Order dialog. -You can remove a sorting that has been performed with the Reset Filter/Sorting icon. -Sorting -Use this area to enter sorting criteria. If you enter additional sorting criteria under and then, the data matching the content of the higher-order criterion is ordered according to the next criterion. -If you sort the field name "First name" in ascending order and the field name "last name" in descending order, all records will be sorted in ascending order by first name, and then within the first names, in descending order by last name. -Field name -Specifies the data field name whose content will determine the sort order. -Order -Specifies the sort order (either ascending or descending). -and then -Specifies additional subordinate sort criteria from the other fields. +While the functions Sort in Ascending Order and Sort in Descending Order sort by one criterion only, you can combine several criteria in the Sort Order dialog. +You can remove a sorting that has been performed with the Reset Filter/Sorting icon. +Sorting +Use this area to enter sorting criteria. If you enter additional sorting criteria under and then, the data matching the content of the higher-order criterion is ordered according to the next criterion. +If you sort the field name "First name" in ascending order and the field name "last name" in descending order, all records will be sorted in ascending order by first name, and then within the first names, in descending order by last name. +Field name +Specifies the data field name whose content will determine the sort order. +Order +Specifies the sort order (either ascending or descending). +and then +Specifies additional subordinate sort criteria from the other fields. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp index e5c16f71a4..e08d6cf4b5 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp @@ -36,264 +36,250 @@
- Find Record + Find Record - Searches database tables and forms. In forms or database tables, you can search through data fields, list boxes, and check boxes for specific values. + Searches database tables and forms. In forms or database tables, you can search through data fields, list boxes, and check boxes for specific values.
- When searching a table, the data fields of the current table are searched. When searching in a form, the data fields of the table linked with the form are searched. - The search described here is carried out by %PRODUCTNAME. If you want to use the SQL server to search in a database, then you should use the Form-based Filters icon on the Form Bar. - The search function is also available for table controls. When calling the search function from a table control, you can search each column of the table control corresponding to the database columns of the linked database table. - Search for - Specifies the type of search. + When searching a table, the data fields of the current table are searched. When searching in a form, the data fields of the table linked with the form are searched. + The search described here is carried out by %PRODUCTNAME. If you want to use the SQL server to search in a database, then you should use the Form-based Filters icon on the Form Bar. + The search function is also available for table controls. When calling the search function from a table control, you can search each column of the table control corresponding to the database columns of the linked database table. + Search for + Specifies the type of search. -Text: - Enter the search term in the box or select it from the list. The text under the cursor is already copied into the Text combo box. Note that while running a search in a form, tabs and line breaks cannot be processed. - Your search terms will be saved as long as the table or the formula document is open. If you are running more than one search and you would like to repeat the search term, you can select a previously used search term from the combo box. +Text: + Enter the search term in the box or select it from the list. The text under the cursor is already copied into the Text combo box. Note that while running a search in a form, tabs and line breaks cannot be processed. + Your search terms will be saved as long as the table or the formula document is open. If you are running more than one search and you would like to repeat the search term, you can select a previously used search term from the combo box. -Field content is NULL - Specifies that fields will be found that contain no data. +Field content is NULL + Specifies that fields will be found that contain no data. -Field content is not NULL - Specifies that fields will be found that contain data. - Where to search - Specifies the fields for the search. +Field content is not NULL + Specifies that fields will be found that contain data. + Where to search + Specifies the fields for the search. -Form - Specifies the logical form in which you want the search to take place. - The Form combo box is only visible if the current document is a form document with more than one logical form. It does not appear during a search in tables or queries. - Form documents may contain multiple logical forms. These are individual form components, which are each linked to a table. - The Form combo box contains the names of all logical forms for which controls exist. +Form + Specifies the logical form in which you want the search to take place. + The Form combo box is only visible if the current document is a form document with more than one logical form. It does not appear during a search in tables or queries. + Form documents may contain multiple logical forms. These are individual form components, which are each linked to a table. + The Form combo box contains the names of all logical forms for which controls exist. -All Fields - Searches through all fields. If you are running a search in a table, all fields in the table will be searched. If you are running a search in a form, all fields of the logical form (entered under Form) will be searched. If you are running a search in a table control field, all columns that are linked to a valid database table field will be searched. - Note that the fields of the current logical form do not have to be identical to the fields of the form document. If the form document contains fields that point to multiple data sources (that is, multiple logical forms), the All Fields option will only search for the fields linked to data sources in the form document. +All Fields + Searches through all fields. If you are running a search in a table, all fields in the table will be searched. If you are running a search in a form, all fields of the logical form (entered under Form) will be searched. If you are running a search in a table control field, all columns that are linked to a valid database table field will be searched. + Note that the fields of the current logical form do not have to be identical to the fields of the form document. If the form document contains fields that point to multiple data sources (that is, multiple logical forms), the All Fields option will only search for the fields linked to data sources in the form document. -Single field - Searches through a specified data field. - Settings - Defines settings to control the search. +Single field + Searches through a specified data field. + Settings + Defines settings to control the search. -Position - Specifies the relationship of the search term and the field contents. The following options are available: +Position + Specifies the relationship of the search term and the field contents. The following options are available:
- anywhere in the field + anywhere in the field - Returns all fields containing the search pattern anywhere in the field. + Returns all fields containing the search pattern anywhere in the field. - beginning of field + beginning of field - Returns all fields containing the search pattern at the beginning of the field. + Returns all fields containing the search pattern at the beginning of the field. - end of field + end of field - Returns all fields containing the search pattern at the end of the field. + Returns all fields containing the search pattern at the end of the field. - entire field + entire field - Returns all fields containing the search pattern as an exact match to the contents of the field. + Returns all fields containing the search pattern as an exact match to the contents of the field.
- If the Wildcard expression check box is marked, this function is not available. + If the Wildcard expression check box is marked, this function is not available. -Apply field format - Specifies that all field formats are considered when searching in the current document. Field formats are all visible formats that are created using the following possibilities: +Apply field format + Specifies that all field formats are considered when searching in the current document. Field formats are all visible formats that are created using the following possibilities: - in table design mode for field properties, + in table design mode for field properties, - in data source view on column formatting, + in data source view on column formatting, - in forms on control properties. + in forms on control properties. - If the Apply field format box is marked, the data source view of the table or form is searched using the formatting set there. If the box is not marked, the database is searched using the formatting saved in the database. - Example: - You have a date field, which is saved in "DD.MM.YY" format in the database (for example, 17.02.65). The format of the entry is changed in the data source view to "DD MMM YYYY" (17 Feb 1965). Following this example, a record containing February 17 is only found when the Apply field format option is on: + If the Apply field format box is marked, the data source view of the table or form is searched using the formatting set there. If the box is not marked, the database is searched using the formatting saved in the database. + Example: + You have a date field, which is saved in "DD.MM.YY" format in the database (for example, 17.02.65). The format of the entry is changed in the data source view to "DD MMM YYYY" (17 Feb 1965). Following this example, a record containing February 17 is only found when the Apply field format option is on: - Apply field format + Apply field format - Search pattern + Search pattern - on + on - "Feb" is returned, but not "2". + "Feb" is returned, but not "2". - off + off - "2" is returned, but not "Feb". + "2" is returned, but not "Feb".
- It is recommended that you always search using field formatting. - The following examples show possible issues when searching without field formatting. These issues depend on the database used and only occur for certain internal default formatting: + It is recommended that you always search using field formatting. + The following examples show possible issues when searching without field formatting. These issues depend on the database used and only occur for certain internal default formatting: - Search results + Search results - Cause + Cause - "5" returns "14:00:00" as a time + "5" returns "14:00:00" as a time - Time fields are not defined for dBASE databases and must be simulated. To internally display the time "14:00:00", a 5 is necessary. + Time fields are not defined for dBASE databases and must be simulated. To internally display the time "14:00:00", a 5 is necessary. - "00:00:00" returns all records of a standard date field + "00:00:00" returns all records of a standard date field - The database stores a date value internally using a combined date/time field. + The database stores a date value internally using a combined date/time field. - "45.79" does not return "45.79" although the entire field option is selected under Position. + "45.79" does not return "45.79" although the entire field option is selected under Position. - The view shown does not match what is stored internally. For example, if value 45.789 is stored in the database as a field of type Number/Double and the shown formatting is set to display only two decimals, "45.79" is only returned in searches with field formatting. + The view shown does not match what is stored internally. For example, if value 45.789 is stored in the database as a field of type Number/Double and the shown formatting is set to display only two decimals, "45.79" is only returned in searches with field formatting.
- In this case, standard formatting is formatting that refers to the internally stored data. It is not always visible to the user, especially if it is used for simulating data types (for example, time fields in dBASE databases). This depends on the database used and the individual data type. Searching with field formatting is appropriate if you only want to find what is actually shown. This includes fields of type Date, Time, Date/Time and Number/Double. - However, searching without Apply field format is appropriate for larger databases with no formatting issues, because it is faster. - If you are searching the values of check boxes, and Apply field format is on, then you will receive a "1" for marked check boxes, a "0" for unmarked check boxes, and an empty string for undefined (tristate) check boxes. If the search has been carried out with Apply field format set to off, you will see the language-dependent default values "TRUE" or "FALSE". - If you use Apply field format when searching in list boxes, you find the text displayed in list boxes. If you do not use Apply field format, you will find the contents corresponding to the standard field format. + In this case, standard formatting is formatting that refers to the internally stored data. It is not always visible to the user, especially if it is used for simulating data types (for example, time fields in dBASE databases). This depends on the database used and the individual data type. Searching with field formatting is appropriate if you only want to find what is actually shown. This includes fields of type Date, Time, Date/Time and Number/Double. + However, searching without Apply field format is appropriate for larger databases with no formatting issues, because it is faster. + If you are searching the values of check boxes, and Apply field format is on, then you will receive a "1" for marked check boxes, a "0" for unmarked check boxes, and an empty string for undefined (tristate) check boxes. If the search has been carried out with Apply field format set to off, you will see the language-dependent default values "TRUE" or "FALSE". + If you use Apply field format when searching in list boxes, you find the text displayed in list boxes. If you do not use Apply field format, you will find the contents corresponding to the standard field format. -Match case - Specifies that upper and lower case are taken into consideration during the search. +Match case + Specifies that upper and lower case are taken into consideration during the search. -Search backwards - Specifies that the search process will run in reverse direction, from the last to the first record. +Search backwards + Specifies that the search process will run in reverse direction, from the last to the first record. -From top / From bottom - Restarts the search. A forward search restarts with the first record. A backwards search restarts with the last record. +From top / From bottom + Restarts the search. A forward search restarts with the first record. A backwards search restarts with the last record. -Wildcard expression - Allows a search with a * or ? wildcard. You can use the following wildcards: +Wildcard expression + Allows a search with a * or ? wildcard. You can use the following wildcards: - Wildcards + Wildcards - Meaning + Meaning - Example + Example - ? + ? - for exactly one arbitrary character + for exactly one arbitrary character - "?loppy" returns "Floppy" - "M?ller" returns, for example, Miller and Moller + "?loppy" returns "Floppy" + "M?ller" returns, for example, Miller and Moller - * + * - for 0 or more arbitrary characters + for 0 or more arbitrary characters - "*-*" returns "ZIP-Drive" and "CD-ROM" - "M*er" returns all entries starting with an "M" and ending in "er" (for example, Miller, Moller, Mather) + "*-*" returns "ZIP-Drive" and "CD-ROM" + "M*er" returns all entries starting with an "M" and ending in "er" (for example, Miller, Moller, Mather)
- If you want to search for the actual characters ? or *, preface them with a backslash: "\?" or "\*". However, this is only necessary when Wildcard expression is enabled. When the option is not enabled, the wildcard characters are processed like normal characters. + If you want to search for the actual characters ? or *, preface them with a backslash: "\?" or "\*". However, this is only necessary when Wildcard expression is enabled. When the option is not enabled, the wildcard characters are processed like normal characters. -Regular expression - Searches with regular expressions. The same regular expressions that are supported here are also supported in the %PRODUCTNAME Find & Replace dialog. - Searching with regular expressions offers more options than searching with wildcard expressions. If you search with regular expressions, the following characters correspond to those used in searches with wildcards: +Regular expression + Searches with regular expressions. The same regular expressions that are supported here are also supported in the %PRODUCTNAME Find & Replace dialog. + Searching with regular expressions offers more options than searching with wildcard expressions. If you search with regular expressions, the following characters correspond to those used in searches with wildcards: - Search with wildcard expression + Search with wildcard expression - Search with regular expressions + Search with regular expressions - ? + ? - . + . - * + * - .* + .*
@@ -304,18 +290,15 @@ - State - The State line shows the records returned by the search. If the search reaches the end (or the beginning) of a table, the search is automatically continued at the other end. - In very large databases, finding the record in reverse search order can take some time. In this case, the status bar informs you that the records are still being counted. + State + The State line shows the records returned by the search. If the search reaches the end (or the beginning) of a table, the search is automatically continued at the other end. + In very large databases, finding the record in reverse search order can take some time. In this case, the status bar informs you that the records are still being counted. -Search / Cancel - Starts or cancels the search. If the search is successfully completed, the corresponding field in the table is highlighted. You can continue the search by clicking the Search button again. You can cancel a search process by clicking the Cancel button. +Search / Cancel + Starts or cancels the search. If the search is successfully completed, the corresponding field in the table is highlighted. You can continue the search by clicking the Search button again. You can cancel a search process by clicking the Cancel button. -Close - Closes the dialog. The settings of the last search will be saved until you quit %PRODUCTNAME. - If several tables or forms are open, you can set different search options for each document. When you close the documents only the search options of the document last closed are saved. +Close + Closes the dialog. The settings of the last search will be saved until you quit %PRODUCTNAME. + If several tables or forms are open, you can set different search options for each document. When you close the documents only the search options of the document last closed are saved. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/12110000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/12110000.xhp index d9849f33f0..eabb032ba0 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/12110000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/12110000.xhp @@ -33,22 +33,22 @@
-Form-based Filters +Form-based Filters -Prompts the database server to filter the visible data by specified criteria. +Prompts the database server to filter the visible data by specified criteria.
-Unlike the normal search, which is activated by the Find Record icon on the Form Bar, you can search more quickly by using the form-based filter. Usually a quick database server is charged with the search. Also, you can enter more complex search conditions. +Unlike the normal search, which is activated by the Find Record icon on the Form Bar, you can search more quickly by using the form-based filter. Usually a quick database server is charged with the search. Also, you can enter more complex search conditions.
- + Icon -Form-based Filters +Form-based Filters
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/12120000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/12120000.xhp index 828f40c856..17a747a548 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/12120000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/12120000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Apply Filter - Switches between the filtered and unfiltered view of the table. +Apply Filter + Switches between the filtered and unfiltered view of the table.
@@ -44,16 +44,16 @@ - Icon + Icon - Apply Filter + Apply Filter
- The Apply Filter function retains form-based filters that have been set. You do not need to redefine them. + The Apply Filter function retains form-based filters that have been set. You do not need to redefine them. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/12130000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/12130000.xhp index f37458ff21..1060e490eb 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/12130000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/12130000.xhp @@ -35,25 +35,25 @@ -Data source as table -Activates an additional table view when in the form view. When the Data source as table function is activated, you see the table in an area above the form. +Data source as table +Activates an additional table view when in the form view. When the Data source as table function is activated, you see the table in an area above the form.
- + Icon -Data source as table +Data source as table
-The table view and form view reflect the same data. Changes made in the table are also visible in the form, and changes to the form are visible in the table. -If there are several logical forms in a document, the table is only able to show one at a time.UFI removed two paras, see #60894 +The table view and form view reflect the same data. Changes made in the table are also visible in the form, and changes to the form are visible in the table. +If there are several logical forms in a document, the table is only able to show one at a time.UFI removed two paras, see #60894 diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/12140000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/12140000.xhp index de152ad311..d20f02160e 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/12140000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/12140000.xhp @@ -35,24 +35,24 @@ -Data Source of Current Document -Displays, in the data source browser, the table that is linked to the current document. +Data Source of Current Document +Displays, in the data source browser, the table that is linked to the current document.
- + Icon -Data Source of Current Document +Data Source of Current Document
-Choose Edit - Exchange Database to select another table. +Choose Edit - Exchange Database to select another table. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/13010000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/13010000.xhp index e7e3580065..8cdde00101 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/13010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/13010000.xhp @@ -33,10 +33,10 @@
- Setting Tabs - On the ruler, set the tabs for the current paragraph, or all selected paragraphs, using the mouse. + Setting Tabs + On the ruler, set the tabs for the current paragraph, or all selected paragraphs, using the mouse.
- Initially the default tabs are shown on the horizontal ruler. Once you set a tab, only the default tabs to the right of the tab that you have set are available. + Initially the default tabs are shown on the horizontal ruler. Once you set a tab, only the default tabs to the right of the tab that you have set are available. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/13020000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/13020000.xhp index de9f0d5268..e7cc0ceb8f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/13020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/13020000.xhp @@ -35,31 +35,31 @@ columns; setting with the mouse paragraphs; indents, margins and columns MW deleted "text;" -Setting Indents, Margins, and Columns -You can define the indents and margins for the current paragraph, or for all selected paragraphs, using the mouse. +Setting Indents, Margins, and Columns +You can define the indents and margins for the current paragraph, or for all selected paragraphs, using the mouse.
-If you split the page into columns, or the cursor is placed in a multiple-column text frame, you can change the column width and the column spacing by dragging them on the ruler with the mouse. -When an object, an image, or a draw object is selected, you will see the borders of the object in the ruler. You can change the borders by dragging them on the ruler with the mouse. -If the cursor is placed in a table cell, you can change the indents for the contents of the cell by dragging them with the mouse on the ruler. You can change the boundary lines of the table on the ruler or by dragging the actual boundary line. +If you split the page into columns, or the cursor is placed in a multiple-column text frame, you can change the column width and the column spacing by dragging them on the ruler with the mouse. +When an object, an image, or a draw object is selected, you will see the borders of the object in the ruler. You can change the borders by dragging them on the ruler with the mouse. +If the cursor is placed in a table cell, you can change the indents for the contents of the cell by dragging them with the mouse on the ruler. You can change the boundary lines of the table on the ruler or by dragging the actual boundary line. - + Icon -These icons mark the left indent for the first line of the current paragraph (top triangle) and the left indent for the other lines of the paragraph (bottom triangle). +These icons mark the left indent for the first line of the current paragraph (top triangle) and the left indent for the other lines of the paragraph (bottom triangle). - + Icon -This icon on the right of the ruler marks the right indent of the current paragraph. +This icon on the right of the ruler marks the right indent of the current paragraph.
@@ -67,43 +67,43 @@ - + Task - + Procedure -Set left indent +Set left indent -Drag the bottom left mark to the right while pressing the mouse button +Drag the bottom left mark to the right while pressing the mouse button -Set left indent of first line +Set left indent of first line -Drag the top left mark to the right while pressing the mouse button +Drag the top left mark to the right while pressing the mouse button -Set right indent +Set right indent -Drag the mark on the right to the left while pressing the mouse button +Drag the mark on the right to the left while pressing the mouse button
-In order to change the left indent starting with the second line of a paragraph, hold down the CommandCtrl key, click the triangle on the bottom left, and drag it to the right. -Tabs that have been set are not changed when indenting a paragraph. If the set tabs end up outside the margins of the paragraph, they are no longer displayed, but they still exist. +In order to change the left indent starting with the second line of a paragraph, hold down the CommandCtrl key, click the triangle on the bottom left, and drag it to the right. +Tabs that have been set are not changed when indenting a paragraph. If the set tabs end up outside the margins of the paragraph, they are no longer displayed, but they still exist. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/14010000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/14010000.xhp index dc7b453b37..4533b240f8 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/14010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/14010000.xhp @@ -34,21 +34,21 @@ -Run Query -Runs the SQL query and displays the query result. The Run Query function does not save the query. +Run Query +Runs the SQL query and displays the query result. The Run Query function does not save the query.
-The Run Query function allows you to check the query. When you save the query, it is stored in the Query tab page. -Choose View - Preview to run the query from the menu bar of a query design window.UFI: see dba-features "Querydesign: Close preview has moved" +The Run Query function allows you to check the query. When you save the query, it is stored in the Query tab page. +Choose View - Preview to run the query from the menu bar of a query design window.UFI: see dba-features "Querydesign: Close preview has moved"
- + Icon -Run Query +Run Query
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/14020000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/14020000.xhp index 1435c3c303..000b1d4710 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/14020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/14020000.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Clear query - Clears the query and removes all tables from the design window. + Clear query + Clears the query and removes all tables from the design window.
@@ -43,10 +43,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Clear query + Clear query diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp index 29a19db71d..f06461d73f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp @@ -32,27 +32,25 @@ -Add Tables - Specifies the tables to be inserted into the design window. In the Add Tables dialog, select the tables you need for your current task. +Add Tables + Specifies the tables to be inserted into the design window. In the Add Tables dialog, select the tables you need for your current task. When creating a query or a new table presentation, select the corresponding table to which the query or table presentation should refer. When working with relational databases, select the tables between which you want to build relationships. - The inserted tables appear in a separate window in the query design or relational windows, along with a list of the fields contained in the table. You can determine the size and order of this window. + The inserted tables appear in a separate window in the query design or relational windows, along with a list of the fields contained in the table. You can determine the size and order of this window.
- Table + Table -Shows only tables. +Shows only tables. -Shows only queries. - Table name - Lists the available tables. To insert a table, select one from the list and click Add. You can also double-click the table name, and a window will be displayed containing the table fields at the top of the query design or the relational window. +Shows only queries. + Table name + Lists the available tables. To insert a table, select one from the list and click Add. You can also double-click the table name, and a window will be displayed containing the table fields at the top of the query design or the relational window. -Add - Inserts the currently selected table. +Add + Inserts the currently selected table. -Close - Closes the Add Tables dialog. +Close + Closes the Add Tables dialog. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/14020200.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/14020200.xhp index 8abe899816..1d8745e91a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/14020200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/14020200.xhp @@ -34,19 +34,19 @@
-Switch Design View On / Off -Displays the design view or the SQL view of the query. +Switch Design View On / Off +Displays the design view or the SQL view of the query.
- + Icon -Switch Design View On / Off +Switch Design View On / Off
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/14030000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/14030000.xhp index e123003ed5..520ae3d28e 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/14030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/14030000.xhp @@ -31,28 +31,28 @@
- + -Run SQL command directly -In Native SQL mode you can enter SQL commands that are not interpreted by $[officename], but are instead passed directly to the data source. If you do not display these changes in the design view, you cannot change back to the design view. +Run SQL command directly +In Native SQL mode you can enter SQL commands that are not interpreted by $[officename], but are instead passed directly to the data source. If you do not display these changes in the design view, you cannot change back to the design view.
-For native SQL, the SQL string is forwarded directly to the connected database system without a previous evaluation by $[officename]. For example, if you access a database through an ODBC interface, the SQL string is passed to the ODBC driver and processed by it. +For native SQL, the SQL string is forwarded directly to the connected database system without a previous evaluation by $[officename]. For example, if you access a database through an ODBC interface, the SQL string is passed to the ODBC driver and processed by it.
- + Icon -Run SQL command directly +Run SQL command directly
-Click the icon again to return to normal mode, in which the changes in the New Query Design are synchronized with the permitted changes through SQL. +Click the icon again to return to normal mode, in which the changes in the New Query Design are synchronized with the permitted changes through SQL. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/14040000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/14040000.xhp index 901469ecd1..50bd93c79f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/14040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/14040000.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Functions - Displays the "Function" row in the lower part of the design view of the Query Design window. + Functions + Displays the "Function" row in the lower part of the design view of the Query Design window.
@@ -43,10 +43,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Functions + Functions diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/14050000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/14050000.xhp index 0fdf8c6b01..cc028b8e88 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/14050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/14050000.xhp @@ -32,19 +32,19 @@
-Table Name -Displays the "Table" row in the lower part of the Query Design. +Table Name +Displays the "Table" row in the lower part of the Query Design.
- + Icon -Table Name +Table Name
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/14060000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/14060000.xhp index b3c4e6c7fa..47cd08825f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/14060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/14060000.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Alias - Displays the "Alias" row in the lower part of the Query Design. + Alias + Displays the "Alias" row in the lower part of the Query Design.
@@ -43,10 +43,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Alias + Alias diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/14070000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/14070000.xhp index 10d1dc659e..ce334a07bd 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/14070000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/14070000.xhp @@ -35,19 +35,19 @@ distinct values in SQL queries -Distinct Values -Expands the created select statement of the SQL Query in the current column by the parameter DISTINCT. The consequence is that identical values occurring multiple times are listed only once. +Distinct Values +Expands the created select statement of the SQL Query in the current column by the parameter DISTINCT. The consequence is that identical values occurring multiple times are listed only once.
- + Icon -Distinct Values +Distinct Values
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/18010000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/18010000.xhp index 970e7198a8..dcd96e9295 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/18010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/18010000.xhp @@ -31,35 +31,35 @@
-Selection -Allows you to select objects in the current document. +Selection +Allows you to select objects in the current document.
- + Icon -Selection +Selection
-To select an object, click the object with the arrow. To select more than one object, drag a selection frame around the objects. To add an object to a selection, press Shift, and then click the object. +To select an object, click the object with the arrow. To select more than one object, drag a selection frame around the objects. To add an object to a selection, press Shift, and then click the object. The objects selected together can then be defined as a group, turning them into a single group object. - + You can edit individual elements of a group. You can also delete elements from a group with Command Shift+click. - + diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/18030000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/18030000.xhp index f352a69f95..255432fb36 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/18030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/18030000.xhp @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
- Automatic Spell Checking On/Off + Automatic Spell Checking On/Off
@@ -43,10 +43,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Automatic Spell Checking On/Off + Automatic Spell Checking On/Off diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp index 7a8d8e73ca..a4f1420ae5 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp @@ -36,16 +36,16 @@ -Current Page Style - Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit the style, right-click to select another style. +Current Page Style + Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit the style, right-click to select another style.
- Double-click the Page Style field to open the Page Style dialog, in which you can edit the style for the current page. In the context menu of this field, you can apply a Page Style. + Double-click the Page Style field to open the Page Style dialog, in which you can edit the style for the current page. In the context menu of this field, you can apply a Page Style. - Double-click the Page Style field to open the Page Style dialog, in which you can edit the style for the current page. + Double-click the Page Style field to open the Page Style dialog, in which you can edit the style for the current page. - Double-click this field to open the Slide Design dialog in which you can select the style for the current slide. You can select a different paper format or background. + Double-click this field to open the Slide Design dialog in which you can select the style for the current slide. You can select a different paper format or background. - Double-click this field to open the Slide Design dialog in which you select the style for the current page. You can select a different paper format or background. + Double-click this field to open the Slide Design dialog in which you select the style for the current page. You can select a different paper format or background. \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/20030000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/20030000.xhp index fa99d53ac9..6dd0ad646e 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/20030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/20030000.xhp @@ -33,10 +33,10 @@ zooming; status bar mw deleted "scaling;" -Zoom -Specifies the current page display zoom factor. +Zoom +Specifies the current page display zoom factor.
-Double-clicking this field opens the Zoom dialog, where you can change the current zoom factor. -Open the context menu on this field to see a selection of available zoom factors. +Double-clicking this field opens the Zoom dialog, where you can change the current zoom factor. +Open the context menu on this field to see a selection of available zoom factors. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/20040000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/20040000.xhp index 8ea8542806..56b9e58ae7 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/20040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/20040000.xhp @@ -31,38 +31,38 @@
-Insert Mode -Displays the current insert mode. You can toggle between INSRT = insert and OVER = overwrite. This field is only active if the cursor is in the input line of the formula bar or in a cell. +Insert Mode +Displays the current insert mode. You can toggle between INSRT = insert and OVER = overwrite. This field is only active if the cursor is in the input line of the formula bar or in a cell.
-Click in the field to toggle the modes (except in the $[officename] Basic IDE, where only the Insert mode is active). If the cursor is positioned in a text document, you may also use the Insert key (if available on your keyboard) to toggle the modes. +Click in the field to toggle the modes (except in the $[officename] Basic IDE, where only the Insert mode is active). If the cursor is positioned in a text document, you may also use the Insert key (if available on your keyboard) to toggle the modes. - + Mode - + Result -INSRT +INSRT -In the insert mode, new text is inserted at the cursor position and the following text is shifted to the right. The cursor is displayed as a vertical line. +In the insert mode, new text is inserted at the cursor position and the following text is shifted to the right. The cursor is displayed as a vertical line. -OVER +OVER -In the overwrite mode, any existing text is replaced by new text. The cursor is displayed as a thick vertical line. +In the overwrite mode, any existing text is replaced by new text. The cursor is displayed as a thick vertical line.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/20050000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/20050000.xhp index e26709c8c0..060b3dc4f9 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/20050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/20050000.xhp @@ -39,58 +39,58 @@ -Selection Mode -Here you can switch between different selection modes. +Selection Mode +Here you can switch between different selection modes.
-When you click in the field, a popup menu comes up with the available options: +When you click in the field, a popup menu comes up with the available options: - + Mode - + Effect -Standard selection +Standard selection -Click in text where you want to position the cursor; click in a cell to make it the active cell. Any other selection is then deselected. +Click in text where you want to position the cursor; click in a cell to make it the active cell. Any other selection is then deselected. -Extending selection (F8) +Extending selection (F8) -Clicking in the text extends or crops the current selection. +Clicking in the text extends or crops the current selection. -Adding selection (Shift+F8) +Adding selection (Shift+F8) -A new selection is added to an existing selection. The result is a multiple selection. +A new selection is added to an existing selection. The result is a multiple selection. -Block selection (CommandCtrl+Shift+F8) +Block selection (CommandCtrl+Shift+F8) -A block of text can be selected. +A block of text can be selected.
-On Windows systems, you can hold down the Alt key while dragging to select a block of text. You don't need to enter the block selection mode.i83613 +On Windows systems, you can hold down the Alt key while dragging to select a block of text. You don't need to enter the block selection mode.i83613 diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/20060000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/20060000.xhp index 02364abd22..d1dee4019b 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/20060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/20060000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ -Document Modification -If changes to the document have not yet been saved, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status Bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents. +Document Modification +If changes to the document have not yet been saved, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status Bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/20090000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/20090000.xhp index 21421b168e..283f1f683f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/20090000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/20090000.xhp @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ -Time - Displays the current time. +Time + Displays the current time. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/20100000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/20100000.xhp index 6e80d398d1..d31cd3b65d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/20100000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/20100000.xhp @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ -Date - Displays the current date. +Date + Displays the current date. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp index 0167adb86d..77f0514da1 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp @@ -40,12 +40,12 @@ - + Icon -Filter +Filter
@@ -54,34 +54,34 @@ -Invert -Inverts the color values of a color image, or the brightness values of a grayscale image. Apply the filter again to revert the effect. +Invert +Inverts the color values of a color image, or the brightness values of a grayscale image. Apply the filter again to revert the effect. - + Icon -Invert +Invert
-Smooth -Softens or blurs the image by applying a low pass filter.low pass filter with a kernel of: 1-2-1, 2-5-2, 1-2-1 +Smooth +Softens or blurs the image by applying a low pass filter.low pass filter with a kernel of: 1-2-1, 2-5-2, 1-2-1 - + Icon -Smooth +Smooth
@@ -89,17 +89,17 @@ -Sharpen -Sharpens the image by applying a high pass filter.high pass filter with a kernel of: -1/-1/-1, -1/16/-1, -1/-1/-1 +Sharpen +Sharpens the image by applying a high pass filter.high pass filter with a kernel of: -1/-1/-1, -1/16/-1, -1/-1/-1 - + Icon -Sharpen +Sharpen
@@ -107,167 +107,167 @@ -Remove Noise -Removes noise by applying a median filter.See i70055 +Remove Noise +Removes noise by applying a median filter.See i70055 - + Icon -Remove Noise +Remove Noise
-Solarization -Opens a dialog for defining solarization. Solarization refers to an effect that looks like what can happen when there is too much light during photo development. The colors become partly inverted. +Solarization +Opens a dialog for defining solarization. Solarization refers to an effect that looks like what can happen when there is too much light during photo development. The colors become partly inverted. - + Icon -Solarization +Solarization
-Parameters -Specifies the degree and type of solarization. +Parameters +Specifies the degree and type of solarization. -Threshold Value -Specifies the degree of brightness, in percent, above which the pixels are to be solarized. +Threshold Value +Specifies the degree of brightness, in percent, above which the pixels are to be solarized. -Invert -Specifies to also invert all pixels. +Invert +Specifies to also invert all pixels. -Aging -All pixels are set to their gray values, and then the green and blue color channels are reduced by the amount you specify. The red color channel is not changed. +Aging +All pixels are set to their gray values, and then the green and blue color channels are reduced by the amount you specify. The red color channel is not changed. - + Icon -Aging +Aging
-Aging Degree -Defines the intensity of aging, in percent. At 0% you see the gray values of all pixels. At 100% only the red color channel remains.ufi: cannot see any difference between 0% and 100% aging here... +Aging Degree +Defines the intensity of aging, in percent. At 0% you see the gray values of all pixels. At 100% only the red color channel remains.ufi: cannot see any difference between 0% and 100% aging here... -Posterize -Opens a dialog to determine the number of poster colors. This effect is based on the reduction of the number of colors. It makes photos look like paintings. +Posterize +Opens a dialog to determine the number of poster colors. This effect is based on the reduction of the number of colors. It makes photos look like paintings. - + Icon -Posterize +Posterize
-Poster Colors -Specifies the number of colors to which the image is to be reduced. +Poster Colors +Specifies the number of colors to which the image is to be reduced. -Pop Art -Converts an image to a pop-art format. +Pop Art +Converts an image to a pop-art format. - + Icon -Pop Art +Pop Art
-Charcoal Sketch -Displays the image as a charcoal sketch. The contours of the image are drawn in black, and the original colors are suppressed. +Charcoal Sketch +Displays the image as a charcoal sketch. The contours of the image are drawn in black, and the original colors are suppressed. - + Icon -Charcoal Sketch +Charcoal Sketch
-Relief -Displays a dialog for creating reliefs. You can choose the position of the imaginary light source that determines the type of shadow created, and how the graphic image looks in relief. +Relief +Displays a dialog for creating reliefs. You can choose the position of the imaginary light source that determines the type of shadow created, and how the graphic image looks in relief. - + Icon -Relief +Relief
-Light Source -Specifies the light source position. A dot represents the light source. +Light Source +Specifies the light source position. A dot represents the light source. -Mosaic -Joins small groups of pixels into rectangular areas of the same color. The larger the individual rectangles are, the fewer details the graphic image has. +Mosaic +Joins small groups of pixels into rectangular areas of the same color. The larger the individual rectangles are, the fewer details the graphic image has. - + Icon -Mosaic +Mosaic
-Element resolution -Determines the number of pixels to be joined into rectangles. +Element resolution +Determines the number of pixels to be joined into rectangles. -Width -Defines the width of the individual tiles. +Width +Defines the width of the individual tiles. -Height -Defines the height of the individual tiles. +Height +Defines the height of the individual tiles. -Enhance edges -Enhances, or sharpens, the edges of the object. +Enhance edges +Enhances, or sharpens, the edges of the object.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/24020000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/24020000.xhp index d5e2387699..8377ee4b1b 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/24020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/24020000.xhp @@ -31,30 +31,30 @@
-Graphics Mode -Lists view attributes for the selected graphic object. The embedded or linked graphic object in the current file will not be changed, only the view of the object. +Graphics Mode +Lists view attributes for the selected graphic object. The embedded or linked graphic object in the current file will not be changed, only the view of the object.
- + Cell Styles -Graphics mode +Graphics mode
-Default -The view of the graphic object is not changed. -Grayscale -The graphic object is shown in grayscale. A color graphic object can become monochrome in grayscale. You can also use the color sliders to apply a uniform color to the monochrome graphic object. -Black and White -The graphic object is shown in black and white. All brightness values below 50% will appear black, all over 50% will appear white. -Watermark -The graphic object is raised in brightness and reduced in contrast so that it can be used in the background as a watermark. UFI: #i45972# +Default +The view of the graphic object is not changed. +Grayscale +The graphic object is shown in grayscale. A color graphic object can become monochrome in grayscale. You can also use the color sliders to apply a uniform color to the monochrome graphic object. +Black and White +The graphic object is shown in black and white. All brightness values below 50% will appear black, all over 50% will appear white. +Watermark +The graphic object is raised in brightness and reduced in contrast so that it can be used in the background as a watermark. UFI: #i45972# diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/24030000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/24030000.xhp index 36570c2000..ba09587bbc 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/24030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/24030000.xhp @@ -31,19 +31,19 @@
-Red -Specifies the proportion of red RGB color components for the selected graphic object. Values from -100% (no red) to +100% (full red) are possible. +Red +Specifies the proportion of red RGB color components for the selected graphic object. Values from -100% (no red) to +100% (full red) are possible.
- + Icon -Red +Red
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/24040000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/24040000.xhp index 381f49a42b..99d452d403 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/24040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/24040000.xhp @@ -31,19 +31,19 @@
-Green -Specifies the proportion of green RGB color components for the selected graphic object. Values from -100% (no green) to +100% (full green) are possible. +Green +Specifies the proportion of green RGB color components for the selected graphic object. Values from -100% (no green) to +100% (full green) are possible.
- + Icon -Green +Green
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/24050000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/24050000.xhp index 6c330e0c2f..c0f81b65e4 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/24050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/24050000.xhp @@ -31,19 +31,19 @@
-Blue -Specifies the proportion of blue RGB color components for the selected graphic. Values from -100% (no blue) to +100% (full blue) are possible. +Blue +Specifies the proportion of blue RGB color components for the selected graphic. Values from -100% (no blue) to +100% (full blue) are possible.
- + Icon -Blue +Blue
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/24060000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/24060000.xhp index ec04b96b93..59c0fad786 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/24060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/24060000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Brightness - Specifies the brightness for the selected graphic object. Values from -100% (only black) to +100% (only white) are possible. +Brightness + Specifies the brightness for the selected graphic object. Values from -100% (only black) to +100% (only white) are possible.
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Brightness + Brightness diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/24070000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/24070000.xhp index a70989e146..a8d88da699 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/24070000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/24070000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Contrast - Specifies the contrast for viewing the selected graphic image. Values from -100% (no contrast at all) to +100% (full contrast) are possible. +Contrast + Specifies the contrast for viewing the selected graphic image. Values from -100% (no contrast at all) to +100% (full contrast) are possible.
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Contrast + Contrast diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/24080000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/24080000.xhp index 5591ceef1e..218a0428b9 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/24080000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/24080000.xhp @@ -31,19 +31,19 @@
-Gamma -Specifies the gamma value for the view of the selected object, which affects the brightness of the midtone values. Values from 0.10 (minimum Gamma) to 10 (maximum Gamma) are possible. +Gamma +Specifies the gamma value for the view of the selected object, which affects the brightness of the midtone values. Values from 0.10 (minimum Gamma) to 10 (maximum Gamma) are possible.
- + Icon -Gamma +Gamma
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/24090000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/24090000.xhp index 5d2d16f8ee..ba32aff7a6 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/24090000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/24090000.xhp @@ -31,19 +31,19 @@
-Transparency -Specifies the transparency in the graphic object. Values from 0% (fully opaque) to +100% (fully transparent) are possible. +Transparency +Specifies the transparency in the graphic object. Values from 0% (fully opaque) to +100% (fully transparent) are possible.
- + Icon -Transparency +Transparency
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/24100000.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/24100000.xhp index c022c962af..4fa603003e 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/24100000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/24100000.xhp @@ -31,22 +31,22 @@
-Crop -Allows to crop the display of an inserted picture. Only the display gets cropped, the inserted picture is not changed. A picture must be selected to enable cropping. +Crop +Allows to crop the display of an inserted picture. Only the display gets cropped, the inserted picture is not changed. A picture must be selected to enable cropping. -In Impress and Draw no dialog is shown when you click the icon, but you see eight cropping handles. Open the context menu of a selected picture and choose Crop Image, if you want to use the dialog for cropping. -Drag any of the eight cropping handles to crop the picture. +In Impress and Draw no dialog is shown when you click the icon, but you see eight cropping handles. Open the context menu of a selected picture and choose Crop Image, if you want to use the dialog for cropping. +Drag any of the eight cropping handles to crop the picture.
- + icon -Crop +Crop
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/basicshapes.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/basicshapes.xhp index 14af77dbf9..61c268da5f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/basicshapes.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/basicshapes.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
-Basic Shapes -Opens the Basic Shapes toolbar which you can use to insert graphics into your document. +Basic Shapes +Opens the Basic Shapes toolbar which you can use to insert graphics into your document.
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ -Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape. -Some shapes have a handle which you can drag to change the properties of the shape. The mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol over these special handles. +Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape. +Some shapes have a handle which you can drag to change the properties of the shape. The mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol over these special handles. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/blockarrows.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/blockarrows.xhp index 0b130e9a64..7ad30327b3 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/blockarrows.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/blockarrows.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
-Block Arrows -Opens the Block Arrows toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document. +Block Arrows +Opens the Block Arrows toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ -Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape. -Some shapes have a special handle which you can drag to change properties of the shape. The mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol over these special handles. +Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape. +Some shapes have a special handle which you can drag to change properties of the shape. The mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol over these special handles. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/callouts.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/callouts.xhp index 15cc6ebd83..077988e849 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/callouts.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/callouts.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ speech bubbles mw moved "legends;drawings" to draw guide text_enter.xhp -Callouts -Opens the Callouts toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document. +Callouts +Opens the Callouts toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ -Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape. -Some shapes have a special handle which you can drag to change properties of the shape. The mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol over these special handles. +Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape. +Some shapes have a special handle which you can drag to change properties of the shape. The mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol over these special handles. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/colortoolbar.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/colortoolbar.xhp index e42816f396..6d29377169 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/colortoolbar.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/colortoolbar.xhp @@ -32,10 +32,10 @@
-Color -With the Color toolbar you can edit some properties of the selected object. +Color +With the Color toolbar you can edit some properties of the selected object.
-To open the Color toolbar, click the Color icon on the Image toolbar. +To open the Color toolbar, click the Color icon on the Image toolbar. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/flowcharts.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/flowcharts.xhp index 31f9f64783..c6f3156594 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/flowcharts.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/flowcharts.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
-Flowchart -Opens the Flowchart toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document. +Flowchart +Opens the Flowchart toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
@@ -64,6 +64,6 @@ -Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape. +Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/more_controls.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/more_controls.xhp index 39e74495d8..21e6569b92 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/more_controls.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/more_controls.xhp @@ -52,8 +52,8 @@ scrollbars;controls Navigation bar;controls MW deleted "option field creation" -More Controls -The More Controls toolbar opens when you click the More Controls icon on the Form Controls toolbar. +More Controls +The More Controls toolbar opens when you click the More Controls icon on the Form Controls toolbar.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/paintbrush.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/paintbrush.xhp index 67e03ed0ec..ce91835d9c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/paintbrush.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/paintbrush.xhp @@ -30,10 +30,10 @@
-Clone Formatting -First select some text or an object, then click this icon. Then click on or drag across other text or click an object to apply the same formatting.i93691 +Clone Formatting +First select some text or an object, then click this icon. Then click on or drag across other text or click an object to apply the same formatting.i93691
-Click the Clone Formatting icon +Click the Clone Formatting icon Icon on the Standard toolbar.
@@ -41,12 +41,12 @@ - + Icon -Clone Formatting +Clone Formatting
diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/stars.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/stars.xhp index a28e1087e6..d11ce95d42 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/stars.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/stars.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
-Stars and Banners -Opens the Stars and Banners toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document. +Stars and Banners +Opens the Stars and Banners toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ -Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape. -Some shapes have a special handle which you can drag to change the properties of the shape. The mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol over these special handles. +Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape. +Some shapes have a special handle which you can drag to change the properties of the shape. The mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol over these special handles. diff --git a/source/text/shared/02/symbolshapes.xhp b/source/text/shared/02/symbolshapes.xhp index 43aaa294d5..6c15fd0f2d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/02/symbolshapes.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/02/symbolshapes.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
-Symbol Shapes -Opens the Symbol Shapes toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document. +Symbol Shapes +Opens the Symbol Shapes toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ -Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape. -Some shapes have a special handle which you can drag to change the properties of the shape. The mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol over these special handles. +Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape. +Some shapes have a special handle which you can drag to change the properties of the shape. The mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol over these special handles. diff --git a/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp b/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp index 8bf0251f25..62d968a04e 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp @@ -34,153 +34,149 @@ AutoComplete function in text and list boxes macros; interrupting -General Shortcut Keys in $[officename] +General Shortcut Keys in $[officename]
- Using Shortcut Keys - A great deal of your application's functionality can be called up by using shortcut keys. For example, the Command+O + Using Shortcut Keys + A great deal of your application's functionality can be called up by using shortcut keys. For example, the Command+O Ctrl+O shortcut keys are shown next to the Open entry in the File menu. If you want to access this function by using the shortcut keys, press and hold down Command Ctrl and then press the O key. Release both keys after the dialog appears. - When operating your application, you can choose between using the mouse or the keyboard for almost all of the operations available. - + When operating your application, you can choose between using the mouse or the keyboard for almost all of the operations available. + Calling Menus With Shortcut Keys - + Some of the characters shown on the menu bar are underlined. You can access these menus directly by pressing the underlined character together with the ALT key. Once the menu is opened, you will again find underlined characters. You can access these menu items directly by simply pressing the underlined character key. - Using Shortcut Keys to Control Dialogs - There is always one element highlighted in any given dialog - usually shown by a broken frame. This element, which can be either a button, an option field, an entry in a list box or a check box, is said to have the focus on it. If the focal point is a button, pressing Enter runs it as if you had clicked it. A check box is toggled by pressing the spacebar. If an option field has the focus, use the arrow keys to change the activated option field in that area. Use the Tab key to go from one element or area to the next one, use Shift+Tab to go in the reverse direction. - Pressing ESC closes the dialog without saving changes. + Using Shortcut Keys to Control Dialogs + There is always one element highlighted in any given dialog - usually shown by a broken frame. This element, which can be either a button, an option field, an entry in a list box or a check box, is said to have the focus on it. If the focal point is a button, pressing Enter runs it as if you had clicked it. A check box is toggled by pressing the spacebar. If an option field has the focus, use the arrow keys to change the activated option field in that area. Use the Tab key to go from one element or area to the next one, use Shift+Tab to go in the reverse direction. + Pressing ESC closes the dialog without saving changes. If you place the focus on a button, not only will you see the dotted line framing the name of the button, but also a thicker shadow under the button selected. This indicates that if you exit the dialog by pressing the Enter key, it is the equivalent of pressing that button itself. - Shortcut Keys for Mouse Actions - If you are using drag-and-drop, selecting with the mouse or clicking objects and names, you can use the keys Shift, Command + Shortcut Keys for Mouse Actions + If you are using drag-and-drop, selecting with the mouse or clicking objects and names, you can use the keys Shift, Command Ctrl and occasionally Option Alt to access additional functionality. The modified functions available when holding down keys during drag-and-drop are indicated by the mouse pointer changing form. When selecting files or other objects, the modifier keys can extend the selection - the functions are explained where applicable. - Practical Text Input Fields + Practical Text Input Fields - You can open a context menu, which contains some of the most often-used commands. + You can open a context menu, which contains some of the most often-used commands. - Use the shortcut keys Command + Use the shortcut keys Command Ctrl+Shift+S to open the Special Characters dialog to insert one or more special characters. - Use Command + Use Command Ctrl+A to select the entire text. Use the right or left arrow key to remove the selection. - Double-click a word to select it. + Double-click a word to select it. - A triple-click in a text input field selects the entire field. A triple-click in a text document selects the current sentence. + A triple-click in a text input field selects the entire field. A triple-click in a text document selects the current sentence. - Use Command + Use Command Ctrl+Del to delete everything from the cursor position to the end of the word. - By using Command + By using Command Ctrl and right or left arrow key, the cursor will jump from word to word; if you also hold down the Shift key, one word after the other is selected. - INSRT is used to switch between the insert mode and the overwrite mode and back again. + INSRT is used to switch between the insert mode and the overwrite mode and back again. - Drag-and-drop can be used within and outside of a text box. + Drag-and-drop can be used within and outside of a text box. - The Command + The Command Ctrl+Z shortcut keys are used to undo modifications one step at a time; the text will then have the status it had before the first change.
- $[officename] has an AutoComplete function which activates itself in some text and list boxes. For example, enter c:\a + $[officename] has an AutoComplete function which activates itself in some text and list boxes. For example, enter c:\a ~/a into the URL field and the AutoComplete function displays the first file or first directory found on the C: drive in your home folder that starts with the letter "a". - Use the down arrow key to scroll through the other files and directories. Use the right arrow key to also display an existing subdirectory in the URL field. Quick AutoComplete is available if you press the End key after entering part of the URL. Once you find the document or directory you want, press Enter. + Use the down arrow key to scroll through the other files and directories. Use the right arrow key to also display an existing subdirectory in the URL field. Quick AutoComplete is available if you press the End key after entering part of the URL. Once you find the document or directory you want, press Enter.
- Interrupting Macros - If you want to terminate a macro that is currently running, press Command + Interrupting Macros + If you want to terminate a macro that is currently running, press Command Ctrl+Shift+Q. - List of General Shortcut Keys in $[officename] - The shortcut keys are shown on the right hand side of the menu lists next to the corresponding menu command. (Not all of the mentioned keys for controlling dialogs are available on the Macintosh.) + List of General Shortcut Keys in $[officename] + The shortcut keys are shown on the right hand side of the menu lists next to the corresponding menu command. (Not all of the mentioned keys for controlling dialogs are available on the Macintosh.) Shortcut keys for controlling dialogs - Shortcut Keys + Shortcut Keys - Effect + Effect - Enter key + Enter key - Activates the focused button in a dialog + Activates the focused button in a dialog - Esc + Esc - Terminates the action or dialog. If in $[officename] Help: goes up one level. + Terminates the action or dialog. If in $[officename] Help: goes up one level. - Spacebar + Spacebar - Toggles the focused check box in a dialog. + Toggles the focused check box in a dialog. - Arrow keys + Arrow keys - Changes the active control field in an option section of a dialog. + Changes the active control field in an option section of a dialog. - Tab + Tab - Advances focus to the next section or element in a dialog. + Advances focus to the next section or element in a dialog. - Shift+Tab + Shift+Tab - Moves the focus to the previous section or element in a dialog. + Moves the focus to the previous section or element in a dialog. - Option + Option Alt+Down Arrow - Opens the list of the control field currently selected in a dialog. These shortcut keys apply not only to combo boxes but also to icon buttons with pop-up menus. Close an opened list by pressing the Escape key. + Opens the list of the control field currently selected in a dialog. These shortcut keys apply not only to combo boxes but also to icon buttons with pop-up menus. Close an opened list by pressing the Escape key.
@@ -196,42 +192,42 @@ - CommandCtrl+O + CommandCtrl+O - Opens a document. + Opens a document. - CommandCtrl+S + CommandCtrl+S - Saves the current document. + Saves the current document. - CommandCtrl+N + CommandCtrl+N - Creates a new document. + Creates a new document. - CommandCtrl+Shift+N + CommandCtrl+Shift+N - Opens Templates and Documents dialog. + Opens Templates and Documents dialog. - CommandCtrl+P + CommandCtrl+P - Prints document. + Prints document. @@ -244,115 +240,115 @@ - CommandCtrl+H + CommandCtrl+H - Calls the Find & Replace dialog. + Calls the Find & Replace dialog. - CommandCtrl+Shift+F + CommandCtrl+Shift+F - Searches for the last entered search term. + Searches for the last entered search term. - Ctrl+Shift+J + Ctrl+Shift+J - Toggles the view between fullscreen mode and normal mode in Writer or Calc + Toggles the view between fullscreen mode and normal mode in Writer or Calc - CommandCtrl+Shift+R + CommandCtrl+Shift+R - Redraws the document view. + Redraws the document view. - CommandCtrl+Shift+I + CommandCtrl+Shift+I - Enable or disable the selection cursor in read-only text. + Enable or disable the selection cursor in read-only text. - F1 + F1 - Starts the $[officename] Help - In the $[officename] Help: jumps to main help page. + Starts the $[officename] Help + In the $[officename] Help: jumps to main help page. - Shift+F1 + Shift+F1 - Context Help + Context Help - Shift+F2 + Shift+F2 - Turns on Extended Tips for the currently selected command, icon or control. + Turns on Extended Tips for the currently selected command, icon or control. - F6 + F6 - Sets focus in next subwindow (for example, document/data source view) + Sets focus in next subwindow (for example, document/data source view) - Shift+F6 + Shift+F6 - Sets focus in previous subwindow. + Sets focus in previous subwindow. - F10 + F10 - Activates the first menu (File menu) + Activates the first menu (File menu) - Shift+F10 + Shift+F10 - Opens the context menu. + Opens the context menu. - CommandCtrl+F4 or OptionAlt+F4 + CommandCtrl+F4 or OptionAlt+F4 - Closes the current document (close $[officename] when the last open document is closed) + Closes the current document (close $[officename] when the last open document is closed) - CommandCtrl+Q + CommandCtrl+Q - Exits application. + Exits application. @@ -368,122 +364,122 @@ - CommandCtrl+Tab + CommandCtrl+Tab - When positioned at the start of a header, a tab is inserted. + When positioned at the start of a header, a tab is inserted. - Enter (if an OLE object is selected) + Enter (if an OLE object is selected) - Activates the selected OLE object. + Activates the selected OLE object. - Enter (if a drawing object or text object is selected) + Enter (if a drawing object or text object is selected) - Activates text input mode. + Activates text input mode. - CommandCtrl+X + CommandCtrl+X - Cuts out the selected elements. + Cuts out the selected elements. - CommandCtrl+C + CommandCtrl+C - Copies the selected items. + Copies the selected items. - CommandCtrl+V + CommandCtrl+V - Pastes from the clipboard. + Pastes from the clipboard. - Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+Shift+V + Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+Shift+V - Pastes unformatted text from the clipboard. The text is pasted using the format that exists at the insertion point.CWS mox01 + Pastes unformatted text from the clipboard. The text is pasted using the format that exists at the insertion point.CWS mox01 - CommandCtrl+Shift+V + CommandCtrl+Shift+V - Opens the Paste Special dialog. + Opens the Paste Special dialog. - CommandCtrl+A + CommandCtrl+A - Selects all. + Selects all. - CommandCtrl+Z + CommandCtrl+Z - Undoes last action. + Undoes last action. - Command+Shift+ZCtrl+Y + Command+Shift+ZCtrl+Y - Redoes last action. + Redoes last action. - CommandCtrl+Shift+Y + CommandCtrl+Shift+Y - Repeats last command. + Repeats last command. - CommandCtrl+I + CommandCtrl+I - The Italic attribute is applied to the selected area. If the cursor is positioned in a word, this word is also marked in italic. + The Italic attribute is applied to the selected area. If the cursor is positioned in a word, this word is also marked in italic. - CommandCtrl+B + CommandCtrl+B - The Bold attribute is applied to the selected area. If the cursor is positioned in a word, this word is also put in bold. + The Bold attribute is applied to the selected area. If the cursor is positioned in a word, this word is also put in bold. - CommandCtrl+U + CommandCtrl+U - The Underlined attribute is applied to the selected area. If the cursor is positioned in a word, this word is also underlined. + The Underlined attribute is applied to the selected area. If the cursor is positioned in a word, this word is also underlined. @@ -491,502 +487,497 @@ ⌃MCtrl+M - Removes direct formatting from selected text or objects (as in Format - Clear Direct Formatting) + Removes direct formatting from selected text or objects (as in Format - Clear Direct Formatting) - Shortcut keys in the Gallery + Shortcut keys in the Gallery - Shortcut keys + Shortcut keys - Result + Result - Tab + Tab - Moves between areas. + Moves between areas. - Shift+Tab + Shift+Tab - Moves between areas (backwards) + Moves between areas (backwards)
- Shortcut keys in the New Theme area of the Gallery: + Shortcut keys in the New Theme area of the Gallery: - Shortcut keys + Shortcut keys - Result + Result - Up Arrow + Up Arrow - Moves the selection up one. + Moves the selection up one. - Down Arrow + Down Arrow - Moves the selection down. + Moves the selection down. - Command + Command Ctrl+Enter - Opens the Properties dialog. + Opens the Properties dialog. - Shift+F10 + Shift+F10 - Opens a context menu. + Opens a context menu. - Command + Command Ctrl+U - Refreshes the selected theme. + Refreshes the selected theme. - Command + Command Ctrl+R - Opens the Enter Title dialog. + Opens the Enter Title dialog. - Command + Command Ctrl+D - Deletes the selected theme. + Deletes the selected theme. - Insert + Insert - Inserts a new theme + Inserts a new theme
- Shortcut keys in the Gallery preview area: + Shortcut keys in the Gallery preview area: - Shortcut keys + Shortcut keys - Result + Result - Home + Home - Jumps to the first entry. + Jumps to the first entry. - End + End - Jumps to the last entry. + Jumps to the last entry. - Left Arrow + Left Arrow - Selects the next Gallery element on the left. + Selects the next Gallery element on the left. - Right Arrow + Right Arrow - Selects the next Gallery element on the right. + Selects the next Gallery element on the right. - Up Arrow + Up Arrow - Selects the next Gallery element above. + Selects the next Gallery element above. - Down Arrow + Down Arrow - Selects the next Gallery element below. + Selects the next Gallery element below. - Page Up + Page Up - Scroll up one screen. + Scroll up one screen. - Page Down + Page Down - Scroll down one screen. + Scroll down one screen. - Command + Command Ctrl+Shift+Insert - Inserts the selected object as a linked object into the current document. + Inserts the selected object as a linked object into the current document. - Command + Command Ctrl+I - Inserts a copy of the selected object into the current document. + Inserts a copy of the selected object into the current document. - Command + Command Ctrl+T - Opens the Enter Title dialog. + Opens the Enter Title dialog. - Command + Command Ctrl+P - Switches between themes view and object view. + Switches between themes view and object view. - Spacebar + Spacebar - Switches between themes view and object view. + Switches between themes view and object view. - Enter + Enter - Switches between themes view and object view. + Switches between themes view and object view. - Step backward (only in object view) + Step backward (only in object view) - Switches back to main overview. + Switches back to main overview.
- Selecting Rows and Columns in a Database Table (opened by F4) + Selecting Rows and Columns in a Database Table (opened by F4) - Shortcut keys + Shortcut keys - Result + Result - Spacebar + Spacebar - Toggles row selection, except when the row is in edit mode. + Toggles row selection, except when the row is in edit mode. - Command + Command Ctrl+Spacebar - Toggles row selection + Toggles row selection - Shift+Spacebar + Shift+Spacebar - Selects the current column + Selects the current column - Command + Command Ctrl+Page Up - Moves pointer to the first row + Moves pointer to the first row - Command + Command Ctrl+Page Down - Moves pointer to the last row + Moves pointer to the last row
- Shortcut Keys for Drawing Objects + Shortcut Keys for Drawing Objects - Shortcut keys + Shortcut keys - Result + Result - Select the toolbar with F6. Use the Down Arrow and Right Arrow to select the desired toolbar icon and press Command + Select the toolbar with F6. Use the Down Arrow and Right Arrow to select the desired toolbar icon and press Command Ctrl+Enter - Inserts a Drawing Object. + Inserts a Drawing Object. - Select the document with Command + Select the document with Command Ctrl+F6 and press Tab - Selects a Drawing Object. + Selects a Drawing Object. - Tab + Tab - Selects the next Drawing Object. + Selects the next Drawing Object. - Shift+Tab + Shift+Tab - Selects the previous Drawing Object. + Selects the previous Drawing Object. - Command + Command Ctrl+Home - Selects the first Drawing Object. + Selects the first Drawing Object. - Command + Command Ctrl+End - Selects the last Drawing Object. + Selects the last Drawing Object. - Esc + Esc - Ends Drawing Object selection. + Ends Drawing Object selection. - Esc (in Handle Selection Mode) + Esc (in Handle Selection Mode) - Exit Handle Selection Mode and return to Object Selection Mode. + Exit Handle Selection Mode and return to Object Selection Mode. - Up/Down/Left/Right Arrow + Up/Down/Left/Right Arrow - Move the selected point (the snap-to-grid functions are temporarily disabled, but end points still snap to each other). + Move the selected point (the snap-to-grid functions are temporarily disabled, but end points still snap to each other). - Option + Option Alt+Up/Down/Left/Right Arrow - Moves the selected Drawing Object one pixel (in Selection Mode) - Re-sizes a Drawing Object (in Handle Selection Mode) - Rotates a Drawing Object (in Rotation Mode) - Opens the properties dialog for a Drawing Object. - Activates the Point Selection mode for the selected drawing object. + Moves the selected Drawing Object one pixel (in Selection Mode) + Re-sizes a Drawing Object (in Handle Selection Mode) + Rotates a Drawing Object (in Rotation Mode) + Opens the properties dialog for a Drawing Object. + Activates the Point Selection mode for the selected drawing object. - Spacebar + Spacebar - Select a point of a drawing object (in Point Selection mode) / Cancel selection. - The selected point blinks once per second. + Select a point of a drawing object (in Point Selection mode) / Cancel selection. + The selected point blinks once per second. - Shift+Spacebar + Shift+Spacebar - Select an additional point in Point Selection mode. + Select an additional point in Point Selection mode. - Command + Command Ctrl+Tab - Select the next point of the drawing object (Point Selection mode) - In Rotation mode, the center of rotation can also be selected. + Select the next point of the drawing object (Point Selection mode) + In Rotation mode, the center of rotation can also be selected. - Command + Command Ctrl+Shift+Tab - Select the previous point of the drawing object (Point Selection mode) + Select the previous point of the drawing object (Point Selection mode) - Command + Command Ctrl+Enter - A new drawing object with default size is placed in the center of the current view. + A new drawing object with default size is placed in the center of the current view. - Command + Command Ctrl+Enter at the Selection icon - Activates the first drawing object in the document. + Activates the first drawing object in the document. - Esc + Esc - Leave the Point Selection mode. The drawing object is selected afterwards. - Edit a point of a drawing object (Point Edit mode) + Leave the Point Selection mode. The drawing object is selected afterwards. + Edit a point of a drawing object (Point Edit mode) - Any text or numerical key + Any text or numerical key - If a drawing object is selected, switches to edit mode and places the cursor at the end of the text in the drawing object. A printable character is inserted. + If a drawing object is selected, switches to edit mode and places the cursor at the end of the text in the drawing object. A printable character is inserted. - Option + Option Alt key while creating or scaling a graphic object - The position of the object's center is fixed. + The position of the object's center is fixed. - Shift key while creating or scaling a graphic object + Shift key while creating or scaling a graphic object - The ratio of the object's width to height is fixed. + The ratio of the object's width to height is fixed.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/04/01020000.xhp b/source/text/shared/04/01020000.xhp index 62ed1205c3..8d18220767 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/04/01020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/04/01020000.xhp @@ -33,237 +33,237 @@ shortcut keys; in databases databases; shortcut keys -Database Shortcut Keys +Database Shortcut Keys -The following is a list of shortcut keys available within databases. -The general shortcut keys in $[officename] also apply. +The following is a list of shortcut keys available within databases. +The general shortcut keys in $[officename] also apply.
-Shortcut keys for databases -In the query design +Shortcut keys for databases +In the query design -Shortcut Keys +Shortcut Keys -Results +Results -F6 +F6 -Jump between the query design areas. +Jump between the query design areas. -Delete +Delete -Deletes a table from the query design. +Deletes a table from the query design. -Tab +Tab -Selects the connection line. +Selects the connection line. -Shift+F10 +Shift+F10 -Opens the context menu. +Opens the context menu. -F4 +F4 -Preview +Preview -F5 +F5 -Run query +Run query -F7 +F7 -Add table or query +Add table or query
-Control Properties Window +Control Properties Window -Shortcut Keys +Shortcut Keys -Results +Results -OptionAlt+Down Arrow +OptionAlt+Down Arrow -Opens the combo box. +Opens the combo box. -OptionAlt+Up Arrow +OptionAlt+Up Arrow -Closes the combo box. +Closes the combo box. -Shift+Enter +Shift+Enter -Inserts a new line. +Inserts a new line. -Up arrow +Up arrow -Positions the cursor in the previous line. +Positions the cursor in the previous line. -Down arrow +Down arrow -Puts the cursor into the next line. +Puts the cursor into the next line. -Enter +Enter -Completes the input in the field and places the cursor into the next field. +Completes the input in the field and places the cursor into the next field. -CommandCtrl+F6 +CommandCtrl+F6 -Sets the focus (if not in design mode) to the first control. The first control is the first one listed in the Form Navigator. +Sets the focus (if not in design mode) to the first control. The first control is the first one listed in the Form Navigator.
-Shortcuts for creating Basic dialogs +Shortcuts for creating Basic dialogs -Shortcut Keys +Shortcut Keys -Results +Results -CommandCtrl+PgUp +CommandCtrl+PgUp -Jumps between tabs. +Jumps between tabs. -CommandCtrl+PgDn +CommandCtrl+PgDn -Jumps between tabs. +Jumps between tabs. -F6 +F6 -Jump between windows. +Jump between windows. -Tab +Tab -Selection of the control fields. +Selection of the control fields. -Shift+Tab +Shift+Tab -Selection of the control fields in opposite direction. +Selection of the control fields in opposite direction. -CommandCtrl+Enter +CommandCtrl+Enter -Inserts the selected control. +Inserts the selected control. -Arrow key -CommandCtrl+arrow key +Arrow key +CommandCtrl+arrow key -Moves the selected control in steps of 1 mm in the respective direction. In point edit mode, it changes the size of the selected control. +Moves the selected control in steps of 1 mm in the respective direction. In point edit mode, it changes the size of the selected control. -CommandCtrl+Tab +CommandCtrl+Tab -In point edit mode, jumps to next handle. +In point edit mode, jumps to next handle. -Shift+CommandCtrl+Tab +Shift+CommandCtrl+Tab -In point edit mode, jumps to previous handle. +In point edit mode, jumps to previous handle. -Esc +Esc -Leaves the current selection. +Leaves the current selection.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/05/00000002.xhp b/source/text/shared/05/00000002.xhp index ce2b2762dd..a80f0d0965 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/05/00000002.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/05/00000002.xhp @@ -31,13 +31,13 @@ - Icons in the Documentation + Icons in the Documentation
- Icons in the Documentation - There are three icons used to call your attention to additional helpful information. - The "Important!" icon points out important information regarding data and system security. - The "Note" icon points out extra information: for example, alternative ways to reach a certain goal. - The "Tip" icon points out tips for working with the program in a more efficient manner. + Icons in the Documentation + There are three icons used to call your attention to additional helpful information. + The "Important!" icon points out important information regarding data and system security. + The "Note" icon points out extra information: for example, alternative ways to reach a certain goal. + The "Tip" icon points out tips for working with the program in a more efficient manner.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/05/00000100.xhp b/source/text/shared/05/00000100.xhp index 804107f97f..5eb81df953 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/05/00000100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/05/00000100.xhp @@ -28,8 +28,8 @@
this section is displayed on all module main pages above the other "Help about Help" links. -The Help references the default settings of the program on a system that is set to defaults. Descriptions of colors, mouse actions, or other configurable items can be different for your program and system. +The Help references the default settings of the program on a system that is set to defaults. Descriptions of colors, mouse actions, or other configurable items can be different for your program and system.
-The $[officename] Help system provides easy access to information and support. There are several ways to find what you are looking for in the Help environment: You can search for a specific keyword in the Index, carry out a full-text search under Find, or look through a hierarchical list of the Topics. +The $[officename] Help system provides easy access to information and support. There are several ways to find what you are looking for in the Help environment: You can search for a specific keyword in the Index, carry out a full-text search under Find, or look through a hierarchical list of the Topics. diff --git a/source/text/shared/05/00000110.xhp b/source/text/shared/05/00000110.xhp index 339761cbc7..5bf269212f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/05/00000110.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/05/00000110.xhp @@ -29,171 +29,171 @@ -The %PRODUCTNAME Help Window +The %PRODUCTNAME Help Window -The Help system for all versions of the software is based on the same source files. Some of the functions described in Help may not be included in this particular distribution. Some features specific to a distribution may not be mentioned in this Help. -Provides an overview of the Help systemThe Help window shows the currently selected Help page. +The Help system for all versions of the software is based on the same source files. Some of the functions described in Help may not be included in this particular distribution. Some features specific to a distribution may not be mentioned in this Help. +Provides an overview of the Help systemThe Help window shows the currently selected Help page. -The Toolbar contains important functions for controlling the Help system: +The Toolbar contains important functions for controlling the Help system: - + Icon -Hides and shows the navigation pane +Hides and shows the navigation pane - + Icon -Moves back to the previous page +Moves back to the previous page - + Icon -Moves forward to the next page +Moves forward to the next page - + Icon -Moves to the first page of the current Help topic +Moves to the first page of the current Help topic - + Icon -Prints the current page +Prints the current page - + Icon -Adds this page to your bookmarks +Adds this page to your bookmarks - + Search icon -Opens the Find on this page dialog. +Opens the Find on this page dialog.
- These commands can also be found in the context menu of the Help document. - Help Page - You can copy from the Help Viewer to the clipboard on your operating system with standard copy commands. For example: + These commands can also be found in the context menu of the Help document. + Help Page + You can copy from the Help Viewer to the clipboard on your operating system with standard copy commands. For example: - On a Help page, select the text that you want to copy. + On a Help page, select the text that you want to copy. - Press Command + Press Command Ctrl+C. - To search the current Help page: + To search the current Help page: - Click the Find on this Page icon. - The Find on this Page dialog opens. - You can also click in the Help page and press Command + Click the Find on this Page icon. + The Find on this Page dialog opens. + You can also click in the Help page and press Command Ctrl+F. - In the Search for box, enter the text that you want to find. + In the Search for box, enter the text that you want to find. - Select the search options that you want to use. + Select the search options that you want to use. - Click Find. - To find the next occurrence of the search term on the page, click Find again. + Click Find. + To find the next occurrence of the search term on the page, click Find again. -Enter the text that you want to search for or select a text entry in the list. +Enter the text that you want to search for or select a text entry in the list. -Finds complete words only. +Finds complete words only. -Distinguishes between uppercase text and lowercase text. +Distinguishes between uppercase text and lowercase text. -Searches the entire Help page, starting at the current position of the cursor. +Searches the entire Help page, starting at the current position of the cursor. -Searches backwards from the current position of the cursor. +Searches backwards from the current position of the cursor. -Finds the next occurrence of the search term. - Navigation Pane +Finds the next occurrence of the search term. + Navigation Pane -The navigation pane of the Help window contains the tab pages Contents, Index, Find and Bookmarks. +The navigation pane of the Help window contains the tab pages Contents, Index, Find and Bookmarks. -The list box located at the very top is where you can select other %PRODUCTNAME Help modules. The Index and Find tab pages only contain the data for the selected %PRODUCTNAME module. +The list box located at the very top is where you can select other %PRODUCTNAME Help modules. The Index and Find tab pages only contain the data for the selected %PRODUCTNAME module. - Contents + Contents - Displays an index of the main topics of all modules. + Displays an index of the main topics of all modules. - Index + Index - Displays a list of index keywords for the currently selected %PRODUCTNAME module. + Displays a list of index keywords for the currently selected %PRODUCTNAME module. - Find + Find - Allows you to carry out a full-text search. The search will include the entire Help contents of the currently selected %PRODUCTNAME module. + Allows you to carry out a full-text search. The search will include the entire Help contents of the currently selected %PRODUCTNAME module. - Bookmarks + Bookmarks - Contains user-defined bookmarks. You can edit or delete bookmarks, or click them to go to the corresponding pages. + Contains user-defined bookmarks. You can edit or delete bookmarks, or click them to go to the corresponding pages.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/05/00000120.xhp b/source/text/shared/05/00000120.xhp index 03557ef3ef..1e090e72ad 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/05/00000120.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/05/00000120.xhp @@ -30,18 +30,17 @@ Help; Help tips tooltips; help - - Tips and Extended Tips + + Tips and Extended Tips - Tips and Extended Tips provide help while you work. - Tips - Tips provide you with the names of toolbar buttons. To display a tip, rest the pointer over a toolbar button until the name of the button appears. - Tips are also displayed for some elements in a document, such as chapter names when you scroll through a long document. - Tips are always enabled. - Extended Tips - Extended tips provide a brief description about buttons and commands. To display an extended tip, press Shift+F1, then point to a button or command. - If you always want extended tips instead of tips, enable the extended tips on %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences + Tips and Extended Tips provide help while you work. + Tips + Tips provide you with the names of toolbar buttons. To display a tip, rest the pointer over a toolbar button until the name of the button appears. + Tips are also displayed for some elements in a document, such as chapter names when you scroll through a long document. + Tips are always enabled. + Extended Tips + Extended tips provide a brief description about buttons and commands. To display an extended tip, press Shift+F1, then point to a button or command. + If you always want extended tips instead of tips, enable the extended tips on %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/05/00000130.xhp b/source/text/shared/05/00000130.xhp index 7ce6bdee65..d4bfd6b3d8 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/05/00000130.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/05/00000130.xhp @@ -35,16 +35,16 @@ Index tab in Help Help; keywords - -Index - Keyword Search in the Help + +Index - Keyword Search in the Help -Double-click an entry or type the word you want to find in the index. +Double-click an entry or type the word you want to find in the index. -Click to display the selected topic. -You can search for a specific topic by typing a word into the Search term text box. The window contains an alphabetical list of index terms. -If the cursor is in the index list when you type the search term, the display will jump directly to the next match. When you type a word in the Search term text box, the focus will jump to the best match in the index list. -The index and full-text searches always apply to the currently selected %PRODUCTNAME application. Select the appropriate application using the list box on the help viewer's toolbar. +Click to display the selected topic. +You can search for a specific topic by typing a word into the Search term text box. The window contains an alphabetical list of index terms. +If the cursor is in the index list when you type the search term, the display will jump directly to the next match. When you type a word in the Search term text box, the focus will jump to the best match in the index list. +The index and full-text searches always apply to the currently selected %PRODUCTNAME application. Select the appropriate application using the list box on the help viewer's toolbar.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/05/00000140.xhp b/source/text/shared/05/00000140.xhp index f10058519a..e2ceb8e199 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/05/00000140.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/05/00000140.xhp @@ -34,28 +34,28 @@ Help; full-text search full-text search in Help - -Find - The Full-Text Search + +Find - The Full-Text Search -Enter the search term here. The search is not case-sensitive. +Enter the search term here. The search is not case-sensitive. -Click to start a full-text search for the term you entered. +Click to start a full-text search for the term you entered. -Lists the headings of the pages found in your full-text search. To display a page, double-click its entry. +Lists the headings of the pages found in your full-text search. To display a page, double-click its entry. -Specifies whether to carry out an exact search for the word you entered. Incomplete words will not be found. +Specifies whether to carry out an exact search for the word you entered. Incomplete words will not be found. -Specifies whether to only search in document headings for the search term. +Specifies whether to only search in document headings for the search term. -Displays the entry selected in the list. -The full text search function in $[officename] Help allows you to find Help documents that contain any combination of search terms. To do this, type one or more words into the Search term text field. -The Search term text field stores the words you entered last. To repeat a previous search, click the arrow icon and select the term from the list. -After the search has been carried out, the document headings of the results appear in a list. Either double-click an entry, or select it and click Display to load the corresponding Help document. -Use the check box Find in headings only to limit the search to document headings. -The Complete words only check box allows you to perform an exact search. If this box is marked, incomplete words will not be found. Do not mark this check box if the search term you enter should also be found as part of a longer word. -You can enter any combination of search terms, separated by spaces. Searching is not case-sensitive. -The index and full-text searches always apply to the currently selected %PRODUCTNAME application. Select the appropriate application using the list box on the help viewer's toolbar. +Displays the entry selected in the list. +The full text search function in $[officename] Help allows you to find Help documents that contain any combination of search terms. To do this, type one or more words into the Search term text field. +The Search term text field stores the words you entered last. To repeat a previous search, click the arrow icon and select the term from the list. +After the search has been carried out, the document headings of the results appear in a list. Either double-click an entry, or select it and click Display to load the corresponding Help document. +Use the check box Find in headings only to limit the search to document headings. +The Complete words only check box allows you to perform an exact search. If this box is marked, incomplete words will not be found. Do not mark this check box if the search term you enter should also be found as part of a longer word. +You can enter any combination of search terms, separated by spaces. Searching is not case-sensitive. +The index and full-text searches always apply to the currently selected %PRODUCTNAME application. Select the appropriate application using the list box on the help viewer's toolbar.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/05/00000150.xhp b/source/text/shared/05/00000150.xhp index fb6dfd2e64..158ab1b86d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/05/00000150.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/05/00000150.xhp @@ -32,40 +32,40 @@ - Help; bookmarksbookmarks; Help - Managing Bookmarks - Displays the name of the bookmarked page. You can also type a new name for the bookmark. + Help; bookmarksbookmarks; Help + Managing Bookmarks + Displays the name of the bookmarked page. You can also type a new name for the bookmark. - Icon + Icon - Use the Add to Bookmarks icon to set a bookmark for the current page shown in the Help. + Use the Add to Bookmarks icon to set a bookmark for the current page shown in the Help.
- You can find the bookmarks on the Bookmarks tab page. + You can find the bookmarks on the Bookmarks tab page. - Double-clicking a bookmark or pressing the Return key opens the assigned page in Help. A right-click opens the context menu. + Double-clicking a bookmark or pressing the Return key opens the assigned page in Help. A right-click opens the context menu. - Use the Del key to delete a selected bookmark. + Use the Del key to delete a selected bookmark. - The following commands are on the context menu of a bookmark: + The following commands are on the context menu of a bookmark: - Display - displays the selected help subject. + Display - displays the selected help subject. - Rename - opens a dialog for entering another name for the bookmark. + Rename - opens a dialog for entering another name for the bookmark. - Delete - deletes the bookmark selected . + Delete - deletes the bookmark selected .
diff --git a/source/text/shared/05/00000160.xhp b/source/text/shared/05/00000160.xhp index 730ee02eaa..6dee7b56d6 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/05/00000160.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/05/00000160.xhp @@ -33,45 +33,45 @@ Help; topics tree view of Help - + -Contents - The Main Help Topics +Contents - The Main Help Topics -Displays the main help themes, arranged in a similar way to folders in a file manager. +Displays the main help themes, arranged in a similar way to folders in a file manager. - + Icon -Double-click a closed folder to open it and display the subfolders and Help pages. +Double-click a closed folder to open it and display the subfolders and Help pages. - + Icon -Double-click an open folder to close it and hide the subfolders and Help pages. +Double-click an open folder to close it and hide the subfolders and Help pages. - + Icon -Double-click a document icon to display the corresponding Help page. +Double-click a document icon to display the corresponding Help page.
-Use the arrow keys in combination with the Return key to drop down and roll up entries and to open documents. +Use the arrow keys in combination with the Return key to drop down and roll up entries and to open documents.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/05/err_html.xhp b/source/text/shared/05/err_html.xhp index 184a1d0b36..be7ed24e26 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/05/err_html.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/05/err_html.xhp @@ -30,11 +30,11 @@ -Could not find Help page. -Unfortunately the Help page you selected was not found. The following data could be helpful in locating the error: -Help ID: -You can install missing Help modules using the Setup application. -Click +Could not find Help page. +Unfortunately the Help page you selected was not found. The following data could be helpful in locating the error: +Help ID: +You can install missing Help modules using the Setup application. +Click Icon Back to return to the previous page. diff --git a/source/text/shared/07/09000000.xhp b/source/text/shared/07/09000000.xhp index 39dcb2dc15..4a4d7a7dc3 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/07/09000000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/07/09000000.xhp @@ -32,17 +32,17 @@
-Web Pages -To create a new web page for the Internet, open a new HTML Document by choosing File - New. +Web Pages +To create a new web page for the Internet, open a new HTML Document by choosing File - New.
-A tool for creating new web pages is the Web Layout mode, which you enable with View - Web. -Creating a New Web Page +A tool for creating new web pages is the Web Layout mode, which you enable with View - Web. +Creating a New Web Page -Switch to the web layout mode by choosing View - Web or by opening a new HTML document. +Switch to the web layout mode by choosing View - Web or by opening a new HTML document. -To create an HTML page from your $[officename] document, save the page using one of the "HTML Document" file types. +To create an HTML page from your $[officename] document, save the page using one of the "HTML Document" file types. deleted remaining outdated content, see #i62014 diff --git a/source/text/shared/3dsettings_toolbar.xhp b/source/text/shared/3dsettings_toolbar.xhp index 831ffd0d98..96970dc3e4 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/3dsettings_toolbar.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/3dsettings_toolbar.xhp @@ -28,58 +28,58 @@
- 3D-Settings + 3D-Settings - The 3D-Settings toolbar controls properties of selected 3D objects. + The 3D-Settings toolbar controls properties of selected 3D objects.
-Extrusion on/off - Switches the 3D effects on and off for the selected objects. +Extrusion on/off + Switches the 3D effects on and off for the selected objects. -Tilt Down - Tilts the selected object downwards by five degrees. +Tilt Down + Tilts the selected object downwards by five degrees. -Tilt Up - Tilts the selected object upwards by five degrees. +Tilt Up + Tilts the selected object upwards by five degrees. -Tilt Left - Tilts the selected object left by five degrees. +Tilt Left + Tilts the selected object left by five degrees. -Tilt Right - Tilts the selected object right by five degrees. +Tilt Right + Tilts the selected object right by five degrees. -Depth - Opens the Extrusion Depth window. - Select an extrusion depth. +Depth + Opens the Extrusion Depth window. + Select an extrusion depth. -Enter an extrusion depth. +Enter an extrusion depth. -Direction - Opens the Extrusion Direction window. +Direction + Opens the Extrusion Direction window. -Select a direction.UFI: same ID for Direction and Lighting direction - Select a perspective or parallel extrusion method. +Select a direction.UFI: same ID for Direction and Lighting direction + Select a perspective or parallel extrusion method. -Lighting - Opens the Extrusion Lighting window. - Select a lighting direction. - Select a lighting intensity. +Lighting + Opens the Extrusion Lighting window. + Select a lighting direction. + Select a lighting intensity. -Surface - Opens the Extrusion Surface window. - Select a surface material or a wireframe display. +Surface + Opens the Extrusion Surface window. + Select a surface material or a wireframe display. -3D Color - Opens the Extrusion Color toolbar. +3D Color + Opens the Extrusion Color toolbar. diff --git a/source/text/shared/autokorr/01000000.xhp b/source/text/shared/autokorr/01000000.xhp index ae1b1a40b2..d03b206664 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autokorr/01000000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autokorr/01000000.xhp @@ -32,9 +32,9 @@ -AutoCorrect has been activated -TWo INitial CApitals have been corrected -Typing errors such as "WOrd" have been corrected and replaced by the AutoCorrect function to "Word". +AutoCorrect has been activated +TWo INitial CApitals have been corrected +Typing errors such as "WOrd" have been corrected and replaced by the AutoCorrect function to "Word".
diff --git a/source/text/shared/autokorr/02000000.xhp b/source/text/shared/autokorr/02000000.xhp index 59a23748e8..4359cbc9c3 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autokorr/02000000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autokorr/02000000.xhp @@ -32,9 +32,9 @@ -AutoCorrect has been activated -Start each sentence with a capital letter -Your text was corrected with AutoCorrect so that the current word began with a capital letter. AutoCorrect changes words at the beginning of a paragraph, and words after the character at the end of a sentence (period, exclamation point, question mark). +AutoCorrect has been activated +Start each sentence with a capital letter +Your text was corrected with AutoCorrect so that the current word began with a capital letter. AutoCorrect changes words at the beginning of a paragraph, and words after the character at the end of a sentence (period, exclamation point, question mark).
diff --git a/source/text/shared/autokorr/03000000.xhp b/source/text/shared/autokorr/03000000.xhp index c294fdca7e..f3fc8e4a3c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autokorr/03000000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autokorr/03000000.xhp @@ -32,9 +32,9 @@ -AutoCorrect has been activated -Two capital letters at the beginning of a word and a sentence have been corrected to one capital letter -AutoCorrect has modified your text so that a word beginning with two capital letters at the beginning of a sentence now starts with one capital letter. +AutoCorrect has been activated +Two capital letters at the beginning of a word and a sentence have been corrected to one capital letter +AutoCorrect has modified your text so that a word beginning with two capital letters at the beginning of a sentence now starts with one capital letter.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/autokorr/04000000.xhp b/source/text/shared/autokorr/04000000.xhp index 9b4c5ccc52..4cb9277da9 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autokorr/04000000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autokorr/04000000.xhp @@ -33,9 +33,9 @@ -AutoCorrect has been activated -A replacement has been carried out -AutoCorrect has replaced a word. +AutoCorrect has been activated +A replacement has been carried out +AutoCorrect has replaced a word.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/autokorr/05000000.xhp b/source/text/shared/autokorr/05000000.xhp index dc1110a3fa..d849041cc1 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autokorr/05000000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autokorr/05000000.xhp @@ -31,9 +31,9 @@ -AutoCorrect has been activated -AutoCorrect has performed a replacement. The beginning of the sentence now starts with a capital letter -AutoCorrect has performed a replacement, and the beginning of the sentence now starts with a capital letter. +AutoCorrect has been activated +AutoCorrect has performed a replacement. The beginning of the sentence now starts with a capital letter +AutoCorrect has performed a replacement, and the beginning of the sentence now starts with a capital letter.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/autokorr/06000000.xhp b/source/text/shared/autokorr/06000000.xhp index 5797c9de0b..b41b751199 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autokorr/06000000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autokorr/06000000.xhp @@ -31,9 +31,9 @@ -AutoCorrect has been activated -Double quotation marks (") have been replaced -Your text was corrected by Autocorrect so that double quotation marks were replaced by typographical quotation marks. +AutoCorrect has been activated +Double quotation marks (") have been replaced +Your text was corrected by Autocorrect so that double quotation marks were replaced by typographical quotation marks.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/autokorr/07000000.xhp b/source/text/shared/autokorr/07000000.xhp index 56b1f907df..26b8a8b052 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autokorr/07000000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autokorr/07000000.xhp @@ -31,9 +31,9 @@ -AutoCorrect has been activated -Single quotes have been replaced -Your text was corrected by Autocorrect so that single quotation marks were replaced by typographical quotation marks. +AutoCorrect has been activated +Single quotes have been replaced +Your text was corrected by Autocorrect so that single quotation marks were replaced by typographical quotation marks.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/autokorr/08000000.xhp b/source/text/shared/autokorr/08000000.xhp index 0471fce0eb..96350addb9 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autokorr/08000000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autokorr/08000000.xhp @@ -31,9 +31,9 @@ -AutoCorrect has been activated -An URL has been detected and a hyperlink attribute has been set -AutoCorrect has modified your text. A string has been detected as an URL and is now shown as a hyperlink. +AutoCorrect has been activated +An URL has been detected and a hyperlink attribute has been set +AutoCorrect has modified your text. A string has been detected as an URL and is now shown as a hyperlink.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/autokorr/09000000.xhp b/source/text/shared/autokorr/09000000.xhp index 7504242bb6..a8595ded25 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autokorr/09000000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autokorr/09000000.xhp @@ -31,9 +31,9 @@ -AutoCorrect has been activated -Double spaces have been ignored -AutoCorrect has corrected your text so that the multiple spaces you have entered have now been reduced to one single space. +AutoCorrect has been activated +Double spaces have been ignored +AutoCorrect has corrected your text so that the multiple spaces you have entered have now been reduced to one single space.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/autokorr/10000000.xhp b/source/text/shared/autokorr/10000000.xhp index 8ca251fb30..383f9300b0 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autokorr/10000000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autokorr/10000000.xhp @@ -31,9 +31,9 @@ -AutoCorrect has been activated -Bold and underline attributes have been recognized and applied -AutoCorrect has modified your text, and the bold and/or underline text attributes have been automatically applied. +AutoCorrect has been activated +Bold and underline attributes have been recognized and applied +AutoCorrect has modified your text, and the bold and/or underline text attributes have been automatically applied.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/autokorr/12000000.xhp b/source/text/shared/autokorr/12000000.xhp index 9dbb7ee2d2..8728b88863 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autokorr/12000000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autokorr/12000000.xhp @@ -29,9 +29,9 @@ -AutoCorrect has been activated -Minus signs have been replacedi73558 -AutoCorrect has modified your text, and minus signs have been replaced with dashes. +AutoCorrect has been activated +Minus signs have been replacedi73558 +AutoCorrect has modified your text, and minus signs have been replaced with dashes.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/autokorr/13000000.xhp b/source/text/shared/autokorr/13000000.xhp index 5149f7d786..05fc50950a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autokorr/13000000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autokorr/13000000.xhp @@ -31,9 +31,9 @@ -AutoCorrect has been activated -1st ... has been replaced with 1st ... -AutoCorrect has corrected your text so that ordinal number suffixes have been superscripted. +AutoCorrect has been activated +1st ... has been replaced with 1st ... +AutoCorrect has corrected your text so that ordinal number suffixes have been superscripted.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01000000.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01000000.xhp index 2f21c62e00..290a374f70 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01000000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01000000.xhp @@ -37,22 +37,22 @@ -Wizards -Guides you through creating business and personal letters, faxes, agendas, presentations, and more. +Wizards +Guides you through creating business and personal letters, faxes, agendas, presentations, and more.
-Letter +Letter -Fax +Fax -Agenda +Agenda -Document Converter +Document Converter -Euro Converter +Euro Converter diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01010000.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01010000.xhp index e25f76bb71..2361bcff3c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01010000.xhp @@ -33,16 +33,16 @@ mw made "letters;..." a one level entry -Letter Wizard -Starts the wizard for a letter template. +Letter Wizard +Starts the wizard for a letter template. You can use this template for both business and personal correspondence.
-$[officename] comes with sample templates for personal or business letters, which you can customize to your own needs with the help of the wizard. The wizard leads you step-by-step in creating a document template and offers numerous layout and design options. The preview gives you an impression of how the finished letter will appear according to the settings you choose. -Within the wizard, you can modify your entries and options at any time. You may also skip an entire page or even all the wizard pages, in which case the current (or default) settings will remain in effect. +$[officename] comes with sample templates for personal or business letters, which you can customize to your own needs with the help of the wizard. The wizard leads you step-by-step in creating a document template and offers numerous layout and design options. The preview gives you an impression of how the finished letter will appear according to the settings you choose. +Within the wizard, you can modify your entries and options at any time. You may also skip an entire page or even all the wizard pages, in which case the current (or default) settings will remain in effect. -If you are creating a business letter, you can select a variety of elements to include in your document, which usually do not apply to personal letters, such as a subject line. If you choose the Personal letter option, some pages which contain elements specific to business letters will not be included in the wizard dialog. +If you are creating a business letter, you can select a variety of elements to include in your document, which usually do not apply to personal letters, such as a subject line. If you choose the Personal letter option, some pages which contain elements specific to business letters will not be included in the wizard dialog. @@ -52,20 +52,20 @@ -Back -Allows you to view the selections that you made on the previous steps. The current settings will be saved. +Back +Allows you to view the selections that you made on the previous steps. The current settings will be saved.
-Next -Saves the current settings and continues to the next page. +Next +Saves the current settings and continues to the next page.
-Finish -According to your selections, the wizard creates a new document template and saves it on your hard disk. $[officename] creates a new document based on the existing templates with the "Untitled X" name (X stands for the consecutive numbering) and displays it on the work area. -$[officename] saves the current settings in the wizard according to the chosen template. These settings are used as the default settings the next time you activate the wizard. +Finish +According to your selections, the wizard creates a new document template and saves it on your hard disk. $[officename] creates a new document based on the existing templates with the "Untitled X" name (X stands for the consecutive numbering) and displays it on the work area. +$[officename] saves the current settings in the wizard according to the chosen template. These settings are used as the default settings the next time you activate the wizard. diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01010100.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01010100.xhp index e1ebb2ccb2..68cf5ca646 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01010100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01010100.xhp @@ -32,31 +32,31 @@
-Letter Wizard - Page design -Specifies whether you want to create a personal or a business letter. The available options on the following pages vary depending on your choice. +Letter Wizard - Page design +Specifies whether you want to create a personal or a business letter. The available options on the following pages vary depending on your choice.
-Please choose the type of letter and page design -Specify whether you want to create a business or personal letter template. +Please choose the type of letter and page design +Specify whether you want to create a business or personal letter template. -Business letter -Specifies that you want to create a business letter template. +Business letter +Specifies that you want to create a business letter template. -Formal personal letter -Specifies that you want to create a formal personal letter. +Formal personal letter +Specifies that you want to create a formal personal letter. -Personal letter -Specifies that you want to create a personal letter. +Personal letter +Specifies that you want to create a personal letter. -Page design -Select the design for your letter template. +Page design +Select the design for your letter template. -Use letterhead paper with pre-printed elements -Specifies whether paper is used that already contains an imprinted logo, address, or footer line. The Wizard shows the Letterhead layout page next. -Go to Letter Wizard - Letterhead layout +Use letterhead paper with pre-printed elements +Specifies whether paper is used that already contains an imprinted logo, address, or footer line. The Wizard shows the Letterhead layout page next. +Go to Letter Wizard - Letterhead layout diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01010200.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01010200.xhp index 47cd22add1..d7c3e87ca5 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01010200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01010200.xhp @@ -32,44 +32,44 @@
-Letter Wizard - Letterhead layout -Allows you to specify the elements that are already imprinted on your letterhead paper. Those elements are not printed, and the space they occupy is left blank by the printer. +Letter Wizard - Letterhead layout +Allows you to specify the elements that are already imprinted on your letterhead paper. Those elements are not printed, and the space they occupy is left blank by the printer.
-Specify items already on your letterhead paper +Specify items already on your letterhead paper -Logo -Specifies that a logo is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print a logo. +Logo +Specifies that a logo is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print a logo. -Height -Defines the height of the object. +Height +Defines the height of the object. -Width -Defines the width of the object. +Width +Defines the width of the object. -Spacing to left margin -Sets the object distance from the left page margin. +Spacing to left margin +Sets the object distance from the left page margin. -Spacing to top margin -Sets the object distance from the top page margin. +Spacing to top margin +Sets the object distance from the top page margin. -Own address -Specifies that an address is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print an address. +Own address +Specifies that an address is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print an address. -Return address in envelope window -Specifies that your own address is already imprinted in small size above the area of the recipient's address. %PRODUCTNAME does not print an address in small size. +Return address in envelope window +Specifies that your own address is already imprinted in small size above the area of the recipient's address. %PRODUCTNAME does not print an address in small size. -Footer -Specifies that a footer area is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print a footer. +Footer +Specifies that a footer area is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print a footer. -Height -Enter the height of the footer area that is already imprinted on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print in that area. -Go to Letter Wizard - Printed items +Height +Enter the height of the footer area that is already imprinted on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print in that area. +Go to Letter Wizard - Printed items diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01010300.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01010300.xhp index a6c2bda325..a10b8064f1 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01010300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01010300.xhp @@ -32,38 +32,38 @@
-Letter Wizard - Printed items -Defines the items to be included in the letter template. +Letter Wizard - Printed items +Defines the items to be included in the letter template.
-Logo -Includes a logo on the letter template. +Logo +Includes a logo on the letter template. -Return address in envelope window -Includes a small size return address on the letter template. +Return address in envelope window +Includes a small size return address on the letter template. -Letter signs -Includes a line with references to a business letter on the letter template. +Letter signs +Includes a line with references to a business letter on the letter template. -Subject line -Includes a subject line on the letter template. +Subject line +Includes a subject line on the letter template. -Salutation -Includes a salutation on the letter template. Select the salutation from the list box. +Salutation +Includes a salutation on the letter template. Select the salutation from the list box. -Fold marks -Includes fold marks on the letter template. +Fold marks +Includes fold marks on the letter template. -Complimentary close -Includes a complimentary close on the letter template. Select the text from the list box. +Complimentary close +Includes a complimentary close on the letter template. Select the text from the list box. -Footer -Includes a footer on the letter template. -Go to Letter Wizard - Recipient and sender +Footer +Includes a footer on the letter template. +Go to Letter Wizard - Recipient and sender diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp index 9525cc5fdb..d8dc6a9ddd 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp @@ -32,39 +32,39 @@
-Letter Wizard - Recipient and sender -Specifies the sender and recipient information. +Letter Wizard - Recipient and sender +Specifies the sender and recipient information.
-Sender's address -Specifies your address information. +Sender's address +Specifies your address information. -Use user data for return address -Use the address data from %PRODUCTNAME - User Data in the Options dialog box. +Use user data for return address +Use the address data from %PRODUCTNAME - User Data in the Options dialog box. -New sender address -Use the address data from the following text boxes. +New sender address +Use the address data from the following text boxes. -Name -Specifies the name of the sender. +Name +Specifies the name of the sender. -Street -Specifies the street address of the sender. +Street +Specifies the street address of the sender. -Postcode/State/City -Specifies the address data of the sender. -Recipient's address -Specifies the recipient's address information. +Postcode/State/City +Specifies the address data of the sender. +Recipient's address +Specifies the recipient's address information. -Use placeholders for recipient's address -Specifies that placeholder fields are inserted into the letter template. +Use placeholders for recipient's address +Specifies that placeholder fields are inserted into the letter template. -Use address database for mail merge -Address database fields are inserted into the letter template. -Go to Letter Wizard - Footer +Use address database for mail merge +Address database fields are inserted into the letter template. +Go to Letter Wizard - Footer diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01010500.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01010500.xhp index edccdd06bd..05f3657048 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01010500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01010500.xhp @@ -32,21 +32,21 @@
-Letter Wizard - Footer -Specifies the information to include in the footer space. +Letter Wizard - Footer +Specifies the information to include in the footer space.
-Footer -Enter the text for the footer lines. +Footer +Enter the text for the footer lines. -Include only on second and following pages -Select to suppress the footer on the first page. +Include only on second and following pages +Select to suppress the footer on the first page. -Include page numbers -Includes page numbers in your letter template. -Go to Letter Wizard - Name and location +Include page numbers +Includes page numbers in your letter template. +Go to Letter Wizard - Name and location diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01010600.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01010600.xhp index 3700d28955..cea55516a0 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01010600.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01010600.xhp @@ -32,25 +32,25 @@
-Letter Wizard - Name and Location -Specifies where and under which name you want to save the document and template. +Letter Wizard - Name and Location +Specifies where and under which name you want to save the document and template.
-Template name -Specifies the title of the document template. +Template name +Specifies the title of the document template. -Path -Enter the path and file name for the template, or click the ... button to select the path and file name. +Path +Enter the path and file name for the template, or click the ... button to select the path and file name. -Create a letter from this template -Saves and closes the template, and then opens a new untitled document based on the template. +Create a letter from this template +Saves and closes the template, and then opens a new untitled document based on the template. -Make manual changes to this letter template -Saves the template and keeps it open for editing. -Letter Wizard overview +Make manual changes to this letter template +Saves the template and keeps it open for editing. +Letter Wizard overview diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01020000.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01020000.xhp index 00354a41a6..1817c23409 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01020000.xhp @@ -33,28 +33,28 @@ -Fax Wizard -Opens the wizard for faxes. The wizard can help you create document templates for fax documents. You can then print the fax documents to a printer or to a fax machine, if fax driver software is available. +Fax Wizard +Opens the wizard for faxes. The wizard can help you create document templates for fax documents. You can then print the fax documents to a printer or to a fax machine, if fax driver software is available.
-$[officename] comes with a template for fax documents, which you can modify with the wizard to suit your own needs. The wizard leads you step-by-step in creating a document template, and offers numerous layout and design options. The document preview gives you an impression of how the finished fax will appear. -Within the dialog you can modify your entries and options at any time. You can also skip an entire page or even all the wizard pages, in which case the current (or default) settings will remain in effect. +$[officename] comes with a template for fax documents, which you can modify with the wizard to suit your own needs. The wizard leads you step-by-step in creating a document template, and offers numerous layout and design options. The document preview gives you an impression of how the finished fax will appear. +Within the dialog you can modify your entries and options at any time. You can also skip an entire page or even all the wizard pages, in which case the current (or default) settings will remain in effect. -Back -Click the Back button to view the settings chosen on the previous page. The current settings will not be modified or deleted if you click this button. Back will be active from the second page onwards. +Back +Click the Back button to view the settings chosen on the previous page. The current settings will not be modified or deleted if you click this button. Back will be active from the second page onwards. -Next -The wizard saves the current settings and goes to the next page. The Next button will become inactive once you have reached the last page. +Next +The wizard saves the current settings and goes to the next page. The Next button will become inactive once you have reached the last page. -Finish -According to your selections, the wizard creates a document template and saves it. A new document based on the template appears in the work area, with the filename "UntitledX". +Finish +According to your selections, the wizard creates a document template and saves it. A new document based on the template appears in the work area, with the filename "UntitledX". Dialog ID must be below any <avis> tag diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01020100.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01020100.xhp index 13a53908a1..2067ec7a1f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01020100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01020100.xhp @@ -32,24 +32,24 @@
-Fax Wizard - Page Design -Defines the style of your fax document. +Fax Wizard - Page Design +Defines the style of your fax document.
-Business Fax -Creates a fax template for a business-style fax. +Business Fax +Creates a fax template for a business-style fax. -Style -Specifies the predefined style. +Style +Specifies the predefined style. -Private Fax -Creates a fax template for a private fax. +Private Fax +Creates a fax template for a private fax. -Style -Specifies the predefined style. -Go to Fax Wizard - Items to include +Style +Specifies the predefined style. +Go to Fax Wizard - Items to include diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01020200.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01020200.xhp index cf5d8ad875..c083482f70 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01020200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01020200.xhp @@ -34,36 +34,36 @@
-Fax Wizard - Items to include -Specifies the fax elements to be printed. +Fax Wizard - Items to include +Specifies the fax elements to be printed.
-Logo -Includes a company logo. +Logo +Includes a company logo. -Date -Includes a date field. -Type of message +Date +Includes a date field. +Type of message -Includes a communication type line. Select the line from the list box. +Includes a communication type line. Select the line from the list box. -Subject line -Includes a subject line. +Subject line +Includes a subject line. -Salutation -Includes a salutation. Select the salutation from the list box. +Salutation +Includes a salutation. Select the salutation from the list box. -Complimentary close -Includes a greeting. Select the greeting from the list box. +Complimentary close +Includes a greeting. Select the greeting from the list box. -Footer -Includes a footer. -Go to Fax Wizard - Sender and Recipient +Footer +Includes a footer. +Go to Fax Wizard - Sender and Recipient diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01020300.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01020300.xhp index c4bdbc5504..97fedfa299 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01020300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01020300.xhp @@ -34,32 +34,32 @@
-Fax Wizard - Sender and Recipient -Specifies the receiver and sender information for the fax. +Fax Wizard - Sender and Recipient +Specifies the receiver and sender information for the fax.
-Use user data for return address -Inserts placeholders for the address on the fax template. Later in the fax document, click the placeholder to enter the actual data. +Use user data for return address +Inserts placeholders for the address on the fax template. Later in the fax document, click the placeholder to enter the actual data. -New return address -Select to enter the address data in the following text boxes. The data is inserted as normal text in the fax document. +New return address +Select to enter the address data in the following text boxes. The data is inserted as normal text in the fax document. -(Address data fields) -Enter the sender address data. +(Address data fields) +Enter the sender address data. -Use placeholders as receiver address -Inserts placeholders for the address on the fax template. Later in the fax document, click the placeholder to enter the actual data. +Use placeholders as receiver address +Inserts placeholders for the address on the fax template. Later in the fax document, click the placeholder to enter the actual data. -Use address database for mail merge -Inserts database fields for a later mail merge with the fax document. -Go to Fax Wizard - Footer +Use address database for mail merge +Inserts database fields for a later mail merge with the fax document. +Go to Fax Wizard - Footer diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01020400.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01020400.xhp index 13d4e92be8..49980f9209 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01020400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01020400.xhp @@ -34,21 +34,21 @@
-Fax Wizard - Footer -Specifies the footer data. +Fax Wizard - Footer +Specifies the footer data.
-Footer -Specifies the text to be printed in the footer area. +Footer +Specifies the text to be printed in the footer area. -Include only on second and following pages -Suppresses the footer on the first page of a multipage fax document. +Include only on second and following pages +Suppresses the footer on the first page of a multipage fax document. -Include page number -Prints a page number in the footer area. -Go to Fax Wizard - Name and location +Include page number +Prints a page number in the footer area. +Go to Fax Wizard - Name and location diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01020500.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01020500.xhp index 46140638e6..08fbd9ed5a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01020500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01020500.xhp @@ -34,24 +34,24 @@
-Fax Wizard - Name and location -Defines the template name and location. +Fax Wizard - Name and location +Defines the template name and location.
-Template name -Enter the name of the fax template. +Template name +Enter the name of the fax template. -... -Click to enter or select the complete path, including the file name of the fax template. +... +Click to enter or select the complete path, including the file name of the fax template. -Create a fax from this template -Creates and saves the fax template, then opens a new fax document based on that template. +Create a fax from this template +Creates and saves the fax template, then opens a new fax document based on that template. -Make manual changes to this fax template -Creates and saves the fax template, then opens the template for further editing. -Go to Fax Wizard +Make manual changes to this fax template +Creates and saves the fax template, then opens the template for further editing. +Go to Fax Wizard diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01040000.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01040000.xhp index 9bf9e727fa..e2d0618596 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01040000.xhp @@ -34,27 +34,27 @@ templates;agendas -Agenda Wizard -Starts the wizard to help you create an agenda template. +Agenda Wizard +Starts the wizard to help you create an agenda template. You can use an agenda to specify discussion topics for conferences and meetings.
-$[officename] comes with a sample template for agendas that you can modify to suit your own needs. The wizard offers numerous layout and design options for creating document templates. The preview gives you an impression of how the finished agenda will appear. -Within the wizard, you can modify your entries at any time. You may also skip an entire page or even all the pages, in which case the current (or default) settings remain in effect. +$[officename] comes with a sample template for agendas that you can modify to suit your own needs. The wizard offers numerous layout and design options for creating document templates. The preview gives you an impression of how the finished agenda will appear. +Within the wizard, you can modify your entries at any time. You may also skip an entire page or even all the pages, in which case the current (or default) settings remain in effect. -Back -Returns to the selections made on the previous page. The current settings remain in effect. This button only becomes active after the first page. -Next -The wizard saves the current settings and goes to the next page. Once you reach the last page, this button will become inactive. -Finish -According to your selections, the wizard creates a document template and saves it on your hard disk. A new document based on the template appears in the work area, with the filename "UntitledX" (X stands for an automatic number). +Back +Returns to the selections made on the previous page. The current settings remain in effect. This button only becomes active after the first page. +Next +The wizard saves the current settings and goes to the next page. Once you reach the last page, this button will become inactive. +Finish +According to your selections, the wizard creates a document template and saves it on your hard disk. A new document based on the template appears in the work area, with the filename "UntitledX" (X stands for an automatic number). -$[officename] saves the current settings in the wizard according to the selected document template. These will be used as the default settings the next time you activate the wizard. +$[officename] saves the current settings in the wizard according to the selected document template. These will be used as the default settings the next time you activate the wizard. Dialog ID here, below any <avis> tags (else the tagged text will be shown on the buttons) diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01040100.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01040100.xhp index e2e5443fcf..003a1c36af 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01040100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01040100.xhp @@ -30,16 +30,16 @@
-Agenda Wizard - Page Design -Specifies a page design for the agenda. +Agenda Wizard - Page Design +Specifies a page design for the agenda.
-Page design -Select the page design from the list box. -Include form for recording minutes -Prints out a page on which you can write down the minutes during the meeting. -Go to Agenda Wizard - General information +Page design +Select the page design from the list box. +Include form for recording minutes +Prints out a page on which you can write down the minutes during the meeting. +Go to Agenda Wizard - General information diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01040200.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01040200.xhp index 90884a0123..96176da182 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01040200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01040200.xhp @@ -30,24 +30,24 @@
-Agenda Wizard - General Information -Specifies the date, time, title, and location of the meeting. +Agenda Wizard - General Information +Specifies the date, time, title, and location of the meeting.
-Date -Specifies the date of the meeting. +Date +Specifies the date of the meeting. -Time -Specifies the time of the meeting. +Time +Specifies the time of the meeting. -Title -Specifies the title of the meeting. +Title +Specifies the title of the meeting. -Location -Specifies the location of the meeting. -Go to Agenda Wizard - Headings to include +Location +Specifies the location of the meeting. +Go to Agenda Wizard - Headings to include diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01040300.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01040300.xhp index 1f661ca8d2..e60e39d845 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01040300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01040300.xhp @@ -30,20 +30,20 @@
-Agenda Wizard - Headings to include -Specifies the headings that you want to include in the agenda. +Agenda Wizard - Headings to include +Specifies the headings that you want to include in the agenda.
-Type of meeting -Specifies whether to print the type of meeting line. -Please read -Specifies whether to print a Please read line. -Please bring -Specifies whether to print a Please bring line. -Notes -Specifies whether to print a Notes line. -Go to Agenda Wizard - Names +Type of meeting +Specifies whether to print the type of meeting line. +Please read +Specifies whether to print a Please read line. +Please bring +Specifies whether to print a Please bring line. +Notes +Specifies whether to print a Notes line. +Go to Agenda Wizard - Names diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01040400.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01040400.xhp index 90c9f5c4e4..0263f570d9 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01040400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01040400.xhp @@ -30,26 +30,26 @@
-Agenda Wizard - Names -Specifies the names to be printed on the agenda. +Agenda Wizard - Names +Specifies the names to be printed on the agenda.
-Meeting called by -Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the person who called the meeting. -Chairperson -Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the chairperson. -Minute keeper -Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the minute keeper. -Moderator -Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the moderator. -Attendees -Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the attendees. -Observers -Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the observers. -Facility personnel -Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the facility personnel. -Go to Agenda Wizard - Agenda Items +Meeting called by +Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the person who called the meeting. +Chairperson +Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the chairperson. +Minute keeper +Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the minute keeper. +Moderator +Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the moderator. +Attendees +Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the attendees. +Observers +Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the observers. +Facility personnel +Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the facility personnel. +Go to Agenda Wizard - Agenda Items diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01040500.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01040500.xhp index acf4fcd0ae..5834732311 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01040500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01040500.xhp @@ -30,24 +30,24 @@
-Agenda Wizard - Agenda Items -Specifies the topics to be printed on the agenda template. +Agenda Wizard - Agenda Items +Specifies the topics to be printed on the agenda template.
-Topics -Enter the agenda topics. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to sort the topics. -Insert -Inserts a new empty topic row above the current row. -Remove -Removes the current topic row. -Move up -Moves the current topic row up. -Move down -Moves the current topic row down. -Go to Agenda Wizard - Name and location +Topics +Enter the agenda topics. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to sort the topics. +Insert +Inserts a new empty topic row above the current row. +Remove +Removes the current topic row. +Move up +Moves the current topic row up. +Move down +Moves the current topic row down. +Go to Agenda Wizard - Name and location diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01040600.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01040600.xhp index 8a1aceb099..6c29dfa16e 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01040600.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01040600.xhp @@ -30,21 +30,21 @@
-Agenda Wizard - Name and Location -Choose the title and location for the agenda template. +Agenda Wizard - Name and Location +Choose the title and location for the agenda template.
-Template title -Specifies the name of the agenda template. +Template title +Specifies the name of the agenda template. -Path -Specifies the complete path, including the file name of the agenda template. -Create an agenda from this template -Creates and saves the agenda template, then opens a new agenda document based on that template. -Make manual changes to this template -Creates and saves the agenda template, then opens the template for further editing. -Go to Agenda Wizard +Path +Specifies the complete path, including the file name of the agenda template. +Create an agenda from this template +Creates and saves the agenda template, then opens a new agenda document based on that template. +Make manual changes to this template +Creates and saves the agenda template, then opens the template for further editing. +Go to Agenda Wizard diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01090000.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01090000.xhp index 4a727e6bb1..88864ae42c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01090000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01090000.xhp @@ -31,13 +31,13 @@ forms;wizards wizards;forms -Form Wizard -Activates the Wizard for creating forms. +Form Wizard +Activates the Wizard for creating forms.
-Select the form properties using the following steps: +Select the form properties using the following steps: @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ -Click to create the form without answering further pages. +Click to create the form without answering further pages. diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp index 81f97f0ea4..a9c8e1e697 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp @@ -28,16 +28,16 @@
-Form Wizard - Field Selection -On this page of the Form Wizard, you can specify the table or query that you need to create the form as well as the fields that you want to include in the form. +Form Wizard - Field Selection +On this page of the Form Wizard, you can specify the table or query that you need to create the form as well as the fields that you want to include in the form.
-Tables or queries -Specifies the table or query that you want to create the form for. +Tables or queries +Specifies the table or query that you want to create the form for.
@@ -45,8 +45,8 @@ -Available fields -Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query. Click to select a field or hold down the Shift or the CommandCtrl key while you click to select more than one field. +Available fields +Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query. Click to select a field or hold down the Shift or the CommandCtrl key while you click to select more than one field.
@@ -55,8 +55,8 @@ -> -Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.i73704 +> +Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.i73704
@@ -64,8 +64,8 @@ ->> -Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +>> +Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
@@ -74,8 +74,8 @@ -< -Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +< +Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
@@ -83,8 +83,8 @@ -<< -Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +<< +Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
@@ -95,8 +95,8 @@ -^ -Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list. +^ +Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list. @@ -105,13 +105,13 @@ -v -Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list. +v +Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
-Fields in the form -Displays the fields that are in the new form. -Form Wizard - Set up a subform +Fields in the form +Displays the fields that are in the new form. +Form Wizard - Set up a subform diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01090200.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01090200.xhp index 0cf70f4eba..248d5f2c63 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01090200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01090200.xhp @@ -31,24 +31,24 @@
-Form Wizard - Set up a Subform -Specify if you want to use a subform and enter the subform's properties. A subform is a form that is inserted in another form. +Form Wizard - Set up a Subform +Specify if you want to use a subform and enter the subform's properties. A subform is a form that is inserted in another form.
-Add subform -Select to add a subform. +Add subform +Select to add a subform. -Sub form based on existing relation -Click to add a subform based on an existing relation. +Sub form based on existing relation +Click to add a subform based on an existing relation. -Which relation do you want to add? -Select the relation on which the subform is based. +Which relation do you want to add? +Select the relation on which the subform is based. -Sub form based on manual selection of fields -Click to add a subform based on a manual selection of fields. -Form Wizard - Add subform fields +Sub form based on manual selection of fields +Click to add a subform based on a manual selection of fields. +Form Wizard - Add subform fields diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01090210.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01090210.xhp index b59f5e49ef..34eec9dc56 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01090210.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01090210.xhp @@ -28,15 +28,15 @@
-Form Wizard - Add Subform Fields -Specify the table or query you need to create the subform, and which fields you wish to include in the subform. +Form Wizard - Add Subform Fields +Specify the table or query you need to create the subform, and which fields you wish to include in the subform.
-Tables or queries -Specifies the table or query for which the subform is to be created. +Tables or queries +Specifies the table or query for which the subform is to be created. @@ -44,8 +44,8 @@ -Fields in my subform -Displays all fields that will be included in the new subform. -Form Wizard - Get joined fields +Fields in my subform +Displays all fields that will be included in the new subform. +Form Wizard - Get joined fields diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01090220.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01090220.xhp index fa705db893..70c10b19c7 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01090220.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01090220.xhp @@ -31,36 +31,36 @@
-Form Wizard - Get Joined Fields -If you chose in step 2 to set up a subform based on manual selection of fields, you can select the joined fields on this wizard page. +Form Wizard - Get Joined Fields +If you chose in step 2 to set up a subform based on manual selection of fields, you can select the joined fields on this wizard page.
-First joined subform field -Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. +First joined subform field +Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. -First joined main form field -Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. +First joined main form field +Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. -Second joined subform field -Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. +Second joined subform field +Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. -Second joined main form field -Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. +Second joined main form field +Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. -Third joined subform field -Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. +Third joined subform field +Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. -Third joined main form field -Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. +Third joined main form field +Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. -Fourth joined subform field -Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. +Fourth joined subform field +Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. -Fourth joined main form field -Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. -Form Wizard - Arrange controls +Fourth joined main form field +Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. +Form Wizard - Arrange controls diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01090300.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01090300.xhp index 115438971a..fb09469fd9 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01090300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01090300.xhp @@ -31,41 +31,41 @@
-Form Wizard - Arrange Controls -On this page of the Wizard, you can select the layout of the created form. +Form Wizard - Arrange Controls +On this page of the Wizard, you can select the layout of the created form.
-Label placement +Label placement -Align left -The labels are left-aligned. +Align left +The labels are left-aligned. -Align right -The labels are right-aligned. -Arrangement of the main form +Align right +The labels are right-aligned. +Arrangement of the main form -Columnar - Labels Left -Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels to the left of the fields. +Columnar - Labels Left +Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels to the left of the fields. -Columnar - Labels on Top -Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels above the field. +Columnar - Labels on Top +Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels above the field. -As Data Sheet -Aligns the database fields in a tabular form. +As Data Sheet +Aligns the database fields in a tabular form. -In Blocks - Labels Above -Arranges the labels above the corresponding data. -Arrangement of the subform -Columnar - Labels Left -Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels to the left of the fields. -Columnar - Labels on Top -Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels above the field. -As Data Sheet -Aligns the database fields in a tabular form. -In Blocks - Labels Above -Arranges the labels above the corresponding data. -Form Wizard - Set data entry +In Blocks - Labels Above +Arranges the labels above the corresponding data. +Arrangement of the subform +Columnar - Labels Left +Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels to the left of the fields. +Columnar - Labels on Top +Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels above the field. +As Data Sheet +Aligns the database fields in a tabular form. +In Blocks - Labels Above +Arranges the labels above the corresponding data. +Form Wizard - Set data entry diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01090400.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01090400.xhp index a9852ac0bf..87da064268 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01090400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01090400.xhp @@ -31,27 +31,27 @@
-Form Wizard - Set Data Entry -Specifies the data handling mode for the new form. +Form Wizard - Set Data Entry +Specifies the data handling mode for the new form.
-The form is to be used for entering new data only. Existing data will not be displayed -Creates a form that is only used for entering new data. +The form is to be used for entering new data only. Existing data will not be displayed +Creates a form that is only used for entering new data. -The form is to display all data -Creates a form that can be used to display existing data and to enter new data. +The form is to display all data +Creates a form that can be used to display existing data and to enter new data. -Do not allow modification of existing data -Select to disallow editing data. +Do not allow modification of existing data +Select to disallow editing data. -Do not allow deletion of existing data -Select to disallow deleting data. +Do not allow deletion of existing data +Select to disallow deleting data. -Do not allow addition of new data -Select to disallow adding new data. -Form Wizard - Apply styles +Do not allow addition of new data +Select to disallow adding new data. +Form Wizard - Apply styles diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01090500.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01090500.xhp index d1c887d0fb..5510aa1629 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01090500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01090500.xhp @@ -31,26 +31,26 @@
-Form Wizard - Apply Styles -Specifies the form style. +Form Wizard - Apply Styles +Specifies the form style.
-Apply styles -Specifies the page style for the form. -Field border -Specifies the field border style. +Apply styles +Specifies the page style for the form. +Field border +Specifies the field border style. -No border -Specifies that the fields have no border. +No border +Specifies that the fields have no border. -3D look -Specifies that the field borders have a 3D look. +3D look +Specifies that the field borders have a 3D look. -Flat -Specifies that the field borders look flat. -Form Wizard - Set name +Flat +Specifies that the field borders look flat. +Form Wizard - Set name diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01090600.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01090600.xhp index 6f913ffff3..8a77166bc8 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01090600.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01090600.xhp @@ -31,21 +31,21 @@
-Form Wizard - Set Name -Specifies the name of the form and how to proceed. +Form Wizard - Set Name +Specifies the name of the form and how to proceed.
-Name of the form -Specifies the name of the form. +Name of the form +Specifies the name of the form. -Work with the form -Saves the form, and opens it as a form document to enter and display data. +Work with the form +Saves the form, and opens it as a form document to enter and display data. -Modify the form -Saves the form, and opens it in edit mode to change the layout. -Form Wizard +Modify the form +Saves the form, and opens it in edit mode to change the layout. +Form Wizard diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01100000.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01100000.xhp index 7ff349d104..e760b02bb1 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01100000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01100000.xhp @@ -28,15 +28,15 @@ -Report Wizard -Activates the wizard for creating reports. +Report Wizard +Activates the wizard for creating reports.
UFI: added Help ID, see #i61571 -Select the report properties. +Select the report properties. diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01100100.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01100100.xhp index e8776ea6fa..c1a3f98a1a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01100100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01100100.xhp @@ -30,36 +30,36 @@
-Report Wizard - Field Selection -Specifies the table or query for which you are creating the report, and which fields you wish to include in the report. +Report Wizard - Field Selection +Specifies the table or query for which you are creating the report, and which fields you wish to include in the report.
-Tables or queries -Select the table or query for which the report is to be created. +Tables or queries +Select the table or query for which the report is to be created.
-Available fields -Displays the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query. Click to select a field or press the Shift or CommandCtrl key while clicking to select multiple fields. +Available fields +Displays the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query. Click to select a field or press the Shift or CommandCtrl key while clicking to select multiple fields.
-Fields in report -Displays all fields that are included in the new report. +Fields in report +Displays all fields that are included in the new report.
-> -Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +> +Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
->> -Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +>> +Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
-< -Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +< +Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
-<< -Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +<< +Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
-More about Report Wizard - Labeling Fields +More about Report Wizard - Labeling Fields diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01100150.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01100150.xhp index e1477c6d9d..57094cfc49 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01100150.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01100150.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
-Report Wizard - Labeling Fields -Specifies how you want to label the fields. +Report Wizard - Labeling Fields +Specifies how you want to label the fields.
@@ -43,8 +43,8 @@ -Field list -Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report. -More about Report Wizard - Grouping +Field list +Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report. +More about Report Wizard - Grouping diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01100200.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01100200.xhp index 40b4910804..b0588937b2 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01100200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01100200.xhp @@ -30,20 +30,20 @@
-Report Wizard - Grouping -You can group records in a report based on the values in one or more fields. Select the fields by which the resulting report will be grouped. You can group up to four fields in a report. When you group more than one field, $[officename] nests the groups according to their group level. +Report Wizard - Grouping +You can group records in a report based on the values in one or more fields. Select the fields by which the resulting report will be grouped. You can group up to four fields in a report. When you group more than one field, $[officename] nests the groups according to their group level.
-Fields -Lists the fields from your selection on the previous page of the Wizard. To group the report by a field, select the field name, then click the > button. You may select up to four levels of grouping. -Groupings -Lists the fields by which the report will be grouped. To remove one level of grouping, select the field name, then click the < button. You may select up to four levels of grouping. -> -Click to move the selected field to the box that the arrow is pointing to. -< -Click to move the selected field to the box that the arrow is pointing to. -More about Report Wizard - Sort Options +Fields +Lists the fields from your selection on the previous page of the Wizard. To group the report by a field, select the field name, then click the > button. You may select up to four levels of grouping. +Groupings +Lists the fields by which the report will be grouped. To remove one level of grouping, select the field name, then click the < button. You may select up to four levels of grouping. +> +Click to move the selected field to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +< +Click to move the selected field to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +More about Report Wizard - Sort Options diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01100300.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01100300.xhp index d04357787f..e1e9bf15f6 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01100300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01100300.xhp @@ -31,32 +31,32 @@
-Report Wizard - Sort Options -Select the fields by which to sort the report. Fields can be sorted by up to four levels, each either ascending or descending. Grouped fields can only be sorted within each group. +Report Wizard - Sort Options +Select the fields by which to sort the report. Fields can be sorted by up to four levels, each either ascending or descending. Grouped fields can only be sorted within each group.
-Sort by -Select the first field by which to sort the report. +Sort by +Select the first field by which to sort the report. -Then by -Select an additional field by which to sort the report. +Then by +Select an additional field by which to sort the report. -Ascending -Sorts the field contents in ascending order. +Ascending +Sorts the field contents in ascending order. -Descending -Sorts the field contents in descending order. -More about Report Wizard - Choose Layout +Descending +Sorts the field contents in descending order. +More about Report Wizard - Choose Layout diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01100400.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01100400.xhp index b299f790ab..689f9761f5 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01100400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01100400.xhp @@ -31,26 +31,26 @@
-Report Wizard - Choose Layout +Report Wizard - Choose Layout Choose the layout from different templates and styles, and choose landscape or portrait page orientation.
-Layout of data -Defines a set of styles for the report. The styles assign fonts, indents, table background, and more. +Layout of data +Defines a set of styles for the report. The styles assign fonts, indents, table background, and more. -Layout of headers and footers -Defines a page layout for the report. The page layouts are loaded from template files, which assign a header, footer, and page background. -Orientation -Choose the page orientation for the report. +Layout of headers and footers +Defines a page layout for the report. The page layouts are loaded from template files, which assign a header, footer, and page background. +Orientation +Choose the page orientation for the report. -Landscape -Selects a landscape page orientation for the report. +Landscape +Selects a landscape page orientation for the report. -Portrait -Selects a portrait page orientation for the report. -More about Report Wizard - Create Report +Portrait +Selects a portrait page orientation for the report. +More about Report Wizard - Create Report diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01100500.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01100500.xhp index a48f5839fc..e92b5d28ce 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01100500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01100500.xhp @@ -31,26 +31,26 @@
-Report Wizard - Create Report -You can create the report as a static or dynamic report. When you open a dynamic report, it will display with the current data contents. When you open a static report, it will always display the same data from the time when the static report was created. +Report Wizard - Create Report +You can create the report as a static or dynamic report. When you open a dynamic report, it will display with the current data contents. When you open a static report, it will always display the same data from the time when the static report was created.
-Title of report -Specifies the title that is printed at the title line of each page. +Title of report +Specifies the title that is printed at the title line of each page. -Static report -Saves the report as a static report. When you open a static report, it will always display the data from the time the report was created. +Static report +Saves the report as a static report. When you open a static report, it will always display the data from the time the report was created. -Dynamic report -Saves the report as a template. When you open a dynamic report, it will display with the current data contents. +Dynamic report +Saves the report as a template. When you open a dynamic report, it will display with the current data contents. -Modify report layout -When you click Finish, the report will be saved and opened for edit. +Modify report layout +When you click Finish, the report will be saved and opened for edit. -Create report now -When you click Finish, the report will be saved. +Create report now +When you click Finish, the report will be saved. diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01110000.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01110000.xhp index c4941353c9..90ffefe5f1 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01110000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01110000.xhp @@ -29,24 +29,24 @@ -HTML Export -Determines the settings for publishing $[officename] Draw or $[officename] Impress documents in HTML format. +HTML Export +Determines the settings for publishing $[officename] Draw or $[officename] Impress documents in HTML format.
-The pages displayed differ depending on what you select on the second page of the Wizard. +The pages displayed differ depending on what you select on the second page of the Wizard. -<< Back -Returns to the selections made on the previous page. The current settings remain saved. You can select this button once you are in the second editing step. -Next >> -Saves the current settings and moves to the next page. This button becomes inactive on the last page of the dialog. -Create -Creates new documents according to your selections and saves the documents. -$[officename] saves the current Wizard settings and uses them as default the next time that you open the Wizard. +<< Back +Returns to the selections made on the previous page. The current settings remain saved. You can select this button once you are in the second editing step. +Next >> +Saves the current settings and moves to the next page. This button becomes inactive on the last page of the dialog. +Create +Creates new documents according to your selections and saves the documents. +$[officename] saves the current Wizard settings and uses them as default the next time that you open the Wizard. diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01110100.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01110100.xhp index d77808c9d0..bcef057965 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01110100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01110100.xhp @@ -32,27 +32,27 @@
inserted this dialog id, see i72163 -HTML Export - Page 1 -On the first page you can select an existing design or create a new one. +HTML Export - Page 1 +On the first page you can select an existing design or create a new one.
-The settings you select for the export will be automatically saved as a design for other exports. You can enter the design name after clicking Create. +The settings you select for the export will be automatically saved as a design for other exports. You can enter the design name after clicking Create.
-Assign design -In this area, you can choose to create a new design and select or delete an existing design. -If you delete a design, you will only delete the design information in the Wizard. An export file will not be deleted by this action. +Assign design +In this area, you can choose to create a new design and select or delete an existing design. +If you delete a design, you will only delete the design information in the Wizard. An export file will not be deleted by this action. -New design -Creates a new design in the next pages of the Wizard. +New design +Creates a new design in the next pages of the Wizard. -Existing Design -Loads an existing design from the design list to use as a starting point for the steps to follow on the next pages of the Wizard. +Existing Design +Loads an existing design from the design list to use as a starting point for the steps to follow on the next pages of the Wizard. -Design list -Displays all existing designs. +Design list +Displays all existing designs. -Delete Selected Design -Deletes the selected design from the design list. +Delete Selected Design +Deletes the selected design from the design list. diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp index 7f4b5b1f75..8886d8a099 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp @@ -38,130 +38,130 @@ Internet; presentations WebCast export changed "in the Internet" to "on the Internet", see i73714 -inserted this dialog id, see i72163HTML Export - Page 2 -Determines the type of publication. +inserted this dialog id, see i72163HTML Export - Page 2 +Determines the type of publication.
-You can specify if you want to include frames, create a title, or display presentation notes. +You can specify if you want to include frames, create a title, or display presentation notes.
-Publication type -Defines the basic settings for the intended export. -Standard HTML format -Creates standard HTML pages from export pages. -Standard HTML with frames -Creates standard HTML pages with frames. The exported page will be placed in the main frame, and the frame to the left will display a table of contents in the form of hyperlinks. -Create title page -Creates a title page for your document. -Show notes +Publication type +Defines the basic settings for the intended export. +Standard HTML format +Creates standard HTML pages from export pages. +Standard HTML with frames +Creates standard HTML pages with frames. The exported page will be placed in the main frame, and the frame to the left will display a table of contents in the form of hyperlinks. +Create title page +Creates a title page for your document. +Show notes -Specifies that your notes are also displayed. -Automatic -Creates a default HTML presentation as a kiosk export, in which the slides are automatically advanced after a specified amount of time. -As stated in document -The slide transition depends on the timing that you set for each slide in the presentation. If you set a manual page transition, the HTML presentation introduces a new page by pressing any key from your keyboard. -Automatic -The page transition takes place automatically after the specified period of time elapses and does not depend on the presentation's contents. -Slide view time -Defines the amount of time for each slide display. -Endless -Automatically restarts the HTML presentation after the last slide has been displayed. -WebCast -In a WebCast export, automatic scripts will be generated with Perl or ASP support. This enables the speaker (for example, a speaker in a telephone conference using a slide show on the Internet) to change the slides in the audience's web browsers. You will find more information on WebCast later in this section. -Active Server Pages (ASP) -When you select the ASP option, the WebCast export creates ASP pages. Note that the HTML presentation can only be offered by a web server supporting ASP. -Perl -Used by WebCast export to create HTML pages and Perl scripts. -URL for listeners -Specifies the URL (absolute or relative) to be entered by the viewer in order to see the presentation. -URL for presentation -Specifies the URL (absolute or relative), where the created HTML presentation on the web server has been saved. -URL for Perl scripts -Specifies the URL (absolute or relative) for the generated Perl scripts. -More Information on WebCast Export -There are two possible options for exporting $[officename] Impress presentations using WebCast technology: Active Server Pages (ASP) and Perl. -In either case, the WebCast needs an HTTP server offering either Perl or ASP as scripting. Therefore, the exporting option depends on the HTTP server used. -WebCast in ASP -Exporting +Specifies that your notes are also displayed. +Automatic +Creates a default HTML presentation as a kiosk export, in which the slides are automatically advanced after a specified amount of time. +As stated in document +The slide transition depends on the timing that you set for each slide in the presentation. If you set a manual page transition, the HTML presentation introduces a new page by pressing any key from your keyboard. +Automatic +The page transition takes place automatically after the specified period of time elapses and does not depend on the presentation's contents. +Slide view time +Defines the amount of time for each slide display. +Endless +Automatically restarts the HTML presentation after the last slide has been displayed. +WebCast +In a WebCast export, automatic scripts will be generated with Perl or ASP support. This enables the speaker (for example, a speaker in a telephone conference using a slide show on the Internet) to change the slides in the audience's web browsers. You will find more information on WebCast later in this section. +Active Server Pages (ASP) +When you select the ASP option, the WebCast export creates ASP pages. Note that the HTML presentation can only be offered by a web server supporting ASP. +Perl +Used by WebCast export to create HTML pages and Perl scripts. +URL for listeners +Specifies the URL (absolute or relative) to be entered by the viewer in order to see the presentation. +URL for presentation +Specifies the URL (absolute or relative), where the created HTML presentation on the web server has been saved. +URL for Perl scripts +Specifies the URL (absolute or relative) for the generated Perl scripts. +More Information on WebCast Export +There are two possible options for exporting $[officename] Impress presentations using WebCast technology: Active Server Pages (ASP) and Perl. +In either case, the WebCast needs an HTTP server offering either Perl or ASP as scripting. Therefore, the exporting option depends on the HTTP server used. +WebCast in ASP +Exporting -To export to ASP, in a $[officename] Impress document choose File - Export. You then see the Export dialog in which you select HTML Document as the file type. Once you have selected a directory and entered a file name, click Export. For export as ASP, we recommend selecting a "secret" file name for the HTML file (see below for more details). You then see the HTML Export dialog. Several files will be written to the directory you have just selected. +To export to ASP, in a $[officename] Impress document choose File - Export. You then see the Export dialog in which you select HTML Document as the file type. Once you have selected a directory and entered a file name, click Export. For export as ASP, we recommend selecting a "secret" file name for the HTML file (see below for more details). You then see the HTML Export dialog. Several files will be written to the directory you have just selected. -The presenter uses the entered file name to change between the slides viewed by the audience. You can save the WebCast files locally or save them directly to an HTTP server. You can later transfer locally saved files to the HTTP server by FTP. Note that WebCast only works if the files are requested over an HTTP server. +The presenter uses the entered file name to change between the slides viewed by the audience. You can save the WebCast files locally or save them directly to an HTTP server. You can later transfer locally saved files to the HTTP server by FTP. Note that WebCast only works if the files are requested over an HTTP server. -Do not use the same directory for two different HTML exports. +Do not use the same directory for two different HTML exports. -Select WebCast as a publishing type on the second page of the HTML Export Wizard. +Select WebCast as a publishing type on the second page of the HTML Export Wizard. -In the options area for WebCast, select the Active Server Pages (ASP) option. You can now continue defining other settings or start the export by clicking the Create button. +In the options area for WebCast, select the Active Server Pages (ASP) option. You can now continue defining other settings or start the export by clicking the Create button. -Using ASP WebCast -You can use WebCast as soon as the exported files can be accessed from an HTTP server. - +Using ASP WebCast +You can use WebCast as soon as the exported files can be accessed from an HTTP server. + Example: -Let's assume that you installed the Microsoft Internet Information Server on your computer. You entered the "c:\Inet\wwwroot\presentation" directory as an HTML output directory during the IIS setup. The URL of your computer is assumed as follows: "http://myserver.com". +Let's assume that you installed the Microsoft Internet Information Server on your computer. You entered the "c:\Inet\wwwroot\presentation" directory as an HTML output directory during the IIS setup. The URL of your computer is assumed as follows: "http://myserver.com". -You have saved the files that have been created during the Export process in the c:\Inet\wwwroot\presentation\ directory. In this directory, the Export creates an HTML file that can be named, for example, as "secret.htm". You entered this name in the Save dialog (see above). The presenter can now browse to the HTML Export files by entering the http://myserver.com/presentation/secret.htm URL in any HTTP Browser having JavaScript support. The presenter is now able to modify the page using some form controls. +You have saved the files that have been created during the Export process in the c:\Inet\wwwroot\presentation\ directory. In this directory, the Export creates an HTML file that can be named, for example, as "secret.htm". You entered this name in the Save dialog (see above). The presenter can now browse to the HTML Export files by entering the http://myserver.com/presentation/secret.htm URL in any HTTP Browser having JavaScript support. The presenter is now able to modify the page using some form controls. -The audience can now view the slide selected by the presenter through the URL http://myserver.com/presentation/webcast.asp. They cannot move to other slides found at this URL, unless the file names are known. Please ensure that the HTTP server does not show the directory listing. -WebCast over Perl -Exporting +The audience can now view the slide selected by the presenter through the URL http://myserver.com/presentation/webcast.asp. They cannot move to other slides found at this URL, unless the file names are known. Please ensure that the HTTP server does not show the directory listing. +WebCast over Perl +Exporting -To export, in a $[officename] Impress document choose File - Export. This opens the Export dialog, in which you select HTML Document as the file type. After selecting a folder and entering a file name, click Save. This opens the HTML Export Wizard. This will write some files to the folder you have just selected. +To export, in a $[officename] Impress document choose File - Export. This opens the Export dialog, in which you select HTML Document as the file type. After selecting a folder and entering a file name, click Save. This opens the HTML Export Wizard. This will write some files to the folder you have just selected. -The entered file name will be used by the presenter to switch through the slides. Please select an empty directory. +The entered file name will be used by the presenter to switch through the slides. Please select an empty directory. -In the second page of the HTML Export, select WebCast as the publication type. +In the second page of the HTML Export, select WebCast as the publication type. -In the option area for WebCast, select Perl. +In the option area for WebCast, select Perl. -In the URL for listeners text box, enter the file name of the HTML document that will be used by the audience. In URL for presentation, enter the URL of the directory that will be used for the presentation and, in URL for Perl scripts, enter the URL for the CGI script directory. You can now define further settings on the following pages of the Wizard or start the export process by clicking the Create button. +In the URL for listeners text box, enter the file name of the HTML document that will be used by the audience. In URL for presentation, enter the URL of the directory that will be used for the presentation and, in URL for Perl scripts, enter the URL for the CGI script directory. You can now define further settings on the following pages of the Wizard or start the export process by clicking the Create button. -Using Perl WebCast -The files that have been created during the export must now be set up in the Perl enabled HTTP server. This cannot be done automatically because of the variety of different HTTP servers having Perl support. The steps to follow will be described next. Please refer to your server manual or ask your network administrator how to apply these steps on your server. +Using Perl WebCast +The files that have been created during the export must now be set up in the Perl enabled HTTP server. This cannot be done automatically because of the variety of different HTTP servers having Perl support. The steps to follow will be described next. Please refer to your server manual or ask your network administrator how to apply these steps on your server. -You should first move the files that have been created during the export into the correct directory on the HTTP server. +You should first move the files that have been created during the export into the correct directory on the HTTP server. -Move all files having the htm, jpg and gif extensions into the directory on your HTTP server that has been referred to in the text box URL for presentation. +Move all files having the htm, jpg and gif extensions into the directory on your HTTP server that has been referred to in the text box URL for presentation. -All files having the pl and txt extensions have to be moved into the directory on your HTTP server that has been referred to in the URL for Perl scripts text box. This directory has to be configured in a way that the Perl scripts contained there can also be run by an HTTP request. +All files having the pl and txt extensions have to be moved into the directory on your HTTP server that has been referred to in the URL for Perl scripts text box. This directory has to be configured in a way that the Perl scripts contained there can also be run by an HTTP request. -On UNIX systems grant the files with the pl extension the rights to be executable by the HTTP server. Normally, this is done with the chmod command. The rights of the currpic.txt file must be set to be writable by the HTTP server. +On UNIX systems grant the files with the pl extension the rights to be executable by the HTTP server. Normally, this is done with the chmod command. The rights of the currpic.txt file must be set to be writable by the HTTP server. -Now you should be able to use WebCast. - +Now you should be able to use WebCast. + Example: -In this example, you have a Linux computer with an HTTP server. The URL of your HTTP server is http://myserver.com and the output directory of your HTML documents is the //user/local/http/ directory. Your Perl scripts are contained in the //user/local/http/cgi-bin/ directory. Enter secret.htm as an export file name and presentation.htm as URL for listeners. In the URL for presentation text box enter http://myserver.com/presentation/ and for the URL for Perl scripts enter http://myserver.com/cgi-bin/. +In this example, you have a Linux computer with an HTTP server. The URL of your HTTP server is http://myserver.com and the output directory of your HTML documents is the //user/local/http/ directory. Your Perl scripts are contained in the //user/local/http/cgi-bin/ directory. Enter secret.htm as an export file name and presentation.htm as URL for listeners. In the URL for presentation text box enter http://myserver.com/presentation/ and for the URL for Perl scripts enter http://myserver.com/cgi-bin/. -Now, copy all *.htm, *.jpg and *.gif files from the directories that were specified during the export into the //user/local/http/presentation/ directory on your HTTP Server and copy all files with the *.pl and *.txt extensions into the //user/local/http/cgi-bin/ directory. +Now, copy all *.htm, *.jpg and *.gif files from the directories that were specified during the export into the //user/local/http/presentation/ directory on your HTTP Server and copy all files with the *.pl and *.txt extensions into the //user/local/http/cgi-bin/ directory. -Login on your server as root and switch to the //user/local/http/cgi-bin/ directory. You can define the corresponding rights using the chmod command. +Login on your server as root and switch to the //user/local/http/cgi-bin/ directory. You can define the corresponding rights using the chmod command. -Once you have finished installing the Perl files, the presenter will be able to give the presentation. The listeners can view this presentation under the URL http://myserver.com/presentation/presentation.htm. +Once you have finished installing the Perl files, the presenter will be able to give the presentation. The listeners can view this presentation under the URL http://myserver.com/presentation/presentation.htm. diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01110300.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01110300.xhp index 4f24abb126..947455e2b4 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01110300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01110300.xhp @@ -30,31 +30,31 @@
-inserted this dialog id, see i72163HTML Export - Page 3 -Specifies the graphics type and the target screen resolution. +inserted this dialog id, see i72163HTML Export - Page 3 +Specifies the graphics type and the target screen resolution.
-Save images as -Determines the image format. You can also define the compression value for the export. -PNG - Portable Network Graphics format -The files are exported as PNG files. PNG files are compressed without loss of data, and can contain more than 256 colors. -GIF - Graphics Interchange Format -The files are exported as GIF files. GIF files are compressed without loss of data, and have a maximum of 256 colors. -JPG - Compressed file format -The files are exported as JPEG files. JPEG files are compressed, with adjustable compression and can contain more than 256 colors. -Quality -Specifies the compression factor of the JPEG graphic. A 100% value offers the best quality for a large data range. The 25% factor indicates small files with inferior image quality. -Monitor resolution -Defines the resolution for the target screen. Depending on the selected resolution, the image will be displayed in a reduced size. You can specify a reduction of up to 80% from the original size. -Low resolution (640x480 pixels)see i73719Select the low resolution to keep the file size small, even for presentations with many slides. -Medium resolution (800x600 pixels) -Select the medium resolution for a medium-sized presentation. -High resolution (1024x768 pixels) -Select a high resolution for a high quality slide display. -Export -Export sounds when slide advances -Specifies that the sound files that are defined as an effect for slide transitions are exported. +Save images as +Determines the image format. You can also define the compression value for the export. +PNG - Portable Network Graphics format +The files are exported as PNG files. PNG files are compressed without loss of data, and can contain more than 256 colors. +GIF - Graphics Interchange Format +The files are exported as GIF files. GIF files are compressed without loss of data, and have a maximum of 256 colors. +JPG - Compressed file format +The files are exported as JPEG files. JPEG files are compressed, with adjustable compression and can contain more than 256 colors. +Quality +Specifies the compression factor of the JPEG graphic. A 100% value offers the best quality for a large data range. The 25% factor indicates small files with inferior image quality. +Monitor resolution +Defines the resolution for the target screen. Depending on the selected resolution, the image will be displayed in a reduced size. You can specify a reduction of up to 80% from the original size. +Low resolution (640x480 pixels)see i73719Select the low resolution to keep the file size small, even for presentations with many slides. +Medium resolution (800x600 pixels) +Select the medium resolution for a medium-sized presentation. +High resolution (1024x768 pixels) +Select a high resolution for a high quality slide display. +Export +Export sounds when slide advances +Specifies that the sound files that are defined as an effect for slide transitions are exported. diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01110400.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01110400.xhp index 39257e7492..f606579cdc 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01110400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01110400.xhp @@ -32,30 +32,30 @@
inserted this dialog id, see i72163 -HTML Export - Page 4 -Specifies the information to be displayed on the title page of the publication. +HTML Export - Page 4 +Specifies the information to be displayed on the title page of the publication.
-You can skip this page if you unmark the Create title page option, or if you select Automatic or WebCast, in previous pages of the Wizard. +You can skip this page if you unmark the Create title page option, or if you select Automatic or WebCast, in previous pages of the Wizard.
-Information for the title page +Information for the title page -Author -Specifies the name of the publication's author. +Author +Specifies the name of the publication's author. -E-mail address -Specifies the e-mail address. +E-mail address +Specifies the e-mail address. -Your homepage -Specifies your homepage. A hyperlink will be inserted in the publication. +Your homepage +Specifies your homepage. A hyperlink will be inserted in the publication. -Additional information -Specifies additional text to appear on the title page. +Additional information +Specifies additional text to appear on the title page. -Link to a copy of the original presentation +Link to a copy of the original presentation -Inserts a hyperlink to download a copy of the presentation file. +Inserts a hyperlink to download a copy of the presentation file. diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01110500.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01110500.xhp index f8fef518b5..740cf56a08 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01110500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01110500.xhp @@ -32,19 +32,19 @@
inserted this dialog id, see i72163 -HTML Export - Page 5 -Defines a button style for navigation through the presentation slides. +HTML Export - Page 5 +Defines a button style for navigation through the presentation slides.
-This page is not visible if you have unmarked the Create title page check box, or if you have selected either automatic or WebCast export. +This page is not visible if you have unmarked the Create title page check box, or if you have selected either automatic or WebCast export.
-Select button style -Specifies whether you want to insert navigation buttons in your presentation. You can also select the style of the buttons. +Select button style +Specifies whether you want to insert navigation buttons in your presentation. You can also select the style of the buttons. -Text only -Inserts only text hyperlinks instead of buttons. -Selection field -Displays the available button styles. Click on a button style to select it. +Text only +Inserts only text hyperlinks instead of buttons. +Selection field +Displays the available button styles. Click on a button style to select it. diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01110600.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01110600.xhp index fdf092b5a2..647f08759e 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01110600.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01110600.xhp @@ -32,38 +32,38 @@
inserted this dialog id, see i72163 -HTML Export - Page 6 -Defines the colors for the publication. +HTML Export - Page 6 +Defines the colors for the publication.
-Text formatting is obtained from the drawing or presentation. This page is skipped if you unmark the Create title page check box or if you select automatic or WebCast export. +Text formatting is obtained from the drawing or presentation. This page is skipped if you unmark the Create title page check box or if you select automatic or WebCast export.
-Select color scheme -Determines the color scheme and the colors for text and background. +Select color scheme +Determines the color scheme and the colors for text and background. -Apply color scheme from document -Determines the colors from the styles used in the current document. +Apply color scheme from document +Determines the colors from the styles used in the current document. -Use browser colors -Uses the default colors of the viewer's Web Browser. +Use browser colors +Uses the default colors of the viewer's Web Browser. -Use custom color scheme -Allows you to define your own colors for some presentation objects. +Use custom color scheme +Allows you to define your own colors for some presentation objects. -Text -Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the text color of the presentation. +Text +Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the text color of the presentation. -Hyperlink -Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the hyperlink color of the presentation. +Hyperlink +Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the hyperlink color of the presentation. -Active Link -Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the active link color of the presentation. +Active Link +Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the active link color of the presentation. -Visited Link -Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the visited link color of the presentation. +Visited Link +Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the visited link color of the presentation. -Background -Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the background color of the presentation. +Background +Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the background color of the presentation. diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01120000.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01120000.xhp index 5dddb256fc..4c90d9fbd0 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01120000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01120000.xhp @@ -27,8 +27,8 @@ -Group Element Wizard -The Group Element Wizard starts automatically when you insert a Group Box into a document. +Group Element Wizard +The Group Element Wizard starts automatically when you insert a Group Box into a document.
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ -Create -Creates the object. +Create +Creates the object. diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01120100.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01120100.xhp index d352da9339..28e7cd23fb 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01120100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01120100.xhp @@ -34,43 +34,43 @@
- Group Element Wizard: Data - Specifies which option fields are contained inside the group box. + Group Element Wizard: Data + Specifies which option fields are contained inside the group box.
- Which names do you want to give the option fields? - Specifies the respective label for each option field. You will see the label of the option field in the form. This entry corresponds to the Label property of the option field. - Accept + Which names do you want to give the option fields? + Specifies the respective label for each option field. You will see the label of the option field in the form. This entry corresponds to the Label property of the option field. + Accept - >> + >> - Confirms the current label and copies the label to the Option fields list. + Confirms the current label and copies the label to the Option fields list.
- Enter the label for each option field of the group that you want to create and copy the label to the list by clicking the arrow button. Repeat this procedure until all the option fields are defined. - Option fields - Displays all option fields which have to be included in the group box. - Remove + Enter the label for each option field of the group that you want to create and copy the label to the list by clicking the arrow button. Repeat this procedure until all the option fields are defined. + Option fields + Displays all option fields which have to be included in the group box. + Remove - << + << - Removes the selected option fields from the list. + Removes the selected option fields from the list. diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01120200.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01120200.xhp index 1ba886b8a2..e78bd8e7cd 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01120200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01120200.xhp @@ -32,20 +32,20 @@
- Group Element Wizard: Default Field Selection - Determines that you want one option field to be selected as the default choice. + Group Element Wizard: Default Field Selection + Determines that you want one option field to be selected as the default choice.
- The default settings will be accepted if you open the form in the user mode. With these settings you determine the control property Default Status. + The default settings will be accepted if you open the form in the user mode. With these settings you determine the control property Default Status.
- Should one option field be selected as a default? - Specifies whether you want to set default settings for the option box. - Yes, the following: - Specifies that you want an option field to be selected as a default after opening the form. Choose the option field from the box. - List box - Select the option field that you want to have as the default when opening the form. - No, one particular field is not going to be selected - Specifies that you do not want any option field to be the default choice. + Should one option field be selected as a default? + Specifies whether you want to set default settings for the option box. + Yes, the following: + Specifies that you want an option field to be selected as a default after opening the form. Choose the option field from the box. + List box + Select the option field that you want to have as the default when opening the form. + No, one particular field is not going to be selected + Specifies that you do not want any option field to be the default choice. diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01120300.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01120300.xhp index d7f1e4eb68..6fbd8d1c30 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01120300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01120300.xhp @@ -32,16 +32,16 @@
- Group Element Wizard: Field Values - Assigns a reference value to each option field. + Group Element Wizard: Field Values + Assigns a reference value to each option field.
- Select a field from the option fields list and enter the corresponding reference value. + Select a field from the option fields list and enter the corresponding reference value.
- Which value do you want to assign to each option? - Select a number or a text as a reference value for the selected option field. - Option fields - Select the option field for which you want to assign the reference value. + Which value do you want to assign to each option? + Select a number or a text as a reference value for the selected option field. + Option fields + Select the option field for which you want to assign the reference value. diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01120400.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01120400.xhp index eaa22ea1b0..448dc47ef6 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01120400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01120400.xhp @@ -31,20 +31,20 @@
-Group Element Wizard: Database Field -This page is only visible if the document is linked to a database. It specifies whether the reference values should be saved in the database. +Group Element Wizard: Database Field +This page is only visible if the document is linked to a database. It specifies whether the reference values should be saved in the database.
-Indicate where to save the reference values. A reference value can represent the current state of the group box in a database. +Indicate where to save the reference values. A reference value can represent the current state of the group box in a database.
-This page is only displayed if the document is already linked to a database. -Do you want to save the value in a database field?UFI: removed three help ids -Yes, I want to save it in the following database field: -Specifies that you want to save the reference values in a database. The values are written in the data field selected in the list box. The list box displays all the field names from the database table that the form is linked to. -List box -Select the data field in which the reference values have to be saved. -No, I only want to save the value in the form. -Specifies that you want to save the reference values in the form only, and not in the database. +This page is only displayed if the document is already linked to a database. +Do you want to save the value in a database field?UFI: removed three help ids +Yes, I want to save it in the following database field: +Specifies that you want to save the reference values in a database. The values are written in the data field selected in the list box. The list box displays all the field names from the database table that the form is linked to. +List box +Select the data field in which the reference values have to be saved. +No, I only want to save the value in the form. +Specifies that you want to save the reference values in the form only, and not in the database. diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01120500.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01120500.xhp index f47424f923..7fd58c8325 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01120500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01120500.xhp @@ -32,13 +32,13 @@
- Group Element Wizard: Create Option Group - Specifies a label for the option group. + Group Element Wizard: Create Option Group + Specifies a label for the option group.
- Which caption is to be given to your option group? - Specifies the label for the option box. You will see the label of the group box displayed in the form. The text you enter here will correspond to the Label property of the group box. + Which caption is to be given to your option group? + Specifies the label for the option box. You will see the label of the group box displayed in the form. The text you enter here will correspond to the Label property of the group box. diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01130000.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01130000.xhp index 7bdc3f044f..185db46751 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01130000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01130000.xhp @@ -27,22 +27,22 @@ mw deleted all index entries because of guide import_ms.xhp - + -Document Converter -Copies and converts documents into the OpenDocument XML format used by $[officename]. +Document Converter +Copies and converts documents into the OpenDocument XML format used by $[officename].
-The wizard converts documents from Microsoft Word, Excel and PowerPoint. The source files are only read, not edited. New target files are written with the new file name extension in the same or a new folder. -The Document Converter Wizard contains the following pages: +The wizard converts documents from Microsoft Word, Excel and PowerPoint. The source files are only read, not edited. New target files are written with the new file name extension in the same or a new folder. +The Document Converter Wizard contains the following pages: -Document Converter Summary -Displays a summary which shows what will be converted when you click Convert. +Document Converter Summary +Displays a summary which shows what will be converted when you click Convert. diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01130100.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01130100.xhp index f40071989e..aff4d1639f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01130100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01130100.xhp @@ -30,22 +30,22 @@
-Document Converter Page 1 -Specifies the type of Microsoft Office documents that will be converted. +Document Converter Page 1 +Specifies the type of Microsoft Office documents that will be converted.
-Microsoft Office -Converts Microsoft Office documents into the OpenDocument format. -Word documents -Converts documents in Microsoft Word format *.doc into OpenDocument *.odt documents. -Excel documents -Converts documents in Microsoft Excel format *.xls into OpenDocument *.ods documents. -PowerPoint documents -Converts documents in Microsoft PowerPoint format *.ppt into OpenDocument *.odp documents. -Create Log file -Creates a log file in your work directory showing which documents have been converted. -Continue to the next page of the Document Converter. +Microsoft Office +Converts Microsoft Office documents into the OpenDocument format. +Word documents +Converts documents in Microsoft Word format *.doc into OpenDocument *.odt documents. +Excel documents +Converts documents in Microsoft Excel format *.xls into OpenDocument *.ods documents. +PowerPoint documents +Converts documents in Microsoft PowerPoint format *.ppt into OpenDocument *.odp documents. +Create Log file +Creates a log file in your work directory showing which documents have been converted. +Continue to the next page of the Document Converter. diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01130200.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01130200.xhp index 1245882ad6..c0082593c0 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01130200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01130200.xhp @@ -30,37 +30,37 @@
-Document converter continuation pages -Specifies, for each template type and document type, the directory to be read from and the directory to be written to. +Document converter continuation pages +Specifies, for each template type and document type, the directory to be read from and the directory to be written to.
-Templates -Determines whether templates are to be converted, and how they are converted. -Text templates -Note that the "Text templates" label can change, depending on the selections from the previous page. For example, if Microsoft Word documents have been selected, the label reads "Word templates". -Specifies that templates are to be converted. +Templates +Determines whether templates are to be converted, and how they are converted. +Text templates +Note that the "Text templates" label can change, depending on the selections from the previous page. For example, if Microsoft Word documents have been selected, the label reads "Word templates". +Specifies that templates are to be converted.
-Including subdirectories -Indicates that the subdirectories of the selected directory are also searched for matching files. +Including subdirectories +Indicates that the subdirectories of the selected directory are also searched for matching files. -Import from -Specifies the directory containing the source files. +Import from +Specifies the directory containing the source files. -Save to -Specifies the directory to which the destination files are written. +Save to +Specifies the directory to which the destination files are written. -... -Opens a dialog to select the desired path. +... +Opens a dialog to select the desired path.
-Documents -Determines whether and how documents are converted. -Text documents -Note that the "Text documents" label can change, depending on the selections from the previous page. For example, if Microsoft Word documents have been selected, the label reads "Word documents". -Indicates that the documents are to be converted. +Documents +Determines whether and how documents are converted. +Text documents +Note that the "Text documents" label can change, depending on the selections from the previous page. For example, if Microsoft Word documents have been selected, the label reads "Word documents". +Indicates that the documents are to be converted. -Here you can return to the main page of the Document Converter Wizard. +Here you can return to the main page of the Document Converter Wizard. diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01150000.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01150000.xhp index 2e40fd0ebf..407a41befe 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01150000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01150000.xhp @@ -37,79 +37,79 @@ -Euro Converter Wizard -Converts the currency amounts found in $[officename] Calc documents and in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents into euros. +Euro Converter Wizard +Converts the currency amounts found in $[officename] Calc documents and in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents into euros. -Only closed files are converted. It is possible, however, to use the Euro Converter in an open $[officename] Calc document. In this case, a separate dialog opens. This dialog is described at the end of this section. +Only closed files are converted. It is possible, however, to use the Euro Converter in an open $[officename] Calc document. In this case, a separate dialog opens. This dialog is described at the end of this section.
-Only the currencies of the countries participating in the European Monetary Union are converted. -Extent -Single $[officename] Calc document -Converts a single $[officename] Calc file. To convert fields and tables in $[officename] Writer, first mark the Also convert fields and tables in text documents check box. -Complete Directory -Converts all $[officename] Calc and $[officename] Writer documents and templates in the selected directory.UFI: removed help idCurrencies -Specifies the currency to be converted into euros. -Source directory / Source Document -Indicates the directory or the name of the single document to be converted. -... -Opens a dialog to select the desired directory or document. -Including Subfolders -Specifies whether all subfolders of the selected directory are included. -Also convert fields and tables in text documents -Converts currency amounts found in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents. -Values in the text document that are not in fields or tables are not converted. -Temporarily unprotect sheet without query -Specifies that sheet protection will be disabled during conversion and thereafter re-enabled. If sheet protection is covered by a password, you will see a dialog for entering the password. -Target Directory -Specifies the folder and path in which the converted files are to be saved. - +Only the currencies of the countries participating in the European Monetary Union are converted. +Extent +Single $[officename] Calc document +Converts a single $[officename] Calc file. To convert fields and tables in $[officename] Writer, first mark the Also convert fields and tables in text documents check box. +Complete Directory +Converts all $[officename] Calc and $[officename] Writer documents and templates in the selected directory.UFI: removed help idCurrencies +Specifies the currency to be converted into euros. +Source directory / Source Document +Indicates the directory or the name of the single document to be converted. +... +Opens a dialog to select the desired directory or document. +Including Subfolders +Specifies whether all subfolders of the selected directory are included. +Also convert fields and tables in text documents +Converts currency amounts found in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents. +Values in the text document that are not in fields or tables are not converted. +Temporarily unprotect sheet without query +Specifies that sheet protection will be disabled during conversion and thereafter re-enabled. If sheet protection is covered by a password, you will see a dialog for entering the password. +Target Directory +Specifies the folder and path in which the converted files are to be saved. + ... -Opens a dialog in which you can select a directory to hold the converted files. -Cancel -Closes the Euro Converter. -Help -Activates the help for the dialog. -Convert -Starts the conversion. -During conversion, a page showing the progress status is displayed. -Back -Returns to the first page of the Euro Converter. +Opens a dialog in which you can select a directory to hold the converted files. +Cancel +Closes the Euro Converter. +Help +Activates the help for the dialog. +Convert +Starts the conversion. +During conversion, a page showing the progress status is displayed. +Back +Returns to the first page of the Euro Converter.
-If the current document is a $[officename] Calc document or template, you can call up the Euro Converter using the corresponding icon in the Tools bar. This icon is hidden by default. To display the Euro Converter icon, click the arrow at the end of the Tools bar, select the Visible Buttons command and activate the Euro Converter icon. +If the current document is a $[officename] Calc document or template, you can call up the Euro Converter using the corresponding icon in the Tools bar. This icon is hidden by default. To display the Euro Converter icon, click the arrow at the end of the Tools bar, select the Visible Buttons command and activate the Euro Converter icon.
- + Icon -Euro Converter +Euro Converter
-The Euro Converter dialog contains the following functions: -Entire document -Converts the entire document. -Currencies -Specifies the currency to be converted into euros. -Selection -Select the cells you want to convert in this range, if you did not mark the Entire document check box. Select an option and then click the desired entries in the Templates / Currency ranges field. The selected range will be visible as such in the document. Click Convert to carry out the conversion. -Cell Styles -All cells with the selected Cell Styles are converted. -Currency cells in the current sheet -All currency cells in the active spreadsheet will be converted. -Currency cells in the entire document -All currency cells in the active document will be converted. -Selected range -All currency cells in the range selected before the converter was called will be converted. All cells must have the same format so that they can be recognized as a selected range. -Templates / Currency ranges -Displays the ranges to be converted from the list. +The Euro Converter dialog contains the following functions: +Entire document +Converts the entire document. +Currencies +Specifies the currency to be converted into euros. +Selection +Select the cells you want to convert in this range, if you did not mark the Entire document check box. Select an option and then click the desired entries in the Templates / Currency ranges field. The selected range will be visible as such in the document. Click Convert to carry out the conversion. +Cell Styles +All cells with the selected Cell Styles are converted. +Currency cells in the current sheet +All currency cells in the active spreadsheet will be converted. +Currency cells in the entire document +All currency cells in the active document will be converted. +Selected range +All currency cells in the range selected before the converter was called will be converted. All cells must have the same format so that they can be recognized as a selected range. +Templates / Currency ranges +Displays the ranges to be converted from the list. diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01170000.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01170000.xhp index 765894f4b0..7ab2095897 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01170000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01170000.xhp @@ -32,49 +32,49 @@ -Address Data Source -This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename]. +Address Data Source +This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename].
-You can register address data and other data sources in $[officename] at any time: +You can register address data and other data sources in $[officename] at any time: -Please select the type of your external address book -Not all types are available on all systems. +Please select the type of your external address book +Not all types are available on all systems. -Firefox / Iceweasel -Select this option if you already use an address book in Firefox or Iceweasel. +Firefox / Iceweasel +Select this option if you already use an address book in Firefox or Iceweasel. -Thunderbird / Icedove -Select this option if you already use an address book in Thunderbird or Icedove. +Thunderbird / Icedove +Select this option if you already use an address book in Thunderbird or Icedove. -KDE Address book -Select this option if you already use an address book in KDE Address book. +KDE Address book +Select this option if you already use an address book in KDE Address book. macOS Address book Select this option if you already use an address book in macOS Address book. -Evolution -Select this option if you already use an address book in Evolution. +Evolution +Select this option if you already use an address book in Evolution. -Evolution LDAP -Select this option if you already use an address book in Evolution LDAP. +Evolution LDAP +Select this option if you already use an address book in Evolution LDAP. -Groupwise -Select this option if you already use an address book in Groupwise. +Groupwise +Select this option if you already use an address book in Groupwise. -Other external data source -Select this option if you want to register another data source as address book in $[officename]. +Other external data source +Select this option if you want to register another data source as address book in $[officename]. -Cancel -Exits the wizard without implementing any changes. +Cancel +Exits the wizard without implementing any changes. -Go to previous step. +Go to previous step. -Go to next step. +Go to next step. -Create -Establishes the connection to the data source and closes the dialog. +Create +Establishes the connection to the data source and closes the dialog. diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01170200.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01170200.xhp index b2065b8dec..521c4ab62a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01170200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01170200.xhp @@ -32,15 +32,15 @@
-Additional Settings -Allows you to enter additional settings for LDAP address data and other external data sources. +Additional Settings +Allows you to enter additional settings for LDAP address data and other external data sources.
-Settings -Calls a dialog in which you can enter additional settings. -If you selected LDAP on the first page, you will see the LDAP page.UFI: deleted a para +Settings +Calls a dialog in which you can enter additional settings. +If you selected LDAP on the first page, you will see the LDAP page.UFI: deleted a para diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01170300.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01170300.xhp index dd6244fcbd..60610deb11 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01170300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01170300.xhp @@ -29,16 +29,16 @@
-Select Table -Specifies a table from the Seamonkey / Netscape address book source that is used as the address book in $[officename]. +Select Table +Specifies a table from the Seamonkey / Netscape address book source that is used as the address book in $[officename].
-All tables from the first user profile will be registered for this data source in $[officename]. You must specify one as the table that will be used in the $[officename] templates. +All tables from the first user profile will be registered for this data source in $[officename]. You must specify one as the table that will be used in the $[officename] templates. -List box -Specifies the table that is to serve as the address book for the $[officename] templates. -You can make changes to the templates and documents at a later time by choosing Edit - Exchange Database. +List box +Specifies the table that is to serve as the address book for the $[officename] templates. +You can make changes to the templates and documents at a later time by choosing Edit - Exchange Database. diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01170400.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01170400.xhp index 470c6fa2ff..bbf4bbdac7 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01170400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01170400.xhp @@ -31,20 +31,20 @@
-Data Source Name -Specifies a location for the address book file and a name under which the data source will be listed in the data source explorer. +Data Source Name +Specifies a location for the address book file and a name under which the data source will be listed in the data source explorer.
-Location -Specifies the location of the database file. +Location +Specifies the location of the database file. -Browse -Specifies the location using a file dialog. -Make this address book available to all modules in %PRODUCTNAME -Registers the newly created database file in %PRODUCTNAME. The database will then be listed in the data source window (F4). If this check box is cleared, the database will be available only by opening the database file. -Address book name -Specifies the data source name. +Browse +Specifies the location using a file dialog. +Make this address book available to all modules in %PRODUCTNAME +Registers the newly created database file in %PRODUCTNAME. The database will then be listed in the data source window (F4). If this check box is cleared, the database will be available only by opening the database file. +Address book name +Specifies the data source name. diff --git a/source/text/shared/autopi/01170500.xhp b/source/text/shared/autopi/01170500.xhp index dea3560b14..43e5189eda 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/autopi/01170500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/autopi/01170500.xhp @@ -32,14 +32,14 @@
-Field Assignment +Field Assignment Opens a dialog that allows you to specify the field assignment.
-Field Assignment -Opens the Templates: Address Book Assignment dialog. +Field Assignment +Opens the Templates: Address Book Assignment dialog. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02000000.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02000000.xhp index 8f823be5e2..6611a8051e 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02000000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02000000.xhp @@ -34,44 +34,44 @@ tables in databases; printing queries (Base) printing; queries (Base) queries; printing (Base) -mw added "(Base)" to all entries Queries -A "query" is a special view of a table. A query can display chosen records or chosen fields within records; it can also sort those records. A query can apply to one table to multiple tables, if they are linked by common data fields.i73680 +mw added "(Base)" to all entries Queries +A "query" is a special view of a table. A query can display chosen records or chosen fields within records; it can also sort those records. A query can apply to one table to multiple tables, if they are linked by common data fields.i73680
-Use queries to find records from data tables based on certain criteria. All queries created for a database are listed under the Queries entry. Since this entry contains the database queries, it is also called the "query container". -Printing Queries -To print a query or table: +Use queries to find records from data tables based on certain criteria. All queries created for a database are listed under the Queries entry. Since this entry contains the database queries, it is also called the "query container". +Printing Queries +To print a query or table: -Open a text document (or a spreadsheet document if you prefer the specific printing functions of this type of document). +Open a text document (or a spreadsheet document if you prefer the specific printing functions of this type of document). -Open the database file and click the Table icon if you want to print a table, or click the Query icon if you want to print a query. +Open the database file and click the Table icon if you want to print a table, or click the Query icon if you want to print a query. -Drag the name of the table or query into the open text document or spreadsheet. The dialog Insert Database Columns opens. +Drag the name of the table or query into the open text document or spreadsheet. The dialog Insert Database Columns opens. -Decide which columns = data fields you want to include. You can also click the AutoFormat button and select a corresponding formatting type. Close the dialog. -The query or table will be inserted into your document. +Decide which columns = data fields you want to include. You can also click the AutoFormat button and select a corresponding formatting type. Close the dialog. +The query or table will be inserted into your document. -Print the document by choosing File - Print. +Print the document by choosing File - Print. -You can also open the data source view (Ctrl+Shift+F4), select the entire database table in the data source view (button in the top left corner of the table), and then drag the selection to a text document or spreadsheet. -Sorting and Filtering Data -Allows you to sort and filter the data in a query table. -Query Design -With the Query Design, you can create and edit a query or view. +You can also open the data source view (Ctrl+Shift+F4), select the entire database table in the data source view (button in the top left corner of the table), and then drag the selection to a text document or spreadsheet. +Sorting and Filtering Data +Allows you to sort and filter the data in a query table. +Query Design +With the Query Design, you can create and edit a query or view. -Query Through Several Tables -The query result can contain data from several tables if these are linked to each other by suitable data fields. -Formulating Query Criteria -You can find out which operators and commands can be used to formulate the filter conditions for a query. -Executing Functions -You can perform calculations with the data of a table and store the results as a query result. +Query Through Several Tables +The query result can contain data from several tables if these are linked to each other by suitable data fields. +Formulating Query Criteria +You can find out which operators and commands can be used to formulate the filter conditions for a query. +Executing Functions +You can perform calculations with the data of a table and store the results as a query result. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02000002.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02000002.xhp index 41b03828b5..9237c7d6b6 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02000002.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02000002.xhp @@ -30,21 +30,21 @@ queries; missing elements (Base) -mw added "(Base)"Missing Element -If a query in which tables or fields no longer exist is opened, the Missing Element dialog appears. This dialog names the missing table or the field which cannot be interpreted and allows you to decide how to continue with the procedure. +mw added "(Base)"Missing Element +If a query in which tables or fields no longer exist is opened, the Missing Element dialog appears. This dialog names the missing table or the field which cannot be interpreted and allows you to decide how to continue with the procedure.
-How to continue? -There are three options available for answering this question: -Do you really want to open the query in the graphic view? -Allows you to open the query in the Design View in spite of missing elements. This option also allows you to specify if other errors need to be ignored. -The query is opened in the Design View (the graphical interface). Missing tables appear blank and invalid fields appear with their (invalid) names in the list of fields. This lets you work with exactly those fields that caused the error. -Open the query in the SQL View -Allows you to open the query design in the SQL Mode and to interpret the query as a Native SQL. You can only quit the native SQL mode when the $[officename] statement is completely interpreted (only possible if the used tables or fields in the query really exist). -Do not open the query -Allows you to cancel the procedure and specify that the query should not be opened. This option corresponds to the function of the Cancel dialog button. -Also ignore similar errors -If you selected the first option, but you still want to open the query in the graphics view in spite of missing elements, you can specify whether other errors are ignored. Therefore, in the current opening process, no error message will be displayed if the query can not be correctly interpreted. +How to continue? +There are three options available for answering this question: +Do you really want to open the query in the graphic view? +Allows you to open the query in the Design View in spite of missing elements. This option also allows you to specify if other errors need to be ignored. +The query is opened in the Design View (the graphical interface). Missing tables appear blank and invalid fields appear with their (invalid) names in the list of fields. This lets you work with exactly those fields that caused the error. +Open the query in the SQL View +Allows you to open the query design in the SQL Mode and to interpret the query as a Native SQL. You can only quit the native SQL mode when the $[officename] statement is completely interpreted (only possible if the used tables or fields in the query really exist). +Do not open the query +Allows you to cancel the procedure and specify that the query should not be opened. This option corresponds to the function of the Cancel dialog button. +Also ignore similar errors +If you selected the first option, but you still want to open the query in the graphics view in spite of missing elements, you can specify whether other errors are ignored. Therefore, in the current opening process, no error message will be displayed if the query can not be correctly interpreted. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02010101.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02010101.xhp index b3c881e5cc..ccc6b2bef6 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02010101.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02010101.xhp @@ -34,35 +34,30 @@ right joins (Base) full joins (Base) mw deleted "join properties" and changed "link properties..." to "links;" -Join Properties - If you double-click a connection between two linked fields in the query design, or if you choose Insert - New Relation, the Join Properties dialog appears. These properties will be used in all queries created in the future. +Join Properties + If you double-click a connection between two linked fields in the query design, or if you choose Insert - New Relation, the Join Properties dialog appears. These properties will be used in all queries created in the future.
-Tables involved - Specifies two different tables that you want to join. - Fields involved - Specifies two data fields that will be joined by a relation. - Options +Tables involved + Specifies two different tables that you want to join. + Fields involved + Specifies two data fields that will be joined by a relation. + Options -Type - Specifies the link type of the selected link. Some databases support only a subset of the possible types. - Inner Join - With the internal join, the results table contains only the records for which the content of the linked fields is the same. In $[officename] SQL this type of link is created by a corresponding WHERE clause. - Left Join - With the left join, the results table contains all fields of the left table and only those fields of the right table for which the content of the linked fields is the same. In $[officename] SQL this type of link corresponds to the LEFT OUTER JOIN command. - Right Join - With the right join, the results table contains all fields of the right table and only those fields of the left table for which the content of the linked fields is the same. In $[officename] SQL this type of link corresponds to the RIGHT OUTER JOIN command. - Full Join - For a full join, the results table contains all fields of the left and right tables. In the SQL of $[officename] this type of link corresponds to the FULL OUTER JOIN command. -Natural - Inserts the keyword NATURAL into the SQL statement that defines the relation. The relation joins all columns that have the same column name in both tables. The resulting joined table contains only one column for each pair of equally named columns. +Type + Specifies the link type of the selected link. Some databases support only a subset of the possible types. + Inner Join + With the internal join, the results table contains only the records for which the content of the linked fields is the same. In $[officename] SQL this type of link is created by a corresponding WHERE clause. + Left Join + With the left join, the results table contains all fields of the left table and only those fields of the right table for which the content of the linked fields is the same. In $[officename] SQL this type of link corresponds to the LEFT OUTER JOIN command. + Right Join + With the right join, the results table contains all fields of the right table and only those fields of the left table for which the content of the linked fields is the same. In $[officename] SQL this type of link corresponds to the RIGHT OUTER JOIN command. + Full Join + For a full join, the results table contains all fields of the left and right tables. In the SQL of $[officename] this type of link corresponds to the FULL OUTER JOIN command. +Natural + Inserts the keyword NATURAL into the SQL statement that defines the relation. The relation joins all columns that have the same column name in both tables. The resulting joined table contains only one column for each pair of equally named columns. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/04000000.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/04000000.xhp index 9d229d4585..b44e4976e6 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/04000000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/04000000.xhp @@ -32,25 +32,25 @@
-Forms +Forms forms; general information (Base) mw added "(Base)" -Forms can be used to enter or to edit existing database contents easily. +Forms can be used to enter or to edit existing database contents easily.
-FormWizard -Form Controls -The Form Controls toolbar offers the tools required to create a form in a text, table, drawing, or presentation document. -Form in Design Mode -In design mode, the form is designed and the properties of the form and the controls contained in it are defined. +FormWizard +Form Controls +The Form Controls toolbar offers the tools required to create a form in a text, table, drawing, or presentation document. +Form in Design Mode +In design mode, the form is designed and the properties of the form and the controls contained in it are defined. -Sorting and Filtering Data -You will find the sorting and filter functions in the toolbar when you open a form in user mode. +Sorting and Filtering Data +You will find the sorting and filter functions in the toolbar when you open a form in user mode. -Subforms +Subforms diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/04030000.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/04030000.xhp index 58560b1a8d..a26a9b5ada 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/04030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/04030000.xhp @@ -33,17 +33,17 @@ forms; designing (Base) mw added "(Base)" -Form Design +Form Design -Any $[officename] document can be expanded into a form. Simply add one or more form controls. -Open the Form Controls toolbar. The Form Controls toolbar contains the functions needed to edit a form. More functions can be found in the Form Design bar and More Controls bar. -In the form design you can include controls, apply properties to them, define Form properties, and define subforms. -The Form Navigator icon +Any $[officename] document can be expanded into a form. Simply add one or more form controls. +Open the Form Controls toolbar. The Form Controls toolbar contains the functions needed to edit a form. More functions can be found in the Form Design bar and More Controls bar. +In the form design you can include controls, apply properties to them, define Form properties, and define subforms. +The Form Navigator icon Icon on the Form Design bar opens the Form Navigator. -The Open in Design Mode icon +The Open in Design Mode icon Icon allows you to save a form document so that it always opens in editing mode. -If there is an error when assigning properties to the objects contained in the form (for example, when assigning a non-existent database table to an object), a corresponding error message appears. This error message may contain a More button. If you click More, a dialog displaying more information about the current problem appears. +If there is an error when assigning properties to the objects contained in the form (for example, when assigning a non-existent database table to an object), a corresponding error message appears. This error message may contain a More button. If you click More, a dialog displaying more information about the current problem appears. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05000000.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05000000.xhp index b13b03d2c9..9872515a39 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05000000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05000000.xhp @@ -33,15 +33,15 @@
-Tables -Data sources tables allow you see your data line by line. You can make new entries and deletions. +Tables +Data sources tables allow you see your data line by line. You can make new entries and deletions.
-In the $[officename] Help, you will find further information on the following subjects: -Create new or edit table design +In the $[officename] Help, you will find further information on the following subjects: +Create new or edit table design -Sort and Filter Data -Relations, Primary and External Key +Sort and Filter Data +Relations, Primary and External Key diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05000001.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05000001.xhp index 41c18a9d6e..5e6b80233c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05000001.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05000001.xhp @@ -33,16 +33,16 @@
-Table Context Menus -The context menu of the table container offers various functions that apply to all database tables. To edit a special table within the database, select the corresponding table and open its context menu. +Table Context Menus +The context menu of the table container offers various functions that apply to all database tables. To edit a special table within the database, select the corresponding table and open its context menu.
-Depending on the context, it is possible that not all the functions for your current database are listed in the context menus. For example, the Relationships command for defining relationships between various tables is only available with relational databases. -Depending on the database system used, you will find the following entries on the context menus: +Depending on the context, it is possible that not all the functions for your current database are listed in the context menus. For example, the Relationships command for defining relationships between various tables is only available with relational databases. +Depending on the database system used, you will find the following entries on the context menus: -If a table is open, there are several functions available to edit the data. +If a table is open, there are several functions available to edit the data. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05000003.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05000003.xhp index 14430bc483..8980fc8a17 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05000003.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05000003.xhp @@ -30,19 +30,19 @@ -Enter / change password -Allows you to enter and confirm a new or changed password. If you have defined a new user, enter the user's name in this dialog. +Enter / change password +Allows you to enter and confirm a new or changed password. If you have defined a new user, enter the user's name in this dialog. -User -Specifies the name of the new user. This field is only visible if you have defined a new user. +User +Specifies the name of the new user. This field is only visible if you have defined a new user. -Old password -Enter the old password. This field is visible when you have started the dialog via Change password. +Old password +Enter the old password. This field is visible when you have started the dialog via Change password. -Password -Enter the new password.UFI: removed help id +Password +Enter the new password.UFI: removed help id -Confirm (password) -Enter the new password again. +Confirm (password) +Enter the new password again. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05010000.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05010000.xhp index 0e6fae4076..6e686a519e 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05010000.xhp @@ -33,59 +33,59 @@
-Table Design -In the Table Design window you define new tables or edit the structure of a table. +Table Design +In the Table Design window you define new tables or edit the structure of a table.
-The window has its own menu bar. It also contains the following new command: Index Design +The window has its own menu bar. It also contains the following new command: Index Design -Table definition area -This area is where you define the table structure. +Table definition area +This area is where you define the table structure. -Field Name -Specifies the name of the data field. Note the database restrictions, such as the length of the name, special characters and spaces. +Field Name +Specifies the name of the data field. Note the database restrictions, such as the length of the name, special characters and spaces. -Field type -Specifies the field type. +Field type +Specifies the field type. -Description -Specifies an optional description. -The row headers contain the following context menu commands: -Cut -Cuts the selected row to the clipboard. -Copy -Copies the selected row to the clipboard. -Paste -Pastes the content of the clipboard. -Delete -Deletes the selected row. +Description +Specifies an optional description. +The row headers contain the following context menu commands: +Cut +Cuts the selected row to the clipboard. +Copy +Copies the selected row to the clipboard. +Paste +Pastes the content of the clipboard. +Delete +Deletes the selected row. -Insert Rows -Inserts an empty row above the current row, if the table has not been saved. Inserts an empty row at the end of the table if the table has been saved. +Insert Rows +Inserts an empty row above the current row, if the table has not been saved. Inserts an empty row at the end of the table if the table has been saved. -Primary Key -If this command has a check mark, the data field in this line is a primary key. By clicking the command you activate/deactivate the status. The command is only visible if the data source supports primary keys. -Field properties -Defines the field properties of the currently selected field. -Length -Specifies the length of the data field. -Decimal places -Specifies the number of decimal places for a numerical field or decimal field. +Primary Key +If this command has a check mark, the data field in this line is a primary key. By clicking the command you activate/deactivate the status. The command is only visible if the data source supports primary keys. +Field properties +Defines the field properties of the currently selected field. +Length +Specifies the length of the data field. +Decimal places +Specifies the number of decimal places for a numerical field or decimal field. -Default value -Specifies the value that is the default in new data records. +Default value +Specifies the value that is the default in new data records. -Format example -Displays the format code that you can select with the ... button. +Format example +Displays the format code that you can select with the ... button. -... -This button opens the Field Format dialog. +... +This button opens the Field Format dialog. -Help area -Displays help texts. +Help area +Displays help texts. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05010100.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05010100.xhp index 1fb529a0ec..db5d27ca7e 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05010100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05010100.xhp @@ -31,36 +31,36 @@
-Index design -The Index Design dialog allows you edit the indexes for the current table. +Index design +The Index Design dialog allows you edit the indexes for the current table.
-Index list -Displays the available indexes. Select an index from the list to edit. The details of the selected index are displayed in the dialog. -New Index -Creates a new index. -Delete Current Index -Deletes the current index. -Rename Current Index -Renames the current index. -Save Current Index -Saves the current index in the data source. -Reset Current Index -Resets the current index to the setting that it had when the dialog was started. -Index details -As soon as you change a detail of the current index and then select another index, the change is immediately passed to the data source. You can only leave the dialog, or select another index, if the change has been successfully acknowledged by the data source. However, you can undo the change by clicking the Reset Current Index icon. -Unique -Specifies whether the current index allows only unique values. Checking the Unique option prevents duplicate data from being entered in the field and ensures data integrity. -Fields -The Fields area displays a list of fields in the current table. You can also select multiple fields. In order to remove a field from the selection, select the empty entry at the start of the list. -Index field -Displays a list of the fields in the current table. You can select more than one field.i73718 -Sort order -Determines the sort order. -Close -Closes the dialog. +Index list +Displays the available indexes. Select an index from the list to edit. The details of the selected index are displayed in the dialog. +New Index +Creates a new index. +Delete Current Index +Deletes the current index. +Rename Current Index +Renames the current index. +Save Current Index +Saves the current index in the data source. +Reset Current Index +Resets the current index to the setting that it had when the dialog was started. +Index details +As soon as you change a detail of the current index and then select another index, the change is immediately passed to the data source. You can only leave the dialog, or select another index, if the change has been successfully acknowledged by the data source. However, you can undo the change by clicking the Reset Current Index icon. +Unique +Specifies whether the current index allows only unique values. Checking the Unique option prevents duplicate data from being entered in the field and ensures data integrity. +Fields +The Fields area displays a list of fields in the current table. You can also select multiple fields. In order to remove a field from the selection, select the empty entry at the start of the list. +Index field +Displays a list of the fields in the current table. You can select more than one field.i73718 +Sort order +Determines the sort order. +Close +Closes the dialog. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05020000.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05020000.xhp index c68572c59c..c4eaad9724 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05020000.xhp @@ -29,35 +29,35 @@
-Relations +Relations relational databases (Base) mw added "(Base)" -This command opens the Relation Design window, which allows you to define relationships between various database tables. +This command opens the Relation Design window, which allows you to define relationships between various database tables.
-Here you can link together tables from the current database through common data fields. Click the New Relation icon to create the relationships, or simply drag-and-drop with the mouse. +Here you can link together tables from the current database through common data fields. Click the New Relation icon to create the relationships, or simply drag-and-drop with the mouse.
-This function is only available if you are working with a relational database. -When you choose Tools - Relationships, a window opens in which all the existing relationships between the tables of the current database are shown. If no relationships have been defined, or if you want to relate other tables of the database to each other, then click the Add Tables icon. The Add Tables dialog opens in which you can select the tables that you want. +This function is only available if you are working with a relational database. +When you choose Tools - Relationships, a window opens in which all the existing relationships between the tables of the current database are shown. If no relationships have been defined, or if you want to relate other tables of the database to each other, then click the Add Tables icon. The Add Tables dialog opens in which you can select the tables that you want. -If the Relation Design window is open, the selected tables cannot be modified, even in Table Design mode. This ensures that tables are not changed while the relations are being created. -The selected tables are shown in the top area of the design view. You can close a table window through the context menu or with the Delete key. +If the Relation Design window is open, the selected tables cannot be modified, even in Table Design mode. This ensures that tables are not changed while the relations are being created. +The selected tables are shown in the top area of the design view. You can close a table window through the context menu or with the Delete key. primary keys;inserting (Base) keys;primary keys (Base) external keys (Base) mw added "(Base)" to all entries -Primary key and other key -If you want to define a relation among the different tables, you should enter a primary key that clearly identifies a data field of the existing table. You can refer to the primary key from other tables to access the data of this table. All data fields referring to this primary key will be identified as an external key. -All data fields referring to a primary key will be identified in the table window by a small key symbol. -Define relations +Primary key and other key +If you want to define a relation among the different tables, you should enter a primary key that clearly identifies a data field of the existing table. You can refer to the primary key from other tables to access the data of this table. All data fields referring to this primary key will be identified as an external key. +All data fields referring to a primary key will be identified in the table window by a small key symbol. +Define relations relations; creating and deleting (Base) mw added "(Base)" -All existing relations are shown in the relations windows by a line that connects the primary and other key fields. You can add a relation by using drag-and-drop to drop the field of one table onto the field of the other table. A relation is removed again by selecting it and pressing the Delete key. -Alternatively, you can also click the New Relation icon in the top area of the relation field and define the relation between two tables in the Relations dialog. +All existing relations are shown in the relations windows by a line that connects the primary and other key fields. You can add a relation by using drag-and-drop to drop the field of one table onto the field of the other table. A relation is removed again by selecting it and pressing the Delete key. +Alternatively, you can also click the New Relation icon in the top area of the relation field and define the relation between two tables in the Relations dialog. -If you use $[officename] as the front-end for a relational database, the creation and deletion of relationships is not placed in an intermediate memory by $[officename], but is forwarded directly to the external database. -By double-clicking a connection line, you can assign certain properties to the relation. The Relations dialog opens. +If you use $[officename] as the front-end for a relational database, the creation and deletion of relationships is not placed in an intermediate memory by $[officename], but is forwarded directly to the external database. +By double-clicking a connection line, you can assign certain properties to the relation. The Relations dialog opens. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05020100.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05020100.xhp index f214f2c86f..7fc19bf559 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05020100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05020100.xhp @@ -37,40 +37,40 @@ key fields for relations (Base) cascading update (Base) mw added "(Base)" to all entries -Relations -Allows you to define and edit a relation between two tables. +Relations +Allows you to define and edit a relation between two tables.
-The update and delete options are only available if they are supported by the database used. -Tables -This is where the two related tables are listed. If you create a new relation, you can select one table from each of the combo boxes in the top part of the dialog. -If you opened the Relations dialog for an existing relation by double-clicking the connection lines in the Relation window, then the tables involved in the relation cannot be modified. +The update and delete options are only available if they are supported by the database used. +Tables +This is where the two related tables are listed. If you create a new relation, you can select one table from each of the combo boxes in the top part of the dialog. +If you opened the Relations dialog for an existing relation by double-clicking the connection lines in the Relation window, then the tables involved in the relation cannot be modified. -Key fields -Defines the key fields for the relation. +Key fields +Defines the key fields for the relation. -The names of the tables selected for the link appear here as column names. If you click a field, you can use the arrow buttons to select a field from the table. Each relation is written in a row. -Update options -Here you can select options that take effect when there are changes to a primary key field. -No action -Specifies that any change made to a primary key does not affect other external key fields. -Updating cascade -Updates all the external key fields if the value of the corresponding primary key has been modified (Cascading Update). -Set null - If the corresponding primary key has been modified, use this option to set the "IS NULL" value to all external key fields. IS NULL means that the field is empty. -Set default - If the corresponding primary key has been modified, use this option to set a default value to all external key fields. During the creation of the corresponding table, the default value of an external key field will be defined when you assign the field properties. -Delete options -Here you can select options that take effect when a primary key field is deleted. -No action -Specifies that the deletion of a primary key will not have any effect on other external key fields. -Delete cascade -Specifies that all external key fields will be deleted if you delete the corresponding primary key field. -When you delete a primary key field with the Delete cascade option, all records from other tables that have this key as their foreign key are also deleted. Use this option with great care; it is possible that a major portion of the database can be deleted. -Set null -If you delete the corresponding primary key, the "IS NULL" value will be assigned to all external key fields. -Set Default -If you delete the corresponding primary key, a set value will be set to all external key fields. +The names of the tables selected for the link appear here as column names. If you click a field, you can use the arrow buttons to select a field from the table. Each relation is written in a row. +Update options +Here you can select options that take effect when there are changes to a primary key field. +No action +Specifies that any change made to a primary key does not affect other external key fields. +Updating cascade +Updates all the external key fields if the value of the corresponding primary key has been modified (Cascading Update). +Set null + If the corresponding primary key has been modified, use this option to set the "IS NULL" value to all external key fields. IS NULL means that the field is empty. +Set default + If the corresponding primary key has been modified, use this option to set a default value to all external key fields. During the creation of the corresponding table, the default value of an external key field will be defined when you assign the field properties. +Delete options +Here you can select options that take effect when a primary key field is deleted. +No action +Specifies that the deletion of a primary key will not have any effect on other external key fields. +Delete cascade +Specifies that all external key fields will be deleted if you delete the corresponding primary key field. +When you delete a primary key field with the Delete cascade option, all records from other tables that have this key as their foreign key are also deleted. Use this option with great care; it is possible that a major portion of the database can be deleted. +Set null +If you delete the corresponding primary key, the "IS NULL" value will be assigned to all external key fields. +Set Default +If you delete the corresponding primary key, a set value will be set to all external key fields. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030000.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030000.xhp index dfde92ef44..aeb81332c7 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030000.xhp @@ -30,24 +30,24 @@ -Copy Query or Table by Drag-and-Drop +Copy Query or Table by Drag-and-Drop queries; copying (Base) tables in databases; copying database tables (Base) mw deleted "database tables;" -UFI: fix to #i18395#Dragging-and-dropping a query or table opens the Copy Table dialog, which allows you to define the options for copying a query or a table. +UFI: fix to #i18395#Dragging-and-dropping a query or table opens the Copy Table dialog, which allows you to define the options for copying a query or a table.
-With the Copy Table dialog you can: +With the Copy Table dialog you can: -copy the data from the table into another table, +copy the data from the table into another table, -use the structure of the table as the basis for creating a new table. +use the structure of the table as the basis for creating a new table. -You can copy within the same database or between different databases. +You can copy within the same database or between different databases. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030100.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030100.xhp index 1664f3bf36..ba455d1f83 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030100.xhp @@ -31,30 +31,30 @@
-Copy Table -You can copy a table by dragging and dropping the table onto the table area of a database file window. The Copy table dialog appears. +Copy Table +You can copy a table by dragging and dropping the table onto the table area of a database file window. The Copy table dialog appears.
-Table name -Specifies a name for the copy. Some databases only accept names containing eight or fewer characters. -Options -Definition and data -Creates a 1:1 copy of the database table. The table definition and the complete data are copied. The table definition includes the table structure and format from different data fields, including special field properties. The field contents supply the data. -Definition -Copies only the table definition and not the corresponding data. -As table view -If the database supports Views and you selected this option, a query will be created in the table container as a table. This option allows you to view the query results as a normal table view. The table will be filtered in the view with a "Select" SQL statement. -Append datasee #i63815 -Appends the data of the table to be copied to an existing table. -The table definition must be exactly the same so that data can be copied. Data cannot be copied if a data field in the target table has another format than the data field in the source table. -Match the data field names in the Copy Table dialog on the Apply Columns page. -If the data cannot be attached, you will see a list of fields in the Column Info dialog whose data cannot be copied. If you confirm this dialog with OK, only the data that does not appear in the list will be attached. -If the fields of the target table have a smaller field length than in the source table when data is being attached, the source data fields will automatically be truncated to match the field lengths in the target table. +Table name +Specifies a name for the copy. Some databases only accept names containing eight or fewer characters. +Options +Definition and data +Creates a 1:1 copy of the database table. The table definition and the complete data are copied. The table definition includes the table structure and format from different data fields, including special field properties. The field contents supply the data. +Definition +Copies only the table definition and not the corresponding data. +As table view +If the database supports Views and you selected this option, a query will be created in the table container as a table. This option allows you to view the query results as a normal table view. The table will be filtered in the view with a "Select" SQL statement. +Append datasee #i63815 +Appends the data of the table to be copied to an existing table. +The table definition must be exactly the same so that data can be copied. Data cannot be copied if a data field in the target table has another format than the data field in the source table. +Match the data field names in the Copy Table dialog on the Apply Columns page. +If the data cannot be attached, you will see a list of fields in the Column Info dialog whose data cannot be copied. If you confirm this dialog with OK, only the data that does not appear in the list will be attached. +If the fields of the target table have a smaller field length than in the source table when data is being attached, the source data fields will automatically be truncated to match the field lengths in the target table. primary keys; defining -Create primary key -Automatically generates a primary key data field and fills it with values. You should always use this field, since a primary key must always be available in order to edit the table. -Name -Specifies a name for the primary key generated. This name is optional. -Next page +Create primary key +Automatically generates a primary key data field and fills it with values. You should always use this field, since a primary key must always be available in order to edit the table. +Name +Specifies a name for the primary key generated. This name is optional. +Next page diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030200.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030200.xhp index 39bc238e3c..6c116784c7 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030200.xhp @@ -31,19 +31,19 @@
-Apply columns -In the data source explorer, you can copy a table by dragging and dropping the table onto the table container. The Apply columns dialog is the second window of the Copy table dialog. +Apply columns +In the data source explorer, you can copy a table by dragging and dropping the table onto the table container. The Apply columns dialog is the second window of the Copy table dialog.
-Existing columns -Left list box -Lists the available data fields that you can include in the copied table. To copy a data field, click its name, and then click the > button. To copy all of the fields, click the >> button. -Right list box -Lists the fields that you want to include in the copied table. +Existing columns +Left list box +Lists the available data fields that you can include in the copied table. To copy a data field, click its name, and then click the > button. To copy all of the fields, click the >> button. +Right list box +Lists the fields that you want to include in the copied table. -Buttons -Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button). -Next page +Buttons +Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button). +Next page diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030300.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030300.xhp index 3c092ce84c..60d768e738 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030300.xhp @@ -33,36 +33,36 @@
-Type formatting -In the data source explorer, you can copy a table by dragging and dropping the table onto the table container. The Type formatting dialog is the third window of the Copy table dialog. +Type formatting +In the data source explorer, you can copy a table by dragging and dropping the table onto the table container. The Type formatting dialog is the third window of the Copy table dialog.
-List box -Lists the data fields that will be included in to the copied table. -Column information +List box +Lists the data fields that will be included in to the copied table. +Column information -Field name -Displays the name of the selected data field. If you want, you can enter a new name. +Field name +Displays the name of the selected data field. If you want, you can enter a new name. -Field type -Select a field type. +Field type +Select a field type. -Length -Enter the number of characters for the data field. +Length +Enter the number of characters for the data field. -Decimal places -Enter the number of decimal places for the data field. This option is only available for numerical or decimal data fields. +Decimal places +Enter the number of decimal places for the data field. This option is only available for numerical or decimal data fields. -Default value -Select the default value for a Yes/No field. -Automatic type recognition -$[officename] can automatically recognize field contents when you copy database tables by drag and drop. +Default value +Select the default value for a Yes/No field. +Automatic type recognition +$[officename] can automatically recognize field contents when you copy database tables by drag and drop. -(max.) lines -Enter the number of lines to use for automatic type recognition. +(max.) lines +Enter the number of lines to use for automatic type recognition. -Auto -Enables automatic type recognition. +Auto +Enables automatic type recognition. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030400.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030400.xhp index c208561a8a..36a520dc77 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030400.xhp @@ -33,28 +33,28 @@
-Assign columns -In the data source explorer, you can copy a table by dragging and dropping the table onto the table container. If you select the Attach data check box on the first page of the Copy table dialog, the Assign columns dialog opens as the second window. You can use this dialog to map the contents of a data field in the source table to a different data field in the destination table. +Assign columns +In the data source explorer, you can copy a table by dragging and dropping the table onto the table container. If you select the Attach data check box on the first page of the Copy table dialog, the Assign columns dialog opens as the second window. You can use this dialog to map the contents of a data field in the source table to a different data field in the destination table.
-Source table -Lists the data fields in the source table. To include a data field from the source table in the destination table, select the check box in front of the data field name. To map the contents of a data field in the source table to a different data field in the destination table, click the data field in the source table list, and then click the up or down arrow. To include all of the source data fields in the destination table, click All. +Source table +Lists the data fields in the source table. To include a data field from the source table in the destination table, select the check box in front of the data field name. To map the contents of a data field in the source table to a different data field in the destination table, click the data field in the source table list, and then click the up or down arrow. To include all of the source data fields in the destination table, click All. -Destination table -Lists the possible data fields in the destination table. Only the data fields that are selected in the source table list will be included the destination table. +Destination table +Lists the possible data fields in the destination table. Only the data fields that are selected in the source table list will be included the destination table. -up -Moves the selected entry up one position in the list. +up +Moves the selected entry up one position in the list. -down -Moves the selected entry down one position in the list. +down +Moves the selected entry down one position in the list. -all -Selects all of the data fields in the list. +all +Selects all of the data fields in the list. -none -Clears all of the check boxes in the list. +none +Clears all of the check boxes in the list. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05040000.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05040000.xhp index 0b25f495cd..4c8385e0c6 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05040000.xhp @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ -General +General diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05040100.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05040100.xhp index fb0e974f38..6ba298ba2a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05040100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05040100.xhp @@ -31,32 +31,32 @@
-General -When you create a database table as an administrator, you can use this tab to determine user access, and to edit the data or the table structure. +General +When you create a database table as an administrator, you can use this tab to determine user access, and to edit the data or the table structure.
access rights for database tables (Base) tables in databases; access rights to (Base) mw added "(Base)" to all entries -If you are not the administrator, you can use the General tab to view your access rights for the selected table. -Table name -Displays the name of the selected database table. -Type -Displays the type of database. -Location -Displays the complete path of the database table. -Read data -Allows a user to read the data. -Insert data -Allows a user to insert new data. -Change data -Allows a user to change data. -Delete data -Allows a user to delete data. -Change table structure -Allows a user to change the table structure. -Definition -Allows the user to delete the table structure. -Modify references -Allows the user to modify the defined references, for example, to enter new relations for the table or to delete existing relations. +If you are not the administrator, you can use the General tab to view your access rights for the selected table. +Table name +Displays the name of the selected database table. +Type +Displays the type of database. +Location +Displays the complete path of the database table. +Read data +Allows a user to read the data. +Insert data +Allows a user to insert new data. +Change data +Allows a user to change data. +Delete data +Allows a user to delete data. +Change table structure +Allows a user to change the table structure. +Definition +Allows the user to delete the table structure. +Modify references +Allows the user to modify the defined references, for example, to enter new relations for the table or to delete existing relations. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05040200.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05040200.xhp index 1384270f89..22bf38e04a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05040200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05040200.xhp @@ -33,9 +33,9 @@
-Description +Description
-Table description +Table description Displays the description for the selected table. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11000002.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11000002.xhp index 40bd9f12c9..a9cefeb643 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11000002.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11000002.xhp @@ -32,19 +32,19 @@ databases;drag and drop (Base) mw added "(Base)" -Data sources in $[officename] +Data sources in $[officename]
-Selecting the Address Book +Selecting the Address Book -To select the address book that you want to use, choose Tools - Address Book Source. +To select the address book that you want to use, choose Tools - Address Book Source.
-Opening a Data Source +Opening a Data Source -To open the data source view, press Ctrl+Shift+F4 in a text, spreadsheet or form document. +To open the data source view, press Ctrl+Shift+F4 in a text, spreadsheet or form document. -To view the contents of a database, click the plus sign (+) in front of the name in the data source view. +To view the contents of a database, click the plus sign (+) in front of the name in the data source view. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11020000.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11020000.xhp index 52ff0a9a48..5fc519db09 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11020000.xhp @@ -30,44 +30,44 @@
-ODBCstill some Help IDs in this file. Else it can be removed +ODBCstill some Help IDs in this file. Else it can be removed Specifies the settings for ODBC databases. This includes your user access data, driver settings, and font definitions.
-User Name -Type the user name for accessing the database. +User Name +Type the user name for accessing the database.
-Password required -Prevents an unauthorized user from accessing the database. You only need to enter the password once per session. +Password required +Prevents an unauthorized user from accessing the database. You only need to enter the password once per session.
-Driver Settings -Use this text field to enter additional optional driver settings if this is necessary. +Driver Settings +Use this text field to enter additional optional driver settings if this is necessary.
-Character Set -Select the code conversion that you want to use to view the database in $[officename]. This does not affect the database. Choose "System" to use the default character set of your operating system. Text and dBASE databases are restricted to character sets with a fixed-size character length, where all characters are encoded with the same number of bytes. +Character Set +Select the code conversion that you want to use to view the database in $[officename]. This does not affect the database. Choose "System" to use the default character set of your operating system. Text and dBASE databases are restricted to character sets with a fixed-size character length, where all characters are encoded with the same number of bytes.
-General -Retrieve generated values -Enables $[officename] support of auto-incremented data fields for the current ODBC or JDBC data source. Select this check box if the database does not support the auto-increment feature in its SDBCX layer. In general, the auto-increment is selected for the primary key field. -Auto-increment statement -Enter the SQL command specifier that instructs the data source to auto-increment a specified Integer data field. For example, a typical SQL statement to create a data field is: -CREATE TABLE "table1" ("id" INTEGER) -To auto-increment the "id" data field in a MySQL database, change the statement to: -CREATE TABLE "table1" ("id" INTEGER AUTO_INCREMENT) -In other words, enter AUTO_INCREMENT into Auto-increment statement box. -Query of generated values -Enter an SQL statement that returns the last auto-incremented value for the primary key data field. For example: -SELECT LAST_INSERT_D(); +General +Retrieve generated values +Enables $[officename] support of auto-incremented data fields for the current ODBC or JDBC data source. Select this check box if the database does not support the auto-increment feature in its SDBCX layer. In general, the auto-increment is selected for the primary key field. +Auto-increment statement +Enter the SQL command specifier that instructs the data source to auto-increment a specified Integer data field. For example, a typical SQL statement to create a data field is: +CREATE TABLE "table1" ("id" INTEGER) +To auto-increment the "id" data field in a MySQL database, change the statement to: +CREATE TABLE "table1" ("id" INTEGER AUTO_INCREMENT) +In other words, enter AUTO_INCREMENT into Auto-increment statement box. +Query of generated values +Enter an SQL statement that returns the last auto-incremented value for the primary key data field. For example: +SELECT LAST_INSERT_D();
-Use SQL92 naming constraints -Only allows names that use characters that conform to the SQL92 naming constraints in the data source. All other characters are rejected. Each name must begin with a lower or upper case letter, or an underline ( _ ). The remaining characters can be ASCII letters, underlines, and numbers. +Use SQL92 naming constraints +Only allows names that use characters that conform to the SQL92 naming constraints in the data source. All other characters are rejected. Each name must begin with a lower or upper case letter, or an underline ( _ ). The remaining characters can be ASCII letters, underlines, and numbers.
-Use Catalog for file-based databases -Uses the current data source of the Catalog. This is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. If the ODBC data source is a dBASE driver, leave this check box clear. +Use Catalog for file-based databases +Uses the current data source of the Catalog. This is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. If the ODBC data source is a dBASE driver, leave this check box clear. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11030000.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11030000.xhp index e2710a5650..718a228827 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11030000.xhp @@ -28,25 +28,25 @@
ufi: removed remaining two index entriesmw added "(Base)" to all 4 entries and transferred 2 entries to shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02dbase.xhp -dBASEstill two Help IDs in this file. Else file can be removed +dBASEstill two Help IDs in this file. Else file can be removed Specify the settings for a dBASE database.
-To be able to define relations between tables, use JDBC or ODBC from within $[officename]. +To be able to define relations between tables, use JDBC or ODBC from within $[officename]. -Display inactive records -Displays all the records in a file, including those marked as deleted. If you select this check box, you cannot delete records. -In dBASE format, deleted records remain in the file. -To view any changes that you make to the database, close the connection to the database, and then reconnect the database. -UFI: deleted note about case sensitivity. Should be not other than for all other files. +Display inactive records +Displays all the records in a file, including those marked as deleted. If you select this check box, you cannot delete records. +In dBASE format, deleted records remain in the file. +To view any changes that you make to the database, close the connection to the database, and then reconnect the database. +UFI: deleted note about case sensitivity. Should be not other than for all other files. -Select the code conversion that you want to use to view the database in $[officename]. This does not affect the database. +Select the code conversion that you want to use to view the database in $[officename]. This does not affect the database. -Indexes -Opens the Indexes dialog, where you can organize the table indexes in the current dBASE database. +Indexes +Opens the Indexes dialog, where you can organize the table indexes in the current dBASE database. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11030100.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11030100.xhp index 35a0f3565c..11e6378fd8 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11030100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11030100.xhp @@ -30,24 +30,24 @@ -Indexes -Lets you organize dBASE database indexes. An index allows you to access a database quickly, provided that you query the data in the selection that was defined through the index. When you design a table, you can define the indexes on the Indexes tab page. +Indexes +Lets you organize dBASE database indexes. An index allows you to access a database quickly, provided that you query the data in the selection that was defined through the index. When you design a table, you can define the indexes on the Indexes tab page.
-Table -Select the database table that you want to index. -Table Indexes -Lists the current indexes for the selected database table. To remove an index from the list, click the index, and then click the right arrow. -Free Indexes -Lists the available indexes that you can assign to a table. To assign an index to a selected table, click the left arrow icon. The left double arrow assigns all available indexes. -< -Moves the selected index to the Table Indexes list. -<< -Moves all of the free indexes to the Table Indexes list. -> -Moves the selected table indexes to the Free Indexes list. ->> -Moves all of the table indexes to the Free Indexes list. +Table +Select the database table that you want to index. +Table Indexes +Lists the current indexes for the selected database table. To remove an index from the list, click the index, and then click the right arrow. +Free Indexes +Lists the available indexes that you can assign to a table. To assign an index to a selected table, click the left arrow icon. The left double arrow assigns all available indexes. +< +Moves the selected index to the Table Indexes list. +<< +Moves all of the free indexes to the Table Indexes list. +> +Moves the selected table indexes to the Free Indexes list. +>> +Moves all of the table indexes to the Free Indexes list. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11080000.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11080000.xhp index 4b12fe6087..c8fd3726ea 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11080000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11080000.xhp @@ -31,27 +31,27 @@ SQL; executing SQL statements (Base) databases; administration through SQL (Base) - -Execute SQL statement -Opens a dialog where you can enter an SQL command for administering a database. + +Execute SQL statement +Opens a dialog where you can enter an SQL command for administering a database.
-You can only enter administration commands in this dialog, such as Grant, Create Table, or Drop Table, and not filter commands. The commands that you can enter depend on the data source, for example, dBASE can only run some of the SQL commands list here. -To run an SQL query for filtering data in the database, use the Query Design View. -Command to execute -Enter the SQL administration command that you want to run. -For example, for a "Bibliography" data source, you can enter the following SQL command: -SELECT "Address" FROM "biblio" "biblio" -For more information on SQL commands, please consult the documentation that came with the database. -Previous commands -Lists the previously executed SQL commands. To run a command again, click the command, and then click Run. -Status -Displays the results, including errors, of the SQL command that you ran. -Run -Runs the command that you entered in the Command to execute box. +You can only enter administration commands in this dialog, such as Grant, Create Table, or Drop Table, and not filter commands. The commands that you can enter depend on the data source, for example, dBASE can only run some of the SQL commands list here. +To run an SQL query for filtering data in the database, use the Query Design View. +Command to execute +Enter the SQL administration command that you want to run. +For example, for a "Bibliography" data source, you can enter the following SQL command: +SELECT "Address" FROM "biblio" "biblio" +For more information on SQL commands, please consult the documentation that came with the database. +Previous commands +Lists the previously executed SQL commands. To run a command again, click the command, and then click Run. +Status +Displays the results, including errors, of the SQL command that you ran. +Run +Runs the command that you entered in the Command to execute box. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11090000.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11090000.xhp index 9c533c8c6e..13e0342c26 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11090000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11090000.xhp @@ -30,10 +30,10 @@
-Table FilterUFI: file remains as a help id container - no browsing
-Some databases track changes to each record by assigning version number to fields that are changed. This number is incremented by 1 each time the field is changed. Displays the internal version number of the record in the database table. +Table FilterUFI: file remains as a help id container - no browsing
+Some databases track changes to each record by assigning version number to fields that are changed. This number is incremented by 1 each time the field is changed. Displays the internal version number of the record in the database table. -Sort Ascendingin View - Sort menu -Sorts the list of table names in ascending order starting at the beginning of the alphabet. +Sort Ascendingin View - Sort menu +Sorts the list of table names in ascending order starting at the beginning of the alphabet. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvprop.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvprop.xhp index f12cf8a587..ee8535766e 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvprop.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvprop.xhp @@ -31,11 +31,11 @@
-Advanced Properties -Specifies advanced properties for the database. +Advanced Properties +Specifies advanced properties for the database.
-In a database window, choose Edit - Database - Properties, click Advanced Properties tab +In a database window, choose Edit - Database - Properties, click Advanced Properties tab
diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropdat.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropdat.xhp index 5fa685adf4..b1e0f3664a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropdat.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropdat.xhp @@ -28,71 +28,71 @@
- Special Settings - Specifies the way you can work with data in a database. + Special Settings + Specifies the way you can work with data in a database.
- In a database window, choose Edit - Database - Advanced Settings + In a database window, choose Edit - Database - Advanced Settings
- The availability of the following controls depends on the type of database: - Use SQL92 naming constraintsUFI: found this for dBase and for text file folder - Only allows characters that conform to the SQL92 naming convention in a name in a data source. All other characters are rejected. Each name must begin with a lowercase letter, an uppercase letter, or an underscore ( _ ). The remaining characters can be ASCII letters, numbers, and underscores. + The availability of the following controls depends on the type of database: + Use SQL92 naming constraintsUFI: found this for dBase and for text file folder + Only allows characters that conform to the SQL92 naming convention in a name in a data source. All other characters are rejected. Each name must begin with a lowercase letter, an uppercase letter, or an underscore ( _ ). The remaining characters can be ASCII letters, numbers, and underscores. - Use keyword AS before table alias names - Some databases use the keyword "AS" between a name and its alias, while other databases use a whitespace. Enable this option to insert AS before the alias.http://dba.openoffice.org/specifications/Data_Source_Property_Dialog.sxw + Use keyword AS before table alias names + Some databases use the keyword "AS" between a name and its alias, while other databases use a whitespace. Enable this option to insert AS before the alias.http://dba.openoffice.org/specifications/Data_Source_Property_Dialog.sxw -End text lines with CR + LFUFI: found for dBase and text file folder - Select to use the CR + LF code pair to end every text line (preferred for DOS and Windows operating systems). +End text lines with CR + LFUFI: found for dBase and text file folder + Select to use the CR + LF code pair to end every text line (preferred for DOS and Windows operating systems). -Append the table alias name in SELECT statements - Appends the alias to the table name in SELECT statements. +Append the table alias name in SELECT statements + Appends the alias to the table name in SELECT statements. -Use Outer Join syntax '{OJ }' - Use escape sequences for outer joins. The syntax for this escape sequence is {oj outer-join}copied from shared\explorer\database\02010100.xhp - Example: - select Article.* from {oj item LEFT OUTER JOIN orders ON item.no=orders.ANR} +Use Outer Join syntax '{OJ }' + Use escape sequences for outer joins. The syntax for this escape sequence is {oj outer-join}copied from shared\explorer\database\02010100.xhp + Example: + select Article.* from {oj item LEFT OUTER JOIN orders ON item.no=orders.ANR} -Ignore the privileges from the database driver - Ignores access privileges that are provided by the database driver. +Ignore the privileges from the database driver + Ignores access privileges that are provided by the database driver. -Replace named parameters with ? - Replaces named parameters in a data source with a question mark (?). +Replace named parameters with ? + Replaces named parameters in a data source with a question mark (?). -Display version columns (when available) - Some databases assign version numbers to fields to track changes to records. The version number of a field is incremented by one each time the contents of the field are changed. Displays the internal version number of the record in the database table.copied from shared\explorer\database\11090000.xhp +Display version columns (when available) + Some databases assign version numbers to fields to track changes to records. The version number of a field is incremented by one each time the contents of the field are changed. Displays the internal version number of the record in the database table.copied from shared\explorer\database\11090000.xhp -Use the catalog name in SELECT statements - Uses the current data source of the catalog. This option is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. Do not select this option if the ODBC data source is a dBASE driver.copie from shared\explorer\database\11020000.xhp +Use the catalog name in SELECT statements + Uses the current data source of the catalog. This option is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. Do not select this option if the ODBC data source is a dBASE driver.copie from shared\explorer\database\11020000.xhp -Use the schema name in SELECT statements - Allows you to use the schema name in SELECT statements.UFI: ??? +Use the schema name in SELECT statements + Allows you to use the schema name in SELECT statements.UFI: ??? -Create index with ASC or DESC statement - Creates an index with ASC or DESC statements.UFI: ??? +Create index with ASC or DESC statement + Creates an index with ASC or DESC statements.UFI: ??? -Comparison of Boolean values - Select the type of Boolean comparison that you want to use.UFI: ??? +Comparison of Boolean values + Select the type of Boolean comparison that you want to use.UFI: ??? -Form data input checks for required fieldsi82291 - When you enter a new record or update an existing record in a form, and you leave a field empty which is bound to a database column which requires input, then you will see a message complaining about the empty field. - If this control box is not enabled, then the forms in the current database will not be checked for required fields. - The control box is available for all data source types which support write access to their data. The control box does not exist for spreadsheets, text, csv, and the various read-only address books. +Form data input checks for required fieldsi82291 + When you enter a new record or update an existing record in a form, and you leave a field empty which is bound to a database column which requires input, then you will see a message complaining about the empty field. + If this control box is not enabled, then the forms in the current database will not be checked for required fields. + The control box is available for all data source types which support write access to their data. The control box does not exist for spreadsheets, text, csv, and the various read-only address books. - Ignore currency field information - Only for Oracle JDBC connections. When enabled it specifies that no column is treated as a currency field. The field type returned from the database driver is discarded. + Ignore currency field information + Only for Oracle JDBC connections. When enabled it specifies that no column is treated as a currency field. The field type returned from the database driver is discarded. -Use ODBC conformant date/time literals -Use date/time literals that conform to ODBC standard. +Use ODBC conformant date/time literals +Use date/time literals that conform to ODBC standard. -Supports primary keys -Enable to overrule Base's heuristics used to detect whether the database supports primary keys. -When connecting to a database using a generic API like ODBC, JDBC, or ADO, Base currently applies heuristics to determine whether this database supports primary keys. None of those APIs has dedicated support to retrieve this information. -The heuristics sometimes fails. This tri-state check box by default is set to the undetermined state, which means "apply the heuristics". If the check box is enabled, primary key support is assumed. If the check box is disabled, no primary key support is assumed. -Note that if this option is just for overruling the heuristics. If you enable the check box for a database which actually does not support primary keys, you will see some errors. +Supports primary keys +Enable to overrule Base's heuristics used to detect whether the database supports primary keys. +When connecting to a database using a generic API like ODBC, JDBC, or ADO, Base currently applies heuristics to determine whether this database supports primary keys. None of those APIs has dedicated support to retrieve this information. +The heuristics sometimes fails. This tri-state check box by default is set to the undetermined state, which means "apply the heuristics". If the check box is enabled, primary key support is assumed. If the check box is disabled, no primary key support is assumed. +Note that if this option is just for overruling the heuristics. If you enable the check box for a database which actually does not support primary keys, you will see some errors. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropgen.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropgen.xhp index 3259ce733c..8627519bce 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropgen.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropgen.xhp @@ -31,19 +31,19 @@
-Generated Values -Specifies the options for automatically generated values for new data records.UFI: all text copied from shared\explorer\database\11020000.xhp +Generated Values +Specifies the options for automatically generated values for new data records.UFI: all text copied from shared\explorer\database\11020000.xhp
-how to get this: Edit Database AdvancedProp ??? I have no idea -The availability of the following controls depends on the type of database: -Retrieve generated values -Enables $[officename] support for auto-incremented data fields in the current ODBC or JDBC data source. Select this option if the auto-increment feature in the SDBCX layer of the database is not supported. In generalUFI: this does not mean that something is set by default, but "normally,", the auto-increment is selected for the primary key field. -Auto-increment statement -Enter the SQL command specifier that instructs the data source to auto-increment a specified Integer data field. For example, the following MySQL statement used the AUTO_INCREMENT statement to increase the "id" field each time the statement creates a data field: -CREATE TABLE "table1" ("id" INTEGER AUTO_INCREMENT) -For this example, you must enter AUTO_INCREMENT into the Auto-increment statement box. -Query of generated values -Enter an SQL statement that returns the last auto-incremented value for the primary key data field. For example: -SELECT LAST_INSERT_D(); +how to get this: Edit Database AdvancedProp ??? I have no idea +The availability of the following controls depends on the type of database: +Retrieve generated values +Enables $[officename] support for auto-incremented data fields in the current ODBC or JDBC data source. Select this option if the auto-increment feature in the SDBCX layer of the database is not supported. In generalUFI: this does not mean that something is set by default, but "normally,", the auto-increment is selected for the primary key field. +Auto-increment statement +Enter the SQL command specifier that instructs the data source to auto-increment a specified Integer data field. For example, the following MySQL statement used the AUTO_INCREMENT statement to increase the "id" field each time the statement creates a data field: +CREATE TABLE "table1" ("id" INTEGER AUTO_INCREMENT) +For this example, you must enter AUTO_INCREMENT into the Auto-increment statement box. +Query of generated values +Enter an SQL statement that returns the last auto-incremented value for the primary key data field. For example: +SELECT LAST_INSERT_D(); diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabadoc.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabadoc.xhp index 820e14762b..1f00605106 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabadoc.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabadoc.xhp @@ -28,11 +28,11 @@
- Database File - The database file window organizes the tables, views, queries, and reports of a database in %PRODUCTNAME. + Database File + The database file window organizes the tables, views, queries, and reports of a database in %PRODUCTNAME.
- Working with databases in %PRODUCTNAME + Working with databases in %PRODUCTNAME
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaprop.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaprop.xhp index 4ed0e9283a..6e85496cce 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaprop.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaprop.xhp @@ -31,11 +31,11 @@
-Database Properties -Specifies the properties of a database. +Database Properties +Specifies the properties of a database.
-In a database window, choose Edit - Database - Properties +In a database window, choose Edit - Database - Properties
diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropadd.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropadd.xhp index ab2740af3e..1c603813d6 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropadd.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropadd.xhp @@ -30,49 +30,49 @@
-Additional Settings -Specifies additional options for a data source. +Additional Settings +Specifies additional options for a data source.
-In a database window, choose Edit - Database - Properties, click Additional Settings tab +In a database window, choose Edit - Database - Properties, click Additional Settings tab
-The availability of the following controls depends on the type of database: -Host name -Enter the host name of the server that contains the database, for example ldap.server.com.used for multiple database formats -Port number -Enter the port number for the server that hosts the database.UFI: used for LDAP and MySQL, different default values -MySQL JDBC driver class -Enter the name of the JDBC driver for the MySQL database.UFI: copied from shared\explorer\database\11110000.xhp but that was changed before (??) -Character setUFI: seen for dBaseand for text file folder -Select the character set that you want to use to view the database in $[officename]. This setting does not affect the database. To use the default character set of your operating system, select "System". -Text and dBASE databases are restricted to character sets with a fixed-size character length, where all characters are encoded with the same number of bytes.UFI. copied from shared\explorer\database\11020000.xhp -Oracle JDBC driver class -Enter the name of the JDBC driver for the Oracle database.UFI: copied from shared\explorer\database\11110000.xhp but that was changed before (??) -Driver settings -Specify additional driver options.UFI. copied from shared\explorer\database\11020000.xhp -Use catalog for file-based databases -Uses the current data source of the catalog. This option is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. Do not select this option if the ODBC data source is a dBASE driver.UFI. copied from shared\explorer\database\11020000.xhp -Base DN -Enter the starting point to search the LDAP database, for example, dc=com.copied from shared\explorer\database\11190000.xhp -Maximum number of records -Enter the maximum number of records that you want to load when you access the LDAP server. -Display deleted records as wellUFI: seen for dBase, but Help ID is somewhere else -Displays all the records in a file, including those marked as deleted. If you select this check box, you cannot delete records.copied from shared\explorer\database\11030000.xhp -In dBASE format, deleted records remain in the file. -To view changes that you make to the database, close the connection to the database, and then reconnect to the database. -IndexesUFI: seen for dBase -Opens the Indexes dialog, where you can organize the table indexes in the current dBASE database.UFI: removed link from extended help text -Text contains headersUFI: the following found for a text file folder, but HELP Ids are somewhere else -Select this check box if the first line of the text file contains field names.copied from shared\explorer\database\11040000.xhp -Field separator -Enter or select the character that separates data fields in the text file. -Text separator -Enter or select the character that identifies a text field in the text file. You cannot use the same character as the field separator. -Decimal separator -Enter or select the character that is used as a decimal separator in the text file, for example, a period (0.5) or a comma (0,5). -Thousands separator -Enter or select the character that is used as a thousands separator in the text file, for example a comma (1,000), or a period (1.000). -File extension -Select the format for the text file. The extension that you select affects some of the default settings in this dialog. +The availability of the following controls depends on the type of database: +Host name +Enter the host name of the server that contains the database, for example ldap.server.com.used for multiple database formats +Port number +Enter the port number for the server that hosts the database.UFI: used for LDAP and MySQL, different default values +MySQL JDBC driver class +Enter the name of the JDBC driver for the MySQL database.UFI: copied from shared\explorer\database\11110000.xhp but that was changed before (??) +Character setUFI: seen for dBaseand for text file folder +Select the character set that you want to use to view the database in $[officename]. This setting does not affect the database. To use the default character set of your operating system, select "System". +Text and dBASE databases are restricted to character sets with a fixed-size character length, where all characters are encoded with the same number of bytes.UFI. copied from shared\explorer\database\11020000.xhp +Oracle JDBC driver class +Enter the name of the JDBC driver for the Oracle database.UFI: copied from shared\explorer\database\11110000.xhp but that was changed before (??) +Driver settings +Specify additional driver options.UFI. copied from shared\explorer\database\11020000.xhp +Use catalog for file-based databases +Uses the current data source of the catalog. This option is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. Do not select this option if the ODBC data source is a dBASE driver.UFI. copied from shared\explorer\database\11020000.xhp +Base DN +Enter the starting point to search the LDAP database, for example, dc=com.copied from shared\explorer\database\11190000.xhp +Maximum number of records +Enter the maximum number of records that you want to load when you access the LDAP server. +Display deleted records as wellUFI: seen for dBase, but Help ID is somewhere else +Displays all the records in a file, including those marked as deleted. If you select this check box, you cannot delete records.copied from shared\explorer\database\11030000.xhp +In dBASE format, deleted records remain in the file. +To view changes that you make to the database, close the connection to the database, and then reconnect to the database. +IndexesUFI: seen for dBase +Opens the Indexes dialog, where you can organize the table indexes in the current dBASE database.UFI: removed link from extended help text +Text contains headersUFI: the following found for a text file folder, but HELP Ids are somewhere else +Select this check box if the first line of the text file contains field names.copied from shared\explorer\database\11040000.xhp +Field separator +Enter or select the character that separates data fields in the text file. +Text separator +Enter or select the character that identifies a text field in the text file. You cannot use the same character as the field separator. +Decimal separator +Enter or select the character that is used as a decimal separator in the text file, for example, a period (0.5) or a comma (0,5). +Thousands separator +Enter or select the character that is used as a thousands separator in the text file, for example a comma (1,000), or a period (1.000). +File extension +Select the format for the text file. The extension that you select affects some of the default settings in this dialog. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropcon.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropcon.xhp index dddff0bd17..87b7f9a5f8 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropcon.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropcon.xhp @@ -31,18 +31,18 @@
-Connection Type Wizard -Changes the type of connection for the current database. +Connection Type Wizard +Changes the type of connection for the current database.
-In a database window, choose Edit - Database - Connection Type +In a database window, choose Edit - Database - Connection Type
-The Connection Type Wizard consists of three pages. You cannot transfer all settings from one database type to another.UFI: what does this para mean? Who writes such &/()? -For example, you can use the wizard to open a database file that is in a format that is usually not recognized by an installed database.UFI: what does this para mean? Who writes such &/()? +The Connection Type Wizard consists of three pages. You cannot transfer all settings from one database type to another.UFI: what does this para mean? Who writes such &/()? +For example, you can use the wizard to open a database file that is in a format that is usually not recognized by an installed database.UFI: what does this para mean? Who writes such &/()? -Database type -Select the type of database that you want to connect to. +Database type +Select the type of database that you want to connect to. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropgen.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropgen.xhp index e5959d51fb..a23d46edca 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropgen.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropgen.xhp @@ -30,49 +30,49 @@
-Advanced Properties -Specifies some options for a database. +Advanced Properties +Specifies some options for a database.
-In a database window, choose Edit - Database - Properties, click Advanced Properties tab +In a database window, choose Edit - Database - Properties, click Advanced Properties tab
-The availability of the following controls depends on the type of database: -Path to dBASE filesUFI: found for dBase -Enter the path to the directory that contains the dBASE files. -Ensure that the *.dbf file name extension of the dBASE files is lowercase.moved from shared\explorer\database\11030000.xhp -BrowseUFI: found for dBase -Opens a dialog where you can select a file or a directory.which one? or depends? -Test ConnectionUFI: found for dBaseand for Calc doc -Tests the database connection with the current settings. -Path to the text filesUFI: found for text file folder -Enter the path to the folder of the text files. -Path to the spreadsheet documentUFI: found for a Calc doc -Enter the path to the spreadsheet document that you want to use as a database. -Name of the ODBC data source on your system -Enter the name of the ODBC data source. -User name -Enter the user name that is required to access the database. -Password requiredUFI: found for Calc doc -If checked, the user will be asked to enter the password that is required to access the database. -Name of the databaseUFI: found for JDBC -Enter the name of the database. -Name of the MySQL database -Enter the name of the MySQL database that you want to use as a data source. -Name of the Oracle database -Enter the name of the Oracle database that you want to use as a data source. -Microsoft Access database file -Enter the name of the Microsoft Access database file that you want to use as a data source. -Host name -Enter the host name for the LDAP data source. -Data source URL -Enter the location of the JDBC data source as a URL. +The availability of the following controls depends on the type of database: +Path to dBASE filesUFI: found for dBase +Enter the path to the directory that contains the dBASE files. +Ensure that the *.dbf file name extension of the dBASE files is lowercase.moved from shared\explorer\database\11030000.xhp +BrowseUFI: found for dBase +Opens a dialog where you can select a file or a directory.which one? or depends? +Test ConnectionUFI: found for dBaseand for Calc doc +Tests the database connection with the current settings. +Path to the text filesUFI: found for text file folder +Enter the path to the folder of the text files. +Path to the spreadsheet documentUFI: found for a Calc doc +Enter the path to the spreadsheet document that you want to use as a database. +Name of the ODBC data source on your system +Enter the name of the ODBC data source. +User name +Enter the user name that is required to access the database. +Password requiredUFI: found for Calc doc +If checked, the user will be asked to enter the password that is required to access the database. +Name of the databaseUFI: found for JDBC +Enter the name of the database. +Name of the MySQL database +Enter the name of the MySQL database that you want to use as a data source. +Name of the Oracle database +Enter the name of the Oracle database that you want to use as a data source. +Microsoft Access database file +Enter the name of the Microsoft Access database file that you want to use as a data source. +Host name +Enter the host name for the LDAP data source. +Data source URL +Enter the location of the JDBC data source as a URL. -JDBC driver class -Enter the name of the JDBC driver class that connects to the data source. +JDBC driver class +Enter the name of the JDBC driver class that connects to the data source. -Test ClassUFI: found for JDBC -Tests the database connection through the JDBC driver class. -Choose a database -Select a database from the list or click Create to create a new database. +Test ClassUFI: found for JDBC +Tests the database connection through the JDBC driver class. +Choose a database +Select a database from the list or click Create to create a new database. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz00.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz00.xhp index 1f46aa198b..043d915abc 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz00.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz00.xhp @@ -36,37 +36,37 @@ spreadsheets;as databases (base) mw added "(Base)" to all entries -Database Wizard -The Database Wizard creates a database file that contains information about a database.UFI: extended help text must no longer contain switches or links -The Database Wizard creates a database file that contains information about a database. +Database Wizard +The Database Wizard creates a database file that contains information about a database.UFI: extended help text must no longer contain switches or links +The Database Wizard creates a database file that contains information about a database.
-Depending on the type of operation and the type of database, the Database Wizard consists of a varying number of steps. +Depending on the type of operation and the type of database, the Database Wizard consists of a varying number of steps. -If you create a new database file, the wizard contains two steps. +If you create a new database file, the wizard contains two steps. -If you open the Database Wizard to create a database file for an existing database connection, there may be more steps to specify paths, authentication information, and more. +If you open the Database Wizard to create a database file for an existing database connection, there may be more steps to specify paths, authentication information, and more. -Set up text file connection +Set up text file connection -Set up Microsoft Access connection -Set up ADO connection +Set up Microsoft Access connection +Set up ADO connection -Set up LDAP connection -Set up dBASE connection -Set up JDBC connection -Set up Oracle database connection -MySQL settings -ODBC settings -Set up Spreadsheet connection +Set up LDAP connection +Set up dBASE connection +Set up JDBC connection +Set up Oracle database connection +MySQL settings +ODBC settings +Set up Spreadsheet connection diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz01.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz01.xhp index 4e739d0cdb..d11502072a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz01.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz01.xhp @@ -30,42 +30,42 @@
databases; connecting (Base) -Select Database -Creates a new database, opens a database file, or connects to an existing database. +Select Database +Creates a new database, opens a database file, or connects to an existing database.
-Create a new database -Select to create a new database. This option uses the HSQL database engine with default settings. The final page of the wizard appears next. -External web page about HSQL. +Create a new database +Select to create a new database. This option uses the HSQL database engine with default settings. The final page of the wizard appears next. +External web page about HSQL. -Open an existing database file -Select to open a database file from a list of recently used files or from a file selection dialog. +Open an existing database file +Select to open a database file from a list of recently used files or from a file selection dialog. -Recently used -Select a database file to open from the list of recently used files. Click Finish to open the file immediately and to exit the wizard. +Recently used +Select a database file to open from the list of recently used files. Click Finish to open the file immediately and to exit the wizard. -Open -Opens a file selection dialog where you can select a database file. Click Open or OK in the file selection dialog to open the file immediately and to exit the wizard. +Open +Opens a file selection dialog where you can select a database file. Click Open or OK in the file selection dialog to open the file immediately and to exit the wizard. -Connect to an existing database -Select to create a database document for an existing database connection. +Connect to an existing database +Select to create a database document for an existing database connection. -Database type -Select the database type for the existing database connection. -The Outlook, Evolution, KDE Address Book, and Seamonkey database types do not need additional information. For other database types, the wizard contains additional pages to specify the required information. -The next wizard page is one of the following pages: +Database type +Select the database type for the existing database connection. +The Outlook, Evolution, KDE Address Book, and Seamonkey database types do not need additional information. For other database types, the wizard contains additional pages to specify the required information. +The next wizard page is one of the following pages: -Set up text file connection -Set up Microsoft Access or Microsoft Access 2007 connection -Set up LDAP connection -Set up ADO connection -Set up JDBC connection -Set up Oracle database connection -MySQL settings -ODBC settings -Set up Spreadsheet connection +Set up text file connection +Set up Microsoft Access or Microsoft Access 2007 connection +Set up LDAP connection +Set up ADO connection +Set up JDBC connection +Set up Oracle database connection +MySQL settings +ODBC settings +Set up Spreadsheet connection diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02.xhp index c949598f94..c53d531a9e 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02.xhp @@ -31,17 +31,17 @@
-Save and proceed -Specifies whether you want to register the database, open the database for editing, or insert a new table. +Save and proceed +Specifies whether you want to register the database, open the database for editing, or insert a new table.
-Yes, register the Database for me +Yes, register the Database for me Select to register the database within your user copy of %PRODUCTNAME. After registering, the database is displayed in the View - Data Sources window. You must register a database to be able to insert the database fields in a document (Insert - Field - More Fields) or in a mail merge. -No, do not register the database -Select to keep the database information only within the created database file. -Open the database for editing -Select to display the database file, where you can edit the database structure. -Create tables using the table wizard -Select to call the Table Wizard after the Database Wizard is finished. -Database Wizard +No, do not register the database +Select to keep the database information only within the created database file. +Open the database for editing +Select to display the database file, where you can edit the database structure. +Create tables using the table wizard +Select to call the Table Wizard after the Database Wizard is finished. +Database Wizard diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02access.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02access.xhp index 11d6465d7d..8596c36f74 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02access.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02access.xhp @@ -31,14 +31,14 @@ Access databases (base) Microsoft Office;Access databases (base) -mw added 2 new index entriesMicrosoft Access Connection +mw added 2 new index entriesMicrosoft Access Connection -Specifies the settings for importing a database file in Microsoft Access or Access 2007 format. -See also the English Wiki page http://wiki.documentfoundation.org/MSA-Base_Faq. -Microsoft Access database file -Specifies the path to the database file. -Browse -Click to open a file selection dialog. -Database Wizard +Specifies the settings for importing a database file in Microsoft Access or Access 2007 format. +See also the English Wiki page http://wiki.documentfoundation.org/MSA-Base_Faq. +Microsoft Access database file +Specifies the path to the database file. +Browse +Click to open a file selection dialog. +Database Wizard diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02ado.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02ado.xhp index af95710800..2f50b0a29a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02ado.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02ado.xhp @@ -35,26 +35,26 @@ MS ADO interface (Base) databases;ADO (Base) mw copied 3 index entries from shared/explorer/database/1116000.xhp -ADO Connection +ADO Connection -Specifies the options for adding an ADO (Microsoft ActiveX Data Objects) database.UFI: copied text from shared\explorer\database\11160000 -The ADO interface is a Microsoft Windows proprietary container for connecting to databases. -$[officename] requires the Microsoft Data Access Components (MDAC) to use the ADO interface. Microsoft Windows 2000 and XP include these components by default. For earlier visions of Windows, you need to install MDAC separately. You can download MDAC from the Microsoft web site. +Specifies the options for adding an ADO (Microsoft ActiveX Data Objects) database.UFI: copied text from shared\explorer\database\11160000 +The ADO interface is a Microsoft Windows proprietary container for connecting to databases. +$[officename] requires the Microsoft Data Access Components (MDAC) to use the ADO interface. Microsoft Windows 2000 and XP include these components by default. For earlier visions of Windows, you need to install MDAC separately. You can download MDAC from the Microsoft web site. -Data source URL -Enter the data source URL.UFI: removed three lines in hcshared01 #58442 -Example URLs -To connect to an Access 2000 file, use the format: -PROVIDER=Microsoft.Jet.OLEDB.4.0;DATA SOURCE=c:\Access\nwind2000.mdb -To connect with a name to a catalog on a Microsoft SQL server that has a name turner, enter: -PROVIDER=sqloledb;DATA SOURCE=turner;INITIAL CATALOG=First -To access an ODBC driver as a provider: -DSN=SQLSERVER +Data source URL +Enter the data source URL.UFI: removed three lines in hcshared01 #58442 +Example URLs +To connect to an Access 2000 file, use the format: +PROVIDER=Microsoft.Jet.OLEDB.4.0;DATA SOURCE=c:\Access\nwind2000.mdb +To connect with a name to a catalog on a Microsoft SQL server that has a name turner, enter: +PROVIDER=sqloledb;DATA SOURCE=turner;INITIAL CATALOG=First +To access an ODBC driver as a provider: +DSN=SQLSERVER -Browse -Click to open a database selection dialog. -A user name can have a maximum of 18 characters. -A password must contain 3 to 18 characters. -Database Wizard +Browse +Click to open a database selection dialog. +A user name can have a maximum of 18 characters. +A password must contain 3 to 18 characters. +Database Wizard diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02dbase.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02dbase.xhp index 6c1b5083d1..b515f32214 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02dbase.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02dbase.xhp @@ -27,14 +27,14 @@ ** Expression is faulty ** -dBASE Connection +dBASE Connection -Path to the dBASE files -Enter the path to the dBASE *.dbf files. +Path to the dBASE files +Enter the path to the dBASE *.dbf files. -Browse -Open a path selection dialog. -Database Wizard +Browse +Open a path selection dialog. +Database Wizard diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp index 2e8377ddd7..4c17e827d0 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp @@ -33,63 +33,63 @@ databases; JDBC (Base) -JDBC Connection +JDBC Connection -Specifies the options to access a JDBC database.copied text from shared\explorer\database\11110000 -JDBC Examples - +Specifies the options to access a JDBC database.copied text from shared\explorer\database\11110000 +JDBC Examples + You can use a JDBC driver class to connect to a JDBC database from %PRODUCTNAME. The driver class is provided by the database manufacturer. Two examples of JDBC databases are Oracle and MySQL. -The driver classes must be added to %PRODUCTNAME in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced. -Oracle database -You can use a JDBC driver to access an Oracle database from Solaris or Linux. To access the database from Windows, you need an ODBC driver. +The driver classes must be added to %PRODUCTNAME in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced. +Oracle database +You can use a JDBC driver to access an Oracle database from Solaris or Linux. To access the database from Windows, you need an ODBC driver. On UNIX, ensure that the Oracle database client is installed with JDBC support. The JDBC driver class for the Solaris Oracle client version 8.x is located in the <Oracle client>/product/jdbc/lib/classes111.zip directory. You can also download the latest version from the Oracle web site. -In the Data source URL box, enter the location of the Oracle database server. The syntax of the URL depends on the database type. See the documentation that came with the JDBC driver for more information. -For an Oracle database, the syntax of the URL is: -oracle:thin:@hostname:port:database_name +In the Data source URL box, enter the location of the Oracle database server. The syntax of the URL depends on the database type. See the documentation that came with the JDBC driver for more information. +For an Oracle database, the syntax of the URL is: +oracle:thin:@hostname:port:database_name -hostname is the name of the machine that runs the Oracle database. You can also replace hostname with the IP address of the server. +hostname is the name of the machine that runs the Oracle database. You can also replace hostname with the IP address of the server. -port is the port where the Oracle database listens. Ask your database administrator for the correct port address. +port is the port where the Oracle database listens. Ask your database administrator for the correct port address. -database_name is the name of the Oracle database. Ask your database administrator for the correct name. +database_name is the name of the Oracle database. Ask your database administrator for the correct name. -MySQL database -The driver for the MySQL database is available on the MySQL web site.removed link, see i54077 -The syntax for a MySQL database is: -mysql://hostname:port/database_name +MySQL database +The driver for the MySQL database is available on the MySQL web site.removed link, see i54077 +The syntax for a MySQL database is: +mysql://hostname:port/database_name -hostname is the name of the machine that runs the MySQL database. You can also replace hostname with the IP address of the server. +hostname is the name of the machine that runs the MySQL database. You can also replace hostname with the IP address of the server. -port is the default port for MySQL databases, namely 3306. +port is the default port for MySQL databases, namely 3306. -database_name is the name of the database. +database_name is the name of the database. -Data source URL -Enter the URL for the database. For example, for the MySQL JDBC driver, enter "jdbc:mysql://<Servername>/<name of the database>". For more information on the JDBC driver, consult the documentation that came with the driver. +Data source URL +Enter the URL for the database. For example, for the MySQL JDBC driver, enter "jdbc:mysql://<Servername>/<name of the database>". For more information on the JDBC driver, consult the documentation that came with the driver. -JDBC Driver Class -Enter the name of the JDBC driver. +JDBC Driver Class +Enter the name of the JDBC driver.
-Before you can use a JDBC driver, you need to add its class path. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME +Before you can use a JDBC driver, you need to add its class path. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced, and click the Class Path button. After you add the path information, restart %PRODUCTNAME.
Test Class -Tests the connection with the current settings. -Authentication -Database Wizard +Tests the connection with the current settings. +Authentication +Database Wizard diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02ldap.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02ldap.xhp index bef8c23215..4f54f20cff 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02ldap.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02ldap.xhp @@ -32,27 +32,27 @@ address books; LDAP server (Base) data sources; LDAP server (Base) mw copied 3 entries from shared/explorer/database/11190000.xhp -LDAP Connection +LDAP Connection -Specifies the settings for importing a database using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol). This page is only available if you registered an LDAP server as an address database.UFI: copied text from shared\explorer\database\11190000 +Specifies the settings for importing a database using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol). This page is only available if you registered an LDAP server as an address database.UFI: copied text from shared\explorer\database\11190000 -Server URL -Enter the name of the LDAP server using the format "ldap.server.com". +Server URL +Enter the name of the LDAP server using the format "ldap.server.com". -Base DN -Enter the starting point to search the LDAP database, for example, "dc=com". +Base DN +Enter the starting point to search the LDAP database, for example, "dc=com". -Port number -Enter the port of the LDAP server, normally 389. +Port number +Enter the port of the LDAP server, normally 389. -Use secure connection (SSL) -Creates a secure connection to the LDAP server through the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL). By default, an SSL connection uses port 636. A regular connection uses port 389. +Use secure connection (SSL) +Creates a secure connection to the LDAP server through the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL). By default, an SSL connection uses port 636. A regular connection uses port 389.
-Authentication -Database Wizard +Authentication +Database Wizard
diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02mysql.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02mysql.xhp index 0f98505042..96fd6cac6c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02mysql.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02mysql.xhp @@ -27,19 +27,19 @@ ** Expression is faulty ** -MySQL Connection +MySQL Connection -Specifies the options for MySQL databases.text copied from shared\explorer\database\11120000 +Specifies the options for MySQL databases.text copied from shared\explorer\database\11120000 -Connect using ODBC (Open Database Connectivity) -Connects to an existing ODBC data source that was set on a system level. +Connect using ODBC (Open Database Connectivity) +Connects to an existing ODBC data source that was set on a system level. -Connect using JDBC (Java Database Connectivity) -Connects to an existing JDBC data source that was set on a system level. -The next wizard page depends on your choice of ODBC or JDBC: -ODBC Connection -JDBC Connection -Authentication -Database Wizard +Connect using JDBC (Java Database Connectivity) +Connects to an existing JDBC data source that was set on a system level. +The next wizard page depends on your choice of ODBC or JDBC: +ODBC Connection +JDBC Connection +Authentication +Database Wizard diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02odbc.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02odbc.xhp index 362a6437b9..c45a10f596 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02odbc.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02odbc.xhp @@ -34,22 +34,22 @@ ODBC;database (Base) databases;ODBC (Base) mw added "(Base)" to all entries -ODBC Connection +ODBC Connection -Specifies the settings for ODBC databases. -To edit or add records to a database table in $[officename], the table must have a unique index field. -On Solaris and Linux platforms, try to use a JDBC driver instead of an ODBC driver. See http://www.unixodbc.org for an ODBC implementation on Solaris or Linux. -To connect to a Microsoft Access database on Windows, use the ADO or Access database interface, rather than ODBC. -Drivers for ODBC are supplied and supported by the manufacturer of the database. $[officename] only supports the ODBC 3 standard. +Specifies the settings for ODBC databases. +To edit or add records to a database table in $[officename], the table must have a unique index field. +On Solaris and Linux platforms, try to use a JDBC driver instead of an ODBC driver. See http://www.unixodbc.org for an ODBC implementation on Solaris or Linux. +To connect to a Microsoft Access database on Windows, use the ADO or Access database interface, rather than ODBC. +Drivers for ODBC are supplied and supported by the manufacturer of the database. $[officename] only supports the ODBC 3 standard. -Name of the ODBC database -Enter the path to the database file. +Name of the ODBC database +Enter the path to the database file. -Browse -Click to open an ODBC data source selection dialog: -Choose a data source -Select a data source to which you want to connect using ODBC. Then click OK. -Authentication -Database Wizard +Browse +Click to open an ODBC data source selection dialog: +Choose a data source +Select a data source to which you want to connect using ODBC. Then click OK. +Authentication +Database Wizard diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02oracle.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02oracle.xhp index b767974b55..a3ffd0ff56 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02oracle.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02oracle.xhp @@ -32,45 +32,45 @@ Oracle databases (base) mw added one index entry -Oracle Database Connection -Specifies the options to access an Oracle database.copied text from shared\explorer\database\11110000 -Oracle database -You can use a JDBC driver to access an Oracle database from Solaris or Linux. To access the database from Windows, you need an ODBC driver. +Oracle Database Connection +Specifies the options to access an Oracle database.copied text from shared\explorer\database\11110000 +Oracle database +You can use a JDBC driver to access an Oracle database from Solaris or Linux. To access the database from Windows, you need an ODBC driver. -On UNIX, ensure that the Oracle database client is installed with JDBC support. The JDBC driver class for the Solaris Oracle client version 8.x is located in the <Oracle client>/product/jdbc/lib/classes111.zip directory. You can also download the latest version of the driver from the Oracle web site. +On UNIX, ensure that the Oracle database client is installed with JDBC support. The JDBC driver class for the Solaris Oracle client version 8.x is located in the <Oracle client>/product/jdbc/lib/classes111.zip directory. You can also download the latest version of the driver from the Oracle web site. -In the Data source URL box, enter the location of the Oracle database server. The syntax of the URL depends on the database type. See the documentation that came with the JDBC driver for more information. -For an Oracle database, the syntax of the URL is: -oracle:thin:@hostname:port:database_name +In the Data source URL box, enter the location of the Oracle database server. The syntax of the URL depends on the database type. See the documentation that came with the JDBC driver for more information. +For an Oracle database, the syntax of the URL is: +oracle:thin:@hostname:port:database_name -hostname is the name of the machine that runs the Oracle database. You can also replace hostname with the IP address of the server. +hostname is the name of the machine that runs the Oracle database. You can also replace hostname with the IP address of the server. -port is the port where the Oracle database listens. Ask your database administrator for the correct port address. +port is the port where the Oracle database listens. Ask your database administrator for the correct port address. -database_name is the name of the Oracle database. Ask your database administrator for the correct name. +database_name is the name of the Oracle database. Ask your database administrator for the correct name. -Name of the Oracle database -Enter the name of the Oracle database. +Name of the Oracle database +Enter the name of the Oracle database. -Server URL -Enter the URL for the database server. +Server URL +Enter the URL for the database server. -Port number -Enter the port number for the database server. +Port number +Enter the port number for the database server. -Oracle JDBC Driver Class -Enter the name of the JDBC driver. +Oracle JDBC Driver Class +Enter the name of the JDBC driver. -Test Class -Tests the connection with the current settings. -Authentication -Database Wizard +Test Class +Tests the connection with the current settings. +Authentication +Database Wizard diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02spreadsheet.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02spreadsheet.xhp index 885eae5c75..618dfe3040 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02spreadsheet.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02spreadsheet.xhp @@ -28,16 +28,16 @@ ** Expression is faulty ** -Set up Spreadsheet connection +Set up Spreadsheet connection -Location and file name -Enter the path and file name to the spreadsheet file. +Location and file name +Enter the path and file name to the spreadsheet file. -Browse -Click to open a file selection dialog. +Browse +Click to open a file selection dialog. -Password required -Select to request a password from the user of the database document. -Database Wizard +Password required +Select to request a password from the user of the database document. +Database Wizard diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02text.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02text.xhp index 05705589ef..0bc3bbfbb6 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02text.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02text.xhp @@ -34,37 +34,37 @@ text databases (Base) -Set up a connection to text files -Specifies the settings for importing a database in text format.UFI: most text copied without editing from shared\explorer\database\11040000 -In a text format database, data is stored in an unformatted ASCII file, where each record comprises a row. The data fields are divided by separators. Text in the data fields is divided by quotation marks. +Set up a connection to text files +Specifies the settings for importing a database in text format.UFI: most text copied without editing from shared\explorer\database\11040000 +In a text format database, data is stored in an unformatted ASCII file, where each record comprises a row. The data fields are divided by separators. Text in the data fields is divided by quotation marks. -Path to text files -Enter the path to the text file or files. If you just want one text file, you can use any extension of the file name. If you enter a folder name, the text files in that folder must have the extension *.csv to be recognized as files of the text database. +Path to text files +Enter the path to the text file or files. If you just want one text file, you can use any extension of the file name. If you enter a folder name, the text files in that folder must have the extension *.csv to be recognized as files of the text database. -Browse -Click to open a file selection dialog. +Browse +Click to open a file selection dialog. -Plain text files (*.txt) -Click to access txt files.UFI: sorry, this is not in the spec. +Plain text files (*.txt) +Click to access txt files.UFI: sorry, this is not in the spec. -'Comma separated value' files (*.csv) -Click to access csv files. +'Comma separated value' files (*.csv) +Click to access csv files. -Custom -Click to access custom files. Enter the extension in the text box. +Custom +Click to access custom files. Enter the extension in the text box. -Field separator -Enter or select the character that separates data fields in the text file. +Field separator +Enter or select the character that separates data fields in the text file. -Text separator -Enter or select the character that identifies a text field in the text file. You cannot use the same character as the field separator. +Text separator +Enter or select the character that identifies a text field in the text file. You cannot use the same character as the field separator. -Decimal separator -Enter or select the character that is used as a decimal separator in the text file, for example, a period (0.5) or a comma (0,5). +Decimal separator +Enter or select the character that is used as a decimal separator in the text file, for example, a period (0.5) or a comma (0,5). -Thousands separator -Enter or select the character that is used as a thousands separator in the text file, for example a comma (1,000), or a period (1.000). -Database Wizard +Thousands separator +Enter or select the character that is used as a thousands separator in the text file, for example a comma (1,000), or a period (1.000). +Database Wizard diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz03auth.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz03auth.xhp index dc95a5009b..b2852ffd5d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz03auth.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz03auth.xhp @@ -31,18 +31,18 @@ -Set up user authentication -Some databases require a user name and password. +Set up user authentication +Some databases require a user name and password. -User name -Enter the user name to access the database. +User name +Enter the user name to access the database. -Password required -Select to prompt a user for a password to access the database. +Password required +Select to prompt a user for a password to access the database. Test Connection -Check if the configured connection can be used to access the database. -Save and proceed -Database Wizard +Check if the configured connection can be used to access the database. +Save and proceed +Database Wizard diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/main.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/main.xhp index 21feb0e816..60a92ea911 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/main.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/main.xhp @@ -33,71 +33,71 @@ databases;main page (Base) $[officename] Base data sources data sources;$[officename] Base -mw changed "Base,..."Using Databases in %PRODUCTNAME Base +mw changed "Base,..."Using Databases in %PRODUCTNAME Base -In %PRODUCTNAME Base, you can access data that is stored in a wide variety of database file formats. %PRODUCTNAME Base natively supports some flat file database formats, such as the dBASE format. You can also use %PRODUCTNAME Base to connect to external relational databases, such as databases from MySQL or Oracle. +In %PRODUCTNAME Base, you can access data that is stored in a wide variety of database file formats. %PRODUCTNAME Base natively supports some flat file database formats, such as the dBASE format. You can also use %PRODUCTNAME Base to connect to external relational databases, such as databases from MySQL or Oracle.
-The following database types are read-only types in %PRODUCTNAME Base. From within %PRODUCTNAME Base it is not possible to change the database structure or to edit, insert, and delete database records for these database types: +The following database types are read-only types in %PRODUCTNAME Base. From within %PRODUCTNAME Base it is not possible to change the database structure or to edit, insert, and delete database records for these database types: -Spreadsheet files +Spreadsheet files -Text files +Text files -Address book data +Address book data -Using a Database in %PRODUCTNAME +Using a Database in %PRODUCTNAME -To create a new database file, choose File - New - Database. +To create a new database file, choose File - New - Database. -The Database Wizard helps you to create a database file and to register a new database within %PRODUCTNAME. -The database file contains queries, reports, and forms for the database as well as a link to the database where the records are stored. Formatting information is also stored in the database file. +The Database Wizard helps you to create a database file and to register a new database within %PRODUCTNAME. +The database file contains queries, reports, and forms for the database as well as a link to the database where the records are stored. Formatting information is also stored in the database file. -To open a database file, choose File - Open. In the File type list box, select to view only "Database documents". Select a database document and click Open. +To open a database file, choose File - Open. In the File type list box, select to view only "Database documents". Select a database document and click Open.
- + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + -Wiki page about Base +Wiki page about Base
diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menubar.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menubar.xhp index c5509ea5a3..59919db15a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menubar.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menubar.xhp @@ -31,9 +31,9 @@ diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menuedit.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menuedit.xhp index 8d477e0025..9055f74abb 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menuedit.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menuedit.xhp @@ -31,56 +31,56 @@
-Edit +Edit
-The Edit menu of a database window. -Copy -Copies the selected object to the clipboard. -Paste -Inserts an item from the clipboard. If you want, you can insert forms and reports, including subfolders, from one database file to another. -Paste Special -Inserts an item from the clipboard. If you want, you can insert forms and reports, including subfolders, from one database file to another. +The Edit menu of a database window. +Copy +Copies the selected object to the clipboard. +Paste +Inserts an item from the clipboard. If you want, you can insert forms and reports, including subfolders, from one database file to another. +Paste Special +Inserts an item from the clipboard. If you want, you can insert forms and reports, including subfolders, from one database file to another.
-Edit -Opens a window where you can edit the selected table, query, form, or report. +Edit +Opens a window where you can edit the selected table, query, form, or report. -Delete -Deletes the selected table, query, form, or report. +Delete +Deletes the selected table, query, form, or report.
-Rename -Renames the selected object. Depending on the database, some names, characters, and name length might be invalid. +Rename +Renames the selected object. Depending on the database, some names, characters, and name length might be invalid. -Open -Opens the selected object in the last saved state. +Open +Opens the selected object in the last saved state. -Create as View -Converts the selected query to a view. The original query remains in your database file and an additional view is generated on the database server. You must have write permission to add a view to a database. -Most databases use queries to filter or to sort database tables to display records on your computer. Views offer the same functionality as queries, but on the server side. If your database is on a server that supports views, you can use views to filter the records on the server to speed up the display time. +Create as View +Converts the selected query to a view. The original query remains in your database file and an additional view is generated on the database server. You must have write permission to add a view to a database. +Most databases use queries to filter or to sort database tables to display records on your computer. Views offer the same functionality as queries, but on the server side. If your database is on a server that supports views, you can use views to filter the records on the server to speed up the display time. -Form Wizard -Starts the Form Wizard for the selected table, query, or view. +Form Wizard +Starts the Form Wizard for the selected table, query, or view. -Report Wizard -Starts the Report Wizard for the selected table, query, or view. -Select All -Selects all entries, including subfolders, in the lower part of the database window. +Report Wizard +Starts the Report Wizard for the selected table, query, or view. +Select All +Selects all entries, including subfolders, in the lower part of the database window. -Database -Opens a submenu. +Database +Opens a submenu. -Properties -Opens the Database Properties dialog. +Properties +Opens the Database Properties dialog. -Connection Type -Opens the Connection Type Wizard.shortened the paragraph, see i58462 +Connection Type +Opens the Connection Type Wizard.shortened the paragraph, see i58462 -Advanced Properties -Opens the Advanced Properties dialog. +Advanced Properties +Opens the Advanced Properties dialog. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menufile.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menufile.xhp index 1ea295ba4e..90a250464f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menufile.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menufile.xhp @@ -31,24 +31,24 @@
-File +File
-The File menu of a database window. Only entries specific to databases are listed. -Save -Saves the current database file, query, form or report. For the database file, you see the file save dialog. For the other objects, you see the Save dialog. -Save As -Saves the current database file with another name. In the file save dialog, select a path and file name to save. -Export -Exports the selected report or form to a text document. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export. -Send -Opens a submenu. -E-mail Document -Opens the default e-mail application to send a new e-mail. The current database file is appended as an attachment. You can enter the subject, the recipients and a mail body. +The File menu of a database window. Only entries specific to databases are listed. +Save +Saves the current database file, query, form or report. For the database file, you see the file save dialog. For the other objects, you see the Save dialog. +Save As +Saves the current database file with another name. In the file save dialog, select a path and file name to save. +Export +Exports the selected report or form to a text document. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export. +Send +Opens a submenu. +E-mail Document +Opens the default e-mail application to send a new e-mail. The current database file is appended as an attachment. You can enter the subject, the recipients and a mail body. -Report as E-mail -Opens the default e-mail application to send a new e-mail. The selected report is appended as an attachment. You can enter the subject, the recipients and a mail body. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export. +Report as E-mail +Opens the default e-mail application to send a new e-mail. The selected report is appended as an attachment. You can enter the subject, the recipients and a mail body. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export. -Report to Text Document -Exports the selected report to a text document. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export. +Report to Text Document +Exports the selected report to a text document. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menufilesave.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menufilesave.xhp index d3cf1e782b..0438df399a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menufilesave.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menufilesave.xhp @@ -31,19 +31,19 @@ -Save -In this dialog, you can specify the position and name of a form UFI: spec says also for report, but reports can be created only by Wizard and are autosaved thereUFI: spec says also for query, cannot verify that you save within a database file. The dialog opens automatically when you save a form the first time.UFI: no chance to open the dialog a second time +Save +In this dialog, you can specify the position and name of a form UFI: spec says also for report, but reports can be created only by Wizard and are autosaved thereUFI: spec says also for query, cannot verify that you save within a database file. The dialog opens automatically when you save a form the first time.UFI: no chance to open the dialog a second time -Create New Directory -Click to create a new folder within the database file. +Create New Directory +Click to create a new folder within the database file. -Up One Level -Click to go up one level in the folder hierarchy. +Up One Level +Click to go up one level in the folder hierarchy. -File name -Enter the file name for the saved form. +File name +Enter the file name for the saved form. -Save -Click to save the form to the database file. +Save +Click to save the form to the database file. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menuinsert.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menuinsert.xhp index 0b3abccbf8..a4ccdace61 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menuinsert.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menuinsert.xhp @@ -30,24 +30,24 @@
-Insert +Insert
-The Insert menu of a database window. -Form -Opens a new text document in form mode. -Report -Starts the Report Builder window for the selected table, view, or query. -Query (Design View) -Opens a new query in design mode. -Query (SQL View) -Opens a new query in SQL mode. -Table Design -Opens the table design view. -View Design -Opens a new view in design mode. -View (Simple) -Opens a new view in SQL mode. -Folder -Opens a dialog where you can save a new folder in the database file. +The Insert menu of a database window. +Form +Opens a new text document in form mode. +Report +Starts the Report Builder window for the selected table, view, or query. +Query (Design View) +Opens a new query in design mode. +Query (SQL View) +Opens a new query in SQL mode. +Table Design +Opens the table design view. +View Design +Opens a new view in design mode. +View (Simple) +Opens a new view in SQL mode. +Folder +Opens a dialog where you can save a new folder in the database file. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menutools.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menutools.xhp index bba84d4a43..cc1f62cf9b 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menutools.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menutools.xhp @@ -31,24 +31,24 @@
-Tools +Tools
-The Tools menu of a database window. +The Tools menu of a database window. -Relationships -Opens the Relation Design view and checks whether the database connection supports relations. +Relationships +Opens the Relation Design view and checks whether the database connection supports relations. -User Administration -Opens the User Administration dialog if the database supports this feature.UFI: where is this specced? +User Administration +Opens the User Administration dialog if the database supports this feature.UFI: where is this specced? -Table Filter -Opens the Table Filter dialog where you can specify which tables of the database to show or to hide.see text in shared\explorer\database\11090000.xhp -Select the tables that you want to filter in the Filter list. -If you select the topmost table in a hierarchy, all of the tables in the hierarchy are selected. -If you select a table that is at a lower level in the hierarchy, the tables that occur above it in the hierarchy are not selected. +Table Filter +Opens the Table Filter dialog where you can specify which tables of the database to show or to hide.see text in shared\explorer\database\11090000.xhp +Select the tables that you want to filter in the Filter list. +If you select the topmost table in a hierarchy, all of the tables in the hierarchy are selected. +If you select a table that is at a lower level in the hierarchy, the tables that occur above it in the hierarchy are not selected. -SQL -Opens the SQL dialog where you can enter SQL statements.UFI: may be shared\02\14030000.xhp +SQL +Opens the SQL dialog where you can enter SQL statements.UFI: may be shared\02\14030000.xhp diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menuview.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menuview.xhp index a2a53e9b3a..27fafa2f42 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menuview.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menuview.xhp @@ -31,45 +31,45 @@
-View +View
-The View menu of a database window. +The View menu of a database window. -Database Objects -Opens a submenu. +Database Objects +Opens a submenu. -Forms -Selects the forms container and shows all forms in the detail view. +Forms +Selects the forms container and shows all forms in the detail view. -Reports -Selects the reports container and shows all reports in the detail view. +Reports +Selects the reports container and shows all reports in the detail view. -Queries -Selects the queries container and shows all queries in the detail view. +Queries +Selects the queries container and shows all queries in the detail view. -Tables -Selects the tables container and shows all tables in the detail view. +Tables +Selects the tables container and shows all tables in the detail view. -Sort -Opens a submenu. -Ascending -Sorts the entries in the detail view in ascending order. -Descending -Sorts the entries in the detail view in descending order. +Sort +Opens a submenu. +Ascending +Sorts the entries in the detail view in ascending order. +Descending +Sorts the entries in the detail view in descending order. -Preview -Opens a submenu. +Preview +Opens a submenu. -None -Disables the preview in the database window. +None +Disables the preview in the database window. -Document Information -The preview window displays the document information of a form or report. +Document Information +The preview window displays the document information of a form or report. -Document -The preview displays the document of a form or report. +Document +The preview displays the document of a form or report. -Refresh Tables -Refreshes the tables. what happens? cool drinks? Icecream? +Refresh Tables +Refreshes the tables. what happens? cool drinks? Icecream? diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/migrate_macros.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/migrate_macros.xhp index dd2b688d77..9980f698cd 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/migrate_macros.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/migrate_macros.xhp @@ -37,25 +37,25 @@ -Migrate Macros +Migrate Macros -The Database Document Macro Migration Wizard moves existing macros from sub-documents of an old Base file into the new Base file's macro storage area. +The Database Document Macro Migration Wizard moves existing macros from sub-documents of an old Base file into the new Base file's macro storage area.
-Choose a location and file name to save the new database file. By default, the new file gets the same name as the old file, while the old file gets renamed with the string "backup" in the name. +Choose a location and file name to save the new database file. By default, the new file gets the same name as the old file, while the old file gets renamed with the string "backup" in the name. -The list shows all changes that were applied to the database file. - Previously, macros have been allowed to reside only in the text sub-documents of forms and reports. Now macros can also be stored in the Base file itself. This means that macros in Base files can be called now from any of its sub-components: forms, reports, table design, query design, relation design, table data view. - However, it is technically not possible to store macros both in a Base file and in its sub-documents at the same time. So, if you want to attach some new macros to the Base file, while retaining any existing old macros that were stored in the sub-documents, you must move the existing old macros up to the Base file's macro storage area. - The Database Document Macro Migration Wizard can move the macros up into the Base file's storage area. You can then examine the macros and edit them as needed. - For example, it is possible that macros from the sub-documents had the same module names and macro names. After you moved the macros into one common macro storage area, you must edit the macros to make the names unique. The wizard cannot do this. - The wizard can backup the Base file to another folder of your choice. The wizard changes the original Base file. The backup remains unchanged. +The list shows all changes that were applied to the database file. + Previously, macros have been allowed to reside only in the text sub-documents of forms and reports. Now macros can also be stored in the Base file itself. This means that macros in Base files can be called now from any of its sub-components: forms, reports, table design, query design, relation design, table data view. + However, it is technically not possible to store macros both in a Base file and in its sub-documents at the same time. So, if you want to attach some new macros to the Base file, while retaining any existing old macros that were stored in the sub-documents, you must move the existing old macros up to the Base file's macro storage area. + The Database Document Macro Migration Wizard can move the macros up into the Base file's storage area. You can then examine the macros and edit them as needed. + For example, it is possible that macros from the sub-documents had the same module names and macro names. After you moved the macros into one common macro storage area, you must edit the macros to make the names unique. The wizard cannot do this. + The wizard can backup the Base file to another folder of your choice. The wizard changes the original Base file. The backup remains unchanged.
- An in depth explanation by the developers (Wiki). + An in depth explanation by the developers (Wiki).
diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/password.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/password.xhp index 759d82686a..e51fdde2cc 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/password.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/password.xhp @@ -30,15 +30,15 @@ -User Name and Password Required +User Name and Password Required -User name -Enter the user name to connect to the data source. +User name +Enter the user name to connect to the data source. -Password -Enter the password to connect to the data source. +Password +Enter the password to connect to the data source. -Remember password till end of session -Select to use the same user name and password without further dialog, when you connect again to the same data source in the current %PRODUCTNAME session. +Remember password till end of session +Select to use the same user name and password without further dialog, when you connect again to the same data source in the current %PRODUCTNAME session. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard00.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard00.xhp index 2f3de71dff..78b821fdcb 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard00.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard00.xhp @@ -29,8 +29,8 @@
mw deleted 2 index entries -Query Wizard -The Query Wizard helps you to design a database query. The saved query can be called later, either from the graphical user interface, or using the automatically created SQL language command. +Query Wizard +The Query Wizard helps you to design a database query. The saved query can be called later, either from the graphical user interface, or using the automatically created SQL language command.
@@ -44,6 +44,6 @@ -Query Wizard - Field selection +Query Wizard - Field selection diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard01.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard01.xhp index 3191d64e01..9ef17265b1 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard01.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard01.xhp @@ -28,12 +28,12 @@
-Query Wizard - Field Selection -Specifies the table to create the query, and specifies which fields you wish to include in the query. +Query Wizard - Field Selection +Specifies the table to create the query, and specifies which fields you wish to include in the query.
-Tables -Specifies the table for which the query is to be created. +Tables +Specifies the table for which the query is to be created. @@ -41,8 +41,8 @@ -Fields in the Query -Displays all fields that will be included in the new query. -Query Wizard - Sorting order +Fields in the Query +Displays all fields that will be included in the new query. +Query Wizard - Sorting order diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard02.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard02.xhp index 3d947fed5b..10d4ed3339 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard02.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard02.xhp @@ -31,29 +31,29 @@
-Query Wizard - Sorting Order -Specifies the sorting order for the data records in your query. +Query Wizard - Sorting Order +Specifies the sorting order for the data records in your query.
-Sort by -Specifies the field by which the created query is sorted. +Sort by +Specifies the field by which the created query is sorted. -Ascending -Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order. +Ascending +Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order. -Descending -Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order. +Descending +Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order. -And then by -Specifies additional fields by which the created query is sorted, if previous sort fields are equal. -Query Wizard - Search conditions +And then by +Specifies additional fields by which the created query is sorted, if previous sort fields are equal. +Query Wizard - Search conditions diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard03.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard03.xhp index 1e7fd93661..bc4c9c1661 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard03.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard03.xhp @@ -31,30 +31,30 @@
-Query Wizard - Search Conditions -Specifies the search conditions to filter the query. +Query Wizard - Search Conditions +Specifies the search conditions to filter the query.
-Match all of the following -Select to filter the query by all the conditions using a logical AND. +Match all of the following +Select to filter the query by all the conditions using a logical AND. -Match any of the following -Select to filter the query by any of the conditions using a logical OR. +Match any of the following +Select to filter the query by any of the conditions using a logical OR. -Field -Select the field name for the filter condition. +Field +Select the field name for the filter condition. -Condition -Select the condition for the filter. +Condition +Select the condition for the filter. -Value -Enter the value for the filter condition. -Query Wizard - Detail or summary +Value +Enter the value for the filter condition. +Query Wizard - Detail or summary diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard04.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard04.xhp index 59f25ae589..4a6a3e6b9e 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard04.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard04.xhp @@ -31,29 +31,29 @@
-Query Wizard - Detail or Summary -Specifies whether to display all records of the query, or only the results of aggregate functions. -This page is only displayed when there are numerical fields in the query that allow the use of aggregate functions. +Query Wizard - Detail or Summary +Specifies whether to display all records of the query, or only the results of aggregate functions. +This page is only displayed when there are numerical fields in the query that allow the use of aggregate functions.
-Detailed query -Select to show all records of the query. +Detailed query +Select to show all records of the query. -Summary query -Select to show only results of aggregate functions. -Select the aggregate function and the field name of the numeric field in the list box. You can enter as many aggregate functions as you want, one in each row of controls. +Summary query +Select to show only results of aggregate functions. +Select the aggregate function and the field name of the numeric field in the list box. You can enter as many aggregate functions as you want, one in each row of controls. -Aggregate function -Select the aggregate function. +Aggregate function +Select the aggregate function. -Field name -Select the numeric field name. +Field name +Select the numeric field name. -+ -Appends a new row of controls. ++ +Appends a new row of controls. -- -Removes the last row of controls. -Query Wizard - Grouping +- +Removes the last row of controls. +Query Wizard - Grouping diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard05.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard05.xhp index 288742f673..12fc8802c8 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard05.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard05.xhp @@ -28,16 +28,16 @@
-Query Wizard - Grouping -Specifies whether to group the query. The data source must support the SQL statement "Order by clauses" to enable this page of the Wizard. +Query Wizard - Grouping +Specifies whether to group the query. The data source must support the SQL statement "Order by clauses" to enable this page of the Wizard.
-Group by -Displays all fields that are to be used to group the query. -Query Wizard - Grouping conditions +Group by +Displays all fields that are to be used to group the query. +Query Wizard - Grouping conditions diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard06.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard06.xhp index 2c953a9a54..18d81439d2 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard06.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard06.xhp @@ -31,30 +31,30 @@
-Query Wizard - Grouping Conditions -Specifies the conditions to group the query. The data source must support the SQL statement "Order by clauses" to enable this page of the Wizard. +Query Wizard - Grouping Conditions +Specifies the conditions to group the query. The data source must support the SQL statement "Order by clauses" to enable this page of the Wizard.
-Match all of the following -Select to group the query by all the conditions using a logical AND. +Match all of the following +Select to group the query by all the conditions using a logical AND. -Match any of the following -Select to group the query by any of the conditions using a logical OR. +Match any of the following +Select to group the query by any of the conditions using a logical OR. -Field name -Select the field name for the grouping condition. +Field name +Select the field name for the grouping condition. -Condition -Select the condition for the grouping. +Condition +Select the condition for the grouping. -Value -Enter the value for the grouping condition. -Query Wizard - Aliases +Value +Enter the value for the grouping condition. +Query Wizard - Aliases diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard07.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard07.xhp index b8fae05458..449c11b4f0 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard07.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard07.xhp @@ -31,12 +31,12 @@
-Query Wizard - Aliases -Assigns aliases to field names. Aliases are optional, and can provide more user-friendly names, which are displayed in place of field names. For example, an alias can be used when fields from different tables have the same name. +Query Wizard - Aliases +Assigns aliases to field names. Aliases are optional, and can provide more user-friendly names, which are displayed in place of field names. For example, an alias can be used when fields from different tables have the same name.
-Alias -Enter the alias for the field name. -Query Wizard - Overview +Alias +Enter the alias for the field name. +Query Wizard - Overview diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard08.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard08.xhp index 1badf84aa1..f94b755a7c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard08.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard08.xhp @@ -31,21 +31,21 @@
-Query Wizard - Overview -Enter a name of the query, and specify whether you want to display or to modify the query after the Wizard is finished. +Query Wizard - Overview +Enter a name of the query, and specify whether you want to display or to modify the query after the Wizard is finished.
-Name of the query -Enter the name of the query. +Name of the query +Enter the name of the query. -Display query -Select to save and display the query. +Display query +Select to save and display the query. -Modify query -Select to save the query and open it for editing. +Modify query +Select to save the query and open it for editing. -Overview -Displays a summary of the query. -Query Wizard +Overview +Displays a summary of the query. +Query Wizard diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_datetime.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_datetime.xhp index 463bdf58aa..6f4feebd5f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_datetime.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_datetime.xhp @@ -31,15 +31,15 @@ -Date and Time +Date and Time -You can open the Date and Time dialog of the Report Builder by choosing Insert - Date and Time. -Press Shift-F1 and point with the mouse at an input box to see a help text for this input box. -Enable Include Date to insert a date field into the active area of the report. The date field displays the current date when the report is executed. -Select a format to display the date. -Enable Include Time to insert a time field into the active area of the report. The time field displays the current time when the report is executed. -Select a format to display the time. -Click OK to insert the field. -You can click the date or time field and drag to another position within the same area, or edit the properties in the Properties window. +You can open the Date and Time dialog of the Report Builder by choosing Insert - Date and Time. +Press Shift-F1 and point with the mouse at an input box to see a help text for this input box. +Enable Include Date to insert a date field into the active area of the report. The date field displays the current date when the report is executed. +Select a format to display the date. +Enable Include Time to insert a time field into the active area of the report. The time field displays the current time when the report is executed. +Select a format to display the time. +Click OK to insert the field. +You can click the date or time field and drag to another position within the same area, or edit the properties in the Properties window. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_main.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_main.xhp index 13e927368b..2bd292f73f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_main.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_main.xhp @@ -30,179 +30,179 @@ Report Builder Oracle Report Builder -Report Builder +Report Builder - The Report Builder is a tool to create your own database reports. Unlike with the Report Wizard, using the Report Builder you can take control to design the report the way you want. The generated report is a Writer document that you can edit, too. - To use the Report Builder, the Report Builder component must be installed. In addition, the Java Runtime Environment (JRE) software must be installed, and this software must be selected in %PRODUCTNAME. - To install the JRE software - The Report Builder requires an installed Java Runtime Environment (JRE). + The Report Builder is a tool to create your own database reports. Unlike with the Report Wizard, using the Report Builder you can take control to design the report the way you want. The generated report is a Writer document that you can edit, too. + To use the Report Builder, the Report Builder component must be installed. In addition, the Java Runtime Environment (JRE) software must be installed, and this software must be selected in %PRODUCTNAME. + To install the JRE software + The Report Builder requires an installed Java Runtime Environment (JRE). - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced. - Wait up to one minute, while %PRODUCTNAME collects information on installed Java software on your system. - If a recent JRE version is found on your system, you see an entry in the list. + Wait up to one minute, while %PRODUCTNAME collects information on installed Java software on your system. + If a recent JRE version is found on your system, you see an entry in the list. - Click the option button in front of the entry to enable this JRE version for use in %PRODUCTNAME. + Click the option button in front of the entry to enable this JRE version for use in %PRODUCTNAME. - Ensure that Use a Java runtime environment is enabled. + Ensure that Use a Java runtime environment is enabled. - If no JRE version is found on your system, open your web browser and download the JRE software from http://www.java.com. Install the JRE software. Then restart %PRODUCTNAME and open %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced again. - To open the Report Builder + If no JRE version is found on your system, open your web browser and download the JRE software from http://www.java.com. Install the JRE software. Then restart %PRODUCTNAME and open %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced again. + To open the Report Builder - Open a Base file or create a new database. The database must contain at least one table with at least one data field and a primary key field. + Open a Base file or create a new database. The database must contain at least one table with at least one data field and a primary key field. - Click the Reports icon in the Base window, then choose Create Report in Design View. - The Report Builder window opens. + Click the Reports icon in the Base window, then choose Create Report in Design View. + The Report Builder window opens. - The Report Builder is divided into three parts. On the top you see the menu, with the toolbars below. - On the right you see the Properties window with the property values of the currently selected object. - The left part of the Report Builder window shows the Report Builder view. The Report Builder view is initially divided into three sections, from top to bottom: + The Report Builder is divided into three parts. On the top you see the menu, with the toolbars below. + On the right you see the Properties window with the property values of the currently selected object. + The left part of the Report Builder window shows the Report Builder view. The Report Builder view is initially divided into three sections, from top to bottom: - + Page Header - drag control fields with fixed text into the Page Header area - + Detail - drag and drop database fields into the Detail area - + Page Footer - drag control fields with fixed text into the Page Footer area - To insert an additional Report Header and Report Footer area choose Edit - Insert Report Header/Footer. These areas contain text that appears at the start and end of the whole report.id="par_id2685323" l10n="NEW"If you want a multi-column report, choose Format - Page, click the Columns tab, and set the number of columns. Now you can also specify a Column Header and Column Footer in the Report Builder view.column header/footer -Click the "-" icon in front of an area name to collapse that area to one line in the Report Builder view. The "-" icon changes to a "+" icon, and you can click this to expand the area again. - You insert database fields by drag-and-drop into the Detail area. See the section "To insert fields into the report" below. - In addition, you can click the Label Field or Text Box icon in the toolbar, then drag a rectangle in the Page Header or Page Footer area, to define a text that is the same on all pages. You enter the text in the Label box of the corresponding Properties window. You can also add graphics by using the Graphics icon. - To connect the report to a database table + To insert an additional Report Header and Report Footer area choose Edit - Insert Report Header/Footer. These areas contain text that appears at the start and end of the whole report.id="par_id2685323" If you want a multi-column report, choose Format - Page, click the Columns tab, and set the number of columns. Now you can also specify a Column Header and Column Footer in the Report Builder view.column header/footer +Click the "-" icon in front of an area name to collapse that area to one line in the Report Builder view. The "-" icon changes to a "+" icon, and you can click this to expand the area again. + You insert database fields by drag-and-drop into the Detail area. See the section "To insert fields into the report" below. + In addition, you can click the Label Field or Text Box icon in the toolbar, then drag a rectangle in the Page Header or Page Footer area, to define a text that is the same on all pages. You enter the text in the Label box of the corresponding Properties window. You can also add graphics by using the Graphics icon. + To connect the report to a database table - Move the mouse to the Properties view. You see two tab pages General and Data. + Move the mouse to the Properties view. You see two tab pages General and Data. - On the Data tab page, click Content to open the combo box. + On the Data tab page, click Content to open the combo box. - Select the table for that you want to create the report. + Select the table for that you want to create the report. - After selecting the table, press the Tab key to leave the Content box. + After selecting the table, press the Tab key to leave the Content box. - The Add Field window opens automatically and shows all fields of the selected table. - To insert fields into the report - The Add Field window helps you to insert the table entries in the report. Click the Add Field icon in the toolbar to open the Add Field window. + The Add Field window opens automatically and shows all fields of the selected table. + To insert fields into the report + The Add Field window helps you to insert the table entries in the report. Click the Add Field icon in the toolbar to open the Add Field window. - Drag and drop the field names one by one from the Add Field window into the Detail area of the report. Position the fields as you like. Use the icons in the toolbars to align the fields. - It is not possible to overlap the fields. If you drop a table field on the Detail area, then a label and a text box are inserted. + Drag and drop the field names one by one from the Add Field window into the Detail area of the report. Position the fields as you like. Use the icons in the toolbars to align the fields. + It is not possible to overlap the fields. If you drop a table field on the Detail area, then a label and a text box are inserted. - You can also insert text that should be the same on every page of the report. Click the Label Field icon + You can also insert text that should be the same on every page of the report. Click the Label Field icon Icon , then drag a rectangle in the Page Header or Page Footer area. Edit the Label property to show the text you want. Align at Section toolbar -Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the left margin of the area. +Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the left margin of the area. -Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the right margin of the area. +Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the right margin of the area. -Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the top margin of the area. +Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the top margin of the area. -Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the bottom margin of the area.Object Resizing toolbar +Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the bottom margin of the area.Object Resizing toolbar -Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest width. +Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest width. -Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest height. +Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest height. -Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest width. +Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest width. -Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest height.Report Controls toolbar +Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest height.Report Controls toolbar -Inserts a horizontal line to the current area. +Inserts a horizontal line to the current area. -Inserts a vertical line to the current area.Shrink toolbar +Inserts a vertical line to the current area.Shrink toolbar -Shrinks the selected section to remove top and bottom empty space. +Shrinks the selected section to remove top and bottom empty space. -Shrinks the selected section to remove top empty space. +Shrinks the selected section to remove top empty space. -Shrinks the selected section to remove bottom empty space. - After inserting fields in the Detail view, the report is ready for execution. - To execute a report +Shrinks the selected section to remove bottom empty space. + After inserting fields in the Detail view, the report is ready for execution. + To execute a report - Click the Execute Report icon + Click the Execute Report icon Icon on the toolbar. - A Writer document opens and shows the report you have created, which contains all values of the database table which you have insert. - If the database contents did change, execute the report again to update the result report.automatic? message? - To edit a report - First decide if you want to edit the generated report, which is a static Writer document, or if you want to edit the Report Builder view and then generate a new report based on the new design. - The Writer document is opened read-only. To edit the Writer document, click Edit File + A Writer document opens and shows the report you have created, which contains all values of the database table which you have insert. + If the database contents did change, execute the report again to update the result report.automatic? message? + To edit a report + First decide if you want to edit the generated report, which is a static Writer document, or if you want to edit the Report Builder view and then generate a new report based on the new design. + The Writer document is opened read-only. To edit the Writer document, click Edit File Icon on the Standard toolbar.saved automatically with the Base file? - If you want to edit the Report Builder view, you can change some of its properties. - Click in the Details area. Then in the Properties window, change some properties, for example the background color. - After finishing, click the Execute Report icon + If you want to edit the Report Builder view, you can change some of its properties. + Click in the Details area. Then in the Properties window, change some properties, for example the background color. + After finishing, click the Execute Report icon Icon to create a new report. - If you close the Report Builder, you will be asked if the report should be saved. Click Yes, give the report a name, and click OK.report part of Base file? - Sorting the report - Without sorting or grouping, the records will be inserted into the report in the order in which they are retrieved from the database. + If you close the Report Builder, you will be asked if the report should be saved. Click Yes, give the report a name, and click OK.report part of Base file? + Sorting the report + Without sorting or grouping, the records will be inserted into the report in the order in which they are retrieved from the database. - Open the Report Builder view and click the Sorting and Grouping icon + Open the Report Builder view and click the Sorting and Grouping icon Icon on the toolbar. You see the Sorting and Grouping dialog. - In the Groups box, click the field which you want as the first sort field, and set the Sorting property.what meaning has the order of fields / move up down button? + In the Groups box, click the field which you want as the first sort field, and set the Sorting property.what meaning has the order of fields / move up down button? - Execute the report. + Execute the report. - Grouping + Grouping - Open the Report Builder view and click the Sorting and Grouping icon + Open the Report Builder view and click the Sorting and Grouping icon Icon on the toolbar. You see the Sorting and Grouping dialog. - In the Groups box, open the Group Header list box and select to show a group header. + In the Groups box, open the Group Header list box and select to show a group header. - Click the Add Field icon + Click the Add Field icon Icon to open the Add Field window. - Drag-and-drop the field entry that you want to group into the group header section. Then drag-and-drop the remaining fields into the Detail section. + Drag-and-drop the field entry that you want to group into the group header section. Then drag-and-drop the remaining fields into the Detail section. - Execute the report. The report shows the grouped records. + Execute the report. The report shows the grouped records. - If you like to sort and group, open the Report Builder view, then open the Sorting and Grouping dialog. Select to show a Group Header for the fields that you want to group, and select to hide the Group Header for the fields that you want to be sorted. Close the Sorting and Grouping window and execute the report. - Updating and printing your data - When you insert some new data or edit data in the table, a new report will show the updated data. - Click the Reports icon + If you like to sort and group, open the Report Builder view, then open the Sorting and Grouping dialog. Select to show a Group Header for the fields that you want to group, and select to hide the Group Header for the fields that you want to be sorted. Close the Sorting and Grouping window and execute the report. + Updating and printing your data + When you insert some new data or edit data in the table, a new report will show the updated data. + Click the Reports icon Icon and double-click your last saved report. A new Writer document will be created which shows the new data. - To print a report, choose File - Print from the Writer document. + To print a report, choose File - Print from the Writer document. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_navigator.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_navigator.xhp index 4b098ee99c..7fa3db7ebf 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_navigator.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_navigator.xhp @@ -32,44 +32,44 @@ formulas in reports;editing functions in reports;editing -Report Navigator +Report Navigator -You can open the Report Navigator window of the Report Builder by choosing View - Report Navigator. -The Report Navigator reveals the structure of the report. You can use the Report Navigator to insert functions into the report. -Click an entry in the Report Navigator. The corresponding object or area is selected in the Report Builder view. Right-click an entry to open the context menu. -To enter functions to the report -In the context menu of the Report Navigator, you see the same commands as in the Report Builder view, plus additional commands to create new functions or to delete them. -Functions can be entered using a syntax as specified by the OpenFormula proposal. -See Wiki page about Base for some more help regarding the functions in a report. -To calculate a sum for each clientcopied from a mail by Ocke - did not test +You can open the Report Navigator window of the Report Builder by choosing View - Report Navigator. +The Report Navigator reveals the structure of the report. You can use the Report Navigator to insert functions into the report. +Click an entry in the Report Navigator. The corresponding object or area is selected in the Report Builder view. Right-click an entry to open the context menu. +To enter functions to the report +In the context menu of the Report Navigator, you see the same commands as in the Report Builder view, plus additional commands to create new functions or to delete them. +Functions can be entered using a syntax as specified by the OpenFormula proposal. +See Wiki page about Base for some more help regarding the functions in a report. +To calculate a sum for each clientcopied from a mail by Ocke - did not test -Open the Report Navigator. +Open the Report Navigator. -Open the Groups entry and the group where you want to calculate the cost. -The group has a sub entry called functions. +Open the Groups entry and the group where you want to calculate the cost. +The group has a sub entry called functions. -Open the context menu (right click) on the functions entry, choose to create a new function, and select it. -In the property browser you see the function. +Open the context menu (right click) on the functions entry, choose to create a new function, and select it. +In the property browser you see the function. -Change the name to e.g. CostCalc and the formula to [CostCalc] + [enter your cost column name]. +Change the name to e.g. CostCalc and the formula to [CostCalc] + [enter your cost column name]. -In the initial value enter 0. +In the initial value enter 0. -Now you can insert a text field and bind it to your [CostCalc] (appears in the data field list box). +Now you can insert a text field and bind it to your [CostCalc] (appears in the data field list box). -Maybe you have to set the initial value to the value of the field like [field].these 3 paras copied from another mail by Ocke in users@dba.o.o -If there are blank fields in the cost column, use the following formula to replace the blank fields' content with zero: -[SumCost] + IF(ISBLANK([field]);0;[field])need some real working examples. See i81874Formula -Enter the formula that defines the function. Use OpenFormula syntax.Initial value -Enter the initial value for the evaluation of the formula. Often this is set to 0 or to 1.Deep traversing -If Deep traversing is enabled, functions are evaluated considering all lower levels of hierarchy. This would be used for instance for line numbering. If Deep traversing is not enabled, only the first level of hierarchy is evaluated.Pre evaluation -If Pre evaluation is enabled, functions are evaluated only when the report is finished. +Maybe you have to set the initial value to the value of the field like [field].these 3 paras copied from another mail by Ocke in users@dba.o.o +If there are blank fields in the cost column, use the following formula to replace the blank fields' content with zero: +[SumCost] + IF(ISBLANK([field]);0;[field])need some real working examples. See i81874Formula +Enter the formula that defines the function. Use OpenFormula syntax.Initial value +Enter the initial value for the evaluation of the formula. Often this is set to 0 or to 1.Deep traversing +If Deep traversing is enabled, functions are evaluated considering all lower levels of hierarchy. This would be used for instance for line numbering. If Deep traversing is not enabled, only the first level of hierarchy is evaluated.Pre evaluation +If Pre evaluation is enabled, functions are evaluated only when the report is finished. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_pagenumbers.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_pagenumbers.xhp index f90fb288f2..3524bebac1 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_pagenumbers.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_pagenumbers.xhp @@ -30,27 +30,27 @@ -Page Numbers +Page Numbers -You can open the Page Numbers dialog of the Report Builder by choosing Insert - Page Numbers. -Press Shift-F1 and point with the mouse at an input box to see a help text for this input box. -Page N -Page N of M -Top of Page (Header) -Bottom of Page (Footer) -AlignmentShow Number On First Page - not in UIShow Number on First Page +You can open the Page Numbers dialog of the Report Builder by choosing Insert - Page Numbers. +Press Shift-F1 and point with the mouse at an input box to see a help text for this input box. +Page N +Page N of M +Top of Page (Header) +Bottom of Page (Footer) +AlignmentShow Number On First Page - not in UIShow Number on First Page -Select the format for the page numbers, either "Page N" or "Page N of M", where N stands for the current page number, and M for the total number of pages in the report. +Select the format for the page numbers, either "Page N" or "Page N of M", where N stands for the current page number, and M for the total number of pages in the report. -Select to show the page numbers in the Page Header area or in the Page Footer area. +Select to show the page numbers in the Page Header area or in the Page Footer area. -Select an alignment. By default the page numbers are centered between the left and right margins. You can align the field to the left or right. You can also select Inside to print page number on odd pages on the left side and even page numbers on the right side. Select Outside for the opposite alignment. +Select an alignment. By default the page numbers are centered between the left and right margins. You can align the field to the left or right. You can also select Inside to print page number on odd pages on the left side and even page numbers on the right side. Select Outside for the opposite alignment. -When you click OK, a data field for the page numbers is inserted. If no header or footer area exist, the area will be created as needed. -You can click the data field and drag to another position within the same area, or edit the properties in the Properties window. +When you click OK, a data field for the page numbers is inserted. If no header or footer area exist, the area will be created as needed. +You can click the data field and drag to another position within the same area, or edit the properties in the Properties window. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_prop.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_prop.xhp index 820ed0d456..ff4cad6523 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_prop.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_prop.xhp @@ -29,41 +29,41 @@ -Properties +Properties -The Properties window of the Report Builder always shows the properties of the currently selected object in the Report Builder view. -Press Shift-F1 and point with the mouse at an input box to see a help text for this input box. -On first start of the Report Builder, the Properties window shows the Data tab page for the whole report. -Select a table from the Contents list, then press Tab or click outside the input box to leave the input box. -The Add Field window is shown automatically when you have selected a table in the Contents box and leave that box. You can also click the Add Field icon on the toolbar, or choose View - Add Field. -The General tab page can be used to change the name of the report, and to disable the Page Header or Page Footer areas, among others. -To display the Data or General tab page for the whole report, choose Edit - Select Report.Group keep together -Groups are kept together by page or by column (default). You must enable Keep Together also.Page header -Specifies in which context the page header will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footer.Page footer -Specifies in which context the page footer will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footerPrint repeated values -Specifies to print repeated values. -If you click the Page Header or Page Footer area without selecting any object, you see the General tab page for that area. -You can edit some visual properties for the area.screen only or also in report?Background color -Sets the background color for the selected object, both on screen and for printing.Visible -An invisible object is not shown in the executed report. It is still visible in the Report Builder view.Height -Defines the height of the selected object.Conditional Print Expression -If the Conditional Print Expression evaluates to TRUE, the selected object will be printed.id="par_id2386852" l10n="NEW"Conditions use the following form:Background transparent -Specifies whether the background of the selected object is transparent or opaque.just guessing -If you click the Detail area without selecting any object, you see the General tab page for that area. -You can specify some properties to fine-tune the way the records are printed.Force New Page -Force New Page specifies whether the current section and/or the next section is printed on a new page.New Row Or Column -New Row Or Column specifies, for a multi-column design, whether the current section and/or the next section will be printed on a new row or column.Keep together -Keep Together specifies to print the current object starting on top of a new page if it doesn't fit on the current page. -Insert some data fields into the Detail area, or insert other control fields into any area. When you select an inserted field, you can set the properties in the Properties window. -For a Label field, you can change the displayed text in the Label input box. -For a picture, you can specify to either insert the picture as a link to a file or only as an embedded object in the Base file. The embedded option increases the size of the Base file, while the link option is not as portable to other computers.Position x -Set the X Position for the selected objectx in pixel or twips? or current measurement units? from origin as on ruler? from elsewhere?Position y -Set the Y Position for the selected objectWidth -Sets the width of the selected object.Font -Select the font for the selected text object.Print when group change -Print when group changeVert. Alignment -Vert. Alignment -On the General tab page of a data field, you can set the Formatting properties, among others. -On the Data tab page, you can change the data contents to be shown. +The Properties window of the Report Builder always shows the properties of the currently selected object in the Report Builder view. +Press Shift-F1 and point with the mouse at an input box to see a help text for this input box. +On first start of the Report Builder, the Properties window shows the Data tab page for the whole report. +Select a table from the Contents list, then press Tab or click outside the input box to leave the input box. +The Add Field window is shown automatically when you have selected a table in the Contents box and leave that box. You can also click the Add Field icon on the toolbar, or choose View - Add Field. +The General tab page can be used to change the name of the report, and to disable the Page Header or Page Footer areas, among others. +To display the Data or General tab page for the whole report, choose Edit - Select Report.Group keep together +Groups are kept together by page or by column (default). You must enable Keep Together also.Page header +Specifies in which context the page header will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footer.Page footer +Specifies in which context the page footer will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footerPrint repeated values +Specifies to print repeated values. +If you click the Page Header or Page Footer area without selecting any object, you see the General tab page for that area. +You can edit some visual properties for the area.screen only or also in report?Background color +Sets the background color for the selected object, both on screen and for printing.Visible +An invisible object is not shown in the executed report. It is still visible in the Report Builder view.Height +Defines the height of the selected object.Conditional Print Expression +If the Conditional Print Expression evaluates to TRUE, the selected object will be printed.id="par_id2386852" Conditions use the following form:Background transparent +Specifies whether the background of the selected object is transparent or opaque.just guessing +If you click the Detail area without selecting any object, you see the General tab page for that area. +You can specify some properties to fine-tune the way the records are printed.Force New Page +Force New Page specifies whether the current section and/or the next section is printed on a new page.New Row Or Column +New Row Or Column specifies, for a multi-column design, whether the current section and/or the next section will be printed on a new row or column.Keep together +Keep Together specifies to print the current object starting on top of a new page if it doesn't fit on the current page. +Insert some data fields into the Detail area, or insert other control fields into any area. When you select an inserted field, you can set the properties in the Properties window. +For a Label field, you can change the displayed text in the Label input box. +For a picture, you can specify to either insert the picture as a link to a file or only as an embedded object in the Base file. The embedded option increases the size of the Base file, while the link option is not as portable to other computers.Position x +Set the X Position for the selected objectx in pixel or twips? or current measurement units? from origin as on ruler? from elsewhere?Position y +Set the Y Position for the selected objectWidth +Sets the width of the selected object.Font +Select the font for the selected text object.Print when group change +Print when group changeVert. Alignment +Vert. Alignment +On the General tab page of a data field, you can set the Formatting properties, among others. +On the Data tab page, you can change the data contents to be shown. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_sort.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_sort.xhp index 7a5d48cef5..d9c02e4ab4 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_sort.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_sort.xhp @@ -30,58 +30,58 @@
-Sorting and Grouping +Sorting and Grouping - In the Sorting and Grouping dialog of Report Builder, you can define the fields that should be sorted in your report, and the fields that should be kept together to form a group. If you group your report by a certain field, all records with the same value of that field will be kept together in one group. + In the Sorting and Grouping dialog of Report Builder, you can define the fields that should be sorted in your report, and the fields that should be kept together to form a group. If you group your report by a certain field, all records with the same value of that field will be kept together in one group.
- The Groups box shows the fields in an order from top to bottom. You can select any field, then click the Move Up or Move Down button to move this field up or down in the list. - The sorting and grouping will be applied in the order of the list from top to bottom. + The Groups box shows the fields in an order from top to bottom. You can select any field, then click the Move Up or Move Down button to move this field up or down in the list. + The sorting and grouping will be applied in the order of the list from top to bottom. -Lists the fields that will be used for sorting or grouping. The field at the top has the highest priority, the second field has the second priority, and so on. +Lists the fields that will be used for sorting or grouping. The field at the top has the highest priority, the second field has the second priority, and so on. -Click to open a list from which you can select a field. +Click to open a list from which you can select a field. -Moves the selected field up in the list. +Moves the selected field up in the list. -Moves the selected field down in the list. +Moves the selected field down in the list. -Select the sorting order. +Select the sorting order. -Select to show or hide the Group Header. +Select to show or hide the Group Header. -Select to show or hide the Group Footer. +Select to show or hide the Group Footer. -Select to create a new group on each changed value, or on other properties. +Select to create a new group on each changed value, or on other properties. -Removes the selected field from the list. - By default a new group is created on every changed value of a record from the selected field. You can change this property depending on the type of field: +Removes the selected field from the list. + By default a new group is created on every changed value of a record from the selected field. You can change this property depending on the type of field: - For fields of type Text, you can select Prefix Characters and enter a number n of characters in the text box below. The records which are identical in the first n characters will be grouped together. + For fields of type Text, you can select Prefix Characters and enter a number n of characters in the text box below. The records which are identical in the first n characters will be grouped together. - For fields of type Date/Time, you can group the records by the same year, quarter, month, week, day, hour, or minute. You can additionally specify an interval for weeks and hours: 2 weeks groups data in biweekly groups, 12 hours groups data in half-day groups. + For fields of type Date/Time, you can group the records by the same year, quarter, month, week, day, hour, or minute. You can additionally specify an interval for weeks and hours: 2 weeks groups data in biweekly groups, 12 hours groups data in half-day groups. - For fields of type AutoNumber, Currency, or Number, you specify an interval.how? + For fields of type AutoNumber, Currency, or Number, you specify an interval.how? -Enter the group interval value that records are grouped by. +Enter the group interval value that records are grouped by. -Select the level of detail by which a group is kept together on the same page. - When you specify to keep together some records on the same page, you have three choices: +Select the level of detail by which a group is kept together on the same page. + When you specify to keep together some records on the same page, you have three choices: - No - page boundaries are not taken into account. + No - page boundaries are not taken into account. - Whole Group - prints the group header, detail section, and group footer on the same page. + Whole Group - prints the group header, detail section, and group footer on the same page. - With First Detail - prints the group header on a page only if the first detail record also can be printed on the same page. + With First Detail - prints the group header on a page only if the first detail record also can be printed on the same page. diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard00.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard00.xhp index 86d99ec0a4..061d081595 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard00.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard00.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@ Table Wizard (Base) mw added "(Base)" to all entries -Table Wizard -The Table Wizard helps you to create a database table. +Table Wizard +The Table Wizard helps you to create a database table.
@@ -43,6 +43,6 @@ -Table Wizard - Select fields +Table Wizard - Select fields diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard01.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard01.xhp index 9e7c0fdbd0..8e1991a365 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard01.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard01.xhp @@ -28,18 +28,18 @@
-Table Wizard - Select Fields -Select fields from the provided sample tables as a starting point to create your own table. +Table Wizard - Select Fields +Select fields from the provided sample tables as a starting point to create your own table.
-Business -Select the business category to see only business sample tables. +Business +Select the business category to see only business sample tables. -Private -Select the private category to see only private sample tables. +Private +Select the private category to see only private sample tables. -Sample tables -Select one of the sample tables. Then select fields from that table from the left list box. Repeat this step until you have selected all the fields that you need. +Sample tables +Select one of the sample tables. Then select fields from that table from the left list box. Repeat this step until you have selected all the fields that you need. @@ -47,8 +47,8 @@ -Selected Fields -Displays all fields that will be included in the new table. -Table Wizard - Set types and formats +Selected Fields +Displays all fields that will be included in the new table. +Table Wizard - Set types and formats diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard02.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard02.xhp index b0e78d6884..1d394ae8e4 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard02.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard02.xhp @@ -30,35 +30,35 @@
-Table Wizard - Set Types and Formats -Specifies the field information for your selected fields. +Table Wizard - Set Types and Formats +Specifies the field information for your selected fields.
-Selected fields -Select a field in order to edit the field information. +Selected fields +Select a field in order to edit the field information. -- -Remove the selected field from the list box. -+ -Add a new data field to the list box. -Field information -Field name -Displays the name of the selected data field. If you want, you can enter a new name. -Field type -Select a field type. -AutoValue -If set to Yes, the values for this data field are generated by the database engine. -Entry required -If set to Yes, this field must not be empty.not in spec doc -Length -Specifies the number of characters for the data field. -Decimal places -Specifies the number of decimal places for the data field. This option is only available for numerical or decimal data fields. -Default value -Specifies the default value for a Yes/No field. -Auto-increment statement -Enter the SQL command specifier that instructs the data source to auto-increment a specified Integer data field. For example, the following MySQL statement used the AUTO_INCREMENT statement to increase the "id" field each time the statement creates a data field: -CREATE TABLE "table1" ("id" INTEGER AUTO_INCREMENT) -For this example, you must enter AUTO_INCREMENT into the Auto-increment statement box. -Table Wizard - Set primary key +- +Remove the selected field from the list box. ++ +Add a new data field to the list box. +Field information +Field name +Displays the name of the selected data field. If you want, you can enter a new name. +Field type +Select a field type. +AutoValue +If set to Yes, the values for this data field are generated by the database engine. +Entry required +If set to Yes, this field must not be empty.not in spec doc +Length +Specifies the number of characters for the data field. +Decimal places +Specifies the number of decimal places for the data field. This option is only available for numerical or decimal data fields. +Default value +Specifies the default value for a Yes/No field. +Auto-increment statement +Enter the SQL command specifier that instructs the data source to auto-increment a specified Integer data field. For example, the following MySQL statement used the AUTO_INCREMENT statement to increase the "id" field each time the statement creates a data field: +CREATE TABLE "table1" ("id" INTEGER AUTO_INCREMENT) +For this example, you must enter AUTO_INCREMENT into the Auto-increment statement box. +Table Wizard - Set primary key diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard03.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard03.xhp index 7d823310dd..d09aa8e2f3 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard03.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard03.xhp @@ -33,36 +33,36 @@
-Table Wizard - Set Primary Key -Specifies a field in the table to be used as a primary key. +Table Wizard - Set Primary Key +Specifies a field in the table to be used as a primary key.
-Create a primary key -Select to create a primary key. Add a primary key to every database table to uniquely identify each record. For some database systems within %PRODUCTNAME, a primary key is mandatory for editing the tables. +Create a primary key +Select to create a primary key. Add a primary key to every database table to uniquely identify each record. For some database systems within %PRODUCTNAME, a primary key is mandatory for editing the tables. -Automatically add a primary key -Select to automatically add a primary key as an additional field. +Automatically add a primary key +Select to automatically add a primary key as an additional field. -Use an existing field as a primary key -Select to use an existing field with unique values as a primary key. +Use an existing field as a primary key +Select to use an existing field with unique values as a primary key. -Field name -Select the field name. +Field name +Select the field name. -Auto value -Select to automatically insert a value and increment the field's value for each new record. The database must support automatic incrementation in order to use the Auto value feature. +Auto value +Select to automatically insert a value and increment the field's value for each new record. The database must support automatic incrementation in order to use the Auto value feature. -Define primary key by several fields -Select to create a primary key from a combination of several existing fields. +Define primary key by several fields +Select to create a primary key from a combination of several existing fields. -Available fields -Select a field and click > to add it to the list of primary key fields. +Available fields +Select a field and click > to add it to the list of primary key fields. -Primary key fields -Select a field and click < to remove it from the list of primary key fields. The primary key is created as a concatenation of the fields in this list, from top to bottom. -Table Wizard - Create table +Primary key fields +Select a field and click < to remove it from the list of primary key fields. The primary key is created as a concatenation of the fields in this list, from top to bottom. +Table Wizard - Create table diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard04.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard04.xhp index 45d90abe93..627fc8a8a1 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard04.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard04.xhp @@ -31,27 +31,27 @@
-Table Wizard - Create Table -Enter a name for the table and specify whether you want to modify the table after the wizard is finished. +Table Wizard - Create Table +Enter a name for the table and specify whether you want to modify the table after the wizard is finished.
-Table name -Specifies the table name. +Table name +Specifies the table name. -Catalog of the table -Select the catalog for the table. (Available only if the database supports catalogs) +Catalog of the table +Select the catalog for the table. (Available only if the database supports catalogs) -Schema of the table -Select the schema for the table. (Available only if the database supports schemas) +Schema of the table +Select the schema for the table. (Available only if the database supports schemas) -Modify the table design -Select to save and edit the table design. +Modify the table design +Select to save and edit the table design. -Insert data immediately -Select to save the table design and open the table to enter data. +Insert data immediately +Select to save the table design and open the table to enter data. -Create a form based on this table -Select to create a form based on this table. The form is created on a text document with the last used settings of the Form Wizard. -Table Wizard +Create a form based on this table +Select to create a form based on this table. The form is created on a text document with the last used settings of the Form Wizard. +Table Wizard diff --git a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/toolbars.xhp b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/toolbars.xhp index 80a8312d24..119f3f225c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/explorer/database/toolbars.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/explorer/database/toolbars.xhp @@ -30,60 +30,60 @@ -Toolbars +Toolbars -In a database file window, you can see the following toolbars. -Table +In a database file window, you can see the following toolbars. +Table -Open database object -Opens the selected table so you can enter, edit, or delete records. +Open database object +Opens the selected table so you can enter, edit, or delete records. -Edit -Opens the selected table so you can change the structure. +Edit +Opens the selected table so you can change the structure. -Delete -Deletes the selected table. +Delete +Deletes the selected table. -Rename -Renames the selected table. -Query +Rename +Renames the selected table. +Query -Open database object -Opens the selected query so you can enter, edit, or delete records. +Open database object +Opens the selected query so you can enter, edit, or delete records. -Edit -Opens the selected query so you can change the structure. +Edit +Opens the selected query so you can change the structure. -Delete -Deletes the selected query. +Delete +Deletes the selected query. -Rename -Renames the selected query. -Form +Rename +Renames the selected query. +Form -Open database object -Opens the selected form so you can enter, edit, or delete records. +Open database object +Opens the selected form so you can enter, edit, or delete records. -Edit -Opens the selected form so you can change the layout. +Edit +Opens the selected form so you can change the layout. -Delete -Deletes the selected form. +Delete +Deletes the selected form. -Rename -Renames the selected form. -Report +Rename +Renames the selected form. +Report -Open database object -Opens the selected report so you can enter, edit, or delete records. +Open database object +Opens the selected report so you can enter, edit, or delete records. -Edit -Opens the selected report so you can change the layout. +Edit +Opens the selected report so you can change the layout. -Delete -Deletes the selected report. +Delete +Deletes the selected report. -Rename -Renames the selected report. +Rename +Renames the selected report. diff --git a/source/text/shared/fontwork_toolbar.xhp b/source/text/shared/fontwork_toolbar.xhp index 23f1a3b8c0..98f86aaf33 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/fontwork_toolbar.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/fontwork_toolbar.xhp @@ -28,36 +28,36 @@
- Fontwork - The Fontwork toolbar opens when you select a Fontwork object. + Fontwork + The Fontwork toolbar opens when you select a Fontwork object.
- Fontwork Gallery - Opens the Fontwork Gallery where you can select another preview. Click OK to apply the new set of properties to your Fontwork object. + Fontwork Gallery + Opens the Fontwork Gallery where you can select another preview. Click OK to apply the new set of properties to your Fontwork object. -Fontwork Shape - Opens the Fontwork Shape toolbar. Click a shape to apply the shape to all selected Fontwork objects. +Fontwork Shape + Opens the Fontwork Shape toolbar. Click a shape to apply the shape to all selected Fontwork objects. -Fontwork Same Letter Heights - Switches the letter height of the selected Fontwork objects from normal to the same height for all objects. +Fontwork Same Letter Heights + Switches the letter height of the selected Fontwork objects from normal to the same height for all objects. -Fontwork Alignment - Opens the Fontwork Alignment window. +Fontwork Alignment + Opens the Fontwork Alignment window. -Click to apply the alignment to the selected Fontwork objects. +Click to apply the alignment to the selected Fontwork objects. -Fontwork Character Spacing - Opens the Fontwork Character Spacing window. -Click to apply the character spacing to the selected Fontwork objects. - Custom - Opens the Fontwork Character Spacing dialog where you can enter a new character spacing value. +Fontwork Character Spacing + Opens the Fontwork Character Spacing window. +Click to apply the character spacing to the selected Fontwork objects. + Custom + Opens the Fontwork Character Spacing dialog where you can enter a new character spacing value. -Value - Enter the Fontwork character spacing value. - Kern Character Pairs - Switches the kerning of character pairs on and off. +Value + Enter the Fontwork character spacing value. + Kern Character Pairs + Switches the kerning of character pairs on and off.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/aaa_start.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/aaa_start.xhp index f5f4cb3cf4..3d408cc918 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/aaa_start.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/aaa_start.xhp @@ -31,25 +31,25 @@ templates; new documents from templates business cards; using templates -First Steps +First Steps -How to simplify your work using samples and templates - +How to simplify your work using samples and templates + %PRODUCTNAME includes many sample documents and ready-to-use templates. You can access these by choosing File - New - Templates, or press Shift+CommandCtrl+N. -When you open one of the templates, a new document is created based on this template. -Click the Get more templates online link in the dialog to select and download more templates. -You can also use the various wizards (under the File - Wizards menu) to create your own templates, which you can use as a basis for further documents. +When you open one of the templates, a new document is created based on this template. +Click the Get more templates online link in the dialog to select and download more templates. +You can also use the various wizards (under the File - Wizards menu) to create your own templates, which you can use as a basis for further documents. -Working with %PRODUCTNAME -Working with Text Documents +Working with %PRODUCTNAME +Working with Text Documents -Working with Spreadsheets +Working with Spreadsheets -Working with Presentations +Working with Presentations -Working with Drawings +Working with Drawings -Working with Formulas +Working with Formulas diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp index 886960d30a..7c9fc50224 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp @@ -26,29 +26,29 @@ - accessibility; %PRODUCTNAME featuresAccessibility in %PRODUCTNAME - The following accessibility features are part of %PRODUCTNAME: + accessibility; %PRODUCTNAME featuresAccessibility in %PRODUCTNAME + The following accessibility features are part of %PRODUCTNAME: - Support of external devices and applications + Support of external devices and applications - Access to all functions by keyboard. The keys that replace the mouse actions are listed in the %PRODUCTNAME Help + Access to all functions by keyboard. The keys that replace the mouse actions are listed in the %PRODUCTNAME Help - Improved readability of screen contents + Improved readability of screen contents - Zooming of on-screen user interface for menus, icons, and documents - The user interface is scalable through your Window Manageroperating system settings. The default font size for dialogs is 12pt, corresponding to a scale of 100%. You can also change the font size for dialogs in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - View. The zoom factor of a document can be changed in View - Zoom, or by double-clicking the zoom factor displayed in the Status Bar. + Zooming of on-screen user interface for menus, icons, and documents + The user interface is scalable through your Window Manageroperating system settings. The default font size for dialogs is 12pt, corresponding to a scale of 100%. You can also change the font size for dialogs in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - View. The zoom factor of a document can be changed in View - Zoom, or by double-clicking the zoom factor displayed in the Status Bar. - Please note that accessibility support relies on Java technology for communications with assistive technology tools. This means that the first program startup may take a few seconds longer, because the Java runtime environment has to be started as well. + Please note that accessibility support relies on Java technology for communications with assistive technology tools. This means that the first program startup may take a few seconds longer, because the Java runtime environment has to be started as well.
- %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - View - %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Application Colors - %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Accessibility + %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - View + %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Application Colors + %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Accessibility
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp index f8e41d010f..b047530f30 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp @@ -36,22 +36,22 @@ tooltips;extended tips activating;extended help tips -Turning Extended Tips On and Off +Turning Extended Tips On and Off - + Extended tips provide a brief description of the function of a particular icon, text box or menu command when you rest your cursor on that item. -To turn Extended Tips on and off: +To turn Extended Tips on and off: -Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General, and check Extended tips. -A check mark indicates that the extended tips are activated. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General, and check Extended tips. +A check mark indicates that the extended tips are activated. -To turn Extended Tips on temporarily: +To turn Extended Tips on temporarily: -Press the shortcut keys Shift+F1 to activate extended tips once. -A question mark appears beside the mouse pointer. You can move this Help Mouse Pointer over all controls, icons and menu commands to obtain a description of the command. The Help Mouse Pointer is disabled the next time you click the mouse. +Press the shortcut keys Shift+F1 to activate extended tips once. +A question mark appears beside the mouse pointer. You can move this Help Mouse Pointer over all controls, icons and menu commands to obtain a description of the command. The Help Mouse Pointer is disabled the next time you click the mouse.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/activex.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/activex.xhp index 0abef31e46..86e36d567b 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/activex.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/activex.xhp @@ -36,51 +36,51 @@ viewing;%PRODUCTNAME documents in Internet Explorer editing;%PRODUCTNAME documents in Internet Explorer -ActiveX Control to Display Documents in Internet Explorer +ActiveX Control to Display Documents in Internet Explorer -Under Windows only, you can view any $[officename] document in a window of the Microsoft Internet Explorer. Install the ActiveX control in the $[officename] Setup program. -Installing the ActiveX control +Under Windows only, you can view any $[officename] document in a window of the Microsoft Internet Explorer. Install the ActiveX control in the $[officename] Setup program. +Installing the ActiveX control -Close $[officename] and the Quickstarter. +Close $[officename] and the Quickstarter. -Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar. Choose Control Panel. +Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar. Choose Control Panel. -In the Control Panel, click Add or Remove Programs. +In the Control Panel, click Add or Remove Programs. -In the list, click %PRODUCTNAME, then click Change. +In the list, click %PRODUCTNAME, then click Change. -In the Installation Wizard, select Modify. +In the Installation Wizard, select Modify. -Open the Optional Components entry and find the ActiveX Control entry. Open the sub menu of the icon and select to install the feature. +Open the Optional Components entry and find the ActiveX Control entry. Open the sub menu of the icon and select to install the feature. -Click Next and Install. +Click Next and Install. -Viewing $[officename] documents +Viewing $[officename] documents -In Internet Explorer, browse to a web page that contains a link to a $[officename] Writer document, for example. +In Internet Explorer, browse to a web page that contains a link to a $[officename] Writer document, for example. -Click the link to view the document in the Internet Explorer window. -You may still right-click the link to save the file on your harddisk. +Click the link to view the document in the Internet Explorer window. +You may still right-click the link to save the file on your harddisk. -Editing $[officename] documents -The $[officename] document inside the Internet Explorer shows a set of read-only toolbar icons. +Editing $[officename] documents +The $[officename] document inside the Internet Explorer shows a set of read-only toolbar icons. -Click the Edit file icon in the document's toolbar to open a copy of the document in a new $[officename] window. +Click the Edit file icon in the document's toolbar to open a copy of the document in a new $[officename] window. -Edit the copy of the document. +Edit the copy of the document.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp index 022d0c490f..8310f79261 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp @@ -35,28 +35,28 @@ screen magnifiers magnifiers -Assistive Tools in $[officename] +Assistive Tools in $[officename] -$[officename] supports some assistive technology tools like screen magnification software, screen readers, and on-screen keyboards. -A current list of supported assistive tools can be found on the Wiki at http://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Accessibility. -Supported Input Devices -$[officename] provides the ability to use alternative input devices for access to all functions of $[officename]. +$[officename] supports some assistive technology tools like screen magnification software, screen readers, and on-screen keyboards. +A current list of supported assistive tools can be found on the Wiki at http://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Accessibility. +Supported Input Devices +$[officename] provides the ability to use alternative input devices for access to all functions of $[officename]. -Screen magnification software allow users with low vision to work in $[officename] with caret and focus tracking. +Screen magnification software allow users with low vision to work in $[officename] with caret and focus tracking. -On-screen keyboards enable users to perform almost all data input and commands with a mouse. +On-screen keyboards enable users to perform almost all data input and commands with a mouse. -Screen readers allow visually impaired users to access $[officename] with text-to-speech and Braille displays. +Screen readers allow visually impaired users to access $[officename] with text-to-speech and Braille displays.
-%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - View -%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Application Colors -%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Accessibility +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - View +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Application Colors +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Accessibility
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/autocorr_url.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/autocorr_url.xhp index 95b110a673..6c0ff0d1e3 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/autocorr_url.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/autocorr_url.xhp @@ -35,35 +35,35 @@ links;turning off automatic recognition predictive text, see also AutoCorrect function/AutoFill function/AutoInput function/word completion/text completion -Turning off Automatic URL Recognition +Turning off Automatic URL Recognition - When you enter text, $[officename] automatically recognizes a word that may be a URL and replaces the word with a hyperlink. $[officename] formats the hyperlink with direct font attributes (color and underline) the properties of which are obtained from certain Character Styles. - If you do not want $[officename] to automatically recognize URLs as you are typing, there are several ways of turning off this feature. - Undo URL Recognition + When you enter text, $[officename] automatically recognizes a word that may be a URL and replaces the word with a hyperlink. $[officename] formats the hyperlink with direct font attributes (color and underline) the properties of which are obtained from certain Character Styles. + If you do not want $[officename] to automatically recognize URLs as you are typing, there are several ways of turning off this feature. + Undo URL Recognition - When you are typing and notice that a text has just been automatically converted into a hyperlink, press Command + When you are typing and notice that a text has just been automatically converted into a hyperlink, press Command Ctrl+Z to undo this formatting. - If you do not notice this conversion until later, select the hyperlink, open the context menu and choose Remove Hyperlink. + If you do not notice this conversion until later, select the hyperlink, open the context menu and choose Remove Hyperlink. - Turn off URL Recognition + Turn off URL Recognition - Load a document of the type for which you want to modify the URL recognition. - If you want to modify the URL recognition for text documents, open a text document. + Load a document of the type for which you want to modify the URL recognition. + If you want to modify the URL recognition for text documents, open a text document. Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options. - In the AutoCorrect dialog, select the Options tab. + In the AutoCorrect dialog, select the Options tab. - If you unmark URL Recognition, words will no longer be automatically replaced with hyperlinks. - In $[officename] Writer there are two check boxes in front of URL Recognition. The box in the first column is for later post-editing and the box in the second column is for AutoCorrect as you type. + If you unmark URL Recognition, words will no longer be automatically replaced with hyperlinks. + In $[officename] Writer there are two check boxes in front of URL Recognition. The box in the first column is for later post-editing and the box in the second column is for AutoCorrect as you type.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp index cca433a93b..df3a81f45f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp @@ -39,31 +39,31 @@ showing;docked windows hiding;docked windows - -Showing, Docking and Hiding Windows + +Showing, Docking and Hiding Windows -Some windows in $[officename] are dockable, such as the Navigator window. You can move these windows, re-size them or dock them to an edge. -Docking and Undocking Windows -To dock a window, do one of the following: +Some windows in $[officename] are dockable, such as the Navigator window. You can move these windows, re-size them or dock them to an edge. +Docking and Undocking Windows +To dock a window, do one of the following: -Drag the window by its title bar to the side, or +Drag the window by its title bar to the side, or -Double-click inside a vacant area of the window while holding down the CommandCtrl key. In the Styles and Formatting window, double-click a gray part of the window next to the icons while holding down the CommandCtrl key. Alternatively, press CommandCtrl+Shift+F10. +Double-click inside a vacant area of the window while holding down the CommandCtrl key. In the Styles and Formatting window, double-click a gray part of the window next to the icons while holding down the CommandCtrl key. Alternatively, press CommandCtrl+Shift+F10. -These methods can also be used to undock a currently docked window. -Showing and Hiding Docked Windows +These methods can also be used to undock a currently docked window. +Showing and Hiding Docked Windows - + Icon -Click the button on the edge of the docked window to show or hide the docked window. The AutoHide function allows you to temporarily show a hidden window by clicking on its edge. When you click in the document, the docked window hides again. +Click the button on the edge of the docked window to show or hide the docked window. The AutoHide function allows you to temporarily show a hidden window by clicking on its edge. When you click in the document, the docked window hides again.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/background.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/background.xhp index 5f23e67d3b..5bf305b764 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/background.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/background.xhp @@ -40,15 +40,15 @@ text, see also text documents, paragraphs and characters MW deleted 6 entries and changed "pages;" - Defining Graphics or Colors in the Background of Pages (Watermark) + Defining Graphics or Colors in the Background of Pages (Watermark) - Choose Format - Page. + Choose Format - Page. - On the Background tab page, select a background color or a background graphic. - In spreadsheets this background appears only in the print behind the cells not formatted elsewhere. + On the Background tab page, select a background color or a background graphic. + In spreadsheets this background appears only in the print behind the cells not formatted elsewhere.
@@ -62,9 +62,9 @@ - Background tab page - Backgrounds in Text - Backgrounds in Spreadsheets + Background tab page + Backgrounds in Text + Backgrounds in Spreadsheets
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/border_paragraph.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/border_paragraph.xhp index f479e2c953..9a89584b71 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/border_paragraph.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/border_paragraph.xhp @@ -40,48 +40,48 @@ defining;paragraph borders mw changed "adding;" to "inserting;" - Defining Borders for Paragraphs + Defining Borders for Paragraphs - Setting a Predefined Border Style + Setting a Predefined Border Style - Place the cursor in the paragraph for which you want to define a border. + Place the cursor in the paragraph for which you want to define a border. - Choose Format - Paragraph - Borders. + Choose Format - Paragraph - Borders. - Select one of the default border styles in the Default area. + Select one of the default border styles in the Default area. - Select a line style, width and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + Select a line style, width and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. - Select the distance between the border lines and the paragraph contents in the Spacing to contents area. You can only change distances to edges that have a border line defined. + Select the distance between the border lines and the paragraph contents in the Spacing to contents area. You can only change distances to edges that have a border line defined. - Click OK to apply the changes. + Click OK to apply the changes. - Setting a Customized Border Style + Setting a Customized Border Style - Choose Format - Paragraph - Borders. + Choose Format - Paragraph - Borders. - In the User-defined area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge. + In the User-defined area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge. - Select a line style, width and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + Select a line style, width and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. - Repeat the last two steps for every border edge. + Repeat the last two steps for every border edge. - Select the distance between the border lines and the paragraph contents in the Spacing to contents area. You can only change distances to edges that have a border line defined. + Select the distance between the border lines and the paragraph contents in the Spacing to contents area. You can only change distances to edges that have a border line defined. - Click OK to apply the changes. + Click OK to apply the changes.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/border_table.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/border_table.xhp index d55aebc7ec..424ca450c8 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/border_table.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/border_table.xhp @@ -39,47 +39,47 @@ defining;table borders mw deleted "adding;" - Defining Borders for Tables and Table Cells + Defining Borders for Tables and Table Cells - Setting a Predefined Border Style + Setting a Predefined Border Style - Select the table cells that you want to modify. + Select the table cells that you want to modify. - Click the Borders icon on the Table toolbar (Writer) or on the Line and Filling bar to open the Borders window. + Click the Borders icon on the Table toolbar (Writer) or on the Line and Filling bar to open the Borders window. - Click one of the predefined border styles. - This adds the selected style to the current border style of the table cells. Select the blank border style at the top left of the Borders window to clear all border styles. + Click one of the predefined border styles. + This adds the selected style to the current border style of the table cells. Select the blank border style at the top left of the Borders window to clear all border styles. - Setting a Customized Border Style + Setting a Customized Border Style - Select the table cells that you want to modify. + Select the table cells that you want to modify. Choose Table - Properties - Borders (Writer) or Format - Cells - Borders (Calc). - In the User-defined area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge. + In the User-defined area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge. - If you select more than one row or column, you can change the middle lines between rows or columns. Select the middle markers in the User-defined area. + If you select more than one row or column, you can change the middle lines between rows or columns. Select the middle markers in the User-defined area. - Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. - Repeat the last two steps for every border edge. + Repeat the last two steps for every border edge. - Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Spacing to contents area. + Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Spacing to contents area. - Click OK to apply the changes. + Click OK to apply the changes.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp index 7692d90a13..e7dd4b9840 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp @@ -38,38 +38,38 @@ inserting;line breaks in cells tables;inserting line breaks -Inserting Line Breaks in Cells +Inserting Line Breaks in Cells - Inserting line breaks in $[officename] Calc spreadsheet cells + Inserting line breaks in $[officename] Calc spreadsheet cells - To insert a line break in a spreadsheet cell, press the Command + To insert a line break in a spreadsheet cell, press the Command Ctrl+Enter keys. - This will work only with the text edit cursor inside the cell, not at the input line. So first double-click the cell, then single-click at the text position where you want the line break. + This will work only with the text edit cursor inside the cell, not at the input line. So first double-click the cell, then single-click at the text position where you want the line break. - You can search for a newline character in the Find & Replace dialog by searching for \n as a regular expression. You can use the text function CHAR(10) to insert a newline character into a text formula. - Formatting $[officename] Calc cells for automatic line wrapping + You can search for a newline character in the Find & Replace dialog by searching for \n as a regular expression. You can use the text function CHAR(10) to insert a newline character into a text formula. + Formatting $[officename] Calc cells for automatic line wrapping - Select the cells for which you want an automatic line break. + Select the cells for which you want an automatic line break. - Choose Format - Cells - Alignment. + Choose Format - Cells - Alignment. - Select Wrap text automatically. + Select Wrap text automatically. - Inserting line breaks in $[officename] Writer text document tables + Inserting line breaks in $[officename] Writer text document tables - To insert a line break in a text document table cell, press the Enter key. + To insert a line break in a text document table cell, press the Enter key. - An automatic line break will be performed while you type across the end of each cell. + An automatic line break will be performed while you type across the end of each cell.
- Alignment + Alignment
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/change_title.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/change_title.xhp index 2fbf5f44a9..d5bfcf881f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/change_title.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/change_title.xhp @@ -35,24 +35,24 @@ changing;document titles documents; changing titles -Changing the Title of a Document +Changing the Title of a Document -You can specify a title for your document. Some file manager utilities can display the titles next to the filenames of your documents. -How to change the title of the current document +You can specify a title for your document. Some file manager utilities can display the titles next to the filenames of your documents. +How to change the title of the current document -Choose File - Properties. This opens the Document Properties dialog. +Choose File - Properties. This opens the Document Properties dialog. -Select the Description tab. +Select the Description tab. -Type the new title in the Title box and click OK. +Type the new title in the Title box and click OK.
-Document Properties +Document Properties
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/chart_axis.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/chart_axis.xhp index 0f88aaf9fb..b6b6c48ebb 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/chart_axis.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/chart_axis.xhp @@ -35,26 +35,26 @@ editing; chart axes formatting; axes in charts -Editing Chart Axes +Editing Chart Axes -To edit the axes of a chart that you have inserted: +To edit the axes of a chart that you have inserted: -Double-click on the chart. -A gray border appears around the chart and the menu bar now contains commands for editing the objects in the chart. +Double-click on the chart. +A gray border appears around the chart and the menu bar now contains commands for editing the objects in the chart. -Choose Format - Axis, then select the axis (or axes) that you would like to edit. A dialog appears. +Choose Format - Axis, then select the axis (or axes) that you would like to edit. A dialog appears. -Select from the available sections and make the required changes (for example, select the Scale tab if you want to modify the scale of the axis). +Select from the available sections and make the required changes (for example, select the Scale tab if you want to modify the scale of the axis). -Click OK. In your document, click outside the chart to exit chart editing mode. +Click OK. In your document, click outside the chart to exit chart editing mode.
-Format - Object properties +Format - Object properties
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/chart_barformat.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/chart_barformat.xhp index 0dee76c05f..71122118fb 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/chart_barformat.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/chart_barformat.xhp @@ -37,22 +37,22 @@ inserting;textures on chart bars MW changed "adding;" to "inserting;" - Adding Texture to Chart Bars + Adding Texture to Chart Bars - You can add texture to the bars in a graph or chart (instead of the default colors) via bitmap graphics: + You can add texture to the bars in a graph or chart (instead of the default colors) via bitmap graphics: - Enter edit mode by double-clicking on the chart. + Enter edit mode by double-clicking on the chart. - Click on any bar of the bar series you want to edit. All bars of this series are now selected. - If you want to edit only one bar, click again on that bar. + Click on any bar of the bar series you want to edit. All bars of this series are now selected. + If you want to edit only one bar, click again on that bar. - In the context menu choose Object Properties. Then choose the Area tab. + In the context menu choose Object Properties. Then choose the Area tab. - Click on Bitmap. In the list box select a bitmap as a texture for the currently selected bars. Click OK to accept the setting. + Click on Bitmap. In the list box select a bitmap as a texture for the currently selected bars. Click OK to accept the setting.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/chart_insert.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/chart_insert.xhp index dc1fa444a2..3b2e07f106 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/chart_insert.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/chart_insert.xhp @@ -37,58 +37,58 @@ charts; editing data editing; chart data moved many index entries to new schart/01 files -Inserting Charts +Inserting Charts -Different methods exist to start a chart: +Different methods exist to start a chart: -Insert a chart based on data from cells in Calc or Writer. -These charts update automatically when the source data changes.currently only in Calc. Writer: bug? +Insert a chart based on data from cells in Calc or Writer. +These charts update automatically when the source data changes.currently only in Calc. Writer: bug? -Insert a chart with a default data set, and then use the Data Table dialog to enter your own data for that chart. -These charts can be created in Writer, Impress and Draw. is this "not in Calc" a bug or a design philosophy thing? +Insert a chart with a default data set, and then use the Data Table dialog to enter your own data for that chart. +These charts can be created in Writer, Impress and Draw. is this "not in Calc" a bug or a design philosophy thing? -Copy a chart from Calc or Writer into another document. -These charts are snapshots of the data at the time of copying. They do not change when the source data changes. +Copy a chart from Calc or Writer into another document. +These charts are snapshots of the data at the time of copying. They do not change when the source data changes. -In Calc, a chart is an object on a sheet that can be copied and pasted on another sheet of the same document, the data series will stay linked to the range on the other sheet. If it is pasted on another Calc document, it has its own chart data table and is no more linked to the original range. -Chart in a Calc spreadsheet +In Calc, a chart is an object on a sheet that can be copied and pasted on another sheet of the same document, the data series will stay linked to the range on the other sheet. If it is pasted on another Calc document, it has its own chart data table and is no more linked to the original range. +Chart in a Calc spreadsheet -Click inside the cell range that you want to present in your chart. +Click inside the cell range that you want to present in your chart. -Click the Insert Chart icon on the Standard toolbar. -You see a chart preview and the Chart Wizard. +Click the Insert Chart icon on the Standard toolbar. +You see a chart preview and the Chart Wizard. -Follow the instructions in the Chart Wizard to create the chart. +Follow the instructions in the Chart Wizard to create the chart. -Chart in a Writer text document -In a Writer document, you can insert a chart based on the values in a Writer table. +Chart in a Writer text document +In a Writer document, you can insert a chart based on the values in a Writer table. -Click inside the Writer table. +Click inside the Writer table. -Choose Insert - Chart. -You see a chart preview and the Chart Wizard.no live preview - is this a bug? +Choose Insert - Chart. +You see a chart preview and the Chart Wizard.no live preview - is this a bug? -Follow the instructions in the Chart Wizard to create the chart. +Follow the instructions in the Chart Wizard to create the chart. -Chart based on values of its own +Chart based on values of its own -In Writer, Draw or Impress, choose Insert - Chart to insert a chart based on default data. +In Writer, Draw or Impress, choose Insert - Chart to insert a chart based on default data. -You can change the default data values by double-clicking on the chart and then choosing View - Chart Data Table. +You can change the default data values by double-clicking on the chart and then choosing View - Chart Data Table.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/chart_legend.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/chart_legend.xhp index 14efb523a1..7525761560 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/chart_legend.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/chart_legend.xhp @@ -35,24 +35,24 @@ editing; chart legends formatting; chart legends -Editing Chart Legends +Editing Chart Legends -To edit a chart legend: +To edit a chart legend: -Double-click on the chart. -A gray border appears around the chart and the menu bar now contains commands for editing the objects in the chart. +Double-click on the chart. +A gray border appears around the chart and the menu bar now contains commands for editing the objects in the chart. -Choose Format - Legend or double-click on the legend. This opens the Legend dialog. +Choose Format - Legend or double-click on the legend. This opens the Legend dialog. -Choose from the available tabs to make modifications, then click OK. +Choose from the available tabs to make modifications, then click OK. -To select the legend, first double-click on the chart (see step 1), then click on the legend. You can now move the legend within the chart using the mouse.ufi: removed an absolete note +To select the legend, first double-click on the chart (see step 1), then click on the legend. You can now move the legend within the chart using the mouse.ufi: removed an absolete note
-Format - Object Properties +Format - Object Properties
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/chart_title.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/chart_title.xhp index 6db8b44571..60a90f9323 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/chart_title.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/chart_title.xhp @@ -34,33 +34,33 @@ editing; chart titles titles; editing in charts -Editing Chart Titles +Editing Chart Titles -To edit a chart title that you have inserted into a $[officename] document: +To edit a chart title that you have inserted into a $[officename] document: -Double-click on the chart. -A gray border appears around the chart and the menu bar now contains commands for editing the objects in the chart. +Double-click on the chart. +A gray border appears around the chart and the menu bar now contains commands for editing the objects in the chart. -Double-click on an existing title text. A gray border appears around the text and you can now make changes. Press Enter to create a new line. -If no title text exists, choose Insert - Title to enter the text in a dialog. +Double-click on an existing title text. A gray border appears around the text and you can now make changes. Press Enter to create a new line. +If no title text exists, choose Insert - Title to enter the text in a dialog. -A single-click on the title allows you to move it with the mouse. +A single-click on the title allows you to move it with the mouse. -If you want to change the formatting of the main title, choose Format - Title - Main Title. This opens the Title dialog. +If you want to change the formatting of the main title, choose Format - Title - Main Title. This opens the Title dialog. -Select one of the available tabs in the dialog to make modifications. +Select one of the available tabs in the dialog to make modifications. -Click OK. In your document, click outside the chart to exit chart editing mode. +Click OK. In your document, click outside the chart to exit chart editing mode.
-Format - Object properties +Format - Object properties
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/configure_overview.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/configure_overview.xhp index ff06aed43d..7293d80948 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/configure_overview.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/configure_overview.xhp @@ -32,25 +32,25 @@ configuring; $[officename] customizing; $[officename] -Configuring $[officename] +Configuring $[officename]
-You can customize your $[officename] to suit your needs. +You can customize your $[officename] to suit your needs. -You are free to change the items on the menu bar. You can delete items, add new ones, copy items from one menu to another, rename them, and so on. +You are free to change the items on the menu bar. You can delete items, add new ones, copy items from one menu to another, rename them, and so on. -The toolbars may be freely configured. +The toolbars may be freely configured. -You can change the shortcut keys. +You can change the shortcut keys. -To change these, choose Tools - Customize to open the Customize dialog. +To change these, choose Tools - Customize to open the Customize dialog.
-Tools - Customize +Tools - Customize
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/contextmenu.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/contextmenu.xhp index 1cc7feeff1..e072fee629 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/contextmenu.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/contextmenu.xhp @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ opening; context menus activating;context menus -Using Context Menus +Using Context Menus
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/copy_drawfunctions.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/copy_drawfunctions.xhp index d1e463f530..022d08ba8b 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/copy_drawfunctions.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/copy_drawfunctions.xhp @@ -35,27 +35,27 @@ copying; draw objects between documents pasting;draw objects from other documents mw added "pasting;" -Copying Drawing Objects Into Other Documents +Copying Drawing Objects Into Other Documents -In $[officename] it is possible to copy drawing objects between text, spreadsheets and presentation documents. +In $[officename] it is possible to copy drawing objects between text, spreadsheets and presentation documents. -Select the drawing object or objects. +Select the drawing object or objects. -Copy the drawing object to the clipboard, for example, by using CommandCtrl+C. +Copy the drawing object to the clipboard, for example, by using CommandCtrl+C. -Switch to the other document and place the cursor where the drawing object is to be inserted. +Switch to the other document and place the cursor where the drawing object is to be inserted. -Insert the drawing object, for example, by using CommandCtrl+V. +Insert the drawing object, for example, by using CommandCtrl+V. -Inserting into a text document -An inserted drawing object is anchored to the current paragraph. You can change the anchor by selecting the object and clicking the Change Anchor icon on the OLE-Object toolbar or the Frame toolbar. This opens a popup menu where you can select the anchor type. -Inserting into a spreadsheet -An inserted drawing object is anchored to the current cell. You can change the anchor between cell and page by selecting the object and clicking the Change Anchor icon +Inserting into a text document +An inserted drawing object is anchored to the current paragraph. You can change the anchor by selecting the object and clicking the Change Anchor icon on the OLE-Object toolbar or the Frame toolbar. This opens a popup menu where you can select the anchor type. +Inserting into a spreadsheet +An inserted drawing object is anchored to the current cell. You can change the anchor between cell and page by selecting the object and clicking the Change Anchor icon Icon .
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/copytable2application.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/copytable2application.xhp index 52bbe52151..8a036be8d8 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/copytable2application.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/copytable2application.xhp @@ -37,23 +37,23 @@ text documents;inserting spreadsheet cells tables in spreadsheets;copying data to other applications mw deleted "tables;" and added "charts;" and "tables in spreadsheets;" -Inserting Data From Spreadsheets +Inserting Data From Spreadsheets -Use the clipboard to copy the contents of a single cell. You can also copy a formula from a cell into the clipboard (for example, from the input line of the formula bar) so that the formula can be inserted into a text. +Use the clipboard to copy the contents of a single cell. You can also copy a formula from a cell into the clipboard (for example, from the input line of the formula bar) so that the formula can be inserted into a text. -To copy a cell range into a text document, select the cell range in the sheet and then use either the clipboard or drag-and-drop to insert the cells into the text document. You will then find an OLE object in the text document, which you can edit further. +To copy a cell range into a text document, select the cell range in the sheet and then use either the clipboard or drag-and-drop to insert the cells into the text document. You will then find an OLE object in the text document, which you can edit further. -If you drag cells to the normal view of a presentation document, the cells will be inserted there as an OLE object. If you drag cells into the outline view, each cell will form a line of the outline view. +If you drag cells to the normal view of a presentation document, the cells will be inserted there as an OLE object. If you drag cells into the outline view, each cell will form a line of the outline view. -When you copy a cell range from $[officename] Calc to the clipboard, the drawing objects, OLE objects and charts within this range are also copied. +When you copy a cell range from $[officename] Calc to the clipboard, the drawing objects, OLE objects and charts within this range are also copied. -If you insert a cell range with an enclosed chart, the chart will keep its link to the source cell range only if you copied the chart and the source cell range together. +If you insert a cell range with an enclosed chart, the chart will keep its link to the source cell range only if you copied the chart and the source cell range together. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/copytext2application.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/copytext2application.xhp index 25d004f622..96f0c5794a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/copytext2application.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/copytext2application.xhp @@ -39,44 +39,44 @@ copying;data from text documents pasting;data from text documents mw added "pasting; and changed "drag and drop;"" -Inserting Data From Text Documents +Inserting Data From Text Documents -You can insert text into other document types, such as spreadsheets and presentations. Note that there is a difference between whether the text is inserted into a text frame, a spreadsheet cell, or into the outline view of a presentation. +You can insert text into other document types, such as spreadsheets and presentations. Note that there is a difference between whether the text is inserted into a text frame, a spreadsheet cell, or into the outline view of a presentation. -If you copy text to the clipboard, you can paste it with or without text attributes. Use the shortcut keys CommandCtrl+C to copy and CommandCtrl+V to paste. +If you copy text to the clipboard, you can paste it with or without text attributes. Use the shortcut keys CommandCtrl+C to copy and CommandCtrl+V to paste. - + Icon -To select the format in which the clipboard contents will be pasted, click the arrow next to the Paste icon on the Standard bar, or choose Edit - Paste Special, then select the proper format. +To select the format in which the clipboard contents will be pasted, click the arrow next to the Paste icon on the Standard bar, or choose Edit - Paste Special, then select the proper format.
-If a text document contains headings formatted with the Heading Paragraph Style, choose File - Send - Outline to Presentation. A new presentation document is created, which contains the headings as an outline. +If a text document contains headings formatted with the Heading Paragraph Style, choose File - Send - Outline to Presentation. A new presentation document is created, which contains the headings as an outline. -If you want to transfer each heading together with its accompanying paragraphs, select the File - Send - AutoAbstract to Presentation command. You must have formatted the headings with a corresponding Paragraph Style to be able to see this command. +If you want to transfer each heading together with its accompanying paragraphs, select the File - Send - AutoAbstract to Presentation command. You must have formatted the headings with a corresponding Paragraph Style to be able to see this command. -Copying Text Using Drag-and-Drop +Copying Text Using Drag-and-Drop -If you select text and drag it into a spreadsheet with drag-and-drop, it will be inserted as text into the cell where you release the mouse. +If you select text and drag it into a spreadsheet with drag-and-drop, it will be inserted as text into the cell where you release the mouse. -If you drag text to the normal view of a presentation, an OLE object is inserted as a $[officename] plug-in. +If you drag text to the normal view of a presentation, an OLE object is inserted as a $[officename] plug-in. -If you drag the text to the outline view of a presentation, it will be inserted at the cursor location. +If you drag the text to the outline view of a presentation, it will be inserted at the cursor location. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp index 86f9f234fa..099ce00efd 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp @@ -38,38 +38,38 @@ Arabic;entering text Thai;entering text mw made "text layout;" a one level entry -Languages Using Complex Text Layout +Languages Using Complex Text Layout -Currently, $[officename] supports Hindi, Thai, Hebrew, and Arabic as CTL languages. -If you select the text flow from right to left, embedded Western text still runs from left to right. The cursor responds to the arrow keys in that Right Arrow moves it "to the text end" and Left Arrow "to the text start". -You can change the text writing direction directly be pressing one of the following keys: +Currently, $[officename] supports Hindi, Thai, Hebrew, and Arabic as CTL languages. +If you select the text flow from right to left, embedded Western text still runs from left to right. The cursor responds to the arrow keys in that Right Arrow moves it "to the text end" and Left Arrow "to the text start". +You can change the text writing direction directly be pressing one of the following keys: -CommandCtrl+Shift+D or CommandCtrl+Right Shift Key - switch to right-to-left text entry +CommandCtrl+Shift+D or CommandCtrl+Right Shift Key - switch to right-to-left text entry -CommandCtrl+Shift+A or CommandCtrl+Left Shift Key - switch to left-to-right text entry +CommandCtrl+Shift+A or CommandCtrl+Left Shift Key - switch to left-to-right text entry -The modifier-only key combinations only work when CTL support is enabled. +The modifier-only key combinations only work when CTL support is enabled. -In multicolumn pages, sections or frames that are formatted with text flow from right to left, the first column is the right column and the last column is the left column. -In $[officename] Writer text formatted in Thai language has the following features: +In multicolumn pages, sections or frames that are formatted with text flow from right to left, the first column is the right column and the last column is the left column. +In $[officename] Writer text formatted in Thai language has the following features: -In paragraphs with justified alignment, the characters are stretched to flush the lines at the margins. In other languages the spaces between words are stretched. +In paragraphs with justified alignment, the characters are stretched to flush the lines at the margins. In other languages the spaces between words are stretched. -Use the Delete key to delete a whole composite character. Use the Backspace key to delete the last part of the previous composite character. +Use the Delete key to delete a whole composite character. Use the Backspace key to delete the last part of the previous composite character. -Use the Right or Left Arrow key to jump to the next or previous whole composite character. To position the cursor into a composite character, use OptionAlt+Arrow key. +Use the Right or Left Arrow key to jump to the next or previous whole composite character. To position the cursor into a composite character, use OptionAlt+Arrow key. -%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages -%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Complex Text Layout +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Complex Text Layout diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/data_addressbook.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/data_addressbook.xhp index 8ef504d141..ca5fd87c15 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/data_addressbook.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/data_addressbook.xhp @@ -35,40 +35,40 @@ system address book registration registering; address books - -Registering an Address Book + +Registering an Address Book
-In %PRODUCTNAME you can register different data sources. The contents of the data fields are then available to you for use in various fields and controls. Your system address book is such a data source. - +In %PRODUCTNAME you can register different data sources. The contents of the data fields are then available to you for use in various fields and controls. Your system address book is such a data source. + %PRODUCTNAME templates and wizards use fields for the contents of the address book. When activated, the general fields in the templates are automatically replaced with the fields from the data source of your address book.
-In order for the replacement to take place, you must tell %PRODUCTNAME which address book you use. The wizard asking for this information appears automatically the first time you activate, for example, a business letter template. You can also call the wizard by following the steps listed below. -The address book data is read-only in %PRODUCTNAME Base. It is not possible to add, edit, or delete address data from within Base. -Address Data Source Wizard -To call the Address Data Source wizard, choose File - Wizards - Address Data Source. -Registering An Existing Address Book Manually +In order for the replacement to take place, you must tell %PRODUCTNAME which address book you use. The wizard asking for this information appears automatically the first time you activate, for example, a business letter template. You can also call the wizard by following the steps listed below. +The address book data is read-only in %PRODUCTNAME Base. It is not possible to add, edit, or delete address data from within Base. +Address Data Source Wizard +To call the Address Data Source wizard, choose File - Wizards - Address Data Source. +Registering An Existing Address Book Manually -Choose Tools - Address Book Source. The Templates: Address Book Assignment dialog appears. +Choose Tools - Address Book Source. The Templates: Address Book Assignment dialog appears. -In the Data source combo box, select the system address book or the data source you want to use as an address book. +In the Data source combo box, select the system address book or the data source you want to use as an address book. -If you have not yet registered the system address book in %PRODUCTNAME as the data source, click the Address Data Source ... button. This takes you to the Address Book Data Source Wizard, in which you can register your address book as a new data source in %PRODUCTNAME. +If you have not yet registered the system address book in %PRODUCTNAME as the data source, click the Address Data Source ... button. This takes you to the Address Book Data Source Wizard, in which you can register your address book as a new data source in %PRODUCTNAME. -In the Table combo box, select the database table you want to use as the address book. +In the Table combo box, select the database table you want to use as the address book. -Under Field assignment, match the fields for first name, company, department, and so on to the actual field names used in your address book. +Under Field assignment, match the fields for first name, company, department, and so on to the actual field names used in your address book. -When finished, close the dialog with OK. +When finished, close the dialog with OK. -Now your data source is registered in %PRODUCTNAME as the address book. If you now open a template from the Business Correspondence category, %PRODUCTNAME can automatically insert the correct fields for a form letter. +Now your data source is registered in %PRODUCTNAME as the address book. If you now open a template from the Business Correspondence category, %PRODUCTNAME can automatically insert the correct fields for a form letter.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/data_dbase2office.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/data_dbase2office.xhp index e6a31b0d75..a352b229f8 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/data_dbase2office.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/data_dbase2office.xhp @@ -34,42 +34,42 @@ importing; tables in text format exporting; spreadsheets to text format -Importing and Exporting Data in Text Format +Importing and Exporting Data in Text Format -If you want to exchange data with a database that does not have an ODBC link and does not allow dBASE import and export, you can use a common text format. -Importing Data into $[officename] -To exchange data in a text format use the $[officename] Calc import/export filter. +If you want to exchange data with a database that does not have an ODBC link and does not allow dBASE import and export, you can use a common text format. +Importing Data into $[officename] +To exchange data in a text format use the $[officename] Calc import/export filter. -Export the desired data from the source database in a text format. The CSV text format is recommended. This format separates data fields by using delimiters such as commas or semi-colons, and separates records by inserting line breaks. +Export the desired data from the source database in a text format. The CSV text format is recommended. This format separates data fields by using delimiters such as commas or semi-colons, and separates records by inserting line breaks. -Choose File - Open and click the file to import. +Choose File - Open and click the file to import. -Select "Text CSV" from the File type combo box. Click Open. +Select "Text CSV" from the File type combo box. Click Open. -The Text Import dialog appears. Decide which data to include from the text document. +The Text Import dialog appears. Decide which data to include from the text document. -Once the data is in a $[officename] Calc spreadsheet, you can edit it as needed. Save the data as a $[officename] data source: +Once the data is in a $[officename] Calc spreadsheet, you can edit it as needed. Save the data as a $[officename] data source: -Save the current $[officename] Calc spreadsheet in dBASE format in the folder of a dBASE database. To do this, choose File - Save As, then select the File type "dBASE" and the folder of the dBASE database. +Save the current $[officename] Calc spreadsheet in dBASE format in the folder of a dBASE database. To do this, choose File - Save As, then select the File type "dBASE" and the folder of the dBASE database. -Exporting in CSV Text Format -You can export the current $[officename] spreadsheet in a text format which can be read by many other applications. +Exporting in CSV Text Format +You can export the current $[officename] spreadsheet in a text format which can be read by many other applications. -Choose File - Save as. +Choose File - Save as. -In File type select the filter "Text CSV". Enter a file name and click Save. +In File type select the filter "Text CSV". Enter a file name and click Save. -This opens the Export of text files dialog, in which you can select the character set, field delimiter and text delimiter. Click OK. A warning informs you that only the active sheet was saved. +This opens the Export of text files dialog, in which you can select the character set, field delimiter and text delimiter. Click OK. A warning informs you that only the active sheet was saved. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/data_enter_sql.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/data_enter_sql.xhp index c766172e76..ab837edb43 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/data_enter_sql.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/data_enter_sql.xhp @@ -32,43 +32,42 @@ commands;SQL executing SQL commands mw changed "SQL;executing commands"mw made "executing;" a one level entry -Executing SQL Commands +Executing SQL Commands - With the help of SQL commands you can control the database directly, and can also create and edit tables and queries. - Not all database types support all SQL instructions. If necessary, find out which SQL commands are supported by your database system. - To execute an SQL statement directly + With the help of SQL commands you can control the database directly, and can also create and edit tables and queries. + Not all database types support all SQL instructions. If necessary, find out which SQL commands are supported by your database system. + To execute an SQL statement directly - Choose File - Open to open a database file. + Choose File - Open to open a database file. - Choose Tools - SQL. + Choose Tools - SQL. - Click the Create Query in SQL View icon + Click the Create Query in SQL View icon Icon or - Select an existing query from the list and click the Edit icon + Select an existing query from the list and click the Edit icon Icon . - In the Query window, choose View - Switch Design View On/Off. Edit the SQL command. + In the Query window, choose View - Switch Design View On/Off. Edit the SQL command. - Click the Run icon + Click the Run icon Icon . The result of the query is displayed in the upper window. - Click the Save or Save As icon + Click the Save or Save As icon Icon to save the query.
- Query Design + Query Design
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/data_forms.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/data_forms.xhp index 02198e268e..3c8e161207 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/data_forms.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/data_forms.xhp @@ -33,36 +33,36 @@ forms;creating design view;creating forms -Working with Forms +Working with Forms -Using forms, you can define how to present the data. Open a text document or a spreadsheet and insert the controls such as push buttons and list boxes. In the properties dialogs of the controls, you can define what data the forms should display. -Creating a New Form With the Form Wizard -In %PRODUCTNAME, you can create a new form using the Form Wizard: +Using forms, you can define how to present the data. Open a text document or a spreadsheet and insert the controls such as push buttons and list boxes. In the properties dialogs of the controls, you can define what data the forms should display. +Creating a New Form With the Form Wizard +In %PRODUCTNAME, you can create a new form using the Form Wizard: -Open the database file where you want to create the new form. +Open the database file where you want to create the new form. -In the left pane of the database window, click the Forms icon. +In the left pane of the database window, click the Forms icon. -Click Use Wizard to Create Form. +Click Use Wizard to Create Form. -Creating a New Form Manually +Creating a New Form Manually -Open the database file where you want to create the new form. +Open the database file where you want to create the new form. -In the left pane of the database window, click the Forms icon. +In the left pane of the database window, click the Forms icon. -Click Create Form in Design View. +Click Create Form in Design View. -A new text document opens. Use the Form Controls to insert form controls. -Click the Forms icon to access all forms that were created from within the current database window. In addition, you can use the Form Controls icons to add database form controls to any Writer or Calc document, but these documents will not be listed in the database window. +A new text document opens. Use the Form Controls to insert form controls. +Click the Forms icon to access all forms that were created from within the current database window. In addition, you can use the Form Controls icons to add database form controls to any Writer or Calc document, but these documents will not be listed in the database window.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/data_im_export.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/data_im_export.xhp index 27b18ac7a1..2050f4b907 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/data_im_export.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/data_im_export.xhp @@ -36,62 +36,62 @@ spreadsheets;inserting database records data sources;copying records to spreadsheets pasting;from data sources to %PRODUCTNAME Calc -MW reduced "databases;" entries into one entry and deleted "exporting;from.."Importing and Exporting Data in Base +MW reduced "databases;" entries into one entry and deleted "exporting;from.."Importing and Exporting Data in Base -An easy method to import and export database tables uses Calc as a "helper application". -Exporting data from Base -You copy a table from Base to a new Calc sheet, then you can save or export the data to any file format that Calc supports. +An easy method to import and export database tables uses Calc as a "helper application". +Exporting data from Base +You copy a table from Base to a new Calc sheet, then you can save or export the data to any file format that Calc supports. -Open the database file that contains the database table to be exported. Click Tables to view the tables, or click Queries to view the queries. +Open the database file that contains the database table to be exported. Click Tables to view the tables, or click Queries to view the queries. -Choose File - New - Spreadsheet. +Choose File - New - Spreadsheet. -In the Base window, right-click the name of the table to export. Choose Copy from the context menu. +In the Base window, right-click the name of the table to export. Choose Copy from the context menu. -Click cell A1 in the new Calc window, then choose Edit - Paste. +Click cell A1 in the new Calc window, then choose Edit - Paste. -Now you can save or export the data to many file types. -Importing data to Base -You can import text files, spreadsheet files, and your system address book in read-only mode only. -When you import from a text or spreadsheet file, the file must have a first row of header information. The second row of the file is the first valid data row. The format of every field in the second row determines the format for the entire column. Any format information from a spreadsheet file gets lost when importing to Base. -For example, to ensure the first column has a text format, you must make sure that the first field of the first valid data row contains text. If a field in the first valid data row contains a number, the whole column is set to number format, and only numbers, no text, will be shown in that column. +Now you can save or export the data to many file types. +Importing data to Base +You can import text files, spreadsheet files, and your system address book in read-only mode only. +When you import from a text or spreadsheet file, the file must have a first row of header information. The second row of the file is the first valid data row. The format of every field in the second row determines the format for the entire column. Any format information from a spreadsheet file gets lost when importing to Base. +For example, to ensure the first column has a text format, you must make sure that the first field of the first valid data row contains text. If a field in the first valid data row contains a number, the whole column is set to number format, and only numbers, no text, will be shown in that column. -Open a Base file of the database type that you want. -Either create a new Base file using the Database Wizard, or open any existing Base file that is not read-only. +Open a Base file of the database type that you want. +Either create a new Base file using the Database Wizard, or open any existing Base file that is not read-only. -Open the Calc file that contains the data to be imported to Base. You can open a *.dbf dBASE file or many other file types. +Open the Calc file that contains the data to be imported to Base. You can open a *.dbf dBASE file or many other file types. -Select the data to be copied to Base. -You can enter a range reference like A1:X500 in the Name Box if you don't want to scroll. -If you copy a dBASE sheet, include the top row that contains the header data. +Select the data to be copied to Base. +You can enter a range reference like A1:X500 in the Name Box if you don't want to scroll. +If you copy a dBASE sheet, include the top row that contains the header data. -Choose Edit - Copy. +Choose Edit - Copy. -In the Base window, click Tables to view the tables. +In the Base window, click Tables to view the tables. -In the Base window, choose Edit - Paste. +In the Base window, choose Edit - Paste. -You see the Copy Table dialog. Most databases need a primary key, so you may want to check the Create primary key box. +You see the Copy Table dialog. Most databases need a primary key, so you may want to check the Create primary key box. -On Windows systems, you can also use drag-and-drop instead of Copy and Paste. Also, for registered databases, you can open the datasource browser (press F4) instead of opening the Base window. +On Windows systems, you can also use drag-and-drop instead of Copy and Paste. Also, for registered databases, you can open the datasource browser (press F4) instead of opening the Base window.
- + - + ufi: removed switches for calc diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/data_new.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/data_new.xhp index adaf01642b..8cd01d6c82 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/data_new.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/data_new.xhp @@ -33,23 +33,23 @@ databases;creating new databases mw deleted "creating;" -Creating a New Database +Creating a New Database -Choose File - New - Database. -This opens the Database Wizard, where you create a new database file. +Choose File - New - Database. +This opens the Database Wizard, where you create a new database file. -In the Database Wizard, select the type of database, and select the option to open the Table Wizard as the next wizard. -The Table Wizard helps you to add a table to the new database file. +In the Database Wizard, select the type of database, and select the option to open the Table Wizard as the next wizard. +The Table Wizard helps you to add a table to the new database file.
- + - +
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/data_queries.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/data_queries.xhp index 8bdee8b842..215b433f5b 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/data_queries.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/data_queries.xhp @@ -37,40 +37,40 @@ wizards;database queries Query Wizard (Base) MW added (Base) to 3 entries -Working with Queries +Working with Queries -If you often want to access only a subset of your data that can be well defined by a filter condition, you can define a query. This is basically a name for the new view at the filtered data. You open the query and see the current data in the table layout that you defined. -Creating a New Query With the Query Wizard -In %PRODUCTNAME you can create a new query using the Query Wizard: +If you often want to access only a subset of your data that can be well defined by a filter condition, you can define a query. This is basically a name for the new view at the filtered data. You open the query and see the current data in the table layout that you defined. +Creating a New Query With the Query Wizard +In %PRODUCTNAME you can create a new query using the Query Wizard: -Open the database file where you want to create the new query. +Open the database file where you want to create the new query. -In the left pane of the database window, click the Queries icon. +In the left pane of the database window, click the Queries icon. -Click Use Wizard to Create Query. +Click Use Wizard to Create Query. -Creating a New Query With the Design View +Creating a New Query With the Design View -Open the database file where you want to create the new query. +Open the database file where you want to create the new query. -In the left pane of the database window, click the Queries icon. +In the left pane of the database window, click the Queries icon. -Click Create Query in Design View. +Click Create Query in Design View. -You see the Query Design window. +You see the Query Design window.
- + - +
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/data_register.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/data_register.xhp index ee11640baa..962c1342a2 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/data_register.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/data_register.xhp @@ -33,32 +33,32 @@ deleting;databases (Base) databases;deleting (Base) lists;registered databases (Base) -mw deleted "removing;...". New entry "lists;" from shared/optionen/01160200.xhpRegistering and Deleting a Database +mw deleted "removing;...". New entry "lists;" from shared/optionen/01160200.xhpRegistering and Deleting a Database -Data from any database file can be registered to %PRODUCTNAME. To register means to tell %PRODUCTNAME where the data is located, how it is organized, how to get that data, and more. Once the database is registered, you can use the menu command View - Data source to access the data records from your text documents and spreadsheets. -To register an existing database file: +Data from any database file can be registered to %PRODUCTNAME. To register means to tell %PRODUCTNAME where the data is located, how it is organized, how to get that data, and more. Once the database is registered, you can use the menu command View - Data source to access the data records from your text documents and spreadsheets. +To register an existing database file: -Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases. -Click New and select the database file.i60224 +Click New and select the database file.i60224 -To remove a registered database from %PRODUCTNAME +To remove a registered database from %PRODUCTNAME -Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases. -Select the database file and click Delete. +Select the database file and click Delete.
- + - +
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/data_report.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/data_report.xhp index b893ce87c1..9c214e430f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/data_report.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/data_report.xhp @@ -37,40 +37,40 @@ templates;database reports reports;templates - -Using and Editing Database Reports + +Using and Editing Database Reports -Using a Report -%PRODUCTNAME stores the information about the created reports in the database file. +Using a Report +%PRODUCTNAME stores the information about the created reports in the database file. -Choose File - Open and select the database file. +Choose File - Open and select the database file. -In the database file window, click the Reports icon. +In the database file window, click the Reports icon. -Double-click one of the report names to open the report. -These links are added automatically when you create a new report by the Report Wizard or in the Report Builder window. +Double-click one of the report names to open the report. +These links are added automatically when you create a new report by the Report Wizard or in the Report Builder window. -Editing a Report Created in the Report Builder Window +Editing a Report Created in the Report Builder Window -Right-click the name of a report in the database file window, then choose Edit. +Right-click the name of a report in the database file window, then choose Edit. -The Report Builder window opens with the report's information loaded. -Use the toolbars and menu commands and drag-and-drop to edit the report as stated in the Report Builder guide. -Execute the report to see the resulting report document. -Editing a Report Created by the Report Wizard +The Report Builder window opens with the report's information loaded. +Use the toolbars and menu commands and drag-and-drop to edit the report as stated in the Report Builder guide. +Execute the report to see the resulting report document. +Editing a Report Created by the Report Wizard -On the last dialog page of the Report Wizard, you can choose to edit the report template before you use the report. +On the last dialog page of the Report Wizard, you can choose to edit the report template before you use the report. -You can edit the page styles for the first page and the following pages of the report as well as the paragraph styles, the number formats, the printed field labels, and more. -Unless you have a thorough understanding of the database the report accesses, do not edit the SQL statement, database name, the hidden form controls, or the related information on the report. +You can edit the page styles for the first page and the following pages of the report as well as the paragraph styles, the number formats, the printed field labels, and more. +Unless you have a thorough understanding of the database the report accesses, do not edit the SQL statement, database name, the hidden form controls, or the related information on the report. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/data_reports.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/data_reports.xhp index 76f95e3558..33c1b18bd9 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/data_reports.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/data_reports.xhp @@ -33,104 +33,104 @@ reports;creating wizards;reports -Creating Reports +Creating Reports -A report is a Writer text document that can show your data in an organized order and formatting. In %PRODUCTNAME Base, you have a choice to create a report either manually using drag-and-drop in the Report Builder window, or semi-automatic by following a series of dialogs in the Report Wizard. -The following list gives you some information to decide which method to use for your data: +A report is a Writer text document that can show your data in an organized order and formatting. In %PRODUCTNAME Base, you have a choice to create a report either manually using drag-and-drop in the Report Builder window, or semi-automatic by following a series of dialogs in the Report Wizard. +The following list gives you some information to decide which method to use for your data: -Report Builder +Report Builder -Report Wizard +Report Wizard -Started by "Create Report in Design View" command. +Started by "Create Report in Design View" command. -Started by "Use Wizard to Create Report" command. +Started by "Use Wizard to Create Report" command. -Full flexibility to use report headers and footers, page headers and footers, multi-column reports. +Full flexibility to use report headers and footers, page headers and footers, multi-column reports. -Uses a Writer template to generate a report document. +Uses a Writer template to generate a report document. -Use drag-and-drop to position the record fields or other design elements like pictures or lines. +Use drag-and-drop to position the record fields or other design elements like pictures or lines. -Select from several given choices to arrange the data records. +Select from several given choices to arrange the data records. -Generates a one-time snapshot of the data. To see an updated report, execute the same report again to create a Writer document with the updated data. +Generates a one-time snapshot of the data. To see an updated report, execute the same report again to create a Writer document with the updated data. -You can choose to generate a one-time snapshot with fixed data, or a "live" report with links to the current data at the time when you open the Base file. +You can choose to generate a one-time snapshot with fixed data, or a "live" report with links to the current data at the time when you open the Base file. -Saves the report as a Writer text document. Stores the information how to create the report inside the Base file. +Saves the report as a Writer text document. Stores the information how to create the report inside the Base file. -Saves the report and the information how to create the report inside the Base file. +Saves the report and the information how to create the report inside the Base file. -Choose Open in the context menu or double-click the report name to create a new report with the current data. +Choose Open in the context menu or double-click the report name to create a new report with the current data. -Choose Open in the context menu or double-click the report name to either see again the static snapshot of the data from first creation time, or to create a new report with the current data. This depends on your choice on the last page of the wizard. +Choose Open in the context menu or double-click the report name to either see again the static snapshot of the data from first creation time, or to create a new report with the current data. This depends on your choice on the last page of the wizard. -Choose Edit in the context menu of a report name to open the Report Builder window, with the report's information loaded. +Choose Edit in the context menu of a report name to open the Report Builder window, with the report's information loaded. -Choose Edit in the context menu of a report name to edit the Writer template file that was used to create the report. +Choose Edit in the context menu of a report name to edit the Writer template file that was used to create the report.
-Creating a New Report Manually In Design View +Creating a New Report Manually In Design View -Open the database file where you want to create the new report. +Open the database file where you want to create the new report. -In the left pane of the database window, click the Reports icon. +In the left pane of the database window, click the Reports icon. -Click Create Report in Design View. +Click Create Report in Design View. -Follow the instructions in the Report Builder guide. +Follow the instructions in the Report Builder guide. -Creating a New Report With the Report Wizard +Creating a New Report With the Report Wizard -Open the database file where you want to create the new report. +Open the database file where you want to create the new report. -In the left pane of the database window, click the Reports icon. +In the left pane of the database window, click the Reports icon. -Click Use Wizard to Create Report. +Click Use Wizard to Create Report. -Follow the steps of the Report Wizard to create the report. +Follow the steps of the Report Wizard to create the report.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/data_search.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/data_search.xhp index ae80783f85..9356b22a20 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/data_search.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/data_search.xhp @@ -34,22 +34,22 @@ forms;finding records searching;tables and forms -Searching Tables and Form Documents +Searching Tables and Form Documents - + Icon -In spreadsheets and documents in which form controls are used, you can click the Find Record icon on the form bar to open a dialog to find any text and values. +In spreadsheets and documents in which form controls are used, you can click the Find Record icon on the form bar to open a dialog to find any text and values.
-You can search in one or in all data fields. You can select whether the text must be at the beginning, end or any location of the data field. You also can use the ? and * wildcards, as in the Find & Replace dialog. You can find additional information about the database search function in the $[officename] Help. +You can search in one or in all data fields. You can select whether the text must be at the beginning, end or any location of the data field. You also can use the ? and * wildcards, as in the Find & Replace dialog. You can find additional information about the database search function in the $[officename] Help. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/data_search2.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/data_search2.xhp index 9f5c59953b..b5f2bc506c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/data_search2.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/data_search2.xhp @@ -37,36 +37,36 @@ data;filtering in forms forms; filtering data data, see also values -MW inserted a cross-referenceSearching With a Form Filter +MW inserted a cross-referenceSearching With a Form Filter -Open a form document that contains database fields. -As an example, open an empty text document and press F4. Open the bibliography database table biblio in the data source view. While pressing Shift+CommandCtrl, drag a few column headers into the document so that the form fields are created. +Open a form document that contains database fields. +As an example, open an empty text document and press F4. Open the bibliography database table biblio in the data source view. While pressing Shift+CommandCtrl, drag a few column headers into the document so that the form fields are created. -On the Form Controls toolbar, click the Design Mode On/Off icon +On the Form Controls toolbar, click the Design Mode On/Off icon Icon to turn off the design mode. -On the Form Navigation toolbar, click the Form-Based Filters icon +On the Form Navigation toolbar, click the Form-Based Filters icon Icon . The current document is displayed with its form controls as an empty edit mask. The Form Filter toolbar appears. -Enter the filter conditions into one or several fields. Note that if you enter filter conditions into several fields, all of the entered conditions must match (Boolean AND). +Enter the filter conditions into one or several fields. Note that if you enter filter conditions into several fields, all of the entered conditions must match (Boolean AND). -More information about wildcards and operators can be found in Query Design. +More information about wildcards and operators can be found in Query Design. -If you click the Apply Form-Based Filter icon on the Form Filter toolbar, the filter will be applied. You see the Form Navigation toolbar and can browse through the found records. +If you click the Apply Form-Based Filter icon on the Form Filter toolbar, the filter will be applied. You see the Form Navigation toolbar and can browse through the found records. -If you click on the Close button on the Form Filter toolbar, the form is displayed without a filter. -Click the Apply Filter icon +If you click on the Close button on the Form Filter toolbar, the form is displayed without a filter. +Click the Apply Filter icon Icon on the Form Navigation toolbar to change to the filtered view. -The filter that has been set can be removed by clicking Reset Filter/Sort icon +The filter that has been set can be removed by clicking Reset Filter/Sort icon Icon . diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/data_tabledefine.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/data_tabledefine.xhp index 0158a6f657..2211fa7966 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/data_tabledefine.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/data_tabledefine.xhp @@ -34,33 +34,30 @@ AutoValue (Base) primary keys;design view MW deleted "database tables;" and changed "tables in databases;"UFI added AutoValue and Primary Key entry - i48831MW changed Tables in databases, AutoValue and Primary Key entries - - Table Design + + Table Design - This section contains information about how to create a new database table in the design view. - Open the database file of the database where you want a new table. Click the Tables icon. Choose Create Table in Design View to create a new table. - In the Design view, you can now create the fields for your table. + This section contains information about how to create a new database table in the design view. + Open the database file of the database where you want a new table. Click the Tables icon. Choose Create Table in Design View to create a new table. + In the Design view, you can now create the fields for your table. - Enter new fields in rows from top to bottom. Click the Field Name cell and enter a field name for each data field. + Enter new fields in rows from top to bottom. Click the Field Name cell and enter a field name for each data field. - Include a "primary key" data field. Base needs a primary key to be able to edit the table contents. A primary key has unique contents for each data record. For example, insert a numerical field, right-click the first column, and choose Primary Key from the context menu. Set AutoValue to "Yes", so Base can automatically increment the value for each new record. + Include a "primary key" data field. Base needs a primary key to be able to edit the table contents. A primary key has unique contents for each data record. For example, insert a numerical field, right-click the first column, and choose Primary Key from the context menu. Set AutoValue to "Yes", so Base can automatically increment the value for each new record. - In the next cell to the right, define the Field Type. When you click in the cell, you can select a field type in the combo box. + In the next cell to the right, define the Field Type. When you click in the cell, you can select a field type in the combo box. - Each field can only accept data corresponding to the specified field type. For example, it is not possible to enter text in a number field. Memo fields in dBASE III format are references to internally-managed text files which can hold up to 64KB text. - You can enter an optional Description for each field. The text of the description will appear as a tip on the column headings in the table view. - Field Properties - Enter properties for each selected data field. Depending on the database type, some input facilities may not be available. - In the Default value box, enter the default contents for every new record. This contents can be edited later. - In the Entry required box, specify whether or not the field may remain empty. - For the Length box, a combo box may be shown that provides the available choices. + Each field can only accept data corresponding to the specified field type. For example, it is not possible to enter text in a number field. Memo fields in dBASE III format are references to internally-managed text files which can hold up to 64KB text. + You can enter an optional Description for each field. The text of the description will appear as a tip on the column headings in the table view. + Field Properties + Enter properties for each selected data field. Depending on the database type, some input facilities may not be available. + In the Default value box, enter the default contents for every new record. This contents can be edited later. + In the Entry required box, specify whether or not the field may remain empty. + For the Length box, a combo box may be shown that provides the available choices. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/data_tables.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/data_tables.xhp index 1da0c00ed1..e19db0f94e 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/data_tables.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/data_tables.xhp @@ -34,54 +34,54 @@ databases;creating tables table views of databases mw changed" database tables;" to "tables in databases;" -Working with Tables +Working with Tables -Data is stored in tables. As an example, your system address book that you use for your e-mail addresses is a table of the address book database. Each address is a data record, presented as a row in that table. The data records consist of data fields, for example the first and the last name fields and the e-mail field. -Creating a New Table With the Table Wizard -In %PRODUCTNAME you can create a new table using the Table Wizard: +Data is stored in tables. As an example, your system address book that you use for your e-mail addresses is a table of the address book database. Each address is a data record, presented as a row in that table. The data records consist of data fields, for example the first and the last name fields and the e-mail field. +Creating a New Table With the Table Wizard +In %PRODUCTNAME you can create a new table using the Table Wizard: -Open the database file where you want to create the new table. +Open the database file where you want to create the new table. -In the left pane of the database window, click the Tables icon. +In the left pane of the database window, click the Tables icon. -Click Use Wizard to Create Table. +Click Use Wizard to Create Table. -Creating a New Table With the Design View +Creating a New Table With the Design View -Open the database file where you want to create the new table. +Open the database file where you want to create the new table. -In the left pane of the database window, click the Tables icon. +In the left pane of the database window, click the Tables icon. -Click Create Table in Design View. +Click Create Table in Design View. -You see the Table Design window. -Creating a New Table View -Some database types support table views. A table view is a query that is stored with the database. For most database operations, a view can be used as you would use a table. +You see the Table Design window. +Creating a New Table View +Some database types support table views. A table view is a query that is stored with the database. For most database operations, a view can be used as you would use a table. -Open the database file where you want to create the new table view. +Open the database file where you want to create the new table view. -In the left pane of the database window, click the Tables icon. +In the left pane of the database window, click the Tables icon. -Click Create Table View. +Click Create Table View. -You see the View Design window, which is almost the same as the Query Design window. +You see the View Design window, which is almost the same as the Query Design window.
- + - +
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/data_view.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/data_view.xhp index 6fb55467b7..787afe62be 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/data_view.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/data_view.xhp @@ -35,24 +35,24 @@ data sources;viewing databases;viewing -Viewing a Database +Viewing a Database -There are two different methods of viewing a database in %PRODUCTNAME. +There are two different methods of viewing a database in %PRODUCTNAME. -Choose File - Open to open the database file. -The database file gives you full access to tables, queries, reports, and forms. You can edit the structure of your tables and change the contents of the data records. +Choose File - Open to open the database file. +The database file gives you full access to tables, queries, reports, and forms. You can edit the structure of your tables and change the contents of the data records. -Choose View - Data source to view the registered databases. -The data source view can be used to drag-and-drop table fields from registered databases into your documents and to produce mail merges. +Choose View - Data source to view the registered databases. +The data source view can be used to drag-and-drop table fields from registered databases into your documents and to produce mail merges.
- + - +
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/database_main.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/database_main.xhp index f0c71b5162..1ab5891ed3 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/database_main.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/database_main.xhp @@ -35,29 +35,29 @@ data source explorer explorer of data sources - -Database Overview + +Database Overview remove this file when all links are resolved -Working with databases in %PRODUCTNAME -Data Source View -Choose View - Data Sources or press F4 to call the data source view from a text document or spreadsheet. -On the left you can see the Data source explorer. If you select a table or query there, you see the contents of this table or query on the right. At the top margin is the Table Data bar. -Data Sources -Address book as data source -View data source contents -Menu bar of a database file -Forms and Reports -Create new form document, edit form controls, Form Wizard -Entering data versus editing form -Report Wizard +Working with databases in %PRODUCTNAME +Data Source View +Choose View - Data Sources or press F4 to call the data source view from a text document or spreadsheet. +On the left you can see the Data source explorer. If you select a table or query there, you see the contents of this table or query on the right. At the top margin is the Table Data bar. +Data Sources +Address book as data source +View data source contents +Menu bar of a database file +Forms and Reports +Create new form document, edit form controls, Form Wizard +Entering data versus editing form +Report Wizard -Queries -Create new query or table view, edit query structure -Query Wizard -Enter, edit and copy records -Tables -Create new table, edit table structure, index, relations -Table Wizard -Enter, edit and copy records +Queries +Create new query or table view, edit query structure +Query Wizard +Enter, edit and copy records +Tables +Create new table, edit table structure, index, relations +Table Wizard +Enter, edit and copy records diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/digital_signatures.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/digital_signatures.xhp index eb85aef7bb..2989cda8d3 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/digital_signatures.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/digital_signatures.xhp @@ -30,79 +30,79 @@ digital signatures;overview security;digital signatures mw moved 1 entry to digitalsign_send.xhp and made "digital signatures" a two level entry and added a new entry -About Digital Signatures +About Digital Signatures - In %PRODUCTNAME, you can digitally sign your documents and macros. - Certificates - To sign a document digitally, you need a personal key, the certificate. A personal key is stored on your computer as a combination of a private key, which must be kept secret, and a public key, which you add to your documents when you sign them. - Save and sign the document - When you apply a digital signature to a document, a kind of checksum is computed from the document's content plus your personal key. The checksum and your public key are stored together with the document. - Open a signed document - When someone later opens the document on any computer with a recent version of %PRODUCTNAME, the program will compute the checksum again and compare it with the stored checksum. If both are the same, the program will signal that you see the original, unchanged document. In addition, the program can show you the public key information from the certificate. - You can compare the public key with the public key that is published on the web site of the certificate authority. - Whenever someone changes something in the document, this change breaks the digital signature. After the change, there will be no sign that you see the original document. - The result of the signature validation is displayed in the status bar and within the Digital Signature dialog. Several documents and macro signatures can exist inside an ODF document. If there is a problem with one signature, then the validation result of that one signature is assumed for all signatures. That is, if there are ten valid signatures and one invalid signature, then the status bar and the status field in the dialog will flag the signature as invalid. - You can see any of the following icons and messages when you open a signed document. + In %PRODUCTNAME, you can digitally sign your documents and macros. + Certificates + To sign a document digitally, you need a personal key, the certificate. A personal key is stored on your computer as a combination of a private key, which must be kept secret, and a public key, which you add to your documents when you sign them. + Save and sign the document + When you apply a digital signature to a document, a kind of checksum is computed from the document's content plus your personal key. The checksum and your public key are stored together with the document. + Open a signed document + When someone later opens the document on any computer with a recent version of %PRODUCTNAME, the program will compute the checksum again and compare it with the stored checksum. If both are the same, the program will signal that you see the original, unchanged document. In addition, the program can show you the public key information from the certificate. + You can compare the public key with the public key that is published on the web site of the certificate authority. + Whenever someone changes something in the document, this change breaks the digital signature. After the change, there will be no sign that you see the original document. + The result of the signature validation is displayed in the status bar and within the Digital Signature dialog. Several documents and macro signatures can exist inside an ODF document. If there is a problem with one signature, then the validation result of that one signature is assumed for all signatures. That is, if there are ten valid signatures and one invalid signature, then the status bar and the status field in the dialog will flag the signature as invalid. + You can see any of the following icons and messages when you open a signed document. - Icon in Status bar + Icon in Status bar - Signature status + Signature status - + Icon - The signature is valid. + The signature is valid. - + Icon - The signature is OK, but the certificates could not be validated. - The signature and the certificate are OK, but not all parts of the document are signed. (For documents that were signed with old versions of the software, see note below.) + The signature is OK, but the certificates could not be validated. + The signature and the certificate are OK, but not all parts of the document are signed. (For documents that were signed with old versions of the software, see note below.) - + Icon - The signature is invalid. + The signature is invalid.
- Signatures and software versions - The signing of contents got changed with OpenOffice.org 3.2 and StarOffice 9.2. Now all contents of the files, except the signature file itself (META-INF/documentsignatures.xml) are signed. - When you sign a document with OpenOffice.org 3.2 or StarOffice 9.2 or a later version, and you open that document in an older version of the software, the signature will be displayed as "invalid". Signatures created with older versions of the software will be marked with "only parts of the document is signed" when loaded in the newer software. - When you sign an OOXML document, then the signature will be always marked with "only parts of the document is signed". Metadata of OOXML files are never signed, to be compatible with Microsoft Office. - When you sign a PDF document, then this marking is not used. Signing only parts of the document is simply an invalid signature. - Signing other document formats is not supported at the moment. - When you load an ODF document, you might see an icon in the status bar and the status field in the dialog that indicates that the document is only partially signed. This status will appear when the signature and certificate are valid, but they were created with a version of OpenOffice.org before 3.2 or StarOffice before 9.2. In versions of OpenOffice.org before 3.0 or StarOffice before 9.0, the document signature was applied to the main contents, pictures and embedded objects only and some contents, like macros, were not signed. In OpenOffice.org 3.0 and StarOffice 9.0 the document signature was applied to most content, including macros. However, the mimetype and the content of the META-INF folder were not signed. And in OpenOffice.org 3.2, StarOffice 9.2, and all versions of LibreOffice all contents, except the signature file itself (META-INF/documentsignatures.xml), are signed. - Security Warnings - When you receive a signed document, and the software reports that the signature is valid, this does not mean that you can be absolutely sure that the document is the same that the sender has sent. Signing documents with software certificates is not a perfectly secure method. Numerous ways are possible to circumvent the security features. - Example: Think about someone who wants to camouflage his identity to be a sender from your bank. He can easily get a certificate using a false name, then send you any signed e-mail pretending he is working for your bank. You will get that e-mail, and the e-mail or the document within has the "valid signed" icon. - Do not trust the icon. Inspect and verify the certificates. - The validation of a signature is not a legally binding guarantee of any kind. - On Windows operating systems, the Windows features of validating a signature are used. On Solaris and Linux systems, files that are supplied by Thunderbird, Mozilla or Firefox are used. You must ensure that the files that are in use within your system are really the original files that were supplied by the original developers. For malevolent intruders, there are numerous ways to replace original files with other files that they supply. - The messages about validation of a signature that you see in %PRODUCTNAME are the messages that the validation files return. The %PRODUCTNAME software has no way to ensure that the messages reflect the true status of any certificate. The %PRODUCTNAME software only displays the messages that other files that are not under control of %PRODUCTNAME report. There is no legal responsibility of %PRODUCTNAME that the displayed messages reflect the true status of a digital signature. + Signatures and software versions + The signing of contents got changed with OpenOffice.org 3.2 and StarOffice 9.2. Now all contents of the files, except the signature file itself (META-INF/documentsignatures.xml) are signed. + When you sign a document with OpenOffice.org 3.2 or StarOffice 9.2 or a later version, and you open that document in an older version of the software, the signature will be displayed as "invalid". Signatures created with older versions of the software will be marked with "only parts of the document is signed" when loaded in the newer software. + When you sign an OOXML document, then the signature will be always marked with "only parts of the document is signed". Metadata of OOXML files are never signed, to be compatible with Microsoft Office. + When you sign a PDF document, then this marking is not used. Signing only parts of the document is simply an invalid signature. + Signing other document formats is not supported at the moment. + When you load an ODF document, you might see an icon in the status bar and the status field in the dialog that indicates that the document is only partially signed. This status will appear when the signature and certificate are valid, but they were created with a version of OpenOffice.org before 3.2 or StarOffice before 9.2. In versions of OpenOffice.org before 3.0 or StarOffice before 9.0, the document signature was applied to the main contents, pictures and embedded objects only and some contents, like macros, were not signed. In OpenOffice.org 3.0 and StarOffice 9.0 the document signature was applied to most content, including macros. However, the mimetype and the content of the META-INF folder were not signed. And in OpenOffice.org 3.2, StarOffice 9.2, and all versions of LibreOffice all contents, except the signature file itself (META-INF/documentsignatures.xml), are signed. + Security Warnings + When you receive a signed document, and the software reports that the signature is valid, this does not mean that you can be absolutely sure that the document is the same that the sender has sent. Signing documents with software certificates is not a perfectly secure method. Numerous ways are possible to circumvent the security features. + Example: Think about someone who wants to camouflage his identity to be a sender from your bank. He can easily get a certificate using a false name, then send you any signed e-mail pretending he is working for your bank. You will get that e-mail, and the e-mail or the document within has the "valid signed" icon. + Do not trust the icon. Inspect and verify the certificates. + The validation of a signature is not a legally binding guarantee of any kind. + On Windows operating systems, the Windows features of validating a signature are used. On Solaris and Linux systems, files that are supplied by Thunderbird, Mozilla or Firefox are used. You must ensure that the files that are in use within your system are really the original files that were supplied by the original developers. For malevolent intruders, there are numerous ways to replace original files with other files that they supply. + The messages about validation of a signature that you see in %PRODUCTNAME are the messages that the validation files return. The %PRODUCTNAME software has no way to ensure that the messages reflect the true status of any certificate. The %PRODUCTNAME software only displays the messages that other files that are not under control of %PRODUCTNAME report. There is no legal responsibility of %PRODUCTNAME that the displayed messages reflect the true status of a digital signature.
- English Wiki page on digital signatures - Applying digital signatures - Opening a document using WebDAV over HTTPS + English Wiki page on digital signatures + Applying digital signatures + Opening a document using WebDAV over HTTPS
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp index 9e7e6daad4..9af65030f1 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp @@ -37,56 +37,56 @@ digital signatures;WebDAV over HTTPS mw added 3 index entries - Opening a Document Using WebDAV over HTTPS + Opening a Document Using WebDAV over HTTPS MW created this file by splitting shared/guide/digital_signatures.xhp - In %PRODUCTNAME, you can open and save documents that are stored on a WebDAV server, using the secure HTTPS protocol. - You must use the %PRODUCTNAME file dialogs to use WebDAV over HTTPS. + In %PRODUCTNAME, you can open and save documents that are stored on a WebDAV server, using the secure HTTPS protocol. + You must use the %PRODUCTNAME file dialogs to use WebDAV over HTTPS. - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General. Ensure that Use %PRODUCTNAME dialogs is enabled. Click OK to close the dialog box. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General. Ensure that Use %PRODUCTNAME dialogs is enabled. Click OK to close the dialog box. - Choose File - Open. + Choose File - Open. - In the File name box, enter the path to the WebDAV folder. For example, enter https://192.168.1.1/webfolder to open a secure connection to the WebDAV server at the IP address 192.168.1.1, and to list the contents of the webfolder folder. + In the File name box, enter the path to the WebDAV folder. For example, enter https://192.168.1.1/webfolder to open a secure connection to the WebDAV server at the IP address 192.168.1.1, and to list the contents of the webfolder folder. - The first time you connect to a WebDAV server, you see the "Website Certified by an Unknown Authority" dialog. - You should click the Examine Certificate button and examine the certificate. - If you accept the certificate, choose "Accept this certificate temporarily for this session" and click OK. Now you can open and save files from the WebDAV server without further questions, until you exit %PRODUCTNAME. - If you do not trust the certificate, click Cancel. + The first time you connect to a WebDAV server, you see the "Website Certified by an Unknown Authority" dialog. + You should click the Examine Certificate button and examine the certificate. + If you accept the certificate, choose "Accept this certificate temporarily for this session" and click OK. Now you can open and save files from the WebDAV server without further questions, until you exit %PRODUCTNAME. + If you do not trust the certificate, click Cancel. - If you did accept the certificate, you can now select the file name or file names you want to open and click Open. + If you did accept the certificate, you can now select the file name or file names you want to open and click Open. - If there is a mismatch of the domain name given in the certificate and the domain name you entered in the file dialog, then you see a dialog that allows you to choose from any of the following options: + If there is a mismatch of the domain name given in the certificate and the domain name you entered in the file dialog, then you see a dialog that allows you to choose from any of the following options: - View Certificate - Opens the View Certificate dialog. + View Certificate - Opens the View Certificate dialog. - Continue - If you are sure both domains are the same, click the Continue button. - Cancel Connection - Cancels the connection. - If you click Continue, you may see a dialog that asks you to enter your user name and password. + Continue - If you are sure both domains are the same, click the Continue button. + Cancel Connection - Cancels the connection. + If you click Continue, you may see a dialog that asks you to enter your user name and password. user name - Enter your user name to log on to the WebDAV server. + Enter your user name to log on to the WebDAV server. password - Enter your password. + Enter your password. remember password till end of session - If you enable Remember password till end of session, your password will be remembered for subsequent WebDAV connections until you exit %PRODUCTNAME. + If you enable Remember password till end of session, your password will be remembered for subsequent WebDAV connections until you exit %PRODUCTNAME.
- English Wiki page on digital signatures - About digital signatures + English Wiki page on digital signatures + About digital signatures
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp index 728e4ab6fa..0fd9cc5f09 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp @@ -30,76 +30,76 @@ signing documents with digital signatures digital signatures;getting/managing/applying mw transferred one entry from digital_signatures.xhp and added a new entry -Applying Digital Signatures +Applying Digital Signatures MW created this file by splitting shared/guide/digital_signatures.xhp -Getting a Certificate -You can get a certificate from a certification authority. No matter if you choose a governmental institution or a private company it is common to be charged for this service, for example when they certify your identity. Few other authorities issue certificates free of costs, like the Open Source Project CAcert which is based on the well-known and reliable Web of Trust model and is of growing popularity. - Managing your Certificates +Getting a Certificate +You can get a certificate from a certification authority. No matter if you choose a governmental institution or a private company it is common to be charged for this service, for example when they certify your identity. Few other authorities issue certificates free of costs, like the Open Source Project CAcert which is based on the well-known and reliable Web of Trust model and is of growing popularity. + Managing your Certificates -If you are using Microsoft Windows, you can manage your certificates from the Control Panel applet "Internet Options" on the "Contents" tab page. - Import your new root certificate into the Trusted Root Certification Authorities list. +If you are using Microsoft Windows, you can manage your certificates from the Control Panel applet "Internet Options" on the "Contents" tab page. + Import your new root certificate into the Trusted Root Certification Authorities list. -If you are using Solaris or Linux, you must install a recent version of Thunderbird or Firefox to install some system files that are needed for encryption.how about Mac OS X? - If you have created different profiles in Thunderbird or Firefox, and you want %PRODUCTNAME to use one specified profile for certificates, then you can set the environment variable MOZILLA_CERTIFICATE_FOLDER to point to the folder of that specified profile. +If you are using Solaris or Linux, you must install a recent version of Thunderbird or Firefox to install some system files that are needed for encryption.how about Mac OS X? + If you have created different profiles in Thunderbird or Firefox, and you want %PRODUCTNAME to use one specified profile for certificates, then you can set the environment variable MOZILLA_CERTIFICATE_FOLDER to point to the folder of that specified profile. - Open your web browser’s preferences, select the Advanced section, click on the Certificates tab, and then choose View Certificates. The Certificate Manager dialog will appear. + Open your web browser’s preferences, select the Advanced section, click on the Certificates tab, and then choose View Certificates. The Certificate Manager dialog will appear. - Import your new root certificate, then select and edit the certificate. Enable the root certificate to be trusted at least for web and email access. This ensures that the certificate can sign your documents. You may edit any intermediate certificate in the same way, but it is not mandatory for signing documents. + Import your new root certificate, then select and edit the certificate. Enable the root certificate to be trusted at least for web and email access. This ensures that the certificate can sign your documents. You may edit any intermediate certificate in the same way, but it is not mandatory for signing documents. - When you have edited the new certificates, restart %PRODUCTNAME. + When you have edited the new certificates, restart %PRODUCTNAME. -Signing a document +Signing a document - Choose File - Digital Signatures - Digital Signatures. + Choose File - Digital Signatures - Digital Signatures. - A message box advises you to save the document. Click Yes to save the file. + A message box advises you to save the document. Click Yes to save the file. - After saving, you see the Digital Signatures dialog. Click Add to add a public key to the document. + After saving, you see the Digital Signatures dialog. Click Add to add a public key to the document. - In the Select Certificate dialog, select your certificate and click OK. + In the Select Certificate dialog, select your certificate and click OK. - You see again the Digital Signatures dialog, where you can add more certificates if you want. Click OK to add the public key to the saved file. + You see again the Digital Signatures dialog, where you can add more certificates if you want. Click OK to add the public key to the saved file. - A signed document shows an icon + A signed document shows an icon Icon in the status bar. You can double-click the icon in the status bar to view the certificate. - The result of the signature validation is displayed in the status bar and within the Digital Signature dialog. Several documents and macro signatures can exist inside an ODF document. If there is a problem with one signature, then the validation result of that one signature is assumed for all signatures. That is, if there are ten valid signatures and one invalid signature, then the status bar and the status field in the dialog will flag the signature as invalid. - Signing the macros inside a document - Normally, macros are part of a document. If you sign a document, the macros inside the document are signed automatically. If you want to sign only the macros, but not the document, proceed as follows: + The result of the signature validation is displayed in the status bar and within the Digital Signature dialog. Several documents and macro signatures can exist inside an ODF document. If there is a problem with one signature, then the validation result of that one signature is assumed for all signatures. That is, if there are ten valid signatures and one invalid signature, then the status bar and the status field in the dialog will flag the signature as invalid. + Signing the macros inside a document + Normally, macros are part of a document. If you sign a document, the macros inside the document are signed automatically. If you want to sign only the macros, but not the document, proceed as follows: - Choose Tools - Macros - Digital Signature. + Choose Tools - Macros - Digital Signature. - Apply the signature as described above for documents. + Apply the signature as described above for documents. - When you open the Basic IDE that contains signed macros, you see an icon + When you open the Basic IDE that contains signed macros, you see an icon Icon in the status bar. You can double-click the icon in the status bar to view the certificate.WebDAV see issue 32935main dialog IDs are here to lead the user initially to this help pageExamine certificate button -Click to open the View Certificate dialog.Accept this certificate temporarily for this session radio button +Click to open the View Certificate dialog.Accept this certificate temporarily for this session radio button -Choose this setting to accept the certificate until you exit %PRODUCTNAME.Do not accept this certificate and do not connect to this Web site radio button +Choose this setting to accept the certificate until you exit %PRODUCTNAME.Do not accept this certificate and do not connect to this Web site radio button -Choose this setting to cancel the connection. +Choose this setting to cancel the connection.
- English Wiki page on digital signatures - About digital signatures + English Wiki page on digital signatures + About digital signatures
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp index ea662b9507..2b00429e5f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp @@ -43,44 +43,44 @@ drawings; saving automatically presentations; saving automatically - -Saving Documents Automatically + +Saving Documents Automatically -To create a backup file every time you save a document +To create a backup file every time you save a document -Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. -Mark Always create backup copy. +Mark Always create backup copy. -If the Always create backup copy option is selected, the old version of the file is saved to the backup directory whenever you save the current version of the file. +If the Always create backup copy option is selected, the old version of the file is saved to the backup directory whenever you save the current version of the file. -You can change the backup directory by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths, then change the Backups path in the dialog. +You can change the backup directory by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths, then change the Backups path in the dialog. -The backup copy has the same name as the document, but the extension is .BAK. If the backup folder already contains such a file, it will be overwritten without warning. +The backup copy has the same name as the document, but the extension is .BAK. If the backup folder already contains such a file, it will be overwritten without warning. -To save recovery information automatically every n minutes +To save recovery information automatically every n minutes -Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. -Mark Save AutoRecovery information every and select the time interval. +Mark Save AutoRecovery information every and select the time interval. -This command saves the information necessary to restore the current document in case of a crash. Additionally, in case of a crash %PRODUCTNAME tries automatically to save AutoRecovery information for all open documents, if possible. +This command saves the information necessary to restore the current document in case of a crash. Additionally, in case of a crash %PRODUCTNAME tries automatically to save AutoRecovery information for all open documents, if possible.
-Save As -%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General -Error Report Tool +Save As +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General +Error Report Tool
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp index 29f0555e0a..30c0a6cdda 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp @@ -38,83 +38,83 @@ drawings; saving presentations; saving FTP; saving documents -mw changed "tables;..." to "spreadsheets;..."mw changed "text;" to "text documents;"Saving Documents +mw changed "tables;..." to "spreadsheets;..."mw changed "text;" to "text documents;"Saving Documents -Click the Save icon or press the shortcut keys CommandCtrl+S. +Click the Save icon or press the shortcut keys CommandCtrl+S. - + This icon is for tips on how to use the program more effectively. -The document is saved under its path and name on the current local data medium or network drive or on the Internet, overwriting any file of the same name. +The document is saved under its path and name on the current local data medium or network drive or on the Internet, overwriting any file of the same name.
-When you save a new file for the first time, the Save As dialog opens, in which you can enter a name, folder and drive or volume for the file. To open this dialog, choose File - Save As. -You can set the automatic creation of a backup copy under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. -Automatic extension to the file name -When saving a file, %PRODUCTNAME always appends an extension to the file name, except when the file name already has an extension that matches the file type. See the list of ODF extensions. -Some examples for the automatic extensions are listed in the following table: +When you save a new file for the first time, the Save As dialog opens, in which you can enter a name, folder and drive or volume for the file. To open this dialog, choose File - Save As. +You can set the automatic creation of a backup copy under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. +Automatic extension to the file name +When saving a file, %PRODUCTNAME always appends an extension to the file name, except when the file name already has an extension that matches the file type. See the list of ODF extensions. +Some examples for the automatic extensions are listed in the following table: -You enter this file name +You enter this file name -You select this file type +You select this file type -File is saved with this name +File is saved with this name -my file +my file -ODF Text +ODF Text -my file.odt +my file.odt -my file.odt +my file.odt -ODF Text +ODF Text -my file.odt +my file.odt -my file.txt +my file.txt -ODF Text +ODF Text -my file.txt.odt +my file.txt.odt -my file.txt +my file.txt -Text (.txt) +Text (.txt) -my file.txt +my file.txt
@@ -122,9 +122,9 @@ -Save As +Save As -%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop.xhp index c775e245da..1f5a36e580 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop.xhp @@ -35,67 +35,67 @@ links;by drag and drop copying;by drag and drop - -Dragging and Dropping Within a $[officename] Document + +Dragging and Dropping Within a $[officename] Document -There are many options for moving or copying objects using drag-and-drop. Text sections, drawing objects, graphics, form controls, hyperlinks, cell ranges, and many more can be moved or copied with the mouse. -Note that the mouse pointer displays a plus sign when copying and an arrow when creating a link or hyperlink. +There are many options for moving or copying objects using drag-and-drop. Text sections, drawing objects, graphics, form controls, hyperlinks, cell ranges, and many more can be moved or copied with the mouse. +Note that the mouse pointer displays a plus sign when copying and an arrow when creating a link or hyperlink. -Mouse Pointer +Mouse Pointer -Description +Description - + Mouse pointer moving data -Moving +Moving - + Mouse pointer copying data -Copying +Copying - + Mouse pointer inserting link -Creating a link +Creating a link
-If you press CommandCtrl or Shift+CommandCtrl while releasing the mouse button, you can control whether the object is copied, moved, or a link is created. +If you press CommandCtrl or Shift+CommandCtrl while releasing the mouse button, you can control whether the object is copied, moved, or a link is created. - + Icon -If you drag objects out of the Navigator, you can specify in the submenu of the Navigator's Drag Mode icon whether to copy the object, insert it as a link or insert it as a hyperlink. +If you drag objects out of the Navigator, you can specify in the submenu of the Navigator's Drag Mode icon whether to copy the object, insert it as a link or insert it as a hyperlink.
-You can cancel a drag-and-drop operation in $[officename] at any time by pressing the Esc key before releasing the mouse button. +You can cancel a drag-and-drop operation in $[officename] at any time by pressing the Esc key before releasing the mouse button. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_beamer.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_beamer.xhp index b0742d3d68..1113c42d71 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_beamer.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_beamer.xhp @@ -36,34 +36,34 @@ copying;from data source view pasting;from data source view mw added "pasting;" -Drag-and-Drop With the Data Source View +Drag-and-Drop With the Data Source View -A fast way of copying from a data source into a text or spreadsheet document, or of creating forms based on a data source, is by drag-and-drop. +A fast way of copying from a data source into a text or spreadsheet document, or of creating forms based on a data source, is by drag-and-drop. - + Mouse pointer copying data -Copying with Drag-and-Drop +Copying with Drag-and-Drop
-If you want to reverse a drag-and-drop, position the cursor in your document and choose Edit - Undo. -It is also possible to copy by drag-and-drop from a document into a data source: -A text table or the selected range of a spreadsheet can be dragged using drag-and-drop to a table container in the data source explorer. -Plain text can be copied using drag-and-drop from one document to a data field in the data source view. -Using data in a text document -You can insert a database field in a text document by dragging a field name from the column header of the data source view into the document. This is especially useful when designing form letters. Simply drag the desired fields - home address, form of address, and so on - into your document. -To insert a complete record, select the corresponding header and drag it into the document. When you release the mouse button, the Insert database columns dialog appears, in which you can decide whether to use all database fields, and whether to copy the data into the document as text, a table or fields. All currently selected records will be inserted. -Applying data to a table document -You can insert one or more records into the current sheet of a spreadsheet by selecting the rows in the data source view and dragging and dropping them into the spreadsheet. The data is inserted at the place where you release the mouse button. -Inserting controls in a text form -When you create a text form linked to a database, you can generate controls by drag-and-drop from the data source view. -When you drag a database column into the text document, you insert a field. If you hold down Shift+CommandCtrl while dragging, a text field is inserted, grouped with an appropriate label field. The text field already contains all the database information that you need for the form. +If you want to reverse a drag-and-drop, position the cursor in your document and choose Edit - Undo. +It is also possible to copy by drag-and-drop from a document into a data source: +A text table or the selected range of a spreadsheet can be dragged using drag-and-drop to a table container in the data source explorer. +Plain text can be copied using drag-and-drop from one document to a data field in the data source view. +Using data in a text document +You can insert a database field in a text document by dragging a field name from the column header of the data source view into the document. This is especially useful when designing form letters. Simply drag the desired fields - home address, form of address, and so on - into your document. +To insert a complete record, select the corresponding header and drag it into the document. When you release the mouse button, the Insert database columns dialog appears, in which you can decide whether to use all database fields, and whether to copy the data into the document as text, a table or fields. All currently selected records will be inserted. +Applying data to a table document +You can insert one or more records into the current sheet of a spreadsheet by selecting the rows in the data source view and dragging and dropping them into the spreadsheet. The data is inserted at the place where you release the mouse button. +Inserting controls in a text form +When you create a text form linked to a database, you can generate controls by drag-and-drop from the data source view. +When you drag a database column into the text document, you insert a field. If you hold down Shift+CommandCtrl while dragging, a text field is inserted, grouped with an appropriate label field. The text field already contains all the database information that you need for the form. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_fromgallery.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_fromgallery.xhp index 359f7a7209..0f7c581378 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_fromgallery.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_fromgallery.xhp @@ -36,21 +36,21 @@ draw objects;dropping Gallery pictures drag and drop;from Gallery to draw objects mw deleted "Gallery;coying..." and copied "copying;..." to Shared guide gallery_insert.xhp. -Copying Graphics From the Gallery +Copying Graphics From the Gallery -If you drag a graphic from the Gallery into a text, spreadsheet or presentation document, the graphic will be inserted there. +If you drag a graphic from the Gallery into a text, spreadsheet or presentation document, the graphic will be inserted there.
-If you release the graphic directly on a draw object, please note the following: +If you release the graphic directly on a draw object, please note the following: -If you move the graphic (drag it without pressing any key, in which case no additional symbol appears next to the mouse pointer), only the attributes are copied from the graphic and applied to the draw object on which you release the mouse button. +If you move the graphic (drag it without pressing any key, in which case no additional symbol appears next to the mouse pointer), only the attributes are copied from the graphic and applied to the draw object on which you release the mouse button. -If you copy the graphic (drag it while holding down the CommandCtrl key, in which case a plus sign appears next to the mouse pointer), the graphic will be inserted as an object. +If you copy the graphic (drag it while holding down the CommandCtrl key, in which case a plus sign appears next to the mouse pointer), the graphic will be inserted as an object. -If you create a hyperlink (drag while holding down Shift and CommandCtrl, in which case a linking arrow appears next to the mouse pointer), the drawing object is replaced by the graphic from the Gallery, but the position and size of the replaced draw object are retained. +If you create a hyperlink (drag while holding down Shift and CommandCtrl, in which case a linking arrow appears next to the mouse pointer), the drawing object is replaced by the graphic from the Gallery, but the position and size of the replaced draw object are retained.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_gallery.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_gallery.xhp index 81a0c8bbf7..e0eba5bee9 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_gallery.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_gallery.xhp @@ -40,25 +40,25 @@ pasting;to Gallery mw changed "adding;" to "inserting;" - Adding Graphics to the Gallery + Adding Graphics to the Gallery - You can place a graphic from a document such as an HTML page in the Gallery by drag-and-drop. + You can place a graphic from a document such as an HTML page in the Gallery by drag-and-drop. - Display the Gallery theme to which you want to add the graphic. + Display the Gallery theme to which you want to add the graphic. - Position the mouse pointer above the graphic, without clicking. + Position the mouse pointer above the graphic, without clicking. - If the mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol, the graphic refers to a hyperlink. In this case, click the graphic while pressing the OptionAlt key to select it without executing the respective link. - If the mouse pointer does not change to a hand symbol, you can simply click the graphic to select it. + If the mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol, the graphic refers to a hyperlink. In this case, click the graphic while pressing the OptionAlt key to select it without executing the respective link. + If the mouse pointer does not change to a hand symbol, you can simply click the graphic to select it. - Once the graphic is selected, release the mouse button. Click again on the graphic image, keeping the mouse button pressed for more than two seconds. The graphic image is copied to the internal memory. + Once the graphic is selected, release the mouse button. Click again on the graphic image, keeping the mouse button pressed for more than two seconds. The graphic image is copied to the internal memory. - Without releasing the mouse button, drag the graphic into the Gallery. + Without releasing the mouse button, drag the graphic into the Gallery. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_graphic.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_graphic.xhp index 8ba79895cb..ca3136cae9 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_graphic.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_graphic.xhp @@ -36,31 +36,31 @@ copying;pictures, between documents pasting;pictures from other documents mw added "pasting;" -Copying Graphics Between Documents +Copying Graphics Between Documents -You can copy a graphic from one document to another by drag-and-drop. If you plan to publish your document, please observe copyright laws and obtain the consent of the authors. +You can copy a graphic from one document to another by drag-and-drop. If you plan to publish your document, please observe copyright laws and obtain the consent of the authors. -Open the document in which you want to insert the graphic object. +Open the document in which you want to insert the graphic object. -Open the document from which you want to copy the graphic. +Open the document from which you want to copy the graphic. -Click the graphic while pressing the OptionAlt key, to select it without executing any hyperlinks it may refer to. +Click the graphic while pressing the OptionAlt key, to select it without executing any hyperlinks it may refer to. -Keep the mouse button pressed and wait a moment while the object is copied to an internal memory. +Keep the mouse button pressed and wait a moment while the object is copied to an internal memory. -Drag the graphic into the other document. If the documents are not visible side by side, first move the mouse pointer to the button of the target document while keeping the mouse button pressed. The document in question is then displayed and you can move the mouse pointer into the document. +Drag the graphic into the other document. If the documents are not visible side by side, first move the mouse pointer to the button of the target document while keeping the mouse button pressed. The document in question is then displayed and you can move the mouse pointer into the document. -Release the mouse button as soon as the gray text cursor indicates the position where you want to insert a copy of the picture. +Release the mouse button as soon as the gray text cursor indicates the position where you want to insert a copy of the picture. -If the graphic is connected with a hyperlink, the hyperlink and not the graphic is inserted. +If the graphic is connected with a hyperlink, the hyperlink and not the graphic is inserted. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_table.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_table.xhp index 57b771ff87..ae1e2ebf31 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_table.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_table.xhp @@ -34,32 +34,32 @@ copying; sheet areas, to text documents pasting;sheet areas in text documents mw added "pasting;" -Copying Spreadsheet Areas to Text Documents +Copying Spreadsheet Areas to Text Documents -Open both the text document and the spreadsheet. +Open both the text document and the spreadsheet. -Select the sheet area you want to copy. +Select the sheet area you want to copy. -Point to the selected area and press the mouse button. Keep the mouse button pressed for a moment, then drag the area into the text document. -If the documents are not visible next to each other, first drag the mouse pointer to the destination document button. Continue to hold down the mouse button. The document is displayed, and you can move the mouse pointer within the document. +Point to the selected area and press the mouse button. Keep the mouse button pressed for a moment, then drag the area into the text document. +If the documents are not visible next to each other, first drag the mouse pointer to the destination document button. Continue to hold down the mouse button. The document is displayed, and you can move the mouse pointer within the document. -Once the cursor is located in the place where you want to insert the sheet area, release the mouse button. The sheet area is inserted as an OLE object. +Once the cursor is located in the place where you want to insert the sheet area, release the mouse button. The sheet area is inserted as an OLE object. -You can select and edit the OLE object at any time. +You can select and edit the OLE object at any time. -To edit the OLE object, double-click on it. -Alternatively, select the object and choose Edit - Object - Edit or choose Edit from the context menu. You edit the object in its own frame within the text document, but you see the icons and menu commands needed for spreadsheets. +To edit the OLE object, double-click on it. +Alternatively, select the object and choose Edit - Object - Edit or choose Edit from the context menu. You edit the object in its own frame within the text document, but you see the icons and menu commands needed for spreadsheets. -Choose Open to open the source document of the OLE object. +Choose Open to open the source document of the OLE object. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/edit_symbolbar.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/edit_symbolbar.xhp index f99690b5c8..8d8d4879cd 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/edit_symbolbar.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/edit_symbolbar.xhp @@ -37,29 +37,29 @@ inserting;buttons in toolbars -Adding Buttons to Toolbars +Adding Buttons to Toolbars
-To add a button to a toolbar: -Open the context menu of the toolbar (right click) and choose Visible Buttons and then select the button you want to display. +To add a button to a toolbar: +Open the context menu of the toolbar (right click) and choose Visible Buttons and then select the button you want to display.
-Opens a dialog where you can add, edit, and remove icons. -To add a button to the list of Visible Buttons: +Opens a dialog where you can add, edit, and remove icons. +To add a button to the list of Visible Buttons: -Choose Tools - Customize, and click on the Toolbars tab. +Choose Tools - Customize, and click on the Toolbars tab. -In the Toolbars box, select the toolbar you want to change. +In the Toolbars box, select the toolbar you want to change. -Click Add Commands , select the new command, then click Add. +Click Add Commands , select the new command, then click Add. -If you want, you can rearrange the Commands list by selecting a command name and clicking Move Up and Move Down. +If you want, you can rearrange the Commands list by selecting a command name and clicking Move Up and Move Down. -Click OK. +Click OK.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/email.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/email.xhp index efde4567a5..55974e7528 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/email.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/email.xhp @@ -40,18 +40,18 @@ presentations; sending as e-mail attachments in e-mails -Sending Documents as E-mail -Working in $[officename], you can send the current document as an e-mail attachment. +Sending Documents as E-mail +Working in $[officename], you can send the current document as an e-mail attachment. -Choose File - Send - E-mail Document. -$[officename] opens your default e-mail program. If you want to send the current document with another e-mail program, you can select the program to use with Internet - E-mail in the Options dialog box. +Choose File - Send - E-mail Document. +$[officename] opens your default e-mail program. If you want to send the current document with another e-mail program, you can select the program to use with Internet - E-mail in the Options dialog box. -In your e-mail program, enter the recipient, subject and any text you want to add, then send the e-mail. +In your e-mail program, enter the recipient, subject and any text you want to add, then send the e-mail. -In case you want to send the e-mail to a recipient who only has software that cannot read the OpenDocument format, you can send the current document in an often used proprietary format.
For a text document, choose File - Send - E-mail as Microsoft Word. For a spreadsheet, choose File - Send - E-mail as Microsoft Excel. And for a presentation, choose File - Send - E-mail as Microsoft PowerPoint.
If you want to send the document as a read-only file, choose File - Send - E-mail as PDF.
These commands do not change your current document. Only a temporary copy is created and sent. +In case you want to send the e-mail to a recipient who only has software that cannot read the OpenDocument format, you can send the current document in an often used proprietary format.
For a text document, choose File - Send - E-mail as Microsoft Word. For a spreadsheet, choose File - Send - E-mail as Microsoft Excel. And for a presentation, choose File - Send - E-mail as Microsoft PowerPoint.
If you want to send the document as a read-only file, choose File - Send - E-mail as PDF.
These commands do not change your current document. Only a temporary copy is created and sent.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp index a983565bf8..1474a57510 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp @@ -41,25 +41,25 @@ Word documents; saving as Excel; saving as PowerPoint export -mw made "PowerPoint;..." a one level entry -Saving Documents in Other Formats +mw made "PowerPoint;..." a one level entry +Saving Documents in Other Formats -Choose File - Save as. You will see the Save as dialog. +Choose File - Save as. You will see the Save as dialog. -In the Save as type or File type list box, select the desired format. +In the Save as type or File type list box, select the desired format. -Enter a name in the File name box and click Save. +Enter a name in the File name box and click Save. -If you want the file dialogs to offer another file format as default, select that format in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General in the Default file format area. +If you want the file dialogs to offer another file format as default, select that format in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General in the Default file format area.
-Save As +Save As diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp index 924aacc855..768bdeeffb 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp @@ -35,43 +35,43 @@ sending; documents as faxes configuring;fax icon -Sending Faxes and Configuring $[officename] for Faxing +Sending Faxes and Configuring $[officename] for Faxing -To send a fax directly from $[officename], you need a fax modem and a fax driver that allows applications to communicate with the fax modem. -Sending a Fax Through the Print Dialog +To send a fax directly from $[officename], you need a fax modem and a fax driver that allows applications to communicate with the fax modem. +Sending a Fax Through the Print Dialog -Open the Print dialog by choosing File - Print and select the fax driver in the Name list box. +Open the Print dialog by choosing File - Print and select the fax driver in the Name list box. -Clicking OK opens the dialog for your fax driver, where you can select the fax recipient. +Clicking OK opens the dialog for your fax driver, where you can select the fax recipient. -Configuring $[officename] a Fax Icon -You can configure $[officename] so that a single click on an icon automatically sends the current document as a fax: +Configuring $[officename] a Fax Icon +You can configure $[officename] so that a single click on an icon automatically sends the current document as a fax: -Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. -Select the fax driver from the Fax list box and click OK. +Select the fax driver from the Fax list box and click OK. -Click the arrow icon at the end of the Standard bar. In the drop-down menu, choose Customize. -The Toolbars tab page of the Customize dialog appears. +Click the arrow icon at the end of the Standard bar. In the drop-down menu, choose Customize. +The Toolbars tab page of the Customize dialog appears. -Click Add Commands. +Click Add Commands. -Select the "Documents" category, then select the "Send Default Fax" command. +Select the "Documents" category, then select the "Send Default Fax" command. -Click Add and then Close. +Click Add and then Close. -On the Toolbars tab page, click the down arrow button to position the new icon where you want it. Click OK. -Your Standard bar now has a new icon to send the current document as a fax. +On the Toolbars tab page, click the down arrow button to position the new icon where you want it. Click OK. +Your Standard bar now has a new icon to send the current document as a fax. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/filternavigator.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/filternavigator.xhp index 4291dbe4f2..29bf2c902d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/filternavigator.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/filternavigator.xhp @@ -33,18 +33,18 @@ filters; Navigator filter conditions;connecting -Using the Filter Navigator +Using the Filter Navigator -To connect several filter conditions with Boolean OR, click the Filter navigation icon on the filter bar. The Filter navigator window appears. +To connect several filter conditions with Boolean OR, click the Filter navigation icon on the filter bar. The Filter navigator window appears. -The filter conditions that have been set appear in the Filter navigator. As soon as a filter is set, you see a blank filter entry at the bottom of the Filter navigator . You can select this entry by clicking the word "Or". Once you have selected the blank filter entry, you can enter additional filter conditions in the form. These conditions are linked by Boolean OR to the previously defined conditions. +The filter conditions that have been set appear in the Filter navigator. As soon as a filter is set, you see a blank filter entry at the bottom of the Filter navigator . You can select this entry by clicking the word "Or". Once you have selected the blank filter entry, you can enter additional filter conditions in the form. These conditions are linked by Boolean OR to the previously defined conditions. -The context menu can be called for each entry in the Filter navigator. You can edit the filter conditions in this area directly as text. If you wish to check if a field has content or no content, you can select the filter conditions "empty" (SQL:"Is Null") or "not empty" (SQL: "Is not Null"). It is also possible to delete the entry by using the context menu. -You can move filter conditions in the Filter navigator by dragging and dropping, or use the keys CommandCtrl+Alt+Up Arrow or CommandCtrl+Alt+Down Arrow. To copy filter conditions, drag them while holding down the CommandCtrl key. +The context menu can be called for each entry in the Filter navigator. You can edit the filter conditions in this area directly as text. If you wish to check if a field has content or no content, you can select the filter conditions "empty" (SQL:"Is Null") or "not empty" (SQL: "Is not Null"). It is also possible to delete the entry by using the context menu. +You can move filter conditions in the Filter navigator by dragging and dropping, or use the keys CommandCtrl+Alt+Up Arrow or CommandCtrl+Alt+Down Arrow. To copy filter conditions, drag them while holding down the CommandCtrl key. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/find_attributes.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/find_attributes.xhp index 54020fb4a6..666f87b48c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/find_attributes.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/find_attributes.xhp @@ -39,46 +39,46 @@ finding; attributes resetting;Find & Replace mode -Searching for Attributes +Searching for Attributes -You can search for text with attributes that are applied either by direct formatting or by styles. For example, if you search for the Font attribute, all instances of text that do not use the default font are found. All text that has a directly coded font attribute, and all text where a style switches the font attribute, are found. -If you want to find text with any font by name, click the Format button in the Find & Replace dialog of %PRODUCTNAME Writer. +You can search for text with attributes that are applied either by direct formatting or by styles. For example, if you search for the Font attribute, all instances of text that do not use the default font are found. All text that has a directly coded font attribute, and all text where a style switches the font attribute, are found. +If you want to find text with any font by name, click the Format button in the Find & Replace dialog of %PRODUCTNAME Writer. After you select the attributes that you want to search for, the Paragraph Styles box in the Other options area of the %PRODUCTNAME Writer Find & Replace dialog changes to Including Styles. -If you want to search for text in which attributes were set by using direct formatting and styles, select the Including Styles box. +If you want to search for text in which attributes were set by using direct formatting and styles, select the Including Styles box. The search criteria for attributes are listed below the Find box. -To search for all font changes +To search for all font changes -Choose Edit - Find & Replace. +Choose Edit - Find & Replace. Clear the Find text box if necessary. -Click Attributes. +Click Attributes. -In the Attributes dialog, select the Font check box, and click OK. +In the Attributes dialog, select the Font check box, and click OK. In the Find & Replace dialog, you now can read "Font" below the Find text box. -Click Find Next. +Click Find Next. -All places where a font change was applied, either directly or by assigning an appropriate style, are found. -To reset the Find & Replace mode -To stop searching for the current attributes, reset the Find & Replace dialog to normal mode. +All places where a font change was applied, either directly or by assigning an appropriate style, are found. +To reset the Find & Replace mode +To stop searching for the current attributes, reset the Find & Replace dialog to normal mode. -Click No Format. +Click No Format.
-Find & Replace dialog +Find & Replace dialog
-Searching for attributes is available in the Find & Replace dialog for text documents. +Searching for attributes is available in the Find & Replace dialog for text documents. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/flat_icons.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/flat_icons.xhp index 54d665bd42..ef4eaeca40 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/flat_icons.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/flat_icons.xhp @@ -39,18 +39,18 @@ large icons small icons -Changing Icon Size +Changing Icon Size -You can change the icon view between small and large icons. +You can change the icon view between small and large icons. -Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename]. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename]. -On the View tab page, select the Toolbar icon size. +On the View tab page, select the Toolbar icon size. -Click OK. +Click OK. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/fontwork.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/fontwork.xhp index d7b4be6aea..fd30311764 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/fontwork.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/fontwork.xhp @@ -41,76 +41,76 @@ inserting;Fontwork objects -Fontwork For Graphical Text Art +Fontwork For Graphical Text Art - You can use Fontwork to create graphical text art objects. - To create a Fontwork object + You can use Fontwork to create graphical text art objects. + To create a Fontwork object - If you don't see the Drawing toolbar or the Fontwork toolbar, choose View - Toolbars to enable the toolbar. + If you don't see the Drawing toolbar or the Fontwork toolbar, choose View - Toolbars to enable the toolbar. - On the Drawing toolbar or on the Fontwork toolbar, click the Fontwork Gallery icon. + On the Drawing toolbar or on the Fontwork toolbar, click the Fontwork Gallery icon. Icon -Select a Fontwork style and click OK to insert the Fontwork into your document. Double-click or Ctrl+double-click the Fontwork in your document to enter text edit mode and change the text. +Select a Fontwork style and click OK to insert the Fontwork into your document. Double-click or Ctrl+double-click the Fontwork in your document to enter text edit mode and change the text. - In the Fontwork Gallery dialog, select a Fontwork style and click OK. - The Fontwork object is inserted into your document. Fontwork objects are Custom Shapes. Using the 3D Settings toolbar, you can switch the view at any time from 2D to 3D and back. + In the Fontwork Gallery dialog, select a Fontwork style and click OK. + The Fontwork object is inserted into your document. Fontwork objects are Custom Shapes. Using the 3D Settings toolbar, you can switch the view at any time from 2D to 3D and back. - Double-click the object to enter text edit mode. + Double-click the object to enter text edit mode. - Replace the default Fontwork text with your own text. + Replace the default Fontwork text with your own text. - Press Esc to exit text edit mode. + Press Esc to exit text edit mode. - To edit a Fontwork object + To edit a Fontwork object - Click the Fontwork object. If the Fontwork object is inserted in the background, hold down the Ctrl key while you click. - The Fontwork toolbar is displayed. If you do not see the Fontwork toolbar, choose View - Toolbars - Fontwork. + Click the Fontwork object. If the Fontwork object is inserted in the background, hold down the Ctrl key while you click. + The Fontwork toolbar is displayed. If you do not see the Fontwork toolbar, choose View - Toolbars - Fontwork. - Click an icon in the Fontwork toolbar. - The following icons are available: + Click an icon in the Fontwork toolbar. + The following icons are available: - Fontwork Gallery - adds another Fontwork object + Fontwork Gallery - adds another Fontwork object - Fontwork Shape - edits the shape + Fontwork Shape - edits the shape - Fontwork Same Letter Heights - changes the height of characters + Fontwork Same Letter Heights - changes the height of characters - Fontwork Alignment - aligns the text + Fontwork Alignment - aligns the text - Fontwork Character Spacing - changes the character spacing and kerning + Fontwork Character Spacing - changes the character spacing and kerning - To edit more Fontwork attributes + To edit more Fontwork attributes - Click the Fontwork object. If the Fontwork object is inserted in the background, hold down the Ctrl key while you click. + Click the Fontwork object. If the Fontwork object is inserted in the background, hold down the Ctrl key while you click. - Select the properties from the Drawing Object Properties toolbar. You can change the line width, line color, fill color, fill style, and more. + Select the properties from the Drawing Object Properties toolbar. You can change the line width, line color, fill color, fill style, and more.
- Fontwork toolbar + Fontwork toolbar
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/formfields.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/formfields.xhp index ea6e263b8a..b3a7728db8 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/formfields.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/formfields.xhp @@ -35,47 +35,47 @@ press buttons, see push buttons push buttons;adding to documents MW changed "adding;" to "inserting;" -Adding a Command Button to a Document +Adding a Command Button to a Document - You can use the Form Controls toolbar to add checkboxes, buttons, tables showing data records, and other controls to a document. - To Add a Button to a Document + You can use the Form Controls toolbar to add checkboxes, buttons, tables showing data records, and other controls to a document. + To Add a Button to a Document - Choose View - Toolbars - Form Controls. + Choose View - Toolbars - Form Controls. - On the Form Controls toolbar, click the Push Button icon. - The mouse pointer changes to a cross-hair. + On the Form Controls toolbar, click the Push Button icon. + The mouse pointer changes to a cross-hair. - In the document, drag to draw the button. + In the document, drag to draw the button. - Right-click the button and choose Control. + Right-click the button and choose Control. - Specify the properties of the button. + Specify the properties of the button. - To change the button label, click the General tab, and edit the text in the Label box. + To change the button label, click the General tab, and edit the text in the Label box. - To attach a macro to the button, click the Events tab, and click the ... button beside the button action that you want to run the macro. In the Assign Macro dialog, locate the macro that you want to use, and then click OK.UFI: see #i34509# + To attach a macro to the button, click the Events tab, and click the ... button beside the button action that you want to run the macro. In the Assign Macro dialog, locate the macro that you want to use, and then click OK.UFI: see #i34509# - Close the Properties dialog. + Close the Properties dialog. - (Optional) Specify the properties of the form that the button belongs to. + (Optional) Specify the properties of the form that the button belongs to. - Right-click the button and choose Form. + Right-click the button and choose Form. - The Form Properties dialog opens. + The Form Properties dialog opens. - Specify the properties for the form and then close the dialog. + Specify the properties for the form and then close the dialog.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/gallery_insert.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/gallery_insert.xhp index 000f865cd5..26949d5f0c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/gallery_insert.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/gallery_insert.xhp @@ -42,67 +42,67 @@ copying;from Gallery mw deleted "adding;" - Inserting Objects From the Gallery + Inserting Objects From the Gallery - You can insert an object in a document either as a copy or as a link. A copy of an object is independent of the original object. Changes to the original object have no effect on the copy. A link remains dependent on the original object. Changes to the original object are also reflected in the link. - Inserting an object as a copy + You can insert an object in a document either as a copy or as a link. A copy of an object is independent of the original object. Changes to the original object have no effect on the copy. A link remains dependent on the original object. Changes to the original object are also reflected in the link. + Inserting an object as a copy - Open the Gallery by clicking the Gallery icon on the Standard bar, or by selecting Tools - Gallery. + Open the Gallery by clicking the Gallery icon on the Standard bar, or by selecting Tools - Gallery. - Select a theme. + Select a theme. - Select an object using a single click. + Select an object using a single click. - Drag the object into the document, or right-click to open the context menu and select Insert and Copy. + Drag the object into the document, or right-click to open the context menu and select Insert and Copy. - Inserting an object as a link + Inserting an object as a link - Open the Gallery by clicking the Gallery icon on the Standard bar, or by selecting Tools - Gallery. + Open the Gallery by clicking the Gallery icon on the Standard bar, or by selecting Tools - Gallery. - Select a theme. + Select a theme. - Select an object by a single click. + Select an object by a single click. - Drag the object into the document while pressing the Shift and CommandCtrl keys, or right-click to open the context menu and select Insert and Link. + Drag the object into the document while pressing the Shift and CommandCtrl keys, or right-click to open the context menu and select Insert and Link. - Inserting an object as a background graphic + Inserting an object as a background graphic - Open the Gallery by clicking the Gallery icon on the Standard bar, or by selecting Tools - Gallery. + Open the Gallery by clicking the Gallery icon on the Standard bar, or by selecting Tools - Gallery. - Select a theme. + Select a theme. - Select an object by a single click. + Select an object by a single click. - Open the context menu and choose Insert - Background - Page or Paragraph. + Open the context menu and choose Insert - Background - Page or Paragraph. - Inserting an object as a texture (pattern) for another object + Inserting an object as a texture (pattern) for another object - Open the Gallery by clicking the Gallery icon on the Standard bar, or by selecting Tools - Gallery. + Open the Gallery by clicking the Gallery icon on the Standard bar, or by selecting Tools - Gallery. - Select a theme. + Select a theme. - Select an object by a single click. + Select an object by a single click. - Drag the object on to the other object in the document while pressing CommandCtrl. + Drag the object on to the other object in the document while pressing CommandCtrl.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/groups.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/groups.xhp index 179dfb1cbf..11e48dc553 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/groups.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/groups.xhp @@ -43,61 +43,61 @@ marking, see selecting mw copied "frames;" and "selecting;" from shared/02/01140000.xhp; and deleted "selecting;group objects"; added 2 new entries and a see-reference - Working with Groups + Working with Groups - You can combine several graphic objects into a group so that you can use them like a single object. - You can move, transform, resize, distort, or convert all objects in a group together, and you can enter the group any time to change the individual objects. - You can change the properties (line size, fill color, and more) of all objects in a group together, and you can enter the group and change the individual objects. - Groups can also be nested to form groups within other groups. - To group objects + You can combine several graphic objects into a group so that you can use them like a single object. + You can move, transform, resize, distort, or convert all objects in a group together, and you can enter the group any time to change the individual objects. + You can change the properties (line size, fill color, and more) of all objects in a group together, and you can enter the group and change the individual objects. + Groups can also be nested to form groups within other groups. + To group objects - Select the objects together that you want to group. Hold down Shift while you click the individual objects. + Select the objects together that you want to group. Hold down Shift while you click the individual objects. - Right-click any of the selected objects to open the context menu. In Calc or Writer, commands are in a submenu Group, while in Impress or Draw, they are at the toplevel of the context menu. + Right-click any of the selected objects to open the context menu. In Calc or Writer, commands are in a submenu Group, while in Impress or Draw, they are at the toplevel of the context menu. - Choose Group. - To select the objects, you can also drag a selection frame around the objects. + Choose Group. + To select the objects, you can also drag a selection frame around the objects. - For example, you can group all of the objects in a company logo to move and resize the logo as a single object. - After you have grouped objects, selecting any part of the group selects the entire group. - To enter a group + For example, you can group all of the objects in a company logo to move and resize the logo as a single object. + After you have grouped objects, selecting any part of the group selects the entire group. + To enter a group - Right-click any object of the group. In Calc or Writer, commands are in a submenu Group, while in Impress or Draw, they are at the toplevel of the context menu. + Right-click any object of the group. In Calc or Writer, commands are in a submenu Group, while in Impress or Draw, they are at the toplevel of the context menu. - Choose Enter Group. + Choose Enter Group. - Now you can select and edit a single object in the group. + Now you can select and edit a single object in the group. - You can add or delete objects to and from a group in this mode. - The objects that are not part of the group are shown with dimmed colors. - To exit a group + You can add or delete objects to and from a group in this mode. + The objects that are not part of the group are shown with dimmed colors. + To exit a group - Right-click any object of the group. In Calc or Writer, commands are in a submenu Group, while in Impress or Draw, they are at the toplevel of the context menu. + Right-click any object of the group. In Calc or Writer, commands are in a submenu Group, while in Impress or Draw, they are at the toplevel of the context menu. - Choose Exit Group. + Choose Exit Group. - To exit a group in Draw or Impress, you can also double-click anywhere outside the group. - To ungroup a group + To exit a group in Draw or Impress, you can also double-click anywhere outside the group. + To ungroup a group - Right-click any object of the group. In Calc or Writer, commands are in a submenu Group, while in Impress or Draw, they are at the toplevel of the context menu. + Right-click any object of the group. In Calc or Writer, commands are in a submenu Group, while in Impress or Draw, they are at the toplevel of the context menu. - Choose Ungroup. + Choose Ungroup. - Now you can select and edit all objects as individual objects. + Now you can select and edit all objects as individual objects.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_edit.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_edit.xhp index e243a3a68e..e22fe361e8 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_edit.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_edit.xhp @@ -35,45 +35,45 @@ text attributes; hyperlinks buttons;editing hyperlink buttons URL;changing hyperlink URLs -MW deleted "changing;"Editing Hyperlinks +MW deleted "changing;"Editing Hyperlinks -When you CommandCtrl-click a hyperlink in a Writer document, your web browser opens with the requested web address. If you don't use a mouse, position the cursor inside the hyperlink and open the context menu by Shift+F10, then choose Open Hyperlink. -Change the text of a hyperlink as follows +When you CommandCtrl-click a hyperlink in a Writer document, your web browser opens with the requested web address. If you don't use a mouse, position the cursor inside the hyperlink and open the context menu by Shift+F10, then choose Open Hyperlink. +Change the text of a hyperlink as follows -In Writer documents, you can click anywhere into a hyperlink and edit the visible text. +In Writer documents, you can click anywhere into a hyperlink and edit the visible text. -If you leave the hyperlink by positioning the cursor somewhere else, only the visible text will be changed. -If you leave the hyperlink by entering a space character directly following the last character, the AutoCorrect - if enabled - will change the target URL to be the same as the visible text. +If you leave the hyperlink by positioning the cursor somewhere else, only the visible text will be changed. +If you leave the hyperlink by entering a space character directly following the last character, the AutoCorrect - if enabled - will change the target URL to be the same as the visible text. -In all document types, you can open the Hyperlink dialog to edit a hyperlink. First set the cursor into the hyperlink or directly in front of the hyperlink, then click the Hyperlink icon on the Standard bar. +In all document types, you can open the Hyperlink dialog to edit a hyperlink. First set the cursor into the hyperlink or directly in front of the hyperlink, then click the Hyperlink icon on the Standard bar. -Change the URL of a hyperlink as follows +Change the URL of a hyperlink as follows -As described above, open Hyperlink Dialog. +As described above, open Hyperlink Dialog. -Change the attribute of all hyperlinks +Change the attribute of all hyperlinks -Open the Styles and Formatting window. +Open the Styles and Formatting window. -Click the Character Styles icon. +Click the Character Styles icon. -Right-click the "Internet Link" or "Visited Internet Link" character style, and choose Modify. +Right-click the "Internet Link" or "Visited Internet Link" character style, and choose Modify. -In the dialog, select the new attributes, and click OK. +In the dialog, select the new attributes, and click OK. -Edit a hyperlink button -If the hyperlink is a button, click on the border to select it, or press the OptionAlt key while clicking. Open the Properties dialog through the context menu. You can edit the label text under "Caption," and modify the address in the "URL" field. +Edit a hyperlink button +If the hyperlink is a button, click on the border to select it, or press the OptionAlt key while clicking. Open the Properties dialog through the context menu. You can edit the label text under "Caption," and modify the address in the "URL" field. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_insert.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_insert.xhp index 1ad1663468..729e634d00 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_insert.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_insert.xhp @@ -33,20 +33,20 @@ links; inserting inserting; hyperlinks -Inserting Hyperlinks +Inserting Hyperlinks -You can insert hyperlinks in two ways: as text or as a button. In both cases, the visible text can be different from the URL. -Place the text cursor in the document at the point where you want to insert the hyperlink or select the text that you want to put the hyperlink on. Select Hyperlink command from the Insert menu. Alternatively click on the Icon Hyperlink icon on the Standard toolbar. The Hyperlink dialog appears. +You can insert hyperlinks in two ways: as text or as a button. In both cases, the visible text can be different from the URL. +Place the text cursor in the document at the point where you want to insert the hyperlink or select the text that you want to put the hyperlink on. Select Hyperlink command from the Insert menu. Alternatively click on the Icon Hyperlink icon on the Standard toolbar. The Hyperlink dialog appears. -To jump to a specific line in a text document, first enter a bookmark at that position (Insert - Bookmark). +To jump to a specific line in a text document, first enter a bookmark at that position (Insert - Bookmark). -To jump to a cell in a spreadsheet, first enter a name for the cell (Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Define). +To jump to a cell in a spreadsheet, first enter a name for the cell (Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Define). -Hyperlinks can also be inserted by drag-and-drop from the Navigator. Hyperlinks can refer to references, headings, graphics, tables, objects, directories or bookmarks. -If you wish to insert in a text a hyperlink that refers to Table 1, drag the entry Table 1 from the Navigator and drop it in the text. To do this, the Insert as Hyperlink drag mode must be selected in the Navigator. +Hyperlinks can also be inserted by drag-and-drop from the Navigator. Hyperlinks can refer to references, headings, graphics, tables, objects, directories or bookmarks. +If you wish to insert in a text a hyperlink that refers to Table 1, drag the entry Table 1 from the Navigator and drop it in the text. To do this, the Insert as Hyperlink drag mode must be selected in the Navigator. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp index 28b8f6da8c..0813113c5d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp @@ -34,12 +34,12 @@ hyperlinks; relative and absolute hyperlinks, see also links -Relative and Absolute Links +Relative and Absolute Links -When you include hyperlinks, two factors must be taken into account: whether they are set as relative or absolute on saving, and whether or not the file is present. +When you include hyperlinks, two factors must be taken into account: whether they are set as relative or absolute on saving, and whether or not the file is present. -Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General and specify in the Save URLs relative to field if $[officename] creates relative or absolute hyperlinks. Relative linking is only possible when the document you are working on and the link destination are on the same drive. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General and specify in the Save URLs relative to field if $[officename] creates relative or absolute hyperlinks. Relative linking is only possible when the document you are working on and the link destination are on the same drive. You should create the same directory structure on your hard disk as that which exists in the web space hosted by your Internet provider. Call the root directory for the homepage on your hard disk "homepage", for example. The start file is then "index.html", the full path being "C:\homepage\index.html" (assuming Windows operating system). The URL on your Internet provider's server might then be as follows: "http://www.myprovider.com/mypage/index.html". With relative addressing, you indicate the link relative to the location of the output document. For example, if you placed all the graphics for your homepage in a subfolder called "C:\homepage\images", you would need to give the following path to access the graphic "picture.gif": "images\picture.gif". This is the relative path, starting from the location of the file "index.html". On the provider's server, you would place the picture in the folder "mypage/images". When you transfer the document "index.html" to the provider's server through the File - Save As dialog, and if you have marked the option Copy local images to Internet under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility, $[officename] will automatically copy the graphic to the correct directory on the server. @@ -48,19 +48,19 @@ An absolute path such as "C:\homepage\graphics\picture.gif" would no longer function on the provider server. Neither a server nor the computer of a reader needs to have a C hard drive: operating systems such as Unix or macOS do not recognize drive letters, and even if the folder homepage\graphics existed, your picture would not be available. It is better to use relative addressing for file links. -A link to a web page, for example, "www.example.com" or "www.myprovider.com/mypage/index.html" is an absolute link. +A link to a web page, for example, "www.example.com" or "www.myprovider.com/mypage/index.html" is an absolute link. -$[officename] also reacts differently, depending on whether the file referred to in the link exists, and where it is located. $[officename] checks every new link and sets a target and protocol automatically. The result can be seen in the generated HTML code after saving the source document. +$[officename] also reacts differently, depending on whether the file referred to in the link exists, and where it is located. $[officename] checks every new link and sets a target and protocol automatically. The result can be seen in the generated HTML code after saving the source document. -The following rules apply: A relative reference ("graphic/picture.gif") is only possible when both files exist on the same drive. If the files are on different drives in your local file system, the absolute reference follows the "file:" protocol ("file:///data1/xyz/picture.gif"). If the files are on different servers or if the target of the link is not available, the absolute reference uses the "http:" protocol ("http://data2/abc/picture.gif"). +The following rules apply: A relative reference ("graphic/picture.gif") is only possible when both files exist on the same drive. If the files are on different drives in your local file system, the absolute reference follows the "file:" protocol ("file:///data1/xyz/picture.gif"). If the files are on different servers or if the target of the link is not available, the absolute reference uses the "http:" protocol ("http://data2/abc/picture.gif"). -Be sure to organize all files for your homepage on the same drive as the start file of the homepage. In this way, $[officename] can set the protocol and target so that the reference on the server is always correct. +Be sure to organize all files for your homepage on the same drive as the start file of the homepage. In this way, $[officename] can set the protocol and target so that the reference on the server is always correct. -When you rest your mouse on a hyperlink, a help tip displays the absolute reference, since $[officename] uses absolute path names internally. The complete path and address can only be seen when you view the result of the HTML export, by loading the HTML file as "Text" or opening it with a text editor. +When you rest your mouse on a hyperlink, a help tip displays the absolute reference, since $[officename] uses absolute path names internally. The complete path and address can only be seen when you view the result of the HTML export, by loading the HTML file as "Text" or opening it with a text editor. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/imagemap.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/imagemap.xhp index 5c16f01e2f..7b533217e7 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/imagemap.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/imagemap.xhp @@ -34,39 +34,39 @@ hotspots;adding to images URL;in pictures mw added 2 index entriesMW made "hotspots" a two level entry -Adding Clickable Hotspots to Images +Adding Clickable Hotspots to Images - An ImageMap allows you to attach URLs to specific areas, called hotspots, on a picture in your document. An image map is a group of one or more hotspots. - You can draw three types of hotspots: rectangles, ellipses, and polygons. When you click a hotspot, the URL is opened in the browser window or frame that you specify. You can also specify the text that appears when your mouse rests on the hotspot. - To add a clickable hotspot to an image + An ImageMap allows you to attach URLs to specific areas, called hotspots, on a picture in your document. An image map is a group of one or more hotspots. + You can draw three types of hotspots: rectangles, ellipses, and polygons. When you click a hotspot, the URL is opened in the browser window or frame that you specify. You can also specify the text that appears when your mouse rests on the hotspot. + To add a clickable hotspot to an image - Position the cursor where you want the ImageMap in your document. + Position the cursor where you want the ImageMap in your document. - Choose Insert - Image, select and insert a bitmap image. + Choose Insert - Image, select and insert a bitmap image. - With the image selected, choose Edit - ImageMap. You see the ImageMap Editor, which displays the image at the background. + With the image selected, choose Edit - ImageMap. You see the ImageMap Editor, which displays the image at the background. - Use the icons in the ImageMap Editor to draw a hotspot shape, for example a rectangle, over the image at the background. - You can see an extended help text on the functions of each icon when you enable Extended Help in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General. + Use the icons in the ImageMap Editor to draw a hotspot shape, for example a rectangle, over the image at the background. + You can see an extended help text on the functions of each icon when you enable Extended Help in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General. - Enter the "Address" URL that will be shown in a Web browser when the user clicks the hotspot. + Enter the "Address" URL that will be shown in a Web browser when the user clicks the hotspot. - Optionally, enter the "Text" that will be shown as a tip when the user points the mouse to the hotspot. + Optionally, enter the "Text" that will be shown as a tip when the user points the mouse to the hotspot. - Click the Apply button to apply your changes, and close the ImageMap Editor. + Click the Apply button to apply your changes, and close the ImageMap Editor. - Save the document in the %PRODUCTNAME or HTML format. + Save the document in the %PRODUCTNAME or HTML format. - You may save the ImageMap as a file and upload that file to a Web server, for example. + You may save the ImageMap as a file and upload that file to a Web server, for example. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp index b47d89e955..48056d273c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp @@ -46,39 +46,39 @@ converters; document converter files, see also documents MW inserted cross-reference "files, see also documents"MW changed "defaults;..."ufi added "converters;document converter" -Opening documents saved in other formats +Opening documents saved in other formats -You can open a document saved in another format by using the following procedure: +You can open a document saved in another format by using the following procedure: -Choose File - Open. +Choose File - Open. -Select a format from the Files of type list. +Select a format from the Files of type list. -Select a file name and click Open. +Select a file name and click Open. -If you always want the file dialogs to show another format by default, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General and select that format as Default file format. -Converting all documents of a folder -Open the wizard, which guides you through the operation, to copy and convert all documents from Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel or Microsoft PowerPoint into OpenDocument file format documents. You can select a source and target directory, specify whether to convert documents and/or templates, and more besides. +If you always want the file dialogs to show another format by default, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General and select that format as Default file format. +Converting all documents of a folder +Open the wizard, which guides you through the operation, to copy and convert all documents from Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel or Microsoft PowerPoint into OpenDocument file format documents. You can select a source and target directory, specify whether to convert documents and/or templates, and more besides. -Choose File - Wizards - Document Converter. +Choose File - Wizards - Document Converter. -Opening HTML files in Writer +Opening HTML files in Writer - Choose the file type "HTML Document" to open in %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web. This is the default for HTML documents in %PRODUCTNAME. - All the options of %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web are now available to you, such as Show HTML source. + Choose the file type "HTML Document" to open in %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web. This is the default for HTML documents in %PRODUCTNAME. + All the options of %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web are now available to you, such as Show HTML source. - Choose "HTML Document (%PRODUCTNAME Writer)" to open in %PRODUCTNAME Writer. - All the options of %PRODUCTNAME Writer are now available to you. Not all options that %PRODUCTNAME Writer offers for editing of documents can be saved in HTML format. + Choose "HTML Document (%PRODUCTNAME Writer)" to open in %PRODUCTNAME Writer. + All the options of %PRODUCTNAME Writer are now available to you. Not all options that %PRODUCTNAME Writer offers for editing of documents can be saved in HTML format. @@ -89,8 +89,8 @@ - Working with VBA code - Setting the default file format + Working with VBA code + Setting the default file format
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp index 64eac4c28e..e6530fcf0f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp @@ -50,68 +50,68 @@ pictures;filters filters;pictures mw made "illustrations,..." a see-reference -Inserting, Editing, Saving Bitmaps +Inserting, Editing, Saving Bitmaps -Inserting Bitmaps -A bitmap image can be inserted in $[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc, $[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress documents. +Inserting Bitmaps +A bitmap image can be inserted in $[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc, $[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress documents. -Choose Insert - Image - From File. +Choose Insert - Image - From File. -Select the file. In the File type box you can restrict the selection to certain file types. +Select the file. In the File type box you can restrict the selection to certain file types. -Click the Link box if you want a link to the original file. -If the Link box is marked, whenever the document is updated and loaded the bitmap image is reloaded. The editing steps that you have carried out in the local copy of the image in the document are re-applied and the image is displayed. -If the Link box is not marked, you are always working with the copy created when the graphic was first inserted. -To embed graphics that were first inserted as links, go to Edit - Links and click the Break Link button. +Click the Link box if you want a link to the original file. +If the Link box is marked, whenever the document is updated and loaded the bitmap image is reloaded. The editing steps that you have carried out in the local copy of the image in the document are re-applied and the image is displayed. +If the Link box is not marked, you are always working with the copy created when the graphic was first inserted. +To embed graphics that were first inserted as links, go to Edit - Links and click the Break Link button. -Click Open to insert the image. +Click Open to insert the image. -Editing Bitmaps -Icons on the Image bar -When you select the bitmap image, the Image Bar offers you the tools for editing the image. Only a local copy is edited in the document, even if you have inserted an image as a link. -The Image Bar may look slightly different depending to the module you are using. +Editing Bitmaps +Icons on the Image bar +When you select the bitmap image, the Image Bar offers you the tools for editing the image. Only a local copy is edited in the document, even if you have inserted an image as a link. +The Image Bar may look slightly different depending to the module you are using. A number of filters are located on the Image Filter toolbar, which you can open with the icon on the Image Bar. -The original image file will not be changed by the filters. Filters are applied to an image only inside the document. -Some of the filters open a dialog, which you can use to select, for example, the intensity of the filter. Most filters can be applied multiple times to increase the filter effect. -In $[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress, you can add text and graphics, select these objects together with the bitmap, and export the selection as a new bitmap image. -The Image dialog +The original image file will not be changed by the filters. Filters are applied to an image only inside the document. +Some of the filters open a dialog, which you can use to select, for example, the intensity of the filter. Most filters can be applied multiple times to increase the filter effect. +In $[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress, you can add text and graphics, select these objects together with the bitmap, and export the selection as a new bitmap image. +The Image dialog -Right-click the image and choose Image from the submenu to open a properties dialog. +Right-click the image and choose Image from the submenu to open a properties dialog. -Change the properties of the selected image, then click OK. +Change the properties of the selected image, then click OK. -Saving Bitmaps -If you want to save in a format such as GIF, JPEG or TIFF, you must select and export the bitmap image. -To export a bitmap in Draw or Impress: +Saving Bitmaps +If you want to save in a format such as GIF, JPEG or TIFF, you must select and export the bitmap image. +To export a bitmap in Draw or Impress: -Select the bitmap image. You can also select additional objects, such as text, to be exported with the image by pressing the shift key while selecting or by opening a selection frame around all objects. +Select the bitmap image. You can also select additional objects, such as text, to be exported with the image by pressing the shift key while selecting or by opening a selection frame around all objects. -Choose File - Export. The Export dialog opens. -The Export command writes the image with all applied filter effects to a file. The Save Image command in the context menu saves the image without any filter effects, if the image was inserted as a linked image. An embedded image will always be saved or exported with filters applied.see i70055 +Choose File - Export. The Export dialog opens. +The Export command writes the image with all applied filter effects to a file. The Save Image command in the context menu saves the image without any filter effects, if the image was inserted as a linked image. An embedded image will always be saved or exported with filters applied.see i70055 -In the File format field, select the file format you want, for example GIF or JPEG. +In the File format field, select the file format you want, for example GIF or JPEG. -If you only want to export the selected objects, mark the Selection box. -If Selection is not marked, the entire page of the document is exported. +If you only want to export the selected objects, mark the Selection box. +If Selection is not marked, the entire page of the document is exported. -Enter a name for the file and click Export. +Enter a name for the file and click Export. -To export a bitmap in Writer: Right-click the bitmap, choose Save Graphics. You see the Image Export dialog. Enter a file name and select a file type. +To export a bitmap in Writer: Right-click the bitmap, choose Save Graphics. You see the Image Export dialog. Enter a file name and select a file type. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp index bbca74047b..bd20c0c509 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp @@ -47,48 +47,47 @@ editing;draw objects pictures;scaling/resizing MW added "graphic objects, see also..." -Editing Graphic Objects +Editing Graphic Objects - Choose View - Toolbars - Drawing to open the Drawing toolbar, if it is not already open. - Drawing objects can be subsequently edited and modified. Drawing objects created in this way are vector graphics, which you can scale freely without any loss of quality. - To create a rectangle, click the rectangle icon and move your cursor to the place in the document where you want one corner of the rectangle to be. Press the mouse button and hold it down while dragging to the opposite corner of the rectangle. When you release the mouse button, the rectangle is inserted in the document. It is selected, and you can edit its properties through the context menu. + Choose View - Toolbars - Drawing to open the Drawing toolbar, if it is not already open. + Drawing objects can be subsequently edited and modified. Drawing objects created in this way are vector graphics, which you can scale freely without any loss of quality. + To create a rectangle, click the rectangle icon and move your cursor to the place in the document where you want one corner of the rectangle to be. Press the mouse button and hold it down while dragging to the opposite corner of the rectangle. When you release the mouse button, the rectangle is inserted in the document. It is selected, and you can edit its properties through the context menu. - To draw multiple objects of the same type, double-click the icon. + To draw multiple objects of the same type, double-click the icon. To draw multiple objects of the same type, double-click the icon. Draw multiple objects of the same type. Click the document without moving the mouse to stop drawing objects. - If you want to open up draw objects from the center instead of dragging from one corner to the other, hold down the Option + If you want to open up draw objects from the center instead of dragging from one corner to the other, hold down the Option Alt key while dragging. With some window managers, you may need to hold down also the meta key. - Holding down the Shift key while dragging restricts the created object. For example, instead of a rectangle you get a square, instead of an ellipse you get a circle. When you drag a handle of an existing object with Shift held down, the aspect ratio of the object is retained. + Holding down the Shift key while dragging restricts the created object. For example, instead of a rectangle you get a square, instead of an ellipse you get a circle. When you drag a handle of an existing object with Shift held down, the aspect ratio of the object is retained. - To scale the objects, first select them by clicking on them with the selection tool. You then see eight handles around the object. When you drag one of the four corner handles, the opposite corner remains fixed while the other three corners move. When you drag one of the side handles, the opposite side remains fixed. + To scale the objects, first select them by clicking on them with the selection tool. You then see eight handles around the object. When you drag one of the four corner handles, the opposite corner remains fixed while the other three corners move. When you drag one of the side handles, the opposite side remains fixed. - To scale a draw object using the keyboard, first select the object, then press Command + To scale a draw object using the keyboard, first select the object, then press Command Ctrl+Tab repeatedly to highlight one of the handles. Then press an arrow key. To scale in smaller steps, hold down the Option Alt key while pressing an arrow key. Press Esc to leave the point edit mode. - To move draw objects, first select them. To select more than one object, press the Shift key while clicking. Select text objects by clicking exactly on their edge. While holding down the mouse button, drag the objects to the new location. + To move draw objects, first select them. To select more than one object, press the Shift key while clicking. Select text objects by clicking exactly on their edge. While holding down the mouse button, drag the objects to the new location. - To move a draw object using the keyboard, first select the object, then press an arrow key. To move in smaller steps, hold down the Option + To move a draw object using the keyboard, first select the object, then press an arrow key. To move in smaller steps, hold down the Option Alt key while pressing an arrow key. - To enter text to be a part of a graphics object, select the object and start typing your text. Click outside the object to end entering text. Double-click text inside an object to edit the text. + To enter text to be a part of a graphics object, select the object and start typing your text. Click outside the object to end entering text. Double-click text inside an object to edit the text. - To revert to normal mode after creating and editing draw objects, click in an area of the document containing no objects. If you see a drawing cursor, first exit this mode by clicking the Select icon. + To revert to normal mode after creating and editing draw objects, click in an area of the document containing no objects. If you see a drawing cursor, first exit this mode by clicking the Select icon.
- Information about the individual icons + Information about the individual icons diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/insert_specialchar.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/insert_specialchar.xhp index 853afb05cb..c3de81def3 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/insert_specialchar.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/insert_specialchar.xhp @@ -36,30 +36,30 @@ accents compose key to insert special characters -Inserting Special Characters +Inserting Special Characters -This function allows you to insert special characters, such as check marks, boxes, and telephone symbols, into your text. +This function allows you to insert special characters, such as check marks, boxes, and telephone symbols, into your text. -To view a selection of all characters, choose Insert - Special Character. +To view a selection of all characters, choose Insert - Special Character. -In the large selection field click the desired character or several characters in succession. The characters are displayed at the bottom of the dialog. When you close the dialog with OK, all displayed characters in the selected font are inserted in the current document. +In the large selection field click the desired character or several characters in succession. The characters are displayed at the bottom of the dialog. When you close the dialog with OK, all displayed characters in the selected font are inserted in the current document. -In any text input field (such as the input fields in the Find & Replace dialog) you can press Shift+CommandCtrl+S to open the Special Characters dialog. +In any text input field (such as the input fields in the Find & Replace dialog) you can press Shift+CommandCtrl+S to open the Special Characters dialog. -At present there are three ways of entering letters with accents directly from the keyboard. +At present there are three ways of entering letters with accents directly from the keyboard. -Solaris: Using a Sun keyboard. First press the Compose key to the right of the space bar, then enter the first and second modifiers. +Solaris: Using a Sun keyboard. First press the Compose key to the right of the space bar, then enter the first and second modifiers. -Linux / NetBSD: Using the dead-keys. In an xterm window first press the (´) or (`) key. The character should not appear on the screen. Now press a letter, such as "e". The e is given an accent, é or è. If not, then check in the XF86Config file if a "nodeadkeys" XkbdVariant has been loaded there and replace it. You may also have set the environment variable SAL_NO_DEADKEYS, which deactivates the dead-keys. +Linux / NetBSD: Using the dead-keys. In an xterm window first press the (´) or (`) key. The character should not appear on the screen. Now press a letter, such as "e". The e is given an accent, é or è. If not, then check in the XF86Config file if a "nodeadkeys" XkbdVariant has been loaded there and replace it. You may also have set the environment variable SAL_NO_DEADKEYS, which deactivates the dead-keys. -All Unix systems: (Alt Graph) as additional compose key. The (Alt Graph) key can work in $[officename] like the Compose key, if you set the environment variable SAL_ALTGR_COMPOSE. The (Alt Graph) key must trigger a mode_switch, so, for example, xmodmap -e "keysym Alt_R = Mode_switch" must be set. First press (Alt Graph), then the first modifier, then the second modifier. The characters are combined as described on a Solaris system in the file /usr/openwin/include/X11/Suncompose.h. +All Unix systems: (Alt Graph) as additional compose key. The (Alt Graph) key can work in $[officename] like the Compose key, if you set the environment variable SAL_ALTGR_COMPOSE. The (Alt Graph) key must trigger a mode_switch, so, for example, xmodmap -e "keysym Alt_R = Mode_switch" must be set. First press (Alt Graph), then the first modifier, then the second modifier. The characters are combined as described on a Solaris system in the file /usr/openwin/include/X11/Suncompose.h. -Special Characters -AutoCorrect +Special Characters +AutoCorrect diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/integratinguno.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/integratinguno.xhp index 71d2de8d05..5a709a6c14 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/integratinguno.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/integratinguno.xhp @@ -34,23 +34,23 @@ UNO components;integrating new installing;UNO components -Integrating new UNO components +Integrating new UNO components -Programmers can write and integrate their own UNO (Universal Network Objects) components to $[officename]. Those new components can be added to the $[officename] menus and toolbars; we call them "Add-Ons". -The integration of new components is supported by some tools and services. Details can be found in the $[officename] Developer's Guide. The three main steps are as follows: +Programmers can write and integrate their own UNO (Universal Network Objects) components to $[officename]. Those new components can be added to the $[officename] menus and toolbars; we call them "Add-Ons". +The integration of new components is supported by some tools and services. Details can be found in the $[officename] Developer's Guide. The three main steps are as follows: -Register the new components within $[officename]. This can be accomplished using the tool unopkg, which can be found in {installpath}/ +Register the new components within $[officename]. This can be accomplished using the tool unopkg, which can be found in {installpath}/ \program. -Integrate the new components as services. The ProtocolHandler and JobDispatch services assist you; more information can be found in the $[officename] Developer's Guide. +Integrate the new components as services. The ProtocolHandler and JobDispatch services assist you; more information can be found in the $[officename] Developer's Guide. -Change the user interface (menus or toolbars). This can be done almost automatically by writing an XML text file that describes the changes. More information can be found in the $[officename] Developer's Guide. +Change the user interface (menus or toolbars). This can be done almost automatically by writing an XML text file that describes the changes. More information can be found in the $[officename] Developer's Guide. -The Add-Ons can extend the functionality of $[officename]. They are not related to the Add-Ins +The Add-Ons can extend the functionality of $[officename]. They are not related to the Add-Ins Add-Ins that provide new functions for $[officename] Calc. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp index bfc4ac95b2..24566ca127 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp @@ -30,401 +30,375 @@ accessibility;general shortcuts shortcut keys; %PRODUCTNAME accessibility -Shortcuts (%PRODUCTNAME Accessibility) +Shortcuts (%PRODUCTNAME Accessibility) - You can control %PRODUCTNAME without using a mouse device, using only the keyboard. - On each module's main help page (for example, the %PRODUCTNAME Writer or %PRODUCTNAME Calc main help page) there is a link to access the keyboard shortcuts' help for that module. - In addition, under the keyword "Accessibility" you find step-by-step instructions about how to control the selected module without a mouse device. + You can control %PRODUCTNAME without using a mouse device, using only the keyboard. + On each module's main help page (for example, the %PRODUCTNAME Writer or %PRODUCTNAME Calc main help page) there is a link to access the keyboard shortcuts' help for that module. + In addition, under the keyword "Accessibility" you find step-by-step instructions about how to control the selected module without a mouse device. - Working with the %PRODUCTNAME user interface without mouse - Activating menu bar, toolbars, windows, and document - Repeatedly pressing F6 switches the focus and circles through the following objects: + Working with the %PRODUCTNAME user interface without mouse + Activating menu bar, toolbars, windows, and document + Repeatedly pressing F6 switches the focus and circles through the following objects: - menu bar, + menu bar, - every toolbar from top to bottom and from left to right, + every toolbar from top to bottom and from left to right, - every free window from left to right, + every free window from left to right, - document + document removed para about Ctrl+Tab -Press Shift+F6 to switch through objects in the opposite direction. - Press Command +Press Shift+F6 to switch through objects in the opposite direction. + Press Command Ctrl+F6 to switch to the document. - Press F10 to switch to the menu bar and back. - Escape closes an open submenu, a toolbar, or the current free window. - Calling a menu command - Press Option + Press F10 to switch to the menu bar and back. + Escape closes an open submenu, a toolbar, or the current free window. + Calling a menu command + Press Option Alt or F6 or F10 to select the first menu (the File menu). With right arrow, the next menu to the right is selected; with left arrow, the previous menu. - Arrow down opens a selected menu. Any additional arrow down and up arrow move the selection through the menu commands. With right arrow you open any existing submenus. - Press Enter to execute the selected menu command. - Executing an icon command - Press F6 repeatedly until the first icon on the toolbar is selected. Use the right and left arrows to select an icon on a horizontal toolbar. Similarly, use the up and down arrows to select an icon on a vertical toolbar. The Home key selects the first icon on a toolbar and the End key, the last. - Press Enter to execute the selected icon. If the selected icon normally demands a consecutive mouse action, such as inserting a rectangle, then pressing the Enter key is not sufficient: in these cases press Command + Arrow down opens a selected menu. Any additional arrow down and up arrow move the selection through the menu commands. With right arrow you open any existing submenus. + Press Enter to execute the selected menu command. + Executing an icon command + Press F6 repeatedly until the first icon on the toolbar is selected. Use the right and left arrows to select an icon on a horizontal toolbar. Similarly, use the up and down arrows to select an icon on a vertical toolbar. The Home key selects the first icon on a toolbar and the End key, the last. + Press Enter to execute the selected icon. If the selected icon normally demands a consecutive mouse action, such as inserting a rectangle, then pressing the Enter key is not sufficient: in these cases press Command Ctrl+Enter. - Pressing Command + Pressing Command Ctrl+Enter on an icon for creating a draw object. A draw object will be placed into the middle of the view, with a predefined size. - Press Command + Press Command Ctrl+Enter on the Selection tool to select the first draw object in the document. If you want to edit, size, or move the selected draw object, first use Command Ctrl+F6 to set the focus into the document. - If a toolbar is longer than can be displayed on screen, it shows an icon at the right or lower edge. Select the toolbar and press PageUp or PageDown to display the remaining icons. - Special hints for toolbars - Press the down arrow or right arrow to open the selected toolbar. This is equivalent to a mouse click. In the toolbar use the right arrow and left arrow keys. The Home and End keys select the first and last icon in the toolbar, respectively. - Close the toolbar with Esc. It is not possible to move the toolbar without a mouse. - Selection from a combo box + If a toolbar is longer than can be displayed on screen, it shows an icon at the right or lower edge. Select the toolbar and press PageUp or PageDown to display the remaining icons. + Special hints for toolbars + Press the down arrow or right arrow to open the selected toolbar. This is equivalent to a mouse click. In the toolbar use the right arrow and left arrow keys. The Home and End keys select the first and last icon in the toolbar, respectively. + Close the toolbar with Esc. It is not possible to move the toolbar without a mouse. + Selection from a combo box - + Combo box - Select the combo box. Press Enter. - Use the down arrow or Page Down key to scroll down the combo box entries, or the up arrow or Page Up key to scroll upwards. The Home key takes you to the first entry and the End key takes you to the last entry. - Press Enter to execute the selected entry. + Select the combo box. Press Enter. + Use the down arrow or Page Down key to scroll down the combo box entries, or the up arrow or Page Up key to scroll upwards. The Home key takes you to the first entry and the End key takes you to the last entry. + Press Enter to execute the selected entry.
- Selection in Tables - In several windows, dialogs, and in the table control field, there are tables to select data, for instance, in the right part of the Data Source View. The following keys are used for selections in these tables: + Selection in Tables + In several windows, dialogs, and in the table control field, there are tables to select data, for instance, in the right part of the Data Source View. The following keys are used for selections in these tables: - Spacebar: switches from selection of the current row and cancellation of any selection, but not if the current cell is in edit mode. + Spacebar: switches from selection of the current row and cancellation of any selection, but not if the current cell is in edit mode. - Command + Command Ctrl+spacebar: switches between selection of the current row and cancellation of this selection. - Command + Command Ctrl+Shift+spacebar: switches between selection of the current column and cancellation of this selection. - Option + Option Alt+Up Arrow or Option Alt+Down Arrow: moves the window separator between table and form, for instance in the bibliography database. - In a table control or in the data source view, the Tab key moves to the next column. To move to the next control, press Command + In a table control or in the data source view, the Tab key moves to the next column. To move to the next control, press Command Ctrl+Tab. To move to the previous control, press Shift+Command Ctrl+Tab. - Size and Position of Windows and Dialogs + Size and Position of Windows and Dialogs - First press Option + First press Option Alt+spacebar. - A system menu opens with menu commands like Move, Resize and Close. + A system menu opens with menu commands like Move, Resize and Close. - Choose a command (down arrow, then Enter). + Choose a command (down arrow, then Enter). - Now you can use the arrow keys to move or resize the dialog or window. + Now you can use the arrow keys to move or resize the dialog or window. - Press Enter to accept the change. Press Escape to cancel the changes. + Press Enter to accept the change. Press Escape to cancel the changes. - Docking and Undocking Windows and Toolbars + Docking and Undocking Windows and Toolbars - Press F6 until the window or toolbar is selected. + Press F6 until the window or toolbar is selected. - Press Command + Press Command Ctrl+Shift+F10. - Selecting objects - Press Shift+F4 to select the first object in the current document. When an object is selected, press Tab to select the next object, or press Esc to go back to the text. - Edit Objects - A selected OLE object can be activated with the Enter key. - Edit Position and Size of Objects + Selecting objects + Press Shift+F4 to select the first object in the current document. When an object is selected, press Tab to select the next object, or press Esc to go back to the text. + Edit Objects + A selected OLE object can be activated with the Enter key. + Edit Position and Size of Objects - Use the arrow keys to move the selected object by one grid resolution unit. - Set the grid resolution unit with %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Grid in the Resolution area. If you enter a number greater than 1 in the Subdivision area, you must press the arrow key as often as the number states to move the selected object by one grid resolution unit. + Use the arrow keys to move the selected object by one grid resolution unit. + Set the grid resolution unit with %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Grid in the Resolution area. If you enter a number greater than 1 in the Subdivision area, you must press the arrow key as often as the number states to move the selected object by one grid resolution unit. - Use the Option + Use the Option Alt and arrow keys to move the selected object by one pixel. - Use Command + Use Command Ctrl+Tab to enter the handle edit mode. The upper left handle is the active handle, it starts blinking. Use Command Ctrl+Tab to select the next handle. Press Escape to exit the handle edit mode. - In the handle edit mode, the arrow keys move the selected handle, which changes the object size. + In the handle edit mode, the arrow keys move the selected handle, which changes the object size. - Edit the Anchors of Objects - You can move the anchor of an object with the arrow keys. First enter the handle edit mode and select the anchor. Depending on the type of anchor, you can then move the anchor in different directions. + Edit the Anchors of Objects + You can move the anchor of an object with the arrow keys. First enter the handle edit mode and select the anchor. Depending on the type of anchor, you can then move the anchor in different directions. - Select the object. + Select the object. - Enter the handle edit mode with Command + Enter the handle edit mode with Command Ctrl+Tab. - The upper left handle starts blinking. Press Command + The upper left handle starts blinking. Press Command Ctrl+Tab several times, until no handle blinks. This signals that now the anchor of the object is activated. In text documents you can press Shift+Command Ctrl+A to activate the anchor directly. - Use the arrow keys to move the anchor. The object follows the anchor as appropriate. + Use the arrow keys to move the anchor. The object follows the anchor as appropriate. - You can change the anchor of the selected object for example in the object's context menu. + You can change the anchor of the selected object for example in the object's context menu. - If the object is anchored To Paragraph, the arrow keys move the object to the previous or next paragraph. + If the object is anchored To Paragraph, the arrow keys move the object to the previous or next paragraph. - If the object is anchored To page, the keys Page Up or Page Down move it to the previous or next page. + If the object is anchored To page, the keys Page Up or Page Down move it to the previous or next page. - If the object is anchored To character, the Arrow keys move it through the current paragraph. + If the object is anchored To character, the Arrow keys move it through the current paragraph. - If the object is anchored As character, no anchor icon exists. You cannot move the object. + If the object is anchored As character, no anchor icon exists. You cannot move the object. - If the object is anchored To frame, the Arrow keys move it to the next frame in the respective direction. + If the object is anchored To frame, the Arrow keys move it to the next frame in the respective direction. - Controlling the Dividing Lines - Documents of %PRODUCTNAME Calc, %PRODUCTNAME Draw, and %PRODUCTNAME Impress can be split horizontally and vertically into separate views. Each view can show other parts of the document. Using the mouse, you can drag a dividing line from the scrollbar into the document. + Controlling the Dividing Lines + Documents of %PRODUCTNAME Calc, %PRODUCTNAME Draw, and %PRODUCTNAME Impress can be split horizontally and vertically into separate views. Each view can show other parts of the document. Using the mouse, you can drag a dividing line from the scrollbar into the document. - Shift+Command + Shift+Command Ctrl+F6: shows the dividing lines at default positions and focus a line. - Arrow keys: moves the current dividing line a big step in the arrow direction. + Arrow keys: moves the current dividing line a big step in the arrow direction. - Shift+Arrow keys: moves the current dividing line a small step in the arrow direction. + Shift+Arrow keys: moves the current dividing line a small step in the arrow direction. - Delete: deletes the current dividing line + Delete: deletes the current dividing line - Shift+Delete: deletes both dividing lines + Shift+Delete: deletes both dividing lines - Enter: fixes the current position of the dividing lines + Enter: fixes the current position of the dividing lines - Escape: resets the current dividing line to its default position + Escape: resets the current dividing line to its default position
- Controlling the Data Source View - F4: opens and closes the data source view. - F6: switches between document and toolbars. - + (plus key): expands the selected entry in the data source explorer. - - (minus key): collapses the selected entry in the data source explorer. - Command + Controlling the Data Source View + F4: opens and closes the data source view. + F6: switches between document and toolbars. + + (plus key): expands the selected entry in the data source explorer. + - (minus key): collapses the selected entry in the data source explorer. + Command Ctrl+Shift+E: switches between data source explorer and table. - Shortcuts in the Query Design Window - F6: switches between object bar, table view, and selection area. - Option + Shortcuts in the Query Design Window + F6: switches between object bar, table view, and selection area. + Option Alt+Up arrow or Option Alt+Down arrow: moves the border between table view and selection area up or down. - Keys in the Table View (upper area of the query design) and in the Relations window - Command + Keys in the Table View (upper area of the query design) and in the Relations window + Command Ctrl+Arrow key: moves the selected table in the direction of the arrow. - Command + Command Ctrl+Shift+Arrow key: resizes the selected table in the table view. - Del: removes the selected table or connection from the table view. - Tab: switches between tables and connections in the table view. - Enter: when a connection is selected, the Enter key opens the Properties dialog of the connection. - Enter: when a table is selected, the Enter key enters the first data field from the list box into the selection area. - Keys in the Selection Area (bottom area of the query design) - Command + Del: removes the selected table or connection from the table view. + Tab: switches between tables and connections in the table view. + Enter: when a connection is selected, the Enter key opens the Properties dialog of the connection. + Enter: when a table is selected, the Enter key enters the first data field from the list box into the selection area. + Keys in the Selection Area (bottom area of the query design) + Command Ctrl+Left Arrow or Right Arrow: moves the selected column to the left or to the right. - Keys in the Table Design Window - F6: switches between toolbar, column view, and properties area. + Keys in the Table Design Window + F6: switches between toolbar, column view, and properties area.
- Controlling the ImageMap Editor + Controlling the ImageMap Editor - Press Tab to select an icon. If you selected one of the icons from Rectangle to Freeform Polygon and you press Command + Press Tab to select an icon. If you selected one of the icons from Rectangle to Freeform Polygon and you press Command Ctrl+Enter, an object of the selected type is created in default size. - If you press Enter while the icon Select is selected, the focus is set into the image window of the ImageMap Editor. Press Esc to set the focus back to the icons and input boxes. + If you press Enter while the icon Select is selected, the focus is set into the image window of the ImageMap Editor. Press Esc to set the focus back to the icons and input boxes. - If the Select icon is selected and you press Ctrl+Enter, the first object in the image window gets selected. + If the Select icon is selected and you press Ctrl+Enter, the first object in the image window gets selected. - Use the icon Edit Points to switch into the point edit mode for polygons and back. + Use the icon Edit Points to switch into the point edit mode for polygons and back. - Use Ctrl+Tab in the image window to select the next point. Use Shift+Ctrl+Tab to select the previous point. + Use Ctrl+Tab in the image window to select the next point. Use Shift+Ctrl+Tab to select the previous point. - Use the Delete key with the focus in the image window to delete the selected object. + Use the Delete key with the focus in the image window to delete the selected object.
- Controlling the Help - Press Shift+F1 to display the Extended Tips for the currently selected command, icon or control. - Navigating the main help pages + Controlling the Help + Press Shift+F1 to display the Extended Tips for the currently selected command, icon or control. + Navigating the main help pages - In the main help pages, use Tab to jump to the next hyperlink or Shift+Tab to jump to the previous link. + In the main help pages, use Tab to jump to the next hyperlink or Shift+Tab to jump to the previous link. - Press Enter to execute the selected hyperlink. + Press Enter to execute the selected hyperlink. - Press Backspace above the Enter key to return to the previous help page. + Press Backspace above the Enter key to return to the previous help page. - Controlling the Text Import dialog (CSV file import) - Ruler + Controlling the Text Import dialog (CSV file import) + Ruler - Left or Right Arrow: go one position to the left or to the right + Left or Right Arrow: go one position to the left or to the right - Ctrl+Left Arrow or Ctrl+Right Arrow: jump to the previous or to the next split + Ctrl+Left Arrow or Ctrl+Right Arrow: jump to the previous or to the next split - Ctrl+Shift+Left Arrow or Ctrl+Shift+Right Arrow: move a split one position to the left or to the right + Ctrl+Shift+Left Arrow or Ctrl+Shift+Right Arrow: move a split one position to the left or to the right - Home or End: jump to the first or the last possible position + Home or End: jump to the first or the last possible position - Ctrl+Home or Ctrl+End: jump to the first or the last split + Ctrl+Home or Ctrl+End: jump to the first or the last split - Shift+Ctrl+Home or Shift+Ctrl+End: move split to the first or to the last position + Shift+Ctrl+Home or Shift+Ctrl+End: move split to the first or to the last position - Space key: insert or remove a split + Space key: insert or remove a split - Insert key: insert a split (leave existing splits unchanged) + Insert key: insert a split (leave existing splits unchanged) - Delete key: delete a split + Delete key: delete a split - Shift+Delete: delete all splits + Shift+Delete: delete all splits - Up Arrow or Down Arrow: scroll table down or up one row + Up Arrow or Down Arrow: scroll table down or up one row - Page Up or Page Down: scroll table down or up one page + Page Up or Page Down: scroll table down or up one page - Escape key (during mouse drag): cancel drag, move split to old position + Escape key (during mouse drag): cancel drag, move split to old position - Preview + Preview - Left Arrow or Right Arrow: select left or right column and clear other selections + Left Arrow or Right Arrow: select left or right column and clear other selections - Ctrl+Left Arrow or Ctrl+Right Arrow: move focus to the left or to the right column (does not change selection) + Ctrl+Left Arrow or Ctrl+Right Arrow: move focus to the left or to the right column (does not change selection) - Shift+Left Arrow or Shift+Right Arrow: expand or shrink the selected range + Shift+Left Arrow or Shift+Right Arrow: expand or shrink the selected range - Ctrl+Shift+Left Arrow or Ctrl+Shift+Right Arrow: expand or shrink the selected range (does not change other selections) + Ctrl+Shift+Left Arrow or Ctrl+Shift+Right Arrow: expand or shrink the selected range (does not change other selections) - Home or End: select the first or the last column (use Shift or Ctrl as with cursor keys) + Home or End: select the first or the last column (use Shift or Ctrl as with cursor keys) - Shift+Space key: select the range from the last selected column to the current column + Shift+Space key: select the range from the last selected column to the current column - Ctrl+Shift+Space key: select the range from the last selected column to the current column (does not change other selections) + Ctrl+Shift+Space key: select the range from the last selected column to the current column (does not change other selections) - Ctrl+A: select all columns + Ctrl+A: select all columns - Shift+F10: open a context menu + Shift+F10: open a context menu - Ctrl+1 ... Ctrl+7: set the 1st ... 7th column type for the selected columns + Ctrl+1 ... Ctrl+7: set the 1st ... 7th column type for the selected columns - Up Arrow or Down Arrow: scroll table down or up one row + Up Arrow or Down Arrow: scroll table down or up one row - Page Up or Page Down: scroll table down or up one page + Page Up or Page Down: scroll table down or up one page - Ctrl+Home or Ctrl+End: scroll to the top or bottom of a table + Ctrl+Home or Ctrl+End: scroll to the top or bottom of a table - Controlling the Insert - Special Character Dialog + Controlling the Insert - Special Character Dialog - Tab switches through all controls in the dialog. + Tab switches through all controls in the dialog. - Option + Option Alt+Down Arrow opens a combo box. Enter selects the current entry in the combo box. - Arrow buttons move through the main selection area. Spacebar adds the current character to the list of characters to be inserted. + Arrow buttons move through the main selection area. Spacebar adds the current character to the list of characters to be inserted. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/labels.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/labels.xhp index beec836ab4..2faefa4862 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/labels.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/labels.xhp @@ -34,39 +34,39 @@ business cards; creating and synchronizing synchronizing;labels and business cards mw made "synchronizing..." a two level entry -Creating and Printing Labels and Business Cards +Creating and Printing Labels and Business Cards -Designing Business Cards Through a Dialog -Choose File - New - Business Cards to open the Business Cards dialog, which allows you to choose how your business cards will look. -Designing Labels and Business Cards -You can design both labels and business cards through the Labels dialog. +Designing Business Cards Through a Dialog +Choose File - New - Business Cards to open the Business Cards dialog, which allows you to choose how your business cards will look. +Designing Labels and Business Cards +You can design both labels and business cards through the Labels dialog. -Choose File - New - Labels to open the Labels dialog. +Choose File - New - Labels to open the Labels dialog. -On the Labels tab, under Format, define the label format. -$[officename] Writer contains many formats of commercially available sheets for labels, badges, and business cards. You can also add other, user-defined formats. +On the Labels tab, under Format, define the label format. +$[officename] Writer contains many formats of commercially available sheets for labels, badges, and business cards. You can also add other, user-defined formats. -On the Labels tab, under Inscription, you can choose what you want written on the labels. -This often involves database fields, so that the labels can be printed with varying content, when sending "Form Letters" for example. It is also possible to have the same text printed on every label. -Use the Database and Table list boxes to select the database and table from which the data fields are obtained. Click on the arrow button to transfer the selected data field into the inscription area. Press Enter to insert a line break. You can also enter spaces and any other fixed text. -On the Format tab you can define your own label formats, not covered by the predefined formats. To do this, select "User" from the Type list box. On the Options tab, you can specify whether all labels or only certain ones are to be created. +On the Labels tab, under Inscription, you can choose what you want written on the labels. +This often involves database fields, so that the labels can be printed with varying content, when sending "Form Letters" for example. It is also possible to have the same text printed on every label. +Use the Database and Table list boxes to select the database and table from which the data fields are obtained. Click on the arrow button to transfer the selected data field into the inscription area. Press Enter to insert a line break. You can also enter spaces and any other fixed text. +On the Format tab you can define your own label formats, not covered by the predefined formats. To do this, select "User" from the Type list box. On the Options tab, you can specify whether all labels or only certain ones are to be created. -On the Options tab page, make sure that the Synchronize contents box is selected. If this is selected, a label only has to be entered (on the top left label) and edited once. +On the Options tab page, make sure that the Synchronize contents box is selected. If this is selected, a label only has to be entered (on the top left label) and edited once. -Click on New Document to create a new document with the settings you have entered. +Click on New Document to create a new document with the settings you have entered. -As soon as you click on New Document, you will see a small window with the Synchronize Labels button. Enter the first label. When you click on the Synchronize Labels button, the current individual label is copied to all the other labels on the sheet. +As soon as you click on New Document, you will see a small window with the Synchronize Labels button. Enter the first label. When you click on the Synchronize Labels button, the current individual label is copied to all the other labels on the sheet. -Business Cards +Business Cards diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/labels_database.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/labels_database.xhp index 4202c69f1a..f4a41eb99d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/labels_database.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/labels_database.xhp @@ -32,37 +32,36 @@ stickers databases;creating labels mw deleted "creating;" -Printing Address Labels +Printing Address Labels - Choose File - New - Labels to open the Labels dialog. + Choose File - New - Labels to open the Labels dialog. - On the Labels tab page, select the format of the label sheets you want to print on. + On the Labels tab page, select the format of the label sheets you want to print on. - Choose the database and table from which to get the data. + Choose the database and table from which to get the data. - Select a database field of which you want to print the contents. Click the button that shows a left arrow to insert the database field into the Label Text box. - Continue to select and insert database fields if you want more fields on every label. You can press Enter to insert a new line, and you can type any character to insert fixed text. + Select a database field of which you want to print the contents. Click the button that shows a left arrow to insert the database field into the Label Text box. + Continue to select and insert database fields if you want more fields on every label. You can press Enter to insert a new line, and you can type any character to insert fixed text. - Optionally, if you want to type more text, apply formatting, or insert images and line art, you should enable Synchronize contents on the Options tab. If you enable this, once you leave the Labels dialog box a small window opens with a Synchronize button. Now you only need to work on the first label on the labels document, then click the Synchronize button to copy your work to every label of the document. + Optionally, if you want to type more text, apply formatting, or insert images and line art, you should enable Synchronize contents on the Options tab. If you enable this, once you leave the Labels dialog box a small window opens with a Synchronize button. Now you only need to work on the first label on the labels document, then click the Synchronize button to copy your work to every label of the document. - Click New Document. + Click New Document. - When you see the label document, you might want to temporarily enable View - Field Names. This displays the fields in a more visible manner, so that you can arrange and edit label contents more easily. + When you see the label document, you might want to temporarily enable View - Field Names. This displays the fields in a more visible manner, so that you can arrange and edit label contents more easily. - You can save and/or print the label document. + You can save and/or print the label document. - When you choose to print the document, you will be asked if you want to print a form letter. Answer Yes to open the Mail Merge dialog. In the Mail Merge dialog, you can select the records for which you want to print labels. + When you choose to print the document, you will be asked if you want to print a form letter. Answer Yes to open the Mail Merge dialog. In the Mail Merge dialog, you can select the records for which you want to print labels.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp index ee157a506d..cc7ef4eec9 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp @@ -38,174 +38,172 @@ spellcheck; default languages dictionaries, see also languages mw deleted "applying;" and changed "languages;" -Selecting the Document Language +Selecting the Document Language - The language you select for your document determines the dictionary used for spellcheck, thesaurus and hyphenation, the decimal and thousands delimiter used and the default currency format. + The language you select for your document determines the dictionary used for spellcheck, thesaurus and hyphenation, the decimal and thousands delimiter used and the default currency format. - The language you select applies to the whole document. + The language you select applies to the whole document. - Within the document, you can apply a separate language to any paragraph style. This has priority over the language of the whole document. + Within the document, you can apply a separate language to any paragraph style. This has priority over the language of the whole document. - You can assign a language to selected pieces of text in a paragraph, either by direct formatting or with a character style. This assignment has priority over the paragraph style and document language. + You can assign a language to selected pieces of text in a paragraph, either by direct formatting or with a character style. This assignment has priority over the paragraph style and document language. - Selecting a language for the whole document + Selecting a language for the whole document - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options. Go to Language Settings - Languages. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options. Go to Language Settings - Languages. - Under Default languages for documents, select the document language for all newly created documents. If you mark For the current document only, your choice will only apply to the current document. Close the dialog with OK. + Under Default languages for documents, select the document language for all newly created documents. If you mark For the current document only, your choice will only apply to the current document. Close the dialog with OK. - Selecting a language for a Paragraph Style + Selecting a language for a Paragraph Style - Place the cursor in the paragraph whose paragraph style you want to edit. + Place the cursor in the paragraph whose paragraph style you want to edit. - Open the context menu and select Edit Paragraph Style. This opens the Paragraph Style dialog. + Open the context menu and select Edit Paragraph Style. This opens the Paragraph Style dialog. - Select the Font tab. + Select the Font tab. - Select the Language and click OK. - All paragraphs formatted with the current paragraph style will have the selected language. + Select the Language and click OK. + All paragraphs formatted with the current paragraph style will have the selected language. - Applying a language directly to selected text + Applying a language directly to selected text - Select the text to which you want to apply a language. + Select the text to which you want to apply a language. - Choose Format - Character. This opens the Character dialog. + Choose Format - Character. This opens the Character dialog. - Select the Font tab. + Select the Font tab. - Select the Language and click OK. + Select the Language and click OK. - In %PRODUCTNAME Calc, choose Format - Cells and proceed accordingly. - Selecting a language for a Character Style + In %PRODUCTNAME Calc, choose Format - Cells and proceed accordingly. + Selecting a language for a Character Style - Open the Styles and Formatting window and click on the Character Styles icon. + Open the Styles and Formatting window and click on the Character Styles icon. - Click on the name of the character style to which you want to apply a different language. + Click on the name of the character style to which you want to apply a different language. - Then open the context menu in the Styles and Formatting window and select Modify. This opens the Character Style dialog. + Then open the context menu in the Styles and Formatting window and select Modify. This opens the Character Style dialog. - Select the Font tab. + Select the Font tab. - Select the Language and click OK. - Now you can apply the character style to your selected text. + Select the Language and click OK. + Now you can apply the character style to your selected text. UFI: see i76182 -Adding More Text Languages +Adding More Text Languages - Dictionaries are supplied and installed as extensions. Choose Tools - Language - More Dictionaries Online to open the dictionaries page in your default web browser. + Dictionaries are supplied and installed as extensions. Choose Tools - Language - More Dictionaries Online to open the dictionaries page in your default web browser. - Select a dictionary in the list of descriptions. Click the heading in a dictionary description that you want to get. + Select a dictionary in the list of descriptions. Click the heading in a dictionary description that you want to get. - In the next page, click the Get It icon to download the dictionary extension. Note the folder name to which your browser downloads the file. Download additional dictionaries as you like. + In the next page, click the Get It icon to download the dictionary extension. Note the folder name to which your browser downloads the file. Download additional dictionaries as you like. - In %PRODUCTNAME, choose Tools - Extension Manager and click Add to install the downloaded extensions. + In %PRODUCTNAME, choose Tools - Extension Manager and click Add to install the downloaded extensions. - After you installed the extensions, you should close %PRODUCTNAME (including the Quickstarter), and restart. + After you installed the extensions, you should close %PRODUCTNAME (including the Quickstarter), and restart. - Setting UI Language - A standard installation of %PRODUCTNAME software will give you a user interface (UI) of your chosen language. - Most users download the American English version, which gives you English menu commands and English application help. If you want another language for the menus (and for the application help, if available in that language), change the UI language as follows. + Setting UI Language + A standard installation of %PRODUCTNAME software will give you a user interface (UI) of your chosen language. + Most users download the American English version, which gives you English menu commands and English application help. If you want another language for the menus (and for the application help, if available in that language), change the UI language as follows. - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. - Select another UI language in the "User interface" listbox. + Select another UI language in the "User interface" listbox. - Click OK and restart the %PRODUCTNAME software. + Click OK and restart the %PRODUCTNAME software. - If the listbox doesn't list the language that you want, see "Adding More UI Languages". + If the listbox doesn't list the language that you want, see "Adding More UI Languages". - Adding More UI Languages + Adding More UI Languages - Close %PRODUCTNAME software (also close the Quickstarter, if you enabled it). + Close %PRODUCTNAME software (also close the Quickstarter, if you enabled it). - Run %PRODUCTNAME installer, choose Modify, then select the language that you would like to install from the Additional user interface languages group. + Run %PRODUCTNAME installer, choose Modify, then select the language that you would like to install from the Additional user interface languages group. - If you use %PRODUCTNAME packages maintaned by your Linux distribution, follow the steps below. + If you use %PRODUCTNAME packages maintaned by your Linux distribution, follow the steps below. - Close %PRODUCTNAME software (also close the Quickstarter, if you enabled it). + Close %PRODUCTNAME software (also close the Quickstarter, if you enabled it). - Open your favourite package manager, look for %PRODUCTNAME language packs, and install the languages that you would like to use. + Open your favourite package manager, look for %PRODUCTNAME language packs, and install the languages that you would like to use. - If you downloaded %PRODUCTNAME packages from the main %PRODUCTNAME Web site, follow the steps below. + If you downloaded %PRODUCTNAME packages from the main %PRODUCTNAME Web site, follow the steps below. - Open your Web browser and enter http://www.libreoffice.org/download/ + Open your Web browser and enter http://www.libreoffice.org/download/ - Select and download the correct language pack for your version of %PRODUCTNAME software. + Select and download the correct language pack for your version of %PRODUCTNAME software. - Close %PRODUCTNAME software (also close the Quickstarter, if you enabled it). + Close %PRODUCTNAME software (also close the Quickstarter, if you enabled it). - Install the language pack. Unpack tar.gz file and install the packages according to standard practice on your platform. + Install the language pack. Unpack tar.gz file and install the packages according to standard practice on your platform. - Open your Web browser and enter http://www.libreoffice.org/download/ + Open your Web browser and enter http://www.libreoffice.org/download/ - Select and download the correct language pack for your version of %PRODUCTNAME software. + Select and download the correct language pack for your version of %PRODUCTNAME software. - Close %PRODUCTNAME software (also close the Quickstarter, if you enabled it). + Close %PRODUCTNAME software (also close the Quickstarter, if you enabled it). - Install the language pack by double-clicking the dmg file. + Install the language pack by double-clicking the dmg file. - %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages - Format - Character - Font + %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages + Format - Character - Font diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/line_intext.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/line_intext.xhp index 2cd13ebfd8..7e1c6d899c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/line_intext.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/line_intext.xhp @@ -35,90 +35,90 @@ drawing lines in text automatic lines/borders in text -Drawing Lines in Text +Drawing Lines in Text -You can incorporate lines into your text with custom angles, width, color, and other attributes. -To define the line attributes and direction, use the Line drawing object as follows: +You can incorporate lines into your text with custom angles, width, color, and other attributes. +To define the line attributes and direction, use the Line drawing object as follows: - + Icon - + Icon -1. +1. -On the Standard bar, click the Show Draw Functions icon to open the Drawing toolbar, and click the Line icon. The mouse pointer changes to a cross-hair symbol with a line beside it. +On the Standard bar, click the Show Draw Functions icon to open the Drawing toolbar, and click the Line icon. The mouse pointer changes to a cross-hair symbol with a line beside it. -2. +2. -In your document, click where the line should begin. Hold down the mouse button and drag to the point where you want the line to end. If you also hold down the Shift key, you can draw only horizontal, vertical, and diagonal lines. +In your document, click where the line should begin. Hold down the mouse button and drag to the point where you want the line to end. If you also hold down the Shift key, you can draw only horizontal, vertical, and diagonal lines. - + Icon -3. +3. -Release the mouse button once the line has the desired direction and length. You can then draw more lines. End this function by pressing the Esc key or by clicking the Select icon from the Drawing bar. +Release the mouse button once the line has the desired direction and length. You can then draw more lines. End this function by pressing the Esc key or by clicking the Select icon from the Drawing bar. -4. +4. -After clicking the Select icon, you can select all of the lines at the same time by clicking each line while holding down the Shift key. This multiple selection enables you to assign all of them a common color, width or other attribute. +After clicking the Select icon, you can select all of the lines at the same time by clicking each line while holding down the Shift key. This multiple selection enables you to assign all of them a common color, width or other attribute.
-Create a horizontal line by applying the preset Paragraph Style Horizontal Line. Click into an empty paragraph, and double-click the Horizontal Line Style in the Styles and Formatting window. If the entry for horizontal lines is not visible in the list of Paragraph Styles, select "All Styles" in the lower listbox. +Create a horizontal line by applying the preset Paragraph Style Horizontal Line. Click into an empty paragraph, and double-click the Horizontal Line Style in the Styles and Formatting window. If the entry for horizontal lines is not visible in the list of Paragraph Styles, select "All Styles" in the lower listbox. -You can draw a line above, beside or below a paragraph in a Writer text document by choosing Format - Paragraph - Borders. +You can draw a line above, beside or below a paragraph in a Writer text document by choosing Format - Paragraph - Borders. -Automatic lines in Writer +Automatic lines in Writer -If you start a new line in a Writer text document by typing three or more hyphen characters and press the Enter key, the characters are removed and the previous paragraph gets a line as a bottom border. -To create a single line, type three or more hyphens (-), or underscores ( _ ), and then press Enter. To create a double line, type three or more equal signs (=), asterisks (*), tildes (~), or hash marks (#), and then press Enter. +If you start a new line in a Writer text document by typing three or more hyphen characters and press the Enter key, the characters are removed and the previous paragraph gets a line as a bottom border. +To create a single line, type three or more hyphens (-), or underscores ( _ ), and then press Enter. To create a double line, type three or more equal signs (=), asterisks (*), tildes (~), or hash marks (#), and then press Enter. -To remove an automatically drawn border, choose Format - Paragraph - Borders and select no border. +To remove an automatically drawn border, choose Format - Paragraph - Borders and select no border. -To undo an automatic border replacement once, choose Edit - Undo. +To undo an automatic border replacement once, choose Edit - Undo. To disable the automatic borders, choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Options and clear Apply border. -The lines and other drawing objects that you insert in text are not defined in HTML, and are therefore not exported directly into HTML format. Instead, they are exported as graphics. -When you enter a line width, you can append a measurement unit. A zero line width results in a hairline with a width of one pixel of the output medium. +The lines and other drawing objects that you insert in text are not defined in HTML, and are therefore not exported directly into HTML format. Instead, they are exported as graphics. +When you enter a line width, you can append a measurement unit. A zero line width results in a hairline with a width of one pixel of the output medium. -Format - Paragraph - Borders +Format - Paragraph - Borders diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/lineend_define.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/lineend_define.xhp index 28c1ea25fd..f0b18727b6 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/lineend_define.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/lineend_define.xhp @@ -31,28 +31,28 @@ arrows; defining arrow heads lines;defining ends mw changed "line ends;" to "lines;" -Defining Line Ends +Defining Line Ends -You can define any object to be included in the list of available line ends. +You can define any object to be included in the list of available line ends. -Use the draw functions to create an object to be used as a line end. +Use the draw functions to create an object to be used as a line end. -Select the object and choose Format - Drawing Object - +Select the object and choose Format - Drawing Object - Graphic - Line. -In the dialog, click the Arrow Styles. +In the dialog, click the Arrow Styles. -Click Add and assign a name to the new arrow style. +Click Add and assign a name to the new arrow style. -Click OK to close the dialog. +Click OK to close the dialog.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/linestyle_define.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/linestyle_define.xhp index 5c034647ae..834b3e6546 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/linestyle_define.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/linestyle_define.xhp @@ -30,28 +30,28 @@ line styles;defining defining;line styles -Defining Line Styles +Defining Line Styles -Select a line drawing object in a document. +Select a line drawing object in a document. Choose Format - Drawing Object - Graphic - Line and click the Line Styles tab. -Specify the line options that you want. -To specify the length of the line as a percentage of the line width, select Fit to line width. +Specify the line options that you want. +To specify the length of the line as a percentage of the line width, select Fit to line width. -Click Add. +Click Add. -Enter a name for the line style and click OK. -To save the line style in a custom line style list, click the Save Line Styles icon. +Enter a name for the line style and click OK. +To save the line style in a custom line style list, click the Save Line Styles icon. -Click Close to close the dialog. +Click Close to close the dialog.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/linestyles.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/linestyles.xhp index 8122ee90b3..c24942c2cf 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/linestyles.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/linestyles.xhp @@ -35,25 +35,25 @@ arrows; defining arrow lines line styles; applying -Applying Line Styles Using the Toolbar +Applying Line Styles Using the Toolbar -The Drawing Object Properties toolbar contains icons and combo boxes to define various line attributes. +The Drawing Object Properties toolbar contains icons and combo boxes to define various line attributes. -Click the Line icon +Click the Line icon Icon to open the Line dialog. -Click the Arrow Styles icon +Click the Arrow Styles icon Icon to select an arrow style for the right and left ends of a line. -Select a style from the Line Style box and specify the width in the Line Width box. A width of 0 corresponds to 1 pixel. +Select a style from the Line Style box and specify the width in the Line Width box. A width of 0 corresponds to 1 pixel. -Select the line and arrow color in the Line Color box. +Select the line and arrow color in the Line Color box.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/macro_recording.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/macro_recording.xhp index 903ed73e99..fad4de9022 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/macro_recording.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/macro_recording.xhp @@ -33,63 +33,63 @@ recording; macros Basic; recording macros -Recording a Macro +Recording a Macro -Open the document for which you want to record a macro. +Open the document for which you want to record a macro. -Choose Tools - Macros - Record Macro. +Choose Tools - Macros - Record Macro. If Tools - Macros - Record Macro menu item is missing, make sure that macro recording feature is enabled in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced. -You see the small Recording dialog with just one button called Stop Recording. +You see the small Recording dialog with just one button called Stop Recording. -Perform the actions you want to be recorded in the document. -Press the Escape key to deselect an object, as the macro recorder currently does not record this action by mouse click. +Perform the actions you want to be recorded in the document. +Press the Escape key to deselect an object, as the macro recorder currently does not record this action by mouse click. -Click Stop Recording. -The Macro dialog appears, in which you can save and run the macro. -If you want to abort the recording without saving a macro, click the Close button of the Recording dialog. +Click Stop Recording. +The Macro dialog appears, in which you can save and run the macro. +If you want to abort the recording without saving a macro, click the Close button of the Recording dialog. -To save the macro, first select the object where you want the macro to be saved in the Save macro in list box. +To save the macro, first select the object where you want the macro to be saved in the Save macro in list box. -If you want the macro to be saved into a new library or module, click the New Library or New Module button and enter a name for the library or module. +If you want the macro to be saved into a new library or module, click the New Library or New Module button and enter a name for the library or module. -Enter a name for the new macro in the Macro name text box. Do not use Basic keywords as a name. +Enter a name for the new macro in the Macro name text box. Do not use Basic keywords as a name. -Click Save. +Click Save. -Limitations of the macro recorder -The following actions are not recorded: +Limitations of the macro recorder +The following actions are not recorded: -Opening of windows is not recorded. +Opening of windows is not recorded. -Actions carried out in another window than where the recorder was started are not recorded. +Actions carried out in another window than where the recorder was started are not recorded. -Window switching is not recorded. +Window switching is not recorded. -Actions that are not related to the document contents are not recorded. For example, changes made in the Options dialog, macro organizer, customizing. +Actions that are not related to the document contents are not recorded. For example, changes made in the Options dialog, macro organizer, customizing. -Selections are recorded only if they are done by using the keyboard (cursor traveling), but not when the mouse is used. +Selections are recorded only if they are done by using the keyboard (cursor traveling), but not when the mouse is used. -The macro recorder works only in Calc and Writer. +The macro recorder works only in Calc and Writer. -Macro -Programming in %PRODUCTNAME +Macro +Programming in %PRODUCTNAME diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp index cfea6abcc5..156859f351 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp @@ -38,29 +38,29 @@ distances selecting;measurement units -Selecting Measurement Units +Selecting Measurement Units -You can select separate measurement units for $[officename] Writer, $[officename] Writer/Web, $[officename] Calc, $[officename] Impress and $[officename] Draw documents. +You can select separate measurement units for $[officename] Writer, $[officename] Writer/Web, $[officename] Calc, $[officename] Impress and $[officename] Draw documents. -Open a document of the type for which you want to change the measurement units. +Open a document of the type for which you want to change the measurement units. -Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options. -In the left pane of the dialog, double-click the application for which you want to select the measurement unit. -Double-click %PRODUCTNAME Writer if you want to select the measurement units for text documents. +In the left pane of the dialog, double-click the application for which you want to select the measurement unit. +Double-click %PRODUCTNAME Writer if you want to select the measurement units for text documents. -Click on General. +Click on General. -On the General tab page, select the measurement unit. Close the dialog with OK. +On the General tab page, select the measurement unit. Close the dialog with OK. -Entering measurement units directly -%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General +Entering measurement units directly +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/microsoft_terms.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/microsoft_terms.xhp index dbd7b3a5d0..379edbc4d5 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/microsoft_terms.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/microsoft_terms.xhp @@ -29,169 +29,169 @@ Microsoft Office;feature comparisons -Comparing Microsoft Office and $[officename] Terms +Comparing Microsoft Office and $[officename] Terms -The following table lists Microsoft Office features and their $[officename] equivalents. +The following table lists Microsoft Office features and their $[officename] equivalents. -Microsoft Office XP +Microsoft Office XP -$[officename] +$[officename] -AutoShapes +AutoShapes -Gallery Objects
Shapes are on the Drawing toolbar (menu View - Toolbars - Drawing) +Gallery Objects
Shapes are on the Drawing toolbar (menu View - Toolbars - Drawing) -Change Case +Change Case -Case/Characters +Case/Characters -Click and Type +Click and Type -Direct Cursor +Direct Cursor -Compare and Merge Documents +Compare and Merge Documents -Compare +Compare -Document Map +Document Map -Navigator +Navigator -Formula Auditing +Formula Auditing -Detective +Detective -Lines and Page Breaks +Lines and Page Breaks -Text Flow +Text Flow -Page setup +Page setup -Format - Page -For spreadsheets see also View - Page Break Preview +Format - Page +For spreadsheets see also View - Page Break Preview -Mail Merge +Mail Merge -Form Letter +Form Letter -Markup +Markup -Track Changes - Show Changes +Track Changes - Show Changes -Refresh Data (in Excel) +Refresh Data (in Excel) -Refresh Range +Refresh Range -Replace text as you type +Replace text as you type -AutoCorrect +AutoCorrect -Show/Hide +Show/Hide -Nonprinting Characters, Hidden Paragraphs +Nonprinting Characters, Hidden Paragraphs -Spelling and Grammar +Spelling and Grammar -Spellcheck +Spellcheck -Track changes +Track changes -Changes - Record +Changes - Record -Validation +Validation -Validity +Validity -Workbook +Workbook -Spreadsheet +Spreadsheet -Worksheet +Worksheet -Sheet +Sheet -Shared Workbooks +Shared Workbooks -Collaboration +Collaboration
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/ms_doctypes.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/ms_doctypes.xhp index 5e1f74da5a..06d277b274 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/ms_doctypes.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/ms_doctypes.xhp @@ -31,9 +31,9 @@ file associations for Microsoft Office changing;file associations in Setup program -Changing the Association of Microsoft Office Document Types +Changing the Association of Microsoft Office Document Types -To change the association of Microsoft Office file name extensions to open the files either in $[officename] or in Microsoft Office, using Microsoft Windows: +To change the association of Microsoft Office file name extensions to open the files either in $[officename] or in Microsoft Office, using Microsoft Windows:
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ In the list of applications that appears, select the program that should open the current type of files. Make sure that “Always use this app” is checked. -If these steps do not apply to your brand of Microsoft Windows, search your Microsoft Windows Help for instructions how to change the file associations. +If these steps do not apply to your brand of Microsoft Windows, search your Microsoft Windows Help for instructions how to change the file associations.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp index 5d2b1fd7e9..87d6933fa1 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp @@ -30,158 +30,158 @@ import restrictions for Microsoft Office Microsoft Office;importing password protected files MW moved "Microsoft Office;" from shared/guide/protection.xhp - -About Converting Microsoft Office Documents -$[officename] can automatically open Microsoft Office 97/2000/XP documents. However, some layout features and formatting attributes in more complex Microsoft Office documents are handled differently in $[officename] or are unsupported. As a result, converted files require some degree of manual reformatting. The amount of reformatting that can be expected is proportional to the complexity of the structure and formatting of the source document. $[officename] cannot run Visual Basic Scripts, but can load them for you to analyze. -The most recent versions of %PRODUCTNAME can load and save the Microsoft Office Open XML document formats with the extensions docx, xlsx, and pptx. The same versions can also run some Excel Visual Basic scripts, if you enable this feature at %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties. -The following lists provide a general overview of Microsoft Office features that may cause conversion challenges. These will not affect your ability to use or work with the content of the converted document. -Microsoft Word + +About Converting Microsoft Office Documents +$[officename] can automatically open Microsoft Office 97/2000/XP documents. However, some layout features and formatting attributes in more complex Microsoft Office documents are handled differently in $[officename] or are unsupported. As a result, converted files require some degree of manual reformatting. The amount of reformatting that can be expected is proportional to the complexity of the structure and formatting of the source document. $[officename] cannot run Visual Basic Scripts, but can load them for you to analyze. +The most recent versions of %PRODUCTNAME can load and save the Microsoft Office Open XML document formats with the extensions docx, xlsx, and pptx. The same versions can also run some Excel Visual Basic scripts, if you enable this feature at %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties. +The following lists provide a general overview of Microsoft Office features that may cause conversion challenges. These will not affect your ability to use or work with the content of the converted document. +Microsoft Word -AutoShapes +AutoShapes -Revision marks +Revision marks -OLE objects +OLE objects -Certain controls and Microsoft Office form fields +Certain controls and Microsoft Office form fields -Indexes +Indexes -Tables, frames, and multi-column formatting +Tables, frames, and multi-column formatting -Hyperlinks and bookmarks +Hyperlinks and bookmarks -Microsoft WordArt graphics +Microsoft WordArt graphics -Animated characters/text +Animated characters/text -Microsoft PowerPoint +Microsoft PowerPoint -AutoShapes +AutoShapes -Tab, line, and paragraph spacing +Tab, line, and paragraph spacing -Master background graphics +Master background graphics -Grouped objects +Grouped objects -Certain multimedia effects +Certain multimedia effects -Microsoft Excel +Microsoft Excel -AutoShapes +AutoShapes -OLE objects +OLE objects -Certain controls and Microsoft Office form fields +Certain controls and Microsoft Office form fields -Pivot tables +Pivot tables -New chart types +New chart types -Conditional formatting +Conditional formatting -Some functions/formulas (see below) +Some functions/formulas (see below) -One example of differences between Calc and Excel is the handling of boolean values. Enter TRUE to cells A1 and A2. +One example of differences between Calc and Excel is the handling of boolean values. Enter TRUE to cells A1 and A2. -In Calc, the formula =A1+A2 returns the value 2, and the formula =SUM(A1;A2) returns 2. +In Calc, the formula =A1+A2 returns the value 2, and the formula =SUM(A1;A2) returns 2. -In Excel, the formula =A1+A2 returns 2, but the formula =SUM(A1,A2) returns 0.in SUM(A1<limiter>A2), use the Excel limiter comma , in English and semicolon ; in German +In Excel, the formula =A1+A2 returns 2, but the formula =SUM(A1,A2) returns 0.in SUM(A1<limiter>A2), use the Excel limiter comma , in English and semicolon ; in German -For a detailed overview about converting documents to and from Microsoft Office format, see the Migration Guide. -Opening Microsoft Office Documents That Are Protected With a Password -%PRODUCTNAME can open the following Microsoft Office document types that are protected by a password. +For a detailed overview about converting documents to and from Microsoft Office format, see the Migration Guide. +Opening Microsoft Office Documents That Are Protected With a Password +%PRODUCTNAME can open the following Microsoft Office document types that are protected by a password. -Microsoft Office format +Microsoft Office format -Supported encryption method +Supported encryption method -Word 6.0, Word 95 +Word 6.0, Word 95 -Weak XOR encryption +Weak XOR encryption -Word 97, Word 2000, Word XP, Word 2003 +Word 97, Word 2000, Word XP, Word 2003 -Office 97/2000 compatible encryption +Office 97/2000 compatible encryption -Word XP, Word 2003 +Word XP, Word 2003 -Weak XOR encryption from older Word versions +Weak XOR encryption from older Word versions -Excel 2.1, Excel 3.0, Excel 4.0, Excel 5.0, Excel 95 +Excel 2.1, Excel 3.0, Excel 4.0, Excel 5.0, Excel 95 -Weak XOR encryption +Weak XOR encryption -Excel 97, Excel 2000, Excel XP, Excel 2003 +Excel 97, Excel 2000, Excel XP, Excel 2003 -Office 97/2000 compatible encryption +Office 97/2000 compatible encryption -Excel XP, Excel 2003 +Excel XP, Excel 2003 -Weak XOR encryption from older Excel versions +Weak XOR encryption from older Excel versions
-Microsoft Office files that are encrypted by AES128 can be opened. Other encryption methods are not supported. +Microsoft Office files that are encrypted by AES128 can be opened. Other encryption methods are not supported.
- Setting the default file format + Setting the default file format
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp index 61237b70b4..30de78d378 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp @@ -33,92 +33,92 @@ saving;in Microsoft Office file format macros; in MS Office documents -Using Microsoft Office and $[officename] +Using Microsoft Office and $[officename] -$[officename] can open and save documents in the Microsoft Office file formats, including Microsoft Office Open XML formats. -Opening a Microsoft Office File +$[officename] can open and save documents in the Microsoft Office file formats, including Microsoft Office Open XML formats. +Opening a Microsoft Office File -Choose File - Open. Select a Microsoft Office file in the $[officename] file open dialog. +Choose File - Open. Select a Microsoft Office file in the $[officename] file open dialog. -MS Office file... +MS Office file... -...will open in $[officename] module +...will open in $[officename] module -MS Word, *.doc, *.docx +MS Word, *.doc, *.docx -$[officename] Writer +$[officename] Writer -MS Excel, *.xls, *.xlsx +MS Excel, *.xls, *.xlsx -$[officename] Calc +$[officename] Calc -MS PowerPoint, *.ppt, *.pps, *.pptx +MS PowerPoint, *.ppt, *.pps, *.pptx -$[officename] Impress +$[officename] Impress
-Saving as a Microsoft Office File +Saving as a Microsoft Office File -Choose File - Save As. +Choose File - Save As. -In the File type box, select a Microsoft Office file format. +In the File type box, select a Microsoft Office file format. -Saving Documents by Default in Microsoft Office Formats +Saving Documents by Default in Microsoft Office Formats -Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. -In the Default file format and ODF settings area, first select a document type, then select the file type for saving. +In the Default file format and ODF settings area, first select a document type, then select the file type for saving. -From now on, if you save a document, the File type will be set according to your choice. Of course, you still can select another file type in the file save dialog. +From now on, if you save a document, the File type will be set according to your choice. Of course, you still can select another file type in the file save dialog. -Opening Microsoft Office Files by Default +Opening Microsoft Office Files by Default -Converting Many Microsoft Office Files into OpenDocument Format -The Document Converter Wizard will copy and convert all Microsoft Office files in a folder into $[officename] documents in the OpenDocument file format. You can specify the folder to be read, and the folder where the converted files are to be saved. +Converting Many Microsoft Office Files into OpenDocument Format +The Document Converter Wizard will copy and convert all Microsoft Office files in a folder into $[officename] documents in the OpenDocument file format. You can specify the folder to be read, and the folder where the converted files are to be saved. -Choose File - Wizards - Document Converter to start the wizard. +Choose File - Wizards - Document Converter to start the wizard. -Macros in Microsoft Office and $[officename] -With a few exceptions, Microsoft Office and $[officename] cannot run the same macro code. Microsoft Office uses VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code, and $[officename] uses Basic code based on the $[officename] API (Application Program Interface) environment. Although the programming language is the same, the objects and methods are different. -The most recent versions of %PRODUCTNAME can run some Excel Visual Basic scripts if you enable this feature at %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties. -If you use macros in one of the applications and want to use the same functionality in the other application, you must edit the macros. $[officename] can load the macros that are contained within Microsoft Office files and you can then view and edit the macro code in the $[officename] Basic IDE editor. -You can choose to preserve or delete VBA macros -Open a Microsoft Office document that contains VBA macro code. Change only the normal contents (text, cells, graphics), and do not edit the macros. Save the document as a Microsoft Office file type. Open the file in Microsoft Office, and the VBA macros will run as before. -You may delete the VBA macros from the Microsoft Office file on loading or on saving. +Macros in Microsoft Office and $[officename] +With a few exceptions, Microsoft Office and $[officename] cannot run the same macro code. Microsoft Office uses VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code, and $[officename] uses Basic code based on the $[officename] API (Application Program Interface) environment. Although the programming language is the same, the objects and methods are different. +The most recent versions of %PRODUCTNAME can run some Excel Visual Basic scripts if you enable this feature at %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties. +If you use macros in one of the applications and want to use the same functionality in the other application, you must edit the macros. $[officename] can load the macros that are contained within Microsoft Office files and you can then view and edit the macro code in the $[officename] Basic IDE editor. +You can choose to preserve or delete VBA macros +Open a Microsoft Office document that contains VBA macro code. Change only the normal contents (text, cells, graphics), and do not edit the macros. Save the document as a Microsoft Office file type. Open the file in Microsoft Office, and the VBA macros will run as before. +You may delete the VBA macros from the Microsoft Office file on loading or on saving. -Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties to set the VBA macro handling of $[officename]. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties to set the VBA macro handling of $[officename]. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/navigator.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/navigator.xhp index 5afee35dd8..7227a0a64a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/navigator.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/navigator.xhp @@ -33,12 +33,12 @@ documents; contents as lists Navigator; contents as lists -Navigator for Document Overview +Navigator for Document Overview -All contents of the Navigator window are referred to here as "categories," whether titles, sheets, tables, text frames, graphics, OLE objects, sections, hyperlinks, references, indexes or comments. -The Navigator displays all types of objects contained in a document. If a plus sign appears next to a category, this indicates that at least one object of this kind exists. If you rest the mouse pointer on the category name, the number of objects is displayed in an extended tip. -Open a category by clicking on the plus sign. If you only want to view the entries in a certain category, select the category and click the Content View icon. Until you click the icon again, only the objects of this category will be displayed. -You may dock the Navigator to any document border or turn it back into a free window (double click on the gray area). You can change the size of the Navigator when it is a free window. +All contents of the Navigator window are referred to here as "categories," whether titles, sheets, tables, text frames, graphics, OLE objects, sections, hyperlinks, references, indexes or comments. +The Navigator displays all types of objects contained in a document. If a plus sign appears next to a category, this indicates that at least one object of this kind exists. If you rest the mouse pointer on the category name, the number of objects is displayed in an extended tip. +Open a category by clicking on the plus sign. If you only want to view the entries in a certain category, select the category and click the Content View icon. Until you click the icon again, only the objects of this category will be displayed. +You may dock the Navigator to any document border or turn it back into a free window (double click on the gray area). You can change the size of the Navigator when it is a free window. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/navigator_setcursor.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/navigator_setcursor.xhp index 62aab827b2..d2d70a7693 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/navigator_setcursor.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/navigator_setcursor.xhp @@ -36,23 +36,23 @@ navigating;in documents Navigator;working with -Navigation to Quickly Reach Objects +Navigation to Quickly Reach Objects -This is a common use of the Navigator. +This is a common use of the Navigator. -Double-click an object in the Navigator to jump directly to the position of the object in the document. +Double-click an object in the Navigator to jump directly to the position of the object in the document. -You can use the Navigation toolbar to scroll to the previous or next object of a specific category. +You can use the Navigation toolbar to scroll to the previous or next object of a specific category. -Open the toolbar using the Navigation icon below the vertical scroll bar of a text document, or in the Navigator window. +Open the toolbar using the Navigation icon below the vertical scroll bar of a text document, or in the Navigator window. -On the Navigation toolbar, you first select the category, then click on one of the buttons, Previous Object or Next Object. The names of the buttons refer to the category, for example, the button "Next Object" is named "Next Page" or "Next Bookmark" according to the category. +On the Navigation toolbar, you first select the category, then click on one of the buttons, Previous Object or Next Object. The names of the buttons refer to the category, for example, the button "Next Object" is named "Next Page" or "Next Bookmark" according to the category. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/navpane_on.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/navpane_on.xhp index 58635cfe70..659ce4c2d1 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/navpane_on.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/navpane_on.xhp @@ -36,19 +36,19 @@ hiding;navigation pane in Help window indexes;showing/hiding Help index tab - -Showing Navigation Pane of the Help + +Showing Navigation Pane of the Help -In the Help window, you can show or hide the navigation pane as needed. +In the Help window, you can show or hide the navigation pane as needed. - + Icon -On the toolbar of the Help window, click the left icon to show or hide the navigation pane. +On the toolbar of the Help window, click the left icon to show or hide the navigation pane.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp index a9a5127665..037f85a709 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp @@ -33,12 +33,11 @@ removing;bullets and numbering keyboard;removing numbering MW added "removing, see also deleting" -Turning off Bullets and Numbering for Individual Paragraphs +Turning off Bullets and Numbering for Individual Paragraphs no bullets for Calc -Bullets and Numbering of paragraphs is supported only in Writer, Impress and Draw. +Bullets and Numbering of paragraphs is supported only in Writer, Impress and Draw. no bullets for Mathdon't care for Math by now. Issue 98726 @@ -46,15 +45,15 @@ - + Icon - + Icon - For the current paragraph or selected paragraphs you can switch off the automatic numbering or listing. Click the Numbering Off icon in the Bullets and Numbering bar. + For the current paragraph or selected paragraphs you can switch off the automatic numbering or listing. Click the Numbering Off icon in the Bullets and Numbering bar.
@@ -64,34 +63,34 @@ - + Icon - If the cursor is located within a numbered or bulleted list, you can turn off automatic numbers or bullets for the current paragraph or selected paragraphs by clicking the Bullets On/Off icon on the Text Formatting bar. + If the cursor is located within a numbered or bulleted list, you can turn off automatic numbers or bullets for the current paragraph or selected paragraphs by clicking the Bullets On/Off icon on the Text Formatting bar.
-To remove numbering from a paragraph using the keyboard: +To remove numbering from a paragraph using the keyboard: - Place the cursor at the beginning of a numbered paragraph and press the Backspace key. + Place the cursor at the beginning of a numbered paragraph and press the Backspace key. - The numbering of the paragraph disappears and is removed from the numbering sequence. Numbering resumes in the following paragraph. + The numbering of the paragraph disappears and is removed from the numbering sequence. Numbering resumes in the following paragraph. - If you press the Enter key in an empty numbered paragraph, the numbering stops. + If you press the Enter key in an empty numbered paragraph, the numbering stops.
- Format - Bullets and Numbering + Format - Bullets and Numbering diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/pageformat_max.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/pageformat_max.xhp index 79bc434c3c..9c8349f37f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/pageformat_max.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/pageformat_max.xhp @@ -33,25 +33,25 @@ formats; maximizing page formats printers; maximum page formats -Selecting the Maximum Printable Area on a Page +Selecting the Maximum Printable Area on a Page -Not all printers can print a paper up to its edges. Most of them leave an unprinted margin. -$[officename] offers a semi-automatic feature that enables you to print as close to the paper's edge as is possible. +Not all printers can print a paper up to its edges. Most of them leave an unprinted margin. +$[officename] offers a semi-automatic feature that enables you to print as close to the paper's edge as is possible. -Make sure that your printer has been setup under File - Printer Settings. +Make sure that your printer has been setup under File - Printer Settings. -Make sure that the Web in the View menu is not selected. +Make sure that the Web in the View menu is not selected. -Select the Format - Page command, and go to the Page tab. +Select the Format - Page command, and go to the Page tab. -Under Margins you can define the maximum or minimum possible value for the page margins (left, right, top, and bottom). Click into the respective control, then press the Page Up or Page Down key. The preview displays a dashed line around the printable range. +Under Margins you can define the maximum or minimum possible value for the page margins (left, right, top, and bottom). Click into the respective control, then press the Page Up or Page Down key. The preview displays a dashed line around the printable range. -Click OK to close the dialog. +Click OK to close the dialog. @@ -59,6 +59,6 @@ -Printing +Printing diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp index ac583a782f..2c57b2f44a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp @@ -34,60 +34,60 @@ copying;formatting Paintbrush MW added "Paintbrush" -Copying Formatting With the Clone Formatting Tool +Copying Formatting With the Clone Formatting Tool
- You can use the Clone Formatting tool to copy formatting from a text selection or from an object and apply the formatting to another text selection or object. - In Calc, the Clone Formatting tool only applies to cell formatting. + You can use the Clone Formatting tool to copy formatting from a text selection or from an object and apply the formatting to another text selection or object. + In Calc, the Clone Formatting tool only applies to cell formatting. - Select the text or object whose formatting you want to copy. + Select the text or object whose formatting you want to copy. - On the Standard Bar, click the Clone Formatting icon. - The cursor changes to a paint bucket. - If you want to apply the formatting to more than one selection, double-click the Clone Formatting icon + On the Standard Bar, click the Clone Formatting icon. + The cursor changes to a paint bucket. + If you want to apply the formatting to more than one selection, double-click the Clone Formatting icon Icon . After you apply all the formatting, click the icon again. - Select or click the text or object that you want to apply the formatting to. + Select or click the text or object that you want to apply the formatting to. - By default only the character formatting is copied ; to include paragraph formatting, hold down CommandCtrl when you click. To copy only the paragraph formatting, hold down Command + By default only the character formatting is copied ; to include paragraph formatting, hold down CommandCtrl when you click. To copy only the paragraph formatting, hold down Command Ctrl+Shift when you click. - The paragraph formats are the formats applied to the whole paragraph. The character formats are those applied to a portion of the paragraph. For example, if you apply the bold format to a whole paragraph the bold format is a paragraph format. Then if you unbold a portion of this paragraph, the bold format is still a paragraph format but the portion you unbold has a "not bold" character format. - The following table describes the formatting attributes that the Clone Formatting tool can copy: + The paragraph formats are the formats applied to the whole paragraph. The character formats are those applied to a portion of the paragraph. For example, if you apply the bold format to a whole paragraph the bold format is a paragraph format. Then if you unbold a portion of this paragraph, the bold format is still a paragraph format but the portion you unbold has a "not bold" character format. + The following table describes the formatting attributes that the Clone Formatting tool can copy: - Type of Selection + Type of Selection - Comment + Comment - Nothing selected, but cursor is inside a text passage + Nothing selected, but cursor is inside a text passage - Copies the formatting of the current paragraph and the character formatting of the next character in the text flow direction. + Copies the formatting of the current paragraph and the character formatting of the next character in the text flow direction. - Text is selected + Text is selected - Copies the formatting of the last selected character and of the paragraph that contains the character. + Copies the formatting of the last selected character and of the paragraph that contains the character. - Frame is selected + Frame is selected Copies the frame attributes that are defined in Format - Frame and Object - Properties dialog. The contents, size, position, linking, hyperlinks, and macros in the frame are not copied. @@ -95,50 +95,50 @@ - Object is selected + Object is selected - Copies the object formatting that is defined in the Format - Graphics or Format - Drawing Object dialogs. The contents, size, position, hyperlinks, and macros in the object are not copied. + Copies the object formatting that is defined in the Format - Graphics or Format - Drawing Object dialogs. The contents, size, position, hyperlinks, and macros in the object are not copied. - Form control is selected + Form control is selected - Not supported + Not supported - Drawing object is selected + Drawing object is selected - Copies all formatting attributes. In Impress and Draw, the text contents of the object is also copied. + Copies all formatting attributes. In Impress and Draw, the text contents of the object is also copied. - Text within Calc cells is selected + Text within Calc cells is selected - Not supported + Not supported - Writer table or cells are selected + Writer table or cells are selected - Copies the formatting that is specified in Table, Text Flow, Borders, and Background tab pages in the Format - Table dialog. The paragraph and character formatting are also copied. + Copies the formatting that is specified in Table, Text Flow, Borders, and Background tab pages in the Format - Table dialog. The paragraph and character formatting are also copied. - Calc table or cells are selected + Calc table or cells are selected - Copies the formatting that is specified in the Format - Cells dialog as well as the formatting of the cell contents + Copies the formatting that is specified in the Format - Cells dialog as well as the formatting of the cell contents
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/pasting.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/pasting.xhp index ff4493e6dc..c2e4e3a13b 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/pasting.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/pasting.xhp @@ -33,49 +33,49 @@ text formats;pasting formats;pasting in special formats mw changed "pasting;..." and "clipboard;..." and added two index entries -Pasting Contents in Special Formats +Pasting Contents in Special Formats -Contents that are stored on the clipboard can be pasted into your document using different formats. In %PRODUCTNAME you can choose how to paste the contents using a dialog or a drop-down icon. -The available options depend on the contents of the clipboard. +Contents that are stored on the clipboard can be pasted into your document using different formats. In %PRODUCTNAME you can choose how to paste the contents using a dialog or a drop-down icon. +The available options depend on the contents of the clipboard. -In Writer text documents, you can press Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+Shift+V to paste the contents of the clipboard as unformatted text. +In Writer text documents, you can press Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+Shift+V to paste the contents of the clipboard as unformatted text. -Pasting clipboard contents using an icon menu +Pasting clipboard contents using an icon menu -Click the arrow next to the Paste icon on the Standard Bar to open the menu. +Click the arrow next to the Paste icon on the Standard Bar to open the menu. -Select one of the options. +Select one of the options. -If you do not like the result, click the Undo icon and then paste again with another option. +If you do not like the result, click the Undo icon and then paste again with another option. -Pasting clipboard contents using a dialog +Pasting clipboard contents using a dialog -Choose Edit - Paste special. +Choose Edit - Paste special. -Select one of the options and click OK. +Select one of the options and click OK. -If you are in a spreadsheet and the contents of the clipboard are spreadsheet cells, then a different Paste Special dialog appears. Use the Paste Special dialog to copy cells using basic or advanced options. +If you are in a spreadsheet and the contents of the clipboard are spreadsheet cells, then a different Paste Special dialog appears. Use the Paste Special dialog to copy cells using basic or advanced options. - + Transpose: swaps the rows and the columns of the cell range to be pasted. - + Link: pastes the cell range as a link. If the source file changes, the pasted cells change also. -The other options are explained in the help, when you call the Paste Special dialog from within %PRODUCTNAME Calc.UFI: the text is switched to "Calc" there. +The other options are explained in the help, when you call the Paste Special dialog from within %PRODUCTNAME Calc.UFI: the text is switched to "Calc" there.
-Paste Special +Paste Special
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp index b9fed0cf9b..34071a44a1 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp @@ -32,69 +32,69 @@ colors; not printing text; printing in black -Printing in Black and White +Printing in Black and White Printing Text and Images in Black and White - Choose File - Print. The General tab page of the dialog opens. + Choose File - Print. The General tab page of the dialog opens. - Click on Properties. This opens the Properties dialog for your printer. + Click on Properties. This opens the Properties dialog for your printer. - Select the option to print in black and white. For further information, refer to the user's manual of your printer. + Select the option to print in black and white. For further information, refer to the user's manual of your printer. - Confirm the Properties dialog and click Print. - The current document will be printed in black and white. + Confirm the Properties dialog and click Print. + The current document will be printed in black and white. Printing in Black and White in %PRODUCTNAME Impress and %PRODUCTNAME Draw - Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress or Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw, as appropriate. + Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress or Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw, as appropriate. - Then choose Print. + Then choose Print. - Under Quality, select either Grayscale or Black & white and click OK. - When either of these options is selected, all presentations or drawings will be printed without color. If you only want to print in black for the current print job, select the option in File - Print - %PRODUCTNAME Draw/Impress. - + Under Quality, select either Grayscale or Black & white and click OK. + When either of these options is selected, all presentations or drawings will be printed without color. If you only want to print in black for the current print job, select the option in File - Print - %PRODUCTNAME Draw/Impress. + Grayscale converts all colors to a maximum of 256 gradations from black to white. All text will be printed in black. A background set by Format - Page - Background will not be printed. - + Black & white converts all colors into the two values black and white. All borders around objects are printed black. All text will be printed in black. A background set by Format - Page - Background will not be printed. Printing Only Text in Black and White - In %PRODUCTNAME Writer you can choose to print color-formatted text in black and white. You can specify this either for all subsequent text documents to be printed, or only for the current printing process. + In %PRODUCTNAME Writer you can choose to print color-formatted text in black and white. You can specify this either for all subsequent text documents to be printed, or only for the current printing process. Printing All Text Documents with Black and White Text - Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer or Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web. + Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer or Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web. - Then choose Print. + Then choose Print. - Under Contents, mark Print black and click OK. - All text documents or HTML documents will be printed with black text. + Under Contents, mark Print black and click OK. + All text documents or HTML documents will be printed with black text. Printing the Current Text Document with Black and White Text - Choose File - Print. Then click the %PRODUCTNAME Writer tab. + Choose File - Print. Then click the %PRODUCTNAME Writer tab. - Choose Print text in black and click Print. + Choose Print text in black and click Print. - Printing dialogs - Tools - Options dialog + Printing dialogs + Tools - Options dialog diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/print_faster.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/print_faster.xhp index 5c896c3bba..032f4b0562 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/print_faster.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/print_faster.xhp @@ -42,29 +42,29 @@ printing;faster faster printing mw made "reduced printing;..." and "speed of printing;..." a one level entry -Printing faster with Reduced Data +Printing faster with Reduced Data -You can decide to reduce the data necessary to print your document. The settings can be defined differently for printing directly to the printer or for printing to a file. +You can decide to reduce the data necessary to print your document. The settings can be defined differently for printing directly to the printer or for printing to a file. -Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Print. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Print. -Click one of the following settings options: -Printer - to define options for reducing data while printing directly to a printer -Print to file - to define options for reducing data while printing to a file +Click one of the following settings options: +Printer - to define options for reducing data while printing directly to a printer +Print to file - to define options for reducing data while printing to a file -Select any combination of the four options, then click OK. -All documents that you print from now on will use the changed options. +Select any combination of the four options, then click OK. +All documents that you print from now on will use the changed options. -Print your document. +Print your document. -You can reduce data for transparency, for gradients, or for bitmaps. When you reduce the data, on many printers you will not see a reduction of printing quality. But the printing time is substantially shorter, and when you print to a file, the file size is much smaller. +You can reduce data for transparency, for gradients, or for bitmaps. When you reduce the data, on many printers you will not see a reduction of printing quality. But the printing time is substantially shorter, and when you print to a file, the file size is much smaller.
-Print options +Print options
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/protection.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/protection.xhp index 0c582c47b2..626011e2fe 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/protection.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/protection.xhp @@ -39,103 +39,100 @@ graphics;protecting frames;protecting mw moved 4 index entries to swriter/guide/protection.xhp -Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME +Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME - The following is an overview of the different ways of protecting contents in %PRODUCTNAME from being modified, deleted or viewed. - Protecting All Documents When Saving - All documents that are saved in OpenDocument format can be saved with a password. Documents that are saved with a password cannot be opened without the password. The content is secured so that it cannot be read with an external editor. This applies to content, graphics and OLE objects. + The following is an overview of the different ways of protecting contents in %PRODUCTNAME from being modified, deleted or viewed. + Protecting All Documents When Saving + All documents that are saved in OpenDocument format can be saved with a password. Documents that are saved with a password cannot be opened without the password. The content is secured so that it cannot be read with an external editor. This applies to content, graphics and OLE objects. - Turning on protection + Turning on protection - Choose File - Save As and mark the Save with password check box. Save the document. + Choose File - Save As and mark the Save with password check box. Save the document. - Turning off protection + Turning off protection - Open the document, entering the correct password. Choose File - Save As and clear the Save with password check box. + Open the document, entering the correct password. Choose File - Save As and clear the Save with password check box.
- Information entered in File - Properties is not encrypted. This includes the name of the author, creation date, word and character counts. - Protecting Revision Marking - With every change made in %PRODUCTNAME Calc and %PRODUCTNAME Writer, the review function records who made the change. This function can be turned on with protection, so that it can only be turned off when the correct password is entered. Until then, all changes will continue to be recorded. Acceptance or rejection of changes is not possible. + Information entered in File - Properties is not encrypted. This includes the name of the author, creation date, word and character counts. + Protecting Revision Marking + With every change made in %PRODUCTNAME Calc and %PRODUCTNAME Writer, the review function records who made the change. This function can be turned on with protection, so that it can only be turned off when the correct password is entered. Until then, all changes will continue to be recorded. Acceptance or rejection of changes is not possible. - Turning on protection + Turning on protection - Choose Edit - Track Changes - Protect Changes. Enter and confirm a password of at least one character. + Choose Edit - Track Changes - Protect Changes. Enter and confirm a password of at least one character. - Turning off protection + Turning off protection - Choose Edit - Track Changes - Protect Changes. Enter the correct password. + Choose Edit - Track Changes - Protect Changes. Enter the correct password.
MW moved contents of "Protecting Cell Ranges in Calc" to the Calc guides cell_protect.xhp and cell_unprotect.xhp.MW moved Writer specific contents to the new writer guide protection.xhp -Protecting Frames, Graphics, and OLE Objects - You can protect the content, position and size of inserted graphics. The same applies to frames (in Writer) and OLE objects. +Protecting Frames, Graphics, and OLE Objects + You can protect the content, position and size of inserted graphics. The same applies to frames (in Writer) and OLE objects. - Turning on protection + Turning on protection - For example, for graphics inserted in Writer: Choose Format - Image - Options tab. Under Protect, mark Contents, Position and/or Size. + For example, for graphics inserted in Writer: Choose Format - Image - Options tab. Under Protect, mark Contents, Position and/or Size. - Turning off protection + Turning off protection - For example, for graphics inserted in Writer: Choose Format - Image - Options tab. Under Protect, unmark as appropriate. + For example, for graphics inserted in Writer: Choose Format - Image - Options tab. Under Protect, unmark as appropriate.
- Protecting Drawing Objects and Form Objects - The draw objects that you insert into your documents with the Drawing toolbar can be protected from being accidentally moved or changed in size. You can do the same with form objects inserted with the Form Controls toolbar. + Protecting Drawing Objects and Form Objects + The draw objects that you insert into your documents with the Drawing toolbar can be protected from being accidentally moved or changed in size. You can do the same with form objects inserted with the Form Controls toolbar. - Turning on protection + Turning on protection - Choose Format - Object - Position and Size - Position and Size tab. Mark the Position or Size check box. + Choose Format - Object - Position and Size - Position and Size tab. Mark the Position or Size check box. - Turning off protection + Turning off protection - Choose Format - Object - Position and Size - Position and Size tab. Unmark the Position or Size check box. + Choose Format - Object - Position and Size - Position and Size tab. Unmark the Position or Size check box.
removed webdav text, see i71792MW moved "Opening Microsoft Office Documents That Are Protected With a Password" to shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp - + - Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Protecting Cells in %PRODUCTNAME Calc + Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME Writer + Protecting Cells in %PRODUCTNAME Calc \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/redlining.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/redlining.xhp index c73905e990..5427a0f2fc 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/redlining.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/redlining.xhp @@ -33,14 +33,14 @@ review function; recording changes example Track Changes, see review function MW addes a cross-referenceMW added "highlighting changes" -Recording and Displaying Changes +Recording and Displaying Changes - The review function is available in %PRODUCTNAME for text documents and spreadsheet documents. - When several authors are working on the same text or spreadsheet, the review function records and displays who made the various changes. On the final edit of the document, it is then possible to look at each individual change and decide whether it should be accepted or rejected. - For example: You are an editor and are delivering your latest report. But before publication the report must be read by the senior editor and the proofreader, and both will add their changes. The senior editor writes "clarify" after one paragraph and crosses out another entirely. The proofreader corrects the spelling of your document. - The edited document comes back to you, and you can incorporate or ignore the suggestions of the two reviewers. - Let's say you also e-mailed a copy of the report to a good friend and colleague who has done research on a similar topic in the past. You asked for a few suggestions, and the document is now returned by e-mail with your colleague's suggestions. - As all your colleagues and the managers in your company work with $[officename], you can produce a final version of the document from the results you get back. + The review function is available in %PRODUCTNAME for text documents and spreadsheet documents. + When several authors are working on the same text or spreadsheet, the review function records and displays who made the various changes. On the final edit of the document, it is then possible to look at each individual change and decide whether it should be accepted or rejected. + For example: You are an editor and are delivering your latest report. But before publication the report must be read by the senior editor and the proofreader, and both will add their changes. The senior editor writes "clarify" after one paragraph and crosses out another entirely. The proofreader corrects the spelling of your document. + The edited document comes back to you, and you can incorporate or ignore the suggestions of the two reviewers. + Let's say you also e-mailed a copy of the report to a good friend and colleague who has done research on a similar topic in the past. You asked for a few suggestions, and the document is now returned by e-mail with your colleague's suggestions. + As all your colleagues and the managers in your company work with $[officename], you can produce a final version of the document from the results you get back. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_accept.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_accept.xhp index 979600ded9..49e8adaba0 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_accept.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_accept.xhp @@ -30,29 +30,29 @@ changes; accepting or rejecting review function;accepting or rejecting changes -Accepting or Rejecting Changes +Accepting or Rejecting Changes -The review function is available in %PRODUCTNAME for text documents and spreadsheet documents. +The review function is available in %PRODUCTNAME for text documents and spreadsheet documents. -In Writer text documents you can also accept or reject changes by choosing commands from the context menu. +In Writer text documents you can also accept or reject changes by choosing commands from the context menu. -When you edit a document in which others have made changes, you can accept or reject the changes individually or all together. +When you edit a document in which others have made changes, you can accept or reject the changes individually or all together. -If you have put multiple copies of the document in circulation, first merge these into one document (see ). +If you have put multiple copies of the document in circulation, first merge these into one document (see ). -Open the document and choose Edit - Track Changes - Manage Changes. The Manage Changes dialog appears. +Open the document and choose Edit - Track Changes - Manage Changes. The Manage Changes dialog appears. -Select a change on the List tab. The change is selected and displayed in the document and you can now enter your decision with one of the buttons. +Select a change on the List tab. The change is selected and displayed in the document and you can now enter your decision with one of the buttons. -If one author has modified another author's change, you will see the changes hierarchically arranged with a plus sign for opening up the hierarchy. -If the list of changes is too long, you can switch to the Filter tab in the dialog and specify that you only want to see the changes of certain authors, or only the changes of the last day, or that you want the list to be restricted in some other way. -Color-coded entries display the result of the filter that is set. Entries in black can be accepted or rejected and match the filter criteria. Entries in blue do not themselves match the filter criteria, but have subentries that are included by the filter. Gray entries cannot be accepted or rejected and do not match the filter criterion. Green entries do match the filter but cannot be accepted or rejected. +If one author has modified another author's change, you will see the changes hierarchically arranged with a plus sign for opening up the hierarchy. +If the list of changes is too long, you can switch to the Filter tab in the dialog and specify that you only want to see the changes of certain authors, or only the changes of the last day, or that you want the list to be restricted in some other way. +Color-coded entries display the result of the filter that is set. Entries in black can be accepted or rejected and match the filter criteria. Entries in blue do not themselves match the filter criteria, but have subentries that are included by the filter. Gray entries cannot be accepted or rejected and do not match the filter criterion. Green entries do match the filter but cannot be accepted or rejected.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_doccompare.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_doccompare.xhp index 02d8d40865..a1ebc4b1dc 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_doccompare.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_doccompare.xhp @@ -36,24 +36,24 @@ changes;comparing to original review function; comparing documents mw made "comparing..." a two level entry -Comparing Versions of a Document +Comparing Versions of a Document -The review function is available in %PRODUCTNAME for text documents and spreadsheet documents. -Imagine you have some co-authors or reviewers who collaborate with you writing your original document. One day you send out copies of your document to all reviewers. You ask them to edit the copy and send it back. -Normally, the reviewers enable change tracking by Edit - Track Changes - Record Changes and you can easily see the changes. -If one of the authors has made changes to a document without recording them, you can compare the changed document to your original document. +The review function is available in %PRODUCTNAME for text documents and spreadsheet documents. +Imagine you have some co-authors or reviewers who collaborate with you writing your original document. One day you send out copies of your document to all reviewers. You ask them to edit the copy and send it back. +Normally, the reviewers enable change tracking by Edit - Track Changes - Record Changes and you can easily see the changes. +If one of the authors has made changes to a document without recording them, you can compare the changed document to your original document. -Open the reviewer's document and then choose Edit - Track Changes - Compare Document.changed workflow, see i72652 -You should always start with opening the newer document and compare it with the older document. +Open the reviewer's document and then choose Edit - Track Changes - Compare Document.changed workflow, see i72652 +You should always start with opening the newer document and compare it with the older document. -A file selection dialog appears. Select your older original document and confirm the dialog. - +A file selection dialog appears. Select your older original document and confirm the dialog. + %PRODUCTNAME combines both documents into the reviewer's document. All text passages that occur in the reviewer's document but not in the original are identified as having been inserted, and all text passages that got deleted by the reviewer are identified as deletions. -You can now accept or reject the insertions and deletions. At the end you may save the reviewer's document as a new original with a new name. +You can now accept or reject the insertions and deletions. At the end you may save the reviewer's document as a new original with a new name. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_docmerge.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_docmerge.xhp index 67b8ff0d0c..0716d545c9 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_docmerge.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_docmerge.xhp @@ -34,23 +34,23 @@ merging; documents versions;merging document versions -Merging Versions +Merging Versions -The review function is available in %PRODUCTNAME for text documents and spreadsheet documents. -When a document has been edited by more than one person, it is possible to merge the edited copies into the original. The only requirement is that the documents differ only and exclusively in the recorded changes - all other original text must be identical. +The review function is available in %PRODUCTNAME for text documents and spreadsheet documents. +When a document has been edited by more than one person, it is possible to merge the edited copies into the original. The only requirement is that the documents differ only and exclusively in the recorded changes - all other original text must be identical. -Open the original document into which you want to merge all copies. +Open the original document into which you want to merge all copies. -Choose Edit - Track Changes - Merge Document. A file selection dialog appears. +Choose Edit - Track Changes - Merge Document. A file selection dialog appears. -Select the copy of the document from the dialog. If there have been no subsequent changes to the original document, the copy is merged into the original. -If changes have been made to the original document, an error dialog appears that informs you that the merge is unsuccessful. +Select the copy of the document from the dialog. If there have been no subsequent changes to the original document, the copy is merged into the original. +If changes have been made to the original document, an error dialog appears that informs you that the merge is unsuccessful. -After you merge the documents you will see the recorded changes from the copy in the original document. +After you merge the documents you will see the recorded changes from the copy in the original document. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp index 5270f454da..3d6a6e75e0 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp @@ -32,42 +32,42 @@ comments; on changes review function;tracking changes UFI: deleted index review function;recording changesMW changed "settings;tracking changes" -Recording Changes +Recording Changes - The review function is available in %PRODUCTNAME for text documents and spreadsheet documents. - Not all changes are recorded. For example, the changing of a tab stop from align left to align right is not recorded. However, all usual changes made by a proofreader are recorded, such as additions, deletions, text alterations, and usual formatting. + The review function is available in %PRODUCTNAME for text documents and spreadsheet documents. + Not all changes are recorded. For example, the changing of a tab stop from align left to align right is not recorded. However, all usual changes made by a proofreader are recorded, such as additions, deletions, text alterations, and usual formatting. - 1. + 1. - To start recording changes, open the document to be edited and choose Edit - Track Changes and then choose Record Changes. + To start recording changes, open the document to be edited and choose Edit - Track Changes and then choose Record Changes. - 2. + 2. - Now start making your changes. You will note that all new text passages that you enter are underlined in color, while all text that you delete remains visible but is crossed out and shown in color. + Now start making your changes. You will note that all new text passages that you enter are underlined in color, while all text that you delete remains visible but is crossed out and shown in color. - 3. + 3. - If you move to a marked change with the mouse pointer, you will see a reference to the type of change, the author, date and time of day for the change in the Help Tip. If the Extended Tips are also enabled, you will also see any available comments on this change. + If you move to a marked change with the mouse pointer, you will see a reference to the type of change, the author, date and time of day for the change in the Help Tip. If the Extended Tips are also enabled, you will also see any available comments on this change.
-Changes in a spreadsheet document are highlighted by a border around the cells; when you point to the cell you can see more detailed information on this change in the Help Tip. -You can enter a comment on each recorded change by placing the cursor in the area of the change and then choosing Edit - Track Changes - Comment on Change. In addition to Extended Tips, the comment is also displayed in the list in the Manage Changes dialog. -To stop recording changes, choose Edit - Track Changes - Record Changes again. The check mark is removed and you can now save the document. -In a text document, you can highlight all lines that you have changed with an additional colored marking. This can be in the form of a red line in the margin, for example. -To change the settings for tracking changes, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes or on the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes. +Changes in a spreadsheet document are highlighted by a border around the cells; when you point to the cell you can see more detailed information on this change in the Help Tip. +You can enter a comment on each recorded change by placing the cursor in the area of the change and then choosing Edit - Track Changes - Comment on Change. In addition to Extended Tips, the comment is also displayed in the list in the Manage Changes dialog. +To stop recording changes, choose Edit - Track Changes - Record Changes again. The check mark is removed and you can now save the document. +In a text document, you can highlight all lines that you have changed with an additional colored marking. This can be in the form of a red line in the margin, for example. +To change the settings for tracking changes, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes or on the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_protect.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_protect.xhp index 29df3e3320..e105c3e2a3 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_protect.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_protect.xhp @@ -38,16 +38,16 @@ review function;protecting records mw added an index entry - Protecting Changes + Protecting Changes - The review function is available in %PRODUCTNAME for text documents and spreadsheet documents. - To protect the changes made in a document during editing, choose Edit - Track Changes - Protect Changes. To turn off the function or to accept or reject changes it is necessary to enter the correct password first. + The review function is available in %PRODUCTNAME for text documents and spreadsheet documents. + To protect the changes made in a document during editing, choose Edit - Track Changes - Protect Changes. To turn off the function or to accept or reject changes it is necessary to enter the correct password first. - Choose Protect Changes. This opens the Password dialog. + Choose Protect Changes. This opens the Password dialog. - Enter a password consisting of at least one character and confirm it. Click OK. + Enter a password consisting of at least one character and confirm it. Click OK. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_versions.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_versions.xhp index 6b215dd638..a888cbdab7 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_versions.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_versions.xhp @@ -33,11 +33,11 @@ documents; version management version management -Version Management +Version Management -The File menu contains a Versions command that enables you to save multiple versions of a document in the same file. -You can choose to view individual versions of a document, or you can display the differences between versions with color markings. -In the dialog to open a document, you can select from a combo box which version of this document you want to open. +The File menu contains a Versions command that enables you to save multiple versions of a document in the same file. +You can choose to view individual versions of a document, or you can display the differences between versions with color markings. +In the dialog to open a document, you can select from a combo box which version of this document you want to open.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/round_corner.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/round_corner.xhp index a402ae75b0..46c276b348 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/round_corner.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/round_corner.xhp @@ -37,18 +37,18 @@ round corners customizing;round corners mw made "rectangles;..." a one level entry -Creating Round Corners +Creating Round Corners -When you insert a rectangle or a callout box using the drawing functions and activate the Points icon on the Drawing toolbar, you see a small frame at the upper left corner of the object. The frame indicates the amount by which the corners are rounded. When the frame is positioned at the top left corner, no rounding occurs. When the frame is positioned on the handle centered at the top of the object, the corners are rounded as much as possible. You adjust the degree of rounding by moving the frame between these two positions. +When you insert a rectangle or a callout box using the drawing functions and activate the Points icon on the Drawing toolbar, you see a small frame at the upper left corner of the object. The frame indicates the amount by which the corners are rounded. When the frame is positioned at the top left corner, no rounding occurs. When the frame is positioned on the handle centered at the top of the object, the corners are rounded as much as possible. You adjust the degree of rounding by moving the frame between these two positions. - + Mouse pointer as hand -If you place the cursor on the box it changes to a hand symbol. You can now drag the box to change the amount of rounding. An outline shows a preview of the result. +If you place the cursor on the box it changes to a hand symbol. You can now drag the box to change the amount of rounding. An outline shows a preview of the result.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp index 4b8a2d6b4c..b58df9fd32 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp @@ -37,181 +37,181 @@ menus;assigning macros events;assigning scripts MW deleted "programming;...", "scripting in programming", "BeanShell scripting", "Basic;..." and "java;..."MW added "controls;..", "menus;..." and "events;..." -Assigning Scripts in %PRODUCTNAME +Assigning Scripts in %PRODUCTNAME - You can assign custom scripts (macros) to menu items, icons, dialog controls, and events in %PRODUCTNAME. - %PRODUCTNAME internally supports the following scripting languages: + You can assign custom scripts (macros) to menu items, icons, dialog controls, and events in %PRODUCTNAME. + %PRODUCTNAME internally supports the following scripting languages: - %PRODUCTNAME Basic + %PRODUCTNAME Basic - JavaScript + JavaScript - BeanShell + BeanShell - Python + Python - In addition, developers can use high-level languages, for example Java programming language, to control %PRODUCTNAME externally. The API reference is online at api.libreoffice.org. - To assign a script to a new menu entry + In addition, developers can use high-level languages, for example Java programming language, to control %PRODUCTNAME externally. The API reference is online at api.libreoffice.org. + To assign a script to a new menu entry - Choose Tools - Customize, and click the Menus tab. + Choose Tools - Customize, and click the Menus tab. - Click Add. + Click Add. - In the Category list box, scroll down and open the "%PRODUCTNAME Macros" entry. + In the Category list box, scroll down and open the "%PRODUCTNAME Macros" entry. - You see entries for "%PRODUCTNAME Macros" (scripts in the share directory of your %PRODUCTNAME installation), "My Macros" (scripts in the user directory), and the current document. Open any one of them to see the supported scripting languages. + You see entries for "%PRODUCTNAME Macros" (scripts in the share directory of your %PRODUCTNAME installation), "My Macros" (scripts in the user directory), and the current document. Open any one of them to see the supported scripting languages. - Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select a script. + Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select a script. - A list of the script functions appears in the Commands list box. Select a function. + A list of the script functions appears in the Commands list box. Select a function. - Click Add to create a new menu assignment. The new menu entry appears in the Entries list box. + Click Add to create a new menu assignment. The new menu entry appears in the Entries list box. - To assign a script to a key combination + To assign a script to a key combination - Choose Tools - Customize - Keyboard. + Choose Tools - Customize - Keyboard. - In the Category list box, scroll down and open the "%PRODUCTNAME Macros" entry. + In the Category list box, scroll down and open the "%PRODUCTNAME Macros" entry. - You see entries for "%PRODUCTNAME Macros" (scripts in the share directory of your %PRODUCTNAME installation), "My Macros" (scripts in the user directory), and the current document. Open any one of them to see the supported scripting languages. + You see entries for "%PRODUCTNAME Macros" (scripts in the share directory of your %PRODUCTNAME installation), "My Macros" (scripts in the user directory), and the current document. Open any one of them to see the supported scripting languages. - Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select any script. + Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select any script. - A list of the script functions will appear in the Commands list box. Select any function. + A list of the script functions will appear in the Commands list box. Select any function. - Click the option button for %PRODUCTNAME or Writer (or whichever application is currently open). - Selecting the option button sets the scope of the new key combination to be applicable in all of %PRODUCTNAME or only in documents of the current module. + Click the option button for %PRODUCTNAME or Writer (or whichever application is currently open). + Selecting the option button sets the scope of the new key combination to be applicable in all of %PRODUCTNAME or only in documents of the current module. - Select a key combination from the Shortcut keys list box and click Modify. + Select a key combination from the Shortcut keys list box and click Modify. - To assign a script to an event + To assign a script to an event - Choose Tools - Customize - Events. + Choose Tools - Customize - Events. - Click Macro button. + Click Macro button. - In the Library list box, scroll down and open the "%PRODUCTNAME Macros" entry. + In the Library list box, scroll down and open the "%PRODUCTNAME Macros" entry. - You see entries for "%PRODUCTNAME Macros" (scripts in the share directory of your %PRODUCTNAME installation), "My Macros" (scripts in the user directory), and the current document. Open any one of them to see the supported scripting languages. + You see entries for "%PRODUCTNAME Macros" (scripts in the share directory of your %PRODUCTNAME installation), "My Macros" (scripts in the user directory), and the current document. Open any one of them to see the supported scripting languages. - Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select any script. + Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select any script. - A list of the script functions will appear in the Assigned Action list box. Select any function. + A list of the script functions will appear in the Assigned Action list box. Select any function. - Select to save in %PRODUCTNAME or current document. - This sets the scope of the new event assignment to be applicable in all of %PRODUCTNAME or only in documents of the current module. + Select to save in %PRODUCTNAME or current document. + This sets the scope of the new event assignment to be applicable in all of %PRODUCTNAME or only in documents of the current module. - Select an event from the list and click OK. + Select an event from the list and click OK. - To assign a script to an event for an embedded object + To assign a script to an event for an embedded object - Select the embedded object, for example a chart, in your document. + Select the embedded object, for example a chart, in your document. Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Macro. - In the Macros list box, open the %PRODUCTNAME Scripts entry. + In the Macros list box, open the %PRODUCTNAME Scripts entry. - You see entries for share (scripts in the share directory of your %PRODUCTNAME installation), user (scripts in the user directory), and the current document. Open any one of them to see the supported scripting languages. + You see entries for share (scripts in the share directory of your %PRODUCTNAME installation), user (scripts in the user directory), and the current document. Open any one of them to see the supported scripting languages. - Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select any script. + Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select any script. - A list of the script functions will appear in the Existing macros in list box. Select any function. + A list of the script functions will appear in the Existing macros in list box. Select any function. - Select an event from the list and click OK. + Select an event from the list and click OK. - To assign a script to a hyperlink + To assign a script to a hyperlink - Position the cursor inside the hyperlink. + Position the cursor inside the hyperlink. - Choose Insert - Hyperlink. + Choose Insert - Hyperlink. - Click the Events button. + Click the Events button. - Select and assign as stated above. + Select and assign as stated above. - To assign a script to a graphic + To assign a script to a graphic - Select the graphic in your document. + Select the graphic in your document. - Choose Format - Image - Macro. + Choose Format - Image - Macro. - Select and assign as stated above. + Select and assign as stated above. - To assign a script to a form control + To assign a script to a form control - Insert a form control, for example a button: Open the Form Controls toolbar, click the Push Button icon, drag open a button on your document. + Insert a form control, for example a button: Open the Form Controls toolbar, click the Push Button icon, drag open a button on your document. - With the form control selected, click Control on the Form Controls toolbar. + With the form control selected, click Control on the Form Controls toolbar. - Click the Events tab of the Properties dialog. + Click the Events tab of the Properties dialog. - Click one of the ... buttons to open a dialog where you can assign a script to the selected event. + Click one of the ... buttons to open a dialog where you can assign a script to the selected event. - To assign a script to a control in the %PRODUCTNAME Basic dialog + To assign a script to a control in the %PRODUCTNAME Basic dialog - Open the %PRODUCTNAME Basic dialog editor, then create a dialog with a control on it. + Open the %PRODUCTNAME Basic dialog editor, then create a dialog with a control on it. - Right-click the control, then choose Properties. + Right-click the control, then choose Properties. - Click the Events tab of the Properties dialog. + Click the Events tab of the Properties dialog. - Click one of the ... buttons to open a dialog where you can assign a script to the selected event. + Click one of the ... buttons to open a dialog where you can assign a script to the selected event. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/space_hyphen.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/space_hyphen.xhp index 40a74b3338..56f31d4015 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/space_hyphen.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/space_hyphen.xhp @@ -40,23 +40,23 @@ protected hyphens exchanging, see also replacing -Inserting Non-breaking Spaces, Hyphens and Soft Hyphens +Inserting Non-breaking Spaces, Hyphens and Soft Hyphens -Non-breaking spaces -To prevent two words from being separated at the end of a line, hold down the Command key +Non-breaking spaces +To prevent two words from being separated at the end of a line, hold down the Command key Ctrl key and the Shift key when you type a space between the words. -In Calc, you cannot insert non-breaking spaces. -Non-breaking hyphen -An example of a non-breaking hyphen is a company name such as A-Z. Obviously you would not want A- to appear at the end of a line and Z at the beginning of the next line. To solve this problem, press Shift+Ctrl+ minus sign. In other words, hold down the Shift and Ctrl keys and press the minus key. -Replacing hyphens by dashes +In Calc, you cannot insert non-breaking spaces. +Non-breaking hyphen +An example of a non-breaking hyphen is a company name such as A-Z. Obviously you would not want A- to appear at the end of a line and Z at the beginning of the next line. To solve this problem, press Shift+Ctrl+ minus sign. In other words, hold down the Shift and Ctrl keys and press the minus key. +Replacing hyphens by dashes In order to enter dashes, you can find under Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Options the Replace dashes option. This option replaces one or two hyphens under certain conditions with an en-dash or an em-dash (see AutoCorrect Options). For additional replacements see the replacements table under Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Replace. Here you can, among other things, replace a shortcut automatically by a dash, even in another font. -Soft hyphen -To support automatic hyphenation by entering a soft hyphen inside a word yourself, use the keys Command +Soft hyphen +To support automatic hyphenation by entering a soft hyphen inside a word yourself, use the keys Command Ctrl+minus sign. The word is separated at this position when it is at the end of the line, even if automatic hyphenation for this paragraph is switched off. -Special characters +Special characters diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp index cc80ef9ceb..12275cf25d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp @@ -35,35 +35,35 @@ faxes; fax programs/fax printers under UNIX printers; faxes under UNIX - -Setting up Printer and Fax Under UNIX Based Platforms + +Setting up Printer and Fax Under UNIX Based Platforms
-%PRODUCTNAME uses the installed fonts of your system. In a text document you can select from all printable fonts. In an HTML document or in Web layout, only fonts that are visible on screen are offered. In spreadsheets and drawings you can select from all installed fonts. +%PRODUCTNAME uses the installed fonts of your system. In a text document you can select from all printable fonts. In an HTML document or in Web layout, only fonts that are visible on screen are offered. In spreadsheets and drawings you can select from all installed fonts. -Changing Printer Settings -In the Print dialog or the Printer Settings dialog, select the printer from the printers list box and click Properties. The Properties dialog appears containing several tab pages. This is where you can make settings that are used according to the PPD file of the selected printer. +Changing Printer Settings +In the Print dialog or the Printer Settings dialog, select the printer from the printers list box and click Properties. The Properties dialog appears containing several tab pages. This is where you can make settings that are used according to the PPD file of the selected printer. -On the Paper tab page, you can define the paper format and paper tray to be used as the default settings for this printer. +On the Paper tab page, you can define the paper format and paper tray to be used as the default settings for this printer. -On the Device tab page, you can activate the special options for your printer. If your printer can only print in black and white, choose "grayscale" under Color, otherwise choose "color". If switching to grayscale leads to unfavorable results, you can also select "color" under Color and see how the printer or PostScript emulator applies it. Furthermore, on this tab page you can set the precision with which colors are described as well as the PostScript level. +On the Device tab page, you can activate the special options for your printer. If your printer can only print in black and white, choose "grayscale" under Color, otherwise choose "color". If switching to grayscale leads to unfavorable results, you can also select "color" under Color and see how the printer or PostScript emulator applies it. Furthermore, on this tab page you can set the precision with which colors are described as well as the PostScript level. -Selecting a Default Printer +Selecting a Default Printer -To make the printer selected from the Installed printers list box the default printer, double-click its name or click the Default button. +To make the printer selected from the Installed printers list box the default printer, double-click its name or click the Default button. - -Using Fax Functionality -If you have installed fax4CUPS on your computer you can send faxes with the $[officename] software. -A dialog prompting you for the phone numbers to send the fax to will appear after the printout when printing to a fax4CUPS printer. Multiple numbers can be entered separated by ; -In $[officename] you can also activate an icon for sending faxes to a default fax. To do this, choose Tools - Customize - Toolbars, click Add Commands and add from "Documents" the Send Default Fax icon. You can set which fax is used when this button is pressed under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. -Remember to create one separate print job for each fax, otherwise, the first recipient will receive all the faxes. In the Tools - Mail Merge dialog select the Printer option and then select the Single print jobs check box. - + +Using Fax Functionality +If you have installed fax4CUPS on your computer you can send faxes with the $[officename] software. +A dialog prompting you for the phone numbers to send the fax to will appear after the printout when printing to a fax4CUPS printer. Multiple numbers can be entered separated by ; +In $[officename] you can also activate an icon for sending faxes to a default fax. To do this, choose Tools - Customize - Toolbars, click Add Commands and add from "Documents" the Send Default Fax icon. You can set which fax is used when this button is pressed under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. +Remember to create one separate print job for each fax, otherwise, the first recipient will receive all the faxes. In the Tools - Mail Merge dialog select the Printer option and then select the Single print jobs check box. +
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp index 9ff9837631..3abbc7f6a0 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp @@ -39,39 +39,39 @@ templates;editing and saving saving;templates resetting;templates -MW deleted "changing;"Changing Default Templates +MW deleted "changing;"Changing Default Templates
-When you open a new document with File - New, a blank document appears based on a $[officename] template. You can edit, modify, or replace this template so that the new document contains your customized Styles or other contents. -Modifying Default Templates +When you open a new document with File - New, a blank document appears based on a $[officename] template. You can edit, modify, or replace this template so that the new document contains your customized Styles or other contents. +Modifying Default Templates -First, open either an existing $[officename] template and modify it, or open a new document and edit it as necessary to create the desired template. +First, open either an existing $[officename] template and modify it, or open a new document and edit it as necessary to create the desired template. -You can define a document template for each $[officename] module. The following describes how to proceed for text documents. +You can define a document template for each $[officename] module. The following describes how to proceed for text documents. -Save the document by choosing File - Templates - Save As Template and saving the document in the My Templates category. +Save the document by choosing File - Templates - Save As Template and saving the document in the My Templates category. -Choose File - New - Templates. +Choose File - New - Templates. -Double-click My Templates in the list. You will see the user-defined templates in the user directory specified under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths. Select the template you have just saved. +Double-click My Templates in the list. You will see the user-defined templates in the user directory specified under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths. Select the template you have just saved. -Choose Set as default. The next time you open a new text document, the new document will be based on the new default template. +Choose Set as default. The next time you open a new text document, the new document will be based on the new default template. -Using Custom Templates -There are several ways to make your work easier by using your own custom templates. -Templates in the Template Folder -You can save a new template with File - Templates - Save As Template or by selecting "Template" file type in any Save dialog. Save the template in the user directory specified under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths to be able to access the template from within the File - New - Templates dialog. -To open the template for editing, choose File - New - Templates, select the template and click the Edit button. +Using Custom Templates +There are several ways to make your work easier by using your own custom templates. +Templates in the Template Folder +You can save a new template with File - Templates - Save As Template or by selecting "Template" file type in any Save dialog. Save the template in the user directory specified under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths to be able to access the template from within the File - New - Templates dialog. +To open the template for editing, choose File - New - Templates, select the template and click the Edit button.
-Templates +Templates diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/start_parameters.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/start_parameters.xhp index 75a9617690..40d579c2f8 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/start_parameters.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/start_parameters.xhp @@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ Prints the following files to the printer {Printername} and ends. The splash screen does not appear. - If the file name contains spaces, then it must be enclosed in quotation marks. + If the file name contains spaces, then it must be enclosed in quotation marks. If used multiple times, only last {Printername} is effective for all documents of all --pt runs. Also, --printer-name argument of --print-to-file switch interferes with {Printername}. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp index be364d1234..01e700b491 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp @@ -35,12 +35,12 @@ -Start Center +Start Center -Welcome to %PRODUCTNAME. +Welcome to %PRODUCTNAME. Thank you for using the %PRODUCTNAME application help. Press F1 whenever you need help using the %PRODUCTNAME software. -You see the Start Center when no document is open in %PRODUCTNAME. +You see the Start Center when no document is open in %PRODUCTNAME. It is divided into two panes. Click an icon on the left pane to open a new document or a file dialog. @@ -49,40 +49,40 @@ -The document icons each open a new document of the specified type. +The document icons each open a new document of the specified type. - + Text Document opens %PRODUCTNAME Writer - + Spreadsheet opens %PRODUCTNAME Calc - + Presentation opens %PRODUCTNAME Impress - + Drawing opens %PRODUCTNAME Draw - + Database opens %PRODUCTNAME Base - + Formula opens %PRODUCTNAME Math -The Templates icon opens the Templates and Documents dialog. -The Templates icon opens the Templates and Documents dialog. +The Templates icon opens the Templates and Documents dialog. +The Templates icon opens the Templates and Documents dialog. -The Open a Document icon presents a file open dialog. -The Open a document icon presents a file open dialog.the four icons show a short explanation already -The right pane contains thumbnails of the most recent documents you opened. Hover your mouse over the thumbnail to highlight the document, display a tip about the document location and display an icon on the top right to delete the thumbnail from the pane and from the recent files list. Click on the thumbnail to open the document underneath. -Not every file type will display a thumbnail image of its content. Instead, you may see a large icon used by your computer for that filetype. +The Open a Document icon presents a file open dialog. +The Open a document icon presents a file open dialog.the four icons show a short explanation already +The right pane contains thumbnails of the most recent documents you opened. Hover your mouse over the thumbnail to highlight the document, display a tip about the document location and display an icon on the top right to delete the thumbnail from the pane and from the recent files list. Click on the thumbnail to open the document underneath. +Not every file type will display a thumbnail image of its content. Instead, you may see a large icon used by your computer for that filetype. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp index d04fd72196..c101009e82 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp @@ -42,102 +42,102 @@ rulers; measurement units measurement units; changing on rulers MW deleted "text;" -Inserting and Editing Tab Stops +Inserting and Editing Tab Stops -On the horizontal ruler you can see the tab stops for the current paragraph. If you want to change the tab stops, you should first consider the scope to which you want to change tab stops as follows: +On the horizontal ruler you can see the tab stops for the current paragraph. If you want to change the tab stops, you should first consider the scope to which you want to change tab stops as follows: -Change the default tab stops for all documents: Use the menu %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General. +Change the default tab stops for all documents: Use the menu %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General. -Change the tab stops for all paragraphs using the current Paragraph Style: Right-click the paragraph to open the context menu, choose Edit Paragraph Style, click Tabs. +Change the tab stops for all paragraphs using the current Paragraph Style: Right-click the paragraph to open the context menu, choose Edit Paragraph Style, click Tabs. -Change the tab stops for one or more paragraphs: Select the paragraphs, then click inside the ruler. +Change the tab stops for one or more paragraphs: Select the paragraphs, then click inside the ruler. -In the following, you find instructions for all above mentioned tasks. -You can set a tab stop by clicking on the ruler or by selecting Format - Paragraph - Tabs. Both methods affect the current paragraph or all selected paragraphs. -Click the ruler once to set a left-justified tab. Right-click a tab icon on the ruler to see the context menu in which you can change the tab type. -To set several decimal tabs one after the other, keep clicking the icon to the left of the ruler until the desired tab type is shown, then click on the ruler. +In the following, you find instructions for all above mentioned tasks. +You can set a tab stop by clicking on the ruler or by selecting Format - Paragraph - Tabs. Both methods affect the current paragraph or all selected paragraphs. +Click the ruler once to set a left-justified tab. Right-click a tab icon on the ruler to see the context menu in which you can change the tab type. +To set several decimal tabs one after the other, keep clicking the icon to the left of the ruler until the desired tab type is shown, then click on the ruler. -Selection +Selection -Description: +Description: - + Icon -Setting left tabs +Setting left tabs - + Icon -Setting right tabs +Setting right tabs - + Icon -Setting decimal tabs +Setting decimal tabs - + Icon -Setting centered tabs +Setting centered tabs
-Double-click the ruler to open the Paragraph dialog. -Double-click the white area of the ruler to set one tab. The Paragraph dialog appears with the Tabs tab page open. -Moving Tabs on the Ruler +Double-click the ruler to open the Paragraph dialog. +Double-click the white area of the ruler to set one tab. The Paragraph dialog appears with the Tabs tab page open. +Moving Tabs on the Ruler -Move individual tab stops on the ruler using the mouse. +Move individual tab stops on the ruler using the mouse. -To move several tab stops on the ruler, press the Shift key before you click a tab. Drag one tab while continuing to press Shift to move that tab as well as all the tabs to the right of it. The spacing between those tabs remains the same. +To move several tab stops on the ruler, press the Shift key before you click a tab. Drag one tab while continuing to press Shift to move that tab as well as all the tabs to the right of it. The spacing between those tabs remains the same. -Press Command +Press Command Ctrl when you drag a tab on the ruler to move that tab and all the tabs to the right of it. This results in the spacing between those tabs changing proportionally to their distance from the margin. -Changing the Properties of Tabs -To change tab type, click the tab you want to change on the ruler, then right-click to open the context menu. -Deleting Tabs -To delete a tab, hold down the mouse button while you drag the tab outside the ruler. +Changing the Properties of Tabs +To change tab type, click the tab you want to change on the ruler, then right-click to open the context menu. +Deleting Tabs +To delete a tab, hold down the mouse button while you drag the tab outside the ruler. -Changing the Defaults -If you want to change the settings of your default tab stops, you will find further information under %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General +Changing the Defaults +If you want to change the settings of your default tab stops, you will find further information under %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General %PRODUCTNAME Draw - General %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General @@ -146,13 +146,13 @@ -The context menu of the ruler allows you to change the displayed units of measurement. These changes are only valid until you exit $[officename], and they only apply to the ruler on whose context menu you made the change. If you want to change the ruler measurement units permanently, choose Tools - Options - [Document type] - View and change the measurement unit there. +The context menu of the ruler allows you to change the displayed units of measurement. These changes are only valid until you exit $[officename], and they only apply to the ruler on whose context menu you made the change. If you want to change the ruler measurement units permanently, choose Tools - Options - [Document type] - View and change the measurement unit there.
-Ruler +Ruler
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/text_color.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/text_color.xhp index e7f1784286..3d588687bc 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/text_color.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/text_color.xhp @@ -32,19 +32,18 @@ colors; fonts fonts;colors MW added two entries from text/shared/01/05020200.xhp and deleted "colors;fill format" -Changing the Color of Text +Changing the Color of Text - Click the arrow next to the Font Color icon to activate a toolbar from which you can choose from a range of colors. + Click the arrow next to the Font Color icon to activate a toolbar from which you can choose from a range of colors. - + Icon - Font Color + Font Color
@@ -52,21 +51,21 @@ - + Icon paint can symbol -The following only applies to %PRODUCTNAME Writer: If you click the icon with a short-click while no text is selected, then the mouse pointer changes its appearance and is displayed as a paint can. Use this paint can symbol with the mouse key pressed to drag across a text area. This text area takes the selected color. The function remains active for as long as the icon is pressed, or until you click without dragging, or until you press the Escape key. +The following only applies to %PRODUCTNAME Writer: If you click the icon with a short-click while no text is selected, then the mouse pointer changes its appearance and is displayed as a paint can. Use this paint can symbol with the mouse key pressed to drag across a text area. This text area takes the selected color. The function remains active for as long as the icon is pressed, or until you click without dragging, or until you press the Escape key.
- The following applies to all modules (%PRODUCTNAME Writer, Calc, Draw, Impress): Select the text that is to take another color, then click the color you want on the toolbar. + The following applies to all modules (%PRODUCTNAME Writer, Calc, Draw, Impress): Select the text that is to take another color, then click the color you want on the toolbar. - Font color + Font color \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/textmode_change.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/textmode_change.xhp index 6d8d01c6bb..fee788bd9b 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/textmode_change.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/textmode_change.xhp @@ -34,32 +34,32 @@ overwrite mode insert mode for entering text -Switching Between Insert Mode and Overwrite Mode +Switching Between Insert Mode and Overwrite Mode -With the keyboard: -Press Insert to toggle between overwrite mode and insert mode. The current mode is displayed on the Status Bar. The text cursor must be enabled in the cell or in the input line. +With the keyboard: +Press Insert to toggle between overwrite mode and insert mode. The current mode is displayed on the Status Bar. The text cursor must be enabled in the cell or in the input line. -With the mouse: -On the Status Bar, click on the area indicating the current mode in order to switch to the other mode: +With the mouse: +On the Status Bar, click on the area indicating the current mode in order to switch to the other mode: - + INSRT -Insert mode is enabled. The text cursor is a blinking vertical line. +Insert mode is enabled. The text cursor is a blinking vertical line. Click on the area to enable the overwrite mode. - + OVER -The overwrite mode is enabled. The text cursor is a blinking block. +The overwrite mode is enabled. The text cursor is a blinking block. Click on the area to enable insert mode. -Keyboard commands +Keyboard commands diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/undo_formatting.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/undo_formatting.xhp index 7db86846fb..4a37f37608 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/undo_formatting.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/undo_formatting.xhp @@ -39,9 +39,9 @@ MW deleted "removing;..." Undoing Direct Formatting for a Document -You can undo all formatting that has not been made by styles in a few steps. +You can undo all formatting that has not been made by styles in a few steps. -Removing all Direct Formatting in a $[officename] Writer Document +Removing all Direct Formatting in a $[officename] Writer Document Press Ctrl+A to select the whole text. @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ Choose Format - Clear Direct Formatting. -Removing all Direct Formatting in a $[officename] Calc Spreadsheet +Removing all Direct Formatting in a $[officename] Calc Spreadsheet While pressing the Shift key click the first and then the last sheet tab to select all sheets. @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Removing all Direct Formatting in a $[officename] Presentation -Click the Outline tab to open outline view. +Click the Outline tab to open outline view. Press Ctrl+A to select the whole text. @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@
-Undo Options +Undo Options
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/version_number.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/version_number.xhp index 6e87a876fa..cce4d22b24 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/version_number.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/version_number.xhp @@ -33,14 +33,14 @@ build numbers of $[officename] copyright for $[officename] -Versions and Build Numbers +Versions and Build Numbers -Choose Help - About $[officename]. This opens a dialog containing information about the program. +Choose Help - About $[officename]. This opens a dialog containing information about the program. -See lists of code and Wiki contributors on the LibreOffice website. +See lists of code and Wiki contributors on the LibreOffice website. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/viewing_file_properties.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/viewing_file_properties.xhp index 307583190c..5bc8d566bb 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/viewing_file_properties.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/viewing_file_properties.xhp @@ -35,30 +35,30 @@ files;properties viewing;file properties -Viewing File Properties +Viewing File Properties -File properties, such as author name, subject, and keywords, help you manage and identify your documents. $[officename] also tracks file statistics, including the number of words and the number of pages in a document, and automatically adds the statistics as part of the file property. -You can view file properties for the current document or for a document in the Windows File Open dialog +File properties, such as author name, subject, and keywords, help you manage and identify your documents. $[officename] also tracks file statistics, including the number of words and the number of pages in a document, and automatically adds the statistics as part of the file property. +You can view file properties for the current document or for a document in the Windows File Open dialog . -To view file properties for the current document: +To view file properties for the current document: -Choose File - Properties. +Choose File - Properties. -To view file properties for a document listed in the Windows File Open dialog +To view file properties for a document listed in the Windows File Open dialog -Choose File - Open. +Choose File - Open. -Select a file in the list. +Select a file in the list. -Right-click and choose Properties. +Right-click and choose Properties. diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp index 2784530001..4c69243fba 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp @@ -34,24 +34,23 @@ pictures; changing paths changing;work directory work --> working, i85615 -Changing Your Working Directory +Changing Your Working Directory - When you start a dialog to open or save a document, $[officename] initially displays your working directory. To change this directory: + When you start a dialog to open or save a document, $[officename] initially displays your working directory. To change this directory: - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. - Click My Documents and click the Edit button, or double-click on My Documents. + Click My Documents and click the Edit button, or double-click on My Documents. - In the Select Path dialog, choose the working directory you want and click Select. + In the Select Path dialog, choose the working directory you want and click Select. - You also use this procedure to change the directory displayed by $[officename] when you want to insert a graphic. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths - Images, then follow step 3. + You also use this procedure to change the directory displayed by $[officename] when you want to insert a graphic. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths - Images, then follow step 3.
- Paths + Paths \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/xforms.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/xforms.xhp index 2a988daffa..5f37fbe230 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/xforms.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/xforms.xhp @@ -42,57 +42,57 @@ opening;XForms MW made a cross-reference of "XML Forms" and made a two level entry of "XForms" - XML Form Documents (XForms) - XForms are a new type of web form that was developed by the World Wide Web Consortium. The XForm model is defined in Extensible Markup Language (XML). The model uses separate sections to describe what a form does and what a form looks like. You can view the specification for XForms at: http://www.w3.org/MarkUp/Forms/. + XML Form Documents (XForms) + XForms are a new type of web form that was developed by the World Wide Web Consortium. The XForm model is defined in Extensible Markup Language (XML). The model uses separate sections to describe what a form does and what a form looks like. You can view the specification for XForms at: http://www.w3.org/MarkUp/Forms/.
- Working with XForms - In %PRODUCTNAME, an XForms document is a special type of Writer document. The Design Mode for an XForm document has additional toolbars and panes. - After you create and save an XForms document, you can open the document, fill out the form, and submit the changes to a server. - What's the role of UBL?We do not officially support exporting to XHTML - but should be possible using XSLT - To Create a New XForms Document + Working with XForms + In %PRODUCTNAME, an XForms document is a special type of Writer document. The Design Mode for an XForm document has additional toolbars and panes. + After you create and save an XForms document, you can open the document, fill out the form, and submit the changes to a server. + What's the role of UBL?We do not officially support exporting to XHTML - but should be possible using XSLT + To Create a New XForms Document - Choose File - New - XML Form Document. - The XForms design window opens in an empty Writer document. + Choose File - New - XML Form Document. + The XForms design window opens in an empty Writer document. - Design your form. + Design your form. - Insert a control, select the default model in the property browser, and enter a binding statement. + Insert a control, select the default model in the property browser, and enter a binding statement. - In the data navigator, add an element to the instance. + In the data navigator, add an element to the instance. - Load a new instance from an XML file and add controls to the relevant XML elements or attributes. + Load a new instance from an XML file and add controls to the relevant XML elements or attributes. - To Open an XForms Document + To Open an XForms Document - Choose File - Open and select the XForms document. An XForm document has the same extension as a Writer text document (*.odt). + Choose File - Open and select the XForms document. An XForm document has the same extension as a Writer text document (*.odt). - To Edit an XForms Document - Open the XForms document and use the following toolbars and windows: + To Edit an XForms Document + Open the XForms document and use the following toolbars and windows: - Form Design toolbar + Form Design toolbar - Form Controls toolbar + Form Controls toolbar - Data Navigator + Data Navigator - Form Navigator + Form Navigator - UFI: currently only StarOffice can render and evaluate our XForms docs. Mozilla has announced a planned support recently. There may be plugins for other browsers. Should we tell the user? + UFI: currently only StarOffice can render and evaluate our XForms docs. Mozilla has announced a planned support recently. There may be plugins for other browsers. Should we tell the user? diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter.xhp index 023c03a7f1..23f6720aa8 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter.xhp @@ -36,29 +36,29 @@ XSLT filters, see also XML filters mw moved 2 index entries to the new file xsltfilter_distribute.xhp and 2 entries to new file xsltfilter_create.xhp - About XML Filters + About XML Filters - %PRODUCTNAME stores documents in XML format. You can create customized filters that convert the native OpenDocument XML file format used by %PRODUCTNAME into another format. These filters can be integrated into %PRODUCTNAME seamlessly so that you can save or load these formats transparently. - To create an XML filter, you must have a good understanding of XML and XSLT concepts. These concepts are beyond the scope of this help. - An XML filter contains stylesheets that are written in the XSLT language. The stylesheets define the transformation from the OpenDocument file format to another XML format through export and import filters. There are three types of XML filters: + %PRODUCTNAME stores documents in XML format. You can create customized filters that convert the native OpenDocument XML file format used by %PRODUCTNAME into another format. These filters can be integrated into %PRODUCTNAME seamlessly so that you can save or load these formats transparently. + To create an XML filter, you must have a good understanding of XML and XSLT concepts. These concepts are beyond the scope of this help. + An XML filter contains stylesheets that are written in the XSLT language. The stylesheets define the transformation from the OpenDocument file format to another XML format through export and import filters. There are three types of XML filters: - Import Filters load external XML files and transform the format of the files into the OpenDocument XML file format. After you install an import filter, the name of the filter is added to the list of file types in the File Open dialog. + Import Filters load external XML files and transform the format of the files into the OpenDocument XML file format. After you install an import filter, the name of the filter is added to the list of file types in the File Open dialog. - Export Filters transform OpenDocument XML files and save the files to a different XML format. After you install an export filter, the name of the filter is added to the list of file types in the Export dialog. + Export Filters transform OpenDocument XML files and save the files to a different XML format. After you install an export filter, the name of the filter is added to the list of file types in the Export dialog. - Import/Export Filters load and save OpenDocument XML files into a different XML format. After you install these filters, the names of the filters are added to the list of file types in the File Open dialog and the File Save As dialog. + Import/Export Filters load and save OpenDocument XML files into a different XML format. After you install these filters, the names of the filters are added to the list of file types in the File Open dialog and the File Save As dialog.
- World Wide Web Consortium Pages on Extensible Stylesheet Language (XSL) - World Wide Web Consortium Pages on Extensible Markup Language (XML) - - Distributing XML filters - Creating and Testing XML filters + World Wide Web Consortium Pages on Extensible Stylesheet Language (XSL) + World Wide Web Consortium Pages on Extensible Markup Language (XML) + + Distributing XML filters + Creating and Testing XML filters
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_create.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_create.xhp index e0a6a6c5e9..a461099b39 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_create.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_create.xhp @@ -36,107 +36,107 @@ XML filters;creating/testing mw moved 2 index entries from xsltfilter.xhp, then changed "XML filters;" - Creating XML Filters + Creating XML Filters - Creating an XML Filter for %PRODUCTNAME - When you create an XML filter for %PRODUCTNAME, you need to design an XSLT stylesheet that can convert to and from the OpenDocument XML file format. - For more information about the OpenDocument XML format, go to http://xml.openoffice.org/. - If you want, you can include a template with your filter to apply %PRODUCTNAME styles to an XML document that you import. - To Create an XML Filter + Creating an XML Filter for %PRODUCTNAME + When you create an XML filter for %PRODUCTNAME, you need to design an XSLT stylesheet that can convert to and from the OpenDocument XML file format. + For more information about the OpenDocument XML format, go to http://xml.openoffice.org/. + If you want, you can include a template with your filter to apply %PRODUCTNAME styles to an XML document that you import. + To Create an XML Filter - Create an XSLT transformation stylesheet that maps the elements of the external XML format to the elements of the OpenDocument XML file format and back again. + Create an XSLT transformation stylesheet that maps the elements of the external XML format to the elements of the OpenDocument XML file format and back again. - Create a template that assigns %PRODUCTNAME styles to elements in the external XML format when you import a file in this format into %PRODUCTNAME. + Create a template that assigns %PRODUCTNAME styles to elements in the external XML format when you import a file in this format into %PRODUCTNAME. - In %PRODUCTNAME Writer, create a text document, and choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. + In %PRODUCTNAME Writer, create a text document, and choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. - Click New. + Click New. - In the XML Filter dialog, click the General tab, and define the properties of the filter. + In the XML Filter dialog, click the General tab, and define the properties of the filter. - In the Filter Name box, enter a name for the XML filter. - This name is displayed in the XML Filter Settings dialog. + In the Filter Name box, enter a name for the XML filter. + This name is displayed in the XML Filter Settings dialog. - In the Application box, select the %PRODUCTNAME application that the filter is for. + In the Application box, select the %PRODUCTNAME application that the filter is for. - In the Name of File Type box, enter the file type that the filter is for. - This name is displayed in the list of file types in the Open, Export, and Save As dialogs. + In the Name of File Type box, enter the file type that the filter is for. + This name is displayed in the list of file types in the Open, Export, and Save As dialogs. - In the File extension box, enter the extension for the exported file. - To differentiate the file from other XML files, enter an extension other than *.xml. + In the File extension box, enter the extension for the exported file. + To differentiate the file from other XML files, enter an extension other than *.xml. - On the Transformation tab page, define the transformation properties for the filter. + On the Transformation tab page, define the transformation properties for the filter. - (Optional) In the DocType box, enter the document type identifier for the external file format. - This identifier is used to detect the file type on import. + (Optional) In the DocType box, enter the document type identifier for the external file format. + This identifier is used to detect the file type on import. - In the XSLT for export box, enter the path and file name of the XSLT stylesheet that defines the transformation from OpenDocument format to the external format. + In the XSLT for export box, enter the path and file name of the XSLT stylesheet that defines the transformation from OpenDocument format to the external format. - In the XSLT for import box, enter the path and file name to the XSLT stylesheet that defines the transformation from the external format to OpenDocument format. + In the XSLT for import box, enter the path and file name to the XSLT stylesheet that defines the transformation from the external format to OpenDocument format. - (Optional) In the Template for import box, enter the path and name of the template that defines the %PRODUCTNAME styles that are used in the imported file. - The files that are specified on the Transformation tab page are copied to the local %PRODUCTNAME users directory. + (Optional) In the Template for import box, enter the path and name of the template that defines the %PRODUCTNAME styles that are used in the imported file. + The files that are specified on the Transformation tab page are copied to the local %PRODUCTNAME users directory. - Click OK. + Click OK. - To Test an XML Filter - You can perform basic tests on a custom XML filter in %PRODUCTNAME. - The document is not altered by these tests. + To Test an XML Filter + You can perform basic tests on a custom XML filter in %PRODUCTNAME. + The document is not altered by these tests. - Create or open a text document. + Create or open a text document. - Choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. + Choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. - In the list of filters, select the filter that you want to test, and click Test XSLTs. + In the list of filters, select the filter that you want to test, and click Test XSLTs. - To test an Export Filter, do one of the following in the Export area of the dialog: + To test an Export Filter, do one of the following in the Export area of the dialog: - Click Browse, select the %PRODUCTNAME document that you want to test, and click Open. + Click Browse, select the %PRODUCTNAME document that you want to test, and click Open. - To test the current document, click Current Document. + To test the current document, click Current Document. - To test an Import Filter, click Browse in the Import area of the dialog, select a document, and click Open. + To test an Import Filter, click Browse in the Import area of the dialog, select a document, and click Open.
- About XML Filters - Distributing XML filters + About XML Filters + Distributing XML filters
diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_distribute.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_distribute.xhp index bcdb1ec665..63c9eb4258 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_distribute.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_distribute.xhp @@ -38,41 +38,41 @@ installing;XML filters mw moved 2 index entries from xsltfilter.xhp and added 2 entries - Distributing An XML Filter As Package + Distributing An XML Filter As Package - You can distribute an XML filter to multiple users using a special package format. - To Save an XML Filter as a Package - The XML Filter Settings dialog is only available when a text document is open. + You can distribute an XML filter to multiple users using a special package format. + To Save an XML Filter as a Package + The XML Filter Settings dialog is only available when a text document is open. - In Writer, choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. + In Writer, choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. - Select the filter that you want to distribute and click Save As Package. + Select the filter that you want to distribute and click Save As Package. - To Install an XML Filter from a Package - The XML Filter Settings dialog is only available when a text document is opened. + To Install an XML Filter from a Package + The XML Filter Settings dialog is only available when a text document is opened. - In Writer, choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. + In Writer, choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. - Click Open Package and select the package file with the filter you want to install. + Click Open Package and select the package file with the filter you want to install. - To Delete an Installed XML Filter + To Delete an Installed XML Filter - In Writer, choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. + In Writer, choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. - Select the filter you want to delete and click Delete. + Select the filter you want to delete and click Delete.
- About XML Filters + About XML Filters
diff --git a/source/text/shared/main0201.xhp b/source/text/shared/main0201.xhp index a38b938c73..a614832d76 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/main0201.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/main0201.xhp @@ -29,18 +29,18 @@
-Standard Bar -The Standard bar is available in every $[officename] application. +Standard Bar +The Standard bar is available in every $[officename] application.
-Open File +Open File -Save As - +Save As + @@ -60,8 +60,8 @@ -Spellcheck -Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors. +Spellcheck +Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors. @@ -98,27 +98,27 @@ -Insert Chart -Creates a chart in the current document. +Insert Chart +Creates a chart in the current document. -Sort Descending / Sort Ascending -Sorts the selection from the highest to the lowest value, or from the lowest to the highest value using the column that contains the cursor. +Sort Descending / Sort Ascending +Sorts the selection from the highest to the lowest value, or from the lowest to the highest value using the column that contains the cursor. -Chart -Creates a chart in the current document. +Chart +Creates a chart in the current document. -Spreadsheet -Inserts a spreadsheet as an OLE object. Enter or paste data into the cells, then click outside the object to return to Impress. +Spreadsheet +Inserts a spreadsheet as an OLE object. Enter or paste data into the cells, then click outside the object to return to Impress. -Display Grid +Display Grid -Chart -Creates a chart in the current document. +Chart +Creates a chart in the current document. @@ -138,12 +138,12 @@ - + Icon -Zoom +Zoom
@@ -151,18 +151,18 @@
-What's this -Enables extended help tips under the mouse pointer till the next click. +What's this +Enables extended help tips under the mouse pointer till the next click.
- + icon -What's this +What's this
diff --git a/source/text/shared/main0204.xhp b/source/text/shared/main0204.xhp index d7068f5d57..8d3175932f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/main0204.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/main0204.xhp @@ -29,8 +29,8 @@
-Table Bar -The Table Bar contains functions you need when working with tables. It appears when you move the cursor into a table. +Table Bar +The Table Bar contains functions you need when working with tables. It appears when you move the cursor into a table.
@@ -40,9 +40,9 @@ -Area Style / Filling +Area Style / Filling -Merge Cells +Merge Cells @@ -56,16 +56,16 @@ -Delete Row +Delete Row -Delete Column +Delete Column following only optional, ext.help is available: Select Table Select Column Select Row Table Design -Opens the Table Design. Double-click a preview to format the table. +Opens the Table Design. Double-click a preview to format the table.
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@
-Table Properties +Table Properties diff --git a/source/text/shared/main0208.xhp b/source/text/shared/main0208.xhp index d2354b274e..0b94656632 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/main0208.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/main0208.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
-Status Bar in $[officename] Basic Documents -The Status Bar displays information about the current $[officename] Basic document. +Status Bar in $[officename] Basic Documents +The Status Bar displays information about the current $[officename] Basic document.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/main0212.xhp b/source/text/shared/main0212.xhp index c92b91bd95..653e10c39d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/main0212.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/main0212.xhp @@ -28,21 +28,20 @@
- Table Data Bar - Use the Table Data bar to control the data view. + Table Data Bar + Use the Table Data bar to control the data view.
- The filtered data view is active until you change or cancel the sorting or filtering criteria. If a filter is active, the Apply Filter icon on the Table Data bar is activated. + The filtered data view is active until you change or cancel the sorting or filtering criteria. If a filter is active, the Apply Filter icon on the Table Data bar is activated. - + Icon - Save Record + Save Record
@@ -52,12 +51,12 @@ - + Icon - Undo: Data Input + Undo: Data Input
@@ -80,14 +79,14 @@ -Data to Text - Inserts all fields of the marked record into the current document at the cursor position. +Data to Text + Inserts all fields of the marked record into the current document at the cursor position. Help ID is here because we need it in shared since the F4 browser has another context "sdatabase" so I had to move the Help ID from the swriter folder -Mail Merge - Starts the Mail Merge Wizard to create form letters. +Mail Merge + Starts the Mail Merge Wizard to create form letters. diff --git a/source/text/shared/main0213.xhp b/source/text/shared/main0213.xhp index 673bedc485..e6cba00121 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/main0213.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/main0213.xhp @@ -37,149 +37,149 @@ data; sorting in forms forms;sorting data MW changed "toolbars;..." -Form Navigation Bar -The Form Navigation bar contains icons to edit a database table or to control the data view. The bar is displayed at the bottom of a document that contains fields that are linked to a database. +Form Navigation Bar +The Form Navigation bar contains icons to edit a database table or to control the data view. The bar is displayed at the bottom of a document that contains fields that are linked to a database.
-You can use the Form Navigation bar to move within records as well as to insert and to delete records. If data is saved in a form, the changes are transferred to the database. The Form Navigation bar also contains sort, filter, and search functions for data records. -You can use the Navigation bar icon on the More Controls bar to add a Navigation bar to a form. -The Navigation bar is only visible for forms connected to a database. In the Design view of a form, the Navigation bar is not available. See also Table Data bar. -You can control the view of data with the sorting and filtering functions. Original tables are not changed. -The current sort order or filter is saved with the current document. If a filter is set, the Apply Filter icon on the Navigation bar is activated. Sorting and filtering features in the document can also be configured in the Form Properties dialog. (Choose Form Properties - Data - properties Sort and Filter). -If an SQL statement is the basis for a form (see Form Properties - tab Data - Data Source), then the filter and sort functions are only available when the SQL statement refers to only one table and is not written in the native SQL mode. +You can use the Form Navigation bar to move within records as well as to insert and to delete records. If data is saved in a form, the changes are transferred to the database. The Form Navigation bar also contains sort, filter, and search functions for data records. +You can use the Navigation bar icon on the More Controls bar to add a Navigation bar to a form. +The Navigation bar is only visible for forms connected to a database. In the Design view of a form, the Navigation bar is not available. See also Table Data bar. +You can control the view of data with the sorting and filtering functions. Original tables are not changed. +The current sort order or filter is saved with the current document. If a filter is set, the Apply Filter icon on the Navigation bar is activated. Sorting and filtering features in the document can also be configured in the Form Properties dialog. (Choose Form Properties - Data - properties Sort and Filter). +If an SQL statement is the basis for a form (see Form Properties - tab Data - Data Source), then the filter and sort functions are only available when the SQL statement refers to only one table and is not written in the native SQL mode. -Absolute Record -Shows the number of the current record. Enter a number to go to the corresponding record. +Absolute Record +Shows the number of the current record. Enter a number to go to the corresponding record. -First Record +First Record - + Icon -Takes you to the first record. +Takes you to the first record.
-Previous Record +Previous Record - + Icon -Takes you to the previous record. +Takes you to the previous record.
-Next Record +Next Record - + Icon -Takes you to the next record. +Takes you to the next record.
-Last Record +Last Record - + Icon -Takes you to the last record. +Takes you to the last record.
-Save Record +Save Record - + Icon -Saves a new data entry. The change is registered in the database. +Saves a new data entry. The change is registered in the database.
-Undo: Data entry +Undo: Data entry - + Icon -Allows you to undo a data entry. +Allows you to undo a data entry.
-New Record +New Record - + Icon -Creates a new record. +Creates a new record.
-Delete Record +Delete Record - + Icon -Deletes a record. A query needs to be confirmed before deleting. +Deletes a record. A query needs to be confirmed before deleting.
-Find Record +Find Record @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ -Sort +Sort diff --git a/source/text/shared/main0214.xhp b/source/text/shared/main0214.xhp index e7b762daea..98a241e087 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/main0214.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/main0214.xhp @@ -31,17 +31,17 @@
-Query Design Bar -When creating or editing an SQL query, use the icons in the Query Design Bar to control the display of data. +Query Design Bar +When creating or editing an SQL query, use the icons in the Query Design Bar to control the display of data.
-Depending on whether you have created the query or view in the Design or SQL tab page, the following icons appear: +Depending on whether you have created the query or view in the Design or SQL tab page, the following icons appear: -Add Tables +Add Tables @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ -The following icon is on the SQL tab page: +The following icon is on the SQL tab page: diff --git a/source/text/shared/main0226.xhp b/source/text/shared/main0226.xhp index 2a185bc819..e65c8c8a67 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/main0226.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/main0226.xhp @@ -31,14 +31,14 @@
-Form Design Toolbar -The Form Design toolbar becomes visible as soon as you select a form object when working in the design mode. +Form Design Toolbar +The Form Design toolbar becomes visible as soon as you select a form object when working in the design mode.
-Add Field +Add Field @@ -55,29 +55,29 @@ -Group +Group -Ungroup +Ungroup -Enter Group +Enter Group -Exit Group +Exit Group -Display Grid +Display Grid -Snap to Grid -Specifies that you can move objects only between grid points. +Snap to Grid +Specifies that you can move objects only between grid points. -Helplines While Moving +Helplines While Moving diff --git a/source/text/shared/main0227.xhp b/source/text/shared/main0227.xhp index ddf598315a..e8abeb5404 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/main0227.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/main0227.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ curves; editing points Edit Points bar mw deleted "points;editing" -Edit Points Bar -The Edit Points Bar appears when you select a polygon object and click Edit Points. +Edit Points Bar +The Edit Points Bar appears when you select a polygon object and click Edit Points.
@@ -43,172 +43,172 @@ -The functions provided allow you to edit the points of a curve or an object converted to a curve. The following icons are available: -Edit Points -The Edit Points icon allows you to activate or deactivate the edit mode for Bézier objects. In the edit mode, individual points of the drawing object can be selected. +The functions provided allow you to edit the points of a curve or an object converted to a curve. The following icons are available: +Edit Points +The Edit Points icon allows you to activate or deactivate the edit mode for Bézier objects. In the edit mode, individual points of the drawing object can be selected. - + Icon -Edit Points +Edit Points
-Move Points -Activates a mode in which you can move points. The mouse pointer displays a small empty square when resting on a point. Drag that point to another location. The curve on both sides of the point follows the movement; the section of the curve between the next points changes shape. -Point at the curve between two points or within a closed curve and drag the mouse to shift the entire curve without distorting the form. +Move Points +Activates a mode in which you can move points. The mouse pointer displays a small empty square when resting on a point. Drag that point to another location. The curve on both sides of the point follows the movement; the section of the curve between the next points changes shape. +Point at the curve between two points or within a closed curve and drag the mouse to shift the entire curve without distorting the form. - + Icon -Move Points +Move Points
-Insert Points -Activates the insert mode. This mode allows you to insert points. You can also move points, just as in the move mode. If, however, you click at the curve between two points and move the mouse a little while holding down the mouse button you insert a new point. The point is a smooth point, and the lines to the control points are parallel and remain so when moved. -If you wish to create a corner point you must first insert either a smooth or a symmetrical point which is then converted to a corner point by using Corner Point. +Insert Points +Activates the insert mode. This mode allows you to insert points. You can also move points, just as in the move mode. If, however, you click at the curve between two points and move the mouse a little while holding down the mouse button you insert a new point. The point is a smooth point, and the lines to the control points are parallel and remain so when moved. +If you wish to create a corner point you must first insert either a smooth or a symmetrical point which is then converted to a corner point by using Corner Point. - + Icon -Insert Points +Insert Points
-Delete Points -Use the Delete Points icon to delete one or several selected points. If you wish to select several points click the appropriate points while holding down the Shift key. -First select the points to be deleted, and then click this icon, or press Del. +Delete Points +Use the Delete Points icon to delete one or several selected points. If you wish to select several points click the appropriate points while holding down the Shift key. +First select the points to be deleted, and then click this icon, or press Del. - + Icon -Delete Points +Delete Points
-Split Curve -The Split Curve icon splits a curve. Select the point or points where you want to split the curve, then click the icon. +Split Curve +The Split Curve icon splits a curve. Select the point or points where you want to split the curve, then click the icon. - + Icon -Split Curve +Split Curve
-Convert To Curve -Converts a curve into a straight line or converts a straight line into a curve. If you select a single point, the curve before the point will be converted. If two points are selected, the curve between both points will be converted. If you select more than two points, each time you click this icon, a different portion of the curve will be converted. If necessary, round points are converted into corner points and corner points are converted into round points. -If a certain section of the curve is straight, the end points of the line have a maximum of one control point each. They cannot be modified to round points unless the straight line is converted back to a curve. +Convert To Curve +Converts a curve into a straight line or converts a straight line into a curve. If you select a single point, the curve before the point will be converted. If two points are selected, the curve between both points will be converted. If you select more than two points, each time you click this icon, a different portion of the curve will be converted. If necessary, round points are converted into corner points and corner points are converted into round points. +If a certain section of the curve is straight, the end points of the line have a maximum of one control point each. They cannot be modified to round points unless the straight line is converted back to a curve. - + Icon -Convert To Curve +Convert To Curve
-Corner Point -Converts the selected point or points into corner points. Corner points have two movable control points, which are independent from each other. A curved line, therefore, does not go straight through a corner point, but forms a corner. +Corner Point +Converts the selected point or points into corner points. Corner points have two movable control points, which are independent from each other. A curved line, therefore, does not go straight through a corner point, but forms a corner. - + Icon -Corner Point +Corner Point
-Smooth Transition -Converts a corner point or symmetrical point into a smooth point. Both control points of the corner point are aligned in parallel, and can only be moved simultaneously. The control points may differentiate in length, allowing you to vary the degree of curvature. +Smooth Transition +Converts a corner point or symmetrical point into a smooth point. Both control points of the corner point are aligned in parallel, and can only be moved simultaneously. The control points may differentiate in length, allowing you to vary the degree of curvature. - + Icon -Smooth Transition +Smooth Transition
-Symmetric Transition -This icon converts a corner point or a smooth point into a symmetrical point. Both control points of the corner point are aligned in parallel and have the same length. They can only be moved simultaneously and the degree of curvature is the same in both directions. +Symmetric Transition +This icon converts a corner point or a smooth point into a symmetrical point. Both control points of the corner point are aligned in parallel and have the same length. They can only be moved simultaneously and the degree of curvature is the same in both directions. - + Icon -Symmetric Transition +Symmetric Transition
-Close Bézier -Closes a line or a curve. A line is closed by connecting the last point with the first point, indicated by an enlarged square. +Close Bézier +Closes a line or a curve. A line is closed by connecting the last point with the first point, indicated by an enlarged square. - + Icon -Close Bézier +Close Bézier
-Eliminate Points -Marks the current point or the selected points for deletion. This happens in the event that the point is located on a straight line. If you convert a curve or a polygon with the Convert to Curve icon into a straight line or you change a curve with the mouse so that a point lies on the straight line, it is removed. The angle from which the point reduction is to take place can be set by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Draw - Grid in the Options dialog boxcan be set by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Grid in the Options dialog boxis 15° by default. +Eliminate Points +Marks the current point or the selected points for deletion. This happens in the event that the point is located on a straight line. If you convert a curve or a polygon with the Convert to Curve icon into a straight line or you change a curve with the mouse so that a point lies on the straight line, it is removed. The angle from which the point reduction is to take place can be set by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Draw - Grid in the Options dialog boxcan be set by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Grid in the Options dialog boxis 15° by default. - + Icon -Eliminate Points +Eliminate Points
diff --git a/source/text/shared/main0400.xhp b/source/text/shared/main0400.xhp index 97e5e56a31..70b8d90a77 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/main0400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/main0400.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Shortcut Keys - This section contains descriptions of frequently used shortcut keys in $[officename]. + Shortcut Keys + This section contains descriptions of frequently used shortcut keys in $[officename].
diff --git a/source/text/shared/main0500.xhp b/source/text/shared/main0500.xhp index 18253e89b0..bacde3bcc9 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/main0500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/main0500.xhp @@ -30,8 +30,8 @@
- Glossaries - This section provides a general glossary of technical terms used in $[officename], along with a list of Internet terms. + Glossaries + This section provides a general glossary of technical terms used in $[officename], along with a list of Internet terms.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/main0600.xhp b/source/text/shared/main0600.xhp index 22ca74d31d..5372c17106 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/main0600.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/main0600.xhp @@ -33,15 +33,15 @@ programming;$[officename] Basic;programming -Programming $[officename] +Programming $[officename] -$[officename] can be controlled by using the $[officename] API. +$[officename] can be controlled by using the $[officename] API.
-$[officename] provides an Application Programming Interface (API) that enables you to control $[officename] components by using various programming languages. A $[officename] Software Development Kit is available for the programming interface. -For more information about $[officename] API reference, please visit http://api.libreoffice.org/removed link; see i75345 -Macros created with $[officename] Basic based on the old programming interface will no longer be supported by the current version. +$[officename] provides an Application Programming Interface (API) that enables you to control $[officename] components by using various programming languages. A $[officename] Software Development Kit is available for the programming interface. +For more information about $[officename] API reference, please visit http://api.libreoffice.org/removed link; see i75345 +Macros created with $[officename] Basic based on the old programming interface will no longer be supported by the current version.
-For more information on $[officename] Basic, select "$[officename] Basic" in the list box. +For more information on $[officename] Basic, select "$[officename] Basic" in the list box. diff --git a/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp b/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp index df04ebcedf..c50c21440f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp @@ -30,17 +30,17 @@
-Java Platform Support -$[officename] supports the Java platform for running applications and components based on the JavaBeans architecture. +Java Platform Support +$[officename] supports the Java platform for running applications and components based on the JavaBeans architecture.
-For $[officename] to support the Java platform, you must install the Java 2 Runtime Environment software. When you installed $[officename], you automatically received the option to install these files if they were not yet installed. You can also install these files now if required. -The Java platform support needs to be activated under $[officename] to run Java applications. +For $[officename] to support the Java platform, you must install the Java 2 Runtime Environment software. When you installed $[officename], you automatically received the option to install these files if they were not yet installed. You can also install these files now if required. +The Java platform support needs to be activated under $[officename] to run Java applications. -Enable Java platform support by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Advanced. +Enable Java platform support by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Advanced. -Before you can use a JDBC driver, you need to add its class path. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced, and click the Class Path button. After you add the path information, restart %PRODUCTNAME. -Your modifications at the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Advanced tab page will be used even if the Java Virtual Machine (JVM) has been started already. After any modifications to the ClassPath you must restart $[officename]. The same is true for modifications under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Proxy. Only the boxes "HTTP Proxy" and "FTP Proxy" and their ports do not require a restart—they will be evaluated when you click OK. +Before you can use a JDBC driver, you need to add its class path. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced, and click the Class Path button. After you add the path information, restart %PRODUCTNAME. +Your modifications at the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Advanced tab page will be used even if the Java Virtual Machine (JVM) has been started already. After any modifications to the ClassPath you must restart $[officename]. The same is true for modifications under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Proxy. Only the boxes "HTTP Proxy" and "FTP Proxy" and their ports do not require a restart—they will be evaluated when you click OK. diff --git a/source/text/shared/main0800.xhp b/source/text/shared/main0800.xhp index 41c0e8355a..e58c8ae06d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/main0800.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/main0800.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
-$[officename] and the Internet -This section provides information on the subject of the Internet. An Internet glossary explains the most important terms. +$[officename] and the Internet +This section provides information on the subject of the Internet. An Internet glossary explains the most important terms.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp index b6d8ef6faa..777ac0f26b 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp @@ -34,50 +34,40 @@ mw changed "settings;options" and "defaults;..." -Options - This command opens a dialog for a customized program configuration. +Options + This command opens a dialog for a customized program configuration.
- All your settings are saved automatically. To expand an entry either double click this entry or click the plus sign. To collapse the entry, click the minus sign or double click the entry. - You see only the entries that are applicable to the current document. If the current document is a text document, you see the %PRODUCTNAME Writer entry, and so on for all modules of %PRODUCTNAME. %PRODUCTNAME Impress and %PRODUCTNAME Draw are treated as the same in this dialog. The common entries are always visible. + All your settings are saved automatically. To expand an entry either double click this entry or click the plus sign. To collapse the entry, click the minus sign or double click the entry. + You see only the entries that are applicable to the current document. If the current document is a text document, you see the %PRODUCTNAME Writer entry, and so on for all modules of %PRODUCTNAME. %PRODUCTNAME Impress and %PRODUCTNAME Draw are treated as the same in this dialog. The common entries are always visible. -Select an entry to edit. +Select an entry to edit.
Note for macOS users: The Help mentions the menu path Tools - Options at numerous places. Replace this path with %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences on your macOS main menu. Both menu entries open the Options dialog box.
- %PRODUCTNAME + %PRODUCTNAME - Load/Save + Load/Save - Language Settings + Language Settings - Internet + Internet - %PRODUCTNAME Writer + %PRODUCTNAME Writer - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web + %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - %PRODUCTNAME Calc + %PRODUCTNAME Calc - %PRODUCTNAME Impress + %PRODUCTNAME Impress - %PRODUCTNAME Draw + %PRODUCTNAME Draw - %PRODUCTNAME Math + %PRODUCTNAME Math - Charts + Charts - %PRODUCTNAME Database + %PRODUCTNAME Database diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp index 9ec1d5a142..53c3cde487 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp @@ -28,8 +28,8 @@ -$[officename] - Use this dialog to create general settings for working with $[officename]. The information covers topics such as user data, saving, printing, paths to important files and directories, and color defaults. +$[officename] + Use this dialog to create general settings for working with $[officename]. The information covers topics such as user data, saving, printing, paths to important files and directories, and color defaults. These settings are saved automatically.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01010100.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01010100.xhp index 1b956dc7b7..b31ca60443 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01010100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01010100.xhp @@ -36,98 +36,98 @@ personal data input -User Data -Use this tab page to enter or edit user data. Some of the data may have already been entered by the user when installing $[officename]. +User Data +Use this tab page to enter or edit user data. Some of the data may have already been entered by the user when installing $[officename].
-User data is used by templates and Wizards in $[officename]. For example, the "First name" and "Last name" data fields are used to automatically insert your name as the author of a new document. You can see this under File - Properties. -Some of the user data is included automatically in an internal dictionary so that it is recognized by the spellchecker. If typing errors are made, the program can use this data to suggest replacements. Note that changes to data take effect only after $[officename] is restarted. -Address -Use the Address field to enter and edit your personal user data. +User data is used by templates and Wizards in $[officename]. For example, the "First name" and "Last name" data fields are used to automatically insert your name as the author of a new document. You can see this under File - Properties. +Some of the user data is included automatically in an internal dictionary so that it is recognized by the spellchecker. If typing errors are made, the program can use this data to suggest replacements. Note that changes to data take effect only after $[officename] is restarted. +Address +Use the Address field to enter and edit your personal user data.
UFI removed a double ID -Company -Type the name of your company in this field. +Company +Type the name of your company in this field.
-First name -Type your first name. +First name +Type your first name. -Last name -Type your last name. +Last name +Type your last name. -Initials -Type your initials. +Initials +Type your initials.
-Street -Type the name of your street in this field. +Street +Type the name of your street in this field. -ZIP -Type your ZIP in this field. +ZIP +Type your ZIP in this field. -City -Type the city where you live. +City +Type the city where you live. -State -Type your state. +State +Type your state.
-Title -Type your title in this field. +Title +Type your title in this field.
-Position -Type your position in the company in this field. +Position +Type your position in the company in this field.
-Tel. (Home) -Type your private telephone number in this field. +Tel. (Home) +Type your private telephone number in this field. -Tel. (Work) -Type your work number in this field. +Tel. (Work) +Type your work number in this field.
-Fax -Type your fax number in this field. +Fax +Type your fax number in this field.
-E-mail -Type your e-mail address. For example, my.name@my.provider.com +E-mail +Type your e-mail address. For example, my.name@my.provider.com
diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp index 8e30aac227..2b2509e92d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp @@ -35,134 +35,126 @@ absolute saving of URLs -General - In the General section, you can select default settings for saving documents, and can select default file formats. +General + In the General section, you can select default settings for saving documents, and can select default file formats.
- Load + Load -Load user-specific settings with the document - Loads the user-specific settings saved in a document with the document. - If Load user-specific settings with the document is not selected, the following user-specific settings still apply: +Load user-specific settings with the document + Loads the user-specific settings saved in a document with the document. + If Load user-specific settings with the document is not selected, the following user-specific settings still apply: - Settings available in File - Print - Options, + Settings available in File - Print - Options, - Name of Fax, + Name of Fax, - Spacing options for paragraphs before text tables, + Spacing options for paragraphs before text tables, - Information about automatic updating for links, field functions and charts, + Information about automatic updating for links, field functions and charts, - Information about working with Asian character formats. + Information about working with Asian character formats. - The following settings are always loaded with a document, whether or not this option is marked: + The following settings are always loaded with a document, whether or not this option is marked: - Data source linked to the document and its view. + Data source linked to the document and its view. -Load printer settings with the document - If enabled, the printer settings will be loaded with the document. This can cause a document to be printed on a distant printer, if you do not change the printer manually in the Print dialog. If disabled, your standard printer will be used to print this document. The current printer settings will be stored with the document whether or not this option is checked. - Save +Load printer settings with the document + If enabled, the printer settings will be loaded with the document. This can cause a document to be printed on a distant printer, if you do not change the printer manually in the Print dialog. If disabled, your standard printer will be used to print this document. The current printer settings will be stored with the document whether or not this option is checked. + Save -Edit document properties before saving - Specifies that the Properties dialog will appear every time you select the Save As command. +Edit document properties before saving + Specifies that the Properties dialog will appear every time you select the Save As command. -Always create backup copy - Saves the previous version of a document as a backup copy whenever you save a document. Every time %PRODUCTNAME creates a backup copy, the previous backup copy is replaced. The backup copy gets the extension .BAK. - To change the location of the backup copy, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths, and then enter a new path for the backup file. +Always create backup copy + Saves the previous version of a document as a backup copy whenever you save a document. Every time %PRODUCTNAME creates a backup copy, the previous backup copy is replaced. The backup copy gets the extension .BAK. + To change the location of the backup copy, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths, and then enter a new path for the backup file. -Save AutoRecovery information every - Specifies that %PRODUCTNAME saves the information needed to restore all open documents in case of a crash. You can specify the saving time interval. +Save AutoRecovery information every + Specifies that %PRODUCTNAME saves the information needed to restore all open documents in case of a crash. You can specify the saving time interval. -Minutes - Specifies the time interval in minutes for the automatic recovery option. +Minutes + Specifies the time interval in minutes for the automatic recovery option. Automatically save the document too Specifies that %PRODUCTNAME saves all open documents when saving auto recovery information. Uses the same time interval as AutoRecovery does. - Save URLs relative to file system - This option allows you to select the default for relative addressing of URLs in the file system and on the Internet. Relative addressing is only possible if the source document and the referenced document are both on the same drive. - A relative address always starts from the directory in which the current document is located. In contrast, absolute addressing always starts from a root directory. The following table demonstrates the difference in syntax between relative and absolute referencing: + Save URLs relative to file system + This option allows you to select the default for relative addressing of URLs in the file system and on the Internet. Relative addressing is only possible if the source document and the referenced document are both on the same drive. + A relative address always starts from the directory in which the current document is located. In contrast, absolute addressing always starts from a root directory. The following table demonstrates the difference in syntax between relative and absolute referencing: - Examples + Examples - File system + File system - Internet + Internet - relative + relative - ../images/img.jpg + ../images/img.jpg - ../images/img.jpg + ../images/img.jpg - absolute + absolute - file:///c|/work/images/img.jpg + file:///c|/work/images/img.jpg - http://myserver.com/work/images/img.jpg + http://myserver.com/work/images/img.jpg
- The Help tip always displays an absolute path. However, if a document is saved in HTML format, %PRODUCTNAME will enter a relative path if the appropriate check box is selected. + The Help tip always displays an absolute path. However, if a document is saved in HTML format, %PRODUCTNAME will enter a relative path if the appropriate check box is selected. -Select this box for relative saving of URLs in the file system. +Select this box for relative saving of URLs in the file system. -Save URLs relative to internet - Select this box for relative saving of URLs to the Internet. - Default file format and ODF settings +Save URLs relative to internet + Select this box for relative saving of URLs to the Internet. + Default file format and ODF settings -ODF format version - OpenOffice.org 3 and StarOffice 9 introduce new features which have to be saved using the OpenDocument format (ODF) version 1.2. The prior versions of OpenOffice.org 2 and StarOffice 8 support the file formats ODF 1.0/1.1. Those prior file formats cannot store all new features of the new software. - Current %PRODUCTNAME versions can open documents in ODF formats 1.0/1.1 and 1.2. - When you save a document, you can select whether to save the document in the format ODF 1.2, ODF 1.2 (Extended), or in the prior format ODF 1.0/1.1. - Currently, the ODF 1.2 (Extended) format enables files of Draw and Impress to contain comments. Those comments can be inserted by Insert - Comment in the latest software version. The comments get lost when loading files into prior software versions that were saved by the latest software version. - Some companies or organizations may require ODF documents in the ODF 1.0/1.1 format. You can select that format to save in the listbox. This older format cannot store all new features, so the new format ODF 1.2 (Extended) is recommended where possible. +ODF format version + OpenOffice.org 3 and StarOffice 9 introduce new features which have to be saved using the OpenDocument format (ODF) version 1.2. The prior versions of OpenOffice.org 2 and StarOffice 8 support the file formats ODF 1.0/1.1. Those prior file formats cannot store all new features of the new software. + Current %PRODUCTNAME versions can open documents in ODF formats 1.0/1.1 and 1.2. + When you save a document, you can select whether to save the document in the format ODF 1.2, ODF 1.2 (Extended), or in the prior format ODF 1.0/1.1. + Currently, the ODF 1.2 (Extended) format enables files of Draw and Impress to contain comments. Those comments can be inserted by Insert - Comment in the latest software version. The comments get lost when loading files into prior software versions that were saved by the latest software version. + Some companies or organizations may require ODF documents in the ODF 1.0/1.1 format. You can select that format to save in the listbox. This older format cannot store all new features, so the new format ODF 1.2 (Extended) is recommended where possible. The ODF 1.2 Extended (compat) mode is a more backward-compatible ODF 1.2 extended mode. It uses features that are deprecated in ODF1.2 and/or it is 'bug-compatible' to older OpenOffice.org versions. It may be useful, if you need to interchange ODF documents with users, who use pre-ODF1.2 or ODF1.2-only legacy applications. -Warn when not saving in ODF or default format - You can choose to get a warning message when you save a document in a format that is not OpenDocument or which you did not set as default format in Load/Save - General in the Options dialog box. - You can choose which file format will be applied as the default when saving documents of various document types. If you always exchange your documents with other persons who use Microsoft Office, for example, you may specify here that %PRODUCTNAME only uses the Microsoft Office file formats as a default. +Warn when not saving in ODF or default format + You can choose to get a warning message when you save a document in a format that is not OpenDocument or which you did not set as default format in Load/Save - General in the Options dialog box. + You can choose which file format will be applied as the default when saving documents of various document types. If you always exchange your documents with other persons who use Microsoft Office, for example, you may specify here that %PRODUCTNAME only uses the Microsoft Office file formats as a default. -Document type - Specifies the document type for which you want to define the default file format. +Document type + Specifies the document type for which you want to define the default file format. -Always save as - Specifies how documents of the type selected on the left will always be saved as this file type. You may select another file type for the current document in the Save as dialog. +Always save as + Specifies how documents of the type selected on the left will always be saved as this file type. You may select another file type for the current document in the Save as dialog. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01010300.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01010300.xhp index 9cb2bac6c2..4577374942 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01010300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01010300.xhp @@ -35,125 +35,125 @@ directories;directory structure files and folders in $[officename] -Paths -This section contains the default paths to important folders in $[officename]. These paths can be edited by the user. +Paths +This section contains the default paths to important folders in $[officename]. These paths can be edited by the user.
-Paths used by %PRODUCTNAME -To modify an entry in this list, click the entry and click Edit. You can also double click the entry. -Default -The Default button resets the predefined paths for all selected entries. -Edit -Click to display the Select Path or Edit Paths dialog. -You can change the sequence of entries by clicking the bar in the Type column. The column width can be changed by moving the separator between the columns with the mouse. -In the following list of paths, the paths for the shared folders in the directory where %PRODUCTNAME is installed, are not shown. The user data for each user is stored in the {user} directory, which is located in the user's home +Paths used by %PRODUCTNAME +To modify an entry in this list, click the entry and click Edit. You can also double click the entry. +Default +The Default button resets the predefined paths for all selected entries. +Edit +Click to display the Select Path or Edit Paths dialog. +You can change the sequence of entries by clicking the bar in the Type column. The column width can be changed by moving the separator between the columns with the mouse. +In the following list of paths, the paths for the shared folders in the directory where %PRODUCTNAME is installed, are not shown. The user data for each user is stored in the {user} directory, which is located in the user's home Documents and Settings directory. -Type +Type -Path +Path -Description +Description -My Documents +My Documents -Default document folder of your system +Default document folder of your system -You can see this folder when you first call the Open or Save dialog. +You can see this folder when you first call the Open or Save dialog. -AutoCorrect +AutoCorrect -{user}/user/autocorr +{user}/user/autocorr {user}\user\autocorr -This folder stores your own AutoCorrect texts. +This folder stores your own AutoCorrect texts. -AutoText +AutoText -{user}/user/autotext +{user}/user/autotext {user}\user\autotext -This folder stores your own AutoText texts. +This folder stores your own AutoText texts. -Gallery +Gallery -{user}/user/gallery +{user}/user/gallery {user}\user\gallery -New Gallery themes are stored in this folder. +New Gallery themes are stored in this folder. -Graphics +Graphics -{user}/user/gallery +{user}/user/gallery {user}\user\gallery -This folder is displayed when you first call the dialog for opening or saving a graphic object. +This folder is displayed when you first call the dialog for opening or saving a graphic object. -Backups +Backups -{user}/user/backup +{user}/user/backup {user}\user\backup -Automatic backup copies of documents are stored here. +Automatic backup copies of documents are stored here. -Templates +Templates -{user}/user/template +{user}/user/template {user}\user\template -In this folder you can store your own templates. +In this folder you can store your own templates. -Temporary files +Temporary files -{user}/user/temp +{user}/user/temp {user}\user\temp -This is where $[officename] puts its temporary files. +This is where $[officename] puts its temporary files. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01010301.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01010301.xhp index 185a8a39c8..f2acfb924f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01010301.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01010301.xhp @@ -27,19 +27,19 @@ -Edit Pathschanged, see OOoPaths spec doc -In the Edit Paths dialog, you can select some folders that are available in $[officename]. +Edit Pathschanged, see OOoPaths spec doc +In the Edit Paths dialog, you can select some folders that are available in $[officename].
-Paths -Contains a list of the paths that have already been added. Mark the default path for new files. +Paths +Contains a list of the paths that have already been added. Mark the default path for new files. -Add -Opens the Select Path dialog to select another folder or the Open dialog to select another file. +Add +Opens the Select Path dialog to select another folder or the Open dialog to select another file. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp index 540e932889..c246c468e5 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp @@ -40,102 +40,102 @@ hyphenation; minimal number of characters removed "german" references, i78879 -Writing Aids -Specifies the properties of the spellcheck, thesaurus and hyphenation. +Writing Aids +Specifies the properties of the spellcheck, thesaurus and hyphenation.
-Available Language Modules -Contains the installed language modules. -A language module can contain one, two or three submodules: Spellcheck, hyphenation and thesaurus. Each sub-module can be available in one or more languages. If you click in front of the name of the module, you activate all the available sub-modules simultaneously. If you remove a set mark, you deactivate all the available sub-modules simultaneously. If you wish to activate or deactivate individual sub-modules, click the Edit button to open the Edit Modules dialog. -The configuration allows for two different directories: one folder where the user has write permissions, and one without write permissions. The user can only edit and delete the user dictionaries that are located in the writable path. Other dictionaries can be read only. +Available Language Modules +Contains the installed language modules. +A language module can contain one, two or three submodules: Spellcheck, hyphenation and thesaurus. Each sub-module can be available in one or more languages. If you click in front of the name of the module, you activate all the available sub-modules simultaneously. If you remove a set mark, you deactivate all the available sub-modules simultaneously. If you wish to activate or deactivate individual sub-modules, click the Edit button to open the Edit Modules dialog. +The configuration allows for two different directories: one folder where the user has write permissions, and one without write permissions. The user can only edit and delete the user dictionaries that are located in the writable path. Other dictionaries can be read only. -Edit -To edit a language module, select it and click Edit. The Edit +Edit +To edit a language module, select it and click Edit. The Edit Modules dialog appears.
-User-defined dictionaries -Lists the available user dictionaries. Mark the user dictionaries that you want to use for spellcheck and hyphenation. +User-defined dictionaries +Lists the available user dictionaries. Mark the user dictionaries that you want to use for spellcheck and hyphenation. -New -Opens the New Dictionary dialog, in which you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language. +New +Opens the New Dictionary dialog, in which you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language. -New Dictionary -In the Dictionary section you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language. +New Dictionary +In the Dictionary section you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language. -Name -Specifies the name of the new custom dictionary. The file extension "*.DIC" is automatically appended. +Name +Specifies the name of the new custom dictionary. The file extension "*.DIC" is automatically appended. -Language -By selecting a certain language you can limit the use of the custom dictionary. By selecting All the custom dictionary is used independently of the current language. +Language +By selecting a certain language you can limit the use of the custom dictionary. By selecting All the custom dictionary is used independently of the current language. -Exceptions (-) -Specifies whether you wish to avoid certain words in your documents. In this way, you can create a custom dictionary of all the words to be avoided. If this exception dictionary is activated, during spellchecking you receive a corresponding note about any words which should be avoided. +Exceptions (-) +Specifies whether you wish to avoid certain words in your documents. In this way, you can create a custom dictionary of all the words to be avoided. If this exception dictionary is activated, during spellchecking you receive a corresponding note about any words which should be avoided. -Edit -Opens the Edit custom dictionary dialog, in which you can add to your custom dictionary or edit existing entries. +Edit +Opens the Edit custom dictionary dialog, in which you can add to your custom dictionary or edit existing entries. -In the Edit custom dictionary dialog you have the option to enter new terms or edit existing entries. If you edit an exception dictionary, the dialog has the added facility of defining an exception for a word. During the spellcheck this exception is then listed as a suggestion. -When a dictionary is edited, a check is made on the status of the file. If the file is write-protected, it cannot be changed. The buttons New and Delete are then deactivated. +In the Edit custom dictionary dialog you have the option to enter new terms or edit existing entries. If you edit an exception dictionary, the dialog has the added facility of defining an exception for a word. During the spellcheck this exception is then listed as a suggestion. +When a dictionary is edited, a check is made on the status of the file. If the file is write-protected, it cannot be changed. The buttons New and Delete are then deactivated. -Book -Specifies the book to be edited. -The IgnoreAllList (All) includes all words that have been marked with Ignore during spellcheck. This list is valid only for the current spellcheck. +Book +Specifies the book to be edited. +The IgnoreAllList (All) includes all words that have been marked with Ignore during spellcheck. This list is valid only for the current spellcheck. -The IgnoreAllList entry cannot be selected and cannot be deleted. Only the words included as content can be deleted. This happens automatically each time that $[officename] is closed. +The IgnoreAllList entry cannot be selected and cannot be deleted. Only the words included as content can be deleted. This happens automatically each time that $[officename] is closed. -Language -Assigns a new language to the current custom dictionary. +Language +Assigns a new language to the current custom dictionary. -Word -You can type a new word for inclusion in the dictionary. In the list below you will see the contents of the current custom dictionary. If you select a word from this list it is displayed in the text field. If you type a word with a trailing = character, such as "AutoComplete=", the word is never automatically hyphenated and no hyphenation is suggested. Typing "Auto=Complete" results in the word being hyphenated, or a hyphenation suggested, where you insert the = sign. +Word +You can type a new word for inclusion in the dictionary. In the list below you will see the contents of the current custom dictionary. If you select a word from this list it is displayed in the text field. If you type a word with a trailing = character, such as "AutoComplete=", the word is never automatically hyphenated and no hyphenation is suggested. Typing "Auto=Complete" results in the word being hyphenated, or a hyphenation suggested, where you insert the = sign. You can use a [] block instead of the = sign to specify character changes before the hyphenation break. Possible character changes: (1) Extra characters, for example tug[g]gumi results the correct hyphenation “tugg- gummi” of the Swedish word “tuggummi”. (2) Character removing specified by a digit, for example paral·[1]lel results correct hyphenation “paral- lel” of the Catalan word “paral·lel”, removing one character before the break point. (3) Both removed and extra characters, for example cafee[2é]tje results correct hyphenation “café- tje” of the Dutch word “cafeetje”, removing two characters before the break point, and adding an extra one. -Suggestion -This input field is only available if you are editing an exception dictionary. The field shows the alternative suggestion for the current word in the "Word" text box. +Suggestion +This input field is only available if you are editing an exception dictionary. The field shows the alternative suggestion for the current word in the "Word" text box. -New -Adds the word in the Word text field to your current custom dictionary. The word in the Suggestion field is also added when working with exception dictionaries. +New +Adds the word in the Word text field to your current custom dictionary. The word in the Suggestion field is also added when working with exception dictionaries. -Removes the marked word from the current custom dictionary. +Removes the marked word from the current custom dictionary. -Deletes the selected dictionary after a confirmation, provided it is not write-protected. +Deletes the selected dictionary after a confirmation, provided it is not write-protected.
-Options -Defines the options for the spellcheck and hyphenation. +Options +Defines the options for the spellcheck and hyphenation. -Edit -If you want to change a value, select the entry and then click Edit. You will see a dialog for entering a new value. -Check uppercase words -Specifies that capitalization is checked during spellcheck. -Check words with numbers. -Specifies that words that contain numbers as well as letters are to be checked. -Check special regions -Specifies that special regions, such as drawing text, are checked during spellcheck.UFI: doesn't work in versions up to OOo 2.4 +Edit +If you want to change a value, select the entry and then click Edit. You will see a dialog for entering a new value. +Check uppercase words +Specifies that capitalization is checked during spellcheck. +Check words with numbers. +Specifies that words that contain numbers as well as letters are to be checked. +Check special regions +Specifies that special regions, such as drawing text, are checked during spellcheck.UFI: doesn't work in versions up to OOo 2.4 -Check spelling as you type -Automatically checks spelling as you type, and underlines errors. +Check spelling as you type +Automatically checks spelling as you type, and underlines errors.
-Typing errors are highlighted in the document with a red underline. If you place the cursor over a word marked in this way, you can open the context menu to obtain a list of corrections. Select a correction to replace the word. If you make the same mistake again while editing the document, it will be marked as an error again.UFI: changed para, removed note, see i60431 -To place the word pair in the AutoCorrect replacement table, open the AutoCorrect context menu and choose AutoCorrect. Make your selection from the submenu. The word is replaced and at the same time the word pair is placed in the replacement table. +Typing errors are highlighted in the document with a red underline. If you place the cursor over a word marked in this way, you can open the context menu to obtain a list of corrections. Select a correction to replace the word. If you make the same mistake again while editing the document, it will be marked as an error again.UFI: changed para, removed note, see i60431 +To place the word pair in the AutoCorrect replacement table, open the AutoCorrect context menu and choose AutoCorrect. Make your selection from the submenu. The word is replaced and at the same time the word pair is placed in the replacement table.
-Minimal number of characters for hyphenation -Specifies the minimum number of characters required for automatic hyphenation to be applied. Type the minimum number of characters that must come before or after the hyphen. -Characters before line break -Sets the minimum number of characters of the word to be hyphenated that must remain at the end of the line. -Characters after line break -Specifies the minimum number of characters of a hyphenated word required at the next line. -Hyphenate without inquiry -Specifies that you will never be asked for a manual hyphenation. If the field is not marked, when a word is not recognized you will be presented with a dialog for entering hyphens. -Hyphenate special regions -Specifies that hyphenation will also be carried out in footnotes, headers and footers. +Minimal number of characters for hyphenation +Specifies the minimum number of characters required for automatic hyphenation to be applied. Type the minimum number of characters that must come before or after the hyphen. +Characters before line break +Sets the minimum number of characters of the word to be hyphenated that must remain at the end of the line. +Characters after line break +Specifies the minimum number of characters of a hyphenated word required at the next line. +Hyphenate without inquiry +Specifies that you will never be asked for a manual hyphenation. If the field is not marked, when a word is not recognized you will be presented with a dialog for entering hyphens. +Hyphenate special regions +Specifies that hyphenation will also be carried out in footnotes, headers and footers.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp index 8b82d6e4f9..af928497b0 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp @@ -37,44 +37,44 @@ dictionaries;creating user-defined dictionaries;creating - +
-Edit module +Edit module
-Options -Specifies the language and the available spelling, hyphenation and Thesaurus sub-modules for the selected module. You can arrange the sub-modules by priority. +Options +Specifies the language and the available spelling, hyphenation and Thesaurus sub-modules for the selected module. You can arrange the sub-modules by priority. -Select the language from the Language list. +Select the language from the Language list. -Mark all modules that are to be activated for this language under the headings Spelling, Hyphenation and Thesaurus. +Mark all modules that are to be activated for this language under the headings Spelling, Hyphenation and Thesaurus. -As long as you have more than one sub-module available for one area, the sub-modules for spelling and the Thesaurus are processed in the sequence in which they are listed. You can change the sequence using the Move Up and Move Down buttons. +As long as you have more than one sub-module available for one area, the sub-modules for spelling and the Thesaurus are processed in the sequence in which they are listed. You can change the sequence using the Move Up and Move Down buttons. -Only one sub-module can be activated under Hyphenation. +Only one sub-module can be activated under Hyphenation. -Language -Specifies the language of the module. -For all language selection fields in %PRODUCTNAME, the following applies: -A language entry has a check mark in front of it if the spellcheck is activated for this language. +Language +Specifies the language of the module. +For all language selection fields in %PRODUCTNAME, the following applies: +A language entry has a check mark in front of it if the spellcheck is activated for this language. -Move up -Increases the priority of the module selected in the list box by one level. +Move up +Increases the priority of the module selected in the list box by one level. -Move down -Decreases the priority of the module selected in the list box by one level. +Move down +Decreases the priority of the module selected in the list box by one level. -Back -Click here to undo the current changes in the list box. +Back +Click here to undo the current changes in the list box. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp index b8630287f6..107cb1a682 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp @@ -30,71 +30,71 @@ -Color +Color defining;colors colors;selection colors;adding -Allows you to define your own colors using the two-dimensional graphic and numerical gradient chart. +Allows you to define your own colors using the two-dimensional graphic and numerical gradient chart. Click OK to display the newly defined color in the preview box of the Colors register, where you can then decide if you want to add or replace the new color in the current color palette.UFI: make this a guide file plus ref link
-Color Window -In the two big color windows, you click to select a new color. You can select the color in the left or the right color window as you wish. -In the right color window, you will see the entire color spectrum from the left to the right, with the colors at the top being fully saturated and the colors at the bottom being unsaturated. -In the left color window, you will see a selection of colors, displaying a progressive spectrum, varying between the four colors in the four corners of this window. You can change the colors in the four corners as follows: +Color Window +In the two big color windows, you click to select a new color. You can select the color in the left or the right color window as you wish. +In the right color window, you will see the entire color spectrum from the left to the right, with the colors at the top being fully saturated and the colors at the bottom being unsaturated. +In the left color window, you will see a selection of colors, displaying a progressive spectrum, varying between the four colors in the four corners of this window. You can change the colors in the four corners as follows: -Click the corner of the field in which you want to change the color. +Click the corner of the field in which you want to change the color. -In the right color window, click the desired new color for the corner field or enter the values, which define the color, in the numeric input fields. +In the right color window, click the desired new color for the corner field or enter the values, which define the color, in the numeric input fields. -Apply the color selected on the right to the small field that is marked in the left color window by clicking the <-- button. +Apply the color selected on the right to the small field that is marked in the left color window by clicking the <-- button. -The gradient in the left color window is immediately adjusted with respect to hue, saturation, and brightness. -%PRODUCTNAME uses only the RGB color model for printing in color. The CMYK controls are provided only to ease the input of color values using CMYK notation. +The gradient in the left color window is immediately adjusted with respect to hue, saturation, and brightness. +%PRODUCTNAME uses only the RGB color model for printing in color. The CMYK controls are provided only to ease the input of color values using CMYK notation. -<-- -Click the <-- button to replace the selected color in the color palette with the color selected at the right. The button is enabled when you select a color in one of the four corners. +<-- +Click the <-- button to replace the selected color in the color palette with the color selected at the right. The button is enabled when you select a color in one of the four corners. ---> -Sets the small selection cursor in the right window on the color, which corresponds to the selected color in the left window and updates the respective values in the numerical fields. +--> +Sets the small selection cursor in the right window on the color, which corresponds to the selected color in the left window and updates the respective values in the numerical fields. -Cyan -Sets the Cyan color value in the CMYK color model. +Cyan +Sets the Cyan color value in the CMYK color model. -Magenta -Sets the Magenta color value in the CMYK color model. +Magenta +Sets the Magenta color value in the CMYK color model. -Yellow -Sets the Yellow color value in the CMYK color model. +Yellow +Sets the Yellow color value in the CMYK color model. -Key -Sets the Black color value or key (black) in the CMYK color model. +Key +Sets the Black color value or key (black) in the CMYK color model. -Red -Sets the Red color value in the RGB color model. +Red +Sets the Red color value in the RGB color model. -Green -Sets the Green color value in the RGB color model. +Green +Sets the Green color value in the RGB color model. -Blue -Sets the Blue color value in the RGB color model. +Blue +Sets the Blue color value in the RGB color model. -Color -Sets the Hue in the HSB color model. +Color +Sets the Hue in the HSB color model. -Saturation -Sets the Saturation in the HSB color model. +Saturation +Sets the Saturation in the HSB color model. -Luminance -Sets the Brightness in the HSB color model. +Luminance +Sets the Brightness in the HSB color model. -In the left preview field, you will see the original color from the parent tab, Colors. In the right preview field, you will always see the current result of your work in this dialog. +In the left preview field, you will see the original color from the parent tab, Colors. In the right preview field, you will always see the current result of your work in this dialog. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp index 924a5da03a..e8bfedb2c8 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp @@ -32,44 +32,38 @@ years; 2-digit options - +
- General - Specifies the general settings for $[officename]. + General + Specifies the general settings for $[officename].
- Help - Specifies the behavior of the installed help. + Help + Specifies the behavior of the installed help. -Extended tips - Displays a help text when you rest the cursor on an icon, a menu command, or a control on a dialog. - Open/Save dialogsUFI: see spec doc "Gnome file selector" +Extended tips + Displays a help text when you rest the cursor on an icon, a menu command, or a control on a dialog. + Open/Save dialogsUFI: see spec doc "Gnome file selector" -Use $[officename] dialogs - Specifies whether $[officename] dialogs are used to open and save documents. Otherwise the dialogs of the operating system are used. +Use $[officename] dialogs + Specifies whether $[officename] dialogs are used to open and save documents. Otherwise the dialogs of the operating system are used. -When you open a file by an URL from the Windows file dialog, Windows will open a local copy of the file, located in the Internet Explorer cache. The %PRODUCTNAME file dialog opens the remote file. +When you open a file by an URL from the Windows file dialog, Windows will open a local copy of the file, located in the Internet Explorer cache. The %PRODUCTNAME file dialog opens the remote file. -The $[officename] dialogs for opening and saving documents are described in $[officename] Help. - Document status +The $[officename] dialogs for opening and saving documents are described in $[officename] Help. + Document status -Printing sets "document modified" status - Specifies whether the printing of the document counts as a modification. When this option is marked, the very next time the document is closed you are asked if the changes should be saved. The print date is then entered in the document properties as a change. +Printing sets "document modified" status + Specifies whether the printing of the document counts as a modification. When this option is marked, the very next time the document is closed you are asked if the changes should be saved. The print date is then entered in the document properties as a change. -Year (two digits) - Defines a date range, within which the system recognizes a two-digit year. +Year (two digits) + Defines a date range, within which the system recognizes a two-digit year.
- In $[officename], years are indicated by four digits, so that the difference between 1/1/99 and 1/1/01 is two years. This Year (two digits) setting allows the user to define the years in which two-digit dates are added to 2000. To illustrate, if you specify a date of 1/1/30 or later, the entry "1/1/20" is recognized as 1/1/2020 instead of 1/1/1920. + In $[officename], years are indicated by four digits, so that the difference between 1/1/99 and 1/1/01 is two years. This Year (two digits) setting allows the user to define the years in which two-digit dates are added to 2000. To illustrate, if you specify a date of 1/1/30 or later, the entry "1/1/20" is recognized as 1/1/2020 instead of 1/1/1920.
Help Improve LibreOffice Collect usage data and send it to The Document Foundation diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp index 2e0265c217..6ebfe438e0 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp @@ -34,126 +34,126 @@ fonts;for HTML and Basic -Fonts -Substitutes a font with a font of your choice. The substitution replaces a font only when it is displayed on screen, or on screen and when printing. The replacement does not change the font settings that are saved in the document. +Fonts +Substitutes a font with a font of your choice. The substitution replaces a font only when it is displayed on screen, or on screen and when printing. The replacement does not change the font settings that are saved in the document. -If you want, you can override the default substitution font that your operating system uses when it encounters an unavailable font in a document. +If you want, you can override the default substitution font that your operating system uses when it encounters an unavailable font in a document.
-Font replacement also affects the display of fonts on the $[officename] user interface. +Font replacement also affects the display of fonts on the $[officename] user interface. -Apply replacement table -Enables the font replacement settings that you define. +Apply replacement table +Enables the font replacement settings that you define. -Replacement table -Lists the original font and the font that will replace it. Select Always to replace the font, even if the original font is installed on your system. Select Screen only to replace the screen font only and never replace the font for printing. +Replacement table +Lists the original font and the font that will replace it. Select Always to replace the font, even if the original font is installed on your system. Select Screen only to replace the screen font only and never replace the font for printing.
-Always checkbox +Always checkbox -Screen only checkbox +Screen only checkbox -Replacement action +Replacement action -checked +checked -blank +blank -Font replacement on screen and when printing, whether the font is installed or not. +Font replacement on screen and when printing, whether the font is installed or not. -checked +checked -checked +checked -Font replacement only on screen, whether the font is installed or not. +Font replacement only on screen, whether the font is installed or not. -blank +blank -checked +checked -Font replacement only on screen, but only if font is not available. +Font replacement only on screen, but only if font is not available. -blank +blank -blank +blank -Font replacement on screen and when printing, but only if font is not available. +Font replacement on screen and when printing, but only if font is not available.
-Font -Enter or select the name of the font that you want to replace. +Font +Enter or select the name of the font that you want to replace. -Replace with -Enter or select the name of the replacement font. +Replace with +Enter or select the name of the replacement font. -Apply -Applies the selected font replacement. +Apply +Applies the selected font replacement. - + Icon -Apply +Apply
-Delete -Deletes the selected font replacement. +Delete +Deletes the selected font replacement. - + Icon -Delete +Delete
-Font settings for HTML and Basic sources -Select the font and font size for the display of HTML and Basic source code. +Font settings for HTML and Basic sources +Select the font and font size for the display of HTML and Basic source code. -Fonts -Select the font for the display of HTML and Basic source code. Select Automatic to detect a suitable font automatically. +Fonts +Select the font for the display of HTML and Basic source code. Select Automatic to detect a suitable font automatically. -Non-proportional fonts only -Check to display only non-proportional fonts in the Fonts list box. +Non-proportional fonts only +Check to display only non-proportional fonts in the Fonts list box. -Size -Select a font size for the display of HTML and Basic source code. +Size +Select a font size for the display of HTML and Basic source code. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01010900.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01010900.xhp index 475889d385..dc9da4660b 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01010900.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01010900.xhp @@ -37,53 +37,53 @@ paper size warning -Print Options -Specifies the print setting options. +Print Options +Specifies the print setting options.
-Reduce print data -You can reduce the amount of data to be sent to the printer. Reducing the print data increases the print speed because the print files are smaller. This makes it easier for printers with a smaller memory to print. Reducing print data can result in slightly lower print quality. +Reduce print data +You can reduce the amount of data to be sent to the printer. Reducing the print data increases the print speed because the print files are smaller. This makes it easier for printers with a smaller memory to print. Reducing print data can result in slightly lower print quality. -Settings for -Specifies whether the print settings apply to direct printing or to printing to a file. -Reduce transparency -If you mark this field the transparent objects will be printed like normal, non-transparent objects, depending on your selection in the following two option buttons. +Settings for +Specifies whether the print settings apply to direct printing or to printing to a file. +Reduce transparency +If you mark this field the transparent objects will be printed like normal, non-transparent objects, depending on your selection in the following two option buttons.
-Transparency cannot be output directly to a printer. The areas of the document in which transparency is to be visible must therefore always be calculated as bitmaps and sent to the printer. Depending on the size of the bitmaps and the print resolution a large amount of data may result. +Transparency cannot be output directly to a printer. The areas of the document in which transparency is to be visible must therefore always be calculated as bitmaps and sent to the printer. Depending on the size of the bitmaps and the print resolution a large amount of data may result.
-Automatically -Specifies that the transparency is only printed if the transparent area covers less than a quarter of the entire page. -No transparency -With this option transparency is never printed. -Reduce bitmaps -Specifies that bitmaps are printed with reduced quality. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased. +Automatically +Specifies that the transparency is only printed if the transparent area covers less than a quarter of the entire page. +No transparency +With this option transparency is never printed. +Reduce bitmaps +Specifies that bitmaps are printed with reduced quality. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased. -High/normal print quality -High print quality corresponds to a resolution of 300dpi. Normal print quality corresponds to a resolution of 200dpi. +High/normal print quality +High print quality corresponds to a resolution of 300dpi. Normal print quality corresponds to a resolution of 200dpi. -Resolution -Specifies the maximum print quality in dpi. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased. -Include transparent objects -If this field is marked, the reduction in print quality for bitmaps also applies to the transparent areas of objects. -Reduce gradient -If this field is marked, gradients are printed with reduced quality. +Resolution +Specifies the maximum print quality in dpi. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased. +Include transparent objects +If this field is marked, the reduction in print quality for bitmaps also applies to the transparent areas of objects. +Reduce gradient +If this field is marked, gradients are printed with reduced quality. -Gradient stripes -Specifies the maximum number of gradient stripes for printing. -Intermediate color -Specifies that gradients are only printed in a single intermediate color. -Convert colors to grayscale -Specifies that all colors are printed only as grayscale. -Printer warnings -Defines which warnings appear before printing begins. -Paper size -Mark this check box if a certain paper size is needed for printing the current document. If the paper size used in the document is not provided by the current printer, you will receive an error message. -Paper orientation -Mark this check box if you need a certain paper orientation for printing the current document. If the format used by the current document is not available from the printer, an error message will appear. -Transparency -Mark this check box if you always want to be warned if transparent objects are contained in the document. If you print such a document, a dialog appears in which you can select if the transparency is to be printed in this print instruction. +Gradient stripes +Specifies the maximum number of gradient stripes for printing. +Intermediate color +Specifies that gradients are only printed in a single intermediate color. +Convert colors to grayscale +Specifies that all colors are printed only as grayscale. +Printer warnings +Defines which warnings appear before printing begins. +Paper size +Mark this check box if a certain paper size is needed for printing the current document. If the paper size used in the document is not provided by the current printer, you will receive an error message. +Paper orientation +Mark this check box if you need a certain paper orientation for printing the current document. If the format used by the current document is not available from the printer, an error message will appear. +Transparency +Mark this check box if you always want to be warned if transparent objects are contained in the document. If you print such a document, a dialog appears in which you can select if the transparency is to be printed in this print instruction. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01011000.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01011000.xhp index 21fafa9c23..95436fa814 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01011000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01011000.xhp @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ undoing; number of steps -Memory +Memory This tab page lets you define various settings for the image cache.
@@ -46,19 +46,19 @@
Image cache The image cache saves the images contained in a document in your computer's main memory. This means that the attributes of an image stored in the cache do not have to be re-calculated if you return to the page containing the image after scrolling through a document. -Use for $[officename] (MB) +Use for $[officename] (MB) Specifies the total cache size for all images. -Memory per object (MB) -Specifies that objects which are larger than the selected megabytes will not be placed in the cache. -Remove from memory after (hh:mm) +Memory per object (MB) +Specifies that objects which are larger than the selected megabytes will not be placed in the cache. +Remove from memory after (hh:mm) Specifies the time that each image remains in the cache in hours and minutes. -Cache for inserted objects -Number of objects -Choose the maximum number of OLE objects that are pooled in the cache. -$[officename] Quickstarter -Load $[officename] during system start-up +Cache for inserted objects +Number of objects +Choose the maximum number of OLE objects that are pooled in the cache. +$[officename] Quickstarter +Load $[officename] during system start-up Enable systray Quickstarter -Mark this check box if you want $[officename] to enable quickstart. This option is available if the Quickstart module has been installed.UFI: had to remove explanation because on Windows it is at start-up, while on Unix it is a user-systray feature only. Cannot have switches inside AHID text. +Mark this check box if you want $[officename] to enable quickstart. This option is available if the Quickstart module has been installed.UFI: had to remove explanation because on Windows it is at start-up, while on Unix it is a user-systray feature only. Cannot have switches inside AHID text. Number of undo steps The number of steps which can be undone can be changed in the Expert configuration by setting the property /org.openoffice.Office.Common/Undo Steps. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01012000.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01012000.xhp index 7a3437f193..ee63dd97f9 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01012000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01012000.xhp @@ -38,33 +38,33 @@ Application Colors -Sets the colors for the $[officename] user interface. You can save the current settings as color scheme and load them later. +Sets the colors for the $[officename] user interface. You can save the current settings as color scheme and load them later.
-Color scheme -Save and delete color schemes. +Color scheme +Save and delete color schemes. -Scheme -Selects the color scheme you want to use. +Scheme +Selects the color scheme you want to use. -Save -Saves the current settings as a color scheme that you can reload later. The name is added to the Scheme box. +Save +Saves the current settings as a color scheme that you can reload later. The name is added to the Scheme box. -Name of color scheme -Enter a name for the color scheme. +Name of color scheme +Enter a name for the color scheme. -Delete -Deletes the color scheme shown in the Scheme box. You cannot delete the Default scheme. +Delete +Deletes the color scheme shown in the Scheme box. You cannot delete the Default scheme. -Scheme -Select the colors for the user interface elements. -To apply a color to a user interface element, ensure that the checkbox in front of the name is marked. To hide a user interface element, clear the check box. -Some user interface elements cannot be hidden. -In order to enhance cursor visibility, if the user sets the application background color between 40% and 60% gray, it is automatically changed to 40% gray. -The Automatic color setting changes the user interface element to the preset color from the color scheme. -The color settings for "Visited links" and "Unvisited links" only apply to documents created after the settings are applied. +Scheme +Select the colors for the user interface elements. +To apply a color to a user interface element, ensure that the checkbox in front of the name is marked. To hide a user interface element, clear the check box. +Some user interface elements cannot be hidden. +In order to enhance cursor visibility, if the user sets the application background color between 40% and 60% gray, it is automatically changed to 40% gray. +The Automatic color setting changes the user interface element to the preset color from the color scheme. +The color settings for "Visited links" and "Unvisited links" only apply to documents created after the settings are applied. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01013000.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01013000.xhp index 8113ec2666..1b2630fd10 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01013000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01013000.xhp @@ -39,33 +39,33 @@ options; accessibility -Accessibility -Sets options that make %PRODUCTNAME programs more accessible for users with reduced sight, limited dexterity or other disabilities. +Accessibility +Sets options that make %PRODUCTNAME programs more accessible for users with reduced sight, limited dexterity or other disabilities.
-Miscellaneous options -Sets accessibility options. - +Miscellaneous options +Sets accessibility options. + Support assistive technology tools (program restart required) - + Allows you to use assistive tools, such as external screen readers, Braille devices or speech recognition input devices. The Java Runtime Environment must be installed on your computer before you can enable assistive support. -Use text selection cursor in read-only text document -Displays cursor in read-only documents. +Use text selection cursor in read-only text document +Displays cursor in read-only documents. Allow animated images -Previews animated graphics, such as GIF images, in %PRODUCTNAME. -Allow animated text -Previews animated text, such as blinking and scrolling, in %PRODUCTNAME. -Options for high contrast appearance -High contrast is an operating system setting that changes the system color scheme to improve readability. You can decide how %PRODUCTNAME uses the high contrast settings of the operating system. -Cell borders and shadows are always shown in text color when high contrast mode is active. The cell background color is ignored then. -Automatically detect high contrast mode of operating system -Switches %PRODUCTNAME into high contrast mode when the system background color is very dark. -Use automatic font color for screen display -Displays fonts in %PRODUCTNAME using the system color settings. This option only affects the screen display. -Use system colors for page previews -Applies the high contrast settings of the operating system to page previews. +Previews animated graphics, such as GIF images, in %PRODUCTNAME. +Allow animated text +Previews animated text, such as blinking and scrolling, in %PRODUCTNAME. +Options for high contrast appearance +High contrast is an operating system setting that changes the system color scheme to improve readability. You can decide how %PRODUCTNAME uses the high contrast settings of the operating system. +Cell borders and shadows are always shown in text color when high contrast mode is active. The cell background color is ignored then. +Automatically detect high contrast mode of operating system +Switches %PRODUCTNAME into high contrast mode when the system background color is very dark. +Use automatic font color for screen display +Displays fonts in %PRODUCTNAME using the system color settings. This option only affects the screen display. +Use system colors for page previews +Applies the high contrast settings of the operating system to page previews. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01020000.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01020000.xhp index a80d96893a..706c3a600c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01020000.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ - Load/Save options - Specifies general Load/Save settings. + Load/Save options + Specifies general Load/Save settings.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp index 0d2a016c9d..5f92db51be 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp @@ -33,35 +33,35 @@ settings; proxies proxy settings -Proxy +Proxy
-Proxy servers for accessing the Internet can be set up manually as needed. +Proxy servers for accessing the Internet can be set up manually as needed.
-Settings -Defines the settings for the proxy server. -Proxy server -Specifies the type of proxy definition. -None -Accesses the Internet without a proxy server. Allows you to set up a connection directly on your computer to an Internet provider that does not use a proxy. -Manual -Lets you enter the proxy server manually. Specify the proxy servers in accordance with your Internet service. Ask your system administrator for the proxies and ports to enter. -Type server names without the protocol prefix. For example, type www.example.com, not http://www.example.com. -System -On Windows or UNIX systems using GNOME or KDE, this option tells %PRODUCTNAME to use the system settings. You must restart %PRODUCTNAME to initiate this setting.UFI: see spec "System-Settings" -HTTP proxy -Type the name of the proxy server for HTTP. Type the port in the right-hand field. -HTTPS proxy -Type the name of the proxy server for HTTPS. Type the port in the right-hand field. -FTP proxy -Type the name of the proxy server for FTP. Type the port in the right-hand field. -No proxy for -Specifies the names of the servers that do not require any proxy servers, separated by semicolons. These are servers addressed in your local network, and servers used for video and audio streaming, for example. -You can also use placeholders for the names of hosts and domains. For example, type *.sun.com to address all the hosts in the sun.com domain without proxy. +Settings +Defines the settings for the proxy server. +Proxy server +Specifies the type of proxy definition. +None +Accesses the Internet without a proxy server. Allows you to set up a connection directly on your computer to an Internet provider that does not use a proxy. +Manual +Lets you enter the proxy server manually. Specify the proxy servers in accordance with your Internet service. Ask your system administrator for the proxies and ports to enter. +Type server names without the protocol prefix. For example, type www.example.com, not http://www.example.com. +System +On Windows or UNIX systems using GNOME or KDE, this option tells %PRODUCTNAME to use the system settings. You must restart %PRODUCTNAME to initiate this setting.UFI: see spec "System-Settings" +HTTP proxy +Type the name of the proxy server for HTTP. Type the port in the right-hand field. +HTTPS proxy +Type the name of the proxy server for HTTPS. Type the port in the right-hand field. +FTP proxy +Type the name of the proxy server for FTP. Type the port in the right-hand field. +No proxy for +Specifies the names of the servers that do not require any proxy servers, separated by semicolons. These are servers addressed in your local network, and servers used for video and audio streaming, for example. +You can also use placeholders for the names of hosts and domains. For example, type *.sun.com to address all the hosts in the sun.com domain without proxy. -Type the port for the corresponding proxy server. The maximum value of a port number is fixed at 65535. +Type the port for the corresponding proxy server. The maximum value of a port number is fixed at 65535. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01020300.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01020300.xhp index b7b00a45bf..0904c379bb 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01020300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01020300.xhp @@ -30,16 +30,16 @@
-E-mail +E-mail
-On UNIX systems, specifies the e-mail program to use when you send the current document as e-mail. +On UNIX systems, specifies the e-mail program to use when you send the current document as e-mail. -E-mail program -Enter the e-mail program path and name. +E-mail program +Enter the e-mail program path and name. Browse -Opens a file dialog to select the e-mail program. +Opens a file dialog to select the e-mail program. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01030000.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01030000.xhp index 0f051c51fe..77af6c4341 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01030000.xhp @@ -27,8 +27,8 @@ - Internet options - Specifies Internet settings. + Internet options + Specifies Internet settings.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp index 0a289e50d7..941100ec17 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp @@ -35,35 +35,35 @@ macros;security -Security -Defines the security options for saving documents, for web connections, and for opening documents that contain macros. +Security +Defines the security options for saving documents, for web connections, and for opening documents that contain macros.
-Options -Opens the "Security Options and Warnings" dialog. +Options +Opens the "Security Options and Warnings" dialog. -Passwords for web connections -You can enter a master password to enable easy access to sites that require a user name and password. -Persistently save passwords protected by a master password -If enabled, %PRODUCTNAME will securely store all passwords that you use to access files from web servers. You can retrieve the passwords from the list after you enter the master password. -Master Password -Opens the Enter Master Password dialog. -Enter the master password. -Enter the master password again. -Enter the master password to continue. -Connections -Asks for the master password. If master password is correct, shows the Stored Web Connection Information dialog. -The Stored Web Connection Information dialog shows a list of web sites and user names that you entered previously. You can select any entry and remove it from the list. You can view the password for the selected entry.Remove -Removes the selected entry from the list.Remove All -Removes all entries from the list.Change Password -Opens a dialog where you can view and change the password for the selected entry. -Macro security -Adjust the security level for executing macros and specify trusted macro authors. +Passwords for web connections +You can enter a master password to enable easy access to sites that require a user name and password. +Persistently save passwords protected by a master password +If enabled, %PRODUCTNAME will securely store all passwords that you use to access files from web servers. You can retrieve the passwords from the list after you enter the master password. +Master Password +Opens the Enter Master Password dialog. +Enter the master password. +Enter the master password again. +Enter the master password to continue. +Connections +Asks for the master password. If master password is correct, shows the Stored Web Connection Information dialog. +The Stored Web Connection Information dialog shows a list of web sites and user names that you entered previously. You can select any entry and remove it from the list. You can view the password for the selected entry.Remove +Removes the selected entry from the list.Remove All +Removes all entries from the list.Change Password +Opens a dialog where you can view and change the password for the selected entry. +Macro security +Adjust the security level for executing macros and specify trusted macro authors. -Macro Security -Opens the Macro Security dialog. +Macro Security +Opens the Macro Security dialog. Certificate Path Allows you to choose between different installed key store locations to use when signing ODF documents or exporting signed PDF. (Only on systems that use the Network Security Services NSS.) diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp index 2d15d6f3a9..d40c203a25 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@ HTML;compatibility settings -HTML compatibility -Defines settings for HTML pages. +HTML compatibility +Defines settings for HTML pages.
@@ -45,36 +45,36 @@ -Font sizes -Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags. -Import -Defines the settings for importing HTML documents. +Font sizes +Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags. +Import +Defines the settings for importing HTML documents. -Use 'English (USA)' locale for numbers -When importing numbers from an HTML page, the decimal separator and the thousands separator characters differ according to the locale of the HTML page. The clipboard however contains no information about the locale. For example, the characters "1.000" copied from a German Web page most possibly mean "one thousand" because the period is the thousands separator in a German locale. If copied from an English Web page, the same characters stand for the number 1 as in "one dot zero zero zero". -If not checked, numbers will be interpreted according to the setting in Language Settings - Language of - Locale setting in the Options dialog box. If checked, numbers will be interpreted as 'English (USA)' locale. +Use 'English (USA)' locale for numbers +When importing numbers from an HTML page, the decimal separator and the thousands separator characters differ according to the locale of the HTML page. The clipboard however contains no information about the locale. For example, the characters "1.000" copied from a German Web page most possibly mean "one thousand" because the period is the thousands separator in a German locale. If copied from an English Web page, the same characters stand for the number 1 as in "one dot zero zero zero". +If not checked, numbers will be interpreted according to the setting in Language Settings - Language of - Locale setting in the Options dialog box. If checked, numbers will be interpreted as 'English (USA)' locale. -Import unknown HTML tags as fields -Mark this check box if you want tags that are not recognized by $[officename] to be imported as fields. For an opening tag, an HTML_ON field will be created with the value of the tag name. For a closing tag, an HTML_OFF will be created. These fields will be converted to tags in the HTML export. +Import unknown HTML tags as fields +Mark this check box if you want tags that are not recognized by $[officename] to be imported as fields. For an opening tag, an HTML_ON field will be created with the value of the tag name. For a closing tag, an HTML_OFF will be created. These fields will be converted to tags in the HTML export. -Ignore font settings -Mark this check box to ignore all font settings when importing. The fonts that were defined in the HTML Page Style will be the fonts that will be used. +Ignore font settings +Mark this check box to ignore all font settings when importing. The fonts that were defined in the HTML Page Style will be the fonts that will be used. -$[officename] Basic -Mark this check box to include the $[officename] Basic instructions when exporting to HTML format. -You must activate this option before you create the $[officename] Basic Script, since otherwise it will not be inserted. $[officename] Basic Scripts must be located in the header of the HTML document. Once you have created the macro in the $[officename] Basic IDE, it appears in the source text of the HTML document in the header. +$[officename] Basic +Mark this check box to include the $[officename] Basic instructions when exporting to HTML format. +You must activate this option before you create the $[officename] Basic Script, since otherwise it will not be inserted. $[officename] Basic Scripts must be located in the header of the HTML document. Once you have created the macro in the $[officename] Basic IDE, it appears in the source text of the HTML document in the header. -Display warning -If this field is marked, when exporting to HTML a warning is shown that %PRODUCTNAME Basic macros will be lost. +Display warning +If this field is marked, when exporting to HTML a warning is shown that %PRODUCTNAME Basic macros will be lost. -Print layout -If you mark this field, the print layout of the current document (for example, table of contents with justified page numbers and dot leaders) is exported as well. It can be read by $[officename], Mozilla Firefox, and MS Internet Explorer. -The HTML filter supports CSS2 (Cascading Style Sheets Level 2) for printing documents. These capabilities are only effective if print layout export is activated. +Print layout +If you mark this field, the print layout of the current document (for example, table of contents with justified page numbers and dot leaders) is exported as well. It can be read by $[officename], Mozilla Firefox, and MS Internet Explorer. +The HTML filter supports CSS2 (Cascading Style Sheets Level 2) for printing documents. These capabilities are only effective if print layout export is activated. Copy local images to Internet -Mark this check box to automatically upload the embedded pictures to the Internet server when uploading using FTP. Use the Save As dialog to save the document and enter a complete FTP URL as the file name in the Internet. +Mark this check box to automatically upload the embedded pictures to the Internet server when uploading using FTP. Use the Save As dialog to save the document and enter a complete FTP URL as the file name in the Internet. -Character set -Select the appropriate character set for the export. +Character set +Select the appropriate character set for the export. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01040000.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01040000.xhp index 74455e7aba..c112cf8c82 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01040000.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@ -%PRODUCTNAME Writer Options -These settings determine the way text documents that are created in $[officename] are handled. It is also possible to define settings for the current text document. +%PRODUCTNAME Writer Options +These settings determine the way text documents that are created in $[officename] are handled. It is also possible to define settings for the current text document. The global settings are automatically saved.
@@ -42,13 +42,13 @@ -Basic Fonts (Western) -Specifies the settings for the basic fonts. -Basic Fonts (Asian) -Specifies the settings for the basic Asian fonts if Asian language support has been activated under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +Basic Fonts (Western) +Specifies the settings for the basic fonts. +Basic Fonts (Asian) +Specifies the settings for the basic Asian fonts if Asian language support has been activated under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. -Basic Fonts (CTL) -Specifies the settings for basic fonts for complex text layout languages if their support has been activated under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +Basic Fonts (CTL) +Specifies the settings for basic fonts for complex text layout languages if their support has been activated under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp index 2122b70fea..74bd8141bb 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp @@ -50,47 +50,47 @@ displaying; comments in text documents -View -Defines the default settings for displaying objects in your text documents and also the default settings for the window elements. +View +Defines the default settings for displaying objects in your text documents and also the default settings for the window elements.
-Snap Lines -Specifies settings that refer to the representation of boundaries. -Helplines While Moving -Displays snap lines around the frames when frames are moved. You can select the Helplines While Moving option to show the exact position of the object using lineal values. -View -Specifies whether scrollbars and rulers are displayed. +Snap Lines +Specifies settings that refer to the representation of boundaries. +Helplines While Moving +Displays snap lines around the frames when frames are moved. You can select the Helplines While Moving option to show the exact position of the object using lineal values. +View +Specifies whether scrollbars and rulers are displayed. -Horizontal ruler -Displays the horizontal ruler. Select the desired measurement unit from the corresponding list. +Horizontal ruler +Displays the horizontal ruler. Select the desired measurement unit from the corresponding list. -Vertical ruler -Displays the vertical ruler. Select the desired measurement unit from the corresponding list. -Right-aligned +Vertical ruler +Displays the vertical ruler. Select the desired measurement unit from the corresponding list. +Right-aligned -Aligns the vertical ruler with the right border. -Smooth scroll -Activates the smooth page scrolling function. The scrolling speed depends of the area and of the color depth display. -Display -Defines which document elements are displayed. +Aligns the vertical ruler with the right border. +Smooth scroll +Activates the smooth page scrolling function. The scrolling speed depends of the area and of the color depth display. +Display +Defines which document elements are displayed. Images and objects Specifies whether to display images and objects on the screen. If these elements are hidden, you will see empty frames as placeholders. -You can also control the display of graphics through the Images and Charts icon. If a text document is open, this icon is displayed on the Tools bar. +You can also control the display of graphics through the Images and Charts icon. If a text document is open, this icon is displayed on the Tools bar. If the Images and objects option is not selected, no graphics will be loaded from the Internet. Graphics within a table and without an indication of their size can cause display problems when using an older HTML standard on the browsed page. -Tables -Displays the tables contained in your document. -To display the table boundaries, right-click any table and choose Table Boundaries, or choose Table - Table Boundaries in a Writer document. -Drawings and controls -Displays the drawings and controls contained in your document. -Field codes -Displays the field names in the document instead of the contents of the fields. You can also choose View - Field Names in a text document. -Comments -Displays comments. Click a comment to edit the text. Use the context menu in Navigator to locate or delete a comment. Use the comments's context menu to delete this comment or all comments or all comments of this author. -Settings (for HTML document only) -Measurement unit (for HTML document only) -Specifies the Unit for HTML documents. +Tables +Displays the tables contained in your document. +To display the table boundaries, right-click any table and choose Table Boundaries, or choose Table - Table Boundaries in a Writer document. +Drawings and controls +Displays the drawings and controls contained in your document. +Field codes +Displays the field names in the document instead of the contents of the fields. You can also choose View - Field Names in a text document. +Comments +Displays comments. Click a comment to edit the text. Use the context menu in Navigator to locate or delete a comment. Use the comments's context menu to delete this comment or all comments or all comments of this author. +Settings (for HTML document only) +Measurement unit (for HTML document only) +Specifies the Unit for HTML documents. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp index 354c4860a3..99034ab5cc 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp @@ -40,40 +40,40 @@ paragraph styles;modifying basic fonts -Basic Fonts -Specifies the settings for the basic fonts in your documents. +Basic Fonts +Specifies the settings for the basic fonts in your documents.
-You can also change the basic fonts for Asian and complex text layout languages if their support is enabled in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. -These settings define the basic fonts for the predefined templates. You can also modify or customize the default text templates. +You can also change the basic fonts for Asian and complex text layout languages if their support is enabled in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +These settings define the basic fonts for the predefined templates. You can also modify or customize the default text templates.
-Basic fonts +Basic fonts -Default -Specifies the font to be used for the Default Paragraph Style. The Default Paragraph Style font is used for nearly all Paragraph Styles, unless the Paragraph Style explicitly defines another font. +Default +Specifies the font to be used for the Default Paragraph Style. The Default Paragraph Style font is used for nearly all Paragraph Styles, unless the Paragraph Style explicitly defines another font. -Size -Specifies the size of the font. +Size +Specifies the size of the font. -Heading -Specifies the font to be used for headings. +Heading +Specifies the font to be used for headings. -List -Specifies the fonts for lists and numbering and all derived styles. -When you choose Format - Numbering/Bullets +List +Specifies the fonts for lists and numbering and all derived styles. +When you choose Format - Numbering/Bullets Format - Numbering/Bullets to format a paragraph with numbers or bullets in a text document, the program assigns these Paragraph Styles automatically. -Caption -Specifies the font used for the captions of images and tables. +Caption +Specifies the font used for the captions of images and tables. -Index -Specifies the font used for indexes, alphabetical indexes, and tables of contents. +Index +Specifies the font used for indexes, alphabetical indexes, and tables of contents. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01040301.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01040301.xhp index 92ca8b771c..c2b59580de 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01040301.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01040301.xhp @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ - Change default template + Change default template diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01040400.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01040400.xhp index f6147a2bf4..173a3d81b8 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01040400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01040400.xhp @@ -48,74 +48,74 @@ faxes;selecting a fax machine mw made "fax machine selection" a two level entry -Print -Specifies print settings within a text or HTML document. +Print +Specifies print settings within a text or HTML document.
-The print settings defined on this tab page apply to all subsequent print jobs, until you change the settings again. If you want to change the settings for the current print job only, use the File - Print dialog. -Contents -Specifies which document contents are to be printed. +The print settings defined on this tab page apply to all subsequent print jobs, until you change the settings again. If you want to change the settings for the current print job only, use the File - Print dialog. +Contents +Specifies which document contents are to be printed. -Pictures and objects -Specifies whether the graphics of your text document are printed. +Pictures and objects +Specifies whether the graphics of your text document are printed. -Form controls - Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed. +Form controls + Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed. -Page background - Specifies whether to include colors and objects that are inserted to the background of the page (Format - Page - Background) in the printed document.UFI: fixes #i21977# +Page background + Specifies whether to include colors and objects that are inserted to the background of the page (Format - Page - Background) in the printed document.UFI: fixes #i21977# -Print black - Specifies whether to always print text in black. +Print black + Specifies whether to always print text in black. -Hidden text - Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden. The following hidden text is printed: text that is formatted as hidden by Format - Character - Font Effects - Hidden, and the text fields Hidden text and Hidden paragraphs.UFI: sorry, due to a bug no links allowed in extended help text +Hidden text + Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden. The following hidden text is printed: text that is formatted as hidden by Format - Character - Font Effects - Hidden, and the text fields Hidden text and Hidden paragraphs.UFI: sorry, due to a bug no links allowed in extended help text -Text placeholder - Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.Text placeholders are fields. - Pages - Defines the print order for $[officename] Writer documents with multiple pages. +Text placeholder + Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.Text placeholders are fields. + Pages + Defines the print order for $[officename] Writer documents with multiple pages. -Left pages (not for HTML documents) - Specifies whether to print all left (even numbered) pages of the document. +Left pages (not for HTML documents) + Specifies whether to print all left (even numbered) pages of the document. -Right pages (not for HTML documents) - Specifies whether to print all right (odd numbered) pages of the document. +Right pages (not for HTML documents) + Specifies whether to print all right (odd numbered) pages of the document. -Brochure - Select the Brochure option to print your document in brochure format. The brochure format is as follows in $[officename] Writer: +Brochure + Select the Brochure option to print your document in brochure format. The brochure format is as follows in $[officename] Writer:
- If you print a document in portrait on a landscape page, two opposing sides in a brochure will be printed next to each other. If you have a printer with double-sided printing capability, you can create an entire brochure from your document without having to collate the pages later. If you have a printer that only has single-sided printing capability, you can achieve this effect by first printing the front pages with the "Front sides / right pages /odd pages" option marked, then re-inserting the entire paper stack in your printer and printing all the back pages with the "Back pages / left pages / even pages" option marked. + If you print a document in portrait on a landscape page, two opposing sides in a brochure will be printed next to each other. If you have a printer with double-sided printing capability, you can create an entire brochure from your document without having to collate the pages later. If you have a printer that only has single-sided printing capability, you can achieve this effect by first printing the front pages with the "Front sides / right pages /odd pages" option marked, then re-inserting the entire paper stack in your printer and printing all the back pages with the "Back pages / left pages / even pages" option marked.
-Right to left - Check to print the pages of the brochure in the correct order for a right-to-left script. - Comments +Right to left + Check to print the pages of the brochure in the correct order for a right-to-left script. + Comments - Specifies whether comments in your document are printed. - Other + Specifies whether comments in your document are printed. + Other -Print automatically inserted blank pages -If this option is enabled, automatically-inserted blank pages are being printed. This is best if you are printing double-sided. For example, in a book, a "chapter" paragraph style has been set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to print that even numbered page or not. +Print automatically inserted blank pages +If this option is enabled, automatically-inserted blank pages are being printed. This is best if you are printing double-sided. For example, in a book, a "chapter" paragraph style has been set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to print that even numbered page or not. -Paper tray from printer settings - For printers with multiple trays, the "Paper tray from printer settings" option specifies whether the paper tray used is specified by the system settings of the printer. +Paper tray from printer settings + For printers with multiple trays, the "Paper tray from printer settings" option specifies whether the paper tray used is specified by the system settings of the printer. -Fax - If you have installed fax software on your computer and wish to fax directly from the text document, select the desired fax machine. +Fax + If you have installed fax software on your computer and wish to fax directly from the text document, select the desired fax machine.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp index 52889f02f0..13cf3cbaa2 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp @@ -37,84 +37,84 @@ number formats; recognition in text tables -Table -Defines the attributes of tables in text documents. +Table +Defines the attributes of tables in text documents.
-Specifies the default settings for columns and rows and the table mode. Also specifies the standard values for moving and inserting columns and rows. For further information see Editing Tables Using the Keyboard +Specifies the default settings for columns and rows and the table mode. Also specifies the standard values for moving and inserting columns and rows. For further information see Editing Tables Using the Keyboard in the $[officename] Writer Help.
-Default -Defines the defaults for all newly created text tables in text documents. +Default +Defines the defaults for all newly created text tables in text documents.
-Heading -Specifies that the first row of the table is formatted with the "Table heading" Paragraph Style. +Heading +Specifies that the first row of the table is formatted with the "Table heading" Paragraph Style.
-Repeat on each page -Specifies whether the table heading is carried over onto the new page after a page break. +Repeat on each page +Specifies whether the table heading is carried over onto the new page after a page break.
-Do not split (not in HTML) +Do not split (not in HTML) Specifies that tables are not split by any type of text flow break. You can also find this option in menu Table - Properties - Text Flow.
-Border -Specifies that table cells have a border by default. +Border +Specifies that table cells have a border by default.
-Input in tables +Input in tables
-Number recognition -Specifies that numbers in a text table are recognized and formatted as numbers. -If Number recognition is not marked, numbers are saved in text format and are automatically left-aligned. +Number recognition +Specifies that numbers in a text table are recognized and formatted as numbers. +If Number recognition is not marked, numbers are saved in text format and are automatically left-aligned.
-Number format recognition -If Number format recognition is not marked, only input in the format that has been set at the cell is accepted. Any other input resets the format to Text. +Number format recognition +If Number format recognition is not marked, only input in the format that has been set at the cell is accepted. Any other input resets the format to Text.
-Alignment -Specifies that numbers are always bottom right aligned in the cell. If this field is not marked numbers are always top left aligned in the cell. -Direct formatting is not influenced by the Alignment field. If you center align the cell contents directly, they remain centered irrespective of whether text or numbers are involved. +Alignment +Specifies that numbers are always bottom right aligned in the cell. If this field is not marked numbers are always top left aligned in the cell. +Direct formatting is not influenced by the Alignment field. If you center align the cell contents directly, they remain centered irrespective of whether text or numbers are involved.
-Keyboard handling -Move cells -Defines the default settings for moving rows and columns with the keyboard. +Keyboard handling +Move cells +Defines the default settings for moving rows and columns with the keyboard. -Row -Specifies the value to be used for moving a row. +Row +Specifies the value to be used for moving a row. -Column -Specifies the value to be used for moving a column. -Insert -Specifies the default settings for inserting rows and columns with the keyboard. +Column +Specifies the value to be used for moving a column. +Insert +Specifies the default settings for inserting rows and columns with the keyboard. -Row -Specifies the default value for inserting rows. +Row +Specifies the default value for inserting rows. -Column -Specifies the default value for inserting columns. -Behavior of rows/columns -Determines the relative effect of rows and columns on adjacent rows or columns, as well as on the entire table. +Column +Specifies the default value for inserting columns. +Behavior of rows/columns +Determines the relative effect of rows and columns on adjacent rows or columns, as well as on the entire table. -Fixed -Specifies that changes to a row or column only affect the corresponding adjacent area. +Fixed +Specifies that changes to a row or column only affect the corresponding adjacent area. -Fixed, proportional -Specifies that changes to a row or column have an effect on the entire table. +Fixed, proportional +Specifies that changes to a row or column have an effect on the entire table. -Variable -Specifies that changes to a row or column affect the table size. +Variable +Specifies that changes to a row or column affect the table size. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp index f22b095221..43ec792fdf 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp @@ -51,66 +51,66 @@ cursor; allowing in protected areas (Writer) -Formatting Aids -In $[officename] text and HTML documents, defines the display for certain characters and for the direct cursor. +Formatting Aids +In $[officename] text and HTML documents, defines the display for certain characters and for the direct cursor.
-Display of -Defines which non-printing characters are visible on screen. Activate the Non-printing Characters icon on the Standard bar. All characters that you have selected on the Formatting Aids tab page will be displayed. +Display of +Defines which non-printing characters are visible on screen. Activate the Non-printing Characters icon on the Standard bar. All characters that you have selected on the Formatting Aids tab page will be displayed. -Paragraph end -Specifies whether paragraph delimiters are displayed. The paragraph delimiters also contain paragraph format information. +Paragraph end +Specifies whether paragraph delimiters are displayed. The paragraph delimiters also contain paragraph format information. -Soft hyphens -Specifies whether soft hyphens (called also as optional or discretionary hyphens) are displayed. These are hidden user-defined delimiters that you enter within a word by pressing Command+Hyphen(-) +Soft hyphens +Specifies whether soft hyphens (called also as optional or discretionary hyphens) are displayed. These are hidden user-defined delimiters that you enter within a word by pressing Command+Hyphen(-) Ctrl+Hyphen(-). Words with soft hyphens are only separated at the end of a line at the point where a soft hyphen has been inserted, irrespective of whether the automatic hyphenation is activated or deactivated. -Spaces -Specifies whether to represent every space in the text with a dot. +Spaces +Specifies whether to represent every space in the text with a dot. -Non-breaking spaces -Specifies that non-breaking spaces are shown as gray boxes. Non-breaking spaces are not broken at the end of a line and are entered with the Command+Shift+Spacebar +Non-breaking spaces +Specifies that non-breaking spaces are shown as gray boxes. Non-breaking spaces are not broken at the end of a line and are entered with the Command+Shift+Spacebar Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar shortcut keys. -Tabs -Specifies that tab stops are displayed as small arrows. +Tabs +Specifies that tab stops are displayed as small arrows. -Breaks -Displays all line breaks inserted with the Shift+Enter shortcut. These breaks create a new line, but do not start a new paragraph. +Breaks +Displays all line breaks inserted with the Shift+Enter shortcut. These breaks create a new line, but do not start a new paragraph. -Hidden textUFI: new, although name of control is re-used, see spec "Hidden Text in Writer" -Displays text that uses the character format "hidden", when View - Non-printing Characters is enabled. +Hidden textUFI: new, although name of control is re-used, see spec "Hidden Text in Writer" +Displays text that uses the character format "hidden", when View - Non-printing Characters is enabled. -Fields: Hidden text (not for HTML documents)UFI: this is the old "Hidden text" control renamed -Displays text that is hidden by Conditional Text or Hidden Text fields. +Fields: Hidden text (not for HTML documents)UFI: this is the old "Hidden text" control renamed +Displays text that is hidden by Conditional Text or Hidden Text fields. -Fields: Hidden paragraphs (not for HTML documents) -If you have inserted text using the Hidden Paragraph field, specifies whether to display the hidden paragraph. This option has the same function as the menu commands View - Hidden Paragraphs +Fields: Hidden paragraphs (not for HTML documents) +If you have inserted text using the Hidden Paragraph field, specifies whether to display the hidden paragraph. This option has the same function as the menu commands View - Hidden Paragraphs View - Hidden Paragraphs available in open text documents. -Direct cursor (not for HTML documents) -Defines all the properties of the direct cursor. +Direct cursor (not for HTML documents) +Defines all the properties of the direct cursor. -Direct cursor +Direct cursor Activates the direct cursor. You can also activate this function by clicking the Toggle Direct Cursor Mode icon on the Tools bar or by choosing the Edit - Direct Cursor Mode command in a text document. -Insert (not for HTML document) -Defines the insert options for the direct cursor. If you click at any position in your document, a new paragraph can be written or inserted exactly at this position. The properties of this paragraph depend on the selected option. You can select from the following options: +Insert (not for HTML document) +Defines the insert options for the direct cursor. If you click at any position in your document, a new paragraph can be written or inserted exactly at this position. The properties of this paragraph depend on the selected option. You can select from the following options: -Paragraph alignment -Sets the paragraph alignment when the direct cursor is used. Depending on where the mouse is clicked, the paragraph is formatted left aligned, centered or right aligned. The cursor before the mouse-click shows, by means of a triangle, which alignment is set. +Paragraph alignment +Sets the paragraph alignment when the direct cursor is used. Depending on where the mouse is clicked, the paragraph is formatted left aligned, centered or right aligned. The cursor before the mouse-click shows, by means of a triangle, which alignment is set. -Left paragraph margin -When the direct cursor is used, the left paragraph indent is set at the horizontal position where you click the direct cursor. The paragraph is left aligned. +Left paragraph margin +When the direct cursor is used, the left paragraph indent is set at the horizontal position where you click the direct cursor. The paragraph is left aligned. -Tabs -When the direct cursor is used, as many tabs as necessary are added in the new paragraph until the clicked position is reached. +Tabs +When the direct cursor is used, as many tabs as necessary are added in the new paragraph until the clicked position is reached. -Tabs and Spaces -When the Direct Cursor is used, a corresponding number of tabs and spaces are inserted in the new paragraph as necessary until the clicked position is reached. -All insert options refer only to the current paragraph generated with the Direct Cursor. +Tabs and Spaces +When the Direct Cursor is used, a corresponding number of tabs and spaces are inserted in the new paragraph as necessary until the clicked position is reached. +All insert options refer only to the current paragraph generated with the Direct Cursor. Protected Areas - Enable cursor -Specifies that you can set the cursor in a protected area, but cannot make any changes. +Specifies that you can set the cursor in a protected area, but cannot make any changes. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp index db9c64540a..084cfb5a0a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp @@ -29,44 +29,37 @@
-Changes - Defines the appearance of changes in the document. +Changes + Defines the appearance of changes in the document.
- To record or show changes in your text or spreadsheet document, choose Edit - Track Changes - Record Changes or Edit - Track Changes - Show Changes. + To record or show changes in your text or spreadsheet document, choose Edit - Track Changes - Record Changes or Edit - Track Changes - Show Changes.
- Text display - Defines the settings for displaying recorded changes. Select the type of change and the corresponding display attribute and color. The preview field shows the effect of the selected display options. + Text display + Defines the settings for displaying recorded changes. Select the type of change and the corresponding display attribute and color. The preview field shows the effect of the selected display options. -Insertions / Attributes - Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is inserted. +Insertions / Attributes + Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is inserted. -Deletions / Attributes - Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is deleted. If you record text deletions, the text is displayed with the selected attribute (for example, strikethrough) and is not deleted. +Deletions / Attributes + Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is deleted. If you record text deletions, the text is displayed with the selected attribute (for example, strikethrough) and is not deleted. -Changed attributes / Attributes - Defines how changes to text attributes are displayed in the document. These changes affect attributes such as bold, italic or underline. +Changed attributes / Attributes + Defines how changes to text attributes are displayed in the document. These changes affect attributes such as bold, italic or underline. -Color - You can also choose a color to display each type of recorded change. When you choose the condition "By author" in the list, the color is automatically determined by $[officename], then modified to match to the author of each change. - Lines changed - To indicate which lines of the text have been changed, you can define a mark that appears in the left or right page margin. +Color + You can also choose a color to display each type of recorded change. When you choose the condition "By author" in the list, the color is automatically determined by $[officename], then modified to match to the author of each change. + Lines changed + To indicate which lines of the text have been changed, you can define a mark that appears in the left or right page margin. -Mark - Defines if and where changed lines in the document are marked. You can set the markings so that they always appear on the left or right page margin, or on the outer or inner margin. +Mark + Defines if and where changed lines in the document are marked. You can set the markings so that they always appear on the left or right page margin, or on the outer or inner margin. -Color - Specifies the color for highlighting the changed lines in the text. +Color + Specifies the color for highlighting the changed lines in the text. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp index 13fa36806d..3edb652700 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp @@ -39,68 +39,68 @@
-Compatibility +Compatibility -Specifies compatibility settings for text documents. These options help in fine-tuning %PRODUCTNAME when importing Microsoft Word documents. +Specifies compatibility settings for text documents. These options help in fine-tuning %PRODUCTNAME when importing Microsoft Word documents.
-Some of the settings defined here are only valid for the current document and must be defined separately for each document. +Some of the settings defined here are only valid for the current document and must be defined separately for each document.
-Use printer metrics for document formatting -Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen. If this box is not checked, a printer independent layout will be used for screen display and printing. -If you set this option for the current document and then save the document, for example, in an older binary format, this option will not be saved. If you later open the file from the older format, this option will be set by default. +Use printer metrics for document formatting +Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen. If this box is not checked, a printer independent layout will be used for screen display and printing. +If you set this option for the current document and then save the document, for example, in an older binary format, this option will not be saved. If you later open the file from the older format, this option will be set by default.
-Add spacing between paragraphs and tables (in current document) -In $[officename] Writer, paragraph spacing is defined differently than in MS Word documents. If you have defined spacing between two paragraphs or tables, spacing is also added in the corresponding MS Word documents. -Specifies whether to add MS Word-compatible spacing between paragraphs and tables in $[officename] Writer text documents. -Add paragraph and table spacing at tops of pages (in current document) -Specifies whether paragraph spacing at the top of a page will also be effective at the beginning of a page or column if the paragraph is positioned on the first page of the document. The same applies for a page break. -If you import an MS Word document, the spaces are automatically added during the conversion. -Use OpenOffice.org 1.1 tab stop formattingUFI: spec "Tab Stop Compatibility" -Specifies how to align text at tab stops beyond the right margin, how to handle decimal tab stops, and how to handle tab stops close to a line break. If this check box is not selected, tab stops are handled in the same way as in other Office applications. -In text documents created by your current version of Writer, the new tab stop handling is used by default. In text documents created by Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0, the old tab stop handling is applied. -Do not add leading (extra space) between lines of textUFI: spec external_leading -Specifies that additional leading (extra space) between lines of text is not added, even if the font in use contains the additional leading attribute. -In text documents created by your current version of Writer, the additional leading is used by default. In text documents created by Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0, the additional leading is not used. -Use OpenOffice.org 1.1 line spacingUFI: spec spec-line-spacingUFI: api.feature "Adjusted formatting of text lines with proportional line spacing" -If the option is off, a new process for formatting text lines with proportional line spacing will be applied. If the option is on, the previous method of formatting of text lines with proportional line spacing will be applied. -In text documents created by your current version of Writer and in Microsoft Word documents of recent versions, the new process is used. In text documents created by Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0, the previous process is used. -Add paragraph and table spacing at bottom of table cellsUFI: spec spec-formatting-table-cells -Specifies that the bottom spacing is added to a paragraph, even when it is the last paragraph in a table cell. -If the option is off, table cells will be formatted as in Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0. If the option is on, an alternative method of formatting table cells will be applied. The option is on by default for new documents created with %PRODUCTNAME and for documents imported from Microsoft Word format. -Use OpenOffice.org 1.1 object positioningUFI: spec spec-adjust-object-positioning -Specifies how to calculate the position of floating objects anchored to a character or paragraph with respect to the top and bottom paragraph spacing. -If the option is on, the floating objects are positioned as in Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0. If the option is off, the floating objects are positioned using an alternative method that is similar to the method used by Microsoft Word. -The option will be set to off for new documents. For Writer documents created by a version prior to OpenOffice.org 2.0 the option is on. -Use OpenOffice.org 1.1 text wrapping around objectsUFI: spec doc adjust-text-wrapping.sxw -MS Word and Writer have different approaches on wrapping text around floating screen objects. Floating screen object are Writer frames and drawing objects, and the objects 'text box', 'graphic', 'frame', 'picture' etc. in MS Word. -In MS Word and in current versions of Writer, page header/footer content and footnote/endnote content does not wrap around floating screen objects. Text body content wraps around floating screen objects which are anchored in the page header. -In Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0, the opposite was true. -If the option is off, which is the default setting, the new text wrapping will be applied. If the option is on, the former text wrapping will be applied. -Consider wrapping style when positioning objectsUFI: spec obj-pos-without-wrapping -Specifies how the complex process of positioning floating objects that are anchored to a character or paragraph should work. In Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0, an iterative process was used, while in current versions a straightforward process is used, which is similar to the same process in Microsoft Word. -If the option is off, the old %PRODUCTNAME iterative process of object positioning is used. If the option is on, the new straightforward process is used to ensure compatibility with Microsoft Word documents. -Expand word space on lines with manual line breaks in justified paragraphsUFI: i79041 -If enabled, Writer adds spacing between words, in lines that end with Shift+Enter in justified paragraphs. If disabled, spacing between words will not be expanded to justify the lines. -This setting is on by default for .odt text documents. It will be saved and loaded with the document in the .odt text document format. This setting cannot be saved in old .sxw text documents, so this setting is off for .sxw text documents. +Add spacing between paragraphs and tables (in current document) +In $[officename] Writer, paragraph spacing is defined differently than in MS Word documents. If you have defined spacing between two paragraphs or tables, spacing is also added in the corresponding MS Word documents. +Specifies whether to add MS Word-compatible spacing between paragraphs and tables in $[officename] Writer text documents. +Add paragraph and table spacing at tops of pages (in current document) +Specifies whether paragraph spacing at the top of a page will also be effective at the beginning of a page or column if the paragraph is positioned on the first page of the document. The same applies for a page break. +If you import an MS Word document, the spaces are automatically added during the conversion. +Use OpenOffice.org 1.1 tab stop formattingUFI: spec "Tab Stop Compatibility" +Specifies how to align text at tab stops beyond the right margin, how to handle decimal tab stops, and how to handle tab stops close to a line break. If this check box is not selected, tab stops are handled in the same way as in other Office applications. +In text documents created by your current version of Writer, the new tab stop handling is used by default. In text documents created by Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0, the old tab stop handling is applied. +Do not add leading (extra space) between lines of textUFI: spec external_leading +Specifies that additional leading (extra space) between lines of text is not added, even if the font in use contains the additional leading attribute. +In text documents created by your current version of Writer, the additional leading is used by default. In text documents created by Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0, the additional leading is not used. +Use OpenOffice.org 1.1 line spacingUFI: spec spec-line-spacingUFI: api.feature "Adjusted formatting of text lines with proportional line spacing" +If the option is off, a new process for formatting text lines with proportional line spacing will be applied. If the option is on, the previous method of formatting of text lines with proportional line spacing will be applied. +In text documents created by your current version of Writer and in Microsoft Word documents of recent versions, the new process is used. In text documents created by Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0, the previous process is used. +Add paragraph and table spacing at bottom of table cellsUFI: spec spec-formatting-table-cells +Specifies that the bottom spacing is added to a paragraph, even when it is the last paragraph in a table cell. +If the option is off, table cells will be formatted as in Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0. If the option is on, an alternative method of formatting table cells will be applied. The option is on by default for new documents created with %PRODUCTNAME and for documents imported from Microsoft Word format. +Use OpenOffice.org 1.1 object positioningUFI: spec spec-adjust-object-positioning +Specifies how to calculate the position of floating objects anchored to a character or paragraph with respect to the top and bottom paragraph spacing. +If the option is on, the floating objects are positioned as in Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0. If the option is off, the floating objects are positioned using an alternative method that is similar to the method used by Microsoft Word. +The option will be set to off for new documents. For Writer documents created by a version prior to OpenOffice.org 2.0 the option is on. +Use OpenOffice.org 1.1 text wrapping around objectsUFI: spec doc adjust-text-wrapping.sxw +MS Word and Writer have different approaches on wrapping text around floating screen objects. Floating screen object are Writer frames and drawing objects, and the objects 'text box', 'graphic', 'frame', 'picture' etc. in MS Word. +In MS Word and in current versions of Writer, page header/footer content and footnote/endnote content does not wrap around floating screen objects. Text body content wraps around floating screen objects which are anchored in the page header. +In Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0, the opposite was true. +If the option is off, which is the default setting, the new text wrapping will be applied. If the option is on, the former text wrapping will be applied. +Consider wrapping style when positioning objectsUFI: spec obj-pos-without-wrapping +Specifies how the complex process of positioning floating objects that are anchored to a character or paragraph should work. In Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0, an iterative process was used, while in current versions a straightforward process is used, which is similar to the same process in Microsoft Word. +If the option is off, the old %PRODUCTNAME iterative process of object positioning is used. If the option is on, the new straightforward process is used to ensure compatibility with Microsoft Word documents. +Expand word space on lines with manual line breaks in justified paragraphsUFI: i79041 +If enabled, Writer adds spacing between words, in lines that end with Shift+Enter in justified paragraphs. If disabled, spacing between words will not be expanded to justify the lines. +This setting is on by default for .odt text documents. It will be saved and loaded with the document in the .odt text document format. This setting cannot be saved in old .sxw text documents, so this setting is off for .sxw text documents. -Use as Default -Click to use the current settings on this tab page as the default for further sessions with %PRODUCTNAME. -The factory defaults are set as follows. Enabled are the following options, while all other options are disabled: +Use as Default +Click to use the current settings on this tab page as the default for further sessions with %PRODUCTNAME. +The factory defaults are set as follows. Enabled are the following options, while all other options are disabled: -Add spacing between paragraphs and tables (in current document) +Add spacing between paragraphs and tables (in current document) -Add paragraph and table spacing at tops of pages (in current document) +Add paragraph and table spacing at tops of pages (in current document) -Add paragraph and table spacing at bottom of table cells +Add paragraph and table spacing at bottom of table cells -Expand word space on lines with manual line breaks in justified paragraphs +Expand word space on lines with manual line breaks in justified paragraphs diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp index fb83ee27ff..a349bf393b 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp @@ -40,8 +40,8 @@ mw deleted "adding;" - AutoCaption - Specifies the settings for captions that are automatically added to inserted objects. + AutoCaption + Specifies the settings for captions that are automatically added to inserted objects.
@@ -51,43 +51,43 @@
- Add captions automatically when inserting - Select the object type for which the AutoCaption settings are to be valid. - Caption - Defines the options to be applied to the selected object type. These options are identical to those in the Insert - Caption menu, which is available when an object is selected. Below the settings is a preview of the object category, together with numbering type. + Add captions automatically when inserting + Select the object type for which the AutoCaption settings are to be valid. + Caption + Defines the options to be applied to the selected object type. These options are identical to those in the Insert - Caption menu, which is available when an object is selected. Below the settings is a preview of the object category, together with numbering type. - Category - Specifies the category of the selected object.UFI: copied text from optionen/01040801 + Category + Specifies the category of the selected object.UFI: copied text from optionen/01040801 - Numbering - Specifies the type of numbering required. + Numbering + Specifies the type of numbering required. - Separator - Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level. + Separator + Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level. - Position - Determines the position of the caption with respect to the object. - Numbering captions by chapter + Position + Determines the position of the caption with respect to the object. + Numbering captions by chapter - Level - Specifies the headings or chapter levels where you want the numbering to start. - Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level. - Category and frame format + Level + Specifies the headings or chapter levels where you want the numbering to start. + Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level. + Category and frame format - Character style - Specifies the character style. + Character style + Specifies the character style. - Apply border and shadow - Applies the border and shadow of the object to the caption frame. + Apply border and shadow + Applies the border and shadow of the object to the caption frame.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01050000.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01050000.xhp index e800c62238..3fdd85fe3d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01050000.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@ -%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web Options - +%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web Options + Defines the basic settings for $[officename] documents in HTML format.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp index 5450f9b35c..12db7ba884 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp @@ -33,79 +33,70 @@ snap grid defaults (Writer/Calc) -Grid - Specifies the settings for the configurable grid on your document pages. This grid helps you determine the exact position of your objects. You can also set this grid in line with the "magnetic" snap grid. +Grid + Specifies the settings for the configurable grid on your document pages. This grid helps you determine the exact position of your objects. You can also set this grid in line with the "magnetic" snap grid.
- Grid + Grid -Snap to grid +Snap to grid
- Specifies whether to move frames, drawing elements, and controls only between grid points. To change the status of the snap grip only for the current action, drag an object while holding down the Control key + Specifies whether to move frames, drawing elements, and controls only between grid points. To change the status of the snap grip only for the current action, drag an object while holding down the Control key Ctrl key.
-Visible grid - Specifies whether to display the grid. +Visible grid + Specifies whether to display the grid. - It is also possible to toggle the visibility of the grid with the Grid - Display Grid command in the context menu for the page. You can also select the Grid - Grid to Front submenu of this context menu to display the grid in front of objects. + It is also possible to toggle the visibility of the grid with the Grid - Display Grid command in the context menu for the page. You can also select the Grid - Grid to Front submenu of this context menu to display the grid in front of objects. - It is also possible to toggle the visibility of the grid with the Grid - Display Grid command in the context menu of the page. You can also select the Grid - Grid to Front submenu of this context menu to display the grid in front of objects. + It is also possible to toggle the visibility of the grid with the Grid - Display Grid command in the context menu of the page. You can also select the Grid - Grid to Front submenu of this context menu to display the grid in front of objects.
- Resolution + Resolution -Horizontal - Defines the unit of measure for the spacing between grid points on the X-axis. +Horizontal + Defines the unit of measure for the spacing between grid points on the X-axis. -Vertical - Defines the grid points spacing in the desired unit of measurement on the Y-axis. - Subdivision +Vertical + Defines the grid points spacing in the desired unit of measurement on the Y-axis. + Subdivision -Horizontal - Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the X-axis.UFI: see #i39831#UFI: see #i112000 +Horizontal + Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the X-axis.UFI: see #i39831#UFI: see #i112000 -Vertical - Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the Y-axis. +Vertical + Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the Y-axis. -Synchronize axes - Specifies whether to change the current grid settings symmetrically. The resolution and subdivision for the X and Y axes remain the same. - There are additional commands on the context menu of a page: +Synchronize axes + Specifies whether to change the current grid settings symmetrically. The resolution and subdivision for the X and Y axes remain the same. + There are additional commands on the context menu of a page: There are additional commands on the context menu of a page:
-Grid to Front +Grid to Front Grid to Front - Sets the visible grid in front of all objects. + Sets the visible grid in front of all objects. Sets the visible grid in front of all objects. - Sets the visible grid in front of all objects. + Sets the visible grid in front of all objects. -Snap Lines to Front +Snap Lines to Front Snap Lines to Front - Sets the snap lines in front of all objects. + Sets the snap lines in front of all objects. Sets the snap lines in front of all objects. - Sets the snap lines in front of all objects. + Sets the snap lines in front of all objects.
- Set the grid color on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Application Colors. + Set the grid color on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Application Colors.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01050300.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01050300.xhp index c9f7149754..b77b5844d4 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01050300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01050300.xhp @@ -33,10 +33,10 @@
- Background + Background Specifies the background for HTML documents. The background is valid for both new HTML documents and for those that you load, as long as these have not defined their own background.
- Further information + Further information
diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01060000.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01060000.xhp index c13d55d0bb..80e9b8b1dd 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01060000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ -%PRODUCTNAME Calc Options -Defines various settings for spreadsheets, contents to be displayed, and the cursor direction after a cell entry. You can also define sorting lists, determine the number of decimal places and the settings for recording and highlighting changes. +%PRODUCTNAME Calc Options +Defines various settings for spreadsheets, contents to be displayed, and the cursor direction after a cell entry. You can also define sorting lists, determine the number of decimal places and the settings for recording and highlighting changes.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp index 869a740aa4..3258a2cf84 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp @@ -55,103 +55,86 @@ outlines;outline symbols MW copied "displaying;comments" over to Calc guide note_insert.xhp and deleted "comments;displaying" -View - Defines which elements of the %PRODUCTNAME Calc main window are displayed. You can also show or hide highlighting of values in tables. +View + Defines which elements of the %PRODUCTNAME Calc main window are displayed. You can also show or hide highlighting of values in tables.
- Visual aids - Specifies which lines are displayed. + Visual aids + Specifies which lines are displayed. -Grid lines - Specifies when grid lines will be displayed. Default is to display grid lines only on cells that do not have a background color. You can choose to also display grid lines on cells with background color, or to hide them. For printing, choose Format - Page - Sheet and mark the Grid check box. +Grid lines + Specifies when grid lines will be displayed. Default is to display grid lines only on cells that do not have a background color. You can choose to also display grid lines on cells with background color, or to hide them. For printing, choose Format - Page - Sheet and mark the Grid check box. -Color -Specifies a color for the grid lines in the current document. To see the grid line color that was saved with the document, go to %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Application Colors, under Scheme find the entry Spreadsheet - Grid lines and set the color to "Automatic". +Color +Specifies a color for the grid lines in the current document. To see the grid line color that was saved with the document, go to %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Application Colors, under Scheme find the entry Spreadsheet - Grid lines and set the color to "Automatic". -Page breaks - Specifies whether to view the page breaks within a defined print area. +Page breaks + Specifies whether to view the page breaks within a defined print area. -Helplines While Moving - Specifies whether to view guides when moving drawings, frames, graphics and other objects. These guides help you align objects. - Display - Select various options for the screen display. +Helplines While Moving + Specifies whether to view guides when moving drawings, frames, graphics and other objects. These guides help you align objects. + Display + Select various options for the screen display. -Formulas - Specifies whether to show formulas instead of results in the cells. +Formulas + Specifies whether to show formulas instead of results in the cells. -Zero values - Specifies whether to show numbers with the value of 0. +Zero values + Specifies whether to show numbers with the value of 0. -Comment indicator -Specifies that a small rectangle in the top right corner of the cell indicates that a comment exists. The comment will be shown only when you enable tips under %PRODUCTNAME - General in the Options dialog box. +Comment indicator +Specifies that a small rectangle in the top right corner of the cell indicates that a comment exists. The comment will be shown only when you enable tips under %PRODUCTNAME - General in the Options dialog box. -To display a comment permanently, select the Show comment command from the cell's context menu. - You can type and edit comments with the Insert - Comment command. Comments that are permanently displayed can be edited by clicking the comment box. Click the Navigator and under the Comments entry you can view all comments in the current document. By double clicking a comment in Navigator, the cursor will jump to the corresponding cell containing the comment. +To display a comment permanently, select the Show comment command from the cell's context menu. + You can type and edit comments with the Insert - Comment command. Comments that are permanently displayed can be edited by clicking the comment box. Click the Navigator and under the Comments entry you can view all comments in the current document. By double clicking a comment in Navigator, the cursor will jump to the corresponding cell containing the comment. -Value highlighting -Mark the Value highlighting box to show the cell contents in different colors, depending on type. Text cells are formatted in black, formulas in green, number cells in blue, and protected cells are shown with light grey background, no matter how their display is formatted. -When this command is active, any colors assigned in the document will not be displayed until the function is deactivated. +Value highlighting +Mark the Value highlighting box to show the cell contents in different colors, depending on type. Text cells are formatted in black, formulas in green, number cells in blue, and protected cells are shown with light grey background, no matter how their display is formatted. +When this command is active, any colors assigned in the document will not be displayed until the function is deactivated. -Anchor - Specifies whether the anchor icon is displayed when an inserted object, such as a graphic, is selected. +Anchor + Specifies whether the anchor icon is displayed when an inserted object, such as a graphic, is selected. -Text overflow - If a cell contains text that is wider than the width of the cell, the text is displayed over empty neighboring cells in the same row. If there is no empty neighboring cell, a small triangle at the cell border indicates that the text continues.UFI: sc.features "Alignment of text that is larger than a cell" +Text overflow + If a cell contains text that is wider than the width of the cell, the text is displayed over empty neighboring cells in the same row. If there is no empty neighboring cell, a small triangle at the cell border indicates that the text continues.UFI: sc.features "Alignment of text that is larger than a cell" -Show references in color - Specifies that each reference is highlighted in color in the formula. The cell range is also enclosed by a colored border as soon as the cell containing the reference is selected for editing. - Objects - Defines whether to display or hide objects for up to three object groups.removed "placeholder" text, see i81634 +Show references in color + Specifies that each reference is highlighted in color in the formula. The cell range is also enclosed by a colored border as soon as the cell containing the reference is selected for editing. + Objects + Defines whether to display or hide objects for up to three object groups.removed "placeholder" text, see i81634 -Objects/Graphics - Defines if objects and graphics are shown or hidden. +Objects/Graphics + Defines if objects and graphics are shown or hidden. -Charts - Defines if charts in your document are shown or hidden. +Charts + Defines if charts in your document are shown or hidden. -Drawing objects - Defines if drawing objects in your document are shown or hidden. - Zoom +Drawing objects + Defines if drawing objects in your document are shown or hidden. + Zoom -Synchronize sheets - If checked, all sheets are shown with the same zoom factor. If not checked, each sheet can have its own zoom factor. - Window - Specifies whether some Help elements will or will not appear in the table. +Synchronize sheets + If checked, all sheets are shown with the same zoom factor. If not checked, each sheet can have its own zoom factor. + Window + Specifies whether some Help elements will or will not appear in the table. -Column/Row headers - Specifies whether to display row and column headers. +Column/Row headers + Specifies whether to display row and column headers. -Horizontal scrollbar - Specifies whether to display a horizontal scrollbar at the bottom of the document window. +Horizontal scrollbar + Specifies whether to display a horizontal scrollbar at the bottom of the document window. -Vertical scrollbar - Specifies whether to display a vertical scrollbar at the right of the document window. +Vertical scrollbar + Specifies whether to display a vertical scrollbar at the right of the document window. -Sheet tabs - Specifies whether to display the sheet tabs at the bottom of the spreadsheet document. If this box is not checked, you will only be able to switch between the sheets through the Navigator +Sheet tabs + Specifies whether to display the sheet tabs at the bottom of the spreadsheet document. If this box is not checked, you will only be able to switch between the sheets through the Navigator Navigator. -Outline symbols - If you have defined an outline +Outline symbols + If you have defined an outline outline, the Outline symbols option specifies whether to view the outline symbols at the border of the sheet. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp index ed78771d13..fd206d3b2d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp @@ -41,38 +41,38 @@ row headers; highlighting (Calc) -General -Defines general settings for spreadsheet documents. +General +Defines general settings for spreadsheet documents.
-Metrics -Measurement unit -Defines the unit of measure in spreadsheets. -Tab stops -Defines the tab stops distance. +Metrics +Measurement unit +Defines the unit of measure in spreadsheets. +Tab stops +Defines the tab stops distance. -Input settings +Input settings -Press Enter to move selection -Determines the direction that the cursor in the spreadsheet will move after you press the Enter key. +Press Enter to move selection +Determines the direction that the cursor in the spreadsheet will move after you press the Enter key. -see i53756Press Enter to switch to edit mode -Allows you to immediately edit the selected cell after pressing the Enter key. -Expand formatting -Specifies whether to automatically apply the formatting attributes of the selected cell to the empty adjacent cells. If, for example, the contents of the selected cell have the bold attribute, this bold attribute will also apply to adjacent cells. Cells that already have a special format will not be modified by this function. You can see the range in question by pressing the Command +see i53756Press Enter to switch to edit mode +Allows you to immediately edit the selected cell after pressing the Enter key. +Expand formatting +Specifies whether to automatically apply the formatting attributes of the selected cell to the empty adjacent cells. If, for example, the contents of the selected cell have the bold attribute, this bold attribute will also apply to adjacent cells. Cells that already have a special format will not be modified by this function. You can see the range in question by pressing the Command Ctrl + * (multiplication sign on the number pad) shortcut. This format also applies to all new values inserted within this range. The normal default settings apply to cells outside this range. -Expand references when new columns/rows are inserted -Specifies whether to expand references when inserting columns or rows adjacent to the reference range. This is only possible if the reference range, where the column or row is inserted, originally spanned at least two cells in the desired direction. - +Expand references when new columns/rows are inserted +Specifies whether to expand references when inserting columns or rows adjacent to the reference range. This is only possible if the reference range, where the column or row is inserted, originally spanned at least two cells in the desired direction. + Example: If the range A1:B1 is referenced in a formula and you insert a new column after column B, the reference is expanded to A1:C1. If the range A1:B1 is referenced and a new row is inserted under row 1, the reference is not expanded, since there is only a single cell in the vertical direction. -If you insert rows or columns in the middle of a reference area, the reference is always expanded. -Highlight selection in column/row headings -Specifies whether to highlight column and row headers in the selected columns or rows. -Use printer metrics for text formatting -Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen. If this box is not checked, a printer independent layout will be used for screen display and printing. -Show overwrite warning when pasting data -Specifies that, when you paste cells from the clipboard to a cell range that is not empty, a warning appears. +If you insert rows or columns in the middle of a reference area, the reference is always expanded. +Highlight selection in column/row headings +Specifies whether to highlight column and row headers in the selected columns or rows. +Use printer metrics for text formatting +Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen. If this box is not checked, a printer independent layout will be used for screen display and printing. +Show overwrite warning when pasting data +Specifies that, when you paste cells from the clipboard to a cell range that is not empty, a warning appears. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp index db63769e8b..136ac545af 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp @@ -29,8 +29,8 @@
-Sort Lists -All user-defined lists are displayed in the Sort Lists dialog. You can also define and edit your own lists. Only text can be used as sort lists, no numbers.UFI: fix to #111848# +Sort Lists +All user-defined lists are displayed in the Sort Lists dialog. You can also define and edit your own lists. Only text can be used as sort lists, no numbers.UFI: fix to #111848#
@@ -44,25 +44,25 @@ -Lists -Displays all the available lists. These lists can be selected for editing. +Lists +Displays all the available lists. These lists can be selected for editing. -Entries -Displays the content of the currently selected list. This content can be edited. +Entries +Displays the content of the currently selected list. This content can be edited. -Copy list from -Defines the spreadsheet and the cells to copy, in order to include them in the Lists box. The currently selected range in the spreadsheet is the default. +Copy list from +Defines the spreadsheet and the cells to copy, in order to include them in the Lists box. The currently selected range in the spreadsheet is the default. -Copy -Copies the contents of the cells in the Copy list from box. If you select a reference to related rows and columns, the Copy List dialog appears after clicking the button. You can use this dialog to define if the reference is converted to sort lists by row or by column. +Copy +Copies the contents of the cells in the Copy list from box. If you select a reference to related rows and columns, the Copy List dialog appears after clicking the button. You can use this dialog to define if the reference is converted to sort lists by row or by column. -New/Discard -Enters the contents of a new list into the Entries box. This button will change from New to Discard, which enables you to delete the new list. +New/Discard +Enters the contents of a new list into the Entries box. This button will change from New to Discard, which enables you to delete the new list. -Add/Modify -Adds a new list into the Lists box. If you would like to edit this list in the Entries box, this button will change from Add to Modify, which enables you to include the newly modified list. +Add/Modify +Adds a new list into the Lists box. If you would like to edit this list in the Entries box, this button will change from Add to Modify, which enables you to include the newly modified list. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01060401.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01060401.xhp index ccbdb6ee43..347731dcc1 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01060401.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01060401.xhp @@ -35,18 +35,18 @@ sort lists; copying to in Calc -Copy List -Allows you to copy marked cells to a sort list. +Copy List +Allows you to copy marked cells to a sort list.
-List from -Choose between the options Rows and Columns. Cells without text will be ignored when copying. +List from +Choose between the options Rows and Columns. Cells without text will be ignored when copying. -Rows -Select the Rows option to summarize the contents of the selected rows in a list. +Rows +Select the Rows option to summarize the contents of the selected rows in a list. -Columns -Select the Columns option to summarize the contents of the selected columns in a list. +Columns +Select the Columns option to summarize the contents of the selected columns in a list. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp index 5908f47f57..38a7d756ec 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp @@ -44,31 +44,31 @@ Excel; search criteria UFI: removed a double entrymw changed "cell contents;" to "case sensitivity;.."mw deleted "numbers;decimal places (Calc)" -Calculate - Defines the calculation settings for spreadsheets. Defines the behavior of spreadsheets with iterative references, the date settings, the number of decimal places, and if capitalization or lower cases are to be considered when searching within sheets. +Calculate + Defines the calculation settings for spreadsheets. Defines the behavior of spreadsheets with iterative references, the date settings, the number of decimal places, and if capitalization or lower cases are to be considered when searching within sheets.
- Iterative references - In this section you can delimit the number of approximation steps carried out during iterative calculations. In addition, you can specify the degree of precision of the answer. + Iterative references + In this section you can delimit the number of approximation steps carried out during iterative calculations. In addition, you can specify the degree of precision of the answer. -Iterations - Specifies whether formulas with iterative references (formulas that are continuously repeated until the problem is solved) are calculated after a specific number of repetitions. If the Iterations box is not marked, an iterative reference in the table will cause an error message. - +Iterations + Specifies whether formulas with iterative references (formulas that are continuously repeated until the problem is solved) are calculated after a specific number of repetitions. If the Iterations box is not marked, an iterative reference in the table will cause an error message. + Example: calculating the cost of an item without the value-added tax. - Type the text 'Selling price' in cell A5, the text 'Net' in cell A6, and the text 'Value-added tax' in cell A7. + Type the text 'Selling price' in cell A5, the text 'Net' in cell A6, and the text 'Value-added tax' in cell A7. - Now type a selling price (for example, 100) in cell B5. The net price should be shown in cell B6 and the value-added tax should be shown in cell B7. + Now type a selling price (for example, 100) in cell B5. The net price should be shown in cell B6 and the value-added tax should be shown in cell B7. - You know that the value-added tax is calculated as 'net price times 15%' and that you arrive at the net price by deducting the value-added tax from the selling price. Type the formula =B5-B7 in B6 to calculate the net price, and type the formula =B6*0.15 in cell B7 to calculate the value-added tax. + You know that the value-added tax is calculated as 'net price times 15%' and that you arrive at the net price by deducting the value-added tax from the selling price. Type the formula =B5-B7 in B6 to calculate the net price, and type the formula =B6*0.15 in cell B7 to calculate the value-added tax. - Switch on the iterations to correctly calculate the formulas, otherwise a 'Circular reference' error message appears in the Status Bar. + Switch on the iterations to correctly calculate the formulas, otherwise a 'Circular reference' error message appears in the Status Bar. @@ -76,177 +76,163 @@ - A + A - B + B - 5 + 5 - Selling Price + Selling Price - 100 + 100 - 6 + 6 - Net + Net - =B5-B7 + =B5-B7 - 7 + 7 - Tax + Tax - =B6*0,15 + =B6*0,15
-Steps - Sets the maximum number of iteration steps. +Steps + Sets the maximum number of iteration steps. -Minimum Change - Specifies the difference between two consecutive iteration step results. If the result of the iteration is lower than the minimum change value, then the iteration will stop. - Date - Select the start date for the internal conversion from days to numbers. +Minimum Change + Specifies the difference between two consecutive iteration step results. If the result of the iteration is lower than the minimum change value, then the iteration will stop. + Date + Select the start date for the internal conversion from days to numbers. -12/30/1899 (default) - Sets 12/30/1899 as day zero. +12/30/1899 (default) + Sets 12/30/1899 as day zero. -01/01/1900 (StarCalc 1.0) - Sets 1/1/1900 as day zero. Use this setting for StarCalc 1.0 spreadsheets containing date entries. +01/01/1900 (StarCalc 1.0) + Sets 1/1/1900 as day zero. Use this setting for StarCalc 1.0 spreadsheets containing date entries. -01/01/1904 - Sets 1/1/1904 as day zero. Use this setting for spreadsheets that are imported in a foreign format. +01/01/1904 + Sets 1/1/1904 as day zero. Use this setting for spreadsheets that are imported in a foreign format. -Case sensitive - Specifies whether to distinguish between upper and lower case in texts when comparing cell contents. - +Case sensitive + Specifies whether to distinguish between upper and lower case in texts when comparing cell contents. + Example: Type the text 'Test' in cell A1; and the text 'test' in B1. Then type the formula "=A1=B1" in cell C1. If the Case sensitive box is marked, FALSE will appear in the cell; otherwise, TRUE will appear in the cell. - The EXACT text function is always case-sensitive, independent of the settings in this dialog. - Disable case sensitivity for spreadsheets that need to be interoperable with Microsoft Excel. + The EXACT text function is always case-sensitive, independent of the settings in this dialog. + Disable case sensitivity for spreadsheets that need to be interoperable with Microsoft Excel. -Precision as shown - Specifies whether to make calculations using the rounded values displayed in the sheet. Charts will be shown with the displayed values. If the Precision as shown option is not marked, the displayed numbers are rounded, but they are calculated internally using the non-rounded number. +Precision as shown + Specifies whether to make calculations using the rounded values displayed in the sheet. Charts will be shown with the displayed values. If the Precision as shown option is not marked, the displayed numbers are rounded, but they are calculated internally using the non-rounded number. -Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells - Specifies that the search criteria you set for the Calc database functions must match the whole cell exactly. When both, the Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells box and the Enable wildcards in formulas box are marked, $[officename] Calc behaves exactly as Microsoft Excel when searching cells in the database functions. +Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells + Specifies that the search criteria you set for the Calc database functions must match the whole cell exactly. When both, the Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells box and the Enable wildcards in formulas box are marked, $[officename] Calc behaves exactly as Microsoft Excel when searching cells in the database functions. - * in following position: + * in following position: - Search result: + Search result: - win + win - Finds win, but not win95, os2win, or upwind + Finds win, but not win95, os2win, or upwind - win* + win* - Finds win and win95, but not os2win or upwind + Finds win and win95, but not os2win or upwind - *win + *win - Finds win and os2win, but not win95 or upwind + Finds win and os2win, but not win95 or upwind - *win* + *win* - Finds win, win95, os2win, and upwind + Finds win, win95, os2win, and upwind
- If Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells is not enabled, the "win" search pattern acts like "*win*". The search pattern can be at any position within the cell when searching with the Calc database functions. - Enable whole cell match for spreadsheets that need to be interoperable with Microsoft Excel. + If Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells is not enabled, the "win" search pattern acts like "*win*". The search pattern can be at any position within the cell when searching with the Calc database functions. + Enable whole cell match for spreadsheets that need to be interoperable with Microsoft Excel. -Enable wildcards in formulas - Specifies that wildcards are enabled when searching and also for character string comparisons. This relates to the database functions, and to VLOOKUP, HLOOKUP, MATCH, AVERAGEIF, AVERAGEIFS, COUNTIF, COUNTIFS, SUMIF, SUMIFS and SEARCH. +Enable wildcards in formulas + Specifies that wildcards are enabled when searching and also for character string comparisons. This relates to the database functions, and to VLOOKUP, HLOOKUP, MATCH, AVERAGEIF, AVERAGEIFS, COUNTIF, COUNTIFS, SUMIF, SUMIFS and SEARCH. - ? (question mark) matches any single character + ? (question mark) matches any single character - * (asterisk) matches any sequence of characters, including an empty string + * (asterisk) matches any sequence of characters, including an empty string - ~ (tilde) escapes the special meaning of a question mark, asterisk or tilde character that follows immediately after the tilde character + ~ (tilde) escapes the special meaning of a question mark, asterisk or tilde character that follows immediately after the tilde character - Enable wildcards in formulas for spreadsheets that need to be interoperable with Microsoft Excel. + Enable wildcards in formulas for spreadsheets that need to be interoperable with Microsoft Excel. -Enable regular expressions in formulas - Specifies that regular expressions instead of simple wildcards are enabled when searching and also for character string comparisons. This relates to the database functions, and to VLOOKUP, HLOOKUP, MATCH, AVERAGEIF, AVERAGEIFS, COUNTIF, COUNTIFS, SUMIF, SUMIFS and SEARCH. +Enable regular expressions in formulas + Specifies that regular expressions instead of simple wildcards are enabled when searching and also for character string comparisons. This relates to the database functions, and to VLOOKUP, HLOOKUP, MATCH, AVERAGEIF, AVERAGEIFS, COUNTIF, COUNTIFS, SUMIF, SUMIFS and SEARCH. Sorry, no more switches allowed inside AVIS tags - Do not enable regular expressions in formulas for spreadsheets that need to be interoperable with Microsoft Excel. + Do not enable regular expressions in formulas for spreadsheets that need to be interoperable with Microsoft Excel. -No wildcards or regular expressions in formulas - Specifies that only literal strings are used when searching and also for character string comparisons. This relates to the database functions, and to VLOOKUP, HLOOKUP, MATCH, AVERAGEIF, AVERAGEIFS, COUNTIF, COUNTIFS, SUMIF, SUMIFS and SEARCH. +No wildcards or regular expressions in formulas + Specifies that only literal strings are used when searching and also for character string comparisons. This relates to the database functions, and to VLOOKUP, HLOOKUP, MATCH, AVERAGEIF, AVERAGEIFS, COUNTIF, COUNTIFS, SUMIF, SUMIFS and SEARCH. - Do not disable wildcards in formulas for spreadsheets that need to be interoperable with Microsoft Excel. + Do not disable wildcards in formulas for spreadsheets that need to be interoperable with Microsoft Excel. -Automatically find column and row labels - Specifies that you can use the text in any cell as a label for the column below the text or the row to the right of the text. The text must consist of at least one word and must not contain any operators. - +Automatically find column and row labels + Specifies that you can use the text in any cell as a label for the column below the text or the row to the right of the text. The text must consist of at least one word and must not contain any operators. + Example: Cell E5 contains the text "Europe". Below, in cell E6, is the value 100 and in cell E7 the value 200. If the Automatically find column and row labels box is marked, you can write the following formula in cell A1: =SUM(Europe). -Limit decimals for general number format -You can specify the maximum number of decimal places that are shown by default for cells with General number format. If not enabled, cells with General number format show as many decimal places as the column width allows. +Limit decimals for general number format +You can specify the maximum number of decimal places that are shown by default for cells with General number format. If not enabled, cells with General number format show as many decimal places as the column width allows. -Decimal places - Defines the number of decimals to be displayed for numbers with the General number format. The numbers are displayed as rounded numbers, but are not saved as rounded numbers. +Decimal places + Defines the number of decimals to be displayed for numbers with the General number format. The numbers are displayed as rounded numbers, but are not saved as rounded numbers. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01060600.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01060600.xhp index c564f1bdad..ac553b0e22 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01060600.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01060600.xhp @@ -32,26 +32,26 @@
-Changes -The Changes dialog specifies various options for highlighting recorded changes in documents. +Changes +The Changes dialog specifies various options for highlighting recorded changes in documents.
To record changes to your work, choose Edit - Track Changes - Record Changes.
-Color Definition for Changes -Defines colors for recorded changes. If you select the "By author" entry, $[officename] will automatically set the color depending on the author who undertook the changes. +Color Definition for Changes +Defines colors for recorded changes. If you select the "By author" entry, $[officename] will automatically set the color depending on the author who undertook the changes. -Changes -Specifies the color for changes of cell contents. +Changes +Specifies the color for changes of cell contents. -Deletions -Specifies the color to highlight deletions in a document. +Deletions +Specifies the color to highlight deletions in a document. -Insertions -Specifies the color to highlight insertions in a document. +Insertions +Specifies the color to highlight insertions in a document. -Moved entries -Specifies the color to highlight moved cell contents. +Moved entries +Specifies the color to highlight moved cell contents. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp index f1bee82d60..81b5ef5805 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp @@ -30,19 +30,19 @@
-Print +Print Determines the printer settings for spreadsheets.
-%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Print defines the settings for all spreadsheets. To define settings for the current document only, choose File - Print, then click the Options button. +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Print defines the settings for all spreadsheets. To define settings for the current document only, choose File - Print, then click the Options button.
-Pages -Suppress output of empty pages -Specifies that empty pages that have no cell contents or draw objects are not printed. Cell attributes such as borders or background colors are not considered cell contents. Empty pages are not counted for page numbering. -Sheets -Print only selected sheets -Specifies that only contents from selected sheets are printed, even if you specify a wider range in the File - Print dialog or in the Format - Print Ranges dialog. Contents from sheets that are not selected will not be printed. -To select multiple sheets, click on the sheet names on the bottom margin of the workspace while keeping the Ctrl key pressed. +Pages +Suppress output of empty pages +Specifies that empty pages that have no cell contents or draw objects are not printed. Cell attributes such as borders or background colors are not considered cell contents. Empty pages are not counted for page numbering. +Sheets +Print only selected sheets +Specifies that only contents from selected sheets are printed, even if you specify a wider range in the File - Print dialog or in the Format - Print Ranges dialog. Contents from sheets that are not selected will not be printed. +To select multiple sheets, click on the sheet names on the bottom margin of the workspace while keeping the Ctrl key pressed. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01070000.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01070000.xhp index 5496c99672..3161d4951c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01070000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01070000.xhp @@ -30,8 +30,8 @@ -%PRODUCTNAME Impress Options -Defines various settings for newly created presentation documents, such as the contents to be displayed, the measurement unit used, if and how grid alignment is carried out. +%PRODUCTNAME Impress Options +Defines various settings for newly created presentation documents, such as the contents to be displayed, the measurement unit used, if and how grid alignment is carried out.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01070100.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01070100.xhp index 1e663cd010..5a5d7ec908 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01070100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01070100.xhp @@ -36,23 +36,23 @@ control point display in presentations Bézier curves; control points in presentations mw made "line contours..." a two level entryremoved "placeholder" entries, see i81634 -View -Specifies the available display modes. By selecting an alternative display, you can speed up the screen display while editing your presentation. -
removed 4 options, see i81634Display -Rulers visible -Specifies whether to display the rulers at the top and to the left of the work area. +View +Specifies the available display modes. By selecting an alternative display, you can speed up the screen display while editing your presentation. +
removed 4 options, see i81634Display +Rulers visible +Specifies whether to display the rulers at the top and to the left of the work area. -Helplines While Moving -Specifies whether to display guides when moving an object. +Helplines While Moving +Specifies whether to display guides when moving an object. -%PRODUCTNAME creates dotted guides that extend beyond the box containing the selected object and which cover the entire work area, helping you position the object. +%PRODUCTNAME creates dotted guides that extend beyond the box containing the selected object and which cover the entire work area, helping you position the object. -You also can use this function through the icon +You also can use this function through the icon icon icon with the same name in the Options bar if a presentation or a drawing document is opened. -All control points in Bézier editor -Displays the control points of all Bézier points if you have previously selected a Bézier curve. If the All control points in Bézier editor option is not marked, only the control points of the selected Bézier points will be visible. -Contour of each individual object -%PRODUCTNAME displays the contour line of each individual object when moving this object. The Contour of each individual object option enables you to see if single objects conflict with other objects in the target position. If you do not mark the Contour of each individual object option, %PRODUCTNAME only displays a square contour that includes all selected objects. +All control points in Bézier editor +Displays the control points of all Bézier points if you have previously selected a Bézier curve. If the All control points in Bézier editor option is not marked, only the control points of the selected Bézier points will be visible. +Contour of each individual object +%PRODUCTNAME displays the contour line of each individual object when moving this object. The Contour of each individual object option enables you to see if single objects conflict with other objects in the target position. If you do not mark the Contour of each individual object option, %PRODUCTNAME only displays a square contour that includes all selected objects. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp index 4fbffe51e6..ecd6c08106 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp @@ -32,79 +32,70 @@ points;reducing editing points when snapping (Impress/Draw) -Grid - Defines the grid settings for creating and moving objects. +Grid + Defines the grid settings for creating and moving objects.
- If you have activated the snap grid but wish to move or create individual objects without snap positions, keep the Shift key pressed to deactivate this function for as long as needed. + If you have activated the snap grid but wish to move or create individual objects without snap positions, keep the Shift key pressed to deactivate this function for as long as needed. - Snap + Snap -To snap lines - Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap line when you release the mouse. +To snap lines + Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap line when you release the mouse. - You can also define this setting by using the Snap to Snap Lines + You can also define this setting by using the Snap to Snap Lines Snap to Snap Lines Snap to Snap Lines icon, which is available in the Options bar in a presentation or drawing document. -To the page margins - Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin. +To the page margins + Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin. - The cursor or a contour line of the graphics object must be in the snap range. + The cursor or a contour line of the graphics object must be in the snap range. - In a presentation or drawing document, this function can also be accessed with the Snap to Page Margins + In a presentation or drawing document, this function can also be accessed with the Snap to Page Margins Snap to Page Margins Snap to Page Margins icon in the Options bar. -To object frame - Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest graphic object. +To object frame + Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest graphic object. - The cursor or a contour line of the graphics object must be in the snap range. + The cursor or a contour line of the graphics object must be in the snap range. - In a presentation or drawing document, this function can also be accessed with the Snap to Object Border + In a presentation or drawing document, this function can also be accessed with the Snap to Object Border Snap to Object Border Snap to Object Border icon in the Options bar. -To object points - Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest graphic object. +To object points + Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest graphic object. - This only applies if the cursor or a contour line of the graphics object is in the snap range. + This only applies if the cursor or a contour line of the graphics object is in the snap range. - In a presentation or drawing document, this function can also be accessed with the Snap to Object Points + In a presentation or drawing document, this function can also be accessed with the Snap to Object Points Snap to Object Points Snap to Object Points icon in the Options bar. -Snap range - Defines the snap distance between the mouse pointer and the object contour. $[officename] Impress snaps to a snap point if the mouse pointer is nearer than the distance selected in the Snap range control. - Snap position +Snap range + Defines the snap distance between the mouse pointer and the object contour. $[officename] Impress snaps to a snap point if the mouse pointer is nearer than the distance selected in the Snap range control. + Snap position -When creating or moving objects - Specifies that graphic objects are restricted vertically, horizontally or diagonally (45°) when creating or moving them. You can temporarily deactivate this setting by pressing the Shift key. +When creating or moving objects + Specifies that graphic objects are restricted vertically, horizontally or diagonally (45°) when creating or moving them. You can temporarily deactivate this setting by pressing the Shift key. -Extend edges - Specifies that a square is created based on the longer side of a rectangle when the Shift key is pressed before you release the mouse button. This also applies to an ellipse (a circle will be created based on the longest diameter of the ellipse). When the Extend edges box is not marked, a square or a circle will be created based on the shorter side or diameter. +Extend edges + Specifies that a square is created based on the longer side of a rectangle when the Shift key is pressed before you release the mouse button. This also applies to an ellipse (a circle will be created based on the longest diameter of the ellipse). When the Extend edges box is not marked, a square or a circle will be created based on the shorter side or diameter. -When rotating - Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that you selected in the When rotating control. If you want to rotate an object outside the defined angle, press the Shift key when rotating. Release the key when the desired rotation angle is reached. +When rotating + Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that you selected in the When rotating control. If you want to rotate an object outside the defined angle, press the Shift key when rotating. Release the key when the desired rotation angle is reached. -Point reduction - Defines the angle for point reduction. When working with polygons, you might find it useful to reduce their editing points. +Point reduction + Defines the angle for point reduction. When working with polygons, you might find it useful to reduce their editing points. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp index 044fdfe2ff..96778b0414 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp @@ -44,51 +44,51 @@ fitting to pages; print settings in presentations printing; tiling pages in presentations MW made "page name printing..." a two level entry -Print -Specifies print settings within a drawing or presentation document. +Print +Specifies print settings within a drawing or presentation document.
-
removed contents-to-print section for impress, i85723Print -Defines additional elements to be printed on the page margin. -Page name -Specifies whether to print the page name. -Date -Specifies whether to print the current date. -Time -Specifies whether to print the current time. -Hidden pages -Specifies whether to print the pages that are currently hidden from the presentation. -Quality -See also . -Default -Specifies that you want to print in original colors. -Grayscale -Specifies that you want to print colors as grayscale. -Black & white -Specifies that you want to print the document in black and white. -Page options -Define additional options for printing the pages. -Default -Specifies that you do not want to further scale pages when printing. -Fit to page +
removed contents-to-print section for impress, i85723Print +Defines additional elements to be printed on the page margin. +Page name +Specifies whether to print the page name. +Date +Specifies whether to print the current date. +Time +Specifies whether to print the current time. +Hidden pages +Specifies whether to print the pages that are currently hidden from the presentation. +Quality +See also . +Default +Specifies that you want to print in original colors. +Grayscale +Specifies that you want to print colors as grayscale. +Black & white +Specifies that you want to print the document in black and white. +Page options +Define additional options for printing the pages. +Default +Specifies that you do not want to further scale pages when printing. +Fit to page
-Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer, so that they fit on the paper in the printer. +Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer, so that they fit on the paper in the printer.
-Tile pages -Specifies that pages are to be printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than the paper, several pages or slides will be printed on one page of paper. -Brochure -Select the Brochure option to print the document in brochure format. You can also decide if you want to print the front, the back or both sides of the brochure. +Tile pages +Specifies that pages are to be printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than the paper, several pages or slides will be printed on one page of paper. +Brochure +Select the Brochure option to print the document in brochure format. You can also decide if you want to print the front, the back or both sides of the brochure. -Front -Select Front to print the front of a brochure. -Back -Select Back to print the back of a brochure. -Paper tray from printer settings -Determines that the paper tray to be used is the one defined in the printer setup. +Front +Select Front to print the front of a brochure. +Back +Select Back to print the back of a brochure. +Paper tray from printer settings +Determines that the paper tray to be used is the one defined in the printer setup. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp index d6df1c7908..7ecb8c5c00 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp @@ -36,71 +36,71 @@ text objects; in presentations and drawings -General -Defines the general options for drawing or presentation documents. +General +Defines the general options for drawing or presentation documents.
-Text objects +Text objects -Allow quick editing -If on, you can edit text immediately after clicking a text object. If off, you must double-click to edit text. +Allow quick editing +If on, you can edit text immediately after clicking a text object. If off, you must double-click to edit text. - + In a presentation or drawing document, you can also activate the text editing mode through the Allow Quick Editing icon in the Option bar. -Only text area selectable -Specifies whether to select a text frame by clicking the text. +Only text area selectable +Specifies whether to select a text frame by clicking the text. -In the area of the text frame that is not filled with text, an object behind the text frame can be selected. +In the area of the text frame that is not filled with text, an object behind the text frame can be selected. - + In a presentation or drawing document, you can also activate this mode through the Select Text Area Only icon in the Option bar. -New document (only in presentations) +New document (only in presentations) -Start with Wizard -Specifies whether to activate the Wizard when opening a presentation with File - New - Presentation. -Settings +Start with Wizard +Specifies whether to activate the Wizard when opening a presentation with File - New - Presentation. +Settings -Use background cache -Specifies whether to use the cache for displaying objects on the master page. This speeds up the display. Unmark the Use background cache option if you want to display changing contents on the master page. +Use background cache +Specifies whether to use the cache for displaying objects on the master page. This speeds up the display. Unmark the Use background cache option if you want to display changing contents on the master page. -Copy when moving -If enabled, a copy is created when you move an object while holding down the CommandCtrl key. The same will apply for rotating and resizing the object. The original object will remain in its current position and size. +Copy when moving +If enabled, a copy is created when you move an object while holding down the CommandCtrl key. The same will apply for rotating and resizing the object. The original object will remain in its current position and size. -Objects always moveable -Specifies that you want to move an object with the Rotate tool enabled. If Object always moveable is not marked, the Rotate tool can only be used to rotate an object. +Objects always moveable +Specifies that you want to move an object with the Rotate tool enabled. If Object always moveable is not marked, the Rotate tool can only be used to rotate an object. -Do not distort objects in curve (only in drawings) -Maintains relative alignment of Bézier points and 2D drawing objects to each other when you distort the object. +Do not distort objects in curve (only in drawings) +Maintains relative alignment of Bézier points and 2D drawing objects to each other when you distort the object. -Unit of measurement -Determines the Unit of measurement for presentations. +Unit of measurement +Determines the Unit of measurement for presentations. -Tab stops -Defines the spacing between tab stops. -Presentation (only in presentations) -Enable remote control -Specifies that you want to enable Bluetooth remote control while Impress is running. Unmark Enable remote control to disable remote controlling. -Scale (only in drawings) +Tab stops +Defines the spacing between tab stops. +Presentation (only in presentations) +Enable remote control +Specifies that you want to enable Bluetooth remote control while Impress is running. Unmark Enable remote control to disable remote controlling. +Scale (only in drawings) -Drawing scale -Determines the drawing scale on the rulers. -Compatibility (document specific settings) -The settings in this area are valid for the current document only. +Drawing scale +Determines the drawing scale on the rulers. +Compatibility (document specific settings) +The settings in this area are valid for the current document only. -Add spacing between paragraphs in the current document -Specifies that $[officename] Impress calculates the paragraph spacing exactly like Microsoft PowerPoint. -Microsoft PowerPoint adds the bottom spacing of a paragraph to the top spacing of the next paragraph to calculate the total spacing between both paragraphs. $[officename] Impress utilizes only the larger of the two spacings. +Add spacing between paragraphs in the current document +Specifies that $[officename] Impress calculates the paragraph spacing exactly like Microsoft PowerPoint. +Microsoft PowerPoint adds the bottom spacing of a paragraph to the top spacing of the next paragraph to calculate the total spacing between both paragraphs. $[officename] Impress utilizes only the larger of the two spacings. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01080000.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01080000.xhp index 2da1a6f574..5383e1c791 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01080000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01080000.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@ -%PRODUCTNAME Draw Options -Defines the global settings for drawing documents, including the contents to be displayed, the scale to be used, the grid alignment and the contents to be printed by default. +%PRODUCTNAME Draw Options +Defines the global settings for drawing documents, including the contents to be displayed, the scale to be used, the grid alignment and the contents to be printed by default.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp index faca4e236b..eaea51d1f5 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp @@ -32,13 +32,13 @@ -%PRODUCTNAME Math Options -Defines the print format and print options for all new formula documents. These options apply when you print a formula directly from %PRODUCTNAME Math. +%PRODUCTNAME Math Options +Defines the print format and print options for all new formula documents. These options apply when you print a formula directly from %PRODUCTNAME Math. You can also call the dialog by clicking the Options button in the Print dialog. The settings you define in the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options dialog will be permanent settings, whereas the settings in the Print dialog are only valid for the current document.
-Options +Options diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp index 8ecea5fafe..def3baaec5 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp @@ -42,33 +42,33 @@ fitting to pages;print settings in Math mw inserted "fitting..." -Settings -Defines formula settings that will be valid for all documents. +Settings +Defines formula settings that will be valid for all documents.
-Print options -Title -Specifies whether you want the name of the document to be included in the printout. -Formula text -Specifies whether to include the contents of the Commands window at the bottom of the printout. -Border -Applies a thin border to the formula area in the printout. Title and Formula text are only set down by a frame if the corresponding check box is active. -Print format -Original size -Prints the formula without adjusting the current font size. It is possible that with large formulas a part of the command text is cut off. -Fit to size -Adjusts the formula to the page format used in the printout. The real size will be determined by the used paper format. +Print options +Title +Specifies whether you want the name of the document to be included in the printout. +Formula text +Specifies whether to include the contents of the Commands window at the bottom of the printout. +Border +Applies a thin border to the formula area in the printout. Title and Formula text are only set down by a frame if the corresponding check box is active. +Print format +Original size +Prints the formula without adjusting the current font size. It is possible that with large formulas a part of the command text is cut off. +Fit to size +Adjusts the formula to the page format used in the printout. The real size will be determined by the used paper format. -Scaling -Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified enlargement factor. Type the desired enlargement factor directly in the Scaling control, or set the value using the arrow buttons. -Other options -Ignore ~ and ' at the end of the line -Specifies that these space wildcards will be removed if they are at the end of a line. In earlier versions of $[officename], adding such characters at the end of a line prevented the right edge of the formula from being cut off during printing. +Scaling +Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified enlargement factor. Type the desired enlargement factor directly in the Scaling control, or set the value using the arrow buttons. +Other options +Ignore ~ and ' at the end of the line +Specifies that these space wildcards will be removed if they are at the end of a line. In earlier versions of $[officename], adding such characters at the end of a line prevented the right edge of the formula from being cut off during printing. -Embed only used symbols (smaller file size) -Saves only those symbols with each formula that are used in that formula. In earlier versions of $[officename], all symbols were saved with each formula. +Embed only used symbols (smaller file size) +Saves only those symbols with each formula that are used in that formula. In earlier versions of $[officename], all symbols were saved with each formula. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01110000.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01110000.xhp index b4b4673b52..f383d5238e 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01110000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01110000.xhp @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ - Chart options + Chart options Defines the general settings for charts.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01110100.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01110100.xhp index 12cb997542..788c4f6a3b 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01110100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01110100.xhp @@ -34,17 +34,17 @@ colors;charts -Default colors -Assigns colors to the data rows. The settings only apply for all newly created charts. +Default colors +Assigns colors to the data rows. The settings only apply for all newly created charts.
-Chart colors -Displays all the colors available for the data series. Select a data series to change its color. Select the desired color from the adjacent color table. -Color table -This table is used as a means of replacing the chart colors for the selected data rows. For example, if you selected data row 6 and then click on the color green 8, the old color of the data row is replaced by green 8. The name of the selected color is shown below the color table. -Default -Restores the color settings that were defined when the program was installed. +Chart colors +Displays all the colors available for the data series. Select a data series to change its color. Select the desired color from the adjacent color table. +Color table +This table is used as a means of replacing the chart colors for the selected data rows. For example, if you selected data row 6 and then click on the color green 8, the old color of the data row is replaced by green 8. The name of the selected color is shown below the color table. +Default +Restores the color settings that were defined when the program was installed. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01130100.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01130100.xhp index a406832174..c0c32e4f0c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01130100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01130100.xhp @@ -36,56 +36,50 @@ Visual Basic for Applications; loading/saving documents with VBA code -VBA Properties - Specifies the general properties for loading and saving Microsoft Office documents with VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code. +VBA Properties + Specifies the general properties for loading and saving Microsoft Office documents with VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code.
- Microsoft Word 97/2000/XP - Select the settings for Microsoft Word documents. + Microsoft Word 97/2000/XP + Select the settings for Microsoft Word documents. -Load Basic code - Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub. You can edit the code. When saving the document in $[officename] format, the Basic code is saved as well. When saving in another format, the Basic code from the $[officename] Basic IDE is not saved. +Load Basic code + Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub. You can edit the code. When saving the document in $[officename] format, the Basic code is saved as well. When saving in another format, the Basic code from the $[officename] Basic IDE is not saved. -Save original Basic code +Save original Basic code
- Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with the code in an unchanged form. - When saving in another format than Microsoft Format, the Microsoft Basic Code is not saved. For example, if the document contains Microsoft Basic Code and you save it in $[officename] format, you will be warned that the Microsoft Basic Code will not be saved. - The Save original Basic code checkbox takes precedence over the Load Basic code check box. If both boxes are marked and you edit the disabled Basic Code in the $[officename] Basic IDE, the original Microsoft Basic code will be saved when saving in the Microsoft format. A message appears to inform you of this. - To remove any possible Microsoft Basic macro viruses from the Microsoft document, unmark the Save Original Basic Code check box and save the document in Microsoft format. The document will be saved without the Microsoft Basic code. + Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with the code in an unchanged form. + When saving in another format than Microsoft Format, the Microsoft Basic Code is not saved. For example, if the document contains Microsoft Basic Code and you save it in $[officename] format, you will be warned that the Microsoft Basic Code will not be saved. + The Save original Basic code checkbox takes precedence over the Load Basic code check box. If both boxes are marked and you edit the disabled Basic Code in the $[officename] Basic IDE, the original Microsoft Basic code will be saved when saving in the Microsoft format. A message appears to inform you of this. + To remove any possible Microsoft Basic macro viruses from the Microsoft document, unmark the Save Original Basic Code check box and save the document in Microsoft format. The document will be saved without the Microsoft Basic code.
- Microsoft Excel 97/2000/XP - Specifies the settings for documents in Microsoft Excel. - Load Basic code + Microsoft Excel 97/2000/XP + Specifies the settings for documents in Microsoft Excel. + Load Basic code -Executable code - The VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code will be loaded ready to be executed. If this checkbox is not checked, the VBA code will be commented out so it can be inspected, but will not run. - Save original Basic code +Executable code + The VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code will be loaded ready to be executed. If this checkbox is not checked, the VBA code will be commented out so it can be inspected, but will not run. + Save original Basic code - Microsoft PowerPoint 97/2000/XP - Specifies the settings for documents in Microsoft PowerPoint. - Load Basic code + Microsoft PowerPoint 97/2000/XP + Specifies the settings for documents in Microsoft PowerPoint. + Load Basic code - Save original Basic code + Save original Basic code
- Setting the default file format + Setting the default file format
diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01130200.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01130200.xhp index 01ade1bebc..10d9d63014 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01130200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01130200.xhp @@ -29,25 +29,25 @@
- Microsoft Office - Specifies the settings for importing and exporting Microsoft Office documents. + Microsoft Office + Specifies the settings for importing and exporting Microsoft Office documents.
- Embedded Objects - The Embedded Objects section specifies how to import and export Microsoft Office OLE objects. - These settings are valid when no Microsoft OLE server exists (for example, in UNIX) or when there is no $[officename] OLE server ready for editing the OLE objects. - If an OLE server is active for the embedded object, then the OLE server will be used to handle the object. - If no OLE server is active for MathType objects, then embedded MathType objects can be converted to %PRODUCTNAME Math objects. For this conversion, the embedded MathType objects must not exceed the MathType 3.1 specifications.mail answer by Thomas Lange re i97686 + Embedded Objects + The Embedded Objects section specifies how to import and export Microsoft Office OLE objects. + These settings are valid when no Microsoft OLE server exists (for example, in UNIX) or when there is no $[officename] OLE server ready for editing the OLE objects. + If an OLE server is active for the embedded object, then the OLE server will be used to handle the object. + If no OLE server is active for MathType objects, then embedded MathType objects can be converted to %PRODUCTNAME Math objects. For this conversion, the embedded MathType objects must not exceed the MathType 3.1 specifications.mail answer by Thomas Lange re i97686 -List Box - The List Box field displays the entries for the pair of OLE objects that can be converted when loading into $[officename] (L) and/or when saving into a Microsoft format (S). - Mark the box in the [L] column in front of the entry if a Microsoft OLE object is to be converted into the specified $[officename] OLE object when a Microsoft document is loaded into $[officename]. - Mark the box in the [S] column in front of the entry if a $[officename] OLE object is to be converted into the specified Microsoft OLE object when a document is saved in a Microsoft file format. +List Box + The List Box field displays the entries for the pair of OLE objects that can be converted when loading into $[officename] (L) and/or when saving into a Microsoft format (S). + Mark the box in the [L] column in front of the entry if a Microsoft OLE object is to be converted into the specified $[officename] OLE object when a Microsoft document is loaded into $[officename]. + Mark the box in the [S] column in front of the entry if a $[officename] OLE object is to be converted into the specified Microsoft OLE object when a document is saved in a Microsoft file format. -Character Background - Microsoft Office has two character attributes similar to $[officename] character background. Select the appropriate attribute (highlighting or shading) which you would like to use during export to Microsoft Office file formats. +Character Background + Microsoft Office has two character attributes similar to $[officename] character background. Select the appropriate attribute (highlighting or shading) which you would like to use during export to Microsoft Office file formats. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01140000.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01140000.xhp index a59269152a..45af3124d0 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01140000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01140000.xhp @@ -41,72 +41,63 @@ date acceptance patterns -Languages - Defines the default languages and some other locale settings for documents. +Languages + Defines the default languages and some other locale settings for documents.
- Language of + Language of -User interface - Select the language used for the user interface, for example menus, dialogs, help files. You must have installed at least one additional language pack or a multi-language version of %PRODUCTNAME. - The "Default" entry selects the language of the user interface for the operating system. If this language is not available in the %PRODUCTNAME installation, the language of the %PRODUCTNAME installation is the default language. +User interface + Select the language used for the user interface, for example menus, dialogs, help files. You must have installed at least one additional language pack or a multi-language version of %PRODUCTNAME. + The "Default" entry selects the language of the user interface for the operating system. If this language is not available in the %PRODUCTNAME installation, the language of the %PRODUCTNAME installation is the default language. -Locale setting - Specifies the locale setting of the country setting. This influences settings for numbering, currency and units of measure. - The "Default" entry selects the locale setting that is selected for the operating system. - A change in this field is immediately applicable. However, some formats that were formatted by default change only if the document is newly loaded. +Locale setting + Specifies the locale setting of the country setting. This influences settings for numbering, currency and units of measure. + The "Default" entry selects the locale setting that is selected for the operating system. + A change in this field is immediately applicable. However, some formats that were formatted by default change only if the document is newly loaded. -Decimal separator key - Same as locale setting - Specifies to use the decimal separator key that is set in your system when you press the respective key on the number pad. - If this checkbox is activated, the character shown after "Same as locale setting" is inserted when you press the key on the number pad. If this checkbox is not activated, the character that your keyboard driver software provides is inserted. +Decimal separator key - Same as locale setting + Specifies to use the decimal separator key that is set in your system when you press the respective key on the number pad. + If this checkbox is activated, the character shown after "Same as locale setting" is inserted when you press the key on the number pad. If this checkbox is not activated, the character that your keyboard driver software provides is inserted. -Default currency - Specifies the default currency that is used for the currency format and the currency fields. If you change the locale setting, the default currency changes automatically. - The default entry applies to the currency format that is assigned to the selected locale setting. - A change in Default currency field will be transmitted to all open documents and will lead to corresponding changes in the dialogs and icons that control the currency format in these documents. +Default currency + Specifies the default currency that is used for the currency format and the currency fields. If you change the locale setting, the default currency changes automatically. + The default entry applies to the currency format that is assigned to the selected locale setting. + A change in Default currency field will be transmitted to all open documents and will lead to corresponding changes in the dialogs and icons that control the currency format in these documents. Date acceptance patterns Specifies the date acceptance patterns for the current locale. Calc spreadsheet and Writer table cell input needs to match locale dependent date acceptance patterns before it is recognized as a valid date. Default locale dependent date acceptance patterns are generated build time, but it is possible to add more or modify them in this edit box. Additionally to the date acceptance patterns defined here, every locale accepts input in an ISO 8601 Y-M-D pattern, and since %PRODUCTNAME 3.5 that also leads to the YYYY-MM-DD format being applied. Syntax: Y means year, M means month, and D means day, regardless of localizaton. - Default languages for documents - Specifies the languages for spellchecking, thesaurus and hyphenation. + Default languages for documents + Specifies the languages for spellchecking, thesaurus and hyphenation.
- The spellcheck for the selected language only functions when you have installed the corresponding language module. + The spellcheck for the selected language only functions when you have installed the corresponding language module.
-Western - Specifies the language used for the spellcheck function in western alphabets. +Western + Specifies the language used for the spellcheck function in western alphabets. -Asian - Specifies the language used for the spellcheck function in Asian alphabets. +Asian + Specifies the language used for the spellcheck function in Asian alphabets. -CTL - Specifies the language for the complex text layout spellcheck. +CTL + Specifies the language for the complex text layout spellcheck. -For the current document only - Specifies that the settings for default languages are valid only for the current document. - Enhanced language support +For the current document only + Specifies that the settings for default languages are valid only for the current document. + Enhanced language support -Show UI elements for East Asian writings - Activates Asian languages support. You can now modify the corresponding Asian language settings in %PRODUCTNAME. - If you want to write in Chinese, Japanese or Korean, you can activate the support for these languages in the user interface. +Show UI elements for East Asian writings + Activates Asian languages support. You can now modify the corresponding Asian language settings in %PRODUCTNAME. + If you want to write in Chinese, Japanese or Korean, you can activate the support for these languages in the user interface. -Show UI elements for Bi-Directional writing - Activates complex text layout support. You can now modify the settings corresponding to complex text layout in %PRODUCTNAME. +Show UI elements for Bi-Directional writing + Activates complex text layout support. You can now modify the settings corresponding to complex text layout in %PRODUCTNAME. Ignore system input language diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01150000.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01150000.xhp index 0d08ea3764..b2204c16ea 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01150000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01150000.xhp @@ -30,10 +30,10 @@ languages;setting options -mw changed index entryLanguage Setting Options -Defines the properties for additional languages. +mw changed index entryLanguage Setting Options +Defines the properties for additional languages. -The Searching in Japanese and Asian Layout tab pages are only visible if the Asian language support option in the Languages tab page is activated and the Options dialog is re-opened. The Complex Text Layout tab page is only visible if the CTL support is enabled. +The Searching in Japanese and Asian Layout tab pages are only visible if the Asian language support option in the Languages tab page is activated and the Options dialog is re-opened. The Complex Text Layout tab page is only visible if the CTL support is enabled.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01150100.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01150100.xhp index 77ddd22fea..18a21b99fe 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01150100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01150100.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@
-Asian Layout -Defines the typographic default settings for Asian text. +Asian Layout +Defines the typographic default settings for Asian text.
@@ -41,38 +41,38 @@
kerning;Asian texts -Kerning -Defines the default settings for kerning between individual characters. +Kerning +Defines the default settings for kerning between individual characters. Western text only -Specifies that kerning is only applied to western text. +Specifies that kerning is only applied to western text. -Western text and Asian punctuation -Specifies that kerning is applied to both western text and Asian punctuation. -Character spacing -Defines the default settings for character spacing in Asian texts, cells, and drawing objects. +Western text and Asian punctuation +Specifies that kerning is applied to both western text and Asian punctuation. +Character spacing +Defines the default settings for character spacing in Asian texts, cells, and drawing objects. -No compression -Specifies that no compression at all will occur. +No compression +Specifies that no compression at all will occur. -Compress only punctuation -Specifies that only the punctuation is compressed. +Compress only punctuation +Specifies that only the punctuation is compressed. -Compress punctuation and Japanese Kana -Specifies that punctuation and Japanese Kana are compressed. -First and last characters -Defines the default settings for 'first' and 'last' characters. In the dialog that appears when you choose Format -Asian Typography, you can specify whether the list of forbidden characters applies to those at the beginning or end of a line in a paragraph. +Compress punctuation and Japanese Kana +Specifies that punctuation and Japanese Kana are compressed. +First and last characters +Defines the default settings for 'first' and 'last' characters. In the dialog that appears when you choose Format -Asian Typography, you can specify whether the list of forbidden characters applies to those at the beginning or end of a line in a paragraph. -Language -Specifies the language for which you want to define first and last characters. +Language +Specifies the language for which you want to define first and last characters. -Default -When you mark Default, the following two text boxes are filled with the default characters for the selected language: +Default +When you mark Default, the following two text boxes are filled with the default characters for the selected language: -Not at start of line: -Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the beginning of a line. If a character typed here is positioned at the beginning of a line after a line break, it is automatically moved to the end of the previous line. For example, an exclamation point at the end of a sentence never appears at the start of a line if it is part of the Not at start of line list. +Not at start of line: +Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the beginning of a line. If a character typed here is positioned at the beginning of a line after a line break, it is automatically moved to the end of the previous line. For example, an exclamation point at the end of a sentence never appears at the start of a line if it is part of the Not at start of line list. -Not at end of line: -Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the end of a line. If a character typed here is positioned at the end of a line due to a line break, it is automatically moved to the beginning of the next line. For example, a currency symbol that appears in front of an amount never appears at the end of a line if it is part of the Not at end of line list. +Not at end of line: +Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the end of a line. If a character typed here is positioned at the end of a line due to a line break, it is automatically moved to the beginning of the next line. For example, a currency symbol that appears in front of an amount never appears at the end of a line if it is part of the Not at end of line list. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01150200.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01150200.xhp index 5206632aad..65bea5ce5d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01150200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01150200.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
- Searching in Japanese - Defines the search options for Japanese. + Searching in Japanese + Defines the search options for Japanese.
@@ -58,13 +58,13 @@ - Treat as equal - Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search. + Treat as equal + Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search. - Ignore - Specifies the characters to be ignored. + Ignore + Specifies the characters to be ignored.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp index a5a26c2951..4f018e16ca 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp @@ -34,45 +34,45 @@ CTL; options -Complex Text Layout -Defines the options for documents with complex text layouts. +Complex Text Layout +Defines the options for documents with complex text layouts.
-Sequence checking -In languages such as Thai, rules specify that certain characters are not allowed next to other characters. If Sequence Input Checking (SIC) is enabled, %PRODUCTNAME will not allow a character next to another if this is forbidden by a rule. +Sequence checking +In languages such as Thai, rules specify that certain characters are not allowed next to other characters. If Sequence Input Checking (SIC) is enabled, %PRODUCTNAME will not allow a character next to another if this is forbidden by a rule. -Use sequence checking -Enables sequence input checking for languages such as Thai. - +Use sequence checking +Enables sequence input checking for languages such as Thai. + -Restricted -Prevents the use as well as the printing of illegal character combinations. -Cursor control -Select the type of text cursor movement and text selection for mixed text (right-to-left mixed with left-to-right text direction). +Restricted +Prevents the use as well as the printing of illegal character combinations. +Cursor control +Select the type of text cursor movement and text selection for mixed text (right-to-left mixed with left-to-right text direction). -Logical -Pressing the Right Arrow key moves the text cursor toward the end of the current text. Pressing the Left Arrow key moves the text cursor toward the beginning of the current text. +Logical +Pressing the Right Arrow key moves the text cursor toward the end of the current text. Pressing the Left Arrow key moves the text cursor toward the beginning of the current text. -Visual -Pressing the Right Arrow key moves the text cursor in the right-hand direction. Pressing the Left Arrow key moves the text cursor in the left-hand direction. -General options +Visual +Pressing the Right Arrow key moves the text cursor in the right-hand direction. Pressing the Left Arrow key moves the text cursor in the left-hand direction. +General options -Numerals (in text only) -Selects the type of numerals used within text, text in objects, fields, and controls, in all %PRODUCTNAME modules. Only cell contents of %PRODUCTNAME Calc are not affected.UFI: see http://www.webster-dictionary.org/definition/Indian%20numerals +Numerals (in text only) +Selects the type of numerals used within text, text in objects, fields, and controls, in all %PRODUCTNAME modules. Only cell contents of %PRODUCTNAME Calc are not affected.UFI: see http://www.webster-dictionary.org/definition/Indian%20numerals -Arabic: All numbers are shown using Arabic numerals. This is the default. +Arabic: All numbers are shown using Arabic numerals. This is the default. -Hindi: All numbers are shown using Hindi numerals. +Hindi: All numbers are shown using Hindi numerals. -System: All numbers are shown using Arabic or Hindi numerals, according to the locale settings defined by your system locale. +System: All numbers are shown using Arabic or Hindi numerals, according to the locale settings defined by your system locale. -This setting is not saved in the document but in the %PRODUCTNAME configuration. +This setting is not saved in the document but in the %PRODUCTNAME configuration. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01160000.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01160000.xhp index 436774d998..631ce04308 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01160000.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01160000.xhp @@ -30,8 +30,8 @@ -Data sources options -Defines the general settings for the data sources in $[officename]. +Data sources options +Defines the general settings for the data sources in $[officename].
diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01160100.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01160100.xhp index 07e0873ad0..ae37eafb01 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01160100.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01160100.xhp @@ -37,26 +37,26 @@ data sources; connection settings (Base) -Connections -Defines how the connections to data sources are pooled. +Connections +Defines how the connections to data sources are pooled.
-The Connections facility allows you to stipulate that connections that are no longer needed are not deleted immediately, but are kept freeUFI: better: idle ? for a certain period of time. If a new connection to the data source is needed in that period, the free connection can be used for this purpose. +The Connections facility allows you to stipulate that connections that are no longer needed are not deleted immediately, but are kept freeUFI: better: idle ? for a certain period of time. If a new connection to the data source is needed in that period, the free connection can be used for this purpose.
-Connection Pool +Connection Pool -Connection pooling enabled -Specifies whether the chosen connections are pooled. -Drivers known in $[officename] -Displays a list of defined drivers and connection data. -Current driver -The currently selected driver is displayed below the list. +Connection pooling enabled +Specifies whether the chosen connections are pooled. +Drivers known in $[officename] +Displays a list of defined drivers and connection data. +Current driver +The currently selected driver is displayed below the list. -Enable pooling for this driver -Select a driver from the list and mark the Enable pooling for this driver checkbox in order to pool its connection. +Enable pooling for this driver +Select a driver from the list and mark the Enable pooling for this driver checkbox in order to pool its connection. -Timeout (seconds) -Defines the time in seconds after which a pooled connection is freed. The time can be anywhere between 30 and 600 seconds. +Timeout (seconds) +Defines the time in seconds after which a pooled connection is freed. The time can be anywhere between 30 and 600 seconds. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp index 3caa559c22..e95443025c 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp @@ -31,23 +31,23 @@
MW deleted "registered databases (Base)" and "databases;" and copied "lists;" to Shared guide data_register.xhp -Databases -Add, modify, or remove entries to the list of registered databases. You must register a database within %PRODUCTNAME in order to see it in the View - Data sources window. +Databases +Add, modify, or remove entries to the list of registered databases. You must register a database within %PRODUCTNAME in order to see it in the View - Data sources window.
-Registered Databases -Lists the registered name and database file of all registered databases. Double-click an entry to edit. +Registered Databases +Lists the registered name and database file of all registered databases. Double-click an entry to edit. -New -Opens the Database Link dialog to create a new entry. +New +Opens the Database Link dialog to create a new entry. -Delete -Removes the selected entry from the list. +Delete +Removes the selected entry from the list. -Edit -Opens the Database Link dialog to edit the selected entry. +Edit +Opens the Database Link dialog to edit the selected entry. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/01160201.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/01160201.xhp index 944ee613ae..23ba9bc359 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/01160201.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/01160201.xhp @@ -27,17 +27,17 @@ -Database Link +Database Link should be New Database Link or Edit Database Link, respective to the button that was clicked -Creates or edits an entry in the Databases tab page. -Database file -Enter the path and the file name of the database file. The name of the file must end with the *.odb extension. +Creates or edits an entry in the Databases tab page. +Database file +Enter the path and the file name of the database file. The name of the file must end with the *.odb extension. -Browse -Opens a file dialog where you can select the database file. +Browse +Opens a file dialog where you can select the database file. -Registered name -Enter a name for the database. %PRODUCTNAME uses this name to access the database. +Registered name +Enter a name for the database. %PRODUCTNAME uses this name to access the database. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/javaclasspath.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/javaclasspath.xhp index 47dbfc3970..ccda9cb955 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/javaclasspath.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/javaclasspath.xhp @@ -31,23 +31,23 @@ -Class Path -You use this dialog to add folders and archives to the Java class path. These paths are valid for any JRE that you start. +Class Path +You use this dialog to add folders and archives to the Java class path. These paths are valid for any JRE that you start.
-Assigned folders and archives -Specifies the location of Java classes or Java class libraries. The new classpath becomes valid after you restart %PRODUCTNAME.UFI: moved these paras here from the Security tab page -Java classes that are accessed through the classpath do not undergo a security check.UFI: moved these paras here from the Security tab page +Assigned folders and archives +Specifies the location of Java classes or Java class libraries. The new classpath becomes valid after you restart %PRODUCTNAME.UFI: moved these paras here from the Security tab page +Java classes that are accessed through the classpath do not undergo a security check.UFI: moved these paras here from the Security tab page -Add Archive -Select an archive file in jar or zip format and add the file to the class path. +Add Archive +Select an archive file in jar or zip format and add the file to the class path. -Add Folder -Select a folder and add the folder to the class path. +Add Folder +Select a folder and add the folder to the class path. -Remove -Select an archive or a folder in the list and click Remove to remove the object from the class path. +Remove +Select an archive or a folder in the list and click Remove to remove the object from the class path. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/javaparameters.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/javaparameters.xhp index b88d0f1893..4724e004de 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/javaparameters.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/javaparameters.xhp @@ -31,32 +31,32 @@ -Java Start Parameters -You can use this dialog to enter optional start parameters for the Java runtime environment (JRE). The settings that you specify in this dialog are valid for any JRE that you start. +Java Start Parameters +You can use this dialog to enter optional start parameters for the Java runtime environment (JRE). The settings that you specify in this dialog are valid for any JRE that you start.
-Java Start parameter -Enter a start parameter for a JRE as you would on a command line. Click Assign to add the parameter to the list of available start parameters. -Do not use escape characters or quotes in path names. -For example, to point the system property "myprop" to a folder, enter the following parameter: --Dmyprop=c:\program files\java -To enable debugging in a JRE, enter the following parameters: --Xdebug --Xrunjdwp:transport=dt_socket,server=y,address=8000 -These changes take effect after you restart %PRODUCTNAME. +Java Start parameter +Enter a start parameter for a JRE as you would on a command line. Click Assign to add the parameter to the list of available start parameters. +Do not use escape characters or quotes in path names. +For example, to point the system property "myprop" to a folder, enter the following parameter: +-Dmyprop=c:\program files\java +To enable debugging in a JRE, enter the following parameters: +-Xdebug +-Xrunjdwp:transport=dt_socket,server=y,address=8000 +These changes take effect after you restart %PRODUCTNAME. -Assigned start parameters -Lists the assigned JRE start parameters. To remove a start parameter, select the parameter, and then click Remove. +Assigned start parameters +Lists the assigned JRE start parameters. To remove a start parameter, select the parameter, and then click Remove. Add -Adds the current JRE start parameter to the list. +Adds the current JRE start parameter to the list. Edit Opens a dialog where the selected JRE start parameter can be edited. -Remove -Deletes the selected JRE start parameter. +Remove +Deletes the selected JRE start parameter. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp index 320c1ebb5f..7c47ddd15f 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp @@ -29,8 +29,8 @@ -Macro Security -The Macro Security dialog appears when a document contains one or more macros. You can also call the dialog from the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Security page. +Macro Security +The Macro Security dialog appears when a document contains one or more macros. You can also call the dialog from the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Security page.
diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_sl.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_sl.xhp index 21e4e2a64f..c27d40b83d 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_sl.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_sl.xhp @@ -32,24 +32,24 @@ levels;macro security -Security Level +Security Level -Select the macro security level from one of four options. The options differ according to the security level. Macros that are allowed to run on a higher security level are also allowed to run in all lower levels. +Select the macro security level from one of four options. The options differ according to the security level. Macros that are allowed to run on a higher security level are also allowed to run in all lower levels. -Very high -Only macros from trusted file locations are allowed to run. All other macros, regardless of whether they are signed or not, are disabled.UFI: for each option, the first para is copied from the string table. -Trusted file locations can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run. +Very high +Only macros from trusted file locations are allowed to run. All other macros, regardless of whether they are signed or not, are disabled.UFI: for each option, the first para is copied from the string table. +Trusted file locations can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run. -High -Only signed macros from trusted sources are allowed to run. Unsigned macros are disabled. -Trusted sources can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Only signed macros from a trusted source are allowed to run. In addition, any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run. +High +Only signed macros from trusted sources are allowed to run. Unsigned macros are disabled. +Trusted sources can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Only signed macros from a trusted source are allowed to run. In addition, any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run. -Medium -Confirmation required before executing macros from unknown sources. -Trusted sources can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Signed macros from a trusted source are allowed to run. In addition, any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run. All other macros require your confirmation. +Medium +Confirmation required before executing macros from unknown sources. +Trusted sources can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Signed macros from a trusted source are allowed to run. In addition, any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run. All other macros require your confirmation. -Low (not recommended) -All macros will be executed without confirmation. Use this setting only if you are certain that all documents that will be opened are safe. -A macro can be set to auto-start, and it can perform potentially damaging actions, as for example delete or rename files. This setting is not recommended when you open documents from other authors. +Low (not recommended) +All macros will be executed without confirmation. Use this setting only if you are certain that all documents that will be opened are safe. +A macro can be set to auto-start, and it can perform potentially damaging actions, as for example delete or rename files. This setting is not recommended when you open documents from other authors. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_ts.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_ts.xhp index 26f5ac694e..eec19e01df 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_ts.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_ts.xhp @@ -29,21 +29,21 @@ -Trusted Sources +Trusted Sources -Specifies the macro security settings for trusted certificates and trusted file locations. -Trusted certificates -Lists the trusted certificates. -View -Opens the View Certificate dialog for the selected certificate. -Remove -Removes the selected certificate from the list of trusted certificates. -Trusted file locations -Document macros are only executed if they have been opened from one of the following locations. -Add -Opens a folder selection dialog. Select a folder from which all macros are allowed to execute. -Remove -Removes the selected folder from the list of trusted file locations. +Specifies the macro security settings for trusted certificates and trusted file locations. +Trusted certificates +Lists the trusted certificates. +View +Opens the View Certificate dialog for the selected certificate. +Remove +Removes the selected certificate from the list of trusted certificates. +Trusted file locations +Document macros are only executed if they have been opened from one of the following locations. +Add +Opens a folder selection dialog. Select a folder from which all macros are allowed to execute. +Remove +Removes the selected folder from the list of trusted file locations. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/mailmerge.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/mailmerge.xhp index e6d7815e08..ae17ac2c86 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/mailmerge.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/mailmerge.xhp @@ -32,42 +32,42 @@
-Mail Merge E-mail -Specifies the user information and server settings for when you send form letters as e-mail messages. +Mail Merge E-mail +Specifies the user information and server settings for when you send form letters as e-mail messages.
-User information -Enter the user information to use when you send e-mail. +User information +Enter the user information to use when you send e-mail. -Your name -Enter your name. +Your name +Enter your name. -E-mail address -Enter your e-mail address for replies. +E-mail address +Enter your e-mail address for replies. -Send replies to different e-mail address -Uses the e-mail address that you enter in the Reply address text box as the reply-to e-mail address. +Send replies to different e-mail address +Uses the e-mail address that you enter in the Reply address text box as the reply-to e-mail address. -Reply address -Enter the address to use for e-mail replies. -Outgoing server (SMTP) settings -Specify the server settings for outgoing e-mails. +Reply address +Enter the address to use for e-mail replies. +Outgoing server (SMTP) settings +Specify the server settings for outgoing e-mails. -Server name -Enter the SMTP server name. +Server name +Enter the SMTP server name. -Port -Enter the SMTP port. +Port +Enter the SMTP port. -Use secure connection -When available, uses a secure connection to send e-mails. +Use secure connection +When available, uses a secure connection to send e-mails. -Server Authentication -Opens the Server Authentication dialog where you can specify the server authentication settings for secure e-mail. +Server Authentication +Opens the Server Authentication dialog where you can specify the server authentication settings for secure e-mail. -Test Settings -Opens the Test Account Settings dialog to test the current settings. +Test Settings +Opens the Test Account Settings dialog to test the current settings. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp index ae2bcc45b1..bff6c55240 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp @@ -35,40 +35,40 @@ updates; checking automatically Internet; checking for updates -Online Update +Online Update - Specifies some options for the automatic notification and downloading of online updates to %PRODUCTNAME. + Specifies some options for the automatic notification and downloading of online updates to %PRODUCTNAME.
-Check for updates automatically - Mark to check for online updates periodically, then select the time interval how often %PRODUCTNAME will check for online updates. %PRODUCTNAME will check once a day, week, or month, as soon as a working Internet connection is detected. If you connect to the Internet by a proxy server, set the proxy on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Proxy. - When an update is available, an icon in the menu bar displays some explaining text. Click the icon to proceed. - If you disable the check, the icon is removed from the menu bar. - Online Update is a module that can be selected or deselected to be installed. Choose the customized installation in the Setup of %PRODUCTNAME. +Check for updates automatically + Mark to check for online updates periodically, then select the time interval how often %PRODUCTNAME will check for online updates. %PRODUCTNAME will check once a day, week, or month, as soon as a working Internet connection is detected. If you connect to the Internet by a proxy server, set the proxy on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Proxy. + When an update is available, an icon in the menu bar displays some explaining text. Click the icon to proceed. + If you disable the check, the icon is removed from the menu bar. + Online Update is a module that can be selected or deselected to be installed. Choose the customized installation in the Setup of %PRODUCTNAME. -Every Day - A check will be performed once a day. +Every Day + A check will be performed once a day. -Every Week - A check will be performed once a week. This is the default setting. +Every Week + A check will be performed once a week. This is the default setting. -Every Month - A check will be performed once a month. +Every Month + A check will be performed once a month. -Check now - A check will be performed now. +Check now + A check will be performed now. Download updates automatically -Enable the automatic download of updates to the specified folder. +Enable the automatic download of updates to the specified folder. - Download destination - Displays the selected folder to store the downloaded files. + Download destination + Displays the selected folder to store the downloaded files. Change -Click to select a folder to download the files. +Click to select a folder to download the files. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/securityoptionsdialog.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/securityoptionsdialog.xhp index 3cd7027c48..4eebd25310 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/securityoptionsdialog.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/securityoptionsdialog.xhp @@ -42,28 +42,28 @@
Press the Options button on the Security page.
-The Security options and warnings dialog contains the following controls: +The Security options and warnings dialog contains the following controls: -When saving or sending -Select to see a warning dialog when you try to save or send a document that contains recorded changes, versions, or comments. +When saving or sending +Select to see a warning dialog when you try to save or send a document that contains recorded changes, versions, or comments. -When printing -Select to see a warning dialog when you try to print a document that contains recorded changes or comments. +When printing +Select to see a warning dialog when you try to print a document that contains recorded changes or comments. -When signing -Select to see a warning dialog when you try to sign a document that contains recorded changes, versions, fields, references to other sources (for example linked sections or linked pictures), or comments. +When signing +Select to see a warning dialog when you try to sign a document that contains recorded changes, versions, fields, references to other sources (for example linked sections or linked pictures), or comments. -When creating PDF files -Select to see a warning dialog when you try to export a document to PDF format that displays recorded changes in Writer, or that displays comments. +When creating PDF files +Select to see a warning dialog when you try to export a document to PDF format that displays recorded changes in Writer, or that displays comments. -Remove personal information on saving -Select to always remove user data from the file properties. If this option is not selected, you can still remove the personal information for the current document with the Reset Properties button on File - Properties - General. +Remove personal information on saving +Select to always remove user data from the file properties. If this option is not selected, you can still remove the personal information for the current document with the Reset Properties button on File - Properties - General. -Recommend password protection on saving -Select to always enable the Save with password option in the file save dialogs. Deselect the option to save files by default without password. +Recommend password protection on saving +Select to always enable the Save with password option in the file save dialogs. Deselect the option to save files by default without password. -Ctrl-click required to follow hyperlinks -If enabled, you must hold down the Ctrl key while clicking a hyperlink to follow that link. If not enabled, a click opens the hyperlink. +Ctrl-click required to follow hyperlinks +If enabled, you must hold down the Ctrl key while clicking a hyperlink to follow that link. If not enabled, a click opens the hyperlink. Block any links from documents not among the trusted locations (see Macro Security) Blocks the use of links pointing to images not in the trusted locations defined on the Trusted Sources tab of the Macro Security dialog. This can increase security in case you work with documents from untrusted sources (e.g. the internet) and are worried about vulnerabilities in image processing software components. Blocking the use of links means that images are not loaded in documents, only a placeholder frame is visible. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp index 5af20e796a..8170defcaf 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp @@ -28,40 +28,40 @@ -Server Authentication -On the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Mail Merge E-mail tab page, click the Server Authentication button to specify the server security settings. +Server Authentication +On the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Mail Merge E-mail tab page, click the Server Authentication button to specify the server security settings. -The outgoing mail server (SMTP) requires authentication -Enables the authentication that is required to send e-mail by SMTP. +The outgoing mail server (SMTP) requires authentication +Enables the authentication that is required to send e-mail by SMTP. -The outgoing mail server (SMTP) requires separate authentication -Select if your SMTP server requires a user name and password. +The outgoing mail server (SMTP) requires separate authentication +Select if your SMTP server requires a user name and password. -User name -Enter the user name for the SMTP server. +User name +Enter the user name for the SMTP server. -Password -Enter the password for the user name. +Password +Enter the password for the user name. -The outgoing mail server uses the same authentication as the incoming mail server. -Select if you are required to first read your e-mail before you can send e-mail. This method is also called "SMTP after POP3". +The outgoing mail server uses the same authentication as the incoming mail server. +Select if you are required to first read your e-mail before you can send e-mail. This method is also called "SMTP after POP3". -Server name -Enter the server name of your POP 3 or IMAP mail server. +Server name +Enter the server name of your POP 3 or IMAP mail server. -Port -Enter the port on the POP3 or IMAP server. +Port +Enter the port on the POP3 or IMAP server. -POP 3 -Specifies that the incoming mail server uses POP 3. +POP 3 +Specifies that the incoming mail server uses POP 3. -IMAP -Specifies that the incoming mail server uses IMAP. +IMAP +Specifies that the incoming mail server uses IMAP. -User name -Enter the user name for the IMAP server. +User name +Enter the user name for the IMAP server. -Password -Enter the password. +Password +Enter the password. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp index e957d83f70..3001bfb007 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp @@ -28,15 +28,15 @@ -Test Account Settings -When you enter settings on the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Mail Merge E-mail tab page, you can click the Test Settings button to test your settings. -(Results list box) -In the top list box you will see the results of the test session. +Test Account Settings +When you enter settings on the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Mail Merge E-mail tab page, you can click the Test Settings button to test your settings. +(Results list box) +In the top list box you will see the results of the test session. -Errors -In the Errors list box you can read an explanation of any errors encountered while testing the settings. +Errors +In the Errors list box you can read an explanation of any errors encountered while testing the settings. -Stop -Click the Stop button to stop a test session manually. +Stop +Click the Stop button to stop a test session manually. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate.xhp index cad5796c34..9063f06a24 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate.xhp @@ -29,9 +29,9 @@ -View Certificate -The View Certificate dialog opens when you click the View Certificate button on the Trusted Sources tab page of the Macro Security dialog. -The dialog has the following tab pages: +View Certificate +The View Certificate dialog opens when you click the View Certificate button on the Trusted Sources tab page of the Macro Security dialog. +The dialog has the following tab pages: diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_c.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_c.xhp index 2a04983b78..43be7bad3a 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_c.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_c.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ -Certificate Path +Certificate Path -The Certificate Path page of the View Certificate dialog displays the location and the status of the certificate. +The Certificate Path page of the View Certificate dialog displays the location and the status of the certificate. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_d.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_d.xhp index 9a7f77c4c6..deb8fd7bd8 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_d.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_d.xhp @@ -32,10 +32,10 @@ -Details +Details -The Details page of the View Certificate dialog displays detailed information about the certificate. +The Details page of the View Certificate dialog displays detailed information about the certificate. -Use the value list box to view values and copy them to the clipboard. +Use the value list box to view values and copy them to the clipboard. diff --git a/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_g.xhp b/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_g.xhp index 271a7f5efc..4652852553 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_g.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_g.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@ -General +General -The General page of the View Certificate dialog displays basic information about the certificate. +The General page of the View Certificate dialog displays basic information about the certificate. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/00/00000004.xhp b/source/text/simpress/00/00000004.xhp index 6191e2bcb2..5f503a2170 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/00/00000004.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/00/00000004.xhp @@ -30,23 +30,23 @@ -To access this command +To access this command Save as Picture context menu, #i63795 -Opens a dialog to save the selected bitmap picture as a file. The default file format is the internal format of the image. +Opens a dialog to save the selected bitmap picture as a file. The default file format is the internal format of the image. Custom Animation context menu Opens the Custom Animation sidebar deck.
- + Icon -Rectangle +Rectangle
@@ -56,12 +56,12 @@ - + Icon -Ellipse +Ellipse
@@ -71,12 +71,12 @@ - + Icon -Curve +Curve
@@ -86,12 +86,12 @@ - + Icon -Alignment +Alignment
@@ -101,12 +101,12 @@ - + Icon -Arrange +Arrange
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/00/00000401.xhp b/source/text/simpress/00/00000401.xhp index 16717e6e55..14bf42add9 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/00/00000401.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/00/00000401.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@ - File Menu - Choose File - Export + File Menu + Choose File - Export diff --git a/source/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp b/source/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp index 05fa0af468..f78096cfc3 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp @@ -27,21 +27,21 @@ - Edit Menu + Edit Menu
- Choose Edit - Duplicate + Choose Edit - Duplicate - Shift+F3 + Shift+F3
- Choose Edit - Cross-fading (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) + Choose Edit - Cross-fading (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) - Choose Edit - Delete Slide + Choose Edit - Delete Slide - Open the context menu of an inserted layer, then choose Delete Layer + Open the context menu of an inserted layer, then choose Delete Layer - Choose Edit - Fields + Choose Edit - Fields - Click the Glue Points icon on the Drawing Bar + Click the Glue Points icon on the Drawing Bar UFI: this is called from text\simpress\02\10030200.xhp to fix bug #i23785# \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/simpress/00/00000404.xhp b/source/text/simpress/00/00000404.xhp index 5b364b5eca..209d97094b 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/00/00000404.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/00/00000404.xhp @@ -30,41 +30,41 @@ -Insert Menu +Insert Menu
Choose Insert - New Page/Slide
-Choose Insert - Duplicate Slide +Choose Insert - Duplicate Slide UFI: will be changed "SO later" to Page (for Draw) -Choose Insert - Expand Slide +Choose Insert - Expand Slide -Choose Insert - Summary Slide +Choose Insert - Summary Slide
-Choose Insert - Layer (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) -Open context menu of layer tabs - choose Insert Layer (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Choose Insert - Layer (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Open context menu of layer tabs - choose Insert Layer (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only)
-Choose Insert - Insert Snap Point/Line (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) -Open a context menu and choose Insert Snap Point/Line +Choose Insert - Insert Snap Point/Line (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Open a context menu and choose Insert Snap Point/Line
-Select a snap point or line, open the context menu, and choose Edit Snap Point/Line +Select a snap point or line, open the context menu, and choose Edit Snap Point/Line
-Choose Insert - Spreadsheet +Choose Insert - Spreadsheet -On the Insert toolbar, click +On the Insert toolbar, click
- + Icon -Spreadsheet +Spreadsheet
@@ -72,19 +72,19 @@
-Choose Insert - File +Choose Insert - File -On the Insert toolbar, click +On the Insert toolbar, click
- + Icon -File +File
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/00/00000405.xhp b/source/text/simpress/00/00000405.xhp index c9b78099a0..442e8703a0 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/00/00000405.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/00/00000405.xhp @@ -29,25 +29,25 @@ -Format Menu +Format Menu
-In the context menu of a dimension line, choose Dimensions. -On the Lines and Arrows toolbar, click the Dimension Line icon. +In the context menu of a dimension line, choose Dimensions. +On the Lines and Arrows toolbar, click the Dimension Line icon.
-Choose Format - Page +Choose Format - Page -Choose Format - Page and then click the Page tab +Choose Format - Page and then click the Page tab -Choose Format - Page and then click the Background tab +Choose Format - Page and then click the Background tab -Choose Format - Slide Layout +Choose Format - Slide Layout
-In a Draw document, right-click a layer tab and choose Modify Layer +In a Draw document, right-click a layer tab and choose Modify Layer -Choose Format - Layer (only $[officename] Draw) +Choose Format - Layer (only $[officename] Draw)
-Choose Slide - Slide Master Design +Choose Slide - Slide Master Design diff --git a/source/text/simpress/00/00000406.xhp b/source/text/simpress/00/00000406.xhp index 1736297c9b..4ded1d974a 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/00/00000406.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/00/00000406.xhp @@ -30,10 +30,10 @@ -Tools Menu -Choose Tools - Language - Hyphenation +Tools Menu +Choose Tools - Language - Hyphenation -Choose Slide Show - Custom Slide Show and then click New. +Choose Slide Show - Custom Slide Show and then click New. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/00/00000407.xhp b/source/text/simpress/00/00000407.xhp index 097c1b91cb..9e1749ba86 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/00/00000407.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/00/00000407.xhp @@ -30,27 +30,27 @@ -Slide Show Menu -Choose Slide Show - Slide Transition +Slide Show Menu +Choose Slide Show - Slide Transition
-Choose Insert - Animated Image +Choose Insert - Animated Image
-Choose Slide Show - Custom Animation +Choose Slide Show - Custom Animation -On the Drawing toolbar, click +On the Drawing toolbar, click
- + Icon -Custom Animation +Custom Animation
@@ -58,28 +58,28 @@
-Choose Slide Show - Interaction +Choose Slide Show - Interaction -On the Drawing toolbar, click +On the Drawing toolbar, click
- + Icon -Interaction +Interaction
-Choose Slide Show - Slide Show Settings +Choose Slide Show - Slide Show Settings -Choose Slide Show - Custom Slide Show +Choose Slide Show - Custom Slide Show diff --git a/source/text/simpress/00/00000413.xhp b/source/text/simpress/00/00000413.xhp index 763062e2de..16ac9a0e4c 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/00/00000413.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/00/00000413.xhp @@ -30,62 +30,62 @@ -Modify Menu +Modify Menu
-Choose Modify - Convert (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) -Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Convert +Choose Modify - Convert (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Convert
-Choose Modify - Convert - To Curve (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) -Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Convert - To Curve +Choose Modify - Convert - To Curve (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Convert - To Curve
-Choose Modify - Convert - To Polygon (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) -Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Convert - To Polygon +Choose Modify - Convert - To Polygon (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Convert - To Polygon
-Choose Modify - Convert - To 3D (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) -Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Convert - To 3D +Choose Modify - Convert - To 3D (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Convert - To 3D
-Choose Modify - Convert - To 3D Rotation Object (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) -Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Convert - To 3D Rotation Body +Choose Modify - Convert - To 3D Rotation Object (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Convert - To 3D Rotation Body
-Choose Modify - Convert - To Bitmap (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) -Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Convert - To Bitmap +Choose Modify - Convert - To Bitmap (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Convert - To Bitmap
-Choose Modify - Convert - To Metafile (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) -Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Convert - To Metafile +Choose Modify - Convert - To Metafile (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Convert - To Metafile
-Choose Modify - Convert - To Contour (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) -Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Convert - To Contour +Choose Modify - Convert - To Contour (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Convert - To Contour
-Choose Modify - Arrange - In Front of Object (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) -Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Arrange - In Front of Object +Choose Modify - Arrange - In Front of Object (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Arrange - In Front of Object -On the Drawing bar, open the Arrange toolbar and click: +On the Drawing bar, open the Arrange toolbar and click:
- + Icon -In Front of Object +In Front of Object
@@ -93,20 +93,20 @@
-Choose Modify - Arrange - Behind Object (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) -Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Arrange - Behind Object +Choose Modify - Arrange - Behind Object (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Arrange - Behind Object -On the Drawing bar, open the Arrange toolbar and click: +On the Drawing bar, open the Arrange toolbar and click:
- + Icon -Behind Object +Behind Object
@@ -114,20 +114,20 @@
-Choose Modify - Arrange - Reverse (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) -Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Arrange - Reverse +Choose Modify - Arrange - Reverse (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Arrange - Reverse -On the Drawing bar, open the Arrange toolbar and click: +On the Drawing bar, open the Arrange toolbar and click:
- + Icon -Reverse +Reverse
@@ -135,39 +135,39 @@
-Choose Modify - Combine (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) -Select two or more objects, open the context menu and choose Combine. +Choose Modify - Combine (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Select two or more objects, open the context menu and choose Combine.
-Choose Modify - Split (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) -Select a combined object, open the context menu and choose Split. +Choose Modify - Split (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Select a combined object, open the context menu and choose Split.
-Choose Modify - Connect (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) -Select two or more lines, open the context menu and choose Connect. +Choose Modify - Connect (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Select two or more lines, open the context menu and choose Connect.
-Choose Modify - Break (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) -Select a line that was created by connecting two or more lines, open the context menu and choose Break. +Choose Modify - Break (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Select a line that was created by connecting two or more lines, open the context menu and choose Break.
-Choose Modify - Shapes (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) -Select two or more objects, open the context menu and choose Shapes +Choose Modify - Shapes (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Select two or more objects, open the context menu and choose Shapes
-Choose Modify - Shapes - Merge (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) -Select two or more objects, open the context menu and choose Shapes - Merge +Choose Modify - Shapes - Merge (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Select two or more objects, open the context menu and choose Shapes - Merge
-Choose Modify - Shapes - Subtract (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) -Select two or more objects, open the context menu and choose Shapes - Subtract +Choose Modify - Shapes - Subtract (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Select two or more objects, open the context menu and choose Shapes - Subtract
-Choose Modify - Shapes - Intersect (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) -Select two or more objects, open the context menu and choose Shapes - Intersect +Choose Modify - Shapes - Intersect (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Select two or more objects, open the context menu and choose Shapes - Intersect
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/01170000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/01170000.xhp index f2d82aaf93..788f78d172 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/01170000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/01170000.xhp @@ -34,19 +34,19 @@ Macromedia Flash export exporting;to Macromedia Flash format -Export -Exports your presentation or drawing and sets the export options. +Export +Exports your presentation or drawing and sets the export options.
-The following file formats present you with additional export options after you click Save: -HTML Document, JPEG, SVM/WMF/PICT/MET, BMP, GIF, EPS, PNG, PBM, PPM, PGM. -If you select "Macromedia Flash (SWF)" as file format, the current Impress or Draw document will be exported to the Macromedia Flash format. -If you choose "HTML Document" as your file format, the HTML Export Wizard appears. This wizard guides you through the export process and includes the option to save the pictures in your presentation in GIF or JPG format. +The following file formats present you with additional export options after you click Save: +HTML Document, JPEG, SVM/WMF/PICT/MET, BMP, GIF, EPS, PNG, PBM, PPM, PGM. +If you select "Macromedia Flash (SWF)" as file format, the current Impress or Draw document will be exported to the Macromedia Flash format. +If you choose "HTML Document" as your file format, the HTML Export Wizard appears. This wizard guides you through the export process and includes the option to save the pictures in your presentation in GIF or JPG format. -Export dialog -Information on Import and Export Filters +Export dialog +Information on Import and Export Filters diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/01180000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/01180000.xhp index c55aa13e53..f2b2a2376a 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/01180000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/01180000.xhp @@ -32,15 +32,15 @@ -Page - Sets page orientation, page margins, background and other layout options. +Page + Sets page orientation, page margins, background and other layout options.
- To change the background of all of the pages in the active file, select a background, click OK and click Yes in the Page Settings dialog. + To change the background of all of the pages in the active file, select a background, click OK and click Yes in the Page Settings dialog. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/01180001.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/01180001.xhp index 67af56d8c7..b81e29157a 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/01180001.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/01180001.xhp @@ -33,40 +33,40 @@ slides; formatting formatting;slides -Page -Sets page orientation, page margins, background and other layout options. +Page +Sets page orientation, page margins, background and other layout options.
-Paper format -Format -Select a paper format supported by your printer. You can also create a custom page size by selecting User and entering the size dimensions in the Width and Height boxes. -Width -Shows the width of the paper format you selected in the Format box. If you selected the User format, enter a value for the width of the page. -Height -Shows the height of the paper format you selected in the Format box. If you selected the User format, enter a value for the height of the page. -Portrait -Page orientation is vertical. -Landscape -Page orientation is horizontal. -Paper tray -Select the paper source for your printer. -If your document uses more than one paper format, you can select a different tray for each format. +Paper format +Format +Select a paper format supported by your printer. You can also create a custom page size by selecting User and entering the size dimensions in the Width and Height boxes. +Width +Shows the width of the paper format you selected in the Format box. If you selected the User format, enter a value for the width of the page. +Height +Shows the height of the paper format you selected in the Format box. If you selected the User format, enter a value for the height of the page. +Portrait +Page orientation is vertical. +Landscape +Page orientation is horizontal. +Paper tray +Select the paper source for your printer. +If your document uses more than one paper format, you can select a different tray for each format. -Margins -Specify the distance between the edge of a printed page and the printable area. -Left -Enter the distance between the left edge of the page and the data. You can see the result in the preview. -Right -Enter the distance between the right edge of the page and the data. You can see the result in the preview. -Top -Enter the distance between the top edge of the page and the data. You can see the result in the preview. -Bottom -Enter the distance between the bottom edge of the page and the data. You can see the result in the preview. -Format -Specify the format for page numbering. -Fit object to paper format -Reduces the scale of objects and the size of the font on the page so that they print on the selected paper format. +Margins +Specify the distance between the edge of a printed page and the printable area. +Left +Enter the distance between the left edge of the page and the data. You can see the result in the preview. +Right +Enter the distance between the right edge of the page and the data. You can see the result in the preview. +Top +Enter the distance between the top edge of the page and the data. You can see the result in the preview. +Bottom +Enter the distance between the bottom edge of the page and the data. You can see the result in the preview. +Format +Specify the format for page numbering. +Fit object to paper format +Reduces the scale of objects and the size of the font on the page so that they print on the selected paper format. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/01180002.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/01180002.xhp index d2eb94f76b..524ff167ea 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/01180002.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/01180002.xhp @@ -33,12 +33,12 @@
- Background - Defines a background for a single page or for all of the pages in the active file. + Background + Defines a background for a single page or for all of the pages in the active file.
- The options for this dialog are described here. + The options for this dialog are described here. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/02110000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/02110000.xhp index f45d175570..6a4838f934 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/02110000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/02110000.xhp @@ -34,129 +34,129 @@ presentations; navigating -Navigator -Opens the Navigator, where you can quickly jump to other slides or move between open files. +Navigator +Opens the Navigator, where you can quickly jump to other slides or move between open files.
-You can dock the Navigator to the edge of your workspace. +You can dock the Navigator to the edge of your workspace.
-Press Ctrl+Shift+F5 to open the Navigator when you are editing a presentation. -Pointer -Switches the mouse pointer to a pen that you can use to write on slides during a slide show. You cannot change the color of the pen. +Press Ctrl+Shift+F5 to open the Navigator when you are editing a presentation. +Pointer +Switches the mouse pointer to a pen that you can use to write on slides during a slide show. You cannot change the color of the pen. - + Icon -Pointer +Pointer
-First Slide -Jumps to the first slide in the slide show. +First Slide +Jumps to the first slide in the slide show. - + Icon -First Page +First Page
-Previous Slide -Moves back one slide in the slide show. +Previous Slide +Moves back one slide in the slide show. - + Icon -Previous Slide +Previous Slide
-Next Slide -Move forward one slide in the slide show. +Next Slide +Move forward one slide in the slide show. - + Icon -Next Slide +Next Slide
-Last Slide -Jumps to the last slide in the slide show. +Last Slide +Jumps to the last slide in the slide show. - + Icon -Last Slide +Last Slide
-Drag Mode -Drag and drop slides and named objects into the active slide. You can only insert slides and named objects from a saved file. You can only insert named objects as copies. +Drag Mode +Drag and drop slides and named objects into the active slide. You can only insert slides and named objects from a saved file. You can only insert named objects as copies. - + Icon -Insert as hyperlink +Insert as hyperlink - + Icon -Insert as link +Insert as link - + Icon -Insert as copy +Insert as copy
-Insert as hyperlink -Inserts slides as a hyperlink (URL) into the active slide. -Insert as link -Inserts slides as a link into the active slide. -Insert as copy -Inserts a copy of a slide or named object into the active slide. -Show Shapes -In the submenu you can choose to display a list of all shapes or only the named shapes. Use drag-and-drop in the list to reorder the shapes. When you set the focus to a slide and press the Tab key, the next shape in the defined order is selected. -Existing Slides -Lists available slides. Double-click a slide to make it the active slide. -Open Documents -Lists available $[officename] files. Select a file to display the contents you can insert. +Insert as hyperlink +Inserts slides as a hyperlink (URL) into the active slide. +Insert as link +Inserts slides as a link into the active slide. +Insert as copy +Inserts a copy of a slide or named object into the active slide. +Show Shapes +In the submenu you can choose to display a list of all shapes or only the named shapes. Use drag-and-drop in the list to reorder the shapes. When you set the focus to a slide and press the Tab key, the next shape in the defined order is selected. +Existing Slides +Lists available slides. Double-click a slide to make it the active slide. +Open Documents +Lists available $[officename] files. Select a file to display the contents you can insert. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp index 702585e355..5f0de385fa 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp @@ -30,8 +30,8 @@
-Duplicate - Makes one or more copies of a selected object. +Duplicate + Makes one or more copies of a selected object.
@@ -39,58 +39,50 @@
-Number of copies - Enter the number of copies you want to make. +Number of copies + Enter the number of copies you want to make. -Values from selection +Values from selection - + Icon - Enters the width and the height values of the selected object in the X axis and the Y axis boxes respectively as well as the fill color of the object in the Start box. The rotation angle of the selected object is not entered. + Enters the width and the height values of the selected object in the X axis and the Y axis boxes respectively as well as the fill color of the object in the Start box. The rotation angle of the selected object is not entered.
- Placement - Sets the position and rotation of a duplicate object with respect to the selected object. + Placement + Sets the position and rotation of a duplicate object with respect to the selected object. -X axis - Enter the horizontal distance between the centers of the selected object and the duplicate object. Positive values shift the duplicate object to the right and negative values shift the duplicate object to the left. +X axis + Enter the horizontal distance between the centers of the selected object and the duplicate object. Positive values shift the duplicate object to the right and negative values shift the duplicate object to the left. -Y axis - Enter the vertical distance between the centers of the selected object and the duplicate object. Positive values shift the duplicate object down and negative values shift the duplicate object up. +Y axis + Enter the vertical distance between the centers of the selected object and the duplicate object. Positive values shift the duplicate object down and negative values shift the duplicate object up. -Angle - Enter the angle (0 to 359 degrees) by which you want to rotate the duplicate object. Positive values rotate the duplicate object in a clockwise direction and negative values in a counterclockwise direction. - Enlargement - Sets the size of a duplicate object. +Angle + Enter the angle (0 to 359 degrees) by which you want to rotate the duplicate object. Positive values rotate the duplicate object in a clockwise direction and negative values in a counterclockwise direction. + Enlargement + Sets the size of a duplicate object. -Width - Enter the amount by which you want to enlarge or reduce the width of the duplicate object. +Width + Enter the amount by which you want to enlarge or reduce the width of the duplicate object. -Height - Enter the amount by which you want to enlarge or reduce the height of the duplicate object. - Colors - Sets the colors for the selected object and the duplicate object. If you make more than one copy, these colors define the start and end points of a color gradient. +Height + Enter the amount by which you want to enlarge or reduce the height of the duplicate object. + Colors + Sets the colors for the selected object and the duplicate object. If you make more than one copy, these colors define the start and end points of a color gradient. -Start - Choose a color for the selected object. +Start + Choose a color for the selected object. -End - Choose a color for the duplicate object. If you are making more than one copy, this color is applied to the last copy. +End + Choose a color for the duplicate object. If you are making more than one copy, this color is applied to the last copy. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/02130000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/02130000.xhp index 7bc7d2049c..e60576f1bb 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/02130000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/02130000.xhp @@ -36,18 +36,18 @@ -Delete Slide -Deletes the current slide or page. +Delete Slide +Deletes the current slide or page.
-In the context menu of a slide or page you find the following command, among others: +In the context menu of a slide or page you find the following command, among others: -Rename Slide +Rename Slide Rename Page -Renames the selected slide page. +Renames the selected slide page. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/02140000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/02140000.xhp index 8d3264b58e..8f122efa74 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/02140000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/02140000.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@ -Delete Layer - Deletes the active layer. +Delete Layer + Deletes the active layer.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/02150000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/02150000.xhp index 0da67084e7..f71db09f6c 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/02150000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/02150000.xhp @@ -32,23 +32,23 @@ -Cross-fading -Creates shapes and distributes them by uniform increments between two drawing objects. +Cross-fading +Creates shapes and distributes them by uniform increments between two drawing objects. -$[officename] draws a series of intermediate shapes between two selected objects and groups the result. +$[officename] draws a series of intermediate shapes between two selected objects and groups the result.
-Settings -Sets the options for cross-fading. +Settings +Sets the options for cross-fading. -Increments -Enter the number of shapes you want between the two selected objects. +Increments +Enter the number of shapes you want between the two selected objects. -Cross-fade attributes -Applies cross-fading to the line and fill properties of the selected objects. For example, if the selected objects are filled with different colors, a color transition between the two colors is applied. +Cross-fade attributes +Applies cross-fading to the line and fill properties of the selected objects. For example, if the selected objects are filled with different colors, a color transition between the two colors is applied. -Same orientation -Applies a smooth transition between the selected objects. +Same orientation +Applies a smooth transition between the selected objects. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/03050000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/03050000.xhp index de9c39f155..832443b431 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/03050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/03050000.xhp @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@
-Option Barto be deleted +Option Barto be deleted
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/03070000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/03070000.xhp index aedb03968c..146d19b803 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/03070000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/03070000.xhp @@ -29,17 +29,17 @@
-Presentation -Common commands for slides. +Presentation +Common commands for slides.
-Slide +Slide -Slide Layout +Slide Layout -Slide Design +Slide Design diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/03130000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/03130000.xhp index d76284c910..e2e4cef848 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/03130000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/03130000.xhp @@ -34,25 +34,25 @@ -Slide Show -Starts your slide show. +Slide Show +Starts your slide show.
-You can specify settings for running a slide show in Slide Show - Slide Show Settings. -Specify whether a slide show starts with the current slide or with the first slide on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General. -To start a slide show, do one of the following: +You can specify settings for running a slide show in Slide Show - Slide Show Settings. +Specify whether a slide show starts with the current slide or with the first slide on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General. +To start a slide show, do one of the following: -Click the Slide Show icon on the Presentation toolbar. +Click the Slide Show icon on the Presentation toolbar. -Right-click a slide in Normal view and choose Slide Show. +Right-click a slide in Normal view and choose Slide Show. -Press F5. +Press F5. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/03150000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/03150000.xhp index 07a301e6c7..3824599888 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/03150000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/03150000.xhp @@ -36,8 +36,8 @@ -Master -Switches to one of several master views, where you can add elements that you want to appear on all of the slides in your show. +Master +Switches to one of several master views, where you can add elements that you want to appear on all of the slides in your show.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/03151100.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/03151100.xhp index ee7832bfef..ab56f786b7 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/03151100.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/03151100.xhp @@ -31,22 +31,22 @@
-Master Layout -Adds or removes header, footer, date, and slide number placeholders to the layout of the slide master. +Master Layout +Adds or removes header, footer, date, and slide number placeholders to the layout of the slide master.
-Placeholders -Header -Adds a header placeholder to the slide master for notes. -Date/time -Adds a date/time placeholder to the slide master. -Footer -Adds a footer placeholder to the slide master. -Slide number -Adds a slide number placeholder to the slide master. +Placeholders +Header +Adds a header placeholder to the slide master for notes. +Date/time +Adds a date/time placeholder to the slide master. +Footer +Adds a footer placeholder to the slide master. +Slide number +Adds a slide number placeholder to the slide master.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/03151200.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/03151200.xhp index dc26a42430..6cd384bf72 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/03151200.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/03151200.xhp @@ -30,8 +30,8 @@
-Notes Master Layout -Add header, footer, date, and slide number to the notes master. +Notes Master Layout +Add header, footer, date, and slide number to the notes master.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/03152000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/03152000.xhp index 2ab71783d4..8aec32cf90 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/03152000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/03152000.xhp @@ -37,59 +37,59 @@
-Header and Footer -Adds or changes text in placeholders at the top and the bottom of slides and slide masters. +Header and Footer +Adds or changes text in placeholders at the top and the bottom of slides and slide masters.
-The Header and Footer dialog contains the following tab pages: +The Header and Footer dialog contains the following tab pages: - + Slide tab page where you can specify options for the current slide or for all slides. - + Notes and Handouts tab page where you can specify options for the notes pages and the handout pages. - + - + Header and footer dialog -Include on slide -Specify the elements to include on your slides. -Footer -Adds the text that you enter in the Footer text box to the bottom of the slide. -Footer text -Adds the text that you enter to the bottom of the slide. -Header -Adds the text that you enter in the Header text box to the top of the slide. -Header text -Adds the text that you enter to the top of the slide. +Include on slide +Specify the elements to include on your slides. +Footer +Adds the text that you enter in the Footer text box to the bottom of the slide. +Footer text +Adds the text that you enter to the bottom of the slide. +Header +Adds the text that you enter in the Header text box to the top of the slide. +Header text +Adds the text that you enter to the top of the slide. -Date and time -Adds the date and time to the slide. +Date and time +Adds the date and time to the slide. -Fixed -Displays the date and time that you enter in the text box. +Fixed +Displays the date and time that you enter in the text box. -Variable -Displays the date and time that the slide was created. Select a date format from the list. -Language -Select the language for the date and time format. +Variable +Displays the date and time that the slide was created. Select a date format from the list. +Language +Select the language for the date and time format. -Slide number / Page number -Adds the slide number or the page number. -Do not show on first slide -Does not display your specified information on the first slide of your presentation. -Apply to All -Applies the settings to all the slides in your presentation, including the corresponding slide masters. -Apply -Applies the current settings to the selected slides. +Slide number / Page number +Adds the slide number or the page number. +Do not show on first slide +Does not display your specified information on the first slide of your presentation. +Apply to All +Applies the settings to all the slides in your presentation, including the corresponding slide masters. +Apply +Applies the current settings to the selected slides. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/03180000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/03180000.xhp index ca6cb9f1ff..e4b78d8c37 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/03180000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/03180000.xhp @@ -36,26 +36,26 @@ black and white display grayscale display -Color/Grayscale -Shows slides in color, grayscale, or black and white. +Color/Grayscale +Shows slides in color, grayscale, or black and white.
-Color -Shows slides in color. +Color +Shows slides in color.
-Grayscale -Shows slides in shades of black and white. +Grayscale +Shows slides in shades of black and white.
-Black and White -Shows slides in pure black or white without shading. +Black and White +Shows slides in pure black or white without shading.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/04010000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/04010000.xhp index 0ad91d71bc..d3d6010198 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/04010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/04010000.xhp @@ -34,15 +34,15 @@ New Page/Slide -Inserts a slide after the currently selected slide. +Inserts a slide after the currently selected slide. Inserts a page after the currently selected page.
-Applies the slide master background to the new slide. +Applies the slide master background to the new slide. Applies the master page background to the new page.UFI: deleted some paras, changed avis to ahid tags, see #i60536 -Includes objects on the slide master in the new slide. +Includes objects on the slide master in the new slide. Includes objects on the master page in the new page. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/04020000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/04020000.xhp index 063614b0e3..5a18c24f48 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/04020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/04020000.xhp @@ -30,22 +30,22 @@ -Insert Layer -Inserts a new layer in the document. Layers are only available in Draw, not in Impress. +Insert Layer +Inserts a new layer in the document. Layers are only available in Draw, not in Impress.
-To select a layer, click the corresponding tab at the bottom of the workspace. -Name -Enter a name for the new layer. -Properties -Set the properties for the new layer. -Visible -Show or hide the layer. -Printable -When printing, print or ignore this particular layer. -Locked -Prevent elements on the layer from being edited. +To select a layer, click the corresponding tab at the bottom of the workspace. +Name +Enter a name for the new layer. +Properties +Set the properties for the new layer. +Visible +Show or hide the layer. +Printable +When printing, print or ignore this particular layer. +Locked +Prevent elements on the layer from being edited. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp index 72d1db589b..5cd0dd24a4 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp @@ -35,31 +35,31 @@ magnetic lines in presentations -Snap Point/Line -Inserts a snap point or snap line (also known as guide) that you can use to quickly align objects. +Snap Point/Line +Inserts a snap point or snap line (also known as guide) that you can use to quickly align objects. Snap points and snap lines do not appear in printed output.
-You can drag a snap line from the rulers and drop them on the page. To delete a snap line, drag it back to the ruler. -Draw or move an object near a snap point or snap line to snap it in place. -To set the snap range, choose %PRODUCTNAME Draw - Grid +You can drag a snap line from the rulers and drop them on the page. To delete a snap line, drag it back to the ruler. +Draw or move an object near a snap point or snap line to snap it in place. +To set the snap range, choose %PRODUCTNAME Draw - Grid %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Grid in the Options dialog box. Snap points dialog -Position -Sets the position of a selected snap point or line relative to the top left corner of the page. -You can also drag a snap point or snap line to a new position. -X axis -Enter the amount of space you want between the snap point or line and the left edge of the page. -Y axis -Enter the amount of space you want between the snap point or line and the top edge of the page. -Type -Specified the type of snap object you want to insert. -Point -Inserts a snap point. -Vertical -Inserts a vertical snap line. -Horizontal -Inserts a horizontal snap line. +Position +Sets the position of a selected snap point or line relative to the top left corner of the page. +You can also drag a snap point or snap line to a new position. +X axis +Enter the amount of space you want between the snap point or line and the left edge of the page. +Y axis +Enter the amount of space you want between the snap point or line and the top edge of the page. +Type +Specified the type of snap object you want to insert. +Point +Inserts a snap point. +Vertical +Inserts a vertical snap line. +Horizontal +Inserts a horizontal snap line. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/04030000m.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/04030000m.xhp index 810b91996b..79f35ee1af 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/04030000m.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/04030000m.xhp @@ -33,11 +33,11 @@ -Rows -Inserts a new row above the active cell. The number of rows inserted correspond to the number of rows selected. The existing rows are moved downward. +Rows +Inserts a new row above the active cell. The number of rows inserted correspond to the number of rows selected. The existing rows are moved downward.
-In the context menu of a cell, choose Insert - Rows +In the context menu of a cell, choose Insert - Rows
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/04030100.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/04030100.xhp index 337081f00d..bbfda6e3f6 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/04030100.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/04030100.xhp @@ -35,14 +35,14 @@ snap points; editing -Edit Snap Line / Point -Sets the position of the selected snap point or snap line relative to the top left corner of the page. well, relative to the origin, which can easily be dragged away from that corner +Edit Snap Line / Point +Sets the position of the selected snap point or snap line relative to the top left corner of the page. well, relative to the origin, which can easily be dragged away from that corner
-Delete Snap Line/Point -Deletes the selected snap point or snap line. +Delete Snap Line/Point +Deletes the selected snap point or snap line. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/04040000m.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/04040000m.xhp index ebc75a0607..65de468ecb 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/04040000m.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/04040000m.xhp @@ -33,11 +33,11 @@ -Columns -Inserts a new column to the left of the active cell. The number of columns inserted correspond to the number of columns selected. The existing columns are moved to the right. +Columns +Inserts a new column to the left of the active cell. The number of columns inserted correspond to the number of columns selected. The existing columns are moved to the right.
-In the context menu of a cell, choose Insert - Columns +In the context menu of a cell, choose Insert - Columns
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/04080100.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/04080100.xhp index f5dc2752ad..04f77e623e 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/04080100.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/04080100.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
-Table -Inserts a new table into the current slide or page. +Table +Inserts a new table into the current slide or page.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/04110000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/04110000.xhp index 6901e52bf0..9bda3bdd26 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/04110000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/04110000.xhp @@ -36,12 +36,12 @@ -Insert File -Inserts a file into the active slide. You can insert $[officename] Draw or Impress files, or text from an HTML document or a text file. +Insert File +Inserts a file into the active slide. You can insert $[officename] Draw or Impress files, or text from an HTML document or a text file. If you have an active internet connection, you can also insert text from a web page by entering its URL in the File name box.
-You can also choose to only insert specific slides or objects from $[officename] Draw or Impress files. +You can also choose to only insert specific slides or objects from $[officename] Draw or Impress files. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/04110100.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/04110100.xhp index 06fa475094..d92b5bba17 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/04110100.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/04110100.xhp @@ -36,30 +36,30 @@ inserting; slides as links backgrounds; deleting unused -Insert Slides/Objects -Allows you to insert the entire file or specific elements in the file. +Insert Slides/Objects +Allows you to insert the entire file or specific elements in the file.
-To insert specific elements from a file: +To insert specific elements from a file: -Click the plus sign next to the file name and select the elements you want to insert. Hold down Command +Click the plus sign next to the file name and select the elements you want to insert. Hold down Command Ctrl to add to or Shift to expand your selection. -If you want to insert the file as a link, select Link. +If you want to insert the file as a link, select Link. -Click OK. +Click OK. -At the prompt, click Yes to scale the elements to fit on the slide or No to preserve the original size of the elements. +At the prompt, click Yes to scale the elements to fit on the slide or No to preserve the original size of the elements. -Link -Inserts a file or some file elements as a link that is automatically updated when the source file is modified. -Delete unused backgrounds -Unused master pages are not inserted. +Link +Inserts a file or some file elements as a link that is automatically updated when the source file is modified. +Delete unused backgrounds +Unused master pages are not inserted. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/04110200.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/04110200.xhp index bc36f07ddb..dea9af9fd1 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/04110200.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/04110200.xhp @@ -28,15 +28,15 @@ mw deleted "text documents;" and moved "inserting;" to the impress guide html_import.xhp -Insert Text -Inserts text from an ASCII, RTF, or HTML file into the active slide. +Insert Text +Inserts text from an ASCII, RTF, or HTML file into the active slide.
-The inserted text uses the default text formatting of the active slide. If you want, you can drag a text frame in your slide, and then insert the text. The text frame automatically extends downwards for longer text passages. -Display list -Select the text you want to insert from the list. -Link -Inserts the text as a link. Links are updated automatically when the source file changes. +The inserted text uses the default text formatting of the active slide. If you want, you can drag a text frame in your slide, and then insert the text. The text frame automatically extends downwards for longer text passages. +Display list +Select the text you want to insert from the list. +Link +Inserts the text as a link. Links are updated automatically when the source file changes. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/04120000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/04120000.xhp index 02b4520c27..e7ccb0f3f7 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/04120000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/04120000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Duplicate Slide - Inserts a copy of the current slide after the current slide. +Duplicate Slide + Inserts a copy of the current slide after the current slide.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/04130000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/04130000.xhp index 0835488baa..ca51b35129 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/04130000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/04130000.xhp @@ -37,13 +37,13 @@ -Expand Slide -Creates a new slide from every top-level outline point (text one level below the title text in the outline hierarchy) in the selected slide. The outline text becomes the title of the new slide. Outline pointspoints? below the top level on the original slide are moved up one level on the new slide. +Expand Slide +Creates a new slide from every top-level outline point (text one level below the title text in the outline hierarchy) in the selected slide. The outline text becomes the title of the new slide. Outline pointspoints? below the top level on the original slide are moved up one level on the new slide.
-You can only use the Expand Slide command if your slide layout contains a title object and an outline object. -If you want to keep the original slide, choose Edit - Undo. +You can only use the Expand Slide command if your slide layout contains a title object and an outline object. +If you want to keep the original slide, choose Edit - Undo. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/04140000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/04140000.xhp index af38a88022..d1111ce49d 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/04140000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/04140000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
summary slide -Summary Slide - Creates a new slide that contains a bulleted list from the titles of the slides that follow the selected slide. The summary slide is inserted behind the last slide. +Summary Slide + Creates a new slide that contains a bulleted list from the titles of the slides that follow the selected slide. The summary slide is inserted behind the last slide.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/04990000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/04990000.xhp index 95377b4ff9..b3597f369f 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/04990000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/04990000.xhp @@ -33,10 +33,10 @@
- fields;in slidesFields - Lists common fields that you can insert into your slide. + fields;in slidesFields + Lists common fields that you can insert into your slide.
- If you want to edit a field in your slide, select it and choose Edit – Fields. + If you want to edit a field in your slide, select it and choose Edit – Fields.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/04990100.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/04990100.xhp index 23a4b6594f..450ff52019 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/04990100.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/04990100.xhp @@ -36,13 +36,13 @@ -Date (fixed) -Inserts the current date into your slide as a fixed field. The date is not automatically updated. +Date (fixed) +Inserts the current date into your slide as a fixed field. The date is not automatically updated.
-To edit an inserted field in your slide, double-click the field, place the cursor in front of the first character in the field and choose Edit - Fields. +To edit an inserted field in your slide, double-click the field, place the cursor in front of the first character in the field and choose Edit - Fields. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/04990200.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/04990200.xhp index 004f561fa8..247463db65 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/04990200.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/04990200.xhp @@ -36,8 +36,8 @@ -Date (variable) -Inserts the current date into your slide as a variable field. The date is automatically updated when you reload the file. +Date (variable) +Inserts the current date into your slide as a variable field. The date is automatically updated when you reload the file.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/04990300.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/04990300.xhp index 54908dadc8..37028800a2 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/04990300.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/04990300.xhp @@ -36,8 +36,8 @@ -Time (fixed) -Inserts the current time into your slide as a fixed field. The time is not automatically updated. +Time (fixed) +Inserts the current time into your slide as a fixed field. The time is not automatically updated.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/04990400.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/04990400.xhp index 967699d148..21b52ff134 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/04990400.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/04990400.xhp @@ -36,8 +36,8 @@ -Time (variable) -Inserts the current time into your slide as a variable field. The time is automatically updated when you reload the file. +Time (variable) +Inserts the current time into your slide as a variable field. The time is automatically updated when you reload the file.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/04990500.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/04990500.xhp index 81c58fddac..05ff050073 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/04990500.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/04990500.xhp @@ -38,8 +38,8 @@ -Page Number -Inserts the page number into the current slide or page. If you want to add a page number to every slide, choose View - Master - Slide Master +Page Number +Inserts the page number into the current slide or page. If you want to add a page number to every slide, choose View - Master - Slide Master and insert the page number field. To change the number format, choose Format - Page and then select a format from the list in the Layout Settings area.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/04990600.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/04990600.xhp index ac6f9a63c7..944098d052 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/04990600.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/04990600.xhp @@ -33,10 +33,10 @@ -Author -Inserts the first and last names listed in the $[officename] user data into the active slide. +Author +Inserts the first and last names listed in the $[officename] user data into the active slide.
-To edit the name, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. +To edit the name, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/04990700.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/04990700.xhp index c6281d5840..a5dd928b25 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/04990700.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/04990700.xhp @@ -35,8 +35,8 @@ -File name -Inserts the name of the active file. The name only appears after you save the file. +File name +Inserts the name of the active file. The name only appears after you save the file.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/05090000m.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/05090000m.xhp index a9d3e6606f..7f873f1ced 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/05090000m.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/05090000m.xhp @@ -28,13 +28,13 @@ -Format Cells -Specifies the properties of the selected table, for example, fonts, font effects, borders, and background. +Format Cells +Specifies the properties of the selected table, for example, fonts, font effects, borders, and background.
-On the Table Bar, click Table Properties. +On the Table Bar, click Table Properties.
-Font +Font diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/05110500m.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/05110500m.xhp index cf475cfed6..1d4fa1e8c5 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/05110500m.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/05110500m.xhp @@ -31,21 +31,21 @@ -Delete -Deletes the selected row(s) from the table. +Delete +Deletes the selected row(s) from the table.
-On Table Bar, click +On Table Bar, click - + Icon -Delete Row +Delete Row
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/05120000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/05120000.xhp index fb5c7f9829..23aa14f191 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/05120000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/05120000.xhp @@ -30,18 +30,18 @@ -Slide Design -Displays the Slide Design dialog, where you can select a layout scheme for the current slide. Any objects in the slide design are inserted behind objects in the current slide. +Slide Design +Displays the Slide Design dialog, where you can select a layout scheme for the current slide. Any objects in the slide design are inserted behind objects in the current slide.
-Slide design -Displays the slide designs you can apply to your slide. Select a design and click OK to apply it to the current slide. -Exchange background page -Applies the background of the selected slide design to all of the slides in your document. -Delete unused backgrounds -Deletes unreferenced background slides and presentation layouts from your document. -Load -Displays the Load Slide Design dialog, where you can select additional slide designs. +Slide design +Displays the slide designs you can apply to your slide. Select a design and click OK to apply it to the current slide. +Exchange background page +Applies the background of the selected slide design to all of the slides in your document. +Delete unused backgrounds +Deletes unreferenced background slides and presentation layouts from your document. +Load +Displays the Load Slide Design dialog, where you can select additional slide designs. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/05120100.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/05120100.xhp index e7117f5cac..a8c48baf09 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/05120100.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/05120100.xhp @@ -31,18 +31,18 @@ -Load Slide Design -Load additional slide designs for your presentation. -Select a design category, and then a template you want to apply. +Load Slide Design +Load additional slide designs for your presentation. +Select a design category, and then a template you want to apply. -Categories -Displays the available slide design categories. +Categories +Displays the available slide design categories. -Templates -Displays the templates for the selected design category. +Templates +Displays the templates for the selected design category. -More>> -Shows or hides a preview of a selected template. -Some templates may not contain visible text objects or drawing objects. +More>> +Shows or hides a preview of a selected template. +Some templates may not contain visible text objects or drawing objects. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/05120500m.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/05120500m.xhp index c9a8e3b2b0..b9fe8c513b 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/05120500m.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/05120500m.xhp @@ -31,22 +31,22 @@ -Delete -Deletes the selected column(s) from the table. +Delete +Deletes the selected column(s) from the table.
-This command is only available if the cursor is in a table. +This command is only available if the cursor is in a table.
-On Table Bar, click +On Table Bar, click - + Icon -Delete Column +Delete Column
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/05130000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/05130000.xhp index cf62e2143a..0f12e2c284 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/05130000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/05130000.xhp @@ -32,14 +32,14 @@ MW deleted "AutoLayout command" and changed "modifying;.." to "changing;..." -Slide Layout +Slide Layout Opens a submenu with slide layouts.
-The icon in the Presentation toolbar opens a submenu. Select the slide layout for the slide. +The icon in the Presentation toolbar opens a submenu. Select the slide layout for the slide. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/05140000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/05140000.xhp index 2708d43150..0db15af20b 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/05140000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/05140000.xhp @@ -35,26 +35,26 @@ -Modify Layer -Changes the properties of the selected layer. +Modify Layer +Changes the properties of the selected layer.
-Name -Enter a name for the selected layer. -You can only change the name of a layer you created. -Properties -Sets the properties of the selected layer. -Visible -Shows or hides the contents of the selected layer. -Printable -Prints the contents of the selected layer. -Protected -Locks the contents of the selected layer, so that they cannot be edited. +Name +Enter a name for the selected layer. +You can only change the name of a layer you created. +Properties +Sets the properties of the selected layer. +Visible +Shows or hides the contents of the selected layer. +Printable +Prints the contents of the selected layer. +Protected +Locks the contents of the selected layer, so that they cannot be edited. -Rename Layer -Renames the active layer. You can only change the name of a layer you created. +Rename Layer +Renames the active layer. You can only change the name of a layer you created. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/05150000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/05150000.xhp index a405471fe1..70081ae16f 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/05150000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/05150000.xhp @@ -31,57 +31,57 @@ -Dimensioning -Changes the length, measurement and guide properties of the selected dimension line. +Dimensioning +Changes the length, measurement and guide properties of the selected dimension line. -If you want to modify the line style or the arrow style of a dimension line, choose Format - Line. +If you want to modify the line style or the arrow style of a dimension line, choose Format - Line.
-A Dimension Line is always inserted on the layer called Dimension Lines. If you set that layer to invisible, you will not see any Dimension Line in your drawing. -Line -Sets the distance properties of the dimension line and the guides with respect to each other and to the baseline. +A Dimension Line is always inserted on the layer called Dimension Lines. If you set that layer to invisible, you will not see any Dimension Line in your drawing. +Line +Sets the distance properties of the dimension line and the guides with respect to each other and to the baseline. -Line distance -Specifies the distance between the dimension line and the baseline (line distance = 0). +Line distance +Specifies the distance between the dimension line and the baseline (line distance = 0). -Guide overhang -Specifies the length of the left and right guides starting at the baseline (line distance = 0). Positive values extend the guides above the baseline and negative values extend the guides below the baseline. +Guide overhang +Specifies the length of the left and right guides starting at the baseline (line distance = 0). Positive values extend the guides above the baseline and negative values extend the guides below the baseline. -Guide distance -Specifies the length of the right and left guides starting at the dimension line. Positive values extend the guides above the dimension line and negative values extend the guides below the dimension line. +Guide distance +Specifies the length of the right and left guides starting at the dimension line. Positive values extend the guides above the dimension line and negative values extend the guides below the dimension line. -Left guide -Specifies the length of the left guide starting at the dimension line. Positive values extend the guide below the dimension line and negative values extend the guide above the dimension line. +Left guide +Specifies the length of the left guide starting at the dimension line. Positive values extend the guide below the dimension line and negative values extend the guide above the dimension line. -Right guide -Specifies the length of the right guide starting at the dimension line. Positive values extend the guide below the dimension line and negative values extend the guide above the dimension line. +Right guide +Specifies the length of the right guide starting at the dimension line. Positive values extend the guide below the dimension line and negative values extend the guide above the dimension line. -Dimension line below the object -Reverses the properties set in the Line area. +Dimension line below the object +Reverses the properties set in the Line area. -Decimal places -Specifies the number of decimal places used for the display of line properties. -Legend -Sets the properties of the dimension text. +Decimal places +Specifies the number of decimal places used for the display of line properties. +Legend +Sets the properties of the dimension text. -Text position -Determines the position of the dimension text with respect to the dimension line and the guides. -The AutoVertical and AutoHorizontal checkboxes must be cleared before you can assign the Text position. +Text position +Determines the position of the dimension text with respect to the dimension line and the guides. +The AutoVertical and AutoHorizontal checkboxes must be cleared before you can assign the Text position. -AutoVertical -Determines the optimal vertical position for the dimension text. +AutoVertical +Determines the optimal vertical position for the dimension text. -AutoHorizontal -Determines the optimal horizontal position for the dimension text. +AutoHorizontal +Determines the optimal horizontal position for the dimension text. -Show meas. units -Shows or hides the dimension measurement units. You can also select a measurement unit you want to display from the list. +Show meas. units +Shows or hides the dimension measurement units. You can also select a measurement unit you want to display from the list. -Parallel to line -Displays the text parallel to or at 90 degrees to the dimension line. +Parallel to line +Displays the text parallel to or at 90 degrees to the dimension line. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/05170000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/05170000.xhp index d394c2e3cb..0761565634 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/05170000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/05170000.xhp @@ -34,40 +34,40 @@ -Connectors -Sets the properties of a connector. +Connectors +Sets the properties of a connector. -Type -Lists the types of connectors that are available. There are four types of connectors: standard, line, straight, and curved. -Line skew -Defines the skew of a connector line. The preview window displays the result. +Type +Lists the types of connectors that are available. There are four types of connectors: standard, line, straight, and curved. +Line skew +Defines the skew of a connector line. The preview window displays the result. -Line 1 -Enter a skew value for Line 1. +Line 1 +Enter a skew value for Line 1. -Line 2 -Enter a skew value for Line 2. +Line 2 +Enter a skew value for Line 2. -Line 3 -Enter a skew value for Line 3. -Line spacing -Sets the line spacing for the connectors. +Line 3 +Enter a skew value for Line 3. +Line spacing +Sets the line spacing for the connectors. -Begin horizontal -Enter the amount of horizontal space you want at the beginning of the connector. +Begin horizontal +Enter the amount of horizontal space you want at the beginning of the connector. -Begin vertical -Enter the amount of vertical space you want at the beginning of the connector. +Begin vertical +Enter the amount of vertical space you want at the beginning of the connector. -End horizontal -Enter the amount of horizontal space you want at the end of the connector. +End horizontal +Enter the amount of horizontal space you want at the end of the connector. -End vertical -Enter the amount of vertical space you want at the end of the connector. +End vertical +Enter the amount of vertical space you want at the end of the connector. -Reset line skew -Resets the line skew values to the default. +Reset line skew +Resets the line skew values to the default.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/05250000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/05250000.xhp index 0779978e46..dc3fac3cd5 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/05250000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/05250000.xhp @@ -29,8 +29,8 @@ -
mw deleted one index entryArrange -Changes the stacking order of a selected object. +
mw deleted one index entryArrange +Changes the stacking order of a selected object.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/05250500.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/05250500.xhp index 72442852f9..ae2f0e5955 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/05250500.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/05250500.xhp @@ -36,12 +36,12 @@ -In Front of Object -Changes the stacking order by moving the selected object in front of an object that you specify. The screen location of the selected object does not change. +In Front of Object +Changes the stacking order by moving the selected object in front of an object that you specify. The screen location of the selected object does not change.
-Select the object(s) that you want to move to the foreground. Right-click and choose Arrange – In Front of Object, and then click an object in your slide. +Select the object(s) that you want to move to the foreground. Right-click and choose Arrange – In Front of Object, and then click an object in your slide. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/05250600.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/05250600.xhp index abfc30345d..f172adb60b 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/05250600.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/05250600.xhp @@ -36,14 +36,14 @@ -Behind Object -Changes the stacking order by moving the selected object behind an object that you specify. The screen location of the selected object does not change. +Behind Object +Changes the stacking order by moving the selected object behind an object that you specify. The screen location of the selected object does not change.
-Select the object(s) that you want to move behind an other object. Right-click and choose Arrange - Behind Object, and then click an object in your slide. -Arranging objects affects the stacking order of all objects in your document. +Select the object(s) that you want to move behind an other object. Right-click and choose Arrange - Behind Object, and then click an object in your slide. +Arranging objects affects the stacking order of all objects in your document. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/05250700.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/05250700.xhp index 0bd3eec555..5cda0a6b86 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/05250700.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/05250700.xhp @@ -38,12 +38,12 @@ -Reverse -Reverses the stacking order of the selected objects. +Reverse +Reverses the stacking order of the selected objects.
-You can select this function only if at least two drawing elements are selected together. +You can select this function only if at least two drawing elements are selected together. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/06030000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/06030000.xhp index 63c531ceb4..0205f32727 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/06030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/06030000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Hyphenation - Turns hyphenation option for text objects on or off. You can turn hyphenation on or off for each paragraph. +Hyphenation + Turns hyphenation option for text objects on or off. You can turn hyphenation on or off for each paragraph.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/06040000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/06040000.xhp index 4765ffcf02..de46bef194 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/06040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/06040000.xhp @@ -36,41 +36,41 @@ MW transferred two index entries to the guide show.xhp. -Slide Transition -Defines the special effect that plays when you display a slide during a slide show. +Slide Transition +Defines the special effect that plays when you display a slide during a slide show.
-To apply the same transition effect to more than one slide, switch to the Slide Sorter, select the slides, and then choose Slide - Slide Transition. +To apply the same transition effect to more than one slide, switch to the Slide Sorter, select the slides, and then choose Slide - Slide Transition. -Slide Transition -Select the slide transition you want to use for the selected slides. +Slide Transition +Select the slide transition you want to use for the selected slides. -Variant -Select a variation of the transition. This list is only available for certain transitions. +Variant +Select a variation of the transition. This list is only available for certain transitions. -Duration -Sets the duration of the slide transition. +Duration +Sets the duration of the slide transition. -Sound -Lists sounds that can played during the slide transition. -Loop until next sound -Select to play the sound repeatedly until another sound starts. -Advance slide -Specifies how to get the next slide. -On mouse click -Select to advance to the next slide on a mouse click. +Sound +Lists sounds that can played during the slide transition. +Loop until next sound +Select to play the sound repeatedly until another sound starts. +Advance slide +Specifies how to get the next slide. +On mouse click +Select to advance to the next slide on a mouse click. -Automatically after -Select to advance to the next slide after a number of seconds. Enter the seconds in the numerical field next to the spin button, or click the spin button. -Apply Transition to All Slides -Applies the selected slide transition to all slides in the current presentation document. -Play -Shows the current slide transition as a preview. -Automatic preview -Select to see the slide transitions automatically in the document. +Automatically after +Select to advance to the next slide after a number of seconds. Enter the seconds in the numerical field next to the spin button, or click the spin button. +Apply Transition to All Slides +Applies the selected slide transition to all slides in the current presentation document. +Play +Shows the current slide transition as a preview. +Automatic preview +Select to see the slide transitions automatically in the document. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp index fb387e6294..f20b4d2976 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp @@ -30,197 +30,183 @@
-Animation - Creates a custom animation on the current slide. You can only use existing objects to create an animation. +Animation + Creates a custom animation on the current slide. You can only use existing objects to create an animation.
- You can copy and paste animations into %PRODUCTNAME Writer. - Animation - Shows a preview of the objects in the animation. You can also press the Play button to view the animation. + You can copy and paste animations into %PRODUCTNAME Writer. + Animation + Shows a preview of the objects in the animation. You can also press the Play button to view the animation. -Jumps to the first image in the animation sequence. +Jumps to the first image in the animation sequence. - + Icon - First image + First image
-Plays the animation backwards. +Plays the animation backwards. - + Icon - Backwards + Backwards
-Stops playing the animation. +Stops playing the animation. - + Icon - Stop + Stop
-Plays the animation. +Plays the animation. - + Icon - Play + Play
-Jumps to the last image in the animation sequence. +Jumps to the last image in the animation sequence. - + Icon - Last image + Last image
-Image Number - Indicates the position of the current image in the animation sequence. If you want to view another image, enter its number or click the up and down arrows. +Image Number + Indicates the position of the current image in the animation sequence. If you want to view another image, enter its number or click the up and down arrows. -Duration - Enter the number of seconds to display the current image. This option is only available if you select the Bitmap object option in the Animation group field. +Duration + Enter the number of seconds to display the current image. This option is only available if you select the Bitmap object option in the Animation group field. -Loop count - Sets the number of times that the animation is played. If you want the animation to play continuously, choose Max. - Image - Adds or removes objects from your animation. +Loop count + Sets the number of times that the animation is played. If you want the animation to play continuously, choose Max. + Image + Adds or removes objects from your animation. -Apply Object - Adds selected object(s) as a single image. +Apply Object + Adds selected object(s) as a single image. - + Icon - Apply Object + Apply Object
-Apply Objects Individually - Adds an image for each selected object. If you select a grouped object, an image is created for each object in the group. - You can also select an animation, such as an animated GIF, and click this icon to open it for editing. When you are finished editing the animation, click Create to insert a new animation into your slide. +Apply Objects Individually + Adds an image for each selected object. If you select a grouped object, an image is created for each object in the group. + You can also select an animation, such as an animated GIF, and click this icon to open it for editing. When you are finished editing the animation, click Create to insert a new animation into your slide. - + Icon - Apply Objects Individually + Apply Objects Individually
-Delete Current Image - Deletes current image from the animation sequence. +Delete Current Image + Deletes current image from the animation sequence. - + Icon - Delete Current Image + Delete Current Image
-Delete All Images - Deletes all of the images in the animation. +Delete All Images + Deletes all of the images in the animation. - + Icon - Delete All Images + Delete All Images
- Number - Total number of images in the animation. - Animation group - Sets object properties for your animation. + Number + Total number of images in the animation. + Animation group + Sets object properties for your animation. -Group object - Assembles images into a single object so that they can be moved as a group. You can still edit individual objects by double-clicking the group in the slide. +Group object + Assembles images into a single object so that they can be moved as a group. You can still edit individual objects by double-clicking the group in the slide. -Bitmap object - Combines images into a single image. +Bitmap object + Combines images into a single image. -Alignment - Aligns the images in your animation. +Alignment + Aligns the images in your animation. -Create - Inserts the animation into the current slide. +Create + Inserts the animation into the current slide.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/06060000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/06060000.xhp index e7acec3513..2c637838c1 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/06060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/06060000.xhp @@ -40,86 +40,86 @@ mw added "lists;" and "animations;" -Custom Animation Pane -Assigns effects to selected objects. +Custom Animation Pane +Assigns effects to selected objects.
-Animation List -The animation list displays all animations for the current slide. +Animation List +The animation list displays all animations for the current slide. -Each slide has one main animation that runs when the slide is shown. +Each slide has one main animation that runs when the slide is shown. -More animations may be present, which run when a shape is shown. If any of these animated shapes are present, they are listed in the lower half of the animation list. Tabs display the name of each shape that runs an animation. +More animations may be present, which run when a shape is shown. If any of these animated shapes are present, they are listed in the lower half of the animation list. Tabs display the name of each shape that runs an animation. -Each list entry can consist of the following columns, from left to right: +Each list entry can consist of the following columns, from left to right: -An optional + character signals that the text paragraphs are animated. +An optional + character signals that the text paragraphs are animated. -The second column shows the execution number of the animation. +The second column shows the execution number of the animation. -Column three shows a mouse icon if the animation is started by a mouse click, and a clock if the animation starts after the previous animation ends. +Column three shows a mouse icon if the animation is started by a mouse click, and a clock if the animation starts after the previous animation ends. -In column four, an icon shows the animation effect. +In column four, an icon shows the animation effect. -The fifth column shows the name of the shape for this animation effect and optionally the first characters of animated text. +The fifth column shows the name of the shape for this animation effect and optionally the first characters of animated text. -Add -Opens the Custom Animation dialog to add another animation effect for the selected object on the slide. +Add +Opens the Custom Animation dialog to add another animation effect for the selected object on the slide. -Change -Opens the Custom Animation dialog to change the animation effect for the selected entry on the animation list. +Change +Opens the Custom Animation dialog to change the animation effect for the selected entry on the animation list. -Remove -Removes the selected animation effects from the animation list. +Remove +Removes the selected animation effects from the animation list. -Start -Displays the start property of the selected animation effect. The following start properties are available: +Start +Displays the start property of the selected animation effect. The following start properties are available: - + On click - the animation stops at this effect until the next mouse click. - + With previous - the animation runs immediately. - + After previous - the animation runs as soon as the previous animation ends. UFI: removed help id -Property +Property Selects the additional properties of the animation. Click the Options button to open the Effect Options dialog, where you can select and apply properties. -Speed -Specifies the speed or duration of the selected animation effect. +Speed +Specifies the speed or duration of the selected animation effect. -Change order -Click one of the buttons to move the selected animation effect up or down in the list. +Change order +Click one of the buttons to move the selected animation effect up or down in the list. -Play -Plays the selected animation effect in the preview. +Play +Plays the selected animation effect in the preview. -Slide Show -Starts the slide show from the current slide. +Slide Show +Starts the slide show from the current slide. -Automatic preview -Select to preview new or edited effects on the slide while you assign them. +Automatic preview +Select to preview new or edited effects on the slide while you assign them.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/06070000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/06070000.xhp index cbe0e5a005..dd7f8bb286 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/06070000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/06070000.xhp @@ -37,70 +37,70 @@ exiting;by clicking objects mw made "exiting..." a two level entry -Interaction -Defines how the selected object behaves when you click on it during a slide show. +Interaction +Defines how the selected object behaves when you click on it during a slide show. UFI: Deleted many paras, see #60550
-Action at mouse click -Specifies the action that will run when you click the selected object during a slide show. You can also assign actions to grouped objects. -No action -No action occurs. -Go to previous slide -Moves back one slide in the slide show. -Go to next slide -Moves forward one slide in the slide show. -Go to first slide -Jumps to the first slide in the slide show. -Go to last slide -Jumps to the last slide in the slide show. -Go to page or object -Jumps to a slide or a named object in a slide. -Target -Lists the slides and the objects that you can target. -Slide / Object -Enter the name of the slide or the object that you want to look for. -Find -Searches for the specified slide or object. -Go to document -Opens and displays a file during a slide show. If you select a $[officename] file as the target document, you can also specify the page that will open. -Document -Define the location of the target document. -Document -Enter a path to the file you want to open, or click Browse to locate the file. -Browse -Locate the file you want to open. -Play audio -Plays an audio file. -Audio -Define the location of the audio file. -Audio -Enter a path to the audio file you want to open, or click Browse to locate the file. -Browse -Locate the audio file you want to play. -If you did not install audio files with $[officename], you can run the $[officename] Setup program again and select Modify. -Play -Plays the selected audio file. -Run program -Starts a program during a slide show. -Program -Program -Enter a path to the program you want to start, or click Browse to locate the program. -Browse -Locate the program you want to start. -Run macro -Runs a macro during the slide show. -Macro -Macro -Enter a path to the macro you want to run, or click Browse to locate the macro. -Browse -Locate the macro you want to run. -Exit presentation -Ends the presentation. -Start object action -You can choose the "Start object action" entry for inserted OLE objects. -Edit -Opens the object in edit mode. +Action at mouse click +Specifies the action that will run when you click the selected object during a slide show. You can also assign actions to grouped objects. +No action +No action occurs. +Go to previous slide +Moves back one slide in the slide show. +Go to next slide +Moves forward one slide in the slide show. +Go to first slide +Jumps to the first slide in the slide show. +Go to last slide +Jumps to the last slide in the slide show. +Go to page or object +Jumps to a slide or a named object in a slide. +Target +Lists the slides and the objects that you can target. +Slide / Object +Enter the name of the slide or the object that you want to look for. +Find +Searches for the specified slide or object. +Go to document +Opens and displays a file during a slide show. If you select a $[officename] file as the target document, you can also specify the page that will open. +Document +Define the location of the target document. +Document +Enter a path to the file you want to open, or click Browse to locate the file. +Browse +Locate the file you want to open. +Play audio +Plays an audio file. +Audio +Define the location of the audio file. +Audio +Enter a path to the audio file you want to open, or click Browse to locate the file. +Browse +Locate the audio file you want to play. +If you did not install audio files with $[officename], you can run the $[officename] Setup program again and select Modify. +Play +Plays the selected audio file. +Run program +Starts a program during a slide show. +Program +Program +Enter a path to the program you want to start, or click Browse to locate the program. +Browse +Locate the program you want to start. +Run macro +Runs a macro during the slide show. +Macro +Macro +Enter a path to the macro you want to run, or click Browse to locate the macro. +Browse +Locate the macro you want to run. +Exit presentation +Ends the presentation. +Start object action +You can choose the "Start object action" entry for inserted OLE objects. +Edit +Opens the object in edit mode. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/06100000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/06100000.xhp index 6fdaae5c13..0bee89bfc8 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/06100000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/06100000.xhp @@ -29,42 +29,42 @@ -Custom Slide Shows -Defines a custom slide show using slides within the current presentation. You can then pick slides to meet the needs of your audience. You can create as many custom slide shows as you want. +Custom Slide Shows +Defines a custom slide show using slides within the current presentation. You can then pick slides to meet the needs of your audience. You can create as many custom slide shows as you want.
-Name of the presentation(s) -Lists the custom slide shows that are available. -To create a custom slide show, click New. +Name of the presentation(s) +Lists the custom slide shows that are available. +To create a custom slide show, click New. -Use Custom Slide Show -Runs the custom slide show you selected when you click Start. Otherwise, the entire presentation is shown. -To run a custom slide show: +Use Custom Slide Show +Runs the custom slide show you selected when you click Start. Otherwise, the entire presentation is shown. +To run a custom slide show: -Click the show in the list and then select Use Custom Slide Show. +Click the show in the list and then select Use Custom Slide Show. -Click Start. +Click Start. -New +New -Edit -Add, remove or reorder slides as well as change the name of the selected custom slide show. +Edit +Add, remove or reorder slides as well as change the name of the selected custom slide show. -Copy -Creates a copy of the selected custom slide show. You can modify the name of the show by clicking Edit. +Copy +Creates a copy of the selected custom slide show. You can modify the name of the show by clicking Edit. -Start -Runs the slide show. Ensure that Use Custom Slide Show is selected if you want to run a custom presentation. +Start +Runs the slide show. Ensure that Use Custom Slide Show is selected if you want to run a custom presentation. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/06100100.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/06100100.xhp index 5798ddad1d..84fb022cf2 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/06100100.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/06100100.xhp @@ -32,20 +32,20 @@ - Define Custom Slide Show + Define Custom Slide Show Creates a custom slide show.called from 06100000, so do not delete avis/aend!!!
- Select a slide and click >> or << to add or remove the slide from the list. - Adds an existing slide to the bottom of the Selected slides list. You need to select a slide in the Existing slides list before you can use this button. - Removes a slide from the Selected slides list. You need to choose a slide in the Selected slides list before you can use this button. - Name - Displays the name of the custom slide show. If you want, you can enter a new name. - Existing slides - Lists all of the slides in the order in which they appear in the current document. - Selected slides - Lists all of the slides in the custom slide show. If you want, you can change the order of the list by dragging the slides up or down. + Select a slide and click >> or << to add or remove the slide from the list. + Adds an existing slide to the bottom of the Selected slides list. You need to select a slide in the Existing slides list before you can use this button. + Removes a slide from the Selected slides list. You need to choose a slide in the Selected slides list before you can use this button. + Name + Displays the name of the custom slide show. If you want, you can enter a new name. + Existing slides + Lists all of the slides in the order in which they appear in the current document. + Selected slides + Lists all of the slides in the custom slide show. If you want, you can change the order of the list by dragging the slides up or down. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/13050000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/13050000.xhp index 7274cbbeae..6add6ee3c0 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/13050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/13050000.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Convert - Options for converting the selected object. + Convert + Options for converting the selected object.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/13050100.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/13050100.xhp index dcaed9448f..596b2c5b1b 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/13050100.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/13050100.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
-To Curve -Converts the selected object to a Bézier curve. +To Curve +Converts the selected object to a Bézier curve.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/13050200.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/13050200.xhp index 0d5d4625bd..4e1cd76c00 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/13050200.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/13050200.xhp @@ -33,37 +33,37 @@
-To Polygon -Converts the selected object to a polygon (a closed object bounded by straight lines). The appearance of the object does not change. If you want, you can right-click and choose Edit Points to view the changes. +To Polygon +Converts the selected object to a polygon (a closed object bounded by straight lines). The appearance of the object does not change. If you want, you can right-click and choose Edit Points to view the changes.
-Convert to Polygon -The following options are required to convert a bitmap image to a polygon. The converted image is actually a collection of smaller polygons filled with color. -Settings -Set the conversion options for the image. +Convert to Polygon +The following options are required to convert a bitmap image to a polygon. The converted image is actually a collection of smaller polygons filled with color. +Settings +Set the conversion options for the image. -Number of colors: -Enter the number of colors to be displayed in the converted image. $[officename] generates a polygon for each occurrence of a color in the image. +Number of colors: +Enter the number of colors to be displayed in the converted image. $[officename] generates a polygon for each occurrence of a color in the image. -Point reduction -Removes color polygons that are smaller than the pixel value you enter. +Point reduction +Removes color polygons that are smaller than the pixel value you enter. -Fill holes -Fills the color gaps caused by applying a point reduction. +Fill holes +Fills the color gaps caused by applying a point reduction. -Tile size -Enter the size of the rectangle for the background fill. -Source image: -Preview of the original image. -Vectorized image: -Preview of the converted image. Click Preview to generate the vectorized image. -Progress -Displays the conversion progress. +Tile size +Enter the size of the rectangle for the background fill. +Source image: +Preview of the original image. +Vectorized image: +Preview of the converted image. Click Preview to generate the vectorized image. +Progress +Displays the conversion progress. -Preview -Previews the converted image without applying the changes. +Preview +Previews the converted image without applying the changes. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/13050300.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/13050300.xhp index 750226a15d..a3aaed0d07 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/13050300.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/13050300.xhp @@ -32,28 +32,28 @@
-Convert to 3D -Converts the selected object to a three-dimensional (3D) object. +Convert to 3D +Converts the selected object to a three-dimensional (3D) object.
- + The selected object is first converted to a contour, and then to a 3D object. -If you select two or more objects and convert them to 3D, the result is a 3D group that acts as a single object. You can edit the individual objects in the group by choosing +If you select two or more objects and convert them to 3D, the result is a 3D group that acts as a single object. You can edit the individual objects in the group by choosing Modify - Enter Group Format - Group - Enter Group. Choose Modify – Exit Group Format – Group – Exit Group when you are finished. -Converting a group of objects to 3D does not change the stacking order of the individual objects. +Converting a group of objects to 3D does not change the stacking order of the individual objects. -Press F3 to quickly enter a group and Ctrl+F3 to leave the group. +Press F3 to quickly enter a group and Ctrl+F3 to leave the group. -You can also convert bitmap images and vector graphics, including clipart, to 3D objects. $[officename] treats bitmaps as rectangles and vector graphics as a group of polygons when converting to 3D. -Even drawing objects that contain text can be converted. -If you want, you can also apply a 3D Effect to the converted object. +You can also convert bitmap images and vector graphics, including clipart, to 3D objects. $[officename] treats bitmaps as rectangles and vector graphics as a group of polygons when converting to 3D. +Even drawing objects that contain text can be converted. +If you want, you can also apply a 3D Effect to the converted object. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/13050400.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/13050400.xhp index d86b77359a..74e597d021 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/13050400.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/13050400.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
-Convert to 3D Rotation Object -Creates a three-dimensional shape by rotating the selected object around its vertical axis. +Convert to 3D Rotation Object +Creates a three-dimensional shape by rotating the selected object around its vertical axis.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/13050500.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/13050500.xhp index f3192f620c..969f5438e3 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/13050500.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/13050500.xhp @@ -36,13 +36,13 @@ -To Bitmap -Converts the selected object to a bitmap (a grid of pixels that represents an image). +To Bitmap +Converts the selected object to a bitmap (a grid of pixels that represents an image).
-For more information, see the Glossary. +For more information, see the Glossary.
-You can also copy the selected object and choose Edit - Paste Special and select the bitmap format from the list. +You can also copy the selected object and choose Edit - Paste Special and select the bitmap format from the list. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/13050600.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/13050600.xhp index a6f8dfafcf..115f753793 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/13050600.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/13050600.xhp @@ -36,13 +36,13 @@ -To metafile -Converts the selected object to Windows Metafile Format (WMF), containing both bitmap and vector graphic data. +To metafile +Converts the selected object to Windows Metafile Format (WMF), containing both bitmap and vector graphic data.
-For more information on WMF, see the Glossary. +For more information on WMF, see the Glossary.
-You can also copy the selected object and choose Edit - Paste Special and select MetaFile from the list. +You can also copy the selected object and choose Edit - Paste Special and select MetaFile from the list. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/13050700.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/13050700.xhp index f812b7816f..eb2e55f47d 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/13050700.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/13050700.xhp @@ -36,12 +36,12 @@ -To Contour -Converts the selected object to a polygon, or a group of polygons. If the conversion creates a group of polygons (for example, when you convert a text object), then press F3 to enter the group before you can select an individual polygon. +To Contour +Converts the selected object to a polygon, or a group of polygons. If the conversion creates a group of polygons (for example, when you convert a text object), then press F3 to enter the group before you can select an individual polygon.
-Once you convert a line or a text object to a contour, you can no longer edit it as you normally would. Instead, you can edit the contour as you would any polygon, including using the Edit – Points command to adjust its shape. +Once you convert a line or a text object to a contour, you can no longer edit it as you normally would. Instead, you can edit the contour as you would any polygon, including using the Edit – Points command to adjust its shape. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/13140000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/13140000.xhp index 71195b0909..a80aa4d2e1 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/13140000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/13140000.xhp @@ -33,10 +33,10 @@
-Combine -Combines two or more selected objects into a single shape. Unlike grouping, a combined object takes on the properties of the lowermost object in the stacking order. You can split apart combined objects, but the original object properties are lost. +Combine +Combines two or more selected objects into a single shape. Unlike grouping, a combined object takes on the properties of the lowermost object in the stacking order. You can split apart combined objects, but the original object properties are lost.
-When you combine objects, the drawing elements are replaced by Bézier curves and holes appear where the objects overlap. +When you combine objects, the drawing elements are replaced by Bézier curves and holes appear where the objects overlap.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/13150000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/13150000.xhp index 167f529338..e5bd10c5e1 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/13150000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/13150000.xhp @@ -36,8 +36,8 @@ -Split -Splits a combined object into individual objects. The resulting objects have the same line and fill properties as the combined object. +Split +Splits a combined object into individual objects. The resulting objects have the same line and fill properties as the combined object.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/13160000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/13160000.xhp index 73876f7dcd..2dbda03c1f 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/13160000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/13160000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Connect - Creates a line or Bézier curve by connecting two or more lines, Bézier curves, or other objects with a line. Closed objects containing a fill are converted to lines and lose their fill. +Connect + Creates a line or Bézier curve by connecting two or more lines, Bézier curves, or other objects with a line. Closed objects containing a fill are converted to lines and lose their fill.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/13170000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/13170000.xhp index 05d894d727..e25a413273 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/13170000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/13170000.xhp @@ -36,10 +36,10 @@ -Break -Breaks apart lines joined with the Connect command. +Break +Breaks apart lines joined with the Connect command.
-You cannot apply a fill to closed shapes that have been broken apart with this command. +You cannot apply a fill to closed shapes that have been broken apart with this command.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/13180000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/13180000.xhp index 8b437d26b6..55af7abde0 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/13180000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/13180000.xhp @@ -33,13 +33,13 @@
- Shapes - Creates a shape from two or more selected objects. + Shapes + Creates a shape from two or more selected objects.
- Shapes take on the properties of the lowermost object in the stacking order. + Shapes take on the properties of the lowermost object in the stacking order. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/13180100.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/13180100.xhp index 73b0072b03..179cac0174 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/13180100.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/13180100.xhp @@ -34,13 +34,13 @@
-Merge - Adds the area of the selected objects to the area of the lowermost object in the selection. This command is best used with overlapping objects. +Merge + Adds the area of the selected objects to the area of the lowermost object in the selection. This command is best used with overlapping objects.
- Any spaces that are visible between the objects are preserved. + Any spaces that are visible between the objects are preserved. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/13180200.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/13180200.xhp index dc95619d61..c156668fa5 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/13180200.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/13180200.xhp @@ -34,13 +34,13 @@
-Subtract - Subtracts the area of the selected objects from the area of the lowermost object. +Subtract + Subtracts the area of the selected objects from the area of the lowermost object.
- Any spaces between the objects are preserved. + Any spaces between the objects are preserved. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/13180300.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/13180300.xhp index b05173f80c..f4c4f9e191 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/13180300.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/13180300.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Intersect - Creates a shape from the overlapping area of the selected objects. +Intersect + Creates a shape from the overlapping area of the selected objects.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/animationeffect.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/animationeffect.xhp index 9ba81d57f4..3e6d73ac19 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/animationeffect.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/animationeffect.xhp @@ -31,23 +31,23 @@ -Custom Animation -Select an effect and click OK to assign it. -Adds a new animation effect to the object selected in the slide, or changes the animation of the selected element in the Custom Animations Pane. -The dialog contains the following tab pages: -Entrance -Select an entrance effect from the effect categories. -Emphasis -Select an emphasis effect from the effect categories. -Exit -Select an exiting effect from the effect categories. -Motion Paths -Select a motion path from the motion path categories. +Custom Animation +Select an effect and click OK to assign it. +Adds a new animation effect to the object selected in the slide, or changes the animation of the selected element in the Custom Animations Pane. +The dialog contains the following tab pages: +Entrance +Select an entrance effect from the effect categories. +Emphasis +Select an emphasis effect from the effect categories. +Exit +Select an exiting effect from the effect categories. +Motion Paths +Select a motion path from the motion path categories. -Speed -Specifies the speed or duration of the selected animation effect. +Speed +Specifies the speed or duration of the selected animation effect. -Automatic preview -Select to preview new or edited effects on the slide. +Automatic preview +Select to preview new or edited effects on the slide. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptions.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptions.xhp index 4f64a3b130..450f59910c 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptions.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptions.xhp @@ -29,17 +29,17 @@ -Effect Options -Specifies additional properties for the selected element in the Custom Animations pane. -Assign an effect to an object, then click the Options button to open the Effect Options dialog. -The dialog contains the following tab pages: - +Effect Options +Specifies additional properties for the selected element in the Custom Animations pane. +Assign an effect to an object, then click the Options button to open the Effect Options dialog. +The dialog contains the following tab pages: + - + - + diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionseffect.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionseffect.xhp index b0da779e6d..d51fb7b20d 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionseffect.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionseffect.xhp @@ -30,77 +30,77 @@ -Effect +Effect -Specifies the settings and enhancements for the current effect in the Effect Options dialog. -Settings -For some effects, the settings can be specified on the Effect tab page. -Direction -Specifies the direction for the effect. -Accelerated start -Enable this option to assign a gradually increasing speed to the start of the effect. -Decelerated end -Enable this option to assign a gradually decreasing speed to the end of the effect. -Enhancements -Specifies the enhancements for the current effect. -Sound -Select a sound from the Gallery or select one of the special entries. +Specifies the settings and enhancements for the current effect in the Effect Options dialog. +Settings +For some effects, the settings can be specified on the Effect tab page. +Direction +Specifies the direction for the effect. +Accelerated start +Enable this option to assign a gradually increasing speed to the start of the effect. +Decelerated end +Enable this option to assign a gradually decreasing speed to the end of the effect. +Enhancements +Specifies the enhancements for the current effect. +Sound +Select a sound from the Gallery or select one of the special entries. - + No sound - no sound is played during animation of the effect. - + Stop previous sound - the sound of the previous effect is stopped as soon as the current effect runs. - + Other sound - displays a file open dialog to select a sound file. -Sound button -Plays the selected sound file. +Sound button +Plays the selected sound file. -After animation -Select a color to be shown after the animation ends, or select another after-effect from the list: +After animation +Select a color to be shown after the animation ends, or select another after-effect from the list: - + Dim with color - after the animation a dim color fills the shape. - + Don't dim - no after-effect runs. - + Hide after animation - hides the shape after the animation ends. - + Hide on next animation - hides the shape on the next animation. -Dim color -Select the dim color. -Text animation -Select the animation mode for the text of the current shape: +Dim color +Select the dim color. +Text animation +Select the animation mode for the text of the current shape: - + All at once - animates the text all at once. - + Word by word - animates the text word by word. - + Letter by letter - animates the text letter by letter. -Delay between characters -Specifies the percentage of delay between animations of words or letters. +Delay between characters +Specifies the percentage of delay between animations of words or letters. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstext.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstext.xhp index 4f9f167948..8a822ec141 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstext.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstext.xhp @@ -31,36 +31,36 @@ -Text Animation +Text Animation -Specifies the text animation settings for the current effect in the Effect Options dialog. +Specifies the text animation settings for the current effect in the Effect Options dialog. -Group text -Specifies how multiple paragraphs are animated: +Group text +Specifies how multiple paragraphs are animated: - + As one object - all paragraphs are animated as one object. - + All paragraphs at once - all paragraphs are animated at once, but can have different effects. - + By 1st level paragraphs - the first level paragraphs, including sub-level paragraphs, are animated one after another. -Automatically after -If "Group text - By 1st level paragraphs" is selected, the paragraphs are animated one after the other. +Automatically after +If "Group text - By 1st level paragraphs" is selected, the paragraphs are animated one after the other. -Enter an additional delay in seconds to animate subsequent paragraphs. +Enter an additional delay in seconds to animate subsequent paragraphs. -Animate attached shape -Deselect this box to animate only the text, not the shape. +Animate attached shape +Deselect this box to animate only the text, not the shape. -In reverse order -Animates the paragraphs in reverse order. +In reverse order +Animates the paragraphs in reverse order. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstiming.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstiming.xhp index 8af18efd1b..258aa14444 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstiming.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstiming.xhp @@ -30,51 +30,51 @@ -Timing +Timing -Specifies the timing for the current effect in the Effect Options dialog. -Start -Displays the start property of the selected animation effect. The following start properties are available: +Specifies the timing for the current effect in the Effect Options dialog. +Start +Displays the start property of the selected animation effect. The following start properties are available: - + On click - the animation stops at this effect until the next mouse click. - + With previous - the animation runs immediately. - + After previous - the animation runs as soon as the previous animation ends. -Delay -Specifies an additional delay of n seconds until the effect starts. -Duration -Specifies the duration of the effect. -Repeat -Specifies whether and how to repeat the current effect. Enter the number of repeats, or select from the list: +Delay +Specifies an additional delay of n seconds until the effect starts. +Duration +Specifies the duration of the effect. +Repeat +Specifies whether and how to repeat the current effect. Enter the number of repeats, or select from the list: - + (none) - the effect is not repeated. - + Until next click - the animation is repeated until the next mouse click. - + Until end of slide - the animation repeats as long as the slide is displayed. -Rewind when done playing -Specifies whether to let the animated shape return to its starting state after the animation ends. -Animate as part of click sequence -Specifies whether to let the animation start in the normal click sequence. -Start effect on click of -Specifies whether to let the animation start when a specified shape is clicked. -Select the shape by its name from the list box. +Rewind when done playing +Specifies whether to let the animated shape return to its starting state after the animation ends. +Animate as part of click sequence +Specifies whether to let the animation start in the normal click sequence. +Start effect on click of +Specifies whether to let the animation start when a specified shape is clicked. +Select the shape by its name from the list box. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/01/slidesorter.xhp b/source/text/simpress/01/slidesorter.xhp index 955c25f475..095113c290 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/01/slidesorter.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/01/slidesorter.xhp @@ -33,12 +33,12 @@
-Page +Page Slide Pane -Switches the Page +Switches the Page Slide Pane on and off.
-You can use the Page +You can use the Page Slide Pane to add, to rename, to delete, and to arrange slides or pages in Impress and Draw. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/04010000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/04010000.xhp index 0af80434d4..2899330af2 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/04010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/04010000.xhp @@ -33,20 +33,20 @@
-Show/Hide SlideUFI: menu and icon -Hides the selected slide so that it is not displayed during a slide show. +Show/Hide SlideUFI: menu and icon +Hides the selected slide so that it is not displayed during a slide show.
-The number of a hidden slide is crossed out. To show a hidden slide, choose Slide Show - Show/Hide Slide again. +The number of a hidden slide is crossed out. To show a hidden slide, choose Slide Show - Show/Hide Slide again.
- + Icon -Show/Hide Slide +Show/Hide Slide
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/04020000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/04020000.xhp index 3b6a16b093..98d4d7ebca 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/04020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/04020000.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
-Slides Per Row -Enter the number of slides to display on each row in the Slide Sorter. +Slides Per Row +Enter the number of slides to display on each row in the Slide Sorter.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/04030000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/04030000.xhp index 43adda69be..8398ff01f5 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/04030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/04030000.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@
-Slide Effects -Select the transition effect that appears before the current slide is shown. +Slide Effects +Select the transition effect that appears before the current slide is shown.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/04060000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/04060000.xhp index 8d3602d0a1..158021e59c 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/04060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/04060000.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@
-Time -Enter the amount of time before the slide show automatically advances to the next slide. This option is only available for automatic transition. +Time +Enter the amount of time before the slide show automatically advances to the next slide. This option is only available for automatic transition.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/04070000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/04070000.xhp index 2db6afaeeb..4159002113 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/04070000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/04070000.xhp @@ -34,19 +34,19 @@
-Rehearse Timings -Starts a slide show with a timer in the lower left corner. +Rehearse Timings +Starts a slide show with a timer in the lower left corner.
- + Icon -Rehearse Timings +Rehearse Timings
@@ -54,6 +54,6 @@
-Slide Show Settings +Slide Show Settings diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/08020000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/08020000.xhp index 283c6139ad..783af891b7 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/08020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/08020000.xhp @@ -30,9 +30,9 @@
-Current Size -Displays the X and Y position of the cursor and the size of the selected object. +Current Size +Displays the X and Y position of the cursor and the size of the selected object.
-This Status bar field uses the same measurement units as the rulers. You can define the units by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General. +This Status bar field uses the same measurement units as the rulers. You can define the units by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/08060000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/08060000.xhp index e37af11f54..93eac5f61a 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/08060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/08060000.xhp @@ -33,10 +33,10 @@
-Current Slide/Level - Displays the current slide number followed by the total number of slides. +Current Slide/Level + Displays the current slide number followed by the total number of slides.
- In Layer Mode, the name of the layer containing the selected object is displayed. + In Layer Mode, the name of the layer containing the selected object is displayed. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/10020000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/10020000.xhp index df90a0b1c9..417cb55f40 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/10020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/10020000.xhp @@ -40,19 +40,19 @@ -Zoom -Reduces or enlarges the screen display of the current document. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Zoom toolbar. +Zoom +Reduces or enlarges the screen display of the current document. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Zoom toolbar.
- + Icon -Zoom +Zoom
@@ -62,12 +62,12 @@ - + Icon -Zoom ($[officename] Impress in Outline and Slide View) +Zoom ($[officename] Impress in Outline and Slide View)
@@ -75,172 +75,172 @@
-Zoom In -Displays the slide at two times its current size. -You can also select the Zoom In tool and drag a rectangular frame around the area you want to enlarge. +Zoom In +Displays the slide at two times its current size. +You can also select the Zoom In tool and drag a rectangular frame around the area you want to enlarge. - + Icon -Zoom In +Zoom In
-Zoom Out -Displays the slide at half its current size. +Zoom Out +Displays the slide at half its current size. - + Icon -Zoom Out +Zoom Out
-Zoom 100% -Displays the slide at its actual size. +Zoom 100% +Displays the slide at its actual size. - + Icon -Zoom 100% +Zoom 100%
-Previous Zoom -Returns the display of the slide to the previous zoom factor you applied. You can also press Command +Previous Zoom +Returns the display of the slide to the previous zoom factor you applied. You can also press Command Ctrl+Comma(,). - + Icon -Previous Zoom +Previous Zoom
-Next Zoom -Undoes the action of the Previous Zoom command. You can also press Command +Next Zoom +Undoes the action of the Previous Zoom command. You can also press Command Ctrl+Period(.). - + Icon -Next Zoom +Next Zoom
-Entire Page -Displays the entire slide on your screen. +Entire Page +Displays the entire slide on your screen. - + Icon -Entire Page +Entire Page
-Page Width -Displays the complete width of the slide. The top and bottom edges of the slide may not be visible. +Page Width +Displays the complete width of the slide. The top and bottom edges of the slide may not be visible. - + Icon -Page Width +Page Width
-Optimal View -Resizes the display to include all of the objects on the slide. +Optimal View +Resizes the display to include all of the objects on the slide. - + Icon -Optimal View +Optimal View
-Object Zoom -Resizes the display to fit the object(s) you selected. +Object Zoom +Resizes the display to fit the object(s) you selected. - + Icon -Object Zoom +Object Zoom
-Shift -Moves the slide within the $[officename] window. Place the pointer on the slide, and drag to move the slide. When you release the mouse, the last tool you used is selected. +Shift +Moves the slide within the $[officename] window. Place the pointer on the slide, and drag to move the slide. When you release the mouse, the last tool you used is selected. - + Icon -Shift +Shift
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/10030000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/10030000.xhp index 6ddf4821b7..0faa0fd68c 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/10030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/10030000.xhp @@ -47,40 +47,40 @@ mw made "slanting;..." a one level entry -Mode -UFI: was Effects toolbar -Modifies the shape, orientation or fill of the selected object(s). +Mode +UFI: was Effects toolbar +Modifies the shape, orientation or fill of the selected object(s).
- + Icon -Effects (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Effects (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only)
-To open the%PRODUCTNAME Draw Mode toolbar, click the arrow next to the Effects icon on the Drawing bar. In %PRODUCTNAME Impress, choose View - Toolbars - Mode. -Rotate -Rotates or skews the selected 2D object(s) around a pivot point. Drag a corner handle of the object in the direction you want to rotate it. To skew an object, drag a center handle in the direction you want to skew it. -Each slide has only one pivot point. Double-click an object to move the pivot point to the center of the object. You can also drag the pivot point to a new location on the screen, and then rotate the object. -If you select a group that includes a 3D object, only the 3D object is rotated. You cannot skew a 3D object, instead, you can rotate it about the X and Y axes by dragging the center handles. +To open the%PRODUCTNAME Draw Mode toolbar, click the arrow next to the Effects icon on the Drawing bar. In %PRODUCTNAME Impress, choose View - Toolbars - Mode. +Rotate +Rotates or skews the selected 2D object(s) around a pivot point. Drag a corner handle of the object in the direction you want to rotate it. To skew an object, drag a center handle in the direction you want to skew it. +Each slide has only one pivot point. Double-click an object to move the pivot point to the center of the object. You can also drag the pivot point to a new location on the screen, and then rotate the object. +If you select a group that includes a 3D object, only the 3D object is rotated. You cannot skew a 3D object, instead, you can rotate it about the X and Y axes by dragging the center handles.
- + Icon -Rotate +Rotate
@@ -88,123 +88,123 @@
-Flip -Flips the selected object(s) around a flip line, that you can drag to anywhere on the slide. Drag a handle of the object(s) across the flip line to flip the object(s). To change the orientation of the flip line, drag one of its end points to new location. +Flip +Flips the selected object(s) around a flip line, that you can drag to anywhere on the slide. Drag a handle of the object(s) across the flip line to flip the object(s). To change the orientation of the flip line, drag one of its end points to new location. - + Icon -Flip +Flip
-In 3D Rotation Object -Converts the selected 2D object(s) to a 3D object, by rotating the object(s) around a symmetry line. -Drag the symmetry line to a new location to change the shape of the converted object. To change the orientation of the symmetry line, drag one of its end points. Click the object to convert it to 3D. +In 3D Rotation Object +Converts the selected 2D object(s) to a 3D object, by rotating the object(s) around a symmetry line. +Drag the symmetry line to a new location to change the shape of the converted object. To change the orientation of the symmetry line, drag one of its end points. Click the object to convert it to 3D. - + Icon -In 3D Rotation Object +In 3D Rotation Object
-Set in circle (perspective) -Distorts the selected object by wrapping it around imaginary circles, and then adding perspective. Drag a handle of the selected object to distort it. If the selected object is not a polygon or Bézier curve, you are prompted to change the object to a curve before you can distort it. +Set in circle (perspective) +Distorts the selected object by wrapping it around imaginary circles, and then adding perspective. Drag a handle of the selected object to distort it. If the selected object is not a polygon or Bézier curve, you are prompted to change the object to a curve before you can distort it. - + Icon -Set in circle (perspective) +Set in circle (perspective)
-Set to circle (slant) -Distorts the selected object by wrapping it around imaginary circles. Drag a handle of the selected object to distort it. If the selected object is not a polygon or Bézier curve, you are prompted to change the object to a curve before you can distort it. +Set to circle (slant) +Distorts the selected object by wrapping it around imaginary circles. Drag a handle of the selected object to distort it. If the selected object is not a polygon or Bézier curve, you are prompted to change the object to a curve before you can distort it. - + Icon -Set to circle (slant) +Set to circle (slant)
-Distort -Lets you drag the handles of the selected object to change its shape. If the selected object is not a polygon or Bézier curve, you are prompted to change the object to a curve before you can distort it. +Distort +Lets you drag the handles of the selected object to change its shape. If the selected object is not a polygon or Bézier curve, you are prompted to change the object to a curve before you can distort it. - + Icon -Distort +Distort
-Transparency -Applies a transparency gradient to the selected object. The transparency line represents a grayscale, with the black handle corresponding to 0% transparency and the white handle to 100% transparency. -Drag the white handle to change the direction of the transparency gradient. Drag the black handle to change the length of the gradient. You can also drag and drop colors onto the handles from the Color Bar to change their grayscale values. -To display the Color Bar, choose View - Toolbars - Color Bar. +Transparency +Applies a transparency gradient to the selected object. The transparency line represents a grayscale, with the black handle corresponding to 0% transparency and the white handle to 100% transparency. +Drag the white handle to change the direction of the transparency gradient. Drag the black handle to change the length of the gradient. You can also drag and drop colors onto the handles from the Color Bar to change their grayscale values. +To display the Color Bar, choose View - Toolbars - Color Bar. - + Icon -Transparency +Transparency
-Gradient -Modifies the gradient fill of the selected object. This command is only available if you applied a gradient to the selected object in Format - Area. Drag the handles of the gradient line to change the direction of the gradient or the length of the gradient. You can also drag and drop colors onto the handles from the Color Bar to change the color of the gradient endpoints. -To display the Color Bar, choose View - Toolbars - Color Bar. +Gradient +Modifies the gradient fill of the selected object. This command is only available if you applied a gradient to the selected object in Format - Area. Drag the handles of the gradient line to change the direction of the gradient or the length of the gradient. You can also drag and drop colors onto the handles from the Color Bar to change the color of the gradient endpoints. +To display the Color Bar, choose View - Toolbars - Color Bar. - + Icon -Gradient +Gradient
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/10030200.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/10030200.xhp index d39bb50a5e..3295e8b3e2 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/10030200.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/10030200.xhp @@ -29,213 +29,213 @@ object bars; editing glue points -Glue Points Bar +Glue Points Bar -Insert or modify the properties of a gluepoint. A gluepoint is a point where you can attach a connector line. By default, %PRODUCTNAME automatically places a gluepoint at the center of each side of the bounding rectangle for every object you create. +Insert or modify the properties of a gluepoint. A gluepoint is a point where you can attach a connector line. By default, %PRODUCTNAME automatically places a gluepoint at the center of each side of the bounding rectangle for every object you create.
-Insert Glue Point -Inserts a gluepoint where you click in an object. +Insert Glue Point +Inserts a gluepoint where you click in an object. - + Icon -Insert Point +Insert Point
-Exit Direction Left -Connector attaches to the left edge of the selected gluepoint. +Exit Direction Left +Connector attaches to the left edge of the selected gluepoint. - + Icon -Exit Direction Left +Exit Direction Left
-Exit Direction Top -Connector attaches to the top edge of the selected gluepoint. +Exit Direction Top +Connector attaches to the top edge of the selected gluepoint. - + Icon -Exit Direction Top +Exit Direction Top
-Exit Direction Right -Connector attaches to the right edge of the selected gluepoint. +Exit Direction Right +Connector attaches to the right edge of the selected gluepoint. - + Icon -Exit Direction Right +Exit Direction Right
-Exit Direction Bottom -Connector attaches to the bottom edge of the selected gluepoint. +Exit Direction Bottom +Connector attaches to the bottom edge of the selected gluepoint. - + Icon -Exit Direction Bottom +Exit Direction Bottom
-Glue Point Relative -Maintains the relative position of a selected gluepoint when you resize an object. +Glue Point Relative +Maintains the relative position of a selected gluepoint when you resize an object. - + Icon -Glue Point Relative +Glue Point Relative
-Glue Point Horizontal Left -When the object is resized, the current gluepoint remains fixed to the left edge of the object. +Glue Point Horizontal Left +When the object is resized, the current gluepoint remains fixed to the left edge of the object. - + Icon -Glue Point Horizontal Left +Glue Point Horizontal Left
-Glue Point Horizontal Center -When the object is resized, the current gluepoint remains fixed to the center of the object. +Glue Point Horizontal Center +When the object is resized, the current gluepoint remains fixed to the center of the object. - + Icon -Glue Point Horizontal Center +Glue Point Horizontal Center
-Glue Point Horizontal Right -When the object is resized, the current gluepoint remains fixed to the right edge of the object. +Glue Point Horizontal Right +When the object is resized, the current gluepoint remains fixed to the right edge of the object. - + Icon -Glue Point Horizontal Right +Glue Point Horizontal Right
-Glue Point Vertical Top -When the object is resized, the current gluepoint remains fixed to the top edge of the object. +Glue Point Vertical Top +When the object is resized, the current gluepoint remains fixed to the top edge of the object. - + Icon -Glue Point Vertical Top +Glue Point Vertical Top
-Glue Point Vertical Center -When the object is resized, the current gluepoint remains fixed to the vertical center of the object. +Glue Point Vertical Center +When the object is resized, the current gluepoint remains fixed to the vertical center of the object. - + Icon -Glue Point Vertical Center +Glue Point Vertical Center
-Glue Point Vertical Bottom -When the object is resized, the current gluepoint remains fixed to the bottom edge of the object. +Glue Point Vertical Bottom +When the object is resized, the current gluepoint remains fixed to the bottom edge of the object. - + Icon -Glue Point Vertical Bottom +Glue Point Vertical Bottom
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/10050000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/10050000.xhp index 41e2fadf1a..24b8dc12e6 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/10050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/10050000.xhp @@ -36,52 +36,52 @@ inserting; callouts in presentations -Text -The Text toolbar contains some icons to enter different types of text boxes. +Text +The Text toolbar contains some icons to enter different types of text boxes.
-Text -Draws a text box where you click or drag in the current document. Click anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. +Text +Draws a text box where you click or drag in the current document. Click anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text.
- + Icon -Text +Text
-Fit Text to Frame -Draws a text box where you click or drag in the current document. The text that you enter is automatically resized to fit the dimensions of the text box. Click anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. +Fit Text to Frame +Draws a text box where you click or drag in the current document. The text that you enter is automatically resized to fit the dimensions of the text box. Click anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. - + Icon -Fit Text to Frame +Fit Text to Frame
-Callouts -Draws a line that ends in a rectangular callout from where you drag in the current document. The text direction is horizontal. Drag a handle of the callout to resize the callout. To change a rectangular callout to a rounded callout, drag the largest corner handle when the pointer changes to a hand. To add text, click the edge of the callout, and then type or paste your text. +Callouts +Draws a line that ends in a rectangular callout from where you drag in the current document. The text direction is horizontal. Drag a handle of the callout to resize the callout. To change a rectangular callout to a rounded callout, drag the largest corner handle when the pointer changes to a hand. To add text, click the edge of the callout, and then type or paste your text. - + Icon -Callouts +Callouts
@@ -89,17 +89,17 @@ -Fit Vertical Text to Frame -Draws a text frame with vertical text direction where you click or drag in the current document. The text that you enter is automatically resized to fit the dimensions of the frame. (Enable Asian text support to enable this icon). Click anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. You can also move the cursor to where you want to add the text, drag a text frame, and then type or paste your text. +Fit Vertical Text to Frame +Draws a text frame with vertical text direction where you click or drag in the current document. The text that you enter is automatically resized to fit the dimensions of the frame. (Enable Asian text support to enable this icon). Click anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. You can also move the cursor to where you want to add the text, drag a text frame, and then type or paste your text. - + Icon -Fit Vertical Text to Frame +Fit Vertical Text to Frame
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/10060000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/10060000.xhp index dd8cc4a009..79378508d0 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/10060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/10060000.xhp @@ -38,140 +38,140 @@ mw added "inserting;..." and made "rectangles;..." a one level entry -Rectangles +Rectangles Using Customize Toolbar, you can add the Legacy Rectangles toolbar. -Rectangle -Draws a filled rectangle where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rectangle, and drag to the size you want. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag. +Rectangle +Draws a filled rectangle where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rectangle, and drag to the size you want. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Rectangle +Rectangle
-Square -Draws a filled square where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the square, and drag to the size you want. To draw a rectangle, hold down Shift while you drag. +Square +Draws a filled square where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the square, and drag to the size you want. To draw a rectangle, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Square +Square
-Rounded Rectangle -Draws a rounded rectangle with a fill where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rounded rectangle, and drag to the size you want. To draw a rounded square, hold down Shift while you drag. +Rounded Rectangle +Draws a rounded rectangle with a fill where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rounded rectangle, and drag to the size you want. To draw a rounded square, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Rounded Rectangle +Rounded Rectangle
-Rounded Square -Draws a rounded square with a fill where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rounded square, and drag to the size you want. To draw a rounded rectangle, hold down Shift while you drag. +Rounded Square +Draws a rounded square with a fill where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rounded square, and drag to the size you want. To draw a rounded rectangle, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Rounded Square +Rounded Square
-Rectangle, Unfilled -Draws an empty rectangle where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rectangle, and drag to the size you want. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag. +Rectangle, Unfilled +Draws an empty rectangle where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rectangle, and drag to the size you want. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Rectangle, Unfilled +Rectangle, Unfilled
-Square, Unfilled -Draws an empty square where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the square, and drag to the size you want. To draw a rectangle, hold down Shift while you drag. +Square, Unfilled +Draws an empty square where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the square, and drag to the size you want. To draw a rectangle, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Square, Unfilled +Square, Unfilled
-Rounded Rectangle, Unfilled -Draws an empty rounded rectangle where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rounded rectangle, and drag to the size you want. To draw a rounded square, hold down Shift while you drag. +Rounded Rectangle, Unfilled +Draws an empty rounded rectangle where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rounded rectangle, and drag to the size you want. To draw a rounded square, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Rounded Square, Unfilled +Rounded Square, Unfilled
-Rounded Square, Unfilled -Draws an empty rounded square where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rounded square, and drag to the size you want. To draw a rounded rectangle, hold down Shift while you drag. +Rounded Square, Unfilled +Draws an empty rounded square where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rounded square, and drag to the size you want. To draw a rounded rectangle, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Rounded Square, Unfilled +Rounded Square, Unfilled
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/10070000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/10070000.xhp index b49feb1895..7556e3cfb3 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/10070000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/10070000.xhp @@ -36,212 +36,212 @@ inserting; ellipses -Ellipse +Ellipse Using Customize Toolbar, you can add the Ellipse icon which opens the Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar.i60204 -Ellipse -Draws a filled oval where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to draw the oval, and drag to the size you want. To draw a circle, hold down Shift while you drag. +Ellipse +Draws a filled oval where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to draw the oval, and drag to the size you want. To draw a circle, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Ellipse +Ellipse
-Circle -Draws a filled circle where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to draw the circle, and drag to the size you want. To draw an ellipse, hold down Shift while you drag. +Circle +Draws a filled circle where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to draw the circle, and drag to the size you want. To draw an ellipse, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Circle +Circle
-Ellipse Pie -Draws a filled shape that is defined by the arc of an oval and two radius lines in the current document. To draw an ellipse pie, drag an oval to the size you want, and then click to define the first radius line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the second radius line and click. You do not need to click on the oval. To draw a circle pie, hold down Shift while you drag. +Ellipse Pie +Draws a filled shape that is defined by the arc of an oval and two radius lines in the current document. To draw an ellipse pie, drag an oval to the size you want, and then click to define the first radius line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the second radius line and click. You do not need to click on the oval. To draw a circle pie, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Ellipse Pie +Ellipse Pie
-Circle Pie -Draws a filled shape that is defined by the arc of a circle and two radius lines in the current document. To draw a circle pie, drag a circle to the size you want, and then click to define the first radius line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the second radius line and click. You do not need to click on the circle. To draw an ellipse pie, hold down Shift while you drag. +Circle Pie +Draws a filled shape that is defined by the arc of a circle and two radius lines in the current document. To draw a circle pie, drag a circle to the size you want, and then click to define the first radius line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the second radius line and click. You do not need to click on the circle. To draw an ellipse pie, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Circle pie +Circle pie
-Ellipse Segment -Draws a filled shape that is defined by the arc of an oval and a diameter line in the current document. To draw an ellipse segment, drag an ellipse to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the diameter line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint of the diameter line and click. You do not need to click on the ellipse. To draw a circle segment, hold down Shift while you drag. +Ellipse Segment +Draws a filled shape that is defined by the arc of an oval and a diameter line in the current document. To draw an ellipse segment, drag an ellipse to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the diameter line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint of the diameter line and click. You do not need to click on the ellipse. To draw a circle segment, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Ellipse segment +Ellipse segment
-Circle Segment -Draws a filled shape that is defined by the arc of a circle and a diameter line in the current document. To draw a circle segment, drag a circle to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the diameter line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint of the diameter line and click. You do not need to click on the circle. To draw an ellipse segment, hold down Shift while you drag. +Circle Segment +Draws a filled shape that is defined by the arc of a circle and a diameter line in the current document. To draw a circle segment, drag a circle to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the diameter line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint of the diameter line and click. You do not need to click on the circle. To draw an ellipse segment, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Circle segment +Circle segment
-Ellipse, Unfilled -Draws an empty oval where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to draw the oval, and drag to the size you want. To draw a circle, hold down Shift while you drag. +Ellipse, Unfilled +Draws an empty oval where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to draw the oval, and drag to the size you want. To draw a circle, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Ellipse, Unfilled +Ellipse, Unfilled
-Circle, Unfilled -Draws an empty circle where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to draw the circle, and drag to the size you want. To draw an ellipse, hold down Shift while you drag. +Circle, Unfilled +Draws an empty circle where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to draw the circle, and drag to the size you want. To draw an ellipse, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Circle, Unfilled +Circle, Unfilled
-Ellipse Pie, Unfilled -Draws an empty shape that is defined by the arc of an oval and two radius lines in the current document. To draw an ellipse pie, drag an oval to the size you want, and then click to define the first radius line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the second radius line and click. You do not need to click on the oval. To draw a circle pie, hold down Shift while you drag. +Ellipse Pie, Unfilled +Draws an empty shape that is defined by the arc of an oval and two radius lines in the current document. To draw an ellipse pie, drag an oval to the size you want, and then click to define the first radius line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the second radius line and click. You do not need to click on the oval. To draw a circle pie, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Ellipse Pie, Unfilled +Ellipse Pie, Unfilled
-Circle Pie, Unfilled -Draws an empty shape that is defined by the arc of a circle and two radius lines in the current document. To draw a circle pie, drag a circle to the size you want, and then click to define the first radius line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the second radius line and click. You do not need to click on the circle. To draw an ellipse pie, hold down Shift while you drag. +Circle Pie, Unfilled +Draws an empty shape that is defined by the arc of a circle and two radius lines in the current document. To draw a circle pie, drag a circle to the size you want, and then click to define the first radius line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the second radius line and click. You do not need to click on the circle. To draw an ellipse pie, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Circle Pie, Unfilled +Circle Pie, Unfilled
-Ellipse Segment, Unfilled -Draws an empty shape that is defined by the arc of an oval and a diameter line in the current document. To draw an ellipse segment, drag an ellipse to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the diameter line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint of the diameter line and click. You do not need to click on the ellipse. To draw a circle segment, hold down Shift while you drag. +Ellipse Segment, Unfilled +Draws an empty shape that is defined by the arc of an oval and a diameter line in the current document. To draw an ellipse segment, drag an ellipse to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the diameter line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint of the diameter line and click. You do not need to click on the ellipse. To draw a circle segment, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Ellipse Segment, Unfilled +Ellipse Segment, Unfilled
-Circle Segment, Unfilled -Draws an empty shape that is defined by the arc of a circle and a diameter line in the current document. To draw a circle segment, drag a circle to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the diameter line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint of the diameter line and click. You do not need to click on the circle. To draw a segment that is based on an ellipse, hold down Shift while you drag. +Circle Segment, Unfilled +Draws an empty shape that is defined by the arc of a circle and a diameter line in the current document. To draw a circle segment, drag a circle to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the diameter line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint of the diameter line and click. You do not need to click on the circle. To draw a segment that is based on an ellipse, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Circle Segment, Unfilled +Circle Segment, Unfilled
-Arc -Draws an arc in the current document. To draw an arc, drag an oval to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the arc. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint and click. You do not need to click on the oval. To draw an arc that is based on a circle, hold down Shift while you drag. +Arc +Draws an arc in the current document. To draw an arc, drag an oval to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the arc. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint and click. You do not need to click on the oval. To draw an arc that is based on a circle, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Arc +Arc
-Circle Arc -Draws an arc that is based on a circle in the current document. To draw an arc, drag a circle to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the arc. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint and click. You do not need to click on the circle. To draw an arc that is based on an ellipse, hold down Shift while you drag. +Circle Arc +Draws an arc that is based on a circle in the current document. To draw an arc, drag a circle to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the arc. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint and click. You do not need to click on the circle. To draw an arc that is based on an ellipse, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Circle Arc +Circle Arc
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/10080000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/10080000.xhp index 03bcd204b0..df63dfdded 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/10080000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/10080000.xhp @@ -37,140 +37,140 @@ freeform lines; drawing drawing; freeform lines - +
-Curve -The Curve icon on the Drawing bar opens the Lines toolbar, where you can add lines and shapes to the current slide. +Curve +The Curve icon on the Drawing bar opens the Lines toolbar, where you can add lines and shapes to the current slide.
-If you hold the Shift key down, the movement of the mouse is limited to multiples of 45 degrees. If you hold down the OptionsAlt key, the new point will not be connected to the last point. This allows you to create objects that consist of curves that are not connected together. If you draw a smaller object while holding down the OptionAlt key into a larger object that you have not closed yet, the smaller object is subtracted from the larger one, thus appearing as a hole in the larger one. -Closed shapes automatically receive the fill that is displayed in the Area Style/Filling box on Line and Filling bar. +If you hold the Shift key down, the movement of the mouse is limited to multiples of 45 degrees. If you hold down the OptionsAlt key, the new point will not be connected to the last point. This allows you to create objects that consist of curves that are not connected together. If you draw a smaller object while holding down the OptionAlt key into a larger object that you have not closed yet, the smaller object is subtracted from the larger one, thus appearing as a hole in the larger one. +Closed shapes automatically receive the fill that is displayed in the Area Style/Filling box on Line and Filling bar. -Curve, Filled -Draws a filled closed shape that is based on a Bézier curve. Click where you want the curve to start, drag, release, and then move the pointer to where you want the curve to end and click. Move the pointer and click again to add a straight line segment to the curve. Double-click to close the shape. +Curve, Filled +Draws a filled closed shape that is based on a Bézier curve. Click where you want the curve to start, drag, release, and then move the pointer to where you want the curve to end and click. Move the pointer and click again to add a straight line segment to the curve. Double-click to close the shape. - + Icon -Curve, Filled +Curve, Filled
-Polygon, filled -Draws a closed shape consisting of straight line segments. Click where you want to start the polygon, and drag to draw a line segment. Click again to define the end of the line segment, and continue clicking to define the remaining line segments of the polygon. Double-click to finish drawing the polygon. To constrain the polygon to angles of 45 degree, hold down Shift when you click. +Polygon, filled +Draws a closed shape consisting of straight line segments. Click where you want to start the polygon, and drag to draw a line segment. Click again to define the end of the line segment, and continue clicking to define the remaining line segments of the polygon. Double-click to finish drawing the polygon. To constrain the polygon to angles of 45 degree, hold down Shift when you click. - + Icon -Polygon, Filled +Polygon, Filled
-Polygon (45°), Filled -Draws a closed shape consisting of straight line segments that are constrained by angles of 45 degrees. Click where you want to start the polygon, and drag to draw a line segment. Click again to define the end of the line segment, and continue clicking to define the remaining line segments of the polygon. Double-click to finish drawing the polygon. To draw a polygon that is not constrained to a 45 degree angle, hold down Shift when you click. +Polygon (45°), Filled +Draws a closed shape consisting of straight line segments that are constrained by angles of 45 degrees. Click where you want to start the polygon, and drag to draw a line segment. Click again to define the end of the line segment, and continue clicking to define the remaining line segments of the polygon. Double-click to finish drawing the polygon. To draw a polygon that is not constrained to a 45 degree angle, hold down Shift when you click. - + Icon -Polygon (45°), Filled +Polygon (45°), Filled
-Freeform Line, Filled -Draws a freeform line where you drag in the slide. When you release, $[officename] creates a closed shape by drawing a straight line segment from the endpoint to the starting point of the line. The shape within the lines will be filled with the current area color. +Freeform Line, Filled +Draws a freeform line where you drag in the slide. When you release, $[officename] creates a closed shape by drawing a straight line segment from the endpoint to the starting point of the line. The shape within the lines will be filled with the current area color. - + Icon -Freeform Line, Filled +Freeform Line, Filled
-Curve +Curve - + Icon -Curve +Curve
-Polygon +Polygon - + Icon -Polygon +Polygon
-Polygon (45°) -Draws a line composed of a series of straight line segments, that are constrained by angles of 45 degree. Drag to draw a line segment, click to define the endpoint of the line segment, and then drag to draw a new line segment. Double-click to finish drawing the line. To create a closed shape, hold down OptionAlt and double-click. +Polygon (45°) +Draws a line composed of a series of straight line segments, that are constrained by angles of 45 degree. Drag to draw a line segment, click to define the endpoint of the line segment, and then drag to draw a new line segment. Double-click to finish drawing the line. To create a closed shape, hold down OptionAlt and double-click. - + Icon -Polygon (45°) +Polygon (45°)
-Freeform Line +Freeform Line - + Icon -Freeform Line +Freeform Line
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/10090000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/10090000.xhp index 20e939118a..35f30d846c 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/10090000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/10090000.xhp @@ -40,161 +40,161 @@ half-spheres drawing;3D objects - +
-3D Objects -Opens the 3D Objects toolbar. The objects are three dimensional, with depth, illumination, and reflection. Each inserted object initially forms a 3D scene. You can press F3 to enter the scene. For these 3D objects, you can open the 3D Effects dialog to edit the properties. +3D Objects +Opens the 3D Objects toolbar. The objects are three dimensional, with depth, illumination, and reflection. Each inserted object initially forms a 3D scene. You can press F3 to enter the scene. For these 3D objects, you can open the 3D Effects dialog to edit the properties.
- + Icon -3D Objects +3D Objects
-To rotate a 3D object around any of its three axes, click to select the object, and then click again to display its rotation handles. Drag a handle in the direction you want to rotate the object. +To rotate a 3D object around any of its three axes, click to select the object, and then click again to display its rotation handles. Drag a handle in the direction you want to rotate the object. -Cube -Draws a filled cube where you drag in the slide. To draw a 3D rectangle, hold down Shift while you drag. +Cube +Draws a filled cube where you drag in the slide. To draw a 3D rectangle, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Cube +Cube
-Sphere -Draws a filled sphere where you drag in the slide. To draw a spheroid, hold down Shift while you drag. +Sphere +Draws a filled sphere where you drag in the slide. To draw a spheroid, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Sphere +Sphere
-Cylinder -Draws a cylinder that is based on a circle where you drag in the slide. To draw a cylinder that is based on an oval, hold down Shift while you drag. +Cylinder +Draws a cylinder that is based on a circle where you drag in the slide. To draw a cylinder that is based on an oval, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Cylinder +Cylinder
-Cone -Draws a cone that is based on a circle where you drag in the slide. To draw a cone that is based on an oval, hold down Shift while you drag. +Cone +Draws a cone that is based on a circle where you drag in the slide. To draw a cone that is based on an oval, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Cone +Cone
-Pyramid -Draws a pyramid with a square base where you drag in the slide. To draw a pyramid with a rectangular base, hold down Shift while you drag. To define a different polygon for the base of the pyramid, open the 3D Effects dialog and click the Geometry tab. In the Segments area, enter the number of sides for the polygon in the box labeled Horizontal, and then click the green checkmark. +Pyramid +Draws a pyramid with a square base where you drag in the slide. To draw a pyramid with a rectangular base, hold down Shift while you drag. To define a different polygon for the base of the pyramid, open the 3D Effects dialog and click the Geometry tab. In the Segments area, enter the number of sides for the polygon in the box labeled Horizontal, and then click the green checkmark. - + Icon -Pyramid +Pyramid
-Torus -Draws a ring-shaped object that is based on a circle where you drag in the slide. To draw a torus that is based on an oval, hold down Shift while you drag. +Torus +Draws a ring-shaped object that is based on a circle where you drag in the slide. To draw a torus that is based on an oval, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Torus +Torus
-Shell -Draws a bowl-shaped object that is based on a circle where you drag in the slide. To draw a shell that is based on an oval, hold down Shift while you drag. +Shell +Draws a bowl-shaped object that is based on a circle where you drag in the slide. To draw a shell that is based on an oval, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Shell +Shell
-Half-Sphere -Draws one half of a sphere where you drag in the slide. To draw a one half of a spheroid, hold down Shift while you drag. +Half-Sphere +Draws one half of a sphere where you drag in the slide. To draw a one half of a spheroid, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Half-sphere +Half-sphere
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/10100000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/10100000.xhp index 91775e20cb..c71b996036 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/10100000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/10100000.xhp @@ -30,512 +30,512 @@
-Connectors +Connectors - + Icon -Connector +Connector
-Open the Connectors toolbar, where you can add connectors to objects in the current slide. A connector is a line that joins objects, and remains attached when the objects are moved. If you copy an object with a connector, the connector is also copied. +Open the Connectors toolbar, where you can add connectors to objects in the current slide. A connector is a line that joins objects, and remains attached when the objects are moved. If you copy an object with a connector, the connector is also copied.
-There are four types of connector lines: +There are four types of connector lines: -Standard (90-degree angle bends) +Standard (90-degree angle bends) -Line (two bends) +Line (two bends) -Straight +Straight -Curved +Curved -When you click a connector and move your mouse pointer over a filled object, or the edge of an unfilled object, gluepoints appear. A gluepoint is a fixed point where you can attach a connector line. You can add custom gluepoints to an object. -To draw a connector line, click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. You can also drag to an empty part of you document and click. The unattached end of the connector is locked in place, until you drag the end to a different location. To detach a connector, drag either end of the connector line to a different location. +When you click a connector and move your mouse pointer over a filled object, or the edge of an unfilled object, gluepoints appear. A gluepoint is a fixed point where you can attach a connector line. You can add custom gluepoints to an object. +To draw a connector line, click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. You can also drag to an empty part of you document and click. The unattached end of the connector is locked in place, until you drag the end to a different location. To detach a connector, drag either end of the connector line to a different location. -Connector -Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. +Connector +Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. - + Icon -Connector +Connector
-Connector Starts with Arrow -Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and an arrow at the starting point. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. +Connector Starts with Arrow +Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and an arrow at the starting point. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. - + Icon -Connector Starts with Arrow +Connector Starts with Arrow
-Connector Ends with Arrow -Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and an arrow at the endpoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. +Connector Ends with Arrow +Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and an arrow at the endpoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. - + Icon -Connector Ends with Arrow +Connector Ends with Arrow
-Connector with Arrows -Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and arrows at both ends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. +Connector with Arrows +Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and arrows at both ends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. - + Icon -Connector with Arrows +Connector with Arrows
-Connector Starts with Circle -Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and a circle at the starting point. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. +Connector Starts with Circle +Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and a circle at the starting point. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. - + Icon -Connector Starts with Circle +Connector Starts with Circle
-Connector Ends with Circle -Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and a circle at the endpoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. +Connector Ends with Circle +Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and a circle at the endpoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. - + Icon -Connector Ends with Circle +Connector Ends with Circle
-Connector with Circles -Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and circles at both ends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. +Connector with Circles +Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and circles at both ends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. - + Icon -Connector with Circles +Connector with Circles
-Line Connector -Draws a connector that bends near a gluepoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a gluepoint, click the connector and drag the bend point. +Line Connector +Draws a connector that bends near a gluepoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a gluepoint, click the connector and drag the bend point. - + Icon -Line Connector +Line Connector
-Line Connector Starts with Arrow -Draws a connector that starts with an arrow and bends near a gluepoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a gluepoint, click the connector and drag the bend point. +Line Connector Starts with Arrow +Draws a connector that starts with an arrow and bends near a gluepoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a gluepoint, click the connector and drag the bend point. - + Icon -Line Connector Starts with Arrow +Line Connector Starts with Arrow
-Line Connector Ends with Arrow -Draws a connector that ends with an arrow and bends near a gluepoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a gluepoint, click the connector and drag the bend point. +Line Connector Ends with Arrow +Draws a connector that ends with an arrow and bends near a gluepoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a gluepoint, click the connector and drag the bend point. - + Icon -Line Connector Ends with Arrow +Line Connector Ends with Arrow
-Line Connector with Arrows -Draws a connector that bends near a gluepoint and has arrows at both ends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a gluepoint, click the connector and drag the bend point. +Line Connector with Arrows +Draws a connector that bends near a gluepoint and has arrows at both ends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a gluepoint, click the connector and drag the bend point. - + Icon -Line Connector with Arrows +Line Connector with Arrows
-Line Connector Starts with Circle -Draws a connector that starts with a circle and bends near a gluepoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a gluepoint, click the connector and drag the bend point. +Line Connector Starts with Circle +Draws a connector that starts with a circle and bends near a gluepoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a gluepoint, click the connector and drag the bend point. - + Icon -Line Connector Starts with Circle +Line Connector Starts with Circle
-Line Connector Ends with Circle -Draws a connector that ends with a circle and bends near a gluepoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a gluepoint, click the connector and drag the bend point. +Line Connector Ends with Circle +Draws a connector that ends with a circle and bends near a gluepoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a gluepoint, click the connector and drag the bend point. - + Icon -Line Connector Ends with Circle +Line Connector Ends with Circle
-Line Connector with Circles -Draws a connector that bends near a gluepoint and has circles at both ends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a gluepoint, click the connector and drag the bend point. +Line Connector with Circles +Draws a connector that bends near a gluepoint and has circles at both ends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a gluepoint, click the connector and drag the bend point. - + Icon -Line Connector with Circles +Line Connector with Circles
-Straight Connector -Draws a straight line connector. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. +Straight Connector +Draws a straight line connector. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. - + Icon -Straight Connector +Straight Connector
-Straight Connector Starts with Arrow -Draws a straight line connector with an arrow at the starting point. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. +Straight Connector Starts with Arrow +Draws a straight line connector with an arrow at the starting point. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. - + Icon -Straight Connector Starts with Arrow +Straight Connector Starts with Arrow
-Straight Connector Ends with Arrow -Draws a straight line connector with an arrow at the endpoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. +Straight Connector Ends with Arrow +Draws a straight line connector with an arrow at the endpoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. - + Icon -Straight Connector Ends with Arrow +Straight Connector Ends with Arrow
-Straight Connector with Arrows -Draws a straight line connector with arrows at both ends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. +Straight Connector with Arrows +Draws a straight line connector with arrows at both ends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. - + Icon -Straight Connector with Arrows +Straight Connector with Arrows
-Straight Connector Starts with Circle -Draws a straight line connector with a circle at the starting point. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. +Straight Connector Starts with Circle +Draws a straight line connector with a circle at the starting point. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. - + Icon -Straight Connector Starts with Circle +Straight Connector Starts with Circle
-Straight Connector Ends with Circle -Draws a straight line connector with a circle at the endpoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. +Straight Connector Ends with Circle +Draws a straight line connector with a circle at the endpoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. - + Icon -Straight Connector Ends with Circle +Straight Connector Ends with Circle
-Straight Connector with Circles -Draws a straight line connector with circles at both ends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. +Straight Connector with Circles +Draws a straight line connector with circles at both ends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. - + Icon -Straight Connector with Circles +Straight Connector with Circles
-Curved Connector -Draws a curved line connector. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. +Curved Connector +Draws a curved line connector. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. - + Icon -Curved Connector +Curved Connector
-Curved Connector Starts with Arrow -Draws a curved line connector with an arrow at the starting point. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. +Curved Connector Starts with Arrow +Draws a curved line connector with an arrow at the starting point. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. - + Icon -Curved Connector Starts with Arrow +Curved Connector Starts with Arrow
-Curved Connector Ends with Arrow -Draws a curved line connector with an arrow at the endpoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. +Curved Connector Ends with Arrow +Draws a curved line connector with an arrow at the endpoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. - + Icon -Curved Connector Ends with Arrow +Curved Connector Ends with Arrow
-Curved Connector with Arrows -Draws a curved line connector with arrows at both ends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. +Curved Connector with Arrows +Draws a curved line connector with arrows at both ends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. - + Icon -Curved Connector with Arrows +Curved Connector with Arrows
-Curved Connector Starts with Circle -Draws a curved line connector with a circle at the starting point. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. +Curved Connector Starts with Circle +Draws a curved line connector with a circle at the starting point. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. - + Icon -Curved Connector Starts with Circle +Curved Connector Starts with Circle
-Curved Connector Ends with Circle -Draws a curved line connector with a circle at the endpoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. +Curved Connector Ends with Circle +Draws a curved line connector with a circle at the endpoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. - + Icon -Curved Connector Ends with Circle +Curved Connector Ends with Circle
-Curved Connector with Circles -Draws a curved line connector with circles at both ends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. +Curved Connector with Circles +Draws a curved line connector with circles at both ends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. - + Icon -Curved Connector with Circles +Curved Connector with Circles
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/10110000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/10110000.xhp index 733e895451..b7ebea53bc 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/10110000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/10110000.xhp @@ -31,46 +31,46 @@
-Insert +Insert
- + Icon -Insert +Insert
-Open the Insert toolbar, where you can add objects, including charts, spreadsheets, and images, to your document. -Slide +Open the Insert toolbar, where you can add objects, including charts, spreadsheets, and images, to your document. +Slide -Floating Frame +Floating Frame -File +File -Spreadsheet +Spreadsheet -From File +From File -Formula +Formula -Chart +Chart -OLE Object +OLE Object diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/10120000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/10120000.xhp index 1a4d9e7349..bc18a57125 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/10120000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/10120000.xhp @@ -36,161 +36,161 @@ dimension lines; drawing -Arrows -Open the Arrows toolbar, where you can add straight lines, lines with arrows, and dimension lines to the current slide or page. +Arrows +Open the Arrows toolbar, where you can add straight lines, lines with arrows, and dimension lines to the current slide or page. -If you want, you can add an arrow after you draw a line by choosing Format - Line, and then selecting an arrow style from the Style box. -Line -Draws a straight line where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. +If you want, you can add an arrow after you draw a line by choosing Format - Line, and then selecting an arrow style from the Style box. +Line +Draws a straight line where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Line +Line
-Line Ends with Arrow -Draws a straight line that ends with an arrow where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. +Line Ends with Arrow +Draws a straight line that ends with an arrow where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Line Ends with Arrow +Line Ends with Arrow
-Line with Arrow/Circle -Draws a straight line that starts with an arrow and ends with a circle where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. +Line with Arrow/Circle +Draws a straight line that starts with an arrow and ends with a circle where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Line with Arrow/Circle +Line with Arrow/Circle
-Line with Arrow/Square -Draws a straight line that starts with an arrow and ends with a square where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. +Line with Arrow/Square +Draws a straight line that starts with an arrow and ends with a square where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Line with Arrow/Square +Line with Arrow/Square
-Line (45°) -Draws a straight line that is constrained by angles of 45 degrees. +Line (45°) +Draws a straight line that is constrained by angles of 45 degrees. - + Icon -Line (45°) +Line (45°)
-Line Starts with Arrow -Draws a straight line that starts with an arrow where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. +Line Starts with Arrow +Draws a straight line that starts with an arrow where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Line Starts with Arrow +Line Starts with Arrow
-Line with Circle/Arrow -Draws a straight line that starts with a circle and ends with an arrow where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. +Line with Circle/Arrow +Draws a straight line that starts with a circle and ends with an arrow where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Line with Circle/Arrow +Line with Circle/Arrow
-Line with Square/Arrow -Draws a straight line that starts with a square and ends with an arrow where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. +Line with Square/Arrow +Draws a straight line that starts with a square and ends with an arrow where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Line with Square/Arrow +Line with Square/Arrow
-Dimension Line -Draws a line that displays the dimension length bounded by guides. Dimension lines automatically calculate and display linear dimensions. To draw a dimension line, open the Arrows toolbar, and click the Dimension Line icon. Move your pointer to where you want the line to start and drag to draw the dimension line. Release when finished. -If you want the dimension line to be the same length as the side of a nearby object, hold down the Command +Dimension Line +Draws a line that displays the dimension length bounded by guides. Dimension lines automatically calculate and display linear dimensions. To draw a dimension line, open the Arrows toolbar, and click the Dimension Line icon. Move your pointer to where you want the line to start and drag to draw the dimension line. Release when finished. +If you want the dimension line to be the same length as the side of a nearby object, hold down the Command Ctrl key while dragging. To constrain the dimension line to 45 degrees, hold down the Shift key while dragging. -In %PRODUCTNAME Draw, a dimension line is always inserted on the layer called Dimension Lines. If you set that layer to invisible, you will not see any dimension line in your drawing. +In %PRODUCTNAME Draw, a dimension line is always inserted on the layer called Dimension Lines. If you set that layer to invisible, you will not see any dimension line in your drawing.
- + Icon -Dimension Line +Dimension Line
-Line with Arrows -Draws a straight line with arrows at both ends where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. +Line with Arrows +Draws a straight line with arrows at both ends where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Line with Arrows +Line with Arrows
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/10130000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/10130000.xhp index 9eed2e2098..bc20b926d5 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/10130000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/10130000.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
-3D Effects -Specifies the properties of a 3D object or converts a 2D object to 3D.UFI: this will be not visible by default. But users can configure it if they find out how. +3D Effects +Specifies the properties of a 3D object or converts a 2D object to 3D.UFI: this will be not visible by default. But users can configure it if they find out how.
@@ -41,6 +41,6 @@ -Format - 3D Effects +Format - 3D Effects diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/11060000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/11060000.xhp index 3dfe98abc0..5c382d7916 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/11060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/11060000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
levels; hidinghiding; levels -First Level - Hides all of the headings of the slides in the current slide show except for the titles of the slides. Hidden headings are indicated by a black line in front of a slide title. To show the headings, click the All Levels icon. +First Level + Hides all of the headings of the slides in the current slide show except for the titles of the slides. Hidden headings are indicated by a black line in front of a slide title. To show the headings, click the All Levels icon.
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - First Level + First Level diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/11070000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/11070000.xhp index ed9ac21d1a..02bb42dcac 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/11070000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/11070000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
levels; showingshowing; levels -All Levels - Displays the hidden headings of the slides in the current slide show. To hide all of the headings in the current slide show, except for the slide titles, click the First Level icon. +All Levels + Displays the hidden headings of the slides in the current slide show. To hide all of the headings in the current slide show, except for the slide titles, click the First Level icon.
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - All Levels + All Levels diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/11080000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/11080000.xhp index 508dd80ee0..245c65b8f9 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/11080000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/11080000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
subpoints; hidinghiding; subpoints -Hide Subpoints - Hides the subheadings of a selected heading. Hidden subheadings are indicated by a black line in front of a heading. To show the lower level headings, click the Show Subpoints icon. +Hide Subpoints + Hides the subheadings of a selected heading. Hidden subheadings are indicated by a black line in front of a heading. To show the lower level headings, click the Show Subpoints icon.
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Hide Subpoints + Hide Subpoints diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/11090000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/11090000.xhp index 601c38b583..d02a2ada74 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/11090000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/11090000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
subpoints; showingshowing; subpoints -Show Subpoints - Displays the hidden subheadings of a selected heading. To hide the subheadings of a selected heading, click Hide Subpoints icon. +Show Subpoints + Displays the hidden subheadings of a selected heading. To hide the subheadings of a selected heading, click Hide Subpoints icon.
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Show Subpoints + Show Subpoints diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/11100000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/11100000.xhp index d424d85d71..1563f0d342 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/11100000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/11100000.xhp @@ -35,19 +35,19 @@ -Formatting On/Off -Shows or hides the character formatting of the slide headings. To change the character formatting of a heading, open the Styles and Formatting window, right-click a style, and then choose Modify. +Formatting On/Off +Shows or hides the character formatting of the slide headings. To change the character formatting of a heading, open the Styles and Formatting window, right-click a style, and then choose Modify.
- + Icon -Formatting On/Off +Formatting On/Off
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/11110000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/11110000.xhp index 0fd179c269..9554d3238d 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/11110000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/11110000.xhp @@ -36,19 +36,19 @@ -Black and White -Shows your slides in black and white only. +Black and White +Shows your slides in black and white only.
- + Icon -Black and White +Black and White
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/13010000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/13010000.xhp index cf18afb186..17200bcf6f 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/13010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/13010000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Glue Points - Insert or modify the properties of a glue point. A glue point is a custom connection point where you can attach a connector line. +Glue Points + Insert or modify the properties of a glue point. A glue point is a custom connection point where you can attach a connector line.
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Glue Points + Glue Points diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/13020000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/13020000.xhp index 831fdd2c43..37d257290d 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/13020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/13020000.xhp @@ -35,19 +35,19 @@ -Rotation Mode after Clicking Object -Changes the mouse-click behavior, so that rotation handles appear after you click an object, and then click it again. Drag a handle to rotate the object in the direction you want. +Rotation Mode after Clicking Object +Changes the mouse-click behavior, so that rotation handles appear after you click an object, and then click it again. Drag a handle to rotate the object in the direction you want.
- + Icon -Rotation Mode after Clicking Object +Rotation Mode after Clicking Object
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/13030000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/13030000.xhp index 422f7817d4..139480c44d 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/13030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/13030000.xhp @@ -35,19 +35,19 @@ effects; preview -Allow Effects -Plays a preview of an animation effect that is assigned to an object, when you click the object in the slide. To select an object for editing, hold down the OptionAlt key when you click. +Allow Effects +Plays a preview of an animation effect that is assigned to an object, when you click the object in the slide. To select an object for editing, hold down the OptionAlt key when you click.
- + Icon -Allow Effects +Allow Effects
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/13040000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/13040000.xhp index d44f75432b..5867b8a788 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/13040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/13040000.xhp @@ -36,19 +36,19 @@ -Allow Interaction -Runs a preview of the interaction that is assigned to an object, when you click the object in the slide. To select an object for editing, hold down the OptionAlt key when you click. +Allow Interaction +Runs a preview of the interaction that is assigned to an object, when you click the object in the slide. To select an object for editing, hold down the OptionAlt key when you click.
- + Icon -Allow Interaction +Allow Interaction
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/13050000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/13050000.xhp index b48da35990..0cd9546a1a 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/13050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/13050000.xhp @@ -36,19 +36,19 @@ -Show Snap Lines -Shows or hides snap lines so can you align objects on your slide. To remove a snap line, drag it off the slide. +Show Snap Lines +Shows or hides snap lines so can you align objects on your slide. To remove a snap line, drag it off the slide.
- + Icon -Show Snap Lines +Show Snap Lines
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/13060000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/13060000.xhp index 51e0cc88bd..4e5a08a355 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/13060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/13060000.xhp @@ -32,19 +32,19 @@ -Double-Click to add Text -Changes the mouse-click behavior, so that you can double-click an object to add or edit text. +Double-Click to add Text +Changes the mouse-click behavior, so that you can double-click an object to add or edit text.
- + Icon -Double-click to add Text +Double-click to add Text
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/13090000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/13090000.xhp index 16d5017bed..80bf8f376d 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/13090000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/13090000.xhp @@ -33,20 +33,19 @@ -Modify Object with Attributes - If this icon on the Options bar is activated, objects are shown with their attributes, but with 50% transparency, while you move or draw them. If this icon is not activated, only a contour is shown while drawing, and the object is shown with all attributes when you release the mouse button. +Modify Object with Attributes + If this icon on the Options bar is activated, objects are shown with their attributes, but with 50% transparency, while you move or draw them. If this icon is not activated, only a contour is shown while drawing, and the object is shown with all attributes when you release the mouse button.
- + Icon - Modify Object with Attributes + Modify Object with Attributes
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/13100000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/13100000.xhp index d9f2d6c3fa..56861e76f9 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/13100000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/13100000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Exit all Groups - Exits all groups and returns to normal view. +Exit all Groups + Exits all groups and returns to normal view.
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Exit all groups + Exit all groups diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/13140000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/13140000.xhp index f1477d33e4..4326022e9a 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/13140000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/13140000.xhp @@ -27,18 +27,18 @@ -Snap to Snap Lines +Snap to Snap Lines
- + Icon -Snap to Snap Lines +Snap to Snap Lines
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/13150000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/13150000.xhp index 87017a2b4c..6c4cf5b73a 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/13150000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/13150000.xhp @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ - Snap to Page Margins + Snap to Page Margins
@@ -42,10 +42,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Snap to Page Margins + Snap to Page Margins diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/13160000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/13160000.xhp index f66ffc692b..8b64ad12e4 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/13160000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/13160000.xhp @@ -27,17 +27,17 @@ -Snap to Object Border +Snap to Object Border
- Icon + Icon - Snap to Object Border + Snap to Object Border
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/13170000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/13170000.xhp index 3c60371b66..180b135657 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/13170000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/13170000.xhp @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ - Snap to Object Points + Snap to Object Points
@@ -42,10 +42,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Snap to Object Points + Snap to Object Points diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/13180000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/13180000.xhp index e5f1aa8876..84eb1737a9 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/13180000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/13180000.xhp @@ -27,16 +27,16 @@ -Allow Quick Editing +Allow Quick Editing
- Icon + Icon - Allow Quick Editing + Allow Quick Editing
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/02/13190000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/02/13190000.xhp index 2b295daec9..7c8147dad1 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/02/13190000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/02/13190000.xhp @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ - Select Text Area Only + Select Text Area Only
@@ -42,10 +42,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Select Text Area Only + Select Text Area Only diff --git a/source/text/simpress/04/01020000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/04/01020000.xhp index 6b25de455f..5e64968aa3 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/04/01020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/04/01020000.xhp @@ -33,804 +33,804 @@ shortcut keys; in presentations presentations; shortcut keys -Shortcut Keys for $[officename] Impress +Shortcut Keys for $[officename] Impress -The following is a list of shortcut keys for $[officename] Impress. -You can also use the general shortcut keys in $[officename]. +The following is a list of shortcut keys for $[officename] Impress. +You can also use the general shortcut keys in $[officename].
-Function Keys for $[officename] Impress +Function Keys for $[officename] Impress -Shortcut Keys +Shortcut Keys - + Effect -F2 +F2 -Edit text. +Edit text. -F3 +F3 -Enter Group. +Enter Group. -Command +Command Ctrl+F3 -Exit Group. +Exit Group. -Shift+F3 +Shift+F3 -Duplicate +Duplicate -F4 +F4 -Position and Size +Position and Size -F5 +F5 -View Slide Show. +View Slide Show. -Command +Command Ctrl+Shift+F5 -Navigator +Navigator -F7 +F7 -Spellcheck +Spellcheck -Command +Command Ctrl+F7 -Thesaurus +Thesaurus -F8 +F8 -Edit Points. +Edit Points. -Command +Command Ctrl+Shift+F8 -Fit text to frame. +Fit text to frame. -Command+TF11 +Command+TF11 -Styles and Formatting +Styles and Formatting
-Shortcut Keys in Slide Shows +Shortcut Keys in Slide Shows -Shortcut Keysall hlp_keycode are rendered as bold in a table -> don't use +Shortcut Keysall hlp_keycode are rendered as bold in a table -> don't use - + Effect - Esc + Esc -End presentation. +End presentation. - Spacebar or Right arrow or Down arrow or Page Down or Enter or Return or N + Spacebar or Right arrow or Down arrow or Page Down or Enter or Return or N -Play next effect (if any, else go to next slide). +Play next effect (if any, else go to next slide). -OptionAlt+Page Down +OptionAlt+Page Down -Go to next slide without playing effects. +Go to next slide without playing effects. -[number] + Enter +[number] + Enter -Type a number of a slide and press Enter to go to the slide. +Type a number of a slide and press Enter to go to the slide. - Left arrow or Up arrow or Page Up or Backspace or P + Left arrow or Up arrow or Page Up or Backspace or P -Play previous effect again. If no previous effect exists on this slide, show previous slide. +Play previous effect again. If no previous effect exists on this slide, show previous slide. -OptionAlt+Page Up +OptionAlt+Page Up -Go to the previous slide without playing effects. +Go to the previous slide without playing effects. - Home + Home -Jump to first slide in the slide show. +Jump to first slide in the slide show. - End + End -Jump to the last slide in the slide show. +Jump to the last slide in the slide show. -Command +Command Ctrl+ Page Up -Go to the previous slide. +Go to the previous slide. -Command +Command Ctrl+ Page Down -Go to the next slide. +Go to the next slide. -B or . +B or . -Show black screen until next key or mouse wheel event. +Show black screen until next key or mouse wheel event. -W or , +W or , -Show white screen until next key or mouse wheel event. +Show white screen until next key or mouse wheel event.
-Shortcut Keys in the Normal View +Shortcut Keys in the Normal View -Shortcut Keys +Shortcut Keys - + Effect -Plus(+) Key +Plus(+) Key -Zoom in. +Zoom in. -Minus(-) Key +Minus(-) Key -Zoom out. +Zoom out. -Times(×) Key (number pad) +Times(×) Key (number pad) -Fit page in window. +Fit page in window. -Divide(÷) Key (number pad) +Divide(÷) Key (number pad) -Zoom in on current selection. +Zoom in on current selection. -Shift+Command +Shift+Command Ctrl+G -Group selected objects. +Group selected objects. -Shift+Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+A +Shift+Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+A -Ungroup selected group. +Ungroup selected group. -Command +Command Ctrl+ click -Enter a group, so that you can edit the individual objects of the group. Click outside the group to return to the normal view. +Enter a group, so that you can edit the individual objects of the group. Click outside the group to return to the normal view. -Shift+Command +Shift+Command Ctrl+ K -Combine selected objects. +Combine selected objects. -Shift+Command +Shift+Command Ctrl+ K -Split selected object. This combination only works on an object that was created by combining two or more objects. +Split selected object. This combination only works on an object that was created by combining two or more objects. -Command +Command Ctrl+ Plus key -Bring to Front. +Bring to Front. -Shift+Command +Shift+Command Ctrl+ Plus key -Bring Forward. +Bring Forward. -Command +Command Ctrl+ Minus key -Send Backward. +Send Backward. -Shift+Command +Shift+Command Ctrl+ Minus key -Send to Back. +Send to Back.
-Shortcut Keys when Editing Text +Shortcut Keys when Editing Text -Shortcut Keys +Shortcut Keys - + Effect -Ctrl +Ctrl Ctrl+Hyphen(-) -Soft hyphens; hyphenation set by you. +Soft hyphens; hyphenation set by you. -Command +Command Ctrl+Shift+minus sign (-) -Non-breaking hyphen (is not used for hyphenation) +Non-breaking hyphen (is not used for hyphenation) -Command +Command Ctrl+Shift+Space -Non-breaking spaces. Non-breaking spaces are not used for hyphenation and are not expanded if the text is justified. +Non-breaking spaces. Non-breaking spaces are not used for hyphenation and are not expanded if the text is justified. -Shift+Enter +Shift+Enter -Line break without paragraph change +Line break without paragraph change -Arrow Left +Arrow Left -Move cursor to left +Move cursor to left -Shift+Arrow Left +Shift+Arrow Left -Move cursor with selection to the left +Move cursor with selection to the left -Option +Option Ctrl+Arrow Left -Go to beginning of word +Go to beginning of word -Option +Option Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Left -Selecting to the left word by word +Selecting to the left word by word -Arrow Right +Arrow Right -Move cursor to right +Move cursor to right -Shift+Arrow Right +Shift+Arrow Right -Move cursor with selection to the right +Move cursor with selection to the right -Option +Option Ctrl+Arrow Right -Go to start of next word +Go to start of next word -Option +Option Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Right -Selecting to the right word by word +Selecting to the right word by word -Arrow Up +Arrow Up -Move cursor up one line +Move cursor up one line -Shift+Arrow Up +Shift+Arrow Up -Selecting lines in an upwards direction +Selecting lines in an upwards direction -Option +Option Ctrl+Arrow Up -Move cursor to beginning of the previous paragraph +Move cursor to beginning of the previous paragraph -Option +Option Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Up -Select to beginning of paragraph. Next keystroke extends selection to beginning of previous paragraph +Select to beginning of paragraph. Next keystroke extends selection to beginning of previous paragraph -Arrow Down +Arrow Down -Move cursor down one line +Move cursor down one line -Shift+Arrow Down +Shift+Arrow Down -Selecting lines in a downward direction +Selecting lines in a downward direction -Option +Option Ctrl+Arrow Down -Move cursor to end of paragraph. Next keystroke move cursor to end of next paragraph +Move cursor to end of paragraph. Next keystroke move cursor to end of next paragraph -Option +Option Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Down -Select to end of paragraph. Next keystroke extends selection to end of next paragraph +Select to end of paragraph. Next keystroke extends selection to end of next paragraph -Command+Arrow LeftHome +Command+Arrow LeftHome -Go to beginning of line +Go to beginning of line -Command+Shift+Arrow LeftShift+Home +Command+Shift+Arrow LeftShift+Home -Go and select to the beginning of a line +Go and select to the beginning of a line -Command+Arrow RightEnd +Command+Arrow RightEnd -Go to end of line +Go to end of line -Command+Shift+Arrow RightShift+End +Command+Shift+Arrow RightShift+End -Go and select to end of line +Go and select to end of line -Command+Arrow Up +Command+Arrow Up Ctrl+Home -Go to start of text block in slide +Go to start of text block in slide -Command+Shift+Arrow UpCtrl+Shift+Home +Command+Shift+Arrow UpCtrl+Shift+Home -Go and select text to start of text block in slide +Go and select text to start of text block in slide -Command+Arrow Down +Command+Arrow Down Ctrl+End -Go to end of text block in slide +Go to end of text block in slide -Command+Shift+Arrow Down +Command+Shift+Arrow Down Ctrl+Shift+End -Go and select text to end of document +Go and select text to end of document -Option+Fn+Backspace +Option+Fn+Backspace Ctrl+Del -Delete text to end of word +Delete text to end of word -Option +Option Ctrl+Backspace -Delete text to beginning of word -In a list: delete an empty paragraph in front of the current paragraph +Delete text to beginning of word +In a list: delete an empty paragraph in front of the current paragraph -Command+Fn +Command+Fn Ctrl+Shift+Del -Delete text to end of sentence +Delete text to end of sentence -Command +Command Ctrl+Shift+Backspace -Delete text to beginning of sentence +Delete text to beginning of sentence
-Shortcut Keys in $[officename] Impress +Shortcut Keys in $[officename] Impress -Shortcut Keys +Shortcut Keys - + Effect -Arrow key +Arrow key -Moves the selected object or the page view in the direction of the arrow. +Moves the selected object or the page view in the direction of the arrow. -Command +Command Ctrl+ Arrow Key -Move around in the page view. +Move around in the page view. -Shift + drag +Shift + drag -Constrains the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. +Constrains the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. -Command +Command Ctrl+ drag (with Copy when moving option active) -Hold down Command +Hold down Command Ctrl and drag an object to create a copy of the object. -OptionAlt Key +OptionAlt Key -Hold down OptionAlt to draw or resize objects by dragging from the center of the object outward. +Hold down OptionAlt to draw or resize objects by dragging from the center of the object outward. -OptionAlt key+click +OptionAlt key+click -Select the object behind the currently selected object. +Select the object behind the currently selected object. -OptionAlt+Shift+click +OptionAlt+Shift+click -Select the object in front of the currently selected object. +Select the object in front of the currently selected object. -Shift+click +Shift+click -Select adjacent items or a text passage. Click at the start of a selection, move to the end of the selection, and then hold down Shift while you click. +Select adjacent items or a text passage. Click at the start of a selection, move to the end of the selection, and then hold down Shift while you click. -Shift+drag (when resizing) +Shift+drag (when resizing) -Hold down Shift while dragging to resize an object to maintain the proportions of the object. +Hold down Shift while dragging to resize an object to maintain the proportions of the object. -Tab key +Tab key -Select objects in the order in which they were created. +Select objects in the order in which they were created. -Shift+Tab +Shift+Tab -Select objects in the reverse order in which they were created. +Select objects in the reverse order in which they were created. -Escape +Escape -Exit current mode. +Exit current mode. -Enter +Enter -Activate a placeholder object in a new presentation (only if the frame is selected). +Activate a placeholder object in a new presentation (only if the frame is selected). -Command +Command Ctrl+Enter -Moves to the next text object on the slide. -If there are no text objects on the slide, or if you reached the last text object, a new slide is inserted after the current slide. The new slide uses the same layout as the current slide. +Moves to the next text object on the slide. +If there are no text objects on the slide, or if you reached the last text object, a new slide is inserted after the current slide. The new slide uses the same layout as the current slide. -PageUp +PageUp -Switch to the previous slide. No function on the first slide. +Switch to the previous slide. No function on the first slide. -PageDown +PageDown -Switch to the next slide. No function on the last slide. +Switch to the next slide. No function on the last slide.
-Navigating with the Keyboard in Slide Sorter +Navigating with the Keyboard in Slide Sorter -Shortcut Keys +Shortcut Keys - + Effect diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/3d_create.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/3d_create.xhp index bf95597dca..3c8488b963 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/3d_create.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/3d_create.xhp @@ -33,88 +33,88 @@ converting; to curves, polygons, 3D extrusion objects added 3D scenes, issue 109330 -Converting 2D Objects to Curves, Polygons, and 3D Objects +Converting 2D Objects to Curves, Polygons, and 3D Objects -You can convert two dimensional (2D) objects to create different shapes. $[officename] can convert 2D objects to the following object types: +You can convert two dimensional (2D) objects to create different shapes. $[officename] can convert 2D objects to the following object types: -Curved object based on Bézier curves +Curved object based on Bézier curves -Polygon object consisting of straight line segments +Polygon object consisting of straight line segments -3D object with shading and a light source +3D object with shading and a light source -3D rotation object with shading and a light source +3D rotation object with shading and a light source -Two types of 3D objects +Two types of 3D objects -The Status bar displays "3D scene selected". The 3D scenes are built from objects which have dimensions in x, y, and z coordinates. Examples are the objects inserted by the 3D Objects toolbar, and rectangles, ellipses, or text that got created by the Rectangle, Ellipse, or Text icons left on the Drawing toolbar, or any Custom Shapes, and that got converted to 3D by using the context menu "Convert - To 3D". These 3D scenes can be entered (for example, by pressing F3), and the objects can be rotated in 3D. Microsoft Office doesn't know these real 3D objects. When exporting these 3D scenes to Microsoft Office formats, a snapshot of the current view will be exported as a bitmap. 3D bars in charts are of this type, too. +The Status bar displays "3D scene selected". The 3D scenes are built from objects which have dimensions in x, y, and z coordinates. Examples are the objects inserted by the 3D Objects toolbar, and rectangles, ellipses, or text that got created by the Rectangle, Ellipse, or Text icons left on the Drawing toolbar, or any Custom Shapes, and that got converted to 3D by using the context menu "Convert - To 3D". These 3D scenes can be entered (for example, by pressing F3), and the objects can be rotated in 3D. Microsoft Office doesn't know these real 3D objects. When exporting these 3D scenes to Microsoft Office formats, a snapshot of the current view will be exported as a bitmap. 3D bars in charts are of this type, too. -The Status bar displays "Shape selected". The Custom Shapes can be viewed in a 2D mode or in a 3D mode. At any time, you can switch the view between the two modes. You use the Basic Shapes, Symbol Shapes, and the following icons on the Drawing toolbar to create Custom Shapes. The Custom Shapes can be changed using the 3D Settings toolbar. They do not form a 3D scene, they cannot be illuminated by more than one light source, they show no reflections, and there are some more limitations. You can convert them to a 3D scene, but then they are no longer Custom Shapes. Custom Shapes in 2D or 3D mode can be exported to and imported from Microsoft Office formats. +The Status bar displays "Shape selected". The Custom Shapes can be viewed in a 2D mode or in a 3D mode. At any time, you can switch the view between the two modes. You use the Basic Shapes, Symbol Shapes, and the following icons on the Drawing toolbar to create Custom Shapes. The Custom Shapes can be changed using the 3D Settings toolbar. They do not form a 3D scene, they cannot be illuminated by more than one light source, they show no reflections, and there are some more limitations. You can convert them to a 3D scene, but then they are no longer Custom Shapes. Custom Shapes in 2D or 3D mode can be exported to and imported from Microsoft Office formats. -To convert an object to a curved shape: +To convert an object to a curved shape: -Select a 2D object on the slide or page. +Select a 2D object on the slide or page. -Right-click the object and choose Convert - To Curve. +Right-click the object and choose Convert - To Curve. -To modify the shape of the object, click the Points icon +To modify the shape of the object, click the Points icon Icon on the Drawing toolbar, and drag the handles of the object. You can also drag the control points of a handle to modify the shape of the curve. -To convert a 2D object to a polygon: +To convert a 2D object to a polygon: -Select a 2D object on the slide or page. +Select a 2D object on the slide or page. -Right-click the object and choose Convert - To Polygon. +Right-click the object and choose Convert - To Polygon. -To modify the shape of the object, click the Points icon +To modify the shape of the object, click the Points icon Icon on the Drawing toolbar, and drag the handles of the object. -To convert a 2D object to a 3D object: +To convert a 2D object to a 3D object: -Select a 2D object on the slide or page. +Select a 2D object on the slide or page. -Click the Extrusion On/Off icon +Click the Extrusion On/Off icon Icon on the Drawing bar, or right-click the object and choose Convert - To 3D. -To edit the properties of the 3D object, use the Line and Filling toolbar and the 3D Settings toolbar. -To convert a text object to 3D, use the Fontwork icon +To edit the properties of the 3D object, use the Line and Filling toolbar and the 3D Settings toolbar. +To convert a text object to 3D, use the Fontwork icon Icon on the Drawing toolbar. -To convert a 2D object to a 3D rotation object: -A 3D rotation object is created by rotating the selected object around its vertical axis. +To convert a 2D object to a 3D rotation object: +A 3D rotation object is created by rotating the selected object around its vertical axis. -Select a 2D object on the slide or page. +Select a 2D object on the slide or page. -Right-click the object and choose Convert - To 3D Rotation Object +Right-click the object and choose Convert - To 3D Rotation Object -To edit the properties of the 3D object, use the Line and Filling toolbar and the 3D Settings toolbar. -You can rotate the 2D object before converting it to create a more complex shape. +To edit the properties of the 3D object, use the Line and Filling toolbar and the 3D Settings toolbar. +You can rotate the 2D object before converting it to create a more complex shape.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_create.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_create.xhp index e0c6606242..209440e1ad 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_create.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_create.xhp @@ -34,54 +34,54 @@ GIF images; animating animated GIFs -Creating Animated GIF Images +Creating Animated GIF Images -You can animate drawing objects, text objects, and graphic objects (images) on your slides to make your presentation more interesting. $[officename] Impress provides you with a simple animation editor where you can create animation images (frames) by assembling objects from your slide. The animation effect is achieved by rotating through the static frames that you create. -If you create a bitmap animation (animated GIF), you can assign a delay time to each frame, and specify the number of times the animation is played. -To create an animated GIF: +You can animate drawing objects, text objects, and graphic objects (images) on your slides to make your presentation more interesting. $[officename] Impress provides you with a simple animation editor where you can create animation images (frames) by assembling objects from your slide. The animation effect is achieved by rotating through the static frames that you create. +If you create a bitmap animation (animated GIF), you can assign a delay time to each frame, and specify the number of times the animation is played. +To create an animated GIF: -Select an object or group of objects that you want to include in your animation and choose Insert - Animated Image. +Select an object or group of objects that you want to include in your animation and choose Insert - Animated Image. -Do one of the following: +Do one of the following: -Click the Apply Object button +Click the Apply Object button Note Icon to add a single object or a group of objects to the current animation frame. -Click the Apply Objects Individually button +Click the Apply Objects Individually button Tip Icon to create a separate animation frame for each of the selected objects. -In the Animation Group area, select Bitmap object. -Use the animation timeline to specify the duration for displaying a frame and the number of times an animation sequence is presented (looping). +In the Animation Group area, select Bitmap object. +Use the animation timeline to specify the duration for displaying a frame and the number of times an animation sequence is presented (looping). -Enter a frame number in the Image Number box (left box). +Enter a frame number in the Image Number box (left box). -Enter the number of seconds you want the frame to display in the Duration box (middle box). +Enter the number of seconds you want the frame to display in the Duration box (middle box). -Repeat the last two steps for each frame in your animation. -You can preview your animation by using the controls to the left of the Image Number box. +Repeat the last two steps for each frame in your animation. +You can preview your animation by using the controls to the left of the Image Number box. -Select the number of times you want the animation sequence to repeat in the Loop count box (right box). +Select the number of times you want the animation sequence to repeat in the Loop count box (right box). -Select an alignment option for the objects in the Alignment box. +Select an alignment option for the objects in the Alignment box. -Click Create. +Click Create.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_save.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_save.xhp index 894e13cf8a..b96fe17cef 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_save.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_save.xhp @@ -33,23 +33,23 @@ animations; saving as GIFs exporting; animations to GIF format -Exporting Animations in GIF Format +Exporting Animations in GIF Format -Select an animated object on your slide. +Select an animated object on your slide. -Choose File - Export. +Choose File - Export. -Select GIF - Graphics Interchange Format (.gif) in the File type list. +Select GIF - Graphics Interchange Format (.gif) in the File type list. -Click the Selection check box to export the selected object, and not the entire slide. +Click the Selection check box to export the selected object, and not the entire slide. -Locate where you want to save the animated GIF, enter a name, and then click Save. +Locate where you want to save the animated GIF, enter a name, and then click Save. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_objects.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_objects.xhp index 2f77d64c05..e712db1bdd 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_objects.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_objects.xhp @@ -43,39 +43,39 @@ custom animation MW deleted "applying;" - Animating Objects in Presentation Slides + Animating Objects in Presentation Slides - You can apply preset animation effects to objects on your slide. - To apply an animation effect to an object: + You can apply preset animation effects to objects on your slide. + To apply an animation effect to an object: - On a slide in Normal view, select the object you want to animate. + On a slide in Normal view, select the object you want to animate. - Choose Slide Show - Custom Animation, click Add, and then select an animation effect. + Choose Slide Show - Custom Animation, click Add, and then select an animation effect. - In the Custom Animation dialog, click a tab page to choose from a category of effects. Click an effect, then click OK. + In the Custom Animation dialog, click a tab page to choose from a category of effects. Click an effect, then click OK. - To preview the animation, click the Play button. + To preview the animation, click the Play button. On Slide Pane an icon appears next to the preview of those slides, which have one or more objects with custom animation. When you present the slide show with the Presenter Console, icon indicates that the next slide has custom animation. - To apply and edit a motion path effect: - An object can be animated to move along a motion path. You can use predefined or your own motion paths. - If you select "Curve", "Polygon", or "Freeform Line", the dialog closes and you can draw your own path. If the drawing is finished and not canceled, the created path is removed from the document and inserted as a motion path effect. - Editing motion paths - If the Custom Animation Panel is visible, the motion paths of all effects of the current slide are drawn as a transparent overlay on the slide. All paths are visible all the time, therefore animations with consecutive paths can be created easily. - A motion path can be selected by clicking on the path. A selected path will support handles, it can be moved and resized like a shape. A double click on a path starts the point edit mode. The point edit mode can also be started by Edit - Points or by pressing F8. - To remove an animation effect from an object: + To apply and edit a motion path effect: + An object can be animated to move along a motion path. You can use predefined or your own motion paths. + If you select "Curve", "Polygon", or "Freeform Line", the dialog closes and you can draw your own path. If the drawing is finished and not canceled, the created path is removed from the document and inserted as a motion path effect. + Editing motion paths + If the Custom Animation Panel is visible, the motion paths of all effects of the current slide are drawn as a transparent overlay on the slide. All paths are visible all the time, therefore animations with consecutive paths can be created easily. + A motion path can be selected by clicking on the path. A selected path will support handles, it can be moved and resized like a shape. A double click on a path starts the point edit mode. The point edit mode can also be started by Edit - Points or by pressing F8. + To remove an animation effect from an object: - On a slide in Normal view, select the object from which to remove the effect. + On a slide in Normal view, select the object from which to remove the effect. - Choose Slide Show - Custom Animation. + Choose Slide Show - Custom Animation. - Click Remove. + Click Remove.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_slidechange.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_slidechange.xhp index 71356f8e18..8db3240111 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_slidechange.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_slidechange.xhp @@ -35,50 +35,50 @@ transition effects deleting; slide transition effects effects;animated slide transitions -MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;..."Animating Slide Transitions +MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;..."Animating Slide Transitions -You can apply a special effect that plays when you display a slide. -To apply a transition effect to a slide +You can apply a special effect that plays when you display a slide. +To apply a transition effect to a slide -In Normal view, select the slide that you want to add the transition effect to. +In Normal view, select the slide that you want to add the transition effect to. -On the Tasks pane, click Slide Transition. +On the Tasks pane, click Slide Transition. -Select a slide transition from the list. +Select a slide transition from the list. -You can preview the transition effect in the document window. +You can preview the transition effect in the document window. On Slide Pane an icon appears next to the preview of those slides, which have slide transition. When you present the slide show with the Presenter Console, icon indicates that the next slide has slide transition. -To apply the same transition effect to more than one slide +To apply the same transition effect to more than one slide -In Slide Sorter view, select the slides that you want to add the transition effect to. -If you want, you can use the Zoom toolbar +In Slide Sorter view, select the slides that you want to add the transition effect to. +If you want, you can use the Zoom toolbar Icon to change the view magnification for the slides. -On the Tasks pane, click Slide Transition. +On the Tasks pane, click Slide Transition. -Select a slide transition from the list. +Select a slide transition from the list. -To preview the transition effect for a slide, click the small icon underneath the slide on the Slides Pane. -To remove a transition effect +To preview the transition effect for a slide, click the small icon underneath the slide on the Slides Pane. +To remove a transition effect -In Slide Sorter View, select the slides that you want to remove the transition effect from. +In Slide Sorter View, select the slides that you want to remove the transition effect from. -Choose No Transition in the listbox on the Tasks pane. +Choose No Transition in the listbox on the Tasks pane.
-Slide Transition +Slide Transition
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/arrange_slides.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/arrange_slides.xhp index 63b780d7e6..c665121beb 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/arrange_slides.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/arrange_slides.xhp @@ -36,21 +36,21 @@ arranging;slides ordering;slides -Changing the Slide Order +Changing the Slide Order -Do one of the following: +Do one of the following: -Choose View - Slide Sorter, select one or more slides, and then drag the slides to another location. To select multiple slides, hold down shift and click on the slides. To create a copy of a selected slide, hold down Ctrl while you drag. The mouse pointer changes to a plus sign. You can also drag a copy of a slide into another open $[officename] Impress document. +Choose View - Slide Sorter, select one or more slides, and then drag the slides to another location. To select multiple slides, hold down shift and click on the slides. To create a copy of a selected slide, hold down Ctrl while you drag. The mouse pointer changes to a plus sign. You can also drag a copy of a slide into another open $[officename] Impress document. -Choose View - Outline, select a slide, and then drag the slide to another location. +Choose View - Outline, select a slide, and then drag the slide to another location. -Choose View - Normal or Notes, select the slide preview on the Slides Pane, and then drag the slide preview to another location. +Choose View - Normal or Notes, select the slide preview on the Slides Pane, and then drag the slide preview to another location. -To temporarily remove a slide from your presentation, go to Slide Sorter, right-click the slide, and then choose Show/Hide Slide. The number of the hidden slide is crossed out. To show the slide, right-click the slide, and then choose Show/Hide Slide. +To temporarily remove a slide from your presentation, go to Slide Sorter, right-click the slide, and then choose Show/Hide Slide. The number of the hidden slide is crossed out. To show the slide, right-click the slide, and then choose Show/Hide Slide.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/background.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/background.xhp index 29d4a57464..1f77bf6e8a 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/background.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/background.xhp @@ -31,72 +31,72 @@ slide masters; changing backgrounds slides;changing backgrounds - + Changing the Slide Background Fill - You can change the background color or the background fill of the current slide or all of the slides in your document. For a background fill, you can use hatching, a gradient, or a bitmap image. - If you want to change the background fill for all of the slides, choose View - Master - Slide Master. To change the background fill of a single slide, choose View - Normal. + You can change the background color or the background fill of the current slide or all of the slides in your document. For a background fill, you can use hatching, a gradient, or a bitmap image. + If you want to change the background fill for all of the slides, choose View - Master - Slide Master. To change the background fill of a single slide, choose View - Normal. insert help id when available - + Click Set Background Picture for Slide in the context menu of a slide in Normal view to select a bitmap file. This file is used as a background picture. removed a para, #63970 - To use a color, gradient, or hatching pattern for the slide background + To use a color, gradient, or hatching pattern for the slide background - Choose Format - Page, and then click on the Background tab. + Choose Format - Page, and then click on the Background tab. - In the Fill area, do one of the following: - Select Color, and then click a color in the list. - Select Gradient, and then click a gradient style in the list. - Select Hatching, and then click a hatching style in the list. + In the Fill area, do one of the following: + Select Color, and then click a color in the list. + Select Gradient, and then click a gradient style in the list. + Select Hatching, and then click a hatching style in the list. - Click OK. + Click OK. - To use an image for the slide background - You can display an entire image as a slide background, or you can tile the image to produce a patterned background. + To use an image for the slide background + You can display an entire image as a slide background, or you can tile the image to produce a patterned background. - Choose Format - Page, and then click on the Background tab. + Choose Format - Page, and then click on the Background tab. - In the Fill area, select Bitmap, and then click an image in the list. - If you want to use a custom image for the slide background, close the Page Setup dialog, and then choose Format - Area. Click the Bitmaps tab, and then click Import. Locate the image you want to import and click Open. When you return to the Background tab, the image you imported will be in the Bitmap list. + In the Fill area, select Bitmap, and then click an image in the list. + If you want to use a custom image for the slide background, close the Page Setup dialog, and then choose Format - Area. Click the Bitmaps tab, and then click Import. Locate the image you want to import and click Open. When you return to the Background tab, the image you imported will be in the Bitmap list. - Do one of the following: - To display the entire image as the background, clear the Tile check box in the Position area, and then select AutoFit. - To tile the image on the background, select Tile, and set the Size, Position, and Offset options for the image. + Do one of the following: + To display the entire image as the background, clear the Tile check box in the Position area, and then select AutoFit. + To tile the image on the background, select Tile, and set the Size, Position, and Offset options for the image. - Click OK. + Click OK. - This modification is only valid for the current presentation document. - To save a new slide master as a template + This modification is only valid for the current presentation document. + To save a new slide master as a template - Choose View - Master - Slide Master to change to the slide master. + Choose View - Master - Slide Master to change to the slide master. - Choose Format - Page to change the slide background, or choose other formatting commands. Objects that you add here will be visible on all slides that are based on this slide master. + Choose Format - Page to change the slide background, or choose other formatting commands. Objects that you add here will be visible on all slides that are based on this slide master. - Choose View - Normal to close the master view. + Choose View - Normal to close the master view. - Choose File - Templates - Save As Template to save the document as a template. + Choose File - Templates - Save As Template to save the document as a template. - Enter a name for the template. Do not change the category from "My Templates". Click OK. + Enter a name for the template. Do not change the category from "My Templates". Click OK. - Now you can use the Templates window to open a new presentation based on your new template. + Now you can use the Templates window to open a new presentation based on your new template.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/change_scale.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/change_scale.xhp index 92fc9a8294..08bc00466a 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/change_scale.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/change_scale.xhp @@ -32,19 +32,19 @@ zooming;keyboard keyboard; zooming -Zooming With the Keypad +Zooming With the Keypad -You can use the keypad to quickly enlarge or reduce the view on your slide. +You can use the keypad to quickly enlarge or reduce the view on your slide. -To zoom in, press the Plus Sign. +To zoom in, press the Plus Sign. -To zoom out, press the Minus Sign. +To zoom out, press the Minus Sign. -If you are using a mouse with a scroll wheel, you can hold down Ctrl and turn the wheel to change the zoom factor in all main modules of %PRODUCTNAME. +If you are using a mouse with a scroll wheel, you can hold down Ctrl and turn the wheel to change the zoom factor in all main modules of %PRODUCTNAME. -Shortcut keys for presentations +Shortcut keys for presentations diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/footer.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/footer.xhp index 8a10aab975..11525dd43e 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/footer.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/footer.xhp @@ -42,10 +42,10 @@ time and date on all slides mw changed "adding;" to "inserting;" - Adding a Header or a Footer to All Slides + Adding a Header or a Footer to All Slides - Every slide is based on a slide master. The text, pictures, tables, fields or other objects that you place on the slide master are visible as a background on all slides that are based on that slide master. - Masters exist for slides, notes, and handouts. + Every slide is based on a slide master. The text, pictures, tables, fields or other objects that you place on the slide master are visible as a background on all slides that are based on that slide master. + Masters exist for slides, notes, and handouts. To edit a slide master, choose View - Slide Master. Click the Close Master View icon on the Master View toolbar, or choose View - Normal, to leave the slide master. @@ -54,50 +54,50 @@ To edit a notes master, choose View - Notes Master. Click the Close Master View icon on the Master View toolbar, or choose View - Normal, to leave the notes master. - To edit a handout master, click the Handout tab above the slide. Click the Normal tab to leave the handout master. + To edit a handout master, click the Handout tab above the slide. Click the Normal tab to leave the handout master. - Adding predefined header or footer objects + Adding predefined header or footer objects see i53011 - Every type of master has some predefined areas to hold the date, footer, and slide numbers. + Every type of master has some predefined areas to hold the date, footer, and slide numbers. When you switch to the master view, you can move those areas to any position on the master. Also, you can enter additional text into them, resize them, and select their contents to apply text formatting. For example, you can change the font size or color. - A predefined Header Area is available only for notes and handouts. If you want a header on all slides, you can move the Footer Area on the slide master to the top. - Objects that you insert on a slide master are visible on all slides that are based on that slide master. + A predefined Header Area is available only for notes and handouts. If you want a header on all slides, you can move the Footer Area on the slide master to the top. + Objects that you insert on a slide master are visible on all slides that are based on that slide master. Choose Insert - Header and Footer. You see a dialog with two tab pages: Slides and Notes and Handouts where you can enter contents to the predefined areas. - By default, the Date and Time checkbox is enabled, but the format is set to Fixed and the text input box is empty, so no date and time is visible on the slides. - By default, the Footer checkbox is enabled, but the text input box is empty, so no footer is visible on the slides. - By default, the Slide number checkbox is cleared, so no slide numbers are visible. + By default, the Date and Time checkbox is enabled, but the format is set to Fixed and the text input box is empty, so no date and time is visible on the slides. + By default, the Footer checkbox is enabled, but the text input box is empty, so no footer is visible on the slides. + By default, the Slide number checkbox is cleared, so no slide numbers are visible. - Enter or select the contents that should be visible on all slides. + Enter or select the contents that should be visible on all slides. - If you want to change the position and formatting of the master objects, choose View - Master - Slide Master. - You see the slide master with areas near the bottom. You can move the areas , and you can select the fields and apply some formatting. You can also enter some text here which will be shown next to the fields. + If you want to change the position and formatting of the master objects, choose View - Master - Slide Master. + You see the slide master with areas near the bottom. You can move the areas , and you can select the fields and apply some formatting. You can also enter some text here which will be shown next to the fields. - Click the Date Area and move the time and date field. Select the <date/time> field and apply some formatting to change the format for the date and time on all slides. The same applies to the Footer Area and the Slide Number Area. + Click the Date Area and move the time and date field. Select the <date/time> field and apply some formatting to change the format for the date and time on all slides. The same applies to the Footer Area and the Slide Number Area. - Adding text objects as header or footer objects - You can add a text object anywhere on the slide master. + Adding text objects as header or footer objects + You can add a text object anywhere on the slide master. Choose View - Slide Master. - On the Drawing bar, select the Text icon + On the Drawing bar, select the Text icon Icon . - Drag in the slide master to draw a text object, and then type or paste your text. + Drag in the slide master to draw a text object, and then type or paste your text. - Choose View - Normal when you are finished. + Choose View - Normal when you are finished. You can also add fields, such as the date or page number, to a header or footer by choosing Insert - Field. @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ - Insert Fields + Insert Fields
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/gluepoints.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/gluepoints.xhp index 695e2a3a65..c3eeb5e565 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/gluepoints.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/gluepoints.xhp @@ -29,38 +29,38 @@ glue points;using -Using Gluepoints +Using Gluepoints -In Impress and Draw, you can connect each two shapes with a line called a connector. When you draw a connector between shapes, the connector will be attached to a gluepoint on each shape. Each shape has some default gluepoints, and the positions of the default gluepoints depend on the specific shape. You can add your own custom gluepoints to a shape and then attach connectors to the custom gluepoints. -To add and edit gluepoints +In Impress and Draw, you can connect each two shapes with a line called a connector. When you draw a connector between shapes, the connector will be attached to a gluepoint on each shape. Each shape has some default gluepoints, and the positions of the default gluepoints depend on the specific shape. You can add your own custom gluepoints to a shape and then attach connectors to the custom gluepoints. +To add and edit gluepoints -Do one of the following to get existing glue points visible for all elements: +Do one of the following to get existing glue points visible for all elements: -Click the Glue Point icon on the Drawing toolbar. +Click the Glue Point icon on the Drawing toolbar. -Choose Edit - Glue Points. +Choose Edit - Glue Points. -Click the Insert Glue Point icon on the Gluepoints toolbar. +Click the Insert Glue Point icon on the Gluepoints toolbar. -Select element on slide where you want to add glue points. +Select element on slide where you want to add glue points. -Click inside the shape where you want to add the new gluepoint. -If the shape is filled, you can click anywhere inside the shape. If the shape is unfilled, you can click the border to insert a glue point. Once inserted, you can drag the glue point to another position inside the shape. +Click inside the shape where you want to add the new gluepoint. +If the shape is filled, you can click anywhere inside the shape. If the shape is unfilled, you can click the border to insert a glue point. Once inserted, you can drag the glue point to another position inside the shape. -With the four icons next to the Insert Glue Point icon, you choose the directions which will be permitted for a connector at this gluepoint. You can choose one or more directions for a particular gluepoint. -If the Glue Point Relative icon is active, the gluepoint moves when you resize the object to keep its position relative to the object borders. -If the Glue Point Relative icon is not active, the icons next to it are no longer grayed out. With these icons you can decide where a gluepoint will be placed when the size of the object is changed. +With the four icons next to the Insert Glue Point icon, you choose the directions which will be permitted for a connector at this gluepoint. You can choose one or more directions for a particular gluepoint. +If the Glue Point Relative icon is active, the gluepoint moves when you resize the object to keep its position relative to the object borders. +If the Glue Point Relative icon is not active, the icons next to it are no longer grayed out. With these icons you can decide where a gluepoint will be placed when the size of the object is changed.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/html_export.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/html_export.xhp index c4840a8bcf..83f291bea9 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/html_export.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/html_export.xhp @@ -37,30 +37,30 @@ presentations; exporting to HTML HTML; exporting from presentations -Saving a Presentation in HTML Format +Saving a Presentation in HTML Format -Open the presentation that you want to save in HTML format. +Open the presentation that you want to save in HTML format. -Choose File - Export. +Choose File - Export. -Set the File type to HTML Document ($[officename] Impress) (.html;.htm). +Set the File type to HTML Document ($[officename] Impress) (.html;.htm). -Enter a File name, and then click Export. +Enter a File name, and then click Export. -Follow the instructions in the HTML Export Wizard. +Follow the instructions in the HTML Export Wizard.
-HTML Export Wizard -File - Export +HTML Export Wizard +File - Export
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/html_import.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/html_import.xhp index 5d0932fa42..fce08bab05 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/html_import.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/html_import.xhp @@ -34,35 +34,35 @@ text documents;inserting in slides inserting; text in presentations mw moved "inserting;" from simpress/01/04110200.xhp -Importing HTML Pages Into Presentations +Importing HTML Pages Into Presentations -You can import any text file, including text in HTML documents, into a slide. -To insert text from a file into a slide: +You can import any text file, including text in HTML documents, into a slide. +To insert text from a file into a slide: -In the slide where you want to insert the text, choose Insert - File. +In the slide where you want to insert the text, choose Insert - File. -Select "Text" or "HTML Document" as the File type. +Select "Text" or "HTML Document" as the File type. -Locate the file containing the text that you want to add, and then click Insert. +Locate the file containing the text that you want to add, and then click Insert. -If the text file contains more text than can be inserted into a single slide, you can divide the text over several slides. +If the text file contains more text than can be inserted into a single slide, you can divide the text over several slides. -Double-click in the inserted text to enter edit mode. +Double-click in the inserted text to enter edit mode. -Select all of the text that lies below the visible slide area and press Command +Select all of the text that lies below the visible slide area and press Command Ctrl+X. Choose Slide - New Page/Slide, and then press CommandCtrl+V. -Repeat steps 1 to 3 until all of the text is on slides. +Repeat steps 1 to 3 until all of the text is on slides. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/individual.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/individual.xhp index c9d0f7eb2b..7369eb7593 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/individual.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/individual.xhp @@ -38,64 +38,64 @@ showing;hidden slides hidden pages;showing -Creating a Custom Slide Show +Creating a Custom Slide Show -You can create custom slide shows to meet the needs of your audience using slides within the current presentation. -To create a custom slide show: +You can create custom slide shows to meet the needs of your audience using slides within the current presentation. +To create a custom slide show: -Choose Slide Show - Custom Slide Shows. +Choose Slide Show - Custom Slide Shows. -Click New and enter a name for your slide show in the Name box. +Click New and enter a name for your slide show in the Name box. -Under Existing Slides, select the slides you want to add to your slide show, and click the >> button. Hold down Shift to select a range of slides, or Ctrl to select multiple slides. +Under Existing Slides, select the slides you want to add to your slide show, and click the >> button. Hold down Shift to select a range of slides, or Ctrl to select multiple slides. -You can change the order of the slides in your custom slide show, by dragging and dropping the slides under Selected Slides. -To start a custom slide show: +You can change the order of the slides in your custom slide show, by dragging and dropping the slides under Selected Slides. +To start a custom slide show: -Choose Slide Show - Custom Slide Show. +Choose Slide Show - Custom Slide Show. -Select the show you want to start from the list. +Select the show you want to start from the list. -Click Start. +Click Start. -If you want the selected custom slide show to start when you click the Slide Show icon on the Presentation toolbar, or when you press F5, select Use Custom Slide Show. -Options for Running a Slide Show -To always start a slide show from the current slide: +If you want the selected custom slide show to start when you click the Slide Show icon on the Presentation toolbar, or when you press F5, select Use Custom Slide Show. +Options for Running a Slide Show +To always start a slide show from the current slide: -Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General. -In the Start presentation area, select the Always with current page check box. +In the Start presentation area, select the Always with current page check box. -Do not select this option if you want to run a custom slide show. -To hide a slide: -To hide the current slide, click the Hide Slide action button. +Do not select this option if you want to run a custom slide show. +To hide a slide: +To hide the current slide, click the Hide Slide action button. -To hide several slides, choose View - Slide Sorter, and then select the slide(s) that you want to hide. +To hide several slides, choose View - Slide Sorter, and then select the slide(s) that you want to hide. -Choose Slide Show - Show/Hide Slide. -The slide is not removed from your document. +Choose Slide Show - Show/Hide Slide. +The slide is not removed from your document. -To show a hidden slide: +To show a hidden slide: -Choose View - Slide Sorter, and then select the hidden slide(s) that you want to show. +Choose View - Slide Sorter, and then select the hidden slide(s) that you want to show. -Choose Slide Show - Show/Hide Slide. +Choose Slide Show - Show/Hide Slide.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/keyboard.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/keyboard.xhp index bef56e707c..553b88e4b5 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/keyboard.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/keyboard.xhp @@ -32,55 +32,55 @@ accessibility; $[officename] Impress -Using Shortcut Keys in $[officename] Impress +Using Shortcut Keys in $[officename] Impress -You can use the keyboard to access $[officename] Impress commands as well as to navigate through the workspace. $[officename] Impress uses the same shortcut keys as $[officename] Draw to create drawing objects. -Selecting placeholders -$[officename] Impress AutoLayouts use placeholders for slide titles, text, and objects. To select a placeholder, press Ctrl+Enter. To move to the next placeholder, press Ctrl+Enter again. -If you press Ctrl+Enter after you reach the last placeholder in a slide, a new slide is inserted after the current slide. The new slide uses the same layout as the current slide. +You can use the keyboard to access $[officename] Impress commands as well as to navigate through the workspace. $[officename] Impress uses the same shortcut keys as $[officename] Draw to create drawing objects. +Selecting placeholders +$[officename] Impress AutoLayouts use placeholders for slide titles, text, and objects. To select a placeholder, press Ctrl+Enter. To move to the next placeholder, press Ctrl+Enter again. +If you press Ctrl+Enter after you reach the last placeholder in a slide, a new slide is inserted after the current slide. The new slide uses the same layout as the current slide. -During a Slide Show -To start a slide show, press Ctrl+F2 or F5. -Advance to the next slide or to the next animation effect - +During a Slide Show +To start a slide show, press Ctrl+F2 or F5. +Advance to the next slide or to the next animation effect + Spacebar -Advance to the next slide without playing object animation effects - +Advance to the next slide without playing object animation effects + OptionAlt+PageDown -Return to previous slide - +Return to previous slide + OptionAlt+PageUp -Go to a specific slide -Type the page number of the slide, and then press Enter. -Stop slide show -Esc or -. -Slide Sorter -When you first switch to Slide Sorter, press Enter to change the keyboard focus to the workspace. Otherwise, press F6 to navigate to the workspace, and then press Enter. -Selecting and deselecting slides -Use the arrow keys to navigate to the slide that you want to select, and then press the Spacebar. To add to the selection, use the arrow keys to navigate to the slide(s) that you want to add, and press Spacebar again. To deselect a slide, navigate to the slide, and then press Spacebar. -Copying a slide: +Go to a specific slide +Type the page number of the slide, and then press Enter. +Stop slide show +Esc or -. +Slide Sorter +When you first switch to Slide Sorter, press Enter to change the keyboard focus to the workspace. Otherwise, press F6 to navigate to the workspace, and then press Enter. +Selecting and deselecting slides +Use the arrow keys to navigate to the slide that you want to select, and then press the Spacebar. To add to the selection, use the arrow keys to navigate to the slide(s) that you want to add, and press Spacebar again. To deselect a slide, navigate to the slide, and then press Spacebar. +Copying a slide: -Use the arrow keys to navigate to the slide that you want to copy, and then press Ctrl+C. +Use the arrow keys to navigate to the slide that you want to copy, and then press Ctrl+C. -Move to the slide where you want to paste the copied slide, and then press Ctrl+V. +Move to the slide where you want to paste the copied slide, and then press Ctrl+V. -Moving a slide: +Moving a slide: -Use the arrow keys to navigate to the slide that you want to move, and then press Ctrl+X. +Use the arrow keys to navigate to the slide that you want to move, and then press Ctrl+X. -Navigate to the slide where you want to move the slide, and then press Ctrl+V. +Navigate to the slide where you want to move the slide, and then press Ctrl+V. -Select Before or After the current slide, and then click OK. +Select Before or After the current slide, and then click OK.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/layer_move.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/layer_move.xhp index 797094cc9b..7c155ce097 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/layer_move.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/layer_move.xhp @@ -34,18 +34,18 @@ layers; moving objects moving; between layers -Moving Objects to a Different Layer +Moving Objects to a Different Layer -Drawings in %PRODUCTNAME Draw support layers. +Drawings in %PRODUCTNAME Draw support layers. -Click and hold the object until its edges flash. +Click and hold the object until its edges flash. -Drag the object to the name tab of the layer you want to move it to. +Drag the object to the name tab of the layer you want to move it to. -Release the object. +Release the object. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/layer_new.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/layer_new.xhp index 45512bc571..51d0e3c8ba 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/layer_new.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/layer_new.xhp @@ -34,28 +34,28 @@ inserting; layers changing;layer properties MW changed "modifying;..." to "changing;..." -Inserting Layers +Inserting Layers -Drawings in %PRODUCTNAME Draw support layers. +Drawings in %PRODUCTNAME Draw support layers. -Right-click the layer tab area at the bottom. +Right-click the layer tab area at the bottom. -Choose Insert Layer. +Choose Insert Layer. -Type a name for the layer in the Name box. +Type a name for the layer in the Name box. -In the Properties area, set the options for the layer. +In the Properties area, set the options for the layer. -Click OK. The new layer automatically becomes the active layer. +Click OK. The new layer automatically becomes the active layer. -To change the properties of a layer, click the name tab of the layer, and then choose Format - Layer. -You cannot change the name of or delete a predefined %PRODUCTNAME Draw layer. +To change the properties of a layer, click the name tab of the layer, and then choose Format - Layer. +You cannot change the name of or delete a predefined %PRODUCTNAME Draw layer. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/layer_tipps.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/layer_tipps.xhp index ab7569807d..ec2764eafe 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/layer_tipps.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/layer_tipps.xhp @@ -37,61 +37,61 @@ showing;hidden layers selecting;layers -Working With Layers +Working With Layers -Drawings in %PRODUCTNAME Draw support layers. -Selecting a layer -To select a layer, click the name tab of the layer at the bottom of the workspace. -To edit the properties of a layer, double-click a layer tab. -Hiding layers +Drawings in %PRODUCTNAME Draw support layers. +Selecting a layer +To select a layer, click the name tab of the layer at the bottom of the workspace. +To edit the properties of a layer, double-click a layer tab. +Hiding layers -Select a layer, and then choose Format - Layer. +Select a layer, and then choose Format - Layer. -In the Properties area, clear the Visible check box. +In the Properties area, clear the Visible check box. -Click OK. +Click OK. -In the name tab of the layer, the text color of the name changes to blue. -You can make a layer visible or invisible by clicking on its tab while holding down the Shift key. -Showing hidden layers +In the name tab of the layer, the text color of the name changes to blue. +You can make a layer visible or invisible by clicking on its tab while holding down the Shift key. +Showing hidden layers -Select a hidden layer, and then choose Format - Layer. +Select a hidden layer, and then choose Format - Layer. -In the Properties area, select the Visible check box. +In the Properties area, select the Visible check box. -Click OK. +Click OK. -Locking layers +Locking layers -Select a layer, and then choose Format - Layer. +Select a layer, and then choose Format - Layer. -In the Properties area, select the Locked check box. +In the Properties area, select the Locked check box. -Click OK. +Click OK. -You cannot edit objects on a locked layer. -Unlocking layers +You cannot edit objects on a locked layer. +Unlocking layers -Select a locked layer, and then choose Format - Layer. +Select a locked layer, and then choose Format - Layer. -In the Properties area, clear the Locked check box. +In the Properties area, clear the Locked check box. -Click OK. +Click OK. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/layers.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/layers.xhp index c8549ebb8d..35f9010ef3 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/layers.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/layers.xhp @@ -32,29 +32,29 @@ layers; definition -About Layers +About Layers -Layers are available in $[officename] Draw, not in $[officename] Impress. Layers allow you to assemble elements on a page that are related. Think of layers as individual workspaces that you can hide from view, hide from printing, or lock. -Layers do not determine the stacking order of objects on your page, except for the Controls layer which is always in front of other layers. -The stacking order of objects on your page is determined by the sequence in which you add the objects. You can rearrange the stacking order by Modify - Arrange. -The areas on a layer that do not contain objects are transparent. -$[officename] Draw provides three default layers: +Layers are available in $[officename] Draw, not in $[officename] Impress. Layers allow you to assemble elements on a page that are related. Think of layers as individual workspaces that you can hide from view, hide from printing, or lock. +Layers do not determine the stacking order of objects on your page, except for the Controls layer which is always in front of other layers. +The stacking order of objects on your page is determined by the sequence in which you add the objects. You can rearrange the stacking order by Modify - Arrange. +The areas on a layer that do not contain objects are transparent. +$[officename] Draw provides three default layers: -Layout +Layout -Controls +Controls -Dimension Lines +Dimension Lines -You cannot delete or rename the default layers. You can add your own layers by Insert - Layer. -The Layout layer is the default workspace. The Layout layer determines the location of title, text, and object placeholders on your page. -The Controls layer can be used for buttons that have been assigned an action, but that should not be printed. Set the layer's properties to not printable. Objects on the Controls layer are always in front of objects on other layers. -The Dimension Lines layer is where you draw, for example, the dimension lines. By switching the layer to show or hide, you can easily switch these lines on and off. -You can lock a layer to protect its contents, or hide a layer and its contents from view or from printing. When you add a new layer to a page, the layer is added to all of the pages in your document. However, when you add an object to a layer, it is only added to the current page. If you want the object to appear on all of the pages, add the object to the master page (View - Master). +You cannot delete or rename the default layers. You can add your own layers by Insert - Layer. +The Layout layer is the default workspace. The Layout layer determines the location of title, text, and object placeholders on your page. +The Controls layer can be used for buttons that have been assigned an action, but that should not be printed. Set the layer's properties to not printable. Objects on the Controls layer are always in front of objects on other layers. +The Dimension Lines layer is where you draw, for example, the dimension lines. By switching the layer to show or hide, you can easily switch these lines on and off. +You can lock a layer to protect its contents, or hide a layer and its contents from view or from printing. When you add a new layer to a page, the layer is added to all of the pages in your document. However, when you add an object to a layer, it is only added to the current page. If you want the object to appear on all of the pages, add the object to the master page (View - Master).
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/line_arrow_styles.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/line_arrow_styles.xhp index bbc6bd3cf8..f2295c559e 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/line_arrow_styles.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/line_arrow_styles.xhp @@ -33,40 +33,37 @@ styles;arrow and line styles loading;arrow and line styles mw changed "line ends;" to "lines;" -Loading Line and Arrow Styles +Loading Line and Arrow Styles - You can use styles to organize similar line and arrow types. $[officename] provides a few standard style files that you can load and use in your document. If you want, you can add or delete elements from a style file, or even create a custom style file. - To load a line styles file: + You can use styles to organize similar line and arrow types. $[officename] provides a few standard style files that you can load and use in your document. If you want, you can add or delete elements from a style file, or even create a custom style file. + To load a line styles file: - Choose Format - Line, and then click the Line Styles tab. + Choose Format - Line, and then click the Line Styles tab. - Click the Load Line Styles button. + Click the Load Line Styles button. - Locate the file containing the line styles that you want to load, and then click OK. The file has the format [filename].sod. + Locate the file containing the line styles that you want to load, and then click OK. The file has the format [filename].sod. - To save a line styles file, click the Save Line Styles button, enter a filename, and then click OK. - To load an arrow styles file: + To save a line styles file, click the Save Line Styles button, enter a filename, and then click OK. + To load an arrow styles file: - Choose Format - Line, and then click the Arrow Styles tab. + Choose Format - Line, and then click the Arrow Styles tab. - Click the Load Arrow Styles button. + Click the Load Arrow Styles button. - Locate the file containing the arrow styles that you want to load, and then click OK. The file has the format [filename].soe. + Locate the file containing the arrow styles that you want to load, and then click OK. The file has the format [filename].soe. - To save an arrow styles file, click the Save Arrow Styles button, enter a filename, and then click OK. + To save an arrow styles file, click the Save Arrow Styles button, enter a filename, and then click OK. - Format - Line + Format - Line \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/line_draw.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/line_draw.xhp index 96f31c8d1a..ecb9fc27af 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/line_draw.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/line_draw.xhp @@ -36,76 +36,76 @@ corner points drawing;lines -Drawing Curves +Drawing Curves -The Curve icon +The Curve icon Icon on the Drawing toolbar opens a toolbar to draw Bézier curves. Bézier curves are defined by a start point and an end point, which are called "anchors". The curvature of the Bézier curve is defined by control points ("handles"). Moving a control point changes the shape of the Bézier curve. -Control points are only visible in "Edit Points" mode. Control points are represented by circles, anchor points are represented by squares. The start point is a little bit larger than the other anchor points. -Bézier curve segments and straight line segments can be joined to form more complex Bézier curves. Three different transitions can be applied to join adjacent segments: +Control points are only visible in "Edit Points" mode. Control points are represented by circles, anchor points are represented by squares. The start point is a little bit larger than the other anchor points. +Bézier curve segments and straight line segments can be joined to form more complex Bézier curves. Three different transitions can be applied to join adjacent segments: -A symmetrical anchor point has the same line curvature on either side, and two control lines that move together as a straight line. +A symmetrical anchor point has the same line curvature on either side, and two control lines that move together as a straight line. -A smooth anchor point may have different line curvatures on either side. +A smooth anchor point may have different line curvatures on either side. -A corner anchor point has one or two independent control lines. Changing one side has no effect on the other side. +A corner anchor point has one or two independent control lines. Changing one side has no effect on the other side. -How to use the Curve tool +How to use the Curve tool -On the Drawing toolbar, open the Curves toolbar +On the Drawing toolbar, open the Curves toolbar Icon and select the Curve Icon tool. -Click where you want the curve to start, and drag in the direction where you want the curve to go. The control line will indicate the direction. -Hold down Shift while you drag to restrict the direction to a 45 degree grid. +Click where you want the curve to start, and drag in the direction where you want the curve to go. The control line will indicate the direction. +Hold down Shift while you drag to restrict the direction to a 45 degree grid. -Release the mouse where the first control point should be. +Release the mouse where the first control point should be. -Move the pointer to where you want the curve segment to end. The curve follows the pointer. +Move the pointer to where you want the curve segment to end. The curve follows the pointer. -Do one of the following: +Do one of the following: -Double-click on the position of the end point to finish drawing the line. -To create a closed shape, double-click the starting point of the line. +Double-click on the position of the end point to finish drawing the line. +To create a closed shape, double-click the starting point of the line. -Click and release the mouse button to add an anchor point. Move the mouse to draw the next segment. +Click and release the mouse button to add an anchor point. Move the mouse to draw the next segment. -Click and drag in any direction to add a smooth anchor point. +Click and drag in any direction to add a smooth anchor point. -How to use the Freeform Line tool +How to use the Freeform Line tool -On the Drawing toolbar, open the Curves toolbar +On the Drawing toolbar, open the Curves toolbar Icon and select the Freeform Line Icon tool. -Click where you want the curve to start, and keep holding the mouse button down. +Click where you want the curve to start, and keep holding the mouse button down. -Draw the freeform line as you would do with a pencil. +Draw the freeform line as you would do with a pencil. -Release the mouse button to finish the line. +Release the mouse button to finish the line.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/line_edit.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/line_edit.xhp index 41f1615a9f..64f51d9ab0 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/line_edit.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/line_edit.xhp @@ -36,105 +36,105 @@ deleting;points converting;points points;adding/converting/deleting -MW deleted "adding;"Editing Curves +MW deleted "adding;"Editing Curves -A curved line segment consists of two data points (endpoints) and two control points (handles). A control line connects a control point to a data point. You can change the shape of a curve by converting a data point to a different type, or by dragging the control points to a different location. -You can also modify the properties of the line by selecting the line and choosing Format - Line. +A curved line segment consists of two data points (endpoints) and two control points (handles). A control line connects a control point to a data point. You can change the shape of a curve by converting a data point to a different type, or by dragging the control points to a different location. +You can also modify the properties of the line by selecting the line and choosing Format - Line.
- + Icon -To view the data points and control points of a curved line, select the line, and then click the Points icon on the Drawing bar. The data points are represented by squares and the control points by circles. A control point might overlay a data point. +To view the data points and control points of a curved line, select the line, and then click the Points icon on the Drawing bar. The data points are represented by squares and the control points by circles. A control point might overlay a data point.
-To adjust a curved line segment: +To adjust a curved line segment: -Select a curved line, and then click the Points icon on the Drawing Bar. +Select a curved line, and then click the Points icon on the Drawing Bar. -Do one of the following: +Do one of the following: -Drag a data point to resize the line. If a control point overlies the data point, drag the control point until you can see the data point, and then drag the data point. +Drag a data point to resize the line. If a control point overlies the data point, drag the control point until you can see the data point, and then drag the data point. -Drag a control point. The curve pulls in the direction that you drag the control point. +Drag a control point. The curve pulls in the direction that you drag the control point. -To split a curved line: -You can only split a curved line that has three or more data points. +To split a curved line: +You can only split a curved line that has three or more data points. -Select a curved line, and then click the Points icon on the Drawing Bar. +Select a curved line, and then click the Points icon on the Drawing Bar. -Select a data point, and then click the Split Curve icon on the Edit Points Bar. +Select a data point, and then click the Split Curve icon on the Edit Points Bar. -To create a closed shape: +To create a closed shape: -Select a curved line, and then click the Points icon on the Drawing Bar. +Select a curved line, and then click the Points icon on the Drawing Bar. -On the Edit Points Bar, click the Close Bézier icon. +On the Edit Points Bar, click the Close Bézier icon. -To convert a data point on a curved line: +To convert a data point on a curved line: -Select a curved line, and then click the Points icon on the Drawing Bar. +Select a curved line, and then click the Points icon on the Drawing Bar. -Click the data point you want to convert, and do one of the following: +Click the data point you want to convert, and do one of the following: -To convert the data point to a smooth point, click the Smooth Transition icon on the Edit Points Bar. +To convert the data point to a smooth point, click the Smooth Transition icon on the Edit Points Bar. -To convert the data point to a symmetrical point, click the Symmetric Transition icon on the Edit Points Bar. +To convert the data point to a symmetrical point, click the Symmetric Transition icon on the Edit Points Bar. -To convert the data point to a corner point, click the Corner Point icon on the Edit Points Bar. +To convert the data point to a corner point, click the Corner Point icon on the Edit Points Bar. -To add a data point: +To add a data point: -Select a curved line, and then click the Points icon on the Drawing Bar. +Select a curved line, and then click the Points icon on the Drawing Bar. -On the Edit Points Bar, click the Insert Points icon. +On the Edit Points Bar, click the Insert Points icon. -Click the line where you want to add the point, and drag a short distance. +Click the line where you want to add the point, and drag a short distance. -If a data point does not have a control point, select the data point, and then click the Convert to Curve icon on the Edit Points Bar. -To delete a data point: +If a data point does not have a control point, select the data point, and then click the Convert to Curve icon on the Edit Points Bar. +To delete a data point: -Select a curved line, and then click the Points icon on the Drawing Bar. +Select a curved line, and then click the Points icon on the Drawing Bar. -Click the point you want to delete. +Click the point you want to delete. -On the Edit Points Bar, click the Delete Points icon. +On the Edit Points Bar, click the Delete Points icon.
-Edit Points bar +Edit Points bar diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/main.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/main.xhp index 6abbdc35bf..b5beafe749 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/main.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/main.xhp @@ -30,10 +30,10 @@ $[officename] Impress instructions instructions; $[officename] Impress -Instructions for Using $[officename] Impress +Instructions for Using $[officename] Impress -Viewing and Printing a Presentation +Viewing and Printing a Presentation @@ -42,13 +42,13 @@ -Animated Objects and 3D Objects +Animated Objects and 3D Objects -Importing and Exporting +Importing and Exporting @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ -Miscellaneous +Miscellaneous diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/masterpage.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/masterpage.xhp index 4f05c70465..a2c8dce6fe 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/masterpage.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/masterpage.xhp @@ -35,54 +35,54 @@ slides; backgrounds master pages, see slide masters -Applying a Slide Design to a Slide Master +Applying a Slide Design to a Slide Master -Every slide in a presentation has exactly one slide master, also known as master page. A slide master determines the text formatting style for the title and outline and the background design for all slides that use this slide master. -To apply a new slide master +Every slide in a presentation has exactly one slide master, also known as master page. A slide master determines the text formatting style for the title and outline and the background design for all slides that use this slide master. +To apply a new slide master -Select Slide - Slide Master Design. +Select Slide - Slide Master Design. -Click Load. +Click Load. -Under Categories, select a slide design category. +Under Categories, select a slide design category. -Under Templates, select a template with the design that you want to apply. To preview the template, click More, and then select the Preview box. +Under Templates, select a template with the design that you want to apply. To preview the template, click More, and then select the Preview box. -Click OK. +Click OK. -Do one of the following: +Do one of the following: -To apply the slide design to all of the slides in your presentation, select the Exchange background page check box, and then click OK. +To apply the slide design to all of the slides in your presentation, select the Exchange background page check box, and then click OK. -To apply the slide design to the current slide only, clear the Exchange background page check box, and then click OK. +To apply the slide design to the current slide only, clear the Exchange background page check box, and then click OK. Moved from taskpanel.xhp - the described controls belong on the Master Page sidebar -Left-click to apply the master page to all slides. Right-click for a context menu. +Left-click to apply the master page to all slides. Right-click for a context menu. -Applies the master page to all slides. +Applies the master page to all slides. -Applies the master page or the slide design to the selected slides. +Applies the master page or the slide design to the selected slides. -Resizes the preview of the master pages. +Resizes the preview of the master pages. -Click to apply a slide design to all selected slides. Right-click for a context menu. +Click to apply a slide design to all selected slides. Right-click for a context menu. -Styles and Formatting +Styles and Formatting diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/move_object.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/move_object.xhp index 8a6329763f..fbf6e51c1b 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/move_object.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/move_object.xhp @@ -33,12 +33,12 @@ objects;moving in slides moving;objects in slides -Moving Objects +Moving Objects -You can move selected objects in your slide by dragging them, using the arrow keys, or by copying the objects and pasting them in another location. +You can move selected objects in your slide by dragging them, using the arrow keys, or by copying the objects and pasting them in another location. -The arrow keys let you move objects more precisely than with the mouse.UFI: add grid, guides, snap points +The arrow keys let you move objects more precisely than with the mouse.UFI: add grid, guides, snap points diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/orgchart.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/orgchart.xhp index ba1ac3e7e3..aba290154c 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/orgchart.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/orgchart.xhp @@ -34,67 +34,67 @@ organization charts hot spots in flowcharts interactions; hot spots -changed orgcharts (Google about 1 million pages) to organization charts (about 33 million pages)Creating a Flowchart +changed orgcharts (Google about 1 million pages) to organization charts (about 33 million pages)Creating a Flowchart -To create a flowchart: +To create a flowchart: -Select a tool from the Flowchart toolbar on the Drawing bar. +Select a tool from the Flowchart toolbar on the Drawing bar. -Drag a shape in your slide. +Drag a shape in your slide. -To add more shapes, repeat the last steps. +To add more shapes, repeat the last steps. -Open the Connectors toolbar on the Drawing bar, and select a connector line. +Open the Connectors toolbar on the Drawing bar, and select a connector line. -Move the pointer over the edge of a shape so that the connection sites appear. +Move the pointer over the edge of a shape so that the connection sites appear. -Click a connection site, drag to a connection site on another shape, and then release. +Click a connection site, drag to a connection site on another shape, and then release. -To add more connectors, repeat the last steps. +To add more connectors, repeat the last steps. -You now have the basic outline for your flowchart. -To add text to the shapes on your flowchart -Do one of the following: +You now have the basic outline for your flowchart. +To add text to the shapes on your flowchart +Do one of the following: -Double-click the shape, and type or paste your text. +Double-click the shape, and type or paste your text. -Click the Text icon on the Drawing bar, and drag a text object over the shape. Type or paste your text into the text object. +Click the Text icon on the Drawing bar, and drag a text object over the shape. Type or paste your text into the text object. -To add a color fill to a shape: +To add a color fill to a shape: -Select the shape, and choose Format - Area. +Select the shape, and choose Format - Area. -Select Color, and then click a color in the list. +Select Color, and then click a color in the list. -To add some hot spots that call other slides: -Assign interactions to some objects on your slide. +To add some hot spots that call other slides: +Assign interactions to some objects on your slide. -Select the object, then choose Slide Show - Interaction. +Select the object, then choose Slide Show - Interaction. -Select an interaction in the dialog. For example, select to go to the next slide when the user clicks the object. +Select an interaction in the dialog. For example, select to go to the next slide when the user clicks the object.
-Connectors -Glue points +Connectors +Glue points
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/page_copy.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/page_copy.xhp index a3f1bbd672..519030ab20 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/page_copy.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/page_copy.xhp @@ -36,46 +36,46 @@ inserting; slides from files pasting;slides from other presentations mw added "pasting;" -Copying Slides From Other Presentations +Copying Slides From Other Presentations -You can insert slides from another presentation into the current presentation. You can also copy and paste slides between presentations. -To insert a slide from another presentation: +You can insert slides from another presentation into the current presentation. You can also copy and paste slides between presentations. +To insert a slide from another presentation: -Open a presentation, and choose View - Normal. +Open a presentation, and choose View - Normal. -Choose Insert - File. +Choose Insert - File. -Locate the presentation file containing the slide that you want to insert, and click Insert. +Locate the presentation file containing the slide that you want to insert, and click Insert. -Click the plus sign next to the icon for the presentation file, and then select the slide(s) that you want to insert. +Click the plus sign next to the icon for the presentation file, and then select the slide(s) that you want to insert. -Click OK. +Click OK. -To copy and paste slides between presentations: +To copy and paste slides between presentations: -Open the presentations that you want to copy and paste between. +Open the presentations that you want to copy and paste between. -In the presentation containing the slide(s) that you want to copy, choose View - Slide Sorter. +In the presentation containing the slide(s) that you want to copy, choose View - Slide Sorter. -Select the slide(s), and then choose Edit - Copy. +Select the slide(s), and then choose Edit - Copy. -Change to the presentation where you want to paste the slide(s), and then choose View - Normal. +Change to the presentation where you want to paste the slide(s), and then choose View - Normal. -Select the slide that you want the copied slide to follow, and then choose Edit - Paste. +Select the slide that you want the copied slide to follow, and then choose Edit - Paste. -Insert - File +Insert - File diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/palette_files.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/palette_files.xhp index 264150a1c9..430a1d0342 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/palette_files.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/palette_files.xhp @@ -37,22 +37,22 @@ hatching;loading lists loading;colors/gradients/hatchings -Loading Color, Gradient, and Hatching Lists +Loading Color, Gradient, and Hatching Lists -You can use lists to organize colors, gradients, or hatching patterns. $[officename] provides several lists that you can load and use in your document. If you want, you can add or delete elements from a list, or even create custom lists. -To load a color list: +You can use lists to organize colors, gradients, or hatching patterns. $[officename] provides several lists that you can load and use in your document. If you want, you can add or delete elements from a list, or even create custom lists. +To load a color list: -Choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab. +Choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab. -Click the Load Color List button. +Click the Load Color List button. -Locate the color list that you want to load, and then click Open. A color list file has the format [filename].soc. +Locate the color list that you want to load, and then click Open. A color list file has the format [filename].soc. -To save a color list, click the Save Color List button, enter a filename, and then click Save. +To save a color list, click the Save Color List button, enter a filename, and then click Save. colors; default colors colors; LibreOffice colors @@ -62,35 +62,35 @@ colors; web colors; CMYK -The CMYK list is optimized for print colors. The colors in the Web and the HTML lists are optimized for displays using a resolution of 256 colors. The palettes libreoffice.soc and tango.soc contain the official LibreOffice and Tango colors respectively. -To load a gradient list: +The CMYK list is optimized for print colors. The colors in the Web and the HTML lists are optimized for displays using a resolution of 256 colors. The palettes libreoffice.soc and tango.soc contain the official LibreOffice and Tango colors respectively. +To load a gradient list: -Choose Format - Area, and then click the Gradients tab. +Choose Format - Area, and then click the Gradients tab. -Click the Load Gradients List button. +Click the Load Gradients List button. -Locate the gradient list that you want to load, and then click Open. A gradient list file has the format [filename].sog. +Locate the gradient list that you want to load, and then click Open. A gradient list file has the format [filename].sog. -To save a gradients list, click the Save Gradients List button, enter a filename, and then click Save. -To load a hatching list: +To save a gradients list, click the Save Gradients List button, enter a filename, and then click Save. +To load a hatching list: -Choose Format - Area, and then click the Hatching tab. +Choose Format - Area, and then click the Hatching tab. -Click the Load Hatches List button. +Click the Load Hatches List button. -Locate the hatches list that you want to load, and then click Open. A hatches list file has the format [filename].soh. +Locate the hatches list that you want to load, and then click Open. A hatches list file has the format [filename].soh. -To save a hatches list, click the Save Hatches List button, enter a filename, and then click Save. +To save a hatches list, click the Save Hatches List button, enter a filename, and then click Save. -Format - Area +Format - Area diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/print_tofit.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/print_tofit.xhp index fc0d398c5d..7fc71cd7d4 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/print_tofit.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/print_tofit.xhp @@ -34,24 +34,24 @@ pages; fitting to printed pages printing; fitting to paper -Printing a Slide to Fit a Paper Size +Printing a Slide to Fit a Paper Size -You can reduce the size of a slide when you print, so that the slide can fit on a printed page. +You can reduce the size of a slide when you print, so that the slide can fit on a printed page. -Open the document that you want to print. +Open the document that you want to print. -In Normal View, choose Format - Page, and then click the Page tab. +In Normal View, choose Format - Page, and then click the Page tab. -In Layout settings area, select the Fit object to paper format check box. +In Layout settings area, select the Fit object to paper format check box. -In the Paper format area, select a Format. +In the Paper format area, select a Format. -Click OK. The slide is resized to fit the printed page, while maintaining the relative positions of the objects on the slide. +Click OK. The slide is resized to fit the printed page, while maintaining the relative positions of the objects on the slide. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/printing.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/printing.xhp index cdecdc5c7c..f3578bc4d8 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/printing.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/printing.xhp @@ -37,86 +37,85 @@ handout printing layout;printing handouts MW made "handouts;.." a one level entry and added "layout;..." -Printing Presentations +Printing Presentations - Default printer settings + Default printer settings - To set the default printing options for $[officename] Impress, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Print. + To set the default printing options for $[officename] Impress, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Print. - Setting printer options for the current presentation + Setting printer options for the current presentation - Choose File - Print. + Choose File - Print. - Click the %PRODUCTNAME Impress or the Options tab page, and then select the printer options. - These settings override the default printer options in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Print for the current print job only. + Click the %PRODUCTNAME Impress or the Options tab page, and then select the printer options. + These settings override the default printer options in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Print for the current print job only. - Choosing a print layout for handouts + Choosing a print layout for handouts - Choose File - Print. + Choose File - Print. - On the General tab page of the Print dialog, select the "Handouts" entry from the Document listbox. + On the General tab page of the Print dialog, select the "Handouts" entry from the Document listbox. - Select the number of slides to print per page of paper. + Select the number of slides to print per page of paper. - Defining print options for handouts + Defining print options for handouts - Click the Handout tab. + Click the Handout tab. - Choose Insert - Page Number to open the Header and Footer dialog box. + Choose Insert - Page Number to open the Header and Footer dialog box. - Click Notes and Handouts to enter the header and footer text for handouts. - You see four areas on this dialog with check boxes for Header, Date and time, Footer, and Page number. These four areas correspond to the four areas in the corners of the handout master view. + Click Notes and Handouts to enter the header and footer text for handouts. + You see four areas on this dialog with check boxes for Header, Date and time, Footer, and Page number. These four areas correspond to the four areas in the corners of the handout master view. - Enter text for header, footer, and date. Check the Page number box, if you want to number the handout pages. Ensure the Header check box is enabled if you want your header text to be printed. + Enter text for header, footer, and date. Check the Page number box, if you want to number the handout pages. Ensure the Header check box is enabled if you want your header text to be printed. - Click Apply to All. - The fields in the handout master view on screen are not updated, but the text that you entered will be printed. + Click Apply to All. + The fields in the handout master view on screen are not updated, but the text that you entered will be printed. - Printing handouts or notes + Printing handouts or notes - Choose File - Print. + Choose File - Print. - Click the Document listbox and select the type of contents to print. + Click the Document listbox and select the type of contents to print. - Select Handouts or Notes and select the number of slides to print on each page of paper. + Select Handouts or Notes and select the number of slides to print on each page of paper. - If you want another layout of the slides on the printed paper pages, use the mouse to move the slides around on the Handout view. - Printing a range of slides + If you want another layout of the slides on the printed paper pages, use the mouse to move the slides around on the Handout view. + Printing a range of slides - Choose View - Slide Sorter. + Choose View - Slide Sorter. - Hold down Shift, and click the range of slides that you want to print. + Hold down Shift, and click the range of slides that you want to print. - Choose File - Print. + Choose File - Print. - In the Range and copies area, click Slides. + In the Range and copies area, click Slides. - Enter the slide numbers you want to print, and click OK. + Enter the slide numbers you want to print, and click OK.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/rehearse_timings.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/rehearse_timings.xhp index 745c1f9b91..9e409ef40a 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/rehearse_timings.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/rehearse_timings.xhp @@ -35,32 +35,32 @@ automatic slide changes;rehearse timings recording;display times for slides -Rehearse Timings of Slide Changes +Rehearse Timings of Slide Changes -$[officename] assists you in defining the right rehearse timings for automatic slide changes. -Prepare the slides, start the show using a special icon, tell your imaginary audience what you want to tell for the first slide, then advance to the next slide and so on. $[officename] records the display time for each slide, so the next time you play the show with automatic slide changes, the timing will be as recorded. -To record a show with rehearse timings +$[officename] assists you in defining the right rehearse timings for automatic slide changes. +Prepare the slides, start the show using a special icon, tell your imaginary audience what you want to tell for the first slide, then advance to the next slide and so on. $[officename] records the display time for each slide, so the next time you play the show with automatic slide changes, the timing will be as recorded. +To record a show with rehearse timings -Open a presentation, and switch to Slide Sorter View. +Open a presentation, and switch to Slide Sorter View. -Start the show with the Rehearse Timings icon +Start the show with the Rehearse Timings icon Icon in the Slide View bar. You see the first slide, and a timer in the bottom corner. -When it's time to advance to the next slide, click the timer. To keep the default setting for this slide, click the slide, but not the timer. Continue for all slides in your presentation. +When it's time to advance to the next slide, click the timer. To keep the default setting for this slide, click the slide, but not the timer. Continue for all slides in your presentation. -$[officename] has recorded the display time for each slide. Save your presentation. +$[officename] has recorded the display time for each slide. Save your presentation. If you want the whole presentation to auto-repeat, open the menu Slide Show - Slide Show Settings. Click Loop and repeat after and OK.
-Slide Show Settings +Slide Show Settings
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/select_object.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/select_object.xhp index d5f7fc4314..47a5378098 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/select_object.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/select_object.xhp @@ -35,14 +35,14 @@ covered objects underlying objects -Selecting Underlying Objects +Selecting Underlying Objects -To select an object that is covered by other objects, hold down OptionAlt and click through the objects until you reach the underlying object. To cycle through the objects in reverse order, hold down OptionAlt+Shift when you click. +To select an object that is covered by other objects, hold down OptionAlt and click through the objects until you reach the underlying object. To cycle through the objects in reverse order, hold down OptionAlt+Shift when you click. -To select an object that is covered by another object using the keyboard, press Tab to cycle through the objects on the slide. To cycle through the objects in reverse order, press Shift+Tab. +To select an object that is covered by another object using the keyboard, press Tab to cycle through the objects on the slide. To cycle through the objects in reverse order, press Shift+Tab. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/show.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/show.xhp index 1e51339b42..e4b0efafd3 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/show.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/show.xhp @@ -39,53 +39,53 @@ slide transitions;automatic automatic slide transition MW transferred three index entries from simpress/01/03130000.xhp, deleted "slide shows;showing", made "running;..." a one level entry and added "automatic...". MW transferred 2 index entries from simpress/01/06040000.xhp. -Showing a Slide Show +Showing a Slide Show UFI: new file see i68756 -Different ways exist to start a slide show. Once a slide show is running, you can take control pressing keys or clicking the mouse buttons. -By default, a slide show always starts with the first slide. You advance manually through slides up to the last slide. You can change these settings. -Running a Slide Show +Different ways exist to start a slide show. Once a slide show is running, you can take control pressing keys or clicking the mouse buttons. +By default, a slide show always starts with the first slide. You advance manually through slides up to the last slide. You can change these settings. +Running a Slide Show -Choose Slide Show - Slide Show to run the show. +Choose Slide Show - Slide Show to run the show. -If you want all shows to start from the current slide instead of the first slide, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General and click Always with current page. +If you want all shows to start from the current slide instead of the first slide, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General and click Always with current page. -Click to advance to the next effect or to the next slide. +Click to advance to the next effect or to the next slide. -Press Esc to abort the show before the end. -Many more keys are available to control a slide show. You can also right-click to open a context menu with useful commands. -Showing an automatic slide show (kiosk mode) -For an automatic change to the next slide, you must assign a slide transition to each slide. +Press Esc to abort the show before the end. +Many more keys are available to control a slide show. You can also right-click to open a context menu with useful commands. +Showing an automatic slide show (kiosk mode) +For an automatic change to the next slide, you must assign a slide transition to each slide. Open the Slide Transition sidebar deck. -In the Advance slide area, click Automatically after, and select a time duration. +In the Advance slide area, click Automatically after, and select a time duration. -Click Apply to All Slides. +Click Apply to All Slides. -You can assign a different time for every slide to advance to the next slide. The rehearse timings feature can assist you to get the timing right. -To advance to the first slide, after all slides have been shown, you must set the slide show to repeat automatically. +You can assign a different time for every slide to advance to the next slide. The rehearse timings feature can assist you to get the timing right. +To advance to the first slide, after all slides have been shown, you must set the slide show to repeat automatically. -Choose Slide Show - Slide Show Settings. +Choose Slide Show - Slide Show Settings. -In the Type area, click Auto and select a pause time between shows. +In the Type area, click Auto and select a pause time between shows. -Running a slide show from a file -You can start %PRODUCTNAME from a command prompt, followed by the parameter -show and an Impress filename. For example, to start the file filename.odp from the command prompt, enter the following command: - +Running a slide show from a file +You can start %PRODUCTNAME from a command prompt, followed by the parameter -show and an Impress filename. For example, to start the file filename.odp from the command prompt, enter the following command: + soffice -show filename.odp -This assumes that soffice is in the program path of your system, and that filename.odp is located in the current directory. +This assumes that soffice is in the program path of your system, and that filename.odp is located in the current directory.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/table_insert.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/table_insert.xhp index 9cd78873e5..0724dbf79c 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/table_insert.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/table_insert.xhp @@ -31,116 +31,116 @@ presentations;inserting spreadsheets including spreadsheets -Including Spreadsheets in Slides +Including Spreadsheets in Slides -You can apply different methods to insert spreadsheet cells into your Impress slides or Draw pages: +You can apply different methods to insert spreadsheet cells into your Impress slides or Draw pages: -Insert a native table - you enter the data into the cells and apply fancy formatting using the Table Design section on the Tasks pane. +Insert a native table - you enter the data into the cells and apply fancy formatting using the Table Design section on the Tasks pane. -Insert a new table as an OLE object or insert an existing file as an OLE object - you can specify the link to a file to be a live link to the latest data saved in a spreadsheet file. +Insert a new table as an OLE object or insert an existing file as an OLE object - you can specify the link to a file to be a live link to the latest data saved in a spreadsheet file. Insert table dialog - Number of columns -Enter the number of columns for the new table.Insert table dialog - Number of rows +Enter the number of columns for the new table.Insert table dialog - Number of rows -Enter the number of rows for the new table.Contextmenu of a table in Impress and DrawCell +Enter the number of rows for the new table.Contextmenu of a table in Impress and DrawCell -Define the vertical alignment of selected or all cell contents. Split or merge cells. +Define the vertical alignment of selected or all cell contents. Split or merge cells. -All selected cells are merged into one cell. +All selected cells are merged into one cell. -The selected cell is split into several cells. You see the Split Cells dialog box. +The selected cell is split into several cells. You see the Split Cells dialog box. -The cell contents are align at the top of the cells. +The cell contents are align at the top of the cells. -The cell contents are aligned vertically centered in the cells. +The cell contents are aligned vertically centered in the cells. -The cell contents are aligned at the bottom of the cells. +The cell contents are aligned at the bottom of the cells. -Selects the current table. +Selects the current table. Row -Choose commands for the selected or all rows. +Choose commands for the selected or all rows. -Distributes the height of the selected or all rows to the same size. The height of the table is not changed. +Distributes the height of the selected or all rows to the same size. The height of the table is not changed. -If currently no cell is selected, all rows will be selected. If currently cells are selected, all rows containing the selected cells will be selected. +If currently no cell is selected, all rows will be selected. If currently cells are selected, all rows containing the selected cells will be selected. -If currently no cell is selected, a new row will be inserted at the bottom of the table. If currently cells are selected, as many new rows as the selection has will be inserted below the selection. +If currently no cell is selected, a new row will be inserted at the bottom of the table. If currently cells are selected, as many new rows as the selection has will be inserted below the selection. -All rows of the current selection will be deleted.Column +All rows of the current selection will be deleted.Column -Choose commands for the selected or all columns. +Choose commands for the selected or all columns. -Distributes the width of the selected or all columns to the same size. The width of the table is not changed. +Distributes the width of the selected or all columns to the same size. The width of the table is not changed. -If currently no cell is selected, all columns will be selected. If currently cells are selected, all columns containing the selected cells will be selected. +If currently no cell is selected, all columns will be selected. If currently cells are selected, all columns containing the selected cells will be selected. -If currently no cell is selected, a new column will be inserted at the right border of the table. If currently cells are selected, as many new columns as the selection has will be inserted right of the selection. +If currently no cell is selected, a new column will be inserted at the right border of the table. If currently cells are selected, as many new columns as the selection has will be inserted right of the selection. -All columns of the current selection will be deleted. +All columns of the current selection will be deleted. sic -Align the table within the page or slide. -Inserting a native table +Align the table within the page or slide. +Inserting a native table -Go to the Impress slide or Draw page where you want to insert the table. +Go to the Impress slide or Draw page where you want to insert the table. -Choose Insert - Table or use the Table icon on the Standard toolbar to insert a table. +Choose Insert - Table or use the Table icon on the Standard toolbar to insert a table. -Double-click the table and enter or paste the data into the cells. +Double-click the table and enter or paste the data into the cells. -Select some cell contents and right-click to open the context menu. Choose commands to change the cell's contents, like font size and line spacing. +Select some cell contents and right-click to open the context menu. Choose commands to change the cell's contents, like font size and line spacing. -Right-click the table border to open the table's context menu. Use the table's context menu to enter a name and description for the table, or to distribute the rows or columns equally, among other commands. +Right-click the table border to open the table's context menu. Use the table's context menu to enter a name and description for the table, or to distribute the rows or columns equally, among other commands. -Select some cells and right-click to open a context menu, where you can insert or delete rows and columns, among other commands. -To select a rectangular area of cells, point to a cell in one corner of the rectangle, hold down the mouse button, and drag the mouse to the opposite corner of the rectangle, then release the mouse button. -To select one cell, point to that cell, hold down the mouse button, and drag the mouse to the next cell and back, then release the mouse button. +Select some cells and right-click to open a context menu, where you can insert or delete rows and columns, among other commands. +To select a rectangular area of cells, point to a cell in one corner of the rectangle, hold down the mouse button, and drag the mouse to the opposite corner of the rectangle, then release the mouse button. +To select one cell, point to that cell, hold down the mouse button, and drag the mouse to the next cell and back, then release the mouse button. -Inserting a new spreadsheet as an OLE object -You can add a blank $[officename] Calc spreadsheet to a slide as an OLE object. +Inserting a new spreadsheet as an OLE object +You can add a blank $[officename] Calc spreadsheet to a slide as an OLE object. -Go to the slide where you want to insert the spreadsheet. +Go to the slide where you want to insert the spreadsheet. -Choose Insert - OLE- Object. Click Create new and select the %PRODUCTNAME Spreadsheet. Click OK. Click in the spreadsheet to enter your data. +Choose Insert - OLE- Object. Click Create new and select the %PRODUCTNAME Spreadsheet. Click OK. Click in the spreadsheet to enter your data. -Click outside the spreadsheet to view the slide. +Click outside the spreadsheet to view the slide. -To resize the spreadsheet without resizing the cells, double-click the spreadsheet, and then drag a corner handle. To resize the cells of the spreadsheet, click the spreadsheet, and then drag a corner handle. -Inserting a spreadsheet from a file -When you insert an existing spreadsheet into your slide, changes that are made to the original spreadsheet file are not updated on your slide. You can, however, make changes to the spreadsheet in your slide. +To resize the spreadsheet without resizing the cells, double-click the spreadsheet, and then drag a corner handle. To resize the cells of the spreadsheet, click the spreadsheet, and then drag a corner handle. +Inserting a spreadsheet from a file +When you insert an existing spreadsheet into your slide, changes that are made to the original spreadsheet file are not updated on your slide. You can, however, make changes to the spreadsheet in your slide. -Go to the slide where you want to insert the spreadsheet. +Go to the slide where you want to insert the spreadsheet. -Choose Insert - Object - OLE Object. +Choose Insert - Object - OLE Object. -Select Create from file, and click Search. +Select Create from file, and click Search. -Locate the file you want to insert, and then click OK. -Enable the Link to file checkbox to insert the file as a live link. +Locate the file you want to insert, and then click OK. +Enable the Link to file checkbox to insert the file as a live link. -The entire spreadsheet is inserted into your slide. If you want to change the sheet that is displayed, double-click the spreadsheet, and then select a different sheet. +The entire spreadsheet is inserted into your slide. If you want to change the sheet that is displayed, double-click the spreadsheet, and then select a different sheet. -Format - Slide Layout -Insert - Object - OLE Object +Format - Slide Layout +Insert - Object - OLE Object diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/text2curve.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/text2curve.xhp index d9aef9f6e0..31b3acba36 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/text2curve.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/text2curve.xhp @@ -37,21 +37,21 @@ draw objects;converting text to curves;converting text to -Converting Text Characters into Drawing Objects +Converting Text Characters into Drawing Objects -You can convert text characters into curves that you can edit and resize as you would any drawing object. Once you convert text into a drawing object, you can no longer edit the content of the text. -To convert text into a drawing object: +You can convert text characters into curves that you can edit and resize as you would any drawing object. Once you convert text into a drawing object, you can no longer edit the content of the text. +To convert text into a drawing object: -Select the text that you want to convert, and do one of the following: -In $[officename] Draw, choose Modify - Convert - To Curve. -In $[officename] Impress, right-click the border of the text object, and then choose Convert - To Curve. +Select the text that you want to convert, and do one of the following: +In $[officename] Draw, choose Modify - Convert - To Curve. +In $[officename] Impress, right-click the border of the text object, and then choose Convert - To Curve. -If your text contains more than one character, the converted text becomes a grouped object. Double-click the group to edit individual objects. Press Esc when finished. +If your text contains more than one character, the converted text becomes a grouped object. Double-click the group to edit individual objects. Press Esc when finished. -Now, click the Points icon on the Drawing bar. Click the object. You can see all the Bézier points of the object. On the Edit Points bar, you can find various icons for editing, inserting and deleting points. +Now, click the Points icon on the Drawing bar. Click the object. You can see all the Bézier points of the object. On the Edit Points bar, you can find various icons for editing, inserting and deleting points.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/guide/vectorize.xhp b/source/text/simpress/guide/vectorize.xhp index 1cf9d7055a..5e2bddae7a 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/guide/vectorize.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/guide/vectorize.xhp @@ -35,24 +35,24 @@ bitmaps; converting to vector graphics vector graphics;converting bitmaps -Converting Bitmap Images into Vector Graphics +Converting Bitmap Images into Vector Graphics -A vector graphic can be resized without losing the quality of the graphic. In $[officename] Draw and Impress, you can convert a bitmap image into a vector graphic. +A vector graphic can be resized without losing the quality of the graphic. In $[officename] Draw and Impress, you can convert a bitmap image into a vector graphic. -Select the bitmap image that you want to convert. +Select the bitmap image that you want to convert. -Do one of the following: -In $[officename] Draw, choose Modify - Convert - To Polygon. -In $[officename] Impress, right-click the object, and then choose Convert - To Polygon. +Do one of the following: +In $[officename] Draw, choose Modify - Convert - To Polygon. +In $[officename] Impress, right-click the object, and then choose Convert - To Polygon. -Set the conversion options for the image, and then click OK. See Convert to Polygon for a description of the conversion options. +Set the conversion options for the image, and then click OK. See Convert to Polygon for a description of the conversion options.
-Convert to Polygon +Convert to Polygon diff --git a/source/text/simpress/main0000.xhp b/source/text/simpress/main0000.xhp index 5a05f94a99..ba61543b87 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/main0000.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/main0000.xhp @@ -32,17 +32,17 @@ -Welcome to the $[officename] Impress Help -How to Work With $[officename] Impress +Welcome to the $[officename] Impress Help +How to Work With $[officename] Impress -$[officename] Impress Menus, Toolbars, and Keys +$[officename] Impress Menus, Toolbars, and Keys -Help about the Help +Help about the Help diff --git a/source/text/simpress/main0113.xhp b/source/text/simpress/main0113.xhp index 8bf3164e8d..742bb11572 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/main0113.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/main0113.xhp @@ -30,26 +30,26 @@
-Modify -Contains commands for modifying objects in your document. +Modify +Contains commands for modifying objects in your document.
-Rotate -Rotates the selected object(s). +Rotate +Rotates the selected object(s). -Distribution +Distribution -Name Object +Name Object -Group +Group -Ungroup +Ungroup -Enter Group +Enter Group -Exit Group +Exit Group diff --git a/source/text/simpress/main0200.xhp b/source/text/simpress/main0200.xhp index 051db9a72f..6060dda2e3 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/main0200.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/main0200.xhp @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
-Toolbars +Toolbars
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@
-Add objects, including charts, spreadsheets, and images, to your document. +Add objects, including charts, spreadsheets, and images, to your document.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/main0202.xhp b/source/text/simpress/main0202.xhp index c0dbc1312e..8fc30fd977 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/main0202.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/main0202.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@
-Line and Filling Bar -The Line and Filling Bar contains commands and options that you can apply in the current view. +Line and Filling Bar +The Line and Filling Bar contains commands and options that you can apply in the current view.
@@ -41,21 +41,21 @@ -Line Style +Line Style -Line Width +Line Width -Line Color +Line Color -Area Style / Filling +Area Style / Filling -Shadow +Shadow diff --git a/source/text/simpress/main0203.xhp b/source/text/simpress/main0203.xhp index 9b2880ee3f..2461d6f99a 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/main0203.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/main0203.xhp @@ -28,9 +28,8 @@
- Text Formatting Bar - To display the Text Formatting Bar, place the cursor inside a text object. + Text Formatting Bar + To display the Text Formatting Bar, place the cursor inside a text object.
@@ -42,7 +41,7 @@ - Font Color + Font Color @@ -114,13 +113,13 @@ -Character +Character - Paragraph + Paragraph - Numbering Symbols + Numbering Symbols @@ -135,10 +134,10 @@ -Increase Font - Increases the font size of the selected text. +Increase Font + Increases the font size of the selected text. -Reduce Font - Reduces the font size of the selected text. +Reduce Font + Reduces the font size of the selected text. \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/simpress/main0204.xhp b/source/text/simpress/main0204.xhp index c35e9a9059..2d6d71ee63 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/main0204.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/main0204.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
-Slide View Bar -The Slide View bar opens with the Slide Sorter view. +Slide View Bar +The Slide View bar opens with the Slide Sorter view.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/main0206.xhp b/source/text/simpress/main0206.xhp index a4c6ad60e5..96419f6602 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/main0206.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/main0206.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Status Bar - The status bar displays information about your document, including the currently selected object. You can double-click some status bar items to open a related dialog window. + Status Bar + The status bar displays information about your document, including the currently selected object. You can double-click some status bar items to open a related dialog window.
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/main0209.xhp b/source/text/simpress/main0209.xhp index 8dafe37e45..3b52836f85 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/main0209.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/main0209.xhp @@ -33,14 +33,14 @@ rulers; in presentations origin of rulers -Rulers -You can use vertical and horizontal rulers at the left and upper edges of the $[officename] Impress workspace to assist you in creating your slide. The sections of the rulers that cover the area of the slide are white. -When you select an object, its dimensions are displayed on the rulers as gray double lines. To precisely resize the object, drag one of the double lines to a new location on the ruler. -When you select a text object on a slide, indents and tabs are displayed on the horizontal ruler. To change the indent or tab settings for the text object, drag an indent or a tab marker to a new location on the ruler. -You can also drag a snap line from a ruler to help you align objects on your slide. To insert a snap line using a ruler, drag the edge of a ruler into the slide. -To show or hide the rulers, choose View - Rulers. -To specify the measurement units for a ruler, right-click the ruler, and then choose a new unit from the list. -To change the origin (0 point) of the rulers, drag the intersection of the two rulers in the top left corner into the workspace. Vertical and horizontal guides appear. Continue to drag until the vertical and horizontal guides are where you want the new origin to be, and then release. To reset the origins of the rulers to the default values, double-click the intersection. -To change the slide margins, drag the edge of the white areas in the rulers. +Rulers +You can use vertical and horizontal rulers at the left and upper edges of the $[officename] Impress workspace to assist you in creating your slide. The sections of the rulers that cover the area of the slide are white. +When you select an object, its dimensions are displayed on the rulers as gray double lines. To precisely resize the object, drag one of the double lines to a new location on the ruler. +When you select a text object on a slide, indents and tabs are displayed on the horizontal ruler. To change the indent or tab settings for the text object, drag an indent or a tab marker to a new location on the ruler. +You can also drag a snap line from a ruler to help you align objects on your slide. To insert a snap line using a ruler, drag the edge of a ruler into the slide. +To show or hide the rulers, choose View - Rulers. +To specify the measurement units for a ruler, right-click the ruler, and then choose a new unit from the list. +To change the origin (0 point) of the rulers, drag the intersection of the two rulers in the top left corner into the workspace. Vertical and horizontal guides appear. Continue to drag until the vertical and horizontal guides are where you want the new origin to be, and then release. To reset the origins of the rulers to the default values, double-click the intersection. +To change the slide margins, drag the edge of the white areas in the rulers. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/main0210.xhp b/source/text/simpress/main0210.xhp index ef5e3962dd..c2d6f4afee 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/main0210.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/main0210.xhp @@ -29,36 +29,36 @@
-Drawing Bar -The Drawing bar contains frequently used editing tools. Click the arrow next to an icon to open a toolbar that contains additional commands. +Drawing Bar +The Drawing bar contains frequently used editing tools. Click the arrow next to an icon to open a toolbar that contains additional commands.
-You can view the Drawing bar also from a text document or spreadsheet. The set of visible icons can be slightly different according to the current document type. +You can view the Drawing bar also from a text document or spreadsheet. The set of visible icons can be slightly different according to the current document type.
-Select -To select an object on the current slide, click the Select tool (white arrow) on the Drawing bar, and then click the object. -To select more than one object, hold down Shift while you click. -To select an object that is behind another object, hold OptionAlt, and then click the object. To select the next underlying object in the stacking, hold OptionAlt, and then click again. To return the selection to the previously selected object, hold down Shift + OptionAlt, and then click. -To add text to a selected object, double-click the object and type or enter your text. -To remove a selection, click anywhere outside the selected object, or press Escape. +Select +To select an object on the current slide, click the Select tool (white arrow) on the Drawing bar, and then click the object. +To select more than one object, hold down Shift while you click. +To select an object that is behind another object, hold OptionAlt, and then click the object. To select the next underlying object in the stacking, hold OptionAlt, and then click again. To return the selection to the previously selected object, hold down Shift + OptionAlt, and then click. +To add text to a selected object, double-click the object and type or enter your text. +To remove a selection, click anywhere outside the selected object, or press Escape.
-Rectangle -Draws a filled rectangle where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rectangle, and drag to the size you want. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag. +Rectangle +Draws a filled rectangle where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rectangle, and drag to the size you want. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag. -Ellipse -Draws a filled oval where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to draw the oval, and drag to the size you want. To draw a circle, hold down Shift while you drag. +Ellipse +Draws a filled oval where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to draw the oval, and drag to the size you want. To draw a circle, hold down Shift while you drag. -Text -Draws a text box where you click or drag in the current document. Click anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. +Text +Draws a text box where you click or drag in the current document. Click anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. -Lines and Arrows -Opens the Arrows toolbar to insert lines and arrows. +Lines and Arrows +Opens the Arrows toolbar to insert lines and arrows. @@ -73,29 +73,29 @@ -Points -Enables you to edit points on your drawing. -Glue Points -Enables you to edit glue points on your drawing. +Points +Enables you to edit points on your drawing. +Glue Points +Enables you to edit glue points on your drawing. -From File +From File -Rotate -This tool is used to rotate the object. +Rotate +This tool is used to rotate the object. -Extrusion On/Off -Switches the 3D effects on and off for the selected objects. +Extrusion On/Off +Switches the 3D effects on and off for the selected objects. -Interaction +Interaction diff --git a/source/text/simpress/main0211.xhp b/source/text/simpress/main0211.xhp index 32b4a0f516..0bdbda0498 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/main0211.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/main0211.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
-Outline Bar -In Outline View, the Outline bar contains frequently used editing tools. Click the arrow next to an icon to open a toolbar that contains additional commands. +Outline Bar +In Outline View, the Outline bar contains frequently used editing tools. Click the arrow next to an icon to open a toolbar that contains additional commands.
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ -Slide Show +Slide Show diff --git a/source/text/simpress/main0212.xhp b/source/text/simpress/main0212.xhp index 3d35d6f9d0..a7e581c29a 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/main0212.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/main0212.xhp @@ -31,12 +31,12 @@
-Slide Sorter Bar -In Slide Sorter view, the Slide Sorter bar can be used. +Slide Sorter Bar +In Slide Sorter view, the Slide Sorter bar can be used.
-Slide Show +Slide Show diff --git a/source/text/simpress/main0213.xhp b/source/text/simpress/main0213.xhp index bb47b3428b..8ea1c00958 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/main0213.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/main0213.xhp @@ -30,40 +30,40 @@
-Options Bar -To display the Options Bar, choose View - Toolbars - Options. +Options Bar +To display the Options Bar, choose View - Toolbars - Options.
UFI: changed some links, see #i52549 -Display Grid +Display Grid -Helplines While Moving +Helplines While Moving -Snap to Grid +Snap to Grid -Snap to Snap Lines +Snap to Snap Lines -Snap to Page Margins +Snap to Page Margins -Snap to Object Border +Snap to Object Border -Snap to Object Points +Snap to Object Points -Allow Quick Editing +Allow Quick Editing -Select Text Area Only +Select Text Area Only diff --git a/source/text/simpress/main0214.xhp b/source/text/simpress/main0214.xhp index 7732d20ab6..2c8ba9d581 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/main0214.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/main0214.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
-Image Bar -Use the Image bar to set the color, contrast, and brightness options for the selected graphic object(s). +Image Bar +Use the Image bar to set the color, contrast, and brightness options for the selected graphic object(s).
diff --git a/source/text/simpress/main0503.xhp b/source/text/simpress/main0503.xhp index ca5557af37..57e2907d33 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/main0503.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/main0503.xhp @@ -33,21 +33,21 @@
- $[officename] Impress Features - $[officename] Impress lets you create professional slide shows that can include charts, drawing objects, text, multimedia and a variety of other items. If you want, you can even import and modify Microsoft PowerPoint presentations. + $[officename] Impress Features + $[officename] Impress lets you create professional slide shows that can include charts, drawing objects, text, multimedia and a variety of other items. If you want, you can even import and modify Microsoft PowerPoint presentations.
- For on-screen slide shows, animation, slide transitions and multimedia are a few of the techniques you can use to make your presentation more exciting. - Creating Vector Graphics - Many of the tools for creating vector graphics in $[officename] Draw are available in $[officename] Impress. - Creating Slides - $[officename] Impress provides you with templates to create professional-looking slides. - You can also assign a number of dynamic effects to your slides, including animation and transition effects. - Creating Presentations - Several views or pages are available when you design a slide show. For example, the Slide Sorter displays an overview of your slides in thumbnail form, while the Handout page contains both the slide and the text you want to distribute to the audience. - $[officename] Impress also lets you rehearse the timing of your slide show. - Publishing Presentations - You can publish your slides on-screen, as handouts, or as HTML documents. - Giving Presentations - $[officename] Impress gives you the choice of running a slide show automatically or manually. + For on-screen slide shows, animation, slide transitions and multimedia are a few of the techniques you can use to make your presentation more exciting. + Creating Vector Graphics + Many of the tools for creating vector graphics in $[officename] Draw are available in $[officename] Impress. + Creating Slides + $[officename] Impress provides you with templates to create professional-looking slides. + You can also assign a number of dynamic effects to your slides, including animation and transition effects. + Creating Presentations + Several views or pages are available when you design a slide show. For example, the Slide Sorter displays an overview of your slides in thumbnail form, while the Handout page contains both the slide and the text you want to distribute to the audience. + $[officename] Impress also lets you rehearse the timing of your slide show. + Publishing Presentations + You can publish your slides on-screen, as handouts, or as HTML documents. + Giving Presentations + $[officename] Impress gives you the choice of running a slide show automatically or manually. diff --git a/source/text/simpress/presenter.xhp b/source/text/simpress/presenter.xhp index 37a58da391..b5cbe4b29e 100644 --- a/source/text/simpress/presenter.xhp +++ b/source/text/simpress/presenter.xhp @@ -28,143 +28,143 @@ Presenter Console shortcuts -Presenter Console Keyboard Shortcuts - When running a slide show using the Presenter Console, you can use the following keys: +Presenter Console Keyboard Shortcuts + When running a slide show using the Presenter Console, you can use the following keys: - Action + Action - Key or Keys + Key or Keys - Next slide, or next effect + Next slide, or next effect - Left click, right arrow, down arrow, spacebar, page down, enter, return, 'N' + Left click, right arrow, down arrow, spacebar, page down, enter, return, 'N' - Previous slide, or previous effect + Previous slide, or previous effect - Right click, left arrow, up arrow, page up, backspace, 'P' + Right click, left arrow, up arrow, page up, backspace, 'P' - First slide + First slide - Home + Home - Last slide + Last slide - End + End - Previous slide without effects + Previous slide without effects - Alt+Page Up + Alt+Page Up - Next slide without effects + Next slide without effects - Alt+Page Down + Alt+Page Down - Black/Unblack the screen + Black/Unblack the screen - 'B', '.' + 'B', '.' - White/Unwhite the screen + White/Unwhite the screen - 'W', ',' + 'W', ',' - End slide show + End slide show - Esc, '-' + Esc, '-' - Go to slide number + Go to slide number - Number followed by Enter + Number followed by Enter - Grow/Shrink size of notes font + Grow/Shrink size of notes font - 'G', 'S' + 'G', 'S' - Scroll notes up/down + Scroll notes up/down - 'A', 'Z' + 'A', 'Z' - Move caret in notes view backward/forward + Move caret in notes view backward/forward - 'H', 'L' + 'H', 'L' - Show the Presenter Console + Show the Presenter Console - Ctrl-'1' + Ctrl-'1' - Show the Presentation Notes + Show the Presentation Notes - Ctrl-'2' + Ctrl-'2' - Show the Slides Overview + Show the Slides Overview - Ctrl-'3' + Ctrl-'3'
diff --git a/source/text/smath/00/00000004.xhp b/source/text/smath/00/00000004.xhp index bb3406b91c..528c4e394c 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/00/00000004.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/00/00000004.xhp @@ -29,218 +29,218 @@ -To access this function... +To access this function...
-Choose Edit - Next Marker +Choose Edit - Next Marker -F4 key +F4 key
-Choose Edit - Previous Marker +Choose Edit - Previous Marker -Shift+F4 +Shift+F4
-Choose Edit - Next Error +Choose Edit - Next Error -F3 key +F3 key
-Choose Edit - Previous Error +Choose Edit - Previous Error -Shift+F3 +Shift+F3
-On the Tools bar, click +On the Tools bar, click
- + Icon -Zoom 100% +Zoom 100%
-Choose View - Zoom In +Choose View - Zoom In -On the Tools bar, click +On the Tools bar, click
- + Icon -Zoom In +Zoom In
-Choose View - Zoom Out +Choose View - Zoom Out -On the Tools bar, click +On the Tools bar, click
- + Icon -Zoom Out +Zoom Out
-Choose View - Show All +Choose View - Show All -On the Tools bar, click +On the Tools bar, click
- + Icon -Show All +Show All
-Choose View - Update +Choose View - Update -F9 key -On the Tools bar, click +F9 key +On the Tools bar, click
- + Icon -Update +Update
-Choose View - AutoUpdate Display +Choose View - AutoUpdate Display -Choose View - Elements +Choose View - Elements
-Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Unary/Binary Operators +Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Unary/Binary Operators Choose View - Elements; then on the Elements pane select Unary/Binary Operators from the listbox.
-Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Relations +Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Relations Choose View - Elements; then on the Elements pane select Relations from the listbox.
-Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Operators +Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Operators Choose View - Elements; then on the Elements pane select Operators from the listbox.
-Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Functions +Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Functions Choose View - Elements; then on the Elements pane select Functions from the listbox.
-Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Brackets +Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Brackets Choose View - Elements; then on the Elements pane select Brackets from the listbox.
-Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Attributes +Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Attributes Choose View - Elements; then on the Elements pane select Attributes from the listbox.
-Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Formats +Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Formats Choose View - Elements; then on the Elements pane select Formats from the listbox.
-Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Set Operations +Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Set Operations Choose View - Elements; then on the Elements pane select Set Operations from the listbox.
-Choose Format - Fonts +Choose Format - Fonts -Choose Format - Fonts - Modify +Choose Format - Fonts - Modify -Choose Format - Font Size +Choose Format - Font Size -Choose Format - Spacing +Choose Format - Spacing -Choose Format - Alignment +Choose Format - Alignment -Choose Format - Text Mode +Choose Format - Text Mode
-Choose Tools - Symbols +Choose Tools - Symbols -On the Tools bar, click +On the Tools bar, click
- + Icon -Symbols +Symbols
-Choose Tools - Symbols - Edit +Choose Tools - Symbols - Edit -Choose Tools - Import Formula +Choose Tools - Import Formula Choose Tools - Import MathML from Clipboard -Choose Tools - Customize +Choose Tools - Customize
-Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Others +Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Others -Choose View - Elements; then on the Elements pane select Others from the listbox. +Choose View - Elements; then on the Elements pane select Others from the listbox.
- + Icon -Formula Cursor +Formula Cursor
diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/02080000.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/02080000.xhp index 157dad24c2..11ea817afd 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/02080000.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/02080000.xhp @@ -33,10 +33,10 @@ markers; definition -Next Marker -Moves the cursor to the next marker (to the right). +Next Marker +Moves the cursor to the next marker (to the right).
-"Markers" are placeholders. They take the form of <?> in the Commands window. +"Markers" are placeholders. They take the form of <?> in the Commands window.
diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/02090000.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/02090000.xhp index 909ff4d9b5..076fc5c29e 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/02090000.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/02090000.xhp @@ -30,10 +30,10 @@ markers; previousplaceholders; previous marker - Previous Marker - Moves the cursor to the previous marker (to the left). + Previous Marker + Moves the cursor to the previous marker (to the left).
- "Markers" are placeholders. They take the form of <?> in the Commands window. + "Markers" are placeholders. They take the form of <?> in the Commands window.
diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/02100000.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/02100000.xhp index 51dad70e2a..48ed2a15a2 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/02100000.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/02100000.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@ finding ;errors in %PRODUCTNAME Math -Next Error -Moves the cursor to the next error (moving right). +Next Error +Moves the cursor to the next error (moving right).
diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/02110000.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/02110000.xhp index 99765dddfc..31cef12327 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/02110000.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/02110000.xhp @@ -30,8 +30,8 @@
error search; previous error -Previous Error -Moves the cursor to the previous error (moving left). +Previous Error +Moves the cursor to the previous error (moving left).
diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03040000.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03040000.xhp index ffe1930670..cc43f53d71 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03040000.xhp @@ -35,8 +35,8 @@ formulas; increasing size of display -Zoom In -Increases the display scale of the formula by 25%. The current zoom factor is displayed on the status bar. A selection of available zoom options is accessible through the context menu. The context menu in the work area also contains zoom commands. +Zoom In +Increases the display scale of the formula by 25%. The current zoom factor is displayed on the status bar. A selection of available zoom options is accessible through the context menu. The context menu in the work area also contains zoom commands.
diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03050000.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03050000.xhp index 499f1e4c03..b32f604730 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03050000.xhp @@ -37,8 +37,8 @@ zooming out on formula display -Zoom Out -Decreases the display scale of formulas by 25%. The current zoom factor is displayed on the status bar. A selection of available zoom options is accessible through the context menu. The context menu in the work area also contains zoom commands. +Zoom Out +Decreases the display scale of formulas by 25%. The current zoom factor is displayed on the status bar. A selection of available zoom options is accessible through the context menu. The context menu in the work area also contains zoom commands.
diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03060000.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03060000.xhp index 89a1ea3785..8c9b7148d1 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03060000.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ formulas; maximum size -Show All -Displays the entire formula in the maximum size possible so that all elements are included. The formula is reduced or enlarged so that all formula elements can be displayed in the work area. The current zoom factor is displayed on the status bar. A selection of available zoom options is accessible through the context menu. The context menu in the work area also contains zoom commands. The zoom commands and icons are only available in Math documents, not for embedded Math objects. +Show All +Displays the entire formula in the maximum size possible so that all elements are included. The formula is reduced or enlarged so that all formula elements can be displayed in the work area. The current zoom factor is displayed on the status bar. A selection of available zoom options is accessible through the context menu. The context menu in the work area also contains zoom commands. The zoom commands and icons are only available in Math documents, not for embedded Math objects.
diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03070000.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03070000.xhp index 5f8081c151..0bdcfa45b7 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03070000.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03070000.xhp @@ -32,9 +32,9 @@ formula view; updating -Update -This command updates the formula in the document window. -Changes in the Commands window are automatically updated if AutoUpdate Display is activated. +Update +This command updates the formula in the document window. +Changes in the Commands window are automatically updated if AutoUpdate Display is activated.
diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03080000.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03080000.xhp index f83f76380b..3541dbbd3a 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03080000.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03080000.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@ changes; accepting automatically -AutoUpdate Display -Automatically updates a modified formula. If you do not select this option, the formula will only be updated after you choose View - Update or press F9. +AutoUpdate Display +Automatically updates a modified formula. If you do not select this option, the formula will only be updated after you choose View - Update or press F9.
diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03090000.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03090000.xhp index 2011276b2d..2941231464 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03090000.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03090000.xhp @@ -33,13 +33,13 @@ elements;in Math -Elements +Elements - This is a list of operators, functions, symbols and format options that can be inserted into the formula. + This is a list of operators, functions, symbols and format options that can be inserted into the formula.
- Some examples show you the range of operations. - The selection window is divided into two parts. Clicking a symbol at the top of the window displays its subordinate symbols in the lower half of the window. - You can access the same functions in submenus through the context menu of the Commands window. + Some examples show you the range of operations. + The selection window is divided into two parts. Clicking a symbol at the top of the window displays its subordinate symbols in the lower half of the window. + You can access the same functions in submenus through the context menu of the Commands window.
diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03090100.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03090100.xhp index 1891b4fac6..414df22390 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03090100.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03090100.xhp @@ -57,25 +57,25 @@ user-defined operators;unary and binary -Unary/Binary Operators +Unary/Binary Operators You can choose various unary and binary operators to build your $[officename] Math formula. Unary refers to operators that affect one placeholder. Binary refers to operators that connect two placeholders. The lower area of the Elements pane displays the individual operators. The context menu of the Commands window also contains a list of these operators, as well as additional operators. If you need an operator that is not contained in the Elements pane, use the context menu or type it directly in the Commands window.
The following is a complete list of the unary and binary operators. The symbol next to the operator indicates that it can be accessed through the Elements pane (choose View - Elements) or through the context menu of the Commands window. -Unary and Binary Operators +Unary and Binary Operators - + Icon -Plus -Inserts a plus with one placeholder. You can also type + <?> in the Commands window. +Plus +Inserts a plus with one placeholder. You can also type + <?> in the Commands window.
@@ -83,14 +83,14 @@ - + Icon -Minus -Inserts a minus with one placeholder. You can also type -<?> in the Commands window. +Minus +Inserts a minus with one placeholder. You can also type -<?> in the Commands window.
@@ -98,14 +98,14 @@ - + Icon -Plus/Minus -Inserts a plus/minus with one placeholder. You can also type +-<?> in the Commands window. +Plus/Minus +Inserts a plus/minus with one placeholder. You can also type +-<?> in the Commands window.
@@ -113,14 +113,14 @@ - + Icon -Minus/Plus -Inserts a minus/plus with one placeholder. You can also type -+<?> in the Commands window. +Minus/Plus +Inserts a minus/plus with one placeholder. You can also type -+<?> in the Commands window.
@@ -128,14 +128,14 @@ - + Icon -Addition (plus) -Inserts a plus with two placeholders. You can also type <?>+<?> in the Commands window. +Addition (plus) +Inserts a plus with two placeholders. You can also type <?>+<?> in the Commands window.
@@ -143,14 +143,14 @@ - + Icon -Multiplication (dot) -Inserts a dot operator with two placeholders. You can also type <?>cdot<?> in the Commands window. +Multiplication (dot) +Inserts a dot operator with two placeholders. You can also type <?>cdot<?> in the Commands window.
@@ -158,14 +158,14 @@ - + Icon -Multiplication (x) -Inserts an 'x' multiplication with two placeholders. You can also type <?>times<?> in the Commands window. +Multiplication (x) +Inserts an 'x' multiplication with two placeholders. You can also type <?>times<?> in the Commands window.
@@ -173,14 +173,14 @@ - + Icon -Multiplication (*) -Inserts an asterisk multiplication sign with two placeholders. You can also type <?>*<?> in the Commands window. +Multiplication (*) +Inserts an asterisk multiplication sign with two placeholders. You can also type <?>*<?> in the Commands window.
@@ -188,14 +188,14 @@ - + Icon -Subtraction -Inserts a subtraction sign with two placeholders. You can also type <?>-<?> in the Commands window. +Subtraction +Inserts a subtraction sign with two placeholders. You can also type <?>-<?> in the Commands window.
@@ -203,14 +203,14 @@ - + Icon -Division (Fraction) -Inserts a fraction with two placeholders. You can also type <?>over<?> in the Commands window. +Division (Fraction) +Inserts a fraction with two placeholders. You can also type <?>over<?> in the Commands window.
@@ -218,14 +218,14 @@ - + Icon -Division -Inserts a division sign with two placeholders. You can also type <?>div<?> in the Commands window. +Division +Inserts a division sign with two placeholders. You can also type <?>div<?> in the Commands window.
@@ -233,14 +233,14 @@ - + Icon -Division (Slash) -Inserts a slash '/' with two placeholders. You can also type <?>/<?> in the Commands window. +Division (Slash) +Inserts a slash '/' with two placeholders. You can also type <?>/<?> in the Commands window.
@@ -248,14 +248,14 @@ - + Icon -Boolean NOT -Inserts a Boolean NOT with one placeholder. You can also type neg<?> in the Commands window. +Boolean NOT +Inserts a Boolean NOT with one placeholder. You can also type neg<?> in the Commands window.
@@ -263,14 +263,14 @@ - + Icon -Boolean AND -Inserts a Boolean AND with two placeholders. You can also type <?>and<?> in the Commands window. +Boolean AND +Inserts a Boolean AND with two placeholders. You can also type <?>and<?> in the Commands window.
@@ -278,14 +278,14 @@ - + Icon -Boolean OR -Inserts a Boolean OR with two placeholders. You can also type <?>or<?> in the Commands window. +Boolean OR +Inserts a Boolean OR with two placeholders. You can also type <?>or<?> in the Commands window.
@@ -293,30 +293,30 @@ - + Icon -Concatenate -Inserts a concatenation sign with two placeholders. You can also type circ in the Commands window. +Concatenate +Inserts a concatenation sign with two placeholders. You can also type circ in the Commands window.
-You can also insert user-defined unary operators by typing uoper in the Commands window, followed by the syntax for the character. This function is useful for incorporating special characters into a formula. For example, the command uoper %theta x produces a small Greek letter theta (a component of the $[officename] Math character set). You can also insert characters not in the $[officename] character set by choosing Tools - Symbols - Edit. - You can also insert user-defined binary commands by typing boper into the Commands window. For example, the command y boper %theta x produces the small Greek letter theta preceded by a y and followed by an x. You can also insert characters not in the $[officename] character set by choosing Tools - Symbols - Edit. -By typing <?>oplus<?> in the Commands window, you insert a circled plus operator in your document. -Type <?>ominus<?> in the Commands window to insert a circled minus operator. -Type <?>odot<?> in the Commands window to insert a circled dot operator in the formula. -Type <?>odivide<?> in the Commands window to insert a circled division operator in the formula. +You can also insert user-defined unary operators by typing uoper in the Commands window, followed by the syntax for the character. This function is useful for incorporating special characters into a formula. For example, the command uoper %theta x produces a small Greek letter theta (a component of the $[officename] Math character set). You can also insert characters not in the $[officename] character set by choosing Tools - Symbols - Edit. + You can also insert user-defined binary commands by typing boper into the Commands window. For example, the command y boper %theta x produces the small Greek letter theta preceded by a y and followed by an x. You can also insert characters not in the $[officename] character set by choosing Tools - Symbols - Edit. +By typing <?>oplus<?> in the Commands window, you insert a circled plus operator in your document. +Type <?>ominus<?> in the Commands window to insert a circled minus operator. +Type <?>odot<?> in the Commands window to insert a circled dot operator in the formula. +Type <?>odivide<?> in the Commands window to insert a circled division operator in the formula. -Type a wideslash b in the Commands window to produce two characters with a slash (from lower left to upper right) between them. The characters are set such that everything to the left of the slash is up, and everything to the right is down. This command is also available in the context menu of the Commands window. +Type a wideslash b in the Commands window to produce two characters with a slash (from lower left to upper right) between them. The characters are set such that everything to the left of the slash is up, and everything to the right is down. This command is also available in the context menu of the Commands window. -Type a widebslash b in the Commands window to produce two characters with a slash (from upper left to lower right) between them. The characters are set such that everything to the left of the slash is down, and everything to the right is up. This command is also available in the context menu of the Commands window. -Type sub or sup in the Commands window to add indexes and powers to the characters in your formula; for example, a sub 2. -If you want to use a colon ':' as division sign, choose Tools - Symbols or click the Symbols icon on the Tools bar. Click the Edit button in the dialog that appears, then select the Special symbol set. Enter a meaningful name next to Symbol, for example, "divide" and then click the colon in the set of symbols. Click Add and then OK. Click OK to close the Symbols dialog,too. Now you can use the new symbol, in this case the colon, by entering its name in the Commands window, for example, a %divide b = c. -When entering information manually in the Commands window, please note that a number of operators require spaces between the elements for the correct structure. This is especially true if you are using values instead of placeholders in your operators, for example, to construct a division 4 div 3 or a div b. +Type a widebslash b in the Commands window to produce two characters with a slash (from upper left to lower right) between them. The characters are set such that everything to the left of the slash is down, and everything to the right is up. This command is also available in the context menu of the Commands window. +Type sub or sup in the Commands window to add indexes and powers to the characters in your formula; for example, a sub 2. +If you want to use a colon ':' as division sign, choose Tools - Symbols or click the Symbols icon on the Tools bar. Click the Edit button in the dialog that appears, then select the Special symbol set. Enter a meaningful name next to Symbol, for example, "divide" and then click the colon in the set of symbols. Click Add and then OK. Click OK to close the Symbols dialog,too. Now you can use the new symbol, in this case the colon, by entering its name in the Commands window, for example, a %divide b = c. +When entering information manually in the Commands window, please note that a number of operators require spaces between the elements for the correct structure. This is especially true if you are using values instead of placeholders in your operators, for example, to construct a division 4 div 3 or a div b. diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03090200.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03090200.xhp index 0afad177c4..b33aee1d1f 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03090200.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03090200.xhp @@ -73,25 +73,25 @@ succeeds or equivalent relation -Relations -You can choose among various relations to structure your $[officename] Math formula. The relation functions are displayed in the lower part of the Elements pane. The list is also in the context menu of the Commands window. All relations that are not contained in the Elements pane or in the context menu can be typed manually in the Commands window. +Relations +You can choose among various relations to structure your $[officename] Math formula. The relation functions are displayed in the lower part of the Elements pane. The list is also in the context menu of the Commands window. All relations that are not contained in the Elements pane or in the context menu can be typed manually in the Commands window.
-The following is a complete list of the relations. The symbol next to the name of the relation indicates that it can be accessed through the Elements pane (choose View - Elements) or through the context menu of the Commands window. -Relations: +The following is a complete list of the relations. The symbol next to the name of the relation indicates that it can be accessed through the Elements pane (choose View - Elements) or through the context menu of the Commands window. +Relations: - + Icon -is equal -Inserts an equal sign (=) with two placeholders. You can also directly type <?> = <?> in the Commands window. +is equal +Inserts an equal sign (=) with two placeholders. You can also directly type <?> = <?> in the Commands window.
@@ -99,14 +99,14 @@ - + Icon -does not equal -The neq icon or command inserts an inequality with two placeholders. You can also type <?> neq <?> in the Commands window. +does not equal +The neq icon or command inserts an inequality with two placeholders. You can also type <?> neq <?> in the Commands window.
@@ -114,14 +114,14 @@ - + Icon -identical to -Inserts a character for the identical to (congruent) relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> equiv <?> in the Commands window. +identical to +Inserts a character for the identical to (congruent) relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> equiv <?> in the Commands window.
@@ -129,14 +129,14 @@ - + Icon -orthogonal to -Inserts a character for an orthogonal (right angled) relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> ortho <?> in the Commands window. +orthogonal to +Inserts a character for an orthogonal (right angled) relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> ortho <?> in the Commands window.
@@ -144,14 +144,14 @@ - + Icon -divides -Inserts the divides character. You can also type <?> divides <?> in the Commands window. +divides +Inserts the divides character. You can also type <?> divides <?> in the Commands window.
@@ -159,14 +159,14 @@ - + Icon -does not divide -This icon inserts the does not divide character. You can also type <?>ndivides<?> in the Commands window. +does not divide +This icon inserts the does not divide character. You can also type <?>ndivides<?> in the Commands window.
@@ -174,14 +174,14 @@ - + Icon -less than -Inserts the less than relation. You can also type <?>lt<?> or <?> < <?> in the Commands window. +less than +Inserts the less than relation. You can also type <?>lt<?> or <?> < <?> in the Commands window.
@@ -189,14 +189,14 @@ - + Icon -greater than -Inserts the greater than relation. You can also type <?> gt <?> or <?> > <?> in the Commands window. +greater than +Inserts the greater than relation. You can also type <?> gt <?> or <?> > <?> in the Commands window.
@@ -204,14 +204,14 @@ - + Icon -approximately equal to -Inserts the approximately equal relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> approx <?> in the Commands window. +approximately equal to +Inserts the approximately equal relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> approx <?> in the Commands window.
@@ -219,14 +219,14 @@ - + Icon -parallel to -Inserts a parallel relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?>parallel<?> in the Commands window. +parallel to +Inserts a parallel relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?>parallel<?> in the Commands window.
@@ -234,14 +234,14 @@ - + Icon -less than or equal to (slanted) -Inserts a less than or equal to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> leslant <?> in the Commands window. +less than or equal to (slanted) +Inserts a less than or equal to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> leslant <?> in the Commands window.
@@ -249,14 +249,14 @@ - + Icon -greater than or equal to (slanted) -Inserts the greater than or equal to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?>geslant<?> in the Commands window. +greater than or equal to (slanted) +Inserts the greater than or equal to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?>geslant<?> in the Commands window.
@@ -264,14 +264,14 @@ - + Icon -similar or equal to -Inserts the similar or equal to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?>simeq<?> in the Commands window. +similar or equal to +Inserts the similar or equal to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?>simeq<?> in the Commands window.
@@ -279,14 +279,14 @@ - + Icon -proportional to -Inserts the proportional to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> prop <?> in the Commands window. +proportional to +Inserts the proportional to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> prop <?> in the Commands window.
@@ -294,14 +294,14 @@ - + Icon -less than or equal to -Inserts the less than or equal to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> le <?> or <?> <= <?> in the Commands window. +less than or equal to +Inserts the less than or equal to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> le <?> or <?> <= <?> in the Commands window.
@@ -309,14 +309,14 @@ - + Icon -greater than or equal to -Inserts the greater than or equal to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> ge <?> or <?> >= <?> in the Commands window. +greater than or equal to +Inserts the greater than or equal to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> ge <?> or <?> >= <?> in the Commands window.
@@ -324,14 +324,14 @@ - + Icon -similar to -This icon inserts the similar to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?>sim<?> in the Commands window. +similar to +This icon inserts the similar to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?>sim<?> in the Commands window.
@@ -339,14 +339,14 @@ - + Icon -toward -Inserts a toward relation symbol with two placeholders. You can also type <?> toward <?> in the Commands window. +toward +Inserts a toward relation symbol with two placeholders. You can also type <?> toward <?> in the Commands window.
@@ -354,14 +354,14 @@ - + Icon -double arrow pointing left -Inserts the logical relation arrow with double bar pointing left. You can also type dlarrow in the Commands window. +double arrow pointing left +Inserts the logical relation arrow with double bar pointing left. You can also type dlarrow in the Commands window.
@@ -369,14 +369,14 @@ - + Icon -double arrow pointing left and right -Inserts the logical relation arrow with double bar pointing left and right with two operators. You can also type dlrarrow in the Commands window. +double arrow pointing left and right +Inserts the logical relation arrow with double bar pointing left and right with two operators. You can also type dlrarrow in the Commands window.
@@ -384,14 +384,14 @@ - + Icon -double arrow pointing right -Inserts the logical operator arrow with double bar pointing right with two placeholders. You can also type drarrow in the Commands window. +double arrow pointing right +Inserts the logical operator arrow with double bar pointing right with two placeholders. You can also type drarrow in the Commands window.
@@ -399,14 +399,14 @@ - + Icon -precedes -Inserts the logical operator precedes with two placeholders. You can also type prec in the Commands window. +precedes +Inserts the logical operator precedes with two placeholders. You can also type prec in the Commands window.
@@ -414,14 +414,14 @@ - + Icon -succeeds -Inserts the logical operator succeeds with two placeholders. You can also type succ in the Commands window. +succeeds +Inserts the logical operator succeeds with two placeholders. You can also type succ in the Commands window.
@@ -429,14 +429,14 @@ - + Icon -not precedes -Inserts the logical operator not precedes with two placeholders. You can also type nprec in the Commands window. +not precedes +Inserts the logical operator not precedes with two placeholders. You can also type nprec in the Commands window.
@@ -444,14 +444,14 @@ - + Icon -not succeeds -Inserts the logical operator not succeeds with two placeholders. You can also type nsucc in the Commands window. +not succeeds +Inserts the logical operator not succeeds with two placeholders. You can also type nsucc in the Commands window.
@@ -459,14 +459,14 @@ - + Icon -precedes or equal -Inserts the logical operator precedes or equal with two placeholders. You can also type preccurlyeq in the Commands window. +precedes or equal +Inserts the logical operator precedes or equal with two placeholders. You can also type preccurlyeq in the Commands window.
@@ -474,14 +474,14 @@ - + Icon -succeeds or equal -Inserts the logical operator succeeds or equal with two placeholders. You can also type succcurlyeq in the Commands window. +succeeds or equal +Inserts the logical operator succeeds or equal with two placeholders. You can also type succcurlyeq in the Commands window.
@@ -489,14 +489,14 @@ - + Icon -precedes or equivalent -Inserts the logical operator precedes or equivalent with two placeholders. You can also type precsim in the Commands window. +precedes or equivalent +Inserts the logical operator precedes or equivalent with two placeholders. You can also type precsim in the Commands window.
@@ -504,24 +504,24 @@ - + Icon -succeeds or equivalent -Inserts the logical operator succeeds or equivalent with two placeholders. You can also type succsim in the Commands window. +succeeds or equivalent +Inserts the logical operator succeeds or equivalent with two placeholders. You can also type succsim in the Commands window.
-To create the much greater than relation with two placeholders, type <?> gg <?> or >> in the Commands window. -Type ll or << in the Commands window to insert the much less than relation into the formula. -The is defined as relation with two placeholders is inserted by typing <?>def<?>. -Insert the picture by correspondence character with two placeholders by typing <?> transl <?> in the Commands window. -The <?>transr<?> command inserts the original by correspondence character with two placeholders. -When entering information manually in the Commands window, note that a number of operators require spaces for the correct structure. This is especially true if you are working with values instead of placeholders. For example, for the "is considerably greater" relation, type either 10 gg 1 or a gg b. +To create the much greater than relation with two placeholders, type <?> gg <?> or >> in the Commands window. +Type ll or << in the Commands window to insert the much less than relation into the formula. +The is defined as relation with two placeholders is inserted by typing <?>def<?>. +Insert the picture by correspondence character with two placeholders by typing <?> transl <?> in the Commands window. +The <?>transr<?> command inserts the original by correspondence character with two placeholders. +When entering information manually in the Commands window, note that a number of operators require spaces for the correct structure. This is especially true if you are working with values instead of placeholders. For example, for the "is considerably greater" relation, type either 10 gg 1 or a gg b. diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03090300.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03090300.xhp index d0ef9319f4..5829910ea5 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03090300.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03090300.xhp @@ -45,25 +45,25 @@ summation -Operators +Operators You can choose among various operators to structure your $[officename] Math formula. All available operators appear in the lower part of the Elements pane. They are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. All operators not contained in the Elements pane or in the context menu must be typed manually in the Commands window.
The following is a list of the available operators. An icon next to the operator name indicates that it can be accessed through the Elements pane (choose View - Elements) or through the context menu of the Commands window. -Operator Functions +Operator Functions - + Icon -Limit -Inserts the limit sign with one placeholder. You can also enter lim <?> directly in the Commands window. +Limit +Inserts the limit sign with one placeholder. You can also enter lim <?> directly in the Commands window.
@@ -71,14 +71,14 @@ - + Icon -Summation -Inserts a summation sign with one placeholder. You can also enter sum <?> directly in the Commands window. +Summation +Inserts a summation sign with one placeholder. You can also enter sum <?> directly in the Commands window.
@@ -86,14 +86,14 @@ - + Icon -Product -Inserts a product sign with one placeholder. You can also type prod <?> directly in the Commands window. +Product +Inserts a product sign with one placeholder. You can also type prod <?> directly in the Commands window.
@@ -101,14 +101,14 @@ - + Icon -Coproduct -Inserts a coproduct symbol with one placeholder. You can also enter coprod <?> directly in the Commands window. +Coproduct +Inserts a coproduct symbol with one placeholder. You can also enter coprod <?> directly in the Commands window.
@@ -116,14 +116,14 @@ - + Icon -Upper and Lower Limit -Inserts a range statement upper and lower limit for integral and summation with one placeholder. You can also type from{<?>} to{<?>} <?> directly in the Commands window. Limit statements must be combined with the appropriate operators. The limits will be centered above/below the summation character. +Upper and Lower Limit +Inserts a range statement upper and lower limit for integral and summation with one placeholder. You can also type from{<?>} to{<?>} <?> directly in the Commands window. Limit statements must be combined with the appropriate operators. The limits will be centered above/below the summation character.
@@ -131,14 +131,14 @@ - + Icon -Integral -Inserts an integral sign with one placeholder. You can also type int <?> directly in the Commands window. +Integral +Inserts an integral sign with one placeholder. You can also type int <?> directly in the Commands window.
@@ -146,14 +146,14 @@ - + Icon -Double Integral -Inserts a double integral symbol with one placeholder. You can also type iint <?> directly in the Commands window. +Double Integral +Inserts a double integral symbol with one placeholder. You can also type iint <?> directly in the Commands window.
@@ -161,14 +161,14 @@ - + Icon -Triple Integral -Inserts a triple integral sign with one placeholder. You can also type iiint <?> directly in the Commands window. +Triple Integral +Inserts a triple integral sign with one placeholder. You can also type iiint <?> directly in the Commands window.
@@ -176,14 +176,14 @@ - + Icon -Lower Limit -Inserts a lower limit range statement for integral and sum with placeholders. You can also type from {<?>}<?> directly in the Commands window. +Lower Limit +Inserts a lower limit range statement for integral and sum with placeholders. You can also type from {<?>}<?> directly in the Commands window.
@@ -191,14 +191,14 @@ - + Icon -Curve Integral -Inserts a curve integral symbol with one placeholder. You can also type lint <?> directly in the Commands window. +Curve Integral +Inserts a curve integral symbol with one placeholder. You can also type lint <?> directly in the Commands window.
@@ -206,14 +206,14 @@ - + Icon -Double Curve Integral -Inserts a double curve integral symbol with one placeholder. You can also type llint <?> directly in the Commands window. +Double Curve Integral +Inserts a double curve integral symbol with one placeholder. You can also type llint <?> directly in the Commands window.
@@ -221,14 +221,14 @@ - + Icon -Triple Curve Integral -Inserts a triple curve integral sign with one placeholder. You can also type lllint <?> directly in the Commands window. +Triple Curve Integral +Inserts a triple curve integral sign with one placeholder. You can also type lllint <?> directly in the Commands window.
@@ -236,23 +236,23 @@ - + Icon -Upper Limit -Inserts the range statement upper limit for integral and summation with placeholders You can also type to <?><?> directly in the Commands window. Limit statements can only be used if combined with the appropriate operators. +Upper Limit +Inserts the range statement upper limit for integral and summation with placeholders You can also type to <?><?> directly in the Commands window. Limit statements can only be used if combined with the appropriate operators.
-You can also add limits to an operator (for example, an integral) by first clicking the desired operator and then clicking the limit symbol. This method is faster than typing the commands directly. -The command liminf inserts the limit inferior with one placeholder. -The command limsup inserts the limit superior with one placeholder. -By typing oper in the Commands window, you can insert user-defined operators in $[officename] Math, a feature useful for incorporating special characters into a formula. An example is oper %theta x. Using the oper command, you can also insert characters not in the default $[officename] character set. oper can also be used in connection with limits; for example, oper %union from {i=1} to n x_{i}. In this example, the union symbol is indicated by the name union. However, this is not one of the predefined symbols. To define it, choose Tools - Symbols. select Special as the symbol set in the dialog that appears, then click the Edit button. In the next dialog, select Special as the symbol set again. Enter a meaningful name in the Symbol text box, for example, "union" and then click the union symbol in the set of symbols. Click Add and then OK. Click Close to close the Symbols dialog. You are now finished and can type the union symbol in the Commands window, by entering oper %union. -Limits can be arranged in ways other than centered above/below the operator. Use the options provided by $[officename] Math for working with superscript and subscript indexes. For example, type sum_a^b c in the Commands window to arrange the limits to the right of the sum symbol. If your limit entries contain longer expressions, you must put them in group brackets, for example, sum_{i=1}^{2*n} b. When formulas are imported from older versions this is done automatically. To change the spacing (gaps) between the characters choose Format - Spacing - Category - Indexes or Format - Spacing - Category - Limits. Additional basic information about indexes is given elsewhere in the Help. -When you type information manually in the Commands window, note that a number of operators require spaces for correct structure. This is especially true when your operators are supplied with values instead of placeholders, for example, lim a_{n}=a. +You can also add limits to an operator (for example, an integral) by first clicking the desired operator and then clicking the limit symbol. This method is faster than typing the commands directly. +The command liminf inserts the limit inferior with one placeholder. +The command limsup inserts the limit superior with one placeholder. +By typing oper in the Commands window, you can insert user-defined operators in $[officename] Math, a feature useful for incorporating special characters into a formula. An example is oper %theta x. Using the oper command, you can also insert characters not in the default $[officename] character set. oper can also be used in connection with limits; for example, oper %union from {i=1} to n x_{i}. In this example, the union symbol is indicated by the name union. However, this is not one of the predefined symbols. To define it, choose Tools - Symbols. select Special as the symbol set in the dialog that appears, then click the Edit button. In the next dialog, select Special as the symbol set again. Enter a meaningful name in the Symbol text box, for example, "union" and then click the union symbol in the set of symbols. Click Add and then OK. Click Close to close the Symbols dialog. You are now finished and can type the union symbol in the Commands window, by entering oper %union. +Limits can be arranged in ways other than centered above/below the operator. Use the options provided by $[officename] Math for working with superscript and subscript indexes. For example, type sum_a^b c in the Commands window to arrange the limits to the right of the sum symbol. If your limit entries contain longer expressions, you must put them in group brackets, for example, sum_{i=1}^{2*n} b. When formulas are imported from older versions this is done automatically. To change the spacing (gaps) between the characters choose Format - Spacing - Category - Indexes or Format - Spacing - Category - Limits. Additional basic information about indexes is given elsewhere in the Help. +When you type information manually in the Commands window, note that a number of operators require spaces for correct structure. This is especially true when your operators are supplied with values instead of placeholders, for example, lim a_{n}=a. diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03090400.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03090400.xhp index 9e33c4be62..735896f562 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03090400.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03090400.xhp @@ -60,25 +60,25 @@ tangent function -Functions +Functions Choose a function in the lower part of the window. These functions are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. Any functions not contained in the Elements pane need to be typed manually in the Commands window.
-The following is a list of all functions that appear in the Elements pane. The icon next to the function indicates that it can be accessed through the Elements pane (menu View - Elements) or through the context menu of the Commands window. -List of functions +The following is a list of all functions that appear in the Elements pane. The icon next to the function indicates that it can be accessed through the Elements pane (menu View - Elements) or through the context menu of the Commands window. +List of functions - + Icon -Natural Exponential Function -Inserts a natural exponential function. You can also type func e^<?> directly in the Commands window. +Natural Exponential Function +Inserts a natural exponential function. You can also type func e^<?> directly in the Commands window.
@@ -86,14 +86,14 @@ - + Icon -Natural Logarithm -Inserts a natural (base e) logarithm with one placeholder. You can also type ln(<?>) in the Commands window. +Natural Logarithm +Inserts a natural (base e) logarithm with one placeholder. You can also type ln(<?>) in the Commands window.
@@ -101,14 +101,14 @@ - + Icon -Exponential Function -Inserts an exponential function with one placeholder. You can also type exp(<?>) in the Commands window. +Exponential Function +Inserts an exponential function with one placeholder. You can also type exp(<?>) in the Commands window.
@@ -116,14 +116,14 @@ - + Icon -Logarithm -Inserts a common (base 10) logarithm with one placeholder. You can also type log(<?>) in the Commands window. +Logarithm +Inserts a common (base 10) logarithm with one placeholder. You can also type log(<?>) in the Commands window.
@@ -131,13 +131,13 @@ - + Icon -PowerUFI: removed help id -Inserts x raised to the yth power. You can also type <?>^{<?>} in the Commands window. You can replace the ^ character with rsup or sup. +PowerUFI: removed help id +Inserts x raised to the yth power. You can also type <?>^{<?>} in the Commands window. You can replace the ^ character with rsup or sup.
@@ -145,14 +145,14 @@ - + Icon -Sine -Inserts a sine function with one placeholder. You can also type sin(<?>) in the Commands window. +Sine +Inserts a sine function with one placeholder. You can also type sin(<?>) in the Commands window.
@@ -160,14 +160,14 @@ - + Icon -Cosine -Inserts a cosine function with one placeholder. You can also type cos(<?>) in the Commands window. +Cosine +Inserts a cosine function with one placeholder. You can also type cos(<?>) in the Commands window.
@@ -175,14 +175,14 @@ - + Icon -Tangent -Inserts a tangent function with one placeholder. You can also type tan(<?>) in the Commands window. +Tangent +Inserts a tangent function with one placeholder. You can also type tan(<?>) in the Commands window.
@@ -190,14 +190,14 @@ - + Icon -Cotangent -Inserts a cotangent symbol with a placeholder. You can also type cot(<?>) in the Commands window. +Cotangent +Inserts a cotangent symbol with a placeholder. You can also type cot(<?>) in the Commands window.
@@ -205,14 +205,14 @@ - + Icon -Hyperbolic Sine -Inserts a hyperbolic sine with one placeholder. You can also type sinh(<?>) in the Commands window. +Hyperbolic Sine +Inserts a hyperbolic sine with one placeholder. You can also type sinh(<?>) in the Commands window.
@@ -220,14 +220,14 @@ - + Icon -Square Root -Inserts a square root symbol with one placeholder. You can also type sqrt(<?>) in the Commands window. +Square Root +Inserts a square root symbol with one placeholder. You can also type sqrt(<?>) in the Commands window.
@@ -235,14 +235,14 @@ - + Icon -Hyperbolic Cosine -Inserts a hyperbolic cosine symbol with one placeholder. You can also type cosh(<?>) in the Commands window. +Hyperbolic Cosine +Inserts a hyperbolic cosine symbol with one placeholder. You can also type cosh(<?>) in the Commands window.
@@ -250,14 +250,14 @@ - + Icon -Hyperbolic Tangent -Inserts a hyperbolic tangent symbol with one placeholder. You can also type tanh(<?>) in the Commands window. +Hyperbolic Tangent +Inserts a hyperbolic tangent symbol with one placeholder. You can also type tanh(<?>) in the Commands window.
@@ -265,14 +265,14 @@ - + Icon -Hyperbolic Cotangent -Inserts a hyperbolic cotangent symbol with one placeholder. You can directly type coth(<?>) in the Commands window. +Hyperbolic Cotangent +Inserts a hyperbolic cotangent symbol with one placeholder. You can directly type coth(<?>) in the Commands window.
@@ -280,14 +280,14 @@ - + Icon -nth Root -Inserts an nth root function with two placeholders. You can also type nroot n x in the Commands window. +nth Root +Inserts an nth root function with two placeholders. You can also type nroot n x in the Commands window.
@@ -295,14 +295,14 @@ - + Icon -Arc Sine -Inserts an arc sine function with one placeholder. You can also type arcsin(<?>) in the Commands window. +Arc Sine +Inserts an arc sine function with one placeholder. You can also type arcsin(<?>) in the Commands window.
@@ -310,14 +310,14 @@ - + Icon -Arc Cosine -Inserts an arc cosine symbol with one placeholder. You can also type arccos(<?>) in the Commands window. +Arc Cosine +Inserts an arc cosine symbol with one placeholder. You can also type arccos(<?>) in the Commands window.
@@ -325,14 +325,14 @@ - + Icon -Arc Tangent -Inserts an arc tangent function with one placeholder. You can also type arctan(<?>) in the Commands window. +Arc Tangent +Inserts an arc tangent function with one placeholder. You can also type arctan(<?>) in the Commands window.
@@ -340,14 +340,14 @@ - + Icon -Arc Cotangent -Inserts an arc cotangent function with one placeholder. You can directly type arccot(<?>) in the Commands window. +Arc Cotangent +Inserts an arc cotangent function with one placeholder. You can directly type arccot(<?>) in the Commands window.
@@ -355,14 +355,14 @@ - + Icon -Absolute Value -Inserts an absolute value sign with one placeholder. You can also type abs(<?>) in the Commands window. +Absolute Value +Inserts an absolute value sign with one placeholder. You can also type abs(<?>) in the Commands window.
@@ -370,14 +370,14 @@ - + Icon -Area Hyperbolic Sine -Inserts an area hyperbolic sine function with one placeholder. You can also type arsinh(<?>) in the Commands window. +Area Hyperbolic Sine +Inserts an area hyperbolic sine function with one placeholder. You can also type arsinh(<?>) in the Commands window.
@@ -385,14 +385,14 @@ - + Icon -Area Hyperbolic Cosine -Inserts an area hyperbolic cosine function with one placeholder. You can also type arcosh(<?>) in the Commands window. +Area Hyperbolic Cosine +Inserts an area hyperbolic cosine function with one placeholder. You can also type arcosh(<?>) in the Commands window.
@@ -400,14 +400,14 @@ - + Icon -Area Hyperbolic Tangent -Inserts an area hyperbolic tangent function with one placeholder. You can also type artanh(<?>) in the Commands window. +Area Hyperbolic Tangent +Inserts an area hyperbolic tangent function with one placeholder. You can also type artanh(<?>) in the Commands window.
@@ -415,14 +415,14 @@ - + Icon -Area Hyperbolic Cotangent -Inserts an area hyperbolic cotangent function with one placeholder. You can also type arcoth(<?>) in the Commands window. +Area Hyperbolic Cotangent +Inserts an area hyperbolic cotangent function with one placeholder. You can also type arcoth(<?>) in the Commands window.
@@ -430,19 +430,19 @@ - + Icon -Factorial -Inserts the factorial sign with one placeholder. You can directly type fact <?> in the Commands window. +Factorial +Inserts the factorial sign with one placeholder. You can directly type fact <?> in the Commands window.
-You can also assign an index or an exponent to a function. For example, typing sin^2x results in in a function "sine to the power of 2x". -When typing functions manually in the Commands window, note that spaces are required for some functions (for example, abs 5=5 ; abs -3=3). +You can also assign an index or an exponent to a function. For example, typing sin^2x results in in a function "sine to the power of 2x". +When typing functions manually in the Commands window, note that spaces are required for some functions (for example, abs 5=5 ; abs -3=3). diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03090500.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03090500.xhp index c4aa9c0efe..4a310a8ec0 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03090500.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03090500.xhp @@ -63,25 +63,25 @@ orphaned brackets -Brackets +Brackets You can choose among various bracket types to structure a $[officename] Math formula. Bracket types are displayed in the lower part of the Elements pane. These brackets are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. All brackets that are not contained in the Elements pane or in the context menu can be typed manually in the Commands window.
The following is a complete list of all available bracket types. The icon next to the bracket type indicates that it can be accessed through the Elements pane (menu View - Elements) or through the context menu of the Commands window. -Bracket types +Bracket types - + Icon -Round brackets (parentheses) -Inserts a placeholder within normal round brackets (parentheses). You can also type (<?>) in the Commands window. +Round brackets (parentheses) +Inserts a placeholder within normal round brackets (parentheses). You can also type (<?>) in the Commands window.
@@ -89,14 +89,14 @@ - + Icon -Square brackets -Inserts a placeholder within square brackets. You can also type [<?>] in the Commands window. +Square brackets +Inserts a placeholder within square brackets. You can also type [<?>] in the Commands window.
@@ -104,14 +104,14 @@ - + Icon -Double square brackets -Inserts a placeholder within double square brackets. You can also type ldbracket <?> rdbracket in the Commands window. +Double square brackets +Inserts a placeholder within double square brackets. You can also type ldbracket <?> rdbracket in the Commands window.
@@ -119,14 +119,14 @@ - + Icon -Braces (curly brackets) -Inserts a placeholder withing braces (curly brackets). You can also type lbrace<?>rbrace directly in the Commands window. +Braces (curly brackets) +Inserts a placeholder withing braces (curly brackets). You can also type lbrace<?>rbrace directly in the Commands window.
@@ -134,14 +134,14 @@ - + Icon -Single vertical bars -Inserts a placeholder within vertical bars. You can also type lline <?> rline directly in the Commands window. +Single vertical bars +Inserts a placeholder within vertical bars. You can also type lline <?> rline directly in the Commands window.
@@ -149,14 +149,14 @@ - + Icon -Double vertical bars -Inserts a placeholder within double vertical bars. You can also type ldline <?> rdline directly in the Commands window. +Double vertical bars +Inserts a placeholder within double vertical bars. You can also type ldline <?> rdline directly in the Commands window.
@@ -164,14 +164,14 @@ - + Icon -Angle brackets -Inserts a placeholder within angle brackets. You can also type langle <?> rangle in the Commands window. +Angle brackets +Inserts a placeholder within angle brackets. You can also type langle <?> rangle in the Commands window.
@@ -179,14 +179,14 @@ - + Icon -Operator brackets -Inserts two placeholders within operator brackets. You can also type langle <?> mline <?> rangle in the Commands window. +Operator brackets +Inserts two placeholders within operator brackets. You can also type langle <?> mline <?> rangle in the Commands window.
@@ -194,14 +194,14 @@ - + Icon -Group brackets -Inserts group brackets. You can also type {<?>} in the Commands window. +Group brackets +Inserts group brackets. You can also type {<?>} in the Commands window.
@@ -209,14 +209,14 @@ - + Icon -Round brackets (scalable) -Inserts scalable rounded brackets with one placeholder. You can also type left(<?> right) in the Commands window. +Round brackets (scalable) +Inserts scalable rounded brackets with one placeholder. You can also type left(<?> right) in the Commands window.
@@ -224,14 +224,14 @@ - + Icon -Square brackets (scalable) -Inserts scalable square brackets with placeholders. You can also type left[<?> right] in the Commands window. The size of the brackets is adjusted automatically. +Square brackets (scalable) +Inserts scalable square brackets with placeholders. You can also type left[<?> right] in the Commands window. The size of the brackets is adjusted automatically.
@@ -239,14 +239,14 @@ - + Icon -Double square brackets (scalable) -Inserts scalable double square brackets with placeholders. You can also type left ldbracket <?> right rdbracket directly in the Commands window. The bracket size is adjusted automatically. +Double square brackets (scalable) +Inserts scalable double square brackets with placeholders. You can also type left ldbracket <?> right rdbracket directly in the Commands window. The bracket size is adjusted automatically.
@@ -254,14 +254,14 @@ - + Icon -Braces (scalable) -Inserts scalable braces with a placeholder. You can also type left lbrace <?> right rbrace in the Commands window. The size of the braces is automatically adjusted. +Braces (scalable) +Inserts scalable braces with a placeholder. You can also type left lbrace <?> right rbrace in the Commands window. The size of the braces is automatically adjusted.
@@ -269,14 +269,14 @@ - + Icon -Single vertical bars (scalable) -Inserts scalable single vertical bars with a placeholder. You can also type left lline <?> right rline in the Commands window. The size of the brackets is automatically adjusted. +Single vertical bars (scalable) +Inserts scalable single vertical bars with a placeholder. You can also type left lline <?> right rline in the Commands window. The size of the brackets is automatically adjusted.
@@ -284,14 +284,14 @@ - + Icon -Double vertical bars (scalable) -Inserts scalable double vertical bars with a placeholder. You can also type left ldline <?> right rdline in the Commands window. The size of the brackets is automatically adjusted. +Double vertical bars (scalable) +Inserts scalable double vertical bars with a placeholder. You can also type left ldline <?> right rdline in the Commands window. The size of the brackets is automatically adjusted.
@@ -299,14 +299,14 @@ - + Icon -Angle brackets (scalable) -Inserts scalable angle brackets with a placeholder. You can also type left langle <?> right rangle in the Commands window. The size of the brackets is automatically adjusted. +Angle brackets (scalable) +Inserts scalable angle brackets with a placeholder. You can also type left langle <?> right rangle in the Commands window. The size of the brackets is automatically adjusted.
@@ -314,14 +314,14 @@ - + Icon -Operator brackets (scalable) -Inserts scalable operator brackets with placeholders. You can also type left langle <?> mline <?> right rangle in the Commands window. The bracket size is adjusted automatically. +Operator brackets (scalable) +Inserts scalable operator brackets with placeholders. You can also type left langle <?> mline <?> right rangle in the Commands window. The bracket size is adjusted automatically.
@@ -329,14 +329,14 @@ - + Icon -Brace top (scalable) -Inserts a scalable horizontal upper brace with placeholders. You can also enter <?> overbrace <?> directly in the Commands window. The bracket size is adjusted automatically. +Brace top (scalable) +Inserts a scalable horizontal upper brace with placeholders. You can also enter <?> overbrace <?> directly in the Commands window. The bracket size is adjusted automatically.
@@ -344,37 +344,37 @@ - + Icon -Brace bottom (scalable) -Inserts a scalable horizontal lower brace with placeholders. You can also type <?> underbrace <?> directly in the Commands window. The bracket size is adjusted automatically. +Brace bottom (scalable) +Inserts a scalable horizontal lower brace with placeholders. You can also type <?> underbrace <?> directly in the Commands window. The bracket size is adjusted automatically.
-To insert floor brackets, type lfloor<?>rfloor directly in the Commands window. +To insert floor brackets, type lfloor<?>rfloor directly in the Commands window. -To insert ceiling brackets, type lceil<?>rceil directly in the Commands window. +To insert ceiling brackets, type lceil<?>rceil directly in the Commands window. -To insert scalable floor brackets, type left lfloor<?>right rfloor directly in the Commands window. +To insert scalable floor brackets, type left lfloor<?>right rfloor directly in the Commands window. -To insert scalable ceiling brackets, type left lceil<?>right rceil directly in the Commands window. -Brackets are automatically sized when you type left and right in front of the bracket command, for example, left(a over b right). You can also set the size and spacing of brackets by choosing Format - Spacing - Category - Brackets and setting the desired percentages. Mark the Scale all brackets check box to apply the changes to all brackets in the formula. -You can also use single brackets. To do this, type a backslash \ in front of the command. For example, when you type \[, the left square bracket appears without its counterpart. This is useful for creating reverse brackets or for constructing intervals. Note that only non-scalable brackets can be used individually. To change the size, use the size command. -Examples of single brackets -For non-scaled brackets: -a = \{ \( \[ b newline -{} + c \] \) \ } -For scaled brackets use none as the bracket name -a = left ( a over b right none newline -left none phantom {a over b} + c right ) -The phantom statement ensures that the last bracket is the correct size. -Be sure to put spaces (gaps) between elements when entering them directly in the Commands window. This ensures that the correct structure is recognized. -Useful information about indexes and exponents as well as scaling helps you structure formulas effectively. For more information about brackets, see Brackets and Grouping. +To insert scalable ceiling brackets, type left lceil<?>right rceil directly in the Commands window. +Brackets are automatically sized when you type left and right in front of the bracket command, for example, left(a over b right). You can also set the size and spacing of brackets by choosing Format - Spacing - Category - Brackets and setting the desired percentages. Mark the Scale all brackets check box to apply the changes to all brackets in the formula. +You can also use single brackets. To do this, type a backslash \ in front of the command. For example, when you type \[, the left square bracket appears without its counterpart. This is useful for creating reverse brackets or for constructing intervals. Note that only non-scalable brackets can be used individually. To change the size, use the size command. +Examples of single brackets +For non-scaled brackets: +a = \{ \( \[ b newline +{} + c \] \) \ } +For scaled brackets use none as the bracket name +a = left ( a over b right none newline +left none phantom {a over b} + c right ) +The phantom statement ensures that the last bracket is the correct size. +Be sure to put spaces (gaps) between elements when entering them directly in the Commands window. This ensures that the correct structure is recognized. +Useful information about indexes and exponents as well as scaling helps you structure formulas effectively. For more information about brackets, see Brackets and Grouping. diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03090600.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03090600.xhp index c6fee03923..ee473f3678 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03090600.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03090600.xhp @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ transparent character as attribute mw added "scaling;fonts" -Attributes +Attributes You can choose from various attributes for %PRODUCTNAME Math formulas. Some attributes are displayed in the lower part of the Elements pane. These attributes are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. All attributes not contained in the Elements pane or in the context menu must be typed manually in the Commands window. @@ -68,295 +68,295 @@
The following is a complete list of all attributes available in %PRODUCTNAME Math. The symbol next to the attribute indicates that it can be accessed through the Elements pane (choose View - Elements) or through the context menu of the Commands window. - In describing the following attribute functions, the letter "a" in the icon refers to the placeholder that you would like to assign to the respective attribute. You can substitute this character with any other character that you choose. - Attribute Functions + In describing the following attribute functions, the letter "a" in the icon refers to the placeholder that you would like to assign to the respective attribute. You can substitute this character with any other character that you choose. + Attribute Functions - + Icon - Acute accent - Inserts a placeholder with an acute accent. You can also type acute <?> in the Commands window. + Acute accent + Inserts a placeholder with an acute accent. You can also type acute <?> in the Commands window. - + Icon - Grave accent - Inserts a placeholder with a grave accent (grave). You can also type grave <?> in the Commands window. + Grave accent + Inserts a placeholder with a grave accent (grave). You can also type grave <?> in the Commands window. - + Icon - Reverse Circumflex - Inserts a placeholder with a reverse circumflex ("checkmark") over it. You can also type check <?> in the Commands window. + Reverse Circumflex + Inserts a placeholder with a reverse circumflex ("checkmark") over it. You can also type check <?> in the Commands window. - + Icon - Breve - Inserts a placeholder with an accent breve. You can also type breve <?> in the Commands window. + Breve + Inserts a placeholder with an accent breve. You can also type breve <?> in the Commands window. - + Icon - Circle - Inserts a placeholder with a circle over it. You can also type circle <?> in the Commands window. + Circle + Inserts a placeholder with a circle over it. You can also type circle <?> in the Commands window. - + Icon - Vector arrow - Inserts a placeholder with a vector arrow. You can also type vec <?> in the Commands window. + Vector arrow + Inserts a placeholder with a vector arrow. You can also type vec <?> in the Commands window. - + Icon - Tilde - Inserts a placeholder with a tilde. You can also type tilde <?> in the Commands window. + Tilde + Inserts a placeholder with a tilde. You can also type tilde <?> in the Commands window. - + Icon - Circumflex - Inserts a placeholder with a circumflex ("hat"). You can also directly enter hat <?> in the Commands window. + Circumflex + Inserts a placeholder with a circumflex ("hat"). You can also directly enter hat <?> in the Commands window. - + Icon - Line above (bar) - Inserts a line ("bar") above a placeholder . You can also type bar <?> in the Commands window. + Line above (bar) + Inserts a line ("bar") above a placeholder . You can also type bar <?> in the Commands window. - + Icon - Dot - Inserts a placeholder with a dot over it. You can also type dot <?> in the Commands window. + Dot + Inserts a placeholder with a dot over it. You can also type dot <?> in the Commands window. - + Icon - Wide vector arrow - Inserts a wide vector arrow with a placeholder. You can also type widevec in the Commands window. + Wide vector arrow + Inserts a wide vector arrow with a placeholder. You can also type widevec in the Commands window. - + Icon - Wide tilde - Inserts a wide tilde with a placeholder. You can also type widetilde directly in the Commands window. + Wide tilde + Inserts a wide tilde with a placeholder. You can also type widetilde directly in the Commands window. - + Icon - Wide circumflex - Inserts a wide circumflex ("hat") with a placeholder. You can also type widehat in the Commands window. + Wide circumflex + Inserts a wide circumflex ("hat") with a placeholder. You can also type widehat in the Commands window. - + Icon - Double dot - Inserts a placeholder with two dots over it. You can also directly enter ddot <?> in the Commands window. + Double dot + Inserts a placeholder with two dots over it. You can also directly enter ddot <?> in the Commands window. - + Icon - Line over - Inserts a line over a placeholder. You can also type overline <?> in the Commands window. The line adjusts itself to correct length. + Line over + Inserts a line over a placeholder. You can also type overline <?> in the Commands window. The line adjusts itself to correct length. - + Icon - Line below - Inserts a line below a placeholder. You can also type underline <?> in the Commands window. + Line below + Inserts a line below a placeholder. You can also type underline <?> in the Commands window. - + Icon - Line through (overstrike) - Inserts a placeholder with a line (or overstrike) through it. You can also type overstrike <?> in the Commands window. + Line through (overstrike) + Inserts a placeholder with a line (or overstrike) through it. You can also type overstrike <?> in the Commands window. - + Icon - Triple dot - Inserts three dots over a placeholder. You can also type dddot <?> in the Commands window. + Triple dot + Inserts three dots over a placeholder. You can also type dddot <?> in the Commands window. - + Icon - Transparent - Inserts a placeholder for a transparent character. This character takes up the space of "a" but does not display it. You can also type phantom <?> in the Commands window. + Transparent + Inserts a placeholder for a transparent character. This character takes up the space of "a" but does not display it. You can also type phantom <?> in the Commands window. - + Icon - Bold font - Inserts a placeholder with bold formatting. You can also type bold <?> in the Commands window. + Bold font + Inserts a placeholder with bold formatting. You can also type bold <?> in the Commands window. - + Icon - Italic font - Inserts a placeholder with italic formatting. You can also type ital <?> or italic <?> in the Commands window. + Italic font + Inserts a placeholder with italic formatting. You can also type ital <?> or italic <?> in the Commands window. - + Icon - Resize - Inserts a command for modifying the font size with two placeholders. The first placeholder refers to the font size (for example, 12) and the second one contains the text. For proper structure, insert a space between the values. You can also directly enter size <?> <?> in the Commands window. + Resize + Inserts a command for modifying the font size with two placeholders. The first placeholder refers to the font size (for example, 12) and the second one contains the text. For proper structure, insert a space between the values. You can also directly enter size <?> <?> in the Commands window. - + Icon - Change font - Inserts a command for changing the font type, with two placeholders. Replace the first placeholder with the name of one of the custom fonts, Serif, Sans or Fixed. Replace the second placeholder with the text. You can also type font <?> <?> directly in the Commands window. + Change font + Inserts a command for changing the font type, with two placeholders. Replace the first placeholder with the name of one of the custom fonts, Serif, Sans or Fixed. Replace the second placeholder with the text. You can also type font <?> <?> directly in the Commands window.
- Use the color command to change the color of your formula. Type color, then type the color name (the available colors are white, black, cyan, magenta, red, blue, green and yellow), then the formula, character or character sequence. The input color green size 20 a results in a green letter "a" with a font size of 20. - The nbold and nitalic commands remove the bold or italic default fonts of formula components. For example, remove italics from the x in the formula 5 x + 3=28 by typing nitalic before the x as in 5 nitalic x + 3=28. - The attributes "acute", "bar", "breve", "check", "circle", "dot", "ddot", "dddot", "grave", "hat", "tilde" and "vec" have fixed sizes. Their width or length cannot be adjusted when positioned over a long symbol. - For size changes you can use size n, +n, -n, *n and /n , where n is a placeholder. This method is useful when the base size of the formula is subject to change. The commands size +n and size -n change point size, and size *n and size /n change the size by a percentage. For example, the command size *1.17 increases the size of a character by exactly 17%. - Note that some entries require spaces for the correct structure. This is especially true when you specify attributes with fixed values instead of placeholders. - For more information about formatting in %PRODUCTNAME + Use the color command to change the color of your formula. Type color, then type the color name (the available colors are white, black, cyan, magenta, red, blue, green and yellow), then the formula, character or character sequence. The input color green size 20 a results in a green letter "a" with a font size of 20. + The nbold and nitalic commands remove the bold or italic default fonts of formula components. For example, remove italics from the x in the formula 5 x + 3=28 by typing nitalic before the x as in 5 nitalic x + 3=28. + The attributes "acute", "bar", "breve", "check", "circle", "dot", "ddot", "dddot", "grave", "hat", "tilde" and "vec" have fixed sizes. Their width or length cannot be adjusted when positioned over a long symbol. + For size changes you can use size n, +n, -n, *n and /n , where n is a placeholder. This method is useful when the base size of the formula is subject to change. The commands size +n and size -n change point size, and size *n and size /n change the size by a percentage. For example, the command size *1.17 increases the size of a character by exactly 17%. + Note that some entries require spaces for the correct structure. This is especially true when you specify attributes with fixed values instead of placeholders. + For more information about formatting in %PRODUCTNAME Math, see Brackets and Grouping. - Information on attributes, indexes and exponents, and scaling can help you structure your documents more efficiently. + Information on attributes, indexes and exponents, and scaling can help you structure your documents more efficiently. diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03090700.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03090700.xhp index c19638e565..a8529d6978 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03090700.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03090700.xhp @@ -55,248 +55,248 @@ aligning formulas mw added two index entries about formula alignement and made "formatting.." a two level entry -Format -You can choose among various options for formatting a $[officename] Math formula. The format options are displayed in the lower half of the Formula Elements pane. These options are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. +Format +You can choose among various options for formatting a $[officename] Math formula. The format options are displayed in the lower half of the Formula Elements pane. These options are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window.
-The following is a complete list of all available formatting options in $[officename] Math. The icon next to the formatting option indicates that it can be accessed through the Elements pane (menu View - Elements) or through the context menu of the Commands window. -The letter "a" refers to the placeholder in your formula which you would like to assign to the respective formatting. You can substitute this character for any other you like. -Formatting options +The following is a complete list of all available formatting options in $[officename] Math. The icon next to the formatting option indicates that it can be accessed through the Elements pane (menu View - Elements) or through the context menu of the Commands window. +The letter "a" refers to the placeholder in your formula which you would like to assign to the respective formatting. You can substitute this character for any other you like. +Formatting options - + Icon -Superscript left -Inserts a superscript to the left of a placeholder. You can also type <?>lsup{<?>} in the Commands window. +Superscript left +Inserts a superscript to the left of a placeholder. You can also type <?>lsup{<?>} in the Commands window.
- + Icon -Superscript top -Inserts a superscript directly above a placeholder. You can also type <?>csup<?> directly in the Commands window. +Superscript top +Inserts a superscript directly above a placeholder. You can also type <?>csup<?> directly in the Commands window.
- + Icon -Superscript right -Inserts a superscript to the right of a placeholder. You can also type <?>^{<?>} directly in the Commands window, or you can use rsup or sup. +Superscript right +Inserts a superscript to the right of a placeholder. You can also type <?>^{<?>} directly in the Commands window, or you can use rsup or sup.
- + Icon -Vertical stack (2 elements) -Inserts a vertical stack (binomial) with two placeholders. You can also type binom<?><?> directly in the Commands window. +Vertical stack (2 elements) +Inserts a vertical stack (binomial) with two placeholders. You can also type binom<?><?> directly in the Commands window.
- + Icon -New line -Inserts a new line in your document. You can also type newline directly in the Commands window. +New line +Inserts a new line in your document. You can also type newline directly in the Commands window.
- + Icon -Subscript left -Inserts a subscript to the left of a placeholder. You can also type <?>lsub{<?>} in the Commands window. +Subscript left +Inserts a subscript to the left of a placeholder. You can also type <?>lsub{<?>} in the Commands window.
- + Icon -Subscript bottom -Inserts a subscript directly under a placeholder. You can also type <?>csub<?> directly in the Commands window. +Subscript bottom +Inserts a subscript directly under a placeholder. You can also type <?>csub<?> directly in the Commands window.
- + Icon -Subscript right -Inserts a subscript to the right of a placeholder. You can also type <?>_{<?>} in the Commands window, and the subscript dash can be replaced by rsub or sub. +Subscript right +Inserts a subscript to the right of a placeholder. You can also type <?>_{<?>} in the Commands window, and the subscript dash can be replaced by rsub or sub.
- + Icon -Vertical stack (3 elements) -Inserts a vertical stack with three placeholders. You can also type stack {<?>#<?>#<?>} in the Commands window. +Vertical stack (3 elements) +Inserts a vertical stack with three placeholders. You can also type stack {<?>#<?>#<?>} in the Commands window.
- + Icon -Small gap -Inserts a small gap between a placeholder and the next element. You can also type ` directly in the Commands window. The command must appear to the left or right of a symbol, variable, number or complete command. +Small gap +Inserts a small gap between a placeholder and the next element. You can also type ` directly in the Commands window. The command must appear to the left or right of a symbol, variable, number or complete command.
- + Icon -Align left -This icon assigns left-alignment to "a" and inserts a placeholder. You can type alignl<?> directly in the Commands window. +Align left +This icon assigns left-alignment to "a" and inserts a placeholder. You can type alignl<?> directly in the Commands window.
- + Icon -Align to horizontal center -Assigns horizontal central alignment to "a" and inserts a placeholder. You can also type alignc<?> directly in the Commands window. +Align to horizontal center +Assigns horizontal central alignment to "a" and inserts a placeholder. You can also type alignc<?> directly in the Commands window.
- + Icon -Align right -Inserts the command for right alignment and a placeholder. You can also type alignr<?> in the Commands window. +Align right +Inserts the command for right alignment and a placeholder. You can also type alignr<?> in the Commands window.
- + Icon -Matrix stack -This icon inserts a matrix with four placeholders. You can also type matrix{<?>#<?>##<?>#<?>} directly in the Commands window. The position of an element inside this diagram is indicated by two coordinates; the first specifies the line number and the second the column number. You can expand this matrix in any direction in the Commands window by adding characters. +Matrix stack +This icon inserts a matrix with four placeholders. You can also type matrix{<?>#<?>##<?>#<?>} directly in the Commands window. The position of an element inside this diagram is indicated by two coordinates; the first specifies the line number and the second the column number. You can expand this matrix in any direction in the Commands window by adding characters.
- + Icon -Gap -This icon inserts a gap or space between placeholders. You can also type ~ directly in the Commands window. The command must appear to the left or right of a symbol, variable, number or complete command. +Gap +This icon inserts a gap or space between placeholders. You can also type ~ directly in the Commands window. The command must appear to the left or right of a symbol, variable, number or complete command.
-For alignment, the alignl, alignc and alignr commands are especially effective, if you are +For alignment, the alignl, alignc and alignr commands are especially effective, if you are -aligning numerators and denominators, for example {alignl a}over{b+c} +aligning numerators and denominators, for example {alignl a}over{b+c} -constructing binomials or stacks, for example binom{2*n}{alignr k} +constructing binomials or stacks, for example binom{2*n}{alignr k} -aligning the elements in a matrix, for example matrix{alignr a#b+2##c+1/3#alignl d} and +aligning the elements in a matrix, for example matrix{alignr a#b+2##c+1/3#alignl d} and -beginning a new line, for example a+b-c newline alignr x/y +beginning a new line, for example a+b-c newline alignr x/y -When using the align instructions, note that +When using the align instructions, note that -they can only placed at the beginning of expressions and can only occur once. Therefore you can type a+b alignr c, but not a+alignr b +they can only placed at the beginning of expressions and can only occur once. Therefore you can type a+b alignr c, but not a+alignr b -they affect each other, which means that typing {alignl{alignr a}}over{b+c} aligns a on the right. +they affect each other, which means that typing {alignl{alignr a}}over{b+c} aligns a on the right. -To align using the "matrix" command -matrix{ -alignr sin^2 x + cos^2 x#{}={}#alignl 1 ## -alignr cos^2 x #{}={} #alignl 1 - sin^2 x -} -Aligning to the left -If a line or an expression begins with text, it is aligned on the left by default. You can change this with any of the align commands. An example is stack{a+b-c*d#alignr "text"}, where "text" appears aligned to the right. Note that text must always be surrounded by quotation marks. -The standard centralized formulas can be aligned to the left without using the Format - Alignment menu. To do this, place an empty character string, that is, the inverted commas which surround any text "", before the section of formula that you want to align. For example, typing "" a+b newline "" c+d results in both equations being left-aligned instead of centered. -When typing information in the Commands window, note that some formats require spaces for the correct structure. This is especially true when entering values (for example, a lsup{3}) instead of placeholders. -Click Brackets and Grouping for more information about formatting in $[officename] Math. -Useful information about Indexes and Exponents and Scaling, helps you organize your document in the best possible way. +To align using the "matrix" command +matrix{ +alignr sin^2 x + cos^2 x#{}={}#alignl 1 ## +alignr cos^2 x #{}={} #alignl 1 - sin^2 x +} +Aligning to the left +If a line or an expression begins with text, it is aligned on the left by default. You can change this with any of the align commands. An example is stack{a+b-c*d#alignr "text"}, where "text" appears aligned to the right. Note that text must always be surrounded by quotation marks. +The standard centralized formulas can be aligned to the left without using the Format - Alignment menu. To do this, place an empty character string, that is, the inverted commas which surround any text "", before the section of formula that you want to align. For example, typing "" a+b newline "" c+d results in both equations being left-aligned instead of centered. +When typing information in the Commands window, note that some formats require spaces for the correct structure. This is especially true when entering values (for example, a lsup{3}) instead of placeholders. +Click Brackets and Grouping for more information about formatting in $[officename] Math. +Useful information about Indexes and Exponents and Scaling, helps you organize your document in the best possible way. diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03090800.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03090800.xhp index 567513f929..c96982ae2b 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03090800.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03090800.xhp @@ -54,25 +54,25 @@ rational numbers -Set Operations -Assign different set operators to the characters in your $[officename] Math formula. The individual operators are shown in the lower section of the Elements pane. Call the context menu in the Commands window to see an identical list of the individual functions. Any operators not found in the Elements pane have to be entered directly in the Commands window. You can also directly insert other parts of the formula even if symbols already exist for them. +Set Operations +Assign different set operators to the characters in your $[officename] Math formula. The individual operators are shown in the lower section of the Elements pane. Call the context menu in the Commands window to see an identical list of the individual functions. Any operators not found in the Elements pane have to be entered directly in the Commands window. You can also directly insert other parts of the formula even if symbols already exist for them.
-After clicking the Set Operations icon in the Elements pane additional icons will be shown in the lower part of this window. Simply click a symbol to incorporate the operator in the formula being edited in the Commands window. -The set operations in detail: +After clicking the Set Operations icon in the Elements pane additional icons will be shown in the lower part of this window. Simply click a symbol to incorporate the operator in the formula being edited in the Commands window. +The set operations in detail: - + Icon -is included in -Use the icon to insert the is included in set operator with two placeholders. You can also enter <?> in <?> directly into the Commands window. +is included in +Use the icon to insert the is included in set operator with two placeholders. You can also enter <?> in <?> directly into the Commands window.
@@ -80,14 +80,14 @@ - + Icon -is not included in -Use this icon to insert the is not included in set operator with two placeholders. You can also enter <?> notin <?> in the Commands window. +is not included in +Use this icon to insert the is not included in set operator with two placeholders. You can also enter <?> notin <?> in the Commands window.
@@ -95,14 +95,14 @@ - + Icon -includes -Use this icon to insert the set operator includes with two placeholders. You can also enter <?> owns <?> or <?> ni <?> directly in the Commands window. +includes +Use this icon to insert the set operator includes with two placeholders. You can also enter <?> owns <?> or <?> ni <?> directly in the Commands window.
@@ -110,14 +110,14 @@ - + Icon -empty set -Use this icon to insert an empty set. Enter emptyset in the Commands window, in order to insert an empty set into your document. +empty set +Use this icon to insert an empty set. Enter emptyset in the Commands window, in order to insert an empty set into your document.
@@ -125,14 +125,14 @@ - + Icon -Intersection -Use this icon to insert two placeholders with the set operator intersection of sets . The same happens if you enter <?> intersection <?> Commands window. +Intersection +Use this icon to insert two placeholders with the set operator intersection of sets . The same happens if you enter <?> intersection <?> Commands window.
@@ -140,14 +140,14 @@ - + Icon -Union -Use this icon to insert the union set operator with two placeholders. You can also enter <?> union <?> directly in the Commands window. +Union +Use this icon to insert the union set operator with two placeholders. You can also enter <?> union <?> directly in the Commands window.
@@ -155,14 +155,14 @@ - + Icon -Difference -Use this icon to insert the difference set operator. You can also enter <?> setminus <?> or <?> bslash <?> in the Commands window. +Difference +Use this icon to insert the difference set operator. You can also enter <?> setminus <?> or <?> bslash <?> in the Commands window.
@@ -170,14 +170,14 @@ - + Icon -Quotient set -Use this icon to insert a slash for creating a quotient set with two placeholders. Enter <?>slash<?> in the Commands window, to achieve the same result. +Quotient set +Use this icon to insert a slash for creating a quotient set with two placeholders. Enter <?>slash<?> in the Commands window, to achieve the same result.
@@ -185,14 +185,14 @@ - + Icon -aleph -Use this icon to insert a cardinal number. You can achieve the same result by entering aleph in the Commands window. +aleph +Use this icon to insert a cardinal number. You can achieve the same result by entering aleph in the Commands window.
@@ -200,14 +200,14 @@ - + Icon -Subset -Use this icon to insert the is a subset of set operator. You can also enter <?>subset<?> directly in the Commands window. +Subset +Use this icon to insert the is a subset of set operator. You can also enter <?>subset<?> directly in the Commands window.
@@ -215,14 +215,14 @@ - + Icon -Subset or equal to -Use this icon to insert the is a subset or equal to set operator with two placeholders. You can also enter <?>subseteq<?> in the Commands window. +Subset or equal to +Use this icon to insert the is a subset or equal to set operator with two placeholders. You can also enter <?>subseteq<?> in the Commands window.
@@ -230,14 +230,14 @@ - + Icon -Superset -Use this icon to insert the set operator is a superset of and two placeholders. You can also enter <?>supset<?> in the Commands window. +Superset +Use this icon to insert the set operator is a superset of and two placeholders. You can also enter <?>supset<?> in the Commands window.
@@ -245,14 +245,14 @@ - + Icon -Superset or equal to -Use this icon to insert the set operator is a super set or equal to with two placeholders. Alternatively, you can enter <?>supseteq<?> in the Commands window. +Superset or equal to +Use this icon to insert the set operator is a super set or equal to with two placeholders. Alternatively, you can enter <?>supseteq<?> in the Commands window.
@@ -260,14 +260,14 @@ - + Icon -not subset -Use this icon to insert the not subset set operator with two placeholders. Instead of this, you can also enter <?>nsubset<?>. +not subset +Use this icon to insert the not subset set operator with two placeholders. Instead of this, you can also enter <?>nsubset<?>.
@@ -275,14 +275,14 @@ - + Icon -not subset or equal to -Use this icon to insert the not subset or equal set operator with two placeholders. You can also enter <?>nsubseteq<?> in the Commands window. +not subset or equal to +Use this icon to insert the not subset or equal set operator with two placeholders. You can also enter <?>nsubseteq<?> in the Commands window.
@@ -290,14 +290,14 @@ - + Icon -not superset -Use this icon to insert the not superset set operator with two placeholders. You can also enter <?>nsupset<?> in the Commands window. +not superset +Use this icon to insert the not superset set operator with two placeholders. You can also enter <?>nsupset<?> in the Commands window.
@@ -305,14 +305,14 @@ - + Icon -not superset or equal to -Use this icon to insert the not superset or equal set operator with two placeholders. Instead of this you can type <?>nsupseteq<?> in the Commands window. +not superset or equal to +Use this icon to insert the not superset or equal set operator with two placeholders. Instead of this you can type <?>nsupseteq<?> in the Commands window.
@@ -320,14 +320,14 @@ - + Icon -Set of natural numbers -Use this icon to insert a character for the set of natural numbers. Instead of this, you can enter setn in the Commands window. +Set of natural numbers +Use this icon to insert a character for the set of natural numbers. Instead of this, you can enter setn in the Commands window.
@@ -335,14 +335,14 @@ - + Icon -Set of whole numbers -Use this icon to insert a character for the set of whole numbers. You can also do this by entering setz in the Commands window. +Set of whole numbers +Use this icon to insert a character for the set of whole numbers. You can also do this by entering setz in the Commands window.
@@ -350,14 +350,14 @@ - + Icon -Set of rational numbers -Use this icon to insert a character for the set of rational numbers. You can also do this by directly entering setq in the Commands window. +Set of rational numbers +Use this icon to insert a character for the set of rational numbers. You can also do this by directly entering setq in the Commands window.
@@ -365,14 +365,14 @@ - + Icon -Set of real numbers -Use this icon to insert a character for the set of real numbers. Instead of this, you can enter setr in the Commands window. +Set of real numbers +Use this icon to insert a character for the set of real numbers. Instead of this, you can enter setr in the Commands window.
@@ -380,18 +380,18 @@ - + Icon -Set of complex numbers -Use this icon to insert a character for the set of complex numbers. You can also enter setc in the Commands window. +Set of complex numbers +Use this icon to insert a character for the set of complex numbers. You can also enter setc in the Commands window.
-Be sure to leave spaces (gaps) between values and commands when entering them manually in the Commands window. This ensures that the correct structure is achieved. +Be sure to leave spaces (gaps) between values and commands when entering them manually in the Commands window. This ensures that the correct structure is achieved. diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03090900.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03090900.xhp index 2559ade5c8..e1f827cf84 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03090900.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03090900.xhp @@ -35,9 +35,9 @@ $[officename] Math;examples formulas;examples -$[officename] Math Examples +$[officename] Math Examples -The following is a list of sample formulas in $[officename] Math. +The following is a list of sample formulas in $[officename] Math.
diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03090901.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03090901.xhp index b134600574..74a6a681be 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03090901.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03090901.xhp @@ -31,12 +31,12 @@
-Symbols with Indices -The following example explains how to create symbols with indexes in $[officename] Math. You can copy this example to the Commands window by using the clipboard and use it in your own formula. +Symbols with Indices +The following example explains how to create symbols with indexes in $[officename] Math. You can copy this example to the Commands window by using the clipboard and use it in your own formula.
- + Icon -D_mn^ size /2 LEFT(3 OVER 2 RIGHT) +D_mn^ size /2 LEFT(3 OVER 2 RIGHT) diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03090902.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03090902.xhp index c94de6381c..e53dab1e10 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03090902.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03090902.xhp @@ -31,12 +31,12 @@
-Symbols with Indices -Here is another example of creating symbols with indexes in $[officename] Math. You can copy this example to the Commands window using the clipboard and use it in your own formula. +Symbols with Indices +Here is another example of creating symbols with indexes in $[officename] Math. You can copy this example to the Commands window using the clipboard and use it in your own formula.
- + Icon -%SIGMA_g^{{}+{}}lsup 3 +%SIGMA_g^{{}+{}}lsup 3 diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03090903.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03090903.xhp index b80dc9ab28..779f361be6 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03090903.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03090903.xhp @@ -31,12 +31,12 @@
-Symbols with Indices -A third example of how to use $[officename] Math to create symbols with indexes is shown below. You can copy the example into the clipboard and use it in your own formula in the Commands window. +Symbols with Indices +A third example of how to use $[officename] Math to create symbols with indexes is shown below. You can copy the example into the clipboard and use it in your own formula in the Commands window.
- + Icon -%PHI^{i_1 i_2 dotsaxis i_n}_{k_1 k_2 dotsaxis k_n} +%PHI^{i_1 i_2 dotsaxis i_n}_{k_1 k_2 dotsaxis k_n} diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03090904.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03090904.xhp index d9c3a6f06d..3926e6b7ec 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03090904.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03090904.xhp @@ -31,12 +31,12 @@
-Matrix with Varying Font Sizes -Here is an example of how to create a matrix with varying font sizes in $[officename] Math. You can copy this example to the Commands window using the clipboard and use it in your own formula. +Matrix with Varying Font Sizes +Here is an example of how to create a matrix with varying font sizes in $[officename] Math. You can copy this example to the Commands window using the clipboard and use it in your own formula.
- + Icon -func G^{(%alpha" ," %beta)}_{ x_m x_n} = left[ matrix { arctan(%alpha) # arctan(%beta) ## x_m + x_n # x_m - x_n }right] +func G^{(%alpha" ," %beta)}_{ x_m x_n} = left[ matrix { arctan(%alpha) # arctan(%beta) ## x_m + x_n # x_m - x_n }right] diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03090905.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03090905.xhp index efbe758f97..63ad60026f 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03090905.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03090905.xhp @@ -31,12 +31,12 @@
-Matrix -Here is an example of how to create a matrix with $[officename] Math. If you want to use the example in your own formula, you can copy it to the Commands window using the clipboard. +Matrix +Here is an example of how to create a matrix with $[officename] Math. If you want to use the example in your own formula, you can copy it to the Commands window using the clipboard.
- + Icon -font sans bold size *2 A =left[matrix{A_11#A_12#dotsaxis#A_{1n}##A_21#{} #{}#A_{2n}##dotsvert#{}#{}#dotsvert##A_{n1}#A_{n2}#dotsaxis#A_nn}right] +font sans bold size *2 A =left[matrix{A_11#A_12#dotsaxis#A_{1n}##A_21#{} #{}#A_{2n}##dotsvert#{}#{}#dotsvert##A_{n1}#A_{n2}#dotsaxis#A_nn}right] diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03090906.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03090906.xhp index 0ab911c99d..c9ac2a1a26 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03090906.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03090906.xhp @@ -31,12 +31,12 @@
-Matrix in Bold Font -Here is an example of how to create a bold font matrix in $[officename] Math. You can copy this example to the Commands window using the clipboard and use it in your own formula. +Matrix in Bold Font +Here is an example of how to create a bold font matrix in $[officename] Math. You can copy this example to the Commands window using the clipboard and use it in your own formula.
- + Icon -bold { f(x", "y) = left [ stack { x + y over z + left lbrace matrix { 2 # 3 # 4 ## 4 # 5 # 6 ## 6 # 7 # 8} right rbrace # {y + sin (x)} over %alpha # z + y over g } right ]} +bold { f(x", "y) = left [ stack { x + y over z + left lbrace matrix { 2 # 3 # 4 ## 4 # 5 # 6 ## 6 # 7 # 8} right rbrace # {y + sin (x)} over %alpha # z + y over g } right ]} diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03090907.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03090907.xhp index 0848598cd0..c966a8afe6 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03090907.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03090907.xhp @@ -31,12 +31,12 @@
-Functions -Here is an example of how to create functions with $[officename] Math. If you want to use the example in your own formula, copy it to the Commands window using the clipboard. +Functions +Here is an example of how to create functions with $[officename] Math. If you want to use the example in your own formula, copy it to the Commands window using the clipboard.
- + Icon -func f(x","y)={x sin x~ tan y} over {cos x} +func f(x","y)={x sin x~ tan y} over {cos x} diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03090908.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03090908.xhp index e1402a2a00..5b53b04155 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03090908.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03090908.xhp @@ -31,12 +31,12 @@
-Square Root -Here is an example of how to create a square root with $[officename] Math. If you want to use the example in your own formula, copy it to the Commands window using the clipboard. +Square Root +Here is an example of how to create a square root with $[officename] Math. If you want to use the example in your own formula, copy it to the Commands window using the clipboard.
- + Icon -%LAMBDA_{deg","t}=1 + %alpha_deg SQRT {M_t over M_{(t=0)}-1}~"." +%LAMBDA_{deg","t}=1 + %alpha_deg SQRT {M_t over M_{(t=0)}-1}~"." diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03090909.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03090909.xhp index e242b3d7dc..1476daaa32 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03090909.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03090909.xhp @@ -37,12 +37,12 @@ range of integral example integrals;example -UFI: as fix to #i23019#, tried to make Integral and Range more visible in the HelpIntegral and Sum Ranges, Font Size -Here is an example of how to use various fonts and font sizes within a formula in $[officename] Math. +UFI: as fix to #i23019#, tried to make Integral and Range more visible in the HelpIntegral and Sum Ranges, Font Size +Here is an example of how to use various fonts and font sizes within a formula in $[officename] Math.
- + Icon -f(t)=int from size*1.5 0 to 1 left[g(t')+sum from i=1 to N h_i(t')right] +f(t)=int from size*1.5 0 to 1 left[g(t')+sum from i=1 to N h_i(t')right] diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03090910.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03090910.xhp index 3317a4e0e8..09e90c502a 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03090910.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03090910.xhp @@ -31,12 +31,12 @@
-Attributes -This section contains an example of how you can use different attributes in a formula in $[officename] Math. +Attributes +This section contains an example of how you can use different attributes in a formula in $[officename] Math.
- + Icon -%rho(font sans bold q","%omega) = int func e^{i %omega t}%rho(font sans bold q","t)"d"t +%rho(font sans bold q","%omega) = int func e^{i %omega t}%rho(font sans bold q","t)"d"t diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03091100.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03091100.xhp index 8c4823da88..76fe0d0ac7 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03091100.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03091100.xhp @@ -32,118 +32,118 @@ brackets and grouping in $[officename] Math grouping and brackets in $[officename] Math -Brackets and Grouping -Note: the quotation marks in the examples are used to emphasize text and do not belong to the content of the formulas and commands. -When typing example formulas into the Commands window, note that spaces are often required for correct structure. -Braces "{}" are used to group expressions together to form one new expression. For example, "sqrt {x * y}" is the square root of the entire product x*y, while "sqrt x * y" is the square root of x multiplied by y. Braces do not require an extra space. -Set brackets were previously inserted in the Elements pane or directly in the Commands window as "left lbrace <?> right rbrace". Now, a left and a right set bracket can also be inserted using "lbrace" and "rbrace", with or without wildcards. -There are a total of eight (8) different types of brackets available. The "ceil" and "floor" brackets are often used for rounding up or down the argument to the next integer: "lceil -3.7 rceil = -3" or "lfloor -3.7 rfloor = -4". -Operator brackets, also known as Bra-kets (angle brackets with a vertical line in between), are common in Physics notation: "langle a mline b rangle" or "langle a mline b mline c over d mline e rangle". The height and positioning of the vertical lines always corresponds exactly to the enclosing brackets. -All brackets may only be used in pairs. The brackets have some common characteristics: -All types of brackets have the same grouping function as described for "{}" brackets. -All types of brackets, including those that are visible, permit empty group definition. The enclosed expression may therefore be empty. -Brackets do not adjust their size to the enclosed expression. For example, if you want "( a over b )" with a bracket size adjusted to a and b you must insert "left" and "right". Entering "left(a over b right)" produces appropriate sizing. If, however, the brackets themselves are part of the expression whose size is changed, they are included the size change: "size 3(a over b)" and "size 12(a over b)". The sizing of the bracket-to-expression ratio does not change in any way. -Since "left" and "right" ensure unique assignment of the brackets, every single bracket can be used as an argument for these two commands, even placing right brackets on the left side, or left brackets on the right. Instead of a bracket you can use the "none" qualifier, which means that there is no bracket shown and that there is no space reserved for a bracket. Using this, you can create the following expressions: +Brackets and Grouping +Note: the quotation marks in the examples are used to emphasize text and do not belong to the content of the formulas and commands. +When typing example formulas into the Commands window, note that spaces are often required for correct structure. +Braces "{}" are used to group expressions together to form one new expression. For example, "sqrt {x * y}" is the square root of the entire product x*y, while "sqrt x * y" is the square root of x multiplied by y. Braces do not require an extra space. +Set brackets were previously inserted in the Elements pane or directly in the Commands window as "left lbrace <?> right rbrace". Now, a left and a right set bracket can also be inserted using "lbrace" and "rbrace", with or without wildcards. +There are a total of eight (8) different types of brackets available. The "ceil" and "floor" brackets are often used for rounding up or down the argument to the next integer: "lceil -3.7 rceil = -3" or "lfloor -3.7 rfloor = -4". +Operator brackets, also known as Bra-kets (angle brackets with a vertical line in between), are common in Physics notation: "langle a mline b rangle" or "langle a mline b mline c over d mline e rangle". The height and positioning of the vertical lines always corresponds exactly to the enclosing brackets. +All brackets may only be used in pairs. The brackets have some common characteristics: +All types of brackets have the same grouping function as described for "{}" brackets. +All types of brackets, including those that are visible, permit empty group definition. The enclosed expression may therefore be empty. +Brackets do not adjust their size to the enclosed expression. For example, if you want "( a over b )" with a bracket size adjusted to a and b you must insert "left" and "right". Entering "left(a over b right)" produces appropriate sizing. If, however, the brackets themselves are part of the expression whose size is changed, they are included the size change: "size 3(a over b)" and "size 12(a over b)". The sizing of the bracket-to-expression ratio does not change in any way. +Since "left" and "right" ensure unique assignment of the brackets, every single bracket can be used as an argument for these two commands, even placing right brackets on the left side, or left brackets on the right. Instead of a bracket you can use the "none" qualifier, which means that there is no bracket shown and that there is no space reserved for a bracket. Using this, you can create the following expressions: -left lbrace x right none +left lbrace x right none -left [ x right ) +left [ x right ) -left ] x right [ +left ] x right [ -left rangle x right lfloor +left rangle x right lfloor -The same rules apply to "left" and "right" as to the other brackets: they also work as group builders and may enclose empty expressions. -The combination of mismatched brackets, single brackets and repositioned left and right brackets occurs often in mathematical formulas. The following is a formula that will create an error when typed: +The same rules apply to "left" and "right" as to the other brackets: they also work as group builders and may enclose empty expressions. +The combination of mismatched brackets, single brackets and repositioned left and right brackets occurs often in mathematical formulas. The following is a formula that will create an error when typed: -[2, 3) - right open interval +[2, 3) - right open interval -Using "left" and "right" makes the above expression valid in $[officename] Math: "left [2, 3 right )". However, the brackets do not have any fixed size because they adjust to the argument. Setting a single bracket is a bit cumbersome. Therefore, there you can display single brackets with a fixed size by placing a "\" (backslash) in front of normal brackets. These brackets then act like any other symbol and no longer have the special functionality of brackets; that is they do not work as group builders and their orientation corresponds to that of other symbols. See "size *2 \langle x \rangle" and "size *2 langle x rangle". -The complete overview is as follows +Using "left" and "right" makes the above expression valid in $[officename] Math: "left [2, 3 right )". However, the brackets do not have any fixed size because they adjust to the argument. Setting a single bracket is a bit cumbersome. Therefore, there you can display single brackets with a fixed size by placing a "\" (backslash) in front of normal brackets. These brackets then act like any other symbol and no longer have the special functionality of brackets; that is they do not work as group builders and their orientation corresponds to that of other symbols. See "size *2 \langle x \rangle" and "size *2 langle x rangle". +The complete overview is as follows -\{ or \lbrace, \} or \rbrace +\{ or \lbrace, \} or \rbrace -\(, \) +\(, \) -\[, \] +\[, \] -\langle, \rangle +\langle, \rangle -\lceil, \rceil +\lceil, \rceil -\lfloor, \rfloor +\lfloor, \rfloor -\lline, \rline +\lline, \rline -\ldline, \rdline +\ldline, \rdline -In this way, intervals like the one above can be built in $[officename] Math without any problems: \[2", "3\) or "\]2", "3\[ (Attention: These quotation marks are part of the entry.) -Please note that the quotation marks must be entered and can be obtained with Shift+2 and not with typographical quotation marks. Generally, punctuation marks (like the comma in this case) are set as text. Although it is also possible to type "\[2,~3\)" the above option is preferable. In the previous example, "fixed size" always describes a bracket size dependent on the font size used. -Nesting groups within each other is relatively problem-free. In the formula hat "{a + b}" the "hat" is displayed simply over the center of "{a + b}". Also, "color red lceil a rceil" and "grave hat langle x * y rangle" work as expected. The result of the latter can be compared to "grave {hat langle x * y rangle}". These attributes do not compete, but rather can be combined. -This differs slightly for competing or mutually influencing attributes. This is often the case with font attributes. For example, which color does the b have in "color yellow color red (a + color green b)", or which size does it have in "size *4 (a + size /2 b)"? Given a base size of 12, does it have the size 48, 6 or even 24 (which could be seen as a combination)? The following are basic resolution rules, which will be followed consistently in the future. In general, the rules apply to all group operations. This only has a visible effect on the font attributes, like "bold", "ital", "phantom", "size", "color" and "font": +In this way, intervals like the one above can be built in $[officename] Math without any problems: \[2", "3\) or "\]2", "3\[ (Attention: These quotation marks are part of the entry.) +Please note that the quotation marks must be entered and can be obtained with Shift+2 and not with typographical quotation marks. Generally, punctuation marks (like the comma in this case) are set as text. Although it is also possible to type "\[2,~3\)" the above option is preferable. In the previous example, "fixed size" always describes a bracket size dependent on the font size used. +Nesting groups within each other is relatively problem-free. In the formula hat "{a + b}" the "hat" is displayed simply over the center of "{a + b}". Also, "color red lceil a rceil" and "grave hat langle x * y rangle" work as expected. The result of the latter can be compared to "grave {hat langle x * y rangle}". These attributes do not compete, but rather can be combined. +This differs slightly for competing or mutually influencing attributes. This is often the case with font attributes. For example, which color does the b have in "color yellow color red (a + color green b)", or which size does it have in "size *4 (a + size /2 b)"? Given a base size of 12, does it have the size 48, 6 or even 24 (which could be seen as a combination)? The following are basic resolution rules, which will be followed consistently in the future. In general, the rules apply to all group operations. This only has a visible effect on the font attributes, like "bold", "ital", "phantom", "size", "color" and "font": -Group operations in sequence are treated as if every single operation is enclosed by braces. They are nested, and in every level there can be no more than one operation. Here is an example of a formula with many group operations: "size 12 color red font sans size -5 (a + size 8 b)" like "{size 12{color red{font sans{size -5 (a + {size 8 b})}}}}". +Group operations in sequence are treated as if every single operation is enclosed by braces. They are nested, and in every level there can be no more than one operation. Here is an example of a formula with many group operations: "size 12 color red font sans size -5 (a + size 8 b)" like "{size 12{color red{font sans{size -5 (a + {size 8 b})}}}}". -This example formula is then interpreted from left to right. The operations only affect its corresponding group (or expression). Operations further to the right "replace" or "combine themselves with" their predecessors. +This example formula is then interpreted from left to right. The operations only affect its corresponding group (or expression). Operations further to the right "replace" or "combine themselves with" their predecessors. -A group operation does not have any effect on higher-level operations but rather affects only lower-level groups and expressions, including their brackets and super-/subscripts. For example, "a + size *2 (b * size -8 c_1)^2" +A group operation does not have any effect on higher-level operations but rather affects only lower-level groups and expressions, including their brackets and super-/subscripts. For example, "a + size *2 (b * size -8 c_1)^2" -"color ..." and "font ..." as well as "size n" (n is a decimal) replace any preceding operations of the same type -for "size +n", "size -n", "size *n", and "size /n" the effects of the operations are combined, -"size *2 size -5 a" would be double the starting size minus 5 -"font sans ( a + font serif b)" -"size *2 ( a + size /2 b )"UFI: no more StarSymbol font. Removed the following parasid="par_id3151327" l10n="U" oldref="45"For the StarSymbol Unicode font there are 2 exceptions to these rules: -id="par_id3148998" l10n="U" oldref="46"It ignores "font" commands. Otherwise, there would often be different characters from the ones desired, for example, "font sans (a oplus b)" would then neither have brackets nor an "oplus". -id="par_id3143281" l10n="U" oldref="47"The "ital" command is ignored, for example, "ital (a + b)". This happens because italicized mathematical symbols are uncommon, even in combination with text in italics.To change the size of a formula, use "size +" or -,*,/. Do not use "size n". These can easily be used in any context. This enables you to copy to other areas by using Copy and Paste, and the result remains the same. Furthermore, such expressions survive a change of base size in the menu better than when using "size n". If you use only "size *" and "size /" (for example, "size *1.24 a or size /0.86 a") the proportions remain intact. -Examples (with a base size of 12 and 50% for indexes): -Exactly identical proportions with "size 18 a_n" and "size *1.5 a_n". -This differs in different contexts: "x^{size 18 a_n}" and "x^{size *1.5 a_n}" -Examples with size +n for a comparison. They look identical: -a_{size 8 n} -a_{size +2 n} -a_{size *1.333 n} -The following examples, however, do not look identical: -x^{a_{size 8 n}} -x^{a_{size +2 n}} -x^{a_{size *1.333 n}} -Note that all n here have different sizes. The size 1.333 results from 8/6, the desired size divided by the default index size 6. (Index size 50% with a base size of 12) +"color ..." and "font ..." as well as "size n" (n is a decimal) replace any preceding operations of the same type +for "size +n", "size -n", "size *n", and "size /n" the effects of the operations are combined, +"size *2 size -5 a" would be double the starting size minus 5 +"font sans ( a + font serif b)" +"size *2 ( a + size /2 b )"UFI: no more StarSymbol font. Removed the following parasid="par_id3151327" For the StarSymbol Unicode font there are 2 exceptions to these rules: +id="par_id3148998" It ignores "font" commands. Otherwise, there would often be different characters from the ones desired, for example, "font sans (a oplus b)" would then neither have brackets nor an "oplus". +id="par_id3143281" The "ital" command is ignored, for example, "ital (a + b)". This happens because italicized mathematical symbols are uncommon, even in combination with text in italics.To change the size of a formula, use "size +" or -,*,/. Do not use "size n". These can easily be used in any context. This enables you to copy to other areas by using Copy and Paste, and the result remains the same. Furthermore, such expressions survive a change of base size in the menu better than when using "size n". If you use only "size *" and "size /" (for example, "size *1.24 a or size /0.86 a") the proportions remain intact. +Examples (with a base size of 12 and 50% for indexes): +Exactly identical proportions with "size 18 a_n" and "size *1.5 a_n". +This differs in different contexts: "x^{size 18 a_n}" and "x^{size *1.5 a_n}" +Examples with size +n for a comparison. They look identical: +a_{size 8 n} +a_{size +2 n} +a_{size *1.333 n} +The following examples, however, do not look identical: +x^{a_{size 8 n}} +x^{a_{size +2 n}} +x^{a_{size *1.333 n}} +Note that all n here have different sizes. The size 1.333 results from 8/6, the desired size divided by the default index size 6. (Index size 50% with a base size of 12) diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03091200.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03091200.xhp index 9ab590c8a0..eff123cb85 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03091200.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03091200.xhp @@ -33,25 +33,25 @@ indexes and exponents in $[officename] Math exponents and indexes in $[officename] Math -Indexes and Exponents -Here, you will find basic information about indexes and exponents in $[officename] Math. You can try the examples described here to help you understand the details discussed. (The quotation marks in this text are for emphasis purposes only and are not part of the examples.) -The index and exponent for a character are displayed one on top of the other, left-justified to the base character. For example, type a_2^3 or a^3_2. This can be in any order. Instead of '_' and '^', you can use 'sub' and 'sup'. -However, it is no longer possible to use the following patterns -a_2_3 -a^2^3 -a_2^3_4 -Each sub-/superscript position of a base character can only be used once. You must use brackets to indicate the desired result. The following examples illustrate this -a_{2_3} -a^{2^3} -a_2^{3_4} -a_{2^3}^{4_5} -Unlike other formula editors where "_" and " ^ " only refer to the next character ("a_24" refers only to the "2"), $[officename] Math refers to the entire number(s)/name(s)/text. If you want to put superscripts and subscripts in sequence, the expression can be written as follows: a_2{}^3 or a^3{}_2 -To write tensors, $[officename] Math provides several options. In addition to the notation "R_i{}^{jk}{}_l", common in other applications, additional notations can be used, namely "R_i{}^jk{}_l" and "{{R_i}^jk}_l". -Super- and subscripts to the left of the base character can also be right-justified. To do this, the new commands "lsub" and "lsup" are used. Both commands have the same effect as "sub" and "sup", except that they are left of the base character. See also "a lsub 2 lsup 3". -The rules governing unambiguity and the necessity of using brackets remain the same. In principle, this can be achieved with {}_2^3 a. -The commands "sub" and "sup" are also available as "rsub" and "rsup". -Using the "csub" and "csup" commands, you can write super- and subscripts directly above or below a character. An example is "a csub y csup x". Combinations of indexes and exponents together are also possible: "abc_1^2 lsub 3 lsup 4 csub 55555 csup 66666". -Super- and subscripts can be attached to most unary and binary operators. Two examples: "a div_2 b a<csub n b +_2 h" and "a toward csub f b x toward csup f y". -Be sure to also enter all spaces between characters when entering these examples into the Commands window. +Indexes and Exponents +Here, you will find basic information about indexes and exponents in $[officename] Math. You can try the examples described here to help you understand the details discussed. (The quotation marks in this text are for emphasis purposes only and are not part of the examples.) +The index and exponent for a character are displayed one on top of the other, left-justified to the base character. For example, type a_2^3 or a^3_2. This can be in any order. Instead of '_' and '^', you can use 'sub' and 'sup'. +However, it is no longer possible to use the following patterns +a_2_3 +a^2^3 +a_2^3_4 +Each sub-/superscript position of a base character can only be used once. You must use brackets to indicate the desired result. The following examples illustrate this +a_{2_3} +a^{2^3} +a_2^{3_4} +a_{2^3}^{4_5} +Unlike other formula editors where "_" and " ^ " only refer to the next character ("a_24" refers only to the "2"), $[officename] Math refers to the entire number(s)/name(s)/text. If you want to put superscripts and subscripts in sequence, the expression can be written as follows: a_2{}^3 or a^3{}_2 +To write tensors, $[officename] Math provides several options. In addition to the notation "R_i{}^{jk}{}_l", common in other applications, additional notations can be used, namely "R_i{}^jk{}_l" and "{{R_i}^jk}_l". +Super- and subscripts to the left of the base character can also be right-justified. To do this, the new commands "lsub" and "lsup" are used. Both commands have the same effect as "sub" and "sup", except that they are left of the base character. See also "a lsub 2 lsup 3". +The rules governing unambiguity and the necessity of using brackets remain the same. In principle, this can be achieved with {}_2^3 a. +The commands "sub" and "sup" are also available as "rsub" and "rsup". +Using the "csub" and "csup" commands, you can write super- and subscripts directly above or below a character. An example is "a csub y csup x". Combinations of indexes and exponents together are also possible: "abc_1^2 lsub 3 lsup 4 csub 55555 csup 66666". +Super- and subscripts can be attached to most unary and binary operators. Two examples: "a div_2 b a<csub n b +_2 h" and "a toward csub f b x toward csup f y". +Be sure to also enter all spaces between characters when entering these examples into the Commands window. diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03091300.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03091300.xhp index 4cc77ca642..d7b775f668 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03091300.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03091300.xhp @@ -32,10 +32,10 @@ attributes; additional information -Attributes -Additional information about attributes in $[officename] Math is found here. -The acute, bar, breve, check, circle, dot, ddot, dddot, grave, hat, tilde and vec attributes always have a fixed size and do not become wider (longer) if they are above a long symbol. By default, the attributes are centered. -The only attributes which grow with the length of the symbol are overline, underline and overstrike. -For some character strings, it is possible that a line inserted with underline is too close to the character. In this case, an empty group can solve the problem: underline Q sub {} instead of underline Q. +Attributes +Additional information about attributes in $[officename] Math is found here. +The acute, bar, breve, check, circle, dot, ddot, dddot, grave, hat, tilde and vec attributes always have a fixed size and do not become wider (longer) if they are above a long symbol. By default, the attributes are centered. +The only attributes which grow with the length of the symbol are overline, underline and overstrike. +For some character strings, it is possible that a line inserted with underline is too close to the character. In this case, an empty group can solve the problem: underline Q sub {} instead of underline Q. diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03091400.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03091400.xhp index cb0ed6b360..67b129f636 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03091400.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03091400.xhp @@ -32,12 +32,12 @@ - scaling; in %PRODUCTNAME Math Scaling - More detailed information about scaling in %PRODUCTNAME Math as well as some examples can be found here. (The quotation marks in this text are for emphasis purposes only and are not part of the examples.) - The factorial is not scaled (example: "fact stack{a#b}" and "fact {a over b}") but is oriented using the baseline or center of the arguments. - Brackets always have a fixed size as well. This applies to all symbols that can be used as brackets. Compare "(((a)))", "( stack{a#b#c})", "(a over b)". - Brackets preceded by "left" or "right", however, are always adjusted to the argument. See "left(left(left(a right)right)right)", "left(stack{a#b#c}right)", "left(a over b right)". - Some Attributes have fixed sizes; do not change these if they are placed above a long symbol. - The spaces in the examples are required for the correct structure. You may not delete them when making entries in the Commands window. + scaling; in %PRODUCTNAME Math Scaling + More detailed information about scaling in %PRODUCTNAME Math as well as some examples can be found here. (The quotation marks in this text are for emphasis purposes only and are not part of the examples.) + The factorial is not scaled (example: "fact stack{a#b}" and "fact {a over b}") but is oriented using the baseline or center of the arguments. + Brackets always have a fixed size as well. This applies to all symbols that can be used as brackets. Compare "(((a)))", "( stack{a#b#c})", "(a over b)". + Brackets preceded by "left" or "right", however, are always adjusted to the argument. See "left(left(left(a right)right)right)", "left(stack{a#b#c}right)", "left(a over b right)". + Some Attributes have fixed sizes; do not change these if they are placed above a long symbol. + The spaces in the examples are required for the correct structure. You may not delete them when making entries in the Commands window. diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03091500.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03091500.xhp index 3409c39f28..b1aa42ffb4 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03091500.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03091500.xhp @@ -34,9 +34,9 @@ reference tables; formulas operators;in Math -Formula Reference Tables +Formula Reference Tables -This reference section contains lists of many operators, functions, symbols and formatting features available in $[officename] Math. Many of the commands displayed can be inserted using the icons in the Elements window or the context menu of the Commands window. +This reference section contains lists of many operators, functions, symbols and formatting features available in $[officename] Math. Many of the commands displayed can be inserted using the icons in the Elements window or the context menu of the Commands window. diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03091501.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03091501.xhp index 4a1d861c1c..e4c7668b0c 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03091501.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03091501.xhp @@ -32,377 +32,377 @@ unary operators; list of binary operators; list of -Unary and Binary Operators +Unary and Binary Operators -Typed command(s) +Typed command(s) Symbol in Elements pane -Meaning +Meaning - + - - + Icon -Subtraction +Subtraction - + - - + Icon -- Sign +- Sign - + -+ - + Icon -Minus/Plus +Minus/Plus - + / - + Icon -Division +Division - + * - + Icon -Multiplication +Multiplication - + + - + Icon -Addition +Addition - + + - + Icon -+ Sign ++ Sign - + +- - + Icon -Plus/Minus +Plus/Minus - + and or & - + Icon -Boolean AND operation +Boolean AND operation - + boper -No symbol. Usage: -a boper %SYM1 b +No symbol. Usage: +a boper %SYM1 b -Binary operator. A user-defined symbol follows, which is used as a binary operator. +Binary operator. A user-defined symbol follows, which is used as a binary operator. - + uoper -No symbol. Usage: -uoper %SYM2 b +No symbol. Usage: +uoper %SYM2 b -Unary operator. A user-defined symbol follows, which is a used as a unary operator. +Unary operator. A user-defined symbol follows, which is a used as a unary operator. - + cdot - + Icon -Multiplication, small multiply symbol +Multiplication, small multiply symbol - + circ - + Icon -Concatenate symbols +Concatenate symbols - + div - + Icon -Division +Division - + neg - + Icon -Boolean NOT +Boolean NOT - + odivide -No symbol. +No symbol. -Slash / in circle +Slash / in circle - + odot -No symbol. +No symbol. -Small multiply symbol in circle +Small multiply symbol in circle - + ominus -No symbol. +No symbol. -Subtract symbol in circle +Subtract symbol in circle - + oplus -No symbol. +No symbol. -Add symbol in circle +Add symbol in circle - + or or | - + Icon -Boolean OR operation +Boolean OR operation - + otimes -No symbol. +No symbol. -Multiply symbol times in circle +Multiply symbol times in circle - + over - + Icon -Division/Fraction +Division/Fraction - + times - + Icon -Multiplication +Multiplication - + widebslash -No symbol. +No symbol. -Backslash \ between two characters, of which the right is superscript, the left subscript +Backslash \ between two characters, of which the right is superscript, the left subscript - + wideslash -No symbol. +No symbol. -Slash / between two characters, of which the left is superscript, the right subscript +Slash / between two characters, of which the left is superscript, the right subscript
diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03091502.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03091502.xhp index c144a7d73c..4886679816 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03091502.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03091502.xhp @@ -31,517 +31,517 @@ relations operators;list of -Relations +Relations -Typed command(s) +Typed command(s) Symbol in Elements pane -Meaning +Meaning - + < or lt - + Icon -Less than +Less than - + << or ll -Much less than +Much less than - + <= or le - + Icon -Less than or equal to +Less than or equal to - + <> or neq - + Icon -Not equal +Not equal - + = - + Icon -Equation +Equation - + > or gt - + Icon -Greater than +Greater than - + >= or ge - + Icon -Greater than or equal to +Greater than or equal to - + >> or gg -Much greater than +Much greater than - + approx - + Icon -Is approximately +Is approximately - + def -is defined as/by definition equal to +is defined as/by definition equal to - + divides - + Icon -divides +divides - + dlarrow - + Icon -Arrow with double line to the left +Arrow with double line to the left - + dlrarrow - + Icon -Arrow with double line to the left and the right +Arrow with double line to the left and the right - + drarrow - + Icon -Arrow with double line to the right +Arrow with double line to the right - + equiv - + Icon -Is equivalent/congruent to +Is equivalent/congruent to - + geslant - + Icon -Greater than-equal to +Greater than-equal to - + leslant - + Icon -Less than-equal to +Less than-equal to - + ndivides - + Icon -does not divide +does not divide - + ortho - + Icon -Is orthogonal to +Is orthogonal to - + parallel - + Icon -Is parallel to +Is parallel to - + prop - + Icon -Is proportional to +Is proportional to - + sim - + Icon -Is similar to +Is similar to - + simeq - + Icon -Is similar or equal to +Is similar or equal to - + toward - + Icon -Toward +Toward - + prec - + Icon -Precedes +Precedes - + nprec - + Icon -Not precedes +Not precedes - + succ - + Icon -Succeeds +Succeeds - + nsucc - + Icon -Not succeeds +Not succeeds - + preccurlyeq - + Icon -Precedes or equal to +Precedes or equal to - + succcurlyeq - + Icon -Succeeds or equal to +Succeeds or equal to - + precsim - + Icon -Precedes or equivalent to +Precedes or equivalent to - + succsim - + Icon -Succeeds or equivalent to +Succeeds or equivalent to - + transl -Correspondence symbol image of +Correspondence symbol image of - + transr -Correspondence symbol original of +Correspondence symbol original of
diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03091503.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03091503.xhp index 8c031918e6..57cd281e0d 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03091503.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03091503.xhp @@ -31,348 +31,348 @@ set operators;list of -Set Operators +Set Operators -Typed command(s) +Typed command(s) Symbol in Elements pane -Meaning +Meaning - + aleph - + Icon -Cardinal number +Cardinal number - + emptyset - + Icon -Empty set +Empty set - + in - + Icon -is contained in +is contained in - + intersection - + Icon -Intersection of sets +Intersection of sets - + notin - + Icon -is not contained in +is not contained in - + nsubset - + Icon -Not subset to +Not subset to - + nsubseteq - + Icon -Not subset or equal to +Not subset or equal to - + nsupset - + Icon -Not superset +Not superset - + nsupseteq - + Icon -Not superset or equal to +Not superset or equal to - + owns or ni - + Icon -Contains +Contains - + setc - + Icon -Complex number +Complex number - + setminus or bslash - + Icon -Difference between sets +Difference between sets - + setn - + Icon -Natural number +Natural number - + setq - + Icon -Rational number +Rational number - + setr - + Icon -Real number +Real number - + setz - + Icon -Integer +Integer - + slash - + Icon -Slash / for quotient set (slash) between characters +Slash / for quotient set (slash) between characters - + subset - + Icon -Subset +Subset - + subseteq - + Icon -Subset or equal to +Subset or equal to - + supset - + Icon -Superset +Superset - + supseteq - + Icon -Superset or equal to +Superset or equal to - + union - + Icon -Union of sets +Union of sets
diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03091504.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03091504.xhp index 82cecc031a..631abb8867 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03091504.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03091504.xhp @@ -31,415 +31,415 @@ functions operators;list of -Functions +Functions -Typed command(s) +Typed command(s) Symbol in Elements pane -Meaning +Meaning - + abs - + Icon -Absolute amount +Absolute amount - + arccos - + Icon -Inverse cosine or arccosine +Inverse cosine or arccosine - + arccot - + Icon -Inverse cotangent or arccotangent +Inverse cotangent or arccotangent - + arcosh - + Icon -Inverse hyperbolic cosine +Inverse hyperbolic cosine - + arcoth - + Icon -Inverse hyperbolic cotangent +Inverse hyperbolic cotangent - + arcsin - + Icon -Inverse sine or arcsine +Inverse sine or arcsine - + arctan - + Icon -Inverse tangent or arctangent +Inverse tangent or arctangent - + arsinh - + Icon -Inverse hyperbolic sine +Inverse hyperbolic sine - + artanh - + Icon -Inverse hyperbolic tangent +Inverse hyperbolic tangent - + backepsilon -Back epsilon +Back epsilon - + cos - + Icon -Cosine +Cosine - + cosh - + Icon -Hyperbolic cosine +Hyperbolic cosine - + cot - + Icon -Cotangent +Cotangent - + coth - + Icon -Hyperbolic cotangent +Hyperbolic cotangent - + exp - + Icon -General exponential function +General exponential function - + fact - + Icon -Factorial +Factorial - + func e^{} - + Icon -Natural exponential function +Natural exponential function - + ln - + Icon -Natural logarithm +Natural logarithm - + log - + Icon -General logarithm +General logarithm - + nroot - + Icon -n-th root of x +n-th root of x - + sin - + Icon -Sine +Sine - + sinh - + Icon -Hyperbolic sine +Hyperbolic sine - + sqrt - + Icon -Square root +Square root - + sub -x with subscript n +x with subscript n - + sup - + Icon -n-th power of x +n-th power of x - + tan - + Icon -Tangent +Tangent - + tanh - + Icon -Hyperbolic tangent +Hyperbolic tangent
diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03091505.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03091505.xhp index fbb532c7a7..03866446fa 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03091505.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03091505.xhp @@ -31,246 +31,246 @@ operators;list of -Operators +Operators -Typed command(s) +Typed command(s) Symbol in Elements pane -Meaning +Meaning - + coprod - + Icon -Coproduct +Coproduct - + from - + Icon -Lower limit of an operator +Lower limit of an operator - + from to - + Icon -Range from ... to +Range from ... to - + iiint - + Icon -Triple integral +Triple integral - + iint - + Icon -Double integral +Double integral - + int - + Icon -Integral +Integral - + liminf -Limes inferior +Limes inferior - + limsup -Limes superior +Limes superior - + lint - + Icon -Curve integral +Curve integral - + llint - + Icon -Double curve integral +Double curve integral - + lllint - + Icon -Triple curve integral +Triple curve integral - + oper -Placeholder, user-defined operator +Placeholder, user-defined operator - + prod - + Icon -Product +Product - + sum - + Icon -Sum +Sum - + to - + Icon -Upper limit of an operator +Upper limit of an operator - + lim - + Icon -Limes +Limes
diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03091506.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03091506.xhp index 1e4d87da73..213a0b75c1 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03091506.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03091506.xhp @@ -31,113 +31,113 @@ attributes; list of -Attributes +Attributes -Typed command(s) +Typed command(s) Symbol in Elements pane -Meaning +Meaning - + acute - + Icon -Accent to top right above a character +Accent to top right above a character - + bar - + Icon -Horizontal bar above a character +Horizontal bar above a character - + bold - + Icon -Bold +Bold - + breve - + Icon -Top open arc above a character +Top open arc above a character - + check - + Icon -Upside down roof +Upside down roof - + circle - + Icon -Circle above a character +Circle above a character - + color @@ -145,254 +145,254 @@ formulas;in colorcolors;in formulas -The color command changes the character color; first enter the color command directly in the Commands window. Then enter the color name (black, white, cyan, magenta, red, blue, green, or yellow). Then enter the characters to be changed. +The color command changes the character color; first enter the color command directly in the Commands window. Then enter the color name (black, white, cyan, magenta, red, blue, green, or yellow). Then enter the characters to be changed. - + dddot - + Icon -Three dots above a character +Three dots above a character - + ddot - + Icon -Two dots above a character +Two dots above a character - + dot - + Icon -Dot above a character +Dot above a character - + grave - + Icon -Accent to bottom right above a character +Accent to bottom right above a character - + hat - + Icon -"Roof" above a character +"Roof" above a character - + ital - + Icon -Italics +Italics - + nbold -Remove the Bold attribute +Remove the Bold attribute - + nitalic -Remove the Italics attribute +Remove the Italics attribute - + overline - + Icon -Horizontal bar above a character +Horizontal bar above a character - + overstrike - + Icon -Horizontal bar through a character +Horizontal bar through a character - + phantom - + Icon -Phantom character +Phantom character - + tilde - + Icon -Tilde above a character +Tilde above a character - + underline - + Icon -Horizontal bar below a character +Horizontal bar below a character - + vec - + Icon -Vector arrow above a character +Vector arrow above a character - + widehat - + Icon -wide roof, adjusts to the character size +wide roof, adjusts to the character size - + widetilde - + Icon -wide tilde, adjusts to the character size +wide tilde, adjusts to the character size - + widevec - + Icon -wide vector arrow, adjusts to the character size +wide vector arrow, adjusts to the character size
diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03091507.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03091507.xhp index 9e964b1267..5daefd580e 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03091507.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03091507.xhp @@ -31,329 +31,329 @@ other operators;list of -Others +Others -Typed command(s) +Typed command(s) Symbol in Elements pane -Meaning +Meaning - + <?> -Placeholder +Placeholder - + dotsaxis - + Icon -Math-axis ellipsis +Math-axis ellipsis - + dotsdown - + Icon -Downward diagonal ellipsis +Downward diagonal ellipsis - + dotslow - + Icon -Ellipsis +Ellipsis - + dotsup or dotsdiag - + Icon -Upward diagonal ellipsis +Upward diagonal ellipsis - + dotsvert - + Icon -Vertical ellipsis +Vertical ellipsis - + downarrow - + Icon -Down arrow +Down arrow - + exists - + Icon -Existential quantifier, there is at least one +Existential quantifier, there is at least one - + notexists - + Icon -Existential quantifier, there does not exist +Existential quantifier, there does not exist - + forall - + Icon -Universal quantifier, for all +Universal quantifier, for all - + hbar - + Icon -h with line over it +h with line over it - + im - + Icon -Imaginary part of a complex number +Imaginary part of a complex number - + infinity or infty - + Icon -Infinite +Infinite - + lambdabar - + Icon -Lambda with line over it +Lambda with line over it - + leftarrow - + Icon -Left arrow +Left arrow - + nabla - + Icon -Nabla vector +Nabla vector - + partial - + Icon -Partial derivative or set margin +Partial derivative or set margin - + re - + Icon -Real part of a complex number +Real part of a complex number - + rightarrow - + Icon -Right arrow +Right arrow - + uparrow - + Icon -Up arrow +Up arrow - + wp - + Icon -p function, Weierstrass p +p function, Weierstrass p
diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03091509.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03091509.xhp index d7038231d4..02d9b6194c 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03091509.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03091509.xhp @@ -30,255 +30,255 @@ formatting; reference list (Math) -MW changed index entryFormatting +MW changed index entryFormatting -Typed command(s) +Typed command(s) Symbol in Elements pane -Meaning +Meaning - + lsup - + Icon -Left exponent +Left exponent - + csup - + Icon -Exponent directly above a character +Exponent directly above a character - + ^ or sup or rsup - + Icon -Right exponent +Right exponent - + binom - + Icon -Binom +Binom - + newline - + Icon -New line +New line - + lsub - + Icon -Left index +Left index - + csub - + Icon -Index directly below a character +Index directly below a character - + _ or sub or rsub - + Icon -Right index +Right index - + stack{...} - + Icon -Stack +Stack - + ` - + Icon -Small space/small blank +Small space/small blank - + alignl - + Icon -Align left +Align left - + alignc - + Icon -Align to horizontal center +Align to horizontal center - + alignr - + Icon -Align right +Align right - + matrix{...} - + Icon -Matrix +Matrix - + ~ - + Icon -Wide space/gap +Wide space/gap - + nospace{e1 e2 ...} -Suppress horizontal space between elements +Suppress horizontal space between elements diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03091600.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03091600.xhp index 457aa773b3..653f0ad8e6 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03091600.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03091600.xhp @@ -64,277 +64,277 @@ -Other Symbols -Shows miscellaneous mathematical symbols. +Other Symbols +Shows miscellaneous mathematical symbols.
-Symbols in detail +Symbols in detail
- + Icon -Partial -Inserts the symbol for a partial differentiation. Command for the Commands window: partial +Partial +Inserts the symbol for a partial differentiation. Command for the Commands window: partial - + Icon -Infinity -Inserts the symbol for infinity. Command for the Commands window: infinity or infty +Infinity +Inserts the symbol for infinity. Command for the Commands window: infinity or infty - + Icon -Nabla -Inserts the symbol for a Nabla vector operator. Command for the Commands window: nabla +Nabla +Inserts the symbol for a Nabla vector operator. Command for the Commands window: nabla - + Icon -There exists -Inserts the symbol for an Existence quantor. Command for the Commands window: exists +There exists +Inserts the symbol for an Existence quantor. Command for the Commands window: exists - + Icon -There does not exist -Inserts the symbol for an Existence quantor. Command for the Commands window: notexists +There does not exist +Inserts the symbol for an Existence quantor. Command for the Commands window: notexists - + Icon -For all -Inserts the symbol for a universal quantifier "for all". Command for the Commands window: forall +For all +Inserts the symbol for a universal quantifier "for all". Command for the Commands window: forall - + Icon -h Bar -Inserts the symbol for the h-bar constant. Command for the Commands window: hbar +h Bar +Inserts the symbol for the h-bar constant. Command for the Commands window: hbar - + Icon -Lambda Bar -Inserts the symbol for a lambda-bar. Command for the Commands window: lambdabar +Lambda Bar +Inserts the symbol for a lambda-bar. Command for the Commands window: lambdabar - + Icon -Real Part -Inserts the symbol for the real part of a complex number. Command for the Commands window: re +Real Part +Inserts the symbol for the real part of a complex number. Command for the Commands window: re - + Icon -Imaginary Part -Inserts the symbol for the imaginary part of a complex number. Command for the Commands window: im +Imaginary Part +Inserts the symbol for the imaginary part of a complex number. Command for the Commands window: im - + Icon -Weierstrass p -This icon inserts a Weierstrass p-function symbol. Command for the Commands window: wp +Weierstrass p +This icon inserts a Weierstrass p-function symbol. Command for the Commands window: wp - + Icon -Left Arrow -This icon inserts a left arrow. Command for the Commands window: leftarrow +Left Arrow +This icon inserts a left arrow. Command for the Commands window: leftarrow - + Icon -Right Arrow -This icon inserts a right arrow. Command for the Commands window: rightarrow +Right Arrow +This icon inserts a right arrow. Command for the Commands window: rightarrow - + Icon -Up Arrow -This icon inserts an up arrow. Command for the Commands window: uparrow +Up Arrow +This icon inserts an up arrow. Command for the Commands window: uparrow - + Icon -Down Arrow -This icon inserts a down arrow. Command for the Commands window: downarrow +Down Arrow +This icon inserts a down arrow. Command for the Commands window: downarrow - + Icon -Ellipsis -This icon inserts an ellipsis (three low horizontal dots). Command for the Commands window: dotslow +Ellipsis +This icon inserts an ellipsis (three low horizontal dots). Command for the Commands window: dotslow - + Icon -Math-axis Ellipsis -This icon inserts an axis-ellipsis (three vertically centered horizontal dots). Command for the Commands window: dotsaxis +Math-axis Ellipsis +This icon inserts an axis-ellipsis (three vertically centered horizontal dots). Command for the Commands window: dotsaxis - + Icon -Vertical Ellipsis -This icon inserts a vertical ellipsis (three vertical dots). Command for the Commands window: dotsvert +Vertical Ellipsis +This icon inserts a vertical ellipsis (three vertical dots). Command for the Commands window: dotsvert - + Icon -Upward Diagonal Ellipsis -This icon inserts an upward diagonal ellipsis (three dots on the diagonal from the bottom left to the top right)Command for the Commands window: dotsup or dotsdiag +Upward Diagonal Ellipsis +This icon inserts an upward diagonal ellipsis (three dots on the diagonal from the bottom left to the top right)Command for the Commands window: dotsup or dotsdiag - + Icon -Downward Diagonal Ellipsis -This icon inserts a downward diagonal ellipsis (three dots on the diagonal from upper left to lower right). Command for the Commands window: dotsdown +Downward Diagonal Ellipsis +This icon inserts a downward diagonal ellipsis (three dots on the diagonal from upper left to lower right). Command for the Commands window: dotsdown
-A back epsilon can be inserted by typing backepsilon in the Commands window. -To insert a placeholder into your formula, type <?> in the Commands window. +A back epsilon can be inserted by typing backepsilon in the Commands window. +To insert a placeholder into your formula, type <?> in the Commands window. diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/05010000.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/05010000.xhp index 53ffec9b9f..997c097750 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/05010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/05010000.xhp @@ -36,45 +36,45 @@ -Fonts -Defines the fonts that can be applied to formula elements. +Fonts +Defines the fonts that can be applied to formula elements.
-Formula Fonts -You can define fonts for the variables, functions, numbers and inserted text that form the elements of your formula. -The list boxes in the Fonts dialog display a default font for all elements. To change to a different font, click Modify, then select the element type. A new dialog box appears. Select the desired font and check any desired attributes, then click OK. To set the changes as the default fonts, click the Default button. -If you want to mark individual text segments with a font other than that used for the whole text, then enter the Font command in the Commands window. +Formula Fonts +You can define fonts for the variables, functions, numbers and inserted text that form the elements of your formula. +The list boxes in the Fonts dialog display a default font for all elements. To change to a different font, click Modify, then select the element type. A new dialog box appears. Select the desired font and check any desired attributes, then click OK. To set the changes as the default fonts, click the Default button. +If you want to mark individual text segments with a font other than that used for the whole text, then enter the Font command in the Commands window. -Variables -You can select the fonts for the variables in your formula. For example, in the formula x=SIN(y), x and y are variables, and will reflect the assigned font. +Variables +You can select the fonts for the variables in your formula. For example, in the formula x=SIN(y), x and y are variables, and will reflect the assigned font. -Functions -Select the fonts for names and properties of functions. For example, the functions in the formula x=SIN(y) are =SIN( ). +Functions +Select the fonts for names and properties of functions. For example, the functions in the formula x=SIN(y) are =SIN( ). -Numbers -You can select the fonts for the numbers in your formula. +Numbers +You can select the fonts for the numbers in your formula. -Text -Define the fonts for the text in your formula here. -Custom Fonts -In this section of the Fonts dialog you can define fonts, with which you can format other text components in the formula. The three basic fonts Serif, Sans and Fixed are available. You can add any other font to each standard installed basic font. Every font installed on your system is available for you to use. Select the Modify button to expand the selection offered in the list box. -These custom fonts are used if you set a different font with the FONT command in the Commands window. +Text +Define the fonts for the text in your formula here. +Custom Fonts +In this section of the Fonts dialog you can define fonts, with which you can format other text components in the formula. The three basic fonts Serif, Sans and Fixed are available. You can add any other font to each standard installed basic font. Every font installed on your system is available for you to use. Select the Modify button to expand the selection offered in the list box. +These custom fonts are used if you set a different font with the FONT command in the Commands window. -Serif -You can specify the font to be used for the font serif format. Serifs are the small "guides" that can be seen, for example, at the bottom of a capital A when the Times serif font is used. Using serifs is quite helpful since it guides a reader's eye in a straight line and can speed up reading. +Serif +You can specify the font to be used for the font serif format. Serifs are the small "guides" that can be seen, for example, at the bottom of a capital A when the Times serif font is used. Using serifs is quite helpful since it guides a reader's eye in a straight line and can speed up reading. -Sans -You can specify the font to be used for sans font formatting. +Sans +You can specify the font to be used for sans font formatting. -Fixed -You can specify the font to be used for fixed font formatting. +Fixed +You can specify the font to be used for fixed font formatting. -Modify -Click one of the choices from this pop-up menu to access the Fonts dialog, where you can define the font and attributes for the respective formula and for custom fonts. +Modify +Click one of the choices from this pop-up menu to access the Fonts dialog, where you can define the font and attributes for the respective formula and for custom fonts. -Default -Click this button to save your changes as the default for all new formulas. After confirming the changes, click the Yes button. +Default +Click this button to save your changes as the default for all new formulas. After confirming the changes, click the Yes button. diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/05010100.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/05010100.xhp index 8569e321d5..3e77a406a4 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/05010100.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/05010100.xhp @@ -33,20 +33,20 @@ - Fonts - Use this dialog to select the font for the respective category in the Fonts dialog. + Fonts + Use this dialog to select the font for the respective category in the Fonts dialog.
- Font - Select a font from the list. - Example - You can see a preview of the selected font with its attributes. - Attributes - You can assign additional attributes to the selected font. - Bold - Check this box to assign the bold attribute to the font. - Italic - Check this box to assign the italic attribute to the font. + Font + Select a font from the list. + Example + You can see a preview of the selected font with its attributes. + Attributes + You can assign additional attributes to the selected font. + Bold + Check this box to assign the bold attribute to the font. + Italic + Check this box to assign the italic attribute to the font. diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/05020000.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/05020000.xhp index 0ff20fdb77..a91b0df59a 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/05020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/05020000.xhp @@ -33,28 +33,28 @@ sizes; of fonts in $[officename] Math -Font Sizes -Use this dialog to specify the font sizes for your formula. Select a base size and all elements of the formula will be scaled in relation to this base. +Font Sizes +Use this dialog to specify the font sizes for your formula. Select a base size and all elements of the formula will be scaled in relation to this base.
-Base size -All elements of a formula are proportionally scaled to the base size. To change the base size, select or type in the desired point (pt) size. You can also use other units of measure or other metrics, which are then automatically converted to points. -To permanently change the default size (12 pt) used in $[officename] Math, you must first set the size (for example, 11 pt) and then click the Default button. -Relative Sizes -In this section, you can determine the relative sizes for each type of element with reference to the base size. -Text -Select the size for text in a formula relative to the base size. -Indexes -Select the relative size for the indexes in a formula in proportion to the base size. -Functions -Select the relative size for names and other function elements in a formula in proportion to the base size. -Operators -Select the relative size of the mathematical operators in a formula in proportion to the base size. -Limits -Select the relative size for the limits in a formula in proportion to the base size. -Default -Click this button to save your changes as a default for all new formulas. A security response appears before saving any changes. +Base size +All elements of a formula are proportionally scaled to the base size. To change the base size, select or type in the desired point (pt) size. You can also use other units of measure or other metrics, which are then automatically converted to points. +To permanently change the default size (12 pt) used in $[officename] Math, you must first set the size (for example, 11 pt) and then click the Default button. +Relative Sizes +In this section, you can determine the relative sizes for each type of element with reference to the base size. +Text +Select the size for text in a formula relative to the base size. +Indexes +Select the relative size for the indexes in a formula in proportion to the base size. +Functions +Select the relative size for names and other function elements in a formula in proportion to the base size. +Operators +Select the relative size of the mathematical operators in a formula in proportion to the base size. +Limits +Select the relative size for the limits in a formula in proportion to the base size. +Default +Click this button to save your changes as a default for all new formulas. A security response appears before saving any changes. diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/05030000.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/05030000.xhp index 194f8be442..7f47576b03 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/05030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/05030000.xhp @@ -34,114 +34,114 @@ -Spacing -Use this dialog to determine the spacing between formula elements. The spacing is specified as a percentage in relation to the base size defined under Format - Font Size. +Spacing +Use this dialog to determine the spacing between formula elements. The spacing is specified as a percentage in relation to the base size defined under Format - Font Size.
-Use the Category button to determine the formula element for which you would like to specify the spacing. The appearance of the dialog depends on the selected category. A preview window shows you which spacing is modified through the respective boxes. +Use the Category button to determine the formula element for which you would like to specify the spacing. The appearance of the dialog depends on the selected category. A preview window shows you which spacing is modified through the respective boxes. -Category -This button allows you to select the category for which you would like to change the spacing. -Spacing -Defines the spacing between variables and operators, between lines, and between root signs and radicals. +Category +This button allows you to select the category for which you would like to change the spacing. +Spacing +Defines the spacing between variables and operators, between lines, and between root signs and radicals. -Spacing -Defines the spacing between variables and operators. +Spacing +Defines the spacing between variables and operators. -Line Spacing -Determines the spacing between lines. +Line Spacing +Determines the spacing between lines. -Root Spacing -Determines the spacing between the root sign and radicals. -Indexes -Defines the spacing for superscript and subscript indexes. +Root Spacing +Determines the spacing between the root sign and radicals. +Indexes +Defines the spacing for superscript and subscript indexes. -Superscript -Determines the spacing for superscript indexes. +Superscript +Determines the spacing for superscript indexes. -Subscript -Determines the spacing for subscript indexes. -Fractions -Defines the spacing between the fraction bar and the numerator or denominator. +Subscript +Determines the spacing for subscript indexes. +Fractions +Defines the spacing between the fraction bar and the numerator or denominator. -Numerator -Determines the spacing between the fraction bar and the numerator. +Numerator +Determines the spacing between the fraction bar and the numerator. -Denominator -Determines the spacing between the fraction bar and the denominator. -Fraction Bars -Defines the excess length and line weight of the fraction bar. +Denominator +Determines the spacing between the fraction bar and the denominator. +Fraction Bars +Defines the excess length and line weight of the fraction bar. -Excess length -Determines the excess length of the fraction line. +Excess length +Determines the excess length of the fraction line. -Weight -Determines the weight of the fraction line. -Limits -Defines the spacing between the sum symbol and the limit conditions. +Weight +Determines the weight of the fraction line. +Limits +Defines the spacing between the sum symbol and the limit conditions. -Upper limit -Determines the spacing between the sum symbol and the upper limit. +Upper limit +Determines the spacing between the sum symbol and the upper limit. -Lower limit -Determines the spacing between the sum symbol and the lower limit. -Brackets -Defines the spacing between brackets and the content. +Lower limit +Determines the spacing between the sum symbol and the lower limit. +Brackets +Defines the spacing between brackets and the content. -Excess size (left/right) -Determines the vertical distance between the upper edge of the contents and the upper end of the brackets. +Excess size (left/right) +Determines the vertical distance between the upper edge of the contents and the upper end of the brackets. -Spacing -Determines the horizontal distance between the contents and the upper end of the brackets. +Spacing +Determines the horizontal distance between the contents and the upper end of the brackets. -Scale all brackets -Scales all types of brackets. If you then enter ( a over b) in the Commands window, the brackets will surround the whole height of the argument. You normally achieve this effect by entering left ( a over b right ). +Scale all brackets +Scales all types of brackets. If you then enter ( a over b) in the Commands window, the brackets will surround the whole height of the argument. You normally achieve this effect by entering left ( a over b right ). -Excess size -Adjusts the percentage excess size. At 0 percent the brackets are set so that they surround the argument at the same height. The higher the entered value is, the larger the vertical gap between the contents of the brackets and the external border of the brackets. The field can only be used in combination with Scale all brackets. -Matrices -Defines the relative spacing for the elements in a matrix. +Excess size +Adjusts the percentage excess size. At 0 percent the brackets are set so that they surround the argument at the same height. The higher the entered value is, the larger the vertical gap between the contents of the brackets and the external border of the brackets. The field can only be used in combination with Scale all brackets. +Matrices +Defines the relative spacing for the elements in a matrix. -Line spacing -Determines the spacing between matrix elements in a row. +Line spacing +Determines the spacing between matrix elements in a row. -Column spacing -Determines the spacing between matrix elements in a column. -Symbols -Defines the spacing of symbols in relation to variables +Column spacing +Determines the spacing between matrix elements in a column. +Symbols +Defines the spacing of symbols in relation to variables -Primary height -Defines the height of the symbols in relation to the baseline. +Primary height +Defines the height of the symbols in relation to the baseline. -Minimum spacing -Determines the minimum distance between a symbol and variable. -Operators -Defines the spacing between operators and variables or numbers. +Minimum spacing +Determines the minimum distance between a symbol and variable. +Operators +Defines the spacing between operators and variables or numbers. -Excess size -Determines the height from the variable to the operator's upper edge. +Excess size +Determines the height from the variable to the operator's upper edge. -Spacing -Determines the horizontal distance between operators and variables. -Borders -Adds a border to your formula. This option is particularly useful if you want to integrate the formula into a text file in $[officename] Writer. When making settings, be sure that you do not use 0 as a size, since this creates viewing problems for text that surrounds the insertion point. +Spacing +Determines the horizontal distance between operators and variables. +Borders +Adds a border to your formula. This option is particularly useful if you want to integrate the formula into a text file in $[officename] Writer. When making settings, be sure that you do not use 0 as a size, since this creates viewing problems for text that surrounds the insertion point. -Left -The left border is positioned between the formula and background. +Left +The left border is positioned between the formula and background. -Right -The right border is positioned between the formula and background. +Right +The right border is positioned between the formula and background. -Top -The top border is positioned between the formula and background. +Top +The top border is positioned between the formula and background. -Bottom -The bottom border is positioned between the formula and background. +Bottom +The bottom border is positioned between the formula and background. -Default -Saves your changes as your default settings for all new formulas. A security response will appear before saving these changes. +Default +Saves your changes as your default settings for all new formulas. A security response will appear before saving these changes. diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/05040000.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/05040000.xhp index 5e61b34b40..74414d6b3a 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/05040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/05040000.xhp @@ -28,22 +28,22 @@ - aligning; multi-line formulasmulti-line formulas; aligningAlignment - You can define the alignment of multi-line formulas as well as formulas with several elements in one line. Create multi-line formulas by entering a NEWLINE command in the Commands window. + aligning; multi-line formulasmulti-line formulas; aligningAlignment + You can define the alignment of multi-line formulas as well as formulas with several elements in one line. Create multi-line formulas by entering a NEWLINE command in the Commands window.
- Horizontal - Specifies the type of horizontal alignment for multi-line formulas. - Left - Aligns the selected elements of a formula to the left. - Text is always aligned left. - Centered - Aligns the elements of a formula to the center. - Right - Aligns the elements of a formula to the right. - Default - Click here to save your changes as the default settings for new formulas. A security response will appear before saving. + Horizontal + Specifies the type of horizontal alignment for multi-line formulas. + Left + Aligns the selected elements of a formula to the left. + Text is always aligned left. + Centered + Aligns the elements of a formula to the center. + Right + Aligns the elements of a formula to the right. + Default + Click here to save your changes as the default settings for new formulas. A security response will appear before saving. diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/05050000.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/05050000.xhp index a3187f524a..cccd376546 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/05050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/05050000.xhp @@ -35,8 +35,8 @@ formulas; fit to text -Text Mode -Switches the text mode on or off. In text mode, formulas are displayed as the same height as a line of text. +Text Mode +Switches the text mode on or off. In text mode, formulas are displayed as the same height as a line of text.
diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp index 94ddbc6a92..db820346cb 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp @@ -34,49 +34,49 @@ new symbols in %PRODUCTNAME Math symbols; adding in %PRODUCTNAME Math -Edit Symbols -Use this dialog to add symbols to a symbol set, to edit symbol sets, or to modify symbol notations. You can also define new symbol sets, assign names to symbols, or to modify existing symbol sets. +Edit Symbols +Use this dialog to add symbols to a symbol set, to edit symbol sets, or to modify symbol notations. You can also define new symbol sets, assign names to symbols, or to modify existing symbol sets.
-Old Symbol -Select the name of the current symbol. The symbol, the name of the symbol, and the set that the symbol belongs to are displayed in the left preview pane at the bottom of the dialog box. +Old Symbol +Select the name of the current symbol. The symbol, the name of the symbol, and the set that the symbol belongs to are displayed in the left preview pane at the bottom of the dialog box. -Old Symbol Set -This list box contains the name of the current symbol set. If you want, you can also select a different symbol set. +Old Symbol Set +This list box contains the name of the current symbol set. If you want, you can also select a different symbol set. -Symbol -Lists the names for the symbols in the current symbol set. Select a name from the list or type a name for a newly added symbol. -Adding a New Symbol -To add a symbol to a symbol set, select a font in the Font box, and then click a symbol in symbols pane. In the Symbol box, type a name for the symbol. In the Symbol set list box, select a symbol set, or type a new name to create a new symbol set. The right preview pane displays the symbol that you selected. Click Add and then OK. -Modifying the Name of a Symbol -To change the name of a symbol, select the old name in the Old symbol list box. Then enter the new name in the Symbol box. Check whether the desired character is in the preview window before you click the Modify button. Click OK. +Symbol +Lists the names for the symbols in the current symbol set. Select a name from the list or type a name for a newly added symbol. +Adding a New Symbol +To add a symbol to a symbol set, select a font in the Font box, and then click a symbol in symbols pane. In the Symbol box, type a name for the symbol. In the Symbol set list box, select a symbol set, or type a new name to create a new symbol set. The right preview pane displays the symbol that you selected. Click Add and then OK. +Modifying the Name of a Symbol +To change the name of a symbol, select the old name in the Old symbol list box. Then enter the new name in the Symbol box. Check whether the desired character is in the preview window before you click the Modify button. Click OK. -Symbol Set -The Symbol set list box contains the names of all existing symbol sets. You can modify a symbol set or create a new one. -Creating a New Symbol Set -To create a new symbol set, type a name for it in the Symbol set list box and add at least one symbol. Click OK to close the dialog. The new symbol set is now available under the new name. +Symbol Set +The Symbol set list box contains the names of all existing symbol sets. You can modify a symbol set or create a new one. +Creating a New Symbol Set +To create a new symbol set, type a name for it in the Symbol set list box and add at least one symbol. Click OK to close the dialog. The new symbol set is now available under the new name. -Font -Displays the name of the current font and enables you to select a different font. +Font +Displays the name of the current font and enables you to select a different font. -Subset -If you selected a non-symbol font in the Font list box, you can select a Unicode subset in which to place your new or edited symbol. When a subset has been selected, all symbols belonging to this subset of the current symbol set are displayed in the symbols list above. +Subset +If you selected a non-symbol font in the Font list box, you can select a Unicode subset in which to place your new or edited symbol. When a subset has been selected, all symbols belonging to this subset of the current symbol set are displayed in the symbols list above. -Style -The current typeface is displayed. You can change the typeface by selecting one from the list box. +Style +The current typeface is displayed. You can change the typeface by selecting one from the list box. -Add -Click this button to add the symbol shown in the right preview window to the current symbol set. It will be saved under the name displayed in the Symbol list box. You must specify a name under Symbol or Symbol Set to be able to use this button. Names cannot be used more than once. +Add +Click this button to add the symbol shown in the right preview window to the current symbol set. It will be saved under the name displayed in the Symbol list box. You must specify a name under Symbol or Symbol Set to be able to use this button. Names cannot be used more than once. -Modify -Click this button to replace the name of the symbol shown in the left preview window (the old name is displayed in the Old symbol list box) with the new name you have entered in the Symbol list box. -Moving a Symbol to Another Symbol Set -As an example, to transfer the large ALPHA from the "Greek" set to the "Special" set, select the old set (Greek) and then the ALPHA symbol using the two top list boxes. The symbol appears in the left preview window. In the Symbol set list box, select the "Special" set. Click Modify and then OK. The ALPHA symbol is now only in the "Special" symbol set. +Modify +Click this button to replace the name of the symbol shown in the left preview window (the old name is displayed in the Old symbol list box) with the new name you have entered in the Symbol list box. +Moving a Symbol to Another Symbol Set +As an example, to transfer the large ALPHA from the "Greek" set to the "Special" set, select the old set (Greek) and then the ALPHA symbol using the two top list boxes. The symbol appears in the left preview window. In the Symbol set list box, select the "Special" set. Click Modify and then OK. The ALPHA symbol is now only in the "Special" symbol set. -Delete -Click to remove the symbol shown in the left preview window from the current symbol set. There will be no security query. Deleting the last remaining symbol of a symbol set also deletes the symbol set. -You can also click Cancel at any time to close the dialog without saving any of the changes. +Delete +Click to remove the symbol shown in the left preview window from the current symbol set. There will be no security query. Deleting the last remaining symbol of a symbol set also deletes the symbol set. +You can also click Cancel at any time to close the dialog without saving any of the changes. diff --git a/source/text/smath/02/03010000.xhp b/source/text/smath/02/03010000.xhp index 7708720c75..9dcc7be971 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/02/03010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/02/03010000.xhp @@ -31,11 +31,11 @@ cursor; in $[officename] Math -Formula Cursor -Use this icon on the Tools bar to turn the Formula Cursor on or off. The part of the formula where the cursor is positioned in the Commands window is marked with a thin border when the formula cursor is active. +Formula Cursor +Use this icon on the Tools bar to turn the Formula Cursor on or off. The part of the formula where the cursor is positioned in the Commands window is marked with a thin border when the formula cursor is active. -You can also click a position in the document to move the cursor to its corresponding position in the Commands window. -Double-clicking a character or symbol in the document moves the focus of the cursor to the Commands window and highlights its respective position. +You can also click a position in the document to move the cursor to its corresponding position in the Commands window. +Double-clicking a character or symbol in the document moves the focus of the cursor to the Commands window and highlights its respective position. diff --git a/source/text/smath/04/01020000.xhp b/source/text/smath/04/01020000.xhp index 278f15e869..c94745b97e 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/04/01020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/04/01020000.xhp @@ -33,47 +33,47 @@
shortcut keys; in formulas -Formula Shortcut Keys +Formula Shortcut Keys -A list of the shortcut keys specific to creating formulas is contained in this section. -The general shortcut keys in $[officename] also apply. +A list of the shortcut keys specific to creating formulas is contained in this section. +The general shortcut keys in $[officename] also apply.
-Shortcut Keys for Formula Functions -The following shortcut keys correspond to commands in the Edit and View menus. +Shortcut Keys for Formula Functions +The following shortcut keys correspond to commands in the Edit and View menus.
-F3 -Next Error +F3 +Next Error
-Shift+F3 -Previous Error +Shift+F3 +Previous Error
-F4 -Next Marker (Placeholder) -Shift+F4 -Previous Marker (Placeholder) +F4 +Next Marker (Placeholder) +Shift+F4 +Previous Marker (Placeholder)
-F9 -Update +F9 +Update
Navigation in the Elements pane
-Left or right arrow -Move left or right to the next category or function. +Left or right arrow +Move left or right to the next category or function.
-Enter key -Selects a category (within the category section) or inserts a function in the Commands window (within the function section). +Enter key +Selects a category (within the category section) or inserts a function in the Commands window (within the function section).
-Tab -Jump from the first category item to the first function of the category. +Tab +Jump from the first category item to the first function of the category.
-Shift+Tab -Jump from the last category item to the last function of the category. +Shift+Tab +Jump from the last category item to the last function of the category.
diff --git a/source/text/smath/guide/align.xhp b/source/text/smath/guide/align.xhp index 860822dce6..7f424df891 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/guide/align.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/guide/align.xhp @@ -33,14 +33,14 @@ aligning; characters in %PRODUCTNAME Math formula parts; manually aligning -Manually Aligning Formula Parts +Manually Aligning Formula Parts -How do you align characters in $[officename] Math quickly and easily? -To accomplish this, you must define empty groups and character strings. They do not require any space, but carry information that helps in the alignment process. -To create empty groups, enter curly brackets {} in the Commands window. In the following example, the goal is to achieve a line break so that the plus signs are beneath one another, even though one less character is entered in the upper line: -a+a+a+{} newline {}{}{}{}{}a+a+a+a -Empty character strings are a simple way to ensure that texts and formulas are left-aligned. They are defined using double inverted commas "" . Make sure you do not use any typographic inverted commas. Example: -"A further example." newline a+b newline ""c-d +How do you align characters in $[officename] Math quickly and easily? +To accomplish this, you must define empty groups and character strings. They do not require any space, but carry information that helps in the alignment process. +To create empty groups, enter curly brackets {} in the Commands window. In the following example, the goal is to achieve a line break so that the plus signs are beneath one another, even though one less character is entered in the upper line: +a+a+a+{} newline {}{}{}{}{}a+a+a+a +Empty character strings are a simple way to ensure that texts and formulas are left-aligned. They are defined using double inverted commas "" . Make sure you do not use any typographic inverted commas. Example: +"A further example." newline a+b newline ""c-d diff --git a/source/text/smath/guide/attributes.xhp b/source/text/smath/guide/attributes.xhp index 319cdc9a1b..a68c30b86d 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/guide/attributes.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/guide/attributes.xhp @@ -36,14 +36,14 @@ defaults;changing default formatting changing;default formatting -Changing Default Attributes +Changing Default Attributes -Can default formats in $[officename] Math be modified? -Some parts of formulas are always formatted bold or italic by default. -You can remove these attributes using "nbold" and "nitalic". Example: -a + b -nitalic a + bold b. -In the second formula, the a is not italic. The b is bold. You cannot change the plus sign by this method. +Can default formats in $[officename] Math be modified? +Some parts of formulas are always formatted bold or italic by default. +You can remove these attributes using "nbold" and "nitalic". Example: +a + b +nitalic a + bold b. +In the second formula, the a is not italic. The b is bold. You cannot change the plus sign by this method.
diff --git a/source/text/smath/guide/brackets.xhp b/source/text/smath/guide/brackets.xhp index 51d0651e4f..154115e565 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/guide/brackets.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/guide/brackets.xhp @@ -35,14 +35,14 @@ fractions in formulas merging;formula parts -Merging Formula Parts in Brackets +Merging Formula Parts in Brackets -Inserting fractions into formulas -In the case of a fraction whose numerator and denominator consist of a product, a sum, and so on, the values that belong together must be bracketed together. -Use the following syntax: -{a + c} over 2 = m -or -m = {a + c} over 2 +Inserting fractions into formulas +In the case of a fraction whose numerator and denominator consist of a product, a sum, and so on, the values that belong together must be bracketed together. +Use the following syntax: +{a + c} over 2 = m +or +m = {a + c} over 2
diff --git a/source/text/smath/guide/comment.xhp b/source/text/smath/guide/comment.xhp index 87bbde3334..102fb94c41 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/guide/comment.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/guide/comment.xhp @@ -33,12 +33,12 @@ comments; entering in $[officename] Math inserting;comments in $[officename] Math -Entering Comments +Entering Comments -How does one attach comments that don't appear in the document to a formula? -A comment begins with a double percent sign %%, and extends to the next line-end character (Enter key). Everything that lies in between is ignored and is not printed out. If there are percent signs in the text, they are treated as part of the text. -Example: -a^2+b^2=c^2 %% Pythagorean theorem. +How does one attach comments that don't appear in the document to a formula? +A comment begins with a double percent sign %%, and extends to the next line-end character (Enter key). Everything that lies in between is ignored and is not printed out. If there are percent signs in the text, they are treated as part of the text. +Example: +a^2+b^2=c^2 %% Pythagorean theorem.
diff --git a/source/text/smath/guide/keyboard.xhp b/source/text/smath/guide/keyboard.xhp index 978553ff68..21ee877c78 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/guide/keyboard.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/guide/keyboard.xhp @@ -32,31 +32,31 @@ accessibility; $[officename] Math shortcuts -Shortcuts ($[officename] Math Accessibility) +Shortcuts ($[officename] Math Accessibility) -You can control $[officename] Math without a mouse. -Inserting a Formula Directly -If you want to insert a formula into a text document, and you already know the correct writing, you can proceed as follows: +You can control $[officename] Math without a mouse. +Inserting a Formula Directly +If you want to insert a formula into a text document, and you already know the correct writing, you can proceed as follows: -Write the formula into your text +Write the formula into your text -Select the formula +Select the formula -Choose the command Insert - Object - Formula. +Choose the command Insert - Object - Formula. -Inserting a Formula using a Window +Inserting a Formula using a Window -If you want to use the $[officename] Math interface to edit a formula, choose the command Insert - Object - Formula without any text selected. +If you want to use the $[officename] Math interface to edit a formula, choose the command Insert - Object - Formula without any text selected. -The cursor waits in the Commands window and you can type the formula. +The cursor waits in the Commands window and you can type the formula. You can compose formulas using the Elements pane. Open it with the menu View - Elements if it is not already open. diff --git a/source/text/smath/guide/limits.xhp b/source/text/smath/guide/limits.xhp index 5e71f83764..b67b15c6e2 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/guide/limits.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/guide/limits.xhp @@ -32,13 +32,13 @@ limits;in sums/integrals integral limits -Working with Limits +Working with Limits -How can I define the limits in a Sum or Integral formula?i83226 -You want to insert a summation formula like "summation of s^k from k = 0 to n" at the cursor in a Writer text document. +How can I define the limits in a Sum or Integral formula?i83226 +You want to insert a summation formula like "summation of s^k from k = 0 to n" at the cursor in a Writer text document. -Choose Insert - Object - Formula. +Choose Insert - Object - Formula. You see the Math input window and the Elements pane on the left. @@ -48,38 +48,38 @@ In the lower part of the Elements pane, click the Sum icon. -To enable lower and upper limits, click additionally the Upper and Lower Limits icon. +To enable lower and upper limits, click additionally the Upper and Lower Limits icon. -In the input window, the first placeholder or marker is selected, and you can start to enter the lower limit: -k = 0 +In the input window, the first placeholder or marker is selected, and you can start to enter the lower limit: +k = 0 -Press F4 to advance to the next marker, and enter the upper limit: -n +Press F4 to advance to the next marker, and enter the upper limit: +n -Press F4 to advance to the next marker, and enter the summand: -s^k +Press F4 to advance to the next marker, and enter the summand: +s^k -Now the formula is complete. Click into your text document outside the formula to leave the formula editor. +Now the formula is complete. Click into your text document outside the formula to leave the formula editor. In the same way, you can enter an Integral formula with limits. When you click an icon from the Elements pane, the assigned text command is inserted in the input window. If you know the text commands, you can enter the commands directly in the input window. -Choose Insert - Object - Formula. +Choose Insert - Object - Formula. -Click in the input window and enter the following line: -int from{a} to{b} f(x)`dx +Click in the input window and enter the following line: +int from{a} to{b} f(x)`dx A small gap exists between f(x) and dx, which you can also enter using the Elements pane: select the Formats item from the list on the top, then the Small Gap icon. -If you don't like the font of the letters f and x, choose Format - Fonts and select other fonts. Click the Default button to use the new fonts as default from now on. -If you need the formula within a line of text, the limits increase the line height. You can choose Format - Text Mode to place the limits besides the Sum or Integral symbol, which reduces the line height. +If you don't like the font of the letters f and x, choose Format - Fonts and select other fonts. Click the Default button to use the new fonts as default from now on. +If you need the formula within a line of text, the limits increase the line height. You can choose Format - Text Mode to place the limits besides the Sum or Integral symbol, which reduces the line height. -Example of Integral and Sum ranges +Example of Integral and Sum ranges diff --git a/source/text/smath/guide/main.xhp b/source/text/smath/guide/main.xhp index a610191792..a8176eeddd 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/guide/main.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/guide/main.xhp @@ -32,10 +32,10 @@ $[officename] Math;general instructions instructions; $[officename] Math Equation Editor, see $[officename] Math -mw added a cross-referenceInstructions for Using $[officename] Math +mw added a cross-referenceInstructions for Using $[officename] Math -Entering and Editing Formulas +Entering and Editing Formulas diff --git a/source/text/smath/guide/newline.xhp b/source/text/smath/guide/newline.xhp index f9032451a6..5c39d92cf1 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/guide/newline.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/guide/newline.xhp @@ -34,10 +34,10 @@ formulas;line breaks wrapping text;in formulas -Entering Line Breaks +Entering Line Breaks -How to write formulas in $[officename] Math over two lines (with manual line break): -Create a line break by using the "newline" command. Everything coming after the line break is placed on the next line. +How to write formulas in $[officename] Math over two lines (with manual line break): +Create a line break by using the "newline" command. Everything coming after the line break is placed on the next line. diff --git a/source/text/smath/guide/parentheses.xhp b/source/text/smath/guide/parentheses.xhp index ebb29425b7..2864971050 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/guide/parentheses.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/guide/parentheses.xhp @@ -34,13 +34,13 @@ inserting;brackets distances between brackets -Inserting Brackets +Inserting Brackets -In %PRODUCTNAME Math, can brackets be shown separately so that the distance between them is freely definable? -You can set individual brackets using "left" and "right", but the distance between the brackets will not be fixed, as they adapt to the argument. Nevertheless, there is a way to display brackets so that the distance between them is fixed. To accomplish this, place a "\" (backslash) before the normal brackets. These brackets now behave like any other symbol and the alignment is the same as with other symbols: -left lbrace x right none -size *2 langle x rangle -size *2 \langle x \rangle +In %PRODUCTNAME Math, can brackets be shown separately so that the distance between them is freely definable? +You can set individual brackets using "left" and "right", but the distance between the brackets will not be fixed, as they adapt to the argument. Nevertheless, there is a way to display brackets so that the distance between them is fixed. To accomplish this, place a "\" (backslash) before the normal brackets. These brackets now behave like any other symbol and the alignment is the same as with other symbols: +left lbrace x right none +size *2 langle x rangle +size *2 \langle x \rangle
diff --git a/source/text/smath/guide/text.xhp b/source/text/smath/guide/text.xhp index 46d058c2f1..4191b482b6 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/guide/text.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/guide/text.xhp @@ -33,18 +33,18 @@ direct text; entering in $[officename] Math inserting;text in $[officename] Math -Entering Text +Entering Text -How to enter direct text strings that do not get interpreted? -Some text strings get interpreted as operators automatically. Sometimes this is not what you want. If you want to write W* (a letter with a superscripted asterisk), the asterisk will be interpreted as a multiplication operator. Enclose the direct text within double quotes or add spaceholders. -Examples:collected from several issues: i78812, i9167, i21484, i25573 -An imported MathType formula contains the following string -W rSup { size 8{*} } -If you have set up Math to convert imported MathType formulas (in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - Microsoft Office), you see the formula with a placeholder instead of the asterisk. -Change {*} to {} * {} as in the following formula: -W rSup { size 8{} * {} } -You can also use W^"*" to enter the character as direct text. -Some formulas start with an = sign. Use "=" to enter that character as direct text. +How to enter direct text strings that do not get interpreted? +Some text strings get interpreted as operators automatically. Sometimes this is not what you want. If you want to write W* (a letter with a superscripted asterisk), the asterisk will be interpreted as a multiplication operator. Enclose the direct text within double quotes or add spaceholders. +Examples:collected from several issues: i78812, i9167, i21484, i25573 +An imported MathType formula contains the following string +W rSup { size 8{*} } +If you have set up Math to convert imported MathType formulas (in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - Microsoft Office), you see the formula with a placeholder instead of the asterisk. +Change {*} to {} * {} as in the following formula: +W rSup { size 8{} * {} } +You can also use W^"*" to enter the character as direct text. +Some formulas start with an = sign. Use "=" to enter that character as direct text.
diff --git a/source/text/smath/main0000.xhp b/source/text/smath/main0000.xhp index 8e76dff23d..621fdcb8db 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/main0000.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/main0000.xhp @@ -29,19 +29,19 @@ -Welcome to the $[officename] Math Help -How to Work With $[officename] Math +Welcome to the $[officename] Math Help +How to Work With $[officename] Math -Formula Reference Tables +Formula Reference Tables -$[officename] Math Menus, Toolbars, and Keys +$[officename] Math Menus, Toolbars, and Keys -Have a look at www.dmaths.org for a set of additional %PRODUCTNAME Math icons and macros. -Help about the Help +Have a look at www.dmaths.org for a set of additional %PRODUCTNAME Math icons and macros. +Help about the Help diff --git a/source/text/smath/main0100.xhp b/source/text/smath/main0100.xhp index 97a1b5a566..c006e164e2 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/main0100.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/main0100.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ diff --git a/source/text/smath/main0101.xhp b/source/text/smath/main0101.xhp index 8e52f2c67e..cf4d22acab 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/main0101.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/main0101.xhp @@ -33,31 +33,31 @@
-File -This menu contains the general commands for working with formula documents, such as open, save and print. +File +This menu contains the general commands for working with formula documents, such as open, save and print.
-Open +Open -Wizards -Use a Wizard to create interactive documents, such as professional letters and faxes, into which you can insert your saved formulas. +Wizards +Use a Wizard to create interactive documents, such as professional letters and faxes, into which you can insert your saved formulas. -Save As +Save As -Versions +Versions -Properties +Properties -Print +Print -Printer Setup +Printer Setup diff --git a/source/text/smath/main0102.xhp b/source/text/smath/main0102.xhp index 5cfbde7247..123e8afcc2 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/main0102.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/main0102.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Edit - The commands in this menu are used to edit formulas. In addition to basic commands, (for example, copying contents) there are functions specific to $[officename] Math such as searching for placeholders or errors. + Edit + The commands in this menu are used to edit formulas. In addition to basic commands, (for example, copying contents) there are functions specific to $[officename] Math such as searching for placeholders or errors.
diff --git a/source/text/smath/main0103.xhp b/source/text/smath/main0103.xhp index 5d9ce47b03..e5dcee5144 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/main0103.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/main0103.xhp @@ -31,10 +31,10 @@
-View +View Sets the display scale and defines which elements you want to be visible. Most of the commands that you can enter into the Commands window can also be accessed through a mouse click if you have already opened the Elements pane with View - Elements.
-Zoom +Zoom diff --git a/source/text/smath/main0105.xhp b/source/text/smath/main0105.xhp index f0693bc813..74c6db90a5 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/main0105.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/main0105.xhp @@ -33,16 +33,16 @@
- Format - This menu contains commands needed to format formulas. + Format + This menu contains commands needed to format formulas.
- Fonts + Fonts - Font Size + Font Size - Spacing + Spacing - Alignment + Alignment diff --git a/source/text/smath/main0107.xhp b/source/text/smath/main0107.xhp index 770ac064bd..396e89ef2e 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/main0107.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/main0107.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Window - In the Window menu, you can open a new window and see the document list. + Window + In the Window menu, you can open a new window and see the document list.
diff --git a/source/text/smath/main0200.xhp b/source/text/smath/main0200.xhp index 09ecbc1f3a..16cda8c5ab 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/main0200.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/main0200.xhp @@ -33,9 +33,9 @@
-Toolbars +Toolbars -The default toolbars available when working with an activated formula document in $[officename] Math are described here. You can customize the toolbars to meet your requirements by moving, deleting or adding new icons. +The default toolbars available when working with an activated formula document in $[officename] Math are described here. You can customize the toolbars to meet your requirements by moving, deleting or adding new icons.
diff --git a/source/text/smath/main0202.xhp b/source/text/smath/main0202.xhp index 00734ec864..08643ce062 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/main0202.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/main0202.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
-Status Bar -The status bar displays information about the active document. +Status Bar +The status bar displays information about the active document.
diff --git a/source/text/smath/main0203.xhp b/source/text/smath/main0203.xhp index 4a0dc81fff..a1f1b7e6c2 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/main0203.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/main0203.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
-Tools Bar -The Tools bar contains frequently used functions. +Tools Bar +The Tools bar contains frequently used functions.
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ -Formula Cursor +Formula Cursor diff --git a/source/text/smath/main0503.xhp b/source/text/smath/main0503.xhp index e2fbe4a203..1624cf66a5 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/main0503.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/main0503.xhp @@ -31,22 +31,22 @@
-$[officename] Math Features +$[officename] Math Features -This section contains an overview of some of the important functions and capabilities that $[officename] Math offers. +This section contains an overview of some of the important functions and capabilities that $[officename] Math offers.
-$[officename] Math provides numerous operators, functions and formatting assistants to help you create formulas. These are all listed in a selection window, in which you can click the required element with the mouse to insert the object into your work. There is an exhaustive reference list and numerous samples contained in the Help. -Creating a Formula -As with charts and images, formulas are created as objects within a document. Inserting a formula into a document automatically starts $[officename] Math. You can create, edit and format the formula using a large selection of predefined symbols and functions. -Typing a Formula Directly -If you are familiar with the $[officename] Math language, you can also type a formula directly into the document. For example, type this formula into a text document: "a sup 2 + b sup 2 = c sup 2". Select this text and choose Insert - Object - Formula. The text will be converted into a formatted formula. -Formulas cannot be calculated in $[officename] Math because it is a formula editor (for writing and showing formulas) and not a calculation program. Use spreadsheets to calculate formulas, or for simple calculations use the text document calculation function. -Creating a Formula in the Commands Window +$[officename] Math provides numerous operators, functions and formatting assistants to help you create formulas. These are all listed in a selection window, in which you can click the required element with the mouse to insert the object into your work. There is an exhaustive reference list and numerous samples contained in the Help. +Creating a Formula +As with charts and images, formulas are created as objects within a document. Inserting a formula into a document automatically starts $[officename] Math. You can create, edit and format the formula using a large selection of predefined symbols and functions. +Typing a Formula Directly +If you are familiar with the $[officename] Math language, you can also type a formula directly into the document. For example, type this formula into a text document: "a sup 2 + b sup 2 = c sup 2". Select this text and choose Insert - Object - Formula. The text will be converted into a formatted formula. +Formulas cannot be calculated in $[officename] Math because it is a formula editor (for writing and showing formulas) and not a calculation program. Use spreadsheets to calculate formulas, or for simple calculations use the text document calculation function. +Creating a Formula in the Commands Window -Use the $[officename] Math Commands window to enter and edit formulas. As you make entries in the Commands window, you see the results in the document. To maintain an overview when creating long and complicated formulas, use the Formula Cursor on the Tools bar. When this function is activated, the cursor location within the Commands window is also shown in the text window. -Individual Symbols -You can create your own symbols and import characters from other fonts. You can add new symbols to the basic catalog of $[officename] Math symbols, or create your own special catalogs. Numerous special characters are also available. -Formulas in Context +Use the $[officename] Math Commands window to enter and edit formulas. As you make entries in the Commands window, you see the results in the document. To maintain an overview when creating long and complicated formulas, use the Formula Cursor on the Tools bar. When this function is activated, the cursor location within the Commands window is also shown in the text window. +Individual Symbols +You can create your own symbols and import characters from other fonts. You can add new symbols to the basic catalog of $[officename] Math symbols, or create your own special catalogs. Numerous special characters are also available. +Formulas in Context To make working with formulas easier, use the context menus, which can be called up with a right mouse click. This applies especially to the Commands window. This context menu contains all the commands that are found in the Elements pane, and also operators, and so on, which can be inserted into your formula by mouse-click without having to key them into the Commands window. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/00/00000004.xhp b/source/text/swriter/00/00000004.xhp index fee3d7b128..78c0e7f7ed 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/00/00000004.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/00/00000004.xhp @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ - To access this function... + To access this function...
@@ -40,10 +40,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Wrap Off + Wrap Off @@ -56,10 +56,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Wrap On + Wrap On @@ -72,10 +72,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Wrap Through + Wrap Through @@ -88,10 +88,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Jump to Previous Script + Jump to Previous Script @@ -104,10 +104,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Jump to Next Script + Jump to Next Script diff --git a/source/text/swriter/00/00000401.xhp b/source/text/swriter/00/00000401.xhp index 4d287ced31..0798aca426 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/00/00000401.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/00/00000401.xhp @@ -29,32 +29,32 @@ -File Menu -Menu File - Export +File Menu +Menu File - Export -Choose File - Send - Outline to Presentation +Choose File - Send - Outline to Presentation -Choose File - Send - Outline to Clipboard +Choose File - Send - Outline to Clipboard -Choose File - Send - Create AutoAbstract +Choose File - Send - Create AutoAbstract -Choose File - Send - AutoAbstract to Presentation +Choose File - Send - AutoAbstract to Presentation -Choose File - Send - Create HTML Document +Choose File - Send - Create HTML Document
-Insert at least one address database field into a text document, then start printing the document. Answer "Yes" to the question whether you want to print a form letter.i80170 +Insert at least one address database field into a text document, then start printing the document. Answer "Yes" to the question whether you want to print a form letter.i80170
- + Icon -Mail Merge +Mail Merge
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/00/00000402.xhp b/source/text/swriter/00/00000402.xhp index 4dec7acb12..97ba2fd1b0 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/00/00000402.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/00/00000402.xhp @@ -29,46 +29,46 @@ -Edit Menu +Edit Menu
Choose Tools - AutoText -Command +Command Ctrl+F3 -On the Insert toolbar, click +On the Insert toolbar, click
- + Icon -AutoText +AutoText
-Choose Edit - Exchange Database +Choose Edit - Exchange Database -Choose Edit - Fields +Choose Edit - Fields -Choose Edit - Footnotes +Choose Edit - Footnotes
-Choose Edit - Index Entry +Choose Edit - Index Entry -Open context menu - choose Index Entry +Open context menu - choose Index Entry
-Choose Format - Sections +Choose Format - Sections Choose Tools - AutoText - AutoText - Rename -Choose Edit - Bibliography Entry +Choose Edit - Bibliography Entry -Choose Edit - Selection Mode +Choose Edit - Selection Mode Choose Edit - Direct Cursor Mode diff --git a/source/text/swriter/00/00000404.xhp b/source/text/swriter/00/00000404.xhp index 4eec5007e3..6470b1519c 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/00/00000404.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/00/00000404.xhp @@ -27,8 +27,8 @@ -Insert Menu -Choose Insert - Manual Break +Insert Menu +Choose Insert - Manual Break
Choose Insert - Field @@ -43,19 +43,19 @@ Choose Insert - Field - Author
Choose Insert - Field - More Fields -Command +Command Ctrl+F2 -On Insert toolbar, click +On Insert toolbar, click
- + Icon -Insert Fields +Insert Fields
@@ -72,44 +72,44 @@ Choose Insert - Field - More Fields - Variables tab Choose Insert - Field - More Fields - Database tab
-Choose Insert - Section +Choose Insert - Section -Open Insert toolbar, click +Open Insert toolbar, click
- + Icon -Section +Section
-Choose Insert - Section - Section tab or choose Format - Sections +Choose Insert - Section - Section tab or choose Format - Sections -Choose Insert - Section - Indents tab or choose Format - Sections +Choose Insert - Section - Indents tab or choose Format - Sections
Choose Insert - Footnote and Endnote - Footnote or Endnote -Open context menu - choose Footnote/Endnote (inserted Footnote/Endnote) -Open Insert toolbar, click +Open context menu - choose Footnote/Endnote (inserted Footnote/Endnote) +Open Insert toolbar, click
- + Icon -Insert Footnote Directly +Insert Footnote Directly
@@ -120,67 +120,67 @@ - + Icon -Insert Endnote Directly +Insert Endnote Directly
-Choose Insert - Caption +Choose Insert - Caption -Open context menu - choose Caption +Open context menu - choose Caption
-Choose Insert - Caption - Options +Choose Insert - Caption - Options -Open context menu - choose Caption - Options +Open context menu - choose Caption - Options
-Choose Insert - Bookmark +Choose Insert - Bookmark -Open Insert toolbar, click +Open Insert toolbar, click
- + Icon -Bookmark +Bookmark
-Choose Insert - Script (only HTML documents) +Choose Insert - Script (only HTML documents) Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index
Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Index Entry -Open Insert toolbar, click +Open Insert toolbar, click
- + Icon -Entry +Entry
@@ -233,30 +233,30 @@ Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Styles tab -Choose Insert - Envelope +Choose Insert - Envelope -Choose Insert - Envelope - Envelope tab +Choose Insert - Envelope - Envelope tab -Choose Insert - Envelope - Format tab +Choose Insert - Envelope - Format tab -Choose Insert - Envelope - Printer tab +Choose Insert - Envelope - Printer tab
-Choose Insert - Frame +Choose Insert - Frame Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties -Open Insert toolbar, click +Open Insert toolbar, click
- + Icon -Insert Frame Manually +Insert Frame Manually
@@ -264,43 +264,43 @@
-Choose Insert - Table +Choose Insert - Table -Command +Command Ctrl+F12 -Open Insert toolbar, click +Open Insert toolbar, click
- + Icon -Table +Table
-Choose Insert - Horizontal Rule +Choose Insert - Horizontal Rule
-Choose Insert - File +Choose Insert - File -Open Insert toolbar, click +Open Insert toolbar, click
- + Icon -File +File
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp b/source/text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp index c3142c025a..5c9acdd419 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp @@ -27,47 +27,47 @@ - Format Menu + Format Menu
- Choose Format - Paragraph - Drop Caps tab + Choose Format - Paragraph - Drop Caps tab Choose View - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New - Drop Caps tab
- Choose Format - Paragraph - Text Flow tab + Choose Format - Paragraph - Text Flow tab Choose View - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New - Text Flow tab - Choose Edit - Find & Replace - Format - Text Flow tab + Choose Edit - Find & Replace - Format - Text Flow tab
- Right-click a paragraph with style Text body. Choose Edit Paragraph Style - Condition tab + Right-click a paragraph with style Text body. Choose Edit Paragraph Style - Condition tab
- Open Styles and Formatting window. Click the New Style from Selection icon and keep the mouse button pressed. Choose Load Styles from the submenu. + Open Styles and Formatting window. Click the New Style from Selection icon and keep the mouse button pressed. Choose Load Styles from the submenu.
- Choose Format - Page + Choose Format - Page Choose View - Styles and Formatting - open context menu New/Modify (for Page Styles)
- Choose Format - Paragraph - Outline & Numbering tab + Choose Format - Paragraph - Outline & Numbering tab Choose View - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New - Outline & Numbering tab (Paragraph Styles)
- Choose Format - Sections - Options button + Choose Format - Sections - Options button
- Choose Format - Page - Columns tab + Choose Format - Page - Columns tab Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Columns tab Choose View - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New - Columns tab - Choose Insert - Frame - Frame - Columns tab - Choose Insert/Format - Section(s) - Columns tab + Choose Insert - Frame - Frame - Columns tab + Choose Insert/Format - Section(s) - Columns tab
- Choose Format - Page - Footnote tab + Choose Format - Page - Footnote tab Choose View - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New - Footnote tab
- Choose Insert - Section - Footnotes/Endnotes tab - Choose Format - Sections - Options button Footnotes/Endnotes tab + Choose Insert - Section - Footnotes/Endnotes tab + Choose Format - Sections - Options button Footnotes/Endnotes tab
Choose View - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New (for Paragraph Styles) @@ -81,33 +81,33 @@
Choose View - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New (for List Styles)
- Choose Format - AutoCorrect - While Typing + Choose Format - AutoCorrect - While Typing - Choose Format - AutoCorrect + Choose Format - AutoCorrect - Choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply + Choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply - Choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply and Edit Changes + Choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply and Edit Changes Choose Table - AutoFormat Styles (with cursor in a table)
- Choose Format - Image + Choose Format - Image - Choose Insert - Image - From File - Properties button - Choose Insert - Image - From File (when graphics are selected) + Choose Insert - Image - From File - Properties button + Choose Insert - Image - From File (when graphics are selected) - On the Image Bar (when images are selected), click + On the Image Bar (when images are selected), click
- + Icon - Graphics Properties + Graphics Properties
@@ -115,45 +115,45 @@
- Choose Format - Image - Type tab + Choose Format - Image - Type tab Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Type tabUFI: removed some lines with Format-Object, see #i64150 Choose View - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New - Type tab - Choose Insert - Frame - Frame - Type tab + Choose Insert - Frame - Frame - Type tab
- Choose Format - Image - Properties - Wrap tab + Choose Format - Image - Properties - Wrap tab Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Wrap tab - Choose Insert - Frame - Frame - Wrap tab - Choose Format - Wrap - Edit - Wrap tab + Choose Insert - Frame - Frame - Wrap tab + Choose Format - Wrap - Edit - Wrap tab
- Choose Format - Wrap - Edit Contour + Choose Format - Wrap - Edit Contour
- Choose Format - Image - Hyperlink tab + Choose Format - Image - Hyperlink tab Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Hyperlink tab - Choose Insert - Frame - Frame - Hyperlink tab + Choose Insert - Frame - Frame - Hyperlink tab
- Choose Format - Image - Options tab + Choose Format - Image - Options tab Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Options tab Choose View - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New - Options tab - Choose Insert - Frame - Frame - Options tab + Choose Insert - Frame - Frame - Options tab
- Choose Format - Image - Image tab + Choose Format - Image - Image tab
- Choose Insert/Format - Image - Macro tab + Choose Insert/Format - Image - Macro tab Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Macro tab Choose Tools - AutoText - AutoText (button) - Macro - Choose Edit - ImageMap - open context menu - Macro + Choose Edit - ImageMap - open context menu - Macro - Choose Format - Character - Hyperlink tab - Events button + Choose Format - Character - Hyperlink tab - Events button
Choose Table - Properties - Choose Table - Split Table + Choose Table - Split Table - Choose Table - Merge Table + Choose Table - Merge Table Choose Table - Properties - Table tab @@ -161,22 +161,22 @@ Choose Table - Properties - Text Flow tab - Right-click in a table, choose Cell + Right-click in a table, choose Cell
- Choose Table - Merge Cells + Choose Table - Merge Cells - On the Table Bar, click + On the Table Bar, click
- + Icon - Merge Cells + Merge Cells
@@ -184,50 +184,50 @@
- Choose Table - Split Cells + Choose Table - Split Cells - On the Table Bar, click + On the Table Bar, click
- + Icon - Split Cells + Split Cells
- In the context menu of a cell, choose Cell - Protect + In the context menu of a cell, choose Cell - Protect
- In the context menu of a cell, choose Cell - Unprotect + In the context menu of a cell, choose Cell - Unprotect - Open context menu in Navigator for tables + Open context menu in Navigator for tables
- In the context menu of a cell, choose Row + In the context menu of a cell, choose Row - In the context menu of a cell, choose Row - Height + In the context menu of a cell, choose Row - Height
- Choose Table - Autofit - Optimal Row Height + Choose Table - Autofit - Optimal Row Height Open Optimize Size toolbar from Table Bar, click
- + Icon - Optimal Row Height + Optimal Row Height
@@ -235,65 +235,65 @@
- Choose Table - Autofit - Distribute Rows Equally + Choose Table - Autofit - Distribute Rows Equally Open Optimize Size toolbar from Table Bar, click
- + Icon - Distribute Rows Equally + Distribute Rows Equally
- Choose Table - Select - Row + Choose Table - Select - Row
- Choose Table - Delete - Rows + Choose Table - Delete - Rows - On Table Bar, click + On Table Bar, click
- + Icon - Delete Row + Delete Row
- In the context menu of a cell, choose Column + In the context menu of a cell, choose Column - In the context menu of a cell, choose Column - Width + In the context menu of a cell, choose Column - Width
- Choose Table - Autofit - Optimal Column Width + Choose Table - Autofit - Optimal Column Width Open Optimize Size toolbar from Table Bar, click
- + Icon - Optimal Column Width + Optimal Column Width
@@ -301,71 +301,71 @@
- Choose Table - Autofit - Distribute Columns Equally + Choose Table - Autofit - Distribute Columns Equally Open Optimize Size toolbar from Table Bar, click
- + Icon - Space Columns Equally + Space Columns Equally
- Choose Table - Select - Column + Choose Table - Select - Column
- Choose Table - Insert - Columns + Choose Table - Insert - Columns - Choose Table - Insert - Rows + Choose Table - Insert - Rows - On Table Bar, click + On Table Bar, click - + Icon - Insert Column + Insert Column - + Icon - Insert Row + Insert Row
- Choose Table - Delete - Columns + Choose Table - Delete - Columns - On Table Bar, click + On Table Bar, click
- + Icon - Delete Column + Delete Column
@@ -379,12 +379,12 @@ - + Icon - Object Properties + Object Properties
@@ -395,19 +395,19 @@ - + Icon - Frame Properties + Frame Properties
- Menu Format - Page - tab Text Grid, if Asian language support is enabled + Menu Format - Page - tab Text Grid, if Asian language support is enabled
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/00/00000406.xhp b/source/text/swriter/00/00000406.xhp index 58bf2452dc..9bb857f30f 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/00/00000406.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/00/00000406.xhp @@ -27,16 +27,16 @@ -Tools Menu -Choose Tools - Language - Hyphenation +Tools Menu +Choose Tools - Language - Hyphenation -Choose Tools - Word Count +Choose Tools - Word Count -Choose Tools - Outline Numbering +Choose Tools - Outline Numbering -Choose Tools - Outline Numbering - Numbering tab +Choose Tools - Outline Numbering - Numbering tab -Choose Tools - Line Numbering (not for HTML format) +Choose Tools - Line Numbering (not for HTML format) Choose Tools - Footnotes and Endnotes @@ -44,48 +44,48 @@ Choose Tools - Footnotes and Endnotes - Endnotes tab -Choose Table - Convert - Text to Table +Choose Table - Convert - Text to Table -Choose Tools - Sort +Choose Tools - Sort
-Choose Tools - Calculate +Choose Tools - Calculate -Command +Command Ctrl + plus sign
-Choose Tools - Update +Choose Tools - Update -Choose Tools - Update - Reformat Pages +Choose Tools - Update - Reformat Pages -Choose Tools - Update - Current Index +Choose Tools - Update - Current Index -Choose Tools - Update - All Indexes and Tables +Choose Tools - Update - All Indexes and Tables -Choose Tools - Update - Update All +Choose Tools - Update - Update All
-Choose Tools - Update - Fields +Choose Tools - Update - Fields -F9 key +F9 key
-Choose Tools - Update - Links +Choose Tools - Update - Links -Choose Tools - Update - All Charts +Choose Tools - Update - All Charts
-Choose Tools - Mail Merge Wizard -Click the Mail Merge icon on the Mail Merge bar: -Click the Mail Merge icon on the Table Data bar: +Choose Tools - Mail Merge Wizard +Click the Mail Merge icon on the Mail Merge bar: +Click the Mail Merge icon on the Table Data bar: - + Icon -Mail Merge +Mail Merge
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/01150000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/01150000.xhp index 7d52e5aff4..a2d3c23844 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/01150000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/01150000.xhp @@ -31,61 +31,61 @@ -Mail Merge -The Mail Merge dialog helps you in printing and saving form letters. +Mail Merge +The Mail Merge dialog helps you in printing and saving form letters.
During printing, the database information replaces the corresponding database fields (placeholders). For more information about inserting database fields refer to the Database tab page under Insert - Field - More Fields.db browser explorer -Select a database and table.db browser records +Select a database and table.db browser records -Records -Determines the number of records for printing the form letter. One letter will be printed for each record. -All -Processes all the records from the database. -Selected records -Processes only the marked records from the database. This option is only available when you have previously marked the necessary records in the database. +Records +Determines the number of records for printing the form letter. One letter will be printed for each record. +All +Processes all the records from the database. +Selected records +Processes only the marked records from the database. This option is only available when you have previously marked the necessary records in the database. -From: -Specify the number of the first record to be printed. -To: -Specify the number of the last record to be printed. -Output -Determines whether to send your form letters to a printer or save them to a file. -Printer -Prints the form letters. -File -Saves the form letters in files. +From: +Specify the number of the first record to be printed. +To: +Specify the number of the last record to be printed. +Output +Determines whether to send your form letters to a printer or save them to a file. +Printer +Prints the form letters. +File +Saves the form letters in files. Save as single document -Create one big document containing all data records.save as individual documents +Create one big document containing all data records.save as individual documents Save as individual documents -Create one document for every one data record. +Create one document for every one data record. Generate file name from database -Generate each file name from data contained in a database. +Generate each file name from data contained in a database. Field -Uses the content of the selected database field as the file name for the form letter. +Uses the content of the selected database field as the file name for the form letter. -Path -Specifies the path to store the form letters. +Path +Specifies the path to store the form letters. -... -Opens the Select Path dialog. +... +Opens the Select Path dialog. File format -Select the file format to store the resulting document. +Select the file format to store the resulting document. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/01160100.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/01160100.xhp index 8dd3ea8956..b9a95e0e1e 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/01160100.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/01160100.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
-Outline to Presentation -Sends the outline of the active document to a new presentation document. +Outline to Presentation +Sends the outline of the active document to a new presentation document.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/01160200.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/01160200.xhp index f5f28ba2ee..e0c26bb6bf 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/01160200.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/01160200.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
-Outline to Clipboard -Sends the outline of a document to the clipboard in Rich Text Format (RTF). +Outline to Clipboard +Sends the outline of a document to the clipboard in Rich Text Format (RTF).
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/01160300.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/01160300.xhp index f4e4673272..789315e213 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/01160300.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/01160300.xhp @@ -32,18 +32,18 @@ -Create AutoAbstract - +Create AutoAbstract + Copies the headings and a number of subsequent paragraphs in the active document to a new AutoAbstract text document. An AutoAbstract is useful for obtaining an overview of long documents. You can specify the number of outline levels as well as the number of paragraphs displayed therein. All levels and paragraphs under the respective settings are hidden.
-Included Outline Levels -Enter the extent of the outline levels to be copied to the new document. For example, if you choose 4 levels, all paragraphs formatted with Heading 1 to Heading 4 are included, along with the number of subsequent paragraphs specified in Subpoints per Level. +Included Outline Levels +Enter the extent of the outline levels to be copied to the new document. For example, if you choose 4 levels, all paragraphs formatted with Heading 1 to Heading 4 are included, along with the number of subsequent paragraphs specified in Subpoints per Level. -Subpoints per Level -Specify the maximum number of consecutive paragraphs to be included in the AutoAbstract document after each heading. All of the paragraphs up to the maximum defined are included until the next paragraph with a Heading Style is reached. +Subpoints per Level +Specify the maximum number of consecutive paragraphs to be included in the AutoAbstract document after each heading. All of the paragraphs up to the maximum defined are included until the next paragraph with a Heading Style is reached. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/01160400.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/01160400.xhp index 781314a032..d085659f90 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/01160400.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/01160400.xhp @@ -33,15 +33,15 @@
-AutoAbstract to Presentation -Opens the current document as a $[officename] Impress presentation. The current document must contain at least one predefined heading paragraph style. +AutoAbstract to Presentation +Opens the current document as a $[officename] Impress presentation. The current document must contain at least one predefined heading paragraph style.
-Included Outline Levels -Enter the number of outline levels to include in the new presentation. For example, if you choose one level, only the paragraphs that follow the "Heading 1" paragraph style are included. -Subpoints per Level -Enter the number of paragraphs that you want to include below each outline level (heading). +Included Outline Levels +Enter the number of outline levels to include in the new presentation. For example, if you choose one level, only the paragraphs that follow the "Heading 1" paragraph style are included. +Subpoints per Level +Enter the number of paragraphs that you want to include below each outline level (heading). diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/01160500.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/01160500.xhp index e53d85a4c1..e5fc4d590a 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/01160500.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/01160500.xhp @@ -31,22 +31,22 @@ -Name and Path of HTML Documents -Saves the file as an HTML document, so that you can view it in a web browser. You can choose to create a separate page when a heading style that you specify is encountered in the document. If you choose this option, a separate page of links to all of the pages that are generated is also created. +Name and Path of HTML Documents +Saves the file as an HTML document, so that you can view it in a web browser. You can choose to create a separate page when a heading style that you specify is encountered in the document. If you choose this option, a separate page of links to all of the pages that are generated is also created.
-Consecutive numbers are added to the file name if more than one HTML document is created. The titles of the HTML pages are created from the topmost chapter heading. -Display area +Consecutive numbers are added to the file name if more than one HTML document is created. The titles of the HTML pages are created from the topmost chapter heading. +Display area -File name +File name -Current Style -Select the heading paragraph style that you want to use to indicate a new HTML page. To use this option, apply one of the heading paragraph styles to the paragraphs where you want to start a new page in the document. -File type +Current Style +Select the heading paragraph style that you want to use to indicate a new HTML page. To use this option, apply one of the heading paragraph styles to the paragraphs where you want to start a new page in the document. +File type -Save +Save diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/02110000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/02110000.xhp index c31a5d98a6..9f7c0149ff 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/02110000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/02110000.xhp @@ -30,295 +30,295 @@
-To open the Navigator, choose View - Navigator. To move the Navigator, drag its title bar. To dock the Navigator, drag its title bar to the left or to the right edge of the workspace. To undock the Navigator, hold down the Ctrl key and double-click on a grey area of the Navigator. -Click the plus sign (+) next to a category in the Navigator to view the items in the category. To view the number of items in a category, rest your mouse pointer over the category in the Navigator. To jump to an item in the document, double-click the item in the Navigator. -To jump to the next or previous item in a document, click the Navigation icon to open the Navigation toolbar, click the item category, and then click the up or down arrows. -A hidden section in a document appears gray in the Navigator, and displays the text "hidden" when you rest the mouse pointer over it. The same applies to header and footer contents of Page Styles that are not used in a document, and hidden contents in tables, text frames, graphics, OLE objects, and indexes. +To open the Navigator, choose View - Navigator. To move the Navigator, drag its title bar. To dock the Navigator, drag its title bar to the left or to the right edge of the workspace. To undock the Navigator, hold down the Ctrl key and double-click on a grey area of the Navigator. +Click the plus sign (+) next to a category in the Navigator to view the items in the category. To view the number of items in a category, rest your mouse pointer over the category in the Navigator. To jump to an item in the document, double-click the item in the Navigator. +To jump to the next or previous item in a document, click the Navigation icon to open the Navigation toolbar, click the item category, and then click the up or down arrows. +A hidden section in a document appears gray in the Navigator, and displays the text "hidden" when you rest the mouse pointer over it. The same applies to header and footer contents of Page Styles that are not used in a document, and hidden contents in tables, text frames, graphics, OLE objects, and indexes. -Toggle Master View -Switches between master view and normal view if a master document is open. Switches between master view and normal view if a master document is open. +Toggle Master View +Switches between master view and normal view if a master document is open. Switches between master view and normal view if a master document is open. - + Icon -Toggle Master View +Toggle Master View
-Navigation -Opens the Navigation toolbar, where you can quickly jump to the next or the previous item in the category that you select. Select the category, and then click the "Previous" and "Next" arrows. Opens the Navigation toolbar, where you can quickly jump to the next or the previous item in the category that you select. Select the category, and then click the "Previous" and "Next" arrows. -To continue the search, click the Repeat Search icon on the Navigation toolbar. +Navigation +Opens the Navigation toolbar, where you can quickly jump to the next or the previous item in the category that you select. Select the category, and then click the "Previous" and "Next" arrows. Opens the Navigation toolbar, where you can quickly jump to the next or the previous item in the category that you select. Select the category, and then click the "Previous" and "Next" arrows. +To continue the search, click the Repeat Search icon on the Navigation toolbar. - + Icon -Navigation +Navigation
-Previous -Jumps to the previous item in the document. To specify the type of item to jump to, click the Navigation icon, and then click an item category - for example, "Images". Jumps to the previous item in the document. To specify the type of item to jump to, click the Navigation icon, and then click an item category - for example, "Images". +Previous +Jumps to the previous item in the document. To specify the type of item to jump to, click the Navigation icon, and then click an item category - for example, "Images". Jumps to the previous item in the document. To specify the type of item to jump to, click the Navigation icon, and then click an item category - for example, "Images". - + Icon -Previous Object +Previous Object
-Next -Jumps to the next item in the document. To specify the type of item to jump to, click the Navigation icon, and then click an item category - for example, "Images". Jumps to the next item in the document. To specify the type of item to jump to, click the Navigation icon, and then click an item category - for example, "Images". +Next +Jumps to the next item in the document. To specify the type of item to jump to, click the Navigation icon, and then click an item category - for example, "Images". Jumps to the next item in the document. To specify the type of item to jump to, click the Navigation icon, and then click an item category - for example, "Images". - + Icon -Next Object +Next Object
-Page number -Type the number of the page number that you want to jump to, and then press Enter. -To quickly move the cursor to another page while you are in a document, press Shift+Command +Page number +Type the number of the page number that you want to jump to, and then press Enter. +To quickly move the cursor to another page while you are in a document, press Shift+Command Ctrl+F5, type the number of the page that you want to jump to, and then wait a few moments. -List Box -Shows or hides the Navigator list. +List Box +Shows or hides the Navigator list. - + Icon -List box on/off +List box on/off
-Content View -Switches between the display of all categories in the Navigator and the selected category. +Content View +Switches between the display of all categories in the Navigator and the selected category. - + Icon -Switch Content View +Switch Content View
-To quickly reorder headings and their associated text in your document, select the "Headings" category in the list, and then click the Content View icon. Now you can use drag-and-drop to reorder contents. +To quickly reorder headings and their associated text in your document, select the "Headings" category in the list, and then click the Content View icon. Now you can use drag-and-drop to reorder contents. -Set Reminder -Click here to set a reminder at the current cursor position. You can define up to five reminders. To jump to a reminder, click the Navigation icon, in the Navigation window click the Reminder icon, and then click the Previous or Next button. Click here to set a reminder at the current cursor position. You can define up to five reminders. To jump to a reminder, click the Navigation icon, in the Navigation window click the Reminder icon, and then click the Previous or Next button. +Set Reminder +Click here to set a reminder at the current cursor position. You can define up to five reminders. To jump to a reminder, click the Navigation icon, in the Navigation window click the Reminder icon, and then click the Previous or Next button. Click here to set a reminder at the current cursor position. You can define up to five reminders. To jump to a reminder, click the Navigation icon, in the Navigation window click the Reminder icon, and then click the Previous or Next button. - + Icon -Set Reminder +Set Reminder
-Header -Moves the cursor to the header, or from the header to the document text area. +Header +Moves the cursor to the header, or from the header to the document text area. - + Icon -Header +Header
-Footer -Moves the cursor to the footer, or from the footer to the document text area. +Footer +Moves the cursor to the footer, or from the footer to the document text area. - + Icon -Footer +Footer
-Anchor <-> Text -Jumps between the footnote text and the footnote anchor. +Anchor <-> Text +Jumps between the footnote text and the footnote anchor. - + Icon -Anchor <-> Text +Anchor <-> Text
-Drag Mode -Sets the drag and drop options for inserting items from the Navigator into a document, for example, as a hyperlink. Click this icon, and then choose the option that you want to use. +Drag Mode +Sets the drag and drop options for inserting items from the Navigator into a document, for example, as a hyperlink. Click this icon, and then choose the option that you want to use. - + Icon -Drag mode +Drag mode
-Insert As Hyperlink -Creates a hyperlink when you drag and drop an item into the current document. Click the hyperlink in the document to jump to the item that the hyperlink points to. +Insert As Hyperlink +Creates a hyperlink when you drag and drop an item into the current document. Click the hyperlink in the document to jump to the item that the hyperlink points to. -Insert As Link -Inserts the selected item as a link where you drag and drop in the current document. Text is inserted as protected sections. The contents of the link are automatically updated when the source is changed. To manually update the links in a document, choose Tools - Update - Links. You cannot create links for graphics, OLE objects, references and indexes. +Insert As Link +Inserts the selected item as a link where you drag and drop in the current document. Text is inserted as protected sections. The contents of the link are automatically updated when the source is changed. To manually update the links in a document, choose Tools - Update - Links. You cannot create links for graphics, OLE objects, references and indexes. -Insert As Copy -Inserts a copy of the selected item where you drag and drop in the current document. You cannot drag and drop copies of graphics, OLE objects, references and indexes. +Insert As Copy +Inserts a copy of the selected item where you drag and drop in the current document. You cannot drag and drop copies of graphics, OLE objects, references and indexes. -Outline Level -Click this icon, and then choose the number of heading outline levels that you want to view in the Navigator window. You can also access this command by right-clicking a heading in the Navigator window. +Outline Level +Click this icon, and then choose the number of heading outline levels that you want to view in the Navigator window. You can also access this command by right-clicking a heading in the Navigator window. -1-10 -Click 1 to only view the top level headings in the Navigator window, and 10 to view all of the headings. +1-10 +Click 1 to only view the top level headings in the Navigator window, and 10 to view all of the headings. - + Icon -Outline level +Outline level
-Chapter Up -Moves the selected heading, and the text below the heading, up one heading position in the Navigator and in the document. To move only the selected heading and not the text associated with the heading, hold down Ctrl, and then click this icon. +Chapter Up +Moves the selected heading, and the text below the heading, up one heading position in the Navigator and in the document. To move only the selected heading and not the text associated with the heading, hold down Ctrl, and then click this icon. - + Icon -Chapter Up +Chapter Up
-Chapter Down -Moves the selected heading, and the text below the heading, down one heading position in the Navigator and in the document. To move only the selected heading and not the text associated with the heading, hold down Ctrl, and then click this icon. +Chapter Down +Moves the selected heading, and the text below the heading, down one heading position in the Navigator and in the document. To move only the selected heading and not the text associated with the heading, hold down Ctrl, and then click this icon. - + Icon -Chapter down +Chapter down
-Promote Level -Increases the outline level of the selected heading, and the headings that occur below the heading, by one. To only increase the outline level of the selected heading, hold down Ctrl, and then click this icon. +Promote Level +Increases the outline level of the selected heading, and the headings that occur below the heading, by one. To only increase the outline level of the selected heading, hold down Ctrl, and then click this icon. - + Icon -Promote level +Promote level
-Demote Level -Decreases the outline level of the selected heading, and the headings that occur below the heading, by one. To only decrease the outline level of the selected heading, hold down Ctrl, and then click this icon. +Demote Level +Decreases the outline level of the selected heading, and the headings that occur below the heading, by one. To only decrease the outline level of the selected heading, hold down Ctrl, and then click this icon. - + Icon -Demote level +Demote level
-Open Documents -Lists the names of all open text documents. To view the contents of a document in the Navigator window, select the name of the document in the list. The current document displayed in the Navigator is indicated by the word "active" after its name in the list. -You can also right-click an item in the Navigator, choose Display, and then click the document that you want to view. +Open Documents +Lists the names of all open text documents. To view the contents of a document in the Navigator window, select the name of the document in the list. The current document displayed in the Navigator is indicated by the word "active" after its name in the list. +You can also right-click an item in the Navigator, choose Display, and then click the document that you want to view. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/02110100.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/02110100.xhp index 4fa3306155..a4f923677a 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/02110100.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/02110100.xhp @@ -33,64 +33,64 @@ -Navigation -If you click this icon in the Navigator or in the lower right of the document window, a toolbar will appear which enables you to choose among the existing targets within a document. You can then use the up and down arrow icons to position the text cursor in the document on the previous or next target. +Navigation +If you click this icon in the Navigator or in the lower right of the document window, a toolbar will appear which enables you to choose among the existing targets within a document. You can then use the up and down arrow icons to position the text cursor in the document on the previous or next target. -Click the up button to scroll to the previous page or object. +Click the up button to scroll to the previous page or object. -Click the down button to scroll to the next page or object. -By default, as long as you have not selected any other entry, the arrow buttons jump to the previous or the next page in the document. The arrow buttons are black if you are browsing through pages and blue if you jump to other objects. -The entries largely correspond to those in the Navigator selection box. You can also select other jump destinations. An example are the reminders, which you can set with the Set Reminder icon in the Navigator. You can select an object from among the following options on the Navigation toolbar: table, text frame, graphics, OLE object, page, headings, reminder, drawing object, control field, section, bookmark, selection, footnote, note, index entry, table formula, wrong table formula. -For table formulas, you can either jump to all table formulas located within your document or only to the incorrect ones. For incorrect formulas, you jump only to formulas that have resulted in errors. The program skips over formulas with resulting errors (those that reference incorrect formulas). -Working With the Navigation Toolbar -Open the Navigation toolbar by clicking on its icon located in the vertical scrollbar. You can break the toolbar away from its place by dragging and arrange it on the screen. +Click the down button to scroll to the next page or object. +By default, as long as you have not selected any other entry, the arrow buttons jump to the previous or the next page in the document. The arrow buttons are black if you are browsing through pages and blue if you jump to other objects. +The entries largely correspond to those in the Navigator selection box. You can also select other jump destinations. An example are the reminders, which you can set with the Set Reminder icon in the Navigator. You can select an object from among the following options on the Navigation toolbar: table, text frame, graphics, OLE object, page, headings, reminder, drawing object, control field, section, bookmark, selection, footnote, note, index entry, table formula, wrong table formula. +For table formulas, you can either jump to all table formulas located within your document or only to the incorrect ones. For incorrect formulas, you jump only to formulas that have resulted in errors. The program skips over formulas with resulting errors (those that reference incorrect formulas). +Working With the Navigation Toolbar +Open the Navigation toolbar by clicking on its icon located in the vertical scrollbar. You can break the toolbar away from its place by dragging and arrange it on the screen. -Click the icon for the type of objects you want to browse through. Then click one of the "Previous Object" or "Next Object" arrow buttons. The names of these buttons indicate the type of object you have selected. The text cursor is placed on whichever object you have selected. -You can configure $[officename] according to your specific preferences for navigating within a document. To do this, choose Tools - Customize. The various tables for adapting menus, keyboard input or toolbars contain various functions for navigation within the document under the "Navigate" area. In this way you can jump to the index tags in the document with the "To Next/Previous Index Tag" functions. +Click the icon for the type of objects you want to browse through. Then click one of the "Previous Object" or "Next Object" arrow buttons. The names of these buttons indicate the type of object you have selected. The text cursor is placed on whichever object you have selected. +You can configure $[officename] according to your specific preferences for navigating within a document. To do this, choose Tools - Customize. The various tables for adapting menus, keyboard input or toolbars contain various functions for navigation within the document under the "Navigate" area. In this way you can jump to the index tags in the document with the "To Next/Previous Index Tag" functions. searching; repeating a search -Repeat Search -With the Repeat search icon on the Navigation toolbar you can repeat a search you started with the Search and Replace dialog. To do this, click the icon. The blue arrow buttons on the vertical scrollbar now take on the functions Continue search forwards and Continue search backwards. If you now click one of the arrow surfaces, the search will be continued for the term entered in the Search and Replace dialog. +Repeat Search +With the Repeat search icon on the Navigation toolbar you can repeat a search you started with the Search and Replace dialog. To do this, click the icon. The blue arrow buttons on the vertical scrollbar now take on the functions Continue search forwards and Continue search backwards. If you now click one of the arrow surfaces, the search will be continued for the term entered in the Search and Replace dialog. -Select this icon to browse through bookmarks. +Select this icon to browse through bookmarks. -Select this icon to browse through control fields. +Select this icon to browse through control fields. -Select this icon to browse through drawing objects. +Select this icon to browse through drawing objects. -Select this icon to browse through text frames. +Select this icon to browse through text frames. -Select this icon to browse through footnotes. +Select this icon to browse through footnotes. -Select this icon to browse through graphics. +Select this icon to browse through graphics. -Select this icon to browse through index entries. +Select this icon to browse through index entries. -Select this icon to browse through reminders. +Select this icon to browse through reminders. -Sets the cursor to the next object of the selected type. +Sets the cursor to the next object of the selected type. -Select this icon to browse through OLE objects. +Select this icon to browse through OLE objects. -Select this icon to browse through headings. +Select this icon to browse through headings. -Select this icon to browse through pages. +Select this icon to browse through pages. -Select this icon to browse through comments. +Select this icon to browse through comments. -Sets the cursor to the previous object of the selected type. +Sets the cursor to the previous object of the selected type. -Select this icon to browse through sections. +Select this icon to browse through sections. -Select this icon to browse through selections. +Select this icon to browse through selections. -Select this icon to browse through search results. +Select this icon to browse through search results. -Select this icon to browse through table formulas. +Select this icon to browse through table formulas. -Select this icon to browse through wrong table formulas. +Select this icon to browse through wrong table formulas. -Select this icon to browse through tables. +Select this icon to browse through tables. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp index da350b977e..13e66c5cc5 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp @@ -30,97 +30,97 @@
-AutoText -Creates, edits, or inserts AutoText. You can store formatted text, text with graphics, tables, and fields as AutoText. To quickly insert AutoText, type the shortcut for the AutoText in your document, and then press F3. +AutoText +Creates, edits, or inserts AutoText. You can store formatted text, text with graphics, tables, and fields as AutoText. To quickly insert AutoText, type the shortcut for the AutoText in your document, and then press F3.
-You can also click the arrow next to the AutoText icon on the Insert bar, and then choose the AutoText that you want to insert. +You can also click the arrow next to the AutoText icon on the Insert bar, and then choose the AutoText that you want to insert.
-AutoText -The AutoText dialog lists the AutoText categories and entries. +AutoText +The AutoText dialog lists the AutoText categories and entries. -Display remainder of name as a suggestion while typing -Displays a suggestion for completing a word as a Help Tip after you type the first three letters of a word that matches an AutoText entry. To accept the suggestion, press Enter. If more than one AutoText entry matches the letters that you type, press Ctrl+Tab to advance through the entries. For example, to insert dummy text, type "Dum", and then press Enter. -To display the list in reverse order, press Command +Display remainder of name as a suggestion while typing +Displays a suggestion for completing a word as a Help Tip after you type the first three letters of a word that matches an AutoText entry. To accept the suggestion, press Enter. If more than one AutoText entry matches the letters that you type, press Ctrl+Tab to advance through the entries. For example, to insert dummy text, type "Dum", and then press Enter. +To display the list in reverse order, press Command Ctrl+Shift+Tab. -Name -Lists the name of the currently selected AutoText entry. If you have selected text in the document, type the name of the new AutoText entry, click the AutoText button, and then choose New. +Name +Lists the name of the currently selected AutoText entry. If you have selected text in the document, type the name of the new AutoText entry, click the AutoText button, and then choose New. -Shortcut -Displays the shortcut for the selected AutoText entry. If you are creating a new AutoText entry, type the shortcut that you want to use for the entry. -List box -Lists the AutoText categories. To view the AutoText entries in a category, double-click the category, or click the plus sign (+) in front of the category. To insert an AutoText entry into the current document, select the entry in the list, and then click Insert. -You can drag and drop AutoText entries from one category to another. -Insert -Inserts the selected AutoText into the current document. -If you insert an unformatted AutoText entry into a paragraph, the entry is formatted with the current paragraph style. +Shortcut +Displays the shortcut for the selected AutoText entry. If you are creating a new AutoText entry, type the shortcut that you want to use for the entry. +List box +Lists the AutoText categories. To view the AutoText entries in a category, double-click the category, or click the plus sign (+) in front of the category. To insert an AutoText entry into the current document, select the entry in the list, and then click Insert. +You can drag and drop AutoText entries from one category to another. +Insert +Inserts the selected AutoText into the current document. +If you insert an unformatted AutoText entry into a paragraph, the entry is formatted with the current paragraph style. -AutoText -Click to display additional AutoText commands, for example, to create a new AutoText entry from a text selection in the current document. +AutoText +Click to display additional AutoText commands, for example, to create a new AutoText entry from a text selection in the current document. -New -Creates a new AutoText entry from the selection that you made in the current document. The entry is added to the currently selected AutoText category. You must first enter a name before you see this command. +New +Creates a new AutoText entry from the selection that you made in the current document. The entry is added to the currently selected AutoText category. You must first enter a name before you see this command. -New (text only) -Creates a new AutoText entry only from the text in the selection that you made in the current document. Graphics, tables and other objects are not included. You must first enter a name before you see this command. +New (text only) +Creates a new AutoText entry only from the text in the selection that you made in the current document. Graphics, tables and other objects are not included. You must first enter a name before you see this command. -Copy -Copies the selected AutoText to the clipboard. +Copy +Copies the selected AutoText to the clipboard. -Replace -Replaces the contents of the selected AutoText entry with the selection that was made in the current document. +Replace +Replaces the contents of the selected AutoText entry with the selection that was made in the current document. -Rename -Opens the Rename AutoText dialog, where you can change the name of the selected AutoText entry. Opens the Rename AutoText dialog, where you can change the name of the selected AutoText entry. +Rename +Opens the Rename AutoText dialog, where you can change the name of the selected AutoText entry. Opens the Rename AutoText dialog, where you can change the name of the selected AutoText entry. -Edit -Opens the selected AutoText entry for editing in a separate document. Make the changes that you want, choose File - Save AutoText, and then choose File - Close. +Edit +Opens the selected AutoText entry for editing in a separate document. Make the changes that you want, choose File - Save AutoText, and then choose File - Close. -Macro -Opens the Assign Macro dialog, where you attach a macro to the selected AutoText entry. Opens the Assign Macro dialog, where you attach a macro to the selected AutoText entry. -You can also use the macros that are linked to some of the provided AutoText entries in AutoText entries that you create. The AutoText entries must be created with the "text only" option. For example, insert the string <field:company> in an AutoText entry, and $[officename] replaces the string with the contents of the corresponding database field. +Macro +Opens the Assign Macro dialog, where you attach a macro to the selected AutoText entry. Opens the Assign Macro dialog, where you attach a macro to the selected AutoText entry. +You can also use the macros that are linked to some of the provided AutoText entries in AutoText entries that you create. The AutoText entries must be created with the "text only" option. For example, insert the string <field:company> in an AutoText entry, and $[officename] replaces the string with the contents of the corresponding database field. -Import -Opens a dialog where you can select the MS 97/2000/XP Word document or template, containing the AutoText entries that you want to import. +Import +Opens a dialog where you can select the MS 97/2000/XP Word document or template, containing the AutoText entries that you want to import. -Categories -Adds, renames, or deletes AutoText categories. +Categories +Adds, renames, or deletes AutoText categories. -Edit Categories -Adds, renames, or deletes AutoText categories. +Edit Categories +Adds, renames, or deletes AutoText categories. -Category -Displays the name of the selected AutoText category. To change the name of the category, type a new name, and then click Rename. To create a new category, type a name, and then click New. +Category +Displays the name of the selected AutoText category. To change the name of the category, type a new name, and then click Rename. To create a new category, type a name, and then click New. -Path -Displays the current path to the directory where the selected AutoText category files are stored. If you are creating an AutoText category, select where you want to store the category files. +Path +Displays the current path to the directory where the selected AutoText category files are stored. If you are creating an AutoText category, select where you want to store the category files. -New -Creates a new AutoText category using the name that you entered in the Name box. +New +Creates a new AutoText category using the name that you entered in the Name box. -Rename -Changes the name of the selected AutoText category to the name that you enter in the Name box. +Rename +Changes the name of the selected AutoText category to the name that you enter in the Name box. -Selection list -Lists the existing AutoText categories and the corresponding paths. +Selection list +Lists the existing AutoText categories and the corresponding paths. -Path -Opens the Edit Paths dialog, where you can select the directory to store AutoText. Opens the Edit Paths dialog, where you can select the directory to store AutoText. -To add a new path to an AutoText directory, click the Path button in the AutoText dialog. -Save links relative to -Use this area to set the way $[officename] inserts links to the AutoText directory. +Path +Opens the Edit Paths dialog, where you can select the directory to store AutoText. Opens the Edit Paths dialog, where you can select the directory to store AutoText. +To add a new path to an AutoText directory, click the Path button in the AutoText dialog. +Save links relative to +Use this area to set the way $[officename] inserts links to the AutoText directory. -File system -Links to AutoText directories on your computer are relative. +File system +Links to AutoText directories on your computer are relative. -Internet -Links to files on the Internet are relative. +Internet +Links to files on the Internet are relative. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/02120100.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/02120100.xhp index 77dbc042dd..2cd55141f2 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/02120100.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/02120100.xhp @@ -31,16 +31,16 @@ - Rename AutoText - Allows you to change the name of an AutoText entry. + Rename AutoText + Allows you to change the name of an AutoText entry.
- Name - Displays the current name of the selected AutoText item. - New - Type the new name for the selected AutoText component. - Shortcut - Assigns a shortcut to the selected AutoText entry. + Name + Displays the current name of the selected AutoText item. + New + Type the new name for the selected AutoText component. + Shortcut + Assigns a shortcut to the selected AutoText entry. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp index fb06293044..78f37fbcbe 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp @@ -32,21 +32,21 @@ -Edit Sections -Changes the properties of sections defined in your document. To insert a section, select text or click in your document, and then choose Insert - Section. +Edit Sections +Changes the properties of sections defined in your document. To insert a section, select text or click in your document, and then choose Insert - Section.
-The Edit Sections dialog is similar to the Insert - Section dialog, and offers the following additional options: +The Edit Sections dialog is similar to the Insert - Section dialog, and offers the following additional options: -Section -Type the name of the section that you want to edit, or click a name in the Section list. If the cursor is currently in a section, the section name is displayed on the right side of the status bar at the bottom of the document window. -The current write protection status of a section is indicated by the lock symbol in front of the section name in the list. An open lock is unprotected and a closed lock is protected. Similarly, visible sections are indicated by a glasses symbol. -Options -Opens the Options dialog, where you can edit the column layout, background, footnote and endnote behavior of the selected section. If the section is password protected, you must enter the password first. +Section +Type the name of the section that you want to edit, or click a name in the Section list. If the cursor is currently in a section, the section name is displayed on the right side of the status bar at the bottom of the document window. +The current write protection status of a section is indicated by the lock symbol in front of the section name in the list. An open lock is unprotected and a closed lock is protected. Similarly, visible sections are indicated by a glasses symbol. +Options +Opens the Options dialog, where you can edit the column layout, background, footnote and endnote behavior of the selected section. If the section is password protected, you must enter the password first. -Remove -Removes the selected section from the document, and inserts the contents of the section into the document. +Remove +Removes the selected section from the document, and inserts the contents of the section into the document. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04020000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04020000.xhp index f19d9a20d1..6a88f561d1 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04020000.xhp @@ -31,25 +31,25 @@ - + Insert Section - + Inserts a text section at the cursor position in the document. You can also select a block of text and then choose this command to create a section. You can use sections to insert blocks of text from other documents, to apply custom column layouts, or to protect or to hide blocks of text if a condition is met.
-You can insert an entire document in a section, or a named section from another. You can also insert a section as a DDE link. -To edit a section, choose Format - Sections. -The Insert Section dialog contains the following tabs: +You can insert an entire document in a section, or a named section from another. You can also insert a section as a DDE link. +To edit a section, choose Format - Sections. +The Insert Section dialog contains the following tabs: -Insert -Inserts the section that you defined at the current cursor position in the document. +Insert +Inserts the section that you defined at the current cursor position in the document. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04020100.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04020100.xhp index d0c9c5a509..bffcbea211 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04020100.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04020100.xhp @@ -36,72 +36,72 @@ -Section -Sets the properties of the section. +Section +Sets the properties of the section.
-New Section -Type a name for the new section. By default, $[officename] automatically assigns the name "Section X" to new sections, where X is a consecutive number. -Link +New Section +Type a name for the new section. By default, $[officename] automatically assigns the name "Section X" to new sections, where X is a consecutive number. +Link -Link -Inserts the contents of another document or section from another document in the current section. +Link +Inserts the contents of another document or section from another document in the current section. -DDEUFI: WIN only, while fixing #109638# -Creates a DDE link. Select this check box, and then enter the DDE command that you want to use. The DDE option is only available if the Link check box is selected. -The general syntax for a DDE command is: "<Server> <Topic> <Item>", where server is the DDE name for the application that contains the data. Topic refers to the location of the Item (usually the file name), and Item represents the actual object. -For example, to insert a section named "Section1" from a $[officename] text document abc.odt as a DDE link, use the command: "soffice x:\abc.odt Section1". To insert the contents of the first cell from a MS Excel spreadsheet file called "abc.xls", use the command: "excel x:\[abc.xls]Sheet1 z1s1". You can also copy the elements that you want to insert as a DDE link, and then Edit - Paste Special. You can then view the DDE command for the link, by selecting the contents and choosing Edit - Fields. +DDEUFI: WIN only, while fixing #109638# +Creates a DDE link. Select this check box, and then enter the DDE command that you want to use. The DDE option is only available if the Link check box is selected. +The general syntax for a DDE command is: "<Server> <Topic> <Item>", where server is the DDE name for the application that contains the data. Topic refers to the location of the Item (usually the file name), and Item represents the actual object. +For example, to insert a section named "Section1" from a $[officename] text document abc.odt as a DDE link, use the command: "soffice x:\abc.odt Section1". To insert the contents of the first cell from a MS Excel spreadsheet file called "abc.xls", use the command: "excel x:\[abc.xls]Sheet1 z1s1". You can also copy the elements that you want to insert as a DDE link, and then Edit - Paste Special. You can then view the DDE command for the link, by selecting the contents and choosing Edit - Fields. -File name / DDE command +File name / DDE command Enter the path and the filename for the file that you want to insert, or click the Browse button to locate the file. If the DDE check box is selected, enter the DDE command that you want to use. Browse -Locate the file that you want to insert as a link, and then click Insert. +Locate the file that you want to insert as a link, and then click Insert. -Section -Select the section in the file that you want to insert as a link. -When you open a document that contains linked sections, you are prompted to update the links. -Write Protection +Section +Select the section in the file that you want to insert as a link. +When you open a document that contains linked sections, you are prompted to update the links. +Write Protection Protect -Prevents the selected section from being edited. +Prevents the selected section from being edited. -With password -Protects the selected section with a password. The password must have a minimum of 5 characters. +With password +Protects the selected section with a password. The password must have a minimum of 5 characters. Password -Opens a dialog where you can change the current password. -Hide +Opens a dialog where you can change the current password. +Hide -Hide -Hides and prevents the selected section from being printed. The components of a hidden sections appear gray in the Navigator. When you rest your mouse pointer over a hidden component in the Navigator, the Help tip "hidden" is displayed. -You cannot hide a section if it is the only content on a page, or in a header, footer, footnote, frame, or table cell. +Hide +Hides and prevents the selected section from being printed. The components of a hidden sections appear gray in the Navigator. When you rest your mouse pointer over a hidden component in the Navigator, the Help tip "hidden" is displayed. +You cannot hide a section if it is the only content on a page, or in a header, footer, footnote, frame, or table cell. -With condition -Enter the condition that must be met to hide the section. A condition is a logical expression, such as "SALUTATION EQ Mr.". For example, if you use the mail merge form letter feature to define a database field called "Salutation" that contains "Mr.", "Ms.", or "Sir or Madam", you can then specify that a section will only be printed if the salutation is "Mr.". -Another example would be to create the field variable "x" and set its value to 1. Then specify a condition based on this variable for hiding a section, such as: "x eq 1". If you want to display the section, set the value of the variable "x" to "0". -Properties -You see this area of the dialog when the current document is an XForms document. -Editable in read-only document -Select to allow editing of the section's contents even if the document is opened in read-only mode. +With condition +Enter the condition that must be met to hide the section. A condition is a logical expression, such as "SALUTATION EQ Mr.". For example, if you use the mail merge form letter feature to define a database field called "Salutation" that contains "Mr.", "Ms.", or "Sir or Madam", you can then specify that a section will only be printed if the salutation is "Mr.". +Another example would be to create the field variable "x" and set its value to 1. Then specify a condition based on this variable for hiding a section, such as: "x eq 1". If you want to display the section, set the value of the variable "x" to "0". +Properties +You see this area of the dialog when the current document is an XForms document. +Editable in read-only document +Select to allow editing of the section's contents even if the document is opened in read-only mode. -Field commands -Syntax for conditions +Field commands +Syntax for conditions diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04020200.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04020200.xhp index 56096f0639..b6bf8f84eb 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04020200.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04020200.xhp @@ -32,20 +32,20 @@
-Indents -Indents the section with a left and right margin. +Indents +Indents the section with a left and right margin.
-Before section -Specifies the indents before the section, at the left margin. +Before section +Specifies the indents before the section, at the left margin. -After section -Specifies the indents after the section, at the right margin. +After section +Specifies the indents after the section, at the right margin. -Field commands +Field commands diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp index bec2519df5..5b4c197585 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp @@ -31,40 +31,40 @@ -Footnote/Endnote -Inserts a footnote or an endnote in the document. The anchor for the note is inserted at the current cursor position. You can choose between automatic numbering or a custom symbol. +Footnote/Endnote +Inserts a footnote or an endnote in the document. The anchor for the note is inserted at the current cursor position. You can choose between automatic numbering or a custom symbol. -The following applies to both footnotes and endnotes. +The following applies to both footnotes and endnotes. -Footnotes are inserted at the end of a page, and endnotes are inserted at the end of a document. +Footnotes are inserted at the end of a page, and endnotes are inserted at the end of a document. UFI: what about sections? Will endnotes be placed there?
-Numbering -Select the type of numbering that you want to use for footnotes and endnotes. +Numbering +Select the type of numbering that you want to use for footnotes and endnotes. -Automatic +Automatic Automatically assigns consecutive numbers to the footnotes or endnotes that you insert. To change the settings for automatic numbering, choose Tools - Footnotes and Endnotes. -Character -Choose this option to define a character or symbol for the current footnote. This can be either a letter or number. To assign a special character, click the button at the bottom. +Character +Choose this option to define a character or symbol for the current footnote. This can be either a letter or number. To assign a special character, click the button at the bottom. Choose -Inserts a special character as a footnote or endnote anchor. +Inserts a special character as a footnote or endnote anchor. -Type -Select whether to insert a footnote or an endnote. Endnote numbering is separate from the footnote numbering. +Type +Select whether to insert a footnote or an endnote. Endnote numbering is separate from the footnote numbering. -Footnote -Inserts a footnote anchor at the current cursor position in the document, and adds a footnote to the bottom of the page. +Footnote +Inserts a footnote anchor at the current cursor position in the document, and adds a footnote to the bottom of the page. -Endnote -Inserts an endnote anchor at the current cursor position in the document, and adds an endnote at the end of the document. +Endnote +Inserts an endnote anchor at the current cursor position in the document, and adds an endnote at the end of the document. -Tips for working with footnotes. +Tips for working with footnotes. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp index ceadcd5e95..57fff9357a 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp @@ -31,28 +31,28 @@ -Options -Adds the chapter number to the caption label. To use this feature, you must first assign an outline level to a paragraph style, and then apply the style to the chapter headings in your document. +Options +Adds the chapter number to the caption label. To use this feature, you must first assign an outline level to a paragraph style, and then apply the style to the chapter headings in your document.
-Numbering by chapter -When you add chapter numbers to caption labels, the caption numbering is reset when a chapter heading is encountered. For example, if the last figure in chapter 1 is "Figure 1.12", the first figure in the next chapter would be "Figure 2.1". +Numbering by chapter +When you add chapter numbers to caption labels, the caption numbering is reset when a chapter heading is encountered. For example, if the last figure in chapter 1 is "Figure 1.12", the first figure in the next chapter would be "Figure 2.1". -Level -Select the number of outline levels from the top of the chapter hierarchy down to include in the caption label. +Level +Select the number of outline levels from the top of the chapter hierarchy down to include in the caption label. -Separator -Enter the character that you want to insert between the chapter number and the caption number. -Category and frame format +Separator +Enter the character that you want to insert between the chapter number and the caption number. +Category and frame format -Character style -Specifies the character style. +Character style +Specifies the character style. -Apply border and shadow -Applies the border and shadow of the object to the caption frame. +Apply border and shadow +Applies the border and shadow of the object to the caption frame. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04070000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04070000.xhp index f0e79b5ebe..84af52cc0c 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04070000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04070000.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ MW made "envelopes;" a one level entry -Envelope - Creates an envelope. On three tab pages, you can specify the addressee and sender, the position and format for both addresses, the size of the envelope, and the envelope orientation. +Envelope + Creates an envelope. On three tab pages, you can specify the addressee and sender, the position and format for both addresses, the size of the envelope, and the envelope orientation.
@@ -43,27 +43,27 @@ -New doc. - Creates a new document and inserts the envelope. +New doc. + Creates a new document and inserts the envelope. -Insert - Inserts the envelope before the current page in the document. +Insert + Inserts the envelope before the current page in the document. - To delete an envelope from a document + To delete an envelope from a document - Click into the envelope page to make it the current page. + Click into the envelope page to make it the current page. - Right-click the field on the status line that shows "Envelope". - A submenu opens showing some page styles. + Right-click the field on the status line that shows "Envelope". + A submenu opens showing some page styles. - Choose the "Default" page style from the submenu. - This removes the special "Envelope" page formatting. + Choose the "Default" page style from the submenu. + This removes the special "Envelope" page formatting. - Delete the frames for sender and recipient. Click the border of each frame and press the Del key. + Delete the frames for sender and recipient. Click the border of each frame and press the Del key. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04070100.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04070100.xhp index 24941f28d2..e4b23eb10e 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04070100.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04070100.xhp @@ -33,23 +33,23 @@
- Envelope - Enter the delivery and return addresses for the envelope. You can also insert address fields from a database, for example from the Addresses database. + Envelope + Enter the delivery and return addresses for the envelope. You can also insert address fields from a database, for example from the Addresses database.
- Addressee - Enter the delivery address. You can also click in this box, and select a database, a table, and field, and then click the arrow button to insert the field in the address. If you want, you can apply formatting, such as bold and underline, to the address text. + Addressee + Enter the delivery address. You can also click in this box, and select a database, a table, and field, and then click the arrow button to insert the field in the address. If you want, you can apply formatting, such as bold and underline, to the address text. -Sender - Includes a return address on the envelope. Select the Sender check box, and then enter the return address. $[officename] automatically inserts your user data in the Sender box, but you can also enter the data that you want. - Database - Select the database containing the address data that you want to insert. - Table - Select the database table containing the address data that you want to insert. - Database field - Select the database field containing the address data that you want to insert, and then click the left arrow button. The data is added to the address box containing the cursor. +Sender + Includes a return address on the envelope. Select the Sender check box, and then enter the return address. $[officename] automatically inserts your user data in the Sender box, but you can also enter the data that you want. + Database + Select the database containing the address data that you want to insert. + Table + Select the database table containing the address data that you want to insert. + Database field + Select the database field containing the address data that you want to insert, and then click the left arrow button. The data is added to the address box containing the cursor. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04070200.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04070200.xhp index 883d77ef7b..d8a1848652 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04070200.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04070200.xhp @@ -30,48 +30,48 @@
-Format -Specifies the layout and the dimension of the envelope. +Format +Specifies the layout and the dimension of the envelope.
-Addressee -Sets the position and the text formatting options of the addressee field. -Position -Sets the position of the recipient's address on the envelope. -from left -Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the left edge of the envelope and the addressee field. -from top -Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the top edge of the envelope and the addressee field. -Edit -Click and choose the text formatting style for the addressee field that you want to edit. -Character -Opens a dialog where you can edit the character formatting that is used in the addressee field. -Paragraph -Opens a dialog where you can edit the paragraph formatting that is used in the addressee field. -Sender -Sets the position and the text formatting options of the sender field. -Position -Sets the position of the sender's address on the envelope. -from left -Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the left edge of the envelope and the sender field. -from top -Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the top edge of the envelope and the sender field. -Edit -Click and choose the text formatting style for the sender field that you want to edit. -Character -Opens a dialog where you can edit the character formatting that is used in the sender field. -Paragraph -Opens a dialog where you can edit the paragraph formatting that is used in the sender field. -Size -Select the envelope size format that you want to use, or create a custom size. -Format -Select the envelope size that want, or select "User Defined", and then enter the width and the height of the custom size. -Width -Enter the width of the envelope. -Height -Enter the height of the envelope. +Addressee +Sets the position and the text formatting options of the addressee field. +Position +Sets the position of the recipient's address on the envelope. +from left +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the left edge of the envelope and the addressee field. +from top +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the top edge of the envelope and the addressee field. +Edit +Click and choose the text formatting style for the addressee field that you want to edit. +Character +Opens a dialog where you can edit the character formatting that is used in the addressee field. +Paragraph +Opens a dialog where you can edit the paragraph formatting that is used in the addressee field. +Sender +Sets the position and the text formatting options of the sender field. +Position +Sets the position of the sender's address on the envelope. +from left +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the left edge of the envelope and the sender field. +from top +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the top edge of the envelope and the sender field. +Edit +Click and choose the text formatting style for the sender field that you want to edit. +Character +Opens a dialog where you can edit the character formatting that is used in the sender field. +Paragraph +Opens a dialog where you can edit the paragraph formatting that is used in the sender field. +Size +Select the envelope size format that you want to use, or create a custom size. +Format +Select the envelope size that want, or select "User Defined", and then enter the width and the height of the custom size. +Width +Enter the width of the envelope. +Height +Enter the height of the envelope. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04070300.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04070300.xhp index 8ac37545ef..7ccbf4fe91 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04070300.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04070300.xhp @@ -32,47 +32,47 @@
-Printer -Set the print options for the envelope. +Printer +Set the print options for the envelope.
-Consult the documentation that came with your printer for setting up the printer for envelopes. Depending on the printer model, envelopes may have to be placed left, right, in the middle, and either face up or face down. +Consult the documentation that came with your printer for setting up the printer for envelopes. Depending on the printer model, envelopes may have to be placed left, right, in the middle, and either face up or face down. -Horizontal left -Feeds the envelope horizontally from the left edge of the printer tray. +Horizontal left +Feeds the envelope horizontally from the left edge of the printer tray. -Horizontal center -Feeds the envelope horizontally from the center of the printer tray. +Horizontal center +Feeds the envelope horizontally from the center of the printer tray. -Horizontal right -Feeds the envelope horizontally from the right edge of the printer tray. +Horizontal right +Feeds the envelope horizontally from the right edge of the printer tray. -Vertical left -Feeds the envelope vertically from the left edge of the printer tray. +Vertical left +Feeds the envelope vertically from the left edge of the printer tray. -Vertical center -Feeds the envelope vertically from the center of the printer tray. +Vertical center +Feeds the envelope vertically from the center of the printer tray. -Vertical right -Feeds the envelope vertically from the right edge of the printer tray. +Vertical right +Feeds the envelope vertically from the right edge of the printer tray. -Print from top -Feeds the envelope with the print side face up in the printer tray. +Print from top +Feeds the envelope with the print side face up in the printer tray. -Print from bottom -Feeds the envelope with the print side face down in the printer tray. +Print from bottom +Feeds the envelope with the print side face down in the printer tray. -Shift right -Enter the amount to shift the print area to the right. +Shift right +Enter the amount to shift the print area to the right. -Shift down -Enter the amount to shift the print area down. -Current printer -Displays the name of the current printer. +Shift down +Enter the amount to shift the print area down. +Current printer +Displays the name of the current printer. -Setup -Opens the Print Setup dialog where you can define additional printer settings, such as paper format and orientation. +Setup +Opens the Print Setup dialog where you can define additional printer settings, such as paper format and orientation. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp index ae75c99982..2d8ed7fd0f 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@ -Fields -Inserts a field at the current cursor position. The dialog lists all available fields. +Fields +Inserts a field at the current cursor position. The dialog lists all available fields.
@@ -44,8 +44,8 @@ -Insert -Inserts the selected field at the current cursor position in the document. To close the dialog, click the Close button. -Closes the dialog. +Insert +Inserts the selected field at the current cursor position in the document. To close the dialog, click the Close button. +Closes the dialog. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp index 1c56cb0dd3..00eb2ffdc5 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp @@ -29,209 +29,204 @@
-Document - Fields are used to insert information about the current document, for example, file name, template, statistics, user data, date, and time. +Document + Fields are used to insert information about the current document, for example, file name, template, statistics, user data, date, and time.
- For the HTML export and import of date and time fields, special $[officename] formats are used. + For the HTML export and import of date and time fields, special $[officename] formats are used.
-Type - Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert. The following fields are available: +Type + Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert. The following fields are available:
- Type + Type - Meaning + Meaning - Author + Author - Inserts the name of the current user. + Inserts the name of the current user. - Chapter + Chapter - Inserts the chapter number and/or the chapter name. + Inserts the chapter number and/or the chapter name. - Date + Date - Inserts the current date. You can insert the date as a fixed field - Date (fixed) - that does not change, or as a dynamic field - Date - that it is updated automatically. To manually update the Date field, press F9. + Inserts the current date. You can insert the date as a fixed field - Date (fixed) - that does not change, or as a dynamic field - Date - that it is updated automatically. To manually update the Date field, press F9. - File name + File name - Inserts the filename and/or the directory path of the current document, as well as the filename without extension. + Inserts the filename and/or the directory path of the current document, as well as the filename without extension. - Page + Page - Inserts the page number of the current, previous, or next page. + Inserts the page number of the current, previous, or next page. - Sender + Sender - Inserts fields containing user data. You can change the user-data that is displayed by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. + Inserts fields containing user data. You can change the user-data that is displayed by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. - Statistics + Statistics - Inserts document statistics, such as page and word counts, as a field. To view the statistics of a document, choose File - Properties, and then click the Statistics tab. + Inserts document statistics, such as page and word counts, as a field. To view the statistics of a document, choose File - Properties, and then click the Statistics tab. - Templates + Templates - Inserts the filename, the path, or the filename without the file extension of the current template. You can also insert the names of the "Category" and the "Style" formats used in the current template. + Inserts the filename, the path, or the filename without the file extension of the current template. You can also insert the names of the "Category" and the "Style" formats used in the current template. - Time + Time - Inserts the current time. You can insert the time as a fixed field - Time (fixed) - that does not change, or as a dynamic field - Time - that it is updated automatically. To manually update the Time field, press F9. + Inserts the current time. You can insert the time as a fixed field - Time (fixed) - that does not change, or as a dynamic field - Time - that it is updated automatically. To manually update the Time field, press F9.
- The following fields can only be inserted if the corresponding field type is selected in the Type list. + The following fields can only be inserted if the corresponding field type is selected in the Type list.
-Selecton "Document" and "DocInformation" tab page this is called "Select", on the other tab pages "Selection" - Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert. - To quickly insert a field from the list, hold down Command +Selecton "Document" and "DocInformation" tab page this is called "Select", on the other tab pages "Selection" + Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert. + To quickly insert a field from the list, hold down Command Ctrl and double-click the field. - Fields + Fields - Function + Function - Previous page + Previous page - Inserts the page number of the previous page in the document. + Inserts the page number of the previous page in the document. - Next page + Next page - Inserts the page number of the next page in the document. + Inserts the page number of the next page in the document. - Page Number + Page Number - Inserts the current page number. + Inserts the current page number.
- In the Format, click the numbering format that you want to use. - If you want, you can enter an Offset for the displayed page number. With an Offset value of 1, the field will display a number that is 1 more than the current page number, but only if a page with that number exists. On the last page of the document, this same field will be empty. + In the Format, click the numbering format that you want to use. + If you want, you can enter an Offset for the displayed page number. With an Offset value of 1, the field will display a number that is 1 more than the current page number, but only if a page with that number exists. On the last page of the document, this same field will be empty.
-Offset - Enter the offset value that you want to apply to a page number field, for example "+1". +Offset + Enter the offset value that you want to apply to a page number field, for example "+1".
- If you want to change the actual page number and not the displayed number, do not use the Offset value. To change page numbers, read the Page Numbers guide. + If you want to change the actual page number and not the displayed number, do not use the Offset value. To change page numbers, read the Page Numbers guide.
-Format - Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format. +Format + Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format.
- When you click "Additional formats", the Number Format dialog opens, where you can define a custom format. + When you click "Additional formats", the Number Format dialog opens, where you can define a custom format. - If you choose "Chapter number without separator" for a chapter field, the separators that are specified for chapter number in Tools - Outline numbering are not displayed. - If you choose "chapter number" as the format for reference fields, only the number of the chapter heading containing the referenced object is displayed in the field. If the paragraph style for the chapter heading is not numbered, the field is left blank. - The following number range formats are for paragraphs formatted with numbered or bulleted lists: + If you choose "Chapter number without separator" for a chapter field, the separators that are specified for chapter number in Tools - Outline numbering are not displayed. + If you choose "chapter number" as the format for reference fields, only the number of the chapter heading containing the referenced object is displayed in the field. If the paragraph style for the chapter heading is not numbered, the field is left blank. + The following number range formats are for paragraphs formatted with numbered or bulleted lists: - Category and number + Category and number - The format contains everything between the beginning of the paragraph and directly after the number-range field + The format contains everything between the beginning of the paragraph and directly after the number-range field - Caption text + Caption text - The format contains the text following the number-range field up to the end of the paragraph + The format contains the text following the number-range field up to the end of the paragraph - Number + Number - The format only contains the reference number + The format only contains the reference number
-Inserts the field as static content, that is, the field cannot be updated. +Inserts the field as static content, that is, the field cannot be updated. Level - Select the chapter heading level that you want to include in the selected field. + Select the chapter heading level that you want to include in the selected field. -Offset in days/minutes - Enter the offset that you want to apply to a date or time field. +Offset in days/minutes + Enter the offset that you want to apply to a date or time field.
- Value - Enter the contents that you want to add to a user-defined field. + Value + Enter the contents that you want to add to a user-defined field.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp index 1bb0abf7f7..c615ed7c81 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp @@ -31,215 +31,215 @@
-Cross-references -This is where you insert the references or referenced fields into the current document. References are referenced fields within the same document or within sub-documents of a master document. +Cross-references +This is where you insert the references or referenced fields into the current document. References are referenced fields within the same document or within sub-documents of a master document.
-The advantage of entering a cross-reference as a field is that you do not have to adjust the references manually every time you change the document. Just update the fields with F9 and the references in the document are updated too. +The advantage of entering a cross-reference as a field is that you do not have to adjust the references manually every time you change the document. Just update the fields with F9 and the references in the document are updated too.
-Type -Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Selection list, and then click Insert. The following fields are available: +Type +Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Selection list, and then click Insert. The following fields are available: -Type +Type -Meaning +Meaning -Set Reference +Set Reference -Set target for a referenced field. Under Name, enter a name for the reference. When inserting the reference, the name will then appear as an identification in the list box Selection. -In an HTML document, reference fields entered this way will be ignored. For the target in HTML documents, you have to insert a bookmark. +Set target for a referenced field. Under Name, enter a name for the reference. When inserting the reference, the name will then appear as an identification in the list box Selection. +In an HTML document, reference fields entered this way will be ignored. For the target in HTML documents, you have to insert a bookmark. -Insert Reference +Insert Reference -Inserting a reference to another position in the document. The corresponding text position has to be defined with "Set Reference" first. Otherwise, inserting a reference by choosing a field name under Selection is not possible. -In master documents, you can also reference from one sub-document to another. Note that the reference name will not appear in the selection field and has to be entered "by hand". -In an HTML document, reference fields entered this way will be ignored. For referenced fields in HTML documents, you have to insert a hyperlink. +Inserting a reference to another position in the document. The corresponding text position has to be defined with "Set Reference" first. Otherwise, inserting a reference by choosing a field name under Selection is not possible. +In master documents, you can also reference from one sub-document to another. Note that the reference name will not appear in the selection field and has to be entered "by hand". +In an HTML document, reference fields entered this way will be ignored. For referenced fields in HTML documents, you have to insert a hyperlink. -Headings +Headings -The Selection box shows a list of all headings in the order of their appearance in the document. +The Selection box shows a list of all headings in the order of their appearance in the document. -Numbered Paragraphs +Numbered Paragraphs -The Selection box shows a list of all numbered headings and numbered paragraphs in the order of their appearance in the document. +The Selection box shows a list of all numbered headings and numbered paragraphs in the order of their appearance in the document. -Bookmarks +Bookmarks -After inserting a bookmark in the document with Insert - Bookmark, the bookmarks entry on the References tab becomes usable. Bookmarks are used to mark certain text passages in a document. In a text document, you can use the bookmarks, for example, to jump from one passage in the document to another. -In an HTML document, these bookmarks become anchors <A name>, which determine the target of hyperlinks for example. +After inserting a bookmark in the document with Insert - Bookmark, the bookmarks entry on the References tab becomes usable. Bookmarks are used to mark certain text passages in a document. In a text document, you can use the bookmarks, for example, to jump from one passage in the document to another. +In an HTML document, these bookmarks become anchors <A name>, which determine the target of hyperlinks for example. -Footnotes +Footnotes -If your documents contains a footnote, you can select the Footnotes entry. A reference to a footnote returns the footnote number. +If your documents contains a footnote, you can select the Footnotes entry. A reference to a footnote returns the footnote number. -(Inserted objects with captions) +(Inserted objects with captions) -You can set references to objects that have captions applied. For example, insert a picture, right-click the picture, choose Caption. Now the object shows up as a numbered "Illustration" in the list. +You can set references to objects that have captions applied. For example, insert a picture, right-click the picture, choose Caption. Now the object shows up as a numbered "Illustration" in the list.
-References are fields. To remove a reference, delete the field. If you set a longer text as a reference and you do not want to reenter it after deleting the reference, select the text and copy it to the clipboard. You can then reinsert it as "unformatted text" at the same position using the command Edit - Paste special. The text remains intact while the reference is deleted. +References are fields. To remove a reference, delete the field. If you set a longer text as a reference and you do not want to reenter it after deleting the reference, select the text and copy it to the clipboard. You can then reinsert it as "unformatted text" at the same position using the command Edit - Paste special. The text remains intact while the reference is deleted. -Selectionon "Document" and "DocInformation" tab page this is called "Select", on the other tab pages "Selection" -Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, select a format in the "Insert reference to" list, and then click Insert. -To quickly insert a field from the list, hold down Command +Selectionon "Document" and "DocInformation" tab page this is called "Select", on the other tab pages "Selection" +Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, select a format in the "Insert reference to" list, and then click Insert. +To quickly insert a field from the list, hold down Command Ctrl and double-click the field.
-In the Insert reference to list, click the format that you want to use. +In the Insert reference to list, click the format that you want to use. -Insert reference to -Select the format that you want to use for the selected reference field. The following formats are available: +Insert reference to +Select the format that you want to use for the selected reference field. The following formats are available: -Format +Format -Meaning +Meaning -Page +Page -Inserts the number of the page containing the reference target. +Inserts the number of the page containing the reference target. -Reference +Reference -Inserts the complete reference target text. For footnotes the footnote number is inserted. +Inserts the complete reference target text. For footnotes the footnote number is inserted. -Above/Below +Above/Below -Inserts "above" or "below", depending on the location of the reference target relative to the position of the reference field. +Inserts "above" or "below", depending on the location of the reference target relative to the position of the reference field. -As Page Style +As Page Style -Inserts the number of the page containing the reference target using the format specified in the page style. +Inserts the number of the page containing the reference target using the format specified in the page style. -Number +Number -Inserts the number of the heading or numbered paragraph, including superior levels depending on the context. See note below this table for more information. +Inserts the number of the heading or numbered paragraph, including superior levels depending on the context. See note below this table for more information. -Number (no context) +Number (no context) -Inserts only the number of the heading or numbered paragraph. +Inserts only the number of the heading or numbered paragraph. -Number (full context) +Number (full context) -Inserts the number of the heading or numbered paragraph, including all superior levels. +Inserts the number of the heading or numbered paragraph, including all superior levels. -Chapter +Chapter -Inserts the number of the chapter containing the reference target. +Inserts the number of the chapter containing the reference target. -Category and Number +Category and Number -Inserts the category (caption type) and the number of the reference target. This option is only available when the reference target is an object with a caption. +Inserts the category (caption type) and the number of the reference target. This option is only available when the reference target is an object with a caption. -Caption Text +Caption Text -Inserts the caption label of the reference target. This option is only available when the reference target is an object with a caption. +Inserts the caption label of the reference target. This option is only available when the reference target is an object with a caption. -Numbering +Numbering -Inserts the caption number of the reference target. This option is only available when the reference target is an object with a caption. +Inserts the caption number of the reference target. This option is only available when the reference target is an object with a caption.
-The "Number" format inserts the number of the heading or numbered paragraph. The superior levels are included depending on the context, as necessary. -For example, when you are in a chapter 1, subchapter 2, subpart 5, this may be numbered as 1.2.5. When you insert here a reference to text in the previous subpart "1.2.4" and you apply the "Number" format, then the reference will be shown as "4". If in this example the numbering is set to show more sublevels, the same reference will be shown as "2.4" or "1.2.4", depending on the setting. If you use the "Number (full context)" format, you will always see "1.2.4", no matter how the numbered paragraph is formatted. +The "Number" format inserts the number of the heading or numbered paragraph. The superior levels are included depending on the context, as necessary. +For example, when you are in a chapter 1, subchapter 2, subpart 5, this may be numbered as 1.2.5. When you insert here a reference to text in the previous subpart "1.2.4" and you apply the "Number" format, then the reference will be shown as "4". If in this example the numbering is set to show more sublevels, the same reference will be shown as "2.4" or "1.2.4", depending on the setting. If you use the "Number (full context)" format, you will always see "1.2.4", no matter how the numbered paragraph is formatted.
-Name -Type the name of the user-defined field that you want to create. To set a target, click "Set Reference" in the Type list, type a name in this box, and then click Insert. To reference the new target, click the target name in the Selection list. +Name +Type the name of the user-defined field that you want to create. To set a target, click "Set Reference" in the Type list, type a name in this box, and then click Insert. To reference the new target, click the target name in the Selection list.
-In a master document, targets that are in different sub-documents are not displayed in the Selection list. If you want to insert a reference to the target, you must type the path and the name in the Name box. +In a master document, targets that are in different sub-documents are not displayed in the Selection list. If you want to insert a reference to the target, you must type the path and the name in the Name box. -Enter the contents that you want to add to a user-defined fields. +Enter the contents that you want to add to a user-defined fields. -If you select text in the document, and then insert a reference, the selected text becomes the contents of the field that you insert.Value box (always disabled) +If you select text in the document, and then insert a reference, the selected text becomes the contents of the field that you insert.Value box (always disabled) -Edit the value. +Edit the value. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp index 130a1673f4..41e2dba7a1 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp @@ -29,160 +29,160 @@
-Functions +Functions -Sets additional function parameters for fields. The type of parameter depends on the field type that you select. -Depending on the field type that you select, you can assign conditions to certain functions. For example, you can define a field that executes a macro when you click the field in the document, or a condition that, when met, hides a field. You can also define placeholder fields that insert graphics, tables, frames and other objects into your document when needed. +Sets additional function parameters for fields. The type of parameter depends on the field type that you select. +Depending on the field type that you select, you can assign conditions to certain functions. For example, you can define a field that executes a macro when you click the field in the document, or a condition that, when met, hides a field. You can also define placeholder fields that insert graphics, tables, frames and other objects into your document when needed.
-Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert. +Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert. -Type +Type -Meaning +Meaning -Conditional text +Conditional text -Inserts text if a certain condition is met. For example, enter "sun eq 1" in the Condition box, and then the text that you want to insert when the variable "sun" equals "1" in the Then box. If you want, you can also enter the text that you want to display when this condition is not met in the Else box. To define the variable "sun", click the Variables tab, select "Set variable", type "sun" in the Name box, and its value in the Value box. +Inserts text if a certain condition is met. For example, enter "sun eq 1" in the Condition box, and then the text that you want to insert when the variable "sun" equals "1" in the Then box. If you want, you can also enter the text that you want to display when this condition is not met in the Else box. To define the variable "sun", click the Variables tab, select "Set variable", type "sun" in the Name box, and its value in the Value box. -Input list +Input list -Inserts a text field that displays one item from a list. You can add, edit, and remove items, and change their order in the list. Click an Input list field in your document or press Ctrl+Shift+F9 to display the Choose Item dialog. +Inserts a text field that displays one item from a list. You can add, edit, and remove items, and change their order in the list. Click an Input list field in your document or press Ctrl+Shift+F9 to display the Choose Item dialog. -Input field +Input field -Inserts a text field that you can open by clicking it in the document. You can then change the text that is displayed. +Inserts a text field that you can open by clicking it in the document. You can then change the text that is displayed. -Execute macro +Execute macro -Inserts a text field that runs a macro when you click the field in the document. To assign a macro to the field, click the Macro button. +Inserts a text field that runs a macro when you click the field in the document. To assign a macro to the field, click the Macro button. -Placeholder +Placeholder -Inserts a placeholder field in the document, for example, for graphics. When you click a placeholder field in the document, you are prompted to insert the item that is missing. +Inserts a placeholder field in the document, for example, for graphics. When you click a placeholder field in the document, you are prompted to insert the item that is missing. -Hidden text +Hidden text -Inserts a text field that is hidden when the condition that you specify is met. To use this function, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and clear the Fields: Hidden text check box. +Inserts a text field that is hidden when the condition that you specify is met. To use this function, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and clear the Fields: Hidden text check box. -Hidden Paragraph +Hidden Paragraph -Hides a paragraph when the condition that you specify is met. To use this function, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and clear the Fields: Hidden paragraph check box. +Hides a paragraph when the condition that you specify is met. To use this function, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and clear the Fields: Hidden paragraph check box. -Combine characters +Combine characters -Combines up to 6 characters, so that they behave as a single character. This feature is only available when Asian fonts are supported. +Combines up to 6 characters, so that they behave as a single character. This feature is only available when Asian fonts are supported.
-Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format. +Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format. -For function fields, the format field is only used for fields of the type placeholder. Here, the format determines the object for which the placeholder stands. +For function fields, the format field is only used for fields of the type placeholder. Here, the format determines the object for which the placeholder stands.
-Condition -For fields linked to a condition, enter the criteria here. +Condition +For fields linked to a condition, enter the criteria here.
-Then, Else -Enter the text to display when the condition is met in the Then box, and the text to display when the condition is not met in the Else box. -You can also insert database fields in the Then and Else boxes using the format "databasename.tablename.fieldname". -If the table or the field name does not exist in a database, nothing is inserted. -If you include the quotes in "databasename.tablename.fieldname", the expression is inserted as text. +Then, Else +Enter the text to display when the condition is met in the Then box, and the text to display when the condition is not met in the Else box. +You can also insert database fields in the Then and Else boxes using the format "databasename.tablename.fieldname". +If the table or the field name does not exist in a database, nothing is inserted. +If you include the quotes in "databasename.tablename.fieldname", the expression is inserted as text.
-Reference -Type the text that you want to display in the field. If you are inserting a placeholder field, type the text that you want to display as a help tip when you rest the mouse pointer over the field. +Reference +Type the text that you want to display in the field. If you are inserting a placeholder field, type the text that you want to display as a help tip when you rest the mouse pointer over the field.
-FormatUFI: see spec "Macro Selector..." -Select the macro that you want to run when the field is clicked. -Macro name -Displays the name of the selected macro. -Placeholder -Type the text that you want to appear in the placeholder field. -Hidden text -Type the text that you want to hide if a condition is met. -Characters -Enter the characters that you want to combine. You can combine a maximum of 6 characters. This option is only available for the Combine characters field type. -Value -Enter a value for the selected field. +FormatUFI: see spec "Macro Selector..." +Select the macro that you want to run when the field is clicked. +Macro name +Displays the name of the selected macro. +Placeholder +Type the text that you want to appear in the placeholder field. +Hidden text +Type the text that you want to hide if a condition is met. +Characters +Enter the characters that you want to combine. You can combine a maximum of 6 characters. This option is only available for the Combine characters field type. +Value +Enter a value for the selected field.
-Macro -Opens the Macro Selector, where you can choose the macro that will run when you click the selected field in the document. This button is only available for the "Execute macro" function field. +Macro +Opens the Macro Selector, where you can choose the macro that will run when you click the selected field in the document. This button is only available for the "Execute macro" function field.
-The following controls are displayed for Input list fields: +The following controls are displayed for Input list fields: -Item -Enter a new item. +Item +Enter a new item. -Add -Adds the Item to the list. +Add +Adds the Item to the list. -Items on list -Lists the items. The topmost item is shown in the document. +Items on list +Lists the items. The topmost item is shown in the document. -Remove -Removes the selected item from the list. +Remove +Removes the selected item from the list. -Move Up -Moves the selected item up in the list. +Move Up +Moves the selected item up in the list. -Move Down -Moves the selected item down in the list. +Move Down +Moves the selected item down in the list. -Name -Enter a unique name for the Input list. +Name +Enter a unique name for the Input list. -Choose Item -This dialog is shown when you click an Input list field in the document. -Choose the item that you want to display in the document, then click OK. +Choose Item +This dialog is shown when you click an Input list field in the document. +Choose the item that you want to display in the document, then click OK. -Edit -Displays the Edit Fields: Functions dialog, where you can edit the Input list. +Edit +Displays the Edit Fields: Functions dialog, where you can edit the Input list. -Next -Closes the current Input list and displays the next, if available. You see this button when you open the Choose Item dialog by Ctrl+Shift+F9. +Next +Closes the current Input list and displays the next, if available. You see this button when you open the Choose Item dialog by Ctrl+Shift+F9. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04090004.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04090004.xhp index 59af81fce9..64cf3b23e5 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04090004.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04090004.xhp @@ -29,120 +29,120 @@
-DocInformation -DocInformation fields contain information about the properties of a document, such as the date a document was created. To view the properties of a document, choose File - Properties. +DocInformation +DocInformation fields contain information about the properties of a document, such as the date a document was created. To view the properties of a document, choose File - Properties.
-When you export and import an HTML document containing DocInformation fields, special $[officename] formats are used. +When you export and import an HTML document containing DocInformation fields, special $[officename] formats are used. -Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert. +Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert. -Type +Type -Meaning +Meaning -Modified +Modified -Inserts the name of the author, and the date, or the time of the last save. +Inserts the name of the author, and the date, or the time of the last save. -Editing time +Editing time -Inserts the amount of time spent on editing a document. +Inserts the amount of time spent on editing a document. -Comments +Comments -Inserts the comments as entered in the Description tab page of the Properties dialog. +Inserts the comments as entered in the Description tab page of the Properties dialog. -Document number +Document number -Inserts the version number of the current document. +Inserts the version number of the current document. -Created +Created -Inserts the name of the author, and the date, or the time when the document was created. +Inserts the name of the author, and the date, or the time when the document was created. -Info 0 - 3 +Info 0 - 3 -Inserts the contents of the info fields found on the User Defined tab of the File - Properties dialog. +Inserts the contents of the info fields found on the User Defined tab of the File - Properties dialog. -Last printed +Last printed -Inserts the name of the author, and the date or time that the document was last printed. +Inserts the name of the author, and the date or time that the document was last printed. -Keywords +Keywords -Inserts the keywords as entered in the Description tab of the File Properties dialog. +Inserts the keywords as entered in the Description tab of the File Properties dialog. -Subject +Subject -Inserts the subject as entered in the Description tab of the File Properties dialog. +Inserts the subject as entered in the Description tab of the File Properties dialog. -Title +Title -Inserts the title as entered in the Description tab of the File Properties dialog. +Inserts the title as entered in the Description tab of the File Properties dialog.
-Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert. +Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert. -For the "Created", "Modified", and "Last printed" field types, you can include the author, date, and time of the corresponding operation. +For the "Created", "Modified", and "Last printed" field types, you can include the author, date, and time of the corresponding operation. -Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format. +Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format.
-Fixed content -Inserts the field as static content, that is, the field cannot be updated. +Fixed content +Inserts the field as static content, that is, the field cannot be updated.
-Fields with fixed content are only evaluated when you create a new document from a template that contains such a field. For example, a date field with fixed content inserts the date that a new document was created from the template. +Fields with fixed content are only evaluated when you create a new document from a template that contains such a field. For example, a date field with fixed content inserts the date that a new document was created from the template. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04090005.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04090005.xhp index 9e93934e11..c3f78a05f3 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04090005.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04090005.xhp @@ -31,156 +31,156 @@ user-defined fields, restriction -Variables -Variable fields let you add dynamic content to your document. For example, you can use a variable to reset the page numbering. +Variables +Variable fields let you add dynamic content to your document. For example, you can use a variable to reset the page numbering.
-User-defined fields are only available in the current document. +User-defined fields are only available in the current document. -Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert. +Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert. -Type +Type -Description +Description -Set Variable +Set Variable -Defines a variable and its value. You can change the value of a variable by clicking in front of the variable field, and then choosing Edit - Field. +Defines a variable and its value. You can change the value of a variable by clicking in front of the variable field, and then choosing Edit - Field. -Show Variable +Show Variable -Inserts the current value of the variable that you click in the Selection list. +Inserts the current value of the variable that you click in the Selection list. -DDE field +DDE field -Inserts a DDE link into the document, that you can update as often as you want through the assigned name. +Inserts a DDE link into the document, that you can update as often as you want through the assigned name. -Insert Formula +Insert Formula -Inserts a fixed number, or the result of a formula. +Inserts a fixed number, or the result of a formula. -Input field +Input field -Inserts a new value for a variable or a User Field. -The value of a variable in an Input field is only valid from where the field is inserted and onwards. To change the value of the variable later in the document, insert another Input field of the same name, but with a different value. However, the value of a User Field is changed globally. -The variables are displayed in the Selection field. When you click the Insert button, the dialogInput Field appears, where you can enter the new value or additional text as a remark. +Inserts a new value for a variable or a User Field. +The value of a variable in an Input field is only valid from where the field is inserted and onwards. To change the value of the variable later in the document, insert another Input field of the same name, but with a different value. However, the value of a User Field is changed globally. +The variables are displayed in the Selection field. When you click the Insert button, the dialogInput Field appears, where you can enter the new value or additional text as a remark. -Number range +Number range -Inserts automatic numbering for tables, graphics, or text frames. +Inserts automatic numbering for tables, graphics, or text frames. -Set page variable +Set page variable -Inserts a reference point in the document, after which the page count restarts. Select "on" to enable the reference point, and "off" to disable it. You can also enter an offset to start the page count at a different number. +Inserts a reference point in the document, after which the page count restarts. Select "on" to enable the reference point, and "off" to disable it. You can also enter an offset to start the page count at a different number. -Show Page Variable +Show Page Variable -Displays the number of pages from the "Set page variable" reference point to this field. +Displays the number of pages from the "Set page variable" reference point to this field. -User Field +User Field -Inserts a custom global variable. You can use the User Field to define a variable for a condition statement. When you change a User Field, all instances of the variable in the document are updated. +Inserts a custom global variable. You can use the User Field to define a variable for a condition statement. When you change a User Field, all instances of the variable in the document are updated.
-Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format. +Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format. -For user-defined fields, click the format that you want to apply in the Format list, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format. +For user-defined fields, click the format that you want to apply in the Format list, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format. -Type the name of the user-defined field that you want to create. +Type the name of the user-defined field that you want to create. -Enter the contents that you want to add to a user-defined field. +Enter the contents that you want to add to a user-defined field. -In the Format list, define if the value is inserted as text or a number. +In the Format list, define if the value is inserted as text or a number. -Selectionon "Document" and "DocInformation" tab page this is called "Select", on the other tab pages "Selection" -Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert. -To quickly insert a field from the list, hold down Command +Selectionon "Document" and "DocInformation" tab page this is called "Select", on the other tab pages "Selection" +Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert. +To quickly insert a field from the list, hold down Command Ctrl and double-click the field. -In an HTML document, two additional fields are available for the "Set variable" field type: HTML_ON and HTML_OFF. The text that you type in the Value box is converted to an opening HTML tag (<Value>) or to a closing HTML (</Value>) tag when the file is saved as an HTML document, depending on the option that you select. -If you double-click an entry while holding the Ctrl key or select the desired variable and press the spacebar, it is immediately inserted into your document. -Formula -This option is only available if the "Insert formula" field type is selected. +In an HTML document, two additional fields are available for the "Set variable" field type: HTML_ON and HTML_OFF. The text that you type in the Value box is converted to an opening HTML tag (<Value>) or to a closing HTML (</Value>) tag when the file is saved as an HTML document, depending on the option that you select. +If you double-click an entry while holding the Ctrl key or select the desired variable and press the spacebar, it is immediately inserted into your document. +Formula +This option is only available if the "Insert formula" field type is selected.
-Invisible -Hides the field contents in the document. The field is inserted as a thin gray mark in the document. This option is only available for the "Set Variable" and "User Field" field types. +Invisible +Hides the field contents in the document. The field is inserted as a thin gray mark in the document. This option is only available for the "Set Variable" and "User Field" field types.
-Chapter numbering -Sets the options for resetting chapter numbers. +Chapter numbering +Sets the options for resetting chapter numbers. -Level -Choose the heading or chapter level at which to restart numbering in the document. +Level +Choose the heading or chapter level at which to restart numbering in the document. -Separator -Type the character that you want to use as a separator between the heading or chapter levels. +Separator +Type the character that you want to use as a separator between the heading or chapter levels.
-Apply -Adds the user-defined field to the Selection list. +Apply +Adds the user-defined field to the Selection list.
-Delete -Removes the user-defined field from the selection list. You can only remove fields that are not used in the current document. To remove a field that is used in the current document from the list, first delete all instances of the field in the document, and then remove it from the list. +Delete +Removes the user-defined field from the selection list. You can only remove fields that are not used in the current document. To remove a field that is used in the current document from the list, first delete all instances of the field in the document, and then remove it from the list. - + Icon -Delete +Delete
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp index ada92b8bbb..c83a63d752 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp @@ -29,98 +29,98 @@
-Database -You can insert fields from any database, for example, address fields, into your document. +Database +You can insert fields from any database, for example, address fields, into your document.
-Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert. +Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert. -Field type +Field type -Meaning +Meaning -Any Record +Any Record -Inserts the contents of the database field that you specify in the Record Number box as a mail merge field if the Condition that you enter is met. Only records selected by a multiple selection in the data source view are considered. -You can use this field to insert several records into a document. Simply insert the Any Record field in front of the form letter fields that use a certain record. +Inserts the contents of the database field that you specify in the Record Number box as a mail merge field if the Condition that you enter is met. Only records selected by a multiple selection in the data source view are considered. +You can use this field to insert several records into a document. Simply insert the Any Record field in front of the form letter fields that use a certain record. -Database Name +Database Name -Inserts the name of the database table selected in the Database selection box. The "Database Name" field is a global field, that is, if you insert a different database name in your document, the contents of all previously inserted "Database Name" fields are updated. +Inserts the name of the database table selected in the Database selection box. The "Database Name" field is a global field, that is, if you insert a different database name in your document, the contents of all previously inserted "Database Name" fields are updated. -Mail merge field +Mail merge field -Inserts the name of a database field as a placeholder, so that you can create a mail merge document. The field content is automatically inserted when you print the form letter. +Inserts the name of a database field as a placeholder, so that you can create a mail merge document. The field content is automatically inserted when you print the form letter. -Next record +Next record -Inserts the contents of the next mail merge field in your document, if the condition that you define is met. The records that you want to include must be selected in the data source view. -You can use the "Next record" field to insert the contents of consecutive records between the mail merge fields in a document. +Inserts the contents of the next mail merge field in your document, if the condition that you define is met. The records that you want to include must be selected in the data source view. +You can use the "Next record" field to insert the contents of consecutive records between the mail merge fields in a document. -Record number +Record number -Inserts the number of the selected database record. +Inserts the number of the selected database record.
-Database Selection -Select the database table or the database query that you want the field to refer to. You can include fields from more than one database or query in a document. +Database Selection +Select the database table or the database query that you want the field to refer to. You can include fields from more than one database or query in a document. -For fields linked to a condition, enter the criteria here. +For fields linked to a condition, enter the criteria here. -If you want, you can assign a condition that must be met before the contents of the "Any Record" and "Next Record" fields are inserted. The default condition is "True", that is, the condition is always true if you do not change the condition text. +If you want, you can assign a condition that must be met before the contents of the "Any Record" and "Next Record" fields are inserted. The default condition is "True", that is, the condition is always true if you do not change the condition text. -Record number -Enter the number of the record that you want to insert when the condition that you specify is met. The record number corresponds to the current selection in the data source view. For example, if you select the last 5 records in a database containing 10 records, the number of the first record will be 1, and not 6. -If you refer to fields in a different database (or in a different table or query within the same database), $[officename] determines the record number relative to the current selection. -Format -Select the format of the field that you want to insert. This option is available for numerical, boolean, date and time fields.see #i64135 +Record number +Enter the number of the record that you want to insert when the condition that you specify is met. The record number corresponds to the current selection in the data source view. For example, if you select the last 5 records in a database containing 10 records, the number of the first record will be 1, and not 6. +If you refer to fields in a different database (or in a different table or query within the same database), $[officename] determines the record number relative to the current selection. +Format +Select the format of the field that you want to insert. This option is available for numerical, boolean, date and time fields.see #i64135 -From database -Uses the format defined in the selected database. +From database +Uses the format defined in the selected database. -Browse -Opens a file open dialog where you can select a database file (*.odb). The selected file is added to the Databases Selection list. +Browse +Opens a file open dialog where you can select a database file (*.odb). The selected file is added to the Databases Selection list. -User defined -Applies the format that you select in the List of user-defined formats. +User defined +Applies the format that you select in the List of user-defined formats. -List of user-defined formats -Lists the available user-defined formats. +List of user-defined formats +Lists the available user-defined formats. -Printing a form letter -When you print a document that contains database fields, a dialog asks you if you want to print a form letter. If you answer Yes, the Mail Merge dialog opens where you can select the database records to print. -Do not show warning again -Suppresses this dialog from now on. There is no easy way to get it back! +Printing a form letter +When you print a document that contains database fields, a dialog asks you if you want to print a form letter. If you answer Yes, the Mail Merge dialog opens where you can select the database records to print. +Do not show warning again +Suppresses this dialog from now on. There is no easy way to get it back! diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04090007.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04090007.xhp index 3e21a4d2d4..9fa6dd33be 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04090007.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04090007.xhp @@ -38,102 +38,102 @@ date fields;HTML DocInformation fields MW changed "$[officename] Writer;tags" to "$[officename];special HTML tags" -Special Tags -When you save a document that contains fields as an HTML document, $[officename] automatically converts date, time, and DocInformation fields to special HTML tags. The field contents are inserted between the opening and closing HTML tags of the converted fields. These special HTML tags do not correspond to standard HTML tags. -$[officename] Writer fields are identified by the <SDFIELD> tag in an HTML document. The field type, the format, and the name of the special field are included in the opening HTML tag. The format of a field tag that is recognized by an HTML filter depends on the field type. +Special Tags +When you save a document that contains fields as an HTML document, $[officename] automatically converts date, time, and DocInformation fields to special HTML tags. The field contents are inserted between the opening and closing HTML tags of the converted fields. These special HTML tags do not correspond to standard HTML tags. +$[officename] Writer fields are identified by the <SDFIELD> tag in an HTML document. The field type, the format, and the name of the special field are included in the opening HTML tag. The format of a field tag that is recognized by an HTML filter depends on the field type.
-Date and Time Fields -For "Date" and "Time" fields, the TYPE parameter equals DATETIME. The format of the date or the time is specified by the SDNUM parameter, for example, DD:MM:YY for dates, or HH:MM:SS for time. -For fixed date and time fields, the date or the time is specified by the SDVAL parameter. -Examples of date and time special HTML tags that are recognized by $[officename] as fields are shown in the following table: +Date and Time Fields +For "Date" and "Time" fields, the TYPE parameter equals DATETIME. The format of the date or the time is specified by the SDNUM parameter, for example, DD:MM:YY for dates, or HH:MM:SS for time. +For fixed date and time fields, the date or the time is specified by the SDVAL parameter. +Examples of date and time special HTML tags that are recognized by $[officename] as fields are shown in the following table: -Fields +Fields -$[officename] Tag +$[officename] Tag -Date is fixed +Date is fixed -<SDFIELD TYPE=DATETIME SDVAL="35843,4239988426" SDNUM="1031;1031;DD/MM/YY">17/02/98</SDFIELD> +<SDFIELD TYPE=DATETIME SDVAL="35843,4239988426" SDNUM="1031;1031;DD/MM/YY">17/02/98</SDFIELD> -Date is variable +Date is variable -<SDFIELD TYPE=DATETIME SDNUM="1031;1031;DD/MM/YY">17/02/98</SDFIELD> +<SDFIELD TYPE=DATETIME SDNUM="1031;1031;DD/MM/YY">17/02/98</SDFIELD> -Time is fixed +Time is fixed -<SDFIELD TYPE=DATETIME SDVAL="35843,4240335648" SDNUM="1031;1031;HH:MM:SS">10:10:36</SDFIELD> +<SDFIELD TYPE=DATETIME SDVAL="35843,4240335648" SDNUM="1031;1031;HH:MM:SS">10:10:36</SDFIELD> -Time is variable +Time is variable -<SDFIELD TYPE=DATETIME SDNUM="1031;1031;HH:MM:SS">10:10:36</SDFIELD> +<SDFIELD TYPE=DATETIME SDNUM="1031;1031;HH:MM:SS">10:10:36</SDFIELD>
-DocInformation Fields -For DocInformation fields, the TYPE parameter equals DOCINFO. The SUBTYPE parameter displays the specific field type, for example, for the "Created" DocInformation field, SUBTYPE=CREATE. For date and time DocInformation fields, the FORMAT parameter equals DATE or TIME, and the SDNUM parameter indicates the number format that is used. The SDFIXED parameter indicates if the content of the DocInformation field is fixed or not. -The contents of a fixed date or time field are equal to the SDVAL parameter, otherwise the contents are equal to the text found between the SDFIELD HTML tags. -Examples of DocInformation special HTML tags that are recognized by $[officename] as fields are shown in the following table: +DocInformation Fields +For DocInformation fields, the TYPE parameter equals DOCINFO. The SUBTYPE parameter displays the specific field type, for example, for the "Created" DocInformation field, SUBTYPE=CREATE. For date and time DocInformation fields, the FORMAT parameter equals DATE or TIME, and the SDNUM parameter indicates the number format that is used. The SDFIXED parameter indicates if the content of the DocInformation field is fixed or not. +The contents of a fixed date or time field are equal to the SDVAL parameter, otherwise the contents are equal to the text found between the SDFIELD HTML tags. +Examples of DocInformation special HTML tags that are recognized by $[officename] as fields are shown in the following table: -Fields +Fields -$[officename] Tag +$[officename] Tag -Description (fixed content) +Description (fixed content) -<SDFIELD TYPE=DOCINFO SUBTYPE=COMMENT SDFIXED>Description</SDFIELD> +<SDFIELD TYPE=DOCINFO SUBTYPE=COMMENT SDFIXED>Description</SDFIELD> -Creation date +Creation date -<SDFIELD TYPE=DOCINFO SUBTYPE=CREATE FORMAT=DATE SDNUM="1031;1031;QQ YY">1. Quarter 98</SDFIELD> +<SDFIELD TYPE=DOCINFO SUBTYPE=CREATE FORMAT=DATE SDNUM="1031;1031;QQ YY">1. Quarter 98</SDFIELD> -Creation time (fixed content) +Creation time (fixed content) -<SDFIELD TYPE=DOCINFO SUBTYPE=CREATE FORMAT=TIME SDVAL="0" SDNUM="1031;1031;HH:MM:SS AM/PM" SDFIXED>03:58:35 PM</SDFIELD> +<SDFIELD TYPE=DOCINFO SUBTYPE=CREATE FORMAT=TIME SDVAL="0" SDNUM="1031;1031;HH:MM:SS AM/PM" SDFIXED>03:58:35 PM</SDFIELD> -Modification date +Modification date -<SDFIELD TYPE=DOCINFO SUBTYPE=CHANGE FORMAT=DATE SDNUM="1031;1031;NN DD MMM, YY">Mo 23 Feb, 98</SDFIELD> +<SDFIELD TYPE=DOCINFO SUBTYPE=CHANGE FORMAT=DATE SDNUM="1031;1031;NN DD MMM, YY">Mo 23 Feb, 98</SDFIELD>
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp index 041a9e2475..e27d073a87 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp @@ -31,14 +31,14 @@ -Input Field -Inserts a text field that you can open and edit by clicking it in the document. You can use input fields for text, or to assign a new value to a variable. -To change the content of an Input Field in a document, click the field, and then edit the text in the lower box of the dialog. +Input Field +Inserts a text field that you can open and edit by clicking it in the document. You can use input fields for text, or to assign a new value to a variable. +To change the content of an Input Field in a document, click the field, and then edit the text in the lower box of the dialog. -Edit -The upper box displays the name that you entered in the Reference box of the Input Field on the Functions tab of the Fields dialog. The lower box displays the contents of the field. +Edit +The upper box displays the name that you entered in the Reference box of the Input Field on the Functions tab of the Fields dialog. The lower box displays the contents of the field. -Next -Jumps to the next input field in the document. This button is only available when you position the cursor directly before an input field, and then press Shift+Ctrl+F9. +Next +Jumps to the next input field in the document. This button is only available when you position the cursor directly before an input field, and then press Shift+Ctrl+F9. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp index 47ada63ce3..05f6da7646 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp @@ -37,419 +37,410 @@ databases;in conditions hiding; database fields -Defining Conditions +Defining Conditions - Conditions are logical expressions that you can use to control the display of fields and sections in your document. Although the following examples apply to fields, they also apply to sections. - You can define conditions for the following field types: + Conditions are logical expressions that you can use to control the display of fields and sections in your document. Although the following examples apply to fields, they also apply to sections. + You can define conditions for the following field types: - Conditional text: displays text A if the condition is true, or text B if the condition is false. + Conditional text: displays text A if the condition is true, or text B if the condition is false. - Hidden text: hides the contents of the field if the condition is true. + Hidden text: hides the contents of the field if the condition is true. - Hidden paragraph: hides the paragraph if the condition is true. + Hidden paragraph: hides the paragraph if the condition is true. - Any record and next record: controls the access to database records. + Any record and next record: controls the access to database records. - The simplest way to define a condition is to type the logical expression directly in a Condition box using the following values: + The simplest way to define a condition is to type the logical expression directly in a Condition box using the following values: - TRUE + TRUE - The condition is always met. You can also enter any value not equal to 0 as the conditional text. + The condition is always met. You can also enter any value not equal to 0 as the conditional text. - FALSE + FALSE - The condition is not met. You can also enter the value 0. + The condition is not met. You can also enter the value 0.
- If you leave the Condition box empty, the condition is interpreted as not being met. - When you define a condition, use the same elements for defining a formula, namely comparative operators, mathematical and statistical functions, number formats, variables and constants. - You can use the following types of variables when you define a condition: + If you leave the Condition box empty, the condition is interpreted as not being met. + When you define a condition, use the same elements for defining a formula, namely comparative operators, mathematical and statistical functions, number formats, variables and constants. + You can use the following types of variables when you define a condition: - Predefined $[officename] variables that use statistics on document properties + Predefined $[officename] variables that use statistics on document properties - Custom variables, that are a created with the "Set variable" field + Custom variables, that are a created with the "Set variable" field - Variables based on user data + Variables based on user data - Variables based on the contents of database fields + Variables based on the contents of database fields - You cannot use internal variables, such as page and chapter numbers, in condition expression. - Conditions and Variables - The following examples use a variable called "x": + You cannot use internal variables, such as page and chapter numbers, in condition expression. + Conditions and Variables + The following examples use a variable called "x": - x == 1 or x EQ 1 + x == 1 or x EQ 1 - The condition is true if "x" is equal to 1. + The condition is true if "x" is equal to 1. - x != 1 or x NEQ 1 + x != 1 or x NEQ 1 - The condition is true if "x" does not equal 1. + The condition is true if "x" does not equal 1. - sinx == 0 + sinx == 0 - The condition is true if "x" is a multiple of pi. + The condition is true if "x" is a multiple of pi.
- To use comparative operators with strings, the operands must be bounded by double quotation marks: + To use comparative operators with strings, the operands must be bounded by double quotation marks: - x == "ABC" or x EQ "ABC" + x == "ABC" or x EQ "ABC" - Checks if variable "x" contains (true) the "ABC" string, or not (false). + Checks if variable "x" contains (true) the "ABC" string, or not (false). - x == "" or x EQ "" - or - !x or NOT x + x == "" or x EQ "" + or + !x or NOT x - Checks if the variable "x" contains an empty string. + Checks if the variable "x" contains an empty string.
- The "equal" comparative operator must be represented by two equal signs (==) in a condition. For example, if you define a variable "x" with the value of 1, you can enter the condition as x==1. - User Data - You can include user data when you define conditions. To change your user data, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User data. User data must be entered in the form of strings. You can query the user data with "==" (EQ), "!=" (NEQ), or "!"(NOT). - The following table lists user data variables and their meanings: + The "equal" comparative operator must be represented by two equal signs (==) in a condition. For example, if you define a variable "x" with the value of 1, you can enter the condition as x==1. + User Data + You can include user data when you define conditions. To change your user data, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User data. User data must be entered in the form of strings. You can query the user data with "==" (EQ), "!=" (NEQ), or "!"(NOT). + The following table lists user data variables and their meanings: - Variable + Variable - Meaning + Meaning - user_firstname + user_firstname - First name + First name - user_lastname + user_lastname - Last name + Last name - user_initials + user_initials - Initials + Initials - user_company + user_company - Company + Company - user_street + user_street - Street + Street - user_country + user_country - Country + Country - user_zipcode + user_zipcode - Zip code + Zip code - user_city + user_city - City + City - user_title + user_title - Title + Title - user_position + user_position - Position + Position - user_tel_work + user_tel_work - Business telephone number + Business telephone number - user_tel_home + user_tel_home - Home telephone number + Home telephone number - user_fax + user_fax - Fax number + Fax number - user_email + user_email - E-mail address + E-mail address - user_state + user_state - State (not in all $[officename] versions) + State (not in all $[officename] versions)
- For example, to hide a paragraph, text, or a section from a user with a specific initial, such as "LM", enter the condition: user_initials=="LM". - Conditions and Database Fields - You can define conditions for accessing databases, or database fields. For example, you can check the contents of a database field from a condition, or use database fields in logical expressions. The following table lists a few more examples of using databases in conditions: + For example, to hide a paragraph, text, or a section from a user with a specific initial, such as "LM", enter the condition: user_initials=="LM". + Conditions and Database Fields + You can define conditions for accessing databases, or database fields. For example, you can check the contents of a database field from a condition, or use database fields in logical expressions. The following table lists a few more examples of using databases in conditions: - Example + Example - Meaning + Meaning - Database.Table.Company - Database.Table.Company NEQ "" - Database.Table.Company != "" + Database.Table.Company + Database.Table.Company NEQ "" + Database.Table.Company != "" - The condition is true if the COMPANY field is not empty. (In the first example, no operator is required.) + The condition is true if the COMPANY field is not empty. (In the first example, no operator is required.) - !Database.Table.Company - NOT Database.Table.Company - Database.Table.Company EQ "" - Database.Table.Company =="" + !Database.Table.Company + NOT Database.Table.Company + Database.Table.Company EQ "" + Database.Table.Company =="" - Returns TRUE if the COMPANY field is empty. + Returns TRUE if the COMPANY field is empty. - Database.Table.Company !="Sun" - Database.Table.Company NEQ "Sun" + Database.Table.Company !="Sun" + Database.Table.Company NEQ "Sun" - Returns TRUE if the current entry in the COMPANY field is not "Sun". (Exclamation sign represents a logical NOT.) + Returns TRUE if the current entry in the COMPANY field is not "Sun". (Exclamation sign represents a logical NOT.) - Database.Table.Firstname AND Database.Table.Name + Database.Table.Firstname AND Database.Table.Name - Returns TRUE if the record contains the first and the last name. + Returns TRUE if the record contains the first and the last name.
- Note the difference between the boolean NOT "!" and the comparative operator not equal "!=" (NEQ). - When you refer to a database field in a condition, use the form Databasename.Tablename.Fieldname. If one of the names contains a character that is an operator, such as a minus sign (-), enclose the name in square brackets, for example, Databasename.[Table-name].Fieldname. Never use spaces inside field names.UFI: fixes bug #i25781# - but see #i25983#. Fixes also #i19571# - Example: Hiding an Empty Database Field - You may want to create a condition that hides an empty field, for example, if the COMPANY field is empty for some of the data records. - Select the Hidden Paragraph list entry, and type the following condition: Addressbook.Addresses.Company EQ "" - or type the following - NOT Addressbook.Addresses.Company - If the COMPANY database field is empty, the condition is true and the paragraph is hidden. - To display hidden paragraphs on the screen, you can choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and clear the Fields: Hidden paragraphs check box. - Examples of Conditions in Fields - The following examples use the Conditional text field, although they can be applied to any fields that can be linked to a condition. The syntax used for conditions is also used for the Hidden text, Hidden paragraph, Any record or Next record fields. - To display conditional text based on the number of pages: + Note the difference between the boolean NOT "!" and the comparative operator not equal "!=" (NEQ). + When you refer to a database field in a condition, use the form Databasename.Tablename.Fieldname. If one of the names contains a character that is an operator, such as a minus sign (-), enclose the name in square brackets, for example, Databasename.[Table-name].Fieldname. Never use spaces inside field names.UFI: fixes bug #i25781# - but see #i25983#. Fixes also #i19571# + Example: Hiding an Empty Database Field + You may want to create a condition that hides an empty field, for example, if the COMPANY field is empty for some of the data records. + Select the Hidden Paragraph list entry, and type the following condition: Addressbook.Addresses.Company EQ "" + or type the following + NOT Addressbook.Addresses.Company + If the COMPANY database field is empty, the condition is true and the paragraph is hidden. + To display hidden paragraphs on the screen, you can choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and clear the Fields: Hidden paragraphs check box. + Examples of Conditions in Fields + The following examples use the Conditional text field, although they can be applied to any fields that can be linked to a condition. The syntax used for conditions is also used for the Hidden text, Hidden paragraph, Any record or Next record fields. + To display conditional text based on the number of pages: Choose Insert - Field - More Fields, and then click the Functions tab. - In the Type list, click "Conditional text". + In the Type list, click "Conditional text". - In the Condition box, type "page == 1". + In the Condition box, type "page == 1". - In the Then box, type "There is only one page". + In the Then box, type "There is only one page". - In the Or box, type "There are several pages". + In the Or box, type "There are several pages". - Click Insert, and then click Close. + Click Insert, and then click Close. - To display conditional text based on a user-defined Variable + To display conditional text based on a user-defined Variable Choose Insert - Field - More Fields, and then click the Variables tab. - In the Type list, click "Set Variable". + In the Type list, click "Set Variable". - In the Name box, type "Profit". + In the Name box, type "Profit". - In the Value box, type "5000". + In the Value box, type "5000". - Click Insert. + Click Insert. - Click the Functions tab, and click "Conditional text" in the Type list. + Click the Functions tab, and click "Conditional text" in the Type list. - In the Condition box, type "Profit < 5000". + In the Condition box, type "Profit < 5000". - In the Then box, type "Target is not met". + In the Then box, type "Target is not met". - In the Or box, type "Target is met". + In the Or box, type "Target is met". - Click Insert. + Click Insert. - To edit the contents of the "Profit" variable, double-click the variable field. - To display conditional text based on the contents of a database field: - The first part of this example inserts a space between the "First Name" and "Last Name" fields in a document, and the second part inserts text based on the contents of a field. This example requires that an address data source is registered with $[officename]. + To edit the contents of the "Profit" variable, double-click the variable field. + To display conditional text based on the contents of a database field: + The first part of this example inserts a space between the "First Name" and "Last Name" fields in a document, and the second part inserts text based on the contents of a field. This example requires that an address data source is registered with $[officename]. Choose Insert - Field - More Fields, and then click the Database tab. - In the Type list, click "Mail merge fields". + In the Type list, click "Mail merge fields". - In the Database selection box, double-click an address book, click "First Name", and then click Insert. Repeat for "Last Name". + In the Database selection box, double-click an address book, click "First Name", and then click Insert. Repeat for "Last Name". - In the document, place the cursor between the two fields, press Space, and then return to the Fields dialog: + In the document, place the cursor between the two fields, press Space, and then return to the Fields dialog: - Click the Functions tab, and then click "Conditional text" in the Type list. + Click the Functions tab, and then click "Conditional text" in the Type list. - In the Condition box, type: "Addressbook.addresses.firstname". + In the Condition box, type: "Addressbook.addresses.firstname". - In the Then box, type a space and leave the Or box blank. + In the Then box, type a space and leave the Or box blank. - You can now use a condition to insert text based on the contents of the First Name field. + You can now use a condition to insert text based on the contents of the First Name field. - In the Fields dialog, click the Functions tab. + In the Fields dialog, click the Functions tab. - In the Type box, click "Conditional text". + In the Type box, click "Conditional text". - In the Condition box, type: Addressbook.addresses.firstname == "Michael" + In the Condition box, type: Addressbook.addresses.firstname == "Michael" - In the Then box, type "Dear". + In the Then box, type "Dear". - In the Else box, type "Hello". + In the Else box, type "Hello". - Click Insert. + Click Insert. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04120100.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04120100.xhp index 463d54ea32..ab97631f6c 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04120100.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04120100.xhp @@ -32,63 +32,63 @@ -Insert Index Entry -Marks the selected text as index or table of contents entry. +Insert Index Entry +Marks the selected text as index or table of contents entry.
-To edit an index entry, place the cursor in front of the index field, and then choose Edit - Index Entryremoved a para - see #i64023 -You can leave the Insert Index Entry dialog open while you select and insert entries. -Selection +To edit an index entry, place the cursor in front of the index field, and then choose Edit - Index Entryremoved a para - see #i64023 +You can leave the Insert Index Entry dialog open while you select and insert entries. +Selection -Index -Select the index that you want to add the entry to. +Index +Select the index that you want to add the entry to. -Entry -Displays the text that is selected in the document. If you want, you can enter a different word for the index entry. The selected text in the document is not changed. +Entry +Displays the text that is selected in the document. If you want, you can enter a different word for the index entry. The selected text in the document is not changed. -1st key -Makes the current selection a subentry of the word that you enter here. For example, if you select "cold", and enter "weather" as the 1st key, the index entry is "weather, cold". +1st key +Makes the current selection a subentry of the word that you enter here. For example, if you select "cold", and enter "weather" as the 1st key, the index entry is "weather, cold". -2nd key -Makes the current selection a sub-subentry of the 1st key. For example, if you select "cold", and enter "weather" as the 1st key and "winter" as the 2nd key, the index entry is "weather, winter, cold". +2nd key +Makes the current selection a sub-subentry of the 1st key. For example, if you select "cold", and enter "weather" as the 1st key and "winter" as the 2nd key, the index entry is "weather, winter, cold".
-Phonetic reading -Enter the phonetic reading for the corresponding entry. For example, if a Japanese Kanji word has more than one pronunciation, enter the correct pronunciation as a Katakana word. The Kanji word is then sorted according to the phonetic reading entry. This option is only available if Asian language support is enabled. +Phonetic reading +Enter the phonetic reading for the corresponding entry. For example, if a Japanese Kanji word has more than one pronunciation, enter the correct pronunciation as a Katakana word. The Kanji word is then sorted according to the phonetic reading entry. This option is only available if Asian language support is enabled.
-Main Entry -Makes the selected text the main entry in an alphabetical index. $[officename] displays the page number of the main entry in a different format than the other entries in the index. +Main Entry +Makes the selected text the main entry in an alphabetical index. $[officename] displays the page number of the main entry in a different format than the other entries in the index. -Level -Entries using the paragraph format "Heading X" (X = 1-10) can be automatically added to the table of contents. The level of the entry in the index corresponds to the outline level of the heading style. -This option is available only for table of contents and user-defined index entries. +Level +Entries using the paragraph format "Heading X" (X = 1-10) can be automatically added to the table of contents. The level of the entry in the index corresponds to the outline level of the heading style. +This option is available only for table of contents and user-defined index entries. -Apply to all similar texts -Automatically marks all other occurrences of the selected text in the document. Text in headers, footers, frames, and captions is not included. -You cannot use the function for an Entry that you entered manually in this dialog. +Apply to all similar texts +Automatically marks all other occurrences of the selected text in the document. Text in headers, footers, frames, and captions is not included. +You cannot use the function for an Entry that you entered manually in this dialog. To include all occurrences of a text passage in an index, select the text, choose Edit - Find & Replace, and click Find All. Then choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Index Entry and click Insert. -Match case - +Match case + -Whole words only - +Whole words only + -Insert -Marks an index entry in your text. +Insert +Marks an index entry in your text. -Close -Closes the dialog. +Close +Closes the dialog. -New user-defined index -Opens the Create New User-defined Index dialog where you can create a custom index. +New user-defined index +Opens the Create New User-defined Index dialog where you can create a custom index. -Name -Enter a name for the new user-defined index. The new index is added to the list of available indexes and tables. +Name +Enter a name for the new user-defined index. The new index is added to the list of available indexes and tables. -Using Tables of Content and Indexes +Using Tables of Content and Indexes diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04120200.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04120200.xhp index f2b4f47f4c..9a51c6a9ab 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04120200.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04120200.xhp @@ -34,19 +34,19 @@ Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Inserts an index or a table of contents at the current cursor position. To edit an index or table of contents, place the cursor in the index or table of contents, and then choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography. + Inserts an index or a table of contents at the current cursor position. To edit an index or table of contents, place the cursor in the index or table of contents, and then choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography.
- You can also preview the index or table in this dialog. - Depending on the type of index or table that you select, the following tabs are present. + You can also preview the index or table in this dialog. + Depending on the type of index or table that you select, the following tabs are present. - Use this tab to specify the column layout for the index or table of contents. By default, the index title is one-column wide and extends out from left page margin. + Use this tab to specify the column layout for the index or table of contents. By default, the index title is one-column wide and extends out from left page margin. - Using Tables of Content and Indexes + Using Tables of Content and Indexes diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04120201.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04120201.xhp index 048fbadaa2..65fa086191 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04120201.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04120201.xhp @@ -32,27 +32,27 @@
-Styles -You can assign different paragraph styles to change the formatting of index titles, separators and index entries. You can also modify paragraph styles in this dialog. +Styles +You can assign different paragraph styles to change the formatting of index titles, separators and index entries. You can also modify paragraph styles in this dialog.
-Assignment +Assignment -Levels -Select the index level that you change the formatting of. +Levels +Select the index level that you change the formatting of. -Paragraph Styles -Select the paragraph style that you want to apply to the selected index level, and then click the Assign (<) button. +Paragraph Styles +Select the paragraph style that you want to apply to the selected index level, and then click the Assign (<) button. -< -Formats the selected index level with the selected paragraph style. +< +Formats the selected index level with the selected paragraph style. -Default -Resets the formatting of the selected level to the "Default" paragraph style. +Default +Resets the formatting of the selected level to the "Default" paragraph style. -Edit -Opens the Paragraph Style dialog, where you can modify the selected paragraph style. +Edit +Opens the Paragraph Style dialog, where you can modify the selected paragraph style. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04120210.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04120210.xhp index accee468c8..191d5d4a01 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04120210.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04120210.xhp @@ -34,28 +34,28 @@
Type - Use this tab to specify and define the type of index that you want to insert. You can also create custom indexes. + Use this tab to specify and define the type of index that you want to insert. You can also create custom indexes.
- Depending on the type of index that you select, this tab contains the following options. - Table of Contents + Depending on the type of index that you select, this tab contains the following options. + Table of Contents - Alphabetical Index + Alphabetical Index - Illustration Index + Illustration Index - Index of Tables + Index of Tables - User-Defined + User-Defined - Table of Objects + Table of Objects - Bibliography + Bibliography - Using Tables of Content and Indexes + Using Tables of Content and Indexes Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Index Entry diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp index 535aaccb13..bb57db763b 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp @@ -28,57 +28,51 @@ -Index - The following options are available when you select Table of Contents as the index type. +Index + The following options are available when you select Table of Contents as the index type.
- Type and Title - Specify the type and title of the index. + Type and Title + Specify the type and title of the index. -Type +Type Select the type of index that you want to insert. The options available on this tab depend on the index type that you select. If the cursor is in an index when you choose the Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography, you can then edit that index. -Title - Enter a title for the selected index. +Title + Enter a title for the selected index. -Protected against manual changes +Protected against manual changes Prevents the contents of the index from being changed. Manual changes that you make to an index are lost when the index is refreshed. If you want the cursor to scroll through a protected area, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then select the Enable cursor check box in the Protected Areas section.
-Create index for - Select whether to create the index for the document or for the current chapter. +Create index for + Select whether to create the index for the document or for the current chapter.
-Evaluation level - Enter the number of heading levels to include in the index. - Create from - Use this area to specify which information to include in an index. +Evaluation level + Enter the number of heading levels to include in the index. + Create from + Use this area to specify which information to include in an index. -Outline - Creates the index using outline levels, that is, paragraphs formatted with one of the predefined heading styles (Heading 1-10) are added to the index. - You can also assign the outline levels in the Outline & Numbering tab page of the Format - Paragraph dialog. +Outline + Creates the index using outline levels, that is, paragraphs formatted with one of the predefined heading styles (Heading 1-10) are added to the index. + You can also assign the outline levels in the Outline & Numbering tab page of the Format - Paragraph dialog. -Additional Styles - Includes the paragraph styles that you specify in the Assign Styles dialog as index entries. To select the paragraph styles that you want to include in the index, click the Assign Styles (...) button to the right of this box. +Additional Styles + Includes the paragraph styles that you specify in the Assign Styles dialog as index entries. To select the paragraph styles that you want to include in the index, click the Assign Styles (...) button to the right of this box.
Assign styles - Opens the Assign Styles dialog, where you can select the paragraph styles to include in the index. + Opens the Assign Styles dialog, where you can select the paragraph styles to include in the index.
-Index marks +Index marks Includes the index entries that you inserted by choosing Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Index Entry in the index.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04120212.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04120212.xhp index 4467319f34..5b5202b09c 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04120212.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04120212.xhp @@ -32,50 +32,50 @@ -Index -The following options are available when you select Alphabetical Index as the index type. +Index +The following options are available when you select Alphabetical Index as the index type.
-Options +Options -Combine identical entries -Replaces identical index entries with a single entry that lists the page numbers where the entry occurs in the document. For example, the entries "View 10, View 43" are combined as "View 10, 43". +Combine identical entries +Replaces identical index entries with a single entry that lists the page numbers where the entry occurs in the document. For example, the entries "View 10, View 43" are combined as "View 10, 43". -Combine identical entries with p or pp -Replaces identical index entries, which occur also on the directly following page or pages, with a single entry that lists the first page number and a "p" or "pp". For example, the entries "View 10, View 11, View 12" are combined as "View 10pp", and "View 10, View 11" as "View 10p". +Combine identical entries with p or pp +Replaces identical index entries, which occur also on the directly following page or pages, with a single entry that lists the first page number and a "p" or "pp". For example, the entries "View 10, View 11, View 12" are combined as "View 10pp", and "View 10, View 11" as "View 10p". -Combine with - -Replaces identical index entries that occur on consecutive pages with a single entry and the page range where the entry occurs. For example, the entries "View 10, View 11, View 12" are combined as "View 10-12". +Combine with - +Replaces identical index entries that occur on consecutive pages with a single entry and the page range where the entry occurs. For example, the entries "View 10, View 11, View 12" are combined as "View 10-12". -Case sensitive -Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters in identical index entries. For Asian languages special handling applies. If you want the first occurrence of the entry in the document to determine the case of the entry, select Combine identical entries. -To use multi-level collation to Asian languages, select Case sensitive. In the multi-level collation, the cases and diacritics of the entries are ignored and only the primitive forms of the entries are compared. If the forms are identical, the diacritics of the forms are compared. If the forms are still identical, the cases of the forms as well as the widths of the characters, and the differences in the Japanese Kana are compared.UFI: see #112590# and #112507# +Case sensitive +Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters in identical index entries. For Asian languages special handling applies. If you want the first occurrence of the entry in the document to determine the case of the entry, select Combine identical entries. +To use multi-level collation to Asian languages, select Case sensitive. In the multi-level collation, the cases and diacritics of the entries are ignored and only the primitive forms of the entries are compared. If the forms are identical, the diacritics of the forms are compared. If the forms are still identical, the cases of the forms as well as the widths of the characters, and the differences in the Japanese Kana are compared.UFI: see #112590# and #112507# -AutoCapitalize entries -Automatically capitalizes the first letter of an index entry. +AutoCapitalize entries +Automatically capitalizes the first letter of an index entry. -Keys as separate entries -Inserts index keys as separate index entries. A key is inserted as a top level index entry and the entries that are assigned to the key as indented subentries. -To define an index key, choose Insert Index Entry dialog. +Keys as separate entries +Inserts index keys as separate index entries. A key is inserted as a top level index entry and the entries that are assigned to the key as indented subentries. +To define an index key, choose Insert Index Entry dialog. -Concordance file -Automatically marks index entries using a concordance file - a list of words to include in an index. +Concordance file +Automatically marks index entries using a concordance file - a list of words to include in an index. -File -Select, create, or edit a concordance file. +File +Select, create, or edit a concordance file.
-Sort -Sets the options for sorting the index entries. +Sort +Sets the options for sorting the index entries. -Language -Select the language rules to use for sorting the index entries. +Language +Select the language rules to use for sorting the index entries. -Key type -Select numeric when you want to sort numbers by value, such as in 1, 2, 12. Select alphanumeric, when you want to sort the numbers by character code, such as in 1, 12, 2. +Key type +Select numeric when you want to sort numbers by value, such as in 1, 2, 12. Select alphanumeric, when you want to sort the numbers by character code, such as in 1, 12, 2.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp index 478f6d1288..a36a1627bf 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp @@ -30,8 +30,8 @@ -Index - +Index + The following options are available when you select the Illustration Index as the index type.
@@ -40,56 +40,56 @@
-Create from -Specify the information to be combined to form an index. +Create from +Specify the information to be combined to form an index. -Captions -Creates index entries from object captions. To add a caption to an object, select the object, and then choose Insert - Caption. +Captions +Creates index entries from object captions. To add a caption to an object, select the object, and then choose Insert - Caption. -Category -Select the caption category that you want to use for the index entries. +Category +Select the caption category that you want to use for the index entries. -Display -Select the part of the caption that you want to use for index entries. The following table lists the caption options that can be selected, based on the caption text "Illustration 24: The Sun", where "Illustration 24" was automatically generated, and "The Sun" was added by the user. +Display +Select the part of the caption that you want to use for index entries. The following table lists the caption options that can be selected, based on the caption text "Illustration 24: The Sun", where "Illustration 24" was automatically generated, and "The Sun" was added by the user. -Selections in the Display list box +Selections in the Display list box -Entry in the Index +Entry in the Index -Reference Text +Reference Text -Illustration 24: The Sun +Illustration 24: The Sun -Category and Number +Category and Number -Illustration 24 +Illustration 24 -Caption +Caption -The Sun +The Sun
-If you select "Caption Text", the punctuation and the space at the beginning of the caption does not appear in the index entry. +If you select "Caption Text", the punctuation and the space at the beginning of the caption does not appear in the index entry. -Object names -Creates index entries from object names. You can view object names in the Navigator, for example, and change them in the context menu. +Object names +Creates index entries from object names. You can view object names in the Navigator, for example, and change them in the context menu.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04120214.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04120214.xhp index 06658a1832..40eb642359 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04120214.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04120214.xhp @@ -30,8 +30,8 @@ -Index - +Index + The following options are available when you select Index of Tables as the index type.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp index 865537915e..f9b525340c 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp @@ -30,37 +30,37 @@ -Index - +Index + The following options are available when you select User-Defined as the index type.
-User-defined indexes are available in the Type box when you insert an index entry in your document. +User-defined indexes are available in the Type box when you insert an index entry in your document. -Create from -Styles +Create from +Styles -Tables -Includes tables in the index. +Tables +Includes tables in the index. -Graphics -Includes graphics in the index. +Graphics +Includes graphics in the index. -Text frames -Includes text frames in the index. +Text frames +Includes text frames in the index. -OLE objects -Includes OLE objects in the index. +OLE objects +Includes OLE objects in the index. -Use level from source chapter -Indents table, graphic, text frame, and OLE object index entries according their place in the chapter heading hierarchy. +Use level from source chapter +Indents table, graphic, text frame, and OLE object index entries according their place in the chapter heading hierarchy. -Defining an index entry +Defining an index entry diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04120216.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04120216.xhp index 60491f72cb..1db91c81c7 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04120216.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04120216.xhp @@ -30,8 +30,8 @@ -Index - +Index + The following options are available when you select Table of Objects as the index type.
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ -Create from the following objects -Select the object types that you want to include in a table of objects. +Create from the following objects +Select the object types that you want to include in a table of objects. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp index 1ebb7c3ebb..60c097246a 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp @@ -30,21 +30,21 @@ -Index - +Index + The following options are available when you select Bibliography as the index type.
-Formatting of the entries +Formatting of the entries -Number entries -Automatically numbers the bibliography entries. To set the sorting options for the numbering, click the Entries tab. +Number entries +Automatically numbers the bibliography entries. To set the sorting options for the numbering, click the Entries tab. -Brackets -Select the brackets that you want to enclose bibliography entries. +Brackets +Select the brackets that you want to enclose bibliography entries. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04120219.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04120219.xhp index 4a5203e0d3..0a05a8d401 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04120219.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04120219.xhp @@ -32,17 +32,17 @@ - Assign Styles - Creates index entries from specific paragraph styles. + Assign Styles + Creates index entries from specific paragraph styles.
- Styles - The list contains the paragraph styles that you can assign to index levels. - To create an index entry from a paragraph style, click the style in the Styles list, and then click the >> button to move the style to the index level that you want. - << - Moves the selected paragraph style up one level in the index hierarchy. - >> - Moves the selected paragraph style down one level in the index hierarchy. + Styles + The list contains the paragraph styles that you can assign to index levels. + To create an index entry from a paragraph style, click the style in the Styles list, and then click the >> button to move the style to the index level that you want. + << + Moves the selected paragraph style up one level in the index hierarchy. + >> + Moves the selected paragraph style down one level in the index hierarchy. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04120220.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04120220.xhp index 8f3d74a145..21a6e3a89b 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04120220.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04120220.xhp @@ -33,18 +33,18 @@
- Entries (indexes/tables) + Entries (indexes/tables) Specify the format of the index or table entries. The appearance of this tab changes to reflect the type of index that you selected on the Type tab.
- Table of Contents - Alphabetical Index - Illustration Index - Index of Tables - User-Defined - Table of Objects - Bibliography + Table of Contents + Alphabetical Index + Illustration Index + Index of Tables + User-Defined + Table of Objects + Bibliography diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04120221.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04120221.xhp index f3bf6e7f98..51008e3d4b 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04120221.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04120221.xhp @@ -29,72 +29,72 @@ -Entries (table of contents) -Specify the format of the entries in the table of contents. +Entries (table of contents) +Specify the format of the entries in the table of contents.
-Level -Select the level that you want to define. +Level +Select the level that you want to define.
-Structure and formatting -The Structure line defines how the entries in the index are composed. To change the appearance of an entry you can enter codes or text in the empty boxes on this line. You can also click in an empty box or on a code, and then click a code button.this line also appears for bibliographic index -Displays the remainder of the Structure line.UFI: see #i27934# +Structure and formatting +The Structure line defines how the entries in the index are composed. To change the appearance of an entry you can enter codes or text in the empty boxes on this line. You can also click in an empty box or on a code, and then click a code button.this line also appears for bibliographic index +Displays the remainder of the Structure line.UFI: see #i27934# -To delete a code from the Structure line, click the code, and then press the Delete key. +To delete a code from the Structure line, click the code, and then press the Delete key. -To replace a code from the Structure line, click the code, and then click a code button. +To replace a code from the Structure line, click the code, and then click a code button. -To add a code to the Structure line, click in an empty box, and then click a code button. +To add a code to the Structure line, click in an empty box, and then click a code button.
-Chapter number (E#) -Inserts the chapter number. To assign chapter numbering to a heading style, choose Tools - Outline Numbering. +Chapter number (E#) +Inserts the chapter number. To assign chapter numbering to a heading style, choose Tools - Outline Numbering.
-Entry text (E) -Inserts the text of the chapter heading. +Entry text (E) +Inserts the text of the chapter heading.
-Tab stop (T) -Inserts a tab stop. To add leader dots to the tab stop, select a character in the Fill character box. To change the position of the tab stop, enter a value in the Tab stop position box, or select the Align right check box. +Tab stop (T) +Inserts a tab stop. To add leader dots to the tab stop, select a character in the Fill character box. To change the position of the tab stop, enter a value in the Tab stop position box, or select the Align right check box.
-Page number (#) -Inserts the page number of the entry. +Page number (#) +Inserts the page number of the entry.
- Hyperlink (LS and LE) -Creates a hyperlink for the part of the entry that you enclose by the opening (LS) and the closing (LE) hyperlink tags. On the Structure line, click in the empty box in front of the part that you want to create a hyperlink for, and then click this button. Click in the empty box after the part that you want to hyperlink, and then click this button again. All hyperlinks must be unique. Available only for a table of contents. -All + Hyperlink (LS and LE) +Creates a hyperlink for the part of the entry that you enclose by the opening (LS) and the closing (LE) hyperlink tags. On the Structure line, click in the empty box in front of the part that you want to create a hyperlink for, and then click this button. Click in the empty box after the part that you want to hyperlink, and then click this button again. All hyperlinks must be unique. Available only for a table of contents. +All Applies the current settings to all levels without closing the dialog.
-Character Style -Specify the formatting style for the selected part on the Structure line. -Edit -Opens a dialog where you can edit the selected character style. -Fill character -Select the tab leader that you want use. -Tab stop position -Enter the distance to leave between the left page margin and the tab stop. -Align right -Aligns the tab stop to the right page margin. +Character Style +Specify the formatting style for the selected part on the Structure line. +Edit +Opens a dialog where you can edit the selected character style. +Fill character +Select the tab leader that you want use. +Tab stop position +Enter the distance to leave between the left page margin and the tab stop. +Align right +Aligns the tab stop to the right page margin.
-Format -Only visible when you click the E# button in the Structure line. Select to show the chapter number with or without separator. +Format +Only visible when you click the E# button in the Structure line. Select to show the chapter number with or without separator. -Tab position relative to Paragraph Style indent -Positions the tab stop relative to the "indent from left" value defined in the paragraph style selected on the Styles tab. Otherwise the tab stop is positioned relative to the left text margin. +Tab position relative to Paragraph Style indent +Positions the tab stop relative to the "indent from left" value defined in the paragraph style selected on the Styles tab. Otherwise the tab stop is positioned relative to the left text margin.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04120222.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04120222.xhp index 6389cf3f5e..fac65a8f66 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04120222.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04120222.xhp @@ -29,35 +29,35 @@ -Entries (alphabetical index) -Specify the format of the alphabetical index entries. +Entries (alphabetical index) +Specify the format of the alphabetical index entries.
-Level "S" refers to the single letter headings that divide the index entries alphabetically. To enable these headings, select the Alphabetical delimiter check box in the Format area. +Level "S" refers to the single letter headings that divide the index entries alphabetically. To enable these headings, select the Alphabetical delimiter check box in the Format area.
-Chapter Info -Inserts chapter information, such as the chapter heading and number. Select the information that you want to display in the Chapter entry box. -Chapter entry -Select the chapter information that you want to include in the index entry. +Chapter Info +Inserts chapter information, such as the chapter heading and number. Select the information that you want to display in the Chapter entry box. +Chapter entry +Select the chapter information that you want to include in the index entry.
-Evaluate up to level -Enter the maximum hierarchy level down to which objects are shown in the generated index. +Evaluate up to level +Enter the maximum hierarchy level down to which objects are shown in the generated index.
-Character Style for main entries -Specify the formatting style for the main entries in the alphabetical index. To convert an index entry into a main entry, click in front of the index field in the document and then choose Edit - Index Entry. -Alphabetical delimiter -Uses the initial letters of the alphabetically arranged index entries as section headings. -Key separated by commas -Arranges the index entries on the same line, separated by commas. +Character Style for main entries +Specify the formatting style for the main entries in the alphabetical index. To convert an index entry into a main entry, click in front of the index field in the document and then choose Edit - Index Entry. +Alphabetical delimiter +Uses the initial letters of the alphabetically arranged index entries as section headings. +Key separated by commas +Arranges the index entries on the same line, separated by commas. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04120223.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04120223.xhp index 9cfbb6c44c..57622c86bf 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04120223.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04120223.xhp @@ -29,14 +29,14 @@ -Entries (illustration index) -Specify the format for the illustration index entries. +Entries (illustration index) +Specify the format for the illustration index entries.
-Illustration Indexes only have one index level. +Illustration Indexes only have one index level. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04120224.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04120224.xhp index 6120c14727..df8e6a1c2d 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04120224.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04120224.xhp @@ -29,14 +29,14 @@ -Entries (index of tables) -Specify the format for the entries in an Index of Tables. +Entries (index of tables) +Specify the format for the entries in an Index of Tables.
-An Index of Tables only has one index level. +An Index of Tables only has one index level. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04120225.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04120225.xhp index 4f51af3d4b..533a9e14f2 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04120225.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04120225.xhp @@ -29,14 +29,14 @@ -Entries (user-defined index) -Specify the format for the entries in a user-defined index. +Entries (user-defined index) +Specify the format for the entries in a user-defined index.
-User-defined indexes do not support sub-keys. +User-defined indexes do not support sub-keys. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04120226.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04120226.xhp index 0c839debdb..b52ccf94a6 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04120226.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04120226.xhp @@ -29,14 +29,14 @@ -Entries (table of objects) -Specify the format for the entries in a Table of Objects. +Entries (table of objects) +Specify the format for the entries in a Table of Objects.
-A Table of Objects only has one index level. +A Table of Objects only has one index level. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04120227.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04120227.xhp index df7997982b..e530d0e8a3 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04120227.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04120227.xhp @@ -29,41 +29,41 @@ -Entries (bibliography) -Specify the format for bibliography entries. +Entries (bibliography) +Specify the format for bibliography entries.
-Type -The types that are displayed depend on the different literature sources. +Type +The types that are displayed depend on the different literature sources. -Type -Lists the available bibliography entries. To add an entry to the Structure line, click the entry, click in an empty box on the Structure line, and then click Insert. Use the Define Bibliography Entry dialog to add new entries. -Insert -Adds the reference code for the selected bibliography entry to the Structure line. Select an entry in the list, click in an empty box, and then click this button. -Remove -Removes the selected reference code from the Structure line. +Type +Lists the available bibliography entries. To add an entry to the Structure line, click the entry, click in an empty box on the Structure line, and then click Insert. Use the Define Bibliography Entry dialog to add new entries. +Insert +Adds the reference code for the selected bibliography entry to the Structure line. Select an entry in the list, click in an empty box, and then click this button. +Remove +Removes the selected reference code from the Structure line. -Sort by -Specify the sorting options for the bibliography entries. -Document position -Sorts the bibliography entries according to the position of their references in the document. Select this option if you want to use automatically numbered references. -Content -Sorts the bibliography entries by the Sort keys that you specify, for example, by author or by year of publication. -Sort keys +Sort by +Specify the sorting options for the bibliography entries. +Document position +Sorts the bibliography entries according to the position of their references in the document. Select this option if you want to use automatically numbered references. +Content +Sorts the bibliography entries by the Sort keys that you specify, for example, by author or by year of publication. +Sort keys -1, 2 or 3 -Select the entry by which to sort the bibliography entries. This option is only available if you select the Content radio button in the Sort by area. +1, 2 or 3 +Select the entry by which to sort the bibliography entries. This option is only available if you select the Content radio button in the Sort by area. -AZ -Sorts the bibliography entries in ascending alphanumerical order. +AZ +Sorts the bibliography entries in ascending alphanumerical order. -ZA -Sorts the bibliography entries in a descending alphanumerical order. +ZA +Sorts the bibliography entries in a descending alphanumerical order. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp index b48ceb72ab..b8698d21e9 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp @@ -28,16 +28,16 @@ -Define Bibliography Entry - Change the content of a bibliography entry. +Define Bibliography Entry + Change the content of a bibliography entry.
- Entry data - Enter a short name and select the appropriate source type. You can now enter data into the other fields belonging for the entry. + Entry data + Enter a short name and select the appropriate source type. You can now enter data into the other fields belonging for the entry. -Short name - Displays the short name for the bibliography entry. You can only enter a name here if you are creating a new bibliography entry. +Short name + Displays the short name for the bibliography entry. You can only enter a name here if you are creating a new bibliography entry. @@ -66,10 +66,10 @@ -This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography. +This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography. -Type - Select the source for the bibliography entry.removed two paras - Formatting bibliography entries +Type + Select the source for the bibliography entry.removed two paras + Formatting bibliography entries diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp index 82c1242ee4..41a8c60e37 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp @@ -30,34 +30,34 @@ -Insert Bibliography Entry -Inserts a bibliography reference. +Insert Bibliography Entry +Inserts a bibliography reference.
-Entry -From bibliography database -Inserts a reference from the bibliography database. -From document content -Inserts a reference from the bibliography records that are stored in the current document. An entry that is stored in the document has priority over an entry that is stored in the bibliography database. +Entry +From bibliography database +Inserts a reference from the bibliography database. +From document content +Inserts a reference from the bibliography records that are stored in the current document. An entry that is stored in the document has priority over an entry that is stored in the bibliography database.
-When you save a document that contains bibliography entries, the corresponding records are automatically saved in a hidden field in the document. +When you save a document that contains bibliography entries, the corresponding records are automatically saved in a hidden field in the document.
-Short name -Select the short name of the bibliography record that you want to insert. -Author, Title -If available, the author and the full title of the selected short name are displayed in this area. -Insert -Inserts the bibliographic reference into the document. If you created a new record, you must also insert it as an entry, otherwise the record is lost when you close the document. -Close -Closes the dialog. -New -Opens the Define Bibliography Entry dialog, where you can create a new bibliography record. This record is only stored in the document. To add a record to the bibliography database, choose Tools - Bibliography Database. -Edit -Opens the Define Bibliography Entry dialog where you can edit the selected bibliography record. +Short name +Select the short name of the bibliography record that you want to insert. +Author, Title +If available, the author and the full title of the selected short name are displayed in this area. +Insert +Inserts the bibliographic reference into the document. If you created a new record, you must also insert it as an entry, otherwise the record is lost when you close the document. +Close +Closes the dialog. +New +Opens the Define Bibliography Entry dialog, where you can create a new bibliography record. This record is only stored in the document. To add a record to the bibliography database, choose Tools - Bibliography Database. +Edit +Opens the Define Bibliography Entry dialog where you can edit the selected bibliography record. -Tips for working with bibliography entries +Tips for working with bibliography entries diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04130000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04130000.xhp index 3d08e03b2d..e2c07ec33c 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04130000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04130000.xhp @@ -29,17 +29,17 @@
-Frame -Inserts a frame that you can use to create a layout of one or more columns of text and objects. +Frame +Inserts a frame that you can use to create a layout of one or more columns of text and objects.
To edit a frame, click the border to select it, and then choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties. You can also resize or move a selected frame using special shortcut keys. -To delete a frame, click the border of the frame, and then press Delete. -If you see small red arrows at the beginning and the end of text in frame, use the arrow keys to scroll through the remaining text. -In the preview area of the Frame dialog, the frame is represented by a green rectangle, and the reference area by a red rectangle. -You can also preview the effects when you change the frame anchor to "As Character". The "Baseline" is drawn in red, "Character" is the font height, and "line" is the height of the line, including the frame. +To delete a frame, click the border of the frame, and then press Delete. +If you see small red arrows at the beginning and the end of text in frame, use the arrow keys to scroll through the remaining text. +In the preview area of the Frame dialog, the frame is represented by a green rectangle, and the reference area by a red rectangle. +You can also preview the effects when you change the frame anchor to "As Character". The "Baseline" is drawn in red, "Character" is the font height, and "line" is the height of the line, including the frame. @@ -51,8 +51,8 @@ -Icon on the Insert toolbar: -Draws a frame where you drag in the document. Click the arrow next to the icon to select the number of columns for the frame. +Icon on the Insert toolbar: +Draws a frame where you drag in the document. Click the arrow next to the icon to select the number of columns for the frame. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp index 2a18f5afe9..a58862b8c5 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp @@ -32,11 +32,11 @@ moving;objects and frames objects;moving and resizing with keyboard resizing;objects and frames, by keyboard -MW changed "objects;"Resizing and Moving Frames, Objects With the Keyboard -You can resize and move selected frames and objects with the keyboard. -To move a selected frame or object, press an arrow key. To move by one pixel, hold down OptionAlt, and then press an arrow key. -To resize a selected frame or object, first press Ctrl+Tab. Now one of the handles blinks to show that it is selected. To select another handle, press Ctrl+Tab again. Press an arrow key to resize the object by one grid unit. To resize by one pixel, hold down OptionAlt, and then press an arrow key. -The increment by which you move an object with the keyboard is determined by the document grid. To change the properties of the document grid, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Grid. +MW changed "objects;"Resizing and Moving Frames, Objects With the Keyboard +You can resize and move selected frames and objects with the keyboard. +To move a selected frame or object, press an arrow key. To move by one pixel, hold down OptionAlt, and then press an arrow key. +To resize a selected frame or object, first press Ctrl+Tab. Now one of the handles blinks to show that it is selected. To select another handle, press Ctrl+Tab again. Press an arrow key to resize the object by one grid unit. To resize by one pixel, hold down OptionAlt, and then press an arrow key. +The increment by which you move an object with the keyboard is determined by the document grid. To change the properties of the document grid, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Grid. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp index e5f8fcc273..4175ef62c8 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@ -Table -Inserts a table into the document. You can also click the arrow, drag to select the number of rows and columns to include in the table, and then click in the last cell. +Table +Inserts a table into the document. You can also click the arrow, drag to select the number of rows and columns to include in the table, and then click in the last cell.
@@ -40,57 +40,57 @@
-To insert a table from another document, copy the table, and then paste the table into the current document. +To insert a table from another document, copy the table, and then paste the table into the current document. -To convert text into a table, select the text, and then choose Table - Convert - Text to Table. +To convert text into a table, select the text, and then choose Table - Convert - Text to Table. -To insert a table into a table, click in a cell in the table and choose Table - Insert - Table. +To insert a table into a table, click in a cell in the table and choose Table - Insert - Table. -$[officename] can automatically format numbers that you enter in a table cell, for example, dates and times. To activate this feature, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table and click the Number recognition check box in the Input in tables area. +$[officename] can automatically format numbers that you enter in a table cell, for example, dates and times. To activate this feature, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table and click the Number recognition check box in the Input in tables area. -Name -Enter a name for the table. -Table size -Specify the number of columns and rows in the new table. +Name +Enter a name for the table. +Table size +Specify the number of columns and rows in the new table. -Columns -Enter the number of columns that you want in the table. +Columns +Enter the number of columns that you want in the table. -Rows -Enter the number of rows that you want in the table. -Options -Set the options for the table. +Rows +Enter the number of rows that you want in the table. +Options +Set the options for the table. -Heading -Includes a heading row in the table. +Heading +Includes a heading row in the table. -Repeat heading -Repeats the heading of the table at the top of subsequent page if the table spans more than one page. +Repeat heading +Repeats the heading of the table at the top of subsequent page if the table spans more than one page. -The first ... rows -Select the number of rows that you want to use for the heading. +The first ... rows +Select the number of rows that you want to use for the heading. -Do not split the table -Prevents the table from spanning more than one page. +Do not split the table +Prevents the table from spanning more than one page. -Border -Adds a border to the table cells. +Border +Adds a border to the table cells. -AutoFormat -Opens the AutoFormat dialog, where you can select a predefined layout for table. +AutoFormat +Opens the AutoFormat dialog, where you can select a predefined layout for table. -Icon on the Insert toolbar -On the Insert toolbar, click the Table icon to open the Insert Table dialog, where you can insert a table in the current document. You can also click the arrow, drag to select the number of rows and columns to include in the table, and then click in the last cell. +Icon on the Insert toolbar +On the Insert toolbar, click the Table icon to open the Insert Table dialog, where you can insert a table in the current document. You can also click the arrow, drag to select the number of rows and columns to include in the table, and then click in the last cell. Table - Properties - Text Flow -%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp index 44a26fb63a..324643bede 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp @@ -29,39 +29,37 @@ -Insert Script - Inserts a script at the current cursor position in an HTML or text document. +Insert Script + Inserts a script at the current cursor position in an HTML or text document.
- An inserted script is indicated by a small green rectangle. If you do not see the rectangle, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - View, and select the Comments check box. To edit a script, double-click the green rectangle. - If your document contains more than one script, the Edit Script dialog contains previous and next buttons to jump from script to script. + An inserted script is indicated by a small green rectangle. If you do not see the rectangle, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - View, and select the Comments check box. To edit a script, double-click the green rectangle. + If your document contains more than one script, the Edit Script dialog contains previous and next buttons to jump from script to script. -Jump to Previous Script. +Jump to Previous Script. -Jump to Next Script. +Jump to Next Script. - Contents + Contents -Script Type - Enter the type of script that you want to insert. The script is identified in the HTML source code by the tag <SCRIPT LANGUAGE="JavaScript">. +Script Type + Enter the type of script that you want to insert. The script is identified in the HTML source code by the tag <SCRIPT LANGUAGE="JavaScript">. -URL +URL Adds a link to a script file. Click the URL radio button, and then enter the link in the box. You can also click the Browse button, locate the file, and then click Insert. The linked script file is identified in the HTML source code by the following tags: - <SCRIPT LANGUAGE="JavaScript" SRC="url"> - /* ignore all text here */ - </SCRIPT> + <SCRIPT LANGUAGE="JavaScript" SRC="url"> + /* ignore all text here */ + </SCRIPT> Browse - Locate the script file that you want to link to, and then click Insert. + Locate the script file that you want to link to, and then click Insert. -Text - Enter the script code that you want to insert. +Text + Enter the script code that you want to insert. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp index e97ec426f6..6280b34bfe 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp @@ -36,63 +36,63 @@ block protect, see also widows or orphans mw added two index entries -Text Flow -Specify hyphenation and pagination options. +Text Flow +Specify hyphenation and pagination options.
-Hyphenation -Specify the hyphenation options for text documents. +Hyphenation +Specify the hyphenation options for text documents. -Automatically -Automatically inserts hyphens where they are needed in a paragraph. +Automatically +Automatically inserts hyphens where they are needed in a paragraph. -Characters at line end -Enter the minimum number of characters to leave at the end of the line before a hyphen is inserted. +Characters at line end +Enter the minimum number of characters to leave at the end of the line before a hyphen is inserted. -Characters at line begin -Enter the minimum number of characters that must appear at the beginning of the line after the hyphen. +Characters at line begin +Enter the minimum number of characters that must appear at the beginning of the line after the hyphen. -Maximum no. of consecutive hyphens -Enter the maximum number of consecutive lines that can be hyphenated. -Breaks -Specify the page or column break options. +Maximum no. of consecutive hyphens +Enter the maximum number of consecutive lines that can be hyphenated. +Breaks +Specify the page or column break options. -InsertUFI: #i30777# -Select this check box, and then select the break type that you want to use. +InsertUFI: #i30777# +Select this check box, and then select the break type that you want to use. -Type -Select the break type that you want to insert. +Type +Select the break type that you want to insert. -Position -Select where you want to insert the break. +Position +Select where you want to insert the break. -With Page Style -Select this check box, and then select the page style that you want to use for the first page after the break. +With Page Style +Select this check box, and then select the page style that you want to use for the first page after the break. -Page Style -Select the formatting style to use for the first page after the break. +Page Style +Select the formatting style to use for the first page after the break. -Page number -Enter the page number for the first page that follows the break. If you want to continue the current page numbering, leave the checkbox unchecked. -Options -Specify the text flow options for paragraphs that appear before and after a page break. +Page number +Enter the page number for the first page that follows the break. If you want to continue the current page numbering, leave the checkbox unchecked. +Options +Specify the text flow options for paragraphs that appear before and after a page break. -Do not split paragraph -Shifts the entire paragraph to the next page or column after a break is inserted. +Do not split paragraph +Shifts the entire paragraph to the next page or column after a break is inserted. -Keep with next paragraph -Keeps the current paragraph and the following paragraph together when a break or column break is inserted. +Keep with next paragraph +Keeps the current paragraph and the following paragraph together when a break or column break is inserted. -Orphan control -Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph before a page break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box. If the number of lines at the end of the page is less than the amount specified in the Lines box, the paragraph is shifted to the next page. +Orphan control +Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph before a page break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box. If the number of lines at the end of the page is less than the amount specified in the Lines box, the paragraph is shifted to the next page. -Widow control -Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph in the first page after the break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box. If the number of lines at the top of the page is less than the amount specified in the Lines box, the position of the break is adjusted. +Widow control +Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph in the first page after the break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box. If the number of lines at the top of the page is less than the amount specified in the Lines box, the position of the break is adjusted. -Orphans. +Orphans. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp index cf917749df..91838d4390 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp @@ -36,35 +36,35 @@ drop caps insertion -Drop Caps -Formats the first letter of a paragraph with a large capital letter, that can span several lines. The paragraph must span at least as many lines as you specify in the Lines box. +Drop Caps +Formats the first letter of a paragraph with a large capital letter, that can span several lines. The paragraph must span at least as many lines as you specify in the Lines box.
-Settings +Settings -Show Drop Caps -Applies the drop cap settings to the selected paragraph. +Show Drop Caps +Applies the drop cap settings to the selected paragraph. -Whole word -Displays the first letter of the first word in the paragraph as a drop cap, and the remaining letters of the word as large type. +Whole word +Displays the first letter of the first word in the paragraph as a drop cap, and the remaining letters of the word as large type. -Number of characters -Enter the number of characters to convert to drop caps. +Number of characters +Enter the number of characters to convert to drop caps. -Lines -Enter the number of lines that you want the drop cap to extend downward from the first line of the paragraph. Shorter paragraphs will not get drop caps. The selection is limited to 2-9 lines. +Lines +Enter the number of lines that you want the drop cap to extend downward from the first line of the paragraph. Shorter paragraphs will not get drop caps. The selection is limited to 2-9 lines. -Distance from text -Enter the amount of space to leave between the drop caps and the rest of the text in the paragraph. -Contents +Distance from text +Enter the amount of space to leave between the drop caps and the rest of the text in the paragraph. +Contents -Text -Enter the text that you want to display as drop caps instead of the first letters of the paragraph. +Text +Enter the text that you want to display as drop caps instead of the first letters of the paragraph. -Character Style -Select the formatting style that you want to apply to the drop caps. To use the formatting style of the current paragraph, select [None]. +Character Style +Select the formatting style that you want to apply to the drop caps. To use the formatting style of the current paragraph, select [None]. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05040000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05040000.xhp index 64b6d60d46..d6542daaab 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05040000.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@ -Page Style -Specify the formatting styles and the layout for the current page style, including page margins, headers and footers, and the page background. +Page Style +Specify the formatting styles and the layout for the current page style, including page margins, headers and footers, and the page background.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp index 73c4907a12..4c3687bca9 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp @@ -31,62 +31,56 @@ added two Help IDs, see i97180 -Columns - Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for a page style, frame, or section. +Columns + Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for a page style, frame, or section.
- Default settings - You can select from predefined column layouts, or create your own. When you apply a layout to a page style, all pages that use the style are updated. Similarly, when you apply a column layout to a frame style, all frames that use that style are updated. You can also change the column layout for a single frame. + Default settings + You can select from predefined column layouts, or create your own. When you apply a layout to a page style, all pages that use the style are updated. Similarly, when you apply a column layout to a frame style, all frames that use that style are updated. You can also change the column layout for a single frame. -Columns - Enter the number of columns that you want in the page, frame, or section. - You can also select one of the predefined column layouts. - Selection fields +Columns + Enter the number of columns that you want in the page, frame, or section. + You can also select one of the predefined column layouts. + Selection fields -Evenly distribute contents to all columns - Distributes the text in multi-column sections. The text flows into all columns to the same height. The height of the section adjusts automatically. Evenly distributes the text in multi-column sections. - Width and spacing - If the Automatic width check box is not selected, enter the width and spacing options for the columns. - (Column number) - Displays the column number, as well as width and distance to the adjacent columns. +Evenly distribute contents to all columns + Distributes the text in multi-column sections. The text flows into all columns to the same height. The height of the section adjusts automatically. Evenly distributes the text in multi-column sections. + Width and spacing + If the Automatic width check box is not selected, enter the width and spacing options for the columns. + (Column number) + Displays the column number, as well as width and distance to the adjacent columns. -Left Arrow - Moves the column display one column to the left. +Left Arrow + Moves the column display one column to the left. - + Icon - Left Arrow + Left Arrow
-Right Arrow - Moves the column display one column to the right. +Right Arrow + Moves the column display one column to the right. - + Icon - Right Arrow + Right Arrow
@@ -94,38 +88,31 @@ -Width - Enter the width of the column. +Width + Enter the width of the column. -Spacing - Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the columns. +Spacing + Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the columns. -AutoWidth - Creates columns of equal width. +AutoWidth + Creates columns of equal width. - The column layout preview only shows the columns and not the surrounding page. - Separator line - This area is only available if your layout contains more than one column. + The column layout preview only shows the columns and not the surrounding page. + Separator line + This area is only available if your layout contains more than one column. -Line - Select the formatting style for the column separator line. If you do not want a separator line, choose "None". +Line + Select the formatting style for the column separator line. If you do not want a separator line, choose "None". -Height - Enter the length of the separator line as a percentage of the height of the column area. +Height + Enter the length of the separator line as a percentage of the height of the column area. -Position - Select the vertical alignment of the separator line. This option is only available if Height value of the line is less than 100%. +Position + Select the vertical alignment of the separator line. This option is only available if Height value of the line is less than 100%. -Apply to - Select the item that you want to apply the column layout to. This option is only available if you access this dialog by choosing Format - Columns. +Apply to + Select the item that you want to apply the column layout to. This option is only available if you access this dialog by choosing Format - Columns.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05040501.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05040501.xhp index 59887fd007..cbd251c110 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05040501.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05040501.xhp @@ -30,14 +30,14 @@ -Options -Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for the section. +Options +Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for the section.
-Sections follow the text flow behavior of the page they are inserted into. -For example, if you insert a section that uses a two-column layout into a page style that uses a four-column layout, the two-column layout is nested inside one of the four columns. -You can also nest sections, that is, you can insert a section into another section. +Sections follow the text flow behavior of the page they are inserted into. +For example, if you insert a section that uses a two-column layout into a page style that uses a four-column layout, the two-column layout is nested inside one of the four columns. +You can also nest sections, that is, you can insert a section into another section. UFI: changed embedded links, see #i64128 diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05040700.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05040700.xhp index e3e2d8b4d8..61fa2141af 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05040700.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05040700.xhp @@ -33,42 +33,42 @@
- Footnotes/Endnotes - Specifies where footnotes and endnotes are displayed as well as their numbering formats. + Footnotes/Endnotes + Specifies where footnotes and endnotes are displayed as well as their numbering formats.
- Footnotes - Collect at end of text - Adds footnotes at the end of the section. If the section spans more than one page, the footnotes are added to the bottom of the page on which the footnote anchors appear. - Restart numbering - Restarts the footnote numbering at the number that you specify. - Start at - Enter the number that you want to assign the footnote. - Custom format - Specifies a custom numbering format for footnotes. This check box is only available if the Restart numbering check box is selected. - Before - Enter the text that you want to display in front of the footnote number. - Spin button own format - Select the numbering style for the footnotes. - After - Enter the text that you want to display after the footnote number. - Endnotes - Collect at end of section - Adds endnotes at the end of the section. - Restart numbering - Restarts the endnote numbering at the number that you specify. - Start at - Enter the number that you want to assign the endnote. - Custom format - Specifies a custom numbering format for endnotes. This check box is only available if you the Restart numbering check box is selected. - Before - Enter the text that you want to display in front of the endnote number - Spin button own format - Select the numbering style for the endnotes. - After - Enter the text that you want to display after the endnote number. + Footnotes + Collect at end of text + Adds footnotes at the end of the section. If the section spans more than one page, the footnotes are added to the bottom of the page on which the footnote anchors appear. + Restart numbering + Restarts the footnote numbering at the number that you specify. + Start at + Enter the number that you want to assign the footnote. + Custom format + Specifies a custom numbering format for footnotes. This check box is only available if the Restart numbering check box is selected. + Before + Enter the text that you want to display in front of the footnote number. + Spin button own format + Select the numbering style for the footnotes. + After + Enter the text that you want to display after the footnote number. + Endnotes + Collect at end of section + Adds endnotes at the end of the section. + Restart numbering + Restarts the endnote numbering at the number that you specify. + Start at + Enter the number that you want to assign the endnote. + Custom format + Specifies a custom numbering format for endnotes. This check box is only available if you the Restart numbering check box is selected. + Before + Enter the text that you want to display in front of the endnote number + Spin button own format + Select the numbering style for the endnotes. + After + Enter the text that you want to display after the endnote number. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp index b9cc398eca..067754e768 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@ text grid for Asian layout -Text Grid -Adds a text grid to the current page style. This option is only available if Asian language support is enabled under Language Settings - Languages in the Options dialog box. +Text Grid +Adds a text grid to the current page style. This option is only available if Asian language support is enabled under Language Settings - Languages in the Options dialog box.
@@ -41,28 +41,28 @@ -Grid -Adds or removes a text grid for lines or characters to the current page style. -Grid layout +Grid +Adds or removes a text grid for lines or characters to the current page style. +Grid layout -Lines per page -Enter the maximum number of lines that you want on a page. +Lines per page +Enter the maximum number of lines that you want on a page. -Characters per line -Enter the maximum number of characters that you want on a line. +Characters per line +Enter the maximum number of characters that you want on a line. -Max. base text size -Enter the maximum base text size. A large value results in less characters per line. +Max. base text size +Enter the maximum base text size. A large value results in less characters per line. -Max. Ruby text size -Enter the font size for the Ruby text. +Max. Ruby text size +Enter the font size for the Ruby text. -Ruby text below/left from base text -Displays Ruby text to the left of or below the base text. +Ruby text below/left from base text +Displays Ruby text to the left of or below the base text. -Grid display -Specifies the printing and color options of the text grid. +Grid display +Specifies the printing and color options of the text grid. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05060000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05060000.xhp index 4b23bb5470..c9c384109f 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05060000.xhp @@ -32,17 +32,17 @@ -Image -Formats the size, position, and other properties of the selected image. +Image +Formats the size, position, and other properties of the selected image. -You can also change some of the properties of the selected image with shortcut keys. +You can also change some of the properties of the selected image with shortcut keys.
-The Image dialog contains the following tab pages: +The Image dialog contains the following tab pages: -Wrap +Wrap diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp index db6e0bbe9f..2f6a969449 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp @@ -33,106 +33,106 @@ UFI: new index entries, see i54237 -Type -Specifies the size and the position of the selected object or frame on a page. +Type +Specifies the size and the position of the selected object or frame on a page.
-Size +Size -Width -Enter the width that you want for the selected object. +Width +Enter the width that you want for the selected object. -Relative -Calculates the width of the selected object as a percentage of the width of the page text area. +Relative +Calculates the width of the selected object as a percentage of the width of the page text area. -Relative width relation -Decides what 100% width means: either text area (excluding margins) or the entire page (including margins). +Relative width relation +Decides what 100% width means: either text area (excluding margins) or the entire page (including margins). -Height -Enter the height that you want for the selected object. +Height +Enter the height that you want for the selected object. -Relative -Calculates the height of the selected object as a percentage of the height of the page text area. +Relative +Calculates the height of the selected object as a percentage of the height of the page text area. -Relative height relation -Decides what 100% height means: either text area (excluding margins) or the entire page (including margins). +Relative height relation +Decides what 100% height means: either text area (excluding margins) or the entire page (including margins). -Keep ratio -Maintains the height and width ratio when you change the width or the height setting. +Keep ratio +Maintains the height and width ratio when you change the width or the height setting. -Original Size -Resets the size settings of the selected object to the original values. -This option is not available for frames. +Original Size +Resets the size settings of the selected object to the original values. +This option is not available for frames. -Automatic -Automatically adjusts the width or height of a frame to match the contents of the frame. If you want, you can specify a minimum width or minimum height for the frame. -The Automatic option is only available when you select a frame. -Anchor -Specify the anchoring options for the selected object or frame. The anchor options are not available when you open the dialog from the Styles and Formatting window. +Automatic +Automatically adjusts the width or height of a frame to match the contents of the frame. If you want, you can specify a minimum width or minimum height for the frame. +The Automatic option is only available when you select a frame. +Anchor +Specify the anchoring options for the selected object or frame. The anchor options are not available when you open the dialog from the Styles and Formatting window. -To page -Anchors the selection to the current page. +To page +Anchors the selection to the current page. -To paragraph -Anchors the selection to the current paragraph. +To paragraph +Anchors the selection to the current paragraph. -To character -Anchors the selection to a character. +To character +Anchors the selection to a character. -As character -Anchors the selection as character. The height of the current line is resized to match the height of the selection. -Position -Specify the location of the selected object on the current page. +As character +Anchors the selection as character. The height of the current line is resized to match the height of the selection. +Position +Specify the location of the selected object on the current page. -Horizontal -Select the horizontal alignment option for the object. This option is not available if you chose "anchor as character". +Horizontal +Select the horizontal alignment option for the object. This option is not available if you chose "anchor as character". -by -Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box. This option is only available if you select "From Left" in the Horizontal box. +by +Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box. This option is only available if you select "From Left" in the Horizontal box. -to -Select the reference point for the selected horizontal alignment option. -You can see the result of the alignments options that you select in the Preview box. +to +Select the reference point for the selected horizontal alignment option. +You can see the result of the alignments options that you select in the Preview box. -Mirror on even pages -Reverses the current horizontal alignment settings on even pages. -You can also use the Image flip options to adjust the layout of objects on even and odd pages. +Mirror on even pages +Reverses the current horizontal alignment settings on even pages. +You can also use the Image flip options to adjust the layout of objects on even and odd pages. -Vertical -Select the vertical alignment option for the object. -If you anchor an object to a frame with a fixed height, only the "Bottom" and "Center" alignment options are available. +Vertical +Select the vertical alignment option for the object. +If you anchor an object to a frame with a fixed height, only the "Bottom" and "Center" alignment options are available. -by -Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box. This option is only available if you select "From Top" or "From Bottom" (as character) in the Vertical box. +by +Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box. This option is only available if you select "From Top" or "From Bottom" (as character) in the Vertical box. -to -Select the reference point for the selected vertical alignment option. +to +Select the reference point for the selected vertical alignment option. -Follow text flow -Keeps the selected object within the layout boundaries of the text that the object is anchored to. To place the selected object anywhere in your document, do not select this option. -By default, the Follow text flow option is selected when you open a document that was created in a version of Writer older than OpenOffice.org 2.0. However, this option is not selected when you create a document or when you open a document in Microsoft Word format (*.doc). +Follow text flow +Keeps the selected object within the layout boundaries of the text that the object is anchored to. To place the selected object anywhere in your document, do not select this option. +By default, the Follow text flow option is selected when you open a document that was created in a version of Writer older than OpenOffice.org 2.0. However, this option is not selected when you create a document or when you open a document in Microsoft Word format (*.doc). -The green rectangle represents the selected object and the red rectangle represents the alignment reference point. If you anchor the object as a character, the reference rectangle changes to a red line. +The green rectangle represents the selected object and the red rectangle represents the alignment reference point. If you anchor the object as a character, the reference rectangle changes to a red line. -Format - Anchor -Format - Alignment +Format - Anchor +Format - Alignment diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp index 62931efde0..6ffb24034d 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp @@ -32,152 +32,152 @@ -Wrap -Specify the way you want text to wrap around an object. You can also specify the spacing between the text and the object. +Wrap +Specify the way you want text to wrap around an object. You can also specify the spacing between the text and the object.
-To wrap text around a table, place the table in a frame, and then wrap the text around the frame. -Settings +To wrap text around a table, place the table in a frame, and then wrap the text around the frame. +Settings -None -Places the object on a separate line in the document. The Text in the document appears above and below the object, but not on the sides of the object. +None +Places the object on a separate line in the document. The Text in the document appears above and below the object, but not on the sides of the object. - + Icon -None +None
-Before -Wraps text on the left side of the object if there is enough space. +Before +Wraps text on the left side of the object if there is enough space. - + Icon -Before +Before
-After -Wraps text on the right side of the object if there is enough space. +After +Wraps text on the right side of the object if there is enough space. - + Icon -After +After
-Parallel -Wraps text on all four sides of the border frame of the object. +Parallel +Wraps text on all four sides of the border frame of the object. - + Icon -Parallel +Parallel
-Through -Places the object in front of the text. +Through +Places the object in front of the text. - + Icon -Through +Through
-Optimal -Automatically wraps text to the left, to the right, or on all four sides of the border frame of the object. If the distance between the object and the page margin is less than 2 cm, the text is not wrapped. +Optimal +Automatically wraps text to the left, to the right, or on all four sides of the border frame of the object. If the distance between the object and the page margin is less than 2 cm, the text is not wrapped. - + Icon -Optimal +Optimal
-Options -Specify the text wrap options. +Options +Specify the text wrap options. -First Paragraph -Starts a new paragraph below the object after you press Enter. The space between the paragraphs is determined by the size of the object. +First Paragraph +Starts a new paragraph below the object after you press Enter. The space between the paragraphs is determined by the size of the object. -In Background -Moves the selected object to the background. This option is only available if you selected the Through wrap type. +In Background +Moves the selected object to the background. This option is only available if you selected the Through wrap type. -Contour -Wraps text around the shape of the object. This option is not available for the Through wrap type, or for frames. To change the contour of an object, select the object, and then choose Format - Wrap - Edit Contour. +Contour +Wraps text around the shape of the object. This option is not available for the Through wrap type, or for frames. To change the contour of an object, select the object, and then choose Format - Wrap - Edit Contour. -Outside only -Wraps text only around the contour of the object, but not in open areas within the object shape. This option is not available for frames. -Gaps -Specify the amount of space to leave between the selected object and the text. +Outside only +Wraps text only around the contour of the object, but not in open areas within the object shape. This option is not available for frames. +Gaps +Specify the amount of space to leave between the selected object and the text. -Left -Enter the amount of space that you want between the left edge of the object and the text. +Left +Enter the amount of space that you want between the left edge of the object and the text. -Right -Enter the amount of space that you want between the right edge of the object and the text. +Right +Enter the amount of space that you want between the right edge of the object and the text. -Top -Enter the amount of space that you want between the top edge of the object and the text. +Top +Enter the amount of space that you want between the top edge of the object and the text. -Bottom -Enter the amount of space that you want between the bottom edge of the object and the text. +Bottom +Enter the amount of space that you want between the bottom edge of the object and the text. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp index 2580df701d..decf507bb1 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp @@ -32,241 +32,241 @@ -Contour Editor -Changes the contour of the selected object. $[officename] uses the contour when determining the text wrap options for the object. +Contour Editor +Changes the contour of the selected object. $[officename] uses the contour when determining the text wrap options for the object. -Displays a preview of the contour.and this bubble text hides both from view if not set to 0 length +Displays a preview of the contour.and this bubble text hides both from view if not set to 0 length
-Apply -Applies the contour to the selected object. +Apply +Applies the contour to the selected object. - + Icon -Apply +Apply
-Workspace -Deletes the custom contour. Click here, and then click in the preview area. +Workspace +Deletes the custom contour. Click here, and then click in the preview area. - + Icon -Workspace +Workspace
-Select -Changes to selection mode, so that you can select the contour. +Select +Changes to selection mode, so that you can select the contour. - + Icon -Select +Select
-Rectangle -Draws a rectangular contour where you drag in the object preview. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag. +Rectangle +Draws a rectangular contour where you drag in the object preview. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag. - + Icon -Rectangle +Rectangle
-Ellipse -Draws an oval contour where you drag in the object preview. To draw a circle, hold down shift while you drag. +Ellipse +Draws an oval contour where you drag in the object preview. To draw a circle, hold down shift while you drag. - + Icon -Ellipse +Ellipse
-Polygon -Draws a closed contour consisting of straight line segments. Click where you want to start the polygon, and drag to draw a line segment. Click again to define the end of the line segment, and continue clicking to define the remaining line segments of the polygon. Double-click to finish drawing the polygon. To constrain the polygon to angles of 45 degree, hold down Shift when you click. +Polygon +Draws a closed contour consisting of straight line segments. Click where you want to start the polygon, and drag to draw a line segment. Click again to define the end of the line segment, and continue clicking to define the remaining line segments of the polygon. Double-click to finish drawing the polygon. To constrain the polygon to angles of 45 degree, hold down Shift when you click. - + Icon -Polygon +Polygon
-Edit Points -Lets you change the shape of the contour. Click here, and then drag the handles of the contour. +Edit Points +Lets you change the shape of the contour. Click here, and then drag the handles of the contour. - + Icon -Edit Points +Edit Points
-Move Points -Lets you drag the handles of the contour to change the shape of the contour. +Move Points +Lets you drag the handles of the contour to change the shape of the contour. - + Icon -Move Points +Move Points
-Insert Points -Inserts a handle that you can drag to change the shape of the contour. Click here, and then click on the contour outline. +Insert Points +Inserts a handle that you can drag to change the shape of the contour. Click here, and then click on the contour outline. - + Icon -Insert Points +Insert Points
-Delete Points -Removes a point from the contour outline. Click here, and then click the point that you want to delete. +Delete Points +Removes a point from the contour outline. Click here, and then click the point that you want to delete. - + Icon -Delete Points +Delete Points
-Auto Contour -Automatically draws a contour around the object that you can edit. +Auto Contour +Automatically draws a contour around the object that you can edit. - + Icon -AutoContour +AutoContour
-Undo -Reverses the last action. +Undo +Reverses the last action. - + Icon -Undo +Undo
-Redo -Reverses the action of the last Undo command. +Redo +Reverses the action of the last Undo command. - + Icon -Redo +Redo
-Color Replacer -Selects the parts of the bitmap that are the same color. Click here, and then click a color in the bitmap. To increase the color range that is selected, increase the value in the Tolerance box. +Color Replacer +Selects the parts of the bitmap that are the same color. Click here, and then click a color in the bitmap. To increase the color range that is selected, increase the value in the Tolerance box. - + Icon -Color Replacer +Color Replacer
-Tolerance -Enter the color tolerance for the Color Replacer as a percentage. To increase the color range that the Color Replacer selects, enter a high percentage. +Tolerance +Enter the color tolerance for the Color Replacer as a percentage. To increase the color range that the Color Replacer selects, enter a high percentage.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp index 0c0e4d0e1d..42c1d81d38 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp @@ -32,43 +32,43 @@
-Image -Specify the flip and the link options for the selected image. +Image +Specify the flip and the link options for the selected image.
-Flip +Flip -Verticallysee bug 106420;Writer uses VERT for HOR and HORZ for VERT -Flips the selected image vertically. +Verticallysee bug 106420;Writer uses VERT for HOR and HORZ for VERT +Flips the selected image vertically. -Horizontally -Flips the selected image horizontally. +Horizontally +Flips the selected image horizontally. -On all pages -Flips the selected image horizontally on all pages. +On all pages +Flips the selected image horizontally on all pages. -On left pages -Flips the selected image horizontally only on even pages. +On left pages +Flips the selected image horizontally only on even pages. -On right pages -Flips the selected image horizontally only on odd pages. +On right pages +Flips the selected image horizontally only on odd pages. -Link -Inserts the image as a link. +Link +Inserts the image as a link. -File name +File name Displays the path to the linked graphic file. To change the link, click the Browse button and then locate the file that you want to link to. Browse -Locate the new graphic file that you want to link to, and then click Open. +Locate the new graphic file that you want to link to, and then click Open. -Format - Flip -Edit - Links +Format - Flip +Edit - Links diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp index 83999f50cd..52ed1b90ec 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp @@ -32,58 +32,58 @@
-Macro -Specifies the macro to run when you click an image, frame, or an OLE object. +Macro +Specifies the macro to run when you click an image, frame, or an OLE object.
-Event -Lists the events that can trigger a macro. Only the events that are relevant to the selected object are listed. -The following table lists the object types and the events that can trigger a macro: +Event +Lists the events that can trigger a macro. Only the events that are relevant to the selected object are listed. +The following table lists the object types and the events that can trigger a macro: -Event +Event -Event trigger +Event trigger -OLE object +OLE object -Image +Image -Frame +Frame -AutoText +AutoText -ImageMap area +ImageMap area -Hyperlink +Hyperlink -Click object +Click object -object is selected +object is selected -x +x -x +x -x +x @@ -94,89 +94,89 @@ -Mouse over object +Mouse over object -mouse pointer moves over the object +mouse pointer moves over the object -x +x -x +x -x +x -x +x -x +x -Trigger Hyperlink +Trigger Hyperlink -hyperlink that is assigned to the object is clicked +hyperlink that is assigned to the object is clicked -x +x -x +x -x +x -x +x -Mouse leaves object +Mouse leaves object -mouse pointer moves off the object +mouse pointer moves off the object -x +x -x +x -x +x -x +x -x +x -Image loaded successfully +Image loaded successfully -image is loaded successfully +image is loaded successfully -x +x @@ -189,15 +189,15 @@ -Image loading terminated +Image loading terminated -loading of the image is terminated by the user (for example, when downloading) +loading of the image is terminated by the user (for example, when downloading) -x +x @@ -210,15 +210,15 @@ -Could not load image +Could not load image -image is not successfully loaded +image is not successfully loaded -x +x @@ -231,17 +231,17 @@ -Input of alpha characters +Input of alpha characters -text is inputted +text is inputted -x +x @@ -252,17 +252,17 @@ -Input of non-alpha characters +Input of non-alpha characters -Nonprinting characters, such as tabs and line breaks, are entered +Nonprinting characters, such as tabs and line breaks, are entered -x +x @@ -273,17 +273,17 @@ -Resize frame +Resize frame -frame is resized +frame is resized -x +x @@ -294,17 +294,17 @@ -Move frame +Move frame -frame is moved +frame is moved -x +x @@ -315,10 +315,10 @@ -Before inserting AutoText +Before inserting AutoText -before AutoText is inserted +before AutoText is inserted @@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ -x +x @@ -336,10 +336,10 @@ -After inserting AutoText +After inserting AutoText -after AutoText is inserted +after AutoText is inserted @@ -348,7 +348,7 @@ -x +x @@ -357,22 +357,22 @@
-For events that are linked to controls in forms, see Control properties or Form properties. -Assigned Action -Specify the macro that executes when the selected event occurs. -Frames allow you to link certain events to a function that then decides if the event is handled by $[officename] Writer or by the function. See the $[officename] Basic Help for more information. +For events that are linked to controls in forms, see Control properties or Form properties. +Assigned Action +Specify the macro that executes when the selected event occurs. +Frames allow you to link certain events to a function that then decides if the event is handled by $[officename] Writer or by the function. See the $[officename] Basic Help for more information. -Macro From -Lists the $[officename] program and any open $[officename] document. Within this list, select the location where you want to save the macros. +Macro From +Lists the $[officename] program and any open $[officename] document. Within this list, select the location where you want to save the macros. -Existing Macros -Lists the available macros. Select the macro that you want to assign to the selected event, and then click Assign. +Existing Macros +Lists the available macros. Select the macro that you want to assign to the selected event, and then click Assign. -Assign -Assigns the selected macro to the selected event. +Assign +Assigns the selected macro to the selected event. -Remove -Removes the macro assignment from the selected entry. +Remove +Removes the macro assignment from the selected entry. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp index 6f74f251ab..e80cfcce7e 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp @@ -34,39 +34,35 @@ hyperlinks; for objects -Hyperlink - Specify the properties of the hyperlink for the selected graphic, frame or OLE object. +Hyperlink + Specify the properties of the hyperlink for the selected graphic, frame or OLE object.
- Link to - Set the link properties. + Link to + Set the link properties. -URL - Enter the complete path to the file that you want to open. +URL + Enter the complete path to the file that you want to open. -Browse - Locate the file that you want the hyperlink to open, and then click Open. The target file can be on your machine or on an FTP server in the Internet. +Browse + Locate the file that you want the hyperlink to open, and then click Open. The target file can be on your machine or on an FTP server in the Internet. -Name - Enter a name for the hyperlink. +Name + Enter a name for the hyperlink. -Frame - Specify the name of the frame where you want to open the targeted file. The predefined target frame names are described here. - Image Map - Select the type of ImageMap that you want to use. The ImageMap settings override the hyperlink settings that you enter on this page. +Frame + Specify the name of the frame where you want to open the targeted file. The predefined target frame names are described here. + Image Map + Select the type of ImageMap that you want to use. The ImageMap settings override the hyperlink settings that you enter on this page. -Server-side image map - Uses a server-side image map. +Server-side image map + Uses a server-side image map. -Client-side image map - Uses the image map that you created for the selected object. +Client-side image map + Uses the image map that you created for the selected object. - URL + URL diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05060900.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05060900.xhp index 73c1284714..2fc36e0829 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05060900.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05060900.xhp @@ -31,55 +31,55 @@
-Options -Specifies properties for the selected object, graphic or frame. +Options +Specifies properties for the selected object, graphic or frame.
-Name -Specifies the name of the selected item, and associated links. +Name +Specifies the name of the selected item, and associated links. -Name -Enter a name for the selected item. -Assign an object, graphic or frame a meaningful name, so that you can quickly locate it afterwards in long documents. +Name +Enter a name for the selected item. +Assign an object, graphic or frame a meaningful name, so that you can quickly locate it afterwards in long documents. -Alternative text (floating frames, graphics, and objects only) -Enter the text to display in a web browser when the selected item is unavailable. Alternate text is also used to assist people with disabilities. +Alternative text (floating frames, graphics, and objects only) +Enter the text to display in a web browser when the selected item is unavailable. Alternate text is also used to assist people with disabilities. -Previous link -Displays the item (object, graphic, or frame) that comes before the current item in a linked sequence. To add or change the previous link, select a name from the list. If you are linking frames, the current frame and the target frame must be empty. +Previous link +Displays the item (object, graphic, or frame) that comes before the current item in a linked sequence. To add or change the previous link, select a name from the list. If you are linking frames, the current frame and the target frame must be empty. -Next link -Displays the item (object, graphic, or frame) that comes after the current item in a linked sequence. To add or change the next link, select a name from the list. If you are a linking frames, the target frame must be empty. -Protect -Specifies protection options for the selected item. +Next link +Displays the item (object, graphic, or frame) that comes after the current item in a linked sequence. To add or change the next link, select a name from the list. If you are a linking frames, the target frame must be empty. +Protect +Specifies protection options for the selected item. -Protect Contents -Prevents changes to the contents of the selected item. -You can still copy the contents of the selected item. +Protect Contents +Prevents changes to the contents of the selected item. +You can still copy the contents of the selected item. -Protect Position -Locks the position of the selected item in the current document. +Protect Position +Locks the position of the selected item in the current document. -Protect Size -Locks the size of the selected item. -Properties -Specifies print and text options for the selected item. +Protect Size +Locks the size of the selected item. +Properties +Specifies print and text options for the selected item. -Editable in read-only document (frames only) -Allows you to edit the contents of a frame in a document that is read-only (write-protected). +Editable in read-only document (frames only) +Allows you to edit the contents of a frame in a document that is read-only (write-protected). -Print -Includes the selected item when you print the document. +Print +Includes the selected item when you print the document. -Text flow -Specifies the preferred text flow direction in a frame. To use the default text flow settings for the page, select Use superordinate object settings from the list. +Text flow +Specifies the preferred text flow direction in a frame. To use the default text flow settings for the page, select Use superordinate object settings from the list. -Content vertical alignment -Specifies the vertical alignment of the frame's content. Mainly it means text content, but it also affects tables and other objects anchored to the text area (anchored as character, to character or to paragraph), for example frames, graphics or drawings. +Content vertical alignment +Specifies the vertical alignment of the frame's content. Mainly it means text content, but it also affects tables and other objects anchored to the text area (anchored as character, to character or to paragraph), for example frames, graphics or drawings. -Text direction. +Text direction. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05080000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05080000.xhp index 561ee6d832..14de12cfc9 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05080000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05080000.xhp @@ -32,16 +32,16 @@ -Name is not related to UI, dialog is called by Format - Image or Format - Frame, so name should be Frame / Image or we need two files that are the same except for title -Object -Opens a dialog where you can modify the properties of the selected object, for example, its size and name. +Name is not related to UI, dialog is called by Format - Image or Format - Frame, so name should be Frame / Image or we need two files that are the same except for title +Object +Opens a dialog where you can modify the properties of the selected object, for example, its size and name.
-Wrap +Wrap diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05090000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05090000.xhp index 59f1b95c2c..ee223007cc 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05090000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05090000.xhp @@ -28,8 +28,8 @@ -Table Format -Specifies the properties of the selected table, for example, name, alignment, spacing, column width, borders, and background. +Table Format +Specifies the properties of the selected table, for example, name, alignment, spacing, column width, borders, and background.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05090100.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05090100.xhp index 63dcbc69aa..faa65e077b 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05090100.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05090100.xhp @@ -35,56 +35,56 @@ tables; inserting text before UFI: deleted "tables;sizing" -Table -Specify the size, position, spacing, and alignment options for the selected table. +Table +Specify the size, position, spacing, and alignment options for the selected table.
-Properties +Properties -Name -Enter an internal name for the table. You can use this name to quickly locate the table in the Navigator. +Name +Enter an internal name for the table. You can use this name to quickly locate the table in the Navigator. -Width -Enter the width of the table. This check box is only available if the Automatic option in the Alignment area is not selected. +Width +Enter the width of the table. This check box is only available if the Automatic option in the Alignment area is not selected. -Relative -Displays the width of the table as a percentage of the page width. -Alignment -Set the alignment options for the selected table. +Relative +Displays the width of the table as a percentage of the page width. +Alignment +Set the alignment options for the selected table. -Automatic -Extends the table horizontally to the left and to the right page margins. This is the recommended setting for tables in HTML documents. +Automatic +Extends the table horizontally to the left and to the right page margins. This is the recommended setting for tables in HTML documents. -Left -Aligns the left edge of the table to the left page margin. +Left +Aligns the left edge of the table to the left page margin. -Left margin -Aligns the left edge of the table to the indent that you enter in the Left box in the Spacing area. +Left margin +Aligns the left edge of the table to the indent that you enter in the Left box in the Spacing area. -Right -Aligns the right edge of the table to the right page margin. +Right +Aligns the right edge of the table to the right page margin. -Centered -Centers the table horizontally on the page. +Centered +Centers the table horizontally on the page. -Manual -Horizontally aligns the table based on the values that you enter in the Left and Right boxes in the Spacing area. $[officename] automatically calculates the table width. Select this option if you want to specify the individual column widths. -Spacing +Manual +Horizontally aligns the table based on the values that you enter in the Left and Right boxes in the Spacing area. $[officename] automatically calculates the table width. Select this option if you want to specify the individual column widths. +Spacing -Left -Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the left page margin and the edge of the table. This option is not available if the Automatic or the Left option is selected in the Alignment area. +Left +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the left page margin and the edge of the table. This option is not available if the Automatic or the Left option is selected in the Alignment area. -Right -Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the right page margin and the edge of the table. This option is not available if the Automatic or the Right option is selected in the Alignment area. +Right +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the right page margin and the edge of the table. This option is not available if the Automatic or the Right option is selected in the Alignment area. -Above -Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the top edge of the table and the text above the table. +Above +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the top edge of the table and the text above the table. -Below -Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the bottom edge of the table and the text below the table. -To insert a paragraph before a table at the beginning of a document, header or footer, place the cursor before any content in the first cell, and then press Enter. +Below +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the bottom edge of the table and the text below the table. +To insert a paragraph before a table at the beginning of a document, header or footer, place the cursor before any content in the first cell, and then press Enter. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05090200.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05090200.xhp index fe19db46e7..bbee065169 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05090200.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05090200.xhp @@ -32,37 +32,37 @@
-Columns -Specify the column width properties. +Columns +Specify the column width properties.
-Adapt table width -Reduces or increases table width with modified column width. This option is not available if Automatic is selected in the Alignment area on the Table tab. +Adapt table width +Reduces or increases table width with modified column width. This option is not available if Automatic is selected in the Alignment area on the Table tab. -Adjust columns proportionally -If possible, change in column width will be equal for each column. This option is not available if Automatic is selected in the Alignment area on the Table tab. +Adjust columns proportionally +If possible, change in column width will be equal for each column. This option is not available if Automatic is selected in the Alignment area on the Table tab. -Remaining space -Displays the amount of space that is available for adjusting the width of the columns. To set the width of the table, click the Table tab. -Column width -Specify the column widths for the table. +Remaining space +Displays the amount of space that is available for adjusting the width of the columns. To set the width of the table, click the Table tab. +Column width +Specify the column widths for the table. -Column widths -Enter the width that you want for the column. +Column widths +Enter the width that you want for the column. -Left Arrow -Displays the table columns found to the left of the current column. +Left Arrow +Displays the table columns found to the left of the current column. -Right Arrow -Displays the table columns found to the right of the current column. +Right Arrow +Displays the table columns found to the right of the current column. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp index 1c53a232b3..084911d0d1 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp @@ -32,41 +32,41 @@ tables; editing with the keyboard -Editing Tables Using the Keyboard +Editing Tables Using the Keyboard -You can resize and delete table columns with the keyboard. -Resizing Columns and Rows +You can resize and delete table columns with the keyboard. +Resizing Columns and Rows -To resize a column, place the cursor in a table cell, hold down Alt, and then press the left or the right arrow. To resize the column without changing the width of the table, hold down Command+OptionCtrl+Alt, and then press the left or the right arrows. +To resize a column, place the cursor in a table cell, hold down Alt, and then press the left or the right arrow. To resize the column without changing the width of the table, hold down Command+OptionCtrl+Alt, and then press the left or the right arrows. -To increase the left indent of the table, hold down OptionAlt+Shift, and then press the right arrow. +To increase the left indent of the table, hold down OptionAlt+Shift, and then press the right arrow. -To resize a row, place the cursor in the row, hold down OptionAlt, and then press the up or the down arrows. +To resize a row, place the cursor in the row, hold down OptionAlt, and then press the up or the down arrows. -To move the table downwards on the page, hold down OptionAlt+Shift, and then press the down arrow. +To move the table downwards on the page, hold down OptionAlt+Shift, and then press the down arrow. -Inserting and deleting columns or rows +Inserting and deleting columns or rows -To insert a column, place the cursor in a table cell, hold down OptionAlt and press Insert, release, and then press the left or the right arrow. +To insert a column, place the cursor in a table cell, hold down OptionAlt and press Insert, release, and then press the left or the right arrow. -To delete a column, place the cursor in the column that you want to delete, hold down OptionAlt and press Delete, release, and then press the left or the right arrow. +To delete a column, place the cursor in the column that you want to delete, hold down OptionAlt and press Delete, release, and then press the left or the right arrow. -To insert a row, place the cursor in a table cell, hold down OptionAlt and press Insert, release, and then press the up or the down arrow. +To insert a row, place the cursor in a table cell, hold down OptionAlt and press Insert, release, and then press the up or the down arrow. -To delete a row, place the cursor in the row that you want to delete, hold down OptionAlt and press Delete, release, and then press the up or the down arrow. +To delete a row, place the cursor in the row that you want to delete, hold down OptionAlt and press Delete, release, and then press the up or the down arrow. -To change the behavior of tables in a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table. +To change the behavior of tables in a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table. -Table Bar +Table Bar diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp index 2eceaa917c..dfac8bd965 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp @@ -40,70 +40,70 @@ splitting tables;row breaks -Text Flow -Set the text flow options for the text before and after the table. +Text Flow +Set the text flow options for the text before and after the table.
-Text flow +Text flow -Break -Select this check box, and then select the type of break that you want to associate with the table. +Break +Select this check box, and then select the type of break that you want to associate with the table. -Page -Inserts a page break before or after the table. +Page +Inserts a page break before or after the table. -Column -Inserts a column break before or after the table on a multi-column page. +Column +Inserts a column break before or after the table on a multi-column page. -Before -Inserts a page or column break before the table. +Before +Inserts a page or column break before the table. -After -Inserts a page or column break after the table. +After +Inserts a page or column break after the table. -With Page Style -Applies the page style that you specify to the first page that follows the page break. +With Page Style +Applies the page style that you specify to the first page that follows the page break. -Page Style -Select the page style that you want to apply to the first page that follows the break. +Page Style +Select the page style that you want to apply to the first page that follows the break. -Page number -Enter the page number for the first page that follows the break. If you want to continue the current page numbering, leave the checkbox unchecked. +Page number +Enter the page number for the first page that follows the break. If you want to continue the current page numbering, leave the checkbox unchecked. -Allow table to split across pages and columns -Allows a page break or column break between the rows of a table. +Allow table to split across pages and columns +Allows a page break or column break between the rows of a table. -Allow row to break across pages and columns -Allows a page break or column break inside a row of the table. This option is not applied to the first row in a table if the Repeat Heading option is selected. +Allow row to break across pages and columns +Allows a page break or column break inside a row of the table. This option is not applied to the first row in a table if the Repeat Heading option is selected. -Keep with next paragraph -Keeps the table and the following paragraph together when you insert the break. +Keep with next paragraph +Keeps the table and the following paragraph together when you insert the break. -Repeat heading -Repeats the table heading on a new page when the table spans more than one page. +Repeat heading +Repeats the table heading on a new page when the table spans more than one page. -The first ... rows -Enter the number of rows to include in the heading. +The first ... rows +Enter the number of rows to include in the heading. -Text orientation -Select the orientation for the text in the cells. You can use the following formatting options to specify the orientation of text in table cells: +Text orientation +Select the orientation for the text in the cells. You can use the following formatting options to specify the orientation of text in table cells: -Horizontal +Horizontal -Vertical +Vertical -Use superordinate object settings +Use superordinate object settings -Vertical alignment -Specify the vertical text alignment for the cells in the table. +Vertical alignment +Specify the vertical text alignment for the cells in the table. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05100000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05100000.xhp index a7c804317e..fc61604a79 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05100000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05100000.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
-Cell -This command is only available if you have selected a table in your document, or if the cursor is in a table cell. +Cell +This command is only available if you have selected a table in your document, or if the cursor is in a table cell.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05100300.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05100300.xhp index bd272d8825..67de90538e 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05100300.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05100300.xhp @@ -30,13 +30,13 @@
-Protect - Prevents the contents of the selected cells from being modified. +Protect + Prevents the contents of the selected cells from being modified.
- When the cursor is in a read-only cell, a note appears on the Status Bar. - To remove cell protection, select the cell(s), right-click, and then choose Cell - Unprotect. + When the cursor is in a read-only cell, a note appears on the Status Bar. + To remove cell protection, select the cell(s), right-click, and then choose Cell - Unprotect. \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05100400.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05100400.xhp index 9de06f97ce..71b243f6ae 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05100400.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05100400.xhp @@ -30,15 +30,15 @@
-Unprotect - Removes the cell protection for all selected cells in the current table. +Unprotect + Removes the cell protection for all selected cells in the current table.
- To remove the protection from several tables at once, select the tables, and then press Command + To remove the protection from several tables at once, select the tables, and then press Command Ctrl+Shift+T. To remove the protection from all of the tables in a document, click anywhere in the document, and then press Command Ctrl+Shift+T. - You can also remove cell protection from a table in the Navigator. + You can also remove cell protection from a table in the Navigator. \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05110000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05110000.xhp index f30a2eeb5d..7cde6356ee 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05110000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05110000.xhp @@ -31,19 +31,19 @@
-Row -Set the height of rows, or select, insert, and delete rows. +Row +Set the height of rows, or select, insert, and delete rows.
-Height +Height -Optimal Height +Optimal Height -Insert... +Insert... diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp index 9030d8fe57..c2922d9b0f 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp @@ -32,18 +32,18 @@ -Row Height -Changes the height of the selected row(s). +Row Height +Changes the height of the selected row(s).
-Height -Enter the height that you want for the selected row(s). +Height +Enter the height that you want for the selected row(s). -Fit to size -Automatically adjusts the row height to match the contents of the cells. -You can also right-click in a cell, and then choose Row - Optimal Height. +Fit to size +Automatically adjusts the row height to match the contents of the cells. +You can also right-click in a cell, and then choose Row - Optimal Height. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05110200.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05110200.xhp index 1c8d4faf0c..4bb367f6d3 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05110200.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05110200.xhp @@ -33,11 +33,11 @@ -Optimal Height - Automatically adjusts row heights to match the contents of the cells. This is the default setting for new tables. +Optimal Height + Automatically adjusts row heights to match the contents of the cells. This is the default setting for new tables.
- This option is only available if the table contains a row with a fixed height. + This option is only available if the table contains a row with a fixed height. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05110300.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05110300.xhp index e94bb0f132..93b4692710 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05110300.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05110300.xhp @@ -34,12 +34,12 @@
-Select - Selects the row that contains the cursor. +Select + Selects the row that contains the cursor.
- This option is only available if the cursor is in a table. + This option is only available if the cursor is in a table. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05110500.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05110500.xhp index 3a14b42cbc..875b53ae38 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05110500.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05110500.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ -Delete -Deletes the selected row(s) from the table. +Delete +Deletes the selected row(s) from the table.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05120000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05120000.xhp index dc220e1c99..5d05bb777d 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05120000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05120000.xhp @@ -31,19 +31,19 @@
-Column -Set the width of columns, or select, insert, and delete columns. +Column +Set the width of columns, or select, insert, and delete columns.
-Width... +Width... -Optimal width +Optimal width -Insert... +Insert... diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05120100.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05120100.xhp index b2411938ca..8de09326d7 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05120100.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05120100.xhp @@ -32,18 +32,18 @@ -Column Width -Changes the width of the selected column(s). +Column Width +Changes the width of the selected column(s).
-Width +Width -Columns -Enter the column number of the column you want to change the width of. +Columns +Enter the column number of the column you want to change the width of. -Width -Enter the width that you want for the selected column(s).removed 2 sentences, see #i64155 +Width +Enter the width that you want for the selected column(s).removed 2 sentences, see #i64155 diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05120200.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05120200.xhp index f0acbc3e84..71ed630472 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05120200.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05120200.xhp @@ -32,10 +32,10 @@ -Optimal Width -Automatically adjusts column widths to match the contents of the cells. Changing the width of a column does not affect the width of the other columns in the table. The width of the table cannot exceed the page width. +Optimal Width +Automatically adjusts column widths to match the contents of the cells. Changing the width of a column does not affect the width of the other columns in the table. The width of the table cannot exceed the page width. -The change affects only selected cells. You can adjust multiple cells next to each other if you select the cells together. +The change affects only selected cells. You can adjust multiple cells next to each other if you select the cells together.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05120300.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05120300.xhp index 92e0873deb..5f7fc0900c 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05120300.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05120300.xhp @@ -28,8 +28,8 @@
-Select - Selects the column that contains the cursor. This option is only available if the cursor is in a table. +Select + Selects the column that contains the cursor. This option is only available if the cursor is in a table.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05120400.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05120400.xhp index 755731c3dc..28631d4eb7 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05120400.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05120400.xhp @@ -31,26 +31,26 @@ -Inserts a row into the table. +Inserts a row into the table. -Inserts a column into the table. -Insert Columns/Rows -Inserts a row or column into the table. This command is only available when the cursor is in a table. +Inserts a column into the table. +Insert Columns/Rows +Inserts a row or column into the table. This command is only available when the cursor is in a table.
-Insert +Insert Number -Enter the number of columns or rows that you want. -Position -Specifies where to insert the columns or rows. +Enter the number of columns or rows that you want. +Position +Specifies where to insert the columns or rows. -Before -Adds new columns to the left of the current column, or adds new rows above the current row. +Before +Adds new columns to the left of the current column, or adds new rows above the current row. -After -Adds new columns to the right of the current column, or adds new rows below the current row. +After +Adds new columns to the right of the current column, or adds new rows below the current row. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05120500.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05120500.xhp index 829af7c63e..83d97ec875 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05120500.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05120500.xhp @@ -34,11 +34,11 @@ -Delete -Deletes the selected column(s) from the table. +Delete +Deletes the selected column(s) from the table.
-This command is only available if the cursor is in a table. +This command is only available if the cursor is in a table.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05130000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05130000.xhp index d10a8a68ef..91896e4c21 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05130000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05130000.xhp @@ -37,54 +37,54 @@ page styles;style categories numbering;style categories MW changed "numbering styles;" to "numbering;" -Styles in Writer +Styles in Writer
-UFI: this is no more "Style Catalog" dialog, but we need the links and tablesUFI: another comment: the Style Catalog can be customized to be visible again!!! Dont know it this is temporary bug, workaround, or feature -The following information concerns Writer styles that you can apply using the Styles and Formatting window. +UFI: this is no more "Style Catalog" dialog, but we need the links and tablesUFI: another comment: the Style Catalog can be customized to be visible again!!! Dont know it this is temporary bug, workaround, or feature +The following information concerns Writer styles that you can apply using the Styles and Formatting window.
-If you want, you can edit the styles of the current document, and then save the document as a template. To save the document as template, choose File - Templates - Save. +If you want, you can edit the styles of the current document, and then save the document as a template. To save the document as template, choose File - Templates - Save. -Style Category -These are the different categories of formatting styles. +Style Category +These are the different categories of formatting styles. -Name +Name -Description +Description -Character Styles +Character Styles -Use Character Styles to format single characters, or entire words and phrases. If you want, you can nest Character Styles. +Use Character Styles to format single characters, or entire words and phrases. If you want, you can nest Character Styles. -Paragraph Styles +Paragraph Styles -Use Paragraph Styles to format paragraphs, including the font type and size. You can also select the paragraph style to apply to the next paragraph. +Use Paragraph Styles to format paragraphs, including the font type and size. You can also select the paragraph style to apply to the next paragraph. -Frame Styles +Frame Styles -Use Frame Styles to format text and graphic frames. +Use Frame Styles to format text and graphic frames. -Page Styles +Page Styles -Use Page Styles to organize the structure of the document, and to add page numbers. You can also specify the page style to apply to the first page that follows after a page break. +Use Page Styles to organize the structure of the document, and to add page numbers. You can also specify the page style to apply to the first page that follows after a page break. @@ -98,111 +98,111 @@
-Style Groups -These are the style groups that you can display in the Styles and Formatting window. +Style Groups +These are the style groups that you can display in the Styles and Formatting window. -Name +Name -Meaning +Meaning -Automatic +Automatic -Displays styles appropriate to the current context. +Displays styles appropriate to the current context. -All Styles +All Styles -Displays all styles of the active style category. +Displays all styles of the active style category. -Applied Styles +Applied Styles -Displays the styles (of selected category) applied in the current document. +Displays the styles (of selected category) applied in the current document. -Custom Styles +Custom Styles -Displays all user-defined styles in the selected style category. +Displays all user-defined styles in the selected style category. -Character Styles +Character Styles -Displays formatting styles for text. +Displays formatting styles for text. -Chapter Styles +Chapter Styles -Displays formatting styles for headings. +Displays formatting styles for headings. -List Styles +List Styles -Displays formatting styles for numbered or bulleted lists. +Displays formatting styles for numbered or bulleted lists. -Index Styles +Index Styles -Displays formatting styles for indexes. +Displays formatting styles for indexes. -Special Region Styles +Special Region Styles -Displays formatting styles for headers, footers, footnotes, endnotes, tables, and captions. +Displays formatting styles for headers, footers, footnotes, endnotes, tables, and captions. -HTML Styles +HTML Styles -Displays a list of styles for HTML documents. +Displays a list of styles for HTML documents. -Conditional Styles +Conditional Styles -Displays the user-defined conditional styles. +Displays the user-defined conditional styles. -Hierarchical +Hierarchical -Displays the styles in the selected category in a hierarchical list. To view the styles in a sublevel, click on the plus sign (+) next to the sublevel name. +Displays the styles in the selected category in a hierarchical list. To view the styles in a sublevel, click on the plus sign (+) next to the sublevel name.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05130002.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05130002.xhp index 51cfc81613..5d0e4491a8 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05130002.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05130002.xhp @@ -30,8 +30,8 @@ -Character Style -Here, you can create a font style. +Character Style +Here, you can create a font style.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp index 6f87099460..54392c5094 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp @@ -30,12 +30,12 @@ -Numbering Style -Here you can create a Numbering Style. The Numbering Styles are organized in the Styles and Formatting window. +Numbering Style +Here you can create a Numbering Style. The Numbering Styles are organized in the Styles and Formatting window.
-When a Numbering Style is created, a name is assigned to the numbering. This is why such templates are also called "named" numberings. Unnamed numberings, which are used for direct formatting, can be created in the Bullets and Numbering dialog or with the icons of the object bar. +When a Numbering Style is created, a name is assigned to the numbering. This is why such templates are also called "named" numberings. Unnamed numberings, which are used for direct formatting, can be created in the Bullets and Numbering dialog or with the icons of the object bar. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp index 0917d7f711..f1309881a4 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp @@ -32,54 +32,54 @@ conditional styles -Condition -Define conditions for conditional styles here. +Condition +Define conditions for conditional styles here.
-Conditional styles are paragraph styles that have different properties depending on the context. Once defined, you cannot change the conditional properties of a conditional style. -$[officename] applies the paragraph properties of conditional styles as follows (the bold terms correspond to the titles of dialog fields): If a paragraph formatted with a conditional style is in a Context that has an Applied Style linked to it, then the Paragraph Style from that condition is used. If no style is linked to the Context, then the attributes defined in the conditional style apply. The following example illustrates this relationship: +Conditional styles are paragraph styles that have different properties depending on the context. Once defined, you cannot change the conditional properties of a conditional style. +$[officename] applies the paragraph properties of conditional styles as follows (the bold terms correspond to the titles of dialog fields): If a paragraph formatted with a conditional style is in a Context that has an Applied Style linked to it, then the Paragraph Style from that condition is used. If no style is linked to the Context, then the attributes defined in the conditional style apply. The following example illustrates this relationship: -Open a blank text document and write a short business letter with a header (Format - Page - Header). +Open a blank text document and write a short business letter with a header (Format - Page - Header). -Define a new Paragraph Style by choosing New in the Styles and Formatting window, and selecting all the paragraph properties that you want for your business letter in the Paragraph Style dialog. Name this style "Business letter". +Define a new Paragraph Style by choosing New in the Styles and Formatting window, and selecting all the paragraph properties that you want for your business letter in the Paragraph Style dialog. Name this style "Business letter". -Then click the Condition tab and select the Conditional style field to define the new Paragraph Style as a conditional style. +Then click the Condition tab and select the Conditional style field to define the new Paragraph Style as a conditional style. -In Context, select the header entry and under Paragraph Styles select the style for the header in your business letter; for example, the default Paragraph Style "Header". You also can select your own style. +In Context, select the header entry and under Paragraph Styles select the style for the header in your business letter; for example, the default Paragraph Style "Header". You also can select your own style. -You can apply the Paragraph Style to the context by double-clicking the selected entry in the Paragraph Styles list box or by using Apply. +You can apply the Paragraph Style to the context by double-clicking the selected entry in the Paragraph Styles list box or by using Apply. -Click OK to close the Paragraph Style dialog, and then format all paragraphs in your business letter, including the header, with the new "Business letter" conditional Paragraph Style. (When you click in the header, you may need to display All Styles or Custom Styles in the style list to use the new business letter style.) +Click OK to close the Paragraph Style dialog, and then format all paragraphs in your business letter, including the header, with the new "Business letter" conditional Paragraph Style. (When you click in the header, you may need to display All Styles or Custom Styles in the style list to use the new business letter style.) -The header text now has the attributes you specified in the Header Paragraph Style, while the other parts of the document have the attributes defined in the business letter conditional Paragraph Style. -The "Text body" Style was created as a conditional style. Therefore, any styles you derive from it can be used as conditional styles. -The Paragraph Style applied to the context is used when exporting to other formats (RTF, HTML, and so on). +The header text now has the attributes you specified in the Header Paragraph Style, while the other parts of the document have the attributes defined in the business letter conditional Paragraph Style. +The "Text body" Style was created as a conditional style. Therefore, any styles you derive from it can be used as conditional styles. +The Paragraph Style applied to the context is used when exporting to other formats (RTF, HTML, and so on). -Conditional style -Check this box to define a new style as a conditional style. +Conditional style +Check this box to define a new style as a conditional style. -Context -Here you can see the $[officename] predefined contexts, including outline levels 1 to 10, numbering/bullets levels 1 to 10, table header, table contents, section, border, footnote, header and footer. -Applied Style -Here you can see the list of all Paragraph Styles applied to a context. +Context +Here you can see the $[officename] predefined contexts, including outline levels 1 to 10, numbering/bullets levels 1 to 10, table header, table contents, section, border, footnote, header and footer. +Applied Style +Here you can see the list of all Paragraph Styles applied to a context. -Styles -A list of all Paragraph Styles which can be assigned to a context is contained in the list box. +Styles +A list of all Paragraph Styles which can be assigned to a context is contained in the list box. -Remove -Click here to remove the current context assigned to the selected style. +Remove +Click here to remove the current context assigned to the selected style. -Assign -Click Assign to apply the selected Paragraph Style to the defined context. +Assign +Click Assign to apply the selected Paragraph Style to the defined context. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05150000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05150000.xhp index f1ea5299e2..d178a69546 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05150000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05150000.xhp @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@
AutoCorrect function;text documents MW changed AutoFormat to AutoCorrect -AutoCorrect +AutoCorrect Automatically formats the file according to the options that you set under Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options.
@@ -39,8 +39,8 @@ - AutoCorrect Options - Opens the AutoCorrect dialog. + AutoCorrect Options + Opens the AutoCorrect dialog. To open the AutoFormat for Tables dialog, click in a table cell, and then choose Table - AutoFormat Styles. \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05150100.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05150100.xhp index efbcc5b5b4..0a20bdef83 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05150100.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05150100.xhp @@ -31,16 +31,16 @@ -While Typing -Automatically formats the document while you type. To set the formatting options, choose Tools - AutoCorrect +While Typing +Automatically formats the document while you type. To set the formatting options, choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options, and then click the Options tab.
-You can use AutoCorrect to format text documents and plain ASCII text files, but not characters that you have manually formatted. Automatic word completion only occurs after you type a word for the second time in a document. -To reverse the last AutoCorrect action, choose Edit - Undo. +You can use AutoCorrect to format text documents and plain ASCII text files, but not characters that you have manually formatted. Automatic word completion only occurs after you type a word for the second time in a document. +To reverse the last AutoCorrect action, choose Edit - Undo. -Other AutoCorrect rules +Other AutoCorrect rules diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp index 5951566456..c9dafe21eb 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp @@ -33,75 +33,66 @@ styles;table styles AutoFormat function for tables MW changed "tables styles;" to "styles;"MW made "AutoFormat function;" a one level entry -AutoFormat for Tables - Automatically applies formats to the current table, including fonts, shading, and borders. +AutoFormat for Tables + Automatically applies formats to the current table, including fonts, shading, and borders.
- Applying an AutoFormat to a Table + Applying an AutoFormat to a Table - Click in a table cell, or select the cells that you want to format. + Click in a table cell, or select the cells that you want to format. Choose Table - AutoFormat Styles, and then click the format that you to want to apply. - Click OK. + Click OK. -Format - Lists the available formatting styles for tables. Click the format that you want to apply, and then click OK. +Format + Lists the available formatting styles for tables. Click the format that you want to apply, and then click OK. -Add - Adds a new table style to the list. +Add + Adds a new table style to the list. - Format a table in your document. + Format a table in your document. Select the table, and then choose Table - AutoFormat Styles. - Click Add. + Click Add. - In the Add AutoFormat dialog, enter a name, and then click OK. + In the Add AutoFormat dialog, enter a name, and then click OK. -Delete - Deletes the selected table style. - Formatting - Select the formatting attributes that you to include in the selected table style. +Delete + Deletes the selected table style. + Formatting + Select the formatting attributes that you to include in the selected table style. -Number format - Includes numbering formats in the selected table style. +Number format + Includes numbering formats in the selected table style. -Font - Includes font formatting in the selected table style. +Font + Includes font formatting in the selected table style. -Alignment - Includes alignment settings in the selected table style. +Alignment + Includes alignment settings in the selected table style. -Border - Includes border styles in the selected table style. +Border + Includes border styles in the selected table style. -Pattern - Includes background styles in the selected table style. +Pattern + Includes background styles in the selected table style. -Rename - Changes the name of the selected table style. You cannot rename the "Standard" table style. +Rename + Changes the name of the selected table style. You cannot rename the "Standard" table style. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05150104.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05150104.xhp index b3d9c75e65..a71f14dae9 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05150104.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05150104.xhp @@ -30,9 +30,9 @@ -Combine +Combine -Minimum Size -Enter the minimum length for combining single-lined paragraphs as a percentage of the page width. +Minimum Size +Enter the minimum length for combining single-lined paragraphs as a percentage of the page width. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05150200.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05150200.xhp index 00bd0628d1..8f51b1d006 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05150200.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05150200.xhp @@ -36,44 +36,43 @@ headings;automatic separator lines;AutoCorrect function MW replaced AutoFormat by AutoCorrect (2 times) -Apply - Automatically formats the file according to the options that you set under Tools - AutoCorrect +Apply + Automatically formats the file according to the options that you set under Tools - AutoCorrect Options.
- When you apply automatic formats, the following rules apply: - AutoCorrect for Headings - A paragraph is formatted as a heading when the following conditions are met: + When you apply automatic formats, the following rules apply: + AutoCorrect for Headings + A paragraph is formatted as a heading when the following conditions are met: - paragraph begins with a capital letter + paragraph begins with a capital letter - paragraph does not end with a punctuation mark + paragraph does not end with a punctuation mark - empty paragraph above and below the paragraph + empty paragraph above and below the paragraph - AutoCorrect for Bullets / Numbering - To create a bulleted list, type a hyphen (-), star (*), or plus sign (+), followed by a space or tab at the beginning of a paragraph. - To create a numbered list, type a number followed by a period (.), followed by a space or tab at the beginning of a paragraph. - Automatic numbering is only applied to paragraphs formatted with the Standard, Text body or Text body indent paragraph styles. - AutoCorrect for Separator Lines - If you type three or more hyphens (---), underscores (___) or equal signs (===) on line and then press Enter, the paragraph is replaced by a horizontal line as wide as the page. The line is actually the lower border of the preceding paragraph. The following rules apply: + AutoCorrect for Bullets / Numbering + To create a bulleted list, type a hyphen (-), star (*), or plus sign (+), followed by a space or tab at the beginning of a paragraph. + To create a numbered list, type a number followed by a period (.), followed by a space or tab at the beginning of a paragraph. + Automatic numbering is only applied to paragraphs formatted with the Standard, Text body or Text body indent paragraph styles. + AutoCorrect for Separator Lines + If you type three or more hyphens (---), underscores (___) or equal signs (===) on line and then press Enter, the paragraph is replaced by a horizontal line as wide as the page. The line is actually the lower border of the preceding paragraph. The following rules apply: - Three hyphens (-) yield a single line (0.05 pt thick, gap 0.75 mm). + Three hyphens (-) yield a single line (0.05 pt thick, gap 0.75 mm). - Three underscore (_) yield a single line (1 pt thick, gap 0.75 mm). + Three underscore (_) yield a single line (1 pt thick, gap 0.75 mm). - Three equal signs (=) yield a double line (1.10 pt thick, gap 0.75 mm). + Three equal signs (=) yield a double line (1.10 pt thick, gap 0.75 mm). diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05150300.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05150300.xhp index 253c247062..e2822e1053 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05150300.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05150300.xhp @@ -30,23 +30,23 @@
-Apply and Edit Changes -Automatically formats the file according to the options that you set under Tools - AutoCorrect +Apply and Edit Changes +Automatically formats the file according to the options that you set under Tools - AutoCorrect Options. In a dialog, you are asked to accept or reject the changes.
-Accept All -Applies all of the formatting changes. +Accept All +Applies all of the formatting changes. -Reject All -Rejects all of the formatting changes. +Reject All +Rejects all of the formatting changes. -Edit Changes -Opens a dialog where you can accept or reject AutoCorrect changes. You can also view the changes made by a specific author or on a specific date. +Edit Changes +Opens a dialog where you can accept or reject AutoCorrect changes. You can also view the changes made by a specific author or on a specific date. -Manage Changes, Filter tab +Manage Changes, Filter tab diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05170000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05170000.xhp index b6b44c97f1..7010d851a3 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05170000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05170000.xhp @@ -31,38 +31,38 @@ -Load Styles - +Load Styles + Imports formatting styles from another document or template into the current document.
-Categories -Lists the available template categories. Click a category to view its contents in the Templates list. +Categories +Lists the available template categories. Click a category to view its contents in the Templates list. -Templates -Lists the available templates for the selected category. +Templates +Lists the available templates for the selected category. -Text -Loads the paragraph and the character styles from the selected document into the current document. +Text +Loads the paragraph and the character styles from the selected document into the current document. -Frame -Loads the frame styles from the selected document into the current document. +Frame +Loads the frame styles from the selected document into the current document. -Page -Loads the page styles from the selected document into the current document. +Page +Loads the page styles from the selected document into the current document. -Numbering -Loads the numbering styles from the selected document into the current document. +Numbering +Loads the numbering styles from the selected document into the current document. -Overwrite -Replaces styles in the current document that have the same name as the styles you are loading. -Styles with identical names are automatically overwritten. +Overwrite +Replaces styles in the current document that have the same name as the styles you are loading. +Styles with identical names are automatically overwritten. -From file -Locate the file containing the styles that you want to load, and then click Open. +From file +Locate the file containing the styles that you want to load, and then click Open. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05190000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05190000.xhp index 3a90444879..6536901397 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05190000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05190000.xhp @@ -37,25 +37,25 @@ -Split Table -Splits the current table into two separate tables at the cursor position. You can also access this command by right-clicking in a table cell. +Split Table +Splits the current table into two separate tables at the cursor position. You can also access this command by right-clicking in a table cell.
-Mode +Mode -Copy heading -Includes the first row of the original table as the first row of the second table. +Copy heading +Includes the first row of the original table as the first row of the second table. -Custom heading (apply style) -Inserts a blank header row in the second table that is formatted with the style of the first row in the original table. +Custom heading (apply style) +Inserts a blank header row in the second table that is formatted with the style of the first row in the original table. -Custom heading -Inserts an additional blank row in the second table. +Custom heading +Inserts an additional blank row in the second table. -No heading -Splits the table without copying the header row. -When you split a table that contains formulas, the formulas may be affected. +No heading +Splits the table without copying the header row. +When you split a table that contains formulas, the formulas may be affected. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp index 8f05b2590d..779f234871 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp @@ -36,12 +36,12 @@ -Merge Table -Combines two consecutive tables into a single table. The tables must be directly next to each other and not separated by an empty paragraph. +Merge Table +Combines two consecutive tables into a single table. The tables must be directly next to each other and not separated by an empty paragraph.
-If you choose this command when the cursor is in the middle of three consecutive tables, you are prompted to select the table that you want to merge with. +If you choose this command when the cursor is in the middle of three consecutive tables, you are prompted to select the table that you want to merge with. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/05990000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/05990000.xhp index 4555e585d2..7973c1acfc 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/05990000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/05990000.xhp @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@
-Stylesto be deleted +Stylesto be deleted
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp index 2463a86b86..b846341532 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp @@ -30,59 +30,59 @@
-Hyphenation -Inserts hyphens in words that are too long to fit at the end of a line. $[officename] searches the document and suggests hyphenation that you can accept or reject. If text is selected, the Hyphenation dialog works on the selected text only. If no text is selected, the Hyphenation dialog works on the whole document. +Hyphenation +Inserts hyphens in words that are too long to fit at the end of a line. $[officename] searches the document and suggests hyphenation that you can accept or reject. If text is selected, the Hyphenation dialog works on the selected text only. If no text is selected, the Hyphenation dialog works on the whole document.
-To automatically hyphenate the current or selected paragraphs, choose Format - Paragraph, and then click the Text Flow tab. You can also apply automatic hyphenation to a paragraph style. In text where automatic hyphenation is enabled, the Hyphenation dialog will not find any word to hyphenate. -When $[officename] finds a word that requires hyphenation, do one of the following options: +To automatically hyphenate the current or selected paragraphs, choose Format - Paragraph, and then click the Text Flow tab. You can also apply automatic hyphenation to a paragraph style. In text where automatic hyphenation is enabled, the Hyphenation dialog will not find any word to hyphenate. +When $[officename] finds a word that requires hyphenation, do one of the following options: -To accept the hyphenation of the displayed word, click Hyphenate. +To accept the hyphenation of the displayed word, click Hyphenate. -To change the hyphenation of the displayed word, click the left or right arrow below the word, and then click Hyphenate. The left and right buttons are enabled for words with multiple hyphenation points. +To change the hyphenation of the displayed word, click the left or right arrow below the word, and then click Hyphenate. The left and right buttons are enabled for words with multiple hyphenation points. -To reject the hyphenation of the displayed word, click Skip. This word will not be hyphenated. +To reject the hyphenation of the displayed word, click Skip. This word will not be hyphenated. -To automatically hyphenate the remaining part of the selection or the document, click Hyphenate All and answer "Yes" to the following question. +To automatically hyphenate the remaining part of the selection or the document, click Hyphenate All and answer "Yes" to the following question. -To end hyphenation, click Close. The hyphenation that is applied already will not be reverted. You can use Edit - Undo to undo all hyphenation that was applied while the Hyphenation dialog was open. +To end hyphenation, click Close. The hyphenation that is applied already will not be reverted. You can use Edit - Undo to undo all hyphenation that was applied while the Hyphenation dialog was open. -To exclude paragraphs from the automatic hyphenation, select the paragraphs, choose Format - Paragraph, click the Text Flow tab, and then clear the Automatically check box in the Hyphenation area. -To disable the Hyphenation dialog and always hyphenate automatically, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids, and select the Hyphenate without inquiry check box. -To manually enter a hyphen directly in the document, click in the word where you want to add the hyphen, and then press Command +To exclude paragraphs from the automatic hyphenation, select the paragraphs, choose Format - Paragraph, click the Text Flow tab, and then clear the Automatically check box in the Hyphenation area. +To disable the Hyphenation dialog and always hyphenate automatically, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids, and select the Hyphenate without inquiry check box. +To manually enter a hyphen directly in the document, click in the word where you want to add the hyphen, and then press Command Ctrl+Minus sign (-). -To insert a non-breaking (protected) hyphen directly in the document, click in the word that you want to hyphenate, and then press Shift+CommandCtrl+Minus sign(-). -To hide soft hyphens, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then clear the Custom hyphens check box. -Word +To insert a non-breaking (protected) hyphen directly in the document, click in the word that you want to hyphenate, and then press Shift+CommandCtrl+Minus sign(-). +To hide soft hyphens, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then clear the Custom hyphens check box. +Word -Word -Displays the hyphenation suggestion(s) for the selected word. +Word +Displays the hyphenation suggestion(s) for the selected word. -Left / Right Arrow +Left / Right Arrow -Set the position of the hyphen. This option is only available if more than one hyphenation suggestion is displayed. +Set the position of the hyphen. This option is only available if more than one hyphenation suggestion is displayed. -Next -Ignores the hyphenation suggestion and finds the next word to hyphenate. +Next +Ignores the hyphenation suggestion and finds the next word to hyphenate. -Hyphenate -Inserts the hyphen at the indicated position. +Hyphenate +Inserts the hyphen at the indicated position. -Remove -Removes the current hyphenation point from the displayed word. +Remove +Removes the current hyphenation point from the displayed word. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/06040000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/06040000.xhp index 6ae0bf5270..ffdf09684e 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/06040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/06040000.xhp @@ -32,15 +32,15 @@
- Word Count - Counts the words and characters, with or without spaces, in the current selection and in the whole document. The count is kept up to date as you type or change the selection. + Word Count + Counts the words and characters, with or without spaces, in the current selection and in the whole document. The count is kept up to date as you type or change the selection.
- File - Properties - Statistics + File - Properties - Statistics
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp index 28660002c9..ff6e50c38d 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp @@ -30,27 +30,27 @@ -Outline Numbering -Specifies the number format and the hierarchy for chapter numbering in the current document. +Outline Numbering +Specifies the number format and the hierarchy for chapter numbering in the current document.
-Outline numbering is linked to paragraph styles. By default, the "Heading" paragraph styles (1-10) are assigned to the corresponding outline number levels (1-10). If you want, you can assign different paragraph styles to the outline number level. -If you want numbered headings, use the Tools - Outline Numbering menu command to assign numbering to a paragraph style. Do not use the Numbering icon on the Formatting toolbar. -To highlight the screen display of outline numbers, choose View - +Outline numbering is linked to paragraph styles. By default, the "Heading" paragraph styles (1-10) are assigned to the corresponding outline number levels (1-10). If you want, you can assign different paragraph styles to the outline number level. +If you want numbered headings, use the Tools - Outline Numbering menu command to assign numbering to a paragraph style. Do not use the Numbering icon on the Formatting toolbar. +To highlight the screen display of outline numbers, choose View - Field Shadings. -Format -Saves or loads an outline number format. A saved outline number format is available to all text documents. -The Format button is only available for outline numbering. For numbered or bulleted list styles, modify the Numbering Styles of the paragraphs. -Untitled 1 - 9 -Select the predefined numbering style that you want to assign to the selected outline level. -Save As -Opens a dialog where you can save the current settings for the selected outline level. You can then load these settings from another document. +Format +Saves or loads an outline number format. A saved outline number format is available to all text documents. +The Format button is only available for outline numbering. For numbered or bulleted list styles, modify the Numbering Styles of the paragraphs. +Untitled 1 - 9 +Select the predefined numbering style that you want to assign to the selected outline level. +Save As +Opens a dialog where you can save the current settings for the selected outline level. You can then load these settings from another document. -Save As -Click a numbering style in the list, and then enter a name for the style. The numbers correspond to the outline level that the styles are assigned to. +Save As +Click a numbering style in the list, and then enter a name for the style. The numbers correspond to the outline level that the styles are assigned to. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp index 54f6863ad2..e5f80030a7 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp @@ -31,116 +31,116 @@
-Numbering -Specifies the number format and the hierarchy for chapter numbering in the current document. +Numbering +Specifies the number format and the hierarchy for chapter numbering in the current document.
-Level -Click the outline level that you want to modify, and then specify the numbering options for the level. To apply the numbering options, except for the paragraph style, to all of the levels, click "1-10". -Numbering -Specify the formatting for the select outline level. +Level +Click the outline level that you want to modify, and then specify the numbering options for the level. To apply the numbering options, except for the paragraph style, to all of the levels, click "1-10". +Numbering +Specify the formatting for the select outline level. -Paragraph Style -Select the paragraph style that you want to assign to the selected outline level. If you click "None", the selected outline level is not defined. +Paragraph Style +Select the paragraph style that you want to assign to the selected outline level. If you click "None", the selected outline level is not defined. -Number -Select the numbering style that you want to apply to the selected outline level. +Number +Select the numbering style that you want to apply to the selected outline level. - + Selection - + Description -A, B, C, ... +A, B, C, ... -Capital letters +Capital letters -a, b, c, ... +a, b, c, ... -Lowercase letters +Lowercase letters -I, II, III, ... +I, II, III, ... -Roman numerals (upper) +Roman numerals (upper) -i, ii, iii, ... +i, ii, iii, ... -Roman numerals (lower) +Roman numerals (lower) -1, 2, 3, ... +1, 2, 3, ... -Arabic numerals +Arabic numerals -A,... AA,... AAA,... +A,... AA,... AAA,... -Alphabetical numbering with identical capital letters, where the number of letters indicates the chapter level. For example, the second number in level three is "BBB". +Alphabetical numbering with identical capital letters, where the number of letters indicates the chapter level. For example, the second number in level three is "BBB". -a,... aa,... aaa,... +a,... aa,... aaa,... -Alphabetical numbering with identical lower case letters, where the number of letters indicates the chapter level. For example, the third number in level two is "cc". +Alphabetical numbering with identical lower case letters, where the number of letters indicates the chapter level. For example, the third number in level two is "cc". -None +None -No numbering symbol. Only the character or symbol defined in the Separator fields appears at the beginning of the numbered line. +No numbering symbol. Only the character or symbol defined in the Separator fields appears at the beginning of the numbered line.
-Character Style -Select the format of the numbering character. +Character Style +Select the format of the numbering character. -Show sublevels -Select the number of outline levels to include in the chapter numbering. For example, select "3" to display three levels of chapter numbering: 1.1.1 +Show sublevels +Select the number of outline levels to include in the chapter numbering. For example, select "3" to display three levels of chapter numbering: 1.1.1 -Separator Before -Enter the text that you want to display before the chapter number. For example, type "Chapter " to display "Chapter 1". +Separator Before +Enter the text that you want to display before the chapter number. For example, type "Chapter " to display "Chapter 1". -Separator After -Enter the text that you want to display after the chapter number. For example, type a period (.) to display "1." +Separator After +Enter the text that you want to display after the chapter number. For example, type a period (.) to display "1." -Start at -Enter the number that you want to restart the chapter numbering at. +Start at +Enter the number that you want to restart the chapter numbering at. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/06080000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/06080000.xhp index a8041b685c..02bf218f66 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/06080000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/06080000.xhp @@ -29,8 +29,8 @@ -Footnotes/Endnotes Settings -Specifies the display settings for footnotes and endnotes. +Footnotes/Endnotes Settings +Specifies the display settings for footnotes and endnotes.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/06080100.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/06080100.xhp index 99cc0fe2d9..a20239b8de 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/06080100.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/06080100.xhp @@ -32,164 +32,164 @@
-Footnotes -Specifies the formatting for footnotes and endnotes. +Footnotes +Specifies the formatting for footnotes and endnotes.
-To set additional option for footnotes and endnotes, choose Format - Page, and then click the Footnote tab. -AutoNumbering +To set additional option for footnotes and endnotes, choose Format - Page, and then click the Footnote tab. +AutoNumbering -Numbering +Numbering
-Select the numbering style that you want to use for footnotes or endnotes. +Select the numbering style that you want to use for footnotes or endnotes. -Selection +Selection -Description +Description -A, B, C +A, B, C -Uppercase +Uppercase -a, b, c +a, b, c -Lowercase +Lowercase -I, II, III +I, II, III -Roman numerals (upper case) +Roman numerals (upper case) -i, ii, iii +i, ii, iii -Roman numerals (lower case) +Roman numerals (lower case) -1, 2, 3 +1, 2, 3 -Arabic numerals +Arabic numerals -A,... AA,... AAA,... +A,... AA,... AAA,... -Alphabetical numbering with uppercase letters. After the first 26 entries, the numbering restarts at "AA". +Alphabetical numbering with uppercase letters. After the first 26 entries, the numbering restarts at "AA". -a,... aa,... aaa,... +a,... aa,... aaa,... -Alphabetical numbering with lowercase letters. After the first 26 entries, the numbering restarts at "aa". +Alphabetical numbering with lowercase letters. After the first 26 entries, the numbering restarts at "aa".
-Counting -Select the numbering option for the footnotes. +Counting +Select the numbering option for the footnotes. -Option +Option -Meaning +Meaning -Per page +Per page -Restarts the numbering of footnotes at the top of each page. This option is only available if the End of page check box is selected in the Position area. +Restarts the numbering of footnotes at the top of each page. This option is only available if the End of page check box is selected in the Position area. -Per chapter +Per chapter -Restarts the numbering of footnotes at the beginning of each chapter. +Restarts the numbering of footnotes at the beginning of each chapter. -Per document +Per document -Numbers the footnotes in the document sequentially. +Numbers the footnotes in the document sequentially.
-Start at -Enter the number for the first footnote in the document. This option is only available if you selected "Per Document" in the Counting box. +Start at +Enter the number for the first footnote in the document. This option is only available if you selected "Per Document" in the Counting box. -Before -Enter the text that you want to display in front of the footnote number in the note text. For example, type "To " to display "To 1". +Before +Enter the text that you want to display in front of the footnote number in the note text. For example, type "To " to display "To 1". -After -Enter the text that you want to display after the footnote number in the note text. For example, type ")" to display "1)". +After +Enter the text that you want to display after the footnote number in the note text. For example, type ")" to display "1)". Footnote numbers are left aligned by default in the footnote area. For right aligned footnote numbers first edit the paragraph style Footnote. Press F11 to open Styles and Formatting dialog and select Footnote from the list of paragraph styles. Open the local menu with right click and choose Modify. Go to the Indents & Spacing tab page and set indent to 0 before and after the paragraph, including the first line. On Tabs tab page create a tab of right type at 12pt and a tab of left type at 14pt. Then in Footnotes/Endnotes Settings dialog enter \t into the Before and After edit boxes. -Position +Position -End of page -Displays footnotes at the bottom of the page. +End of page +Displays footnotes at the bottom of the page. -End of document -Displays footnotes at the end of the document as endnotes. -Styles -To ensure a uniform appearance for the footnotes in your document, assign a paragraph style to the footnotes. +End of document +Displays footnotes at the end of the document as endnotes. +Styles +To ensure a uniform appearance for the footnotes in your document, assign a paragraph style to the footnotes. -Paragraph -Select the paragraph style for the footnote text. +Paragraph +Select the paragraph style for the footnote text. -Page -Select the page style that you want to use for footnotes. -This option is only available if the End of Document check box is selected in the Position area. -Character Styles -You can assign styles to footnote anchors and text. You can use the predefined footnote styles, or use a different style. +Page +Select the page style that you want to use for footnotes. +This option is only available if the End of Document check box is selected in the Position area. +Character Styles +You can assign styles to footnote anchors and text. You can use the predefined footnote styles, or use a different style. -Text area -Select the character style that you want to use for footnote anchors in the text area of your document. +Text area +Select the character style that you want to use for footnote anchors in the text area of your document. -Footnote area -Select the character style that you want to use for the footnote numbers in the footnote area. -Continuation notice +Footnote area +Select the character style that you want to use for the footnote numbers in the footnote area. +Continuation notice -End of Footnote -Enter the text that you want to display when the footnotes are continued on the next page, for example, "Continued on Page ". $[officename] Writer automatically inserts the number of the following page. +End of Footnote +Enter the text that you want to display when the footnotes are continued on the next page, for example, "Continued on Page ". $[officename] Writer automatically inserts the number of the following page. -Start of next page -Enter the text that you want to display on the page where the footnotes are continued, for example, "Continued from Page ". $[officename] Writer automatically inserts the number of the previous page. +Start of next page +Enter the text that you want to display on the page where the footnotes are continued, for example, "Continued from Page ". $[officename] Writer automatically inserts the number of the previous page. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/06080200.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/06080200.xhp index 41b9d2167a..5510ded41d 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/06080200.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/06080200.xhp @@ -32,39 +32,39 @@
-Endnotes -Specifies the formatting for endnotes. The type of endnote numbering and the Styles to apply are the options available. +Endnotes +Specifies the formatting for endnotes. The type of endnote numbering and the Styles to apply are the options available.
-AutoNumbering +AutoNumbering -Start at -Enter the number for the first endnote in the document. This is useful if want the endnote numbering to span more than one document. +Start at +Enter the number for the first endnote in the document. This is useful if want the endnote numbering to span more than one document. -Before -Enter the text that you want to display in front of the endnote number in the note text. For example, type "re: " to display "re: 1". +Before +Enter the text that you want to display in front of the endnote number in the note text. For example, type "re: " to display "re: 1". -After -Enter the text that you want to display after the endnote number in the note text. For example, type ")" to display "1)". -Styles -To ensure a uniform appearance for the endnotes in your document, assign a paragraph style to the footnotes. +After +Enter the text that you want to display after the endnote number in the note text. For example, type ")" to display "1)". +Styles +To ensure a uniform appearance for the endnotes in your document, assign a paragraph style to the footnotes. -Paragraph -Select the paragraph style for the endnote text. +Paragraph +Select the paragraph style for the endnote text. -Page -Select the page style that you want to use for endnotes. -Character Styles -You can assign styles to endnote anchors and text. You can use the predefined endnote styles, or use a different style. +Page +Select the page style that you want to use for endnotes. +Character Styles +You can assign styles to endnote anchors and text. You can use the predefined endnote styles, or use a different style. -Text area -Select the character style that you want to use for endnote anchors in the text area of your document. +Text area +Select the character style that you want to use for endnote anchors in the text area of your document. -Endnote area -Select the character style that you want to use for the endnote numbers in the endnote area. +Endnote area +Select the character style that you want to use for the endnote numbers in the endnote area. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/06090000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/06090000.xhp index b474def2b1..8f82db4df1 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/06090000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/06090000.xhp @@ -33,53 +33,53 @@ -Convert Text to Table -Converts the selected text into a table, or the selected table into text. +Convert Text to Table +Converts the selected text into a table, or the selected table into text.
-The options available in this dialog depending on the type of conversion. -Separate text at -A separator, such as a tab, marks the column boundaries in the selected text. Each paragraph in the selection is converted into a row in the table. Similarly, when you convert a table into text, the column markers are changed to the character that you specify, and each row is converted into a separate paragraph. +The options available in this dialog depending on the type of conversion. +Separate text at +A separator, such as a tab, marks the column boundaries in the selected text. Each paragraph in the selection is converted into a row in the table. Similarly, when you convert a table into text, the column markers are changed to the character that you specify, and each row is converted into a separate paragraph. -Tabs -Converts the text to a table using tabs as column markers. +Tabs +Converts the text to a table using tabs as column markers. -Semicolons -Converts the text to a table using semi-colons (;) as column markers. +Semicolons +Converts the text to a table using semi-colons (;) as column markers. -Paragraph -Converts the text to a table using paragraphs as column markers. +Paragraph +Converts the text to a table using paragraphs as column markers. -Other: -Converts the text to a table using the character that you type in the box as a column marker. +Other: +Converts the text to a table using the character that you type in the box as a column marker. -Text box -Type the character that you want to use as a column marker. +Text box +Type the character that you want to use as a column marker. -Equal width for all columns -Creates columns of equal width, regardless of the position of the column marker. +Equal width for all columns +Creates columns of equal width, regardless of the position of the column marker. -AutoFormat -Opens the AutoFormat dialog, where you can select a predefined layout for table. +AutoFormat +Opens the AutoFormat dialog, where you can select a predefined layout for table. -Options +Options -Heading -Formats the first row of the new table as a heading. +Heading +Formats the first row of the new table as a heading. -Repeat heading -Repeats the table header on each page that the table spans. +Repeat heading +Repeats the table header on each page that the table spans. -The first ... rows -Repeats the first n rows as a header. +The first ... rows +Repeats the first n rows as a header. -Don't split table -Does not divide the table across pages. +Don't split table +Does not divide the table across pages. -Border -Adds a border to the table and the table cells. +Border +Adds a border to the table and the table cells. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp index e966f01b2a..c89e1be831 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp @@ -37,74 +37,64 @@ -Sort - Sorts the selected paragraphs or table rows alphabetically or numerically. You can define up to three sort keys as well as combine alphanumeric and numeric sort keys. +Sort + Sorts the selected paragraphs or table rows alphabetically or numerically. You can define up to three sort keys as well as combine alphanumeric and numeric sort keys.
- Sort criteria + Sort criteria -Keys 1 to 3 - Specifies additional sorting criteria. You can also combine sort keys. +Keys 1 to 3 + Specifies additional sorting criteria. You can also combine sort keys. -Column 1 to 3 - Enter the number of the table column that you want to use as a basis for sorting.removed a para +Column 1 to 3 + Enter the number of the table column that you want to use as a basis for sorting.removed a para -Key type 1 to 3 - Select the sorting option that you want to use. - Order - Ascending +Key type 1 to 3 + Select the sorting option that you want to use. + Order + Ascending -Sorts in ascending order, (for example, 1, 2, 3 or a, b, c). +Sorts in ascending order, (for example, 1, 2, 3 or a, b, c). -Descending - Sorts in descending order (for example, 9, 8, 7 or z, y, x). - Direction +Descending + Sorts in descending order (for example, 9, 8, 7 or z, y, x). + Direction -Columns - Sorts the columns in the table according to the current sort options. +Columns + Sorts the columns in the table according to the current sort options. -Rows - Sorts the rows in the table or the paragraphs in the selection according to the current sort options. - Separator - Paragraphs are separated by nonprinting paragraph marks. You can also specify that tabs or a character act as separators when you sort paragraphs. +Rows + Sorts the rows in the table or the paragraphs in the selection according to the current sort options. + Separator + Paragraphs are separated by nonprinting paragraph marks. You can also specify that tabs or a character act as separators when you sort paragraphs. -Tabs - If the selected paragraphs correspond to a list separated by tabs, select this option. +Tabs + If the selected paragraphs correspond to a list separated by tabs, select this option. -Character - Enter the character that you want to use as a separator in the selected area. By using the separator, $[officename] can determine the position of the sorting key in the selected paragraph. +Character + Enter the character that you want to use as a separator in the selected area. By using the separator, $[officename] can determine the position of the sorting key in the selected paragraph. Select - Opens the Special Characters dialog, where you can select the character that you want to use as a separator. + Opens the Special Characters dialog, where you can select the character that you want to use as a separator. -Language - Select the language that defines the sorting rules. Some languages sort special characters differently than other languages. +Language + Select the language that defines the sorting rules. Some languages sort special characters differently than other languages. -Match case - Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters when you sort a table. For Asian languages special handling applies. - For Asian languages, select Match case to apply multi-level collation. In the multi-level collation, the primitive forms of the entries are first compared with the cases of the forms and diacritics ignored. If the forms are the same, the diacritics of the forms are compared. If the forms are still the same, the cases, character widths, and Japanese Kana differences of the forms are compared.UFI: see #112590# and #112507# +Match case + Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters when you sort a table. For Asian languages special handling applies. + For Asian languages, select Match case to apply multi-level collation. In the multi-level collation, the primitive forms of the entries are first compared with the cases of the forms and diacritics ignored. If the forms are the same, the diacritics of the forms are compared. If the forms are still the same, the cases, character widths, and Japanese Kana differences of the forms are compared.UFI: see #112590# and #112507# diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/06110000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/06110000.xhp index 3440b5127f..b04ddddb12 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/06110000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/06110000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Calculate - Calculates the selected formula and copies the result to the clipboard. +Calculate + Calculates the selected formula and copies the result to the clipboard.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/06120000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/06120000.xhp index d99151518d..0993adaa77 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/06120000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/06120000.xhp @@ -34,12 +34,12 @@
-Page Formatting - Updates the page formats in the document and recalculates the total number of pages that is displayed on the Status Bar. +Page Formatting + Updates the page formats in the document and recalculates the total number of pages that is displayed on the Status Bar.
- In long documents, updating the page formatting can take a while. + In long documents, updating the page formatting can take a while. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/06160000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/06160000.xhp index d44694297a..d6a1047a7e 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/06160000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/06160000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Current Index - Updates the current index. The current index is the one that contains the cursor. +Current Index + Updates the current index. The current index is the one that contains the cursor.
@@ -43,9 +43,9 @@ You can also right-click in an index or table of contents, and then choose Update Index or Table of Contents. The following commands are also available in the context menu: Edit Index or Table of Contents - Edits the current index or table. + Edits the current index or table. Delete Index or Table of Contents - Deletes the current index or table. + Deletes the current index or table. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/06170000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/06170000.xhp index 5053c32c91..b9fd345677 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/06170000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/06170000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-All Indexes and Tables - Update all indexes and tables of contents in the current document. You do not need to place the cursor in an index or table before you use this command. +All Indexes and Tables + Update all indexes and tables of contents in the current document. You do not need to place the cursor in an index or table before you use this command.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/06180000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/06180000.xhp index 65404898c5..c667de12b6 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/06180000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/06180000.xhp @@ -32,53 +32,53 @@ -Line Numbering -Adds or removes and formats line numbers in the current document. To exclude a paragraph from line numbering, click in the paragraph, choose Format - Paragraph, click the Numbering tab, and then clear the Include this paragraph in line numbering check box. +Line Numbering +Adds or removes and formats line numbers in the current document. To exclude a paragraph from line numbering, click in the paragraph, choose Format - Paragraph, click the Numbering tab, and then clear the Include this paragraph in line numbering check box. You can also exclude a paragraph style from line numbering. -Line numbers are not available in HTML format. +Line numbers are not available in HTML format.
-Show numbering -Adds line numbers to the current document. -View -Set the properties of the line numbering. +Show numbering +Adds line numbers to the current document. +View +Set the properties of the line numbering. -Character Style -Select the formatting style that you want to use for the line numbers. +Character Style +Select the formatting style that you want to use for the line numbers. -Format -Select the numbering style that you want to use. +Format +Select the numbering style that you want to use. -Position -Select where you want the line numbers to appear. +Position +Select where you want the line numbers to appear. -Spacing -Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the line numbers and the text. +Spacing +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the line numbers and the text. -Interval -Enter the counting interval for the line numbers. -Separator -You can enter a separator character to display between line numbers if the counting interval is more than one. +Interval +Enter the counting interval for the line numbers. +Separator +You can enter a separator character to display between line numbers if the counting interval is more than one. -Text -Enter the text that you want to use as a separator. +Text +Enter the text that you want to use as a separator. -Every -Enter the number of lines to leave between the separators. -Separators are only displayed in lines that are not numbered. -Count -Specify whether to include empty paragraphs or lines in text frames in the line count. +Every +Enter the number of lines to leave between the separators. +Separators are only displayed in lines that are not numbered. +Count +Specify whether to include empty paragraphs or lines in text frames in the line count. -Blank lines -Includes empty paragraphs in the line count. +Blank lines +Includes empty paragraphs in the line count. -Lines in text frames -Adds line numbers to text in text frames. The numbering restarts in each text frame, and is excluded from the line count in the main text area of the document. In linked frames, the numbering is not restarted. +Lines in text frames +Adds line numbers to text in text frames. The numbering restarts in each text frame, and is excluded from the line count in the main text area of the document. In linked frames, the numbering is not restarted. -Restart every new page -Restarts line numbering at the top of each page in the document. +Restart every new page +Restarts line numbering at the top of each page in the document. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/06190000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/06190000.xhp index e135002634..a2d8dd5cd9 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/06190000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/06190000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Update All - Updates all links, fields, indexes, tables of contents, and page formatting in the current document. +Update All + Updates all links, fields, indexes, tables of contents, and page formatting in the current document.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/06200000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/06200000.xhp index 924c1c84dd..e4f10fd7de 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/06200000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/06200000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Fields - Updates the contents of all fields in the current document. +Fields + Updates the contents of all fields in the current document.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/06210000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/06210000.xhp index 0a7307e063..e5f4746e63 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/06210000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/06210000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Links - Updates the links in the current document. +Links + Updates the links in the current document.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/06220000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/06220000.xhp index 0cdfa032c9..4fdc95058b 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/06220000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/06220000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-All Charts - Updates the charts in the current document. +All Charts + Updates the charts in the current document.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/06990000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/06990000.xhp index a32eca087b..dfe27272b0 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/06990000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/06990000.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- updating; text documentsUpdate - Updates items in the current document that have dynamic contents, so as fields and indexes. + updating; text documentsUpdate + Updates items in the current document that have dynamic contents, so as fields and indexes.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/format_object.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/format_object.xhp index 6545962c2f..bb81ee91e0 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/format_object.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/format_object.xhp @@ -32,15 +32,15 @@
-Object -Opens a submenu to edit the properties of the selected object. +Object +Opens a submenu to edit the properties of the selected object.
-Text Attributes -Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object. -Fontwork -Edits Fontwork effects of the selected object that has been created with the previous Fontwork dialog. +Text Attributes +Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object. +Fontwork +Edits Fontwork effects of the selected object that has been created with the previous Fontwork dialog. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp index 64e90bfe51..daa3b34deb 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@
-Mail Merge Wizard -Starts the Mail Merge Wizard to create form letters or send e-mail messages to many recipients. +Mail Merge Wizard +Starts the Mail Merge Wizard to create form letters or send e-mail messages to many recipients.
@@ -48,11 +48,11 @@ -First step: Mail Merge Wizard - Select starting document. +First step: Mail Merge Wizard - Select starting document.
- Configurable Mail Merge dialog + Configurable Mail Merge dialog
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge01.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge01.xhp index 27dc765f24..5057a8fda1 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge01.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge01.xhp @@ -32,33 +32,33 @@
-Mail Merge Wizard - Select starting document -Specify the document that you want to use as a base for the mail merge document. +Mail Merge Wizard - Select starting document +Specify the document that you want to use as a base for the mail merge document.
-Use the current document -Uses the current Writer document as the base for the mail merge document. +Use the current document +Uses the current Writer document as the base for the mail merge document. -Create a new document -Creates a new Writer document to use for the mail merge. +Create a new document +Creates a new Writer document to use for the mail merge. -Start from existing document -Select an existing Writer document to use as the base for the mail merge document. +Start from existing document +Select an existing Writer document to use as the base for the mail merge document. -Browse -Locate the Writer document that you want to use, and then click Open. +Browse +Locate the Writer document that you want to use, and then click Open. -Start from a template -Select the template that you want to create your mail merge document with. +Start from a template +Select the template that you want to create your mail merge document with. -Browse -Opens a template selector dialog. +Browse +Opens a template selector dialog. -Start from a recently saved starting document -Use an existing mail merge document as the base for a new mail merge document. +Start from a recently saved starting document +Use an existing mail merge document as the base for a new mail merge document. -Select the document. -Next step: Mail Merge Wizard - Select document type +Select the document. +Next step: Mail Merge Wizard - Select document type
Mail Merge Wizard overview
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge02.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge02.xhp index bbe2fac26c..26208d9c9f 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge02.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge02.xhp @@ -31,14 +31,14 @@
-Mail Merge Wizard - Select document type -Specify the type of mail merge document to create. +Mail Merge Wizard - Select document type +Specify the type of mail merge document to create.
-Letter -Creates a printable mail merge document. -E-mail message -Creates mail merge documents that you can send as an e-mail message or an e-mail attachment. -Next step: Mail Merge Wizard - Addresses +Letter +Creates a printable mail merge document. +E-mail message +Creates mail merge documents that you can send as an e-mail message or an e-mail attachment. +Next step: Mail Merge Wizard - Addresses
Mail Merge Wizard overview
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp index 2f408bf281..807d7e5a49 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp @@ -32,36 +32,36 @@
-Mail Merge Wizard - Addresses -Specify the recipients for the mail merge document as well as the layout of the address block. +Mail Merge Wizard - Addresses +Specify the recipients for the mail merge document as well as the layout of the address block.
-The Mail Merge wizard opens to this page if you start the wizard in a text document that already contains address database fields. If the wizard opens directly to this page, the Select Address List button is called Select Different Address List. -The title of this page is Insert address block for letters and Select address list for e-mail messages. +The Mail Merge wizard opens to this page if you start the wizard in a text document that already contains address database fields. If the wizard opens directly to this page, the Select Address List button is called Select Different Address List. +The title of this page is Insert address block for letters and Select address list for e-mail messages. -Select Address List -Opens the Select Address List dialog, where you can choose a data source for the addresses, add new addresses, or type in a new address list. -When you edit some records in a Calc spreadsheet data source that is currently in use for a mail merge, those changes are not visible in the mail merge.ufi: see i9899 +Select Address List +Opens the Select Address List dialog, where you can choose a data source for the addresses, add new addresses, or type in a new address list. +When you edit some records in a Calc spreadsheet data source that is currently in use for a mail merge, those changes are not visible in the mail merge.ufi: see i9899 -This document shall contain an address block -Adds an address block to the mail merge document. +This document shall contain an address block +Adds an address block to the mail merge document. -Select the address block layout that you want to use. +Select the address block layout that you want to use. -Suppress lines with just empty fields -Enable to leave empty lines out of the address. +Suppress lines with just empty fields +Enable to leave empty lines out of the address. -More -Opens the Select Address Block dialog. +More +Opens the Select Address Block dialog. -Match fields -Opens the Match Fields dialog. +Match fields +Opens the Match Fields dialog. Shows a preview of the address block template filled with data. -(Browse buttons) -Use the browse buttons to preview the information from the previous or next data record. -Next step: Mail Merge Wizard - Create salutation +(Browse buttons) +Use the browse buttons to preview the information from the previous or next data record. +Next step: Mail Merge Wizard - Create salutation Alternatively you can press the Finish button and use the Mail Merge Toolbar to finish the mail merge process.
Mail Merge Wizard overview diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp index 0803df5a55..da2124c30f 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp @@ -32,47 +32,47 @@
-Mail Merge Wizard - Create salutation -Specify the properties for the salutation. If the mail merge database contains gender information, you can specify different salutations based on the gender of the recipient. +Mail Merge Wizard - Create salutation +Specify the properties for the salutation. If the mail merge database contains gender information, you can specify different salutations based on the gender of the recipient.
-This document should contain a salutation -Adds a salutation. +This document should contain a salutation +Adds a salutation. -Insert personalized salutation -Adds a personalized salutation to the mail merge document. To use the default salutation, clear this check box. +Insert personalized salutation +Adds a personalized salutation to the mail merge document. To use the default salutation, clear this check box. -Female -Select the personalized greeting for a female recipient. +Female +Select the personalized greeting for a female recipient. -New -Opens the Custom Salutation (Female recipient) dialog. +New +Opens the Custom Salutation (Female recipient) dialog. -Male -Select the personalized greeting for a male recipient. +Male +Select the personalized greeting for a male recipient. -New -Opens the Custom Salutation (Male recipient) dialog. +New +Opens the Custom Salutation (Male recipient) dialog. -Field name -Select the field name of the address database field that contains the gender information. +Field name +Select the field name of the address database field that contains the gender information. -Field value -Select the field value that indicates the gender of the recipient. +Field value +Select the field value that indicates the gender of the recipient. -General salutation -Select the default salutation that is used when you do not specify a personalized salutation. +General salutation +Select the default salutation that is used when you do not specify a personalized salutation. -Preview -Displays a preview of the salutation. +Preview +Displays a preview of the salutation. -Match fields -Opens the Match Fields dialog. +Match fields +Opens the Match Fields dialog. -(Browse buttons) -Use the browse buttons to preview the information from the previous or next data record. -Next step: Mail Merge Wizard - Adjust layout +(Browse buttons) +Use the browse buttons to preview the information from the previous or next data record. +Next step: Mail Merge Wizard - Adjust layout Alternatively you can press the Finish button and use the Mail Merge Toolbar to finish the mail merge process.
Mail Merge Wizard overview diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp index 6ea99d0dde..489ed17dca 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp @@ -32,35 +32,35 @@
-Mail Merge Wizard - Adjust layout -Specify the position of the address blocks and salutations on the documents. +Mail Merge Wizard - Adjust layout +Specify the position of the address blocks and salutations on the documents.
Address Block Position -From top -Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the page and the top edge of the address block. +From top +Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the page and the top edge of the address block. -Align to text body -Aligns the frame that contains the address block to the left page margin. +Align to text body +Aligns the frame that contains the address block to the left page margin. -From left -Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the address block. +From left +Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the address block. Salutation Position -Up -Moves the salutation up. +Up +Moves the salutation up. -Down -Moves the salutation down. +Down +Moves the salutation down. -Preview area -Provides a preview of the salutation positioning on the page. +Preview area +Provides a preview of the salutation positioning on the page. -Zoom -Select a magnification for the print preview. -Use the commands in the context menu of the preview to move the view up and down. +Zoom +Select a magnification for the print preview. +Use the commands in the context menu of the preview to move the view up and down. Press the Finish button and use the Mail Merge Toolbar to finish the mail merge process. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/mm_copyto.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/mm_copyto.xhp index 752ab8812e..b9d2e2ac66 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/mm_copyto.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/mm_copyto.xhp @@ -31,13 +31,13 @@ -Copy To -Specify additional e-mail recipients for the mail merge document. +Copy To +Specify additional e-mail recipients for the mail merge document. -CC -Enter the recipients of e-mail copies, separated by a semicolon (;). +CC +Enter the recipients of e-mail copies, separated by a semicolon (;). -BCC -Enter the recipients of e-mail blind copies, separated by a semicolon (;). +BCC +Enter the recipients of e-mail blind copies, separated by a semicolon (;). diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusaddlis.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusaddlis.xhp index fb89f88822..606c3b18e6 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusaddlis.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusaddlis.xhp @@ -31,24 +31,24 @@ -Customize Address List -Customizes the address list for mail merge documents. +Customize Address List +Customizes the address list for mail merge documents. -Address list elements -Select the fields that you want to move, delete, or rename. +Address list elements +Select the fields that you want to move, delete, or rename. -Add -Inserts a new text field. +Add +Inserts a new text field. -Delete -Deletes the selected field. +Delete +Deletes the selected field. -Rename -Renames the selected text field. +Rename +Renames the selected text field. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp index bea53bcc06..402f2bd2ab 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp @@ -31,30 +31,30 @@ -Custom Salutation -Specify the salutation layout for mail merge or e-mail merge documents. The name of this dialog is different for female recipients and male recipients. +Custom Salutation +Specify the salutation layout for mail merge or e-mail merge documents. The name of this dialog is different for female recipients and male recipients. -Salutation elements -Select a field and drag the field to the other list. +Salutation elements +Select a field and drag the field to the other list. -> -Adds the selected field from the list of salutation elements to the other list. You can add a field more than once. +> +Adds the selected field from the list of salutation elements to the other list. You can add a field more than once. -< -Removes the selected field from the other list. +< +Removes the selected field from the other list. -Drag salutation elements into the box below -Arrange the fields by drag-and-drop or use the arrow buttons. +Drag salutation elements into the box below +Arrange the fields by drag-and-drop or use the arrow buttons. -Customize salutation -Select a value from the list for the salutation and the punctuation mark fields. -Preview -Displays a preview of the first database record with the current salutation layout. +Customize salutation +Select a value from the list for the salutation and the punctuation mark fields. +Preview +Displays a preview of the first database record with the current salutation layout. -(Arrow Buttons) -Select an item in the list and click an arrow button to move the item. +(Arrow Buttons) +Select an item in the list and click an arrow button to move the item. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp index 33562ab335..02c7dd5177 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp @@ -31,37 +31,37 @@ -E-Mail Message -Type the message and the salutation for files that you send as e-mail attachments. +E-Mail Message +Type the message and the salutation for files that you send as e-mail attachments. -This e-mail should contain a salutation -Adds a salutation to the e-mail. +This e-mail should contain a salutation +Adds a salutation to the e-mail. -Insert personalized salutation -Adds a personalized salutation. To use the default salutation, clear this check box. +Insert personalized salutation +Adds a personalized salutation. To use the default salutation, clear this check box. -Female -Select the personalized greeting for a female recipient. +Female +Select the personalized greeting for a female recipient. -New -Opens the Custom Salutation dialog for a female recipient. +New +Opens the Custom Salutation dialog for a female recipient. -Male -Select the personalized greeting for a male recipient. +Male +Select the personalized greeting for a male recipient. -New -Opens the Custom Salutation dialog for a male recipient. +New +Opens the Custom Salutation dialog for a male recipient. -Field name -Select the field name of the address database field that contains the gender information. +Field name +Select the field name of the address database field that contains the gender information. -Field value -Select the field value that indicates the gender of the recipient. +Field value +Select the field value that indicates the gender of the recipient. -General salutation -Select the default greeting to use if a personalized salutation cannot be created. +General salutation +Select the default greeting to use if a personalized salutation cannot be created. -Write your message here -Enter the main text of the e-mail. +Write your message here +Enter the main text of the e-mail. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/mm_finent.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/mm_finent.xhp index 7e15ce775d..13258a8e89 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/mm_finent.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/mm_finent.xhp @@ -31,22 +31,22 @@ -Find Entry -Searches for a record or recipient in the mail merge address list. +Find Entry +Searches for a record or recipient in the mail merge address list. -Find -Enter the search term. +Find +Enter the search term. -Find only in -Restricts the search to one data field. +Find only in +Restricts the search to one data field. -Select the data field where you want to search for the text. +Select the data field where you want to search for the text. -Find -Displays the next record that contains the search text. +Find +Displays the next record that contains the search text. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/mm_matfie.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/mm_matfie.xhp index fdb50a0840..0c30ea1d36 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/mm_matfie.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/mm_matfie.xhp @@ -31,15 +31,15 @@ -Match Fields -Matches the logical field names of the layout dialog to the field names in your database when you create new address blocks or salutations. +Match Fields +Matches the logical field names of the layout dialog to the field names in your database when you create new address blocks or salutations. -Matches to field: -Select a field name in your database for each logical address element. +Matches to field: +Select a field name in your database for each logical address element. -Address block preview -Displays a preview of the values of the first data record. +Address block preview +Displays a preview of the values of the first data record. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddblo.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddblo.xhp index 1288ecf1ce..bff07f6c88 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddblo.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddblo.xhp @@ -30,19 +30,19 @@ -New Address Block -Specify the placement of address data fields in an address block in mail merge documents. -Address Elements -Select an address field and drag the field to the other list. -> -Adds the selected field from the Address Elements list to the other list. You can add the same field more than once. -< -Removes the selected field from the other list. -Drag address element to the field below -Arrange the fields with drag-and-drop or use the arrow buttons. -Preview -Displays a preview of the first database record with the current address block layout. -(Arrow Buttons) -Select an item in the list and click an arrow button to move the entry. +New Address Block +Specify the placement of address data fields in an address block in mail merge documents. +Address Elements +Select an address field and drag the field to the other list. +> +Adds the selected field from the Address Elements list to the other list. You can add the same field more than once. +< +Removes the selected field from the other list. +Drag address element to the field below +Arrange the fields with drag-and-drop or use the arrow buttons. +Preview +Displays a preview of the first database record with the current address block layout. +(Arrow Buttons) +Select an item in the list and click an arrow button to move the entry. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddlis.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddlis.xhp index 7b058c2205..75452b7ce4 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddlis.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddlis.xhp @@ -31,35 +31,35 @@ -New Address List -Enter new addresses or edit the addresses for mail merge documents. When you click OK, a dialog prompts you for the location to save the address list. +New Address List +Enter new addresses or edit the addresses for mail merge documents. When you click OK, a dialog prompts you for the location to save the address list. -Address Information -Enter or edit the field contents for each mail merge recipient. +Address Information +Enter or edit the field contents for each mail merge recipient. -Show Entry Number -Click the buttons to navigate through the records or enter a record number to display a record. +Show Entry Number +Click the buttons to navigate through the records or enter a record number to display a record. -New -Adds a new blank record to the address list. +New +Adds a new blank record to the address list. -Delete -Deletes the selected record. +Delete +Deletes the selected record. -Find -Opens the Find Entry dialog. You can leave the dialog open while you edit the entries. +Find +Opens the Find Entry dialog. You can leave the dialog open while you edit the entries. -Customize -Opens the Customize Address List dialog where you can rearrange, rename, add, and delete fields. +Customize +Opens the Customize Address List dialog where you can rearrange, rename, add, and delete fields. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdblo.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdblo.xhp index 12b2818d70..e99f771d7e 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdblo.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdblo.xhp @@ -31,38 +31,38 @@ -Select Address Block -Select, edit, or delete an address block layout for mail merge. +Select Address Block +Select, edit, or delete an address block layout for mail merge. -Select your preferred address block -Select the block in the list that you want to use for mail merge addresses, and click OK. +Select your preferred address block +Select the block in the list that you want to use for mail merge addresses, and click OK. -Never include country/region -Excludes country or regional information from the address block. +Never include country/region +Excludes country or regional information from the address block. -Always include country/region -Includes country or regional information in the address block. +Always include country/region +Includes country or regional information in the address block. -Only include country/region if it is not: -Only includes country or regional information in the address block if the value differs from the value that you enter in the text box. +Only include country/region if it is not: +Only includes country or regional information in the address block if the value differs from the value that you enter in the text box. -Enter the country/region string that shall not be printed. +Enter the country/region string that shall not be printed. -New -Opens the New Address Block dialog where you can define a new address block layout. +New +Opens the New Address Block dialog where you can define a new address block layout. -Edit -Opens the Edit Address Block dialog where you can edit the selected address block layout. +Edit +Opens the Edit Address Block dialog where you can edit the selected address block layout. -Delete -Deletes the selected address block layout. +Delete +Deletes the selected address block layout. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdlis.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdlis.xhp index 7bf4747cfb..a2fb36781b 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdlis.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdlis.xhp @@ -31,22 +31,22 @@ -Select Address List -Select the address list that you want to use for mail merge, then click OK. +Select Address List +Select the address list that you want to use for mail merge, then click OK. -Add -Select the database file that contains the addresses that you want to use as an address list. If the file contains more than one table, the Select Table dialog opens. +Add +Select the database file that contains the addresses that you want to use as an address list. If the file contains more than one table, the Select Table dialog opens. -Create -Opens the New Address List dialog, where you can create a new address list. +Create +Opens the New Address List dialog, where you can create a new address list. -Filter -Opens the Standard Filter dialog , where you can apply filters to the address list to display the recipients that you want to see. +Filter +Opens the Standard Filter dialog , where you can apply filters to the address list to display the recipients that you want to see. -Edit -Opens the New Address List dialog, where you can edit the selected address list. +Edit +Opens the New Address List dialog, where you can edit the selected address list. -Change Table -Opens the Select Table dialog, where you can select another table to use for mail merge. +Change Table +Opens the Select Table dialog, where you can select another table to use for mail merge. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seltab.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seltab.xhp index 6c0016bacd..46f90d9975 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seltab.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seltab.xhp @@ -30,9 +30,9 @@ -Select Table -Select the table that you want to use for mail merge addresses. -Preview -Opens the Mail Merge Recipients dialog. +Select Table +Select the table that you want to use for mail merge addresses. +Preview +Opens the Mail Merge Recipients dialog. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/selection_mode.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/selection_mode.xhp index ca0172c200..03ae6221c1 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/selection_mode.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/selection_mode.xhp @@ -30,13 +30,13 @@
-Selection Mode -Choose the selection mode from the submenu: normal selection mode, or block selection mode. +Selection Mode +Choose the selection mode from the submenu: normal selection mode, or block selection mode.
-In normal selection mode, you can select multi-line text including the line ends. -In block selection mode, you can select a rectangular block of text. +In normal selection mode, you can select multi-line text including the line ends. +In block selection mode, you can select a rectangular block of text. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/02110000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/02110000.xhp index 4e963f9f9c..2fb6d0ba1b 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/02110000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/02110000.xhp @@ -33,26 +33,26 @@
-Numbering On/Off -Adds or removes numbering from the selected paragraphs. To define the numbering format, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering. To display the Bullets and Numbering Bar, choose View - Toolbars - Bullets and Numbering.UFI changed last sentence, see #60925 +Numbering On/Off +Adds or removes numbering from the selected paragraphs. To define the numbering format, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering. To display the Bullets and Numbering Bar, choose View - Toolbars - Bullets and Numbering.UFI changed last sentence, see #60925
-Some of the bullets and numbering options are not available when working in the Web Layout.UFI: online layout is now web layout +Some of the bullets and numbering options are not available when working in the Web Layout.UFI: online layout is now web layout
- + Icon -Numbering On/Off +Numbering On/Off
-Bullets and Numbering +Bullets and Numbering diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/03210000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/03210000.xhp index a307ffcccd..ad3e152a0a 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/03210000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/03210000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Link - Links the selected frame to the next frame. The text automatically flows from one frame to another. +Link + Links the selected frame to the next frame. The text automatically flows from one frame to another.
@@ -44,11 +44,11 @@ - Icon + Icon - Link Frames + Link Frames diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/03220000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/03220000.xhp index e111d90810..b610383373 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/03220000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/03220000.xhp @@ -38,19 +38,19 @@ -Unlink Frames -Breaks the link between two frames. You can only break the link that extends from the selected frame to the target frame. +Unlink Frames +Breaks the link between two frames. You can only break the link that extends from the selected frame to the target frame.
- + Icon -Unlink Frames +Unlink Frames
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/04090000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/04090000.xhp index a67a680ebf..83372dad02 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/04090000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/04090000.xhp @@ -38,19 +38,19 @@ -Insert Rows -Inserts one or more rows in the table, below the selection. You can insert more than one row by opening the dialog (choose Table - Insert - Rows), or by selecting more than one row before clicking the icon. The second method inserts rows of the same height as the originally selected rows. +Insert Rows +Inserts one or more rows in the table, below the selection. You can insert more than one row by opening the dialog (choose Table - Insert - Rows), or by selecting more than one row before clicking the icon. The second method inserts rows of the same height as the originally selected rows.
- + Icon -Insert Row +Insert Row
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/04100000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/04100000.xhp index eea6a5f51d..0048080e89 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/04100000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/04100000.xhp @@ -38,19 +38,19 @@ -Insert Column -Inserts one or more columns into the table, after the selection. You can insert several columns at the same time by opening the dialog (choose Table - Insert - Columns), or by selecting several columns before clicking the icon. If the latter method is used, the columns inserted will have the same relative width as the selected columns. +Insert Column +Inserts one or more columns into the table, after the selection. You can insert several columns at the same time by opening the dialog (choose Table - Insert - Columns), or by selecting several columns before clicking the icon. If the latter method is used, the columns inserted will have the same relative width as the selected columns.
- + Icon -Insert Column +Insert Column
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/04220000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/04220000.xhp index 7abe9b83b9..e1b1d46b70 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/04220000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/04220000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Table: Fixed - If this mode is active, changes to a line and/or column affect only the neighboring lines or columns in question. +Table: Fixed + If this mode is active, changes to a line and/or column affect only the neighboring lines or columns in question.
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Table: Fixed + Table: Fixed diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/04230000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/04230000.xhp index fd044b6666..60dc67b293 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/04230000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/04230000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Table: Fixed, Proportional - If this mode is active, changes to the line and/or column affect the entire table. +Table: Fixed, Proportional + If this mode is active, changes to the line and/or column affect the entire table.
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Table: Fixed, Proportional + Table: Fixed, Proportional diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/04240000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/04240000.xhp index 71faef4fc5..1f74c66bc5 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/04240000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/04240000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Table: Variable - If this mode is active, changes to a line and/or column affect the size of the table. +Table: Variable + If this mode is active, changes to a line and/or column affect the size of the table.
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Table: Variable + Table: Variable diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/04250000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/04250000.xhp index 935fe9b16a..670834de76 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/04250000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/04250000.xhp @@ -33,22 +33,22 @@
-Sum -Activates the sum function. Note that the cursor must be in the cell where you want the sum to appear. +Sum +Activates the sum function. Note that the cursor must be in the cell where you want the sum to appear.
- + %PRODUCTNAME recognizes the cell range for the sum function as long as the cells are filled with numbers. Prior to entering the data, you must enable the Number Recognition in the context menu of the table. -Click Apply to accept the sum formula as it appears in the entry line. +Click Apply to accept the sum formula as it appears in the entry line.
- + Icon -Sum +Sum
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/06040000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/06040000.xhp index f19a1d03f0..7bcd794820 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/06040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/06040000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Numbering Off - Turns off numbering or bullets in the current paragraph or selected paragraphs. +Numbering Off + Turns off numbering or bullets in the current paragraph or selected paragraphs.
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Numbering Off + Numbering Off diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/06070000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/06070000.xhp index ef52348691..0266519b00 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/06070000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/06070000.xhp @@ -33,19 +33,19 @@
i66535, was Shift down with Subpoints -Demote One Level With Subpoints -Shifts paragraphs with subpoints down one level. This is only visible when the cursor is positioned within numbered or bulleted text. +Demote One Level With Subpoints +Shifts paragraphs with subpoints down one level. This is only visible when the cursor is positioned within numbered or bulleted text.
- + Icon -Demote One Level With Subpoints +Demote One Level With Subpoints
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/06080000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/06080000.xhp index 8ad0a506a1..e78fee56fb 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/06080000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/06080000.xhp @@ -33,19 +33,19 @@
i66535, was Shift up with Subpoints -Promote One Level With Subpoints -Shifts paragraphs with subpoints up one numbering level. This is only visible when the cursor is positioned within numbered or bulleted text. +Promote One Level With Subpoints +Shifts paragraphs with subpoints up one numbering level. This is only visible when the cursor is positioned within numbered or bulleted text.
- + Icon -Promote One Level With Subpoints +Promote One Level With Subpoints
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/06090000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/06090000.xhp index ed17e99794..0eda541eca 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/06090000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/06090000.xhp @@ -33,19 +33,19 @@
-Insert Unnumbered Entry -Inserts a paragraph without numbering. The existing numbering will not be affected. +Insert Unnumbered Entry +Inserts a paragraph without numbering. The existing numbering will not be affected.
- + Icon -Insert Unnumbered Entry +Insert Unnumbered Entry
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/06120000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/06120000.xhp index 182bc26df3..8de827d2b7 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/06120000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/06120000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Move Up with Subpoints - Moves a paragraph with subpoints to above the previous paragraph. This is only visible when the cursor is positioned within numbered or bulleted text. +Move Up with Subpoints + Moves a paragraph with subpoints to above the previous paragraph. This is only visible when the cursor is positioned within numbered or bulleted text.
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Move Up with Subpoints + Move Up with Subpoints diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/06130000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/06130000.xhp index 5d298019ad..4444f196e4 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/06130000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/06130000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Move Down with Subpoints - Moves a paragraph with all its subpoints below the following paragraph. This is only visible when the cursor is positioned within numbered or bulleted text. +Move Down with Subpoints + Moves a paragraph with all its subpoints below the following paragraph. This is only visible when the cursor is positioned within numbered or bulleted text.
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Move Down with Subpoints + Move Down with Subpoints diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/06140000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/06140000.xhp index 72520cc314..81310d1a20 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/06140000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/06140000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Restart Numbering - Restarts the text numbering. This is only visible when the cursor is positioned within numbered or bulleted text. +Restart Numbering + Restarts the text numbering. This is only visible when the cursor is positioned within numbered or bulleted text.
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Restart Numbering + Restart Numbering diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/08010000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/08010000.xhp index d46a8bcfc7..b880b6f014 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/08010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/08010000.xhp @@ -33,13 +33,13 @@
-Page Number -The current page number is displayed in this field of the status bar. A double-click opens the Navigator, with which you can navigate in the document. A right-click shows all bookmarks in the document. Click a bookmark to position the text cursor at the bookmark location. +Page Number +The current page number is displayed in this field of the status bar. A double-click opens the Navigator, with which you can navigate in the document. A right-click shows all bookmarks in the document. Click a bookmark to position the text cursor at the bookmark location.
-The displayed page (x) and the total number of pages (y) are shown in the form Page x/y When you scroll through a document with the mouse, the page number is displayed when you release the mouse button. When you scroll using the right scrollbar, the page numbers are displayed as a Help tip. The page numbering format of the status bar and scrollbar is identical. -You can turn the Navigator display on or off by double-clicking the Page Number field. -To go to a specific page, enter the page number in the Page spin button in the Navigator and then press Enter. -By pressing the shortcut keys Shift+Command +The displayed page (x) and the total number of pages (y) are shown in the form Page x/y When you scroll through a document with the mouse, the page number is displayed when you release the mouse button. When you scroll using the right scrollbar, the page numbers are displayed as a Help tip. The page numbering format of the status bar and scrollbar is identical. +You can turn the Navigator display on or off by double-clicking the Page Number field. +To go to a specific page, enter the page number in the Page spin button in the Navigator and then press Enter. +By pressing the shortcut keys Shift+Command Ctrl+F5, you switch to entering a page number. When you press Enter, the cursor moves to the selected page. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/08080000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/08080000.xhp index 3e01bc093b..1401037584 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/08080000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/08080000.xhp @@ -34,10 +34,10 @@
-Combined Display - Displays current information about the active document. +Combined Display + Displays current information about the active document.
- When the cursor is in a named section, the section name appears. When the cursor is in a table, the name of the table cell appears. The size of the object is shown when you edit frames or drawing objects. - When the cursor is positioned within text, you can double-click this field to open the Fields dialog. In this dialog, you can define a field to be inserted in your document at the current cursor position. When the cursor is positioned in a table, a double-click in this field will call the Table Format dialog. Depending on the object selected, you can call up a dialog to edit a section, a graphic object, a floating frame, an OLE object, direct numbering or the position and size of a drawing object. + When the cursor is in a named section, the section name appears. When the cursor is in a table, the name of the table cell appears. The size of the object is shown when you edit frames or drawing objects. + When the cursor is positioned within text, you can double-click this field to open the Fields dialog. In this dialog, you can define a field to be inserted in your document at the current cursor position. When the cursor is positioned in a table, a double-click in this field will call the Table Format dialog. Depending on the object selected, you can call up a dialog to edit a section, a graphic object, a floating frame, an OLE object, direct numbering or the position and size of a drawing object. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/10010000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/10010000.xhp index b5e3e28b1e..36f767e8ef 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/10010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/10010000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Zoom In - Zooms in to get a close-up view of the document. +Zoom In + Zooms in to get a close-up view of the document.
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Zoom In + Zoom In diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/10020000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/10020000.xhp index f96853e40e..ec7550915d 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/10020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/10020000.xhp @@ -33,19 +33,19 @@
-Zoom Out -Zooms out to see more of the document at a reduced size. +Zoom Out +Zooms out to see more of the document at a reduced size.
- + Icon -Zoom Out +Zoom Out
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/10030000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/10030000.xhp index 0210608a5c..8714571a66 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/10030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/10030000.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@
-Preview Zoom -Determines the zoom level of the print preview. +Preview Zoom +Determines the zoom level of the print preview.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/10050000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/10050000.xhp index 3f0af92ce9..33b299bf3d 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/10050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/10050000.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Two Pages Preview - Displays two pages in the Print Preview window. Uneven numbers will always appear on the right side, even numbers on the left. +Two Pages Preview + Displays two pages in the Print Preview window. Uneven numbers will always appear on the right side, even numbers on the left.
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Two Pages Preview + Two Pages Preview diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/10070000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/10070000.xhp index e1b66d8577..7f46ef716d 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/10070000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/10070000.xhp @@ -33,27 +33,27 @@ -Defines the number of pages displayed on screen. Click the arrow next to the icon to open a grid to select the number of pages to be displayed as rows and columns in the preview. +Defines the number of pages displayed on screen. Click the arrow next to the icon to open a grid to select the number of pages to be displayed as rows and columns in the preview.
- + Icon -Multiple Pages Preview +Multiple Pages Preview
-After clicking the Multiple Pages Preview icon, the Multiple pages dialog opens. Use the two spin buttons to set the number of pages to be displayed. -Rows -Defines the number of rows of pages. -Columns -Defines the number of pages shown in columns. -The settings you choose in the dialog can also be set using the mouse: Click the arrow next to the Multiple Pages Preview icon. Now move the mouse over the desired number of rows and columns. +After clicking the Multiple Pages Preview icon, the Multiple pages dialog opens. Use the two spin buttons to set the number of pages to be displayed. +Rows +Defines the number of rows of pages. +Columns +Defines the number of pages shown in columns. +The settings you choose in the dialog can also be set using the mouse: Click the arrow next to the Multiple Pages Preview icon. Now move the mouse over the desired number of rows and columns. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/10080000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/10080000.xhp index 9d9ce80dd3..3fbfd3b88b 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/10080000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/10080000.xhp @@ -38,19 +38,19 @@
-Book preview -Select to display the first page on the right side in the print preview. If not selected, the first page is displayed on the left side of the preview. +Book preview +Select to display the first page on the right side in the print preview. If not selected, the first page is displayed on the left side of the preview.
- + book preview icon -Book Preview +Book Preview
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/10090000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/10090000.xhp index adb6cf0334..cb3b485d70 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/10090000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/10090000.xhp @@ -30,22 +30,22 @@
-Print page viewremove this pageid="par_id3151170" l10n="CHG" oldref="2"<AVIS hid=".uno:PrintPagePreview">Opens the Print dialog to print the page preview. Use the Print options page view icon to set the printing scale and other printing properties.</AVIS> +Print page viewremove this pageid="par_id3151170" <AVIS hid=".uno:PrintPagePreview">Opens the Print dialog to print the page preview. Use the Print options page view icon to set the printing scale and other printing properties.</AVIS>
- + Icon - Print page view + Print page view
- \ No newline at end of file + diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/14010000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/14010000.xhp index 6fa9817279..bc4bbb4070 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/14010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/14010000.xhp @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
-Cell Reference -Displays the position of the cell cursor in a table. +Cell Reference +Displays the position of the cell cursor in a table.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp index 21cdfb3e7b..505e218287 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp @@ -37,496 +37,496 @@ variables;document properties arithmetical operators in formulas -Formula -Opens a submenu, from which you can insert a formula into the cell of a table. Place the cursor in a cell in the table or at the position in the document where you want the result to appear. Click the Formula icon and choose the desired formula from the submenu. +Formula +Opens a submenu, from which you can insert a formula into the cell of a table. Place the cursor in a cell in the table or at the position in the document where you want the result to appear. Click the Formula icon and choose the desired formula from the submenu.
-The formula appears in the input line. To specify a range of cells in a table, select the desired cells with the mouse. The corresponding cell references also appear in the input line. Enter additional parameters, as necessary, and click Apply to confirm your entry. You can also enter the formula directly if you know the appropriate syntax. This is necessary, for example, in the Insert Fields and Edit Fields dialogs. +The formula appears in the input line. To specify a range of cells in a table, select the desired cells with the mouse. The corresponding cell references also appear in the input line. Enter additional parameters, as necessary, and click Apply to confirm your entry. You can also enter the formula directly if you know the appropriate syntax. This is necessary, for example, in the Insert Fields and Edit Fields dialogs.
- + Icon -Formula +Formula
-Summary of Formula Options -Basic Calculation Functions +Summary of Formula Options +Basic Calculation Functions -Addition +Addition -+ ++ -Calculates the total. -Example: <A1> + 8 +Calculates the total. +Example: <A1> + 8 -Subtraction +Subtraction -- +- -Calculates the difference -Example: 10 - <B5> +Calculates the difference +Example: 10 - <B5> -Multiplication +Multiplication -MUL or * +MUL or * -Calculates the product. -Example: 7 MUL 9 +Calculates the product. +Example: 7 MUL 9 -Division +Division -DIV or / +DIV or / -Calculates the quotient -Example: 100 DIV 15 +Calculates the quotient +Example: 100 DIV 15
-Basic Functions in the Submenu +Basic Functions in the Submenu -Sum +Sum -SUM +SUM -Calculates the sum of the selected cells. -Example: SUM <A2:C2> displays the sum of the values in cells A2 to C2 +Calculates the sum of the selected cells. +Example: SUM <A2:C2> displays the sum of the values in cells A2 to C2 -Round +Round -ROUND +ROUND -Rounds a number to the specified decimal places. -Example: 15.678 ROUND 2 displays 15.68 +Rounds a number to the specified decimal places. +Example: 15.678 ROUND 2 displays 15.68 -Percent +Percent -PHD +PHD -Calculates a percentage -Example: 10 + 15 PHD displays 10.15 +Calculates a percentage +Example: 10 + 15 PHD displays 10.15 -Square Root +Square Root -SQRT +SQRT -Calculates the square root. -Example: SQRT 25 displays 5.00 +Calculates the square root. +Example: SQRT 25 displays 5.00 -Power +Power -POW +POW -Calculates the power of a number. -Example: 2 POW 8 displays 256.00 +Calculates the power of a number. +Example: 2 POW 8 displays 256.00
-Operators -You can insert various operators in your formula. Choose from the following functions: +Operators +You can insert various operators in your formula. Choose from the following functions: -List Separator +List Separator -| +| -Separates the elements in a list. -Example of using a list: -MIN 10|20|50|<C6>|<A2:B6>|20 +Separates the elements in a list. +Example of using a list: +MIN 10|20|50|<C6>|<A2:B6>|20 -Equal +Equal -EQ or == +EQ or == -Checks if selected values are equal. If they are unequal, the result is zero, otherwise 1 (true) appears. -Example: <A1> EQ 2 displays 1, if the content of A1 equals 2. +Checks if selected values are equal. If they are unequal, the result is zero, otherwise 1 (true) appears. +Example: <A1> EQ 2 displays 1, if the content of A1 equals 2. -Not Equal +Not Equal -NEQ or != +NEQ or != -Tests for inequality between selected values. -Example: <A1> NEQ 2 displays 0 (wrong), if the content of A1 equals 2. +Tests for inequality between selected values. +Example: <A1> NEQ 2 displays 0 (wrong), if the content of A1 equals 2. -Less than or Equal +Less than or Equal -LEQ +LEQ -Tests for values less than or equal to a specified value. -Example: <A1> LEQ 2 displays 1 (true), if the content of A1 is less than or equal to 2. +Tests for values less than or equal to a specified value. +Example: <A1> LEQ 2 displays 1 (true), if the content of A1 is less than or equal to 2. -Greater than or Equal +Greater than or Equal -GEQ +GEQ -Tests for values greater than or equal to a specified value -Example: <A1> GEQ 2 displays 1 (true), if the content of A1 is greater than or equal to 2. +Tests for values greater than or equal to a specified value +Example: <A1> GEQ 2 displays 1 (true), if the content of A1 is greater than or equal to 2. -Less +Less -L +L -Tests for values less than a specified value -Example: <A1> L 2 displays 1 (true), if the content of A1 is less than 2. +Tests for values less than a specified value +Example: <A1> L 2 displays 1 (true), if the content of A1 is less than 2. -Greater +Greater -G +G -Tests for values greater than a specified value -Example: <A1> G 2 displays 1 (true), if the content of A1 is greater than 2. +Tests for values greater than a specified value +Example: <A1> G 2 displays 1 (true), if the content of A1 is greater than 2. -Boolean Or +Boolean Or -OR +OR -Tests for values matching the Boolean OR -Example: 0 OR 0 displays 0 (false), anything else results in 1 (true) +Tests for values matching the Boolean OR +Example: 0 OR 0 displays 0 (false), anything else results in 1 (true) -Boolean X Or +Boolean X Or -XOR +XOR -Tests for values matching the Boolean exclusive OR -Example: 1 XOR 0 displays 1 (true) +Tests for values matching the Boolean exclusive OR +Example: 1 XOR 0 displays 1 (true) -Boolean And +Boolean And -AND +AND -Tests for values matching the Boolean AND -Example: 1 AND 2 displays 1 (true) +Tests for values matching the Boolean AND +Example: 1 AND 2 displays 1 (true) -Boolean Not +Boolean Not -NOT +NOT -Tests for values matching the Boolean NOT -Example: NOT 1 (true) displays 0 (false) +Tests for values matching the Boolean NOT +Example: NOT 1 (true) displays 0 (false)
-Statistical Functions -You can choose from the following statistical functions: +Statistical Functions +You can choose from the following statistical functions: -Mean +Mean -MEAN +MEAN -Calculates the arithmetic mean of the values in an area or a list. -Example: MEAN 10|30|20 displays 20 +Calculates the arithmetic mean of the values in an area or a list. +Example: MEAN 10|30|20 displays 20 -Minimum Value +Minimum Value -MIN +MIN -Calculates the minimum value in an area or a list. -Example: MIN 10|30|20 displays 10 +Calculates the minimum value in an area or a list. +Example: MIN 10|30|20 displays 10 -Maximum Value +Maximum Value -MAX +MAX -Calculates the maximum value in an area or a list. -Example: MAX 10|30|20 displays 30.00 +Calculates the maximum value in an area or a list. +Example: MAX 10|30|20 displays 30.00
-Trigonometric Functions -You can choose from the following trigonometric functions: +Trigonometric Functions +You can choose from the following trigonometric functions: -Sine +Sine -SIN +SIN -Calculates the sine in radians -Example: SIN (PI/2) +Calculates the sine in radians +Example: SIN (PI/2) -Cosine +Cosine -COS +COS -Calculates the cosine in radians. -Example: COS 1 +Calculates the cosine in radians. +Example: COS 1 -Tangent +Tangent -TAN +TAN -Calculates the tangent in radians. -Example: TAN <A1> +Calculates the tangent in radians. +Example: TAN <A1> -Arc Sine +Arc Sine -ASIN +ASIN -Calculates the arc sine in radians. -Example: ASIN 1 +Calculates the arc sine in radians. +Example: ASIN 1 -Arc Cosine +Arc Cosine -ACOS +ACOS -Calculates the arc cosine in radians. -Example: ACOS 1 +Calculates the arc cosine in radians. +Example: ACOS 1 -Arc Tangent +Arc Tangent -ATAN +ATAN -Calculates the arc tangent in radians. -Example: ATAN 1 +Calculates the arc tangent in radians. +Example: ATAN 1
-Variables for document properties -The following document properties are also found under File - Properties - Statistics. +Variables for document properties +The following document properties are also found under File - Properties - Statistics. -CHAR +CHAR -Number of characters in the document +Number of characters in the document -WORD +WORD -Number of words in the document +Number of words in the document -PARA +PARA -Number of paragraphs in the document +Number of paragraphs in the document -GRAPH +GRAPH -Number of graphics in the document +Number of graphics in the document -TABLES +TABLES -Number of tables in the document +Number of tables in the document -OLE +OLE -Number of OLE objects in the document +Number of OLE objects in the document -PAGE +PAGE -Total number of pages in the document +Total number of pages in the document
-More Defined Values +More Defined Values -PI +PI -PI +PI -3.1415... +3.1415... -Euler's constant +Euler's constant -E +E -2.71828... +2.71828... -True +True -TRUE +TRUE -not equal to 0 +not equal to 0 -False +False -FALSE +FALSE -0 +0
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/14030000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/14030000.xhp index f2aea58cee..b2eb42ed41 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/14030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/14030000.xhp @@ -32,19 +32,19 @@
-Cancel -Clears the contents of the input line and closes the formula bar. +Cancel +Clears the contents of the input line and closes the formula bar.
- + Icon -Cancel +Cancel
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/14040000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/14040000.xhp index fa8cedb7c2..a4c15b26d7 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/14040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/14040000.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Apply - Transfers the contents of the input line into your document and closes the formula bar. The contents of the input line are inserted at the cursor position in the document. + Apply + Transfers the contents of the input line into your document and closes the formula bar. The contents of the input line are inserted at the cursor position in the document.
@@ -43,10 +43,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Apply + Apply diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/14050000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/14050000.xhp index 5d5444b09c..fe630d2a95 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/14050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/14050000.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
- Formula Area - Allows you to create a formula by typing it directly into the input line or by clicking the Formula icon to display the formulas in submenu. + Formula Area + Allows you to create a formula by typing it directly into the input line or by clicking the Formula icon to display the formulas in submenu.
@@ -43,10 +43,10 @@ - Formula area with formula + Formula area with formula - Formula Area + Formula Area diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/18010000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/18010000.xhp index d1decc6960..096547e0e5 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/18010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/18010000.xhp @@ -32,61 +32,61 @@
-Insert -The toolbar contains various functions for inserting frames, graphics, tables, and other objects. +Insert +The toolbar contains various functions for inserting frames, graphics, tables, and other objects.
-You can select the following functions: -Table +You can select the following functions: +Table -Section +Section -Insert Frame Manually +Insert Frame Manually -Floating Frame +Floating Frame -Insert Footnote Directly +Insert Footnote Directly -Insert Endnote Directly +Insert Endnote Directly -Note -Inserts a note at the current cursor position. -Bookmark +Note +Inserts a note at the current cursor position. +Bookmark -UFI: "insert cross reference" hereFile +UFI: "insert cross reference" hereFile -AutoText +AutoText -Special Character +Special Character -Insert Fields -Inserts a field at the current cursor position. +Insert Fields +Inserts a field at the current cursor position. -Controls -The Controls icon opens a toolbar with the tools that you need to create an interactive form. +Controls +The Controls icon opens a toolbar with the tools that you need to create an interactive form. -From File +From File -Formula +Formula -Chart +Chart -OLE ObjectUFI: this may be called "Insert Object" in UI, but is not the removed "Insert Object" bar +OLE ObjectUFI: this may be called "Insert Object" in UI, but is not the removed "Insert Object" bar -Insert Index -Inserts an index or a table of contents at the current cursor position. -Entry +Insert Index +Inserts an index or a table of contents at the current cursor position. +Entry diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/18030000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/18030000.xhp index 6d67af89e2..26fd26c955 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/18030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/18030000.xhp @@ -34,11 +34,11 @@ -Insert Fields -Click to open the Fields dialog. Click the arrow next to the icon to open a submenu. Click to open the Fields dialog. Click the arrow next to the icon to open a submenu.UFI: changed to fix #i20539# +Insert Fields +Click to open the Fields dialog. Click the arrow next to the icon to open a submenu. Click to open the Fields dialog. Click the arrow next to the icon to open a submenu.UFI: changed to fix #i20539# -You can choose from the following functions: +You can choose from the following functions: @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ -Other +Other diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/18030100.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/18030100.xhp index 2373d7630b..1b062d80a2 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/18030100.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/18030100.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
-Date -Inserts the current date as a field. The default date format is used, and the date is not automatically updated. +Date +Inserts the current date as a field. The default date format is used, and the date is not automatically updated.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/18030200.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/18030200.xhp index 7ba3da1925..a5f1dd9753 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/18030200.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/18030200.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
time fields;insertingfields;inserting time -Time - Inserts the current time as a field. The time is taken directly from the system settings of your operating system. A fixed time format is applied, which cannot be updated by using the F9 function key. +Time + Inserts the current time as a field. The time is taken directly from the system settings of your operating system. A fixed time format is applied, which cannot be updated by using the F9 function key.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/18030400.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/18030400.xhp index cce9bc9d88..ac6b3cf5af 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/18030400.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/18030400.xhp @@ -33,12 +33,12 @@
-Page Count -Inserts as a field the total number of pages in the document. +Page Count +Inserts as a field the total number of pages in the document.
-If you wish to have the page number formatted with a different numbering style, choose Insert - Field - More Fields to insert the required field, and specify the settings in the Field dialog. The format of the field inserted using the Page Number command can also be modified using the Edit - Field command. +If you wish to have the page number formatted with a different numbering style, choose Insert - Field - More Fields to insert the required field, and specify the settings in the Field dialog. The format of the field inserted using the Page Number command can also be modified using the Edit - Field command. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/18030500.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/18030500.xhp index 20efd9a2ea..fd3c7cf2c3 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/18030500.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/18030500.xhp @@ -38,8 +38,8 @@ -Subject -Inserts the subject specified in the document properties as a field . This field displays the data entered in the Subject field under File - Properties - Description. +Subject +Inserts the subject specified in the document properties as a field . This field displays the data entered in the Subject field under File - Properties - Description.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/18030600.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/18030600.xhp index 9dbcd912fb..d6988bc255 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/18030600.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/18030600.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
-Title -Inserts the title specified in the document properties as a field. This field displays the data entered in the Title field under File - Properties - Description. +Title +Inserts the title specified in the document properties as a field. This field displays the data entered in the Title field under File - Properties - Description.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp index a10d03113f..e42e5bfc9a 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
-Author -Inserts the name of the person who created the document here as a field. The field applies the entry made under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User data. +Author +Inserts the name of the person who created the document here as a field. The field applies the entry made under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User data.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp index 7b656f2d47..5506145337 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ Direct Cursor Mode -Activates or deactivates the direct cursor. You can specify the behavior of the direct cursor by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids. +Activates or deactivates the direct cursor. You can specify the behavior of the direct cursor by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids.
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
- + Icon @@ -53,10 +53,10 @@ -The direct cursor allows you to click in any blank area of a page to place text, images, tables, frames, and other objects. -If you place the direct cursor approximately in the middle between the left and the right margin of a page or a table cell, the text you insert will be centered. Similarly, text is right-aligned when the direct cursor is placed on the right margin. -The AutoCorrect tool automatically removes empty paragraphs, tabs, and spaces that are inserted by the direct cursor. If you want to use the direct cursor, then disable the AutoCorrect tool. +The direct cursor allows you to click in any blank area of a page to place text, images, tables, frames, and other objects. +If you place the direct cursor approximately in the middle between the left and the right margin of a page or a table cell, the text you insert will be centered. Similarly, text is right-aligned when the direct cursor is placed on the right margin. +The AutoCorrect tool automatically removes empty paragraphs, tabs, and spaces that are inserted by the direct cursor. If you want to use the direct cursor, then disable the AutoCorrect tool. -The direct cursor sets tabs to position the cursor. If you change the tabs later. the position of the text on the page may change as well. +The direct cursor sets tabs to position the cursor. If you change the tabs later. the position of the text on the page may change as well. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp index dd700aebc6..0c93f48a47 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@
-Insert Header -Displays the header of an HTML document if headers are enabled on the Format - Page - Header tab page.help text still visible in Customize - Toolbars, so do not remove +Insert Header +Displays the header of an HTML document if headers are enabled on the Format - Page - Header tab page.help text still visible in Customize - Toolbars, so do not remove
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp index 8012f8bd80..aa0e5dd477 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@
-Insert Footer -Displays the footer of an HTML document if footers are enabled on the Format - Page - Footer tab page.help text still visible in Customize - Toolbars, so do not removename is wrong, see bug #105568# +Insert Footer +Displays the footer of an HTML document if footers are enabled on the Format - Page - Footer tab page.help text still visible in Customize - Toolbars, so do not removename is wrong, see bug #105568#
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/19030000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/19030000.xhp index cd60dcac9d..36365691d7 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/19030000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/19030000.xhp @@ -31,42 +31,42 @@
-Insert -Click the arrow next to the icon to open a toolbar with various functions for inserting graphics, tables, documents, and special characters. +Insert +Click the arrow next to the icon to open a toolbar with various functions for inserting graphics, tables, documents, and special characters.
- + Icon -Insert +Insert
-You can select the following functions: -Insert single-column frame manually +You can select the following functions: +Insert single-column frame manually -From File +From File -Insert Table +Insert Table -Insert Document +Insert Document -Insert Special Character +Insert Special Character -Insert Section +Insert Section -Insert Bookmark +Insert Bookmark diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/19040000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/19040000.xhp index be0478c270..2e597409ed 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/19040000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/19040000.xhp @@ -31,17 +31,17 @@
-Insert Fields -Click to open the Fields dialog. Click the arrow next to the icon and select the required field from the submenu. +Insert Fields +Click to open the Fields dialog. Click the arrow next to the icon and select the required field from the submenu.
-You can select the following functions: +You can select the following functions: UFI added two lines, see #i60664 -Other +Other diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/19050000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/19050000.xhp index d66a60c1cd..dda6f4184c 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/19050000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/19050000.xhp @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
- Text Animation + Text Animation
@@ -43,10 +43,10 @@ - Icon + Icon - Text Animation + Text Animation diff --git a/source/text/swriter/02/word_count_stb.xhp b/source/text/swriter/02/word_count_stb.xhp index afa97f86c2..26a68d6479 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/02/word_count_stb.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/02/word_count_stb.xhp @@ -22,8 +22,8 @@
-Word Count Status Bar Field -The number of words in the document and selection is displayed in this field of the status bar. A double-click opens the word count dialog, which shows extra document statistics. +Word Count Status Bar Field +The number of words in the document and selection is displayed in this field of the status bar. A double-click opens the word count dialog, which shows extra document statistics.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp index 96c1a8e863..5ac06a1e9f 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp @@ -31,355 +31,354 @@ shortcut keys; in text documents text documents; shortcut keys in -Shortcut Keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer +Shortcut Keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer - You can use shortcut keys to quickly perform common tasks in %PRODUCTNAME. This section lists the default shortcut keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer. + You can use shortcut keys to quickly perform common tasks in %PRODUCTNAME. This section lists the default shortcut keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer.
- You can also use the general shortcut keys in %PRODUCTNAME. - Function Keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer + You can also use the general shortcut keys in %PRODUCTNAME. + Function Keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Shortcut keys + Shortcut keys - Effect + Effect - F2 + F2 - Formula Bar + Formula Bar - Command + Command Ctrl+F2 - Insert Fields + Insert Fields - F3 + F3 - Complete AutoText + Complete AutoText - Command + Command Ctrl+F3 - Edit AutoText + Edit AutoText - F4 + F4 - Open Data Source View + Open Data Source View - Shift+F4 + Shift+F4 - Select next frameUFI: see spec "OpenDocumentBehavior" + Select next frameUFI: see spec "OpenDocumentBehavior" - F5 + F5 - Navigator on/off + Navigator on/off - Command + Command Ctrl+Shift+F5 - Navigator on, go to page number + Navigator on, go to page number - F7 + F7 - Spellcheck + Spellcheck - Command + Command Ctrl+F7 - Thesaurus + Thesaurus - F8 + F8 - Extension mode + Extension mode - Command + Command Ctrl+F8 - Field shadings on / off + Field shadings on / off - Shift+F8 + Shift+F8 - Additional selection mode + Additional selection mode - Ctrl+Shift+F8 + Ctrl+Shift+F8 - Block selection mode + Block selection mode - F9 + F9 - Update fields + Update fields - Command + Command Ctrl+F9 - Show fields + Show fields - Shift+F9 + Shift+F9 - Calculate Table + Calculate Table - Command + Command Ctrl+Shift+F9 - Update Input Fields and Input ListsUFI: fixes #i30104# + Update Input Fields and Input ListsUFI: fixes #i30104# - Command + Command Ctrl+F10 - Nonprinting Characters on/off + Nonprinting Characters on/off - Command+TF11 + Command+TF11 - Styles and Formatting window on/off + Styles and Formatting window on/off - Shift+F11 + Shift+F11 - Create Style + Create Style - Command + Command Ctrl+F11 - Sets focus to Apply Style boxi81468 + Sets focus to Apply Style boxi81468 - Command + Command Ctrl+Shift+F11 - Update Style + Update Style - F12 + F12 - Numbering on + Numbering on - Command + Command Ctrl+F12 - Insert or edit Table + Insert or edit Table - Shift+F12 + Shift+F12 - Bullets on + Bullets on - Command + Command Ctrl+Shift+F12 - Numbering / Bullets off + Numbering / Bullets off
- Shortcut Keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer + Shortcut Keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Shortcut keys + Shortcut keys - Effect + Effect - Command + Command Ctrl+A - Select All + Select All - Command + Command Ctrl+J - Justify + Justify - Command + Command Ctrl+D - Double Underline + Double Underline - Command + Command Ctrl+E - Centered + Centered - Command + Command Ctrl+H - Find and Replace + Find and Replace - Command + Command Ctrl+Shift+P - Superscript + Superscript - Command + Command Ctrl+L - Align Left + Align Left - Command + Command Ctrl+R - Align Right + Align Right - Command + Command Ctrl+Shift+B - Subscript + Subscript - Command+Shift+ZCtrl+Y + Command+Shift+ZCtrl+Y - Redo last action + Redo last action - Command + Command Ctrl+0 (zero) @@ -388,261 +387,261 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+1 - Apply Heading 1 paragraph style + Apply Heading 1 paragraph style - Command + Command Ctrl+2 - Apply Heading 2 paragraph style + Apply Heading 2 paragraph style - Command + Command Ctrl+3 - Apply Heading 3 paragraph style + Apply Heading 3 paragraph style - Command + Command Ctrl+4 - Apply Heading 4 paragraph style + Apply Heading 4 paragraph style - Command + Command Ctrl+5 - Apply Heading 5 paragraph style + Apply Heading 5 paragraph style - Command + Command Ctrl + Plus Key(+) - Calculates the selected text and copies the result to the clipboard. + Calculates the selected text and copies the result to the clipboard. - Command + Command Ctrl+Hyphen(-) - Soft hyphens; hyphenation set by you. + Soft hyphens; hyphenation set by you. - Command + Command Ctrl+Shift+minus sign (-) - Non-breaking hyphen (is not used for hyphenation) + Non-breaking hyphen (is not used for hyphenation) - Command + Command Ctrl+multiplication sign * (only on number pad) - Run macro field + Run macro field - Command + Command Ctrl+Shift+Space - Non-breaking spaces. Non-breaking spaces are not used for hyphenation and are not expanded if the text is justified. + Non-breaking spaces. Non-breaking spaces are not used for hyphenation and are not expanded if the text is justified. - Shift+Enter + Shift+Enter - Line break without paragraph change + Line break without paragraph change - Command + Command Ctrl+Enter - Manual page break + Manual page break - Command + Command Ctrl+Shift+Enter - Column break in multicolumnar texts + Column break in multicolumnar texts - Option + Option Alt+Enter - Inserting a new paragraph without numbering inside a list. Does not work when the cursor is at the end of the list. + Inserting a new paragraph without numbering inside a list. Does not work when the cursor is at the end of the list. - Option + Option Alt+Enter - Inserting a new paragraph directly before or after a section, or before a table. + Inserting a new paragraph directly before or after a section, or before a table. - Arrow Left + Arrow Left - Move cursor to left + Move cursor to left - Shift+Arrow Left + Shift+Arrow Left - Move cursor with selection to the left + Move cursor with selection to the left - Option + Option Ctrl+Arrow Left - Go to beginning of word + Go to beginning of word - Option + Option Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Left - Selecting to the left word by word + Selecting to the left word by word - Arrow Right + Arrow Right - Move cursor to right + Move cursor to right - Shift+Arrow Right + Shift+Arrow Right - Move cursor with selection to the right + Move cursor with selection to the right - Option + Option Ctrl+Arrow Right - Go to start of next word + Go to start of next word - Option + Option Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Right - Selecting to the right word by word + Selecting to the right word by word - Arrow Up + Arrow Up - Move cursor up one line + Move cursor up one line - Shift+Arrow Up + Shift+Arrow Up - Selecting lines in an upwards direction + Selecting lines in an upwards direction - Ctrl+Arrow Up + Ctrl+Arrow Up - Move cursor to beginning of the previous paragraph + Move cursor to beginning of the previous paragraph - Option + Option Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Up - Select to beginning of paragraph. Next keystroke extends selection to beginning of previous paragraph + Select to beginning of paragraph. Next keystroke extends selection to beginning of previous paragraph - Arrow Down + Arrow Down - Move cursor down one line + Move cursor down one line - Shift+Arrow Down + Shift+Arrow Down - Selecting lines in a downward direction + Selecting lines in a downward direction - Option + Option Ctrl+Arrow Down @@ -651,383 +650,381 @@ - Option + Option Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Down - Select to end of paragraph. Next keystroke extends selection to end of next paragraph + Select to end of paragraph. Next keystroke extends selection to end of next paragraph - Command+Arrow Left + Command+Arrow Left Home - Go to beginning of line + Go to beginning of line - Command+Arrow Left + Command+Arrow Left Home+Shift - Go and select to the beginning of a line + Go and select to the beginning of a line - Command+Arrow Right + Command+Arrow Right End - Go to end of line + Go to end of line - Command+Arrow Right + Command+Arrow Right End+Shift - Go and select to end of line + Go and select to end of line - Command+Arrow Up + Command+Arrow Up Ctrl+Home - Go to start of document + Go to start of document - Command+Arrow Up + Command+Arrow Up Ctrl+Home+Shift - Go and select text to start of document + Go and select text to start of document - Command+Arrow Down + Command+Arrow Down Ctrl+End - Go to end of document + Go to end of document - Command+Arrow Down + Command+Arrow Down Ctrl+End+Shift - Go and select text to end of document + Go and select text to end of document - Command + Command Ctrl+PageUp - Switch cursor between text and header + Switch cursor between text and header - Command + Command Ctrl+PageDown - Switch cursor between text and footer + Switch cursor between text and footer - Insert + Insert - Insert mode on/off + Insert mode on/off - PageUp + PageUp - Screen page up + Screen page up - Shift+PageUp + Shift+PageUp - Move up screen page with selection + Move up screen page with selection - PageDown + PageDown - Move down screen page + Move down screen page - Shift+PageDown + Shift+PageDown - Move down screen page with selection + Move down screen page with selection - Option+Fn+Backspace + Option+Fn+Backspace Ctrl+Del - Delete text to end of word + Delete text to end of word - Option + Option Ctrl+Backspace - Delete text to beginning of word - In a list: delete an empty paragraph in front of the current paragraph + Delete text to beginning of word + In a list: delete an empty paragraph in front of the current paragraph - Command+Fn+Backspace + Command+Fn+Backspace Ctrl+Del+Shift - Delete text to end of sentence + Delete text to end of sentence - Command + Command Ctrl+Shift+Backspace - Delete text to beginning of sentence + Delete text to beginning of sentence - Command + Command Ctrl+Tab - Next suggestion with Automatic Word Completion + Next suggestion with Automatic Word Completion - Command + Command Ctrl+Shift+Tab - Use previous suggestion with Automatic Word Completion + Use previous suggestion with Automatic Word Completion - Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+Shift+V + Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+Shift+V - Paste the contents of the clipboard as unformatted text. + Paste the contents of the clipboard as unformatted text. - Command + Command Ctrl + double-click or Command Ctrl + Shift + F10 - Use this combination to quickly dock or undock the Navigator, Styles and Formatting window, or other windows + Use this combination to quickly dock or undock the Navigator, Styles and Formatting window, or other windows
headings; switching levels by keyboard paragraphs; moving by keyboard -Shortcut Keys for Paragraphs and Heading Levels +Shortcut Keys for Paragraphs and Heading Levels - Shortcut keys + Shortcut keys - Effect + Effect - Command+Option + Command+Option Ctrl+Alt+Up ArrowUFI: see sw-features "Ctrl + Up/Down accelerators added to move paragraphs". See now also i31697 - Move the active paragraph or selected paragraphs up one paragraph. + Move the active paragraph or selected paragraphs up one paragraph. - Command+Option + Command+Option Ctrl+Alt+Down Arrow - Move the active paragraph or selected paragraphs down one paragraph. + Move the active paragraph or selected paragraphs down one paragraph. - Tab + Tab - The heading in format "Heading X" (X = 1-9) is moved down one level in the outline. + The heading in format "Heading X" (X = 1-9) is moved down one level in the outline. - Shift+Tab + Shift+Tab - The heading in format "Heading X" (X = 2-10) is moved up one level in the outline. + The heading in format "Heading X" (X = 2-10) is moved up one level in the outline. - Command + Command Ctrl+Tab tab stops; before headings headings; starting with tab stops -At the start of a heading: Inserts a tab stop. Depending on the Window Manager in use, Option +At the start of a heading: Inserts a tab stop. Depending on the Window Manager in use, Option Alt+Tab may be used instead. - To change the heading level with the keyboard, first position the cursor in front of the heading. + To change the heading level with the keyboard, first position the cursor in front of the heading.
- Shortcut Keys for Tables in %PRODUCTNAME Writer + Shortcut Keys for Tables in %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Shortcut Keys + Shortcut Keys - Effect + Effect - Command + Command Ctrl+A - If the active cell is empty: selects the whole table. Otherwise: selects the contents of the active cell. Pressing again selects the entire table. + If the active cell is empty: selects the whole table. Otherwise: selects the contents of the active cell. Pressing again selects the entire table. - Command + Command Ctrl+Home - If the active cell is empty: goes to the beginning of the table. Otherwise: first press goes to beginning of the active cell, second press goes to beginning of the current table, third press goes to beginning of document. + If the active cell is empty: goes to the beginning of the table. Otherwise: first press goes to beginning of the active cell, second press goes to beginning of the current table, third press goes to beginning of document. - Command + Command Ctrl+End - If the active cell is empty: goes to the end of the table. Otherwise: first press goes to the end of the active cell, second press goes to the end of the current table, third press goes to the end of the document. + If the active cell is empty: goes to the end of the table. Otherwise: first press goes to the end of the active cell, second press goes to the end of the current table, third press goes to the end of the document. - Command + Command Ctrl+Tab - Inserts a tab stop (only in tables). Depending on the Window Manager in use, Option + Inserts a tab stop (only in tables). Depending on the Window Manager in use, Option Alt+Tab may be used instead. - Option + Option Alt+Arrow Keys - Increases/decreases the size of the column/row on the right/bottom cell edgeUFI: deleted two rows, see i31697 + Increases/decreases the size of the column/row on the right/bottom cell edgeUFI: deleted two rows, see i31697 - Option + Option Alt+Shift+Arrow Keys - Increase/decrease the size of the column/row on the left/top cell edge + Increase/decrease the size of the column/row on the left/top cell edge - Option+Command + Option+Command Alt+Ctrl+Arrow Keys - Like Option + Like Option Alt, but only the active cell is modified - Option+Command + Option+Command Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Arrow Keys - Like Option + Like Option Alt, but only the active cell is modified - Option + Option Alt+Insert - 3 seconds in Insert mode, Arrow Key inserts row/column, Command + 3 seconds in Insert mode, Arrow Key inserts row/column, Command Ctrl+Arrow Key inserts cell - Option + Option Alt+Del - 3 seconds in Delete mode, Arrow key deletes row/column, Command + 3 seconds in Delete mode, Arrow key deletes row/column, Command Ctrl+Arrow key merges cell with neighboring cell @@ -1035,87 +1032,86 @@ removing; cell protection in text documents -Command +Command Ctrl+Shift+T - Removes cell protection from all selected tables. If no table is selected, then cell protection is removed from all of the tables in the document. + Removes cell protection from all selected tables. If no table is selected, then cell protection is removed from all of the tables in the document. - Shift+Command + Shift+Command Ctrl+Del - If no whole cell is selected, the text from the cursor to the end of the current sentence is deleted. If the cursor is at the end of a cell, and no whole cell is selected, the contents of the next cell are deleted. - If no whole cell is selected and the cursor is at the end of the table, the paragraph following the table will be deleted, unless it is the last paragraph in the document. - If one or more cells are selected, the whole rows containing the selection will be deleted. If all rows are selected completely or partially, the entire table will be deleted. + If no whole cell is selected, the text from the cursor to the end of the current sentence is deleted. If the cursor is at the end of a cell, and no whole cell is selected, the contents of the next cell are deleted. + If no whole cell is selected and the cursor is at the end of the table, the paragraph following the table will be deleted, unless it is the last paragraph in the document. + If one or more cells are selected, the whole rows containing the selection will be deleted. If all rows are selected completely or partially, the entire table will be deleted.
- Shortcut Keys for Moving and Resizing Frames, Graphics and Objects + Shortcut Keys for Moving and Resizing Frames, Graphics and Objects - Shortcut Keys + Shortcut Keys - Effect + Effect - Esc + Esc - Cursor is inside a text frame and no text is selected: Escape selects the text frame. - Text frame is selected: Escape clears the cursor from the text frame. + Cursor is inside a text frame and no text is selected: Escape selects the text frame. + Text frame is selected: Escape clears the cursor from the text frame. - F2 or Enter or any key that produces a character on screen + F2 or Enter or any key that produces a character on screen - If a text frame is selected: positions the cursor to the end of the text in the text frame. If you press any key that produces a character on screen, and the document is in edit mode, the character is appended to the text. + If a text frame is selected: positions the cursor to the end of the text in the text frame. If you press any key that produces a character on screen, and the document is in edit mode, the character is appended to the text. - Option + Option Alt+Arrow Keys - Move object. + Move object. - Option+Command + Option+Command Alt+Ctrl+Arrow Keys - Resizes by moving lower right corner. + Resizes by moving lower right corner. - Option+Command + Option+Command Alt+Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Keys - Resizes by moving top left corner. + Resizes by moving top left corner. - Command + Command Ctrl+Tab - Selects the anchor of an object (in Edit Points mode). + Selects the anchor of an object (in Edit Points mode).
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp index 08ee87578c..150aec81e6 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp @@ -35,37 +35,34 @@ bullets; using automatically paragraphs; automatic numbering MW deleted "applying;"mw deleted "automatic bullets" and changed "automatic numbering;" -Creating Numbered or Bulleted Lists as You Type +Creating Numbered or Bulleted Lists as You Type - $[officename] can automatically apply numbering or bullets as you type. - To Enable Automatic Numbering and Bulleting + $[officename] can automatically apply numbering or bullets as you type. + To Enable Automatic Numbering and Bulleting Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options, click the Options tab, and then select “Bulleted and numbered lists”. - Choose Format - AutoCorrect, and ensure that While Typing is selected. + Choose Format - AutoCorrect, and ensure that While Typing is selected. - The automatic numbering option is only applied to paragraphs that are formatted with the "Default", "Text body", or "Text body indent" paragraph style. - To Create a Numbered or Bulleted List While You Type + The automatic numbering option is only applied to paragraphs that are formatted with the "Default", "Text body", or "Text body indent" paragraph style. + To Create a Numbered or Bulleted List While You Type - Type 1., i., or I. to start a numbered list. Type * or - to start a bulleted list. You can also type a right parenthesis after the number instead of a period , for example, 1) or i). + Type 1., i., or I. to start a numbered list. Type * or - to start a bulleted list. You can also type a right parenthesis after the number instead of a period , for example, 1) or i). - Enter a space, type your text, and then press Enter. The new paragraph automatically receives the next number or bullet. + Enter a space, type your text, and then press Enter. The new paragraph automatically receives the next number or bullet. - Press Enter again to finish the list. + Press Enter again to finish the list. - You can start a numbered list with any number. + You can start a numbered list with any number. - Format - Bullets and Numbering + Format - Bullets and Numbering \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp index 0895936fca..46944ce787 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp @@ -40,73 +40,69 @@ changes;automatic AutoCorrect function;turning off - - Turning Off AutoCorrect + + Turning Off AutoCorrect - By default, $[officename] automatically corrects many common typing errors and applies formatting while you type. + By default, $[officename] automatically corrects many common typing errors and applies formatting while you type. - To quickly undo an automatic correction or completion, press Command + To quickly undo an automatic correction or completion, press Command Ctrl+Z. - To turn off most AutoCorrect features, remove the check mark from the menu Format - AutoCorrect - While Typing. + To turn off most AutoCorrect features, remove the check mark from the menu Format - AutoCorrect - While Typing. - To Remove a Word from the AutoCorrect List + To Remove a Word from the AutoCorrect List Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options. - Click the Replace tab. + Click the Replace tab. - In the AutoCorrect list, select the word pair that you want to remove. + In the AutoCorrect list, select the word pair that you want to remove. - Click Delete. + Click Delete. - To Stop Replacing Quotation Marks + To Stop Replacing Quotation Marks Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options. - Click the Localized Options tab + Click the Localized Options tab - Clear the "Replace" check box(es). + Clear the "Replace" check box(es). - To Stop Capitalizing the First Letter of a Sentence + To Stop Capitalizing the First Letter of a Sentence - Choose Tools – AutoCorrect Options. + Choose Tools – AutoCorrect Options. - Click the Options tab. + Click the Options tab. - Clear the "Capitalize first letter of every sentence" check box. + Clear the "Capitalize first letter of every sentence" check box. - To Stop Drawing a Line When You Type Three Identical Characters - $[officename] automatically draws a line when you type three of the following characters and press Enter: - _ = * ~ # + To Stop Drawing a Line When You Type Three Identical Characters + $[officename] automatically draws a line when you type three of the following characters and press Enter: - _ = * ~ # Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options. - Click the Options tab. + Click the Options tab. - Clear the "Apply border" check box. + Clear the "Apply border" check box. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp index 7f94d818ae..721d50ac57 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp @@ -32,37 +32,34 @@ checking spelling;while typing words;disabling spellcheck MW deleted "text;" -Automatically Check Spelling +Automatically Check Spelling - You can have $[officename] automatically check spelling while you type and underline possible misspelt words with a red wavy line. - To Check Spelling Automatically While You Type + You can have $[officename] automatically check spelling while you type and underline possible misspelt words with a red wavy line. + To Check Spelling Automatically While You Type - Choose Tools - Automatic Spell Checking. + Choose Tools - Automatic Spell Checking. - Right-click a word with a red wavy underline, and then choose a suggested replacement word from the list, or from the AutoCorrect submenu. + Right-click a word with a red wavy underline, and then choose a suggested replacement word from the list, or from the AutoCorrect submenu. - If you choose a word from the AutoCorrect submenu, the underlined word and the replacement word are automatically added to the AutoCorrect list for the current language. To view the AutoCorrect list, choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options, and then click the Replace tab. - You can also add the underlined word to your custom dictionary by choosing Add. - To Exclude Words From the Spellcheck + If you choose a word from the AutoCorrect submenu, the underlined word and the replacement word are automatically added to the AutoCorrect list for the current language. To view the AutoCorrect list, choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options, and then click the Replace tab. + You can also add the underlined word to your custom dictionary by choosing Add. + To Exclude Words From the Spellcheck - Select the words that you want to exclude. + Select the words that you want to exclude. - Click the Language control on the Status bar to open a menu. + Click the Language control on the Status bar to open a menu. - Choose "None (Do not check spelling)". + Choose "None (Do not check spelling)". - Creating a new dictionary. + Creating a new dictionary. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp index dc4f0ff9ad..934023b3ef 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp @@ -32,21 +32,20 @@ abbreviations capital letters;avoiding after specific abbreviations MW added "capital letters;..." -Adding Exceptions to the AutoCorrect List +Adding Exceptions to the AutoCorrect List - You can prevent AutoCorrect from correcting specific abbreviations or words that have mixed capital letters and lowercase letters. + You can prevent AutoCorrect from correcting specific abbreviations or words that have mixed capital letters and lowercase letters. Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options, and then click the Exceptions tab. - Do one of the following: - Type the abbreviation followed by a period in the Abbreviations (no subsequent capital) box and click New. - Type the word in the Words with TWo INitial CApitals box and click New. + Do one of the following: + Type the abbreviation followed by a period in the Abbreviations (no subsequent capital) box and click New. + Type the word in the Words with TWo INitial CApitals box and click New. - To quickly undo an AutoCorrect replacement, press Command + To quickly undo an AutoCorrect replacement, press Command Ctrl+Z. This also adds the word or abbreviation that you typed to the AutoCorrect exceptions list. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp index 0ef0a44718..319896b193 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp @@ -35,57 +35,56 @@ cells; backgrounds backgrounds;selecting MW transferred 4 index entries from shared/guide/background.xhp and added 3 new entries -Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics +Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics MW built this file from splitting shared/guide/background.xhp -You can define a background color or use a graphic as a background for various objects in $[officename] Writer. - To Apply a Background To Text Characters +You can define a background color or use a graphic as a background for various objects in $[officename] Writer. + To Apply a Background To Text Characters - Select the characters. + Select the characters. - Choose Format - Character. + Choose Format - Character. - Click the Background tab, select the background color. + Click the Background tab, select the background color. - To Apply a Background To a Paragraph + To Apply a Background To a Paragraph - Place the cursor in the paragraph or select several paragraphs. + Place the cursor in the paragraph or select several paragraphs. - Choose Format - Paragraph. + Choose Format - Paragraph. - On the Background tab page, select the background color or a background graphic. + On the Background tab page, select the background color or a background graphic. - To select an object in the background, hold down the CommandCtrl key and click the object. Alternatively, use the Navigator to select the object. - To Apply a Background To All or Part of a Table + To select an object in the background, hold down the CommandCtrl key and click the object. Alternatively, use the Navigator to select the object. + To Apply a Background To All or Part of a Table - Place the cursor in the table in your text document. + Place the cursor in the table in your text document. Choose Table - Properties. - On the Background tab page, select the background color or a background graphic. + On the Background tab page, select the background color or a background graphic. - In the For box, choose whether the color or graphic should apply to the current cell, the current row or the whole table. If you select several cells or rows before opening the dialog, the change applies to the selection. + In the For box, choose whether the color or graphic should apply to the current cell, the current row or the whole table. If you select several cells or rows before opening the dialog, the change applies to the selection. - You may also use an icon to apply a background to table parts. + You may also use an icon to apply a background to table parts. - To apply a background color to cells, select the cells and click the color on the Background Color toolbar. + To apply a background color to cells, select the cells and click the color on the Background Color toolbar. - To apply a background color to a text paragraph within a cell, place the cursor into the text paragraph, then click the color on the Background Color toolbar. + To apply a background color to a text paragraph within a cell, place the cursor into the text paragraph, then click the color on the Background Color toolbar.
@@ -94,9 +93,9 @@ Highlight Color icon - Background tab page - Watermarks - Page Backgrounds as Page Styles + Background tab page + Watermarks + Page Backgrounds as Page Styles
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp index 5233c19765..e263d55429 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp @@ -35,44 +35,43 @@ OLE objects;borders defining;object borders MW deleted "adding;" -Defining Borders for Objects +Defining Borders for Objects - In Writer, you can define borders around OLE objects, plug-ins, diagrams/charts, graphics and frames. The name of the menu to be used depends on the object selected. - To Set a Predefined Border Style + In Writer, you can define borders around OLE objects, plug-ins, diagrams/charts, graphics and frames. The name of the menu to be used depends on the object selected. + To Set a Predefined Border Style - Select the object for which you want to define a border. + Select the object for which you want to define a border. - Click the Borders icon on the OLE-Object toolbar or Frame toolbar to open the Borders window. + Click the Borders icon on the OLE-Object toolbar or Frame toolbar to open the Borders window. - Click one of the predefined border styles. This replaces the current border style of the object with the selected style. + Click one of the predefined border styles. This replaces the current border style of the object with the selected style. - To Set a Customized Border Style + To Set a Customized Border Style - Select the table cells that you want to modify. + Select the table cells that you want to modify. - Choose Format - (object name) – Borders.
Replace (object name) with the actual name of the object type you selected. + Choose Format - (object name) – Borders.
Replace (object name) with the actual name of the object type you selected. - In the User-defined area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge. + In the User-defined area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge. - Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. - Repeat the last two steps for every border edge. + Repeat the last two steps for every border edge. - Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Spacing to Contents area. + Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Spacing to Contents area. - Click OK to apply the changes. + Click OK to apply the changes.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp index 8802673ed0..5a9f5e7481 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp @@ -32,47 +32,46 @@ frames; around pages defining;page borders MW deleted "adding;" -Defining Borders for Pages +Defining Borders for Pages - In Writer, you define borders for page styles, not individual pages. All changes made to borders apply to all pages that use the same page style. Note that page style changes cannot be undone by the Undo function in $[officename]. - To Set a Predefined Border Style + In Writer, you define borders for page styles, not individual pages. All changes made to borders apply to all pages that use the same page style. Note that page style changes cannot be undone by the Undo function in $[officename]. + To Set a Predefined Border Style - Choose Format - Page - Borders. + Choose Format - Page - Borders. - Select one of the default border styles in the Default area. + Select one of the default border styles in the Default area. - Select a line style, width and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + Select a line style, width and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. - Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Spacing to contents area. You can only change distances to edges that have a border line defined. + Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Spacing to contents area. You can only change distances to edges that have a border line defined. - Click OK to apply the changes. + Click OK to apply the changes. - To Set a Customized Border Style + To Set a Customized Border Style - Choose Format - Page - Borders. + Choose Format - Page - Borders. - In the User-defined area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge. + In the User-defined area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge. - Select a line style, width and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + Select a line style, width and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. - Repeat the last two steps for every border edge. + Repeat the last two steps for every border edge. - Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Spacing to contents area. You can only change distances to edges that have a border line defined. + Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Spacing to contents area. You can only change distances to edges that have a border line defined. - Click OK to apply the changes. + Click OK to apply the changes.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp index 23fffa2fcc..b96fc362a1 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp @@ -33,190 +33,190 @@ frames;around text tables tables;defining borders MW changed "text tables;" to "tables;" -User Defined Borders in Text Documents +User Defined Borders in Text Documents - You can apply a variety of different cell borders to selected cells in a Writer table and to the whole table. Other objects in text documents can have user defined borders, too. For example, you can assign borders to page styles, to frames, and to inserted pictures or charts. + You can apply a variety of different cell borders to selected cells in a Writer table and to the whole table. Other objects in text documents can have user defined borders, too. For example, you can assign borders to page styles, to frames, and to inserted pictures or charts. - Select the cell or a block of cells in a Writer table. + Select the cell or a block of cells in a Writer table. Choose Table - Properties. - In the dialog, click the Borders tab. + In the dialog, click the Borders tab. - Choose the border options you want to apply and click OK. + Choose the border options you want to apply and click OK. - The options in the Line arrangement area can be used to apply multiple border styles. - Selection of cells - Depending on the selection of cells, the area looks different. + The options in the Line arrangement area can be used to apply multiple border styles. + Selection of cells + Depending on the selection of cells, the area looks different. - Selection + Selection - Line arrangement area + Line arrangement area - One cell selected in a table that has more than one cells, or cursor inside a table with no cell selected + One cell selected in a table that has more than one cells, or cursor inside a table with no cell selected - + one cell border - A one cell table, the cell is selected + A one cell table, the cell is selected - + one selected cell border - Cells in a column selected + Cells in a column selected - + column selected border - Cells in a row selected + Cells in a row selected - + row selected border - A whole table of 2x2 or more cells selected + A whole table of 2x2 or more cells selected - + block selected border
- Default settings - Click one of the Default icons to set or reset multiple borders. + Default settings + Click one of the Default icons to set or reset multiple borders. - The thin gray lines inside an icon show the borders that will be reset or cleared. + The thin gray lines inside an icon show the borders that will be reset or cleared. - The dark lines inside an icon show the lines that will be set using the selected line style and color. + The dark lines inside an icon show the lines that will be set using the selected line style and color. - The thick gray lines inside an icon show the lines that will not be changed. + The thick gray lines inside an icon show the lines that will not be changed. - Examples - Select a block of about 8x8 cells, then choose Format - Cells - Borders. - + Examples + Select a block of about 8x8 cells, then choose Format - Cells - Borders. + default icons for borders - Click the left icon to clear all lines. This removes all outer borders and all inner lines. + Click the left icon to clear all lines. This removes all outer borders and all inner lines. - Click the second icon from the left to set an outer border and to remove all other lines. + Click the second icon from the left to set an outer border and to remove all other lines. - Click the rightmost icon to set an outer border. The inner lines are not changed. + Click the rightmost icon to set an outer border. The inner lines are not changed. - Now you can continue to see which lines the other icons will set or remove. - User defined settings - In the User defined area, you can click to set or remove individual lines. The preview shows lines in three different states. - Repeatedly click an edge or a corner to switch through the three different states. + Now you can continue to see which lines the other icons will set or remove. + User defined settings + In the User defined area, you can click to set or remove individual lines. The preview shows lines in three different states. + Repeatedly click an edge or a corner to switch through the three different states. - Line types + Line types - Image + Image - Meaning + Meaning - A black line + A black line - + solid line for border - A black line sets the corresponding line of the selected cells. The line is shown as a dotted line when you choose the 0.05 pt line style. Double lines are shown when you select a double line style. + A black line sets the corresponding line of the selected cells. The line is shown as a dotted line when you choose the 0.05 pt line style. Double lines are shown when you select a double line style. - A gray line + A gray line - + gray line for border - A gray line is shown when the corresponding line of the selected cells will not be changed. No line will be set or removed at this position. + A gray line is shown when the corresponding line of the selected cells will not be changed. No line will be set or removed at this position. - A white line + A white line - + white line for border - A white line is shown when the corresponding line of the selected cells will be removed. + A white line is shown when the corresponding line of the selected cells will be removed.
- Examples + Examples Select a single cell in a Writer table, then choose Table - Properties - Borders. - Select a thick line style. + Select a thick line style. - To set a lower border, click the lower edge repeatedly until you see a thick line. + To set a lower border, click the lower edge repeatedly until you see a thick line. - + setting thick lower border - All cells in a Writer table have at least a left and a lower line by default. Most cells on the table perimeter have more lines applied by default. - All lines that are shown in white in the preview will be removed from the cell. + All cells in a Writer table have at least a left and a lower line by default. Most cells on the table perimeter have more lines applied by default. + All lines that are shown in white in the preview will be removed from the cell. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp index c9f986011a..fba1f1f603 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp @@ -31,20 +31,19 @@ clipboard;calculating in text formulas;pasting results in text documents - Calculating and Pasting the Result of a Formula in a Text Document + Calculating and Pasting the Result of a Formula in a Text Document - If your text already contains a formula, for example "12+24*2", $[officename] can calculate, and then paste the result of the formula in your document, without using the Formula Bar. + If your text already contains a formula, for example "12+24*2", $[officename] can calculate, and then paste the result of the formula in your document, without using the Formula Bar. - Select the formula in the text. The formula can only contain numbers and operators and cannot contain spaces. + Select the formula in the text. The formula can only contain numbers and operators and cannot contain spaces. - Choose Tools - Calculate, or press Command + Choose Tools - Calculate, or press Command Ctrl+Plus Sign (+). - Place the cursor where you want to insert the result of the formula, and then choose Edit - Paste, or press Command + Place the cursor where you want to insert the result of the formula, and then choose Edit - Paste, or press Command Ctrl+V.
The selected formula is replaced by the result. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp index c78c2dd6cd..28ffd5b28d 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp @@ -34,28 +34,28 @@ table cells;calculating sums sums of table cell series mw deleted "text tables;" -Calculating the Sum of a Series of Table Cells +Calculating the Sum of a Series of Table Cells - Choose Insert - Table, and insert a table with one column and more than one row into a text document. + Choose Insert - Table, and insert a table with one column and more than one row into a text document. - Type a number in each cell of the column, but leave the last cell in the column empty. + Type a number in each cell of the column, but leave the last cell in the column empty. - Place the cursor in the last cell of the column, and then click the Sum icon on the Table Bar.
The + Place the cursor in the last cell of the column, and then click the Sum icon on the Table Bar.
The Formula Bar appears with the entry "=sum". - Click in the first cell of the series you want to sum up, drag to the final cell, and then release.
$[officename] inserts a formula for calculating the sum of the values in the current column. + Click in the first cell of the series you want to sum up, drag to the final cell, and then release.
$[officename] inserts a formula for calculating the sum of the values in the current column. - Press Enter, or click Apply in the Formula bar.
The sum of the values in the current column is entered in the cell. + Press Enter, or click Apply in the Formula bar.
The sum of the values in the current column is entered in the cell. - If you enter a different number anywhere in the column, the sum is updated as soon as you click in the last column cell. - Similarly, you can also quickly calculate the sum of a row of numbers. + If you enter a different number anywhere in the column, the sum is updated as soon as you click in the last column cell. + Similarly, you can also quickly calculate the sum of a row of numbers. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp index 24ad595961..a323902598 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp @@ -30,31 +30,30 @@ calculating;in text tables tables; performing calculations in MW reduced "text tables;" to "tables;" -Displaying the Result of a Table Calculation in a Different Table +Displaying the Result of a Table Calculation in a Different Table - You can perform a calculation on cells in one table and display the result in a different table. + You can perform a calculation on cells in one table and display the result in a different table. - Open a text document, insert a table with multiple columns and rows, and then insert another table consisting of one cell. + Open a text document, insert a table with multiple columns and rows, and then insert another table consisting of one cell. - Enter numbers into some of the cells of the large table. + Enter numbers into some of the cells of the large table. - Place the cursor in the table with the single cell, and then press F2. + Place the cursor in the table with the single cell, and then press F2. - In the Formula Bar, enter the function that you want to perform, for example, =SUM. + In the Formula Bar, enter the function that you want to perform, for example, =SUM. - Click in a cell in the larger table that contains a number, press the plus sign (+), and then click in a different cell containing a number. + Click in a cell in the larger table that contains a number, press the plus sign (+), and then click in a different cell containing a number. - Press Enter. + Press Enter. - If you want, you can format the table to behave as normal text. Insert the table into a frame, and then anchor the frame as a character. The frame remains anchored to the adjacent text when you insert or delete text. + If you want, you can format the table to behave as normal text. Insert the table into a frame, and then anchor the frame as a character. The frame remains anchored to the adjacent text when you insert or delete text. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp index dacd85e314..c55be0626e 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp @@ -30,28 +30,27 @@ calculating; across multiple text tables tables;calculating across mw changed "text tables;" to "tables;" -Calculating Across Tables +Calculating Across Tables - You can perform calculations that span across more than one table in a text document. + You can perform calculations that span across more than one table in a text document. - Open a text document, insert two tables, and type numbers in a few cells in both tables. + Open a text document, insert two tables, and type numbers in a few cells in both tables. - Place your cursor in an empty cell in one of the tables. + Place your cursor in an empty cell in one of the tables. - Press F2. + Press F2. - In the Formula Bar, enter the function that you want to perform, for example, =SUM. + In the Formula Bar, enter the function that you want to perform, for example, =SUM. - Click in a cell containing a number, press the plus sign (+), and then click in a different cell containing a number. + Click in a cell containing a number, press the plus sign (+), and then click in a different cell containing a number. - Press Enter. + Press Enter. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp index c62e82b3e5..43793f0889 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp @@ -34,39 +34,38 @@ chapter numbers in captions inserting;chapter numbers in captions MW changed "adding;" to "inserting;" -Adding Chapter Numbers to Captions +Adding Chapter Numbers to Captions - You can include chapter numbers in captions. - Ensure that the text in your document is organized by chapters, and that the chapter titles and, if you want, the section titles, use one of the predefined heading paragraph styles. You must also assign a numbering option to the heading paragraph styles. + You can include chapter numbers in captions. + Ensure that the text in your document is organized by chapters, and that the chapter titles and, if you want, the section titles, use one of the predefined heading paragraph styles. You must also assign a numbering option to the heading paragraph styles. - Select the item that you want to add a caption to. + Select the item that you want to add a caption to. - Choose Insert - Caption. + Choose Insert - Caption. - Select a caption title from the Category box, and select a numbering style in the Numbering box.
You also can enter a caption text in this dialog. If you want, enter text in the Caption box. + Select a caption title from the Category box, and select a numbering style in the Numbering box.
You also can enter a caption text in this dialog. If you want, enter text in the Caption box. - Click Options. + Click Options. - In the Level box, select the number of heading levels to include in the chapter number. + In the Level box, select the number of heading levels to include in the chapter number. - Type the character that you want to separate the chapter number(s) from the caption number in the Separator box, and then click OK. + Type the character that you want to separate the chapter number(s) from the caption number in the Separator box, and then click OK. - In the Caption dialog, click OK. + In the Caption dialog, click OK. - $[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, or table. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption. + $[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, or table. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption.
- AutoCaption dialog - Chapter numbering + AutoCaption dialog + Chapter numbering
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp index fb52692038..25dd450d94 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp @@ -33,19 +33,18 @@ pasting;cut/copied text sections mouse;moving and copying text mw deleted "text sections;" -Moving and Copying Text in Documents +Moving and Copying Text in Documents - Select the text that you want to move or copy. + Select the text that you want to move or copy. - Do one of the following: - To move the selected text, drag the text to a different location in the document and release. While you drag, the mouse pointer changes to include a gray box.
+ Do one of the following: + To move the selected text, drag the text to a different location in the document and release. While you drag, the mouse pointer changes to include a gray box.
Mouse cursor moving data - To copy the selected text, hold down Command + To copy the selected text, hold down Command Ctrl while you drag. The mouse pointer changes to include a plus sign (+).
Mouse cursor copying data diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp index 2cd6a9747b..544c8a474a 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp @@ -32,24 +32,24 @@ replacing;fields, by text changing;fields, into text -Converting a Field into Text +Converting a Field into Text - You can change a field to regular text, so that it is no longer updated. After you change a field to text, you cannot change the text back into a field. + You can change a field to regular text, so that it is no longer updated. After you change a field to text, you cannot change the text back into a field. - Select the field and choose Edit - Cut. + Select the field and choose Edit - Cut. - Choose Edit - Paste Special. + Choose Edit - Paste Special. - Click "Unformatted text" in the + Click "Unformatted text" in the Selection list, and then click OK. - Paste Special + Paste Special \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp index 85098b13ac..11fcfd4be4 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp @@ -35,64 +35,63 @@ changing;field shadings viewing;fields mw changed "fields;..." -About Fields +About Fields - Fields are used for data that changes in a document, such as the current date or the total number of pages in a document. - Viewing Fields - Fields consist of a field name and the field content. To switch the field display between the field name or the field content, choose View - Field Names. - To display or hide field highlighting in a document, choose View - Field Shadings. To permanently disable this feature, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Application Colors, and clear the check box in front of Field shadings. + Fields are used for data that changes in a document, such as the current date or the total number of pages in a document. + Viewing Fields + Fields consist of a field name and the field content. To switch the field display between the field name or the field content, choose View - Field Names. + To display or hide field highlighting in a document, choose View - Field Shadings. To permanently disable this feature, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Application Colors, and clear the check box in front of Field shadings. To change the color of field shadings, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Application Colors, locate the Field shadings option, and then select a different color in the Color setting box. - Field Properties - Most field types in a document, including database fields, store and display variable values. - The following field types execute an action when you click the field: + Field Properties + Most field types in a document, including database fields, store and display variable values. + The following field types execute an action when you click the field: - Field Type + Field Type - Property + Property - Placeholder + Placeholder - Opens a dialog to insert the object for which the placeholder was set. + Opens a dialog to insert the object for which the placeholder was set. - Insert Reference + Insert Reference - Moves the mouse pointer to the reference. + Moves the mouse pointer to the reference. - Run macro + Run macro - Runs a macro. + Runs a macro. - Input Field + Input Field - Opens a dialog to edit the contents of the field. + Opens a dialog to edit the contents of the field.
- Placeholder, hidden text, insert reference, variable, database, and user-defined fields display a help tip when you rest the mouse pointer over the field in a document. To enable this feature, ensure that the Extended Tips option (What's This?) is selected in the Help menu. - Updating Fields - To update all of the fields in a document, press F9, or choose Edit - Select All, and then press F9. - To update a field that was inserted from a database, select the field, and then press F9. + Placeholder, hidden text, insert reference, variable, database, and user-defined fields display a help tip when you rest the mouse pointer over the field in a document. To enable this feature, ensure that the Extended Tips option (What's This?) is selected in the Help menu. + Updating Fields + To update all of the fields in a document, press F9, or choose Edit - Select All, and then press F9. + To update a field that was inserted from a database, select the field, and then press F9. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp index 774bfdad62..84c5b609c0 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp @@ -38,51 +38,51 @@ objects;finding by Navigator Asian languages;search options 3. mw added 2 index entries and changed "finding;"2. mw copied 6 index entries from shared/01/02100300.xhp. Then made one entry of two "finding;" entries, one entry of two "replacing;" entries and one entry of two "formats;" entries1. mw copied 5 entries from shared/01/02100000.xhp and then made one entry of two "finding;" entries. -Finding and Replacing in Writer +Finding and Replacing in Writer - In text documents you can find words, formatting, styles, and more. You can navigate from one result to the next, or you can highlight all results at once, then apply another format or replace the words by other text. + In text documents you can find words, formatting, styles, and more. You can navigate from one result to the next, or you can highlight all results at once, then apply another format or replace the words by other text.
- The Find & Replace dialog - To find text within the whole document, open the Find & Replace dialog without any active text selection. If you want to search only a part of your document, first select that part of text, then open the Find & Replace dialog. - To Find Text + The Find & Replace dialog + To find text within the whole document, open the Find & Replace dialog without any active text selection. If you want to search only a part of your document, first select that part of text, then open the Find & Replace dialog. + To Find Text - Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. + Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. Enter the text to find in the Find text box. - Either click Find Next or Find All. + Either click Find Next or Find All. - When you click Find Next, Writer will show you the next text that is equal to your entry. You can watch and edit the text, then click Find Next again to advance to the next found text. - If you closed the dialog, you can press a key combination (Ctrl+Shift+F) to find the next text without opening the dialog. - Alternatively, you can use the icons at the lower right of the document to navigate to the next text or to any other object in the document. - When you click Find All, Writer selects all text that is equal to your entry. Now you can for example set all found text to bold, or apply a character style to all at once. - To Replace Text - Unlike searching text, replacing text cannot be restricted to the current selection only. + When you click Find Next, Writer will show you the next text that is equal to your entry. You can watch and edit the text, then click Find Next again to advance to the next found text. + If you closed the dialog, you can press a key combination (Ctrl+Shift+F) to find the next text without opening the dialog. + Alternatively, you can use the icons at the lower right of the document to navigate to the next text or to any other object in the document. + When you click Find All, Writer selects all text that is equal to your entry. Now you can for example set all found text to bold, or apply a character style to all at once. + To Replace Text + Unlike searching text, replacing text cannot be restricted to the current selection only. - Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. + Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. Enter the text to search in the Find text box. - Enter the text to replace the found text in the Replace with text box. + Enter the text to replace the found text in the Replace with text box. - Either click Replace or Replace All. + Either click Replace or Replace All. When you click Replace, Writer will search the whole document for the text in the Find box, starting at the current cursor position. When text is found, Writer highlights the text and waits for your response. Click Replace to replace the highlighted text in the document with the text in the Replace text box. Click Find Next to advance to the next found text without replacing the current selection. - When you click Replace All, Writer replaces all text that matches your entry. - To Find Styles - You want to find all text in your document to which a certain Paragraph Style is assigned, for example the "Heading 2" style. + When you click Replace All, Writer replaces all text that matches your entry. + To Find Styles + You want to find all text in your document to which a certain Paragraph Style is assigned, for example the "Heading 2" style. - Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. + Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. Click Other options to expand the dialog. @@ -91,38 +91,38 @@ Check Paragraph Styles.
The Find text box now is a list box, where you can select any of the Paragraph Styles that are applied in the current document. - Select the style to search for, then click Find Next or Find All. + Select the style to search for, then click Find Next or Find All. - To Find Formats - You want to find all text in your document to which a certain direct character formatting is assigned. - Finding formats only finds direct character attributes, it does not find attributes applied as part of a style. + To Find Formats + You want to find all text in your document to which a certain direct character formatting is assigned. + Finding formats only finds direct character attributes, it does not find attributes applied as part of a style. - Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. + Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. - Click More Options to expand the dialog. + Click More Options to expand the dialog. - Click the Format button. + Click the Format button. - Click Find Next or Find All. + Click Find Next or Find All. - More options - The similarity search can find text that is almost the same as your search text. You can set the number of characters that are allowed to differ. - Check the Similarity search option and optionally click the Similarities button to change the settings. (Setting all three numbers to 1 works fine for English text.) - When you have enabled Asian language support under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, the Find & Replace dialog offers options to search Asian text. - The Navigator - The Navigator is the main tool for finding and selecting objects. You can also use the Navigator to move and arrange chapters, providing an outline view to your document. - Choose View - Navigator to open the Navigator window. - Use the Navigator for inserting objects, links and references within the same document or from other open documents. See the Navigator guide for more information. - Click the icon with the blue circle at the bottom right part of your document to open the small Navigation window. - Use the small Navigation window to quickly jump to the next object or find the next text in your document. + More options + The similarity search can find text that is almost the same as your search text. You can set the number of characters that are allowed to differ. + Check the Similarity search option and optionally click the Similarities button to change the settings. (Setting all three numbers to 1 works fine for English text.) + When you have enabled Asian language support under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, the Find & Replace dialog offers options to search Asian text. + The Navigator + The Navigator is the main tool for finding and selecting objects. You can also use the Navigator to move and arrange chapters, providing an outline view to your document. + Choose View - Navigator to open the Navigator window. + Use the Navigator for inserting objects, links and references within the same document or from other open documents. See the Navigator guide for more information. + Click the icon with the blue circle at the bottom right part of your document to open the small Navigation window. + Use the small Navigation window to quickly jump to the next object or find the next text in your document.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp index f93b4d887d..d4ad56f9f9 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp @@ -32,10 +32,10 @@ page numbers; footers numbering;pages -Inserting Page Numbers in Footers +Inserting Page Numbers in Footers - You can easily insert a page number field in the footer of your document. You can also add a page count to the footer, for example, in the form "Page 9 of 12" - To Insert a Page Number + You can easily insert a page number field in the footer of your document. You can also add a page count to the footer, for example, in the form "Page 9 of 12" + To Insert a Page Number Choose Insert - Header and Footer - Footer and select the page style that you want to add the footer to. @@ -44,11 +44,11 @@ Choose Insert - Field - Page Number. - If you want, you can align the page number field as you would text. - To Additionally Add a Page Count + If you want, you can align the page number field as you would text. + To Additionally Add a Page Count - Click in front of the page number field, type Page and enter a space; click after the field, enter a space and then type of and enter another space. + Click in front of the page number field, type Page and enter a space; click after the field, enter a space and then type of and enter another space. Choose Insert - Field - Page Count. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp index 7db1ee66b0..e922c26345 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp @@ -30,40 +30,39 @@ letters; creating form letters wizards;form letters mw added "serial letters" -Creating a Form Letter +Creating a Form Letter - To create a form letter, you need a text document that contains fields for address data, and an address database. Then you combine or merge the address data and the text document to either print the letters or send them by e-mail. - If the document is in HTML format, any embedded or linked images will not be sent with the e-mail. - The Mail Merge Wizard helps you to create form letters. - To create a form letter + To create a form letter, you need a text document that contains fields for address data, and an address database. Then you combine or merge the address data and the text document to either print the letters or send them by e-mail. + If the document is in HTML format, any embedded or linked images will not be sent with the e-mail. + The Mail Merge Wizard helps you to create form letters. + To create a form letter - Choose Tools - Mail Merge Wizard. - You see the Mail Merge Wizard dialog. The following is an example of one of many possible ways to navigate the wizard's pages: + Choose Tools - Mail Merge Wizard. + You see the Mail Merge Wizard dialog. The following is an example of one of many possible ways to navigate the wizard's pages: - Select Start from a template, and click the Browse button. - You see the New dialog. + Select Start from a template, and click the Browse button. + You see the New dialog. - Select Business Correspondence in the left list, and then "Modern" business letter in the right list. Click OK to close the Templates dialog, and click Next in the wizard. + Select Business Correspondence in the left list, and then "Modern" business letter in the right list. Click OK to close the Templates dialog, and click Next in the wizard. - Select Letter and click Next. + Select Letter and click Next. - On the next step of the wizard, click the Select Address List button to check that you are using the correct address list. If you want to use an address block, select an address block type, match the data fields if necessary, and click Next. + On the next step of the wizard, click the Select Address List button to check that you are using the correct address list. If you want to use an address block, select an address block type, match the data fields if necessary, and click Next. - Next follows the Create a salutation step. Deselect the Insert personalized salutation box. Under General salutation, select the salutation that you want on top of all letters. + Next follows the Create a salutation step. Deselect the Insert personalized salutation box. Under General salutation, select the salutation that you want on top of all letters. - If you want to place mail merge fields anywhere else in the document select the corresponding column in your address data source and then drag and drop the column header into the document where you would like the field to be. Be sure to select the entire column. + If you want to place mail merge fields anywhere else in the document select the corresponding column in your address data source and then drag and drop the column header into the document where you would like the field to be. Be sure to select the entire column. - Click Next and finally Finish to create the mail merge. + Click Next and finally Finish to create the mail merge. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp index 7e83450999..0a0a73d754 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp @@ -34,37 +34,37 @@ documents; master documents and subdocuments styles;master documents Mw made "master documents" and "subdocuments" a two level entry, deleted "references;" and "bookmarks;" and added a new entry and shifted "Navigator;" and "indexes;" to the file globaldoc_howtos.xhp -Master Documents and Subdocuments +Master Documents and Subdocuments MW: This file was split into globaldoc.xhp (concepts) and globaldoc_howtos.xhp (procedures) -A master document lets you manage large documents, such as a book with many chapters. The master document can be seen as a container for individual %PRODUCTNAME Writer files. The individual files are called subdocuments. - Characteristics of Master Documents +A master document lets you manage large documents, such as a book with many chapters. The master document can be seen as a container for individual %PRODUCTNAME Writer files. The individual files are called subdocuments. + Characteristics of Master Documents - When you print a master document, the contents of all subdocuments, indexes, and any text that you entered are printed. + When you print a master document, the contents of all subdocuments, indexes, and any text that you entered are printed. - You can create a table of contents and index in the master document for all of the subdocuments. + You can create a table of contents and index in the master document for all of the subdocuments. - Styles that are used in subdocuments, such as new paragraph styles, are automatically imported into the master document. + Styles that are used in subdocuments, such as new paragraph styles, are automatically imported into the master document. - When viewing the master document, styles that are already present in the master document take precedence over styles with the same name that are imported from subdocuments. + When viewing the master document, styles that are already present in the master document take precedence over styles with the same name that are imported from subdocuments. - Subdocuments never get changed by changes made to the master document. + Subdocuments never get changed by changes made to the master document. - When you add a document to a master document or create a new subdocument, a link is created in the master document. You cannot edit the content of a subdocument directly in the master document, but you can use the Navigator to open any subdocument for edit. - Example of Using Styles - A master document master.odm consists of some text and links to the subdocuments sub1.odt and sub2.odt. In each subdocument a new paragraph style with the same name Style1 is defined and used, and the subdocuments are saved. - When you save the master document, the styles from the subdocuments are imported into the master document. First, the new style Style1 from the sub1.odt is imported. Next, the new styles from sub2.odt will be imported, but as Style1 now already is present in the master document, this style from sub2.odt will not be imported. - In the master document you now see the new style Style1 from the first subdocument. All Style1 paragraphs in the master document will be shown using the Style1 attributes from the first subdocument. However, the second subdocument by itself will not be changed. You see the Style1 paragraphs from the second subdocument with different attributes, depending whether you open the sub2.odt document by itself or as part of the master document. - To avoid confusion, use the same document template for the master document and its subdocuments. This happens automatically when you create the master document and its subdocuments from an existing document with headings, using the command File - Send - Create Master Document. + When you add a document to a master document or create a new subdocument, a link is created in the master document. You cannot edit the content of a subdocument directly in the master document, but you can use the Navigator to open any subdocument for edit. + Example of Using Styles + A master document master.odm consists of some text and links to the subdocuments sub1.odt and sub2.odt. In each subdocument a new paragraph style with the same name Style1 is defined and used, and the subdocuments are saved. + When you save the master document, the styles from the subdocuments are imported into the master document. First, the new style Style1 from the sub1.odt is imported. Next, the new styles from sub2.odt will be imported, but as Style1 now already is present in the master document, this style from sub2.odt will not be imported. + In the master document you now see the new style Style1 from the first subdocument. All Style1 paragraphs in the master document will be shown using the Style1 attributes from the first subdocument. However, the second subdocument by itself will not be changed. You see the Style1 paragraphs from the second subdocument with different attributes, depending whether you open the sub2.odt document by itself or as part of the master document. + To avoid confusion, use the same document template for the master document and its subdocuments. This happens automatically when you create the master document and its subdocuments from an existing document with headings, using the command File - Send - Create Master Document.
- Navigator in master mode + Navigator in master mode
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp index 4d88f4f09d..d830c0fef1 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp @@ -33,100 +33,97 @@ hiding;text, with conditions variables;for hiding text mw deleted "comparisons;" and copied two entries to hidden_text_display.xhp and 2 entries to nonprintable_text.xhpMW added "variables;" -Hiding Text +Hiding Text - You can use fields and sections to hide or display text in your document if a condition is met. - Before you can hide text, you must first create a variable to use in the condition for hiding the text. - To Create a Variable + You can use fields and sections to hide or display text in your document if a condition is met. + Before you can hide text, you must first create a variable to use in the condition for hiding the text. + To Create a Variable Click in your document and choose Insert - Field - More Fields. - Click the Variables tab and click "Set Variable" in the Type list. + Click the Variables tab and click "Set Variable" in the Type list. - Click "General" in the Format list. + Click "General" in the Format list. - Type a name for the variable in the Name box, for example, Hide. + Type a name for the variable in the Name box, for example, Hide. - Enter a value for the variable in the Value box, for example, 1. + Enter a value for the variable in the Value box, for example, 1. - To hide the variable in your document, select Invisible. + To hide the variable in your document, select Invisible. - Click Insert and Close. + Click Insert and Close. - To Hide Text + To Hide Text - Click in the document where you want to add the text. + Click in the document where you want to add the text. Choose Insert - Field - More Fields and click the Functions tab. - Click "Hidden Text" in the Type list. + Click "Hidden Text" in the Type list. - Enter a statement in the Condition box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter Hide==1. + Enter a statement in the Condition box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter Hide==1. - Type the text that you want to hide in the Hidden text box. + Type the text that you want to hide in the Hidden text box. - Click Insert and Close. + Click Insert and Close. - To Hide a Paragraph + To Hide a Paragraph - Click in the paragraph where you want to add the text. + Click in the paragraph where you want to add the text. Choose Insert - Field - More Fields and click the Functions tab. - Click "Hidden Paragraph" in the Type list. + Click "Hidden Paragraph" in the Type list. - Enter a statement in the Condition box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter Hide==1. + Enter a statement in the Condition box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter Hide==1. - Click Insert and Close. + Click Insert and Close. - You must enable this feature by removing the check mark from menu View - Hidden Paragraphs. When the check mark is set, you cannot hide any paragraph. - To Hide a Section + You must enable this feature by removing the check mark from menu View - Hidden Paragraphs. When the check mark is set, you cannot hide any paragraph. + To Hide a Section - Select the text that you want to hide in your document. + Select the text that you want to hide in your document. - Choose Insert - Section. + Choose Insert - Section. - In the Hide area, select Hide, and then enter an expression in the Condition box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter Hide==1. + In the Hide area, select Hide, and then enter an expression in the Condition box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter Hide==1. - Click Insert. + Click Insert.
- Displaying Hidden Text - Creating Non-printing Text + Displaying Hidden Text + Creating Non-printing Text Insert - Field - More Fields - Insert - Section - List of Operators + Insert - Section + List of Operators
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp index 7d119e27ef..3bdcbff822 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp @@ -30,26 +30,26 @@ hidden text; displaying displaying;hidden text MW copied two entries from hidden_text.xhp -Displaying Hidden Text +Displaying Hidden Text MW created this guide from splitting hidden_text.xhp -If you have a text that was hidden by defining a condition with a variable, you have several options to display the hidden text. Do one of the following: +If you have a text that was hidden by defining a condition with a variable, you have several options to display the hidden text. Do one of the following: - Enable the check mark at View - Hidden Paragraphs. + Enable the check mark at View - Hidden Paragraphs. - Double-click in front of the variable that you used to define the condition for hiding the text, and enter a different value for the variable. + Double-click in front of the variable that you used to define the condition for hiding the text, and enter a different value for the variable. - Double-click in front of the hidden text field or the hidden paragraph field, and change the condition statement. + Double-click in front of the hidden text field or the hidden paragraph field, and change the condition statement.
- Hiding Text + Hiding Text - List of Operators + List of Operators
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp index 1106757b23..ad0f137d58 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp @@ -31,42 +31,41 @@ words;wrapping/not wrapping in text switching off;hyphenation for specific words mw copied 2 entries from using_hyphen.xhp and added a new entry -Preventing Hyphenation of Specific Words +Preventing Hyphenation of Specific Words MW created this guide from splitting using_hyphen.xhp -If your text is automatically hyphenated and certain hyphenated words look ugly, or if you want specific words never to be hyphenated you can switch off hyphenation for those words: +If your text is automatically hyphenated and certain hyphenated words look ugly, or if you want specific words never to be hyphenated you can switch off hyphenation for those words: - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids - Select a dictionary in the User-defined dictionary list, and then click Edit. - If the list is empty, click New to create a dictionary. + Select a dictionary in the User-defined dictionary list, and then click Edit. + If the list is empty, click New to create a dictionary. - In the Word box, type the word you want to exclude from hyphenation, followed by an equal sign (=), for example, "pretentious=". + In the Word box, type the word you want to exclude from hyphenation, followed by an equal sign (=), for example, "pretentious=". - Click New, and then click Close. + Click New, and then click Close. - To quickly exclude a word from hyphenation, select the word, choose Format - Character, click the Font tab, and select "None" in the Language box. - Some words contain special characters that %PRODUCTNAME treats as a hyphen. If you do not want such words to be hyphenated, you can insert a special code that prevents hyphenation at the position where the special code is inserted. Proceed as follows: + To quickly exclude a word from hyphenation, select the word, choose Format - Character, click the Font tab, and select "None" in the Language box. + Some words contain special characters that %PRODUCTNAME treats as a hyphen. If you do not want such words to be hyphenated, you can insert a special code that prevents hyphenation at the position where the special code is inserted. Proceed as follows: - Enable the special features of complex text layout (CTL) languages: Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages and check Enabled for complex text layout (CTL). Click OK. + Enable the special features of complex text layout (CTL) languages: Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages and check Enabled for complex text layout (CTL). Click OK. - Position the cursor at the place where no hyphenation should occur. + Position the cursor at the place where no hyphenation should occur. - Choose Insert - Formatting Mark - No-width no break. - Once the special character is inserted, you might disable CTL again. Support of CTL was only necessary to insert the special character. + Choose Insert - Formatting Mark - No-width no break. + Once the special character is inserted, you might disable CTL again. Support of CTL was only necessary to insert the special character. - Text Flow + Text Flow diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp index a79d9b559a..b5edbabac2 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp @@ -35,24 +35,24 @@ lines of text; indents changing;indents mw made indents a two level entry, changed "paragraphs;" and copied "changing;indents" from writer guide "ruler.xhp" -Indenting Paragraphs +Indenting Paragraphs see i66307 -To change the measurement units, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General, and then select a new measurement unit in the Settings area. - You can change the indents for the current paragraph, or for all selected paragraphs, or for a Paragraph Style. - You can also set indents using the ruler. To display the ruler, choose View - Ruler. +To change the measurement units, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General, and then select a new measurement unit in the Settings area. + You can change the indents for the current paragraph, or for all selected paragraphs, or for a Paragraph Style. + You can also set indents using the ruler. To display the ruler, choose View - Ruler. - Choose Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing to change the indents for the current paragraph or for all selected paragraphs. You can also set indents using the ruler. + Choose Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing to change the indents for the current paragraph or for all selected paragraphs. You can also set indents using the ruler. - Right-click a paragraph and choose Edit Paragraph Style - Indents & Spacing to change the indents for all paragraphs that have the same Paragraph Style. + Right-click a paragraph and choose Edit Paragraph Style - Indents & Spacing to change the indents for all paragraphs that have the same Paragraph Style. - Indents are calculated with respect to the left and right page margins. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. - The indents are different regarding the writing direction. For example, look at the Before text indent value in left-to-right languages. The left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. In right-to-left languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. - For a hanging indent, enter a positive value for Before text and a negative value for First line. + Indents are calculated with respect to the left and right page margins. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. + The indents are different regarding the writing direction. For example, look at the Before text indent value in left-to-right languages. The left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. In right-to-left languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. + For a hanging indent, enter a positive value for Before text and a negative value for First line. - Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing + Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp index f633e2bf37..95baace901 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp @@ -33,16 +33,15 @@ editing;indexes/tables of contents deleting;indexes/tables of contents -Updating, Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of Contents +Updating, Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of Contents - Place the cursor in the index or table of contents. + Place the cursor in the index or table of contents. If you cannot place your cursor in the index or table of contents, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then select Enable cursor in the Protected Areas section. - Right-click and choose an editing option from the menu. + Right-click and choose an editing option from the menu. You can also make changes directly to an index or table of contents. Right-click in the index or table of contents, choose Edit Index or Table of Contents, click Type tab, and then clear the Protected against manual changes check box. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp index b21a7a00d0..14c0b41154 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp @@ -31,12 +31,12 @@ tables of contents; defining entries in entries; defining in indexes/tables of contents -Defining Index or Table of Contents Entries +Defining Index or Table of Contents Entries - To Define Index Entries + To Define Index Entries - Click in a word, or select the words in your document that you want to use as an index entry. + Click in a word, or select the words in your document that you want to use as an index entry. Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Index Entry, and do one of the following: @@ -47,35 +47,33 @@ -To change the text that appears in the index, type the text that you want in the Entry box. The text that you type here does not replace the selected text in the document. +To change the text that appears in the index, type the text that you want in the Entry box. The text that you type here does not replace the selected text in the document. -To add an index mark to similar words in your document, select Apply to all similar texts. +To add an index mark to similar words in your document, select Apply to all similar texts. -To add the entries to a custom index, click the New User-defined Index icon, enter the name of the index, and then click OK. +To add the entries to a custom index, click the New User-defined Index icon, enter the name of the index, and then click OK. - To Define Table of Contents Entries - The best way to generate a table of contents is to apply the predefined heading paragraph styles, such as "Heading 1", to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents. - To Use a Custom Paragraph Style as a Table of Contents Entry + To Define Table of Contents Entries + The best way to generate a table of contents is to apply the predefined heading paragraph styles, such as "Heading 1", to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents. + To Use a Custom Paragraph Style as a Table of Contents Entry - Choose Tools - Outline Numbering and click the Numbering tab. + Choose Tools - Outline Numbering and click the Numbering tab. - Select the paragraph style that you want to include in your table of contents in the Paragraph Style box. + Select the paragraph style that you want to include in your table of contents in the Paragraph Style box. - In the Level list, click the hierarchical level that you want to apply the paragraph style to. + In the Level list, click the hierarchical level that you want to apply the paragraph style to. - Click OK. You can now apply the style to headings in your document and include them in your table of contents. + Click OK. You can now apply the style to headings in your document and include them in your table of contents. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp index 14fb03053f..13ca5d58a6 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp @@ -35,53 +35,50 @@ hyperlinks; in tables of contents and indexes formatting;indexes and tables of contents -Formatting an Index or a Table of Contents +Formatting an Index or a Table of Contents - You can apply different paragraph styles, assign hyperlinks to entries, change the layout of indexes, and change the background color of indexes in the Insert Index dialog. - To Apply a Different Paragraph Style to an Index Level + You can apply different paragraph styles, assign hyperlinks to entries, change the layout of indexes, and change the background color of indexes in the Insert Index dialog. + To Apply a Different Paragraph Style to an Index Level Right-click in the index or table of contents, and then choose Edit Index or Table of Contents. - Click the Styles tab. + Click the Styles tab. - Click an index level in the Levels list. + Click an index level in the Levels list. - Click the style that you want to apply in the Paragraph Style list. + Click the style that you want to apply in the Paragraph Style list. - Click the assign button <. + Click the assign button <. - Click OK. + Click OK. - To Assign Hyperlinks to Entries in a Table of Contents - You can assign a cross-reference as a hyperlink to entries in a table of contents. + To Assign Hyperlinks to Entries in a Table of Contents + You can assign a cross-reference as a hyperlink to entries in a table of contents. Right-click in the table of contents, and then choose Edit Index or Table of Contents. - Click the Entries tab. + Click the Entries tab. - In the Level list click the heading level that you want to assign hyperlinks to. + In the Level list click the heading level that you want to assign hyperlinks to. - In the Structure area, click in the box in front of E#, and then click Hyperlink. + In the Structure area, click in the box in front of E#, and then click Hyperlink. - Click in the box behind the E, and then click Hyperlink. + Click in the box behind the E, and then click Hyperlink. - Repeat for each heading level that you want to create hyperlinks for, or click the All button to apply the formatting to all levels. + Repeat for each heading level that you want to create hyperlinks for, or click the All button to apply the formatting to all levels. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp index 71bd3ff799..876d1cab9a 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp @@ -32,16 +32,15 @@ merging;indexes master documents;indexes MW inserted "master documents;" -Indexes Covering Several Documents +Indexes Covering Several Documents - There are several ways to create an index that spans several documents: + There are several ways to create an index that spans several documents: - Create an index in each individual document, copy and paste the indexes into a single document, and then edit them. + Create an index in each individual document, copy and paste the indexes into a single document, and then edit them. - Select each index, choose Insert - Section, and then enter a name for the index. In a separate document, choose + Select each index, choose Insert - Section, and then enter a name for the index. In a separate document, choose Insert - Section, select Link, click the Browse button, and then locate and insert a named index section. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_beforetable.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_beforetable.xhp index 0334bf2a25..7fc8411b02 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_beforetable.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_beforetable.xhp @@ -34,9 +34,9 @@ paragraphs;inserting before/after tables inserting;paragraphs before/after tables -Inserting Text Before a Table at the Top of Page +Inserting Text Before a Table at the Top of Page -If you want to insert text before a table that is at the top of a page, click in the first cell of the table, in front of any contents of that cell, and then press Enter or OptionAlt+Enter. -To insert text after a table at the end of the document, go to the last cell of the table and press OptionAlt+Enter. +If you want to insert text before a table that is at the top of a page, click in the first cell of the table, in front of any contents of that cell, and then press Enter or OptionAlt+Enter. +To insert text after a table at the end of the document, go to the last cell of the table and press OptionAlt+Enter. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp index 7043e62d2a..f401367886 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp @@ -35,9 +35,9 @@ inserting; pictures pictures; inserting options mw deleted "illustrations;" -Inserting Graphics +Inserting Graphics -There are several ways to insert a graphic object in a text document. +There are several ways to insert a graphic object in a text document. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp index d8f2f0e297..7adabb171c 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp @@ -31,20 +31,20 @@ pictures; inserting by dialog inserting; pictures, by dialog -Inserting a Graphic From a File +Inserting a Graphic From a File - Click in the document where you want to insert the graphic. + Click in the document where you want to insert the graphic. - Choose Insert - Image - From File. + Choose Insert - Image - From File. - Locate the graphic file that you want to insert, and then click Open. + Locate the graphic file that you want to insert, and then click Open. - By default, the inserted graphic is centered above the paragraph that you clicked in. + By default, the inserted graphic is centered above the paragraph that you clicked in. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp index 1c15e51762..8e4a19b579 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp @@ -32,24 +32,24 @@ copying; charts from $[officename] Calc text documents;inserting Calc charts -Inserting a Calc Chart into a Text Document +Inserting a Calc Chart into a Text Document - You can insert a copy of a chart that is not updated when you modify the chart data in the spreadsheet. + You can insert a copy of a chart that is not updated when you modify the chart data in the spreadsheet. - Open the text document that you want to copy the chart to. + Open the text document that you want to copy the chart to. - Open the spreadsheet containing the chart that you want to copy. + Open the spreadsheet containing the chart that you want to copy. - In the spreadsheet, click the chart. Eight handles appear. + In the spreadsheet, click the chart. Eight handles appear. - Drag the chart from the spreadsheet to the text document. + Drag the chart from the spreadsheet to the text document. - You can resize and move the chart in the text document as you would any object. To edit the chart data, double-click the chart. + You can resize and move the chart in the text document as you would any object. To edit the chart data, double-click the chart. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp index 26894767f7..c5232ec7c1 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp @@ -33,22 +33,22 @@ text; inserting pictures from Draw pictures; inserting from Draw -Inserting Graphics From $[officename] Draw or Impress +Inserting Graphics From $[officename] Draw or Impress -Open the document where you want to insert the object. +Open the document where you want to insert the object. -Open the Draw or Impress document containing the object that you want to copy. +Open the Draw or Impress document containing the object that you want to copy. -Hold down Ctrl and click and hold the object for a moment.see i70967 +Hold down Ctrl and click and hold the object for a moment.see i70967 -Drag to the document where you want to insert the object. +Drag to the document where you want to insert the object. -ufi: paragraph removed because I cannot verify: id="par_id3152755" l10n="U" oldref="9"If a hyperlink is attached to the object in the original document, the hyperlink is inserted instead of the object. +ufi: paragraph removed because I cannot verify: id="par_id3152755" If a hyperlink is attached to the object in the original document, the hyperlink is inserted instead of the object. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp index ef8824e4e8..66a8f71309 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp @@ -36,10 +36,10 @@ pictures; inserting from Gallery into text replacing;objects from Gallery -Inserting Graphics From the Gallery With Drag-and-Drop +Inserting Graphics From the Gallery With Drag-and-Drop -You can drag-and-drop an object from the gallery into a text document, spreadsheet, drawing, or presentation. -To replace a gallery object that you inserted in a document, hold down Shift+Ctrl, and then drag a different gallery object onto the object. +You can drag-and-drop an object from the gallery into a text document, spreadsheet, drawing, or presentation. +To replace a gallery object that you inserted in a document, hold down Shift+Ctrl, and then drag a different gallery object onto the object. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp index 4893698a0f..751d644f30 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp @@ -31,21 +31,21 @@ pictures; scanning scanning pictures -Inserting a Scanned Image +Inserting a Scanned Image - To insert a scanned image, the scanner must be connected to your system and the scanner software drivers must be installed. - The scanner must support the TWAIN standard. + To insert a scanned image, the scanner must be connected to your system and the scanner software drivers must be installed. + The scanner must support the TWAIN standard. The scanner must support the SANE standard. - Click in the document where you want to insert the scanned image. + Click in the document where you want to insert the scanned image. - Choose Insert - Media - Scan, and choose the scanning source from the submenu. + Choose Insert - Media - Scan, and choose the scanning source from the submenu. - Follow the scanning instructions. + Follow the scanning instructions. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp index 7f2b423573..f9b657d136 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp @@ -38,17 +38,17 @@ rising outline levels changing;outline levels -Changing the Outline Level of Numbered and Bulleted Lists +Changing the Outline Level of Numbered and Bulleted Lists -To move a numbered or bulleted paragraph down one outline level, click at the beginning of the paragraph, and then press Tab. +To move a numbered or bulleted paragraph down one outline level, click at the beginning of the paragraph, and then press Tab. -To move a numbered or bulleted paragraph up one outline level, click at the beginning of the paragraph, and then press Shift+Tab. +To move a numbered or bulleted paragraph up one outline level, click at the beginning of the paragraph, and then press Shift+Tab. -To insert a tab between the number or bullet and the paragraph text, click at the beginning of the paragraph, and then press Command +To insert a tab between the number or bullet and the paragraph text, click at the beginning of the paragraph, and then press Command Ctrl+Tab. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp index 2077fc658b..e59c731818 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp @@ -30,12 +30,11 @@ bookmarks; positioning cursor jumping;to bookmarks -Going to Specific Bookmark +Going to Specific Bookmark - To go to a specific bookmark in your document, hold down Ctrl and click + To go to a specific bookmark in your document, hold down Ctrl and click right-click in the Page field on the Status Bar, and then choose the bookmark. - Insert Bookmark + Insert Bookmark \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp index be40dff939..60573fae1a 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp @@ -30,54 +30,52 @@ keyboard; accessibility $[officename] Writer accessibility; $[officename] Writer -Using Shortcut Keys ($[officename] Writer Accessibility) +Using Shortcut Keys ($[officename] Writer Accessibility) - Press the keys Option + Press the keys Option Alt+<underlined character> to open a menu. In an open menu, press the underlined character to run a command. For example, press Option Alt+I to open the Insert menu, and then T to insert a table. - To open a context menu, press Shift+F10. To close a context menu, press Escape. - To Insert Sections + To open a context menu, press Shift+F10. To close a context menu, press Escape. + To Insert Sections - Choose View - Toolbars - Insert to open the Insert toolbar. + Choose View - Toolbars - Insert to open the Insert toolbar. - Press F6 until the focus is on the + Press F6 until the focus is on the Insert toolbar. - Press the right arrow key until the Section icon is selected. + Press the right arrow key until the Section icon is selected. - Press the down arrow key, and then press the right arrow key to set the width of the section that you want to insert. + Press the down arrow key, and then press the right arrow key to set the width of the section that you want to insert. - Press Enter. + Press Enter. - Press F6 to place the cursor inside the document. + Press F6 to place the cursor inside the document. - To Insert Text Tables + To Insert Text Tables - Press F6 until the focus is on the + Press F6 until the focus is on the Standard toolbar. - Press the right arrow key until the Table icon is selected. + Press the right arrow key until the Table icon is selected. - Press the down arrow key, and then use the arrow keys to select the number of columns and rows to include in the table. + Press the down arrow key, and then use the arrow keys to select the number of columns and rows to include in the table. - Press Enter. + Press Enter. - Press F6 to place the cursor inside the document. + Press F6 to place the cursor inside the document. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp index 8e9fca3ee6..642a786f04 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp @@ -32,35 +32,34 @@ importing;styles from other files loading;styles from other files -Using Styles From Another Document or Template +Using Styles From Another Document or Template - You can import styles from another document or template into the current document. + You can import styles from another document or template into the current document. Choose View - Styles and Formatting to open the Styles and Formatting sidebar deck. - Click the arrow next to the New Style from Selection icon to open the submenu. + Click the arrow next to the New Style from Selection icon to open the submenu. - Choose Load styles. + Choose Load styles. - Use the check boxes at the bottom of the dialog to select the style types that you want to import. To replace styles in the current document that have the same name as the ones you are importing, select Overwrite. + Use the check boxes at the bottom of the dialog to select the style types that you want to import. To replace styles in the current document that have the same name as the ones you are importing, select Overwrite. - Do one of the following: + Do one of the following: somehow the following list disappeared, see issue 112471 -Click an entry in the Categories list, then click the template containing the styles that you want to use in the Templates list, and then click OK. +Click an entry in the Categories list, then click the template containing the styles that you want to use in the Templates list, and then click OK. -Click From File, locate the file containing the styles that you want to use, and then click name, and then click Open. +Click From File, locate the file containing the styles that you want to use, and then click name, and then click Open. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/main.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/main.xhp index 4a59749ded..cc24c149bf 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/main.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/main.xhp @@ -30,10 +30,10 @@ $[officename] Writer; instructions instructions; $[officename] Writer -Instructions for Using $[officename] Writer +Instructions for Using $[officename] Writer -Entering and Formatting Text +Entering and Formatting Text @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ -Automatically Entering and Formatting Text +Automatically Entering and Formatting Text @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ -Using Styles, Numbering Pages, Using Fields +Using Styles, Numbering Pages, Using Fields @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ -Editing Tables in Text +Editing Tables in Text @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ -Images, Drawings, ClipArt, Fontwork +Images, Drawings, ClipArt, Fontwork @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ -Table of Contents, Index +Table of Contents, Index @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ -Headings, Types of Numbering +Headings, Types of Numbering @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ -Headers, Footers, Footnotes +Headers, Footers, Footnotes @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ -Editing Other Objects in Text +Editing Other Objects in Text @@ -175,20 +175,20 @@ -Spelling, Dictionaries, Hyphenation +Spelling, Dictionaries, Hyphenation -Form Letters, Labels and Business Cards +Form Letters, Labels and Business Cards -Working with Documents +Working with Documents @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ -Miscellaneous +Miscellaneous diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp index 8c99bd65c0..7fba988fd3 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp @@ -37,19 +37,19 @@ jumping;to text elements overviews;Navigator in text documents MW added "pages;" -Navigator for Text Documents +Navigator for Text Documents - The Navigator displays the different parts of your document, such as headings, tables, frames, objects, or hyperlinks. + The Navigator displays the different parts of your document, such as headings, tables, frames, objects, or hyperlinks. - To open the Navigator, press F5. + To open the Navigator, press F5. - To quickly jump to a location in your document, double-click an item listed in the Navigator window or enter the respective page number in the spin box. + To quickly jump to a location in your document, double-click an item listed in the Navigator window or enter the respective page number in the spin box. - Navigator + Navigator diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp index 2bba083fce..eed375cdf2 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp @@ -30,28 +30,28 @@ non-printing text text; non-printable mw copied two entries from hidden_text.xhp -Creating Non-printing Text +Creating Non-printing Text MW created this guide from hidden_text.xhp -To create text that is not to be printed do the following: +To create text that is not to be printed do the following: - Choose Insert - Frame and click OK. + Choose Insert - Frame and click OK. - Enter text in the frame and if you want, resize the frame. + Enter text in the frame and if you want, resize the frame. Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties, and then click the Options tab. - In the Properties area, clear the Print check box. + In the Properties area, clear the Print check box. - Click OK. + Click OK.
- Hiding Text + Hiding Text
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp index 7c015cc976..82714d401d 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp @@ -32,21 +32,21 @@ dates;formatting automatically in tables recognition;numbers MW added "recognition;" -Turning Number Recognition On or Off in Tables +Turning Number Recognition On or Off in Tables - $[officename] can automatically format dates that you have entered into a table, according to the regional settings specified in your operating system. - Do one of the following: + $[officename] can automatically format dates that you have entered into a table, according to the regional settings specified in your operating system. + Do one of the following: - Right-click in a table cell and choose Number recognition. When this feature is on, a check mark is displayed in front of the Number recognition command. + Right-click in a table cell and choose Number recognition. When this feature is on, a check mark is displayed in front of the Number recognition command. - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table, and select or clear the Number recognition check box. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table, and select or clear the Number recognition check box. - %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table + %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp index 39cc15ea52..a64d19a830 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp @@ -34,46 +34,45 @@ interrupting numbered lists changing;starting numbers in lists MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;...", and deleted "modifying;..." -Modifying Numbering in a Numbered List +Modifying Numbering in a Numbered List - You can remove the numbering from a paragraph in a numbered list or change the number that a numbered list starts with. - If you want numbered headings, use the Tools - Outline Numbering menu command to assign a numbering to a paragraph style. Do not use the Numbering icon on the Formatting toolbar. - To Remove the Number From a Paragraph in a Numbered List + You can remove the numbering from a paragraph in a numbered list or change the number that a numbered list starts with. + If you want numbered headings, use the Tools - Outline Numbering menu command to assign a numbering to a paragraph style. Do not use the Numbering icon on the Formatting toolbar. + To Remove the Number From a Paragraph in a Numbered List - Click in front of the first character of the paragraph that you want to remove the numbering from. + Click in front of the first character of the paragraph that you want to remove the numbering from. - Do one of the following: + Do one of the following: -To remove the number while preserving the indent of the paragraph, press the Backspace key. +To remove the number while preserving the indent of the paragraph, press the Backspace key. -To remove the number and the indent of the paragraph, click the Numbering on/off icon on the Formatting Bar. If you save the document in HTML format, a separate numbered list is created for the numbered paragraphs that follow the current paragraph. +To remove the number and the indent of the paragraph, click the Numbering on/off icon on the Formatting Bar. If you save the document in HTML format, a separate numbered list is created for the numbered paragraphs that follow the current paragraph. - To Change the Number That a Numbered List Starts With + To Change the Number That a Numbered List Starts With - Click anywhere in the numbered list. + Click anywhere in the numbered list. - Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click the Options tab. + Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click the Options tab. - Enter the number you want the list to start with in the Start at box. + Enter the number you want the list to start with in the Start at box. - Click OK. + Click OK. @@ -83,6 +82,6 @@ - Wiki page about numbering paragraphs by styles + Wiki page about numbering paragraphs by styles diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp index f7e181e582..b958e2ca26 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp @@ -34,41 +34,40 @@ manual page breaks tables;deleting page breaks before MW added "tables;" -Inserting and Deleting Page Breaks +Inserting and Deleting Page Breaks - To Insert a Manual Page Break + To Insert a Manual Page Break - Click in your document where you want the new page to begin. + Click in your document where you want the new page to begin. - Press Ctrl+Enter. + Press Ctrl+Enter. - To Delete a Manual Page Break + To Delete a Manual Page Break - Click in front of the first character on the page that follows the manual page break. + Click in front of the first character on the page that follows the manual page break. - Press Backspace. + Press Backspace. - To Delete a Manual Page Break That Occurs Before a Table + To Delete a Manual Page Break That Occurs Before a Table - Right-click in the table, and choose Table. + Right-click in the table, and choose Table. - Click the Text Flow tab. + Click the Text Flow tab. - Clear the Break check box. + Clear the Break check box. - Insert Break dialog + Insert Break dialog \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp index 5cb51dbbe1..968fc9f821 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp @@ -35,84 +35,84 @@ inserting;page numbers styles;page numbers mw inserted six index entriesmw added "styles;" -Page Numbers +Page Numbers - In Writer, a page number is a field that you can insert into your text. - To Insert Page Numbers + In Writer, a page number is a field that you can insert into your text. + To Insert Page Numbers Choose Insert - Field - Page Number to insert a page number at the current cursor position. - If you see the text "Page number" instead of the number, choose View - Field names. - However, these fields will change position when you add or remove text. So it is best to insert the page number field into a header or footer that has the same position and that is repeated on every page. + If you see the text "Page number" instead of the number, choose View - Field names. + However, these fields will change position when you add or remove text. So it is best to insert the page number field into a header or footer that has the same position and that is repeated on every page. Choose Insert - Header and Footer - Header - (name of page style) or Insert - Header and Footer - Footer - (name of page style) to add a header or footer to all pages with the current page style. - To Start With a Defined Page Number - Now you want some more control on page numbers. You are writing a text document that should start with page number 12. + To Start With a Defined Page Number + Now you want some more control on page numbers. You are writing a text document that should start with page number 12. - Click into the first paragraph of your document. + Click into the first paragraph of your document. - Choose Format - Paragraph - Text flow. + Choose Format - Paragraph - Text flow. - In the Breaks area, enable Insert. Enable With Page Style just to be able to set the new Page number. Click OK. + In the Breaks area, enable Insert. Enable With Page Style just to be able to set the new Page number. Click OK. - The new page number is an attribute of the first paragraph of the page. - To Format the Page Number Style - You want roman page numbers running i, ii, iii, iv, and so on. + The new page number is an attribute of the first paragraph of the page. + To Format the Page Number Style + You want roman page numbers running i, ii, iii, iv, and so on. - Double-click directly before the page number field. You see the Edit Fields dialog. + Double-click directly before the page number field. You see the Edit Fields dialog. - Select a number format and click OK. + Select a number format and click OK. - Using Different Page Number Styles - You need some pages with the roman numbering style, followed by the remaining pages in another style. - In Writer, you will need different page styles. The first page style has a footer with a page number field formatted for roman numbers. The following page style has a footer with a page number field formatted in another look. - Both page styles must be separated by a page break. In Writer, you can have automatic page breaks and manually inserted page breaks. + Using Different Page Number Styles + You need some pages with the roman numbering style, followed by the remaining pages in another style. + In Writer, you will need different page styles. The first page style has a footer with a page number field formatted for roman numbers. The following page style has a footer with a page number field formatted in another look. + Both page styles must be separated by a page break. In Writer, you can have automatic page breaks and manually inserted page breaks. - An automatic page break appears at the end of a page when the page style has a different "next style". - For example, the "First Page" page style has "Default" as the next style. To see this, you may press Command+TF11 to open the Styles and Formatting window, click the Page Styles icon, right-click the First Page entry. Choose Modify from the context menu. On the Organizer tab, you can see the "next style". + An automatic page break appears at the end of a page when the page style has a different "next style". + For example, the "First Page" page style has "Default" as the next style. To see this, you may press Command+TF11 to open the Styles and Formatting window, click the Page Styles icon, right-click the First Page entry. Choose Modify from the context menu. On the Organizer tab, you can see the "next style". - A manually inserted page break can be applied without or with a change of page styles. - If you just press Ctrl+Enter, you apply a page break without a change of styles. - If you choose Insert - Manual break, you can insert a page break without or with a change of style or with a change of page number. + A manually inserted page break can be applied without or with a change of page styles. + If you just press Ctrl+Enter, you apply a page break without a change of styles. + If you choose Insert - Manual break, you can insert a page break without or with a change of style or with a change of page number. - It depends on your document what is best: to use a manually inserted page break between page styles, or to use an automatic change. If you just need one title page with a different style than the other pages, you can use the automatic method: - To Apply a Different Page Style to the First Page + It depends on your document what is best: to use a manually inserted page break between page styles, or to use an automatic change. If you just need one title page with a different style than the other pages, you can use the automatic method: + To Apply a Different Page Style to the First Page - Click into the first page of your document. + Click into the first page of your document. Choose View - Styles and Formatting. - In the Styles and Formatting window, click the Page Styles icon. + In the Styles and Formatting window, click the Page Styles icon. - Double-click the "First Page" style. + Double-click the "First Page" style. - Now your title page has the style "First Page", and the next pages automatically have the "Default" style. - You can now for example insert a footer for the "Default" page atyle only, or insert footers in both page styles, but with differently formatted page number fields. - To Apply a Manually Inserted Page Style Change + Now your title page has the style "First Page", and the next pages automatically have the "Default" style. + You can now for example insert a footer for the "Default" page atyle only, or insert footers in both page styles, but with differently formatted page number fields. + To Apply a Manually Inserted Page Style Change - Click at the start of the first paragraph on the page where a different page style will be applied. + Click at the start of the first paragraph on the page where a different page style will be applied. - Choose Insert - Manual Break. You see the Insert Break dialog. + Choose Insert - Manual Break. You see the Insert Break dialog. - In the Style list box, select a page style. You may set a new page number, too. Click OK. + In the Style list box, select a page style. You may set a new page number, too. Click OK. - The selected page style will be used from the current paragraph to the next page break with style. You may need to create the new page style first. + The selected page style will be used from the current paragraph to the next page break with style. You may need to create the new page style first. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp index 3a6e3614c2..59c4e978d9 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp @@ -39,78 +39,78 @@ sideways orientation of pages scope of page styles MW changed "page styles;..." and added one entry -Changing Page Orientation +Changing Page Orientation - All page properties for Writer text documents, like for example the page orientation, are defined by page styles. By default, a new text document uses the “Default” page style for all pages. If you open an existing text document, different page styles may have been applied to the different pages. - It is important to know that changes that you apply to a page property will only affect the pages that use the current page style. The current page style is listed in the Status Bar at the lower window border. - To Change the Page Orientation for All Pages - If your text document consists only of pages with the same page style, you can change the page properties directly: + All page properties for Writer text documents, like for example the page orientation, are defined by page styles. By default, a new text document uses the “Default” page style for all pages. If you open an existing text document, different page styles may have been applied to the different pages. + It is important to know that changes that you apply to a page property will only affect the pages that use the current page style. The current page style is listed in the Status Bar at the lower window border. + To Change the Page Orientation for All Pages + If your text document consists only of pages with the same page style, you can change the page properties directly: - Choose Format - Page. + Choose Format - Page. - Click the Page tab. + Click the Page tab. - Under Paper format, select “Portrait” or “Landscape”. + Under Paper format, select “Portrait” or “Landscape”. - Click OK. + Click OK. - To Change the Page Orientation Only for Some Pages - $[officename] uses page styles to specify the orientation of the pages in a document. Page styles define more page properties, as for example header and footer or page margins. You can either change the “Default” page style for the current document, or you can define own page styles and apply those page styles to any parts of your text. - At the end of this help page, we'll discuss the scope of page styles in detail. If you are unsure about the page style concept, please read the section at the end of this page. - Unlike character styles or paragraph styles, the page styles don't know a hierarchy. You can create a new page style based on the properties of an existing page style, but when you later change the source style, the new page style does not automatically inherit the changes. - To change the page orientation for all pages that share the same page style, you first need a page style, then apply that style: + To Change the Page Orientation Only for Some Pages + $[officename] uses page styles to specify the orientation of the pages in a document. Page styles define more page properties, as for example header and footer or page margins. You can either change the “Default” page style for the current document, or you can define own page styles and apply those page styles to any parts of your text. + At the end of this help page, we'll discuss the scope of page styles in detail. If you are unsure about the page style concept, please read the section at the end of this page. + Unlike character styles or paragraph styles, the page styles don't know a hierarchy. You can create a new page style based on the properties of an existing page style, but when you later change the source style, the new page style does not automatically inherit the changes. + To change the page orientation for all pages that share the same page style, you first need a page style, then apply that style: Choose View - Styles and Formatting. - Click the Page Styles icon. + Click the Page Styles icon. - Right-click a page style and choose New. The new page style initially gets all properties of the selected page style. + Right-click a page style and choose New. The new page style initially gets all properties of the selected page style. - On the Organizer tab page, type a name for the page style in the Name box, for example "My Landscape". + On the Organizer tab page, type a name for the page style in the Name box, for example "My Landscape". - In the Next Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page that follows a page with the new style. See the section about the scope of page styles at the end of this help page. + In the Next Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page that follows a page with the new style. See the section about the scope of page styles at the end of this help page. - Click the Page tab. + Click the Page tab. - Under Paper format, select “Portrait” or “Landscape”. + Under Paper format, select “Portrait” or “Landscape”. - Click OK. + Click OK. - Now you have defined a proper page style with the name "My Landscape". To apply the new style, double-click the "My Landscape" page style in the Styles and Formatting window. All pages in the current scope of page styles will be changed. If you defined the "next style" to be a different style, only the first page of the current scope of page styles will be changed. + Now you have defined a proper page style with the name "My Landscape". To apply the new style, double-click the "My Landscape" page style in the Styles and Formatting window. All pages in the current scope of page styles will be changed. If you defined the "next style" to be a different style, only the first page of the current scope of page styles will be changed.
- The Scope of Page Styles - You should be aware of the scope of page styles in %PRODUCTNAME. Which pages of your text document get affected by editing a page style? - One Page Long Styles - A page style can be defined to span one page only. The “First Page” style is an example. You set this property by defining another page style to be the "next style", on the Format - Page - Organizer tab page. - A one page long style starts from the lower border of the current page style range up to the next page break. The next page break appears automatically when the text flows to the next page, which is sometimes called a "soft page break". Alternatively, you can insert a manual page break. - To insert a manual page break at the cursor position, press Ctrl+Enter or choose Insert - Manual Break and just click OK. - Manually Defined Range of a Page style - The “Default” page style does not set a different "next style" on the Format - Page - Organizer tab page. Instead, the "next style" is set also to be “Default”. All page styles that are followed by the same page style can span multiple pages. The lower and upper borders of the page style range are defined by "page breaks with style". All the pages between any two "page breaks with style" use the same page style. - You can insert a "page break with style" directly at the cursor position. Alternatively, you can apply the "page break with style" property to a paragraph or to a paragraph style. - Perform any one of the following commands: + The Scope of Page Styles + You should be aware of the scope of page styles in %PRODUCTNAME. Which pages of your text document get affected by editing a page style? + One Page Long Styles + A page style can be defined to span one page only. The “First Page” style is an example. You set this property by defining another page style to be the "next style", on the Format - Page - Organizer tab page. + A one page long style starts from the lower border of the current page style range up to the next page break. The next page break appears automatically when the text flows to the next page, which is sometimes called a "soft page break". Alternatively, you can insert a manual page break. + To insert a manual page break at the cursor position, press Ctrl+Enter or choose Insert - Manual Break and just click OK. + Manually Defined Range of a Page style + The “Default” page style does not set a different "next style" on the Format - Page - Organizer tab page. Instead, the "next style" is set also to be “Default”. All page styles that are followed by the same page style can span multiple pages. The lower and upper borders of the page style range are defined by "page breaks with style". All the pages between any two "page breaks with style" use the same page style. + You can insert a "page break with style" directly at the cursor position. Alternatively, you can apply the "page break with style" property to a paragraph or to a paragraph style. + Perform any one of the following commands: - To insert a "page break with style" at the cursor position, choose Insert - Manual Break, select a Style name from the listbox, and click OK. + To insert a "page break with style" at the cursor position, choose Insert - Manual Break, select a Style name from the listbox, and click OK. - To apply the "page break with style" property to the current paragraph, choose Format - Paragraph - Text Flow. In the Breaks area, activate Enable and With Page Style. Select a page style name from the listbox. + To apply the "page break with style" property to the current paragraph, choose Format - Paragraph - Text Flow. In the Breaks area, activate Enable and With Page Style. Select a page style name from the listbox. - To apply the "page break with style" property to the current paragraph style, right-click the current paragraph. Choose Edit Paragraph Style from the context menu. Click the Text Flow tab. In the Breaks area, activate Enable and With Page Style. Select a page style name from the listbox. + To apply the "page break with style" property to the current paragraph style, right-click the current paragraph. Choose Edit Paragraph Style from the context menu. Click the Text Flow tab. In the Breaks area, activate Enable and With Page Style. Select a page style name from the listbox. To apply the "page break with style" property to an arbitrary paragraph style, choose View - Styles and Formatting. Click the Paragraph Styles icon. Right-click the name of the paragraph style you want to modify and choose Modify. Click the Text Flow tab. In the Breaks area, activate Enable and With Page Style. Select a page style name from the listbox. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp index a28f89574b..e6245e5935 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp @@ -31,40 +31,40 @@ booklet printing brochures; printing individual -Printing a Brochure +Printing a Brochure - You can print a Writer document as a brochure or a booklet. That is, Writer prints two pages on each side of the paper, so that when you fold the paper, you can read the document as a book. - When you create a document that you want to print as a brochure, use portrait orientation for the pages. Writer applies the brochure layout when you print the document. - To Print a Brochure + You can print a Writer document as a brochure or a booklet. That is, Writer prints two pages on each side of the paper, so that when you fold the paper, you can read the document as a book. + When you create a document that you want to print as a brochure, use portrait orientation for the pages. Writer applies the brochure layout when you print the document. + To Print a Brochure - Choose File - Print. + Choose File - Print. - In the Print dialog, click Properties. + In the Print dialog, click Properties. - In the properties dialog for your printer, set the paper orientation to landscape. + In the properties dialog for your printer, set the paper orientation to landscape. - If your printer prints duplex, and because brochures always print in landscape mode, you should use the "duplex - short edge" setting in your printer setup dialog. + If your printer prints duplex, and because brochures always print in landscape mode, you should use the "duplex - short edge" setting in your printer setup dialog. - Return to Print dialog, and click the Page Layout tab page. + Return to Print dialog, and click the Page Layout tab page. - Select Brochure. + Select Brochure. - For a printer that automatically prints on both sides of a page, specify to include "All pages". + For a printer that automatically prints on both sides of a page, specify to include "All pages". - Click OK. + Click OK. - If %PRODUCTNAME prints the pages in the wrong order, open the Options tab page, select Print in reverse page order, and then print the document again. + If %PRODUCTNAME prints the pages in the wrong order, open the Options tab page, select Print in reverse page order, and then print the document again. \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp index 6f21a2b33a..2a0fd9e23a 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp @@ -33,23 +33,23 @@ book view pages;previews MW changed "page views" to "pages;previews" -Previewing a Page Before Printing +Previewing a Page Before Printing - Choose File - Print Preview. + Choose File - Print Preview. - Use the zoom icons on the Print Preview bar to reduce or enlarge the view of the page. - To print your document scaled down, set the print options on the Page Layout tab page of the File - Print dialog. + Use the zoom icons on the Print Preview bar to reduce or enlarge the view of the page. + To print your document scaled down, set the print options on the Page Layout tab page of the File - Print dialog. - Use the arrow keys or the arrow icons on the Print Preview bar to scroll through the document. + Use the arrow keys or the arrow icons on the Print Preview bar to scroll through the document.
- File - Print Preview. + File - Print Preview.
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp index 3778461d87..8619c004d0 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp @@ -33,34 +33,33 @@ printing;multiple pages per sheet reduced printing of multiple pages MW changed "overviews;" -Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet +Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet - On the Page Layout tab page of the File - Print dialog, you have the option to print multiple pages on one sheet. + On the Page Layout tab page of the File - Print dialog, you have the option to print multiple pages on one sheet. - Choose File - Print and click the Page Layout tab. + Choose File - Print and click the Page Layout tab. - Do one of the following: + Do one of the following: - To print two pages side by side on the same sheet, select "2" in the Pages per sheet box. + To print two pages side by side on the same sheet, select "2" in the Pages per sheet box. - To print multiple pages on the same sheet, select the number of pages per sheet and optionally set the order of pages. The small preview shows the arrangement of pages. + To print multiple pages on the same sheet, select the number of pages per sheet and optionally set the order of pages. The small preview shows the arrangement of pages. - Click Print. + Click Print.
- File - Print Preview + File - Print Preview
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp index 178bed17b8..aac6b56468 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp @@ -30,24 +30,24 @@ ordering;printing in reverse order printing; reverse order -Printing in Reverse Order +Printing in Reverse Order - Choose File - Print. + Choose File - Print. - Click the General tab. + Click the General tab. - Choose Print in reverse page order. + Choose Print in reverse page order. - Click Print. + Click Print. - Printing + Printing diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp index a5061e036f..82a08b7be0 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp @@ -35,35 +35,35 @@ spacing;register-true text formatting;register-true text -Printing Register-true +Printing Register-true - To Set a Document to Register-True Printing + To Set a Document to Register-True Printing - Select the whole document. + Select the whole document. - Choose Format - Page - Page. + Choose Format - Page - Page. In the Register-true section, select the Activate checkbox and click OK. - All the paragraphs in the document will be printed register-true, unless otherwise specified. - To Exempt Paragraphs From Register-True Printing + All the paragraphs in the document will be printed register-true, unless otherwise specified. + To Exempt Paragraphs From Register-True Printing - Do one of the following: - Select all the paragraphs you want to exempt, then choose Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing. - Open the Styles and Formatting window, click the Paragraph Style you want to exempt, right-click that style, choose Modify. In the dialog, click the Indents & Spacing tab. + Do one of the following: + Select all the paragraphs you want to exempt, then choose Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing. + Open the Styles and Formatting window, click the Paragraph Style you want to exempt, right-click that style, choose Modify. In the dialog, click the Indents & Spacing tab. In the Register-true section, clear the Activate checkbox.
- Register-true + Register-true
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp index d7f60e50a1..645d17174a 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp @@ -33,29 +33,28 @@ copies;removing line breaks paragraph marks;removing MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;...".MW changed "paragraph marks;..." -Removing Line Breaks +Removing Line Breaks - Use the AutoCorrect feature to remove line breaks that occur within sentences. Unwanted line breaks can occur when you copy text from another source and paste it into a text document. - This AutoCorrect feature only works on text that is formatted with the "Default" paragraph style. + Use the AutoCorrect feature to remove line breaks that occur within sentences. Unwanted line breaks can occur when you copy text from another source and paste it into a text document. + This AutoCorrect feature only works on text that is formatted with the "Default" paragraph style. Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options. - On the Options tab, ensure that Combine single line paragraphs if length greater than 50% is selected. To change the minimum percentage for the line length, double-click the option in the list, and then enter a new percentage. + On the Options tab, ensure that Combine single line paragraphs if length greater than 50% is selected. To change the minimum percentage for the line length, double-click the option in the list, and then enter a new percentage. - Click OK. + Click OK. - Select the text containing the line breaks that you want to remove. + Select the text containing the line breaks that you want to remove. - In the Apply Style box on the Formatting bar, choose “Default”. + In the Apply Style box on the Formatting bar, choose “Default”. - Choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply. + Choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp index cf69294a77..0c63672ebe 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp @@ -35,15 +35,14 @@ formatting;exiting direct formatting exiting;direct formatting mw made "exiting..." a two level entry -Resetting Font Attributes +Resetting Font Attributes - You can quickly exit manual formatting by pressing Ctrl+Shift+X. For example, if you have pressed Ctrl+B to apply the bold typeface to the text that you type, press Ctrl+Shift+X to return to the default character format of the paragraph. + You can quickly exit manual formatting by pressing Ctrl+Shift+X. For example, if you have pressed Ctrl+B to apply the bold typeface to the text that you type, press Ctrl+Shift+X to return to the default character format of the paragraph. - To reset all direct formatting of existing text, select that text, then choose the menu command Format - Clear Direct Formatting. + To reset all direct formatting of existing text, select that text, then choose the menu command Format - Clear Direct Formatting. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp index 3ab694006b..45c0fffdb2 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp @@ -36,15 +36,15 @@ docking; Navigator window resizing;windows -Docking and Resizing Windows +Docking and Resizing Windows -You can dock, undock and resize most $[officename] program windows such as the Navigator or the Styles and Formatting window. +You can dock, undock and resize most $[officename] program windows such as the Navigator or the Styles and Formatting window. -To dock or undock the Navigator or the Styles and Formatting window, hold down the Ctrl key and double-click on a gray area in the window. Alternatively, press Ctrl+Shift+F10. +To dock or undock the Navigator or the Styles and Formatting window, hold down the Ctrl key and double-click on a gray area in the window. Alternatively, press Ctrl+Shift+F10. -To resize the window, drag a corner or an edge of the window. +To resize the window, drag a corner or an edge of the window. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp index ee10c20b6c..89abdde39a 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp @@ -37,22 +37,22 @@ hiding;rulers adjusting page margins and cell widths mw made "indent settings..." a two level entry and cut "changing;indents" -Using Rulers +Using Rulers - To show or hide rulers, choose View - Ruler. To show the vertical ruler, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View, and then select Vertical ruler in the Ruler area. - Adjusting Page Margins - The margins of a page are indicated by the filled areas at the ends of the rulers. - Changing Indents - Indents are adjusted with the three small triangles on the horizontal ruler. + To show or hide rulers, choose View - Ruler. To show the vertical ruler, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View, and then select Vertical ruler in the Ruler area. + Adjusting Page Margins + The margins of a page are indicated by the filled areas at the ends of the rulers. + Changing Indents + Indents are adjusted with the three small triangles on the horizontal ruler. - To change the left or the right paragraph indent, select the paragraph(s) that you want change the indent for, drag the bottom left or the bottom right triangle on the horizontal ruler to a new location. + To change the left or the right paragraph indent, select the paragraph(s) that you want change the indent for, drag the bottom left or the bottom right triangle on the horizontal ruler to a new location. - To change the first line indent of a selected paragraph, drag the top left triangle on the horizontal ruler to a new location. + To change the first line indent of a selected paragraph, drag the top left triangle on the horizontal ruler to a new location. - You can also double-click anywhere on the horizontal ruler, and adjust the indents in the Paragraph dialog. + You can also double-click anywhere on the horizontal ruler, and adjust the indents in the Paragraph dialog.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp index 0fcfab70bf..3ce913c3b7 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp @@ -35,50 +35,48 @@ invisible characters;finding paragraph marks;searching mw deleted "wildcards;" and inserted wildcards crossreferencemw added "paragraph marks;" -Using Wildcards in Text Searches +Using Wildcards in Text Searches - Wildcards or placeholders can be used to search for some unspecified or even invisible characters. - You can use wildcards when you find and replace text in a document. For example, "s.n" finds "sun" and "son". + Wildcards or placeholders can be used to search for some unspecified or even invisible characters. + You can use wildcards when you find and replace text in a document. For example, "s.n" finds "sun" and "son". - Choose Edit - Find & Replace. + Choose Edit - Find & Replace. - Click More Options to expand the dialog. + Click More Options to expand the dialog. - Select the Regular expressions check box. + Select the Regular expressions check box. In the Find box, type the search term and the wildcard(s) that you want to use in your search. - Click Find Next or Find All. + Click Find Next or Find All. - Regular Expression Examples + Regular Expression Examples - The wildcard for a single character is a period (.). + The wildcard for a single character is a period (.). - The wildcard for zero or more occurrences of the previous character is an asterisk. For example: "123*" finds "12" "123", and "1233". + The wildcard for zero or more occurrences of the previous character is an asterisk. For example: "123*" finds "12" "123", and "1233". - The wildcard combination to search for zero or more occurrences of any character is a period and asterisk (.*). + The wildcard combination to search for zero or more occurrences of any character is a period and asterisk (.*). - The wildcard for the end of a paragraph is a dollar sign ($). The wildcard character combination for the start of a paragraph is a caret and a period (^.). + The wildcard for the end of a paragraph is a dollar sign ($). The wildcard character combination for the start of a paragraph is a caret and a period (^.). - The wildcard for a tab character is \t. + The wildcard for a tab character is \t. - A search using a regular expression will work only within one paragraph. To search using a regular expression in more than one paragraph, do a separate search in each paragraph. + A search using a regular expression will work only within one paragraph. To search using a regular expression in more than one paragraph, do a separate search in each paragraph.
- List of Wildcards + List of Wildcards
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp index bbdd077e12..85f8398cd4 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp @@ -36,34 +36,33 @@ converting;sections, into normal text hiding;sections ufi: added two deleting sections entries -Editing Sections +Editing Sections - You can protect, hide, and convert sections to normal text in your document. + You can protect, hide, and convert sections to normal text in your document. - Choose Format - Sections. + Choose Format - Sections. - In the Section list, click the section you want to modify. You can press Command + In the Section list, click the section you want to modify. You can press Command Ctrl+A to select all sections in the list, and you can Shift+click or Command Ctrl+click to select some sections. - Do one of the following: + Do one of the following: -To convert a section into normal text, click Remove. +To convert a section into normal text, click Remove. -To make a section read-only, select the Protected check box in the Write Protection area. +To make a section read-only, select the Protected check box in the Write Protection area. -To hide a section, select the Hide check box in the Hide area. +To hide a section, select the Hide check box in the Hide area. removed ordered list with startvalue 4, not sure if such a list will survive all transformations @@ -71,7 +70,7 @@ - Format - Sections - Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME Writer + Format - Sections + Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME Writer diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp index d7fdf9d792..bb458b6896 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp @@ -33,36 +33,34 @@ text columns sections; columns in/use of mw changed a typo in "multicolumn"mw deleted "sections;using" and changed "section;columns in" -Using Sections +Using Sections - Sections are named blocks of text, including graphics or objects, that you can use in a number of ways: + Sections are named blocks of text, including graphics or objects, that you can use in a number of ways: - To prevent text from being edited. + To prevent text from being edited. - To show or hide text. + To show or hide text. - To reuse text and graphics from other $[officename] documents. + To reuse text and graphics from other $[officename] documents. - To insert sections of text that uses a different column layout than the current page style. + To insert sections of text that uses a different column layout than the current page style. - A section contains at least one paragraph. When you select a text and create a section, a paragraph break is automatically inserted at the end of the text. - You can insert sections from a text document, or an entire text document as a section into another text document. You can also insert sections from a text document as links in another text document, or in the same document. - To insert a new paragraph immediately before or after a section, click in front or behind the section, and then press Option + A section contains at least one paragraph. When you select a text and create a section, a paragraph break is automatically inserted at the end of the text. + You can insert sections from a text document, or an entire text document as a section into another text document. You can also insert sections from a text document as links in another text document, or in the same document. + To insert a new paragraph immediately before or after a section, click in front or behind the section, and then press Option Alt+Enter. - Sections and Columns - You can insert sections into an existing section. For example, you can insert a section containing two columns into a section that contains one column. - A section layout, for example on the number of columns, has priority over the page layout defined in a page style. + Sections and Columns + You can insert sections into an existing section. For example, you can insert a section containing two columns into a section that contains one column. + A section layout, for example on the number of columns, has priority over the page layout defined in a page style.
- DDE + DDE
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp index 62f1f5aa57..2a1115f1a8 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp @@ -33,50 +33,50 @@ bold;formatting while typing shortcut keys;bold formatting -Applying Text Formatting While You Type +Applying Text Formatting While You Type - To apply bold formatting + To apply bold formatting - Select the text that you want to format. + Select the text that you want to format. - Press Command + Press Command Ctrl+B. - You can also press Command + You can also press Command Ctrl+B, type the text that you want to format in bold, and then press Command Ctrl+B when you are finished. - To apply italic formatting + To apply italic formatting - Select the text that you want to format. + Select the text that you want to format. - Press Command + Press Command Ctrl+I. - You can also press Command + You can also press Command Ctrl+I, type the text that you want to format in italic, and then press Command Ctrl+I when you are finished. - To underline text + To underline text - Select the text that you want to underline. + Select the text that you want to underline. - Press Command + Press Command Ctrl+U. - You can also press Command + You can also press Command Ctrl+U, type the text that you want underlined, and then press Command Ctrl+U when you are finished. - Keyboard shortcut for text documents - Keyboard shortcut in $[officename] + Keyboard shortcut for text documents + Keyboard shortcut in $[officename] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp index 439c121788..4db3ddc463 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp @@ -33,26 +33,26 @@ disabling;smart tags installing;smart tags MW moved 2 index entries from shared/01/06040700.xhp, inverted "smart tags;options", made "smart tags;" a one level entry and added 2 entries -Using Smart Tags +Using Smart Tags - Smart Tags provide additional information and functionality to specified words in a Writer document. The available features can be different for different Smart Tags extensions. - Installing Smart Tags - Smart Tags can be supplied as extensions to %PRODUCTNAME Writer. - To install a Smart Tag, do one of the following: + Smart Tags provide additional information and functionality to specified words in a Writer document. The available features can be different for different Smart Tags extensions. + Installing Smart Tags + Smart Tags can be supplied as extensions to %PRODUCTNAME Writer. + To install a Smart Tag, do one of the following: - Save the *.oxt extension file to your harddrive, then double-click the *.oxt file in your file manager. Alternatively, in %PRODUCTNAME choose Tools - Extension Manager to open the Extension Manager, click Add and browse to the file. + Save the *.oxt extension file to your harddrive, then double-click the *.oxt file in your file manager. Alternatively, in %PRODUCTNAME choose Tools - Extension Manager to open the Extension Manager, click Add and browse to the file. - Click a Smart Tag *.oxt file link on a web page and open the link with the default application. This requires a properly configured Web browser. + Click a Smart Tag *.oxt file link on a web page and open the link with the default application. This requires a properly configured Web browser. - Smart Tags Menu - Any text in a Writer document can be marked with a Smart Tag, by default a magenta colored underline. You can change the color in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Application Colors. - When you point to a Smart Tag, a tip help informs you to Ctrl-click to open the Smart Tags menu. If you don't use a mouse, position the cursor inside the marked text and open the context menu by Shift+F10. - In the Smart Tags menu you see the available actions that are defined for this Smart Tag. Choose an option from the menu. The Smart Tags Options command opens the Smart Tags page of Tools - Autocorrect Options. - To Enable and Disable Smart Tags - When you have installed at least one Smart Tags extension, you see the Smart Tags page in Tools - Autocorrect Options. Use this dialog to enable or disable Smart Tags and to manage the installed tags. - Text that is recognized as a Smart Tag is not checked by the automatic spellcheck. + Smart Tags Menu + Any text in a Writer document can be marked with a Smart Tag, by default a magenta colored underline. You can change the color in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Application Colors. + When you point to a Smart Tag, a tip help informs you to Ctrl-click to open the Smart Tags menu. If you don't use a mouse, position the cursor inside the marked text and open the context menu by Shift+F10. + In the Smart Tags menu you see the available actions that are defined for this Smart Tag. Choose an option from the menu. The Smart Tags Options command opens the Smart Tags page of Tools - Autocorrect Options. + To Enable and Disable Smart Tags + When you have installed at least one Smart Tags extension, you see the Smart Tags page in Tools - Autocorrect Options. Use this dialog to enable or disable Smart Tags and to manage the installed tags. + Text that is recognized as a Smart Tag is not checked by the automatic spellcheck. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp index 736d100c15..00fafcc4a5 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp @@ -34,27 +34,26 @@ formats; copying and pasting text formats; copying and pasting mw changed "copying;" -Applying Styles in Fill Format Mode +Applying Styles in Fill Format Mode - You can quickly apply styles, such as paragraph and character styles, in your document by using the Fill Format Mode in the Styles and Formatting window. + You can quickly apply styles, such as paragraph and character styles, in your document by using the Fill Format Mode in the Styles and Formatting window. Choose View - Styles and Formatting. - Click the icon of the style category that you want to apply. + Click the icon of the style category that you want to apply. - Click the style, and then click the Fill Format Mode icon + Click the style, and then click the Fill Format Mode icon Icon in the Styles and Formatting window. - Move the mouse pointer to where you want to apply the style in the document, and click. To apply the style to more than one item, drag to select the items, and then release. + Move the mouse pointer to where you want to apply the style in the document, and click. To apply the style to more than one item, drag to select the items, and then release. - Press Esc when finished. + Press Esc when finished.
@@ -64,7 +63,7 @@ - Styles and Formatting + Styles and Formatting
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp index 7e38f5afee..2211db5e95 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp @@ -33,32 +33,31 @@ Styles and Formatting window; updating from selections updating; styles, from selections -Updating Styles From Selections +Updating Styles From Selections Choose View - Styles and Formatting. - Click the icon of the style category that you want to update.UFI: use "category" for consistent wording, see #i21144# + Click the icon of the style category that you want to update.UFI: use "category" for consistent wording, see #i21144# - In the document, click from where you want to copy the updated style. For example, click a paragraph to which you applied some manual formatting that you want to copy now. + In the document, click from where you want to copy the updated style. For example, click a paragraph to which you applied some manual formatting that you want to copy now. - In the Styles and Formatting window, click the style that you want to update. + In the Styles and Formatting window, click the style that you want to update. - Click the arrow next to the New Style from Selection icon and choose Update Style from the submenu. + Click the arrow next to the New Style from Selection icon and choose Update Style from the submenu. - Only the manually formatted attributes of the text at the cursor position in the document will be added to the style that is selected in the Styles and Formatting window. Any attributes that were applied as part of a style will not be added to the updated style. + Only the manually formatted attributes of the text at the cursor position in the document will be added to the style that is selected in the Styles and Formatting window. Any attributes that were applied as part of a style will not be added to the updated style.
- Styles and Formatting + Styles and Formatting
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp index c26c5394da..d59a6856c7 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp @@ -32,29 +32,29 @@ subscript text characters;subscript and superscript -Making Text Superscript or Subscript +Making Text Superscript or Subscript - Select the text that you want to make superscript or subscript. + Select the text that you want to make superscript or subscript. - Do one of the following: + Do one of the following: somehow the following list disappeared, see issue 112471, and this remained: (list type="unordered"/) (replaced brackets) -Choose Format - Character - Position, and then select Superscript or Subscript. +Choose Format - Character - Position, and then select Superscript or Subscript. -Press CommandCtrl+Shift+P to make the text superscript, and CommandCtrl+Shift+B to make the text subscript. +Press CommandCtrl+Shift+P to make the text superscript, and CommandCtrl+Shift+B to make the text subscript. - Format - Character - Position - Tools - AutoCorrect - Replace + Format - Character - Position + Tools - AutoCorrect - Replace \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp index 09be91d23f..0a64000148 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp @@ -33,26 +33,26 @@ splitting cells;by menu command merging;cells mw made "cell merges;" a one level entry -Merging and Splitting Cells +Merging and Splitting Cells mw created this file out of the shared guide "table_cellmerge.xhp", see also bug #63021 - You can select adjacent cells, then merge them into a single cell. Conversely, you can take a large cell and divide it into individual cells. - To Merge Cells + You can select adjacent cells, then merge them into a single cell. Conversely, you can take a large cell and divide it into individual cells. + To Merge Cells - Select the adjacent cells. + Select the adjacent cells. - Choose Table - Merge Cells. + Choose Table - Merge Cells. - To Split Cells + To Split Cells - Place the cursor in the cell to be split. + Place the cursor in the cell to be split. - Choose Table - Split Cells. - A dialog allows you to split the cell into two or more cells, horizontally or vertically. + Choose Table - Split Cells. + A dialog allows you to split the cell into two or more cells, horizontally or vertically. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cells.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cells.xhp index 49ffa2cff3..0c42b2ab0d 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cells.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cells.xhp @@ -36,34 +36,33 @@ deleting;rows/columns, by keyboard inserting;rows/columns, by keyboard MW changed "adding;" to "inserting;" -Adding or Deleting a Row or Column to a Table Using the Keyboard +Adding or Deleting a Row or Column to a Table Using the Keyboard - You can add or delete rows or columns in tables as well as split or merge table cells using the keyboard. + You can add or delete rows or columns in tables as well as split or merge table cells using the keyboard. - To insert a new row in a table, place the cursor in a table cell, press Option + To insert a new row in a table, place the cursor in a table cell, press Option Alt+Insert, and then press the up or down arrow key. You can also move the cursor to the last cell in the table, and then press Tab. - To insert a new column, place the cursor in a table cell, press Option + To insert a new column, place the cursor in a table cell, press Option Alt+Insert, and then press the left or right arrow key. - To split a table cell instead of adding a column, press Option + To split a table cell instead of adding a column, press Option Alt+Insert, and then hold down Command Ctrl while you press the left or right arrow key. - To delete a row, place the cursor in a table cell, press Option + To delete a row, place the cursor in a table cell, press Option Alt+Delete, and then press the up or down arrow key. - To delete a column, place the cursor in a table cell, press Option + To delete a column, place the cursor in a table cell, press Option Alt+Delete, and then press the left or the right arrow key. - To merge a table into an adjacent cell, place the cursor in the cell, press Option + To merge a table into an adjacent cell, place the cursor in the cell, press Option Alt+Delete, hold down Command Ctrl, and then press the left or the right arrow key. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp index bdbbd2bcd8..412f0595b8 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp @@ -30,15 +30,15 @@ deleting; tables or table contents tables; deleting -Deleting Tables or the Contents of a Table +Deleting Tables or the Contents of a Table - You can delete a table from your document, or delete the contents of the table. + You can delete a table from your document, or delete the contents of the table. - To delete a whole table, click in the table, and then choose Table - Delete - Table. + To delete a whole table, click in the table, and then choose Table - Delete - Table. - To delete the contents of a table, click in the table, press Command + To delete the contents of a table, click in the table, press Command Ctrl+A UFI: Ctrl+A once is not enoughuntil all cells are selected, and then press Delete or Backspace. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp index b996cdd362..55dc9c8541 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp @@ -35,54 +35,50 @@ tables in spreadsheets;inserting in text spreadsheets;inserting tables from mw changed "cell ranges;" to "cells;" -Inserting Tables +Inserting Tables - There are several ways to create a table in a text document. You can insert a table from a toolbar, through a menu command, or from a spreadsheet. UFI: from a database? - To Insert a Table From a Toolbar + There are several ways to create a table in a text document. You can insert a table from a toolbar, through a menu command, or from a spreadsheet. UFI: from a database? + To Insert a Table From a Toolbar - Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the table. + Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the table. - On the Standard or the Insert bar, click the arrow next to the Table icon. + On the Standard or the Insert bar, click the arrow next to the Table icon. - In the table grid, drag to select the numbers of rows and columns that you want, and then release. + In the table grid, drag to select the numbers of rows and columns that you want, and then release. - To cancel, drag to the other side until Cancel appears in the preview area of the grid.make it RTL compliant - To Insert a Table With a Menu Command + To cancel, drag to the other side until Cancel appears in the preview area of the grid.make it RTL compliant + To Insert a Table With a Menu Command - Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the table. + Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the table. - Choose Table - Insert - Table. + Choose Table - Insert - Table. - In the Size area, enter the number of rows and columns. + In the Size area, enter the number of rows and columns. - Select the options that you want, click OK. + Select the options that you want, click OK. - To Insert a Table From a Calc Spreadsheet + To Insert a Table From a Calc Spreadsheet - Open the $[officename] Calc spreadsheet containing the cell range that you want to insert. + Open the $[officename] Calc spreadsheet containing the cell range that you want to insert. - In the spreadsheet, drag to select the cells. + In the spreadsheet, drag to select the cells. - Choose Edit - Copy. + Choose Edit - Copy. - In your text document, do one of the following: + In your text document, do one of the following: @@ -90,10 +86,10 @@ -Choose Edit - Paste. The cell range is pasted as an OLE object. To edit the contents of the cells, double-click the object. +Choose Edit - Paste. The cell range is pasted as an OLE object. To edit the contents of the cells, double-click the object. -Choose Edit - Paste Special, and choose from the following options: +Choose Edit - Paste Special, and choose from the following options: @@ -102,87 +98,86 @@ - Options + Options - Is inserted as... + Is inserted as... - $[officename] $[officeversion] Spreadsheet + $[officename] $[officeversion] Spreadsheet - OLE object - as with Command + OLE object - as with Command Ctrl+V or drag-and-drop - GDIMetaFile + GDIMetaFile - Graphic + Graphic - Bitmap + Bitmap - Graphic + Graphic - HTML + HTML - HTML table + HTML table - Unformatted text + Unformatted text - Text only, tab stops as separators + Text only, tab stops as separators - Formatted text [RTF] + Formatted text [RTF] - Text table + Text table - DDE link (only under Windows) + DDE link (only under Windows) - Table structure and contents, without formatting. With updating + Table structure and contents, without formatting. With updating
- Drag-and-Drop a Cell Range From a Calc Spreadsheet + Drag-and-Drop a Cell Range From a Calc Spreadsheet - Open the $[officename] Calc spreadsheet containing the cell range that you want to insert. + Open the $[officename] Calc spreadsheet containing the cell range that you want to insert. - In the spreadsheet, drag to select the cells. + In the spreadsheet, drag to select the cells. - Click and hold the mouse button in the selected cells. + Click and hold the mouse button in the selected cells. - Drag the selected cells into the text document. + Drag the selected cells into the text document. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/table_select.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/table_select.xhp index 78499385b5..22b36b9f89 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/table_select.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/table_select.xhp @@ -35,18 +35,18 @@ columns;selecting rows;selecting -Selecting Tables, Rows, and Columns +Selecting Tables, Rows, and Columns -You can select a table in a text document with a keyboard or with a mouse. +You can select a table in a text document with a keyboard or with a mouse. -To select a table with the keyboard, move the cursor into the table, and then press CommandCtrl+A until all the cells are selected. +To select a table with the keyboard, move the cursor into the table, and then press CommandCtrl+A until all the cells are selected. -To select a table with the mouse, move the mouse pointer to a position just above and left of the table. The mouse pointer becomes a diagonal arrow. Click to select the table. +To select a table with the mouse, move the mouse pointer to a position just above and left of the table. The mouse pointer becomes a diagonal arrow. Click to select the table. -To select a row or column with the mouse, point to a position just left of the row or above the column. The mouse pointer becomes an arrow. Click to select the row or column. +To select a row or column with the mouse, point to a position just left of the row or above the column. The mouse pointer becomes an arrow. Click to select the row or column.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp index f442fab554..84b639066a 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp @@ -34,19 +34,19 @@ keyboard;modifying the behavior of rows/columns behavior of rows/columns -Modifying Rows and Columns by Keyboard - When you insert or delete cells, rows or columns in a table, the Behavior of rows/columns options determine how the neighboring elements are affected. For example, you can only insert new rows and columns into a table with fixed row and column dimensions if space permits. - Note that these properties are valid only for changes to the column width that are made using the keyboard. Using the mouse, you are free to make any column width changes.UFI: fixes bugtraq 4971582 - To set the Behavior of rows/columns options for tables in text documents, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table. There are three display modes for tables: +Modifying Rows and Columns by Keyboard + When you insert or delete cells, rows or columns in a table, the Behavior of rows/columns options determine how the neighboring elements are affected. For example, you can only insert new rows and columns into a table with fixed row and column dimensions if space permits. + Note that these properties are valid only for changes to the column width that are made using the keyboard. Using the mouse, you are free to make any column width changes.UFI: fixes bugtraq 4971582 + To set the Behavior of rows/columns options for tables in text documents, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table. There are three display modes for tables: - Fixed - changes only affect the adjacent cell, and not the entire table. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cell becomes narrower, but the width of the table remains constant. + Fixed - changes only affect the adjacent cell, and not the entire table. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cell becomes narrower, but the width of the table remains constant. - Fixed, proportional - changes affect the entire table, and wide cells shrink more than narrow cells. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cells become proportionally narrower, but the width of the table remains constant. + Fixed, proportional - changes affect the entire table, and wide cells shrink more than narrow cells. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cells become proportionally narrower, but the width of the table remains constant. - Variable - changes affect the table size. For example, when you widen a cell, the width of the table increases. + Variable - changes affect the table size. For example, when you widen a cell, the width of the table increases. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp index 7ec811314a..4b281cf8cd 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp @@ -32,35 +32,34 @@ templates; default templates text documents;default templates mw changed "text;" to "text documents;"mw changed "default templates;" -Changing the Default Template +Changing the Default Template - The default template contains the default formatting information for new text documents. If you want, you can create a new template and use it as the default template. - To Create a Default Template + The default template contains the default formatting information for new text documents. If you want, you can create a new template and use it as the default template. + To Create a Default Template - Create a document and the content and formatting styles that you want. + Create a document and the content and formatting styles that you want. - Choose File - Templates - Save As Template. + Choose File - Templates - Save As Template. - In the New Template box, type a name for the new template. + In the New Template box, type a name for the new template. - In the dialog that appears, double-click the "My Templates" folder, and then click Save. You will then be prompted for a name; write it and click OK. + In the dialog that appears, double-click the "My Templates" folder, and then click Save. You will then be prompted for a name; write it and click OK. - Choose File - New - Templates. + Choose File - New - Templates. - Double-click the "My Templates" folder. + Double-click the "My Templates" folder. - Click on the template that you created, and click Set as Default. + Click on the template that you created, and click Set as Default. - Close the dialog. + Close the dialog. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp index 73bd6dafe8..12c0c0112e 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp @@ -32,12 +32,11 @@ organizing; templates (guide) templates; organizing (guide) -Templates and Styles +Templates and Styles - A template is a document that contains specific formatting styles, graphics, tables, objects, and other information. A template is used as the basis for creating other documents. For example, you can define paragraph and character styles in a document, save the document as a template, and then use the template to create a new document with the same styles. - Unless you specify otherwise, every new $[officename] text document is based on the default template. - $[officename] has a number of predefined templates that you can use to create different types or text documents, such as business letters. + A template is a document that contains specific formatting styles, graphics, tables, objects, and other information. A template is used as the basis for creating other documents. For example, you can define paragraph and character styles in a document, save the document as a template, and then use the template to create a new document with the same styles. + Unless you specify otherwise, every new $[officename] text document is based on the default template. + $[officename] has a number of predefined templates that you can use to create different types or text documents, such as business letters. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp index 353663e0aa..3be525c3ce 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp @@ -36,31 +36,30 @@ initial capitals in titles small capitals (guide) MW added "small capitals" -Changing the Case of Text +Changing the Case of Text - You can change the case of text, format text with small capitals, or capitalize the first letter of each word in a selection. + You can change the case of text, format text with small capitals, or capitalize the first letter of each word in a selection. When you apply formatting to your text by Format - Character, the text stays the same, it is only displayed in another way. On the other hand, when you choose Format - Text or Format - Text - Change Case, the text is permanently changed. - To Capitalize Text + To Capitalize Text - Select the text that you want to capitalize. + Select the text that you want to capitalize. - Do one of the following: + Do one of the following: Choose Format - Text - Uppercase. - Choose Format - Character, click the Font Effects tab, then select the type of capitalization in the Effects box. "Capitals" capitalizes all letters. "Title" capitalizes the first letter of each word. "Small capitals" capitalizes all letters, but in a reduced font size. + Choose Format - Character, click the Font Effects tab, then select the type of capitalization in the Effects box. "Capitals" capitalizes all letters. "Title" capitalizes the first letter of each word. "Small capitals" capitalizes all letters, but in a reduced font size. - To Change Text to Lowercase + To Change Text to Lowercase - Select the text that you want to change to lowercase. + Select the text that you want to change to lowercase. - Do one of the following: + Do one of the following: Choose Format - Text - Lowercase. - Choose Format - Character, click the Font Effects tab, then select "Lowercase" in the Effects box. + Choose Format - Character, click the Font Effects tab, then select "Lowercase" in the Effects box. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp index 20186f4720..8d4f5f4b26 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp @@ -34,28 +34,28 @@ cursor;direct cursor settings;direct cursor -Using the Direct Cursor - The direct cursor allows you to enter text anywhere on a page. - To set the behavior of the direct cursor, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids. +Using the Direct Cursor + The direct cursor allows you to enter text anywhere on a page. + To set the behavior of the direct cursor, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids. - On the Tools bar, click the Direct Cursor icon + On the Tools bar, click the Direct Cursor icon Icon. - Click in a free space in the text document. The mouse pointer changes to reflect the alignment that will be applied to the text that you type: - + Click in a free space in the text document. The mouse pointer changes to reflect the alignment that will be applied to the text that you type: + Icon Align left - + Icon Centered - + Icon Align right - Type your text. %PRODUCTNAME automatically inserts the required number of blank lines, and, if the options are enabled, tabs and spaces. + Type your text. %PRODUCTNAME automatically inserts the required number of blank lines, and, if the options are enabled, tabs and spaces. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp index 110aee3f21..755085ebee 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp @@ -30,25 +30,24 @@ text; emphasizing emphasizing text -Emphasizing Text +Emphasizing Text - Here are a few examples of how to emphasize text in a document: + Here are a few examples of how to emphasize text in a document: - Select the text and apply a different font style or effect, such as bold. + Select the text and apply a different font style or effect, such as bold. - Right-click in a paragraph, choose Paragraph, set the options that you want, for example, the background color, and then click OK. + Right-click in a paragraph, choose Paragraph, set the options that you want, for example, the background color, and then click OK. - Select the text, and then choose Insert - Frame. + Select the text, and then choose Insert - Frame. - Use the Text tool on the Drawing toolbar. + Use the Text tool on the Drawing toolbar. - Use Fontwork. To open the Fontwork window, click the Fontwork Gallery icon on the Drawing bar. + Use Fontwork. To open the Fontwork window, click the Fontwork Gallery icon on the Drawing bar. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp index 2501bdd20b..0f31bb3e4e 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp @@ -37,83 +37,79 @@ frames; linking printing;hiding text frames from printing mw deleted "text;" and changed "printing;" -Inserting, Editing, and Linking Text Frames +Inserting, Editing, and Linking Text Frames - A text frame is a container for text and graphics that you can place anywhere on a page. You can also use a frame to apply a column layout to text. - To Insert a Text Frame + A text frame is a container for text and graphics that you can place anywhere on a page. You can also use a frame to apply a column layout to text. + To Insert a Text Frame - Select the text that you want to include in the frame. + Select the text that you want to include in the frame. - Choose Insert - Frame, and click OK. + Choose Insert - Frame, and click OK. - To Edit a Text Frame + To Edit a Text Frame - To edit the contents of a text frame, click in the frame, and make the changes that you want. + To edit the contents of a text frame, click in the frame, and make the changes that you want. - To edit a frame, select the frame, right-click, and then choose a formatting option. You can also right-click the selected frame, and choose Frame. + To edit a frame, select the frame, right-click, and then choose a formatting option. You can also right-click the selected frame, and choose Frame. - To resize a text frame, click an edge of the frame, and drag one of the edges or corners of the frame. Hold down Shift while you drag to maintain the proportion of the frame. + To resize a text frame, click an edge of the frame, and drag one of the edges or corners of the frame. Hold down Shift while you drag to maintain the proportion of the frame. - To Hide Text From Printing - Any Writer text frame can be set to a mode which allows viewing the text on screen, but hides the text from printing. + To Hide Text From Printing + Any Writer text frame can be set to a mode which allows viewing the text on screen, but hides the text from printing. - Select the text frame (you see the eight handles). + Select the text frame (you see the eight handles). Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Options. - In the Properties area, unmark the Print check box and click OK. + In the Properties area, unmark the Print check box and click OK. - To Link Text Frames - You can link Writer text frames so that their contents automatically flow from one frame to another. + To Link Text Frames + You can link Writer text frames so that their contents automatically flow from one frame to another. - Click the edge of a frame that you want to link. Selection handles appear on the edges of the frame. + Click the edge of a frame that you want to link. Selection handles appear on the edges of the frame. - On the Frame Bar, click the Link Frames icon + On the Frame Bar, click the Link Frames icon Icon . - Click the frame that you want to link to. + Click the frame that you want to link to. - You can only link frames if: + You can only link frames if: - The target frame is empty. + The target frame is empty. - The target frame is not linked to another frame. + The target frame is not linked to another frame. - The source and the target frames are in the same section. For example, you cannot link a header frame to a footer frame. + The source and the target frames are in the same section. For example, you cannot link a header frame to a footer frame. - The source frame does not have a next link. + The source frame does not have a next link. - The target or the source frame are not contained in each other. + The target or the source frame are not contained in each other. - When you select a linked frame, a line is displayed that connects the linked frames. - The AutoSize feature is available only for the last frame in a chain of linked frames.UFI: removed -id="par_id3147542" l10n="U" oldref="72"You can only change the height of the last frame in a series of linked frames. + When you select a linked frame, a line is displayed that connects the linked frames. + The AutoSize feature is available only for the last frame in a chain of linked frames.UFI: removed +id="par_id3147542" You can only change the height of the last frame in a series of linked frames. Obviously this works now
@@ -122,4 +118,4 @@ Obviously this works now
- \ No newline at end of file + diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp index bf42b2cc76..bc185831e2 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp @@ -32,121 +32,120 @@ selecting;text, with keyboard keyboard; navigating and selecting in text -Navigating and Selecting With the Keyboard +Navigating and Selecting With the Keyboard - You can navigate through a document and make selections with the keyboard. + You can navigate through a document and make selections with the keyboard. - To move the cursor, press the key or key combination given in the following table. + To move the cursor, press the key or key combination given in the following table. - To select the characters under the moving cursor, additionally hold down the Shift key when you move the cursor. + To select the characters under the moving cursor, additionally hold down the Shift key when you move the cursor. - Key + Key - Function + Function - + +Command key Ctrl key - Right, left arrow keys + Right, left arrow keys - Moves the cursor one character to the left or to the right. + Moves the cursor one character to the left or to the right. - Moves the cursor one word to the left or to the right. + Moves the cursor one word to the left or to the right. - Up, down arrow keys + Up, down arrow keys - Moves the cursor up or down one line. + Moves the cursor up or down one line. - (Command+Option + (Command+Option Ctrl+Alt) Moves the current paragraph up or down. - Home + Home - Moves the cursor to the beginning of the current line. + Moves the cursor to the beginning of the current line. - Moves the cursor to the beginning of the document. + Moves the cursor to the beginning of the document. - Home - In a table + Home + In a table - Moves the cursor to the beginning of the contents in the current cell. + Moves the cursor to the beginning of the contents in the current cell. - Moves the cursor to the beginning of the contents of the current cell. Press again to move the cursor to the first cell in the table. Press again to move the cursor to the beginning of the document. + Moves the cursor to the beginning of the contents of the current cell. Press again to move the cursor to the first cell in the table. Press again to move the cursor to the beginning of the document. - End + End - Moves the cursor to the end of the current line. + Moves the cursor to the end of the current line. - Moves the cursor to the end of the document + Moves the cursor to the end of the document - End - In a table + End + In a table - Moves to the end of the contents in the current cell. + Moves to the end of the contents in the current cell. - Moves the cursor to the end of the contents of the current cell. Press again to move the cursor to the last cell in the table. Press again to move the cursor to the end of the document. + Moves the cursor to the end of the contents of the current cell. Press again to move the cursor to the last cell in the table. Press again to move the cursor to the end of the document. - PgUp + PgUp - Scrolls up one page. + Scrolls up one page. - Moves the cursor to the header. + Moves the cursor to the header. - PgDn + PgDn - Scroll down one page. + Scroll down one page. - Moves the cursor to the footer. + Moves the cursor to the footer.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp index a2dd0b1273..017a10298d 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp @@ -32,47 +32,45 @@ links;inserting text documents as inserting;text documents mw deleted "text;" -Inserting an Entire Text Document +Inserting an Entire Text Document - To Insert a Text File + To Insert a Text File - Place the cursor in the document where you want to insert the file. + Place the cursor in the document where you want to insert the file. - Choose Insert - File. + Choose Insert - File. - Locate the text document that you want to insert, and then click OK. + Locate the text document that you want to insert, and then click OK. - The contents of the text document are embedded into the current document and are not updated if the source file is changed. If you want the contents to automatically update when you change the source document, insert the file as a link. - To Insert an Entire Text Document as a Link + The contents of the text document are embedded into the current document and are not updated if the source file is changed. If you want the contents to automatically update when you change the source document, insert the file as a link. + To Insert an Entire Text Document as a Link - Place the cursor in the document where you want to insert the file. + Place the cursor in the document where you want to insert the file. - Choose Insert - Section. + Choose Insert - Section. - Type a name in the New Section box, and then select the Link check box. + Type a name in the New Section box, and then select the Link check box. In the File Name box, type the name of the file that you want to insert, or click the Browse button and locate the file. - If the target text document contains sections, you can select the section that you want to insert in the + If the target text document contains sections, you can select the section that you want to insert in the Sections box. - If you want, set the formatting options for the section. + If you want, set the formatting options for the section. - Click Insert. + Click Insert. - $[officename] automatically updates the contents of the inserted section whenever the source document is changed. To manually update the contents of the section, choose Tools - Update - Update All. + $[officename] automatically updates the contents of the inserted section whenever the source document is changed. To manually update the contents of the section, choose Tools - Update - Update All. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp index 23dd29b79a..cae402722f 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp @@ -32,68 +32,62 @@ automatic hyphenation in text manual hyphenation in text mw transferred 2 entries to hyphen_prevent.xhp -Hyphenation +Hyphenation - By default, $[officename] moves words that do not fit on a line to the next line. If you want, you can use automatic or manual hyphenation to avoid this behavior: - Automatic Hyphenation - Automatic hyphenation inserts hyphens where they are needed in a paragraph. This option is only available for paragraph styles and individual paragraphs. - To Automatically Hyphenate Text in a Paragraph + By default, $[officename] moves words that do not fit on a line to the next line. If you want, you can use automatic or manual hyphenation to avoid this behavior: + Automatic Hyphenation + Automatic hyphenation inserts hyphens where they are needed in a paragraph. This option is only available for paragraph styles and individual paragraphs. + To Automatically Hyphenate Text in a Paragraph - Right-click in a paragraph, and choose Paragraph. + Right-click in a paragraph, and choose Paragraph. - Click the Text Flow tab. + Click the Text Flow tab. - In the Hyphenation area, select the Automatically check box. + In the Hyphenation area, select the Automatically check box. - Click OK. + Click OK. - To Automatically Hyphenate Text in Multiple Paragraphs - If you want to automatically hyphenate more than one paragraph, use a paragraph style. - For example, enable the automatic hyphenation option for the "Default" paragraph style, and then apply the style to the paragraphs that you want to hyphenate. + To Automatically Hyphenate Text in Multiple Paragraphs + If you want to automatically hyphenate more than one paragraph, use a paragraph style. + For example, enable the automatic hyphenation option for the "Default" paragraph style, and then apply the style to the paragraphs that you want to hyphenate. Choose View - Styles and Formatting, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. - Right-click the paragraph style that you want to hyphenate, and then choose Modify. + Right-click the paragraph style that you want to hyphenate, and then choose Modify. - Click the Text Flow tab. + Click the Text Flow tab. - In the Hyphenation area, select the Automatically check box. + In the Hyphenation area, select the Automatically check box. - Click OK. + Click OK. - Apply the style to the paragraphs that you want to hyphenate. + Apply the style to the paragraphs that you want to hyphenate. - Manual Hyphenation - You can insert a hyphen where you want on a line, or let $[officename] search for the words to hyphenate, and then offer a suggested hyphenation. - To Manually Hyphenate Single Words - To quickly insert a hyphen, click in the word where you want to add the hyphen, and then press Command + Manual Hyphenation + You can insert a hyphen where you want on a line, or let $[officename] search for the words to hyphenate, and then offer a suggested hyphenation. + To Manually Hyphenate Single Words + To quickly insert a hyphen, click in the word where you want to add the hyphen, and then press Command Ctrl+Hyphen(-). - If you insert a manual hyphen in a word, the word is only hyphenated at the manual hyphen. No additional automatic hyphenation is applied for this word. A word with a manual hyphen will be hyphenated without regard to the settings on the Text Flow tab page. - To Manually Hyphenate Text in a Selection + If you insert a manual hyphen in a word, the word is only hyphenated at the manual hyphen. No additional automatic hyphenation is applied for this word. A word with a manual hyphen will be hyphenated without regard to the settings on the Text Flow tab page. + To Manually Hyphenate Text in a Selection - Select the text that you want to hyphenate. + Select the text that you want to hyphenate. - Choose Tools - Language - Hyphenation. + Choose Tools - Language - Hyphenation. @@ -101,6 +95,6 @@ - Text Flow + Text Flow diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp index 36c686fceb..6577c4f9f3 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp @@ -33,27 +33,25 @@ formatting;numbered lists inserting;numbering MW changed "adding;" to "inserting;" -Adding Numbering +Adding Numbering - To Add Numbering to a List + To Add Numbering to a List - Select the paragraph(s) that you want to add numbering to. + Select the paragraph(s) that you want to add numbering to. - On the Formatting Bar, click the Numbering On/Off icon + On the Formatting Bar, click the Numbering On/Off icon Icon . - To change the formatting and the hierarchy of a numbered list, click in the list, and then open the Bullets and Numbering toolbar. + To change the formatting and the hierarchy of a numbered list, click in the list, and then open the Bullets and Numbering toolbar. - To remove numbering, select the numbered paragraphs, and then click the Numbering On/Off icon on the Formatting Bar. - To Format a Numbered List - To change the formatting of a numbered list, click in the list, then choose Format - Bullets and Numbering. + To remove numbering, select the numbered paragraphs, and then click the Numbering On/Off icon on the Formatting Bar. + To Format a Numbered List + To change the formatting of a numbered list, click in the list, then choose Format - Bullets and Numbering.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp index 1e0bf0527e..71e5783431 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp @@ -31,52 +31,50 @@ manual numbering in text paragraph styles;numbering MW deleted "applying;" -Numbering and Numbering Styles +Numbering and Numbering Styles - You can apply numbering to a paragraph manually or with a paragraph style. - To Apply Numbering Manually - To apply numbering manually, click in the paragraph, and then click the Numbering On/Off icon on the Formatting Bar. - You cannot apply manual numbering to paragraphs that are listed under "Special Styles" in the Styles and Formatting window. + You can apply numbering to a paragraph manually or with a paragraph style. + To Apply Numbering Manually + To apply numbering manually, click in the paragraph, and then click the Numbering On/Off icon on the Formatting Bar. + You cannot apply manual numbering to paragraphs that are listed under "Special Styles" in the Styles and Formatting window. - UFI: the following paras moved here from text\shared\01\06050000.xhpWhen you press Enter in a numbered or bulleted list, %PRODUCTNAME automatically numbers the next paragraph. To remove the numbering or bullet from the new paragraph, press Enter again. + UFI: the following paras moved here from text\shared\01\06050000.xhpWhen you press Enter in a numbered or bulleted list, %PRODUCTNAME automatically numbers the next paragraph. To remove the numbering or bullet from the new paragraph, press Enter again. - To change the hierarchical level of a bullet in a list, click in front of the paragraph, then press the Tab key. + To change the hierarchical level of a bullet in a list, click in front of the paragraph, then press the Tab key. - To change the bullets or numbering format for the current paragraph only, select a character or word in the paragraph, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click a new format. + To change the bullets or numbering format for the current paragraph only, select a character or word in the paragraph, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click a new format. - To change the bullet or numbering format for all paragraphs in the list, ensure that the cursor is in the list, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click a new format. + To change the bullet or numbering format for all paragraphs in the list, ensure that the cursor is in the list, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click a new format. - To apply the same bullet or numbering format to all paragraphs in the list, select all paragraphs, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click a format. + To apply the same bullet or numbering format to all paragraphs in the list, select all paragraphs, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click a format. - You can also use the commands on the Bullets and Numbering toolbar to edit a numbered or bulleted list. To change the numbering or bullet format, click the Bullets and Numbering icon. - To Apply Numbering With a Paragraph Style - Paragraph Styles give you greater control over numbering that you apply in a document. When you change the numbering format of the style, all paragraphs using the style are automatically updated. + You can also use the commands on the Bullets and Numbering toolbar to edit a numbered or bulleted list. To change the numbering or bullet format, click the Bullets and Numbering icon. + To Apply Numbering With a Paragraph Style + Paragraph Styles give you greater control over numbering that you apply in a document. When you change the numbering format of the style, all paragraphs using the style are automatically updated. Choose View - Styles and Formatting, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. - Right-click the paragraph style that you want to apply numbering to, and then choose Modify. + Right-click the paragraph style that you want to apply numbering to, and then choose Modify. - Click the Outline & Numbering tab. + Click the Outline & Numbering tab. - In the Numbering Style box, select the type of numbering that you want to use. + In the Numbering Style box, select the type of numbering that you want to use. - Click OK. + Click OK. - Apply the style to the paragraphs that you want to add numbering to. + Apply the style to the paragraphs that you want to add numbering to. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp index 1c7b9e7b08..050c9646e2 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp @@ -35,37 +35,26 @@ synonyms in thesaurus searching;synonyms -Thesaurus +Thesaurus - You can use the thesaurus to look up synonyms or related terms. - + You can use the thesaurus to look up synonyms or related terms. - Click in the word that you want to look up or replace. - + Click in the word that you want to look up or replace. - Choose Tools - Language - Thesaurus, or press Command -Ctrl+F7. + Choose Tools - Language - Thesaurus, or press CommandCtrl+F7. - In the Alternatives list, click an entry to copy that related term to the "Replace with" text box. - + In the Alternatives list, click an entry to copy that related term to the "Replace with" text box. - Optionally double-click an entry to look up related terms for that entry. On your keyboard, you can also press the arrow up or down keys to select an entry. Then press Return to replace, or press the spacebar to look up. - + Optionally double-click an entry to look up related terms for that entry. On your keyboard, you can also press the arrow up or down keys to select an entry. Then press Return to replace, or press the spacebar to look up. - Click Replace. - + Click Replace. - Initially, the thesaurus uses the language of the selected word in the document, if a thesaurus library for that language is installed. The title bar of the Thesaurus dialog displays the language in use. - To look up the word in a different language, click the Language button, and select one of the installed thesaurus languages. A thesaurus library may not be available for all installed languages. You can install languages with a thesaurus library from the Extensions web page. -If a thesaurus library is installed for the language of a word, the context menu of the word shows a Synonyms submenu. Select any of the terms from the submenu to replace the word. - + Initially, the thesaurus uses the language of the selected word in the document, if a thesaurus library for that language is installed. The title bar of the Thesaurus dialog displays the language in use. To look up the word in a different language, click the Language button, and select one of the installed thesaurus languages. A thesaurus library may not be available for all installed languages. You can install languages with a thesaurus library from the Extensions web page.If a thesaurus library is installed for the language of a word, the context menu of the word shows a Synonyms submenu. Select any of the terms from the submenu to replace the word. - Thesaurus - + Thesaurus diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp index 272dba3b00..6d702541b6 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp @@ -37,32 +37,32 @@ refusing word completions rejecting word completions mw made a two level entry of "switching off..." and "word completion", copied two entries to word_completion_adjust.xhp and added a new entry -Word Completion for Text Documents +Word Completion for Text Documents - $[officename] collects words that you frequently use in the current session. When you later type the first three letters of a collected word, $[officename] automatically completes the word. - If there is more than one word in the AutoCorrect memory that matches the three letters that you type, press Command + $[officename] collects words that you frequently use in the current session. When you later type the first three letters of a collected word, $[officename] automatically completes the word. + If there is more than one word in the AutoCorrect memory that matches the three letters that you type, press Command Ctrl+Tab to cycle through the available words. To cycle in the opposite direction, press Command Ctrl+Shift+Tab. - To Accept/Reject a Word Completion + To Accept/Reject a Word Completion - By default, you accept the word completion by pressing the Enter key. + By default, you accept the word completion by pressing the Enter key. - To reject the word completion, continue typing with any other key. + To reject the word completion, continue typing with any other key. - To Switch off the Word Completion + To Switch off the Word Completion Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Word Completion. - Clear Enable word completion . + Clear Enable word completion .
- Fine-Tuning the Word Completion + Fine-Tuning the Word Completion
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp index 12949a8f5f..7982964864 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp @@ -34,42 +34,42 @@ weekdays; automatically completing months; automatically completing mw copied two entries from word_completion.xhp and created three new entries -Fine-Tuning the Word Completion for Text Documents +Fine-Tuning the Word Completion for Text Documents MW created this guide by splitting word_completion.xhp -If you like it that $[officename] automatically completes the words that you frequently use, you can make further adjustments to refine that behavior. If you want, you can also save the current list of collected words so that it can be used in the next session. - To fine-tune the word completion choose Tools – AutoCorrect Options - Word Completion and select any of the following options: - To Insert an Additional Space Character - Select Append space. - The space character is appended after you type the first character of the next word after the auto-completed word. The space character is suppressed if the next character is a delimiter, such as a full stop or a new line character. - To Define the Accept Key - Choose the key to accept the suggested word using the Accept with list box. - To Select the Minimum Number of Characters - Use the Min. word length box to set the minimum number of characters a word must have to be collected into the list. - To Select the Scope of Collected Words - Disable the option When closing a document, remove the words collected from it from the list. - Now the list is also valid for other documents that you open. When you close the last %PRODUCTNAME document, the word list is deleted. - If you enable the checkbox, the list is only valid as long as the current document is open. - If you want the word list to exist longer than the current %PRODUCTNAME session, save it as a document, as described in the following section. - To Use the Word List for Further Sessions - If the automatic spellcheck option is enabled, only the words that are recognized by the spellcheck are collected. - Use the word list to always start with a defined set of technical terms for the word completion feature. +If you like it that $[officename] automatically completes the words that you frequently use, you can make further adjustments to refine that behavior. If you want, you can also save the current list of collected words so that it can be used in the next session. + To fine-tune the word completion choose Tools – AutoCorrect Options - Word Completion and select any of the following options: + To Insert an Additional Space Character + Select Append space. + The space character is appended after you type the first character of the next word after the auto-completed word. The space character is suppressed if the next character is a delimiter, such as a full stop or a new line character. + To Define the Accept Key + Choose the key to accept the suggested word using the Accept with list box. + To Select the Minimum Number of Characters + Use the Min. word length box to set the minimum number of characters a word must have to be collected into the list. + To Select the Scope of Collected Words + Disable the option When closing a document, remove the words collected from it from the list. + Now the list is also valid for other documents that you open. When you close the last %PRODUCTNAME document, the word list is deleted. + If you enable the checkbox, the list is only valid as long as the current document is open. + If you want the word list to exist longer than the current %PRODUCTNAME session, save it as a document, as described in the following section. + To Use the Word List for Further Sessions + If the automatic spellcheck option is enabled, only the words that are recognized by the spellcheck are collected. + Use the word list to always start with a defined set of technical terms for the word completion feature. - Open the text document that contains the terms that you want to use for word completion. - The word completion feature collects the words. + Open the text document that contains the terms that you want to use for word completion. + The word completion feature collects the words. - Select all or some of the words in the list. + Select all or some of the words in the list. - Use Command + Use Command Ctrl+C to copy all selected words into the clipboard. Paste the clipboard into a new document and save it to get a reference list of collected words. - Later you can open the reference list and automatically collect the words, so that the word completion feature starts with a defined set of words. + Later you can open the reference list and automatically collect the words, so that the word completion feature starts with a defined set of words.
- Word Completion - Using Word Completion + Word Completion + Using Word Completion
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp index e643440cd4..e3d6b0346e 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp @@ -36,28 +36,28 @@ counting words word counts MW deleted "character counts" -Counting Words +Counting Words - Word and character count is shown in the status bar, and is kept up to date as you edit. + Word and character count is shown in the status bar, and is kept up to date as you edit. - If you want to count only some text of your document, select the text. + If you want to count only some text of your document, select the text. - To display extended statistics such as count of characters without spaces, double click the word count in the status bar, or choose Tools - Word Count. + To display extended statistics such as count of characters without spaces, double click the word count in the status bar, or choose Tools - Word Count.
- How does %PRODUCTNAME count words? - In general, every string of characters between two spaces is a word. Dashes, tabs, line breaks, and paragraph breaks are word limits, too. - Words with always visible hyphens, as in plug-in, add-on, user/config, are counted as one word each. - The words can be a mix of letters, numbers, and special characters. So the following text counts as four words: abc123 1.23 "$" http://www.example.com. - To add a custom character to be considered as the word limit, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General and add the character into the Additional separators field. + How does %PRODUCTNAME count words? + In general, every string of characters between two spaces is a word. Dashes, tabs, line breaks, and paragraph breaks are word limits, too. + Words with always visible hyphens, as in plug-in, add-on, user/config, are counted as one word each. + The words can be a mix of letters, numbers, and special characters. So the following text counts as four words: abc123 1.23 "$" http://www.example.com. + To add a custom character to be considered as the word limit, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General and add the character into the Additional separators field.
- To get some more statistics about the document, choose File - Properties - Statistics. + To get some more statistics about the document, choose File - Properties - Statistics. - File - Properties - Statistics + File - Properties - Statistics diff --git a/source/text/swriter/main0000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/main0000.xhp index 9b3b348001..d5f21323c1 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/main0000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/main0000.xhp @@ -32,17 +32,17 @@ -%PRODUCTNAME Writer Help -Working With %PRODUCTNAME Writer +%PRODUCTNAME Writer Help +Working With %PRODUCTNAME Writer -Menus, Toolbars, and Keys +Menus, Toolbars, and Keys -Getting Help +Getting Help diff --git a/source/text/swriter/main0100.xhp b/source/text/swriter/main0100.xhp index 63fa05cc61..4b0a0b15b4 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/main0100.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/main0100.xhp @@ -31,9 +31,9 @@ diff --git a/source/text/swriter/main0107.xhp b/source/text/swriter/main0107.xhp index 6ff24cb847..731f855614 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/main0107.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/main0107.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@
-Window - Contains commands for manipulating and displaying document windows. +Window + Contains commands for manipulating and displaying document windows.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/main0200.xhp b/source/text/swriter/main0200.xhp index 4ae5d136ad..c646f3c334 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/main0200.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/main0200.xhp @@ -28,9 +28,9 @@
-Toolbars +Toolbars -This section provides an overview of the toolbars available in $[officename] Writer. +This section provides an overview of the toolbars available in $[officename] Writer.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/main0202.xhp b/source/text/swriter/main0202.xhp index 79dcad45a6..b1df589e90 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/main0202.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/main0202.xhp @@ -29,9 +29,8 @@
-Formatting Bar - The Formatting bar contains several text formatting functions. +Formatting Bar + The Formatting bar contains several text formatting functions.
@@ -63,52 +62,49 @@ - Font Color + Font Color - Additional icons + Additional icons -Increase Font - Increases the font size of the selected text. +Increase Font + Increases the font size of the selected text. -Reduce Font - Reduces the font size of the selected text. - If CTL support is enabled, two additional icons are visible. +Reduce Font + Reduces the font size of the selected text. + If CTL support is enabled, two additional icons are visible. -Left-To-Right +Left-To-Right - + left to right icon - The text is entered from left to right. + The text is entered from left to right.
-Right-To-Left +Right-To-Left - + right to left icon - The text formatted in a complex text layout language is entered from right to left. + The text formatted in a complex text layout language is entered from right to left.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/main0204.xhp b/source/text/swriter/main0204.xhp index ff3775637e..e83add35b9 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/main0204.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/main0204.xhp @@ -29,8 +29,8 @@
-Table Bar -The Table Bar contains functions you need when working with tables. It appears when you move the cursor into a table. +Table Bar +The Table Bar contains functions you need when working with tables. It appears when you move the cursor into a table.
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ -Merge Cells +Merge Cells @@ -56,18 +56,18 @@ -Delete Row +Delete Row -Delete Column +Delete Column following only optional, ext.help is available: Select Table Select Column Select Row -AutoFormat +AutoFormat -Table Properties +Table Properties -Sort +Sort diff --git a/source/text/swriter/main0205.xhp b/source/text/swriter/main0205.xhp index 59b2f91b26..038e705bc2 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/main0205.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/main0205.xhp @@ -29,26 +29,26 @@
-Drawing Object Properties Bar -You can see the Drawing Object Properties bar in Writer and Calc. Select the menu View - Toolbars - Drawing Object Properties. The controls are enabled when a drawing object is selected. You see some different icons by default, whether the current document is a text document or a spreadsheet. +Drawing Object Properties Bar +You can see the Drawing Object Properties bar in Writer and Calc. Select the menu View - Toolbars - Drawing Object Properties. The controls are enabled when a drawing object is selected. You see some different icons by default, whether the current document is a text document or a spreadsheet.
-Line Style +Line Style -Line Width +Line Width -Line Color +Line Color -Area Style/Filling +Area Style/Filling diff --git a/source/text/swriter/main0206.xhp b/source/text/swriter/main0206.xhp index aa6d7d12c2..2cfdffa80b 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/main0206.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/main0206.xhp @@ -29,8 +29,8 @@
-Bullets and Numbering Bar -The Bullets and Numbering bar contains functions to modify the structure of numbered paragraphs, including changing the order of paragraphs and defining different paragraph levels. +Bullets and Numbering Bar +The Bullets and Numbering bar contains functions to modify the structure of numbered paragraphs, including changing the order of paragraphs and defining different paragraph levels.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/main0210.xhp b/source/text/swriter/main0210.xhp index 9e04bd3c43..141e0a4459 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/main0210.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/main0210.xhp @@ -30,8 +30,8 @@
-Print Preview -The Print Preview Bar appears when you view the current document in the print preview mode. +Print Preview +The Print Preview Bar appears when you view the current document in the print preview mode.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/main0213.xhp b/source/text/swriter/main0213.xhp index 3c020a8a32..8bda1bfaf7 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/main0213.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/main0213.xhp @@ -33,10 +33,10 @@
- Rulers - Rulers display the dimensions of the page, and the position of tabs, indents, borders and columns. You can modify all of these on the rulers using the mouse. + Rulers + Rulers display the dimensions of the page, and the position of tabs, indents, borders and columns. You can modify all of these on the rulers using the mouse.
- By double-clicking on the ruler, you can open the Paragraph dialog and assign direct paragraph formatting for the current paragraph or all selected paragraphs. + By double-clicking on the ruler, you can open the Paragraph dialog and assign direct paragraph formatting for the current paragraph or all selected paragraphs. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/main0214.xhp b/source/text/swriter/main0214.xhp index 586473f26c..f7784993bb 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/main0214.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/main0214.xhp @@ -33,9 +33,9 @@
-Formula Bar +Formula Bar -The Formula Bar allows you to create and insert calculations into a text document. To activate the Formula Bar, press F2. +The Formula Bar allows you to create and insert calculations into a text document. To activate the Formula Bar, press F2.
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/main0215.xhp b/source/text/swriter/main0215.xhp index a16ebaf940..05930a611a 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/main0215.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/main0215.xhp @@ -29,21 +29,21 @@
-Frame Bar -When a frame is selected, the Frame Bar provides the most important functions for formatting and positioning the frame. +Frame Bar +When a frame is selected, the Frame Bar provides the most important functions for formatting and positioning the frame.
-Wrap Off - +Wrap Off + You can also choose this setting on the Wrap tab page. -Wrap On - +Wrap On + This icon represents the Page Wrap option on the Wrap tab page. -Wrap Through - +Wrap Through + You can also define this setting on the Wrap tab page. @@ -64,10 +64,10 @@ -Background Color +Background Color -Frame Properties +Frame Properties diff --git a/source/text/swriter/main0216.xhp b/source/text/swriter/main0216.xhp index abd5dc9cd1..043b2a3ea1 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/main0216.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/main0216.xhp @@ -32,21 +32,21 @@
-OLE-Object Bar -The OLE-Object bar appears when objects are selected, and contains the most important functions for formatting and positioning objects. +OLE-Object Bar +The OLE-Object bar appears when objects are selected, and contains the most important functions for formatting and positioning objects.
-No Wrap - +No Wrap + You can also choose this setting on the Wrap tab page. -Wrap - +Wrap + This icon corresponds to the Page Wrap option on the Wrap tab page. -Wrap Through - +Wrap Through + You can also achieve the same effect through the Wrap tab page. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ -Object Properties +Object Properties diff --git a/source/text/swriter/main0220.xhp b/source/text/swriter/main0220.xhp index d075d23a70..cd4dedd15f 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/main0220.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/main0220.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@
-Text Object Bar -Contains formatting commands for text that is contained in a draw object. The Text Object bar appears when you double-click inside a draw object. +Text Object Bar +Contains formatting commands for text that is contained in a draw object. The Text Object bar appears when you double-click inside a draw object.
@@ -45,10 +45,10 @@ -Superscript +Superscript -Subscript +Subscript @@ -64,14 +64,14 @@ -Select All +Select All -Character +Character -Paragraph -Here you can define the indents, spacing, alignment and line spacing for the paragraph currently selected. +Paragraph +Here you can define the indents, spacing, alignment and line spacing for the paragraph currently selected. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/main0503.xhp b/source/text/swriter/main0503.xhp index c57e397ba0..e32fe8328c 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/main0503.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/main0503.xhp @@ -28,29 +28,29 @@
-$[officename] Writer Features +$[officename] Writer Features -$[officename] Writer lets you design and produce text documents that can include graphics, tables, or charts. You can then save the documents in a variety of formats, including the standardized OpenDocument format (ODF), Microsoft Word .doc format, or HTML. And you can easily export your document to the Portable Document Format (PDF). +$[officename] Writer lets you design and produce text documents that can include graphics, tables, or charts. You can then save the documents in a variety of formats, including the standardized OpenDocument format (ODF), Microsoft Word .doc format, or HTML. And you can easily export your document to the Portable Document Format (PDF).
-Writing -$[officename] Writer lets you create both basic documents, such as memos, faxes, letters , resumes and merge documents, as well as long and complex or multi-part documents, complete with bibliographies, reference tables and indexes. -$[officename] Writer also includes such useful features as a spellchecker, a thesaurus, AutoCorrect, and hyphenation as well as a variety of templates for almost every purpose. You can also create your own templates using the wizards. -Designing and Structuring -$[officename] offers a wide variety of options to design documents. Use the Styles and Formatting window to create, assign and modify styles for paragraphs, individual characters, frames and pages. In addition, the Navigator helps you to quickly move around inside your documents, lets you look at your document in an outline view, and keeps track of the objects that you have inserted into your document. -You can also create various indexes and tables in text documents. You can define the structure and appearance of the indexes and tables according to your individual needs. Live hyperlinks and bookmarks let you jump directly to the corresponding items in the text. -Desktop Publishing with $[officename] Writer -$[officename] Writer contains numerous desktop publishing and drawing tools to assist you in creating professionally styled documents, such as brochures, newsletters and invitations. You can format your documents with multi-column layouts, text frames, graphics, tables, and other objects. -Calculations -Text documents in $[officename] have an integrated calculation function that helps you execute sophisticated calculations or logical links. You can easily create a table in a text document in order to perform calculations. -Creating Drawings -The $[officename] Writer drawing tool lets you create drawings, graphics, legends, and other types of drawings directly in text documents. -Inserting Graphics -You can insert pictures with different formats into a text document, including graphics with a JPG or GIF format. In addition, the Gallery provides a collection of clipart graphics, and the Fontwork Gallery creates stunning font effects. -Flexible Application Interface -The program interface is designed so that you can configure it according to your preferences, including customizing icons and menus. You can position various program windows, such as the Styles and Formatting window or the Navigator as floating windows anywhere on the screen. You can also dock some windows to the edge of the workspace. -Drag&Drop -The drag-and-drop feature enables you to work quickly and efficiently with text documents in $[officename]. For example, you can drag-and-drop objects, such as graphics from the Gallery, from one location to another in the same document, or between open $[officename] documents. -Help Functions -You can use the Help system as a complete reference for $[officename] applications, including instructions for simple and complex tasks. +Writing +$[officename] Writer lets you create both basic documents, such as memos, faxes, letters , resumes and merge documents, as well as long and complex or multi-part documents, complete with bibliographies, reference tables and indexes. +$[officename] Writer also includes such useful features as a spellchecker, a thesaurus, AutoCorrect, and hyphenation as well as a variety of templates for almost every purpose. You can also create your own templates using the wizards. +Designing and Structuring +$[officename] offers a wide variety of options to design documents. Use the Styles and Formatting window to create, assign and modify styles for paragraphs, individual characters, frames and pages. In addition, the Navigator helps you to quickly move around inside your documents, lets you look at your document in an outline view, and keeps track of the objects that you have inserted into your document. +You can also create various indexes and tables in text documents. You can define the structure and appearance of the indexes and tables according to your individual needs. Live hyperlinks and bookmarks let you jump directly to the corresponding items in the text. +Desktop Publishing with $[officename] Writer +$[officename] Writer contains numerous desktop publishing and drawing tools to assist you in creating professionally styled documents, such as brochures, newsletters and invitations. You can format your documents with multi-column layouts, text frames, graphics, tables, and other objects. +Calculations +Text documents in $[officename] have an integrated calculation function that helps you execute sophisticated calculations or logical links. You can easily create a table in a text document in order to perform calculations. +Creating Drawings +The $[officename] Writer drawing tool lets you create drawings, graphics, legends, and other types of drawings directly in text documents. +Inserting Graphics +You can insert pictures with different formats into a text document, including graphics with a JPG or GIF format. In addition, the Gallery provides a collection of clipart graphics, and the Fontwork Gallery creates stunning font effects. +Flexible Application Interface +The program interface is designed so that you can configure it according to your preferences, including customizing icons and menus. You can position various program windows, such as the Styles and Formatting window or the Navigator as floating windows anywhere on the screen. You can also dock some windows to the edge of the workspace. +Drag&Drop +The drag-and-drop feature enables you to work quickly and efficiently with text documents in $[officename]. For example, you can drag-and-drop objects, such as graphics from the Gallery, from one location to another in the same document, or between open $[officename] documents. +Help Functions +You can use the Help system as a complete reference for $[officename] applications, including instructions for simple and complex tasks. -- cgit